Merge commit 'f6d56675f9f981c5464f0ca7a1fbb0162154e8c5'

1863 files changed, 422739 insertions, 64030 deletions

diff --git a/tmk_core/.gitmodules b/tmk_core/.gitmodules
index e21f44961..e69de29bb 100644
--- a/tmk_core/.gitmodules
+++ b/tmk_core/.gitmodules
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-[submodule "protocol/lufa/LUFA-git"]
-	path = protocol/lufa/LUFA-git
-	url = https://github.com/abcminiuser/lufa.git
-[submodule "protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0"]
-	path = protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0
-	url = https://github.com/felis/USB_Host_Shield_2.0.git
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa.mk b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa.mk
index 2575e89df..87386be99 100644
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa.mk
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa.mk
@@ -1,11 +1,7 @@
 LUFA_DIR = protocol/lufa
 
 # Path to the LUFA library
-ifeq (, $(wildcard $(TMK_DIR)/$(LUFA_DIR)/LUFA-git/LUFA/Version.h))
-    LUFA_PATH ?= $(LUFA_DIR)/LUFA-120730
-else
-    LUFA_PATH ?= $(LUFA_DIR)/LUFA-git
-endif
+LUFA_PATH ?= $(LUFA_DIR)/LUFA-git
 
 
 # Create the LUFA source path variables by including the LUFA makefile
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/HID_EEPROM_Loader/HID_EEPROM_Loader.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/HID_EEPROM_Loader/HID_EEPROM_Loader.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 600469fa1..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/HID_EEPROM_Loader/HID_EEPROM_Loader.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  Special application to extract an EEPROM image stored in FLASH memory, and

- *  copy it to the device EEPROM. This application is designed to be used with

- *  the HID build system module of LUFA to program the EEPROM of a target device

- *  that uses the HID bootloader protocol, which does not have native EEPROM

- *  programming support.

- */

-

-#include <avr/io.h>

-#include <avr/eeprom.h>

-#include <avr/pgmspace.h>

-

-/* References to the binary EEPROM data linked in the AVR's FLASH memory space */

-extern const char _binary_InputEEData_bin_start[];

-extern const char _binary_InputEEData_bin_end[];

-extern const char _binary_InputEEData_bin_size[];

-

-/* Friendly names for the embedded binary data stored in FLASH memory space */

-#define InputEEData       _binary_InputEEData_bin_start

-#define InputEEData_size  ((int)_binary_InputEEData_bin_size)

-

-int main(void)

-{

-	/* Copy out the embedded EEPROM data from FLASH to EEPROM memory space */

-	for (uint16_t i = 0; i < InputEEData_size; i++)

-	  eeprom_update_byte((uint8_t*)i, pgm_read_byte(&InputEEData[i]));

-

-	/* Infinite loop once complete */

-	for (;;);

-}

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/HID_EEPROM_Loader/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/HID_EEPROM_Loader/makefile
deleted file mode 100644
index f6dcbea67..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/HID_EEPROM_Loader/makefile
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-#

-#             LUFA Library

-#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-#

-#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-#           www.lufa-lib.org

-#

-# --------------------------------------

-#         LUFA Project Makefile.

-# --------------------------------------

-

-MCU          = at90usb1287

-ARCH         = AVR8

-F_CPU        = 1000000

-F_USB        = $(F_CPU)

-OPTIMIZATION = s

-TARGET       = HID_EEPROM_Loader

-SRC          = $(TARGET).c

-LUFA_PATH    = ../../../LUFA

-CC_FLAGS     = 

-LD_FLAGS     =

-OBJECT_FILES = InputEEData.o

-

-# Default target

-all:

-

-# Determine the AVR sub-architecture of the build main application object file

-FIND_AVR_SUBARCH = avr$(shell avr-objdump -f $(TARGET).o | grep architecture | cut -d':' -f3 | cut -d',' -f1)

-

-# Create a linkable object file with the input binary EEPROM data stored in the FLASH section

-InputEEData.o: InputEEData.bin $(TARGET).o $(MAKEFILE_LIST)

-	@echo $(MSG_OBJCPY_CMD) Converting \"$<\" to a object file \"$@\"

-	avr-objcopy -I binary -O elf32-avr -B $(call FIND_AVR_SUBARCH) --rename-section .data=.progmem.data,contents,alloc,readonly,data $< $@

-

-# Include LUFA build script makefiles

-include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk

-include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk

-include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk

-include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk

-include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
deleted file mode 100644
index 4e15e3997..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,101 +0,0 @@
-#

-#             LUFA Library

-#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-#

-#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-#           www.lufa-lib.org

-#

-

-LUFA_BUILD_MODULES         += ATPROGRAM

-LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS         += atprogram atprogram-ee

-LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS  += MCU TARGET

-LUFA_BUILD_OPTIONAL_VARS   += ATPROGRAM_PROGRAMMER ATPROGRAM_INTERFACE ATPROGRAM_PORT

-LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_VARS   += 

-LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_MACROS += 

-

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-#             LUFA ATPROGRAM Programmer Buildsystem Makefile Module.

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# DESCRIPTION:

-#   Provides a set of targets to re-program a device using the Atmel atprogram

-#   utility in AVR Studio 5.x and Atmel Studio 6.0 onwards.

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# TARGETS:

-#

-#    atprogram                 - Program target FLASH with application using

-#                                atprogram

-#    atprogram-ee              - Program target EEPROM with application data

-#                                using atprogram

-#

-# MANDATORY PARAMETERS:

-#

-#    MCU                       - Microcontroller device model name

-#    TARGET                    - Application name

-#

-# OPTIONAL PARAMETERS:

-#

-#    ATPROGRAM_PROGRAMMER      - Name of programming hardware to use

-#    ATPROGRAM_INTERFACE       - Name of programming interface to use

-#    ATPROGRAM_PORT            - Name of communication port to use

-#

-# PROVIDED VARIABLES:

-#

-#    (None)

-#

-# PROVIDED MACROS:

-#

-#    (None)

-#

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-SHELL = /bin/sh

-

-ERROR_IF_UNSET   ?= $(if $(filter undefined, $(origin $(strip $(1)))), $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) value not set))

-ERROR_IF_EMPTY   ?= $(if $(strip $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option cannot be blank))

-ERROR_IF_NONBOOL ?= $(if $(filter Y N, $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option must be Y or N))

-

-# Default values of optionally user-supplied variables

-ATPROGRAM_PROGRAMMER ?= jtagice3

-ATPROGRAM_INTERFACE  ?= jtag

-ATPROGRAM_PORT       ?= 

-

-# Sanity check user supplied values

-$(foreach MANDATORY_VAR, $(LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS), $(call ERROR_IF_UNSET, $(MANDATORY_VAR)))

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, MCU)

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, TARGET)

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, ATPROGRAM_PROGRAMMER)

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, ATPROGRAM_INTERFACE)

-

-# Output Messages

-MSG_ATPROGRAM_CMD    := ' [ATPRGRM] :'

-

-# Construct base atprogram command flags

-BASE_ATPROGRAM_FLAGS := --tool $(ATPROGRAM_PROGRAMMER) --interface $(ATPROGRAM_INTERFACE) --device $(MCU)

-ifneq ($(ATPROGRAM_PORT),)

-   BASE_ATPROGRAM_FLAGS += --port $(ATPROGRAM_PORT)

-endif

-

-# Construct the flags to use for the various memory spaces

-ifeq ($(ARCH), AVR8)

-   ATPROGRAM_FLASH_FLAGS  := --chiperase --flash

-   ATPROGRAM_EEPROM_FLAGS := --eeprom

-else ifeq ($(ARCH), XMEGA)

-   ATPROGRAM_FLASH_FLAGS  := --erase --flash

-   ATPROGRAM_EEPROM_FLAGS := --eeprom

-else ifeq ($(ARCH), UC3)

-   ATPROGRAM_FLASH_FLAGS  := --erase

-   ATPROGRAM_EEPROM_FLAGS := --eeprom

-else

-   $(error Unsupported architecture "$(ARCH)")

-endif

-

-atprogram: $(TARGET).elf $(MAKEFILE_LIST)

-	@echo $(MSG_ATPROGRAM_CMD) Programming device \"$(MCU)\" FLASH using \"$(ATPROGRAM_PROGRAMMER)\"

-	atprogram $(BASE_ATPROGRAM_FLAGS) program $(ATPROGRAM_FLASH_FLAGS) --file $<

-

-atprogram-ee: $(TARGET).elf $(MAKEFILE_LIST)

-	@echo $(MSG_ATPROGRAM_CMD) Programming device \"$(MCU)\" EEPROM using \"$(ATPROGRAM_PROGRAMMER)\"

-	atprogram $(BASE_ATPROGRAM_FLAGS) program $(ATPROGRAM_EEPROM_FLAGS) --file $<

-	

-# Phony build targets for this module

-.PHONY: atprogram atprogram-ee

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
deleted file mode 100644
index 839362528..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,84 +0,0 @@
-#

-#             LUFA Library

-#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-#

-#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-#           www.lufa-lib.org

-#

-

-LUFA_BUILD_MODULES         += AVRDUDE

-LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS         += avrdude avrdude-ee

-LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS  += MCU TARGET

-LUFA_BUILD_OPTIONAL_VARS   += AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER AVRDUDE_PORT AVRDUDE_FLAGS

-LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_VARS   += 

-LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_MACROS += 

-

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-#             LUFA AVRDUDE Programmer Buildsystem Makefile Module.

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# DESCRIPTION:

-#   Provides a set of targets to re-program a device using the open source

-#   avr-dude utility.

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# TARGETS:

-#

-#    avrdude                   - Program target FLASH with application using

-#                                avrdude

-#    avrdude-ee                - Program target EEPROM with application data

-#                                using avrdude

-#

-# MANDATORY PARAMETERS:

-#

-#    MCU                       - Microcontroller device model name

-#    TARGET                    - Application name

-#

-# OPTIONAL PARAMETERS:

-#

-#    AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER        - Name of programming hardware to use

-#    AVRDUDE_PORT              - Name of communication port to use

-#    AVRDUDE_FLAGS             - Flags to pass to avr-dude

-#

-# PROVIDED VARIABLES:

-#

-#    (None)

-#

-# PROVIDED MACROS:

-#

-#    (None)

-#

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-SHELL = /bin/sh

-

-ERROR_IF_UNSET   ?= $(if $(filter undefined, $(origin $(strip $(1)))), $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) value not set))

-ERROR_IF_EMPTY   ?= $(if $(strip $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option cannot be blank))

-ERROR_IF_NONBOOL ?= $(if $(filter Y N, $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option must be Y or N))

-

-# Default values of optionally user-supplied variables

-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER ?= jtagicemkii

-AVRDUDE_PORT       ?= usb

-AVRDUDE_FLAGS      ?= 

-

-# Sanity check user supplied values

-$(foreach MANDATORY_VAR, $(LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS), $(call ERROR_IF_UNSET, $(MANDATORY_VAR)))

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, MCU)

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, TARGET)

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, AVRDUDE_PORT)

-

-# Output Messages

-MSG_AVRDUDE_CMD    := ' [AVRDUDE] :'

-

-# Construct base avrdude command flags

-BASE_AVRDUDE_FLAGS := -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)

-

-avrdude: $(TARGET).hex $(MAKEFILE_LIST)

-	@echo $(MSG_AVRDUDE_CMD) Programming device \"$(MCU)\" FLASH with settings \"$(AVRDUDE_FLASH_FLAGS)\" using \"$(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)\" on port \"$(AVRDUDE_PORT)\"

-	avrdude $(BASE_AVRDUDE_FLAGS) -U flash:w:$< $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS)

-

-avrdude-ee: $(TARGET).eep $(MAKEFILE_LIST)

-	@echo $(MSG_AVRDUDE_CMD) Programming device \"$(MCU)\" EEPROM with settings \"$(AVRDUDE_EEP_FLAGS)\" using \"$(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)\" on port \"$(AVRDUDE_PORT)\"

-	avrdude $(BASE_AVRDUDE_FLAGS) -U eeprom:w:$< $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS)

-

-# Phony build targets for this module

-.PHONY: avrdude avrdude-ee

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/lufa_build.mk b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/lufa_build.mk
deleted file mode 100644
index 878860627..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/lufa_build.mk
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,296 +0,0 @@
-#

-#             LUFA Library

-#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-#

-#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-#           www.lufa-lib.org

-#

-

-LUFA_BUILD_MODULES         += BUILD

-LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS         += size check-source symbol-sizes all lib elf hex lss clean mostlyclean

-LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS  += TARGET ARCH MCU SRC F_USB LUFA_PATH

-LUFA_BUILD_OPTIONAL_VARS   += BOARD OPTIMIZATION C_STANDARD CPP_STANDARD F_CPU C_FLAGS CPP_FLAGS ASM_FLAGS CC_FLAGS LD_FLAGS OBJDIR OBJECT_FILES DEBUG_TYPE DEBUG_LEVEL

-LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_VARS   += 

-LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_MACROS += 

-

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-#               LUFA GCC Compiler Buildsystem Makefile Module.

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# DESCRIPTION:

-#   Provides a set of targets to build a C, C++ and/or Assembly application

-#   via the AVR-GCC compiler.

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# TARGETS:

-#

-#    size                      - List built application size

-#    symbol-sizes              - Print application symbols from the binary ELF

-#                                file as a list sorted by size in bytes

-#    check-source              - Print a list of SRC source files that cannot

-#                                be found

-#    all                       - Build application and list size

-#    lib                       - Build and archive source files into a library

-#    elf                       - Build application ELF debug object file

-#    hex                       - Build application HEX object files

-#    lss                       - Build application LSS assembly listing file

-#    clean                     - Remove all project intermediatary and binary

-#                                output files

-#    mostlyclean               - Remove intermediatary output files, but

-#                                preserve binaries

-#

-# MANDATORY PARAMETERS:

-#

-#    TARGET                    - Application name

-#    ARCH                      - Device architecture name

-#    MCU                       - Microcontroller device model name

-#    SRC                       - List of input source files (*.c, *.cpp, *.S)

-#    F_USB                     - Speed of the input clock of the USB controller

-#                                in Hz

-#    LUFA_PATH                 - Path to the LUFA library core

-#

-# OPTIONAL PARAMETERS:

-#

-#    BOARD                     - LUFA board hardware

-#    OPTIMIZATION              - Optimization level

-#    C_STANDARD                - C Language Standard to use

-#    CPP_STANDARD              - C++ Language Standard to use

-#    F_CPU                     - Speed of the CPU, in Hz

-#    C_FLAGS                   - Flags to pass to the C compiler only

-#    CPP_FLAGS                 - Flags to pass to the C++ compiler only

-#    ASM_FLAGS                 - Flags to pass to the assembler only

-#    CC_FLAGS                  - Common flags to pass to the C/C++ compiler and

-#                                assembler

-#    LD_FLAGS                  - Flags to pass to the linker

-#    OBJDIR                    - Directory for the output object and dependency

-#                                files; if equal to ".", the output files will

-#                                be generated in the same folder as the sources

-#    OBJECT_FILES              - Extra object files to link in to the binaries

-#    DEBUG_FORMAT              - Format of the debugging information to

-#                                generate in the compiled object files

-#    DEBUG_LEVEL               - Level the debugging information to generate in

-#                                the compiled object files

-#

-# PROVIDED VARIABLES:

-#

-#    (None)

-#

-# PROVIDED MACROS:

-#

-#    (None)

-#

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-SHELL = /bin/sh

-

-ERROR_IF_UNSET   ?= $(if $(filter undefined, $(origin $(strip $(1)))), $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) value not set))

-ERROR_IF_EMPTY   ?= $(if $(strip $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option cannot be blank))

-ERROR_IF_NONBOOL ?= $(if $(filter Y N, $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option must be Y or N))

-

-# Default values of optionally user-supplied variables

-BOARD           ?= NONE

-OPTIMIZATION    ?= s

-F_CPU           ?=

-C_STANDARD      ?= gnu99

-CPP_STANDARD    ?= gnu++98

-C_FLAGS         ?=

-CPP_FLAGS       ?=

-ASM_FLAGS       ?=

-CC_FLAGS        ?=

-OBJDIR          ?= .

-OBJECT_FILES    ?=

-DEBUG_FORMAT    ?= dwarf-2

-DEBUG_LEVEL     ?= 3

-

-# Sanity check user supplied values

-$(foreach MANDATORY_VAR, $(LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS), $(call ERROR_IF_UNSET, $(MANDATORY_VAR)))

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, MCU)

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, TARGET)

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, ARCH)

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, F_USB)

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, LUFA_PATH)

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, BOARD)

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, OPTIMIZATION)

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, C_STANDARD)

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, CPP_STANDARD)

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, OBJDIR)

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, DEBUG_FORMAT)

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, DEBUG_LEVEL)

-

-# Determine the utility prefix to use for the selected architecture

-ifeq ($(ARCH), AVR8)

-   CROSS        := avr

-else ifeq ($(ARCH), XMEGA)

-   CROSS        := avr

-   $(warning The XMEGA device support is currently EXPERIMENTAL (incomplete and/or non-functional), and is included for preview purposes only.)

-else ifeq ($(ARCH), UC3)

-   CROSS        := avr32

-   $(warning The UC3 device support is currently EXPERIMENTAL (incomplete and/or non-functional), and is included for preview purposes only.)

-else

-   $(error Unsupported architecture "$(ARCH)")

-endif

-

-# Output Messages

-MSG_COMPILE_CMD  := ' [GCC]     :'

-MSG_ASSEMBLE_CMD := ' [GAS]     :'

-MSG_NM_CMD       := ' [NM]      :'

-MSG_REMOVE_CMD   := ' [RM]      :'

-MSG_LINK_CMD     := ' [LNK]     :'

-MSG_ARCHIVE_CMD  := ' [AR]      :'

-MSG_SIZE_CMD     := ' [SIZE]    :'

-MSG_OBJCPY_CMD   := ' [OBJCPY]  :'

-MSG_OBJDMP_CMD   := ' [OBJDMP]  :'

-

-# Convert input source file list to differentiate them by type

-C_SOURCE   := $(filter %.c, $(SRC))

-CPP_SOURCE := $(filter %.cpp, $(SRC))

-ASM_SOURCE := $(filter %.S, $(SRC))

-

-# Create a list of unknown source file types, if any are found throw an error

-UNKNOWN_SOURCE := $(filter-out $(C_SOURCE) $(CPP_SOURCE) $(ASM_SOURCE), $(SRC))

-ifneq ($(UNKNOWN_SOURCE),)

-   $(error Unknown input source file formats: $(UNKNOWN_SOURCE))

-endif

-

-# Convert input source filenames into a list of required output object files

-OBJECT_FILES += $(addsuffix .o, $(basename $(SRC)))

-ifneq ($(OBJDIR),.)

-   $(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2> /dev/null)   

-   VPATH           += $(dir $(SRC))

-   OBJECT_FILES    := $(addprefix $(patsubst %/,%,$(OBJDIR))/, $(notdir $(OBJECT_FILES)))

-   

-   # Check if any object file (without path) appears more than once in the object file list

-   ifneq ($(words $(sort $(OBJECT_FILES))), $(words $(OBJECT_FILES)))

-       $(error Cannot build with OBJDIR parameter set - one or more object file name is not unique)

-   endif

-endif

-

-# Create a list of dependency files from the list of object files

-DEPENDENCY_FILES := $(OBJECT_FILES:%.o=%.d)

-

-# Create a list of common flags to pass to the compiler/linker/assembler

-BASE_CC_FLAGS    := -pipe -g$(DEBUG_FORMAT) -g$(DEBUG_LEVEL)

-ifeq ($(ARCH), AVR8)

-   BASE_CC_FLAGS += -mmcu=$(MCU) -fshort-enums -fno-inline-small-functions -fpack-struct

-else ifeq ($(ARCH), XMEGA)

-   BASE_CC_FLAGS += -mmcu=$(MCU) -fshort-enums -fno-inline-small-functions -fpack-struct

-else ifeq ($(ARCH), UC3)

-   BASE_CC_FLAGS += -mpart=$(MCU:at32%=%) -masm-addr-pseudos

-endif

-BASE_CC_FLAGS += -Wall -fno-strict-aliasing -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -ffunction-sections

-BASE_CC_FLAGS += -I. -I$(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_PATH))/..

-BASE_CC_FLAGS += -DARCH=ARCH_$(ARCH) -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL

-ifneq ($(F_CPU),)

-   BASE_CC_FLAGS += -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL

-endif

-

-# Additional language specific compiler flags

-BASE_C_FLAGS   := -x c -O$(OPTIMIZATION) -std=$(C_STANDARD) -Wstrict-prototypes

-BASE_CPP_FLAGS := -x c++ -O$(OPTIMIZATION) -std=$(CPP_STANDARD)

-BASE_ASM_FLAGS := -x assembler-with-cpp

-

-# Create a list of flags to pass to the linker

-BASE_LD_FLAGS := -lm -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref -Wl,--gc-sections -Wl,--relax 

-ifeq ($(ARCH), AVR8)

-   BASE_LD_FLAGS += -mmcu=$(MCU)

-else ifeq ($(ARCH), XMEGA)

-   BASE_LD_FLAGS += -mmcu=$(MCU)

-else ifeq ($(ARCH), UC3)

-   BASE_LD_FLAGS += -mpart=$(MCU:at32%=%) --rodata-writable --direct-data

-endif

-

-# Determine flags to pass to the size utility based on its reported features (only invoke if size target required)

-size: SIZE_MCU_FLAG    := $(shell $(CROSS)-size --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )

-size: SIZE_FORMAT_FLAG := $(shell $(CROSS)-size --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )

-

-

-build_begin:

-	@echo ""

-	@echo Begin compilation of project \"$(TARGET)\"...

-	@echo ""

-	

-build_end:

-	@echo Finished building project \"$(TARGET)\".

-	@echo ""

-

-gcc-version:

-	@$(CROSS)-gcc --version

-

-check-source:

-	@for f in $(SRC); do \

-		if [ ! -f $$f ]; then \

-			echo "Error: Source file not found: $$f"; \

-			exit 1; \

-		fi; \

-	 done

-

-size: $(TARGET).elf

-	@echo $(MSG_SIZE_CMD) Determining size of \"$<\"

-	@echo ""

-	$(CROSS)-size $(SIZE_MCU_FLAG) $(SIZE_FORMAT_FLAG) $< ; 2>/dev/null;

-

-symbol-sizes: $(TARGET).elf

-	@echo $(MSG_NM_CMD) Extracting \"$<\" symbols with decimal byte sizes

-	$(CROSS)-nm --size-sort --demangle --radix=d $<

-

-mostlyclean:

-	@echo $(MSG_REMOVE_CMD) Removing object files of \"$(TARGET)\"

-	rm -f $(OBJECT_FILES)

-	@echo $(MSG_REMOVE_CMD) Removing dependency files of \"$(TARGET)\"

-	rm -f $(DEPENDENCY_FILES)

-

-clean: mostlyclean

-	@echo $(MSG_REMOVE_CMD) Removing output files of \"$(TARGET)\"

-	rm -f $(TARGET).elf $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET).map $(TARGET).lss $(TARGET).sym $(TARGET).a

-

-all: build_begin check-source gcc-version elf hex lss sym size build_end

-

-lib: lib$(TARGET).a

-elf: $(TARGET).elf

-hex: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep

-lss: $(TARGET).lss

-sym: $(TARGET).sym

-

-$(OBJDIR)/%.o: %.c $(MAKEFILE_LIST)

-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILE_CMD) Compiling C file \"$(notdir $<)\"

-	$(CROSS)-gcc -c $(BASE_CC_FLAGS) $(BASE_C_FLAGS) $(CC_FLAGS) $(C_FLAGS) -MMD -MP -MF $(@:%.o=%.d) $< -o $@

-

-$(OBJDIR)/%.o: %.cpp $(MAKEFILE_LIST)

-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILE_CMD) Compiling C++ file \"$(notdir $<)\"

-	$(CROSS)-gcc -c $(BASE_CC_FLAGS) $(BASE_CPP_FLAGS) $(CC_FLAGS) $(CPP_FLAGS) -MMD -MP -MF $(@:%.o=%.d) $< -o $@

-	

-$(OBJDIR)/%.o: %.S $(MAKEFILE_LIST)

-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLE_CMD) Assembling \"$(notdir $<)\"

-	$(CROSS)-gcc -c $(BASE_CC_FLAGS) $(BASE_ASM_FLAGS) $(CC_FLAGS) $(ASM_FLAGS) -MMD -MP -MF $(@:%.o=%.d) $< -o $@

-

-.PRECIOUS  : $(OBJECT_FILES)

-.SECONDARY : %.a

-%.a: $(OBJECT_FILES)

-	@echo $(MSG_ARCHIVE_CMD) Archiving object files into \"$@\"

-	$(CROSS)-ar rcs $@ $(OBJECT_FILES)

-

-.PRECIOUS  : $(OBJECT_FILES)

-.SECONDARY : %.elf

-%.elf: $(OBJECT_FILES)

-	@echo $(MSG_LINK_CMD) Linking object files into \"$@\"

-	$(CROSS)-gcc $(BASE_LD_FLAGS) $(LD_FLAGS) $^ -o $@

-

-%.hex: %.elf

-	@echo $(MSG_OBJCPY_CMD) Extracting HEX file data from \"$<\"

-	$(CROSS)-objcopy -O ihex -R .eeprom -R .fuse -R .lock -R .signature $< $@

-

-%.eep: %.elf

-	@echo $(MSG_OBJCPY_CMD) Extracting EEP file data from \"$<\"

-	$(CROSS)-objcopy -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O ihex $< $@ || exit 0

-

-%.lss: %.elf

-	@echo $(MSG_OBJDMP_CMD) Extracting LSS file data from \"$<\"

-	$(CROSS)-objdump -h -S -z $< > $@

-

-%.sym: %.elf

-	@echo $(MSG_NM_CMD) Extracting SYM file data from \"$<\"

-	$(CROSS)-nm -n $< > $@

-

-# Include build dependency files

--include $(DEPENDENCY_FILES)

-

-# Phony build targets for this module

-.PHONY: build_begin build_end gcc-version check-source size symbol-sizes lib elf hex lss clean mostlyclean

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/lufa_core.mk b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/lufa_core.mk
deleted file mode 100644
index bde1e11c9..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/lufa_core.mk
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,152 +0,0 @@
-#

-#             LUFA Library

-#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-#

-#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-#           www.lufa-lib.org

-#

-

-LUFA_BUILD_MODULES         += CORE

-LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS         += help list_targets list_modules list_mandatory list_optional list_provided list_macros

-LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS  += 

-LUFA_BUILD_OPTIONAL_VARS   += 

-LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_VARS   += 

-LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_MACROS += 

-

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-#               LUFA Core Build System Makefile Module.

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# DESCRIPTION:

-#   Provides a set of core build targets for the LUFA build system

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# TARGETS:

-#

-#    help                      - Build system help

-#    list_targets              - List all build targets

-#    list_modules              - List all build modules

-#    list_mandatory            - List all mandatory make variables required by

-#                                the included build modules of the application

-#    list_optional             - List all optional make variables required by

-#                                the included build modules of the application

-#    list_provided             - List all provided make variables from the

-#                                included build modules of the application

-#    list_macros               - List all provided make macros from the

-#                                included build modules of the application

-#

-# MANDATORY PARAMETERS:

-#

-#    (None)

-#

-# OPTIONAL PARAMETERS:

-#

-#    (None)

-#

-# PROVIDED VARIABLES:

-#

-#    (None)

-#

-# PROVIDED MACROS:

-#

-#    (None)

-#

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-SHELL = /bin/sh

-

-# Build sorted and filtered lists of the included build module data

-SORTED_LUFA_BUILD_MODULES   = $(sort $(LUFA_BUILD_MODULES))

-SORTED_LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS   = $(sort $(LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS))

-SORTED_LUFA_MANDATORY_VARS  = $(sort $(LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS))

-SORTED_LUFA_OPTIONAL_VARS   = $(filter-out $(SORTED_LUFA_MANDATORY_VARS), $(sort $(LUFA_BUILD_OPTIONAL_VARS)))

-SORTED_LUFA_PROVIDED_VARS   = $(sort $(LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_VARS))

-SORTED_LUFA_PROVIDED_MACROS = $(sort $(LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_MACROS))

-

-# Create printable versions of the sorted build module data (use "(None)" when no data is available)

-PRINTABLE_LUFA_BUILD_MODULES   = $(if $(strip $(SORTED_LUFA_BUILD_MODULES)), $(SORTED_LUFA_BUILD_MODULES), (None))

-PRINTABLE_LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS   = $(if $(strip $(SORTED_LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS)), $(SORTED_LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS), (None))

-PRINTABLE_LUFA_MANDATORY_VARS  = $(if $(strip $(SORTED_LUFA_MANDATORY_VARS)), $(SORTED_LUFA_MANDATORY_VARS), (None))

-PRINTABLE_LUFA_OPTIONAL_VARS   = $(if $(strip $(SORTED_LUFA_OPTIONAL_VARS)), $(SORTED_LUFA_OPTIONAL_VARS), (None))

-PRINTABLE_LUFA_PROVIDED_VARS   = $(if $(strip $(SORTED_LUFA_PROVIDED_VARS)), $(SORTED_LUFA_PROVIDED_VARS), (None))

-PRINTABLE_LUFA_PROVIDED_MACROS = $(if $(strip $(SORTED_LUFA_PROVIDED_MACROS)), $(SORTED_LUFA_PROVIDED_MACROS), (None))

-

-help:

-	@echo "==================================================================="

-	@echo "                       LUFA Build System 2.0                       "

-	@echo "      (C) Dean Camera, 2012 { dean @ fourwalledcubicle . com }     "

-	@echo "==================================================================="

-	@echo "DESCRIPTION:                                                       "

-	@echo " This build system is a set of makefile modules for (GNU) Make, to "

-	@echo " provide a simple system for building LUFA powered applications.   "

-	@echo " Each makefile module can be included from within a user makefile, "

-	@echo " to expose the build rules documented in the comments at the top of"

-	@echo " each build module.                                                "

-	@echo "                                                                   "

-	@echo "USAGE:                                                             "	

-	@echo " To execute a rule, define all variables indicated in the desired  "

-	@echo " module as a required parameter before including the build module  "

-	@echo " in your project makefile. Parameters marked as optional will      "

-	@echo " assume a default value in the modules if not user-assigned.       "

-	@echo "                                                                   "

-	@echo " By default the target output shows both a friendly summary, as    "

-	@echo " well as the actual invoked command. To suppress the output of the "

-	@echo " invoked commands and show only the friendly command output, run   "

-	@echo " make with the \"-s\" switch added before the target(s).           "		

-	@echo "==================================================================="

-	@echo "                                                                   "

-	@echo "  Currently used build system modules in this application:         "

-	@echo "                                                                   "

-	@printf " %b" "$(PRINTABLE_LUFA_BUILD_MODULES:%=   - %\n)"

-	@echo "                                                                   "

-	@echo "                                                                   "

-	@echo "  Currently available build targets in this application:           "

-	@echo "                                                                   "

-	@printf " %b" "$(PRINTABLE_LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS:%=   - %\n)"

-	@echo "                                                                   "

-	@echo "                                                                   "

-	@echo "  Mandatory variables required by the selected build Modules:      "

-	@echo "                                                                   "

-	@printf " %b" "$(PRINTABLE_LUFA_MANDATORY_VARS:%=   - %\n)"

-	@echo "                                                                   "

-	@echo "                                                                   "

-	@echo "  Optional variables required by the selected build Modules:       "

-	@echo "                                                                   "

-	@printf " %b" "$(PRINTABLE_LUFA_OPTIONAL_VARS:%=   - %\n)"

-	@echo "                                                                   "

-	@echo "                                                                   "

-	@echo "  Variables provided by the selected build Modules:                "

-	@echo "                                                                   "

-	@printf " %b" "$(PRINTABLE_LUFA_PROVIDED_VARS:%=   - %\n)"

-	@echo "                                                                   "

-	@echo "                                                                   "

-	@echo "  Macros provided by the selected build Modules:                   "

-	@echo "                                                                   "

-	@printf " %b" "$(PRINTABLE_LUFA_PROVIDED_MACROS:%=   - %\n)"

-	@echo "                                                                   "

-	@echo "==================================================================="

-	@echo "        The LUFA BuildSystem 2.0 - Powered By Unicorns (tm)        "

-	@echo "==================================================================="

-	

-list_modules:

-	@echo Currently Used Build System Modules: $(PRINTABLE_LUFA_BUILD_MODULES)

-

-list_targets:

-	@echo Currently Available Build Targets: $(PRINTABLE_LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS)	

-

-list_mandatory:

-	@echo Mandatory Variables for Included Modules: $(PRINTABLE_LUFA_MANDATORY_VARS)

-	

-list_optional:

-	@echo Optional Variables for Included Modules: $(PRINTABLE_LUFA_OPTIONAL_VARS)

-

-list_provided:

-	@echo Variables Provided by the Included Modules: $(PRINTABLE_LUFA_PROVIDED_VARS)

-

-list_macros:

-	@echo Macros Provided by the Included Modules: $(PRINTABLE_LUFA_PROVIDED_MACROS)

-

-# Disable default in-built make rules (those that are needed are explicitly

-# defined, and doing so has performance benefits when recursively building)

-.SUFFIXES:

-

-# Phony build targets for this module

-.PHONY: help list_modules list_targets list_mandatory list_optional list_provided list_macros

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
deleted file mode 100644
index 1e3604c7d..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,104 +0,0 @@
-#

-#             LUFA Library

-#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-#

-#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-#           www.lufa-lib.org

-#

-

-LUFA_BUILD_MODULES         += CPPCHECK

-LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS         += cppcheck cppcheck-config

-LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS  += SRC

-LUFA_BUILD_OPTIONAL_VARS   += CPPCHECK_INCLUDES CPPCHECK_EXCLUDES CPPCHECK_MSG_TEMPLATE CPPCHECK_ENABLE \

-                              CPPCHECK_SUPPRESS CPPCHECK_FAIL_ON_WARNING CPPCHECK_QUIET CPPCHECK_FLAGS

-LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_VARS   += 

-LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_MACROS += 

-

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-#                LUFA CPPCheck Buildsystem Makefile Module.

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# DESCRIPTION:

-#   Provides a set of targets to scan a project with the free "cppcheck" static

-#   analysis tool, to check for code errors at runtime (see http://cppcheck.sourceforge.net).

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# TARGETS:

-#

-#    cppcheck                  - Scan the project with CPPCheck

-#    cppcheck-config           - Use CPPCheck to look for missing include files

-#

-# MANDATORY PARAMETERS:

-#

-#    SRC                       - List of source files to statically analyze

-#

-# OPTIONAL PARAMETERS:

-#

-#    CPPCHECK_INCLUDES         - Extra include paths to search for missing

-#                                header files

-#    CPPCHECK_EXCLUDES         - Source file paths to exclude checking (can be

-#                                a path fragment if desired)

-#    CPPCHECK_MSG_TEMPLATE     - Template for cppcheck error and warning output

-#    CPPCHECK_ENABLE           - General cppcheck category checks to enable

-#    CPPCHECK_SUPPRESS         - Specific cppcheck warnings to disable by ID

-#    CPPCHECK_FAIL_ON_WARNING  - Set to Y to fail the build on cppcheck

-#                                warnings, N to continue even if warnings occur

-#    CPPCHECK_QUIET            - Enable cppcheck verbose or quiet output mode

-#    CPPCHECK_FLAGS            - Additional flags to pass to cppcheck

-#

-# PROVIDED VARIABLES:

-#

-#    (None)

-#

-# PROVIDED MACROS:

-#

-#    (None)

-#

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-SHELL = /bin/sh

-

-ERROR_IF_UNSET   ?= $(if $(filter undefined, $(origin $(strip $(1)))), $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) value not set))

-ERROR_IF_EMPTY   ?= $(if $(strip $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option cannot be blank))

-ERROR_IF_NONBOOL ?= $(if $(filter Y N, $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option must be Y or N))

-

-# Default values of optionally user-supplied variables

-CPPCHECK_INCLUDES            ?=

-CPPCHECK_EXCLUDES            ?=

-CPPCHECK_MSG_TEMPLATE        ?= {file}:{line}: {severity} ({id}): {message}

-CPPCHECK_ENABLE              ?= all

-CPPCHECK_SUPPRESS            ?= variableScope missingInclude

-CPPCHECK_FAIL_ON_WARNING     ?= Y

-CPPCHECK_QUIET               ?= Y

-CPPCHECK_FLAGS               ?= 

-

-# Sanity check user supplied values

-$(foreach MANDATORY_VAR, $(LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS), $(call ERROR_IF_UNSET, $(MANDATORY_VAR)))

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, SRC)

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, CPPCHECK_MSG_TEMPLATE)

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, CPPCHECK_ENABLE)

-$(call ERROR_IF_NONBOOL, CPPCHECK_FAIL_ON_WARNING)

-$(call ERROR_IF_NONBOOL, CPPCHECK_QUIET)

-

-# Build a default argument list for cppcheck

-BASE_CPPCHECK_FLAGS := --template="$(CPPCHECK_MSG_TEMPLATE)" $(CPPCHECK_INCLUDES:%=-I%) $(CPPCHECK_EXCLUDES:%=-i%) --inline-suppr --force --std=c99

-

-# Sanity check parameters and construct additional command line arguments to cppcheck

-ifeq ($(CPPCHECK_FAIL_ON_WARNING), Y)

-   BASE_CPPCHECK_FLAGS += --error-exitcode=1

-endif

-ifeq ($(CPPCHECK_QUIET), Y)

-   BASE_CPPCHECK_FLAGS += --quiet

-endif

-

-# Output Messages

-MSG_CPPCHECK_CMD         := ' [CPPCHECK]:'

-

-cppcheck-config:

-	@echo $(MSG_CPPCHECK_CMD) Checking cppcheck configuration check on source files

-	cppcheck $(BASE_CPPCHECK_FLAGS) --check-config $(CPPCHECK_FLAGS) $(SRC)

-

-cppcheck:

-	@echo $(MSG_CPPCHECK_CMD) Performing static analysis on source files

-	cppcheck $(BASE_CPPCHECK_FLAGS) --enable=$(CPPCHECK_ENABLE) $(CPPCHECK_SUPPRESS:%=--suppress=%) $(CPPCHECK_FLAGS) $(SRC)

-

-# Phony build targets for this module

-.PHONY: cppcheck-config cppcheck

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/lufa_dfu.mk b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
deleted file mode 100644
index 6bfe97942..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,93 +0,0 @@
-#

-#             LUFA Library

-#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-#

-#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-#           www.lufa-lib.org

-#

-

-LUFA_BUILD_MODULES         += DFU

-LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS         += flip flip-ee dfu dfu-ee

-LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS  += MCU TARGET

-LUFA_BUILD_OPTIONAL_VARS   += 

-LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_VARS   += 

-LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_MACROS += 

-

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-#               LUFA DFU Bootloader Buildsystem Makefile Module.

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# DESCRIPTION:

-#   Provides a set of targets to re-program a device currently running a DFU

-#   class bootloader with a project's FLASH and EEPROM files.

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# TARGETS:

-#

-#    flip                      - Program FLASH into target via Atmel FLIP

-#    flip-ee                   - Program EEPROM into target via Atmel FLIP

-#    dfu                       - Program FLASH into target via dfu-programmer

-#    dfu-ee                    - Program EEPROM into target via dfu-programmer

-#

-# MANDATORY PARAMETERS:

-#

-#    MCU                       - Microcontroller device model name

-#    TARGET                    - Application name

-#

-# OPTIONAL PARAMETERS:

-#

-#    (None)

-#

-# PROVIDED VARIABLES:

-#

-#    (None)

-#

-# PROVIDED MACROS:

-#

-#    (None)

-#

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-SHELL = /bin/sh

-

-ERROR_IF_UNSET   ?= $(if $(filter undefined, $(origin $(strip $(1)))), $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) value not set))

-ERROR_IF_EMPTY   ?= $(if $(strip $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option cannot be blank))

-ERROR_IF_NONBOOL ?= $(if $(filter Y N, $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option must be Y or N))

-

-# Sanity-check values of mandatory user-supplied variables

-$(foreach MANDATORY_VAR, $(LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS), $(call ERROR_IF_UNSET, $(MANDATORY_VAR)))

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, MCU)

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, TARGET)

-

-# Output Messages

-MSG_COPY_CMD   := ' [CP]      :'

-MSG_REMOVE_CMD := ' [RM]      :'

-MSG_DFU_CMD    := ' [DFU]     :'

-

-flip: $(TARGET).hex $(MAKEFILE_LIST)

-	@echo $(MSG_DFU_CMD) Programming FLASH with batchisp using \"$<\"

-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f

-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $< program

-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0

-

-flip-ee: $(TARGET).eep $(MAKEFILE_LIST)

-	@echo $(MSG_DFU_CMD) Copying EEP file to temporary file \"$<.hex\"

-	cp $< $<.hex

-	@echo $(MSG_DFU_CMD) Programming EEPROM with batchisp using \"$<.hex\"

-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase

-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $<.hex program

-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0

-	@echo $(MSG_DFU_CMD) Removing temporary file \"$<.hex\"

-	rm $<.hex

-	

-dfu: $(TARGET).hex $(MAKEFILE_LIST)

-	@echo $(MSG_DFU_CMD) Programming FLASH with dfu-programmer using \"$<\"

-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase

-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash $<

-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset

-

-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).eep $(MAKEFILE_LIST)

-	@echo $(MSG_DFU_CMD) Programming EEPROM with dfu-programmer using \"$<\"

-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom-flash $<

-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset

-	

-# Phony build targets for this module

-.PHONY: flip flip-ee dfu dfu-ee

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
deleted file mode 100644
index 87427fd27..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,81 +0,0 @@
-#

-#             LUFA Library

-#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-#

-#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-#           www.lufa-lib.org

-#

-

-LUFA_BUILD_MODULES         += DOXYGEN

-LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS         += doxygen

-LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS  += LUFA_PATH

-LUFA_BUILD_OPTIONAL_VARS   += DOXYGEN_CONF DOXYGEN_FAIL_ON_WARNING DOXYGEN_OVERRIDE_PARAMS

-LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_VARS   += 

-LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_MACROS += 

-

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-#                 LUFA Doxygen Buildsystem Makefile Module.

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# DESCRIPTION:

-#   Provides a set of targets to automatically build Doxygen documentation for

-#   a project (see www.doxygen.org).

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# TARGETS:

-#

-#    doxygen                   - Build Doxygen Documentation

-#

-# MANDATORY PARAMETERS:

-#

-#    LUFA_PATH                 - Path to the LUFA library core

-#

-# OPTIONAL PARAMETERS:

-#

-#    DOXYGEN_CONF              - Doxygen configuration filename

-#    DOXYGEN_FAIL_ON_WARNING   - Set to Y to fail the build on Doxygen warnings,

-#                                N to continue even if warnings occur

-#    DOXYGEN_OVERRIDE_PARAMS   - Parameters to override in the doxygen

-#                                configuration file

-# PROVIDED VARIABLES:

-#

-#    (None)

-#

-# PROVIDED MACROS:

-#

-#    (None)

-#

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-SHELL = /bin/sh

-

-ERROR_IF_UNSET   ?= $(if $(filter undefined, $(origin $(strip $(1)))), $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) value not set))

-ERROR_IF_EMPTY   ?= $(if $(strip $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option cannot be blank))

-ERROR_IF_NONBOOL ?= $(if $(filter Y N, $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option must be Y or N))

-

-# Default values of optionally user-supplied variables

-DOXYGEN_CONF            ?= Doxygen.conf

-DOXYGEN_FAIL_ON_WARNING ?= Y

-DOXYGEN_OVERRIDE_PARAMS ?= QUIET=YES HTML_STYLESHEET=$(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_PATH))/DoxygenPages/Style/Style.css

-

-# Sanity check user supplied values

-$(foreach MANDATORY_VAR, $(LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS), $(call ERROR_IF_UNSET, $(MANDATORY_VAR)))

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, DOXYGEN_CONF)

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, LUFA_PATH)

-$(call ERROR_IF_NONBOOL, DOXYGEN_FAIL_ON_WARNING)

-

-# Output Messages

-MSG_DOXYGEN_CMD         := ' [DOXYGEN] :'

-

-# Determine Doxygen invocation command

-BASE_DOXYGEN_CMD := ( cat $(DOXYGEN_CONF) $(DOXYGEN_OVERRIDE_PARAMS:%=; echo "%") ) | doxygen -

-ifeq ($(DOXYGEN_FAIL_ON_WARNING), Y)

-   DOXYGEN_CMD := if ( $(BASE_DOXYGEN_CMD) 2>&1 | grep -v "warning: ignoring unsupported tag" ;); then exit 1; fi;

-else

-   DOXYGEN_CMD := $(BASE_DOXYGEN_CMD)

-endif

-

-doxygen:

-	@echo $(MSG_DOXYGEN_CMD) Configuration file \"$(DOXYGEN_CONF)\" with parameters \"$(DOXYGEN_OVERRIDE_PARAMS)\"

-	$(DOXYGEN_CMD)

-

-# Phony build targets for this module

-.PHONY: doxygen

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/lufa_hid.mk b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/lufa_hid.mk
deleted file mode 100644
index b8f6f2682..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,88 +0,0 @@
-#

-#             LUFA Library

-#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-#

-#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-#           www.lufa-lib.org

-#

-

-LUFA_BUILD_MODULES         += HID

-LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS         += hid hid-ee teensy teensy-ee

-LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS  += MCU TARGET

-LUFA_BUILD_OPTIONAL_VARS   += 

-LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_VARS   += 

-LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_MACROS += 

-

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-#               LUFA HID Bootloader Buildsystem Makefile Module.

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# DESCRIPTION:

-#   Provides a set of targets to re-program a device currently running a HID

-#   class bootloader with a project's FLASH files.

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# TARGETS:

-#

-#    hid                       - Program FLASH into target via

-#                                hid_bootloader_cli

-#    hid-ee                    - Program EEPROM into target via a temporary

-#                                AVR application and hid_bootloader_cli

-#    teensy                    - Program FLASH into target via

-#                                teensy_loader_cli

-#    teensy-ee                 - Program EEPROM into target via a temporary

-#                                AVR application and teensy_loader_cli

-#

-# MANDATORY PARAMETERS:

-#

-#    MCU                       - Microcontroller device model name

-#    TARGET                    - Application name

-#

-# OPTIONAL PARAMETERS:

-#

-#    (None)

-#

-# PROVIDED VARIABLES:

-#

-#    (None)

-#

-# PROVIDED MACROS:

-#

-#    (None)

-#

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-ERROR_IF_UNSET   ?= $(if $(filter undefined, $(origin $(strip $(1)))), $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) value not set))

-ERROR_IF_EMPTY   ?= $(if $(strip $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option cannot be blank))

-ERROR_IF_NONBOOL ?= $(if $(filter Y N, $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option must be Y or N))

-

-# Sanity-check values of mandatory user-supplied variables

-$(foreach MANDATORY_VAR, $(LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS), $(call ERROR_IF_UNSET, $(MANDATORY_VAR)))

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, MCU)

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, TARGET)

-

-# Output Messages

-MSG_HID_BOOTLOADER_CMD := ' [HID]     :'

-MSG_OBJCPY_CMD         := ' [OBJCPY]  :'

-MSG_MAKE_CMD           := ' [MAKE]    :'

-

-hid: $(TARGET).hex $(MAKEFILE_LIST)

-	@echo $(MSG_HID_BOOTLOADER_CMD) Programming FLASH with hid_bootloader_cli using \"$<\"

-	hid_bootloader_cli -mmcu=$(MCU) -v $<

-

-hid-ee: $(TARGET).eep $(MAKEFILE_LIST)

-	@echo $(MSG_OBJCPY_CMD) Converting \"$<\" to a binary file \"InputEEData.bin\"

-	avr-objcopy -I ihex -O binary $< $(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_PATH))/Build/HID_EEPROM_Loader/InputEEData.bin

-	@echo $(MSG_MAKE_CMD) Making EEPROM loader application for \"$<\"

-	make -C $(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_PATH))/Build/HID_EEPROM_Loader/ MCU=$(MCU) clean hid

-

-teensy: $(TARGET).hex $(MAKEFILE_LIST)

-	@echo $(MSG_HID_BOOTLOADER_CMD) Programming FLASH with teensy_loader_cli using \"$<\"

-	teensy_loader_cli -mmcu=$(MCU) -v $<

-

-teensy-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(MAKEFILE_LIST)

-	@echo $(MSG_OBJCPY_CMD) Converting \"$<\" to a binary file \"InputEEData.bin\"

-	avr-objcopy -I ihex -O binary $< $(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_PATH))/Build/HID_EEPROM_Loader/InputEEData.bin

-	@echo $(MSG_MAKE_CMD) Making EEPROM loader application for \"$<\"

-	make -s -C $(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_PATH))/Build/HID_EEPROM_Loader/ MCU=$(MCU) clean hid-teensy

-	

-# Phony build targets for this module

-.PHONY: hid hid-ee teensy teensy-ee

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/lufa_sources.mk b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/lufa_sources.mk
deleted file mode 100644
index 663c93024..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,116 +0,0 @@
-#

-#             LUFA Library

-#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-#

-#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-#           www.lufa-lib.org

-#

-

-LUFA_BUILD_MODULES         += SOURCES

-LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS         += 

-LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS  += LUFA_PATH ARCH

-LUFA_BUILD_OPTIONAL_VARS   += 

-LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_VARS   += LUFA_SRC_USB LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS LUFA_SRC_TEMPERATURE LUFA_SRC_SERIAL LUFA_SRC_TWI LUFA_SRC_PLATFORM

-LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_MACROS += 

-

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-#               LUFA Sources Buildsystem Makefile Module.

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# DESCRIPTION:

-#   Provides a set of makefile variables for the various LUFA module sources.

-#   Once included, the sources required to use a given LUFA module will become

-#   available using the makefile variable names listed in the LUFA project

-#   documentation.

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# TARGETS:

-#

-#    (None)

-#

-# MANDATORY PARAMETERS:

-#

-#    LUFA_PATH                 - Path to the LUFA library core

-#    ARCH                      - Device architecture name

-#

-# OPTIONAL PARAMETERS:

-#

-#    (None)

-#

-# PROVIDED VARIABLES:

-#

-#    LUFA_SRC_USB              - List of LUFA USB driver source files

-#    LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS         - List of LUFA USB Class driver source files

-#    LUFA_SRC_TEMPERATURE      - List of LUFA temperature sensor driver source

-#                                files

-#    LUFA_SRC_SERIAL           - List of LUFA Serial U(S)ART driver source files

-#    LUFA_SRC_TWI              - List of LUFA TWI driver source files

-#    LUFA_SRC_PLATFORM         - List of LUFA architecture specific platform

-#                                management source files

-#

-# PROVIDED MACROS:

-#

-#    (None)

-#

-# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-SHELL = /bin/sh

-

-ERROR_IF_UNSET   ?= $(if $(filter undefined, $(origin $(strip $(1)))), $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) value not set))

-ERROR_IF_EMPTY   ?= $(if $(strip $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option cannot be blank))

-ERROR_IF_NONBOOL ?= $(if $(filter Y N, $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option must be Y or N))

-

-# Sanity check user supplied values

-$(foreach MANDATORY_VAR, $(LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS), $(call ERROR_IF_UNSET, $(MANDATORY_VAR)))

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, LUFA_PATH)

-$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, ARCH)

-

-# Allow LUFA_ROOT_PATH to be overridden elsewhere to support legacy LUFA makefiles

-LUFA_ROOT_PATH ?= $(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_PATH))

-

-# Construct LUFA module source variables

-LUFA_SRC_USB         := $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Core/$(ARCH)/Device_$(ARCH).c          \

-                        $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Core/$(ARCH)/Endpoint_$(ARCH).c        \

-                        $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Core/$(ARCH)/Host_$(ARCH).c            \

-                        $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Core/$(ARCH)/Pipe_$(ARCH).c            \

-                        $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Core/$(ARCH)/USBController_$(ARCH).c   \

-                        $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Core/$(ARCH)/USBInterrupt_$(ARCH).c    \

-                        $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Core/$(ARCH)/EndpointStream_$(ARCH).c  \

-                        $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Core/$(ARCH)/PipeStream_$(ARCH).c      \

-                        $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Core/ConfigDescriptors.c               \

-                        $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Core/DeviceStandardReq.c               \

-                        $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Core/Events.c                          \

-                        $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Core/HostStandardReq.c                 \

-                        $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Core/USBTask.c                         \

-                        $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDParser.c

-LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS    := $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/AudioClassDevice.c        \

-                        $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDCClassDevice.c          \

-                        $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HIDClassDevice.c          \

-                        $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorageClassDevice.c  \

-                        $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDIClassDevice.c         \

-                        $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDISClassDevice.c        \

-                        $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AndroidAccessoryClassHost.c \

-                        $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AudioClassHost.c            \

-                        $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDCClassHost.c              \

-                        $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDClassHost.c              \

-                        $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorageClassHost.c      \

-                        $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDIClassHost.c             \

-                        $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/PrinterClassHost.c          \

-                        $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDISClassHost.c            \

-                        $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImageClassHost.c

-LUFA_SRC_TEMPERATURE := $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/Board/Temperature.c

-LUFA_SRC_SERIAL      := $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/Peripheral/$(ARCH)/Serial_$(ARCH).c

-LUFA_SRC_TWI         := $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/Peripheral/$(ARCH)/TWI_$(ARCH).c

-

-ifeq ($(ARCH), UC3)

-   LUFA_SRC_PLATFORM := $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Platform/UC3/Exception.S   \

-                        $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.c

-else

-   LUFA_SRC_PLATFORM :=

-endif

-

-# Build a list of all available module sources

-LUFA_SRC_ALL_FILES   := $(LUFA_SRC_USB)            \

-                        $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)       \

-                        $(LUFA_SRC_TEMPERATURE)    \

-                        $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)         \

-                        $(LUFA_SRC_TWI)            \

-					    $(LUFA_SRC_PLATFORM)

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DriverStubs/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DriverStubs/Buttons.h
deleted file mode 100644
index ca4c7a5eb..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DriverStubs/Buttons.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,90 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief LUFA Custom Board Button Hardware Driver (Template)

- *

- *  This is a stub driver header file, for implementing custom board

- *  layout hardware with compatible LUFA board specific drivers. If

- *  the library is configured to use the BOARD_USER board mode, this

- *  driver file should be completed and copied into the "/Board/" folder

- *  inside the application's folder.

- *

- *  This stub is for the board-specific component of the LUFA Buttons driver,

- *  for the control of physical board-mounted GPIO pushbuttons.

- */

-

-#ifndef __BUTTONS_USER_H__

-#define __BUTTONS_USER_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		// TODO: Add any required includes here

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1          // TODO: Add mask for first board button here

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)

-			{

-				// TODO: Initialize the appropriate port pins as an inputs here, with pull-ups

-			}

-

-			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)

-			{

-				// TODO: Clear the appropriate port pins as high impedance inputs here

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				// TODO: Return current button status here, debounced if required

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DriverStubs/Dataflash.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DriverStubs/Dataflash.h
deleted file mode 100644
index d397f77ed..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DriverStubs/Dataflash.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,220 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief LUFA Custom Board Dataflash Hardware Driver (Template)

- *

- *  This is a stub driver header file, for implementing custom board

- *  layout hardware with compatible LUFA board specific drivers. If

- *  the library is configured to use the BOARD_USER board mode, this

- *  driver file should be completed and copied into the "/Board/" folder

- *  inside the application's folder.

- *

- *  This stub is for the board-specific component of the LUFA Dataflash

- *  driver.

-*/

-

-#ifndef __DATAFLASH_USER_H__

-#define __DATAFLASH_USER_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		// TODO: Add any required includes here

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK                // TODO: Replace this with a mask of all the /CS pins of all Dataflashes

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR                 // TODO: Replace with the DDR register name for the board's Dataflash ICs

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT                // TODO: Replace with the PORT register name for the board's Dataflash ICs

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS                 1 // TODO: Replace with the number of Dataflashes on the board, max 2

-

-			/** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP                    DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK

-

-			/** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP1                      // TODO: Replace with mask to hold /CS of first Dataflash low, and all others high

-

-			/** Mask for the second dataflash chip selected. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP2                      // TODO: Replace with mask to hold /CS of second Dataflash low, and all others high

-

-			/** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash ICs. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE                  // TODO: Replace with the page size for the Dataflash ICs

-

-			/** Total number of pages inside each of the board's dataflash ICs. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                      // TODO: Replace with the total number of pages inside one of the Dataflash ICs

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Initializes the dataflash driver so that commands and data may be sent to an attached dataflash IC.

-			 *  The microcontroller's SPI driver MUST be initialized before any of the dataflash commands are used.

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_Init(void)

-			{

-				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR  |= DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;

-				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT |= DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns a byte from the dataflash.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash

-			 *

-			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte)

-			{

-				// TODO

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and ignores the next byte from the dataflash.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)

-			{

-				// TODO

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a dummy byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns the next byte from the dataflash.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void)

-			{

-				// TODO

-			}

-

-			/** Determines the currently selected dataflash chip.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Mask of the currently selected Dataflash chip, either \ref DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP if no chip is selected

-			 *          or a DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is the chip number).

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void)

-			{

-				return (DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT & DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK);

-			}

-

-			/** Selects the given dataflash chip.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in]  ChipMask  Mask of the Dataflash IC to select, in the form of DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is

-			 *              the chip number).

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask)

-			{

-				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT = ((DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT & ~DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK) | ChipMask);

-			}

-

-			/** Deselects the current dataflash chip, so that no dataflash is selected. */

-			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void)

-			{

-				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP);

-			}

-

-			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to

-			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one

-			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside

-			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs

-			 *  are deselected.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from

-			 *                          0 to ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress)

-			{

-				Dataflash_DeselectChip();

-

-				if (PageAddress >= (DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))

-				  return;

-

-				#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)

-					if (PageAddress & 0x01)

-					  Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);

-					else

-					  Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);

-				#else

-					Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);

-				#endif

-			}

-

-			/** Toggles the select line of the currently selected dataflash IC, so that it is ready to receive

-			 *  a new command.

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(void)

-			{

-				uint8_t SelectedChipMask = Dataflash_GetSelectedChip();

-

-				Dataflash_DeselectChip();

-				Dataflash_SelectChip(SelectedChipMask);

-			}

-

-			/** Spin-loops while the currently selected dataflash is busy executing a command, such as a main

-			 *  memory page program or main memory to buffer transfer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(void)

-			{

-				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();

-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);

-				while (!(Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_READY));

-				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with

-			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-bit address.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC

-			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress, const uint16_t BufferByte)

-			{

-				#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)

-					PageAddress >>= 1;

-				#endif

-

-				Dataflash_SendByte(PageAddress >> 5);

-				Dataflash_SendByte((PageAddress << 3) | (BufferByte >> 8));

-				Dataflash_SendByte(BufferByte);

-			}

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DriverStubs/Joystick.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DriverStubs/Joystick.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 31c79d9eb..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DriverStubs/Joystick.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,102 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief LUFA Custom Board Joystick Hardware Driver (Template)

- *

- *  This is a stub driver header file, for implementing custom board

- *  layout hardware with compatible LUFA board specific drivers. If

- *  the library is configured to use the BOARD_USER board mode, this

- *  driver file should be completed and copied into the "/Board/" folder

- *  inside the application's folder.

- *

- *  This stub is for the board-specific component of the LUFA Joystick

- *  driver, for a digital four-way (plus button) joystick.

-*/

-

-#ifndef __JOYSTICK_USER_H__

-#define __JOYSTICK_USER_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		// TODO: Add any required includes here

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */

-			#define JOY_LEFT                  // TODO: Add mask to indicate joystick left position here

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */

-			#define JOY_RIGHT                 // TODO: Add mask to indicate joystick right position here

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */

-			#define JOY_UP                    // TODO: Add mask to indicate joystick up position here

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */

-			#define JOY_DOWN                  // TODO: Add mask to indicate joystick down position here

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */

-			#define JOY_PRESS                 // TODO: Add mask to indicate joystick pressed position here

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Joystick_Init(void)

-			{

-				// TODO: Initialize joystick port pins as inputs with pull-ups

-			}

-

-			static inline void Joystick_Disable(void)

-			{

-				// TODO: Clear the joystick pins as high impedance inputs here

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				// TODO: Return current joystick position data which can be obtained by masking against the JOY_* macros

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DriverStubs/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DriverStubs/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index d48534632..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DriverStubs/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,130 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief LUFA Custom Board LED Hardware Driver (Template)

- *

- *  This is a stub driver header file, for implementing custom board

- *  layout hardware with compatible LUFA board specific drivers. If

- *  the library is configured to use the BOARD_USER board mode, this

- *  driver file should be completed and copied into the "/Board/" folder

- *  inside the application's folder.

- *

- *  This stub is for the board-specific component of the LUFA LEDs driver,

- *  for the LEDs (up to four) mounted on most development boards.

-*/

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_USER_H__

-#define __LEDS_USER_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		// TODO: Add any required includes here

-

-/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        // TODO: Add mask for first board LED here

-

-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED2        // TODO: Add mask for second board LED here

-

-			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED3        // TODO: Add mask for third board LED here

-

-			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED4        // TODO: Add mask for fourth board LED here

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)

-

-			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				// TODO: Add code to initialize LED port pins as outputs here

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				// TODO: Clear the LED port pins as high impedance inputs here

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				// TODO: Add code to turn on LEDs given in the LEDMask mask here, leave others as-is

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				// TODO: Add code to turn off LEDs given in the LEDMask mask here, leave others as-is

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				// TODO: Add code to turn on only LEDs given in the LEDMask mask here, all others off

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				// TODO: Add code to set the Leds in the given LEDMask to the status given in ActiveMask here

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				// TODO: Add code to toggle the Leds in the given LEDMask, ignoring all others

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				// TODO: Add code to return the current LEDs status' here which can be masked against LED_LED* macros

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/CodeTemplates/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/CodeTemplates/LUFAConfig.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 6c98d03a4..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/CodeTemplates/LUFAConfig.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,167 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File (Template)

- *

- *  This is a header file which can be used to configure LUFA's

- *  compile time options, as an alternative to the compile time

- *  constants supplied through a makefile. To use this configuration

- *  header, copy this into your project's root directory and supply

- *  the \c USE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER token to the compiler so that it is

- *  defined in all compiled source files.

- *

- *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA

- *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".

- */

-

-#ifndef __LUFA_CONFIG_H__

-#define __LUFA_CONFIG_H__

-

-	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)

-

-		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */

-//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES

-

-		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */

-//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY

-//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH

-

-		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */

-//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG

-//		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY

-//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY

-//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT

-//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS

-

-		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */

-//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS

-//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS

-//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS

-//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL

-//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE

-//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT

-//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP

-//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER

-

-		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */

-//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}

-//      #define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT

-//      #define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE

-

-	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)

-

-		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */

-//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES

-

-		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */

-//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY

-//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH

-

-		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */

-//		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT

-//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS

-

-		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */

-//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS

-//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS

-//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS

-//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL

-//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE

-// 		#define MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX               {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP

-//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER

-

-	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)

-

-		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */

-//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES

-

-		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */

-//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY

-//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH

-

-		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */

-//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG

-//		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY

-//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY

-//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS

-

-		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */

-//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL

-//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE

-//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT

-//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP

-//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER

-

-		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */

-//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}

-//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}

-//      #define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT

-//      #define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE

-

-	#else

-

-		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.

-

-	#endif

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/CodeTemplates/makefile_template b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/CodeTemplates/makefile_template
deleted file mode 100644
index ae6cfd3e2..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/CodeTemplates/makefile_template
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
-#

-#             LUFA Library

-#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-#

-#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-#           www.lufa-lib.org

-#

-# --------------------------------------

-#         LUFA Project Makefile.

-# --------------------------------------

-

-MCU          = at90usb1287

-ARCH         = AVR8

-BOARD        = USBKEY

-F_CPU        = 8000000

-F_USB        = $(F_CPU)

-OPTIMIZATION = s

-TARGET       = Target

-SRC          = $(TARGET).c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) $(LUFA_SRC_PLATFORM)

-LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA

-CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig

-LD_FLAGS     =

-

-# Default target

-all:

-

-# Include LUFA build script makefiles

-include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk

-include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk

-include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk

-include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk

-include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk

-include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk

-include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk

-include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk

-include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Common/ArchitectureSpecific.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Common/ArchitectureSpecific.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 1e09edf29..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Common/ArchitectureSpecific.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,177 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Architecture specific definitions relating to specific processor architectures.

- *

- *  \copydetails Group_ArchitectureSpecific

- *

- *  \note Do not include this file directly, rather include the Common.h header file instead to gain this file's

- *        functionality.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Common

- *  \defgroup Group_ArchitectureSpecific Architecture Specific Definitions

- *  \brief Architecture specific definitions relating to specific processor architectures.

- *

- *  Architecture specific macros, functions and other definitions, which relate to specific architectures. This

- *  definitions may or may not be available in some form on other architectures, and thus should be protected by

- *  preprocessor checks in portable code to prevent compile errors.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LUFA_ARCHSPEC_H__

-#define __LUFA_ARCHSPEC_H__

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_COMMON_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Common/Common.h instead to gain this functionality.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) || (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-					/** Re-enables the AVR's JTAG bus in software, until a system reset. This will re-enable JTAG debugging

-					 *  interface after is has been disabled in software via \ref JTAG_DISABLE().

-					 *

-					 *  \note This macro is not available for all architectures.

-					 */

-					#define JTAG_ENABLE()                  MACROS{                                      \

-																	__asm__ __volatile__ (               \

-																	"in __tmp_reg__,__SREG__" "\n\t"     \

-																	"cli" "\n\t"                         \

-																	"out %1, %0" "\n\t"                  \

-																	"out __SREG__, __tmp_reg__" "\n\t"   \

-																	"out %1, %0" "\n\t"                  \

-																	:                                    \

-																	: "r" (MCUCR & ~(1 << JTD)),         \

-																	  "M" (_SFR_IO_ADDR(MCUCR))          \

-																	: "r0");                             \

-															}MACROE

-

-					/** Disables the AVR's JTAG bus in software, until a system reset. This will override the current JTAG

-					 *  status as set by the JTAGEN fuse, disabling JTAG debugging and reverting the JTAG pins back to GPIO

-					 *  mode.

-					 *

-					 *  \note This macro is not available for all architectures.

-					 */

-					#define JTAG_DISABLE()                  MACROS{                                      \

-																	__asm__ __volatile__ (               \

-																	"in __tmp_reg__,__SREG__" "\n\t"     \

-																	"cli" "\n\t"                         \

-																	"out %1, %0" "\n\t"                  \

-																	"out __SREG__, __tmp_reg__" "\n\t"   \

-																	"out %1, %0" "\n\t"                  \

-																	:                                    \

-																	: "r" (MCUCR | (1 << JTD)),          \

-																	  "M" (_SFR_IO_ADDR(MCUCR))          \

-																	: "r0");                             \

-															}MACROE

-				#endif

-

-				/** Defines a volatile \c NOP statement which cannot be optimized out by the compiler, and thus can always

-				 *  be set as a breakpoint in the resulting code. Useful for debugging purposes, where the optimizer

-				 *  removes/reorders code to the point where break points cannot reliably be set.

-				 *

-				 *  \note This macro is not available for all architectures.

-				 */

-				#define JTAG_DEBUG_POINT()              __asm__ __volatile__ ("nop" ::)

-

-				/** Defines an explicit JTAG break point in the resulting binary via the assembly \c BREAK statement. When

-				 *  a JTAG is used, this causes the program execution to halt when reached until manually resumed.

-				 *

-				 *  \note This macro is not available for all architectures.

-				 */

-				#define JTAG_DEBUG_BREAK()              __asm__ __volatile__ ("break" ::)

-

-				/** Macro for testing condition "x" and breaking via \ref JTAG_DEBUG_BREAK() if the condition is false.

-				 *

-				 *  \note This macro is not available for all architectures.

-				 *

-				 *  \param[in] Condition  Condition that will be evaluated.

-				*/

-				#define JTAG_ASSERT(Condition)          MACROS{ if (!(Condition)) { JTAG_DEBUG_BREAK(); } }MACROE

-

-				/** Macro for testing condition \c "x" and writing debug data to the stdout stream if \c false. The stdout stream

-				 *  must be pre-initialized before this macro is run and linked to an output device, such as the microcontroller's

-				 *  USART peripheral.

-				 *

-				 *  The output takes the form "{FILENAME}: Function {FUNCTION NAME}, Line {LINE NUMBER}: Assertion {Condition} failed."

-				 *

-				 *  \note This macro is not available for all architectures.

-				 *

-				 *  \param[in] Condition  Condition that will be evaluated,

-				 */

-				#define STDOUT_ASSERT(Condition)        MACROS{ if (!(x)) {                                             \

-				                                                     printf_P(PSTR("%s: Function \"%s\", Line %d: "     \

-				                                                                   "Assertion \"%s\" failed.\r\n"),     \

-				                                                                   __FILE__, __func__, __LINE__, #Condition); } }MACROE

-

-				#if !defined(pgm_read_ptr) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-					/** Reads a pointer out of PROGMEM space on the AVR8 architecture. This is currently a wrapper for the

-					 *  avr-libc \c pgm_read_ptr() macro with a \c void* cast, so that its value can be assigned directly

-					 *  to a pointer variable or used in pointer arithmetic without further casting in C. In a future

-					 *  avr-libc distribution this will be part of the standard API and will be implemented in a more formal

-					 *  manner.

-					 *

-					 *  \note This macro is not available for all architectures.

-					 *

-					 *  \param[in] Address  Address of the pointer to read.

-					 *

-					 *  \return Pointer retrieved from PROGMEM space.

-					 */

-					#define pgm_read_ptr(Address)        (void*)pgm_read_word(Address)

-				#endif

-			#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)

-				#define JTAG_DEBUG_POINT()              __asm__ __volatile__ ("nop" ::)

-				#define JTAG_DEBUG_BREAK()              __asm__ __volatile__ ("breakpoint" ::)

-				#define JTAG_ASSERT(Condition)          MACROS{ if (!(Condition)) { JTAG_DEBUG_BREAK(); } }MACROE

-				#define STDOUT_ASSERT(Condition)        MACROS{ if (!(x)) {                                      \

-				                                                     printf("%s: Function \"%s\", Line %d: "     \

-				                                                            "Assertion \"%s\" failed.\r\n"),     \

-				                                                            __FILE__, __func__, __LINE__, #Condition); } }MACROE

-			#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Common/Architectures.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Common/Architectures.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 8941f7c0c..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Common/Architectures.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,84 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Supported library architecture defines.

- *

- *  \copydetails Group_Architectures

- *

- *  \note Do not include this file directly, rather include the Common.h header file instead to gain this file's

- *        functionality.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Common

- *  \defgroup Group_Architectures Hardware Architectures

- *  \brief Supported library architecture defines.

- *

- *  Architecture macros for selecting the desired target microcontroller architecture. One of these values should be

- *  defined as the value of \c ARCH in the user project makefile via the \c -D compiler switch to GCC, to select the

- *  target architecture.

- *

- *  The selected architecture should remain consistent with the makefile \c ARCH value, which is used to select the

- *  underlying driver source files for each architecture.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LUFA_ARCHITECTURES_H__

-#define __LUFA_ARCHITECTURES_H__

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_COMMON_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Common/Common.h instead to gain this functionality.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Selects the Atmel 8-bit AVR (AT90USB* and ATMEGA*U* chips) architecture. */

-			#define ARCH_AVR8           0

-

-			/** Selects the Atmel 32-bit UC3 AVR (AT32UC3* chips) architecture. */

-			#define ARCH_UC3            1

-

-			/** Selects the Atmel XMEGA AVR (ATXMEGA*U chips) architecture. */

-			#define ARCH_XMEGA          2

-

-			#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				#define ARCH_           ARCH_AVR8

-

-				#if !defined(ARCH)

-					#define ARCH        ARCH_AVR8

-				#endif

-			#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Common/Attributes.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Common/Attributes.h
deleted file mode 100644
index fce75d0ed..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Common/Attributes.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,150 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Special function/variable attribute macros.

- *

- *  \copydetails Group_FuncVarAttributes

- *

- *  \note Do not include this file directly, rather include the Common.h header file instead to gain this file's

- *        functionality.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Common

- *  \defgroup Group_FuncVarAttributes Function/Variable Attributes

- *  \brief Special function/variable attribute macros.

- *

- *  This module contains macros for applying specific attributes to functions and variables to control various

- *  optimizer and code generation features of the compiler. Attributes may be placed in the function prototype

- *  or variable declaration in any order, and multiple attributes can be specified for a single item via a space

- *  separated list.

- *

- *  On incompatible versions of GCC or on other compilers, these macros evaluate to nothing unless they are

- *  critical to the code's function and thus must throw a compile error when used.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LUFA_ATTR_H__

-#define __LUFA_ATTR_H__

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_COMMON_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Common/Common.h instead to gain this functionality.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			#if (__GNUC__ >= 3) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				/** Indicates to the compiler that the function can not ever return, so that any stack restoring or

-				 *  return code may be omitted by the compiler in the resulting binary.

-				 */

-				#define ATTR_NO_RETURN               __attribute__ ((noreturn))

-

-				/** Indicates that the function returns a value which should not be ignored by the user code. When

-				 *  applied, any ignored return value from calling the function will produce a compiler warning.

-				 */

-				#define ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT      __attribute__ ((warn_unused_result))

-

-				/** Indicates that the specified parameters of the function are pointers which should never be \c NULL.

-				 *  When applied as a 1-based comma separated list the compiler will emit a warning if the specified

-				 *  parameters are known at compiler time to be \c NULL at the point of calling the function.

-				 */

-				#define ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(...)   __attribute__ ((nonnull (__VA_ARGS__)))

-

-				/** Removes any preamble or postamble from the function. When used, the function will not have any

-				 *  register or stack saving code. This should be used with caution, and when used the programmer

-				 *  is responsible for maintaining stack and register integrity.

-				 */

-				#define ATTR_NAKED                   __attribute__ ((naked))

-

-				/** Prevents the compiler from considering a specified function for in-lining. When applied, the given

-				 *  function will not be in-lined under any circumstances.

-				 */

-				#define ATTR_NO_INLINE               __attribute__ ((noinline))

-

-				/** Forces the compiler to inline the specified function. When applied, the given function will be

-				 *  in-lined under all circumstances.

-				 */

-				#define ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE           __attribute__ ((always_inline))

-

-				/** Indicates that the specified function is pure, in that it has no side-effects other than global

-				 *  or parameter variable access.

-				 */

-				#define ATTR_PURE                    __attribute__ ((pure))

-

-				/** Indicates that the specified function is constant, in that it has no side effects other than

-				 *  parameter access.

-				 */

-				#define ATTR_CONST                   __attribute__ ((const))

-

-				/** Marks a given function as deprecated, which produces a warning if the function is called. */

-				#define ATTR_DEPRECATED              __attribute__ ((deprecated))

-

-				/** Marks a function as a weak reference, which can be overridden by other functions with an

-				 *  identical name (in which case the weak reference is discarded at link time).

-				 */

-				#define ATTR_WEAK                    __attribute__ ((weak))

-			#endif

-

-			/** Forces the compiler to not automatically zero the given global variable on startup, so that the

-			 *  current RAM contents is retained. Under most conditions this value will be random due to the

-			 *  behavior of volatile memory once power is removed, but may be used in some specific circumstances,

-			 *  like the passing of values back after a system watchdog reset.

-			 */

-			#define ATTR_NO_INIT                     __attribute__ ((section (".noinit")))

-

-			/** Places the function in one of the initialization sections, which execute before the main function

-			 *  of the application. Refer to the avr-libc manual for more information on the initialization sections.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] SectionIndex  Initialization section number where the function should be placed.

-			 */

-			#define ATTR_INIT_SECTION(SectionIndex)  __attribute__ ((used, naked, section (".init" #SectionIndex )))

-

-			/** Marks a function as an alias for another function.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Func  Name of the function which the given function name should alias.

-			 */

-			#define ATTR_ALIAS(Func)                 __attribute__ ((alias( #Func )))

-

-			/** Marks a variable or struct element for packing into the smallest space available, omitting any

-			 *  alignment bytes usually added between fields to optimize field accesses.

-			 */

-			#define ATTR_PACKED                      __attribute__ ((packed))

-

-			/** Indicates the minimum alignment in bytes for a variable or struct element.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Bytes  Minimum number of bytes the item should be aligned to.

-			 */

-			#define ATTR_ALIGNED(Bytes)              __attribute__ ((aligned(Bytes)))

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Common/BoardTypes.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Common/BoardTypes.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 4c152dab2..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Common/BoardTypes.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,231 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Supported pre-made board hardware defines.

- *

- *  \copydetails Group_BoardTypes

- *

- *  \note Do not include this file directly, rather include the Common.h header file instead to gain this file's

- *        functionality.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Common

- *  \defgroup Group_BoardTypes Board Types

- *  \brief Supported pre-made board hardware defines.

- *

- *  Board macros for indicating the chosen physical board hardware to the library. These macros should be used when

- *  defining the \c BOARD token to the chosen hardware via the \c -D switch in the project makefile. If a custom

- *  board is used, the \ref BOARD_NONE or \ref BOARD_USER values should be selected.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LUFA_BOARDTYPES_H__

-#define __LUFA_BOARDTYPES_H__

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_COMMON_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Common/Common.h instead to gain this functionality.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Selects the user-defined board drivers, which should be placed in the user project's folder

-			 *  under a directory named \c /Board/. Each board driver should be named identically to the LUFA

-			 *  master board driver (i.e., driver in the \c LUFA/Drivers/Board directory) so that the library

-			 *  can correctly identify it.

-			 */

-			#define BOARD_USER                 0

-

-			/** Disables board drivers when operation will not be adversely affected (e.g. LEDs) - use of board drivers

-			 *  such as the Joystick driver, where the removal would adversely affect the code's operation is still disallowed. */

-			#define BOARD_NONE                 1

-

-			/** Selects the USBKEY specific board drivers, including Temperature, Button, Dataflash, Joystick and LED drivers. */

-			#define BOARD_USBKEY               2

-

-			/** Selects the STK525 specific board drivers, including Temperature, Button, Dataflash, Joystick and LED drivers. */

-			#define BOARD_STK525               3

-

-			/** Selects the STK526 specific board drivers, including Temperature, Button, Dataflash, Joystick and LED drivers. */

-			#define BOARD_STK526               4

-

-			/** Selects the RZUSBSTICK specific board drivers, including the driver for the boards LEDs. */

-			#define BOARD_RZUSBSTICK           5

-

-			/** Selects the ATAVRUSBRF01 specific board drivers, including the driver for the board LEDs. */

-			#define BOARD_ATAVRUSBRF01         6

-

-			/** Selects the BUMBLEB specific board drivers, using the officially recommended peripheral layout. */

-			#define BOARD_BUMBLEB              7

-

-			/** Selects the XPLAIN (Revision 2 or newer) specific board drivers, including LED and Dataflash drivers. */

-			#define BOARD_XPLAIN               8

-

-			/** Selects the XPLAIN (Revision 1) specific board drivers, including LED and Dataflash drivers. */

-			#define BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1          9

-

-			/** Selects the EVK527 specific board drivers, including Temperature, Button, Dataflash, Joystick and LED drivers. */

-			#define BOARD_EVK527               10

-

-			/** Selects the Teensy version 1.x specific board drivers, including the driver for the board LEDs. */

-			#define BOARD_TEENSY               11

-

-			/** Selects the USBTINY MKII specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */

-			#define BOARD_USBTINYMKII          12

-

-			/** Selects the Benito specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */

-			#define BOARD_BENITO               13

-

-			/** Selects the JM-DB-U2 specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */

-			#define BOARD_JMDBU2               14

-

-			/** Selects the Olimex AVR-USB-162 specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */

-			#define BOARD_OLIMEX162            15

-

-			/** Selects the UDIP specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */

-			#define BOARD_UDIP                 16

-

-			/** Selects the BUI specific board drivers, including the driver for the board LEDs. */

-			#define BOARD_BUI                  17

-

-			/** Selects the Arduino Uno specific board drivers, including the driver for the board LEDs. */

-			#define BOARD_UNO                  18

-

-			/** Selects the Busware CUL V3 specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */

-			#define BOARD_CULV3                19

-

-			/** Selects the Blackcat USB JTAG specific board drivers, including the driver for the board LEDs. */

-			#define BOARD_BLACKCAT             20

-

-			/** Selects the Maximus specific board drivers, including the driver for the board LEDs. */

-			#define BOARD_MAXIMUS              21

-

-			/** Selects the Minimus specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */

-			#define BOARD_MINIMUS              22

-

-			/** Selects the Adafruit U4 specific board drivers, including the Button driver. */

-			#define BOARD_ADAFRUITU4           23

-

-			/** Selects the Microsin AVR-USB162 specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */

-			#define BOARD_MICROSIN162          24

-

-			/** Selects the Kernel Concepts USBFOO specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */

-			#define BOARD_USBFOO               25

-

-			/** Selects the Sparkfun ATMEGA8U2 specific board drivers, including the driver for the board LEDs. */

-			#define BOARD_SPARKFUN8U2          26

-

-			/** Selects the Atmel EVK1101 specific board drivers, including the Button, Joystick and LED drivers. */

-			#define BOARD_EVK1101              27

-

-			/** Selects the Busware TUL specific board drivers, including the Button and LED drivers. */

-			#define BOARD_TUL                  28

-

-			/** Selects the Atmel EVK1100 specific board drivers, including the Button, Joystick and LED drivers. */

-			#define BOARD_EVK1100              29

-

-			/** Selects the Atmel EVK1104 specific board drivers, including the Button and LED drivers. */

-			#define BOARD_EVK1104              30

-

-			/** Selects the Atmel XMEGA A3BU Xplained specific board drivers, including Dataflash, Button and LED drivers. */

-			#define BOARD_A3BU_XPLAINED        31

-

-			/** Selects the Teensy version 2.x specific board drivers, including the driver for the board LEDs. */

-			#define BOARD_TEENSY2              32

-

-			/** Selects the USB2AX version 1 and 2 specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */

-			#define BOARD_USB2AX               33

-

-			/** Selects the USB2AX version 3 specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */

-			#define BOARD_USB2AX_V3            34

-

-			/** Selects the Micropendous 32U2 specific board drivers, including the Button and LED drivers. */

-			#define BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_32U2    35

-

-			/** Selects the Micropendous A specific board drivers, including the driver for the board Button. */

-			#define BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_A       36

-

-			/** Selects the Micropendous 1 specific board drivers, including the driver for the board Button. */

-			#define BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_1       37

-

-			/** Selects the Micropendous 2 specific board drivers, including the driver for the board Button. */

-			#define BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_2       38

-

-			/** Selects the Micropendous 3 specific board drivers, including the driver for the board Button. */

-			#define BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_3       39

-

-			/** Selects the Micropendous 4 specific board drivers, including the driver for the board Button. */

-			#define BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_4       40

-

-			/** Selects the Micropendous DIP specific board drivers, including the driver for the board Button. */

-			#define BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_DIP     41

-

-			/** Selects the Micropendous (Arduino-like) revision 1 specific board drivers, including the Button and LED drivers. */

-			#define BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_REV1    42

-

-			/** Selects the Micropendous (Arduino-like) revision 2 specific board drivers, including the Button and LED drivers. */

-			#define BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_REV2    43

-

-			/** Selects the XMEGA B1 Xplained specific board drivers, including the Button and LED drivers. */

-			#define BOARD_B1_XPLAINED          44

-

-			/** Selects the Bitwizard Multio specific board drivers, including the driver for the board LEDs. */

-			#define BOARD_MULTIO               45

-

-			/** Selects the Bitwizard Big-Multio specific board drivers, including the driver for the board LEDs. */

-			#define BOARD_BIGMULTIO            46

-

-			/** Selects the DorkbotPDX Duce specific board drivers, including the driver for the board LEDs. */

-			#define BOARD_DUCE                 47

-			

-			/** Selects the Olimex AVR-USB-32U4 specific board drivers, including the Button and LED drivers. */

-			#define BOARD_OLIMEX32U4           48

-			

-			/** Selects the Olimex AVR-USB-T32U4 specific board drivers, including the Button and LED drivers. */

-			#define BOARD_OLIMEXT32U4          49

-			

-			/** Selects the Olimex AVR-ISP-MK2 specific board drivers, including the Button and LED drivers. */

-			#define BOARD_OLIMEXISPMK2         50

-

-

-			#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				#define BOARD_                 BOARD_NONE

-

-				#if !defined(BOARD)

-					#define BOARD              BOARD_NONE

-				#endif

-			#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Common/Common.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Common/Common.h
deleted file mode 100644
index cf1f49b9d..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Common/Common.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,381 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \dir

- *  \brief Common library header files.

- *

- *  This folder contains header files which are common to all parts of the LUFA library. They may be used freely in

- *  user applications.

- */

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Common library convenience headers, macros and functions.

- *

- *  \copydetails Group_Common

- */

-

-/** \defgroup Group_Common Common Utility Headers - LUFA/Drivers/Common/Common.h

- *  \brief Common library convenience headers, macros and functions.

- *

- *  Common utility headers containing macros, functions, enums and types which are common to all

- *  aspects of the library.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-/** \defgroup Group_GlobalInt Global Interrupt Macros

- *  \brief Convenience macros for the management of interrupts globally within the device.

- *

- *  Macros and functions to create and control global interrupts within the device.

- */

-

-#ifndef __LUFA_COMMON_H__

-#define __LUFA_COMMON_H__

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_COMMON_H

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include <stdint.h>

-		#include <stdbool.h>

-		#include <string.h>

-		#include <stddef.h>

-

-		#include "Architectures.h"

-		#include "BoardTypes.h"

-		#include "ArchitectureSpecific.h"

-		#include "CompilerSpecific.h"

-		#include "Attributes.h"

-

-		#if defined(USE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER)

-			#include "LUFAConfig.h"

-		#endif

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Architecture specific utility includes: */

-		#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			/** Type define for an unsigned integer the same width as the selected architecture's machine register.

-			 *  This is distinct from the non-specific standard int data type, whose width is machine dependant but

-			 *  which may not reflect the actual machine register width on some targets (e.g. AVR8).

-			 */

-			typedef MACHINE_REG_t uint_reg_t;

-		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)

-			#include <avr/io.h>

-			#include <avr/interrupt.h>

-			#include <avr/pgmspace.h>

-			#include <avr/eeprom.h>

-			#include <avr/boot.h>

-			#include <math.h>

-			#include <util/delay.h>

-

-			typedef uint8_t uint_reg_t;

-

-			#define ARCH_HAS_EEPROM_ADDRESS_SPACE

-			#define ARCH_HAS_FLASH_ADDRESS_SPACE

-			#define ARCH_HAS_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE

-			#define ARCH_LITTLE_ENDIAN

-

-			#include "Endianness.h"

-		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)

-			#include <avr32/io.h>

-			#include <math.h>

-

-			// === TODO: Find abstracted way to handle these ===

-			#define PROGMEM                  

-			#define pgm_read_byte(x)         *x

-			#define memcmp_P(...)            memcmp(__VA_ARGS__)

-			#define memcpy_P(...)            memcpy(__VA_ARGS__)

-			// =================================================

-

-			typedef uint32_t uint_reg_t;

-

-			#define ARCH_BIG_ENDIAN

-

-			#include "Endianness.h"

-		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)

-			#include <avr/io.h>

-			#include <avr/interrupt.h>

-			#include <avr/pgmspace.h>

-			#include <avr/eeprom.h>

-			#include <math.h>

-			#include <util/delay.h>

-

-			typedef uint8_t uint_reg_t;

-

-			#define ARCH_HAS_EEPROM_ADDRESS_SPACE

-			#define ARCH_HAS_FLASH_ADDRESS_SPACE

-			#define ARCH_HAS_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE

-			#define ARCH_LITTLE_ENDIAN

-

-			#include "Endianness.h"

-		#else

-			#error Unknown device architecture specified.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Macro for encasing other multi-statement macros. This should be used along with an opening brace

-			 *  before the start of any multi-statement macro, so that the macros contents as a whole are treated

-			 *  as a discrete block and not as a list of separate statements which may cause problems when used as

-			 *  a block (such as inline \c if statements).

-			 */

-			#define MACROS                  do

-

-			/** Macro for encasing other multi-statement macros. This should be used along with a preceding closing

-			 *  brace at the end of any multi-statement macro, so that the macros contents as a whole are treated

-			 *  as a discrete block and not as a list of separate statements which may cause problems when used as

-			 *  a block (such as inline \c if statements).

-			 */

-			#define MACROE                  while (0)

-

-			/** Convenience macro to determine the larger of two values.

-			 *

-			 *  \attention This macro should only be used with operands that do not have side effects from being evaluated

-			 *             multiple times.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] x  First value to compare

-			 *  \param[in] y  First value to compare

-			 *

-			 *  \return The larger of the two input parameters

-			 */

-			#if !defined(MAX) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				#define MAX(x, y)               (((x) > (y)) ? (x) : (y))

-			#endif

-

-			/** Convenience macro to determine the smaller of two values.

-			 *

-			 *  \attention This macro should only be used with operands that do not have side effects from being evaluated

-			 *             multiple times.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] x  First value to compare

-			 *  \param[in] y  First value to compare

-			 *

-			 *  \return The smaller of the two input parameters

-			 */

-			#if !defined(MIN) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				#define MIN(x, y)               (((x) < (y)) ? (x) : (y))

-			#endif

-

-			#if !defined(STRINGIFY) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				/** Converts the given input into a string, via the C Preprocessor. This macro puts literal quotation

-				 *  marks around the input, converting the source into a string literal.

-				 *

-				 *  \param[in] x  Input to convert into a string literal.

-				 *

-				 *  \return String version of the input.

-				 */

-				#define STRINGIFY(x)            #x

-

-				/** Converts the given input into a string after macro expansion, via the C Preprocessor. This macro puts

-				 *  literal quotation marks around the expanded input, converting the source into a string literal.

-				 *

-				 *  \param[in] x  Input to expand and convert into a string literal.

-				 *

-				 *  \return String version of the expanded input.

-				 */

-				#define STRINGIFY_EXPANDED(x)   STRINGIFY(x)

-			#endif

-

-			#if !defined(ISR) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				/** Macro for the definition of interrupt service routines, so that the compiler can insert the required

-				 *  prologue and epilogue code to properly manage the interrupt routine without affecting the main thread's

-				 *  state with unintentional side-effects.

-				 *

-				 *  Interrupt handlers written using this macro may still need to be registered with the microcontroller's

-				 *  Interrupt Controller (if present) before they will properly handle incoming interrupt events.

-				 *

-				 *  \note This macro is only supplied on some architectures, where the standard library does not include a valid

-				 *        definition. If an existing definition exists, the alternative definition here will be ignored.

-				 *

-				 *  \ingroup Group_GlobalInt

-				 *

-				 *  \param[in] Name  Unique name of the interrupt service routine.

-				 */

-				#define ISR(Name, ...)          void Name (void) __attribute__((__interrupt__)) __VA_ARGS__; void Name (void)

-			#endif

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Function to reverse the individual bits in a byte - i.e. bit 7 is moved to bit 0, bit 6 to bit 1,

-			 *  etc.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data whose bits are to be reversed.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Input data with the individual bits reversed (mirrored).

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t BitReverse(uint8_t Byte) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST;

-			static inline uint8_t BitReverse(uint8_t Byte)

-			{

-				Byte = (((Byte & 0xF0) >> 4) | ((Byte & 0x0F) << 4));

-				Byte = (((Byte & 0xCC) >> 2) | ((Byte & 0x33) << 2));

-				Byte = (((Byte & 0xAA) >> 1) | ((Byte & 0x55) << 1));

-

-				return Byte;

-			}

-

-			/** Function to perform a blocking delay for a specified number of milliseconds. The actual delay will be

-			 *  at a minimum the specified number of milliseconds, however due to loop overhead and internal calculations

-			 *  may be slightly higher.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Milliseconds  Number of milliseconds to delay

-			 */

-			static inline void Delay_MS(uint16_t Milliseconds) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Delay_MS(uint16_t Milliseconds)

-			{

-				#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)

-				if (GCC_IS_COMPILE_CONST(Milliseconds))

-				{

-					_delay_ms(Milliseconds);

-				}

-				else

-				{

-					while (Milliseconds--)

-					  _delay_ms(1);

-				}

-				#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)

-				while (Milliseconds--)

-				{

-					__builtin_mtsr(AVR32_COUNT, 0);

-					while ((uint32_t)__builtin_mfsr(AVR32_COUNT) < (F_CPU / 1000));

-				}

-				#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)

-				if (GCC_IS_COMPILE_CONST(Milliseconds))

-				{

-					_delay_ms(Milliseconds);

-				}

-				else

-				{

-					while (Milliseconds--)

-					  _delay_ms(1);

-				}

-				#endif

-			}

-

-			/** Retrieves a mask which contains the current state of the global interrupts for the device. This

-			 *  value can be stored before altering the global interrupt enable state, before restoring the

-			 *  flag(s) back to their previous values after a critical section using \ref SetGlobalInterruptMask().

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_GlobalInt

-			 *

-			 *  \return  Mask containing the current Global Interrupt Enable Mask bit(s).

-			 */

-			static inline uint_reg_t GetGlobalInterruptMask(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint_reg_t GetGlobalInterruptMask(void)

-			{

-				GCC_MEMORY_BARRIER();

-

-				#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)

-				return SREG;

-				#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)

-				return __builtin_mfsr(AVR32_SR);

-				#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)

-				return SREG;

-				#endif

-			}

-

-			/** Sets the global interrupt enable state of the microcontroller to the mask passed into the function.

-			 *  This can be combined with \ref GetGlobalInterruptMask() to save and restore the Global Interrupt Enable

-			 *  Mask bit(s) of the device after a critical section has completed.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_GlobalInt

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] GlobalIntState  Global Interrupt Enable Mask value to use

-			 */

-			static inline void SetGlobalInterruptMask(const uint_reg_t GlobalIntState) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void SetGlobalInterruptMask(const uint_reg_t GlobalIntState)

-			{

-				GCC_MEMORY_BARRIER();

-

-				#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)

-				SREG = GlobalIntState;

-				#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)

-				if (GlobalIntState & AVR32_SR_GM)

-				  __builtin_ssrf(AVR32_SR_GM_OFFSET);

-				else

-				  __builtin_csrf(AVR32_SR_GM_OFFSET);

-				#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)

-				SREG = GlobalIntState;

-				#endif

-

-				GCC_MEMORY_BARRIER();

-			}

-

-			/** Enables global interrupt handling for the device, allowing interrupts to be handled.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_GlobalInt

-			 */

-			static inline void GlobalInterruptEnable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void GlobalInterruptEnable(void)

-			{

-				GCC_MEMORY_BARRIER();

-

-				#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)

-				sei();

-				#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)

-				__builtin_csrf(AVR32_SR_GM_OFFSET);

-				#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)

-				sei();

-				#endif

-

-				GCC_MEMORY_BARRIER();

-			}

-

-			/** Disabled global interrupt handling for the device, preventing interrupts from being handled.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_GlobalInt

-			 */

-			static inline void GlobalInterruptDisable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void GlobalInterruptDisable(void)

-			{

-				GCC_MEMORY_BARRIER();

-

-				#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)

-				cli();

-				#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)

-				__builtin_ssrf(AVR32_SR_GM_OFFSET);

-				#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)

-				cli();

-				#endif

-

-				GCC_MEMORY_BARRIER();

-			}

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Common/CompilerSpecific.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Common/CompilerSpecific.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 22afe940b..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Common/CompilerSpecific.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,97 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Compiler specific definitions for code optimization and correctness.

- *

- *  \copydetails Group_CompilerSpecific

- *

- *  \note Do not include this file directly, rather include the Common.h header file instead to gain this file's

- *        functionality.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Common

- *  \defgroup Group_CompilerSpecific Compiler Specific Definitions

- *  \brief Compiler specific definitions for code optimization and correctness.

- *

- *  Compiler specific definitions to expose certain compiler features which may increase the level of code optimization

- *  for a specific compiler, or correct certain issues that may be present such as memory barriers for use in conjunction

- *  with atomic variable access.

- *

- *  Where possible, on alternative compilers, these macros will either have no effect, or default to returning a sane value

- *  so that they can be used in existing code without the need for extra compiler checks in the user application code.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LUFA_COMPILERSPEC_H__

-#define __LUFA_COMPILERSPEC_H__

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_COMMON_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Common/Common.h instead to gain this functionality.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			#if defined(__GNUC__) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				/** Forces GCC to use pointer indirection (via the device's pointer register pairs) when accessing the given

-				 *  struct pointer. In some cases GCC will emit non-optimal assembly code when accessing a structure through

-				 *  a pointer, resulting in a larger binary. When this macro is used on a (non \c const) structure pointer before

-				 *  use, it will force GCC to use pointer indirection on the elements rather than direct store and load

-				 *  instructions.

-				 *

-				 *  \param[in, out] StructPtr  Pointer to a structure which is to be forced into indirect access mode.

-				 */

-				#define GCC_FORCE_POINTER_ACCESS(StructPtr)   __asm__ __volatile__("" : "=b" (StructPtr) : "0" (StructPtr))

-

-				/** Forces GCC to create a memory barrier, ensuring that memory accesses are not reordered past the barrier point.

-				 *  This can be used before ordering-critical operations, to ensure that the compiler does not re-order the resulting

-				 *  assembly output in an unexpected manner on sections of code that are ordering-specific.

-				 */

-				#define GCC_MEMORY_BARRIER()                  __asm__ __volatile__("" ::: "memory");

-

-				/** Determines if the specified value can be determined at compile-time to be a constant value when compiling under GCC.

-				 *

-				 *  \param[in] x  Value to check compile-time constantness of.

-				 *

-				 *  \return Boolean true if the given value is known to be a compile time constant, false otherwise.

-				 */

-				#define GCC_IS_COMPILE_CONST(x)               __builtin_constant_p(x)

-			#else

-				#define GCC_FORCE_POINTER_ACCESS(StructPtr)

-				#define GCC_MEMORY_BARRIER()

-				#define GCC_IS_COMPILE_CONST(x)               0

-			#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Common/Endianness.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Common/Endianness.h
deleted file mode 100644
index d0812e4e3..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Common/Endianness.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,489 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Endianness and Byte Ordering macros and functions.

- *

- *  \copydetails Group_Endianness

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Endianness

- *  \defgroup Group_ByteSwapping Byte Reordering

- *  \brief Macros and functions for forced byte reordering.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Endianness

- *  \defgroup Group_EndianConversion Endianness Conversion

- *  \brief Macros and functions for automatic endianness conversion.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Common

- *  \defgroup Group_Endianness Endianness and Byte Ordering

- *  \brief Convenience macros and functions relating to byte (re-)ordering

- *

- *  Common library convenience macros and functions relating to byte (re-)ordering.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LUFA_ENDIANNESS_H__

-#define __LUFA_ENDIANNESS_H__

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_COMMON_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Common/Common.h instead to gain this functionality.

-		#endif

-

-		#if !(defined(ARCH_BIG_ENDIAN) || defined(ARCH_LITTLE_ENDIAN))

-			#error ARCH_BIG_ENDIAN or ARCH_LITTLE_ENDIAN not set for the specified architecture.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Swaps the byte ordering of a 16-bit value at compile-time. Do not use this macro for swapping byte orderings

-			 *  of dynamic values computed at runtime, use \ref SwapEndian_16() instead. The result of this macro can be used

-			 *  inside struct or other variable initializers outside of a function, something that is not possible with the

-			 *  inline function variant.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_ByteSwapping

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] x  16-bit value whose byte ordering is to be swapped.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Input value with the byte ordering reversed.

-			 */

-			#define SWAPENDIAN_16(x)            (uint16_t)((((x) & 0xFF00) >> 8) | (((x) & 0x00FF) << 8))

-

-			/** Swaps the byte ordering of a 32-bit value at compile-time. Do not use this macro for swapping byte orderings

-			 *  of dynamic values computed at runtime- use \ref SwapEndian_32() instead. The result of this macro can be used

-			 *  inside struct or other variable initializers outside of a function, something that is not possible with the

-			 *  inline function variant.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_ByteSwapping

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] x  32-bit value whose byte ordering is to be swapped.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Input value with the byte ordering reversed.

-			 */

-			#define SWAPENDIAN_32(x)            (uint32_t)((((x) & 0xFF000000UL) >> 24UL) | (((x) & 0x00FF0000UL) >> 8UL) | \

-			                                               (((x) & 0x0000FF00UL) << 8UL)  | (((x) & 0x000000FFUL) << 24UL))

-

-			#if defined(ARCH_BIG_ENDIAN) && !defined(le16_to_cpu)

-				#define le16_to_cpu(x)           SwapEndian_16(x)

-				#define le32_to_cpu(x)           SwapEndian_32(x)

-				#define be16_to_cpu(x)           (x)

-				#define be32_to_cpu(x)           (x)

-				#define cpu_to_le16(x)           SwapEndian_16(x)

-				#define cpu_to_le32(x)           SwapEndian_32(x)

-				#define cpu_to_be16(x)           (x)

-				#define cpu_to_be32(x)           (x)

-				#define LE16_TO_CPU(x)           SWAPENDIAN_16(x)

-				#define LE32_TO_CPU(x)           SWAPENDIAN_32(x)

-				#define BE16_TO_CPU(x)           (x)

-				#define BE32_TO_CPU(x)           (x)

-				#define CPU_TO_LE16(x)           SWAPENDIAN_16(x)

-				#define CPU_TO_LE32(x)           SWAPENDIAN_32(x)

-				#define CPU_TO_BE16(x)           (x)

-				#define CPU_TO_BE32(x)           (x)

-			#elif !defined(le16_to_cpu)

-				/** \name Run-time endianness conversion */

-				//@{

-

-				/** Performs a conversion between a Little Endian encoded 16-bit piece of data and the

-				 *  Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture.

-				 *

-				 *  On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing.

-				 *

-				 *  \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness

-				 *        conversion, use \ref LE16_TO_CPU instead.

-				 *

-				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion

-				 *

-				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.

-				 *

-				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.

-				 */

-				#define le16_to_cpu(x)           (x)

-

-				/** Performs a conversion between a Little Endian encoded 32-bit piece of data and the

-				 *  Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture.

-				 *

-				 *  On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing.

-				 *

-				 *  \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness

-				 *        conversion, use \ref LE32_TO_CPU instead.

-				 *

-				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion

-				 *

-				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.

-				 *

-				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.

-				 */

-				#define le32_to_cpu(x)           (x)

-

-				/** Performs a conversion between a Big Endian encoded 16-bit piece of data and the

-				 *  Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture.

-				 *

-				 *  On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing.

-				 *

-				 *  \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness

-				 *        conversion, use \ref BE16_TO_CPU instead.

-				 *

-				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion

-				 *

-				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.

-				 *

-				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.

-				 */

-				#define be16_to_cpu(x)           SwapEndian_16(x)

-

-				/** Performs a conversion between a Big Endian encoded 32-bit piece of data and the

-				 *  Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture.

-				 *

-				 *  On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing.

-				 *

-				 *  \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness

-				 *        conversion, use \ref BE32_TO_CPU instead.

-				 *

-				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion

-				 *

-				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.

-				 *

-				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.

-				 */

-				#define be32_to_cpu(x)           SwapEndian_32(x)

-

-				/** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 16-bit piece of data to ensure that it

-				 *  is in Little Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture.

-				 *

-				 *  On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing.

-				 *

-				 *  \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness

-				 *        conversion, use \ref CPU_TO_LE16 instead.

-				 *

-				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion

-				 *

-				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.

-				 *

-				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.

-				 */

-				#define cpu_to_le16(x)           (x)

-

-				/** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 32-bit piece of data to ensure that it

-				 *  is in Little Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture.

-				 *

-				 *  On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing.

-				 *

-				 *  \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness

-				 *        conversion, use \ref CPU_TO_LE32 instead.

-				 *

-				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion

-				 *

-				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.

-				 *

-				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.

-				 */

-				#define cpu_to_le32(x)           (x)

-

-				/** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 16-bit piece of data to ensure that it

-				 *  is in Big Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture.

-				 *

-				 *  On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing.

-				 *

-				 *  \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness

-				 *        conversion, use \ref CPU_TO_BE16 instead.

-				 *

-				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion

-				 *

-				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.

-				 *

-				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.

-				 */

-				#define cpu_to_be16(x)           SwapEndian_16(x)

-

-				/** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 32-bit piece of data to ensure that it

-				 *  is in Big Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture.

-				 *

-				 *  On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing.

-				 *

-				 *  \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness

-				 *        conversion, use \ref CPU_TO_BE32 instead.

-				 *

-				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion

-				 *

-				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.

-				 *

-				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.

-				 */

-				#define cpu_to_be32(x)           SwapEndian_32(x)

-

-				//@}

-

-				/** \name Compile-time endianness conversion */

-				//@{

-

-				/** Performs a conversion between a Little Endian encoded 16-bit piece of data and the

-				 *  Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture.

-				 *

-				 *  On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing.

-				 *

-				 *  \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run time endianness

-				 *        conversion, use \ref le16_to_cpu instead.

-				 *

-				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion

-				 *

-				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.

-				 *

-				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.

-				 */

-				#define LE16_TO_CPU(x)           (x)

-

-				/** Performs a conversion between a Little Endian encoded 32-bit piece of data and the

-				 *  Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture.

-				 *

-				 *  On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing.

-				 *

-				 *  \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run time endianness

-				 *        conversion, use \ref le32_to_cpu instead.

-				 *

-				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion

-				 *

-				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.

-				 *

-				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.

-				 */

-				#define LE32_TO_CPU(x)           (x)

-

-				/** Performs a conversion between a Big Endian encoded 16-bit piece of data and the

-				 *  Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture.

-				 *

-				 *  On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing.

-				 *

-				 *  \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run-time endianness

-				 *        conversion, use \ref be16_to_cpu instead.

-				 *

-				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion

-				 *

-				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.

-				 *

-				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.

-				 */

-				#define BE16_TO_CPU(x)           SWAPENDIAN_16(x)

-

-				/** Performs a conversion between a Big Endian encoded 32-bit piece of data and the

-				 *  Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture.

-				 *

-				 *  On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing.

-				 *

-				 *  \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run-time endianness

-				 *        conversion, use \ref be32_to_cpu instead.

-				 *

-				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion

-				 *

-				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.

-				 *

-				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.

-				 */

-				#define BE32_TO_CPU(x)           SWAPENDIAN_32(x)

-

-				/** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 16-bit piece of data to ensure that it

-				 *  is in Little Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture.

-				 *

-				 *  On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing.

-				 *

-				 *  \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run-time endianness

-				 *        conversion, use \ref cpu_to_le16 instead.

-				 *

-				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion

-				 *

-				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.

-				 *

-				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.

-				 */

-				#define CPU_TO_LE16(x)           (x)

-

-				/** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 32-bit piece of data to ensure that it

-				 *  is in Little Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture.

-				 *

-				 *  On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing.

-				 *

-				 *  \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run-time endianness

-				 *        conversion, use \ref cpu_to_le32 instead.

-				 *

-				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion

-				 *

-				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.

-				 *

-				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.

-				 */

-				#define CPU_TO_LE32(x)           (x)

-

-				/** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 16-bit piece of data to ensure that it

-				 *  is in Big Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture.

-				 *

-				 *  On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing.

-				 *

-				 *  \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run-time endianness

-				 *        conversion, use \ref cpu_to_be16 instead.

-				 *

-				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion

-				 *

-				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.

-				 *

-				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.

-				 */

-				#define CPU_TO_BE16(x)           SWAPENDIAN_16(x)

-

-				/** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 32-bit piece of data to ensure that it

-				 *  is in Big Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture.

-				 *

-				 *  On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing.

-				 *

-				 *  \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run-time endianness

-				 *        conversion, use \ref cpu_to_be32 instead.

-				 *

-				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion

-				 *

-				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.

-				 *

-				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.

-				 */

-				#define CPU_TO_BE32(x)           SWAPENDIAN_32(x)

-

-				//! @}

-			#endif

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Function to reverse the byte ordering of the individual bytes in a 16 bit value.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_ByteSwapping

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Word  Word of data whose bytes are to be swapped.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Input data with the individual bytes reversed.

-			 */

-			static inline uint16_t SwapEndian_16(const uint16_t Word) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST;

-			static inline uint16_t SwapEndian_16(const uint16_t Word)

-			{

-				if (GCC_IS_COMPILE_CONST(Word))

-				  return SWAPENDIAN_16(Word);

-

-				uint8_t Temp;

-

-				union

-				{

-					uint16_t Word;

-					uint8_t  Bytes[2];

-				} Data;

-

-				Data.Word = Word;

-

-				Temp = Data.Bytes[0];

-				Data.Bytes[0] = Data.Bytes[1];

-				Data.Bytes[1] = Temp;

-

-				return Data.Word;

-			}

-

-			/** Function to reverse the byte ordering of the individual bytes in a 32 bit value.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_ByteSwapping

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] DWord  Double word of data whose bytes are to be swapped.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Input data with the individual bytes reversed.

-			 */

-			static inline uint32_t SwapEndian_32(const uint32_t DWord) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST;

-			static inline uint32_t SwapEndian_32(const uint32_t DWord)

-			{

-				if (GCC_IS_COMPILE_CONST(DWord))

-				  return SWAPENDIAN_32(DWord);

-

-				uint8_t Temp;

-

-				union

-				{

-					uint32_t DWord;

-					uint8_t  Bytes[4];

-				} Data;

-

-				Data.DWord = DWord;

-

-				Temp = Data.Bytes[0];

-				Data.Bytes[0] = Data.Bytes[3];

-				Data.Bytes[3] = Temp;

-

-				Temp = Data.Bytes[1];

-				Data.Bytes[1] = Data.Bytes[2];

-				Data.Bytes[2] = Temp;

-

-				return Data.DWord;

-			}

-

-			/** Function to reverse the byte ordering of the individual bytes in a n byte value.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_ByteSwapping

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] Data    Pointer to a number containing an even number of bytes to be reversed.

-			 *  \param[in]     Length  Length of the data in bytes.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Input data with the individual bytes reversed.

-			 */

-			static inline void SwapEndian_n(void* const Data,

-			                                uint8_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			static inline void SwapEndian_n(void* const Data,

-			                                uint8_t Length)

-			{

-				uint8_t* CurrDataPos = (uint8_t*)Data;

-

-				while (Length > 1)

-				{

-					uint8_t Temp = *CurrDataPos;

-					*CurrDataPos = *(CurrDataPos + Length - 1);

-					*(CurrDataPos + Length - 1) = Temp;

-

-					CurrDataPos++;

-					Length -= 2;

-				}

-			}

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Doxygen.conf b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Doxygen.conf
deleted file mode 100644
index 89b2a3327..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Doxygen.conf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1809 +0,0 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.8.1.2

-

-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system

-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.

-#

-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.

-# The format is:

-#       TAG = value [value, ...]

-# For lists items can also be appended using:

-#       TAG += value [value, ...]

-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ").

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# Project related configuration options

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file

-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all

-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the

-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See

-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.

-

-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8

-

-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or sequence of words) that should

-# identify the project. Note that if you do not use Doxywizard you need

-# to put quotes around the project name if it contains spaces.

-

-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library"

-

-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.

-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or

-# if some version control system is used.

-

-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 000000

-

-# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description

-# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer

-# a quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.

-

-PROJECT_BRIEF          =

-

-# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is

-# included in the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not

-# exceed 55 pixels and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels.

-# Doxygen will copy the logo to the output directory.

-

-PROJECT_LOGO           = ./DoxygenPages/Images/LUFA_thumb.png

-

-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)

-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.

-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location

-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.

-

-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/

-

-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create

-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output

-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.

-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of

-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would

-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.

-

-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO

-

-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all

-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this

-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.

-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:

-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,

-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,

-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English

-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,

-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak,

-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.

-

-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English

-

-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will

-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in

-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).

-# Set to NO to disable this.

-

-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES

-

-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend

-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.

-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the

-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.

-

-REPEAT_BRIEF           = NO

-

-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator

-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string

-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be

-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is

-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.

-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically

-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"

-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"

-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"

-

-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \

-                         "The $name widget" \

-                         "The $name file" \

-                         is \

-                         provides \

-                         specifies \

-                         contains \

-                         represents \

-                         a \

-                         an \

-                         the

-

-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then

-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief

-# description.

-

-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO

-

-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all

-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those

-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment

-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.

-

-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO

-

-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full

-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set

-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.

-

-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES

-

-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag

-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is

-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of

-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.

-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the

-# path to strip.

-

-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =

-

-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of

-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells

-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.

-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class

-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that

-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.

-

-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =

-

-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter

-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful if your file system

-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.

-

-SHORT_NAMES            = NO

-

-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen

-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style

-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc

-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments

-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)

-

-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO

-

-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will

-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style

-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments

-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring

-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)

-

-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO

-

-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen

-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///

-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.

-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed

-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.

-

-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO

-

-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented

-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it

-# re-implements.

-

-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES

-

-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce

-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will

-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.

-

-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO

-

-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.

-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.

-

-TAB_SIZE               = 4

-

-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts

-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".

-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to

-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which

-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".

-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.

-

-ALIASES                =

-

-# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).

-# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding

-# "class=itcl::class" will allow you to use the command class in the

-# itcl::class meaning.

-

-TCL_SUBST              =

-

-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C

-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.

-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list

-# of all members will be omitted, etc.

-

-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES

-

-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java

-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for

-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified

-# scopes will look different, etc.

-

-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO

-

-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran

-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for

-# Fortran.

-

-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO

-

-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL

-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for

-# VHDL.

-

-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO

-

-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it

-# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.

-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this

-# tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language

-# is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, CSharp, C,

-# C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make

-# doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C

-# (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions

-# you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.

-

-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =

-

-# If MARKDOWN_SUPPORT is enabled (the default) then doxygen pre-processes all

-# comments according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable

-# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.

-# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you

-# can mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting.

-# Disable only in case of backward compatibilities issues.

-

-MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO

-

-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want

-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should

-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and

-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.

-# func(std::string) {}). This also makes the inheritance and collaboration

-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.

-

-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO

-

-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to

-# enable parsing support.

-

-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO

-

-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.

-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public

-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.

-

-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO

-

-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter

-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)

-# will make doxygen replace the get and set methods by a property in the

-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or

-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the

-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.

-

-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES

-

-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC

-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first

-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default

-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.

-

-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO

-

-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of

-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a

-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to

-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using

-# the \nosubgrouping command.

-

-SUBGROUPING            = YES

-

-# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and

-# unions are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using

-# @ingroup) instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or

-# section (for LaTeX and RTF).

-

-INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO

-

-# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and

-# unions with only public data fields will be shown inline in the documentation

-# of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file, namespace, or group

-# documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set to NO (the default),

-# structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and Man

-# pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).

-

-INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO

-

-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum

-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So

-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct

-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,

-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically

-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound

-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.

-

-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = YES

-

-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to

-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.

-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.

-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is

-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause

-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time

-# causing a significant performance penalty.

-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the

-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on

-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will roughly double the

-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:

-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,

-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols.

-

-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0

-

-# Similar to the SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE the size of the symbol lookup cache can be

-# set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This cache is used to resolve symbols given

-# their name and scope. Since this can be an expensive process and often the

-# same symbol appear multiple times in the code, doxygen keeps a cache of

-# pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small doxygen will become slower.

-# If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The cache size is given by this

-# formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,

-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols.

-

-LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# Build related configuration options

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in

-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.

-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless

-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES

-

-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES

-

-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class

-# will be included in the documentation.

-

-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES

-

-# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal scope will be included in the documentation.

-

-EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO

-

-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file

-# will be included in the documentation.

-

-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES

-

-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)

-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.

-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.

-

-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES

-

-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local

-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in

-# the interface are included in the documentation.

-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.

-

-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO

-

-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be

-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called

-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base

-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default

-# anonymous namespaces are hidden.

-

-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO

-

-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all

-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.

-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the

-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.

-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.

-

-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO

-

-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all

-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.

-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various

-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.

-

-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO

-

-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all

-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.

-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the

-# documentation.

-

-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO

-

-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any

-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.

-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the

-# function's detailed documentation block.

-

-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO

-

-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation

-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set

-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.

-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.

-

-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO

-

-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate

-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also

-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ

-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows

-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.

-

-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO

-

-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen

-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the

-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.

-

-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO

-

-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen

-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation

-# of that file.

-

-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES

-

-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen

-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation

-# rather than with sharp brackets.

-

-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO

-

-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]

-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.

-

-INLINE_INFO            = YES

-

-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen

-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members

-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in

-# declaration order.

-

-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES

-

-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the

-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically

-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in

-# declaration order.

-

-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO

-

-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen

-# will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that

-# constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default)

-# the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by

-# SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS.

-# This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO

-# and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.

-

-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO

-

-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the

-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)

-# the group names will appear in their defined order.

-

-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = YES

-

-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be

-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to

-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,

-# not including the namespace part.

-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.

-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the

-# alphabetical list.

-

-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO

-

-# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to

-# do proper type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a

-# match between the prototype and the implementation of a member function even

-# if there is only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose

-# by doing a simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen

-# will still accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.

-

-STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO

-

-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or

-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo

-# commands in the documentation.

-

-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO

-

-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or

-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test

-# commands in the documentation.

-

-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO

-

-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or

-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug

-# commands in the documentation.

-

-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO

-

-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or

-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting

-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.

-

-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES

-

-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional

-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.

-

-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =

-

-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines

-# the initial value of a variable or macro consists of for it to appear in

-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified

-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.

-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and macros in the

-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer

-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.

-

-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 15

-

-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated

-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the

-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.

-

-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES

-

-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.

-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the

-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.

-

-SHOW_FILES             = YES

-

-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the

-# Namespaces page.

-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index

-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.

-

-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES

-

-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that

-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from

-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via

-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of

-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file

-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output

-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.

-

-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =

-

-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed

-# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated

-# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file

-# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option.

-# You can optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted

-# DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name of the layout file.

-

-LAYOUT_FILE            =

-

-# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files

-# containing the references data. This must be a list of .bib files. The

-# .bib extension is automatically appended if omitted. Using this command

-# requires the bibtex tool to be installed. See also

-# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info. For LaTeX the style

-# of the bibliography can be controlled using LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this

-# feature you need bibtex and perl available in the search path.

-

-CITE_BIB_FILES         =

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated

-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.

-

-QUIET                  = YES

-

-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are

-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank

-# NO is used.

-

-WARNINGS               = YES

-

-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings

-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will

-# automatically be disabled.

-

-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES

-

-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for

-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some

-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that

-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.

-

-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES

-

-# The WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for

-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters

-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about

-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of

-# documentation.

-

-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES

-

-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that

-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text

-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the

-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain

-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could

-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)

-

-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"

-

-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning

-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written

-# to stderr.

-

-WARN_LOGFILE           =

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options related to the input files

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain

-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or

-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories

-# with spaces.

-

-INPUT                  = ./

-

-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files

-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is

-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built

-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for

-# the list of possible encodings.

-

-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8

-

-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the

-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp

-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left

-# blank the following patterns are tested:

-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.d *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh

-# *.hxx *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.dox *.py

-# *.f90 *.f *.for *.vhd *.vhdl

-

-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \

-                         *.txt

-

-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories

-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.

-# If left blank NO is used.

-

-RECURSIVE              = YES

-

-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be

-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a

-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.

-# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is

-# run.

-

-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/ \

-                         License.txt

-

-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or

-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded

-# from the input.

-

-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO

-

-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the

-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude

-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched

-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories

-# for example use the pattern */test/*

-

-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =

-

-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names

-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the

-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the

-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,

-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test

-

-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = _* \

-                         __*

-

-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or

-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see

-# the \include command).

-

-EXAMPLE_PATH           = ./ \

-                         CodeTemplates/

-

-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the

-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp

-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left

-# blank all files are included.

-

-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *

-

-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be

-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude

-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.

-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.

-

-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO

-

-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or

-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see

-# the \image command).

-

-IMAGE_PATH             = ./

-

-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should

-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program

-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>

-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an

-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes

-# to standard output.

-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be

-# ignored.

-

-INPUT_FILTER           =

-

-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern

-# basis.

-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the

-# filter if there is a match.

-# The filters are a list of the form:

-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further

-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty or if

-# non of the patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.

-

-FILTER_PATTERNS        =

-

-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using

-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source

-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).

-

-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO

-

-# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file

-# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any)

-# and it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern

-# using *.ext= (so without naming a filter). This option only has effect when

-# FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is enabled.

-

-FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options related to source browsing

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will

-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.

-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also

-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.

-

-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO

-

-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body

-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.

-

-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO

-

-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct

-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code

-# fragments. Normal C, C++ and Fortran comments will always remain visible.

-

-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES

-

-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES

-# then for each documented function all documented

-# functions referencing it will be listed.

-

-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO

-

-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES

-# then for each documented function all documented entities

-# called/used by that function will be listed.

-

-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO

-

-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)

-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from

-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will

-# link to the source code.

-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.

-

-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO

-

-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code

-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen

-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source

-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You

-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.

-

-USE_HTAGS              = NO

-

-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen

-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for

-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.

-

-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index

-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project

-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.

-

-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES

-

-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then

-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns

-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])

-

-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5

-

-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all

-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.

-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that

-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.

-

-IGNORE_PREFIX          =

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options related to the HTML output

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will

-# generate HTML output.

-

-GENERATE_HTML          = YES

-

-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.

-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be

-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.

-

-HTML_OUTPUT            = html

-

-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for

-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank

-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.

-

-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html

-

-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for

-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a

-# standard header. Note that when using a custom header you are responsible

-#  for the proper inclusion of any scripts and style sheets that doxygen

-# needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used.

-# It is advised to generate a default header using "doxygen -w html

-# header.html footer.html stylesheet.css YourConfigFile" and then modify

-# that header. Note that the header is subject to change so you typically

-# have to redo this when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen or when

-# changing the value of configuration settings such as GENERATE_TREEVIEW!

-

-HTML_HEADER            =

-

-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for

-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a

-# standard footer.

-

-HTML_FOOTER            = ./DoxygenPages/Style/Footer.htm

-

-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading

-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to

-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen

-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy

-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own

-# style sheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!

-

-HTML_STYLESHEET        = ./DoxygenPages/Style/Style.css

-

-# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or

-# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note

-# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the

-# $relpath$ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these

-# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that

-# the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.

-

-HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =

-

-# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output.

-# Doxygen will adjust the colors in the style sheet and background images

-# according to this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel,

-# see http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information.

-# For instance the value 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green,

-# 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300 purple, and 360 is red again.

-# The allowed range is 0 to 359.

-

-HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220

-

-# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of

-# the colors in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use

-# grayscales only. A value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.

-

-HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 120

-

-# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to

-# the luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below

-# 100 gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make

-# the output darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied,

-# so 80 represents a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2,

-# and 100 does not change the gamma.

-

-HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80

-

-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML

-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting

-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.

-

-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO

-

-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML

-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the

-# page has loaded.

-

-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES

-

-# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of

-# entries shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user

-# can expand and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand

-# the tree to such a level that at most the specified number of entries are

-# visible (unless a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount).

-# So setting the number of entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by

-# default. 0 is a special value representing an infinite number of entries

-# and will result in a full expanded tree by default.

-

-HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100

-

-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files

-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3

-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).

-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the

-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that

-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in

-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find

-# it at startup.

-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html

-# for more information.

-

-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO

-

-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the

-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple

-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)

-# can be grouped.

-

-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"

-

-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that

-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a

-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen

-# will append .docset to the name.

-

-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project

-

-# When GENERATE_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify

-# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style

-# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.

-

-DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = com.lufa-lib.library.documentation

-

-# The GENERATE_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.

-

-DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = DeanCamera

-

-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files

-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the

-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)

-# of the generated HTML documentation.

-

-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO

-

-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can

-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You

-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be

-# written to the html output directory.

-

-CHM_FILE               = ../LUFA.chm

-

-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can

-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of

-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run

-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.

-

-HHC_LOCATION           =

-

-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag

-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that

-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).

-

-GENERATE_CHI           = NO

-

-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING

-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file

-# content.

-

-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =

-

-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag

-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a

-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.

-

-BINARY_TOC             = NO

-

-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members

-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.

-

-TOC_EXPAND             = YES

-

-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and

-# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated

-# that can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a

-# Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.

-

-GENERATE_QHP           = NO

-

-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can

-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.

-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.

-

-QCH_FILE               =

-

-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating

-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see

-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace

-

-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project

-

-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating

-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see

-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders

-

-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc

-

-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to

-# add. For more information please see

-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters

-

-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =

-

-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the

-# custom filter to add. For more information please see

-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">

-# Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.

-

-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =

-

-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this

-# project's

-# filter section matches.

-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">

-# Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.

-

-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =

-

-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can

-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.

-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated

-# .qhp file.

-

-QHG_LOCATION           =

-

-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files

-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help

-# plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents

-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML

-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of

-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as

-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before

-# the help appears.

-

-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO

-

-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin

-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have

-# this name.

-

-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project

-

-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs)

-# at top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and

-# the value YES disables it. Since the tabs have the same information as the

-# navigation tree you can set this option to NO if you already set

-# GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.

-

-DISABLE_INDEX          = YES

-

-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index

-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.

-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated

-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that

-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports

-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).

-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.

-# Since the tree basically has the same information as the tab index you

-# could consider to set DISABLE_INDEX to NO when enabling this option.

-

-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES

-

-# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values

-# (range [0,1..20]) that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML

-# documentation. Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum

-# values from appearing in the overview section.

-

-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1

-

-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be

-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree

-# is shown.

-

-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 300

-

-# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open

-# links to external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.

-

-EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO

-

-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included

-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that

-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need

-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory

-# to force them to be regenerated.

-

-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10

-

-# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images

-# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are

-# not supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.

-# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files

-# in the HTML output before the changes have effect.

-

-FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES

-

-# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax

-# (see http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the

-# rendering instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not

-# have LaTeX installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML

-# output. When enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and

-# configure the path to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.

-

-USE_MATHJAX            = NO

-

-# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the

-# HTML output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination

-# directory should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax

-# directory is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then

-# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to

-# the MathJax Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without

-# installing MathJax.

-# However, it is strongly recommended to install a local

-# copy of MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.

-

-MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://www.mathjax.org/mathjax

-

-# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or MathJax extension

-# names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering.

-

-MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =

-

-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box

-# for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript

-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using

-# HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets

-# (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should

-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine

-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.

-

-SEARCHENGINE           = YES

-

-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be

-# implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client

-# using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index

-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server

-# based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows

-# full text search. The disadvantages are that it is more difficult to setup

-# and does not have live searching capabilities.

-

-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will

-# generate Latex output.

-

-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO

-

-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.

-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be

-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.

-

-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex

-

-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be

-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.

-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for

-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the

-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.

-

-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex

-

-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to

-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the

-# default command name.

-

-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex

-

-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact

-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to

-# save some trees in general.

-

-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO

-

-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used

-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, letter, legal and

-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.

-

-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide

-

-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX

-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.

-

-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =

-

-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for

-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until

-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a

-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!

-

-LATEX_HEADER           =

-

-# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for

-# the generated latex document. The footer should contain everything after

-# the last chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a

-# standard footer. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!

-

-LATEX_FOOTER           =

-

-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated

-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will

-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references

-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.

-

-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES

-

-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of

-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a

-# higher quality PDF documentation.

-

-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES

-

-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.

-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep

-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.

-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.

-

-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO

-

-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not

-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)

-# in the output.

-

-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO

-

-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include

-# source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.

-# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings

-# such as SOURCE_BROWSER.

-

-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO

-

-# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the

-# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. The default style is "plain". See

-# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.

-

-LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options related to the RTF output

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output

-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with

-# other RTF readers or editors.

-

-GENERATE_RTF           = NO

-

-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.

-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be

-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.

-

-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf

-

-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact

-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to

-# save some trees in general.

-

-COMPACT_RTF            = NO

-

-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated

-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will

-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.

-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other

-# programs which support those fields.

-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.

-

-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO

-

-# Load style sheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's

-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide

-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.

-

-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =

-

-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.

-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.

-

-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options related to the man page output

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will

-# generate man pages

-

-GENERATE_MAN           = NO

-

-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.

-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be

-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.

-

-MAN_OUTPUT             = man

-

-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to

-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)

-

-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3

-

-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,

-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity

-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files

-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command

-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.

-

-MAN_LINKS              = NO

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options related to the XML output

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will

-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of

-# the code including all documentation.

-

-GENERATE_XML           = NO

-

-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.

-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be

-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.

-

-XML_OUTPUT             = xml

-

-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,

-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the

-# syntax of the XML files.

-

-XML_SCHEMA             =

-

-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,

-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the

-# syntax of the XML files.

-

-XML_DTD                =

-

-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will

-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting

-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that

-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.

-

-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will

-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file

-# that captures the structure of the code including all

-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental

-# and incomplete at the moment.

-

-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options related to the Perl module output

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will

-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of

-# the code including all documentation. Note that this

-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the

-# moment.

-

-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO

-

-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate

-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able

-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.

-

-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO

-

-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be

-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.

-# This is useful

-# if you want to understand what is going on.

-# On the other hand, if this

-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller

-# and Perl will parse it just the same.

-

-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES

-

-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file

-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.

-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same

-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.

-

-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will

-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include

-# files.

-

-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES

-

-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro

-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional

-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled

-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.

-

-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES

-

-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES

-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the

-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.

-

-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES

-

-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files

-# pointed to by INCLUDE_PATH will be searched when a #include is found.

-

-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES

-

-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that

-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by

-# the preprocessor.

-

-INCLUDE_PATH           =

-

-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard

-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the

-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will

-# be used.

-

-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =

-

-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that

-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of

-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name

-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are

-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being

-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator

-# instead of the = operator.

-

-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \

-                         PROGMEM \

-                         EEMEM \

-                         ATTR_PACKED

-

-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then

-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.

-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.

-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition that

-# overrules the definition found in the source code.

-

-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =

-

-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then

-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all references to function-like macros

-# that are alone on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a

-# semicolon, because these will confuse the parser if not removed.

-

-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# Configuration::additions related to external references

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. For each

-# tag file the location of the external documentation should be added. The

-# format of a tag file without this location is as follows:

-#

-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...

-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:

-#

-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...

-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths

-# or URLs. Note that each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does

-# NOT include the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which

-# doxygen is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.

-

-TAGFILES               =

-

-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create

-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.

-

-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =

-

-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed

-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes

-# will be listed.

-

-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO

-

-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed

-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will

-# be listed.

-

-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES

-

-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script

-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').

-

-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# Configuration options related to the dot tool

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will

-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base

-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that

-# this option also works with HAVE_DOT disabled, but it is recommended to

-# install and use dot, since it yields more powerful graphs.

-

-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO

-

-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc

-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see

-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the

-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where

-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the

-# default search path.

-

-MSCGEN_PATH            =

-

-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide

-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented

-# or is not a class.

-

-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES

-

-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is

-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization

-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section

-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)

-

-HAVE_DOT               = NO

-

-# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is

-# allowed to run in parallel. When set to 0 (the default) doxygen will

-# base this on the number of processors available in the system. You can set it

-# explicitly to a value larger than 0 to get control over the balance

-# between CPU load and processing speed.

-

-DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0

-

-# By default doxygen will use the Helvetica font for all dot files that

-# doxygen generates. When you want a differently looking font you can specify

-# the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make sure dot is able to find

-# the font, which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting

-# the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the

-# directory containing the font.

-

-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans

-

-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.

-# The default size is 10pt.

-

-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10

-

-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the Helvetica font.

-# If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can use DOT_FONTPATH to

-# set the path where dot can find it.

-

-DOT_FONTPATH           =

-

-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen

-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and

-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the

-# CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.

-

-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO

-

-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen

-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and

-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and

-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.

-

-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO

-

-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen

-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies

-

-GROUP_GRAPHS           = YES

-

-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and

-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling

-# Language.

-

-UML_LOOK               = NO

-

-# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside

-# the class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the

-# graph may become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS

-# threshold limits the number of items for each type to make the size more

-# managable. Set this to 0 for no limit. Note that the threshold may be

-# exceeded by 50% before the limit is enforced.

-

-UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10

-

-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the

-# relations between templates and their instances.

-

-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO

-

-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT

-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented

-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with

-# other documented files.

-

-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = YES

-

-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and

-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each

-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or

-# indirectly include this file.

-

-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = YES

-

-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then

-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function

-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase

-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs

-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.

-

-CALL_GRAPH             = NO

-

-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then

-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function

-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase

-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller

-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.

-

-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO

-

-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen

-# will generate a graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.

-

-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO

-

-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES

-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories

-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include

-# relations between the files in the directories.

-

-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = YES

-

-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images

-# generated by dot. Possible values are svg, png, jpg, or gif.

-# If left blank png will be used. If you choose svg you need to set

-# HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make the SVG files

-# visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this requirement).

-

-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png

-

-# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to

-# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.

-# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer.

-# Tested and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera. For IE 9+ you

-# need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make the SVG files

-# visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.

-

-INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO

-

-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be

-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.

-

-DOT_PATH               =

-

-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that

-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the

-# \dotfile command).

-

-DOTFILE_DIRS           =

-

-# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that

-# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the

-# \mscfile command).

-

-MSCFILE_DIRS           =

-

-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of

-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph

-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is

-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the

-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than

-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note

-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.

-

-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15

-

-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the

-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable

-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes

-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this

-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large

-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by

-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.

-

-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2

-

-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent

-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not

-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,

-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of

-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).

-

-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES

-

-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output

-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This

-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)

-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.

-

-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO

-

-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will

-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and

-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.

-

-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES

-

-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will

-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate

-# the various graphs.

-

-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/BuildSystem.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/BuildSystem.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index c30a88bb4..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/BuildSystem.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,846 +0,0 @@
-/** \file

- *

- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special

- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.

- */

-

-/** \page Page_BuildSystem The LUFA Build System

- *

- *  \section Sec_BuildSystemOverview Overview of the LUFA Build System

- *  The LUFA build system is an attempt at making a set of re-usable, modular build make files which

- *  can be referenced in a LUFA powered project, to minimise the amount of code required in an

- *  application makefile. The system is written in GNU Make, and each module is independant of

- *  one-another.

- *

- *  For details on the prerequisites needed for Linux and Windows machines to be able to use the LUFA

- *  build system, see \ref Sec_Prerequisites.

- *

- *  To use a LUFA build system module, simply add an include to your project makefile:

- *  \code

- *  include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  And the associated build module targets will be added to your project's build makefile automatically.

- *  To call a build target, run <tt>make {TARGET_NAME}</tt> from the command line, substituting in

- *  the appropriate target name.

- *

- *  \see \ref Sec_AppConfigParams for a copy of the sample LUFA project makefile.

- *

- *  Each build module may have one or more mandatory parameters (GNU Make variables) which <i>must</i>

- *  be supplied in the project makefile for the module to work, and one or more optional parameters which

- *  may be defined and which will assume a sensible default if not.

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildSystemModules Available Modules

- *

- *  The following modules are included in this LUFA release:

- *

- *  \li \subpage Page_BuildModule_ATPROGRAM - Device Programming

- *  \li \subpage Page_BuildModule_AVRDUDE - Device Programming

- *  \li \subpage Page_BuildModule_BUILD - Compiling/Assembling/Linking

- *  \li \subpage Page_BuildModule_CORE - Core Build System Functions

- *  \li \subpage Page_BuildModule_CPPCHECK - Static Code Analysis

- *  \li \subpage Page_BuildModule_DFU - Device Programming

- *  \li \subpage Page_BuildModule_DOXYGEN - Automated Source Code Documentation

- *  \li \subpage Page_BuildModule_HID - Device Programming

- *  \li \subpage Page_BuildModule_SOURCES - LUFA Module Source Code Variables

- */

- 

- /** \page Page_BuildModule_BUILD The BUILD build module

- *

- *  The BUILD LUFA build system module, providing targets for the compilation,

- *  assembling and linking of an application from source code into binary files

- *  suitable for programming into a target device.

- *

- *  To use this module in your application makefile, add the following code:

- *  \code

- *  include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_BUILD_Requirements Requirements

- *  This module requires the the architecture appropriate binaries of the GCC compiler are  available in your

- *  system's <b>PATH</b> variable. The GCC compiler and associated toolchain is distributed in Atmel AVR Studio

- *  5.x and Atmel Studio 6.x installation directories, as well as in many third party distribution packages.

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_BUILD_Targets Targets

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>size</tt></td>

- *    <td>Display size of the compiled application FLASH and SRAM segments.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>symbol-sizes</tt></td>

- *    <td>Display a size-sorted list of symbols from the compiled application, in decimal bytes.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>check-source</tt></td>

- *    <td>Display a list of input SRC source files which cannot be found (if any).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>lib</tt></td>

- *    <td>Build and archive all source files into a library A binary file.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>all</tt></td>

- *    <td>Build and link the application into ELF debug and HEX binary files.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>elf</tt></td>

- *    <td>Build and link the application into an ELF debug file.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>hex</tt></td>

- *    <td>Build and link the application and produce HEX and EEP binary files.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>lss</tt></td>

- *    <td>Build and link the application and produce a LSS source code/assembly code mixed listing file.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>clean</tt></td>

- *    <td>Remove all intermediatary files and binary output files.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>mostlyclean</tt></td>

- *    <td>Remove all intermediatary files but preserve any binary output files.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_BUILD_MandatoryParams Mandatory Parameters

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>TARGET</tt></td>

- *    <td>Name of the application output file prefix (e.g. <tt>TestApplication</tt>).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>ARCH</tt></td>

- *    <td>Architecture of the target processor (see \ref Page_DeviceSupport).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>MCU</tt></td>

- *    <td>Name of the Atmel processor model (e.g. <tt>at90usb1287</tt>).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>SRC</tt></td>

- *    <td>List of relative or absolute paths to the application C (.c), C++ (.cpp) and Assembly (.S) source files.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>F_USB</tt></td>

- *    <td>Speed in Hz of the input clock frequency to the target's USB controller.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>LUFA_PATH</tt></td>

- *    <td>Path to the LUFA library core, either relative or absolute (e.g. <tt>../LUFA-000000/LUFA/</tt>).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_BUILD_OptionalParams Optional Parameters

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>BOARD</tt></td>

- *    <td>LUFA board hardware drivers to use (see \ref Page_DeviceSupport).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>OPTIMIZATION</tt></td>

- *    <td>Optimization level to use when compiling source files (see GCC manual).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>C_STANDARD</tt></td>

- *    <td>Version of the C standard to apply when compiling C++ source files (see GCC manual).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>CPP_STANDARD</tt></td>

- *    <td>Version of the C++ standard to apply when compiling C++ source files (see GCC manual).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>DEBUG_FORMAT</tt></td>

- *    <td>Format of the debug information to embed in the generated object files (see GCC manual).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>DEBUG_LEVEL</tt></td>

- *    <td>Level of the debugging information to embed in the generated object files (see GCC manual).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>F_CPU</tt></td>

- *    <td>Speed of the processor CPU clock, in Hz.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>C_FLAGS</tt></td>

- *    <td>Flags to pass to the C compiler only, after the automatically generated flags.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>CPP_FLAGS</tt></td>

- *    <td>Flags to pass to the C++ compiler only, after the automatically generated flags.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>ASM_FLAGS</tt></td>

- *    <td>Flags to pass to the assembler only, after the automatically generated flags.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>CC_FLAGS</tt></td>

- *    <td>Common flags to pass to the C/C++ compiler and assembler, after the automatically generated flags.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>LD_FLAGS</tt></td>

- *    <td>Flags to pass to the linker, after the automatically generated flags.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>OBJDIR</tt></td>

- *    <td>Directory to place the generated object and dependency files. If set to "." the same folder as the source file will be used.

- *        \note When this option is enabled, all source filenames <b>must</b> be unique.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>OBJECT_FILES</tt></td>

- *    <td>List of additional object files that should be linked into the resulting binary.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_BUILD_ProvidedVariables Module Provided Variables

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><i>None</i></td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table> 

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_BUILD_ProvidedMacros Module Provided Macros

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><i>None</i></td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- */

-

-/** \page Page_BuildModule_CORE The CORE build module

- *

- *  The core LUFA build system module, providing common build system help and information targets.

- *

- *  To use this module in your application makefile, add the following code:

- *  \code

- *  include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_CORE_Requirements Requirements

- *  This module has no requirements outside a standard *nix shell like environment; the <tt>sh</tt>

- *  shell, GNU <tt>make</tt> and *nix CoreUtils (<tt>echo</tt>, <tt>printf</tt>, etc.).

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_CORE_Targets Targets

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>help</tt></td>

- *    <td>Display build system help and configuration information.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>list_targets</tt></td>

- *    <td>List all available build targets from the build system.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>list_modules</tt></td>

- *    <td>List all available build modules from the build system.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>list_mandatory</tt></td>

- *    <td>List all mandatory parameters required by the included modules.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>list_optional</tt></td>

- *    <td>List all optional parameters required by the included modules.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>list_provided</tt></td>

- *    <td>List all variables provided by the included modules.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>list_macros</tt></td>

- *    <td>List all macros provided by the included modules.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_CORE_MandatoryParams Mandatory Parameters

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><i>None</i></td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_CORE_OptionalParams Optional Parameters

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><i>None</i></td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_CORE_ProvidedVariables Module Provided Variables

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><i>None</i></td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table> 

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_CORE_ProvidedMacros Module Provided Macros

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><i>None</i></td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- */

-

-/** \page Page_BuildModule_ATPROGRAM The ATPROGRAM build module

- *

- *  The ATPROGRAM programming utility LUFA build system module, providing targets to reprogram an

- *  Atmel processor FLASH and EEPROM memories with a project's compiled binary output files.

- *

- *  To use this module in your application makefile, add the following code:

- *  \code

- *  include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_ATPROGRAM_Requirements Requirements

- *  This module requires the <tt>atprogram.exe</tt> utility to be available in your system's <b>PATH</b>

- *  variable. The <tt>atprogram.exe</tt> utility is distributed in Atmel AVR Studio 5.x and Atmel Studio 6.x

- *  inside the application install folder's "\avrdbg" subdirectory.

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_ATPROGRAM_Targets Targets

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>atprogram</tt></td>

- *    <td>Program the device FLASH memory with the application's executable data.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>atprogram-ee</tt></td>

- *    <td>Program the device EEPROM memory with the application's EEPROM data.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_ATPROGRAM_MandatoryParams Mandatory Parameters

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>MCU</tt></td>

- *    <td>Name of the Atmel processor model (e.g. <tt>at90usb1287</tt>).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>TARGET</tt></td>

- *    <td>Name of the application output file prefix (e.g. <tt>TestApplication</tt>).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_ATPROGRAM_OptionalParams Optional Parameters

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>ATPROGRAM_PROGRAMMER</tt></td>

- *    <td>Name of the Atmel programmer or debugger tool to communicate with (e.g. <tt>jtagice3</tt>).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>ATPROGRAM_INTERFACE</tt></td>

- *    <td>Name of the programming interface to use when programming the target (e.g. <tt>spi</tt>).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>ATPROGRAM_PORT</tt></td>

- *    <td>Name of the communication port to use when when programming with a serially connected tool (e.g. <tt>COM2</tt>).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_ATPROGRAM_ProvidedVariables Module Provided Variables

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><i>None</i></td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table> 

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_ATPROGRAM_ProvidedMacros Module Provided Macros

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><i>None</i></td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- */

-

-/** \page Page_BuildModule_AVRDUDE The AVRDUDE build module

- *

- *  The AVRDUDE programming utility LUFA build system module, providing targets to reprogram an

- *  Atmel processor FLASH and EEPROM memories with a project's compiled binary output files.

- *

- *  To use this module in your application makefile, add the following code:

- *  \code

- *  include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_AVRDUDE_Requirements Requirements

- *  This module requires the <tt>avrdude</tt> utility to be available in your system's <b>PATH</b>

- *  variable. The <tt>avrdude</tt> utility is distributed in the old WinAVR project releases for

- *  Windows (<a>winavr.sourceforge.net</a>) or can be installed on *nix systems via the project's

- *  source code (<a>https://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude</a>) or through the package manager.

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_AVRDUDE_Targets Targets

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>avrdude</tt></td>

- *    <td>Program the device FLASH memory with the application's executable data.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>avrdude</tt></td>

- *    <td>Program the device EEPROM memory with the application's EEPROM data.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_AVRDUDE_MandatoryParams Mandatory Parameters

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>MCU</tt></td>

- *    <td>Name of the Atmel processor model (e.g. <tt>at90usb1287</tt>).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>TARGET</tt></td>

- *    <td>Name of the application output file prefix (e.g. <tt>TestApplication</tt>).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_AVRDUDE_OptionalParams Optional Parameters

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER</tt></td>

- *    <td>Name of the programmer or debugger tool to communicate with (e.g. <tt>jtagicemkii</tt>).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>ATPROGRAM_PORT</tt></td>

- *    <td>Name of the communication port to use when when programming with the connected tool (e.g. <tt>COM2</tt>, <tt>/dev/ttyUSB0</tt> or <tt>usb</tt>).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>ATPROGRAM_FLAGS</tt></td>

- *    <td>Additional flags to pass to avrdude when programming, applied after the automatically generated flags.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_AVRDUDE_ProvidedVariables Module Provided Variables

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><i>None</i></td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table> 

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_AVRDUDE_ProvidedMacros Module Provided Macros

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><i>None</i></td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- */

- 

- /** \page Page_BuildModule_CPPCHECK The CPPCHECK build module

- *

- *  The CPPCHECK programming utility LUFA build system module, providing targets to statically

- *  analyze C and C++ source code for errors and performance/style issues.

- *

- *  To use this module in your application makefile, add the following code:

- *  \code

- *  include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_CPPCHECK_Requirements Requirements

- *  This module requires the <tt>cppcheck</tt> utility to be available in your system's <b>PATH</b>

- *  variable. The <tt>cppcheck</tt> utility is distributed through the project's home page

- *  (<a>http://cppcheck.sourceforge.net</a>) for Windows, and can be installed on *nix systems via

- *  the project's source code or through the package manager.

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_CPPCHECK_Targets Targets

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>cppcheck</tt></td>

- *    <td>Statically analyze the project source code for issues.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>cppcheck-config</tt></td>

- *    <td>Check the <tt>cppcheck</tt> configuration - scan source code and warn about missing header files and other issues.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_CPPCHECK_MandatoryParams Mandatory Parameters

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>SRC</tt></td>

- *    <td>List of source files to statically analyze.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_CPPCHECK_OptionalParams Optional Parameters

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>CPPCHECK_INCLUDES</tt></td>

- *    <td>Path of extra directories to check when attemting to resolve C/C++ header file includes.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>CPPCHECK_EXCLUDES</tt></td>

- *    <td>Paths or path fragments to exclude when analyzing.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>CPPCHECK_MSG_TEMPLATE</tt></td>

- *    <td>Output message template to use when printing errors, warnings and information (see <tt>cppcheck</tt> documentation).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>CPPCHECK_ENABLE</tt></td>

- *    <td>Analysis rule categories to enable (see <tt>cppcheck</tt> documentation).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>CPPCHECK_SUPPRESS</tt></td>

- *    <td>Specific analysis rules to suppress (see <tt>cppcheck</tt> documentation).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>CPPCHECK_FAIL_ON_WARNING</tt></td>

- *    <td>Set to <b>Y</b> to fail the analysis job with an error exit code if warnings are found, <b>N</b> to continue without failing.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>CPPCHECK_QUIET</tt></td>

- *    <td>Set to <b>Y</b> to suppress all output except warnings and errors, <b>N</b> to show verbose output information.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>CPPCHECK_FLAGS</tt></td>

- *    <td>Extra flags to pass to <tt>cppcheck</tt>, after the automatically generated flags.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_CPPCHECK_ProvidedVariables Module Provided Variables

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><i>None</i></td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table> 

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_CPPCHECK_ProvidedMacros Module Provided Macros

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><i>None</i></td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- */

- 

- /** \page Page_BuildModule_DFU The DFU build module

- *

- *  The DFU programming utility LUFA build system module, providing targets to reprogram an

- *  Atmel processor FLASH and EEPROM memories with a project's compiled binary output files.

- *  This module requires a DFU class bootloader to be running in the target, compatible with

- *  the DFU bootloader protocol as published by Atmel.

- *

- *  To use this module in your application makefile, add the following code:

- *  \code

- *  include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_DFU_Requirements Requirements

- *  This module requires either the <tt>batchisp</tt> utility from Atmel's FLIP utility, or the open

- *  source <tt>dfu-programmer</tt> utility (<a>http://dfu-programmer.sourceforge.net/</a>) to be

- *  available in your system's <b>PATH</b> variable. On *nix systems the <tt>dfu-programmer</tt> utility

- *  can be installed via the project's source code or through the package manager.

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_DFU_Targets Targets

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>dfu</tt></td>

- *    <td>Program the device FLASH memory with the application's executable data using <tt>dfu-programmer</tt>.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>dfu-ee</tt></td>

- *    <td>Program the device EEPROM memory with the application's EEPROM data using <tt>dfu-programmer</tt>.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>flip</tt></td>

- *    <td>Program the device FLASH memory with the application's executable data using <tt>batchisp</tt>.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>flip-ee</tt></td>

- *    <td>Program the device EEPROM memory with the application's EEPROM data using <tt>batchisp</tt>.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_DFU_MandatoryParams Mandatory Parameters

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>MCU</tt></td>

- *    <td>Name of the Atmel processor model (e.g. <tt>at90usb1287</tt>).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>TARGET</tt></td>

- *    <td>Name of the application output file prefix (e.g. <tt>TestApplication</tt>).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_DFU_OptionalParams Optional Parameters

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><i>None</i></td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_DFU_ProvidedVariables Module Provided Variables

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><i>None</i></td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table> 

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_DFU_ProvidedMacros Module Provided Macros

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><i>None</i></td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- */

- 

- /** \page Page_BuildModule_DOXYGEN The DOXYGEN build module

- *

- *  The DOXYGEN code documentation utility LUFA build system module, providing targets to generate

- *  project HTML and other format documentation from a set of source files that include special

- *  Doxygen comments.

- *

- *  To use this module in your application makefile, add the following code:

- *  \code

- *  include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_DOXYGEN_Requirements Requirements

- *  This module requires the <tt>doxygen</tt> utility from the Doxygen website

- *  (<a>http://www.stack.nl/~dimitri/doxygen/</a>) to be available in your system's <b>PATH</b>

- *  variable. On *nix systems the <tt>doxygen</tt> utility can be installed via the project's source

- *  code or through the package manager.

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_DOXYGEN_Targets Targets

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>doxygen</tt></td>

- *    <td>Generate project documentation.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_DOXYGEN_MandatoryParams Mandatory Parameters

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>LUFA_PATH</tt></td>

- *    <td>Path to the LUFA library core, either relative or absolute (e.g. <tt>../LUFA-000000/LUFA/</tt>).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_DOXYGEN_OptionalParams Optional Parameters

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>DOXYGEN_CONF</tt></td>

- *    <td>Name and path of the base Doxygen configuration file for the project.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>DOXYGEN_FAIL_ON_WARNING</tt></td>

- *    <td>Set to <b>Y</b> to fail the generation with an error exit code if warnings are found other than unsupported configuration parameters, <b>N</b> to continue without failing.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>DOXYGEN_OVERRIDE_PARAMS</tt></td>

- *    <td>Extra Doxygen configuration parameters to apply, overriding the corresponding config entry in the project's configuration file (e.g. <tt>QUIET=YES</tt>).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_DOXYGEN_ProvidedVariables Module Provided Variables

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><i>None</i></td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table> 

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_DOXYGEN_ProvidedMacros Module Provided Macros

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><i>None</i></td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- */

- 

- /** \page Page_BuildModule_HID The HID build module

- *

- *  The HID programming utility LUFA build system module, providing targets to reprogram an

- *  Atmel processor's FLASH memory with a project's compiled binary output file. This module

- *  requires a HID class bootloader to be running in the target, using a protocol compatible

- *  with the PJRC "HalfKay" protocol (<a>http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/halfkay_protocol.html</a>).

- *

- *  To use this module in your application makefile, add the following code:

- *  \code

- *  include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_HID_Requirements Requirements

- *  This module requires either the <tt>hid_bootloader_cli</tt> utility from the included LUFA HID

- *  class bootloader API subdirectory, or the <tt>teensy_loader_cli</tt> utility from PJRC

- *  (<a>http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/loader_cli.html</a>) to be available in your system's <b>PATH</b>

- *  variable.

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_HID_Targets Targets

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>hid</tt></td>

- *    <td>Program the device FLASH memory with the application's executable data using <tt>hid_bootloader_cli</tt>.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>hid-ee</tt></td>

- *    <td>Program the device EEPROM memory with the application's EEPROM data using <tt>hid_bootloader_cli</tt> and

- *        a temporary AVR application programmed into the target's FLASH.

- *        \note This will erase the currently loaded application in the target.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>teensy</tt></td>

- *    <td>Program the device FLASH memory with the application's executable data using <tt>teensy_loader_cli</tt>.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>teensy-ee</tt></td>

- *    <td>Program the device EEPROM memory with the application's EEPROM data using <tt>teensy_loader_cli</tt> and

- *        a temporary AVR application programmed into the target's FLASH.

- *        \note This will erase the currently loaded application in the target.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_HID_MandatoryParams Mandatory Parameters

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>MCU</tt></td>

- *    <td>Name of the Atmel processor model (e.g. <tt>at90usb1287</tt>).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>TARGET</tt></td>

- *    <td>Name of the application output file prefix (e.g. <tt>TestApplication</tt>).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_HID_OptionalParams Optional Parameters

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><i>None</i></td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_HID_ProvidedVariables Module Provided Variables

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><i>None</i></td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table> 

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_HID_ProvidedMacros Module Provided Macros

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><i>None</i></td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- */

- 

- /** \page Page_BuildModule_SOURCES The SOURCES build module

- *

- *  The SOURCES LUFA build system module, providing variables listing the various LUFA source files

- *  required to be build by a project for a given LUFA module. This module gives a way to reference

- *  LUFA source files symbollically, so that changes to the library structure do not break the library

- *  makefile.

- *

- *  To use this module in your application makefile, add the following code:

- *  \code

- *  include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_SOURCES_Requirements Requirements

- *  None.

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_SOURCES_Targets Targets

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><i>None</i></td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_SOURCES_MandatoryParams Mandatory Parameters

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>LUFA_PATH</tt></td>

- *    <td>Path to the LUFA library core, either relative or absolute (e.g. <tt>../LUFA-000000/LUFA/</tt>).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>ARCH</tt></td>

- *    <td>Architecture of the target processor (see \ref Page_DeviceSupport).</td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_SOURCES_OptionalParams Optional Parameters

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><i>None</i></td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_SOURCES_ProvidedVariables Module Provided Variables

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>LUFA_SRC_USB</tt></td>

- *    <td>List of LUFA USB driver source files.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS</tt></td>

- *    <td>List of LUFA USB Class driver source files.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>LUFA_SRC_TEMPERATURE</tt></td>

- *    <td>List of LUFA temperature sensor driver source files.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>LUFA_SRC_SERIAL</tt></td>

- *    <td>List of LUFA Serial U(S)ART driver source files.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>LUFA_SRC_TWI</tt></td>

- *    <td>List of LUFA TWI driver source files.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><tt>LUFA_SRC_PLATFORM</tt></td>

- *    <td>List of LUFA architecture specific platform management source files.</td>

- *   </tr> 

- *  </table> 

- *

- *  \section SSec_BuildModule_SOURCES_ProvidedMacros Module Provided Macros

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><i>None</i></td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- */

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/BuildingLinkableLibraries.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/BuildingLinkableLibraries.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index ff5fdc523..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/BuildingLinkableLibraries.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-/** \file

- *

- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special

- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.

- */

-

-/** \page Page_BuildLibrary Building as a Linkable Library

- *

- *  The LUFA library can be built as a proper linkable library (with the extention .a) under AVR-GCC, so that

- *  the library does not need to be recompiled with each revision of a user project. Instructions for creating

- *  a library from a given source tree can be found in the AVR-GCC user manual included in the WinAVR install

- *  /Docs/ directory.

- *

- *  However, building the library is <b>not recommended</b>, as the static (compile-time) options will be

- *  unable to be changed without a recompilation of the LUFA code. Therefore, if the library is to be built

- *  from the LUFA source, it should be made to be application-specific and compiled with the static options

- *  that are required for each project (which should be recorded along with the library).

- *

- *  Normal library use has the library components compiled in at the same point as the application code, as

- *  demonstrated in the library demos and applications. This is the preferred method, as the library is recompiled

- *  each time to ensure that all static options for a particular application are applied.

- */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/ChangeLog.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/ChangeLog.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 51786b9be..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/ChangeLog.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1444 +0,0 @@
-/** \file

- *

- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special

- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.

- */

-

- /** \page Page_ChangeLog Project Changelog

-  *

-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog120730 Version 120730

-  *  <b>New:</b>

-  *  - Core:

-  *   - Added new, revamped modular build system with new makefile templates

-  *   - Added support for the BitWizard Multio and Big-Multio boards

-  *   - Added support for the DorkbotPDX Duce board

-  *   - Added support for the Olimex AVR-USB-32U4 board

-  *   - Added support for the Olimex AVR-USB-T32U4 board

-  *   - Added support for the Olimex AVR-ISP-MK2 board

-  *   - Added new Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable() function

-  *   - Added new Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable() function

-  *   - Added build test to verify correct compilation of all board drivers using all driver APIs

-  *   - Added build test to verify correct compilation of all bootloaders using all supported devices  

-  *   - Added build test to verify that there are no detectable errors in the codebase via static analysis

-  *   - Added new JTAG_ENABLE() macro for the AVR8 architecture

-  *  - Library Applications:

-  *   - Modified the CDC Host demos to set a default CDC Line Encoding on enumerated devices

-  *   - Added Dataflash operational checks and aborts to all projects using the Dataflash to ensure it is working correctly before use

-  *   - Added new SerialToLCD user project contributed by Simon Foster

-  *   - Added new RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT compile time option to the AVRISP-MKII clone programmer project (thanks to Robert Spitzenpfeil)

-  *

-  *  <b>Changed:</b>

-  *  - Core:

-  *   - Android Accessory Host property strings changed from a struct of pointer to an array to prevent unaligned access on greater than 8-bit architectures

-  *   - Audio Device Class driver changed to also require the index of the Audio Control interface within the device, for SET/GET/CUR/MIN/MAX/RES property adjustments

-  *   - Removed variable axis support from the HID_DESCRIPTOR_JOYSTICK() macro due to OS incompatibilities, replaced with fixed 3-axis joystick report structure

-  *   - Removed the old pseudo-scheduler from the library as it was unused and deprecated since the 090810 release

-  *   - Endpoint indexes are now specified as full endpoint addresses within the device in device mode, rather than a logical index

-  *   - The Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint() function no longer takes an endpoint direction as a parameter, as this is now deduced from the specified full endpoint

-  *     address and type

-  *   - The Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint() function no longer takes a number of banks as a special mask; the number of banks is now specified as an integer parameter

-  *   - Endpoints are now configured via instances of a new struct USB_Endpoint_Table_t in all device mode class drivers, rather than a list of endpoint parameters

-  *   - Pipe indexes are now specified as full pipe addresses within the host in host mode, rather than a logical index

-  *   - The Pipe_ConfigurePipe() function no longer takes an pipe token as a parameter, as this is now deduced from the specified full pipe address and type

-  *   - The Pipe_ConfigurePipe() function no longer takes a number of banks as a special mask; the number of banks is now specified as an integer parameter

-  *   - Pipes are now configured via instances of a new struct USB_Pipe_Table_t in all host mode class drivers, rather than a list of pipe parameters

-  *   - Added support for various assert and debugging macros for the UC3 devices

-  *   - Changed MIDI event structure MIDI_EventPacket_t to use a single field for the combined virtual cable index and command ID, to prevent bitfield packing issues

-  *     on some architectures (thanks to Darren Gibbs)

-  *   - Changed board LED driver implementations of LEDs_ToggleLEDs() for the AVR8 architecture to use the fast PIN register toggle alternative function for speed

-  *  - Library Applications:

-  *   - Raised the guard bits in the AVRISP-MKII clone project when in PDI and TPI to 32, to prevent communication errors on low quality connections to a target

-  *   - Added additional bootloader API data to expose the bootloader start address and class to the DFU and CDC class bootloaders

-  *   - Reverted AVRISP-MKII clone project watchdog based command timeout patch in favour of a hardware timer, to allow for use in devices with WDTRST fuse programmed

-  *   - The library bootloaders will now correctly start the user application after a watchdog-based application start, even if the /HWB line is held low externally

-  *     during the reset phase

-  *   - Increased endpoint polling interval for all demos and projects to 5ms, as 1ms was causing some enumeration issues on some machines (thanks to Riku Salminen)

-  *

-  *  <b>Fixed:</b>

-  *  - Core:

-  *   - Fixed possible enumeration error if the user application selects a pipe other than the default Control pipe between the Powered and Default states of

-  *     the host state machine

-  *   - Fixed incorrect call to the user callback CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetInterfaceProperty() in the Audio Class device driver (thanks to Tiit Ratsep)

-  *   - Fixed compile error for the UC3 architecture when INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT is specified (thanks to Andrus Aaslaid)

-  *   - Fixed compile error if LEDs_Disable() is called and BOARD=NONE is set (thanks to Sam Lin)

-  *   - Fixed inverted LED logic in the OLIMEX162 board LED driver

-  *   - Fixed incorrect reponse to GET STATUS requests in device mode if NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER or NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP tokens are defined (thanks to Georg Glock)

-  *   - Fixed inverted LED logic in the USB2AX board LED driver

-  *   - Fixed possible deadlock in the CDC device driver if the USB connection is dropped while the CDC_REQ_SetLineEncoding control request is being processed by

-  *     the stack (thanks to Jonathan Hudgins)

-  *   - Fixed broken MIDI host driver MIDI_Host_ReceiveEventPacket() function due to not unfreezing the MIDI data IN pipe before use (thanks to Michael Brown)

-  *   - Fixed swapped Little Endian/Big Endian endpoint and pipe write code for the UC3 devices (thanks to Andrew Chu)

-  *   - Fixed the JTAG_DISABLE() macro clearing all other bits in MCUSR when called

-  *   - Fixed incorrect Micropendous board LED driver LEDs_SetAllLEDs() and LEDs_ChangeLEDs() function implementations (thanks to MitchJS)

-  *   - Fixed endianess issues in the RNDIS host class driver for UC3 devices (thanks to Andrew Chu)  

-  *  - Library Applications:

-  *   - Fixed error in the AVRISP-MKII programmer when ISP mode is used at 64KHz (thanks to Ben R. Porter)

-  *   - Fixed AVRISP-MKII programmer project failing to compile for the U4 chips when VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL is defined to an invalid channel and NO_VTARGET_DETECT is

-  *     defined (thanks to Steven Morehouse)

-  *   - Fixed AVRISP-MKII programmer project reset line polarity inverted when the generated EEP file is loaded into the USB AVR's EEPROM and avr-dude is used

-  *   - Fixed CDC and DFU bootloaders failing to compile when the bootloader section size is 8KB or more (thanks to Georg Glock)

-  *   - Fixed CDC and DFU bootloaders API function offsets incorrect on some devices (thanks to Rod DeMay)

-  *   - Fixed incorrect DFU version number reported to the host in the  DFU bootloader descriptors (thanks to Georg Glock)

-  *   - Fixed incorrect version hundredths value encoding in VERSION_BCD() macro (thanks to Georg Glock)

-  *   - Fixed invalid configuration descriptor in the low level KeyboardMouse device demo (thanks to Jun Wako)

-  *   - Fixed CDC and DFU bootloaders API page erase and write function failures (thanks to Martin Lambert)

-  *

-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog120219 Version 120219

-  *  <b>New:</b>

-  *  - Core:

-  *   - Added support for the XMEGA A3BU Xplained board

-  *   - Added support for the new B series XMEGA devices

-  *   - Added support for version 2 of the Teensy boards (thanks to Christoph Redecker)

-  *   - Added support for the USB2AX boards, hardware revision 1-3

-  *   - Added new Android Accessory Host class driver

-  *   - Added new USB_Host_GetDescriptor(), USB_Host_GetDeviceConfiguration() and USB_Host_GetInterfaceAltSetting() functions

-  *   - Added new CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetInterfaceProperty() callback to the Audio Device Class driver

-  *   - Added new LEDs_Disable(), Buttons_Disable() and Joystick_Disable() functions to the board hardware drivers

-  *   - Added support for the Micropendous family of boards (Arduino-like revisions 1 and 2, DIP, 32U2, A, 1, 2, 3 and 4)

-  *   - Added INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE and NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT compile time options (thanks to Opendous Inc.)

-  *   - Added support for the Atmel XMEGA B1 Xplained board

-  *   - Added Serial USART peripheral driver for the XMEGA architecture

-  *   - Added Master Mode SPI USART peripheral driver for the XMEGA and AVR8 architectures

-  *   - Added build test to verify correct compilation of as many modules as possible under as many architectures as possible under the C and C++ languages

-  *   - Added build test to verify correct compilation of the USB driver when forced into single USB mode under as many architectures as possible

-  *  - Library Applications:

-  *   - Added User Application APIs to the CDC and DFU class bootloaders

-  *   - Added INVERTED_ISP_MISO compile time option to the AVRISP-MKII clone project (thanks to Chuck Rohs)

-  *   - Added new Android Accessory Host demo (thanks to Opendous Inc.)

-  *

-  *  <b>Changed:</b>

-  *  - Core:

-  *   - When automatic PLL management mode is enabled on the U4 series AVR8 chips, the PLL is now configured for 48MHz and not

-  *     a divided 96MHz, to lower power consumption and to keep the system within the datasheet specs for 3.3V operation (thanks to Scott Vitale)

-  *   - Added Class, ClassDevice, ClassHost and ClassCommon to the internal class driver source filenames to prevent ambiguities

-  *   - Altered the Mass Storage Host class driver so that SCSI data STALLs from the attached device can be recovered from automatically without

-  *     having to reset the Mass Storage interface

-  *   - USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED constant renamed to USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED, as this was misnamed (thanks to NXP Semiconductors)

-  *   - Reordered board name definition indexes so that a mispelled BOARD compile option will default to BOARD_USER rather than BOARD_USBKEY

-  *   - Altered the HID class driver to only try to construct at maximum one packet per USB frame, to reduce CPU usage

-  *   - All USB Class Driver configuration struct values are now non-const, to allow for run-time modifications if required before configuring an instance

-  *  - Library Applications:

-  *   - Altered the Mass Storage Host LowLevel demo so that SCSI data STALLs from the attached device can be recovered from automatically without

-  *     having to reset the Mass Storage interface

-  *   - Updated the AVRISP-MKII Clone programmer project to be compatible with the latest version of AVR Studio (version 5.1)

-  *   - Changed the AVRISP-MKII Clone programmer project to report a fixed 3.3V VTARGET voltage on USB AVRs lacking an ADC instead of 5V to prevent

-  *     warnings in AVR Studio 5.1 when programming XMEGA devices

-  *   - Allow serial strings to be generated on the older AVR8 devices which do not explicitly state they contain unique values in the datasheet,

-  *     as this appears to be implemented in hardware

-  *

-  *  <b>Fixed:</b>

-  *  - Core:

-  *   - Fixed ring buffer size limited to 255 elements, instead of the intended 65535 elements.

-  *   - Fixed CDC class drivers not saving and sending all 16-bits of the control line states (thanks to Matthew Swabey)

-  *   - Fixed race conditions in the CDC, HID and Mass Storage class drivers when processing some control requests

-  *   - Fixed misspelled HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFIER_* macros in the HID class driver (thanks to Laszlo Monda)

-  *   - Fixed broken AVR32 endpoint/pipe communications when ORDERED_EP_CONFIG compile time option is not enabled (thanks to Matthias Jahr)

-  *   - Fixed broken compilation for the AVR32 devices if the NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time option was not enabled (thanks to Matthias Jahr)

-  *   - Fixed compiler warning on GCC with \c -wundef compile flag is used (thanks to Georg Glock)

-  *   - Fixed incorrect implementation of LEDs_ToggleLEDs() for the Adafruit-U4 board (thanks to Caroline Saliman)

-  *   - Fixed broken compilation of LUFA under C++ compilers when the Serial peripheral module header file is included in a C++ source file

-  *   - Fixed missing semicolon in the UC3 architecture host pipe functions

-  *   - Fixed failed compilation for the XMEGA architecture if USB_DEVICE_ONLY us not specified

-  *   - Fixed UC3 architecture ignoring the pipe size when Pipe_ConfigurePipe() is called

-  *  - Library Applications:

-  *   - Added reliability patches to the AVRISP-MKII Clone project's PDI/TPI protocols (thanks to Justin Mattair)

-  *   - Fixed AVRISP-MKII Clone compile warning on AVR8 U4 targets even when NO_VTARGET_DETECT is enabled

-  *   - Fixed AVRISP-MKII Clone failing to start application firmware once a TPI programming session is exited

-  *   - Fixed DFU class bootloader not resetting the LED pins as high impedance inputs when a software jump to the user applications is requested

-  *   - Fixed AVRISP-MKII Clone timing out on long programming commands such as programming the EEPROM on an ATMEGA8 (thanks to Martin Kelling)

-  *   - Fixed invalid PID value used in the TempDataLogger project host application (thanks to Anupam Pathak)

-  *

-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog111009 Version 111009

-  *  <b>New:</b>

-  *  - Core:

-  *   - Added USE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER compile time option to include a LUFAConfig.h header in the user director for LUFA configuration

-  *     tokens as an alternative to tokens defined in the project makefile

-  *   - Added new USB_Host_SetInterfaceAltSetting() convenience function for the selection of an interface's alternative setting

-  *   - Added Audio class control request definitions

-  *   - Added new CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetEndpointProperty() callback to the Audio Device Class driver to allow for endpoint control manipulations

-  *     such as data sample rates

-  *   - Added support for the Audio class GET STATUS request in the Audio Device Class driver so that it is correctly ACKed when sent by the host

-  *   - Added new EVENT_Audio_Device_StreamStartStop() event to the Audio Device Class driver to detect stream start/stop events

-  *   - Added board driver support for the Busware TUL board

-  *   - Added board hardware driver support for the EVK1100 board

-  *   - Added board hardware driver support for the EVK1104 board

-  *   - Added new Host mode Audio Class driver

-  *   - Added new SPI_GetCurrentMode() function to the SPI peripheral driver

-  *   - Added RingBuffer_GetFreeCount() function to the Ring Buffer driver

-  *   - Added new HID_Host_SetIdlePeriod() function to the HID Host Class driver

-  *   - Added new USB_Host_ConfigurationNumber global variable to indicate the selected configuration in an attached device

-  *   - Added new USB_Host_GetDeviceStatus() function to the host standard request function set

-  *   - Added AVR USB XMEGA architecture port (currently incomplete/experimental)

-  *   - Added new STRINGIFY() and STRINGIFY_EXPANDED() convenience macros

-  *   - Added new JTAG_DISABLE() macro for the AVR8 architecture

-  *   - Added Device Qualifier standard descriptor structure definitions USB_StdDescriptor_DeviceQualifier_t and USB_Descriptor_DeviceQualifier_t

-  *  - Library Applications:

-  *   - Added RNDIS device mode to the Webserver project

-  *   - Added new incomplete AndroidAccessoryHost Host LowLevel demo

-  *   - Added new HIDReportViewer project

-  *   - Added new MediaControl project

-  *   - Added new AudioInputHost Host ClassDriver demo

-  *   - Added new AudioOutputHost Host ClassDriver demo

-  *   - Added new AudioInputHost Host LowLevel demo

-  *   - Added new AudioOutputHost Host LowLevel demo

-  *   - Added new "checksource" target to all library project makefiles

-  *   - Added new VTARGET_USE_INTERNAL_REF configuration option to the AVRISP-MKII clone project (thanks to Volker Bosch)

-  *

-  *  <b>Changed:</b>

-  *  - Core:

-  *   - Altered the definition of the USB_Audio_Descriptor_Format_t descriptor so that the user is now responsible for supplying

-  *     the supported audio sampling rates, to allow for multiple audio interfaces with different numbers of supported rates and/or

-  *     continuous sample rates

-  *   - Pipe_BoundEndpointNumber() has been renamed to Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress(), and now returns the correct endpoint direction

-  *     as part of the endpoint address

-  *   - Renamed global state variables that are specific to a certain USB mode to clearly indicate which mode the variable relates to,

-  *     by changing the USB_* prefix to USB_Device_* or USB_Host_*

-  *   - Removed the HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval and HOST_STATE_Suspended host state machine states, as these are no longer required

-  *   - Altered the USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration() function to update the global Host state machine state and the new

-  *     USB_Host_ConfigurationNumber global as required

-  *   - Added endian correcting code to the library USB class drivers for multiple architecture support

-  *   - Removed the ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_* macros, replaced by ENDPOINT_DIR_* instead

-  *   - Renamed the JTAG_DEBUG_ASSERT() macro to JTAG_ASSERT()

-  *   - Added variable number of axis to HID_DESCRIPTOR_JOYSTICK() for multi-axis joysticks above just X and Y

-  *   - Renamed USB_Host_ClearPipeStall() to USB_Host_ClearEndpointStall() as the function works on an endpoint address within the attached device,

-  *     and not a Pipe within the host

-  *   - The MS_Host_ResetMSInterface() now performs a full Mass Storage reset sequence to prevent data corruption in the event of a device

-  *     lock up or timeout (thanks to David Lyons)

-  *   - Added endian-correction to the CDC driver's Line Encoding control request handlers.

-  *  - Library Applications:

-  *   - Modified the Low Level and Class Driver AudioInput and AudioOutput demos to support multiple audio sample rates

-  *   - Updated all host mode demos and projects to use the EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete() event callback for device configuration

-  *     instead of manual host state machine manipulations in the main application task

-  *   - Changed the reports in the GenericHID device demos to control the board LEDs, to reduce user confusion over the callback routines

-  *   - Added reliability patches to the AVRISP-MKII Clone project's ISP and PDI/TPI protocols (thanks to Justin Mattair)

-  *

-  *  <b>Fixed:</b>

-  *  - Core:

-  *   - Large number of documentation and code comment corrections (thanks to Andrey from Microsin.ru)

-  *   - Fixed possibility of the AVR's SPI interface being pulled out of master mode if the /SS pin is a input and pulled low (thanks

-  *     to Andrey from Microsin.ru)

-  *   - Fixed compile error when FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE compile time option was disabled, and a USE_*_DESCRIPTORS compile time

-  *     option was not enabled on the AVR8s

-  *   - Fixed lack of C++ compatibility in some internal header files causing compile errors when using LUFA in C++ projects

-  *   - Fixed error in the pipe unordered allocation algorithm for the AVR8 devices breaking compatibility with some devices

-  *   - Fixed USB_USBTask not being called internally in stream transfers between packets when Partial Stream Transfers are used

-  *   - Fixed swapped TWI_ADDRESS_READ and TWI_ADDRESS_WRITE values

-  *   - Fixed TWI_ReadPacket() not releasing the TWI bus on read completion

-  *   - Fixed optimization error in the HID Parser item value USB_SetHIDReportItemInfo() and USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo() routines if the report item was

-  *     \c NULL (which should be allowable according to the API)

-  *   - Fixed HID Parser CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem() callback function not being passed a cacheable report item pointer

-  *   - Fixed HID Parser's largest report size bit count not including the size of the last parsed report item

-  *   - Fixed HID host driver's largest HID report size count corrupt when the number of report bits exceeds 255

-  *  - Library Applications:

-  *   - Fixed incorrect signature in the CDC and DFU class bootloaders for the ATMEGA8U2

-  *   - Fixed KeyboardHost and KeyboardHostWithParser demos displaying incorrect values when numerical keys were pressed

-  *   - Fixed compile errors in the incomplete BluetoothHost demo application (thanks to Timo Lindfors)

-  *   - Fixed incorrect Dataflash buffer use in the DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM() function of several demos/projects (thanks to Jeremy Willden)

-  *   - Fixed incorrect logging interval (always 500ms longer than requested) in the TempDataLogger project

-  *   - Fixed incorrect buffer size check in the USBtoSerial project (thanks to Yuri A Nikiforov)

-  *   - Fixed port state table corruption in the TCP layer of the RNDIS Ethernet device demos

-  *

-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog110528 Version 110528

-  *  <b>New:</b>

-  *  - Core:

-  *   - Added new ORDERED_EP_CONFIG compile time option to restrict endpoint/pipe configuration to ascending order

-  *     in exchange for a smaller compiled program binary size

-  *   - Added a new general RingBuff.h miscellaneous ring buffer library driver header

-  *   - Added new GCC_FORCE_POINTER_ACCESS() macro to correct GCC's mishandling of struct pointer accesses

-  *   - Added new GCC_MEMORY_BARRIER() macro to prevent instruction reordering across boundaries

-  *   - Added basic driver example use code to the library documentation

-  *   - Added new Endpoint_Null_Stream() and Pipe_Null_Stream() functions

-  *   - Added new ADC_GET_CHANNEL_MASK() convenience macro

-  *   - Added new HID report item macros (with HID_RI_ prefix) to allow for easy creation and editing of HID report descriptors

-  *   - Added new HID_DESCRIPTOR_MOUSE(), HID_DESCRIPTOR_KEYBOARD(), HID_DESCRIPTOR_JOYSTICK() and HID_DESCRIPTOR_VENDOR() macros

-  *     for easy automatic creation of basic USB HID device reports

-  *   - Added new MAX() and MIN() convenience macros

-  *   - Added new Serial_SendData() function to the Serial driver

-  *   - Added board driver support for the Sparkfun ATMEGA8U2 breakout board

-  *   - Added TWI baud rate prescaler and bit length parameters to the TWI_Init() function (thanks to Thomas Herlinghaus)

-  *   - Internal restructuring for eventual multiple architecture ports

-  *   - Added AVR32 UC3 architecture port (currently incomplete/experimental)

-  *   - Added new architecture independent functions to enable, disable, save and restore the Global Interrupt Enable flags

-  *   - Added new RNDIS Device Class Driver packet send and receive functions

-  *  - Library Applications:

-  *   - Added ability to write protect Mass Storage disk write operations from the host OS

-  *   - Added new MIDIToneGenerator project

-  *   - Added new KeyboardMouseMultiReport Device ClassDriver demo

-  *   - Added new VirtualSerialMassStorage Device ClassDriver demo

-  *   - Added HID class bootloader, compatible with a modified version of the command line Teensy loader from PJRC.com

-  *   - Added LED flashing to the CDC and DFU class bootloaders to indicate when they are running

-  *

-  *  <b>Changed:</b>

-  *  - Core:

-  *   - Unordered Endpoint/Pipe configuration is now allowed once again by default via the previous reconfig workaround

-  *   - Refactored Host mode Class Driver *_Host_ConfigurePipes() routines to be more space efficient when compiled

-  *   - Added new *_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed error codes for the *_Host_ConfigurePipes() routines

-  *   - The USARTStream global is now public and documented in the SerialStream module, allowing for the serial USART

-  *     stream to be accessed via its handle rather than via the implicit stdout and stdin streams

-  *   - The FAST_STREAM_TRANSFERS compile time option has been removed due to lack of use and low cost/benefit ratio

-  *   - Altered all endpoint/pipe stream transfers so that the new BytesProcessed parameter now points to a location

-  *     where the number of bytes in the transfer that have been completed can be stored (or NULL if entire transaction

-  *     should be performed in one chunk)

-  *   - The NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS compile time option has now been removed due to the new partial stream transfer feature

-  *   - Changed over all project and demo HID report descriptors to use the new HID report item macros

-  *   - Moved the HIDParser.c source file to the LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/ directory from the LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/

-  *   - Added support to the HID parser for extended USAGE items that contain the usage page as well as the usage index

-  *   - Removed the SerialStream driver, rolled functionality into the regular Serial peripheral driver via the new

-  *     Serial_CreateStream() and Serial_CreateBlockingStream() functions

-  *   - Renamed the low level Serial byte send/receive functions, to be consistent with the CDC class driver byte functions

-  *   - Altered the behaviour of the serial byte reception function so that is is non-blocking, and now returns a negative

-  *     value if no character is received (to remain consistent with the CDC class driver byte reception routines)

-  *   - Renamed the PRNT_Host_SendString(), CDC_Host_SendString() and CDC_Device_SendString() functions to *_SendData(), and

-  *     added new versions of the *_SendString() routines that expect a null terminated string instead

-  *   - Renamed all driver termination *_ShutDown() functions to the more logical name *_Disable()

-  *   - Reduced latency for executing the Start-Of-Frame events (if enabled in the user application)

-  *   - Removed Pipe_ClearErrorFlags(), pipe error flags are now automatically cleared when Pipe_ClearError() is called

-  *   - Endpoint_ResetFIFO() renamed to Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(), to be consistent with the Pipe_ResetPipe() function name

-  *   - Implemented on-demand PLL clock generation for the U4, U6 and U7 series USB AVRs when automatic PLL mode is specified

-  *   - F_CLOCK changed to F_USB to be more descriptive, and applicable on future architecture ports

-  *   - Renamed all low level Endpoint_Read_*, Endpoint_Write_* and Endpoint_Discard_* functions to use the number of bits instead of

-  *     a symbolic size (Byte, Word, DWord) so that the function names are applicable and correct across all architectures

-  *   - Renamed all low level Pipe_Read_*, Pipe_Write_* and Pipe_Discard_* functions to use the number of bits instead of

-  *     a symbolic size (Byte, Word, DWord) so that the function names are applicable and correct across all architectures

-  *   - Separated out board drivers by architecture in the library internals for better organisation

-  *  - Library Applications:

-  *   - Changed the XPLAINBridge software UART to use the regular timer CTC mode instead of the alternative CTC mode

-  *     via the Input Capture register, to reduce user confusion

-  *   - Combined page and word ISP programming mode code in the AVRISP-MKII clone project to reduce compiled size and

-  *     increase maintainability of the code

-  *   - Changed over library projects to use the new general ring buffer library driver module

-  *   - Added new high level TWI packet read/write commands, altered behaviour of the TWI_StartTransmission() function

-  *   - Changed TempDataLogger project's DS1307 driver to simplify the function interface and prevent a possible race condition

-  *   - Changed AVRISP-MKII project to use the Watchdog interrupt for command timeouts, to reduce CPU usage and free timer 0

-  *     for other uses

-  *   - Updated the software USART code in the XPLAIN Bridge application so that the incoming bits are sampled at their mid-point

-  *     instead of starting point, to give maximum reliability (thanks to Anton Staaf)

-  *

-  *  <b>Fixed:</b>

-  *  - Core:

-  *   - Fixed broken USBFOO board drivers due to missing BOARD_USBFOO define

-  *   - Fixed HID host class driver incorrectly binding to HID devices that do not have an OUT endpoint

-  *   - Fixed incorrect definition of the HID_KEYBOARD_SC_D constant in the HID class driver (thanks to Opendous Inc.)

-  *   - Fixed incorrect definition of the HID_KEYBOARD_SC_RIGHT_ARROW constant in the HID class driver (thanks to Joby Taffey)

-  *   - Fixed incorrect endpoint initialisation order in the several device demos (thanks to Rick Drolet)

-  *   - Fixed inverted Minimus board LEDs

-  *   - Fixed incorrect byte ordering in the Audio_Device_WriteSample24 function (thanks to WZab)

-  *   - Fixed several functions in the Host mode Still Image Class driver returning an error code from the incorrect

-  *     error code enum (thanks to Daniel Seibert)

-  *   - Fixed ReportID not being removed from the feature/out report data array in the HID class driver when Report IDs are used

-  *   - Fixed incorrect BUTTONS_BUTTON1 definition for the Minimus board

-  *   - Fixed Still Image Host class driver exiting the descriptor search routine prematurely if the data pipes (but not event pipe)

-  *     is found

-  *   - Fixed missing call to Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests() in the Pipe_ConfigurePipe() routine

-  *   - Fixed Remote Wakeup broken on the AVRs due to the mechanism only operating when the SUSPI bit is set (thanks to Holger Steinhaus)

-  *   - Fixed possible invalid program execution when in host mode if corrupt descriptor lengths are supplied by the attached device

-  *  - Library Applications:

-  *   - Fixed Benito project discarding incoming data from the USB virtual serial port when the USART is busy

-  *   - Fixed broken DFU bootloader, added XPLAIN support for bootloader start when XCK jumpered to ground

-  *   - Fixed broken HID_REQ_GetReport request handler in the Low Level GenericHID demo

-  *   - Fixed possible lost data in the XPLAINBridge, USBtoSerial and Benito projects when the host exceeds the packet

-  *     timeout period on received packets as set by USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS (thanks to Justin Rajewski)

-  *   - Fixed possible programming problem in the AVRISP-MKII clone project when programming specific patterns into a target

-  *     memory space that is only byte (not page) addressable

-  *   - Fixed errors in the incomplete Test and Measurement device demo preventing proper operation (thanks to Pavel Plotnikov)

-  *   - Fixed programming errors in the AVRISP-MKII project when the programming packet is a round multiple of the endpoint bank

-  *     size under avrdude (thanks to Steffan Woltjer)

-  *

-  *

-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog101122 Version 101122

-  *  <b>New:</b>

-  *  - Core:

-  *    - Added new SCSI_ASENSE_NOT_READY_TO_READY_CHANGE constant to the Mass Storage class driver, to indicate when a previously

-  *      not ready removable medium has now become ready for the host's use (thanks to Martin Degelsegger)

-  *    - Moved the Pipe and Endpoint stream related code to two new USB library core source files EndpointStream.c and PipeStream.c

-  *    - Added new USB_Device_GetFrameNumber() and USB_Host_GetFrameNumber() functions to retrieve the current USB frame number

-  *    - Added new USB_Host_EnableSOFEvents(), USB_Host_DisableSOFEvents() and EVENT_USB_Host_StartOfFrame() for the user application

-  *      handling of USB Start of Frame events while in USB Host mode

-  *    - Added new PRNT_Host_BytesReceived(), PRNT_Host_ReceiveByte(), PRNT_Host_SendByte() and PRNT_Host_Flush() functions to the

-  *      Print Host Class driver

-  *    - Added class specific descriptor alternative struct type defines with standard USB-IF element naming

-  *    - Added new project makefile template to the library and moved board driver stub files into in a new "CodeTemplates" directory

-  *    - Added board hardware driver support for the Adafruit U4 breakout board

-  *    - Added board hardware driver support for the Arduino Uno development board

-  *    - Added board hardware driver support for the Blackcat USB JTAG board (thanks to the PSGroove team)

-  *    - Added board hardware driver support for the Busware BUI development board

-  *    - Added board hardware driver support for the Busware CUL V3 868MHZ radio board (thanks to Dirk Tostmann)

-  *    - Added board hardware driver support for the Kernel Concepts USBFOO development board

-  *    - Added board hardware driver support for the Linnix UDIP development board

-  *    - Added board hardware driver support for the Olimex AVR-USB-162 development board (thanks to Steve Fawcett)

-  *    - Added board hardware driver support for the Maximus board (thanks to the PSGroove team)

-  *    - Added board hardware driver support for the Microsin AVR-USB162 breakout board

-  *    - Added board hardware driver support for the Minimus board (thanks to the PSGroove team)

-  *    - Added new NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH compile time option to disable automatic flushing of interfaces when the USB management

-  *      tasks for each driver is called

-  *    - Added standard keyboard HID report scan-code defines (thanks to Laszlo Monda)

-  *    - Added new Pipe_GetBusyBanks(), Endpoint_GetBusyBanks() and Endpoint_AbortPendingIN() functions

-  *  - Library Applications:

-  *    - Added default test tone generation mode to the Device mode AudioInput demos

-  *    - Added new NO_BLOCK_SUPPORT, NO_EEPROM_BYTE_SUPPORT, NO_FLASH_BYTE_SUPPORT and NO_LOCK_BYTE_WRITE_SUPPORT compile time options to the

-  *      CDC class bootloader

-  *    - Added new XCK_RESCUE_CLOCK_ENABLE compile time option to the AVRISP-MKII clone programmer project (thanks to Tom Light)

-  *

-  *  <b>Changed:</b>

-  *  - Core:

-  *    - Removed complicated logic for the Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint() function to use inlined or function called versions

-  *      depending of if the given bank size is a compile time constant, as the compiler does a better job of optimizing

-  *      with basic code

-  *    - Changed the signature of the CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor() callback function so that the descriptor pointer is const, to remove

-  *      the need for extra casting inside the callback (thanks to Jonathan Kollasch)

-  *    - Reduced HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS to 1000ms down from 1500ms to improve device compatibility while in USB Host mode

-  *    - Removed the EVENT_USB_InitFailure() event, not specifying a USB mode correctly now defaults to UID selection mode

-  *    - Renamed and moved class driver common constant definitions to make the naming scheme more uniform

-  *    - Moved the USB mode specifier constants into a new enum, so that they are semantically related to one another

-  *    - Renamed ENDPOINT_DOUBLEBANK_SUPPORTED() to ENDPOINT_BANKS_SUPPORTED() and changed it to return the maximum number of supported banks for

-  *      the given endpoint

-  *    - Better algorithm to extract and convert the internal device serial number into a string descriptor (if present)

-  *    - All USB class drivers are now automatically included when LUFA/Drivers/USB.h is included, and no longer need to be separately included

-  *    - The MIDI class drivers now automatically flushes the MIDI interface when the MIDI class driver's USBTask() function is called

-  *    - Renamed the EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event to EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() as it is now fired before the library

-  *      request handlers, not afterwards

-  *  - Library Applications:

-  *    - Changed over all device demos to use a clearer algorithm for the configuring of the application's endpoints

-  *    - Added missing DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation() function to the MassStorageKeyboard demo, removed redundant

-  *      SCSI_Codes.h file as these values are part of the MassStorage Class Driver

-  *    - Added compile time error to the AVRISP-MKII project when built for the U4 chips, as the default VTARGET detection ADC channel

-  *      does not exist on these chips (thanks to Marco)

-  *    - Changed all Device mode LowLevel demos and Device Class drivers so that the control request is acknowledged and any data

-  *      transferred as quickly as possible without any processing in between sections, so that long callbacks or event handlers will

-  *      not break communications with the host by exceeding the maximum control request stage timeout period

-  *    - Changed over all demos, drivers and internal functions to use the current frame number over the Start of Frame flag where possible

-  *      to free up the Start of Frame flag for interrupt use in the user application

-  *    - All project makefiles now correctly clean intermediate build files from assembly and C++ sources (thanks to Daniel Czigany)

-  *    - Changed default value for the reset polarity parameter in the AVRISP-MKII project so that it defaults to active low drive

-  *    - Changed configuration descriptor parser for all host mode projects and class drivers to ensure better compatibility with devices

-  *    - All LowLevel demos changed to use the constants and types defined in the USB class drivers

-  *    - Changed AudioInput and AudioOutput demos to reload the next sample via an interrupt rather than polling the sample timer

-  *    - Rescue clock of the AVRISP-MKII moved to the AVR's OCR1A pin, so that the clock can be generated at all times

-  *    - Changed ClassDriver MIDI demos to process all incoming events in a loop until the bank becomes empty rather than one at a time

-  *    - Changed LowLevel MIDI demos to only clear the incoming event bank once it has become empty to support packed event packets

-  *

-  *  <b>Fixed:</b>

-  *  - Core:

-  *    - Fixed USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo() function modifying the given report item's data when the report item does not exist

-  *      within the supplied report of a multiple report HID device

-  *    - Fixed critical pipe/endpoint memory allocation issue where the bank memory address space could be silently overlapped

-  *      in the USB controller if the endpoints or pipes were allocated in anything other than ascending order (thanks to Martin Degelsegger)

-  *    - Added LEDs_ToggleLEDs() function to several board LED drivers which were missing it (thanks to Andrei Krainev)

-  *    - Fixed SET FEATURE and CLEAR FEATURE control requests directed at an unconfigured endpoint causing request timeouts

-  *    - Fixed USB_Host_ClearPipeStall() incorrectly determining the endpoint direction from the currently selected pipe

-  *    - Fixed JTAG_DEBUG_POINT() and JTAG_DEBUG_BREAK() macros not compiling under pure C99 standards mode

-  *    - Fixed endpoint selection within the CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport() callback function causing broken GET REPORT requests

-  *    - Fixed incorrect command name for EEPROM memory programming in the makefile dfu-ee target

-  *    - Fixed incorrect LEDs_ChangeLEDs() function in the Benito board LED driver

-  *    - Fixed incorrect USB_DeviceState value when unconfiguring the device without an address set

-  *    - Fixed SPI driver not explicitly setting /SS and MISO pins as inputs when SPI_Init() is called

-  *    - Fixed random enumeration failure while in device mode due to interrupts causing the Set Address request to exceed maximum timings

-  *    - Fixed MIDI_Host_Flush() not aborting early when the specified MIDI host interface was not configured

-  *    - Fixed MIDI class driver send routines silently discarding packets if the endpoint or pipe is busy (thanks to Robin Green)

-  *  - Library Applications:

-  *    - Fixed MassStorage based demos and projects resetting the SCSI sense values before the command is executed, leading to

-  *      missed SCSI sense values when the host retrieves the sense key (thanks to Martin Degelsegger)

-  *    - Fixed USBtoSerial and Benito project SetLineEncoding calls failing if the USART is busy, due to the RX ISR delaying the control

-  *      request handler

-  *    - Fixed LowLevel PrinterHost demo not sending control requests to the attached printer with the correct printer interface wIndex value

-  *    - Fixed incorrect signature reported in the CDC class bootloader for the ATMEGA32U2

-  *    - Fixed BootloaderCDC project failing on some operating systems due to removed Line Encoding options (thanks to Alexey Belyaev)

-  *    - Fixed broken FLASH/EEPROM programming in the AVRISP-MKII clone project when writing in non-paged mode and the polling byte cannot be used

-  *    - Fixed ISR definition conflict in the XPLAIN bridge between the software UART and the AVRISP-MKII ISP modules

-  *    - Fixed USBtoSerial and XPLAINBridge demos discarding data from the PC if the send buffer becomes full

-  *    - Fixed broken input in the MagStripe reader project due to an incorrect HID report descriptor

-  *    - Fixed incorrect PollingIntervalMS values in the demo/project/bootloader endpoint descriptors (thanks to MCS Electronics)

-  *    - Fixed AVRISP-MKII clone project not starting the target's program automatically after exiting TPI programming mode

-  *

-  *

-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog100807 Version 100807

-  *  <b>New:</b>

-  *  - Added new ADC_DisableChannel() function (thanks to Mich Davis)

-  *  - Added new VTARGET_REF_VOLTS and VTARGET_SCALE_FACTOR compile time defines to the AVRISP-MKII programmer project to set

-  *    the VTARGET reference voltage and scale factor

-  *  - Added new pgm_read_ptr() macro to Common.h for reading of pointers out of flash memory space

-  *  - Added new SWAPENDIAN_16() and SWAPENDIAN_32() macros to Common.h for statically initialized variables at compile time

-  *  - Added new Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Device.c file to house Device mode specific functions that are more complicated than simple macros

-  *  - Added new AVRStudio 4 project files for all library demos, projects and bootloaders

-  *  - Added ability to set the serial baud rate via the user's terminal in the XPLAINBridge project

-  *  - Added new LUFA module variables for the different source modules in the core library makefile to simplify project makefiles

-  *  - Added start of a new Test and Measurement class demo (thanks to Peter Lawrence)

-  *  - Added new SPI_ORDER_* data order masks to the SPI peripheral driver

-  *  - Added support to the AVRISP-MKII project for ISP speeds slower than 125KHz via a new software SPI driver

-  *  - Added support for the new button/LED on the latest model USBTINY-MKII

-  *

-  *  <b>Changed:</b>

-  *  - The RingBuff library code has been replaced in the XPLAINBridge, Benito and USBtoSerial projects with an ultra lightweight

-  *    ring buffer to help improve the reliability of the projects

-  *  - The EEPROM stream read/write functions now use eeprom_update_byte() instead of eeprom_write_byte(), so that only

-  *    changed bytes are written to EEPROM to preserve its lifespan

-  *  - Changed over the AVRISP-MKII and TemperatureDataLogger projects to use eeprom_update_byte() when writing non-volatile

-  *    parameters to EEPROM to preserve its lifespan

-  *  - Removed unused line encoding data and control requests from the CDC Bootloader code, to save space

-  *  - Renamed SERIAL_STREAM_ASSERT() macro to STDOUT_ASSERT()

-  *  - The USB_Device_IsRemoteWakeupSent() and USB_Device_IsUSBSuspended() macros have been deleted, as they are now obsolete

-  *  - Rewrote the implementation of the SwapEndian_16() and SwapEndian_32() functions so that they compile down in most instances to

-  *    minimal loads and stores rather than complicated shifts

-  *  - The software UART in the XPLAINBridge has been largely altered to try to improve upon its performance and reliability

-  *  - The USBtoSerial and Benito projects now flushes received data via a flush timer, so that several bytes can be transmitted at once

-  *  - Removed the automated checking of event names in the demo, project and bootloader makefiles due to inconsistencies between the

-  *    behaviour of the command line tools used to perform the check on each platform

-  *  - Internal USB driver source files renamed and moved to ease future possible architecture ports

-  *  - All internal pseudo-function macros have been converted to true inline functions for type-safety and readability

-  *  - Changed LED indicator masks for the AVRISP-MKII project, so that there are defined roles for each LED

-  *  - Altered the CDC Device and Host Class drivers' receive byte routines, so that no data is indicated by the function returning a

-  *    negative value (thanks to Andreas Paulin)

-  *  - Added auto flushing of OUT data to the CDC Host Class driver's USBTask function to automatically flush the send pipe buffer

-  *

-  *  <b>Fixed:</b>

-  *  - Fixed AVRISP project sending a LOAD EXTENDED ADDRESS command to 128KB AVRs after programming or reading from

-  *    the last page of FLASH (thanks to Gerard Sexton)

-  *  - Fixed AVRISP project not sending a full erase-and-write EEPROM command to XMEGA targets when writing to the EEPROM

-  *    instead of the split write-only command (thanks to Tim Margush)

-  *  - Fixed RNDISEthernet demos crashing when calculating checksums for Ethernet/TCP packets of more than ~500 bytes due to

-  *    an overflow in the checksum calculation loop (thanks to Kevin Malec)

-  *  - Fixed XPLAINBridge project not correctly reading the XMEGA's supply voltage when reporting back to the host

-  *  - Fixed incorrect signature for the ATMEGA32U2 in the DFU bootloader (thanks to Axel Rohde)

-  *  - Fixed internal device serial not being accessible on the ATMEGAXXU2 AVRs (thanks to Axel Rohde)

-  *  - Fixed void pointer arithmetic in ConfigDescriptor.h breaking C++ compatibility (thanks to Michael Hennebry)

-  *  - Fixed broken PDI EEPROM Section Erase functionality in the AVRISP-MKII project

-  *  - Fixed USB_Device_SendRemoteWakeup() not working when the USB clock was frozen during USB bus suspend (thanks to Brian Dickman)

-  *  - Fixed occasional lockup of the AVRISP project due to the timeout extension code incorrectly extending the timeout in

-  *    PDI and TPI programming modes infinitely

-  *  - Fixed HID device class driver still using PrevReportINBuffer for GetReport control requests even when it has been

-  *    set to NULL by the user application (thanks to Axel Rohde)

-  *  - Fixed MIDI_Device_SendEventPacket() not correctly waiting for the endpoint to become ready (thanks to Robin Green)

-  *  - Fixed Benito and USBtoSerial projects not turning off the USART before reconfiguring it, which could cause incorrect

-  *    operation to occur (thanks to Bob Paddock)

-  *  - Fixed Serial peripheral driver not turning off the USART before reconfiguring it, which would cause incorrect operation

-  *    to occur (thanks to Bob Paddock)

-  *  - Fixed software application start command broken in the DFU class bootloader when dfu-programmer is used due to application

-  *    start address corruption

-  *

-  *

-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog100513 Version 100513

-  *  <b>New:</b>

-  *  - Added incomplete MIDIToneGenerator project

-  *  - Added new Relay Controller Board project (thanks to OBinou)

-  *  - Added board hardware driver support for the Teensy, USBTINY MKII, Benito and JM-DB-U2 lines of third party USB AVR boards

-  *  - Added new ATTR_NO_INIT variable attribute for global variables that should not be automatically cleared on startup

-  *  - Added new ENDPOINT_*_BusSuspended error code to the Endpoint function, so that the stream functions early-abort if the bus

-  *    is suspended before or during a transfer

-  *  - Added new EVENT_CDC_Device_BreakSent() event and CDC_Host_SendBreak() function to the Device and Host CDC Class drivers

-  *  - Added ReportType parameter to the HID device class driver CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport() function so that FEATURE

-  *    reports from the host to the device can be correctly processed

-  *  - Added ReportType parameter to the HID host class driver HID_Host_SendReportByID() function so that FEATURE reports can be

-  *    issued to the attached device

-  *

-  *  <b>Changed:</b>

-  *  - AVRISP programmer project now has a more robust timeout system

-  *  - Added a timeout value to the TWI_StartTransmission() function, within which the addressed device must respond

-  *  - Webserver project now uses the board LEDs to indicate the current IP configuration state

-  *  - Added ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER compile time option to the Webserver project to disable the TELNET server if desired

-  *  - Increased throughput of the USBtoSerial demo on systems that send multiple bytes per packet (thanks to Opendous Inc.)

-  *  - Double bank CDC endpoints in the XPLAIN Bridge project, re-enable JTAG once the mode selection pin has been sampled.

-  *  - Standardized the naming scheme given to configuration descriptor sub-elements in the Device mode demos, bootloaders

-  *    and projects

-  *  - All Class Driver Host mode demos now correctly set the board LEDs to READY once the enumeration process has completed

-  *  - Added LIBUSB_FILTERDRV_COMPAT compile time option to the AVRISP programmer project to make the code compatible with Windows

-  *    builds of avrdude at the expense of AVRStudio compatibility

-  *  - Removed two-step endpoint/pipe bank clear and switch sequence for smaller, faster endpoint/pipe code

-  *  - The USB_Init() function no longer calls sei() - the user is now responsible for enabling interrupts when they are ready

-  *    for them to be enabled (thanks to Andrei Krainev)

-  *  - The Audio_Device_IsSampleReceived() and Audio_Device_IsReadyForNextSample() functions are now inline, to reduce overhead

-  *  - Removed the cast to uint16_t on the set baud rate in the USBtoSerial project, so that the higher >1M baud rates can be

-  *    selected (thanks to Steffan Woltjer)

-  *  - Removed software PDI and TPI emulation from the AVRISP-MKII clone project as it was very buggy and slow - PDI and TPI must

-  *    now be implemented via separate programming headers

-  *  - The CDC class bootloader now uses a watchdog reset rather than a soft-reset when exited to ensure that all hardware is

-  *    properly reset to their defaults

-  *  - Device mode class driver callbacks are now fired before the control request status stage is sent to prevent the host from

-  *    timing out if another request is immediately fired and the device has a lengthy callback routine

-  *  - The TeensyHID bootloader has been removed, per request from Paul at PJRC

-  *  - The LIBUSB_FILTERDRV_COMPAT compile time option in the XPLAINBridge and AVRISP-MKII projects has been renamed

-  *    LIBUSB_DRIVER_COMPAT, as it applies to all software on all platforms using the libUSB driver

-  *

-  *  <b>Fixed:</b>

-  *  - Fixed possible device lockup when INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT is enabled and the control endpoint is not properly

-  *    selected when the ISR completes

-  *  - Fixed AVRISP-MKII clone project not correctly issuing LOAD EXTENDED ADDRESS commands when the extended address

-  *    boundary is crossed during programming or read back (thanks to Gerard Sexton)

-  *  - Fixed warnings when building the AVRISP-MKII clone project with the ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL compile time option disabled

-  *  - Fixed software PDI/TPI programming mode in the AVRISP project not correctly toggling just the clock pin

-  *  - Fixed TWI_StartTransmission() corrupting the contents of the GPIOR0 register

-  *  - Fixed TWI driver not aborting when faced with no response after attempting to address a device on the bus

-  *  - Fixed ADC routines not correctly returning the last result when multiple channels were read

-  *  - Fixed ADC routines failing to read the extended channels (Channels 8 to 13, Internal Temperature Sensor) on the

-  *    U4 series USB AVR parts

-  *  - Fixed LowLevel MassStorage demo broken on the U2 series USB AVRs due to unsupported double-banked endpoint modes used

-  *  - Fixed compilation error in the AudioInput demos when MICROPHONE_BIASED_TO_HALF_RAIL is defined (thanks to C. Scott Ananian)

-  *  - Fixed incorrect definition of HID_ALIGN_DATA() causing incorrect HID report item data alignment

-  *  - Fixed Still Image Host class driver not resetting the transaction ID when a new session is opened, fixed driver not sending

-  *    a valid session ID to the device

-  *  - Removed invalid dfu and flip related targets from the bootloaders - bootloaders can only be replaced with an external programmer

-  *  - Fixed Set/Clear Feature requests directed to a non-configured endpoint not returning a stall to the host

-  *  - Fixed HID Device Class Driver not allocating a temporary buffer when the host requests a report via the control endpoint and the

-  *    user has set the PrevReportINBuffer driver configuration element to NULL (thanks to Lars Noschinski)

-  *  - Fixed device state not being reset to DEVICE_STATE_Default if the host sets a 0x00 device address

-  *  - Fixed device not stalling configuration requests before the device's address has been set

-  *  - Fixed possibility of internal signature retrieval being corrupted if an interrupt occurs during a signature byte

-  *    read (thanks to Andrei Krainev)

-  *  - Fixed device state not being reset back to the default state if the host sets the address to 0

-  *  - Fixed Set Configuration requests not being stalled until the host has set the device's address

-  *  - Fixed Host mode HID class driver not sending the correct report type when HID_Host_SendReportByID() was called and the

-  *    HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY compile time option is set

-  *  - Fixed INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT compile time option preventing other interrupts from occurring while the control endpoint

-  *    request is being processed, causing possible lockups if a USB interrupt occurs during a transfer

-  *  - Remove incorrect Abstract Call Management class specific descriptor from the CDC demos, bootloaders and projects

-  *

-  *

-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog100219 Version 100219

-  *

-  *  <b>New:</b>

-  *  - Added TPI programming support for 6-pin ATTINY devices to the AVRISP programmer project (thanks to Tom Light)

-  *  - Added command timeout counter to the AVRISP project so that the device no longer freezes when incorrectly connected

-  *    to a target

-  *  - Added new TemperatureDataLogger application, a USB data logger which writes to the device's dataflash and appears to

-  *    the host as a standard Mass Storage device when inserted

-  *  - Added MIDI event packing support to the MIDI Device and Host mode Class drivers, allowing for multiple MIDI events to

-  *    sent or received in packed form in a single USB packet

-  *  - Added new MIDI send buffer flush routines to the MIDI Device and Host mode Class drivers, to flush packed events

-  *  - Added master mode hardware TWI driver for easy TWI peripheral control

-  *  - Added ADC MUX masks for the standard ADC input channels on all AVR models with an ADC, altered demos to use these masks

-  *    as on some models, the channel number is not identical to its single-ended ADC MUX mask

-  *  - New Webserver project, a RNDIS host USB webserver using the open source uIP TCP/IP network stack and FatFS library

-  *  - New BOARD value option BOARD_NONE (equivalent to not specifying BOARD) which will remove all board hardware drivers which

-  *    do not adversely affect the code operation (currently only the LEDs driver)

-  *  - Added keyboard modifier masks (HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_*) and LED report masks (KEYBOARD_LED_*) to the HID class driver and

-  *    Keyboard demos

-  *  - Added .5MHz recovery clock to the AVRISP programmer project when in ISP programming mode to correct mis-set fuses

-  *

-  *  <b>Changed:</b>

-  *  - Slowed down software USART carried PDI programming in the AVRISP project to prevent transmission errors

-  *  - Renamed the AVRISP project folder to AVRISP-MKII to reduce confusion

-  *  - Renamed the RESET_LINE_* makefile tokens in the AVRISP MKII Project to AUX_LINE_*, as they are not always used for target

-  *    reset

-  *  - Changed over the MassStorageKeyboard Class driver device demo to use Start of Frame events rather than a timer to keep track

-  *    of elapsed milliseconds

-  *  - Inlined currently unused (but standardized) maintenance functions in the Device and Host Class drivers to save space

-  *  - The XPLAINBridge project now selects between a USB to Serial bridge and a PDI programmer on startup, reading the JTAG port's

-  *    TDI pin to determine which mode to use

-  *  - Removed the stream example code from the Low Level VirtualSerial demos, as they were buggy and only served to add clutter

-  *

-  *  <b>Fixed:</b>

-  *  - Fixed AVRISP project not able to enter programming mode when ISP protocol is used

-  *  - Fixed AVRISP PDI race condition where the guard time between direction changes could be interpreted as a start bit

-  *  - Fixed ADC_IsReadingComplete() returning an inverted result

-  *  - Fixed blocking CDC streams not aborting when the host is disconnected

-  *  - Fixed XPLAIN board Dataflash driver broken due to incorrect preprocessor commands

-  *  - Fixed inverted XPLAIN LED driver output (LED turned on when it was supposed to be turned off, and vice-versa)

-  *  - Fixed Class Driver struct interface numbers in the KeyboardMouse and VirtualSerialMouse demos (thanks to Renaud Cerrato)

-  *  - Fixed invalid USB controller PLL prescaler values for the ATMEGAxxU2 controllers

-  *  - Fixed lack of support for the ATMEGA32U2 in the DFU and CDC class bootloaders

-  *  - Fixed Benito project not resetting the target AVR automatically when programming has completed

-  *  - Fixed DFU bootloader programming not discarding the correct number of filler bytes from the host when non-aligned programming

-  *    ranges are specified (thanks to Thomas Bleeker)

-  *  - Fixed CDC and RNDIS host demos and class drivers - bidirectional endpoints should use two separate pipes, not one half-duplex pipe

-  *  - Fixed Pipe_IsEndpointBound() not taking the endpoint's direction into account

-  *  - Fixed EEPROM and FLASH ISP programming in the AVRISP project

-  *  - Fixed incorrect values of USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED and USB_CONFIG_ATTR_REMOTEWAKEUP tokens (thanks to Claus Christensen)

-  *  - Fixed SerialStream driver blocking while waiting for characters to be received instead of returning EOF

-  *  - Fixed SerialStream driver not setting stdin to the created serial stream (thanks to Mike Alexander)

-  *  - Fixed USB_GetHIDReportSize() returning the number of bits in the specified report instead of bytes

-  *  - Fixed AVRISP project not extending the command delay after each successful page/word/byte program

-  *  - Fixed accuracy of the SERIAL_UBBRVAL() and SERIAL_2X_UBBRVAL() macros for higher baud rates (thanks to Renaud Cerrato)

-  *

-  *

-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog091223 Version 091223

-  *

-  *  <b>New:</b>

-  *  - Added activity LED indicators to the AVRISP project to indicate when the device is busy processing a command

-  *  - The USB target family and allowable USB mode tokens are now public and documented (USB_CAN_BE_*, USB_SERIES_*_AVR)

-  *  - Added new XPLAIN USB to Serial Bridge project (thanks to John Steggall for initial proof-of-concept, David Prentice

-  *    and Peter Danneger for revised software USART code)

-  *  - Added new RNDIS Ethernet Host LowLevel demo

-  *  - Added new RNDIS Ethernet Host Class Driver

-  *  - Added new RNDIS Ethernet Host ClassDriver demo

-  *  - Added CDC_Host_Flush() function to the CDC Host Class driver to flush sent data to the attached device

-  *  - Added PDI programming support for XMEGA devices to the AVRISP programmer project (thanks to Justin Mattair)

-  *  - Added support for the XPLAIN board Dataflash, with new XPLAIN_REV1 board target for the different dataflash used

-  *    on the first revision boards compared to the one mounted on later revisions

-  *  - Added new HID_ALIGN_DATA() macro to return the pre-retrieved value of a HID report item, left-aligned to a given datatype

-  *  - Added new PreviousValue to the HID Report Parser report item structure, for easy monitoring of previous report item values

-  *  - Added new EVK527 board target

-  *  - Added new USB_Host_GetDeviceStringDescriptor() convenience function

-  *  - Added new LEDNotification project to the library, to give a visual LED notification on new events from the host

-  *  - Added new NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP and NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER compile time options

-  *

-  *  <b>Changed:</b>

-  *  - Removed code in the Keyboard demos to send zeroed reports between two reports with differing numbers of key codes

-  *    as this relied on non-standard OS driver behaviour to repeat key groups

-  *  - The SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t and SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t type defines are now part of the Mass Storage Class

-  *    driver common defines, rather than being defined in the Host mode Class driver section only

-  *  - The USB_MODE_HOST token is now defined even when host mode is not available

-  *  - The CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport() HID Device Class driver callback now has a new ReportType parameter to

-  *    indicate the report type to generate

-  *  - All Class Drivers now return false or the "DeviceDisconnected" error code of their respective error enums when a function

-  *    is called when no host/device is connected where possible

-  *  - The HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnect enum value has been renamed to HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected to be in line

-  *    with the rest of the library error codes

-  *  - Make MIDI device demos also turn off the on board LEDs if MIDI Note On messages are sent with a velocity of zero,

-  *    which some devices use instead of Note Off messages (thanks to Robin Green)

-  *  - The CDC demos are now named "VirtualSerial" instead to indicate the demos' function rather than its implemented USB class,

-  *    to reduce confusion and to be in line with the rest of the LUFA demos

-  *  - The SImage_Host_SendBlockHeader() and SImage_Host_ReceiveBlockHeader() Still Image Host Class driver functions are now public

-  *

-  *  <b>Fixed:</b>

-  *  - Added missing CDC_Host_CreateBlockingStream() function code to the CDC Host Class driver

-  *  - Fixed incorrect values for REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_* enum values causing corrupt data in the HID Host Parser

-  *  - Fixed misnamed SI_Host_USBTask() and SI_Host_ConfigurePipes() functions

-  *  - Fixed broken USB_GetNextDescriptor() function causing the descriptor to jump ahead double the expected amount

-  *  - Fixed Pipe_IsEndpointBound() not masking the given Endpoint Address against PIPE_EPNUM_MASK

-  *  - Fixed host state machine not enabling Auto VBUS mode when HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS is set to zero

-  *  - Fixed misnamed Pipe_SetPipeToken() macro for setting a pipe's direction

-  *  - Fixed CDCHost failing on devices with bidirectional endpoints

-  *  - Fixed USB driver failing to define the PLL prescaler mask for the ATMEGA8U2 and ATMEGA16U2

-  *  - Fixed HID Parser not distributing the Usage Min and Usage Max values across an array of report items

-  *  - Fixed Mass Storage Host Class driver and Low Level demo not clearing the error condition if an attached device returns a

-  *    STALL to a GET MAX LUN request (thanks to Martin Luxen)

-  *  - Fixed TeensyHID bootloader not properly shutting down the USB interface to trigger a disconnection on the host before resetting

-  *  - Fixed MassStorageHost Class driver demo not having USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS compile time option set properly to prevent slow

-  *    devices from timing out the data pipes

-  *  - Fixed the definition of the Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() macro for the U4 series AVR parts

-  *  - Fixed MIDI host Class driver MIDI_Host_SendEventPacket() routine not properly checking for Pipe ready before writing

-  *  - Fixed use of deprecated struct initializers, removed library unused parameter warnings when compiled with -Wextra enabled

-  *  - Fixed Still Image Host Class driver truncating the PIMA response code (thanks to Daniel Seibert)

-  *  - Fixed USB_CurrentMode not being reset to USB_MODE_NONE when the USB interface is shut down and both Host and Device modes can be

-  *    used (thanks to Daniel Levy)

-  *  - Fixed TeensyHID bootloader not enumerating to the host correctly (thanks to Clint Fisher)

-  *  - Fixed AVRISP project timeouts not checking for the correct timeout period (thanks to Carl Ott)

-  *  - Fixed STK525 Dataflash driver using incorrect bit-shifting for Dataflash addresses (thanks to Tim Mitchell)

-  *

-  *

-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog091122 Version 091122

-  *

-  *  <b>New:</b>

-  *  - Added new Dual Role Keyboard/Mouse demo

-  *  - Added new HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY compile time token to reduce the size of the HID Host Class driver when

-  *    Report protocol is not needed

-  *  - Added new MIDI LowLevel and ClassDriver Host demo, add new MIDI Host Class driver

-  *  - Added new CDC/Mouse ClassDriver device demo

-  *  - Added new Joystick Host ClassDriver and LowLevel demos

-  *  - Added new Printer Host mode Class driver

-  *  - Added new Printer Host mode ClassDriver demo

-  *  - Added optional support for double banked endpoints and pipes in the Device and Host mode Class drivers

-  *  - Added new stream creation function to the CDC Class drivers, to easily make standard I/O streams from CDC Class driver instances

-  *

-  *  <b>Changed:</b>

-  *  - Removed mostly useless "TestApp" demo, as it was mainly useful only for checking for syntax errors in the library

-  *  - MIDI device demos now receive MIDI events from the host and display note ON messages via the board LEDs

-  *  - Cleanups to the Device mode Mass Storage demo application SCSI routines

-  *  - Changed Audio Class driver sample read/write functions to be inline, to reduce the number of cycles needed to transfer

-  *    samples to and from the device (allowing more time for sample processing and output)

-  *  - Audio class Device mode demos now work at both 16MHz and 8MHz, rather than just at 8MHz

-  *  - The previous USBtoSerial demo has been moved into the projects directory, as it was just a modified CDC demo

-  *  - The Endpoint/Pipe functions now use the const qualifier on the input buffer

-  *  - Changed the CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem() callback to pass a HID_ReportItem_t rather than just the current

-  *    item's attributes, to expose more information on the item (including it's type, collection path, etc.)

-  *  - Changed MouseHostWithParser demos to check that the report items have a Mouse usage collection as a parent at some point,

-  *    to prevent Joysticks from enumerating with the demo

-  *  - Corrected the name of the misnamed USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() function to USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor().

-  *  - Keyboard LowLevel/ClassDriver demos now support multiple simultaneous key presses (up to 6) per report

-  *

-  *  <b>Fixed:</b>

-  *  - Fixed PrinterHost demo returning invalid Device ID data when the attached device does not have a

-  *    device ID (thanks to Andrei Krainev)

-  *  - Changed LUFA_VERSION_INTEGER define to use BCD values, to make comparisons easier

-  *  - Fixed issue in the HID Host class driver's HID_Host_SendReportByID() routine using the incorrect mode (control/pipe)

-  *    to send report to the attached device

-  *  - Fixed ClassDriver AudioOutput device demo not selecting an audio output mode

-  *  - Fixed incorrect SampleFrequencyType value in the AudioInput and AudioOutput ClassDriver demos' descriptors

-  *  - Fixed incorrect event name rule in demo/project/bootloader makefiles

-  *  - Fixed HID device class driver not reselecting the correct endpoint once the user callback routines have been called

-  *  - Corrected HID descriptor in the Joystick Device demos - buttons should be placed outside the pointer collection

-  *  - Fixed HID report parser collection paths invalid due to misplaced semicolon in the free path item search loop

-  *  - Fixed HID host Class driver report send/receive report broken when issued through the control pipe

-  *  - Fixed HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR compile time option being ignored when in host mode (thanks to David Lyons)

-  *  - Fixed LowLevel Keyboard demo not saving the issues report only after it has been sent to the host

-  *  - Fixed Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_* functions not sending a terminating IN when given data Length is zero

-  *

-  *

-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog090924 Version 090924

-  *

-  *  <b>New:</b>

-  *  - Added new host mode class drivers and matching demos to the library for rapid application development

-  *  - Added flag to the HID report parser to indicate if a device has multiple reports

-  *  - Added new EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event, controlled by the new USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents() and

-  *    USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents() macros to give bus-synchronized millisecond interrupts when in USB device mode

-  *  - Added new Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection() macro for bidirectional endpoints

-  *  - Added new AVRISP project, a LUFA powered clone of the Atmel AVRISP-MKII programmer

-  *  - Added ShutDown() functions for all hardware peripheral drivers, so that peripherals can be turned off after use

-  *  - Added new CDC_Device_Flush() command to the device mode CDC Class driver to flush Device->Host data

-  *  - Added extra masks to the SPI driver, changed SPI_Init() so that the clock polarity and sample modes can be set

-  *  - Added new callback to the HID report parser, so that the user application can filter only the items it is interested

-  *    in to be stored into the HIDReportInfo structure to save RAM

-  *  - Added support for the officially recommended external peripheral layout for the BUMBLEB board (thanks to Dave Fletcher)

-  *  - Added new Pipe_IsFrozen() macro to determine if the currently selected pipe is frozen

-  *  - Added new USB_GetHIDReportSize() function to the HID report parser to retrieve the size of a given report by its ID

-  *  - Added new combined Mass Storage and Keyboard demo (thanks to Matthias Hullin)

-  *

-  *  <b>Changed:</b>

-  *  - SetIdle requests to the HID device driver with a 0 idle period (send changes only) now only affect the requested

-  *    HID interface within the device, not all HID interfaces

-  *  - Added explicit attribute masks to the device mode demos' descriptors

-  *  - Added return values to the CDC and MIDI class driver transmit functions

-  *  - Optimized Endpoint_Read_Word_* and Pipe_Read_Word_* macros to reduce compiled size

-  *  - Added non-null function parameter pointer restrictions to USB Class drivers to improve user code reliability

-  *  - Added new "Common" section to the class drivers, to hold all mode-independent definitions for clarity

-  *  - Moved SCSI command/sense constants into the Mass Storage Class driver, instead of the user-code

-  *  - Altered the SCSI commands in the LowLevel Mass Storage Host to save on FLASH space by reducing function calls

-  *  - Changed the parameters and behaviour of the USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() function so that it now performs size checks

-  *    and data validations internally, to simplify user code

-  *  - Changed HIDParser to only zero out important values in the Parsed HID Report Item Information structure to save cycles

-  *  - The HID report parser now always processed FEATURE items - HID_ENABLE_FEATURE_PROCESSING token now has no effect

-  *  - The HID report parser now always ignores constant-data items, HID_INCLUDE_CONSTANT_DATA_ITEMS token now has no effect

-  *  - The Benito Programmer project now has its own unique VID/PID pair allocated from the Atmel donated LUFA VID/PID pool

-  *  - Add in new invalid event hook check targets to project makefiles to produce compilation errors when invalid event names

-  *    are used in a project

-  *  - The HID Report Parser now gives information on the total length of each report within a HID interface

-  *  - The USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES compile time token has been removed - there are now separate USB_Descriptor_* and

-  *    USB_StdDescriptor_* structures for both the LUFA and standardized element naming conventions so both may be used

-  *

-  *  <b>Fixed:</b>

-  *  - Fixed possible lockup in the CDC device class driver, when the host sends data that is a multiple of the

-  *    endpoint's bank

-  *  - Fixed swapped parameters in the HID state memory copy call while processing a HID PUSH item in the HID report parser

-  *  - Fixed memory corruption HID report parser when too many COLLECTION or PUSH items were processed

-  *  - Fixed HID report parser not resetting the FEATURE item count when a REPORT ID item is encountered

-  *  - Fixed USBtoSerial demos not reading in UDR1 when the USART receives data but the USB interface is not enumerated,

-  *    causing continuous USART receive interrupts

-  *  - Fixed misspelled event name in the Class driver USBtoSerial demo, preventing correct operation

-  *  - Fixed invalid data being returned when a GetStatus request is issued in Device mode with an unhandled data recipient

-  *  - Added hardware USART receive interrupt and software buffering to the Benito project to ensure received data is not

-  *    missed or corrupted

-  *  - Fixed Device mode HID Class driver always sending IN packets, even when nothing to report

-  *  - Fixed Device mode HID Class driver not explicitly initializing the ReportSize parameter to zero before calling callback

-  *    routine, so that ignored callbacks don't cause incorrect data to be sent

-  *  - Fixed StillImageHost not correctly freezing and unfreezing data pipes while waiting for a response block header

-  *  - Fixed error in the PrinterHost demo preventing the full page data from being sent to the attached device (thanks to John Andrews)

-  *  - Fixed CDC based demos and projects' INF driver files under 64 bit versions of Windows (thanks to Ronny Hanson, Thomas Bleeker)

-  *  - Re-add in missing flip, flip-ee, dfu and dfu-ee targets to project makefiles (thanks to Opendous Inc.)

-  *  - Fix allowable F_CPU values comment in project makefiles to more accurately reflect the allowable values on the USB AVRs

-  *  - Fixed DFU and CDC class bootloaders on the series 2 USB AVRs, corrected invalid signatures, added support for the new

-  *    ATMEGAxx2 series 2 variant AVRs to the DFU bootloader

-  *  - Fixed Low Level USBtoSerial demo not storing received characters (thanks to Michael Cooper)

-  *  - Fixed MIDI Device Class driver not sending/receiving MIDI packets of the correct size (thanks to Thomas Bleeker)

-  *

-  *

-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog090810 Version 090810

-  *

-  *  <b>New:</b>

-  *  - Added new device class drivers and matching demos to the library for rapid application development

-  *  - Added new PrinterHost demo (thanks to John Andrews)

-  *  - Added USB Missile Launcher project, submitted by Dave Fletcher

-  *  - Added new Benito Arduino Programmer project

-  *  - Added incomplete device and host mode demos for later enhancement

-  *  - Updated MassStorage device block write routines to use ping-pong Dataflash buffering to increase throughput by around 30%

-  *  - Error status LEDs shown when device endpoint configuration fails to complete in all demos and projects

-  *  - Added new USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration() convenience function for easy configuration selection of devices while in USB

-  *    host mode

-  *  - Added new USB_Host_ClearPipeStall() convenience function to clear a stall condition on an attached device's endpoint

-  *  - Added new USB_Host_GetDeviceDescriptor() convenience function to retrieve the attached device's Device descriptor

-  *  - Added new Endpoint_ClearStatusStage() convenience function to assist with the status stages of control transfers

-  *  - Added new USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL define for using the unique serial numbers in some AVR models as the USB device's serial number,

-  *    added NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL compile time option to turn off new serial number reading code

-  *  - Added new DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK() macro to the Dataflash driver, which returns the Dataflash select mask for the given chip index

-  *  - Added new HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval host state machine state for non-blocking disabling of device communications until the

-  *    device has been removed (for use when an error occurs or communications with the device have completed)

-  *  - Added new FAST_STREAM_TRANSFERS compile time option for faster stream transfers via multiple bytes copied per stream loop

-  *  - Added stdio stream demo code to the CDC device demos, to show how to create standard streams out of the virtual serial ports

-  *  - Added new EEPROM and FLASH buffer versions of the Endpoint and Pipe stream functions

-  *  - Added new USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS and FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS compile time options

-  *  - Added support for the new ATMEGA32U2, ATMEGA16U2 and ATMEGA8U2 AVR models

-  *  - Added new USB_DeviceState variable to keep track of the current Device mode USB state

-  *  - Added new LEDs_ToggleLEDs() function to the LEDs driver

-  *  - Added new Pipe_BoundEndpointNumber() and Pipe_IsEndpointBound() functions

-  *  - Added new DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR and HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR compile time options

-  *  - Added 404 Not Found errors to the webserver in the RNDIS demos to indicate invalid URLs

-  *

-  *  <b>Changed:</b>

-  *  - Deprecated pseudo-scheduler and removed dynamic memory allocator from the library (first no longer needed and second unused)

-  *  - The device-mode CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor() function now has an extra parameter so that the memory space in which the requested

-  *    descriptor is located can be specified. This means that descriptors can now be located in multiple memory spaces within a device.

-  *  - Removed vague USB_IsConnected global - test USB_DeviceState or USB_HostState explicitly to gain previous functionality

-  *  - Removed USB_IsSuspended global - test USB_DeviceState against DEVICE_STATE_Suspended instead

-  *  - Extended USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() routine to require the configuration number within the device to fetch

-  *  - Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy() now always ensures that the dataflash is ready for the next command immediately after returning,

-  *    no need to call Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS() afterwards

-  *  - Low level API MIDI device demo no longer blocks if a note change event is sent while the endpoint is not ready

-  *  - Pipe_GetErrorFlags() now returns additional error flags for overflow and underflow errors

-  *  - Pipe stream functions now automatically set the correct pipe token, so that bidirectional pipes can be used

-  *  - Pipe_ConfigurePipe() now automatically defaults IN pipes to accepting infinite IN requests, this can still be changed by calling

-  *    the existing Pipe_SetFiniteINRequests() function

-  *  - Changed F_USB entries in project makefiles to alias to F_CPU by default, as this is the most common case

-  *  - Host mode demos now use sane terminal escape codes, so that text is always readable and events/program output is visually distinguished

-  *    from one another using foreground colours

-  *  - Internal per-device preprocessing conditions changed to per-device series rather than per-controller group for finer-grain

-  *    internal control

-  *  - Interrupts are no longer disabled during the processing of Control Requests on the default endpoint while in device mode

-  *  - AudioOutput demos now always output to board LEDs, regardless of output mode (removed AUDIO_OUT_LEDS project option)

-  *  - Removed SINGLE_DEVICE_CONFIGURATION compile time option in favor of the new FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS option so that the exact number

-  *    of device configurations can be defined statically

-  *  - Removed VBUS events, as they are already exposed to the user application via the regular device connection and disconnection events

-  *  - Renamed and altered existing events to properly separate out Host and Device mode events

-  *  - All demos switched over from GNU99 standards mode to C99 standards mode, to reduce the dependencies on GCC-only language extensions

-  *

-  *  <b>Fixed:</b>

-  *  - Changed bootloaders to use FLASHEND rather than the existence of RAMPZ to determine if far FLASH pointers are needed to fix

-  *    bootloaders on some of the USB AVR devices where avr-libc erroneously defines RAMPZ

-  *  - Fixes to MassStorageHost for better device compatibility (increase command timeout, change MassStore_WaitForDataReceived()

-  *    to only unfreeze and check one data pipe at a time) to prevent incorrect device enumerations and freezes while transferring data

-  *  - Make Pipe_ConfigurePipe() mask the given endpoint number against PIPE_EPNUM_MASK to ensure the endpoint IN direction bit is

-  *    cleared to prevent endpoint type corruption

-  *  - Fixed issue opening CDC-ACM ports on hosts when the CDC device tries to send data before the host has set the line encoding

-  *  - Fixed USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL option being ignored during device disconnects on some models (thanks to Brian Dickman)

-  *  - Fixed documentation mentioning Pipe_GetCurrentToken() function when correct function name is Pipe_GetPipeToken()

-  *  - Fixed ADC driver for the ATMEGA32U4 and ATMEGA16U4 (thanks to Opendous Inc.)

-  *  - Fixed CDCHost demo unfreezing the pipes at the point of configuration, rather than use

-  *  - Fixed MassStorage demo not clearing the reset flag when a Mass Storage Reset is issued while not processing a command

-  *  - Fixed USB_Host_SendControlRequest() not re-suspending the USB bus when initial device ready-wait fails

-  *  - Fixed USB Pad regulator not being disabled on some AVR models when the USB_OPT_REG_DISABLED option is used

-  *  - Fixed Host mode to Device mode UID change not causing a USB Disconnect event when a device was connected

-  *  - Fixed Mouse/Keyboard demos not performing the correct arithmetic on the Idle period at the right times (thanks to Brian Dickman)

-  *  - Fixed GenericHID failing HID class tests due to incorrect Logical Minimum and Logical Maximum values (thanks to Soren Greiner)

-  *  - Fixed incorrect PIPE_EPNUM_MASK mask causing pipe failures on devices with endpoint addresses of 8 and above (thanks to John Andrews)

-  *  - Fixed report data alignment issues in the MouseHostWithParser demo when X and Y movement data size is not a multiple of 8 bits

-  *  - Fixed HID Report Descriptor Parser not correctly resetting internal states when a REPORT ID element is encountered

-  *  - Fixed incorrect BUTTONS_BUTTON1 for the STK526 target

-  *  - Fixed RNDIS demos freezing when more than one connection was attempted simultaneously, causing memory corruption

-  *  - Fixed USBtoSerial demo receiving noise from the USART due to pull-up not being enabled

-  *

-  *

-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog090605 Version 090605

-  *

-  *  - Fixed bug in RNDISEthernet and DualCDC demos not using the correct USB_ControlRequest structure for control request data

-  *  - Fixed documentation showing incorrect USB mode support on the supported AVRs list

-  *  - Fixed RNDISEthernet not working under Linux due to Linux requiring an "optional" RNDIS request which was unhandled

-  *  - Fixed Mouse and Keyboard device demos not acting in accordance with the HID specification for idle periods (thanks to Brian Dickman)

-  *  - Removed support for endpoint/pipe non-control interrupts; these did not act in the way users expected, and had many subtle issues

-  *  - Fixed Device Mode not handling Set Feature and Clear Feature Chapter 9 requests that are addressed to the device (thanks to Brian Dickman)

-  *  - Moved control endpoint interrupt handling into the library itself, enable via the new INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT token

-  *  - Fixed CDCHost not clearing configured pipes and resetting configured pipes mask when a partially enumerated invalid CDC

-  *    interface is skipped

-  *  - Clarified the size of library tokens which accept integer values in the Compile Time Tokens page, values now use the smallest datatype

-  *    inside the library that is able to hold their defined value to save space

-  *  - Removed DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS() macro as it was largely superfluous and only served to obfuscate code

-  *  - Rewritten event system to remove all macros, to make user code clearer

-  *  - Fixed incorrect ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK mask preventing endpoints above EP3 from being selected (thanks to Jonathan Oakley)

-  *  - Removed STREAM_CALLBACK() macro - callbacks now use regular function definitions to clarify user code

-  *  - Removed DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR() macro - comparators should now use regular function definitions to clarify user code

-  *  - USB_IsConnected is now cleared before the USB_Disconnect() event is fired in response to VBUS being removed

-  *  - Fixed incorrect PID value being used in the USBtoSerial project (thanks to Phill)

-  *  - Deleted StdDescriptors.c, renamed USB_GetDescriptor() to CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor, moved ConfigDescriptor.c/.h from the

-  *    LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ directory to LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ in preparation for the new USB class APIs

-  *  - Moved out each demos' functionality library files (e.g. Ring Buffer library) to /Lib directories for a better directory structure

-  *  - Removed Tx interrupt from the USBtoSerial demo; now sends characters via polling to ensure more time for the Rx interrupt

-  *  - Fixed possible enumeration errors from spin-loops which may fail to exit if the USB connection is severed before the exit condition

-  *    becomes true

-  *

-  *

-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog090510 Version 090510

-  *

-  *  - Added new GenericHIDHost demo

-  *  - Corrections to the KeyboardHost and MouseHost demos' pipe handling to freeze and unfreeze the data pipes at the point of use

-  *  - KeyboardHost, MouseHost and GenericHIDHost demos now save and restore the currently selected pipe inside the pipe ISR

-  *  - Changed GenericHID device demo to use the LUFA scheduler, added INTERRUPT_DATA_ENDPOINT and INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT compile

-  *    time options

-  *  - All comments in the library, bootloaders, demos and projects have now been spell-checked and spelling mistakes/typos corrected

-  *  - Added new PIMA_DATA_SIZE() define to the Still Image Host demo

-  *  - Add call to MassStore_WaitForDataReceived() in MassStore_GetReturnedStatus() to ensure that the CSW has been received in the

-  *    extended MSC timeout period before continuing, to prevent long processing delays from causing the MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()

-  *    to early-abort (thanks to Dmitry Maksimov)

-  *  - Move StdRequestType.h, StreamCallbacks.h, USBMode.h from the LowLevel USB driver directory to the HighLevel USB driver directory,

-  *    where they are more suited

-  *  - Removed all binary constants and replaced with decimal or hexadecimal constants so that unpatched GCC compilers can still build the

-  *    code without having to be itself patched and recompiled first

-  *  - Added preprocessor checks and documentation to the bootloaders giving information about missing SIGNATURE_x defines due to

-  *    outdated avr-libc versions.

-  *  - Added support to the CDCHost demo for devices with multiple CDC interfaces which are not the correct ACM type preceding the desired

-  *    ACM CDC interface

-  *  - Fixed GenericHID demo not starting USB and HID management tasks when not using interrupt driven modes (thanks to Carl Kjeldsen)

-  *  - Fixed RNDISEthenet demo checking the incorrect message field for packet size constraints (thanks to Jonathan Oakley)

-  *  - Fixed WriteNextReport code in the GenericHIDHost demo using incorrect parameter types and not selecting the correct endpoint

-  *  - Adjusted sample CTC timer calculations in the AudioOutput and AudioInput demos to match the CTC calculations in the AVR datasheet,

-  *    and to fix instances where rounding caused the endpoint to underflow (thanks to Robin Theunis)

-  *  - The USB_Host_SendControlRequest() function no longer automatically selects the Control pipe (pipe 0), so that other control type

-  *    pipes can be used with the function

-  *  - The USB Host management task now saves and restores the currently selected pipe before and after the task completes

-  *  - Fixed GenericHIDHost demo report write routine incorrect for control type requests (thanks to Andrei Krainev)

-  *  - Removed Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank() and Pipe_ClearCurrentBank() in favor of new Endpoint_ClearIN(), Endpoint_ClearOUT(),

-  *    Pipe_ClearIN() and Pipe_ClearOUT() macros (done to allow for the detection of packets of zero length)

-  *  - Renamed *_ReadWriteAllowed() macros to *_IsReadWriteAllowed() to remain consistent with the rest of the LUFA API

-  *  - Endpoint_IsSetupReceived() macro has been renamed to Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived(), Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived() macro has been

-  *    renamed to Endpoint_ClearSETUP(), the Pipe_IsSetupSent() macro has been renamed to Pipe_IsSETUPSent() and the

-  *    Pipe_ClearSetupSent() macro is no longer applicable and should be removed - changes made to compliment the new endpoint and pipe

-  *    bank management API

-  *  - Updated all demos, bootloaders and projects to use the new endpoint and pipe management APIs (thanks to Roman Thiel from Curetis AG)

-  *  - Updated library doxygen documentation, added groups, changed documentation macro functions to real functions for clarity

-  *  - Removed old endpoint and pipe aliased read/write/discard routines which did not have an explicit endian specifier for clarity

-  *  - Removed the ButtLoadTag.h header file, as no one used for its intended purpose anyway

-  *  - Renamed the main Drivers/AT90USBXXX directory to Drivers/Peripheral, renamed the Serial_Stream driver to SerialStream

-  *  - Fixed CDC and USBtoSerial demos freezing where buffers were full while still transmitting or receiving (thanks to Peter Hand)

-  *  - Removed "Host_" section of the function names in ConfigDescriptor.h, as most of the routines can now be used in device mode on the

-  *    device descriptor

-  *  - Renamed functions in the HID parser to have a "USB_" prefix and the acronym "HID" in the name

-  *  - Fixed incorrect HID interface class and subclass values in the Mouse and KeyboardMouse demos (thanks to Brian Dickman)

-  *  - Capitalized the "Descriptor_Search" and "Descriptor_Search_Comp" prefixes of the values in the DSearch_Return_ErrorCodes_t and

-  *    DSearch_Comp_Return_ErrorCodes_t enums

-  *  - Removed "ERROR" from the enum names in the endpoint and pipe stream error code enums

-  *  - Renamed the USB_PowerOnErrorCodes_t enum to USB_InitErrorCodes_t, renamed the POWERON_ERROR_NoUSBModeSpecified enum value to

-  *    USB_INITERROR_NoUSBModeSpecified

-  *  - Renamed USB_PowerOnFail event to USB_InitFailure

-  *  - Renamed OTG.h header functions to be more consistent with the rest of the library API

-  *  - Changed over all deprecated GCC structure tag initializers to the standardized C99 format (thanks to Mike Alexander)

-  *  - USB_HostRequest renamed to USB_ControlRequest, entire control request header is now read into USB_ControlRequest in Device mode

-  *    rather than having the library pass only partially read header data to the application

-  *  - The USB_UnhandledControlPacket event has had its parameters removed, in favor of accessing the new USB_ControlRequest structure

-  *  - The Endpoint control stream functions now correctly send a ZLP to the host when less data than requested is sent

-  *  - Fixed USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled flag never being set (the REMOTE WAKEUP Set Feature request was not being handled)

-  *  - Renamed the FEATURELESS_CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE compile-time token to CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE

-  *  - Endpoint configuration is now refined to give better output when all configurations have static inputs - removed the now useless

-  *    STATIC_ENDPOINT_CONFIGURATION compile time token

-  *  - Fixed SPI driver init function not clearing SPI2X bit when not needed

-  *  - Fixed PREVENT ALLOW MEDIUM REMOVAL command issuing in the MassStorageHost demo using incorrect parameters (thanks to Mike Alex)

-  *  - Fixed MassStorageHost demo broken due to an incorrect if statement test in MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()

-  *  - Fixed reversed signature byte ordering in the CDC bootloader (thanks to Johannes Raschke)

-  *  - Changed PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE from 8 to 64 to try to prevent problems with faulty devices which do not respect the given

-  *    wLength value when reading in the device descriptor

-  *  - Fixed missing semicolon in the ATAVRUSBRF01 LED board driver code (thanks to Morten Lund)

-  *  - Changed LED board driver code to define dummy LED masks for the first four board LEDs, so that user code can be compiled for boards

-  *    with less than four LEDs without code modifications (thanks to Morten Lund)

-  *  - Changed HWB board driver to Buttons driver, to allow for the support of future boards with more than one mounted GPIO button

-  *  - Serial driver now correctly calculates the baud register value when in double speed mode

-  *  - Init function of the Serial driver is now static inline to product smaller code for the common-case of static init values

-  *

-  *

-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog090401 Version 090401

-  *

-  *  - Fixed MagStripe project configuration descriptor containing an unused (blank) endpoint descriptor

-  *  - Incorporated makefile changes by Denver Gingerich to retain compatibility with stock (non-WinAVR) AVR-GCC installations

-  *  - Fixed makefile EEPROM programming targets programming FLASH data in addition to EEPROM data

-  *  - LUFA devices now enumerate correctly with LUFA hosts

-  *  - Fixed Configuration Descriptor search routine freezing when a comparator returned a failure

-  *  - Removed HID report item serial dump in the MouseHostWithParser and KeyboardHostWithParser - useful only for debugging, and

-  *    slowed down the enumeration of HID devices too much

-  *  - Increased the number of bits per track which can be read in the MagStripe project to 8192 when compiled for the AT90USBXXX6/7

-  *  - Fixed KeyboardMouse demo discarding the wIndex value in the REQ_GetReport request

-  *  - USBtoSerial demo now discards all Rx data when not connected to a USB host, rather than buffering characters for transmission

-  *    next time the device is attached to a host.

-  *  - Added new F_USB compile time constant to the library and makefiles, to give the raw input clock (used to feed the PLL before any

-  *    clock prescaling is performed) frequency, so that the PLL prescale mask can be determined

-  *  - Changed stream wait timeout counter to be 16-bit, so that very long timeout periods can be set for correct communications with

-  *    badly designed hosts or devices which greatly exceed the USB specification limits

-  *  - Mass Storage Host demo now uses a USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS of two seconds to maintain compatibility with poorly designed devices

-  *  - Function attribute ATTR_ALWAYSINLINE renamed to ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE to match other function attribute macro naming conventions

-  *  - Added ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE attribute to several key inlined library components, to ensure they are inlined in all circumstances

-  *  - Removed SetSystemClockPrescaler() macro, the clock_prescale_set() avr-libc macro has been corrected in recent avr-libc versions

-  *  - Fixed incorrect/missing control status stage transfers on demos, bootloaders and applications (thanks to Nate Lawson)

-  *  - The NO_CLEARSET_FEATURE_REQUEST compile time token has been renamed to FEATURELESS_CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE, and its function expanded

-  *    to also remove parts of the Get Status chapter 9 request to further reduce code usage

-  *  - Makefile updated to include output giving the currently selected BOARD parameter value

-  *  - Board Dataflash driver now allows for dataflash ICs which use different shifts for setting the current page/byte address (thanks

-  *    to Kenneth Clubb)

-  *  - Added DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM() and DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM() functions to the MassStorage demo, to allow for easy

-  *    interfacing with a FAT library for dataflash file level access

-  *  - Corrected CDC class bootloader to fix a few bugs, changed address counter to store x2 addresses for convenience

-  *  - Fixed typos in the SPI driver SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_64 and SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_128 masks (thanks to Markus Zocholl)

-  *  - Keyboard and Mouse device demos (normal, data interrupt and fully interrupt driven) combined into unified keyboard and mouse demos

-  *  - Keyboard and Mouse host demos (normal and data interrupt driven) combined into unified keyboard and mouse demos

-  *  - Removed AVRISP_Programmer project due to code quality concerns

-  *  - Fixed CDC demo not sending an empty packet after each transfer to prevent the host from buffering incoming data

-  *  - Fixed documentation typos and preprocessor checks relating to misspellings of the USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS token (thanks to Ian Gregg)

-  *  - Fixed USBTask.h not conditionally including HostChapter9.h only when USB_CAN_BE_HOST is defined (thanks to Ian Gregg)

-  *  - Fixed incorrect ADC driver init register manipulation (thanks to Tobias)

-  *  - Added new GenericHID device demo application

-  *  - Fixed Still Image Host SImage_SendData() function not clearing the pipe bank after sending data

-  *

-  *

-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog090209 Version 090209

-  *

-  *  - PWM timer mode in AudioOut demo changed to Fast PWM for speed

-  *  - Updated Magstripe project to work with the latest hardware revision

-  *  - Fixed library not responding to the BCERRI flag correctly in host mode, leading to device lockups

-  *  - Fixed library handling Get Descriptor requests when not addressed as standard requests to the device or interface (thanks to

-  *    Nate Lawson)

-  *  - Fixed serious data corruption issue in MassStorage demo dataflash write routine

-  *  - Added new NO_CLEARSET_FEATURE_REQUEST compile time token

-  *  - USB task now restores previous global interrupt state after execution, rather than forcing global interrupts to be enabled

-  *  - Fixed USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event firing after each configuration change, rather than once after the initial configuration

-  *  - Added ENDPOINT_DOUBLEBANK_SUPPORTED() macros to Endpoint.h, altered ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE() to allow user to specify endpoint

-  *  - ENDPOINT_MAX_ENDPOINTS changed to ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS, PIPE_MAX_PIPES changed to PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES

-  *  - Endpoint and Pipe non-control stream functions now ensure endpoint or pipe is ready before reading or writing

-  *  - Changed Teensy bootloader to use a watchdog reset when exiting rather than a software jump

-  *  - Fixed integer promotion error in MassStorage and MassStorageHost demos, corrupting read/write transfers

-  *  - SPI_SendByte is now SPI_TransferByte, added new SPI_SendByte and SPI_ReceiveByte functions for fast one-way transfer

-  *  - MassStorage demo changed to use new fast one-way SPI transfers to increase throughput

-  *  - MassStorage handling of Mass Storage Reset class request improved

-  *  - Altered MassStorage demo dataflash block read code for speed

-  *  - Added USB_IsSuspended global flag

-  *  - Simplified internal Dual Mode (OTG) USB library code to reduce code size

-  *  - Extended stream timeout period to 100ms from 50ms

-  *  - Mass Storage Host demo commands now all return an error code from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum

-  *  - Added SubErrorCode parameter to the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event

-  *  - VBUS drop interrupt now disabled during the manual-to-auto VBUS delivery handoff

-  *  - Simplified low level backend so that device/host mode initialization uses the same code paths

-  *  - Added workaround for faulty Mass Storage devices which do not implement the required GET_MAX_LUN request

-  *  - Removed buggy Telnet application from the RNDIS demo

-  *  - Moved Mass Storage class requests in the Mass Storage Host demo to wrapper functions in MassStoreCommands.c

-  *  - Fixed incorrect SCSI command size value in the Request Sense command in MassStoreCommands.c

-  *  - Added SetProtocol request to HID class non-parser Mouse and Keyboard demos to force devices to use the correct Boot Protocol

-  *  - Added new "dfu" and "flip" programming targets to project makefiles

-  *  - HID_PARSE_Sucessful enum member typo corrected to HID_PARSE_Successful

-  *  - Changed COLLECTION item structures in the HID descriptor parser to include the collection's Usage Page value

-  *  - Serial driver now sets Tx line as output, enables pull-up on Rx line

-  *  - Fixed smaller USB AVRs raising multiple connection and disconnection events when NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT is disabled

-  *  - Added HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS to give the host delay after a device is connected before it is enumerated

-  *  - Fixed KeyboardHostWithParser demo linking against the wrong global variables

-  *  - Completed doxygen documentation of remaining library bootloaders, demos and projects

-  *  - Fixed incorrect bootloader start address in the TeensyHID bootloader

-  *  - Added HWB button whole-disk ASCII dump functionality to MassStoreHost demo

-  *  - Replaced printf_P(PSTR("%c"), {Variable}) calls with putchar(<Variable>) for speed and size savings

-  *  - Serial driver now accepts baud rates over 16-bits in size, added double speed flag option

-  *  - Fixed incorrect callback abort return value in Pipe.c

-  *  - Added new flip-ee and dfu-ee makefile targets (courtesy of Opendous Inc.)

-  *  - Removed reboot-on-disconnect code from the TeensyHID bootloader, caused problems on some systems

-  *  - Fixed AudioOutput and AudioInput demos looping on the endpoint data, rather than processing a sample at a time and returning

-  *    each time the task runs to allow for other tasks to execute

-  *  - Added support for the Atmel ATAVRUSBRF01 board

-  *  - Added AVRISP Programmer Project, courtesy of Opendous Inc.

-  *  - Fixed CDC Host demo not searching through both CDC interfaces for endpoints

-  *  - Fixed incorrect Product String descriptor length in the DFU class bootloader

-  *

-  *

-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog081224 Version 081224

-  *

-  *  - MyUSB name changed to LUFA, the Lightweight USB Framework for AVRs

-  *  - Fixed Mass Storage Host demo's MassStore_SendCommand() delay in the incorrect place

-  *  - Fixed USBtoSerial demo not calling ReconfigureUSART() after a change in the line encoding

-  *  - Fixed infinite loop in host mode Host-to-Device control transfers with data stages

-  *  - HID report parser now supports devices with multiple reports in one interface via Report IDs

-  *  - Fixed RZUSBSTICK board LED driver header incorrect macro definition order causing compile errors

-  *  - Calling USB_Init() when the USB interface is already configured now forces a complete interface reset

-  *    and re-enumeration - fixes MyUSB DFU bootloader not switching to app code correctly when soft reset used

-  *  - Fixed "No newline at end of file" warning when stream callbacks are enabled

-  *  - DFU bootloader now uses fixed signature bytes per device, rather than reading them out dynamically for size

-  *  - Added new FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE and USE_SINGLE_DEVICE_CONFIGURATION switches to statically define certain values to

-  *    reduce compiled binary size

-  *  - Added new NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT switch to prevent the library from trying to determine bus connection

-  *    state from the suspension and wake up events on the smaller USB AVRs

-  *  - Added summary of all library compile time tokens to the documentation

-  *  - Added overview of the LUFA scheduler to the documentation

-  *  - Removed MANUAL_PLL_CONTROL compile time token, replaced with a mask for the USB_Init() Options parameter

-  *  - CDC bootloader now uses the correct non-far or far versions of the pgm_* functions depending on if RAMPZ is defined

-  *  - Doxygen documentation now contains documentation on all the projects, bootloaders and most demos included with the library

-  *  - CDC bootloader now runs user application when USB disconnected rather than waiting for a hard reset

-  *  - MouseHostWithParser and KeyboardHostWithParser now support multiple-report devices

-  *  - RNDIS demo can now close connections correctly using the new TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION() macro - used in Webserver

-  *  - Fixed the DFU bootloader, no longer freezes up when certain files are programmed into an AVR, made reading/writing faster

-  *  - Fixed mouse/joystick up/down movements reversed - HID mouse X/Y coordinates use a left-handed coordinate system, not a normal

-  *    right-handed system

-  *  - Added stub code to the CDC and USBtoSerial demos showing how to read and set the RS-232 handshake lines - not currently used in

-  *    the demos, but the example code and supporting defines are now in place

-  *  - Interrupts are now disabled when processing a control request in device mode, to avoid exceeding the strict control request

-  *    timing requirements.

-  *  - All demos now use a central StatusUpdate() function rather than direct calls to the board LED functions, so that the demos can

-  *    easily be altered to show different LED combinations (or do something else entirely) as the demo's status changes

-  *  - Removed LED commands from the CDC bootloader, unused by most AVR910 programming software

-  *  - Fixed RNDIS demo ICMP ping requests echoing back incorrect data

-  *  - Added DHCP server code to RNDIS demo, allowing for hands-free auto configuration on any PC

-  *  - Fixed DFU bootloader PID value for the ATMEGA16U4 AVR

-  *  - Endpoint and Pipe configuration functions now return an error code indicating success or failure

-  *  - USB Reset in device mode now resets and disables all device endpoints

-  *  - Added intermediate states to the host mode state machine, reducing the USB task blocking time to no more than 1ms explicitly per

-  *    invocation when in host mode

-  *  - Added support for the ATMEGA32U6 microcontroller

-  *  - Added STATIC_ENDPOINT_CONFIGURATION compile time option, enabled in the bootloaders to minimize space usage

-  *  - Removed redundant code from the USB device GetStatus() chapter 9 processing routine

-  *  - Added new TeensyHID bootloader, compatible with the Teensy HID protocol (http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/)

-  *  - Versions are now numbered by release dates, rather than arbitrary major/minor revision numbers

-  *  - USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled is now correctly set and cleared by SetFeature and ClearFeature requests from the host

-  *  - Changed prototype of GetDescriptor, so that it now returns the descriptor size (or zero if the descriptor doesn't exist)

-  *    rather than passing the size back to the caller through a parameter and returning a boolean

-  *

-  *

-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog153 Version 1.5.3 (081002)

-  *

-  *  - Fixed CDC bootloader using pgmspace macros for some descriptors inappropriately

-  *  - Updated all Mouse and Keyboard device demos to include boot protocol support (now works in BIOS)

-  *  - Renamed bootloader directories to remove spaces, which were causing build problems on several OSes

-  *  - Removed serial number strings from all but the MassStore demo where it is required - users were not

-  *    modifying the code to either omit the descriptor or use a unique serial per device causing problems

-  *    when multiple units of the same device were plugged in at the same time

-  *  - AudioOutput and AudioInput demos now correctly silence endpoints when not enabled by the host

-  *  - Added KeyboardMouse demo (Keyboard and Mouse functionality combined into a single demo)

-  *  - Added DriverStubs directory to house board level driver templates, to make MyUSB compatible custom board

-  *    driver creation easier

-  *  - Extended MassStorage demo to support multiple LUNs, 2 by default

-  *  - Fixed incorrect device address mask, preventing the device from enumerating with addresses larger than 63

-  *  - Fixed incorrect data direction mask in the GetStatus standard request, preventing it from being handled

-  *  - Fixed incorrect GetStatus standard request for endpoints, now returns the endpoint STALL status correctly

-  *  - Added in new USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled and USB_CurrentlySelfPowered flags rather than using fixed values

-  *  - Added DualCDC demo to demonstrate the use of Interface Association Descriptors

-  *  - Added pipe NAK detection and clearing API

-  *  - Added pipe status change (NAK, STALL, etc.) interrupt API

-  *  - Fixed MassStorageHost demo so that it no longer freezes randomly when issuing several commands in a row

-  *  - Host demos configuration descriptor routines now return a unique error code when the returned data does

-  *    not have a valid configuration descriptor header

-  *  - Added Endpoint_WaitUntilReady() and Pipe_WaitUntilReady() functions

-  *  - Stream functions now have software timeouts, timeout period can be set by the USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS token

-  *  - All demos now pass the USB.org automated Chapter 9 device compliance tests

-  *  - All HID demos now pass the USB.org automated HID compliance tests

-  *  - Polling interval of the interrupt endpoint in the CDC based demos changed to 0xFF to fix problems on Linux systems

-  *  - Changed stream functions to accept a new callback function, with NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS used to disable all callbacks

-  *  - Mass Storage demo dataflash management routines changed to use the endpoint stream functions

-  *  - Added AVRStudio project files for each demo in addition to the existing Programmer's Notepad master project file

-  *  - Re-added call to ReconfigureUSART() in USBtoSerial SetLineCoding request, so that baud rate changes

-  *    are reflected in the hardware (change was previously lost)

-  *

-  *

-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog152 Version 1.5.2 (080731)

-  *

-  *  - Fixed SwapEndian_32() function in Common.h so that it now works correctly (wrong parameter types)

-  *  - Updated RNDIS demo - notification endpoint is no longer blocking so that it works with faulty Linux RNDIS

-  *    implementations (where the notification endpoint is ignored in favor of polling the control endpoint)

-  *  - Fixed incorrect Vendor Description string return size in RNDIS demo for the OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION OID token

-  *  - Added very basic TCP/IP stack and HTTP/TELNET servers to RNDIS demo

-  *  - Fixed DFU bootloader exit causing programming software to complain about failed writes

-  *  - Fixed DFU bootloader EEPROM programming mode wiping first flash page

-  *  - Fixed Clear/Set Feature device standard request processing code (fixing MassStorage demo in the process)

-  *  - Added support for the ATMEGA16U4 AVR microcontroller

-  *  - Library license changed from LGPLv3 to MIT license

-  *

-  *

-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog151 Version 1.5.1 (080707)

-  *

-  *  - Changed host demos to enable the host function task on the firing of the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event

-  *    rather than the USB_DeviceAttached event

-  *  - HID Usage Stack now forcefully cleared after an IN/OUT/FEATURE item has been completely processed to remove

-  *    any referenced but not created usages

-  *  - Changed USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts() and USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(), USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfType(),

-  *    USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeBefore(), USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeAfter() to normal functions (from inline)

-  *  - Fixed USBtoSerial demo not sending data, only receiving

-  *  - Fixed main makefile to make all by default, fixed MagStripe directory case to prevent case-sensitive path problems

-  *  - ConfigDescriptor functions made normal, instead of static inline

-  *  - Pipe/Endpoint *_Ignore_* functions changed to *_Discard_*, old names still present as aliases

-  *  - Fixed ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE define to be correct on limited USB controller AVRs

-  *  - Changed endpoint and pipe size translation routines to use previous IF/ELSE IF cascade code, new algorithmic

-  *    approach was buggy and caused problems

-  *  - Bootloaders now compile with -fno-inline-small-functions option to reduce code size

-  *  - Audio demos now use correct endpoint sizes for full and limited controller USB AVRs, double banking in all cases

-  *    to be in line with the specification (isochronous endpoints MUST be double banked)

-  *  - Added Interface Association descriptor to StdDescriptors.h, based on the relevant USB2.0 ECN

-  *  - Fixed MIDI demo, corrected Audio Streaming descriptor to follow the MIDI-specific AS structure

-  *  - Fixed HID class demo descriptors so that the HID interface's protocol is 0x00 (required for non-boot protocol HID

-  *    devices) to prevent problems on hosts expecting the boot protocol functions to be supported

-  *  - Added read/write control stream functions to Endpoint.h

-  *  - Fixed AudioOut demo not setting port pins to inputs on USB disconnect properly

-  *  - Added RNDISEthernet demo application

-  *

-  *

-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog150 Version 1.5.0 (080610)

-  *

-  *  - Fixed MIDI demo, now correctly waits for the endpoint to be ready between multiple note messages

-  *  - Added CDC Host demo application

-  *  - Added KeyboardFullInt demo application

-  *  - Endpoint and Pipe creation routines now mask endpoint/pipe size with the size mask, to remove transaction

-  *    size bits not required for the routines (improves compatibility with devices)

-  *  - Fixed AudioInput demo - now correctly sends sampled audio to the host PC

-  *  - Fixed AudioOutput demo once more -- apparently Windows requires endpoint packets to be >=192 bytes

-  *  - Shrunk round-robbin scheduler code slightly via the use of struct pointers rather than array indexes

-  *  - Fixed off-by-one error when determining if the Usage Stack is full inside the HID Report parser

-  *  - Renamed Magstripe.h to MagstripeHW.h and moved driver out of the library and into the MagStripe demo folder

-  *  - Added preprocessor checks to enable C linkage on the library components when used with a C++ compiler

-  *  - Added Still Image Host demo application

-  *  - The USB device task now restores the previously selected endpoint, allowing control requests to be transparently

-  *    handled via interrupts while other endpoints are serviced through polling

-  *  - Fixed device signature being sent in reverse order in the CDC bootloader

-  *  - Host demos now have a separate ConfigDescriptor.c/.h file for configuration descriptor processing

-  *  - HostWithParser demos now have a separate HIDReport.c/.h file for HID report processing and dumping

-  *  - Removed non-mandatory commands from MassStorage demo to save space, fixed SENSE ResponseCode value

-  *  - CDC demos now send empty packets after sending a full one to prevent buffering issues on the host

-  *  - Updated demo descriptors to use VID/PID values donated by Atmel

-  *  - Added DoxyGen documentation to the source files

-  *  - Fixed Serial_IsCharReceived() definition, was previously reversed

-  *  - Removed separate USB_Descriptor_Language_t descriptor, USB_Descriptor_String_t is used instead

-  *  - Removed unused Device Qualifier descriptor structure

-  *  - Renamed the USB_CreateEndpoints event to the more appropriate USB_ConfigurationChanged

-  *  - Fixed MassStorageHost demo reading in the block data in reverse

-  *  - Removed outdated typedefs in StdRequestType.h, superseded by the macro masks

-  *  - Corrected OTG.h is now included when the AVR supports both Host and Device modes, for creating OTG products

-  *  - USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event is now also fired when in device mode and the host has finished its enumeration

-  *  - Interrupt driven demos now properly restore previously selected endpoint when ISR is complete

-  *  - The value of USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS can now be overridden in the user project makefile to a custom fixed timeout value

-  *  - Renamed USB_Host_SOFGeneration_* macros to more friendly USB_Host_SuspendBus(), USB_Host_ResumeBus()

-  *    and USB_Host_IsBusSuspended()

-  *  - Renamed *_*_Is* macros to *_Is* to make all flag checking macros consistent, Pipe_SetInterruptFreq() is now

-  *    Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod() to use the correct terminology

-  *  - UnicodeString member of USB_Descriptor_String_t struct changed to an ordinary int array type, so that the GCC

-  *    Unicode strings (prefixed with an L before the opening quotation mark) can be used instead of explicit arrays

-  *    of ASCII characters

-  *  - Fixed Endpoint/Pipes being configured incorrectly if the maximum endpoint/pipe size for the selected USB AVR

-  *    model was given as the bank size

-  *  - HID device demos now use a true raw array for the HID report descriptor rather than a struct wrapped array

-  *  - Added VERSION_BCD() macro, fixed reported HID and USB version numbers in demo descriptors

-  *  - Cleaned up GetDescriptor device chapter 9 handler function

-  *  - Added GET_REPORT class specific request to HID demos to make them complaint to the HID class

-  *  - Cleaned up setting of USB_IsInitialized and USB_IsConnected values to only when needed

-  *  - Removed Atomic.c and ISRMacro.h; the library was already only compatible with recent avr-lib-c for other reasons

-  *  - All demos and library functions now use USB standardized names for the USB data (bRequest, wLength, etc.)

-  *  - Added USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES token to switch back to the non-standard descriptor element names

-  *

-  *

-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog141 Version 1.4.1 (090519)

-  *

-  *  - Enhanced KeyboardWithParser demo, now prints out pressed alphanumeric characters like the standard demo

-  *  - Fixed MassStorage demo, read/writes using non mode-10 commands now work correctly

-  *  - Corrected version number in Version.h

-  *

-  *

-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog140 Version 1.4.0 (090505)

-  *

-  *  - Added HID Report Parser API to the library

-  *  - Added Mouse and Keyboard host demo applications, using the new HID report parser engine

-  *  - Added MouseFullInt demo, which demonstrates a fully interrupt (including control requests) mouse device

-  *  - Fixed incorrect length value in the audio control descriptor of the AudioOutput and AudioInput demos

-  *  - Added MIDI device demo application to the library

-  *  - Fixed problem preventing USB devices from being resumed from a suspended state

-  *  - Added new CDC class bootloader to the library, based on the AVR109 bootloader protocol

-  *  - Added header to each demo application indicating the mode, class, subclass, standards used and supported speed

-  *  - Functions expecting endpoint/pipe numbers are no longer automatically masked against ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK or

-  *    PIPE_PIPENUM_MASK - this should be manually added to code which requires it

-  *  - Fixed DFU class bootloader - corrected frequency of flash page writes, greatly reducing programming time

-  *  - Renamed AVR_HOST_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() to USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() and AVR_HOST_GetNextDescriptor()

-  *    to USB_Host_GetNextDescriptor()

-  *  - Added new USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeBefore() and USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeAfter() routines

-  *  - Moved configuration descriptor routines to MyUSB/Drivers/USB/Class/, new accompanying ConfigDescriptors.c file

-  *  - Added new configuration descriptor comparator API for more powerful descriptor parsing, updated host demos to use the

-  *    new comparator API

-  *  - Fixed MassStorageHost demo capacity printout, and changed data read/write mode from little-endian to the correct

-  *    big-endian for SCSI devices

-  *  - Fixed macro/function naming consistency; USB_HOST is now USB_Host, USB_DEV is now USB_Device

-  *  - Added better error reporting to host demos

-  *  - Added 10 microsecond delay after addressing devices in host mode, to prevent control stalls

-  *

-  *

-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog132 Version 1.3.2 (080401)

-  *

-  *  - Added call to ReconfigureUSART() in USBtoSerial SetLineCoding request, so that baud rate changes

-  *    are reflected in the hardware

-  *  - Fixed CDC and USBtoSerial demos - Stream commands do not work for control endpoints, and the

-  *    GetLineCoding request had an incorrect RequestType mask preventing it from being processed

-  *  - Improved reliability of the USBtoSerial demo, adding a busy wait while the buffer is full

-  *  - Device control endpoint size is now determined from the device's descriptors rather than being fixed

-  *  - Separated out SPI code into new SPI driver in AT90USBXXX driver directory

-  *  - Bootloader now returns correct PID for the selected USB AVR model, not just the AT90USB128X PID

-  *  - Added support for the RZUSBSTICK board

-  *  - Bicolour driver removed in favor of generic LEDs driver

-  *  - Added support for the ATMEGA32U4 AVR

-  *  - Added MANUAL_PLL_CONTROL compile time option to prevent the USB library from manipulating the PLL

-  *

-  *

-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog131 Version 1.3.1 (080319)

-  *

-  *  - Fixed USB to Serial demo - class value in the descriptors was incorrect

-  *  - Control endpoint size changed from 64 bytes to 8 bytes to save on USB FIFO RAM and to allow low

-  *    speed mode devices to enumerate properly

-  *  - USB to Serial demo data endpoints changed to dual-banked 16 byte to allow the demo to work

-  *    on USB AVRs with limited USB FIFO RAM

-  *  - Changed demo endpoint numbers to use endpoints 3 and 4 for double banking, to allow limited

-  *    USB device controller AVRs (AT90USB162, AT90USB82) to function correctly

-  *  - Updated Audio Out demo to use timer 1 for AVRs lacking a timer 3 for the PWM output

-  *  - Fixed incorrect USB_DEV_OPT_HIGHSPEED entry in the Mass Storage device demo makefile

-  *  - Optimized Mass Storage demo for a little extra transfer speed

-  *  - Added LED indicators to the Keyboard demo for Caps Lock, Num Lock and Scroll Lock

-  *  - Added Endpoint_Read_Stream, Endpoint_Write_Stream, Pipe_Read_Stream and Pipe_Write_Stream functions

-  *    (including Big and Little Endian variants)

-  *  - Made Dataflash functions inline for speed, removed now empty Dataflash.c driver file

-  *  - Added new SetSystemClockPrescaler() macro (thanks to Joerg Wunsch)

-  *  - Fixed Endpoint_ClearStall() to function correctly on full USB controller AVRs (AT90USBXXX6/7)

-  *  - Endpoint_Setup_In_Clear() and Endpoint_Setup_Out_Clear() no longer set FIFOCON, in line with the

-  *    directives in the datasheet

-  *  - Fixed PLL prescaler defines for all AVR models and frequencies

-  *  - Fixed ENDPOINT_INT_IN and ENDPOINT_INT_OUT definitions

-  *  - Added interrupt driven keyboard and mouse device demos

-  *  - Combined USB_Device_ClearFeature and USB_Device_SetFeature requests into a single routine for code

-  *    size savings

-  *  - Added missing Pipe_GetCurrentPipe() macro to Pipe.h

-  *

-  *

-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog130 Version 1.3.0 (080307)

-  *

-  *  - Unnecessary control endpoint config removed from device mode

-  *  - Fixed device standard request interpreter accidentally processing some class-specific requests

-  *  - Added USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS and USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS compile time options to instruct the library

-  *    to use descriptors stored in RAM or EEPROM rather than flash memory

-  *  - All demos now disable watchdog on startup, in case it has been enabled by fuses or the bootloader

-  *  - USB_DEV_OPT_LOWSPEED option now works correctly

-  *  - Added ability to set the USB options statically for a binary size reduction via the USE_STATIC_OPTIONS

-  *    compile time define

-  *  - USB_Init no longer takes a Mode parameter if compiled for a USB device with no host mode option, or

-  *    if forced to a particular mode via the USB_HOST_ONLY or USB_DEVICE_ONLY compile time options

-  *  - USB_Init no longer takes an Options parameter if options statically configured by USE_STATIC_OPTIONS

-  *  - Endpoint_Ignore_* and Pipe_Ignore_* made smaller by making the dummy variable non-volatile so that the

-  *    compiler can throw away the result more efficiently

-  *  - Added in an optional GroupID value to each scheduler entry, so that groups of tasks can once again be

-  *    controlled by the new Scheduler_SetGroupTaskMode() routine

-  *  - Added support for AT90USB162 and AT90USB82 AVR models

-  *  - Added support for the STK525 and STK526 boards

-  *  - Added support for custom board drivers to be supplied by selecting the board type as BOARD_USER, and

-  *    placing board drivers in {Application Directory}/Board/

-  *  - PLL is now stopped and USB clock is frozen when detached from host in device mode, to save power

-  *  - Joystick defines are now in synch with the schematics - orientation will be rotated for the USBKEY

-  *  - Fixed USB_DEV_IsUSBSuspended() - now checks the correct register

-  *  - Fixed data transfers to devices when in host mode

-  *  - Renamed USB_DEV_OPT_HIGHSPEED to USB_DEV_OPT_FULLSPEED and USB_HOST_IsDeviceHighSpeed() to

-  *    USB_HOST_IsDeviceFullSpeed() to be in line with the official USB speed names (to avoid confusion with

-  *    the real high speed mode, which is unavailable on the USB AVRs)

-  *

-  *

-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog120 Version 1.2.0 (080204)

-  *

-  *  - Added USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event for host mode

-  *  - Added new Scheduler_Init routine to prepare the scheduler, so that tasks can be started and

-  *    stopped before the scheduler has been started (via Scheduler_Start)

-  *  - Connection events in both Device and Host mode are now interrupt-driven, allowing the USB management

-  *    task to be stopped when the USB is not connected to a host or device

-  *  - All demos updated to stop the USB task when not in use via the appropriate USB events

-  *  - Mass Storage Host demo application updated to function correctly with all USB flash disks

-  *  - Mass Storage Host demo application now prints out the capacity and number of LUNs in the attached

-  *    device, and prints the first block as hexadecimal numbers rather than ASCII characters

-  *  - Endpoint and Pipe clearing routines now clear the Endpoint/Pipe interrupt and status flags

-  *  - Shifted error handling code in the host enum state machine to a single block, to reduce code complexity

-  *  - Added in DESCRIPTOR_TYPE, DESCRIPTOR_SIZE and DESCRIPTOR_CAST macros to make config descriptor processing

-  *    clearer in USB hosts and DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS for convenience in USB devices

-  *  - Added in alloca macro to common.h, in case the user is using an old version of avr-lib-c missing the macro

-  *

-  *

-  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog110 Version 1.1.0 (080125)

-  *

-  *  - Fixed DCONNI interrupt being enabled accidentally after a USB reset

-  *  - Fixed DDISCI interrupt not being disabled when a device is not connected

-  *  - Added workaround for powerless pull-up devices causing false disconnect interrupts

-  *  - Added USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event for Host mode

-  *  - AVR_HOST_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor routine no longer modifies ConfigSizePtr if a valid buffer

-  *    pointer is passed

-  *  - Added ALLOCABLE_BYTES to DynAlloc, and added code to make the size of key storage variables

-  *    dependant on size of memory parameters passed in via the user project's makefile

-  *  - Fixed incorrect device reset routine being called in USBTask

-  *  - Devices which do not connect within the standard 300mS are now supported

-  *  - Removed incorrect ATTR_PURE from Scheduler_SetTaskMode(), which was preventing tasks from being

-  *    started/stopped, as well as USB_InitTaskPointer(), which was breaking dual device/host USB projects

-  *  - Changed scheduler to use the task name rather than IDs for setting the task mode, eliminating the

-  *    need to have a task ID list

-  *  - ID transition interrupt now raises the appropriate device/host disconnect event if device attached

-  *  - Fixed double VBUS change (and VBUS -) event when detaching in device mode

-  *  - Added ability to disable ANSI terminal codes by the defining of DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES in makefile

-  *  - Removed return from ConfigurePipe and ConfigureEndpoint functions - use Pipe_IsConfigured() and

-  *    Endpoint_IsConfigured() after calling the config functions to determine success

-  */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/CompileTimeTokens.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/CompileTimeTokens.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 966ddd0fe..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/CompileTimeTokens.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,223 +0,0 @@
-/** \file

- *

- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special

- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.

- */

-

-/** \page Page_TokenSummary Summary of Compile Tokens

- *

- *  The following lists all the possible tokens which can be defined in a project makefile, and passed to the

- *  compiler via the -D switch, to alter the LUFA library code. These tokens may alter the library behaviour,

- *  or remove features unused by a given application in order to save flash space.

- *

- *  \note If the \c USE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER token is defined, the library will include a header file named \c LUFAConfig.h located

- *        in the user directory where the below compile time tokens may be defined. This allows for an alternative to makefile

- *        defined tokens for configuring the library.

- *

- *  \section Sec_SummaryNonUSBTokens Non USB Related Tokens

- *  This section describes compile tokens which affect non-USB sections of the LUFA library.

- *

- *  - <b>DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES</b> - (\ref Group_Terminal) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n

- *    If an application contains ANSI terminal control codes listed in TerminalCodes.h, it might be desired to remove them

- *    at compile time for use with a terminal which is non-ANSI control code aware, without modifying the source code. If

- *    this token is defined, all ANSI control codes in the application code from the TerminalCodes.h header are removed from

- *    the source code at compile time.

- *

- *

- *  \section Sec_SummaryUSBClassTokens USB Class Driver Related Tokens

- *  This section describes compile tokens which affect USB class-specific drivers in the LUFA library.

- *

- *  - <b>HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY</b> - (\ref Group_USBClassHIDHost) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n

- *    By default, the USB HID Host class driver is designed to work with HID devices using either the Boot or Report HID

- *    communication protocols. On devices where the Report protocol is not used (i.e. in applications where only basic

- *    Mouse or Keyboard operation is desired, using boot compatible devices), the code responsible for the Report protocol

- *    mode can be removed to save space in the compiled application by defining this token. When defined, it is still necessary

- *    to explicitly put the attached device into Boot protocol mode via a call to \ref HID_Host_SetBootProtocol().

- *

- *  - <b>HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH</b>=<i>x</i> - (\ref Group_HIDParser) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n

- *    HID reports may contain PUSH and POP elements, to store and retrieve the current HID state table onto a stack. This

- *    allows for reports to save the state table before modifying it slightly for a data item, and then restore the previous

- *    state table in a compact manner. This token may be defined to a non-zero 8-bit value to give the maximum depth of the state

- *    table stack. If not defined, this defaults to the value indicated in the HID.h file documentation.

- *

- *  - <b>HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH</b>=<i>x</i> - (\ref Group_HIDParser) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n

- *    HID reports generally contain many USAGE elements, which are assigned to INPUT, OUTPUT and FEATURE items in succession

- *    when multiple items are defined at once (via REPORT COUNT elements). This allows for several items to be defined with

- *    different usages in a compact manner. This token may be defined to a non-zero 8-bit value to set the maximum depth of the

- *    usage stack, indicating the maximum number of USAGE items which can be stored temporarily until the next INPUT, OUTPUT

- *    and FEATURE item. If not defined, this defaults to the value indicated in the HID.h file documentation.

- *

- *  - <b>HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS</b>=<i>x</i> - (\ref Group_HIDParser) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n

- *    HID reports generally contain several COLLECTION elements, used to group related data items together. Collection information

- *    is stored separately in the processed usage structure (and referred to by the data elements in the structure) to save space.

- *    This token may be defined to a non-zero 8-bit value to set the maximum number of COLLECTION items which can be processed by the

- *    parser into the resultant processed report structure. If not defined, this defaults to the value indicated in the HID.h file

- *    documentation.

- *

- *  - <b>HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS</b>=<i>x</i> - (\ref Group_HIDParser) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n

- *    All HID reports contain one or more INPUT, OUTPUT and/or FEATURE items describing the data which can be sent to and from the HID

- *    device. Each item has associated usages, bit offsets in the item reports and other associated data indicating the manner in which

- *    the report data should be interpreted by the host. This token may be defined to a non-zero 8-bit value to set the maximum number of

- *    data elements which can be stored in the processed HID report structure, including INPUT, OUTPUT and (if enabled) FEATURE items.

- *    If a item has a multiple count (i.e. a REPORT COUNT of more than 1), each item in the report count is placed separately in the

- *    processed HID report table. If not defined, this defaults to the value indicated in the HID.h file documentation.

- *

- *  - <b>HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS</b>=<i>x</i> - (\ref Group_HIDParser) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n

- *    HID reports may contain several report IDs, to logically distinguish grouped device data from one another - for example, a combination

- *    keyboard and mouse might use report IDs to separate the keyboard reports from the mouse reports. In order to determine the size of each

- *    report, and thus know how many bytes must be read or written, the size of each report (IN, OUT and FEATURE) must be calculated and

- *    stored. This token may be defined to a non-zero 8-bit value to set the maximum number of report IDs in a device which can be processed

- *    and their sizes calculated/stored into the resultant processed report structure. If not defined, this defaults to the value indicated in

- *    the HID.h file documentation.

- *

- *  - <b>NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH</b> - (\ref Group_USBClassDrivers) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n

- *    Many of the device and host mode class drivers automatically flush any data waiting to be written to an interface, when the corresponding

- *    USB management task is executed. This is usually desirable to ensure that any queued data is sent as soon as possible once and new data is

- *    constructed in the main program loop. However, if flushing is to be controlled manually by the user application via the *_Flush() commands,

- *    the compile time token may be defined in the application's makefile to disable automatic flushing during calls to the class driver USB

- *    management tasks.

- *

- *

- *  \section Sec_SummaryUSBTokens General USB Driver Related Tokens

- *  This section describes compile tokens which affect USB driver stack as a whole in the LUFA library.

- *

- *  - <b>ORDERED_EP_CONFIG</b> - (\ref Group_EndpointManagement , \ref Group_PipeManagement) - <i>AVR8, UC3</i> \n

- *    The USB AVRs do not allow for Endpoints and Pipes to be configured out of order; they <i>must</i> be configured in an ascending order to

- *    prevent data corruption issues. However, by default LUFA employs a workaround to allow for unordered Endpoint/Pipe initialization. This compile

- *    time token may be used to restrict the initialization order to ascending indexes only in exchange for a smaller compiled binary size. Use

- *    caution when applied to applications using the library USB Class drivers; the user application must ensure that all endpoints and pipes are

- *    allocated sequentially.

- *

- *  - <b>USE_STATIC_OPTIONS</b>=<i>x</i> - (\ref Group_USBManagement) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n

- *    By default, the USB_Init() function accepts dynamic options at runtime to alter the library behaviour, including whether the USB pad

- *    voltage regulator is enabled, and the device speed when in device mode. By defining this token to a mask comprised of the USB options

- *    mask defines usually passed as the Options parameter to USB_Init(), the resulting compiled binary can be decreased in size by removing

- *    the dynamic options code, and replacing it with the statically set options. When defined, the USB_Init() function no longer accepts an

- *    Options parameter.

- *

- *  - <b>USB_DEVICE_ONLY</b> - (\ref Group_USBManagement) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n

- *    For the USB AVR models supporting both device and host USB modes, the USB_Init() function contains a Mode parameter which specifies the

- *    mode the library should be initialized to. If only device mode is required, the code for USB host mode can be removed from the binary to

- *    save space. When defined, the USB_Init() function no longer accepts a Mode parameter. This define is irrelevant on smaller USB AVRs which

- *    do not support host mode.

- *

- *  - <b>USB_HOST_ONLY</b> - (\ref Group_USBManagement) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n

- *    Same as USB_DEVICE_ONLY, except the library is fixed to USB host mode rather than USB device mode. Not available on some USB AVR models.

- *

- *  - <b>USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS</b>=<i>x</i> - (\ref Group_USBManagement) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n

- *    When endpoint and/or pipe stream functions are used, by default there is a timeout between each transfer which the connected device or host

- *    must satisfy, or the stream function aborts the remaining data transfer. This token may be defined to a non-zero 16-bit value to set the timeout

- *    period for stream transfers, specified in milliseconds. If not defined, the default value specified in LowLevel.h is used instead.

- *

- *  - <b>NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT</b> - (\ref Group_Events) - <i>AVR8 Only</i> \n

- *    On the smaller USB AVRs, the USB controller lacks VBUS events to determine the physical connection state of the USB bus to a host. In lieu of

- *    VBUS events, the library attempts to determine the connection state via the bus suspension and wake up events instead. This however may be

- *    slightly inaccurate due to the possibility of the host suspending the bus while the device is still connected. If accurate connection status is

- *    required, the VBUS line of the USB connector should be routed to an AVR pin to detect its level, so that the USB_DeviceState global

- *    can be accurately set and the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Connect() and \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect() events manually raised by the RAISE_EVENT macro.

- *    When defined, this token disables the library's auto-detection of the connection state by the aforementioned suspension and wake up events.

- *

- *  - <b>NO_SOF_EVENTS</b> - (\ref Group_Events) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n

- *    By default, there exists a LUFA application event for the start of each USB frame while the USB bus is not suspended in either host or device mode.

- *    This event can be selectively enabled or disabled by calling the appropriate device or host mode function. When this compile time token is defined,

- *    the ability to receive USB Start of Frame events via the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() or \ref EVENT_USB_Host_StartOfFrame() events is removed,

- *    reducing the compiled program's binary size.

- *

- *

- *  \section Sec_SummaryUSBDeviceTokens USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens

- *  This section describes compile tokens which affect USB driver stack of the LUFA library when used in Device mode.

- *

- *  - <b>USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS</b> - (\ref Group_StdDescriptors) - <i>AVR8 Only</i> \n

- *    Define this token to indicate to the USB driver that all device descriptors are stored in RAM, rather than being located in any one

- *    of the AVR's memory spaces. RAM descriptors may be desirable in applications where the descriptors need to be modified at runtime.

- *

- *  - <b>USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS</b> - (\ref Group_StdDescriptors) - <i>AVR8 Only</i> \n

- *    Similar to USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS, but all descriptors are stored in the AVR's FLASH memory rather than RAM.

- *

- *  - <b>USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS</b> - (\ref Group_StdDescriptors) - <i>AVR8 Only</i> \n

- *    Similar to USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS, but all descriptors are stored in the AVR's EEPROM memory rather than RAM.

- *

- *  - <b>NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL</b> - (\ref Group_StdDescriptors) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n

- *    Some AVR models contain a unique serial number which can be used as the device serial number, while in device mode. This allows

- *    the host to uniquely identify the device regardless of if it is moved between USB ports on the same computer, allowing allocated

- *    resources (such as drivers, COM Port number allocations) to be preserved. This is not needed in many apps, and so the code that

- *    performs this task can be disabled by defining this option and passing it to the compiler via the -D switch.

- *

- *  - <b>FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE</b>=<i>x</i> - (\ref Group_EndpointManagement) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n

- *    By default, the library determines the size of the control endpoint (when in device mode) by reading the device descriptor.

- *    Normally this reduces the amount of configuration required for the library, allows the value to change dynamically (if

- *    descriptors are stored in EEPROM or RAM rather than flash memory) and reduces code maintenance. However, this token can be

- *    defined to a non-zero value instead to give the size in bytes of the control endpoint, to reduce the size of the compiled

- *    binary.

- *

- *  - <b>DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR</b> - (\ref Group_Device) - <i>AVR8 Only</i> \n

- *    One of the most frequently used global variables in the stack is the USB_DeviceState global, which indicates the current state of

- *    the Device State Machine. To reduce the amount of code and time required to access and modify this global in an application, this token

- *    may be defined to a value between 0 and 2 to fix the state variable into one of the three general purpose IO registers inside the AVR

- *    reserved for application use. When defined, the corresponding GPIOR register should not be used within the user application except

- *    implicitly via the library APIs.

- *

- *  - <b>FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS</b>=<i>x</i> - (\ref Group_Device) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n

- *    By default, the library determines the number of configurations a USB device supports by reading the device descriptor. This reduces

- *    the amount of configuration required to set up the library, and allows the value to change dynamically (if descriptors are stored in

- *    EEPROM or RAM rather than flash memory) and reduces code maintenance. However, this value may be fixed via this token in the project

- *    makefile to reduce the compiled size of the binary at the expense of flexibility.

- *

- *  - <b>CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE</b> - (\ref Group_Device) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n

- *    In some limited USB device applications, there are no device endpoints other than the control endpoint; i.e. all device communication

- *    is through control endpoint requests. Defining this token will remove several features related to the selection and control of device

- *    endpoints internally, saving space. Generally, this is usually only useful in (some) bootloaders and is best avoided.

- *

- *  - <b>MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX</b> - (\ref Group_Device) - <i>XMEGA Only</i> \n

- *    Defining this value to the highest index (not address - this excludes the direction flag) endpoint within the device will restrict the

- *    number of FIFOs created internally for the endpoint buffers, reducing the total RAM usage.

- *

- *  - <b>INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT</b> - (\ref Group_USBManagement) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n

- *    Some applications prefer to not call the USB_USBTask() management task regularly while in device mode, as it can complicate code significantly.

- *    Instead, when device mode is used this token can be passed to the library via the -D switch to allow the library to manage the USB control

- *    endpoint entirely via USB controller interrupts asynchronously to the user application. When defined, USB_USBTask() does not need to be called

- *    when in USB device mode.

- *

- *  - <b>NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP</b> - (\ref Group_Device) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n

- *    Many devices do not require the use of the Remote Wakeup features of USB, used to wake up the USB host when suspended. On these devices,

- *    the code required to manage device Remote Wakeup can be disabled by defining this token and passing it to the library via the -D switch.

- *

- *  - <b>NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER</b> - (\ref Group_Device) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n

- *    USB devices may be bus powered, self powered, or a combination of both. When a device can be both bus powered and self powered, the host may

- *    query the device to determine the current power source, via \ref USB_Device_CurrentlySelfPowered. For solely bus powered devices, this global

- *    and the code required to manage it may be disabled by passing this token to the library via the -D switch.

- *

- *

- *  \section Sec_SummaryUSBHostTokens USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens

- *

- *  This section describes compile tokens which affect USB driver stack of the LUFA library when used in Host mode.

- *

- *  - <b>HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR</b> - (\ref Group_Host) - <i>AVR8 Only</i> \n

- *    One of the most frequently used global variables in the stack is the USB_HostState global, which indicates the current state of

- *    the Host State Machine. To reduce the amount of code and time required to access and modify this global in an application, this token

- *    may be defined to a value between 0 and 2 to fix the state variable into one of the three general purpose IO registers inside the AVR

- *    reserved for application use. When defined, the corresponding GPIOR register should not be used within the user application except

- *    implicitly via the library APIs.

- *

- *  - <b>USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS</b>=<i>x</i> - (\ref Group_Host) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n

- *    When a control transfer is initiated in host mode to an attached device, a timeout is used to abort the transfer if the attached

- *    device fails to respond within the timeout period. This token may be defined to a non-zero 16-bit value to set the timeout period for

- *    control transfers, specified in milliseconds. If not defined, the default value specified in Host.h is used instead.

- *

- *  - <b>HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS</b>=<i>x</i> - (\ref Group_Host) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n

- *    Some devices require a delay of up to 5 seconds after they are connected to VBUS before the enumeration process can be started, or

- *    they will fail to enumerate correctly. By placing a delay before the enumeration process, it can be ensured that the bus has settled

- *    back to a known idle state before communications occur with the device. This token may be defined to a 16-bit value to set the device

- *    settle period, specified in milliseconds. If not defined, the default value specified in Host.h is used instead.

- *

- *  - <b>INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE</b> - (\ref Group_Host) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n

- *    If enabled, this will indicate that the USB target VBUS line polarity is inverted; i.e. it should be pulled low to enable VBUS to the

- *    target, and pulled high to stop the target VBUS generation.

- *

- *    \attention On AVR8 architecture devices, this compile time option requires \c NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT to be set.

- *

- *  - <b>NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT</b> - (\ref Group_Host) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n

- *    Disables the automatic management of VBUS to the target, i.e. automatic shut down in the even of an overcurrent situation. When enabled, VBUS

- *    is enabled while the USB controller is initialized in USB Host mode.

- */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/CompilingApps.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/CompilingApps.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 85912b56e..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/CompilingApps.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
-/** \file

- *

- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special

- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.

- */

-

-/** \page Page_CompilingApps Compiling the Demos, Bootloaders and Projects

- *

- *  The following details how to compile the included LUFA demos, applications and bootloaders using AVR-GCC.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Prerequisites Prerequisites

- *  Before you can compile any of the LUFA library code or demos, you will need a recent distribution of avr-libc (1.6.2+)

- *  and the AVR-GCC (4.2+) compiler. A standard "coreutils" package for your system is also required for command line

- *  compilation of LUFA based applications.

- *

- *  \subsection SSec_PreqWindows Windows Prerequisites

- *  On Windows, you will need a copy of the latest Atmel Toolchain, either downloaded and installed as a standalone

- *  package, or installed as part of Atmel Studio. You will need to ensure that the "bin" directory of the toolchain

- *  is available in your system's <b>PATH</b> environment variable.

- *

- *  In addition, you will need to install a ported version of the ZSH or BASH *nix shells, and a standard set of *nix

- *  utilities such as <i>cut</i>, <i>find</i> and <i>sed</i>. These can be found in the "basic" system package of the

- *  of the MinGW installer (<a>http://www.mingw.org</a>). Once installed, add the "msys\1.0\bin" of the MinGW installation

- *  folder is added to your system's <b>PATH</b> environment variable.

- *

- *  The bootloaders currently also require the "bc" application, which can be installed from

- *  <a>http://gnuwin32.sourceforge.net/downlinks/bc.php</a>. Once installed add the "GnuWin32\bin" path of the GnuWin32

- *  installation folder to your system's <b>PATH</b> environment variable.

- *

- *  \subsection SSec_PreqLinux Linux Prerequisites

- *  On Linux systems you will need to install the latest Linux distribution of the standalone Atmel Toolchain from the

- *  Atmel website for general development, or use the latest avr-libc and avr-gcc packages for your chosen distribution's

- *  package manager. For full device support, the Atmel standalone package is recommended.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Compiling Compiling a LUFA Application

- *  Compiling the LUFA demos, applications and/or bootloaders is very simple. LUFA comes with makefile scripts for

- *  each individual demo, bootloader and project folder, as well as scripts in the Demos/, Bootloaders/, Projects/

- *  and the LUFA root directory. Compilation of projects can be started from any of the above directories, with a build

- *  started from an upper directory in the directory structure executing build of all child directories under it. This

- *  means that while a build inside a particular demo directory will build only that particular demo, a build started from

- *  the /Demos/ directory will build all LUFA demo projects sequentially.

- *

- *  To build a project from the source via the command line, the command <b>"make all"</b> should be executed from the command

- *  line in the directory of interest. To remove compiled files (including the binary output, all intermediately files and all

- *  diagnostic output files), execute <b>"make clean"</b>. Once a "make all" has been run and no errors were encountered, the

- *  resulting binary will be located in the generated ".HEX" file. If your project makes use of pre-initialized EEPROM

- *  variables, the generated ".EEP" file will contain the project's EEPROM data.

- *

- *  \see \ref Page_BuildSystem for information on the LUFA build system.

- */

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/ConfiguringApps.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/ConfiguringApps.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index f126e69bb..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/ConfiguringApps.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,104 +0,0 @@
-/** \file

- *

- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special

- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.

- */

-

-/** \page Page_ConfiguringApps Configuring the Demos, Bootloaders and Projects

- *

- *  If the target microcontroller model, architecture, clock speed, board or other settings are different from the current

- *  settings, they must be changed and the project recompiled from the source code before being programmed into the microcontroller.

- *  Most project configuration options are located in the <tt>makefile</tt> build script inside each LUFA application's folder,

- *  however some demo or application-specific configuration settings are located in one or more of the source files of the project.

- *  See each project's individual documentation for application-specific configuration values.

- *

- *  Each project "makefile" contains all the script and configuration data required to compile each project. When opened with

- *  any regular basic text editor such as Notepad or WordPad (ensure that the save format is a pure ASCII text format) the

- *  build configuration settings may be altered.

- *

- *  \see \ref Page_BuildSystem for information on the LUFA build system.

- *

- *  \section Sec_AppConfigParams The Default Application Template

- *

- *  Below is a copy of the default LUFA application makefile, which can be used as a template for each application.

- *

- *  \verbinclude makefile_template

- *

- *  Inside each makefile, a number of configuration variables are listed with the syntax "<VARIABLE NAME> = <VALUE>". For

- *  each application, the important standard variables which should be altered are:

- *

- *    - <b>MCU</b>, the target processor model

- *    - <b>ARCH</b>, the target microcontroller architecture

- *    - <b>BOARD</b>, the target board hardware

- *    - <b>F_CPU</b>, the target CPU master clock frequency, after any prescaling

- *    - <b>F_USB</b>, the target raw input clock to the USB module of the processor

- *    - <b>OPTIMIZATION</b>, the level of optimization to compile with

- *    - <b>TARGET</b>, the name of the target output binary and other files

- *    - <b>SRC</b>, the list of source files to compile/assemble/link

- *    - <b>LUFA_PATH</b>, the path to the LUFA library core source code

- *    - <b>CC_FLAGS</b>, the common command line flags to pass to the C/C++ compiler, assembler and linker

- *    - <b>LD_FLAGS</b>, the command line flags to pass to the linker

- *

- *  These values should be changed to reflect the build hardware.

- *

- *  \subsection SSec_MCU The MCU Parameter

- *  This parameter indicates the target microcontroller model for the compiled application. This should be set to the model of the target

- *  microcontroller (such as the AT90USB1287, or the ATMEGA32U4), in all lower-case (e.g. "at90usb1287"). Note that not all demos support all the

- *  microcontroller models and architectures, as they may make use of peripherals or modes only present in some devices.

- *

- *  For supported processor models, see \ref Page_DeviceSupport.

- *

- *  \subsection SSec_ARCH The ARCH Parameter

- *  This parameter indicates the target microcontroller architecture the library is to be compiled for. Different microcontroller

- *  architectures require different source files to be compiled into the final binary, and so this option must be set to the correct

- *  architecture for the selected platform.

- *

- *  For supported processor architectures, see \ref Page_DeviceSupport.

- *

- *  \subsection SSec_BOARD The BOARD Parameter

- *  This parameter indicates the target board hardware for the compiled application. Some LUFA library drivers are board-specific,

- *  such as the LED driver, and the library needs to know the layout of the target board. If you are using one of the board models listed

- *  on the main library page, change this parameter to the board name in all UPPER-case.

- *

- *  If you are not using any board-specific drivers in the LUFA library, or you are using a custom board layout, change this to read

- *  "USER" (no quotes) instead of a standard board name. If the USER board type is selected and the application makes use of one or more

- *  board-specific hardware drivers inside the LUFA library, then the appropriate stub drives files should be copied from the \c /CodeTemplates/DriverStubs/

- *  directory into a /Board/ folder inside the application directory, and the stub driver completed with the appropriate code to drive the

- *  custom board's hardware.

- *

- *  For boards with built in hardware driver support within the LUFA library, see \ref Page_DeviceSupport.

- *

- *  \subsection SSec_F_CPU The F_CPU Parameter

- *  This parameter indicates the target microcontroller's main CPU clock frequency, in Hz. This is used by many libraries (and applications) for

- *  timing related purposes, and should reflect the actual CPU speed after any prescaling or adjustments are performed.

- *

- *  \subsection SSec_F_USB The F_USB Parameter

- *  This parameter indicates the raw input clock frequency to the USB module within the microcontroller in Hz. This may be very different on some platforms

- *  to the main CPU clock or other peripheral/bus clocks.

- *

- *  \subsection SSec_OPTIMIZATION The OPTIMIZATION Parameter

- *  This parameter indicates the level of optimization to use when compiling the application. This will allow you to compile with an optimization level

- *  supported by GCC, from <tt>0</tt> (no optimization) to <tt>3</tt> (fastest runtime optimization) or <tt>s</tt> (smallest size).

- *

- *  \subsection SSec_TARGET The TARGET Parameter

- *  This parameter indicates the application target name, which is used as the base filename for the build binary and debugging files. This will be the

- *  name of the output files once linked together into the final application, ready to load into the target.

- *

- *  \subsection SSec_SRC The SRC Parameter

- *  This parameter indicates the source files used to compile the application, as a list of C (<tt>*.c</tt>), C++ (<tt>*.cpp</tt>) and Assembly (<tt>*.S</tt>) files. Note that

- *  all assembly files must end in a <b>capital</b> .S extension, as lowercase .s files are reserved for GCC intermediate files.

- *

- *  \subsection SSec_LUFA_PATH The LUFA_PATH Parameter

- *  As each LUFA program requires the LUFA library source code to compile correctly, the application must know where the LUFA library is located. This

- *  value specifies the path to the LUFA library core. This path may be relative or absolute, however note than even under Windows based systems the

- *  forward-slash (/) path seperator must be used.

- *

- *  \subsection SSec_CC_FLAGS The CC_FLAGS Parameter

- *  This parameter lists the compiler flags passed to the C/C++ compiler, the assembler and the linker. These are used as-is directly to GCC and thus

- *  must match GCC's command line options as given in the GCC manual. This variable may be used to define tokens directly on the command line, enable or

- *  disable warnings, adjust the target-specific tuning parameters or other options.

- *

- *  \subsection SSec_LD_FLAGS The LD_FLAGS Parameter

- *  This parameter lists the linker flags passed exclusively to the linker. These are used as-is directly to GCC and thus must match GCC's command line

- *  linker options as given in the GCC manual. This variable may be used to create or relocate custom data sections, or enable linker specific behaviors.

- */

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/DevelopingWithLUFA.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/DevelopingWithLUFA.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index becd58e54..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/DevelopingWithLUFA.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-/** \file

- *

- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special

- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.

- */

-

-/**

- *  \page Page_DevelopingWithLUFA Developing With LUFA

- *

- *  This section of the manual contains information on LUFA development, such as Getting Started information,

- *  information on compile-time tuning of the library and other developer-related sections.

- *

- *  <b>Subsections:</b>

- *  \li \subpage Page_BuildSystem - The LUFA Buildsystem

- *  \li \subpage Page_TokenSummary - Summary of Compile Time Tokens

- *  \li \subpage Page_Migration - Migrating from an Older LUFA Version

- *  \li \subpage Page_VIDPID - Allocated USB VID and PID Values

- *  \li \subpage Page_BuildLibrary - Building as a Linkable Library

- *  \li \subpage Page_ExportingLibrary - Exporting LUFA for IDE Use

- *  \li \subpage Page_WritingBoardDrivers - How to Write Custom Board Drivers

- *  \li \subpage Page_SoftwareBootloaderStart - How to jump to the bootloader in software

- */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/DeviceSupport.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/DeviceSupport.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 18e808f4d..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/DeviceSupport.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,432 +0,0 @@
-/** \file

- *

- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special

- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.

- */

-

-/**

- *  \page Page_DeviceSupport Device and Hardware Support

- *

- *  <b>Atmel Microcontrollers:</b>

- *  \li \subpage Page_AVR8Support - Atmel AVR8 Support

- *  \li \subpage Page_UC3Support - Atmel AVR32 UC3 Support

- *  \li \subpage Page_XMEGASupport - Atmel XMEGA Support

- */

- 

-/**

- *  \page Page_AVR8Support Atmel 8-Bit AVR (AVR8) Support

- *

- *  \section Sec_AVR8Support_Devices Supported Microcontroller Models

- *

- *  Currently supported AVR8 models:

- *

- *  <table>

- *  <tr>

- *   <th width="150px">Part</th>

- *   <th width="150px">USB Device Mode</th>

- *   <th width="150px">USB Host Mode</th>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT90USB82</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>ATMEGA8U2</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT90USB162</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>ATMEGA16U2</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>ATMEGA16U4</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>ATMEGA32U2</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>ATMEGA32U4</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>ATMEGA32U6</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT90USB646</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT90USB647</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT90USB1286</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT90USB1287</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section Sec_AVR8Support_Boards Supported Atmel Boards

- *  Currently supported Atmel AVR8 boards (see \ref Group_BoardTypes):

- *   - AT90USBKEY

- *   - ATAVRUSBRF01

- *   - EVK527

- *   - RZUSBSTICK

- *   - STK525

- *   - STK526

- *   - XPLAIN (Original green board, <i>not</i> the newer blue XPLAINED family boards)

- *

- *  \section Sec_AVR8Support_ThirdParty Supported Third Party Models

- *  Currently supported third-party boards (see \ref Group_BoardTypes for makefile \c BOARD constant names):

- *   - Adafruit U4 Breakout Board

- *   - Arduino Uno

- *   - Bitwizard Multio and Big-Multio

- *   - Busware BUI

- *   - Busware CUL V3

- *   - Busware TUL

- *   - DorkbotPDX Duce

- *   - Fletchtronics Bumble-B (using manufacturer recommended peripheral layout)

- *   - Kernel Concepts USBFOO

- *   - Linnix UDIP

- *   - MattairTech JM-DB-U2

- *   - Maximus USB

- *   - Micropendous Boards (Micropendous-32U2, Micropendous-1, Micropendous-2)

- *   - Microsin AVR-USB162

- *   - Minimus USB

- *   - Olimex AVR-USB-162

- *   - Olimex AVR-USB-32U4

- *   - Olimex AVR-USB-T32U4

- *   - Olimex AVR-ISP-MK2

- *   - Paranoid Studio's US2AX (V1, V2 and V3 hardware revisions)

- *   - PJRC Teensy (1.x and 2.x versions)

- *   - Sparkfun U2 Breakout Board

- *   - TCNISO Blackcat USB JTAG

- *   - Tempusdictum Benito

- *   - Tom's USBTINY-MKII (all revisions and versions)

- *   - Custom User Boards (with Board Drivers if desired, see \ref Page_WritingBoardDrivers)

- */

- 

-/**

- *  \page Page_UC3Support Atmel 32-Bit UC3 AVR (UC3)

- *

- *  \warning The AVR32 UC3 device support is currently <b>experimental</b>, and is included for preview purposes only.

- *

- *  \section Sec_UC3Support_Devices Supported Microcontroller Models

- *

- *  Currently supported UC3 models:

- *

- *  <table>

- *  <tr>

- *   <th width="150px">Part</th>

- *   <th width="150px">USB Device Mode</th>

- *   <th width="150px">USB Host Mode</th>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT32UC3A064</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT32UC3A164</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT32UC3A364</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT32UC3A364S</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT32UC3A464</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT32UC3A464S</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT32UC3B064</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT32UC3B164</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT32UC3A0128</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT32UC3A1128</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT32UC3A3128</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT32UC3A3128S</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT32UC3A4128</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT32UC3A4128S</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT32UC3B0128</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT32UC3B1128</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT32UC3A0256</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT32UC3A1256</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT32UC3A3256</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT32UC3A3256S</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT32UC3A4256</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT32UC3A4256S</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT32UC3B0256</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT32UC3B1256</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT32UC3A0512</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT32UC3A1512</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT32UC3B0512</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>AT32UC3B1512</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section Sec_UC3Support_Boards Supported Atmel Boards

- *

- *  Currently supported Atmel UC3 boards (see \ref Group_BoardTypes):

- *   - EVK1100

- *   - EVK1101

- *   - EVK1104

- *

- *  \section Sec_UC3Support_ThirdParty Supported Third Party Models

- *

- *  Currently supported third-party boards (see \ref Group_BoardTypes for makefile \c BOARD constant names):

- *   - Custom User Boards (with Board Drivers if desired, see \ref Page_WritingBoardDrivers)

- */

- 

-/**

- *  \page Page_XMEGASupport Atmel USB XMEGA AVR (XMEGA)

- *

- *  \warning The XMEGA device support is currently <b>experimental</b> (incomplete and/or non-functional), and is included for preview purposes only.

- *

- *  \section Sec_XMEGASupport_Devices Supported Microcontroller Models

- *

- *  Currently supported XMEGA models:

- *

- *  <table>

- *  <tr>

- *   <th width="150px">Part</th>

- *   <th width="150px">USB Device Mode</th>

- *   <th width="150px">USB Host Mode</th>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>ATXMEGA16A4U</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>ATXMEGA32A4U</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>ATXMEGA64A4U</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>ATXMEGA128A4U</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>ATXMEGA64A3U</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>ATXMEGA128A3U</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>ATXMEGA192A3U</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>ATXMEGA256A3U</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>ATXMEGA256A3BU</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>ATXMEGA128A1U</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>ATXMEGA64B3</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>ATXMEGA128B3</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>ATXMEGA64B1</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>ATXMEGA128B1</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>ATXMEGA64C3</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>ATXMEGA128C3</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>ATXMEGA192C3</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>ATXMEGA256C3</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>ATXMEGA384C3</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>ATXMEGA16C4</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>ATXMEGA32C4</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section Sec_XMEGASupport_Boards Supported Atmel Boards

- *  Currently supported Atmel XMEGA boards (see \ref Group_BoardTypes):

- *   - XMEGA A3BU Xplained

- *   - XMEGA B1 Xplained

- *

- *  \section Sec_XMEGASupport_ThirdParty Supported Third Party Models

- *  Currently supported third-party boards (see \ref Group_BoardTypes for makefile \c BOARD constant names):

- *   - Custom User Boards (with Board Drivers if desired, see \ref Page_WritingBoardDrivers)

- */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/DirectorySummaries.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/DirectorySummaries.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index b04224677..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/DirectorySummaries.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,80 +0,0 @@
-/** \file

- *

- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special

- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.

- */

-

-/** \dir Platform

- *  \brief Platform specific drivers.

- *

- *  This folder contains platform specific drivers and defines for various supported architectures. These may or may

- *  not be used in a LUFA application, and are provided for convenience purposes.

- *

- *  \dir Drivers

- *  \brief Library hardware and software drivers.

- *

- *  This folder contains all the library hardware and software drivers for each supported board, architecture and

- *  microcontroller model.

- *

- *  \dir Drivers/Misc

- *  \brief Miscellaneous driver files.

- *

- *  This folder contains drivers for aspects other than the USB interface, board hardware or microcontroller peripherals.

- *

- *  \dir Drivers/Peripheral

- *  \brief Microcontroller peripheral driver files.

- *

- *  This folder contains drivers for various low level microcontroller peripherals, usually located on the microcontroller

- *  die within the same physical chip.

- *

- *  \dir Drivers/USB

- *  \brief USB controller peripheral driver files.

- *

- *  This folder contains the complete LUFA USB stack and controller files, including the core driver and stack, as well

- *  as the USB class driver implementations.

- *

- *  \dir Drivers/USB/Core

- *  \brief Core USB driver files.

- *

- *  This folder contains the core USB stack and controller driver files, to correctly implement USB functionality on the

- *  target architecture and microcontroller model. This

- *

- *  \dir Drivers/USB/Class

- *  \brief USB Class helper driver files.

- *

- *  This folder contains drivers for implementing functionality of standardized USB classes. These are not used directly by the library,

- *  but provide a standard and library-maintained way of implementing functionality from some of the defined USB classes without extensive

- *  development effort. Is is recommended that these drivers be used where possible to reduce maintenance of user applications.

- *

- *  \dir Drivers/USB/Class/Device

- *  \brief USB Device Class helper driver files.

- *

- *  Device mode drivers for the standard USB classes.

- *

- *  \dir Drivers/USB/Class/Host

- *  \brief USB Host Class helper driver files.

- *

- *  Host mode drivers for the standard USB classes.

- *

- *  \dir Drivers/Board

- *  \brief Board hardware driver files.

- *

- *  This folder contains drivers for interfacing with the physical hardware on supported commercial boards, primarily from

- *  the Atmel corporation. Header files in this folder should be included in user applications requiring the functionality of

- *  hardware placed on supported boards.

- *

- *  \dir CodeTemplates

- *  \brief Code templates for use in LUFA powered applications.

- *

- *  This contains code templates for board drivers, sample LUFA project makefiles and other similar templates that can be copied into

- *  a LUFA powered application and modified to speed up development.

- *

- *  \dir CodeTemplates/DriverStubs

- *  \brief Driver stub header files for custom boards, to allow the LUFA board drivers to operate.

- *

- *  This contains stub files for the LUFA board drivers. If the LUFA board drivers are used with board hardware other than those

- *  directly supported by the library, the BOARD parameter of the application's makefile can be set to "USER", and these stub files

- *  copied to the "/Board/" directory of the application's folder. When fleshed out with working driver code for the custom board,

- *  the corresponding LUFA board APIs will work correctly with the non-standard board hardware.

- */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Donating.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Donating.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 7e947c2a2..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Donating.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-/** \file

- *

- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special

- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.

- */

-

-/**

- *  \page Page_Donating Donating to Support This Project

- *

- *  \image html Images/Author.jpg "Dean Camera, LUFA Developer"

- *

- *  I am a 23 year old Atmel Applications Engineer, living in Trondheim, Norway and working on LUFA in my spare time.

- *  The development and support of this library requires much effort from myself, as I am the sole developer, maintainer

- *  and supporter. Please consider donating a small amount to support this and my future Open Source projects - All

- *  donations are <i>greatly</i> appreciated.

- *

- *  Note that commercial entities can remove the attribution portion of the LUFA license by a one-time fee - see

- *  \ref Page_LicenseInfo for more details (<b>Note: Please do NOT pay this in advance through the donation link below -

- *  contact author for payment details.</b>).

- *

- *  \image html "http://www.pledgie.com/campaigns/6927.png?skin_name=chrome"

- *  <a href='http://www.lufa-lib.org/donate'>Donate to this project via PayPal</a> - Thanks in Advance!

- */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/ExportingLibrary.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/ExportingLibrary.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 65d7fc923..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/ExportingLibrary.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,106 +0,0 @@
-/** \file

- *

- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special

- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.

- */

-

-/** \page Page_ExportingLibrary Exporting the Library for IDE Use

- *

- *  While LUFA was designed to allow for easy compilation in a makefile driven environment,

- *  it is possible to export the library into a form suitable for drop-in use inside of an

- *  IDE.

- *

- *  \section Sec_LibraryExport Exporting the Library

- *  An export of the library is at its most basic, a direct copy of the main "LUFA" source folder from the

- *  root download folder; this contains the library core which can be re-used within external projects.

- *  However, as many IDEs attempt to automatically compile all included source files, it is neccesary to

- *  exclude some directories and files from the library core export to allow for easier integration into

- *  an IDE project.

- *

- *  \subsection SSec_ManualExport Manual Export

- *  To manually export the library core, copy over the main LUFA library folder from the LUFA root directory,

- *  renaming as desired. Within the library core folder, the following directories should be removed or

- *  excluded from your IDE import:

- *   - Documentation/

- *   - DoxygenPages/

- *   - CodeTemplates/

- *

- *  If required, files from the CodeTemplates/ subdirectory may be copied to your IDE project as needed.

- *

- *  The resulting copy of the library may then be imported into your chosen IDE according to the instructions

- *  shown in \ref Sec_LibraryImport.

- *

- *  \subsection SSec_AutomaticExport Automatic Export

- *  If desired, the steps indicated in \ref SSec_ManualExport may be automatically performed, by running the

- *  command <b><code>make export_tar</code></b> from the command line. This will generate two .tar files in the

- *  current directory, named <code>LUFA_YYMMDD.tar</code> and <code>LUFA_YYMMDD_Code_Templates.tar</code> (where

- *  "YYMMDD" is the version of the library being exported). The first archive contains the exported LUFA core

- *  with the non-required files removed, while the second contains an archived copy of the code template files 

- *  for the current LUFA version.

- *

- *  The resulting archived copy of the library may then be extracted to your chosen IDE project source directory

- *  and imported according to the instructions shown in \ref Sec_LibraryImport.

- *

- *  \section Sec_LibraryImport Importing the Library

- *  An exported copy of the library may be imported wholesale into an IDE project, if the instructions detailed

- *  in \ref Sec_LibraryExport are followed.

- *

- *  Specific instructions for importing an exported version of LUFA into various IDEs are listed below.

- *

- *  \subsection SSec_AS56_Import Importing into AVRStudio 5/Atmel Studio 6

- *  To import LUFA into a new or existing project, the following steps must be followed.

- *

- *  \subsubsection SSSec_AS56_Import_Step1 Copy over the exported library

- *  Copy over the exported library archive created via the steps listed in \ref Sec_LibraryExport to your AS5/AS6

- *  project directory.

- *

- *  \image html Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step1.png

- *

- *  \subsubsection SSSec_AS56_Import_Step2 Extract exported library

- *  Extract out the contents of the archive to a new folder. This may be any name you wish, however keep in mind

- *  that this name will need to be referenced within your user application under most circumstances. It is

- *  suggested that this folder be named "LUFA", or "LUFA" followed by the version string for easy reference.

- *

- *  \image html Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step2.png

- *

- *  \subsubsection SSSec_AS56_Import_Step3 Add the library files

- *  Open your AVRStudio 5/Atmel Studio 6 project. From the "Solution Explorer" pane, click the "Show All Files"

- *  button on the toolbar to display ghosted icons of files and folders located in the project source directory

- *  that are not currently added to the project.

- *

- *  \image html Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step3.png

- *

- *  Right-click the ghosted version of the extracted LUFA export folder in the Solution Explorer pane, and

- *  choose the "Add to Project" option from the context menu. This will add the entire LUFA source tree to the

- *  current project.

- *

- *  \subsubsection SSSec_AS56_Import_Step4 Open Project Toolchain Properties

- *  In the Solution Explorer pane, click the project node, and press the "Properties" button in the toolbar to

- *  open the Project Properties window. This window allows you to configure the various project global compiler,

- *  assembler and linker options.

- *

- *  \image html Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step4.png

- * 

- *  Click the "Toolchain" tab on the left side of the Project Properties window.

- *

- *  \subsubsection SSSec_AS56_Import_Step5 Configure Project Toolchain Properties

- *

- *  In the GNU C Compiler section, open the "Symbols" page. Click the "Add Item" button to the top-right of the

- *  "Defined Symbols" section to add new symbols.

- *

- *  At a minimum, you will need to define the following symbols (for more information on these symbols, see

- *  \ref Page_ConfiguringApps):

- *   - ARCH

- *   - F_CPU

- *   - F_USB

- *   - BOARD

- *  \image html Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step5_1.png

- *

- *  Next, open the GNU C Compiler section's "Optimization" page. Ensure that the option to prepare functions for

- *  garbage collection is enabled.

- *  \image html Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step5_2.png

- *

- *  Finally, in the GNU C Linker section, open the "Optimization" page. Ensure that the option to garbage collect

- *  unused sections is selected.

- *  \image html Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step5_3.png

- */

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/FutureChanges.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/FutureChanges.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 9660a473a..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/FutureChanges.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,49 +0,0 @@
-/** \file

- *

- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special

- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.

- */

-

- /** \page Page_FutureChanges Future Changes

-  *

-  *  Below is a list of future changes which are proposed for the LUFA library, but not yet started/complete.

-  *  This gives an unordered list of future changes which may be available in future releases of the library.

-  *  If you have an item to add to this list, please contact the library author via email, the LUFA mailing list,

-  *  or post your suggestion as an enhancement request to the project bug tracker.

-  *

-  *  <b>Targeted for Future Releases:</b>

-  *  - Code Features

-  *      -# Add hub support when in Host mode for multiple devices

-  *      -# Investigate virtual hubs when in device mode instead of composite devices

-  *      -# Re-add interrupt Pipe/Endpoint support

-  *      -# Update stream APIs to use DMA transfers on supported architectures

-  *      -# Pull out third party libraries into a separate folder and reference them as required

-  *      -# Add a LUFA_YIELD macro for integration into a third-party RTOS

-  *      -# Abstract out Mass Storage byte send/receive to prevent low level API use in projects

-  *      -# Fix HID report parser usage support for array types

-  *      -# Make HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS a global variable that can be changed

-  *      -# Add MANDATORY_EVENT_FUNCTIONS compile time option

-  *      -# Add watchdog support to the library and apps/bootloaders

-  *  - Testing/Verification

-  *      -# Re-run USBIF test suite on all classes to formally verify operation

-  *      -# Implement automated functional testing of all demos

-  *  - Documentation/Support

-  *      -# Add detailed overviews of how each demo works

-  *      -# Add board overviews

-  *      -# Write LUFA tutorials

-  *  - Demos/Projects

-  *      -# Device/Host USB bridge

-  *      -# Finish incomplete demos and projects

-  *      -# Add class driver support for Test and Measurement class

-  *      -# Add class driver support for EEM class

-  *      -# Add class driver support for ECM class

-  *      -# Add class driver generic HID report host demo

-  *      -# Implement flow control for USB to Serial project

-  *  - Ports

-  *      -# Port all demos to multiple architectures

-  *      -# Finish USB XMEGA port

-  *      -# Add AVR32 UC3C, UC3D and UC3L support

-  *      -# Atmel ARM7 series microcontrollers

-  *      -# Other (commercial) C compilers

-  */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/GettingStarted.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/GettingStarted.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index b62a7cae1..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/GettingStarted.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-/** \file

- *

- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special

- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.

- */

-

-/** \page Page_GettingStarted Getting Started

- *

- *  Out of the box, LUFA contains a large number of pre-made class demos for you to test, experiment with and

- *  ultimately build upon for your own projects. All the demos (where possible) come pre-configured to build and

- *  run correctly on the AT90USB1287 AVR microcontroller, mounted on the Atmel USBKEY board and running at an 8MHz

- *  master clock. This is due to two reasons; one, it is the hardware the author possesses, and two, it is the most

- *  popular Atmel USB demonstration board to date. To learn how to reconfigure, recompile and program the included

- *  LUFA applications using different settings, see the subsections below.

- *

- *  Most of the included demos in the /Demos/ folder come in both ClassDriver and LowLevel varieties. If you are new

- *  to LUFA, it is highly recommended that you look at the ClassDriver versions first, which use the pre-made USB

- *  Class Drivers (\ref Group_USBClassDrivers) to simplify the use of the standard USB classes in user applications.

- *

- *  <b>Subsections:</b>

- *  \li \subpage Page_ConfiguringApps - How to Configure the Included Demos, Projects and Bootloaders

- *  \li \subpage Page_CompilingApps - How to Compile the Included Demos, Projects and Bootloaders

- *  \li \subpage Page_ProgrammingApps - How to Program an AVR with the Included Demos, Projects and Bootloaders

- */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Groups.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Groups.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 3a3509d3f..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Groups.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
-/** \file

- *

- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special

- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.

- */

-

-/** \defgroup Group_BoardDrivers Board Drivers

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to the control of physical board hardware.

- */

-

-/** \defgroup Group_PeripheralDrivers On-chip Peripheral Drivers

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to the control of AVR subsystems.

- */

-

-/** \defgroup Group_MiscDrivers Miscellaneous Drivers

- *

- *  Miscellaneous driver Functions, macros, variables, enums and types.

- */

-

-/** \defgroup Group_PlatformDrivers_AVR8 AVR8

- *  \ingroup Group_PlatformDrivers

- *

- *  Drivers relating to the AVR8 architecture platform, such as clock setup and interrupt management.

- */

-

-/** \defgroup Group_PlatformDrivers_XMEGA XMEGA

- *  \ingroup Group_PlatformDrivers

- *

- *  Drivers relating to the XMEGA architecture platform, such as clock setup and interrupt management.

- */

-

-/** \defgroup Group_PlatformDrivers_UC3 UC3

- *  \ingroup Group_PlatformDrivers

- *

- *  Drivers relating to the UC3 architecture platform, such as clock setup and interrupt management.

- */

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/KnownIssues.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/KnownIssues.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 0d63a03d0..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/KnownIssues.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
-/** \file

- *

- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special

- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.

- */

-

- /** \page Page_KnownIssues Known Issues

-  *  The following are known issues present in each official LUFA release. This list should contain all known

-  *  issues in the library. Most of these issues should be corrected in the future release - see

-  *  \ref Page_FutureChanges for a list of planned changes in future releases.

-  *

-  *  \section Sec_KnownIssues120730 Version 120730

-  *  - AVR8 Architecture

-  *    - No known issues.

-  *  - UC3 Architecture

-  *    \warning The UC3 device support is currently <b>experimental</b> (incomplete and/or non-functional), and is included for preview purposes only. \n

-  *

-  *    - No demos, bootloaders or projects have been ported for the UC3 devices in the current release,

-  *      although the architecture is supported in the LUFA core library.

-  *    - DMA transfers to and from the USB controller are not yet implemented for this release.

-  *    - The UC3C, UC3D and UC3L sub-families of UC3 are not currently supported by the library due to their

-  *      altered USB controller design.

-  *    - The various \c CreateStream() functions for creating standard \c <stdio.h> compatible virtual file

-  *      streams are not available on the UC3 architecture, due to a lack of suitable library support.

-  *  - XMEGA Architecture

-  *    \warning The XMEGA device support is currently <b>experimental</b> (incomplete and/or non-functional), and is included for preview purposes only.

-  *

-  *    - No demos, bootloaders or projects have been ported for the XMEGA devices in the current release,

-  *      although the architecture is supported in the LUFA core library.

-  *    - Endpoints of more than 64 bytes are not currently supported in this release.

-  *    - Isochronous endpoints are not currently supported in this release. As a result, the audio class

-  *      cannot be used on XMEGA devices.

-  *    - Multiple-bank endpoints are not currently supported in this release.

-  *    - Early revisions of the ATXMEGA128A1U are incompatible with LUFA, due to their various errata

-  *      relating to the USB controller.

-  *  - Architecture Independent

-  *    - The HID parser fails for array type elements that have a MIN and MAX usage applied; each element

-  *      in the array will receive a unique incrementing usage from the MIN value, up to MAX.

-  *    - The LUFA library is not watchdog aware, and thus timeouts are possible if short periods are used

-  *      and a lengthy USB operation is initiated.

-  *  - Build System

-  *    - No known issues.

-  */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/LUFAPoweredProjects.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/LUFAPoweredProjects.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index c3bf3db9d..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/LUFAPoweredProjects.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,181 +0,0 @@
-/** \file

- *

- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special

- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.

- */

-

-/** \page Page_LUFAPoweredProjects User Projects Powered by LUFA

- *

- *  LUFA is currently in use all around the world, in many applications both commercial and non-commercial. Below is a

- *  list of known public LUFA powered projects, which all use the LUFA library in some way. Feel free to visit each project's

- *  home page for more information on each project.

- *

- *  If you have a project that you would like to add to this list, please contact me via the details on the main page of this

- *  documentation.

- *

- *  \section Sec_BoardsUsingLUFA AVR-USB Development Boards Using LUFA

- *

- *  The following is a list of known AVR USB development boards, which recommend using LUFA for the USB stack. Some of these

- *  are open design, and all are available for purchase as completed development boards suitable for project development.

- *

- *  \li AVR-USB-162, a USBKEY-like development board for the AT90USB162: http://olimex.com/dev/avr-usb-162.html

- *  \li Benito #7, a no-frills USB board: http://www.dorkbotpdx.org/wiki/benito

- *  \li Duce, the sucessor to the Benito #7: http://dorkbotpdx.org/wiki/duce

- *  \li JM-DB-U2, an ATMEGA32U2 development board: http://u2.mattair.net/index.html

- *  \li Micropendous, an open design/source set of AVR USB development boards: http://micropendous.org/

- *  \li Microsin AVR-USB162 breakout board, a DIY AT90USB162 development board: http://microsin.ru/content/view/685/44/

- *  \li Minimus USB, a board specially designed for PSGroove: http://www.minimususb.com/

- *  \li Nanduino, a do-it-yourself AT90USB162 board: http://www.makestuff.eu/wordpress/?page_id=569

- *  \li Sparkfun ATMEGA8U2 breakout board: http://www.sparkfun.com/products/10277

- *  \li Teensy and Teensy++, two other AVR USB development boards: http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/index.html

- *  \li U2DIL/U4DIL, a set of DIP layout USB AVR boards: http://www.reworld.eu/re/en/products/u2dil/

- *  \li USB2AX, a tiny USB to serial converter board: http://paranoidstudio.assembla.com/wiki/show/paranoidstudio/USB2AX

- *  \li USBFOO 2, AT90USB162 based development board: http://shop.kernelconcepts.de/product_info.php?products_id=102

- *

- *  \section Sec_LUFAProjects Projects Using LUFA (Hobbyist)

- *

- *  The following are known hobbyist projects using LUFA. Most are open source, and show off interesting ways that the LUFA library

- *  can be incorporated into many different applications.

- *

- *  \li Accelerometer Game Joystick: http://www.crictor.co.il/he/episodes/joystick/

- *  \li Arcade Controller: http://fletchtronics.net/arcade-controller-made-petunia

- *  \li Arcade Joystick: http://jamie.lentin.co.uk/embedded/arcade-joystick/

- *  \li AttoBasic AVR BASIC interpreter: http://www.cappels.org/dproj/AttoBasic2_1/AttoBasic_2.1_with_USB_and_Arduino_support.html

- *  \li AVR USB Modem, a 3G Wireless Modem host: http://code.google.com/p/avrusbmodem/

- *  \li Bicycle POV: http://www.code.google.com/p/bicycleledpov/

- *  \li Bluetooth Explorerbot: http://code.google.com/p/bluetooth-explorerbot/

- *  \li Bus Ninja, an AVR clone of the popular BusPirate project: http://blog.hodgepig.org/busninja/

- *  \li CAMTRIG, a remote Camera Trigger device: http://code.astraw.com/projects/motmot/camtrig

- *  \li CD Driver Emulator Dongle for ISO Files: http://cdemu.blogspot.com/

- *  \li ClockTamer, a configurable clock generator: http://code.google.com/p/clock-tamer/

- *  \li Collection of alternative Arduino Uno firmwares: http://hunt.net.nz/users/darran/

- *  \li Computer controlled LED matrix (Russian): http://we.easyelectronics.ru/AVR/nebolshoy-primer-s-lufa-hidapi.html

- *  \li CULFW, a 868MHz RF packet encoder/decoder: http://www.koeniglich.de/culfw/culfw.html

- *  \li Dashkey, a custom PC keyboard controller: http://geekhack.org/showwiki.php?title=Island:19096

- *  \li DIY PS3 controller emulator: https://code.google.com/p/diyps3controller/

- *  \li EMuSer, a USB-RS422 adapter for E-Mu samplers: http://www.emxp.net/EMuSer.htm

- *  \li Estick JTAG, an ARM JTAG debugger: http://code.google.com/p/estick-jtag/

- *  \li "Fingerlicking Wingdinger" (WARNING: Bad language if no Javascript), a MIDI controller: http://noisybox.net/electronics/wingdinger/

- *  \li Flyatar, a real-time fly tracking system: https://github.com/peterpolidoro/Flyatar

- *  \li FootJoy, a 22 button, 6-axis josystick with keyboard and mouse modes: https://bitbucket.org/sirbrialliance/foot-joy/

- *  \li Gamecube controller to USB adapter: https://www.facebook.com/media/set/?set=a.10150202447076304.310536.688776303&l=df53851c50 

- *  \li Garmin GPS USB to NMEA standard serial sentence translator: http://github.com/nall/garmin-transmogrifier/tree/master

- *  \li Generic HID Device Creator: http://generichid.sourceforge.net/

- *  \li Generic HID Open Source Framework: http://www.waitingforfriday.com/index.php/USB_Generic_HID_Open_Source_Framework_for_Atmel_AVR_and_Windows

- *  \li Ghetto Drum, a MIDI drum controller: http://noisybox.net/art/gdrum/

- *  \li GPS enabled lap timer for vehicles: http://www.assembla.com/code/ironlung/subversion/nodes/trunk/LapTimer

- *  \li Hardware Volume Control: https://github.com/davidk/hw-volume-control

- *  \li Hiduino, a USB-MIDI replacement firmware for the Arduino Uno: http://code.google.com/p/hiduino/

- *  \li Ikea RGB LED USB modification: http://slashhome.se/p/projects/id/ikea_dioder_usb/#project

- *  \li IR Remote to Keyboard decoder: http://netzhansa.blogspot.com/2010/04/our-living-room-hi-fi-setup-needs-mp3.html

- *  \li Jukebox panic button: http://thinkl33t.co.uk/the-panic-button

- *  \li LED Panel controller: http://projects.peterpolidoro.net/caltech/panelscontroller/panelscontroller.htm

- *  \li Linux Secure Storage Dongle: http://github.com/TomMD/teensy

- *  \li LUFA powered DDR dance mat (French): http://logicien-parfait.fr/dokuwiki/doku.php?id=projet:ddr_repair

- *  \li MakeTV Episode Dispenser: http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BkWUi18hl3g

- *  \li MidiMonster, a USB-to-MIDI gateway board: http://www.dorkbotpdx.org/wiki/midimonster

- *  \li MIDI Theremin: http://baldwisdom.com/usb-midi-controller-theremin-style-on-arduino-uno/

- *  \li MIDI interface hack of a toy Guitar: http://blog.x37v.info/2011/06/26/toy-guitar-hacked-midi-conroller

- *  \li MiniBloq, a graphical Ardunio programming environment : http://minibloq.org/

- *  \li MiXley, a port of the Teacup 3D printer firmware for the USB AVRs: http://codaset.com/michielh/mixley

- *  \li Mobo 4.3, a USB controlled all band (160-10m) HF SDR transceiver: http://sites.google.com/site/lofturj/mobo4_3

- *  \li Moco, a native Arduino Uno MIDI replacement firmware: http://web.mac.com/kuwatay/morecat_lab./MocoLUFA.html

- *  \li Motherboard BIOS flasher: http://www.coreboot.org/InSystemFlasher

- *  \li Multi-button Joystick (French): http://logicien-parfait.fr/dokuwiki/doku.php?id=projet:joystick

- *  \li Music Playing Alarm Clock (Tutorial): http://www.instructables.com/id/Music-Playing-Alarm-Clock/

- *  \li Nehebkau, Laptop Controlled Keyboard and Mouse: http://www.frank-zhao.com/cache/nehebkau.php

- *  \li NeroJTAG, a JTAG dongle: https://github.com/makestuff/neroJtag

- *  \li NES Controller USB modification: http://projects.peterpolidoro.net/video/NESUSB.htm

- *  \li Nikon wireless camera remote control (Norwegian): http://hekta.org/~hpe1119/

- *  \li Opendous-JTAG, an open source ARM JTAG debugger: http://code.google.com/p/opendous-jtag/

- *  \li Openkubus, an open source hardware-based authentication dongle: http://code.google.com/p/openkubus/

- *  \li Orbee, a USB connected RGB Orb for notifications: http://www.franksworkshop.com.au/Electronics/Orbee/Orbee.htm

- *  \li PPM signal generator over USB: https://github.com/G33KatWork/USBPPM

- *  \li Programmable keyboard controller: http://41j.com/blog/2011/10/a-programmable-keyboard-controller/

- *  \li Programmable XBOX controller: http://richard-burke.dyndns.org/wordpress/pan-galactic-gargantuan-gargle-brain-aka-xbox-360-usb-controller/

- *  \li PSGroove, a Playstation 3 Homebrew dongle: http://github.com/psgroove

- *  \li PS/2 to USB adapter: https://github.com/makestuff/p2ukbd

- *  \li Reprap with LUFA, a LUFA powered 3D printer: http://code.google.com/p/at90usb1287-code-for-arduino-and-eclipse/

- *  \li RFPirate, a RF experimentation platform: https://github.com/ebuller/RF-Pirate

- *  \li RF Transciever using the MRF49XA: http://alternet.us.com/?page_id=1494

- *  \li SD Card reader: http://elasticsheep.com/2010/04/teensy2-usb-mass-storage-with-an-sd-card/

- *  \li SDR1, a Software Defined Radio firmware: https://code.google.com/p/sdr-mk1/

- *  \li SEGA Megadrive/Genesis Development Cartridge: http://www.makestuff.eu/wordpress/?page_id=398

- *  \li Serial Line bus analyser: http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/projects/SerialAnalyzer.html

- *  \li SNES custom FLASH ROM: http://electrifiedfoolingmachine.co/?page_id=633

- *  \li Smartcard Detective: https://code.google.com/p/smartcarddetective/

- *  \li SmartportVHD Apple II Mass Storage adapter: http://pcedric3.free.fr/SmartportVHD/

- *  \li Single LED Matrix Display: http://guysoft.wordpress.com/2009/10/08/bumble-b/

- *  \li Simple USB LED Controller: https://github.com/scottbez1/sulc

- *  \li Stripe Snoop, a Magnetic Card reader: http://www.ossguy.com/ss_usb/

- *  \li Stylophone, with USB MIDI connectivity: http://www.waitingforfriday.com/index.php/Stylophone_Studio_5

- *  \li Teensy SD Card .WAV file player: http://elasticsheep.com/2010/04/teensy2-usb-wav-player-part-1/

- *  \li Touchscreen Input Device: http://capnstech.blogspot.com/2010/07/touchscreen-update.html

- *  \li UDFS, a BBC Micro USB disk filing system: https://github.com/makestuff/udfs

- *  \li Universal USB AVR Module: http://usbavr.bplaced.net/

- *  \li USB2AX, a USB to Dynamixel network adapter: http://paranoidstudio.assembla.com/wiki/show/paranoidstudio/USB2AX

- *  \li USB Infrared Receiver/Transmitter: http://vaton4.web2001.cz/

- *  \li USB Interface for Playstation Portable Devices: http://forums.ps2dev.org/viewtopic.php?t=11001

- *  \li USB MIDI to DMX controller: http://github.com/hanshuebner/miDiMX

- *  \li USB powered Geiger Counter: http://uhrheber.wordpress.com/2011/04/28/a-usb-powered-geiger-counter-for-the-z2-and-other-computers/

- *  \li Userial, a USB to Serial converter with SPI, I2C and other protocols: http://www.tty1.net/userial/

- *  \li Wireless MIDI Guitar system: http://www.ise.pw.edu.pl/~wzab/wireless_guitar_system/

- *  \li Xnormidi, a C MIDI library: http://x37v.info/projects/xnormidi

- *  \li XUM1541, a Commodore 64 floppy drive to USB adapter: http://www.root.org/~nate/c64/xum1541/

- *  \li Zeus, a touch screen computer for music manipulation: http://www.benbengler.com/developments_zeus.html

- *

- *  \section Sec_LUFACommercialProjects Projects Using LUFA (Commercial)

- *

- *  The following is a list of known commercial products using LUFA. Some of these are open source, although many are "black-box"

- *  solutions with no source code given. Those companies which have purchased a Commercial License to LUFA (see \ref Page_LicenseInfo)

- *  are not listed here unless specifically requested.

- *

- *  \li Arduino Uno, the official Arduino board: http://www.arduino.cc

- *  \li ARPS Locator: http://la3t.hamradio.no/lab//?id=tracker_en

- *  \li AsTeRICS assistive technologies project, HID actuator: http://www.asterics.eu

- *  \li Ceberus, a MadCatz Xbox 360 arcade stick modifier: http://www.phreakmods.com/products/cerberus

- *  \li CFFA3000, a CompactFlash interface for the Apple II: http://www.dreher.net/CFforAppleII

- *  \li Digital Survey Instruments Magnetometer and Pointer: http://www.digitalsurveyinstruments.com/

- *  \li FinchRobot, a robot designed for educational use: http://www.finchrobot.com/

- *  \li HummingBird Kit, a robotics learning platform: http://www.hummingbirdkit.com/

- *  \li Penguino, an Arduino Board With On-Board LUFA Powered Debugger/Programmer: http://wiki.icy.com.au/PenguinoAVR

- *  \li PIR-1, an IR control interface for consumer electronics: http://www.promixis.com/pir-1.php

- *  \li PIR-4, a USB Connected 4 port IR transmitter: http://promixis.com/pir-4.php

- *  \li KeyGlove, an alternative input system: http://www.keyglove.net/

- *  \li Many of Busware's Products: http://www.busware.de/

- *  \li MIDIFighter, a USB-MIDI controller: http://www.midifighter.com/

- *  \li Norduino, a wireless Arduino: http://norduino.robomotic.com/norduino-is-now-usb-hid/

- *  \li Olimex AVR-ISP-MK2, an AVRISP-MKII Clone AVR Programmer: https://www.olimex.com/dev/avr-isp-mk2.html

- *  \li Retrode, a USB Games Console Cartridge Reader: http://www.retrode.org

- *  \li RFI21.1EU UHF RFID reader: http://www.metra.cz/rfid/uhf-rfid-ctecky/rfi21-1eu-uhf-rfid-ctecka.htm

- *  \li SmartCardDetective, a Smart Card analysis tool: http://www.smartcarddetective.com/

- *  \li USBTINY-MKII, an AVRISP-MKII Clone AVR Programmer: http://tom-itx.dyndns.org:81/~webpage/boards/USBTiny_Mkii/USBTiny_Mkii_index.php

- *  \li UDS18B20 USB Temperature sensor: http://toughlog.org/uds18b20/

- *  \li VMeter, a USB MIDI touch strip controller: http://www.vmeter.net/

- *  \li XMEGA Development Board, using LUFA as an On-Board Programmer: http://xmega.mattair.net/

- *  \li Zeptoprog, a multifunction AVR programmer: http://www.mattairtech.com/index.php/featured/zeptoprog.html

- *

- *  \section Sec_LUFAPublications Publications Mentioning LUFA

- *  The following are published magazines which have either mentioned or featured the LUFA library.

- *

- *  \li Elektor Magazine, "My First AVR-USB" by Antoine Authier (feature), January 2010 Issue

- *  \li Elektor Magazine, "USB is Cool/Sucks" by Jerry Jacobs and Chris Vossen (minor mention), January 2010 Issue

- *  \li Elektor Magazine, "20 x Open Source" by Jens Nickel, March 2010 Issue

- *  \li Circuit Cellar Magazine, "Advanced USB Design Debugging" by Collin O'Flynn, August 2010 Issue

- *

- *  \section Sec_LUFANotableMentions Other Notable Mentions of LUFA

- *  The following are non-magazine but notable mentions of the LUFA library.

- *

- *  \li Adafruit "Ask an Engineer", 7th November 2010

- *  \li Arduino 2010 Keynote speech

- *  \li The Amp Hour podcast blog #11

- *  \li Blackhat 2011 conference, "Exploiting USB Devices with Arduino"

- *

- *  \section Sec_PortsAndForks Non-Official LUFA Ports and Forks

- *  The following are unofficial forks of the LUFA codebase, which implement different features such as support for

- *  additional architectures.

- *

- *  \li NXP's official "nxpusblib" LUFA fork, for LPC devices: http://www.lpcware.com/content/project/nxpusblib

- *  \li Kevin Mehall's LUFA port to the NXP LPC13xx: https://github.com/kevinmehall/LUFA-LPC13xx

- *

- */

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/LibraryResources.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/LibraryResources.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index a85d59c16..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/LibraryResources.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
-/** \file

- *

- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special

- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.

- */

-

-/**

- *  \page Page_Resources Library Resources

- *

- *  \section Sec_UnofficialResources Unofficial Resources

- *  Unofficial Russian LUFA documentation translation: http://microsin.ru/Download.cnt/doc/LUFA/ \n

- *  Tutorial for LUFA USB Control Transfers: http://www.avrbeginners.net/new/tutorials/usb-control-transfers-with-lufa/

- *

- *  \section Sec_ProjectPages LUFA Related Webpages

- *  Project Homepage: http://www.lufa-lib.org \n

- *  Commercial Licenses: http://www.lufa-lib.org/license \n

- *  Author's Website: http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com \n

- *  Development Blog: http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com/blog \n

- *

- *  \section Sec_ProjectHelp Assistance With LUFA

- *  Support Mailing List: http://www.lufa-lib.org/support \n

- *  Author's Email: dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com \n

- *

- *  \section Sec_InDevelopment Latest In-Development Source Code

- *  Issue Tracker: http://www.lufa-lib.org/tracker \n

- *  Public SVN Repository: http://www.lufa-lib.org/svn \n

- *  Public GIT Repository: http://www.lufa-lib.org/git \n

- *  Latest Repository Source Archive: http://www.lufa-lib.org/latest-archive \n

- *  Commit RSS Feed: http://www.lufa-lib.org/rss \n

- *

- *  \section Sec_USBResources USB Resources

- *  USB-IF Website: http://www.usb.org \n

- */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/LicenseInfo.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/LicenseInfo.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 091ce9431..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/LicenseInfo.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-/** \file

- *

- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special

- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.

- */

-

-/**

- *  \page Page_LicenseInfo Source Code License

- *

- *  The LUFA library is currently released under the MIT license, included below.

- *

- *  Commercial entities can opt out of the public disclosure clause in this license

- *  for a one-time US$1500 payment. This provides a non-exclusive modified MIT licensed which

- *  allows for the free use of the LUFA library, bootloaders and (where the sole copyright

- *  is attributed to Dean Camera) demos without public disclosure within an organization, in

- *  addition to three free hours of consultation with the library author, and priority support.

- *  Please visit the Commercial License link on \ref Page_Resources for more information on

- *  ordering a commercial license for your company.

- *

- *  \verbinclude License.txt

- */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/MainPage.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/MainPage.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index ce351ad3e..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/MainPage.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,52 +0,0 @@
-/** \file

- *

- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special

- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.

- */

-

-/**

- *  \mainpage

- *

- *  \image html Images/LUFA.png

- *  <div align="center"><small><i>Logo design by <a href="http://www.studiomonsoon.com">Studio Monsoon Photography</a></i></small></div>

- *  \n

- *  <div align="center"><a href="http://www.lufa-lib.org">http://www.lufa-lib.org</a></div>

- *  \n

- *

- *  <b>LUFA is donationware. For author and donation information, see \ref Page_Donating.</b>

- *

- *  LUFA is an open-source USB library for the USB-enabled AVR microcontrollers, released under the MIT license (see \ref Page_LicenseInfo).

- *  It supports a large number of USB AVR models and boards (see \ref Page_DeviceSupport). It is designed to provide an easy to use,

- *  feature rich framework for the development of USB peripherals and hosts.

- *

- *  LUFA focuses on the microcontroller side of USB development only; it includes no PC host USB driver development facilities - other projects

- *  such as the Windows Driver Development Kit, Windows USB Device Mode Framework and libusb may be of interest for developing custom OS drivers.

- *  While custom USB devices can be made with LUFA using such tools, the included demos all use the inbuilt OS drivers for each USB class for

- *  simplicity.

- *

- *  The library is currently in a stable release, suitable for download and incorporation into user projects for

- *  both host and device modes. For information about the project progression, see the blog link at \ref Page_Resources.

- *

- *  LUFA is written specifically for the free AVR-GCC compiler, and uses several GCC-only extensions to make the

- *  library API more streamlined and robust. You can download AVR-GCC for free in a convenient windows package,

- *  from the the WinAVR website (see \ref Page_Resources).

- *

- *  The only required AVR peripherals for LUFA is the USB controller itself and interrupts - LUFA does not require the use of the

- *  microcontroller's timers or other hardware, leaving more hardware to the application developer.

- *

- *  Accompanying LUFA in the download package is a set of example demo applications, plus several Bootloaders of different classes

- *  and open source LUFA powered projects.

- *

- *  <b>Subsections:</b>

- *  \li \subpage Page_LicenseInfo - Project source license and commercial use information

- *  \li \subpage Page_Donating - Donating to support this project

- *  \li \subpage Page_DeviceSupport - Current Device and Hardware Support

- *  \li \subpage Page_ChangeLog - Project Changelog

- *  \li \subpage Page_KnownIssues - Known Issues

- *  \li \subpage Page_FutureChanges - Planned Changes to the Library

- *  \li \subpage Page_GettingStarted - Getting started with LUFA

- *  \li \subpage Page_DevelopingWithLUFA - Developing with LUFA

- *  \li \subpage Page_LUFAPoweredProjects - Other Projects Using LUFA

- *  \li \subpage Page_Resources - LUFA and USB Related Resources

- */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/MigrationInformation.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/MigrationInformation.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 7a08ad23c..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/MigrationInformation.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,674 +0,0 @@
-/** \file

- *

- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special

- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.

- */

-

-/** \page Page_Migration Migrating from Older Versions

- *

- *  Below is migration information for updating existing projects based on previous versions of the LUFA library

- *  to the next version released. It does not indicate all new additions to the library in each version change, only

- *  areas relevant to making older projects compatible with the API changes of each new release.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Migration120730 Migrating from 120219 to 120730

- *  <b>Device Mode</b>

- *    - The device mode Audio Class driver now requires an additional configuration parameter, the Audio Control interface index. Existing applications should

- *      be adjusted to specify the additional configuration parameter.

- *    - The HID_DESCRIPTOR_JOYSTICK() macro no longer takes a variable number of axis as a parameter, due to OS incompatibilities; this macro now uses a fixed

- *      3 axis of data. User applications should update their calls to this macro and their report structures to suit a fixed 3-axis joystick report. If a user

- *      application requires more than 3 axis' of data, a custom report descriptor will need to be constructed by hand.

- *    - The \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint() function no longer takes in masks for the banks and direction; the number of banks is now an integer argument, and

- *      the direction is obtained from the full endpoint address within the device. Applications calling Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint() should update their API

- *      call to use a full endpoint address (including ENDPOINT_DIR_IN or ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT direction in the MSB of the endpoint address) and an integer number

- *      of banks.

- *    - All endpoint functions now operate on full endpoint addresses within the device, rather than a directionless endpoint index. Applications should update

- *      their API calls to use full endpoint addresses when required within the device.

- *    - All device mode class drivers have been updated to use a new unified endpoint description structure for all endpoints; existing applications will need

- *      to update their class driver struct instantiation to match the new scheme (see \ref USB_Endpoint_Table_t).

- *    - The \c ENDPOINT_BANKS_SUPPORTED() and \c ENDPOINT_MAX_ENDPOINT_SIZE() macros have been removed, as these do not function correctly with the new addressing

- *      scheme for the endpoint APIs. Please refer to the target device's datasheet for the maximum bank size of each endpoint.

- *    - The MIDI class driver \ref MIDI_EventPacket_t event packet no longer contains seperate \c CableIndex and \c Command entries; these have been combined

- *      into a single \c Event element which can be contructed using the new macro \ref MIDI_EVENT(). Existing applications should use the new macro and structure

- *      element name.

- *

- *  <b>Host Mode</b>

- *    - The Android Accessory Host class driver property strings are now a array of \c char* rather than a struct of named pointers. Existing applications

- *      should use C99 Designated Initializers with the property string indexes located in \ref AOA_Strings_t instead.

- *    - The \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe() function no longer takes in masks for the banks and token; the number of banks is now an integer argument, and the token

- *      is now inferred from the full pipe address within the device, and the pipe type. Applications calling Pipe_ConfigurePipe() should update their API

- *      call to use a full pipe address (including PIPE_DIR_IN or PIPE_DIR_OUT direction in the MSB of the pipe address) and an integer number of banks.

- *    - All pipe functions now operate on full pipe addresses within the device, rather than a directionless pipe index. Applications should update their API

- *      calls to use full pipe addresses when required within the device.

- *    - All host mode class drivers have been updated to use a new unified pipe description structure for all pipes; existing applications will need to update

- *      their class driver struct instantiation to match the new scheme (see \ref USB_Pipe_Table_t).

- *    - The MIDI class driver \ref MIDI_EventPacket_t event packet no longer contains seperate \c CableIndex and \c Command entries; these have been combined

- *      into a single \c Event element which can be contructed using the new macro \ref MIDI_EVENT(). Existing applications should use the new macro and structure

- *      element name.

- *    - The library "LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/ConfigDescriptor.c" source file has been renamed "LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/ConfigDescriptors.c" as this was clashing with

- *      files in some low level host mode demo applications, preventing parallel project builds. If you are referencing the project source files directly instead

- *      of using the makefile module names, you will need to adjust your project makefile.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Migration120219 Migrating from 111009 to 120219

- *  <b>USB Core</b>

- *    - The HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_* macros in the HID class driver have been corrected to HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFIER_* (note the spelling of "modifier").

- *      Existing applications should switch over to the correctly spelled macro names.

- *    - The names of the USB Device and USB Host class driver files have changed; a new "ClassDevice" and "ClassHost" postfix has been added to the

- *      respective class driver files. Projects referencing the class driver source files by filename rather than the LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS makefile

- *      variable should append these postfixes to the source file names. Projects including the USB class driver dispatch headers directly should either

- *      switch to including the main USB driver header instead, or use the updated header filenames.

- *    - The USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED constant has been renamed to USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED, as this was misnamed. All devices must set this bit in

- *      the Configuration descriptor's attributes field. As all devices are assumed to be bus-powered unless stated otherwise with the

- *      USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED flag a replacement constant for bus powered devices is not provided.

- *

- *  <b>Device Mode</b>

- *    - The device mode Audio class driver now requires a new user application callback, \ref CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetInterfaceProperty().

- *      Existing applications must implement this new callback, however if no audio entities are defined in the audio device's descriptors,

- *      this function may be hard-coded to always return false for previous behaviour to be retained.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Migration111009 Migrating from 110528 to 111009

- *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>

- *    - The \c JTAG_DEBUG_ASSERT() macro has been renamed \ref JTAG_ASSERT() to be consistent with \ref STDOUT_ASSERT().

- *

- *  <b>USB Core</b>

- *    - By default, unordered Endpoint and Pipe configuration is now allowed once again, via the previous workaround of

- *      reconfiguring all Endpoints/Pipes in order each time a new Endpoint/Pipe is created. To minimize the compiled program

- *      size, the new \c ORDERED_EP_CONFIG compile time option may be defined in the project makefile to restrict the ordering

- *      in exchange for a smaller compiled binary size.

- *    - The previous \c F_CLOCK symbol, required in the project makefile, has been renamed to \c F_USB. This is due to the previous name

- *      being far too generic for use in future architecture ports, where multiple clock domains are used.

- *

- *  <b>Device Mode</b>

- *    - The Endpoint stream functions now all require a \c BytesProcessed parameter instead of the previous callback parameter.

- *      This should be set to \c NULL to retain previous behaviour of the functions, or point to a location where the number of bytes

- *      processed in the current transaction can be stored. If the \c BytesProcessed parameter is non \c NULL, each time the endpoint

- *      bank becomes full and the packet is sent, the routine will exit with the new \ref ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer

- *      error code to allow the user application to determine when to send the next chunk of data.

- *    - The \ref CDC_Device_SendString() function now expects a null terminated string instead of an explicit length. Existing code

- *      should use the new \ref CDC_Device_SendData() function, or remove the length parameter from the function call.

- *    - The \c Endpoint_ResetFIFO() function has been renamed to \ref Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(), to make the API function names more

- *      consistent. Existing applications using the old function name should simply replace it with a call to the new function name.

- *    - The \c Endpoint_*_Byte() functions have been renamed Endpoint_*_8() to ensure they are correct across all architectures. Existing

- *      code using these functions should replace the previous function names with the new function names.

- *    - The \c Endpoint_*_Word() functions have been renamed Endpoint_*_16() to ensure they are correct across all architectures. Existing

- *      code using these functions should replace the previous function names with the new function names.

- *    - The \c Endpoint_*_DWord() functions have been renamed Endpoint_*_32() to ensure they are correct across all architectures. Existing

- *      code using these functions should replace the previous function names with the new function names.

- *    - The Device mode RNDIS class driver no longer stores the incoming and outgoing packets in the class driver instance; the user is

- *      now expected to manually define a storage location for the packet data. Packets must now be sent and received manually via a call

- *      to \ref RNDIS_Device_ReadPacket() and/or \ref RNDIS_Device_SendPacket().

- *    - The definition of the Audio class \ref USB_Audio_Descriptor_Format_t has been altered, to remove the fixed singular

- *      audio sample rate in the descriptor definition, and to rename the \c SampleFrequencyType to the more appropriate

- *      \c TotalDiscreteSampleRates. Existing applications will need to add an array of \ref USB_Audio_SampleFreq_t elements

- *      immediately following any \ref USB_Audio_Descriptor_Format_t descriptors, and insert the appropriate sampling rates

- *      supported by the device, as well as rename the descriptor elements to match the updated element names.

- *    - The device mode Audio class driver now requires a new user application callback, \ref CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetEndpointProperty().

- *      Existing applications must implement this new callback, however if multiple sample rates or pitch control is not used,

- *      this function may be hard-coded to always return false for previous behaviour to be retained.

- *    - The \c USB_ConfigurationNumber, \c USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled and \c USB_CurrentlySelfPowered globals have been renamed to

- *      \ref USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber, \ref USB_Device_RemoteWakeupEnabled and \ref USB_Device_CurrentlySelfPowered to clearly indicate

- *      the USB mode they relate to. Existing applications using these variables should rename all references to the previous names.

- *    - The \c ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN and \c ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT macros have now been replaced by \ref ENDPOINT_DIR_IN and

- *      \ref ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT to improve code clarity.

- *    - The \ref HID_DESCRIPTOR_JOYSTICK() macro now takes an additional (first) parameter indicating the number of axis in the joystick.

- *

- *  <b>Host Mode</b>

- *    - The Pipe stream functions now all require a \c BytesProcessed parameter instead of the previous callback parameter.

- *      This should be set to \c NULL to retain previous behaviour of the functions, or point to a location where the number of bytes

- *      processed in the current transaction can be stored. If the BytesProcessed parameter is non \c NULL, each time the pipe

- *      bank becomes full and the packet is sent, the routine will exit with the new \ref PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer

- *      error code to allow the user application to determine when to send the next chunk of data.

- *    - The \ref PRNT_Host_SendString() and \ref CDC_Host_SendString() functions now expect a null terminated string instead of an explicit

- *      length. Existing code should use the new \ref PRNT_Host_SendData() and \ref CDC_Host_SendData() functions, or remove the

- *      length parameter from the function call.

- *    - The \c Pipe_ClearErrorFlags() function has been removed, as the pipe error flags are now automatically cleared when the

- *      \ref Pipe_ClearError() function is called.

- *    - The \c Pipe_*_Byte() functions have been renamed Pipe_*_8() to ensure they are correct across all architectures. Existing code using

- *      these functions should replace the previous function names with the new function names.

- *    - The \c Pipe_*_Word() functions have been renamed Pipe_*_16() to ensure they are correct across all architectures. Existing code using

- *      these functions should replace the previous function names with the new function names.

- *    - The \c Pipe_*_DWord() functions have been renamed Pipe_*_32() to ensure they are correct across all architectures. Existing code using

- *      these functions should replace the previous function names with the new function names.

- *    - The \c USB_Host_ClearPipeStall() function has been renamed to USB_Host_ClearEndpointStall(), as it operates on a full endpoing address

- *      within the attached device and not a pipe within the host. Existing code using the old function name should update the function calls and

- *      check for correct usage.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Migration101122 Migrating from 100807 to 101122

- *  <b>USB Core</b>

- *    - A new USB driver source file, \c Drivers/USB/HighLevel/EndpointStream.c now exists. This source file should be added

- *      to all project makefiles using the USB driver of LUFA, or the makefile should be updated to use the new module source

- *      variables.

- *    - A new USB driver source file, \c Drivers/USB/HighLevel/PipeStream.c now exists. This source file should be added to all

- *      project makefiles using the USB driver of LUFA, or the makefile should be updated to use the new module source variables.

- *    - The \c EVENT_USB_InitFailure() event has been removed, as the \ref USB_Init() function will no longer fail; if not USB mode is

- *      specified, the controller will default to UID selection mode.

- *    - The USB mode specifier constants have been moved into a new enum and renamed. Existing projects should use the equivalent

- *      value in the new \ref USB_Modes_t enum.

- *    - All class driver headers are now included as part of the standard \c LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h master dispatch header, and should

- *      no longer be included separately. Class driver module source files must still be added as a separate module in the project's

- *      makefile if used.

- *

- *  <b>Device Mode</b>

- *    - Endpoints MUST be allocated in ascending order to ensure that bank corruption does not occur. Ensure that your user application

- *      allocated endpoints in ascending order - or if your application uses the USB device mode class drivers, ensure that each instance's

- *      endpoint indexes are not overlapped with other interface's endpoints.

- *    - The signature for the \ref CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor() callback has changed, the \c void** \c const \c DescriptorAddress parameter is

- *      now \c const \c void** \c const \c DescriptorAddress. Existing applications should update their callback signatures to match this, and

- *      eliminate any casting of descriptor pointers to a non \c const pointer.

- *    - The names of the class specific descriptor type defines in the USB Class drivers have changed - refer to the driver documentation

- *      for each class driver for the new class specific descriptor type names.

- *    - The \c ENDPOINT_DOUBLEBANK_SUPPORTED() macro is has been renamed \c ENDPOINT_BANKS_SUPPORTED() and now returns the total number of

- *      banks supported by the given endpoint. Existing code should switch to the new naming scheme, and test that the return value of the

- *      macro is equal to or greater than 2 to regain the previous functionality.

- *    - The \c EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event is now named \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() and fires before (not after)

- *      the internal library event handlers. Existing code should rename the event handlers in the user application to match the new event

- *      name, and should ensure that the new execution order does not affect the application's operation.

- *

- *  <b>Host Mode</b>

- *    - Pipes MUST be allocated in ascending order to ensure that bank corruption does not occur. Ensure that your user application

- *      allocated pipes in ascending order - or if your application uses the USB host mode class drivers, ensure that each instance's

- *      pipe indexes are not overlapped with other interface's pipes.

- *    - The \c PRNT_Host_SendData() function has been renamed to \ref PRNT_Host_SendString(). Existing applications should simply

- *      replace all references to the obsolete function name with the new function name.

- *    - The names of the class specific descriptor type defines in the USB Class drivers have changed - refer to the driver documentation

- *      for each class driver for the new class specific descriptor type names.

- *    - The Still Image Host class' function prefix has been changed from \c SImage_ to  \c SI_, to remain consistent with the rest of the

- *      driver's enums, type defines and constants.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Migration100807 Migrating from 100513 to 100807

- *

- *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>

- *    - The Dataflash board driver stub file has changed, as dataflash functions previously located in the internal

- *      Dataflash driver of the library have now been moved to the individual board files. Existing drivers can

- *      copy-paste the new functions from the board Dataflash stub driver.

- *

- *  <b>USB Core</b>

- *    - A new USB driver source file, \c Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Device.c now exists. This source file should be added to all project

- *      makefiles using the USB driver of LUFA, or the makefile should be updated to use the new module source variables.

- *    - The \c Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c source file has moved to \c Drivers/USB/HighLevel/DeviceStandardReq.c - this should

- *      be updated in all project makefiles, or the makefile should be updated to use the new module source variables.

- *    - The \c Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.h source file has moved to \c Drivers/USB/HighLevel/HostStandardReq.c - this should

- *      be updated in all project makefiles, or the makefile should be updated to use the new module source variables.

- *    - The \c Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c source file has moved to \c Drivers/LowLevel/USBController.c - this should be updated

- *      in all project makefiles, or the makefile should be updated to use the new module source variables.

- *

- *  <b>Device Mode</b>

- *    - The \c USB_Device_IsRemoteWakeupSent() macro has been removed, as the remote wakeup request is now fully handled by the

- *      enhanced \ref USB_Device_SendRemoteWakeup() function. Existing code may now discard any checks to \c USB_Device_IsRemoteWakeupSent().

- *    - The \c USB_Device_IsUSBSuspended() macro has been removed, as it is obsolete. Existing code should compare \ref USB_DeviceState

- *      to see if it the device is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Suspended state instead.

- *    - The \ref CDC_Device_ReceiveByte() function has changed, and now returns a signed 16-bit integer, with -1 indicating no data was

- *      received. This allows for more efficient coding, as a call to \ref CDC_Device_BytesReceived() is no longer needed if the exact

- *      number of queued bytes received is not needed.

- *

- *  <b>Host Mode</b>

- *    - The \ref CDC_Host_ReceiveByte() function has changed, and now returns a signed 16-bit integer, with -1 indicating no data was

- *      received. This allows for more efficient coding, as a call to \ref CDC_Host_BytesReceived() is no longer needed if the exact

- *      number of queued bytes received is not needed.

- *    - The \ref CDC_Host_USBTask() now calls \ref CDC_Host_Flush() automatically, flushing any queued data to the attached device. Manual

- *      flushing of the interface is no longer needed if the flushes should be in sync with calls to \ref CDC_Host_USBTask().

- *

- *  \section Sec_Migration100513 Migrating from 100219 to 100513

- *

- *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>

- *    - The \ref TWI_StartTransmission() function now takes in a timeout period, expressed in milliseconds, within which the addressed

- *      device must respond or the function will abort.

- *

- *  <b>Device Mode</b>

- *    - The \ref USB_Init() function no longer calls \c sei() to enable global interrupts, as the user application may need

- *      to perform other initialization before it is ready to handle global interrupts. The user application is now responsible

- *      for enabling global interrupts before or shortly after calling \ref USB_Init() to ensure that the enumeration process

- *      functions correctly.

- *    - The \c USBInterrupt.c USB driver source file has been relocated from \c LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ to \c LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel.

- *      Projects must update their makefile SRC values accordingly.

- *    - The HID Device Class driver's function signature for the \ref CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport() function has been changed, to

- *      allow for a new \c ReportType parameter. This new parameter must be added in all user applications using the Device mode HID Class

- *      Driver, but may be ignored unless Host-to-Device FEATURE HID reports are used.

- *

- *  <b>Host Mode</b>

- *    - The \ref USB_Init() function no longer calls \c sei() to enable global interrupts, as the user application may need

- *      to perform other initialization before it is ready to handle global interrupts. The user application is now responsible

- *      for enabling global interrupts before or shortly after calling \ref USB_Init() to ensure that the enumeration process

- *      functions correctly.

- *    - The \c USBInterrupt.c USB driver source file has been relocated from \c LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ to \c LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel.

- *      Projects must update their makefile \c SRC values accordingly.

- *    - The HID Host Class driver's function signature for the \ref HID_Host_SendReportByID() function has been changed, to allow for a new

- *      ReportType parameter. Existing calls to this function should substitute \c REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Out as this parameter's value.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Migration100219 Migrating from 091223 to 100219

- *

- *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>

- *    - Due to some ADC channels not being identical to their ADC MUX selection masks for single-ended conversions on some AVR models,

- *      the ADC driver now has explicit masks for each of the standard ADC channels (see \ref Group_ADC). These masks should be used

- *      when calling the ADC functions to ensure proper operation across all AVR models. Note that the \ref ADC_SetupChannel() function

- *      is an exception, and should always be called with a channel number rather than a channel mask.

- *

- *  <b>Host Mode</b>

- *    - The MIDI Host Class driver send and receive routines now operate on packed events, where multiple MIDI events may be

- *      packed into a single USB packet. This means that the sending of MIDI events will now be delayed until the MIDI send

- *      pipe bank is full. To override this new behaviour and revert to the previous behaviour, the user application may manually

- *      flush the queued event(s) to the device by calling \ref MIDI_Host_Flush().

- *    - The \ref Pipe_IsEndpointBound() function now takes the endpoint's direction into account, by checking if the MSB of the endpoint's address

- *      is set to denote IN endpoints. If the previous functionality where the direction is to be discounted is required, mask the endpoint

- *      address against the \ref PIPE_EPNUM_MASK token before calling \ref Pipe_IsEndpointBound().

- *

- *  <b>Device Mode</b>

- *    - The MIDI Device Class driver send and receive routines now operate on packed events, where multiple MIDI events may be

- *      packed into a single USB packet. This means that the sending of MIDI events will now be delayed until the MIDI send

- *      endpoint bank is full. To override this new behaviour and revert to the previous behaviour, the user application may manually

- *      flush the queued event(s) to the host by calling \ref MIDI_Device_Flush().

- *

- *  \section Sec_Migration091223 Migrating from 091122 to 091223

- *

- *  <b>Host Mode</b>

- *    - The Still Image Host Class driver \ref SI_Host_USBTask() and \ref SI_Host_ConfigurePipes() functions were misnamed, and are

- *      now named \c SImage_Host_USBTask() and \c SImage_Host_ConfigurePipes() respectively.

- *    - The \c HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnect enum value has been renamed to \ref HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected to be in

- *      line with the rest of the library error codes.

- *    - The HID Parser item usages no longer contain separate minimum and maximum values, as this was a violation of the HID

- *      specification. Instead, the values are distributed evenly across each item as its usage value, to ensure that all items

- *      can be distinguished from one-another.

- *

- *  <b>Device Mode</b>

- *    - The \ref CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport() HID Device Class driver callback now has a new \c ReportType parameter to

- *      indicate the report type to generate. Existing applications may simply add and ignore this additional parameter.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Migration091122 Migrating from 090924 to 091122

- *

- *  <b>Host Mode</b>

- *    - The \c HID_PARSE_UsageStackOverflow HID parser error constant is now named \ref HID_PARSE_UsageListOverflow

- *    - The \ref CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem() HID Parser callback now passes a complete \ref HID_ReportItem_t to the

- *      user application, instead of just its attributes.

- *    - The \c USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() function was incorrectly named and is now called \ref USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor().

- *

- *  \section Sec_Migration090924 Migrating from 090810 to 090924

- *

- *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>

- *    - The \c ADC_Off() function has been renamed to \c ADC_ShutDown() to be consistent with the rest of the library.

- *    - The \ref SPI_Init() routine's parameters have changed, so that the clock polarity and data sampling modes can be set. See

- *      the \ref SPI_Init() function documentation for more details

- *    - The \ref Dataflash_Init() routine no longer initializes the SPI bus - the SPI bus should be initialized manually via a

- *      call to \ref SPI_Init() before using the Dataflash driver

- *

- *  <b>Host Mode</b>

- *    - The \c USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() function's parameters and behaviour has changed; the user is required to

- *      preallocate the largest allowable buffer, and pass the size of the buffer to the function. This allows for a single

- *      call to the function to retrieve, size check and validate the Configuration Descriptor rather than having the user

- *      application perform these intermediary steps.

- *    - The HID report parser now requires a mandatory callback in the user code, to filter only the items the application

- *      is interested in into the processed HID report item structure to save RAM. See \ref CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem().

- *    - The HID report parser now always parses FEATURE and always ignores constant-data items - the \c HID_ENABLE_FEATURE_PROCESSING

- *      and \c HID_INCLUDE_CONSTANT_DATA_ITEMS compile time tokens now have no effect.

- *    - The \c USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES compile time token has been removed - there are now separate \c USB_Descriptor_*

- *      and \c USB_StdDescriptor_* structures for both the LUFA and standardized element naming conventions so that both may be used in

- *      the one project. For existing projects using the standardized names, change all code to use the \c USB_StdDescriptor_* variants.

- *

- *  <b>Device Mode</b>

- *    - The \c USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES compile time token has been removed - there are now separate \c USB_Descriptor_*

- *      and \c USB_StdDescriptor_* structures for both the LUFA and standardized element naming conventions so that both may be used in

- *      the one project. For existing projects using the standardized names, change all code to use the \c USB_StdDescriptor_* variants.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Migration090810 Migrating from 090605 to 090810

- *

- *  <b>All</b>

- *    - The "Simple Scheduler" has been <i>deprecated</i>, as it was little more than an abstracted loop and caused much confusion.

- *      User applications using the scheduler should switch to regular loops instead. The scheduler code will be removed in a future

- *      release.

- *    - The "Dynamic Memory Block Allocator" has been removed, as it was unused in (and unrelated to) the LUFA library and never

- *      used in user applications.

- *

- *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>

- *    - The \c ATTR_NOINLINE function attribute macro has been renamed to \ref ATTR_NO_INLINE to be in line with the rest of the function attribute

- *      macro names.

- *

- *  <b>Library Demos</b>

- *    - Most demos now have a corresponding Class Driver implementation, which uses the new internal library class drivers for the standard

- *      USB classes. This allows for more rapid device and host development, and so should be used in preference to the low level APIs where

- *      possible so that fixes to the class drivers propagate to all applications which use them automatically with each new LUFA release.

- *

- *  <b>Host Mode</b>

- *    - The \c HIDParser.c module has moved from \c LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ to \c LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/.

- *    - The \c USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() function now requires the desired configuration index within the device as its first

- *      parameter, to add support for multi-configuration devices. Existing code should use a configuration index of 1 to indicate the

- *      first configuration descriptor within the device.

- *    - The non-standard "Ready" host state has been removed. Existing \ref HOST_STATE_Configured code should be moved to the end of

- *      the existing \ref HOST_STATE_Addressed state, and the existing HOST_STATE_Ready state code should be moved to the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured

- *      state.

- *    - The \c USB_IsConnected global has been removed, as it is too vague for general use. Test \ref USB_HostState explicitly to ensure the host is

- *      in the desired state instead.

- *    - The USB event names have been changed and their firing conditions changed to properly separate out Host mode events from Device mode

- *      events. See the \ref Group_Events page for details on the new event names and firing conditions.

- *

- *  <b>Device Mode</b>

- *    - The \ref CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor() function now takes an extra parameter to specify the descriptor's memory space so that

- *      descriptors in mixed memory spaces can be used. The previous functionality can be returned by defining the \c USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS

- *      token in the project makefile to fix all descriptors into FLASH space and remove the extra function parameter.

- *    - The \c USB_IsSuspended global has been removed - test \ref USB_DeviceState against \ref DEVICE_STATE_Suspended instead.

- *    - The \c USB_IsConnected global has been removed, as it is too vague for general use. Test \ref USB_DeviceState explicitly to ensure the device

- *      is in the desired state instead.

- *    - The VBUS events have been removed, as they are already exposed to the user via the \c USB_Connect and \c USB_Disconnect events.

- *    - The USB event names have been changed and their firing conditions changed to properly separate out Host mode events from Device mode

- *      events. See the \ref Group_Events page for details on the new event names and firing conditions.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Migration090605 Migrating from 090510 to 090605

- *

- *  <b>Device Mode</b>

- *    - Support for non-control data endpoint interrupts has been dropped due to many issues in the implementation. All existing

- *      projects using interrupts on non-control endpoints should switch to polling. For control interrupts, the library can

- *      manage the control endpoint via interrupts automatically by compiling with the \c INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT token defined.

- *    - The \c DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS() macro has been removed. User applications should use normal casts to obtain a descriptor's memory

- *      address.

- *    - The library events system has been rewritten, so that all macros have been removed to allow for clearer user code. See

- *      \ref Group_Events for new API details.

- *    - The \c STREAM_CALLBACK() macro has been removed. User applications should replace all instances of the macro with regular

- *      function signatures of a function accepting no arguments and returning a \c uint8_t value.

- *    - The \c Event_DeviceError() event no longer exists, as its sole caller (unlinked \c USB_GetDescriptor() function) now produces a

- *      compilation error rather than a runtime error. The \c StdDescriptors.c file no longer exists as a result, and should be removed

- *      from project makefiles.

- *    - The \c USB_GetDescriptor() function has been renamed to \ref CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor() to be in line with the new \c CALLBACK_

- *      function prefixes for functions which <i>must</i> be implemented in the user application.

- *

- *  <b>Host Mode</b>

- *    - Support for non-control data pipe interrupts has been dropped due to many issues in the implementation. All existing

- *      projects using interrupts on non-control pipes should switch to polling.

- *    - The library events system has been rewritten, so that all macros have been removed to allow for clearer user code. See

- *      \ref Group_Events for new API details.

- *    - The \c STREAM_CALLBACK() macro has been removed. User applications should replace all instances of the macro with regular

- *      function signatures of a function accepting no arguments and returning a \c uint8_t value.

- *    - The \c DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR() macro has been removed. User applications should replace all instances of the macro with

- *      regular function signatures of a function accepting a void pointer to the descriptor to test, and returning a \c uint8_t value.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Migration090510 Migrating from 090401 to 090510

- *

- *  <b>All</b>

- *    - The \c ButtLoadTag.h header has been removed, as it was never used for its intended purpose. Projects should either remove all

- *      \c BUTTLOADTAG() elements, or download and extract \c ButtLoadTag.h header from the ButtLoad project.

- *    - The \c Drivers/AT90USBXXX/ directory has been renamed to \c Drivers/Peripheral/.

- *    - The \c Serial_Stream driver has been renamed to \c SerialStream to remain consistent with the rest of the library naming scheme.

- *    - The HWB driver has changed to the \c Buttons driver. See the board Buttons driver documentation for the new API.

- *

- *  <b>Dual Role Mode</b>

- *    - The \c USB_PowerOnFail event has been renamed to \c USB_InitFailure.

- *    - The functions in \c OTG.h have been renamed to remain more consistent with the library API. See the functions in \c OTG.h for more

- *      details.

- *

- *  <b>Device Mode</b>

- *    - The \c Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank() macro has been removed, and is now replaced with the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN(), \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT()

- *      macros. See \c Endpoint.h documentation for more details on the new endpoint management macros.

- *    - The \c Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed() macro has been renamed to \ref Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed() to be more consistent with the rest of

- *      the API naming scheme.

- *    - The \c Endpoint_IsSetupINReady() and \c Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived() macros have been renamed to \ref Endpoint_IsINReady() and

- *      \ref Endpoint_IsOUTReceived() respectively.

- *    - The \c Endpoint_IsSetupReceived() macro has been renamed to \ref Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived().

- *    - The \c Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived() macro has been renamed to \ref Endpoint_ClearSETUP().

- *    - All endpoint read/write/discard aliases which did not have an explicitly endianness specifier (such as \c Endpoint_Read_Word()) have

- *      been removed for clarity. Existing projects should use the \c _LE suffix on such calls to use the explicit Little Endian versions.

- *    - The \c USB_UnhandledControlPacket event no longer has any parameters. User code should no longer attempt to read in the remainder of

- *      the Control Request header as all Control Request header data is now preloaded by the library and made available in the

- *      USB_ControlRequest structure.

- *    - The \c FEATURELESS_CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE token has been renamed to \c CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE.

- *    - The \c STATIC_ENDPOINT_CONFIGURATION is no longer applicable as the library will apply this optimization when appropriate automatically.

- *    - The values of the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t and \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enums have had the \c ERROR_ portion

- *      of their names removed.

- *

- *  <b>Host Mode</b>

- *    - The \ref USB_Host_SendControlRequest() function no longer automatically selects the Control pipe (pipe 0) to allow it to be used on

- *      other control type pipes. Care should be taken to ensure that the Control pipe is always selected before the function is called

- *      in existing projects where the Control pipe is to be operated on.

- *    - The USB Host management task now saves and restores the currently selected pipe before and after the task runs. Projects no longer

- *      need to manage this manually when calling the USB management task.

- *    - The \c Pipe_ClearCurrentBank() macro has been removed, and is now replaced with the Pipe_ClearIN(), Pipe_ClearOUT() macros. See

- *      Pipe.h documentation for more details on the new pipe management macros.

- *    - The \c Pipe_ReadWriteAllowed() macro has been renamed to \ref Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed() to be more consistent with the rest of the API

- *      naming scheme.

- *    - The \c Pipe_IsSetupINReceived() and \c Pipe_IsOutReady() macros have been renamed to \ref Pipe_IsINReceived() and \ref Pipe_IsOUTReady()

- *      respectively.

- *    - The new \ref Pipe_ClearSETUP() macro should be used to send SETUP transactions, rather than the previous \c Pipe_ClearSetupOUT() macro.

- *    - The \c Pipe_IsSetupSent() macro has been renamed to \ref Pipe_IsSETUPSent().

- *    - The \c Pipe_ClearSetupSent() macro is no longer applicable and should be removed.

- *    - All pipe read/write/discard aliases which did not have an explicitly endianness specifier (such as \c Pipe_Read_Word()) have

- *      been removed for clarity. Existing projects should use the \c _LE suffix on such calls to use the explicit Little Endian versions.

- *    - The \c Host_IsResetBusDone() macro has been renamed to \c Host_IsBusResetComplete().

- *    - The \c Pipe_Ignore_Word() and \c Pipe_Ignore_DWord() functions have been renamed to \c Pipe_Discard_Word() and \c Pipe_Discard_DWord()

- *      to remain consistent with the rest of the pipe API.

- *    - It is no longer needed to manually include the headers from \c LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class, as they are now included along with the rest

- *      of the USB headers when \c LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h is included.

- *    - Functions in the \c ConfigDescriptor.h header file no longer have \c Host_ as part of their names.

- *    - The \c ProcessHIDReport() has been renamed to \ref USB_ProcessHIDReport(), \c GetReportItemInfo() has been renamed to \ref USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo()

- *      and \c SetReportItemInfo() has been renamed to \ref USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo().

- *    - The values of the \ref DSearch_Return_ErrorCodes_t and \ref DSearch_Comp_Return_ErrorCodes_t enums have had their respective \c Descriptor_Search

- *      and \c Descriptor_Search_Comp prefixes changed to all caps.

- *    - The \c USB_HostRequest global has been renamed to \ref USB_ControlRequest, and is used in Device mode also. The \c USB_Host_Request_Header_t

- *      structure type has been renamed to \ref USB_Request_Header_t.

- *    - The values of the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum have had the \c ERROR_ portion of their names removed.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Migration090401 Migrating from 090209 to 090401

- *

- *  <b>All</b>

- *    - LUFA projects must now give the raw input clock frequency (before any prescaling) as a compile time constant \c F_USB,

- *      defined in the project makefile and passed to the compiler via the -D switch.

- *    - The makefile EEPROM programming targets for FLIP and dfu-programmer no longer program in the FLASH data in addition to the

- *      EEPROM data into the device. If both are to be programmed, both the EEPROM and FLASH programming targets must be called.

- *    - As the avr-libc macro has been corrected in recent avr-libc distributions, the \c SetSystemClockPrescaler() macro has been removed.

- *      Include \c <avr/power.h> and call \c clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); instead on recent avr-libc distributions.

- *

- *  <b>Library Demos</b>

- *    - The USBtoSerial demo now discards all data when not connected to a host, rather than buffering it for later transmission.

- *

- *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>

- *    - The \c ATTR_ALWAYSINLINE function attribute macro has been renamed to \ref ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE.

- *    - Custom board Dataflash drivers now require the implementation of \ref Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage() and \ref Dataflash_SendAddressBytes().

- *

- *  <b>Device Mode</b>

- *    - The \c NO_CLEARSET_FEATURE_REQUEST compile time token has been renamed to \c FEATURELESS_CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE, and its function expanded

- *      to also remove parts of the Get Status chapter 9 request to further reduce code usage. On all applications currently using the

- *      \c NO_CLEARSET_FEATURE_REQUEST compile time token, it can be replaced with the \c FEATURELESS_CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE token with no further

- *      modifications required.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Migration090209 Migrating from 081217 to 090209

- *

- *  <b>Device Mode</b>

- *    - The \c ENDPOINT_MAX_ENDPOINTS constant has been renamed to the more appropriate name of \c ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS.

- *    - The \c USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS stream timeout default period has been extended to 100ms. This can be overridden in the user

- *      makefile if desired to restore the previous 50ms timeout.

- *

- *  <b>Host Mode</b>

- *    - The \c PIPE_MAX_ENDPOINTS constant has been renamed to the more appropriate name of \c PIPE_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS.

- *    - The \c USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS stream timeout default period has been extended to 100ms. This can be overridden in the user

- *      makefile if desired to restore the previous 50ms timeout.

- *    - The \c USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event now contains a second \c SubErrorCode parameter, giving the error code of the function

- *      which failed.

- *    - The \c HID_PARSE_Sucessful enum member constant name has been corrected to \ref HID_PARSE_Successful.

- *

- *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>

- *    - The previous \c SPI_SendByte() functionality is now located in \ref SPI_TransferByte(). \ref SPI_SendByte() now discards the return byte

- *      for speed, to compliment the new \ref SPI_ReceiveByte() function. If bidirectional SPI transfers are required, calls to \ref SPI_SendByte()

- *      should be changed to \ref SPI_TransferByte().

- *    - The serial driver now sets the Tx line as an output explicitly, and enables the pull-up of the Rx line.

- *    - The \ref Serial_Init() and \c SerialStream_Init() functions now take a second \c DoubleSpeed parameter, which indicates if the USART

- *      should be initialized in double speed mode - useful in some circumstances for attaining baud rates not usually possible at the given AVR

- *      clock speed.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Migration171208 Migrating from V1.5.3 to 081217

- *

- *  <b>All</b>

- *    - The MyUSB project name has been changed to LUFA (Lightweight Framework for USB AVRs). All references to MyUSB, including macro names,

- *      have been changed to LUFA.

- *

- *  <b>Library Demos</b>

- *    - The ReconfigureUSART() routine in the USBtoSerial demo was not being called after new line encoding

- *      parameters were set by the host. Projects built on the USBtoSerial code should update to the latest version.

- *    - The HID Parser now supports multiple report (on a single endpoint) HID devices. The MouseHostWithParser and

- *      KeyboardHostWithPaser demos use the updated API functions to function correctly on such devices. Projects

- *      built on either "WithParser" demo should update to the latest code.

- *    - The RNDIS demo TCP stack has been modified so that connections can be properly closed. It is still not

- *      recommended that the MyUSB RNDIS demo TCP/IP stack be used for anything other than demonstration purposes,

- *      as it is neither a full nor a standards compliant implementation.

- *

- *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>

- *    - The Serial_IsCharReceived() macro has been changed to the correct spelling of Serial_IsCharReceived() in Serial.h.

- *

- *  <b>Device Mode</b>

- *    - The MANUAL_PLL_CONTROL compile time token has been removed, and replaced with a USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL mask

- *      to be used in the Options parameter of the USB_Init() function.

- *    - Calling USB_Init() now forces a complete USB interface reset and enumeration, even if the USB interface is

- *      currently initialized.

- *    - Interrupts are now disabled when processing control requests, to avoid problems with interrupts causing the library

- *      or user request processing code to exceed the strict USB timing requirements on control transfers.

- *    - The USB Reset event now resets and disables all device endpoints. If user code depends on endpoints remaining configured

- *      after a Reset event, it should be altered to explicitly re-initialize all user endpoints.

- *    - The prototype for the GetDescriptor function has been changed, as the return value was redundant. The function now

- *      returns the size of the descriptor, rather than passing it back via a parameter, or returns NO_DESCRIPTOR if the specified

- *      descriptor does not exist.

- *    - The NO_DESCRIPTOR_STRING macro has been renamed NO_DESCRIPTOR, and is now also used as a possible return value for the

- *      GetDescriptor function.

- *

- *  <b>Host Mode</b>

- *    - The MANUAL_PLL_CONTROL compile time token has been removed, and replaced with a USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL mask

- *      to be used in the Options parameter of the USB_Init() function.

- *    - The HID report parser now supports multiple Report IDs. The HID report parser GetReportItemInfo() and

- *      SetReportItemInfo() routines now return a boolean, set if the requested report item was located in the

- *      current report. If sending a report to a multi-report device, the first byte of the report is automatically

- *      set to the report ID of the given report item.

- *    - Calling USB_Init() now forces a complete USB interface reset and enumeration, even if the USB interface is

- *      currently initialized.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Migration152 Migrating from V1.5.2 to V1.5.3

- *

- *  <b>Library Demos</b>

- *    - Previously, all demos contained a serial number string descriptor, filled with all zeros. A serial number

- *      string is required in Mass Storage devices, or devices which are to retain settings when moved between

- *      ports on a machine. As people were not changing the serial number value, this was causing conflicts and so

- *      the serial number descriptor has been removed from all but the Mass Storage demo, which requires it.

- *    - The AudioOut and AudioIn demos did not previously silence their endpoints when the host has deactivated

- *      them. Projects built upon either demo should upgrade to the latest code.

- *    - The FEATURE_ENDPOINT macro has been renamed FEATURE_ENDPOINT_HALT, and is now correctly documented.

- *    - The MassStoreHost demo contained errors which caused it to lock up randomly on certain devices. Projects built

- *      on the MassStoreDemo code should update to the latest version.

- *    - The Interrupt type endpoint in the CDC based demos previously had a polling interval of 0x02, which caused

- *      problems on some Linux systems. This has been changed to 0xFF, projects built on the CDC demos should upgrade

- *      to the latest code.

- *    - The HID keyboard and mouse demos were not previously boot mode compatible. To enable boot mode support, projects

- *      built on the keyboard or mouse demos (or derivatives) should upgrade to the latest code.

- *    - The Mass Storage demo was not previously standards compliant. Projects built on the Mass Storage demo should

- *      upgrade to the latest code.

- *    - The USART was not being reconfigured after the host sent new encoding settings in the USBtoSerial demo. This was

- *      previously discovered and fixed, but the change was lost. Projects built on the USBtoSerial demo should update

- *      to the latest code.

- *

- *  <b>Device Mode</b>

- *    - The endpoint non-control stream functions now have a default timeout of 50ms between packets in the stream.

- *      If this timeout is exceeded, the function returns the new ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_ERROR_Timeout error value. The

- *      timeout value can be overridden by defining the USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS in the project makefile to the desired

- *      timeout duration in ms.

- *    - Rather than returning fixed values, the flags indicating if the device has Remote Wakeup currently enabled

- *      and/or is self-powered are now accessed and set through the new USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled and

- *      USB_CurrentlySelfPowered macros. See the DevChapter9.h documentation for more details.

- *    - All endpoint stream functions now require an extra Callback function parameter. Existing code may be updated

- *      to either supply NO_STREAM_CALLBACK as the extra parameter, or disable stream callbacks altogether by passing

- *      the token NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS to the compiler using the -D switch.

- *

- *  <b>Host Mode</b>

- *    - The pipe non-control stream functions now have a default timeout of 50ms between packets in the stream.

- *      If this timeout is exceeded, the function returns the new PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_Timeout error value. The

- *      timeout value can be overridden by defining the USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS in the project makefile to the desired

- *      timeout duration in ms.

- *    - CollectionPath_t has been renamed to HID_CollectionPath_t to be more in line with the other HID parser structures.

- *    - All pipe stream functions now require an extra Callback function parameter. Existing code may be updated

- *      to either supply NO_STREAM_CALLBACK as the extra parameter, or disable stream callbacks altogether by passing

- *      the token NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS to the compiler using the -D switch.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Migration151 Migrating from V1.5.1 to V1.5.2

- *

- *  <b>Library Demos</b>

- *    - The RNDIS demo application has been updated so that it is functional on Linux under earlier implementations

- *      of the RNDIS specification, which had non-standard behaviour. Projects built upon the demo should upgrade

- *      to the latest code.

- *    - The DFU class bootloader has had several bugs corrected in this release. It is recommended that where

- *      possible any existing devices upgrade to the latest bootloader code.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Migration150 Migrating from V1.5.0 to V1.5.1

- *

- *  <b>Library Demos</b>

- *    - The USBtoSerial demo was broken in the 1.5.0 release, due to incorrect register polling in place of the

- *      global "Transmitting" flag. The change has been reverted in this release. Projects built upon the demo

- *      should upgrade to the latest code.

- *    - The HID class demos did not implement the mandatory GetReport HID class request. Projects built upon the HID

- *      demos should upgrade to the latest code.

- *    - The HID class demos incorrectly reported themselves as boot-protocol enabled HID devices in their descriptors.

- *      Projects built upon the HID demos should upgrade to the latest code.

- *    - The MIDI device demo had incorrect AudioStreaming interface descriptors. Projects built upon the MIDI demo

- *      should upgrade to the latest code.

- *    - The AudioOut demo did not correctly tristate the speaker pins when USB was disconnected, wasting power.

- *      Projects built upon the AudioOut demo should upgrade to the latest code.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Migration141 Migrating from V1.4.1 to V1.5.0

- *

- *  <b>Library Demos</b>

- *    - Previous versions of the library demos had incorrectly encoded BCD version numbers in the descriptors. To

- *      avoid such mistakes in the future, the VERSION_BCD macro has been added to StdDescriptors.h. Existing

- *      projects should at least manually correct the BCD version numbers, or preferably update the descriptors to

- *      encode the version number in BCD format using the new macro.

- *    - The mandatory GetReport class-specific request was accidentally omitted from previous versions of the demos

- *      based on the Human Interface Device (HID) class. This has been corrected, and any user projects based on the

- *      HID demos should also be updated accordingly.

- *    - The CDC demos now correctly send an empty packet directly after a full packet, to end the transmission.

- *      Failure to do this on projects which always or frequently send full packets will cause buffering issues on

- *      the host OS. All CDC user projects are advised to update their transmission routines in the same manner as

- *      the library CDC demos.

- *    - The previous interrupt-driven Endpoint/Pipe demos did not properly save and restore the currently selected

- *      Endpoint/Pipe when the ISR fired. This has been corrected - user projects based on the interrupt driven

- *      demos should also update to properly save and restore the selected Endpoint/Pipe.

- *

- *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>

- *    - The Atomic.h and ISRMacro.h header files in MyUSB/Common have been removed, as the library is now only

- *      compatible with avr-libc library versions newer than the time before the functionality of the deleted

- *      headers was available.

- *

- *  <b>Device Mode</b>

- *    - The GetDescriptor function (see StdDescriptors.h) now has a new prototype, with altered parameter names and

- *      functions. Existing projects will need to update the GetDescriptor implementation to reflect the new API.

- *      The previously split Type and Index parameters are now passed as the original wValue parameter to the

- *      function, to make way for the USB specification wIndex parameter which is <i>not</i> the same as the

- *      previous Index parameter.

- *    - The USB_UnhandledControlPacket event (see Events.h) now has new parameter names, to be in line with the

- *      official USB specification. Existing code will need to be altered to use the new parameter names.

- *    - The USB_CreateEndpoints event (see Events.h) has been renamed to USB_ConfigurationChanged, which is more

- *      appropriate. It fires in an identical manner to the previously named event, thus the only change to be made

- *      is the event name itself in the user project.

- *    - The USB_Descriptor_Language_t structure no longer exists in StdDescriptors.h, as this was a

- *      pseudo-descriptor modeled on the string descriptor. It is replaced by the true USB_Descriptor_String_t type

- *      descriptor as indicated in the USB specification, thus all device code must be updated accordingly.

- *    - The names of several Endpoint macros have been changed to be more consistent with the rest of the library,

- *      with no implementation changes. This means that existing code can be altered to use the new macro names

- *      with no other considerations required. See Endpoint.h for the new macro names.

- *    - The previous version of the MassStorage demo had an incorrect value in the SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t

- *      structure named SenseData in SCSI.c which caused some problems with some hosts. User projects based on this

- *      demo should correct the structure value to maintain compatibility across multiple OS platforms.

- *    - By default, the descriptor structures use the official USB specification names for the elements. Previous

- *      versions of the library used non-standard (but more verbose) names, which are still usable in the current

- *      and future releases when the correct compile time option is enabled. See the StdDescriptors.h file

- *      documentation for more details.

- *

- *  <b>Host Mode</b>

- *    - The USB_Host_Request_Header_t structure in HostChapter9.h (used for issuing control requests) has had its

- *      members renamed to the official USB specification names for requests. Existing code will need to be updated

- *      to use the new names.

- *    - The names of several Pipe macros have been changed to be more consistent with the rest of the library,

- *      with no implementation changes. This means that existing code can be altered to use the new macro names

- *      with no other considerations required. See Pipe.h for the new macro names.

- *    - By default, the descriptor structures use the official USB specification names for the elements. Previous

- *      versions of the library used non-standard (but more verbose) names, which are still usable in the current

- *      and future releases when the correct compile time option is enabled. See the StdDescriptors.h file

- *      documentation for more details.

- *    - The names of the macros in Host.h for controlling the SOF generation have been renamed, see the Host.h

- *      module documentation for the new macro names.

- *

- *  <b>Dual Role Mode</b>

- *    - The OTG.h header file has been corrected so that the macros now perform their stated functions. Any existing

- *      projects using custom headers to fix the broken OTG header should now be altered to once again use the OTG

- *      header inside the library.

- *    - The USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event (see Events.h) now also fires in Device mode, when the host has

- *      finished enumerating the device. Projects relying on the event only firing in Host mode should be updated

- *      so that the event action only occurs when the USB_Mode global is set to USB_MODE_HOST.

- */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/ProgrammingApps.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/ProgrammingApps.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 6ff185676..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/ProgrammingApps.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,30 +0,0 @@
-/** \file

- *

- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special

- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.

- */

-

-/** \page Page_ProgrammingApps Programming an Application into a USB AVR

- *

- *  Once you have built an application, you will need a way to program in the resulting ".HEX" file (and, if your

- *  application uses EEPROM variables with initial values, also a ".EEP" file) into your USB AVR. Normally, the

- *  reprogramming of an AVR device must be performed using a special piece of programming hardware, through one of the

- *  supported AVR programming protocols - ISP, HVSP, HVPP, JTAG, dW or PDI. This can be done through a custom programmer,

- *  a third party programmer, or an official Atmel AVR tool - for more information, see the <a>atmel.com</a> website.

- *

- *  Alternatively, you can use the bootloader. From the Atmel factory, each USB AVR comes preloaded with the Atmel

- *  DFU (Device Firmware Update) class bootloader, a small piece of AVR firmware which allows the remainder of the

- *  AVR to be programmed through a non-standard interface such as the serial USART port, SPI, or (in this case) USB.

- *  Bootloaders have the advantage of not requiring any special hardware for programming, and cannot usually be erased

- *  or broken without an external programming device. They have disadvantages however; they cannot change the fuses of

- *  the AVR (special configuration settings that control the operation of the chip itself) and a small portion of the

- *  AVR's FLASH program memory must be reserved to contain the bootloader firmware, and thus cannot be used by the

- *  loaded application.

- *

- *  If you wish to use the DFU bootloader to program in your application, refer to your DFU programmer's documentation.

- *  Atmel provides a free utility called FLIP which is USB AVR compatible, and an open source (Linux compatible)

- *  alternative exists called "dfu-programmer".

- *

- *  \see \ref Page_BuildModule_DFU for information on the LUFA build system DFU module, for automatic DFU bootloader

- *  programming makefile targets.

- */

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/SoftwareBootloaderJump.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/SoftwareBootloaderJump.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 328466103..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/SoftwareBootloaderJump.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,71 +0,0 @@
-/** \file

- *

- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special

- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.

- */

-

-/**

- *  \page Page_SoftwareBootloaderStart Entering the Bootloader via Software

- *

- *  A common requirement of many applications is the ability to jump to the programmed bootloader of a chip

- *  on demand, via the code's firmware (i.e. not as a result of any physical user interaction with the

- *  hardware). This might be required because the device does not have any physical user input, or simply

- *  just to streamline the device upgrade process on the host PC.

- *

- *  The following C code snippets may be used to enter the bootloader upon request by the user application.

- *  By using the watchdog to physically reset the controller, it is ensured that all system hardware is

- *  completely reset to their defaults before the bootloader is run. This is important; since bootloaders

- *  are written to occupy a very limited space, they usually make assumptions about the register states based

- *  on the default values after a hard-reset of the chip.

- *

- *  \section Sec_SoftareBootAVR8 AVR8 Architecture

- *  The following software bootloader jump code is written for the AVR8 architecture.

- *

- *  \code

- *  #include <avr/wdt.h>

- *  #include <avr/io.h>

- *  #include <util/delay.h>

- *  

- *  #include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>

- *  #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>

- *  

- *  uint32_t Boot_Key ATTR_NO_INIT;

- *  

- *  #define MAGIC_BOOT_KEY            0xDC42ACCA

- *  #define BOOTLOADER_START_ADDRESS  (FLASH_SIZE_BYTES - BOOTLOADER_SEC_SIZE_BYTES)

- *  

- *  void Bootloader_Jump_Check(void) ATTR_INIT_SECTION(3);

- *  void Bootloader_Jump_Check(void)

- *  {

- *      // If the reset source was the bootloader and the key is correct, clear it and jump to the bootloader

- *      if ((MCUSR & (1 << WDRF)) && (Boot_Key == MAGIC_BOOT_KEY))

- *      {

- *          Boot_Key = 0;

- *          ((void (*)(void))BOOTLOADER_START_ADDRESS)();

- *      }

- *  }

- *  

- *  void Jump_To_Bootloader(void)

- *  {

- *      // If USB is used, detach from the bus and reset it

- *      USB_Disable();

- *      

- *      // Disable all interrupts

- *      cli();

- *      

- *      // Wait two seconds for the USB detachment to register on the host

- *      Delay_MS(2000);

- *      

- *      // Set the bootloader key to the magic value and force a reset

- *      Boot_Key = MAGIC_BOOT_KEY;

- *      wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS);

- *      for (;;);

- *  }

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  Note that the bootloader magic key can be any arbitrary value. The <em>FLASH_SIZE_BYTES</em> and

- *  <em>BOOTLOADER_SEC_SIZE_BYTES</em> tokens should be replaced with the total flash size of the AVR

- *  in bytes, and the allocated size of the bootloader section for the target AVR.

- *

- */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Style/Footer.htm b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Style/Footer.htm
deleted file mode 100644
index c6de4e64d..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Style/Footer.htm
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,35 +0,0 @@
-<!--BEGIN GENERATE_TREEVIEW-->

-	<div id="nav-path" class="navpath"><!-- id is needed for treeview function! -->

-		<ul>

-			<li class="footer" style="float:left !important;">

-				$generatedby

-				<a href="http://www.doxygen.org/index.html">

-					<img class="footer" src="$relpath$doxygen.png" alt="doxygen"/>

-				</a>

-				$doxygenversion

-			</li>

-

-			<li class="footer">

-				<a href="http://www.lufa-lib.org" title="LUFA Project Page">LUFA Project Page</a> | <a href="http://www.lufa-lib.org/support" title="LUFA Support List">Support Mailing List</a> | <a href="http://www.lufa-lib.org/donate" title="Donate to Support LUFA">Donate</a> | <a href="http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com" title="Four Walled Cubicle Website">Four Walled Cubicle</a> - LUFA, the Lightweight USB Framework for AVRs

-			</li>

-		</ul>

-	</div>

-<!--END GENERATE_TREEVIEW-->

-<!--BEGIN !GENERATE_TREEVIEW-->

-		<hr class="footer"/>

-		<div class="footer">

-			<span style="float: left;">

-				$generatedby

-				<a href="http://www.doxygen.org/index.html">

-					<img class="footer" src="$relpath$doxygen.png" alt="doxygen"/>

-				</a>

-				$doxygenversion

-			</span>

-

-			<span style="margin-right: 20px; float: right;">

-				<a href="http://www.lufa-lib.org" title="LUFA Project Page">LUFA Project Page</a> | <a href="http://www.lufa-lib.org/support" title="LUFA Support List">Support Mailing List</a> | <a href="http://www.lufa-lib.org/donate" title="Donate to Support LUFA">Donate</a> | <a href="http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com" title="Four Walled Cubicle Website">Four Walled Cubicle</a> - LUFA, the Lightweight USB Framework for AVRs

-			</span>

-		</div>

-<!--END !GENERATE_TREEVIEW-->

-	</body>

-</html>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Style/Style.css b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Style/Style.css
deleted file mode 100644
index b0b8464be..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Style/Style.css
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1123 +0,0 @@
-@media print

- {

-	#top

-	{

-		display:none;

-	}

-

-	#side-nav

-	{

-		display:none;

-	}

-

-	#nav-path

-	{

-		display:none;

-	}

-

-	body

-	{

-		overflow:visible;

-	}

-

-	h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6

-	{

-		page-break-after:avoid;

-	}

-

-	.summary

-	{

-		display:none;

-	}

-

-	.memitem

-	{

-		page-break-inside:avoid;

-	}

-

-	#doc-content

-	{

-		display:inline;

-		height:auto !important;

-		margin-left:0 !important;

-		overflow:inherit;

-		width:auto !important;

-	}

-	

-	.fragment

-	{

-		background-color: #FFFFFF !important;

-	}	

-}

-

-body,table,div,p,dl

-{

-	font-family:Lucida Grande, Verdana, Geneva, Arial, sans-serif;

-	font-size:13px;

-	line-height:1.3;

-}

-

-div.contents p

-{

-	padding-left:12px;

-}

-

-div.contents table.memberdecls,.paramname

-{

-	font-family:Consolas, Monaco, courier, sans-serif;

-	font-size:105%;

-	padding-right:20px;

-}

-

-.title

-{

-	font-size:150%;

-	font-weight:bold;

-	margin:10px 2px;

-}

-

-h1

-{

-	font-size:25px;

-	margin-bottom:10px;

-}

-

-h2

-{

-	color:#42657B;

-	font-family:Lucida Grande, Verdana, Geneva, Arial, sans-serif;

-	font-size:17px;

-}

-

-h3

-{

-	font-family:Lucida Grande, Verdana, Geneva, Arial, sans-serif;

-	font-size:15px;

-}

-

-h4

-{

-	font-family:Lucida Grande, Verdana, Geneva, Arial, sans-serif;

-	font-size:13px;

-}

-

-dt

-{

-	font-weight:bold;

-}

-

-div.multicol

-{

-	-moz-column-count:3px;

-	-moz-column-gap:1em;

-	-webkit-column-count:3px;

-	-webkit-column-gap:1em;

-}

-

-p.startli,p.startdd,p.starttd

-{

-	margin-top:2px;

-}

-

-p.endli

-{

-	margin-bottom:0;

-}

-

-p.enddd

-{

-	margin-bottom:4px;

-}

-

-p.endtd

-{

-	margin-bottom:2px;

-}

-

-caption

-{

-	font-weight:bold;

-}

-

-span.legend

-{

-	font-size:70%;

-	text-align:center;

-}

-

-h3.version

-{

-	font-size:90%;

-	text-align:center;

-}

-

-div.qindex,div.navtab

-{

-	background-color:#EAEFF7;

-	border:1px solid #9EB3DC;

-	text-align:center;

-}

-

-div.qindex,div.navpath

-{

-	line-height:140%;

-	width:100%;

-}

-

-div.navtab

-{

-	margin-right:15px;

-}

-

-a

-{

-	color:#355594;

-	font-weight:normal;

-	text-decoration:none;

-}

-

-.contents a:visited

-{

-	color:#3D62AB;

-}

-

-a:hover

-{

-	text-decoration:underline;

-}

-

-a.qindex

-{

-	font-weight:bold;

-}

-

-a.qindexHL

-{

-	background-color:#97ADD9;

-	border:1px double #7F9BD1;

-	color:#ffffff;

-	font-weight:bold;

-}

-

-.contents a.qindexHL:visited

-{

-	color:#ffffff;

-}

-

-a.el

-{

-	font-weight:bold;

-}

-

-a.code,a.code:visited

-{

-	color:#4665A2;

-}

-

-a.codeRef,a.codeRef:visited

-{

-	color:#4665A2;

-}

-

-dl.el

-{

-	margin-left:-1cm;

-}

-

-pre.fragment {

-        border: 1px solid #C4CFE5;

-        background-color: #FBFCFD;

-        padding: 4px 6px;

-        margin: 4px 8px 4px 2px;

-        overflow: auto;

-        word-wrap: break-word;

-        font-size:  9pt;

-        line-height: 125%;

-        font-family: monospace, fixed;

-        font-size: 105%;

-}

-

-div.fragment {

-	padding: 4px;

-	margin: 4px;

-	background-color: #FBFCFD;

-	border: 1px solid #C4CFE5;

-}

-

-div.line {

-	font-family: monospace, fixed;

-	font-size: 13px;

-	min-height: 13px;

-	line-height: 1.0;

-	text-wrap: unrestricted;

-	white-space: -moz-pre-wrap; /* Moz */

-	white-space: -pre-wrap;     /* Opera 4-6 */

-	white-space: -o-pre-wrap;   /* Opera 7 */

-	white-space: pre-wrap;      /* CSS3  */

-	word-wrap: break-word;      /* IE 5.5+ */

-	text-indent: -53px;

-	padding-left: 53px;

-	padding-bottom: 0px;

-	margin: 0px;

-}

-

-span.lineno {

-	padding-right: 4px;

-	text-align: right;

-	border-right: 2px solid #0F0;

-	background-color: #E8E8E8;

-	white-space: pre;

-}

-span.lineno a {

-	background-color: #D8D8D8;

-}

-

-span.lineno a:hover {

-	background-color: #C8C8C8;

-}

-

-div.ah

-{

-	-moz-border-radius:.5em;

-	-moz-box-shadow:rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.15) 2px 2px 2px;

-	-webkit-border-radius:.5em;

-	-webkit-box-shadow:2px 2px 3px #999;

-	background-color:black;

-	background-image:0;

-	border:solid thin #333;

-	border-radius:0.5em;

-	box-shadow:2px 2px 3px #999;

-	color:#ffffff;

-	font-weight:bold;

-	margin-bottom:3px;

-	margin-top:3px;

-	padding:0.2em;

-}

-

-div.groupHeader

-{

-	font-weight:bold;

-	margin-left:16px;

-	margin-top:12px;

-}

-

-div.groupText

-{

-	font-style:italic;

-	margin-left:16px;

-}

-

-body

-{

-	background-color:white;

-	color:black;

-	margin:0;

-}

-

-div.contents

-{

-	margin-left:8px;

-	margin-right:8px;

-	margin-top:10px;

-}

-

-td.indexkey

-{

-	background-color:#EAEFF7;

-	border:1px solid #C1CEE8;

-	font-weight:bold;

-	margin:2px 0;

-	padding:2px 10px;

-	vertical-align:top;

-	white-space:nowrap;

-}

-

-td.indexvalue

-{

-	background-color:#EAEFF7;

-	border:1px solid #C1CEE8;

-	margin:2px 0;

-	padding:2px 10px;

-}

-

-tr.memlist

-{

-	background-color:#EDF1F8;

-}

-

-p.formulaDsp

-{

-	text-align:center;

-}

-

-img.formulaInl

-{

-	vertical-align:middle;

-}

-

-div.center

-{

-	margin-bottom:0;

-	margin-top:0;

-	padding:0;

-	text-align:center;

-}

-

-div.center img

-{

-	border:0;

-}

-

-address.footer

-{

-	padding-right:12px;

-	text-align:right;

-}

-

-img.footer

-{

-	border:0;

-	vertical-align:middle;

-}

-

-span.keyword

-{

-	color:#008000;

-}

-

-span.keywordtype

-{

-	color:#604020;

-}

-

-span.keywordflow

-{

-	color:#e08000;

-}

-

-span.comment

-{

-	color:#008000;

-}

-

-span.preprocessor

-{

-	color:#806020;

-}

-

-span.stringliteral

-{

-	color:#002080;

-}

-

-span.charliteral

-{

-	color:#008080;

-}

-

-span.vhdldigit

-{

-	color:#ff00ff;

-}

-

-span.vhdlchar

-{

-	color:#000000;

-}

-

-span.vhdlkeyword

-{

-	color:#700070;

-}

-

-span.vhdllogic

-{

-	color:#ff0000;

-}

-

-blockquote

-{

-	background-color:#F6F8FC;

-	border-left:2px solid #97ADD9;

-	margin:0 24px 0 4px;

-	padding:0 12px 0 16px;

-}

-

-td.tiny

-{

-	font-size:75%;

-}

-

-.dirtab

-{

-	border:1px solid #9EB3DC;

-	border-collapse:collapse;

-	padding:4px;

-}

-

-th.dirtab

-{

-	background:#EAEFF7;

-	font-weight:bold;

-}

-

-hr

-{

-	border:none;

-	border-top:1px solid #4067B4;

-	height:0;

-}

-

-hr.footer

-{

-	height:1px;

-}

-

-table.memberdecls

-{

-	border-spacing:0;

-	padding:0;

-}

-

-.mdescLeft,.mdescRight,.memItemLeft,.memItemRight,.memTemplItemLeft,.memTemplItemRight,.memTemplParams

-{

-	background-color:#F9FAFC;

-	border:none;

-	margin:4px;

-	padding:1px 0 0 8px;

-}

-

-.mdescLeft,.mdescRight

-{

-	color:#555;

-	padding:0 8px 4px;

-}

-

-.memItemLeft,.memItemRight,.memTemplParams

-{

-	border-top:1px solid #C1CEE8;

-}

-

-.memItemLeft,.memTemplItemLeft

-{

-	white-space:nowrap;

-}

-

-.memItemRight

-{

-	width:100%;

-}

-

-.memTemplParams

-{

-	color:#3D62AB;

-	white-space:nowrap;

-}

-

-.memtemplate

-{

-	color:#3D62AB;

-	font-size:80%;

-	font-weight:normal;

-	margin-left:9px;

-}

-

-.memnav

-{

-	background-color:#EAEFF7;

-	border:1px solid #9EB3DC;

-	margin:2px 15px 2px 2px;

-	padding:2px;

-	text-align:center;

-}

-

-.mempage

-{

-	width:100%;

-}

-

-.memitem

-{

-	margin-bottom:10px;

-	margin-right:5px;

-	padding:0;

-}

-

-.memname

-{

-	font-weight:bold;

-	margin-left:6px;

-	white-space:nowrap;

-}

-

-.memproto,dl.reflist dt

-{

-	-moz-border-radius-topleft:8px;

-	-moz-border-radius-topright:8px;

-	-moz-box-shadow:rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.15) 5px 5px 5px;

-	-webkit-border-top-left-radius:8px;

-	-webkit-border-top-right-radius:8px;

-	-webkit-box-shadow:5px 5px 5px rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.15);

-	background-color:#E1E7F4;

-	background-image:url('nav_f.png');

-	background-repeat:repeat-x;

-	border-left:1px solid #A3B7DE;

-	border-right:1px solid #A3B7DE;

-	border-top:1px solid #A3B7DE;

-	border-top-left-radius:8px;

-	border-top-right-radius:8px;

-	box-shadow:5px 5px 5px rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.15);

-	color:#20335A;

-	font-weight:bold;

-	padding:6px 0;

-	text-shadow:0 1px 1px rgba(255, 255, 255, 0.9);

-}

-

-.memdoc,dl.reflist dd

-{

-	-moz-border-radius-bottomleft:8px;

-	-moz-border-radius-bottomright:8px;

-	-moz-box-shadow:rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.15) 5px 5px 5px;

-	-webkit-border-bottom-left-radius:8px;

-	-webkit-border-bottom-right-radius:8px;

-	-webkit-box-shadow:5px 5px 5px rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.15);

-	background-color:#FBFCFD;

-	background-image:0 color-stop(0.6,#FFFFFF), color-stop(0.60,#FFFFFF), color-stop(0.95,#F6F8FC), to(#EDF1F8));

-	border-bottom:1px solid #A3B7DE;

-	border-bottom-left-radius:8px;

-	border-bottom-right-radius:8px;

-	border-left:1px solid #A3B7DE;

-	border-right:1px solid #A3B7DE;

-	border-top-width:0;

-	box-shadow:5px 5px 5px rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.15);

-	padding:2px 5px;

-}

-

-dl.reflist dt

-{

-	padding:5px;

-}

-

-dl.reflist dd

-{

-	margin:0 0 10px;

-	padding:5px;

-}

-

-.paramkey

-{

-	text-align:right;

-}

-

-.paramtype

-{

-	white-space:nowrap;

-}

-

-.paramname

-{

-	color:#602020;

-	white-space:nowrap;

-}

-

-.paramname em

-{

-	font-style:normal;

-}

-

-.params,.retval,.exception,.tparams

-{

-	border-spacing:6px 2px;

-}

-

-.params .paramname,.retval .paramname

-{

-	font-weight:bold;

-	vertical-align:top;

-}

-

-.params .paramtype

-{

-	font-style:italic;

-	vertical-align:top;

-}

-

-.params .paramdir

-{

-	font-family:"courier new",courier,monospace;

-	vertical-align:top;

-}

-

-.ftvtree

-{

-	font-family:sans-serif;

-	margin:0;

-}

-

-.directory

-{

-	font-size:9pt;

-	font-weight:bold;

-	margin:5px;

-}

-

-.directory h3

-{

-	font-size:11pt;

-	margin:1em 0 0;

-}

-

-.directory > h3

-{

-	margin-top:0;

-}

-

-.directory p

-{

-	margin:0;

-	white-space:nowrap;

-}

-

-.directory div

-{

-	display:none;

-	margin:0;

-}

-

-.directory img

-{

-	vertical-align:-30%;

-}

-

-.directory-alt

-{

-	font-size:100%;

-	font-weight:bold;

-}

-

-.directory-alt h3

-{

-	font-size:11pt;

-	margin:1em 0 0;

-}

-

-.directory-alt > h3

-{

-	margin-top:0;

-}

-

-.directory-alt p

-{

-	margin:0;

-	white-space:nowrap;

-}

-

-.directory-alt div

-{

-	display:none;

-	margin:0;

-}

-

-.directory-alt img

-{

-	vertical-align:-30%;

-}

-

-div.dynheader

-{

-	margin-top:8px;

-}

-

-address

-{

-	color:#253B67;

-	font-style:normal;

-}

-

-table.doxtable

-{

-	border-collapse:collapse;

-	margin-bottom:4px;

-	margin-top:4px;

-}

-

-table.doxtable td,table.doxtable th

-{

-	border:1px solid #273F6D;

-	padding:3px 7px 2px;

-}

-

-table.doxtable th

-{

-	background-color:#304D86;

-	color:#FFFFFF;

-	font-size:110%;

-	padding-bottom:4px;

-	padding-top:5px;

-}

-

-table.fieldtable

-{

-	-moz-border-radius:4px;

-	-moz-box-shadow:rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.15) 2px 2px 2px;

-	-webkit-border-radius:4px;

-	-webkit-box-shadow:2px 2px 2px rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.15);

-	border:1px solid #A3B7DE;

-	border-radius:4px;

-	border-spacing:0;

-	box-shadow:2px 2px 2px rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.15);

-	margin-bottom:10px;

-	width:100%;

-}

-

-.fieldtable td,.fieldtable th

-{

-	padding:3px 7px 2px;

-}

-

-.fieldtable td.fieldtype,.fieldtable td.fieldname

-{

-	border-bottom:1px solid #A3B7DE;

-	border-right:1px solid #A3B7DE;

-	vertical-align:top;

-	white-space:nowrap;

-}

-

-.fieldtable td.fielddoc

-{

-	border-bottom:1px solid #A3B7DE;

-	width:100%;

-}

-

-.fieldtable tr:last-child td

-{

-	border-bottom:none;

-}

-

-.fieldtable th

-{

-	-moz-border-radius-topleft:4px;

-	-moz-border-radius-topright:4px;

-	-webkit-border-top-left-radius:4px;

-	-webkit-border-top-right-radius:4px;

-	background-color:#E1E7F4;

-	background-image:url('nav_f.png');

-	background-repeat:repeat-x;

-	border-bottom:1px solid #A3B7DE;

-	border-top-left-radius:4px;

-	border-top-right-radius:4px;

-	color:#20335A;

-	font-size:90%;

-	padding-bottom:4px;

-	padding-top:5px;

-	text-align:left;

-}

-

-.tabsearch

-{

-	background-image:url('tab_b.png');

-	font-size:13px;

-	height:36px;

-	left:10px;

-	overflow:hidden;

-	top:0;

-	z-index:101;

-}

-

-.navpath ul

-{

-	background-image:url('tab_b.png');

-	background-repeat:repeat-x;

-	border:solid 1px #BFCCE8;

-	color:#839ED2;

-	font-size:11px;

-	height:30px;

-	line-height:30px;

-	margin:0;

-	overflow:hidden;

-	padding:0;

-}

-

-.navpath li

-{

-	background-image:url('bc_s.png');

-	background-position:right;

-	background-repeat:no-repeat;

-	color:#2F4B83;

-	float:left;

-	list-style-type:none;

-	padding-left:10px;

-	padding-right:15px;

-}

-

-.navpath li.navelem a

-{

-	display:block;

-	height:32px;

-	outline:none;

-	text-decoration:none;

-}

-

-.navpath li.navelem a:hover

-{

-	color:#6081C5;

-}

-

-.navpath li.footer

-{

-	background-image:none;

-	background-position:right;

-	background-repeat:no-repeat;

-	color:#2F4B83;

-	float:right;

-	font-size:8pt;

-	list-style-type:none;

-	padding-left:10px;

-	padding-right:15px;

-}

-

-div.summary

-{

-	float:right;

-	font-size:8pt;

-	padding-right:5px;

-	text-align:right;

-	width:50%;

-}

-

-div.summary a

-{

-	white-space:nowrap;

-}

-

-div.ingroups

-{

-	font-size:8pt;

-	margin-left:5px;

-	padding-left:5px;

-	text-align:left;

-	width:50%;

-}

-

-div.ingroups a

-{

-	white-space:nowrap;

-}

-

-div.header

-{

-	background-color:#F9FAFC;

-	background-image:url('nav_h.png');

-	background-repeat:repeat-x;

-	border-bottom:1px solid #C1CEE8;

-	margin:0;

-}

-

-div.headertitle

-{

-	padding:5px 5px 5px 7px;

-}

-

-dl

-{

-	padding:0 0 0 10px;

-}

-

-dl.section

-{

-	border-left:4px solid;

-	padding:0 0 0 6px;

-}

-

-dl.note

-{

-	border-color:#D0C000;

-}

-

-dl.warning,dl.attention

-{

-	border-color:#FF0000;

-}

-

-dl.pre,dl.post,dl.invariant

-{

-	border-color:#00D000;

-}

-

-dl.deprecated

-{

-	border-color:#505050;

-}

-

-dl.todo

-{

-	border-color:#00C0E0;

-}

-

-dl.test

-{

-	border-color:#3030E0;

-}

-

-dl.bug

-{

-	border-color:#C08050;

-}

-

-dl.section dd

-{

-	margin-bottom:6px;

-}

-

-#projectlogo

-{

-	border-collapse:separate;

-	text-align:center;

-	vertical-align:bottom;

-	padding-left: 20px;

-}

-

-#projectlogo img

-{

-	border:0 none;

-}

-

-#projectname

-{

-	font:280% Arial, sans-serif;

-	margin:0;

-	padding-left:20px;

-}

-

-#projectbrief

-{

-	font:120% Tahoma, Arial, sans-serif;

-	margin:0;

-	padding:0;

-}

-

-#projectnumber:before

-{

-	content:"Version ";

-}

-

-#projectnumber

-{

-	font:50% Tahoma, Arial, sans-serif;

-	margin:0;

-	padding:0;

-}

-

-#titlearea

-{

-	margin:0;

-	padding:0;

-	width:100%;

-	background-color:#E1E7F4;

-	background-image:url('nav_f.png');

-	background-repeat:repeat-x;

-	color:#20335A;

-	font-weight:bold;

-	text-shadow:0 1px 1px rgba(255, 255, 255, 0.9);

-}

-

-.image

-{

-	text-align:center;

-}

-

-.dotgraph

-{

-	text-align:center;

-}

-

-.mscgraph

-{

-	text-align:center;

-}

-

-.caption

-{

-	font-weight:bold;

-}

-

-div.zoom

-{

-	border:1px solid #8AA3D4;

-}

-

-dl.citelist

-{

-	margin-bottom:50px;

-}

-

-dl.citelist dt

-{

-	color:#2C477C;

-	float:left;

-	font-weight:bold;

-	margin-right:10px;

-	padding:5px;

-}

-

-dl.citelist dd

-{

-	margin:2px 0;

-	padding:5px 0;

-}

-

-div.toc

-{

-	background-color:#F4F6FB;

-	border:1px solid #D6DFF0;

-	border-radius:7px 7px 7px 7px;

-	float:right;

-	height:auto;

-	margin:0 20px 10px 10px;

-	padding:14px 25px;

-	width:200px;

-}

-

-div.toc li

-{

-	background:url("bdwn.png") no-repeat scroll 0 5px transparent;

-	font:10px/1.2 Verdana,DejaVu Sans,Geneva,sans-serif;

-	margin-top:5px;

-	padding-left:10px;

-	padding-top:2px;

-}

-

-div.toc h3

-{

-	border-bottom:0 none;

-	color:#3D62AB;

-	font:bold 12px/1.2 Arial,FreeSans,sans-serif;

-	margin:0;

-}

-

-div.toc ul

-{

-	border:medium none;

-	list-style:none outside none;

-	padding:0;

-}

-

-div.toc li.level1

-{

-	margin-left:0;

-}

-

-div.toc li.level2

-{

-	margin-left:15px;

-}

-

-div.toc li.level3

-{

-	margin-left:30px;

-}

-

-div.toc li.level4

-{

-	margin-left:45px;

-}

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/VIDAndPIDValues.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/VIDAndPIDValues.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index ae9c7d44b..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/VIDAndPIDValues.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,424 +0,0 @@
-/** \file

- *

- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special

- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.

- */

-

-/** \page Page_VIDPID VID and PID values

- *

- *  \section Sec_VIDPID_Allocations VID and PID Allocations

- *  The LUFA library uses VID/PID combinations generously donated by Atmel. The following VID/PID combinations

- *  are used within the LUFA demos, and thus may be re-used by derivations of each demo. Free PID values may be

- *  used by future LUFA demo projects.

- *

- *  <b>These VID/PID values should not be used in commercial designs under any circumstances.</b> Private projects

- *  may use the following values freely, but must accept any collisions due to other LUFA derived private projects

- *  sharing identical values. It is suggested that private projects using interfaces compatible with existing

- *  demos share the same VID/PID value.

- *

- *  <table>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     <b>VID</b>

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     <b>PID</b>

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     <b>Usage</b>

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x2040

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     Test VID/PID (See below)

- *    </td>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x2041

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     Mouse Demo Application

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x2042

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     Keyboard Demo Application

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x2043

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     Joystick Demo Application

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x2044

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     CDC Demo Application

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x2045

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     Mass Storage Demo Application

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x2046

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     Audio Output Demo Application

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x2047

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     Audio Input Demo Application

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x2048

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     MIDI Demo Application

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x2049

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     MagStripe Project

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x204A

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     CDC Bootloader

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x204B

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     USB to Serial Demo Application

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x204C

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     RNDIS Demo Application

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x204D

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     Combined Keyboard and Mouse Demo Application

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x204E

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     Dual CDC Demo Application

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x204F

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     Generic HID Demo Application

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x2060

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     Benito Programmer Project

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x2061

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     Combined Mass Storage and Keyboard Demo

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x2062

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     Combined CDC and Mouse Demo

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x2063

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     Mass Storage/HID Interface Datalogger Project

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x2064

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     Interfaceless Control-Only LUFA Devices

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x2065

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     Test and Measurement Demo

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x2066

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     Multiple Report Keyboard/Mouse HID Demo

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x2067

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     HID Class Bootloader

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x2068

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     Virtual Serial/Mass Storage Demo

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x2069

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     Webserver Project

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x206A

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     Media Control Project

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x206B

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     <i>Currently Unallocated</i>

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x206C

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     <i>Currently Unallocated</i>

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x206D

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     <i>Currently Unallocated</i>

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x206E

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     <i>Currently Unallocated</i>

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>

- *     0x03EB

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     0x206F

- *    </td>

- *    <td>

- *     <i>Currently Unallocated</i>

- *    </td>

- *   </tr>

- *

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section Sec_Test_VIDPID The Test VID/PID Combination

- *  For use in testing of LUFA powered devices during development only, by non-commercial entities.

- *  All devices must accept collisions on this VID/PID range (from other in-development LUFA devices)

- *  to be resolved by using a unique release number in the Device Descriptor. No devices using this

- *  VID/PID combination may be released to the general public.

- */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/WritingBoardDrivers.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/WritingBoardDrivers.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 1b3326907..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/WritingBoardDrivers.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-/** \file

- *

- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special

- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.

- */

-

-/** \page Page_WritingBoardDrivers Writing LUFA Board Drivers

- *

- *  LUFA ships with several basic pre-made board drivers, to control hardware present on the supported board

- *  hardware - such as Dataflash ICs, LEDs, Joysticks, or other hardware peripherals. When compiling an application

- *  which makes use of one or more board drivers located in LUFA/Drivers/Board, you must also indicate what board

- *  hardware you are using in your project makefile. This is done by defining the BOARD macro using the -D switch

- *  passed to the compiler, with a constant of BOARD_{Name}. For example <b>-DBOARD=BOARD_USBKEY</b> instructs the

- *  compiler to use the USBKEY board hardware drivers.

- *

- *  If your application does not use *any* board level drivers, you can omit the definition of the BOARD macro.

- *  However, some users may wish to write their own custom board hardware drivers which are to remain compatible

- *  with the LUFA hardware API. To do this, the BOARD macro should be defined to the value BOARD_USER. This indicates

- *  that the board level drivers should be located in a folder named "Board" located inside the application's folder.

- *

- *  When used, the driver stub files located in the LUFA/CodeTemplates/DriverStubs folder should be copied to the user

- *  Board/ directory, and fleshed out to include the values and code needed to control the custom board hardware. Once

- *  done, the existing LUFA board level APIs (accessed in the regular LUFA/Drivers/Board/ folder) will redirect to the

- *  user board drivers, maintaining code compatibility and allowing for a different board to be selected through the

- *  project makefile with no code changes.

- */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/ADAFRUITU4/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/ADAFRUITU4/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index c18054f82..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/ADAFRUITU4/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,135 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Adafruit U4 Breakout board.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_ADAFRUITU4

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_ADAFRUITU4 ADAFRUITU4

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Adafruit U4 Breakout board.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Adafruit U4 Breakout board (http://ladyada.net/products/atmega32u4breakout).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTE.6</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_ADAFRUITU4_H__

-#define __LEDS_ADAFRUITU4_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 6)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    LEDS_LED1

-

-			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRE  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTE &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-         	}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRE  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTE &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-         	}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTE |= LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTE &= ~LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTE  = ((PORTE & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTE  = ((PORTE & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PINE   = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return (PORTE & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/ATAVRUSBRF01/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/ATAVRUSBRF01/Buttons.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 3470890b6..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/ATAVRUSBRF01/Buttons.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,103 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel ATAVRUSBRF01.

- *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_ATAVRUSBRF01

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_ATAVRUSBRF01 ATAVRUSBRF01

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel ATAVRUSBRF01.

- *

- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel ATAVRUSBRF01.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __BUTTONS_ATAVRUSBRF01_H__

-#define __BUTTONS_ATAVRUSBRF01_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/ATAVRUSBRF01/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/ATAVRUSBRF01/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 17b427155..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/ATAVRUSBRF01/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,139 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel ATAVRUSBRF01.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_ATAVRUSBRF01

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_ATAVRUSBRF01 ATAVRUSBRF01

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel ATAVRUSBRF01.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel ATAVRUSBRF01.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>RX LED</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.0</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Red</td><td>TX LED</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.1</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_ATAVRUSBRF01_H__

-#define __LEDS_ATAVRUSBRF01_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 0)

-

-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 1)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)

-

-			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD |= (LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD = (PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | (LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PIND  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BENITO/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BENITO/Buttons.h
deleted file mode 100644
index cecaca07e..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BENITO/Buttons.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,103 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Tempusdictum Benito.

- *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_BENITO

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_BENITO BENITO

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Tempusdictum Benito.

- *

- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Tempusdictum Benito (http://dorkbotpdx.org/wiki/benito).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __BUTTONS_BENITO_H__

-#define __BUTTONS_BENITO_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BENITO/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BENITO/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index dc3d85df2..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BENITO/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,139 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Tempusdictum Benito.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_BENITO

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_BENITO BENITO

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Tempusdictum Benito.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Tempusdictum Benito (http://dorkbotpdx.org/wiki/benito).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>TX LED</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTC.7</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Red</td><td>RX LED</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTC.6</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_BENITO_H__

-#define __LEDS_BENITO_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 7)

-

-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 6)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)

-

-			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRC  |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTC |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRC  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTC &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTC &= ~LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTC |= LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTC = ((PORTC | LEDS_ALL_LEDS) & ~LEDMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTC = ((PORTC | LEDMask) & ~ActiveMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PINC  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return (PORTC & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BIGMULTIO/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BIGMULTIO/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index d003680da..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BIGMULTIO/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,161 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Bitwizard Big-Multio.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_BIGMULTIO

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_BIGMULTIO BIGMULTIO

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Bitwizard Big-Multio.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Bitwizard Big-Multio (http://www.bitwizard.nl/wiki/index.php/Usbbigmultio).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Unknown</td><td>LED0</td><td>High</td><td>PORTF.6</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Unknown</td><td>LED1</td><td>High</td><td>PORTF.7</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Unknown</td><td>LED2</td><td>High</td><td>PORTE.2</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_BIGMULTIO_H__

-#define __LEDS_BIGMULTIO_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define LEDS_PORTF_LEDS       (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)

-			#define LEDS_PORTE_LEDS       LEDS_LED3

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 6)

-

-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 7)

-

-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 2)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)

-

-			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRF  |=  LEDS_PORTF_LEDS;

-				DDRE  |=  LEDS_PORTE_LEDS;

-			

-				PORTF &= ~LEDS_PORTF_LEDS;

-				PORTE &= ~LEDS_PORTE_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRF  &= ~LEDS_PORTF_LEDS;

-				DDRE  &= ~LEDS_PORTE_LEDS;

-			

-				PORTF &= ~LEDS_PORTF_LEDS;

-				PORTE &= ~LEDS_PORTE_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTF |= (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTF_LEDS);

-				PORTE |= (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTF &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTF_LEDS);

-				PORTE &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTF = (PORTF & ~LEDS_PORTF_LEDS) | (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTF_LEDS);

-				PORTE = (PORTE & ~LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) | (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTF = (PORTF & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTF_LEDS)) | (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTF_LEDS);

-				PORTE = (PORTE & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS)) | (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PINF  = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTF_LEDS);

-				PINE  = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS);

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return ((PORTF & LEDS_PORTF_LEDS) | (PORTE & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS));

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BLACKCAT/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BLACKCAT/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 778bc321e..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BLACKCAT/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,139 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the BLACKCAT USB JTAG.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_BLACKCAT

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_BLACKCAT BLACKCAT

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the BLACKCAT USB JTAG.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the TCNISO Blackcat USB JTAG (http://www.embeddedcomputers.net/products/BlackcatUSB).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Unknown</td><td>LED0</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.6</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Unknown</td><td>LED1</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.3</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_BLACKCAT_H__

-#define __LEDS_BLACKCAT_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 6)

-

-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 3)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)

-

-			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD |= LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PIND  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUI/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUI/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index cc0c01c8b..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUI/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,143 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Busware BUI.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_BUI

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_BUI BUI

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Busware BUI.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Busware BUI (http://www.busware.de/tiki-index.php?page=BUI).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Red</td><td>RGB LED</td><td>High</td><td>PORTC.2</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Green</td><td>RGB LED</td><td>High</td><td>PORTC.3</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Blue</td><td>RGB LED</td><td>High</td><td>PORTC.4</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_BUI_H__

-#define __LEDS_BUI_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 2)

-

-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 3)

-

-			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 4)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)

-

-			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRC  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTC &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRC  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTC &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTC |= LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTC &= ~LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTC = (PORTC & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTC = (PORTC & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PINC  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return (PORTC & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUMBLEB/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUMBLEB/Buttons.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 96d1eee6d..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUMBLEB/Buttons.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,105 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Fletchtronics BUMBLEB.

- *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_BUMBLEB

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_BUMBLEB BUMBLEB

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Fletchtronics BUMBLEB.

- *

- *  Board specific buttons driver header for the Fletchtronics BUMBLEB (http://fletchtronics.net/bumble-b). The BUMBLEB

- *  third-party board does not include any on-board peripherals, but does have an officially recommended external peripheral

- *  layout for buttons, LEDs and a Joystick.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __BUTTONS_BUMBLEB_H__

-#define __BUTTONS_BUMBLEB_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUMBLEB/Joystick.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUMBLEB/Joystick.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 92c7a2e72..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUMBLEB/Joystick.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,123 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Fletchtronics BUMBLEB.

- *  \copydetails Group_Joystick_BUMBLEB

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Joystick

- *  \defgroup Group_Joystick_BUMBLEB BUMBLEB

- *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Fletchtronics BUMBLEB.

- *

- *  Board specific joystick driver header for the Fletchtronics BUMBLEB (http://fletchtronics.net/bumble-b). The BUMBLEB

- *  third-party board does not include any on-board peripherals, but does have an officially recommended external peripheral

- *  layout for buttons, LEDs and a Joystick.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Left Port Pin</th><th>Up Port Pin</th><th>Right Port Pin</th><th>Down Port Pin</th><th>Press Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>PORTD.2</td><td>PORTD.3</td><td>PORTD.0</td><td>PORTD.1</td><td>PORTD.4</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __JOYSTICK_BUMBLEB_H__

-#define __JOYSTICK_BUMBLEB_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define JOY_MASK                 ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1) | (1 << 2) | (1 << 3) | (1 << 4))

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */

-			#define JOY_LEFT                  (1 << 2)

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */

-			#define JOY_UP                    (1 << 3)

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */

-			#define JOY_RIGHT                 (1 << 0)

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */

-			#define JOY_DOWN                  (1 << 1)

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */

-			#define JOY_PRESS                 (1 << 4)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Joystick_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~JOY_MASK;

-				PORTD |=  JOY_MASK;

-			}

-

-			static inline void Joystick_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~JOY_MASK;

-				PORTD &= ~JOY_MASK;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return (uint8_t)(~PIND & JOY_MASK);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUMBLEB/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUMBLEB/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index dff069785..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUMBLEB/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,149 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Fletchtronics BUMBLEB.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_BUMBLEB

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_BUMBLEB BUMBLEB

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Fletchtronics BUMBLEB.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Fletchtronics BUMBLEB (http://fletchtronics.net/bumble-b). The BUMBLEB

- *  third-party board does not include any on-board peripherals, but does have an officially recommended external

- *  peripheral layout for buttons, LEDs and a Joystick.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>N/A</td><td>User Supplied</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.4</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>N/A</td><td>User Supplied</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.5</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>N/A</td><td>User Supplied</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.6</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED4</td><td>N/A</td><td>User Supplied</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.7</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_BUMBLEB_H__

-#define __LEDS_BUMBLEB_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 4)

-

-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 5)

-

-			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 6)

-

-			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED4        (1 << 7)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)

-

-			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRB  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTB &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRB  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTB &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask)

-			{

-				PORTB |= LedMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask)

-			{

-				PORTB &= ~LedMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask)

-			{

-				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LedMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LedMask) | ActiveMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PINB  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return (PORTB & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/CULV3/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/CULV3/Buttons.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 6f6933b0d..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/CULV3/Buttons.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,103 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Busware CULV3.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_CULV3

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_CULV3 CULV3

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Busware CULV3.

- *

- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Busware CUL V3 (http://busware.de/tiki-index.php?page=CUL).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.2</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __BUTTONS_CULV3_H__

-#define __BUTTONS_CULV3_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 2)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTE |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTE &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return ((PINE & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/CULV3/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/CULV3/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 86700d147..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/CULV3/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,135 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Busware CUL V3.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_CULV3

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_CULV3 CULV3

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Busware CUL V3.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Busware CUL V3 (http://busware.de/tiki-index.php?page=CUL).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Yellow</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTE.6</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_CULV3_H__

-#define __LEDS_CULV3_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 6)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    LEDS_LED1

-

-			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRE  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTE &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-         	}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRE  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTE &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-         	}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTE |= LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTE &= ~LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTE = ((PORTE & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTE = ((PORTE & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PINE  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return (PORTE & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/DUCE/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/DUCE/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 0d31b481c..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/DUCE/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,147 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the DorkbotPDX Duce.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_DUCE

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_DUCE DUCE

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the DorkbotPDX Duce.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the DorkbotPDX Duce (http://dorkbotpdx.org/wiki/duce).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Red</td><td>Bicolor Indicator 1</td><td>High</td><td>PORTC.4</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Green</td><td>Bicolor Indicator 1</td><td>High</td><td>PORTC.5</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Red</td><td>Bicolor Indicator 2</td><td>High</td><td>PORTC.6</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED4</td><td>Green</td><td>Bicolor Indicator 2</td><td>High</td><td>PORTC.7</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_DUCE_H__

-#define __LEDS_DUCE_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 4)

-

-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 5)

-

-			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 6)

-

-			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED4        (1 << 7)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)

-

-			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRC  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTC &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRC  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTC &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTC |= LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTC &= ~LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTC = ((PORTC & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTC = ((PORTC & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PINC  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return (PORTC & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/Buttons.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 82cb204eb..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/Buttons.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,103 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK527.

- *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_EVK527

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_EVK527 EVK527

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK527.

- *

- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK527.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.2</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __BUTTONS_EVK527_H__

-#define __BUTTONS_EVK527_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 2)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTE |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTE &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return ((PINE & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/Dataflash.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/Dataflash.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 53af74186..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/Dataflash.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,220 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel EVK527.

- *  \copydetails Group_Dataflash_EVK527

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash

- *  \defgroup Group_Dataflash_EVK527 EVK527

- *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel EVK527.

- *

- *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel EVK527.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Select Pin</th><th>SPI Port</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>DATAFLASH_CHIP1</td><td>AT45DB321C (4MB)</td><td>PORTE.6</td><td>SPI0</td></tr>

- *  </table> 

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __DATAFLASH_EVK527_H__

-#define __DATAFLASH_EVK527_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "../../../Misc/AT45DB321C.h"

-		#include "../../../Peripheral/SPI.h"

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK                (1 << 6)

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR                 DDRE

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT                PORTE

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS                 1

-

-			/** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP                    DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK

-

-			/** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP1                      0

-

-			/** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash IC. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE                  512

-

-			/** Total number of pages inside the board's dataflash IC. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                      8192

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Initializes the dataflash driver so that commands and data may be sent to an attached dataflash IC.

-			 *  The microcontroller's SPI driver MUST be initialized before any of the dataflash commands are used.

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_Init(void)

-			{

-				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR  |= DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;

-				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT |= DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns a byte from the dataflash.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash

-			 *

-			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte)

-			{

-				return SPI_TransferByte(Byte);

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and ignores the next byte from the dataflash.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)

-			{

-				SPI_SendByte(Byte);

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a dummy byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns the next byte from the dataflash.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void)

-			{

-				return SPI_ReceiveByte();

-			}

-

-			/** Determines the currently selected dataflash chip.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Mask of the currently selected Dataflash chip, either \ref DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP if no chip is selected

-			 *  or a DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is the chip number).

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void)

-			{

-				return (DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT & DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK);

-			}

-

-			/** Selects the given dataflash chip.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in]  ChipMask  Mask of the Dataflash IC to select, in the form of DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is

-			 *              the chip number).

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask)

-			{

-				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT = ((DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT & ~DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK) | ChipMask);

-			}

-

-			/** Deselects the current dataflash chip, so that no dataflash is selected. */

-			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void)

-			{

-				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP);

-			}

-

-			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to

-			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one

-			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside

-			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs

-			 *  are deselected.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from

-			 *                          0 to ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress)

-			{

-				Dataflash_DeselectChip();

-

-				if (PageAddress >= DATAFLASH_PAGES)

-				  return;

-

-				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);

-			}

-

-			/** Toggles the select line of the currently selected dataflash IC, so that it is ready to receive

-			 *  a new command.

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(void)

-			{

-				uint8_t SelectedChipMask = Dataflash_GetSelectedChip();

-

-				Dataflash_DeselectChip();

-				Dataflash_SelectChip(SelectedChipMask);

-			}

-

-			/** Spin-loops while the currently selected dataflash is busy executing a command, such as a main

-			 *  memory page program or main memory to buffer transfer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(void)

-			{

-				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();

-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);

-				while (!(Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_READY));

-				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with

-			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-bit address.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC

-			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress,

-			                                              const uint16_t BufferByte)

-			{

-				Dataflash_SendByte(PageAddress >> 5);

-				Dataflash_SendByte((PageAddress << 3) | (BufferByte >> 8));

-				Dataflash_SendByte(BufferByte);

-			}

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/Joystick.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/Joystick.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 266b14907..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/Joystick.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,130 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel EVK527.

- *  \copydetails Group_Joystick_EVK527

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Joystick

- *  \defgroup Group_Joystick_EVK527 EVK527

- *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel EVK527.

- *

- *  Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel EVK527.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Left Port Pin</th><th>Up Port Pin</th><th>Right Port Pin</th><th>Down Port Pin</th><th>Press Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>PORTF.4</td><td>PORTF.5</td><td>PORTF.7</td><td>PORTC.6</td><td>PORTF.6</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __JOYSTICK_EVK527_H__

-#define __JOYSTICK_EVK527_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define JOY_FMASK                 ((1 << 4) | (1 << 5) | (1 << 6) | (1 << 7))

-			#define JOY_CMASK                 (1 << 6)

-

-			#define JOY_PORTC_MASK_SHIFT      3

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */

-			#define JOY_LEFT                  (1 << 4)

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */

-			#define JOY_RIGHT                 (1 << 7)

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */

-			#define JOY_UP                    (1 << 5)

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */

-			#define JOY_DOWN                 ((1 << 6) >> JOY_PORTC_MASK_SHIFT)

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */

-			#define JOY_PRESS                 (1 << 6)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Joystick_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRF  &= ~JOY_FMASK;

-				DDRC  &= ~JOY_CMASK;

-

-				PORTF |=  JOY_FMASK;

-				PORTC |=  JOY_CMASK;

-			}

-

-			static inline void Joystick_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRF  &= ~JOY_FMASK;

-				DDRC  &= ~JOY_CMASK;

-

-				PORTF &= ~JOY_FMASK;

-				PORTC &= ~JOY_CMASK;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return (((uint8_t)~PINF & JOY_FMASK) | (((uint8_t)~PINC & JOY_CMASK) >> JOY_PORTC_MASK_SHIFT));

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 58483a9ba..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,143 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK527.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_EVK527

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_EVK527 EVK527

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK527.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK527.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.5</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.6</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_EVK527_H__

-#define __LEDS_EVK527_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 5)

-

-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 6)

-

-			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 7)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)

-

-			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD |= LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PIND  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/JMDBU2/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/JMDBU2/Buttons.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 67783ca2b..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/JMDBU2/Buttons.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,103 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Mattairtech JM-DB-U2.

- *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_JMDBU2

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_JMDBU2 JMDBU2

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Mattairtech JM-DB-U2.

- *

- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Mattairtech JM-DB-U2 (http://u2.mattair.net/index.html).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __BUTTONS_JMDBU2_H__

-#define __BUTTONS_JMDBU2_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/JMDBU2/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/JMDBU2/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index d64cdad6d..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/JMDBU2/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,135 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Mattairtech JM-DB-U2.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_JMDBU2

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_JMDBU2 JMDBU2

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Mattairtech JM-DB-U2.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Mattairtech JM-DB-U2 (http://u2.mattair.net/index.html).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.4</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_JMDBU2_H__

-#define __LEDS_JMDBU2_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 4)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    LEDS_LED1

-

-			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD |= LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PIND  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MAXIMUS/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MAXIMUS/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 932bfa14a..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MAXIMUS/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,139 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Maximus.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_MAXIMUS

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_MAXIMUS MAXIMUS

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Maximus.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Maximus (http://www.avrusb.com/).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>LG</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.6</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Red</td><td>LR</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.7</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_MAXIMUS_H__

-#define __LEDS_MAXIMUS_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 6)

-

-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 7)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)

-

-			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRB  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTB &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRB  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTB &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTB |= LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTB &= ~LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PINB  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return (PORTB & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/Buttons.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 36a7bebe9..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/Buttons.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,208 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Micropendous series boards.

- *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_32U2

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_A MICROPENDOUS_A

- *  \brief Board specific Button driver header for the Micropendous A (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/MicropendousA).

- *

- *  See \ref Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 for more details.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_1 MICROPENDOUS_1

- *  \brief Board specific Button driver header for the Micropendous 1 (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/Micropendous1).

- *

- *  See \ref Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 for more details.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_2 MICROPENDOUS_2

- *  \brief Board specific Button driver header for the Micropendous 2 (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/Micropendous2).

- *

- *  See \ref Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 for more details.

- */

- 

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_3 MICROPENDOUS_3

- *  \brief Board specific Button driver header for the Micropendous 3 (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/Micropendous3).

- *

- *  See \ref Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 for more details.

- */

- 

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_4 MICROPENDOUS_4

- *  \brief Board specific Button driver header for the Micropendous 4 (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/Micropendous4).

- *

- *  See \ref Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 for more details.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_DIP MICROPENDOUS_DIP

- *  \brief Board specific Button driver header for the Micropendous DIP (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/MicropendousDIP).

- *

- *  See \ref Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 for more details.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_REV1 MICROPENDOUS_REV1

- *  \brief Board specific Button driver header for the Micropendous Arduino-like Revision 1 (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/Micropendous).

- *

- *  See \ref Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 for more details.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_REV2 MICROPENDOUS_REV2

- *  \brief Board specific Button driver header for the Micropendous Arduino-like Revision 2 (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/Micropendous).

- *

- *  See \ref Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 for more details.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 MICROPENDOUS_32U2

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Micropendous 32U2.

- *

- *  \note There are multiple supported Micropendous boards, compile with <code>BOARD = MICROPENDOUS_{VERSION}</code>.

- *

- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Micropendous 32U2 (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/Micropendous_32U2).

- *

- *  <b>BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_1 and BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_32U2</b>:

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  <b>Other Revisions</b>:

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.2</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __BUTTONS_MICROPENDOUS_H__

-#define __BUTTONS_MICROPENDOUS_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		#if (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_32U2)

-			#define _BOARD_BUTTON1_MASK             (1 << 7)

-			#define _BOARD_BUTTON_PORTLETTER        D

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_A)

-			#define _BOARD_BUTTON1_MASK             (1 << 2)

-			#define _BOARD_BUTTON_PORTLETTER        E

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_1)

-			#define _BOARD_BUTTON1_MASK             (1 << 7)

-			#define _BOARD_BUTTON_PORTLETTER        D

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_2)

-			#define _BOARD_BUTTON1_MASK             (1 << 2)

-			#define _BOARD_BUTTON_PORTLETTER        E

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_3)

-			#define _BOARD_BUTTON1_MASK             (1 << 2)

-			#define _BOARD_BUTTON_PORTLETTER        E

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_4)

-			#define _BOARD_BUTTON1_MASK             (1 << 2)

-			#define _BOARD_BUTTON_PORTLETTER        E

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_DIP)

-			#define _BOARD_BUTTON1_MASK             (1 << 2)

-			#define _BOARD_BUTTON_PORTLETTER        E

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_REV1)

-			#define _BOARD_BUTTON1_MASK             (1 << 2)

-			#define _BOARD_BUTTON_PORTLETTER        E

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_REV2)

-			#define _BOARD_BUTTON1_MASK             (1 << 2)

-			#define _BOARD_BUTTON_PORTLETTER        E

-		#endif

-		

-		#define _BOARD_BUTTON_CONCAT2(Reg, Letter)  Reg ## Letter

-		#define _BOARD_BUTTON_CONCAT(Reg, Letter)   _BOARD_BUTTON_CONCAT2(Reg, Letter)

-

-		#define _BOARD_BUTTON_PORT                 _BOARD_BUTTON_CONCAT(PORT, _BOARD_BUTTON_PORTLETTER)

-		#define _BOARD_BUTTON_PIN                  _BOARD_BUTTON_CONCAT(PIN,  _BOARD_BUTTON_PORTLETTER)

-		#define _BOARD_BUTTON_DDR                  _BOARD_BUTTON_CONCAT(DDR,  _BOARD_BUTTON_PORTLETTER)

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1                _BOARD_BUTTON1_MASK

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)

-			{

-				_BOARD_BUTTON_DDR  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				_BOARD_BUTTON_PORT |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)

-			{

-				_BOARD_BUTTON_DDR  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				_BOARD_BUTTON_PORT &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return ((_BOARD_BUTTON_PIN & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index eeb337711..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,177 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Micropendous-32U2.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_MICROPENDOUS_32U2

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_MICROPENDOUS_REV1 MICROPENDOUS_REV1

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Micropendous Arduino-like Revision 1 (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/Micropendous).

- *

- *  See \ref Group_LEDs_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 for more details.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_MICROPENDOUS_REV2 MICROPENDOUS_REV2

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Micropendous Arduino-like Revision 2 (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/Micropendous).

- *

- *  See \ref Group_LEDs_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 for more details.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 MICROPENDOUS_32U2

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Micropendous-32U2.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Micropendous 32U2 (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/Micropendous_32U2).

- *

- *  <b>BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_32U2</b>:

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.6</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  <b>Other Revisions</b>:

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.1</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_MICROPENDOUS_H__

-#define __LEDS_MICROPENDOUS_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		#if (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_32U2)

-			#define _BOARD_LED1_MASK                (1 << 6)

-			#define _BOARD_LED_PORTLETTER           D

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_REV1)

-			#define _BOARD_LED1_MASK                (1 << 1)

-			#define _BOARD_LED_PORTLETTER           B

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_REV2)

-			#define _BOARD_LED1_MASK                (1 << 1)

-			#define _BOARD_LED_PORTLETTER           B

-		#endif

-		

-		#define _BOARD_LED_CONCAT2(Reg, Letter)     Reg ## Letter

-		#define _BOARD_LED_CONCAT(Reg, Letter)      _BOARD_LED_CONCAT2(Reg, Letter)

-

-		#define _BOARD_LED_PORT                     _BOARD_LED_CONCAT(PORT, _BOARD_LED_PORTLETTER)

-		#define _BOARD_LED_PIN                      _BOARD_LED_CONCAT(PIN,  _BOARD_LED_PORTLETTER)

-		#define _BOARD_LED_DDR                      _BOARD_LED_CONCAT(DDR,  _BOARD_LED_PORTLETTER)

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        _BOARD_LED1_MASK

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    LEDS_LED1

-

-			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				_BOARD_LED_DDR  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				_BOARD_LED_PORT &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				_BOARD_LED_DDR  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				_BOARD_LED_PORT &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				_BOARD_LED_PORT |= LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				_BOARD_LED_PORT &= ~LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				_BOARD_LED_PORT = ((_BOARD_LED_PORT & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				_BOARD_LED_PORT = ((_BOARD_LED_PORT & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				_BOARD_LED_PIN  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return (_BOARD_LED_PORT & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROSIN162/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROSIN162/Buttons.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 01366a71a..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROSIN162/Buttons.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,103 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Microsin AVR-USB162 board.

- *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_MICROSIN162

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_MICROSIN162 MICROSIN162

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Microsin AVR-USB162 board.

- *

- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Microsin AVR-USB162 board (http://microsin.ru/content/view/685/44/).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __BUTTONS_MICROSIN162_H__

-#define __BUTTONS_MICROSIN162_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROSIN162/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROSIN162/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 350703643..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROSIN162/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,135 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Microsin AVR-USB162 board.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_MICROSIN162

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_MICROSIN162 MICROSIN162

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Microsin AVR-USB162 board.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Microsin AVR-USB162 board (http://microsin.ru/content/view/685/44/).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.4</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_MICROSIN162_H__

-#define __LEDS_MICROSIN162_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 4)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    LEDS_LED1

-

-			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTD |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD |= LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD = ((PORTD | LEDS_ALL_LEDS) & ~LEDMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTD = ((PORTD | LEDMask) & ~ActiveMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PIND  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return (~PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MINIMUS/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MINIMUS/Buttons.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 3f1b592d3..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MINIMUS/Buttons.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,103 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the MINIMUS.

- *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_MINIMUS

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_MINIMUS MINIMUS

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the MINIMUS.

- *

- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the MINIMUS.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __BUTTONS_MINIMUS_H__

-#define __BUTTONS_MINIMUS_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MINIMUS/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MINIMUS/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 4889722bd..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MINIMUS/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,143 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the MINIMUS.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_MINIMUS

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_MINIMUS MINIMUS

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the MINIMUS.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Minimus USB (http://www.minimususb.com/).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Red</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.5</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.6</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Blue</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_MINIMUS_H__

-#define __LEDS_MINIMUS_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 5)

-

-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 6)

-

-			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 7)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)

-

-			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTD |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD |=  LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD = ((PORTD | LEDS_ALL_LEDS) & ~LEDMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PIND  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MULTIO/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MULTIO/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 9da569271..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MULTIO/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,161 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Bitwizard Multio.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_MULTIO

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_MULTIO MULTIO

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Bitwizard Multio.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Bitwizard Multio (http://www.bitwizard.nl/wiki/index.php/USB-multio).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.0</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTC.2</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_MULTIO_H__

-#define __LEDS_MULTIO_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define LEDS_PORTD_LEDS       (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)

-			#define LEDS_PORTC_LEDS       LEDS_LED2

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 0)

-

-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 2)

-

-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 7)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)

-

-			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  |=  LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;

-				DDRC  |=  LEDS_PORTC_LEDS;

-			

-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;

-				PORTC &= ~LEDS_PORTC_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;

-				DDRC  &= ~LEDS_PORTC_LEDS;

-			

-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;

-				PORTC &= ~LEDS_PORTC_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD |= (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);

-				PORTC |= (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);

-				PORTC &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD = (PORTD & ~LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) | (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);

-				PORTC = (PORTC & ~LEDS_PORTC_LEDS) | (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTD = (PORTD & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS)) | (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);

-				PORTC = (PORTC & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS)) | (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PIND  = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);

-				PINC  = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS);

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return ((PORTD & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) | (PORTC & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS));

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX162/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX162/Buttons.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 9f02729cc..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX162/Buttons.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,103 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-162 Development Board.

- *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_OLIMEX162

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_OLIMEX162 OLIMEX162

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-162 Development Board.

- *

- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-162 Development Board (http://www.olimex.com/dev/avr-usb-162.html).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __BUTTONS_OLIMEX162_H__

-#define __BUTTONS_OLIMEX162_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX162/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX162/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 0e35eae4a..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX162/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,135 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-162.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_OLIMEX162

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_OLIMEX162 OLIMEX162

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-162.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-162 (http://www.olimex.com/dev/avr-usb-162.html).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Yellow</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.4</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_OLIMEX162_H__

-#define __LEDS_OLIMEX162_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 4)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    LEDS_LED1

-

-			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD |= LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PIND  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX32U4/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX32U4/Buttons.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 4ae89acee..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX32U4/Buttons.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,103 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-32U4 Development Board.

- *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_OLIMEX32U4

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_OLIMEX32U4 OLIMEX32U4

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-32U4 Development Board.

- *

- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-32U4 Development Board (http://www.olimex.com/dev/olimexino-32u4.html).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.2</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __BUTTONS_OLIMEX32U4_H__

-#define __BUTTONS_OLIMEX32U4_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 2)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTE |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTE &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return ((PINE & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX32U4/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX32U4/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 38dde2c74..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX32U4/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,179 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-32U4.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_OLIMEX32U4

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_OLIMEX32U4 OLIMEX32U4

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-32U4.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-32U4 (http://www.olimex.com/dev/olimexino-32u4.html).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>TX</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.5</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Yellow</td><td>RX</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.0</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator (Default Unconnected)</td><td>High</td><td>PORTE.6</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED4</td><td>Yellow</td><td>General Indicator (Default Unconnected)</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.5</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_OLIMEX32U4_H__

-#define __LEDS_OLIMEX32U4_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define LEDS_PORTB_LEDS       (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)

-			#define LEDS_PORTD_LEDS       (LEDS_LED1)

-			#define LEDS_PORTE_LEDS       (LEDS_LED3)

-

-			#define LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT 1

-	#endif

-	

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        ((1 << 5) >> LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT)

-

-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 0)

-			

-			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 5)

-

-			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED4        (1 << 6)

-			

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)

-

-			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRB  |=  LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;

-				PORTB &= ~LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;

-				DDRD  |=  (LEDS_PORTD_LEDS << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT);

-				PORTD &= ~(LEDS_PORTD_LEDS << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT);

-				DDRE  |=  LEDS_PORTE_LEDS;

-				PORTE &= ~LEDS_PORTE_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRB  &= ~LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;

-				PORTB &= ~LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;

-				DDRD  &= ~(LEDS_PORTD_LEDS << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT);

-				PORTD &= ~(LEDS_PORTD_LEDS << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT);

-				DDRE  &= ~LEDS_PORTE_LEDS;

-				PORTE &= ~LEDS_PORTE_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTB |= (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);

-				PORTD |= ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT);

-				PORTE |= (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTB &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);

-				PORTD &= ~((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT);

-				PORTE &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LEDS_PORTB_LEDS) | (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS));

-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~(LEDS_PORTD_LEDS << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT)) |

-				         ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT));

-				PORTE = ((PORTE & ~LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) | (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS));

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS)) | (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS));

-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT)) |

-				         ((ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT));

-				PORTE = ((PORTE & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS)) | (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS));

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PINB  = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);

-				PIND  = ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT);

-				PINE  = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS);

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return ((PORTB & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS) | 

-				        ((PORTD & (LEDS_PORTD_LEDS << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT)) >> LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT) |

-				        (PORTE & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS));

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXISPMK2/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXISPMK2/Buttons.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 70b2467bb..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXISPMK2/Buttons.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,103 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Olimex AVR-ISP-MK2 Development Board.

- *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_OLIMEXISPMK2

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_OLIMEXISPMK2 OLIMEXISPMK2

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Olimex AVR-ISP-MK2.

- *

- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Olimex AVR-ISP-MK2 Development Board (https://www.olimex.com/dev/avr-isp-mk2.html).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __BUTTONS_OLIMEXISPMK2_H__

-#define __BUTTONS_OLIMEXISPMK2_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXISPMK2/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXISPMK2/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index a1b8825da..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXISPMK2/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,143 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Olimex AVR-ISP-MK2 Development Board.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_OLIMEXISPMK2

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_OLIMEXISPMK2 OLIMEXISPMK2

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Olimex AVR-ISP-MK2.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Olimex AVR-ISP-MK2 Development Board (https://www.olimex.com/dev/avr-isp-mk2.html).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Yellow</td><td>Target Power</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.5</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Red</td><td>Activity</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.6</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Green</td><td>Ready</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.7</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_OLIMEXISPMK2_H__

-#define __LEDS_OLIMEXISPMK2_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-	

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 5)

-

-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 6)

-

-			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 7)

-			

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)

-

-			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRB  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTB &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRB  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTB &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTB |= LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTB &= ~LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PINB  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return (PORTB & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXT32U4/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXT32U4/Buttons.h
deleted file mode 100644
index c779c5578..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXT32U4/Buttons.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,103 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-T32U4 Development Board.

- *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_OLIMEXT32U4

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_OLIMEXT32U4 OLIMEXT32U4

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-32U4 Development Board.

- *

- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-T32U4 Development Board (http://www.olimex.com/dev/avr-t32u4.html).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.2</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __BUTTONS_OLIMEXT32U4_H__

-#define __BUTTONS_OLIMEXT32U4_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 2)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTE |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTE &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return ((PINE & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXT32U4/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXT32U4/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index b3e4c701d..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXT32U4/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,169 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-T32U4.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_OLIMEXT32U4

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_OLIMEXT32U4 OLIMEXT32U4

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-T32U4.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-T32U4 (http://www.olimex.com/dev/avr-t32u4.html).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>TX</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.5</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Yellow</td><td>RX</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.0</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>N/A</td><td>General Indicator (Not Mounted)</td><td>High</td><td>PORTE.6</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_OLIMEXT32U4_H__

-#define __LEDS_OLIMEXT32U4_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define LEDS_PORTB_LEDS       (LEDS_LED2)

-			#define LEDS_PORTD_LEDS       (LEDS_LED1)

-			#define LEDS_PORTE_LEDS       (LEDS_LED3)

-	#endif

-	

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 5)

-

-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 0)

-

-			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 6)

-			

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)

-

-			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRB  |=  LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;

-				PORTB &= ~LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;

-				DDRD  |=  LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;

-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;

-				DDRE  |=  LEDS_PORTE_LEDS;

-				PORTE &= ~LEDS_PORTE_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRB  &= ~LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;

-				PORTB &= ~LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;

-				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;

-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;

-				DDRE  &= ~LEDS_PORTE_LEDS;

-				PORTE &= ~LEDS_PORTE_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTB |= (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);

-				PORTD |= (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);

-				PORTE |= (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTB &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);

-				PORTD &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);

-				PORTE &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LEDS_PORTB_LEDS) | (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS));

-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) | (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS));

-				PORTE = ((PORTE & ~LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) | (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS));

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS)) | (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS));

-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS)) | (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS));

-				PORTE = ((PORTE & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS)) | (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS));

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PINB  = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);

-				PIND  = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);

-				PINE  = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS);

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return ((PORTB & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS) | (PORTD & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) | (PORTE & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS));

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/RZUSBSTICK/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/RZUSBSTICK/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index a440b6f00..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/RZUSBSTICK/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,175 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel RZUSBSTICK.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_RZUSBSTICK

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_RZUSBSTICK RZUSBSTICK

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel RZUSBSTICK.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel RZUSBSTICK.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Blue</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Red</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.5</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.6</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Yellow</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.7</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_RZUSBSTICK_H__

-#define __LEDS_RZUSBSTICK_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define LEDS_PORTD_LEDS       (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)

-			#define LEDS_PORTE_LEDS       (LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)

-

-			#define LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT 4

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 7)

-

-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 5)

-

-			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED3        ((1 << 6) >> LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)

-

-			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED4        ((1 << 7) >> LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)

-

-			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  |=  LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;

-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_LED1;

-				PORTD |=  LEDS_LED2;

-

-				DDRE  |=  (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);

-				PORTE |=  (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;

-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;

-

-				DDRE  &= ~(LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);

-				PORTE &= ~(LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD |=  (LEDMask & LEDS_LED1);

-				PORTD &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_LED2);

-				PORTE &= ~((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_LED1);

-				PORTD |=  (LEDMask & LEDS_LED2);

-				PORTE |=  ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD = (((PORTD & ~LEDS_LED1) |  (LEDMask & LEDS_LED1)) |

-				         ((PORTD |  LEDS_LED2) & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_LED2)));

-				PORTE = ((PORTE | (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)) &

-				        ~((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT));

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTD = (((PORTD & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_LED1)) |  (ActiveMask & LEDS_LED1)) |

-				         ((PORTD |  (LEDMask & LEDS_LED2)) & ~(ActiveMask & LEDS_LED2)));

-				PORTE = ((PORTE | ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)) &

-				        ~((ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT));

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PIND  = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);

-				PINE  = ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return (((PORTD & LEDS_LED1) | (~PORTD & LEDS_LED2)) |

-				        ((~PORTE & (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)) >> LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT));

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/SPARKFUN8U2/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/SPARKFUN8U2/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 39267055e..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/SPARKFUN8U2/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,135 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Sparkfun ATMEGA8U2 breakout board.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_SPARKFUN8U2

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_SPARKFUN8U2 SPARKFUN8U2

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Sparkfun ATMEGA8U2 breakout board.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Sparkfun ATMEGA8U2 breakout board (http://www.sparkfun.com/products/10277).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTB.4</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_SPARKFUN8U2_H__

-#define __LEDS_SPARKFUN8U2_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 4)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    LEDS_LED1

-

-			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRB  |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTB |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRB  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTB &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTB &= ~LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTB |= LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTB = ((PORTB | LEDS_ALL_LEDS) & ~LEDMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTB = ((PORTB | LEDMask) & ~ActiveMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PINB  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return (~PORTB & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/Buttons.h
deleted file mode 100644
index dcca4d021..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/Buttons.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,103 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel STK525.

- *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_STK525

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_STK525 STK525

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel STK525.

- *

- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel STK525.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.2</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __BUTTONS_STK525_H__

-#define __BUTTONS_STK525_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 2)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTE |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTE &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return ((PINE & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/Dataflash.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/Dataflash.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 1e24c5263..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/Dataflash.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,220 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel STK525.

- *  \copydetails Group_Dataflash_STK525

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash

- *  \defgroup Group_Dataflash_STK525 STK525

- *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel STK525.

- *

- *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel STK525.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Select Pin</th><th>SPI Port</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>DATAFLASH_CHIP1</td><td>AT45DB321C (4MB)</td><td>PORTB.4</td><td>SPI0</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __DATAFLASH_STK525_H__

-#define __DATAFLASH_STK525_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "../../../Misc/AT45DB321C.h"

-		#include "../../../Peripheral/SPI.h"

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK                (1 << 4)

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR                 DDRB

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT                PORTB

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS                 1

-

-			/** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP                    DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK

-

-			/** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP1                      0

-

-			/** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash IC. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE                  512

-

-			/** Total number of pages inside the board's dataflash IC. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                      8192

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Initializes the dataflash driver so that commands and data may be sent to an attached dataflash IC.

-			 *  The microcontroller's SPI driver MUST be initialized before any of the dataflash commands are used.

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_Init(void)

-			{

-				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR  |= DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;

-				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT |= DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns a byte from the dataflash.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash

-			 *

-			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte)

-			{

-				return SPI_TransferByte(Byte);

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and ignores the next byte from the dataflash.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)

-			{

-				SPI_SendByte(Byte);

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a dummy byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns the next byte from the dataflash.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void)

-			{

-				return SPI_ReceiveByte();

-			}

-

-			/** Determines the currently selected dataflash chip.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Mask of the currently selected Dataflash chip, either \ref DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP if no chip is selected

-			 *  or a DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is the chip number).

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void)

-			{

-				return (DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT & DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK);

-			}

-

-			/** Selects the given dataflash chip.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in]  ChipMask  Mask of the Dataflash IC to select, in the form of DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is

-			 *              the chip number).

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask)

-			{

-				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT = ((DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT & ~DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK) | ChipMask);

-			}

-

-			/** Deselects the current dataflash chip, so that no dataflash is selected. */

-			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void)

-			{

-				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP);

-			}

-

-			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to

-			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one

-			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside

-			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs

-			 *  are deselected.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from

-			 *                          0 to ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress)

-			{

-				Dataflash_DeselectChip();

-

-				if (PageAddress >= DATAFLASH_PAGES)

-				  return;

-

-				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);

-			}

-

-			/** Toggles the select line of the currently selected dataflash IC, so that it is ready to receive

-			 *  a new command.

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(void)

-			{

-				uint8_t SelectedChipMask = Dataflash_GetSelectedChip();

-

-				Dataflash_DeselectChip();

-				Dataflash_SelectChip(SelectedChipMask);

-			}

-

-			/** Spin-loops while the currently selected dataflash is busy executing a command, such as a main

-			 *  memory page program or main memory to buffer transfer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(void)

-			{

-				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();

-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);

-				while (!(Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_READY));

-				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with

-			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-bit address.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC

-			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress,

-			                                              const uint16_t BufferByte)

-			{

-				Dataflash_SendByte(PageAddress >> 6);

-				Dataflash_SendByte((PageAddress << 2) | (BufferByte >> 8));

-				Dataflash_SendByte(BufferByte);

-			}

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/Joystick.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/Joystick.h
deleted file mode 100644
index dfa86acaa..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/Joystick.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,130 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel STK525.

- *  \copydetails Group_Joystick_STK525

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Joystick

- *  \defgroup Group_Joystick_STK525 STK525

- *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel STK525.

- *

- *  Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel STK525.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Left Port Pin</th><th>Up Port Pin</th><th>Right Port Pin</th><th>Down Port Pin</th><th>Press Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>PORTB.6</td><td>PORTB.7</td><td>PORTE.4</td><td>PORTE.5</td><td>PORTB.5</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __JOYSTICK_STK525_H__

-#define __JOYSTICK_STK525_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define JOY_BMASK                 ((1 << 5) | (1 << 6) | (1 << 7))

-			#define JOY_EMASK                 ((1 << 4) | (1 << 5))

-

-			#define JOY_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT      1

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */

-			#define JOY_LEFT                  (1 << 6)

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */

-			#define JOY_RIGHT                ((1 << 4) >> JOY_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */

-			#define JOY_UP                    (1 << 7)

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */

-			#define JOY_DOWN                 ((1 << 5) >> JOY_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */

-			#define JOY_PRESS                 (1 << 5)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Joystick_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRB  &= ~JOY_BMASK;

-				DDRE  &= ~JOY_EMASK;

-

-				PORTB |=  JOY_BMASK;

-				PORTE |=  JOY_EMASK;

-			}

-

-			static inline void Joystick_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRB  &= ~JOY_BMASK;

-				DDRE  &= ~JOY_EMASK;

-

-				PORTB &= ~JOY_BMASK;

-				PORTE &= ~JOY_EMASK;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return (((uint8_t)~PINB & JOY_BMASK) | (((uint8_t)~PINE & JOY_EMASK) >> JOY_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT));

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 48ac4860c..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,147 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel STK525.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_STK525

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_STK525 STK525

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel STK525.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel STK525.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.4</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.5</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.6</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED4</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_STK525_H__

-#define __LEDS_STK525_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 4)

-

-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 5)

-

-			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 7)

-

-			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED4        (1 << 6)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)

-

-			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD |= LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PIND  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/Buttons.h
deleted file mode 100644
index ec5a7e0e6..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/Buttons.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,103 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel STK526.

- *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_STK526

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_STK526 STK526

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel STK526.

- *

- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel STK526.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __BUTTONS_STK526_H__

-#define __BUTTONS_STK526_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/Dataflash.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/Dataflash.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 07d44b146..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/Dataflash.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,220 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel STK525.

- *  \copydetails Group_Dataflash_STK526

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash

- *  \defgroup Group_Dataflash_STK526 STK526

- *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel STK525.

- *

- *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel STK525.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Select Pin</th><th>SPI Port</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>DATAFLASH_CHIP1</td><td>AT45DB642D (8MB)</td><td>PORTC.2</td><td>SPI0</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __DATAFLASH_STK526_H__

-#define __DATAFLASH_STK526_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "../../../Misc/AT45DB642D.h"

-		#include "../../../Peripheral/SPI.h"

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK                (1 << 2)

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR                 DDRC

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT                PORTC

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS                 1

-

-			/** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP                    DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK

-

-			/** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP1                      0

-

-			/** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash IC. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE                  1024

-

-			/** Total number of pages inside the board's dataflash IC. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                      8192

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Initializes the dataflash driver so that commands and data may be sent to an attached dataflash IC.

-			 *  The microcontroller's SPI driver MUST be initialized before any of the dataflash commands are used.

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_Init(void)

-			{

-				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR  |= DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;

-				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT |= DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns a byte from the dataflash.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash

-			 *

-			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte)

-			{

-				return SPI_TransferByte(Byte);

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and ignores the next byte from the dataflash.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)

-			{

-				SPI_SendByte(Byte);

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a dummy byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns the next byte from the dataflash.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void)

-			{

-				return SPI_ReceiveByte();

-			}

-

-			/** Determines the currently selected dataflash chip.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Mask of the currently selected Dataflash chip, either \ref DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP if no chip is selected

-			 *  or a DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is the chip number).

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void)

-			{

-				return (DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT & DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK);

-			}

-

-			/** Selects the given dataflash chip.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in]  ChipMask  Mask of the Dataflash IC to select, in the form of DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is

-			 *              the chip number).

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask)

-			{

-				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT = ((DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT & ~DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK) | ChipMask);

-			}

-

-			/** Deselects the current dataflash chip, so that no dataflash is selected. */

-			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void)

-			{

-				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP);

-			}

-

-			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to

-			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one

-			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside

-			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs

-			 *  are deselected.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from

-			 *                          0 to ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress)

-			{

-				Dataflash_DeselectChip();

-

-				if (PageAddress >= DATAFLASH_PAGES)

-				  return;

-

-				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);

-			}

-

-			/** Toggles the select line of the currently selected dataflash IC, so that it is ready to receive

-			 *  a new command.

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(void)

-			{

-				uint8_t SelectedChipMask = Dataflash_GetSelectedChip();

-

-				Dataflash_DeselectChip();

-				Dataflash_SelectChip(SelectedChipMask);

-			}

-

-			/** Spin-loops while the currently selected dataflash is busy executing a command, such as a main

-			 *  memory page program or main memory to buffer transfer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(void)

-			{

-				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();

-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);

-				while (!(Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_READY));

-				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with

-			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-bit address.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC

-			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress,

-			                                              const uint16_t BufferByte)

-			{

-				Dataflash_SendByte(PageAddress >> 5);

-				Dataflash_SendByte((PageAddress << 3) | (BufferByte >> 8));

-				Dataflash_SendByte(BufferByte);

-			}

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/Joystick.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/Joystick.h
deleted file mode 100644
index bc5f489ed..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/Joystick.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,123 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel STK526.

- *  \copydetails Group_Joystick_STK526

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Joystick

- *  \defgroup Group_Joystick_STK526 STK526

- *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel STK526.

- *

- *  Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel STK526.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Left Port Pin</th><th>Up Port Pin</th><th>Right Port Pin</th><th>Down Port Pin</th><th>Press Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>PORTB.4</td><td>PORTB.5</td><td>PORTB.6</td><td>PORTB.7</td><td>PORTB.0</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __JOYSTICK_STK526_H__

-#define __JOYSTICK_STK526_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define JOY_BMASK                 ((1 << 0) | (1 << 4) | (1 << 5) | (1 << 6) | (1 << 7))

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */

-			#define JOY_LEFT                  (1 << 4)

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */

-			#define JOY_RIGHT                 (1 << 6)

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */

-			#define JOY_UP                    (1 << 5)

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */

-			#define JOY_DOWN                  (1 << 7)

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */

-			#define JOY_PRESS                 (1 << 0)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Joystick_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRB  &= ~JOY_BMASK;

-

-				PORTB |=  JOY_BMASK;

-			}

-

-			static inline void Joystick_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRB  &= ~JOY_BMASK;

-

-				PORTB &= ~JOY_BMASK;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return ((uint8_t)~PINB & JOY_BMASK);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index d9bb3b99b..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,147 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel STK526.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_STK526

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_STK526 STK526

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel STK526.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel STK526.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.1</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.0</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.5</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED4</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.4</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_STK526_H__

-#define __LEDS_STK526_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 1)

-

-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 0)

-

-			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 5)

-

-			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED4        (1 << 4)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)

-

-			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD |= LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PIND  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TEENSY/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TEENSY/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 8f0cfafb2..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TEENSY/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,176 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the PJRC Teensy 1.x/2.x boards.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_TEENSY

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_TEENSY2 TEENSY2

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the PJRC Teensy 2 boards.

- *

- *  See \ref Group_LEDs_TEENSY for more details.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_TEENSY TEENSY

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the PJRC Teensy 1.x/2.x boards.

- *

- *  \note For version 2 Teensy boards, compile with <code>BOARD = TEENSY2</code>.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the PJRC Teensy boards (http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/index.html).

- *

- *  <b>TEENSY</b>:

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.6</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  <b>TEENSY2</b>:

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.6</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_TEENSY_H__

-#define __LEDS_TEENSY_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 6)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    LEDS_LED1

-

-			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-

-				#if (BOARD == BOARD_TEENSY2)

-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				#else

-				PORTD |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				#endif

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				#if (BOARD == BOARD_TEENSY2)

-				PORTD |=  LEDMask;

-				#else

-				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;

-				#endif

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				#if (BOARD == BOARD_TEENSY2)

-				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;

-				#else

-				PORTD |=  LEDMask;

-				#endif

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				#if (BOARD == BOARD_TEENSY2)

-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);

-				#else

-				PORTD = ((PORTD | LEDS_ALL_LEDS) & ~LEDMask);

-				#endif

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				#if (BOARD == BOARD_TEENSY2)

-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);

-				#else

-				PORTD = ((PORTD | LEDMask) & ~ActiveMask);

-				#endif

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PIND  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				#if (BOARD == BOARD_TEENSY2)

-				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-				#else

-				return (~PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-				#endif

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TUL/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TUL/Buttons.h
deleted file mode 100644
index a8e104128..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TUL/Buttons.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,103 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the TUL.

- *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_TUL

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_TUL TUL

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the TUL.

- *

- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Busware TUL (http://www.busware.de/tiki-index.php?page=TUL).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.2</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __BUTTONS_TUL_H__

-#define __BUTTONS_TUL_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 2)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTE |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTE &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return ((PINE & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TUL/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TUL/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 494396bfc..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TUL/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,135 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Busware TUL.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_TUL

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_TUL TUL

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Busware TUL.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Busware TUL (http://www.busware.de/tiki-index.php?page=TUL).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTF.0</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_TUL_H__

-#define __LEDS_TUL_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 0)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    LEDS_LED1

-

-			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRF  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTF &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRF  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTF &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTF |= LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTF &= ~LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTF = ((PORTF & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTF = ((PORTF & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PINF  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return (PORTF & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/UDIP/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/UDIP/Buttons.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 3e0bede07..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/UDIP/Buttons.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,103 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the UDIP.

- *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_UDIP

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_UDIP UDIP

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the UDIP.

- *

- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Linnix UDIP (http://linnix.com/udip/).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __BUTTONS_UDIP_H__

-#define __BUTTONS_UDIP_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/UDIP/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/UDIP/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 1cff6fc69..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/UDIP/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,163 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Linnix UDIP.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_UDIP

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_UDIP UDIP

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Linnix UDIP.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Linnix UDIP (http://linnix.com/udip/).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>Bicolor Indicator 1</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.6</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Red</td><td>Bicolor Indicator 1</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.5</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Green</td><td>Bicolor Indicator 2</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.5</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED4</td><td>Red</td><td>Bicolor Indicator 2</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.4</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_UDIP_H__

-#define __LEDS_UDIP_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define LEDS_PORTB_LEDS       (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)

-			#define LEDS_PORTD_LEDS       (LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)

-

-			#define LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT 1

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 6)

-

-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 5)

-

-			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED3        ((1 << 5) >> LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT)

-

-			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED4        ((1 << 4) >> LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)

-

-			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRB |= LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;

-				DDRD |= (LEDS_PORTD_LEDS << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRB &= ~LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;

-				DDRD &= ~(LEDS_PORTD_LEDS << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTB |= (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);

-				PORTD |= ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTB &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);

-				PORTD &= ~((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTB = (PORTB & ~LEDS_PORTB_LEDS) | (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);

-				PORTD = (PORTD & ~(LEDS_PORTD_LEDS << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT)) |

-				        ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTB = (PORTB & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS)) | (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);

-				PORTD = (PORTD & ~((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT)) |

-				        ((ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PINB  = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);

-				PIND  = ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT);

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return ((PORTB & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS) | ((PORTD & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) >> LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT));

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/UNO/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/UNO/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index c7e09d4cb..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/UNO/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,139 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Arduino Uno.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_UNO

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_UNO UNO

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Arduino Uno.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Arduino Uno (http://arduino.cc/en/Main/ArduinoBoardUno).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Yellow</td><td>RX</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.4</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Yellow</td><td>TX</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.5</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_UNO_H__

-#define __LEDS_UNO_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 4)

-

-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 5)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)

-

-			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTD |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD |= LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD = ((PORTD | LEDS_ALL_LEDS) & ~LEDMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTD = ((PORTD | LEDMask) & ~ActiveMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PIND  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USB2AX/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USB2AX/Buttons.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 3775e5c84..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USB2AX/Buttons.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,113 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Paranoid Studio USB2AX.

- *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_USB2AX

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_USB2AX_V3 USB2AX_V3

- *  \brief Board specific Button driver header for the Paranoid Studio USB2AX revision 3.

- *

- *  See \ref Group_Buttons_USB2AX for more details.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_USB2AX USB2AX

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Paranoid Studio USB2AX.

- *

- *  \note For version 3 USB2AX boards, compile with <code>BOARD = USB2AX_V3</code>.

- *

- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Paranoid Studio USB2AX (http://paranoidstudio.assembla.com/wiki/show/paranoidstudio/USB2AX).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __BUTTONS_USB2AX_H__

-#define __BUTTONS_USB2AX_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USB2AX/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USB2AX/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index b8d2db01d..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USB2AX/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,196 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Paranoid Studio USB2AX.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_USB2AX

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

- 

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_USB2AX_V3 USB2AX_V3

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Paranoid Studio USB2AX revision 3.

- *

- *  See \ref Group_LEDs_USB2AX for more details.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_USB2AX USB2AX

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Paranoid Studio USB2AX.

- *

- *  \note For version 3 USB2AX boards, compile with <code>BOARD = USB2AX_V3</code>.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Paranoid Studio USB2AX (http://paranoidstudio.assembla.com/wiki/show/paranoidstudio/USB2AX).

- *

- *  <b>USB2AX</b>:

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTC.6</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  <b>USB2AX_V3</b>:

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.1</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_USB2AX_H__

-#define __LEDS_USB2AX_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#if (BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX)

-				#define USB2AX_LEDS_LED1   (1 << 6)

-			#else

-				#define USB2AX_LEDS_LED1   (1 << 1)			

-			#endif

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        USB2AX_LEDS_LED1

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    LEDS_LED1

-

-			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				#if (BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX)

-				DDRC  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTC &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;				

-				#else

-				DDRD  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;				

-				#endif				

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				#if (BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX)

-				DDRC  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTC &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;				

-				#else

-				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;				

-				#endif				

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				#if (BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX)

-				PORTC |= LEDMask;				

-				#else

-				PORTD |= LEDMask;

-				#endif

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				#if (BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX)

-				PORTC &= ~LEDMask;

-				#else

-				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;

-				#endif

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				#if (BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX)

-				PORTC = ((PORTC & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);				

-				#else

-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);

-				#endif

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				#if (BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX)

-				PORTC = ((PORTC & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);				

-				#else

-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);

-				#endif

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				#if (BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX)

-				PINC  = LEDMask;				

-				#else

-				PIND  = LEDMask;

-				#endif

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				#if (BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX)

-				return (PORTC & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);				

-				#else

-				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-				#endif

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBFOO/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBFOO/Buttons.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 876939cb7..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBFOO/Buttons.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,103 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Kernel Concepts USBFOO.

- *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_USBFOO

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_USBFOO USBFOO

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Kernel Concepts USBFOO.

- *

- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Kernel Concepts USBFOO (http://shop.kernelconcepts.de/product_info.php?products_id=102).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __BUTTONS_USBFOO_H__

-#define __BUTTONS_USBFOO_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBFOO/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBFOO/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 7d093df18..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBFOO/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,135 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Kernel Concepts USBFOO.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_USBFOO

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_USBFOO USBFOO

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Kernel Concepts USBFOO.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Kernel Concepts USBFOO (http://shop.kernelconcepts.de/product_info.php?products_id=102).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.4</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_USBFOO_H__

-#define __LEDS_USBFOO_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 4)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    LEDS_LED1

-

-			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTD |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD |= LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD = ((PORTD | LEDS_ALL_LEDS) & ~LEDMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTD = ((PORTD | LEDMask) & ~ActiveMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PIND  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return (~PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/Buttons.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 63a3ae274..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/Buttons.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,103 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel USBKEY.

- *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_USBKEY

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_USBKEY USBKEY

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel USBKEY.

- *

- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel USBKEY.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.2</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __BUTTONS_USBKEY_H__

-#define __BUTTONS_USBKEY_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 2)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTE |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTE &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return ((PINE & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/Dataflash.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/Dataflash.h
deleted file mode 100644
index c47cfa9c2..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/Dataflash.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,229 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel USBKEY.

- *  \copydetails Group_Dataflash_USBKEY

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash

- *  \defgroup Group_Dataflash_USBKEY USBKEY

- *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel USBKEY.

- *

- *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel USBKEY board.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Select Pin</th><th>SPI Port</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>DATAFLASH_CHIP1</td><td>AT45DB642D (8MB)</td><td>PORTE.0</td><td>SPI0</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>DATAFLASH_CHIP2</td><td>AT45DB642D (8MB)</td><td>PORTE.1</td><td>SPI0</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __DATAFLASH_USBKEY_H__

-#define __DATAFLASH_USBKEY_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "../../../Misc/AT45DB642D.h"

-		#include "../../../Peripheral/SPI.h"

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK                ((1 << 1) | (1 << 0))

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR                 DDRE

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT                PORTE

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS                 2

-

-			/** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP                    DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK

-

-			/** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP1                      (1 << 1)

-

-			/** Mask for the second dataflash chip selected. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP2                      (1 << 0)

-

-			/** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash ICs. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE                  1024

-

-			/** Total number of pages inside each of the board's dataflash ICs. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                      8192

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Initializes the dataflash driver so that commands and data may be sent to an attached dataflash IC.

-			 *  The microcontroller's SPI driver MUST be initialized before any of the dataflash commands are used.

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_Init(void)

-			{

-				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR  |= DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;

-				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT |= DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns a byte from the dataflash.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash

-			 *

-			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte)

-			{

-				return SPI_TransferByte(Byte);

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and ignores the next byte from the dataflash.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)

-			{

-				SPI_SendByte(Byte);

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a dummy byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns the next byte from the dataflash.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void)

-			{

-				return SPI_ReceiveByte();

-			}

-

-			/** Determines the currently selected dataflash chip.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Mask of the currently selected Dataflash chip, either \ref DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP if no chip is selected

-			 *  or a DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is the chip number).

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void)

-			{

-				return (DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT & DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK);

-			}

-

-			/** Selects the given dataflash chip.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in]  ChipMask  Mask of the Dataflash IC to select, in the form of DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is

-			 *              the chip number).

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask)

-			{

-				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT = ((DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT & ~DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK) | ChipMask);

-			}

-

-			/** Deselects the current dataflash chip, so that no dataflash is selected. */

-			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void)

-			{

-				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP);

-			}

-

-			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to

-			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one

-			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside

-			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs

-			 *  are deselected.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from

-			 *                          0 to ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress)

-			{

-				Dataflash_DeselectChip();

-

-				if (PageAddress >= (DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))

-				  return;

-

-				if (PageAddress & 0x01)

-				  Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);

-				else

-				  Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);

-			}

-

-			/** Toggles the select line of the currently selected dataflash IC, so that it is ready to receive

-			 *  a new command.

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(void)

-			{

-				uint8_t SelectedChipMask = Dataflash_GetSelectedChip();

-

-				Dataflash_DeselectChip();

-				Dataflash_SelectChip(SelectedChipMask);

-			}

-

-			/** Spin-loops while the currently selected dataflash is busy executing a command, such as a main

-			 *  memory page program or main memory to buffer transfer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(void)

-			{

-				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();

-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);

-				while (!(Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_READY));

-				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with

-			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-bit address.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC

-			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress,

-			                                              const uint16_t BufferByte)

-			{

-				PageAddress >>= 1;

-

-				Dataflash_SendByte(PageAddress >> 5);

-				Dataflash_SendByte((PageAddress << 3) | (BufferByte >> 8));

-				Dataflash_SendByte(BufferByte);

-			}

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/Joystick.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/Joystick.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 9e9320ea0..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/Joystick.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,130 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel USBKEY.

- *  \copydetails Group_Joystick_USBKEY

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Joystick

- *  \defgroup Group_Joystick_USBKEY USBKEY

- *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel USBKEY.

- *

- *  Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel USBKEY.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Left Port Pin</th><th>Up Port Pin</th><th>Right Port Pin</th><th>Down Port Pin</th><th>Press Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>PORTB.6</td><td>PORTB.7</td><td>PORTE.4</td><td>PORTE.5</td><td>PORTB.5</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __JOYSTICK_USBKEY_H__

-#define __JOYSTICK_USBKEY_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define JOY_BMASK                 ((1 << 5) | (1 << 6) | (1 << 7))

-			#define JOY_EMASK                 ((1 << 4) | (1 << 5))

-

-			#define JOY_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT      1

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */

-			#define JOY_LEFT                  (1 << 6)

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */

-			#define JOY_RIGHT                ((1 << 4) >> JOY_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */

-			#define JOY_UP                    (1 << 7)

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */

-			#define JOY_DOWN                 ((1 << 5) >> JOY_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */

-			#define JOY_PRESS                 (1 << 5)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Joystick_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRB  &= ~JOY_BMASK;

-				DDRE  &= ~JOY_EMASK;

-

-				PORTB |=  JOY_BMASK;

-				PORTE |=  JOY_EMASK;

-			}

-

-			static inline void Joystick_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRB  &= ~JOY_BMASK;

-				DDRE  &= ~JOY_EMASK;

-

-				PORTB &= ~JOY_BMASK;

-				PORTE &= ~JOY_EMASK;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return (((uint8_t)~PINB & JOY_BMASK) | (((uint8_t)~PINE & JOY_EMASK) >> JOY_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT));

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 77cab1ecf..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,147 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel USBKEY.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_USBKEY

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_USBKEY USBKEY

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel USBKEY.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel USBKEY.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Red</td><td>Bicolor Indicator 1</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.4</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Green</td><td>Bicolor Indicator 1</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.5</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Red</td><td>Bicolor Indicator 2</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.6</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED4</td><td>Green</td><td>Bicolor Indicator 2</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_USBKEY_H__

-#define __LEDS_USBKEY_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 4)

-

-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 5)

-

-			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 7)

-

-			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED4        (1 << 6)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)

-

-			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD |= LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PIND  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBTINYMKII/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBTINYMKII/Buttons.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 29e73b7b5..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBTINYMKII/Buttons.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,103 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for Tom's USBTINY MKII.

- *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_USBTINYMKII

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_USBTINYMKII USBTINYMKII

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for Tom's USBTINY MKII.

- *

- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for Tom's USBTINY MKII (http://tom-itx.dyndns.org:81/~webpage/).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __BUTTONS_USBTINYMKII_H__

-#define __BUTTONS_USBTINYMKII_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBTINYMKII/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBTINYMKII/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 0e6192ee3..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBTINYMKII/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,143 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for Tom's USBTINY MKII.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_USBTINYMKII

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_USBTINYMKII USBTINYMKII

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for Tom's USBTINY MKII.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for Tom's USBTINY MKII (http://tom-itx.dyndns.org:81/~webpage/).

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Red</td><td>Bicolor Indicator 1</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.6</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Green</td><td>Bicolor Indicator 1</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.7</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Red</td><td>Target Power</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.5</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_USBTINYMKII_H__

-#define __LEDS_USBTINYMKII_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 6)

-

-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 7)

-

-			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 5)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)

-

-			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRB  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTB &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRB  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTB &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask)

-			{

-				PORTB |= LedMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask)

-			{

-				PORTB &= ~LedMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask)

-			{

-				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LedMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LedMask) | ActiveMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PINB  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return (PORTB & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/XPLAIN/Dataflash.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/XPLAIN/Dataflash.h
deleted file mode 100644
index ef428b0dc..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/XPLAIN/Dataflash.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,243 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the original Atmel XPLAIN.

- *  \copydetails Group_Dataflash_XPLAIN

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash

- *  \defgroup Group_Dataflash_XPLAIN_REV1 XPLAIN_REV1

- *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the original Atmel XPLAIN, revision 1.

- *

- *  See \ref Group_Dataflash_XPLAIN for more details.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash

- *  \defgroup Group_Dataflash_XPLAIN XPLAIN

- *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the original Atmel XPLAIN.

- *

- *  \note For the first revision XPLAIN board, compile with <code>BOARD = BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1</code>.

- *

- *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel XPLAIN.

- *

- *  <b>Revision 1 Boards</b>:

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Select Pin</th><th>SPI Port</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>DATAFLASH_CHIP1</td><td>AT45DB041D (512KB)</td><td>PORTB.5</td><td>SPI0</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  <b>Other Board Revisions</b>:

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Select Pin</th><th>SPI Port</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>DATAFLASH_CHIP1</td><td>AT45DB642D (8MB)</td><td>PORTB.5</td><td>SPI0</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __DATAFLASH_XPLAIN_H__

-#define __DATAFLASH_XPLAIN_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-		

-		#include "../../../Misc/AT45DB642D.h"

-		#include "../../../Peripheral/SPI.h"

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK                (1 << 5)

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR                 DDRB

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT                PORTB

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS                 1

-

-			/** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP                    DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK

-

-			/** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP1                      0

-

-			#if ((BOARD != BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))

-				/** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash ICs. */

-				#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE              1024

-

-				/** Total number of pages inside each of the board's dataflash ICs. */

-				#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                  8192

-			#else

-				#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE              256

-

-				#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                  2048

-			#endif

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Initializes the dataflash driver so that commands and data may be sent to an attached dataflash IC.

-			 *  The microcontroller's SPI driver MUST be initialized before any of the dataflash commands are used.

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_Init(void)

-			{

-				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR  |= DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;

-				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT |= DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns a byte from the dataflash.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash

-			 *

-			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte)

-			{

-				return SPI_TransferByte(Byte);

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and ignores the next byte from the dataflash.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)

-			{

-				SPI_SendByte(Byte);

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a dummy byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns the next byte from the dataflash.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void)

-			{

-				return SPI_ReceiveByte();

-			}

-

-			/** Determines the currently selected dataflash chip.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Mask of the currently selected Dataflash chip, either \ref DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP if no chip is selected

-			 *  or a DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is the chip number).

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void)

-			{

-				return (DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT & DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK);

-			}

-

-			/** Selects the given dataflash chip.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in]  ChipMask  Mask of the Dataflash IC to select, in the form of DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is

-			 *              the chip number).

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask)

-			{

-				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT = ((DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT & ~DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK) | ChipMask);

-			}

-

-			/** Deselects the current dataflash chip, so that no dataflash is selected. */

-			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void)

-			{

-				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP);

-			}

-

-			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to

-			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one

-			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside

-			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs

-			 *  are deselected.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from

-			 *                          0 to ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress)

-			{

-				Dataflash_DeselectChip();

-

-				if (PageAddress >= DATAFLASH_PAGES)

-				  return;

-

-				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);

-			}

-

-			/** Toggles the select line of the currently selected dataflash IC, so that it is ready to receive

-			 *  a new command.

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(void)

-			{

-				uint8_t SelectedChipMask = Dataflash_GetSelectedChip();

-

-				Dataflash_DeselectChip();

-				Dataflash_SelectChip(SelectedChipMask);

-			}

-

-			/** Spin-loops while the currently selected dataflash is busy executing a command, such as a main

-			 *  memory page program or main memory to buffer transfer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(void)

-			{

-				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();

-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);

-				while (!(Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_READY));

-				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with

-			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-bit address.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC

-			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress,

-			                                              const uint16_t BufferByte)

-			{

-				Dataflash_SendByte(PageAddress >> 5);

-				Dataflash_SendByte((PageAddress << 3) | (BufferByte >> 8));

-				Dataflash_SendByte(BufferByte);

-			}

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/XPLAIN/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/XPLAIN/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index c7d74591d..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/XPLAIN/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,142 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the original Atmel XPLAIN.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_XPLAIN

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_XPLAIN_REV1 XPLAIN_REV1

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the original Atmel XPLAIN, revision 1.

- *

- *  See \ref Group_LEDs_XPLAIN for more details.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_XPLAIN XPLAIN

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the original Atmel XPLAIN.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel XPLAIN.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTB.6</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_XPLAIN_H__

-#define __LEDS_XPLAIN_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 6)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    LEDS_LED1

-

-			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				DDRB  |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTB |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRB  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTB &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTB &= ~LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTB |= LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTB = ((PORTB | LEDS_ALL_LEDS) & ~LEDMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,

-			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTB = ((PORTB | LEDMask) & ~ActiveMask);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PINB  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return (~PORTB & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h
deleted file mode 100644
index c5c09bedb..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,178 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Digital button board hardware driver.

- *

- *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the board-specific Buttons driver, for boards containing

- *  physical pushbuttons connected to the microcontroller's GPIO pins.

- *

- *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct Button driver header file for the

- *  currently selected board.

- *

- *  If the \c BOARD value is set to \c BOARD_USER, this will include the \c /Board/Buttons.h file in the user project

- *  directory.

- *

- *  For possible \c BOARD makefile values, see \ref Group_BoardTypes.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_BoardDrivers

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons Buttons Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h

- *  \brief Digital button board hardware driver.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - None

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Hardware buttons driver. This provides an easy to use driver for the hardware buttons present on many boards.

- *  It provides a way to easily configure and check the status of all the buttons on the board so that appropriate

- *  actions can be taken.

- *

- *  If the \c BOARD value is set to \c BOARD_USER, this will include the \c /Board/Buttons.h file in the user project

- *  directory. Otherwise, it will include the appropriate built in board driver header file.

- *

- *  For possible \c BOARD makefile values, see \ref Group_BoardTypes.

- *

- *  \section Sec_ExampleUsage Example Usage

- *  The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical

- *  application.

- *

- *  \code

- *      // Initialize the button driver before first use

- *      Buttons_Init();

- *      

- *      printf("Waiting for button press...\r\n");

- *      

- *      // Loop until a board button has been pressed

- *      uint8_t ButtonPress;

- *      while (!(ButtonPress = Buttons_GetStatus())) {};

- *      

- *      // Display which button was pressed (assuming two board buttons)

- *      printf("Button pressed: %s\r\n", (ButtonPress == BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ? "Button 1" : "Button 2");

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __BUTTONS_H__

-#define __BUTTONS_H__

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../Common/Common.h"

-

-		#if (BOARD == BOARD_NONE)

-			#error The Board Buttons driver cannot be used if the makefile BOARD option is not set.

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBKEY)

-			#include "AVR8/USBKEY/Buttons.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK525)

-			#include "AVR8/STK525/Buttons.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK526)

-			#include "AVR8/STK526/Buttons.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_ATAVRUSBRF01)

-			#include "AVR8/ATAVRUSBRF01/Buttons.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BUMBLEB)

-			#include "AVR8/BUMBLEB/Buttons.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK527)

-			#include "AVR8/EVK527/Buttons.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBTINYMKII)

-			#include "AVR8/USBTINYMKII/Buttons.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BENITO)

-			#include "AVR8/BENITO/Buttons.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_JMDBU2)

-			#include "AVR8/JMDBU2/Buttons.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_OLIMEX162)

-			#include "AVR8/OLIMEX162/Buttons.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBFOO)

-			#include "AVR8/USBFOO/Buttons.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_UDIP)

-			#include "AVR8/UDIP/Buttons.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_CULV3)

-			#include "AVR8/CULV3/Buttons.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MINIMUS)

-			#include "AVR8/MINIMUS/Buttons.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MICROSIN162)

-			#include "AVR8/MICROSIN162/Buttons.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK1101)

-			#include "UC3/EVK1101/Buttons.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_TUL)

-			#include "AVR8/TUL/Buttons.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK1100)

-			#include "UC3/EVK1100/Buttons.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK1104)

-			#include "UC3/EVK1104/Buttons.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_A3BU_XPLAINED)

-			#include "XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/Buttons.h"

-		#elif ((BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX) || (BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX_V3))

-			#include "AVR8/USB2AX/Buttons.h"

-		#elif ((BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_32U2) || (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_A) || \

-		       (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_1)    || (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_2) || \

-		       (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_3)    || (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_4) || \

-		       (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_REV1) || (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_REV2) || \

-		       (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_DIP))

-			#include "AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/Buttons.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_B1_XPLAINED)

-			#include "XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/Buttons.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_OLIMEX32U4)

-			#include "AVR8/OLIMEX32U4/Buttons.h"		

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_OLIMEXT32U4)

-			#include "AVR8/OLIMEXT32U4/Buttons.h"		

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_OLIMEXISPMK2)

-			#include "AVR8/OLIMEXISPMK2/Buttons.h"	

-		#else

-			#include "Board/Buttons.h"

-		#endif

-

-	/* Pseudo-Functions for Doxygen: */

-	#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/** Initializes the buttons driver, so that the current button position can be read. This sets the appropriate

-		 *  I/O pins to an inputs with pull-ups enabled.

-		 *

-		 *  This must be called before any Button driver functions are used.

-		 */

-		static inline void Buttons_Init(void);

-

-		/** Disables the buttons driver, releasing the I/O pins back to their default high-impedance input mode. */

-		static inline void Buttons_Disable(void);

-

-		/** Returns a mask indicating which board buttons are currently pressed.

-		 *

-		 *  \return Mask indicating which board buttons are currently pressed.

-		 */

-		static inline uint_reg_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-	#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 944ea5ffe..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,252 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Master include file for the board dataflash IC driver.

- *  \brief Atmel Dataflash storage IC board hardware driver.

- *

- *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the board-specific Atmel dataflash driver, for boards containing

- *  Atmel Dataflash ICs for external non-volatile storage.

- *

- *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct dataflash driver header file for

- *  the currently selected board.

- *

- *  If the \c BOARD value is set to \c BOARD_USER, this will include the \c /Board/Dataflash.h file in the user project

- *  directory.

- *

- *  For possible \c BOARD makefile values, see \ref Group_BoardTypes.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_BoardDrivers

- *  \defgroup Group_Dataflash Dataflash Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h

- *  \brief Atmel Dataflash storage IC board hardware driver.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - None

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Dataflash driver. This module provides an easy to use interface for the Dataflash ICs located on many boards,

- *  for the storage of large amounts of data into the Dataflash's non-volatile memory.

- *

- *  If the \c BOARD value is set to \c BOARD_USER, this will include the \c /Board/Dataflash.h file in the user project

- *  directory. Otherwise, it will include the appropriate built in board driver header file.

- *

- *  For possible \c BOARD makefile values, see \ref Group_BoardTypes.

- *

- *  \section Sec_ExampleUsage Example Usage

- *  The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical

- *  application.

- *

- *  \code

- *      // Initialize the SPI and board Dataflash drivers before first use

- *      SPI_Init(SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2 | SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST | SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING |

- *               SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING | SPI_MODE_MASTER);

- *      Dataflash_Init();

- *      

- *      uint8_t WriteBuffer[DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE];

- *      uint8_t ReadBuffer[DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE];

- *      

- *      // Fill page write buffer with a repeating pattern

- *      for (uint16_t i = 0; i < DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE; i++)

- *        WriteBuffer[i] = (i & 0xFF);

- *      

- *      // Must select the chip of interest first before operating on it

- *      Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);

- *      

- *      // Write to the Dataflash's first internal memory buffer

- *      printf("Writing data to first dataflash buffer:\r\n");

- *      Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);

- *      Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);

- *      

- *      for (uint16_t i = 0; i < DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE; i++)

- *        Dataflash_SendByte(WriteBuffer[i]);

- *      

- *      // Commit the Dataflash's first memory buffer to the non-volatile FLASH memory

- *      printf("Committing page to non-volatile memory page index 5:\r\n");

- *      Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);

- *      Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(5, 0);

- *      Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();

- *      

- *      // Read the page from non-volatile FLASH memory into the Dataflash's second memory buffer

- *      printf("Reading data into second dataflash buffer:\r\n");

- *      Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2);

- *      Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(5, 0);

- *      Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();

- *      

- *      // Read the Dataflash's second internal memory buffer

- *      Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF2READ);

- *      Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);

- *      

- *      for (uint16_t i = 0; i < DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE; i++)

- *        ReadBuffer[i] = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();

- *      

- *      // Deselect the chip after use

- *      Dataflash_DeselectChip();

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __DATAFLASH_H__

-#define __DATAFLASH_H__

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				#define __GET_DATAFLASH_MASK2(x, y) x ## y

-				#define __GET_DATAFLASH_MASK(x)     __GET_DATAFLASH_MASK2(DATAFLASH_CHIP,x)

-			#endif

-

-			/** Retrieves the Dataflash chip select mask for the given Dataflash chip index.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] index  Index of the dataflash chip mask to retrieve

-			 *

-			 *  \return Mask for the given Dataflash chip's /CS pin

-			 */

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(index)      __GET_DATAFLASH_MASK(index)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Initializes the dataflash driver so that commands and data may be sent to an attached dataflash IC.

-			 *

-			 *  \note The microcontroller's physical interface driver connected to the Dataflash IC must be initialized before

-			 *        any of the dataflash commands are used. This is usually a SPI hardware port, but on some devices/boards may

-			 *        be a USART operating in SPI Master mode.

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_Init(void);

-

-			/** Determines the currently selected dataflash chip.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Mask of the currently selected Dataflash chip, either \ref DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP if no chip is selected

-			 *  or a \c DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is the chip number).

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-

-			/** Selects the given dataflash chip.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in]  ChipMask  Mask of the Dataflash IC to select, in the form of \c DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is

-			 *              the chip number).

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-

-			/** Deselects the current dataflash chip, so that no dataflash is selected. */

-			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-

-			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to

-			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one

-			 *  dataflash IC, this will select \ref DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside

-			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs

-			 *  are deselected.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from

-			 *                          0 to ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress);

-

-			/** Toggles the select line of the currently selected dataflash IC, so that it is ready to receive

-			 *  a new command.

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(void);

-

-			/** Spin-loops while the currently selected dataflash is busy executing a command, such as a main

-			 *  memory page program or main memory to buffer transfer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(void);

-

-			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with

-			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-bit address.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC

-			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress,

-			                                              const uint16_t BufferByte);

-

-			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns a byte from the dataflash.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash

-			 *

-			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-

-			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and ignores the next byte from the dataflash.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-

-			/** Sends a dummy byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns the next byte from the dataflash.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-

-		/* Includes: */

-			#if (BOARD == BOARD_NONE)

-				#error The Board Dataflash driver cannot be used if the makefile BOARD option is not set.

-			#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBKEY)

-				#include "AVR8/USBKEY/Dataflash.h"

-			#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK525)

-				#include "AVR8/STK525/Dataflash.h"

-			#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK526)

-				#include "AVR8/STK526/Dataflash.h"

-			#elif ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))

-				#include "AVR8/XPLAIN/Dataflash.h"

-			#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK527)

-				#include "AVR8/EVK527/Dataflash.h"

-			#elif (BOARD == BOARD_A3BU_XPLAINED)

-				#include "XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/Dataflash.h"

-			#elif (BOARD == BOARD_B1_XPLAINED)

-				#include "XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/Dataflash.h"

-			#else

-				#include "Board/Dataflash.h"

-			#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 640939a93..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,144 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Digital joystick board hardware driver.

- *

- *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the board-specific Joystick driver, for boards containing a

- *  digital joystick.

- *

- *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct joystick driver header file for the

- *  currently selected board.

- *

- *  If the \c BOARD value is set to \c BOARD_USER, this will include the \c /Board/Joystick.h file in the user project

- *  directory.

- *

- *  For possible \c BOARD makefile values, see \ref Group_BoardTypes.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_BoardDrivers

- *  \defgroup Group_Joystick Joystick Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h

- *  \brief Digital joystick board hardware driver.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - None

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Hardware Joystick driver. This module provides an easy to use interface to control the hardware digital Joystick

- *  located on many boards.

- *

- *  If the \c BOARD value is set to \c BOARD_USER, this will include the \c /Board/Joystick.h file in the user project

- *  directory. Otherwise, it will include the appropriate built in board driver header file.

- *

- *  For possible \c BOARD makefile values, see \ref Group_BoardTypes.

- *

- *  \section Sec_ExampleUsage Example Usage

- *  The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical

- *  application.

- *

- *  \code

- *      // Initialize the board Joystick driver before first use

- *      Joystick_Init();

- *      

- *      printf("Waiting for joystick movement...\r\n");

- *      

- *      // Loop until a the joystick has been moved

- *      uint8_t JoystickMovement;

- *      while (!(JoystickMovement = Joystick_GetStatus())) {};

- *      

- *      // Display which direction the joystick was moved in

- *      printf("Joystick moved:\r\n");

- *      

- *      if (JoystickMovement & (JOY_UP | JOY_DOWN))

- *        printf("%s ", (JoystickMovement & JOY_UP) ? "Up" : "Down");

- *      

- *      if (JoystickMovement & (JOY_LEFT | JOY_RIGHT))

- *        printf("%s ", (JoystickMovement & JOY_LEFT) ? "Left" : "Right");

- *      

- *      if (JoystickMovement & JOY_PRESS)

- *        printf("Pressed");

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __JOYSTICK_H__

-#define __JOYSTICK_H__

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../Common/Common.h"

-

-		#if (BOARD == BOARD_NONE)

-			#error The Board Joystick driver cannot be used if the makefile BOARD option is not set.

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBKEY)

-			#include "AVR8/USBKEY/Joystick.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK525)

-			#include "AVR8/STK525/Joystick.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK526)

-			#include "AVR8/STK526/Joystick.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BUMBLEB)

-			#include "AVR8/BUMBLEB/Joystick.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK527)

-			#include "AVR8/EVK527/Joystick.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK1101)

-			#include "UC3/EVK1101/Joystick.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK1100)

-			#include "UC3/EVK1100/Joystick.h"

-		#else

-			#include "Board/Joystick.h"

-		#endif

-

-	/* Pseudo-Functions for Doxygen: */

-	#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/** Initializes the joystick driver so that the joystick position can be read. This sets the appropriate

-		 *  I/O pins to inputs with their pull-ups enabled.

-		 */

-		static inline void Joystick_Init(void);

-

-		/** Disables the joystick driver, releasing the I/O pins back to their default high-impedance input mode. */

-		static inline void Joystick_Disable(void);

-

-		/** Returns the current status of the joystick, as a mask indicating the direction the joystick is

-		 *  currently facing in (multiple bits can be set).

-		 *

-		 *  \return Mask indicating the joystick direction - see corresponding board specific Joystick.h file

-		 *          for direction masks.

-		 */

-		static inline uint_reg_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-	#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 96438d0da..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,274 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief LED board hardware driver.

- *

- *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the board-specific LED driver, for boards containing user

- *  controllable LEDs.

- *

- *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct LED driver header file for the

- *  currently selected board.

- *

- *  If the \c BOARD value is set to \c BOARD_USER, this will include the \c /Board/LEDs.h file in the user project

- *  directory.

- *

- *  For possible \c BOARD makefile values, see \ref Group_BoardTypes.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_BoardDrivers

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs LEDs Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h

- *  \brief LED board hardware driver.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - None

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Hardware LEDs driver. This provides an easy to use driver for the hardware LEDs present on many boards. It

- *  provides an interface to configure, test and change the status of all the board LEDs.

- *

- *  If the \c BOARD value is set to \c BOARD_USER, this will include the \c /Board/LEDs.h file in the user project

- *  directory. Otherwise, it will include the appropriate built in board driver header file. If the BOARD value

- *  is set to \c BOARD_NONE, this driver is silently disabled.

- *

- *  For possible \c BOARD makefile values, see \ref Group_BoardTypes.

- *

- *  \note To make code as compatible as possible, it is assumed that all boards carry a minimum of four LEDs. If

- *        a board contains less than four LEDs, the remaining LED masks are defined to 0 so as to have no effect.

- *        If other behavior is desired, either alias the remaining LED masks to existing LED masks via the -D

- *        switch in the project makefile, or alias them to nothing in the makefile to cause compilation errors when

- *        a non-existing LED is referenced in application code. Note that this means that it is possible to make

- *        compatible code for a board with no LEDs by making a board LED driver (see \ref Page_WritingBoardDrivers)

- *        which contains only stub functions and defines no LEDs.

- *

- *  \section Sec_ExampleUsage Example Usage

- *  The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical

- *  application.

- *

- *  \code

- *      // Initialize the board LED driver before first use

- *      LEDs_Init();

- *      

- *      // Turn on each of the four LEDs in turn

- *      LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1);

- *      Delay_MS(500);

- *      LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED2);

- *      Delay_MS(500);

- *      LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED3);

- *      Delay_MS(500);

- *      LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED4);

- *      Delay_MS(500);

- *      

- *      // Turn on all LEDs

- *      LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

- *      Delay_MS(1000);

- *      

- *      // Turn on LED 1, turn off LED 2, leaving LEDs 3 and 4 in their current state

- *      LEDs_ChangeLEDs((LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2), LEDS_LED1);

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_H__

-#define __LEDS_H__

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../Common/Common.h"

-

-		#if (BOARD == BOARD_NONE)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void) {};

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void) {};

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint_reg_t LEDMask) {};

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint_reg_t LEDMask) {};

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint_reg_t LEDMask) {};

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint_reg_t LEDMask, const uint_reg_t ActiveMask) {};

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint_reg_t LEDMask) {};

-			static inline uint_reg_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) { return 0; }

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBKEY)

-			#include "AVR8/USBKEY/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK525)

-			#include "AVR8/STK525/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK526)

-			#include "AVR8/STK526/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_RZUSBSTICK)

-			#include "AVR8/RZUSBSTICK/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_ATAVRUSBRF01)

-			#include "AVR8/ATAVRUSBRF01/LEDs.h"

-		#elif ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))

-			#include "AVR8/XPLAIN/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BUMBLEB)

-			#include "AVR8/BUMBLEB/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK527)

-			#include "AVR8/EVK527/LEDs.h"

-		#elif ((BOARD == BOARD_TEENSY) || (BOARD == BOARD_TEENSY2))

-			#include "AVR8/TEENSY/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBTINYMKII)

-			#include "AVR8/USBTINYMKII/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BENITO)

-			#include "AVR8/BENITO/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_JMDBU2)

-			#include "AVR8/JMDBU2/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_OLIMEX162)

-			#include "AVR8/OLIMEX162/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBFOO)

-			#include "AVR8/USBFOO/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_UDIP)

-			#include "AVR8/UDIP/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BUI)

-			#include "AVR8/BUI/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_UNO)

-			#include "AVR8/UNO/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_CULV3)

-			#include "AVR8/CULV3/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BLACKCAT)

-			#include "AVR8/BLACKCAT/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MAXIMUS)

-			#include "AVR8/MAXIMUS/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MINIMUS)

-			#include "AVR8/MINIMUS/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_ADAFRUITU4)

-			#include "AVR8/ADAFRUITU4/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MICROSIN162)

-			#include "AVR8/MICROSIN162/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_SPARKFUN8U2)

-			#include "AVR8/SPARKFUN8U2/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK1101)

-			#include "UC3/EVK1101/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_TUL)

-			#include "AVR8/TUL/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK1100)

-			#include "UC3/EVK1100/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK1104)

-			#include "UC3/EVK1104/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_A3BU_XPLAINED)

-			#include "XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/LEDs.h"

-		#elif ((BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX) || (BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX_V3))

-			#include "AVR8/USB2AX/LEDs.h"

-		#elif ((BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_REV1) || (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_REV2) || \

-		       (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_32U2))

-			#include "AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_B1_XPLAINED)

-			#include "XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MULTIO)

-			#include "AVR8/MULTIO/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BIGMULTIO)

-			#include "AVR8/BIGMULTIO/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_DUCE)

-			#include "AVR8/DUCE/LEDs.h"

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_OLIMEX32U4)

-			#include "AVR8/OLIMEX32U4/LEDs.h"		

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_OLIMEXT32U4)

-			#include "AVR8/OLIMEXT32U4/LEDs.h"		

-		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_OLIMEXISPMK2)

-			#include "AVR8/OLIMEXISPMK2/LEDs.h"		

-		#else

-			#include "Board/LEDs.h"

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			#if !defined(LEDS_LED1)

-				#define LEDS_LED1      0

-			#endif

-

-			#if !defined(LEDS_LED2)

-				#define LEDS_LED2      0

-			#endif

-

-			#if !defined(LEDS_LED3)

-				#define LEDS_LED3      0

-			#endif

-

-			#if !defined(LEDS_LED4)

-				#define LEDS_LED4      0

-			#endif

-		#endif

-

-	/* Pseudo-Functions for Doxygen: */

-	#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/** Initializes the board LED driver so that the LEDs can be controlled. This sets the appropriate port

-		 *  I/O pins as outputs, and sets the LEDs to default to off.

-		 */

-		static inline void LEDs_Init(void);

-

-		/** Disables the board LED driver, releasing the I/O pins back to their default high-impedance input mode. */

-		static inline void LEDs_Disable(void);

-

-		/** Turns on the LEDs specified in the given LED mask.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in] LEDMask  Mask of the board LEDs to manipulate (see board-specific LEDs.h driver file).

-		 */

-		static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint_reg_t LEDMask);

-

-		/** Turns off the LEDs specified in the given LED mask.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in] LEDMask  Mask of the board LEDs to manipulate (see board-specific LEDs.h driver file).

-		 */

-		static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint_reg_t LEDMask);

-

-		/** Turns off all LEDs not specified in the given LED mask, and turns on all the LEDs in the given LED

-		 *  mask.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in] LEDMask  Mask of the board LEDs to manipulate (see board-specific LEDs.h driver file).

-		 */

-		static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint_reg_t LEDMask);

-

-		/** Turns off all LEDs in the LED mask that are not set in the active mask, and turns on all the LEDs

-		 *  specified in both the LED and active masks.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in] LEDMask     Mask of the board LEDs to manipulate (see board-specific LEDs.h driver file).

-		 *  \param[in] ActiveMask  Mask of whether the LEDs in the LED mask should be turned on or off.

-		 */

-		static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint_reg_t LEDMask,

-		                                   const uint_reg_t ActiveMask);

-

-		/** Toggles all LEDs in the LED mask, leaving all others in their current states.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in] LEDMask  Mask of the board LEDs to manipulate (see board-specific LEDs.h driver file).

-		 */

-		static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint_reg_t LEDMask);

-

-		/** Returns the status of all the board LEDs; set LED masks in the return value indicate that the

-		 *  corresponding LED is on.

-		 *

-		 *  \return Mask of the board LEDs which are currently turned on.

-		 */

-		static inline uint_reg_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-	#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 94843115f..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,66 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_TEMPERATURE_C

-#include "Temperature.h"

-

-#if defined(TEMPERATURE_SENSOR_DRIVER_COMPATIBLE)

-

-static const uint16_t PROGMEM Temperature_Lookup[TEMP_TABLE_SIZE] =

-{

-	0x3B4, 0x3B0, 0x3AB, 0x3A6, 0x3A0, 0x39A, 0x394, 0x38E, 0x388, 0x381, 0x37A, 0x373,

-	0x36B, 0x363, 0x35B, 0x353, 0x34A, 0x341, 0x338, 0x32F, 0x325, 0x31B, 0x311, 0x307,

-	0x2FC, 0x2F1, 0x2E6, 0x2DB, 0x2D0, 0x2C4, 0x2B8, 0x2AC, 0x2A0, 0x294, 0x288, 0x27C,

-	0x26F, 0x263, 0x256, 0x24A, 0x23D, 0x231, 0x225, 0x218, 0x20C, 0x200, 0x1F3, 0x1E7,

-	0x1DB, 0x1CF, 0x1C4, 0x1B8, 0x1AC, 0x1A1, 0x196, 0x18B, 0x180, 0x176, 0x16B, 0x161,

-	0x157, 0x14D, 0x144, 0x13A, 0x131, 0x128, 0x11F, 0x117, 0x10F, 0x106, 0x0FE, 0x0F7,

-	0x0EF, 0x0E8, 0x0E1, 0x0DA, 0x0D3, 0x0CD, 0x0C7, 0x0C0, 0x0BA, 0x0B5, 0x0AF, 0x0AA,

-	0x0A4, 0x09F, 0x09A, 0x096, 0x091, 0x08C, 0x088, 0x084, 0x080, 0x07C, 0x078, 0x074,

-	0x071, 0x06D, 0x06A, 0x067, 0x064, 0x061, 0x05E, 0x05B, 0x058, 0x055, 0x053, 0x050,

-	0x04E, 0x04C, 0x049, 0x047, 0x045, 0x043, 0x041, 0x03F, 0x03D, 0x03C, 0x03A, 0x038

-};

-

-int8_t Temperature_GetTemperature(void)

-{

-	uint16_t Temp_ADC = ADC_GetChannelReading(ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC | ADC_RIGHT_ADJUSTED | TEMP_ADC_CHANNEL_MASK);

-

-	if (Temp_ADC > pgm_read_word(&Temperature_Lookup[0]))

-	  return TEMP_MIN_TEMP;

-

-	for (uint16_t Index = 0; Index < TEMP_TABLE_SIZE; Index++)

-	{

-		if (Temp_ADC > pgm_read_word(&Temperature_Lookup[Index]))

-		  return (Index + TEMP_TABLE_OFFSET_DEGREES);

-	}

-

-	return TEMP_MAX_TEMP;

-}

-

-#endif

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.h
deleted file mode 100644
index ed3aa7bd8..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,147 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief NTC Temperature Sensor board hardware driver.

- *

- *  Master include file for the board temperature sensor driver, for the USB boards which contain a temperature sensor.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_BoardDrivers

- *  \defgroup Group_Temperature Temperature Sensor Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.h

- *  \brief NTC Temperature Sensor board hardware driver.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_TEMPERATURE)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Temperature sensor driver. This provides an easy to use interface for the hardware temperature sensor located

- *  on many boards. It provides an interface to configure the sensor and appropriate ADC channel, plus read out the

- *  current temperature in degrees C. It is designed for and will only work with the temperature sensor located on the

- *  official Atmel USB AVR boards, as each sensor has different characteristics.

- *

- *  \section Sec_ExampleUsage Example Usage

- *  The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical

- *  application.

- *

- *  \code

- *      // Initialize the ADC and board temperature sensor drivers before first use

- *      ADC_Init(ADC_FREE_RUNNING | ADC_PRESCALE_128);

- *      Temperature_Init();

- *      

- *      // Display converted temperature in degrees Celsius

- *      printf("Current Temperature: %d Degrees\r\n", Temperature_GetTemperature());

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __TEMPERATURE_H__

-#define __TEMPERATURE_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if ((BOARD == BOARD_USBKEY) || (BOARD == BOARD_STK525) || \

-		     (BOARD == BOARD_STK526) || (BOARD == BOARD_EVK527))

-			#define TEMPERATURE_SENSOR_DRIVER_COMPATIBLE

-		#endif

-		

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_TEMPERATURE_C) && !defined(TEMPERATURE_SENSOR_DRIVER_COMPATIBLE)

-			#error The selected board does not contain a compatible temperature sensor.

-		#endif

-

-	#if defined(TEMPERATURE_SENSOR_DRIVER_COMPATIBLE)

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../Peripheral/ADC.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** ADC channel number for the temperature sensor. */

-			#define TEMP_ADC_CHANNEL       0

-

-			/** ADC channel MUX mask for the temperature sensor. */

-			#define TEMP_ADC_CHANNEL_MASK  ADC_CHANNEL0

-

-			/** Size of the temperature sensor lookup table, in lookup values */

-			#define TEMP_TABLE_SIZE        120

-

-			/** Minimum returnable temperature from the \ref Temperature_GetTemperature() function. */

-			#define TEMP_MIN_TEMP          TEMP_TABLE_OFFSET_DEGREES

-

-			/** Maximum returnable temperature from the \ref Temperature_GetTemperature() function. */

-			#define TEMP_MAX_TEMP          ((TEMP_TABLE_SIZE - 1) + TEMP_TABLE_OFFSET_DEGREES)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Initializes the temperature sensor driver, including setting up the appropriate ADC channel.

-			 *  This must be called before any other temperature sensor routines.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre The ADC itself (not the ADC channel) must be configured separately before calling the

-			 *       temperature sensor functions.

-			 */

-			static inline void Temperature_Init(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Temperature_Init(void)

-			{

-				ADC_SetupChannel(TEMP_ADC_CHANNEL);

-			}

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Performs a complete ADC on the temperature sensor channel, and converts the result into a

-			 *  valid temperature between \ref TEMP_MIN_TEMP and \ref TEMP_MAX_TEMP in degrees Celsius.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Signed temperature value in degrees Celsius.

-			 */

-			int8_t Temperature_GetTemperature(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define TEMP_TABLE_OFFSET_DEGREES   -21

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	#endif

-	

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/Buttons.h
deleted file mode 100644
index f0f596e84..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/Buttons.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,117 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1100.

- *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_EVK1100

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_EVK1100 EVK1100

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1100.

- *

- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1100.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>SW0 Button</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO88</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON2</td><td>SW1 Button</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO85</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON3</td><td>SW2 Button</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO82</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __BUTTONS_EVK1100_H__

-#define __BUTTONS_EVK1100_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define BUTTONS_PORT          2

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Mask of the first button on the board */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1       (1UL << 24)

-

-			/** Mask of the second button on the board */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON2       (1UL << 21)

-

-			/** Mask of the third button on the board */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON3       (1UL << 18)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].gpers = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].puers = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);

-			}

-

-			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].gperc = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].puerc = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);

-			}

-

-			static inline uint32_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint32_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return (~(AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_MOVE_PORT].pvr & (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2)));

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/Joystick.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/Joystick.h
deleted file mode 100644
index adc6aea62..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/Joystick.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,122 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel EVK1100.

- *  \copydetails Group_Joystick_EVK1100

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Joystick

- *  \defgroup Group_Joystick_EVK1100 EVK1100

- *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel EVK1100.

- *

- *  Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel EVK1100.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Left Port Pin</th><th>Up Port Pin</th><th>Right Port Pin</th><th>Down Port Pin</th><th>Press Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>GPIO25</td><td>GPIO26</td><td>GPIO28</td><td>GPIO27</td><td>GPIO20</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __JOYSTICK_EVK1100_H__

-#define __JOYSTICK_EVK1100_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define JOY_PORT                 0

-			#define JOY_MASK                ((1UL << 28) | (1UL << 27) | (1UL << 26) | (1UL << 25) | (1UL << 20))

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */

-			#define JOY_LEFT                  (1UL << 25)

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */

-			#define JOY_UP                    (1UL << 26)

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */

-			#define JOY_RIGHT                 (1UL << 28)

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */

-			#define JOY_DOWN                  (1UL << 27)

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */

-			#define JOY_PRESS                 (1UL << 20)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Joystick_Init(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PORT].gpers = JOY_MASK;

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PORT].gpers = JOY_MASK;

-			};

-

-			static inline void Joystick_Disable(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PORT].gperc = JOY_MASK;

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PORT].gperc = JOY_MASK;

-			};

-

-			static inline uint32_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint32_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return (uint32_t)(~(AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PORT].pvr & JOY_MASK));

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 3e5ab8516..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,173 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1100.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_EVK1100

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_EVK1100 EVK1100

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1100.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1100.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>LED0 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO51</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Green</td><td>LED1 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO52</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Green</td><td>LED2 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO53</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED4</td><td>Green</td><td>LED3 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO54</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED5</td><td>Green</td><td>LED4 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO59</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED6</td><td>Green</td><td>LED5 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO60</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED7</td><td>Green</td><td>LED6 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO61</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED8</td><td>Green</td><td>LED7 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO62</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_EVK1100_H__

-#define __LEDS_EVK1100_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define LEDS_PORT        1

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1UL << 19)

-

-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1UL << 20)

-

-			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED3        (1UL << 21)

-

-			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED4        (1UL << 22)

-

-			/** LED mask for the fifth LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED5        (1UL << 27)

-

-			/** LED mask for the sixth LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED6        (1UL << 28)

-

-			/** LED mask for the seventh LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED7        (1UL << 29)

-

-			/** LED mask for the eighth LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED8        (1UL << 30)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4 \

-			                          LEDS_LED5 | LEDS_LED6 | LEDS_LED7 | LEDS_LED8)

-

-			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].gpers = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].oders = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs  = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].gperc = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].oderc = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrc  = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrc  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs  = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrc  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask, const uint32_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs  = LEDMask;

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrc  = ActiveMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrt  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint32_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint32_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return (~AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovr & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/Buttons.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 40f8aecf3..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/Buttons.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,113 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1101.

- *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_EVK1101

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_EVK1101 EVK1101

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1101.

- *

- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1101.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>SW0 Button</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO34</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON2</td><td>SW1 Button</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO35</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __BUTTONS_EVK1101_H__

-#define __BUTTONS_EVK1101_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define BUTTONS_PORT          1

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Mask of the first button on the board */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1       (1UL << 2)

-

-			/** Mask of the second button on the board */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON2       (1UL << 3)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].gpers = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].puers = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);

-			}

-

-			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].gperc = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].puerc = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);

-			}

-

-			static inline uint32_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint32_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return (~(AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].pvr & (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2)));

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/Joystick.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/Joystick.h
deleted file mode 100644
index d61c52e33..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/Joystick.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,131 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel EVK1101.

- *  \copydetails Group_Joystick_EVK1101

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Joystick

- *  \defgroup Group_Joystick_EVK1101 EVK1101

- *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel EVK1101.

- *

- *  Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel EVK1101.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Left Port Pin</th><th>Up Port Pin</th><th>Right Port Pin</th><th>Down Port Pin</th><th>Press Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>GPIO38</td><td>GPIO39</td><td>GPIO41</td><td>GPIO40</td><td>GPIO13</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __JOYSTICK_EVK1101_H__

-#define __JOYSTICK_EVK1101_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define JOY_MOVE_PORT            1

-			#define JOY_MOVE_MASK            ((1UL << 6) | (1UL << 7) | (1UL << 8) | (1UL << 9))

-			#define JOY_PRESS_PORT           0

-			#define JOY_PRESS_MASK           (1UL << 13)

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */

-			#define JOY_LEFT                  (1UL << 6)

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */

-			#define JOY_UP                    (1UL << 7)

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */

-			#define JOY_RIGHT                 (1UL << 9)

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */

-			#define JOY_DOWN                  (1UL << 8)

-

-			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */

-			#define JOY_PRESS                 (1UL << 13)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Joystick_Init(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_MOVE_PORT].gpers  = JOY_MOVE_MASK;

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PRESS_PORT].gpers = JOY_PRESS_MASK;

-

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_MOVE_PORT].puers  = JOY_MOVE_MASK;

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PRESS_PORT].puers = JOY_PRESS_MASK;

-			};

-

-			static inline void Joystick_Disable(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_MOVE_PORT].gperc  = JOY_MOVE_MASK;

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PRESS_PORT].gperc = JOY_PRESS_MASK;

-

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_MOVE_PORT].puerc  = JOY_MOVE_MASK;

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PRESS_PORT].puerc = JOY_PRESS_MASK;

-			};

-

-			static inline uint32_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint32_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return (uint32_t)(~((AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_MOVE_PORT].pvr  & JOY_MOVE_MASK) |

-				                    (AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PRESS_PORT].pvr & JOY_PRESS_MASK)));

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 1f1960d1f..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,156 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1101.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_EVK1101

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_EVK1101 EVK1101

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1101.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1101.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>LED0 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO7</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Green</td><td>LED1 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO8</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Green</td><td>LED2 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO21</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED4</td><td>Green</td><td>LED3 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO22</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_EVK1101_H__

-#define __LEDS_EVK1101_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define LEDS_PORT        0

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1UL << 7)

-

-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1UL << 8)

-

-			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED3        (1UL << 21)

-

-			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED4        (1UL << 22)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)

-

-			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].gpers = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].oders = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs  = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].gperc = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].oderc = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrc  = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrc  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs  = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrc  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask, const uint32_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs  = LEDMask;

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrc  = ActiveMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrt  = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint32_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint32_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return (~AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovr & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1104/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1104/Buttons.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 1c6bdd0d4..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1104/Buttons.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,109 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1104.

- *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_EVK1104

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_EVK1104 EVK1104

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1104.

- *

- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1104.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>SW0 Button</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO42</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __BUTTONS_EVK1104_H__

-#define __BUTTONS_EVK1104_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define BUTTONS_PORT          1

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Mask of the first button on the board */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1       (1UL << 10)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].gpers = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].puers = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);

-			}

-

-			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].gperc = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].puerc = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);

-			}

-

-			static inline uint32_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint32_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return (~(AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_MOVE_PORT].pvr & (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2)));

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1104/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1104/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 145955174..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1104/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,174 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1104.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_EVK1104

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_EVK1104 EVK1104

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1104.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1104.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>LED0 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO67</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Green</td><td>LED1 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO101</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Green</td><td>LED2 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO102</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED4</td><td>Green</td><td>LED3 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO105</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_EVK1104_H__

-#define __LEDS_EVK1104_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define LEDS_LEDMASK2    (1UL << 3)

-			#define LEDS_LEDMASK3   ((1UL << 9) | (1UL << 6) | (1UL << 5))

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1UL << 3)

-

-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1UL << 5)

-

-			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED3        (1UL << 9)

-

-			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED4        (1UL << 6)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)

-

-			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[2].gpers = LEDS_LEDMASK2;

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[2].oders = LEDS_LEDMASK2;

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrs  = LEDS_LEDMASK2;

-

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].gpers = LEDS_LEDMASK3;

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].oders = LEDS_LEDMASK3;

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrs  = LEDS_LEDMASK3;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[2].gperc = LEDS_LEDMASK2;

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[2].oderc = LEDS_LEDMASK2;

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrc  = LEDS_LEDMASK2;

-

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].gperc = LEDS_LEDMASK3;

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].oderc = LEDS_LEDMASK3;

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrc  = LEDS_LEDMASK3;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrc  = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK2);

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrc  = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK3);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrs  = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK2);

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrs  = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK3);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrs  = LEDS_LEDMASK2;

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrc  = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK2);

-

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrs  = LEDS_LEDMASK3;

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrc  = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK3);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask, const uint32_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrs  = (LEDMask    & LEDS_LEDMASK2);

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrc  = (ActiveMask & LEDS_LEDMASK2);

-

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrs  = (LEDMask    & LEDS_LEDMASK3);

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrc  = (ActiveMask & LEDS_LEDMASK3);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrt  = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK2);

-				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrt  = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK3);

-			}

-

-			static inline uint32_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint32_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return ((~AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovr & LEDS_LEDMASK2) | (~AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovr & LEDS_LEDMASK3));

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/Buttons.h
deleted file mode 100644
index ebe24a74f..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/Buttons.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,119 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel XMEGA A3BU Xplained.

- *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_A3BU_XPLAINED

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_A3BU_XPLAINED A3BU_XPLAINED

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel XMEGA A3BU Xplained.

- *

- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel XMEGA A3BU Xplained.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>SW0 Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.5</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON2</td><td>SW1 Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTF.1</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON3</td><td>SW2 Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTF.2</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __BUTTONS_A3BU_XPLAINED_H__

-#define __BUTTONS_A3BU_XPLAINED_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include <avr/io.h>

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1          (1 << 5)

-

-			/** Button mask for the second button on the board. */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON2          (1 << 1)

-

-			/** Button mask for the third button on the board. */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON3          (1 << 2)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)

-			{

-				PORTE.OUTCLR   = BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTE.PIN5CTRL = (PORT_OPC_PULLUP_gc | PORT_INVEN_bm);

-

-				PORTF.OUTCLR   = (BUTTONS_BUTTON2 | BUTTONS_BUTTON3);

-				PORTF.PIN1CTRL = (PORT_OPC_PULLUP_gc | PORT_INVEN_bm);

-				PORTF.PIN2CTRL = (PORT_OPC_PULLUP_gc | PORT_INVEN_bm);

-			}

-

-			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)

-			{

-				PORTE.OUTCLR   = BUTTONS_BUTTON1;

-				PORTE.PIN5CTRL = 0;

-				

-				PORTF.OUTCLR   = (BUTTONS_BUTTON2 | BUTTONS_BUTTON3);

-				PORTF.PIN1CTRL = 0;

-				PORTF.PIN2CTRL = 0;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return ((PORTE_IN & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) | (PORTF_IN & (BUTTONS_BUTTON2 | BUTTONS_BUTTON3)));

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/Dataflash.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/Dataflash.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 34f8ce121..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/Dataflash.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,222 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel XMEGA B1 Xplained.

- *  \copydetails Group_Dataflash_B1_XPLAINED

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash

- *  \defgroup Group_Dataflash_B1_XPLAINED B1_XPLAINED

- *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel XMEGA B1 Xplained.

- *

- *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel XMEGA B1 Xplained board.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Select Pin</th><th>SPI Port</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>DATAFLASH_CHIP1</td><td>AT45DB642D (8MB)</td><td>PORTF.4</td><td>USARTD0 (In SPI Mode)</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __DATAFLASH_B1_XPLAINED_H__

-#define __DATAFLASH_B1_XPLAINED_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "../../../Misc/AT45DB642D.h"

-		#include "../../../Peripheral/SerialSPI.h"

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK                (1 << 4)

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT                PORTF

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS                 1

-

-			/** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP                    0

-

-			/** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP1                      (1 << 4)

-

-			/** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash ICs. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE                  1024

-

-			/** Total number of pages inside each of the board's dataflash ICs. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                      8192

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Initializes the dataflash driver so that commands and data may be sent to an attached dataflash IC.

-			 *  The microcontroller's SPI driver MUST be initialized before any of the dataflash commands are used.

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_Init(void)

-			{

-				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT.DIRSET   = DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;

-				

-				PORTCFG.MPCMASK                = DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;

-				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT.PIN0CTRL = PORT_INVEN_bm;	

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns a byte from the dataflash.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash

-			 *

-			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte)

-			{

-				return SerialSPI_TransferByte(&USARTD0, Byte);

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and ignores the next byte from the dataflash.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)

-			{

-				SerialSPI_SendByte(&USARTD0, Byte);

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a dummy byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns the next byte from the dataflash.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void)

-			{

-				return SerialSPI_ReceiveByte(&USARTD0);

-			}

-

-			/** Determines the currently selected dataflash chip.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Mask of the currently selected Dataflash chip, either \ref DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP if no chip is selected

-			 *  or a DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is the chip number).

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void)

-			{

-				return (DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT.OUT & DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK);

-			}

-

-			/** Selects the given dataflash chip.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in]  ChipMask  Mask of the Dataflash IC to select, in the form of DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is

-			 *              the chip number).

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask)

-			{

-				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT.OUTCLR = DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;

-				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT.OUTSET = ChipMask;

-			}

-

-			/** Deselects the current dataflash chip, so that no dataflash is selected. */

-			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void)

-			{

-				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP);

-			}

-

-			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to

-			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one

-			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside

-			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs

-			 *  are deselected.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from

-			 *                          0 to ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress)

-			{

-				Dataflash_DeselectChip();

-

-				if (PageAddress >= (DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))

-				  return;

-

-				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);

-			}

-

-			/** Toggles the select line of the currently selected dataflash IC, so that it is ready to receive

-			 *  a new command.

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(void)

-			{

-				uint8_t SelectedChipMask = Dataflash_GetSelectedChip();

-

-				Dataflash_DeselectChip();

-				Dataflash_SelectChip(SelectedChipMask);

-			}

-

-			/** Spin-loops while the currently selected dataflash is busy executing a command, such as a main

-			 *  memory page program or main memory to buffer transfer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(void)

-			{

-				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();

-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);

-				while (!(Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_READY));

-				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with

-			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-bit address.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC

-			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress,

-			                                              const uint16_t BufferByte)

-			{

-				Dataflash_SendByte(PageAddress >> 5);

-				Dataflash_SendByte((PageAddress << 3) | (BufferByte >> 8));

-				Dataflash_SendByte(BufferByte);

-			}

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index f930844c8..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,144 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel XMEGA A3BU Xplained.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_A3BU_XPLAINED

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_A3BU_XPLAINED A3BU_XPLAINED

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel XMEGA A3BU Xplained.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel XMEGA A3BU Xplained.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Yellow</td><td>LED0 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTR.0</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Yellow</td><td>LED1 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTR.1</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_A3BU_XPLAINED_H__

-#define __LEDS_A3BU_XPLAINED_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include <avr/io.h>

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 0)

-

-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 1)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)

-

-			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				PORTR.DIRSET    = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTR.OUTCLR    = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				

-				PORTCFG.MPCMASK = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTR.PIN0CTRL  = PORT_INVEN_bm;				

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				PORTR.DIRCLR    = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-				PORTR.OUTCLR    = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-

-				PORTCFG.MPCMASK = 0;

-				PORTR.PIN0CTRL  = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTR_OUTSET = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTR_OUTCLR = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTR_OUT = (PORTR.OUT & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTR_OUT = (PORTR.OUT & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTR_OUTTGL = LEDMask;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return (PORTR_OUT & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/Buttons.h
deleted file mode 100644
index ae5445a1f..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/Buttons.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,119 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel XMEGA B1 Xplained.

- *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_B1_XPLAINED

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Buttons

- *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_B1_XPLAINED B1_XPLAINED

- *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel XMEGA B1 Xplained.

- *

- *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel XMEGA B1 Xplained.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>Touch CS0 Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.0</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON2</td><td>Touch CS1 Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.1</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON3</td><td>Touch CS2 Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.2</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON4</td><td>Touch CS3 Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.3</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __BUTTONS_B1_XPLAINED_H__

-#define __BUTTONS_B1_XPLAINED_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include <avr/io.h>

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1          (1 << 0)

-

-			/** Button mask for the second button on the board. */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON2          (1 << 1)

-

-			/** Button mask for the third button on the board. */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON3          (1 << 2)

-

-			/** Button mask for the fourth button on the board. */

-			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON4          (1 << 3)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)

-			{

-				PORTE.OUTSET    = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2 | BUTTONS_BUTTON3 | BUTTONS_BUTTON4);

-

-				PORTCFG.MPCMASK = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2 | BUTTONS_BUTTON3 | BUTTONS_BUTTON4);

-				PORTE.PIN0CTRL  = (PORT_INVEN_bm | PORT_OPC_PULLUP_gc);

-			}

-

-			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)

-			{

-				PORTE.OUTCLR    = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2 | BUTTONS_BUTTON3 | BUTTONS_BUTTON4);

-

-				PORTCFG.MPCMASK = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2 | BUTTONS_BUTTON3 | BUTTONS_BUTTON4);

-				PORTE.PIN0CTRL  = 0;

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return (PORTE_IN & (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2 | BUTTONS_BUTTON3 | BUTTONS_BUTTON4));

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/Dataflash.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/Dataflash.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 2f58c4840..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/Dataflash.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,224 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel XMEGA A3BU Xplained.

- *  \copydetails Group_Dataflash_A3BU_XPLAINED

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash

- *  \defgroup Group_Dataflash_A3BU_XPLAINED A3BU_XPLAINED

- *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel XMEGA A3BU Xplained.

- *

- *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel XMEGA A3BU Xplained board.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Select Pin</th><th>SPI Port</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>DATAFLASH_CHIP1</td><td>AT45DB642D (8MB)</td><td>PORTD.2</td><td>USARTC0 (In SPI Mode, Remapped)</td></tr>

- *  </table> 

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __DATAFLASH_A3BU_XPLAINED_H__

-#define __DATAFLASH_A3BU_XPLAINED_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "../../../Misc/AT45DB642D.h"

-		#include "../../../Peripheral/SerialSPI.h"

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK                (1 << 2)

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT                PORTD

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS                 1

-

-			/** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP                    0

-

-			/** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP1                      (1 << 2)

-

-			/** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash ICs. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE                  1024

-

-			/** Total number of pages inside each of the board's dataflash ICs. */

-			#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                      8192

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Initializes the dataflash driver so that commands and data may be sent to an attached dataflash IC.

-			 *  The microcontroller's SPI driver MUST be initialized before any of the dataflash commands are used.

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_Init(void)

-			{

-				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT.DIRSET   = DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;

-				

-				PORTCFG.MPCMASK                = DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;

-				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT.PIN0CTRL = PORT_INVEN_bm;	

-				

-				PORTC.REMAP |= PORT_USART0_bm;

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns a byte from the dataflash.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash

-			 *

-			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte)

-			{

-				return SerialSPI_TransferByte(&USARTC0, Byte);

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and ignores the next byte from the dataflash.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)

-			{

-				SerialSPI_SendByte(&USARTC0, Byte);

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a dummy byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns the next byte from the dataflash.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void)

-			{

-				return SerialSPI_ReceiveByte(&USARTC0);

-			}

-

-			/** Determines the currently selected dataflash chip.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Mask of the currently selected Dataflash chip, either \ref DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP if no chip is selected

-			 *  or a DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is the chip number).

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void)

-			{

-				return (DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT.OUT & DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK);

-			}

-

-			/** Selects the given dataflash chip.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in]  ChipMask  Mask of the Dataflash IC to select, in the form of DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is

-			 *              the chip number).

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask)

-			{

-				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT.OUTCLR = DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;

-				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT.OUTSET = (ChipMask & DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK);

-			}

-

-			/** Deselects the current dataflash chip, so that no dataflash is selected. */

-			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void)

-			{

-				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP);

-			}

-

-			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to

-			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one

-			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside

-			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs

-			 *  are deselected.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from

-			 *                          0 to ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress)

-			{

-				Dataflash_DeselectChip();

-

-				if (PageAddress >= (DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))

-				  return;

-

-				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);

-			}

-

-			/** Toggles the select line of the currently selected dataflash IC, so that it is ready to receive

-			 *  a new command.

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(void)

-			{

-				uint8_t SelectedChipMask = Dataflash_GetSelectedChip();

-

-				Dataflash_DeselectChip();

-				Dataflash_SelectChip(SelectedChipMask);

-			}

-

-			/** Spin-loops while the currently selected dataflash is busy executing a command, such as a main

-			 *  memory page program or main memory to buffer transfer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(void)

-			{

-				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();

-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);

-				while (!(Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_READY));

-				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with

-			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-bit address.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC

-			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer

-			 */

-			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress,

-			                                              const uint16_t BufferByte)

-			{

-				Dataflash_SendByte(PageAddress >> 5);

-				Dataflash_SendByte((PageAddress << 3) | (BufferByte >> 8));

-				Dataflash_SendByte(BufferByte);

-			}

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/LEDs.h
deleted file mode 100644
index b4b743214..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/LEDs.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,182 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel XMEGA B1 Xplained.

- *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_B1_XPLAINED

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_LEDs

- *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_B1_XPLAINED B1_XPLAINED

- *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel XMEGA B1 Xplained.

- *

- *  Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel XMEGA B1 Xplained.

- *

- *  <table>

- *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Yellow</td><td>LED0 LED</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.4</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Yellow</td><td>LED1 LED</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.5</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Yellow</td><td>LED2 LED</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.6</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED4</td><td>Yellow</td><td>LED3 LED</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.7</td></tr>

- *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED5</td><td>Green</td><td>USB LED</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.4</td></tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __LEDS_B1_XPLAINED_H__

-#define __LEDS_B1_XPLAINED_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include <avr/io.h>

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define LEDS_PORTB_LEDS        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)

-			#define LEDS_PORTE_LEDS        LEDS_LED5

-

-			#define LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT  1

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 4)

-

-			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 5)

-

-			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 6)

-

-			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED4        (1 << 7)

-

-			/** LED mask for the fifth LED on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_LED5       ((1 << 4) >> LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)

-

-			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */

-			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4 | LEDS_LED5)

-

-			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */

-			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)

-			{

-				PORTB.DIRSET    = LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;

-				PORTB.OUTCLR    = LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;

-

-				PORTCFG.MPCMASK = LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;

-				PORTB.PIN0CTRL  = PORT_INVEN_bm;

-

-				PORTE.DIRSET    = (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);

-				PORTE.OUTCLR    = (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)

-			{

-				PORTB.DIRCLR    = LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;

-				PORTB.OUTCLR    = LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;

-				

-				PORTCFG.MPCMASK = 0;

-				PORTB.PIN0CTRL  = LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;

-

-				PORTE.DIRCLR    = (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);

-				PORTE.OUTCLR    = (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTB_OUTSET = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);

-				PORTE_OUTSET = ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTB_OUTCLR = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);

-				PORTE_OUTCLR = ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTB_OUTCLR = LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;

-				PORTE_OUTCLR = (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);

-

-				PORTB_OUTSET = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);

-				PORTE_OUTSET = ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)

-			{

-				PORTB_OUTCLR =  (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);

-				PORTE_OUTCLR = ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);

-			

-				PORTB_OUTSET =  (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);

-				PORTE_OUTSET = ((ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);

-			}

-

-			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)

-			{

-				PORTB_OUTTGL = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);

-				PORTE_OUTTGL = ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);

-			}

-

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)

-			{

-				return ((PORTB_OUT & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS) | (PORTE_OUT & (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)));

-			}

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/AT45DB321C.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/AT45DB321C.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 5c6780f33..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/AT45DB321C.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,100 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Command constants for the Atmel AT45DB321C Dataflash.

- *  \copydetails Group_AT45DB321C

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_MiscDrivers

- *  \defgroup Group_AT45DB321C Atmel AT45DB321C Dataflash Commands

- *  \brief Command constants for the Atmel AT45DB321C Dataflash.

- *

- *  Dataflash command constants for the Atmel AT45DB321C Dataflash IC.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __AT45DB321C_CMDS_H__

-#define __AT45DB321C_CMDS_H__

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** \name Dataflash Status Values */

-			//@{

-			#define DF_STATUS_READY                         (1 << 7)

-			#define DF_STATUS_COMPMISMATCH                  (1 << 6)

-			#define DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON           (1 << 1)

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name Dataflash Commands */

-			//@{

-			#define DF_CMD_GETSTATUS                        0xD7

-

-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1                   0x53

-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2                   0x55

-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1COMP               0x60

-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2COMP               0x61

-			#define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF1                 0x58

-			#define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF2                 0x59

-

-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD                  0xD2

-			#define DF_CMD_CONTARRAYREAD_LF                 0xE8

-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1READ_LF                     0xD4

-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2READ_LF                     0xD6

-

-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE                       0x84

-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE                       0x87

-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE          0x83

-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE          0x86

-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEM                   0x88

-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEM                   0x89

-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF1          0x82

-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF2          0x85

-

-			#define DF_CMD_PAGEERASE                        0x81

-			#define DF_CMD_BLOCKERASE                       0x50

-

-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF              ((char[]){0x3D, 0x2A, 0x7F, 0xCF})

-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE1        0x3D

-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE2        0x2A

-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE3        0x7F

-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE4        0xCF

-

-			#define DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO       0x9F

-			//@}

-

-			/** Manufacturer code for Atmel Corporation, returned by Atmel Dataflash ICs in response to the \c DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO command. */

-			#define DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL                   0x1F

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/AT45DB642D.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/AT45DB642D.h
deleted file mode 100644
index cbd15d63f..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/AT45DB642D.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,116 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Command constants for the Atmel AT45DB642D Dataflash.

- *  \copydetails Group_AT45DB642D

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_MiscDrivers

- *  \defgroup Group_AT45DB642D Atmel AT45DB642D Dataflash Commands

- *  \brief Command constants for the Atmel AT45DB642D Dataflash.

- *

- *  Dataflash command constants for the Atmel AT45DB642D Dataflash IC.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __AT45DB642D_CMDS_H__

-#define __AT45DB642D_CMDS_H__

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** \name Dataflash Status Values */

-			//@{

-			#define DF_STATUS_READY                         (1 << 7)

-			#define DF_STATUS_COMPMISMATCH                  (1 << 6)

-			#define DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON           (1 << 1)

-			#define DF_STATUS_BINARYPAGESIZE_ON             (1 << 0)

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name Dataflash Commands */

-			//@{

-			#define DF_CMD_GETSTATUS                        0xD7

-			#define DF_CMD_POWERDOWN                        0xB9

-			#define DF_CMD_WAKEUP                           0xAB

-

-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1                   0x53

-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2                   0x55

-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1COMP               0x60

-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2COMP               0x61

-			#define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF1                 0x58

-			#define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF2                 0x59

-

-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD                  0xD2

-			#define DF_CMD_CONTARRAYREAD_LF                 0x03

-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1READ_LF                     0xD1

-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2READ_LF                     0xD3

-

-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE                       0x84

-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE                       0x87

-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE          0x83

-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE          0x86

-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEM                   0x88

-			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEM                   0x89

-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF1          0x82

-			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF2          0x85

-

-			#define DF_CMD_PAGEERASE                        0x81

-			#define DF_CMD_BLOCKERASE                       0x50

-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORERASE                      0x7C

-

-			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE                        ((char[]){0xC7, 0x94, 0x80, 0x9A})

-			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE1                  0xC7

-			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE2                  0x94

-			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE3                  0x80

-			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE4                  0x9A

-

-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF              ((char[]){0x3D, 0x2A, 0x7F, 0x9A})

-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE1        0x3D

-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE2        0x2A

-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE3        0x7F

-			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE4        0x9A

-

-			#define DF_CMD_BINARYPAGESIZEMODEON             ((char[]){0x3D, 0x2A, 0x80, 0xA6})

-			#define DF_CMD_BINARYPAGESIZEMODEON_BYTE1       0x3D

-			#define DF_CMD_BINARYPAGESIZEMODEON_BYTE2       0x2A

-			#define DF_CMD_BINARYPAGESIZEMODEON_BYTE3       0x80

-			#define DF_CMD_BINARYPAGESIZEMODEON_BYTE4       0xA6

-

-			#define DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO       0x9F

-			//@}

-

-			/** Manufacturer code for Atmel Corporation, returned by Atmel Dataflash ICs in response to the \c DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO command. */

-			#define DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL                   0x1F

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/RingBuffer.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/RingBuffer.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 6d0f60ffa..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/RingBuffer.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,303 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Lightweight ring (circular) buffer, for fast insertion/deletion of bytes.

- *

- *  Lightweight ring buffer, for fast insertion/deletion. Multiple buffers can be created of

- *  different sizes to suit different needs.

- *

- *  Note that for each buffer, insertion and removal operations may occur at the same time (via

- *  a multi-threaded ISR based system) however the same kind of operation (two or more insertions

- *  or deletions) must not overlap. If there is possibility of two or more of the same kind of

- *  operating occurring at the same point in time, atomic (mutex) locking should be used.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_MiscDrivers

- *  \defgroup Group_RingBuff Generic Byte Ring Buffer - LUFA/Drivers/Misc/RingBuffer.h

- *  \brief Lightweight ring buffer, for fast insertion/deletion of bytes.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - None

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Lightweight ring buffer, for fast insertion/deletion. Multiple buffers can be created of

- *  different sizes to suit different needs.

- *

- *  Note that for each buffer, insertion and removal operations may occur at the same time (via

- *  a multi-threaded ISR based system) however the same kind of operation (two or more insertions

- *  or deletions) must not overlap. If there is possibility of two or more of the same kind of

- *  operating occurring at the same point in time, atomic (mutex) locking should be used.

- *

- *  \section Sec_ExampleUsage Example Usage

- *  The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical

- *  application.

- *

- *  \code

- *      // Create the buffer structure and its underlying storage array

- *      RingBuffer_t Buffer;

- *      uint8_t      BufferData[128];

- *      

- *      // Initialize the buffer with the created storage array

- *      RingBuffer_InitBuffer(&Buffer, BufferData, sizeof(BufferData));

- *      

- *      // Insert some data into the buffer

- *      RingBuffer_Insert(Buffer, 'H');

- *      RingBuffer_Insert(Buffer, 'E');

- *      RingBuffer_Insert(Buffer, 'L');

- *      RingBuffer_Insert(Buffer, 'L');

- *      RingBuffer_Insert(Buffer, 'O');

- *      

- *      // Cache the number of stored bytes in the buffer

- *      uint16_t BufferCount = RingBuffer_GetCount(&Buffer);

- *      

- *      // Printer stored data length

- *      printf("Buffer Length: %d, Buffer Data: \r\n", BufferCount);

- *      

- *      // Print contents of the buffer one character at a time

- *      while (BufferCount--)

- *        putc(RingBuffer_Remove(&Buffer));

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __RING_BUFFER_H__

-#define __RING_BUFFER_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Type Defines: */

-		/** \brief Ring Buffer Management Structure.

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for a new ring buffer object. Buffers should be initialized via a call to

-		 *  \ref RingBuffer_InitBuffer() before use.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint8_t* In; /**< Current storage location in the circular buffer. */

-			uint8_t* Out; /**< Current retrieval location in the circular buffer. */

-			uint8_t* Start; /**< Pointer to the start of the buffer's underlying storage array. */

-			uint8_t* End; /**< Pointer to the end of the buffer's underlying storage array. */

-			uint16_t Size; /**< Size of the buffer's underlying storage array. */

-			uint16_t Count; /**< Number of bytes currently stored in the buffer. */

-		} RingBuffer_t;

-

-	/* Inline Functions: */

-		/** Initializes a ring buffer ready for use. Buffers must be initialized via this function

-		 *  before any operations are called upon them. Already initialized buffers may be reset

-		 *  by re-initializing them using this function.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[out] Buffer   Pointer to a ring buffer structure to initialize.

-		 *  \param[out] DataPtr  Pointer to a global array that will hold the data stored into the ring buffer.

-		 *  \param[out] Size     Maximum number of bytes that can be stored in the underlying data array.

-		 */

-		static inline void RingBuffer_InitBuffer(RingBuffer_t* Buffer, uint8_t* const DataPtr, const uint16_t Size)

-		                                         ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-		static inline void RingBuffer_InitBuffer(RingBuffer_t* Buffer, uint8_t* const DataPtr, const uint16_t Size)

-		{

-			GCC_FORCE_POINTER_ACCESS(Buffer);

-

-			uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask();

-			GlobalInterruptDisable();

-

-			Buffer->In     = DataPtr;

-			Buffer->Out    = DataPtr;

-			Buffer->Start  = &DataPtr[0];

-			Buffer->End    = &DataPtr[Size];

-			Buffer->Size   = Size;

-			Buffer->Count  = 0;

-

-			SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt);

-		}

-

-		/** Retrieves the current number of bytes stored in a particular buffer. This value is computed

-		 *  by entering an atomic lock on the buffer, so that the buffer cannot be modified while the

-		 *  computation takes place. This value should be cached when reading out the contents of the buffer,

-		 *  so that as small a time as possible is spent in an atomic lock.

-		 *

-		 *  \note The value returned by this function is guaranteed to only be the minimum number of bytes

-		 *        stored in the given buffer; this value may change as other threads write new data, thus

-		 *        the returned number should be used only to determine how many successive reads may safely

-		 *        be performed on the buffer.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to a ring buffer structure whose count is to be computed.

-		 *

-		 *  \return Number of bytes currently stored in the buffer.

-		 */

-		static inline uint16_t RingBuffer_GetCount(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-		static inline uint16_t RingBuffer_GetCount(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer)

-		{

-			uint16_t Count;

-

-			uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask();

-			GlobalInterruptDisable();

-

-			Count = Buffer->Count;

-

-			SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt);

-			return Count;

-		}

-

-		/** Retrieves the free space in a particular buffer. This value is computed by entering an atomic lock

-		 *  on the buffer, so that the buffer cannot be modified while the computation takes place.

-		 *

-		 *  \note The value returned by this function is guaranteed to only be the maximum number of bytes

-		 *        free in the given buffer; this value may change as other threads write new data, thus

-		 *        the returned number should be used only to determine how many successive writes may safely

-		 *        be performed on the buffer when there is a single writer thread.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to a ring buffer structure whose free count is to be computed.

-		 *

-		 *  \return Number of free bytes in the buffer.

-		 */

-		static inline uint16_t RingBuffer_GetFreeCount(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-		static inline uint16_t RingBuffer_GetFreeCount(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer)

-		{

-			return (Buffer->Size - RingBuffer_GetCount(Buffer));

-		}

-

-		/** Atomically determines if the specified ring buffer contains any data. This should

-		 *  be tested before removing data from the buffer, to ensure that the buffer does not

-		 *  underflow.

-		 *

-		 *  If the data is to be removed in a loop, store the total number of bytes stored in the

-		 *  buffer (via a call to the \ref RingBuffer_GetCount() function) in a temporary variable

-		 *  to reduce the time spent in atomicity locks.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in,out] Buffer  Pointer to a ring buffer structure to insert into.

-		 *

-		 *  \return Boolean \c true if the buffer contains no free space, false otherwise.

-		 */

-		static inline bool RingBuffer_IsEmpty(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-		static inline bool RingBuffer_IsEmpty(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer)

-		{

-			return (RingBuffer_GetCount(Buffer) == 0);

-		}

-

-		/** Atomically determines if the specified ring buffer contains any free space. This should

-		 *  be tested before storing data to the buffer, to ensure that no data is lost due to a

-		 *  buffer overrun.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in,out] Buffer  Pointer to a ring buffer structure to insert into.

-		 *

-		 *  \return Boolean \c true if the buffer contains no free space, false otherwise.

-		 */

-		static inline bool RingBuffer_IsFull(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-		static inline bool RingBuffer_IsFull(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer)

-		{

-			return (RingBuffer_GetCount(Buffer) == Buffer->Size);

-		}

-

-		/** Inserts an element into the ring buffer.

-		 *

-		 *  \warning Only one execution thread (main program thread or an ISR) may insert into a single buffer

-		 *           otherwise data corruption may occur. Insertion and removal may occur from different execution

-		 *           threads.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in,out] Buffer  Pointer to a ring buffer structure to insert into.

-		 *  \param[in]     Data    Data element to insert into the buffer.

-		 */

-		static inline void RingBuffer_Insert(RingBuffer_t* Buffer, const uint8_t Data) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-		static inline void RingBuffer_Insert(RingBuffer_t* Buffer, const uint8_t Data)

-		{

-			GCC_FORCE_POINTER_ACCESS(Buffer);

-

-			*Buffer->In = Data;

-

-			if (++Buffer->In == Buffer->End)

-			  Buffer->In = Buffer->Start;

-

-			uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask();

-			GlobalInterruptDisable();

-

-			Buffer->Count++;

-

-			SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt);

-		}

-

-		/** Removes an element from the ring buffer.

-		 *

-		 *  \warning Only one execution thread (main program thread or an ISR) may remove from a single buffer

-		 *           otherwise data corruption may occur. Insertion and removal may occur from different execution

-		 *           threads.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in,out] Buffer  Pointer to a ring buffer structure to retrieve from.

-		 *

-		 *  \return Next data element stored in the buffer.

-		 */

-		static inline uint8_t RingBuffer_Remove(RingBuffer_t* Buffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-		static inline uint8_t RingBuffer_Remove(RingBuffer_t* Buffer)

-		{

-			GCC_FORCE_POINTER_ACCESS(Buffer);

-

-			uint8_t Data = *Buffer->Out;

-

-			if (++Buffer->Out == Buffer->End)

-			  Buffer->Out = Buffer->Start;

-

-			uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask();

-			GlobalInterruptDisable();

-

-			Buffer->Count--;

-

-			SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt);

-

-			return Data;

-		}

-

-		/** Returns the next element stored in the ring buffer, without removing it.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in,out] Buffer  Pointer to a ring buffer structure to retrieve from.

-		 *

-		 *  \return Next data element stored in the buffer.

-		 */

-		static inline uint8_t RingBuffer_Peek(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-		static inline uint8_t RingBuffer_Peek(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer)

-		{

-			return *Buffer->Out;

-		}

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 2f71a84b2..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,231 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief ANSI terminal special escape code macros.

- *

- *  ANSI terminal compatible escape sequences. These escape sequences are designed to be concatenated with existing

- *  strings to modify their display on a compatible terminal application.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_MiscDrivers

- *  \defgroup Group_Terminal ANSI Terminal Escape Codes - LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h

- *  \brief ANSI terminal special escape code macros.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - None

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Escape code macros for ANSI compliant text terminals.

- *

- *  \note If desired, the macro \c DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES can be defined in the project makefile and passed to the GCC

- *        compiler via the -D switch to disable the terminal codes without modifying the source, for use with non

- *        compatible terminals (any terminal codes then equate to empty strings).

- *

- *  \section Sec_ExampleUsage Example Usage

- *  The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical

- *  application.

- *

- *  \code

- *      printf("Normal String, "

- *             ESC_BOLD_ON "Bold String, "

- *             ESC_UNDERLINE_ON "Bold and Underlined String"

- *             ESC_RESET ESC_FG_BLUE ESC_BG_YELLOW "Normal Blue-on-Yellow String");

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __TERMINALCODES_H__

-#define __TERMINALCODES_H__

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			#if !defined(DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES)

-				/** Creates an ANSI escape sequence with the specified payload.

-				 *

-				 *  \param[in] EscapeSeq  Payload to encode as an ANSI escape sequence, a \c ESC_* mask.

-				 */

-				#define ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(EscapeSeq)  "\33[" EscapeSeq

-			#else

-				#define ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(EscapeSeq)

-			#endif

-

-			/** \name Text Display Modifier Control Sequences */

-			//@{

-			/** Turns on bold so that any following text is printed to the terminal in bold. */

-			#define ESC_BOLD_ON                     ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("1m")

-

-			/** Turns on italics so that any following text is printed to the terminal in italics. */

-			#define ESC_ITALICS_ON                  ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("3m")

-

-			/** Turns on underline so that any following text is printed to the terminal underlined. */

-			#define ESC_UNDERLINE_ON                ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("4m")

-

-			/** Turns on inverse so that any following text is printed to the terminal in inverted colours. */

-			#define ESC_INVERSE_ON                  ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("7m")

-

-			/** Turns on strikethrough so that any following text is printed to the terminal with a line through the

-			 *  center.

-			 */

-			#define ESC_STRIKETHROUGH_ON            ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("9m")

-

-			/** Turns off bold so that any following text is printed to the terminal in non bold. */

-			#define ESC_BOLD_OFF                    ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("22m")

-

-			/** Turns off italics so that any following text is printed to the terminal in non italics. */

-			#define ESC_ITALICS_OFF                 ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("23m")

-

-			/** Turns off underline so that any following text is printed to the terminal non underlined. */

-			#define ESC_UNDERLINE_OFF               ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("24m")

-

-			/** Turns off inverse so that any following text is printed to the terminal in non inverted colours. */

-			#define ESC_INVERSE_OFF                 ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("27m")

-

-			/** Turns off strikethrough so that any following text is printed to the terminal without a line through

-			 *  the center.

-			 */

-			#define ESC_STRIKETHROUGH_OFF           ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("29m")

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name Text Colour Control Sequences */

-			//@{

-			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to black. */

-			#define ESC_FG_BLACK                    ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("30m")

-

-			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to red. */

-			#define ESC_FG_RED                      ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("31m")

-

-			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to green. */

-			#define ESC_FG_GREEN                    ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("32m")

-

-			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to yellow. */

-			#define ESC_FG_YELLOW                   ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("33m")

-

-			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to blue. */

-			#define ESC_FG_BLUE                     ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("34m")

-

-			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to magenta. */

-			#define ESC_FG_MAGENTA                  ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("35m")

-

-			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to cyan. */

-			#define ESC_FG_CYAN                     ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("36m")

-

-			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to white. */

-			#define ESC_FG_WHITE                    ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("37m")

-

-			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to the terminal's default. */

-			#define ESC_FG_DEFAULT                  ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("39m")

-

-			/** Sets the text background colour to black. */

-			#define ESC_BG_BLACK                    ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("40m")

-

-			/** Sets the text background colour to red. */

-			#define ESC_BG_RED                      ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("41m")

-

-			/** Sets the text background colour to green. */

-			#define ESC_BG_GREEN                    ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("42m")

-

-			/** Sets the text background colour to yellow. */

-			#define ESC_BG_YELLOW                   ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("43m")

-

-			/** Sets the text background colour to blue. */

-			#define ESC_BG_BLUE                     ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("44m")

-

-			/** Sets the text background colour to magenta. */

-			#define ESC_BG_MAGENTA                  ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("45m")

-

-			/** Sets the text background colour to cyan. */

-			#define ESC_BG_CYAN                     ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("46m")

-

-			/** Sets the text background colour to white. */

-			#define ESC_BG_WHITE                    ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("47m")

-

-			/** Sets the text background colour to the terminal's default. */

-			#define ESC_BG_DEFAULT                  ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("49m")

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name Cursor Positioning Control Sequences */

-			//@{

-			/** Saves the current cursor position so that it may be restored with \ref ESC_CURSOR_POS_RESTORE. */

-			#define ESC_CURSOR_POS_SAVE             ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("s")

-

-			/** Restores the cursor position to the last position saved with \ref ESC_CURSOR_POS_SAVE. */

-			#define ESC_CURSOR_POS_RESTORE          ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("u")

-

-			/** Sets the cursor position to the given line and column.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Line    Line number to position the cursor at.

-			 *  \param[in] Column  Column number to position the cursor at.

-			 */

-			#define ESC_CURSOR_POS(Line, Column)    ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(#Line ";" #Column "H")

-

-			/** Moves the cursor up the given number of lines.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Lines  Number of lines to move the cursor position

-			 */

-			#define ESC_CURSOR_UP(Lines)            ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(#Lines "A")

-

-			/** Moves the cursor down the given number of lines.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Lines  Number of lines to move the cursor position

-			 */

-			#define ESC_CURSOR_DOWN(Lines)          ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(#Lines "B")

-

-			/** Moves the cursor to the right the given number of columns.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Columns  Number of columns to move the cursor position

-			 */

-			#define ESC_CURSOR_FORWARD(Columns)     ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(#Columns "C")

-

-			/** Moves the cursor to the left the given number of columns.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Columns  Number of columns to move the cursor position

-			 */

-			#define ESC_CURSOR_BACKWARD(Columns)    ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(#Columns "D")

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name Miscellaneous Control Sequences */

-			//@{

-			/** Resets any escape sequence modifiers back to their defaults. */

-			#define ESC_RESET                       ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("0m")

-

-			/** Erases the entire display, returning the cursor to the top left. */

-			#define ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY               ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("2J")

-

-			/** Erases the current line, returning the cursor to the far left. */

-			#define ESC_ERASE_LINE                  ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("K")

-			//@}

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h
deleted file mode 100644
index ebce11b33..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,75 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Hardware Analogue-to-Digital converter driver.

- *

- *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the device-specific ADC driver, for microcontrollers

- *  containing an ADC.

- *

- *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct ADC driver header file for the

- *  currently selected architecture and microcontroller model.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_PeripheralDrivers

- *  \defgroup Group_ADC ADC Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h

- *  \brief Hardware Analogue-to-Digital converter driver.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - None

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Hardware ADC driver. This module provides an easy to use driver for the hardware ADC

- *  present on many microcontrollers, for the conversion of analogue signals into the

- *  digital domain.

- *

- *  \note The exact API for this driver may vary depending on the target used - see

- *        individual target module documentation for the API specific to your target processor.

- */

-

-#ifndef __ADC_H__

-#define __ADC_H__

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_ADC_H

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)

-			#include "AVR8/ADC_AVR8.h"

-		#else

-			#error The ADC peripheral driver is not currently available for your selected architecture.

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/ADC_AVR8.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/ADC_AVR8.h
deleted file mode 100644
index c002f79f7..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/ADC_AVR8.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,456 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief ADC Peripheral Driver (AVR8)

- *

- *  On-chip Analogue-to-Digital converter (ADC) driver for supported U4, U6 and U7 model AVRs that contain an ADC

- *  peripheral internally.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the ADC driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_ADC

- *  \defgroup Group_ADC_AVR8 ADC Peripheral Driver (AVR8)

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  On-chip Analogue-to-Digital converter (ADC) driver for supported U4, U6 and U7 model AVRs that contain an ADC

- *  peripheral internally.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the ADC driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h.

- *

- *  \section Sec_ExampleUsage Example Usage

- *  The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical

- *  application.

- *

- *  \code

- *      // Initialize the ADC driver before first use

- *      ADC_Init(ADC_FREE_RUNNING | ADC_PRESCALE_32);

- *      

- *      // Must setup the ADC channel to read beforehand

- *      ADC_SetupChannel(1);

- *      

- *      // Perform a single conversion of the ADC channel 1

- *      ADC_GetChannelReading(ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC | ADC_RIGHT_ADJUSTED | ADC_CHANNEL1);

- *      printf("Conversion Result: %d\r\n", ADC_GetResult());

- *      

- *      // Start reading ADC channel 1 in free running (continuous conversion) mode

- *      ADC_StartReading(ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC | ADC_RIGHT_ADJUSTED | ADC_CHANNEL1);

- *      for (;;)

- *      {

- *           while (!(ADC_IsReadingComplete())) {};

- *           printf("Conversion Result: %d\r\n", ADC_GetResult());

- *      }

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __ADC_AVR8_H__

-#define __ADC_AVR8_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_ADC_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-		#if !(defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || \

-		      defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) || \

-			  defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__)  || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__) || \

-			  defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__))

-			#error The ADC peripheral driver is not currently available for your selected microcontroller model.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define _ADC_GET_MUX_MASK2(y)           ADC_CHANNEL ## y

-			#define _ADC_GET_MUX_MASK(y)            _ADC_GET_MUX_MASK2(y)

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** \name ADC Reference Configuration Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** Reference mask, for using the voltage present at the AVR's AREF pin for the ADC reference. */

-			#define ADC_REFERENCE_AREF              0

-

-			/** Reference mask, for using the voltage present at the AVR's AVCC pin for the ADC reference. */

-			#define ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC              (1 << REFS0)

-

-			/** Reference mask, for using the internally generated 2.56V reference voltage as the ADC reference. */

-			#define ADC_REFERENCE_INT2560MV         ((1 << REFS1) | (1 << REFS0))

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name ADC Result Adjustment Configuration Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** Left-adjusts the 10-bit ADC result, so that the upper 8 bits of the value returned by the

-			 *  \ref ADC_GetResult() macro contain the 8 most significant bits of the result.

-			 */

-			#define ADC_LEFT_ADJUSTED               (1 << ADLAR)

-

-			/** Right-adjusts the 10-bit ADC result, so that the lower 8 bits of the value returned by the

-			 *  \ref ADC_GetResult() macro contain the 8 least significant bits of the result.

-			 */

-			#define ADC_RIGHT_ADJUSTED              (0 << ADLAR)

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name ADC Mode Configuration Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** Sets the ADC mode to free running, so that conversions take place continuously as fast as the ADC

-			 *  is capable of at the given input clock speed.

-			 */

-			#define ADC_FREE_RUNNING                (1 << ADATE)

-

-			/** Sets the ADC mode to single conversion, so that only a single conversion will take place before

-			 *  the ADC returns to idle.

-			 */

-			#define ADC_SINGLE_CONVERSION           (0 << ADATE)

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name ADC Prescaler Configuration Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 2 the AVR's system clock. */

-			#define ADC_PRESCALE_2                  (1 << ADPS0)

-

-			/** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 4 the AVR's system clock. */

-			#define ADC_PRESCALE_4                  (1 << ADPS1)

-

-			/** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 8 the AVR's system clock. */

-			#define ADC_PRESCALE_8                  ((1 << ADPS0) | (1 << ADPS1))

-

-			/** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 16 the AVR's system clock. */

-			#define ADC_PRESCALE_16                 (1 << ADPS2)

-

-			/** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 32 the AVR's system clock. */

-			#define ADC_PRESCALE_32                 ((1 << ADPS2) | (1 << ADPS0))

-

-			/** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 64 the AVR's system clock. */

-			#define ADC_PRESCALE_64                 ((1 << ADPS2) | (1 << ADPS1))

-

-			/** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 128 the AVR's system clock. */

-			#define ADC_PRESCALE_128                ((1 << ADPS2) | (1 << ADPS1) | (1 << ADPS0))

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name ADC MUX Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** MUX mask define for the ADC0 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading() and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading(). */

-			#define ADC_CHANNEL0                    (0x00 << MUX0)

-

-			/** MUX mask define for the ADC1 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading() and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading(). */

-			#define ADC_CHANNEL1                    (0x01 << MUX0)

-

-			#if (!(defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))

-				/** MUX mask define for the ADC2 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading() and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading().

-				 *

-				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.

-				 */

-				#define ADC_CHANNEL2                (0x02 << MUX0)

-

-				/** MUX mask define for the ADC3 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading() and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading().

-				 *

-				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.

-				 */

-				#define ADC_CHANNEL3                (0x03 << MUX0)

-			#endif

-

-			/** MUX mask define for the ADC4 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading() and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading(). */

-			#define ADC_CHANNEL4                    (0x04 << MUX0)

-

-			/** MUX mask define for the ADC5 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading() and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading(). */

-			#define ADC_CHANNEL5                    (0x05 << MUX0)

-

-			/** MUX mask define for the ADC6 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading() and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading(). */

-			#define ADC_CHANNEL6                    (0x06 << MUX0)

-

-			/** MUX mask define for the ADC7 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading. */

-			#define ADC_CHANNEL7                    (0x07 << MUX0)

-

-			#if (defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__)  || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))

-				/** MUX mask define for the ADC8 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading() and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading().

-				 *

-				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.

-				 */

-				#define ADC_CHANNEL8                ((1 << 8) | (0x00 << MUX0))

-

-				/** MUX mask define for the ADC9 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading() and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading().

-				 *

-				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.

-				 */

-				#define ADC_CHANNEL9                ((1 << 8) | (0x01 << MUX0))

-

-				/** MUX mask define for the ADC10 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading() and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading().

-				 *

-				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.

-				 */

-				#define ADC_CHANNEL10               ((1 << 8) | (0x02 << MUX0))

-

-				/** MUX mask define for the ADC11 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading() and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading().

-				 *

-				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.

-				 */

-				#define ADC_CHANNEL11               ((1 << 8) | (0x03 << MUX0))

-

-				/** MUX mask define for the ADC12 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading() and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading().

-				 *

-				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.

-				 */

-				#define ADC_CHANNEL12               ((1 << 8) | (0x04 << MUX0))

-

-				/** MUX mask define for the ADC13 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading() and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading().

-				 *

-				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.

-				 */

-				#define ADC_CHANNEL13               ((1 << 8) | (0x05 << MUX0))

-

-				/** MUX mask define for the internal temperature sensor channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading() and

-				 *  \ref ADC_GetChannelReading().

-				 *

-				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.

-				 */

-				#define ADC_INT_TEMP_SENS           ((1 << 8) | (0x07 << MUX0))

-			#endif

-

-			/** MUX mask define for the internal 1.1V band-gap channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading() and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading(). */

-			#define ADC_1100MV_BANDGAP              (0x1E << MUX0)

-

-			/** Retrieves the ADC MUX mask for the given ADC channel number.

-			 *

-			 *  \attention This macro will only work correctly on channel numbers that are compile-time

-			 *             constants defined by the preprocessor.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Channel  Index of the ADC channel whose MUX mask is to be retrieved.

-			 */

-			#define ADC_GET_CHANNEL_MASK(Channel)   _ADC_GET_MUX_MASK(Channel)

-			//@}

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Configures the given ADC channel, ready for ADC conversions. This function sets the

-			 *  associated port pin as an input and disables the digital portion of the I/O to reduce

-			 *  power consumption.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This must only be called for ADC channels with are connected to a physical port

-			 *        pin of the AVR, denoted by its special alternative function ADCx.

-			 *

-			 *  \warning The channel number must be specified as an integer, and <b>not</b> a \c ADC_CHANNEL* mask.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] ChannelIndex  ADC channel number to set up for conversions.

-			 */

-			static inline void ADC_SetupChannel(const uint8_t ChannelIndex)

-			{

-				#if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || \

-					 defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) || \

-					 defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__))

-				DDRF  &= ~(1 << ChannelIndex);

-				DIDR0 |=  (1 << ChannelIndex);

-				#elif (defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__))

-				if (ChannelIndex < 8)

-				{

-					DDRF  &= ~(1 << ChannelIndex);

-					DIDR0 |=  (1 << ChannelIndex);

-				}

-				else if (ChannelIndex == 8)

-				{

-					DDRD  &= ~(1 << 4);

-					DIDR2 |=  (1 << 0);

-				}

-				else if (ChannelIndex < 11)

-				{

-					DDRD  &= ~(1 << (ChannelIndex - 3));

-					DIDR2 |=  (1 << (ChannelIndex - 8));

-				}

-				else

-				{

-					DDRB  &= ~(1 << (ChannelIndex - 7));

-					DIDR2 |=  (1 << (ChannelIndex - 8));

-				}

-				#endif

-			}

-

-			/** De-configures the given ADC channel, re-enabling digital I/O mode instead of analog. This

-			 *  function sets the associated port pin as an input and re-enabled the digital portion of

-			 *  the I/O.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This must only be called for ADC channels with are connected to a physical port

-			 *        pin of the AVR, denoted by its special alternative function ADCx.

-			 *

-			 *  \warning The channel number must be specified as an integer, and <b>not</b> a \c ADC_CHANNEL* mask.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] ChannelIndex  ADC channel number to set up for conversions.

-			 */

-			static inline void ADC_DisableChannel(const uint8_t ChannelIndex)

-			{

-				#if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || \

-					 defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) || \

-					 defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__))

-				DDRF  &= ~(1 << ChannelIndex);

-				DIDR0 &= ~(1 << ChannelIndex);

-				#elif (defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__))

-				if (ChannelIndex < 8)

-				{

-					DDRF  &= ~(1 << ChannelIndex);

-					DIDR0 &= ~(1 << ChannelIndex);

-				}

-				else if (ChannelIndex == 8)

-				{

-					DDRD  &= ~(1 << 4);

-					DIDR2 &= ~(1 << 0);

-				}

-				else if (ChannelIndex < 11)

-				{

-					DDRD  &= ~(1 << (ChannelIndex - 3));

-					DIDR2 &= ~(1 << (ChannelIndex - 8));

-				}

-				else

-				{

-					DDRB  &= ~(1 << (ChannelIndex - 7));

-					DIDR2 &= ~(1 << (ChannelIndex - 8));

-				}

-				#endif

-			}

-

-			/** Starts the reading of the given channel, but does not wait until the conversion has completed.

-			 *  Once executed, the conversion status can be determined via the \ref ADC_IsReadingComplete() macro and

-			 *  the result read via the \ref ADC_GetResult() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  If the ADC has been initialized in free running mode, calling this function once will begin the repeated

-			 *  conversions. If the ADC is in single conversion mode (or the channel to convert from is to be changed),

-			 *  this function must be called each time a conversion is to take place.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] MUXMask  ADC channel mask, reference mask and adjustment mask.

-			 */

-			static inline void ADC_StartReading(const uint16_t MUXMask)

-			{

-				ADMUX = MUXMask;

-

-				#if (defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__)  || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))

-				if (MUXMask & (1 << 8))

-				  ADCSRB |=  (1 << MUX5);

-				else

-				  ADCSRB &= ~(1 << MUX5);

-				#endif

-

-				ADCSRA |= (1 << ADSC);

-			}

-

-			/** Indicates if the current ADC conversion is completed, or still in progress.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean false if the reading is still taking place, or true if the conversion is

-			 *          complete and ready to be read out with \ref ADC_GetResult().

-			 */

-			static inline bool ADC_IsReadingComplete(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool ADC_IsReadingComplete(void)

-			{

-				return ((ADCSRA & (1 << ADIF)) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Retrieves the conversion value of the last completed ADC conversion and clears the reading

-			 *  completion flag.

-			 *

-			 *  \return The result of the last ADC conversion as an unsigned value.

-			 */

-			static inline uint16_t ADC_GetResult(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint16_t ADC_GetResult(void)

-			{

-				ADCSRA |= (1 << ADIF);

-				return ADC;

-			}

-

-			/** Performs a complete single reading from channel, including a polling spin-loop to wait for the

-			 *  conversion to complete, and the returning of the converted value.

-			 *

-			 *  \note For free running mode, the automated conversions should be initialized with a single call

-			 *        to \ref ADC_StartReading() to select the channel and begin the automated conversions, and

-			 *        the results read directly from the \ref ADC_GetResult() instead to reduce overhead.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] MUXMask  Mask comprising of an ADC channel mask, reference mask and adjustment mask.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Converted ADC result for the given ADC channel.

-			 */

-			static inline uint16_t ADC_GetChannelReading(const uint16_t MUXMask) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint16_t ADC_GetChannelReading(const uint16_t MUXMask)

-			{

-				ADC_StartReading(MUXMask);

-

-				while (!(ADC_IsReadingComplete()));

-

-				return ADC_GetResult();

-			}

-

-			/** Initializes the ADC, ready for conversions. This must be called before any other ADC operations.

-			 *  The "mode" parameter should be a mask comprised of a conversion mode (free running or single) and

-			 *  prescaler masks.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Mode  Mask of ADC prescale and mode settings.

-			 */

-			static inline void ADC_Init(const uint8_t Mode) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void ADC_Init(const uint8_t Mode)

-			{

-				ADCSRA = ((1 << ADEN) | Mode);

-			}

-

-			/** Turns off the ADC. If this is called, any further ADC operations will require a call to

-			 *  \ref ADC_Init() before the ADC can be used again.

-			 */

-			static inline void ADC_Disable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void ADC_Disable(void)

-			{

-				ADCSRA = 0;

-			}

-

-			/** Indicates if the ADC is currently enabled.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the ADC subsystem is currently enabled, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool ADC_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool ADC_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return ((ADCSRA & (1 << ADEN)) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/SPI_AVR8.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/SPI_AVR8.h
deleted file mode 100644
index dde3ec5a7..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/SPI_AVR8.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,256 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief SPI Peripheral Driver (AVR8)

- *

- *  On-chip SPI driver for the 8-bit AVR microcontrollers.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the SPI driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_SPI

- *  \defgroup Group_SPI_AVR8 SPI Peripheral Driver (AVR8)

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Driver for the hardware SPI port available on most 8-bit AVR microcontroller models. This

- *  module provides an easy to use driver for the setup and transfer of data over the

- *  AVR's SPI port.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the SPI driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h.

- *

- *  \section Sec_ExampleUsage Example Usage

- *  The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical

- *  application.

- *

- *  \code

- *      // Initialize the SPI driver before first use

- *      SPI_Init(SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2 | SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST | SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING |

- *               SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING | SPI_MODE_MASTER);

- *      

- *      // Send several bytes, ignoring the returned data

- *      SPI_SendByte(0x01);

- *      SPI_SendByte(0x02);

- *      SPI_SendByte(0x03);

- *      

- *      // Receive several bytes, sending a dummy 0x00 byte each time

- *      uint8_t Byte1 = SPI_ReceiveByte();

- *      uint8_t Byte2 = SPI_ReceiveByte();

- *      uint8_t Byte3 = SPI_ReceiveByte();

- *      

- *      // Send a byte, and store the received byte from the same transaction

- *      uint8_t ResponseByte = SPI_TransferByte(0xDC);

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __SPI_AVR8_H__

-#define __SPI_AVR8_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_SPI_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED            (1 << SPE)

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** \name SPI Prescaler Configuration Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** SPI prescaler mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 2. */

-			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2           SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED

-

-			/** SPI prescaler mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 4. */

-			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_4           0

-

-			/** SPI prescaler mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 8. */

-			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_8           (SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED | (1 << SPR0))

-

-			/** SPI prescaler mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 16. */

-			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_16          (1 << SPR0)

-

-			/** SPI prescaler mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 32. */

-			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_32          (SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED | (1 << SPR1))

-

-			/** SPI prescaler mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 64. */

-			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_64          (SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED | (1 << SPR1) | (1 << SPR0))

-

-			/** SPI prescaler mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 128. */

-			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_128         ((1 << SPR1) | (1 << SPR0))

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name SPI SCK Polarity Configuration Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** SPI clock polarity mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that the SCK should lead on the rising edge. */

-			#define SPI_SCK_LEAD_RISING            (0 << CPOL)

-

-			/** SPI clock polarity mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that the SCK should lead on the falling edge. */

-			#define SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING           (1 << CPOL)

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name SPI Sample Edge Configuration Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** SPI data sample mode mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that the data should sampled on the leading edge. */

-			#define SPI_SAMPLE_LEADING             (0 << CPHA)

-

-			/** SPI data sample mode mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that the data should be sampled on the trailing edge. */

-			#define SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING            (1 << CPHA)

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name SPI Data Ordering Configuration Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** SPI data order mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that data should be shifted out MSB first. */

-			#define SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST            (0 << DORD)

-

-			/** SPI data order mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that data should be shifted out LSB first. */

-			#define SPI_ORDER_LSB_FIRST            (1 << DORD)

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name SPI Mode Configuration Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** SPI mode mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that the SPI interface should be initialized into slave mode. */

-			#define SPI_MODE_SLAVE                 (0 << MSTR)

-

-			/** SPI mode mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that the SPI interface should be initialized into master mode. */

-			#define SPI_MODE_MASTER                (1 << MSTR)

-			//@}

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Initializes the SPI subsystem, ready for transfers. Must be called before calling any other

-			 *  SPI routines.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] SPIOptions  SPI Options, a mask consisting of one of each of the \c SPI_SPEED_*,

-			 *                         \c SPI_SCK_*, \c SPI_SAMPLE_*, \c SPI_ORDER_* and \c SPI_MODE_* masks.

-			 */

-			static inline void SPI_Init(const uint8_t SPIOptions)

-			{

-				/* Prevent high rise times on PB.0 (/SS) from forcing a change to SPI slave mode */

-				DDRB  |= (1 << 0);

-				PORTB |= (1 << 0);

-

-				DDRB  |=  ((1 << 1) | (1 << 2));

-				DDRB  &= ~(1 << 3);

-				PORTB |=  (1 << 3);

-

-				if (SPIOptions & SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED)

-				  SPSR |= (1 << SPI2X);

-				else

-				  SPSR &= ~(1 << SPI2X);

-

-				/* Switch /SS to input mode after configuration to allow for forced mode changes */

-				DDRB &= ~(1 << 0);

-

-				SPCR  = ((1 << SPE) | SPIOptions);

-			}

-

-			/** Turns off the SPI driver, disabling and returning used hardware to their default configuration. */

-			static inline void SPI_Disable(void)

-			{

-				DDRB  &= ~((1 << 1) | (1 << 2));

-				PORTB &= ~((1 << 0) | (1 << 3));

-

-				SPCR   = 0;

-				SPSR   = 0;

-			}

-

-			/** Retrieves the currently selected SPI mode, once the SPI interface has been configured.

-			 *

-			 *  \return \ref SPI_MODE_MASTER if the interface is currently in SPI Master mode, \ref SPI_MODE_SLAVE otherwise

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t SPI_GetCurrentMode(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t SPI_GetCurrentMode(void)

-			{

-				return (SPCR & SPI_MODE_MASTER);

-			}

-

-			/** Sends and receives a byte through the SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte to send through the SPI interface.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Response byte from the attached SPI device.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t SPI_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t SPI_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte)

-			{

-				SPDR = Byte;

-				while (!(SPSR & (1 << SPIF)));

-				return SPDR;

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a byte through the SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete. The response

-			 *  byte sent to from the attached SPI device is ignored.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte to send through the SPI interface.

-			 */

-			static inline void SPI_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void SPI_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)

-			{

-				SPDR = Byte;

-				while (!(SPSR & (1 << SPIF)));

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a dummy byte through the SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete. The response

-			 *  byte from the attached SPI device is returned.

-			 *

-			 *  \return The response byte from the attached SPI device.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t SPI_ReceiveByte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t SPI_ReceiveByte(void)

-			{

-				SPDR = 0x00;

-				while (!(SPSR & (1 << SPIF)));

-				return SPDR;

-			}

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/SerialSPI_AVR8.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/SerialSPI_AVR8.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 9a122f501..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/SerialSPI_AVR8.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,200 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Master SPI Mode Serial USART Peripheral Driver (XMEGA)

- *

- *  On-chip Master SPI mode USART driver for the XMEGA AVR microcontrollers.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the SPI Master

- *        Mode USART driver dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_SerialSPI

- *  \defgroup Group_SerialSPI_AVR8 Master SPI Mode Serial USART Peripheral Driver (AVR8)

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  On-chip serial USART driver for the 8-bit AVR8 microcontrollers.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the SPI Master

- *        driver dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialSPI.h.

- *

- *  \section Sec_ExampleUsage Example Usage

- *  The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical

- *  application.

- *

- *  \code

- *      // Initialize the Master SPI mode USART driver before first use, with 1Mbit baud

- *      SerialSPI_Init((USART_SPI_SCK_LEAD_RISING | SPI_SAMPLE_LEADING | SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST), 1000000);

- *      

- *      // Send several bytes, ignoring the returned data

- *      SerialSPI_SendByte(0x01);

- *      SerialSPI_SendByte(0x02);

- *      SerialSPI_SendByte(0x03);

- *      

- *      // Receive several bytes, sending a dummy 0x00 byte each time

- *      uint8_t Byte1 = SerialSPI_ReceiveByte();

- *      uint8_t Byte2 = SerialSPI_ReceiveByte();

- *      uint8_t Byte3 = SerialSPI_ReceiveByte();

- *      

- *      // Send a byte, and store the received byte from the same transaction

- *      uint8_t ResponseByte = SerialSPI_TransferByte(0xDC);

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __SERIAL_SPI_AVR8_H__

-#define __SERIAL_SPI_AVR8_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-		#include <stdio.h>

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_SERIAL_SPI_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			#define SERIAL_SPI_UBBRVAL(Baud)       ((Baud < (F_CPU / 2)) ? ((F_CPU / (2 * Baud)) - 1) : 0)

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** \name SPI SCK Polarity Configuration Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** SPI clock polarity mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that the SCK should lead on the rising edge. */

-			#define USART_SPI_SCK_LEAD_RISING            (0 << UCPOL)

-

-			/** SPI clock polarity mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that the SCK should lead on the falling edge. */

-			#define USART_SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING           (1 << UCPOL)

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name SPI Sample Edge Configuration Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** SPI data sample mode mask for \ref SerialSPI_Init(). Indicates that the data should sampled on the leading edge. */

-			#define USART_SPI_SAMPLE_LEADING             (0 << UPCHA)

-

-			/** SPI data sample mode mask for \ref SerialSPI_Init(). Indicates that the data should be sampled on the trailing edge. */

-			#define USART_SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING            (1 << UPCHA)

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name SPI Data Ordering Configuration Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** SPI data order mask for \ref SerialSPI_Init(). Indicates that data should be shifted out MSB first. */

-			#define USART_SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST            (0 << UDORD)

-

-			/** SPI data order mask for \ref SerialSPI_Init(). Indicates that data should be shifted out LSB first. */

-			#define USART_SPI_ORDER_LSB_FIRST            (1 << UDORD)

-			//@}			

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Initialize the USART module in Master SPI mode. 

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in]     SPIOptions   USART SPI Options, a mask consisting of one of each of the \c USART_SPI_SCK_*,

-			 *                              \c USART_SPI_SAMPLE_* and \c USART_SPI_ORDER_* masks.

-			 *  \param[in]     BaudRate     SPI baud rate, in bits per second.

-			 */

-			static inline void SerialSPI_Init(const uint8_t SPIOptions,

-			                                  const uint32_t BaudRate)

-			{

-				UBRR1  = SERIAL_SPI_UBBRVAL(BaudRate);

-

-				UCSR1C = ((1 << UMSEL11) | (1 << UMSEL10) | SPIOptions);

-				UCSR1B = ((1 << TXEN1)  | (1 << RXEN1));

-

-				DDRD  |= (1 << 3);

-				PORTD |= (1 << 2);				

-			}

-

-			/** Turns off the USART driver, disabling and returning used hardware to their default configuration. */

-			static inline void SerialSPI_Disable(void)

-			{

-				UCSR1B = 0;

-				UCSR1A = 0;

-				UCSR1C = 0;

-

-				UBRR1  = 0;

-

-				DDRD  &= ~(1 << 3);

-				PORTD &= ~(1 << 2);

-			}

-			

-			/** Sends and receives a byte through the USART SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] DataByte  Byte to send through the USART SPI interface.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Response byte from the attached SPI device.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t SerialSPI_TransferByte(const uint8_t DataByte)

-			{

-				UDR1 = DataByte;

-				while (!(UCSR1A & (1 << TXC1)));

-				UCSR1A = (1 << TXC1);

-				return UDR1;

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a byte through the USART SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete. The response

-			 *  byte sent to from the attached SPI device is ignored.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] DataByte  Byte to send through the USART SPI interface.

-			 */

-			static inline void SerialSPI_SendByte(const uint8_t DataByte)

-			{

-				SerialSPI_TransferByte(DataByte);

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a dummy byte through the USART SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete. The response

-			 *  byte from the attached SPI device is returned.

-			 *

-			 *  \return The response byte from the attached SPI device.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t SerialSPI_ReceiveByte(void)

-			{

-				return SerialSPI_TransferByte(0);

-			}

-			

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/Serial_AVR8.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/Serial_AVR8.c
deleted file mode 100644
index a1f64b022..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/Serial_AVR8.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,119 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#include "../../../Common/Common.h"

-#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_SERIAL_C

-#include "../Serial.h"

-

-FILE USARTSerialStream;

-

-int Serial_putchar(char DataByte,

-                   FILE *Stream)

-{

-	(void)Stream;

-

-	Serial_SendByte(DataByte);

-	return 0;

-}

-

-int Serial_getchar(FILE *Stream)

-{

-	(void)Stream;

-

-	if (!(Serial_IsCharReceived()))

-	  return _FDEV_EOF;

-

-	return Serial_ReceiveByte();

-}

-

-int Serial_getchar_Blocking(FILE *Stream)

-{

-	(void)Stream;

-

-	while (!(Serial_IsCharReceived()));

-	return Serial_ReceiveByte();

-}

-

-void Serial_SendString_P(const char* FlashStringPtr)

-{

-	uint8_t CurrByte;

-

-	while ((CurrByte = pgm_read_byte(FlashStringPtr)) != 0x00)

-	{

-		Serial_SendByte(CurrByte);

-		FlashStringPtr++;

-	}

-}

-

-void Serial_SendString(const char* StringPtr)

-{

-	uint8_t CurrByte;

-

-	while ((CurrByte = *StringPtr) != 0x00)

-	{

-		Serial_SendByte(CurrByte);

-		StringPtr++;

-	}

-}

-

-void Serial_SendData(const uint8_t* Buffer,

-                     uint16_t Length)

-{

-	while (Length--)

-	  Serial_SendByte(*(Buffer++));

-}

-

-void Serial_CreateStream(FILE* Stream)

-{

-	if (!(Stream))

-	{

-		Stream = &USARTSerialStream;

-		stdin  = Stream;

-		stdout = Stream;

-	}

-

-	*Stream = (FILE)FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(Serial_putchar, Serial_getchar, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);

-}

-

-void Serial_CreateBlockingStream(FILE* Stream)

-{

-	if (!(Stream))

-	{

-		Stream = &USARTSerialStream;

-		stdin  = Stream;

-		stdout = Stream;

-	}

-

-	*Stream = (FILE)FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(Serial_putchar, Serial_getchar_Blocking, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);

-}

-

-#endif

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/Serial_AVR8.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/Serial_AVR8.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 8416082f5..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/Serial_AVR8.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,239 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Serial USART Peripheral Driver (AVR8)

- *

- *  On-chip serial USART driver for the 8-bit AVR microcontrollers.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USART driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Serial

- *  \defgroup Group_Serial_AVR8 Serial USART Peripheral Driver (AVR8)

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  On-chip serial USART driver for the 8-bit AVR microcontrollers.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USART driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h.

- *

- *  \section Sec_ExampleUsage Example Usage

- *  The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical

- *  application.

- *

- *  \code

- *      // Initialize the serial USART driver before first use, with 9600 baud (and no double-speed mode)

- *      Serial_Init(9600, false);

- *      

- *      // Send a string through the USART

- *      Serial_TxString("Test String\r\n");

- *      

- *      // Receive a byte through the USART

- *      uint8_t DataByte = Serial_RxByte();

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __SERIAL_AVR8_H__

-#define __SERIAL_AVR8_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "../../Misc/TerminalCodes.h"

-

-		#include <stdio.h>

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_SERIAL_H) && !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_SERIAL_C)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* External Variables: */

-			extern FILE USARTSerialStream;

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			int Serial_putchar(char DataByte,

-			                   FILE *Stream);

-			int Serial_getchar(FILE *Stream);

-			int Serial_getchar_Blocking(FILE *Stream);

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Macro for calculating the baud value from a given baud rate when the \c U2X (double speed) bit is

-			 *  not set.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Baud  Target serial UART baud rate.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Closest UBRR register value for the given UART frequency.

-			 */

-			#define SERIAL_UBBRVAL(Baud)    ((((F_CPU / 16) + (Baud / 2)) / (Baud)) - 1)

-

-			/** Macro for calculating the baud value from a given baud rate when the \c U2X (double speed) bit is

-			 *  set.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Baud  Target serial UART baud rate.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Closest UBRR register value for the given UART frequency.

-			 */

-			#define SERIAL_2X_UBBRVAL(Baud) ((((F_CPU / 8) + (Baud / 2)) / (Baud)) - 1)

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Transmits a given string located in program space (FLASH) through the USART.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] FlashStringPtr  Pointer to a string located in program space.

-			 */

-			void Serial_SendString_P(const char* FlashStringPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Transmits a given string located in SRAM memory through the USART.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] StringPtr  Pointer to a string located in SRAM space.

-			 */

-			void Serial_SendString(const char* StringPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Transmits a given buffer located in SRAM memory through the USART.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to a buffer containing the data to send.

-			 *  \param[in] Length  Length of the data to send, in bytes.

-			 */

-			void Serial_SendData(const uint8_t* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Creates a standard character stream from the USART so that it can be used with all the regular functions

-			 *  in the avr-libc \c <stdio.h> library that accept a \c FILE stream as a destination (e.g. \c fprintf). The created

-			 *  stream is bidirectional and can be used for both input and output functions.

-			 *

-			 *  Reading data from this stream is non-blocking, i.e. in most instances, complete strings cannot be read in by a single

-			 *  fetch, as the endpoint will not be ready at some point in the transmission, aborting the transfer. However, this may

-			 *  be used when the read data is processed byte-per-bye (via \c getc()) or when the user application will implement its own

-			 *  line buffering.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] Stream  Pointer to a FILE structure where the created stream should be placed, if \c NULL, \c stdout

-			 *                         and \c stdin will be configured to use the USART.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre The USART must first be configured via a call to \ref Serial_Init() before the stream is used.

-			 */

-			void Serial_CreateStream(FILE* Stream);

-			

-			/** Identical to \ref Serial_CreateStream(), except that reads are blocking until the calling stream function terminates

-			 *  the transfer.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] Stream  Pointer to a FILE structure where the created stream should be placed, if \c NULL, \c stdout

-			 *                         and \c stdin will be configured to use the USART.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre The USART must first be configured via a call to \ref Serial_Init() before the stream is used.

-			 */

-			void Serial_CreateBlockingStream(FILE* Stream);

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Initializes the USART, ready for serial data transmission and reception. This initializes the interface to

-			 *  standard 8-bit, no parity, 1 stop bit settings suitable for most applications.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] BaudRate     Serial baud rate, in bits per second.

-			 *  \param[in] DoubleSpeed  Enables double speed mode when set, halving the sample time to double the baud rate.

-			 */

-			static inline void Serial_Init(const uint32_t BaudRate,

-			                               const bool DoubleSpeed)

-			{

-				UBRR1  = (DoubleSpeed ? SERIAL_2X_UBBRVAL(BaudRate) : SERIAL_UBBRVAL(BaudRate));

-

-				UCSR1C = ((1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10));

-				UCSR1A = (DoubleSpeed ? (1 << U2X1) : 0);

-				UCSR1B = ((1 << TXEN1)  | (1 << RXEN1));

-

-				DDRD  |= (1 << 3);

-				PORTD |= (1 << 2);

-			}

-

-			/** Turns off the USART driver, disabling and returning used hardware to their default configuration. */

-			static inline void Serial_Disable(void)

-			{

-				UCSR1B = 0;

-				UCSR1A = 0;

-				UCSR1C = 0;

-

-				UBRR1  = 0;

-

-				DDRD  &= ~(1 << 3);

-				PORTD &= ~(1 << 2);

-			}

-

-			/** Indicates whether a character has been received through the USART.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if a character has been received, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Serial_IsCharReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Serial_IsCharReceived(void)

-			{

-				return ((UCSR1A & (1 << RXC1)) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Transmits a given byte through the USART.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] DataByte  Byte to transmit through the USART.

-			 */

-			static inline void Serial_SendByte(const char DataByte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Serial_SendByte(const char DataByte)

-			{

-				while (!(UCSR1A & (1 << UDRE1)));

-				UDR1 = DataByte;

-			}

-

-			/** Receives the next byte from the USART.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next byte received from the USART, or a negative value if no byte has been received.

-			 */

-			static inline int16_t Serial_ReceiveByte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline int16_t Serial_ReceiveByte(void)

-			{

-				if (!(Serial_IsCharReceived()))

-				  return -1;

-

-				return UDR1;

-			}

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/TWI_AVR8.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/TWI_AVR8.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 3cc3f0b6d..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/TWI_AVR8.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,207 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#include "../../../Common/Common.h"

-#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) && defined(TWCR)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_TWI_C

-#include "../TWI.h"

-

-uint8_t TWI_StartTransmission(const uint8_t SlaveAddress,

-                              const uint8_t TimeoutMS)

-{

-	for (;;)

-	{

-		bool     BusCaptured = false;

-		uint16_t TimeoutRemaining;

-

-		TWCR = ((1 << TWINT) | (1 << TWSTA) | (1 << TWEN));

-

-		TimeoutRemaining = (TimeoutMS * 100);

-		while (TimeoutRemaining-- && !(BusCaptured))

-		{

-			if (TWCR & (1 << TWINT))

-			{

-				switch (TWSR & TW_STATUS_MASK)

-				{

-					case TW_START:

-					case TW_REP_START:

-						BusCaptured = true;

-						break;

-					case TW_MT_ARB_LOST:

-						TWCR = ((1 << TWINT) | (1 << TWSTA) | (1 << TWEN));

-						continue;

-					default:

-						TWCR = (1 << TWEN);

-						return TWI_ERROR_BusFault;

-				}

-			}

-

-			_delay_us(10);

-		}

-

-		if (!(TimeoutRemaining))

-		{

-			TWCR = (1 << TWEN);

-			return TWI_ERROR_BusCaptureTimeout;

-		}

-

-		TWDR = SlaveAddress;

-		TWCR = ((1 << TWINT) | (1 << TWEN));

-

-		TimeoutRemaining = (TimeoutMS * 100);

-		while (TimeoutRemaining--)

-		{

-			if (TWCR & (1 << TWINT))

-			  break;

-

-			_delay_us(10);

-		}

-

-		if (!(TimeoutRemaining))

-		  return TWI_ERROR_SlaveResponseTimeout;

-

-		switch (TWSR & TW_STATUS_MASK)

-		{

-			case TW_MT_SLA_ACK:

-			case TW_MR_SLA_ACK:

-				return TWI_ERROR_NoError;

-			default:

-				TWCR = ((1 << TWINT) | (1 << TWSTO) | (1 << TWEN));

-				return TWI_ERROR_SlaveNotReady;

-		}

-	}

-}

-

-bool TWI_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)

-{

-	TWDR = Byte;

-	TWCR = ((1 << TWINT) | (1 << TWEN));

-	while (!(TWCR & (1 << TWINT)));

-

-	return ((TWSR & TW_STATUS_MASK) == TW_MT_DATA_ACK);

-}

-

-bool TWI_ReceiveByte(uint8_t* const Byte,

-					 const bool LastByte)

-{

-	uint8_t TWCRMask;

-

-	if (LastByte)

-	  TWCRMask = ((1 << TWINT) | (1 << TWEN));

-	else

-	  TWCRMask = ((1 << TWINT) | (1 << TWEN) | (1 << TWEA));

-

-	TWCR = TWCRMask;

-	while (!(TWCR & (1 << TWINT)));

-	*Byte = TWDR;

-

-	uint8_t Status = (TWSR & TW_STATUS_MASK);

-

-	return ((LastByte) ? (Status == TW_MR_DATA_NACK) : (Status == TW_MR_DATA_ACK));

-}

-

-uint8_t TWI_ReadPacket(const uint8_t SlaveAddress,

-                       const uint8_t TimeoutMS,

-                       const uint8_t* InternalAddress,

-                       uint8_t InternalAddressLen,

-                       uint8_t* Buffer,

-                       uint8_t Length)

-{

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = TWI_StartTransmission((SlaveAddress & TWI_DEVICE_ADDRESS_MASK) | TWI_ADDRESS_WRITE,

-	                                       TimeoutMS)) == TWI_ERROR_NoError)

-	{

-		while (InternalAddressLen--)

-		{

-			if (!(TWI_SendByte(*(InternalAddress++))))

-			{

-				ErrorCode = TWI_ERROR_SlaveNAK;

-				break;

-			}

-		}

-

-		if ((ErrorCode = TWI_StartTransmission((SlaveAddress & TWI_DEVICE_ADDRESS_MASK) | TWI_ADDRESS_READ,

-											   TimeoutMS)) == TWI_ERROR_NoError)

-		{

-			while (Length--)

-			{

-				if (!(TWI_ReceiveByte(Buffer++, (Length == 0))))

-				{

-					ErrorCode = TWI_ERROR_SlaveNAK;

-					break;

-				}

-			}

-

-			TWI_StopTransmission();

-		}

-	}

-

-	return ErrorCode;

-}

-

-uint8_t TWI_WritePacket(const uint8_t SlaveAddress,

-                        const uint8_t TimeoutMS,

-                        const uint8_t* InternalAddress,

-                        uint8_t InternalAddressLen,

-                        const uint8_t* Buffer,

-                        uint8_t Length)

-{

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = TWI_StartTransmission((SlaveAddress & TWI_DEVICE_ADDRESS_MASK) | TWI_ADDRESS_WRITE,

-	                                       TimeoutMS)) == TWI_ERROR_NoError)

-	{

-		while (InternalAddressLen--)

-		{

-			if (!(TWI_SendByte(*(InternalAddress++))))

-			{

-				ErrorCode = TWI_ERROR_SlaveNAK;

-				break;

-			}

-		}

-

-		while (Length--)

-		{

-			if (!(TWI_SendByte(*(Buffer++))))

-			{

-				ErrorCode = TWI_ERROR_SlaveNAK;

-				break;

-			}

-		}

-

-		TWI_StopTransmission();

-	}

-

-	return ErrorCode;

-}

-

-#endif

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/TWI_AVR8.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/TWI_AVR8.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 92c7389a6..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/TWI_AVR8.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,304 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief TWI Peripheral Driver (AVR8)

- *

- *  On-chip TWI driver for the 8-bit AVR microcontrollers.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the TWI driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_TWI

- *  \defgroup Group_TWI_AVR8 TWI Peripheral Driver (AVR8)

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Master mode TWI driver for the 8-bit AVR microcontrollers which contain a hardware TWI module.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the TWI driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h.

- *

- *  \section Sec_ExampleUsage Example Usage

- *  The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical

- *  application.

- *

- *  <b>Low Level API Example:</b>

- *  \code

- *      // Initialize the TWI driver before first use at 200KHz

- *      TWI_Init(TWI_BIT_PRESCALE_1, TWI_BITLENGTH_FROM_FREQ(1, 200000));

- *      

- *      // Start a write session to device at device address 0xA0, internal address 0xDC with a 10ms timeout

- *      if (TWI_StartTransmission(0xA0 | TWI_ADDRESS_WRITE, 10) == TWI_ERROR_NoError)

- *      {

- *          TWI_SendByte(0xDC);

- *          

- *          TWI_SendByte(0x01);

- *          TWI_SendByte(0x02);

- *          TWI_SendByte(0x03);

- *          

- *          // Must stop transmission afterwards to release the bus

- *          TWI_StopTransmission();

- *      }

- *      

- *      // Start a read session to device at address 0xA0, internal address 0xDC with a 10ms timeout

- *      if (TWI_StartTransmission(0xA0 | TWI_ADDRESS_WRITE, 10) == TWI_ERROR_NoError)

- *      {

- *          TWI_SendByte(0xDC);

- *          TWI_StopTransmission();

- *          

- *          if (TWI_StartTransmission(0xA0 | TWI_ADDRESS_READ, 10) == TWI_ERROR_NoError)

- *          {

- *              uint8_t Byte1, Byte2, Byte3;

- *              

- *              // Read three bytes, acknowledge after the third byte is received

- *              TWI_ReceiveByte(&Byte1, false);

- *              TWI_ReceiveByte(&Byte2, false);

- *              TWI_ReceiveByte(&Byte3, true);

- *              

- *              // Must stop transmission afterwards to release the bus

- *              TWI_StopTransmission();

- *          }

- *      }

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  <b>High Level API Example:</b>

- *  \code

- *      // Initialize the TWI driver before first use at 200KHz

- *      TWI_Init(TWI_BIT_PRESCALE_1, TWI_BITLENGTH_FROM_FREQ(1, 200000));

- *      

- *      // Start a write session to device at device address 0xA0, internal address 0xDC with a 10ms timeout

- *      uint8_t InternalWriteAddress = 0xDC;

- *      uint8_t WritePacket[3] = {0x01, 0x02, 0x03};

- *      

- *      TWI_WritePacket(0xA0, 10, &InternalWriteAddress, sizeof(InternalWriteAddress),

- *                      &WritePacket, sizeof(WritePacket);

- *      

- *      // Start a read session to device at address 0xA0, internal address 0xDC with a 10ms timeout

- *      uint8_t InternalReadAddress = 0xDC;

- *      uint8_t ReadPacket[3];

- *      

- *      TWI_ReadPacket(0xA0, 10, &InternalReadAddress, sizeof(InternalReadAddress),

- *                     &ReadPacket, sizeof(ReadPacket);

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __TWI_AVR8_H__

-#define __TWI_AVR8_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-		#include <stdio.h>

-		#include <util/twi.h>

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_TWI_H) && !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_TWI_C)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-		#if !(defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || \

-		      defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) || \

-			  defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__)  || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__) || \

-			  defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__))

-			#error The TWI peripheral driver is not currently available for your selected microcontroller model.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** TWI slave device address mask for a read session. Mask with a slave device base address to obtain

-			 *  the correct TWI bus address for the slave device when reading data from it.

-			 */

-			#define TWI_ADDRESS_READ         0x01

-

-			/** TWI slave device address mask for a write session. Mask with a slave device base address to obtain

-			 *  the correct TWI bus address for the slave device when writing data to it.

-			 */

-			#define TWI_ADDRESS_WRITE        0x00

-

-			/** Mask to retrieve the base address for a TWI device, which can then be ORed with \ref TWI_ADDRESS_READ

-			 *  or \ref TWI_ADDRESS_WRITE to obtain the device's read and write address respectively.

-			 */

-			#define TWI_DEVICE_ADDRESS_MASK  0xFE

-

-			/** Bit length prescaler for \ref TWI_Init(). This mask multiplies the TWI bit length prescaler by 1. */

-			#define TWI_BIT_PRESCALE_1       ((0 << TWPS1) | (0 << TWPS0))

-

-			/** Bit length prescaler for \ref TWI_Init(). This mask multiplies the TWI bit length prescaler by 4. */

-			#define TWI_BIT_PRESCALE_4       ((0 << TWPS1) | (1 << TWPS0))

-

-			/** Bit length prescaler for \ref TWI_Init(). This mask multiplies the TWI bit length prescaler by 16. */

-			#define TWI_BIT_PRESCALE_16      ((1 << TWPS1) | (0 << TWPS0))

-

-			/** Bit length prescaler for \ref TWI_Init(). This mask multiplies the TWI bit length prescaler by 64. */

-			#define TWI_BIT_PRESCALE_64      ((1 << TWPS1) | (1 << TWPS0))

-

-			/** Calculates the length of each bit on the TWI bus for a given target frequency. This may be used with

-			 *  the \ref TWI_Init() function to convert a bus frequency to a number of clocks for the \c BitLength

-			 *  parameter.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Prescale   Prescaler set on the TWI bus.

-			 *  \param[in] Frequency  Desired TWI bus frequency in Hz.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Bit length in clocks for the given TWI bus frequency at the given prescaler value.

-			 */

-			#define TWI_BITLENGTH_FROM_FREQ(Prescale, Frequency) ((((F_CPU / (Prescale)) / (Frequency)) - 16) / 2)

-

-		/* Enums: */

-			/** Enum for the possible return codes of the TWI transfer start routine and other dependant TWI functions. */

-			enum TWI_ErrorCodes_t

-			{

-				TWI_ERROR_NoError              = 0, /**< Indicates that the command completed successfully. */

-				TWI_ERROR_BusFault             = 1, /**< A TWI bus fault occurred while attempting to capture the bus. */

-				TWI_ERROR_BusCaptureTimeout    = 2, /**< A timeout occurred whilst waiting for the bus to be ready. */

-				TWI_ERROR_SlaveResponseTimeout = 3, /**< No ACK received at the nominated slave address within the timeout period. */

-				TWI_ERROR_SlaveNotReady        = 4, /**< Slave NAKed the TWI bus START condition. */

-				TWI_ERROR_SlaveNAK             = 5, /**< Slave NAKed whilst attempting to send data to the device. */

-			};

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Initializes the TWI hardware into master mode, ready for data transmission and reception. This must be

-			 *  before any other TWI operations.

-			 *

-			 *  The generated SCL frequency will be according to the formula <pre>F_CPU / (16 + 2 * BitLength + 4 ^ Prescale)</pre>.

-			 *

-			 *  \attention The value of the \c BitLength parameter should not be set below 10 or invalid bus conditions may

-			 *             occur, as indicated in the AVR8 microcontroller datasheet.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Prescale   Prescaler to use when determining the bus frequency, a \c TWI_BIT_PRESCALE_* value.

-			 *  \param[in] BitLength  Length of the bits sent on the bus.

-			 */

-			static inline void TWI_Init(const uint8_t Prescale, const uint8_t BitLength) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void TWI_Init(const uint8_t Prescale, const uint8_t BitLength)

-			{

-				TWCR |= (1 << TWEN);

-				TWSR  = Prescale;

-				TWBR  = BitLength;

-			}

-

-			/** Turns off the TWI driver hardware. If this is called, any further TWI operations will require a call to

-			 *  \ref TWI_Init() before the TWI can be used again.

-			 */

-			static inline void TWI_Disable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void TWI_Disable(void)

-			{

-				TWCR &= ~(1 << TWEN);

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a TWI STOP onto the TWI bus, terminating communication with the currently addressed device. */

-			static inline void TWI_StopTransmission(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void TWI_StopTransmission(void)

-			{

-				TWCR = ((1 << TWINT) | (1 << TWSTO) | (1 << TWEN));

-			}

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Begins a master mode TWI bus communication with the given slave device address.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] SlaveAddress  Address of the slave TWI device to communicate with.

-			 *  \param[in] TimeoutMS     Timeout period within which the slave must respond, in milliseconds.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref TWI_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t TWI_StartTransmission(const uint8_t SlaveAddress,

-			                              const uint8_t TimeoutMS);

-

-			/** Sends a byte to the currently addressed device on the TWI bus.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte to send to the currently addressed device

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the recipient ACKed the byte, \c false otherwise

-			 */

-			bool TWI_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte);

-

-			/** Receives a byte from the currently addressed device on the TWI bus.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Byte      Location where the read byte is to be stored.

-			 *  \param[in] LastByte  Indicates if the byte should be ACKed if false, NAKed if true.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the byte reception successfully completed, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			bool TWI_ReceiveByte(uint8_t* const Byte,

-			                     const bool LastByte) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** High level function to perform a complete packet transfer over the TWI bus to the specified

-			 *  device.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] SlaveAddress        Base address of the TWI slave device to communicate with.

-			 *  \param[in] TimeoutMS           Timeout for bus capture and slave START ACK, in milliseconds.

-			 *  \param[in] InternalAddress     Pointer to a location where the internal slave read start address is stored.

-			 *  \param[in] InternalAddressLen  Size of the internal device address, in bytes.

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer              Pointer to a buffer where the read packet data is to be stored.

-			 *  \param[in] Length              Size of the packet to read, in bytes.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref TWI_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t TWI_ReadPacket(const uint8_t SlaveAddress,

-			                       const uint8_t TimeoutMS,

-			                       const uint8_t* InternalAddress,

-			                       uint8_t InternalAddressLen,

-			                       uint8_t* Buffer,

-			                       uint8_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);

-

-			/** High level function to perform a complete packet transfer over the TWI bus from the specified

-			 *  device.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] SlaveAddress        Base address of the TWI slave device to communicate with

-			 *  \param[in] TimeoutMS           Timeout for bus capture and slave START ACK, in milliseconds

-			 *  \param[in] InternalAddress     Pointer to a location where the internal slave write start address is stored

-			 *  \param[in] InternalAddressLen  Size of the internal device address, in bytes

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer              Pointer to a buffer where the packet data to send is stored

-			 *  \param[in] Length              Size of the packet to send, in bytes

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref TWI_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t TWI_WritePacket(const uint8_t SlaveAddress,

-			                        const uint8_t TimeoutMS,

-			                        const uint8_t* InternalAddress,

-			                        uint8_t InternalAddressLen,

-			                        const uint8_t* Buffer,

-			                        uint8_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 1fab22b68..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,76 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Hardware Serial Peripheral Interface driver.

- *

- *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the device-specific SPI driver, for microcontrollers

- *  containing a hardware SPI.

- *

- *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct SPI driver header file for the

- *  currently selected architecture and microcontroller model.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_PeripheralDrivers

- *  \defgroup Group_SPI SPI Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h

- *  \brief Hardware Serial Peripheral Interface driver.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - None

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Hardware SPI driver. This module provides an easy to use driver for the setup and transfer of data over

- *  the selected architecture and microcontroller model's SPI port.

- *

- *  \note The exact API for this driver may vary depending on the target used - see

- *        individual target module documentation for the API specific to your target processor.

- */

-

-#ifndef __SPI_H__

-#define __SPI_H__

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_SPI_H

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)

-			#include "AVR8/SPI_AVR8.h"

-		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)

-			#include "XMEGA/SPI_XMEGA.h"

-		#else

-			#error The SPI peripheral driver is not currently available for your selected architecture.

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 0db13ba47..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,76 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Hardware Serial USART driver.

- *

- *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the device-specific USART driver, for microcontrollers

- *  containing a hardware USART.

- *

- *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct ADC driver header file for the

- *  currently selected architecture and microcontroller model.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_PeripheralDrivers

- *  \defgroup Group_Serial Serial USART Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h

- *  \brief Hardware Serial USART driver.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/<i>ARCH</i>/Serial_<i>ARCH</i>.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Hardware serial USART driver. This module provides an easy to use driver for the setup and transfer

- *  of data over the selected architecture and microcontroller model's USART port.

- *

- *  \note The exact API for this driver may vary depending on the target used - see

- *        individual target module documentation for the API specific to your target processor.

- */

-

-#ifndef __SERIAL_H__

-#define __SERIAL_H__

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_SERIAL_H

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)

-			#include "AVR8/Serial_AVR8.h"

-		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)

-			#include "XMEGA/Serial_XMEGA.h"

-		#else

-			#error The Serial peripheral driver is not currently available for your selected architecture.

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialSPI.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialSPI.h
deleted file mode 100644
index f5eede842..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialSPI.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,76 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Hardware SPI Master Mode Serial USART driver.

- *

- *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the device-specific SPI Master Mode USART driver, for

- *  microcontrollers containing a hardware USART capable of operating in a Master SPI mode.

- *

- *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct ADC driver header file for the

- *  currently selected architecture and microcontroller model.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_PeripheralDrivers

- *  \defgroup Group_SerialSPI Master SPI Mode Serial USART Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialSPI.h

- *  \brief Hardware SPI Master Mode Serial USART driver.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - None

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Hardware SPI Master Mode serial USART driver. This module provides an easy to use driver for the setup and transfer

- *  of data over the selected architecture and microcontroller model's USART port, using a SPI framing format.

- *

- *  \note The exact API for this driver may vary depending on the target used - see

- *        individual target module documentation for the API specific to your target processor.

- */

-

-#ifndef __SERIAL_SPI_H__

-#define __SERIAL_SPI_H__

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_SERIAL_SPI_H

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)

-			#include "AVR8/SerialSPI_AVR8.h"

-		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)

-			#include "XMEGA/SerialSPI_XMEGA.h"

-		#else

-			#error The Serial SPI Master Mode peripheral driver is not currently available for your selected architecture.

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 34012fda6..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,74 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Hardware Two Wire Interface (I2C) driver.

- *

- *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the device-specific SPI driver, for microcontrollers

- *  containing a hardware TWI.

- *

- *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct TWI driver header file for the

- *  currently selected architecture and microcontroller model.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_PeripheralDrivers

- *  \defgroup Group_TWI TWI Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h

- *  \brief Hardware Two Wire Interface (I2C) driver.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/<i>ARCH</i>/TWI_<i>ARCH</i>.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_TWI)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Hardware TWI driver. This module provides an easy to use driver for the setup and transfer of data over

- *  the selected architecture and microcontroller model's TWI bus port.

- *

- *  \note The exact API for this driver may vary depending on the target used - see

- *        individual target module documentation for the API specific to your target processor.

- */

-

-#ifndef __TWI_H__

-#define __TWI_H__

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_TWI_H

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)

-			#include "AVR8/TWI_AVR8.h"

-		#else

-			#error The TWI peripheral driver is not currently available for your selected architecture.

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/SPI_XMEGA.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/SPI_XMEGA.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 25fb73d16..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/SPI_XMEGA.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,248 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief SPI Peripheral Driver (XMEGA)

- *

- *  On-chip SPI driver for the XMEGA microcontrollers.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the SPI driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_SPI

- *  \defgroup Group_SPI_XMEGA SPI Peripheral Driver (XMEGA)

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Driver for the hardware SPI port(s) available on XMEGA AVR microcontroller models. This

- *  module provides an easy to use driver for the setup and transfer of data over the AVR's

- *  SPI ports.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the SPI driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h.

- *

- *  \code

- *      // Initialize the SPI driver before first use

- *      SPI_Init(&SPIC,

- *               SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2 | SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST | SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING |

- *               SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING | SPI_MODE_MASTER);

- *      

- *      // Send several bytes, ignoring the returned data

- *      SPI_SendByte(&SPIC, 0x01);

- *      SPI_SendByte(&SPIC, 0x02);

- *      SPI_SendByte(&SPIC, 0x03);

- *      

- *      // Receive several bytes, sending a dummy 0x00 byte each time

- *      uint8_t Byte1 = SPI_ReceiveByte(&SPIC);

- *      uint8_t Byte2 = SPI_ReceiveByte(&SPIC);

- *      uint8_t Byte3 = SPI_ReceiveByte(&SPIC);

- *      

- *      // Send a byte, and store the received byte from the same transaction

- *      uint8_t ResponseByte = SPI_TransferByte(&SPIC, 0xDC);

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __SPI_XMEGA_H__

-#define __SPI_XMEGA_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_SPI_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED            SPI_CLK2X_bm

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** \name SPI Prescaler Configuration Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** SPI prescaler mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 2. */

-			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2           SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED

-

-			/** SPI prescaler mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 4. */

-			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_4           0

-

-			/** SPI prescaler mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 8. */

-			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_8           (SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED | (1 << SPI_PRESCALER_gp))

-

-			/** SPI prescaler mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 16. */

-			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_16          (1 << SPI_PRESCALER_gp)

-

-			/** SPI prescaler mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 32. */

-			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_32          (SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED | (2 << SPI_PRESCALER_gp))

-

-			/** SPI prescaler mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 64. */

-			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_64          (2 << SPI_PRESCALER_gp)

-

-			/** SPI prescaler mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 128. */

-			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_128         (3 << SPI_PRESCALER_gp)

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name SPI SCK Polarity Configuration Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** SPI clock polarity mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that the SCK should lead on the rising edge. */

-			#define SPI_SCK_LEAD_RISING            0

-

-			/** SPI clock polarity mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that the SCK should lead on the falling edge. */

-			#define SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING           SPI_MODE1_bm

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name SPI Sample Edge Configuration Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** SPI data sample mode mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that the data should sampled on the leading edge. */

-			#define SPI_SAMPLE_LEADING             0

-

-			/** SPI data sample mode mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that the data should be sampled on the trailing edge. */

-			#define SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING            SPI_MODE0_bm

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name SPI Data Ordering Configuration Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** SPI data order mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that data should be shifted out MSB first. */

-			#define SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST            0

-

-			/** SPI data order mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that data should be shifted out LSB first. */

-			#define SPI_ORDER_LSB_FIRST            SPI_DORD_bm

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name SPI Mode Configuration Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** SPI mode mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that the SPI interface should be initialized into slave mode. */

-			#define SPI_MODE_SLAVE                 0

-

-			/** SPI mode mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that the SPI interface should be initialized into master mode. */

-			#define SPI_MODE_MASTER                SPI_MASTER_bm

-			//@}

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Initializes the SPI subsystem, ready for transfers. Must be called before calling any other

-			 *  SPI routines.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] SPI         Pointer to the base of the SPI peripheral within the device.

-			 *  \param[in]     SPIOptions  SPI Options, a mask consisting of one of each of the \c SPI_SPEED_*,

-			 *                             \c SPI_SCK_*, \c SPI_SAMPLE_*, \c SPI_ORDER_* and \c SPI_MODE_* masks.

-			 */

-			static inline void SPI_Init(SPI_t* const SPI,

-			                            const uint8_t SPIOptions)

-			{

-				SPI->CTRL = (SPIOptions | SPI_ENABLE_bm);

-			}

-

-			/** Turns off the SPI driver, disabling and returning used hardware to their default configuration.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] SPI   Pointer to the base of the SPI peripheral within the device.

-			 */

-			static inline void SPI_Disable(SPI_t* const SPI)

-			{

-				SPI->CTRL &= ~SPI_ENABLE_bm;

-			}

-

-			/** Retrieves the currently selected SPI mode, once the SPI interface has been configured.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] SPI  Pointer to the base of the SPI peripheral within the device.

-			 *

-			 *  \return \ref SPI_MODE_MASTER if the interface is currently in SPI Master mode, \ref SPI_MODE_SLAVE otherwise

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t SPI_GetCurrentMode(SPI_t* const SPI) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t SPI_GetCurrentMode(SPI_t* const SPI)

-			{

-				return (SPI->CTRL & SPI_MASTER_bm);

-			}

-

-			/** Sends and receives a byte through the SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] SPI   Pointer to the base of the SPI peripheral within the device.

-			 *  \param[in]     Byte  Byte to send through the SPI interface.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Response byte from the attached SPI device.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t SPI_TransferByte(SPI_t* const SPI,

-			                                       const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t SPI_TransferByte(SPI_t* const SPI,

-			                                       const uint8_t Byte)

-			{

-				SPI->DATA = Byte;

-				while (!(SPI->STATUS & SPI_IF_bm));

-				return SPI->DATA;

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a byte through the SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete. The response

-			 *  byte sent to from the attached SPI device is ignored.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] SPI   Pointer to the base of the SPI peripheral within the device.

-			 *  \param[in]     Byte  Byte to send through the SPI interface.

-			 */

-			static inline void SPI_SendByte(SPI_t* const SPI,

-			                                const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void SPI_SendByte(SPI_t* const SPI,

-			                                const uint8_t Byte)

-			{

-				SPI->DATA = Byte;

-				while (!(SPI->STATUS & SPI_IF_bm));

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a dummy byte through the SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete. The response

-			 *  byte from the attached SPI device is returned.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] SPI  Pointer to the base of the SPI peripheral within the device.

-			 *

-			 *  \return The response byte from the attached SPI device.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t SPI_ReceiveByte(SPI_t* const SPI) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t SPI_ReceiveByte(SPI_t* const SPI)

-			{

-				SPI->DATA = 0;

-				while (!(SPI->STATUS & SPI_IF_bm));

-				return SPI->DATA;

-			}

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/SerialSPI_XMEGA.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/SerialSPI_XMEGA.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 6d0ea1115..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/SerialSPI_XMEGA.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,203 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Master SPI Mode Serial USART Peripheral Driver (XMEGA)

- *

- *  On-chip Master SPI mode USART driver for the XMEGA AVR microcontrollers.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the SPI Master

- *        Mode USART driver dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_SerialSPI

- *  \defgroup Group_SerialSPI_XMEGA Master SPI Mode Serial USART Peripheral Driver (XMEGA)

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  On-chip serial USART driver for the XMEGA AVR microcontrollers.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the ADC driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialSPI.h.

- *

- *  \section Sec_ExampleUsage Example Usage

- *  The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical

- *  application.

- *

- *  \code

- *      // Initialize the Master SPI mode USART driver before first use, with 1Mbit baud

- *      SerialSPI_Init(&USARTD0, (USART_SPI_SCK_LEAD_RISING | USART_SPI_SAMPLE_LEADING | USART_SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST), 1000000);

- *      

- *      // Send several bytes, ignoring the returned data

- *      SerialSPI_SendByte(&USARTD0, 0x01);

- *      SerialSPI_SendByte(&USARTD0, 0x02);

- *      SerialSPI_SendByte(&USARTD0, 0x03);

- *      

- *      // Receive several bytes, sending a dummy 0x00 byte each time

- *      uint8_t Byte1 = SerialSPI_ReceiveByte(&USARTD);

- *      uint8_t Byte2 = SerialSPI_ReceiveByte(&USARTD);

- *      uint8_t Byte3 = SerialSPI_ReceiveByte(&USARTD);

- *      

- *      // Send a byte, and store the received byte from the same transaction

- *      uint8_t ResponseByte = SerialSPI_TransferByte(&USARTD0, 0xDC);

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __SERIAL_SPI_XMEGA_H__

-#define __SERIAL_SPI_XMEGA_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-		#include <stdio.h>

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_SERIAL_SPI_H)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			#define SERIAL_SPI_UBBRVAL(Baud)       ((Baud < (F_CPU / 2)) ? ((F_CPU / (2 * Baud)) - 1) : 0)

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** \name SPI SCK Polarity Configuration Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** SPI clock polarity mask for \ref SerialSPI_Init(). Indicates that the SCK should lead on the rising edge. */

-			#define USART_SPI_SCK_LEAD_RISING      0

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name SPI Sample Edge Configuration Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** SPI data sample mode mask for \ref SerialSPI_Init(). Indicates that the data should sampled on the leading edge. */

-			#define USART_SPI_SAMPLE_LEADING       0

-

-			/** SPI data sample mode mask for \ref SerialSPI_Init(). Indicates that the data should be sampled on the trailing edge. */

-			#define USART_SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING      USART_UPCHA_bm

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name SPI Data Ordering Configuration Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** SPI data order mask for \ref SerialSPI_Init(). Indicates that data should be shifted out MSB first. */

-			#define USART_SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST      0

-

-			/** SPI data order mask for \ref SerialSPI_Init(). Indicates that data should be shifted out LSB first. */

-			#define USART_SPI_ORDER_LSB_FIRST      USART_UDORD_bm

-			//@}			

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Initialize the USART module in Master SPI mode. 

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] USART        Pointer to the base of the USART peripheral within the device.

-			 *  \param[in]     SPIOptions   USART SPI Options, a mask consisting of one of each of the \c USART_SPI_SCK_*,

-			 *                              \c USART_SPI_SAMPLE_* and \c USART_SPI_ORDER_* masks.

-			 *  \param[in]     BaudRate     SPI baud rate, in bits per second.

-			 */

-			static inline void SerialSPI_Init(USART_t* const USART,

-			                                  const uint8_t SPIOptions,

-			                                  const uint32_t BaudRate)

-			{

-				uint16_t BaudValue = SERIAL_SPI_UBBRVAL(BaudRate);

-			

-				USART->BAUDCTRLB = (BaudValue >> 8);

-				USART->BAUDCTRLA = (BaudValue & 0xFF);

-			

-				USART->CTRLC = (USART_CMODE_MSPI_gc | SPIOptions);

-				USART->CTRLB = (USART_RXEN_bm | USART_TXEN_bm);

-			}

-			

-			/** Turns off the USART driver, disabling and returning used hardware to their default configuration.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] USART  Pointer to the base of the USART peripheral within the device.

-			 */

-			static inline void SerialSPI_Disable(USART_t* const USART)

-			{

-				USART->CTRLA = 0;

-				USART->CTRLB = 0;

-				USART->CTRLC = 0;

-			}

-			

-			/** Sends and receives a byte through the USART SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] USART     Pointer to the base of the USART peripheral within the device.

-			 *  \param[in]     DataByte  Byte to send through the USART SPI interface.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Response byte from the attached SPI device.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t SerialSPI_TransferByte(USART_t* const USART,

-			                                             const uint8_t DataByte)

-			{

-				USART->DATA   = DataByte;

-				while (!(USART->STATUS & USART_TXCIF_bm));

-				USART->STATUS = USART_TXCIF_bm;

-				return USART->DATA;

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a byte through the USART SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete. The response

-			 *  byte sent to from the attached SPI device is ignored.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] USART     Pointer to the base of the USART peripheral within the device.

-			 *  \param[in]     DataByte  Byte to send through the USART SPI interface.

-			 */

-			static inline void SerialSPI_SendByte(USART_t* const USART,

-			                                      const uint8_t DataByte)

-			{

-				SerialSPI_TransferByte(USART, DataByte);

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a dummy byte through the USART SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete. The response

-			 *  byte from the attached SPI device is returned.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] USART  Pointer to the base of the USART peripheral within the device.

-			 *

-			 *  \return The response byte from the attached SPI device.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t SerialSPI_ReceiveByte(USART_t* const USART)

-			{

-				return SerialSPI_TransferByte(USART, 0);

-			}

-			

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/Serial_XMEGA.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/Serial_XMEGA.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 51a4d049e..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/Serial_XMEGA.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,122 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#include "../../../Common/Common.h"

-#if (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_SERIAL_C

-#include "../Serial.h"

-

-FILE USARTSerialStream;

-

-int Serial_putchar(char DataByte,

-                   FILE *Stream)

-{

-	USART_t* USART = fdev_get_udata(Stream);

-

-	Serial_SendByte(USART, DataByte);

-	return 0;

-}

-

-int Serial_getchar(FILE *Stream)

-{

-	USART_t* USART = fdev_get_udata(Stream);

-

-	if (!(Serial_IsCharReceived(USART)))

-	  return _FDEV_EOF;

-

-	return Serial_ReceiveByte(USART);

-}

-

-int Serial_getchar_Blocking(FILE *Stream)

-{

-	USART_t* USART = fdev_get_udata(Stream);

-

-	while (!(Serial_IsCharReceived(USART)));

-	return Serial_ReceiveByte(USART);

-}

-

-void Serial_SendString_P(USART_t* const USART,

-                         const char* FlashStringPtr)

-{

-	uint8_t CurrByte;

-

-	while ((CurrByte = pgm_read_byte(FlashStringPtr)) != 0x00)

-	{

-		Serial_SendByte(USART, CurrByte);

-		FlashStringPtr++;

-	}

-}

-

-void Serial_SendString(USART_t* const USART,

-                       const char* StringPtr)

-{

-	uint8_t CurrByte;

-

-	while ((CurrByte = *StringPtr) != 0x00)

-	{

-		Serial_SendByte(USART, CurrByte);

-		StringPtr++;

-	}

-}

-

-void Serial_SendData(USART_t* const USART,

-                     const uint8_t* Buffer,

-                     uint16_t Length)

-{

-	while (Length--)

-	  Serial_SendByte(USART, *(Buffer++));

-}

-

-void Serial_CreateStream(FILE* Stream)

-{

-	if (!(Stream))

-	{

-		Stream = &USARTSerialStream;

-		stdin  = Stream;

-		stdout = Stream;

-	}

-

-	*Stream = (FILE)FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(Serial_putchar, Serial_getchar, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);

-}

-

-void Serial_CreateBlockingStream(FILE* Stream)

-{

-	if (!(Stream))

-	{

-		Stream = &USARTSerialStream;

-		stdin  = Stream;

-		stdout = Stream;

-	}

-

-	*Stream = (FILE)FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(Serial_putchar, Serial_getchar_Blocking, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);

-}

-

-#endif

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/Serial_XMEGA.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/Serial_XMEGA.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 35b60d150..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/Serial_XMEGA.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,252 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Serial USART Peripheral Driver (XMEGA)

- *

- *  On-chip serial USART driver for the XMEGA AVR microcontrollers.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USART driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Serial

- *  \defgroup Group_Serial_XMEGA Serial USART Peripheral Driver (XMEGA)

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  On-chip serial USART driver for the XMEGA AVR microcontrollers.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USART driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h.

- *

- *  \section Sec_ExampleUsage Example Usage

- *  The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical

- *  application.

- *

- *  \code

- *      // Initialize the serial USART driver before first use, with 9600 baud (and no double-speed mode)

- *      Serial_Init(&USARTD0, 9600, false);

- *      

- *      // Send a string through the USART

- *      Serial_TxString(&USARTD0, "Test String\r\n");

- *      

- *      // Receive a byte through the USART

- *      uint8_t DataByte = Serial_RxByte(&USARTD0);

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __SERIAL_XMEGA_H__

-#define __SERIAL_XMEGA_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "../../Misc/TerminalCodes.h"

-

-		#include <stdio.h>

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_SERIAL_H) && !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_SERIAL_C)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* External Variables: */

-			extern FILE USARTSerialStream;

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			int Serial_putchar(char DataByte,

-			                   FILE *Stream);

-			int Serial_getchar(FILE *Stream);

-			int Serial_getchar_Blocking(FILE *Stream);

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Macro for calculating the baud value from a given baud rate when the \c U2X (double speed) bit is

-			 *  not set.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Baud  Target serial UART baud rate.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Closest UBRR register value for the given UART frequency.

-			 */

-			#define SERIAL_UBBRVAL(Baud)    ((((F_CPU / 16) + (Baud / 2)) / (Baud)) - 1)

-

-			/** Macro for calculating the baud value from a given baud rate when the \c U2X (double speed) bit is

-			 *  set.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Baud  Target serial UART baud rate.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Closest UBRR register value for the given UART frequency.

-			 */

-			#define SERIAL_2X_UBBRVAL(Baud) ((((F_CPU / 8) + (Baud / 2)) / (Baud)) - 1)

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Transmits a given string located in program space (FLASH) through the USART.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] USART           Pointer to the base of the USART peripheral within the device.

-			 *  \param[in]     FlashStringPtr  Pointer to a string located in program space.

-			 */

-			void Serial_SendString_P(USART_t* const USART,

-			                         const char* FlashStringPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Transmits a given string located in SRAM memory through the USART.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] USART      Pointer to the base of the USART peripheral within the device.

-			 *  \param[in]     StringPtr  Pointer to a string located in SRAM space.

-			 */

-			void Serial_SendString(USART_t* const USART,

-			                       const char* StringPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Transmits a given buffer located in SRAM memory through the USART.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] USART   Pointer to the base of the USART peripheral within the device.

-			 *  \param[in]     Buffer  Pointer to a buffer containing the data to send.

-			 *  \param[in]     Length  Length of the data to send, in bytes.

-			 */

-			void Serial_SendData(USART_t* const USART,

-			                     const uint8_t* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Creates a standard character stream from the USART so that it can be used with all the regular functions

-			 *  in the avr-libc \c <stdio.h> library that accept a \c FILE stream as a destination (e.g. \c fprintf). The created

-			 *  stream is bidirectional and can be used for both input and output functions.

-			 *

-			 *  Reading data from this stream is non-blocking, i.e. in most instances, complete strings cannot be read in by a single

-			 *  fetch, as the endpoint will not be ready at some point in the transmission, aborting the transfer. However, this may

-			 *  be used when the read data is processed byte-per-bye (via \c getc()) or when the user application will implement its own

-			 *  line buffering.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] Stream  Pointer to a FILE structure where the created stream should be placed, if \c NULL, \c stdout

-			 *                         and \c stdin will be configured to use the USART.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre The USART must first be configured via a call to \ref Serial_Init() before the stream is used.

-			 */

-			void Serial_CreateStream(FILE* Stream);

-			

-			/** Identical to \ref Serial_CreateStream(), except that reads are blocking until the calling stream function terminates

-			 *  the transfer.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] Stream  Pointer to a FILE structure where the created stream should be placed, if \c NULL, \c stdout

-			 *                         and \c stdin will be configured to use the USART.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre The USART must first be configured via a call to \ref Serial_Init() before the stream is used.

-			 */

-			void Serial_CreateBlockingStream(FILE* Stream);

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Initializes the USART, ready for serial data transmission and reception. This initializes the interface to

-			 *  standard 8-bit, no parity, 1 stop bit settings suitable for most applications.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] USART        Pointer to the base of the USART peripheral within the device.

-			 *  \param[in]     BaudRate     Serial baud rate, in bits per second.

-			 *  \param[in]     DoubleSpeed  Enables double speed mode when set, halving the sample time to double the baud rate.

-			 */

-			static inline void Serial_Init(USART_t* const USART,

-			                               const uint32_t BaudRate,

-			                               const bool DoubleSpeed)

-			{

-				uint16_t BaudValue = (DoubleSpeed ? SERIAL_2X_UBBRVAL(BaudRate) : SERIAL_UBBRVAL(BaudRate));

-

-				USART->BAUDCTRLB = (BaudValue >> 8);

-				USART->BAUDCTRLA = (BaudValue & 0xFF);

-				

-				USART->CTRLC = (USART_CMODE_ASYNCHRONOUS_gc | USART_PMODE_DISABLED_gc | USART_CHSIZE_8BIT_gc);

-				USART->CTRLB = (USART_RXEN_bm | USART_TXEN_bm | (DoubleSpeed ? USART_CLK2X_bm : 0));

-			}

-

-			/** Turns off the USART driver, disabling and returning used hardware to their default configuration.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] USART  Pointer to the base of the USART peripheral within the device.

-			 */

-			static inline void Serial_Disable(USART_t* const USART)

-			{

-				USART->CTRLA = 0;

-				USART->CTRLB = 0;

-				USART->CTRLC = 0;

-			}

-			

-			/** Indicates whether a character has been received through the USART.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] USART  Pointer to the base of the USART peripheral within the device.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if a character has been received, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Serial_IsCharReceived(USART_t* const USART) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Serial_IsCharReceived(USART_t* const USART)

-			{

-				return ((USART->STATUS & USART_RXCIF_bm) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Transmits a given byte through the USART.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] USART     Pointer to the base of the USART peripheral within the device.

-			 *  \param[in]     DataByte  Byte to transmit through the USART.

-			 */

-			static inline void Serial_SendByte(USART_t* const USART,

-			                                   const char DataByte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Serial_SendByte(USART_t* const USART,

-			                                   const char DataByte)

-			{

-				while (!(USART->STATUS & USART_DREIF_bm));

-				USART->DATA = DataByte;

-			}

-

-			/** Receives the next byte from the USART.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] USART  Pointer to the base of the USART peripheral within the device.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next byte received from the USART, or a negative value if no byte has been received.

-			 */

-			static inline int16_t Serial_ReceiveByte(USART_t* const USART) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline int16_t Serial_ReceiveByte(USART_t* const USART)

-			{

-				if (!(Serial_IsCharReceived(USART)))

-				  return -1;

-

-				USART->STATUS = USART_RXCIF_bm;

-				return USART->DATA;

-			}

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/AndroidAccessoryClass.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/AndroidAccessoryClass.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 2f2fa5bc7..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/AndroidAccessoryClass.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,76 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Master include file for the library USB Android Open Accessory Class driver.

- *

- *  Master include file for the library USB Android Open Accessory Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.

- *

- *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of

- *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassAOA Android Open Accessory Class Driver

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AndroidAccessoryClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Android Open Accessory Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the USB Android Open Accessory

- *  Class, for Host USB mode. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the Android Open Accessory Class

- *  manually via the low-level LUFA APIs.

- *

- *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with

- *  Host using the USB Android Open Accessory Class.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef _AOA_CLASS_H_

-#define _AOA_CLASS_H_

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_AOA_DRIVER

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../Core/USBMode.h"

-

-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-			#include "Host/AndroidAccessoryClassHost.h"

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/AudioClass.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/AudioClass.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 91aa22f3b..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/AudioClass.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,80 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Master include file for the library USB Audio 1.0 Class driver.

- *

- *  Master include file for the library USB Audio 1.0 Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.

- *

- *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of

- *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassAudio Audio 1.0 Class Driver

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/AudioClassDevice.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AudioClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Audio 1.0 Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the USB Audio 1.0 Class, for both

- *  Device and Host USB modes. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the Audio 1.0 class

- *  manually via the low-level LUFA APIs.

- *

- *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with

- *  Hosts or Devices using the USB Audio 1.0 Class.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef _AUDIO_CLASS_H_

-#define _AUDIO_CLASS_H_

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_DRIVER

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../Core/USBMode.h"

-

-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-			#include "Device/AudioClassDevice.h"

-		#endif

-

-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-			#include "Host/AudioClassHost.h"

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDCClass.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDCClass.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 6bfd38488..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDCClass.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,80 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Master include file for the library USB CDC-ACM Class driver.

- *

- *  Master include file for the library USB CDC Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.

- *

- *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of

- *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassCDC CDC-ACM (Virtual Serial) Class Driver

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDCClassDevice.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDCClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  CDC Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the USB CDC-ACM class Virtual Serial

- *  Ports, for both Device and Host USB modes. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the

- *  CDC class manually via the low-level LUFA APIs.

- *

- *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with

- *  Hosts or Devices using the USB CDC Class.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef _CDC_CLASS_H_

-#define _CDC_CLASS_H_

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DRIVER

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../Core/USBMode.h"

-

-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-			#include "Device/CDCClassDevice.h"

-		#endif

-

-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-			#include "Host/CDCClassHost.h"

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/AndroidAccessoryClassCommon.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/AndroidAccessoryClassCommon.h
deleted file mode 100644
index db97f4888..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/AndroidAccessoryClassCommon.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,128 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Android Open Accessory Class driver.

- *

- *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Android Open Accessory Class driver.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassAOA

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassAOACommon  Common Class Definitions

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB

- *  Android Open Accessory Class.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef _AOA_CLASS_COMMON_H_

-#define _AOA_CLASS_COMMON_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../Core/StdDescriptors.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_AOA_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		/** Product ID value in a Device Descriptor to indicate an Android device in Open Accessory mode. */

-		#define ANDROID_ACCESSORY_PRODUCT_ID        0x2D00

-

-		/** Product ID value in a Device Descriptor to indicate an Android device in Open Accessory and Android Debug mode. */

-		#define ANDROID_ACCESSORY_ADB_PRODUCT_ID    0x2D01

-

-	/* Enums: */

-		/** Enum for possible Class, Subclass and Protocol values of device and interface descriptors relating to the

-		 *  Android Open Accessory class.

-		 */

-		enum AOA_Descriptor_ClassSubclassProtocol_t

-		{

-			AOA_CSCP_AOADataClass    = 0xFF, /**< Descriptor Class value indicating that the device or interface

-			                                  *   belongs to the AOA data class.

-			                                  */

-			AOA_CSCP_AOADataSubclass = 0xFF, /**< Descriptor Subclass value indicating that the device or interface

-			                                  *   belongs to AOA data subclass.

-			                                  */

-			AOA_CSCP_AOADataProtocol = 0x00, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device or interface

-			                                  *   belongs to the AOA data class protocol.

-			                                  */

-		};

-

-		/** Enum for the Android Open Accessory class specific control requests that can be issued by the USB bus host. */

-		enum AOA_ClassRequests_t

-		{

-			AOA_REQ_GetAccessoryProtocol    = 0x33, /**< Android Open Accessory control request to retrieve the device's supported Accessory Protocol version. */

-			AOA_REQ_SendString              = 0x34, /**< Android Open Accessory control request to set an accessory property string in the device. */

-			AOA_REQ_StartAccessoryMode      = 0x35, /**< Android Open Accessory control request to switch the device into Accessory mode. */

-		};

-

-		/** Enum for the possible Android Open Accessory property string indexes. */

-		enum AOA_Strings_t

-		{

-			AOA_STRING_Manufacturer         = 0, /**< Index of the Manufacturer property string. */

-			AOA_STRING_Model                = 1, /**< Index of the Model Name property string. */

-			AOA_STRING_Description          = 2, /**< Index of the Description property string. */

-			AOA_STRING_Version              = 3, /**< Index of the Version Number property string. */

-			AOA_STRING_URI                  = 4, /**< Index of the URI Information property string. */

-			AOA_STRING_Serial               = 5, /**< Index of the Serial Number property string. */

-			

-			#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			AOA_STRING_TOTAL_STRINGS

-			#endif

-		};

-		

-		/** Enum for the possible Android Open Accessory protocol versions. */

-		enum AOA_Protocols_t

-		{

-			AOA_PROTOCOL_AccessoryV1        = 0x0001, /**< Android Open Accessory version 1. */

-		};

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/AudioClassCommon.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/AudioClassCommon.h
deleted file mode 100644
index f33fef68a..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/AudioClassCommon.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,774 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Audio 1.0 Class driver.

- *

- *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Audio 1.0 Class driver.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassAudio

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassAudioCommon  Common Class Definitions

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB

- *  Audio 1.0 Class.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef _AUDIO_CLASS_COMMON_H_

-#define _AUDIO_CLASS_COMMON_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../Core/StdDescriptors.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		/** \name Audio Channel Masks */

-		//@{

-		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_CHANNEL_LEFT_FRONT           (1 << 0)

-

-		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_CHANNEL_RIGHT_FRONT          (1 << 1)

-

-		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_CHANNEL_CENTER_FRONT         (1 << 2)

-

-		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_CHANNEL_LOW_FREQ_ENHANCE     (1 << 3)

-

-		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_CHANNEL_LEFT_SURROUND        (1 << 4)

-

-		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_CHANNEL_RIGHT_SURROUND       (1 << 5)

-

-		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_CHANNEL_LEFT_OF_CENTER       (1 << 6)

-

-		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_CHANNEL_RIGHT_OF_CENTER      (1 << 7)

-

-		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_CHANNEL_SURROUND             (1 << 8)

-

-		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_CHANNEL_SIDE_LEFT            (1 << 9)

-

-		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_CHANNEL_SIDE_RIGHT           (1 << 10)

-

-		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_CHANNEL_TOP                  (1 << 11)

-		//@}

-

-		/** \name Audio Feature Masks */

-		//@{

-		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_FEATURE_MUTE                 (1 << 0)

-

-		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_FEATURE_VOLUME               (1 << 1)

-

-		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_FEATURE_BASS                 (1 << 2)

-

-		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_FEATURE_MID                  (1 << 3)

-

-		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_FEATURE_TREBLE               (1 << 4)

-

-		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_FEATURE_GRAPHIC_EQUALIZER    (1 << 5)

-

-		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_FEATURE_AUTOMATIC_GAIN       (1 << 6)

-

-		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_FEATURE_DELAY                (1 << 7)

-

-		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_FEATURE_BASS_BOOST           (1 << 8)

-

-		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_FEATURE_BASS_LOUDNESS        (1 << 9)

-		//@}

-

-		/** \name Audio Terminal Types */

-		//@{

-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_UNDEFINED           0x0100

-

-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_STREAMING           0x0101

-

-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_VENDOR              0x01FF

-

-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_IN_UNDEFINED        0x0200

-

-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_IN_MIC              0x0201

-

-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_IN_DESKTOP_MIC      0x0202

-

-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_IN_PERSONAL_MIC     0x0203

-

-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_IN_OMNIDIR_MIC      0x0204

-

-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_IN_MIC_ARRAY        0x0205

-

-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_IN_PROCESSING_MIC   0x0206

-

-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_IN_OUT_UNDEFINED    0x0300

-

-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_OUT_SPEAKER         0x0301

-

-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_OUT_HEADPHONES      0x0302

-

-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_OUT_HEAD_MOUNTED    0x0303

-

-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_OUT_DESKTOP         0x0304

-

-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_OUT_ROOM            0x0305

-

-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_OUT_COMMUNICATION   0x0306

-

-		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */

-		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_OUT_LOWFREQ         0x0307

-		//@}

-

-		/** Convenience macro to fill a 24-bit \ref USB_Audio_SampleFreq_t structure with the given sample rate as a 24-bit number.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in] freq  Required audio sampling frequency in HZ

-		 */

-		#define AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(freq)           {.Byte1 = ((uint32_t)freq & 0xFF), .Byte2 = (((uint32_t)freq >> 8) & 0xFF), .Byte3 = (((uint32_t)freq >> 16) & 0xFF)}

-

-		/** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class-specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint

-		 *  accepts only filled endpoint packets of audio samples.

-		 */

-		#define AUDIO_EP_FULL_PACKETS_ONLY        (1 << 7)

-

-		/** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class-specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint

-		 *  will accept partially filled endpoint packets of audio samples.

-		 */

-		#define AUDIO_EP_ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS    (0 << 7)

-

-		/** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class-specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint

-		 *  allows for sampling frequency adjustments to be made via control requests directed at the endpoint.

-		 */

-		#define AUDIO_EP_SAMPLE_FREQ_CONTROL      (1 << 0)

-

-		/** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class-specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint

-		 *  allows for pitch adjustments to be made via control requests directed at the endpoint.

-		 */

-		#define AUDIO_EP_PITCH_CONTROL            (1 << 1)

-

-	/* Enums: */

-		/** Enum for possible Class, Subclass and Protocol values of device and interface descriptors relating to the Audio

-		 *  device class.

-		 */

-		enum Audio_Descriptor_ClassSubclassProtocol_t

-		{

-			AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass                     = 0x01, /**< Descriptor Class value indicating that the device or

-			                                                   *   interface belongs to the USB Audio 1.0 class.

-			                                                   */

-			AUDIO_CSCP_ControlSubclass                = 0x01, /**< Descriptor Subclass value indicating that the device or

-			                                                   *   interface belongs to the Audio Control subclass.

-			                                                   */

-			AUDIO_CSCP_ControlProtocol                = 0x00, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device or

-			                                                   *   interface belongs to the Audio Control protocol.

-			                                                   */

-			AUDIO_CSCP_AudioStreamingSubclass         = 0x02, /**< Descriptor Subclass value indicating that the device or

-			                                                   *   interface belongs to the MIDI Streaming subclass.

-			                                                   */

-			AUDIO_CSCP_MIDIStreamingSubclass          = 0x03, /**< Descriptor Subclass value indicating that the device or

-			                                                   *   interface belongs to the Audio streaming subclass.

-			                                                   */

-			AUDIO_CSCP_StreamingProtocol              = 0x00, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device or

-			                                                   *   interface belongs to the Streaming Audio protocol.

-			                                                   */

-		};

-

-		/** Audio class specific interface description subtypes, for the Audio Control interface. */

-		enum Audio_CSInterface_AC_SubTypes_t

-		{

-			AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header         = 0x01, /**< Audio class specific control interface header. */

-			AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_InputTerminal  = 0x02, /**< Audio class specific control interface Input Terminal. */

-			AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_OutputTerminal = 0x03, /**< Audio class specific control interface Output Terminal. */

-			AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Mixer          = 0x04, /**< Audio class specific control interface Mixer Unit. */

-			AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Selector       = 0x05, /**< Audio class specific control interface Selector Unit. */

-			AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Feature        = 0x06, /**< Audio class specific control interface Feature Unit. */

-			AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Processing     = 0x07, /**< Audio class specific control interface Processing Unit. */

-			AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Extension      = 0x08, /**< Audio class specific control interface Extension Unit. */

-		};

-

-		/** Audio class specific interface description subtypes, for the Audio Streaming interface. */

-		enum Audio_CSInterface_AS_SubTypes_t

-		{

-			AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_General        = 0x01, /**< Audio class specific streaming interface general descriptor. */

-			AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_FormatType     = 0x02, /**< Audio class specific streaming interface format type descriptor. */

-			AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_FormatSpecific = 0x03, /**< Audio class specific streaming interface format information descriptor. */

-		};

-

-		/** Audio class specific endpoint description subtypes, for the Audio Streaming interface. */

-		enum Audio_CSEndpoint_SubTypes_t

-		{

-			AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSEndpoint_General         = 0x01, /**< Audio class specific endpoint general descriptor. */

-		};

-

-		/** Enum for the Audio class specific control requests that can be issued by the USB bus host. */

-		enum Audio_ClassRequests_t

-		{

-			AUDIO_REQ_SetCurrent    = 0x01, /**< Audio class-specific request to set the current value of a parameter within the device. */

-			AUDIO_REQ_SetMinimum    = 0x02, /**< Audio class-specific request to set the minimum value of a parameter within the device. */

-			AUDIO_REQ_SetMaximum    = 0x03, /**< Audio class-specific request to set the maximum value of a parameter within the device. */

-			AUDIO_REQ_SetResolution = 0x04, /**< Audio class-specific request to set the resolution value of a parameter within the device. */

-			AUDIO_REQ_SetMemory     = 0x05, /**< Audio class-specific request to set the memory value of a parameter within the device. */

-			AUDIO_REQ_GetCurrent    = 0x81, /**< Audio class-specific request to get the current value of a parameter within the device. */

-			AUDIO_REQ_GetMinimum    = 0x82, /**< Audio class-specific request to get the minimum value of a parameter within the device. */

-			AUDIO_REQ_GetMaximum    = 0x83, /**< Audio class-specific request to get the maximum value of a parameter within the device. */

-			AUDIO_REQ_GetResolution = 0x84, /**< Audio class-specific request to get the resolution value of a parameter within the device. */

-			AUDIO_REQ_GetMemory     = 0x85, /**< Audio class-specific request to get the memory value of a parameter within the device. */

-			AUDIO_REQ_GetStatus     = 0xFF, /**< Audio class-specific request to get the device status. */

-		};

-

-		/** Enum for Audio class specific Endpoint control modifiers which can be set and retrieved by a USB host, if the corresponding

-		 *  endpoint control is indicated to be supported in the Endpoint's Audio-class specific endpoint descriptor.

-		 */

-		enum Audio_EndpointControls_t

-		{

-			AUDIO_EPCONTROL_SamplingFreq = 0x01, /**< Sampling frequency adjustment of the endpoint. */

-			AUDIO_EPCONTROL_Pitch        = 0x02, /**< Pitch adjustment of the endpoint. */

-		};

-

-	/* Type Defines: */

-		/** \brief Audio class-specific Input Terminal Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific input terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device

-		 *  contains an input audio source, either from a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example,

-		 *  a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details.

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_InputTerminal_t for the version of this type with standard element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */

-			uint8_t                 Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,

-			                                  *   must be \ref AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_InputTerminal.

-			                                  */

-

-			uint8_t                 TerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device. */

-			uint16_t                TerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a \c TERMINAL_* mask. */

-			uint8_t                 AssociatedOutputTerminal; /**< ID of associated output terminal, for physically grouped terminals

-			                                                   *   such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset.

-			                                                   */

-			uint8_t                 TotalChannels; /**< Total number of separate audio channels within this interface (right, left, etc.) */

-			uint16_t                ChannelConfig; /**< \c CHANNEL_* masks indicating what channel layout is supported by this terminal. */

-

-			uint8_t                 ChannelStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this channel within the device. */

-			uint8_t                 TerminalStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_Descriptor_InputTerminal_t;

-

-		/** \brief Audio class-specific Input Terminal Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific input terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device

-		 *  contains an input audio source, either from a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example,

-		 *  a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details.

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_Descriptor_InputTerminal_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific

-		 *       element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint8_t  bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */

-			uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value

-			                           *   given by the specific class.

-			                           */

-

-			uint8_t  bDescriptorSubtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,

-			                              *   must be \ref AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_InputTerminal.

-			                              */

-			uint8_t  bTerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device. */

-			uint16_t wTerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a \c TERMINAL_* mask. */

-			uint8_t  bAssocTerminal; /**< ID of associated output terminal, for physically grouped terminals

-			                          *   such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset.

-			                          */

-			uint8_t  bNrChannels; /**< Total number of separate audio channels within this interface (right, left, etc.) */

-			uint16_t wChannelConfig; /**< \c CHANNEL_* masks indicating what channel layout is supported by this terminal. */

-

-			uint8_t  iChannelNames; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this channel within the device. */

-			uint8_t  iTerminal; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_InputTerminal_t;

-

-		/** \brief Audio class-specific Output Terminal Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific output terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device

-		 *  contains an output audio sink, either to a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example,

-		 *  a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details.

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_OutputTerminal_t for the version of this type with standard element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */

-			uint8_t                 Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,

-			                                  *   must be \ref AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_OutputTerminal.

-			                                  */

-

-			uint8_t                 TerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device. */

-			uint16_t                TerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a \c TERMINAL_* mask. */

-			uint8_t                 AssociatedInputTerminal; /**< ID of associated input terminal, for physically grouped terminals

-			                                                    *   such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset.

-			                                                    */

-			uint8_t                 SourceID; /**< ID value of the unit this terminal's audio is sourced from. */

-

-			uint8_t                 TerminalStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_Descriptor_OutputTerminal_t;

-

-		/** \brief Audio class-specific Output Terminal Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific output terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device

-		 *  contains an output audio sink, either to a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example,

-		 *  a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details.

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_Descriptor_OutputTerminal_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific

-		 *       element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint8_t  bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */

-			uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,

-			                           *   must be \ref AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_OutputTerminal.

-			                           */

-

-			uint8_t  bDescriptorSubtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,

-			                              *   a value from the \ref Audio_CSInterface_AC_SubTypes_t enum.

-			                              */

-			uint8_t  bTerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device. */

-			uint16_t wTerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a \c TERMINAL_* mask. */

-			uint8_t  bAssocTerminal; /**< ID of associated input terminal, for physically grouped terminals

-			                          *   such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset.

-			                          */

-			uint8_t  bSourceID; /**< ID value of the unit this terminal's audio is sourced from. */

-

-			uint8_t  iTerminal; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_OutputTerminal_t;

-

-		/** \brief Audio class-specific Interface Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific interface descriptor. This follows a regular interface descriptor to

-		 *  supply extra information about the audio device's layout to the host. See the USB Audio specification for more

-		 *  details.

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_Interface_AC_t for the version of this type with standard element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */

-			uint8_t                 Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,

-			                                  *   a value from the \ref Audio_CSInterface_AS_SubTypes_t enum.

-			                                  */

-

-			uint16_t                ACSpecification; /**< Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported Audio Class specification version. */

-			uint16_t                TotalLength; /**< Total length of the Audio class-specific descriptors, including this descriptor. */

-

-			uint8_t                 InCollection; /**< Total number of Audio Streaming interfaces linked to this Audio Control interface (must be 1). */

-			uint8_t                 InterfaceNumber; /**< Interface number of the associated Audio Streaming interface. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t;

-

-		/** \brief Audio class-specific Interface Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific interface descriptor. This follows a regular interface descriptor to

-		 *  supply extra information about the audio device's layout to the host. See the USB Audio specification for more

-		 *  details.

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific

-		 *       element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint8_t  bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */

-			uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value

-			                           *   given by the specific class.

-			                           */

-

-			uint8_t  bDescriptorSubtype;/**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,

-			                             *   a value from the \ref Audio_CSInterface_AS_SubTypes_t enum.

-			                             */

-

-			uint16_t bcdADC; /**< Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported Audio Class specification version. */

-			uint16_t wTotalLength; /**< Total length of the Audio class-specific descriptors, including this descriptor. */

-

-			uint8_t  bInCollection; /**< Total number of Audio Streaming interfaces linked to this Audio Control interface (must be 1). */

-			uint8_t  bInterfaceNumbers; /**< Interface number of the associated Audio Streaming interface. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_Interface_AC_t;

-

-		/** \brief Audio class-specific Feature Unit Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific Feature Unit descriptor. This indicates to the host what features

-		 *  are present in the device's audio stream for basic control, such as per-channel volume. See the USB Audio

-		 *  specification for more details.

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_FeatureUnit_t for the version of this type with standard element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */

-			uint8_t                 Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,

-			                                  *   must be \ref AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Feature.

-			                                  */

-

-			uint8_t                 UnitID; /**< ID value of this feature unit - must be a unique value within the device. */

-			uint8_t                 SourceID; /**< Source ID value of the audio source input into this feature unit. */

-

-			uint8_t                 ControlSize; /**< Size of each element in the \c ChannelControls array. */

-			uint8_t                 ChannelControls[3]; /**< Feature masks for the control channel, and each separate audio channel. */

-

-			uint8_t                 FeatureUnitStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_Descriptor_FeatureUnit_t;

-

-		/** \brief Audio class-specific Feature Unit Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific Feature Unit descriptor. This indicates to the host what features

-		 *  are present in the device's audio stream for basic control, such as per-channel volume. See the USB Audio

-		 *  specification for more details.

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_Descriptor_FeatureUnit_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific

-		 *       element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint8_t bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */

-			uint8_t bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value

-			                          *   given by the specific class.

-			                          */

-

-			uint8_t bDescriptorSubtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,

-			                             *   must be \ref AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Feature.

-			                             */

-

-			uint8_t bUnitID; /**< ID value of this feature unit - must be a unique value within the device. */

-			uint8_t bSourceID; /**< Source ID value of the audio source input into this feature unit. */

-

-			uint8_t bControlSize; /**< Size of each element in the \c ChannelControls array. */

-			uint8_t bmaControls[3]; /**< Feature masks for the control channel, and each separate audio channel. */

-

-			uint8_t iFeature; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_FeatureUnit_t;

-

-		/** \brief Audio class-specific Streaming Audio Interface Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific streaming interface descriptor. This indicates to the host

-		 *  how audio streams within the device are formatted. See the USB Audio specification for more details.

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_Interface_AS_t for the version of this type with standard element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */

-			uint8_t                 Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,

-			                                  *   a value from the \ref Audio_CSInterface_AS_SubTypes_t enum.

-			                                  */

-

-			uint8_t                 TerminalLink; /**< ID value of the output terminal this descriptor is describing. */

-

-			uint8_t                 FrameDelay; /**< Delay in frames resulting from the complete sample processing from input to output. */

-			uint16_t                AudioFormat; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AS_t;

-

-		/** \brief Audio class-specific Streaming Audio Interface Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific streaming interface descriptor. This indicates to the host

-		 *  how audio streams within the device are formatted. See the USB Audio specification for more details.

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AS_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific

-		 *       element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint8_t  bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */

-			uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value

-			                           *   given by the specific class.

-			                           */

-

-			uint8_t  bDescriptorSubtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,

-			                              *   a value from the \ref Audio_CSInterface_AS_SubTypes_t enum.

-			                              */

-

-			uint8_t  bTerminalLink; /**< ID value of the output terminal this descriptor is describing. */

-

-			uint8_t  bDelay; /**< Delay in frames resulting from the complete sample processing from input to output. */

-			uint16_t wFormatTag; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_Interface_AS_t;

-

-		/** \brief Audio class-specific Format Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific audio format descriptor. This is used to give the host full details

-		 *  about the number of channels, the sample resolution, acceptable sample frequencies and encoding method used

-		 *  in the device's audio streams. See the USB Audio specification for more details.

-		 *

-		 *  \attention This descriptor <b>must</b> be followed by one or more \ref USB_Audio_SampleFreq_t elements containing

-		 *             the continuous or discrete sample frequencies.

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_Format_t for the version of this type with standard element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */

-			uint8_t                 Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,

-			                                  *   must be \ref AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_FormatType.

-			                                  */

-

-			uint8_t                 FormatType; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification. */

-			uint8_t                 Channels; /**< Total number of discrete channels in the stream. */

-

-			uint8_t                 SubFrameSize; /**< Size in bytes of each channel's sample data in the stream. */

-			uint8_t                 BitResolution; /**< Bits of resolution of each channel's samples in the stream. */

-

-			uint8_t                 TotalDiscreteSampleRates; /**< Total number of discrete sample frequencies supported by the device. When

-			                                                   *   zero, this must be followed by the lower and upper continuous sampling

-			                                                   *   frequencies supported by the device; otherwise, this must be followed

-			                                                   *   by the given number of discrete sampling frequencies supported.

-			                                                   */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_Descriptor_Format_t;

-

-		/** \brief 24-Bit Audio Frequency Structure.

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for a 24bit audio sample frequency structure. As GCC does not contain a built in 24-bit datatype,

-		 *  this this structure is used to build up the value instead. Fill this structure with the \ref AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ() macro.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint8_t Byte1; /**< Lowest 8 bits of the 24-bit value. */

-			uint8_t Byte2; /**< Middle 8 bits of the 24-bit value. */

-			uint8_t Byte3; /**< Upper 8 bits of the 24-bit value. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_SampleFreq_t;

-

-		/** \brief Audio class-specific Format Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific audio format descriptor. This is used to give the host full details

-		 *  about the number of channels, the sample resolution, acceptable sample frequencies and encoding method used

-		 *  in the device's audio streams. See the USB Audio specification for more details.

-		 *

-		 *  \attention This descriptor <b>must</b> be followed by one or more 24-bit integer elements containing the continuous

-		 *             or discrete sample frequencies.

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_Descriptor_Format_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific

-		 *       element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint8_t bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */

-			uint8_t bDescriptorType; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,

-			                          *   must be \ref AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_FormatType.

-			                          */

-

-			uint8_t bDescriptorSubtype;/**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,

-			                            *   a value from the \ref Audio_CSInterface_AS_SubTypes_t enum.

-			                            */

-

-			uint8_t bFormatType; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification. */

-			uint8_t bNrChannels; /**< Total number of discrete channels in the stream. */

-

-			uint8_t bSubFrameSize; /**< Size in bytes of each channel's sample data in the stream. */

-			uint8_t bBitResolution; /**< Bits of resolution of each channel's samples in the stream. */

-

-			uint8_t bSampleFrequencyType; /**< Total number of sample frequencies supported by the device. When

-			                               *   zero, this must be followed by the lower and upper continuous sampling

-			                               *   frequencies supported by the device; otherwise, this must be followed

-			                               *   by the given number of discrete sampling frequencies supported.

-			                               */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_Format_t;

-

-		/** \brief Audio class-specific Streaming Endpoint Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific endpoint descriptor. This contains a regular endpoint

-		 *  descriptor with a few Audio-class-specific extensions. See the USB Audio specification for more details.

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t for the version of this type with standard element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t Endpoint; /**< Standard endpoint descriptor describing the audio endpoint. */

-

-			uint8_t                   Refresh; /**< Always set to zero for Audio class devices. */

-			uint8_t                   SyncEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint address to send synchronization information to, if needed (zero otherwise). */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t;

-

-		/** \brief Audio class-specific Streaming Endpoint Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific endpoint descriptor. This contains a regular endpoint

-		 *  descriptor with a few Audio-class-specific extensions. See the USB Audio specification for more details.

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific

-		 *       element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint8_t  bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */

-			uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a

-			                           *   value given by the specific class.

-			                           */

-			uint8_t  bEndpointAddress; /**< Logical address of the endpoint within the device for the current

-			                            *   configuration, including direction mask.

-			                            */

-			uint8_t  bmAttributes; /**< Endpoint attributes, comprised of a mask of the endpoint type (\c EP_TYPE_*)

-			                        *   and attributes (\c ENDPOINT_ATTR_*) masks.

-			                        */

-			uint16_t wMaxPacketSize; /**< Size of the endpoint bank, in bytes. This indicates the maximum packet size

-			                          *   that the endpoint can receive at a time.

-			                          */

-			uint8_t  bInterval; /**< Polling interval in milliseconds for the endpoint if it is an INTERRUPT or

-			                     *   ISOCHRONOUS type.

-			                     */

-

-			uint8_t  bRefresh; /**< Always set to zero for Audio class devices. */

-			uint8_t  bSynchAddress; /**< Endpoint address to send synchronization information to, if needed (zero otherwise). */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t;

-

-		/** \brief Audio class-specific Extended Endpoint Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific extended endpoint descriptor. This contains extra information

-		 *  on the usage of endpoints used to stream audio in and out of the USB Audio device, and follows an Audio

-		 *  class-specific extended endpoint descriptor. See the USB Audio specification for more details.

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t for the version of this type with standard element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */

-			uint8_t                 Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,

-			                                  *   a value from the \ref Audio_CSEndpoint_SubTypes_t enum.

-			                                  */

-

-			uint8_t                 Attributes; /**< Audio class-specific endpoint attributes, such as \ref AUDIO_EP_FULL_PACKETS_ONLY. */

-

-			uint8_t                 LockDelayUnits; /**< Units used for the LockDelay field, see Audio class specification. */

-			uint16_t                LockDelay; /**< Time required to internally lock endpoint's internal clock recovery circuitry. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t;

-

-		/** \brief Audio class-specific Extended Endpoint Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific extended endpoint descriptor. This contains extra information

-		 *  on the usage of endpoints used to stream audio in and out of the USB Audio device, and follows an Audio

-		 *  class-specific extended endpoint descriptor. See the USB Audio specification for more details.

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific

-		 *       element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint8_t  bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */

-			uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value

-			                           *   given by the specific class.

-			                           */

-

-			uint8_t  bDescriptorSubtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,

-			                              *   a value from the \ref Audio_CSEndpoint_SubTypes_t enum.

-			                              */

-

-			uint8_t  bmAttributes; /**< Audio class-specific endpoint attributes, such as \ref AUDIO_EP_FULL_PACKETS_ONLY. */

-

-			uint8_t  bLockDelayUnits; /**< Units used for the LockDelay field, see Audio class specification. */

-			uint16_t wLockDelay; /**< Time required to internally lock endpoint's internal clock recovery circuitry. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t;

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/CDCClassCommon.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/CDCClassCommon.h
deleted file mode 100644
index f14a766cd..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/CDCClassCommon.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,386 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB CDC Class driver.

- *

- *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB CDC Class driver.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassCDC

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassCDCCommon  Common Class Definitions

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB

- *  CDC Class.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef _CDC_CLASS_COMMON_H_

-#define _CDC_CLASS_COMMON_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../Core/StdDescriptors.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		/** \name Virtual Control Line Masks */

-		//@{

-		/** Mask for the DTR handshake line for use with the \ref CDC_REQ_SetControlLineState class-specific request

-		 *  from the host, to indicate that the DTR line state should be high.

-		 */

-		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_DTR         (1 << 0)

-

-		/** Mask for the RTS handshake line for use with the \ref CDC_REQ_SetControlLineState class-specific request

-		 *  from the host, to indicate that the RTS line state should be high.

-		 */

-		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_RTS         (1 << 1)

-

-		/** Mask for the DCD handshake line for use with the \ref CDC_NOTIF_SerialState class-specific notification

-		 *  from the device to the host, to indicate that the DCD line state is currently high.

-		 */

-		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_DCD          (1 << 0)

-

-		/** Mask for the DSR handshake line for use with the \ref CDC_NOTIF_SerialState class-specific notification

-		 *  from the device to the host, to indicate that the DSR line state is currently high.

-		 */

-		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_DSR          (1 << 1)

-

-		/** Mask for the BREAK handshake line for use with the \ref CDC_NOTIF_SerialState class-specific notification

-		 *  from the device to the host, to indicate that the BREAK line state is currently high.

-		 */

-		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_BREAK        (1 << 2)

-

-		/** Mask for the RING handshake line for use with the \ref CDC_NOTIF_SerialState class-specific notification

-		 *  from the device to the host, to indicate that the RING line state is currently high.

-		 */

-		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_RING         (1 << 3)

-

-		/** Mask for use with the \ref CDC_NOTIF_SerialState class-specific notification from the device to the host,

-		 *  to indicate that a framing error has occurred on the virtual serial port.

-		 */

-		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_FRAMEERROR   (1 << 4)

-

-		/** Mask for use with the \ref CDC_NOTIF_SerialState class-specific notification from the device to the host,

-		 *  to indicate that a parity error has occurred on the virtual serial port.

-		 */

-		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_PARITYERROR  (1 << 5)

-

-		/** Mask for use with the \ref CDC_NOTIF_SerialState class-specific notification from the device to the host,

-		 *  to indicate that a data overrun error has occurred on the virtual serial port.

-		 */

-		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_OVERRUNERROR (1 << 6)

-		//@}

-

-		/** Macro to define a CDC class-specific functional descriptor. CDC functional descriptors have a

-		 *  uniform structure but variable sized data payloads, thus cannot be represented accurately by

-		 *  a single typedef struct. A macro is used instead so that functional descriptors can be created

-		 *  easily by specifying the size of the payload. This allows \c sizeof() to work correctly.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in] DataSize  Size in bytes of the CDC functional descriptor's data payload.

-		 */

-		#define CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(DataSize)        \

-		     struct                                        \

-		     {                                             \

-		          USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header;          \

-			      uint8_t                 SubType;         \

-		          uint8_t                 Data[DataSize];  \

-		     }

-

-	/* Enums: */

-		/** Enum for possible Class, Subclass and Protocol values of device and interface descriptors relating to the CDC

-		 *  device class.

-		 */

-		enum CDC_Descriptor_ClassSubclassProtocol_t

-		{

-			CDC_CSCP_CDCClass               = 0x02, /**< Descriptor Class value indicating that the device or interface

-			                                         *   belongs to the CDC class.

-			                                         */

-			CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificSubclass     = 0x00, /**< Descriptor Subclass value indicating that the device or interface

-			                                         *   belongs to no specific subclass of the CDC class.

-			                                         */

-			CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass            = 0x02, /**< Descriptor Subclass value indicating that the device or interface

-			                                         *   belongs to the Abstract Control Model CDC subclass.

-			                                         */

-			CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol      = 0x01, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device or interface

-			                                         *   belongs to the AT Command protocol of the CDC class.

-			                                         */

-			CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificProtocol     = 0x00, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device or interface

-			                                         *   belongs to no specific protocol of the CDC class.

-			                                         */

-			CDC_CSCP_VendorSpecificProtocol = 0xFF, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device or interface

-			                                         *   belongs to a vendor-specific protocol of the CDC class.

-			                                         */

-			CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass           = 0x0A, /**< Descriptor Class value indicating that the device or interface

-			                                         *   belongs to the CDC Data class.

-			                                         */

-			CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass         = 0x00, /**< Descriptor Subclass value indicating that the device or interface

-			                                         *   belongs to no specific subclass of the CDC data class.

-			                                         */

-			CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol         = 0x00, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device or interface

-			                                         *   belongs to no specific protocol of the CDC data class.

-			                                         */

-		};

-

-		/** Enum for the CDC class specific control requests that can be issued by the USB bus host. */

-		enum CDC_ClassRequests_t

-		{

-			CDC_REQ_SendEncapsulatedCommand = 0x00, /**< CDC class-specific request to send an encapsulated command to the device. */

-			CDC_REQ_GetEncapsulatedResponse = 0x01, /**< CDC class-specific request to retrieve an encapsulated command response from the device. */

-			CDC_REQ_SetLineEncoding         = 0x20, /**< CDC class-specific request to set the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */

-			CDC_REQ_GetLineEncoding         = 0x21, /**< CDC class-specific request to get the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */

-			CDC_REQ_SetControlLineState     = 0x22, /**< CDC class-specific request to set the current virtual serial port handshake line states. */

-			CDC_REQ_SendBreak               = 0x23, /**< CDC class-specific request to send a break to the receiver via the carrier channel. */

-		};

-

-		/** Enum for the CDC class specific notification requests that can be issued by a CDC device to a host. */

-		enum CDC_ClassNotifications_t

-		{

-			CDC_NOTIF_SerialState               = 0x20, /**< Notification type constant for a change in the virtual serial port

-			                                             *   handshake line states, for use with a \ref USB_Request_Header_t

-			                                             *   notification structure when sent to the host via the CDC notification

-			                                             *   endpoint.

-			                                             */

-		};

-

-		/** Enum for the CDC class specific interface descriptor subtypes. */

-		enum CDC_DescriptorSubtypes_t

-		{

-			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header           = 0x00, /**< CDC class-specific Header functional descriptor. */

-			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_CallManagement   = 0x01, /**< CDC class-specific Call Management functional descriptor. */

-			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM              = 0x02, /**< CDC class-specific Abstract Control Model functional descriptor. */

-			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_DirectLine       = 0x03, /**< CDC class-specific Direct Line functional descriptor. */

-			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_TelephoneRinger  = 0x04, /**< CDC class-specific Telephone Ringer functional descriptor. */

-			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_TelephoneCall    = 0x05, /**< CDC class-specific Telephone Call functional descriptor. */

-			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union            = 0x06, /**< CDC class-specific Union functional descriptor. */

-			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_CountrySelection = 0x07, /**< CDC class-specific Country Selection functional descriptor. */

-			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_TelephoneOpModes = 0x08, /**< CDC class-specific Telephone Operation Modes functional descriptor. */

-			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_USBTerminal      = 0x09, /**< CDC class-specific USB Terminal functional descriptor. */

-			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_NetworkChannel   = 0x0A, /**< CDC class-specific Network Channel functional descriptor. */

-			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ProtocolUnit     = 0x0B, /**< CDC class-specific Protocol Unit functional descriptor. */

-			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ExtensionUnit    = 0x0C, /**< CDC class-specific Extension Unit functional descriptor. */

-			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_MultiChannel     = 0x0D, /**< CDC class-specific Multi-Channel Management functional descriptor. */

-			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_CAPI             = 0x0E, /**< CDC class-specific Common ISDN API functional descriptor. */

-			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Ethernet         = 0x0F, /**< CDC class-specific Ethernet functional descriptor. */

-			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ATM              = 0x10, /**< CDC class-specific Asynchronous Transfer Mode functional descriptor. */

-		};

-

-		/** Enum for the possible line encoding formats of a virtual serial port. */

-		enum CDC_LineEncodingFormats_t

-		{

-			CDC_LINEENCODING_OneStopBit          = 0, /**< Each frame contains one stop bit. */

-			CDC_LINEENCODING_OneAndAHalfStopBits = 1, /**< Each frame contains one and a half stop bits. */

-			CDC_LINEENCODING_TwoStopBits         = 2, /**< Each frame contains two stop bits. */

-		};

-

-		/** Enum for the possible line encoding parity settings of a virtual serial port. */

-		enum CDC_LineEncodingParity_t

-		{

-			CDC_PARITY_None  = 0, /**< No parity bit mode on each frame. */

-			CDC_PARITY_Odd   = 1, /**< Odd parity bit mode on each frame. */

-			CDC_PARITY_Even  = 2, /**< Even parity bit mode on each frame. */

-			CDC_PARITY_Mark  = 3, /**< Mark parity bit mode on each frame. */

-			CDC_PARITY_Space = 4, /**< Space parity bit mode on each frame. */

-		};

-

-	/* Type Defines: */

-		/** \brief CDC class-specific Functional Header Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for a CDC class-specific functional header descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device

-		 *  contains one or more CDC functional data descriptors, which give the CDC interface's capabilities and configuration.

-		 *  See the CDC class specification for more details.

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_CDC_StdDescriptor_FunctionalHeader_t for the version of this type with standard element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */

-			uint8_t                 Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between CDC class-specific descriptors,

-			                                  *   must be \ref CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header.

-			                                  */

-			uint16_t                CDCSpecification; /**< Version number of the CDC specification implemented by the device,

-			                                           *   encoded in BCD format.

-			                                           */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t;

-

-		/** \brief CDC class-specific Functional Header Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for a CDC class-specific functional header descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device

-		 *  contains one or more CDC functional data descriptors, which give the CDC interface's capabilities and configuration.

-		 *  See the CDC class specification for more details.

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific

-		 *       element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint8_t  bFunctionLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */

-			uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value

-			                           *   given by the specific class.

-			                           */

-			uint8_t  bDescriptorSubType; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between CDC class-specific descriptors,

-			                              *   must be \ref CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header.

-			                              */

-			uint16_t bcdCDC; /**< Version number of the CDC specification implemented by the device, encoded in BCD format. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_CDC_StdDescriptor_FunctionalHeader_t;

-

-		/** \brief CDC class-specific Functional ACM Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for a CDC class-specific functional ACM descriptor. This indicates to the host that the CDC interface

-		 *  supports the CDC ACM subclass of the CDC specification. See the CDC class specification for more details.

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_CDC_StdDescriptor_FunctionalACM_t for the version of this type with standard element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */

-			uint8_t                 Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between CDC class-specific descriptors,

-			                                  *   must be \ref CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM.

-			                                  */

-			uint8_t                 Capabilities; /**< Capabilities of the ACM interface, given as a bit mask. For most devices,

-			                                       *   this should be set to a fixed value of 0x06 - for other capabilities, refer

-			                                       *   to the CDC ACM specification.

-			                                       */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t;

-

-		/** \brief CDC class-specific Functional ACM Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for a CDC class-specific functional ACM descriptor. This indicates to the host that the CDC interface

-		 *  supports the CDC ACM subclass of the CDC specification. See the CDC class specification for more details.

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific

-		 *       element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint8_t bFunctionLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */

-			uint8_t bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value

-			                          *   given by the specific class.

-			                          */

-			uint8_t bDescriptorSubType; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between CDC class-specific descriptors,

-			                             *   must be \ref CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM.

-			                             */

-			uint8_t bmCapabilities; /**< Capabilities of the ACM interface, given as a bit mask. For most devices,

-			                         *   this should be set to a fixed value of 0x06 - for other capabilities, refer

-			                         *   to the CDC ACM specification.

-			                         */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_CDC_StdDescriptor_FunctionalACM_t;

-

-		/** \brief CDC class-specific Functional Union Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for a CDC class-specific functional Union descriptor. This indicates to the host that specific

-		 *  CDC control and data interfaces are related. See the CDC class specification for more details.

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_CDC_StdDescriptor_FunctionalUnion_t for the version of this type with standard element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */

-			uint8_t                 Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between CDC class-specific descriptors,

-			                                  *   must be \ref CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union.

-			                                  */

-			uint8_t                 MasterInterfaceNumber; /**< Interface number of the CDC Control interface. */

-			uint8_t                 SlaveInterfaceNumber; /**< Interface number of the CDC Data interface. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t;

-

-		/** \brief CDC class-specific Functional Union Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for a CDC class-specific functional Union descriptor. This indicates to the host that specific

-		 *  CDC control and data interfaces are related. See the CDC class specification for more details.

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific

-		 *       element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint8_t bFunctionLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */

-			uint8_t bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value

-			                          *   given by the specific class.

-			                          */

-			uint8_t bDescriptorSubType; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between CDC class-specific descriptors,

-			                             *   must be \ref CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union.

-			                             */

-			uint8_t bMasterInterface; /**< Interface number of the CDC Control interface. */

-			uint8_t bSlaveInterface0; /**< Interface number of the CDC Data interface. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_CDC_StdDescriptor_FunctionalUnion_t;

-

-		/** \brief CDC Virtual Serial Port Line Encoding Settings Structure.

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for a CDC Line Encoding structure, used to hold the various encoding parameters for a virtual

-		 *  serial port.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint32_t BaudRateBPS; /**< Baud rate of the virtual serial port, in bits per second. */

-			uint8_t  CharFormat; /**< Character format of the virtual serial port, a value from the

-								  *   \ref CDC_LineEncodingFormats_t enum.

-								  */

-			uint8_t  ParityType; /**< Parity setting of the virtual serial port, a value from the

-								  *   \ref CDC_LineEncodingParity_t enum.

-								  */

-			uint8_t  DataBits; /**< Bits of data per character of the virtual serial port. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED CDC_LineEncoding_t;

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDClassCommon.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDClassCommon.h
deleted file mode 100644
index bc5cb4652..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDClassCommon.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,655 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB HID Class driver.

- *

- *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB HID Class driver.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassHID

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassHIDCommon  Common Class Definitions

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB

- *  HID Class.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef _HID_CLASS_COMMON_H_

-#define _HID_CLASS_COMMON_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../Core/StdDescriptors.h"

-		#include "HIDParser.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_HID_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		/** \name Keyboard Standard Report Modifier Masks */

-		//@{

-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left control key is currently pressed. */

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFIER_LEFTCTRL                    (1 << 0)

-

-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left shift key is currently pressed. */

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFIER_LEFTSHIFT                   (1 << 1)

-

-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left alt key is currently pressed. */

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFIER_LEFTALT                     (1 << 2)

-

-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left GUI key is currently pressed. */

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFIER_LEFTGUI                     (1 << 3)

-

-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right control key is currently pressed. */

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFIER_RIGHTCTRL                   (1 << 4)

-

-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right shift key is currently pressed. */

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFIER_RIGHTSHIFT                  (1 << 5)

-

-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right alt key is currently pressed. */

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFIER_RIGHTALT                    (1 << 6)

-

-		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right GUI key is currently pressed. */

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFIER_RIGHTGUI                    (1 << 7)

-		//@}

-

-		/** \name Keyboard Standard Report LED Masks */

-		//@{

-		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's NUM LOCK mode is currently set. */

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_LED_NUMLOCK                          (1 << 0)

-

-		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's CAPS LOCK mode is currently set. */

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_LED_CAPSLOCK                         (1 << 1)

-

-		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's SCROLL LOCK mode is currently set. */

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_LED_SCROLLLOCK                       (1 << 2)

-

-		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's KATANA mode is currently set. */

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_LED_KATANA                           (1 << 3)

-		//@}

-

-		/** \name Keyboard Standard Report Key Scan-codes */

-		//@{

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_ERROR_ROLLOVER                    0x01

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_POST_FAIL                         0x02

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_ERROR_UNDEFINED                   0x03

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_A                                 0x04

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_B                                 0x05

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_C                                 0x06

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_D                                 0x07

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_E                                 0x08

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F                                 0x09

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_G                                 0x0A

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_H                                 0x0B

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_I                                 0x0C

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_J                                 0x0D

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_K                                 0x0E

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_L                                 0x0F

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_M                                 0x10

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_N                                 0x11

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_O                                 0x12

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_P                                 0x13

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_Q                                 0x14

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_R                                 0x15

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_S                                 0x16

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_T                                 0x17

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_U                                 0x18

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_V                                 0x19

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_W                                 0x1A

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_X                                 0x1B

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_Y                                 0x1C

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_Z                                 0x1D

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_1_AND_EXCLAMATION                 0x1E

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_2_AND_AT                          0x1F

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_3_AND_HASHMARK                    0x20

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_4_AND_DOLLAR                      0x21

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_5_AND_PERCENTAGE                  0x22

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_6_AND_CARET                       0x23

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_7_AND_AND_AMPERSAND               0x24

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_8_AND_ASTERISK                    0x25

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_9_AND_OPENING_PARENTHESIS         0x26

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_0_AND_CLOSING_PARENTHESIS         0x27

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_ENTER                             0x28

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_ESCAPE                            0x29

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_BACKSPACE                         0x2A

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_TAB                               0x2B

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_SPACE                             0x2C

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_MINUS_AND_UNDERSCORE              0x2D

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_EQUAL_AND_PLUS                    0x2E

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_OPENING_BRACKET_AND_OPENING_BRACE 0x2F

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_CLOSING_BRACKET_AND_CLOSING_BRACE 0x30

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_BACKSLASH_AND_PIPE                0x31

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_NON_US_HASHMARK_AND_TILDE         0x32

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_SEMICOLON_AND_COLON               0x33

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_APOSTROPHE_AND_QUOTE              0x34

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_GRAVE_ACCENT_AND_TILDE            0x35

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_COMMA_AND_LESS_THAN_SIGN          0x36

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_DOT_AND_GREATER_THAN_SIGN         0x37

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_SLASH_AND_QUESTION_MARK           0x38

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_CAPS_LOCK                         0x39

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F1                                0x3A

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F2                                0x3B

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F3                                0x3C

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F4                                0x3D

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F5                                0x3E

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F6                                0x3F

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F7                                0x40

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F8                                0x41

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F9                                0x42

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F10                               0x43

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F11                               0x44

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F12                               0x45

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_PRINT_SCREEN                      0x46

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_SCROLL_LOCK                       0x47

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_PAUSE                             0x48

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_INSERT                            0x49

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_HOME                              0x4A

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_PAGE_UP                           0x4B

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_DELETE                            0x4C

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_END                               0x4D

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_PAGE_DOWN                         0x4E

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_RIGHT_ARROW                       0x4F

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LEFT_ARROW                        0x50

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_DOWN_ARROW                        0x51

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_UP_ARROW                          0x52

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_NUM_LOCK                          0x53

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_SLASH                      0x54

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_ASTERISK                   0x55

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_MINUS                      0x56

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_PLUS                       0x57

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_ENTER                      0x58

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_1_AND_END                  0x59

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_2_AND_DOWN_ARROW           0x5A

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_3_AND_PAGE_DOWN            0x5B

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_4_AND_LEFT_ARROW           0x5C

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_5                          0x5D

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_6_AND_RIGHT_ARROW          0x5E

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_7_AND_HOME                 0x5F

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_8_AND_UP_ARROW             0x60

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_9_AND_PAGE_UP              0x61

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_0_AND_INSERT               0x62

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_DOT_AND_DELETE             0x63

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_NON_US_BACKSLASH_AND_PIPE         0x64

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_POWER                             0x66

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_EQUAL_SIGN                        0x67

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F13                               0x68

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F14                               0x69

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F15                               0x6A

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F16                               0x6B

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F17                               0x6C

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F18                               0x6D

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F19                               0x6E

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F20                               0x6F

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F21                               0x70

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F22                               0x71

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F23                               0x72

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F24                               0x73

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_EXECUTE                           0x74

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_HELP                              0x75

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_MANU                              0x76

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_SELECT                            0x77

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_STOP                              0x78

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_AGAIN                             0x79

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_UNDO                              0x7A

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_CUT                               0x7B

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_COPY                              0x7C

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_PASTE                             0x7D

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_FIND                              0x7E

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_MUTE                              0x7F

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_VOLUME_UP                         0x80

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_VOLUME_DOWN                       0x81

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LOCKING_CAPS_LOCK                 0x82

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LOCKING_NUM_LOCK                  0x83

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LOCKING_SCROLL_LOCK               0x84

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_COMMA                      0x85

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_EQUAL_SIGN                 0x86

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_INTERNATIONAL1                    0x87

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_INTERNATIONAL2                    0x88

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_INTERNATIONAL3                    0x89

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_INTERNATIONAL4                    0x8A

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_INTERNATIONAL5                    0x8B

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_INTERNATIONAL6                    0x8C

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_INTERNATIONAL7                    0x8D

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_INTERNATIONAL8                    0x8E

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_INTERNATIONAL9                    0x8F

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LANG1                             0x90

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LANG2                             0x91

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LANG3                             0x92

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LANG4                             0x93

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LANG5                             0x94

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LANG6                             0x95

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LANG7                             0x96

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LANG8                             0x97

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LANG9                             0x98

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_ALTERNATE_ERASE                   0x99

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_SISREQ                            0x9A

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_CANCEL                            0x9B

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_CLEAR                             0x9C

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_PRIOR                             0x9D

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_RETURN                            0x9E

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_SEPARATOR                         0x9F

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_OUT                               0xA0

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_OPER                              0xA1

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_CLEAR_AND_AGAIN                   0xA2

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_CRSEL_ANDPROPS                    0xA3

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_EXSEL                             0xA4

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_00                         0xB0

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_000                        0xB1

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_THOUSANDS_SEPARATOR               0xB2

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_DECIMAL_SEPARATOR                 0xB3

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_CURRENCY_UNIT                     0xB4

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_CURRENCY_SUB_UNIT                 0xB5

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_OPENING_PARENTHESIS        0xB6

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_CLOSING_PARENTHESIS        0xB7

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_OPENING_BRACE              0xB8

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_CLOSING_BRACE              0xB9

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_TAB                        0xBA

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_BACKSPACE                  0xBB

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_A                          0xBC

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_B                          0xBD

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_C                          0xBE

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_D                          0xBF

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_E                          0xC0

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_F                          0xC1

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_XOR                        0xC2

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_CARET                      0xC3

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_PERCENTAGE                 0xC4

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_LESS_THAN_SIGN             0xC5

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_GREATER_THAN_SIGN          0xC6

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_AMP                        0xC7

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_AMP_AMP                    0xC8

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_PIPE                       0xC9

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_PIPE_PIPE                  0xCA

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_COLON                      0xCB

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_HASHMARK                   0xCC

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_SPACE                      0xCD

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_AT                         0xCE

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_EXCLAMATION_SIGN           0xCF

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_MEMORY_STORE               0xD0

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_MEMORY_RECALL              0xD1

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_MEMORY_CLEAR               0xD2

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_MEMORY_ADD                 0xD3

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_MEMORY_SUBTRACT            0xD4

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_MEMORY_MULTIPLY            0xD5

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_MEMORY_DIVIDE              0xD6

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_PLUS_AND_MINUS             0xD7

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_CLEAR                      0xD8

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_CLEAR_ENTRY                0xD9

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_BINARY                     0xDA

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_OCTAL                      0xDB

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_DECIMAL                    0xDC

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_HEXADECIMAL                0xDD

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LEFT_CONTROL                      0xE0

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LEFT_SHIFT                        0xE1

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LEFT_ALT                          0xE2

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LEFT_GUI                          0xE3

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_RIGHT_CONTROL                     0xE4

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_RIGHT_SHIFT                       0xE5

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_RIGHT_ALT                         0xE6

-		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_RIGHT_GUI                         0xE7

-		//@}

-

-		/** \name Common HID Device Report Descriptors */

-		//@{

-		/** \hideinitializer

-		 *  A list of HID report item array elements that describe a typical HID USB Joystick. The resulting report

-		 *  descriptor is structured according to the following layout:

-		 *

-		 *  \code

-		 *  struct

-		 *  {

-		 *      intA_t X; // Signed X axis value

-		 *      intA_t Y; // Signed Y axis value

-		 *      intA_t Z; // Signed Z axis value

-		 *      uintB_t Buttons; // Pressed buttons bitmask

-		 *  } Joystick_Report;

-		 *  \endcode

-		 *

-		 *  Where \c uintA_t is a type large enough to hold the ranges of the signed \c MinAxisVal and \c MaxAxisVal values,

-		 *  and \c intB_t is a type large enough to hold one bit per button.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in] MinAxisVal      Minimum logical axis value (16-bit).

-		 *  \param[in] MaxAxisVal      Maximum logical axis value (16-bit).

-		 *  \param[in] MinPhysicalVal  Minimum physical axis value, for movement resolution calculations (16-bit).

-		 *  \param[in] MaxPhysicalVal  Maximum physical axis value, for movement resolution calculations (16-bit).

-		 *  \param[in] Buttons         Total number of buttons in the device (8-bit).

-		 */

-		#define HID_DESCRIPTOR_JOYSTICK(MinAxisVal, MaxAxisVal, MinPhysicalVal, MaxPhysicalVal, Buttons) \

-			HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x01),                     \

-			HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x04),                          \

-			HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x01),                     \

-				HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x01),                      \

-				HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x00),                 \

-					HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x30),                  \

-					HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x31),                  \

-					HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x32),                  \

-					HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(16, MinAxisVal), \

-					HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(16, MaxAxisVal), \

-					HID_RI_PHYSICAL_MINIMUM(16, MinPhysicalVal), \

-					HID_RI_PHYSICAL_MAXIMUM(16, MaxPhysicalVal), \

-					HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 3),              \

-					HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, ((((MinAxisVal >= -0xFF) && (MaxAxisVal <= 0xFF)) ? 8 : 16))), \

-					HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE), \

-				HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0),                   \

-				HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x09),                 \

-				HID_RI_USAGE_MINIMUM(8, 0x01),              \

-				HID_RI_USAGE_MAXIMUM(8, Buttons),           \

-				HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0x00),            \

-				HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 0x01),            \

-				HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x01),                \

-				HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, Buttons),            \

-				HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE), \

-				HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, (8 - (Buttons % 8))), \

-				HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x01),               \

-				HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_CONSTANT),          \

-			HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0)

-

-		/** \hideinitializer

-		 *  A list of HID report item array elements that describe a typical HID USB keyboard. The resulting report descriptor

-		 *  is compatible with \ref USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t when \c MaxKeys is equal to 6. For other values, the report will

-		 *  be structured according to the following layout:

-		 *

-		 *  \code

-		 *  struct

-		 *  {

-		 *      uint8_t Modifier; // Keyboard modifier byte indicating pressed modifier keys (\c HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_* masks)

-		 *      uint8_t Reserved; // Reserved for OEM use, always set to 0.

-		 *      uint8_t KeyCode[MaxKeys]; // Length determined by the number of keys that can be reported

-		 *  } Keyboard_Report;

-		 *  \endcode

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in] MaxKeys  Number of simultaneous keys that can be reported at the one time (8-bit).

-		 */

-		#define HID_DESCRIPTOR_KEYBOARD(MaxKeys)            \

-			HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x01),                     \

-			HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x06),                          \

-			HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x01),                     \

-				HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x07),                 \

-				HID_RI_USAGE_MINIMUM(8, 0xE0),              \

-				HID_RI_USAGE_MAXIMUM(8, 0xE7),              \

-				HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0x00),            \

-				HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 0x01),            \

-				HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x01),                \

-				HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x08),               \

-				HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE), \

-				HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x01),               \

-				HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x08),                \

-				HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_CONSTANT),          \

-				HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x08),                 \

-				HID_RI_USAGE_MINIMUM(8, 0x01),              \

-				HID_RI_USAGE_MAXIMUM(8, 0x05),              \

-				HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x05),               \

-				HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x01),                \

-				HID_RI_OUTPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE | HID_IOF_NON_VOLATILE), \

-				HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x01),               \

-				HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x03),                \

-				HID_RI_OUTPUT(8, HID_IOF_CONSTANT),         \

-				HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0x00),            \

-				HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 0x65),            \

-				HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x07),                 \

-				HID_RI_USAGE_MINIMUM(8, 0x00),              \

-				HID_RI_USAGE_MAXIMUM(8, 0x65),              \

-				HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, MaxKeys),            \

-				HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x08),                \

-				HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_ARRAY | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE), \

-			HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0)

-

-		/** \hideinitializer

-		 *  A list of HID report item array elements that describe a typical HID USB mouse. The resulting report descriptor

-		 *  is compatible with \ref USB_MouseReport_Data_t if the \c MinAxisVal and \c MaxAxisVal values fit within a \c int8_t range

-		 *  and the number of Buttons is less than 8. For other values, the report is structured according to the following layout:

-		 *

-		 *  \code

-		 *  struct

-		 *  {

-		 *      uintA_t Buttons; // Pressed buttons bitmask

-		 *      intB_t X; // X axis value

-		 *      intB_t Y; // Y axis value

-		 *  } Mouse_Report;

-		 *  \endcode

-		 *

-		 *  Where \c intA_t is a type large enough to hold one bit per button, and \c intB_t is a type large enough to hold the

-		 *  ranges of the signed \c MinAxisVal and \c MaxAxisVal values.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in] MinAxisVal      Minimum X/Y logical axis value (16-bit).

-		 *  \param[in] MaxAxisVal      Maximum X/Y logical axis value (16-bit).

-		 *  \param[in] MinPhysicalVal  Minimum X/Y physical axis value, for movement resolution calculations (16-bit).

-		 *  \param[in] MaxPhysicalVal  Maximum X/Y physical axis value, for movement resolution calculations (16-bit).

-		 *  \param[in] Buttons         Total number of buttons in the device (8-bit).

-		 *  \param[in] AbsoluteCoords  Boolean \c true to use absolute X/Y coordinates (e.g. touchscreen).

-		 */

-		#define HID_DESCRIPTOR_MOUSE(MinAxisVal, MaxAxisVal, MinPhysicalVal, MaxPhysicalVal, Buttons, AbsoluteCoords) \

-			HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x01),                     \

-			HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x02),                          \

-			HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x01),                     \

-				HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x01),                      \

-				HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x00),                 \

-					HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x09),             \

-					HID_RI_USAGE_MINIMUM(8, 0x01),          \

-					HID_RI_USAGE_MAXIMUM(8, Buttons),       \

-					HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0x00),        \

-					HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 0x01),        \

-					HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, Buttons),        \

-					HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x01),            \

-					HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE), \

-					HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x01),           \

-					HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, (8 - (Buttons % 8))), \

-					HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_CONSTANT),      \

-					HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x01),             \

-					HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x30),                  \

-					HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x31),                  \

-					HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(16, MinAxisVal), \

-					HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(16, MaxAxisVal), \

-					HID_RI_PHYSICAL_MINIMUM(16, MinPhysicalVal), \

-					HID_RI_PHYSICAL_MAXIMUM(16, MaxPhysicalVal), \

-					HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x02),           \

-					HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, ((((MinAxisVal >= -0xFF) && (MaxAxisVal <= 0xFF)) ? 8 : 16))), \

-					HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | (AbsoluteCoords ? HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE : HID_IOF_RELATIVE)), \

-				HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0),                   \

-			HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0)

-

-		/** \hideinitializer

-		 *  A list of HID report item array elements that describe a typical Vendor Defined byte array HID report descriptor,

-		 *  used for transporting arbitrary data between the USB host and device via HID reports. The resulting report should be

-		 *  a \c uint8_t byte array of the specified length in both Device to Host (IN) and Host to Device (OUT) directions.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in] VendorPageNum    Vendor Defined HID Usage Page index, ranging from 0x00 to 0xFF.

-		 *  \param[in] CollectionUsage  Vendor Usage for the encompassing report IN and OUT collection, ranging from 0x00 to 0xFF.

-		 *  \param[in] DataINUsage      Vendor Usage for the IN report data, ranging from 0x00 to 0xFF.

-		 *  \param[in] DataOUTUsage     Vendor Usage for the OUT report data, ranging from 0x00 to 0xFF.

-		 *  \param[in] NumBytes         Length of the data IN and OUT reports.

-		 */

-		#define HID_DESCRIPTOR_VENDOR(VendorPageNum, CollectionUsage, DataINUsage, DataOUTUsage, NumBytes) \

-			HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(16, (0xFF00 | VendorPageNum)), \

-			HID_RI_USAGE(8, CollectionUsage),           \

-			HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x01),                 \

-				HID_RI_USAGE(8, DataINUsage),           \

-				HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0x00),        \

-				HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 0xFF),        \

-				HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x08),            \

-				HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, NumBytes),       \

-				HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE), \

-				HID_RI_USAGE(8, DataOUTUsage),          \

-				HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0x00),        \

-				HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 0xFF),        \

-				HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x08),            \

-				HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, NumBytes),       \

-				HID_RI_OUTPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE | HID_IOF_NON_VOLATILE), \

-			HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0)

-		//@}

-

-	/* Type Defines: */

-		/** Enum for possible Class, Subclass and Protocol values of device and interface descriptors relating to the HID

-		 *  device class.

-		 */

-		enum HID_Descriptor_ClassSubclassProtocol_t

-		{

-			HID_CSCP_HIDClass             = 0x03, /**< Descriptor Class value indicating that the device or interface

-			                                       *   belongs to the HID class.

-			                                       */

-			HID_CSCP_NonBootSubclass      = 0x00, /**< Descriptor Subclass value indicating that the device or interface

-			                                       *   does not implement a HID boot protocol.

-			                                       */

-			HID_CSCP_BootSubclass         = 0x01, /**< Descriptor Subclass value indicating that the device or interface

-			                                       *   implements a HID boot protocol.

-			                                       */

-			HID_CSCP_NonBootProtocol      = 0x00, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device or interface

-			                                       *   does not belong to a HID boot protocol.

-			                                       */

-			HID_CSCP_KeyboardBootProtocol = 0x01, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device or interface

-			                                       *   belongs to the Keyboard HID boot protocol.

-			                                       */

-			HID_CSCP_MouseBootProtocol    = 0x02, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device or interface

-			                                       *   belongs to the Mouse HID boot protocol.

-			                                       */

-		};

-

-		/** Enum for the HID class specific control requests that can be issued by the USB bus host. */

-		enum HID_ClassRequests_t

-		{

-			HID_REQ_GetReport       = 0x01, /**< HID class-specific Request to get the current HID report from the device. */

-			HID_REQ_GetIdle         = 0x02, /**< HID class-specific Request to get the current device idle count. */

-			HID_REQ_GetProtocol     = 0x03, /**< HID class-specific Request to get the current HID report protocol mode. */

-			HID_REQ_SetReport       = 0x09, /**< HID class-specific Request to set the current HID report to the device. */

-			HID_REQ_SetIdle         = 0x0A, /**< HID class-specific Request to set the device's idle count. */

-			HID_REQ_SetProtocol     = 0x0B, /**< HID class-specific Request to set the current HID report protocol mode. */

-		};

-

-		/** Enum for the HID class specific descriptor types. */

-		enum HID_DescriptorTypes_t

-		{

-			HID_DTYPE_HID           = 0x21, /**< Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */

-			HID_DTYPE_Report        = 0x22, /**< Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */

-		};

-

-		/** Enum for the different types of HID reports. */

-		enum HID_ReportItemTypes_t

-		{

-			HID_REPORT_ITEM_In      = 0, /**< Indicates that the item is an IN report type. */

-			HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out     = 1, /**< Indicates that the item is an OUT report type. */

-			HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature = 2, /**< Indicates that the item is a FEATURE report type. */

-		};

-

-		/** \brief HID class-specific HID Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for the HID class-specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID

-		 *  specification for details on the structure elements.

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_HID_StdDescriptor_HID_t for the version of this type with standard element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */

-

-			uint16_t                HIDSpec; /**< BCD encoded version that the HID descriptor and device complies to. */

-			uint8_t                 CountryCode; /**< Country code of the localized device, or zero if universal. */

-

-			uint8_t                 TotalReportDescriptors; /**< Total number of HID report descriptors for the interface. */

-

-			uint8_t                 HIDReportType; /**< Type of HID report, set to \ref HID_DTYPE_Report. */

-			uint16_t                HIDReportLength; /**< Length of the associated HID report descriptor, in bytes. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t;

-

-		/** \brief HID class-specific HID Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for the HID class-specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID

-		 *  specification for details on the structure elements.

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific

-		 *       element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint8_t  bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */

-			uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value

-			                           *   given by the specific class.

-			                           */

-

-			uint16_t bcdHID; /**< BCD encoded version that the HID descriptor and device complies to. */

-			uint8_t  bCountryCode; /**< Country code of the localized device, or zero if universal. */

-

-			uint8_t  bNumDescriptors; /**< Total number of HID report descriptors for the interface. */

-

-			uint8_t  bDescriptorType2; /**< Type of HID report, set to \ref HID_DTYPE_Report. */

-			uint16_t wDescriptorLength; /**< Length of the associated HID report descriptor, in bytes. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_HID_StdDescriptor_HID_t;

-

-		/** \brief Standard HID Boot Protocol Mouse Report.

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for a standard Boot Protocol Mouse report

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint8_t Button; /**< Button mask for currently pressed buttons in the mouse. */

-			int8_t  X; /**< Current delta X movement of the mouse. */

-			int8_t  Y; /**< Current delta Y movement on the mouse. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_MouseReport_Data_t;

-

-		/** \brief Standard HID Boot Protocol Keyboard Report.

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for a standard Boot Protocol Keyboard report

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint8_t Modifier; /**< Keyboard modifier byte, indicating pressed modifier keys (a combination of

-			                   *   \c HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_* masks).

-			                   */

-			uint8_t Reserved; /**< Reserved for OEM use, always set to 0. */

-			uint8_t KeyCode[6]; /**< Key codes of the currently pressed keys. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t;

-

-		/** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */

-		typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t;

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDParser.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDParser.c
deleted file mode 100644
index f57d97b56..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDParser.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,363 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_HID_DRIVER

-#include "HIDParser.h"

-

-uint8_t USB_ProcessHIDReport(const uint8_t* ReportData,

-                             uint16_t ReportSize,

-                             HID_ReportInfo_t* const ParserData)

-{

-	HID_StateTable_t      StateTable[HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH];

-	HID_StateTable_t*     CurrStateTable          = &StateTable[0];

-	HID_CollectionPath_t* CurrCollectionPath      = NULL;

-	HID_ReportSizeInfo_t* CurrReportIDInfo        = &ParserData->ReportIDSizes[0];

-	uint16_t              UsageList[HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH];

-	uint8_t               UsageListSize           = 0;

-	HID_MinMax_t          UsageMinMax             = {0, 0};

-

-	memset(ParserData,       0x00, sizeof(HID_ReportInfo_t));

-	memset(CurrStateTable,   0x00, sizeof(HID_StateTable_t));

-	memset(CurrReportIDInfo, 0x00, sizeof(HID_ReportSizeInfo_t));

-

-	ParserData->TotalDeviceReports = 1;

-

-	while (ReportSize)

-	{

-		uint8_t  HIDReportItem  = *ReportData;

-		uint32_t ReportItemData = 0;

-

-		ReportData++;

-		ReportSize--;

-

-		switch (HIDReportItem & HID_RI_DATA_SIZE_MASK)

-		{

-			case HID_RI_DATA_BITS_32:

-				ReportItemData  = (((uint32_t)ReportData[3] << 24) | ((uint32_t)ReportData[2] << 16) |

-			                       ((uint16_t)ReportData[1] << 8)  | ReportData[0]);

-				ReportSize     -= 4;

-				ReportData     += 4;

-				break;

-			case HID_RI_DATA_BITS_16:

-				ReportItemData  = (((uint16_t)ReportData[1] << 8) | (ReportData[0]));

-				ReportSize     -= 2;

-				ReportData     += 2;

-				break;

-			case HID_RI_DATA_BITS_8:

-				ReportItemData  = ReportData[0];

-				ReportSize     -= 1;

-				ReportData     += 1;

-				break;

-		}

-

-		switch (HIDReportItem & (HID_RI_TYPE_MASK | HID_RI_TAG_MASK))

-		{

-			case HID_RI_PUSH(0):

-				if (CurrStateTable == &StateTable[HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH - 1])

-				  return HID_PARSE_HIDStackOverflow;

-

-				memcpy((CurrStateTable + 1),

-				       CurrStateTable,

-				       sizeof(HID_ReportItem_t));

-

-				CurrStateTable++;

-				break;

-			case HID_RI_POP(0):

-				if (CurrStateTable == &StateTable[0])

-				  return HID_PARSE_HIDStackUnderflow;

-

-				CurrStateTable--;

-				break;

-			case HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(0):

-				if ((HIDReportItem & HID_RI_DATA_SIZE_MASK) == HID_RI_DATA_BITS_32)

-				  CurrStateTable->Attributes.Usage.Page = (ReportItemData >> 16);

-

-				CurrStateTable->Attributes.Usage.Page       = ReportItemData;

-				break;

-			case HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(0):

-				CurrStateTable->Attributes.Logical.Minimum  = ReportItemData;

-				break;

-			case HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(0):

-				CurrStateTable->Attributes.Logical.Maximum  = ReportItemData;

-				break;

-			case HID_RI_PHYSICAL_MINIMUM(0):

-				CurrStateTable->Attributes.Physical.Minimum = ReportItemData;

-				break;

-			case HID_RI_PHYSICAL_MAXIMUM(0):

-				CurrStateTable->Attributes.Physical.Maximum = ReportItemData;

-				break;

-			case HID_RI_UNIT_EXPONENT(0):

-				CurrStateTable->Attributes.Unit.Exponent    = ReportItemData;

-				break;

-			case HID_RI_UNIT(0):

-				CurrStateTable->Attributes.Unit.Type        = ReportItemData;

-				break;

-			case HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(0):

-				CurrStateTable->Attributes.BitSize          = ReportItemData;

-				break;

-			case HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(0):

-				CurrStateTable->ReportCount                 = ReportItemData;

-				break;

-			case HID_RI_REPORT_ID(0):

-				CurrStateTable->ReportID                    = ReportItemData;

-

-				if (ParserData->UsingReportIDs)

-				{

-					CurrReportIDInfo = NULL;

-

-					for (uint8_t i = 0; i < ParserData->TotalDeviceReports; i++)

-					{

-						if (ParserData->ReportIDSizes[i].ReportID == CurrStateTable->ReportID)

-						{

-							CurrReportIDInfo = &ParserData->ReportIDSizes[i];

-							break;

-						}

-					}

-

-					if (CurrReportIDInfo == NULL)

-					{

-						if (ParserData->TotalDeviceReports == HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS)

-						  return HID_PARSE_InsufficientReportIDItems;

-

-						CurrReportIDInfo = &ParserData->ReportIDSizes[ParserData->TotalDeviceReports++];

-						memset(CurrReportIDInfo, 0x00, sizeof(HID_ReportSizeInfo_t));

-					}

-				}

-

-				ParserData->UsingReportIDs = true;

-

-				CurrReportIDInfo->ReportID = CurrStateTable->ReportID;

-				break;

-			case HID_RI_USAGE(0):

-				if (UsageListSize == HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH)

-				  return HID_PARSE_UsageListOverflow;

-

-				UsageList[UsageListSize++] = ReportItemData;

-				break;

-			case HID_RI_USAGE_MINIMUM(0):

-				UsageMinMax.Minimum = ReportItemData;

-				break;

-			case HID_RI_USAGE_MAXIMUM(0):

-				UsageMinMax.Maximum = ReportItemData;

-				break;

-			case HID_RI_COLLECTION(0):

-				if (CurrCollectionPath == NULL)

-				{

-					CurrCollectionPath = &ParserData->CollectionPaths[0];

-				}

-				else

-				{

-					HID_CollectionPath_t* ParentCollectionPath = CurrCollectionPath;

-

-					CurrCollectionPath = &ParserData->CollectionPaths[1];

-

-					while (CurrCollectionPath->Parent != NULL)

-					{

-						if (CurrCollectionPath == &ParserData->CollectionPaths[HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS - 1])

-						  return HID_PARSE_InsufficientCollectionPaths;

-

-						CurrCollectionPath++;

-					}

-

-					CurrCollectionPath->Parent = ParentCollectionPath;

-				}

-

-				CurrCollectionPath->Type       = ReportItemData;

-				CurrCollectionPath->Usage.Page = CurrStateTable->Attributes.Usage.Page;

-

-				if (UsageListSize)

-				{

-					CurrCollectionPath->Usage.Usage = UsageList[0];

-

-					for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UsageListSize; i++)

-					  UsageList[i] = UsageList[i + 1];

-

-					UsageListSize--;

-				}

-				else if (UsageMinMax.Minimum <= UsageMinMax.Maximum)

-				{

-					CurrCollectionPath->Usage.Usage = UsageMinMax.Minimum++;

-				}

-

-				break;

-			case HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0):

-				if (CurrCollectionPath == NULL)

-				  return HID_PARSE_UnexpectedEndCollection;

-

-				CurrCollectionPath = CurrCollectionPath->Parent;

-				break;

-			case HID_RI_INPUT(0):

-			case HID_RI_OUTPUT(0):

-			case HID_RI_FEATURE(0):

-				for (uint8_t ReportItemNum = 0; ReportItemNum < CurrStateTable->ReportCount; ReportItemNum++)

-				{

-					HID_ReportItem_t NewReportItem;

-

-					memcpy(&NewReportItem.Attributes,

-					       &CurrStateTable->Attributes,

-					       sizeof(HID_ReportItem_Attributes_t));

-

-					NewReportItem.ItemFlags      = ReportItemData;

-					NewReportItem.CollectionPath = CurrCollectionPath;

-					NewReportItem.ReportID       = CurrStateTable->ReportID;

-

-					if (UsageListSize)

-					{

-						NewReportItem.Attributes.Usage.Usage = UsageList[0];

-

-						for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UsageListSize; i++)

-						  UsageList[i] = UsageList[i + 1];

-

-						UsageListSize--;

-					}

-					else if (UsageMinMax.Minimum <= UsageMinMax.Maximum)

-					{

-						NewReportItem.Attributes.Usage.Usage = UsageMinMax.Minimum++;

-					}

-

-					uint8_t ItemTypeTag = (HIDReportItem & (HID_RI_TYPE_MASK | HID_RI_TAG_MASK));

-

-					if (ItemTypeTag == HID_RI_INPUT(0))

-					  NewReportItem.ItemType = HID_REPORT_ITEM_In;

-					else if (ItemTypeTag == HID_RI_OUTPUT(0))

-					  NewReportItem.ItemType = HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out;

-					else

-					  NewReportItem.ItemType = HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature;

-

-					NewReportItem.BitOffset = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[NewReportItem.ItemType];

-

-					CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[NewReportItem.ItemType] += CurrStateTable->Attributes.BitSize;

-

-					ParserData->LargestReportSizeBits = MAX(ParserData->LargestReportSizeBits, CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[NewReportItem.ItemType]);

-

-					if (ParserData->TotalReportItems == HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS)

-					  return HID_PARSE_InsufficientReportItems;

-

-					memcpy(&ParserData->ReportItems[ParserData->TotalReportItems],

-					       &NewReportItem, sizeof(HID_ReportItem_t));

-

-					if (!(ReportItemData & HID_IOF_CONSTANT) && CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(&NewReportItem))

-					  ParserData->TotalReportItems++;

-				}

-

-				break;

-		}

-

-		if ((HIDReportItem & HID_RI_TYPE_MASK) == HID_RI_TYPE_MAIN)

-		{

-			UsageMinMax.Minimum = 0;

-			UsageMinMax.Maximum = 0;

-			UsageListSize       = 0;

-		}

-	}

-

-	if (!(ParserData->TotalReportItems))

-	  return HID_PARSE_NoUnfilteredReportItems;

-

-	return HID_PARSE_Successful;

-}

-

-bool USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(const uint8_t* ReportData,

-                              HID_ReportItem_t* const ReportItem)

-{

-	if (ReportItem == NULL)

-	  return false;

-

-	uint16_t DataBitsRem  = ReportItem->Attributes.BitSize;

-	uint16_t CurrentBit   = ReportItem->BitOffset;

-	uint32_t BitMask      = (1 << 0);

-

-	if (ReportItem->ReportID)

-	{

-		if (ReportItem->ReportID != ReportData[0])

-		  return false;

-

-		ReportData++;

-	}

-

-	ReportItem->PreviousValue = ReportItem->Value;

-	ReportItem->Value = 0;

-

-	while (DataBitsRem--)

-	{

-		if (ReportData[CurrentBit / 8] & (1 << (CurrentBit % 8)))

-		  ReportItem->Value |= BitMask;

-

-		CurrentBit++;

-		BitMask <<= 1;

-	}

-

-	return true;

-}

-

-void USB_SetHIDReportItemInfo(uint8_t* ReportData,

-                              HID_ReportItem_t* const ReportItem)

-{

-	if (ReportItem == NULL)

-	  return;

-

-	uint16_t DataBitsRem  = ReportItem->Attributes.BitSize;

-	uint16_t CurrentBit   = ReportItem->BitOffset;

-	uint32_t BitMask      = (1 << 0);

-

-	if (ReportItem->ReportID)

-	{

-		ReportData[0] = ReportItem->ReportID;

-		ReportData++;

-	}

-

-	ReportItem->PreviousValue = ReportItem->Value;

-

-	while (DataBitsRem--)

-	{

-		if (ReportItem->Value & (1 << (CurrentBit % 8)))

-		  ReportData[CurrentBit / 8] |= BitMask;

-

-		CurrentBit++;

-		BitMask <<= 1;

-	}

-}

-

-uint16_t USB_GetHIDReportSize(HID_ReportInfo_t* const ParserData,

-                              const uint8_t ReportID,

-                              const uint8_t ReportType)

-{

-	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS; i++)

-	{

-		uint16_t ReportSizeBits = ParserData->ReportIDSizes[i].ReportSizeBits[ReportType];

-

-		if (ParserData->ReportIDSizes[i].ReportID == ReportID)

-		  return (ReportSizeBits / 8) + ((ReportSizeBits % 8) ? 1 : 0);

-	}

-

-	return 0;

-}

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDParser.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDParser.h
deleted file mode 100644
index dd14bea43..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDParser.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,364 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief USB Human Interface Device (HID) Class report descriptor parser.

- *

- *  This file allows for the easy parsing of complex HID report descriptors, which describes the data that

- *  a HID device transmits to the host. It also provides an easy API for extracting and processing the data

- *  elements inside a HID report sent from an attached HID device.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USB

- *  \defgroup Group_HIDParser HID Report Parser

- *  \brief USB Human Interface Device (HID) Class report descriptor parser.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Human Interface Device (HID) class report descriptor parser. This module implements a parser than is

- *  capable of processing a complete HID report descriptor, and outputting a flat structure containing the

- *  contents of the report in an a more friendly format. The parsed data may then be further processed and used

- *  within an application to process sent and received HID reports to and from an attached HID device.

- *

- *  A HID report descriptor consists of a set of HID report items, which describe the function and layout

- *  of data exchanged between a HID device and a host, including both the physical encoding of each item

- *  (such as a button, key press or joystick axis) in the sent and received data packets - known as "reports" -

- *  as well as other information about each item such as the usages, data range, physical location and other

- *  characteristics. In this way a HID device can retain a high degree of flexibility in its capabilities, as it

- *  is not forced to comply with a given report layout or feature-set.

- *

- *  This module also contains routines for the processing of data in an actual HID report, using the parsed report

- *  descriptor data as a guide for the encoding.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __HIDPARSER_H__

-#define __HIDPARSER_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-		#include "HIDReportData.h"

-		#include "HIDClassCommon.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		#if !defined(HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			/** Constant indicating the maximum stack depth of the state table. A larger state table

-			 *  allows for more PUSH/POP report items to be nested, but consumes more memory. By default

-			 *  this is set to 2 levels (allowing non-nested PUSH items) but this can be overridden by

-			 *  defining \c HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH to another value in the user project makefile, passing the

-			 *  define to the compiler using the -D compiler switch.

-			 */

-			#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH    2

-		#endif

-

-		#if !defined(HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			/** Constant indicating the maximum stack depth of the usage table. A larger usage table

-			 *  allows for more USAGE items to be indicated sequentially for REPORT COUNT entries of more than

-			 *  one, but requires more stack space. By default this is set to 8 levels (allowing for a report

-			 *  item with a count of 8) but this can be overridden by defining \c HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH to another

-			 *  value in the user project makefile, passing the define to the compiler using the -D compiler

-			 *  switch.

-			 */

-			#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH         8

-		#endif

-

-		#if !defined(HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			/** Constant indicating the maximum number of COLLECTION items (nested or unnested) that can be

-			 *  processed in the report item descriptor. A large value allows for more COLLECTION items to be

-			 *  processed, but consumes more memory. By default this is set to 10 collections, but this can be

-			 *  overridden by defining \c HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS to another value in the user project makefile, passing

-			 *  the define to the compiler using the -D compiler switch.

-			 */

-			#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS           10

-		#endif

-

-		#if !defined(HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			/** Constant indicating the maximum number of report items (IN, OUT or FEATURE) that can be processed

-			 *  in the report item descriptor and stored in the user HID Report Info structure. A large value allows

-			 *  for more report items to be stored, but consumes more memory. By default this is set to 20 items,

-			 *  but this can be overridden by defining \c HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS to another value in the user project

-			 *  makefile, and passing the define to the compiler using the -D compiler switch.

-			 */

-			#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS           20

-		#endif

-

-		#if !defined(HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			/** Constant indicating the maximum number of unique report IDs that can be processed in the report item

-			 *  descriptor for the report size information array in the user HID Report Info structure. A large value

-			 *  allows for more report ID report sizes to be stored, but consumes more memory. By default this is set

-			 *  to 10 items, but this can be overridden by defining \c HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS to another value in the user project

-			 *  makefile, and passing the define to the compiler using the -D compiler switch. Note that IN, OUT and FEATURE

-			 *  items sharing the same report ID consume only one size item in the array.

-			 */

-			#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS            10

-		#endif

-

-		/** Returns the value a given HID report item (once its value has been fetched via \ref USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo())

-		 *  left-aligned to the given data type. This allows for signed data to be interpreted correctly, by shifting the data

-		 *  leftwards until the data's sign bit is in the correct position.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in] ReportItem  HID Report Item whose retrieved value is to be aligned.

-		 *  \param[in] Type        Data type to align the HID report item's value to.

-		 *

-		 *  \return Left-aligned data of the given report item's pre-retrieved value for the given datatype.

-		 */

-		#define HID_ALIGN_DATA(ReportItem, Type) ((Type)(ReportItem->Value << ((8 * sizeof(Type)) - ReportItem->Attributes.BitSize)))

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Enums: */

-			/** Enum for the possible error codes in the return value of the \ref USB_ProcessHIDReport() function. */

-			enum HID_Parse_ErrorCodes_t

-			{

-				HID_PARSE_Successful                  = 0, /**< Successful parse of the HID report descriptor, no error. */

-				HID_PARSE_HIDStackOverflow            = 1, /**< More than \ref HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH nested PUSHes in the report. */

-				HID_PARSE_HIDStackUnderflow           = 2, /**< A POP was found when the state table stack was empty. */

-				HID_PARSE_InsufficientReportItems     = 3, /**< More than \ref HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS report items in the report. */

-				HID_PARSE_UnexpectedEndCollection     = 4, /**< An END COLLECTION item found without matching COLLECTION item. */

-				HID_PARSE_InsufficientCollectionPaths = 5, /**< More than \ref HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS collections in the report. */

-				HID_PARSE_UsageListOverflow           = 6, /**< More than \ref HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH usages listed in a row. */

-				HID_PARSE_InsufficientReportIDItems   = 7, /**< More than \ref HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS report IDs in the device. */

-				HID_PARSE_NoUnfilteredReportItems     = 8, /**< All report items from the device were filtered by the filtering callback routine. */

-			};

-

-		/* Type Defines: */

-			/** \brief HID Parser Report Item Min/Max Structure.

-			 *

-			 *  Type define for an attribute with both minimum and maximum values (e.g. Logical Min/Max).

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				uint32_t Minimum; /**< Minimum value for the attribute. */

-				uint32_t Maximum; /**< Maximum value for the attribute. */

-			} HID_MinMax_t;

-

-			/** \brief HID Parser Report Item Unit Structure.

-			 *

-			 *  Type define for the Unit attributes of a report item.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				uint32_t Type;     /**< Unit type (refer to HID specifications for details). */

-				uint8_t  Exponent; /**< Unit exponent (refer to HID specifications for details). */

-			} HID_Unit_t;

-

-			/** \brief HID Parser Report Item Usage Structure.

-			 *

-			 *  Type define for the Usage attributes of a report item.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				uint16_t Page;  /**< Usage page of the report item. */

-				uint16_t Usage; /**< Usage of the report item. */

-			} HID_Usage_t;

-

-			/** \brief HID Parser Report Item Collection Path Structure.

-			 *

-			 *  Type define for a COLLECTION object. Contains the collection attributes and a reference to the

-			 *  parent collection if any.

-			 */

-			typedef struct HID_CollectionPath

-			{

-				uint8_t                    Type;   /**< Collection type (e.g. "Generic Desktop"). */

-				HID_Usage_t                Usage;  /**< Collection usage. */

-				struct HID_CollectionPath* Parent; /**< Reference to parent collection, or \c NULL if root collection. */

-			} HID_CollectionPath_t;

-

-			/** \brief HID Parser Report Item Attributes Structure.

-			 *

-			 *  Type define for all the data attributes of a report item, except flags.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				uint8_t      BitSize;  /**< Size in bits of the report item's data. */

-

-				HID_Usage_t  Usage;    /**< Usage of the report item. */

-				HID_Unit_t   Unit;     /**< Unit type and exponent of the report item. */

-				HID_MinMax_t Logical;  /**< Logical minimum and maximum of the report item. */

-				HID_MinMax_t Physical; /**< Physical minimum and maximum of the report item. */

-			} HID_ReportItem_Attributes_t;

-

-			/** \brief HID Parser Report Item Details Structure.

-			 *

-			 *  Type define for a report item (IN, OUT or FEATURE) layout attributes and other details.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				uint16_t                    BitOffset;      /**< Bit offset in the IN, OUT or FEATURE report of the item. */

-				uint8_t                     ItemType;       /**< Report item type, a value in \ref HID_ReportItemTypes_t. */

-				uint16_t                    ItemFlags;      /**< Item data flags, a mask of \c HID_IOF_* constants. */

-				uint8_t                     ReportID;       /**< Report ID this item belongs to, or 0x00 if device has only one report */

-				HID_CollectionPath_t*       CollectionPath; /**< Collection path of the item. */

-

-				HID_ReportItem_Attributes_t Attributes;     /**< Report item attributes. */

-

-				uint32_t                    Value;          /**< Current value of the report item - use \ref HID_ALIGN_DATA() when processing

-				                                             *   a retrieved value so that it is aligned to a specific type.

-				                                             */

-				uint32_t                    PreviousValue;  /**< Previous value of the report item. */

-			} HID_ReportItem_t;

-

-			/** \brief HID Parser Report Size Structure.

-			 *

-			 *  Type define for a report item size information structure, to retain the size of a device's reports by ID.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				uint8_t  ReportID; /**< Report ID of the report within the HID interface. */

-				uint16_t ReportSizeBits[3]; /**< Total number of bits in each report type for the given Report ID,

-				                             *   indexed by the \ref HID_ReportItemTypes_t enum.

-				                             */

-			} HID_ReportSizeInfo_t;

-

-			/** \brief HID Parser State Structure.

-			 *

-			 *  Type define for a complete processed HID report, including all report item data and collections.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				uint8_t              TotalReportItems; /**< Total number of report items stored in the \c ReportItems array. */

-				HID_ReportItem_t     ReportItems[HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS]; /**< Report items array, including all IN, OUT

-			                                                            *   and FEATURE items.

-				                                                        */

-				HID_CollectionPath_t CollectionPaths[HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS]; /**< All collection items, referenced

-				                                                            *   by the report items.

-				                                                            */

-				uint8_t              TotalDeviceReports; /**< Number of reports within the HID interface */

-				HID_ReportSizeInfo_t ReportIDSizes[HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS]; /**< Report sizes for each report in the interface */

-				uint16_t             LargestReportSizeBits; /**< Largest report that the attached device will generate, in bits */

-				bool                 UsingReportIDs; /**< Indicates if the device has at least one REPORT ID

-				                                      *   element in its HID report descriptor.

-				                                      */

-			} HID_ReportInfo_t;

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Function to process a given HID report returned from an attached device, and store it into a given

-			 *  \ref HID_ReportInfo_t structure.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in]  ReportData  Buffer containing the device's HID report table.

-			 *  \param[in]  ReportSize  Size in bytes of the HID report table.

-			 *  \param[out] ParserData  Pointer to a \ref HID_ReportInfo_t instance for the parser output.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value in the \ref HID_Parse_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t USB_ProcessHIDReport(const uint8_t* ReportData,

-			                             uint16_t ReportSize,

-			                             HID_ReportInfo_t* const ParserData) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);

-

-			/** Extracts the given report item's value out of the given HID report and places it into the Value

-			 *  member of the report item's \ref HID_ReportItem_t structure.

-			 *

-			 *  When called on a report with an item that exists in that report, this copies the report item's \c Value

-			 *  to its \c PreviousValue element for easy checking to see if an item's value has changed before processing

-			 *  a report. If the given item does not exist in the report, the function does not modify the report item's

-			 *  data.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in]     ReportData  Buffer containing an IN or FEATURE report from an attached device.

-			 *  \param[in,out] ReportItem  Pointer to the report item of interest in a \ref HID_ReportInfo_t ReportItem array.

-			 *

-			 *  \returns Boolean \c true if the item to retrieve was located in the given report, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			bool USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(const uint8_t* ReportData,

-			                              HID_ReportItem_t* const ReportItem) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Retrieves the given report item's value out of the \c Value member of the report item's

-			 *  \ref HID_ReportItem_t structure and places it into the correct position in the HID report

-			 *  buffer. The report buffer is assumed to have the appropriate bits cleared before calling

-			 *  this function (i.e., the buffer should be explicitly cleared before report values are added).

-			 *

-			 *  When called, this copies the report item's \c Value element to its \c PreviousValue element for easy

-			 *  checking to see if an item's value has changed before sending a report.

-			 *

-			 *  If the device has multiple HID reports, the first byte in the report is set to the report ID of the given item.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[out] ReportData  Buffer holding the current OUT or FEATURE report data.

-			 *  \param[in]  ReportItem  Pointer to the report item of interest in a \ref HID_ReportInfo_t ReportItem array.

-			 */

-			void USB_SetHIDReportItemInfo(uint8_t* ReportData,

-			                              HID_ReportItem_t* const ReportItem) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Retrieves the size of a given HID report in bytes from its Report ID.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] ParserData  Pointer to a \ref HID_ReportInfo_t instance containing the parser output.

-			 *  \param[in] ReportID    Report ID of the report whose size is to be determined.

-			 *  \param[in] ReportType  Type of the report whose size is to be determined, a value from the

-			 *                         \ref HID_ReportItemTypes_t enum.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Size of the report in bytes, or \c 0 if the report does not exist.

-			 */

-			uint16_t USB_GetHIDReportSize(HID_ReportInfo_t* const ParserData,

-			                              const uint8_t ReportID,

-			                              const uint8_t ReportType) ATTR_CONST ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Callback routine for the HID Report Parser. This callback <b>must</b> be implemented by the user code when

-			 *  the parser is used, to determine what report IN, OUT and FEATURE item's information is stored into the user

-			 *  \ref HID_ReportInfo_t structure. This can be used to filter only those items the application will be using, so that

-			 *  no RAM is wasted storing the attributes for report items which will never be referenced by the application.

-			 *

-			 *  Report item pointers passed to this callback function may be cached by the user application for later use

-			 *  when processing report items. This provides faster report processing in the user application than would

-			 *  a search of the entire parsed report item table for each received or sent report.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] CurrentItem  Pointer to the current report item for user checking.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the item should be stored into the \ref HID_ReportInfo_t structure, \c false if

-			 *          it should be ignored.

-			 */

-			bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* const CurrentItem);

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Type Defines: */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				 HID_ReportItem_Attributes_t Attributes;

-				 uint8_t                     ReportCount;

-				 uint8_t                     ReportID;

-			} HID_StateTable_t;

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDReportData.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDReportData.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 719739a5f..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDReportData.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,126 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Constants for HID report item attributes.

- *

- *  HID report item constants for report item attributes. Refer to the HID specification for

- *  details on each flag's meaning when applied to an IN, OUT or FEATURE item.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_HIDParser

- *  \defgroup Group_HIDReportItemConst HID Report Descriptor Item Constants

- *

- *  General HID constant definitions for HID Report Descriptor elements.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __HIDREPORTDATA_H__

-#define __HIDREPORTDATA_H__

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define HID_RI_DATA_SIZE_MASK                   0x03

-			#define HID_RI_TYPE_MASK                        0x0C

-			#define HID_RI_TAG_MASK                         0xF0

-

-			#define HID_RI_TYPE_MAIN                        0x00

-			#define HID_RI_TYPE_GLOBAL                      0x04

-			#define HID_RI_TYPE_LOCAL                       0x08

-

-			#define HID_RI_DATA_BITS_0                      0x00

-			#define HID_RI_DATA_BITS_8                      0x01

-			#define HID_RI_DATA_BITS_16                     0x02

-			#define HID_RI_DATA_BITS_32                     0x03

-			#define HID_RI_DATA_BITS(DataBits)              HID_RI_DATA_BITS_ ## DataBits

-

-			#define _HID_RI_ENCODE_0(Data)

-			#define _HID_RI_ENCODE_8(Data)                  , (Data & 0xFF)

-			#define _HID_RI_ENCODE_16(Data)                 _HID_RI_ENCODE_8(Data)  _HID_RI_ENCODE_8(Data >> 8)

-			#define _HID_RI_ENCODE_32(Data)                 _HID_RI_ENCODE_16(Data) _HID_RI_ENCODE_16(Data >> 16)

-			#define _HID_RI_ENCODE(DataBits, ...)           _HID_RI_ENCODE_ ## DataBits(__VA_ARGS__)

-

-			#define _HID_RI_ENTRY(Type, Tag, DataBits, ...) (Type | Tag | HID_RI_DATA_BITS(DataBits)) _HID_RI_ENCODE(DataBits, (__VA_ARGS__))

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-		/** \name HID Input, Output and Feature Report Descriptor Item Flags */

-		//@{

-			#define HID_IOF_CONSTANT                        (1 << 0)

-			#define HID_IOF_DATA                            (0 << 0)

-			#define HID_IOF_VARIABLE                        (1 << 1)

-			#define HID_IOF_ARRAY                           (0 << 1)

-			#define HID_IOF_RELATIVE                        (1 << 2)

-			#define HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE                        (0 << 2)

-			#define HID_IOF_WRAP                            (1 << 3)

-			#define HID_IOF_NO_WRAP                         (0 << 3)

-			#define HID_IOF_NON_LINEAR                      (1 << 4)

-			#define HID_IOF_LINEAR                          (0 << 4)

-			#define HID_IOF_NO_PREFERRED_STATE              (1 << 5)

-			#define HID_IOF_PREFERRED_STATE                 (0 << 5)

-			#define HID_IOF_NULLSTATE                       (1 << 6)

-			#define HID_IOF_NO_NULL_POSITION                (0 << 6)

-			#define HID_IOF_VOLATILE                        (1 << 7)

-			#define HID_IOF_NON_VOLATILE                    (0 << 7)

-			#define HID_IOF_BUFFERED_BYTES                  (1 << 8)

-			#define HID_IOF_BITFIELD                        (0 << 8)

-		//@}

-

-		/** \name HID Report Descriptor Item Macros */

-		//@{

-			#define HID_RI_INPUT(DataBits, ...)             _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_MAIN  , 0x80, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)

-			#define HID_RI_OUTPUT(DataBits, ...)            _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_MAIN  , 0x90, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)

-			#define HID_RI_COLLECTION(DataBits, ...)        _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_MAIN  , 0xA0, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)

-			#define HID_RI_FEATURE(DataBits, ...)           _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_MAIN  , 0xB0, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)

-			#define HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(DataBits, ...)    _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_MAIN  , 0xC0, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)

-			#define HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(DataBits, ...)        _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_GLOBAL, 0x00, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)

-			#define HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(DataBits, ...)   _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_GLOBAL, 0x10, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)

-			#define HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(DataBits, ...)   _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_GLOBAL, 0x20, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)

-			#define HID_RI_PHYSICAL_MINIMUM(DataBits, ...)  _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_GLOBAL, 0x30, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)

-			#define HID_RI_PHYSICAL_MAXIMUM(DataBits, ...)  _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_GLOBAL, 0x40, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)

-			#define HID_RI_UNIT_EXPONENT(DataBits, ...)     _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_GLOBAL, 0x50, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)

-			#define HID_RI_UNIT(DataBits, ...)              _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_GLOBAL, 0x60, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)

-			#define HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(DataBits, ...)       _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_GLOBAL, 0x70, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)

-			#define HID_RI_REPORT_ID(DataBits, ...)         _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_GLOBAL, 0x80, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)

-			#define HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(DataBits, ...)      _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_GLOBAL, 0x90, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)

-			#define HID_RI_PUSH(DataBits, ...)              _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_GLOBAL, 0xA0, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)

-			#define HID_RI_POP(DataBits, ...)               _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_GLOBAL, 0xB0, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)

-			#define HID_RI_USAGE(DataBits, ...)             _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_LOCAL , 0x00, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)

-			#define HID_RI_USAGE_MINIMUM(DataBits, ...)     _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_LOCAL , 0x10, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)

-			#define HID_RI_USAGE_MAXIMUM(DataBits, ...)     _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_LOCAL , 0x20, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)

-		//@}

-

-/** @} */

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/MIDIClassCommon.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/MIDIClassCommon.h
deleted file mode 100644
index e0b77eca8..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/MIDIClassCommon.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,320 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB MIDI Class driver.

- *

- *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB MIDI Class driver.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassMIDI

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassMIDICommon  Common Class Definitions

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB

- *  MIDI Class.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef _MIDI_CLASS_COMMON_H_

-#define _MIDI_CLASS_COMMON_H_

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_DRIVER

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../Core/StdDescriptors.h"

-		#include "AudioClassCommon.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		/** \name MIDI Command Values */

-		//@{

-		/** MIDI command for a note on (activation) event. */

-		#define MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON        0x90

-

-		/** MIDI command for a note off (deactivation) event. */

-		#define MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF       0x80

-		//@}

-

-		/** Standard key press velocity value used for all note events. */

-		#define MIDI_STANDARD_VELOCITY      64

-

-		/** Convenience macro. MIDI channels are numbered from 1-10 (natural numbers) however the logical channel

-		 *  addresses are zero-indexed. This converts a natural MIDI channel number into the logical channel address.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in] channel  MIDI channel number to address.

-		 *

-		 *  \return Constructed MIDI channel ID.

-		 */

-		#define MIDI_CHANNEL(channel)        ((channel) - 1)

-		

-		/** Constructs a MIDI event ID from a given MIDI command and a virtual MIDI cable index. This can then be

-		 *  used to create and decode \ref MIDI_EventPacket_t MIDI event packets.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in] virtualcable  Index of the virtual MIDI cable the event relates to

-		 *  \param[in] command       MIDI command to send through the virtual MIDI cable

-		 *

-		 *  \return Constructed MIDI event ID.

-		 */

-		#define MIDI_EVENT(virtualcable, command) ((virtualcable << 4) | (command >> 4))

-

-	/* Enums: */

-		/** Enum for the possible MIDI jack types in a MIDI device jack descriptor. */

-		enum MIDI_JackTypes_t

-		{

-			MIDI_JACKTYPE_Embedded = 0x01, /**< MIDI class descriptor jack type value for an embedded (logical) MIDI input or output jack. */

-			MIDI_JACKTYPE_External = 0x02, /**< MIDI class descriptor jack type value for an external (physical) MIDI input or output jack. */

-		};

-

-	/* Type Defines: */

-		/** \brief MIDI class-specific Streaming Interface Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific MIDI streaming interface descriptor. This indicates to the host

-		 *  how MIDI the specification compliance of the device and the total length of the Audio class-specific descriptors.

-		 *  See the USB Audio specification for more details.

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_MIDI_StdDescriptor_AudioInterface_AS_t for the version of this type with standard element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */

-			uint8_t                 Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors. */

-

-			uint16_t                AudioSpecification; /**< Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported Audio Class

-			                                             *   specification version.

-			                                             */

-			uint16_t                TotalLength; /**< Total length of the Audio class-specific descriptors, including this descriptor. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_MIDI_Descriptor_AudioInterface_AS_t;

-

-		/** \brief MIDI class-specific Streaming Interface Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific MIDI streaming interface descriptor. This indicates to the host

-		 *  how MIDI the specification compliance of the device and the total length of the Audio class-specific descriptors.

-		 *  See the USB Audio specification for more details.

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_MIDI_Descriptor_AudioInterface_AS_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific

-		 *       element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint8_t  bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */

-			uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value

-			                           *   given by the specific class.

-			                           */

-

-			uint8_t  bDescriptorSubtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors. */

-

-			uint16_t bcdMSC; /**< Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported MIDI Class specification version. */

-			uint16_t wTotalLength; /**< Total length of the Audio class-specific descriptors, including this descriptor. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_MIDI_StdDescriptor_AudioInterface_AS_t;

-

-		/** \brief MIDI class-specific Input Jack Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific MIDI IN jack. This gives information to the host on a MIDI input, either

-		 *  a physical input jack, or a logical jack (receiving input data internally, or from the host via an endpoint).

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_MIDI_StdDescriptor_InputJack_t for the version of this type with standard element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */

-			uint8_t                 Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors. */

-

-			uint8_t                 JackType; /**< Type of jack, one of the \c JACKTYPE_* mask values. */

-			uint8_t                 JackID; /**< ID value of this jack - must be a unique value within the device. */

-

-			uint8_t                 JackStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t;

-

-		/** \brief MIDI class-specific Input Jack Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific MIDI IN jack. This gives information to the host on a MIDI input, either

-		 *  a physical input jack, or a logical jack (receiving input data internally, or from the host via an endpoint).

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific

-		 *       element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint8_t  bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */

-			uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value

-			                           *   given by the specific class.

-			                           */

-

-			uint8_t  bDescriptorSubtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors. */

-

-			uint8_t  bJackType; /**< Type of jack, one of the \c JACKTYPE_* mask values. */

-			uint8_t  bJackID; /**< ID value of this jack - must be a unique value within the device. */

-

-			uint8_t  iJack; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_MIDI_StdDescriptor_InputJack_t;

-

-		/** \brief MIDI class-specific Output Jack Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific MIDI OUT jack. This gives information to the host on a MIDI output, either

-		 *  a physical output jack, or a logical jack (sending output data internally, or to the host via an endpoint).

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_MIDI_StdDescriptor_OutputJack_t for the version of this type with standard element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */

-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors. */

-

-			uint8_t                   JackType; /**< Type of jack, one of the \c JACKTYPE_* mask values. */

-			uint8_t                   JackID; /**< ID value of this jack - must be a unique value within the device. */

-

-			uint8_t                   NumberOfPins; /**< Number of output channels within the jack, either physical or logical. */

-			uint8_t                   SourceJackID[1]; /**< ID of each output pin's source data jack. */

-			uint8_t                   SourcePinID[1]; /**< Pin number in the input jack of each output pin's source data. */

-

-			uint8_t                   JackStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t;

-

-		/** \brief MIDI class-specific Output Jack Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific MIDI OUT jack. This gives information to the host on a MIDI output, either

-		 *  a physical output jack, or a logical jack (sending output data internally, or to the host via an endpoint).

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific

-		 *       element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint8_t  bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */

-			uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value

-			                           *   given by the specific class.

-			                           */

-

-			uint8_t  bDescriptorSubtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors. */

-

-			uint8_t  bJackType; /**< Type of jack, one of the \c JACKTYPE_* mask values. */

-			uint8_t  bJackID; /**< ID value of this jack - must be a unique value within the device. */

-

-			uint8_t  bNrInputPins; /**< Number of output channels within the jack, either physical or logical. */

-			uint8_t  baSourceID[1]; /**< ID of each output pin's source data jack. */

-			uint8_t  baSourcePin[1]; /**< Pin number in the input jack of each output pin's source data. */

-

-			uint8_t  iJack; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_MIDI_StdDescriptor_OutputJack_t;

-

-		/** \brief Audio class-specific Jack Endpoint Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific extended MIDI jack endpoint descriptor. This contains extra information

-		 *  on the usage of MIDI endpoints used to stream MIDI events in and out of the USB Audio device, and follows an Audio

-		 *  class-specific extended MIDI endpoint descriptor. See the USB Audio specification for more details.

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_MIDI_StdDescriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t for the version of this type with standard element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */

-			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors. */

-

-			uint8_t                   TotalEmbeddedJacks; /**< Total number of jacks inside this endpoint. */

-			uint8_t                   AssociatedJackID[1]; /**< IDs of each jack inside the endpoint. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t;

-

-		/** \brief Audio class-specific Jack Endpoint Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific extended MIDI jack endpoint descriptor. This contains extra information

-		 *  on the usage of MIDI endpoints used to stream MIDI events in and out of the USB Audio device, and follows an Audio

-		 *  class-specific extended MIDI endpoint descriptor. See the USB Audio specification for more details.

-		 *

-		 *  \see \ref USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific

-		 *       element names.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint8_t  bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */

-			uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value

-			                           *   given by the specific class.

-			                           */

-

-			uint8_t  bDescriptorSubtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors. */

-

-			uint8_t  bNumEmbMIDIJack; /**< Total number of jacks inside this endpoint. */

-			uint8_t  bAssocJackID[1]; /**< IDs of each jack inside the endpoint. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED USB_MIDI_StdDescriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t;

-

-		/** \brief MIDI Class Driver Event Packet.

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for a USB MIDI event packet, used to encapsulate sent and received MIDI messages from a USB MIDI interface.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint8_t Event; /**< MIDI event type, constructed with the \ref MIDI_EVENT() macro. */

-

-			uint8_t  Data1; /**< First byte of data in the MIDI event. */

-			uint8_t  Data2; /**< Second byte of data in the MIDI event. */

-			uint8_t  Data3; /**< Third byte of data in the MIDI event. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED MIDI_EventPacket_t;

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/MassStorageClassCommon.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/MassStorageClassCommon.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 38167f64e..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/MassStorageClassCommon.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,365 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver.

- *

- *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassMS

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassMSCommon  Common Class Definitions

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB

- *  Mass Storage Class.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef _MS_CLASS_COMMON_H_

-#define _MS_CLASS_COMMON_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../Core/StdDescriptors.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MS_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		/** Magic signature for a Command Block Wrapper used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only transport protocol. */

-		#define MS_CBW_SIGNATURE                               0x43425355UL

-

-		/** Magic signature for a Command Status Wrapper used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only transport protocol. */

-		#define MS_CSW_SIGNATURE                               0x53425355UL

-

-		/** Mask for a Command Block Wrapper's flags attribute to specify a command with data sent from host-to-device. */

-		#define MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_OUT                        (0 << 7)

-

-		/** Mask for a Command Block Wrapper's flags attribute to specify a command with data sent from device-to-host. */

-		#define MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_IN                         (1 << 7)

-

-		/** \name SCSI Commands*/

-		//@{

-		/** SCSI Command Code for an INQUIRY command. */

-		#define SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY                               0x12

-

-		/** SCSI Command Code for a REQUEST SENSE command. */

-		#define SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE                         0x03

-

-		/** SCSI Command Code for a TEST UNIT READY command. */

-		#define SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY                       0x00

-

-		/** SCSI Command Code for a READ CAPACITY (10) command. */

-		#define SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10                      0x25

-

-		/** SCSI Command Code for a SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. */

-		#define SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC                       0x1D

-

-		/** SCSI Command Code for a PREVENT ALLOW MEDIUM REMOVAL command. */

-		#define SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL          0x1E

-

-		/** SCSI Command Code for a WRITE (10) command. */

-		#define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10                              0x2A

-

-		/** SCSI Command Code for a READ (10) command. */

-		#define SCSI_CMD_READ_10                               0x28

-

-		/** SCSI Command Code for a WRITE (6) command. */

-		#define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_6                               0x0A

-

-		/** SCSI Command Code for a READ (6) command. */

-		#define SCSI_CMD_READ_6                                0x08

-

-		/** SCSI Command Code for a VERIFY (10) command. */

-		#define SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10                             0x2F

-

-		/** SCSI Command Code for a MODE SENSE (6) command. */

-		#define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6                          0x1A

-

-		/** SCSI Command Code for a MODE SENSE (10) command. */

-		#define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_10                         0x5A

-		//@}

-

-		/** \name SCSI Sense Key Values */

-		//@{

-		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate no error has occurred. */

-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD                            0x00

-

-		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that the device has recovered from an error. */

-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_RECOVERED_ERROR                 0x01

-

-		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that the device is not ready for a new command. */

-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_NOT_READY                       0x02

-

-		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate an error whilst accessing the medium. */

-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MEDIUM_ERROR                    0x03

-

-		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate a hardware error has occurred. */

-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR                  0x04

-

-		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that an illegal request has been issued. */

-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST                 0x05

-

-		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that the unit requires attention from the host to indicate

-		 *  a reset event, medium removal or other condition.

-		 */

-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_UNIT_ATTENTION                  0x06

-

-		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that a write attempt on a protected block has been made. */

-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT                    0x07

-

-		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate an error while trying to write to a write-once medium. */

-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_BLANK_CHECK                     0x08

-

-		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate a vendor specific error has occurred. */

-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VENDOR_SPECIFIC                 0x09

-

-		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that an EXTENDED COPY command has aborted due to an error. */

-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_COPY_ABORTED                    0x0A

-

-		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that the device has aborted the issued command. */

-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ABORTED_COMMAND                 0x0B

-

-		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate an attempt to write past the end of a partition has been made. */

-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VOLUME_OVERFLOW                 0x0D

-

-		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that the source data did not match the data read from the medium. */

-		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MISCOMPARE                      0x0E

-		//@}

-

-		/** \name SCSI Additional Sense Codes */

-		//@{

-		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate no additional sense information is available. */

-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION          0x00

-

-		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate that the logical unit (LUN) addressed is not ready. */

-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_UNIT_NOT_READY             0x04

-

-		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate an invalid field was encountered while processing the issued command. */

-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB               0x24

-

-		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate that a medium that was previously indicated as not ready has now

-		 *  become ready for use.

-		 */

-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_NOT_READY_TO_READY_CHANGE          0x28

-

-		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate that an attempt to write to a protected area was made. */

-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED                    0x27

-

-		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate an error whilst formatting the device medium. */

-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_FORMAT_ERROR                       0x31

-

-		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate an invalid command was issued. */

-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND                    0x20

-

-		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate a write to a block out outside of the medium's range was issued. */

-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE 0x21

-

-		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate that no removable medium is inserted into the device. */

-		#define SCSI_ASENSE_MEDIUM_NOT_PRESENT                 0x3A

-		//@}

-

-		/** \name SCSI Additional Sense Key Code Qualifiers */

-		//@{

-		/** SCSI Additional Sense Qualifier Code to indicate no additional sense qualifier information is available. */

-		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER                      0x00

-

-		/** SCSI Additional Sense Qualifier Code to indicate that a medium format command failed to complete. */

-		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_FORMAT_COMMAND_FAILED             0x01

-

-		/** SCSI Additional Sense Qualifier Code to indicate that an initializing command must be issued before the issued

-		 *  command can be executed.

-		 */

-		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_INITIALIZING_COMMAND_REQUIRED     0x02

-

-		/** SCSI Additional Sense Qualifier Code to indicate that an operation is currently in progress. */

-		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_OPERATION_IN_PROGRESS             0x07

-		//@}

-

-	/* Enums: */

-		/** Enum for possible Class, Subclass and Protocol values of device and interface descriptors relating to the Mass

-		 *  Storage device class.

-		 */

-		enum MS_Descriptor_ClassSubclassProtocol_t

-		{

-			MS_CSCP_MassStorageClass          = 0x08, /**< Descriptor Class value indicating that the device or interface

-			                                           *   belongs to the Mass Storage class.

-			                                           */

-			MS_CSCP_SCSITransparentSubclass   = 0x06, /**< Descriptor Subclass value indicating that the device or interface

-			                                           *   belongs to the SCSI Transparent Command Set subclass of the Mass

-			                                           *   storage class.

-			                                           */

-			MS_CSCP_BulkOnlyTransportProtocol = 0x50, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device or interface

-			                                           *   belongs to the Bulk Only Transport protocol of the Mass Storage class.

-			                                           */

-		};

-

-		/** Enum for the Mass Storage class specific control requests that can be issued by the USB bus host. */

-		enum MS_ClassRequests_t

-		{

-			MS_REQ_GetMaxLUN                  = 0xFE, /**< Mass Storage class-specific request to retrieve the total number of Logical

-			                                           *   Units (drives) in the SCSI device.

-			                                           */

-			MS_REQ_MassStorageReset           = 0xFF, /**< Mass Storage class-specific request to reset the Mass Storage interface,

-			                                           *   ready for the next command.

-		                                               */

-		};

-

-		/** Enum for the possible command status wrapper return status codes. */

-		enum MS_CommandStatusCodes_t

-		{

-			MS_SCSI_COMMAND_Pass              = 0, /**< Command completed with no error */

-			MS_SCSI_COMMAND_Fail              = 1, /**< Command failed to complete - host may check the exact error via a

-			                                        *   SCSI REQUEST SENSE command.

-			                                        */

-			MS_SCSI_COMMAND_PhaseError        = 2, /**< Command failed due to being invalid in the current phase. */

-		};

-

-	/* Type Defines: */

-		/** \brief Mass Storage Class Command Block Wrapper.

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for a Command Block Wrapper, used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only Transport protocol.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint32_t Signature; /**< Command block signature, must be \ref MS_CBW_SIGNATURE to indicate a valid Command Block. */

-			uint32_t Tag; /**< Unique command ID value, to associate a command block wrapper with its command status wrapper. */

-			uint32_t DataTransferLength; /**< Length of the optional data portion of the issued command, in bytes. */

-			uint8_t  Flags; /**< Command block flags, indicating command data direction. */

-			uint8_t  LUN; /**< Logical Unit number this command is issued to. */

-			uint8_t  SCSICommandLength; /**< Length of the issued SCSI command within the SCSI command data array. */

-			uint8_t  SCSICommandData[16]; /**< Issued SCSI command in the Command Block. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t;

-

-		/** \brief Mass Storage Class Command Status Wrapper.

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for a Command Status Wrapper, used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only Transport protocol.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint32_t Signature; /**< Status block signature, must be \ref MS_CSW_SIGNATURE to indicate a valid Command Status. */

-			uint32_t Tag; /**< Unique command ID value, to associate a command block wrapper with its command status wrapper. */

-			uint32_t DataTransferResidue; /**< Number of bytes of data not processed in the SCSI command. */

-			uint8_t  Status; /**< Status code of the issued command - a value from the \ref MS_CommandStatusCodes_t enum. */

-		} ATTR_PACKED MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t;

-

-		/** \brief Mass Storage Class SCSI Sense Structure

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for a SCSI Sense structure. Structures of this type are filled out by the

-		 *  device via the \ref MS_Host_RequestSense() function, indicating the current sense data of the

-		 *  device (giving explicit error codes for the last issued command). For details of the

-		 *  structure contents, refer to the SCSI specifications.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint8_t  ResponseCode;

-

-			uint8_t  SegmentNumber;

-

-			unsigned SenseKey            : 4;

-			unsigned Reserved            : 1;

-			unsigned ILI                 : 1;

-			unsigned EOM                 : 1;

-			unsigned FileMark            : 1;

-

-			uint8_t  Information[4];

-			uint8_t  AdditionalLength;

-			uint8_t  CmdSpecificInformation[4];

-			uint8_t  AdditionalSenseCode;

-			uint8_t  AdditionalSenseQualifier;

-			uint8_t  FieldReplaceableUnitCode;

-			uint8_t  SenseKeySpecific[3];

-		} ATTR_PACKED SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t;

-

-		/** \brief Mass Storage Class SCSI Inquiry Structure.

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for a SCSI Inquiry structure. Structures of this type are filled out by the

-		 *  device via the \ref MS_Host_GetInquiryData() function, retrieving the attached device's

-		 *  information.

-		 *

-		 *  For details of the structure contents, refer to the SCSI specifications.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			unsigned DeviceType          : 5;

-			unsigned PeripheralQualifier : 3;

-

-			unsigned Reserved            : 7;

-			unsigned Removable           : 1;

-

-			uint8_t  Version;

-

-			unsigned ResponseDataFormat  : 4;

-			unsigned Reserved2           : 1;

-			unsigned NormACA             : 1;

-			unsigned TrmTsk              : 1;

-			unsigned AERC                : 1;

-

-			uint8_t  AdditionalLength;

-			uint8_t  Reserved3[2];

-

-			unsigned SoftReset           : 1;

-			unsigned CmdQue              : 1;

-			unsigned Reserved4           : 1;

-			unsigned Linked              : 1;

-			unsigned Sync                : 1;

-			unsigned WideBus16Bit        : 1;

-			unsigned WideBus32Bit        : 1;

-			unsigned RelAddr             : 1;

-

-			uint8_t  VendorID[8];

-			uint8_t  ProductID[16];

-			uint8_t  RevisionID[4];

-		} ATTR_PACKED SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t;

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/PrinterClassCommon.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/PrinterClassCommon.h
deleted file mode 100644
index eea39297c..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/PrinterClassCommon.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,119 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Printer Class driver.

- *

- *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Printer Class driver.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassPrinter

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassPrinterCommon  Common Class Definitions

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB

- *  Printer Class.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef _PRINTER_CLASS_COMMON_H_

-#define _PRINTER_CLASS_COMMON_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../Core/StdDescriptors.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_PRINTER_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		/** \name Virtual Printer Status Line Masks */

-		//@{

-		/** Port status mask for a printer device, indicating that an error has *not* occurred. */

-		#define PRNT_PORTSTATUS_NOTERROR    (1 << 3)

-

-		/** Port status mask for a printer device, indicating that the device is currently selected. */

-		#define PRNT_PORTSTATUS_SELECT      (1 << 4)

-

-		/** Port status mask for a printer device, indicating that the device is currently out of paper. */

-		#define PRNT_PORTSTATUS_PAPEREMPTY  (1 << 5)

-		//@}

-

-	/* Enums: */

-		/** Enum for possible Class, Subclass and Protocol values of device and interface descriptors relating to the Printer

-		 *  device class.

-		 */

-		enum PRNT_Descriptor_ClassSubclassProtocol_t

-		{

-			PRNT_CSCP_PrinterClass          = 0x07, /**< Descriptor Class value indicating that the device or interface

-			                                         *   belongs to the Printer class.

-			                                         */

-			PRNT_CSCP_PrinterSubclass       = 0x01, /**< Descriptor Subclass value indicating that the device or interface

-			                                         *   belongs to the Printer subclass.

-			                                         */

-			PRNT_CSCP_BidirectionalProtocol = 0x02, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device or interface

-			                                         *   belongs to the Bidirectional protocol of the Printer class.

-			                                         */

-		};

-

-		/** Enum for the Printer class specific control requests that can be issued by the USB bus host. */

-		enum PRNT_ClassRequests_t

-		{

-			PRNT_REQ_GetDeviceID            = 0x00, /**< Printer class-specific request to retrieve the Unicode ID

-			                                         *   string of the device, containing the device's name, manufacturer

-			                                         *   and supported printer languages.

-			                                         */

-			PRNT_REQ_GetPortStatus          = 0x01, /**< Printer class-specific request to get the current status of the

-			                                         *   virtual printer port, for device selection and ready states.

-			                                         */

-			PRNT_REQ_SoftReset              = 0x02, /**< Printer class-specific request to reset the device, ready for new

-			                                         *   printer commands.

-			                                         */

-		};

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/RNDISClassCommon.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/RNDISClassCommon.h
deleted file mode 100644
index bc4112189..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/RNDISClassCommon.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,414 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB RNDIS Class driver.

- *

- *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB RNDIS Class driver.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassRNDIS

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassRNDISCommon  Common Class Definitions

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB

- *  RNDIS Class.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef _RNDIS_CLASS_COMMON_H_

-#define _RNDIS_CLASS_COMMON_H_

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DRIVER

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../Core/StdDescriptors.h"

-		#include "CDCClassCommon.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		/** Additional error code for RNDIS functions when a device returns a logical command failure. */

-		#define RNDIS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED        0x80

-

-		/** Implemented RNDIS Version Major. */

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MAJOR             0x01

-

-		/** Implemented RNDIS Version Minor. */

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MINOR             0x00

-

-		/** \name RNDIS Message Values */

-		//@{

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MSG                0x00000001UL

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG            0x00000002UL

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_HALT_MSG                  0x00000003UL

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG                 0x00000004UL

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG                   0x00000005UL

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_MSG                 0x00000006UL

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_INDICATE_STATUS_MSG       0x00000007UL

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG             0x00000008UL

-		//@}

-

-		/** \name RNDIS Response Values */

-		//@{

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT          0x80000002UL

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_CMPLT               0x80000004UL

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_SET_CMPLT                 0x80000005UL

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_CMPLT               0x80000006UL

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT           0x80000008UL

-		//@}

-

-		/** \name RNDIS Status Values */

-		//@{

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS            0x00000000UL

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_FAILURE            0xC0000001UL

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_INVALID_DATA       0xC0010015UL

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED      0xC00000BBUL

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_MEDIA_CONNECT      0x4001000BUL

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_MEDIA_DISCONNECT   0x4001000CUL

-		//@}

-

-		/** \name RNDIS Media States */

-		//@{

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_CONNECTED     0x00000000UL

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_DISCONNECTED  0x00000001UL

-		//@}

-

-		/** \name RNDIS Media Types */

-		//@{

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3              0x00000000UL

-		//@}

-

-		/** \name RNDIS Connection Types */

-		//@{

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTIONLESS	      0x00000001UL

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTION_ORIENTED    0x00000002UL

-		//@}

-

-		/** \name RNDIS Packet Types */

-		//@{

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_DIRECTED           0x00000001UL

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MULTICAST          0x00000002UL

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_ALL_MULTICAST      0x00000004UL

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_BROADCAST          0x00000008UL

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_SOURCE_ROUTING     0x00000010UL

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_PROMISCUOUS        0x00000020UL

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_SMT                0x00000040UL

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_ALL_LOCAL          0x00000080UL

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_GROUP              0x00001000UL

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_ALL_FUNCTIONAL     0x00002000UL

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_FUNCTIONAL         0x00004000UL

-		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MAC_FRAME          0x00008000UL

-		//@}

-

-		/** \name RNDIS OID Values */

-		//@{

-		#define OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST                0x00010101UL

-		#define OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS               0x00010102UL

-		#define OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED               0x00010103UL

-		#define OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE                  0x00010104UL

-		#define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE            0x00010106UL

-		#define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE            0x00010111UL

-		#define OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED                    0x00010107UL

-		#define OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE           0x0001010AUL

-		#define OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE            0x0001010BUL

-		#define OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID                     0x0001010CUL

-		#define OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION            0x0001010DUL

-		#define OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER         0x0001010EUL

-		#define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE            0x00010111UL

-		#define OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS          0x00010114UL

-		#define OID_GEN_PHYSICAL_MEDIUM               0x00010202UL

-		#define OID_GEN_XMIT_OK                       0x00020101UL

-		#define OID_GEN_RCV_OK                        0x00020102UL

-		#define OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR                    0x00020103UL

-		#define OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR                     0x00020104UL

-		#define OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER                 0x00020105UL

-		#define OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS           0x01010101UL

-		#define OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS             0x01010102UL

-		#define OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST              0x01010103UL

-		#define OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE           0x01010104UL

-		#define OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT         0x01020101UL

-		#define OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION          0x01020102UL

-		#define OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS        0x01020103UL

-		//@}

-

-		/** Maximum size in bytes of a RNDIS control message which can be sent or received. */

-		#define RNDIS_MESSAGE_BUFFER_SIZE             128

-

-		/** Maximum size in bytes of an Ethernet frame according to the Ethernet standard. */

-		#define ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX               1500

-

-	/* Enums: */

-		/** Enum for the RNDIS class specific control requests that can be issued by the USB bus host. */

-		enum RNDIS_ClassRequests_t

-		{

-			RNDIS_REQ_SendEncapsulatedCommand = 0x00, /**< RNDIS request to issue a host-to-device NDIS command. */

-			RNDIS_REQ_GetEncapsulatedResponse = 0x01, /**< RNDIS request to issue a device-to-host NDIS response. */

-		};

-

-		/** Enum for the possible NDIS adapter states. */

-		enum RNDIS_States_t

-		{

-			RNDIS_Uninitialized    = 0, /**< Adapter currently uninitialized. */

-			RNDIS_Initialized      = 1, /**< Adapter currently initialized but not ready for data transfers. */

-			RNDIS_Data_Initialized = 2, /**< Adapter currently initialized and ready for data transfers. */

-		};

-

-		/** Enum for the RNDIS class specific notification requests that can be issued by a RNDIS device to a host. */

-		enum RNDIS_ClassNotifications_t

-		{

-			RNDIS_NOTIF_ResponseAvailable = 0x01, /**< Notification request value for a RNDIS Response Available notification. */

-		};

-

-		/** Enum for the NDIS hardware states. */

-		enum NDIS_Hardware_Status_t

-		{

-			NDIS_HardwareStatus_Ready, /**< Hardware Ready to accept commands from the host. */

-			NDIS_HardwareStatus_Initializing, /**< Hardware busy initializing. */

-			NDIS_HardwareStatus_Reset, /**< Hardware reset. */

-			NDIS_HardwareStatus_Closing, /**< Hardware currently closing. */

-			NDIS_HardwareStatus_NotReady /**< Hardware not ready to accept commands from the host. */

-		};

-

-	/* Type Defines: */

-		/** \brief MAC Address Structure.

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for a physical MAC address of a device on a network.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint8_t Octets[6]; /**< Individual bytes of a MAC address */

-		} ATTR_PACKED MAC_Address_t;

-

-		/** \brief RNDIS Common Message Header Structure.

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for a RNDIS message header, sent before RNDIS messages.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint32_t MessageType; /**< RNDIS message type, a \c REMOTE_NDIS_*_MSG constant */

-			uint32_t MessageLength; /**< Total length of the RNDIS message, in bytes */

-		} ATTR_PACKED RNDIS_Message_Header_t;

-

-		/** \brief RNDIS Message Structure.

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for a RNDIS packet message, used to encapsulate Ethernet packets sent to and from the adapter.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint32_t MessageType;

-			uint32_t MessageLength;

-			uint32_t DataOffset;

-			uint32_t DataLength;

-			uint32_t OOBDataOffset;

-			uint32_t OOBDataLength;

-			uint32_t NumOOBDataElements;

-			uint32_t PerPacketInfoOffset;

-			uint32_t PerPacketInfoLength;

-			uint32_t VcHandle;

-			uint32_t Reserved;

-		} ATTR_PACKED RNDIS_Packet_Message_t;

-

-		/** \brief RNDIS Initialization Message Structure.

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for a RNDIS Initialize command message.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint32_t MessageType;

-			uint32_t MessageLength;

-			uint32_t RequestId;

-

-			uint32_t MajorVersion;

-			uint32_t MinorVersion;

-			uint32_t MaxTransferSize;

-		} ATTR_PACKED RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t;

-

-		/** \brief RNDIS Initialize Complete Message Structure.

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for a RNDIS Initialize Complete response message.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint32_t MessageType;

-			uint32_t MessageLength;

-			uint32_t RequestId;

-			uint32_t Status;

-

-			uint32_t MajorVersion;

-			uint32_t MinorVersion;

-			uint32_t DeviceFlags;

-			uint32_t Medium;

-			uint32_t MaxPacketsPerTransfer;

-			uint32_t MaxTransferSize;

-			uint32_t PacketAlignmentFactor;

-			uint32_t AFListOffset;

-			uint32_t AFListSize;

-		} ATTR_PACKED RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t;

-

-		/** \brief RNDIS Keep Alive Message Structure.

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for a RNDIS Keep Alive command message.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint32_t MessageType;

-			uint32_t MessageLength;

-			uint32_t RequestId;

-		} ATTR_PACKED RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t;

-

-		/** \brief RNDIS Keep Alive Complete Message Structure.

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for a RNDIS Keep Alive Complete response message.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint32_t MessageType;

-			uint32_t MessageLength;

-			uint32_t RequestId;

-			uint32_t Status;

-		} ATTR_PACKED RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t;

-

-		/** \brief RNDIS Reset Complete Message Structure.

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for a RNDIS Reset Complete response message.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint32_t MessageType;

-			uint32_t MessageLength;

-			uint32_t Status;

-

-			uint32_t AddressingReset;

-		} ATTR_PACKED RNDIS_Reset_Complete_t;

-

-		/** \brief RNDIS OID Property Set Message Structure.

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for a RNDIS OID Property Set command message.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint32_t MessageType;

-			uint32_t MessageLength;

-			uint32_t RequestId;

-

-			uint32_t Oid;

-			uint32_t InformationBufferLength;

-			uint32_t InformationBufferOffset;

-			uint32_t DeviceVcHandle;

-		} ATTR_PACKED RNDIS_Set_Message_t;

-

-		/** \brief RNDIS OID Property Set Complete Message Structure.

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for a RNDIS OID Property Set Complete response message.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint32_t MessageType;

-			uint32_t MessageLength;

-			uint32_t RequestId;

-			uint32_t Status;

-		} ATTR_PACKED RNDIS_Set_Complete_t;

-

-		/** \brief RNDIS OID Property Query Message Structure.

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for a RNDIS OID Property Query command message.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint32_t MessageType;

-			uint32_t MessageLength;

-			uint32_t RequestId;

-

-			uint32_t Oid;

-			uint32_t InformationBufferLength;

-			uint32_t InformationBufferOffset;

-			uint32_t DeviceVcHandle;

-		} ATTR_PACKED RNDIS_Query_Message_t;

-

-		/** \brief RNDIS OID Property Query Complete Message Structure.

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for a RNDIS OID Property Query Complete response message.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint32_t MessageType;

-			uint32_t MessageLength;

-			uint32_t RequestId;

-			uint32_t Status;

-

-			uint32_t InformationBufferLength;

-			uint32_t InformationBufferOffset;

-		} ATTR_PACKED RNDIS_Query_Complete_t;

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/StillImageClassCommon.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/StillImageClassCommon.h
deleted file mode 100644
index a3388e2e7..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/StillImageClassCommon.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,161 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Still Image Class driver.

- *

- *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Still Image Class driver.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassSI

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassSICommon  Common Class Definitions

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB

- *  Still Image Class.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef _SI_CLASS_COMMON_H_

-#define _SI_CLASS_COMMON_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../Core/StdDescriptors.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_SI_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		/** Length in bytes of a given Unicode string's character length.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in] Chars  Total number of Unicode characters in the string.

-		 *

-		 *  \return Number of bytes of the given unicode string.

-		 */

-		#define UNICODE_STRING_LENGTH(Chars)  ((Chars) << 1)

-

-		/** Used in the DataLength field of a PIMA container, to give the total container size in bytes for

-		 *  a command container.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in] Params  Number of parameters which are to be sent in the \c Param field of the container.

-		 */

-		#define PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(Params)     ((sizeof(PIMA_Container_t) - 12) + ((Params) * sizeof(uint32_t)))

-

-		/** Used in the DataLength field of a PIMA container, to give the total container size in bytes for

-		 *  a data container.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in] DataLen  Length in bytes of the data in the container.

-		 */

-		#define PIMA_DATA_SIZE(DataLen)       ((sizeof(PIMA_Container_t) - 12) + (DataLen))

-

-	/* Enums: */

-		/** Enum for the possible PIMA contains types. */

-		enum PIMA_Container_Types_t

-		{

-			PIMA_CONTAINER_Undefined     = 0, /**< Undefined container type. */

-			PIMA_CONTAINER_CommandBlock  = 1, /**< Command Block container type. */

-			PIMA_CONTAINER_DataBlock     = 2, /**< Data Block container type. */

-			PIMA_CONTAINER_ResponseBlock = 3, /**< Response container type. */

-			PIMA_CONTAINER_EventBlock    = 4, /**< Event Block container type. */

-		};

-

-	/* Enums: */

-		/** Enum for possible Class, Subclass and Protocol values of device and interface descriptors relating to the

-		 *  Still Image device class.

-		 */

-		enum SI_Descriptor_ClassSubclassProtocol_t

-		{

-			SI_CSCP_StillImageClass             = 0x06, /**< Descriptor Class value indicating that the device or interface

-			                                             *   belongs to the Still Image class.

-			                                             */

-			SI_CSCP_StillImageSubclass          = 0x01, /**< Descriptor Subclass value indicating that the device or interface

-			                                             *   belongs to the Still Image subclass.

-			                                             */

-			SI_CSCP_BulkOnlyProtocol            = 0x01, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device or interface

-			                                             *   belongs to the Bulk Only Transport protocol of the Still Image class.

-			                                             */

-		};

-

-		/** Enums for the possible status codes of a returned Response Block from an attached PIMA compliant Still Image device. */

-		enum PIMA_ResponseCodes_t

-		{

-			PIMA_RESPONSE_OK                    = 1, /**< Response code indicating no error in the issued command. */

-			PIMA_RESPONSE_GeneralError          = 2, /**< Response code indicating a general error while processing the

-			                                             *  issued command.

-			                                             */

-			PIMA_RESPONSE_SessionNotOpen        = 3, /**< Response code indicating that the sent command requires an open

-			                                             *   session before being issued.

-			                                             */

-			PIMA_RESPONSE_InvalidTransaction    = 4, /**< Response code indicating an invalid transaction occurred. */

-			PIMA_RESPONSE_OperationNotSupported = 5, /**< Response code indicating that the issued command is not supported

-			                                             *   by the attached device.

-			                                             */

-			PIMA_RESPONSE_ParameterNotSupported = 6, /**< Response code indicating that one or more of the issued command's

-			                                             *   parameters are not supported by the device.

-			                                             */

-		};

-

-	/* Type Defines: */

-		/** \brief PIMA Still Image Device Command/Response Container.

-		 *

-		 *  Type define for a PIMA container, use to send commands and receive responses to and from an

-		 *  attached Still Image device.

-		 *

-		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint32_t DataLength; /**< Length of the container and data, in bytes. */

-			uint16_t Type; /**< Container type, a value from the \ref PIMA_Container_Types_t enum. */

-			uint16_t Code; /**< Command, event or response code of the container. */

-			uint32_t TransactionID; /**< Unique container ID to link blocks together. */

-			uint32_t Params[3]; /**< Block parameters to be issued along with the block code (command blocks only). */

-		} ATTR_PACKED PIMA_Container_t;

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/AudioClassDevice.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/AudioClassDevice.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 3fb350a11..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/AudioClassDevice.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,198 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_DRIVER

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_DEVICE_C

-#include "AudioClassDevice.h"

-

-void Audio_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if (!(Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived()))

-	  return;

-

-	if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT) == REQREC_INTERFACE)

-	{

-		uint8_t InterfaceIndex = (USB_ControlRequest.wIndex & 0xFF);

-	

-		if ((InterfaceIndex != AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.ControlInterfaceNumber) &&

-		    (InterfaceIndex != AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.StreamingInterfaceNumber))

-		{

-			return;

-		}

-	}

-	else if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT) == REQREC_ENDPOINT)

-	{

-		uint8_t EndpointAddress = (USB_ControlRequest.wIndex & 0xFF);

-	

-		if ((EndpointAddress != AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address) &&

-		    (EndpointAddress != AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Address))

-		{

-			return;

-		}

-	}

-

-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)

-	{

-		case REQ_SetInterface:

-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE))

-			{

-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();

-

-				AudioInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceEnabled = ((USB_ControlRequest.wValue & 0xFF) != 0);

-				EVENT_Audio_Device_StreamStartStop(AudioInterfaceInfo);

-			}

-

-			break;

-		case AUDIO_REQ_GetStatus:

-			if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) ||

-			    (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT)))

-			{

-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();

-			}

-

-			break;

-		case AUDIO_REQ_SetCurrent:

-		case AUDIO_REQ_SetMinimum:

-		case AUDIO_REQ_SetMaximum:

-		case AUDIO_REQ_SetResolution:

-			if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT) == REQREC_ENDPOINT)

-			{

-				uint8_t EndpointProperty = USB_ControlRequest.bRequest;

-				uint8_t EndpointAddress  = (uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wIndex;

-				uint8_t EndpointControl  = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue >> 8);

-

-				if (CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetEndpointProperty(AudioInterfaceInfo, EndpointProperty, EndpointAddress,

-				                                                 EndpointControl, NULL, NULL))

-				{

-					uint16_t ValueLength = USB_ControlRequest.wLength;

-					uint8_t  Value[ValueLength];

-

-					Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-					Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(Value, ValueLength);

-					Endpoint_ClearIN();

-

-					CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetEndpointProperty(AudioInterfaceInfo, EndpointProperty, EndpointAddress,

-					                                             EndpointControl, &ValueLength, Value);

-				}

-			}

-			else if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT) == REQREC_INTERFACE)

-			{

-				uint8_t  Property  = USB_ControlRequest.bRequest;

-				uint8_t  Entity    = (USB_ControlRequest.wIndex >> 8);

-				uint16_t Parameter = USB_ControlRequest.wValue;

-

-				if (CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetInterfaceProperty(AudioInterfaceInfo, Property, Entity,

-				                                                  Parameter, NULL, NULL))

-				{

-					uint16_t ValueLength = USB_ControlRequest.wLength;

-					uint8_t  Value[ValueLength];

-

-					Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-					Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(Value, ValueLength);

-					Endpoint_ClearIN();

-

-					CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetInterfaceProperty(AudioInterfaceInfo, Property, Entity,

-				                                                  Parameter, &ValueLength, Value);

-				}

-			}

-

-			break;

-		case AUDIO_REQ_GetCurrent:

-		case AUDIO_REQ_GetMinimum:

-		case AUDIO_REQ_GetMaximum:

-		case AUDIO_REQ_GetResolution:

-			if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT) == REQREC_ENDPOINT)

-			{

-				uint8_t  EndpointProperty = USB_ControlRequest.bRequest;

-				uint8_t  EndpointAddress  = (uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wIndex;

-				uint8_t  EndpointControl  = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue >> 8);

-				uint16_t ValueLength      = USB_ControlRequest.wLength;

-				uint8_t  Value[ValueLength];

-

-				if (CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetEndpointProperty(AudioInterfaceInfo, EndpointProperty, EndpointAddress,

-				                                                 EndpointControl, &ValueLength, Value))

-				{

-					Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-					Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(Value, ValueLength);

-					Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-				}

-			}

-			else if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT) == REQREC_INTERFACE)

-			{

-				uint8_t  Property    = USB_ControlRequest.bRequest;

-				uint8_t  Entity      = (USB_ControlRequest.wIndex >> 8);

-				uint16_t Parameter   = USB_ControlRequest.wValue;

-				uint16_t ValueLength = USB_ControlRequest.wLength;

-				uint8_t  Value[ValueLength];

-

-				if (CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetInterfaceProperty(AudioInterfaceInfo, Property, Entity,

-				                                                  Parameter, &ValueLength, Value))

-				{

-					Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-					Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(Value, ValueLength);

-					Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-				}

-			}

-

-			break;

-	}

-}

-

-bool Audio_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	memset(&AudioInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(AudioInterfaceInfo->State));

-	

-	AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Type  = EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS;

-	AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Type = EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS;

-

-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(&AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint, 1)))

-	  return false;

-

-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(&AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint, 1)))

-	  return false;

-

-	return true;

-}

-

-// cppcheck-suppress unusedFunction

-void Audio_Device_Event_Stub(void)

-{

-

-}

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/AudioClassDevice.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/AudioClassDevice.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 09a832808..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/AudioClassDevice.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,396 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Device mode driver for the library USB Audio 1.0 Class driver.

- *

- *  Device mode driver for the library USB Audio 1.0 Class driver.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassAudio

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassAudioDevice Audio 1.0 Class Device Mode Driver

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/AudioClassDevice.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Device Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the Audio 1.0 USB Class driver.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef _AUDIO_CLASS_DEVICE_H_

-#define _AUDIO_CLASS_DEVICE_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../USB.h"

-		#include "../Common/AudioClassCommon.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Type Defines: */

-			/** \brief Audio Class Device Mode Configuration and State Structure.

-			 *

-			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made for each Audio interface

-			 *  within the user application, and passed to each of the Audio class driver functions as the

-			 *  \c AudioInterfaceInfo parameter. This stores each Audio interface's configuration and state information.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				struct

-				{

-					uint8_t  ControlInterfaceNumber; /**< Index of the Audio Control interface within the device this

-					                                  *   structure controls.

-					                                  */

-					uint8_t  StreamingInterfaceNumber; /**< Index of the Audio Streaming interface within the device this

-														*   structure controls.

-														*/

-

-					USB_Endpoint_Table_t DataINEndpoint; /**< Data IN endpoint configuration table. */

-					USB_Endpoint_Table_t DataOUTEndpoint; /**< Data OUT endpoint configuration table. */

-				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section

-				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.

-				           */

-				struct

-				{

-					bool InterfaceEnabled; /**< Set and cleared by the class driver to indicate if the host has enabled the streaming endpoints

-					                        *   of the Audio Streaming interface.

-					                        */

-				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section

-				          *   are reset to their defaults when the interface is enumerated.

-				          */

-			} USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t;

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Configures the endpoints of a given Audio interface, ready for use. This should be linked to the library

-			 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged() event so that the endpoints are configured when the configuration containing the

-			 *  given Audio interface is selected.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the endpoints were successfully configured, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			bool Audio_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Processes incoming control requests from the host, that are directed to the given Audio class interface. This should be

-			 *  linked to the library \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.

-			 */

-			void Audio_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Audio class driver callback for the setting and retrieval of streaming endpoint properties. This callback must be implemented

-			 *  in the user application to handle property manipulations on streaming audio endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  When the DataLength parameter is NULL, this callback should only indicate whether the specified operation is valid for

-			 *  the given endpoint index, and should return as fast as possible. When non-NULL, this value may be altered for GET operations

-			 *  to indicate the size of the retrieved data.

-			 *

-			 *  \note The length of the retrieved data stored into the Data buffer on GET operations should not exceed the initial value

-			 *        of the \c DataLength parameter.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     EndpointProperty    Property of the endpoint to get or set, a value from \ref Audio_ClassRequests_t.

-			 *  \param[in]     EndpointAddress     Address of the streaming endpoint whose property is being referenced.

-			 *  \param[in]     EndpointControl     Parameter of the endpoint to get or set, a value from \ref Audio_EndpointControls_t.

-			 *  \param[in,out] DataLength          For SET operations, the length of the parameter data to set. For GET operations, the maximum

-			 *                                     length of the retrieved data. When NULL, the function should return whether the given property

-			 *                                     and parameter is valid for the requested endpoint without reading or modifying the Data buffer.

-			 *  \param[in,out] Data                Pointer to a location where the parameter data is stored for SET operations, or where

-			 *                                     the retrieved data is to be stored for GET operations.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the property GET/SET was successful, \c false otherwise

-			 */

-			bool CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetEndpointProperty(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,

-			                                                  const uint8_t EndpointProperty,

-			                                                  const uint8_t EndpointAddress,

-			                                                  const uint8_t EndpointControl,

-			                                                  uint16_t* const DataLength,

-			                                                  uint8_t* Data) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Audio class driver callback for the setting and retrieval of streaming interface properties. This callback must be implemented

-			 *  in the user application to handle property manipulations on streaming audio interfaces.

-			 *

-			 *  When the DataLength parameter is NULL, this callback should only indicate whether the specified operation is valid for

-			 *  the given entity and should return as fast as possible. When non-NULL, this value may be altered for GET operations

-			 *  to indicate the size of the retrieved data.

-			 *

-			 *  \note The length of the retrieved data stored into the Data buffer on GET operations should not exceed the initial value

-			 *        of the \c DataLength parameter.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     Property            Property of the interface to get or set, a value from \ref Audio_ClassRequests_t.

-			 *  \param[in]     EntityAddress       Address of the audio entity whose property is being referenced.

-			 *  \param[in]     Parameter           Parameter of the entity to get or set, specific to each type of entity (see USB Audio specification).

-			 *  \param[in,out] DataLength          For SET operations, the length of the parameter data to set. For GET operations, the maximum

-			 *                                     length of the retrieved data. When NULL, the function should return whether the given property

-			 *                                     and parameter is valid for the requested endpoint without reading or modifying the Data buffer.

-			 *  \param[in,out] Data                Pointer to a location where the parameter data is stored for SET operations, or where

-			 *                                     the retrieved data is to be stored for GET operations.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the property GET/SET was successful, \c false otherwise

-			 */

-			bool CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetInterfaceProperty(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,

-			                                                   const uint8_t Property,

-			                                                   const uint8_t EntityAddress,

-			                                                   const uint16_t Parameter,

-			                                                   uint16_t* const DataLength,

-			                                                   uint8_t* Data) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Audio class driver event for an Audio Stream start/stop change. This event fires each time the device receives a stream enable or

-			 *  disable control request from the host, to start and stop the audio stream. The current state of the stream can be determined by the

-			 *  State.InterfaceEnabled value inside the Audio interface structure passed as a parameter.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.

-			 */

-			void EVENT_Audio_Device_StreamStartStop(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo);

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** General management task for a given Audio class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should

-			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.

-			 */

-			static inline void Audio_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)

-			                                        ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Audio_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)

-			{

-				(void)AudioInterfaceInfo;

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the given audio interface is ready for a sample to be read from it, and selects the streaming

-			 *  OUT endpoint ready for reading.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or

-			 *       the call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the given Audio interface has a sample to be read, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Audio_Device_IsSampleReceived(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)

-			                                                 ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Audio_Device_IsSampleReceived(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)

-			{

-				if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(AudioInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceEnabled))

-				  return false;

-

-				Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Address);

-				return Endpoint_IsOUTReceived();

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the given audio interface is ready to accept the next sample to be written to it, and selects

-			 *  the streaming IN endpoint ready for writing.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or

-			 *       the call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the given Audio interface is ready to accept the next sample, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Audio_Device_IsReadyForNextSample(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)

-			                                                     ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Audio_Device_IsReadyForNextSample(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)

-			{

-				if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(AudioInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceEnabled))

-				  return false;

-

-				Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);

-				return Endpoint_IsINReady();

-			}

-

-			/** Reads the next 8-bit audio sample from the current audio interface.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This should be preceded immediately by a call to the \ref Audio_Device_IsSampleReceived() function to ensure

-			 *       that the correct endpoint is selected and ready for data.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return  Signed 8-bit audio sample from the audio interface.

-			 */

-			static inline int8_t Audio_Device_ReadSample8(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)

-			                                              ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline int8_t Audio_Device_ReadSample8(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)

-			{

-				int8_t Sample;

-

-				(void)AudioInterfaceInfo;

-

-				Sample = Endpoint_Read_8();

-

-				if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))

-				  Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-

-				return Sample;

-			}

-

-			/** Reads the next 16-bit audio sample from the current audio interface.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This should be preceded immediately by a call to the \ref Audio_Device_IsSampleReceived() function to ensure

-			 *       that the correct endpoint is selected and ready for data.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return  Signed 16-bit audio sample from the audio interface.

-			 */

-			static inline int16_t Audio_Device_ReadSample16(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)

-			                                                ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline int16_t Audio_Device_ReadSample16(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)

-			{

-				int16_t Sample;

-

-				(void)AudioInterfaceInfo;

-

-				Sample = (int16_t)Endpoint_Read_16_LE();

-

-				if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))

-				  Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-

-				return Sample;

-			}

-

-			/** Reads the next 24-bit audio sample from the current audio interface.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This should be preceded immediately by a call to the \ref Audio_Device_IsSampleReceived() function to ensure

-			 *       that the correct endpoint is selected and ready for data.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Signed 24-bit audio sample from the audio interface.

-			 */

-			static inline int32_t Audio_Device_ReadSample24(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)

-			                                                ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline int32_t Audio_Device_ReadSample24(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)

-			{

-				int32_t Sample;

-

-				(void)AudioInterfaceInfo;

-

-				Sample = (((uint32_t)Endpoint_Read_8() << 16) | Endpoint_Read_16_LE());

-

-				if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))

-				  Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-

-				return Sample;

-			}

-

-			/** Writes the next 8-bit audio sample to the current audio interface.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This should be preceded immediately by a call to the \ref Audio_Device_IsReadyForNextSample() function to

-			 *       ensure that the correct endpoint is selected and ready for data.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     Sample              Signed 8-bit audio sample.

-			 */

-			static inline void Audio_Device_WriteSample8(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,

-			                                             const int8_t Sample) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Audio_Device_WriteSample8(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,

-			                                             const int8_t Sample)

-			{

-				Endpoint_Write_8(Sample);

-

-				if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Size)

-				  Endpoint_ClearIN();

-			}

-

-			/** Writes the next 16-bit audio sample to the current audio interface.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This should be preceded immediately by a call to the \ref Audio_Device_IsReadyForNextSample() function to

-			 *       ensure that the correct endpoint is selected and ready for data.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     Sample              Signed 16-bit audio sample.

-			 */

-			static inline void Audio_Device_WriteSample16(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,

-			                                              const int16_t Sample) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Audio_Device_WriteSample16(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,

-			                                              const int16_t Sample)

-			{

-				Endpoint_Write_16_LE(Sample);

-

-				if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Size)

-				  Endpoint_ClearIN();

-			}

-

-			/** Writes the next 24-bit audio sample to the current audio interface.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This should be preceded immediately by a call to the \ref Audio_Device_IsReadyForNextSample() function to

-			 *       ensure that the correct endpoint is selected and ready for data.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     Sample              Signed 24-bit audio sample.

-			 */

-			static inline void Audio_Device_WriteSample24(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,

-			                                              const int32_t Sample) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Audio_Device_WriteSample24(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,

-			                                              const int32_t Sample)

-			{

-				Endpoint_Write_16_LE(Sample);

-				Endpoint_Write_8(Sample >> 16);

-

-				if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Size)

-				  Endpoint_ClearIN();

-			}

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_DEVICE_C)

-				void Audio_Device_Event_Stub(void) ATTR_CONST;

-

-				void EVENT_Audio_Device_StreamStartStop(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)

-				                                        ATTR_WEAK ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALIAS(Audio_Device_Event_Stub);

-			#endif

-

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDCClassDevice.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDCClassDevice.c
deleted file mode 100644
index e77aa280b..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDCClassDevice.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,339 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DRIVER

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DEVICE_C

-#include "CDCClassDevice.h"

-

-void CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if (!(Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived()))

-	  return;

-

-	if (USB_ControlRequest.wIndex != CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.ControlInterfaceNumber)

-	  return;

-

-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)

-	{

-		case CDC_REQ_GetLineEncoding:

-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))

-			{

-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-

-				while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()));

-

-				Endpoint_Write_32_LE(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS);

-				Endpoint_Write_8(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.CharFormat);

-				Endpoint_Write_8(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.ParityType);

-				Endpoint_Write_8(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.DataBits);

-

-				Endpoint_ClearIN();

-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();

-			}

-

-			break;

-		case CDC_REQ_SetLineEncoding:

-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))

-			{

-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-

-				while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))

-				{

-					if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)

-					  return;

-				}

-				

-				CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS = Endpoint_Read_32_LE();

-				CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.CharFormat  = Endpoint_Read_8();

-				CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.ParityType  = Endpoint_Read_8();

-				CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.DataBits    = Endpoint_Read_8();

-

-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();

-

-				EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(CDCInterfaceInfo);

-			}

-

-			break;

-		case CDC_REQ_SetControlLineState:

-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))

-			{

-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();

-

-				CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.HostToDevice = USB_ControlRequest.wValue;

-

-				EVENT_CDC_Device_ControLineStateChanged(CDCInterfaceInfo);

-			}

-

-			break;

-		case CDC_REQ_SendBreak:

-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))

-			{

-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();

-

-				EVENT_CDC_Device_BreakSent(CDCInterfaceInfo, (uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue);

-			}

-

-			break;

-	}

-}

-

-bool CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	memset(&CDCInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(CDCInterfaceInfo->State));

-

-	CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Type       = EP_TYPE_BULK;

-	CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Type      = EP_TYPE_BULK;

-	CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationEndpoint.Type = EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT;

-

-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(&CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint, 1)))

-	  return false;

-

-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(&CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint, 1)))

-	  return false;

-

-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(&CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationEndpoint, 1)))

-	  return false;

-

-	return true;

-}

-

-void CDC_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS))

-	  return;

-

-	#if !defined(NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH)

-	CDC_Device_Flush(CDCInterfaceInfo);

-	#endif

-}

-

-uint8_t CDC_Device_SendString(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,

-                              const char* const String)

-{

-	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS))

-	  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);

-	return Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(String, strlen(String), NULL);

-}

-

-uint8_t CDC_Device_SendData(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,

-                            const char* const Buffer,

-                            const uint16_t Length)

-{

-	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS))

-	  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);

-	return Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, Length, NULL);

-}

-

-uint8_t CDC_Device_SendByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,

-                            const uint8_t Data)

-{

-	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS))

-	  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);

-

-	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-	{

-		Endpoint_ClearIN();

-

-		uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-		if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()) != ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError)

-		  return ErrorCode;

-	}

-

-	Endpoint_Write_8(Data);

-	return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;

-}

-

-uint8_t CDC_Device_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS))

-	  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);

-

-	if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))

-	  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;

-

-	bool BankFull = !(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed());

-

-	Endpoint_ClearIN();

-

-	if (BankFull)

-	{

-		if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()) != ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError)

-		  return ErrorCode;

-

-		Endpoint_ClearIN();

-	}

-

-	return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;

-}

-

-uint16_t CDC_Device_BytesReceived(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS))

-	  return 0;

-

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Address);

-

-	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())

-	{

-		if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))

-		{

-			Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-			return 0;

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			return Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint();

-		}

-	}

-	else

-	{

-		return 0;

-	}

-}

-

-int16_t CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS))

-	  return -1;

-

-	int16_t ReceivedByte = -1;

-

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Address);

-

-	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())

-	{

-		if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())

-		  ReceivedByte = Endpoint_Read_8();

-

-		if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))

-		  Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-	}

-

-	return ReceivedByte;

-}

-

-void CDC_Device_SendControlLineStateChange(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS))

-	  return;

-

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationEndpoint.Address);

-

-	USB_Request_Header_t Notification = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-		{

-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),

-			.bRequest      = CDC_NOTIF_SerialState,

-			.wValue        = CPU_TO_LE16(0),

-			.wIndex        = CPU_TO_LE16(0),

-			.wLength       = CPU_TO_LE16(sizeof(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost)),

-		};

-

-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&Notification, sizeof(USB_Request_Header_t), NULL);

-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost,

-	                         sizeof(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost),

-	                         NULL);

-	Endpoint_ClearIN();

-}

-

-#if defined(FDEV_SETUP_STREAM)

-void CDC_Device_CreateStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,

-                             FILE* const Stream)

-{

-	*Stream = (FILE)FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(CDC_Device_putchar, CDC_Device_getchar, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);

-	fdev_set_udata(Stream, CDCInterfaceInfo);

-}

-

-void CDC_Device_CreateBlockingStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,

-                                     FILE* const Stream)

-{

-	*Stream = (FILE)FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(CDC_Device_putchar, CDC_Device_getchar_Blocking, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);

-	fdev_set_udata(Stream, CDCInterfaceInfo);

-}

-

-static int CDC_Device_putchar(char c,

-                              FILE* Stream)

-{

-	return CDC_Device_SendByte((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream), c) ? _FDEV_ERR : 0;

-}

-

-static int CDC_Device_getchar(FILE* Stream)

-{

-	int16_t ReceivedByte = CDC_Device_ReceiveByte((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream));

-

-	if (ReceivedByte < 0)

-	  return _FDEV_EOF;

-

-	return ReceivedByte;

-}

-

-static int CDC_Device_getchar_Blocking(FILE* Stream)

-{

-	int16_t ReceivedByte;

-

-	while ((ReceivedByte = CDC_Device_ReceiveByte((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream))) < 0)

-	{

-		if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)

-		  return _FDEV_EOF;

-

-		CDC_Device_USBTask((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream));

-		USB_USBTask();

-	}

-

-	return ReceivedByte;

-}

-#endif

-

-// cppcheck-suppress unusedFunction

-void CDC_Device_Event_Stub(void)

-{

-

-}

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDCClassDevice.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDCClassDevice.h
deleted file mode 100644
index a4528d1dd..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDCClassDevice.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,352 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Device mode driver for the library USB CDC Class driver.

- *

- *  Device mode driver for the library USB CDC Class driver.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassCDC

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassCDCDevice CDC Class Device Mode Driver

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDCClassDevice.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Device Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the CDC USB Class driver.

- *

- *  \note There are several major drawbacks to the CDC-ACM standard USB class, however

- *        it is very standardized and thus usually available as a built-in driver on

- *        most platforms, and so is a better choice than a proprietary serial class.

- *

- *        One major issue with CDC-ACM is that it requires two Interface descriptors,

- *        which will upset most hosts when part of a multi-function "Composite" USB

- *        device. This is because each interface will be loaded into a separate driver

- *        instance, causing the two interfaces be become unlinked. To prevent this, you

- *        should use the "Interface Association Descriptor" addendum to the USB 2.0 standard

- *        which is available on most OSes when creating Composite devices.

- *

- *        Another major oversight is that there is no mechanism for the host to notify the

- *        device that there is a data sink on the host side ready to accept data. This

- *        means that the device may try to send data while the host isn't listening, causing

- *        lengthy blocking timeouts in the transmission routines. It is thus highly recommended

- *        that the virtual serial line DTR (Data Terminal Ready) signal be used where possible

- *        to determine if a host application is ready for data.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef _CDC_CLASS_DEVICE_H_

-#define _CDC_CLASS_DEVICE_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../USB.h"

-		#include "../Common/CDCClassCommon.h"

-

-		#include <stdio.h>

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Type Defines: */

-			/** \brief CDC Class Device Mode Configuration and State Structure.

-			 *

-			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made for each CDC interface

-			 *  within the user application, and passed to each of the CDC class driver functions as the

-			 *  CDCInterfaceInfo parameter. This stores each CDC interface's configuration and state information.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				struct

-				{

-					uint8_t ControlInterfaceNumber; /**< Interface number of the CDC control interface within the device. */

-					

-					USB_Endpoint_Table_t DataINEndpoint; /**< Data IN endpoint configuration table. */

-					USB_Endpoint_Table_t DataOUTEndpoint; /**< Data OUT endpoint configuration table. */

-					USB_Endpoint_Table_t NotificationEndpoint; /**< Notification IN Endpoint configuration table. */

-				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section

-				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.

-				           */

-				struct

-				{

-					struct

-					{

-						uint16_t HostToDevice; /**< Control line states from the host to device, as a set of \c CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_*

-											    *   masks. This value is updated each time \ref CDC_Device_USBTask() is called.

-											    */

-						uint16_t DeviceToHost; /**< Control line states from the device to host, as a set of \c CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_*

-											    *   masks - to notify the host of changes to these values, call the

-											    *   \ref CDC_Device_SendControlLineStateChange() function.

-											    */

-					} ControlLineStates; /**< Current states of the virtual serial port's control lines between the device and host. */

-

-					CDC_LineEncoding_t LineEncoding; /** Line encoding used in the virtual serial port, for the device's information.

-					                                  *  This is generally only used if the virtual serial port data is to be

-					                                  *  reconstructed on a physical UART.

-					                                  */

-				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section

-				          *   are reset to their defaults when the interface is enumerated.

-				          */

-			} USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t;

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Configures the endpoints of a given CDC interface, ready for use. This should be linked to the library

-			 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged() event so that the endpoints are configured when the configuration containing

-			 *  the given CDC interface is selected.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the endpoints were successfully configured, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			bool CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Processes incoming control requests from the host, that are directed to the given CDC class interface. This should be

-			 *  linked to the library \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.

-			 */

-			void CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** General management task for a given CDC class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should

-			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.

-			 */

-			void CDC_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** CDC class driver event for a line encoding change on a CDC interface. This event fires each time the host requests a

-			 *  line encoding change (containing the serial parity, baud and other configuration information) and may be hooked in the

-			 *  user program by declaring a handler function with the same name and parameters listed here. The new line encoding

-			 *  settings are available in the LineEncoding structure inside the CDC interface structure passed as a parameter.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.

-			 */

-			void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** CDC class driver event for a control line state change on a CDC interface. This event fires each time the host requests a

-			 *  control line state change (containing the virtual serial control line states, such as DTR) and may be hooked in the

-			 *  user program by declaring a handler function with the same name and parameters listed here. The new control line states

-			 *  are available in the \c ControlLineStates.HostToDevice value inside the CDC interface structure passed as a parameter, set as

-			 *  a mask of \c CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_* masks.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.

-			 */

-			void EVENT_CDC_Device_ControLineStateChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** CDC class driver event for a send break request sent to the device from the host. This is generally used to separate

-			 *  data or to indicate a special condition to the receiving device.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     Duration          Duration of the break that has been sent by the host, in milliseconds.

-			 */

-			void EVENT_CDC_Device_BreakSent(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,

-			                                const uint8_t Duration) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Sends a given data buffer to the attached USB host, if connected. If a host is not connected when the function is

-			 *  called, the string is discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the host until either the endpoint bank

-			 *  becomes full, or the \ref CDC_Device_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to the host. This allows

-			 *  for multiple bytes to be packed into a single endpoint packet, increasing data throughput.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or

-			 *       the call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     Buffer            Pointer to a buffer containing the data to send to the device.

-			 *  \param[in]     Length            Length of the data to send to the host.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t CDC_Device_SendData(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,

-			                            const char* const Buffer,

-			                            const uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-

-			/** Sends a given null terminated string to the attached USB host, if connected. If a host is not connected when

-			 *  the function is called, the string is discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the host until either

-			 *  the endpoint bank becomes full, or the \ref CDC_Device_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to

-			 *  the host. This allows for multiple bytes to be packed into a single endpoint packet, increasing data throughput.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or

-			 *       the call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     String            Pointer to the null terminated string to send to the host.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t CDC_Device_SendString(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,

-			                              const char* const String) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-

-			/** Sends a given byte to the attached USB host, if connected. If a host is not connected when the function is called, the

-			 *  byte is discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the host until either the endpoint bank becomes full, or the

-			 *  \ref CDC_Device_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to the host. This allows for multiple bytes to be

-			 *  packed into a single endpoint packet, increasing data throughput.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or

-			 *       the call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     Data              Byte of data to send to the host.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t CDC_Device_SendByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,

-			                            const uint8_t Data) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Determines the number of bytes received by the CDC interface from the host, waiting to be read. This indicates the number

-			 *  of bytes in the OUT endpoint bank only, and thus the number of calls to \ref CDC_Device_ReceiveByte() which are guaranteed to

-			 *  succeed immediately. If multiple bytes are to be received, they should be buffered by the user application, as the endpoint

-			 *  bank will not be released back to the USB controller until all bytes are read.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or

-			 *       the call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Total number of buffered bytes received from the host.

-			 */

-			uint16_t CDC_Device_BytesReceived(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Reads a byte of data from the host. If no data is waiting to be read of if a USB host is not connected, the function

-			 *  returns a negative value. The \ref CDC_Device_BytesReceived() function may be queried in advance to determine how many

-			 *  bytes are currently buffered in the CDC interface's data receive endpoint bank, and thus how many repeated calls to this

-			 *  function which are guaranteed to succeed.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or

-			 *       the call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next received byte from the host, or a negative value if no data received.

-			 */

-			int16_t CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Flushes any data waiting to be sent, ensuring that the send buffer is cleared.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or

-			 *       the call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t CDC_Device_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Sends a Serial Control Line State Change notification to the host. This should be called when the virtual serial

-			 *  control lines (DCD, DSR, etc.) have changed states, or to give BREAK notifications to the host. Line states persist

-			 *  until they are cleared via a second notification. This should be called each time the CDC class driver's

-			 *  \c ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost value is updated to push the new states to the USB host.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or

-			 *       the call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.

-			 */

-			void CDC_Device_SendControlLineStateChange(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			#if defined(FDEV_SETUP_STREAM) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			/** Creates a standard character stream for the given CDC Device instance so that it can be used with all the regular

-			 *  functions in the standard <stdio.h> library that accept a \c FILE stream as a destination (e.g. \c fprintf()). The created

-			 *  stream is bidirectional and can be used for both input and output functions.

-			 *

-			 *  Reading data from this stream is non-blocking, i.e. in most instances, complete strings cannot be read in by a single

-			 *  fetch, as the endpoint will not be ready at some point in the transmission, aborting the transfer. However, this may

-			 *  be used when the read data is processed byte-per-bye (via \c getc()) or when the user application will implement its own

-			 *  line buffering.

-			 *

-			 *  \note The created stream can be given as \c stdout if desired to direct the standard output from all <stdio.h> functions

-			 *        to the given CDC interface.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function is not available on all microcontroller architectures.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in,out] Stream            Pointer to a FILE structure where the created stream should be placed.

-			 */

-			void CDC_Device_CreateStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,

-			                             FILE* const Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-

-			/** Identical to \ref CDC_Device_CreateStream(), except that reads are blocking until the calling stream function terminates

-			 *  the transfer. While blocking, the USB and CDC service tasks are called repeatedly to maintain USB communications.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function is not available on all microcontroller architectures.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in,out] Stream            Pointer to a FILE structure where the created stream should be placed.

-			 */

-			void CDC_Device_CreateBlockingStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,

-			                                     FILE* const Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-			#endif

-			

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DEVICE_C)

-				#if defined(FDEV_SETUP_STREAM)

-				static int CDC_Device_putchar(char c,

-				                              FILE* Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-				static int CDC_Device_getchar(FILE* Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-				static int CDC_Device_getchar_Blocking(FILE* Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-				#endif

-

-				void CDC_Device_Event_Stub(void) ATTR_CONST;

-

-				void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)

-				                                          ATTR_WEAK ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALIAS(CDC_Device_Event_Stub);

-				void EVENT_CDC_Device_ControLineStateChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)

-				                                             ATTR_WEAK ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALIAS(CDC_Device_Event_Stub);

-				void EVENT_CDC_Device_BreakSent(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,

-				                                const uint8_t Duration) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)

-				                                ATTR_ALIAS(CDC_Device_Event_Stub);

-			#endif

-

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HIDClassDevice.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HIDClassDevice.c
deleted file mode 100644
index a56747b08..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HIDClassDevice.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,200 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_HID_DRIVER

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_HID_DEVICE_C

-#include "HIDClassDevice.h"

-

-void HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if (!(Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived()))

-	  return;

-

-	if (USB_ControlRequest.wIndex != HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.InterfaceNumber)

-	  return;

-

-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)

-	{

-		case HID_REQ_GetReport:

-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))

-			{

-				uint16_t ReportSize = 0;

-				uint8_t  ReportID   = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue & 0xFF);

-				uint8_t  ReportType = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue >> 8) - 1;

-				uint8_t  ReportData[HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBufferSize];

-

-				memset(ReportData, 0, sizeof(ReportData));

-

-				CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(HIDInterfaceInfo, &ReportID, ReportType, ReportData, &ReportSize);

-

-				if (HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBuffer != NULL)

-				{

-					memcpy(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBuffer, ReportData,

-					       HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBufferSize);

-				}

-

-				Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP);

-

-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(ReportData, ReportSize);

-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-			}

-

-			break;

-		case HID_REQ_SetReport:

-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))

-			{

-				uint16_t ReportSize = USB_ControlRequest.wLength;

-				uint8_t  ReportID   = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue & 0xFF);

-				uint8_t  ReportType = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue >> 8) - 1;

-				uint8_t  ReportData[ReportSize];

-

-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-				Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(ReportData, ReportSize);

-				Endpoint_ClearIN();

-

-				CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(HIDInterfaceInfo, ReportID, ReportType,

-				                                     &ReportData[ReportID ? 1 : 0], ReportSize - (ReportID ? 1 : 0));

-			}

-

-			break;

-		case HID_REQ_GetProtocol:

-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))

-			{

-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-				while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()));

-				Endpoint_Write_8(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.UsingReportProtocol);

-				Endpoint_ClearIN();

-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();

-			}

-

-			break;

-		case HID_REQ_SetProtocol:

-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))

-			{

-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();

-

-				HIDInterfaceInfo->State.UsingReportProtocol = ((USB_ControlRequest.wValue & 0xFF) != 0x00);

-			}

-

-			break;

-		case HID_REQ_SetIdle:

-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))

-			{

-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();

-

-				HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleCount = ((USB_ControlRequest.wValue & 0xFF00) >> 6);

-			}

-

-			break;

-		case HID_REQ_GetIdle:

-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))

-			{

-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-				while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()));

-				Endpoint_Write_8(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleCount >> 2);

-				Endpoint_ClearIN();

-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();

-			}

-

-			break;

-	}

-}

-

-bool HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	memset(&HIDInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(HIDInterfaceInfo->State));

-	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.UsingReportProtocol = true;

-	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleCount           = 500;

-

-	HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.ReportINEndpoint.Type = EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT;

-

-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(&HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.ReportINEndpoint, 1)))

-	  return false;	

-	

-	return true;

-}

-

-void HID_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)

-	  return;

-

-	if (HIDInterfaceInfo->State.PrevFrameNum == USB_Device_GetFrameNumber())

-	  return;

-	  

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.ReportINEndpoint.Address);

-

-	if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())

-	{

-		uint8_t  ReportINData[HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBufferSize];

-		uint8_t  ReportID     = 0;

-		uint16_t ReportINSize = 0;

-

-		memset(ReportINData, 0, sizeof(ReportINData));

-

-		bool ForceSend         = CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(HIDInterfaceInfo, &ReportID, HID_REPORT_ITEM_In,

-		                                                             ReportINData, &ReportINSize);

-		bool StatesChanged     = false;

-		bool IdlePeriodElapsed = (HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleCount && !(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleMSRemaining));

-

-		if (HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBuffer != NULL)

-		{

-			StatesChanged = (memcmp(ReportINData, HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBuffer, ReportINSize) != 0);

-			memcpy(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBuffer, ReportINData, HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBufferSize);

-		}

-

-		if (ReportINSize && (ForceSend || StatesChanged || IdlePeriodElapsed))

-		{

-			HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleMSRemaining = HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleCount;

-

-			Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.ReportINEndpoint.Address);

-

-			if (ReportID)

-			  Endpoint_Write_8(ReportID);

-

-			Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(ReportINData, ReportINSize, NULL);

-

-			Endpoint_ClearIN();

-		}

-		

-		HIDInterfaceInfo->State.PrevFrameNum = USB_Device_GetFrameNumber();

-	}

-}

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HIDClassDevice.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HIDClassDevice.h
deleted file mode 100644
index ea2125772..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HIDClassDevice.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,210 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Device mode driver for the library USB HID Class driver.

- *

- *  Device mode driver for the library USB HID Class driver.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassHID

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassHIDDevice HID Class Device Mode Driver

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HIDClassDevice.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Device Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the HID USB Class driver.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef _HID_CLASS_DEVICE_H_

-#define _HID_CLASS_DEVICE_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../USB.h"

-		#include "../Common/HIDClassCommon.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_HID_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Type Defines: */

-			/** \brief HID Class Device Mode Configuration and State Structure.

-			 *

-			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made for each HID interface

-			 *  within the user application, and passed to each of the HID class driver functions as the

-			 *  \c HIDInterfaceInfo parameter. This stores each HID interface's configuration and state information.

-			 *

-			 *  \note Due to technical limitations, the HID device class driver does not utilize a separate OUT

-			 *        endpoint for host->device communications. Instead, the host->device data (if any) is sent to

-			 *        the device via the control endpoint.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				struct

-				{

-					uint8_t  InterfaceNumber; /**< Interface number of the HID interface within the device. */

-

-					USB_Endpoint_Table_t ReportINEndpoint; /**< Data IN HID report endpoint configuration table. */

-

-					void*    PrevReportINBuffer; /**< Pointer to a buffer where the previously created HID input report can be

-					                              *  stored by the driver, for comparison purposes to detect report changes that

-					                              *  must be sent immediately to the host. This should point to a buffer big enough

-					                              *  to hold the largest HID input report sent from the HID interface. If this is set

-												  *  to \c NULL, it is up to the user to force transfers when needed in the

-												  *  \ref CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport() callback function.

-												  *

-												  *  \note Due to the single buffer, the internal driver can only correctly compare

-												  *        subsequent reports with identical report IDs. In multiple report devices,

-												  *        this buffer should be set to \c NULL and the decision to send reports made

-												  *        by the user application instead.

-					                              */

-					uint8_t  PrevReportINBufferSize; /**< Size in bytes of the given input report buffer. This is used to create a

-					                                  *  second buffer of the same size within the driver so that subsequent reports

-					                                  *  can be compared. If the user app is to determine when reports are to be sent

-					                                  *  exclusively (i.e. \ref PrevReportINBuffer is \c NULL) this value must still be

-													  *  set to the size of the largest report the device can issue to the host.

-					                                  */

-				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section

-				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.

-				           */

-				struct

-				{

-					bool     UsingReportProtocol; /**< Indicates if the HID interface is set to Boot or Report protocol mode. */

-					uint16_t PrevFrameNum; /**< Frame number of the previous HID report packet opportunity. */

-					uint16_t IdleCount; /**< Report idle period, in milliseconds, set by the host. */

-					uint16_t IdleMSRemaining; /**< Total number of milliseconds remaining before the idle period elapsed - this

-											   *   should be decremented by the user application if non-zero each millisecond. */

-				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section

-				          *   are reset to their defaults when the interface is enumerated.

-				          */

-			} USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t;

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Configures the endpoints of a given HID interface, ready for use. This should be linked to the library

-			 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged() event so that the endpoints are configured when the configuration

-			 *  containing the given HID interface is selected.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the endpoints were successfully configured, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			bool HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Processes incoming control requests from the host, that are directed to the given HID class interface. This should be

-			 *  linked to the library \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class configuration and state.

-			 */

-			void HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** General management task for a given HID class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should

-			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class configuration and state.

-			 */

-			void HID_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** HID class driver callback for the user creation of a HID IN report. This callback may fire in response to either

-			 *  HID class control requests from the host, or by the normal HID endpoint polling procedure. Inside this callback the

-			 *  user is responsible for the creation of the next HID input report to be sent to the host.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in,out] ReportID          If preset to a non-zero value, this is the report ID being requested by the host. If zero,

-			 *                                   this should be set to the report ID of the generated HID input report (if any). If multiple

-			 *                                   reports are not sent via the given HID interface, this parameter should be ignored.

-			 *  \param[in]     ReportType        Type of HID report to generate, either \ref HID_REPORT_ITEM_In or \ref HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature.

-			 *  \param[out]    ReportData        Pointer to a buffer where the generated HID report should be stored.

-			 *  \param[out]    ReportSize        Number of bytes in the generated input report, or zero if no report is to be sent.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true to force the sending of the report even if it is identical to the previous report and still within

-			 *          the idle period (useful for devices which report relative movement), \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,

-			                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,

-			                                         const uint8_t ReportType,

-			                                         void* ReportData,

-			                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)

-			                                         ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(4) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(5);

-

-			/** HID class driver callback for the user processing of a received HID OUT report. This callback may fire in response to

-			 *  either HID class control requests from the host, or by the normal HID endpoint polling procedure. Inside this callback

-			 *  the user is responsible for the processing of the received HID output report from the host.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     ReportID          Report ID of the received output report. If multiple reports are not received via the given HID

-			 *                                   interface, this parameter should be ignored.

-			 *  \param[in]     ReportType        Type of received HID report, either \ref HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out or \ref HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature.

-			 *  \param[in]     ReportData        Pointer to a buffer where the received HID report is stored.

-			 *  \param[in]     ReportSize        Size in bytes of the received report from the host.

-			 */

-			void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,

-			                                          const uint8_t ReportID,

-			                                          const uint8_t ReportType,

-			                                          const void* ReportData,

-			                                          const uint16_t ReportSize) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(4);

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Indicates that a millisecond of idle time has elapsed on the given HID interface, and the interface's idle count should be

-			 *  decremented. This should be called once per millisecond so that hardware key-repeats function correctly. It is recommended

-			 *  that this be called by the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event, once SOF events have been enabled via

-			 *  \ref USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class configuration and state.

-			 */

-			static inline void HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			static inline void HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo)

-			{

-				if (HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleMSRemaining)

-				  HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleMSRemaining--;

-			}

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDIClassDevice.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDIClassDevice.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 3ff339c06..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDIClassDevice.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,125 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_DRIVER

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_DEVICE_C

-#include "MIDIClassDevice.h"

-

-bool MIDI_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	memset(&MIDIInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(MIDIInterfaceInfo->State));

-

-	MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Type  = EP_TYPE_BULK;

-	MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Type = EP_TYPE_BULK;

-

-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(&MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint, 1)))

-	  return false;

-

-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(&MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint, 1)))

-	  return false;

-

-	return true;

-}

-

-void MIDI_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)

-	  return;

-

-	#if !defined(NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH)

-	MIDI_Device_Flush(MIDIInterfaceInfo);

-	#endif

-}

-

-uint8_t MIDI_Device_SendEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo,

-                                    const MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event)

-{

-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)

-	  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(Event, sizeof(MIDI_EventPacket_t), NULL)) != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-	  Endpoint_ClearIN();

-

-	return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-uint8_t MIDI_Device_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)

-	  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);

-

-	if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())

-	{

-		Endpoint_ClearIN();

-

-		if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()) != ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError)

-		  return ErrorCode;

-	}

-

-	return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;

-}

-

-bool MIDI_Device_ReceiveEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo,

-                                    MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event)

-{

-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)

-	  return false;

-

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Address);

-

-	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-	  return false;

-

-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(Event, sizeof(MIDI_EventPacket_t), NULL);

-

-	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-

-	return true;

-}

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDIClassDevice.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDIClassDevice.h
deleted file mode 100644
index c5b01be5d..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDIClassDevice.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,175 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Device mode driver for the library USB MIDI Class driver.

- *

- *  Device mode driver for the library USB MIDI Class driver.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassMIDI

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassMIDIDevice MIDI Class Device Mode Driver

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDIClassDevice.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Device Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the MIDI USB Class driver.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef _MIDI_CLASS_DEVICE_H_

-#define _MIDI_CLASS_DEVICE_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../USB.h"

-		#include "../Common/MIDIClassCommon.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Type Define: */

-			/** \brief MIDI Class Device Mode Configuration and State Structure.

-			 *

-			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made for each MIDI interface

-			 *  within the user application, and passed to each of the MIDI class driver functions as the

-			 *  \c MIDIInterfaceInfo parameter. This stores each MIDI interface's configuration and state information.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				struct

-				{

-					uint8_t  StreamingInterfaceNumber; /**< Index of the Audio Streaming interface within the device this structure controls. */

-

-					USB_Endpoint_Table_t DataINEndpoint; /**< Data IN endpoint configuration table. */

-					USB_Endpoint_Table_t DataOUTEndpoint; /**< Data OUT endpoint configuration table. */

-				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section

-				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.

-				           */

-

-				struct

-				{

-					uint8_t RESERVED; // No state information for this class

-				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section

-				          *   are reset to their defaults when the interface is enumerated.

-				          */

-			} USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t;

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Configures the endpoints of a given MIDI interface, ready for use. This should be linked to the library

-			 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged() event so that the endpoints are configured when the configuration

-			 *  containing the given MIDI interface is selected.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the endpoints were successfully configured, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			bool MIDI_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** General management task for a given MIDI class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should

-			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state.

-			 */

-			void MIDI_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Sends a MIDI event packet to the host. If no host is connected, the event packet is discarded. Events are queued into the

-			 *  endpoint bank until either the endpoint bank is full, or \ref MIDI_Device_Flush() is called. This allows for multiple

-			 *  MIDI events to be packed into a single endpoint packet, increasing data throughput.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     Event              Pointer to a populated \ref MIDI_EventPacket_t structure containing the MIDI event to send.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t MIDI_Device_SendEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo,

-			                                    const MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-

-

-			/** Flushes the MIDI send buffer, sending any queued MIDI events to the host. This should be called to override the

-			 *  \ref MIDI_Device_SendEventPacket() function's packing behavior, to flush queued events.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t MIDI_Device_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Receives a MIDI event packet from the host. Events are unpacked from the endpoint, thus if the endpoint bank contains

-			 *  multiple MIDI events from the host in the one packet, multiple calls to this function will return each individual event.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[out]    Event              Pointer to a USB_MIDI_EventPacket_t structure where the received MIDI event is to be placed.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if a MIDI event packet was received, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			bool MIDI_Device_ReceiveEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo,

-			                                    MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Processes incoming control requests from the host, that are directed to the given MIDI class interface. This should be

-			 *  linked to the library \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state.

-			 */

-			static inline void MIDI_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			static inline void MIDI_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo)

-			{

-				(void)MIDIInterfaceInfo;

-			}

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorageClassDevice.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorageClassDevice.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 735437e46..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorageClassDevice.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,215 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_MS_DRIVER

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORAGE_DEVICE_C

-#include "MassStorageClassDevice.h"

-

-void MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if (!(Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived()))

-	  return;

-

-	if (USB_ControlRequest.wIndex != MSInterfaceInfo->Config.InterfaceNumber)

-	  return;

-

-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)

-	{

-		case MS_REQ_MassStorageReset:

-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))

-			{

-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();

-

-				MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset = true;

-			}

-

-			break;

-		case MS_REQ_GetMaxLUN:

-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))

-			{

-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-				while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()));

-				Endpoint_Write_8(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.TotalLUNs - 1);

-				Endpoint_ClearIN();

-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();

-			}

-

-			break;

-	}

-}

-

-bool MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	memset(&MSInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(MSInterfaceInfo->State));

-

-	MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Type  = EP_TYPE_BULK;

-	MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Type = EP_TYPE_BULK;

-

-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(&MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint, 1)))

-	  return false;

-

-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(&MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint, 1)))

-	  return false;

-

-	return true;

-}

-

-void MS_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)

-	  return;

-

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Address);

-

-	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())

-	{

-		if (MS_Device_ReadInCommandBlock(MSInterfaceInfo))

-		{

-			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.Flags & MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_IN)

-			  Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);

-

-			bool SCSICommandResult = CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(MSInterfaceInfo);

-

-			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandStatus.Status              = (SCSICommandResult) ? MS_SCSI_COMMAND_Pass : MS_SCSI_COMMAND_Fail;

-			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandStatus.Signature           = CPU_TO_LE32(MS_CSW_SIGNATURE);

-			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandStatus.Tag                 = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.Tag;

-			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandStatus.DataTransferResidue = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength;

-

-			if (!(SCSICommandResult) && (le32_to_cpu(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandStatus.DataTransferResidue)))

-			  Endpoint_StallTransaction();

-

-			MS_Device_ReturnCommandStatus(MSInterfaceInfo);

-		}

-	}

-

-	if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)

-	{

-		Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Address);

-		Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);

-

-		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Address);

-		Endpoint_ClearStall();

-		Endpoint_ResetDataToggle();

-		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);

-		Endpoint_ClearStall();

-		Endpoint_ResetDataToggle();

-

-		MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset = false;

-	}

-}

-

-static bool MS_Device_ReadInCommandBlock(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	uint16_t BytesProcessed;

-

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Address);

-	

-	BytesProcessed = 0;

-	while (Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock,

-	                               (sizeof(MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t) - 16), &BytesProcessed) ==

-	                               ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)

-	{

-		if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)

-		  return false;

-	}

-

-	if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.Signature         != CPU_TO_LE32(MS_CBW_SIGNATURE))     ||

-	    (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.LUN               >= MSInterfaceInfo->Config.TotalLUNs) ||

-		(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.Flags              & 0x1F)                              ||

-		(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandLength == 0)                                 ||

-		(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandLength >  16))

-	{		

-		Endpoint_StallTransaction();

-		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);

-		Endpoint_StallTransaction();

-

-		return false;

-	}

-

-	BytesProcessed = 0;

-	while (Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData,

-	                                MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandLength, &BytesProcessed) ==

-	                                ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)

-	{

-		if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)

-		  return false;

-	}

-

-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-

-	return true;

-}

-

-static void MS_Device_ReturnCommandStatus(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Address);

-

-	while (Endpoint_IsStalled())

-	{

-		#if !defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)

-		USB_USBTask();

-		#endif

-

-		if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)

-		  return;

-	}

-

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);

-

-	while (Endpoint_IsStalled())

-	{

-		#if !defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)

-		USB_USBTask();

-		#endif

-

-		if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)

-		  return;

-	}

-

-	uint16_t BytesProcessed = 0;

-	while (Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandStatus,

-	                                sizeof(MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t), &BytesProcessed) ==

-	                                ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)

-	{

-		if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)

-		  return;

-	}

-

-	Endpoint_ClearIN();

-}

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorageClassDevice.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorageClassDevice.h
deleted file mode 100644
index b9bc832e1..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorageClassDevice.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,161 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Device mode driver for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver.

- *

- *  Device mode driver for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassMS

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassMSDevice Mass Storage Class Device Mode Driver

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorageClassDevice.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Device Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the Mass Storage USB Class driver.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef _MS_CLASS_DEVICE_H_

-#define _MS_CLASS_DEVICE_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../USB.h"

-		#include "../Common/MassStorageClassCommon.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MS_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Type Defines: */

-			/** \brief Mass Storage Class Device Mode Configuration and State Structure.

-			 *

-			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made for each Mass Storage interface

-			 *  within the user application, and passed to each of the Mass Storage class driver functions as the

-			 *  \c MSInterfaceInfo parameter. This stores each Mass Storage interface's configuration and state information.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				struct

-				{

-					uint8_t  InterfaceNumber; /**< Interface number of the Mass Storage interface within the device. */

-

-					USB_Endpoint_Table_t DataINEndpoint; /**< Data IN endpoint configuration table. */

-					USB_Endpoint_Table_t DataOUTEndpoint; /**< Data OUT endpoint configuration table. */

-

-					uint8_t  TotalLUNs; /**< Total number of logical drives in the Mass Storage interface. */

-				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section

-				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.

-				           */

-				struct

-				{

-					MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t  CommandBlock; /**< Mass Storage class command block structure, stores the received SCSI

-															 *   command from the host which is to be processed.

-															 */

-					MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t CommandStatus; /**< Mass Storage class command status structure, set elements to indicate

-															  *   the issued command's success or failure to the host.

-															  */

-					volatile bool IsMassStoreReset; /**< Flag indicating that the host has requested that the Mass Storage interface be reset

-											         *   and that all current Mass Storage operations should immediately abort.

-											         */

-				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section

-				          *   are reset to their defaults when the interface is enumerated.

-				          */

-			} USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t;

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Configures the endpoints of a given Mass Storage interface, ready for use. This should be linked to the library

-			 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged() event so that the endpoints are configured when the configuration

-			 *  containing the given Mass Storage interface is selected.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the endpoints were successfully configured, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			bool MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Processes incoming control requests from the host, that are directed to the given Mass Storage class interface. This should be

-			 *  linked to the library \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state.

-			 */

-			void MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** General management task for a given Mass Storage class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should

-			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage configuration and state.

-			 */

-			void MS_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Mass Storage class driver callback for the user processing of a received SCSI command. This callback will fire each time the

-			 *  host sends a SCSI command which requires processing by the user application. Inside this callback the user is responsible

-			 *  for the processing of the received SCSI command from the host. The SCSI command is available in the CommandBlock structure

-			 *  inside the Mass Storage class state structure passed as a parameter to the callback function.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the SCSI command was successfully processed, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORAGE_DEVICE_C)

-				static void MS_Device_ReturnCommandStatus(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-				static bool MS_Device_ReadInCommandBlock(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			#endif

-

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDISClassDevice.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDISClassDevice.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 80aa723c1..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDISClassDevice.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,502 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_DRIVER

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_DEVICE_C

-#include "RNDISClassDevice.h"

-

-static const uint32_t PROGMEM AdapterSupportedOIDList[]  =

-	{

-		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST),

-		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_PHYSICAL_MEDIUM),

-		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS),

-		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED),

-		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE),

-		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE),

-		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE),

-		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED),

-		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE),

-		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE),

-		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID),

-		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION),

-		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER),

-		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE),

-		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS),

-		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_XMIT_OK),

-		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_RCV_OK),

-		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR),

-		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR),

-		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER),

-		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS),

-		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS),

-		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST),

-		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE),

-		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT),

-		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION),

-		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS),

-	};

-

-void RNDIS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if (!(Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived()))

-	  return;

-

-	if (USB_ControlRequest.wIndex != RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.ControlInterfaceNumber)

-	  return;

-

-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)

-	{

-		case RNDIS_REQ_SendEncapsulatedCommand:

-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))

-			{

-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-				Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer, USB_ControlRequest.wLength);

-				Endpoint_ClearIN();

-

-				RNDIS_Device_ProcessRNDISControlMessage(RNDISInterfaceInfo);

-			}

-

-			break;

-		case RNDIS_REQ_GetEncapsulatedResponse:

-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))

-			{

-				RNDIS_Message_Header_t* MessageHeader = (RNDIS_Message_Header_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;

-

-				if (!(MessageHeader->MessageLength))

-				{

-					RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer[0] = 0;

-					MessageHeader->MessageLength                    = CPU_TO_LE32(1);

-				}

-

-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer, le32_to_cpu(MessageHeader->MessageLength));

-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-

-				MessageHeader->MessageLength = CPU_TO_LE32(0);

-			}

-

-			break;

-	}

-}

-

-bool RNDIS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	memset(&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State));

-

-	RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Type       = EP_TYPE_BULK;

-	RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Type      = EP_TYPE_BULK;

-	RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationEndpoint.Type = EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT;

-

-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(&RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint, 1)))

-	  return false;

-

-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(&RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint, 1)))

-	  return false;

-

-	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(&RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationEndpoint, 1)))

-	  return false;

-

-	return true;

-}

-

-void RNDIS_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)

-	  return;

-

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationEndpoint.Address);

-

-	if (Endpoint_IsINReady() && RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady)

-	{

-		USB_Request_Header_t Notification = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-			{

-				.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),

-				.bRequest      = RNDIS_NOTIF_ResponseAvailable,

-				.wValue        = CPU_TO_LE16(0),

-				.wIndex        = CPU_TO_LE16(0),

-				.wLength       = CPU_TO_LE16(0),

-			};

-

-		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&Notification, sizeof(USB_Request_Header_t), NULL);

-

-		Endpoint_ClearIN();

-

-		RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady = false;

-	}

-}

-

-void RNDIS_Device_ProcessRNDISControlMessage(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	/* Note: Only a single buffer is used for both the received message and its response to save SRAM. Because of

-	         this, response bytes should be filled in order so that they do not clobber unread data in the buffer. */

-

-	RNDIS_Message_Header_t* MessageHeader = (RNDIS_Message_Header_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;

-

-	switch (le32_to_cpu(MessageHeader->MessageType))

-	{

-		case REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG:

-			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady     = true;

-

-			RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t*  INITIALIZE_Message  =

-			               (RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;

-			RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t* INITIALIZE_Response =

-			               (RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;

-

-			INITIALIZE_Response->MessageType            = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT);

-			INITIALIZE_Response->MessageLength          = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t));

-			INITIALIZE_Response->RequestId              = INITIALIZE_Message->RequestId;

-			INITIALIZE_Response->Status                 = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS);

-

-			INITIALIZE_Response->MajorVersion           = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MAJOR);

-			INITIALIZE_Response->MinorVersion           = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MINOR);

-			INITIALIZE_Response->DeviceFlags            = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTIONLESS);

-			INITIALIZE_Response->Medium                 = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3);

-			INITIALIZE_Response->MaxPacketsPerTransfer  = CPU_TO_LE32(1);

-			INITIALIZE_Response->MaxTransferSize        = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) + ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX);

-			INITIALIZE_Response->PacketAlignmentFactor  = CPU_TO_LE32(0);

-			INITIALIZE_Response->AFListOffset           = CPU_TO_LE32(0);

-			INITIALIZE_Response->AFListSize             = CPU_TO_LE32(0);

-

-			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrRNDISState    = RNDIS_Initialized;

-			break;

-		case REMOTE_NDIS_HALT_MSG:

-			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady     = false;

-

-			MessageHeader->MessageLength                = CPU_TO_LE32(0);

-

-			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrRNDISState    = RNDIS_Uninitialized;

-			break;

-		case REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG:

-			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady     = true;

-

-			RNDIS_Query_Message_t*  QUERY_Message       = (RNDIS_Query_Message_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;

-			RNDIS_Query_Complete_t* QUERY_Response      = (RNDIS_Query_Complete_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;

-			uint32_t                Query_Oid           = CPU_TO_LE32(QUERY_Message->Oid);

-

-			void*    QueryData    = &RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t) +

-			                                                                      le32_to_cpu(QUERY_Message->InformationBufferOffset)];

-			void*    ResponseData = &RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Complete_t)];

-			uint16_t ResponseSize;

-

-			QUERY_Response->MessageType                 = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_CMPLT);

-

-			if (RNDIS_Device_ProcessNDISQuery(RNDISInterfaceInfo, Query_Oid, QueryData, le32_to_cpu(QUERY_Message->InformationBufferLength),

-			                                  ResponseData, &ResponseSize))

-			{

-				QUERY_Response->Status                  = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS);

-				QUERY_Response->MessageLength           = cpu_to_le32(sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Complete_t) + ResponseSize);

-

-				QUERY_Response->InformationBufferLength = CPU_TO_LE32(ResponseSize);

-				QUERY_Response->InformationBufferOffset = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Complete_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t));

-			}

-			else

-			{

-				QUERY_Response->Status                  = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED);

-				QUERY_Response->MessageLength           = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Complete_t));

-

-				QUERY_Response->InformationBufferLength = CPU_TO_LE32(0);

-				QUERY_Response->InformationBufferOffset = CPU_TO_LE32(0);

-			}

-

-			break;

-		case REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG:

-			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady     = true;

-

-			RNDIS_Set_Message_t*  SET_Message           = (RNDIS_Set_Message_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;

-			RNDIS_Set_Complete_t* SET_Response          = (RNDIS_Set_Complete_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;

-			uint32_t              SET_Oid               = le32_to_cpu(SET_Message->Oid);

-

-			SET_Response->MessageType                   = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_SET_CMPLT);

-			SET_Response->MessageLength                 = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(RNDIS_Set_Complete_t));

-			SET_Response->RequestId                     = SET_Message->RequestId;

-

-			void* SetData = &RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t) +

-			                                                              le32_to_cpu(SET_Message->InformationBufferOffset)];

-

-			SET_Response->Status = RNDIS_Device_ProcessNDISSet(RNDISInterfaceInfo, SET_Oid, SetData,

-			                                                   le32_to_cpu(SET_Message->InformationBufferLength)) ?

-			                                                   REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS : REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED;

-			break;

-		case REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_MSG:

-			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady     = true;

-

-			RNDIS_Reset_Complete_t* RESET_Response      = (RNDIS_Reset_Complete_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;

-

-			RESET_Response->MessageType                 = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_CMPLT);

-			RESET_Response->MessageLength               = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(RNDIS_Reset_Complete_t));

-			RESET_Response->Status                      = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS);

-			RESET_Response->AddressingReset             = CPU_TO_LE32(0);

-

-			break;

-		case REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG:

-			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady     = true;

-

-			RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t*  KEEPALIVE_Message  =

-			                (RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;

-			RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t* KEEPALIVE_Response =

-			                (RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t*)&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RNDISMessageBuffer;

-

-			KEEPALIVE_Response->MessageType             = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT);

-			KEEPALIVE_Response->MessageLength           = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t));

-			KEEPALIVE_Response->RequestId               = KEEPALIVE_Message->RequestId;

-			KEEPALIVE_Response->Status                  = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS);

-

-			break;

-	}

-}

-

-static bool RNDIS_Device_ProcessNDISQuery(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,

-                                          const uint32_t OId,

-                                          void* const QueryData,

-                                          const uint16_t QuerySize,

-                                          void* ResponseData,

-                                          uint16_t* const ResponseSize)

-{

-	(void)QueryData;

-	(void)QuerySize;

-

-	switch (OId)

-	{

-		case OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST:

-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(AdapterSupportedOIDList);

-

-			memcpy_P(ResponseData, AdapterSupportedOIDList, sizeof(AdapterSupportedOIDList));

-

-			return true;

-		case OID_GEN_PHYSICAL_MEDIUM:

-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);

-

-			/* Indicate that the device is a true ethernet link */

-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = CPU_TO_LE32(0);

-

-			return true;

-		case OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS:

-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);

-

-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = CPU_TO_LE32(NDIS_HardwareStatus_Ready);

-

-			return true;

-		case OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED:

-		case OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE:

-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);

-

-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3);

-

-			return true;

-		case OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID:

-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);

-

-			/* Vendor ID 0x0xFFFFFF is reserved for vendors who have not purchased a NDIS VID */

-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = CPU_TO_LE32(0x00FFFFFF);

-

-			return true;

-		case OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE:

-		case OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE:

-		case OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE:

-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);

-

-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = CPU_TO_LE32(ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX);

-

-			return true;

-		case OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION:

-			*ResponseSize = (strlen(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.AdapterVendorDescription) + 1);

-

-			memcpy(ResponseData, RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.AdapterVendorDescription, *ResponseSize);

-

-			return true;

-		case OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS:

-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);

-

-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_CONNECTED);

-

-			return true;

-		case OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED:

-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);

-

-			/* Indicate 10Mb/s link speed */

-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = CPU_TO_LE32(100000);

-

-			return true;

-		case OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS:

-		case OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS:

-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(MAC_Address_t);

-

-			memcpy(ResponseData, &RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.AdapterMACAddress, sizeof(MAC_Address_t));

-

-			return true;

-		case OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE:

-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);

-

-			/* Indicate only one multicast address supported */

-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = CPU_TO_LE32(1);

-

-			return true;

-		case OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER:

-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);

-

-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = cpu_to_le32(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrPacketFilter);

-

-			return true;

-		case OID_GEN_XMIT_OK:

-		case OID_GEN_RCV_OK:

-		case OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR:

-		case OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR:

-		case OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER:

-		case OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT:

-		case OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION:

-		case OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS:

-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);

-

-			/* Unused statistic OIDs - always return 0 for each */

-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = CPU_TO_LE32(0);

-

-			return true;

-		case OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE:

-			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);

-

-			/* Indicate maximum overall buffer (Ethernet frame and RNDIS header) the adapter can handle */

-			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = CPU_TO_LE32(RNDIS_MESSAGE_BUFFER_SIZE + ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX);

-

-			return true;

-		default:

-			return false;

-	}

-}

-

-static bool RNDIS_Device_ProcessNDISSet(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,

-                                        const uint32_t OId,

-                                        const void* SetData,

-                                        const uint16_t SetSize)

-{

-	(void)SetSize;

-

-	switch (OId)

-	{

-		case OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER:

-			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrPacketFilter = le32_to_cpu(*((uint32_t*)SetData));

-			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrRNDISState   = (RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrPacketFilter) ? RNDIS_Data_Initialized : RNDIS_Initialized;

-

-			return true;

-		case OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST:

-			/* Do nothing - throw away the value from the host as it is unused */

-

-			return true;

-		default:

-			return false;

-	}

-}

-

-bool RNDIS_Device_IsPacketReceived(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) ||

-	    (RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrRNDISState != RNDIS_Data_Initialized))

-	{

-		return false;

-	}

-

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Address);

-	return Endpoint_IsOUTReceived();

-}

-

-uint8_t RNDIS_Device_ReadPacket(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,

-                                void* Buffer,

-                                uint16_t* const PacketLength)

-{

-	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) ||

-	    (RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrRNDISState != RNDIS_Data_Initialized))

-	{

-		return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-	}

-

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Address);

-

-	*PacketLength = 0;

-

-	if (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))

-		return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-

-	RNDIS_Packet_Message_t RNDISPacketHeader;

-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&RNDISPacketHeader, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t), NULL);

-

-	if (le32_to_cpu(RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength) > ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX)

-	{

-		Endpoint_StallTransaction();

-

-		return RNDIS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED;

-	}

-

-	*PacketLength = (uint16_t)le32_to_cpu(RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength);

-

-	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(Buffer, *PacketLength, NULL);

-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-

-	return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-uint8_t RNDIS_Device_SendPacket(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,

-                                void* Buffer,

-                                const uint16_t PacketLength)

-{

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) ||

-	    (RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrRNDISState != RNDIS_Data_Initialized))

-	{

-		return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-	}

-

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()) != ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError)

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	RNDIS_Packet_Message_t RNDISPacketHeader;

-

-	memset(&RNDISPacketHeader, 0, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t));

-

-	RNDISPacketHeader.MessageType   = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MSG);

-	RNDISPacketHeader.MessageLength = cpu_to_le32(sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) + PacketLength);

-	RNDISPacketHeader.DataOffset    = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t));

-	RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength    = cpu_to_le32(PacketLength);

-

-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&RNDISPacketHeader, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t), NULL);

-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, PacketLength, NULL);

-	Endpoint_ClearIN();

-

-	return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDISClassDevice.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDISClassDevice.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 4d1a4cff8..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDISClassDevice.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,203 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Device mode driver for the library USB RNDIS Class driver.

- *

- *  Device mode driver for the library USB RNDIS Class driver.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassRNDIS

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassRNDISDevice RNDIS Class Device Mode Driver

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDISClassDevice.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Device Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the RNDIS USB Class driver.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef _RNDIS_CLASS_DEVICE_H_

-#define _RNDIS_CLASS_DEVICE_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../USB.h"

-		#include "../Common/RNDISClassCommon.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Type Defines: */

-			/** \brief RNDIS Class Device Mode Configuration and State Structure.

-			 *

-			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made for each RNDIS interface

-			 *  within the user application, and passed to each of the RNDIS class driver functions as the

-			 *  \c RNDISInterfaceInfo parameter. This stores each RNDIS interface's configuration and state information.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				struct

-				{

-					uint8_t  ControlInterfaceNumber; /**< Interface number of the RNDIS control interface within the device. */

-

-					USB_Endpoint_Table_t DataINEndpoint; /**< Data IN endpoint configuration table. */

-					USB_Endpoint_Table_t DataOUTEndpoint; /**< Data OUT endpoint configuration table. */

-					USB_Endpoint_Table_t NotificationEndpoint; /**< Notification IN Endpoint configuration table. */

-

-					char*         AdapterVendorDescription; /**< String description of the adapter vendor. */

-					MAC_Address_t AdapterMACAddress; /**< MAC address of the adapter. */

-				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section

-				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.

-				           */

-				struct

-				{

-					uint8_t  RNDISMessageBuffer[RNDIS_MESSAGE_BUFFER_SIZE]; /**< Buffer to hold RNDIS messages to and from the host,

-																			 *   managed by the class driver.

-																			 */

-					bool     ResponseReady; /**< Internal flag indicating if a RNDIS message is waiting to be returned to the host. */

-					uint8_t  CurrRNDISState; /**< Current RNDIS state of the adapter, a value from the \ref RNDIS_States_t enum. */

-					uint32_t CurrPacketFilter; /**< Current packet filter mode, used internally by the class driver. */

-				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section

-				          *   are reset to their defaults when the interface is enumerated.

-				          */

-			} USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t;

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Configures the endpoints of a given RNDIS interface, ready for use. This should be linked to the library

-			 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged() event so that the endpoints are configured when the configuration

-			 *  containing the given RNDIS interface is selected.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a RNDIS Class configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the endpoints were successfully configured, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			bool RNDIS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Processes incoming control requests from the host, that are directed to the given RNDIS class interface. This should be

-			 *  linked to the library \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a RNDIS Class configuration and state.

-			 */

-			void RNDIS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** General management task for a given RNDIS class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should

-			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a RNDIS Class configuration and state.

-			 */

-			void RNDIS_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Determines if a packet is currently waiting for the device to read in and process.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if a packet is waiting to be read in by the host, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			bool RNDIS_Device_IsPacketReceived(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo);

-

-			/** Retrieves the next pending packet from the device, discarding the remainder of the RNDIS packet header to leave

-			 *  only the packet contents for processing by the device in the nominated buffer.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[out]    Buffer              Pointer to a buffer where the packer data is to be written to.

-			 *  \param[out]    PacketLength        Pointer to where the length in bytes of the read packet is to be stored.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t RNDIS_Device_ReadPacket(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,

-											void* Buffer,

-											uint16_t* const PacketLength);

-

-			/** Sends the given packet to the attached RNDIS device, after adding a RNDIS packet message header.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     Buffer              Pointer to a buffer where the packer data is to be read from.

-			 *  \param[in]     PacketLength        Length in bytes of the packet to send.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t RNDIS_Device_SendPacket(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,

-											void* Buffer,

-											const uint16_t PacketLength);

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-		#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_DEVICE_C)

-			static void RNDIS_Device_ProcessRNDISControlMessage(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)

-			                                                    ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			static bool RNDIS_Device_ProcessNDISQuery(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,

-			                                          const uint32_t OId,

-                                                      void* const QueryData,

-                                                      const uint16_t QuerySize,

-										              void* ResponseData,

-                                                      uint16_t* const ResponseSize) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)

-			                                          ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(5) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(6);

-			static bool RNDIS_Device_ProcessNDISSet(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,

-                                                    const uint32_t OId,

-			                                        const void* SetData,

-                                                    const uint16_t SetSize) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)

-			                                        ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);

-		#endif

-

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HIDClass.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HIDClass.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 288559c75..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HIDClass.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,81 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Master include file for the library USB HID Class driver.

- *

- *  Master include file for the library USB HID Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.

- *

- *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of

- *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassHID HID Class Driver

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HIDClassDevice.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  HID Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the USB HID Class, for both Device

- *  and Host USB modes. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the HID class manually

- *  via the low-level LUFA APIs.

- *

- *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with

- *  Hosts or Devices using the USB HID Class.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef _HID_CLASS_H_

-#define _HID_CLASS_H_

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_HID_DRIVER

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../Core/USBMode.h"

-

-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-			#include "Device/HIDClassDevice.h"

-		#endif

-

-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-			#include "Host/HIDClassHost.h"

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AndroidAccessoryClassHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AndroidAccessoryClassHost.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 67a1352b3..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AndroidAccessoryClassHost.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,422 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_AOA_DRIVER

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_ANDROIDACCESSORY_HOST_C

-#include "AndroidAccessoryClassHost.h"

-

-bool AOA_Host_ValidateAccessoryDevice(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,

-                                      const USB_Descriptor_Device_t* const DeviceDescriptor,

-                                      bool* const NeedModeSwitch)

-{

-	(void)AOAInterfaceInfo;

-

-	if (DeviceDescriptor->Header.Type != DTYPE_Device)

-	  return false;

-

-	*NeedModeSwitch = ((DeviceDescriptor->ProductID != ANDROID_ACCESSORY_PRODUCT_ID) &&

-	                   (DeviceDescriptor->ProductID != ANDROID_ACCESSORY_ADB_PRODUCT_ID));

-

-	return true;

-}

-

-uint8_t AOA_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,

-                                uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,

-                                void* ConfigDescriptorData)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint  = NULL;

-	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;

-	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* AOAInterface    = NULL;

-

-	memset(&AOAInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(AOAInterfaceInfo->State));

-

-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)

-	  return AOA_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;

-	

-	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,

-	                              DCOMP_AOA_Host_NextAndroidAccessoryInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)

-	{

-		return AOA_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;

-	}

-	

-	AOAInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);

-

-	while (!(DataINEndpoint) || !(DataOUTEndpoint))

-	{

-		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,

-		                              DCOMP_AOA_Host_NextInterfaceBulkEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)

-		{

-			return AOA_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;

-		}

-

-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);

-

-		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)

-		  DataINEndpoint  = EndpointData;

-		else

-		  DataOUTEndpoint = EndpointData;

-	}

-

-	AOAInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Size  = le16_to_cpu(DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize);

-	AOAInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.EndpointAddress = DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress;

-	AOAInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Type  = EP_TYPE_BULK;

-	

-	AOAInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Size = le16_to_cpu(DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointSize);

-	AOAInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.EndpointAddress = DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress;

-	AOAInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Type = EP_TYPE_BULK;

-	

-	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&AOAInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe, 1)))

-	  return false;

-	

-	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&AOAInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe, 1)))

-	  return false;

-

-	AOAInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive        = true;

-	AOAInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber = AOAInterface->InterfaceNumber;

-

-	return AOA_ENUMERROR_NoError;

-}

-

-static uint8_t DCOMP_AOA_Host_NextAndroidAccessoryInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);

-

-	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)

-	{

-		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);

-

-		if ((Interface->Class    == AOA_CSCP_AOADataClass)    &&

-		    (Interface->SubClass == AOA_CSCP_AOADataSubclass) &&

-		    (Interface->Protocol == AOA_CSCP_AOADataProtocol))

-		{

-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;

-		}

-	}

-

-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;

-}

-

-static uint8_t DCOMP_AOA_Host_NextInterfaceBulkEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);

-

-	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)

-	{

-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* Endpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);

-

-		uint8_t EndpointType = (Endpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);

-

-		if ((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) && (!(Pipe_IsEndpointBound(Endpoint->EndpointAddress))))

-		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;

-	}

-	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)

-	{

-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;

-	}

-

-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;

-}

-

-void AOA_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(AOAInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return;

-

-	#if !defined(NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH)

-	AOA_Host_Flush(AOAInterfaceInfo);

-	#endif

-}

-

-uint8_t AOA_Host_StartAccessoryMode(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-	

-	uint16_t AccessoryProtocol;

-	if ((ErrorCode = AOA_Host_GetAccessoryProtocol(&AccessoryProtocol)) != HOST_WAITERROR_Successful)

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	if (AccessoryProtocol != CPU_TO_LE16(AOA_PROTOCOL_AccessoryV1))

-	  return AOA_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED;

-

-	for (uint8_t PropertyIndex = 0; PropertyIndex < AOA_STRING_TOTAL_STRINGS; PropertyIndex++)

-	{

-		if ((ErrorCode = AOA_Host_SendPropertyString(AOAInterfaceInfo, PropertyIndex)) != HOST_WAITERROR_Successful)

-		  return ErrorCode;

-	}

-

-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-	{

-		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_VENDOR | REQREC_DEVICE),

-		.bRequest      = AOA_REQ_StartAccessoryMode,

-		.wValue        = 0,

-		.wIndex        = 0,

-		.wLength       = 0,

-	};

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);	

-}

-

-static uint8_t AOA_Host_GetAccessoryProtocol(uint16_t* const Protocol)

-{

-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-	{

-		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_VENDOR | REQREC_DEVICE),

-		.bRequest      = AOA_REQ_GetAccessoryProtocol,

-		.wValue        = 0,

-		.wIndex        = 0,

-		.wLength       = sizeof(uint16_t),

-	};

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Protocol);

-}

-

-static uint8_t AOA_Host_SendPropertyString(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,

-                                           const uint8_t StringIndex)

-{	

-	const char* String = AOAInterfaceInfo->Config.PropertyStrings[StringIndex];

-	

-	if (String == NULL)

-	  String = "";

-

-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-	{

-		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_VENDOR | REQREC_DEVICE),

-		.bRequest      = AOA_REQ_SendString,

-		.wValue        = 0,

-		.wIndex        = StringIndex,

-		.wLength       = (strlen(String) + 1),

-	};

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest((char*)String);

-}

-

-uint8_t AOA_Host_SendData(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,

-                          const uint8_t* const Buffer,

-                          const uint16_t Length)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(AOAInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(AOAInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);

-

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-	ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, Length, NULL);

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	return ErrorCode;

-}

-

-uint8_t AOA_Host_SendString(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,

-                            const char* const String)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(AOAInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(AOAInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);

-

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-	ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(String, strlen(String), NULL);

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	return ErrorCode;

-}

-

-uint8_t AOA_Host_SendByte(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,

-                          const uint8_t Data)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(AOAInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(AOAInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-	if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-	{

-		Pipe_ClearOUT();

-

-		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()) != PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError)

-		  return ErrorCode;

-	}

-

-	Pipe_Write_8(Data);

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;

-}

-

-uint16_t AOA_Host_BytesReceived(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(AOAInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return 0;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(AOAInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-	if (Pipe_IsINReceived())

-	{

-		if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))

-		{

-			Pipe_ClearIN();

-			Pipe_Freeze();

-			return 0;

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			Pipe_Freeze();

-			return Pipe_BytesInPipe();

-		}

-	}

-	else

-	{

-		Pipe_Freeze();

-

-		return 0;

-	}

-}

-

-int16_t AOA_Host_ReceiveByte(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(AOAInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return -1;

-

-	int16_t ReceivedByte = -1;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(AOAInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-	if (Pipe_IsINReceived())

-	{

-		if (Pipe_BytesInPipe())

-		  ReceivedByte = Pipe_Read_8();

-

-		if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))

-		  Pipe_ClearIN();

-	}

-

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	return ReceivedByte;

-}

-

-uint8_t AOA_Host_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(AOAInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(AOAInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-	if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))

-	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;

-

-	bool BankFull = !(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed());

-

-	Pipe_ClearOUT();

-

-	if (BankFull)

-	{

-		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()) != PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError)

-		  return ErrorCode;

-

-		Pipe_ClearOUT();

-	}

-

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;

-}

-

-#if defined(FDEV_SETUP_STREAM)

-void AOA_Host_CreateStream(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,

-                           FILE* const Stream)

-{

-	*Stream = (FILE)FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(AOA_Host_putchar, AOA_Host_getchar, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);

-	fdev_set_udata(Stream, AOAInterfaceInfo);

-}

-

-void AOA_Host_CreateBlockingStream(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,

-                                   FILE* const Stream)

-{

-	*Stream = (FILE)FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(AOA_Host_putchar, AOA_Host_getchar_Blocking, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);

-	fdev_set_udata(Stream, AOAInterfaceInfo);

-}

-

-static int AOA_Host_putchar(char c,

-                            FILE* Stream)

-{

-	return AOA_Host_SendByte((USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream), c) ? _FDEV_ERR : 0;

-}

-

-static int AOA_Host_getchar(FILE* Stream)

-{

-	int16_t ReceivedByte = AOA_Host_ReceiveByte((USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream));

-

-	if (ReceivedByte < 0)

-	  return _FDEV_EOF;

-

-	return ReceivedByte;

-}

-

-static int AOA_Host_getchar_Blocking(FILE* Stream)

-{

-	int16_t ReceivedByte;

-

-	while ((ReceivedByte = AOA_Host_ReceiveByte((USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream))) < 0)

-	{

-		if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)

-		  return _FDEV_EOF;

-

-		AOA_Host_USBTask((USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream));

-		USB_USBTask();

-	}

-

-	return ReceivedByte;

-}

-#endif

-

-#endif

-

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AndroidAccessoryClassHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AndroidAccessoryClassHost.h
deleted file mode 100644
index f55cd340a..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AndroidAccessoryClassHost.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,314 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB Android Open Accessory Class driver.

- *

- *  Host mode driver for the library USB Android Open Accessory Class driver.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassAOA

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassAndroidAccessoryHost Android Open Accessory Class Host Mode Driver

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AndroidAccessoryClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the Android Open Accessory USB Class driver.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __AOA_CLASS_HOST_H__

-#define __AOA_CLASS_HOST_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../USB.h"

-		#include "../Common/AndroidAccessoryClassCommon.h"

-

-		#include <stdio.h>

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_AOA_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Error code for some Android Open Accessory Host functions, indicating a logical (and not hardware) error. */

-			#define AOA_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED              0x80

-

-		/* Type Defines: */

-			/** \brief Android Open Accessory Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.

-			 *

-			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,

-			 *  and passed to each of the Android Open Accessory class driver functions as the \c AOAInterfaceInfo

-			 *  parameter. This stores each Android Open Accessory interface's configuration and state information.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				struct

-				{

-					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataINPipe; /**< Data IN Pipe configuration table. */

-					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataOUTPipe; /**< Data OUT Pipe configuration table. */

-					

-					char*    PropertyStrings[AOA_STRING_TOTAL_STRINGS]; /**< Android Accessory property strings, sent to identify the accessory when the

-					                                                     *   Android device is switched into Open Accessory mode. */

-				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section

-				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.

-				           */

-				struct

-				{

-					bool IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid

-					                *   after \ref AOA_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the

-					                *   Configured state.

-					                */

-					uint8_t  InterfaceNumber; /**< Interface index of the AOA interface within the attached device. */

-				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section

-						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when

-						  *   the interface is enumerated.

-						  */

-			} USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t;

-

-		/* Enums: */

-			/** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref AOA_Host_ConfigurePipes() function. */

-			enum AOA_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t

-			{

-				AOA_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully. */

-				AOA_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor. */

-				AOA_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound = 2, /**< A compatible Android Open Accessory interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor. */

-				AOA_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed    = 3, /**< One or more pipes for the specified interface could not be configured correctly. */

-			};

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** General management task for a given Android Open Accessory host class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface.

-			 *  This should be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AOAInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Android Open Accessory Class host configuration and state.

-			 */

-			void AOA_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Validates a device descriptor, to check if the device is a valid Android device, and if it is currently in Android Open Accessory mode.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AOAInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an AOA Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     DeviceDescriptor  Pointer a buffer containing the attached device's Device Descriptor.

-			 *  \param[out]    NeedModeSwitch    Pointer to a boolean where the mode switch requirement of the attached device is to be stored.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the attached device is a valid Android device, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			bool AOA_Host_ValidateAccessoryDevice(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,

-                                                  const USB_Descriptor_Device_t* const DeviceDescriptor,

-			                                      bool* const NeedModeSwitch) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);

-

-			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given Android Open Accessory host interface instance using the Configuration

-			 *  Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given Android Open Accessory Host instance's

-			 *  state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it is found within the device. This should be

-			 *  called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while the host state machine is in the Addressed state.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AOAInterfaceInfo      Pointer to a structure containing an AOA Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorSize  Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.

-			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorData  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref AOA_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t AOA_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,

-			                                uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,

-			                                void* ConfigDescriptorData) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);

-									   

-			/** Starts Accessory Mode in the attached Android device. This function will validate the device's Android Open Accessory protocol

-			 *  version, send the configured property strings, and request a switch to Android Open Accessory mode.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AOAInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an AOA Class host configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum, or \ref AOA_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if a logical error occurred..

-			 */

-			uint8_t AOA_Host_StartAccessoryMode(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Sends a given data buffer to the attached USB device, if connected. If a device is not connected when the function is

-			 *  called, the data will be discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the device until either the pipe bank

-			 *  becomes full, or the \ref AOA_Host_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to the device. This allows for

-			 *  multiple bytes to be packed into a single pipe packet, increasing data throughput.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AOAInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a AOA Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     Buffer            Pointer to a buffer containing the data to send to the device.

-			 *  \param[in]     Length            Length of the data to send to the device.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t AOA_Host_SendData(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,

-			                          const uint8_t* const Buffer,

-			                          const uint16_t Length);

-

-			/** Sends a given null-terminated string to the attached USB device, if connected. If a device is not connected when the

-			 *  function is called, the string is discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the device until either the pipe

-			 *  bank becomes full, or the \ref AOA_Host_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to the device. This allows

-			 *  for multiple bytes to be packed into a single pipe packet, increasing data throughput.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AOAInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a AOA Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     String            Pointer to the null terminated string to send to the device.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t AOA_Host_SendString(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,

-			                            const char* const String) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-

-			/** Sends a given byte to the attached USB device, if connected. If a device is not connected when the function is called, the

-			 *  byte is discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the device until either the pipe bank becomes full, or the

-			 *  \ref AOA_Host_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to the host. This allows for multiple bytes to be

-			 *  packed into a single pipe packet, increasing data throughput.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AOAInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a AOA Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     Data              Byte of data to send to the device.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t AOA_Host_SendByte(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,

-			                          const uint8_t Data) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Determines the number of bytes received by the AOA interface from the device, waiting to be read. This indicates the number

-			 *  of bytes in the IN pipe bank only, and thus the number of calls to \ref AOA_Host_ReceiveByte() which are guaranteed to succeed

-			 *  immediately. If multiple bytes are to be received, they should be buffered by the user application, as the pipe bank will not be

-			 *  released back to the USB controller until all bytes are read.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AOAInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a AOA Class host configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Total number of buffered bytes received from the device.

-			 */

-			uint16_t AOA_Host_BytesReceived(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Reads a byte of data from the device. If no data is waiting to be read of if a USB device is not connected, the function

-			 *  returns a negative value. The \ref AOA_Host_BytesReceived() function may be queried in advance to determine how many bytes

-			 *  are currently buffered in the AOA interface's data receive pipe.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AOAInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a AOA Class host configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next received byte from the device, or a negative value if no data received.

-			 */

-			int16_t AOA_Host_ReceiveByte(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Flushes any data waiting to be sent, ensuring that the send buffer is cleared.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AOAInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a AOA Class host configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t AOA_Host_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Creates a standard character stream for the given AOA Device instance so that it can be used with all the regular

-			 *  functions in the standard \c <stdio.h> library that accept a \c FILE stream as a destination (e.g. \c fprintf). The created

-			 *  stream is bidirectional and can be used for both input and output functions.

-			 *

-			 *  Reading data from this stream is non-blocking, i.e. in most instances, complete strings cannot be read in by a single

-			 *  fetch, as the endpoint will not be ready at some point in the transmission, aborting the transfer. However, this may

-			 *  be used when the read data is processed byte-per-bye (via \c getc()) or when the user application will implement its own

-			 *  line buffering.

-			 *

-			 *  \note The created stream can be given as \c stdout if desired to direct the standard output from all \c <stdio.h> functions

-			 *        to the given AOA interface.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function is not available on all microcontroller architectures.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AOAInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a AOA Class configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in,out] Stream            Pointer to a FILE structure where the created stream should be placed.

-			 */

-			void AOA_Host_CreateStream(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,

-			                           FILE* const Stream);

-

-			/** Identical to \ref AOA_Host_CreateStream(), except that reads are blocking until the calling stream function terminates

-			 *  the transfer. While blocking, the USB and AOA service tasks are called repeatedly to maintain USB communications.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function is not available on all microcontroller architectures.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AOAInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a AOA Class configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in,out] Stream            Pointer to a FILE structure where the created stream should be placed.

-			 */

-			void AOA_Host_CreateBlockingStream(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,

-			                                   FILE* const Stream);

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_ANDROIDACCESSORY_HOST_C)

-				#if defined(FDEV_SETUP_STREAM)

-				static int AOA_Host_putchar(char c,

-				                            FILE* Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-				static int AOA_Host_getchar(FILE* Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-				static int AOA_Host_getchar_Blocking(FILE* Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-				#endif

-

-				static uint8_t AOA_Host_GetAccessoryProtocol(uint16_t* const Protocol) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-				static uint8_t AOA_Host_SendPropertyString(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,

-			                                               const uint8_t StringIndex) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-				static uint8_t DCOMP_AOA_Host_NextAndroidAccessoryInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-				                                                            ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-				static uint8_t DCOMP_AOA_Host_NextInterfaceBulkEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-				                                                        ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			#endif

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AudioClassHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AudioClassHost.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 1e869e830..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AudioClassHost.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,223 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_DRIVER

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_HOST_C

-#include "AudioClassHost.h"

-

-uint8_t Audio_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,

-                                  uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,

-                                  void* ConfigDescriptorData)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint          = NULL;

-	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataOUTEndpoint         = NULL;

-	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* AudioControlInterface   = NULL;

-	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* AudioStreamingInterface = NULL;

-

-	memset(&AudioInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(AudioInterfaceInfo->State));

-

-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)

-	  return AUDIO_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;

-

-	while ((AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address  && !(DataINEndpoint)) ||

-	       (AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address && !(DataOUTEndpoint)))

-	{

-		if (!(AudioControlInterface) ||

-		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,

-		                              DCOMP_Audio_Host_NextAudioInterfaceDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)

-		{

-			if (!(AudioControlInterface) ||

-			    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,

-			                              DCOMP_Audio_Host_NextAudioStreamInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)

-			{

-				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,

-				                              DCOMP_Audio_Host_NextAudioControlInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)

-				{

-					return AUDIO_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;

-				}

-

-				AudioControlInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);

-

-				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,

-				                              DCOMP_Audio_Host_NextAudioStreamInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)

-				{

-					return AUDIO_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;

-				}

-			}

-

-			AudioStreamingInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);

-

-			DataINEndpoint  = NULL;

-			DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;

-

-			continue;

-		}

-

-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);

-

-		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)

-		  DataINEndpoint  = EndpointData;

-		else

-		  DataOUTEndpoint = EndpointData;

-	}

-

-	AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Size   = le16_to_cpu(DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize);

-	AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.EndpointAddress = DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress;

-	AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Type   = EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS;

-	AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Banks  = 2;

-	

-	AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Size  = le16_to_cpu(DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointSize);

-	AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.EndpointAddress = DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress;

-	AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Type  = EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS;

-	AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Banks = 2;

-	

-	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe, 1)))

-	  return false;

-	

-	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe, 1)))

-	  return false;

-

-	AudioInterfaceInfo->State.ControlInterfaceNumber    = AudioControlInterface->InterfaceNumber;

-	AudioInterfaceInfo->State.StreamingInterfaceNumber  = AudioStreamingInterface->InterfaceNumber;

-	AudioInterfaceInfo->State.EnabledStreamingAltIndex  = AudioStreamingInterface->AlternateSetting;

-	AudioInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive = true;

-

-	return AUDIO_ENUMERROR_NoError;

-}

-

-static uint8_t DCOMP_Audio_Host_NextAudioControlInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);

-

-	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)

-	{

-		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);

-

-		if ((Interface->Class    == AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass) &&

-		    (Interface->SubClass == AUDIO_CSCP_ControlSubclass) &&

-		    (Interface->Protocol == AUDIO_CSCP_ControlProtocol))

-		{

-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;

-		}

-	}

-

-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;

-}

-

-static uint8_t DCOMP_Audio_Host_NextAudioStreamInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);

-

-	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)

-	{

-		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);

-

-		if ((Interface->Class    == AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass) &&

-		    (Interface->SubClass == AUDIO_CSCP_AudioStreamingSubclass) &&

-		    (Interface->Protocol == AUDIO_CSCP_StreamingProtocol))

-		{

-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;

-		}

-	}

-

-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;

-}

-

-static uint8_t DCOMP_Audio_Host_NextAudioInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);

-

-	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)

-	{

-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* Endpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);

-

-		if ((Endpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS)

-		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;

-	}

-	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)

-	{

-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;

-	}

-

-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;

-}

-

-uint8_t Audio_Host_StartStopStreaming(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,

-			                          const bool EnableStreaming)

-{

-	if (!(AudioInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	return USB_Host_SetInterfaceAltSetting(AudioInterfaceInfo->State.StreamingInterfaceNumber,

-	                                       EnableStreaming ? AudioInterfaceInfo->State.EnabledStreamingAltIndex : 0);

-}

-

-uint8_t Audio_Host_GetSetEndpointProperty(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,

-			                              const uint8_t DataPipeIndex,

-			                              const uint8_t EndpointProperty,

-			                              const uint8_t EndpointControl,

-			                              const uint16_t DataLength,

-			                              void* const Data)

-{

-	if (!(AudioInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	uint8_t RequestType;

-	uint8_t EndpointAddress;

-

-	if (EndpointProperty & 0x80)

-	  RequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT);

-	else

-	  RequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT);

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(DataPipeIndex);

-	EndpointAddress = Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress();

-

-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-		{

-			.bmRequestType = RequestType,

-			.bRequest      = EndpointProperty,

-			.wValue        = ((uint16_t)EndpointControl << 8),

-			.wIndex        = EndpointAddress,

-			.wLength       = DataLength,

-		};

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-

-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Data);

-}

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AudioClassHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AudioClassHost.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 6cb78a621..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AudioClassHost.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,411 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB Audio 1.0 Class driver.

- *

- *  Host mode driver for the library USB Audio 1.0 Class driver.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassAudio

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassAudioHost Audio 1.0 Class Host Mode Driver

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AudioClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the Audio 1.0 USB Class driver.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __AUDIO_CLASS_HOST_H__

-#define __AUDIO_CLASS_HOST_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../USB.h"

-		#include "../Common/AudioClassCommon.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Type Defines: */

-			/** \brief Audio Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.

-			 *

-			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,

-			 *  and passed to each of the Audio class driver functions as the \c AudioInterfaceInfo parameter. This

-			 *  stores each Audio interface's configuration and state information.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				struct

-				{

-					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataINPipe; /**< Data IN Pipe configuration table. */

-					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataOUTPipe; /**< Data OUT Pipe configuration table. */

-				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section

-				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.

-				           */

-				struct

-				{

-					bool IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid

-					                *   after \ref Audio_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the

-					                *   Configured state.

-					                */

-					uint8_t ControlInterfaceNumber; /**< Interface index of the Audio Control interface within the attached device. */

-					uint8_t StreamingInterfaceNumber; /**< Interface index of the Audio Streaming interface within the attached device. */

-

-					uint8_t EnabledStreamingAltIndex; /**< Alternative setting index of the Audio Streaming interface when the stream is enabled. */

-				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section

-						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when

-						  *   the interface is enumerated.

-						  */

-			} USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t;

-

-		/* Enums: */

-			/** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref Audio_Host_ConfigurePipes() function. */

-			enum AUDIO_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t

-			{

-				AUDIO_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully. */

-				AUDIO_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor. */

-				AUDIO_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound = 2, /**< A compatible AUDIO interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor. */

-				AUDIO_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed    = 3, /**< One or more pipes for the specified interface could not be configured correctly. */

-			};

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given Audio host interface instance using the Configuration

-			 *  Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given Audio Host instance's

-			 *  state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it is found within the

-			 *  device. This should be called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while the host state

-			 *  machine is in the Addressed state.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo    Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorSize  Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.

-			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorData  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref AUDIO_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Audio_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,

-			                                  uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,

-			                                  void* ConfigDescriptorData) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);

-

-			/** Starts or stops the audio streaming for the given configured Audio Host interface, allowing for audio samples to be

-			 *  send and/or received.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     EnableStreaming     Boolean true to enable streaming of the specified interface, false to disable

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Audio_Host_StartStopStreaming(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,

-			                                      const bool EnableStreaming) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Gets or sets the specified property of a streaming audio class endpoint that is bound to a pipe in the given

-			 *  class instance.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     DataPipeIndex       Index of the data pipe whose bound endpoint is to be altered.

-			 *  \param[in]     EndpointProperty    Property of the endpoint to get or set, a value from \ref Audio_ClassRequests_t.

-			 *  \param[in]     EndpointControl     Parameter of the endpoint to get or set, a value from \ref Audio_EndpointControls_t.

-			 *  \param[in,out] DataLength          For SET operations, the length of the parameter data to set. For GET operations, the maximum

-			 *                                     length of the retrieved data.

-			 *  \param[in,out] Data                Pointer to a location where the parameter data is stored for SET operations, or where

-			 *                                     the retrieved data is to be stored for GET operations.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Audio_Host_GetSetEndpointProperty(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,

-			                                          const uint8_t DataPipeIndex,

-			                                          const uint8_t EndpointProperty,

-			                                          const uint8_t EndpointControl,

-			                                          const uint16_t DataLength,

-			                                          void* const Data) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(6);

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** General management task for a given Audio host class interface, required for the correct operation of

-			 *  the interface. This should be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task

-			 *  \ref USB_USBTask().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class host configuration and state.

-			 */

-			static inline void Audio_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)

-			                                      ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Audio_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)

-			{

-				(void)AudioInterfaceInfo;

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the given audio interface is ready for a sample to be read from it, and selects the streaming

-			 *  IN pipe ready for reading.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or

-			 *       the call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the given Audio interface has a sample to be read, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Audio_Host_IsSampleReceived(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)

-			                                               ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Audio_Host_IsSampleReceived(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)

-			{

-				if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(AudioInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-				  return false;

-

-				bool SampleReceived = false;

-

-				Pipe_SelectPipe(AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);

-				Pipe_Unfreeze();

-				SampleReceived = Pipe_IsINReceived();

-				Pipe_Freeze();

-

-				return SampleReceived;

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the given audio interface is ready to accept the next sample to be written to it, and selects

-			 *  the streaming OUT pipe ready for writing.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or

-			 *       the call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the given Audio interface is ready to accept the next sample, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Audio_Host_IsReadyForNextSample(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)

-			                                                   ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Audio_Host_IsReadyForNextSample(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)

-			{

-				if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(AudioInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-				  return false;

-

-				Pipe_SelectPipe(AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);

-				return Pipe_IsOUTReady();

-			}

-

-			/** Reads the next 8-bit audio sample from the current audio interface.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This should be preceded immediately by a call to the \ref Audio_Host_IsSampleReceived() function to ensure

-			 *       that the correct pipe is selected and ready for data.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return  Signed 8-bit audio sample from the audio interface.

-			 */

-			static inline int8_t Audio_Host_ReadSample8(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)

-			                                            ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline int8_t Audio_Host_ReadSample8(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)

-			{

-				int8_t Sample;

-

-				(void)AudioInterfaceInfo;

-

-				Sample = Pipe_Read_8();

-

-				if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))

-				{

-					Pipe_Unfreeze();

-					Pipe_ClearIN();

-					Pipe_Freeze();

-				}

-

-				return Sample;

-			}

-

-			/** Reads the next 16-bit audio sample from the current audio interface.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This should be preceded immediately by a call to the \ref Audio_Host_IsSampleReceived() function to ensure

-			 *       that the correct pipe is selected and ready for data.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return  Signed 16-bit audio sample from the audio interface.

-			 */

-			static inline int16_t Audio_Host_ReadSample16(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)

-			                                              ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline int16_t Audio_Host_ReadSample16(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)

-			{

-				int16_t Sample;

-

-				(void)AudioInterfaceInfo;

-

-				Sample = (int16_t)Pipe_Read_16_LE();

-

-				if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))

-				{

-					Pipe_Unfreeze();

-					Pipe_ClearIN();

-					Pipe_Freeze();

-				}

-

-				return Sample;

-			}

-

-			/** Reads the next 24-bit audio sample from the current audio interface.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This should be preceded immediately by a call to the \ref Audio_Host_IsSampleReceived() function to ensure

-			 *       that the correct pipe is selected and ready for data.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Signed 24-bit audio sample from the audio interface.

-			 */

-			static inline int32_t Audio_Host_ReadSample24(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)

-			                                              ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline int32_t Audio_Host_ReadSample24(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)

-			{

-				int32_t Sample;

-

-				(void)AudioInterfaceInfo;

-

-				Sample = (((uint32_t)Pipe_Read_8() << 16) | Pipe_Read_16_LE());

-

-				if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))

-				{

-					Pipe_Unfreeze();

-					Pipe_ClearIN();

-					Pipe_Freeze();

-				}

-

-				return Sample;

-			}

-

-			/** Writes the next 8-bit audio sample to the current audio interface.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This should be preceded immediately by a call to the \ref Audio_Host_IsReadyForNextSample() function to

-			 *       ensure that the correct pipe is selected and ready for data.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     Sample              Signed 8-bit audio sample.

-			 */

-			static inline void Audio_Host_WriteSample8(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,

-			                                           const int8_t Sample) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Audio_Host_WriteSample8(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,

-			                                           const int8_t Sample)

-			{

-				(void)AudioInterfaceInfo;

-

-				Pipe_Write_8(Sample);

-

-				if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-				{

-					Pipe_Unfreeze();

-					Pipe_ClearOUT();

-					Pipe_WaitUntilReady();

-					Pipe_Freeze();

-				}

-			}

-

-			/** Writes the next 16-bit audio sample to the current audio interface.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This should be preceded immediately by a call to the \ref Audio_Host_IsReadyForNextSample() function to

-			 *       ensure that the correct pipe is selected and ready for data.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     Sample              Signed 16-bit audio sample.

-			 */

-			static inline void Audio_Host_WriteSample16(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,

-			                                            const int16_t Sample) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Audio_Host_WriteSample16(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,

-			                                            const int16_t Sample)

-			{

-				(void)AudioInterfaceInfo;

-

-				Pipe_Write_16_LE(Sample);

-

-				if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-				{

-					Pipe_Unfreeze();

-					Pipe_ClearOUT();

-					Pipe_WaitUntilReady();

-					Pipe_Freeze();

-				}

-			}

-

-			/** Writes the next 24-bit audio sample to the current audio interface.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This should be preceded immediately by a call to the \ref Audio_Host_IsReadyForNextSample() function to

-			 *       ensure that the correct pipe is selected and ready for data.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     Sample              Signed 24-bit audio sample.

-			 */

-			static inline void Audio_Host_WriteSample24(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,

-			                                            const int32_t Sample) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Audio_Host_WriteSample24(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,

-			                                            const int32_t Sample)

-			{

-				(void)AudioInterfaceInfo;

-

-				Pipe_Write_16_LE(Sample);

-				Pipe_Write_8(Sample >> 16);

-

-				if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-				{

-					Pipe_Unfreeze();

-					Pipe_ClearOUT();

-					Pipe_WaitUntilReady();

-					Pipe_Freeze();

-				}

-			}

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_HOST_C)

-				static uint8_t DCOMP_Audio_Host_NextAudioControlInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)

-				                                                          ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-				static uint8_t DCOMP_Audio_Host_NextAudioStreamInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)

-				                                                         ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-				static uint8_t DCOMP_Audio_Host_NextAudioInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)

-				                                                               ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			#endif

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDCClassHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDCClassHost.c
deleted file mode 100644
index dd48da1d8..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDCClassHost.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,478 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DRIVER

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_HOST_C

-#include "CDCClassHost.h"

-

-uint8_t CDC_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,

-                                uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,

-                                void* ConfigDescriptorData)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint       = NULL;

-	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataOUTEndpoint      = NULL;

-	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  NotificationEndpoint = NULL;

-	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* CDCControlInterface  = NULL;

-

-	memset(&CDCInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(CDCInterfaceInfo->State));

-

-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)

-	  return CDC_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;

-

-	while (!(DataINEndpoint) || !(DataOUTEndpoint) || !(NotificationEndpoint))

-	{

-		if (!(CDCControlInterface) ||

-		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,

-		                              DCOMP_CDC_Host_NextCDCInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)

-		{

-			if (NotificationEndpoint)

-			{

-				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,

-				                              DCOMP_CDC_Host_NextCDCDataInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)

-				{

-					return CDC_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;

-				}

-

-				DataINEndpoint  = NULL;

-				DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;

-			}

-			else

-			{

-				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,

-				                              DCOMP_CDC_Host_NextCDCControlInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)

-				{

-					return CDC_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;

-				}

-

-				CDCControlInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);

-

-				NotificationEndpoint = NULL;

-			}

-

-			continue;

-		}

-

-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);

-

-		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)

-		{

-			if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)

-			  NotificationEndpoint = EndpointData;

-			else

-			  DataINEndpoint = EndpointData;

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			DataOUTEndpoint = EndpointData;

-		}

-	}

-

-	CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Size  = le16_to_cpu(DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize);

-	CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.EndpointAddress = DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress;

-	CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Type  = EP_TYPE_BULK;

-	

-	CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Size = le16_to_cpu(DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointSize);

-	CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.EndpointAddress = DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress;

-	CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Type = EP_TYPE_BULK;

-	

-	CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipe.Size = le16_to_cpu(NotificationEndpoint->EndpointSize);

-	CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipe.EndpointAddress = NotificationEndpoint->EndpointAddress;

-	CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipe.Type = EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT;

-

-	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe, 1)))

-	  return false;

-	

-	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe, 1)))

-	  return false;

-

-	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipe, 1)))

-	  return false;

-

-	CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlInterfaceNumber = CDCControlInterface->InterfaceNumber;

-	CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.HostToDevice = (CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_RTS | CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_DTR);

-	CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost = (CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_DCD  | CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_DSR);

-	CDCInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive = true;

-

-	return CDC_ENUMERROR_NoError;

-}

-

-static uint8_t DCOMP_CDC_Host_NextCDCControlInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);

-

-	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)

-	{

-		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);

-

-		if ((Interface->Class    == CDC_CSCP_CDCClass)    &&

-		    (Interface->SubClass == CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass) &&

-		    (Interface->Protocol == CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol))

-		{

-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;

-		}

-	}

-

-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;

-}

-

-static uint8_t DCOMP_CDC_Host_NextCDCDataInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);

-

-	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)

-	{

-		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);

-

-		if ((Interface->Class    == CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass)   &&

-		    (Interface->SubClass == CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass) &&

-		    (Interface->Protocol == CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol))

-		{

-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;

-		}

-	}

-

-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;

-}

-

-static uint8_t DCOMP_CDC_Host_NextCDCInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);

-

-	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)

-	{

-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* Endpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);

-

-		uint8_t EndpointType = (Endpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);

-

-		if (((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) || (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)) &&

-		    !(Pipe_IsEndpointBound(Endpoint->EndpointAddress)))

-		{

-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;

-		}

-	}

-	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)

-	{

-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;

-	}

-

-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;

-}

-

-void CDC_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-	if (Pipe_IsINReceived())

-	{

-		USB_Request_Header_t Notification;

-		Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&Notification, sizeof(USB_Request_Header_t), NULL);

-

-		if ((Notification.bRequest      == CDC_NOTIF_SerialState) &&

-		    (Notification.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)))

-		{

-			Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost,

-			                    sizeof(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost),

-			                    NULL);

-

-			Pipe_ClearIN();

-

-			EVENT_CDC_Host_ControLineStateChanged(CDCInterfaceInfo);

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			Pipe_ClearIN();

-		}

-	}

-

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	#if !defined(NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH)

-	CDC_Host_Flush(CDCInterfaceInfo);

-	#endif

-}

-

-uint8_t CDC_Host_SetLineEncoding(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-	{

-		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),

-		.bRequest      = CDC_REQ_SetLineEncoding,

-		.wValue        = 0,

-		.wIndex        = CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlInterfaceNumber,

-		.wLength       = sizeof(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding),

-	};

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-

-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(&CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding);

-}

-

-uint8_t CDC_Host_SendControlLineStateChange(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-	{

-		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),

-		.bRequest      = CDC_REQ_SetControlLineState,

-		.wValue        = CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.HostToDevice,

-		.wIndex        = CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlInterfaceNumber,

-		.wLength       = 0,

-	};

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-

-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);

-}

-

-uint8_t CDC_Host_SendBreak(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,

-                           const uint8_t Duration)

-{

-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-	{

-		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),

-		.bRequest      = CDC_REQ_SendBreak,

-		.wValue        = Duration,

-		.wIndex        = CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlInterfaceNumber,

-		.wLength       = 0,

-	};

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-

-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);

-}

-

-uint8_t CDC_Host_SendData(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,

-                          const uint8_t* const Buffer,

-                          const uint16_t Length)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);

-

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-	ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, Length, NULL);

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	return ErrorCode;

-}

-

-uint8_t CDC_Host_SendString(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,

-                            const char* const String)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);

-

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-	ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(String, strlen(String), NULL);

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	return ErrorCode;

-}

-

-uint8_t CDC_Host_SendByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,

-                          const uint8_t Data)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-	if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-	{

-		Pipe_ClearOUT();

-

-		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()) != PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError)

-		  return ErrorCode;

-	}

-

-	Pipe_Write_8(Data);

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;

-}

-

-uint16_t CDC_Host_BytesReceived(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return 0;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-	if (Pipe_IsINReceived())

-	{

-		if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))

-		{

-			Pipe_ClearIN();

-			Pipe_Freeze();

-			return 0;

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			Pipe_Freeze();

-			return Pipe_BytesInPipe();

-		}

-	}

-	else

-	{

-		Pipe_Freeze();

-

-		return 0;

-	}

-}

-

-int16_t CDC_Host_ReceiveByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return -1;

-

-	int16_t ReceivedByte = -1;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-	if (Pipe_IsINReceived())

-	{

-		if (Pipe_BytesInPipe())

-		  ReceivedByte = Pipe_Read_8();

-

-		if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))

-		  Pipe_ClearIN();

-	}

-

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	return ReceivedByte;

-}

-

-uint8_t CDC_Host_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-	if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))

-	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;

-

-	bool BankFull = !(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed());

-

-	Pipe_ClearOUT();

-

-	if (BankFull)

-	{

-		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()) != PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError)

-		  return ErrorCode;

-

-		Pipe_ClearOUT();

-	}

-

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;

-}

-

-#if defined(FDEV_SETUP_STREAM)

-void CDC_Host_CreateStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,

-                           FILE* const Stream)

-{

-	*Stream = (FILE)FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(CDC_Host_putchar, CDC_Host_getchar, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);

-	fdev_set_udata(Stream, CDCInterfaceInfo);

-}

-

-void CDC_Host_CreateBlockingStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,

-                                   FILE* const Stream)

-{

-	*Stream = (FILE)FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(CDC_Host_putchar, CDC_Host_getchar_Blocking, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);

-	fdev_set_udata(Stream, CDCInterfaceInfo);

-}

-

-static int CDC_Host_putchar(char c,

-                            FILE* Stream)

-{

-	return CDC_Host_SendByte((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream), c) ? _FDEV_ERR : 0;

-}

-

-static int CDC_Host_getchar(FILE* Stream)

-{

-	int16_t ReceivedByte = CDC_Host_ReceiveByte((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream));

-

-	if (ReceivedByte < 0)

-	  return _FDEV_EOF;

-

-	return ReceivedByte;

-}

-

-static int CDC_Host_getchar_Blocking(FILE* Stream)

-{

-	int16_t ReceivedByte;

-

-	while ((ReceivedByte = CDC_Host_ReceiveByte((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream))) < 0)

-	{

-		if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)

-		  return _FDEV_EOF;

-

-		CDC_Host_USBTask((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream));

-		USB_USBTask();

-	}

-

-	return ReceivedByte;

-}

-#endif

-

-// cppcheck-suppress unusedFunction

-void CDC_Host_Event_Stub(void)

-{

-

-}

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDCClassHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDCClassHost.h
deleted file mode 100644
index f5faab935..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDCClassHost.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,351 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB CDC Class driver.

- *

- *  Host mode driver for the library USB CDC Class driver.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassCDC

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassCDCHost CDC Class Host Mode Driver

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDCClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the CDC USB Class driver.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __CDC_CLASS_HOST_H__

-#define __CDC_CLASS_HOST_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../USB.h"

-		#include "../Common/CDCClassCommon.h"

-

-		#include <stdio.h>

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Type Defines: */

-			/** \brief CDC Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.

-			 *

-			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,

-			 *  and passed to each of the CDC class driver functions as the \c CDCInterfaceInfo parameter. This

-			 *  stores each CDC interface's configuration and state information.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				struct

-				{

-					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataINPipe; /**< Data IN Pipe configuration table. */

-					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataOUTPipe; /**< Data OUT Pipe configuration table. */

-					USB_Pipe_Table_t NotificationPipe; /**< Notification IN Pipe configuration table. */

-				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section

-				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.

-				           */

-				struct

-				{

-					bool IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid

-					                *   after \ref CDC_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the

-					                *   Configured state.

-					                */

-					uint8_t  ControlInterfaceNumber; /**< Interface index of the CDC-ACM control interface within the attached device. */

-

-					struct

-					{

-						uint16_t HostToDevice; /**< Control line states from the host to device, as a set of \c CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_*

-						                        *   masks - to notify the device of changes to these values, call the

-						                        *   \ref CDC_Host_SendControlLineStateChange() function.

-						                        */

-						uint16_t DeviceToHost; /**< Control line states from the device to host, as a set of \c CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_*

-						                        *   masks. This value is updated each time \ref CDC_Host_USBTask() is called.

-						                        */

-					} ControlLineStates; /**< Current states of the virtual serial port's control lines between the device and host. */

-

-					CDC_LineEncoding_t LineEncoding; /**< Line encoding used in the virtual serial port, for the device's information.

-					                                  *   This is generally only used if the virtual serial port data is to be

-					                                  *   reconstructed on a physical UART. When set by the host application, the

-					                                  *   \ref CDC_Host_SetLineEncoding() function must be called to push the changes

-					                                  *   to the device.

-					                                  */

-				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section

-						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when

-						  *   the interface is enumerated.

-						  */

-			} USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t;

-

-		/* Enums: */

-			/** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref CDC_Host_ConfigurePipes() function. */

-			enum CDC_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t

-			{

-				CDC_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully. */

-				CDC_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor. */

-				CDC_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound = 2, /**< A compatible CDC interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor. */

-				CDC_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed    = 3, /**< One or more pipes for the specified interface could not be configured correctly. */

-			};

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** General management task for a given CDC host class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should

-			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an CDC Class host configuration and state.

-			 */

-			void CDC_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given CDC host interface instance using the Configuration

-			 *  Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given CDC Host instance's

-			 *  state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it is found within the device.

-			 *  This should be called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while the host state machine is in

-			 *  the Addressed state.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo      Pointer to a structure containing an CDC Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorSize  Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.

-			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorData  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref CDC_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t CDC_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,

-			                                uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,

-			                                void* ConfigDescriptorData) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);

-

-			/** Sets the line encoding for the attached device's virtual serial port. This should be called when the \c LineEncoding

-			 *  values of the interface have been changed to push the new settings to the USB device.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t CDC_Host_SetLineEncoding(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Sends a Serial Control Line State Change notification to the device. This should be called when the virtual serial

-			 *  control lines (DTR, RTS, etc.) have changed states. Line states persist until they are cleared via a second

-			 *  notification. This should be called each time the CDC class driver's \c ControlLineStates.HostToDevice value is updated

-			 *  to push the new states to the USB device.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t CDC_Host_SendControlLineStateChange(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Sends a Send Break request to the device. This is generally used to separate data or to indicate a special condition

-			 *  to the receiving device.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     Duration          Duration of the break, in milliseconds.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t CDC_Host_SendBreak(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,

-			                           const uint8_t Duration) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Sends a given data buffer to the attached USB device, if connected. If a device is not connected when the function is

-			 *  called, the data will be discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the device until either the pipe bank

-			 *  becomes full, or the \ref CDC_Host_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to the device. This allows for

-			 *  multiple bytes to be packed into a single pipe packet, increasing data throughput.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     Buffer            Pointer to a buffer containing the data to send to the device.

-			 *  \param[in]     Length            Length of the data to send to the device.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t CDC_Host_SendData(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,

-			                          const uint8_t* const Buffer,

-			                          const uint16_t Length);

-

-			/** Sends a given null-terminated string to the attached USB device, if connected. If a device is not connected when the

-			 *  function is called, the string is discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the device until either the pipe

-			 *  bank becomes full, or the \ref CDC_Host_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to the device. This allows

-			 *  for multiple bytes to be packed into a single pipe packet, increasing data throughput.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     String            Pointer to the null terminated string to send to the device.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t CDC_Host_SendString(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,

-			                            const char* const String) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-

-			/** Sends a given byte to the attached USB device, if connected. If a device is not connected when the function is called, the

-			 *  byte is discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the device until either the pipe bank becomes full, or the

-			 *  \ref CDC_Host_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to the host. This allows for multiple bytes to be

-			 *  packed into a single pipe packet, increasing data throughput.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     Data              Byte of data to send to the device.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t CDC_Host_SendByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,

-			                          const uint8_t Data) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Determines the number of bytes received by the CDC interface from the device, waiting to be read. This indicates the number

-			 *  of bytes in the IN pipe bank only, and thus the number of calls to \ref CDC_Host_ReceiveByte() which are guaranteed to succeed

-			 *  immediately. If multiple bytes are to be received, they should be buffered by the user application, as the pipe bank will not be

-			 *  released back to the USB controller until all bytes are read.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Total number of buffered bytes received from the device.

-			 */

-			uint16_t CDC_Host_BytesReceived(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Reads a byte of data from the device. If no data is waiting to be read of if a USB device is not connected, the function

-			 *  returns a negative value. The \ref CDC_Host_BytesReceived() function may be queried in advance to determine how many bytes

-			 *  are currently buffered in the CDC interface's data receive pipe.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next received byte from the device, or a negative value if no data received.

-			 */

-			int16_t CDC_Host_ReceiveByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Flushes any data waiting to be sent, ensuring that the send buffer is cleared.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t CDC_Host_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			#if defined(FDEV_SETUP_STREAM) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			/** Creates a standard character stream for the given CDC Device instance so that it can be used with all the regular

-			 *  functions in the standard \c <stdio.h> library that accept a \c FILE stream as a destination (e.g. \c fprintf). The created

-			 *  stream is bidirectional and can be used for both input and output functions.

-			 *

-			 *  Reading data from this stream is non-blocking, i.e. in most instances, complete strings cannot be read in by a single

-			 *  fetch, as the endpoint will not be ready at some point in the transmission, aborting the transfer. However, this may

-			 *  be used when the read data is processed byte-per-bye (via \c getc()) or when the user application will implement its own

-			 *  line buffering.

-			 *

-			 *  \note The created stream can be given as \c stdout if desired to direct the standard output from all \c <stdio.h> functions

-			 *        to the given CDC interface.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function is not available on all microcontroller architectures.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in,out] Stream            Pointer to a FILE structure where the created stream should be placed.

-			 */

-			void CDC_Host_CreateStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,

-			                           FILE* const Stream);

-

-			/** Identical to \ref CDC_Host_CreateStream(), except that reads are blocking until the calling stream function terminates

-			 *  the transfer. While blocking, the USB and CDC service tasks are called repeatedly to maintain USB communications.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function is not available on all microcontroller architectures.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in,out] Stream            Pointer to a FILE structure where the created stream should be placed.

-			 */

-			void CDC_Host_CreateBlockingStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,

-			                                   FILE* const Stream);

-			#endif

-			

-			/** CDC class driver event for a control line state change on a CDC host interface. This event fires each time the device notifies

-			 *  the host of a control line state change (containing the virtual serial control line states, such as DCD) and may be hooked in the

-			 *  user program by declaring a handler function with the same name and parameters listed here. The new control line states

-			 *  are available in the \c ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost value inside the CDC host interface structure passed as a parameter, set as

-			 *  a mask of \c CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_* masks.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state.

-			 */

-			void EVENT_CDC_Host_ControLineStateChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_HOST_C)

-				#if defined(FDEV_SETUP_STREAM)

-				static int CDC_Host_putchar(char c,

-				                            FILE* Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-				static int CDC_Host_getchar(FILE* Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-				static int CDC_Host_getchar_Blocking(FILE* Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-				#endif

-

-				void CDC_Host_Event_Stub(void) ATTR_CONST;

-

-				void EVENT_CDC_Host_ControLineStateChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)

-				                                           ATTR_WEAK ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALIAS(CDC_Host_Event_Stub);

-

-				static uint8_t DCOMP_CDC_Host_NextCDCControlInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-				                                                      ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-				static uint8_t DCOMP_CDC_Host_NextCDCDataInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-				                                                   ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-				static uint8_t DCOMP_CDC_Host_NextCDCInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-				                                                       ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			#endif

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDClassHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDClassHost.c
deleted file mode 100644
index ae2395bc7..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDClassHost.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,396 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_HID_DRIVER

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_HID_HOST_C

-#include "HIDClassHost.h"

-

-uint8_t HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,

-                                uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,

-                                void* ConfigDescriptorData)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint  = NULL;

-	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;

-	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* HIDInterface    = NULL;

-	USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t*   HIDDescriptor   = NULL;

-

-	memset(&HIDInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(HIDInterfaceInfo->State));

-

-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)

-	  return HID_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;

-

-	while (!(DataINEndpoint) || !(DataOUTEndpoint))

-	{

-		if (!(HIDInterface) ||

-		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,

-		                              DCOMP_HID_Host_NextHIDInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)

-		{

-			if (DataINEndpoint || DataOUTEndpoint)

-			  break;

-

-			do

-			{

-				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,

-				                              DCOMP_HID_Host_NextHIDInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)

-				{

-					return HID_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;

-				}

-

-				HIDInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);

-			} while (HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDInterfaceProtocol &&

-					 (HIDInterface->Protocol != HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDInterfaceProtocol));

-

-			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,

-			                              DCOMP_HID_Host_NextHIDDescriptor) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)

-			{

-				return HID_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;

-			}

-

-			HIDDescriptor = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t);

-

-			DataINEndpoint  = NULL;

-			DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;

-

-			continue;

-		}

-

-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);

-

-		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)

-		  DataINEndpoint  = EndpointData;

-		else

-		  DataOUTEndpoint = EndpointData;

-	}

-

-	HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Size  = le16_to_cpu(DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize);

-	HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.EndpointAddress = DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress;

-	HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Type  = EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT;

-	

-	HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Size = le16_to_cpu(DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointSize);

-	HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.EndpointAddress = DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress;

-	HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Type = EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT;

-	

-	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe, 1)))

-	  return false;

-	

-	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe, 1)))

-	  return false;

-

-	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber      = HIDInterface->InterfaceNumber;

-	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.HIDReportSize        = LE16_TO_CPU(HIDDescriptor->HIDReportLength);

-	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.SupportsBootProtocol = (HIDInterface->SubClass != HID_CSCP_NonBootProtocol);

-	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.LargestReportSize    = 8;

-	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive             = true;

-

-	return HID_ENUMERROR_NoError;

-}

-

-static uint8_t DCOMP_HID_Host_NextHIDInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);

-

-	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)

-	{

-		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);

-

-		if (Interface->Class == HID_CSCP_HIDClass)

-		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;

-	}

-

-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;

-}

-

-static uint8_t DCOMP_HID_Host_NextHIDDescriptor(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);

-

-	if (Header->Type == HID_DTYPE_HID)

-	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;

-	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)

-	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;

-	else

-	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;

-}

-

-static uint8_t DCOMP_HID_Host_NextHIDInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);

-

-	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)

-	{

-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* Endpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);

-

-		if (!(Pipe_IsEndpointBound(Endpoint->EndpointAddress)))

-		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;

-	}

-	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)

-	{

-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;

-	}

-

-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;

-}

-

-#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)

-uint8_t HID_Host_ReceiveReportByID(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,

-                                   const uint8_t ReportID,

-                                   void* Buffer)

-{

-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-	{

-		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),

-		.bRequest      = HID_REQ_SetReport,

-		.wValue        = ((HID_REPORT_ITEM_In + 1) << 8) | ReportID,

-		.wIndex        = HIDInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,

-		.wLength       = USB_GetHIDReportSize(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDParserData, ReportID, HID_REPORT_ITEM_In),

-	};

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-

-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Buffer);

-}

-#endif

-

-uint8_t HID_Host_ReceiveReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,

-                               void* Buffer)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-	uint16_t ReportSize;

-	uint8_t* BufferPos = Buffer;

-

-#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)

-	if (!(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.UsingBootProtocol))

-	{

-		uint8_t ReportID = 0;

-

-		if (HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDParserData->UsingReportIDs)

-		{

-			ReportID = Pipe_Read_8();

-			*(BufferPos++) = ReportID;

-		}

-

-		ReportSize = USB_GetHIDReportSize(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDParserData, ReportID, HID_REPORT_ITEM_In);

-	}

-	else

-#endif

-	{

-		ReportSize = Pipe_BytesInPipe();

-	}

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(BufferPos, ReportSize, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	Pipe_ClearIN();

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-uint8_t HID_Host_SendReportByID(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,

-#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)

-                                const uint8_t ReportID,

-#endif

-                                const uint8_t ReportType,

-                                void* Buffer,

-                                const uint16_t ReportSize)

-{

-#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return false;

-

-	if (HIDInterfaceInfo->State.DeviceUsesOUTPipe && (ReportType == HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out))

-	{

-		uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-		Pipe_SelectPipe(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);

-		Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-		if (ReportID)

-		  Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&ReportID, sizeof(ReportID), NULL);

-

-		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, ReportSize, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-		  return ErrorCode;

-

-		Pipe_ClearOUT();

-		Pipe_Freeze();

-

-		return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-	}

-	else

-#endif

-	{

-		USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-		{

-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),

-			.bRequest      = HID_REQ_SetReport,

-#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)

-			.wValue        = ((ReportType + 1) << 8) | ReportID,

-#else

-			.wValue        = ((ReportType + 1) << 8),

-#endif

-			.wIndex        = HIDInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,

-			.wLength       = ReportSize,

-		};

-

-		Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-

-		return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Buffer);

-	}

-}

-

-bool HID_Host_IsReportReceived(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return false;

-

-	bool ReportReceived;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-	ReportReceived = Pipe_IsINReceived();

-

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	return ReportReceived;

-}

-

-uint8_t HID_Host_SetBootProtocol(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	if (!(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.SupportsBootProtocol))

-	  return HID_ERROR_LOGICAL;

-

-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-		{

-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),

-			.bRequest      = HID_REQ_SetProtocol,

-			.wValue        = 0,

-			.wIndex        = HIDInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,

-			.wLength       = 0,

-		};

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.LargestReportSize = 8;

-	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.UsingBootProtocol = true;

-

-	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;

-}

-

-uint8_t HID_Host_SetIdlePeriod(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,

-                               const uint16_t MS)

-{

-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-		{

-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),

-			.bRequest      = HID_REQ_SetIdle,

-			.wValue        = ((MS << 6) & 0xFF00),

-			.wIndex        = HIDInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,

-			.wLength       = 0,

-		};

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-

-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);

-}

-

-#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)

-uint8_t HID_Host_SetReportProtocol(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	uint8_t HIDReportData[HIDInterfaceInfo->State.HIDReportSize];

-

-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-		{

-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE),

-			.bRequest      = REQ_GetDescriptor,

-			.wValue        = (HID_DTYPE_Report << 8),

-			.wIndex        = HIDInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,

-			.wLength       = HIDInterfaceInfo->State.HIDReportSize,

-		};

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(HIDReportData)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	if (HIDInterfaceInfo->State.UsingBootProtocol)

-	{

-		USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-			{

-				.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),

-				.bRequest      = HID_REQ_SetProtocol,

-				.wValue        = 1,

-				.wIndex        = HIDInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,

-				.wLength       = 0,

-			};

-

-		if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-		  return ErrorCode;

-

-		HIDInterfaceInfo->State.UsingBootProtocol = false;

-	}

-

-	if (HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDParserData == NULL)

-	  return HID_ERROR_LOGICAL;

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = USB_ProcessHIDReport(HIDReportData, HIDInterfaceInfo->State.HIDReportSize,

-	                                      HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDParserData)) != HID_PARSE_Successful)

-	{

-		return HID_ERROR_LOGICAL | ErrorCode;

-	}

-

-	uint16_t LargestReportSizeBits = HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDParserData->LargestReportSizeBits;

-	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.LargestReportSize = (LargestReportSizeBits >> 3) + ((LargestReportSizeBits & 0x07) != 0);

-

-	return 0;

-}

-#endif

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDClassHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDClassHost.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 5d617b92f..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDClassHost.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,313 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB HID Class driver.

- *

- *  Host mode driver for the library USB HID Class driver.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassHID

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassHIDHost HID Class Host Mode Driver

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the HID USB Class driver.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __HID_CLASS_HOST_H__

-#define __HID_CLASS_HOST_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../USB.h"

-		#include "../Common/HIDClassCommon.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_HID_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Error code for some HID Host functions, indicating a logical (and not hardware) error. */

-			#define HID_ERROR_LOGICAL              0x80

-

-		/* Type Defines: */

-			/** \brief HID Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.

-			 *

-			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,

-			 *  and passed to each of the HID class driver functions as the \c HIDInterfaceInfo parameter. This

-			 *  stores each HID interface's configuration and state information.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				struct

-				{

-					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataINPipe; /**< Data IN Pipe configuration table. */

-					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataOUTPipe; /**< Data OUT Pipe configuration table. */

-

-					uint8_t  HIDInterfaceProtocol; /**< HID interface protocol value to match against if a specific

-					                                *   boot subclass protocol is required, a protocol value from the

-					                                *   \ref HID_Descriptor_ClassSubclassProtocol_t enum.

-					                                */

-					#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)

-					HID_ReportInfo_t* HIDParserData; /**< HID parser data to store the parsed HID report data, when boot protocol

-					                                  *   is not used.

-													  *

-					                                  *  \note When the \c HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY compile time token is defined,

-					                                  *        this method is unavailable.

-					                                  */

-					#endif

-				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section

-				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.

-				           */

-				struct

-				{

-					bool IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid

-					                *   after \ref HID_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the

-					                *   Configured state.

-					                */

-					uint8_t InterfaceNumber; /**< Interface index of the HID interface within the attached device. */

-

-					bool SupportsBootProtocol; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance supports the HID Boot

-					                            *   Protocol when enabled via \ref HID_Host_SetBootProtocol().

-					                            */

-					bool DeviceUsesOUTPipe; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance uses a separate OUT data pipe for

-					                         *   OUT reports, or if OUT reports are sent via the control pipe instead.

-					                         */

-					bool UsingBootProtocol; /**< Indicates that the interface is currently initialized in Boot Protocol mode */

-					uint16_t HIDReportSize; /**< Size in bytes of the HID report descriptor in the device. */

-

-					uint8_t LargestReportSize; /**< Largest report the device will send, in bytes. */

-				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section

-						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when

-						  *   the interface is enumerated.

-						  */

-			} USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t;

-

-		/* Enums: */

-			/** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref HID_Host_ConfigurePipes() function. */

-			enum HID_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t

-			{

-				HID_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully. */

-				HID_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor. */

-				HID_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound = 2, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor. */

-				HID_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed    = 3, /**< One or more pipes for the specified interface could not be configured correctly. */

-			};

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given HID host interface instance using the Configuration

-			 *  Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given HID Host instance's

-			 *  state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it is found within the

-			 *  device. This should be called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while the host state

-			 *  machine is in the Addressed state.

-			 *

-			 *  \attention Once the device pipes are configured, the HID device's reporting protocol <b>must</b> be set via a call

-			 *             to either the \ref HID_Host_SetBootProtocol() or \ref HID_Host_SetReportProtocol() function.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo      Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorSize  Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.

-			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorData  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref HID_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,

-			                                uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,

-			                                void* ConfigDescriptorData) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);

-

-

-			/** Receives a HID IN report from the attached HID device, when a report has been received on the HID IN Data pipe.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \attention The destination buffer should be large enough to accommodate the largest report that the attached device

-			 *             can generate.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     Buffer            Buffer to store the received report into.

-			 *

-			 *  \return An error code from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t HID_Host_ReceiveReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,

-			                               void* Buffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-

-			#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)

-			/** Receives a HID IN report from the attached device, by the report ID.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \note When the \c HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY compile time token is defined, this method is unavailable.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     ReportID          Report ID of the received report if ControlRequest is false, set by the to the Report ID to fetch.

-			 *  \param[in]     Buffer            Buffer to store the received report into.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t HID_Host_ReceiveReportByID(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,

-			                                   const uint8_t ReportID,

-			                                   void* Buffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);

-			#endif

-

-			/** Sends an OUT or FEATURE report to the currently attached HID device, using the device's OUT pipe if available,

-			 *  or the device's Control pipe if not.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \note When the \c HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY compile time token is defined, the ReportID parameter is removed

-			 *        from the parameter list of this function.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     ReportID          Report ID of the report to send to the device, or 0 if the device does not use report IDs.

-			 *  \param[in]     ReportType        Type of report to issue to the device, either \ref HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out or \ref HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature.

-			 *  \param[in]     Buffer            Buffer containing the report to send to the attached device.

-			 *  \param[in]     ReportSize        Report size in bytes to send to the attached device.

-			 *

-			 *  \return An error code from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum if the DeviceUsesOUTPipe flag is set in

-			 *          the interface's state structure, a value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum otherwise.

-			 */

-			uint8_t HID_Host_SendReportByID(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,

-			#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)

-			                                const uint8_t ReportID,

-			#endif

-			                                const uint8_t ReportType,

-			                                void* Buffer,

-			                                const uint16_t ReportSize) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)

-			#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)

-			                                ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(4);

-			#else

-			                                ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);

-			#endif

-

-			/** Determines if a HID IN report has been received from the attached device on the data IN pipe.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if a report has been received, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			bool HID_Host_IsReportReceived(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Switches the attached HID device's reporting protocol over to the Boot Report protocol mode, on supported devices.

-			 *

-			 *  \note When the \c HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY compile time token is defined, this method must still be called

-			 *        to explicitly place the attached device into boot protocol mode before use.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return \ref HID_ERROR_LOGICAL if the device does not support Boot Protocol mode, a value from the

-			 *          \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum otherwise.

-			 */

-			uint8_t HID_Host_SetBootProtocol(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Sets the idle period for the attached HID device to the specified interval. The HID idle period determines the rate

-			 *  at which the device should send a report, when no state changes have occurred; i.e. on HID keyboards, this sets the

-			 *  hardware key repeat interval.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     MS                Idle period as a multiple of four milliseconds, zero to disable hardware repeats

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t HID_Host_SetIdlePeriod(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,

-			                               const uint16_t MS) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)

-			/** Switches the attached HID device's reporting protocol over to the standard Report protocol mode. This also retrieves

-			 *  and parses the device's HID report descriptor, so that the size of each report can be determined in advance.

-			 *

-			 *  \attention Whether this function is used or not, the \ref CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem() callback from the HID

-			 *             Report Parser this function references <b>must</b> be implemented in the user code.

-			 *

-			 *  \note When the \c HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY compile time token is defined, this method is unavailable.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum if an error occurs while retrieving the HID

-			 *          Report descriptor or the setting of the Report protocol, \ref HID_ERROR_LOGICAL if the HID interface does

-			 *          not have a valid \ref HID_ReportInfo_t structure set in its configuration, a mask of \ref HID_ERROR_LOGICAL

-			 *          and a value from the \ref HID_Parse_ErrorCodes_t otherwise.

-			 */

-			uint8_t HID_Host_SetReportProtocol(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			#endif

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** General management task for a given Human Interface Class host class interface, required for the correct operation of

-			 *  the interface. This should be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task

-			 *  \ref USB_USBTask().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state.

-			 */

-			static inline void HID_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			static inline void HID_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo)

-			{

-				(void)HIDInterfaceInfo;

-			}

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_HID_HOST_C)

-				static uint8_t DCOMP_HID_Host_NextHIDInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-				                                               ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-				static uint8_t DCOMP_HID_Host_NextHIDDescriptor(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-				                                                ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-				static uint8_t DCOMP_HID_Host_NextHIDInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-				                                                       ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			#endif

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDIClassHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDIClassHost.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 29a6696db..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDIClassHost.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,231 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_DRIVER

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_HOST_C

-#include "MIDIClassHost.h"

-

-uint8_t MIDI_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo,

-                                 uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,

-                                 void* ConfigDescriptorData)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint  = NULL;

-	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;

-	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* MIDIInterface   = NULL;

-

-	memset(&MIDIInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(MIDIInterfaceInfo->State));

-

-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)

-	  return MIDI_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;

-

-	while (!(DataINEndpoint) || !(DataOUTEndpoint))

-	{

-		if (!(MIDIInterface) ||

-		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,

-		                              DCOMP_MIDI_Host_NextMIDIStreamingDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)

-		{

-			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,

-			                              DCOMP_MIDI_Host_NextMIDIStreamingInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)

-			{

-				return MIDI_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;

-			}

-

-			MIDIInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);

-

-			DataINEndpoint  = NULL;

-			DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;

-

-			continue;

-		}

-

-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);

-

-		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)

-		  DataINEndpoint  = EndpointData;

-		else

-		  DataOUTEndpoint = EndpointData;

-	}

-

-	MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Size  = le16_to_cpu(DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize);

-	MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.EndpointAddress = DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress;

-	MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Type  = EP_TYPE_BULK;

-	

-	MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Size = le16_to_cpu(DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointSize);

-	MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.EndpointAddress = DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress;

-	MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Type = EP_TYPE_BULK;

-	

-	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe, 1)))

-	  return false;

-	

-	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe, 1)))

-	  return false;	

-

-	MIDIInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber = MIDIInterface->InterfaceNumber;

-	MIDIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive = true;

-

-	return MIDI_ENUMERROR_NoError;

-}

-

-static uint8_t DCOMP_MIDI_Host_NextMIDIStreamingInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);

-

-	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)

-	{

-		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);

-

-		if ((Interface->Class    == AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass)            &&

-		    (Interface->SubClass == AUDIO_CSCP_MIDIStreamingSubclass) &&

-		    (Interface->Protocol == AUDIO_CSCP_StreamingProtocol))

-		{

-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;

-		}

-	}

-

-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;

-}

-

-static uint8_t DCOMP_MIDI_Host_NextMIDIStreamingDataEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);

-

-	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)

-	{

-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* Endpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);

-

-		uint8_t EndpointType = (Endpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);

-

-		if ((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) && !(Pipe_IsEndpointBound(Endpoint->EndpointAddress)))

-		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;

-	}

-	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)

-	{

-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;

-	}

-

-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;

-}

-

-void MIDI_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MIDIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return;

-

-	#if !defined(NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH)

-	MIDI_Host_Flush(MIDIInterfaceInfo);

-	#endif

-}

-

-uint8_t MIDI_Host_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MIDIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-	

-	if (Pipe_BytesInPipe())

-	{

-		Pipe_ClearOUT();

-

-		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()) != PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError)

-		{

-			Pipe_Freeze();

-			return ErrorCode;

-		}

-	}

-

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;

-}

-

-uint8_t MIDI_Host_SendEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo,

-                                  MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MIDIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-	

-	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Event, sizeof(MIDI_EventPacket_t), NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-	{

-		Pipe_Freeze();

-		return ErrorCode;

-	}

-

-	if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-	  Pipe_ClearOUT();

-

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-bool MIDI_Host_ReceiveEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo,

-                                  MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MIDIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;

-	  

-	bool DataReady = false;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-	if (Pipe_IsINReceived())

-	{

-		if (Pipe_BytesInPipe())

-		{

-			Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(Event, sizeof(MIDI_EventPacket_t), NULL);

-			DataReady = true;

-		}

-

-		if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))

-		  Pipe_ClearIN();

-	}

-	

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-	

-	return DataReady;

-}

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDIClassHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDIClassHost.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 15b9e4fc1..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDIClassHost.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,190 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB MIDI Class driver.

- *

- *  Host mode driver for the library USB MIDI Class driver.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassMIDI

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassMIDIHost MIDI Class Host Mode Driver

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDIClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the MIDI USB Class driver.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __MIDI_CLASS_HOST_H__

-#define __MIDI_CLASS_HOST_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../USB.h"

-		#include "../Common/MIDIClassCommon.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Type Defines: */

-			/** \brief MIDI Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.

-			 *

-			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,

-			 *  and passed to each of the MIDI class driver functions as the \c MIDIInterfaceInfo parameter. This

-			 *  stores each MIDI interface's configuration and state information.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				struct

-				{

-					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataINPipe; /**< Data IN Pipe configuration table. */

-					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataOUTPipe; /**< Data OUT Pipe configuration table. */

-				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section

-				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.

-				           */

-				struct

-				{

-					bool     IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid

-					                    *   after \ref MIDI_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the

-					                    *   Configured state.

-					                    */

-					uint8_t  InterfaceNumber; /**< Interface index of the MIDI interface within the attached device. */

-				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section

-						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when

-						  *   the interface is enumerated.

-						  */

-			} USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t;

-

-		/* Enums: */

-			/** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref MIDI_Host_ConfigurePipes() function. */

-			enum MIDI_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t

-			{

-				MIDI_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully. */

-				MIDI_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor. */

-				MIDI_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound = 2, /**< A compatible MIDI interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor. */

-				MIDI_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed    = 3, /**< One or more pipes for the specified interface could not be configured correctly. */

-			};

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given MIDI host interface instance using the Configuration

-			 *  Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given MIDI Host instance's

-			 *  state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it is found within the device.

-			 *  This should be called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while the host state machine is in

-			 *  the Addressed state.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo     Pointer to a structure containing an MIDI Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorSize  Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.

-			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorData  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref MIDI_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t MIDI_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo,

-			                                 uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,

-			                                 void* ConfigDescriptorData) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);

-

-			/** General management task for a given MIDI host class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should

-			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an MIDI Class host configuration and state.

-			 */

-			void MIDI_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Sends a MIDI event packet to the device. If no device is connected, the event packet is discarded.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     Event              Pointer to a populated USB_MIDI_EventPacket_t structure containing the MIDI event to send.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t MIDI_Host_SendEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo,

-			                                  MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-

-			/** Flushes the MIDI send buffer, sending any queued MIDI events to the device. This should be called to override the

-			 *  \ref MIDI_Host_SendEventPacket() function's packing behavior, to flush queued events. Events are queued into the

-			 *  pipe bank until either the pipe bank is full, or \ref MIDI_Host_Flush() is called. This allows for multiple MIDI

-			 *  events to be packed into a single pipe packet, increasing data throughput.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			 uint8_t MIDI_Host_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Receives a MIDI event packet from the device.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[out]    Event              Pointer to a USB_MIDI_EventPacket_t structure where the received MIDI event is to be placed.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if a MIDI event packet was received, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			bool MIDI_Host_ReceiveEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo,

-			                                  MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_HOST_C)

-				static uint8_t DCOMP_MIDI_Host_NextMIDIStreamingInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-				                                                          ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-				static uint8_t DCOMP_MIDI_Host_NextMIDIStreamingDataEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-				                                                             ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			#endif

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorageClassHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorageClassHost.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 91e2ef022..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorageClassHost.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,579 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_MS_DRIVER

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORAGE_HOST_C

-#include "MassStorageClassHost.h"

-

-uint8_t MS_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,

-                               uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,

-							   void* ConfigDescriptorData)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint       = NULL;

-	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataOUTEndpoint      = NULL;

-	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* MassStorageInterface = NULL;

-

-	memset(&MSInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(MSInterfaceInfo->State));

-

-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)

-	  return MS_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;

-

-	while (!(DataINEndpoint) || !(DataOUTEndpoint))

-	{

-		if (!(MassStorageInterface) ||

-		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,

-		                              DCOMP_MS_Host_NextMSInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)

-		{

-			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,

-			                              DCOMP_MS_Host_NextMSInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)

-			{

-				return MS_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;

-			}

-

-			MassStorageInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);

-

-			DataINEndpoint  = NULL;

-			DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;

-

-			continue;

-		}

-

-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);

-

-		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)

-		  DataINEndpoint  = EndpointData;

-		else

-		  DataOUTEndpoint = EndpointData;

-	}

-

-	MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Size  = le16_to_cpu(DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize);

-	MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.EndpointAddress = DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress;

-	MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Type  = EP_TYPE_BULK;

-	

-	MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Size = le16_to_cpu(DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointSize);

-	MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.EndpointAddress = DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress;

-	MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Type = EP_TYPE_BULK;

-	

-	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe, 1)))

-	  return false;

-	

-	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe, 1)))

-	  return false;

-

-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber = MassStorageInterface->InterfaceNumber;

-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive = true;

-

-	return MS_ENUMERROR_NoError;

-}

-

-static uint8_t DCOMP_MS_Host_NextMSInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);

-

-	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)

-	{

-		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);

-

-		if ((Interface->Class    == MS_CSCP_MassStorageClass)        &&

-		    (Interface->SubClass == MS_CSCP_SCSITransparentSubclass) &&

-		    (Interface->Protocol == MS_CSCP_BulkOnlyTransportProtocol))

-		{

-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;

-		}

-	}

-

-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;

-}

-

-static uint8_t DCOMP_MS_Host_NextMSInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);

-

-	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)

-	{

-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* Endpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);

-

-		uint8_t EndpointType = (Endpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);

-

-		if ((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) && (!(Pipe_IsEndpointBound(Endpoint->EndpointAddress))))

-		{

-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;

-		}

-	}

-	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)

-	{

-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;

-	}

-

-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;

-}

-

-static uint8_t MS_Host_SendCommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,

-                                   MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t* const SCSICommandBlock,

-                                   const void* const BufferPtr)

-{

-	uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-

-	if (++MSInterfaceInfo->State.TransactionTag == 0xFFFFFFFF)

-	  MSInterfaceInfo->State.TransactionTag = 1;

-

-	SCSICommandBlock->Signature = CPU_TO_LE32(MS_CBW_SIGNATURE);

-	SCSICommandBlock->Tag       = cpu_to_le32(MSInterfaceInfo->State.TransactionTag);

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(SCSICommandBlock, sizeof(MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t),

-	                                      NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-	{

-		return ErrorCode;

-	}

-

-	Pipe_ClearOUT();

-	Pipe_WaitUntilReady();

-

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	if (BufferPtr != NULL)

-	{

-		ErrorCode = MS_Host_SendReceiveData(MSInterfaceInfo, SCSICommandBlock, (void*)BufferPtr);

-

-		if ((ErrorCode != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError) && (ErrorCode != PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled))

-		{

-			Pipe_Freeze();

-			return ErrorCode;

-		}

-	}

-

-	MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSIStatusBlock;

-	return MS_Host_GetReturnedStatus(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSIStatusBlock);

-}

-

-static uint8_t MS_Host_WaitForDataReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	uint16_t TimeoutMSRem        = MS_COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS;

-	uint16_t PreviousFrameNumber = USB_Host_GetFrameNumber();

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-	while (!(Pipe_IsINReceived()))

-	{

-		uint16_t CurrentFrameNumber = USB_Host_GetFrameNumber();

-

-		if (CurrentFrameNumber != PreviousFrameNumber)

-		{

-			PreviousFrameNumber = CurrentFrameNumber;

-

-			if (!(TimeoutMSRem--))

-			  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_Timeout;

-		}

-

-		Pipe_Freeze();

-		Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);

-		Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-		if (Pipe_IsStalled())

-		{

-			USB_Host_ClearEndpointStall(Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress());

-			return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;

-		}

-

-		Pipe_Freeze();

-		Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);

-		Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-		if (Pipe_IsStalled())

-		{

-			USB_Host_ClearEndpointStall(Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress());

-			return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;

-		}

-

-		if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)

-		  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-	};

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-static uint8_t MS_Host_SendReceiveData(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,

-                                       MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t* const SCSICommandBlock,

-                                       void* BufferPtr)

-{

-	uint8_t  ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-	uint16_t BytesRem  = le32_to_cpu(SCSICommandBlock->DataTransferLength);

-

-	if (SCSICommandBlock->Flags & MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_IN)

-	{

-		if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_WaitForDataReceived(MSInterfaceInfo)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-		{

-			Pipe_Freeze();

-			return ErrorCode;

-		}

-

-		Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);

-		Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(BufferPtr, BytesRem, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-		  return ErrorCode;

-

-		Pipe_ClearIN();

-	}

-	else

-	{

-		Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);

-		Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(BufferPtr, BytesRem, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-		  return ErrorCode;

-

-		Pipe_ClearOUT();

-

-		while (!(Pipe_IsOUTReady()))

-		{

-			if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)

-			  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-		}

-	}

-

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	return ErrorCode;

-}

-

-static uint8_t MS_Host_GetReturnedStatus(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,

-                                         MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t* const SCSICommandStatus)

-{

-	uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_WaitForDataReceived(MSInterfaceInfo)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(SCSICommandStatus, sizeof(MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t),

-	                                     NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-	{

-		return ErrorCode;

-	}

-

-	Pipe_ClearIN();

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	if (SCSICommandStatus->Status != MS_SCSI_COMMAND_Pass)

-	  ErrorCode = MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED;

-

-	return ErrorCode;

-}

-

-uint8_t MS_Host_ResetMSInterface(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-		{

-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),

-			.bRequest      = MS_REQ_MassStorageReset,

-			.wValue        = 0,

-			.wIndex        = MSInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,

-			.wLength       = 0,

-		};

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_ClearEndpointStall(Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress())) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_ClearEndpointStall(Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress())) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;

-}

-

-uint8_t MS_Host_GetMaxLUN(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,

-                          uint8_t* const MaxLUNIndex)

-{

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-		{

-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),

-			.bRequest      = MS_REQ_GetMaxLUN,

-			.wValue        = 0,

-			.wIndex        = MSInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,

-			.wLength       = 1,

-		};

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(MaxLUNIndex)) == HOST_SENDCONTROL_SetupStalled)

-	{

-		*MaxLUNIndex = 0;

-		ErrorCode    = HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;

-	}

-

-	return ErrorCode;

-}

-

-uint8_t MS_Host_GetInquiryData(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,

-                               const uint8_t LUNIndex,

-                               SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t* const InquiryData)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)

-		{

-			.DataTransferLength = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t)),

-			.Flags              = MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_IN,

-			.LUN                = LUNIndex,

-			.SCSICommandLength  = 6,

-			.SCSICommandData    =

-				{

-					SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY,

-					0x00,                            // Reserved

-					0x00,                            // Reserved

-					0x00,                            // Reserved

-					sizeof(SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t), // Allocation Length

-					0x00                             // Unused (control)

-				}

-		};

-

-	return MS_Host_SendCommand(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandBlock, InquiryData);

-}

-

-uint8_t MS_Host_TestUnitReady(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,

-                              const uint8_t LUNIndex)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)

-		{

-			.DataTransferLength = CPU_TO_LE32(0),

-			.Flags              = MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_IN,

-			.LUN                = LUNIndex,

-			.SCSICommandLength  = 6,

-			.SCSICommandData    =

-				{

-					SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY,

-					0x00,                   // Reserved

-					0x00,                   // Reserved

-					0x00,                   // Reserved

-					0x00,                   // Reserved

-					0x00                    // Unused (control)

-				}

-		};

-

-	return MS_Host_SendCommand(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandBlock, NULL);

-}

-

-uint8_t MS_Host_ReadDeviceCapacity(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,

-                                   const uint8_t LUNIndex,

-                                   SCSI_Capacity_t* const DeviceCapacity)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)

-		{

-			.DataTransferLength = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(SCSI_Capacity_t)),

-			.Flags              = MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_IN,

-			.LUN                = LUNIndex,

-			.SCSICommandLength  = 10,

-			.SCSICommandData    =

-				{

-					SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10,

-					0x00,                   // Reserved

-					0x00,                   // MSB of Logical block address

-					0x00,

-					0x00,

-					0x00,                   // LSB of Logical block address

-					0x00,                   // Reserved

-					0x00,                   // Reserved

-					0x00,                   // Partial Medium Indicator

-					0x00                    // Unused (control)

-				}

-		};

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_SendCommand(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandBlock, DeviceCapacity)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	DeviceCapacity->Blocks    = BE32_TO_CPU(DeviceCapacity->Blocks);

-	DeviceCapacity->BlockSize = BE32_TO_CPU(DeviceCapacity->BlockSize);

-

-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-uint8_t MS_Host_RequestSense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,

-                             const uint8_t LUNIndex,

-                             SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t* const SenseData)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)

-		{

-			.DataTransferLength = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t)),

-			.Flags              = MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_IN,

-			.LUN                = LUNIndex,

-			.SCSICommandLength  = 6,

-			.SCSICommandData    =

-				{

-					SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE,

-					0x00,                                  // Reserved

-					0x00,                                  // Reserved

-					0x00,                                  // Reserved

-					sizeof(SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t), // Allocation Length

-					0x00                                   // Unused (control)

-				}

-		};

-

-	return MS_Host_SendCommand(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandBlock, SenseData);

-}

-

-uint8_t MS_Host_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,

-                                          const uint8_t LUNIndex,

-                                          const bool PreventRemoval)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)

-		{

-			.DataTransferLength = CPU_TO_LE32(0),

-			.Flags              = MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_OUT,

-			.LUN                = LUNIndex,

-			.SCSICommandLength  = 6,

-			.SCSICommandData    =

-				{

-					SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL,

-					0x00,                   // Reserved

-					0x00,                   // Reserved

-					PreventRemoval,         // Prevent flag

-					0x00,                   // Reserved

-					0x00                    // Unused (control)

-				}

-		};

-

-	return MS_Host_SendCommand(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandBlock, NULL);

-}

-

-uint8_t MS_Host_ReadDeviceBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,

-                                 const uint8_t LUNIndex,

-                                 const uint32_t BlockAddress,

-                                 const uint8_t Blocks,

-                                 const uint16_t BlockSize,

-                                 void* BlockBuffer)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)

-		{

-			.DataTransferLength = cpu_to_le32((uint32_t)Blocks * BlockSize),

-			.Flags              = MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_IN,

-			.LUN                = LUNIndex,

-			.SCSICommandLength  = 10,

-			.SCSICommandData    =

-				{

-					SCSI_CMD_READ_10,

-					0x00,                   // Unused (control bits, all off)

-					(BlockAddress >> 24),   // MSB of Block Address

-					(BlockAddress >> 16),

-					(BlockAddress >> 8),

-					(BlockAddress & 0xFF),  // LSB of Block Address

-					0x00,                   // Reserved

-					0x00,                   // MSB of Total Blocks to Read

-					Blocks,                 // LSB of Total Blocks to Read

-					0x00                    // Unused (control)

-				}

-		};

-

-	return MS_Host_SendCommand(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandBlock, BlockBuffer);

-}

-

-uint8_t MS_Host_WriteDeviceBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,

-                                  const uint8_t LUNIndex,

-                                  const uint32_t BlockAddress,

-                                  const uint8_t Blocks,

-                                  const uint16_t BlockSize,

-                                  const void* BlockBuffer)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)

-		{

-			.DataTransferLength = cpu_to_le32((uint32_t)Blocks * BlockSize),

-			.Flags              = MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_OUT,

-			.LUN                = LUNIndex,

-			.SCSICommandLength  = 10,

-			.SCSICommandData    =

-				{

-					SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10,

-					0x00,                   // Unused (control bits, all off)

-					(BlockAddress >> 24),   // MSB of Block Address

-					(BlockAddress >> 16),

-					(BlockAddress >> 8),

-					(BlockAddress & 0xFF),  // LSB of Block Address

-					0x00,                   // Reserved

-					0x00,                   // MSB of Total Blocks to Write

-					Blocks,                 // LSB of Total Blocks to Write

-					0x00                    // Unused (control)

-				}

-		};

-

-	return MS_Host_SendCommand(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandBlock, BlockBuffer);

-}

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorageClassHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorageClassHost.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 2e7843184..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorageClassHost.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,335 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver.

- *

- *  Host mode driver for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassMS

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassMassStorageHost Mass Storage Class Host Mode Driver

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorageClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the Mass Storage USB Class driver.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __MS_CLASS_HOST_H__

-#define __MS_CLASS_HOST_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../USB.h"

-		#include "../Common/MassStorageClassCommon.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MS_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Error code for some Mass Storage Host functions, indicating a logical (and not hardware) error. */

-			#define MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED              0x80

-

-		/* Type Defines: */

-			/** \brief Mass Storage Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.

-			 *

-			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,

-			 *  and passed to each of the Mass Storage class driver functions as the \c MSInterfaceInfo parameter. This

-			 *  stores each Mass Storage interface's configuration and state information.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				struct

-				{

-					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataINPipe; /**< Data IN Pipe configuration table. */

-					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataOUTPipe; /**< Data OUT Pipe configuration table. */

-				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section

-				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.

-				           */

-				struct

-				{

-					bool     IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid

-					                    *   after \ref MS_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the

-					                    *   Configured state.

-					                    */

-					uint8_t  InterfaceNumber; /**< Interface index of the Mass Storage interface within the attached device. */

-

-					uint32_t TransactionTag; /**< Current transaction tag for data synchronizing of packets. */

-				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section

-						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when

-						  *   the interface is enumerated.

-						  */

-			} USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t;

-

-			/** \brief SCSI Device LUN Capacity Structure.

-			 *

-			 *  SCSI capacity structure, to hold the total capacity of the device in both the number

-			 *  of blocks in the current LUN, and the size of each block. This structure is filled by

-			 *  the device when the \ref MS_Host_ReadDeviceCapacity() function is called.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				uint32_t Blocks; /**< Number of blocks in the addressed LUN of the device. */

-				uint32_t BlockSize; /**< Number of bytes in each block in the addressed LUN. */

-			} SCSI_Capacity_t;

-

-		/* Enums: */

-			/** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref MS_Host_ConfigurePipes() function. */

-			enum MS_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t

-			{

-				MS_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully. */

-				MS_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor. */

-				MS_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound = 2, /**< A compatible Mass Storage interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor. */

-				MS_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed    = 3, /**< One or more pipes for the specified interface could not be configured correctly. */

-			};

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given Mass Storage host interface instance using the

-			 *  Configuration Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given Mass

-			 *  Storage Host instance's state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it

-			 *  is found within the device. This should be called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while

-			 *  the host state machine is in the Addressed state.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo         Pointer to a structure containing an MS Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorSize    Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.

-			 *  \param[in]     DeviceConfigDescriptor  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref MS_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t MS_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,

-			                               uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,

-			                               void* DeviceConfigDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);

-

-			/** Sends a MASS STORAGE RESET control request to the attached device, resetting the Mass Storage Interface

-			 *  and readying it for the next Mass Storage command. This should be called after a failed SCSI request to

-			 *  ensure the attached Mass Storage device is ready to receive the next command.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t MS_Host_ResetMSInterface(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Sends a GET MAX LUN control request to the attached device, retrieving the index of the highest LUN (Logical

-			 *  UNit, a logical drive) in the device. This value can then be used in the other functions of the Mass Storage

-			 *  Host mode Class driver to address a specific LUN within the device.

-			 *

-			 *  \note Some devices do not support this request, and will STALL it when issued. To get around this,

-			 *        on unsupported devices the max LUN index will be reported as zero and no error will be returned

-			 *        if the device STALLs the request.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[out]    MaxLUNIndex      Pointer to a location where the highest LUN index value should be stored.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t MS_Host_GetMaxLUN(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,

-			                          uint8_t* const MaxLUNIndex) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-

-			/** Retrieves the Mass Storage device's inquiry data for the specified LUN, indicating the device characteristics and

-			 *  properties.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     LUNIndex         LUN index within the device the command is being issued to.

-			 *  \param[out]    InquiryData      Location where the read inquiry data should be stored.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum or \ref MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED.

-			 */

-			uint8_t MS_Host_GetInquiryData(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,

-			                               const uint8_t LUNIndex,

-			                               SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t* const InquiryData) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)

-			                               ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);

-

-			/** Sends a TEST UNIT READY command to the device, to determine if it is ready to accept other SCSI commands.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     LUNIndex         LUN index within the device the command is being issued to.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum or \ref MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if not ready.

-			 */

-			uint8_t MS_Host_TestUnitReady(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,

-			                              const uint8_t LUNIndex) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Retrieves the total capacity of the attached USB Mass Storage device, in blocks, and block size.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     LUNIndex         LUN index within the device the command is being issued to.

-			 *  \param[out]    DeviceCapacity   Pointer to the location where the capacity information should be stored.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum or \ref MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if not ready.

-			 */

-			uint8_t MS_Host_ReadDeviceCapacity(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,

-			                                   const uint8_t LUNIndex,

-			                                   SCSI_Capacity_t* const DeviceCapacity) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)

-			                                   ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);

-

-			/** Retrieves the device sense data, indicating the current device state and error codes for the previously

-			 *  issued command.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     LUNIndex         LUN index within the device the command is being issued to.

-			 *  \param[out]    SenseData        Pointer to the location where the sense information should be stored.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum or \ref MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if not ready.

-			 */

-			uint8_t MS_Host_RequestSense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,

-			                             const uint8_t LUNIndex,

-			                             SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t* const SenseData) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)

-			                             ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);

-

-			/** Issues a PREVENT MEDIUM REMOVAL command, to logically (or, depending on the type of device, physically) lock

-			 *  the device from removal so that blocks of data on the medium can be read or altered.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     LUNIndex         LUN index within the device the command is being issued to.

-			 *  \param[in]     PreventRemoval   Boolean \c true if the device should be locked from removal, \c false otherwise.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum or \ref MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if not ready.

-			 */

-			uint8_t MS_Host_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,

-			                                          const uint8_t LUNIndex,

-			                                          const bool PreventRemoval) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Reads blocks of data from the attached Mass Storage device's medium.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     LUNIndex         LUN index within the device the command is being issued to.

-			 *  \param[in]     BlockAddress     Starting block address within the device to read from.

-			 *  \param[in]     Blocks           Total number of blocks to read.

-			 *  \param[in]     BlockSize        Size in bytes of each block within the device.

-			 *  \param[out]    BlockBuffer      Pointer to where the read data from the device should be stored.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum or \ref MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if not ready.

-			 */

-			uint8_t MS_Host_ReadDeviceBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,

-			                                 const uint8_t LUNIndex,

-			                                 const uint32_t BlockAddress,

-			                                 const uint8_t Blocks,

-			                                 const uint16_t BlockSize,

-			                                 void* BlockBuffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(6);

-

-			/** Writes blocks of data to the attached Mass Storage device's medium.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     LUNIndex         LUN index within the device the command is being issued to.

-			 *  \param[in]     BlockAddress     Starting block address within the device to write to.

-			 *  \param[in]     Blocks           Total number of blocks to read.

-			 *  \param[in]     BlockSize        Size in bytes of each block within the device.

-			 *  \param[in]     BlockBuffer      Pointer to where the data to write should be sourced from.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum or \ref MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if not ready.

-			 */

-			uint8_t MS_Host_WriteDeviceBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,

-			                                  const uint8_t LUNIndex,

-			                                  const uint32_t BlockAddress,

-			                                  const uint8_t Blocks,

-			                                  const uint16_t BlockSize,

-			                                  const void* BlockBuffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(6);

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** General management task for a given Mass Storage host class interface, required for the correct operation of

-			 *  the interface. This should be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task

-			 *  \ref USB_USBTask().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Mass Storage Class host configuration and state.

-			 */

-			static inline void MS_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void MS_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)

-			{

-				(void)MSInterfaceInfo;

-			}

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define MS_COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS        10000

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORAGE_HOST_C)

-				static uint8_t MS_Host_SendCommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,

-				                                   MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t* const SCSICommandBlock,

-				                                   const void* const BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-				static uint8_t MS_Host_WaitForDataReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-				static uint8_t MS_Host_SendReceiveData(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,

-				                                       MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t* const SCSICommandBlock,

-				                                       void* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-				static uint8_t MS_Host_GetReturnedStatus(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,

-				                                         MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t* const SCSICommandStatus)

-				                                         ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-

-				static uint8_t DCOMP_MS_Host_NextMSInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-				                                             ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-				static uint8_t DCOMP_MS_Host_NextMSInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-				                                                     ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			#endif

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/PrinterClassHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/PrinterClassHost.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 1ecf19115..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/PrinterClassHost.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,400 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_PRINTER_DRIVER

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_PRINTER_HOST_C

-#include "PrinterClassHost.h"

-

-uint8_t PRNT_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,

-                                 uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,

-							     void* ConfigDescriptorData)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint   = NULL;

-	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataOUTEndpoint  = NULL;

-	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* PrinterInterface = NULL;

-

-	memset(&PRNTInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(PRNTInterfaceInfo->State));

-

-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)

-	  return PRNT_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;

-

-	while (!(DataINEndpoint) || !(DataOUTEndpoint))

-	{

-		if (!(PrinterInterface) ||

-		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,

-		                              DCOMP_PRNT_Host_NextPRNTInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)

-		{

-			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,

-			                              DCOMP_PRNT_Host_NextPRNTInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)

-			{

-				return PRNT_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;

-			}

-

-			PrinterInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);

-

-			DataINEndpoint  = NULL;

-			DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;

-

-			continue;

-		}

-

-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);

-

-		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)

-		  DataINEndpoint  = EndpointData;

-		else

-		  DataOUTEndpoint = EndpointData;

-	}

-

-	PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Size  = le16_to_cpu(DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize);

-	PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.EndpointAddress = DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress;

-	PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Type  = EP_TYPE_BULK;

-	

-	PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Size = le16_to_cpu(DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointSize);

-	PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.EndpointAddress = DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress;

-	PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Type = EP_TYPE_BULK;

-	

-	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe, 1)))

-	  return false;

-	

-	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe, 1)))

-	  return false;	

-

-	PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber  = PrinterInterface->InterfaceNumber;

-	PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.AlternateSetting = PrinterInterface->AlternateSetting;

-	PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive = true;

-

-	return PRNT_ENUMERROR_NoError;

-}

-

-static uint8_t DCOMP_PRNT_Host_NextPRNTInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);

-

-	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)

-	{

-		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);

-

-		if ((Interface->Class    == PRNT_CSCP_PrinterClass)    &&

-		    (Interface->SubClass == PRNT_CSCP_PrinterSubclass) &&

-		    (Interface->Protocol == PRNT_CSCP_BidirectionalProtocol))

-		{

-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;

-		}

-	}

-

-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;

-}

-

-static uint8_t DCOMP_PRNT_Host_NextPRNTInterfaceEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);

-

-	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)

-	{

-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* Endpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);

-

-		uint8_t EndpointType = (Endpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);

-

-		if (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK)

-		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;

-	}

-	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)

-	{

-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;

-	}

-

-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;

-}

-

-void PRNT_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return;

-

-	#if !defined(NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH)

-	PRNT_Host_Flush(PRNTInterfaceInfo);

-	#endif

-}

-

-uint8_t PRNT_Host_SetBidirectionalMode(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if (PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.AlternateSetting)

-	{

-		uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-		if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetInterfaceAltSetting(PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,

-		                                                 PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.AlternateSetting)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-		{

-			return ErrorCode;

-		}

-	}

-

-	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;

-}

-

-uint8_t PRNT_Host_GetPortStatus(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,

-                                uint8_t* const PortStatus)

-{

-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-		{

-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),

-			.bRequest      = PRNT_REQ_GetPortStatus,

-			.wValue        = 0,

-			.wIndex        = PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,

-			.wLength       = sizeof(uint8_t),

-		};

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(PortStatus);

-}

-

-uint8_t PRNT_Host_SoftReset(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-		{

-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),

-			.bRequest      = PRNT_REQ_SoftReset,

-			.wValue        = 0,

-			.wIndex        = PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,

-			.wLength       = 0,

-		};

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);

-}

-

-uint8_t PRNT_Host_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-	if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))

-	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;

-

-	bool BankFull = !(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed());

-

-	Pipe_ClearOUT();

-

-	if (BankFull)

-	{

-		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()) != PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError)

-		  return ErrorCode;

-

-		Pipe_ClearOUT();

-	}

-

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;

-}

-

-uint8_t PRNT_Host_SendByte(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,

-                           const uint8_t Data)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-	if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-	{

-		Pipe_ClearOUT();

-

-		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()) != PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError)

-		  return ErrorCode;

-	}

-

-	Pipe_Write_8(Data);

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;

-}

-

-uint8_t PRNT_Host_SendString(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,

-                             const char* const String)

-{

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(String, strlen(String), NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	Pipe_ClearOUT();

-

-	ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady();

-

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	return ErrorCode;

-}

-

-uint8_t PRNT_Host_SendData(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,

-                           void* Buffer,

-                           const uint16_t Length)

-{

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, Length, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	Pipe_ClearOUT();

-

-	ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady();

-

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	return ErrorCode;

-}

-

-uint16_t PRNT_Host_BytesReceived(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return 0;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-	if (Pipe_IsINReceived())

-	{

-		if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))

-		{

-			Pipe_ClearIN();

-			Pipe_Freeze();

-			return 0;

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			Pipe_Freeze();

-			return Pipe_BytesInPipe();

-		}

-	}

-	else

-	{

-		Pipe_Freeze();

-

-		return 0;

-	}

-}

-

-int16_t PRNT_Host_ReceiveByte(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	int16_t ReceivedByte = -1;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-	if (Pipe_IsINReceived())

-	{

-		if (Pipe_BytesInPipe())

-		  ReceivedByte = Pipe_Read_8();

-

-		if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))

-		  Pipe_ClearIN();

-	}

-

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	return ReceivedByte;

-}

-

-uint8_t PRNT_Host_GetDeviceID(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,

-                              char* const DeviceIDString,

-                              const uint16_t BufferSize)

-{

-	uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-	uint16_t DeviceIDStringLength = 0;

-

-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-		{

-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),

-			.bRequest      = PRNT_REQ_GetDeviceID,

-			.wValue        = 0,

-			.wIndex        = PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,

-			.wLength       = sizeof(DeviceIDStringLength),

-		};

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(&DeviceIDStringLength)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	if (!(DeviceIDStringLength))

-	{

-		DeviceIDString[0] = 0x00;

-		return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;

-	}

-

-	DeviceIDStringLength = be16_to_cpu(DeviceIDStringLength);

-

-	if (DeviceIDStringLength > BufferSize)

-	  DeviceIDStringLength = BufferSize;

-

-	USB_ControlRequest.wLength = DeviceIDStringLength;

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(DeviceIDString)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	memmove(&DeviceIDString[0], &DeviceIDString[2], DeviceIDStringLength - 2);

-

-	DeviceIDString[DeviceIDStringLength - 2] = 0x00;

-

-	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;

-}

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/PrinterClassHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/PrinterClassHost.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 64494b1f6..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/PrinterClassHost.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,285 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB Printer Class driver.

- *

- *  Host mode driver for the library USB Printer Class driver.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassPrinter

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassPrinterHost Printer Class Host Mode Driver

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/PrinterClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the Printer USB Class driver.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __PRINTER_CLASS_HOST_H__

-#define __PRINTER_CLASS_HOST_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../USB.h"

-		#include "../Common/PrinterClassCommon.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_PRINTER_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Type Defines: */

-			/** \brief Printer Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.

-			 *

-			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,

-			 *  and passed to each of the Printer class driver functions as the \c PRNTInterfaceInfo parameter. This

-			 *  stores each Printer interface's configuration and state information.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				struct

-				{

-					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataINPipe; /**< Data IN Pipe configuration table. */

-					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataOUTPipe; /**< Data OUT Pipe configuration table. */

-				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section

-				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.

-				           */

-				struct

-				{

-					bool IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid

-					                *   after \ref PRNT_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the

-					                *   Configured state.

-					                */

-					uint8_t InterfaceNumber; /**< Interface index of the Printer interface within the attached device. */

-					uint8_t AlternateSetting; /**< Alternate setting within the Printer Interface in the attached device. */

-				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section

-						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when

-						  *   the interface is enumerated.

-						  */

-			} USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t;

-

-		/* Enums: */

-			/** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref PRNT_Host_ConfigurePipes() function. */

-			enum PRNT_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t

-			{

-				PRNT_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully. */

-				PRNT_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor. */

-				PRNT_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound = 2, /**< A compatible Printer interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor. */

-				PRNT_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed    = 3, /**< One or more pipes for the specified interface could not be configured correctly. */

-			};

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given Printer host interface instance using the

-			 *  Configuration Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given Printer

-			 *  instance's state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it is found within

-			 *  the device. This should be called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while the host state

-			 *  machine is in the Addressed state.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo     Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorSize  Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.

-			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorData  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref PRNT_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t PRNT_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,

-			                                 uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,

-			                                 void* ConfigDescriptorData) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);

-

-			/** General management task for a given Printer host class interface, required for the correct operation of

-			 *  the interface. This should be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task

-			 *  \ref USB_USBTask().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state.

-			 */

-			void PRNT_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Configures the printer to enable Bidirectional mode, if it is not already in this mode. This should be called

-			 *  once the connected device's configuration has been set, to ensure the printer is ready to accept commands.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t PRNT_Host_SetBidirectionalMode(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Retrieves the status of the virtual Printer port's inbound status lines. The result can then be masked against the

-			 *  \c PRNT_PORTSTATUS_* macros to determine the printer port's status.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[out]    PortStatus         Location where the retrieved port status should be stored.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t PRNT_Host_GetPortStatus(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,

-			                                uint8_t* const PortStatus)

-			                                ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-

-			/** Soft-resets the attached printer, readying it for new commands.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t PRNT_Host_SoftReset(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Flushes any data waiting to be sent, ensuring that the send buffer is cleared.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t PRNT_Host_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Sends the given null terminated string to the attached printer's input endpoint.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     String             Pointer to a null terminated string to send.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t PRNT_Host_SendString(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,

-			                             const char* const String) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-

-			/** Sends the given raw data stream to the attached printer's input endpoint. This should contain commands that the

-			 *  printer is able to understand - for example, PCL data. Not all printers accept all printer languages; see

-			 *  \ref PRNT_Host_GetDeviceID() for details on determining acceptable languages for an attached printer.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     Buffer             Pointer to a buffer containing the raw command stream to send to the printer.

-			 *  \param[in]     Length             Size in bytes of the command stream to be sent.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t PRNT_Host_SendData(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,

-			                           void* Buffer,

-			                           const uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-

-			/** Sends a given byte to the attached USB device, if connected. If a device is not connected when the function is called, the

-			 *  byte is discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the device until either the pipe bank becomes full, or the

-			 *  \ref PRNT_Host_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to the host. This allows for multiple bytes to be

-			 *  packed into a single pipe packet, increasing data throughput.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     Data               Byte of data to send to the device.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t PRNT_Host_SendByte(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,

-			                           const uint8_t Data) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Determines the number of bytes received by the printer interface from the device, waiting to be read. This indicates the number

-			 *  of bytes in the IN pipe bank only, and thus the number of calls to \ref PRNT_Host_ReceiveByte() which are guaranteed to succeed

-			 *  immediately. If multiple bytes are to be received, they should be buffered by the user application, as the pipe bank will not be

-			 *  released back to the USB controller until all bytes are read.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Total number of buffered bytes received from the device.

-			 */

-			uint16_t PRNT_Host_BytesReceived(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo);

-

-			/** Reads a byte of data from the device. If no data is waiting to be read of if a USB device is not connected, the function

-			 *  returns a negative value. The \ref PRNT_Host_BytesReceived() function may be queried in advance to determine how many bytes

-			 *  are currently buffered in the Printer interface's data receive pipe.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next received byte from the device, or a negative value if no data received.

-			 */

-			int16_t PRNT_Host_ReceiveByte(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo);

-

-			/** Retrieves the attached printer device's ID string, formatted according to IEEE 1284. This string is sent as a

-			 *  Unicode string from the device and is automatically converted to an ASCII encoded C string by this function, thus

-			 *  the maximum reportable string length is two less than the size given (to accommodate the Unicode string length

-			 *  bytes which are removed).

-			 *

-			 *  This string, when supported, contains the model, manufacturer and acceptable printer languages for the attached device.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[out]    DeviceIDString     Pointer to a buffer where the Device ID string should be stored, in ASCII format.

-			 *  \param[in]     BufferSize         Size in bytes of the buffer allocated for the Device ID string.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t PRNT_Host_GetDeviceID(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,

-			                              char* const DeviceIDString,

-			                              const uint16_t BufferSize) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_PRINTER_HOST_C)

-				static uint8_t DCOMP_PRNT_Host_NextPRNTInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-				                                                 ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-				static uint8_t DCOMP_PRNT_Host_NextPRNTInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-				                                                         ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			#endif

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDISClassHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDISClassHost.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 1e23f8e7c..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDISClassHost.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,476 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_DRIVER

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_HOST_C

-#include "RNDISClassHost.h"

-

-uint8_t RNDIS_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,

-                                  uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,

-                                  void* ConfigDescriptorData)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint        = NULL;

-	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataOUTEndpoint       = NULL;

-	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  NotificationEndpoint  = NULL;

-	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* RNDISControlInterface = NULL;

-

-	memset(&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State));

-

-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)

-	  return RNDIS_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;

-

-	RNDISControlInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);

-

-	while (!(DataINEndpoint) || !(DataOUTEndpoint) || !(NotificationEndpoint))

-	{

-		if (!(RNDISControlInterface) ||

-		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,

-		                              DCOMP_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)

-		{

-			if (NotificationEndpoint)

-			{

-				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,

-											  DCOMP_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISDataInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)

-				{

-					return RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;

-				}

-

-				DataINEndpoint  = NULL;

-				DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;

-			}

-			else

-			{

-				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,

-											  DCOMP_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISControlInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)

-				{

-					return RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;

-				}

-

-				RNDISControlInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);

-

-				NotificationEndpoint = NULL;

-			}

-

-			continue;

-		}

-

-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);

-

-		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)

-		{

-			if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)

-			  NotificationEndpoint = EndpointData;

-			else

-			  DataINEndpoint = EndpointData;

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			DataOUTEndpoint = EndpointData;

-		}

-	}

-

-	RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Size  = le16_to_cpu(DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize);

-	RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.EndpointAddress = DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress;

-	RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Type  = EP_TYPE_BULK;

-	

-	RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Size = le16_to_cpu(DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointSize);

-	RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.EndpointAddress = DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress;

-	RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Type = EP_TYPE_BULK;

-	

-	RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipe.Size = le16_to_cpu(NotificationEndpoint->EndpointSize);

-	RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipe.EndpointAddress = NotificationEndpoint->EndpointAddress;

-	RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipe.Type = EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT;

-

-	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe, 1)))

-	  return false;

-	

-	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe, 1)))

-	  return false;

-

-	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipe, 1)))

-	  return false;

-

-	RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ControlInterfaceNumber = RNDISControlInterface->InterfaceNumber;

-	RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive = true;

-

-	return RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoError;

-}

-

-static uint8_t DCOMP_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISControlInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);

-

-	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)

-	{

-		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);

-

-		if ((Interface->Class    == CDC_CSCP_CDCClass)    &&

-		    (Interface->SubClass == CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass) &&

-		    (Interface->Protocol == CDC_CSCP_VendorSpecificProtocol))

-		{

-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;

-		}

-	}

-

-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;

-}

-

-static uint8_t DCOMP_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISDataInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);

-

-	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)

-	{

-		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor,

-		                                                         USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);

-

-		if ((Interface->Class    == CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass)   &&

-		    (Interface->SubClass == CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass) &&

-		    (Interface->Protocol == CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol))

-		{

-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;

-		}

-	}

-

-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;

-}

-

-static uint8_t DCOMP_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);

-

-	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)

-	{

-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* Endpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);

-

-		uint8_t EndpointType = (Endpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);

-

-		if (((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) || (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)) &&

-		    !(Pipe_IsEndpointBound(Endpoint->EndpointAddress)))

-		{

-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;

-		}

-	}

-	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)

-	{

-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;

-	}

-

-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;

-}

-

-static uint8_t RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,

-                                             void* Buffer,

-                                             const uint16_t Length)

-{

-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-		{

-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),

-			.bRequest      = RNDIS_REQ_SendEncapsulatedCommand,

-			.wValue        = 0,

-			.wIndex        = RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ControlInterfaceNumber,

-			.wLength       = Length,

-		};

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-

-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Buffer);

-}

-

-static uint8_t RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,

-                                             void* Buffer,

-                                             const uint16_t Length)

-{

-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-		{

-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),

-			.bRequest      = RNDIS_REQ_GetEncapsulatedResponse,

-			.wValue        = 0,

-			.wIndex        = RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ControlInterfaceNumber,

-			.wLength       = Length,

-		};

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-

-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Buffer);

-}

-

-uint8_t RNDIS_Host_SendKeepAlive(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t  KeepAliveMessage;

-	RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t KeepAliveMessageResponse;

-

-	KeepAliveMessage.MessageType     = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG);

-	KeepAliveMessage.MessageLength   = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t));

-	KeepAliveMessage.RequestId       = cpu_to_le32(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RequestID++);

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &KeepAliveMessage,

-	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-	{

-		return ErrorCode;

-	}

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &KeepAliveMessageResponse,

-	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-	{

-		return ErrorCode;

-	}

-

-	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;

-}

-

-uint8_t RNDIS_Host_InitializeDevice(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t  InitMessage;

-	RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t InitMessageResponse;

-

-	InitMessage.MessageType     = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG);

-	InitMessage.MessageLength   = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t));

-	InitMessage.RequestId       = cpu_to_le32(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RequestID++);

-

-	InitMessage.MajorVersion    = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MAJOR);

-	InitMessage.MinorVersion    = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MINOR);

-	InitMessage.MaxTransferSize = cpu_to_le32(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.HostMaxPacketSize);

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &InitMessage,

-	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-	{

-		return ErrorCode;

-	}

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &InitMessageResponse,

-	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-	{

-		return ErrorCode;

-	}

-

-	if (InitMessageResponse.Status != CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS))

-	  return RNDIS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED;

-

-	RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.DeviceMaxPacketSize = le32_to_cpu(InitMessageResponse.MaxTransferSize);

-

-	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;

-}

-

-uint8_t RNDIS_Host_SetRNDISProperty(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,

-                                    const uint32_t Oid,

-                                    void* Buffer,

-                                    const uint16_t Length)

-{

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	struct

-	{

-		RNDIS_Set_Message_t SetMessage;

-		uint8_t             ContiguousBuffer[Length];

-	} SetMessageData;

-

-	RNDIS_Set_Complete_t SetMessageResponse;

-

-	SetMessageData.SetMessage.MessageType    = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG);

-	SetMessageData.SetMessage.MessageLength  = cpu_to_le32(sizeof(RNDIS_Set_Message_t) + Length);

-	SetMessageData.SetMessage.RequestId      = cpu_to_le32(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RequestID++);

-

-	SetMessageData.SetMessage.Oid            = cpu_to_le32(Oid);

-	SetMessageData.SetMessage.InformationBufferLength = cpu_to_le32(Length);

-	SetMessageData.SetMessage.InformationBufferOffset = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(RNDIS_Set_Message_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t));

-	SetMessageData.SetMessage.DeviceVcHandle = CPU_TO_LE32(0);

-

-	memcpy(&SetMessageData.ContiguousBuffer, Buffer, Length);

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &SetMessageData,

-	                                               (sizeof(RNDIS_Set_Message_t) + Length))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-	{

-		return ErrorCode;

-	}

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &SetMessageResponse,

-	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_Set_Complete_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-	{

-		return ErrorCode;

-	}

-

-	if (SetMessageResponse.Status != CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS))

-	  return RNDIS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED;

-

-	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;

-}

-

-uint8_t RNDIS_Host_QueryRNDISProperty(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,

-                                      const uint32_t Oid,

-                                      void* Buffer,

-                                      const uint16_t MaxLength)

-{

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	RNDIS_Query_Message_t QueryMessage;

-

-	struct

-	{

-		RNDIS_Query_Complete_t QueryMessageResponse;

-		uint8_t                ContiguousBuffer[MaxLength];

-	} QueryMessageResponseData;

-

-	QueryMessage.MessageType    = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG);

-	QueryMessage.MessageLength  = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Message_t));

-	QueryMessage.RequestId      = cpu_to_le32(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RequestID++);

-

-	QueryMessage.Oid            = cpu_to_le32(Oid);

-	QueryMessage.InformationBufferLength = CPU_TO_LE32(0);

-	QueryMessage.InformationBufferOffset = CPU_TO_LE32(0);

-	QueryMessage.DeviceVcHandle = CPU_TO_LE32(0);

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &QueryMessage,

-	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Message_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-	{

-		return ErrorCode;

-	}

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &QueryMessageResponseData,

-	                                               sizeof(QueryMessageResponseData))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-	{

-		return ErrorCode;

-	}

-

-	if (QueryMessageResponseData.QueryMessageResponse.Status != CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS))

-	  return RNDIS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED;

-

-	memcpy(Buffer, &QueryMessageResponseData.ContiguousBuffer, MaxLength);

-

-	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;

-}

-

-bool RNDIS_Host_IsPacketReceived(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	bool PacketWaiting;

-

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return false;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);

-

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-	PacketWaiting = Pipe_IsINReceived();

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	return PacketWaiting;

-}

-

-uint8_t RNDIS_Host_ReadPacket(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,

-                              void* Buffer,

-                              uint16_t* const PacketLength)

-{

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-	if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-	{

-		if (Pipe_IsINReceived())

-		  Pipe_ClearIN();

-

-		*PacketLength = 0;

-		Pipe_Freeze();

-		return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-	}

-

-	RNDIS_Packet_Message_t DeviceMessage;

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&DeviceMessage, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t),

-	                                     NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-	{

-		return ErrorCode;

-	}

-

-	*PacketLength = (uint16_t)le32_to_cpu(DeviceMessage.DataLength);

-

-	Pipe_Discard_Stream(le32_to_cpu(DeviceMessage.DataOffset) -

-	                    (sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t)),

-	                    NULL);

-

-	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(Buffer, *PacketLength, NULL);

-

-	if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))

-	  Pipe_ClearIN();

-

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-uint8_t RNDIS_Host_SendPacket(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,

-                              void* Buffer,

-                              const uint16_t PacketLength)

-{

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	RNDIS_Packet_Message_t DeviceMessage;

-

-	memset(&DeviceMessage, 0, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t));

-	DeviceMessage.MessageType   = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MSG);

-	DeviceMessage.MessageLength = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) + PacketLength);

-	DeviceMessage.DataOffset    = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t));

-	DeviceMessage.DataLength    = cpu_to_le32(PacketLength);

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&DeviceMessage, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t),

-	                                      NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-	{

-		return ErrorCode;

-	}

-

-	Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, PacketLength, NULL);

-	Pipe_ClearOUT();

-

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDISClassHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDISClassHost.h
deleted file mode 100644
index bac6d5c2e..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDISClassHost.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,270 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB RNDIS Class driver.

- *

- *  Host mode driver for the library USB RNDIS Class driver.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassRNDIS

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassRNDISHost RNDIS Class Host Mode Driver

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDISClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the Microsoft RNDIS Ethernet

- *  USB Class driver.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __RNDIS_CLASS_HOST_H__

-#define __RNDIS_CLASS_HOST_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../USB.h"

-		#include "../Common/RNDISClassCommon.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Type Defines: */

-			/** \brief RNDIS Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.

-			 *

-			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,

-			 *  and passed to each of the RNDIS class driver functions as the \c RNDISInterfaceInfo parameter. This

-			 *  stores each RNDIS interface's configuration and state information.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				struct

-				{

-					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataINPipe; /**< Data IN Pipe configuration table. */

-					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataOUTPipe; /**< Data OUT Pipe configuration table. */

-					USB_Pipe_Table_t NotificationPipe; /**< Notification IN Pipe configuration table. */

-

-					uint32_t HostMaxPacketSize; /**< Maximum size of a packet which can be buffered by the host. */

-				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section

-				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.

-				           */

-				struct

-				{

-					bool IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid

-					                *   after \ref RNDIS_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the

-					                *   Configured state.

-					                */

-					uint8_t ControlInterfaceNumber; /**< Interface index of the RNDIS control interface within the attached device. */

-

-					uint32_t DeviceMaxPacketSize; /**< Maximum size of a packet which can be buffered by the attached RNDIS device. */

-

-					uint32_t RequestID; /**< Request ID counter to give a unique ID for each command/response pair. */

-				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section

-						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when

-						  *   the interface is enumerated.

-						  */

-			} USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t;

-

-		/* Enums: */

-			/** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref RNDIS_Host_ConfigurePipes() function. */

-			enum RNDIS_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t

-			{

-				RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully. */

-				RNDIS_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor. */

-				RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound = 2, /**< A compatible RNDIS interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor. */

-				RNDIS_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed    = 3, /**< One or more pipes for the specified interface could not be configured correctly. */

-			};

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given RNDIS host interface instance using the Configuration

-			 *  Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given RNDIS Host instance's

-			 *  state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it is found within the device.

-			 *  This should be called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while the host state machine is in

-			 *  the Addressed state.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo    Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorSize  Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.

-			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorData  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref RNDIS_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t RNDIS_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,

-			                                  uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,

-			                                  void* ConfigDescriptorData) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);

-

-			/** Sends a RNDIS KEEPALIVE command to the device, to ensure that it does not enter standby mode after periods

-			 *  of long inactivity.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum or \ref RNDIS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if the device returned a

-			 *          logical command failure.

-			 */

-			uint8_t RNDIS_Host_SendKeepAlive(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Initializes the attached RNDIS device's RNDIS interface. This should be called after the device's pipes have been

-			 *  configured via the call to \ref RNDIS_Host_ConfigurePipes().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum or \ref RNDIS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if the

-			 *          device returned a logical command failure.

-			 */

-			uint8_t RNDIS_Host_InitializeDevice(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Sets a given RNDIS property of an attached RNDIS device.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     Oid                 OID number of the parameter to set.

-			 *  \param[in]     Buffer              Pointer to where the property data is to be sourced from.

-			 *  \param[in]     Length              Length in bytes of the property data to sent to the device.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum or \ref RNDIS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if the

-			 *          device returned a logical command failure.

-			 */

-			uint8_t RNDIS_Host_SetRNDISProperty(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,

-			                                    const uint32_t Oid,

-			                                    void* Buffer,

-			                                    const uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);

-

-			/** Gets a given RNDIS property of an attached RNDIS device.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     Oid                 OID number of the parameter to get.

-			 *  \param[in]     Buffer              Pointer to where the property data is to be written to.

-			 *  \param[in]     MaxLength           Length in bytes of the destination buffer size.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum or \ref RNDIS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if the

-			 *          device returned a logical command failure.

-			 */

-			uint8_t RNDIS_Host_QueryRNDISProperty(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,

-			                                      const uint32_t Oid,

-			                                      void* Buffer,

-			                                      const uint16_t MaxLength) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);

-

-			/** Determines if a packet is currently waiting for the host to read in and process.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if a packet is waiting to be read in by the host, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			bool RNDIS_Host_IsPacketReceived(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Retrieves the next pending packet from the device, discarding the remainder of the RNDIS packet header to leave

-			 *  only the packet contents for processing by the host in the nominated buffer.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[out]    Buffer              Pointer to a buffer where the packer data is to be written to.

-			 *  \param[out]    PacketLength        Pointer to where the length in bytes of the read packet is to be stored.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t RNDIS_Host_ReadPacket(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,

-			                              void* Buffer,

-			                              uint16_t* const PacketLength) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2)

-			                              ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);

-

-			/** Sends the given packet to the attached RNDIS device, after adding a RNDIS packet message header.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     Buffer              Pointer to a buffer where the packer data is to be read from.

-			 *  \param[in]     PacketLength        Length in bytes of the packet to send.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t RNDIS_Host_SendPacket(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,

-			                              void* Buffer,

-			                              const uint16_t PacketLength) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** General management task for a given RNDIS host class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should

-			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state.

-			 */

-			static inline void RNDIS_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void RNDIS_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)

-			{

-				(void)RNDISInterfaceInfo;

-			}

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_HOST_C)

-				static uint8_t RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,

-				                                             void* Buffer,

-				                                             const uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)

-				                                             ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-				static uint8_t RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,

-				                                             void* Buffer,

-				                                             const uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)

-				                                             ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-

-				static uint8_t DCOMP_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISControlInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-				                                                          ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-				static uint8_t DCOMP_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISDataInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-				                                                       ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-				static uint8_t DCOMP_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-				                                                           ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			#endif

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImageClassHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImageClassHost.c
deleted file mode 100644
index a6137b191..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImageClassHost.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,436 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_SI_DRIVER

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_STILLIMAGE_HOST_C

-#include "StillImageClassHost.h"

-

-uint8_t SI_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo,

-                               uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,

-                               void* ConfigDescriptorData)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint      = NULL;

-	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataOUTEndpoint     = NULL;

-	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  EventsEndpoint      = NULL;

-	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* StillImageInterface = NULL;

-

-	memset(&SIInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(SIInterfaceInfo->State));

-

-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)

-	  return SI_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;

-

-	while (!(DataINEndpoint) || !(DataOUTEndpoint) || !(EventsEndpoint))

-	{

-		if (!(StillImageInterface) ||

-		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,

-		                              DCOMP_SI_Host_NextSIInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)

-		{

-			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,

-			                              DCOMP_SI_Host_NextSIInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)

-			{

-				return SI_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;

-			}

-

-			StillImageInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);

-

-			DataINEndpoint  = NULL;

-			DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;

-			EventsEndpoint  = NULL;

-

-			continue;

-		}

-

-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);

-

-		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)

-		{

-			if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)

-			  EventsEndpoint = EndpointData;

-			else

-			  DataINEndpoint = EndpointData;

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			DataOUTEndpoint = EndpointData;

-		}

-	}

-

-	SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Size  = le16_to_cpu(DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize);

-	SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.EndpointAddress = DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress;

-	SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Type  = EP_TYPE_BULK;

-	

-	SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Size = le16_to_cpu(DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointSize);

-	SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.EndpointAddress = DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress;

-	SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Type = EP_TYPE_BULK;

-	

-	SIInterfaceInfo->Config.EventsPipe.Size = le16_to_cpu(EventsEndpoint->EndpointSize);

-	SIInterfaceInfo->Config.EventsPipe.EndpointAddress = EventsEndpoint->EndpointAddress;

-	SIInterfaceInfo->Config.EventsPipe.Type = EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT;

-

-	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe, 1)))

-	  return false;

-	

-	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe, 1)))

-	  return false;

-

-	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&SIInterfaceInfo->Config.EventsPipe, 1)))

-	  return false;

-	

-	SIInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber = StillImageInterface->InterfaceNumber;

-	SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive = true;

-

-	return SI_ENUMERROR_NoError;

-}

-

-uint8_t DCOMP_SI_Host_NextSIInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);

-

-	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)

-	{

-		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);

-

-		if ((Interface->Class    == SI_CSCP_StillImageClass)    &&

-		    (Interface->SubClass == SI_CSCP_StillImageSubclass) &&

-		    (Interface->Protocol == SI_CSCP_BulkOnlyProtocol))

-		{

-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;

-		}

-	}

-

-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;

-}

-

-uint8_t DCOMP_SI_Host_NextSIInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-{

-	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);

-

-	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)

-	{

-		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* Endpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);

-

-		uint8_t EndpointType = (Endpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);

-

-		if (((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) || (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)) &&

-		    (!(Pipe_IsEndpointBound(Endpoint->EndpointAddress))))

-		{

-			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;

-		}

-	}

-	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)

-	{

-		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;

-	}

-

-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;

-}

-

-uint8_t SI_Host_SendBlockHeader(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo,

-                                PIMA_Container_t* const PIMAHeader)

-{

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	if (SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsSessionOpen)

-	  PIMAHeader->TransactionID = cpu_to_le32(SIInterfaceInfo->State.TransactionID++);

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(PIMAHeader, PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0), NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	uint8_t ParamBytes = (PIMAHeader->DataLength - PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0));

-

-	if (ParamBytes)

-	{

-		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&PIMAHeader->Params, ParamBytes, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-		  return ErrorCode;

-	}

-

-	Pipe_ClearOUT();

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-uint8_t SI_Host_ReceiveBlockHeader(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo,

-                                   PIMA_Container_t* const PIMAHeader)

-{

-	uint16_t TimeoutMSRem        = SI_COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS;

-	uint16_t PreviousFrameNumber = USB_Host_GetFrameNumber();

-

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-	while (!(Pipe_IsINReceived()))

-	{

-		uint16_t CurrentFrameNumber = USB_Host_GetFrameNumber();

-

-		if (CurrentFrameNumber != PreviousFrameNumber)

-		{

-			PreviousFrameNumber = CurrentFrameNumber;

-

-			if (!(TimeoutMSRem--))

-			  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_Timeout;

-		}

-

-		Pipe_Freeze();

-		Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);

-		Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-		if (Pipe_IsStalled())

-		{

-			USB_Host_ClearEndpointStall(Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress());

-			return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;

-		}

-

-		Pipe_Freeze();

-		Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);

-		Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-		if (Pipe_IsStalled())

-		{

-			USB_Host_ClearEndpointStall(Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress());

-			return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;

-		}

-

-		if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)

-		  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-	}

-

-	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(PIMAHeader, PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0), NULL);

-

-	if (PIMAHeader->Type == CPU_TO_LE16(PIMA_CONTAINER_ResponseBlock))

-	{

-		uint8_t ParamBytes = (PIMAHeader->DataLength - PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0));

-

-		if (ParamBytes)

-		  Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&PIMAHeader->Params, ParamBytes, NULL);

-

-		Pipe_ClearIN();

-	}

-

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-uint8_t SI_Host_SendData(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo,

-                         void* Buffer,

-                         const uint16_t Bytes)

-{

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-	ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, Bytes, NULL);

-

-	Pipe_ClearOUT();

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	return ErrorCode;

-}

-

-uint8_t SI_Host_ReadData(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo,

-                         void* Buffer,

-                         const uint16_t Bytes)

-{

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-	ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(Buffer, Bytes, NULL);

-

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	return ErrorCode;

-}

-

-bool SI_Host_IsEventReceived(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	bool IsEventReceived = false;

-

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return false;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.EventsPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-	if (Pipe_BytesInPipe())

-	  IsEventReceived = true;

-

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	return IsEventReceived;

-}

-

-uint8_t SI_Host_ReceiveEventHeader(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo,

-                                   PIMA_Container_t* const PIMAHeader)

-{

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.EventsPipe.Address);

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-	ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(PIMAHeader, sizeof(PIMA_Container_t), NULL);

-

-	Pipe_ClearIN();

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	return ErrorCode;

-}

-

-uint8_t SI_Host_OpenSession(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	SIInterfaceInfo->State.TransactionID = 0;

-	SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsSessionOpen = false;

-

-	PIMA_Container_t PIMABlock = (PIMA_Container_t)

-		{

-			.DataLength    = CPU_TO_LE32(PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(1)),

-			.Type          = CPU_TO_LE16(PIMA_CONTAINER_CommandBlock),

-			.Code          = CPU_TO_LE16(0x1002),

-			.Params        = {CPU_TO_LE32(1)},

-		};

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = SI_Host_SendBlockHeader(SIInterfaceInfo, &PIMABlock)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = SI_Host_ReceiveBlockHeader(SIInterfaceInfo, &PIMABlock)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	if ((PIMABlock.Type != CPU_TO_LE16(PIMA_CONTAINER_ResponseBlock)) || (PIMABlock.Code != CPU_TO_LE16(0x2001)))

-	  return SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED;

-

-	SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsSessionOpen = true;

-

-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-uint8_t SI_Host_CloseSession(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	PIMA_Container_t PIMABlock = (PIMA_Container_t)

-		{

-			.DataLength    = CPU_TO_LE32(PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(1)),

-			.Type          = CPU_TO_LE16(PIMA_CONTAINER_CommandBlock),

-			.Code          = CPU_TO_LE16(0x1003),

-			.Params        = {CPU_TO_LE32(1)},

-		};

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = SI_Host_SendBlockHeader(SIInterfaceInfo, &PIMABlock)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = SI_Host_ReceiveBlockHeader(SIInterfaceInfo, &PIMABlock)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsSessionOpen = false;

-

-	if ((PIMABlock.Type != CPU_TO_LE16(PIMA_CONTAINER_ResponseBlock)) || (PIMABlock.Code != CPU_TO_LE16(0x2001)))

-	  return SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED;

-

-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-uint8_t SI_Host_SendCommand(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo,

-                            const uint16_t Operation,

-                            const uint8_t TotalParams,

-                            uint32_t* const Params)

-{

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	PIMA_Container_t PIMABlock = (PIMA_Container_t)

-		{

-			.DataLength    = cpu_to_le32(PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(TotalParams)),

-			.Type          = CPU_TO_LE16(PIMA_CONTAINER_CommandBlock),

-			.Code          = cpu_to_le16(Operation),

-		};

-

-	memcpy(&PIMABlock.Params, Params, sizeof(uint32_t) * TotalParams);

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = SI_Host_SendBlockHeader(SIInterfaceInfo, &PIMABlock)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-uint8_t SI_Host_ReceiveResponse(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-	PIMA_Container_t PIMABlock;

-

-	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))

-	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = SI_Host_ReceiveBlockHeader(SIInterfaceInfo, &PIMABlock)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	if ((PIMABlock.Type != CPU_TO_LE16(PIMA_CONTAINER_ResponseBlock)) || (PIMABlock.Code != CPU_TO_LE16(0x2001)))

-	  return SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED;

-

-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImageClassHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImageClassHost.h
deleted file mode 100644
index acfbd7d61..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImageClassHost.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,317 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB Still Image Class driver.

- *

- *  Host mode driver for the library USB Still Image Class driver.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassSI

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassStillImageHost Still Image Class Host Mode Driver

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImageClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the Still Image USB Class driver.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __SI_CLASS_HOST_H__

-#define __SI_CLASS_HOST_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../USB.h"

-		#include "../Common/StillImageClassCommon.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_SI_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Error code for some Still Image Host functions, indicating a logical (and not hardware) error. */

-			#define SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED              0x80

-

-		/* Type Defines: */

-			/** \brief Still Image Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.

-			 *

-			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,

-			 *  and passed to each of the Still Image class driver functions as the \c SIInterfaceInfo parameter. This

-			 *  stores each Still Image interface's configuration and state information.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				struct

-				{

-					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataINPipe; /**< Data IN Pipe configuration table. */

-					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataOUTPipe; /**< Data OUT Pipe configuration table. */

-					USB_Pipe_Table_t EventsPipe; /**< Event notification IN Pipe configuration table. */

-				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section

-				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.

-				           */

-				struct

-				{

-					bool     IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid

-					                    *   after \ref SI_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the

-					                    *   Configured state.

-					                    */

-					uint8_t  InterfaceNumber; /**< Interface index of the Still Image interface within the attached device. */

-

-					bool IsSessionOpen; /**< Indicates if a PIMA session is currently open with the attached device. */

-					uint32_t TransactionID; /**< Transaction ID for the next transaction to send to the device. */

-				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section

-						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when

-						  *   the interface is enumerated.

-						  */

-			} USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t;

-

-		/* Enums: */

-			/** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref SI_Host_ConfigurePipes() function. */

-			enum SI_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t

-			{

-				SI_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully. */

-				SI_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor. */

-				SI_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound = 2, /**< A compatible Still Image interface was not found in the device's

-				                                              *   Configuration Descriptor.

-				                                              */

-				SI_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed    = 3, /**< One or more pipes for the specified interface could not be configured correctly. */

-			};

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given Still Image host interface instance using the

-			 *  Configuration Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given Still

-			 *  Image Host instance's state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it is

-			 *  found within the device. This should be called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while

-			 *  the host state machine is in the Addressed state.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo       Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorSize  Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.

-			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorData  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref SI_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t SI_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo,

-			                               uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,

-			                               void* ConfigDescriptorData) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);

-

-			/** Opens a new PIMA session with the attached device. This should be used before any session-orientated PIMA commands

-			 *  are issued to the device. Only one session can be open at the one time.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or \ref SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if the device

-			 *          returned a logical command failure.

-			 */

-			uint8_t SI_Host_OpenSession(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Closes an already opened PIMA session with the attached device. This should be used after all session-orientated

-			 *  PIMA commands have been issued to the device.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or \ref SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if the device

-			 *          returned a logical command failure.

-			 */

-			uint8_t SI_Host_CloseSession(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Sends a raw PIMA block header to the device, filling out the transaction ID automatically. This can be used to send

-			 *  arbitrary PIMA blocks to the device with or without parameters.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     PIMAHeader       Pointer to a PIMA container structure that is to be sent.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t SI_Host_SendBlockHeader(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo,

-			                                PIMA_Container_t* const PIMAHeader) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)

-			                                ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-

-			/** Receives a raw PIMA block header from the device. This can be used to receive arbitrary PIMA blocks from the device with

-			 *  or without parameters.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[out]    PIMAHeader       Pointer to a PIMA container structure where the received block is to be stored.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t SI_Host_ReceiveBlockHeader(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo,

-			                                   PIMA_Container_t* const PIMAHeader) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)

-			                                   ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-

-			/** Sends a given PIMA command to the attached device, filling out the PIMA command header's Transaction ID automatically.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     Operation        PIMA operation code to issue to the device.

-			 *  \param[in]     TotalParams      Total number of 32-bit parameters to send to the device in the issued command block.

-			 *  \param[in]     Params           Pointer to an array of 32-bit values containing the parameters to send in the command block.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or \ref SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if the device

-			 *          returned a logical command failure.

-			 */

-			uint8_t SI_Host_SendCommand(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo,

-			                            const uint16_t Operation,

-			                            const uint8_t TotalParams,

-			                            uint32_t* const Params) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Receives and checks a response block from the attached Still Image device, once a command has been issued and all data

-			 *  associated with the command has been transferred.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or \ref SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if the device

-			 *          returned a logical command failure.

-			 */

-			uint8_t SI_Host_ReceiveResponse(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Indicates if the device has issued a PIMA event block to the host via the asynchronous events pipe.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if an event is waiting to be read, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			bool SI_Host_IsEventReceived(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Receives an asynchronous event block from the device via the asynchronous events pipe.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[out]    PIMAHeader       Pointer to a PIMA container structure where the event should be stored.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or \ref SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if the device

-			 *          returned a logical command failure.

-			 */

-			uint8_t SI_Host_ReceiveEventHeader(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo,

-			                                   PIMA_Container_t* const PIMAHeader) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)

-			                                   ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-

-			/** Sends arbitrary data to the attached device, for use in the data phase of PIMA commands which require data

-			 *  transfer beyond the regular PIMA command block parameters.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[in]     Buffer           Pointer to a buffer where the data to send has been stored.

-			 *  \param[in]     Bytes            Length in bytes of the data in the buffer to send to the attached device.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t SI_Host_SendData(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo,

-			                         void* Buffer,

-			                         const uint16_t Bytes) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-

-			/** Receives arbitrary data from the attached device, for use in the data phase of PIMA commands which require data

-			 *  transfer beyond the regular PIMA command block parameters.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the

-			 *       call will fail.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state.

-			 *  \param[out]    Buffer           Pointer to a buffer where the received data is to be stored.

-			 *  \param[in]     Bytes            Length in bytes of the data to read.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t SI_Host_ReadData(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo,

-			                         void* Buffer,

-			                         const uint16_t Bytes) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** General management task for a given Still Image host class interface, required for the correct operation of the

-			 *  interface. This should be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task

-			 *  \ref USB_USBTask().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state.

-			 */

-			static inline void SI_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void SI_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo)

-			{

-				(void)SIInterfaceInfo;

-			}

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define SI_COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS        10000

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_STILLIMAGE_HOST_C)

-				static uint8_t DCOMP_SI_Host_NextSIInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-				                                             ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-				static uint8_t DCOMP_SI_Host_NextSIInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)

-				                                                     ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			#endif

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MIDIClass.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MIDIClass.h
deleted file mode 100644
index e3b8e2f5e..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MIDIClass.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,83 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Master include file for the library USB MIDI Class driver.

- *

- *  Master include file for the library USB MIDI Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.

- *

- *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of

- *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassMIDI MIDI Class Driver

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDIClassDevice.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDIClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  MIDI Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the USB MIDI Class, for both Device

- *  and Host USB modes. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the MIDI class manually

- *  via the low-level LUFA APIs.

- *

- *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with

- *  Hosts or Devices using the USB MIDI Class.

- *

- *  \note The USB MIDI class is actually a special case of the regular Audio class, thus this module depends on

- *        structure definitions from the \ref Group_USBClassAudioDevice class driver module.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef _MIDI_CLASS_H_

-#define _MIDI_CLASS_H_

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_DRIVER

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../Core/USBMode.h"

-

-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-			#include "Device/MIDIClassDevice.h"

-		#endif

-

-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-			#include "Host/MIDIClassHost.h"

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorageClass.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorageClass.h
deleted file mode 100644
index a5af1496b..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorageClass.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,80 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Master include file for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver.

- *

- *  Master include file for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.

- *

- *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of

- *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassMS Mass Storage Class Driver

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorageClassDevice.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorageClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Mass Storage Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the USB Mass Storage Class, for both

- *  Device and Host USB modes. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the Mass Storage class

- *  manually via the low-level LUFA APIs.

- *

- *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with

- *  Hosts or Devices using the USB Mass Storage Class.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef _MS_CLASS_H_

-#define _MS_CLASS_H_

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_MS_DRIVER

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../Core/USBMode.h"

-

-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-			#include "Device/MassStorageClassDevice.h"

-		#endif

-

-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-			#include "Host/MassStorageClassHost.h"

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/PrinterClass.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/PrinterClass.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 181d6931e..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/PrinterClass.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,77 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Master include file for the library USB Printer Class driver.

- *

- *  Master include file for the library USB Printer Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.

- *

- *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of

- *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassPrinter Printer Class Driver

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/PrinterClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Printer Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the USB Printer Class, for the base

- *  USB Printer transport layer for USB Host mode only. Note that printers are free to implement whatever printer language

- *  they choose on top of this (e.g. Postscript), and so this driver exposes low level data transport functions only rather

- *  than high level raster or text functions. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the Printer

- *  class manually via the low-level LUFA APIs.

- *

- *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with

- *  Devices using the USB Printer Class.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef _PRINTER_CLASS_H_

-#define _PRINTER_CLASS_H_

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_PRINTER_DRIVER

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../Core/USBMode.h"

-

-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-			#include "Host/PrinterClassHost.h"

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDISClass.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDISClass.h
deleted file mode 100644
index e270629e2..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDISClass.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,80 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Master include file for the library USB RNDIS Class driver.

- *

- *  Master include file for the library USB RNDIS Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.

- *

- *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of

- *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassRNDIS RNDIS (Networking) Class Driver

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDISClassDevice.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDISClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  RNDIS Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the Microsoft USB RNDIS Networking

- *  Class, for both Device and Host USB modes. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the

- *  RNDIS class manually via the low-level LUFA APIs.

- *

- *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with

- *  Hosts using the USB RNDIS Class.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef _RNDIS_CLASS_H_

-#define _RNDIS_CLASS_H_

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_DRIVER

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../Core/USBMode.h"

-

-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-			#include "Device/RNDISClassDevice.h"

-		#endif

-

-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-			#include "Host/RNDISClassHost.h"

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/StillImageClass.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/StillImageClass.h
deleted file mode 100644
index e8c28b441..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/StillImageClass.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,75 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Master include file for the library USB Still Image Class driver.

- *

- *  Master include file for the library USB Still Image Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.

- *

- *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of

- *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers

- *  \defgroup Group_USBClassSI Still Image Class Driver

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImageClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Still Image Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the USB Still Image Class,

- *  for USB Host mode only. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the Still Image class

- *  manually via the low-level LUFA APIs.

- *

- *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with

- *  Devices using the USB Still Image Class.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef _SI_CLASS_H_

-#define _SI_CLASS_H_

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_SI_DRIVER

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../Core/USBMode.h"

-

-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-			#include "Host/StillImageClassHost.h"

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Device_AVR8.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Device_AVR8.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 09d6f3775..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Device_AVR8.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,57 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-

-#include "../Device.h"

-

-void USB_Device_SendRemoteWakeup(void)

-{

-	if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL))

-	{

-		USB_PLL_On();

-		while (!(USB_PLL_IsReady()));

-	}

-

-	USB_CLK_Unfreeze();

-

-	UDCON |= (1 << RMWKUP);

-	while (UDCON & (1 << RMWKUP));

-}

-

-#endif

-

-#endif

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Device_AVR8.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Device_AVR8.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 318ff8720..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Device_AVR8.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,264 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief USB Device definitions for the AVR8 microcontrollers.

- *  \copydetails Group_Device_AVR8

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Device

- *  \defgroup Group_Device_AVR8 Device Management (AVR8)

- *  \brief USB Device definitions for the AVR8 microcontrollers.

- *

- *  Architecture specific USB Device definitions for the Atmel 8-bit AVR microcontrollers.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __USBDEVICE_AVR8_H__

-#define __USBDEVICE_AVR8_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "../USBController.h"

-		#include "../StdDescriptors.h"

-		#include "../USBInterrupt.h"

-		#include "../Endpoint.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-		#if (defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS))

-			#error USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS and USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS are mutually exclusive.

-		#endif

-

-		#if (defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS))

-			#error USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS and USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS are mutually exclusive.

-		#endif

-

-		#if (defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS))

-			#error USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS and USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS are mutually exclusive.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** \name USB Device Mode Option Masks */

-			//@{

-			#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				/** Mask for the Options parameter of the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the

-				 *  USB interface should be initialized in low speed (1.5Mb/s) mode.

-				 *

-				 *  \note Low Speed mode is not available on all USB AVR models.

-				 *        \n

-				 *

-				 *  \note Restrictions apply on the number, size and type of endpoints which can be used

-				 *        when running in low speed mode - please refer to the USB 2.0 specification.

-				 */

-				#define USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED            (1 << 0)

-			#endif

-

-			/** Mask for the Options parameter of the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the

-			 *  USB interface should be initialized in full speed (12Mb/s) mode.

-			 */

-			#define USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED               (0 << 0)

-			//@}

-

-			#if (!defined(NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL) && \

-			     (defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || \

-			      defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_2_AVR) || \

-				  defined(__DOXYGEN__)))

-				/** String descriptor index for the device's unique serial number string descriptor within the device.

-				 *  This unique serial number is used by the host to associate resources to the device (such as drivers or COM port

-				 *  number allocations) to a device regardless of the port it is plugged in to on the host. Some microcontrollers contain

-				 *  a unique serial number internally, and setting the device descriptors serial number string index to this value

-				 *  will cause it to use the internal serial number.

-				 *

-				 *  On unsupported devices, this will evaluate to \ref NO_DESCRIPTOR and so will force the host to create a pseudo-serial

-				 *  number for the device.

-				 */

-				#define USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL            0xDC

-

-				/** Length of the device's unique internal serial number, in bits, if present on the selected microcontroller

-				 *  model.

-				 */

-				#define INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS    80

-

-				/** Start address of the internal serial number, in the appropriate address space, if present on the selected microcontroller

-				 *  model.

-				 */

-				#define INTERNAL_SERIAL_START_ADDRESS  0x0E

-			#else

-				#define USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL            NO_DESCRIPTOR

-

-				#define INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS    0

-				#define INTERNAL_SERIAL_START_ADDRESS  0

-			#endif

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Sends a Remote Wakeup request to the host. This signals to the host that the device should

-			 *  be taken out of suspended mode, and communications should resume.

-			 *

-			 *  Typically, this is implemented so that HID devices (mice, keyboards, etc.) can wake up the

-			 *  host computer when the host has suspended all USB devices to enter a low power state.

-			 *

-			 *  \attention This function should only be used if the device has indicated to the host that it

-			 *             supports the Remote Wakeup feature in the device descriptors, and should only be

-			 *             issued if the host is currently allowing remote wakeup events from the device (i.e.,

-			 *             the \ref USB_Device_RemoteWakeupEnabled flag is set). When the \c NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP

-			 *             compile time option is used, this function is unavailable.

-			 *             \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \attention The USB clock must be running for this function to operate. If the stack is initialized with

-			 *             the \ref USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL option enabled, the user must ensure that the PLL is running

-			 *             before attempting to call this function.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref Group_StdDescriptors for more information on the RMWAKEUP feature and device descriptors.

-			 */

-			void USB_Device_SendRemoteWakeup(void);

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Returns the current USB frame number, when in device mode. Every millisecond the USB bus is active (i.e. enumerated to a host)

-			 *  the frame number is incremented by one.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Current USB frame number from the USB controller.

-			 */

-			static inline uint16_t USB_Device_GetFrameNumber(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint16_t USB_Device_GetFrameNumber(void)

-			{

-				return UDFNUM;

-			}

-

-			#if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS)

-				/** Enables the device mode Start Of Frame events. When enabled, this causes the

-				 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event to fire once per millisecond, synchronized to the USB bus,

-				 *  at the start of each USB frame when enumerated in device mode.

-				 *

-				 *  \note This function is not available when the \c NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined.

-				 */

-				static inline void USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-				static inline void USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents(void)

-				{

-					USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SOFI);

-				}

-

-				/** Disables the device mode Start Of Frame events. When disabled, this stops the firing of the

-				 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event when enumerated in device mode.

-				 *

-				 *  \note This function is not available when the \c NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined.

-				 */

-				static inline void USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-				static inline void USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents(void)

-				{

-					USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SOFI);

-				}

-			#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			#if defined(USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED)

-			static inline void USB_Device_SetLowSpeed(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Device_SetLowSpeed(void)

-			{

-				UDCON |=  (1 << LSM);

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_Device_SetFullSpeed(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Device_SetFullSpeed(void)

-			{

-				UDCON &= ~(1 << LSM);

-			}

-			#endif

-

-			static inline void USB_Device_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Device_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address)

-			{

-				uint8_t Temp = (UDADDR & (1 << ADDEN)) | (Address & 0x7F);

-

-				UDADDR = Temp;

-				UDADDR = Temp | (1 << ADDEN);

-			}

-

-			static inline bool USB_Device_IsAddressSet(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline bool USB_Device_IsAddressSet(void)

-			{

-				return (UDADDR & (1 << ADDEN));

-			}

-

-			#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL != NO_DESCRIPTOR)

-			static inline void USB_Device_GetSerialString(uint16_t* const UnicodeString) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			static inline void USB_Device_GetSerialString(uint16_t* const UnicodeString)

-			{

-				uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask();

-				GlobalInterruptDisable();

-

-				uint8_t SigReadAddress = INTERNAL_SERIAL_START_ADDRESS;

-

-				for (uint8_t SerialCharNum = 0; SerialCharNum < (INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS / 4); SerialCharNum++)

-				{

-					uint8_t SerialByte = boot_signature_byte_get(SigReadAddress);

-

-					if (SerialCharNum & 0x01)

-					{

-						SerialByte >>= 4;

-						SigReadAddress++;

-					}

-

-					SerialByte &= 0x0F;

-

-					UnicodeString[SerialCharNum] = cpu_to_le16((SerialByte >= 10) ?

-															   (('A' - 10) + SerialByte) : ('0' + SerialByte));

-				}

-

-				SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt);

-			}

-			#endif

-

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/EndpointStream_AVR8.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/EndpointStream_AVR8.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 7563ed35a..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/EndpointStream_AVR8.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,275 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-

-#include "EndpointStream_AVR8.h"

-

-#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)

-uint8_t Endpoint_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length,

-                                uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)

-{

-	uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-	uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;

-	

-	if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))

-	  return ErrorCode;

-	  

-	if (BytesProcessed != NULL)

-	  Length -= *BytesProcessed;

-

-	while (Length)

-	{

-		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-		{

-			Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-

-			if (BytesProcessed != NULL)

-			{

-				*BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;

-				return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;

-			}

-

-			if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))

-			  return ErrorCode;

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			Endpoint_Discard_8();

-

-			Length--;

-			BytesInTransfer++;

-		}

-	}

-	

-	return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-uint8_t Endpoint_Null_Stream(uint16_t Length,

-                             uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)

-{

-	uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-	uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;

-	

-	if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))

-	  return ErrorCode;

-	  

-	if (BytesProcessed != NULL)

-	  Length -= *BytesProcessed;

-

-	while (Length)

-	{

-		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-		{

-			Endpoint_ClearIN();

-

-			if (BytesProcessed != NULL)

-			{

-				*BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;

-				return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;

-			}

-

-			if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))

-			  return ErrorCode;

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			Endpoint_Write_8(0);

-

-			Length--;

-			BytesInTransfer++;

-		}

-	}

-	

-	return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-/* The following abuses the C preprocessor in order to copy-paste common code with slight alterations,

- * so that the code needs to be written once. It is a crude form of templating to reduce code maintenance. */

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*

-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(*BufferPtr)

-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*

-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(*BufferPtr)

-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*

-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Endpoint_Read_8()

-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Stream_BE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*

-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Endpoint_Read_8()

-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"

-

-#if defined(ARCH_HAS_FLASH_ADDRESS_SPACE)

-	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_PStream_LE

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*

-	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount

-	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(pgm_read_byte(BufferPtr))

-	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"

-

-	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_PStream_BE

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*

-	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount

-	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(pgm_read_byte(BufferPtr))

-	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"

-#endif

-

-#if defined(ARCH_HAS_EEPROM_ADDRESS_SPACE)

-	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_EStream_LE

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*

-	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount

-	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(eeprom_read_byte(BufferPtr))

-	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"

-

-	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_EStream_BE

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*

-	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount

-	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(eeprom_read_byte(BufferPtr))

-	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"

-

-	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_EStream_LE

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*

-	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount

-	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_update_byte(BufferPtr, Endpoint_Read_8())

-	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"

-

-	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_EStream_BE

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*

-	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount

-	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_update_byte(BufferPtr, Endpoint_Read_8())

-	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"

-#endif

-

-#endif

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(*BufferPtr)

-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_BE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(*BufferPtr)

-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Endpoint_Read_8()

-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_BE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Endpoint_Read_8()

-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"

-

-#if defined(ARCH_HAS_FLASH_ADDRESS_SPACE)

-	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_LE

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount

-	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(pgm_read_byte(BufferPtr))

-	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"

-

-	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_BE

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount

-	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(pgm_read_byte(BufferPtr))

-	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"

-#endif

-

-#if defined(ARCH_HAS_EEPROM_ADDRESS_SPACE)

-	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_LE

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount

-	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(eeprom_read_byte(BufferPtr))

-	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"

-

-	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_BE

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount

-	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(eeprom_read_byte(BufferPtr))

-	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"

-

-	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Control_EStream_LE

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount

-	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_update_byte(BufferPtr, Endpoint_Read_8())

-	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"

-

-	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Control_EStream_BE

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount

-	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_update_byte(BufferPtr, Endpoint_Read_8())

-	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"

-#endif

-

-#endif

-

-#endif

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/EndpointStream_AVR8.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/EndpointStream_AVR8.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 77c9c82fe..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/EndpointStream_AVR8.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,648 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Endpoint data stream transmission and reception management for the AVR8 microcontrollers.

- *  \copydetails Group_EndpointStreamRW_AVR8

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW

- *  \defgroup Group_EndpointStreamRW_AVR8 Read/Write of Multi-Byte Streams (AVR8)

- *  \brief Endpoint data stream transmission and reception management for the Atmel AVR8 architecture.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of data streams from

- *  and to endpoints.

- *

- *  @{

- */ 

-

-#ifndef __ENDPOINT_STREAM_AVR8_H__

-#define __ENDPOINT_STREAM_AVR8_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "../USBMode.h"		

-		#include "../USBTask.h"

-		

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** \name Stream functions for null data */

-			//@{

-

-			/** Reads and discards the given number of bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank,

-			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically

-			 *  discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the user is responsible for manually

-			 *  discarding the last packet from the host via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,

-			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid

-			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time

-			 *  the endpoint bank becomes empty while there is still data to process (and after the current

-			 *  packet has been acknowledged) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the total number

-			 *  of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of

-			 *  \ref ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed

-			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters

-			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;

-			 *  

-			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Discard_Stream(512, NULL)) != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;

-			 *  

-			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;

-			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Discard_Stream(512, &BytesProcessed)) == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required

-			 *  }

-			 *  

-			 *  if (ErrorCode != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to discard via the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current

-			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length,

-			                                uint16_t* const BytesProcessed);

-

-			/** Writes a given number of zeroed bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank, sending

-			 *  full packets to the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically sent once the 

-			 *  remaining bytes have been written; the user is responsible for manually sending the last

-			 *  packet to the host via the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,

-			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid

-			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time

-			 *  the endpoint bank becomes full while there is still data to process (and after the current

-			 *  packet transmission has been initiated) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the

-			 *  total number of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of

-			 *  \ref ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed

-			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters

-			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;

-			 *  

-			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Null_Stream(512, NULL)) != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;

-			 *  

-			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;

-			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Null_Stream(512, &BytesProcessed)) == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required

-			 *  }

-			 *  

-			 *  if (ErrorCode != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of zero bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current

-			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Null_Stream(uint16_t Length,

-			                             uint16_t* const BytesProcessed);

-

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name Stream functions for RAM source/destination data */

-			//@{

-		

-			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,

-			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;

-			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the

-			 *  \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,

-			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid

-			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time

-			 *  the endpoint bank becomes full while there is still data to process (and after the current

-			 *  packet transmission has been initiated) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the

-			 *  total number of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of

-			 *  \ref ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed

-			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters

-			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t DataStream[512];

-			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;

-			 *  

-			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),

-			 *                                            NULL)) != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t  DataStream[512];

-			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;

-			 *

-			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;

-			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),

-			 *                                               &BytesProcessed)) == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required

-			 *  }

-			 *

-			 *  if (ErrorCode != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current

-			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                                 uint16_t Length,

-			                                 uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,

-			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;

-			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the

-			 *  \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current

-			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                                 uint16_t Length,

-			                                 uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			

-			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,

-			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically

-			 *  discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the user is responsible for manually

-			 *  discarding the last packet from the host via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,

-			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid

-			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time

-			 *  the endpoint bank becomes empty while there is still data to process (and after the current

-			 *  packet has been acknowledged) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the total number

-			 *  of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of

-			 *  \ref ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed

-			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters

-			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t DataStream[512];

-			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;

-			 *  

-			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),

-			 *                                           NULL)) != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t  DataStream[512];

-			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;

-			 *  

-			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;

-			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),

-			 *                                              &BytesProcessed)) == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required

-			 *  }

-			 *  

-			 *  if (ErrorCode != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.

-			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current

-			 *                              transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(void* const Buffer,

-			                                uint16_t Length,

-			                                uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,

-			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically

-			 *  discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the user is responsible for manually

-			 *  discarding the last packet from the host via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.

-			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current

-			 *                              transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Stream_BE(void* const Buffer,

-			                                uint16_t Length,

-			                                uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the CONTROL type endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,

-			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The host OUT acknowledgement is not automatically cleared

-			 *  in both failure and success states; the user is responsible for manually clearing the status OUT packet

-			 *  to finalize the transfer's status stage via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt

-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained

-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                                         uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the CONTROL type endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,

-			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The host OUT acknowledgement is not automatically cleared

-			 *  in both failure and success states; the user is responsible for manually clearing the status OUT packet

-			 *  to finalize the transfer's status stage via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt

-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained

-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_BE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                                         uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the CONTROL endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,

-			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The device IN acknowledgement is not

-			 *  automatically sent after success or failure states; the user is responsible for manually sending the

-			 *  status IN packet to finalize the transfer's status stage via the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt

-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained

-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.

-			 *  \param[in]  Length  Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(void* const Buffer,

-			                                        uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the CONTROL endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,

-			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The device IN acknowledgement is not

-			 *  automatically sent after success or failure states; the user is responsible for manually sending the

-			 *  status IN packet to finalize the transfer's status stage via the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt

-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained

-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.

-			 *  \param[in]  Length  Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_BE(void* const Buffer,

-			                                        uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name Stream functions for EEPROM source/destination data */

-			//@{

-

-			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current

-			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_EStream_LE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                                  uint16_t Length,

-			                                  uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current

-			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_EStream_BE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                                  uint16_t Length,

-			                                  uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** EEPROM buffer destination version of \ref Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to, located in EEPROM memory space.

-			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current

-			 *                              transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_EStream_LE(void* const Buffer,

-			                                 uint16_t Length,

-			                                 uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** EEPROM buffer destination version of \ref Endpoint_Read_Stream_BE().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to, located in EEPROM memory space.

-			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current

-			 *                              transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_EStream_BE(void* const Buffer,

-			                                 uint16_t Length,

-			                                 uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** EEPROM buffer source version of Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt

-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained

-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_LE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                                          uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_BE().

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt

-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained

-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_BE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                                          uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE().

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt

-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained

-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.

-			 *  \param[in]  Length  Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_EStream_LE(void* const Buffer,

-			                                         uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_BE().

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt

-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained

-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.

-			 *  \param[in]  Length  Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_EStream_BE(void* const Buffer,

-			                                         uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name Stream functions for PROGMEM source/destination data */

-			//@{

-

-			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE().

-			 *

-			 *  \pre The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current

-			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_PStream_LE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                                  uint16_t Length,

-			                                  uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE().

-			 *

-			 *  \pre The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current

-			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_PStream_BE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                                  uint16_t Length,

-			                                  uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE().

-			 *

-			 *  \pre The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt

-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained

-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_LE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                                          uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_BE().

-			 *

-			 *  \pre The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt

-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained

-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_BE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                                          uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			//@}

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-		

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Endpoint_AVR8.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Endpoint_AVR8.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 0002a256d..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Endpoint_AVR8.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,201 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-

-#include "../Endpoint.h"

-

-#if !defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE)

-uint8_t USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP_DEFAULT_SIZE;

-#endif

-

-bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(const USB_Endpoint_Table_t* const Table,

-                                     const uint8_t Entries)

-{

-	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < Entries; i++)

-	{

-		if (!(Table[i].Address))

-		  continue;

-	

-		if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(Table[i].Address, Table[i].Type, Table[i].Size, Table[i].Banks)))

-		  return false;

-	}

-	

-	return true;

-}

-

-bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_Prv(const uint8_t Number,

-                                    const uint8_t UECFG0XData,

-                                    const uint8_t UECFG1XData)

-{

-#if defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE) || defined(ORDERED_EP_CONFIG)

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(Number);

-	Endpoint_EnableEndpoint();

-

-	UECFG1X = 0;

-	UECFG0X = UECFG0XData;

-	UECFG1X = UECFG1XData;

-

-	return Endpoint_IsConfigured();

-#else

-	for (uint8_t EPNum = Number; EPNum < ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS; EPNum++)

-	{

-		uint8_t UECFG0XTemp;

-		uint8_t UECFG1XTemp;

-		uint8_t UEIENXTemp;

-

-		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(EPNum);

-

-		if (EPNum == Number)

-		{

-			UECFG0XTemp = UECFG0XData;

-			UECFG1XTemp = UECFG1XData;

-			UEIENXTemp  = 0;

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			UECFG0XTemp = UECFG0X;

-			UECFG1XTemp = UECFG1X;

-			UEIENXTemp  = UEIENX;

-		}

-

-		if (!(UECFG1XTemp & (1 << ALLOC)))

-		  continue;

-

-		Endpoint_DisableEndpoint();

-		UECFG1X &= ~(1 << ALLOC);

-

-		Endpoint_EnableEndpoint();

-		UECFG0X = UECFG0XTemp;

-		UECFG1X = UECFG1XTemp;

-		UEIENX  = UEIENXTemp;

-

-		if (!(Endpoint_IsConfigured()))

-		  return false;

-	}

-

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(Number);

-	return true;

-#endif

-}

-

-void Endpoint_ClearEndpoints(void)

-{

-	UEINT = 0;

-

-	for (uint8_t EPNum = 0; EPNum < ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS; EPNum++)

-	{

-		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(EPNum);

-		UEIENX  = 0;

-		UEINTX  = 0;

-		UECFG1X = 0;

-		Endpoint_DisableEndpoint();

-	}

-}

-

-void Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(void)

-{

-	if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST)

-	{

-		while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))

-		{

-			if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)

-			  return;

-		}

-

-		Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-	}

-	else

-	{

-		while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))

-		{

-			if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)

-			  return;

-		}

-

-		Endpoint_ClearIN();

-	}

-}

-

-#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)

-uint8_t Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(void)

-{

-	#if (USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS < 0xFF)

-	uint8_t  TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;

-	#else

-	uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;

-	#endif

-

-	uint16_t PreviousFrameNumber = USB_Device_GetFrameNumber();

-

-	for (;;)

-	{

-		if (Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection() == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)

-		{

-			if (Endpoint_IsINReady())

-			  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())

-			  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;

-		}

-

-		uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;

-

-		if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)

-		  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;

-		else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)

-		  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_BusSuspended;

-		else if (Endpoint_IsStalled())

-		  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_EndpointStalled;

-

-		uint16_t CurrentFrameNumber = USB_Device_GetFrameNumber();

-

-		if (CurrentFrameNumber != PreviousFrameNumber)

-		{

-			PreviousFrameNumber = CurrentFrameNumber;

-

-			if (!(TimeoutMSRem--))

-			  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_Timeout;

-		}

-	}

-}

-#endif

-

-#endif

-

-#endif

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Endpoint_AVR8.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Endpoint_AVR8.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 08944babc..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Endpoint_AVR8.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,819 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief USB Endpoint definitions for the AVR8 microcontrollers.

- *  \copydetails Group_EndpointManagement_AVR8

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointRW

- *  \defgroup Group_EndpointRW_AVR8 Endpoint Data Reading and Writing (AVR8)

- *  \brief Endpoint data read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR8 architecture.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing from and to endpoints.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW

- *  \defgroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_AVR8 Read/Write of Primitive Data Types (AVR8)

- *  \brief Endpoint primitive read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR8 architecture.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of primitive data types

- *  from and to endpoints.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement

- *  \defgroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_AVR8 Endpoint Packet Management (AVR8)

- *  \brief Endpoint packet management definitions for the Atmel AVR8 architecture.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to packet management of endpoints.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointManagement

- *  \defgroup Group_EndpointManagement_AVR8 Endpoint Management (AVR8)

- *  \brief Endpoint management definitions for the Atmel AVR8 architecture.

- *

- *  Functions, macros and enums related to endpoint management when in USB Device mode. This

- *  module contains the endpoint management macros, as well as endpoint interrupt and data

- *  send/receive functions for various data types.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __ENDPOINT_AVR8_H__

-#define __ENDPOINT_AVR8_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "../USBTask.h"

-		#include "../USBInterrupt.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST

-			                                                                       ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes)

-			{

-				uint8_t  MaskVal    = 0;

-				uint16_t CheckBytes = 8;

-

-				while (CheckBytes < Bytes)

-				{

-					MaskVal++;

-					CheckBytes <<= 1;

-				}

-

-				return (MaskVal << EPSIZE0);

-			}

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			void Endpoint_ClearEndpoints(void);

-			bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_Prv(const uint8_t Number,

-			                                    const uint8_t UECFG0XData,

-			                                    const uint8_t UECFG1XData);

-

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			#if (!defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))

-				/** Default size of the default control endpoint's bank, until altered by the control endpoint bank size

-				 *  value in the device descriptor. Not available if the \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token is defined.

-				 */

-				#define ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP_DEFAULT_SIZE     8

-			#endif

-

-			#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)

-					#define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS        7

-				#else

-					/** Total number of endpoints (including the default control endpoint at address 0) which may

-					 *  be used in the device. Different USB AVR models support different amounts of endpoints,

-					 *  this value reflects the maximum number of endpoints for the currently selected AVR model.

-					 */

-					#define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS        5

-				#endif

-			#else

-				#define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS            1

-			#endif

-

-		/* Enums: */

-			/** Enum for the possible error return codes of the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady() function.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointRW_AVR8

-			 */

-			enum Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t

-			{

-				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError                 = 0, /**< Endpoint is ready for next packet, no error. */

-				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_EndpointStalled         = 1, /**< The endpoint was stalled during the stream

-				                                                 *   transfer by the host or device.

-				                                                 */

-				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected      = 2,	/**< Device was disconnected from the host while

-				                                                 *   waiting for the endpoint to become ready.

-				                                                 */

-				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_BusSuspended            = 3, /**< The USB bus has been suspended by the host and

-				                                                 *   no USB endpoint traffic can occur until the bus

-				                                                 *   has resumed.

-				                                                 */

-				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_Timeout                 = 4, /**< The host failed to accept or send the next packet

-				                                                 *   within the software timeout period set by the

-				                                                 *   \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro.

-				                                                 */

-			};

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Configures the specified endpoint address with the given endpoint type, bank size and number of hardware

-			 *  banks. Once configured, the endpoint may be read from or written to, depending on its direction.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Address    Endpoint address to configure.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Type       Type of endpoint to configure, a \c EP_TYPE_* mask. Not all endpoint types

-			 *                        are available on Low Speed USB devices - refer to the USB 2.0 specification.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Size       Size of the endpoint's bank, where packets are stored before they are transmitted

-			 *                        to the USB host, or after they have been received from the USB host (depending on

-			 *                        the endpoint's data direction). The bank size must indicate the maximum packet size

-			 *                        that the endpoint can handle.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Banks      Number of banks to use for the endpoint being configured.

-			 *

-			 *  \attention When the \c ORDERED_EP_CONFIG compile time option is used, Endpoints <b>must</b> be configured in

-			 *             ascending order, or bank corruption will occur.

-			 *

-			 *  \note Different endpoints may have different maximum packet sizes based on the endpoint's index - please

-			 *        refer to the chosen microcontroller model's datasheet to determine the maximum bank size for each endpoint.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note The default control endpoint should not be manually configured by the user application, as

-			 *        it is automatically configured by the library internally.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine will automatically select the specified endpoint upon success. Upon failure, the endpoint

-			 *        which failed to reconfigure correctly will be selected.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the configuration succeeded, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(const uint8_t Address,

-			                                              const uint8_t Type,

-			                                              const uint16_t Size,

-			                                              const uint8_t Banks) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(const uint8_t Address,

-			                                              const uint8_t Type,

-			                                              const uint16_t Size,

-			                                              const uint8_t Banks)

-			{

-				uint8_t Number = (Address & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK);

-			

-				if (Number >= ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS)

-				  return false;

-			

-				return Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_Prv(Number,

-				                                      ((Type << EPTYPE0) | ((Address & ENDPOINT_DIR_IN) ? (1 << EPDIR) : 0)),

-				                                      ((1 << ALLOC) | ((Banks > 1) ? (1 << EPBK0) : 0) | Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(Size)));

-			}

-

-			/** Indicates the number of bytes currently stored in the current endpoint's selected bank.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointRW_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \return Total number of bytes in the currently selected Endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(void)

-			{

-				#if (defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)) && !defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__)

-					return UEBCX;

-				#elif defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__)

-					return (((uint16_t)UEBCHX << 8) | UEBCLX);

-				#elif defined(USB_SERIES_2_AVR)

-					return UEBCLX;

-				#endif

-			}

-

-			/** Determines the currently selected endpoint's direction.

-			 *

-			 *  \return The currently selected endpoint's direction, as a \c ENDPOINT_DIR_* mask.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection(void)

-			{

-				return (UECFG0X & (1 << EPDIR)) ? ENDPOINT_DIR_IN : ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT;

-			}

-

-			/** Get the endpoint address of the currently selected endpoint. This is typically used to save

-			 *  the currently selected endpoint so that it can be restored after another endpoint has been

-			 *  manipulated.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Index of the currently selected endpoint.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint(void)

-			{

-				#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)

-					return ((UENUM & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK) | Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection());

-				#else

-					return ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP;

-				#endif

-			}

-

-			/** Selects the given endpoint address.

-			 *

-			 *  Any endpoint operations which do not require the endpoint address to be indicated will operate on

-			 *  the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Address Endpoint address to select.

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(const uint8_t Address)

-			{

-				#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)

-					UENUM = (Address & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK);

-				#endif

-			}

-

-			/** Resets the endpoint bank FIFO. This clears all the endpoint banks and resets the USB controller's

-			 *  data In and Out pointers to the bank's contents.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Address  Endpoint address whose FIFO buffers are to be reset.

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(const uint8_t Address)

-			{

-				UERST = (1 << (Address & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK));

-				UERST = 0;

-			}

-

-			/** Enables the currently selected endpoint so that data can be sent and received through it to

-			 *  and from a host.

-			 *

-			 *  \note Endpoints must first be configured properly via \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint().

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_EnableEndpoint(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_EnableEndpoint(void)

-			{

-				UECONX |= (1 << EPEN);

-			}

-

-			/** Disables the currently selected endpoint so that data cannot be sent and received through it

-			 *  to and from a host.

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_DisableEndpoint(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_DisableEndpoint(void)

-			{

-				UECONX &= ~(1 << EPEN);

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is enabled, but not necessarily configured.

-			 *

-			 * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint is enabled, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsEnabled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsEnabled(void)

-			{

-				return ((UECONX & (1 << EPEN)) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Retrieves the number of busy banks in the currently selected endpoint, which have been queued for

-			 *  transmission via the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() command, or are awaiting acknowledgement via the

-			 *  \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() command.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \return Total number of busy banks in the selected endpoint.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetBusyBanks(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetBusyBanks(void)

-			{

-				return (UESTA0X & (0x03 << NBUSYBK0));

-			}

-

-			/** Aborts all pending IN transactions on the currently selected endpoint, once the bank

-			 *  has been queued for transmission to the host via \ref Endpoint_ClearIN(). This function

-			 *  will terminate all queued transactions, resetting the endpoint banks ready for a new

-			 *  packet.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_AVR8

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_AbortPendingIN(void)

-			{

-				while (Endpoint_GetBusyBanks() != 0)

-				{

-					UEINTX |= (1 << RXOUTI);

-					while (UEINTX & (1 << RXOUTI));

-				}

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint may be read from (if data is waiting in the endpoint

-			 *  bank and the endpoint is an OUT direction, or if the bank is not yet full if the endpoint is an IN

-			 *  direction). This function will return false if an error has occurred in the endpoint, if the endpoint

-			 *  is an OUT direction and no packet (or an empty packet) has been received, or if the endpoint is an IN

-			 *  direction and the endpoint bank is full.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint may be read from or written to, depending

-			 *          on its direction.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed(void)

-			{

-				return ((UEINTX & (1 << RWAL)) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is configured.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint has been configured, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsConfigured(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsConfigured(void)

-			{

-				return ((UESTA0X & (1 << CFGOK)) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Returns a mask indicating which INTERRUPT type endpoints have interrupted - i.e. their

-			 *  interrupt duration has elapsed. Which endpoints have interrupted can be determined by

-			 *  masking the return value against <tt>(1 << <i>{Endpoint Number}</i>)</tt>.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Mask whose bits indicate which endpoints have interrupted.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetEndpointInterrupts(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetEndpointInterrupts(void)

-			{

-				return UEINT;

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the specified endpoint number has interrupted (valid only for INTERRUPT type

-			 *  endpoints).

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Address  Address of the endpoint whose interrupt flag should be tested.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the specified endpoint has interrupted, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(const uint8_t Address)

-			{

-				return ((Endpoint_GetEndpointInterrupts() & (1 << (Address & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK))) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the selected IN endpoint is ready for a new packet to be sent to the host.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the current endpoint is ready for an IN packet, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsINReady(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsINReady(void)

-			{

-				return ((UEINTX & (1 << TXINI)) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the selected OUT endpoint has received new packet from the host.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if current endpoint is has received an OUT packet, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsOUTReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsOUTReceived(void)

-			{

-				return ((UEINTX & (1 << RXOUTI)) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the current CONTROL type endpoint has received a SETUP packet.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the selected endpoint has received a SETUP packet, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived(void)

-			{

-				return ((UEINTX & (1 << RXSTPI)) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Clears a received SETUP packet on the currently selected CONTROL type endpoint, freeing up the

-			 *  endpoint for the next packet.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \note This is not applicable for non CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_ClearSETUP(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_ClearSETUP(void)

-			{

-				UEINTX &= ~(1 << RXSTPI);

-			}

-

-			/** Sends an IN packet to the host on the currently selected endpoint, freeing up the endpoint for the

-			 *  next packet and switching to the alternative endpoint bank if double banked.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_AVR8

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_ClearIN(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_ClearIN(void)

-			{

-				#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)

-					UEINTX &= ~((1 << TXINI) | (1 << FIFOCON));

-				#else

-					UEINTX &= ~(1 << TXINI);

-				#endif

-			}

-

-			/** Acknowledges an OUT packet to the host on the currently selected endpoint, freeing up the endpoint

-			 *  for the next packet and switching to the alternative endpoint bank if double banked.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_AVR8

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_ClearOUT(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_ClearOUT(void)

-			{

-				#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)

-					UEINTX &= ~((1 << RXOUTI) | (1 << FIFOCON));

-				#else

-					UEINTX &= ~(1 << RXOUTI);

-				#endif

-			}

-

-			/** Stalls the current endpoint, indicating to the host that a logical problem occurred with the

-			 *  indicated endpoint and that the current transfer sequence should be aborted. This provides a

-			 *  way for devices to indicate invalid commands to the host so that the current transfer can be

-			 *  aborted and the host can begin its own recovery sequence.

-			 *

-			 *  The currently selected endpoint remains stalled until either the \ref Endpoint_ClearStall() macro

-			 *  is called, or the host issues a CLEAR FEATURE request to the device for the currently selected

-			 *  endpoint.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_AVR8

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_StallTransaction(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_StallTransaction(void)

-			{

-				UECONX |= (1 << STALLRQ);

-			}

-

-			/** Clears the STALL condition on the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_AVR8

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_ClearStall(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_ClearStall(void)

-			{

-				UECONX |= (1 << STALLRQC);

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is stalled, false otherwise.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint is stalled, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsStalled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsStalled(void)

-			{

-				return ((UECONX & (1 << STALLRQ)) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Resets the data toggle of the currently selected endpoint. */

-			static inline void Endpoint_ResetDataToggle(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_ResetDataToggle(void)

-			{

-				UECONX |= (1 << RSTDT);

-			}

-

-			/** Sets the direction of the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] DirectionMask  New endpoint direction, as a \c ENDPOINT_DIR_* mask.

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(const uint8_t DirectionMask) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(const uint8_t DirectionMask)

-			{

-				UECFG0X = ((UECFG0X & ~(1 << EPDIR)) | (DirectionMask ? (1 << EPDIR) : 0));

-			}

-

-			/** Reads one byte from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next byte in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_Read_8(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_Read_8(void)

-			{

-				return UEDATX;

-			}

-

-			/** Writes one byte to the currently selected endpoint's bank, for IN direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write into the the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_8(const uint8_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_8(const uint8_t Data)

-			{

-				UEDATX = Data;

-			}

-

-			/** Discards one byte from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_AVR8

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_8(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_8(void)

-			{

-				uint8_t Dummy;

-

-				Dummy = UEDATX;

-

-				(void)Dummy;

-			}

-

-			/** Reads two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for OUT

-			 *  direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next two bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_LE(void)

-			{

-				union

-				{

-					uint16_t Value;

-					uint8_t  Bytes[2];

-				} Data;

-

-				Data.Bytes[0] = UEDATX;

-				Data.Bytes[1] = UEDATX;

-

-				return Data.Value;

-			}

-

-			/** Reads two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for OUT

-			 *  direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next two bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_BE(void)

-			{

-				union

-				{

-					uint16_t Value;

-					uint8_t  Bytes[2];

-				} Data;

-

-				Data.Bytes[1] = UEDATX;

-				Data.Bytes[0] = UEDATX;

-

-				return Data.Value;

-			}

-

-			/** Writes two bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for IN

-			 *  direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data)

-			{

-				UEDATX = (Data & 0xFF);

-				UEDATX = (Data >> 8);

-			}

-

-			/** Writes two bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for IN

-			 *  direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data)

-			{

-				UEDATX = (Data >> 8);

-				UEDATX = (Data & 0xFF);

-			}

-

-			/** Discards two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_AVR8

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_16(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_16(void)

-			{

-				uint8_t Dummy;

-

-				Dummy = UEDATX;

-				Dummy = UEDATX;

-

-				(void)Dummy;

-			}

-

-			/** Reads four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for OUT

-			 *  direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next four bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_LE(void)

-			{

-				union

-				{

-					uint32_t Value;

-					uint8_t  Bytes[4];

-				} Data;

-

-				Data.Bytes[0] = UEDATX;

-				Data.Bytes[1] = UEDATX;

-				Data.Bytes[2] = UEDATX;

-				Data.Bytes[3] = UEDATX;

-

-				return Data.Value;

-			}

-

-			/** Reads four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for OUT

-			 *  direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next four bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_BE(void)

-			{

-				union

-				{

-					uint32_t Value;

-					uint8_t  Bytes[4];

-				} Data;

-

-				Data.Bytes[3] = UEDATX;

-				Data.Bytes[2] = UEDATX;

-				Data.Bytes[1] = UEDATX;

-				Data.Bytes[0] = UEDATX;

-

-				return Data.Value;

-			}

-

-			/** Writes four bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for IN

-			 *  direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data)

-			{

-				UEDATX = (Data &  0xFF);

-				UEDATX = (Data >> 8);

-				UEDATX = (Data >> 16);

-				UEDATX = (Data >> 24);

-			}

-

-			/** Writes four bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for IN

-			 *  direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data)

-			{

-				UEDATX = (Data >> 24);

-				UEDATX = (Data >> 16);

-				UEDATX = (Data >> 8);

-				UEDATX = (Data &  0xFF);

-			}

-

-			/** Discards four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_AVR8

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_32(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_32(void)

-			{

-				uint8_t Dummy;

-

-				Dummy = UEDATX;

-				Dummy = UEDATX;

-				Dummy = UEDATX;

-				Dummy = UEDATX;

-

-				(void)Dummy;

-			}

-

-		/* External Variables: */

-			/** Global indicating the maximum packet size of the default control endpoint located at address

-			 *  0 in the device. This value is set to the value indicated in the device descriptor in the user

-			 *  project once the USB interface is initialized into device mode.

-			 *

-			 *  If space is an issue, it is possible to fix this to a static value by defining the control

-			 *  endpoint size in the \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token passed to the compiler in the makefile

-			 *  via the -D switch. When a fixed control endpoint size is used, the size is no longer dynamically

-			 *  read from the descriptors at runtime and instead fixed to the given value. When used, it is

-			 *  important that the descriptor control endpoint size value matches the size given as the

-			 *  \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token - it is recommended that the \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token

-			 *  be used in the device descriptors to ensure this.

-			 *

-			 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually

-			 *             changed in value.

-			 */

-			#if (!defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))

-				extern uint8_t USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize;

-			#else

-				#define USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE

-			#endif

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Configures a table of endpoint descriptions, in sequence. This function can be used to configure multiple

-			 *  endpoints at the same time.

-			 *

-			 *  \note Endpoints with a zero address will be ignored, thus this function cannot be used to configure the

-			 *        control endpoint.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Table    Pointer to a table of endpoint descriptions.

-			 *  \param[in] Entries  Number of entries in the endpoint table to configure.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if all endpoints configured successfully, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(const USB_Endpoint_Table_t* const Table,

-			                                     const uint8_t Entries);

-

-			/** Completes the status stage of a control transfer on a CONTROL type endpoint automatically,

-			 *  with respect to the data direction. This is a convenience function which can be used to

-			 *  simplify user control request handling.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should not be called on non CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 */

-			void Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(void);

-

-			/** Spin-loops until the currently selected non-control endpoint is ready for the next packet of data

-			 *  to be read or written to it.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should not be called on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointRW_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(void);

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Host_AVR8.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Host_AVR8.c
deleted file mode 100644
index d93268337..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Host_AVR8.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,294 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_HOST_C

-#include "../Host.h"

-

-void USB_Host_ProcessNextHostState(void)

-{

-	uint8_t ErrorCode    = HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError;

-	uint8_t SubErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError;

-

-	static uint16_t WaitMSRemaining;

-	static uint8_t  PostWaitState;

-

-	switch (USB_HostState)

-	{

-		case HOST_STATE_WaitForDevice:

-			if (WaitMSRemaining)

-			{

-				if ((SubErrorCode = USB_Host_WaitMS(1)) != HOST_WAITERROR_Successful)

-				{

-					USB_HostState = PostWaitState;

-					ErrorCode     = HOST_ENUMERROR_WaitStage;

-					break;

-				}

-

-				if (!(--WaitMSRemaining))

-				  USB_HostState = PostWaitState;

-			}

-

-			break;

-		case HOST_STATE_Powered:

-			WaitMSRemaining = HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS;

-

-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForDeviceSettle;

-			break;

-		case HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForDeviceSettle:

-			if (WaitMSRemaining--)

-			{

-				Delay_MS(1);

-				break;

-			}

-			else

-			{

-				USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off();

-

-				USB_OTGPAD_On();

-				USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Enable();

-				USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_On();

-				

-				#if defined(NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT)

-				USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Enable();

-				USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_On();

-				#endif

-

-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForConnect;

-			}

-

-			break;

-		case HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForConnect:

-			if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_DCONNI))

-			{

-				USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DCONNI);

-				USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DDISCI);

-

-				USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_VBERRI);

-				USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_VBERRI);

-

-				USB_Host_ResumeBus();

-				Pipe_ClearPipes();

-

-				HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(100, HOST_STATE_Powered_DoReset);

-			}

-

-			break;

-		case HOST_STATE_Powered_DoReset:

-			USB_Host_ResetDevice();

-

-			HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(200, HOST_STATE_Powered_ConfigPipe);

-			break;

-		case HOST_STATE_Powered_ConfigPipe:

-			if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE, EP_TYPE_CONTROL, ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE, 1)))

-			{

-				ErrorCode    = HOST_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigError;

-				SubErrorCode = 0;

-				break;

-			}

-

-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Default;

-			break;

-		case HOST_STATE_Default:

-			USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-				{

-					.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),

-					.bRequest      = REQ_GetDescriptor,

-					.wValue        = (DTYPE_Device << 8),

-					.wIndex        = 0,

-					.wLength       = 8,

-				};

-

-			uint8_t DataBuffer[8];

-

-			Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-			if ((SubErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(DataBuffer)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-			{

-				ErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_ControlError;

-				break;

-			}

-

-			USB_Host_ControlPipeSize = DataBuffer[offsetof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t, Endpoint0Size)];

-

-			USB_Host_ResetDevice();

-

-			HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(200, HOST_STATE_Default_PostReset);

-			break;

-		case HOST_STATE_Default_PostReset:

-			if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE, EP_TYPE_CONTROL, ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, USB_Host_ControlPipeSize, 1)))

-			{

-				ErrorCode    = HOST_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigError;

-				SubErrorCode = 0;

-				break;

-			}

-

-			USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-				{

-					.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),

-					.bRequest      = REQ_SetAddress,

-					.wValue        = USB_HOST_DEVICEADDRESS,

-					.wIndex        = 0,

-					.wLength       = 0,

-				};

-

-			if ((SubErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-			{

-				ErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_ControlError;

-				break;

-			}

-

-			HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(100, HOST_STATE_Default_PostAddressSet);

-			break;

-		case HOST_STATE_Default_PostAddressSet:

-			USB_Host_SetDeviceAddress(USB_HOST_DEVICEADDRESS);

-

-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Addressed;

-

-			EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete();

-			break;

-	}

-

-	if ((ErrorCode != HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError) && (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Unattached))

-	{

-		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(ErrorCode, SubErrorCode);

-

-		USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off();

-

-		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();

-

-		USB_ResetInterface();

-	}

-}

-

-uint8_t USB_Host_WaitMS(uint8_t MS)

-{

-	bool    BusSuspended = USB_Host_IsBusSuspended();

-	uint8_t ErrorCode    = HOST_WAITERROR_Successful;

-	bool    HSOFIEnabled = USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_HSOFI);

-

-	USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_HSOFI);

-	USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);

-

-	USB_Host_ResumeBus();

-

-	while (MS)

-	{

-		if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI))

-		{

-			USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);

-			MS--;

-		}

-

-		if ((USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached) || (USB_CurrentMode != USB_MODE_Host))

-		{

-			ErrorCode = HOST_WAITERROR_DeviceDisconnect;

-

-			break;

-		}

-

-		if (Pipe_IsError())

-		{

-			Pipe_ClearError();

-			ErrorCode = HOST_WAITERROR_PipeError;

-

-			break;

-		}

-

-		if (Pipe_IsStalled())

-		{

-			Pipe_ClearStall();

-			ErrorCode = HOST_WAITERROR_SetupStalled;

-

-			break;

-		}

-	}

-

-	if (BusSuspended)

-	  USB_Host_SuspendBus();

-

-	if (HSOFIEnabled)

-	  USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_HSOFI);

-

-	return ErrorCode;

-}

-

-static void USB_Host_ResetDevice(void)

-{

-	bool BusSuspended = USB_Host_IsBusSuspended();

-

-	USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_DDISCI);

-

-	USB_Host_ResetBus();

-	while (!(USB_Host_IsBusResetComplete()));

-	USB_Host_ResumeBus();

-

-	USB_Host_ConfigurationNumber = 0;

-

-	bool HSOFIEnabled = USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_HSOFI);

-

-	USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_HSOFI);

-	USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);

-

-	for (uint8_t MSRem = 10; MSRem != 0; MSRem--)

-	{

-		/* Workaround for powerless-pull-up devices. After a USB bus reset,

-		   all disconnection interrupts are suppressed while a USB frame is

-		   looked for - if it is found within 10ms, the device is still

-		   present.                                                        */

-

-		if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI))

-		{

-			USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);

-			USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DDISCI);

-			break;

-		}

-

-		Delay_MS(1);

-	}

-

-	if (HSOFIEnabled)

-	  USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_HSOFI);

-

-	if (BusSuspended)

-	  USB_Host_SuspendBus();

-

-	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_DDISCI);

-}

-

-#endif

-

-#endif

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Host_AVR8.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Host_AVR8.h
deleted file mode 100644
index f8d92f81f..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Host_AVR8.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,372 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief USB Host definitions for the AVR8 microcontrollers.

- *  \copydetails Group_Host_AVR8

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Host

- *  \defgroup Group_Host_AVR8 Host Management (AVR8)

- *  \brief USB Host definitions for the AVR8 microcontrollers.

- *

- *  Architecture specific USB Host definitions for the Atmel 8-bit AVR microcontrollers.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __USBHOST_AVR8_H__

-#define __USBHOST_AVR8_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "../StdDescriptors.h"

-		#include "../Pipe.h"

-		#include "../USBInterrupt.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-		#if defined(INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE) && !defined(NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT)

-			#error The INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE compile option requires NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT for the AVR8 architecture.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Indicates the fixed USB device address which any attached device is enumerated to when in

-			 *  host mode. As only one USB device may be attached to the AVR in host mode at any one time

-			 *  and that the address used is not important (other than the fact that it is non-zero), a

-			 *  fixed value is specified by the library.

-			 */

-			#define USB_HOST_DEVICEADDRESS                 1

-

-			#if !defined(HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				/** Constant for the delay in milliseconds after a device is connected before the library

-				 *  will start the enumeration process. Some devices require a delay of up to 5 seconds

-				 *  after connection before the enumeration process can start or incorrect operation will

-				 *  occur.

-				 *

-				 *  The default delay value may be overridden in the user project makefile by defining the

-				 *  \c HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS token to the required delay in milliseconds, and passed to the

-				 *  compiler using the -D switch.

-				 */

-				#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS        1000

-			#endif

-

-			/** Enum for the error codes for the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_HostError() event.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref Group_Events for more information on this event.

-			 */

-			enum USB_Host_ErrorCodes_t

-			{

-				HOST_ERROR_VBusVoltageDip       = 0, /**< VBUS voltage dipped to an unacceptable level. This

-				                                      *   error may be the result of an attached device drawing

-				                                      *   too much current from the VBUS line, or due to the

-				                                      *   AVR's power source being unable to supply sufficient

-				                                      *   current.

-				                                      */

-			};

-

-			/** Enum for the error codes for the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed() event.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref Group_Events for more information on this event.

-			 */

-			enum USB_Host_EnumerationErrorCodes_t

-			{

-				HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError          = 0, /**< No error occurred. Used internally, this is not a valid

-				                                      *   ErrorCode parameter value for the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed()

-				                                      *   event.

-				                                      */

-				HOST_ENUMERROR_WaitStage        = 1, /**< One of the delays between enumeration steps failed

-				                                      *   to complete successfully, due to a timeout or other

-				                                      *   error.

-				                                      */

-				HOST_ENUMERROR_NoDeviceDetected = 2, /**< No device was detected, despite the USB data lines

-				                                      *   indicating the attachment of a device.

-				                                      */

-				HOST_ENUMERROR_ControlError     = 3, /**< One of the enumeration control requests failed to

-				                                      *   complete successfully.

-				                                      */

-				HOST_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigError  = 4, /**< The default control pipe (address 0) failed to

-				                                      *   configure correctly.

-				                                      */

-			};

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Returns the current USB frame number, when in host mode. Every millisecond the USB bus is active (i.e. not suspended)

-			 *  the frame number is incremented by one.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Current USB frame number from the USB controller.

-			 */

-			static inline uint16_t USB_Host_GetFrameNumber(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint16_t USB_Host_GetFrameNumber(void)

-			{

-				return UHFNUM;

-			}

-

-			#if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS)

-				/** Enables the host mode Start Of Frame events. When enabled, this causes the

-				 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Host_StartOfFrame() event to fire once per millisecond, synchronized to the USB bus,

-				 *  at the start of each USB frame when a device is enumerated while in host mode.

-				 *

-				 *  \note This function is not available when the \c NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined.

-				 */

-				static inline void USB_Host_EnableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-				static inline void USB_Host_EnableSOFEvents(void)

-				{

-					USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_HSOFI);

-				}

-

-				/** Disables the host mode Start Of Frame events. When disabled, this stops the firing of the

-				 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Host_StartOfFrame() event when enumerated in host mode.

-				 *

-				 *  \note This function is not available when the \c NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined.

-				 */

-				static inline void USB_Host_DisableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-				static inline void USB_Host_DisableSOFEvents(void)

-				{

-					USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_HSOFI);

-				}

-			#endif

-

-			/** Resets the USB bus, including the endpoints in any attached device and pipes on the AVR host.

-			 *  USB bus resets leave the default control pipe configured (if already configured).

-			 *

-			 *  If the USB bus has been suspended prior to issuing a bus reset, the attached device will be

-			 *  woken up automatically and the bus resumed after the reset has been correctly issued.

-			 */

-			static inline void USB_Host_ResetBus(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Host_ResetBus(void)

-			{

-				UHCON |=  (1 << RESET);

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if a previously issued bus reset (via the \ref USB_Host_ResetBus() macro) has

-			 *  completed.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if no bus reset is currently being sent, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool USB_Host_IsBusResetComplete(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool USB_Host_IsBusResetComplete(void)

-			{

-				return ((UHCON & (1 << RESET)) ? false : true);

-			}

-

-			/** Resumes USB communications with an attached and enumerated device, by resuming the transmission

-			 *  of the 1MS Start Of Frame messages to the device. When resumed, USB communications between the

-			 *  host and attached device may occur.

-			 */

-			static inline void USB_Host_ResumeBus(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Host_ResumeBus(void)

-			{

-				UHCON |=  (1 << SOFEN);

-			}

-

-			/** Suspends the USB bus, preventing any communications from occurring between the host and attached

-			 *  device until the bus has been resumed. This stops the transmission of the 1MS Start Of Frame

-			 *  messages to the device.

-			 *

-			 *  \attention While the USB bus is suspended, all USB interrupt sources are also disabled; this means that

-			 *             some events (such as device disconnections) will not fire until the bus is resumed.

-			 */

-			static inline void USB_Host_SuspendBus(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Host_SuspendBus(void)

-			{

-				UHCON &= ~(1 << SOFEN);

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the USB bus has been suspended via the use of the \ref USB_Host_SuspendBus() macro,

-			 *  false otherwise. While suspended, no USB communications can occur until the bus is resumed,

-			 *  except for the Remote Wakeup event from the device if supported.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the bus is currently suspended, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool USB_Host_IsBusSuspended(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool USB_Host_IsBusSuspended(void)

-			{

-				return ((UHCON & (1 << SOFEN)) ? false : true);

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the attached device is currently enumerated in Full Speed mode (12Mb/s), or

-			 *  false if the attached device is enumerated in Low Speed mode (1.5Mb/s).

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the attached device is enumerated in Full Speed mode, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool USB_Host_IsDeviceFullSpeed(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool USB_Host_IsDeviceFullSpeed(void)

-			{

-				return ((USBSTA & (1 << SPEED)) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the attached device is currently issuing a Remote Wakeup request, requesting

-			 *  that the host resume the USB bus and wake up the device, false otherwise.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the attached device has sent a Remote Wakeup request, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool USB_Host_IsRemoteWakeupSent(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool USB_Host_IsRemoteWakeupSent(void)

-			{

-				return ((UHINT & (1 << RXRSMI)) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Clears the flag indicating that a Remote Wakeup request has been issued by an attached device. */

-			static inline void USB_Host_ClearRemoteWakeupSent(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Host_ClearRemoteWakeupSent(void)

-			{

-				UHINT &= ~(1 << RXRSMI);

-			}

-

-			/** Accepts a Remote Wakeup request from an attached device. This must be issued in response to

-			 *  a device's Remote Wakeup request within 2ms for the request to be accepted and the bus to

-			 *  be resumed.

-			 */

-			static inline void USB_Host_ResumeFromWakeupRequest(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Host_ResumeFromWakeupRequest(void)

-			{

-				UHCON |=  (1 << RESUME);

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if a resume from Remote Wakeup request is currently being sent to an attached

-			 *  device.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if no resume request is currently being sent, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool USB_Host_IsResumeFromWakeupRequestSent(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool USB_Host_IsResumeFromWakeupRequestSent(void)

-			{

-				return ((UHCON & (1 << RESUME)) ? false : true);

-			}

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			static inline void USB_Host_HostMode_On(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Host_HostMode_On(void)

-			{

-				USBCON |=  (1 << HOST);

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_Host_HostMode_Off(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Host_HostMode_Off(void)

-			{

-				USBCON &= ~(1 << HOST);

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Enable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Enable(void)

-			{

-				OTGCON &= ~(1 << VBUSHWC);

-				UHWCON |=  (1 << UVCONE);

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Enable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Enable(void)

-			{

-				OTGCON |=  (1 << VBUSHWC);

-				UHWCON &= ~(1 << UVCONE);

-

-				DDRE   |=  (1 << 7);

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_On(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_On(void)

-			{

-				OTGCON |=  (1 << VBUSREQ);

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_On(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_On(void)

-			{

-				#if defined(INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE)

-				PORTE  &= ~(1 << 7);

-				#else

-				PORTE  |=  (1 << 7);

-				#endif

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off(void)

-			{

-				OTGCON |=  (1 << VBUSRQC);

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off(void)

-			{

-				#if defined(INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE)

-				PORTE  |=  (1 << 7);

-				#else

-				PORTE  &= ~(1 << 7);

-				#endif

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_Host_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Host_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address)

-			{

-				UHADDR  =  (Address & 0x7F);

-			}

-

-		/* Enums: */

-			enum USB_Host_WaitMSErrorCodes_t

-			{

-				HOST_WAITERROR_Successful       = 0,

-				HOST_WAITERROR_DeviceDisconnect = 1,

-				HOST_WAITERROR_PipeError        = 2,

-				HOST_WAITERROR_SetupStalled     = 3,

-			};

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			void    USB_Host_ProcessNextHostState(void);

-			uint8_t USB_Host_WaitMS(uint8_t MS);

-

-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_HOST_C)

-				static void USB_Host_ResetDevice(void);

-			#endif

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/OTG_AVR8.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/OTG_AVR8.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 5296beb6a..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/OTG_AVR8.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,159 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief USB OTG definitions for the AVR8 microcontrollers.

- *  \copydetails Group_OTG_AVR8

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_OTG

- *  \defgroup Group_OTG_AVR8 USB On The Go (OTG) Management (AVR8)

- *  \brief USB OTG definitions for the AVR8 microcontrollers.

- *

- *  Architecture specific USB OTG definitions for the Atmel 8-bit AVR microcontrollers.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __USBOTG_AVR8_H__

-#define __USBOTG_AVR8_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Mask for the VBUS pulsing method of SRP, supported by some OTG devices.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref USB_OTG_Device_InitiateSRP().

-			 */

-			#define USB_OTG_SRP_VBUS                   (1 << SRPSEL)

-

-			/** Mask for the Data + pulsing method of SRP, supported by some OTG devices.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref USB_OTG_Device_InitiateSRP().

-			 */

-			#define USB_OTG_STP_DATA                   0

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Initiate a Host Negotiation Protocol request. This indicates to the other connected device

-			 *  that the device wishes to change device/host roles.

-			 */

-			static inline void USB_OTG_Device_RequestHNP(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_OTG_Device_RequestHNP(void)

-			{

-				OTGCON |=  (1 << HNPREQ);

-			}

-

-			/** Cancel a Host Negotiation Protocol request. This stops a pending HNP request to the other

-			 *  connected device.

-			 */

-			static inline void USB_OTG_Device_CancelHNPRequest(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_OTG_Device_CancelHNPRequest(void)

-			{

-				OTGCON &= ~(1 << HNPREQ);

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the device is currently sending a HNP to an attached host.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if currently sending a HNP to the other connected device, \c false otherwise

-			 */

-			static inline bool USB_OTG_Device_IsSendingHNP(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool USB_OTG_Device_IsSendingHNP(void)

-			{

-				return ((OTGCON & (1 << HNPREQ)) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Initiates a Session Request Protocol request. Most OTG devices turn off VBUS when the USB

-			 *  interface is not in use, to conserve power. Sending a SRP to a USB OTG device running in

-			 *  host mode indicates that VBUS should be applied and a session started.

-			 *

-			 *  There are two different methods of sending a SRP - either pulses on the VBUS line, or by

-			 *  pulsing the Data + line via the internal pull-up resistor.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] SRPTypeMask  Mask indicating the type of SRP to use, either \ref USB_OTG_SRP_VBUS or

-			 *                          \ref USB_OTG_STP_DATA.

-			 */

-			static inline void USB_OTG_Device_InitiateSRP(const uint8_t SRPTypeMask) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_OTG_Device_InitiateSRP(const uint8_t SRPTypeMask)

-			{

-				OTGCON = ((OTGCON & ~(1 << SRPSEL)) | (SRPTypeMask | (1 << SRPREQ)));

-			}

-

-			/** Accepts a HNP from a connected device, indicating that both devices should exchange

-			 *  device/host roles.

-			 */

-			static inline void USB_OTG_Host_AcceptHNP(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_OTG_Host_AcceptHNP(void)

-			{

-				OTGCON |=  (1 << HNPREQ);

-			}

-

-			/** Rejects a HNP from a connected device, indicating that both devices should remain in their

-			 *  current device/host roles.

-			 */

-			static inline void USB_OTG_Host_RejectHNP(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_OTG_Host_RejectHNP(void)

-			{

-				OTGCON &= ~(1 << HNPREQ);

-			}

-

-			/** Indicates if the connected device is currently sending a HNP request.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if a HNP is currently being issued by the connected device, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool USB_OTG_Host_IsHNPReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool USB_OTG_Host_IsHNPReceived(void)

-			{

-				return ((OTGCON & (1 << HNPREQ)) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/PipeStream_AVR8.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/PipeStream_AVR8.c
deleted file mode 100644
index e71a7bd32..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/PipeStream_AVR8.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,221 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-

-#include "PipeStream_AVR8.h"

-

-uint8_t Pipe_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length,

-                            uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)

-{

-	uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-	uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;

-	

-	Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_IN);

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	if (BytesProcessed != NULL)

-	  Length -= *BytesProcessed;

-

-	while (Length)

-	{

-		if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-		{

-			Pipe_ClearIN();

-				

-			if (BytesProcessed != NULL)

-			{

-				*BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;

-				return PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;

-			}

-

-			if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))

-			  return ErrorCode;

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			Pipe_Discard_8();

-			

-			Length--;

-			BytesInTransfer++;

-		}

-	}

-

-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-uint8_t Pipe_Null_Stream(uint16_t Length,

-                         uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)

-{

-	uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-	uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;

-	

-	Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_OUT);

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	if (BytesProcessed != NULL)

-	  Length -= *BytesProcessed;

-

-	while (Length)

-	{

-		if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-		{

-			Pipe_ClearOUT();

-				

-			if (BytesProcessed != NULL)

-			{

-				*BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;

-				return PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;

-			}

-			

-			USB_USBTask();

-

-			if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))

-			  return ErrorCode;

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			Pipe_Write_8(0);

-			

-			Length--;

-			BytesInTransfer++;

-		}

-	}

-

-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-/* The following abuses the C preprocessor in order to copy-paste common code with slight alterations,

- * so that the code needs to be written once. It is a crude form of templating to reduce code maintenance. */

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Write_Stream_LE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*

-#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_OUT

-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearOUT()

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   DataStream += Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Pipe_Write_8(*BufferPtr)

-#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Write_Stream_BE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*

-#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_OUT

-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearOUT()

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   DataStream -= Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Pipe_Write_8(*BufferPtr)

-#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Read_Stream_LE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*

-#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_IN

-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearIN()

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   DataStream += Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Pipe_Read_8()

-#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Read_Stream_BE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*

-#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_IN

-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearIN()

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   DataStream -= Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Pipe_Read_8()

-#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Write_PStream_LE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*

-#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_OUT

-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearOUT()

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   DataStream += Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Pipe_Write_8(pgm_read_byte(BufferPtr))

-#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Write_PStream_BE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*

-#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_OUT

-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearOUT()

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   DataStream -= Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Pipe_Write_8(pgm_read_byte(BufferPtr))

-#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Write_EStream_LE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*

-#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_OUT

-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearOUT()

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   DataStream += Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Pipe_Write_8(eeprom_read_byte(BufferPtr))

-#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Write_EStream_BE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*

-#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_OUT

-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearOUT()

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   DataStream -= Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Pipe_Write_8(eeprom_read_byte(BufferPtr))

-#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Read_EStream_LE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*

-#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_IN

-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearIN()

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   DataStream += Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_update_byte(BufferPtr, Pipe_Read_8())

-#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Read_EStream_BE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*

-#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_IN

-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearIN()

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   DataStream -= Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_update_byte(BufferPtr, Pipe_Read_8())

-#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"

-

-#endif

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/PipeStream_AVR8.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/PipeStream_AVR8.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 8307ab497..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/PipeStream_AVR8.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,442 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

- 

-/** \file

- *  \brief Pipe data stream transmission and reception management for the AVR8 microcontrollers

- *  \copydetails Group_PipeStreamRW_AVR8

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_PipeStreamRW

- *  \defgroup Group_PipeStreamRW_AVR8 Read/Write of Multi-Byte Streams (AVR8)

- *  \brief Pipe data stream transmission and reception management for the Atmel AVR8 architecture.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of data streams from

- *  and to pipes.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __PIPE_STREAM_AVR8_H__

-#define __PIPE_STREAM_AVR8_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "../USBMode.h"		

-		#include "../USBTask.h"

-		

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-		

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** \name Stream functions for null data */

-			//@{

-

-			/** Reads and discards the given number of bytes from the pipe, discarding fully read packets from the host

-			 *  as needed. The last packet is not automatically discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the

-			 *  user is responsible for manually discarding the last packet from the device via the \ref Pipe_ClearIN() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once, failing or

-			 *  succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid storage location, the transfer

-			 *  will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time the pipe bank becomes empty while there is still data

-			 *  to process (and after the current packet has been acknowledged) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with

-			 *  the total number of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of

-			 *  \ref PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed in the user code - to

-			 *  continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters and it will resume until the BytesProcessed

-			 *  value reaches the total transfer length.

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;

-			 *  

-			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Discard_Stream(512, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;

-			 *  

-			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;

-			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Discard_Stream(512, &BytesProcessed)) == PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required

-			 *  }

-			 *  

-			 *  if (ErrorCode != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  \note The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without

-			 *        having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to discard via the currently selected pipe.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should

-			 *                             updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be processed at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Pipe_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length,

-			                            uint16_t* const BytesProcessed);

-

-			/** Writes a given number of zeroed bytes to the pipe, sending full pipe packets from the host to the device

-			 *  as needed. The last packet is not automatically sent once the remaining bytes has been written; the

-			 *  user is responsible for manually discarding the last packet from the device via the \ref Pipe_ClearOUT() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once, failing or

-			 *  succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid storage location, the transfer

-			 *  will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time the pipe bank becomes full while there is still data

-			 *  to process (and after the current packet transmission has been initiated) the BytesProcessed location will be

-			 *  updated with the total number of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of

-			 *  \ref PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed in the user code - to

-			 *  continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters and it will resume until the BytesProcessed

-			 *  value reaches the total transfer length.

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;

-			 *  

-			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Null_Stream(512, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;

-			 *  

-			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;

-			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Null_Stream(512, &BytesProcessed)) == PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required

-			 *  }

-			 *  

-			 *  if (ErrorCode != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  \note The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without

-			 *        having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of zero bytes to write via the currently selected pipe.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should

-			 *                             updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be processed at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Pipe_Null_Stream(uint16_t Length,

-			                         uint16_t* const BytesProcessed);

-

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name Stream functions for RAM source/destination data */

-			//@{

-			

-			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the pipe from the given buffer in little endian,

-			 *  sending full packets to the device as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;

-			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the

-			 *  \ref Pipe_ClearOUT() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is

-			 *  executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.

-			 *

-			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,

-			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid

-			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time

-			 *  the pipe bank becomes full while there is still data to process (and after the current

-			 *  packet transmission has been initiated) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the

-			 *  total number of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of

-			 *  \ref PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed

-			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters

-			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t DataStream[512];

-			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;

-			 *  

-			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),

-			 *                                        NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t  DataStream[512];

-			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;

-			 *  

-			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;

-			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),

-			 *                                           &BytesProcessed)) == PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required

-			 *  }

-			 *  

-			 *  if (ErrorCode != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  \note The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without

-			 *        having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe into the buffer.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should

-			 *                             updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                             uint16_t Length,

-			                             uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the pipe from the given buffer in big endian,

-			 *  sending full packets to the device as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;

-			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the

-			 *  \ref Pipe_ClearOUT() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is

-			 *  executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.

-			 *

-			 *  \note The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without

-			 *        having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe into the buffer.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should

-			 *                             updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Pipe_Write_Stream_BE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                             uint16_t Length,

-			                             uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the pipe into the given buffer in little endian,

-			 *  sending full packets to the device as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;

-			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the

-			 *  \ref Pipe_ClearIN() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is

-			 *  executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.

-			 *

-			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,

-			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid

-			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time

-			 *  the pipe bank becomes empty while there is still data to process (and after the current

-			 *  packet has been acknowledged) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the total number

-			 *  of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of

-			 *  \ref PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed

-			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters

-			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t DataStream[512];

-			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;

-			 *  

-			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),

-			 *                                       NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t  DataStream[512];

-			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;

-			 *  

-			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;

-			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),

-			 *                                          &BytesProcessed)) == PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required

-			 *  }

-			 *  

-			 *  if (ErrorCode != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  \note The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without

-			 *        having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to write to.

-			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe to read from.

-			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should

-			 *                              updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(void* const Buffer,

-			                            uint16_t Length,

-			                            uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the pipe into the given buffer in big endian,

-			 *  sending full packets to the device as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;

-			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the

-			 *  \ref Pipe_ClearIN() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is

-			 *  executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.

-			 *

-			 *  \note The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without

-			 *        having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to write to.

-			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe to read from.

-			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should

-			 *                              updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Pipe_Read_Stream_BE(void* const Buffer,

-			                            uint16_t Length,

-			                            uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name Stream functions for EEPROM source/destination data */

-			//@{

-			

-			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Pipe_Write_Stream_LE().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe into the buffer.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should

-			 *                             updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Pipe_Write_EStream_LE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                              uint16_t Length,

-			                              uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			

-			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Pipe_Write_Stream_BE().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe into the buffer.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should

-			 *                             updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Pipe_Write_EStream_BE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                              uint16_t Length,

-			                              uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Pipe_Read_Stream_LE().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to write to.

-			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe to read from.

-			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should

-			 *                              updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Pipe_Read_EStream_LE(void* const Buffer,

-			                             uint16_t Length,

-			                             uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			

-			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Pipe_Read_Stream_BE().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to write to.

-			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe to read from.

-			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should

-			 *                              updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Pipe_Read_EStream_BE(void* const Buffer,

-			                             uint16_t Length,

-			                             uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name Stream functions for PROGMEM source/destination data */

-			//@{

-			

-			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Pipe_Write_Stream_LE().

-			 *

-			 *  \pre The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe into the buffer.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should

-			 *                             updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Pipe_Write_PStream_LE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                              uint16_t Length,

-			                              uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			

-			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Pipe_Write_Stream_BE().

-			 *

-			 *  \pre The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe into the buffer.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should

-			 *                             updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Pipe_Write_PStream_BE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                              uint16_t Length,

-			                              uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			//@}

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-	

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Pipe_AVR8.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Pipe_AVR8.c
deleted file mode 100644
index bf3ff003c..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Pipe_AVR8.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,210 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-

-#include "../Pipe.h"

-

-uint8_t USB_Host_ControlPipeSize = PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE;

-

-bool Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(const USB_Pipe_Table_t* const Table,

-                             const uint8_t Entries)

-{

-	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < Entries; i++)

-	{

-		if (!(Table[i].Address))

-		  continue;

-	

-		if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipe(Table[i].Address, Table[i].Type, Table[i].EndpointAddress, Table[i].Size, Table[i].Banks)))

-		{

-			return false;

-		}

-	}

-	

-	return true;

-}

-

-bool Pipe_ConfigurePipe(const uint8_t Address,

-                        const uint8_t Type,

-                        const uint8_t EndpointAddress,

-                        const uint16_t Size,

-                        const uint8_t Banks)

-{

-	uint8_t Number = (Address & PIPE_EPNUM_MASK);

-	uint8_t Token  = (Address & PIPE_DIR_IN) ? PIPE_TOKEN_IN : PIPE_TOKEN_OUT;

-	

-	if (Number >= PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES)

-	  return false;

-

-	if (Type == EP_TYPE_CONTROL)

-	  Token = PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP;

-

-#if defined(ORDERED_EP_CONFIG)

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(Number);

-	Pipe_EnablePipe();

-

-	UPCFG1X = 0;

-

-	UPCFG0X = ((Type << EPTYPE0) | Token | ((EndpointAddress & PIPE_EPNUM_MASK) << PEPNUM0));

-	UPCFG1X = ((1 << ALLOC) | ((Banks > 1) ? (1 << EPBK0) : 0) | Pipe_BytesToEPSizeMask(Size));

-

-	Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests();

-

-	return Pipe_IsConfigured();

-#else

-	for (uint8_t PNum = Number; PNum < PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES; PNum++)

-	{

-		uint8_t UPCFG0XTemp;

-		uint8_t UPCFG1XTemp;

-		uint8_t UPCFG2XTemp;

-		uint8_t UPIENXTemp;

-

-		Pipe_SelectPipe(PNum);

-

-		if (PNum == Number)

-		{

-			UPCFG0XTemp = ((Type << EPTYPE0) | Token | ((EndpointAddress & PIPE_EPNUM_MASK) << PEPNUM0));

-			UPCFG1XTemp = ((1 << ALLOC) | Banks | Pipe_BytesToEPSizeMask(Size));

-			UPCFG2XTemp = 0;

-			UPIENXTemp  = 0;

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			UPCFG0XTemp = UPCFG0X;

-			UPCFG1XTemp = UPCFG1X;

-			UPCFG2XTemp = UPCFG2X;

-			UPIENXTemp  = UPIENX;

-		}

-

-		if (!(UPCFG1XTemp & (1 << ALLOC)))

-		  continue;

-

-		Pipe_DisablePipe();

-		UPCFG1X &= ~(1 << ALLOC);

-

-		Pipe_EnablePipe();

-		UPCFG0X = UPCFG0XTemp;

-		UPCFG1X = UPCFG1XTemp;

-		UPCFG2X = UPCFG2XTemp;

-		UPIENX  = UPIENXTemp;

-

-		Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests();

-

-		if (!(Pipe_IsConfigured()))

-		  return false;

-	}

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(Number);

-	return true;

-#endif

-}

-

-void Pipe_ClearPipes(void)

-{

-	UPINT = 0;

-

-	for (uint8_t PNum = 0; PNum < PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES; PNum++)

-	{

-		Pipe_SelectPipe(PNum);

-		UPIENX  = 0;

-		UPINTX  = 0;

-		UPCFG1X = 0;

-		Pipe_DisablePipe();

-	}

-}

-

-bool Pipe_IsEndpointBound(const uint8_t EndpointAddress)

-{

-	uint8_t PrevPipeNumber = Pipe_GetCurrentPipe();

-

-	for (uint8_t PNum = 0; PNum < PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES; PNum++)

-	{

-		Pipe_SelectPipe(PNum);

-

-		if (!(Pipe_IsConfigured()))

-		  continue;

-

-		if (Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress() == EndpointAddress)

-		  return true;

-	}

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PrevPipeNumber);

-	return false;

-}

-

-uint8_t Pipe_WaitUntilReady(void)

-{

-	#if (USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS < 0xFF)

-	uint8_t  TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;

-	#else

-	uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;

-	#endif

-

-	uint16_t PreviousFrameNumber = USB_Host_GetFrameNumber();

-

-	for (;;)

-	{

-		if (Pipe_GetPipeToken() == PIPE_TOKEN_IN)

-		{

-			if (Pipe_IsINReceived())

-			  return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			if (Pipe_IsOUTReady())

-			  return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;

-		}

-

-		if (Pipe_IsStalled())

-		  return PIPE_READYWAIT_PipeStalled;

-		else if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)

-		  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-		uint16_t CurrentFrameNumber = USB_Host_GetFrameNumber();

-

-		if (CurrentFrameNumber != PreviousFrameNumber)

-		{

-			PreviousFrameNumber = CurrentFrameNumber;

-

-			if (!(TimeoutMSRem--))

-			  return PIPE_READYWAIT_Timeout;

-		}

-	}

-}

-

-#endif

-

-#endif

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Pipe_AVR8.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Pipe_AVR8.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 24c7b36cb..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Pipe_AVR8.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,921 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief USB Pipe definitions for the AVR8 microcontrollers.

- *  \copydetails Group_PipeManagement_AVR8

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_PipeRW

- *  \defgroup Group_PipeRW_AVR8 Pipe Data Reading and Writing (AVR8)

- *  \brief Pipe data read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR8 architecture.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing from and to pipes.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW

- *  \defgroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_AVR8 Read/Write of Primitive Data Types (AVR8)

- *  \brief Pipe primitive data read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR8 architecture.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of primitive data types

- *  from and to pipes.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement

- *  \defgroup Group_PipePacketManagement_AVR8 Pipe Packet Management (AVR8)

- *  \brief Pipe packet management definitions for the Atmel AVR8 architecture.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to packet management of pipes.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq

- *  \defgroup Group_PipeControlReq_AVR8 Pipe Control Request Management (AVR8)

- *  \brief Pipe control request management definitions for the Atmel AVR8 architecture.

- *

- *  Module for host mode request processing. This module allows for the transmission of standard, class and

- *  vendor control requests to the default control endpoint of an attached device while in host mode.

- *

- *  \see Chapter 9 of the USB 2.0 specification.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_PipeManagement

- *  \defgroup Group_PipeManagement_AVR8 Pipe Management (AVR8)

- *  \brief Pipe management definitions for the Atmel AVR8 architecture.

- *

- *  This module contains functions, macros and enums related to pipe management when in USB Host mode. This

- *  module contains the pipe management macros, as well as pipe interrupt and data send/receive functions

- *  for various data types.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __PIPE_AVR8_H__

-#define __PIPE_AVR8_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "../USBTask.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** \name Pipe Error Flag Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that an overflow error occurred in the pipe on the received data. */

-			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_OVERFLOW         (1 << 6)

-

-			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that an underflow error occurred in the pipe on the received data. */

-			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_UNDERFLOW        (1 << 5)

-

-			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a CRC error occurred in the pipe on the received data. */

-			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_CRC16            (1 << 4)

-

-			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware timeout error occurred in the pipe. */

-			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_TIMEOUT          (1 << 3)

-

-			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware PID error occurred in the pipe. */

-			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_PID              (1 << 2)

-

-			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware data PID error occurred in the pipe. */

-			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATAPID          (1 << 1)

-

-			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware data toggle error occurred in the pipe. */

-			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATATGL          (1 << 0)

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name Pipe Token Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** Token mask for \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken() and \ref Pipe_GetPipeToken(). This sets the pipe as a SETUP token (for CONTROL type pipes),

-			 *  which will trigger a control request on the attached device when data is written to the pipe.

-			 */

-			#define PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP                (0 << PTOKEN0)

-

-			/** Token mask for \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken() and \ref Pipe_GetPipeToken(). This sets the pipe as a IN token (for non-CONTROL type pipes),

-			 *  indicating that the pipe data will flow from device to host.

-			 */

-			#define PIPE_TOKEN_IN                   (1 << PTOKEN0)

-

-			/** Token mask for \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken() and \ref Pipe_GetPipeToken(). This sets the pipe as a OUT token (for non-CONTROL type pipes),

-			 *  indicating that the pipe data will flow from host to device.

-			 */

-			#define PIPE_TOKEN_OUT                  (2 << PTOKEN0)

-			//@}

-

-			/** Default size of the default control pipe's bank, until altered by the Endpoint0Size value

-			 *  in the device descriptor of the attached device.

-			 */

-			#define PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE   64

-

-			/** Total number of pipes (including the default control pipe at address 0) which may be used in

-			 *  the device. Different USB AVR models support different amounts of pipes, this value reflects

-			 *  the maximum number of pipes for the currently selected AVR model.

-			 */

-			#define PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES                7

-

-			/** Size in bytes of the largest pipe bank size possible in the device. Not all banks on each AVR

-			 *  model supports the largest bank size possible on the device; different pipe numbers support

-			 *  different maximum bank sizes. This value reflects the largest possible bank of any pipe on the

-			 *  currently selected USB AVR model.

-			 */

-			#define PIPE_MAX_SIZE                   256

-

-		/* Enums: */

-			/** Enum for the possible error return codes of the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady() function.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeRW_AVR8

-			 */

-			enum Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t

-			{

-				PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError                 = 0, /**< Pipe ready for next packet, no error. */

-				PIPE_READYWAIT_PipeStalled             = 1,	/**< The device stalled the pipe while waiting. */

-				PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected      = 2,	/**< Device was disconnected from the host while waiting. */

-				PIPE_READYWAIT_Timeout                 = 3, /**< The device failed to accept or send the next packet

-				                                             *   within the software timeout period set by the

-				                                             *   \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro.

-				                                             */

-			};

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Indicates the number of bytes currently stored in the current pipes's selected bank.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeRW_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \return Total number of bytes in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline uint16_t Pipe_BytesInPipe(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint16_t Pipe_BytesInPipe(void)

-			{

-				return UPBCX;

-			}

-

-			/** Determines the currently selected pipe's direction.

-			 *

-			 *  \return The currently selected pipe's direction, as a \c PIPE_DIR_* mask.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeDirection(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeDirection(void)

-			{

-				return (UPCFG0X & (1 << EPDIR)) ? PIPE_DIR_IN : PIPE_DIR_OUT;

-			}

-			

-			/** Returns the pipe address of the currently selected pipe. This is typically used to save the

-			 *  currently selected pipe address so that it can be restored after another pipe has been manipulated.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Index of the currently selected pipe.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetCurrentPipe(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetCurrentPipe(void)

-			{

-				return ((UPNUM & PIPE_PIPENUM_MASK) | Pipe_GetPipeDirection());

-			}

-

-			/** Selects the given pipe address. Any pipe operations which do not require the pipe address to be

-			 *  indicated will operate on the currently selected pipe.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Address  Address of the pipe to select.

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_SelectPipe(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_SelectPipe(const uint8_t Address)

-			{

-				UPNUM = (Address & PIPE_PIPENUM_MASK);

-			}

-

-			/** Resets the desired pipe, including the pipe banks and flags.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Address  Address of the pipe to reset.

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_ResetPipe(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_ResetPipe(const uint8_t Address)

-			{

-				UPRST = (1 << (Address & PIPE_PIPENUM_MASK));

-				UPRST = 0;

-			}

-

-			/** Enables the currently selected pipe so that data can be sent and received through it to and from

-			 *  an attached device.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre The currently selected pipe must first be configured properly via \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe().

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_EnablePipe(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_EnablePipe(void)

-			{

-				UPCONX |= (1 << PEN);

-			}

-

-			/** Disables the currently selected pipe so that data cannot be sent and received through it to and

-			 *  from an attached device.

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_DisablePipe(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_DisablePipe(void)

-			{

-				UPCONX &= ~(1 << PEN);

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the currently selected pipe is enabled, but not necessarily configured.

-			 *

-			 * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected pipe is enabled, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsEnabled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsEnabled(void)

-			{

-				return ((UPCONX & (1 << PEN)) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Gets the current pipe token, indicating the pipe's data direction and type.

-			 *

-			 *  \return The current pipe token, as a \c PIPE_TOKEN_* mask.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeToken(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeToken(void)

-			{

-				return (UPCFG0X & (0x03 << PTOKEN0));

-			}

-

-			/** Sets the token for the currently selected pipe to one of the tokens specified by the \c PIPE_TOKEN_*

-			 *  masks. This can be used on CONTROL type pipes, to allow for bidirectional transfer of data during

-			 *  control requests, or on regular pipes to allow for half-duplex bidirectional data transfer to devices

-			 *  which have two endpoints of opposite direction sharing the same endpoint address within the device.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Token  New pipe token to set the selected pipe to, as a \c PIPE_TOKEN_* mask.

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_SetPipeToken(const uint8_t Token) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_SetPipeToken(const uint8_t Token)

-			{

-				UPCFG0X = ((UPCFG0X & ~(0x03 << PTOKEN0)) | Token);

-			}

-

-			/** Configures the currently selected pipe to allow for an unlimited number of IN requests. */

-			static inline void Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(void)

-			{

-				UPCONX |= (1 << INMODE);

-			}

-

-			/** Configures the currently selected pipe to only allow the specified number of IN requests to be

-			 *  accepted by the pipe before it is automatically frozen.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] TotalINRequests  Total number of IN requests that the pipe may receive before freezing.

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_SetFiniteINRequests(const uint8_t TotalINRequests) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_SetFiniteINRequests(const uint8_t TotalINRequests)

-			{

-				UPCONX &= ~(1 << INMODE);

-				UPINRQX = TotalINRequests;

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the currently selected pipe is configured.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the selected pipe is configured, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsConfigured(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsConfigured(void)

-			{

-				return ((UPSTAX & (1 << CFGOK)) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Retrieves the endpoint address of the endpoint within the attached device that the currently selected

-			 *  pipe is bound to.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Endpoint address the currently selected pipe is bound to.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress(void)

-			{

-				uint8_t UPCFG0X_Temp = UPCFG0X;

-				

-				return (((UPCFG0X_Temp >> PEPNUM0) & PIPE_EPNUM_MASK) | ((UPCFG0X_Temp & PEPNUM1) ? ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT : ENDPOINT_DIR_IN));

-			}

-

-			/** Sets the period between interrupts for an INTERRUPT type pipe to a specified number of milliseconds.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Milliseconds  Number of milliseconds between each pipe poll.

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(const uint8_t Milliseconds) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(const uint8_t Milliseconds)

-			{

-				UPCFG2X = Milliseconds;

-			}

-

-			/** Returns a mask indicating which pipe's interrupt periods have elapsed, indicating that the pipe should

-			 *  be serviced.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Mask whose bits indicate which pipes have interrupted.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeInterrupts(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeInterrupts(void)

-			{

-				return UPINT;

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the specified pipe address has interrupted (valid only for INTERRUPT type

-			 *  pipes).

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Address  Address of the pipe whose interrupt flag should be tested.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the specified pipe has interrupted, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Pipe_HasPipeInterrupted(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Pipe_HasPipeInterrupted(const uint8_t Address)

-			{

-				return ((UPINT & (1 << (Address & PIPE_PIPENUM_MASK))) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Unfreezes the selected pipe, allowing it to communicate with an attached device. */

-			static inline void Pipe_Unfreeze(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_Unfreeze(void)

-			{

-				UPCONX &= ~(1 << PFREEZE);

-			}

-

-			/** Freezes the selected pipe, preventing it from communicating with an attached device. */

-			static inline void Pipe_Freeze(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_Freeze(void)

-			{

-				UPCONX |= (1 << PFREEZE);

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the currently selected pipe is frozen, and not able to accept data.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected pipe is frozen, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsFrozen(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsFrozen(void)

-			{

-				return ((UPCONX & (1 << PFREEZE)) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Clears the error flags for the currently selected pipe. */

-			static inline void Pipe_ClearError(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_ClearError(void)

-			{

-				UPERRX = 0;

-				UPINTX &= ~(1 << PERRI);

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the master pipe error flag is set for the currently selected pipe, indicating that

-			 *  some sort of hardware error has occurred on the pipe.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags() macro for information on retrieving the exact error flag.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if an error has occurred on the selected pipe, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsError(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsError(void)

-			{

-				return ((UPINTX & (1 << PERRI)) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Gets a mask of the hardware error flags which have occurred on the currently selected pipe. This

-			 *  value can then be masked against the \c PIPE_ERRORFLAG_* masks to determine what error has occurred.

-			 *

-			 *  \return  Mask comprising of \c PIPE_ERRORFLAG_* bits indicating what error has occurred on the selected pipe.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetErrorFlags(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetErrorFlags(void)

-			{

-				return ((UPERRX & (PIPE_ERRORFLAG_CRC16 | PIPE_ERRORFLAG_TIMEOUT |

-				                   PIPE_ERRORFLAG_PID   | PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATAPID |

-				                   PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATATGL)) |

-				        (UPSTAX & (PIPE_ERRORFLAG_OVERFLOW | PIPE_ERRORFLAG_UNDERFLOW)));

-			}

-

-			/** Retrieves the number of busy banks in the currently selected pipe, which have been queued for

-			 *  transmission via the \ref Pipe_ClearOUT() command, or are awaiting acknowledgement via the

-			 *  \ref Pipe_ClearIN() command.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \return Total number of busy banks in the selected pipe.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetBusyBanks(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetBusyBanks(void)

-			{

-				return (UPSTAX & (0x03 << NBUSYBK0));

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the currently selected pipe may be read from (if data is waiting in the pipe

-			 *  bank and the pipe is an IN direction, or if the bank is not yet full if the pipe is an OUT

-			 *  direction). This function will return false if an error has occurred in the pipe, or if the pipe

-			 *  is an IN direction and no packet (or an empty packet) has been received, or if the pipe is an OUT

-			 *  direction and the pipe bank is full.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function is not valid on CONTROL type pipes.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected pipe may be read from or written to, depending

-			 *          on its direction.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed(void)

-			{

-				return ((UPINTX & (1 << RWAL)) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if a packet has been received on the currently selected IN pipe from the attached device.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the current pipe has received an IN packet, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsINReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsINReceived(void)

-			{

-				return ((UPINTX & (1 << RXINI)) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the currently selected OUT pipe is ready to send an OUT packet to the attached device.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the current pipe is ready for an OUT packet, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsOUTReady(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsOUTReady(void)

-			{

-				return ((UPINTX & (1 << TXOUTI)) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if no SETUP request is currently being sent to the attached device on the selected

-			 *  CONTROL type pipe.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the current pipe is ready for a SETUP packet, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsSETUPSent(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsSETUPSent(void)

-			{

-				return ((UPINTX & (1 << TXSTPI)) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Sends the currently selected CONTROL type pipe's contents to the device as a SETUP packet.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_AVR8

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_ClearSETUP(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_ClearSETUP(void)

-			{

-				UPINTX &= ~((1 << TXSTPI) | (1 << FIFOCON));

-			}

-

-			/** Acknowledges the reception of a setup IN request from the attached device on the currently selected

-			 *  pipe, freeing the bank ready for the next packet.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_AVR8

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_ClearIN(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_ClearIN(void)

-			{

-				UPINTX &= ~((1 << RXINI) | (1 << FIFOCON));

-			}

-

-			/** Sends the currently selected pipe's contents to the device as an OUT packet on the selected pipe, freeing

-			 *  the bank ready for the next packet.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_AVR8

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_ClearOUT(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_ClearOUT(void)

-			{

-				UPINTX &= ~((1 << TXOUTI) | (1 << FIFOCON));

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the device sent a NAK (Negative Acknowledge) in response to the last sent packet on

-			 *  the currently selected pipe. This occurs when the host sends a packet to the device, but the device

-			 *  is not currently ready to handle the packet (i.e. its endpoint banks are full). Once a NAK has been

-			 *  received, it must be cleared using \ref Pipe_ClearNAKReceived() before the previous (or any other) packet

-			 *  can be re-sent.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if an NAK has been received on the current pipe, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsNAKReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsNAKReceived(void)

-			{

-				return ((UPINTX & (1 << NAKEDI)) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Clears the NAK condition on the currently selected pipe.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref Pipe_IsNAKReceived() for more details.

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_ClearNAKReceived(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_ClearNAKReceived(void)

-			{

-				UPINTX &= ~(1 << NAKEDI);

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the currently selected pipe has had the STALL condition set by the attached device.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the current pipe has been stalled by the attached device, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsStalled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsStalled(void)

-			{

-				return ((UPINTX & (1 << RXSTALLI)) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Clears the STALL condition detection flag on the currently selected pipe, but does not clear the

-			 *  STALL condition itself (this must be done via a ClearFeature control request to the device).

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_AVR8

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_ClearStall(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_ClearStall(void)

-			{

-				UPINTX &= ~(1 << RXSTALLI);

-			}

-

-			/** Reads one byte from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next byte in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_Read_8(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_Read_8(void)

-			{

-				return UPDATX;

-			}

-

-			/** Writes one byte to the currently selected pipe's bank, for IN direction pipes.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write into the the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_Write_8(const uint8_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_Write_8(const uint8_t Data)

-			{

-				UPDATX = Data;

-			}

-

-			/** Discards one byte from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_AVR8

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_Discard_8(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_Discard_8(void)

-			{

-				uint8_t Dummy;

-

-				Dummy = UPDATX;

-

-				(void)Dummy;

-			}

-

-			/** Reads two bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for OUT

-			 *  direction pipes.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next two bytes in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_16_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_16_LE(void)

-			{

-				union

-				{

-					uint16_t Value;

-					uint8_t  Bytes[2];

-				} Data;

-

-				Data.Bytes[0] = UPDATX;

-				Data.Bytes[1] = UPDATX;

-

-				return Data.Value;

-			}

-

-			/** Reads two bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for OUT

-			 *  direction pipes.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next two bytes in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_16_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_16_BE(void)

-			{

-				union

-				{

-					uint16_t Value;

-					uint8_t  Bytes[2];

-				} Data;

-

-				Data.Bytes[1] = UPDATX;

-				Data.Bytes[0] = UPDATX;

-

-				return Data.Value;

-			}

-

-			/** Writes two bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for IN

-			 *  direction pipes.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data)

-			{

-				UPDATX = (Data & 0xFF);

-				UPDATX = (Data >> 8);

-			}

-

-			/** Writes two bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for IN

-			 *  direction pipes.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data)

-			{

-				UPDATX = (Data >> 8);

-				UPDATX = (Data & 0xFF);

-			}

-

-			/** Discards two bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_AVR8

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_Discard_16(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_Discard_16(void)

-			{

-				uint8_t Dummy;

-

-				Dummy = UPDATX;

-				Dummy = UPDATX;

-

-				(void)Dummy;

-			}

-

-			/** Reads four bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for OUT

-			 *  direction pipes.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next four bytes in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_32_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_32_LE(void)

-			{

-				union

-				{

-					uint32_t Value;

-					uint8_t  Bytes[4];

-				} Data;

-

-				Data.Bytes[0] = UPDATX;

-				Data.Bytes[1] = UPDATX;

-				Data.Bytes[2] = UPDATX;

-				Data.Bytes[3] = UPDATX;

-

-				return Data.Value;

-			}

-

-			/** Reads four bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for OUT

-			 *  direction pipes.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next four bytes in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_32_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_32_BE(void)

-			{

-				union

-				{

-					uint32_t DWord;

-					uint8_t  Bytes[4];

-				} Data;

-

-				Data.Bytes[3] = UPDATX;

-				Data.Bytes[2] = UPDATX;

-				Data.Bytes[1] = UPDATX;

-				Data.Bytes[0] = UPDATX;

-

-				return Data.DWord;

-			}

-

-			/** Writes four bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for IN

-			 *  direction pipes.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data)

-			{

-				UPDATX = (Data &  0xFF);

-				UPDATX = (Data >> 8);

-				UPDATX = (Data >> 16);

-				UPDATX = (Data >> 24);

-			}

-

-			/** Writes four bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for IN

-			 *  direction pipes.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data)

-			{

-				UPDATX = (Data >> 24);

-				UPDATX = (Data >> 16);

-				UPDATX = (Data >> 8);

-				UPDATX = (Data &  0xFF);

-			}

-

-			/** Discards four bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_AVR8

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_Discard_32(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_Discard_32(void)

-			{

-				uint8_t Dummy;

-

-				Dummy = UPDATX;

-				Dummy = UPDATX;

-				Dummy = UPDATX;

-				Dummy = UPDATX;

-

-				(void)Dummy;

-			}

-

-		/* External Variables: */

-			/** Global indicating the maximum packet size of the default control pipe located at address

-			 *  0 in the device. This value is set to the value indicated in the attached device's device

-		     *  descriptor once the USB interface is initialized into host mode and a device is attached

-			 *  to the USB bus.

-			 *

-			 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually

-			 *             changed in value.

-			 */

-			extern uint8_t USB_Host_ControlPipeSize;

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Configures a table of pipe descriptions, in sequence. This function can be used to configure multiple

-			 *  pipes at the same time.

-			 *

-			 *  \note Pipe with a zero address will be ignored, thus this function cannot be used to configure the

-			 *        control pipe.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Table    Pointer to a table of pipe descriptions.

-			 *  \param[in] Entries  Number of entries in the pipe table to configure.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if all pipes configured successfully, \c false otherwise.

-			 */			

-			bool Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(const USB_Pipe_Table_t* const Table,

-			                             const uint8_t Entries);

-										 

-			/** Configures the specified pipe address with the given pipe type, endpoint address within the attached device, bank size

-			 *  and number of hardware banks.

-			 *

-			 *  A newly configured pipe is frozen by default, and must be unfrozen before use via the \ref Pipe_Unfreeze()

-			 *  before being used. Pipes should be kept frozen unless waiting for data from a device while in IN mode, or

-			 *  sending data to the device in OUT mode. IN type pipes are also automatically configured to accept infinite

-			 *  numbers of IN requests without automatic freezing - this can be overridden by a call to

-			 *  \ref Pipe_SetFiniteINRequests().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Address          Pipe address to configure.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Type             Type of pipe to configure, an \c EP_TYPE_* mask. Not all pipe types are available on Low

-			 *                              Speed USB devices - refer to the USB 2.0 specification.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] EndpointAddress  Endpoint address within the attached device that the pipe should interface to.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Size             Size of the pipe's bank, where packets are stored before they are transmitted to

-			 *                              the USB device, or after they have been received from the USB device (depending on

-			 *                              the pipe's data direction). The bank size must indicate the maximum packet size that

-			 *                              the pipe can handle.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Banks            Number of banks to use for the pipe being configured.

-			 *

-			 *  \attention When the \c ORDERED_EP_CONFIG compile time option is used, Pipes <b>must</b> be configured in ascending order,

-			 *             or bank corruption will occur.

-			 *

-			 *  \note Certain microcontroller model's pipes may have different maximum packet sizes based on the pipe's

-			 *        index - refer to the chosen microcontroller's datasheet to determine the maximum bank size for each pipe.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note The default control pipe should not be manually configured by the user application, as it is

-			 *        automatically configured by the library internally.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine will automatically select the specified pipe upon success. Upon failure, the pipe which

-			 *        failed to reconfigure correctly will be selected.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the configuration succeeded, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			bool Pipe_ConfigurePipe(const uint8_t Address,

-			                        const uint8_t Type,

-			                        const uint8_t EndpointAddress,

-			                        const uint16_t Size,

-			                        const uint8_t Banks);

-

-			/** Spin-loops until the currently selected non-control pipe is ready for the next packet of data to be read

-			 *  or written to it, aborting in the case of an error condition (such as a timeout or device disconnect).

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeRW_AVR8

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Pipe_WaitUntilReady(void);

-

-			/** Determines if a pipe has been bound to the given device endpoint address. If a pipe which is bound to the given

-			 *  endpoint is found, it is automatically selected.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] EndpointAddress Address and direction mask of the endpoint within the attached device to check.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if a pipe bound to the given endpoint address of the specified direction is found,

-			 *          \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			bool Pipe_IsEndpointBound(const uint8_t EndpointAddress) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#if !defined(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP)

-				#define ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP          0

-			#endif

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes)

-			{

-				uint8_t  MaskVal    = 0;

-				uint16_t CheckBytes = 8;

-

-				while ((CheckBytes < Bytes) && (CheckBytes < PIPE_MAX_SIZE))

-				{

-					MaskVal++;

-					CheckBytes <<= 1;

-				}

-

-				return (MaskVal << EPSIZE0);

-			}

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			void Pipe_ClearPipes(void);

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c
deleted file mode 100644
index ab69536b0..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,85 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#if defined(TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME)

-

-// cppcheck-suppress unusedFunction

-uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (void* const Buffer,

-                            uint16_t Length)

-{

-	uint8_t* DataStream = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));

-

-	if (!(Length))

-	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-

-	while (Length)

-	{

-		uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;

-

-		if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)

-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-		else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)

-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;

-		else if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())

-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_HostAborted;

-

-		if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())

-		{

-			while (Length && Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())

-			{

-				TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);

-				TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, 1);

-				Length--;

-			}

-

-			Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-		}

-	}

-

-	while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))

-	{

-		uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;

-

-		if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)

-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-		else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)

-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;

-	}

-

-	return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET

-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE

-#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME

-#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c
deleted file mode 100644
index c2d171db0..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,94 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#if defined(TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME)

-

-// cppcheck-suppress unusedFunction

-uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (const void* const Buffer,

-                            uint16_t Length)

-{

-	uint8_t* DataStream     = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));

-	bool     LastPacketFull = false;

-

-	if (Length > USB_ControlRequest.wLength)

-	  Length = USB_ControlRequest.wLength;

-	else if (!(Length))

-	  Endpoint_ClearIN();

-

-	while (Length || LastPacketFull)

-	{

-		uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;

-

-		if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)

-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-		else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)

-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;

-		else if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())

-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_HostAborted;

-		else if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())

-		  break;

-

-		if (Endpoint_IsINReady())

-		{

-			uint16_t BytesInEndpoint = Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint();

-

-			while (Length && (BytesInEndpoint < USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize))

-			{

-				TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);

-				TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, 1);

-				Length--;

-				BytesInEndpoint++;

-			}

-

-			LastPacketFull = (BytesInEndpoint == USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize);

-			Endpoint_ClearIN();

-		}

-	}

-

-	while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))

-	{

-		uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;

-

-		if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)

-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-		else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)

-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;

-	}

-

-	return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET

-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE

-#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME

-#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 02ad97867..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,90 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#if defined(TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME)

-

-// cppcheck-suppress unusedFunction

-uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE const Buffer,

-                            uint16_t Length,

-                            uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)

-{

-	uint8_t* DataStream      = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));

-	uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;

-	uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	if (BytesProcessed != NULL)

-	{

-		Length -= *BytesProcessed;

-		TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, *BytesProcessed);

-	}

-

-	while (Length)

-	{

-		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-		{

-			TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT();

-

-			#if !defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)

-			USB_USBTask();

-			#endif

-

-			if (BytesProcessed != NULL)

-			{

-				*BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;

-				return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;

-			}

-

-			if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))

-			  return ErrorCode;

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);

-			TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, 1);

-			Length--;

-			BytesInTransfer++;

-		}

-	}

-

-	return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME

-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE

-#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE

-#undef TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT

-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET

-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 05846bb61..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,89 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#if defined(TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME)

-

-// cppcheck-suppress unusedFunction

-uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE const Buffer,

-                            uint16_t Length,

-                            uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)

-{

-	uint8_t* DataStream      = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));

-	uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;

-	uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-

-	Pipe_SetPipeToken(TEMPLATE_TOKEN);

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	if (BytesProcessed != NULL)

-	{

-		Length -= *BytesProcessed;

-		TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, *BytesProcessed);

-	}

-

-	while (Length)

-	{

-		if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-		{

-			TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE();

-

-			if (BytesProcessed != NULL)

-			{

-				*BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;

-				return PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;

-			}

-

-			if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))

-			  return ErrorCode;

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);

-			TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, 1);

-			Length--;

-			BytesInTransfer++;

-		}

-	}

-

-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME

-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE

-#undef TEMPLATE_TOKEN

-#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE

-#undef TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE

-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET

-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/USBController_AVR8.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/USBController_AVR8.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 37b106ab6..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/USBController_AVR8.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,265 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_CONTROLLER_C

-#include "../USBController.h"

-

-#if (!defined(USB_HOST_ONLY) && !defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY))

-volatile uint8_t USB_CurrentMode = USB_MODE_None;

-#endif

-

-#if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)

-volatile uint8_t USB_Options;

-#endif

-

-void USB_Init(

-               #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)

-               const uint8_t Mode

-               #endif

-

-               #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS))

-               ,

-               #elif (!defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS))

-               void

-               #endif

-

-               #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)

-               const uint8_t Options

-               #endif

-               )

-{

-	#if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)

-	USB_Options = Options;

-	#endif

-

-	if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_REG_DISABLED))

-	  USB_REG_On();

-	else

-	  USB_REG_Off();

-

-	if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL))

-	{

-		#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR)

-		PLLFRQ = (1 << PDIV2);

-		#endif

-	}

-

-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)

-	if (Mode == USB_MODE_UID)

-	{

-		UHWCON |=  (1 << UIDE);

-		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_IDTI);

-		USB_CurrentMode = USB_GetUSBModeFromUID();

-	}

-	else

-	{

-		UHWCON &= ~(1 << UIDE);

-		USB_CurrentMode = Mode;

-	}

-	#endif

-

-	USB_IsInitialized = true;

-

-	USB_ResetInterface();

-}

-

-void USB_Disable(void)

-{

-	USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts();

-	USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts();

-

-	USB_Detach();

-	USB_Controller_Disable();

-

-	if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL))

-	  USB_PLL_Off();

-

-	USB_REG_Off();

-

-	#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)

-	USB_OTGPAD_Off();

-	#endif

-

-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)

-	USB_CurrentMode = USB_MODE_None;

-	#endif

-

-	USB_IsInitialized = false;

-}

-

-void USB_ResetInterface(void)

-{

-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)

-	bool UIDModeSelectEnabled = ((UHWCON & (1 << UIDE)) != 0);

-	#endif

-

-	USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts();

-	USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts();

-

-	USB_Controller_Reset();

-

-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)

-	if (UIDModeSelectEnabled)

-	  USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_IDTI);

-	#endif

-

-	USB_CLK_Unfreeze();

-

-	if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device)

-	{

-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-		#if (defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR))

-		UHWCON |=  (1 << UIMOD);

-		#endif

-

-		if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL))

-		{

-			#if defined(USB_SERIES_2_AVR)

-			USB_PLL_On();

-			while (!(USB_PLL_IsReady()));

-			#else

-			USB_PLL_Off();

-			#endif

-		}

-

-		USB_Init_Device();

-		#endif

-	}

-	else if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Host)

-	{

-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-		UHWCON &= ~(1 << UIMOD);

-

-		if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL))

-		{

-			#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-			USB_PLL_On();

-			while (!(USB_PLL_IsReady()));

-			#endif

-		}

-

-		USB_Init_Host();

-		#endif

-	}

-

-	#if (defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR))

-	USB_OTGPAD_On();

-	#endif

-}

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-static void USB_Init_Device(void)

-{

-	USB_DeviceState                 = DEVICE_STATE_Unattached;

-	USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber  = 0;

-

-	#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)

-	USB_Device_RemoteWakeupEnabled  = false;

-	#endif

-

-	#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER)

-	USB_Device_CurrentlySelfPowered = false;

-	#endif

-

-	#if !defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE)

-	USB_Descriptor_Device_t* DeviceDescriptorPtr;

-

-	#if defined(ARCH_HAS_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE) && \

-	    !(defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS))

-	uint8_t DescriptorAddressSpace;

-

-	if (CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor((DTYPE_Device << 8), 0, (void*)&DeviceDescriptorPtr, &DescriptorAddressSpace) != NO_DESCRIPTOR)

-	{

-		if (DescriptorAddressSpace == MEMSPACE_FLASH)

-		  USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = pgm_read_byte(&DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size);

-		else if (DescriptorAddressSpace == MEMSPACE_EEPROM)

-		  USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = eeprom_read_byte(&DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size);

-		else

-		  USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size;

-	}

-	#else

-	if (CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor((DTYPE_Device << 8), 0, (void*)&DeviceDescriptorPtr) != NO_DESCRIPTOR)

-	{

-		#if defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS)

-		USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size;

-		#elif defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS)

-		USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = eeprom_read_byte(&DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size);

-		#else

-		USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = pgm_read_byte(&DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size);

-		#endif

-	}

-	#endif

-	#endif

-

-	#if (defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR))

-	if (USB_Options & USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED)

-	  USB_Device_SetLowSpeed();

-	else

-	  USB_Device_SetFullSpeed();

-

-	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_VBUSTI);

-	#endif

-

-	Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, EP_TYPE_CONTROL,

-							   USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize, 1);

-

-	USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SUSPI);

-	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SUSPI);

-	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_EORSTI);

-

-	USB_Attach();

-}

-#endif

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-static void USB_Init_Host(void)

-{

-	USB_HostState                = HOST_STATE_Unattached;

-	USB_Host_ConfigurationNumber = 0;

-	USB_Host_ControlPipeSize     = PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE;

-

-	USB_Host_HostMode_On();

-

-	USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off();

-	USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Enable();

-	USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_On();

-

-	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SRPI);

-	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_BCERRI);

-

-	USB_Attach();

-}

-#endif

-

-#endif

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/USBController_AVR8.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/USBController_AVR8.h
deleted file mode 100644
index e479d7a1a..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/USBController_AVR8.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,436 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief USB Controller definitions for the AVR8 microcontrollers.

- *  \copydetails Group_USBManagement_AVR8

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBManagement

- *  \defgroup Group_USBManagement_AVR8 USB Interface Management (AVR8)

- *  \brief USB Controller definitions for the AVR8 microcontrollers.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to the setup and management of the USB interface.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __USBCONTROLLER_AVR8_H__

-#define __USBCONTROLLER_AVR8_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "../USBMode.h"

-		#include "../Events.h"

-		#include "../USBTask.h"

-		#include "../USBInterrupt.h"

-

-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			#include "../Host.h"

-			#include "../OTG.h"

-			#include "../Pipe.h"

-			#include "../HostStandardReq.h"

-			#include "../PipeStream.h"

-		#endif

-

-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			#include "../Device.h"

-			#include "../Endpoint.h"

-			#include "../DeviceStandardReq.h"

-			#include "../EndpointStream.h"

-		#endif

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks and Defines: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-		#if !defined(F_USB)

-			#error F_USB is not defined. You must define F_USB to the frequency of the unprescaled USB controller clock in your project makefile.

-		#endif

-

-		#if (F_USB == 8000000)

-			#if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB82__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__) || \

-			     defined(__AVR_ATmega8U2__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega16U2__) || \

-			     defined(__AVR_ATmega32U2__))

-				#define USB_PLL_PSC                0

-			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__))

-				#define USB_PLL_PSC                0

-			#elif (defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__)  || defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__))

-				#define USB_PLL_PSC                ((1 << PLLP1) | (1 << PLLP0))

-			#elif (defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__)  || defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__))

-				#define USB_PLL_PSC                ((1 << PLLP1) | (1 << PLLP0))

-			#endif

-		#elif (F_USB == 16000000)

-			#if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB82__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__) || \

-			     defined(__AVR_ATmega8U2__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega16U2__) || \

-			     defined(__AVR_ATmega32U2__))

-				#define USB_PLL_PSC                (1 << PLLP0)

-			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__))

-				#define USB_PLL_PSC                (1 << PINDIV)

-			#elif (defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__))

-				#define USB_PLL_PSC                ((1 << PLLP2) | (1 << PLLP1))

-			#elif (defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__))

-				#define USB_PLL_PSC                ((1 << PLLP2) | (1 << PLLP0))

-			#endif

-		#endif

-

-		#if !defined(USB_PLL_PSC)

-			#error No PLL prescale value available for chosen F_USB value and AVR model.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** \name USB Controller Option Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** Regulator disable option mask for \ref USB_Init(). This indicates that the internal 3.3V USB data pad

-			 *  regulator should be disabled and the AVR's VCC level used for the data pads.

-			 *

-			 *  \note See USB AVR data sheet for more information on the internal pad regulator.

-			 */

-			#define USB_OPT_REG_DISABLED               (1 << 1)

-

-			/** Regulator enable option mask for \ref USB_Init(). This indicates that the internal 3.3V USB data pad

-			 *  regulator should be enabled to regulate the data pin voltages from the VBUS level down to a level within

-			 *  the range allowable by the USB standard.

-			 *

-			 *  \note See USB AVR data sheet for more information on the internal pad regulator.

-			 */

-			#define USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED                (0 << 1)

-

-			/** Manual PLL control option mask for \ref USB_Init(). This indicates to the library that the user application

-			 *  will take full responsibility for controlling the AVR's PLL (used to generate the high frequency clock

-			 *  that the USB controller requires) and ensuring that it is locked at the correct frequency for USB operations.

-			 */

-			#define USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL                 (1 << 2)

-

-			/** Automatic PLL control option mask for \ref USB_Init(). This indicates to the library that the library should

-			 *  take full responsibility for controlling the AVR's PLL (used to generate the high frequency clock

-			 *  that the USB controller requires) and ensuring that it is locked at the correct frequency for USB operations.

-			 */

-			#define USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL                   (0 << 2)

-			//@}

-

-			#if !defined(USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				/** Constant for the maximum software timeout period of the USB data stream transfer functions

-				 *  (both control and standard) when in either device or host mode. If the next packet of a stream

-				 *  is not received or acknowledged within this time period, the stream function will fail.

-				 *

-				 *  This value may be overridden in the user project makefile as the value of the

-				 *  \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS token, and passed to the compiler using the -D switch.

-				 */

-				#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS       100

-			#endif

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				/** Determines if the VBUS line is currently high (i.e. the USB host is supplying power).

-				 *

-				 *  \note This function is not available on some AVR models which do not support hardware VBUS monitoring.

-				 *

-				 *  \return Boolean \c true if the VBUS line is currently detecting power from a host, \c false otherwise.

-				 */

-				static inline bool USB_VBUS_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-				static inline bool USB_VBUS_GetStatus(void)

-				{

-					return ((USBSTA & (1 << VBUS)) ? true : false);

-				}

-			#endif

-

-			/** Detaches the device from the USB bus. This has the effect of removing the device from any

-			 *  attached host, ceasing USB communications. If no host is present, this prevents any host from

-			 *  enumerating the device once attached until \ref USB_Attach() is called.

-			 */

-			static inline void USB_Detach(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Detach(void)

-			{

-				UDCON  |=  (1 << DETACH);

-			}

-

-			/** Attaches the device to the USB bus. This announces the device's presence to any attached

-			 *  USB host, starting the enumeration process. If no host is present, attaching the device

-			 *  will allow for enumeration once a host is connected to the device.

-			 *

-			 *  This is inexplicably also required for proper operation while in host mode, to enable the

-			 *  attachment of a device to the host. This is despite the bit being located in the device-mode

-			 *  register and despite the datasheet making no mention of its requirement in host mode.

-			 */

-			static inline void USB_Attach(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Attach(void)

-			{

-				UDCON  &= ~(1 << DETACH);

-			}

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Main function to initialize and start the USB interface. Once active, the USB interface will

-			 *  allow for device connection to a host when in device mode, or for device enumeration while in

-			 *  host mode.

-			 *

-			 *  As the USB library relies on interrupts for the device and host mode enumeration processes,

-			 *  the user must enable global interrupts before or shortly after this function is called. In

-			 *  device mode, interrupts must be enabled within 500ms of this function being called to ensure

-			 *  that the host does not time out whilst enumerating the device. In host mode, interrupts may be

-			 *  enabled at the application's leisure however enumeration will not begin of an attached device

-			 *  until after this has occurred.

-			 *

-			 *  Calling this function when the USB interface is already initialized will cause a complete USB

-			 *  interface reset and re-enumeration.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Mode     This is a mask indicating what mode the USB interface is to be initialized to, a value

-			 *                      from the \ref USB_Modes_t enum.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Options  Mask indicating the options which should be used when initializing the USB

-			 *                      interface to control the USB interface's behavior. This should be comprised of

-			 *                      a \c USB_OPT_REG_* mask to control the regulator, a \c USB_OPT_*_PLL mask to control the

-			 *                      PLL, and a \c USB_DEVICE_OPT_* mask (when the device mode is enabled) to set the device

-			 *                      mode speed.

-			 *

-			 *  \note To reduce the FLASH requirements of the library if only device or host mode is required,

-			 *        the mode can be statically set in the project makefile by defining the token \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY

-			 *        (for device mode) or \c USB_HOST_ONLY (for host mode), passing the token to the compiler

-			 *        via the -D switch. If the mode is statically set, this parameter does not exist in the

-			 *        function prototype.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note To reduce the FLASH requirements of the library if only fixed settings are required,

-			 *        the options may be set statically in the same manner as the mode (see the Mode parameter of

-			 *        this function). To statically set the USB options, pass in the \c USE_STATIC_OPTIONS token,

-			 *        defined to the appropriate options masks. When the options are statically set, this

-			 *        parameter does not exist in the function prototype.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note The mode parameter does not exist on devices where only one mode is possible, such as USB

-			 *        AVR models which only implement the USB device mode in hardware.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref Group_Device for the \c USB_DEVICE_OPT_* masks.

-			 */

-			void USB_Init(

-			               #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			               const uint8_t Mode

-			               #endif

-

-			               #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			               ,

-			               #elif (!defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS))

-			               void

-			               #endif

-

-			               #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			               const uint8_t Options

-			               #endif

-			               );

-

-			/** Shuts down the USB interface. This turns off the USB interface after deallocating all USB FIFO

-			 *  memory, endpoints and pipes. When turned off, no USB functionality can be used until the interface

-			 *  is restarted with the \ref USB_Init() function.

-			 */

-			void USB_Disable(void);

-

-			/** Resets the interface, when already initialized. This will re-enumerate the device if already connected

-			 *  to a host, or re-enumerate an already attached device when in host mode.

-			 */

-			void USB_ResetInterface(void);

-

-		/* Global Variables: */

-			#if (!defined(USB_HOST_ONLY) && !defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				/** Indicates the mode that the USB interface is currently initialized to, a value from the

-				 *  \ref USB_Modes_t enum.

-				 *

-				 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually

-				 *             changed in value.

-				 *

-				 *  \note When the controller is initialized into UID auto-detection mode, this variable will hold the

-				 *        currently selected USB mode (i.e. \ref USB_MODE_Device or \ref USB_MODE_Host). If the controller

-				 *        is fixed into a specific mode (either through the \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY or \c USB_HOST_ONLY compile time

-				 *        options, or a limitation of the USB controller in the chosen device model) this will evaluate to

-				 *        a constant of the appropriate value and will never evaluate to \ref USB_MODE_None even when the

-				 *        USB interface is not initialized.

-				 */

-				extern volatile uint8_t USB_CurrentMode;

-			#elif defined(USB_HOST_ONLY)

-				#define USB_CurrentMode USB_MODE_Host

-			#elif defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)

-				#define USB_CurrentMode USB_MODE_Device

-			#endif

-

-			#if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				/** Indicates the current USB options that the USB interface was initialized with when \ref USB_Init()

-				 *  was called. This value will be one of the \c USB_MODE_* masks defined elsewhere in this module.

-				 *

-				 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually

-				 *             changed in value.

-				 */

-				extern volatile uint8_t USB_Options;

-			#elif defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)

-				#define USB_Options USE_STATIC_OPTIONS

-			#endif

-

-		/* Enums: */

-			/** Enum for the possible USB controller modes, for initialization via \ref USB_Init() and indication back to the

-			 *  user application via \ref USB_CurrentMode.

-			 */

-			enum USB_Modes_t

-			{

-				USB_MODE_None   = 0, /**< Indicates that the controller is currently not initialized in any specific USB mode. */

-				USB_MODE_Device = 1, /**< Indicates that the controller is currently initialized in USB Device mode. */

-				USB_MODE_Host   = 2, /**< Indicates that the controller is currently initialized in USB Host mode. */

-				USB_MODE_UID    = 3, /**< Indicates that the controller should determine the USB mode from the UID pin of the

-				                      *   USB connector.

-				                      */

-			};

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_CONTROLLER_C)

-				#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-				static void USB_Init_Device(void);

-				#endif

-

-				#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-				static void USB_Init_Host(void);

-				#endif

-			#endif

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			static inline void USB_PLL_On(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_PLL_On(void)

-			{

-				PLLCSR = USB_PLL_PSC;

-				PLLCSR = (USB_PLL_PSC | (1 << PLLE));

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_PLL_Off(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_PLL_Off(void)

-			{

-				PLLCSR = 0;

-			}

-

-			static inline bool USB_PLL_IsReady(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool USB_PLL_IsReady(void)

-			{

-				return ((PLLCSR & (1 << PLOCK)) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_REG_On(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_REG_On(void)

-			{

-			#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)

-				UHWCON |=  (1 << UVREGE);

-			#else

-				REGCR  &= ~(1 << REGDIS);

-			#endif

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_REG_Off(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_REG_Off(void)

-			{

-			#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)

-				UHWCON &= ~(1 << UVREGE);

-			#else

-				REGCR  |=  (1 << REGDIS);

-			#endif

-			}

-

-			#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)

-			static inline void USB_OTGPAD_On(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_OTGPAD_On(void)

-			{

-				USBCON |=  (1 << OTGPADE);

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_OTGPAD_Off(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_OTGPAD_Off(void)

-			{

-				USBCON &= ~(1 << OTGPADE);

-			}

-			#endif

-

-			static inline void USB_CLK_Freeze(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_CLK_Freeze(void)

-			{

-				USBCON |=  (1 << FRZCLK);

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_CLK_Unfreeze(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_CLK_Unfreeze(void)

-			{

-				USBCON &= ~(1 << FRZCLK);

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_Controller_Enable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Controller_Enable(void)

-			{

-				USBCON |=  (1 << USBE);

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_Controller_Disable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Controller_Disable(void)

-			{

-				USBCON &= ~(1 << USBE);

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_Controller_Reset(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Controller_Reset(void)

-			{

-				USBCON &= ~(1 << USBE);

-				USBCON |=  (1 << USBE);

-			}

-

-			#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)

-			static inline uint8_t USB_GetUSBModeFromUID(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t USB_GetUSBModeFromUID(void)

-			{

-				if (USBSTA & (1 << ID))

-				  return USB_MODE_Device;

-				else

-				  return USB_MODE_Host;

-			}

-			#endif

-

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/USBInterrupt_AVR8.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/USBInterrupt_AVR8.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 3bff19f2e..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/USBInterrupt_AVR8.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,279 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../USBInterrupt.h"

-

-void USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(void)

-{

-	#if defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)

-	USBCON &= ~((1 << VBUSTE) | (1 << IDTE));

-	#elif defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR)

-	USBCON &= ~(1 << VBUSTE);

-	#endif

-

-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)

-	OTGIEN  = 0;

-	#endif

-

-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-	UHIEN   = 0;

-	#endif

-

-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-	UDIEN   = 0;

-	#endif

-}

-

-void USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(void)

-{

-	#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)

-	USBINT = 0;

-	#endif

-

-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)

-	OTGINT = 0;

-	#endif

-

-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-	UHINT  = 0;

-	#endif

-

-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-	UDINT  = 0;

-	#endif

-}

-

-ISR(USB_GEN_vect, ISR_BLOCK)

-{

-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-	#if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS)

-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_SOFI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_SOFI))

-	{

-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SOFI);

-

-		EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame();

-	}

-	#endif

-

-	#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)

-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_VBUSTI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_VBUSTI))

-	{

-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_VBUSTI);

-

-		if (USB_VBUS_GetStatus())

-		{

-			if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL))

-			{

-				USB_PLL_On();

-				while (!(USB_PLL_IsReady()));

-			}

-

-			USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Powered;

-			EVENT_USB_Device_Connect();

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL))

-			  USB_PLL_Off();

-

-			USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Unattached;

-			EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect();

-		}

-	}

-	#endif

-

-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_SUSPI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_SUSPI))

-	{

-		USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SUSPI);

-		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_WAKEUPI);

-

-		USB_CLK_Freeze();

-

-		if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL))

-		  USB_PLL_Off();

-

-		#if defined(USB_SERIES_2_AVR) && !defined(NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT)

-		USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Unattached;

-		EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect();

-		#else

-		USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Suspended;

-		EVENT_USB_Device_Suspend();

-		#endif

-	}

-

-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_WAKEUPI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_WAKEUPI))

-	{

-		if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL))

-		{

-			USB_PLL_On();

-			while (!(USB_PLL_IsReady()));

-		}

-

-		USB_CLK_Unfreeze();

-

-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_WAKEUPI);

-

-		USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_WAKEUPI);

-		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SUSPI);

-

-		if (USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber)

-		  USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Configured;

-		else

-		  USB_DeviceState = (USB_Device_IsAddressSet()) ? DEVICE_STATE_Configured : DEVICE_STATE_Powered;

-

-		#if defined(USB_SERIES_2_AVR) && !defined(NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT)

-		EVENT_USB_Device_Connect();

-		#else

-		EVENT_USB_Device_WakeUp();

-		#endif

-	}

-

-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_EORSTI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_EORSTI))

-	{

-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_EORSTI);

-

-		USB_DeviceState                = DEVICE_STATE_Default;

-		USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber = 0;

-

-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SUSPI);

-		USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SUSPI);

-		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_WAKEUPI);

-

-		Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, EP_TYPE_CONTROL,

-		                           USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize, 1);

-

-		#if defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)

-		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_RXSTPI);

-		#endif

-

-		EVENT_USB_Device_Reset();

-	}

-	#endif

-

-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-	#if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS)

-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_HSOFI))

-	{

-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);

-

-		EVENT_USB_Host_StartOfFrame();

-	}

-	#endif

-

-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_DDISCI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_DDISCI))

-	{

-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DDISCI);

-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DCONNI);

-		USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_DDISCI);

-

-		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();

-

-		USB_ResetInterface();

-	}

-

-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_VBERRI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_VBERRI))

-	{

-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_VBERRI);

-

-		USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off();

-		USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off();

-

-		EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(HOST_ERROR_VBusVoltageDip);

-		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();

-

-		USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Unattached;

-	}

-

-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_SRPI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_SRPI))

-	{

-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SRPI);

-		USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SRPI);

-

-		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached();

-

-		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_DDISCI);

-

-		USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Powered;

-	}

-

-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_BCERRI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_BCERRI))

-	{

-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_BCERRI);

-

-		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(HOST_ENUMERROR_NoDeviceDetected, 0);

-		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();

-

-		USB_ResetInterface();

-	}

-	#endif

-

-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)

-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_IDTI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_IDTI))

-	{

-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_IDTI);

-

-		if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)

-		  EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect();

-

-		if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Unattached)

-		  EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();

-

-		USB_CurrentMode = USB_GetUSBModeFromUID();

-		USB_ResetInterface();

-

-		EVENT_USB_UIDChange();

-	}

-	#endif

-}

-

-#if defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT) && defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-ISR(USB_COM_vect, ISR_BLOCK)

-{

-	uint8_t PrevSelectedEndpoint = Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint();

-

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP);

-	USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_RXSTPI);

-

-	GlobalInterruptEnable();

-

-	USB_Device_ProcessControlRequest();

-

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP);

-	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_RXSTPI);

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(PrevSelectedEndpoint);

-}

-#endif

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/USBInterrupt_AVR8.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/USBInterrupt_AVR8.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 9e9210ec2..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/USBInterrupt_AVR8.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,369 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief USB Controller Interrupt definitions for the AVR8 microcontrollers.

- *

- *  This file contains definitions required for the correct handling of low level USB service routine interrupts

- *  from the USB controller.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-#ifndef __USBINTERRUPT_AVR8_H__

-#define __USBINTERRUPT_AVR8_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Enums: */

-			enum USB_Interrupts_t

-			{

-				#if (defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))

-				USB_INT_VBUSTI  = 0,

-				#endif

-				#if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))

-				USB_INT_IDTI    = 1,

-				#endif

-				#if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))

-				USB_INT_WAKEUPI = 2,

-				USB_INT_SUSPI   = 3,

-				USB_INT_EORSTI  = 4,

-				USB_INT_SOFI    = 5,

-				USB_INT_RXSTPI  = 6,

-				#endif

-				#if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))

-				USB_INT_HSOFI   = 7,

-				USB_INT_DCONNI  = 8,

-				USB_INT_DDISCI  = 9,

-				USB_INT_RSTI    = 10,

-				USB_INT_BCERRI  = 11,

-				USB_INT_VBERRI  = 12,

-				USB_INT_SRPI    = 13,

-				#endif

-			};

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			static inline void USB_INT_Enable(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_INT_Enable(const uint8_t Interrupt)

-			{

-				switch (Interrupt)

-				{

-					#if (defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR))

-					case USB_INT_VBUSTI:

-						USBCON |= (1 << VBUSTE);

-						break;

-					#endif

-					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)

-					case USB_INT_IDTI:

-						USBCON |= (1 << IDTE);

-						break;

-					#endif

-					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-					case USB_INT_WAKEUPI:

-						UDIEN  |= (1 << WAKEUPE);

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_SUSPI:

-						UDIEN  |= (1 << SUSPE);

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_EORSTI:

-						UDIEN  |= (1 << EORSTE);

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_SOFI:

-						UDIEN  |= (1 << SOFE);

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_RXSTPI:

-						UEIENX |= (1 << RXSTPE);

-						break;

-					#endif

-					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-					case USB_INT_HSOFI:

-						UHIEN  |= (1 << HSOFE);

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_DCONNI:

-						UHIEN  |= (1 << DCONNE);

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_DDISCI:

-						UHIEN  |= (1 << DDISCE);

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_RSTI:

-						UHIEN  |= (1 << RSTE);

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_BCERRI:

-						OTGIEN |= (1 << BCERRE);

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_VBERRI:

-						OTGIEN |= (1 << VBERRE);

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_SRPI:

-						OTGIEN |= (1 << SRPE);

-						break;

-					#endif

-				}

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_INT_Disable(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_INT_Disable(const uint8_t Interrupt)

-			{

-				switch (Interrupt)

-				{

-					#if (defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR))

-					case USB_INT_VBUSTI:

-						USBCON &= ~(1 << VBUSTE);

-						break;

-					#endif

-					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)

-					case USB_INT_IDTI:

-						USBCON &= ~(1 << IDTE);

-						break;

-					#endif

-					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-					case USB_INT_WAKEUPI:

-						UDIEN  &= ~(1 << WAKEUPE);

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_SUSPI:

-						UDIEN  &= ~(1 << SUSPE);

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_EORSTI:

-						UDIEN  &= ~(1 << EORSTE);

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_SOFI:

-						UDIEN  &= ~(1 << SOFE);

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_RXSTPI:

-						UEIENX &= ~(1 << RXSTPE);

-						break;

-					#endif

-					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-					case USB_INT_HSOFI:

-						UHIEN  &= ~(1 << HSOFE);

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_DCONNI:

-						UHIEN  &= ~(1 << DCONNE);

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_DDISCI:

-						UHIEN  &= ~(1 << DDISCE);

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_RSTI:

-						UHIEN  &= ~(1 << RSTE);

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_BCERRI:

-						OTGIEN &= ~(1 << BCERRE);

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_VBERRI:

-						OTGIEN &= ~(1 << VBERRE);

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_SRPI:

-						OTGIEN &= ~(1 << SRPE);

-						break;

-					#endif

-				}

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_INT_Clear(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_INT_Clear(const uint8_t Interrupt)

-			{

-				switch (Interrupt)

-				{

-					#if (defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR))

-					case USB_INT_VBUSTI:

-						USBINT &= ~(1 << VBUSTI);

-						break;

-					#endif

-					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)

-					case USB_INT_IDTI:

-						USBINT &= ~(1 << IDTI);

-						break;

-					#endif

-					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-					case USB_INT_WAKEUPI:

-						UDINT  &= ~(1 << WAKEUPI);

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_SUSPI:

-						UDINT  &= ~(1 << SUSPI);

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_EORSTI:

-						UDINT  &= ~(1 << EORSTI);

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_SOFI:

-						UDINT  &= ~(1 << SOFI);

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_RXSTPI:

-						UEINTX &= ~(1 << RXSTPI);

-						break;

-					#endif

-					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-					case USB_INT_HSOFI:

-						UHINT  &= ~(1 << HSOFI);

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_DCONNI:

-						UHINT  &= ~(1 << DCONNI);

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_DDISCI:

-						UHINT  &= ~(1 << DDISCI);

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_RSTI:

-						UHINT  &= ~(1 << RSTI);

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_BCERRI:

-						OTGINT &= ~(1 << BCERRI);

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_VBERRI:

-						OTGINT &= ~(1 << VBERRI);

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_SRPI:

-						OTGINT &= ~(1 << SRPI);

-						break;

-					#endif

-				}

-			}

-

-			static inline bool USB_INT_IsEnabled(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline bool USB_INT_IsEnabled(const uint8_t Interrupt)

-			{

-				switch (Interrupt)

-				{

-					#if (defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR))

-					case USB_INT_VBUSTI:

-						return (USBCON & (1 << VBUSTE));

-					#endif

-					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)

-					case USB_INT_IDTI:

-						return (USBCON & (1 << IDTE));

-					#endif

-					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-					case USB_INT_WAKEUPI:

-						return (UDIEN  & (1 << WAKEUPE));

-					case USB_INT_SUSPI:

-						return (UDIEN  & (1 << SUSPE));

-					case USB_INT_EORSTI:

-						return (UDIEN  & (1 << EORSTE));

-					case USB_INT_SOFI:

-						return (UDIEN  & (1 << SOFE));

-					case USB_INT_RXSTPI:

-						return (UEIENX & (1 << RXSTPE));

-					#endif

-					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-					case USB_INT_HSOFI:

-						return (UHIEN  & (1 << HSOFE));

-					case USB_INT_DCONNI:

-						return (UHIEN  & (1 << DCONNE));

-					case USB_INT_DDISCI:

-						return (UHIEN  & (1 << DDISCE));

-					case USB_INT_RSTI:

-						return (UHIEN  & (1 << RSTE));

-					case USB_INT_BCERRI:

-						return (OTGIEN & (1 << BCERRE));

-					case USB_INT_VBERRI:

-						return (OTGIEN & (1 << VBERRE));

-					case USB_INT_SRPI:

-						return (OTGIEN & (1 << SRPE));

-					#endif

-				}

-

-				return false;

-			}

-

-			static inline bool USB_INT_HasOccurred(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline bool USB_INT_HasOccurred(const uint8_t Interrupt)

-			{

-				switch (Interrupt)

-				{

-					#if (defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR))

-					case USB_INT_VBUSTI:

-						return (USBINT & (1 << VBUSTI));

-					#endif

-					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)

-					case USB_INT_IDTI:

-						return (USBINT & (1 << IDTI));

-					#endif

-					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-					case USB_INT_WAKEUPI:

-						return (UDINT  & (1 << WAKEUPI));

-					case USB_INT_SUSPI:

-						return (UDINT  & (1 << SUSPI));

-					case USB_INT_EORSTI:

-						return (UDINT  & (1 << EORSTI));

-					case USB_INT_SOFI:

-						return (UDINT  & (1 << SOFI));

-					case USB_INT_RXSTPI:

-						return (UEINTX & (1 << RXSTPI));

-					#endif

-					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-					case USB_INT_HSOFI:

-						return (UHINT  & (1 << HSOFI));

-					case USB_INT_DCONNI:

-						return (UHINT  & (1 << DCONNI));

-					case USB_INT_DDISCI:

-						return (UHINT  & (1 << DDISCI));

-					case USB_INT_RSTI:

-						return (UHINT  & (1 << RSTI));

-					case USB_INT_BCERRI:

-						return (OTGINT & (1 << BCERRI));

-					case USB_INT_VBERRI:

-						return (OTGINT & (1 << VBERRI));

-					case USB_INT_SRPI:

-						return (OTGINT & (1 << SRPI));

-					#endif

-				}

-

-				return false;

-			}

-

-		/* Includes: */

-			#include "../USBMode.h"

-			#include "../Events.h"

-			#include "../USBController.h"

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			void USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(void);

-			void USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(void);

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/ConfigDescriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/ConfigDescriptors.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 71cced874..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/ConfigDescriptors.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,146 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "ConfigDescriptors.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(const uint8_t ConfigNumber,

-                                           uint16_t* const ConfigSizePtr,

-                                           void* const BufferPtr,

-                                           const uint16_t BufferSize)

-{

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-	uint8_t ConfigHeader[sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t)];

-

-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-		{

-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),

-			.bRequest      = REQ_GetDescriptor,

-			.wValue        = ((DTYPE_Configuration << 8) | (ConfigNumber - 1)),

-			.wIndex        = 0,

-			.wLength       = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t),

-		};

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(ConfigHeader)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	*ConfigSizePtr = le16_to_cpu(DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigHeader, USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t)->TotalConfigurationSize);

-

-	if (*ConfigSizePtr > BufferSize)

-	  return HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow;

-

-	USB_ControlRequest.wLength = *ConfigSizePtr;

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(BufferPtr)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(BufferPtr) != DTYPE_Configuration)

-	  return HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData;

-

-	return HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful;

-}

-#endif

-

-void USB_GetNextDescriptorOfType(uint16_t* const BytesRem,

-                                 void** const CurrConfigLoc,

-                                 const uint8_t Type)

-{

-	while (*BytesRem)

-	{

-		USB_GetNextDescriptor(BytesRem, CurrConfigLoc);

-

-		if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(*CurrConfigLoc) == Type)

-		  return;

-	}

-}

-

-void USB_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeBefore(uint16_t* const BytesRem,

-                                       void** const CurrConfigLoc,

-                                       const uint8_t Type,

-                                       const uint8_t BeforeType)

-{

-	while (*BytesRem)

-	{

-		USB_GetNextDescriptor(BytesRem, CurrConfigLoc);

-

-		if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(*CurrConfigLoc) == Type)

-		{

-			return;

-		}

-		else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(*CurrConfigLoc) == BeforeType)

-		{

-			*BytesRem = 0;

-			return;

-		}

-	}

-}

-

-void USB_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeAfter(uint16_t* const BytesRem,

-                                      void** const CurrConfigLoc,

-                                      const uint8_t Type,

-                                      const uint8_t AfterType)

-{

-	USB_GetNextDescriptorOfType(BytesRem, CurrConfigLoc, AfterType);

-

-	if (*BytesRem)

-	  USB_GetNextDescriptorOfType(BytesRem, CurrConfigLoc, Type);

-}

-

-uint8_t USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(uint16_t* const BytesRem,

-                                  void** const CurrConfigLoc,

-                                  ConfigComparatorPtr_t const ComparatorRoutine)

-{

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	while (*BytesRem)

-	{

-		uint8_t* PrevDescLoc  = *CurrConfigLoc;

-		uint16_t PrevBytesRem = *BytesRem;

-

-		USB_GetNextDescriptor(BytesRem, CurrConfigLoc);

-

-		if ((ErrorCode = ComparatorRoutine(*CurrConfigLoc)) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound)

-		{

-			if (ErrorCode == DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail)

-			{

-				*CurrConfigLoc = PrevDescLoc;

-				*BytesRem      = PrevBytesRem;

-			}

-

-			return ErrorCode;

-		}

-	}

-

-	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_EndOfDescriptor;

-}

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/ConfigDescriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/ConfigDescriptors.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 0de598230..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/ConfigDescriptors.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,286 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief USB Configuration Descriptor definitions.

- *  \copydetails Group_ConfigDescriptorParser

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_StdDescriptors

- *  \defgroup Group_ConfigDescriptorParser Configuration Descriptor Parser

- *  \brief USB Configuration Descriptor definitions.

- *

- *  This section of the library gives a friendly API which can be used in host applications to easily

- *  parse an attached device's configuration descriptor so that endpoint, interface and other descriptor

- *  data can be extracted and used as needed.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H__

-#define __CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "USBMode.h"

-		#include "HostStandardReq.h"

-		#include "StdDescriptors.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Casts a pointer to a descriptor inside the configuration descriptor into a pointer to the given

-			 *  descriptor type.

-			 *

-			 *  Usage Example:

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t* CurrDescriptor = &ConfigDescriptor[0]; // Pointing to the configuration header

-			 *  USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t* ConfigHeaderPtr = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrDescriptor,

-			 *                                                           USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t);

-			 *  

-			 *  // Can now access elements of the configuration header struct using the -> indirection operator

-			 *  \endcode

-			 */

-			#define DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(DescriptorPtr, Type) ((Type*)(DescriptorPtr))

-

-			/** Casts a pointer to a descriptor inside the configuration descriptor into the given descriptor

-			 *  type (as an actual struct instance rather than a pointer to a struct).

-			 *

-			 *  Usage Example:

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t* CurrDescriptor = &ConfigDescriptor[0]; // Pointing to the configuration header

-			 *  USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t ConfigHeader = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrDescriptor,

-			 *                                                       USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t);

-			 *  

-			 *  // Can now access elements of the configuration header struct using the . operator

-			 *  \endcode

-			 */

-			#define DESCRIPTOR_CAST(DescriptorPtr, Type)  (*DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(DescriptorPtr, Type))

-

-			/** Returns the descriptor's type, expressed as the 8-bit type value in the header of the descriptor.

-			 *  This value's meaning depends on the descriptor's placement in the descriptor, but standard type

-			 *  values can be accessed in the \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t enum.

-			 */

-			#define DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(DescriptorPtr)    DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(DescriptorPtr, USB_Descriptor_Header_t)->Type

-

-			/** Returns the descriptor's size, expressed as the 8-bit value indicating the number of bytes. */

-			#define DESCRIPTOR_SIZE(DescriptorPtr)    DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(DescriptorPtr, USB_Descriptor_Header_t)->Size

-

-		/* Type Defines: */

-			/** Type define for a Configuration Descriptor comparator function (function taking a pointer to an array

-			 *  of type void, returning a uint8_t value).

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref USB_GetNextDescriptorComp function for more details.

-			 */

-			typedef uint8_t (* ConfigComparatorPtr_t)(void*);

-

-		/* Enums: */

-			/** Enum for the possible return codes of the \ref USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() function. */

-			enum USB_Host_GetConfigDescriptor_ErrorCodes_t

-			{

-				HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful       = 0, /**< No error occurred while retrieving the configuration descriptor. */

-				HOST_GETCONFIG_DeviceDisconnect = 1, /**< The attached device was disconnected while retrieving the configuration

-				                                        * descriptor.

-				                                        */

-				HOST_GETCONFIG_PipeError        = 2, /**< An error occurred in the pipe while sending the request. */

-				HOST_GETCONFIG_SetupStalled     = 3, /**< The attached device stalled the request to retrieve the configuration

-				                                        * descriptor.

-				                                        */

-				HOST_GETCONFIG_SoftwareTimeOut  = 4, /**< The request or data transfer timed out. */

-				HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow     = 5, /**< The device's configuration descriptor is too large to fit into the allocated

-				                                        * buffer.

-				                                        */

-				HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData      = 6, /**< The device returned invalid configuration descriptor data. */

-			};

-

-			/** Enum for return values of a descriptor comparator function. */

-			enum DSearch_Return_ErrorCodes_t

-			{

-				DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found                = 0, /**< Current descriptor matches comparator criteria. */

-				DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail                 = 1, /**< No further descriptor could possibly match criteria, fail the search. */

-				DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound             = 2, /**< Current descriptor does not match comparator criteria. */

-			};

-

-			/** Enum for return values of \ref USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(). */

-			enum DSearch_Comp_Return_ErrorCodes_t

-			{

-				DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found           = 0, /**< Configuration descriptor now points to descriptor which matches

-				                                             *   search criteria of the given comparator function. */

-				DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Fail            = 1, /**< Comparator function returned \ref DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail. */

-				DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_EndOfDescriptor = 2, /**< End of configuration descriptor reached before match found. */

-			};

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Retrieves the configuration descriptor data from an attached device via a standard request into a buffer,

-			 *  including validity and size checking to prevent a buffer overflow.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in]     ConfigNumber   Device configuration descriptor number to fetch from the device (usually set to 1 for

-			 *                                single configuration devices).

-			 *  \param[in,out] ConfigSizePtr  Pointer to a location for storing the retrieved configuration descriptor size.

-			 *  \param[out]    BufferPtr      Pointer to the buffer for storing the configuration descriptor data.

-			 *  \param[out]    BufferSize     Size of the allocated buffer where the configuration descriptor is to be stored.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_GetConfigDescriptor_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(const uint8_t ConfigNumber,

-			                                           uint16_t* const ConfigSizePtr,

-			                                           void* const BufferPtr,

-			                                           const uint16_t BufferSize) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);

-

-			/** Skips to the next sub-descriptor inside the configuration descriptor of the specified type value.

-			 *  The bytes remaining value is automatically decremented.

-			 *

-			 * \param[in,out] BytesRem       Pointer to the number of bytes remaining of the configuration descriptor.

-			 * \param[in,out] CurrConfigLoc  Pointer to the current descriptor inside the configuration descriptor.

-			 * \param[in]     Type           Descriptor type value to search for.

-			 */

-			void USB_GetNextDescriptorOfType(uint16_t* const BytesRem,

-			                                 void** const CurrConfigLoc,

-			                                 const uint8_t Type)

-			                                 ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-

-			/** Skips to the next sub-descriptor inside the configuration descriptor of the specified type value,

-			 *  which must come before a descriptor of the second given type value. If the BeforeType type

-			 *  descriptor is reached first, the number of bytes remaining to process is set to zero and the

-			 *  function exits. The bytes remaining value is automatically decremented.

-			 *

-			 * \param[in,out] BytesRem       Pointer to the number of bytes remaining of the configuration descriptor.

-			 * \param[in,out] CurrConfigLoc  Pointer to the current descriptor inside the configuration descriptor.

-			 * \param[in]     Type           Descriptor type value to search for.

-			 * \param[in]     BeforeType     Descriptor type value which must not be reached before the given Type descriptor.

-			 */

-			void USB_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeBefore(uint16_t* const BytesRem,

-			                                       void** const CurrConfigLoc,

-			                                       const uint8_t Type,

-			                                       const uint8_t BeforeType)

-			                                       ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-

-			/** Skips to the next sub-descriptor inside the configuration descriptor of the specified type value,

-			 *  which must come after a descriptor of the second given type value. The bytes remaining value is

-			 *  automatically decremented.

-			 *

-			 * \param[in,out] BytesRem       Pointer to the number of bytes remaining of the configuration descriptor.

-			 * \param[in,out] CurrConfigLoc  Pointer to the current descriptor inside the configuration descriptor.

-			 * \param[in]     Type           Descriptor type value to search for.

-			 * \param[in]     AfterType      Descriptor type value which must be reached before the given Type descriptor.

-			 */

-			void USB_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeAfter(uint16_t* const BytesRem,

-			                                      void** const CurrConfigLoc,

-			                                      const uint8_t Type,

-			                                      const uint8_t AfterType)

-			                                      ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-

-			/** Searches for the next descriptor in the given configuration descriptor using a pre-made comparator

-			 *  function. The routine updates the position and remaining configuration descriptor bytes values

-			 *  automatically. If a comparator routine fails a search, the descriptor pointer is retreated back

-			 *  so that the next descriptor search invocation will start from the descriptor which first caused the

-			 *  original search to fail. This behavior allows for one comparator to be used immediately after another

-			 *  has failed, starting the second search from the descriptor which failed the first.

-			 *

-			 *  Comparator functions should be standard functions which accept a pointer to the header of the current

-			 *  descriptor inside the configuration descriptor which is being compared, and should return a value from

-			 *  the \ref DSearch_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum as a uint8_t value.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function is available in USB Host mode only.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in,out] BytesRem           Pointer to an int storing the remaining bytes in the configuration descriptor.

-			 *  \param[in,out] CurrConfigLoc      Pointer to the current position in the configuration descriptor.

-			 *  \param[in]     ComparatorRoutine  Name of the comparator search function to use on the configuration descriptor.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Value of one of the members of the \ref DSearch_Comp_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 *

-			 *  Usage Example:

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t EndpointSearcher(void* CurrentDescriptor); // Comparator Prototype

-			 *  

-			 *  uint8_t EndpointSearcher(void* CurrentDescriptor)

-			 *  {

-			 *     if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)

-			 *         return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;

-			 *     else

-			 *         return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;

-			 *  }

-			 *  

-			 *  //...

-			 *  

-			 *  // After retrieving configuration descriptor:

-			 *  if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&BytesRemaining, &CurrentConfigLoc, EndpointSearcher) ==

-			 *      Descriptor_Search_Comp_Found)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Do something with the endpoint descriptor

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 */

-			uint8_t USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(uint16_t* const BytesRem,

-			                                  void** const CurrConfigLoc,

-			                                  ConfigComparatorPtr_t const ComparatorRoutine);

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Skips over the current sub-descriptor inside the configuration descriptor, so that the pointer then

-			    points to the next sub-descriptor. The bytes remaining value is automatically decremented.

-			 *

-			 * \param[in,out] BytesRem       Pointer to the number of bytes remaining of the configuration descriptor.

-			 * \param[in,out] CurrConfigLoc  Pointer to the current descriptor inside the configuration descriptor.

-			 */

-			static inline void USB_GetNextDescriptor(uint16_t* const BytesRem,

-			                                         void** CurrConfigLoc) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-			static inline void USB_GetNextDescriptor(uint16_t* const BytesRem,

-			                                         void** CurrConfigLoc)

-			{

-				uint16_t CurrDescriptorSize = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(*CurrConfigLoc, USB_Descriptor_Header_t).Size;

-

-				if (*BytesRem < CurrDescriptorSize)

-				  CurrDescriptorSize = *BytesRem;

-

-				*CurrConfigLoc  = (void*)((uintptr_t)*CurrConfigLoc + CurrDescriptorSize);

-				*BytesRem      -= CurrDescriptorSize;

-			}

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Device.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Device.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 995b9208e..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Device.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,159 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Common USB Device definitions for all architectures.

- *  \copydetails Group_Device

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USB

- *  \defgroup Group_Device Device Management

- *  \brief USB Device management definitions for USB device mode.

- *

- *  USB Device mode related definitions common to all architectures. This module contains definitions which

- *  are used when the USB controller is initialized in device mode.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __USBDEVICE_H__

-#define __USBDEVICE_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "USBMode.h"

-		#include "StdDescriptors.h"

-		#include "USBInterrupt.h"

-		#include "Endpoint.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Enums: */

-			/** Enum for the various states of the USB Device state machine. Only some states are

-			 *  implemented in the LUFA library - other states are left to the user to implement.

-			 *

-			 *  For information on each possible USB device state, refer to the USB 2.0 specification.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref USB_DeviceState, which stores the current device state machine state.

-			 */

-			enum USB_Device_States_t

-			{

-				DEVICE_STATE_Unattached                   = 0, /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates

-				                                                *   that the device is not currently connected to a host.

-				                                                */

-				DEVICE_STATE_Powered                      = 1, /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates

-				                                                *   that the device is connected to a host, but enumeration has not

-				                                                *   yet begun.

-				                                                */

-				DEVICE_STATE_Default                      = 2, /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates

-				                                                *   that the device's USB bus has been reset by the host and it is

-				                                                *   now waiting for the host to begin the enumeration process.

-				                                                */

-				DEVICE_STATE_Addressed                    = 3, /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates

-				                                                *   that the device has been addressed by the USB Host, but is not

-				                                                *   yet configured.

-				                                                */

-				DEVICE_STATE_Configured                   = 4, /**< May be implemented by the user project. This state indicates

-				                                                *   that the device has been enumerated by the host and is ready

-				                                                *   for USB communications to begin.

-				                                                */

-				DEVICE_STATE_Suspended                    = 5, /**< May be implemented by the user project. This state indicates

-				                                                *   that the USB bus has been suspended by the host, and the device

-				                                                *   should power down to a minimal power level until the bus is

-				                                                *   resumed.

-				                                                */

-			};

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Function to retrieve a given descriptor's size and memory location from the given descriptor type value,

-			 *  index and language ID. This function MUST be overridden in the user application (added with full, identical

-			 *  prototype and name so that the library can call it to retrieve descriptor data.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] wValue                  The type of the descriptor to retrieve in the upper byte, and the index in the

-			 *                                     lower byte (when more than one descriptor of the given type exists, such as the

-			 *                                     case of string descriptors). The type may be one of the standard types defined

-			 *                                     in the DescriptorTypes_t enum, or may be a class-specific descriptor type value.

-			 *  \param[in] wIndex                  The language ID of the string to return if the \c wValue type indicates

-			 *                                     \ref DTYPE_String, otherwise zero for standard descriptors, or as defined in a

-			 *                                     class-specific standards.

-			 *  \param[out] DescriptorAddress      Pointer to the descriptor in memory. This should be set by the routine to

-			 *                                     the address of the descriptor.

-			 *  \param[out] DescriptorMemorySpace  A value from the \ref USB_DescriptorMemorySpaces_t enum to indicate the memory

-			 *                                     space in which the descriptor is stored. This parameter does not exist when one

-			 *                                     of the \c USE_*_DESCRIPTORS compile time options is used, or on architectures which

-			 *                                     use a unified address space.

-			 *

-			 *  \note By default, the library expects all descriptors to be located in flash memory via the \c PROGMEM attribute.

-			 *        If descriptors should be located in RAM or EEPROM instead (to speed up access in the case of RAM, or to

-			 *        allow the descriptors to be changed dynamically at runtime) either the \c USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS or the

-			 *        \c USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS tokens may be defined in the project makefile and passed to the compiler by the -D

-			 *        switch.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Size in bytes of the descriptor if it exists, zero or \ref NO_DESCRIPTOR otherwise.

-			 */

-			uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,

-			                                    const uint8_t wIndex,

-			                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress

-			#if (defined(ARCH_HAS_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)) && \

-			    !(defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS))

-			                                    , uint8_t* const DescriptorMemorySpace

-			#endif

-			                                    ) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);

-

-	/* Architecture Includes: */

-		#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)

-			#include "AVR8/Device_AVR8.h"

-		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)

-			#include "UC3/Device_UC3.h"

-		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)

-			#include "XMEGA/Device_XMEGA.h"

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/DeviceStandardReq.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/DeviceStandardReq.c
deleted file mode 100644
index c4ae64712..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/DeviceStandardReq.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,378 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_DEVICESTDREQ_C

-#include "DeviceStandardReq.h"

-

-uint8_t USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber;

-

-#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER)

-bool    USB_Device_CurrentlySelfPowered;

-#endif

-

-#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)

-bool    USB_Device_RemoteWakeupEnabled;

-#endif

-

-void USB_Device_ProcessControlRequest(void)

-{

-	#if defined(ARCH_BIG_ENDIAN)

-	USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType = Endpoint_Read_8();

-	USB_ControlRequest.bRequest      = Endpoint_Read_8();

-	USB_ControlRequest.wValue        = Endpoint_Read_16_LE();

-	USB_ControlRequest.wIndex        = Endpoint_Read_16_LE();

-	USB_ControlRequest.wLength       = Endpoint_Read_16_LE();

-	#else

-	uint8_t* RequestHeader = (uint8_t*)&USB_ControlRequest;

-

-	for (uint8_t RequestHeaderByte = 0; RequestHeaderByte < sizeof(USB_Request_Header_t); RequestHeaderByte++)

-	  *(RequestHeader++) = Endpoint_Read_8();

-	#endif

-

-	EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest();

-

-	if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())

-	{

-		uint8_t bmRequestType = USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType;

-

-		switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)

-		{

-			case REQ_GetStatus:

-				if ((bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE)) ||

-					(bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_ENDPOINT)))

-				{

-					USB_Device_GetStatus();

-				}

-

-				break;

-			case REQ_ClearFeature:

-			case REQ_SetFeature:

-				if ((bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE)) ||

-					(bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_ENDPOINT)))

-				{

-					USB_Device_ClearSetFeature();

-				}

-

-				break;

-			case REQ_SetAddress:

-				if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE))

-				  USB_Device_SetAddress();

-

-				break;

-			case REQ_GetDescriptor:

-				if ((bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE)) ||

-					(bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE)))

-				{

-					USB_Device_GetDescriptor();

-				}

-

-				break;

-			case REQ_GetConfiguration:

-				if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE))

-				  USB_Device_GetConfiguration();

-

-				break;

-			case REQ_SetConfiguration:

-				if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE))

-				  USB_Device_SetConfiguration();

-

-				break;

-		}

-	}

-

-	if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())

-	{

-		Endpoint_StallTransaction();

-		Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-	}

-}

-

-static void USB_Device_SetAddress(void)

-{

-	uint8_t    DeviceAddress    = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue & 0x7F);

-	uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask();

-	GlobalInterruptDisable();

-

-	Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-

-	Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();

-

-	while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()));

-

-	USB_Device_SetDeviceAddress(DeviceAddress);

-	USB_DeviceState = (DeviceAddress) ? DEVICE_STATE_Addressed : DEVICE_STATE_Default;

-

-	SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt);

-}

-

-static void USB_Device_SetConfiguration(void)

-{

-	#if defined(FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS)

-	if ((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue > FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS)

-	  return;

-	#else

-	USB_Descriptor_Device_t* DevDescriptorPtr;

-

-	#if defined(ARCH_HAS_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE)

-		#if defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS)

-			#define MemoryAddressSpace  MEMSPACE_FLASH

-		#elif defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS)

-			#define MemoryAddressSpace  MEMSPACE_EEPROM

-		#elif defined(USE_SRAM_DESCRIPTORS)

-			#define MemoryAddressSpace  MEMSPACE_SRAM

-		#else

-			uint8_t MemoryAddressSpace;

-		#endif

-	#endif

-

-	if (CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor((DTYPE_Device << 8), 0, (void*)&DevDescriptorPtr

-	#if defined(ARCH_HAS_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE) && \

-	    !(defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS))

-	                               , &MemoryAddressSpace

-	#endif

-	                               ) == NO_DESCRIPTOR)

-	{

-		return;

-	}

-

-	#if defined(ARCH_HAS_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE)

-	if (MemoryAddressSpace == MEMSPACE_FLASH)

-	{

-		if (((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue > pgm_read_byte(&DevDescriptorPtr->NumberOfConfigurations)))

-		  return;

-	}

-	else if (MemoryAddressSpace == MEMSPACE_EEPROM)

-	{

-		if (((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue > eeprom_read_byte(&DevDescriptorPtr->NumberOfConfigurations)))

-		  return;

-	}

-	else

-	{

-		if ((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue > DevDescriptorPtr->NumberOfConfigurations)

-		  return;

-	}

-	#else

-	if ((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue > DevDescriptorPtr->NumberOfConfigurations)

-	  return;

-	#endif

-	#endif

-

-	Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-

-	USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber = (uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue;

-

-	Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();

-

-	if (USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber)

-	  USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Configured;

-	else

-	  USB_DeviceState = (USB_Device_IsAddressSet()) ? DEVICE_STATE_Configured : DEVICE_STATE_Powered;

-

-	EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged();

-}

-

-static void USB_Device_GetConfiguration(void)

-{

-	Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-

-	Endpoint_Write_8(USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber);

-	Endpoint_ClearIN();

-

-	Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();

-}

-

-#if !defined(NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL) && (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL != NO_DESCRIPTOR)

-static void USB_Device_GetInternalSerialDescriptor(void)

-{

-	struct

-	{

-		USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header;

-		uint16_t                UnicodeString[INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS / 4];

-	} SignatureDescriptor;

-

-	SignatureDescriptor.Header.Type = DTYPE_String;

-	SignatureDescriptor.Header.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS / 4);

-

-	USB_Device_GetSerialString(SignatureDescriptor.UnicodeString);

-

-	Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-

-	Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&SignatureDescriptor, sizeof(SignatureDescriptor));

-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-}

-#endif

-

-static void USB_Device_GetDescriptor(void)

-{

-	const void* DescriptorPointer;

-	uint16_t    DescriptorSize;

-

-	#if defined(ARCH_HAS_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE) && \

-	    !(defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS))

-	uint8_t DescriptorAddressSpace;

-	#endif

-

-	#if !defined(NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL) && (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL != NO_DESCRIPTOR)

-	if (USB_ControlRequest.wValue == ((DTYPE_String << 8) | USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL))

-	{

-		USB_Device_GetInternalSerialDescriptor();

-		return;

-	}

-	#endif

-

-	if ((DescriptorSize = CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(USB_ControlRequest.wValue, USB_ControlRequest.wIndex,

-	                                                 &DescriptorPointer

-	#if defined(ARCH_HAS_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE) && \

-	    !(defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS))

-	                                                 , &DescriptorAddressSpace

-	#endif

-													 )) == NO_DESCRIPTOR)

-	{

-		return;

-	}

-

-	Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-

-	#if defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS) || !defined(ARCH_HAS_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE)

-	Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(DescriptorPointer, DescriptorSize);

-	#elif defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS)

-	Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_LE(DescriptorPointer, DescriptorSize);

-	#elif defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS)

-	Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_LE(DescriptorPointer, DescriptorSize);

-	#else

-	if (DescriptorAddressSpace == MEMSPACE_FLASH)

-	  Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_LE(DescriptorPointer, DescriptorSize);

-	else if (DescriptorAddressSpace == MEMSPACE_EEPROM)

-	  Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_LE(DescriptorPointer, DescriptorSize);

-	else

-	  Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(DescriptorPointer, DescriptorSize);

-	#endif

-

-	Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-}

-

-static void USB_Device_GetStatus(void)

-{

-	uint8_t CurrentStatus = 0;

-

-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType)

-	{

-		case (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE):

-			#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER)

-			if (USB_Device_CurrentlySelfPowered)

-			  CurrentStatus |= FEATURE_SELFPOWERED_ENABLED;

-			#endif

-

-			#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)

-			if (USB_Device_RemoteWakeupEnabled)

-			  CurrentStatus |= FEATURE_REMOTE_WAKEUP_ENABLED;

-			#endif

-			break;

-		case (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_ENDPOINT):

-			#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)

-			Endpoint_SelectEndpoint((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wIndex & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK);

-

-			CurrentStatus = Endpoint_IsStalled();

-

-			Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP);

-			#endif

-

-			break;

-		default:

-			return;

-	}

-

-	Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-

-	Endpoint_Write_16_LE(CurrentStatus);

-	Endpoint_ClearIN();

-

-	Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();

-}

-

-static void USB_Device_ClearSetFeature(void)

-{

-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT)

-	{

-		#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)

-		case REQREC_DEVICE:

-			if ((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue == FEATURE_SEL_DeviceRemoteWakeup)

-			  USB_Device_RemoteWakeupEnabled = (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest == REQ_SetFeature);

-			else

-			  return;

-

-			break;

-		#endif

-		#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)

-		case REQREC_ENDPOINT:

-			if ((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue == FEATURE_SEL_EndpointHalt)

-			{

-				uint8_t EndpointIndex = ((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wIndex & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK);

-

-				if (EndpointIndex == ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP)

-				  return;

-

-				Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(EndpointIndex);

-

-				if (Endpoint_IsEnabled())

-				{

-					if (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest == REQ_SetFeature)

-					{

-						Endpoint_StallTransaction();

-					}

-					else

-					{

-						Endpoint_ClearStall();

-						Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(EndpointIndex);

-						Endpoint_ResetDataToggle();

-					}

-				}

-			}

-

-			break;

-		#endif

-		default:

-			return;

-	}

-

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP);

-

-	Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-

-	Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();

-}

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/DeviceStandardReq.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/DeviceStandardReq.h
deleted file mode 100644
index dfaa1662e..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/DeviceStandardReq.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,158 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief USB device standard request management.

- *

- *  This file contains the function prototypes necessary for the processing of incoming standard control requests

- *  when the library is in USB device mode.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-#ifndef __DEVICESTDREQ_H__

-#define __DEVICESTDREQ_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "USBMode.h"

-		#include "StdDescriptors.h"

-		#include "Events.h"

-		#include "StdRequestType.h"

-		#include "USBTask.h"

-		#include "USBController.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Enums: */

-			#if defined(ARCH_HAS_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				/** Enum for the possible descriptor memory spaces, for the \c MemoryAddressSpace parameter of the

-				 *  \ref CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor() function. This can be used when none of the \c USE_*_DESCRIPTORS

-				 *  compile time options are used, to indicate in which memory space the descriptor is stored.

-				 *

-				 *  \ingroup Group_Device

-				 */

-				enum USB_DescriptorMemorySpaces_t

-				{

-					#if defined(ARCH_HAS_FLASH_ADDRESS_SPACE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-					MEMSPACE_FLASH    = 0, /**< Indicates the requested descriptor is located in FLASH memory. */

-					#endif

-					#if defined(ARCH_HAS_EEPROM_ADDRESS_SPACE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-					MEMSPACE_EEPROM   = 1, /**< Indicates the requested descriptor is located in EEPROM memory. */

-					#endif

-					MEMSPACE_RAM      = 2, /**< Indicates the requested descriptor is located in RAM memory. */

-				};

-			#endif

-

-		/* Global Variables: */

-			/** Indicates the currently set configuration number of the device. USB devices may have several

-			 *  different configurations which the host can select between; this indicates the currently selected

-			 *  value, or 0 if no configuration has been selected.

-			 *

-			 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually

-			 *             changed in value.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_Device

-			 */

-			extern uint8_t USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber;

-

-			#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)

-				/** Indicates if the host is currently allowing the device to issue remote wakeup events. If this

-				 *  flag is cleared, the device should not issue remote wakeup events to the host.

-				 *

-				 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually

-				 *             changed in value.

-				 *

-				 *  \note To reduce FLASH usage of the compiled applications where Remote Wakeup is not supported,

-				 *        this global and the underlying management code can be disabled by defining the

-				 *        \c NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP token in the project makefile and passing it to the compiler via

-				 *        the -D switch.

-				 *

-				 *  \ingroup Group_Device

-				 */

-				extern bool USB_Device_RemoteWakeupEnabled;

-			#endif

-

-			#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER)

-				/** Indicates if the device is currently being powered by its own power supply, rather than being

-				 *  powered by the host's USB supply. This flag should remain cleared if the device does not

-				 *  support self powered mode, as indicated in the device descriptors.

-				 *

-				 *  \ingroup Group_Device

-				 */

-				extern bool USB_Device_CurrentlySelfPowered;

-			#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		#if defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS)

-			#error USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS and USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS are mutually exclusive.

-		#elif defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS)

-			#error USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS and USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS are mutually exclusive.

-		#elif defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS)

-			#error USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS and USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS are mutually exclusive.

-		#elif defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS)

-			#error Only one of the USE_*_DESCRIPTORS modes should be selected.

-		#endif

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			void USB_Device_ProcessControlRequest(void);

-

-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DEVICESTDREQ_C)

-				static void USB_Device_SetAddress(void);

-				static void USB_Device_SetConfiguration(void);

-				static void USB_Device_GetConfiguration(void);

-				static void USB_Device_GetDescriptor(void);

-				static void USB_Device_GetStatus(void);

-				static void USB_Device_ClearSetFeature(void);

-

-				#if !defined(NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL) && (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL != NO_DESCRIPTOR)

-					static void USB_Device_GetInternalSerialDescriptor(void);

-				#endif

-			#endif

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Endpoint.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Endpoint.h
deleted file mode 100644
index a6ca64dd2..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Endpoint.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,130 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief USB Endpoint definitions for all architectures.

- *  \copydetails Group_EndpointManagement

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointManagement

- *  \defgroup Group_EndpointRW Endpoint Data Reading and Writing

- *  \brief Endpoint data read/write definitions.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing from and to endpoints.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointRW

- *  \defgroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW Read/Write of Primitive Data Types

- *  \brief Endpoint data primitive read/write definitions.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of primitive data types

- *  from and to endpoints.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointManagement

- *  \defgroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement Endpoint Packet Management

- *  \brief USB Endpoint package management definitions.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to packet management of endpoints.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USB

- *  \defgroup Group_EndpointManagement Endpoint Management

- *  \brief Endpoint management definitions.

- *

- *  Functions, macros and enums related to endpoint management when in USB Device mode. This

- *  module contains the endpoint management macros, as well as endpoint interrupt and data

- *  send/receive functions for various data types.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __ENDPOINT_H__

-#define __ENDPOINT_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "USBMode.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Type Defines: */

-			/** Type define for a endpoint table entry, used to configure endpoints in groups via

-			 *  \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable().

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				uint8_t  Address; /**< Address of the endpoint to configure, or zero if the table entry is to be unused. */

-				uint16_t Size; /**< Size of the endpoint bank, in bytes. */

-				uint8_t  Type; /**< Type of the endpoint, a \c EP_TYPE_* mask. */

-				uint8_t  Banks; /**< Number of hardware banks to use for the endpoint. */

-			} USB_Endpoint_Table_t;

-	

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Endpoint number mask, for masking against endpoint addresses to retrieve the endpoint's

-			 *  numerical address in the device.

-			 */

-			#define ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK                     0x0F

-

-			/** Endpoint address for the default control endpoint, which always resides in address 0. This is

-			 *  defined for convenience to give more readable code when used with the endpoint macros.

-			 */

-			#define ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP                      0

-

-	/* Architecture Includes: */

-		#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)

-			#include "AVR8/Endpoint_AVR8.h"

-		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)

-			#include "UC3/Endpoint_UC3.h"

-		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)

-			#include "XMEGA/Endpoint_XMEGA.h"

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/EndpointStream.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/EndpointStream.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 89df381ae..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/EndpointStream.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,124 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Endpoint data stream transmission and reception management.

- *  \copydetails Group_EndpointStreamRW

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointRW

- *  \defgroup Group_EndpointStreamRW Read/Write of Multi-Byte Streams

- *  \brief Endpoint data stream transmission and reception management.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of data streams from

- *  and to endpoints.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __ENDPOINT_STREAM_H__

-#define __ENDPOINT_STREAM_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "USBMode.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Enums: */

-			/** Enum for the possible error return codes of the \c Endpoint_*_Stream_* functions. */

-			enum Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t

-			{

-				ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError            = 0, /**< Command completed successfully, no error. */

-				ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_EndpointStalled    = 1, /**< The endpoint was stalled during the stream

-				                                           *   transfer by the host or device.

-				                                           */

-				ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected = 2, /**< Device was disconnected from the host during

-				                                           *   the transfer.

-				                                           */

-				ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_BusSuspended       = 3, /**< The USB bus has been suspended by the host and

-				                                           *   no USB endpoint traffic can occur until the bus

-				                                           *   has resumed.

-				                                           */

-				ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_Timeout            = 4, /**< The host failed to accept or send the next packet

-				                                           *   within the software timeout period set by the

-				                                           *   \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro.

-				                                           */

-				ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer = 5, /**< Indicates that the endpoint bank became full or empty before

-				                                           *   the complete contents of the current stream could be

-				                                           *   transferred. The endpoint stream function should be called

-				                                           *   again to process the next chunk of data in the transfer.

-				                                           */

-			};

-

-			/** Enum for the possible error return codes of the \c Endpoint_*_Control_Stream_* functions. */

-			enum Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t

-			{

-				ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_NoError            = 0, /**< Command completed successfully, no error. */

-				ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_HostAborted        = 1, /**< The aborted the transfer prematurely. */

-				ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected = 2, /**< Device was disconnected from the host during

-				                                            *   the transfer.

-				                                            */

-				ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended       = 3, /**< The USB bus has been suspended by the host and

-				                                            *   no USB endpoint traffic can occur until the bus

-				                                            *   has resumed.

-				                                            */

-			};

-

-	/* Architecture Includes: */

-		#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)

-			#include "AVR8/EndpointStream_AVR8.h"

-		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)

-			#include "UC3/EndpointStream_UC3.h"

-		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)

-			#include "XMEGA/EndpointStream_XMEGA.h"

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Events.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Events.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 5f5043060..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Events.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_EVENTS_C

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "Events.h"

-

-// cppcheck-suppress unusedFunction

-void USB_Event_Stub(void)

-{

-

-}

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Events.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Events.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 33db543d4..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Events.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,366 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief USB Event management definitions.

- *  \copydetails Group_Events

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USB

- *  \defgroup Group_Events USB Events

- *  \brief USB Event management definitions.

- *

- *  This module contains macros and functions relating to the management of library events, which are small

- *  pieces of code similar to ISRs which are run when a given condition is met. Each event can be fired from

- *  multiple places in the user or library code, which may or may not be inside an ISR, thus each handler

- *  should be written to be as small and fast as possible to prevent possible problems.

- *

- *  Events can be hooked by the user application by declaring a handler function with the same name and parameters

- *  listed here. If an event with no user-associated handler is fired within the library, it by default maps to an

- *  internal empty stub function.

- *

- *  Each event must only have one associated event handler, but can be raised by multiple sources by calling the

- *  event handler function (with any required event parameters).

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __USBEVENTS_H__

-#define __USBEVENTS_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "USBMode.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Pseudo-Functions for Doxygen: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_EVENTS_C) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			/** Event for USB mode pin level change. This event fires when the USB interface is set to dual role

-			 *  mode, and the UID pin level has changed to indicate a new mode (device or host). This event fires

-			 *  before the mode is switched to the newly indicated mode but after the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect

-			 *  event has fired (if disconnected before the role change).

-			 *

-			 *  \note This event only exists on microcontrollers that support dual role USB modes.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This event does not exist if the \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY or \c USB_HOST_ONLY tokens have been supplied

-			 *        to the compiler (see \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).

-			 */

-			void EVENT_USB_UIDChange(void);

-

-			/** Event for USB host error. This event fires when a hardware fault has occurred whilst the USB

-			 *  interface is in host mode.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] ErrorCode  Error code indicating the failure reason, a value in \ref USB_Host_ErrorCodes_t.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This event only exists on microcontrollers that supports USB host mode.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This event does not exist if the \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see

-			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).

-			 */

-			void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);

-

-			/** Event for USB device attachment. This event fires when a the USB interface is in host mode, and

-			 *  a USB device has been connected to the USB interface. This is interrupt driven, thus fires before

-			 *  the standard \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Connect() event and so can be used to programmatically start the USB

-			 *  management task to reduce CPU consumption.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This event only exists on microcontrollers that supports USB host mode.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This event does not exist if the \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see

-			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref USB_USBTask() for more information on the USB management task and reducing CPU usage.

-			 */

-			void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);

-

-			/** Event for USB device removal. This event fires when a the USB interface is in host mode, and

-			 *  a USB device has been removed the USB interface whether or not it has been enumerated. This

-			 *  can be used to programmatically stop the USB management task to reduce CPU consumption.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This event only exists on microcontrollers that supports USB host mode.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This event does not exist if the \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see

-			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref USB_USBTask() for more information on the USB management task and reducing CPU usage.

-			 */

-			void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);

-

-			/** Event for USB device enumeration failure. This event fires when a the USB interface is

-			 *  in host mode, and an attached USB device has failed to enumerate completely.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] ErrorCode     Error code indicating the failure reason, a value in

-			 *                           \ref USB_Host_EnumerationErrorCodes_t.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] SubErrorCode  Sub error code indicating the reason for failure - for example, if the

-			 *                           ErrorCode parameter indicates a control error, this will give the error

-			 *                           code returned by the \ref USB_Host_SendControlRequest() function.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This event only exists on microcontrollers that supports USB host mode.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This event does not exist if the \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see

-			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).

-			 */

-			void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,

-			                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);

-

-			/** Event for USB device enumeration completion. This event fires when a the USB interface is

-			 *  in host mode and an attached USB device has been completely enumerated and is ready to be

-			 *  controlled by the user application.

-			 *

-			 *  This event is time-critical; exceeding OS-specific delays within this event handler (typically of around

-			 *  1 second) when a transaction is waiting to be processed by the device will prevent break communications

-			 *  and cause the host to reset the USB bus.

-			 */

-			void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);

-

-			/** Event for USB Start Of Frame detection, when enabled. This event fires at the start of each USB

-			 *  frame, once per millisecond, and is synchronized to the USB bus. This can be used as an accurate

-			 *  millisecond timer source when the USB bus is not suspended while in host mode.

-			 *

-			 *  This event is time-critical; it is run once per millisecond and thus long handlers will significantly

-			 *  degrade device performance. This event should only be enabled when needed to reduce device wake-ups.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This event is not normally active - it must be manually enabled and disabled via the

-			 *        \ref USB_Host_EnableSOFEvents() and \ref USB_Host_DisableSOFEvents() commands after enumeration of

-			 *        a USB device.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This event does not exist if the \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see

-			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).

-			 */

-			void EVENT_USB_Host_StartOfFrame(void);

-

-			/** Event for USB device connection. This event fires when the microcontroller is in USB Device mode

-			 *  and the device is connected to a USB host, beginning the enumeration process measured by a rising

-			 *  level on the microcontroller's VBUS sense pin.

-			 *

-			 *  This event is time-critical; exceeding OS-specific delays within this event handler (typically of around

-			 *  two seconds) will prevent the device from enumerating correctly.

-			 *

-			 *  \attention This event may fire multiple times during device enumeration on the microcontrollers with limited USB controllers

-			 *             if \c NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT is not defined.

-			 *

-			 *  \note For the microcontrollers with limited USB controller functionality, VBUS sensing is not available.

-			 *        this means that the current connection state is derived from the bus suspension and wake up events by default,

-			 *        which is not always accurate (host may suspend the bus while still connected). If the actual connection state

-			 *        needs to be determined, VBUS should be routed to an external pin, and the auto-detect behavior turned off by

-			 *        passing the \c NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT token to the compiler via the -D switch at compile time. The connection

-			 *        and disconnection events may be manually fired, and the \ref USB_DeviceState global changed manually.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref Group_USBManagement for more information on the USB management task and reducing CPU usage.

-			 */

-			void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);

-

-			/** Event for USB device disconnection. This event fires when the microcontroller is in USB Device mode and the device is

-			 *  disconnected from a host, measured by a falling level on the microcontroller's VBUS sense pin.

-			 *

-			 *  \attention This event may fire multiple times during device enumeration on the microcontrollers with limited USB controllers

-			 *             if \c NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT is not defined.

-			 *

-			 *  \note For the microcontrollers with limited USB controllers, VBUS sense is not available to the USB controller.

-			 *        this means that the current connection state is derived from the bus suspension and wake up events by default,

-			 *        which is not always accurate (host may suspend the bus while still connected). If the actual connection state

-			 *        needs to be determined, VBUS should be routed to an external pin, and the auto-detect behavior turned off by

-			 *        passing the \c NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT token to the compiler via the -D switch at compile time. The connection

-			 *        and disconnection events may be manually fired, and the \ref USB_DeviceState global changed manually.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref Group_USBManagement for more information on the USB management task and reducing CPU usage.

-			 */

-			void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);

-

-			/** Event for control requests. This event fires when a the USB host issues a control request

-			 *  to the mandatory device control endpoint (of address 0). This may either be a standard

-			 *  request that the library may have a handler code for internally, or a class specific request

-			 *  issued to the device which must be handled appropriately. If a request is not processed in the

-			 *  user application via this event, it will be passed to the library for processing internally

-			 *  if a suitable handler exists.

-			 *

-			 *  This event is time-critical; each packet within the request transaction must be acknowledged or

-			 *  sent within 50ms or the host will abort the transfer.

-			 *

-			 *  The library internally handles all standard control requests with the exceptions of SYNC FRAME,

-			 *  SET DESCRIPTOR and SET INTERFACE. These and all other non-standard control requests will be left

-			 *  for the user to process via this event if desired. If not handled in the user application or by

-			 *  the library internally, unknown requests are automatically STALLed.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This event does not exist if the \c USB_HOST_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see

-			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note Requests should be handled in the same manner as described in the USB 2.0 Specification,

-			 *        or appropriate class specification. In all instances, the library has already read the

-			 *        request SETUP parameters into the \ref USB_ControlRequest structure which should then be used

-			 *        by the application to determine how to handle the issued request.

-			 */

-			void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);

-

-			/** Event for USB configuration number changed. This event fires when a the USB host changes the

-			 *  selected configuration number while in device mode. This event should be hooked in device

-			 *  applications to create the endpoints and configure the device for the selected configuration.

-			 *

-			 *  This event is time-critical; exceeding OS-specific delays within this event handler (typically of around

-			 *  one second) will prevent the device from enumerating correctly.

-			 *

-			 *  This event fires after the value of \ref USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber has been changed.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This event does not exist if the \c USB_HOST_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see

-			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).

-			 */

-			void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);

-

-			/** Event for USB suspend. This event fires when a the USB host suspends the device by halting its

-			 *  transmission of Start Of Frame pulses to the device. This is generally hooked in order to move

-			 *  the device over to a low power state until the host wakes up the device. If the USB interface is

-			 *  enumerated with the \ref USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL option set, the library will automatically suspend the

-			 *  USB PLL before the event is fired to save power.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This event does not exist if the \c USB_HOST_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see

-			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This event does not exist on the microcontrollers with limited USB VBUS sensing abilities

-			 *        when the \c NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT compile time token is not set - see

-			 *        \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref EVENT_USB_Device_WakeUp() event for accompanying Wake Up event.

-			 */

-			void EVENT_USB_Device_Suspend(void);

-

-			/** Event for USB wake up. This event fires when a the USB interface is suspended while in device

-			 *  mode, and the host wakes up the device by supplying Start Of Frame pulses. This is generally

-			 *  hooked to pull the user application out of a low power state and back into normal operating

-			 *  mode. If the USB interface is enumerated with the \ref USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL option set, the library

-			 *  will automatically restart the USB PLL before the event is fired.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This event does not exist if the \c USB_HOST_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see

-			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This event does not exist on the microcontrollers with limited USB VBUS sensing abilities

-			 *        when the \c NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT compile time token is not set - see

-			 *        \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Suspend() event for accompanying Suspend event.

-			 */

-			void EVENT_USB_Device_WakeUp(void);

-

-			/** Event for USB interface reset. This event fires when the USB interface is in device mode, and

-			 *  a the USB host requests that the device reset its interface. This event fires after the control

-			 *  endpoint has been automatically configured by the library.

-			 *

-			 *  This event is time-critical; exceeding OS-specific delays within this event handler (typically of around

-			 *  two seconds) will prevent the device from enumerating correctly.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This event does not exist if the \c USB_HOST_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see

-			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).

-			 */

-			void EVENT_USB_Device_Reset(void);

-

-			/** Event for USB Start Of Frame detection, when enabled. This event fires at the start of each USB

-			 *  frame, once per millisecond, and is synchronized to the USB bus. This can be used as an accurate

-			 *  millisecond timer source when the USB bus is enumerated in device mode to a USB host.

-			 *

-			 *  This event is time-critical; it is run once per millisecond and thus long handlers will significantly

-			 *  degrade device performance. This event should only be enabled when needed to reduce device wake-ups.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre This event is not normally active - it must be manually enabled and disabled via the

-			 *       \ref USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents() and \ref USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents() commands after enumeration.

-			 *       \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This event does not exist if the \c USB_HOST_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see

-			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).

-			 */

-			void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_EVENTS_C)

-				void USB_Event_Stub(void) ATTR_CONST;

-

-				#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)

-					void EVENT_USB_UIDChange(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);

-				#endif

-

-				#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-					void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);

-					void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);

-					void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);

-					void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);

-					void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,

-                                                                const uint8_t SubErrorCode)

-					                                            ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);

-					void EVENT_USB_Host_StartOfFrame(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);

-				#endif

-

-				#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-					void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);

-					void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);

-					void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);

-					void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);

-					void EVENT_USB_Device_Suspend(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);

-					void EVENT_USB_Device_WakeUp(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);

-					void EVENT_USB_Device_Reset(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);

-					void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);

-				#endif

-			#endif

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Host.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Host.h
deleted file mode 100644
index bf2225f31..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Host.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,139 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Common USB Host definitions for all architectures.

- *  \copydetails Group_Host

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USB

- *  \defgroup Group_Host Host Management

- *  \brief USB Host management definitions for USB host mode.

- *

- *  USB Host mode related macros and enums. This module contains macros and enums which are used when

- *  the USB controller is initialized in host mode.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __USBHOST_H__

-#define __USBHOST_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "USBMode.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Enums: */

-			/** Enum for the various states of the USB Host state machine.

-			 *

-			 *  For information on each possible USB host state, refer to the USB 2.0 specification.

-			 *  Several of the USB host states are broken up further into multiple smaller sub-states,

-			 *  so that they can be internally implemented inside the library in an efficient manner.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref USB_HostState, which stores the current host state machine state.

-			 */

-			enum USB_Host_States_t

-			{

-				HOST_STATE_WaitForDevice                = 0,  /**< This state indicates that the stack is waiting for an interval

-				                                               *   to elapse before continuing with the next step of the device

-				                                               *   enumeration process.

-				                                               */

-				HOST_STATE_Unattached                   = 1,  /**< This state indicates that the host state machine is waiting for

-				                                               *   a device to be attached so that it can start the enumeration process.

-				                                               */

-				HOST_STATE_Powered                      = 2,  /**< This state indicates that a device has been attached, and the

-				                                               *   library's internals are being configured to begin the enumeration

-				                                               *   process.

-				                                               */

-				HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForDeviceSettle  = 3,  /**< This state indicates that the stack is waiting for the initial

-				                                               *   settling period to elapse before beginning the enumeration process.

-				                                               */

-				HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForConnect       = 4,  /**< This state indicates that the stack is waiting for a connection event

-				                                               *   from the USB controller to indicate a valid USB device has been attached

-				                                               *   to the bus and is ready to be enumerated.

-				                                               */

-				HOST_STATE_Powered_DoReset              = 5,  /**< This state indicates that a valid USB device has been attached, and that

-				                                               *   it will now be reset to ensure it is ready for enumeration.

-				                                               */

-				HOST_STATE_Powered_ConfigPipe           = 6,  /**< This state indicates that the attached device is currently powered and

-				                                               *   reset, and that the control pipe is now being configured by the stack.

-				                                               */

-				HOST_STATE_Default                      = 7,  /**< This state indicates that the stack is currently retrieving the control

-				                                               *   endpoint's size from the device, so that the control pipe can be altered

-				                                               *   to match.

-				                                               */

-				HOST_STATE_Default_PostReset            = 8,  /**< This state indicates that the control pipe is being reconfigured to match

-				                                               *   the retrieved control endpoint size from the device, and the device's USB

-				                                               *   bus address is being set.

-				                                               */

-				HOST_STATE_Default_PostAddressSet       = 9,  /**< This state indicates that the device's address has now been set, and the

-				                                               *   stack is has now completed the device enumeration process. This state causes

-				                                               *   the stack to change the current USB device address to that set for the

-				                                               *   connected device, before progressing to the \ref HOST_STATE_Addressed state

-				                                               *   ready for use in the user application.

-				                                               */

-				HOST_STATE_Addressed                    = 10, /**< Indicates that the device has been enumerated and addressed, and is now waiting

-				                                               *   for the user application to configure the device ready for use.

-				                                               */

-				HOST_STATE_Configured                   = 11, /**< Indicates that the device has been configured into a valid device configuration,

-				                                               *   ready for general use by the user application.

-				                                               */

-			};

-

-	/* Architecture Includes: */

-		#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)

-			#include "AVR8/Host_AVR8.h"

-		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)

-			#include "UC3/Host_UC3.h"

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/HostStandardReq.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/HostStandardReq.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 3242822f7..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/HostStandardReq.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,322 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_HOSTSTDREQ_C

-#include "HostStandardReq.h"

-

-uint8_t USB_Host_ConfigurationNumber;

-

-static uint8_t USB_Host_SendControlRequest_PRV(void* const BufferPtr)

-{

-	uint8_t* DataStream   = (uint8_t*)BufferPtr;

-	uint8_t  ReturnStatus = HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;

-	uint16_t DataLen      = USB_ControlRequest.wLength;

-

-	USB_Host_ResumeBus();

-

-	if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitMS(1)) != HOST_WAITERROR_Successful)

-	  return ReturnStatus;

-

-	Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP);

-	Pipe_ClearError();

-

-	Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-	#if defined(ARCH_BIG_ENDIAN)

-	Pipe_Write_8(USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType);

-	Pipe_Write_8(USB_ControlRequest.bRequest);

-	Pipe_Write_16_LE(USB_ControlRequest.wValue);

-	Pipe_Write_16_LE(USB_ControlRequest.wIndex);

-	Pipe_Write_16_LE(USB_ControlRequest.wLength);

-	#else

-	uint8_t* HeaderStream = (uint8_t*)&USB_ControlRequest;

-

-	for (uint8_t HeaderByte = 0; HeaderByte < sizeof(USB_Request_Header_t); HeaderByte++)

-	  Pipe_Write_8(*(HeaderStream++));

-	#endif

-

-	Pipe_ClearSETUP();

-

-	if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitForIOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_SetupSent)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-	  return ReturnStatus;

-

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitMS(1)) != HOST_WAITERROR_Successful)

-	  return ReturnStatus;

-

-	if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & CONTROL_REQTYPE_DIRECTION) == REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST)

-	{

-		Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_IN);

-

-		if (DataStream != NULL)

-		{

-			while (DataLen)

-			{

-				Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-				if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitForIOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_InReceived)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-				  return ReturnStatus;

-

-				if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))

-				  DataLen = 0;

-

-				while (Pipe_BytesInPipe() && DataLen)

-				{

-					*(DataStream++) = Pipe_Read_8();

-					DataLen--;

-				}

-

-				Pipe_Freeze();

-				Pipe_ClearIN();

-			}

-		}

-

-		Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_OUT);

-		Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-		if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitForIOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_OutReady)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-		  return ReturnStatus;

-

-		Pipe_ClearOUT();

-

-		if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitForIOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_OutReady)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-		  return ReturnStatus;

-	}

-	else

-	{

-		if (DataStream != NULL)

-		{

-			Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_OUT);

-			Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-			while (DataLen)

-			{

-				if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitForIOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_OutReady)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-				  return ReturnStatus;

-

-				while (DataLen && (Pipe_BytesInPipe() < USB_Host_ControlPipeSize))

-				{

-					Pipe_Write_8(*(DataStream++));

-					DataLen--;

-				}

-

-				Pipe_ClearOUT();

-			}

-

-			if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitForIOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_OutReady)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-			  return ReturnStatus;

-

-			Pipe_Freeze();

-		}

-

-		Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_IN);

-		Pipe_Unfreeze();

-

-		if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitForIOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_InReceived)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-		  return ReturnStatus;

-

-		Pipe_ClearIN();

-	}

-	

-	return ReturnStatus;

-}

-

-static uint8_t USB_Host_WaitForIOS(const uint8_t WaitType)

-{

-	#if (USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS < 0xFF)

-	uint8_t  TimeoutCounter = USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS;

-	#else

-	uint16_t TimeoutCounter = USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS;

-	#endif

-

-	while (!(((WaitType == USB_HOST_WAITFOR_SetupSent)  && Pipe_IsSETUPSent())  ||

-	         ((WaitType == USB_HOST_WAITFOR_InReceived) && Pipe_IsINReceived()) ||

-	         ((WaitType == USB_HOST_WAITFOR_OutReady)   && Pipe_IsOUTReady())))

-	{

-		uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-		if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_WaitMS(1)) != HOST_WAITERROR_Successful)

-		  return ErrorCode;

-

-		if (!(TimeoutCounter--))

-		  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_SoftwareTimeOut;

-	}

-

-	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;

-}

-

-uint8_t USB_Host_SendControlRequest(void* const BufferPtr)

-{

-	bool BusSuspended    = USB_Host_IsBusSuspended();

-	uint8_t ReturnStatus = USB_Host_SendControlRequest_PRV(BufferPtr);

-

-	Pipe_Freeze();

-

-	if (BusSuspended)

-	  USB_Host_SuspendBus();

-

-	Pipe_ResetPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-

-	return ReturnStatus;

-}

-

-uint8_t USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(const uint8_t ConfigNumber)

-{

-	uint8_t ErrorCode;

-

-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-		{

-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),

-			.bRequest      = REQ_SetConfiguration,

-			.wValue        = ConfigNumber,

-			.wIndex        = 0,

-			.wLength       = 0,

-		};

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) == HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-	{

-		USB_Host_ConfigurationNumber = ConfigNumber;

-		USB_HostState                = (ConfigNumber) ? HOST_STATE_Configured : HOST_STATE_Addressed;

-	}

-

-	return ErrorCode;

-}

-

-uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceConfiguration(uint8_t* const ConfigNumber)

-{

-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-		{

-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),

-			.bRequest      = REQ_GetConfiguration,

-			.wValue        = 0,

-			.wIndex        = 0,

-			.wLength       = sizeof(uint8_t),

-		};

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-

-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(ConfigNumber);

-}

-

-uint8_t USB_Host_GetDescriptor(const uint8_t Type,

-                               const uint8_t Index,

-                               void* const Buffer,

-                               const uint8_t BufferLength)

-{

-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-		{

-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),

-			.bRequest      = REQ_GetDescriptor,

-			.wValue        = (((uint16_t)Type << 8) | Index),

-			.wIndex        = 0,

-			.wLength       = BufferLength,

-		};

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-

-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Buffer);

-}

-

-uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceStatus(uint8_t* const FeatureStatus)

-{

-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-		{

-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),

-			.bRequest      = REQ_GetStatus,

-			.wValue        = 0,

-			.wIndex        = 0,

-			.wLength       = 0,

-		};

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-

-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(FeatureStatus);

-}

-

-uint8_t USB_Host_ClearEndpointStall(const uint8_t EndpointAddress)

-{

-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-		{

-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_ENDPOINT),

-			.bRequest      = REQ_ClearFeature,

-			.wValue        = FEATURE_SEL_EndpointHalt,

-			.wIndex        = EndpointAddress,

-			.wLength       = 0,

-		};

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-

-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);

-}

-

-uint8_t USB_Host_SetInterfaceAltSetting(const uint8_t InterfaceIndex,

-                                        const uint8_t AltSetting)

-{

-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-		{

-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE),

-			.bRequest      = REQ_SetInterface,

-			.wValue        = AltSetting,

-			.wIndex        = InterfaceIndex,

-			.wLength       = 0,

-		};

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-

-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);

-}

-

-uint8_t USB_Host_GetInterfaceAltSetting(const uint8_t InterfaceIndex,

-                                        uint8_t* const AltSetting)

-{

-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-		{

-			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE),

-			.bRequest      = REQ_GetInterface,

-			.wValue        = 0,

-			.wIndex        = InterfaceIndex,

-			.wLength       = sizeof(uint8_t),

-		};

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-

-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(AltSetting);

-}

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/HostStandardReq.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/HostStandardReq.h
deleted file mode 100644
index cdfb35470..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/HostStandardReq.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,292 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief USB host standard request management.

- *

- *  This file contains the function prototypes necessary for the issuing of outgoing standard control requests

- *  when the library is in USB host mode.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-#ifndef __HOSTSTDREQ_H__

-#define __HOSTSTDREQ_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "USBMode.h"

-		#include "StdRequestType.h"

-		#include "USBController.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			#if !defined(USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				/** Constant for the maximum software timeout period of sent USB control transactions to an attached

-				 *  device. If a device fails to respond to a sent control request within this period, the

-				 *  library will return a timeout error code.

-				 *

-				 *  This value may be overridden in the user project makefile as the value of the

-				 *  \ref USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS token, and passed to the compiler using the -D switch.

-				 */

-				#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS                1000

-			#endif

-

-		/* Enums: */

-			/** Enum for the \ref USB_Host_SendControlRequest() return code, indicating the reason for the error

-			 *  if the transfer of the request is unsuccessful.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq

-			 */

-			enum USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t

-			{

-				HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful         = 0, /**< No error occurred in the request transfer. */

-				HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected = 1, /**< The attached device was disconnected during the

-				                                        *     request transfer.

-				                                        */

-				HOST_SENDCONTROL_PipeError          = 2, /**< An error occurred in the pipe while sending the request. */

-				HOST_SENDCONTROL_SetupStalled       = 3, /**< The attached device stalled the request, usually

-				                                          *   indicating that the request is unsupported on the device.

-				                                          */

-				HOST_SENDCONTROL_SoftwareTimeOut    = 4, /**< The request or data transfer timed out. */

-			};

-

-		/* Global Variables: */

-			/** Indicates the currently set configuration number of the attached device. This indicates the currently

-			 *  selected configuration value if one has been set successfully, or 0 if no configuration has been selected.

-			 *

-			 *  To set a device configuration, call the \ref USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration() function.

-			 *

-			 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually

-			 *             changed in value.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_Host

-			 */

-			extern uint8_t USB_Host_ConfigurationNumber;

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Sends the request stored in the \ref USB_ControlRequest global structure to the attached device,

-			 *  and transfers the data stored in the buffer to the device, or from the device to the buffer

-			 *  as requested. The transfer is made on the currently selected pipe.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] BufferPtr  Pointer to the start of the data buffer if the request has a data stage, or

-			 *                        \c NULL if the request transfers no data to or from the device.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result.

-			 */

-			uint8_t USB_Host_SendControlRequest(void* const BufferPtr);

-

-			/** Sends a SET CONFIGURATION standard request to the attached device, with the given configuration index.

-			 *

-			 *  This routine will automatically update the \ref USB_HostState and \ref USB_Host_ConfigurationNumber

-			 *  state variables according to the given function parameters and the result of the request.

-			 *

-			 *  \note After this routine returns, the control pipe will be selected.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] ConfigNumber  Configuration index to send to the device.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result.

-			 */

-			uint8_t USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(const uint8_t ConfigNumber);

-

-			/** Sends a GET CONFIGURATION standard request to the attached device, to retrieve the currently selected

-			 *  device configuration index.

-			 *

-			 *  \note After this routine returns, the control pipe will be selected.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq

-			 *

-			 *  \param[out] ConfigNumber  Pointer to a location where the retrieved configuration index should be stored.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result.

-			 */

-			uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceConfiguration(uint8_t* const ConfigNumber) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Sends a GET DESCRIPTOR standard request to the attached device, requesting the  descriptor of the

-			 *  specified type and index.

-			 *

-			 *  \note After this routine returns, the control pipe will be selected.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in]  Type          Type of descriptor to retrieve, a value from the \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t enum.

-			 *  \param[in]  Index         Index of the descriptor to retrieve.

-			 *  \param[out] Buffer        Pointer to the destination buffer where the retrieved string descriptor is to be stored.

-			 *  \param[in]  BufferLength  Maximum size of the string descriptor which can be stored into the buffer.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result.

-			 */

-			uint8_t USB_Host_GetDescriptor(const uint8_t Type,

-			                               const uint8_t Index,

-			                               void* const Buffer,

-			                               const uint8_t BufferLength) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);

-

-			/** Retrieves the current feature status of the attached device, via a GET STATUS standard request. The

-			 *  retrieved feature status can then be examined by masking the retrieved value with the various

-			 *  \c FEATURE_* masks for bus/self power information and remote wakeup support.

-			 *

-			 *  \note After this routine returns, the control pipe will be selected.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq

-			 *

-			 *  \param[out]  FeatureStatus  Location where the retrieved feature status should be stored.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result.

-			 */

-			uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceStatus(uint8_t* const FeatureStatus) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Clears a stall condition on the given pipe, via a CLEAR FEATURE standard request to the attached device.

-			 *

-			 *  \note After this routine returns, the control pipe will be selected.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] EndpointAddress  Address of the endpoint to clear, including the endpoint's direction.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result.

-			 */

-			uint8_t USB_Host_ClearEndpointStall(const uint8_t EndpointAddress);

-

-			/** Selects a given alternative setting for the specified interface, via a SET INTERFACE standard request to

-			 *  the attached device.

-			 *

-			 *  \note After this routine returns, the control pipe will be selected.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] InterfaceIndex  Index of the interface whose alternative setting is to be altered.

-			 *  \param[in] AltSetting      Index of the interface's alternative setting which is to be selected.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result.

-			 */

-			uint8_t USB_Host_SetInterfaceAltSetting(const uint8_t InterfaceIndex,

-			                                        const uint8_t AltSetting);

-

-

-			/** Retrieves the current alternative setting for the specified interface, via a GET INTERFACE standard request to

-			 *  the attached device.

-			 *

-			 *  \note After this routine returns, the control pipe will be selected.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in]  InterfaceIndex  Index of the interface whose alternative setting is to be altered.

-			 *  \param[out] AltSetting      Pointer to a location where the retrieved alternative setting value should be stored.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result.

-			 */

-			uint8_t USB_Host_GetInterfaceAltSetting(const uint8_t InterfaceIndex,

-			                                        uint8_t* const AltSetting) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Sends a GET DESCRIPTOR standard request to the attached device, requesting the device descriptor.

-			 *  This can be used to easily retrieve information about the device such as its VID, PID and power

-			 *  requirements. This is a convenience wrapper for \ref USB_Host_GetDescriptor().

-			 *

-			 *  \note After this routine returns, the control pipe will be selected.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq

-			 *

-			 *  \param[out] DeviceDescriptorPtr  Pointer to the destination device descriptor structure where

-			 *                                   the read data is to be stored.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceDescriptor(USB_Descriptor_Device_t* const DeviceDescriptorPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			static inline uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceDescriptor(USB_Descriptor_Device_t* const DeviceDescriptorPtr)

-			{

-				return USB_Host_GetDescriptor(DTYPE_Device, 0, DeviceDescriptorPtr, sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t));

-			}

-

-			/** Sends a GET DESCRIPTOR standard request to the attached device, requesting the string descriptor

-			 *  of the specified index. This can be used to easily retrieve string descriptors from the device by

-			 *  index, after the index is obtained from the Device or Configuration descriptors. This is a convenience

-			 *  wrapper for \ref USB_Host_GetDescriptor().

-			 *

-			 *  \note After this routine returns, the control pipe will be selected.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in]  Index        Index of the string descriptor to retrieve.

-			 *  \param[out] Buffer       Pointer to the destination buffer where the retrieved string descriptor is

-			 *                           to be stored.

-			 *  \param[in] BufferLength  Maximum size of the string descriptor which can be stored into the buffer.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceStringDescriptor(const uint8_t Index,

-			                                                         void* const Buffer,

-			                                                         const uint8_t BufferLength) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);

-			static inline uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceStringDescriptor(const uint8_t Index,

-			                                                         void* const Buffer,

-			                                                         const uint8_t BufferLength)

-			{

-				return USB_Host_GetDescriptor(DTYPE_String, Index,  Buffer, BufferLength);

-			}

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Enums: */

-			enum USB_WaitForTypes_t

-			{

-				USB_HOST_WAITFOR_SetupSent,

-				USB_HOST_WAITFOR_InReceived,

-				USB_HOST_WAITFOR_OutReady,

-			};

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_HOSTSTDREQ_C)

-				static uint8_t USB_Host_SendControlRequest_PRV(void* const BufferPtr);

-				static uint8_t USB_Host_WaitForIOS(const uint8_t WaitType);

-			#endif

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/OTG.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/OTG.h
deleted file mode 100644
index ccd7cc1be..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/OTG.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,80 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Common USB OTG definitions for all architectures.

- *  \copydetails Group_OTG

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USB

- *  \defgroup Group_OTG USB On The Go (OTG) Management

- *  \brief USB OTG management definitions.

- *

- *  This module contains macros for embedded USB hosts with dual role On The Go capabilities, for managing role

- *  exchange. OTG is a way for two USB dual role devices to talk to one another directly without fixed device/host

- *  roles.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __USBOTG_H__

-#define __USBOTG_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "USBMode.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Architecture Includes: */

-		#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)

-			#include "AVR8/OTG_AVR8.h"

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Pipe.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Pipe.h
deleted file mode 100644
index ce2be5492..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Pipe.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,144 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Common USB Pipe definitions for all architectures.

- *  \copydetails Group_PipeManagement

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_PipeManagement

- *  \defgroup Group_PipeRW Pipe Data Reading and Writing

- *  \brief Pipe data read/write definitions.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing from and to pipes.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_PipeRW

- *  \defgroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW Read/Write of Primitive Data Types

- *  \brief Pipe data primitive read/write definitions.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of primitive data types

- *  from and to pipes.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_PipeManagement

- *  \defgroup Group_PipePacketManagement Pipe Packet Management

- *  \brief Pipe packet management definitions.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to packet management of pipes.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_PipeManagement

- *  \defgroup Group_PipeControlReq Pipe Control Request Management

- *  \brief Pipe control request definitions.

- *

- *  Module for host mode request processing. This module allows for the transmission of standard, class and

- *  vendor control requests to the default control endpoint of an attached device while in host mode.

- *

- *  \see Chapter 9 of the USB 2.0 specification.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USB

- *  \defgroup Group_PipeManagement Pipe Management

- *  \brief Pipe management definitions.

- *

- *  This module contains functions, macros and enums related to pipe management when in USB Host mode. This

- *  module contains the pipe management macros, as well as pipe interrupt and data send/receive functions

- *  for various data types.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __PIPE_H__

-#define __PIPE_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "USBMode.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Type Defines: */

-			/** Type define for a pipe table entry, used to configure pipes in groups via

-			 *  \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable().

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				uint8_t  Address; /**< Address of the pipe to configure, or zero if the table entry is to be unused. */

-				uint16_t Size; /**< Size of the pipe bank, in bytes. */

-				uint8_t  EndpointAddress; /** Address of the endpoint in the connected device. */

-				uint8_t  Type; /**< Type of the endpoint, a \c EP_TYPE_* mask. */

-				uint8_t  Banks; /**< Number of hardware banks to use for the pipe. */

-			} USB_Pipe_Table_t;

-

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Pipe address for the default control pipe, which always resides in address 0. This is

-			 *  defined for convenience to give more readable code when used with the pipe macros.

-			 */

-			#define PIPE_CONTROLPIPE                0

-

-			/** Pipe number mask, for masking against pipe addresses to retrieve the pipe's numerical address

-			 *  in the device.

-			 */

-			#define PIPE_PIPENUM_MASK               0x0F

-

-			/** Endpoint number mask, for masking against endpoint addresses to retrieve the endpoint's

-			 *  numerical address in the attached device.

-			 */

-			#define PIPE_EPNUM_MASK                 0x0F

-

-	/* Architecture Includes: */

-		#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)

-			#include "AVR8/Pipe_AVR8.h"

-		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)

-			#include "UC3/Pipe_UC3.h"

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/PipeStream.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/PipeStream.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 002d6ff1e..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/PipeStream.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,100 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Pipe data stream transmission and reception management.

- *  \copydetails Group_PipeStreamRW

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_PipeRW

- *  \defgroup Group_PipeStreamRW Read/Write of Multi-Byte Streams

- *  \brief Pipe data stream transmission and reception management.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of data streams from

- *  and to pipes.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __PIPE_STREAM_H__

-#define __PIPE_STREAM_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "USBMode.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Enums: */

-			/** Enum for the possible error return codes of the Pipe_*_Stream_* functions. */

-			enum Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t

-			{

-				PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError            = 0, /**< Command completed successfully, no error. */

-				PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled        = 1, /**< The device stalled the pipe during the transfer. */

-				PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected = 2, /**< Device was disconnected from the host during

-			                                           *   the transfer.

-			                                           */

-				PIPE_RWSTREAM_Timeout            = 3, /**< The device failed to accept or send the next packet

-				                                       *   within the software timeout period set by the

-				                                       *   \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro.

-				                                       */

-				PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer = 4, /**< Indicates that the pipe bank became full/empty before the

-				                                       *   complete contents of the stream could be transferred.

-				                                       */

-			};

-

-	/* Architecture Includes: */

-		#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)

-			#include "AVR8/PipeStream_AVR8.h"

-		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)

-			#include "UC3/PipeStream_UC3.h"

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/StdDescriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/StdDescriptors.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 012399e96..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/StdDescriptors.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,739 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Common standard USB Descriptor definitions for all architectures.

- *  \copydetails Group_StdDescriptors

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USB

- *  \defgroup Group_StdDescriptors USB Descriptors

- *  \brief Standard USB Descriptor definitions.

- *

- *  Standard USB device descriptor defines and retrieval routines, for USB devices. This module contains

- *  structures and macros for the easy creation of standard USB descriptors in USB device projects.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __USBDESCRIPTORS_H__

-#define __USBDESCRIPTORS_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "USBMode.h"

-		#include "Events.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Indicates that a given descriptor does not exist in the device. This can be used inside descriptors

-			 *  for string descriptor indexes, or may be use as a return value for GetDescriptor when the specified

-			 *  descriptor does not exist.

-			 */

-			#define NO_DESCRIPTOR                     0

-

-			/** Macro to calculate the power value for the configuration descriptor, from a given number of milliamperes.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] mA  Maximum number of milliamps the device consumes when the given configuration is selected.

-			 */

-			#define USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(mA)           ((mA) >> 1)

-

-			/** Macro to calculate the Unicode length of a string with a given number of Unicode characters.

-			 *  Should be used in string descriptor's headers for giving the string descriptor's byte length.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] UnicodeChars  Number of Unicode characters in the string text.

-			 */

-			#define USB_STRING_LEN(UnicodeChars)      (sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Header_t) + ((UnicodeChars) << 1))

-

-			/** Macro to encode a given four digit floating point version number (e.g. 01.23) into Binary Coded

-			 *  Decimal format for descriptor fields requiring BCD encoding, such as the USB version number in the

-			 *  standard device descriptor.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This value is automatically converted into Little Endian, suitable for direct use inside device

-			 *        descriptors on all architectures without endianness conversion macros.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in]  x  Version number to encode as a 16-bit little-endian number, as a floating point number.

-			 */

-			#define VERSION_BCD(x)                    CPU_TO_LE16((VERSION_TENS(x) << 12)  | (VERSION_ONES(x) << 8) | \

-			                                                      (VERSION_TENTHS(x) << 4) | (VERSION_HUNDREDTHS(x) << 0) )

-

-			/** String language ID for the English language. Should be used in \ref USB_Descriptor_String_t descriptors

-			 *  to indicate that the English language is supported by the device in its string descriptors.

-			 */

-			#define LANGUAGE_ID_ENG                   0x0409

-

-			/** \name USB Configuration Descriptor Attribute Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** Mask for the reserved bit in the Configuration Descriptor's \c ConfigAttributes field, which must be set on all

-			 *  devices for historical purposes.

-			 */

-			#define USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED          0x80

-

-			/** Can be masked with other configuration descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t

-			 *  descriptor's \c ConfigAttributes value to indicate that the specified configuration can draw its power

-			 *  from the device's own power source.

-			 */

-			#define USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED       0x40

-

-			/** Can be masked with other configuration descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t

-			 *  descriptor's \c ConfigAttributes value to indicate that the specified configuration supports the

-			 *  remote wakeup feature of the USB standard, allowing a suspended USB device to wake up the host upon

-			 *  request.

-			 */

-			#define USB_CONFIG_ATTR_REMOTEWAKEUP      0x20

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name Endpoint Descriptor Attribute Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's

-			 *  \c Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is not synchronized.

-			 *

-			 *  \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint attributes.

-			 */

-			#define ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC             (0 << 2)

-

-			/** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's

-			 *  \c Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is asynchronous.

-			 *

-			 *  \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint attributes.

-			 */

-			#define ENDPOINT_ATTR_ASYNC               (1 << 2)

-

-			/** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's

-			 *  \c Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is adaptive.

-			 *

-			 *  \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint attributes.

-			 */

-			#define ENDPOINT_ATTR_ADAPTIVE            (2 << 2)

-

-			/** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's

-			 *  \c Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is synchronized.

-			 *

-			 *  \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint attributes.

-			 */

-			#define ENDPOINT_ATTR_SYNC                (3 << 2)

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name Endpoint Descriptor Usage Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's

-			 *  \c Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is used for data transfers.

-			 *

-			 *  \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint usage attributes.

-			 */

-			#define ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA               (0 << 4)

-

-			/** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's

-			 *  \c Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is used for feedback.

-			 *

-			 *  \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint usage attributes.

-			 */

-			#define ENDPOINT_USAGE_FEEDBACK           (1 << 4)

-

-			/** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's

-			 *  \c Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is used for implicit feedback.

-			 *

-			 *  \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint usage attributes.

-			 */

-			#define ENDPOINT_USAGE_IMPLICIT_FEEDBACK  (2 << 4)

-			//@}

-

-		/* Enums: */

-			/** Enum for the possible standard descriptor types, as given in each descriptor's header. */

-			enum USB_DescriptorTypes_t

-			{

-				DTYPE_Device                    = 0x01, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is a device descriptor. */

-				DTYPE_Configuration             = 0x02, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is a configuration descriptor. */

-				DTYPE_String                    = 0x03, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is a string descriptor. */

-				DTYPE_Interface                 = 0x04, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is an interface descriptor. */

-				DTYPE_Endpoint                  = 0x05, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is an endpoint descriptor. */

-				DTYPE_DeviceQualifier           = 0x06, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is a device qualifier descriptor. */

-				DTYPE_Other                     = 0x07, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is of other type. */

-				DTYPE_InterfacePower            = 0x08, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is an interface power descriptor. */

-				DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation      = 0x0B, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is an interface association descriptor. */

-				DTYPE_CSInterface               = 0x24, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is a class specific interface descriptor. */

-				DTYPE_CSEndpoint                = 0x25, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is a class specific endpoint descriptor. */

-			};

-

-			/** Enum for possible Class, Subclass and Protocol values of device and interface descriptors. */

-			enum USB_Descriptor_ClassSubclassProtocol_t

-			{

-				USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass          = 0x00, /**< Descriptor Class value indicating that the device does not belong

-				                                         *   to a particular class at the device level.

-				                                         */

-				USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass       = 0x00, /**< Descriptor Subclass value indicating that the device does not belong

-				                                         *   to a particular subclass at the device level.

-				                                         */

-				USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol       = 0x00, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device does not belong

-				                                         *   to a particular protocol at the device level.

-				                                         */

-				USB_CSCP_VendorSpecificClass    = 0xFF, /**< Descriptor Class value indicating that the device/interface belongs

-				                                         *   to a vendor specific class.

-				                                         */

-				USB_CSCP_VendorSpecificSubclass = 0xFF, /**< Descriptor Subclass value indicating that the device/interface belongs

-				                                         *   to a vendor specific subclass.

-				                                         */

-				USB_CSCP_VendorSpecificProtocol = 0xFF, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device/interface belongs

-				                                         *   to a vendor specific protocol.

-				                                         */

-				USB_CSCP_IADDeviceClass         = 0xEF, /**< Descriptor Class value indicating that the device belongs to the

-				                                         *   Interface Association Descriptor class.

-				                                         */

-				USB_CSCP_IADDeviceSubclass      = 0x02, /**< Descriptor Subclass value indicating that the device belongs to the

-				                                         *   Interface Association Descriptor subclass.

-				                                         */

-				USB_CSCP_IADDeviceProtocol      = 0x01, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device belongs to the

-				                                         *   Interface Association Descriptor protocol.

-				                                         */

-			};

-

-		/* Type Defines: */

-			/** \brief Standard USB Descriptor Header (LUFA naming conventions).

-			 *

-             *  Type define for all descriptors' standard header, indicating the descriptor's length and type. This structure

-			 *  uses LUFA-specific element names to make each element's purpose clearer.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref USB_StdDescriptor_Header_t for the version of this type with standard element names.

-			 *

-			 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				uint8_t Size; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */

-				uint8_t Type; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value

-				               *   given by the specific class.

-				               */

-			} ATTR_PACKED USB_Descriptor_Header_t;

-

-			/** \brief Standard USB Descriptor Header (USB-IF naming conventions).

-			 *

-			 *  Type define for all descriptors' standard header, indicating the descriptor's length and type. This structure

-			 *  uses the relevant standard's given element names to ensure compatibility with the standard.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref USB_Descriptor_Header_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific element names.

-			 *

-			 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				uint8_t bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */

-				uint8_t bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value

-				                          *   given by the specific class.

-				                          */

-			} ATTR_PACKED USB_StdDescriptor_Header_t;

-

-			/** \brief Standard USB Device Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).

-			 *

-			 *  Type define for a standard Device Descriptor. This structure uses LUFA-specific element names to make each

-			 *  element's purpose clearer.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref USB_StdDescriptor_Device_t for the version of this type with standard element names.

-			 *

-			 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */

-

-				uint16_t USBSpecification; /**< BCD of the supported USB specification. */

-				uint8_t  Class; /**< USB device class. */

-				uint8_t  SubClass; /**< USB device subclass. */

-				uint8_t  Protocol; /**< USB device protocol. */

-

-				uint8_t  Endpoint0Size; /**< Size of the control (address 0) endpoint's bank in bytes. */

-

-				uint16_t VendorID; /**< Vendor ID for the USB product. */

-				uint16_t ProductID; /**< Unique product ID for the USB product. */

-				uint16_t ReleaseNumber; /**< Product release (version) number. */

-

-				uint8_t  ManufacturerStrIndex; /**< String index for the manufacturer's name. The

-				                                *   host will request this string via a separate

-				                                *   control request for the string descriptor.

-				                                *

-				                                *   \note If no string supplied, use \ref NO_DESCRIPTOR.

-				                                */

-				uint8_t  ProductStrIndex; /**< String index for the product name/details.

-				                           *

-				                           *  \see ManufacturerStrIndex structure entry.

-				                           */

-				uint8_t  SerialNumStrIndex; /**< String index for the product's globally unique hexadecimal

-				                             *   serial number, in uppercase Unicode ASCII.

-				                             *

-				                             *  \note On some microcontroller models, there is an embedded serial number

-				                             *        in the chip which can be used for the device serial number.

-				                             *        To use this serial number, set this to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.

-				                             *        On unsupported devices, this will evaluate to 0 and will cause

-				                             *        the host to generate a pseudo-unique value for the device upon

-				                             *        insertion.

-				                             *

-				                             *  \see ManufacturerStrIndex structure entry.

-				                             */

-				uint8_t  NumberOfConfigurations; /**< Total number of configurations supported by

-				                                  *   the device.

-				                                  */

-			} ATTR_PACKED USB_Descriptor_Device_t;

-

-			/** \brief Standard USB Device Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).

-			 *

-			 *  Type define for a standard Device Descriptor. This structure uses the relevant standard's given element names

-			 *  to ensure compatibility with the standard.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref USB_Descriptor_Device_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific element names.

-			 *

-			 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				uint8_t  bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */

-				uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value

-				                              *   given by the specific class.

-				                              */

-				uint16_t bcdUSB; /**< BCD of the supported USB specification. */

-				uint8_t  bDeviceClass; /**< USB device class. */

-				uint8_t  bDeviceSubClass; /**< USB device subclass. */

-				uint8_t  bDeviceProtocol; /**< USB device protocol. */

-				uint8_t  bMaxPacketSize0; /**< Size of the control (address 0) endpoint's bank in bytes. */

-				uint16_t idVendor; /**< Vendor ID for the USB product. */

-				uint16_t idProduct; /**< Unique product ID for the USB product. */

-				uint16_t bcdDevice; /**< Product release (version) number. */

-				uint8_t  iManufacturer; /**< String index for the manufacturer's name. The

-				                         *   host will request this string via a separate

-				                         *   control request for the string descriptor.

-				                         *

-				                         *   \note If no string supplied, use \ref NO_DESCRIPTOR.

-				                         */

-				uint8_t  iProduct; /**< String index for the product name/details.

-				                    *

-				                    *  \see ManufacturerStrIndex structure entry.

-				                    */

-				uint8_t iSerialNumber; /**< String index for the product's globally unique hexadecimal

-				                        *   serial number, in uppercase Unicode ASCII.

-				                        *

-				                        *  \note On some microcontroller models, there is an embedded serial number

-				                        *        in the chip which can be used for the device serial number.

-				                        *        To use this serial number, set this to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.

-				                        *        On unsupported devices, this will evaluate to 0 and will cause

-				                        *        the host to generate a pseudo-unique value for the device upon

-				                        *        insertion.

-				                        *

-				                        *  \see ManufacturerStrIndex structure entry.

-				                        */

-				uint8_t  bNumConfigurations; /**< Total number of configurations supported by

-				                              *   the device.

-				                              */

-			} ATTR_PACKED USB_StdDescriptor_Device_t;

-

-			/** \brief Standard USB Device Qualifier Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).

-			 *

-			 *  Type define for a standard Device Qualifier Descriptor. This structure uses LUFA-specific element names

-			 *  to make each element's purpose clearer.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref USB_StdDescriptor_DeviceQualifier_t for the version of this type with standard element names.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */

-

-				uint16_t USBSpecification; /**< BCD of the supported USB specification. */

-				uint8_t  Class; /**< USB device class. */

-				uint8_t  SubClass; /**< USB device subclass. */

-				uint8_t  Protocol; /**< USB device protocol. */

-

-				uint8_t  Endpoint0Size; /**< Size of the control (address 0) endpoint's bank in bytes. */

-				uint8_t  NumberOfConfigurations; /**< Total number of configurations supported by

-				                                  *   the device.

-				                                  */

-				uint8_t  Reserved; /**< Reserved for future use, must be 0. */

-			} ATTR_PACKED USB_Descriptor_DeviceQualifier_t;

-

-			/** \brief Standard USB Device Qualifier Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).

-			 *

-			 *  Type define for a standard Device Qualifier Descriptor. This structure uses the relevant standard's given element names

-			 *  to ensure compatibility with the standard.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref USB_Descriptor_DeviceQualifier_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific element names.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				uint8_t  bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */

-				uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value

-				                              *   given by the specific class.

-				                              */

-				uint16_t bcdUSB; /**< BCD of the supported USB specification. */

-				uint8_t  bDeviceClass; /**< USB device class. */

-				uint8_t  bDeviceSubClass; /**< USB device subclass. */

-				uint8_t  bDeviceProtocol; /**< USB device protocol. */

-				uint8_t  bMaxPacketSize0; /**< Size of the control (address 0) endpoint's bank in bytes. */

-				uint8_t  bNumConfigurations; /**< Total number of configurations supported by

-				                              *   the device.

-				                              */

-				uint8_t  bReserved; /**< Reserved for future use, must be 0. */

-			} ATTR_PACKED USB_StdDescriptor_DeviceQualifier_t;

-

-			/** \brief Standard USB Configuration Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).

-			 *

-			 *  Type define for a standard Configuration Descriptor header. This structure uses LUFA-specific element names

-			 *  to make each element's purpose clearer.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref USB_StdDescriptor_Configuration_Header_t for the version of this type with standard element names.

-			 *

-			 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */

-

-				uint16_t TotalConfigurationSize; /**< Size of the configuration descriptor header,

-				                                  *   and all sub descriptors inside the configuration.

-				                                  */

-				uint8_t  TotalInterfaces; /**< Total number of interfaces in the configuration. */

-

-				uint8_t  ConfigurationNumber; /**< Configuration index of the current configuration. */

-				uint8_t  ConfigurationStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing the configuration. */

-

-				uint8_t  ConfigAttributes; /**< Configuration attributes, comprised of a mask of \c USB_CONFIG_ATTR_* masks.

-				                            *   On all devices, this should include USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED at a minimum.

-				                            */

-

-				uint8_t  MaxPowerConsumption; /**< Maximum power consumption of the device while in the

-				                               *   current configuration, calculated by the \ref USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA()

-				                               *   macro.

-				                               */

-			} ATTR_PACKED USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t;

-

-			/** \brief Standard USB Configuration Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).

-			 *

-			 *  Type define for a standard Configuration Descriptor header. This structure uses the relevant standard's given element names

-			 *  to ensure compatibility with the standard.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref USB_Descriptor_Device_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific element names.

-			 *

-			 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				uint8_t  bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */

-				uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value

-				                              *   given by the specific class.

-				                              */

-				uint16_t wTotalLength; /**< Size of the configuration descriptor header,

-				                           *   and all sub descriptors inside the configuration.

-				                           */

-				uint8_t  bNumInterfaces; /**< Total number of interfaces in the configuration. */

-				uint8_t  bConfigurationValue; /**< Configuration index of the current configuration. */

-				uint8_t  iConfiguration; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing the configuration. */

-				uint8_t  bmAttributes; /**< Configuration attributes, comprised of a mask of \c USB_CONFIG_ATTR_* masks.

-				                        *   On all devices, this should include USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED at a minimum.

-				                        */

-				uint8_t  bMaxPower; /**< Maximum power consumption of the device while in the

-				                     *   current configuration, calculated by the \ref USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA()

-				                     *   macro.

-				                     */

-			} ATTR_PACKED USB_StdDescriptor_Configuration_Header_t;

-

-			/** \brief Standard USB Interface Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).

-			 *

-			 *  Type define for a standard Interface Descriptor. This structure uses LUFA-specific element names

-			 *  to make each element's purpose clearer.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref USB_StdDescriptor_Interface_t for the version of this type with standard element names.

-			 *

-			 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */

-

-				uint8_t InterfaceNumber; /**< Index of the interface in the current configuration. */

-				uint8_t AlternateSetting; /**< Alternate setting for the interface number. The same

-				                           *   interface number can have multiple alternate settings

-				                           *   with different endpoint configurations, which can be

-				                           *   selected by the host.

-				                           */

-				uint8_t TotalEndpoints; /**< Total number of endpoints in the interface. */

-

-				uint8_t Class; /**< Interface class ID. */

-				uint8_t SubClass; /**< Interface subclass ID. */

-				uint8_t Protocol; /**< Interface protocol ID. */

-

-				uint8_t InterfaceStrIndex; /**< Index of the string descriptor describing the interface. */

-			} ATTR_PACKED USB_Descriptor_Interface_t;

-

-			/** \brief Standard USB Interface Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).

-			 *

-			 *  Type define for a standard Interface Descriptor. This structure uses the relevant standard's given element names

-			 *  to ensure compatibility with the standard.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref USB_Descriptor_Interface_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific element names.

-			 *

-			 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				uint8_t bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */

-				uint8_t bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value

-				                          *   given by the specific class.

-				                          */

-				uint8_t bInterfaceNumber; /**< Index of the interface in the current configuration. */

-				uint8_t bAlternateSetting; /**< Alternate setting for the interface number. The same

-				                            *   interface number can have multiple alternate settings

-				                            *   with different endpoint configurations, which can be

-				                            *   selected by the host.

-				                            */

-				uint8_t bNumEndpoints; /**< Total number of endpoints in the interface. */

-				uint8_t bInterfaceClass; /**< Interface class ID. */

-				uint8_t bInterfaceSubClass; /**< Interface subclass ID. */

-				uint8_t bInterfaceProtocol; /**< Interface protocol ID. */

-				uint8_t iInterface; /**< Index of the string descriptor describing the

-				                     *   interface.

-				                     */

-			} ATTR_PACKED USB_StdDescriptor_Interface_t;

-

-			/** \brief Standard USB Interface Association Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).

-			 *

-			 *  Type define for a standard Interface Association Descriptor. This structure uses LUFA-specific element names

-			 *  to make each element's purpose clearer.

-			 *

-			 *  This descriptor has been added as a supplement to the USB2.0 standard, in the ECN located at

-			 *  <a>http://www.usb.org/developers/docs/InterfaceAssociationDescriptor_ecn.pdf</a>. It allows composite

-			 *  devices with multiple interfaces related to the same function to have the multiple interfaces bound

-			 *  together at the point of enumeration, loading one generic driver for all the interfaces in the single

-			 *  function. Read the ECN for more information.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref USB_StdDescriptor_Interface_Association_t for the version of this type with standard element names.

-			 *

-			 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */

-

-				uint8_t FirstInterfaceIndex; /**< Index of the first associated interface. */

-				uint8_t TotalInterfaces; /**< Total number of associated interfaces. */

-

-				uint8_t Class; /**< Interface class ID. */

-				uint8_t SubClass; /**< Interface subclass ID. */

-				uint8_t Protocol; /**< Interface protocol ID. */

-

-				uint8_t IADStrIndex; /**< Index of the string descriptor describing the

-				                      *   interface association.

-				                      */

-			} ATTR_PACKED USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t;

-

-			/** \brief Standard USB Interface Association Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).

-			 *

-			 *  Type define for a standard Interface Association Descriptor. This structure uses the relevant standard's given

-			 *  element names to ensure compatibility with the standard.

-			 *

-			 *  This descriptor has been added as a supplement to the USB2.0 standard, in the ECN located at

-			 *  <a>http://www.usb.org/developers/docs/InterfaceAssociationDescriptor_ecn.pdf</a>. It allows composite

-			 *  devices with multiple interfaces related to the same function to have the multiple interfaces bound

-			 *  together at the point of enumeration, loading one generic driver for all the interfaces in the single

-			 *  function. Read the ECN for more information.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific

-			 *       element names.

-			 *

-			 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				uint8_t bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */

-				uint8_t bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value

-				                          *   given by the specific class.

-				                          */

-				uint8_t bFirstInterface; /**< Index of the first associated interface. */

-				uint8_t bInterfaceCount; /**< Total number of associated interfaces. */

-				uint8_t bFunctionClass; /**< Interface class ID. */

-				uint8_t bFunctionSubClass; /**< Interface subclass ID. */

-				uint8_t bFunctionProtocol; /**< Interface protocol ID. */

-				uint8_t iFunction; /**< Index of the string descriptor describing the

-				                    *   interface association.

-				                    */

-			} ATTR_PACKED USB_StdDescriptor_Interface_Association_t;

-

-			/** \brief Standard USB Endpoint Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).

-			 *

-			 *  Type define for a standard Endpoint Descriptor. This structure uses LUFA-specific element names

-			 *  to make each element's purpose clearer.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref USB_StdDescriptor_Endpoint_t for the version of this type with standard element names.

-			 *

-			 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */

-

-				uint8_t  EndpointAddress; /**< Logical address of the endpoint within the device for the current

-				                           *   configuration, including direction mask.

-				                           */

-				uint8_t  Attributes; /**< Endpoint attributes, comprised of a mask of the endpoint type (EP_TYPE_*)

-				                      *   and attributes (ENDPOINT_ATTR_*) masks.

-				                      */

-				uint16_t EndpointSize; /**< Size of the endpoint bank, in bytes. This indicates the maximum packet

-				                        *   size that the endpoint can receive at a time.

-				                        */

-				uint8_t  PollingIntervalMS; /**< Polling interval in milliseconds for the endpoint if it is an INTERRUPT

-				                             *   or ISOCHRONOUS type.

-				                             */

-			} ATTR_PACKED USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t;

-

-			/** \brief Standard USB Endpoint Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).

-			 *

-			 *  Type define for a standard Endpoint Descriptor. This structure uses the relevant standard's given

-			 *  element names to ensure compatibility with the standard.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific

-			 *       element names.

-			 *

-			 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				uint8_t  bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */

-				uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a

-				                           *   value given by the specific class.

-				                           */

-				uint8_t  bEndpointAddress; /**< Logical address of the endpoint within the device for the current

-				                            *   configuration, including direction mask.

-				                            */

-				uint8_t  bmAttributes; /**< Endpoint attributes, comprised of a mask of the endpoint type (EP_TYPE_*)

-				                        *   and attributes (ENDPOINT_ATTR_*) masks.

-				                        */

-				uint16_t wMaxPacketSize; /**< Size of the endpoint bank, in bytes. This indicates the maximum packet size

-				                          *   that the endpoint can receive at a time.

-				                          */

-				uint8_t  bInterval; /**< Polling interval in milliseconds for the endpoint if it is an INTERRUPT or

-				                     *   ISOCHRONOUS type.

-				                     */

-			} ATTR_PACKED USB_StdDescriptor_Endpoint_t;

-

-			/** \brief Standard USB String Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).

-			 *

-			 *  Type define for a standard string descriptor. Unlike other standard descriptors, the length

-			 *  of the descriptor for placement in the descriptor header must be determined by the \ref USB_STRING_LEN()

-			 *  macro rather than by the size of the descriptor structure, as the length is not fixed.

-			 *

-			 *  This structure should also be used for string index 0, which contains the supported language IDs for

-			 *  the device as an array.

-			 *

-			 *  This structure uses LUFA-specific element names to make each element's purpose clearer.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref USB_StdDescriptor_String_t for the version of this type with standard element names.

-			 *

-			 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */

-

-				#if (((ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) || (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)) && !defined(__DOXYGEN__))

-				wchar_t  UnicodeString[];

-				#else

-				uint16_t UnicodeString[]; /**< String data, as unicode characters (alternatively,

-				                           *   string language IDs). If normal ASCII characters are

-				                           *   to be used, they must be added as an array of characters

-				                           *   rather than a normal C string so that they are widened to

-				                           *   Unicode size.

-				                           *

-				                           *   Under GCC, strings prefixed with the "L" character (before

-				                           *   the opening string quotation mark) are considered to be

-				                           *   Unicode strings, and may be used instead of an explicit

-				                           *   array of ASCII characters on little endian devices with

-				                           *   UTF-16-LE \c wchar_t encoding.

-				                           */

-				#endif

-			} ATTR_PACKED USB_Descriptor_String_t;

-

-			/** \brief Standard USB String Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).

-			 *

-			 *  Type define for a standard string descriptor. Unlike other standard descriptors, the length

-			 *  of the descriptor for placement in the descriptor header must be determined by the \ref USB_STRING_LEN()

-			 *  macro rather than by the size of the descriptor structure, as the length is not fixed.

-			 *

-			 *  This structure should also be used for string index 0, which contains the supported language IDs for

-			 *  the device as an array.

-			 *

-			 *  This structure uses the relevant standard's given element names to ensure compatibility with the standard.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref USB_Descriptor_String_t for the version of this type with with non-standard LUFA specific

-			 *       element names.

-			 *

-			 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				uint8_t bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */

-				uint8_t bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t

-				                          *   or a value given by the specific class.

-				                          */

-				uint16_t bString[]; /**< String data, as unicode characters (alternatively, string language IDs).

-				                     *   If normal ASCII characters are to be used, they must be added as an array

-				                     *   of characters rather than a normal C string so that they are widened to

-				                     *   Unicode size.

-				                     *

-				                     *   Under GCC, strings prefixed with the "L" character (before the opening string

-				                     *   quotation mark) are considered to be Unicode strings, and may be used instead

-				                     *   of an explicit array of ASCII characters.

-				                     */

-			} ATTR_PACKED USB_StdDescriptor_String_t;

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define VERSION_TENS(x)                   (int)((int)(x) / 10)

-			#define VERSION_ONES(x)                   (int)((int)(x) % 10)

-			#define VERSION_TENTHS(x)                 (int)(((x *  1) - ((int)(x *  1))) * 10)

-			#define VERSION_HUNDREDTHS(x)             (int)(((x * 10) - ((int)(x * 10))) * 10)

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/StdRequestType.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/StdRequestType.h
deleted file mode 100644
index a841f8f3a..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/StdRequestType.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,258 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief USB control endpoint request definitions.

- *  \copydetails Group_StdRequest

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USB

- *  \defgroup Group_StdRequest Standard USB Requests

- *  \brief USB control endpoint request definitions.

- *

- *  This module contains definitions for the various control request parameters, so that the request

- *  details (such as data direction, request recipient, etc.) can be extracted via masking.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __STDREQTYPE_H__

-#define __STDREQTYPE_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "USBMode.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Mask for the request type parameter, to indicate the direction of the request data (Host to Device

-			 *  or Device to Host). The result of this mask should then be compared to the request direction masks.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \c REQDIR_* macros for masks indicating the request data direction.

-			 */

-			#define CONTROL_REQTYPE_DIRECTION  0x80

-

-			/** Mask for the request type parameter, to indicate the type of request (Device, Class or Vendor

-			 *  Specific). The result of this mask should then be compared to the request type masks.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \c REQTYPE_* macros for masks indicating the request type.

-			 */

-			#define CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE       0x60

-

-			/** Mask for the request type parameter, to indicate the recipient of the request (Device, Interface

-			 *  Endpoint or Other). The result of this mask should then be compared to the request recipient

-			 *  masks.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \c REQREC_* macros for masks indicating the request recipient.

-			 */

-			#define CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT  0x1F

-

-			/** \name Control Request Data Direction Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** Request data direction mask, indicating that the request data will flow from host to device.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_DIRECTION macro.

-			 */

-			#define REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE        (0 << 7)

-

-			/** Request data direction mask, indicating that the request data will flow from device to host.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_DIRECTION macro.

-			 */

-			#define REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST        (1 << 7)

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name Control Request Type Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** Request type mask, indicating that the request is a standard request.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE macro.

-			 */

-			#define REQTYPE_STANDARD           (0 << 5)

-

-			/** Request type mask, indicating that the request is a class-specific request.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE macro.

-			 */

-			#define REQTYPE_CLASS              (1 << 5)

-

-			/** Request type mask, indicating that the request is a vendor specific request.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE macro.

-			 */

-			#define REQTYPE_VENDOR             (2 << 5)

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name Control Request Recipient Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** Request recipient mask, indicating that the request is to be issued to the device as a whole.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT macro.

-			 */

-			#define REQREC_DEVICE              (0 << 0)

-

-			/** Request recipient mask, indicating that the request is to be issued to an interface in the

-			 *  currently selected configuration.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT macro.

-			 */

-			#define REQREC_INTERFACE           (1 << 0)

-

-			/** Request recipient mask, indicating that the request is to be issued to an endpoint in the

-			 *  currently selected configuration.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT macro.

-			 */

-			#define REQREC_ENDPOINT            (2 << 0)

-

-			/** Request recipient mask, indicating that the request is to be issued to an unspecified element

-			 *  in the currently selected configuration.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT macro.

-			 */

-			#define REQREC_OTHER               (3 << 0)

-			//@}

-

-		/* Type Defines: */

-			/** \brief Standard USB Control Request

-			 *

-			 *  Type define for a standard USB control request.

-			 *

-			 *  \see The USB 2.0 specification for more information on standard control requests.

-			 */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				uint8_t  bmRequestType; /**< Type of the request. */

-				uint8_t  bRequest; /**< Request command code. */

-				uint16_t wValue; /**< wValue parameter of the request. */

-				uint16_t wIndex; /**< wIndex parameter of the request. */

-				uint16_t wLength; /**< Length of the data to transfer in bytes. */

-			} ATTR_PACKED USB_Request_Header_t;

-

-		/* Enums: */

-			/** Enumeration for the various standard request commands. These commands are applicable when the

-			 *  request type is \ref REQTYPE_STANDARD (with the exception of \ref REQ_GetDescriptor, which is always

-			 *  handled regardless of the request type value).

-			 *

-			 *  \see Chapter 9 of the USB 2.0 Specification.

-			 */

-			enum USB_Control_Request_t

-			{

-				REQ_GetStatus           = 0, /**< Implemented in the library for device and endpoint recipients. Passed

-				                              *   to the user application for other recipients via the

-				                              *   \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event when received in

-				                              *   device mode. */

-				REQ_ClearFeature        = 1, /**< Implemented in the library for device and endpoint recipients. Passed

-				                              *   to the user application for other recipients via the

-				                              *   \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event when received in

-				                              *   device mode. */

-				REQ_SetFeature          = 3, /**< Implemented in the library for device and endpoint recipients. Passed

-				                              *   to the user application for other recipients via the

-				                              *   \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event when received in

-				                              *   device mode. */

-				REQ_SetAddress          = 5, /**< Implemented in the library for the device recipient. Passed

-				                              *   to the user application for other recipients via the

-				                              *   \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event when received in

-				                              *   device mode. */

-				REQ_GetDescriptor       = 6, /**< Implemented in the library for device and interface recipients. Passed to the

-				                              *   user application for other recipients via the

-				                              *   \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event when received in

-				                              *   device mode. */

-				REQ_SetDescriptor       = 7, /**< Not implemented in the library, passed to the user application

-				                              *   via the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event when received in

-				                              *   device mode. */

-				REQ_GetConfiguration    = 8, /**< Implemented in the library for the device recipient. Passed

-				                              *   to the user application for other recipients via the

-				                              *   \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event when received in

-				                              *   device mode. */

-				REQ_SetConfiguration    = 9, /**< Implemented in the library for the device recipient. Passed

-				                              *   to the user application for other recipients via the

-				                              *   \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event when received in

-				                              *   device mode. */

-				REQ_GetInterface        = 10, /**< Not implemented in the library, passed to the user application

-				                              *   via the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event when received in

-				                              *   device mode. */

-				REQ_SetInterface        = 11, /**< Not implemented in the library, passed to the user application

-				                              *   via the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event when received in

-				                              *   device mode. */

-				REQ_SynchFrame          = 12, /**< Not implemented in the library, passed to the user application

-				                              *   via the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event when received in

-				                              *   device mode. */

-			};

-

-			/** Feature Selector values for Set Feature and Clear Feature standard control requests directed to the device, interface

-			 *  and endpoint recipients.

-			 */

-			enum USB_Feature_Selectors_t

-			{

-				FEATURE_SEL_EndpointHalt       = 0x00, /**< Feature selector for Clear Feature or Set Feature commands. When

-				                                        *   used in a Set Feature or Clear Feature request this indicates that an

-				                                        *   endpoint (whose address is given elsewhere in the request) should have

-				                                        *   its stall condition changed.

-				                                        */

-				FEATURE_SEL_DeviceRemoteWakeup = 0x01, /**< Feature selector for Device level Remote Wakeup enable set or clear.

-			                                            *   This feature can be controlled by the host on devices which indicate

-			                                            *   remote wakeup support in their descriptors to selectively disable or

-			                                            *   enable remote wakeup.

-			                                            */

-				FEATURE_SEL_TestMode           = 0x02, /**< Feature selector for Test Mode features, used to test the USB controller

-			                                            *   to check for incorrect operation.

-			                                            */

-			};

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			/* Macros: */

-				#define FEATURE_SELFPOWERED_ENABLED     (1 << 0)

-				#define FEATURE_REMOTE_WAKEUP_ENABLED   (1 << 1)

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Device_UC3.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Device_UC3.c
deleted file mode 100644
index b7c186e80..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Device_UC3.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-#if (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-

-#include "../Device.h"

-

-void USB_Device_SendRemoteWakeup(void)

-{

-	USB_CLK_Unfreeze();

-

-	AVR32_USBB.UDCON.rmwkup = true;

-	while (AVR32_USBB.UDCON.rmwkup);

-}

-

-#endif

-

-#endif

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Device_UC3.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Device_UC3.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 7139d51f0..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Device_UC3.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,260 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief USB Device definitions for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.

- *  \copydetails Group_Device_UC3

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Device

- *  \defgroup Group_Device_UC3 Device Management (UC3)

- *  \brief USB Device definitions for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.

- *

- *  Architecture specific USB Device definitions for the Atmel 32-bit UC3 AVR microcontrollers.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __USBDEVICE_UC3_H__

-#define __USBDEVICE_UC3_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "../USBController.h"

-		#include "../StdDescriptors.h"

-		#include "../USBInterrupt.h"

-		#include "../Endpoint.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** \name USB Device Mode Option Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** Mask for the Options parameter of the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the

-			 *  USB interface should be initialized in low speed (1.5Mb/s) mode.

-			 *

-			 *  \note Restrictions apply on the number, size and type of endpoints which can be used

-			 *        when running in low speed mode - please refer to the USB 2.0 specification.

-			 */

-			#define USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED                (1 << 0)

-

-			/** Mask for the Options parameter of the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the

-			 *  USB interface should be initialized in full speed (12Mb/s) mode.

-			 */

-			#define USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED               (0 << 0)

-

-			#if defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A3_AVR32) || defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A4_AVR32) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				/** Mask for the Options parameter of the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the

-				 *  USB interface should be initialized in high speed (480Mb/s) mode.

-				 */

-				#define USB_DEVICE_OPT_HIGHSPEED           (1 << 1)

-			#endif

-			//@}

-

-			#if (!defined(NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL) && \

-			     (defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A3_AVR32) || defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A4_AVR32) || \

-				  defined(__DOXYGEN__)))

-				/** String descriptor index for the device's unique serial number string descriptor within the device.

-				 *  This unique serial number is used by the host to associate resources to the device (such as drivers or COM port

-				 *  number allocations) to a device regardless of the port it is plugged in to on the host. Some microcontrollers contain

-				 *  a unique serial number internally, and setting the device descriptors serial number string index to this value

-				 *  will cause it to use the internal serial number.

-				 *

-				 *  On unsupported devices, this will evaluate to \ref NO_DESCRIPTOR and so will force the host to create a pseudo-serial

-				 *  number for the device.

-				 */

-				#define USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL             0xDC

-

-				/** Length of the device's unique internal serial number, in bits, if present on the selected microcontroller

-				 *  model.

-				 */

-				#define INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS     120

-

-				/** Start address of the internal serial number, in the appropriate address space, if present on the selected microcontroller

-				 *  model.

-				 */

-				#define INTERNAL_SERIAL_START_ADDRESS   0x80800204

-			#else

-				#define USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL             NO_DESCRIPTOR

-

-				#define INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS     0

-				#define INTERNAL_SERIAL_START_ADDRESS   0

-			#endif

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Sends a Remote Wakeup request to the host. This signals to the host that the device should

-			 *  be taken out of suspended mode, and communications should resume.

-			 *

-			 *  Typically, this is implemented so that HID devices (mice, keyboards, etc.) can wake up the

-			 *  host computer when the host has suspended all USB devices to enter a low power state.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function should only be used if the device has indicated to the host that it

-			 *        supports the Remote Wakeup feature in the device descriptors, and should only be

-			 *        issued if the host is currently allowing remote wakeup events from the device (i.e.,

-			 *        the \ref USB_Device_RemoteWakeupEnabled flag is set). When the \c NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP

-			 *        compile time option is used, this function is unavailable.

-			 *

-			 *  \note The USB clock must be running for this function to operate. If the stack is initialized with

-			 *        the \ref USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL option enabled, the user must ensure that the PLL is running

-			 *        before attempting to call this function.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref Group_StdDescriptors for more information on the RMWAKEUP feature and device descriptors.

-			 */

-			void USB_Device_SendRemoteWakeup(void);

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Returns the current USB frame number, when in device mode. Every millisecond the USB bus is active (i.e. enumerated to a host)

-			 *  the frame number is incremented by one.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Current USB frame number from the USB controller.

-			 */

-			static inline uint16_t USB_Device_GetFrameNumber(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint16_t USB_Device_GetFrameNumber(void)

-			{

-				return AVR32_USBB.UDFNUM.fnum;

-			}

-

-			#if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS)

-				/** Enables the device mode Start Of Frame events. When enabled, this causes the

-				 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event to fire once per millisecond, synchronized to the USB bus,

-				 *  at the start of each USB frame when enumerated in device mode.

-				 *

-				 *  \note Not available when the \c NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined.

-				 */

-				static inline void USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-				static inline void USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents(void)

-				{

-					USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SOFI);

-				}

-

-				/** Disables the device mode Start Of Frame events. When disabled, this stops the firing of the

-				 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event when enumerated in device mode.

-				 *

-				 *  \note Not available when the \c NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined.

-				 */

-				static inline void USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-				static inline void USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents(void)

-				{

-					USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SOFI);

-				}

-			#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			static inline void USB_Device_SetLowSpeed(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Device_SetLowSpeed(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_USBB.UDCON.ls      = true;

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_Device_SetFullSpeed(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Device_SetFullSpeed(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_USBB.UDCON.ls      = false;

-				#if defined(USB_DEVICE_OPT_HIGHSPEED)

-				AVR32_USBB.UDCON.spdconf = 3;

-				#endif

-			}

-

-			#if defined(USB_DEVICE_OPT_HIGHSPEED)

-			static inline void USB_Device_SetHighSpeed(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Device_SetHighSpeed(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_USBB.UDCON.ls      = false;

-				AVR32_USBB.UDCON.spdconf = 0;

-			}

-			#endif

-

-			static inline void USB_Device_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Device_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address)

-			{

-				AVR32_USBB.UDCON.uadd  = Address;

-				AVR32_USBB.UDCON.adden = (Address ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			static inline bool USB_Device_IsAddressSet(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline bool USB_Device_IsAddressSet(void)

-			{

-				return AVR32_USBB.UDCON.adden;

-			}

-

-			#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL != NO_DESCRIPTOR)

-			static inline void USB_Device_GetSerialString(uint16_t* const UnicodeString) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			static inline void USB_Device_GetSerialString(uint16_t* const UnicodeString)

-			{

-				uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask();

-				GlobalInterruptDisable();

-

-				uint8_t* SigReadAddress = (uint8_t*)INTERNAL_SERIAL_START_ADDRESS;

-

-				for (uint8_t SerialCharNum = 0; SerialCharNum < (INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS / 4); SerialCharNum++)

-				{

-					uint8_t SerialByte = *SigReadAddress;

-

-					if (SerialCharNum & 0x01)

-					{

-						SerialByte >>= 4;

-						SigReadAddress++;

-					}

-

-					SerialByte &= 0x0F;

-

-					UnicodeString[SerialCharNum] = cpu_to_le16((SerialByte >= 10) ?

-															   (('A' - 10) + SerialByte) : ('0' + SerialByte));

-				}

-

-				SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt);

-			}

-			#endif

-

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/EndpointStream_UC3.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/EndpointStream_UC3.c
deleted file mode 100644
index cc4206cae..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/EndpointStream_UC3.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,235 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-#if (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-

-#include "EndpointStream_UC3.h"

-

-#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)

-uint8_t Endpoint_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length,

-                                uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)

-{

-	uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-	uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;

-	

-	if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))

-	  return ErrorCode;

-	  

-	if (BytesProcessed != NULL)

-	  Length -= *BytesProcessed;

-

-	while (Length)

-	{

-		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-		{

-			Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-

-			if (BytesProcessed != NULL)

-			{

-				*BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;

-				return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;

-			}

-

-			if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))

-			  return ErrorCode;

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			Endpoint_Discard_8();

-

-			Length--;

-			BytesInTransfer++;

-		}

-	}

-	

-	return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-uint8_t Endpoint_Null_Stream(uint16_t Length,

-                             uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)

-{

-	uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-	uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;

-	

-	if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))

-	  return ErrorCode;

-	  

-	if (BytesProcessed != NULL)

-	  Length -= *BytesProcessed;

-

-	while (Length)

-	{

-		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-		{

-			Endpoint_ClearIN();

-

-			if (BytesProcessed != NULL)

-			{

-				*BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;

-				return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;

-			}

-

-			if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))

-			  return ErrorCode;

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			Endpoint_Write_8(0);

-

-			Length--;

-			BytesInTransfer++;

-		}

-	}

-	

-	return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-/* The following abuses the C preprocessor in order to copy-paste common code with slight alterations,

- * so that the code needs to be written once. It is a crude form of templating to reduce code maintenance. */

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*

-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(*BufferPtr)

-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*

-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(*BufferPtr)

-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*

-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Endpoint_Read_8()

-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Stream_BE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*

-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Endpoint_Read_8()

-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"

-

-#if defined(ARCH_HAS_FLASH_ADDRESS_SPACE)

-	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_PStream_LE

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*

-	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount

-	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(pgm_read_byte(BufferPtr))

-	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"

-

-	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_PStream_BE

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*

-	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount

-	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(pgm_read_byte(BufferPtr))

-	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"

-#endif

-

-#if defined(ARCH_HAS_EEPROM_ADDRESS_SPACE)

-	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_EStream_LE

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*

-	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount

-	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(eeprom_read_byte(BufferPtr))

-	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"

-

-	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_EStream_BE

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*

-	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount

-	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(eeprom_read_byte(BufferPtr))

-	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"

-

-	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_EStream_LE

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*

-	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount

-	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_update_byte(BufferPtr, Endpoint_Read_8())

-	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"

-

-	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_EStream_BE

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*

-	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount

-	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_update_byte(BufferPtr, Endpoint_Read_8())

-	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"

-#endif

-

-#endif

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(*BufferPtr)

-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_BE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(*BufferPtr)

-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Endpoint_Read_8()

-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_BE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Endpoint_Read_8()

-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"

-

-#endif

-

-#endif

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/EndpointStream_UC3.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/EndpointStream_UC3.h
deleted file mode 100644
index b360b4da4..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/EndpointStream_UC3.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,434 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Endpoint data stream transmission and reception management for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.

- *  \copydetails Group_EndpointStreamRW_UC3

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW

- *  \defgroup Group_EndpointStreamRW_UC3 Read/Write of Multi-Byte Streams (UC3)

- *  \brief Endpoint data stream transmission and reception management for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of data streams from

- *  and to endpoints.

- *

- *  @{

- */ 

-

-#ifndef __ENDPOINT_STREAM_UC3_H__

-#define __ENDPOINT_STREAM_UC3_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "../USBMode.h"

-		#include "../USBTask.h"

-		

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** \name Stream functions for null data */

-			//@{

-

-			/** Reads and discards the given number of bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank,

-			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically

-			 *  discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the user is responsible for manually

-			 *  discarding the last packet from the host via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,

-			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid

-			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time

-			 *  the endpoint bank becomes empty while there is still data to process (and after the current

-			 *  packet has been acknowledged) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the total number

-			 *  of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of

-			 *  \ref ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed

-			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters

-			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;

-			 *  

-			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Discard_Stream(512, NULL)) != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;

-			 *  

-			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;

-			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Discard_Stream(512, &BytesProcessed)) == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required

-			 *  }

-			 *  

-			 *  if (ErrorCode != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to discard via the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current

-			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length,

-			                                uint16_t* const BytesProcessed);

-

-			/** Writes a given number of zeroed bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank, sending

-			 *  full packets to the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically sent once the 

-			 *  remaining bytes have been written; the user is responsible for manually sending the last

-			 *  packet to the host via the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,

-			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid

-			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time

-			 *  the endpoint bank becomes full while there is still data to process (and after the current

-			 *  packet transmission has been initiated) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the

-			 *  total number of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of

-			 *  \ref ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed

-			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters

-			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;

-			 *  

-			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Null_Stream(512, NULL)) != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;

-			 *  

-			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;

-			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Null_Stream(512, &BytesProcessed)) == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required

-			 *  }

-			 *  

-			 *  if (ErrorCode != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of zero bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current

-			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Null_Stream(uint16_t Length,

-			                             uint16_t* const BytesProcessed);

-

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name Stream functions for RAM source/destination data */

-			//@{

-		

-			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,

-			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;

-			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the

-			 *  \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,

-			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid

-			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time

-			 *  the endpoint bank becomes full while there is still data to process (and after the current

-			 *  packet transmission has been initiated) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the

-			 *  total number of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of

-			 *  \ref ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed

-			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters

-			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t DataStream[512];

-			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;

-			 *  

-			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),

-			 *                                            NULL)) != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t  DataStream[512];

-			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;

-			 *  

-			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;

-			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),

-			 *                                               &BytesProcessed)) == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required

-			 *  }

-			 *  

-			 *  if (ErrorCode != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current

-			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                                 uint16_t Length,

-			                                 uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,

-			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;

-			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the

-			 *  \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current

-			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                                 uint16_t Length,

-			                                 uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			

-			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,

-			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically

-			 *  discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the user is responsible for manually

-			 *  discarding the last packet from the host via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,

-			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid

-			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time

-			 *  the endpoint bank becomes empty while there is still data to process (and after the current

-			 *  packet has been acknowledged) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the total number

-			 *  of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of

-			 *  \ref ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed

-			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters

-			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t DataStream[512];

-			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;

-			 *  

-			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),

-			 *                                           NULL)) != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t  DataStream[512];

-			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;

-			 *  

-			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;

-			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),

-			 *                                              &BytesProcessed)) == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required

-			 *  }

-			 *  

-			 *  if (ErrorCode != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.

-			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current

-			 *                              transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(void* const Buffer,

-			                                uint16_t Length,

-			                                uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,

-			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically

-			 *  discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the user is responsible for manually

-			 *  discarding the last packet from the host via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.

-			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current

-			 *                              transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Stream_BE(void* const Buffer,

-			                                uint16_t Length,

-			                                uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the CONTROL type endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,

-			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The host OUT acknowledgement is not automatically cleared

-			 *  in both failure and success states; the user is responsible for manually clearing the status OUT packet

-			 *  to finalize the transfer's status stage via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt

-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained

-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                                         uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the CONTROL type endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,

-			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The host OUT acknowledgement is not automatically cleared

-			 *  in both failure and success states; the user is responsible for manually clearing the status OUT packet

-			 *  to finalize the transfer's status stage via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt

-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained

-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_BE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                                         uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the CONTROL endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,

-			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The device IN acknowledgement is not

-			 *  automatically sent after success or failure states; the user is responsible for manually sending the

-			 *  status IN packet to finalize the transfer's status stage via the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt

-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained

-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.

-			 *  \param[in]  Length  Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(void* const Buffer,

-			                                        uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the CONTROL endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,

-			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The device IN acknowledgement is not

-			 *  automatically sent after success or failure states; the user is responsible for manually sending the

-			 *  status IN packet to finalize the transfer's status stage via the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt

-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained

-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.

-			 *  \param[in]  Length  Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_BE(void* const Buffer,

-			                                        uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			//@}

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-		

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Endpoint_UC3.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Endpoint_UC3.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 235ddde59..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Endpoint_UC3.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,196 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-#if (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-

-#include "../Endpoint.h"

-

-#if !defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE)

-uint8_t USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP_DEFAULT_SIZE;

-#endif

-

-volatile uint32_t USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint = ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP;

-volatile uint8_t* USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS];

-

-bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(const USB_Endpoint_Table_t* const Table,

-                                     const uint8_t Entries)

-{

-	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < Entries; i++)

-	{

-		if (!(Table[i].Address))

-		  continue;

-	

-		if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(Table[i].Address, Table[i].Type, Table[i].Size, Table[i].Banks)))

-		{

-			return false;

-		}

-	}

-	

-	return true;

-}

-

-bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_Prv(const uint8_t Number,

-                                    const uint32_t UECFG0Data)

-{

-	USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[Number] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[Number * ENDPOINT_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];

-

-#if defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE) || defined(ORDERED_EP_CONFIG)

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(Number);

-	Endpoint_EnableEndpoint();

-

-	(&AVR32_USBB.uecfg0)[Number] = 0;

-	(&AVR32_USBB.uecfg0)[Number] = UECFG0Data;

-

-	return Endpoint_IsConfigured();

-#else

-	for (uint8_t EPNum = Number; EPNum < ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS; EPNum++)

-	{

-		uint32_t UECFG0Temp;

-

-		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(EPNum);

-

-		if (EPNum == Number)

-		{

-			UECFG0Temp = UECFG0Data;

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			UECFG0Temp = (&AVR32_USBB.uecfg0)[EPNum];

-		}

-

-		if (!(UECFG0Temp & AVR32_USBB_ALLOC_MASK))

-		  continue;

-

-		Endpoint_DisableEndpoint();

-		(&AVR32_USBB.uecfg0)[EPNum] &= ~AVR32_USBB_ALLOC_MASK;

-

-		Endpoint_EnableEndpoint();

-		(&AVR32_USBB.uecfg0)[EPNum] = UECFG0Temp;

-

-		if (!(Endpoint_IsConfigured()))

-		  return false;

-	}

-

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(Number);

-	return true;

-#endif

-}

-

-void Endpoint_ClearEndpoints(void)

-{

-	for (uint8_t EPNum = 0; EPNum < ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS; EPNum++)

-	{

-		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(EPNum);

-		(&AVR32_USBB.uecfg0)[EPNum]    = 0;

-		(&AVR32_USBB.uecon0clr)[EPNum] = -1;

-		USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[EPNum]    = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[EPNum * 0x10000];

-		Endpoint_DisableEndpoint();

-	}

-}

-

-void Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(void)

-{

-	if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST)

-	{

-		while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))

-		{

-			if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)

-			  return;

-		}

-

-		Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-	}

-	else

-	{

-		while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))

-		{

-			if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)

-			  return;

-		}

-

-		Endpoint_ClearIN();

-	}

-}

-

-#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)

-uint8_t Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(void)

-{

-	#if (USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS < 0xFF)

-	uint8_t  TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;

-	#else

-	uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;

-	#endif

-

-	uint16_t PreviousFrameNumber = USB_Device_GetFrameNumber();

-

-	for (;;)

-	{

-		if (Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection() == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)

-		{

-			if (Endpoint_IsINReady())

-			  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())

-			  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;

-		}

-

-		uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;

-

-		if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)

-		  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;

-		else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)

-		  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_BusSuspended;

-		else if (Endpoint_IsStalled())

-		  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_EndpointStalled;

-

-		uint16_t CurrentFrameNumber = USB_Device_GetFrameNumber();

-

-		if (CurrentFrameNumber != PreviousFrameNumber)

-		{

-			PreviousFrameNumber = CurrentFrameNumber;

-

-			if (!(TimeoutMSRem--))

-			  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_Timeout;

-		}

-	}

-}

-#endif

-

-#endif

-

-#endif

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Endpoint_UC3.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Endpoint_UC3.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 356c9c3cb..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Endpoint_UC3.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,795 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief USB Endpoint definitions for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.

- *  \copydetails Group_EndpointManagement_UC3

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointRW

- *  \defgroup Group_EndpointRW_UC3 Endpoint Data Reading and Writing (UC3)

- *  \brief Endpoint data read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing from and to endpoints.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW

- *  \defgroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3 Read/Write of Primitive Data Types (UC3)

- *  \brief Endpoint primitive read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of primitive data types

- *  from and to endpoints.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement

- *  \defgroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3 Endpoint Packet Management (UC3)

- *  \brief Endpoint packet management definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to packet management of endpoints.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointManagement

- *  \defgroup Group_EndpointManagement_UC3 Endpoint Management (UC3)

- *  \brief Endpoint management definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.

- *

- *  Functions, macros and enums related to endpoint management when in USB Device mode. This

- *  module contains the endpoint management macros, as well as endpoint interrupt and data

- *  send/receive functions for various data types.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __ENDPOINT_UC3_H__

-#define __ENDPOINT_UC3_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "../USBTask.h"

-		#include "../USBInterrupt.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define ENDPOINT_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE            (64 * 1024UL)

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST

-			                                                                        ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes)

-			{

-				uint8_t  MaskVal    = 0;

-				uint16_t CheckBytes = 8;

-

-				while (CheckBytes < Bytes)

-				{

-					MaskVal++;

-					CheckBytes <<= 1;

-				}

-

-				return (MaskVal << AVR32_USBB_EPSIZE_OFFSET);

-			}

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			void Endpoint_ClearEndpoints(void);

-			bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_Prv(const uint8_t Number,

-			                                    const uint32_t UECFGXData);

-

-		/* External Variables: */

-			extern volatile uint32_t USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint;

-			extern volatile uint8_t* USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[];

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			#if (!defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))

-				/** Default size of the default control endpoint's bank, until altered by the control endpoint bank size

-				 *  value in the device descriptor. Not available if the \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token is defined.

-				 */

-				#define ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP_DEFAULT_SIZE     8

-			#endif

-

-			#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				#if defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A3_AVR32) || defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A4_AVR32)

-					#define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS        8

-				#else

-					/** Total number of endpoints (including the default control endpoint at address 0) which may

-					 *  be used in the device. Different AVR models support different amounts of endpoints,

-					 *  this value reflects the maximum number of endpoints for the currently selected AVR model.

-					 */

-					#define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS        7

-				#endif

-			#else

-				#define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS            1

-			#endif

-

-		/* Enums: */

-			/** Enum for the possible error return codes of the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady() function.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointRW_UC3

-			 */

-			enum Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t

-			{

-				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError                 = 0, /**< Endpoint is ready for next packet, no error. */

-				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_EndpointStalled         = 1, /**< The endpoint was stalled during the stream

-				                                                 *   transfer by the host or device.

-				                                                 */

-				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected      = 2,	/**< Device was disconnected from the host while

-				                                                 *   waiting for the endpoint to become ready.

-				                                                 */

-				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_BusSuspended            = 3, /**< The USB bus has been suspended by the host and

-				                                                 *   no USB endpoint traffic can occur until the bus

-				                                                 *   has resumed.

-				                                                 */

-				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_Timeout                 = 4, /**< The host failed to accept or send the next packet

-				                                                 *   within the software timeout period set by the

-				                                                 *   \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro.

-				                                                 */

-			};

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Configures the specified endpoint address with the given endpoint type, direction, bank size

-			 *  and banking mode. Once configured, the endpoint may be read from or written to, depending

-			 *  on its direction.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Address    Endpoint address to configure.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Type       Type of endpoint to configure, a \c EP_TYPE_* mask. Not all endpoint types

-			 *                        are available on Low Speed USB devices - refer to the USB 2.0 specification.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Size       Size of the endpoint's bank, where packets are stored before they are transmitted

-			 *                        to the USB host, or after they have been received from the USB host (depending on

-			 *                        the endpoint's data direction). The bank size must indicate the maximum packet size

-			 *                        that the endpoint can handle.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Banks      Number of hardware banks to use for the endpoint being configured.

-			 *

-			 *  \attention When the \c ORDERED_EP_CONFIG compile time option is used, Endpoints <b>must</b> be configured in

-			 *             ascending order, or bank corruption will occur.

-			 *

-			 *  \note Different endpoints may have different maximum packet sizes based on the endpoint's index - refer to

-			 *        the chosen microcontroller model's datasheet to determine the maximum bank size for each endpoint.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note The default control endpoint should not be manually configured by the user application, as

-			 *        it is automatically configured by the library internally.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine will automatically select the specified endpoint upon success. Upon failure, the endpoint

-			 *        which failed to reconfigure correctly will be selected.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the configuration succeeded, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(const uint8_t Address,

-			                                              const uint8_t Type,

-			                                              const uint16_t Size,

-			                                              const uint8_t Banks) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(const uint8_t Address,

-			                                              const uint8_t Type,

-			                                              const uint16_t Size,

-			                                              const uint8_t Banks)

-			{

-				uint8_t Number = (Address & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK);

-			

-				if (Number >= ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS)

-				  return false;

-

-				return Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_Prv(Number,

-				                                      (AVR32_USBB_ALLOC_MASK |

-				                                       ((uint32_t)Type << AVR32_USBB_EPTYPE_OFFSET) |

-				                                       ((Address & ENDPOINT_DIR_IN) ? AVR32_USBB_UECFG0_EPDIR_MASK : 0) |

-				                                       ((Banks > 1) ? AVR32_USBB_UECFG0_EPBK_SINGLE : AVR32_USBB_UECFG0_EPBK_DOUBLE) |

-				                                       Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(Size)));

-			}

-

-			/** Indicates the number of bytes currently stored in the current endpoint's selected bank.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointRW_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \return Total number of bytes in the currently selected Endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(void)

-			{

-				return (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].byct;

-			}

-

-			/** Determines the currently selected endpoint's direction.

-			 *

-			 *  \return The currently selected endpoint's direction, as a \c ENDPOINT_DIR_* mask.

-			 */

-			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection(void)

-			{

-				return ((&AVR32_USBB.UECFG0)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].epdir ? ENDPOINT_DIR_IN : ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT);

-			}

-

-			/** Get the endpoint address of the currently selected endpoint. This is typically used to save

-			 *  the currently selected endpoint so that it can be restored after another endpoint has been

-			 *  manipulated.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Index of the currently selected endpoint.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint(void)

-			{

-				return (USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint | Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection());

-			}

-

-			/** Selects the given endpoint address.

-			 *

-			 *  Any endpoint operations which do not require the endpoint address to be indicated will operate on

-			 *  the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Address  Endpoint address to select.

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(const uint8_t Address)

-			{

-				USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint = (Address & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK);

-			}

-

-			/** Resets the endpoint bank FIFO. This clears all the endpoint banks and resets the USB controller's

-			 *  data In and Out pointers to the bank's contents.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Address  Endpoint number whose FIFO buffers are to be reset.

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(const uint8_t Address)

-			{

-				uint32_t EndpointNumber = (Address & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK);

-			

-				AVR32_USBB.uerst |=  (AVR32_USBB_EPRST0_MASK << EndpointNumber);

-				AVR32_USBB.uerst &= ~(AVR32_USBB_EPRST0_MASK << EndpointNumber);

-				USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[EndpointNumber] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[EndpointNumber * ENDPOINT_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];

-			}

-

-			/** Enables the currently selected endpoint so that data can be sent and received through it to

-			 *  and from a host.

-			 *

-			 *  \note Endpoints must first be configured properly via \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint().

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_EnableEndpoint(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_EnableEndpoint(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_USBB.uerst |=  (AVR32_USBB_EPEN0_MASK << USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint);

-			}

-

-			/** Disables the currently selected endpoint so that data cannot be sent and received through it

-			 *  to and from a host.

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_DisableEndpoint(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_DisableEndpoint(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_USBB.uerst &= ~(AVR32_USBB_EPEN0_MASK << USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint);

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is enabled, but not necessarily configured.

-			 *

-			 * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint is enabled, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsEnabled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsEnabled(void)

-			{

-				return ((AVR32_USBB.uerst & (AVR32_USBB_EPEN0_MASK << USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint)) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Retrieves the number of busy banks in the currently selected endpoint, which have been queued for

-			 *  transmission via the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() command, or are awaiting acknowledgement via the

-			 *  \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() command.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \return Total number of busy banks in the selected endpoint.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetBusyBanks(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetBusyBanks(void)

-			{

-				return (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].nbusybk;

-			}

-

-			/** Aborts all pending IN transactions on the currently selected endpoint, once the bank

-			 *  has been queued for transmission to the host via \ref Endpoint_ClearIN(). This function

-			 *  will terminate all queued transactions, resetting the endpoint banks ready for a new

-			 *  packet.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_AbortPendingIN(void)

-			{

-				while (Endpoint_GetBusyBanks() != 0)

-				{

-					(&AVR32_USBB.UECON0SET)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].killbks = true;

-					while ((&AVR32_USBB.UECON0)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].killbk);

-				}

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint may be read from (if data is waiting in the endpoint

-			 *  bank and the endpoint is an OUT direction, or if the bank is not yet full if the endpoint is an IN

-			 *  direction). This function will return false if an error has occurred in the endpoint, if the endpoint

-			 *  is an OUT direction and no packet (or an empty packet) has been received, or if the endpoint is an IN

-			 *  direction and the endpoint bank is full.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint may be read from or written to, depending

-			 *          on its direction.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed(void)

-			{

-				return (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].rwall;

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is configured.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint has been configured, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsConfigured(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsConfigured(void)

-			{

-				return (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].cfgok;

-			}

-

-			/** Returns a mask indicating which INTERRUPT type endpoints have interrupted - i.e. their

-			 *  interrupt duration has elapsed. Which endpoints have interrupted can be determined by

-			 *  masking the return value against <tt>(1 << <i>{Endpoint Number}</i>)</tt>.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Mask whose bits indicate which endpoints have interrupted.

-			 */

-			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_GetEndpointInterrupts(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_GetEndpointInterrupts(void)

-			{

-				return ((AVR32_USBB.udint & (AVR32_USBB_EP6INT_MASK | AVR32_USBB_EP5INT_MASK |

-				                             AVR32_USBB_EP4INT_MASK | AVR32_USBB_EP3INT_MASK |

-				                             AVR32_USBB_EP2INT_MASK | AVR32_USBB_EP1INT_MASK |

-				                             AVR32_USBB_EP0INT_MASK)) >> AVR32_USBB_EP0INT_OFFSET);

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the specified endpoint number has interrupted (valid only for INTERRUPT type

-			 *  endpoints).

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Address  Address of the endpoint whose interrupt flag should be tested.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the specified endpoint has interrupted, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(const uint8_t Address)

-			{

-				return ((Endpoint_GetEndpointInterrupts() & (AVR32_USBB_EP0INT_MASK << (Address & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK))) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the selected IN endpoint is ready for a new packet to be sent to the host.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the current endpoint is ready for an IN packet, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsINReady(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsINReady(void)

-			{

-				return (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].txini;

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the selected OUT endpoint has received new packet from the host.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if current endpoint is has received an OUT packet, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsOUTReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsOUTReceived(void)

-			{

-				return (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].rxouti;

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the current CONTROL type endpoint has received a SETUP packet.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the selected endpoint has received a SETUP packet, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived(void)

-			{

-				return (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].rxstpi;

-			}

-

-			/** Clears a received SETUP packet on the currently selected CONTROL type endpoint, freeing up the

-			 *  endpoint for the next packet.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \note This is not applicable for non CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_ClearSETUP(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_ClearSETUP(void)

-			{

-				(&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0CLR)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].rxstpic = true;

-				USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint * ENDPOINT_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];

-			}

-

-			/** Sends an IN packet to the host on the currently selected endpoint, freeing up the endpoint for the

-			 *  next packet and switching to the alternative endpoint bank if double banked.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_ClearIN(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_ClearIN(void)

-			{

-				(&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0CLR)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].txinic   = true;

-				(&AVR32_USBB.UECON0CLR)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].fifoconc = true;

-				USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint * ENDPOINT_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];

-			}

-

-			/** Acknowledges an OUT packet to the host on the currently selected endpoint, freeing up the endpoint

-			 *  for the next packet and switching to the alternative endpoint bank if double banked.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_ClearOUT(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_ClearOUT(void)

-			{

-				(&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0CLR)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].rxoutic  = true;

-				(&AVR32_USBB.UECON0CLR)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].fifoconc = true;

-				USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint * ENDPOINT_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];

-			}

-

-			/** Stalls the current endpoint, indicating to the host that a logical problem occurred with the

-			 *  indicated endpoint and that the current transfer sequence should be aborted. This provides a

-			 *  way for devices to indicate invalid commands to the host so that the current transfer can be

-			 *  aborted and the host can begin its own recovery sequence.

-			 *

-			 *  The currently selected endpoint remains stalled until either the \ref Endpoint_ClearStall() macro

-			 *  is called, or the host issues a CLEAR FEATURE request to the device for the currently selected

-			 *  endpoint.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_StallTransaction(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_StallTransaction(void)

-			{

-				(&AVR32_USBB.UECON0SET)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].stallrqs = true;

-			}

-

-			/** Clears the STALL condition on the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_ClearStall(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_ClearStall(void)

-			{

-				(&AVR32_USBB.UECON0CLR)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].stallrqc = true;

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is stalled, false otherwise.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint is stalled, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsStalled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsStalled(void)

-			{

-				return (&AVR32_USBB.UECON0)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].stallrq;

-			}

-

-			/** Resets the data toggle of the currently selected endpoint. */

-			static inline void Endpoint_ResetDataToggle(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_ResetDataToggle(void)

-			{

-				(&AVR32_USBB.UECON0SET)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].rstdts = true;

-			}

-

-			/** Sets the direction of the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] DirectionMask  New endpoint direction, as a \c ENDPOINT_DIR_* mask.

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(const uint32_t DirectionMask) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(const uint32_t DirectionMask)

-			{

-				(&AVR32_USBB.UECFG0)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].epdir = (DirectionMask == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);

-			}

-

-			/** Reads one byte from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next byte in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_Read_8(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_Read_8(void)

-			{

-				return *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);

-			}

-

-			/** Writes one byte to the currently selected endpoint's bank, for IN direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write into the the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_8(const uint8_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_8(const uint8_t Data)

-			{

-				*(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++) = Data;

-			}

-

-			/** Discards one byte from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_8(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_8(void)

-			{

-				uint8_t Dummy;

-

-				Dummy = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);

-

-				(void)Dummy;

-			}

-

-			/** Reads two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for OUT

-			 *  direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next two bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_LE(void)

-			{

-				uint16_t Byte0 = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);

-				uint16_t Byte1 = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);

-

-				return ((Byte1 << 8) | Byte0);

-			}

-

-			/** Reads two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for OUT

-			 *  direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next two bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_BE(void)

-			{

-				uint16_t Byte0 = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);

-				uint16_t Byte1 = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);

-

-				return ((Byte0 << 8) | Byte1);

-			}

-

-			/** Writes two bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for IN

-			 *  direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data)

-			{

-				*(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data & 0xFF);

-				*(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 8);

-			}

-

-			/** Writes two bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for IN

-			 *  direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data)

-			{

-				*(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 8);

-				*(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data & 0xFF);

-			}

-

-			/** Discards two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_16(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_16(void)

-			{

-				uint8_t Dummy;

-

-				Dummy = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);

-				Dummy = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);

-

-				(void)Dummy;

-			}

-

-			/** Reads four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for OUT

-			 *  direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next four bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_LE(void)

-			{

-				uint32_t Byte0 = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);

-				uint32_t Byte1 = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);

-				uint32_t Byte2 = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);

-				uint32_t Byte3 = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);

-

-				return ((Byte3 << 24) | (Byte2 << 16) | (Byte1 << 8) | Byte0);

-			}

-

-			/** Reads four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for OUT

-			 *  direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next four bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_BE(void)

-			{

-				uint32_t Byte0 = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);

-				uint32_t Byte1 = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);

-				uint32_t Byte2 = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);

-				uint32_t Byte3 = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);

-

-				return ((Byte0 << 24) | (Byte1 << 16) | (Byte2 << 8) | Byte3);

-			}

-

-			/** Writes four bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for IN

-			 *  direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data)

-			{

-				*(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data &  0xFF);

-				*(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 8);

-				*(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 16);

-				*(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 24);

-			}

-

-			/** Writes four bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for IN

-			 *  direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data)

-			{

-				*(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 24);

-				*(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 16);

-				*(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 8);

-				*(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data &  0xFF);

-			}

-

-			/** Discards four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_32(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_32(void)

-			{

-				uint8_t Dummy;

-

-				Dummy = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);

-				Dummy = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);

-				Dummy = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);

-				Dummy = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);

-

-				(void)Dummy;

-			}

-

-		/* External Variables: */

-			/** Global indicating the maximum packet size of the default control endpoint located at address

-			 *  0 in the device. This value is set to the value indicated in the device descriptor in the user

-			 *  project once the USB interface is initialized into device mode.

-			 *

-			 *  If space is an issue, it is possible to fix this to a static value by defining the control

-			 *  endpoint size in the \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token passed to the compiler in the makefile

-			 *  via the -D switch. When a fixed control endpoint size is used, the size is no longer dynamically

-			 *  read from the descriptors at runtime and instead fixed to the given value. When used, it is

-			 *  important that the descriptor control endpoint size value matches the size given as the

-			 *  \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token - it is recommended that the \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token

-			 *  be used in the device descriptors to ensure this.

-			 *

-			 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually

-			 *             changed in value.

-			 */

-			#if (!defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))

-				extern uint8_t USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize;

-			#else

-				#define USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE

-			#endif

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Configures a table of endpoint descriptions, in sequence. This function can be used to configure multiple

-			 *  endpoints at the same time.

-			 *

-			 *  \note Endpoints with a zero address will be ignored, thus this function cannot be used to configure the

-			 *        control endpoint.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Table    Pointer to a table of endpoint descriptions.

-			 *  \param[in] Entries  Number of entries in the endpoint table to configure.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if all endpoints configured successfully, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(const USB_Endpoint_Table_t* const Table,

-			                                     const uint8_t Entries);

-

-			/** Completes the status stage of a control transfer on a CONTROL type endpoint automatically,

-			 *  with respect to the data direction. This is a convenience function which can be used to

-			 *  simplify user control request handling.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should not be called on non CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 */

-			void Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(void);

-

-			/** Spin-loops until the currently selected non-control endpoint is ready for the next packet of data

-			 *  to be read or written to it.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should not be called on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointRW_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(void);

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Host_UC3.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Host_UC3.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 24e2136e4..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Host_UC3.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,294 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-#if (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_HOST_C

-#include "../Host.h"

-

-void USB_Host_ProcessNextHostState(void)

-{

-	uint8_t ErrorCode    = HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError;

-	uint8_t SubErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError;

-

-	static uint16_t WaitMSRemaining;

-	static uint8_t  PostWaitState;

-

-	switch (USB_HostState)

-	{

-		case HOST_STATE_WaitForDevice:

-			if (WaitMSRemaining)

-			{

-				if ((SubErrorCode = USB_Host_WaitMS(1)) != HOST_WAITERROR_Successful)

-				{

-					USB_HostState = PostWaitState;

-					ErrorCode     = HOST_ENUMERROR_WaitStage;

-					break;

-				}

-

-				if (!(--WaitMSRemaining))

-				  USB_HostState = PostWaitState;

-			}

-

-			break;

-		case HOST_STATE_Powered:

-			WaitMSRemaining = HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS;

-

-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForDeviceSettle;

-			break;

-		case HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForDeviceSettle:

-			if (WaitMSRemaining--)

-			{

-				Delay_MS(1);

-				break;

-			}

-			else

-			{

-				USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off();

-

-				USB_OTGPAD_On();

-				USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Enable();

-				USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_On();

-

-				#if defined(NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT)

-				USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Enable();

-				USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_On();

-				#endif

-

-				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForConnect;

-			}

-

-			break;

-		case HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForConnect:

-			if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_DCONNI))

-			{

-				USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DCONNI);

-				USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DDISCI);

-

-				USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_VBERRI);

-				USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_VBERRI);

-

-				USB_Host_ResumeBus();

-				Pipe_ClearPipes();

-

-				HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(100, HOST_STATE_Powered_DoReset);

-			}

-

-			break;

-		case HOST_STATE_Powered_DoReset:

-			USB_Host_ResetDevice();

-

-			HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(200, HOST_STATE_Powered_ConfigPipe);

-			break;

-		case HOST_STATE_Powered_ConfigPipe:

-			if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE, EP_TYPE_CONTROL, ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE, 1)))

-			{

-				ErrorCode    = HOST_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigError;

-				SubErrorCode = 0;

-				break;

-			}

-

-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Default;

-			break;

-		case HOST_STATE_Default:

-			USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-				{

-					.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),

-					.bRequest      = REQ_GetDescriptor,

-					.wValue        = (DTYPE_Device << 8),

-					.wIndex        = 0,

-					.wLength       = 8,

-				};

-

-			uint8_t DataBuffer[8];

-

-			Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-			if ((SubErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(DataBuffer)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-			{

-				ErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_ControlError;

-				break;

-			}

-

-			USB_Host_ControlPipeSize = DataBuffer[offsetof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t, Endpoint0Size)];

-

-			USB_Host_ResetDevice();

-

-			HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(200, HOST_STATE_Default_PostReset);

-			break;

-		case HOST_STATE_Default_PostReset:

-			if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE, EP_TYPE_CONTROL, ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, USB_Host_ControlPipeSize, 1)))

-			{

-				ErrorCode    = HOST_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigError;

-				SubErrorCode = 0;

-				break;

-			}

-

-			USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-				{

-					.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),

-					.bRequest      = REQ_SetAddress,

-					.wValue        = USB_HOST_DEVICEADDRESS,

-					.wIndex        = 0,

-					.wLength       = 0,

-				};

-

-			if ((SubErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

-			{

-				ErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_ControlError;

-				break;

-			}

-

-			HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(100, HOST_STATE_Default_PostAddressSet);

-			break;

-		case HOST_STATE_Default_PostAddressSet:

-			USB_Host_SetDeviceAddress(USB_HOST_DEVICEADDRESS);

-

-			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Addressed;

-

-			EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete();

-			break;

-	}

-

-	if ((ErrorCode != HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError) && (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Unattached))

-	{

-		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(ErrorCode, SubErrorCode);

-

-		USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off();

-

-		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();

-

-		USB_ResetInterface();

-	}

-}

-

-uint8_t USB_Host_WaitMS(uint8_t MS)

-{

-	bool    BusSuspended = USB_Host_IsBusSuspended();

-	uint8_t ErrorCode    = HOST_WAITERROR_Successful;

-	bool    HSOFIEnabled = USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_HSOFI);

-

-	USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_HSOFI);

-	USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);

-

-	USB_Host_ResumeBus();

-

-	while (MS)

-	{

-		if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI))

-		{

-			USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);

-			MS--;

-		}

-

-		if ((USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached) || (USB_CurrentMode != USB_MODE_Host))

-		{

-			ErrorCode = HOST_WAITERROR_DeviceDisconnect;

-

-			break;

-		}

-

-		if (Pipe_IsError())

-		{

-			Pipe_ClearError();

-			ErrorCode = HOST_WAITERROR_PipeError;

-

-			break;

-		}

-

-		if (Pipe_IsStalled())

-		{

-			Pipe_ClearStall();

-			ErrorCode = HOST_WAITERROR_SetupStalled;

-

-			break;

-		}

-	}

-

-	if (BusSuspended)

-	  USB_Host_SuspendBus();

-

-	if (HSOFIEnabled)

-	  USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_HSOFI);

-

-	return ErrorCode;

-}

-

-static void USB_Host_ResetDevice(void)

-{

-	bool BusSuspended = USB_Host_IsBusSuspended();

-

-	USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_DDISCI);

-

-	USB_Host_ResetBus();

-	while (!(USB_Host_IsBusResetComplete()));

-	USB_Host_ResumeBus();

-

-	USB_Host_ConfigurationNumber = 0;

-

-	bool HSOFIEnabled = USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_HSOFI);

-

-	USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_HSOFI);

-	USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);

-

-	for (uint8_t MSRem = 10; MSRem != 0; MSRem--)

-	{

-		/* Workaround for powerless-pull-up devices. After a USB bus reset,

-		   all disconnection interrupts are suppressed while a USB frame is

-		   looked for - if it is found within 10ms, the device is still

-		   present.                                                        */

-

-		if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI))

-		{

-			USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);

-			USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DDISCI);

-			break;

-		}

-

-		Delay_MS(1);

-	}

-

-	if (HSOFIEnabled)

-	  USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_HSOFI);

-

-	if (BusSuspended)

-	  USB_Host_SuspendBus();

-

-	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_DDISCI);

-}

-

-#endif

-

-#endif

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Host_UC3.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Host_UC3.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 07559cd3f..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Host_UC3.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,363 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief USB Host definitions for the AVR32 UC3B microcontrollers.

- *  \copydetails Group_Host_UC3B

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Host

- *  \defgroup Group_Host_UC3B Host Management (UC3B)

- *  \brief USB Host definitions for the AVR32 UC3B microcontrollers.

- *

- *  Architecture specific USB Host definitions for the Atmel 32-bit AVR UC3B microcontrollers.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __USBHOST_UC3B_H__

-#define __USBHOST_UC3B_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "../StdDescriptors.h"

-		#include "../Pipe.h"

-		#include "../USBInterrupt.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Indicates the fixed USB device address which any attached device is enumerated to when in

-			 *  host mode. As only one USB device may be attached to the AVR in host mode at any one time

-			 *  and that the address used is not important (other than the fact that it is non-zero), a

-			 *  fixed value is specified by the library.

-			 */

-			#define USB_HOST_DEVICEADDRESS                 1

-

-			#if !defined(HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				/** Constant for the delay in milliseconds after a device is connected before the library

-				 *  will start the enumeration process. Some devices require a delay of up to 5 seconds

-				 *  after connection before the enumeration process can start or incorrect operation will

-				 *  occur.

-				 *

-				 *  The default delay value may be overridden in the user project makefile by defining the

-				 *  \c HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS token to the required delay in milliseconds, and passed to the

-				 *  compiler using the -D switch.

-				 */

-				#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS        1000

-			#endif

-

-		/* Enums: */

-			/** Enum for the error codes for the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_HostError() event.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref Group_Events for more information on this event.

-			 */

-			enum USB_Host_ErrorCodes_t

-			{

-				HOST_ERROR_VBusVoltageDip       = 0, /**< VBUS voltage dipped to an unacceptable level. This

-				                                      *   error may be the result of an attached device drawing

-				                                      *   too much current from the VBUS line, or due to the

-				                                      *   AVR's power source being unable to supply sufficient

-				                                      *   current.

-				                                      */

-			};

-

-			/** Enum for the error codes for the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed() event.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref Group_Events for more information on this event.

-			 */

-			enum USB_Host_EnumerationErrorCodes_t

-			{

-				HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError          = 0, /**< No error occurred. Used internally, this is not a valid

-				                                      *   ErrorCode parameter value for the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed()

-				                                      *   event.

-				                                      */

-				HOST_ENUMERROR_WaitStage        = 1, /**< One of the delays between enumeration steps failed

-				                                      *   to complete successfully, due to a timeout or other

-				                                      *   error.

-				                                      */

-				HOST_ENUMERROR_NoDeviceDetected = 2, /**< No device was detected, despite the USB data lines

-				                                      *   indicating the attachment of a device.

-				                                      */

-				HOST_ENUMERROR_ControlError     = 3, /**< One of the enumeration control requests failed to

-				                                      *   complete successfully.

-				                                      */

-				HOST_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigError  = 4, /**< The default control pipe (address 0) failed to

-				                                      *   configure correctly.

-				                                      */

-			};

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Returns the current USB frame number, when in host mode. Every millisecond the USB bus is active (i.e. not suspended)

-			 *  the frame number is incremented by one.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Current USB frame number from the USB controller.

-			 */

-			static inline uint16_t USB_Host_GetFrameNumber(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint16_t USB_Host_GetFrameNumber(void)

-			{

-				return AVR32_USBB_UHFNUM;

-			}

-

-			#if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS)

-				/** Enables the host mode Start Of Frame events. When enabled, this causes the

-				 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Host_StartOfFrame() event to fire once per millisecond, synchronized to the USB bus,

-				 *  at the start of each USB frame when a device is enumerated while in host mode.

-				 *

-				 *  \note This function is not available when the \c NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined.

-				 */

-				static inline void USB_Host_EnableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-				static inline void USB_Host_EnableSOFEvents(void)

-				{

-					USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_HSOFI);

-				}

-

-				/** Disables the host mode Start Of Frame events. When disabled, this stops the firing of the

-				 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Host_StartOfFrame() event when enumerated in host mode.

-				 *

-				 *  \note This function is not available when the \c NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined.

-				 */

-				static inline void USB_Host_DisableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-				static inline void USB_Host_DisableSOFEvents(void)

-				{

-					USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_HSOFI);

-				}

-			#endif

-

-			/** Resets the USB bus, including the endpoints in any attached device and pipes on the AVR host.

-			 *  USB bus resets leave the default control pipe configured (if already configured).

-			 *

-			 *  If the USB bus has been suspended prior to issuing a bus reset, the attached device will be

-			 *  woken up automatically and the bus resumed after the reset has been correctly issued.

-			 */

-			static inline void USB_Host_ResetBus(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Host_ResetBus(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_USBB.UHCON.reset = true;

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if a previously issued bus reset (via the \ref USB_Host_ResetBus() macro) has

-			 *  completed.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if no bus reset is currently being sent, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool USB_Host_IsBusResetComplete(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool USB_Host_IsBusResetComplete(void)

-			{

-				return AVR32_USBB.UHCON.reset;

-			}

-

-			/** Resumes USB communications with an attached and enumerated device, by resuming the transmission

-			 *  of the 1MS Start Of Frame messages to the device. When resumed, USB communications between the

-			 *  host and attached device may occur.

-			 */

-			static inline void USB_Host_ResumeBus(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Host_ResumeBus(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_USBB.UHCON.sofe = true;

-			}

-

-			/** Suspends the USB bus, preventing any communications from occurring between the host and attached

-			 *  device until the bus has been resumed. This stops the transmission of the 1MS Start Of Frame

-			 *  messages to the device.

-			 *

-			 *  \note While the USB bus is suspended, all USB interrupt sources are also disabled; this means that

-			 *        some events (such as device disconnections) will not fire until the bus is resumed.

-			 */

-			static inline void USB_Host_SuspendBus(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Host_SuspendBus(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_USBB.UHCON.sofe = false;

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the USB bus has been suspended via the use of the \ref USB_Host_SuspendBus() macro,

-			 *  false otherwise. While suspended, no USB communications can occur until the bus is resumed,

-			 *  except for the Remote Wakeup event from the device if supported.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the bus is currently suspended, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool USB_Host_IsBusSuspended(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool USB_Host_IsBusSuspended(void)

-			{

-				return AVR32_USBB.UHCON.sofe;

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the attached device is currently enumerated in Full Speed mode (12Mb/s), or

-			 *  false if the attached device is enumerated in Low Speed mode (1.5Mb/s).

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the attached device is enumerated in Full Speed mode, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool USB_Host_IsDeviceFullSpeed(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool USB_Host_IsDeviceFullSpeed(void)

-			{

-				return (AVR32_USBB.USBSTA.speed == AVR32_USBB_SPEED_FULL);

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the attached device is currently issuing a Remote Wakeup request, requesting

-			 *  that the host resume the USB bus and wake up the device, false otherwise.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the attached device has sent a Remote Wakeup request, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool USB_Host_IsRemoteWakeupSent(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool USB_Host_IsRemoteWakeupSent(void)

-			{

-				return AVR32_USBB.UHINT.rxrsmi;

-			}

-

-			/** Clears the flag indicating that a Remote Wakeup request has been issued by an attached device. */

-			static inline void USB_Host_ClearRemoteWakeupSent(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Host_ClearRemoteWakeupSent(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR.rxrsmic = true;

-			}

-

-			/** Accepts a Remote Wakeup request from an attached device. This must be issued in response to

-			 *  a device's Remote Wakeup request within 2ms for the request to be accepted and the bus to

-			 *  be resumed.

-			 */

-			static inline void USB_Host_ResumeFromWakeupRequest(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Host_ResumeFromWakeupRequest(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_USBB.UHCON.resume = true;

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if a resume from Remote Wakeup request is currently being sent to an attached

-			 *  device.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if no resume request is currently being sent, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool USB_Host_IsResumeFromWakeupRequestSent(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool USB_Host_IsResumeFromWakeupRequestSent(void)

-			{

-				return AVR32_USBB.UHCON.resume;

-			}

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			static inline void USB_Host_HostMode_On(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Host_HostMode_On(void)

-			{

-				// Not required for UC3B

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_Host_HostMode_Off(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Host_HostMode_Off(void)

-			{

-				// Not required for UC3B

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Enable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Enable(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vbushwc = false;

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Enable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Enable(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vbushwc = true;

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_On(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_On(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_USBB.USBSTASET.vbusrqs = true;

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_On(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_On(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_USBB.USBSTASET.vbusrqs = true;

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.vbusrqc = true;

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.vbusrqc = true;

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_Host_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Host_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address)

-			{

-				AVR32_USBB.UHADDR1.uhaddr_p0 = Address;

-				AVR32_USBB.UHADDR1.uhaddr_p1 = Address;

-				AVR32_USBB.UHADDR1.uhaddr_p2 = Address;

-				AVR32_USBB.UHADDR1.uhaddr_p3 = Address;

-				AVR32_USBB.UHADDR2.uhaddr_p4 = Address;

-				AVR32_USBB.UHADDR2.uhaddr_p5 = Address;

-				AVR32_USBB.UHADDR2.uhaddr_p6 = Address;

-			}

-

-		/* Enums: */

-			enum USB_Host_WaitMSErrorCodes_t

-			{

-				HOST_WAITERROR_Successful       = 0,

-				HOST_WAITERROR_DeviceDisconnect = 1,

-				HOST_WAITERROR_PipeError        = 2,

-				HOST_WAITERROR_SetupStalled     = 3,

-			};

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			void    USB_Host_ProcessNextHostState(void);

-			uint8_t USB_Host_WaitMS(uint8_t MS);

-

-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_HOST_C)

-				static void USB_Host_ResetDevice(void);

-			#endif

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/PipeStream_UC3.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/PipeStream_UC3.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 20c8bf1e6..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/PipeStream_UC3.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,166 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-#if (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-

-#include "PipeStream_UC3.h"

-

-uint8_t Pipe_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length,

-                            uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)

-{

-	uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-	uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;

-	

-	Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_IN);

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	if (BytesProcessed != NULL)

-	  Length -= *BytesProcessed;

-

-	while (Length)

-	{

-		if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-		{

-			Pipe_ClearIN();

-				

-			if (BytesProcessed != NULL)

-			{

-				*BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;

-				return PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;

-			}

-

-			if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))

-			  return ErrorCode;

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			Pipe_Discard_8();

-			

-			Length--;

-			BytesInTransfer++;

-		}

-	}

-

-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-uint8_t Pipe_Null_Stream(uint16_t Length,

-                         uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)

-{

-	uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-	uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;

-	

-	Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_OUT);

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	if (BytesProcessed != NULL)

-	  Length -= *BytesProcessed;

-

-	while (Length)

-	{

-		if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-		{

-			Pipe_ClearOUT();

-				

-			if (BytesProcessed != NULL)

-			{

-				*BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;

-				return PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;

-			}

-			

-			USB_USBTask();

-

-			if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))

-			  return ErrorCode;

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			Pipe_Write_8(0);

-			

-			Length--;

-			BytesInTransfer++;

-		}

-	}

-

-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-/* The following abuses the C preprocessor in order to copy-paste common code with slight alterations,

- * so that the code needs to be written once. It is a crude form of templating to reduce code maintenance. */

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Write_Stream_LE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*

-#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_OUT

-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearOUT()

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   DataStream += Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Pipe_Write_8(*BufferPtr)

-#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Write_Stream_BE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*

-#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_OUT

-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearOUT()

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   DataStream -= Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Pipe_Write_8(*BufferPtr)

-#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Read_Stream_LE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*

-#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_IN

-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearIN()

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   DataStream += Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Pipe_Read_8()

-#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Read_Stream_BE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*

-#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_IN

-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearIN()

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   DataStream -= Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Pipe_Read_8()

-#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"

-

-#endif

-

-#endif

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/PipeStream_UC3.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/PipeStream_UC3.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 34c82ad29..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/PipeStream_UC3.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,352 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

- 

-/** \file

- *  \brief Pipe data stream transmission and reception management for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.

- *  \copydetails Group_PipeStreamRW_UC3

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_PipeStreamRW

- *  \defgroup Group_PipeStreamRW_UC3 Read/Write of Multi-Byte Streams (UC3)

- *  \brief Pipe data stream transmission and reception management for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of data streams from

- *  and to pipes.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __PIPE_STREAM_UC3_H__

-#define __PIPE_STREAM_UC3_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "../USBMode.h"

-		#include "../USBTask.h"

-		

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-		

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** \name Stream functions for null data */

-			//@{

-

-			/** Reads and discards the given number of bytes from the pipe, discarding fully read packets from the host

-			 *  as needed. The last packet is not automatically discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the

-			 *  user is responsible for manually discarding the last packet from the device via the \ref Pipe_ClearIN() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once, failing or

-			 *  succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid storage location, the transfer

-			 *  will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time the pipe bank becomes empty while there is still data

-			 *  to process (and after the current packet has been acknowledged) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with

-			 *  the total number of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of

-			 *  \ref PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed in the user code - to

-			 *  continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters and it will resume until the BytesProcessed

-			 *  value reaches the total transfer length.

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;

-			 *  

-			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Discard_Stream(512, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *  

-			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;

-			 *  

-			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;

-			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Discard_Stream(512, &BytesProcessed)) == PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required

-			 *  }

-			 *  

-			 *  if (ErrorCode != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  \note The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without

-			 *        having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to discard via the currently selected pipe.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should

-			 *                             updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be processed at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Pipe_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length,

-			                            uint16_t* const BytesProcessed);

-

-			/** Writes a given number of zeroed bytes to the pipe, sending full pipe packets from the host to the device

-			 *  as needed. The last packet is not automatically sent once the remaining bytes has been written; the

-			 *  user is responsible for manually discarding the last packet from the device via the \ref Pipe_ClearOUT() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once, failing or

-			 *  succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid storage location, the transfer

-			 *  will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time the pipe bank becomes full while there is still data

-			 *  to process (and after the current packet transmission has been initiated) the BytesProcessed location will be

-			 *  updated with the total number of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of

-			 *  \ref PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed in the user code - to

-			 *  continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters and it will resume until the BytesProcessed

-			 *  value reaches the total transfer length.

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;

-			 *  

-			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Null_Stream(512, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;

-			 *  

-			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;

-			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Null_Stream(512, &BytesProcessed)) == PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required

-			 *  }

-			 *  

-			 *  if (ErrorCode != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  \note The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without

-			 *        having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of zero bytes to write via the currently selected pipe.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should

-			 *                             updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be processed at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Pipe_Null_Stream(uint16_t Length,

-			                         uint16_t* const BytesProcessed);

-

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name Stream functions for RAM source/destination data */

-			//@{

-			

-			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the pipe from the given buffer in little endian,

-			 *  sending full packets to the device as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;

-			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the

-			 *  \ref Pipe_ClearOUT() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is

-			 *  executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.

-			 *

-			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,

-			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid

-			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time

-			 *  the pipe bank becomes full while there is still data to process (and after the current

-			 *  packet transmission has been initiated) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the

-			 *  total number of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of

-			 *  \ref PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed

-			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters

-			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t DataStream[512];

-			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;

-			 *  

-			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),

-			 *                                        NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t  DataStream[512];

-			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;

-			 *  

-			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;

-			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),

-			 *                                           &BytesProcessed)) == PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required

-			 *  }

-			 *  

-			 *  if (ErrorCode != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  \note The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without

-			 *        having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe into the buffer.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should

-			 *                             updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                             uint16_t Length,

-			                             uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the pipe from the given buffer in big endian,

-			 *  sending full packets to the device as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;

-			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the

-			 *  \ref Pipe_ClearOUT() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is

-			 *  executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.

-			 *

-			 *  \note The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without

-			 *        having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe into the buffer.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should

-			 *                             updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Pipe_Write_Stream_BE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                             uint16_t Length,

-			                             uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the pipe into the given buffer in little endian,

-			 *  sending full packets to the device as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;

-			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the

-			 *  \ref Pipe_ClearIN() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is

-			 *  executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.

-			 *

-			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,

-			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid

-			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time

-			 *  the pipe bank becomes empty while there is still data to process (and after the current

-			 *  packet has been acknowledged) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the total number

-			 *  of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of

-			 *  \ref PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed

-			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters

-			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t DataStream[512];

-			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;

-			 *  

-			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),

-			 *                                       NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t  DataStream[512];

-			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;

-			 *  

-			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;

-			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),

-			 *                                          &BytesProcessed)) == PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required

-			 *  }

-			 *  

-			 *  if (ErrorCode != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  \note The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without

-			 *        having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to write to.

-			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe to read from.

-			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should

-			 *                              updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(void* const Buffer,

-			                            uint16_t Length,

-			                            uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the pipe into the given buffer in big endian,

-			 *  sending full packets to the device as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;

-			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the

-			 *  \ref Pipe_ClearIN() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is

-			 *  executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.

-			 *

-			 *  \note The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without

-			 *        having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to write to.

-			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe to read from.

-			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should

-			 *                              updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Pipe_Read_Stream_BE(void* const Buffer,

-			                            uint16_t Length,

-			                            uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			//@}

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-	

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Pipe_UC3.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Pipe_UC3.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 6128869b0..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Pipe_UC3.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,209 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-#if (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-

-#include "../Pipe.h"

-

-uint8_t USB_Host_ControlPipeSize = PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE;

-

-volatile uint32_t USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe = PIPE_CONTROLPIPE;

-volatile uint8_t* USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES];

-

-bool Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(const USB_Pipe_Table_t* const Table,

-                             const uint8_t Entries)

-{

-	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < Entries; i++)

-	{

-		if (!(Table[i].Address))

-		  continue;

-	

-		if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipe(Table[i].Address, Table[i].Type, Table[i].EndpointAddress, Table[i].Size, Table[i].Banks)))

-		{

-			return false;

-		}

-	}

-	

-	return true;

-}

-

-bool Pipe_ConfigurePipe(const uint8_t Address,

-                        const uint8_t Type,

-                        const uint8_t EndpointAddress,

-                        const uint16_t Size,

-                        const uint8_t Banks)

-{

-	uint8_t Number = (Address & PIPE_EPNUM_MASK);

-	uint8_t Token  = (Address & PIPE_DIR_IN) ? PIPE_TOKEN_IN : PIPE_TOKEN_OUT;

-	

-	if (Number >= PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES)

-	  return false;

-

-	if (Type == EP_TYPE_CONTROL)

-	  Token = PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP;

-

-	USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[Number]     = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[Number * PIPE_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];

-

-#if defined(ORDERED_EP_CONFIG)

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(Number);

-	Pipe_EnablePipe();

-

-	(&AVR32_USBB.upcfg0)[Number] = 0;

-	(&AVR32_USBB.upcfg0)[Number] = (AVR32_USBB_ALLOC_MASK |

-	                                ((uint32_t)Type  << AVR32_USBB_PTYPE_OFFSET)  |

-	                                ((uint32_t)Token << AVR32_USBB_PTOKEN_OFFSET) |

-	                                ((Banks > 1) ? AVR32_USBB_PBK_MASK : 0)       |

-	                                Pipe_BytesToEPSizeMask(Size) |

-	                                ((uint32_t)Number << AVR32_USBB_PEPNUM_OFFSET));

-

-	Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests();

-

-	return Pipe_IsConfigured();

-#else

-	for (uint8_t PNum = Number; PNum < PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES; PNum++)

-	{

-		uint32_t UPCFG0Temp;

-

-		Pipe_SelectPipe(PNum);

-

-		if (PNum == Number)

-		{

-			UPCFG0Temp = (AVR32_USBB_ALLOC_MASK |

-			              ((uint32_t)Type  << AVR32_USBB_PTYPE_OFFSET)  |

-			              ((uint32_t)Token << AVR32_USBB_PTOKEN_OFFSET) |

-			              ((Banks > 1) ? AVR32_USBB_PBK_MASK : 0)       |

-			              Pipe_BytesToEPSizeMask(Size) |

-			              ((EndpointAddress & PIPE_EPNUM_MASK) << AVR32_USBB_PEPNUM_OFFSET));

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			UPCFG0Temp = (&AVR32_USBB.upcfg0)[PNum];

-		}

-

-		if (!(UPCFG0Temp & AVR32_USBB_ALLOC_MASK))

-		  continue;

-

-		Pipe_DisablePipe();

-		(&AVR32_USBB.upcfg0)[PNum] &= ~AVR32_USBB_ALLOC_MASK;

-

-		Pipe_EnablePipe();

-		(&AVR32_USBB.upcfg0)[PNum] = UPCFG0Temp;

-

-		Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests();

-

-		if (!(Pipe_IsConfigured()))

-		  return false;

-	}

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(Number);

-	return true;

-#endif

-}

-

-void Pipe_ClearPipes(void)

-{

-	for (uint8_t PNum = 0; PNum < PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES; PNum++)

-	{

-		Pipe_SelectPipe(PNum);

-		(&AVR32_USBB.upcfg0)[PNum]    = 0;

-		(&AVR32_USBB.upcon0clr)[PNum] = -1;

-		USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[PNum]        = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[PNum * 0x10000];

-		Pipe_DisablePipe();

-	}

-}

-

-bool Pipe_IsEndpointBound(const uint8_t EndpointAddress)

-{

-	uint8_t PrevPipeNumber = Pipe_GetCurrentPipe();

-

-	for (uint8_t PNum = 0; PNum < PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES; PNum++)

-	{

-		Pipe_SelectPipe(PNum);

-

-		if (!(Pipe_IsConfigured()))

-		  continue;

-

-		if (Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress() == EndpointAddress)

-		  return true;

-	}

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PrevPipeNumber);

-	return false;

-}

-

-uint8_t Pipe_WaitUntilReady(void)

-{

-	#if (USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS < 0xFF)

-	uint8_t  TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;

-	#else

-	uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;

-	#endif

-

-	uint16_t PreviousFrameNumber = USB_Host_GetFrameNumber();

-

-	for (;;)

-	{

-		if (Pipe_GetPipeToken() == PIPE_TOKEN_IN)

-		{

-			if (Pipe_IsINReceived())

-			  return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			if (Pipe_IsOUTReady())

-			  return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;

-		}

-

-		if (Pipe_IsStalled())

-		  return PIPE_READYWAIT_PipeStalled;

-		else if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)

-		  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;

-

-		uint16_t CurrentFrameNumber = USB_Host_GetFrameNumber();

-

-		if (CurrentFrameNumber != PreviousFrameNumber)

-		{

-			PreviousFrameNumber = CurrentFrameNumber;

-

-			if (!(TimeoutMSRem--))

-			  return PIPE_READYWAIT_Timeout;

-		}

-	}

-}

-

-#endif

-

-#endif

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Pipe_UC3.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Pipe_UC3.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 6de574e9c..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Pipe_UC3.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,924 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief USB Pipe definitions for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.

- *  \copydetails Group_PipeManagement_UC3

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_PipeRW

- *  \defgroup Group_PipeRW_UC3 Pipe Data Reading and Writing (UC3)

- *  \brief Pipe data read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing from and to pipes.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW

- *  \defgroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3 Read/Write of Primitive Data Types (UC3)

- *  \brief Pipe primitive data read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of primitive data types

- *  from and to pipes.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement

- *  \defgroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3 Pipe Packet Management (UC3)

- *  \brief Pipe packet management definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to packet management of pipes.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq

- *  \defgroup Group_PipeControlReq_UC3 Pipe Control Request Management (UC3)

- *  \brief Pipe control request management definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.

- *

- *  Module for host mode request processing. This module allows for the transmission of standard, class and

- *  vendor control requests to the default control endpoint of an attached device while in host mode.

- *

- *  \see Chapter 9 of the USB 2.0 specification.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_PipeManagement

- *  \defgroup Group_PipeManagement_UC3 Pipe Management (UC3)

- *  \brief Pipe management definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.

- *

- *  This module contains functions, macros and enums related to pipe management when in USB Host mode. This

- *  module contains the pipe management macros, as well as pipe interrupt and data send/receive functions

- *  for various data types.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __PIPE_UC3_H__

-#define __PIPE_UC3_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "../USBTask.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define PIPE_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE     (64 * 1024UL)

-

-		/* External Variables: */

-			extern volatile uint32_t USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe;

-			extern volatile uint8_t* USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[];

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** \name Pipe Error Flag Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that an overflow error occurred in the pipe on the received data. */

-			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_OVERFLOW         (AVR32_USBB_UPSTA0_OVERFI_MASK << 8)

-

-			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a CRC error occurred in the pipe on the received data. */

-			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_CRC16            AVR32_USBB_UPERR0_CRC16_MASK

-

-			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware timeout error occurred in the pipe. */

-			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_TIMEOUT          AVR32_USBB_UPERR0_TIMEOUT_MASK

-

-			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware PID error occurred in the pipe. */

-			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_PID              AVR32_USBB_UPERR0_PID_MASK

-

-			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware data PID error occurred in the pipe. */

-			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATAPID          AVR32_USBB_UPERR0_DATAPID_MASK

-

-			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware data toggle error occurred in the pipe. */

-			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATATGL          AVR32_USBB_UPERR0_DATATGL_MASK

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name Pipe Token Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** Token mask for \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken() and \ref Pipe_GetPipeToken(). This sets the pipe as a SETUP token (for CONTROL type pipes),

-			 *  which will trigger a control request on the attached device when data is written to the pipe.

-			 */

-			#define PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP                AVR32_USBB_UPCFG0_PTOKEN_SETUP

-

-			/** Token mask for \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken() and \ref Pipe_GetPipeToken(). This sets the pipe as a IN token (for non-CONTROL type pipes),

-			 *  indicating that the pipe data will flow from device to host.

-			 */

-			#define PIPE_TOKEN_IN                   AVR32_USBB_UPCFG0_PTOKEN_IN

-

-			/** Token mask for \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken() and \ref Pipe_GetPipeToken(). This sets the pipe as a OUT token (for non-CONTROL type pipes),

-			 *  indicating that the pipe data will flow from host to device.

-			 */

-			#define PIPE_TOKEN_OUT                  AVR32_USBB_UPCFG0_PTOKEN_OUT

-			//@}

-

-			/** Default size of the default control pipe's bank, until altered by the Endpoint0Size value

-			 *  in the device descriptor of the attached device.

-			 */

-			#define PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE   64

-

-			#if defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A3_AVR32) || defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A4_AVR32) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				/** Total number of pipes (including the default control pipe at address 0) which may be used in

-				 *  the device.

-				 */

-				#define PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES            8

-			#else

-				#define PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES            7

-			#endif

-

-			/** Size in bytes of the largest pipe bank size possible in the device. Not all banks on each AVR

-			 *  model supports the largest bank size possible on the device; different pipe numbers support

-			 *  different maximum bank sizes. This value reflects the largest possible bank of any pipe on the

-			 *  currently selected UC3 AVR model.

-			 */

-			#define PIPE_MAX_SIZE                   256

-

-		/* Enums: */

-			/** Enum for the possible error return codes of the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady() function.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeRW_UC3

-			 */

-			enum Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t

-			{

-				PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError                 = 0, /**< Pipe ready for next packet, no error. */

-				PIPE_READYWAIT_PipeStalled             = 1,	/**< The device stalled the pipe while waiting. */

-				PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected      = 2,	/**< Device was disconnected from the host while waiting. */

-				PIPE_READYWAIT_Timeout                 = 3, /**< The device failed to accept or send the next packet

-				                                             *   within the software timeout period set by the

-				                                             *   \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro.

-				                                             */

-			};

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Indicates the number of bytes currently stored in the current pipes's selected bank.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeRW_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \return Total number of bytes in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline uint16_t Pipe_BytesInPipe(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint16_t Pipe_BytesInPipe(void)

-			{

-				return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].pbyct;

-			}

-

-			/** Determines the currently selected pipe's direction.

-			 *

-			 *  \return The currently selected pipe's direction, as a \c PIPE_DIR_* mask.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeDirection(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeDirection(void)

-			{

-				return (((&AVR32_USBB.UPCFG0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].ptoken == PIPE_TOKEN_OUT) ? PIPE_DIR_OUT : PIPE_DIR_IN);

-			}

-			

-			/** Returns the pipe address of the currently selected pipe. This is typically used to save the

-			 *  currently selected pipe number so that it can be restored after another pipe has been manipulated.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Index of the currently selected pipe.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetCurrentPipe(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetCurrentPipe(void)

-			{

-				return (USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe | Pipe_GetPipeDirection());

-			}

-

-			/** Selects the given pipe address. Any pipe operations which do not require the pipe address to be

-			 *  indicated will operate on the currently selected pipe.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Address  Address of the pipe to select.

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_SelectPipe(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_SelectPipe(const uint8_t Address)

-			{

-				USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe = (Address & PIPE_EPNUM_MASK);

-			}

-

-			/** Resets the desired pipe, including the pipe banks and flags.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Address  Index of the pipe to reset.

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_ResetPipe(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_ResetPipe(const uint8_t Address)

-			{

-				uint32_t PipeNumber = (Address & PIPE_EPNUM_MASK);

-

-				AVR32_USBB.uprst |=  (AVR32_USBB_PRST0_MASK << PipeNumber);

-				AVR32_USBB.uprst &= ~(AVR32_USBB_PRST0_MASK << PipeNumber);

-				USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[PipeNumber] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[PipeNumber * PIPE_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];

-			}

-

-			/** Enables the currently selected pipe so that data can be sent and received through it to and from

-			 *  an attached device.

-			 *

-			 *  \pre The currently selected pipe must first be configured properly via \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe().

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_EnablePipe(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_EnablePipe(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_USBB.uprst |=  (AVR32_USBB_PEN0_MASK << USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe);

-			}

-

-			/** Disables the currently selected pipe so that data cannot be sent and received through it to and

-			 *  from an attached device.

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_DisablePipe(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_DisablePipe(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_USBB.uprst &= ~(AVR32_USBB_PEN0_MASK << USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe);

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the currently selected pipe is enabled, but not necessarily configured.

-			 *

-			 * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected pipe is enabled, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsEnabled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsEnabled(void)

-			{

-				return ((AVR32_USBB.uprst & (AVR32_USBB_PEN0_MASK << USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe)) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Gets the current pipe token, indicating the pipe's data direction and type.

-			 *

-			 *  \return The current pipe token, as a \c PIPE_TOKEN_* mask.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeToken(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeToken(void)

-			{

-				return (&AVR32_USBB.UPCFG0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].ptoken;

-			}

-

-			/** Sets the token for the currently selected pipe to one of the tokens specified by the \c PIPE_TOKEN_*

-			 *  masks. This can be used on CONTROL type pipes, to allow for bidirectional transfer of data during

-			 *  control requests, or on regular pipes to allow for half-duplex bidirectional data transfer to devices

-			 *  which have two endpoints of opposite direction sharing the same endpoint address within the device.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Token  New pipe token to set the selected pipe to, as a \c PIPE_TOKEN_* mask.

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_SetPipeToken(const uint8_t Token) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_SetPipeToken(const uint8_t Token)

-			{

-				(&AVR32_USBB.UPCFG0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].ptoken = Token;

-			}

-

-			/** Configures the currently selected pipe to allow for an unlimited number of IN requests. */

-			static inline void Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(void)

-			{

-				(&AVR32_USBB.UPINRQ0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].inmode = true;

-			}

-

-			/** Configures the currently selected pipe to only allow the specified number of IN requests to be

-			 *  accepted by the pipe before it is automatically frozen.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] TotalINRequests  Total number of IN requests that the pipe may receive before freezing.

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_SetFiniteINRequests(const uint8_t TotalINRequests) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_SetFiniteINRequests(const uint8_t TotalINRequests)

-			{

-				(&AVR32_USBB.UPINRQ0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].inmode = false;

-				(&AVR32_USBB.UPINRQ0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].inrq   = TotalINRequests;

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the currently selected pipe is configured.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the selected pipe is configured, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsConfigured(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsConfigured(void)

-			{

-				return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].cfgok;

-			}

-

-			/** Retrieves the endpoint address of the endpoint within the attached device that the currently selected

-			 *  pipe is bound to.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Endpoint address the currently selected pipe is bound to.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress(void)

-			{

-				return ((&AVR32_USBB.UPCFG0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].pepnum |

-				        ((Pipe_GetPipeToken() == PIPE_TOKEN_IN) ? PIPE_DIR_IN : PIPE_DIR_OUT));

-			}

-

-			/** Sets the period between interrupts for an INTERRUPT type pipe to a specified number of milliseconds.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Milliseconds  Number of milliseconds between each pipe poll.

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(const uint8_t Milliseconds) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(const uint8_t Milliseconds)

-			{

-				(&AVR32_USBB.UPCFG0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].intfrq = Milliseconds;

-			}

-

-			/** Returns a mask indicating which pipe's interrupt periods have elapsed, indicating that the pipe should

-			 *  be serviced.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Mask whose bits indicate which pipes have interrupted.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeInterrupts(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeInterrupts(void)

-			{

-				return ((AVR32_USBB.uhint & (AVR32_USBB_P6INT_MASK | AVR32_USBB_P5INT_MASK |

-				                             AVR32_USBB_P4INT_MASK | AVR32_USBB_P3INT_MASK |

-				                             AVR32_USBB_P2INT_MASK | AVR32_USBB_P1INT_MASK |

-				                             AVR32_USBB_P0INT_MASK)) >> AVR32_USBB_P0INT_OFFSET);

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the specified pipe address has interrupted (valid only for INTERRUPT type

-			 *  pipes).

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Address  Address of the pipe whose interrupt flag should be tested.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the specified pipe has interrupted, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Pipe_HasPipeInterrupted(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Pipe_HasPipeInterrupted(const uint8_t Address)

-			{

-				return ((AVR32_USBB.uhint & (AVR32_USBB_P0INTES_MASK << (Address & PIPE_EPNUM_MASK))) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Unfreezes the selected pipe, allowing it to communicate with an attached device. */

-			static inline void Pipe_Unfreeze(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_Unfreeze(void)

-			{

-				(&AVR32_USBB.UPCON0CLR)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].pfreezec = true;

-			}

-

-			/** Freezes the selected pipe, preventing it from communicating with an attached device. */

-			static inline void Pipe_Freeze(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_Freeze(void)

-			{

-				(&AVR32_USBB.UPCON0SET)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].pfreezes = true;

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the currently selected pipe is frozen, and not able to accept data.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected pipe is frozen, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsFrozen(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsFrozen(void)

-			{

-				return (((&AVR32_USBB.UPCON0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].pfreeze) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Clears the error flags for the currently selected pipe. */

-			static inline void Pipe_ClearError(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_ClearError(void)

-			{

-				(&AVR32_USBB.uperr0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe] = 0;

-				(&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0CLR)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].overfic  = true;

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the master pipe error flag is set for the currently selected pipe, indicating that

-			 *  some sort of hardware error has occurred on the pipe.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags() macro for information on retrieving the exact error flag.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if an error has occurred on the selected pipe, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsError(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsError(void)

-			{

-				return (((&AVR32_USBB.upsta0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe] &

-				        (AVR32_USBB_PERRI_MASK | AVR32_USBB_OVERFI_MASK)) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Gets a mask of the hardware error flags which have occurred on the currently selected pipe. This

-			 *  value can then be masked against the \c PIPE_ERRORFLAG_* masks to determine what error has occurred.

-			 *

-			 *  \return  Mask comprising of \c PIPE_ERRORFLAG_* bits indicating what error has occurred on the selected pipe.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetErrorFlags(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetErrorFlags(void)

-			{

-

-				return (((&AVR32_USBB.uperr0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe] &

-				        (PIPE_ERRORFLAG_CRC16 | PIPE_ERRORFLAG_TIMEOUT |

-				         PIPE_ERRORFLAG_PID   | PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATAPID |

-				         PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATATGL)) |

-				        (((&AVR32_USBB.upsta0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe] << 8) &

-						 PIPE_ERRORFLAG_OVERFLOW));

-			}

-

-			/** Retrieves the number of busy banks in the currently selected pipe, which have been queued for

-			 *  transmission via the \ref Pipe_ClearOUT() command, or are awaiting acknowledgement via the

-			 *  \ref Pipe_ClearIN() command.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \return Total number of busy banks in the selected pipe.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetBusyBanks(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetBusyBanks(void)

-			{

-				return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].nbusybk;

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the currently selected pipe may be read from (if data is waiting in the pipe

-			 *  bank and the pipe is an IN direction, or if the bank is not yet full if the pipe is an OUT

-			 *  direction). This function will return false if an error has occurred in the pipe, or if the pipe

-			 *  is an IN direction and no packet (or an empty packet) has been received, or if the pipe is an OUT

-			 *  direction and the pipe bank is full.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function is not valid on CONTROL type pipes.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected pipe may be read from or written to, depending

-			 *          on its direction.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed(void)

-			{

-				return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].rwall;

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if a packet has been received on the currently selected IN pipe from the attached device.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the current pipe has received an IN packet, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsINReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsINReceived(void)

-			{

-				return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].rxini;

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the currently selected OUT pipe is ready to send an OUT packet to the attached device.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the current pipe is ready for an OUT packet, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsOUTReady(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsOUTReady(void)

-			{

-				return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].txouti;

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if no SETUP request is currently being sent to the attached device on the selected

-			 *  CONTROL type pipe.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the current pipe is ready for a SETUP packet, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsSETUPSent(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsSETUPSent(void)

-			{

-				return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].txstpi;

-			}

-

-			/** Sends the currently selected CONTROL type pipe's contents to the device as a SETUP packet.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_ClearSETUP(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_ClearSETUP(void)

-			{

-				(&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0CLR)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].txstpic = true;

-				(&AVR32_USBB.UPCON0CLR)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].fifoconc = true;

-				USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe * PIPE_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];

-			}

-

-			/** Acknowledges the reception of a setup IN request from the attached device on the currently selected

-			 *  pipe, freeing the bank ready for the next packet.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_ClearIN(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_ClearIN(void)

-			{

-				(&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0CLR)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].rxinic   = true;

-				(&AVR32_USBB.UPCON0CLR)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].fifoconc = true;

-				USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe * PIPE_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];

-			}

-

-			/** Sends the currently selected pipe's contents to the device as an OUT packet on the selected pipe, freeing

-			 *  the bank ready for the next packet.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_ClearOUT(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_ClearOUT(void)

-			{

-				(&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0CLR)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].txoutic  = true;

-				(&AVR32_USBB.UPCON0CLR)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].fifoconc = true;

-				USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe * PIPE_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the device sent a NAK (Negative Acknowledge) in response to the last sent packet on

-			 *  the currently selected pipe. This occurs when the host sends a packet to the device, but the device

-			 *  is not currently ready to handle the packet (i.e. its endpoint banks are full). Once a NAK has been

-			 *  received, it must be cleared using \ref Pipe_ClearNAKReceived() before the previous (or any other) packet

-			 *  can be re-sent.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if an NAK has been received on the current pipe, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsNAKReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsNAKReceived(void)

-			{

-				return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].nakedi;

-			}

-

-			/** Clears the NAK condition on the currently selected pipe.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref Pipe_IsNAKReceived() for more details.

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_ClearNAKReceived(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_ClearNAKReceived(void)

-			{

-				(&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0CLR)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].nakedic = true;

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the currently selected pipe has had the STALL condition set by the attached device.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the current pipe has been stalled by the attached device, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsStalled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Pipe_IsStalled(void)

-			{

-				return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].rxstalldi;

-			}

-

-			/** Clears the STALL condition detection flag on the currently selected pipe, but does not clear the

-			 *  STALL condition itself (this must be done via a ClearFeature control request to the device).

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_ClearStall(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_ClearStall(void)

-			{

-				(&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0CLR)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].rxstalldic = true;

-				USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe * PIPE_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];

-			}

-

-			/** Reads one byte from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next byte in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_Read_8(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_Read_8(void)

-			{

-				return *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);

-			}

-

-			/** Writes one byte to the currently selected pipe's bank, for IN direction pipes.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write into the the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_Write_8(const uint8_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_Write_8(const uint8_t Data)

-			{

-				*(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++) = Data;

-			}

-

-			/** Discards one byte from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_Discard_8(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_Discard_8(void)

-			{

-				uint8_t Dummy;

-

-				Dummy = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);

-

-				(void)Dummy;

-			}

-

-			/** Reads two bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for OUT

-			 *  direction pipes.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next two bytes in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_16_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_16_LE(void)

-			{

-				uint16_t Byte0 = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);

-				uint16_t Byte1 = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);

-

-				return ((Byte1 << 8) | Byte0);

-			}

-

-			/** Reads two bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for OUT

-			 *  direction pipes.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next two bytes in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_16_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_16_BE(void)

-			{

-				uint16_t Byte0 = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);

-				uint16_t Byte1 = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);

-

-				return ((Byte0 << 8) | Byte1);

-			}

-

-			/** Writes two bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for IN

-			 *  direction pipes.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data)

-			{

-				*(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data & 0xFF);

-				*(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 8);

-			}

-

-			/** Writes two bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for IN

-			 *  direction pipes.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data)

-			{

-				*(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 8);

-				*(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data & 0xFF);

-			}

-

-			/** Discards two bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_Discard_16(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_Discard_16(void)

-			{

-				uint8_t Dummy;

-

-				Dummy = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);

-				Dummy = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);

-

-				(void)Dummy;

-			}

-

-			/** Reads four bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for OUT

-			 *  direction pipes.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next four bytes in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_32_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_32_LE(void)

-			{

-				uint32_t Byte0 = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);

-				uint32_t Byte1 = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);

-				uint32_t Byte2 = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);

-				uint32_t Byte3 = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);

-

-				return ((Byte3 << 24) | (Byte2 << 16) | (Byte1 << 8) | Byte0);

-			}

-

-			/** Reads four bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for OUT

-			 *  direction pipes.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next four bytes in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_32_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_32_BE(void)

-			{

-				uint32_t Byte0 = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);

-				uint32_t Byte1 = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);

-				uint32_t Byte2 = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);

-				uint32_t Byte3 = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);

-

-				return ((Byte0 << 24) | (Byte1 << 16) | (Byte2 << 8) | Byte3);

-			}

-

-			/** Writes four bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for IN

-			 *  direction pipes.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data)

-			{

-				*(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data &  0xFF);

-				*(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 8);

-				*(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 16);

-				*(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 24);

-			}

-

-			/** Writes four bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for IN

-			 *  direction pipes.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data)

-			{

-				*(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 24);

-				*(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 16);

-				*(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 8);

-				*(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data &  0xFF);

-			}

-

-			/** Discards four bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3

-			 */

-			static inline void Pipe_Discard_32(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Pipe_Discard_32(void)

-			{

-				uint8_t Dummy;

-

-				Dummy = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);

-				Dummy = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);

-				Dummy = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);

-				Dummy = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);

-

-				(void)Dummy;

-			}

-

-		/* External Variables: */

-			/** Global indicating the maximum packet size of the default control pipe located at address

-			 *  0 in the device. This value is set to the value indicated in the attached device's device

-		     *  descriptor once the USB interface is initialized into host mode and a device is attached

-			 *  to the USB bus.

-			 *

-			 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually

-			 *             changed in value.

-			 */

-			extern uint8_t USB_Host_ControlPipeSize;

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Configures a table of pipe descriptions, in sequence. This function can be used to configure multiple

-			 *  pipes at the same time.

-			 *

-			 *  \note Pipe with a zero address will be ignored, thus this function cannot be used to configure the

-			 *        control pipe.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Table    Pointer to a table of pipe descriptions.

-			 *  \param[in] Entries  Number of entries in the pipe table to configure.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if all pipes configured successfully, \c false otherwise.

-			 */			

-			bool Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(const USB_Pipe_Table_t* const Table,

-			                             const uint8_t Entries);

-

-			/** Configures the specified pipe address with the given pipe type, endpoint address within the attached device, bank size

-			 *  and number of hardware banks.

-			 *

-			 *  A newly configured pipe is frozen by default, and must be unfrozen before use via the \ref Pipe_Unfreeze()

-			 *  before being used. Pipes should be kept frozen unless waiting for data from a device while in IN mode, or

-			 *  sending data to the device in OUT mode. IN type pipes are also automatically configured to accept infinite

-			 *  numbers of IN requests without automatic freezing - this can be overridden by a call to

-			 *  \ref Pipe_SetFiniteINRequests().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Address          Pipe address to configure.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Type             Type of pipe to configure, an \c EP_TYPE_* mask. Not all pipe types are available on Low

-			 *                              Speed USB devices - refer to the USB 2.0 specification.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] EndpointAddress  Endpoint address within the attached device that the pipe should interface to.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Size             Size of the pipe's bank, where packets are stored before they are transmitted to

-			 *                              the USB device, or after they have been received from the USB device (depending on

-			 *                              the pipe's data direction). The bank size must indicate the maximum packet size that

-			 *                              the pipe can handle.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Banks            Number of banks to use for the pipe being configured.

-			 *

-			 *  \note When the \c ORDERED_EP_CONFIG compile time option is used, Pipes <b>must</b> be configured in ascending order,

-			 *        or bank corruption will occur.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note Certain microcontroller model's pipes may have different maximum packet sizes based on the pipe's

-			 *        index - refer to the chosen microcontroller's datasheet to determine the maximum bank size for each pipe.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note The default control pipe should not be manually configured by the user application, as it is

-			 *        automatically configured by the library internally.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine will automatically select the specified pipe upon success. Upon failure, the pipe which

-			 *        failed to reconfigure correctly will be selected.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the configuration succeeded, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			bool Pipe_ConfigurePipe(const uint8_t Address,

-			                        const uint8_t Type,

-			                        const uint8_t EndpointAddress,

-			                        const uint16_t Size,

-			                        const uint8_t Banks);

-

-			/** Spin-loops until the currently selected non-control pipe is ready for the next packet of data to be read

-			 *  or written to it, aborting in the case of an error condition (such as a timeout or device disconnect).

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeRW_UC3

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Pipe_WaitUntilReady(void);

-

-			/** Determines if a pipe has been bound to the given device endpoint address. If a pipe which is bound to the given

-			 *  endpoint is found, it is automatically selected.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] EndpointAddress Address and direction mask of the endpoint within the attached device to check.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if a pipe bound to the given endpoint address of the specified direction is found,

-			 *          \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			bool Pipe_IsEndpointBound(const uint8_t EndpointAddress) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#if !defined(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP)

-				#define ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP          0

-			#endif

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Pipe_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes)

-			{

-				uint8_t  MaskVal    = 0;

-				uint16_t CheckBytes = 8;

-

-				while ((CheckBytes < Bytes) && (CheckBytes < PIPE_MAX_SIZE))

-				{

-					MaskVal++;

-					CheckBytes <<= 1;

-				}

-

-				return (MaskVal << AVR32_USBB_PSIZE_OFFSET);

-			}

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			void Pipe_ClearPipes(void);

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c
deleted file mode 100644
index ab69536b0..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,85 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#if defined(TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME)

-

-// cppcheck-suppress unusedFunction

-uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (void* const Buffer,

-                            uint16_t Length)

-{

-	uint8_t* DataStream = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));

-

-	if (!(Length))

-	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-

-	while (Length)

-	{

-		uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;

-

-		if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)

-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-		else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)

-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;

-		else if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())

-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_HostAborted;

-

-		if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())

-		{

-			while (Length && Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())

-			{

-				TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);

-				TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, 1);

-				Length--;

-			}

-

-			Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-		}

-	}

-

-	while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))

-	{

-		uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;

-

-		if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)

-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-		else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)

-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;

-	}

-

-	return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET

-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE

-#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME

-#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c
deleted file mode 100644
index c2d171db0..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,94 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#if defined(TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME)

-

-// cppcheck-suppress unusedFunction

-uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (const void* const Buffer,

-                            uint16_t Length)

-{

-	uint8_t* DataStream     = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));

-	bool     LastPacketFull = false;

-

-	if (Length > USB_ControlRequest.wLength)

-	  Length = USB_ControlRequest.wLength;

-	else if (!(Length))

-	  Endpoint_ClearIN();

-

-	while (Length || LastPacketFull)

-	{

-		uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;

-

-		if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)

-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-		else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)

-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;

-		else if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())

-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_HostAborted;

-		else if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())

-		  break;

-

-		if (Endpoint_IsINReady())

-		{

-			uint16_t BytesInEndpoint = Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint();

-

-			while (Length && (BytesInEndpoint < USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize))

-			{

-				TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);

-				TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, 1);

-				Length--;

-				BytesInEndpoint++;

-			}

-

-			LastPacketFull = (BytesInEndpoint == USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize);

-			Endpoint_ClearIN();

-		}

-	}

-

-	while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))

-	{

-		uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;

-

-		if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)

-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-		else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)

-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;

-	}

-

-	return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET

-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE

-#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME

-#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 02ad97867..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,90 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#if defined(TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME)

-

-// cppcheck-suppress unusedFunction

-uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE const Buffer,

-                            uint16_t Length,

-                            uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)

-{

-	uint8_t* DataStream      = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));

-	uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;

-	uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	if (BytesProcessed != NULL)

-	{

-		Length -= *BytesProcessed;

-		TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, *BytesProcessed);

-	}

-

-	while (Length)

-	{

-		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-		{

-			TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT();

-

-			#if !defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)

-			USB_USBTask();

-			#endif

-

-			if (BytesProcessed != NULL)

-			{

-				*BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;

-				return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;

-			}

-

-			if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))

-			  return ErrorCode;

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);

-			TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, 1);

-			Length--;

-			BytesInTransfer++;

-		}

-	}

-

-	return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME

-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE

-#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE

-#undef TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT

-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET

-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 05846bb61..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,89 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#if defined(TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME)

-

-// cppcheck-suppress unusedFunction

-uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE const Buffer,

-                            uint16_t Length,

-                            uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)

-{

-	uint8_t* DataStream      = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));

-	uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;

-	uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-

-	Pipe_SetPipeToken(TEMPLATE_TOKEN);

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	if (BytesProcessed != NULL)

-	{

-		Length -= *BytesProcessed;

-		TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, *BytesProcessed);

-	}

-

-	while (Length)

-	{

-		if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-		{

-			TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE();

-

-			if (BytesProcessed != NULL)

-			{

-				*BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;

-				return PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;

-			}

-

-			if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))

-			  return ErrorCode;

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);

-			TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, 1);

-			Length--;

-			BytesInTransfer++;

-		}

-	}

-

-	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME

-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE

-#undef TEMPLATE_TOKEN

-#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE

-#undef TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE

-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET

-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBController_UC3.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBController_UC3.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 8ee63318f..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBController_UC3.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,222 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-#if (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_CONTROLLER_C

-#include "../USBController.h"

-

-#if (!defined(USB_HOST_ONLY) && !defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY))

-volatile uint8_t USB_CurrentMode = USB_MODE_None;

-#endif

-

-#if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)

-volatile uint8_t USB_Options;

-#endif

-

-void USB_Init(

-               #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)

-               const uint8_t Mode

-               #endif

-

-               #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS))

-               ,

-               #elif (!defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS))

-               void

-               #endif

-

-               #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)

-               const uint8_t Options

-               #endif

-               )

-{

-	#if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)

-	USB_Options = Options;

-	#endif

-

-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)

-	if (Mode == USB_MODE_UID)

-	{

-		AVR32_USBB.USBCON.uide = true;

-		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_IDTI);

-		USB_CurrentMode = USB_GetUSBModeFromUID();

-	}

-	else

-	{

-		AVR32_USBB.USBCON.uide = false;

-		USB_CurrentMode = Mode;

-	}

-	#else

-	AVR32_USBB.USBCON.uide = false;

-	#endif

-

-	USB_IsInitialized = true;

-

-	USB_ResetInterface();

-}

-

-void USB_Disable(void)

-{

-	USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts();

-	USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts();

-

-	USB_Detach();

-	USB_Controller_Disable();

-

-	USB_OTGPAD_Off();

-

-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)

-	USB_CurrentMode = USB_MODE_None;

-	#endif

-

-	AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[3].cen = false;

-

-	USB_IsInitialized = false;

-}

-

-void USB_ResetInterface(void)

-{

-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)

-	bool UIDModeSelectEnabled = AVR32_USBB.USBCON.uide;

-	#endif

-

-	AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[AVR32_PM_GCLK_USBB].pllsel = !(USB_Options & USB_OPT_GCLK_SRC_OSC);

-	AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[AVR32_PM_GCLK_USBB].oscsel = !(USB_Options & USB_OPT_GCLK_CHANNEL_0);

-	AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[AVR32_PM_GCLK_USBB].diven  = (F_USB != USB_CLOCK_REQUIRED_FREQ);

-	AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[AVR32_PM_GCLK_USBB].div    = (F_USB == USB_CLOCK_REQUIRED_FREQ) ? 0 : (uint32_t)((F_USB / USB_CLOCK_REQUIRED_FREQ / 2) - 1);

-	AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[AVR32_PM_GCLK_USBB].cen    = true;

-

-	USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts();

-	USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts();

-

-	USB_Controller_Reset();

-

-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)

-	if (UIDModeSelectEnabled)

-	  USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_IDTI);

-	#endif

-

-	USB_CLK_Unfreeze();

-

-	if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device)

-	{

-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-		AVR32_USBB.USBCON.uimod = true;

-

-		USB_Init_Device();

-		#endif

-	}

-	else if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Host)

-	{

-		#if defined(INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE)

-		AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vbuspo = true;

-		#endif

-		

-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-		AVR32_USBB.USBCON.uimod = false;

-

-		USB_Init_Host();

-		#endif

-	}

-

-	USB_OTGPAD_On();

-}

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-static void USB_Init_Device(void)

-{

-	USB_DeviceState                 = DEVICE_STATE_Unattached;

-	USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber  = 0;

-

-	#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)

-	USB_Device_RemoteWakeupEnabled  = false;

-	#endif

-

-	#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER)

-	USB_Device_CurrentlySelfPowered = false;

-	#endif

-

-	#if !defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE)

-	USB_Descriptor_Device_t* DeviceDescriptorPtr;

-

-	if (CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor((DTYPE_Device << 8), 0, (void*)&DeviceDescriptorPtr) != NO_DESCRIPTOR)

-	  USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size;

-	#endif

-

-	if (USB_Options & USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED)

-	{

-		USB_Device_SetLowSpeed();

-	}

-	else

-	{

-		#if defined(USB_DEVICE_OPT_HIGHSPEED)

-		if (USB_Options & USB_DEVICE_OPT_HIGHSPEED)

-		  USB_Device_SetHighSpeed();

-		else

-		  USB_Device_SetFullSpeed();

-		#else

-		USB_Device_SetFullSpeed();

-		#endif

-	}

-

-	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_VBUSTI);

-

-	Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, EP_TYPE_CONTROL,

-							   USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize, 1);

-

-	USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SUSPI);

-	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SUSPI);

-	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_EORSTI);

-

-	USB_Attach();

-}

-#endif

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-static void USB_Init_Host(void)

-{

-	USB_HostState                = HOST_STATE_Unattached;

-	USB_Host_ConfigurationNumber = 0;

-	USB_Host_ControlPipeSize     = PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE;

-

-	USB_Host_HostMode_On();

-

-	USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_On();

-

-	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_DCONNI);

-	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_BCERRI);

-

-	USB_Attach();

-}

-#endif

-

-#endif

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBController_UC3.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBController_UC3.h
deleted file mode 100644
index bcae49bd4..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBController_UC3.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,365 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief USB Controller definitions for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.

- *  \copydetails Group_USBManagement_UC3

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBManagement

- *  \defgroup Group_USBManagement_UC3 USB Interface Management (UC3)

- *  \brief USB Controller definitions for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to the setup and management of the USB interface.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __USBCONTROLLER_UC3_H__

-#define __USBCONTROLLER_UC3_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "../USBMode.h"

-		#include "../Events.h"

-		#include "../USBTask.h"

-		#include "../USBInterrupt.h"

-

-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			#include "../Host.h"

-			#include "../OTG.h"

-			#include "../Pipe.h"

-			#include "../HostStandardReq.h"

-			#include "../PipeStream.h"

-		#endif

-

-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			#include "../Device.h"

-			#include "../Endpoint.h"

-			#include "../DeviceStandardReq.h"

-			#include "../EndpointStream.h"

-		#endif

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks and Defines: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-		#if !defined(F_USB)

-			#error F_USB is not defined. You must define F_USB to the frequency of the clock input to the USB module.

-		#endif

-

-		#if (defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A3_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A4_AVR))

-			#if ((F_USB < 12000000) || (F_USB % 12000000))

-				#error Invalid F_USB specified. F_USB must be a multiple of 12MHz for UC3A3 and UC3A4 devices.

-			#endif		

-		#else

-			#if ((F_USB < 48000000) || (F_USB % 48000000))

-				#error Invalid F_USB specified. F_USB must be a multiple of 48MHz for UC3A and UC3B devices.

-			#endif		

-		#endif

-		

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** \name USB Controller Option Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** Selects one of the system's main clock oscillators as the input clock to the USB Generic Clock source

-			 *  generation module. This indicates that an external oscillator should be used directly instead of an

-			 *  internal PLL clock source.

-			 */

-			#define USB_OPT_GCLK_SRC_OSC               (1 << 2)

-

-			/** Selects one of the system's PLL oscillators as the input clock to the USB Generic Clock source

-			 *  generation module. This indicates that one of the device's PLL outputs should be used instead of an

-			 *  external oscillator source.

-			 */

-			#define USB_OPT_GCLK_SRC_PLL               (0 << 2)

-

-			/** Selects PLL or External Oscillator 0 as the USB Generic Clock source module input clock. */

-			#define USB_OPT_GCLK_CHANNEL_0             (1 << 3)

-

-			/** Selects PLL or External Oscillator 1 as the USB Generic Clock source module input clock. */

-			#define USB_OPT_GCLK_CHANNEL_1             (0 << 3)

-			//@}

-

-			#if !defined(USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				/** Constant for the maximum software timeout period of the USB data stream transfer functions

-				 *  (both control and standard) when in either device or host mode. If the next packet of a stream

-				 *  is not received or acknowledged within this time period, the stream function will fail.

-				 *

-				 *  This value may be overridden in the user project makefile as the value of the

-				 *  \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS token, and passed to the compiler using the -D switch.

-				 */

-				#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS       100

-			#endif

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Determines if the VBUS line is currently high (i.e. the USB host is supplying power).

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the VBUS line is currently detecting power from a host, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool USB_VBUS_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool USB_VBUS_GetStatus(void)

-			{

-				return AVR32_USBB.USBSTA.vbus;

-			}

-

-			/** Detaches the device from the USB bus. This has the effect of removing the device from any

-			 *  attached host, ceasing USB communications. If no host is present, this prevents any host from

-			 *  enumerating the device once attached until \ref USB_Attach() is called.

-			 */

-			static inline void USB_Detach(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Detach(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_USBB.UDCON.detach = true;

-			}

-

-			/** Attaches the device to the USB bus. This announces the device's presence to any attached

-			 *  USB host, starting the enumeration process. If no host is present, attaching the device

-			 *  will allow for enumeration once a host is connected to the device.

-			 *

-			 *  This is inexplicably also required for proper operation while in host mode, to enable the

-			 *  attachment of a device to the host. This is despite the bit being located in the device-mode

-			 *  register and despite the datasheet making no mention of its requirement in host mode.

-			 */

-			static inline void USB_Attach(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Attach(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_USBB.UDCON.detach = false;

-			}

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Main function to initialize and start the USB interface. Once active, the USB interface will

-			 *  allow for device connection to a host when in device mode, or for device enumeration while in

-			 *  host mode.

-			 *

-			 *  As the USB library relies on interrupts for the device and host mode enumeration processes,

-			 *  the user must enable global interrupts before or shortly after this function is called. In

-			 *  device mode, interrupts must be enabled within 500ms of this function being called to ensure

-			 *  that the host does not time out whilst enumerating the device. In host mode, interrupts may be

-			 *  enabled at the application's leisure however enumeration will not begin of an attached device

-			 *  until after this has occurred.

-			 *

-			 *  Calling this function when the USB interface is already initialized will cause a complete USB

-			 *  interface reset and re-enumeration.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Mode     This is a mask indicating what mode the USB interface is to be initialized to, a value

-			 *                      from the \ref USB_Modes_t enum.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Options  Mask indicating the options which should be used when initializing the USB

-			 *                      interface to control the USB interface's behavior. This should be comprised of

-			 *                      a \c USB_OPT_REG_* mask to control the regulator, a \c USB_OPT_*_PLL mask to control the

-			 *                      PLL, and a \c USB_DEVICE_OPT_* mask (when the device mode is enabled) to set the device

-			 *                      mode speed.

-			 *

-			 *  \note To reduce the FLASH requirements of the library if only device or host mode is required,

-			 *        the mode can be statically set in the project makefile by defining the token \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY

-			 *        (for device mode) or \c USB_HOST_ONLY (for host mode), passing the token to the compiler

-			 *        via the -D switch. If the mode is statically set, this parameter does not exist in the

-			 *        function prototype.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note To reduce the FLASH requirements of the library if only fixed settings are required,

-			 *        the options may be set statically in the same manner as the mode (see the Mode parameter of

-			 *        this function). To statically set the USB options, pass in the \c USE_STATIC_OPTIONS token,

-			 *        defined to the appropriate options masks. When the options are statically set, this

-			 *        parameter does not exist in the function prototype.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref Group_Device for the \c USB_DEVICE_OPT_* masks.

-			 */

-			void USB_Init(

-			               #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			               const uint8_t Mode

-			               #endif

-

-			               #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			               ,

-			               #elif (!defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS))

-			               void

-			               #endif

-

-			               #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			               const uint8_t Options

-			               #endif

-			               );

-

-			/** Shuts down the USB interface. This turns off the USB interface after deallocating all USB FIFO

-			 *  memory, endpoints and pipes. When turned off, no USB functionality can be used until the interface

-			 *  is restarted with the \ref USB_Init() function.

-			 */

-			void USB_Disable(void);

-

-			/** Resets the interface, when already initialized. This will re-enumerate the device if already connected

-			 *  to a host, or re-enumerate an already attached device when in host mode.

-			 */

-			void USB_ResetInterface(void);

-

-		/* Global Variables: */

-			#if (!defined(USB_HOST_ONLY) && !defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				/** Indicates the mode that the USB interface is currently initialized to, a value from the

-				 *  \ref USB_Modes_t enum.

-				 *

-				 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually

-				 *             changed in value.

-				 *

-				 *  \note When the controller is initialized into UID auto-detection mode, this variable will hold the

-				 *        currently selected USB mode (i.e. \ref USB_MODE_Device or \ref USB_MODE_Host). If the controller

-				 *        is fixed into a specific mode (either through the \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY or \c USB_HOST_ONLY compile time

-				 *        options, or a limitation of the USB controller in the chosen device model) this will evaluate to

-				 *        a constant of the appropriate value and will never evaluate to \ref USB_MODE_None even when the

-				 *        USB interface is not initialized.

-				 */

-				extern volatile uint8_t USB_CurrentMode;

-			#elif defined(USB_HOST_ONLY)

-				#define USB_CurrentMode USB_MODE_Host

-			#elif defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)

-				#define USB_CurrentMode USB_MODE_Device

-			#endif

-

-			#if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				/** Indicates the current USB options that the USB interface was initialized with when \ref USB_Init()

-				 *  was called. This value will be one of the \c USB_MODE_* masks defined elsewhere in this module.

-				 *

-				 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually

-				 *             changed in value.

-				 */

-				extern volatile uint8_t USB_Options;

-			#elif defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)

-				#define USB_Options USE_STATIC_OPTIONS

-			#endif

-

-		/* Enums: */

-			/** Enum for the possible USB controller modes, for initialization via \ref USB_Init() and indication back to the

-			 *  user application via \ref USB_CurrentMode.

-			 */

-			enum USB_Modes_t

-			{

-				USB_MODE_None   = 0, /**< Indicates that the controller is currently not initialized in any specific USB mode. */

-				USB_MODE_Device = 1, /**< Indicates that the controller is currently initialized in USB Device mode. */

-				USB_MODE_Host   = 2, /**< Indicates that the controller is currently initialized in USB Host mode. */

-				USB_MODE_UID    = 3, /**< Indicates that the controller should determine the USB mode from the UID pin of the

-				                      *   USB connector.

-				                      */

-			};

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Macros: */

-			#if defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A3_AVR32) || defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A4_AVR32)

-				#define USB_CLOCK_REQUIRED_FREQ  12000000UL

-			#else

-				#define USB_CLOCK_REQUIRED_FREQ  48000000UL

-			#endif

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_CONTROLLER_C)

-				#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-				static void USB_Init_Device(void);

-				#endif

-

-				#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-				static void USB_Init_Host(void);

-				#endif

-			#endif

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			static inline void USB_OTGPAD_On(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_OTGPAD_On(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_USBB.USBCON.otgpade = true;

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_OTGPAD_Off(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_OTGPAD_Off(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_USBB.USBCON.otgpade = false;

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_CLK_Freeze(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_CLK_Freeze(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_USBB.USBCON.frzclk = true;

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_CLK_Unfreeze(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_CLK_Unfreeze(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_USBB.USBCON.frzclk = false;

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_Controller_Enable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Controller_Enable(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_USBB.USBCON.usbe = true;

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_Controller_Disable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Controller_Disable(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_USBB.USBCON.usbe = false;

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_Controller_Reset(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Controller_Reset(void)

-			{

-				AVR32_USBB.USBCON.usbe = false;

-				AVR32_USBB.USBCON.usbe = true;

-			}

-

-			#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)

-			static inline uint8_t USB_GetUSBModeFromUID(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t USB_GetUSBModeFromUID(void)

-			{

-				if (AVR32_USBB.USBSTA.id)

-				  return USB_MODE_Device;

-				else

-				  return USB_MODE_Host;

-			}

-			#endif

-

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBInterrupt_UC3.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBInterrupt_UC3.c
deleted file mode 100644
index e11a4b642..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBInterrupt_UC3.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,228 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-#if (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../USBInterrupt.h"

-

-void USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(void)

-{

-	AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vbuste     = false;

-	AVR32_USBB.USBCON.idte       = false;

-

-	AVR32_USBB.uhinteclr         = -1;

-	AVR32_USBB.udinteclr         = -1;

-}

-

-void USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(void)

-{

-	AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.vbustic = true;

-	AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.idtic   = true;

-

-	AVR32_USBB.uhintclr          = -1;

-	AVR32_USBB.udintclr          = -1;

-}

-

-ISR(USB_GEN_vect)

-{

-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-	#if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS)

-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_SOFI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_SOFI))

-	{

-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SOFI);

-

-		EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame();

-	}

-	#endif

-

-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_VBUSTI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_VBUSTI))

-	{

-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_VBUSTI);

-

-		if (USB_VBUS_GetStatus())

-		{

-			USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Powered;

-			EVENT_USB_Device_Connect();

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Unattached;

-			EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect();

-		}

-	}

-

-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_SUSPI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_SUSPI))

-	{

-		USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SUSPI);

-		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_WAKEUPI);

-

-		USB_CLK_Freeze();

-

-		USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Suspended;

-		EVENT_USB_Device_Suspend();

-	}

-

-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_WAKEUPI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_WAKEUPI))

-	{

-		USB_CLK_Unfreeze();

-

-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_WAKEUPI);

-

-		USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_WAKEUPI);

-		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SUSPI);

-

-		if (USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber)

-		  USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Configured;

-		else

-		  USB_DeviceState = (USB_Device_IsAddressSet()) ? DEVICE_STATE_Configured : DEVICE_STATE_Powered;

-

-		EVENT_USB_Device_WakeUp();

-	}

-

-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_EORSTI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_EORSTI))

-	{

-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_EORSTI);

-

-		USB_DeviceState                = DEVICE_STATE_Default;

-		USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber = 0;

-

-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SUSPI);

-		USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SUSPI);

-		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_WAKEUPI);

-

-		USB_Device_SetDeviceAddress(0);

-		Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, EP_TYPE_CONTROL,

-		                           USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize, 1);

-

-		#if defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)

-		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_RXSTPI);

-		#endif

-

-		EVENT_USB_Device_Reset();

-	}

-	#endif

-

-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-	#if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS)

-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_HSOFI))

-	{

-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);

-

-		EVENT_USB_Host_StartOfFrame();

-	}

-	#endif

-

-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_DDISCI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_DDISCI))

-	{

-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DDISCI);

-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DCONNI);

-		USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_DDISCI);

-

-		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();

-

-		USB_ResetInterface();

-	}

-

-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_VBERRI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_VBERRI))

-	{

-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_VBERRI);

-

-		USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off();

-		USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off();

-

-		EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(HOST_ERROR_VBusVoltageDip);

-		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();

-

-		USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Unattached;

-	}

-

-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_DCONNI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_DCONNI))

-	{

-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DCONNI);

-		USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_DCONNI);

-

-		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached();

-

-		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_DDISCI);

-

-		USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Powered;

-	}

-

-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_BCERRI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_BCERRI))

-	{

-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_BCERRI);

-

-		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(HOST_ENUMERROR_NoDeviceDetected, 0);

-		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();

-

-		USB_ResetInterface();

-	}

-	#endif

-

-	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)

-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_IDTI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_IDTI))

-	{

-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_IDTI);

-

-		if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)

-		  EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect();

-

-		if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Unattached)

-		  EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();

-

-		USB_CurrentMode = USB_GetUSBModeFromUID();

-		USB_ResetInterface();

-

-		EVENT_USB_UIDChange();

-	}

-	#endif

-}

-

-#if defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT) && defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-ISR(USB_COM_vect)

-{

-	uint8_t PrevSelectedEndpoint = Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint();

-

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP);

-	USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_RXSTPI);

-

-	GlobalInterruptEnable();

-

-	USB_Device_ProcessControlRequest();

-

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP);

-	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_RXSTPI);

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(PrevSelectedEndpoint);

-}

-#endif

-

-#endif

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBInterrupt_UC3.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBInterrupt_UC3.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 625e3f782..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBInterrupt_UC3.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,370 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief USB Controller Interrupt definitions for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.

- *

- *  This file contains definitions required for the correct handling of low level USB service routine interrupts

- *  from the USB controller.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-#ifndef __USBINTERRUPT_UC3_H__

-#define __USBINTERRUPT_UC3_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* External Variables: */

-			extern volatile uint32_t USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint;

-

-		/* Enums: */

-			enum USB_Interrupts_t

-			{

-				USB_INT_VBUSTI  = 0,

-				#if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))

-				USB_INT_IDTI    = 1,

-				#endif

-				#if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))

-				USB_INT_WAKEUPI = 2,

-				USB_INT_SUSPI   = 3,

-				USB_INT_EORSTI  = 4,

-				USB_INT_SOFI    = 5,

-				USB_INT_RXSTPI  = 6,

-				#endif

-				#if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))

-				USB_INT_HSOFI   = 7,

-				USB_INT_DCONNI  = 8,

-				USB_INT_DDISCI  = 9,

-				USB_INT_RSTI    = 10,

-				USB_INT_BCERRI  = 11,

-				USB_INT_VBERRI  = 12,

-				#endif

-			};

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			static inline void USB_INT_Enable(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_INT_Enable(const uint8_t Interrupt)

-			{

-				switch (Interrupt)

-				{

-					case USB_INT_VBUSTI:

-						AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vbuste      = true;

-						break;

-					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)

-					case USB_INT_IDTI:

-						AVR32_USBB.USBCON.idte        = true;

-						break;

-					#endif

-					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-					case USB_INT_WAKEUPI:

-						AVR32_USBB.UDINTESET.wakeupes = true;

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_SUSPI:

-						AVR32_USBB.UDINTESET.suspes   = true;

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_EORSTI:

-						AVR32_USBB.UDINTESET.eorstes  = true;

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_SOFI:

-						AVR32_USBB.UDINTESET.sofes    = true;

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_RXSTPI:

-						(&AVR32_USBB.UECON0SET)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].rxstpes = true;

-						break;

-					#endif

-					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-					case USB_INT_HSOFI:

-						AVR32_USBB.UHINTESET.hsofies  = true;

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_DCONNI:

-						AVR32_USBB.UHINTESET.dconnies = true;

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_DDISCI:

-						AVR32_USBB.UHINTESET.ddiscies = true;

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_RSTI:

-						AVR32_USBB.UHINTESET.rsties   = true;

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_BCERRI:

-						AVR32_USBB.USBCON.bcerre      = true;

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_VBERRI:

-						AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vberre      = true;

-						break;

-					#endif

-				}

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_INT_Disable(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_INT_Disable(const uint8_t Interrupt)

-			{

-				switch (Interrupt)

-				{

-					case USB_INT_VBUSTI:

-						AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vbuste      = false;

-						break;

-					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)

-					case USB_INT_IDTI:

-						AVR32_USBB.USBCON.idte        = false;

-						break;

-					#endif

-					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-					case USB_INT_WAKEUPI:

-						AVR32_USBB.UDINTECLR.wakeupec = true;

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_SUSPI:

-						AVR32_USBB.UDINTECLR.suspec   = true;

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_EORSTI:

-						AVR32_USBB.UDINTECLR.eorstec  = true;

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_SOFI:

-						AVR32_USBB.UDINTECLR.sofec    = true;

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_RXSTPI:

-						(&AVR32_USBB.UECON0CLR)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].rxstpec = true;

-						break;

-					#endif

-					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-					case USB_INT_HSOFI:

-						AVR32_USBB.UHINTECLR.hsofiec  = true;

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_DCONNI:

-						AVR32_USBB.UHINTECLR.dconniec = true;

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_DDISCI:

-						AVR32_USBB.UHINTECLR.ddisciec = true;

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_RSTI:

-						AVR32_USBB.UHINTECLR.rstiec   = true;

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_BCERRI:

-						AVR32_USBB.USBCON.bcerre      = false;

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_VBERRI:

-						AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vberre      = false;

-						break;

-					#endif

-				}

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_INT_Clear(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_INT_Clear(const uint8_t Interrupt)

-			{

-				switch (Interrupt)

-				{

-					case USB_INT_VBUSTI:

-						AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.vbustic = true;

-						(void)AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR;

-						break;

-					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)

-					case USB_INT_IDTI:

-						AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.idtic   = true;

-						(void)AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR;

-						break;

-					#endif

-					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-					case USB_INT_WAKEUPI:

-						AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR.wakeupc  = true;

-						(void)AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR;

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_SUSPI:

-						AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR.suspc    = true;

-						(void)AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR;

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_EORSTI:

-						AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR.eorstc   = true;

-						(void)AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR;

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_SOFI:

-						AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR.sofc     = true;

-						(void)AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR;

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_RXSTPI:

-						(&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0CLR)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].rxstpic = true;

-						break;

-					#endif

-					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-					case USB_INT_HSOFI:

-						AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR.hsofic   = true;

-						(void)AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR;

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_DCONNI:

-						AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR.dconnic  = true;

-						(void)AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR;

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_DDISCI:

-						AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR.ddiscic  = true;

-						(void)AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR;

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_RSTI:

-						AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR.rstic    = true;

-						(void)AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR;

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_BCERRI:

-						AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.bcerric = true;

-						(void)AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR;

-						break;

-					case USB_INT_VBERRI:

-						AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.vberric = true;

-						(void)AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR;

-						break;

-					#endif

-				}

-			}

-

-			static inline bool USB_INT_IsEnabled(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline bool USB_INT_IsEnabled(const uint8_t Interrupt)

-			{

-				switch (Interrupt)

-				{

-					case USB_INT_VBUSTI:

-						return AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vbuste;

-					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)

-					case USB_INT_IDTI:

-						return AVR32_USBB.USBCON.idte;

-					#endif

-					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-					case USB_INT_WAKEUPI:

-						return AVR32_USBB.UDINTE.wakeupe;

-					case USB_INT_SUSPI:

-						return AVR32_USBB.UDINTE.suspe;

-					case USB_INT_EORSTI:

-						return AVR32_USBB.UDINTE.eorste;

-					case USB_INT_SOFI:

-						return AVR32_USBB.UDINTE.sofe;

-					case USB_INT_RXSTPI:

-						return (&AVR32_USBB.UECON0)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].rxstpe;

-					#endif

-					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-					case USB_INT_HSOFI:

-						return AVR32_USBB.UHINTE.hsofie;

-					case USB_INT_DCONNI:

-						return AVR32_USBB.UHINTE.dconnie;

-					case USB_INT_DDISCI:

-						return AVR32_USBB.UHINTE.ddiscie;

-					case USB_INT_RSTI:

-						return AVR32_USBB.UHINTE.rstie;

-					case USB_INT_BCERRI:

-						return AVR32_USBB.USBCON.bcerre;

-					case USB_INT_VBERRI:

-						return AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vberre;

-					#endif

-				}

-

-				return false;

-			}

-

-			static inline bool USB_INT_HasOccurred(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline bool USB_INT_HasOccurred(const uint8_t Interrupt)

-			{

-				switch (Interrupt)

-				{

-					case USB_INT_VBUSTI:

-						return AVR32_USBB.USBSTA.vbusti;

-					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)

-					case USB_INT_IDTI:

-						return AVR32_USBB.USBSTA.idti;

-					#endif

-					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-					case USB_INT_WAKEUPI:

-						return AVR32_USBB.UDINT.wakeup;

-					case USB_INT_SUSPI:

-						return AVR32_USBB.UDINT.susp;

-					case USB_INT_EORSTI:

-						return AVR32_USBB.UDINT.eorst;

-					case USB_INT_SOFI:

-						return AVR32_USBB.UDINT.sof;

-					case USB_INT_RXSTPI:

-						return (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].rxstpi;

-					#endif

-					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-					case USB_INT_HSOFI:

-						return AVR32_USBB.UHINT.hsofi;

-					case USB_INT_DCONNI:

-						return AVR32_USBB.UHINT.dconni;

-					case USB_INT_DDISCI:

-						return AVR32_USBB.UHINT.ddisci;

-					case USB_INT_RSTI:

-						return AVR32_USBB.UHINT.rsti;

-					case USB_INT_BCERRI:

-						return AVR32_USBB.USBSTA.bcerri;

-					case USB_INT_VBERRI:

-						return AVR32_USBB.USBSTA.vberri;

-					#endif

-				}

-

-				return false;

-			}

-

-		/* Includes: */

-			#include "../USBMode.h"

-			#include "../Events.h"

-			#include "../USBController.h"

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			void USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(void);

-			void USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(void);

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				/** Interrupt service routine handler for the USB controller ISR group. This interrupt routine <b>must</b> be

-				 *  linked to the entire USB controller ISR vector group inside the AVR32's interrupt controller peripheral,

-				 *  using the user application's preferred USB controller driver.

-				 */

-				void USB_GEN_vect(void);

-			#else

-				ISR(USB_GEN_vect);

-			#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBController.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBController.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 9b1f0a9a6..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBController.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,151 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Common USB Controller definitions for all architectures.

- *  \copydetails Group_USBManagement

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USB

- *  \defgroup Group_USBManagement USB Interface Management

- *  \brief USB Controller definitions for general USB controller management.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to the setup and management of the USB interface.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __USBCONTROLLER_H__

-#define __USBCONTROLLER_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "USBMode.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks and Defines: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Defines: */

-		/** \name Endpoint Direction Masks */

-		//@{

-		/** Endpoint direction mask, for masking against endpoint addresses to retrieve the endpoint's

-		 *  direction for comparing with the \c ENDPOINT_DIR_* masks.

-		 */

-		#define ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK                  0x80

-

-		/** Endpoint address direction mask for an OUT direction (Host to Device) endpoint. This may be ORed with

-		 *  the index of the address within a device to obtain the full endpoint address.

-		 */

-		#define ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT                   0x00

-

-		/** Endpoint address direction mask for an IN direction (Device to Host) endpoint. This may be ORed with

-		 *  the index of the address within a device to obtain the full endpoint address.

-		 */

-		#define ENDPOINT_DIR_IN                    0x80

-		//@}

-

-		/** \name Pipe Direction Masks */

-		//@{

-		/** Pipe direction mask, for masking against pipe addresses to retrieve the pipe's

-		 *  direction for comparing with the \c PIPE_DIR_* masks.

-		 */

-		#define PIPE_DIR_MASK                      0x80

-

-		/** Endpoint address direction mask for an OUT direction (Host to Device) endpoint. This may be ORed with

-		 *  the index of the address within a device to obtain the full endpoint address.

-		 */

-		#define PIPE_DIR_OUT                       0x00

-

-		/** Endpoint address direction mask for an IN direction (Device to Host) endpoint. This may be ORed with

-		 *  the index of the address within a device to obtain the full endpoint address.

-		 */

-		#define PIPE_DIR_IN                        0x80

-		//@}

-

-		/** \name Endpoint/Pipe Type Masks */

-		//@{

-		/** Mask for determining the type of an endpoint from an endpoint descriptor. This should then be compared

-		 *  with the \c EP_TYPE_* masks to determine the exact type of the endpoint.

-		 */

-		#define EP_TYPE_MASK                       0x03

-

-		/** Mask for a CONTROL type endpoint or pipe.

-		 *

-		 *  \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions.

-		 */

-		#define EP_TYPE_CONTROL                    0x00

-

-		/** Mask for an ISOCHRONOUS type endpoint or pipe.

-		 *

-		 *  \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions.

-		 */

-		#define EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS                0x01

-

-		/** Mask for a BULK type endpoint or pipe.

-		 *

-		 *  \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions.

-		 */

-		#define EP_TYPE_BULK                       0x02

-

-		/** Mask for an INTERRUPT type endpoint or pipe.

-		 *

-		 *  \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions.

-		 */

-		#define EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT                  0x03

-		//@}

-

-	/* Architecture Includes: */

-		#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)

-			#include "AVR8/USBController_AVR8.h"

-		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)

-			#include "UC3/USBController_UC3.h"

-		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)

-			#include "XMEGA/USBController_XMEGA.h"

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBInterrupt.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBInterrupt.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 583860262..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBInterrupt.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief USB controller interrupt service routine management.

- *

- *  This file contains definitions required for the correct handling of low level USB service routine interrupts

- *  from the USB controller.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-#ifndef __USBINTERRUPT_H__

-#define __USBINTERRUPT_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "USBMode.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Architecture Includes: */

-		#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)

-			#include "AVR8/USBInterrupt_AVR8.h"

-		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)

-			#include "UC3/USBInterrupt_UC3.h"

-		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)

-			#include "XMEGA/USBInterrupt_XMEGA.h"

-		#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBMode.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBMode.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 8a52b092b..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBMode.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,286 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief USB mode and feature support definitions.

- *  \copydetails Group_USBMode

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USB

- *  \defgroup Group_USBMode USB Mode Tokens

- *  \brief USB mode and feature support definitions.

- *

- *  This file defines macros indicating the type of USB controller the library is being compiled for, and its

- *  capabilities. These macros may then be referenced in the user application to selectively enable or disable

- *  code sections depending on if they are defined or not.

- *

- *  After the inclusion of the master USB driver header, one or more of the following tokens may be defined, to

- *  allow the user code to conditionally enable or disable code based on the USB controller family and allowable

- *  USB modes. These tokens may be tested against to eliminate code relating to a USB mode which is not enabled for

- *  the given compilation.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __USBMODE_H__

-#define __USBMODE_H__

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-	#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the Series 2 AVR8 USB controller

-		 *  (i.e. AT90USBxxx2 or ATMEGAxxU2) when defined.

-		 */

-		#define USB_SERIES_2_AVR

-

-		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the Series 4 AVR8 USB controller

-		 *  (i.e. ATMEGAxxU4) when defined.

-		 */

-		#define USB_SERIES_4_AVR

-

-		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the Series 6 AVR8 USB controller

-		 *  (i.e. AT90USBxxx6) when defined.

-		 */

-		#define USB_SERIES_6_AVR

-

-		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the Series 7 AVR8 USB controller

-		 *  (i.e. AT90USBxxx7) when defined.

-		 */

-		#define USB_SERIES_7_AVR

-

-		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the AVR32 UC3A0 Series USB controller

-		 *  (i.e. AT32UC3A0*) when defined.

-		 */

-		#define USB_SERIES_UC3A0_AVR

-

-		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the AVR32 UC3A1 Series USB controller

-		 *  (i.e. AT32UC3A1*) when defined.

-		 */

-		#define USB_SERIES_UC3A1_AVR

-

-		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the AVR32 UC3A3 Series USB controller

-		 *  (i.e. AT32UC3A3*) when defined.

-		 */

-		#define USB_SERIES_UC3A3_AVR

-

-		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the AVR32 UC3A4 Series USB controller

-		 *  (i.e. AT32UC3A4*) when defined.

-		 */

-		#define USB_SERIES_UC3A4_AVR

-		

-		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the AVR32 UC3B0 Series USB controller

-		 *  (i.e. AT32UC3B0*) when defined.

-		 */

-		#define USB_SERIES_UC3B0_AVR

-

-		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the AVR32 UC3B1 Series USB controller

-		 *  (i.e. AT32UC3B1*) when defined.

-		 */

-		#define USB_SERIES_UC3B1_AVR

-

-		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the XMEGA A1U Series USB controller

-		 *  (i.e. ATXMEGA*A1U) when defined.

-		 */

-		#define USB_SERIES_A1U_XMEGA

-

-		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the XMEGA A3U Series USB controller

-		 *  (i.e. ATXMEGA*A3U) when defined.

-		 */

-		#define USB_SERIES_A3U_XMEGA

-

-		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the XMEGA A4U Series USB controller

-		 *  (i.e. ATXMEGA*A4U) when defined.

-		 */

-		#define USB_SERIES_A4U_XMEGA

-

-		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the XMEGA B1 Series USB controller

-		 *  (i.e. ATXMEGA*B1) when defined.

-		 */

-		#define USB_SERIES_B1_XMEGA

-

-		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the XMEGA B3 Series USB controller

-		 *  (i.e. ATXMEGA*B3) when defined.

-		 */

-		#define USB_SERIES_B3_XMEGA

-

-		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the XMEGA C3 Series USB controller

-		 *  (i.e. ATXMEGA*C3) when defined.

-		 */

-		#define USB_SERIES_C3_XMEGA

-

-		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the XMEGA C4 Series USB controller

-		 *  (i.e. ATXMEGA*C4) when defined.

-		 */

-		#define USB_SERIES_C4_XMEGA

-

-		/** Indicates that the target microcontroller and compilation settings allow for the

-		 *  target to be configured in USB Device mode when defined.

-		 */

-		#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE

-

-		/** Indicates that the target microcontroller and compilation settings allow for the

-		 *  target to be configured in USB Host mode when defined.

-		 */

-		#define USB_CAN_BE_HOST

-

-		/** Indicates that the target microcontroller and compilation settings allow for the

-		 *  target to be configured in either USB Device or Host mode when defined.

-		 */

-		#define USB_CAN_BE_BOTH

-	#else

-		/* Macros: */

-			#if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB82__)  || \

-			     defined(__AVR_ATmega32U2__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega16U2__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega8U2__))

-				#define USB_SERIES_2_AVR

-				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE

-			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__))

-				#define USB_SERIES_4_AVR

-				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE

-			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__))

-				#define USB_SERIES_6_AVR

-				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE

-			#elif (defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__))

-				#define USB_SERIES_7_AVR

-				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE

-				#define USB_CAN_BE_HOST

-			#elif (defined(__AVR32_UC3A0512__) || defined(__AVR32_UC3A0256__) || \

-			       defined(__AVR32_UC3A0128__) || defined(__AVR32_UC3A064__))

-				#define USB_SERIES_UC3A0_AVR32

-				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE

-				#define USB_CAN_BE_HOST

-			#elif (defined(__AVR32_UC3A1512__) || defined(__AVR32_UC3A1256__) || \

-			       defined(__AVR32_UC3A1128__) || defined(__AVR32_UC3A164__))

-				#define USB_SERIES_UC3A1_AVR32

-				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE

-				#define USB_CAN_BE_HOST

-			#elif (defined(__AVR32_UC3A3256__) || defined(__AVR32_UC3A3256S__) || \

-			       defined(__AVR32_UC3A3128__) || defined(__AVR32_UC3A3128S__) || \

-			       defined(__AVR32_UC3A364__)  || defined(__AVR32_UC3A364S__))

-				#define USB_SERIES_UC3A3_AVR32

-				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE

-				#define USB_CAN_BE_HOST

-			#elif (defined(__AVR32_UC3A4256__) || defined(__AVR32_UC3A4256S__) || \

-			       defined(__AVR32_UC3A4128__) || defined(__AVR32_UC3A4128S__) || \

-			       defined(__AVR32_UC3A464__)  || defined(__AVR32_UC3A464S__))

-				#define USB_SERIES_UC3A4_AVR32

-				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE

-				#define USB_CAN_BE_HOST

-			#elif (defined(__AVR32_UC3B0512__) || defined(__AVR32_UC3B0256__) || \

-			       defined(__AVR32_UC3B0128__) || defined(__AVR32_UC3B064__))

-				#define USB_SERIES_UC3B0_AVR32

-				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE

-				#define USB_CAN_BE_HOST

-			#elif (defined(__AVR32_UC3B1512__) || defined(__AVR32_UC3B1256__) || \

-			       defined(__AVR32_UC3B1128__) || defined(__AVR32_UC3B164__))

-				#define USB_SERIES_UC3B1_AVR32

-				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE

-				#define USB_CAN_BE_HOST

-			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATxmega128A1U__) || defined(__AVR_ATxmega64A1U__))

-				#define USB_SERIES_A1U_XMEGA

-				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE

-			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATxmega64A3U__) || defined(__AVR_ATxmega128A3U__) || \

-			       defined(__AVR_ATxmega192A3U__) || defined(__AVR_ATxmega256A3U__))

-				#define USB_SERIES_A3U_XMEGA

-				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE

-			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATxmega256A3BU__))

-				#define USB_SERIES_A3BU_XMEGA

-				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE

-			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATxmega16A4U__) || defined(__AVR_ATxmega32A4U__) || \

-			       defined(__AVR_ATxmega64A4U__) || defined(__AVR_ATxmega128A4U__))

-				#define USB_SERIES_A4U_XMEGA

-				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE

-			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATxmega128B1__) || defined(__AVR_ATxmega64B1__))

-				#define USB_SERIES_B1_XMEGA

-				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE

-			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATxmega128B3__) || defined(__AVR_ATxmega64B3__))

-				#define USB_SERIES_B3_XMEGA

-				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE

-			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATxmega128C3__) || defined(__AVR_ATxmega64C3__) || \

-			       defined(__AVR_ATxmega192C3__) || defined(__AVR_ATxmega256C3__) || \

-				   defined(__AVR_ATxmega384C3__))

-				#define USB_SERIES_C3_XMEGA

-				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE

-			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATxmega16C4__) || defined(__AVR_ATxmega32C4__))

-				#define USB_SERIES_C4_XMEGA

-				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE

-			#endif

-

-			#if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) && defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST))

-				#define USB_CAN_BE_BOTH

-			#endif

-

-			#if defined(USB_HOST_ONLY)

-				#if !defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-					#error USB_HOST_ONLY is not available for the currently selected microcontroller model.

-				#else

-					#undef USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE

-					#undef USB_CAN_BE_BOTH

-				#endif

-			#endif

-

-			#if defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)

-				#if !defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-					#error USB_DEVICE_ONLY is not available for the currently selected microcontroller model.

-				#else

-					#undef USB_CAN_BE_HOST

-					#undef USB_CAN_BE_BOTH

-				#endif

-			#endif

-

-			#if (defined(USB_HOST_ONLY) && defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY))

-				#error USB_HOST_ONLY and USB_DEVICE_ONLY are mutually exclusive.

-			#endif

-

-			#if (!defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) && !defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST))

-				#error The currently selected device or architecture is not supported under the USB component of the library.

-			#endif

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBTask.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBTask.c
deleted file mode 100644
index e0a99150a..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBTask.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,91 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USBTASK_C

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "USBTask.h"

-

-volatile bool        USB_IsInitialized;

-USB_Request_Header_t USB_ControlRequest;

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) && !defined(HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR)

-volatile uint8_t     USB_HostState;

-#endif

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) && !defined(DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR)

-volatile uint8_t     USB_DeviceState;

-#endif

-

-void USB_USBTask(void)

-{

-	#if defined(USB_HOST_ONLY)

-		USB_HostTask();

-	#elif defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)

-		USB_DeviceTask();

-	#else

-		if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device)

-		  USB_DeviceTask();

-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-		else if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Host)

-		  USB_HostTask();

-		#endif

-	#endif

-}

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-static void USB_DeviceTask(void)

-{

-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)

-	{

-		uint8_t PrevEndpoint = Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint();

-

-		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP);

-

-		if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())

-		  USB_Device_ProcessControlRequest();

-

-		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(PrevEndpoint);

-	}

-}

-#endif

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-static void USB_HostTask(void)

-{

-	uint8_t PrevPipe = Pipe_GetCurrentPipe();

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-

-	USB_Host_ProcessNextHostState();

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PrevPipe);

-}

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBTask.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBTask.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 531fa6dca..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBTask.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,204 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Main USB service task management.

- *

- *  This file contains the function definitions required for the main USB service task, which must be called

- *  from the user application to ensure that the USB connection to or from a connected USB device is maintained.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-#ifndef __USBTASK_H__

-#define __USBTASK_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "USBMode.h"

-		#include "USBController.h"

-		#include "Events.h"

-		#include "StdRequestType.h"

-		#include "StdDescriptors.h"

-

-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-			#include "DeviceStandardReq.h"

-		#endif

-

-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-			#include "HostStandardReq.h"

-		#endif

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Global Variables: */

-			/** Indicates if the USB interface is currently initialized but not necessarily connected to a host

-			 *  or device (i.e. if \ref USB_Init() has been run). If this is false, all other library globals related

-			 *  to the USB driver are invalid.

-			 *

-			 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually

-			 *             changed in value.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_USBManagement

-			 */

-			extern volatile bool USB_IsInitialized;

-

-			/** Structure containing the last received Control request when in Device mode (for use in user-applications

-			 *  inside of the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event, or for filling up with a control request to

-			 *  issue when in Host mode before calling \ref USB_Host_SendControlRequest().

-			 *

-			 *  \note The contents of this structure is automatically endian-corrected for the current CPU architecture.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_USBManagement

-			 */

-			 extern USB_Request_Header_t USB_ControlRequest;

-

-			#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				#if !defined(HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-					/** Indicates the current host state machine state. When in host mode, this indicates the state

-					 *  via one of the values of the \ref USB_Host_States_t enum values.

-					 *

-					 *  This value should not be altered by the user application as it is handled automatically by the

-					 *  library.

-					 *

-					 *  To reduce program size and speed up checks of this global on the AVR8 architecture, it can be

-					 *  placed into one of the AVR's \c GPIOR hardware registers instead of RAM by defining the

-					 *  \c HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR token to a value between 0 and 2 in the project makefile and passing it to

-					 *  the compiler via the -D switch. When defined, the corresponding GPIOR register should not be used

-					 *  in the user application except implicitly via the library APIs.

-					 *

-					 *  \note This global is only present if the user application can be a USB host.

-					 *

-					 *  \see \ref USB_Host_States_t for a list of possible device states.

-					 *

-					 *  \ingroup Group_Host

-					 */

-					extern volatile uint8_t USB_HostState;

-				#else

-					#define _GET_HOST_GPIOR_NAME2(y) GPIOR ## y

-					#define _GET_HOST_GPIOR_NAME(x)  _GET_HOST_GPIOR_NAME2(x)

-					#define USB_HostState            _GET_HOST_GPIOR_NAME(HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR)

-				#endif

-			#endif

-

-			#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				#if !defined(DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-					/** Indicates the current device state machine state. When in device mode, this indicates the state

-					 *  via one of the values of the \ref USB_Device_States_t enum values.

-					 *

-					 *  This value should not be altered by the user application as it is handled automatically by the

-					 *  library. The only exception to this rule is if the NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT token is used

-					 *  (see \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Connect() and \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect() events).

-					 *

-					 *  To reduce program size and speed up checks of this global on the AVR8 architecture, it can be

-					 *  placed into one of the AVR's \c GPIOR hardware registers instead of RAM by defining the

-					 *  \c DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR token to a value between 0 and 2 in the project makefile and passing it to

-					 *  the compiler via the -D switch. When defined, the corresponding GPIOR register should not be used

-					 *  in the user application except implicitly via the library APIs.

-					 *

-					 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually

-					 *             changed in value except in the circumstances outlined above.

-					 *

-					 *  \note This global is only present if the user application can be a USB device.

-					 *        \n\n

-					 *

-					 *  \see \ref USB_Device_States_t for a list of possible device states.

-					 *

-					 *  \ingroup Group_Device

-					 */

-					extern volatile uint8_t USB_DeviceState;

-				#else

-					#define _GET_DEVICE_GPIOR_NAME2(y) GPIOR ## y

-					#define _GET_DEVICE_GPIOR_NAME(x)  _GET_DEVICE_GPIOR_NAME2(x)

-					#define USB_DeviceState            _GET_DEVICE_GPIOR_NAME(DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR)

-				#endif

-			#endif

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** This is the main USB management task. The USB driver requires this task to be executed

-			 *  continuously when the USB system is active (device attached in host mode, or attached to a host

-			 *  in device mode) in order to manage USB communications. This task may be executed inside an RTOS,

-			 *  fast timer ISR or the main user application loop.

-			 *

-			 *  The USB task must be serviced within 30ms while in device mode, or within 1ms while in host mode.

-			 *  The task may be serviced at all times, or (for minimum CPU consumption):

-			 *

-			 *    - In device mode, it may be disabled at start-up, enabled on the firing of the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Connect()

-			 *      event and disabled again on the firing of the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect() event.

-			 *

-			 *    - In host mode, it may be disabled at start-up, enabled on the firing of the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached()

-			 *      event and disabled again on the firing of the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete() or

-			 *      \ref EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed() events.

-			 *

-			 *  If in device mode (only), the control endpoint can instead be managed via interrupts entirely by the library

-			 *  by defining the INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT token and passing it to the compiler via the -D switch.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref Group_Events for more information on the USB events.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_USBManagement

-			 */

-			void USB_USBTask(void);

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USBTASK_C)

-				#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-					static void USB_HostTask(void);

-				#endif

-

-				#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-					static void USB_DeviceTask(void);

-				#endif

-			#endif

-

-		/* Macros: */

-			#define HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(Duration, NextState) MACROS{ USB_HostState   = HOST_STATE_WaitForDevice; \

-			                                                             WaitMSRemaining = (Duration);               \

-			                                                             PostWaitState   = (NextState);              }MACROE

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Device_XMEGA.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Device_XMEGA.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 47c345900..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Device_XMEGA.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,49 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-#if (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-

-#include "../Device.h"

-

-void USB_Device_SendRemoteWakeup(void)

-{

-	USB.CTRLB |= USB_RWAKEUP_bm;

-}

-

-#endif

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Device_XMEGA.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Device_XMEGA.h
deleted file mode 100644
index aec693a3c..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Device_XMEGA.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,258 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief USB Device definitions for the AVR XMEGA microcontrollers.

- *  \copydetails Group_Device_XMEGA

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_Device

- *  \defgroup Group_Device_XMEGA Device Management (XMEGA)

- *  \brief USB Device definitions for the AVR XMEGA microcontrollers.

- *

- *  Architecture specific USB Device definitions for the Atmel AVR XMEGA microcontrollers.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __USBDEVICE_XMEGA_H__

-#define __USBDEVICE_XMEGA_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "../USBController.h"

-		#include "../StdDescriptors.h"

-		#include "../USBInterrupt.h"

-		#include "../Endpoint.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-		#if (defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS))

-			#error USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS and USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS are mutually exclusive.

-		#endif

-

-		#if (defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS))

-			#error USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS and USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS are mutually exclusive.

-		#endif

-

-		#if (defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS))

-			#error USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS and USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS are mutually exclusive.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** \name USB Device Mode Option Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** Mask for the Options parameter of the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the

-			 *  USB interface should be initialized in low speed (1.5Mb/s) mode.

-			 *

-			 *  \note Low Speed mode is not available on all USB AVR models.

-			 *        \n

-			 *

-			 *  \note Restrictions apply on the number, size and type of endpoints which can be used

-			 *        when running in low speed mode - refer to the USB 2.0 specification.

-			 */

-			#define USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED        (1 << 0)

-

-			#if (F_USB > 6000000)

-				/** Mask for the Options parameter of the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the

-				 *  USB interface should be initialized in full speed (12Mb/s) mode.

-				 */

-				#define USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED   (0 << 0)

-			#endif

-			//@}

-

-			#if (!defined(NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))

-				/** String descriptor index for the device's unique serial number string descriptor within the device.

-				 *  This unique serial number is used by the host to associate resources to the device (such as drivers or COM port

-				 *  number allocations) to a device regardless of the port it is plugged in to on the host. Some microcontrollers contain

-				 *  a unique serial number internally, and setting the device descriptors serial number string index to this value

-				 *  will cause it to use the internal serial number.

-				 *

-				 *  On unsupported devices, this will evaluate to \ref NO_DESCRIPTOR and so will force the host to create a pseudo-serial

-				 *  number for the device.

-				 */

-				#define USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL            0xDC

-

-				/** Length of the device's unique internal serial number, in bits, if present on the selected microcontroller

-				 *  model.

-				 */

-				#define INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS    (8 * (1 + (offsetof(NVM_PROD_SIGNATURES_t, COORDY1) - offsetof(NVM_PROD_SIGNATURES_t, LOTNUM0))))

-

-				/** Start address of the internal serial number, in the appropriate address space, if present on the selected microcontroller

-				 *  model.

-				 */

-				#define INTERNAL_SERIAL_START_ADDRESS  offsetof(NVM_PROD_SIGNATURES_t, LOTNUM0)

-			#else

-				#define USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL            NO_DESCRIPTOR

-

-				#define INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS    0

-				#define INTERNAL_SERIAL_START_ADDRESS  0

-			#endif

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Sends a Remote Wakeup request to the host. This signals to the host that the device should

-			 *  be taken out of suspended mode, and communications should resume.

-			 *

-			 *  Typically, this is implemented so that HID devices (mice, keyboards, etc.) can wake up the

-			 *  host computer when the host has suspended all USB devices to enter a low power state.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function should only be used if the device has indicated to the host that it

-			 *        supports the Remote Wakeup feature in the device descriptors, and should only be

-			 *        issued if the host is currently allowing remote wakeup events from the device (i.e.,

-			 *        the \ref USB_Device_RemoteWakeupEnabled flag is set). When the \c NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP

-			 *        compile time option is used, this function is unavailable.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note The USB clock must be running for this function to operate. If the stack is initialized with

-			 *        the \ref USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL option enabled, the user must ensure that the PLL is running

-			 *        before attempting to call this function.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref Group_StdDescriptors for more information on the RMWAKEUP feature and device descriptors.

-			 */

-			void USB_Device_SendRemoteWakeup(void);

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Returns the current USB frame number, when in device mode. Every millisecond the USB bus is active (i.e. enumerated to a host)

-			 *  the frame number is incremented by one.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Current USB frame number from the USB controller.

-			 */

-			static inline uint16_t USB_Device_GetFrameNumber(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline uint16_t USB_Device_GetFrameNumber(void)

-			{

-				return ((USB_EndpointTable_t*)USB.EPPTR)->FrameNum;

-			}

-

-			#if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS)

-			/** Enables the device mode Start Of Frame events. When enabled, this causes the

-			 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event to fire once per millisecond, synchronized to the USB bus,

-			 *  at the start of each USB frame when enumerated in device mode.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function is not available when the \c NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined.

-			 */

-			static inline void USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents(void)

-			{

-				USB.INTCTRLA |=  USB_SOFIE_bm;

-			}

-

-			/** Disables the device mode Start Of Frame events. When disabled, this stops the firing of the

-			 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event when enumerated in device mode.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function is not available when the \c NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined.

-			 */

-			static inline void USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents(void)

-			{

-				USB.INTCTRLA &= ~USB_SOFIE_bm;

-			}

-			#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			static inline void USB_Device_SetLowSpeed(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Device_SetLowSpeed(void)

-			{

-				USB.CTRLA &= ~USB_SPEED_bm;

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_Device_SetFullSpeed(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Device_SetFullSpeed(void)

-			{

-				USB.CTRLA |=  USB_SPEED_bm;

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_Device_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Device_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address)

-			{

-				USB.ADDR = Address;

-			}

-

-			static inline bool USB_Device_IsAddressSet(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline bool USB_Device_IsAddressSet(void)

-			{

-				return ((USB.ADDR != 0) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_Device_GetSerialString(uint16_t* const UnicodeString) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			static inline void USB_Device_GetSerialString(uint16_t* const UnicodeString)

-			{

-				uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask();

-				GlobalInterruptDisable();

-

-				uint8_t SigReadAddress = INTERNAL_SERIAL_START_ADDRESS;

-

-				for (uint8_t SerialCharNum = 0; SerialCharNum < (INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS / 4); SerialCharNum++)

-				{

-					uint8_t SerialByte;

-

-					NVM.CMD    = NVM_CMD_READ_CALIB_ROW_gc;

-					SerialByte = pgm_read_byte(SigReadAddress);

-					NVM.CMD    = 0;

-

-					if (SerialCharNum & 0x01)

-					{

-						SerialByte >>= 4;

-						SigReadAddress++;

-					}

-

-					SerialByte &= 0x0F;

-

-					UnicodeString[SerialCharNum] = cpu_to_le16((SerialByte >= 10) ?

-															   (('A' - 10) + SerialByte) : ('0' + SerialByte));

-				}

-

-				SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt);

-			}

-

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/EndpointStream_XMEGA.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/EndpointStream_XMEGA.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 0a1a77505..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/EndpointStream_XMEGA.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,275 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-#if (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-

-#include "EndpointStream_XMEGA.h"

-

-#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)

-uint8_t Endpoint_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length,

-                                uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)

-{

-	uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-	uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;

-	

-	if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))

-	  return ErrorCode;

-	  

-	if (BytesProcessed != NULL)

-	  Length -= *BytesProcessed;

-

-	while (Length)

-	{

-		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-		{

-			Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-

-			if (BytesProcessed != NULL)

-			{

-				*BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;

-				return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;

-			}

-

-			if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))

-			  return ErrorCode;

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			Endpoint_Discard_8();

-

-			Length--;

-			BytesInTransfer++;

-		}

-	}

-	

-	return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-uint8_t Endpoint_Null_Stream(uint16_t Length,

-                             uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)

-{

-	uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-	uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;

-	

-	if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))

-	  return ErrorCode;

-	  

-	if (BytesProcessed != NULL)

-	  Length -= *BytesProcessed;

-

-	while (Length)

-	{

-		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-		{

-			Endpoint_ClearIN();

-

-			if (BytesProcessed != NULL)

-			{

-				*BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;

-				return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;

-			}

-

-			if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))

-			  return ErrorCode;

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			Endpoint_Write_8(0);

-

-			Length--;

-			BytesInTransfer++;

-		}

-	}

-	

-	return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-/* The following abuses the C preprocessor in order to copy-paste common code with slight alterations,

- * so that the code needs to be written once. It is a crude form of templating to reduce code maintenance. */

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*

-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(*BufferPtr)

-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*

-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(*BufferPtr)

-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*

-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Endpoint_Read_8()

-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Stream_BE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*

-#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Endpoint_Read_8()

-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"

-

-#if defined(ARCH_HAS_FLASH_ADDRESS_SPACE)

-	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_PStream_LE

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*

-	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount

-	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(pgm_read_byte(BufferPtr))

-	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"

-

-	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_PStream_BE

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*

-	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount

-	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(pgm_read_byte(BufferPtr))

-	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"

-#endif

-

-#if defined(ARCH_HAS_EEPROM_ADDRESS_SPACE)

-	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_EStream_LE

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*

-	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount

-	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(eeprom_read_byte(BufferPtr))

-	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"

-

-	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_EStream_BE

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*

-	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount

-	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(eeprom_read_byte(BufferPtr))

-	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"

-

-	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_EStream_LE

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*

-	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount

-	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_update_byte(BufferPtr, Endpoint_Read_8())

-	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"

-

-	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_EStream_BE

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*

-	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount

-	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_update_byte(BufferPtr, Endpoint_Read_8())

-	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"

-#endif

-

-#endif

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(*BufferPtr)

-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_BE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(*BufferPtr)

-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Endpoint_Read_8()

-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"

-

-#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_BE

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount

-#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Endpoint_Read_8()

-#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"

-

-#if defined(ARCH_HAS_FLASH_ADDRESS_SPACE)

-	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_LE

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount

-	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(pgm_read_byte(BufferPtr))

-	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"

-

-	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_BE

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount

-	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(pgm_read_byte(BufferPtr))

-	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"

-#endif

-

-#if defined(ARCH_HAS_EEPROM_ADDRESS_SPACE)

-	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_LE

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount

-	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(eeprom_read_byte(BufferPtr))

-	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"

-

-	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_BE

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount

-	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(eeprom_read_byte(BufferPtr))

-	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"

-

-	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Control_EStream_LE

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount

-	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_update_byte(BufferPtr, Endpoint_Read_8())

-	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"

-

-	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Control_EStream_BE

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)

-	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount

-	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_update_byte(BufferPtr, Endpoint_Read_8())

-	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"

-#endif

-

-#endif

-

-#endif

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/EndpointStream_XMEGA.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/EndpointStream_XMEGA.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 4d2a9f573..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/EndpointStream_XMEGA.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,648 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Endpoint data stream transmission and reception management for the AVR XMEGA microcontrollers.

- *  \copydetails Group_EndpointStreamRW_XMEGA

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW

- *  \defgroup Group_EndpointStreamRW_XMEGA Read/Write of Multi-Byte Streams (XMEGA)

- *  \brief Endpoint data stream transmission and reception management for the Atmel AVR XMEGA architecture.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of data streams from

- *  and to endpoints.

- *

- *  @{

- */ 

-

-#ifndef __ENDPOINT_STREAM_XMEGA_H__

-#define __ENDPOINT_STREAM_XMEGA_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "../USBMode.h"		

-		#include "../USBTask.h"

-		

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** \name Stream functions for null data */

-			//@{

-

-			/** Reads and discards the given number of bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank,

-			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically

-			 *  discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the user is responsible for manually

-			 *  discarding the last packet from the host via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,

-			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid

-			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time

-			 *  the endpoint bank becomes empty while there is still data to process (and after the current

-			 *  packet has been acknowledged) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the total number

-			 *  of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of

-			 *  \ref ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed

-			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters

-			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;

-			 *  

-			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Discard_Stream(512, NULL)) != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;

-			 *  

-			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;

-			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Discard_Stream(512, &BytesProcessed)) == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required

-			 *  }

-			 *  

-			 *  if (ErrorCode != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to discard via the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current

-			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length,

-			                                uint16_t* const BytesProcessed);

-

-			/** Writes a given number of zeroed bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank, sending

-			 *  full packets to the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically sent once the 

-			 *  remaining bytes have been written; the user is responsible for manually sending the last

-			 *  packet to the host via the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,

-			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid

-			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time

-			 *  the endpoint bank becomes full while there is still data to process (and after the current

-			 *  packet transmission has been initiated) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the

-			 *  total number of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of

-			 *  \ref ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed

-			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters

-			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;

-			 *  

-			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Null_Stream(512, NULL)) != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;

-			 *  

-			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;

-			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Null_Stream(512, &BytesProcessed)) == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required

-			 *  }

-			 *  

-			 *  if (ErrorCode != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of zero bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current

-			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Null_Stream(uint16_t Length,

-			                             uint16_t* const BytesProcessed);

-

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name Stream functions for RAM source/destination data */

-			//@{

-		

-			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,

-			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;

-			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the

-			 *  \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,

-			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid

-			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time

-			 *  the endpoint bank becomes full while there is still data to process (and after the current

-			 *  packet transmission has been initiated) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the

-			 *  total number of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of

-			 *  \ref ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed

-			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters

-			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t DataStream[512];

-			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;

-			 *  

-			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),

-			 *                                            NULL)) != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t  DataStream[512];

-			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;

-			 *  

-			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;

-			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),

-			 *                                               &BytesProcessed)) == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required

-			 *  }

-			 *  

-			 *  if (ErrorCode != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current

-			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                                 uint16_t Length,

-			                                 uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,

-			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;

-			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the

-			 *  \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current

-			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                                 uint16_t Length,

-			                                 uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			

-			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,

-			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically

-			 *  discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the user is responsible for manually

-			 *  discarding the last packet from the host via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,

-			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid

-			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time

-			 *  the endpoint bank becomes empty while there is still data to process (and after the current

-			 *  packet has been acknowledged) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the total number

-			 *  of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of

-			 *  \ref ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed

-			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters

-			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t DataStream[512];

-			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;

-			 *  

-			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),

-			 *                                           NULL)) != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>

-			 *  \code

-			 *  uint8_t  DataStream[512];

-			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;

-			 *  

-			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;

-			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),

-			 *                                              &BytesProcessed)) == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required

-			 *  }

-			 *  

-			 *  if (ErrorCode != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)

-			 *  {

-			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here

-			 *  }

-			 *  \endcode

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.

-			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current

-			 *                              transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(void* const Buffer,

-			                                uint16_t Length,

-			                                uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,

-			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically

-			 *  discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the user is responsible for manually

-			 *  discarding the last packet from the host via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.

-			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current

-			 *                              transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Stream_BE(void* const Buffer,

-			                                uint16_t Length,

-			                                uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the CONTROL type endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,

-			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The host OUT acknowledgement is not automatically cleared

-			 *  in both failure and success states; the user is responsible for manually clearing the status OUT packet

-			 *  to finalize the transfer's status stage via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt

-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained

-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                                         uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the CONTROL type endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,

-			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The host OUT acknowledgement is not automatically cleared

-			 *  in both failure and success states; the user is responsible for manually clearing the status OUT packet

-			 *  to finalize the transfer's status stage via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt

-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained

-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_BE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                                         uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the CONTROL endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,

-			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The device IN acknowledgement is not

-			 *  automatically sent after success or failure states; the user is responsible for manually sending the

-			 *  status IN packet to finalize the transfer's status stage via the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt

-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained

-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.

-			 *  \param[in]  Length  Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(void* const Buffer,

-			                                        uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the CONTROL endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,

-			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The device IN acknowledgement is not

-			 *  automatically sent after success or failure states; the user is responsible for manually sending the

-			 *  status IN packet to finalize the transfer's status stage via the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt

-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained

-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.

-			 *  \param[in]  Length  Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_BE(void* const Buffer,

-			                                        uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name Stream functions for EEPROM source/destination data */

-			//@{

-

-			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current

-			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_EStream_LE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                                  uint16_t Length,

-			                                  uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current

-			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_EStream_BE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                                  uint16_t Length,

-			                                  uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** EEPROM buffer destination version of \ref Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to, located in EEPROM memory space.

-			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current

-			 *                              transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_EStream_LE(void* const Buffer,

-			                                 uint16_t Length,

-			                                 uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** EEPROM buffer destination version of \ref Endpoint_Read_Stream_BE().

-			 *

-			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to, located in EEPROM memory space.

-			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current

-			 *                              transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_EStream_BE(void* const Buffer,

-			                                 uint16_t Length,

-			                                 uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** EEPROM buffer source version of Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt

-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained

-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_LE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                                          uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_BE().

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt

-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained

-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_BE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                                          uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE().

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt

-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained

-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.

-			 *  \param[in]  Length  Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_EStream_LE(void* const Buffer,

-			                                         uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_BE().

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt

-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained

-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.

-			 *  \param[in]  Length  Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_EStream_BE(void* const Buffer,

-			                                         uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			//@}

-

-			/** \name Stream functions for PROGMEM source/destination data */

-			//@{

-

-			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE().

-			 *

-			 *  \pre The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current

-			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_PStream_LE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                                  uint16_t Length,

-			                                  uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE().

-			 *

-			 *  \pre The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.

-			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current

-			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_PStream_BE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                                  uint16_t Length,

-			                                  uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE().

-			 *

-			 *  \pre The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt

-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained

-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_LE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                                          uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-

-			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_BE().

-			 *

-			 *  \pre The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This function automatically clears the control transfer's status stage. Do not manually attempt

-			 *        to clear the status stage when using this routine in a control transaction.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained

-			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.

-			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_BE(const void* const Buffer,

-			                                          uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);

-			//@}

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-		

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Endpoint_XMEGA.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Endpoint_XMEGA.c
deleted file mode 100644
index b105e18c3..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Endpoint_XMEGA.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,168 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-#if (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-

-#include "../Endpoint.h"

-

-#if !defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE)

-uint8_t USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP_DEFAULT_SIZE;

-#endif

-

-Endpoint_FIFOPair_t       USB_Endpoint_FIFOs[ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS];

-

-volatile uint8_t          USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint;

-volatile USB_EP_t*        USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle;

-volatile Endpoint_FIFO_t* USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO;

-

-bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(const USB_Endpoint_Table_t* const Table,

-                                     const uint8_t Entries)

-{

-	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < Entries; i++)

-	{

-		if (!(Table[i].Address))

-		  continue;

-	

-		if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(Table[i].Address, Table[i].Type, Table[i].Size, Table[i].Banks)))

-		{

-			return false;

-		}

-	}

-	

-	return true;

-}

-

-bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_PRV(const uint8_t Address,

-                                    const uint8_t Config,

-                                    const uint8_t Size)

-{

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(Address);

-

-	USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->CTRL    = 0;

-	USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->STATUS  = (Address & ENDPOINT_DIR_IN) ? USB_EP_BUSNACK0_bm : 0;

-	USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->CTRL    = Config;

-	USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->CNT     = 0;

-	USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->DATAPTR = (intptr_t)USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Data;

-

-	USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Length    = (Address & ENDPOINT_DIR_IN) ? Size : 0;

-	USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Position  = 0;

-

-	return true;

-}

-

-void Endpoint_ClearEndpoints(void)

-{

-	for (uint8_t EPNum = 0; EPNum < ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS; EPNum++)

-	{

-		((USB_EndpointTable_t*)USB.EPPTR)->Endpoints[EPNum].IN.CTRL  = 0;

-		((USB_EndpointTable_t*)USB.EPPTR)->Endpoints[EPNum].OUT.CTRL = 0;

-	}

-}

-

-void Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(void)

-{

-	if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST)

-	{

-		while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))

-		{

-			if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)

-			  return;

-		}

-

-		Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-	}

-	else

-	{

-		while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))

-		{

-			if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)

-			  return;

-		}

-

-		Endpoint_ClearIN();

-	}

-}

-

-#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)

-uint8_t Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(void)

-{

-	#if (USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS < 0xFF)

-	uint8_t  TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;

-	#else

-	uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;

-	#endif

-

-	uint16_t PreviousFrameNumber = USB_Device_GetFrameNumber();

-

-	for (;;)

-	{

-		if (Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection() == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)

-		{

-			if (Endpoint_IsINReady())

-			  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())

-			  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;

-		}

-

-		uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;

-

-		if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)

-		  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;

-		else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)

-		  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_BusSuspended;

-		else if (Endpoint_IsStalled())

-		  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_EndpointStalled;

-

-		uint16_t CurrentFrameNumber = USB_Device_GetFrameNumber();

-

-		if (CurrentFrameNumber != PreviousFrameNumber)

-		{

-			PreviousFrameNumber = CurrentFrameNumber;

-

-			if (!(TimeoutMSRem--))

-			  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_Timeout;

-		}

-	}

-}

-#endif

-

-#endif

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Endpoint_XMEGA.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Endpoint_XMEGA.h
deleted file mode 100644
index a4118889b..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Endpoint_XMEGA.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,777 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief USB Endpoint definitions for the AVR XMEGA microcontrollers.

- *  \copydetails Group_EndpointManagement_XMEGA

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointRW

- *  \defgroup Group_EndpointRW_XMEGA Endpoint Data Reading and Writing (XMEGA)

- *  \brief Endpoint data read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR XMEGA architecture.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing from and to endpoints.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW

- *  \defgroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA Read/Write of Primitive Data Types (XMEGA)

- *  \brief Endpoint primitive read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR XMEGA architecture.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of primitive data types

- *  from and to endpoints.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement

- *  \defgroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA Endpoint Packet Management (XMEGA)

- *  \brief Endpoint packet management definitions for the Atmel AVR XMEGA architecture.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to packet management of endpoints.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_EndpointManagement

- *  \defgroup Group_EndpointManagement_XMEGA Endpoint Management (XMEGA)

- *  \brief Endpoint management definitions for the Atmel AVR XMEGA architecture.

- *

- *  Functions, macros and enums related to endpoint management when in USB Device mode. This

- *  module contains the endpoint management macros, as well as endpoint interrupt and data

- *  send/receive functions for various data types.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __ENDPOINT_XMEGA_H__

-#define __ENDPOINT_XMEGA_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "../USBTask.h"

-		#include "../USBInterrupt.h"

-		#include "../USBController.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			#if (!defined(MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX) && !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				/** Total number of endpoints (including the default control endpoint at address 0) which may

-				 *  be used in the device. Different USB AVR models support different amounts of endpoints,

-				 *  this value reflects the maximum number of endpoints for the currently selected AVR model.

-				 */

-				#define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS            16

-			#else

-				#if defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)

-					#define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS        1

-				#else

-					#define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS        (MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX + 1)

-				#endif

-			#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Type Defines: */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				uint8_t Data[64];

-

-				uint8_t Length;

-				uint8_t Position;

-			} Endpoint_FIFO_t;

-

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				Endpoint_FIFO_t OUT;

-				Endpoint_FIFO_t IN;

-			} Endpoint_FIFOPair_t;

-

-		/* External Variables: */

-			extern Endpoint_FIFOPair_t       USB_Endpoint_FIFOs[ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS];

-			extern volatile uint8_t          USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint;

-			extern volatile USB_EP_t*        USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle;

-			extern volatile Endpoint_FIFO_t* USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO;

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST

-			                                                                       ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes)

-			{

-				uint8_t  MaskVal    = 0;

-				uint16_t CheckBytes = 8;

-

-				while (CheckBytes < Bytes)

-				{

-					MaskVal++;

-					CheckBytes <<= 1;

-				}

-

-				return (MaskVal << USB_EP_BUFSIZE_gp);

-			}

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_PRV(const uint8_t Address,

-			                                    const uint8_t Config,

-			                                    const uint8_t Size);

-			void Endpoint_ClearEndpoints(void);

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			#if (!defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))

-				/** Default size of the default control endpoint's bank, until altered by the control endpoint bank size

-				 *  value in the device descriptor. Not available if the \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token is defined.

-				 */

-				#define ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP_DEFAULT_SIZE     8

-			#endif

-

-		/* Enums: */

-			/** Enum for the possible error return codes of the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady() function.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointRW_XMEGA

-			 */

-			enum Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t

-			{

-				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError                 = 0, /**< Endpoint is ready for next packet, no error. */

-				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_EndpointStalled         = 1, /**< The endpoint was stalled during the stream

-				                                                 *   transfer by the host or device.

-				                                                 */

-				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected      = 2,	/**< Device was disconnected from the host while

-				                                                 *   waiting for the endpoint to become ready.

-				                                                 */

-				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_BusSuspended            = 3, /**< The USB bus has been suspended by the host and

-				                                                 *   no USB endpoint traffic can occur until the bus

-				                                                 *   has resumed.

-				                                                 */

-				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_Timeout                 = 4, /**< The host failed to accept or send the next packet

-				                                                 *   within the software timeout period set by the

-				                                                 *   \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro.

-				                                                 */

-			};

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Selects the given endpoint address.

-			 *

-			 *  Any endpoint operations which do not require the endpoint address to be indicated will operate on

-			 *  the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Address  Endpoint address to select.

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(const uint8_t Address);

-			static inline void Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(const uint8_t Address)

-			{

-				uint8_t EndpointNumber = (Address & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK);

-

-				USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint = Address;

-

-				if (Address & ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)

-				{

-					USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO   = &USB_Endpoint_FIFOs[EndpointNumber].IN;

-					USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle = &((USB_EndpointTable_t*)USB.EPPTR)->Endpoints[EndpointNumber].IN;

-				}

-				else

-				{

-					USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO   = &USB_Endpoint_FIFOs[EndpointNumber].OUT;

-					USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle = &((USB_EndpointTable_t*)USB.EPPTR)->Endpoints[EndpointNumber].OUT;

-				}

-			}

-

-			/** Configures the specified endpoint address with the given endpoint type, direction, bank size

-			 *  and banking mode. Once configured, the endpoint may be read from or written to, depending

-			 *  on its direction.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Address    Endpoint address to configure.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Type       Type of endpoint to configure, a \c EP_TYPE_* mask. Not all endpoint types

-			 *                        are available on Low Speed USB devices - refer to the USB 2.0 specification.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Size       Size of the endpoint's bank, where packets are stored before they are transmitted

-			 *                        to the USB host, or after they have been received from the USB host (depending on

-			 *                        the endpoint's data direction). The bank size must indicate the maximum packet size

-			 *                        that the endpoint can handle.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Banks      Number of hardware banks to use for the endpoint being configured.

-			 *

-			 *  \note The default control endpoint should not be manually configured by the user application, as

-			 *        it is automatically configured by the library internally.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine will automatically select the specified endpoint.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the configuration succeeded, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(const uint8_t Address,

-			                                              const uint8_t Type,

-			                                              const uint16_t Size,

-			                                              const uint8_t Banks) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(const uint8_t Address,

-			                                              const uint8_t Type,

-			                                              const uint16_t Size,

-			                                              const uint8_t Banks)

-			{

-				uint8_t EPConfigMask = (USB_EP_INTDSBL_bm | ((Banks > 1) ? USB_EP_PINGPONG_bm : 0) | Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(Size));

-

-				if ((Address & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK) >= ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS)

-				  return false;

-

-				// TODO - Fix once limitations are lifted

-				EPConfigMask &= ~USB_EP_PINGPONG_bm;

-				if (Size > 64)

-				  return false;

-

-				switch (Type)

-				{

-					case EP_TYPE_CONTROL:

-						EPConfigMask |= USB_EP_TYPE_CONTROL_gc;

-						break;

-					case EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS:

-						EPConfigMask |= USB_EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS_gc;

-						break;

-					default:

-						EPConfigMask |= USB_EP_TYPE_BULK_gc;

-						break;

-				}

-

-				if (Type == EP_TYPE_CONTROL)

-				  Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_PRV(Address ^ ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, EPConfigMask, Size);

-

-				return Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_PRV(Address, EPConfigMask, Size);

-			}

-

-			/** Indicates the number of bytes currently stored in the current endpoint's selected bank.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointRW_XMEGA

-			 *

-			 *  \return Total number of bytes in the currently selected Endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(void)

-			{

-				if (USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint & ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)

-				  return USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Position;

-				else

-				  return (USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Length - USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Position);

-			}

-

-			/** Get the endpoint address of the currently selected endpoint. This is typically used to save

-			 *  the currently selected endpoint so that it can be restored after another endpoint has been

-			 *  manipulated.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Index of the currently selected endpoint.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint(void)

-			{

-				return USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint;

-			}

-

-			/** Resets the endpoint bank FIFO. This clears all the endpoint banks and resets the USB controller's

-			 *  data In and Out pointers to the bank's contents.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Address  Endpoint address whose FIFO buffers are to be reset.

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(const uint8_t Address)

-			{

-				if (Address & ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)

-				  USB_Endpoint_FIFOs[Address & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK].IN.Position  = 0;

-				else

-				  USB_Endpoint_FIFOs[Address & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK].OUT.Position = 0;

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is enabled, but not necessarily configured.

-			 *

-			 * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint is enabled, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsEnabled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsEnabled(void)

-			{

-				return true;

-			}

-

-			/** Aborts all pending IN transactions on the currently selected endpoint, once the bank

-			 *  has been queued for transmission to the host via \ref Endpoint_ClearIN(). This function

-			 *  will terminate all queued transactions, resetting the endpoint banks ready for a new

-			 *  packet.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_AbortPendingIN(void)

-			{

-				USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->STATUS |= USB_EP_BUSNACK0_bm;

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint may be read from (if data is waiting in the endpoint

-			 *  bank and the endpoint is an OUT direction, or if the bank is not yet full if the endpoint is an IN

-			 *  direction). This function will return false if an error has occurred in the endpoint, if the endpoint

-			 *  is an OUT direction and no packet (or an empty packet) has been received, or if the endpoint is an IN

-			 *  direction and the endpoint bank is full.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint may be read from or written to, depending

-			 *          on its direction.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed(void)

-			{

-				return (USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Position < USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Length);

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is configured.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint has been configured, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsConfigured(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsConfigured(void)

-			{

-				return ((USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->CTRL & USB_EP_TYPE_gm) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the selected IN endpoint is ready for a new packet to be sent to the host.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the current endpoint is ready for an IN packet, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsINReady(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsINReady(void)

-			{

-				Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint | ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);

-

-				return ((USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->STATUS & USB_EP_BUSNACK0_bm) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the selected OUT endpoint has received new packet from the host.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if current endpoint is has received an OUT packet, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsOUTReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsOUTReceived(void)

-			{

-				Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint & ~ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);

-

-				if (USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->STATUS & USB_EP_TRNCOMPL0_bm)

-				{

-					USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Length = USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->CNT;

-					return true;

-				}

-

-				return false;

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the current CONTROL type endpoint has received a SETUP packet.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the selected endpoint has received a SETUP packet, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived(void)

-			{

-				Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint & ~ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);

-

-				if (USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->STATUS & USB_EP_SETUP_bm)

-				{

-					USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Length = USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->CNT;

-					return true;

-				}

-

-				return false;

-			}

-

-			/** Clears a received SETUP packet on the currently selected CONTROL type endpoint, freeing up the

-			 *  endpoint for the next packet.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA

-			 *

-			 *  \note This is not applicable for non CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_ClearSETUP(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_ClearSETUP(void)

-			{

-				Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint & ~ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);

-				USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->STATUS &= ~(USB_EP_SETUP_bm | USB_EP_TRNCOMPL0_bm | USB_EP_BUSNACK0_bm | USB_EP_OVF_bm);

-				USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->STATUS |= USB_EP_TOGGLE_bm;

-				USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Position  = 0;

-

-				Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint | ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);

-				USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->STATUS |= USB_EP_TOGGLE_bm;

-				USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Position  = 0;

-			}

-

-			/** Sends an IN packet to the host on the currently selected endpoint, freeing up the endpoint for the

-			 *  next packet and switching to the alternative endpoint bank if double banked.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_ClearIN(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_ClearIN(void)

-			{

-				USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->CNT     = USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Position;

-				USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->STATUS &= ~(USB_EP_TRNCOMPL0_bm | USB_EP_BUSNACK0_bm | USB_EP_OVF_bm);

-				USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Position  = 0;

-			}

-

-			/** Acknowledges an OUT packet to the host on the currently selected endpoint, freeing up the endpoint

-			 *  for the next packet and switching to the alternative endpoint bank if double banked.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_ClearOUT(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_ClearOUT(void)

-			{

-				USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->STATUS &= ~(USB_EP_TRNCOMPL0_bm | USB_EP_BUSNACK0_bm | USB_EP_OVF_bm);

-				USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Position  = 0;

-			}

-

-			/** Stalls the current endpoint, indicating to the host that a logical problem occurred with the

-			 *  indicated endpoint and that the current transfer sequence should be aborted. This provides a

-			 *  way for devices to indicate invalid commands to the host so that the current transfer can be

-			 *  aborted and the host can begin its own recovery sequence.

-			 *

-			 *  The currently selected endpoint remains stalled until either the \ref Endpoint_ClearStall() macro

-			 *  is called, or the host issues a CLEAR FEATURE request to the device for the currently selected

-			 *  endpoint.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_StallTransaction(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_StallTransaction(void)

-			{

-				USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->CTRL |= USB_EP_STALL_bm;

-

-				if ((USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->CTRL & USB_EP_TYPE_gm) == USB_EP_TYPE_CONTROL_gc)

-				{

-					Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint ^ ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);

-					USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->CTRL |= USB_EP_STALL_bm;

-				}

-			}

-

-			/** Clears the STALL condition on the currently selected endpoint.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_ClearStall(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_ClearStall(void)

-			{

-				USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->CTRL &= ~USB_EP_STALL_bm;

-			}

-

-			/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is stalled, false otherwise.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint is stalled, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsStalled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool Endpoint_IsStalled(void)

-			{

-				return ((USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->CTRL & USB_EP_STALL_bm) ? true : false);

-			}

-

-			/** Resets the data toggle of the currently selected endpoint. */

-			static inline void Endpoint_ResetDataToggle(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_ResetDataToggle(void)

-			{

-				USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->STATUS &= ~USB_EP_TOGGLE_bm;

-			}

-

-			/** Determines the currently selected endpoint's direction.

-			 *

-			 *  \return The currently selected endpoint's direction, as a \c ENDPOINT_DIR_* mask.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection(void)

-			{

-				return (USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint & ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);

-			}

-

-			/** Reads one byte from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next byte in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_Read_8(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_Read_8(void)

-			{

-				return USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Data[USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Position++];

-			}

-

-			/** Writes one byte to the currently selected endpoint's bank, for IN direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write into the the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_8(const uint8_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_8(const uint8_t Data)

-			{

-				USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Data[USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Position++] = Data;

-			}

-

-			/** Discards one byte from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_8(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_8(void)

-			{

-				USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Position++;

-			}

-

-			/** Reads two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for OUT

-			 *  direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next two bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_LE(void)

-			{

-				uint16_t Byte0 = Endpoint_Read_8();

-				uint16_t Byte1 = Endpoint_Read_8();

-

-				return ((Byte1 << 8) | Byte0);

-			}

-

-			/** Reads two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for OUT

-			 *  direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next two bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_BE(void)

-			{

-				uint16_t Byte0 = Endpoint_Read_8();

-				uint16_t Byte1 = Endpoint_Read_8();

-

-				return ((Byte0 << 8) | Byte1);

-			}

-

-			/** Writes two bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for IN

-			 *  direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data)

-			{

-				Endpoint_Write_8(Data & 0xFF);

-				Endpoint_Write_8(Data >> 8);

-			}

-

-			/** Writes two bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for IN

-			 *  direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data)

-			{

-				Endpoint_Write_8(Data >> 8);

-				Endpoint_Write_8(Data & 0xFF);

-			}

-

-			/** Discards two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_16(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_16(void)

-			{

-				Endpoint_Discard_8();

-				Endpoint_Discard_8();

-			}

-

-			/** Reads four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for OUT

-			 *  direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next four bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_LE(void)

-			{

-				uint32_t Byte0 = Endpoint_Read_8();

-				uint32_t Byte1 = Endpoint_Read_8();

-				uint32_t Byte2 = Endpoint_Read_8();

-				uint32_t Byte3 = Endpoint_Read_8();

-

-				return ((Byte3 << 24) | (Byte2 << 16) | (Byte1 << 8) | Byte0);

-			}

-

-			/** Reads four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for OUT

-			 *  direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA

-			 *

-			 *  \return Next four bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_BE(void)

-			{

-				uint32_t Byte0 = Endpoint_Read_8();

-				uint32_t Byte1 = Endpoint_Read_8();

-				uint32_t Byte2 = Endpoint_Read_8();

-				uint32_t Byte3 = Endpoint_Read_8();

-

-				return ((Byte0 << 24) | (Byte1 << 16) | (Byte2 << 8) | Byte3);

-			}

-

-			/** Writes four bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for IN

-			 *  direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data)

-			{

-				Endpoint_Write_8(Data & 0xFF);

-				Endpoint_Write_8(Data >> 8);

-				Endpoint_Write_8(Data >> 16);

-				Endpoint_Write_8(Data >> 24);

-			}

-

-			/** Writes four bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for IN

-			 *  direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data)

-			{

-				Endpoint_Write_8(Data >> 24);

-				Endpoint_Write_8(Data >> 16);

-				Endpoint_Write_8(Data >> 8);

-				Endpoint_Write_8(Data & 0xFF);

-			}

-

-			/** Discards four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA

-			 */

-			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_32(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_32(void)

-			{

-				Endpoint_Discard_8();

-				Endpoint_Discard_8();

-				Endpoint_Discard_8();

-				Endpoint_Discard_8();

-			}

-

-		/* External Variables: */

-			/** Global indicating the maximum packet size of the default control endpoint located at address

-			 *  0 in the device. This value is set to the value indicated in the device descriptor in the user

-			 *  project once the USB interface is initialized into device mode.

-			 *

-			 *  If space is an issue, it is possible to fix this to a static value by defining the control

-			 *  endpoint size in the \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token passed to the compiler in the makefile

-			 *  via the -D switch. When a fixed control endpoint size is used, the size is no longer dynamically

-			 *  read from the descriptors at runtime and instead fixed to the given value. When used, it is

-			 *  important that the descriptor control endpoint size value matches the size given as the

-			 *  \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token - it is recommended that the \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token

-			 *  be used in the device descriptors to ensure this.

-			 *

-			 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually

-			 *             changed in value.

-			 */

-			#if (!defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))

-				extern uint8_t USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize;

-			#else

-				#define USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE

-			#endif

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Configures a table of endpoint descriptions, in sequence. This function can be used to configure multiple

-			 *  endpoints at the same time.

-			 *

-			 *  \note Endpoints with a zero address will be ignored, thus this function cannot be used to configure the

-			 *        control endpoint.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Table    Pointer to a table of endpoint descriptions.

-			 *  \param[in] Entries  Number of entries in the endpoint table to configure.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if all endpoints configured successfully, \c false otherwise.

-			 */

-			bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(const USB_Endpoint_Table_t* const Table,

-			                                     const uint8_t Entries);

-

-			/** Completes the status stage of a control transfer on a CONTROL type endpoint automatically,

-			 *  with respect to the data direction. This is a convenience function which can be used to

-			 *  simplify user control request handling.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should not be called on non CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 */

-			void Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(void);

-

-			/** Spin-loops until the currently selected non-control endpoint is ready for the next packet of data

-			 *  to be read or written to it.

-			 *

-			 *  \note This routine should not be called on CONTROL type endpoints.

-			 *

-			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointRW_XMEGA

-			 *

-			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.

-			 */

-			uint8_t Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(void);

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Host_XMEGA.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Host_XMEGA.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 39d920afe..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Host_XMEGA.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-#if (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-

-#endif

-

-#endif

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/PipeStream_XMEGA.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/PipeStream_XMEGA.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 39d920afe..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/PipeStream_XMEGA.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-#if (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-

-#endif

-

-#endif

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Pipe_XMEGA.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Pipe_XMEGA.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 6106cb581..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Pipe_XMEGA.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,37 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../USBMode.h"

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 35776410e..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,87 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#if defined(TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME)

-

-// cppcheck-suppress unusedFunction

-uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (void* const Buffer,

-                            uint16_t Length)

-{

-	uint8_t* DataStream = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));

-

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint & ~ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);

-

-	if (!(Length))

-	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-

-	while (Length)

-	{

-		uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;

-

-		if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)

-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-		else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)

-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;

-		else if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())

-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_HostAborted;

-

-		if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())

-		{

-			while (Length && Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())

-			{

-				TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);

-				TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, 1);

-				Length--;

-			}

-

-			Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-		}

-	}

-

-	while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))

-	{

-		uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;

-

-		if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)

-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-		else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)

-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;

-	}

-

-	return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET

-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE

-#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME

-#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c
deleted file mode 100644
index ed2d2d9b7..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,96 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#if defined(TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME)

-

-// cppcheck-suppress unusedFunction

-uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (const void* const Buffer,

-                            uint16_t Length)

-{

-	uint8_t* DataStream     = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));

-	bool     LastPacketFull = false;

-

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint | ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);

-

-	if (Length > USB_ControlRequest.wLength)

-	  Length = USB_ControlRequest.wLength;

-	else if (!(Length))

-	  Endpoint_ClearIN();

-

-	while (Length || LastPacketFull)

-	{

-		uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;

-

-		if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)

-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-		else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)

-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;

-		else if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())

-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_HostAborted;

-		else if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())

-		  break;

-

-		if (Endpoint_IsINReady())

-		{

-			uint16_t BytesInEndpoint = Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint();

-

-			while (Length && (BytesInEndpoint < USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize))

-			{

-				TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);

-				TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, 1);

-				Length--;

-				BytesInEndpoint++;

-			}

-

-			LastPacketFull = (BytesInEndpoint == USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize);

-			Endpoint_ClearIN();

-		}

-	}

-

-	while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))

-	{

-		uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;

-

-		if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)

-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;

-		else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)

-		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;

-	}

-

-	return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET

-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE

-#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME

-#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 02ad97867..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,90 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#if defined(TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME)

-

-// cppcheck-suppress unusedFunction

-uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE const Buffer,

-                            uint16_t Length,

-                            uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)

-{

-	uint8_t* DataStream      = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));

-	uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;

-	uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-

-	if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))

-	  return ErrorCode;

-

-	if (BytesProcessed != NULL)

-	{

-		Length -= *BytesProcessed;

-		TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, *BytesProcessed);

-	}

-

-	while (Length)

-	{

-		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-		{

-			TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT();

-

-			#if !defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)

-			USB_USBTask();

-			#endif

-

-			if (BytesProcessed != NULL)

-			{

-				*BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;

-				return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;

-			}

-

-			if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))

-			  return ErrorCode;

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);

-			TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, 1);

-			Length--;

-			BytesInTransfer++;

-		}

-	}

-

-	return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;

-}

-

-#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME

-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE

-#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE

-#undef TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT

-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET

-#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBController_XMEGA.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBController_XMEGA.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 3899278db..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBController_XMEGA.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,189 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-#if (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_CONTROLLER_C

-#include "../USBController.h"

-

-#if (!defined(USB_HOST_ONLY) && !defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY))

-volatile uint8_t USB_CurrentMode = USB_MODE_None;

-#endif

-

-#if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)

-volatile uint8_t USB_Options;

-#endif

-

-/* Ugly workaround to ensure an aligned table, since __BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT__ == 1 for 8-bit AVR-GCC */

-uint8_t USB_EndpointTable[sizeof(USB_EndpointTable_t) + 1];

-

-void USB_Init(

-               #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)

-               const uint8_t Mode

-               #endif

-

-               #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS))

-               ,

-               #elif (!defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS))

-               void

-               #endif

-

-               #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)

-               const uint8_t Options

-               #endif

-               )

-{

-	#if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)

-	USB_Options = Options;

-	#endif

-

-	USB_IsInitialized = true;

-

-	uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask();

-	GlobalInterruptDisable();

-

-	NVM.CMD  = NVM_CMD_READ_CALIB_ROW_gc;

-	USB.CAL0 = pgm_read_byte(offsetof(NVM_PROD_SIGNATURES_t, USBCAL0));

-	USB.CAL1 = pgm_read_byte(offsetof(NVM_PROD_SIGNATURES_t, USBCAL1));

-	NVM.CMD  = 0;

-

-	/* Ugly workaround to ensure an aligned table, since __BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT__ == 1 for the 8-bit AVR-GCC toochain */

-	USB.EPPTR = ((intptr_t)&USB_EndpointTable[1] & ~(1 << 0));

-	USB.CTRLA = (USB_STFRNUM_bm | ((ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS - 1) << USB_MAXEP_gp));

-

-	if ((USB_Options & USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH) == USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH)

-	  USB.INTCTRLA = (3 << USB_INTLVL_gp);

-	else if ((USB_Options & USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIMED) == USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIMED)

-	  USB.INTCTRLA = (2 << USB_INTLVL_gp);

-	else

-	  USB.INTCTRLA = (1 << USB_INTLVL_gp);

-

-	SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt);

-

-	USB_ResetInterface();

-}

-

-void USB_Disable(void)

-{

-	USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts();

-	USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts();

-

-	USB_Detach();

-	USB_Controller_Disable();

-

-	USB_IsInitialized = false;

-}

-

-void USB_ResetInterface(void)

-{

-	#if defined(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED)

-	if (USB_Options & USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED)

-	  CLK.USBCTRL = (((F_USB / 6000000) - 1) << CLK_USBPSDIV_gp);

-	else

-	  CLK.USBCTRL = (((F_USB / 48000000) - 1) << CLK_USBPSDIV_gp);

-	#else

-	CLK.USBCTRL = (((F_USB / 6000000) - 1) << CLK_USBPSDIV_gp);

-	#endif

-	

-	if (USB_Options & USB_OPT_PLLCLKSRC)

-	  CLK.USBCTRL |= (CLK_USBSRC_PLL_gc   | CLK_USBSEN_bm);

-	else

-	  CLK.USBCTRL |= (CLK_USBSRC_RC32M_gc | CLK_USBSEN_bm);

-

-	USB_Device_SetDeviceAddress(0);

-

-	USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts();

-	USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts();

-

-	USB_Controller_Reset();

-	USB_Init_Device();

-}

-

-#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)

-static void USB_Init_Device(void)

-{

-	USB_DeviceState                 = DEVICE_STATE_Unattached;

-	USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber  = 0;

-

-	#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)

-	USB_Device_RemoteWakeupEnabled  = false;

-	#endif

-

-	#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER)

-	USB_Device_CurrentlySelfPowered = false;

-	#endif

-

-	#if !defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE)

-	USB_Descriptor_Device_t* DeviceDescriptorPtr;

-

-	#if defined(ARCH_HAS_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE) && \

-	    !(defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS))

-	uint8_t DescriptorAddressSpace;

-

-	if (CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor((DTYPE_Device << 8), 0, (void*)&DeviceDescriptorPtr, &DescriptorAddressSpace) != NO_DESCRIPTOR)

-	{

-		if (DescriptorAddressSpace == MEMSPACE_FLASH)

-		  USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = pgm_read_byte(&DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size);

-		else if (DescriptorAddressSpace == MEMSPACE_EEPROM)

-		  USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = eeprom_read_byte(&DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size);

-		else

-		  USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size;

-	}

-	#else

-	if (CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor((DTYPE_Device << 8), 0, (void*)&DeviceDescriptorPtr) != NO_DESCRIPTOR)

-	{

-		#if defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS)

-		USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size;

-		#elif defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS)

-		USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = eeprom_read_byte(&DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size);

-		#else

-		USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = pgm_read_byte(&DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size);

-		#endif

-	}

-	#endif

-	#endif

-

-	if (USB_Options & USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED)

-	  USB_Device_SetLowSpeed();

-	else

-	  USB_Device_SetFullSpeed();

-

-	Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, EP_TYPE_CONTROL,

-							   USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize, 1);

-

-	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_BUSEVENTI);

-

-	USB_Attach();

-}

-#endif

-

-#endif

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBController_XMEGA.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBController_XMEGA.h
deleted file mode 100644
index bb37905ab..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBController_XMEGA.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,313 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief USB Controller definitions for the AVR XMEGA microcontrollers.

- *  \copydetails Group_USBManagement_XMEGA

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_USBManagement

- *  \defgroup Group_USBManagement_XMEGA USB Interface Management (XMEGA)

- *  \brief USB Controller definitions for the AVR XMEGA microcontrollers.

- *

- *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to the setup and management of the USB interface.

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef __USBCONTROLLER_XMEGA_H__

-#define __USBCONTROLLER_XMEGA_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "../USBMode.h"

-		#include "../Events.h"

-		#include "../USBTask.h"

-		#include "../USBInterrupt.h"

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Type Defines: */

-			typedef struct

-			{

-				struct

-				{

-					USB_EP_t OUT;

-					USB_EP_t IN;

-				} Endpoints[16];

-				uint16_t FrameNum;

-			} ATTR_PACKED USB_EndpointTable_t;

-

-		/* External Variables: */

-			extern uint8_t USB_EndpointTable[];

-

-	#endif

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			#include "../Device.h"

-			#include "../Endpoint.h"

-			#include "../DeviceStandardReq.h"

-			#include "../EndpointStream.h"

-		#endif

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks and Defines: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-		#if !defined(F_USB)

-			#error F_USB is not defined. You must define F_USB to the frequency of the unprescaled USB controller clock in your project makefile.

-		#endif

-

-		#if ((F_USB % 6000000) || (F_USB < 6000000))

-			#error Invalid F_USB specified. F_USB must be a multiple of 6MHz for USB Low Speed operation, and a multiple of 48MHz for Full Speed operation.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** \name USB Controller Option Masks */

-			//@{

-			/** Sets the USB bus interrupt priority level to be low priority. The USB bus interrupt is used for Start of Frame events, bus suspend

-			 *  and resume events, bus reset events and other events related to the management of the USB bus.

-			 */

-			#define USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRILOW           ((0 << 2) | (0 << 1))

-

-			/** Sets the USB bus interrupt priority level to be medium priority. The USB bus interrupt is used for Start of Frame events, bus suspend

-			 *  and resume events, bus reset events and other events related to the management of the USB bus.

-			 */

-			#define USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIMED           ((0 << 2) | (1 << 1))

-

-			/** Sets the USB bus interrupt priority level to be high priority. The USB bus interrupt is used for Start of Frame events, bus suspend

-			 *  and resume events, bus reset events and other events related to the management of the USB bus.

-			 */

-			#define USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH          ((1 << 2) | (0 << 1))

-

-			/** Sets the USB controller to source its clock from the internal RC 32MHz clock, once it has been DFLL calibrated to 48MHz. */

-			#define USB_OPT_RC32MCLKSRC               (0 << 3)

-

-			/** Sets the USB controller to source its clock from the internal PLL. */

-			#define USB_OPT_PLLCLKSRC                 (1 << 3)

-			//@}

-

-			#if !defined(USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				/** Constant for the maximum software timeout period of the USB data stream transfer functions

-				 *  (both control and standard) when in either device or host mode. If the next packet of a stream

-				 *  is not received or acknowledged within this time period, the stream function will fail.

-				 *

-				 *  This value may be overridden in the user project makefile as the value of the

-				 *  \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS token, and passed to the compiler using the -D switch.

-				 */

-				#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS       100

-			#endif

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Detaches the device from the USB bus. This has the effect of removing the device from any

-			 *  attached host, ceasing USB communications. If no host is present, this prevents any host from

-			 *  enumerating the device once attached until \ref USB_Attach() is called.

-			 */

-			static inline void USB_Detach(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Detach(void)

-			{

-				USB.CTRLB &= ~USB_ATTACH_bm;

-			}

-

-			/** Attaches the device to the USB bus. This announces the device's presence to any attached

-			 *  USB host, starting the enumeration process. If no host is present, attaching the device

-			 *  will allow for enumeration once a host is connected to the device.

-			 *

-			 *  This is inexplicably also required for proper operation while in host mode, to enable the

-			 *  attachment of a device to the host. This is despite the bit being located in the device-mode

-			 *  register and despite the datasheet making no mention of its requirement in host mode.

-			 */

-			static inline void USB_Attach(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Attach(void)

-			{

-				USB.CTRLB |= USB_ATTACH_bm;

-			}

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			/** Main function to initialize and start the USB interface. Once active, the USB interface will

-			 *  allow for device connection to a host when in device mode, or for device enumeration while in

-			 *  host mode.

-			 *

-			 *  As the USB library relies on interrupts for the device and host mode enumeration processes,

-			 *  the user must enable global interrupts before or shortly after this function is called. In

-			 *  device mode, interrupts must be enabled within 500ms of this function being called to ensure

-			 *  that the host does not time out whilst enumerating the device. In host mode, interrupts may be

-			 *  enabled at the application's leisure however enumeration will not begin of an attached device

-			 *  until after this has occurred.

-			 *

-			 *  Calling this function when the USB interface is already initialized will cause a complete USB

-			 *  interface reset and re-enumeration.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Mode     This is a mask indicating what mode the USB interface is to be initialized to, a value

-			 *                      from the \ref USB_Modes_t enum.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Options  Mask indicating the options which should be used when initializing the USB

-			 *                      interface to control the USB interface's behavior. This should be comprised of

-			 *                      a \c USB_OPT_REG_* mask to control the regulator, a \c USB_OPT_*_PLL mask to control the

-			 *                      PLL, and a \c USB_DEVICE_OPT_* mask (when the device mode is enabled) to set the device

-			 *                      mode speed.

-			 *

-			 *  \note To reduce the FLASH requirements of the library if only device or host mode is required,

-			 *        the mode can be statically set in the project makefile by defining the token \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY

-			 *        (for device mode) or \c USB_HOST_ONLY (for host mode), passing the token to the compiler

-			 *        via the -D switch. If the mode is statically set, this parameter does not exist in the

-			 *        function prototype.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note To reduce the FLASH requirements of the library if only fixed settings are required,

-			 *        the options may be set statically in the same manner as the mode (see the Mode parameter of

-			 *        this function). To statically set the USB options, pass in the \c USE_STATIC_OPTIONS token,

-			 *        defined to the appropriate options masks. When the options are statically set, this

-			 *        parameter does not exist in the function prototype.

-			 *        \n\n

-			 *

-			 *  \note The mode parameter does not exist on devices where only one mode is possible, such as USB

-			 *        AVR models which only implement the USB device mode in hardware.

-			 *

-			 *  \see \ref Group_Device for the \c USB_DEVICE_OPT_* masks.

-			 */

-			void USB_Init(

-			               #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			               const uint8_t Mode

-			               #endif

-

-			               #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			               ,

-			               #elif (!defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS))

-			               void

-			               #endif

-

-			               #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			               const uint8_t Options

-			               #endif

-			               );

-

-			/** Shuts down the USB interface. This turns off the USB interface after deallocating all USB FIFO

-			 *  memory, endpoints and pipes. When turned off, no USB functionality can be used until the interface

-			 *  is restarted with the \ref USB_Init() function.

-			 */

-			void USB_Disable(void);

-

-			/** Resets the interface, when already initialized. This will re-enumerate the device if already connected

-			 *  to a host, or re-enumerate an already attached device when in host mode.

-			 */

-			void USB_ResetInterface(void);

-

-		/* Global Variables: */

-			#if (!defined(USB_HOST_ONLY) && !defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				/** Indicates the mode that the USB interface is currently initialized to, a value from the

-				 *  \ref USB_Modes_t enum.

-				 *

-				 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually

-				 *             changed in value.

-				 *

-				 *  \note When the controller is initialized into UID auto-detection mode, this variable will hold the

-				 *        currently selected USB mode (i.e. \ref USB_MODE_Device or \ref USB_MODE_Host). If the controller

-				 *        is fixed into a specific mode (either through the \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY or \c USB_HOST_ONLY compile time

-				 *        options, or a limitation of the USB controller in the chosen device model) this will evaluate to

-				 *        a constant of the appropriate value and will never evaluate to \ref USB_MODE_None even when the

-				 *        USB interface is not initialized.

-				 */

-				extern volatile uint8_t USB_CurrentMode;

-			#elif defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)

-				#define USB_CurrentMode USB_MODE_Device

-			#endif

-

-			#if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-				/** Indicates the current USB options that the USB interface was initialized with when \ref USB_Init()

-				 *  was called. This value will be one of the \c USB_MODE_* masks defined elsewhere in this module.

-				 *

-				 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually

-				 *             changed in value.

-				 */

-				extern volatile uint8_t USB_Options;

-			#elif defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)

-				#define USB_Options USE_STATIC_OPTIONS

-			#endif

-

-		/* Enums: */

-			/** Enum for the possible USB controller modes, for initialization via \ref USB_Init() and indication back to the

-			 *  user application via \ref USB_CurrentMode.

-			 */

-			enum USB_Modes_t

-			{

-				USB_MODE_None   = 0, /**< Indicates that the controller is currently not initialized in any specific USB mode. */

-				USB_MODE_Device = 1, /**< Indicates that the controller is currently initialized in USB Device mode. */

-			};

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_CONTROLLER_C)

-				static void USB_Init_Device(void);

-			#endif

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			static inline void USB_Controller_Enable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Controller_Enable(void)

-			{

-				USB.CTRLA |=  USB_ENABLE_bm;

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_Controller_Disable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Controller_Disable(void)

-			{

-				USB.CTRLA &= ~USB_ENABLE_bm;

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_Controller_Reset(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_Controller_Reset(void)

-			{

-				USB.CTRLA &= ~USB_ENABLE_bm;

-				USB.CTRLA |=  USB_ENABLE_bm;

-			}

-

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBInterrupt_XMEGA.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBInterrupt_XMEGA.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 9bba25ae9..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBInterrupt_XMEGA.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,106 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-#if (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-#include "../USBInterrupt.h"

-

-void USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(void)

-{

-	USB.INTCTRLA    &= USB_INTLVL_gm;

-	USB.INTCTRLB     = 0;

-}

-

-void USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(void)

-{

-	USB.INTFLAGSACLR = 0xFF;

-	USB.INTFLAGSBCLR = 0xFF;

-}

-

-ISR(USB_BUSEVENT_vect)

-{

-	#if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS)

-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_SOFI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_SOFI))

-	{

-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SOFI);

-

-		EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame();

-	}

-	#endif

-

-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Suspend))

-	{

-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Suspend);

-

-		#if !defined(NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT)

-		USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Unattached;

-		EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect();

-		#else

-		USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Suspended;

-		EVENT_USB_Device_Suspend();

-		#endif

-	}

-

-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Resume))

-	{

-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Resume);

-

-		if (USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber)

-		  USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Configured;

-		else

-		  USB_DeviceState = (USB_Device_IsAddressSet()) ? DEVICE_STATE_Configured : DEVICE_STATE_Powered;

-

-		#if !defined(NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT)

-		EVENT_USB_Device_Connect();

-		#else

-		EVENT_USB_Device_WakeUp();

-		#endif

-	}

-

-	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Reset))

-	{

-		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Reset);

-

-		USB_DeviceState                = DEVICE_STATE_Default;

-		USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber = 0;

-

-		USB_Device_SetDeviceAddress(0);

-

-		Endpoint_ClearEndpoints();

-		Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, EP_TYPE_CONTROL,

-		                           USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize, 1);

-

-		EVENT_USB_Device_Reset();

-	}

-}

-

-#endif

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBInterrupt_XMEGA.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBInterrupt_XMEGA.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 5eef7121e..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBInterrupt_XMEGA.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,166 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief USB Controller Interrupt definitions for the AVR XMEGA microcontrollers.

- *

- *  This file contains definitions required for the correct handling of low level USB service routine interrupts

- *  from the USB controller.

- *

- *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver

- *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.

- */

-

-#ifndef __USBINTERRUPT_XMEGA_H__

-#define __USBINTERRUPT_XMEGA_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)

-			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Enums: */

-			enum USB_Interrupts_t

-			{

-				USB_INT_BUSEVENTI         = 1,

-				USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Suspend = 2,

-				USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Resume  = 3,

-				USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Reset   = 4,

-				USB_INT_SOFI              = 5,

-			};

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			static inline void USB_INT_Enable(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_INT_Enable(const uint8_t Interrupt)

-			{

-				switch (Interrupt)

-				{

-					case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI:

-						USB.INTCTRLA |= USB_BUSEVIE_bm;

-						return;

-					case USB_INT_SOFI:

-						USB.INTCTRLA |= USB_SOFIE_bm;

-						return;

-				}

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_INT_Disable(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_INT_Disable(const uint8_t Interrupt)

-			{

-				switch (Interrupt)

-				{

-					case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI:

-						USB.INTCTRLA &= ~USB_BUSEVIE_bm;

-						return;

-					case USB_INT_SOFI:

-						USB.INTCTRLA &= ~USB_SOFIE_bm;

-						return;

-				}

-			}

-

-			static inline void USB_INT_Clear(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void USB_INT_Clear(const uint8_t Interrupt)

-			{

-				switch (Interrupt)

-				{

-					case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Suspend:

-						USB.INTFLAGSACLR = USB_SUSPENDIF_bm;

-						return;

-					case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Resume:

-						USB.INTFLAGSACLR = USB_RESUMEIF_bm;

-						return;

-					case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Reset:

-						USB.INTFLAGSACLR = USB_RSTIF_bm;

-						return;

-					case USB_INT_SOFI:

-						USB.INTFLAGSACLR = USB_SOFIF_bm;

-						return;

-				}

-			}

-

-			static inline bool USB_INT_IsEnabled(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline bool USB_INT_IsEnabled(const uint8_t Interrupt)

-			{

-				switch (Interrupt)

-				{

-					case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI:

-						return ((USB.INTCTRLA & USB_BUSEVIE_bm) ? true : false);

-					case USB_INT_SOFI:

-						return ((USB.INTCTRLA & USB_SOFIE_bm) ? true : false);

-				}

-

-				return false;

-			}

-

-			static inline bool USB_INT_HasOccurred(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;

-			static inline bool USB_INT_HasOccurred(const uint8_t Interrupt)

-			{

-				switch (Interrupt)

-				{

-					case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Suspend:

-						return ((USB.INTFLAGSACLR & USB_SUSPENDIF_bm) ? true : false);

-					case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Resume:

-						return ((USB.INTFLAGSACLR & USB_RESUMEIF_bm) ? true : false);

-					case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Reset:

-						return ((USB.INTFLAGSACLR & USB_RSTIF_bm) ? true : false);

-					case USB_INT_SOFI:

-						return ((USB.INTFLAGSACLR & USB_SOFIF_bm) ? true : false);

-				}

-

-				return false;

-			}

-

-		/* Includes: */

-			#include "../USBMode.h"

-			#include "../Events.h"

-			#include "../USBController.h"

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			void USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(void);

-			void USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(void);

-	#endif

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 66f0fd3c0..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,418 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Master include file for the library USB functionality.

- *

- *  Master include file for the library USB functionality.

- *

- *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of the USB portions of the library, instead of

- *  the individual USB driver submodule headers.

- */

-

-/** \defgroup Group_USB USB Core - LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/ConfigDescriptors.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/DeviceStandardReq.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Events.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/HostStandardReq.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBTask.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/<i>ARCH</i>/Device_<i>ARCH</i>.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/<i>ARCH</i>/Endpoint_<i>ARCH</i>.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/<i>ARCH</i>/EndpointStream_<i>ARCH</i>.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/<i>ARCH</i>/Host_<i>ARCH</i>.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/<i>ARCH</i>/Pipe_<i>ARCH</i>.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/<i>ARCH</i>/PipeStream_<i>ARCH</i>.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/<i>ARCH</i>/USBController_<i>ARCH</i>.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/<i>ARCH</i>/USBInterrupt_<i>ARCH</i>.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>

- *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDParser.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Driver and framework for the USB controller of the selected architecture and microcontroller model. This module

- *  consists of many submodules, and is designed to provide an easy way to configure and control USB host, device

- *  or OTG mode USB applications.

- *

- *  The USB stack requires the sole control over the USB controller in the microcontroller only; i.e. it does not

- *  require any additional timers or other peripherals to operate. This ensures that the USB stack requires as few

- *  resources as possible.

- *

- *  The USB stack can be used in Device Mode for connections to USB Hosts (see \ref Group_Device), in Host mode for

- *  hosting of other USB devices (see \ref Group_Host), or as a dual role device which can either act as a USB host

- *  or device depending on what peripheral is connected (see \ref Group_OTG). Both modes also require a common set

- *  of USB management functions found \ref Group_USBManagement.

- */

-

-/** \defgroup Group_USBClassDrivers USB Class Drivers

- *

- *  Drivers for both host and device mode of the standard USB classes, for rapid application development.

- *  Class drivers give a framework which sits on top of the low level library API, allowing for standard

- *  USB classes to be implemented in a project with minimal user code. These drivers can be used in

- *  conjunction with the library low level APIs to implement interfaces both via the class drivers and via

- *  the standard library APIs.

- *

- *  Multiple device mode class drivers can be used within a project, including multiple instances of the

- *  same class driver. In this way, USB Hosts and Devices can be made quickly using the internal class drivers

- *  so that more time and effort can be put into the end application instead of the USB protocol.

- *

- *  The available class drivers and their modes are listed below.

- *

- *  <table>

- *  <tr>

- *   <th width="200px">USB Class</th>

- *   <th width="90px">Device Mode</th>

- *   <th width="90px">Host Mode</th>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>Android Open Accessory</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>Audio 1.0</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>CDC-ACM</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>HID</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>MIDI</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>Mass Storage</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>Printer</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

-*    <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>RNDIS</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  <tr>

- *   <td>Still Image</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>

- *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>

- *  </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *

- *  \section Sec_UsingClassDrivers Using the Class Drivers

- *  To make the Class drivers easy to integrate into a user application, they all implement a standardized

- *  design with similarly named/used function, enums, defines and types. The two different modes are implemented

- *  slightly differently, and thus will be explained separately. For information on a specific class driver, read

- *  the class driver's module documentation.

- *

- *  \subsection Sec_ClassDriverDevice Device Mode Class Drivers

- *  Implementing a Device Mode Class Driver in a user application requires a number of steps to be followed. Firstly,

- *  the module configuration and state structure must be added to the project source. These structures are named in a

- *  similar manner between classes, that of <tt>USB_ClassInfo_<i>{Class Name}</i>_Device_t</tt>, and are used to hold the

- *  complete state and configuration for each class instance. Multiple class instances is where the power of the class

- *  drivers lie; multiple interfaces of the same class simply require more instances of the Class Driver's \c USB_ClassInfo_*

- *  structure.

- *

- *  Inside the ClassInfo structure lies two sections, a \c Config section, and a \c State section. The \c Config

- *  section contains the instance's configuration parameters, and <b>must have all fields set by the user application</b>

- *  before the class driver is used. Each Device mode Class driver typically contains a set of configuration parameters

- *  for the endpoint size/number of the associated logical USB interface, plus any class-specific configuration parameters.

- *

- *  The following is an example of a properly initialized instance of the Audio Class Driver structure:

- *

- *  \code

- *  USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t My_Audio_Interface =

- *  {

- *      .Config =

- *          {

- *              .StreamingInterfaceNumber = 1,

- *              .DataINEndpoint           =

- *                  {

- *                      .Address          = (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 1),

- *                      .Size             = 64,

- *                      .Banks            = 1,

- *                  },

- *          },

- *  };

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  \note The class driver's configuration parameters should match those used in the device's descriptors that are

- *  sent to the host.

- *

- *  To initialize the Class driver instance, the driver's <tt><i>{Class Name}</i>_Device_ConfigureEndpoints()</tt> function

- *  should be called in response to the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged() event. This function will return a

- *  boolean true value if the driver successfully initialized the instance. Like all the class driver functions, this function

- *  takes in the address of the specific instance you wish to initialize - in this manner, multiple separate instances of

- *  the same class type can be initialized like this:

- *

- *  \code

- *  void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)

- *  {

- *      LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);

- *      

- *      if (!(Audio_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&My_Audio_Interface)))

- *          LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);

- *  }

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  Once initialized, it is important to maintain the class driver's state by repeatedly calling the Class Driver's

- *  <tt><i>{Class Name}</i>_Device_USBTask()</tt> function in the main program loop. The exact implementation of this

- *  function varies between class drivers, and can be used for any internal class driver purpose to maintain each

- *  instance. Again, this function uses the address of the instance to operate on, and thus needs to be called for each

- *  separate instance, just like the main USB maintenance routine \ref USB_USBTask():

- *

- *  \code

- *  int main(void)

- *  {

- *      SetupHardware();

- *      

- *      LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);

- *      

- *      for (;;)

- *      {

- *          if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)

- *            Create_And_Process_Samples();

- *          

- *          Audio_Device_USBTask(&My_Audio_Interface);

- *          USB_USBTask();

- *      }

- *  }

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  The final standardized Device Class Driver function is the Control Request handler function

- *  <tt><i>{Class Name}</i>_Device_ProcessControlRequest()</tt>, which should be called when the

- *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event fires. This function should also be called for

- *  each class driver instance, using the address of the instance to operate on as the function's

- *  parameter. The request handler will abort if it is determined that the current request is not

- *  targeted at the given class driver instance, thus these methods can safely be called

- *  one-after-another in the event handler with no form of error checking:

- *

- *  \code

- *  void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)

- *  {

- *      Audio_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&My_Audio_Interface);

- *  }

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  Each class driver may also define a set of callback functions (which are prefixed by \c CALLBACK_*

- *  in the function's name) which <b>must</b> also be added to the user application - refer to each

- *  individual class driver's documentation for mandatory callbacks. In addition, each class driver may

- *  also define a set of events (identifiable by their prefix of \c EVENT_* in the function's name), which

- *  the user application <b>may</b> choose to implement, or ignore if not needed.

- *

- *  The individual Device Mode Class Driver documentation contains more information on the non-standardized,

- *  class-specific functions which the user application can then use on the driver instances, such as data

- *  read and write routines. See each driver's individual documentation for more information on the

- *  class-specific functions.

- *

- *  \subsection Sec_ClassDriverHost Host Mode Class Drivers

- *  Implementing a Host Mode Class Driver in a user application requires a number of steps to be followed. Firstly,

- *  the module configuration and state structure must be added to the project source. These structures are named in a

- *  similar manner between classes, that of <tt>USB_ClassInfo_<b>{Class Name}</b>_Host_t</tt>, and are used to hold the

- *  complete state and configuration for each class instance. Multiple class instances is where the power of the class

- *  drivers lie; multiple interfaces of the same class simply require more instances of the Class Driver's \c USB_ClassInfo_*

- *  structure.

- *

- *  Inside the \c USB_ClassInfo_* structure lies two sections, a \c Config section, and a \c State section. The \c Config

- *  section contains the instance's configuration parameters, and <b>must have all fields set by the user application</b>

- *  before the class driver is used. Each Device mode Class driver typically contains a set of configuration parameters

- *  for the endpoint size/number of the associated logical USB interface, plus any class-specific configuration parameters.

- *

- *  The following is an example of a properly initialized instance of the MIDI Host Class Driver structure:

- *

- *  \code

- *  USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t My_MIDI_Interface =

- *  {

- *      .Config =

- *          {

- *              .DataINPipe             =

- *                  {

- *                      .Address        = (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1),

- *                      .Size           = 64,

- *                      .Banks          = 1,

- *                  },

- *              .DataOUTPipe            =

- *                  {

- *                      .Address        = (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2),

- *                      .Size           = 64,

- *                      .Banks          = 1,

- *                  },

- *          },

- *  };

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  To initialize the Class driver instance, the driver's <tt><b>{Class Name}</b>_Host_ConfigurePipes()</tt> function

- *  should be called in response to the \c EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete() event firing. This function will

- *  will return an error code from the class driver's <tt><b>{Class Name}</b>_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t</tt> enum

- *  to indicate if the driver successfully initialized the instance and bound it to an interface in the attached device.

- *  Like all the class driver functions, this function takes in the address of the specific instance you wish to initialize -

- *  in this manner, multiple separate instances of the same class type can be initialized. A fragment of a Class Driver

- *  based Host mode application may look like the following:

- *

- *  \code

- *  void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)

- *  {

- *      LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);

- *      

- *      uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;

- *      uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];

- *      

- *      if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,

- *                                             sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)

- *      {

- *          LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);

- *          return;

- *      }

- *      

- *      if (MIDI_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface,

- *                                   ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != MIDI_ENUMERROR_NoError)

- *      {

- *          LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);

- *          return;

- *      }

- *      

- *      if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)

- *      {

- *          LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);

- *          return;

- *      }

- *      

- *      LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);

- *  }

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  Note that the function also requires the device's configuration descriptor so that it can determine which interface

- *  in the device to bind to - this can be retrieved as shown in the above fragment using the

- *  \ref USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() function. If the device does not implement the interface the class driver

- *  is looking for, if all the matching interfaces are already bound to class driver instances or if an error occurs while

- *  binding to a device interface (for example, a device endpoint bank larger that the maximum supported bank size is used)

- *  the configuration will fail.

- *

- *  To complete the device enumeration after binding the host mode Class Drivers to the attached device, a call to

- *  \c USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration() must be made. If the device configuration is not set within the 

- *  \c EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete() event, the host still will assume the device enumeration has failed.

- *

- *  Once initialized, it is important to maintain the class driver's state by repeatedly calling the Class Driver's

- *  <tt><b>{Class Name}</b>_Host_USBTask()</tt> function in the main program loop. The exact implementation of this

- *  function varies between class drivers, and can be used for any internal class driver purpose to maintain each

- *  instance. Again, this function uses the address of the instance to operate on, and thus needs to be called for each

- *  separate instance, just like the main USB maintenance routine \ref USB_USBTask():

- *

- *  \code

- *  int main(void)

- *  {

- *      SetupHardware();

- *      

- *      LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);

- *      

- *      for (;;)

- *      {

- *          if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)

- *              Create_And_Process_Samples();

- *          

- *          MIDI_Host_USBTask(&My_Audio_Interface);

- *          USB_USBTask();

- *      }

- *  }

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  Each class driver may also define a set of callback functions (which are prefixed by \c CALLBACK_*

- *  in the function's name) which <b>must</b> also be added to the user application - refer to each

- *  individual class driver's documentation for mandatory callbacks. In addition, each class driver may

- *  also define a set of events (identifiable by their prefix of \c EVENT_* in the function's name), which

- *  the user application <b>may</b> choose to implement, or ignore if not needed.

- *

- *  The individual Host Mode Class Driver documentation contains more information on the non-standardized,

- *  class-specific functions which the user application can then use on the driver instances, such as data

- *  read and write routines. See each driver's individual documentation for more information on the

- *  class-specific functions.

- */

-

-#ifndef __USB_H__

-#define __USB_H__

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../Common/Common.h"

-		#include "Core/USBMode.h"

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "Core/USBTask.h"

-		#include "Core/Events.h"

-		#include "Core/StdDescriptors.h"

-		#include "Core/ConfigDescriptors.h"

-		#include "Core/USBController.h"

-		#include "Core/USBInterrupt.h"

-

-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			#include "Core/Host.h"

-			#include "Core/Pipe.h"

-			#include "Core/HostStandardReq.h"

-			#include "Core/PipeStream.h"

-		#endif

-

-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			#include "Core/Device.h"

-			#include "Core/Endpoint.h"

-			#include "Core/DeviceStandardReq.h"

-			#include "Core/EndpointStream.h"

-		#endif

-

-		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-			#include "Core/OTG.h"

-		#endif

-

-		#include "Class/AndroidAccessoryClass.h"

-		#include "Class/AudioClass.h"

-		#include "Class/CDCClass.h"

-		#include "Class/HIDClass.h"

-		#include "Class/MassStorageClass.h"

-		#include "Class/MIDIClass.h"

-		#include "Class/PrinterClass.h"

-		#include "Class/RNDISClass.h"

-		#include "Class/StillImageClass.h"

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/License.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/License.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 9e27adfb2..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/License.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-                  LUFA Library

-        Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-     dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-                www.lufa-lib.org

-

-

-Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software

-and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without

-fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all

-copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-this software.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Platform/Platform.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Platform/Platform.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 9bd29f5c0..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Platform/Platform.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,80 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Architecture Specific Hardware Platform Drivers.

- *

- *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the device-specific hardware platform drivers, for low level

- *  hardware configuration and management. The platform drivers are a set of drivers which are designed to provide

- *  a high level management layer for the various low level system functions such as clock control and interrupt

- *  management.

- *

- *  User code may choose to either include this master dispatch header file to include all available platform

- *  driver header files for the current architecture, or may choose to only include the specific platform driver

- *  modules required for a particular application.

- */

-

-/** \defgroup Group_PlatformDrivers System Platform Drivers - LUFA/Platform/Platform.h

- *  \brief Hardware platform drivers.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - <b>UC3 Architecture Only:</b> LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_PLATFORM)</i> 

- *    - <b>UC3 Architecture Only:</b> LUFA/Platform/UC3/Exception.S <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_PLATFORM)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Device-specific hardware platform drivers, for low level hardware configuration and management. The platform

- *  drivers are a set of drivers which are designed to provide a high level management layer for the various low level

- *  system functions such as clock control and interrupt management.

- *

- *  User code may choose to either include this master dispatch header file to include all available platform

- *  driver header files for the current architecture, or may choose to only include the specific platform driver

- *  modules required for a particular application.

- *

- *  \note The exact APIs and availability of sub-modules within the platform driver group may vary depending on the

- *        target used - see individual target module documentation for the API specific to your target processor.

- */

-

-#ifndef __LUFA_PLATFORM_H__

-#define __LUFA_PLATFORM_H__

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#if (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)

-			#include "UC3/ClockManagement.h"

-			#include "UC3/InterruptManagement.h"

-		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)

-			#include "XMEGA/ClockManagement.h"

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Platform/UC3/ClockManagement.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Platform/UC3/ClockManagement.h
deleted file mode 100644
index fb62fdcc9..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Platform/UC3/ClockManagement.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,338 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Module Clock Driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.

- *

- *  Clock management driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers. This driver allows for the configuration

- *  of the various clocks within the device to clock the various peripherals.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_PlatformDrivers_UC3

- *  \defgroup Group_PlatformDrivers_UC3Clocks Clock Management Driver - LUFA/Platform/UC3/ClockManagement.h

- *  \brief Module Clock Driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - None

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Clock management driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers. This driver allows for the configuration

- *  of the various clocks within the device to clock the various peripherals.

- *

- *  Usage Example:

- *  \code

- *		#include <LUFA/Platform/UC3/ClockManagement.h>

- *      

- *		void main(void)

- *		{

- *			// Start the master external oscillator which will be used as the main clock reference

- *			AVR32CLK_StartExternalOscillator(0, EXOSC_MODE_8MHZ_OR_MORE, EXOSC_START_0CLK);

- *          

- *			// Start the PLL for the CPU clock, switch CPU to it

- *			AVR32CLK_StartPLL(0, CLOCK_SRC_OSC0, 12000000, F_CPU);

- *			AVR32CLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL0, F_CPU);

- *          

- *			// Start the PLL for the USB Generic Clock module

- *			AVR32CLK_StartPLL(1, CLOCK_SRC_OSC0, 12000000, 48000000);

- *		}

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef _UC3_CLOCK_MANAGEMENT_H_

-#define _UC3_CLOCK_MANAGEMENT_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Enum for the possible external oscillator types. */

-			enum UC3_Extern_OSC_ClockTypes_t

-			{

-				EXOSC_MODE_CLOCK         = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_MODE_EXT_CLOCK,  /**< External clock (non-crystal) mode. */

-				EXOSC_MODE_900KHZ_MAX    = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_MODE_CRYSTAL_G0, /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or slower than 900KHz. */

-				EXOSC_MODE_3MHZ_MAX      = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_MODE_CRYSTAL_G1, /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or slower than 3MHz. */

-				EXOSC_MODE_8MHZ_MAX      = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_MODE_CRYSTAL_G2, /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or slower than 8MHz. */

-				EXOSC_MODE_8MHZ_OR_MORE  = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_MODE_CRYSTAL_G3, /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or faster than 8MHz. */

-			};

-

-			/** Enum for the possible external oscillator startup times. */

-			enum UC3_Extern_OSC_ClockStartup_t

-			{

-				EXOSC_START_0CLK         = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_STARTUP_0_RCOSC,     /**< Immediate startup, no delay. */

-				EXOSC_START_64CLK        = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_STARTUP_64_RCOSC,    /**< Wait 64 clock cycles before startup for stability. */

-				EXOSC_START_128CLK       = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_STARTUP_128_RCOSC,   /**< Wait 128 clock cycles before startup for stability. */

-				EXOSC_START_2048CLK      = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_STARTUP_2048_RCOSC,  /**< Wait 2048 clock cycles before startup for stability. */

-				EXOSC_START_4096CLK      = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_STARTUP_4096_RCOSC,  /**< Wait 4096 clock cycles before startup for stability. */

-				EXOSC_START_8192CLK      = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_STARTUP_8192_RCOSC,  /**< Wait 8192 clock cycles before startup for stability. */

-				EXOSC_START_16384CLK     = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_STARTUP_16384_RCOSC, /**< Wait 16384 clock cycles before startup for stability. */

-			};

-

-			/** Enum for the possible module clock sources. */

-			enum UC3_System_ClockSource_t

-			{

-				CLOCK_SRC_SLOW_CLK       = 0, /**< Clock sourced from the internal slow clock. */

-				CLOCK_SRC_OSC0           = 1, /**< Clock sourced from the Oscillator 0 clock. */

-				CLOCK_SRC_OSC1           = 2, /**< Clock sourced from the Oscillator 1 clock. */

-				CLOCK_SRC_PLL0           = 3, /**< Clock sourced from the PLL 0 clock. */

-				CLOCK_SRC_PLL1           = 4, /**< Clock sourced from the PLL 1 clock. */

-			};

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Starts the given external oscillator of the UC3 microcontroller, with the given options. This routine blocks until

-			 *  the oscillator is ready for use.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Channel  Index of the external oscillator to start.

-			 *  \param[in] Type     Type of clock attached to the given oscillator channel, a value from \ref UC3_Extern_OSC_ClockTypes_t.

-			 *  \param[in] Startup  Statup time of the external oscillator, a value from \ref UC3_Extern_OSC_ClockStartup_t.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the external oscillator was successfully started, \c false if invalid parameters specified.

-			 */

-			static inline bool AVR32CLK_StartExternalOscillator(const uint8_t Channel,

-			                                                    const uint8_t Type,

-			                                                    const uint8_t Startup) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool AVR32CLK_StartExternalOscillator(const uint8_t Channel,

-			                                                    const uint8_t Type,

-			                                                    const uint8_t Startup)

-			{

-				switch (Channel)

-				{

-					case 0:

-						AVR32_PM.OSCCTRL0.startup = Startup;

-						AVR32_PM.OSCCTRL0.mode    = Type;

-						break;

-					case 1:

-						AVR32_PM.OSCCTRL1.startup = Startup;

-						AVR32_PM.OSCCTRL1.mode    = Type;

-						break;

-					default:

-						return false;

-				}

-

-				AVR32_PM.mcctrl |= (1 << (AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_OSC0EN_OFFSET + Channel));

-

-				while (!(AVR32_PM.poscsr & (1 << (AVR32_PM_POSCSR_OSC0RDY_OFFSET + Channel))));

-				return true;

-			}

-

-			/** Stops the given external oscillator of the UC3 microcontroller.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Channel  Index of the external oscillator to stop.

-			 */

-			static inline void AVR32CLK_StopExternalOscillator(const uint8_t Channel) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void AVR32CLK_StopExternalOscillator(const uint8_t Channel)

-			{

-				AVR32_PM.mcctrl &= ~(1 << (AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_OSC0EN_OFFSET + Channel));

-			}

-

-			/** Starts the given PLL of the UC3 microcontroller, with the given options. This routine blocks until the PLL is ready for use.

-			 *

-			 *  \attention The output frequency must be equal to or greater than the source frequency.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Channel     Index of the PLL to start.

-			 *  \param[in] Source      Clock source for the PLL, a value from \ref UC3_System_ClockSource_t.

-			 *  \param[in] SourceFreq  Frequency of the PLL's clock source, in Hz.

-			 *  \param[in] Frequency   Target frequency of the PLL's output.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the PLL was successfully started, \c false if invalid parameters specified.

-			 */

-			static inline bool AVR32CLK_StartPLL(const uint8_t Channel,

-			                                     const uint8_t Source,

-			                                     const uint32_t SourceFreq,

-			                                     const uint32_t Frequency) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool AVR32CLK_StartPLL(const uint8_t Channel,

-			                                     const uint8_t Source,

-			                                     const uint32_t SourceFreq,

-			                                     const uint32_t Frequency)

-			{

-				if (SourceFreq > Frequency)

-				  return false;

-

-				switch (Source)

-				{

-					case CLOCK_SRC_OSC0:

-						AVR32_PM.PLL[Channel].pllosc = 0;

-						break;

-					case CLOCK_SRC_OSC1:

-						AVR32_PM.PLL[Channel].pllosc = 1;

-						break;

-					default:

-						return false;

-				}

-

-				AVR32_PM.PLL[Channel].pllmul = (Frequency / SourceFreq) ? (((Frequency / SourceFreq) - 1) / 2) : 0;

-				AVR32_PM.PLL[Channel].plldiv = 0;

-				AVR32_PM.PLL[Channel].pllen  = true;

-

-				while (!(AVR32_PM.poscsr & (1 << (AVR32_PM_POSCSR_LOCK0_OFFSET + Channel))));

-				return true;

-			}

-

-			/** Stops the given PLL of the UC3 microcontroller.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Channel  Index of the PLL to stop.

-			 */

-			static inline void AVR32CLK_StopPLL(const uint8_t Channel) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void AVR32CLK_StopPLL(const uint8_t Channel)

-			{

-				AVR32_PM.PLL[Channel].pllen = false;

-			}

-

-			/** Starts the given Generic Clock of the UC3 microcontroller, with the given options.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Channel     Index of the Generic Clock to start.

-			 *  \param[in] Source      Clock source for the Generic Clock, a value from \ref UC3_System_ClockSource_t.

-			 *  \param[in] SourceFreq  Frequency of the Generic Clock's clock source, in Hz.

-			 *  \param[in] Frequency   Target frequency of the Generic Clock's output.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the Generic Clock was successfully started, \c false if invalid parameters specified.

-			 */

-			static inline bool AVR32CLK_StartGenericClock(const uint8_t Channel,

-			                                              const uint8_t Source,

-			                                              const uint32_t SourceFreq,

-			                                              const uint32_t Frequency) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool AVR32CLK_StartGenericClock(const uint8_t Channel,

-			                                              const uint8_t Source,

-			                                              const uint32_t SourceFreq,

-			                                              const uint32_t Frequency)

-			{

-				if (Channel >= AVR32_PM_GCLK_NUM)

-				  return false;

-

-				if (SourceFreq < Frequency)

-				  return false;

-

-				switch (Source)

-				{

-					case CLOCK_SRC_OSC0:

-						AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].pllsel = false;

-						AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].oscsel = 0;

-						break;

-					case CLOCK_SRC_OSC1:

-						AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].pllsel = false;

-						AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].oscsel = 1;

-						break;

-					case CLOCK_SRC_PLL0:

-						AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].pllsel = true;

-						AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].oscsel = 0;

-						break;

-					case CLOCK_SRC_PLL1:

-						AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].pllsel = true;

-						AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].oscsel = 1;

-						break;

-					default:

-						return false;

-				}

-

-				AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].diven = (SourceFreq > Frequency) ? true : false;

-				AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].div   = (((SourceFreq / Frequency) - 1) / 2);

-				AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].cen   = true;

-

-				return true;

-			}

-

-			/** Stops the given generic clock of the UC3 microcontroller.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Channel  Index of the generic clock to stop.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the generic clock was sucessfully stopped, \c false if invalid parameters specified.

-			 */

-			static inline bool AVR32CLK_StopGenericClock(const uint8_t Channel) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool AVR32CLK_StopGenericClock(const uint8_t Channel)

-			{

-				if (Channel >= AVR32_PM_GCLK_NUM)

-				  return false;

-			

-				AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].cen = false;

-				

-				return true;

-			}

-

-			/** Sets the clock source for the main microcontroller core. The given clock source should be configured

-			 *  and ready for use before this function is called.

-			 *

-			 *  This function will configure the FLASH controller's wait states automatically to suit the given clock source.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Source      Clock source for the CPU core, a value from \ref UC3_System_ClockSource_t.

-			 *  \param[in] SourceFreq  Frequency of the CPU core's clock source, in Hz.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the CPU core clock was sucessfully altered, \c false if invalid parameters specified.

-			 */

-			static inline bool AVR32CLK_SetCPUClockSource(const uint8_t Source,

-			                                              const uint32_t SourceFreq) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool AVR32CLK_SetCPUClockSource(const uint8_t Source,

-			                                              const uint32_t SourceFreq)

-			{

-				if (SourceFreq > AVR32_PM_CPU_MAX_FREQ)

-				  return false;

-

-				AVR32_FLASHC.FCR.fws = (SourceFreq > AVR32_FLASHC_FWS_0_MAX_FREQ) ? true : false;

-				

-				switch (Source)

-				{

-					#if defined(AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_MCSEL_SLOW)

-					case CLOCK_SRC_SLOW_CLK:

-						AVR32_PM.MCCTRL.mcsel = AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_MCSEL_SLOW;

-						break;

-					#endif

-					#if defined(AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_MCSEL_OSC0)

-					case CLOCK_SRC_OSC0:

-						AVR32_PM.MCCTRL.mcsel = AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_MCSEL_OSC0;

-						break;

-					#endif

-					#if defined(AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_MCSEL_PLL0)

-					case CLOCK_SRC_PLL0:

-						AVR32_PM.MCCTRL.mcsel = AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_MCSEL_PLL0;

-						break;

-					#endif

-					default:

-						return false;

-				}

-

-				return true;

-			}

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Platform/UC3/Exception.S b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Platform/UC3/Exception.S
deleted file mode 100644
index 1666323e5..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Platform/UC3/Exception.S
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,128 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2011  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#if defined(__AVR32__)

-#include <avr32/io.h>

-

-.section .exception_handlers, "ax", @progbits

-

-// ================= EXCEPTION TABLE ================

-.balign  0x200

-.global  EVBA_Table

-EVBA_Table:

-

-.org  0x000

-Exception_Unrecoverable_Exception:

-	rjmp $

-.org  0x004

-Exception_TLB_Multiple_Hit:

-	rjmp $

-.org  0x008

-Exception_Bus_Error_Data_Fetch:

-	rjmp $

-.org  0x00C

-Exception_Bus_Error_Instruction_Fetch:

-	rjmp $

-.org  0x010

-Exception_NMI:

-	rjmp $

-.org  0x014

-Exception_Instruction_Address:

-	rjmp $

-.org  0x018

-Exception_ITLB_Protection:

-	rjmp $

-.org  0x01C

-Exception_OCD_Breakpoint:

-	rjmp $

-.org  0x020

-Exception_Illegal_Opcode:

-	rjmp $

-.org  0x024

-Exception_Unimplemented_Instruction:

-	rjmp $

-.org  0x028

-Exception_Privilege_Violation:

-	rjmp $

-.org  0x02C

-Exception_Floating_Point:

-	rjmp $

-.org  0x030

-Exception_Coprocessor_Absent:

-	rjmp $

-.org  0x034

-Exception_Data_Address_Read:

-	rjmp $

-.org  0x038

-Exception_Data_Address_Write:

-	rjmp $

-.org  0x03C

-Exception_DTLB_Protection_Read:

-	rjmp $

-.org  0x040

-Exception_DTLB_Protection_Write:

-	rjmp $

-.org  0x044

-Exception_DTLB_Modified:

-	rjmp $

-.org  0x050

-Exception_ITLB_Miss:

-	rjmp $

-.org  0x060

-Exception_DTLB_Miss_Read:

-	rjmp $

-.org  0x070

-Exception_DTLB_Miss_Write:

-	rjmp $

-.org  0x100

-Exception_Supervisor_Call:

-    rjmp $

-// ============== END OF EXCEPTION TABLE =============

-

-// ============= GENERAL INTERRUPT HANDLER ===========

-.balign 4

-.irp    Level, 0, 1, 2, 3

-Exception_INT\Level:

-	mov     r12, \Level

-	call    INTC_GetInterruptHandler

-	mov     pc, r12

-.endr

-// ========= END OF GENERAL INTERRUPT HANDLER ========

-

-// ====== GENERAL INTERRUPT HANDLER OFFSET TABLE ======

-.balign 4

-.global Autovector_Table

-Autovector_Table:

-.irp    Level, 0, 1, 2, 3

-	.word ((AVR32_INTC_INT0 + \Level) << AVR32_INTC_IPR_INTLEVEL_OFFSET) | (Exception_INT\Level - EVBA_Table)

-.endr

-// === END OF GENERAL INTERRUPT HANDLER OFFSET TABLE ===

-

-#endif

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.c
deleted file mode 100644
index 84e16ba20..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.c
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,68 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#include "../../Common/Common.h"

-#if (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)

-

-#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_INTMANAGEMENT_C

-#include "InterruptManagement.h"

-

-/** Interrupt vector table, containing the ISR to call for each interrupt group */

-InterruptHandlerPtr_t InterruptHandlers[AVR32_INTC_NUM_INT_GRPS];

-

-/** ISR for unhandled interrupt groups */

-ISR(Unhandled_Interrupt)

-{

-	for (;;);

-}

-

-/** Retrieves the associated interrupt handler for the interrupt group currently being fired. This

- *  is called directly from the exception handler routine before dispatching to the ISR.

- */

-InterruptHandlerPtr_t INTC_GetInterruptHandler(const uint_reg_t InterruptLevel)

-{

-	return InterruptHandlers[AVR32_INTC.icr[AVR32_INTC_INT3 - InterruptLevel]];

-}

-

-/** Initializes the interrupt controller ready to handle interrupts. This must be called at the

- *  start of the user program before any interrupts are registered or enabled.

- */

-void INTC_Init(void)

-{

-	for (uint8_t InterruptGroup = 0; InterruptGroup < AVR32_INTC_NUM_INT_GRPS; InterruptGroup++)

-	{

-		InterruptHandlers[InterruptGroup] = Unhandled_Interrupt;

-		AVR32_INTC.ipr[InterruptGroup]    = Autovector_Table[AVR32_INTC_INT0];

-	}

-

-	__builtin_mtsr(AVR32_EVBA, (uintptr_t)&EVBA_Table);

-}

-

-#endif

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.h
deleted file mode 100644
index b0e1e3ec1..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,163 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Interrupt Controller Driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.

- *

- *  Interrupt controller driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers, for the configuration of interrupt

- *  handlers within the device.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_PlatformDrivers_UC3

- *  \defgroup Group_PlatformDrivers_UC3Interrupts Interrupt Controller Driver - LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.h

- *  \brief Interrupt Controller Driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_PLATFORM)</i>

- *    - LUFA/Platform/UC3/Exception.S <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_PLATFORM)</i>

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Interrupt controller driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers, for the configuration of interrupt

- *  handlers within the device.

- *

- *  Usage Example:

- *  \code

- *		#include <LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.h>

- *      

- *		ISR(USB_Group_IRQ_Handler)

- *		{

- *			// USB group handler code here

- *		}

- *      

- *		void main(void)

- *		{

- *			INTC_Init();

- *			INTC_RegisterGroupHandler(INTC_IRQ_GROUP(AVR32_USBB_IRQ), AVR32_INTC_INT0, USB_Group_IRQ_Handler);

- *		}

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef _UC3_INTERRUPT_MANAGEMENT_H_

-#define _UC3_INTERRUPT_MANAGEMENT_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */

-	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)

-		/* Type Defines: */

-			typedef void (*InterruptHandlerPtr_t)(void);

-

-		/* External Variables: */

-			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_INTMANAGEMENT_C)

-				extern const void        EVBA_Table;

-			#endif

-			extern InterruptHandlerPtr_t InterruptHandlers[AVR32_INTC_NUM_INT_GRPS];

-			extern const uint32_t        Autovector_Table[];

-	#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Converts a given interrupt index into its associated interrupt group.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] IRQIndex  Index of the interrupt request to convert.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Interrupt group number associated with the interrupt index.

-			 */

-			#define INTC_IRQ_GROUP(IRQIndex)  (IRQIndex / 32)

-

-			/** Converts a given interrupt index into its associated interrupt line.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] IRQIndex  Index of the interrupt request to convert.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Interrupt line number associated with the interrupt index.

-			 */

-			#define INTC_IRQ_LINE(IRQIndex)   (IRQIndex % 32)

-

-		/* Function Prototypes: */

-			void INTC_Init(void);			

-			InterruptHandlerPtr_t INTC_GetInterruptHandler(const uint_reg_t InterruptLevel);

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Registers a handler for a given interrupt group. On the AVR32 UC3 devices, interrupts are grouped by

-			 *  peripheral. To save on SRAM used, a single ISR handles all interrupt lines within a single group - to

-			 *  determine the exact line that has interrupted within the group ISR handler, use \ref INTC_GetGroupInterrupts().

-			 *

-			 *  If multiple interrupts with the same group are registered, the last registered handler will become the

-			 *  handler called for interrupts raised within that group.

-			 *

-			 *  To obtain the group number of a specific interrupt index, use the \ref INTC_IRQ_GROUP() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] GroupNumber       Group number of the interrupt group to register a handler for.

-			 *  \param[in] InterruptLevel    Priority level for the specified interrupt, a \c AVR32_INTC_INT* mask.

-			 *  \param[in] Handler           Address of the ISR handler for the interrupt group.

-			 */

-			static inline void INTC_RegisterGroupHandler(const uint16_t GroupNumber,

-			                                             const uint8_t InterruptLevel,

-			                                             const InterruptHandlerPtr_t Handler) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void INTC_RegisterGroupHandler(const uint16_t GroupNumber,

-			                                             const uint8_t InterruptLevel,

-			                                             const InterruptHandlerPtr_t Handler)

-			{

-				InterruptHandlers[GroupNumber] = Handler;

-				AVR32_INTC.ipr[GroupNumber]    = Autovector_Table[InterruptLevel];

-			}

-

-			/** Retrieves the pending interrupts for a given interrupt group. The result of this function should be masked

-			 *  against interrupt request indexes converted to a request line number via the \ref INTC_IRQ_LINE() macro. To

-			 *  obtain the group number of a given interrupt request, use the \ref INTC_IRQ_GROUP() macro.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] GroupNumber Group number of the interrupt group to check.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Mask of pending interrupt lines for the given interrupt group.

-			 */

-			static inline uint_reg_t INTC_GetGroupInterrupts(const uint16_t GroupNumber) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint_reg_t INTC_GetGroupInterrupts(const uint16_t GroupNumber)

-			{

-				return AVR32_INTC.irr[GroupNumber];

-			}

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Platform/XMEGA/ClockManagement.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Platform/XMEGA/ClockManagement.h
deleted file mode 100644
index cd9c5f49e..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Platform/XMEGA/ClockManagement.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,397 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *  \brief Module Clock Driver for the AVR USB XMEGA microcontrollers.

- *

- *  Clock management driver for the AVR USB XMEGA microcontrollers. This driver allows for the configuration

- *  of the various clocks within the device to clock the various peripherals.

- */

-

-/** \ingroup Group_PlatformDrivers_XMEGA

- *  \defgroup Group_PlatformDrivers_XMEGAClocks Clock Management Driver - LUFA/Platform/XMEGA/ClockManagement.h

- *  \brief Module Clock Driver for the AVR USB XMEGA microcontrollers.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies

- *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:

- *    - None

- *

- *  \section Sec_ModDescription Module Description

- *  Clock management driver for the AVR USB XMEGA microcontrollers. This driver allows for the configuration

- *  of the various clocks within the device to clock the various peripherals.

- *

- *  Usage Example:

- *  \code

- *   	#include <LUFA/Platform/XMEGA/ClockManagement.h>

- *      

- *   	void main(void)

- *   	{

- *   		// Start the PLL to multiply the 2MHz RC oscillator to F_CPU and switch the CPU core to run from it

- *   		XMEGACLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ, 2000000, F_CPU);

- *   		XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL);

- *          

- *   		// Start the 32MHz internal RC oscillator and start the DFLL to increase it to F_USB using the USB SOF as a reference

- *   		XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);

- *   		XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF, F_USB);

- *   	}

- *  \endcode

- *

- *  @{

- */

-

-#ifndef _XMEGA_CLOCK_MANAGEMENT_H_

-#define _XMEGA_CLOCK_MANAGEMENT_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include "../../Common/Common.h"

-

-	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			extern "C" {

-		#endif

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Enum for the possible external oscillator frequency ranges. */

-			enum XMEGA_Extern_OSC_ClockFrequency_t

-			{

-				EXOSC_FREQ_2MHZ_MAX      = OSC_FRQRANGE_04TO2_gc,  /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or slower than 2MHz. */

-				EXOSC_FREQ_9MHZ_MAX      = OSC_FRQRANGE_2TO9_gc,   /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or slower than 9MHz. */

-				EXOSC_FREQ_12MHZ_MAX     = OSC_FRQRANGE_9TO12_gc,  /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or slower than 12MHz. */

-				EXOSC_FREQ_16MHZ_MAX     = OSC_FRQRANGE_12TO16_gc, /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or slower than 16MHz. */

-			};

-

-			/** Enum for the possible external oscillator startup times. */

-			enum XMEGA_Extern_OSC_ClockStartup_t

-			{

-				EXOSC_START_6CLK         = OSC_XOSCSEL_EXTCLK_gc,      /**< Wait 6 clock cycles before startup (external clock). */

-				EXOSC_START_32KCLK       = OSC_XOSCSEL_32KHz_gc,       /**< Wait 32K clock cycles before startup (32.768KHz crystal). */

-				EXOSC_START_256CLK       = OSC_XOSCSEL_XTAL_256CLK_gc, /**< Wait 256 clock cycles before startup. */

-				EXOSC_START_1KCLK        = OSC_XOSCSEL_XTAL_1KCLK_gc,  /**< Wait 1K clock cycles before startup. */

-				EXOSC_START_16KCLK       = OSC_XOSCSEL_XTAL_16KCLK_gc, /**< Wait 16K clock cycles before startup. */

-			};

-

-			/** Enum for the possible module clock sources. */

-			enum XMEGA_System_ClockSource_t

-			{

-				CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ    = 0, /**< Clock sourced from the Internal 2MHz RC Oscillator clock. */

-				CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ   = 1, /**< Clock sourced from the Internal 32MHz RC Oscillator clock. */

-				CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32KHZ   = 2, /**< Clock sourced from the Internal 32KHz RC Oscillator clock. */

-				CLOCK_SRC_XOSC          = 3, /**< Clock sourced from the External Oscillator clock. */

-				CLOCK_SRC_PLL           = 4, /**< Clock sourced from the Internal PLL clock. */

-			};

-

-			/** Enum for the possible DFLL clock reference sources. */

-			enum XMEGA_System_DFLLReference_t

-			{

-				DFLL_REF_INT_RC32KHZ   = 0, /**< Reference clock sourced from the Internal 32KHz RC Oscillator clock. */

-				DFLL_REF_EXT_RC32KHZ   = 1, /**< Reference clock sourced from the External 32KHz RC Oscillator clock connected to TOSC pins. */

-				DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF    = 2, /**< Reference clock sourced from the USB Start Of Frame packets. */

-			};

-

-		/* Inline Functions: */

-			/** Write a value to a location protected by the XMEGA CCP protection mechanism. This function uses inline assembly to ensure that

-			 *  the protected address is written to within four clock cycles of the CCP key being written.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Address  Address to write to, a memory address protected by the CCP mechanism

-			 *  \param[in] Value    Value to write to the protected location

-			 */

-			static inline void XMEGACLK_CCP_Write(volatile void* Address, const uint8_t Value) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void XMEGACLK_CCP_Write(volatile void* Address, const uint8_t Value)

-			{

-				__asm__ __volatile__ (

-					"out %0, __zero_reg__" "\n\t" /* Zero RAMPZ using fixed zero value register */

-					"movw r30, %1"         "\n\t" /* Copy address to Z register pair */

-					"out %2, %3"           "\n\t" /* Write key to CCP register */

-					"st Z, %4"             "\n\t" /* Indirectly write value to address */

-					: /* No output operands */

-					: /* Input operands: */ "m" (RAMPZ), "e" (Address), "m" (CCP), "r" (CCP_IOREG_gc), "r" (Value)

-					: /* Clobbered registers: */ "r30", "r31"

-				); 

-			}

-

-			/** Starts the external oscillator of the XMEGA microcontroller, with the given options. This routine blocks until

-			 *  the oscillator is ready for use.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] FreqRange  Frequency range of the external oscillator, a value from \ref XMEGA_Extern_OSC_ClockFrequency_t.

-			 *  \param[in] Startup    Startup time of the external oscillator, a value from \ref XMEGA_Extern_OSC_ClockStartup_t.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the external oscillator was successfully started, \c false if invalid parameters specified.

-			 */

-			static inline bool XMEGACLK_StartExternalOscillator(const uint8_t FreqRange,

-			                                                    const uint8_t Startup) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool XMEGACLK_StartExternalOscillator(const uint8_t FreqRange,

-			                                                    const uint8_t Startup)

-			{

-				OSC.XOSCCTRL  = (FreqRange | ((Startup == EXOSC_START_32KCLK) ? OSC_X32KLPM_bm : 0) | Startup);

-				OSC.CTRL     |= OSC_XOSCEN_bm;

-

-				while (!(OSC.STATUS & OSC_XOSCRDY_bm));

-				return true;

-			}

-

-			/** Stops the external oscillator of the XMEGA microcontroller. */

-			static inline void XMEGACLK_StopExternalOscillator(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void XMEGACLK_StopExternalOscillator(void)

-			{

-				OSC.CTRL     &= ~OSC_XOSCEN_bm;

-			}

-

-			/** Starts the given internal oscillator of the XMEGA microcontroller, with the given options. This routine blocks until

-			 *  the oscillator is ready for use.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Source  Internal oscillator to start, a value from \ref XMEGA_System_ClockSource_t.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the internal oscillator was successfully started, \c false if invalid parameters specified.

-			 */

-			static inline uint8_t XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(const uint8_t Source) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline uint8_t XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(const uint8_t Source)

-			{

-				switch (Source)

-				{

-					case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ:

-						OSC.CTRL |= OSC_RC2MEN_bm;

-						while (!(OSC.STATUS & OSC_RC2MRDY_bm));

-						return true;

-					case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ:

-						OSC.CTRL |= OSC_RC32MEN_bm;

-						while (!(OSC.STATUS & OSC_RC32MRDY_bm));

-						return true;

-					case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32KHZ:

-						OSC.CTRL |= OSC_RC32KEN_bm;

-						while (!(OSC.STATUS & OSC_RC32KRDY_bm));

-						return true;

-				}

-

-				return false;

-			}

-

-			/** Stops the given internal oscillator of the XMEGA microcontroller.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Source  Internal oscillator to stop, a value from \ref XMEGA_System_ClockSource_t.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the internal oscillator was successfully stopped, \c false if invalid parameters specified.

-			 */

-			static inline bool XMEGACLK_StopInternalOscillator(const uint8_t Source) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool XMEGACLK_StopInternalOscillator(const uint8_t Source)

-			{

-				switch (Source)

-				{

-					case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ:

-						OSC.CTRL &= ~OSC_RC2MEN_bm;

-						return true;

-					case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ:

-						OSC.CTRL &= ~OSC_RC32MEN_bm;

-						return true;

-					case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32KHZ:

-						OSC.CTRL &= ~OSC_RC32KEN_bm;

-						return true;

-				}

-

-				return false;

-			}

-

-			/** Starts the PLL of the XMEGA microcontroller, with the given options. This routine blocks until the PLL is ready for use.

-			 *

-			 *  \attention The output frequency must be equal to or greater than the source frequency.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Source       Clock source for the PLL, a value from \ref XMEGA_System_ClockSource_t.

-			 *  \param[in] SourceFreq   Frequency of the PLL's clock source, in Hz.

-			 *  \param[in] Frequency    Target frequency of the PLL's output.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the PLL was successfully started, \c false if invalid parameters specified.

-			 */

-			static inline bool XMEGACLK_StartPLL(const uint8_t Source,

-			                                     const uint32_t SourceFreq,

-			                                     const uint32_t Frequency) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool XMEGACLK_StartPLL(const uint8_t Source,

-			                                     const uint32_t SourceFreq,

-			                                     const uint32_t Frequency)

-			{

-				uint8_t MulFactor = (Frequency / SourceFreq);

-

-				if (SourceFreq > Frequency)

-				  return false;

-				  

-				if (MulFactor > 31)

-				  return false;

-

-				switch (Source)

-				{

-					case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ:

-						OSC.PLLCTRL = (OSC_PLLSRC_RC2M_gc  | MulFactor);

-						break;

-					case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ:

-						OSC.PLLCTRL = (OSC_PLLSRC_RC32M_gc | MulFactor);

-						break;

-					case CLOCK_SRC_XOSC:

-						OSC.PLLCTRL = (OSC_PLLSRC_XOSC_gc  | MulFactor);

-						break;

-					default:

-						return false;

-				}

-

-				OSC.CTRL |= OSC_PLLEN_bm;

-

-				while (!(OSC.STATUS & OSC_PLLRDY_bm));

-				return true;

-			}

-

-			/** Stops the PLL of the XMEGA microcontroller. */

-			static inline void XMEGACLK_StopPLL(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline void XMEGACLK_StopPLL(void)

-			{

-				OSC.CTRL &= ~OSC_PLLEN_bm;

-			}

-

-			/** Starts the DFLL of the XMEGA microcontroller, with the given options.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Source     RC Clock source for the DFLL, a value from \ref XMEGA_System_ClockSource_t.

-			 *  \param[in] Reference  Reference clock source for the DFLL, an value from \ref XMEGA_System_DFLLReference_t.

-			 *  \param[in] Frequency  Target frequency of the DFLL's output.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the DFLL was successfully started, \c false if invalid parameters specified.

-			 */

-			static inline bool XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(const uint8_t Source,

-			                                      const uint8_t Reference,

-			                                      const uint32_t Frequency) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(const uint8_t Source,

-			                                      const uint8_t Reference,

-			                                      const uint32_t Frequency)

-			{

-				uint16_t DFLLCompare = (Frequency / 1000);

-

-				switch (Source)

-				{

-					case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ:

-						OSC.DFLLCTRL   |= (Reference << OSC_RC2MCREF_bp);

-						DFLLRC2M.COMP1  = (DFLLCompare & 0xFF);

-						DFLLRC2M.COMP2  = (DFLLCompare >> 8);

-						DFLLRC2M.CTRL   = DFLL_ENABLE_bm;

-						break;

-					case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ:

-						OSC.DFLLCTRL   |= (Reference << OSC_RC32MCREF_gp);

-						DFLLRC32M.COMP1 = (DFLLCompare & 0xFF);

-						DFLLRC32M.COMP2 = (DFLLCompare >> 8);

-

-						if (Reference == DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF)

-						{

-							NVM.CMD        = NVM_CMD_READ_CALIB_ROW_gc;

-							DFLLRC32M.CALA = pgm_read_byte(offsetof(NVM_PROD_SIGNATURES_t, USBRCOSCA));

-							DFLLRC32M.CALB = pgm_read_byte(offsetof(NVM_PROD_SIGNATURES_t, USBRCOSC));

-							NVM.CMD        = 0;

-						}

-

-						DFLLRC32M.CTRL  = DFLL_ENABLE_bm;

-						break;

-					default:

-						return false;

-				}

-

-				return true;

-			}

-

-			/** Stops the given DFLL of the XMEGA microcontroller.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Source  RC Clock source for the DFLL to be stopped, a value from \ref XMEGA_System_ClockSource_t.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the DFLL was successfully stopped, \c false if invalid parameters specified.

-			 */

-			static inline bool XMEGACLK_StopDFLL(const uint8_t Source) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool XMEGACLK_StopDFLL(const uint8_t Source)

-			{

-				switch (Source)

-				{

-					case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ:

-						DFLLRC2M.CTRL = 0;

-						break;

-					case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ:

-						DFLLRC32M.CTRL = 0;

-						break;

-					default:

-						return false;

-				}

-

-				return true;

-			}

-

-			/** Sets the clock source for the main microcontroller core. The given clock source should be configured

-			 *  and ready for use before this function is called.

-			 *

-			 *  \param[in] Source      Clock source for the CPU core, a value from \ref XMEGA_System_ClockSource_t.

-			 *

-			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the CPU core clock was successfully altered, \c false if invalid parameters specified.

-			 */

-			static inline bool XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(const uint8_t Source) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;

-			static inline bool XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(const uint8_t Source)

-			{

-				uint8_t ClockSourceMask = 0;

-

-				switch (Source)

-				{

-					case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ:

-						ClockSourceMask = CLK_SCLKSEL_RC2M_gc;

-						break;

-					case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ:

-						ClockSourceMask = CLK_SCLKSEL_RC32M_gc;

-						break;

-					case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32KHZ:

-						ClockSourceMask = CLK_SCLKSEL_RC32K_gc;

-						break;

-					case CLOCK_SRC_XOSC:

-						ClockSourceMask = CLK_SCLKSEL_XOSC_gc;

-						break;

-					case CLOCK_SRC_PLL:

-						ClockSourceMask = CLK_SCLKSEL_PLL_gc;

-						break;

-					default:

-						return false;

-				}

-

-				uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask();

-				GlobalInterruptDisable();

-

-				XMEGACLK_CCP_Write(&CLK.CTRL, ClockSourceMask);

-

-				SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt);

-

-				Delay_MS(1);

-				return (CLK.CTRL == ClockSourceMask);

-			}

-

-	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */

-		#if defined(__cplusplus)

-			}

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

-/** @} */

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Version.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Version.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 29b5020f6..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/Version.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,52 +0,0 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2012  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  \brief LUFA library version constants.

- *

- *  Version constants for informational purposes and version-specific macro creation. This header file contains the

- *  current LUFA version number in several forms, for use in the user-application (for example, for printing out

- *  whilst debugging, or for testing for version compatibility).

- */

-

-#ifndef __LUFA_VERSION_H__

-#define __LUFA_VERSION_H__

-

-	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */

-		/* Macros: */

-			/** Indicates the version number of the library, as an integer. */

-			#define LUFA_VERSION_INTEGER     0x120730

-

-			/** Indicates the version number of the library, as a string. */

-			#define LUFA_VERSION_STRING      "120730"

-

-#endif

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/makefile
deleted file mode 100644
index fcf46bf68..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/makefile
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
-#

-#             LUFA Library

-#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2012.

-#

-#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-#           www.lufa-lib.org

-#

-# ---------------------------------------

-#  Makefile for the LUFA library itself.

-# ---------------------------------------

-

-LUFA_VERSION_NUM        := $(shell grep LUFA_VERSION_STRING Version.h | cut -d'"' -f2)

-EXCLUDE_FROM_EXPORT     := Documentation DoxygenPages CodeTemplates Build *.conf *.tar *.o *.d *.lss *.lst *.hex *.elf *.hex *.eep *.map *.bin

-

-all:

-

-export_tar:

-	@echo Exporting LUFA library to a TAR archive...

-	@tar -cf LUFA_$(LUFA_VERSION_NUM).tar --directory=. $(EXCLUDE_FROM_EXPORT:%=--exclude=%) *

-	@tar -cf LUFA_$(LUFA_VERSION_NUM)_Code_Templates.tar CodeTemplates

-	@echo Export LUFA_$(LUFA_VERSION_NUM).tar complete.

-

-version:

-	@echo "LUFA $(LUFA_VERSION_NUM)"

-

-# Check if this is being included from a legacy or non LUFA build system makefile

-ifneq ($(LUFA_PATH),)

-  LUFA_ROOT_PATH = $(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_PATH))/LUFA/

-  

-  include $(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_PATH))/LUFA/Build/lufa.sources.in

-else

-  LUFA_BUILD_MODULES     += MASTER

-  LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS     += export_tar version

-

-  LUFA_PATH               = .

-  ARCH                    = {AVR8,UC3,XMEGA}

-  DOXYGEN_OVERRIDE_PARAMS = QUIET=YES PROJECT_NUMBER=$(LUFA_VERSION_NUM)

-  

-  clean:

-	rm -f $(LUFA_SRC_ALL_FILES:%.c=%.o)

-	rm -f $(LUFA_SRC_ALL_FILES:%.c=%.d)

-	rm -f $(LUFA_SRC_ALL_FILES:%.c=%.lst)

-

-  include Build/lufa_core.mk

-  include Build/lufa_sources.mk

-  include Build/lufa_doxygen.mk

-endif

-

-

-.PHONY: all export_tar version clean
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/README.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/README.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index aacb4af9a..000000000
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/README.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,56 +0,0 @@
-

-                   _   _ _ ___ _

-                  | | | | | __/ \

-                  | |_| U | _| o | - The Lightweight USB

-                  |___|___|_||_n_|    Framework for AVRs

-                =========================================

-                          Written by Dean Camera

-                  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-

-                         http://www.lufa-lib.org

-                =========================================

-

-               LUFA is donation supported. To support LUFA,

-             please donate at http://www.lufa-lib.org/donate

-

-               Released under a modified MIT license - see

-                  LUFA/License.txt for license details.

-

-                For Commercial Licensing information, see

-                     http://www.lufa-lib.org/license

-

-

-This package contains the complete LUFA library, demos, user-submitted

-projects and bootloaders for use with compatible microcontroller models.

-LUFA is a simple to use, lightweight framework which sits atop the hardware

-USB controller in specific AVR microcontroller models, and allows for the

-quick and easy creation of complex USB devices and hosts.

-

-To get started, you will need to install the "Doxygen" documentation

-generation tool. If you use Linux, this can be installed via the "doxygen"

-package in your chosen package management tool - under Ubuntu, this can be

-achieved by running the following command in the terminal:

-

-   sudo apt-get install doxygen

-

-Other package managers and distributions will have similar methods to

-install Doxygen. In Windows, you can download a prebuilt installer for

-Doxygen from its website, www.doxygen.org.

-

-Once installed, you can then use the Doxygen tool to generate the library

-documentation from the command line or terminal of your operating system. To

-do this, open your terminal or command line to the root directory of the

-LUFA package, and type the following command:

-

-   make doxygen

-

-Which will recursively generate documentation for all elements in the

-library - the core, plus all demos, projects and bootloaders. Generated

-documentation will then be available by opening the file "index.html" of the

-created Documentation/html/ subdirectories inside each project folder.

-

-The documentation for the library itself (but not the documentation for the

-individual demos, projects or bootloaders) is also available as a separate

-package from the project webpage for convenience if Doxygen cannot be

-installed.

-

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git
deleted file mode 160000
-Subproject b6c18b2a7c544653efbe12a1d4e8ba65e7d83c3
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/.gitignore b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/.gitignore
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..045f96980
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/.gitignore
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+*.o
+*.d
+*.elf
+*.hex
+*.eep
+*.sym
+*.bin
+*.lss
+*.map
+*.bak
+*.class
+Documentation/
+LUFA/StudioIntegration/ProjectGenerator/*
+LUFA/StudioIntegration/DocBook/*
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderAPI.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderAPI.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f7564e982
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderAPI.c
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Bootloader user application API functions.
+ */
+
+#include "BootloaderAPI.h"
+
+void BootloaderAPI_ErasePage(const uint32_t Address)
+{
+	boot_page_erase_safe(Address);
+	boot_spm_busy_wait();
+	boot_rww_enable();
+}
+
+void BootloaderAPI_WritePage(const uint32_t Address)
+{
+	boot_page_write_safe(Address);
+	boot_spm_busy_wait();
+	boot_rww_enable();
+}
+
+void BootloaderAPI_FillWord(const uint32_t Address, const uint16_t Word)
+{
+	boot_page_fill_safe(Address, Word);
+}
+
+uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature(const uint16_t Address)
+{
+	return boot_signature_byte_get(Address);
+}
+
+uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse(const uint16_t Address)
+{
+	return boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(Address);
+}
+
+uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadLock(void)
+{
+	return boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_LOCK_BITS);
+}
+
+void BootloaderAPI_WriteLock(const uint8_t LockBits)
+{
+	boot_lock_bits_set_safe(LockBits);
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderAPI.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderAPI.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2462cacdd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderAPI.h
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for BootloaderAPI.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _BOOTLOADER_API_H_
+#define _BOOTLOADER_API_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/boot.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void    BootloaderAPI_ErasePage(const uint32_t Address);
+		void    BootloaderAPI_WritePage(const uint32_t Address);
+		void    BootloaderAPI_FillWord(const uint32_t Address, const uint16_t Word);
+		uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature(const uint16_t Address);
+		uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse(const uint16_t Address);
+		uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadLock(void);
+		void    BootloaderAPI_WriteLock(const uint8_t LockBits);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderAPITable.S b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderAPITable.S
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..69ebd387a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderAPITable.S
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+; Trampolines to actual API implementations if the target address is outside the
+; range of a rjmp instruction (can happen with large bootloader sections)
+.section .apitable_trampolines, "ax"
+.global BootloaderAPI_Trampolines
+BootloaderAPI_Trampolines:
+
+	BootloaderAPI_ErasePage_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ErasePage
+	BootloaderAPI_WritePage_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_WritePage
+	BootloaderAPI_FillWord_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_FillWord
+	BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature
+	BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse
+	BootloaderAPI_ReadLock_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadLock
+	BootloaderAPI_WriteLock_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_WriteLock
+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED1:
+		ret
+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED2:
+		ret
+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED3:
+		ret
+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED4:
+		ret
+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED5:
+		ret
+
+
+
+; API function jump table
+.section .apitable_jumptable, "ax"
+.global BootloaderAPI_JumpTable
+BootloaderAPI_JumpTable:
+
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ErasePage_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_WritePage_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_FillWord_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadLock_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_WriteLock_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED1 ; UNUSED ENTRY 1
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED2 ; UNUSED ENTRY 2
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED3 ; UNUSED ENTRY 3
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED4 ; UNUSED ENTRY 4
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED5 ; UNUSED ENTRY 5
+
+
+
+; Bootloader table signatures and information
+.section .apitable_signatures, "ax"
+.global BootloaderAPI_Signatures
+BootloaderAPI_Signatures:
+
+	.long BOOT_START_ADDR ; Start address of the bootloader
+	.word 0xDF00 ; Signature for the CDC class bootloader
+	.word 0xDCFB ; Signature for a LUFA class bootloader
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f66a483e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.c
@@ -0,0 +1,641 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the CDC class bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADERCDC_C
+#include "BootloaderCDC.h"
+
+/** Contains the current baud rate and other settings of the first virtual serial port. This must be retained as some
+ *  operating systems will not open the port unless the settings can be set successfully.
+ */
+static CDC_LineEncoding_t LineEncoding = { .BaudRateBPS = 0,
+                                           .CharFormat  = CDC_LINEENCODING_OneStopBit,
+                                           .ParityType  = CDC_PARITY_None,
+                                           .DataBits    = 8                            };
+
+/** Current address counter. This stores the current address of the FLASH or EEPROM as set by the host,
+ *  and is used when reading or writing to the AVRs memory (either FLASH or EEPROM depending on the issued
+ *  command.)
+ */
+static uint32_t CurrAddress;
+
+/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run
+ *  via a watchdog reset. When cleared the bootloader will exit, starting the watchdog and entering an infinite
+ *  loop until the AVR restarts and the application runs.
+ */
+static bool RunBootloader = true;
+
+/** Magic lock for forced application start. If the HWBE fuse is programmed and BOOTRST is unprogrammed, the bootloader
+ *  will start if the /HWB line of the AVR is held low and the system is reset. However, if the /HWB line is still held
+ *  low when the application attempts to start via a watchdog reset, the bootloader will re-start. If set to the value
+ *  \ref MAGIC_BOOT_KEY the special init function \ref Application_Jump_Check() will force the application to start.
+ */
+uint16_t MagicBootKey ATTR_NO_INIT;
+
+
+/** Special startup routine to check if the bootloader was started via a watchdog reset, and if the magic application
+ *  start key has been loaded into \ref MagicBootKey. If the bootloader started via the watchdog and the key is valid,
+ *  this will force the user application to start via a software jump.
+ */
+void Application_Jump_Check(void)
+{
+	bool JumpToApplication = false;
+
+	#if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+		/* Disable JTAG debugging */
+		JTAG_DISABLE();
+
+		/* Enable pull-up on the JTAG TCK pin so we can use it to select the mode */
+		PORTF |= (1 << 4);
+		Delay_MS(10);
+
+		/* If the TCK pin is not jumpered to ground, start the user application instead */
+		JumpToApplication |= ((PINF & (1 << 4)) != 0);
+
+		/* Re-enable JTAG debugging */
+		JTAG_ENABLE();
+	#endif
+
+	/* If the reset source was the bootloader and the key is correct, clear it and jump to the application */
+	if ((MCUSR & (1 << WDRF)) && (MagicBootKey == MAGIC_BOOT_KEY))
+	  JumpToApplication |= true;
+
+	/* If a request has been made to jump to the user application, honor it */
+	if (JumpToApplication)
+	{
+		/* Turn off the watchdog */
+		MCUSR &= ~(1<<WDRF);
+		wdt_disable();
+
+		/* Clear the boot key and jump to the user application */
+		MagicBootKey = 0;
+
+		// cppcheck-suppress constStatement
+		((void (*)(void))0x0000)();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the bootloader, then continuously
+ *  runs the bootloader processing routine until instructed to soft-exit, or hard-reset via the watchdog to start
+ *  the loaded application code.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	/* Setup hardware required for the bootloader */
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	/* Turn on first LED on the board to indicate that the bootloader has started */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1);
+
+	/* Enable global interrupts so that the USB stack can function */
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	while (RunBootloader)
+	{
+		CDC_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+
+	/* Disconnect from the host - USB interface will be reset later along with the AVR */
+	USB_Detach();
+
+	/* Unlock the forced application start mode of the bootloader if it is restarted */
+	MagicBootKey = MAGIC_BOOT_KEY;
+
+	/* Enable the watchdog and force a timeout to reset the AVR */
+	wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS);
+
+	for (;;);
+}
+
+/** Configures all hardware required for the bootloader. */
+static void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */
+	MCUCR = (1 << IVCE);
+	MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL);
+
+	/* Initialize the USB and other board hardware drivers */
+	USB_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+
+	/* Bootloader active LED toggle timer initialization */
+	TIMSK1 = (1 << TOIE1);
+	TCCR1B = ((1 << CS11) | (1 << CS10));
+}
+
+/** ISR to periodically toggle the LEDs on the board to indicate that the bootloader is active. */
+ISR(TIMER1_OVF_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This configures the device's endpoints ready
+ *  to relay data to and from the attached USB host.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	/* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints */
+	Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+	                           CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, 1);
+
+	Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, 1);
+
+	Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, 1);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to
+ *  the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing
+ *  internally.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	/* Ignore any requests that aren't directed to the CDC interface */
+	if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & (CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE | CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT)) !=
+	    (REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+	{
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Activity - toggle indicator LEDs */
+	LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+
+	/* Process CDC specific control requests */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case CDC_REQ_GetLineEncoding:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Write the line coding data to the control endpoint */
+				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&LineEncoding, sizeof(CDC_LineEncoding_t));
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case CDC_REQ_SetLineEncoding:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Read the line coding data in from the host into the global struct */
+				Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(&LineEncoding, sizeof(CDC_LineEncoding_t));
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+			}
+
+			break;
+        case CDC_REQ_SetControlLineState:
+	        if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+	        {
+	            Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+	            Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+	        }
+
+	        break;
+	}
+}
+
+#if !defined(NO_BLOCK_SUPPORT)
+/** Reads or writes a block of EEPROM or FLASH memory to or from the appropriate CDC data endpoint, depending
+ *  on the AVR109 protocol command issued.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Command  Single character AVR109 protocol command indicating what memory operation to perform
+ */
+static void ReadWriteMemoryBlock(const uint8_t Command)
+{
+	uint16_t BlockSize;
+	char     MemoryType;
+
+	uint8_t  HighByte = 0;
+	uint8_t  LowByte  = 0;
+
+	BlockSize  = (FetchNextCommandByte() << 8);
+	BlockSize |=  FetchNextCommandByte();
+
+	MemoryType =  FetchNextCommandByte();
+
+	if ((MemoryType != MEMORY_TYPE_FLASH) && (MemoryType != MEMORY_TYPE_EEPROM))
+	{
+		/* Send error byte back to the host */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('?');
+
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Check if command is to read a memory block */
+	if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_BlockRead)
+	{
+		/* Re-enable RWW section */
+		boot_rww_enable();
+
+		while (BlockSize--)
+		{
+			if (MemoryType == MEMORY_TYPE_FLASH)
+			{
+				/* Read the next FLASH byte from the current FLASH page */
+				#if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF)
+				WriteNextResponseByte(pgm_read_byte_far(CurrAddress | HighByte));
+				#else
+				WriteNextResponseByte(pgm_read_byte(CurrAddress | HighByte));
+				#endif
+
+				/* If both bytes in current word have been read, increment the address counter */
+				if (HighByte)
+				  CurrAddress += 2;
+
+				HighByte = !HighByte;
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				/* Read the next EEPROM byte into the endpoint */
+				WriteNextResponseByte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)(intptr_t)(CurrAddress >> 1)));
+
+				/* Increment the address counter after use */
+				CurrAddress += 2;
+			}
+		}
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		uint32_t PageStartAddress = CurrAddress;
+
+		if (MemoryType == MEMORY_TYPE_FLASH)
+		{
+			boot_page_erase(PageStartAddress);
+			boot_spm_busy_wait();
+		}
+
+		while (BlockSize--)
+		{
+			if (MemoryType == MEMORY_TYPE_FLASH)
+			{
+				/* If both bytes in current word have been written, increment the address counter */
+				if (HighByte)
+				{
+					/* Write the next FLASH word to the current FLASH page */
+					boot_page_fill(CurrAddress, ((FetchNextCommandByte() << 8) | LowByte));
+
+					/* Increment the address counter after use */
+					CurrAddress += 2;
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					LowByte = FetchNextCommandByte();
+				}
+
+				HighByte = !HighByte;
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				/* Write the next EEPROM byte from the endpoint */
+				eeprom_write_byte((uint8_t*)((intptr_t)(CurrAddress >> 1)), FetchNextCommandByte());
+
+				/* Increment the address counter after use */
+				CurrAddress += 2;
+			}
+		}
+
+		/* If in FLASH programming mode, commit the page after writing */
+		if (MemoryType == MEMORY_TYPE_FLASH)
+		{
+			/* Commit the flash page to memory */
+			boot_page_write(PageStartAddress);
+
+			/* Wait until write operation has completed */
+			boot_spm_busy_wait();
+		}
+
+		/* Send response byte back to the host */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
+	}
+}
+#endif
+
+/** Retrieves the next byte from the host in the CDC data OUT endpoint, and clears the endpoint bank if needed
+ *  to allow reception of the next data packet from the host.
+ *
+ *  \return Next received byte from the host in the CDC data OUT endpoint
+ */
+static uint8_t FetchNextCommandByte(void)
+{
+	/* Select the OUT endpoint so that the next data byte can be read */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPADDR);
+
+	/* If OUT endpoint empty, clear it and wait for the next packet from the host */
+	while (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	{
+		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+		while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+		{
+			if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+			  return 0;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Fetch the next byte from the OUT endpoint */
+	return Endpoint_Read_8();
+}
+
+/** Writes the next response byte to the CDC data IN endpoint, and sends the endpoint back if needed to free up the
+ *  bank when full ready for the next byte in the packet to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Response  Next response byte to send to the host
+ */
+static void WriteNextResponseByte(const uint8_t Response)
+{
+	/* Select the IN endpoint so that the next data byte can be written */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPADDR);
+
+	/* If IN endpoint full, clear it and wait until ready for the next packet to the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	{
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+		while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+		{
+			if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+			  return;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Write the next byte to the IN endpoint */
+	Endpoint_Write_8(Response);
+}
+
+/** Task to read in AVR109 commands from the CDC data OUT endpoint, process them, perform the required actions
+ *  and send the appropriate response back to the host.
+ */
+static void CDC_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Select the OUT endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPADDR);
+
+	/* Check if endpoint has a command in it sent from the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+	  return;
+
+	/* Read in the bootloader command (first byte sent from host) */
+	uint8_t Command = FetchNextCommandByte();
+
+	if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ExitBootloader)
+	{
+		RunBootloader = false;
+
+		/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
+	}
+	else if ((Command == AVR109_COMMAND_SetLED) || (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ClearLED) ||
+	         (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_SelectDeviceType))
+	{
+		FetchNextCommandByte();
+
+		/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
+	}
+	else if ((Command == AVR109_COMMAND_EnterProgrammingMode) || (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_LeaveProgrammingMode))
+	{
+		/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
+	}
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadPartCode)
+	{
+		/* Return ATMEGA128 part code - this is only to allow AVRProg to use the bootloader */
+		WriteNextResponseByte(0x44);
+		WriteNextResponseByte(0x00);
+	}
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadAutoAddressIncrement)
+	{
+		/* Indicate auto-address increment is supported */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('Y');
+	}
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_SetCurrentAddress)
+	{
+		/* Set the current address to that given by the host (translate 16-bit word address to byte address) */
+		CurrAddress   = (FetchNextCommandByte() << 9);
+		CurrAddress  |= (FetchNextCommandByte() << 1);
+
+		/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
+	}
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadBootloaderInterface)
+	{
+		/* Indicate serial programmer back to the host */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('S');
+	}
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadBootloaderIdentifier)
+	{
+		/* Write the 7-byte software identifier to the endpoint */
+		for (uint8_t CurrByte = 0; CurrByte < 7; CurrByte++)
+		  WriteNextResponseByte(SOFTWARE_IDENTIFIER[CurrByte]);
+	}
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadBootloaderSWVersion)
+	{
+		WriteNextResponseByte('0' + BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MAJOR);
+		WriteNextResponseByte('0' + BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR);
+	}
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadSignature)
+	{
+		WriteNextResponseByte(AVR_SIGNATURE_3);
+		WriteNextResponseByte(AVR_SIGNATURE_2);
+		WriteNextResponseByte(AVR_SIGNATURE_1);
+	}
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_EraseFLASH)
+	{
+		/* Clear the application section of flash */
+		for (uint32_t CurrFlashAddress = 0; CurrFlashAddress < (uint32_t)BOOT_START_ADDR; CurrFlashAddress += SPM_PAGESIZE)
+		{
+			boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress);
+			boot_spm_busy_wait();
+			boot_page_write(CurrFlashAddress);
+			boot_spm_busy_wait();
+		}
+
+		/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
+	}
+	#if !defined(NO_LOCK_BYTE_WRITE_SUPPORT)
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_WriteLockbits)
+	{
+		/* Set the lock bits to those given by the host */
+		boot_lock_bits_set(FetchNextCommandByte());
+
+		/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
+	}
+	#endif
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadLockbits)
+	{
+		WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_LOCK_BITS));
+	}
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadLowFuses)
+	{
+		WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_LOW_FUSE_BITS));
+	}
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadHighFuses)
+	{
+		WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_HIGH_FUSE_BITS));
+	}
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadExtendedFuses)
+	{
+		WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_EXTENDED_FUSE_BITS));
+	}
+	#if !defined(NO_BLOCK_SUPPORT)
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_GetBlockWriteSupport)
+	{
+		WriteNextResponseByte('Y');
+
+		/* Send block size to the host */
+		WriteNextResponseByte(SPM_PAGESIZE >> 8);
+		WriteNextResponseByte(SPM_PAGESIZE & 0xFF);
+	}
+	else if ((Command == AVR109_COMMAND_BlockWrite) || (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_BlockRead))
+	{
+		/* Delegate the block write/read to a separate function for clarity */
+		ReadWriteMemoryBlock(Command);
+	}
+	#endif
+	#if !defined(NO_FLASH_BYTE_SUPPORT)
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_FillFlashPageWordHigh)
+	{
+		/* Write the high byte to the current flash page */
+		boot_page_fill(CurrAddress, FetchNextCommandByte());
+
+		/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
+	}
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_FillFlashPageWordLow)
+	{
+		/* Write the low byte to the current flash page */
+		boot_page_fill(CurrAddress | 0x01, FetchNextCommandByte());
+
+		/* Increment the address */
+		CurrAddress += 2;
+
+		/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
+	}
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_WriteFlashPage)
+	{
+		/* Commit the flash page to memory */
+		boot_page_write(CurrAddress);
+
+		/* Wait until write operation has completed */
+		boot_spm_busy_wait();
+
+		/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
+	}
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadFLASHWord)
+	{
+		#if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF)
+		uint16_t ProgramWord = pgm_read_word_far(CurrAddress);
+		#else
+		uint16_t ProgramWord = pgm_read_word(CurrAddress);
+		#endif
+
+		WriteNextResponseByte(ProgramWord >> 8);
+		WriteNextResponseByte(ProgramWord & 0xFF);
+	}
+	#endif
+	#if !defined(NO_EEPROM_BYTE_SUPPORT)
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_WriteEEPROM)
+	{
+		/* Read the byte from the endpoint and write it to the EEPROM */
+		eeprom_write_byte((uint8_t*)((intptr_t)(CurrAddress >> 1)), FetchNextCommandByte());
+
+		/* Increment the address after use */
+		CurrAddress += 2;
+
+		/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
+	}
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadEEPROM)
+	{
+		/* Read the EEPROM byte and write it to the endpoint */
+		WriteNextResponseByte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)((intptr_t)(CurrAddress >> 1))));
+
+		/* Increment the address after use */
+		CurrAddress += 2;
+	}
+	#endif
+	else if (Command != AVR109_COMMAND_Sync)
+	{
+		/* Unknown (non-sync) command, return fail code */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('?');
+	}
+
+	/* Select the IN endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPADDR);
+
+	/* Remember if the endpoint is completely full before clearing it */
+	bool IsEndpointFull = !(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed());
+
+	/* Send the endpoint data to the host */
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* If a full endpoint's worth of data was sent, we need to send an empty packet afterwards to signal end of transfer */
+	if (IsEndpointFull)
+	{
+		while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+		{
+			if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+			  return;
+		}
+
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+	}
+
+	/* Wait until the data has been sent to the host */
+	while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+	{
+		if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return;
+	}
+
+	/* Select the OUT endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPADDR);
+
+	/* Acknowledge the command from the host */
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9b326abc3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.h
@@ -0,0 +1,144 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for BootloaderCDC.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CDC_H_
+#define _CDC_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/boot.h>
+		#include <avr/eeprom.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "BootloaderAPI.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__OPTIMIZE_SIZE__)
+			#error This bootloader requires that it be optimized for size, not speed, to fit into the target device. Change optimization settings and try again.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Version major of the CDC bootloader. */
+		#define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MAJOR     0x01
+
+		/** Version minor of the CDC bootloader. */
+		#define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR     0x00
+
+		/** Hardware version major of the CDC bootloader. */
+		#define BOOTLOADER_HWVERSION_MAJOR   0x01
+
+		/** Hardware version minor of the CDC bootloader. */
+		#define BOOTLOADER_HWVERSION_MINOR   0x00
+
+		/** Eight character bootloader firmware identifier reported to the host when requested. */
+		#define SOFTWARE_IDENTIFIER          "LUFACDC"
+
+		/** Magic bootloader key to unlock forced application start mode. */
+		#define MAGIC_BOOT_KEY               0xDC42
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Possible memory types that can be addressed via the bootloader. */
+		enum AVR109_Memories
+		{
+			MEMORY_TYPE_FLASH  = 'F',
+			MEMORY_TYPE_EEPROM = 'E',
+		};
+
+		/** Possible commands that can be issued to the bootloader. */
+		enum AVR109_Commands
+		{
+			AVR109_COMMAND_Sync                     = 27,
+			AVR109_COMMAND_ReadEEPROM               = 'd',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_WriteEEPROM              = 'D',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_ReadFLASHWord            = 'R',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_WriteFlashPage           = 'm',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_FillFlashPageWordLow     = 'c',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_FillFlashPageWordHigh    = 'C',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_GetBlockWriteSupport     = 'b',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_BlockWrite               = 'B',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_BlockRead                = 'g',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_ReadExtendedFuses        = 'Q',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_ReadHighFuses            = 'N',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_ReadLowFuses             = 'F',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_ReadLockbits             = 'r',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_WriteLockbits            = 'l',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_EraseFLASH               = 'e',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_ReadSignature            = 's',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_ReadBootloaderSWVersion  = 'V',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_ReadBootloaderHWVersion  = 'v',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_ReadBootloaderIdentifier = 'S',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_ReadBootloaderInterface  = 'p',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_SetCurrentAddress        = 'A',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_ReadAutoAddressIncrement = 'a',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_ReadPartCode             = 't',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_EnterProgrammingMode     = 'P',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_LeaveProgrammingMode     = 'L',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_SelectDeviceType         = 'T',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_SetLED                   = 'x',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_ClearLED                 = 'y',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_ExitBootloader           = 'E',
+		};
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a non-returning pointer to the start of the loaded application in flash memory. */
+		typedef void (*AppPtr_t)(void) ATTR_NO_RETURN;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		static void CDC_Task(void);
+		static void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void Application_Jump_Check(void) ATTR_INIT_SECTION(3);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADERCDC_C) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			#if !defined(NO_BLOCK_SUPPORT)
+			static void    ReadWriteMemoryBlock(const uint8_t Command);
+			#endif
+			static uint8_t FetchNextCommandByte(void);
+			static void    WriteNextResponseByte(const uint8_t Response);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..55e5e55a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,240 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage CDC Class USB AVR Bootloader
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  This bootloader enumerates to the host as a CDC Class device (virtual serial port), allowing for AVR109
+ *  protocol compatible programming software to load firmware onto the AVR.
+ *
+ *  Out of the box this bootloader builds for the AT90USB1287 with an 8KB bootloader section size, and will fit
+ *  into 4KB of bootloader space. If you wish to alter this size and/or change the AVR model, you will need to
+ *  edit the MCU, FLASH_SIZE_KB and BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB values in the accompanying makefile.
+ *
+ *  When the bootloader is running, the board's LED(s) will flash at regular intervals to distinguish the
+ *  bootloader from the normal user application.
+ *
+ *  \warning <b>THIS BOOTLOADER IS NOT SECURE.</b> Malicious entities can recover written data, even if the device
+ *           lockbits are set.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Running Running the Bootloader
+ *
+ *  This bootloader is designed to be started via the HWB mechanism of the USB AVRs; ground the HWB pin (see device
+ *  datasheet) then momentarily ground /RESET to start the bootloader. This assumes the HWBE fuse is set and the BOOTRST
+ *  fuse is cleared.
+ *
+ *  For board specific exceptions to the above, see below.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_XPLAIN Atmel Xplain Board
+ *  Ground the USB AVR JTAG's \c TCK pin to ground when powering on the board to start the bootloader. This assumes the
+ *  \c HWBE fuse is cleared and the \c BOOTRST fuse is set as the HWBE pin is not user accessible on this board.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_Leonardo Arduino Leonardo Board
+ *  Ground \c IO13 when powering the board to start the bootloader. This assumes the \c HWBE fuse is cleared and the
+ *  \c BOOTRST fuse is set as the HWBE pin is not user accessible on this board.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Installation Driver Installation
+ *
+ *  After running this bootloader for the first time on a new computer, you will need to supply the .INF
+ *  file located in this bootloader project's directory as the device's driver when running under Windows.
+ *  This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers, negating the need for custom drivers for the
+ *  device. Other Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt CDC-ACM drivers.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_HostApp Host Controller Application
+ *
+ *  This bootloader is compatible with the open source application AVRDUDE, Atmel's AVRPROG, or other
+ *  applications implementing the AVR109 protocol, which is documented on the Atmel website as an application
+ *  note.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_AVRDude AVRDUDE (Windows, Mac, Linux)
+ *
+ *  AVRDude is a free, cross-platform and open source command line programmer for Atmel and third party AVR
+ *  programmers. It is available on the the Windows platform as part of the "WinAVR" package, or on other systems
+ *  either from a build from the official source code, or in many distributions as a precompiled binary package.
+ *
+ *  To load a new HEX file with AVRDude, specify "AVR109" as the programmer, with the allocated COM port. On Windows
+ *  platforms this will be a COMx port name:
+ *  \code
+ *  avrdude -c AVR109 -p at90usb1287 -P COM0 -U flash:w:Mouse.hex
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  On Linux systems, this will typically be a /dev/ttyACMx port name:
+ *  \code
+ *  avrdude -c AVR109 -p at90usb1287 -P /dev/ttyACM0 -U flash:w:Mouse.hex
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  Refer to the AVRDude project documentation for additional usage instructions.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_API User Application API
+ *
+ *  Several user application functions for FLASH and other special memory area manipulations are exposed by the bootloader,
+ *  allowing the user application to call into the bootloader at runtime to read and write FLASH data.
+ *
+ *  By default, the bootloader API jump table is located 32 bytes from the end of the device's FLASH memory, and follows the
+ *  following layout:
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE          32
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START         ((FLASHEND + 1UL) - BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE)
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(Index)         (void*)((BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (Index * 2)) / 2)
+ *
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_ErasePage)(uint32_t Address)               = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(0);
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_WritePage)(uint32_t Address)               = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(1);
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_FillWord)(uint32_t Address, uint16_t Word) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(2);
+ *  uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature)(uint16_t Address)           = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(3);
+ *  uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse)(uint16_t Address)                = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(4);
+ *  uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadLock)(void)                            = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(5);
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_WriteLock)(uint8_t LockBits)               = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(6);
+ *
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE_START   (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 2))
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE         0xDCFB
+ *
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_CLASS_SIGNATURE_START   (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 4))
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_CDC_SIGNATURE           0xDF00
+ *
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_START           (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 8))
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_LENGTH          4
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  From the application the API support of the bootloader can be detected by reading the FLASH memory bytes located at address
+ *  \c BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE_START and comparing them to the value \c BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE. The class of bootloader
+ *  can be determined by reading the FLASH memory bytes located at address \c BOOTLOADER_CLASS_SIGNATURE_START and comparing them
+ *  to the value \c BOOTLOADER_CDC_SIGNATURE. The start address of the bootloader can be retrieved by reading the bytes of FLASH
+ *  memory starting from address \c BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_START.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_API_MemLayout Device Memory Map
+ *  The following illustration indicates the final memory map of the device when loaded with the bootloader.
+ *
+ *  \verbatim
+ *  +----------------------------+ 0x0000
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |      User Application      |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - BOOT_SECTION_SIZE
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |   Bootloader Application   |
+ *  | (Not User App. Accessible) |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 96
+ *  |   API Table Trampolines    |
+ *  | (Not User App. Accessible) |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 32
+ *  |    Bootloader API Table    |
+ *  |   (User App. Accessible)   |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 8
+ *  |   Bootloader ID Constants  |
+ *  |   (User App. Accessible)   |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND
+ *  \endverbatim
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_KnownIssues Known Issues:
+ *
+ *  \par On Linux machines, the CDC bootloader is unstable or inaccessible.
+ *  A change to the \c ModemManager module in many Linux distributions causes
+ *  this module to try to take control over inserted CDC devices, corrupting the
+ *  datastream. A UDEV rule is required to prevent this.
+ *  See <a href=https://groups.google.com/d/msg/lufa-support/CP9cy2bc8yo/kBqsOu-RBeMJ>here</a> for resolution steps.
+ *  If the issue still persists then uninstall modemmanager by executing <tt>sudo apt-get remove modemmanager</tt>, or
+ *  the equivalent using your chosen distribution's package manager.
+ *
+ *  \par On Linux machines, the CDC bootloader is inaccessible.
+ *  On many Linux systems, non-root users do not have automatic access to newly
+ *  inserted CDC devices. Root privileges or a UDEV rule is required to gain
+ *  access.
+ *  See <a href=https://groups.google.com/d/msg/lufa-support/CP9cy2bc8yo/kBqsOu-RBeMJ>here</a> for resolution steps.
+ *
+ *  \par After loading an application, it is not run automatically on startup.
+ *  Some USB AVR boards ship with the BOOTRST fuse set, causing the bootloader
+ *  to run automatically when the device is reset. In most cases, the BOOTRST
+ *  fuse should be disabled and the HWBE fuse used instead to run the bootloader
+ *  when needed.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_BLOCK_SUPPORT</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Define to disable memory block read/write support in the bootloader, requiring all reads and writes to be made
+ *        using the byte-level commands.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_EEPROM_BYTE_SUPPORT</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Define to disable EEPROM memory byte read/write support in the bootloader, requiring all EEPROM reads and writes
+ *        to be made using the block-level commands.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_FLASH_BYTE_SUPPORT</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Define to disable FLASH memory byte read/write support in the bootloader, requiring all FLASH reads and writes
+ *        to be made using the block-level commands.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_LOCK_BYTE_WRITE_SUPPORT</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Define to disable lock byte write support in the bootloader, preventing the lock bits from being set programmatically.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bbb5cb227
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure LUFA's
+ *  compile time options, as an alternative to the compile time
+ *  constants supplied through a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+//	#define NO_BLOCK_SUPPORT
+//	#define NO_EEPROM_BYTE_SUPPORT
+//	#define NO_FLASH_BYTE_SUPPORT
+//	#define NO_LOCK_BYTE_WRITE_SUPPORT
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..af2dd3060
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2ff6b503b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,244 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+	.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x204A,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(1,0,0),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED,
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Header =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = 0x00,
+
+			.CDCSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_ACM =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = 0x02,
+
+			.Capabilities           = 0x02,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Union =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = 0x06,
+
+			.MasterInterfaceNumber  = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.SlaveInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_NotificationEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA CDC");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see LUFA library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			if (DescriptorNumber == STRING_ID_Language)
+			{
+				Address = &LanguageString;
+				Size    = LanguageString.Header.Size;
+			}
+			else if (DescriptorNumber == STRING_ID_Manufacturer)
+			{
+				Address = &ManufacturerString;
+				Size    = ManufacturerString.Header.Size;
+			}
+			else if (DescriptorNumber == STRING_ID_Product)
+			{
+				Address = &ProductString;
+				Size    = ProductString.Header.Size;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ef0437917
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,158 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#if defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x97
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x96
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x97
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x96
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x95
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x87
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x94
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x88
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U2__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x95
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x8A
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega16U2__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x94
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x89
+		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x94
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega8U2__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x93
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x89
+		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB82__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x94
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#else
+			#error The selected AVR part is not currently supported by this bootloader.
+		#endif
+
+		/** Endpoint address for the CDC control interface event notification endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 2)
+
+		/** Endpoint address for the CDC data interface TX (data IN) endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address for the CDC data interface RX (data OUT) endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4)
+
+		/** Size of the CDC data interface TX and RX data endpoint banks, in bytes. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
+
+		/** Size of the CDC control interface notification endpoint bank, in bytes. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+
+			// CDC Control Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t    CDC_Functional_Header;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t       CDC_Functional_ACM;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t     CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_NotificationEndpoint;
+
+			// CDC Data Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI = 0, /**< CDC CCI interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI = 1, /**< CDC DCI interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/LUFA CDC Bootloader.inf b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/LUFA CDC Bootloader.inf
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..61624c731
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/LUFA CDC Bootloader.inf
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+;************************************************************
+; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+;************************************************************
+
+[DefaultInstall]
+CopyINF="LUFA CDC Bootloader.inf"
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+DriverVer=7/1/2012,10.0.0.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTx86, NTamd64, NTia64
+
+[SourceDisksNames]
+
+[SourceDisksFiles]
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+[DriverInstall]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=FakeModemCopyFileSection
+AddReg=DriverInstall.AddReg
+
+[DriverInstall.Services]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, LowerFilter_Service_Inst
+
+[DriverInstall.AddReg]
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"msports.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204A
+
+[DeviceList.NTx86]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204A
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204A
+
+[DeviceList.NTia64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204A
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org"
+DESCRIPTION="LUFA CDC Class Bootloader"
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..72f3ff04c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,161 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="CDC Bootloader - 128KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.cdc.avr8.128_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_cdc_128kb_4kb_">

+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.cdc"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x1F000"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x1F000"/>

+

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x1FFA0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x1FFE0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x1FFF8"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="CDC Bootloader - 64KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.cdc.avr8.64_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_cdc_64kb_4kb_">

+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.cdc"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb647"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0xF000"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0xF000"/>

+

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0xFFA0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0xFFE0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0xFFF8"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="CDC Bootloader - 32KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.cdc.avr8.32_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_cdc_32kb_4kb_">

+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.cdc"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atmega32u4"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x7000"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x7000"/>

+

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x7FA0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x7FE0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x7FF8"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="CDC Bootloader - 16KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.cdc.avr8.16_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_cdc_16kb_4kb_">

+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.cdc"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atmega16u2"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x3000"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x3000"/>

+

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x3FA0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x3FE0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x3FF8"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="CDC Bootloader - 8KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.cdc.avr8.8_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_cdc_8kb_4kb_">

+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.cdc"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atmega8u2"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x1000"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x1000"/>

+

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x1FA0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x1FE0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x1FF8"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.bootloaders.cdc" caption="CDC Bootloader">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		CDC Class Bootloader, capable of reprogramming a device using avrdude or other AVR109 protocol compliant software when plugged into a host.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Bootloaders"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+		</info>

+

+ 		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="include-path" value="."/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="BootloaderCDC.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="BootloaderCDC.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="BootloaderAPI.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="BootloaderAPI.h"/>

+		<build type="asm-source" value="BootloaderAPITable.S"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="BootloaderCDC.txt"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="LUFA CDC Bootloader.inf"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2dfb2a08a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2365 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - CDC Class Bootloader"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM \
+                         ATTR_NO_INIT
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..161e64c08
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/CDC/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = BootloaderCDC
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c BootloaderAPI.c BootloaderAPITable.S $(LUFA_SRC_USB)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START_OFFSET)
+LD_FLAGS     = -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START_OFFSET) $(BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS)
+
+# Flash size and bootloader section sizes of the target, in KB. These must
+# match the target's total FLASH size and the bootloader size set in the
+# device's fuses.
+FLASH_SIZE_KB         = 128
+BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB  = 8
+
+# Bootloader address calculation formulas
+# Do not modify these macros, but rather modify the dependent values above.
+CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX   = $(shell printf "0x%X" $$(( $(1) )) )
+BOOT_START_OFFSET     = $(call CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX, ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) - $(BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB)) * 1024 )
+BOOT_SEC_OFFSET       = $(call CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX, ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) * 1024) - ($(strip $(1))) )
+
+# Bootloader linker section flags for relocating the API table sections to
+# known FLASH addresses - these should not normally be user-edited.
+BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG  = -Wl,--section-start=$(strip $(1))=$(call BOOT_SEC_OFFSET, $(3)) -Wl,--undefined=$(strip $(2))
+BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS     = $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_trampolines, BootloaderAPI_Trampolines, 96)
+BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS    += $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_jumptable,   BootloaderAPI_JumpTable,   32)
+BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS    += $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_signatures,  BootloaderAPI_Signatures,  8)
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderAPI.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderAPI.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cad59c8ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderAPI.c
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Bootloader user application API functions.
+ */
+
+#include "BootloaderAPI.h"
+
+void BootloaderAPI_ErasePage(const uint32_t Address)
+{
+	boot_page_erase_safe(Address);
+	boot_spm_busy_wait();
+	boot_rww_enable();
+}
+
+void BootloaderAPI_WritePage(const uint32_t Address)
+{
+	boot_page_write_safe(Address);
+	boot_spm_busy_wait();
+	boot_rww_enable();
+}
+
+void BootloaderAPI_FillWord(const uint32_t Address, const uint16_t Word)
+{
+	boot_page_fill_safe(Address, Word);
+}
+
+uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature(const uint16_t Address)
+{
+	return boot_signature_byte_get(Address);
+}
+
+uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse(const uint16_t Address)
+{
+	return boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(Address);
+}
+
+uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadLock(void)
+{
+	return boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_LOCK_BITS);
+}
+
+void BootloaderAPI_WriteLock(const uint8_t LockBits)
+{
+	boot_lock_bits_set_safe(LockBits);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderAPI.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderAPI.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2462cacdd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderAPI.h
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for BootloaderAPI.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _BOOTLOADER_API_H_
+#define _BOOTLOADER_API_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/boot.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void    BootloaderAPI_ErasePage(const uint32_t Address);
+		void    BootloaderAPI_WritePage(const uint32_t Address);
+		void    BootloaderAPI_FillWord(const uint32_t Address, const uint16_t Word);
+		uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature(const uint16_t Address);
+		uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse(const uint16_t Address);
+		uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadLock(void);
+		void    BootloaderAPI_WriteLock(const uint8_t LockBits);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderAPITable.S b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderAPITable.S
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..101dcbd72
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderAPITable.S
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+; Trampolines to actual API implementations if the target address is outside the
+; range of a rjmp instruction (can happen with large bootloader sections)
+.section .apitable_trampolines, "ax"
+.global BootloaderAPI_Trampolines
+BootloaderAPI_Trampolines:
+
+	BootloaderAPI_ErasePage_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ErasePage
+	BootloaderAPI_WritePage_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_WritePage
+	BootloaderAPI_FillWord_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_FillWord
+	BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature
+	BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse
+	BootloaderAPI_ReadLock_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadLock
+	BootloaderAPI_WriteLock_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_WriteLock
+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED1:
+		ret
+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED2:
+		ret
+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED3:
+		ret
+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED4:
+		ret
+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED5:
+		ret
+
+
+
+; API function jump table
+.section .apitable_jumptable, "ax"
+.global BootloaderAPI_JumpTable
+BootloaderAPI_JumpTable:
+
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ErasePage_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_WritePage_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_FillWord_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadLock_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_WriteLock_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED1 ; UNUSED ENTRY 1
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED2 ; UNUSED ENTRY 2
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED3 ; UNUSED ENTRY 3
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED4 ; UNUSED ENTRY 4
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED5 ; UNUSED ENTRY 5
+
+
+
+; Bootloader table signatures and information
+.section .apitable_signatures, "ax"
+.global BootloaderAPI_Signatures
+BootloaderAPI_Signatures:
+
+	.long BOOT_START_ADDR ; Start address of the bootloader
+	.word 0xDF10 ; Signature for the DFU class bootloader, V1
+	.word 0xDCFB ; Signature for a LUFA class bootloader
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0385bfc49
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.c
@@ -0,0 +1,804 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the DFU class bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADER_C
+#include "BootloaderDFU.h"
+
+/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader is currently running in secure mode, disallowing memory operations
+ *  other than erase. This is initially set to the value set by SECURE_MODE, and cleared by the bootloader
+ *  once a memory erase has completed in a bootloader session.
+ */
+static bool IsSecure = SECURE_MODE;
+
+/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run
+ *  via a soft reset. When cleared, the bootloader will abort, the USB interface will shut down and the application
+ *  jumped to via an indirect jump to location 0x0000 (or other location specified by the host).
+ */
+static bool RunBootloader = true;
+
+/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader is waiting to exit. When the host requests the bootloader to exit and
+ *  jump to the application address it specifies, it sends two sequential commands which must be properly
+ *  acknowledged. Upon reception of the first the RunBootloader flag is cleared and the WaitForExit flag is set,
+ *  causing the bootloader to wait for the final exit command before shutting down.
+ */
+static bool WaitForExit = false;
+
+/** Current DFU state machine state, one of the values in the DFU_State_t enum. */
+static uint8_t DFU_State = dfuIDLE;
+
+/** Status code of the last executed DFU command. This is set to one of the values in the DFU_Status_t enum after
+ *  each operation, and returned to the host when a Get Status DFU request is issued.
+ */
+static uint8_t DFU_Status = OK;
+
+/** Data containing the DFU command sent from the host. */
+static DFU_Command_t SentCommand;
+
+/** Response to the last issued Read Data DFU command. Unlike other DFU commands, the read command
+ *  requires a single byte response from the bootloader containing the read data when the next DFU_UPLOAD command
+ *  is issued by the host.
+ */
+static uint8_t ResponseByte;
+
+/** Pointer to the start of the user application. By default this is 0x0000 (the reset vector), however the host
+ *  may specify an alternate address when issuing the application soft-start command.
+ */
+static AppPtr_t AppStartPtr = (AppPtr_t)0x0000;
+
+/** 64-bit flash page number. This is concatenated with the current 16-bit address on USB AVRs containing more than
+ *  64KB of flash memory.
+ */
+static uint8_t Flash64KBPage = 0;
+
+/** Memory start address, indicating the current address in the memory being addressed (either FLASH or EEPROM
+ *  depending on the issued command from the host).
+ */
+static uint16_t StartAddr = 0x0000;
+
+/** Memory end address, indicating the end address to read from/write to in the memory being addressed (either FLASH
+ *  of EEPROM depending on the issued command from the host).
+ */
+static uint16_t EndAddr = 0x0000;
+
+/** Magic lock for forced application start. If the HWBE fuse is programmed and BOOTRST is unprogrammed, the bootloader
+ *  will start if the /HWB line of the AVR is held low and the system is reset. However, if the /HWB line is still held
+ *  low when the application attempts to start via a watchdog reset, the bootloader will re-start. If set to the value
+ *  \ref MAGIC_BOOT_KEY the special init function \ref Application_Jump_Check() will force the application to start.
+ */
+uint16_t MagicBootKey ATTR_NO_INIT;
+
+
+/** Special startup routine to check if the bootloader was started via a watchdog reset, and if the magic application
+ *  start key has been loaded into \ref MagicBootKey. If the bootloader started via the watchdog and the key is valid,
+ *  this will force the user application to start via a software jump.
+ */
+void Application_Jump_Check(void)
+{
+	bool JumpToApplication = false;
+
+	#if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+		/* Disable JTAG debugging */
+		JTAG_DISABLE();
+
+		/* Enable pull-up on the JTAG TCK pin so we can use it to select the mode */
+		PORTF |= (1 << 4);
+		Delay_MS(10);
+
+		/* If the TCK pin is not jumpered to ground, start the user application instead */
+		JumpToApplication |= ((PINF & (1 << 4)) != 0);
+
+		/* Re-enable JTAG debugging */
+		JTAG_ENABLE();
+	#endif
+
+	/* If the reset source was the bootloader and the key is correct, clear it and jump to the application */
+	if ((MCUSR & (1 << WDRF)) && (MagicBootKey == MAGIC_BOOT_KEY))
+	  JumpToApplication |= true;
+
+	/* If a request has been made to jump to the user application, honor it */
+	if (JumpToApplication)
+	{
+		/* Turn off the watchdog */
+		MCUSR &= ~(1<<WDRF);
+		wdt_disable();
+
+		/* Clear the boot key and jump to the user application */
+		MagicBootKey = 0;
+
+		// cppcheck-suppress constStatement
+		((void (*)(void))0x0000)();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the bootloader, then continuously
+ *  runs the bootloader processing routine until instructed to soft-exit, or hard-reset via the watchdog to start
+ *  the loaded application code.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	/* Configure hardware required by the bootloader */
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	/* Turn on first LED on the board to indicate that the bootloader has started */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1);
+
+	/* Enable global interrupts so that the USB stack can function */
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	/* Run the USB management task while the bootloader is supposed to be running */
+	while (RunBootloader || WaitForExit)
+	  USB_USBTask();
+
+	/* Reset configured hardware back to their original states for the user application */
+	ResetHardware();
+
+	/* Start the user application */
+	AppStartPtr();
+}
+
+/** Configures all hardware required for the bootloader. */
+static void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */
+	MCUCR = (1 << IVCE);
+	MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL);
+
+	/* Initialize the USB and other board hardware drivers */
+	USB_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+
+	/* Bootloader active LED toggle timer initialization */
+	TIMSK1 = (1 << TOIE1);
+	TCCR1B = ((1 << CS11) | (1 << CS10));
+}
+
+/** Resets all configured hardware required for the bootloader back to their original states. */
+static void ResetHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Shut down the USB and other board hardware drivers */
+	USB_Disable();
+	LEDs_Disable();
+
+	/* Disable Bootloader active LED toggle timer */
+	TIMSK1 = 0;
+	TCCR1B = 0;
+
+	/* Relocate the interrupt vector table back to the application section */
+	MCUCR = (1 << IVCE);
+	MCUCR = 0;
+}
+
+/** ISR to periodically toggle the LEDs on the board to indicate that the bootloader is active. */
+ISR(TIMER1_OVF_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to
+ *  the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing
+ *  internally.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	/* Ignore any requests that aren't directed to the DFU interface */
+	if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & (CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE | CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT)) !=
+	    (REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+	{
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Activity - toggle indicator LEDs */
+	LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+
+	/* Get the size of the command and data from the wLength value */
+	SentCommand.DataSize = USB_ControlRequest.wLength;
+
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case DFU_REQ_DNLOAD:
+			Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+			/* Check if bootloader is waiting to terminate */
+			if (WaitForExit)
+			{
+				/* Bootloader is terminating - process last received command */
+				ProcessBootloaderCommand();
+
+				/* Indicate that the last command has now been processed - free to exit bootloader */
+				WaitForExit = false;
+			}
+
+			/* If the request has a data stage, load it into the command struct */
+			if (SentCommand.DataSize)
+			{
+				while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+				{
+					if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+					  return;
+				}
+
+				/* First byte of the data stage is the DNLOAD request's command */
+				SentCommand.Command = Endpoint_Read_8();
+
+				/* One byte of the data stage is the command, so subtract it from the total data bytes */
+				SentCommand.DataSize--;
+
+				/* Load in the rest of the data stage as command parameters */
+				for (uint8_t DataByte = 0; (DataByte < sizeof(SentCommand.Data)) &&
+				     Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(); DataByte++)
+				{
+					SentCommand.Data[DataByte] = Endpoint_Read_8();
+					SentCommand.DataSize--;
+				}
+
+				/* Process the command */
+				ProcessBootloaderCommand();
+			}
+
+			/* Check if currently downloading firmware */
+			if (DFU_State == dfuDNLOAD_IDLE)
+			{
+				if (!(SentCommand.DataSize))
+				{
+					DFU_State = dfuIDLE;
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					/* Throw away the filler bytes before the start of the firmware */
+					DiscardFillerBytes(DFU_FILLER_BYTES_SIZE);
+
+					/* Throw away the packet alignment filler bytes before the start of the firmware */
+					DiscardFillerBytes(StartAddr % FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE);
+
+					/* Calculate the number of bytes remaining to be written */
+					uint16_t BytesRemaining = ((EndAddr - StartAddr) + 1);
+
+					if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00))        // Write flash
+					{
+						/* Calculate the number of words to be written from the number of bytes to be written */
+						uint16_t WordsRemaining = (BytesRemaining >> 1);
+
+						union
+						{
+							uint16_t Words[2];
+							uint32_t Long;
+						} CurrFlashAddress                 = {.Words = {StartAddr, Flash64KBPage}};
+
+						uint32_t CurrFlashPageStartAddress = CurrFlashAddress.Long;
+						uint8_t  WordsInFlashPage          = 0;
+
+						while (WordsRemaining--)
+						{
+							/* Check if endpoint is empty - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */
+							if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
+							{
+								Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+								while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+								{
+									if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+									  return;
+								}
+							}
+
+							/* Write the next word into the current flash page */
+							boot_page_fill(CurrFlashAddress.Long, Endpoint_Read_16_LE());
+
+							/* Adjust counters */
+							WordsInFlashPage      += 1;
+							CurrFlashAddress.Long += 2;
+
+							/* See if an entire page has been written to the flash page buffer */
+							if ((WordsInFlashPage == (SPM_PAGESIZE >> 1)) || !(WordsRemaining))
+							{
+								/* Commit the flash page to memory */
+								boot_page_write(CurrFlashPageStartAddress);
+								boot_spm_busy_wait();
+
+								/* Check if programming incomplete */
+								if (WordsRemaining)
+								{
+									CurrFlashPageStartAddress = CurrFlashAddress.Long;
+									WordsInFlashPage          = 0;
+
+									/* Erase next page's temp buffer */
+									boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress.Long);
+									boot_spm_busy_wait();
+								}
+							}
+						}
+
+						/* Once programming complete, start address equals the end address */
+						StartAddr = EndAddr;
+
+						/* Re-enable the RWW section of flash */
+						boot_rww_enable();
+					}
+					else                                                   // Write EEPROM
+					{
+						while (BytesRemaining--)
+						{
+							/* Check if endpoint is empty - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */
+							if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
+							{
+								Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+								while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+								{
+									if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+									  return;
+								}
+							}
+
+							/* Read the byte from the USB interface and write to to the EEPROM */
+							eeprom_write_byte((uint8_t*)StartAddr, Endpoint_Read_8());
+
+							/* Adjust counters */
+							StartAddr++;
+						}
+					}
+
+					/* Throw away the currently unused DFU file suffix */
+					DiscardFillerBytes(DFU_FILE_SUFFIX_SIZE);
+				}
+			}
+
+			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+			Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+
+			break;
+		case DFU_REQ_UPLOAD:
+			Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+			while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+			{
+				if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			if (DFU_State != dfuUPLOAD_IDLE)
+			{
+				if ((DFU_State == dfuERROR) && IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01))       // Blank Check
+				{
+					/* Blank checking is performed in the DFU_DNLOAD request - if we get here we've told the host
+					   that the memory isn't blank, and the host is requesting the first non-blank address */
+					Endpoint_Write_16_LE(StartAddr);
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					/* Idle state upload - send response to last issued command */
+					Endpoint_Write_8(ResponseByte);
+				}
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				/* Determine the number of bytes remaining in the current block */
+				uint16_t BytesRemaining = ((EndAddr - StartAddr) + 1);
+
+				if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00))            // Read FLASH
+				{
+					/* Calculate the number of words to be written from the number of bytes to be written */
+					uint16_t WordsRemaining = (BytesRemaining >> 1);
+
+					union
+					{
+						uint16_t Words[2];
+						uint32_t Long;
+					} CurrFlashAddress = {.Words = {StartAddr, Flash64KBPage}};
+
+					while (WordsRemaining--)
+					{
+						/* Check if endpoint is full - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */
+						if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE)
+						{
+							Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+							while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+							{
+								if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+								  return;
+							}
+						}
+
+						/* Read the flash word and send it via USB to the host */
+						#if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF)
+							Endpoint_Write_16_LE(pgm_read_word_far(CurrFlashAddress.Long));
+						#else
+							Endpoint_Write_16_LE(pgm_read_word(CurrFlashAddress.Long));
+						#endif
+
+						/* Adjust counters */
+						CurrFlashAddress.Long += 2;
+					}
+
+					/* Once reading is complete, start address equals the end address */
+					StartAddr = EndAddr;
+				}
+				else if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x02))       // Read EEPROM
+				{
+					while (BytesRemaining--)
+					{
+						/* Check if endpoint is full - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */
+						if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE)
+						{
+							Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+							while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+							{
+								if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+								  return;
+							}
+						}
+
+						/* Read the EEPROM byte and send it via USB to the host */
+						Endpoint_Write_8(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)StartAddr));
+
+						/* Adjust counters */
+						StartAddr++;
+					}
+				}
+
+				/* Return to idle state */
+				DFU_State = dfuIDLE;
+			}
+
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+			Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			break;
+		case DFU_REQ_GETSTATUS:
+			Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+			while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+			{
+				if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			/* Write 8-bit status value */
+			Endpoint_Write_8(DFU_Status);
+
+			/* Write 24-bit poll timeout value */
+			Endpoint_Write_8(0);
+			Endpoint_Write_16_LE(0);
+
+			/* Write 8-bit state value */
+			Endpoint_Write_8(DFU_State);
+
+			/* Write 8-bit state string ID number */
+			Endpoint_Write_8(0);
+
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+			Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			break;
+		case DFU_REQ_CLRSTATUS:
+			Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+			/* Reset the status value variable to the default OK status */
+			DFU_Status = OK;
+
+			Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			break;
+		case DFU_REQ_GETSTATE:
+			Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+			while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+			{
+				if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			/* Write the current device state to the endpoint */
+			Endpoint_Write_8(DFU_State);
+
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+			Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			break;
+		case DFU_REQ_ABORT:
+			Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+			/* Reset the current state variable to the default idle state */
+			DFU_State = dfuIDLE;
+
+			Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Routine to discard the specified number of bytes from the control endpoint stream. This is used to
+ *  discard unused bytes in the stream from the host, including the memory program block suffix.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] NumberOfBytes  Number of bytes to discard from the host from the control endpoint
+ */
+static void DiscardFillerBytes(uint8_t NumberOfBytes)
+{
+	while (NumberOfBytes--)
+	{
+		if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
+		{
+			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+			/* Wait until next data packet received */
+			while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+			{
+				if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+				  return;
+			}
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			Endpoint_Discard_8();
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+/** Routine to process an issued command from the host, via a DFU_DNLOAD request wrapper. This routine ensures
+ *  that the command is allowed based on the current secure mode flag value, and passes the command off to the
+ *  appropriate handler function.
+ */
+static void ProcessBootloaderCommand(void)
+{
+	/* Check if device is in secure mode */
+	if (IsSecure)
+	{
+		/* Don't process command unless it is a READ or chip erase command */
+		if (!(((SentCommand.Command == COMMAND_WRITE)             &&
+		        IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00, 0xFF)) ||
+			   (SentCommand.Command == COMMAND_READ)))
+		{
+			/* Set the state and status variables to indicate the error */
+			DFU_State  = dfuERROR;
+			DFU_Status = errWRITE;
+
+			/* Stall command */
+			Endpoint_StallTransaction();
+
+			/* Don't process the command */
+			return;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Dispatch the required command processing routine based on the command type */
+	switch (SentCommand.Command)
+	{
+		case COMMAND_PROG_START:
+			ProcessMemProgCommand();
+			break;
+		case COMMAND_DISP_DATA:
+			ProcessMemReadCommand();
+			break;
+		case COMMAND_WRITE:
+			ProcessWriteCommand();
+			break;
+		case COMMAND_READ:
+			ProcessReadCommand();
+			break;
+		case COMMAND_CHANGE_BASE_ADDR:
+			if (IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x03, 0x00))              // Set 64KB flash page command
+			  Flash64KBPage = SentCommand.Data[2];
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Routine to concatenate the given pair of 16-bit memory start and end addresses from the host, and store them
+ *  in the StartAddr and EndAddr global variables.
+ */
+static void LoadStartEndAddresses(void)
+{
+	union
+	{
+		uint8_t  Bytes[2];
+		uint16_t Word;
+	} Address[2] = {{.Bytes = {SentCommand.Data[2], SentCommand.Data[1]}},
+	                {.Bytes = {SentCommand.Data[4], SentCommand.Data[3]}}};
+
+	/* Load in the start and ending read addresses from the sent data packet */
+	StartAddr = Address[0].Word;
+	EndAddr   = Address[1].Word;
+}
+
+/** Handler for a Memory Program command issued by the host. This routine handles the preparations needed
+ *  to write subsequent data from the host into the specified memory.
+ */
+static void ProcessMemProgCommand(void)
+{
+	if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00) ||                          // Write FLASH command
+	    IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01))                            // Write EEPROM command
+	{
+		/* Load in the start and ending read addresses */
+		LoadStartEndAddresses();
+
+		/* If FLASH is being written to, we need to pre-erase the first page to write to */
+		if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00))
+		{
+			union
+			{
+				uint16_t Words[2];
+				uint32_t Long;
+			} CurrFlashAddress = {.Words = {StartAddr, Flash64KBPage}};
+
+			/* Erase the current page's temp buffer */
+			boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress.Long);
+			boot_spm_busy_wait();
+		}
+
+		/* Set the state so that the next DNLOAD requests reads in the firmware */
+		DFU_State = dfuDNLOAD_IDLE;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Handler for a Memory Read command issued by the host. This routine handles the preparations needed
+ *  to read subsequent data from the specified memory out to the host, as well as implementing the memory
+ *  blank check command.
+ */
+static void ProcessMemReadCommand(void)
+{
+	if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00) ||                          // Read FLASH command
+        IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x02))                            // Read EEPROM command
+	{
+		/* Load in the start and ending read addresses */
+		LoadStartEndAddresses();
+
+		/* Set the state so that the next UPLOAD requests read out the firmware */
+		DFU_State = dfuUPLOAD_IDLE;
+	}
+	else if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01))                       // Blank check FLASH command
+	{
+		uint32_t CurrFlashAddress = 0;
+
+		while (CurrFlashAddress < (uint32_t)BOOT_START_ADDR)
+		{
+			/* Check if the current byte is not blank */
+			#if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF)
+			if (pgm_read_byte_far(CurrFlashAddress) != 0xFF)
+			#else
+			if (pgm_read_byte(CurrFlashAddress) != 0xFF)
+			#endif
+			{
+				/* Save the location of the first non-blank byte for response back to the host */
+				Flash64KBPage = (CurrFlashAddress >> 16);
+				StartAddr     = CurrFlashAddress;
+
+				/* Set state and status variables to the appropriate error values */
+				DFU_State  = dfuERROR;
+				DFU_Status = errCHECK_ERASED;
+
+				break;
+			}
+
+			CurrFlashAddress++;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+/** Handler for a Data Write command issued by the host. This routine handles non-programming commands such as
+ *  bootloader exit (both via software jumps and hardware watchdog resets) and flash memory erasure.
+ */
+static void ProcessWriteCommand(void)
+{
+	if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x03))                            // Start application
+	{
+		/* Indicate that the bootloader is terminating */
+		WaitForExit = true;
+
+		/* Check if data supplied for the Start Program command - no data executes the program */
+		if (SentCommand.DataSize)
+		{
+			if (SentCommand.Data[1] == 0x01)                                   // Start via jump
+			{
+				union
+				{
+					uint8_t  Bytes[2];
+					AppPtr_t FuncPtr;
+				} Address = {.Bytes = {SentCommand.Data[4], SentCommand.Data[3]}};
+
+				/* Load in the jump address into the application start address pointer */
+				AppStartPtr = Address.FuncPtr;
+			}
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			if (SentCommand.Data[1] == 0x00)                                   // Start via watchdog
+			{
+				/* Unlock the forced application start mode of the bootloader if it is restarted */
+				MagicBootKey = MAGIC_BOOT_KEY;
+
+				/* Start the watchdog to reset the AVR once the communications are finalized */
+				wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS);
+			}
+			else                                                               // Start via jump
+			{
+				/* Set the flag to terminate the bootloader at next opportunity */
+				RunBootloader = false;
+			}
+		}
+	}
+	else if (IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00, 0xFF))                 // Erase flash
+	{
+		uint32_t CurrFlashAddress = 0;
+
+		/* Clear the application section of flash */
+		while (CurrFlashAddress < (uint32_t)BOOT_START_ADDR)
+		{
+			boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress);
+			boot_spm_busy_wait();
+			boot_page_write(CurrFlashAddress);
+			boot_spm_busy_wait();
+
+			CurrFlashAddress += SPM_PAGESIZE;
+		}
+
+		/* Re-enable the RWW section of flash as writing to the flash locks it out */
+		boot_rww_enable();
+
+		/* Memory has been erased, reset the security bit so that programming/reading is allowed */
+		IsSecure = false;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Handler for a Data Read command issued by the host. This routine handles bootloader information retrieval
+ *  commands such as device signature and bootloader version retrieval.
+ */
+static void ProcessReadCommand(void)
+{
+	const uint8_t BootloaderInfo[3] = {BOOTLOADER_VERSION, BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE1, BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE2};
+	const uint8_t SignatureInfo[4]  = {0x58, AVR_SIGNATURE_1, AVR_SIGNATURE_2, AVR_SIGNATURE_3};
+
+	uint8_t DataIndexToRead = SentCommand.Data[1];
+
+	if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00))                        // Read bootloader info
+	{
+		ResponseByte = BootloaderInfo[DataIndexToRead];
+	}
+	else if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01))                    // Read signature byte
+	{
+		if (DataIndexToRead < 0x60)
+		  ResponseByte = SignatureInfo[DataIndexToRead - 0x30];
+		else
+		  ResponseByte = SignatureInfo[DataIndexToRead - 0x60 + 3];
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c5d812847
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.h
@@ -0,0 +1,216 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for BootloaderDFU.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _BOOTLOADER_H_
+#define _BOOTLOADER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/boot.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/eeprom.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <util/delay.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "BootloaderAPI.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__OPTIMIZE_SIZE__)
+			#error This bootloader requires that it be optimized for size, not speed, to fit into the target device. Change optimization settings and try again.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Major bootloader version number. */
+		#define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR 2
+
+		/** Minor bootloader version number. */
+		#define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_REV   0
+
+		/** Magic bootloader key to unlock forced application start mode. */
+		#define MAGIC_BOOT_KEY           0xDC42
+
+		/** Complete bootloader version number expressed as a packed byte, constructed from the
+		 *  two individual bootloader version macros.
+		 */
+		#define BOOTLOADER_VERSION       ((BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR << 4) | BOOTLOADER_VERSION_REV)
+
+		/** First byte of the bootloader identification bytes, used to identify a device's bootloader. */
+		#define BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE1      0xDC
+
+		/** Second byte of the bootloader identification bytes, used to identify a device's bootloader. */
+		#define BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE2      0xFB
+
+		/** Convenience macro, used to determine if the issued command is the given one-byte long command.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] dataarr  Command byte array to check against
+		 *  \param[in] cb1      First command byte to check
+		 */
+		#define IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(dataarr, cb1)       (dataarr[0] == (cb1))
+
+		/** Convenience macro, used to determine if the issued command is the given two-byte long command.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] dataarr  Command byte array to check against
+		 *  \param[in] cb1      First command byte to check
+		 *  \param[in] cb2      Second command byte to check
+		 */
+		#define IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(dataarr, cb1, cb2) ((dataarr[0] == (cb1)) && (dataarr[1] == (cb2)))
+
+		/** Length of the DFU file suffix block, appended to the end of each complete memory write command.
+		 *  The DFU file suffix is currently unused (but is designed to give extra file information, such as
+		 *  a CRC of the complete firmware for error checking) and so is discarded.
+		 */
+		#define DFU_FILE_SUFFIX_SIZE     16
+
+		/** Length of the DFU file filler block, appended to the start of each complete memory write command.
+		 *  Filler bytes are added to the start of each complete memory write command, and must be discarded.
+		 */
+		#define DFU_FILLER_BYTES_SIZE    26
+
+		/** DFU class command request to detach from the host. */
+		#define DFU_REQ_DETATCH          0x00
+
+		/** DFU class command request to send data from the host to the bootloader. */
+		#define DFU_REQ_DNLOAD           0x01
+
+		/** DFU class command request to send data from the bootloader to the host. */
+		#define DFU_REQ_UPLOAD           0x02
+
+		/** DFU class command request to get the current DFU status and state from the bootloader. */
+		#define DFU_REQ_GETSTATUS        0x03
+
+		/** DFU class command request to reset the current DFU status and state variables to their defaults. */
+		#define DFU_REQ_CLRSTATUS        0x04
+
+		/** DFU class command request to get the current DFU state of the bootloader. */
+		#define DFU_REQ_GETSTATE         0x05
+
+		/** DFU class command request to abort the current multi-request transfer and return to the dfuIDLE state. */
+		#define DFU_REQ_ABORT            0x06
+
+		/** DFU command to begin programming the device's memory. */
+		#define COMMAND_PROG_START       0x01
+
+		/** DFU command to begin reading the device's memory. */
+		#define COMMAND_DISP_DATA        0x03
+
+		/** DFU command to issue a write command. */
+		#define COMMAND_WRITE            0x04
+
+		/** DFU command to issue a read command. */
+		#define COMMAND_READ             0x05
+
+		/** DFU command to issue a memory base address change command, to set the current 64KB flash page
+		 *  that subsequent flash operations should use. */
+		#define COMMAND_CHANGE_BASE_ADDR 0x06
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a non-returning function pointer to the loaded application. */
+		typedef void (*AppPtr_t)(void) ATTR_NO_RETURN;
+
+		/** Type define for a structure containing a complete DFU command issued by the host. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  Command; /**< Single byte command to perform, one of the \c COMMAND_* macro values */
+			uint8_t  Data[5]; /**< Command parameters */
+			uint16_t DataSize; /**< Size of the command parameters */
+		} DFU_Command_t;
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** DFU bootloader states. Refer to the DFU class specification for information on each state. */
+		enum DFU_State_t
+		{
+			appIDLE                      = 0,
+			appDETACH                    = 1,
+			dfuIDLE                      = 2,
+			dfuDNLOAD_SYNC               = 3,
+			dfuDNBUSY                    = 4,
+			dfuDNLOAD_IDLE               = 5,
+			dfuMANIFEST_SYNC             = 6,
+			dfuMANIFEST                  = 7,
+			dfuMANIFEST_WAIT_RESET       = 8,
+			dfuUPLOAD_IDLE               = 9,
+			dfuERROR                     = 10
+		};
+
+		/** DFU command status error codes. Refer to the DFU class specification for information on each error code. */
+		enum DFU_Status_t
+		{
+			OK                           = 0,
+			errTARGET                    = 1,
+			errFILE                      = 2,
+			errWRITE                     = 3,
+			errERASE                     = 4,
+			errCHECK_ERASED              = 5,
+			errPROG                      = 6,
+			errVERIFY                    = 7,
+			errADDRESS                   = 8,
+			errNOTDONE                   = 9,
+			errFIRMWARE                  = 10,
+			errVENDOR                    = 11,
+			errUSBR                      = 12,
+			errPOR                       = 13,
+			errUNKNOWN                   = 14,
+			errSTALLEDPKT                = 15
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		static void SetupHardware(void);
+		static void ResetHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADER_C)
+			static void DiscardFillerBytes(uint8_t NumberOfBytes);
+			static void ProcessBootloaderCommand(void);
+			static void LoadStartEndAddresses(void);
+			static void ProcessMemProgCommand(void);
+			static void ProcessMemReadCommand(void);
+			static void ProcessWriteCommand(void);
+			static void ProcessReadCommand(void);
+		#endif
+
+		void Application_Jump_Check(void) ATTR_INIT_SECTION(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e63bcc1f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,233 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage DFU Class USB AVR Bootloader
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4) - <i>See \ref SSec_Aux_Space</i>
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2) - <i>See \ref SSec_Aux_Space</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Device</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Device Firmware Update Class (DFU)</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *   <td>None</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *   <td>USBIF DFU Class Standard, Atmel USB Bootloader Datasheet</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *       Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  This bootloader enumerates to the host as a DFU Class device, allowing for DFU-compatible programming
+ *  software to load firmware onto the AVR.
+ *
+ *  Out of the box this bootloader builds for the AT90USB1287 with an 8KB bootloader section size, and will fit
+ *  into 4KB of bootloader space. If you wish to alter this size and/or change the AVR model, you will need to
+ *  edit the MCU, FLASH_SIZE_KB and BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB values in the accompanying makefile.
+ *
+ *  When the bootloader is running, the board's LED(s) will flash at regular intervals to distinguish the
+ *  bootloader from the normal user application.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Running Running the Bootloader
+ *
+ *  This bootloader is designed to be started via the HWB mechanism of the USB AVRs; ground the HWB pin (see device
+ *  datasheet) then momentarily ground /RESET to start the bootloader. This assumes the HWBE fuse is set and the BOOTRST
+ *  fuse is cleared.
+ *
+ *  For board specific exceptions to the above, see below.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_XPLAIN Atmel Xplain Board
+ *  Ground the USB AVR JTAG's \c TCK pin to ground when powering on the board to start the bootloader. This assumes the
+ *  \c HWBE fuse is cleared and the \c BOOTRST fuse is set as the HWBE pin is not user accessible on this board.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_Leonardo Arduino Leonardo Board
+ *  Ground \c IO13 when powering the board to start the bootloader. This assumes the \c HWBE fuse is cleared and the
+ *  \c BOOTRST fuse is set as the HWBE pin is not user accessible on this board.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Installation Driver Installation
+ *
+ *  This bootloader is designed to be compatible with Atmel's provided Windows DFU class drivers. You will need to
+ *  install Atmel's DFU drivers prior to using this bootloader on Windows platforms. If you are using a 64 bit Windows
+ *  OS, you will need to either disable the driver signing requirement (see online tutorials for details) or use a
+ *  digitally signed version of the official Atmel driver provided by a third party AVR user at
+ *  <a>http://www.avrfreaks.net/index.php?module=Freaks%20Academy&func=viewItem&item_id=2196&item_type=project</a>.
+ *
+ *  \note This device spoofs Atmel's DFU Bootloader USB VID and PID so that the Atmel DFU bootloader
+ *        drivers included with FLIP will work. If you do not wish to use Atmel's ID codes, please
+ *        manually change them in Descriptors.c and alter your driver's INF file accordingly.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_HostApp Host Controller Application
+ *
+ *  This bootloader is compatible with Atmel's FLIP utility on Windows machines, and dfu-programmer on Linux machines.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_FLIP FLIP (Windows)
+ *
+ *  FLIP (Flexible In-System Programmer) is a utility written by Atmel, and distributed for free on the Atmel website.
+ *  The FLIP utility is designed to assist in the bootloader programming of a range of Atmel devices, through several
+ *  popular physical interfaces including USB. It is written in Java, however makes use of native extensions for USB
+ *  support and thus is only offered on Windows.
+ *
+ *  To program a device using FLIP, refer to the Atmel FLIP documentation.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_DFUProgrammer dfu-programmer (Linux)
+ *
+ *  dfu-programmer is an open-source command line solution for the bootloader programming of Atmel devices through a
+ *  USB connection, using the DFU protocol, available for download at <a>http://sourceforge.net/projects/dfu-programmer/</a>.
+ *
+ *  The following example loads a HEX file into the AVR's FLASH memory using dfu-programmer:
+ *  \code
+ *  dfu-programmer at90usb1287 erase flash Mouse.hex
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_API User Application API
+ *
+ *  Several user application functions for FLASH and other special memory area manipulations are exposed by the bootloader,
+ *  allowing the user application to call into the bootloader at runtime to read and write FLASH data.
+ *
+ *  \warning The APIs exposed by the DFU class bootloader are \b NOT compatible with the API exposed by the official Atmel DFU bootloader.
+ *
+ *  By default, the bootloader API jump table is located 32 bytes from the end of the device's FLASH memory, and follows the
+ *  following layout:
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE          32
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START         ((FLASHEND + 1UL) - BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE)
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(Index)         (void*)((BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (Index * 2)) / 2)
+ *
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_ErasePage)(uint32_t Address)               = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(0);
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_WritePage)(uint32_t Address)               = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(1);
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_FillWord)(uint32_t Address, uint16_t Word) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(2);
+ *  uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature)(uint16_t Address)           = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(3);
+ *  uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse)(uint16_t Address)                = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(4);
+ *  uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadLock)(void)                            = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(5);
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_WriteLock)(uint8_t LockBits)               = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(6);
+ *
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE_START   (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 2))
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE         0xDCFB
+ *
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_CLASS_SIGNATURE_START   (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 4))
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_DFU_SIGNATURE           0xDF10
+ *
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_START           (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 8))
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_LENGTH          4
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  From the application the API support of the bootloader can be detected by reading the FLASH memory bytes located at address
+ *  \c BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE_START and comparing them to the value \c BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE. The class of bootloader
+ *  can be determined by reading the FLASH memory bytes located at address \c BOOTLOADER_CLASS_SIGNATURE_START and comparing them
+ *  to the value \c BOOTLOADER_DFU_SIGNATURE. The start address of the bootloader can be retrieved by reading the bytes of FLASH
+ *  memory starting from address \c BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_START.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_API_MemLayout Device Memory Map
+ *  The following illustration indicates the final memory map of the device when loaded with the bootloader.
+ *
+ *  \verbatim
+ *  +----------------------------+ 0x0000
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |      User Application      |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - BOOT_AUX_SECTION_SIZE
+ *  | Booloader Start Trampoline |
+ *  | (Not User App. Accessible) |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - (BOOT_AUX_SECTION_SIZE - 4)
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |     Auxillery Bootloader   |
+ *  |  Space for Smaller Devices |
+ *  | (Not User App. Accessible) |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - BOOT_SECTION_SIZE
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |   Bootloader Application   |
+ *  | (Not User App. Accessible) |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 96
+ *  |   API Table Trampolines    |
+ *  | (Not User App. Accessible) |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 32
+ *  |    Bootloader API Table    |
+ *  |   (User App. Accessible)   |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 8
+ *  |   Bootloader ID Constants  |
+ *  |   (User App. Accessible)   |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND
+ *  \endverbatim
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_Aux_Space Auxiliary Bootloader Section
+ *  To make the bootloader function on smaller devices (those with a physical
+ *  bootloader section of smaller than 6KB)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_KnownIssues Known Issues:
+ *
+ *  \par On Linux machines, the DFU bootloader is inaccessible.
+ *  On many Linux systems, non-root users do not have automatic access to newly
+ *  inserted DFU devices. Root privileges or a UDEV rule is required to gain
+ *  access.
+ *  See <a href=https://groups.google.com/d/msg/lufa-support/CP9cy2bc8yo/kBqsOu-RBeMJ>here</a> for resolution steps.
+ *
+ *  \par After loading an application, it is not run automatically on startup.
+ *  Some USB AVR boards ship with the BOOTRST fuse set, causing the bootloader
+ *  to run automatically when the device is reset. In most cases, the BOOTRST
+ *  fuse should be disabled and the HWBE fuse used instead to run the bootloader
+ *  when needed.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>SECURE_MODE</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>If defined to \c true, the bootloader will not accept any memory commands other than a chip erase on start-up, until an
+ *        erase has been performed. This can be used in conjunction with the AVR's lockbits to prevent the AVRs firmware from
+ *        being dumped by unauthorized persons. When false, all memory operations are allowed at any time.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..260a8f4cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
+ *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
+ *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
+ *  makefile or build system.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#define SECURE_MODE              false
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f123dd5aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      32
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..922c06bcd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,185 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = PRODUCT_ID_CODE,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,0),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED,
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.DFU_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_DFU,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 0,
+
+			.Class                  = 0xFE,
+			.SubClass               = 0x01,
+			.Protocol               = 0x02,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.DFU_Functional =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_DFU_Functional_t), .Type = DTYPE_DFUFunctional},
+
+			.Attributes             = (ATTR_CAN_UPLOAD | ATTR_CAN_DOWNLOAD),
+
+			.DetachTimeout          = 0x0000,
+			.TransferSize           = 0x0C00,
+
+			.DFUSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0)
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA DFU");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			if (DescriptorNumber == STRING_ID_Language)
+			{
+				Address = &LanguageString;
+				Size    = LanguageString.Header.Size;
+			}
+			else if (DescriptorNumber == STRING_ID_Manufacturer)
+			{
+				Address = &ManufacturerString;
+				Size    = ManufacturerString.Header.Size;
+			}
+			else if (DescriptorNumber == STRING_ID_Product)
+			{
+				Address = &ProductString;
+				Size    = ProductString.Header.Size;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..249172b6d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,194 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Descriptor type value for a DFU class functional descriptor. */
+		#define DTYPE_DFUFunctional               0x21
+
+		/** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device will detach and re-attach when a DFU_DETACH
+		 *  command is issued, rather than the host issuing a USB Reset.
+		 */
+		#define ATTR_WILL_DETATCH                 (1 << 3)
+
+		/** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device can communicate during the manifestation phase
+		 *  (memory programming phase).
+		 */
+		#define ATTR_MANEFESTATION_TOLLERANT      (1 << 2)
+
+		/** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device can accept DFU_UPLOAD requests to send data from
+		 *  the device to the host.
+		 */
+		#define ATTR_CAN_UPLOAD                   (1 << 1)
+
+		/** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device can accept DFU_DNLOAD requests to send data from
+		 *  the host to the device.
+		 */
+		#define ATTR_CAN_DOWNLOAD                 (1 << 0)
+
+		#if defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FFB
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x97
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FF9
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x96
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FFB
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x97
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FF9
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x96
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FF4
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x95
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x87
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FF3
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x94
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x88
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U2__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FF0
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x95
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x8A
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega16U2__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FEF
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x94
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x89
+		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FFA
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x94
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega8U2__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FEE
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x93
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x89
+		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB82__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FF7
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x94
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#else
+			#error The selected AVR part is not currently supported by this bootloader.
+		#endif
+
+		#if !defined(PRODUCT_ID_CODE)
+			#error Current AVR model is not supported by this bootloader.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a DFU class function descriptor. This descriptor gives DFU class information
+		 *  to the host when read, indicating the DFU device's capabilities.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Standard descriptor header structure */
+
+			uint8_t                 Attributes; /**< DFU device attributes, a mask comprising of the
+			                                     *  ATTR_* macros listed in this source file
+			                                     */
+			uint16_t                DetachTimeout; /**< Timeout in milliseconds between a USB_DETACH
+			                                        *  command being issued and the device detaching
+			                                        *  from the USB bus
+			                                        */
+			uint16_t                TransferSize; /**< Maximum number of bytes the DFU device can accept
+			                                       *  from the host in a transaction
+			                                       */
+			uint16_t                DFUSpecification; /**< BCD packed DFU specification number this DFU
+			                                           *  device complies with
+			                                           */
+		} USB_Descriptor_DFU_Functional_t;
+
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// DFU Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            DFU_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_DFU_Functional_t       DFU_Functional;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_DFU = 0, /**< DFU interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6f3312b76
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="DFU Bootloader - 128KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.dfu.avr8.128_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_dfu_128kb_4kb_">

+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.dfu"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x1F000"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x1F000"/>

+

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x1FFA0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x1FFE0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x1FFF8"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="DFU Bootloader - 64KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.dfu.avr8.64_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_dfu_64kb_4kb_">

+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.dfu"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb647"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0xF000"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0xF000"/>

+

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0xFFA0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0xFFE0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0xFFF8"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="DFU Bootloader - 32KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.dfu.avr8.32_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_dfu_32kb_4kb_">

+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.dfu"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atmega32u4"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x7000"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x7000"/>

+

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x7FA0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x7FE0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x7FF8"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="DFU Bootloader - 16KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.dfu.avr8.16_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_dfu_16kb_4kb_">

+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.dfu"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atmega16u2"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x3000"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x3000"/>

+

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x3FA0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x3FE0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x3FF8"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="DFU Bootloader - 8KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.dfu.avr8.8_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_dfu_8kb_4kb_">

+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.dfu"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atmega8u2"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x1000"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x1000"/>

+

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x1FA0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x1FE0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x1FF8"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.bootloaders.dfu" caption="DFU Bootloader">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		DFU Class Bootloader, capable of reprogramming a device using the Atmel FLIP or other AVR DFU programming software when plugged into a host.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Bootloaders"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+		</info>

+

+ 		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="include-path" value="."/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="BootloaderDFU.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="BootloaderDFU.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="BootloaderAPI.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="BootloaderAPI.h"/>

+		<build type="asm-source" value="BootloaderAPITable.S"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="BootloaderDFU.txt"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6cc42af79
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2365 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - DFU Class Bootloader"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM \
+                         ATTR_NO_INIT
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9b91cc63f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/DFU/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = BootloaderDFU
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c BootloaderAPI.c BootloaderAPITable.S $(LUFA_SRC_USB)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START_OFFSET)
+LD_FLAGS     = -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START_OFFSET) $(BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS)
+
+# Flash size and bootloader section sizes of the target, in KB. These must
+# match the target's total FLASH size and the bootloader size set in the
+# device's fuses.
+FLASH_SIZE_KB         = 128
+BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB  = 8
+
+# Bootloader address calculation formulas
+# Do not modify these macros, but rather modify the dependent values above.
+CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX   = $(shell printf "0x%X" $$(( $(1) )) )
+BOOT_START_OFFSET     = $(call CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX, ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) - $(BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB)) * 1024 )
+BOOT_SEC_OFFSET       = $(call CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX, ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) * 1024) - ($(strip $(1))) )
+
+# Bootloader linker section flags for relocating the API table sections to
+# known FLASH addresses - these should not normally be user-edited.
+BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG  = -Wl,--section-start=$(strip $(1))=$(call BOOT_SEC_OFFSET, $(3)) -Wl,--undefined=$(strip $(2))
+BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS     = $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_trampolines, BootloaderAPI_Trampolines, 96)
+BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS    += $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_jumptable,   BootloaderAPI_JumpTable,   32)
+BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS    += $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_signatures,  BootloaderAPI_Signatures,  8)
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..518029ac4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.c
@@ -0,0 +1,190 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the HID class bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic.
+ */
+
+#include "BootloaderHID.h"
+
+/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run
+ *  via a soft reset. When cleared, the bootloader will abort, the USB interface will shut down and the application
+ *  started via a forced watchdog reset.
+ */
+static bool RunBootloader = true;
+
+/** Magic lock for forced application start. If the HWBE fuse is programmed and BOOTRST is unprogrammed, the bootloader
+ *  will start if the /HWB line of the AVR is held low and the system is reset. However, if the /HWB line is still held
+ *  low when the application attempts to start via a watchdog reset, the bootloader will re-start. If set to the value
+ *  \ref MAGIC_BOOT_KEY the special init function \ref Application_Jump_Check() will force the application to start.
+ */
+uint16_t MagicBootKey ATTR_NO_INIT;
+
+
+/** Special startup routine to check if the bootloader was started via a watchdog reset, and if the magic application
+ *  start key has been loaded into \ref MagicBootKey. If the bootloader started via the watchdog and the key is valid,
+ *  this will force the user application to start via a software jump.
+ */
+void Application_Jump_Check(void)
+{
+	/* If the reset source was the bootloader and the key is correct, clear it and jump to the application */
+	if ((MCUSR & (1 << WDRF)) && (MagicBootKey == MAGIC_BOOT_KEY))
+	{
+		MagicBootKey = 0;
+
+		// cppcheck-suppress constStatement
+		((void (*)(void))0x0000)();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the bootloader, then continuously
+ *  runs the bootloader processing routine until instructed to soft-exit.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	/* Setup hardware required for the bootloader */
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	/* Enable global interrupts so that the USB stack can function */
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	while (RunBootloader)
+	  USB_USBTask();
+
+	/* Disconnect from the host - USB interface will be reset later along with the AVR */
+	USB_Detach();
+
+	/* Unlock the forced application start mode of the bootloader if it is restarted */
+	MagicBootKey = MAGIC_BOOT_KEY;
+
+	/* Enable the watchdog and force a timeout to reset the AVR */
+	wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS);
+
+	for (;;);
+}
+
+/** Configures all hardware required for the bootloader. */
+static void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */
+	MCUCR = (1 << IVCE);
+	MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL);
+
+	/* Initialize USB subsystem */
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This configures the device's endpoints ready
+ *  to relay data to and from the attached USB host.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	/* Setup HID Report Endpoint */
+	Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(HID_IN_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, HID_IN_EPSIZE, 1);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to
+ *  the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing
+ *  internally.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	/* Ignore any requests that aren't directed to the HID interface */
+	if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & (CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE | CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT)) !=
+	    (REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+	{
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Process HID specific control requests */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case HID_REQ_SetReport:
+			Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+			/* Wait until the command has been sent by the host */
+			while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()));
+
+			/* Read in the write destination address */
+			#if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF)
+			uint32_t PageAddress = ((uint32_t)Endpoint_Read_16_LE() << 8);
+			#else
+			uint16_t PageAddress = Endpoint_Read_16_LE();
+			#endif
+
+			/* Check if the command is a program page command, or a start application command */
+			#if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF)
+			if ((uint16_t)(PageAddress >> 8) == COMMAND_STARTAPPLICATION)
+			#else
+			if (PageAddress == COMMAND_STARTAPPLICATION)
+			#endif
+			{
+				RunBootloader = false;
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				/* Erase the given FLASH page, ready to be programmed */
+				boot_page_erase(PageAddress);
+				boot_spm_busy_wait();
+
+				/* Write each of the FLASH page's bytes in sequence */
+				for (uint8_t PageWord = 0; PageWord < (SPM_PAGESIZE / 2); PageWord++)
+				{
+					/* Check if endpoint is empty - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */
+					if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
+					{
+						Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+						while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()));
+					}
+
+					/* Write the next data word to the FLASH page */
+					boot_page_fill(PageAddress + ((uint16_t)PageWord << 1), Endpoint_Read_16_LE());
+				}
+
+				/* Write the filled FLASH page to memory */
+				boot_page_write(PageAddress);
+				boot_spm_busy_wait();
+
+				/* Re-enable RWW section */
+				boot_rww_enable();
+			}
+
+			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+			Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8efd47ec2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.h
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for BootloaderHID.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _BOOTLOADERHID_H_
+#define _BOOTLOADERHID_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/boot.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__OPTIMIZE_SIZE__)
+			#error This bootloader requires that it be optimized for size, not speed, to fit into the target device. Change optimization settings and try again.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Bootloader special address to start the user application */
+		#define COMMAND_STARTAPPLICATION   0xFFFF
+
+		/** Magic bootloader key to unlock forced application start mode. */
+		#define MAGIC_BOOT_KEY             0xDC42
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		static void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void Application_Jump_Check(void) ATTR_INIT_SECTION(3);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..63c1505cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,105 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage HID Class USB AVR Bootloader
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Device</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Human Interface Device Class (HID)</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *   <td>N/A</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *   <td>USBIF HID Class Standard \n
+ *       Teensy Programming Protocol Specification</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *       Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  This bootloader enumerates to the host as a HID Class device, allowing for device FLASH programming through
+ *  the supplied command line software, which is a modified version of Paul's TeensyHID Command Line loader code
+ *  from PJRC (used with permission). This bootloader is deliberately non-compatible with the proprietary PJRC
+ *  HalfKay bootloader GUI; only the command line interface software accompanying this bootloader will work with it.
+ *
+ *  Out of the box this bootloader builds for the AT90USB1287 with an 8KB bootloader section size, and will fit
+ *  into 2KB of bootloader space for the Series 2 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU2, AT90USBxx2) or 4KB of bootloader space for
+ *  all other models. If you wish to alter this size and/or change the AVR model, you will need to edit the MCU,
+ *  FLASH_SIZE_KB and BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB values in the accompanying makefile.
+ *
+ *  \warning <b>THIS BOOTLOADER IS NOT SECURE.</b> Malicious entities can recover written data, even if the device
+ *           lockbits are set.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Running Running the Bootloader
+ *
+ *  This bootloader is designed to be started via the HWB mechanism of the USB AVRs; ground the HWB pin (see device
+ *  datasheet) then momentarily ground /RESET to start the bootloader. This assumes the HWBE fuse is set and the BOOTRST
+ *  fuse is cleared.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Installation Driver Installation
+ *
+ *  This bootloader uses the HID class driver inbuilt into all modern operating systems, thus no additional drivers
+ *  need to be supplied for correct operation.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_HostApp Host Controller Application
+ *
+ *  Due to licensing issues, the supplied bootloader is compatible with the HalfKay bootloader protocol designed
+ *  by PJRC, but is non-compatible with the cross-platform loader GUI. A modified version of the open source
+ *  cross-platform TeensyLoader application is supplied, which can be compiled under most operating systems. The
+ *  command-line loader application should remain compatible with genuine Teensy boards in addition to boards using
+ *  this custom bootloader.
+ *
+ *  Once compiled, programs can be loaded into the AVR's FLASH memory through the following example command:
+ *  \code
+ *  hid_bootloader_cli -mmcu=at90usb1287 Mouse.hex
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_KnownIssues Known Issues:
+ *
+ *  \par After loading an application, it is not run automatically on startup.
+ *  Some USB AVR boards ship with the BOOTRST fuse set, causing the bootloader
+ *  to run automatically when the device is reset. In most cases, the BOOTRST
+ *  fuse should be disabled and the HWBE fuse used instead to run the bootloader
+ *  when needed.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..af2dd3060
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3eaa19295
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,187 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t HIDReport[] =
+{
+	HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(16, 0xFFDC), /* Vendor Page 0xDC */
+	HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xFB), /* Vendor Usage 0xFB */
+	HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x01), /* Vendor Usage 1 */
+		HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x02), /* Vendor Usage 2 */
+		HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0x00),
+		HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 0xFF),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x08),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(16, (sizeof(uint16_t) + SPM_PAGESIZE)),
+		HID_RI_OUTPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE | HID_IOF_NON_VOLATILE),
+	HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0),
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2067,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED,
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.HID_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_Printer,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = HID_CSCP_HIDClass,
+			.SubClass               = HID_CSCP_NonBootSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = HID_CSCP_NonBootProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_VendorHID =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = HID_DTYPE_HID},
+
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(1,1,1),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = HID_DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(HIDReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = HID_IN_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = HID_IN_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	/* If/Else If chain compiles slightly smaller than a switch case */
+	if (DescriptorType == DTYPE_Device)
+	{
+		Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+		Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+	}
+	else if (DescriptorType == DTYPE_Configuration)
+	{
+		Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+		Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+	}
+	else if (DescriptorType == HID_DTYPE_HID)
+	{
+		Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_VendorHID;
+		Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		Address = &HIDReport;
+		Size    = sizeof(HIDReport);
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4c7d08b51
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// Generic HID Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t              HID_VendorHID;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_Printer = 0, /**< Printer interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the HID data IN endpoint. */
+		#define HID_IN_EPADDR                (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 1)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define HID_IN_EPSIZE                64
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/Makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7b2833e62
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+OS ?= LINUX
+#OS ?= WINDOWS
+#OS ?= MACOSX
+#OS ?= BSD
+
+ifeq ($(OS), LINUX)  # also works on FreeBSD
+CC ?= gcc
+CFLAGS ?= -O2 -Wall
+hid_bootloader_cli: hid_bootloader_cli.c
+	$(CC) $(CFLAGS) -s -DUSE_LIBUSB -o hid_bootloader_cli hid_bootloader_cli.c -lusb
+
+
+else ifeq ($(OS), WINDOWS)
+CC = i586-mingw32msvc-gcc
+CFLAGS ?= -O2 -Wall
+hid_bootloader_cli.exe: hid_bootloader_cli.c
+	$(CC) $(CFLAGS) -s -DUSE_WIN32 -o hid_bootloader_cli.exe hid_bootloader_cli.c -lhid -lsetupapi
+
+
+else ifeq ($(OS), MACOSX)
+CC ?= gcc
+SDK ?= /Developer/SDKs/MacOSX10.5.sdk
+CFLAGS ?= -O2 -Wall
+hid_bootloader_cli: hid_bootloader_cli.c
+	$(CC) $(CFLAGS) -DUSE_APPLE_IOKIT -isysroot $(SDK) -o hid_bootloader_cli hid_bootloader_cli.c -Wl,-syslibroot,$(SDK) -framework IOKit -framework CoreFoundation
+
+
+else ifeq ($(OS), BSD)  # works on NetBSD and OpenBSD
+CC ?= gcct
+CFLAGS ?= -O2 -Wall
+hid_bootloader_cli: hid_bootloader_cli.c
+	$(CC) $(CFLAGS) -s -DUSE_UHID -o hid_bootloader_cli hid_bootloader_cli.c
+
+
+endif
+
+
+clean:
+	rm -f hid_bootloader_cli hid_bootloader_cli.exe
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/Makefile.bsd b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/Makefile.bsd
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a15a66405
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/Makefile.bsd
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+OS ?= FreeBSD
+#OS ?= NetBSD
+#OS ?= OpenBSD
+
+CFLAGS ?= -O2 -Wall
+CC ?= gcc
+
+.if $(OS) == "FreeBSD"
+CFLAGS += -DUSE_LIBUSB
+LIBS =  -lusb
+.elif $(OS) == "NetBSD" || $(OS) == "OpenBSD"
+CFLAGS += -DUSE_UHID
+LIBS =
+.endif
+
+
+hid_bootloader_cli: hid_bootloader_cli.c
+	$(CC) $(CFLAGS) -s -o hid_bootloader_cli hid_bootloader_cli.c $(LIBS)
+
+clean:
+	rm -f hid_bootloader_cli
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/gpl3.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/gpl3.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..94a9ed024
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/gpl3.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,674 @@
+                    GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+                       Version 3, 29 June 2007
+
+ Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/>
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+                            Preamble
+
+  The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for
+software and other kinds of works.
+
+  The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed
+to take away your freedom to share and change the works.  By contrast,
+the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to
+share and change all versions of a program--to make sure it remains free
+software for all its users.  We, the Free Software Foundation, use the
+GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to
+any other work released this way by its authors.  You can apply it to
+your programs, too.
+
+  When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price.  Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you
+want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new
+free programs, and that you know you can do these things.
+
+  To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you
+these rights or asking you to surrender the rights.  Therefore, you have
+certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if
+you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others.
+
+  For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same
+freedoms that you received.  You must make sure that they, too, receive
+or can get the source code.  And you must show them these terms so they
+know their rights.
+
+  Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps:
+(1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License
+giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it.
+
+  For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains
+that there is no warranty for this free software.  For both users' and
+authors' sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as
+changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to
+authors of previous versions.
+
+  Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run
+modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer
+can do so.  This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of
+protecting users' freedom to change the software.  The systematic
+pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to
+use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable.  Therefore, we
+have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those
+products.  If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we
+stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions
+of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users.
+
+  Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents.
+States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of
+software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to
+avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could
+make it effectively proprietary.  To prevent this, the GPL assures that
+patents cannot be used to render the program non-free.
+
+  The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+
+                       TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+  0. Definitions.
+
+  "This License" refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License.
+
+  "Copyright" also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of
+works, such as semiconductor masks.
+
+  "The Program" refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this
+License.  Each licensee is addressed as "you".  "Licensees" and
+"recipients" may be individuals or organizations.
+
+  To "modify" a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work
+in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an
+exact copy.  The resulting work is called a "modified version" of the
+earlier work or a work "based on" the earlier work.
+
+  A "covered work" means either the unmodified Program or a work based
+on the Program.
+
+  To "propagate" a work means to do anything with it that, without
+permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for
+infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a
+computer or modifying a private copy.  Propagation includes copying,
+distribution (with or without modification), making available to the
+public, and in some countries other activities as well.
+
+  To "convey" a work means any kind of propagation that enables other
+parties to make or receive copies.  Mere interaction with a user through
+a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying.
+
+  An interactive user interface displays "Appropriate Legal Notices"
+to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible
+feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2)
+tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the
+extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the
+work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License.  If
+the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a
+menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion.
+
+  1. Source Code.
+
+  The "source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work
+for making modifications to it.  "Object code" means any non-source
+form of a work.
+
+  A "Standard Interface" means an interface that either is an official
+standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of
+interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that
+is widely used among developers working in that language.
+
+  The "System Libraries" of an executable work include anything, other
+than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of
+packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major
+Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that
+Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an
+implementation is available to the public in source code form.  A
+"Major Component", in this context, means a major essential component
+(kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system
+(if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to
+produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it.
+
+  The "Corresponding Source" for a work in object code form means all
+the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable
+work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to
+control those activities.  However, it does not include the work's
+System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free
+programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but
+which are not part of the work.  For example, Corresponding Source
+includes interface definition files associated with source files for
+the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically
+linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require,
+such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those
+subprograms and other parts of the work.
+
+  The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users
+can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding
+Source.
+
+  The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that
+same work.
+
+  2. Basic Permissions.
+
+  All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of
+copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated
+conditions are met.  This License explicitly affirms your unlimited
+permission to run the unmodified Program.  The output from running a
+covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its
+content, constitutes a covered work.  This License acknowledges your
+rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law.
+
+  You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not
+convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains
+in force.  You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose
+of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you
+with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with
+the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do
+not control copyright.  Those thus making or running the covered works
+for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction
+and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of
+your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you.
+
+  Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under
+the conditions stated below.  Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10
+makes it unnecessary.
+
+  3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law.
+
+  No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological
+measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article
+11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or
+similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such
+measures.
+
+  When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid
+circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention
+is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to
+the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or
+modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work's
+users, your or third parties' legal rights to forbid circumvention of
+technological measures.
+
+  4. Conveying Verbatim Copies.
+
+  You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you
+receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and
+appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice;
+keep intact all notices stating that this License and any
+non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code;
+keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all
+recipients a copy of this License along with the Program.
+
+  You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey,
+and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee.
+
+  5. Conveying Modified Source Versions.
+
+  You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to
+produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the
+terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+    a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified
+    it, and giving a relevant date.
+
+    b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is
+    released under this License and any conditions added under section
+    7.  This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to
+    "keep intact all notices".
+
+    c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this
+    License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy.  This
+    License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7
+    additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts,
+    regardless of how they are packaged.  This License gives no
+    permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not
+    invalidate such permission if you have separately received it.
+
+    d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display
+    Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive
+    interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your
+    work need not make them do so.
+
+  A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent
+works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work,
+and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program,
+in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an
+"aggregate" if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not
+used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation's users
+beyond what the individual works permit.  Inclusion of a covered work
+in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other
+parts of the aggregate.
+
+  6. Conveying Non-Source Forms.
+
+  You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms
+of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the
+machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License,
+in one of these ways:
+
+    a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product
+    (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the
+    Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium
+    customarily used for software interchange.
+
+    b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product
+    (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a
+    written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as
+    long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product
+    model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a
+    copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the
+    product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical
+    medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no
+    more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this
+    conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the
+    Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge.
+
+    c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the
+    written offer to provide the Corresponding Source.  This
+    alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and
+    only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord
+    with subsection 6b.
+
+    d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated
+    place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the
+    Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no
+    further charge.  You need not require recipients to copy the
+    Corresponding Source along with the object code.  If the place to
+    copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source
+    may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party)
+    that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain
+    clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the
+    Corresponding Source.  Regardless of what server hosts the
+    Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is
+    available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements.
+
+    e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided
+    you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding
+    Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no
+    charge under subsection 6d.
+
+  A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded
+from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be
+included in conveying the object code work.
+
+  A "User Product" is either (1) a "consumer product", which means any
+tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family,
+or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation
+into a dwelling.  In determining whether a product is a consumer product,
+doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage.  For a particular
+product received by a particular user, "normally used" refers to a
+typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status
+of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user
+actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product.  A product
+is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial
+commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent
+the only significant mode of use of the product.
+
+  "Installation Information" for a User Product means any methods,
+procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install
+and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from
+a modified version of its Corresponding Source.  The information must
+suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object
+code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because
+modification has been made.
+
+  If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or
+specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as
+part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the
+User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a
+fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the
+Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied
+by the Installation Information.  But this requirement does not apply
+if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install
+modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has
+been installed in ROM).
+
+  The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a
+requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates
+for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for
+the User Product in which it has been modified or installed.  Access to a
+network may be denied when the modification itself materially and
+adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and
+protocols for communication across the network.
+
+  Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided,
+in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly
+documented (and with an implementation available to the public in
+source code form), and must require no special password or key for
+unpacking, reading or copying.
+
+  7. Additional Terms.
+
+  "Additional permissions" are terms that supplement the terms of this
+License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions.
+Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall
+be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent
+that they are valid under applicable law.  If additional permissions
+apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately
+under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by
+this License without regard to the additional permissions.
+
+  When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option
+remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of
+it.  (Additional permissions may be written to require their own
+removal in certain cases when you modify the work.)  You may place
+additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work,
+for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission.
+
+  Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you
+add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of
+that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms:
+
+    a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the
+    terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or
+
+    b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or
+    author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal
+    Notices displayed by works containing it; or
+
+    c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or
+    requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in
+    reasonable ways as different from the original version; or
+
+    d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or
+    authors of the material; or
+
+    e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some
+    trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or
+
+    f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that
+    material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of
+    it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for
+    any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on
+    those licensors and authors.
+
+  All other non-permissive additional terms are considered "further
+restrictions" within the meaning of section 10.  If the Program as you
+received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is
+governed by this License along with a term that is a further
+restriction, you may remove that term.  If a license document contains
+a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this
+License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms
+of that license document, provided that the further restriction does
+not survive such relicensing or conveying.
+
+  If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you
+must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the
+additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating
+where to find the applicable terms.
+
+  Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the
+form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions;
+the above requirements apply either way.
+
+  8. Termination.
+
+  You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly
+provided under this License.  Any attempt otherwise to propagate or
+modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under
+this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third
+paragraph of section 11).
+
+  However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your
+license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a)
+provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and
+finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright
+holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means
+prior to 60 days after the cessation.
+
+  Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is
+reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
+violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have
+received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that
+copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after
+your receipt of the notice.
+
+  Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the
+licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under
+this License.  If your rights have been terminated and not permanently
+reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same
+material under section 10.
+
+  9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies.
+
+  You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or
+run a copy of the Program.  Ancillary propagation of a covered work
+occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission
+to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance.  However,
+nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or
+modify any covered work.  These actions infringe copyright if you do
+not accept this License.  Therefore, by modifying or propagating a
+covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so.
+
+  10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients.
+
+  Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically
+receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and
+propagate that work, subject to this License.  You are not responsible
+for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
+
+  An "entity transaction" is a transaction transferring control of an
+organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an
+organization, or merging organizations.  If propagation of a covered
+work results from an entity transaction, each party to that
+transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever
+licenses to the work the party's predecessor in interest had or could
+give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the
+Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if
+the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts.
+
+  You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the
+rights granted or affirmed under this License.  For example, you may
+not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of
+rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation
+(including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that
+any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for
+sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it.
+
+  11. Patents.
+
+  A "contributor" is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this
+License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based.  The
+work thus licensed is called the contributor's "contributor version".
+
+  A contributor's "essential patent claims" are all patent claims
+owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or
+hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted
+by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version,
+but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a
+consequence of further modification of the contributor version.  For
+purposes of this definition, "control" includes the right to grant
+patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of
+this License.
+
+  Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free
+patent license under the contributor's essential patent claims, to
+make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and
+propagate the contents of its contributor version.
+
+  In the following three paragraphs, a "patent license" is any express
+agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent
+(such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to
+sue for patent infringement).  To "grant" such a patent license to a
+party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a
+patent against the party.
+
+  If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license,
+and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone
+to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a
+publicly available network server or other readily accessible means,
+then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so
+available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the
+patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner
+consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent
+license to downstream recipients.  "Knowingly relying" means you have
+actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the
+covered work in a country, or your recipient's use of the covered work
+in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that
+country that you have reason to believe are valid.
+
+  If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or
+arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a
+covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties
+receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify
+or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license
+you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered
+work and works based on it.
+
+  A patent license is "discriminatory" if it does not include within
+the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is
+conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are
+specifically granted under this License.  You may not convey a covered
+work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is
+in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment
+to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying
+the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the
+parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory
+patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work
+conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily
+for and in connection with specific products or compilations that
+contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement,
+or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007.
+
+  Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting
+any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may
+otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law.
+
+  12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom.
+
+  If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License.  If you cannot convey a
+covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may
+not convey it at all.  For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you
+to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey
+the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this
+License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program.
+
+  13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License.
+
+  Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have
+permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed
+under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single
+combined work, and to convey the resulting work.  The terms of this
+License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work,
+but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License,
+section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the
+combination as such.
+
+  14. Revised Versions of this License.
+
+  The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of
+the GNU General Public License from time to time.  Such new versions will
+be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
+address new problems or concerns.
+
+  Each version is given a distinguishing version number.  If the
+Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General
+Public License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the
+option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered
+version or of any later version published by the Free Software
+Foundation.  If the Program does not specify a version number of the
+GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published
+by the Free Software Foundation.
+
+  If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future
+versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy's
+public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you
+to choose that version for the Program.
+
+  Later license versions may give you additional or different
+permissions.  However, no additional obligations are imposed on any
+author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a
+later version.
+
+  15. Disclaimer of Warranty.
+
+  THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
+APPLICABLE LAW.  EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT
+HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY
+OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
+THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+PURPOSE.  THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM
+IS WITH YOU.  SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF
+ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+  16. Limitation of Liability.
+
+  IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS
+THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY
+GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE
+USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF
+DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD
+PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS),
+EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+  17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16.
+
+  If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided
+above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms,
+reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates
+an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the
+Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a
+copy of the Program in return for a fee.
+
+                     END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+            How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+  If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
+free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
+
+  To do so, attach the following notices to the program.  It is safest
+to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
+the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+    <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
+    Copyright (C) <year>  <name of author>
+
+    This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
+    it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+    the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or
+    (at your option) any later version.
+
+    This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+    but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+    GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+    You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+    along with this program.  If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+  If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short
+notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
+
+    <program>  Copyright (C) <year>  <name of author>
+    This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
+    This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
+    under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
+
+The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate
+parts of the General Public License.  Of course, your program's commands
+might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an "about box".
+
+  You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school,
+if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary.
+For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see
+<http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
+
+  The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program
+into proprietary programs.  If your program is a subroutine library, you
+may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with
+the library.  If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General
+Public License instead of this License.  But first, please read
+<http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html>.
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/hid_bootloader_cli.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/hid_bootloader_cli.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..058ccc63d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/hid_bootloader_cli.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1010 @@
+/* Modified for the LUFA HID Bootloader by Dean Camera
+ *           http://www.lufa-lib.org
+ *
+ *   THIS MODIFIED VERSION IS UNSUPPORTED BY PJRC.
+ */
+
+/* Teensy Loader, Command Line Interface
+ * Program and Reboot Teensy Board with HalfKay Bootloader
+ * http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/loader_cli.html
+ * Copyright 2008-2010, PJRC.COM, LLC
+ *
+ *
+ * You may redistribute this program and/or modify it under the terms
+ * of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
+ * Foundation, version 3 of the License.
+ *
+ * This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+ * GNU General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+ * along with this program.  If not, see http://www.gnu.org/licenses/
+ */
+
+/* Want to incorporate this code into a proprietary application??
+ * Just email paul@pjrc.com to ask.  Usually it's not a problem,
+ * but you do need to ask to use this code in any way other than
+ * those permitted by the GNU General Public License, version 3  */
+
+/* For non-root permissions on ubuntu or similar udev-based linux
+ * http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/49-teensy.rules
+ */
+
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include <stdarg.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+
+void usage(void)
+{
+	fprintf(stderr, "Usage: hid_bootloader_cli -mmcu=<MCU> [-w] [-h] [-n] [-v] <file.hex>\n");
+	fprintf(stderr, "\t-w : Wait for device to appear\n");
+	fprintf(stderr, "\t-r : Use hard reboot if device not online\n");
+	fprintf(stderr, "\t-n : No reboot after programming\n");
+	fprintf(stderr, "\t-v : Verbose output\n");
+	fprintf(stderr, "\n<MCU> = atmegaXXuY or at90usbXXXY");
+
+	fprintf(stderr, "\nFor support and more information, please visit:\n");
+	fprintf(stderr, "http://www.lufa-lib.org\n");
+
+	fprintf(stderr, "\nBased on the TeensyHID command line programmer software:\n");
+	fprintf(stderr, "http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/loader_cli.html\n");
+	exit(1);
+}
+
+// USB Access Functions
+int teensy_open(void);
+int teensy_write(void *buf, int len, double timeout);
+void teensy_close(void);
+int hard_reboot(void);
+
+// Intel Hex File Functions
+int read_intel_hex(const char *filename);
+int ihex_bytes_within_range(int begin, int end);
+void ihex_get_data(int addr, int len, unsigned char *bytes);
+
+// Misc stuff
+int printf_verbose(const char *format, ...);
+void delay(double seconds);
+void die(const char *str, ...);
+void parse_options(int argc, char **argv);
+
+// options (from user via command line args)
+int wait_for_device_to_appear = 0;
+int hard_reboot_device = 0;
+int reboot_after_programming = 1;
+int verbose = 0;
+int code_size = 0, block_size = 0;
+const char *filename=NULL;
+
+
+/****************************************************************/
+/*                                                              */
+/*                       Main Program                           */
+/*                                                              */
+/****************************************************************/
+
+int main(int argc, char **argv)
+{
+	unsigned char buf[260];
+	int num, addr, r, first_block=1, waited=0;
+
+	// parse command line arguments
+	parse_options(argc, argv);
+	if (!filename) {
+		fprintf(stderr, "Filename must be specified\n\n");
+		usage();
+	}
+	if (!code_size) {
+		fprintf(stderr, "MCU type must be specified\n\n");
+		usage();
+	}
+	printf_verbose("Teensy Loader, Command Line, Version 2.0\n");
+
+	// read the intel hex file
+	// this is done first so any error is reported before using USB
+	num = read_intel_hex(filename);
+	if (num < 0) die("error reading intel hex file \"%s\"", filename);
+	printf_verbose("Read \"%s\": %d bytes, %.1f%% usage\n",
+		filename, num, (double)num / (double)code_size * 100.0);
+
+	// open the USB device
+	while (1) {
+		if (teensy_open()) break;
+		if (hard_reboot_device) {
+			if (!hard_reboot()) die("Unable to find rebootor\n");
+			printf_verbose("Hard Reboot performed\n");
+			hard_reboot_device = 0; // only hard reboot once
+			wait_for_device_to_appear = 1;
+		}
+		if (!wait_for_device_to_appear) die("Unable to open device\n");
+		if (!waited) {
+			printf_verbose("Waiting for Teensy device...\n");
+			printf_verbose(" (hint: press the reset button)\n");
+			waited = 1;
+		}
+		delay(0.25);
+	}
+	printf_verbose("Found HalfKay Bootloader\n");
+
+	// if we waited for the device, read the hex file again
+	// perhaps it changed while we were waiting?
+	if (waited) {
+		num = read_intel_hex(filename);
+		if (num < 0) die("error reading intel hex file \"%s\"", filename);
+		printf_verbose("Read \"%s\": %d bytes, %.1f%% usage\n",
+		 	filename, num, (double)num / (double)code_size * 100.0);
+	}
+
+	// program the data
+	printf_verbose("Programming");
+	fflush(stdout);
+	for (addr = 0; addr < code_size; addr += block_size) {
+		if (addr > 0 && !ihex_bytes_within_range(addr, addr + block_size - 1)) {
+			// don't waste time on blocks that are unused,
+			// but always do the first one to erase the chip
+			continue;
+		}
+		printf_verbose(".");
+		if (code_size < 0x10000) {
+			buf[0] = addr & 255;
+			buf[1] = (addr >> 8) & 255;
+		} else {
+			buf[0] = (addr >> 8) & 255;
+			buf[1] = (addr >> 16) & 255;
+		}
+		ihex_get_data(addr, block_size, buf + 2);
+		r = teensy_write(buf, block_size + 2, first_block ? 3.0 : 0.25);
+		if (!r) die("error writing to Teensy\n");
+		first_block = 0;
+	}
+	printf_verbose("\n");
+
+	// reboot to the user's new code
+	if (reboot_after_programming) {
+		printf_verbose("Booting\n");
+		buf[0] = 0xFF;
+		buf[1] = 0xFF;
+		memset(buf + 2, 0, sizeof(buf) - 2);
+		teensy_write(buf, block_size + 2, 0.25);
+	}
+	teensy_close();
+	return 0;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/****************************************************************/
+/*                                                              */
+/*             USB Access - libusb (Linux & FreeBSD)            */
+/*                                                              */
+/****************************************************************/
+
+#if defined(USE_LIBUSB)
+
+// http://libusb.sourceforge.net/doc/index.html
+#include <usb.h>
+
+usb_dev_handle * open_usb_device(int vid, int pid)
+{
+	struct usb_bus *bus;
+	struct usb_device *dev;
+	usb_dev_handle *h;
+	#ifdef LIBUSB_HAS_GET_DRIVER_NP
+	char buf[128];
+	#endif
+	int r;
+
+	usb_init();
+	usb_find_busses();
+	usb_find_devices();
+	//printf_verbose("\nSearching for USB device:\n");
+	for (bus = usb_get_busses(); bus; bus = bus->next) {
+		for (dev = bus->devices; dev; dev = dev->next) {
+			//printf_verbose("bus \"%s\", device \"%s\" vid=%04X, pid=%04X\n",
+			//	bus->dirname, dev->filename,
+			//	dev->descriptor.idVendor,
+			//	dev->descriptor.idProduct
+			//);
+			if (dev->descriptor.idVendor != vid) continue;
+			if (dev->descriptor.idProduct != pid) continue;
+			h = usb_open(dev);
+			if (!h) {
+				printf_verbose("Found device but unable to open");
+				continue;
+			}
+			#ifdef LIBUSB_HAS_GET_DRIVER_NP
+			r = usb_get_driver_np(h, 0, buf, sizeof(buf));
+			if (r >= 0) {
+				r = usb_detach_kernel_driver_np(h, 0);
+				if (r < 0) {
+					usb_close(h);
+					printf_verbose("Device is in use by \"%s\" driver", buf);
+					continue;
+				}
+			}
+			#endif
+			// Mac OS-X - removing this call to usb_claim_interface() might allow
+			// this to work, even though it is a clear misuse of the libusb API.
+			// normally Apple's IOKit should be used on Mac OS-X
+			r = usb_claim_interface(h, 0);
+			if (r < 0) {
+				usb_close(h);
+				printf_verbose("Unable to claim interface, check USB permissions");
+				continue;
+			}
+			return h;
+		}
+	}
+	return NULL;
+}
+
+static usb_dev_handle *libusb_teensy_handle = NULL;
+
+int teensy_open(void)
+{
+	teensy_close();
+	libusb_teensy_handle = open_usb_device(0x16C0, 0x0478);
+
+	if (!libusb_teensy_handle)
+		libusb_teensy_handle = open_usb_device(0x03eb, 0x2067);
+
+	if (!libusb_teensy_handle) return 0;
+	return 1;
+}
+
+int teensy_write(void *buf, int len, double timeout)
+{
+	int r;
+
+	if (!libusb_teensy_handle) return 0;
+	r = usb_control_msg(libusb_teensy_handle, 0x21, 9, 0x0200, 0, (char *)buf,
+		len, (int)(timeout * 1000.0));
+	if (r < 0) return 0;
+	return 1;
+}
+
+void teensy_close(void)
+{
+	if (!libusb_teensy_handle) return;
+	usb_release_interface(libusb_teensy_handle, 0);
+	usb_close(libusb_teensy_handle);
+	libusb_teensy_handle = NULL;
+}
+
+int hard_reboot(void)
+{
+	usb_dev_handle *rebootor;
+	int r;
+
+	rebootor = open_usb_device(0x16C0, 0x0477);
+
+	if (!rebootor)
+		rebootor = open_usb_device(0x03eb, 0x2067);
+
+	if (!rebootor) return 0;
+	r = usb_control_msg(rebootor, 0x21, 9, 0x0200, 0, "reboot", 6, 100);
+	usb_release_interface(rebootor, 0);
+	usb_close(rebootor);
+	if (r < 0) return 0;
+	return 1;
+}
+
+#endif
+
+
+/****************************************************************/
+/*                                                              */
+/*               USB Access - Microsoft WIN32                   */
+/*                                                              */
+/****************************************************************/
+
+#if defined(USE_WIN32)
+
+// http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms790932.aspx
+#include <windows.h>
+#include <setupapi.h>
+#include <ddk/hidsdi.h>
+#include <ddk/hidclass.h>
+
+HANDLE open_usb_device(int vid, int pid)
+{
+	GUID guid;
+	HDEVINFO info;
+	DWORD index, required_size;
+	SP_DEVICE_INTERFACE_DATA iface;
+	SP_DEVICE_INTERFACE_DETAIL_DATA *details;
+	HIDD_ATTRIBUTES attrib;
+	HANDLE h;
+	BOOL ret;
+
+	HidD_GetHidGuid(&guid);
+	info = SetupDiGetClassDevs(&guid, NULL, NULL, DIGCF_PRESENT | DIGCF_DEVICEINTERFACE);
+	if (info == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) return NULL;
+	for (index=0; 1 ;index++) {
+		iface.cbSize = sizeof(SP_DEVICE_INTERFACE_DATA);
+		ret = SetupDiEnumDeviceInterfaces(info, NULL, &guid, index, &iface);
+		if (!ret) {
+			SetupDiDestroyDeviceInfoList(info);
+			break;
+		}
+		SetupDiGetInterfaceDeviceDetail(info, &iface, NULL, 0, &required_size, NULL);
+		details = (SP_DEVICE_INTERFACE_DETAIL_DATA *)malloc(required_size);
+		if (details == NULL) continue;
+		memset(details, 0, required_size);
+		details->cbSize = sizeof(SP_DEVICE_INTERFACE_DETAIL_DATA);
+		ret = SetupDiGetDeviceInterfaceDetail(info, &iface, details,
+			required_size, NULL, NULL);
+		if (!ret) {
+			free(details);
+			continue;
+		}
+		h = CreateFile(details->DevicePath, GENERIC_READ|GENERIC_WRITE,
+			FILE_SHARE_READ|FILE_SHARE_WRITE, NULL, OPEN_EXISTING,
+			FILE_FLAG_OVERLAPPED, NULL);
+		free(details);
+		if (h == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) continue;
+		attrib.Size = sizeof(HIDD_ATTRIBUTES);
+		ret = HidD_GetAttributes(h, &attrib);
+		if (!ret) {
+			CloseHandle(h);
+			continue;
+		}
+		if (attrib.VendorID != vid || attrib.ProductID != pid) {
+			CloseHandle(h);
+			continue;
+		}
+		SetupDiDestroyDeviceInfoList(info);
+		return h;
+	}
+	return NULL;
+}
+
+int write_usb_device(HANDLE h, void *buf, int len, int timeout)
+{
+	static HANDLE event = NULL;
+	unsigned char tmpbuf[1040];
+	OVERLAPPED ov;
+	DWORD n, r;
+
+	if (len > sizeof(tmpbuf) - 1) return 0;
+	if (event == NULL) {
+		event = CreateEvent(NULL, TRUE, TRUE, NULL);
+		if (!event) return 0;
+	}
+	ResetEvent(&event);
+	memset(&ov, 0, sizeof(ov));
+	ov.hEvent = event;
+	tmpbuf[0] = 0;
+	memcpy(tmpbuf + 1, buf, len);
+	if (!WriteFile(h, tmpbuf, len + 1, NULL, &ov)) {
+		if (GetLastError() != ERROR_IO_PENDING) return 0;
+		r = WaitForSingleObject(event, timeout);
+		if (r == WAIT_TIMEOUT) {
+			CancelIo(h);
+			return 0;
+		}
+		if (r != WAIT_OBJECT_0) return 0;
+	}
+	if (!GetOverlappedResult(h, &ov, &n, FALSE)) return 0;
+	return 1;
+}
+
+static HANDLE win32_teensy_handle = NULL;
+
+int teensy_open(void)
+{
+	teensy_close();
+	win32_teensy_handle = open_usb_device(0x16C0, 0x0478);
+
+	if (!win32_teensy_handle)
+		win32_teensy_handle = open_usb_device(0x03eb, 0x2067);
+
+	if (!win32_teensy_handle) return 0;
+	return 1;
+}
+
+int teensy_write(void *buf, int len, double timeout)
+{
+	int r;
+	if (!win32_teensy_handle) return 0;
+	r = write_usb_device(win32_teensy_handle, buf, len, (int)(timeout * 1000.0));
+	return r;
+}
+
+void teensy_close(void)
+{
+	if (!win32_teensy_handle) return;
+	CloseHandle(win32_teensy_handle);
+	win32_teensy_handle = NULL;
+}
+
+int hard_reboot(void)
+{
+	HANDLE rebootor;
+	int r;
+
+	rebootor = open_usb_device(0x16C0, 0x0477);
+
+	if (!rebootor)
+		rebootor = open_usb_device(0x03eb, 0x2067);
+
+	if (!rebootor) return 0;
+	r = write_usb_device(rebootor, "reboot", 6, 100);
+	CloseHandle(rebootor);
+	return r;
+}
+
+#endif
+
+
+
+/****************************************************************/
+/*                                                              */
+/*             USB Access - Apple's IOKit, Mac OS-X             */
+/*                                                              */
+/****************************************************************/
+
+#if defined(USE_APPLE_IOKIT)
+
+// http://developer.apple.com/technotes/tn2007/tn2187.html
+#include <IOKit/IOKitLib.h>
+#include <IOKit/hid/IOHIDLib.h>
+#include <IOKit/hid/IOHIDDevice.h>
+
+struct usb_list_struct {
+	IOHIDDeviceRef ref;
+	int pid;
+	int vid;
+	struct usb_list_struct *next;
+};
+
+static struct usb_list_struct *usb_list=NULL;
+static IOHIDManagerRef hid_manager=NULL;
+
+void attach_callback(void *context, IOReturn r, void *hid_mgr, IOHIDDeviceRef dev)
+{
+	CFTypeRef type;
+	struct usb_list_struct *n, *p;
+	int32_t pid, vid;
+
+	if (!dev) return;
+	type = IOHIDDeviceGetProperty(dev, CFSTR(kIOHIDVendorIDKey));
+	if (!type || CFGetTypeID(type) != CFNumberGetTypeID()) return;
+	if (!CFNumberGetValue((CFNumberRef)type, kCFNumberSInt32Type, &vid)) return;
+	type = IOHIDDeviceGetProperty(dev, CFSTR(kIOHIDProductIDKey));
+	if (!type || CFGetTypeID(type) != CFNumberGetTypeID()) return;
+	if (!CFNumberGetValue((CFNumberRef)type, kCFNumberSInt32Type, &pid)) return;
+	n = (struct usb_list_struct *)malloc(sizeof(struct usb_list_struct));
+	if (!n) return;
+	//printf("attach callback: vid=%04X, pid=%04X\n", vid, pid);
+	n->ref = dev;
+	n->vid = vid;
+	n->pid = pid;
+	n->next = NULL;
+	if (usb_list == NULL) {
+		usb_list = n;
+	} else {
+		for (p = usb_list; p->next; p = p->next) ;
+		p->next = n;
+	}
+}
+
+void detach_callback(void *context, IOReturn r, void *hid_mgr, IOHIDDeviceRef dev)
+{
+	struct usb_list_struct *p, *tmp, *prev=NULL;
+
+	p = usb_list;
+	while (p) {
+		if (p->ref == dev) {
+			if (prev) {
+				prev->next = p->next;
+			} else {
+				usb_list = p->next;
+			}
+			tmp = p;
+			p = p->next;
+			free(tmp);
+		} else {
+			prev = p;
+			p = p->next;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+void init_hid_manager(void)
+{
+	CFMutableDictionaryRef dict;
+	IOReturn ret;
+
+	if (hid_manager) return;
+	hid_manager = IOHIDManagerCreate(kCFAllocatorDefault, kIOHIDOptionsTypeNone);
+	if (hid_manager == NULL || CFGetTypeID(hid_manager) != IOHIDManagerGetTypeID()) {
+		if (hid_manager) CFRelease(hid_manager);
+		printf_verbose("no HID Manager - maybe this is a pre-Leopard (10.5) system?\n");
+		return;
+	}
+	dict = CFDictionaryCreateMutable(kCFAllocatorDefault, 0,
+		&kCFTypeDictionaryKeyCallBacks, &kCFTypeDictionaryValueCallBacks);
+	if (!dict) return;
+	IOHIDManagerSetDeviceMatching(hid_manager, dict);
+	CFRelease(dict);
+	IOHIDManagerScheduleWithRunLoop(hid_manager, CFRunLoopGetCurrent(), kCFRunLoopDefaultMode);
+	IOHIDManagerRegisterDeviceMatchingCallback(hid_manager, attach_callback, NULL);
+	IOHIDManagerRegisterDeviceRemovalCallback(hid_manager, detach_callback, NULL);
+	ret = IOHIDManagerOpen(hid_manager, kIOHIDOptionsTypeNone);
+	if (ret != kIOReturnSuccess) {
+		IOHIDManagerUnscheduleFromRunLoop(hid_manager,
+			CFRunLoopGetCurrent(), kCFRunLoopDefaultMode);
+		CFRelease(hid_manager);
+		printf_verbose("Error opening HID Manager");
+	}
+}
+
+static void do_run_loop(void)
+{
+	while (CFRunLoopRunInMode(kCFRunLoopDefaultMode, 0, true) == kCFRunLoopRunHandledSource) ;
+}
+
+IOHIDDeviceRef open_usb_device(int vid, int pid)
+{
+	struct usb_list_struct *p;
+	IOReturn ret;
+
+	init_hid_manager();
+	do_run_loop();
+	for (p = usb_list; p; p = p->next) {
+		if (p->vid == vid && p->pid == pid) {
+			ret = IOHIDDeviceOpen(p->ref, kIOHIDOptionsTypeNone);
+			if (ret == kIOReturnSuccess) return p->ref;
+		}
+	}
+	return NULL;
+}
+
+void close_usb_device(IOHIDDeviceRef dev)
+{
+	struct usb_list_struct *p;
+
+	do_run_loop();
+	for (p = usb_list; p; p = p->next) {
+		if (p->ref == dev) {
+			IOHIDDeviceClose(dev, kIOHIDOptionsTypeNone);
+			return;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+static IOHIDDeviceRef iokit_teensy_reference = NULL;
+
+int teensy_open(void)
+{
+	teensy_close();
+	iokit_teensy_reference = open_usb_device(0x16C0, 0x0478);
+
+	if (!iokit_teensy_reference)
+		iokit_teensy_reference = open_usb_device(0x03eb, 0x2067);
+
+	if (!iokit_teensy_reference) return 0;
+	return 1;
+}
+
+int teensy_write(void *buf, int len, double timeout)
+{
+	IOReturn ret;
+
+	// timeouts do not work on OS-X
+	// IOHIDDeviceSetReportWithCallback is not implemented
+	// even though Apple documents it with a code example!
+	// submitted to Apple on 22-sep-2009, problem ID 7245050
+	if (!iokit_teensy_reference) return 0;
+	ret = IOHIDDeviceSetReport(iokit_teensy_reference,
+		kIOHIDReportTypeOutput, 0, buf, len);
+	if (ret == kIOReturnSuccess) return 1;
+	return 0;
+}
+
+void teensy_close(void)
+{
+	if (!iokit_teensy_reference) return;
+	close_usb_device(iokit_teensy_reference);
+	iokit_teensy_reference = NULL;
+}
+
+int hard_reboot(void)
+{
+	IOHIDDeviceRef rebootor;
+	IOReturn ret;
+
+	rebootor = open_usb_device(0x16C0, 0x0477);
+
+	if (!rebootor)
+		rebootor = open_usb_device(0x03eb, 0x2067);
+
+	if (!rebootor) return 0;
+	ret = IOHIDDeviceSetReport(rebootor,
+		kIOHIDReportTypeOutput, 0, (uint8_t *)("reboot"), 6);
+	close_usb_device(rebootor);
+	if (ret == kIOReturnSuccess) return 1;
+	return 0;
+}
+
+#endif
+
+
+
+/****************************************************************/
+/*                                                              */
+/*              USB Access - BSD's UHID driver                  */
+/*                                                              */
+/****************************************************************/
+
+#if defined(USE_UHID)
+
+// Thanks to Todd T Fries for help getting this working on OpenBSD
+// and to Chris Kuethe for the initial patch to use UHID.
+
+#include <sys/ioctl.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+#include <dirent.h>
+#include <dev/usb/usb.h>
+#ifndef USB_GET_DEVICEINFO
+#include <dev/usb/usb_ioctl.h>
+#endif
+
+#ifndef USB_GET_DEVICEINFO
+# define USB_GET_DEVICEINFO 0
+# error The USB_GET_DEVICEINFO ioctl() value is not defined for your system.
+#endif
+
+int open_usb_device(int vid, int pid)
+{
+	int r, fd;
+	DIR *dir;
+	struct dirent *d;
+	struct usb_device_info info;
+	char buf[256];
+
+	dir = opendir("/dev");
+	if (!dir) return -1;
+	while ((d = readdir(dir)) != NULL) {
+		if (strncmp(d->d_name, "uhid", 4) != 0) continue;
+		snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf), "/dev/%s", d->d_name);
+		fd = open(buf, O_RDWR);
+		if (fd < 0) continue;
+		r = ioctl(fd, USB_GET_DEVICEINFO, &info);
+		if (r < 0) {
+			// NetBSD: added in 2004
+			// OpenBSD: added November 23, 2009
+			// FreeBSD: missing (FreeBSD 8.0) - USE_LIBUSB works!
+			die("Error: your uhid driver does not support"
+			  " USB_GET_DEVICEINFO, please upgrade!\n");
+			close(fd);
+			closedir(dir);
+			exit(1);
+		}
+		//printf("%s: v=%d, p=%d\n", buf, info.udi_vendorNo, info.udi_productNo);
+		if (info.udi_vendorNo == vid && info.udi_productNo == pid) {
+			closedir(dir);
+			return fd;
+		}
+		close(fd);
+	}
+	closedir(dir);
+	return -1;
+}
+
+static int uhid_teensy_fd = -1;
+
+int teensy_open(void)
+{
+	teensy_close();
+	uhid_teensy_fd = open_usb_device(0x16C0, 0x0478);
+
+	if (uhid_teensy_fd < 0)
+		uhid_teensy_fd = open_usb_device(0x03eb, 0x2067);
+
+	if (uhid_teensy_fd < 0) return 0;
+	return 1;
+}
+
+int teensy_write(void *buf, int len, double timeout)
+{
+	int r;
+
+	// TODO: implement timeout... how??
+	r = write(uhid_teensy_fd, buf, len);
+	if (r == len) return 1;
+	return 0;
+}
+
+void teensy_close(void)
+{
+	if (uhid_teensy_fd >= 0) {
+		close(uhid_teensy_fd);
+		uhid_teensy_fd = -1;
+	}
+}
+
+int hard_reboot(void)
+{
+	int r, rebootor_fd;
+
+	rebootor_fd = open_usb_device(0x16C0, 0x0477);
+
+	if (rebootor_fd < 0)
+		rebootor_fd = open_usb_device(0x03eb, 0x2067);
+
+	if (rebootor_fd < 0) return 0;
+	r = write(rebootor_fd, "reboot", 6);
+	delay(0.1);
+	close(rebootor_fd);
+	if (r == 6) return 1;
+	return 0;
+}
+
+#endif
+
+
+
+/****************************************************************/
+/*                                                              */
+/*                     Read Intel Hex File                      */
+/*                                                              */
+/****************************************************************/
+
+// the maximum flash image size we can support
+// chips with larger memory may be used, but only this
+// much intel-hex data can be loaded into memory!
+#define MAX_MEMORY_SIZE 0x10000
+
+static unsigned char firmware_image[MAX_MEMORY_SIZE];
+static unsigned char firmware_mask[MAX_MEMORY_SIZE];
+static int end_record_seen=0;
+static int byte_count;
+static unsigned int extended_addr = 0;
+static int parse_hex_line(char *line);
+
+int read_intel_hex(const char *filename)
+{
+	FILE *fp;
+	int i, lineno=0;
+	char buf[1024];
+
+	byte_count = 0;
+	end_record_seen = 0;
+	for (i=0; i<MAX_MEMORY_SIZE; i++) {
+		firmware_image[i] = 0xFF;
+		firmware_mask[i] = 0;
+	}
+	extended_addr = 0;
+
+	fp = fopen(filename, "r");
+	if (fp == NULL) {
+		//printf("Unable to read file %s\n", filename);
+		return -1;
+	}
+	while (!feof(fp)) {
+		*buf = '\0';
+		if (!fgets(buf, sizeof(buf), fp)) break;
+		lineno++;
+		if (*buf) {
+			if (parse_hex_line(buf) == 0) {
+				//printf("Warning, parse error line %d\n", lineno);
+				fclose(fp);
+				return -2;
+			}
+		}
+		if (end_record_seen) break;
+		if (feof(stdin)) break;
+	}
+	fclose(fp);
+	return byte_count;
+}
+
+
+/* from ihex.c, at http://www.pjrc.com/tech/8051/pm2_docs/intel-hex.html */
+
+/* parses a line of intel hex code, stores the data in bytes[] */
+/* and the beginning address in addr, and returns a 1 if the */
+/* line was valid, or a 0 if an error occurred.  The variable */
+/* num gets the number of bytes that were stored into bytes[] */
+
+
+int
+parse_hex_line(char *line)
+{
+	int addr, code, num;
+        int sum, len, cksum, i;
+        char *ptr;
+
+        num = 0;
+        if (line[0] != ':') return 0;
+        if (strlen(line) < 11) return 0;
+        ptr = line+1;
+        if (!sscanf(ptr, "%02x", &len)) return 0;
+        ptr += 2;
+        if ((int)strlen(line) < (11 + (len * 2)) ) return 0;
+        if (!sscanf(ptr, "%04x", &addr)) return 0;
+        ptr += 4;
+          /* printf("Line: length=%d Addr=%d\n", len, addr); */
+        if (!sscanf(ptr, "%02x", &code)) return 0;
+	if (addr + extended_addr + len >= MAX_MEMORY_SIZE) return 0;
+        ptr += 2;
+        sum = (len & 255) + ((addr >> 8) & 255) + (addr & 255) + (code & 255);
+	if (code != 0) {
+		if (code == 1) {
+			end_record_seen = 1;
+			return 1;
+		}
+		if (code == 2 && len == 2) {
+			if (!sscanf(ptr, "%04x", &i)) return 1;
+			ptr += 4;
+			sum += ((i >> 8) & 255) + (i & 255);
+        		if (!sscanf(ptr, "%02x", &cksum)) return 1;
+			if (((sum & 255) + (cksum & 255)) & 255) return 1;
+			extended_addr = i << 4;
+			//printf("ext addr = %05X\n", extended_addr);
+		}
+		if (code == 4 && len == 2) {
+			if (!sscanf(ptr, "%04x", &i)) return 1;
+			ptr += 4;
+			sum += ((i >> 8) & 255) + (i & 255);
+        		if (!sscanf(ptr, "%02x", &cksum)) return 1;
+			if (((sum & 255) + (cksum & 255)) & 255) return 1;
+			extended_addr = i << 16;
+			//printf("ext addr = %08X\n", extended_addr);
+		}
+		return 1;	// non-data line
+	}
+	byte_count += len;
+        while (num != len) {
+                if (sscanf(ptr, "%02x", &i) != 1) return 0;
+		i &= 255;
+		firmware_image[addr + extended_addr + num] = i;
+		firmware_mask[addr + extended_addr + num] = 1;
+                ptr += 2;
+                sum += i;
+                (num)++;
+                if (num >= 256) return 0;
+        }
+        if (!sscanf(ptr, "%02x", &cksum)) return 0;
+        if (((sum & 255) + (cksum & 255)) & 255) return 0; /* checksum error */
+        return 1;
+}
+
+int ihex_bytes_within_range(int begin, int end)
+{
+	int i;
+
+	if (begin < 0 || begin >= MAX_MEMORY_SIZE ||
+	   end < 0 || end >= MAX_MEMORY_SIZE) {
+		return 0;
+	}
+	for (i=begin; i<=end; i++) {
+		if (firmware_mask[i]) return 1;
+	}
+	return 0;
+}
+
+void ihex_get_data(int addr, int len, unsigned char *bytes)
+{
+	int i;
+
+	if (addr < 0 || len < 0 || addr + len >= MAX_MEMORY_SIZE) {
+		for (i=0; i<len; i++) {
+			bytes[i] = 255;
+		}
+		return;
+	}
+	for (i=0; i<len; i++) {
+		if (firmware_mask[addr]) {
+			bytes[i] = firmware_image[addr];
+		} else {
+			bytes[i] = 255;
+		}
+		addr++;
+	}
+}
+
+/****************************************************************/
+/*                                                              */
+/*                       Misc Functions                         */
+/*                                                              */
+/****************************************************************/
+
+int printf_verbose(const char *format, ...)
+{
+	va_list ap;
+	int r;
+
+	va_start(ap, format);
+	if (verbose) {
+		r = vprintf(format, ap);
+		fflush(stdout);
+		return r;
+	}
+	return 0;
+}
+
+void delay(double seconds)
+{
+	#ifdef WIN32
+	Sleep(seconds * 1000.0);
+	#else
+	usleep(seconds * 1000000.0);
+	#endif
+}
+
+void die(const char *str, ...)
+{
+	va_list  ap;
+
+	va_start(ap, str);
+	vfprintf(stderr, str, ap);
+	fprintf(stderr, "\n");
+	exit(1);
+}
+
+#if defined(WIN32)
+#define strcasecmp stricmp
+#endif
+
+void parse_options(int argc, char **argv)
+{
+	int i;
+	const char *arg;
+
+	for (i=1; i<argc; i++) {
+		arg = argv[i];
+
+		if (*arg == '-') {
+			if (strcmp(arg, "-w") == 0) {
+				wait_for_device_to_appear = 1;
+			} else if (strcmp(arg, "-r") == 0) {
+				hard_reboot_device = 1;
+			} else if (strcmp(arg, "-n") == 0) {
+				reboot_after_programming = 0;
+			} else if (strcmp(arg, "-v") == 0) {
+				verbose = 1;
+			} else if (strncmp(arg, "-mmcu=", 6) == 0) {
+				arg += 6;
+
+				if (strncmp(arg, "at90usb", 7) == 0) {
+					arg += 7;
+				} else if (strncmp(arg, "atmega", 6) == 0) {
+					arg += 6;
+				} else {
+					die("Unknown MCU type\n");
+				}
+
+				if (strncmp(arg, "128", 3) == 0) {
+					code_size  = 128 * 1024;
+					block_size = 256;
+				} else if (strncmp(arg, "64", 2) == 0) {
+					code_size  = 64 * 1024;
+					block_size = 256;
+				} else if (strncmp(arg, "32", 2) == 0) {
+					code_size  = 32 * 1024;
+					block_size = 128;
+				} else if (strncmp(arg, "16", 2) == 0) {
+					code_size  = 16 * 1024;
+					block_size = 128;
+				} else if (strncmp(arg, "8", 1) == 0) {
+					code_size  = 8 * 1024;
+					block_size = 128;
+				} else {
+					die("Unknown MCU type\n");
+				}
+			}
+		} else {
+			filename = argv[i];
+		}
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp_Python/hid_bootloader_loader.py b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp_Python/hid_bootloader_loader.py
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2598fde60
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp_Python/hid_bootloader_loader.py
@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
+"""
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+"""
+
+"""
+    Front-end programmer for the LUFA HID class bootloader.
+
+    Usage:
+        python hid_bootloader_loader.py <Device> <Input>.hex
+
+    Example:
+        python hid_bootloader_loader.py at90usb1287 Mouse.hex
+
+    Requires the pywinusb (https://pypi.python.org/pypi/pywinusb/) and
+    IntelHex (http://bialix.com/intelhex/) libraries.
+"""
+
+import sys
+from pywinusb import hid
+from intelhex import IntelHex
+
+
+# Device information table
+device_info_map = dict()
+device_info_map['at90usb1287'] = {'page_size': 256, 'flash_kb': 128}
+device_info_map['at90usb1286'] = {'page_size': 256, 'flash_kb': 128}
+device_info_map['at90usb647']  = {'page_size': 256, 'flash_kb': 64}
+device_info_map['at90usb646']  = {'page_size': 256, 'flash_kb': 64}
+device_info_map['atmega32u4']  = {'page_size': 128, 'flash_kb': 32}
+device_info_map['atmega32u2']  = {'page_size': 128, 'flash_kb': 32}
+device_info_map['atmega16u4']  = {'page_size': 128, 'flash_kb': 16}
+device_info_map['atmega16u2']  = {'page_size': 128, 'flash_kb': 16}
+device_info_map['at90usb162']  = {'page_size': 128, 'flash_kb': 16}
+device_info_map['atmega8u2']   = {'page_size': 128, 'flash_kb': 8}
+device_info_map['at90usb82']   = {'page_size': 128, 'flash_kb': 8}
+
+
+def get_hid_device_handle():
+    hid_device_filter = hid.HidDeviceFilter(vendor_id=0x03EB,
+                                            product_id=0x2067)
+
+    valid_hid_devices = hid_device_filter.get_devices()
+
+    if len(valid_hid_devices) is 0:
+        return None
+    else:
+        return valid_hid_devices[0]
+
+
+def send_page_data(hid_device, address, data):
+    # Bootloader page data should be the HID Report ID (always zero) followed
+    # by the starting address to program, then one device's flash page worth
+    # of data
+    output_report_data = [0]
+    output_report_data.extend([address & 0xFF, address >> 8])
+    output_report_data.extend(data)
+
+    hid_device.send_output_report(output_report_data)
+
+
+def program_device(hex_data, device_info):
+    hid_device = get_hid_device_handle()
+
+    if hid_device is None:
+        print("No valid HID device found.")
+        sys.exit(1)
+
+    try:
+        hid_device.open()
+        print("Connected to bootloader.")
+
+        # Program in all data from the loaded HEX file, in a number of device
+        # page sized chunks
+        for addr in range(0, hex_data.maxaddr(), device_info['page_size']):
+            # Compute the address range of the current page in the device
+            current_page_range = range(addr, addr+device_info['page_size'])
+
+            # Extract the data from the hex file at the specified start page
+            # address and convert it to a regular list of bytes
+            page_data = [hex_data[i] for i in current_page_range]
+
+            print("Writing address 0x%04X-0x%04X" % (current_page_range[0], current_page_range[-1]))
+
+            # Devices with more than 64KB of flash should shift down the page
+            # address so that it is 16-bit (page size is guaranteed to be
+            # >= 256 bytes so no non-zero address bits are discarded)
+            if device_info['flash_kb'] < 64:
+                send_page_data(hid_device, addr, page_data)
+            else:
+                send_page_data(hid_device, addr >> 8, page_data)
+
+        # Once programming is complete, start the application via a dummy page
+        # program to the page address 0xFFFF
+        print("Programming complete, starting application.")
+        send_page_data(hid_device, 0xFFFF, [0] * device_info['page_size'])
+
+    finally:
+        hid_device.close()
+
+
+if __name__ == '__main__':
+    # Load the specified HEX file
+    try:
+        hex_data = IntelHex(sys.argv[2])
+    except:
+        print("Could not open the specified HEX file.")
+        sys.exit(1)
+
+    # Retrieve the device information entry for the specified device
+    try:
+        device_info = device_info_map[sys.argv[1]]
+    except:
+        print("Unknown device name specified.")
+        sys.exit(1)
+
+    program_device(hex_data, device_info)
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9394b1353
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,123 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="HID Bootloader - 128KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.hid.avr8.128_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_hid_128kb_4kb_">

+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.hid"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x1F000"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x1F000"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="HID Bootloader - 64KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.hid.avr8.64_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_hid_64kb_4kb_">

+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.hid"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb647"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0xF000"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0xF000"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="HID Bootloader - 32KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.hid.avr8.32_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_hid_32kb_4kb_">

+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.hid"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atmega32u4"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x7000"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x7000"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="HID Bootloader - 16KB FLASH / 2KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.hid.avr8.16_2" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_hid_16kb_2kb_">

+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.hid"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atmega16u2"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x3800"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x3800"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="HID Bootloader - 8KB FLASH / 2KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.hid.avr8.8_2" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_hid_8kb_2kb_">

+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.hid"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atmega8u2"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x1800"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x1800"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.bootloaders.hid" caption="HID Bootloader">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		HID Class Bootloader, capable of reprogramming a device via a custom cross-platform command line utility when plugged into a host.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Bootloaders"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="include-path" value="."/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="BootloaderHID.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="BootloaderHID.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="BootloaderHID.txt"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="directory" value="HostLoaderApp"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="directory" value="HostLoaderApp_Python"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..281792ac9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2367 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - HID Class Bootloader"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/ \
+                         HostLoaderApp/ \
+                         HostLoaderApp_Python/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM \
+                         ATTR_NO_INIT
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6589d75aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/HID/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = BootloaderHID
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     = -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START_OFFSET)
+
+# Flash size and bootloader section sizes of the target, in KB. These must
+# match the target's total FLASH size and the bootloader size set in the
+# device's fuses.
+FLASH_SIZE_KB        := 128
+BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB := 8
+
+# Bootloader address calculation formulas
+# Do not modify these macros, but rather modify the dependent values above.
+CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX   = $(shell printf "0x%X" $$(( $(1) )) )
+BOOT_START_OFFSET     = $(call CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX, ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) - $(BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB)) * 1024 )
+BOOT_SEC_OFFSET       = $(call CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX, ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) * 1024) - ($(strip $(1))) )
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderAPI.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderAPI.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cad59c8ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderAPI.c
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Bootloader user application API functions.
+ */
+
+#include "BootloaderAPI.h"
+
+void BootloaderAPI_ErasePage(const uint32_t Address)
+{
+	boot_page_erase_safe(Address);
+	boot_spm_busy_wait();
+	boot_rww_enable();
+}
+
+void BootloaderAPI_WritePage(const uint32_t Address)
+{
+	boot_page_write_safe(Address);
+	boot_spm_busy_wait();
+	boot_rww_enable();
+}
+
+void BootloaderAPI_FillWord(const uint32_t Address, const uint16_t Word)
+{
+	boot_page_fill_safe(Address, Word);
+}
+
+uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature(const uint16_t Address)
+{
+	return boot_signature_byte_get(Address);
+}
+
+uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse(const uint16_t Address)
+{
+	return boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(Address);
+}
+
+uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadLock(void)
+{
+	return boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_LOCK_BITS);
+}
+
+void BootloaderAPI_WriteLock(const uint8_t LockBits)
+{
+	boot_lock_bits_set_safe(LockBits);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderAPI.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderAPI.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0f0cd7040
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderAPI.h
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for BootloaderAPI.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _BOOTLOADER_API_H_
+#define _BOOTLOADER_API_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/boot.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#if AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE > 0
+			#define AUX_BOOT_SECTION       __attribute__((section(".boot_aux")))
+		#else
+			#define AUX_BOOT_SECTION
+		#endif
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void    BootloaderAPI_ErasePage(const uint32_t Address);
+		void    BootloaderAPI_WritePage(const uint32_t Address);
+		void    BootloaderAPI_FillWord(const uint32_t Address, const uint16_t Word);
+		uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature(const uint16_t Address);
+		uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse(const uint16_t Address);
+		uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadLock(void);
+		void    BootloaderAPI_WriteLock(const uint8_t LockBits);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderAPITable.S b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderAPITable.S
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6844d4b01
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderAPITable.S
@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+/*

+             LUFA Library

+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.

+

+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

+           www.lufa-lib.org

+*/

+

+/*

+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

+

+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

+  software without specific, written prior permission.

+

+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this

+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

+  this software.

+*/

+

+#if AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE > 0

+#warning Using a AUX bootloader section in addition to the defined bootloader space (see documentation).

+

+; Trampoline to jump over the AUX bootloader section to the start of the bootloader,

+; on devices where an AUX bootloader section is used.

+.section .boot_aux_trampoline, "ax"

+.global Boot_AUX_Trampoline

+Boot_AUX_Trampoline:

+	jmp BOOT_START_ADDR

+#endif

+

+; Trampolines to actual API implementations if the target address is outside the

+; range of a rjmp instruction (can happen with large bootloader sections)

+.section .apitable_trampolines, "ax"

+.global BootloaderAPI_Trampolines

+BootloaderAPI_Trampolines:

+

+	BootloaderAPI_ErasePage_Trampoline:

+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ErasePage

+	BootloaderAPI_WritePage_Trampoline:

+		jmp BootloaderAPI_WritePage

+	BootloaderAPI_FillWord_Trampoline:

+		jmp BootloaderAPI_FillWord

+	BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature_Trampoline:

+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature

+	BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse_Trampoline:

+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse

+	BootloaderAPI_ReadLock_Trampoline:

+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadLock

+	BootloaderAPI_WriteLock_Trampoline:

+		jmp BootloaderAPI_WriteLock

+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED1:

+		ret

+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED2:

+		ret

+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED3:

+		ret

+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED4:

+		ret

+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED5:

+		ret

+

+

+

+; API function jump table

+.section .apitable_jumptable, "ax"

+.global BootloaderAPI_JumpTable

+BootloaderAPI_JumpTable:

+

+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ErasePage_Trampoline

+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_WritePage_Trampoline

+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_FillWord_Trampoline

+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature_Trampoline

+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse_Trampoline

+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadLock_Trampoline

+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_WriteLock_Trampoline

+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED1 ; UNUSED ENTRY 1

+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED2 ; UNUSED ENTRY 2

+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED3 ; UNUSED ENTRY 3

+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED4 ; UNUSED ENTRY 4

+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED5 ; UNUSED ENTRY 5

+

+

+

+; Bootloader table signatures and information

+.section .apitable_signatures, "ax"

+.global BootloaderAPI_Signatures

+BootloaderAPI_Signatures:

+

+	.long BOOT_START_ADDR ; Start address of the bootloader

+	.word 0xDF30 ; Signature for the MS class bootloader, V1

+	.word 0xDCFB ; Signature for a LUFA class bootloader

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderMassStorage.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderMassStorage.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cfe0cdbf8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderMassStorage.c
@@ -0,0 +1,238 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the Mass Storage class bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADER_MASSSTORAGE_C
+#include "BootloaderMassStorage.h"
+
+/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t Disk_MS_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber           = INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage,
+				.DataINEndpoint            =
+					{
+						.Address           = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR,
+						.Size              = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks             = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address           = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR,
+						.Size              = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks             = 1,
+					},
+				.TotalLUNs                 = 1,
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run
+ *  via a soft reset. When cleared, the bootloader will abort, the USB interface will shut down and the application
+ *  started via a forced watchdog reset.
+ */
+bool RunBootloader = true;
+
+/** Magic lock for forced application start. If the HWBE fuse is programmed and BOOTRST is unprogrammed, the bootloader
+ *  will start if the /HWB line of the AVR is held low and the system is reset. However, if the /HWB line is still held
+ *  low when the application attempts to start via a watchdog reset, the bootloader will re-start. If set to the value
+ *  \ref MAGIC_BOOT_KEY the special init function \ref Application_Jump_Check() will force the application to start.
+ */
+uint16_t MagicBootKey ATTR_NO_INIT;
+
+/** Indicates if the bootloader is allowed to exit immediately if \ref RunBootloader is \c false. During shutdown all
+ *  pending commands must be processed before jumping to the user-application, thus this tracks the main program loop
+ *  iterations since a SCSI command from the host was received.
+ */
+static uint8_t TicksSinceLastCommand = 0;
+
+
+/** Special startup routine to check if the bootloader was started via a watchdog reset, and if the magic application
+ *  start key has been loaded into \ref MagicBootKey. If the bootloader started via the watchdog and the key is valid,
+ *  this will force the user application to start via a software jump.
+ */
+void Application_Jump_Check(void)
+{
+	bool JumpToApplication = false;
+
+	#if (BOARD == BOARD_LEONARDO)
+		/* Enable pull-up on the IO13 pin so we can use it to select the mode */
+		PORTC |=  (1 << 7);
+		Delay_MS(10);
+
+		/* If IO13 is not jumpered to ground, start the user application instead */
+		JumpToApplication |= ((PINC & (1 << 7)) != 0);
+
+		/* Disable pull-up after the check has completed */
+		PORTC &= ~(1 << 7);
+	#elif ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+		/* Disable JTAG debugging */
+		JTAG_DISABLE();
+
+		/* Enable pull-up on the JTAG TCK pin so we can use it to select the mode */
+		PORTF |= (1 << 4);
+		Delay_MS(10);
+
+		/* If the TCK pin is not jumpered to ground, start the user application instead */
+		JumpToApplication |= ((PINF & (1 << 4)) != 0);
+
+		/* Re-enable JTAG debugging */
+		JTAG_ENABLE();
+	#endif
+
+	/* If the reset source was the bootloader and the key is correct, clear it and jump to the application */
+	if ((MCUSR & (1 << WDRF)) && (MagicBootKey == MAGIC_BOOT_KEY))
+	{
+		MagicBootKey      = 0;
+		JumpToApplication = true;
+	}
+
+	if (JumpToApplication)
+	{
+		// cppcheck-suppress constStatement
+		((void (*)(void))0x0000)();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	while (RunBootloader || TicksSinceLastCommand++ < 0xFF)
+	{
+		MS_Device_USBTask(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+
+	/* Disconnect from the host - USB interface will be reset later along with the AVR */
+	USB_Detach();
+
+	/* Unlock the forced application start mode of the bootloader if it is restarted */
+	MagicBootKey = MAGIC_BOOT_KEY;
+
+	/* Enable the watchdog and force a timeout to reset the AVR */
+	wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS);
+
+	for (;;);
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+static void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */
+	MCUCR = (1 << IVCE);
+	MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Bootloader active LED toggle timer initialization */
+	TIMSK1 = (1 << TOIE1);
+	TCCR1B = ((1 << CS11) | (1 << CS10));
+}
+
+/** ISR to periodically toggle the LEDs on the board to indicate that the bootloader is active. */
+ISR(TIMER1_OVF_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs and stops the Mass Storage management task.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	/* Setup Mass Storage Data Endpoints */
+	ConfigSuccess &= MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+
+	/* Indicate endpoint configuration success or failure */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Mass Storage class driver callback function the reception of SCSI commands from the host, which must be processed.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool CommandSuccess;
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+	CommandSuccess = SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(MSInterfaceInfo);
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	/* Signal that a command was processed, must not exit bootloader yet */
+	TicksSinceLastCommand = 0;
+
+	return CommandSuccess;
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderMassStorage.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderMassStorage.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c1bd00410
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderMassStorage.h
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for BootloaderMassStorage.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _BOOTLOADER_MASS_STORAGE_H_
+#define _BOOTLOADER_MASS_STORAGE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include "Lib/SCSI.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__OPTIMIZE_SIZE__)
+			#error This bootloader requires that it be optimized for size, not speed, to fit into the target device. Change optimization settings and try again.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
+
+		/** Magic bootloader key to unlock forced application start mode. */
+		#define MAGIC_BOOT_KEY             0xDC42
+
+	/* Global Variables: */
+		extern bool RunBootloader;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		int main(void) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+
+		void Application_Jump_Check(void) ATTR_INIT_SECTION(3);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+
+		bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADER_MASSSTORAGE_C)
+			static void SetupHardware(void) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderMassStorage.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderMassStorage.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e09484793
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderMassStorage.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,225 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Mass Storage Class USB AVR Bootloader
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4) - <i>See \ref SSec_Aux_Space</i>
+ *  \li ATMEGA32U2 - <i>See \ref SSec_Aux_Space</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Mass Storage Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Bulk-Only Transport</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n
+ *        USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n
+ *        SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n
+ *        SCSI Block Commands Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  This bootloader enumerates to the host as a Mass Storage device, capable of reading and writing a new binary
+ *  firmware image file, to load firmware onto the AVR.
+ *
+ *  Out of the box this bootloader builds for the AT90USB1287 with an 8KB bootloader section size, and will fit
+ *  into 6KB of bootloader space. If you wish to alter this size and/or change the AVR model, you will need to
+ *  edit the MCU, FLASH_SIZE_KB and BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB values in the accompanying makefile.
+ *
+ *  When the bootloader is running, the board's LED(s) will flash at regular intervals to distinguish the
+ *  bootloader from the normal user application.
+ *
+ *  \warning <b>THIS BOOTLOADER IS NOT SECURE.</b> Malicious entities can recover written data, even if the device
+ *           lockbits are set.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Running Running the Bootloader
+ *
+ *  This bootloader is designed to be started via the HWB mechanism of the USB AVRs; ground the HWB pin (see device
+ *  datasheet) then momentarily ground /RESET to start the bootloader. This assumes the HWBE fuse is set and the BOOTRST
+ *  fuse is cleared.
+ *
+ *  For board specific exceptions to the above, see below.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_XPLAIN Atmel Xplain Board
+ *  Ground the USB AVR JTAG's \c TCK pin to ground when powering on the board to start the bootloader. This assumes the
+ *  \c HWBE fuse is cleared and the \c BOOTRST fuse is set as the HWBE pin is not user accessible on this board.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_Leonardo Arduino Leonardo Board
+ *  Ground \c IO13 when powering the board to start the bootloader. This assumes the \c HWBE fuse is cleared and the
+ *  \c BOOTRST fuse is set as the HWBE pin is not user accessible on this board.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Installation Driver Installation
+ *
+ *  This bootloader uses the Mass Storage drivers inbuilt into all modern operating systems, thus no additional
+ *  drivers need to be supplied for correct operation.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_HostApp Host Controller Application
+ *
+ *  This bootloader is compatible with all operating systems that support the FAT12 file system format. To reprogram the
+ *  device, overwrite a file stored on the virtual FAT filesystem with a new binary (BIN format) image. Remember to safely
+ *  remove your device from the host using the host OS's ejection APIs, to ensure all data is correctly flushed to the
+ *  bootloader's virtual filesystem and not cached in the OS's file system driver.
+ *
+ *  The current device firmware can be read from the device by reading a file from the virtual FAT filesystem.
+ *
+ *  \warning This bootloader is currently <b>incompatible with the Apple MacOS X OS Finder GUI</b>, due to the
+ *           large amount of meta files this OS attempts to write to the disk along with the new binaries. On
+ *           this platform, firmwares must be copied to the disk via the Terminal application only to prevent
+ *           firmware corruption.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_API User Application API
+ *
+ *  Several user application functions for FLASH and other special memory area manipulations are exposed by the bootloader,
+ *  allowing the user application to call into the bootloader at runtime to read and write FLASH data.
+ *
+ *  By default, the bootloader API jump table is located 32 bytes from the end of the device's FLASH memory, and follows the
+ *  following layout:
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE          32
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START         ((FLASHEND + 1UL) - BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE)
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(Index)         (void*)((BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (Index * 2)) / 2)
+ *
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_ErasePage)(uint32_t Address)               = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(0);
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_WritePage)(uint32_t Address)               = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(1);
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_FillWord)(uint32_t Address, uint16_t Word) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(2);
+ *  uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature)(uint16_t Address)           = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(3);
+ *  uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse)(uint16_t Address)                = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(4);
+ *  uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadLock)(void)                            = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(5);
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_WriteLock)(uint8_t LockBits)               = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(6);
+ *
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE_START   (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 2))
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE         0xDCFB
+ *
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_CLASS_SIGNATURE_START   (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 4))
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_MASS_STORAGE_SIGNATURE  0xDF30
+ *
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_START           (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 8))
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_LENGTH          4
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  From the application the API support of the bootloader can be detected by reading the FLASH memory bytes located at address
+ *  \c BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE_START and comparing them to the value \c BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE. The class of bootloader
+ *  can be determined by reading the FLASH memory bytes located at address \c BOOTLOADER_CLASS_SIGNATURE_START and comparing them
+ *  to the value \c BOOTLOADER_MASS_STORAGE_SIGNATURE. The start address of the bootloader can be retrieved by reading the bytes
+ *  of FLASH memory starting from address \c BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_START.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_Aux_Space Auxiliary Bootloader Section
+ *  To make the bootloader function on smaller devices (those with a physical bootloader section of smaller than 6KB) a second
+ *  section of memory (called the <i>Auxiliary Bootloader Section</i>) is added before the start of the real bootloader section,
+ *  and is filled with a portion of the bootloader code. This allows smaller devices to run the bootloader, at the cost of an
+ *  additional portion of the device's FLASH (the bootloader section size in KB subtracted from the 6KB total size). A small
+ *  trampoline is inserted at the start of the auxiliary section so that the bootloader will run normally in the case of a blank
+ *  application section.
+ *
+ *  On devices supporting a 8KB bootloader section size, the AUX section is not created in the final binary.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_API_MemLayout Device Memory Map
+ *  The following illustration indicates the final memory map of the device when loaded with the bootloader.
+ *
+ *  \verbatim
+ *  +----------------------------+ 0x0000
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |      User Application      |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - BOOT_SECTION_SIZE - BOOT_AUX_SECTION_SIZE
+ *  | Booloader Start Trampoline |
+ *  | (Not User App. Accessible) |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - BOOT_SECTION_SIZE - BOOT_AUX_SECTION_SIZE + 4
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |     Auxiliary Bootloader   |
+ *  |  Space for Smaller Devices |
+ *  | (Not User App. Accessible) |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - BOOT_SECTION_SIZE
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |   Bootloader Application   |
+ *  | (Not User App. Accessible) |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 96
+ *  |   API Table Trampolines    |
+ *  | (Not User App. Accessible) |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 32
+ *  |    Bootloader API Table    |
+ *  |   (User App. Accessible)   |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 8
+ *  |   Bootloader ID Constants  |
+ *  |   (User App. Accessible)   |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND
+ *  \endverbatim
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_KnownIssues Known Issues:
+ *
+ *  \par In some cases, the application is not fully loaded into the device.
+ *  Write-caching on some operating systems may interfere with the normal
+ *  operation of the bootloader. Write caching should be disabled when using the
+ *  Mass Storage bootloader, or the file system synced via an appropriate command
+ *  (such as the OS's normal disk ejection command) before disconnecting the device.
+ *
+ *  \par After loading an application, it is not run automatically on startup.
+ *  Some USB AVR boards ship with the BOOTRST fuse set, causing the bootloader
+ *  to run automatically when the device is reset. In most cases, the BOOTRST
+ *  fuse should be disabled and the HWBE fuse used instead to run the bootloader
+ *  when needed.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_APP_START_ON_EJECT</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Define to disable automatic start of the loaded application when the virtual
+ *        Mass Storage disk is ejected on the host.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6745a86e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure LUFA's
+ *  compile time options, as an alternative to the compile time
+ *  constants supplied through a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+//	#define NO_APP_START_ON_EJECT
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c0648160c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a1cefa351
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,157 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2045,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED,
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.MS_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = MS_CSCP_MassStorageClass,
+			.SubClass               = MS_CSCP_SCSITransparentSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = MS_CSCP_BulkOnlyTransportProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	/* If/Else If chain compiles slightly smaller than a switch case */
+	if (DescriptorType == DTYPE_Device)
+	{
+		Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+		Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+	}
+	else if (DescriptorType == DTYPE_Configuration)
+	{
+		Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+		Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..31747e4c8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "BootloaderAPI.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR         (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE         64
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// Mass Storage Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            MS_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataInEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataOutEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage = 0, /**< Mass storage interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ace118a48
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c
@@ -0,0 +1,294 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage
+ *  devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information,
+ *  which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C
+#include "SCSI.h"
+
+/** Structure to hold the SCSI response data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's
+ *  features and capabilities.
+ */
+static const SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData =
+	{
+		.DeviceType          = DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK,
+		.PeripheralQualifier = 0,
+
+		.Removable           = true,
+
+		.Version             = 0,
+
+		.ResponseDataFormat  = 2,
+		.NormACA             = false,
+		.TrmTsk              = false,
+		.AERC                = false,
+
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x1F,
+
+		.SoftReset           = false,
+		.CmdQue              = false,
+		.Linked              = false,
+		.Sync                = false,
+		.WideBus16Bit        = false,
+		.WideBus32Bit        = false,
+		.RelAddr             = false,
+
+		.VendorID            = "LUFA",
+		.ProductID           = "Bootloader",
+		.RevisionID          = {'0','.','0','0'},
+	};
+
+/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE
+ *  command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete.
+ */
+static SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData =
+	{
+		.ResponseCode        = 0x70,
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x0A,
+	};
+
+
+/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches
+ *  to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns
+ *  a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool CommandSuccess = false;
+
+	/* Run the appropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */
+	switch (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0])
+	{
+		case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Inquiry(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_WRITE);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_READ);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_START_STOP_UNIT:
+#if !defined(NO_APP_START_ON_EJECT)
+			/* If the user ejected the volume, signal bootloader exit at next opportunity. */
+			RunBootloader = ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4] & 0x03) != 0x02);
+#endif
+		case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC:
+		case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY:
+		case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL:
+		case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10:
+			/* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */
+			CommandSuccess = true;
+			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+			break;
+		default:
+			/* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */
+			SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	/* Check if command was successfully processed */
+	if (CommandSuccess)
+	{
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return true;
+	}
+
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features
+ *  and capabilities to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint16_t AllocationLength  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3]);
+	uint16_t BytesTransferred  = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(InquiryData));
+
+	/* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */
+	if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) ||
+	     MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2])
+	{
+		/* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, NULL);
+
+	/* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */
+	Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL);
+
+	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command,
+ *  including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t AllocationLength = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
+	uint8_t BytesTransferred = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(SenseData));
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, NULL);
+	Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity
+ *  on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	Endpoint_Write_32_BE(LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS - 1);
+	Endpoint_Write_32_BE(SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address
+ *  and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level Dataflash routine to handle the actual
+ *  reading and writing of the data.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *  \param[in] IsDataRead  Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE)
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                      const bool IsDataRead)
+{
+	uint16_t BlockAddress;
+	uint16_t TotalBlocks;
+
+	/* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
+	BlockAddress = SwapEndian_32(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]);
+
+	/* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
+	TotalBlocks  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7]);
+
+	/* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */
+	if (BlockAddress >= LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS)
+	{
+		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */
+	for (uint16_t i = 0; i < TotalBlocks; i++)
+	{
+		if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ)
+		  VirtualFAT_ReadBlock(BlockAddress + i);
+		else
+		  VirtualFAT_WriteBlock(BlockAddress + i);
+	}
+
+	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES);
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI MODE SENSE (6) command. This command returns various informational pages about
+ *  the SCSI device, as well as the device's Write Protect status.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Send an empty header response indicating Write Protect flag is off */
+	Endpoint_Write_32_LE(0);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 4;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3529fde60
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for SCSI.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _SCSI_H_
+#define _SCSI_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "../BootloaderMassStorage.h"
+		#include "../Descriptors.h"
+		#include "VirtualFAT.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This
+		 *  is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about
+		 *  the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Key    New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] Acode  New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] Aqual  New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to
+		 */
+		#define SCSI_SET_SENSE(Key, Acode, Aqual)  do { SenseData.SenseKey                 = (Key);   \
+		                                                SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode      = (Acode); \
+		                                                SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = (Aqual); } while (0)
+
+		/** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_READ           true
+
+		/** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_WRITE          false
+
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a Block Media device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK   0x00
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C)
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+			static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+			                                      const bool IsDataRead) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+			static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/VirtualFAT.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/VirtualFAT.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..907b4e5ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/VirtualFAT.c
@@ -0,0 +1,482 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Virtualized FAT12 filesystem implementation, to perform self-programming
+ *  in response to read and write requests to the virtual filesystem by the
+ *  host PC.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_VIRTUAL_FAT_C
+#include "VirtualFAT.h"
+
+/** FAT filesystem boot sector block, must be the first sector on the physical
+ *  disk so that the host can identify the presence of a FAT filesystem. This
+ *  block is truncated; normally a large bootstrap section is located near the
+ *  end of the block for booting purposes however as this is not meant to be a
+ *  bootable disk it is omitted for space reasons.
+ *
+ *  \note When returning the boot block to the host, the magic signature 0xAA55
+ *        must be added to the very end of the block to identify it as a boot
+ *        block.
+ */
+static const FATBootBlock_t BootBlock =
+	{
+		.Bootstrap               = {0xEB, 0x3C, 0x90},
+		.Description             = "mkdosfs",
+		.SectorSize              = SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES,
+		.SectorsPerCluster       = SECTOR_PER_CLUSTER,
+		.ReservedSectors         = 1,
+		.FATCopies               = 2,
+		.RootDirectoryEntries    = (SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES / sizeof(FATDirectoryEntry_t)),
+		.TotalSectors16          = LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS,
+		.MediaDescriptor         = 0xF8,
+		.SectorsPerFAT           = 1,
+		.SectorsPerTrack         = (LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS % 64),
+		.Heads                   = (LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS / 64),
+		.HiddenSectors           = 0,
+		.TotalSectors32          = 0,
+		.PhysicalDriveNum        = 0,
+		.ExtendedBootRecordSig   = 0x29,
+		.VolumeSerialNumber      = 0x12345678,
+		.VolumeLabel             = "LUFA BOOT  ",
+		.FilesystemIdentifier    = "FAT12   ",
+	};
+
+/** FAT 8.3 style directory entry, for the virtual FLASH contents file. */
+static FATDirectoryEntry_t FirmwareFileEntries[] =
+	{
+		/* Root volume label entry; disk label is contained in the Filename and
+		 * Extension fields (concatenated) with a special attribute flag - other
+		 * fields are ignored. Should be the same as the label in the boot block.
+		 */
+		[DISK_FILE_ENTRY_VolumeID] =
+		{
+			.MSDOS_Directory =
+				{
+					.Name            = "LUFA BOOT  ",
+					.Attributes      = FAT_FLAG_VOLUME_NAME,
+					.Reserved        = {0},
+					.CreationTime    = 0,
+					.CreationDate    = 0,
+					.StartingCluster = 0,
+					.Reserved2       = 0,
+				}
+		},
+
+		/* VFAT Long File Name entry for the virtual firmware file; required to
+		 * prevent corruption from systems that are unable to detect the device
+		 * as being a legacy MSDOS style FAT12 volume. */
+		[DISK_FILE_ENTRY_FLASH_LFN] =
+		{
+			.VFAT_LongFileName =
+				{
+					.Ordinal         = 1 | FAT_ORDINAL_LAST_ENTRY,
+					.Attribute       = FAT_FLAG_LONG_FILE_NAME,
+					.Reserved1       = 0,
+					.Reserved2       = 0,
+
+					.Checksum        = FAT_CHECKSUM('F','L','A','S','H',' ',' ',' ','B','I','N'),
+
+					.Unicode1        = 'F',
+					.Unicode2        = 'L',
+					.Unicode3        = 'A',
+					.Unicode4        = 'S',
+					.Unicode5        = 'H',
+					.Unicode6        = '.',
+					.Unicode7        = 'B',
+					.Unicode8        = 'I',
+					.Unicode9        = 'N',
+					.Unicode10       = 0,
+					.Unicode11       = 0,
+					.Unicode12       = 0,
+					.Unicode13       = 0,
+				}
+		},
+
+		/* MSDOS file entry for the virtual Firmware image. */
+		[DISK_FILE_ENTRY_FLASH_MSDOS] =
+		{
+			.MSDOS_File =
+				{
+					.Filename        = "FLASH   ",
+					.Extension       = "BIN",
+					.Attributes      = 0,
+					.Reserved        = {0},
+					.CreationTime    = FAT_TIME(1, 1, 0),
+					.CreationDate    = FAT_DATE(14, 2, 1989),
+					.StartingCluster = 2,
+					.FileSizeBytes   = FLASH_FILE_SIZE_BYTES,
+				}
+		},
+
+		[DISK_FILE_ENTRY_EEPROM_LFN] =
+		{
+			.VFAT_LongFileName =
+				{
+					.Ordinal         = 1 | FAT_ORDINAL_LAST_ENTRY,
+					.Attribute       = FAT_FLAG_LONG_FILE_NAME,
+					.Reserved1       = 0,
+					.Reserved2       = 0,
+
+					.Checksum        = FAT_CHECKSUM('E','E','P','R','O','M',' ',' ','B','I','N'),
+
+					.Unicode1        = 'E',
+					.Unicode2        = 'E',
+					.Unicode3        = 'P',
+					.Unicode4        = 'R',
+					.Unicode5        = 'O',
+					.Unicode6        = 'M',
+					.Unicode7        = '.',
+					.Unicode8        = 'B',
+					.Unicode9        = 'I',
+					.Unicode10       = 'N',
+					.Unicode11       = 0,
+					.Unicode12       = 0,
+					.Unicode13       = 0,
+				}
+		},
+
+		[DISK_FILE_ENTRY_EEPROM_MSDOS] =
+		{
+			.MSDOS_File =
+				{
+					.Filename        = "EEPROM  ",
+					.Extension       = "BIN",
+					.Attributes      = 0,
+					.Reserved        = {0},
+					.CreationTime    = FAT_TIME(1, 1, 0),
+					.CreationDate    = FAT_DATE(14, 2, 1989),
+					.StartingCluster = 2 + FILE_CLUSTERS(FLASH_FILE_SIZE_BYTES),
+					.FileSizeBytes   = EEPROM_FILE_SIZE_BYTES,
+				}
+		},
+	};
+
+/** Starting cluster of the virtual FLASH.BIN file on disk, tracked so that the
+ *  offset from the start of the data sector can be determined. On Windows
+ *  systems files are usually replaced using the original file's disk clusters,
+ *  while Linux appears to overwrite with an offset which must be compensated for.
+ */
+static const uint16_t* FLASHFileStartCluster  = &FirmwareFileEntries[DISK_FILE_ENTRY_FLASH_MSDOS].MSDOS_File.StartingCluster;
+
+/** Starting cluster of the virtual EEPROM.BIN file on disk, tracked so that the
+ *  offset from the start of the data sector can be determined. On Windows
+ *  systems files are usually replaced using the original file's disk clusters,
+ *  while Linux appears to overwrite with an offset which must be compensated for.
+ */
+static const uint16_t* EEPROMFileStartCluster = &FirmwareFileEntries[DISK_FILE_ENTRY_EEPROM_MSDOS].MSDOS_File.StartingCluster;
+
+/** Reads a byte of EEPROM out from the EEPROM memory space.
+ *
+ *  \note This function is required as the avr-libc EEPROM functions do not cope
+ *        with linker relaxations, and a jump longer than 4K of FLASH on the
+ *        larger USB AVRs will break the linker. This function is marked as
+ *        never inlinable and placed into the normal text segment so that the
+ *        call to the EEPROM function will be short even if the AUX boot section
+ *        is used.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  Address   Address of the EEPROM location to read from
+ *
+ *  \return Read byte of EEPROM data.
+ */
+static uint8_t ReadEEPROMByte(const uint8_t* const Address)
+{
+	return eeprom_read_byte(Address);
+}
+
+/** Writes a byte of EEPROM out to the EEPROM memory space.
+ *
+ *  \note This function is required as the avr-libc EEPROM functions do not cope
+ *        with linker relaxations, and a jump longer than 4K of FLASH on the
+ *        larger USB AVRs will break the linker. This function is marked as
+ *        never inlinable and placed into the normal text segment so that the
+ *        call to the EEPROM function will be short even if the AUX boot section
+ *        is used.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  Address   Address of the EEPROM location to write to
+ *  \param[in]  Data      New data to write to the EEPROM location
+ */
+static void WriteEEPROMByte(uint8_t* const Address,
+                            const uint8_t Data)
+{
+	 eeprom_update_byte(Address, Data);
+}
+
+/** Updates a FAT12 cluster entry in the FAT file table with the specified next
+ *  chain index. If the cluster is the last in the file chain, the magic value
+ *  \c 0xFFF should be used.
+ *
+ *  \note FAT data cluster indexes are offset by 2, so that cluster 2 is the
+ *        first file data cluster on the disk. See the FAT specification.
+ *
+ *  \param[out]  FATTable    Pointer to the FAT12 allocation table
+ *  \param[in]   Index       Index of the cluster entry to update
+ *  \param[in]   ChainEntry  Next cluster index in the file chain
+ */
+static void UpdateFAT12ClusterEntry(uint8_t* const FATTable,
+                                    const uint16_t Index,
+                                    const uint16_t ChainEntry)
+{
+	/* Calculate the starting offset of the cluster entry in the FAT12 table */
+	uint8_t FATOffset   = (Index + (Index >> 1));
+	bool    UpperNibble = ((Index & 1) != 0);
+
+	/* Check if the start of the entry is at an upper nibble of the byte, fill
+	 * out FAT12 entry as required */
+	if (UpperNibble)
+	{
+		FATTable[FATOffset]     = (FATTable[FATOffset] & 0x0F) | ((ChainEntry & 0x0F) << 4);
+		FATTable[FATOffset + 1] = (ChainEntry >> 4);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		FATTable[FATOffset]     = ChainEntry;
+		FATTable[FATOffset + 1] = (FATTable[FATOffset] & 0xF0) | (ChainEntry >> 8);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Updates a FAT12 cluster chain in the FAT file table with a linear chain of
+ *  the specified length.
+ *
+ *  \note FAT data cluster indexes are offset by 2, so that cluster 2 is the
+ *        first file data cluster on the disk. See the FAT specification.
+ *
+ *  \param[out]  FATTable     Pointer to the FAT12 allocation table
+ *  \param[in]   Index        Index of the start of the cluster chain to update
+ *  \param[in]   ChainLength  Length of the chain to write, in clusters
+ */
+static void UpdateFAT12ClusterChain(uint8_t* const FATTable,
+                                    const uint16_t Index,
+                                    const uint8_t ChainLength)
+{
+	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < ChainLength; i++)
+	{
+		uint16_t CurrentCluster = Index + i;
+		uint16_t NextCluster    = CurrentCluster + 1;
+
+		/* Mark last cluster as end of file */
+		if (i == (ChainLength - 1))
+		  NextCluster = 0xFFF;
+
+		UpdateFAT12ClusterEntry(FATTable, CurrentCluster, NextCluster);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Reads or writes a block of data from/to the physical device FLASH using a
+ *  block buffer stored in RAM, if the requested block is within the virtual
+ *  firmware file's sector ranges in the emulated FAT file system.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]      BlockNumber  Physical disk block to read from/write to
+ *  \param[in,out]  BlockBuffer  Pointer to the start of the block buffer in RAM
+ *  \param[in]      Read         If \c true, the requested block is read, if
+ *                               \c false, the requested block is written
+ */
+static void ReadWriteFLASHFileBlock(const uint16_t BlockNumber,
+                                    uint8_t* BlockBuffer,
+                                    const bool Read)
+{
+	uint16_t FileStartBlock = DISK_BLOCK_DataStartBlock + (*FLASHFileStartCluster - 2) * SECTOR_PER_CLUSTER;
+	uint16_t FileEndBlock   = FileStartBlock + (FILE_SECTORS(FLASH_FILE_SIZE_BYTES) - 1);
+
+	/* Range check the write request - abort if requested block is not within the
+	 * virtual firmware file sector range */
+	if (!((BlockNumber >= FileStartBlock) && (BlockNumber <= FileEndBlock)))
+	  return;
+
+	#if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF)
+	uint32_t FlashAddress = (uint32_t)(BlockNumber - FileStartBlock) * SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES;
+	#else
+	uint16_t FlashAddress = (uint16_t)(BlockNumber - FileStartBlock) * SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES;
+	#endif
+
+	if (Read)
+	{
+		/* Read out the mapped block of data from the device's FLASH */
+		for (uint16_t i = 0; i < SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES; i++)
+		{
+			#if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF)
+			  BlockBuffer[i] = pgm_read_byte_far(FlashAddress++);
+			#else
+			  BlockBuffer[i] = pgm_read_byte(FlashAddress++);
+			#endif
+		}
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Write out the mapped block of data to the device's FLASH */
+		for (uint16_t i = 0; i < SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES; i += 2)
+		{
+			if ((FlashAddress % SPM_PAGESIZE) == 0)
+			{
+				/* Erase the given FLASH page, ready to be programmed */
+				BootloaderAPI_ErasePage(FlashAddress);
+			}
+
+			/* Write the next data word to the FLASH page */
+			BootloaderAPI_FillWord(FlashAddress, (BlockBuffer[i + 1] << 8) | BlockBuffer[i]);
+			FlashAddress += 2;
+
+			if ((FlashAddress % SPM_PAGESIZE) == 0)
+			{
+				/* Write the filled FLASH page to memory */
+				BootloaderAPI_WritePage(FlashAddress - SPM_PAGESIZE);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+/** Reads or writes a block of data from/to the physical device EEPROM using a
+ *  block buffer stored in RAM, if the requested block is within the virtual
+ *  firmware file's sector ranges in the emulated FAT file system.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]      BlockNumber  Physical disk block to read from/write to
+ *  \param[in,out]  BlockBuffer  Pointer to the start of the block buffer in RAM
+ *  \param[in]      Read         If \c true, the requested block is read, if
+ *                               \c false, the requested block is written
+ */
+static void ReadWriteEEPROMFileBlock(const uint16_t BlockNumber,
+                                     uint8_t* BlockBuffer,
+                                     const bool Read)
+{
+	uint16_t FileStartBlock = DISK_BLOCK_DataStartBlock + (*EEPROMFileStartCluster - 2) * SECTOR_PER_CLUSTER;
+	uint16_t FileEndBlock   = FileStartBlock + (FILE_SECTORS(EEPROM_FILE_SIZE_BYTES) - 1);
+
+	/* Range check the write request - abort if requested block is not within the
+	 * virtual firmware file sector range */
+	if (!((BlockNumber >= FileStartBlock) && (BlockNumber <= FileEndBlock)))
+	  return;
+
+	uint16_t EEPROMAddress = (uint16_t)(BlockNumber - FileStartBlock) * SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES;
+
+	if (Read)
+	{
+		/* Read out the mapped block of data from the device's EEPROM */
+		for (uint16_t i = 0; i < SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES; i++)
+		  BlockBuffer[i] = ReadEEPROMByte((uint8_t*)EEPROMAddress++);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Write out the mapped block of data to the device's EEPROM */
+		for (uint16_t i = 0; i < SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES; i++)
+		  WriteEEPROMByte((uint8_t*)EEPROMAddress++, BlockBuffer[i]);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Writes a block of data to the virtual FAT filesystem, from the USB Mass
+ *  Storage interface.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  BlockNumber  Index of the block to write.
+ */
+void VirtualFAT_WriteBlock(const uint16_t BlockNumber)
+{
+	uint8_t BlockBuffer[SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES];
+
+	/* Buffer the entire block to be written from the host */
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(BlockBuffer, sizeof(BlockBuffer), NULL);
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	switch (BlockNumber)
+	{
+		case DISK_BLOCK_BootBlock:
+		case DISK_BLOCK_FATBlock1:
+		case DISK_BLOCK_FATBlock2:
+			/* Ignore writes to the boot and FAT blocks */
+
+			break;
+
+		case DISK_BLOCK_RootFilesBlock:
+			/* Copy over the updated directory entries */
+			memcpy(FirmwareFileEntries, BlockBuffer, sizeof(FirmwareFileEntries));
+
+			break;
+
+		default:
+			ReadWriteFLASHFileBlock(BlockNumber, BlockBuffer, false);
+			ReadWriteEEPROMFileBlock(BlockNumber, BlockBuffer, false);
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Reads a block of data from the virtual FAT filesystem, and sends it to the
+ *  host via the USB Mass Storage interface.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  BlockNumber  Index of the block to read.
+ */
+void VirtualFAT_ReadBlock(const uint16_t BlockNumber)
+{
+	uint8_t BlockBuffer[SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES];
+	memset(BlockBuffer, 0x00, sizeof(BlockBuffer));
+
+	switch (BlockNumber)
+	{
+		case DISK_BLOCK_BootBlock:
+			memcpy(BlockBuffer, &BootBlock, sizeof(FATBootBlock_t));
+
+			/* Add the magic signature to the end of the block */
+			BlockBuffer[SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES - 2] = 0x55;
+			BlockBuffer[SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES - 1] = 0xAA;
+
+			break;
+
+		case DISK_BLOCK_FATBlock1:
+		case DISK_BLOCK_FATBlock2:
+			/* Cluster 0: Media type/Reserved */
+			UpdateFAT12ClusterEntry(BlockBuffer, 0, 0xF00 | BootBlock.MediaDescriptor);
+
+			/* Cluster 1: Reserved */
+			UpdateFAT12ClusterEntry(BlockBuffer, 1, 0xFFF);
+
+			/* Cluster 2 onwards: Cluster chain of FLASH.BIN */
+			UpdateFAT12ClusterChain(BlockBuffer, *FLASHFileStartCluster, FILE_CLUSTERS(FLASH_FILE_SIZE_BYTES));
+
+			/* Cluster 2+n onwards: Cluster chain of EEPROM.BIN */
+			UpdateFAT12ClusterChain(BlockBuffer, *EEPROMFileStartCluster, FILE_CLUSTERS(EEPROM_FILE_SIZE_BYTES));
+
+			break;
+
+		case DISK_BLOCK_RootFilesBlock:
+			memcpy(BlockBuffer, FirmwareFileEntries, sizeof(FirmwareFileEntries));
+
+			break;
+
+		default:
+			ReadWriteFLASHFileBlock(BlockNumber, BlockBuffer, true);
+			ReadWriteEEPROMFileBlock(BlockNumber, BlockBuffer, true);
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the entire read block Buffer to the host */
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(BlockBuffer, sizeof(BlockBuffer), NULL);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/VirtualFAT.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/VirtualFAT.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..380132c53
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/VirtualFAT.h
@@ -0,0 +1,302 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#ifndef _VIRTUALFAT_H_
+#define _VIRTUALFAT_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "../BootloaderAPI.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Size of the virtual FLASH.BIN file in bytes. */
+		#define FLASH_FILE_SIZE_BYTES     (FLASHEND - (FLASHEND - BOOT_START_ADDR) - AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE)
+
+		/** Size of the virtual EEPROM.BIN file in bytes. */
+		#define EEPROM_FILE_SIZE_BYTES    E2END
+
+		/** Number of sectors that comprise a single logical disk cluster. */
+		#define SECTOR_PER_CLUSTER        4
+
+		/** Size of a single logical sector on the disk. */
+		#define SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES         512
+
+		/** Size of a logical cluster on the disk, in bytes */
+		#define CLUSTER_SIZE_BYTES        (SECTOR_PER_CLUSTER * SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES)
+
+		/** Number of sectors required to store a given size in bytes.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] size  Size of the data that needs to be stored
+		 *
+		 *  \return Number of sectors required to store the given data on the disk.
+		 */
+		#define FILE_SECTORS(size)        ((size / SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES)  + ((size % SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES)  ? 1 : 0))
+
+		/** Number of clusters required to store a given size in bytes.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] size  Size of the data that needs to be stored
+		 *
+		 *  \return Number of clusters required to store the given data on the disk.
+		 */
+		#define FILE_CLUSTERS(size)       ((size / CLUSTER_SIZE_BYTES) + ((size % CLUSTER_SIZE_BYTES) ? 1 : 0))
+
+		/** Total number of logical sectors/blocks on the disk. */
+		#define LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS          (FILE_SECTORS(FLASH_FILE_SIZE_BYTES) + FILE_SECTORS(EEPROM_FILE_SIZE_BYTES) + 32)
+
+		/** Converts a given time in HH:MM:SS format to a FAT filesystem time.
+		 *
+		 *  \note The minimum seconds resolution of FAT is 2, thus odd seconds
+		 *        will be truncated to the previous integer multiple of 2 seconds.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] hh  Hours (0-23)
+		 *  \param[in] mm  Minutes (0-59)
+		 *  \param[in] ss  Seconds (0-59)
+		 *
+		 *  \return Given time encoded as a FAT filesystem timestamp
+		 */
+		#define FAT_TIME(hh, mm, ss)      ((hh << 11) | (mm << 5) | (ss >> 1))
+
+		/** Converts a given date in DD/MM/YYYY format to a FAT filesystem date.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] dd    Days in the month (1-31)
+		 *  \param[in] mm    Months in the year (1-12)
+		 *  \param[in] yyyy  Year (1980 - 2107)
+		 *
+		 *  \return Given date encoded as a FAT filesystem datestamp
+		 */
+		#define FAT_DATE(dd, mm, yyyy)    (((yyyy - 1980) << 9) | (mm << 5) | (dd << 0))
+
+		/** Bit-rotates a given 8-bit value once to the right.
+		 *
+		 *  \param x  Value to rotate right once
+		 *
+		 *  \return Bit-rotated input value, rotated once to the right.
+		 */
+		#define _ROT8(x)                  ((((x) & 0xFE) >> 1) | (((x) & 1) ? 0x80 : 0x00))
+
+		/** Computes the LFN entry checksum of a MSDOS 8.3 format file entry,
+		 *  to associate a LFN entry with its short file entry.
+		 *
+		 *  \param n0  MSDOS Filename character 1
+		 *  \param n1  MSDOS Filename character 2
+		 *  \param n2  MSDOS Filename character 3
+		 *  \param n3  MSDOS Filename character 4
+		 *  \param n4  MSDOS Filename character 5
+		 *  \param n5  MSDOS Filename character 6
+		 *  \param n6  MSDOS Filename character 7
+		 *  \param n7  MSDOS Filename character 8
+		 *  \param e0  MSDOS Extension character 1
+		 *  \param e1  MSDOS Extension character 2
+		 *  \param e2  MSDOS Extension character 3
+		 *
+		 *  \return LFN checksum of the given MSDOS 8.3 filename.
+		 */
+		#define FAT_CHECKSUM(n0, n1, n2, n3, n4, n5, n6, n7, e0, e1, e2) \
+		   (uint8_t)(_ROT8(_ROT8(_ROT8(_ROT8(_ROT8(_ROT8(_ROT8(_ROT8(_ROT8(_ROT8(n0)+n1)+n2)+n3)+n4)+n5)+n6)+n7)+e0)+e1)+e2)
+
+		/** \name FAT Filesystem Flags */
+		//@{
+		/** FAT attribute flag to indicate a read-only file. */
+		#define FAT_FLAG_READONLY         (1 << 0)
+
+		/** FAT attribute flag to indicate a hidden file. */
+		#define FAT_FLAG_HIDDEN           (1 << 1)
+
+		/** FAT attribute flag to indicate a system file. */
+		#define FAT_FLAG_SYSTEM           (1 << 2)
+
+		/** FAT attribute flag to indicate a Volume name entry. */
+		#define FAT_FLAG_VOLUME_NAME      (1 << 3)
+
+		/** FAT attribute flag to indicate a directory entry. */
+		#define FAT_FLAG_DIRECTORY        (1 << 4)
+
+		/** FAT attribute flag to indicate a file ready for archiving. */
+		#define FAT_FLAG_ARCHIVE          (1 << 5)
+
+		/** FAT pseudo-attribute flag to indicate a Long File Name entry. */
+		#define FAT_FLAG_LONG_FILE_NAME   0x0F
+
+		/** Ordinal flag marker for FAT Long File Name entries to mark the last entry. */
+		#define FAT_ORDINAL_LAST_ENTRY    (1 << 6)
+		//@}
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the Root FAT file entry indexes on the disk. This can be used
+		 *  to retrieve the current contents of a known directory entry.
+		 */
+		enum
+		{
+			/** Volume ID directory entry, giving the name of the virtual disk. */
+			DISK_FILE_ENTRY_VolumeID      = 0,
+			/** Long File Name FAT file entry of the virtual FLASH.BIN image file. */
+			DISK_FILE_ENTRY_FLASH_LFN     = 1,
+			/** Legacy MSDOS FAT file entry of the virtual FLASH.BIN image file. */
+			DISK_FILE_ENTRY_FLASH_MSDOS   = 2,
+			/** Long File Name FAT file entry of the virtual EEPROM.BIN image file. */
+			DISK_FILE_ENTRY_EEPROM_LFN    = 3,
+			/** Legacy MSDOS FAT file entry of the virtual EEPROM.BIN image file. */
+			DISK_FILE_ENTRY_EEPROM_MSDOS  = 4,
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the physical disk blocks of the virtual disk. */
+		enum
+		{
+			/** Boot sector disk block. */
+			DISK_BLOCK_BootBlock          = 0,
+			/** First copy of the FAT table block. */
+			DISK_BLOCK_FATBlock1          = 1,
+			/** Second copy of the FAT table block. */
+			DISK_BLOCK_FATBlock2          = 2,
+			/** Root file and directory entries block. */
+			DISK_BLOCK_RootFilesBlock     = 3,
+			/** Start block of the disk data section. */
+			DISK_BLOCK_DataStartBlock     = 4,
+		};
+
+	/* Type Definitions: */
+		/** FAT boot block structure definition, used to identify the core
+		 *  parameters of a FAT file system stored on a disk.
+		 *
+		 *  \note This definition is truncated to save space; the magic signature
+		 *        \c 0xAA55 must be appended to the very end of the block for it
+		 *        to be detected by the host as a valid boot block.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  Bootstrap[3];
+			uint8_t  Description[8];
+			uint16_t SectorSize;
+			uint8_t  SectorsPerCluster;
+			uint16_t ReservedSectors;
+			uint8_t  FATCopies;
+			uint16_t RootDirectoryEntries;
+			uint16_t TotalSectors16;
+			uint8_t  MediaDescriptor;
+			uint16_t SectorsPerFAT;
+			uint16_t SectorsPerTrack;
+			uint16_t Heads;
+			uint32_t HiddenSectors;
+			uint32_t TotalSectors32;
+			uint16_t PhysicalDriveNum;
+			uint8_t  ExtendedBootRecordSig;
+			uint32_t VolumeSerialNumber;
+			uint8_t  VolumeLabel[11];
+			uint8_t  FilesystemIdentifier[8];
+			/* uint8_t  BootstrapProgram[448]; */
+			/* uint16_t MagicSignature; */
+		} FATBootBlock_t;
+
+		/** FAT directory entry structure, for the various kinds of File and
+		 *  directory descriptors on a FAT disk.
+		 */
+		typedef union
+		{
+			/** VFAT Long File Name file entry. */
+			struct
+			{
+				uint8_t  Ordinal;
+				uint16_t Unicode1;
+				uint16_t Unicode2;
+				uint16_t Unicode3;
+				uint16_t Unicode4;
+				uint16_t Unicode5;
+				uint8_t  Attribute;
+				uint8_t  Reserved1;
+				uint8_t  Checksum;
+				uint16_t Unicode6;
+				uint16_t Unicode7;
+				uint16_t Unicode8;
+				uint16_t Unicode9;
+				uint16_t Unicode10;
+				uint16_t Unicode11;
+				uint16_t Reserved2;
+				uint16_t Unicode12;
+				uint16_t Unicode13;
+			} VFAT_LongFileName;
+
+			/** Legacy FAT MSDOS 8.3 file entry. */
+			struct
+			{
+				uint8_t  Filename[8];
+				uint8_t  Extension[3];
+				uint8_t  Attributes;
+				uint8_t  Reserved[10];
+				uint16_t CreationTime;
+				uint16_t CreationDate;
+				uint16_t StartingCluster;
+				uint32_t FileSizeBytes;
+			} MSDOS_File;
+
+			/** Legacy FAT MSDOS (sub-)directory entry. */
+			struct
+			{
+				uint8_t  Name[11];
+				uint8_t  Attributes;
+				uint8_t  Reserved[10];
+				uint16_t CreationTime;
+				uint16_t CreationDate;
+				uint16_t StartingCluster;
+				uint32_t Reserved2;
+			} MSDOS_Directory;
+		} FATDirectoryEntry_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_VIRTUAL_FAT_C)
+			static uint8_t ReadEEPROMByte(const uint8_t* const Address) ATTR_NO_INLINE;
+
+			static void WriteEEPROMByte(uint8_t* const Address,
+			                            const uint8_t Data) ATTR_NO_INLINE;
+
+			static void UpdateFAT12ClusterEntry(uint8_t* const FATTable,
+			                                    const uint16_t Index,
+			                                    const uint16_t ChainEntry) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+
+			static void UpdateFAT12ClusterChain(uint8_t* const FATTable,
+			                                    const uint16_t StartIndex,
+			                                    const uint8_t ChainLength) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+
+			static void ReadWriteFLASHFileBlock(const uint16_t BlockNumber,
+			                                    uint8_t* BlockBuffer,
+			                                    const bool Read) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+
+			static void ReadWriteEEPROMFileBlock(const uint16_t BlockNumber,
+			                                     uint8_t* BlockBuffer,
+			                                     const bool Read) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+		#endif
+
+		void VirtualFAT_WriteBlock(const uint16_t BlockNumber) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+		void VirtualFAT_ReadBlock(const uint16_t BlockNumber) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f1d550d1e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Mass Storage Bootloader - 128KB FLASH / 8KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.mass_storage.avr8.128_8" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_ms_128kb_8kb_">

+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.mass_storage"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x1E000"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x1E000"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE" value="0"/>

+

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x1FFA0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x1FFE0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x1FFF8"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="Mass Storage Bootloader - 64KB FLASH / 8KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.mass_storage.avr8.64_8" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_ms_64kb_8kb_">

+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.mass_storage"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb647"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0xE000"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0xE000"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE" value="0"/>

+

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0xFFA0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0xFFE0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0xFFF8"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="Mass Storage Bootloader - 32KB FLASH / 4KB Boot (2KB AUX) - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.mass_storage.avr8.32_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_ms_32kb_4kb_">

+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.mass_storage"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atmega32u4"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x7000"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x7000"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE" value="2048"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.boot_aux=0x6810"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.boot_aux_trampoline=0x6800"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=Boot_AUX_Trampoline"/>

+

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x7FA0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x7FE0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x7FF8"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="Mass Storage Bootloader - 16KB FLASH / 4KB Boot (2KB AUX) - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.mass_storage.avr8.16_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_ms_16kb_4kb_">

+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.mass_storage"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atmega16u2"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x3000"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x3000"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE" value="2048"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.boot_aux=0x2810"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.boot_aux_trampoline=0x2800"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=Boot_AUX_Trampoline"/>

+

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x3FA0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x3FE0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x3FF8"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.bootloaders.mass_storage" caption="Mass Storage Bootloader">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Mass Storage Class Bootloader, capable of reprogramming a device via binary BIN files copied to the virtual FAT12 file-system it creates when plugged into a host.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Bootloaders"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="include-path" value="."/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="BootloaderMassStorage.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="BootloaderMassStorage.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="BootloaderAPI.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="BootloaderAPI.h"/>

+		<build type="asm-source" value="BootloaderAPITable.S"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+

+		<build type="include-path" value="Lib"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/VirtualFAT.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/VirtualFAT.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/SCSI.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/SCSI.c"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="BootloaderMassStorage.txt"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9e816908e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2365 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mass Storage Class Bootloader"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM \
+                         ATTR_NO_INIT
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..91bb4038e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/MassStorage/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+#

+#             LUFA Library

+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.

+#

+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

+#           www.lufa-lib.org

+#

+# --------------------------------------

+#         LUFA Project Makefile.

+# --------------------------------------

+

+# Run "make help" for target help.

+

+MCU          = at90usb1287

+ARCH         = AVR8

+BOARD        = USBKEY

+F_CPU        = 8000000

+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)

+OPTIMIZATION = s

+TARGET       = BootloaderMassStorage

+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c BootloaderAPI.c BootloaderAPITable.S Lib/SCSI.c Lib/VirtualFAT.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)

+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA

+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START_OFFSET)

+LD_FLAGS     = -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START_OFFSET) $(BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS)

+

+# Flash size and bootloader section sizes of the target, in KB. These must

+# match the target's total FLASH size and the bootloader size set in the

+# device's fuses.

+FLASH_SIZE_KB         = 128

+BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB  = 8

+

+# Bootloader address calculation formulas

+# Do not modify these macros, but rather modify the dependent values above.

+CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX   = $(shell printf "0x%X" $$(( $(1) )) )

+BOOT_START_OFFSET     = $(call CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX, ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) - $(BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB)) * 1024 )

+BOOT_SEC_OFFSET       = $(call CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX, ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) * 1024) - ($(strip $(1))) )

+

+# Bootloader linker section flags for relocating the API table sections to

+# known FLASH addresses - these should not normally be user-edited.

+BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG  = -Wl,--section-start=$(strip $(1))=$(call BOOT_SEC_OFFSET, $(3)) -Wl,--undefined=$(strip $(2))

+BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS     = $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_trampolines, BootloaderAPI_Trampolines, 96)

+BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS    += $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_jumptable,   BootloaderAPI_JumpTable,   32)

+BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS    += $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_signatures,  BootloaderAPI_Signatures,  8)

+

+# Check if the bootloader needs an AUX section, located before the real bootloader section to store some of the

+# bootloader code. This is required for 32KB and smaller devices, where the actual bootloader is 6KB but the maximum

+# bootloader section size is 4KB. The actual usable application space will be reduced by 6KB for these devices.

+ifeq ($(BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB),8)

+  CC_FLAGS           += -DAUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE=0

+else

+  AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB = (6 - $(BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB))

+

+  CC_FLAGS           += -DAUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE='($(AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB) * 1024)'

+  LD_FLAGS           += -Wl,--section-start=.boot_aux=$(call BOOT_SEC_OFFSET, (($(BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB) + $(AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB)) * 1024 - 16))

+  LD_FLAGS           += $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .boot_aux_trampoline, Boot_AUX_Trampoline, ($(BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB) + $(AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB)) * 1024)

+endif

+

+# Default target

+all:

+

+# Include LUFA build script makefiles

+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk

+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk

+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk

+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk

+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk

+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk

+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderAPI.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderAPI.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f7564e982
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderAPI.c
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Bootloader user application API functions.
+ */
+
+#include "BootloaderAPI.h"
+
+void BootloaderAPI_ErasePage(const uint32_t Address)
+{
+	boot_page_erase_safe(Address);
+	boot_spm_busy_wait();
+	boot_rww_enable();
+}
+
+void BootloaderAPI_WritePage(const uint32_t Address)
+{
+	boot_page_write_safe(Address);
+	boot_spm_busy_wait();
+	boot_rww_enable();
+}
+
+void BootloaderAPI_FillWord(const uint32_t Address, const uint16_t Word)
+{
+	boot_page_fill_safe(Address, Word);
+}
+
+uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature(const uint16_t Address)
+{
+	return boot_signature_byte_get(Address);
+}
+
+uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse(const uint16_t Address)
+{
+	return boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(Address);
+}
+
+uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadLock(void)
+{
+	return boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_LOCK_BITS);
+}
+
+void BootloaderAPI_WriteLock(const uint8_t LockBits)
+{
+	boot_lock_bits_set_safe(LockBits);
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderAPI.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderAPI.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f44ab06c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderAPI.h
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for BootloaderAPI.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _BOOTLOADER_API_H_
+#define _BOOTLOADER_API_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/boot.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void    BootloaderAPI_ErasePage(const uint32_t Address);
+		void    BootloaderAPI_WritePage(const uint32_t Address);
+		void    BootloaderAPI_FillWord(const uint32_t Address, const uint16_t Word);
+		uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature(const uint16_t Address);
+		uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse(const uint16_t Address);
+		uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadLock(void);
+		void    BootloaderAPI_WriteLock(const uint8_t LockBits);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderAPITable.S b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderAPITable.S
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ec499b74e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderAPITable.S
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+/*

+             LUFA Library

+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.

+

+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

+           www.lufa-lib.org

+*/

+

+/*

+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

+

+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

+  software without specific, written prior permission.

+

+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this

+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

+  this software.

+*/

+

+; Trampolines to actual API implementations if the target address is outside the

+; range of a rjmp instruction (can happen with large bootloader sections)

+.section .apitable_trampolines, "ax"

+.global BootloaderAPI_Trampolines

+BootloaderAPI_Trampolines:

+

+	BootloaderAPI_ErasePage_Trampoline:

+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ErasePage

+	BootloaderAPI_WritePage_Trampoline:

+		jmp BootloaderAPI_WritePage

+	BootloaderAPI_FillWord_Trampoline:

+		jmp BootloaderAPI_FillWord

+	BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature_Trampoline:

+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature

+	BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse_Trampoline:

+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse

+	BootloaderAPI_ReadLock_Trampoline:

+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadLock

+	BootloaderAPI_WriteLock_Trampoline:

+		jmp BootloaderAPI_WriteLock

+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED1:

+		ret

+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED2:

+		ret

+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED3:

+		ret

+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED4:

+		ret

+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED5:

+		ret

+

+

+

+; API function jump table

+.section .apitable_jumptable, "ax"

+.global BootloaderAPI_JumpTable

+BootloaderAPI_JumpTable:

+

+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ErasePage_Trampoline

+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_WritePage_Trampoline

+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_FillWord_Trampoline

+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature_Trampoline

+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse_Trampoline

+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadLock_Trampoline

+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_WriteLock_Trampoline

+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED1 ; UNUSED ENTRY 1

+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED2 ; UNUSED ENTRY 2

+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED3 ; UNUSED ENTRY 3

+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED4 ; UNUSED ENTRY 4

+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED5 ; UNUSED ENTRY 5

+

+

+

+; Bootloader table signatures and information

+.section .apitable_signatures, "ax"

+.global BootloaderAPI_Signatures

+BootloaderAPI_Signatures:

+

+	.long BOOT_START_ADDR ; Start address of the bootloader

+	.word 0xDF20 ; Signature for the Printer class bootloader

+	.word 0xDCFB ; Signature for a LUFA class bootloader

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderPrinter.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderPrinter.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a19cb0674
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderPrinter.c
@@ -0,0 +1,431 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the Printer class bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic.
+ */
+
+#include "BootloaderPrinter.h"
+
+/** LUFA Printer Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all Printer Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t TextOnly_Printer_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_Printer,
+				.DataINEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address          = PRINTER_IN_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = PRINTER_IO_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint =
+					{
+						.Address          = PRINTER_OUT_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = PRINTER_IO_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+				.IEEE1284String =
+					"MFG:Generic;"
+					"MDL:Generic_/_Text_Only;"
+					"CMD:1284.4;"
+					"CLS:PRINTER",
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Intel HEX parser state machine state information, to track the contents of
+ *  a HEX file streamed in as a sequence of arbitrary bytes.
+ */
+struct
+{
+	/** Current HEX parser state machine state. */
+	uint8_t  ParserState;
+	/** Previously decoded numerical byte of data. */
+	uint8_t  PrevData;
+	/** Currently decoded numerical byte of data. */
+	uint8_t  Data;
+	/** Indicates if both bytes that correspond to a single decoded numerical
+	 *  byte of data (HEX encodes values in ASCII HEX, two characters per byte)
+	 *  have been read.
+	 */
+	bool     ReadMSB;
+	/** Intel HEX record type of the current Intel HEX record. */
+	uint8_t  RecordType;
+	/** Numerical bytes of data remaining to be read in the current record. */
+	uint8_t  DataRem;
+	/** Checksum of the current record received so far. */
+	uint8_t  Checksum;
+	/** Starting address of the last addressed FLASH page. */
+	uint32_t PageStartAddress;
+	/** Current 32-bit byte extended base address in FLASH being targeted. */
+	uint32_t CurrBaseAddress;
+	/** Current 32-bit byte address in FLASH being targeted. */
+	uint32_t CurrAddress;
+} HEXParser;
+
+/** Indicates if there is data waiting to be written to a physical page of
+ *  memory in FLASH.
+ */
+static bool PageDirty = false;
+
+/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run
+ *  via a soft reset. When cleared, the bootloader will abort, the USB interface will shut down and the application
+ *  started via a forced watchdog reset.
+ */
+static bool RunBootloader = true;
+
+/** Magic lock for forced application start. If the HWBE fuse is programmed and BOOTRST is unprogrammed, the bootloader
+ *  will start if the /HWB line of the AVR is held low and the system is reset. However, if the /HWB line is still held
+ *  low when the application attempts to start via a watchdog reset, the bootloader will re-start. If set to the value
+ *  \ref MAGIC_BOOT_KEY the special init function \ref Application_Jump_Check() will force the application to start.
+ */
+uint16_t MagicBootKey ATTR_NO_INIT;
+
+
+/** Special startup routine to check if the bootloader was started via a watchdog reset, and if the magic application
+ *  start key has been loaded into \ref MagicBootKey. If the bootloader started via the watchdog and the key is valid,
+ *  this will force the user application to start via a software jump.
+ */
+void Application_Jump_Check(void)
+{
+	/* If the reset source was the bootloader and the key is correct, clear it and jump to the application */
+	if ((MCUSR & (1 << WDRF)) && (MagicBootKey == MAGIC_BOOT_KEY))
+	{
+		MagicBootKey = 0;
+
+		// cppcheck-suppress constStatement
+		((void (*)(void))0x0000)();
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * Converts a given input byte of data from an ASCII encoded HEX value to an integer value.
+ *
+ * \note Input HEX bytes are expected to be in uppercase only.
+ *
+ * \param[in] Byte  ASCII byte of data to convert
+ *
+ * \return Integer converted value of the input ASCII encoded HEX byte of data, or -1 if the
+ *         input is not valid ASCII encoded HEX.
+ */
+static int8_t HexToDecimal(const char Byte)
+{
+	if ((Byte >= 'A') && (Byte <= 'F'))
+	  return (10 + (Byte - 'A'));
+	else if ((Byte >= '0') && (Byte <= '9'))
+	  return (Byte - '0');
+
+	return -1;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Flushes a partially written page of data to physical FLASH, if a page
+ * boundary has been crossed.
+ *
+ * \note If a page flush occurs the global HEX parser state is updated.
+ */
+static void FlushPageIfRequired(void)
+{
+	/* Abort if no data has been buffered for writing to the current page */
+	if (!PageDirty)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Flush the FLASH page to physical memory if we are crossing a page boundary */
+	uint32_t NewPageStartAddress = (HEXParser.CurrAddress & ~(SPM_PAGESIZE - 1));
+	if (HEXParser.PageStartAddress != NewPageStartAddress)
+	{
+		boot_page_write(HEXParser.PageStartAddress);
+		boot_spm_busy_wait();
+
+		HEXParser.PageStartAddress = NewPageStartAddress;
+
+		PageDirty = false;
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * Parses an input Intel HEX formatted stream one character at a time, loading
+ * the data contents into the device's internal FLASH memory.
+ *
+ * \param[in] ReadCharacter  Next input ASCII byte of data to parse
+ */
+static void ParseIntelHEXByte(const char ReadCharacter)
+{
+	/* Reset the line parser while waiting for a new line to start */
+	if ((HEXParser.ParserState == HEX_PARSE_STATE_WAIT_LINE) || (ReadCharacter == ':'))
+	{
+		HEXParser.Checksum     = 0;
+		HEXParser.CurrAddress  = HEXParser.CurrBaseAddress;
+		HEXParser.ReadMSB      = false;
+
+		/* ASCII ':' indicates the start of a new HEX record */
+		if (ReadCharacter == ':')
+		  HEXParser.ParserState = HEX_PARSE_STATE_BYTE_COUNT;
+
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Only allow ASCII HEX encoded digits, ignore all other characters */
+	int8_t ReadCharacterDec = HexToDecimal(ReadCharacter);
+	if (ReadCharacterDec < 0)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Read and convert the next nibble of data from the current character */
+	HEXParser.Data    = (HEXParser.Data << 4) | ReadCharacterDec;
+	HEXParser.ReadMSB = !HEXParser.ReadMSB;
+
+	/* Only process further when a full byte (two nibbles) have been read */
+	if (HEXParser.ReadMSB)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Intel HEX checksum is for all fields except starting character and the
+	 * checksum itself
+	 */
+	if (HEXParser.ParserState != HEX_PARSE_STATE_CHECKSUM)
+	  HEXParser.Checksum += HEXParser.Data;
+
+	switch (HEXParser.ParserState)
+	{
+		case HEX_PARSE_STATE_BYTE_COUNT:
+			HEXParser.DataRem      = HEXParser.Data;
+			HEXParser.ParserState  = HEX_PARSE_STATE_ADDRESS_HIGH;
+			break;
+
+		case HEX_PARSE_STATE_ADDRESS_HIGH:
+			HEXParser.CurrAddress += ((uint16_t)HEXParser.Data << 8);
+			HEXParser.ParserState  = HEX_PARSE_STATE_ADDRESS_LOW;
+			break;
+
+		case HEX_PARSE_STATE_ADDRESS_LOW:
+			HEXParser.CurrAddress += HEXParser.Data;
+			HEXParser.ParserState  = HEX_PARSE_STATE_RECORD_TYPE;
+			break;
+
+		case HEX_PARSE_STATE_RECORD_TYPE:
+			HEXParser.RecordType   = HEXParser.Data;
+			HEXParser.ParserState  = (HEXParser.DataRem ? HEX_PARSE_STATE_READ_DATA : HEX_PARSE_STATE_CHECKSUM);
+			break;
+
+		case HEX_PARSE_STATE_READ_DATA:
+			/* Track the number of read data bytes in the record */
+			HEXParser.DataRem--;
+
+			/* Protect the bootloader against being written to */
+			if (HEXParser.CurrAddress >= BOOT_START_ADDR)
+			{
+				HEXParser.ParserState = HEX_PARSE_STATE_WAIT_LINE;
+				PageDirty = false;
+				return;
+			}
+
+			/* Wait for a machine word (two bytes) of data to be read */
+			if (HEXParser.DataRem & 0x01)
+			{
+				HEXParser.PrevData = HEXParser.Data;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			/* Convert the last two received data bytes into a 16-bit word */
+			uint16_t NewDataWord = ((uint16_t)HEXParser.Data << 8) | HEXParser.PrevData;
+
+			switch (HEXParser.RecordType)
+			{
+				case HEX_RECORD_TYPE_Data:
+					/* If we are writing to a new page, we need to erase it first */
+					if (!(PageDirty))
+					{
+						boot_page_erase(HEXParser.PageStartAddress);
+						boot_spm_busy_wait();
+
+						PageDirty = true;
+					}
+
+					/* Fill the FLASH memory buffer with the new word of data */
+					boot_page_fill(HEXParser.CurrAddress, NewDataWord);
+					HEXParser.CurrAddress += 2;
+
+					/* Flush the FLASH page to physical memory if we are crossing a page boundary */
+					FlushPageIfRequired();
+					break;
+
+				case HEX_RECORD_TYPE_ExtendedSegmentAddress:
+					/* Extended address data - store the upper 12-bits of the new address */
+					HEXParser.CurrBaseAddress = ((uint32_t)NewDataWord << 4);
+					break;
+
+				case HEX_RECORD_TYPE_ExtendedLinearAddress:
+					/* Extended address data - store the upper 16-bits of the new address */
+					HEXParser.CurrBaseAddress = ((uint32_t)NewDataWord << 16);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			if (!HEXParser.DataRem)
+			  HEXParser.ParserState = HEX_PARSE_STATE_CHECKSUM;
+			break;
+
+		case HEX_PARSE_STATE_CHECKSUM:
+			/* Verify checksum of the completed record */
+			if (HEXParser.Data != ((~HEXParser.Checksum + 1) & 0xFF))
+			  break;
+
+			/* Flush the FLASH page to physical memory if we are crossing a page boundary */
+			FlushPageIfRequired();
+
+			/* If end of the HEX file reached, the bootloader should exit at next opportunity */
+			if (HEXParser.RecordType == HEX_RECORD_TYPE_EndOfFile)
+			  RunBootloader = false;
+
+			break;
+
+		default:
+			HEXParser.ParserState = HEX_PARSE_STATE_WAIT_LINE;
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	while (RunBootloader)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesReceived = PRNT_Device_BytesReceived(&TextOnly_Printer_Interface);
+
+		if (BytesReceived)
+		{
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+			while (BytesReceived--)
+			{
+				int16_t ReceivedByte = PRNT_Device_ReceiveByte(&TextOnly_Printer_Interface);
+
+				/* Feed the next byte of data to the HEX parser */
+				ParseIntelHEXByte(ReceivedByte);
+			}
+
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+		}
+
+		PRNT_Device_USBTask(&TextOnly_Printer_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+
+	/* Disconnect from the host - USB interface will be reset later along with the AVR */
+	USB_Detach();
+
+	/* Unlock the forced application start mode of the bootloader if it is restarted */
+	MagicBootKey = MAGIC_BOOT_KEY;
+
+	/* Enable the watchdog and force a timeout to reset the AVR */
+	wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS);
+
+	for (;;);
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+static void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */
+	MCUCR = (1 << IVCE);
+	MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Bootloader active LED toggle timer initialization */
+	TIMSK1 = (1 << TOIE1);
+	TCCR1B = ((1 << CS11) | (1 << CS10));
+}
+
+/** ISR to periodically toggle the LEDs on the board to indicate that the bootloader is active. */
+ISR(TIMER1_OVF_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs and stops the Printer management task.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
+ *  of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the Mass Storage management task started.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	/* Setup Printer Data Endpoints */
+	ConfigSuccess &= PRNT_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&TextOnly_Printer_Interface);
+
+	/* Reset the HEX parser upon successful connection to a host */
+	HEXParser.ParserState = HEX_PARSE_STATE_WAIT_LINE;
+
+	/* Indicate endpoint configuration success or failure */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to
+ *  the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing
+ *  internally.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	PRNT_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&TextOnly_Printer_Interface);
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderPrinter.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderPrinter.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d5cec1914
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderPrinter.h
@@ -0,0 +1,108 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for BootloaderPrinter.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _BOOTLOADER_PRINTER_H_
+#define _BOOTLOADER_PRINTER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__OPTIMIZE_SIZE__)
+			#error This bootloader requires that it be optimized for size, not speed, to fit into the target device. Change optimization settings and try again.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY       LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING   (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY         (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR         (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY           LEDS_LED2
+
+		/** Magic bootloader key to unlock forced application start mode. */
+		#define MAGIC_BOOT_KEY             0xDC42
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Intel HEX parser state machine states. */
+		enum HEX_Parser_States_t
+		{
+			HEX_PARSE_STATE_WAIT_LINE,    /**< Parser is waiting for a HEX Start of Line character. */
+			HEX_PARSE_STATE_BYTE_COUNT,   /**< Parser is waiting for a record byte count. */
+			HEX_PARSE_STATE_ADDRESS_HIGH, /**< Parser is waiting for the MSB of a record address. */
+			HEX_PARSE_STATE_ADDRESS_LOW,  /**< Parser is waiting for the LSB of a record address. */
+			HEX_PARSE_STATE_RECORD_TYPE,  /**< Parser is waiting for the record type. */
+			HEX_PARSE_STATE_READ_DATA,    /**< Parser is waiting for more data in the current record. */
+			HEX_PARSE_STATE_CHECKSUM,     /**< Parser is waiting for the checksum of the current record. */
+		};
+
+		/** Intel HEX record types, used to indicate the type of record contained in a line of a HEX file. */
+		enum HEX_Record_Types_t
+		{
+			HEX_RECORD_TYPE_Data                   = 0, /**< Record contains loadable data. */
+			HEX_RECORD_TYPE_EndOfFile              = 1, /**< End of file record. */
+			HEX_RECORD_TYPE_ExtendedSegmentAddress = 2, /**< Extended segment start record. */
+			HEX_RECORD_TYPE_StartSegmentAddress    = 3, /**< Normal segment start record. */
+			HEX_RECORD_TYPE_ExtendedLinearAddress  = 4, /**< Extended linear address start record. */
+			HEX_RECORD_TYPE_StartLinearAddress     = 5, /**< Linear address start record. */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		static void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderPrinter.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderPrinter.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cfa51d4cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderPrinter.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,190 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Printer Class USB AVR Bootloader
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Printer Class</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Printer Subclass</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Printer Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  This bootloader enumerates to the host as a Generic Text Only Printer device, capable of reading and parsing
+ *  "printed" plain-text Intel HEX files to load firmware onto the AVR.
+ *
+ *  Out of the box this bootloader builds for the AT90USB1287 with an 8KB bootloader section size, and will fit
+ *  into 4KB of bootloader space. If you wish to alter this size and/or change the AVR model, you will need to
+ *  edit the MCU, FLASH_SIZE_KB and BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB values in the accompanying makefile.
+ *
+ *  When the bootloader is running, the board's LED(s) will flash at regular intervals to distinguish the
+ *  bootloader from the normal user application.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Running Running the Bootloader
+ *
+ *  This bootloader is designed to be started via the HWB mechanism of the USB AVRs; ground the HWB pin (see device
+ *  datasheet) then momentarily ground /RESET to start the bootloader. This assumes the HWBE fuse is set and the BOOTRST
+ *  fuse is cleared.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Installation Driver Installation
+ *
+ *  This bootloader uses the Generic Text-Only printer drivers inbuilt into all modern operating systems, thus no
+ *  additional drivers need to be supplied for correct operation.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_HostApp Host Controller Application
+ *
+ *  This bootloader is compatible with Notepad under Windows, and the command line \c lpr utility under Linux.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_Notepad Notepad (Windows)
+ *
+ *  While most text applications under Windows will be compatible with the bootloader, the inbuilt Notepad utility
+ *  is recommended as it will introduce minimal formatting changes to the output stream. To program with Notepad,
+ *  open the target HEX file and print it to the Generic Text Only printer device the bootloader creates.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_LPR LPR (Linux)
+ *
+ *  While the CUPS framework under Linux will enumerate the bootloader as a Generic Text-Only printer, many
+ *  applications will refuse to print to the device due to the lack of rich formatting options available. As a result,
+ *  under Linux HEX files must be printed via the low level \c lpr utility instead.
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *  cat Mouse.hex | lpr
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_API User Application API
+ *
+ *  Several user application functions for FLASH and other special memory area manipulations are exposed by the bootloader,
+ *  allowing the user application to call into the bootloader at runtime to read and write FLASH data.
+ *
+ *  By default, the bootloader API jump table is located 32 bytes from the end of the device's FLASH memory, and follows the
+ *  following layout:
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE          32
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START         ((FLASHEND + 1UL) - BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE)
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(Index)         (void*)((BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (Index * 2)) / 2)
+ *
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_ErasePage)(uint32_t Address)               = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(0);
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_WritePage)(uint32_t Address)               = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(1);
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_FillWord)(uint32_t Address, uint16_t Word) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(2);
+ *  uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature)(uint16_t Address)           = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(3);
+ *  uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse)(uint16_t Address)                = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(4);
+ *  uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadLock)(void)                            = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(5);
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_WriteLock)(uint8_t LockBits)               = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(6);
+ *
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE_START   (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 2))
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE         0xDCFB
+ *
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_CLASS_SIGNATURE_START   (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 4))
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_PRINTER_SIGNATURE       0xDF20
+ *
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_START           (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 8))
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_LENGTH          4
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  From the application the API support of the bootloader can be detected by reading the FLASH memory bytes located at address
+ *  \c BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE_START and comparing them to the value \c BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE. The class of bootloader
+ *  can be determined by reading the FLASH memory bytes located at address \c BOOTLOADER_CLASS_SIGNATURE_START and comparing them
+ *  to the value \c BOOTLOADER_PRINTER_SIGNATURE. The start address of the bootloader can be retrieved by reading the bytes of FLASH
+ *  memory starting from address \c BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_START.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_API_MemLayout Device Memory Map
+ *  The following illustration indicates the final memory map of the device when loaded with the bootloader.
+ *
+ *  \verbatim
+ *  +----------------------------+ 0x0000
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |      User Application      |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - BOOT_SECTION_SIZE
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |   Bootloader Application   |
+ *  | (Not User App. Accessible) |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 96
+ *  |   API Table Trampolines    |
+ *  | (Not User App. Accessible) |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 32
+ *  |    Bootloader API Table    |
+ *  |   (User App. Accessible)   |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 8
+ *  |   Bootloader ID Constants  |
+ *  |   (User App. Accessible)   |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND
+ *  \endverbatim
+ *
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_KnownIssues Known Issues:
+ *
+ *  \par On Linux machines, new firmware fails to be sent to the device via CUPS.
+ *  Only a limited subset of normal printer functionality is exposed via the
+ *  bootloader, causing CUPS to reject print requests from applications that
+ *  are unable to handle true plain-text printing. For best results, the low
+ *  level \c lpr command should be used to print new firmware to the bootloader.
+ *
+ *  \par After loading an application, it is not run automatically on startup.
+ *  Some USB AVR boards ship with the BOOTRST fuse set, causing the bootloader
+ *  to run automatically when the device is reset. In most cases, the BOOTRST
+ *  fuse should be disabled and the HWBE fuse used instead to run the bootloader
+ *  when needed.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..af2dd3060
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..187f7733d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,194 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x206B,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED,
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.Printer_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_Printer,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = PRNT_CSCP_PrinterClass,
+			.SubClass               = PRNT_CSCP_PrinterSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = PRNT_CSCP_BidirectionalProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Printer_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = PRINTER_IN_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = PRINTER_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.Printer_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = PRINTER_OUT_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = PRINTER_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Printer Bootloader");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = LanguageString.Header.Size;
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = ManufacturerString.Header.Size;
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = ProductString.Header.Size;
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..144ca0660
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the Printer device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define PRINTER_IN_EPADDR         (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the Printer host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define PRINTER_OUT_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Printer data endpoints. */
+		#define PRINTER_IO_EPSIZE         64
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// Printer Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Printer_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             Printer_DataInEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             Printer_DataOutEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_Printer = 0, /**< Printer interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..86a56911e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,159 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Printer Bootloader - 128KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.printer.avr8.128_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_printer_128kb_4kb_">

+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.printer"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x1F000"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x1F000"/>

+

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x1FFA0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x1FFE0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x1FFF8"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="Printer Bootloader - 64KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.printer.avr8.64_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_printer_64kb_4kb_">

+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.printer"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb647"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0xF000"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0xF000"/>

+

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0xFFA0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0xFFE0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0xFFF8"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="Printer Bootloader - 32KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.printer.avr8.32_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_printer_32kb_4kb_">

+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.printer"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atmega32u4"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x7000"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x7000"/>

+

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x7FA0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x7FE0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x7FF8"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="Printer Bootloader - 16KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.printer.avr8.16_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_printer_16kb_4kb_">

+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.printer"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atmega16u2"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x3000"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x3000"/>

+

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x3FA0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x3FE0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x3FF8"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="Printer Bootloader - 8KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.printer.avr8.8_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_printer_8kb_4kb_">

+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.printer"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atmega8u2"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x1000"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x1000"/>

+

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x1FA0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x1FE0"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x1FF8"/>

+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.bootloaders.printer" caption="Printer Bootloader">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Printer Class Bootloader, capable of reprogramming a device by "printing" new HEX files to the virtual Plain-Text printer it creates when plugged into a host.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Bootloaders"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="include-path" value="."/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="BootloaderPrinter.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="BootloaderPrinter.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="BootloaderAPI.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="BootloaderAPI.h"/>

+		<build type="asm-source" value="BootloaderAPITable.S"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="BootloaderPrinter.txt"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a81be54f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2365 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Printer Class Bootloader"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM \
+                         ATTR_NO_INIT
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0716c3bbe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/Printer/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+#

+#             LUFA Library

+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.

+#

+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

+#           www.lufa-lib.org

+#

+# --------------------------------------

+#         LUFA Project Makefile.

+# --------------------------------------

+

+# Run "make help" for target help.

+

+MCU          = at90usb1287

+ARCH         = AVR8

+BOARD        = USBKEY

+F_CPU        = 8000000

+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)

+OPTIMIZATION = s

+TARGET       = BootloaderPrinter

+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c BootloaderAPI.c BootloaderAPITable.S $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)

+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA

+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START_OFFSET)

+LD_FLAGS     = -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START_OFFSET) $(BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS)

+

+# Flash size and bootloader section sizes of the target, in KB. These must

+# match the target's total FLASH size and the bootloader size set in the

+# device's fuses.

+FLASH_SIZE_KB         = 128

+BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB  = 8

+

+# Bootloader address calculation formulas

+# Do not modify these macros, but rather modify the dependent values above.

+CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX   = $(shell printf "0x%X" $$(( $(1) )) )

+BOOT_START_OFFSET     = $(call CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX, ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) - $(BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB)) * 1024 )

+BOOT_SEC_OFFSET       = $(call CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX, ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) * 1024) - ($(strip $(1))) )

+

+# Bootloader linker section flags for relocating the API table sections to

+# known FLASH addresses - these should not normally be user-edited.

+BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG  = -Wl,--section-start=$(strip $(1))=$(call BOOT_SEC_OFFSET, $(3)) -Wl,--undefined=$(strip $(2))

+BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS     = $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_trampolines, BootloaderAPI_Trampolines, 96)

+BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS    += $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_jumptable,   BootloaderAPI_JumpTable,   32)

+BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS    += $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_signatures,  BootloaderAPI_Signatures,  8)

+

+# Default target

+all:

+

+# Include LUFA build script makefiles

+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk

+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk

+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk

+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk

+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk

+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk

+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..885b17029
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Bootloaders/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+
+# Makefile to build all the LUFA USB Bootloaders. Call with "make all" to
+# rebuild all bootloaders.
+
+# Bootloaders are pre-cleaned before each one is built, to ensure any
+# custom LUFA library build options are reflected in the compiled
+# code.
+
+PROJECT_DIRECTORIES := $(shell ls -d */)
+
+# This makefile is potentially infinitely recursive if something really bad
+# happens when determining the set of project directories - hard-abort if
+# more than 10 levels deep to avoid angry emails.
+ifeq ($(MAKELEVEL), 10)
+   $(error EMERGENCY ABORT: INFINITE RECURSION DETECTED)
+endif
+
+# Need to special-case building without a per-project object directory
+ifeq ($(OBJDIR),)
+   # If no target specified, force "clean all" and disallow parallel build
+   ifeq ($(MAKECMDGOALS),)
+      MAKECMDGOALS := clean all
+      .NOTPARALLEL:
+   endif
+
+   # If one of the targets is to build, force "clean" beforehand and disallow parallel build
+   ifneq ($(findstring all, $(MAKECMDGOALS)),)
+      MAKECMDGOALS := clean $(MAKECMDGOALS)
+      .NOTPARALLEL:
+   endif
+endif
+
+%: $(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES)
+	@echo . > /dev/null
+
+$(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES):
+	@$(MAKE) -C $@ $(MAKECMDGOALS)
+
+.PHONY: $(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES)
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BoardDriverTest/Board/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BoardDriverTest/Board/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2eb2c536a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BoardDriverTest/Board/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Custom Board Hardware Information Driver (Template)
+ *
+ *  This is a stub driver header file, for implementing custom board
+ *  layout hardware with compatible LUFA board specific drivers. If
+ *  the library is configured to use the BOARD_USER board mode, this
+ *  driver file should be completed and copied into the "/Board/" folder
+ *  inside the application's folder.
+ *
+ *  This stub is for the board-specific component of the LUFA Board Hardware
+ *  information driver.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_USER_H__
+#define __BOARD_USER_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		// TODO: Add any required includes here
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has a hardware Buttons mounted if defined. */
+//			#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+
+			/** Indicates the board has a hardware Dataflash mounted if defined. */
+//			#define BOARD_HAS_DATAFLASH
+
+			/** Indicates the board has a hardware Joystick mounted if defined. */
+//			#define BOARD_HAS_JOYSTICK
+
+			/** Indicates the board has a hardware LEDs mounted if defined. */
+//			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BoardDriverTest/Board/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BoardDriverTest/Board/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b14388527
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BoardDriverTest/Board/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Custom Board Button Hardware Driver (Template)
+ *
+ *  This is a stub driver header file, for implementing custom board
+ *  layout hardware with compatible LUFA board specific drivers. If
+ *  the library is configured to use the BOARD_USER board mode, this
+ *  driver file should be completed and copied into the "/Board/" folder
+ *  inside the application's folder.
+ *
+ *  This stub is for the board-specific component of the LUFA Buttons driver,
+ *  for the control of physical board-mounted GPIO pushbuttons.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_USER_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_USER_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		// TODO: Add any required includes here
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+		#define BOARD_DUMMY_BUTTONS_IMPLEMENTATION
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1          (1 << 0)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return 0;
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BoardDriverTest/Board/Dataflash.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BoardDriverTest/Board/Dataflash.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f32e398ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BoardDriverTest/Board/Dataflash.h
@@ -0,0 +1,197 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Custom Board Dataflash Hardware Driver (Template)
+ *
+ *  This is a stub driver header file, for implementing custom board
+ *  layout hardware with compatible LUFA board specific drivers. If
+ *  the library is configured to use the BOARD_USER board mode, this
+ *  driver file should be completed and copied into the "/Board/" folder
+ *  inside the application's folder.
+ *
+ *  This stub is for the board-specific component of the LUFA Dataflash
+ *  driver.
+*/
+
+#ifndef __DATAFLASH_USER_H__
+#define __DATAFLASH_USER_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		// TODO: Add any required includes here
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+		#define BOARD_DUMMY_DATAFLASH_IMPLEMENTATION
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK                0
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR                 0
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT                0
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS                 1
+
+			/** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP                    0
+
+			/** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP1                      0
+
+			/** Mask for the second dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP2                      0
+
+			/** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash ICs. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE                  0
+
+			/** Total number of pages inside each of the board's dataflash ICs. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                      0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Initializes the dataflash driver so that commands and data may be sent to an attached dataflash IC.
+			 *  The microcontroller's SPI driver MUST be initialized before any of the dataflash commands are used.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_Init(void)
+			{
+
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns a byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash
+			 *
+			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+				return 0;
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and ignores the next byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a dummy byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns the next byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void)
+			{
+				return 0;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines the currently selected dataflash chip.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Mask of the currently selected Dataflash chip, either \ref DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP if no chip is selected
+			 *          or a DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is the chip number).
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void)
+			{
+				return 0;
+			}
+
+			/** Selects the given dataflash chip.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in]  ChipMask  Mask of the Dataflash IC to select, in the form of a \c DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is
+			 *              the chip number).
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask)
+			{
+
+			}
+
+			/** Deselects the current dataflash chip, so that no dataflash is selected. */
+			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void)
+			{
+
+			}
+
+			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to
+			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one
+			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside
+			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs
+			 *  are deselected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from
+			 *                          0 to ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress)
+			{
+
+			}
+
+			/** Toggles the select line of the currently selected dataflash IC, so that it is ready to receive
+			 *  a new command.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(void)
+			{
+
+			}
+
+			/** Spin-loops while the currently selected dataflash is busy executing a command, such as a main
+			 *  memory page program or main memory to buffer transfer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(void)
+			{
+
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with
+			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-bit address.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC
+			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress, const uint16_t BufferByte)
+			{
+
+			}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BoardDriverTest/Board/Joystick.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BoardDriverTest/Board/Joystick.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4aa45ab67
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BoardDriverTest/Board/Joystick.h
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Custom Board Joystick Hardware Driver (Template)
+ *
+ *  This is a stub driver header file, for implementing custom board
+ *  layout hardware with compatible LUFA board specific drivers. If
+ *  the library is configured to use the BOARD_USER board mode, this
+ *  driver file should be completed and copied into the "/Board/" folder
+ *  inside the application's folder.
+ *
+ *  This stub is for the board-specific component of the LUFA Joystick
+ *  driver, for a digital four-way (plus button) joystick.
+*/
+
+#ifndef __JOYSTICK_USER_H__
+#define __JOYSTICK_USER_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		// TODO: Add any required includes here
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+		#define BOARD_DUMMY_JOYSTICK_IMPLEMENTATION
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */
+			#define JOY_LEFT                  0
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */
+			#define JOY_RIGHT                 0
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */
+			#define JOY_UP                    0
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */
+			#define JOY_DOWN                  0
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */
+			#define JOY_PRESS                 0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Joystick_Init(void)
+			{
+
+			}
+
+			static inline void Joystick_Disable(void)
+			{
+
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return 0;
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BoardDriverTest/Board/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BoardDriverTest/Board/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a146e99c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BoardDriverTest/Board/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Custom Board LED Hardware Driver (Template)
+ *
+ *  This is a stub driver header file, for implementing custom board
+ *  layout hardware with compatible LUFA board specific drivers. If
+ *  the library is configured to use the BOARD_USER board mode, this
+ *  driver file should be completed and copied into the "/Board/" folder
+ *  inside the application's folder.
+ *
+ *  This stub is for the board-specific component of the LUFA LEDs driver,
+ *  for the LEDs (up to four) mounted on most development boards.
+*/
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_USER_H__
+#define __LEDS_USER_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		// TODO: Add any required includes here
+
+/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+		#define BOARD_DUMMY_LEDS_IMPLEMENTATION
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 0)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 1)
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 2)
+
+			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED4        (1 << 3)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return 0;
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BoardDriverTest/BoardDeviceMap.cfg b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BoardDriverTest/BoardDeviceMap.cfg
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3fee2f1e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BoardDriverTest/BoardDeviceMap.cfg
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+#
+# =============================================================================
+# Board configuration map script, processed with the "BoardDriverTest"
+# makefile. This script file maps the possible LUFA target BOARD makefile
+# values in user projects to a specific architecture and device. This mapping is
+# then used by the makefile to build all possible drivers for that board, to
+# detect any missing or erroneous functions. To add a new board mapping, use
+# the syntax:
+#
+#    BOARD DEFINE = {ARCH} : {MCU} :
+#
+# And re-run the makefile. Note that each board may have only one target.
+# =============================================================================
+#
+#
+# ----------------- AVR8 Boards ------------------
+BOARD_ADAFRUITU4        = AVR8  : atmega32u4     :
+BOARD_ATAVRUSBRF01      = AVR8  : at90usb1287    :
+BOARD_BENITO            = AVR8  : at90usb162     :
+BOARD_BIGMULTIO         = AVR8  : atmega32u4     :
+BOARD_BLACKCAT          = AVR8  : at90usb162     :
+BOARD_BUI               = AVR8  : at90usb646     :
+BOARD_BUMBLEB           = AVR8  : at90usb162     :
+BOARD_CULV3             = AVR8  : atmega32u4     :
+BOARD_DUCE              = AVR8  : atmega32u2     :
+BOARD_EVK527            = AVR8  : atmega32u4     :
+BOARD_JMDBU2            = AVR8  : atmega32u2     :
+BOARD_LEONARDO          = AVR8  : atmega32u4     :
+BOARD_MAXIMUS           = AVR8  : at90usb162     :
+BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 = AVR8  : atmega32u2     :
+BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_A    = AVR8  : at90usb1287    :
+BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_1    = AVR8  : at90usb162     :
+BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_2    = AVR8  : atmega32u4     :
+BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_3    = AVR8  : at90usb1287    :
+BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_4    = AVR8  : at90usb1287    :
+BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_DIP  = AVR8  : at90usb1287    :
+BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_REV1 = AVR8  : at90usb1287    :
+BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_REV2 = AVR8  : at90usb1287    :
+BOARD_MICROSIN162       = AVR8  : atmega162      :
+BOARD_MINIMUS           = AVR8  : atmega32u2     :
+BOARD_MULTIO            = AVR8  : at90usb162     :
+BOARD_NONE              = AVR8  : at90usb1287    :
+BOARD_OLIMEX162         = AVR8  : at90usb162     :
+BOARD_OLIMEX32U4        = AVR8  : atmega32u4     :
+BOARD_OLIMEXT32U4       = AVR8  : atmega32u4     :
+BOARD_OLIMEXISPMK2      = AVR8  : at90usb162     :
+BOARD_RZUSBSTICK        = AVR8  : at90usb1287    :
+BOARD_SPARKFUN8U2       = AVR8  : atmega8u2      :
+BOARD_STK525            = AVR8  : at90usb647     :
+BOARD_STK526            = AVR8  : at90usb162     :
+BOARD_TEENSY            = AVR8  : at90usb162     :
+BOARD_TEENSY2           = AVR8  : at90usb646     :
+BOARD_TUL               = AVR8  : atmega32u4     :
+BOARD_UDIP              = AVR8  : atmega32u2     :
+BOARD_UNO               = AVR8  : atmega8u2      :
+BOARD_USB2AX            = AVR8  : atmega32u2     :
+BOARD_USB2AX_V3         = AVR8  : atmega32u2     :
+BOARD_USB2AX_V31        = AVR8  : atmega32u2     :
+BOARD_USBFOO            = AVR8  : atmega162      :
+BOARD_USBKEY            = AVR8  : at90usb1287    :
+BOARD_USBTINYMKII       = AVR8  : at90usb162     :
+BOARD_USER              = AVR8  : at90usb1287    :
+BOARD_XPLAIN            = AVR8  : at90usb1287    :
+BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1       = AVR8  : at90usb1287    :
+BOARD_STANGE_ISP        = AVR8  : at90usb162     :
+BOARD_U2S               = AVR8  : atmega32u2     :
+BOARD_YUN               = AVR8  : atmega32u4     :
+BOARD_MICRO             = AVR8  : atmega32u4     :
+#
+# ----------------- XMEGA Boards -----------------
+BOARD_A3BU_XPLAINED     = XMEGA : atxmega256a3bu :
+BOARD_B1_XPLAINED       = XMEGA : atxmega128b1   :
+BOARD_C3_XPLAINED       = XMEGA : atxmega384c3   :
+#
+# ------------------ UC3 Boards ------------------
+BOARD_EVK1100           = UC3   : uc3a0512       :
+BOARD_EVK1101           = UC3   : uc3b0256       :
+BOARD_EVK1104           = UC3   : uc3a3256       :
+BOARD_UC3A3_XPLAINED    = UC3   : uc3a3256       :
+#
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BoardDriverTest/Test.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BoardDriverTest/Test.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0105886b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BoardDriverTest/Test.c
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h>
+#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
+#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+
+#if defined(BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS) == defined(BOARD_DUMMY_BUTTONS_IMPLEMENTATION)
+	#error Mismatch between BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS and implementation.
+#endif
+
+#if defined(BOARD_HAS_DATAFLASH) == defined(BOARD_DUMMY_DATAFLASH_IMPLEMENTATION)
+	#error Mismatch between BOARD_HAS_DATAFLASH and implementation.
+#endif
+
+#if defined(BOARD_HAS_LEDS) == defined(BOARD_DUMMY_LEDS_IMPLEMENTATION)
+	#error Mismatch between BOARD_HAS_LEDS and implementation.
+#endif
+
+#if defined(BOARD_HAS_JOYSTICK) == defined(BOARD_DUMMY_JOYSTICK_IMPLEMENTATION)
+	#error Mismatch between BOARD_HAS_JOYSTICK and implementation.
+#endif
+
+int main(void)
+{
+	uint_reg_t Dummy;
+
+	/* =============================
+	 *     Buttons Compile Check
+	 * ============================= */
+	// cppcheck-suppress redundantAssignment
+	Dummy = BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+	Buttons_Init();
+	// cppcheck-suppress redundantAssignment
+	Dummy = Buttons_GetStatus();
+	Buttons_Disable();
+
+	/* =============================
+	 *    Dataflash Compile Check
+	 * ============================= */
+	// cppcheck-suppress redundantAssignment
+	Dummy = DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS + DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP + DATAFLASH_CHIP1 + DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE + DATAFLASH_PAGES;
+	Dataflash_Init();
+	Dataflash_TransferByte(0);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0);
+	// cppcheck-suppress redundantAssignment
+	Dummy = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	// cppcheck-suppress redundantAssignment
+	Dummy = Dataflash_GetSelectedChip();
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(0);
+	Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
+
+	/* =============================
+	 *       LEDs Compile Check
+	 * ============================= */
+	// cppcheck-suppress redundantAssignment
+	Dummy = LEDS_LED1 + LEDS_LED2 + LEDS_LED3 + LEDS_LED4;
+	LEDs_Init();
+	LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+	LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+	LEDs_ChangeLEDs(LEDS_ALL_LEDS, LEDS_NO_LEDS);
+	LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+	// cppcheck-suppress redundantAssignment
+	Dummy = LEDs_GetLEDs();
+	LEDs_Disable();
+
+	/* =============================
+	 *     Joystick Compile Check
+	 * ============================= */
+	// cppcheck-suppress redundantAssignment
+	Dummy = JOY_LEFT + JOY_RIGHT + JOY_UP + JOY_DOWN + JOY_PRESS;
+	Joystick_Init();
+	// cppcheck-suppress redundantAssignment
+	Dummy = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	Joystick_Disable();
+
+	(void)Dummy;
+}
+
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BoardDriverTest/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BoardDriverTest/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cfd9da798
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BoardDriverTest/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+
+# Makefile for the board driver build test. This
+# test attempts to build a dummy project with all
+# possible board targets using their respective
+# compiler.
+
+# Path to the LUFA library core
+LUFA_PATH := ../../LUFA/
+
+# Build test cannot be run with multiple parallel jobs
+.NOTPARALLEL:
+
+all: begin makeboardlist testboards clean end
+
+begin:
+	@echo Executing build test "BoardDriverTest".
+	@echo
+
+end:
+	@echo Build test "BoardDriverTest" complete.
+	@echo
+
+makeboardlist:
+	@grep "BOARD_" $(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_PATH))/Common/BoardTypes.h | cut -d'#' -f2 | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep "BOARD_" > BoardList.txt
+
+testboards:
+	@echo "buildtest:" > BuildMakefile
+
+	@while read line;                                                                               \
+	 do                                                                                             \
+	   build_cfg=`grep "$$line " BoardDeviceMap.cfg | grep -v "#" | cut -d'=' -f2- | sed 's/ //g'`; \
+	                                                                                                \
+	   build_board=$$line;                                                                          \
+	   build_arch=`echo $$build_cfg | cut -d':' -f1`;                                               \
+	   build_mcu=`echo $$build_cfg | cut -d':' -f2`;                                                \
+	                                                                                                \
+	   if ( test -z "$$build_cfg" ); then                                                           \
+	     echo "No matching information set for board $$build_board";                                \
+	   else                                                                                         \
+	     echo "Found board configuration for $$build_board - $$build_arch, $$build_mcu";            \
+		                                                                                            \
+		 printf "\t@echo Building dummy project for $$build_board...\n" >> BuildMakefile;           \
+		 printf "\t$(MAKE) -f makefile.test clean elf MCU=%s ARCH=%s BOARD=%s\n\n" $$build_mcu $$build_arch $$build_board >> BuildMakefile; \
+	   fi;                                                                                          \
+	 done < BoardList.txt
+
+	 $(MAKE) -f BuildMakefile buildtest
+
+clean:
+	rm -f BuildMakefile
+	rm -f BoardList.txt
+	$(MAKE) -f makefile.test clean BOARD=NONE ARCH=AVR8 MCU=at90usb1287
+	$(MAKE) -f makefile.test clean BOARD=NONE ARCH=XMEGA MCU=atxmega128a1u
+	$(MAKE) -f makefile.test clean BOARD=NONE ARCH=UC3 MCU=uc3a0256
+
+%:
+
+.PHONY: all begin end makeboardlist testboards clean
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BoardDriverTest/makefile.test b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BoardDriverTest/makefile.test
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7391b514a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BoardDriverTest/makefile.test
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          =
+ARCH         =
+BOARD        =
+F_CPU        = $(F_USB)
+F_USB        = 8000000
+OPTIMIZATION = 1
+TARGET       = Test
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -Werror
+DEBUG_LEVEL  = 0
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BootloaderTest/BootloaderDeviceMap.cfg b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BootloaderTest/BootloaderDeviceMap.cfg
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9e15c8cf4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BootloaderTest/BootloaderDeviceMap.cfg
@@ -0,0 +1,167 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+#
+# =============================================================================
+# Bootloader configuration map script, processed with the "BootloaderTest"
+# makefile. This script file defines the targets for each LUFA bootloader,
+# which are then built as part of the build test to ensure that there are no
+# failures on all standard configurations. To add a new build target for a
+# bootloader to this script, use the format:
+#
+#    BOOTLOADER = {ARCH} : {MCU} : {BOARD} : {FLASH SIZE KB} : {BOOT SIZE KB} : {F_USB MHZ}
+#
+# And re-run the makefile.
+# =============================================================================
+#
+#
+# ------------ CDC Bootloader --------------------
+CDC         = AVR8 : at90usb1287 : XPLAIN   : 128 : 8 :  8 :
+CDC         = AVR8 : at90usb1287 : NONE     : 128 : 8 :  8 :
+CDC         = AVR8 : at90usb1287 : NONE     : 128 : 4 :  8 :
+CDC         = AVR8 : at90usb647  : NONE     :  64 : 4 :  8 :
+CDC         = AVR8 : at90usb1286 : NONE     : 128 : 8 :  8 :
+CDC         = AVR8 : at90usb1286 : NONE     : 128 : 4 :  8 :
+CDC         = AVR8 : at90usb646  : NONE     :  64 : 4 :  8 :
+CDC         = AVR8 : atmega32u4  : NONE     :  32 : 4 :  8 :
+CDC         = AVR8 : atmega16u4  : NONE     :  16 : 4 :  8 :
+CDC         = AVR8 : atmega32u2  : NONE     :  32 : 4 :  8 :
+CDC         = AVR8 : atmega16u2  : NONE     :  16 : 4 :  8 :
+CDC         = AVR8 : atmega8u2   : NONE     :   8 : 4 :  8 :
+CDC         = AVR8 : at90usb162  : NONE     :  16 : 4 :  8 :
+CDC         = AVR8 : at90usb82   : NONE     :   8 : 4 :  8 :
+CDC         = AVR8 : at90usb1287 : NONE     : 128 : 8 : 16 :
+CDC         = AVR8 : at90usb1287 : NONE     : 128 : 4 : 16 :
+CDC         = AVR8 : at90usb647  : NONE     :  64 : 4 : 16 :
+CDC         = AVR8 : at90usb1286 : NONE     : 128 : 8 : 16 :
+CDC         = AVR8 : at90usb1286 : NONE     : 128 : 4 : 16 :
+CDC         = AVR8 : at90usb646  : NONE     :  64 : 4 : 16 :
+CDC         = AVR8 : atmega32u4  : NONE     :  32 : 4 : 16 :
+CDC         = AVR8 : atmega16u4  : NONE     :  16 : 4 : 16 :
+CDC         = AVR8 : atmega32u2  : NONE     :  32 : 4 : 16 :
+CDC         = AVR8 : atmega16u2  : NONE     :  16 : 4 : 16 :
+CDC         = AVR8 : atmega8u2   : NONE     :   8 : 4 : 16 :
+CDC         = AVR8 : at90usb162  : NONE     :  16 : 4 : 16 :
+CDC         = AVR8 : at90usb82   : NONE     :   8 : 4 : 16 :
+#
+# ------------ DFU Bootloader --------------------
+DFU         = AVR8 : at90usb1287 : XPLAIN   : 128 : 8 :  8 :
+DFU         = AVR8 : at90usb1287 : NONE     : 128 : 8 :  8 :
+DFU         = AVR8 : at90usb1287 : NONE     : 128 : 4 :  8 :
+DFU         = AVR8 : at90usb647  : NONE     :  64 : 4 :  8 :
+DFU         = AVR8 : at90usb1286 : NONE     : 128 : 8 :  8 :
+DFU         = AVR8 : at90usb1286 : NONE     : 128 : 4 :  8 :
+DFU         = AVR8 : at90usb646  : NONE     :  64 : 4 :  8 :
+DFU         = AVR8 : atmega32u4  : NONE     :  32 : 4 :  8 :
+DFU         = AVR8 : atmega16u4  : NONE     :  16 : 4 :  8 :
+DFU         = AVR8 : atmega32u2  : NONE     :  32 : 4 :  8 :
+DFU         = AVR8 : atmega16u2  : NONE     :  16 : 4 :  8 :
+DFU         = AVR8 : atmega8u2   : NONE     :   8 : 4 :  8 :
+DFU         = AVR8 : at90usb162  : NONE     :  16 : 4 :  8 :
+DFU         = AVR8 : at90usb82   : NONE     :   8 : 4 :  8 :
+DFU         = AVR8 : at90usb1287 : NONE     : 128 : 8 : 16 :
+DFU         = AVR8 : at90usb1287 : NONE     : 128 : 4 : 16 :
+DFU         = AVR8 : at90usb647  : NONE     :  64 : 4 : 16 :
+DFU         = AVR8 : at90usb1286 : NONE     : 128 : 8 : 16 :
+DFU         = AVR8 : at90usb1286 : NONE     : 128 : 4 : 16 :
+DFU         = AVR8 : at90usb646  : NONE     :  64 : 4 : 16 :
+DFU         = AVR8 : atmega32u4  : NONE     :  32 : 4 : 16 :
+DFU         = AVR8 : atmega16u4  : NONE     :  16 : 4 : 16 :
+DFU         = AVR8 : atmega32u2  : NONE     :  32 : 4 : 16 :
+DFU         = AVR8 : atmega16u2  : NONE     :  16 : 4 : 16 :
+DFU         = AVR8 : atmega8u2   : NONE     :   8 : 4 : 16 :
+DFU         = AVR8 : at90usb162  : NONE     :  16 : 4 : 16 :
+DFU         = AVR8 : at90usb82   : NONE     :   8 : 4 : 16 :
+#
+# ------------ HID Bootloader --------------------
+HID         = AVR8 : at90usb1287 : NONE     : 128 : 8 :  8 :
+HID         = AVR8 : at90usb1287 : NONE     : 128 : 4 :  8 :
+HID         = AVR8 : at90usb647  : NONE     :  64 : 4 :  8 :
+HID         = AVR8 : at90usb1286 : NONE     : 128 : 8 :  8 :
+HID         = AVR8 : at90usb1286 : NONE     : 128 : 4 :  8 :
+HID         = AVR8 : at90usb646  : NONE     :  64 : 4 :  8 :
+HID         = AVR8 : atmega32u4  : NONE     :  32 : 4 :  8 :
+HID         = AVR8 : atmega16u4  : NONE     :  16 : 4 :  8 :
+HID         = AVR8 : atmega32u2  : NONE     :  32 : 2 :  8 :
+HID         = AVR8 : atmega32u2  : NONE     :  32 : 4 :  8 :
+HID         = AVR8 : atmega16u2  : NONE     :  16 : 2 :  8 :
+HID         = AVR8 : atmega16u2  : NONE     :  16 : 4 :  8 :
+HID         = AVR8 : atmega8u2   : NONE     :   8 : 2 :  8 :
+HID         = AVR8 : atmega8u2   : NONE     :   8 : 4 :  8 :
+HID         = AVR8 : at90usb162  : NONE     :  16 : 2 :  8 :
+HID         = AVR8 : at90usb162  : NONE     :  16 : 4 :  8 :
+HID         = AVR8 : at90usb162  : NONE     :  16 : 2 :  8 :
+HID         = AVR8 : at90usb162  : NONE     :  16 : 4 :  8 :
+HID         = AVR8 : at90usb1287 : NONE     : 128 : 8 :  8 :
+HID         = AVR8 : at90usb1287 : NONE     : 128 : 4 :  8 :
+HID         = AVR8 : at90usb647  : NONE     :  64 : 4 :  8 :
+HID         = AVR8 : at90usb1286 : NONE     : 128 : 8 : 16 :
+HID         = AVR8 : at90usb1286 : NONE     : 128 : 4 : 16 :
+HID         = AVR8 : at90usb646  : NONE     :  64 : 4 : 16 :
+HID         = AVR8 : atmega32u4  : NONE     :  32 : 4 : 16 :
+HID         = AVR8 : atmega16u4  : NONE     :  16 : 4 : 16 :
+HID         = AVR8 : atmega32u2  : NONE     :  32 : 2 : 16 :
+HID         = AVR8 : atmega32u2  : NONE     :  32 : 4 : 16 :
+HID         = AVR8 : atmega16u2  : NONE     :  16 : 2 : 16 :
+HID         = AVR8 : atmega16u2  : NONE     :  16 : 4 : 16 :
+HID         = AVR8 : atmega8u2   : NONE     :   8 : 2 : 16 :
+HID         = AVR8 : atmega8u2   : NONE     :   8 : 4 : 16 :
+HID         = AVR8 : at90usb162  : NONE     :  16 : 2 : 16 :
+HID         = AVR8 : at90usb162  : NONE     :  16 : 4 : 16 :
+HID         = AVR8 : at90usb162  : NONE     :  16 : 2 : 16 :
+HID         = AVR8 : at90usb162  : NONE     :  16 : 4 : 16 :
+#
+# ---------- Printer Bootloader ------------------
+Printer     = AVR8 : at90usb1287 : NONE     : 128 : 8 :  8 :
+Printer     = AVR8 : at90usb1287 : NONE     : 128 : 4 :  8 :
+Printer     = AVR8 : at90usb647  : NONE     :  64 : 4 :  8 :
+Printer     = AVR8 : at90usb1286 : NONE     : 128 : 8 :  8 :
+Printer     = AVR8 : at90usb1286 : NONE     : 128 : 4 :  8 :
+Printer     = AVR8 : at90usb646  : NONE     :  64 : 4 :  8 :
+Printer     = AVR8 : atmega32u4  : NONE     :  32 : 4 :  8 :
+Printer     = AVR8 : atmega16u4  : NONE     :  16 : 4 :  8 :
+Printer     = AVR8 : atmega32u2  : NONE     :  32 : 4 :  8 :
+Printer     = AVR8 : atmega16u2  : NONE     :  16 : 4 :  8 :
+Printer     = AVR8 : atmega8u2   : NONE     :   8 : 4 :  8 :
+Printer     = AVR8 : at90usb162  : NONE     :  16 : 4 :  8 :
+Printer     = AVR8 : at90usb82   : NONE     :   8 : 4 :  8 :
+Printer     = AVR8 : at90usb1287 : NONE     : 128 : 8 : 16 :
+Printer     = AVR8 : at90usb1287 : NONE     : 128 : 4 : 16 :
+Printer     = AVR8 : at90usb647  : NONE     :  64 : 4 : 16 :
+Printer     = AVR8 : at90usb1286 : NONE     : 128 : 8 : 16 :
+Printer     = AVR8 : at90usb1286 : NONE     : 128 : 4 : 16 :
+Printer     = AVR8 : at90usb646  : NONE     :  64 : 4 : 16 :
+Printer     = AVR8 : atmega32u4  : NONE     :  32 : 4 : 16 :
+Printer     = AVR8 : atmega16u4  : NONE     :  16 : 4 : 16 :
+Printer     = AVR8 : atmega32u2  : NONE     :  32 : 4 : 16 :
+Printer     = AVR8 : atmega16u2  : NONE     :  16 : 4 : 16 :
+Printer     = AVR8 : atmega8u2   : NONE     :   8 : 4 : 16 :
+Printer     = AVR8 : at90usb162  : NONE     :  16 : 4 : 16 :
+Printer     = AVR8 : at90usb82   : NONE     :   8 : 4 : 16 :
+#
+# ---------- Mass Storage Bootloader -----------------
+MassStorage = AVR8 : at90usb1287 : XPLAIN   : 128 : 8 :  8 :
+MassStorage = AVR8 : at90usb1287 : NONE     : 128 : 8 :  8 :
+MassStorage = AVR8 : at90usb1287 : NONE     : 128 : 4 :  8 :
+MassStorage = AVR8 : at90usb647  : NONE     :  64 : 4 :  8 :
+MassStorage = AVR8 : at90usb1286 : NONE     : 128 : 8 :  8 :
+MassStorage = AVR8 : at90usb1286 : NONE     : 128 : 4 :  8 :
+MassStorage = AVR8 : at90usb646  : NONE     :  64 : 4 :  8 :
+MassStorage = AVR8 : atmega32u4  : LEONARDO :  32 : 4 : 16 :
+MassStorage = AVR8 : atmega32u4  : NONE     :  32 : 4 :  8 :
+MassStorage = AVR8 : atmega16u4  : NONE     :  16 : 4 :  8 :
+MassStorage = AVR8 : atmega32u2  : NONE     :  32 : 4 :  8 :
+MassStorage = AVR8 : at90usb1287 : NONE     : 128 : 8 : 16 :
+MassStorage = AVR8 : at90usb1287 : NONE     : 128 : 4 : 16 :
+MassStorage = AVR8 : at90usb647  : NONE     :  64 : 4 : 16 :
+MassStorage = AVR8 : at90usb1286 : NONE     : 128 : 8 : 16 :
+MassStorage = AVR8 : at90usb1286 : NONE     : 128 : 4 : 16 :
+MassStorage = AVR8 : at90usb646  : NONE     :  64 : 4 : 16 :
+MassStorage = AVR8 : atmega32u4  : NONE     :  32 : 4 : 16 :
+MassStorage = AVR8 : atmega16u4  : NONE     :  16 : 4 : 16 :
+MassStorage = AVR8 : atmega32u2  : NONE     :  32 : 4 : 16 :
+#
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BootloaderTest/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BootloaderTest/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..52ebb9cdb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/BootloaderTest/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+
+# Makefile for the bootloader build test. This
+# test attempts to build all the bootloaders
+# with all supported device configurations.
+
+# Path to the LUFA library core
+LUFA_PATH := ../../LUFA/
+
+# Build test cannot be run with multiple parallel jobs
+.NOTPARALLEL:
+
+all: begin testbootloaders clean end
+
+begin:
+	@echo Executing build test "BootloaderTest".
+	@echo
+
+end:
+	@echo Build test "BootloaderTest" complete.
+	@echo
+
+testbootloaders:
+	@echo "buildtest:" > BuildMakefile
+
+	@while read line;                                         \
+	 do                                                       \
+	   build_cfg=`echo $$line | grep -v "#" | sed 's/ //g'`;  \
+	                                                          \
+	   if ( test -n "$$build_cfg" ); then                     \
+	     build_bootloader=`echo $$build_cfg | cut -d'=' -f1`; \
+		 build_cfg=`echo $$build_cfg | cut -d'=' -f2-`;       \
+		                                                      \
+	     build_arch=`echo $$build_cfg | cut -d':' -f1`;       \
+	     build_mcu=`echo $$build_cfg | cut -d':' -f2`;        \
+	     build_board=`echo $$build_cfg | cut -d':' -f3`;      \
+	     build_flashsize=`echo $$build_cfg | cut -d':' -f4`;  \
+	     build_bootsize=`echo $$build_cfg | cut -d':' -f5`;   \
+	     build_fusb=`echo $$build_cfg | cut -d':' -f6`;       \
+	                                                          \
+	     printf "Found '%s' bootloader configuration (FLASH: %3s KB | BOOT: %3s KB | MCU: %12s / %4s | BOARD: %s | F_USB: %sMHz)\n" $$build_bootloader $$build_flashsize $$build_bootsize $$build_mcu $$build_arch $$build_board $$build_fusb; \
+	                                                          \
+	     printf "\t@echo Building bootloader %s - %s - FLASH: %s KB, BOOT: %s KB, BOARD: %s, F_USB: %sMHz\n" $$build_bootloader $$build_mcu $$build_flashsize $$build_bootsize $$build_board $$build_fusb >> BuildMakefile; \
+	     printf "\t$(MAKE) -C $(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_PATH))/../Bootloaders/%s/ clean elf ARCH=%s MCU=%s BOARD=%s FLASH_SIZE_KB=%s BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB=%s F_USB=%s000000 DEBUG_LEVEL=0\n\n" $$build_bootloader $$build_arch $$build_mcu $$build_board $$build_flashsize $$build_bootsize $$build_fusb >> BuildMakefile; \
+	   fi;                                                    \
+	 done < BootloaderDeviceMap.cfg
+
+	 $(MAKE) -f BuildMakefile buildtest
+
+clean:
+	rm -f BuildMakefile
+
+%:
+
+.PHONY: all begin end testbootloaders clean
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/ModuleTest/Dummy.S b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/ModuleTest/Dummy.S
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..dcfe98186
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/ModuleTest/Dummy.S
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+.section .text
+
+
+# Mandatory entry point for successful compilation and link
+.global main
+main:
+
+
+# Mandatory callback needed for base compile of the USB driver
+.global CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor
+CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor:
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/ModuleTest/Modules.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/ModuleTest/Modules.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cc16fd6b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/ModuleTest/Modules.h
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+
+#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/RingBuffer.h>
+#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	#if defined(ADC)
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h>
+	#endif
+
+	#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+	#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialSPI.h>
+	#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h>
+
+	#if defined(TWCR)
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h>
+	#endif
+#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+	#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+	#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialSPI.h>
+	#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h>
+	#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h>
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/ModuleTest/Test_C.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/ModuleTest/Test_C.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..349ac6eec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/ModuleTest/Test_C.c
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "Modules.h"
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/ModuleTest/Test_CPP.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/ModuleTest/Test_CPP.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..349ac6eec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/ModuleTest/Test_CPP.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "Modules.h"
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/ModuleTest/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/ModuleTest/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2cd33cf87
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/ModuleTest/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+
+# Makefile for the module build test. This test
+# attempts to build as many modules as possible
+# under all supported architectures, and include
+# all module headers in a simple C and C++
+# application.
+
+# Path to the LUFA library core
+LUFA_PATH := ../../LUFA/
+
+# Build test cannot be run with multiple parallel jobs
+.NOTPARALLEL:
+
+# List of device families per architecture, one device per architecture sub-family
+AVR8_FAMILIES   := at90usb1287 at90usb1286 atmega16u4 atmega16u2 at90usb162
+XMEGA_FAMILIES  := atxmega128a1u atxmega128a3u atxmega256a3bu atxmega128a4u atxmega128b1 atxmega128b3 atxmega128c3 atxmega32c4
+UC3_FAMILIES    := uc3a0256 uc3a1256 uc3a3256 uc3a4256 uc3b0256 uc3b1256
+
+# List of all device families, with a family postfix
+DEVICE_FAMILIES := $(AVR8_FAMILIES:%=%.avr8) $(XMEGA_FAMILIES:%=%.xmega) $(UC3_FAMILIES:%=%.uc3)
+
+
+all: begin $(DEVICE_FAMILIES) clean end
+
+arch_avr8:  begin $(AVR8_FAMILIES:%=%.avr8) end
+arch_xmega: begin $(XMEGA_FAMILIES:%=%.xmega) end
+arch_uc3:   begin $(UC3_FAMILIES:%=%.uc3) end
+
+begin:
+	@echo Executing build test "ModuleTest".
+	@echo
+
+end:
+	@echo Build test "ModuleTest" complete.
+	@echo
+
+%.avr8:
+	@echo Building ModuleTest for ARCH=AVR8 MCU=$(@:%.avr8=%)...
+	$(MAKE) -f makefile.test clean elf ARCH=AVR8 MCU=$(@:%.avr8=%)
+
+%.xmega:
+	@echo Building ModuleTest for ARCH=XMEGA MCU=$(@:%.xmega=%)...
+	$(MAKE) -f makefile.test clean elf ARCH=XMEGA MCU=$(@:%.xmega=%)
+
+%.uc3:
+	@echo Building ModuleTest for ARCH=UC3 MCU=$(@:%.uc3=%)...
+	$(MAKE) -f makefile.test clean elf ARCH=UC3 MCU=$(@:%.uc3=%)
+
+clean:
+	$(MAKE) -f makefile.test clean ARCH=AVR8 MCU=$(firstword $(AVR8_FAMILIES))
+	$(MAKE) -f makefile.test clean ARCH=XMEGA MCU=$(firstword $(XMEGA_FAMILIES))
+	$(MAKE) -f makefile.test clean ARCH=UC3 MCU=$(firstword $(UC3_FAMILIES))
+
+%:
+
+.PHONY: all arch_avr8 arch_xmega arch_uc3 begin end
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/ModuleTest/makefile.test b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/ModuleTest/makefile.test
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1307d5e37
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/ModuleTest/makefile.test
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          =
+ARCH         =
+BOARD        = NONE
+F_CPU        = $(F_USB)
+OPTIMIZATION = 1
+TARGET       = Test
+SRC          = $(TARGET)_C.c $(TARGET)_CPP.cpp Dummy.S $(LUFA_SRC_USB)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+DEBUG_LEVEL  = 0
+
+ifeq ($(ARCH), AVR8)
+  F_USB        = 8000000
+else ifeq ($(ARCH), XMEGA)
+  F_USB        = 48000000
+else ifeq ($(ARCH), UC3)
+  F_USB        = 48000000
+endif
+
+# Generic C/C++ compiler flags
+CC_FLAGS  = -Wextra
+CC_FLAGS += -Werror
+CC_FLAGS += -Wformat=2
+CC_FLAGS += -Winit-self
+CC_FLAGS += -Wswitch-enum
+CC_FLAGS += -Wunused
+CC_FLAGS += -Wundef
+CC_FLAGS += -Wpointer-arith
+CC_FLAGS += -Wcast-align
+CC_FLAGS += -Wwrite-strings
+CC_FLAGS += -Wlogical-op
+CC_FLAGS += -Wmissing-declarations
+CC_FLAGS += -Wmissing-field-initializers
+CC_FLAGS += -Wmissing-format-attribute
+CC_FLAGS += -Woverlength-strings
+CC_FLAGS += -Wswitch-default
+CC_FLAGS += -Wfloat-equal
+CC_FLAGS += -Waggregate-return
+CC_FLAGS += -Wmissing-include-dirs
+
+# Disable warnings not supported by the version of GCC used for UC3 targets (FIXME)
+ifneq ($(ARCH), UC3)
+  CC_FLAGS += -Wdouble-promotion
+endif
+
+# Only enable redundant declaration warnings for AVR8 target (FIXME)
+ifeq ($(ARCH), AVR8)
+  CC_FLAGS += -Wredundant-decls
+endif
+
+# C compiler only flags
+C_FLAGS += -Wmissing-parameter-type
+C_FLAGS += -Wmissing-prototypes
+C_FLAGS += -Wnested-externs
+C_FLAGS += -Wbad-function-cast
+C_FLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+C_FLAGS += -Wold-style-definition
+
+# Disable warnings not supported by the version of GCC used for UC3 targets (FIXME)
+ifneq ($(ARCH), UC3)
+  C_FLAGS += -Wunsuffixed-float-constants
+  C_FLAGS += -Wjump-misses-init
+endif
+
+# Only check C++ compatibility on the build files, to ensure headers are C++ compatible
+Test_C.c Test_CPP.c: CC_FLAGS += -Wc++-compat
+
+# Potential additional warnings to enable in the future (FIXME)
+#CC_FLAGS += -Wcast-qual
+#CC_FLAGS += -Wconversion
+#CC_FLAGS += -Wsign-conversion
+#CC_FLAGS += -pedantic
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/SingleUSBModeTest/Dummy.S b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/SingleUSBModeTest/Dummy.S
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b5655add5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/SingleUSBModeTest/Dummy.S
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+.section .text
+
+
+# Mandatory entry point for successful compilation and link
+.global main
+main:
+	# Force code generation of the base USB stack
+	call USB_Init
+
+# Mandatory callback needed for base compile of the USB driver
+.global CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor
+CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor:
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/SingleUSBModeTest/Test.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/SingleUSBModeTest/Test.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7a83794df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/SingleUSBModeTest/Test.c
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/SingleUSBModeTest/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/SingleUSBModeTest/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cd88754db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/SingleUSBModeTest/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+
+# Makefile for the single USB mode build test.
+# This test attempts to build the USB module
+# under fixed device and fixed host modes under
+# all supported architectures
+
+# Path to the LUFA library core
+LUFA_PATH := ../../LUFA/
+
+# Build test cannot be run with multiple parallel jobs
+.NOTPARALLEL:
+
+all: begin compile clean end
+
+begin:
+	@echo Executing build test "SingleUSBModeTest".
+	@echo
+
+end:
+	@echo Build test "SingleUSBModeTest" complete.
+	@echo
+
+compile:
+	@echo Building SingleUSBModeTest for ARCH=AVR8 in device only mode...
+	$(MAKE) -f makefile.test clean elf ARCH=AVR8 MCU=at90usb1287 CC_FLAGS='-D USB_DEVICE_ONLY'
+
+	@echo Building SingleUSBModeTest for ARCH=AVR8 in host only mode...
+	$(MAKE) -f makefile.test clean elf ARCH=AVR8 MCU=at90usb1287 CC_FLAGS='-D USB_HOST_ONLY'
+
+	@echo Building SingleUSBModeTest for ARCH=XMEGA in device only mode...
+	$(MAKE) -f makefile.test clean elf ARCH=XMEGA MCU=atxmega128a1u CC_FLAGS='-D USB_DEVICE_ONLY'
+
+	@echo Building SingleUSBModeTest for ARCH=UC3 in device only mode...
+	$(MAKE) -f makefile.test clean elf ARCH=UC3 MCU=uc3a0256 CC_FLAGS='-D USB_DEVICE_ONLY'
+
+	@echo Building SingleUSBModeTest for ARCH=UC3 in host only mode...
+	$(MAKE) -f makefile.test clean elf ARCH=UC3 MCU=uc3a0256 CC_FLAGS='-D USB_HOST_ONLY'
+
+clean:
+	$(MAKE) -f makefile.test clean ARCH=AVR8 MCU=at90usb1287
+	$(MAKE) -f makefile.test clean ARCH=XMEGA MCU=atxmega128a1u
+	$(MAKE) -f makefile.test clean ARCH=UC3 MCU=uc3a0256
+
+%:
+
+.PHONY: begin end compile clean
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/SingleUSBModeTest/makefile.test b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/SingleUSBModeTest/makefile.test
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..242e530ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/SingleUSBModeTest/makefile.test
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          =
+ARCH         =
+BOARD        = NONE
+F_CPU        = $(F_USB)
+DEBUG_LEVEL  = 0
+
+ifeq ($(ARCH), AVR8)
+  F_USB      = 8000000
+else ifeq ($(ARCH), XMEGA)
+  F_USB      = 48000000
+else ifeq ($(ARCH), UC3)
+  F_USB      = 48000000
+endif
+
+OPTIMIZATION = 1
+TARGET       = Test
+SRC          = Test.c Dummy.S $(LUFA_SRC_USB)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+
+# Generic C/C++ compiler flags
+CC_FLAGS  = -Wextra
+CC_FLAGS += -Werror
+CC_FLAGS += -Wformat=2
+CC_FLAGS += -Winit-self
+CC_FLAGS += -Wswitch-enum
+CC_FLAGS += -Wunused
+CC_FLAGS += -Wundef
+CC_FLAGS += -Wpointer-arith
+CC_FLAGS += -Wcast-align
+CC_FLAGS += -Wwrite-strings
+CC_FLAGS += -Wlogical-op
+CC_FLAGS += -Wmissing-declarations
+CC_FLAGS += -Wmissing-field-initializers
+CC_FLAGS += -Wmissing-format-attribute
+CC_FLAGS += -Woverlength-strings
+
+# Only enable rendundant declaration warnings for AVR8 target (FIXME)
+ifeq ($(ARCH), AVR8)
+  CC_FLAGS += -Wredundant-decls
+endif
+
+# C compiler only flags
+C_FLAGS += -Wmissing-parameter-type
+C_FLAGS += -Wnested-externs
+
+# Potential additional warnings to enable in the future (FIXME)
+#CC_FLAGS += -Wswitch-default
+#CC_FLAGS += -Wc++-compat
+#CC_FLAGS += -Wcast-qual
+#CC_FLAGS += -Wconversion
+#CC_FLAGS += -Wjump-misses-init
+#CC_FLAGS += -pedantic
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/StaticAnalysisTest/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/StaticAnalysisTest/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f5dc1c007
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/StaticAnalysisTest/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+
+# Static anlysis of the entire LUFA source tree, using the free cross-platform "cppcheck" tool.
+
+# Path to the LUFA library core
+LUFA_PATH := ../../LUFA/
+
+CPPCHECK_EXCLUDES := FATFs/            \
+                     PetiteFATFs/      \
+                     uip/
+
+CPPCHECK_INCLUDES := $(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_PATH))/CodeTemplates/               \
+                     $(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_PATH))/../Projects/AVRISP-MKII/
+
+CPPCHECK_FLAGS    := -U TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME -U __GNUC__ -U __DOXYGEN__
+
+CPPCHECK_SUPPRESS := variableScope missingInclude unusedFunction
+
+SRC               := $(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_PATH))/..
+
+# Build test cannot be run with multiple parallel jobs
+.NOTPARALLEL:
+
+all: begin cppcheck end
+
+begin:
+	@echo Executing build test "StaticAnalysisTest".
+	@echo
+
+end:
+	@echo Build test "StaticAnalysisTest" complete.
+	@echo
+
+%:
+
+
+.PHONY: all begin end
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1f09b3fec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/BuildTests/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+
+# Makefile to build all the LUFA Build Tests. Build Tests are
+# used to verify the correctness of the LUFA library, and are
+# not intended to be modified or compiled by non-developers.
+
+all:
+
+%:
+	@echo Executing \"make $@\" on all LUFA build tests.
+	@echo
+	$(MAKE) -C BoardDriverTest $@
+	$(MAKE) -C BootloaderTest $@
+	$(MAKE) -C ModuleTest $@
+	$(MAKE) -C SingleUSBModeTest $@
+	$(MAKE) -C StaticAnalysisTest $@
+	@echo
+	@echo LUFA build test \"make $@\" operation complete.
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/AudioInput.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/AudioInput.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7c1cf4607
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/AudioInput.c
@@ -0,0 +1,274 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the AudioInput demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "AudioInput.h"
+
+/** LUFA Audio Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all Audio Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t Microphone_Audio_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_AudioControl,
+				.StreamingInterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream,
+				.DataINEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address          = AUDIO_STREAM_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 2,
+					},
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Current audio sampling frequency of the streaming audio endpoint. */
+static uint32_t CurrentAudioSampleFrequency = 48000;
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		Audio_Device_USBTask(&Microphone_Audio_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	ADC_Init(ADC_FREE_RUNNING | ADC_PRESCALE_32);
+	ADC_SetupChannel(MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL);
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Start the ADC conversion in free running mode */
+	ADC_StartReading(ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC | ADC_RIGHT_ADJUSTED | ADC_GET_CHANNEL_MASK(MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL));
+}
+
+/** ISR to handle the reloading of the data endpoint with the next sample. */
+ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	uint8_t PrevEndpoint = Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint();
+
+	/* Check that the USB bus is ready for the next sample to write */
+	if (Audio_Device_IsReadyForNextSample(&Microphone_Audio_Interface))
+	{
+		int16_t AudioSample;
+
+		#if defined(USE_TEST_TONE)
+			static uint8_t SquareWaveSampleCount;
+			static int16_t CurrentWaveValue;
+
+			/* In test tone mode, generate a square wave at 1/256 of the sample rate */
+			if (SquareWaveSampleCount++ == 0xFF)
+			  CurrentWaveValue ^= 0x8000;
+
+			/* Only generate audio if the board button is being pressed */
+			AudioSample = (Buttons_GetStatus() & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ? CurrentWaveValue : 0;
+		#else
+			/* Audio sample is ADC value scaled to fit the entire range */
+			AudioSample = ((SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE / ADC_MAX_RANGE) * ADC_GetResult());
+
+			#if defined(MICROPHONE_BIASED_TO_HALF_RAIL)
+			/* Microphone is biased to half rail voltage, subtract the bias from the sample value */
+			AudioSample -= (SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE / 2);
+			#endif
+		#endif
+
+		Audio_Device_WriteSample16(&Microphone_Audio_Interface, AudioSample);
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(PrevEndpoint);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	/* Sample reload timer initialization */
+	TIMSK0  = (1 << OCIE0A);
+	OCR0A   = ((F_CPU / 8 / CurrentAudioSampleFrequency) - 1);
+	TCCR0A  = (1 << WGM01);  // CTC mode
+	TCCR0B  = (1 << CS01);   // Fcpu/8 speed
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Stop the sample reload timer */
+	TCCR0B = 0;
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	ConfigSuccess &= Audio_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Microphone_Audio_Interface);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	Audio_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Microphone_Audio_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Audio class driver callback for the setting and retrieval of streaming endpoint properties. This callback must be implemented
+ *  in the user application to handle property manipulations on streaming audio endpoints.
+ *
+ *  When the DataLength parameter is NULL, this callback should only indicate whether the specified operation is valid for
+ *  the given endpoint index, and should return as fast as possible. When non-NULL, this value may be altered for GET operations
+ *  to indicate the size of the retrieved data.
+ *
+ *  \note The length of the retrieved data stored into the Data buffer on GET operations should not exceed the initial value
+ *        of the \c DataLength parameter.
+ *
+ *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.
+ *  \param[in]     EndpointProperty    Property of the endpoint to get or set, a value from Audio_ClassRequests_t.
+ *  \param[in]     EndpointAddress     Address of the streaming endpoint whose property is being referenced.
+ *  \param[in]     EndpointControl     Parameter of the endpoint to get or set, a value from Audio_EndpointControls_t.
+ *  \param[in,out] DataLength          For SET operations, the length of the parameter data to set. For GET operations, the maximum
+ *                                     length of the retrieved data. When NULL, the function should return whether the given property
+ *                                     and parameter is valid for the requested endpoint without reading or modifying the Data buffer.
+ *  \param[in,out] Data                Pointer to a location where the parameter data is stored for SET operations, or where
+ *                                     the retrieved data is to be stored for GET operations.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the property get/set was successful, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetEndpointProperty(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+                                                  const uint8_t EndpointProperty,
+                                                  const uint8_t EndpointAddress,
+                                                  const uint8_t EndpointControl,
+                                                  uint16_t* const DataLength,
+                                                  uint8_t* Data)
+{
+	/* Check the requested endpoint to see if a supported endpoint is being manipulated */
+	if (EndpointAddress == Microphone_Audio_Interface.Config.DataINEndpoint.Address)
+	{
+		/* Check the requested control to see if a supported control is being manipulated */
+		if (EndpointControl == AUDIO_EPCONTROL_SamplingFreq)
+		{
+			switch (EndpointProperty)
+			{
+				case AUDIO_REQ_SetCurrent:
+					/* Check if we are just testing for a valid property, or actually adjusting it */
+					if (DataLength != NULL)
+					{
+						/* Set the new sampling frequency to the value given by the host */
+						CurrentAudioSampleFrequency = (((uint32_t)Data[2] << 16) | ((uint32_t)Data[1] << 8) | (uint32_t)Data[0]);
+
+						/* Adjust sample reload timer to the new frequency */
+						OCR0A = ((F_CPU / 8 / CurrentAudioSampleFrequency) - 1);
+					}
+
+					return true;
+				case AUDIO_REQ_GetCurrent:
+					/* Check if we are just testing for a valid property, or actually reading it */
+					if (DataLength != NULL)
+					{
+						*DataLength = 3;
+
+						Data[2] = (CurrentAudioSampleFrequency >> 16);
+						Data[1] = (CurrentAudioSampleFrequency >> 8);
+						Data[0] = (CurrentAudioSampleFrequency &  0xFF);
+					}
+
+					return true;
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** Audio class driver callback for the setting and retrieval of streaming interface properties. This callback must be implemented
+ *  in the user application to handle property manipulations on streaming audio interfaces.
+ *
+ *  When the DataLength parameter is NULL, this callback should only indicate whether the specified operation is valid for
+ *  the given entity and should return as fast as possible. When non-NULL, this value may be altered for GET operations
+ *  to indicate the size of the retrieved data.
+ *
+ *  \note The length of the retrieved data stored into the Data buffer on GET operations should not exceed the initial value
+ *        of the \c DataLength parameter.
+ *
+ *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.
+ *  \param[in]     Property            Property of the interface to get or set, a value from Audio_ClassRequests_t.
+ *  \param[in]     EntityAddress       Address of the audio entity whose property is being referenced.
+ *  \param[in]     Parameter           Parameter of the entity to get or set, specific to each type of entity (see USB Audio specification).
+ *  \param[in,out] DataLength          For SET operations, the length of the parameter data to set. For GET operations, the maximum
+ *                                     length of the retrieved data. When NULL, the function should return whether the given property
+ *                                     and parameter is valid for the requested endpoint without reading or modifying the Data buffer.
+ *  \param[in,out] Data                Pointer to a location where the parameter data is stored for SET operations, or where
+ *                                     the retrieved data is to be stored for GET operations.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the property GET/SET was successful, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetInterfaceProperty(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+                                                   const uint8_t Property,
+                                                   const uint8_t EntityAddress,
+                                                   const uint16_t Parameter,
+                                                   uint16_t* const DataLength,
+                                                   uint8_t* Data)
+{
+	/* No audio interface entities in the device descriptor, thus no properties to get or set. */
+	return false;
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/AudioInput.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/AudioInput.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0090f2a0f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/AudioInput.h
@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for AudioInput.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _AUDIO_INPUT_H_
+#define _AUDIO_INPUT_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Maximum audio sample value for the microphone input. */
+		#define SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE          0xFFFF
+
+		/** Maximum ADC range for the microphone input. */
+		#define ADC_MAX_RANGE             0x3FF
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetEndpointProperty(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+		                                                  const uint8_t EndpointProperty,
+		                                                  const uint8_t EndpointAddress,
+		                                                  const uint8_t EndpointControl,
+		                                                  uint16_t* const DataLength,
+		                                                  uint8_t* Data) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+		bool CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetInterfaceProperty(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+		                                                   const uint8_t Property,
+		                                                   const uint8_t EntityAddress,
+		                                                   const uint16_t Parameter,
+		                                                   uint16_t* const DataLength,
+		                                                   uint8_t* Data);
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/AudioInput.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/AudioInput.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4b0594244
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/AudioInput.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Audio Input Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Audio Class</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Standard Audio Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Audio 1.0 Class Specification \n
+ *        USBIF Audio 1.0 Class Terminal Types Specification \n
+ *        USBIF Audio 1.0 Data Formats Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Audio demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Audio Input device using the
+ *  basic USB Audio 1.0 drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers
+ *  required).
+ *
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function as a
+ *  USB microphone. By default, the demo will produce a square wave test tone
+ *  when the board button is pressed. If USE_TEST_TONE is not defined in the
+ *  project makefile, incoming audio from the ADC channel 1 will be sampled
+ *  and sent to the host computer instead.
+ *
+ *  When in microphone mode, connect a microphone to the ADC channel 2.
+ *
+ *  Under Windows, if a driver request dialogue pops up, select the option
+ *  to automatically install the appropriate drivers.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Sets the ADC channel used by the demo for the input audio samples from an attached microphone.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>USE_TEST_TONE</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, this alters the demo to produce a square wave test tone when the first board button is pressed
+ *        instead of sampling the board microphone.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MICROPHONE_BIASED_TO_HALF_RAIL</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, this alters the demo so that the half VCC bias of the microphone input is subtracted.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8360102f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
+ *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
+ *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
+ *  makefile or build system.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#define MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL               2
+
+	#define MICROPHONE_BIASED_TO_HALF_RAIL
+	#define USE_TEST_TONE
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..796221604
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f87ed9761
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,312 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(2,0,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2047,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,2),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize   = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces          = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber      = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex    = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes         = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption      = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.Audio_ControlInterface =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioControl,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
+
+			.Class                    = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass,
+			.SubClass                 = AUDIO_CSCP_ControlSubclass,
+			.Protocol                 = AUDIO_CSCP_ControlProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_ControlInterface_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.ACSpecification          = VERSION_BCD(1,0,0),
+			.TotalLength              = (sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t) +
+			                             sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_InputTerminal_t) +
+			                             sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_OutputTerminal_t)),
+
+			.InCollection             = 1,
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream,
+		},
+
+	.Audio_InputTerminal =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_InputTerminal_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_InputTerminal,
+
+			.TerminalID               = 0x01,
+			.TerminalType             = AUDIO_TERMINAL_IN_MIC,
+			.AssociatedOutputTerminal = 0x00,
+
+			.TotalChannels            = 1,
+			.ChannelConfig            = 0,
+
+			.ChannelStrIndex          = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+			.TerminalStrIndex         = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_OutputTerminal =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_OutputTerminal_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_OutputTerminal,
+
+			.TerminalID               = 0x02,
+			.TerminalType             = AUDIO_TERMINAL_STREAMING,
+			.AssociatedInputTerminal  = 0x00,
+
+			.SourceID                 = 0x01,
+
+			.TerminalStrIndex         = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_Alt0 =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
+
+			.Class                    = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass,
+			.SubClass                 = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioStreamingSubclass,
+			.Protocol                 = AUDIO_CSCP_StreamingProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_Alt1 =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 1,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 1,
+
+			.Class                    = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass,
+			.SubClass                 = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioStreamingSubclass,
+			.Protocol                 = AUDIO_CSCP_StreamingProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AS_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_General,
+
+			.TerminalLink             = 0x02,
+
+			.FrameDelay               = 1,
+			.AudioFormat              = 0x0001
+		},
+
+	.Audio_AudioFormat =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Format_t) +
+			                                     sizeof(ConfigurationDescriptor.Audio_AudioFormatSampleRates),
+			                             .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_FormatType,
+
+			.FormatType               = 0x01,
+			.Channels                 = 0x01,
+
+			.SubFrameSize             = 0x02,
+			.BitResolution            = 16,
+
+			.TotalDiscreteSampleRates = (sizeof(ConfigurationDescriptor.Audio_AudioFormatSampleRates) / sizeof(USB_Audio_SampleFreq_t))
+		},
+
+	.Audio_AudioFormatSampleRates =
+		{
+			AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(8000),
+			AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(11025),
+			AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(22050),
+			AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(44100),
+			AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(48000),
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Endpoint =
+				{
+					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+					.EndpointAddress     = AUDIO_STREAM_EPADDR,
+					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS | ENDPOINT_ATTR_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+					.EndpointSize        = AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+					.PollingIntervalMS   = 0x01
+				},
+
+			.Refresh                  = 0,
+			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamEndpoint_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSEndpoint},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSEndpoint_General,
+
+			.Attributes               = (AUDIO_EP_ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS | AUDIO_EP_SAMPLE_FREQ_CONTROL),
+
+			.LockDelayUnits           = 0x00,
+			.LockDelay                = 0x0000
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Audio In Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1cecf5d84
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the Audio isochronous streaming data IN endpoint. */
+		#define AUDIO_STREAM_EPADDR           (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 1)
+
+		/** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. */
+		#define AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE           256
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t     Config;
+
+			// Audio Control Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t                Audio_ControlInterface;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t       Audio_ControlInterface_SPC;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_InputTerminal_t      Audio_InputTerminal;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_OutputTerminal_t     Audio_OutputTerminal;
+
+			// Audio Streaming Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t                Audio_StreamInterface_Alt0;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t                Audio_StreamInterface_Alt1;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AS_t       Audio_StreamInterface_SPC;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_Format_t             Audio_AudioFormat;
+			USB_Audio_SampleFreq_t                    Audio_AudioFormatSampleRates[5];
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t Audio_StreamEndpoint;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t Audio_StreamEndpoint_SPC;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_AudioControl = 0, /**< Audio control interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream  = 1, /**< Audio stream interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..466de7303
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Audio Input Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.audio_input.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.audio_input"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.device.class.audio_input" caption="Audio Input Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Audio 1.0 Input device demo, implementing a basic USB microphone. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="Audio Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="AudioInput.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="AudioInput.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="AudioInput.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.adc"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a3181cf7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Audio Input Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3ad52565f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioInput/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = AudioInput
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..dddcf67bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.c
@@ -0,0 +1,311 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the AudioOutput demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "AudioOutput.h"
+
+/** LUFA Audio Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all Audio Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t Speaker_Audio_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_AudioControl,
+				.StreamingInterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream,
+				.DataOUTEndpoint          =
+					{
+						.Address          = AUDIO_STREAM_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 2,
+					},
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Current audio sampling frequency of the streaming audio endpoint. */
+static uint32_t CurrentAudioSampleFrequency = 48000;
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		Audio_Device_USBTask(&Speaker_Audio_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** ISR to handle the reloading of the PWM timer with the next sample. */
+ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	uint8_t PrevEndpoint = Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint();
+
+	/* Check that the USB bus is ready for the next sample to read */
+	if (Audio_Device_IsSampleReceived(&Speaker_Audio_Interface))
+	{
+		/* Retrieve the signed 16-bit left and right audio samples, convert to 8-bit */
+		int8_t LeftSample_8Bit  = (Audio_Device_ReadSample16(&Speaker_Audio_Interface) >> 8);
+		int8_t RightSample_8Bit = (Audio_Device_ReadSample16(&Speaker_Audio_Interface) >> 8);
+
+		/* Mix the two channels together to produce a mono, 8-bit sample */
+		int8_t MixedSample_8Bit = (((int16_t)LeftSample_8Bit + (int16_t)RightSample_8Bit) >> 1);
+
+		#if defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO)
+		/* Load the sample into the PWM timer channel */
+		OCR3A = (MixedSample_8Bit ^ (1 << 7));
+		#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO)
+		/* Load the dual 8-bit samples into the PWM timer channels */
+		OCR3A = (LeftSample_8Bit  ^ (1 << 7));
+		OCR3B = (RightSample_8Bit ^ (1 << 7));
+		#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_PORTC)
+		/* Load the 8-bit mixed sample into PORTC */
+		PORTC = MixedSample_8Bit;
+		#endif
+
+		uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+		/* Turn on LEDs as the sample amplitude increases */
+		if (MixedSample_8Bit > 16)
+		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4);
+		else if (MixedSample_8Bit > 8)
+		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3);
+		else if (MixedSample_8Bit > 4)
+		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+		else if (MixedSample_8Bit > 2)
+		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(PrevEndpoint);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	/* Sample reload timer initialization */
+	TIMSK0  = (1 << OCIE0A);
+	OCR0A   = ((F_CPU / 8 / CurrentAudioSampleFrequency) - 1);
+	TCCR0A  = (1 << WGM01);  // CTC mode
+	TCCR0B  = (1 << CS01);   // Fcpu/8 speed
+
+	#if defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO)
+	/* Set speaker as output */
+	DDRC   |= (1 << 6);
+	#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO)
+	/* Set speakers as outputs */
+	DDRC   |= ((1 << 6) | (1 << 5));
+	#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_PORTC)
+	/* Set PORTC as outputs */
+	DDRC   |= 0xFF;
+	#endif
+
+	#if (defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO) || defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO))
+	/* PWM speaker timer initialization */
+	TCCR3A  = ((1 << WGM30) | (1 << COM3A1) | (1 << COM3A0)
+	        | (1 << COM3B1) | (1 << COM3B0)); // Set on match, clear on TOP
+	TCCR3B  = ((1 << WGM32) | (1 << CS30));  // Fast 8-Bit PWM, F_CPU speed
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+
+	/* Stop the sample reload timer */
+	TCCR0B = 0;
+
+	#if (defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO) || defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO))
+	/* Stop the PWM generation timer */
+	TCCR3B = 0;
+	#endif
+
+	#if defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO)
+	/* Set speaker as input to reduce current draw */
+	DDRC  &= ~(1 << 6);
+	#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO)
+	/* Set speakers as inputs to reduce current draw */
+	DDRC  &= ~((1 << 6) | (1 << 5));
+	#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_PORTC)
+	/* Set PORTC low */
+	PORTC = 0x00;
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	ConfigSuccess &= Audio_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Speaker_Audio_Interface);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	Audio_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Speaker_Audio_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Audio class driver callback for the setting and retrieval of streaming endpoint properties. This callback must be implemented
+ *  in the user application to handle property manipulations on streaming audio endpoints.
+ *
+ *  When the DataLength parameter is NULL, this callback should only indicate whether the specified operation is valid for
+ *  the given endpoint index, and should return as fast as possible. When non-NULL, this value may be altered for GET operations
+ *  to indicate the size of the retrieved data.
+ *
+ *  \note The length of the retrieved data stored into the Data buffer on GET operations should not exceed the initial value
+ *        of the \c DataLength parameter.
+ *
+ *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.
+ *  \param[in]     EndpointProperty    Property of the endpoint to get or set, a value from Audio_ClassRequests_t.
+ *  \param[in]     EndpointAddress     Address of the streaming endpoint whose property is being referenced.
+ *  \param[in]     EndpointControl     Parameter of the endpoint to get or set, a value from Audio_EndpointControls_t.
+ *  \param[in,out] DataLength          For SET operations, the length of the parameter data to set. For GET operations, the maximum
+ *                                     length of the retrieved data. When NULL, the function should return whether the given property
+ *                                     and parameter is valid for the requested endpoint without reading or modifying the Data buffer.
+ *  \param[in,out] Data                Pointer to a location where the parameter data is stored for SET operations, or where
+ *                                     the retrieved data is to be stored for GET operations.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the property get/set was successful, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetEndpointProperty(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+                                                  const uint8_t EndpointProperty,
+                                                  const uint8_t EndpointAddress,
+                                                  const uint8_t EndpointControl,
+                                                  uint16_t* const DataLength,
+                                                  uint8_t* Data)
+{
+	/* Check the requested endpoint to see if a supported endpoint is being manipulated */
+	if (EndpointAddress == Speaker_Audio_Interface.Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Address)
+	{
+		/* Check the requested control to see if a supported control is being manipulated */
+		if (EndpointControl == AUDIO_EPCONTROL_SamplingFreq)
+		{
+			switch (EndpointProperty)
+			{
+				case AUDIO_REQ_SetCurrent:
+					/* Check if we are just testing for a valid property, or actually adjusting it */
+					if (DataLength != NULL)
+					{
+						/* Set the new sampling frequency to the value given by the host */
+						CurrentAudioSampleFrequency = (((uint32_t)Data[2] << 16) | ((uint32_t)Data[1] << 8) | (uint32_t)Data[0]);
+
+						/* Adjust sample reload timer to the new frequency */
+						OCR0A = ((F_CPU / 8 / CurrentAudioSampleFrequency) - 1);
+					}
+
+					return true;
+				case AUDIO_REQ_GetCurrent:
+					/* Check if we are just testing for a valid property, or actually reading it */
+					if (DataLength != NULL)
+					{
+						*DataLength = 3;
+
+						Data[2] = (CurrentAudioSampleFrequency >> 16);
+						Data[1] = (CurrentAudioSampleFrequency >> 8);
+						Data[0] = (CurrentAudioSampleFrequency &  0xFF);
+					}
+
+					return true;
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** Audio class driver callback for the setting and retrieval of streaming interface properties. This callback must be implemented
+ *  in the user application to handle property manipulations on streaming audio interfaces.
+ *
+ *  When the DataLength parameter is NULL, this callback should only indicate whether the specified operation is valid for
+ *  the given entity and should return as fast as possible. When non-NULL, this value may be altered for GET operations
+ *  to indicate the size of the retrieved data.
+ *
+ *  \note The length of the retrieved data stored into the Data buffer on GET operations should not exceed the initial value
+ *        of the \c DataLength parameter.
+ *
+ *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.
+ *  \param[in]     Property            Property of the interface to get or set, a value from Audio_ClassRequests_t.
+ *  \param[in]     EntityAddress       Address of the audio entity whose property is being referenced.
+ *  \param[in]     Parameter           Parameter of the entity to get or set, specific to each type of entity (see USB Audio specification).
+ *  \param[in,out] DataLength          For SET operations, the length of the parameter data to set. For GET operations, the maximum
+ *                                     length of the retrieved data. When NULL, the function should return whether the given property
+ *                                     and parameter is valid for the requested endpoint without reading or modifying the Data buffer.
+ *  \param[in,out] Data                Pointer to a location where the parameter data is stored for SET operations, or where
+ *                                     the retrieved data is to be stored for GET operations.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the property GET/SET was successful, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetInterfaceProperty(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+                                                   const uint8_t Property,
+                                                   const uint8_t EntityAddress,
+                                                   const uint16_t Parameter,
+                                                   uint16_t* const DataLength,
+                                                   uint8_t* Data)
+{
+	/* No audio interface entities in the device descriptor, thus no properties to get or set. */
+	return false;
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..671552f49
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.h
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for AudioOutput.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
+#define _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdlib.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetEndpointProperty(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+		                                                  const uint8_t EndpointProperty,
+		                                                  const uint8_t EndpointAddress,
+		                                                  const uint8_t EndpointControl,
+		                                                  uint16_t* const DataLength,
+		                                                  uint8_t* Data) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+		bool CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetInterfaceProperty(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+		                                                   const uint8_t Property,
+		                                                   const uint8_t EntityAddress,
+		                                                   const uint16_t Parameter,
+		                                                   uint16_t* const DataLength,
+		                                                   uint8_t* Data);
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8f0c7d656
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Audio Output Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Audio Class</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Standard Audio Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Audio 1.0 Class Specification \n
+ *        USBIF Audio 1.0 Class Terminal Types Specification \n
+ *        USBIF Audio 1.0 Data Formats Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Audio demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Audio Output device using the
+ *  basic USB Audio 1.0 drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers
+ *  required).
+ *
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function
+ *  as a USB speaker. Outgoing audio will output in 8-bit PWM onto
+ *  the timer 3 output compare channel A for AUDIO_OUT_MONO mode, on
+ *  timer 3 channels A and B for AUDIO_OUT_STEREO and on PORTC as a signed
+ *  mono sample for AUDIO_OUT_PORTC. Audio output will also be indicated on
+ *  the board LEDs in all modes. Decouple audio outputs with a capacitor and
+ *  attach to a speaker to hear the audio.
+ *
+ *  Under Windows, if a driver request dialogue pops up, select the option
+ *  to automatically install the appropriate drivers.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AUDIO_OUT_STEREO</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, this outputs the audio samples in stereo to the timer output pins of the microcontroller.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AUDIO_OUT_MONO</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, this outputs the audio samples in mono to the timer output pin of the microcontroller.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AUDIO_OUT_PORTC</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, this outputs the audio samples in mono to port C of the microcontroller, for connection to an
+ *        external DAC.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e6684a611
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
+ *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
+ *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
+ *  makefile or build system.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#define AUDIO_OUT_STEREO
+//	#define AUDIO_OUT_MONO
+//	#define AUDIO_OUT_PORTC
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..796221604
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4d68e89de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,312 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(2,0,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2046,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,2),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize   = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces          = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber      = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex    = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes         = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption      = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.Audio_ControlInterface =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioControl,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
+
+			.Class                    = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass,
+			.SubClass                 = AUDIO_CSCP_ControlSubclass,
+			.Protocol                 = AUDIO_CSCP_ControlProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_ControlInterface_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.ACSpecification          = VERSION_BCD(1,0,0),
+			.TotalLength              = (sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t) +
+			                             sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_InputTerminal_t) +
+			                             sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_OutputTerminal_t)),
+
+			.InCollection             = 1,
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream,
+		},
+
+	.Audio_InputTerminal =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_InputTerminal_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_InputTerminal,
+
+			.TerminalID               = 0x01,
+			.TerminalType             = AUDIO_TERMINAL_STREAMING,
+			.AssociatedOutputTerminal = 0x00,
+
+			.TotalChannels            = 2,
+			.ChannelConfig            = (AUDIO_CHANNEL_LEFT_FRONT | AUDIO_CHANNEL_RIGHT_FRONT),
+
+			.ChannelStrIndex          = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+			.TerminalStrIndex         = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_OutputTerminal =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_OutputTerminal_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_OutputTerminal,
+
+			.TerminalID               = 0x02,
+			.TerminalType             = AUDIO_TERMINAL_OUT_SPEAKER,
+			.AssociatedInputTerminal  = 0x00,
+
+			.SourceID                 = 0x01,
+
+			.TerminalStrIndex         = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_Alt0 =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
+
+			.Class                    = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass,
+			.SubClass                 = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioStreamingSubclass,
+			.Protocol                 = AUDIO_CSCP_StreamingProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_Alt1 =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 1,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 1,
+
+			.Class                    = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass,
+			.SubClass                 = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioStreamingSubclass,
+			.Protocol                 = AUDIO_CSCP_StreamingProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AS_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_General,
+
+			.TerminalLink             = 0x01,
+
+			.FrameDelay               = 1,
+			.AudioFormat              = 0x0001
+		},
+
+	.Audio_AudioFormat =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Format_t) +
+			                                     sizeof(ConfigurationDescriptor.Audio_AudioFormatSampleRates),
+			                             .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_FormatType,
+
+			.FormatType               = 0x01,
+			.Channels                 = 0x02,
+
+			.SubFrameSize             = 0x02,
+			.BitResolution            = 16,
+
+			.TotalDiscreteSampleRates = (sizeof(ConfigurationDescriptor.Audio_AudioFormatSampleRates) / sizeof(USB_Audio_SampleFreq_t)),
+		},
+
+	.Audio_AudioFormatSampleRates =
+		{
+			AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(8000),
+			AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(11025),
+			AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(22050),
+			AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(44100),
+			AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(48000),
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Endpoint =
+				{
+					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+					.EndpointAddress     = AUDIO_STREAM_EPADDR,
+					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS | ENDPOINT_ATTR_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+					.EndpointSize        = AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+					.PollingIntervalMS   = 0x01
+				},
+
+			.Refresh                  = 0,
+			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamEndpoint_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSEndpoint},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSEndpoint_General,
+
+			.Attributes               = (AUDIO_EP_ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS | AUDIO_EP_SAMPLE_FREQ_CONTROL),
+
+			.LockDelayUnits           = 0x00,
+			.LockDelay                = 0x0000
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Audio Out Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..58cf0c55c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the Audio isochronous streaming data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define AUDIO_STREAM_EPADDR           (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 1)
+
+		/** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. */
+		#define AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE           256
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t     Config;
+
+			// Audio Control Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t                Audio_ControlInterface;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t       Audio_ControlInterface_SPC;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_InputTerminal_t      Audio_InputTerminal;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_OutputTerminal_t     Audio_OutputTerminal;
+
+			// Audio Streaming Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t                Audio_StreamInterface_Alt0;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t                Audio_StreamInterface_Alt1;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AS_t       Audio_StreamInterface_SPC;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_Format_t             Audio_AudioFormat;
+			USB_Audio_SampleFreq_t                    Audio_AudioFormatSampleRates[5];
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t Audio_StreamEndpoint;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t Audio_StreamEndpoint_SPC;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_AudioControl = 0, /**< Audio control interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream  = 1, /**< Audio stream interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f46f3a0f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Audio Output Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.audio_output.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.audio_output"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.device.class.audio_output" caption="Audio Output Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Audio 1.0 Output device demo, implementing a basic USB speaker. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="Audio Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="AudioOutput.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="AudioOutput.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="AudioOutput.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..03c33a2d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Audio Output Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = YES
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..32d73c9d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/AudioOutput/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = AudioOutput
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualMIDI/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualMIDI/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a06b60275
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualMIDI/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_RC32MCLKSRC | USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH)
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX               2
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualMIDI/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualMIDI/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..27bd67cdd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualMIDI/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,366 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x206D,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,2),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize   = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces          = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber      = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex    = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes         = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption      = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.Audio_ControlInterface =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioControl,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
+
+			.Class                    = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass,
+			.SubClass                 = AUDIO_CSCP_ControlSubclass,
+			.Protocol                 = AUDIO_CSCP_ControlProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_ControlInterface_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.ACSpecification          = VERSION_BCD(1,0,0),
+			.TotalLength              = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t),
+
+			.InCollection             = 1,
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream,
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 2,
+
+			.Class                    = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass,
+			.SubClass                 = AUDIO_CSCP_MIDIStreamingSubclass,
+			.Protocol                 = AUDIO_CSCP_StreamingProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_AudioInterface_AS_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_General,
+
+			.AudioSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,0,0),
+
+			.TotalLength              = (sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t) -
+			                             offsetof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t, Audio_StreamInterface_SPC))
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Emb =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_InputTerminal,
+
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_Embedded,
+			.JackID                   = 0x01,
+
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Emb2 =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_InputTerminal,
+
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_Embedded,
+			.JackID                   = 0x02,
+
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Ext =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_InputTerminal,
+
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_External,
+			.JackID                   = 0x03,
+
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Ext2 =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_InputTerminal,
+
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_External,
+			.JackID                   = 0x04,
+
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_OutputTerminal,
+
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_Embedded,
+			.JackID                   = 0x05,
+
+			.NumberOfPins             = 1,
+			.SourceJackID             = {0x03},
+			.SourcePinID              = {0x01},
+
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb2 =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_OutputTerminal,
+
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_Embedded,
+			.JackID                   = 0x06,
+
+			.NumberOfPins             = 1,
+			.SourceJackID             = {0x04},
+			.SourcePinID              = {0x01},
+
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_OutputTerminal,
+
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_External,
+			.JackID                   = 0x07,
+
+			.NumberOfPins             = 1,
+			.SourceJackID             = {0x01},
+			.SourcePinID              = {0x01},
+
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext2 =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_OutputTerminal,
+
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_External,
+			.JackID                   = 0x08,
+
+			.NumberOfPins             = 1,
+			.SourceJackID             = {0x02},
+			.SourcePinID              = {0x01},
+
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint =
+		{
+			.Endpoint =
+				{
+					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+					.EndpointAddress     = MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPADDR,
+					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+					.EndpointSize        = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+					.PollingIntervalMS   = 0x05
+				},
+
+			.Refresh                  = 0,
+			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_DualJack_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSEndpoint},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSEndpoint_General,
+
+			.TotalEmbeddedJacks       = 0x02,
+			.AssociatedJackID         = {0x01, 0x02}
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint =
+		{
+			.Endpoint =
+				{
+					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+					.EndpointAddress     = MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPADDR,
+					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+					.EndpointSize        = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+					.PollingIntervalMS   = 0x05
+				},
+
+			.Refresh                  = 0,
+			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_DualJack_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSEndpoint},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSEndpoint_General,
+
+			.TotalEmbeddedJacks       = 0x02,
+			.AssociatedJackID         = {0x05, 0x06}
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Dual MIDI Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualMIDI/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualMIDI/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8164bfc93
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualMIDI/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the MIDI streaming data IN endpoint, for device-to-host data transfers. */
+		#define MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPADDR       (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 2)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the MIDI streaming data OUT endpoint, for host-to-device data transfers. */
+		#define MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPADDR      (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 1)
+
+		/** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE          64
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+ 		/** Type define for a dual jack endpoint descriptor. This is identical to the LUFA MIDI class driver's
+ 		 *  USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t, except that it contains two jack association entries.
+ 		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors. */
+
+			uint8_t                   TotalEmbeddedJacks; /**< Total number of jacks inside this endpoint. */
+			uint8_t                   AssociatedJackID[2]; /**< IDs of each jack inside the endpoint. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_MIDI_Descriptor_DualJack_Endpoint_t;
+
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t     Config;
+
+			// MIDI Audio Control Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t                Audio_ControlInterface;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t       Audio_ControlInterface_SPC;
+
+			// MIDI Audio Streaming Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t                Audio_StreamInterface;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_AudioInterface_AS_t   Audio_StreamInterface_SPC;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t           MIDI_In_Jack_Emb;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t           MIDI_In_Jack_Emb2;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t           MIDI_In_Jack_Ext;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t           MIDI_In_Jack_Ext2;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t          MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t          MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb2;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t          MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t          MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext2;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_DualJack_Endpoint_t   MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_DualJack_Endpoint_t   MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_AudioControl = 0, /**< Audio control interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream  = 1, /**< Audio streaming interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualMIDI/DualMIDI.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualMIDI/DualMIDI.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..96d5433ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualMIDI/DualMIDI.c
@@ -0,0 +1,211 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the Dual MIDI demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "DualMIDI.h"
+
+/** LUFA MIDI Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all MIDI Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t Keyboard_MIDI_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.StreamingInterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream,
+				.DataINEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address          = MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint          =
+					{
+						.Address          = MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		CheckJoystickMovement();
+
+		MIDI_EventPacket_t ReceivedMIDIEvent;
+		while (MIDI_Device_ReceiveEventPacket(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface, &ReceivedMIDIEvent))
+		{
+			if ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Event == MIDI_EVENT(0, MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON)) && (ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data3 > 0))
+			  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data2 > 64 ? LEDS_LED1 : LEDS_LED2);
+			else
+			  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_NO_LEDS);
+		}
+
+		MIDI_Device_USBTask(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+	/* Start the PLL to multiply the 2MHz RC oscillator to 32MHz and switch the CPU core to run from it */
+	XMEGACLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ, 2000000, F_CPU);
+	XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL);
+
+	/* Start the 32MHz internal RC oscillator and start the DFLL to increase it to 48MHz using the USB SOF as a reference */
+	XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);
+	XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF, F_USB);
+
+	PMIC.CTRL = PMIC_LOLVLEN_bm | PMIC_MEDLVLEN_bm | PMIC_HILVLEN_bm;
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Checks for changes in the position of the board joystick, sending MIDI events to the host upon each change. */
+void CheckJoystickMovement(void)
+{
+	static uint8_t PrevJoystickStatus;
+
+	uint8_t MIDICommand = 0;
+	uint8_t MIDIPitch;
+
+	/* Get current joystick mask, XOR with previous to detect joystick changes */
+	uint8_t JoystickStatus  = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t JoystickChanges = (JoystickStatus ^ PrevJoystickStatus);
+
+	/* Get board button status - if pressed use second virtual cable, otherwise use the first */
+	uint8_t VirtualCable = (Buttons_GetStatus() & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ? 1 : 0;
+
+	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_LEFT)
+	{
+		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_LEFT)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+		MIDIPitch   = 0x3C;
+	}
+
+	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_UP)
+	{
+		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_UP)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+		MIDIPitch   = 0x3D;
+	}
+
+	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_RIGHT)
+	{
+		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_RIGHT)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+		MIDIPitch   = 0x3E;
+	}
+
+	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_DOWN)
+	{
+		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_DOWN)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+		MIDIPitch   = 0x3F;
+	}
+
+	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_PRESS)
+	{
+		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_PRESS)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+		MIDIPitch   = 0x3B;
+	}
+
+	if (MIDICommand)
+	{
+		MIDI_EventPacket_t MIDIEvent = (MIDI_EventPacket_t)
+			{
+				.Event       = MIDI_EVENT(VirtualCable, MIDICommand),
+
+				.Data1       = MIDICommand | MIDI_CHANNEL(1),
+				.Data2       = MIDIPitch,
+				.Data3       = MIDI_STANDARD_VELOCITY,
+			};
+
+		MIDI_Device_SendEventPacket(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface, &MIDIEvent);
+		MIDI_Device_Flush(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
+	}
+
+	PrevJoystickStatus = JoystickStatus;
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	ConfigSuccess &= MIDI_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	MIDI_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualMIDI/DualMIDI.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualMIDI/DualMIDI.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a4a1d6221
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualMIDI/DualMIDI.h
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DualMIDI.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DUAL_MIDI_H_
+#define _DUAL_MIDI_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void CheckJoystickMovement(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualMIDI/DualMIDI.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualMIDI/DualMIDI.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e5d8c26be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualMIDI/DualMIDI.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage MIDI Dual Input Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *  \li Series AU XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxAxU)
+ *  \li Series B XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxBxU)
+ *  \li Series C XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxCxU)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Audio Class</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Standard Audio Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Audio Class Specification \n
+ *        USB-MIDI Audio Class Extension Specification \n
+ *        General MIDI Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Dual MIDI demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing the USB-MIDI class in USB devices.
+ *  It is built upon the USB Audio class.
+ *
+ *  Joystick movements are translated into note on/off messages and
+ *  are sent to the host PC as MIDI streams which can be read by any
+ *  MIDI program supporting MIDI IN devices.
+ *
+ *  If the HWB is not pressed, the first virtual MIDI cable to the host is
+ *  used. If the HWB is pressed, then the second virtual cable is selected.
+ *
+ *  This device implements MIDI-THRU mode, with the IN MIDI data being
+ *  generated by the device itself. OUT MIDI data is discarded.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualMIDI/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualMIDI/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ba85a3b56
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualMIDI/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">
+	<project caption="Dual MIDI Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.dual_midi.example.avr8">
+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.dual_midi"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+		<generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>
+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+	</project>
+
+	<project caption="MIDI Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.dual_midi.example.xmega">
+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.dual_midi"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.xmega"/>
+		<generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+		<device-support value="atxmega128a1u"/>
+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="32000000UL"/>
+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="48000000UL"/>
+	</project>
+
+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.device.class.dual_midi" caption="Dual MIDI Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)">
+		<info type="description" value="summary">
+		Dual MIDI device demo, implementing a basic USB MIDI device with two virtual cables that can send messages to the host. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.
+		</info>
+
+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>
+
+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">
+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>
+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>
+			<keyword value="MIDI Class"/>
+		</info>
+
+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>
+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="DualMIDI.txt"/>
+
+		<build type="c-source" value="DualMIDI.c"/>
+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>
+		<build type="header-file" value="DualMIDI.h"/>
+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>
+
+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>
+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>
+
+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>
+	</module>
+</asf>
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualMIDI/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualMIDI/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..adf3fbd8d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualMIDI/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Dual MIDI Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualMIDI/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualMIDI/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c7534be4b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualMIDI/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = DualMIDI
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..39b5236fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_RC32MCLKSRC | USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH)
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX               6
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9952ed92c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,360 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x204E,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 4,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.CDC1_IAD =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t), .Type = DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation},
+
+			.FirstInterfaceIndex    = INTERFACE_ID_CDC1_CCI,
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,
+
+			.IADStrIndex            = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC1_CCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC1_CCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC1_Functional_Header =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.CDCSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+		},
+
+	.CDC1_Functional_ACM =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM,
+
+			.Capabilities           = 0x06,
+		},
+
+	.CDC1_Functional_Union =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union,
+
+			.MasterInterfaceNumber  = INTERFACE_ID_CDC1_CCI,
+			.SlaveInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC1_DCI,
+		},
+
+	.CDC1_ManagementEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC1_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC1_DCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC1_DCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC1_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC1_RX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.CDC1_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC1_TX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_IAD =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t), .Type = DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation},
+
+			.FirstInterfaceIndex    = INTERFACE_ID_CDC2_CCI,
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,
+
+			.IADStrIndex            = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_CCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC2_CCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_Functional_Header =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.CDCSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_Functional_ACM =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM,
+
+			.Capabilities           = 0x06,
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_Functional_Union =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union,
+
+			.MasterInterfaceNumber  = INTERFACE_ID_CDC2_CCI,
+			.SlaveInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC2_DCI,
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_ManagementEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC2_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_DCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC2_DCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC2_RX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC2_TX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Dual CDC Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..53f66ae41
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the first CDC interface's device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC1_TX_EPADDR                 (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 1)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the first CDC interface's host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC1_RX_EPADDR                 (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 2)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the first CDC interface's device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC1_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR       (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the second CDC interface's device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC2_TX_EPADDR                 (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 4)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the second CDC interface's host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC2_RX_EPADDR                 (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 5)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the second CDC interface's device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC2_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR       (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 6)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+
+			// First CDC Control Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t   CDC1_IAD;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC1_CCI_Interface;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t    CDC1_Functional_Header;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t       CDC1_Functional_ACM;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t     CDC1_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC1_ManagementEndpoint;
+
+			// First CDC Data Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC1_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC1_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC1_DataInEndpoint;
+
+			// Second CDC Control Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t   CDC2_IAD;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC2_CCI_Interface;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t    CDC2_Functional_Header;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t       CDC2_Functional_ACM;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t     CDC2_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC2_ManagementEndpoint;
+
+			// Second CDC Data Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC2_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC2_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC2_DataInEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC1_CCI = 0, /**< CDC1 CCI interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC1_DCI = 1, /**< CDC1 DCI interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC2_CCI = 2, /**< CDC2 CCI interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC2_DCI = 3, /**< CDC2 DCI interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e48653897
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.c
@@ -0,0 +1,218 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the DualVirtualSerial demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "DualVirtualSerial.h"
+
+/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another. This is for the first CDC interface,
+ *  which sends strings to the host for each joystick movement.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial1_CDC_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC1_CCI,
+				.DataINEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address          = CDC1_TX_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint =
+					{
+						.Address          = CDC1_RX_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+				.NotificationEndpoint =
+					{
+						.Address          = CDC1_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+			},
+	};
+
+/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another. This is for the second CDC interface,
+ *  which echos back all received data from the host.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial2_CDC_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC2_CCI,
+				.DataINEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address          = CDC2_TX_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint =
+					{
+						.Address          = CDC2_RX_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+				.NotificationEndpoint =
+					{
+						.Address          = CDC2_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		CheckJoystickMovement();
+
+		/* Discard all received data on the first CDC interface */
+		CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial1_CDC_Interface);
+
+		/* Echo all received data on the second CDC interface */
+		int16_t ReceivedByte = CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial2_CDC_Interface);
+		if (!(ReceivedByte < 0))
+		  CDC_Device_SendByte(&VirtualSerial2_CDC_Interface, (uint8_t)ReceivedByte);
+
+		CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial1_CDC_Interface);
+		CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial2_CDC_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+	/* Start the PLL to multiply the 2MHz RC oscillator to 32MHz and switch the CPU core to run from it */
+	XMEGACLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ, 2000000, F_CPU);
+	XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL);
+
+	/* Start the 32MHz internal RC oscillator and start the DFLL to increase it to 48MHz using the USB SOF as a reference */
+	XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);
+	XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF, F_USB);
+
+	PMIC.CTRL = PMIC_LOLVLEN_bm | PMIC_MEDLVLEN_bm | PMIC_HILVLEN_bm;
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Checks for changes in the position of the board joystick, sending strings to the host upon each change
+ *  through the first of the CDC interfaces.
+ */
+void CheckJoystickMovement(void)
+{
+	uint8_t     JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	char*       ReportString  = NULL;
+	static bool ActionSent = false;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Up\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Down\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Left\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Right\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Pressed\r\n";
+	else
+	  ActionSent = false;
+
+	if ((ReportString != NULL) && (ActionSent == false))
+	{
+		ActionSent = true;
+
+		CDC_Device_SendString(&VirtualSerial1_CDC_Interface, ReportString);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	ConfigSuccess &= CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial1_CDC_Interface);
+	ConfigSuccess &= CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial2_CDC_Interface);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial1_CDC_Interface);
+	CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial2_CDC_Interface);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e4f5f22b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.h
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DualVirtualSerial.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DUAL_VIRTUALSERIAL_H_
+#define _DUAL_VIRTUALSERIAL_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void CheckJoystickMovement(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1e8d3c531
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Dual Communications Device Class (Dual Virtual Serial Port) Device
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series AU XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxAxU)
+ *  \li Series B XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxBxU)
+ *  \li Series C XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxCxU)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Interface Association Descriptor ECN \n
+ *        USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Dual Communications Device Class demonstration application.
+ *  This gives a simple reference application for implementing
+ *  a composite device with dual CDC functions acting as a pair
+ *  of virtual serial ports. This demo uses Interface Association
+ *  Descriptors to link together the pair of related CDC
+ *  descriptors for each virtual serial port, which may not be
+ *  supported in all OSes - Windows Vista is supported, as is
+ *  XP (although the latter may need a hotfix to function).
+ *
+ *  Joystick actions are transmitted to the host as strings
+ *  through the first serial port. The device does not respond to
+ *  serial data sent from the host in the first serial port.
+ *
+ *  The second serial port echoes back data sent from the host.
+ *
+ *  After running this demo for the first time on a new computer,
+ *  you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo
+ *  project's directory as the device's driver when running under
+ *  Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers,
+ *  negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other
+ *  Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt
+ *  CDC-ACM drivers.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/LUFA DualVirtualSerial.inf b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/LUFA DualVirtualSerial.inf
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1a0e0248a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/LUFA DualVirtualSerial.inf
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+;************************************************************
+; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+;************************************************************
+
+[DefaultInstall]
+CopyINF="LUFA DualVirtualSerial.inf"
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+DriverVer=7/1/2012,10.0.0.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTx86, NTamd64, NTia64
+
+[SourceDisksNames]
+
+[SourceDisksFiles]
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+[DriverInstall]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=FakeModemCopyFileSection
+AddReg=DriverInstall.AddReg
+
+[DriverInstall.Services]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, LowerFilter_Service_Inst
+
+[DriverInstall.AddReg]
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"msports.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_00, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_02
+
+[DeviceList.NTx86]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_00, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_02
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_00, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_02
+
+[DeviceList.NTia64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_00, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_02
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org"
+DESCRIPTION="LUFA CDC-ACM Virtual Serial Port"
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e00f33995
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Dual Virtual Serial Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.dual_cdc.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.dual_cdc"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="Dual Virtual Serial Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.dual_cdc.example.xmega">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.dual_cdc"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.xmega"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atxmega128a1u"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="32000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="48000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.device.class.dual_cdc" caption="Dual Virtual Serial Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Dual Virtual Serial (CDC) demo, implementing a pair of virtual serial port interfaces. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="CDC Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="DualVirtualSerial.txt"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="LUFA DualVirtualSerial.inf"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="DualVirtualSerial.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="DualVirtualSerial.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4ed8962f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Dual Virtual Serial Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..41da0e940
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/DualVirtualSerial/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = DualVirtualSerial
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..47b8ffef8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
+ *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
+ *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
+ *  makefile or build system.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#define GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE       8
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c6542445d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_RC32MCLKSRC | USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH)
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX               1
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b070a5db3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,220 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM GenericReport[] =
+{
+	/* Use the HID class driver's standard Vendor HID report.
+	 *  Vendor Usage Page: 0
+	 *  Vendor Collection Usage: 1
+	 *  Vendor Report IN Usage: 2
+	 *  Vendor Report OUT Usage: 3
+	 *  Vendor Report Size: GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE
+	 */
+	HID_DESCRIPTOR_VENDOR(0x00, 0x01, 0x02, 0x03, GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE)
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x204F,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.HID_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_GenericHID,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = HID_CSCP_HIDClass,
+			.SubClass               = HID_CSCP_NonBootSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = HID_CSCP_NonBootProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_GenericHID =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = HID_DTYPE_HID},
+
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(1,1,1),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = HID_DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(GenericReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = GENERIC_IN_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = GENERIC_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Generic HID Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_HID:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_GenericHID;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t);
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_Report:
+			Address = &GenericReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(GenericReport);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a4426e8ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// Generic HID Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t              HID_GenericHID;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_GenericHID = 0, /**< GenericHID interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the Generic HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define GENERIC_IN_EPADDR         (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 1)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Generic HID reporting endpoint. */
+		#define GENERIC_EPSIZE            8
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/GenericHID.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/GenericHID.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1fb604413
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/GenericHID.c
@@ -0,0 +1,202 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the GenericHID demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "GenericHID.h"
+
+/** Buffer to hold the previously generated HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
+static uint8_t PrevHIDReportBuffer[GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE];
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Generic_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber              = INTERFACE_ID_GenericHID,
+				.ReportINEndpoint             =
+					{
+						.Address              = GENERIC_IN_EPADDR,
+						.Size                 = GENERIC_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                = 1,
+					},
+				.PrevReportINBuffer           = PrevHIDReportBuffer,
+				.PrevReportINBufferSize       = sizeof(PrevHIDReportBuffer),
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		HID_Device_USBTask(&Generic_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+	/* Start the PLL to multiply the 2MHz RC oscillator to 32MHz and switch the CPU core to run from it */
+	XMEGACLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ, 2000000, F_CPU);
+	XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL);
+
+	/* Start the 32MHz internal RC oscillator and start the DFLL to increase it to 48MHz using the USB SOF as a reference */
+	XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);
+	XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF, F_USB);
+
+	PMIC.CTRL = PMIC_LOLVLEN_bm | PMIC_MEDLVLEN_bm | PMIC_HILVLEN_bm;
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	ConfigSuccess &= HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Generic_HID_Interface);
+
+	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Generic_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Generic_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]     HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in,out] ReportID    Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
+ *  \param[in]     ReportType  Type of the report to create, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_In or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature
+ *  \param[out]    ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
+ *  \param[out]    ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent)
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true to force the sending of the report, \c false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                         void* ReportData,
+                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize)
+{
+	uint8_t* Data        = (uint8_t*)ReportData;
+	uint8_t  CurrLEDMask = LEDs_GetLEDs();
+
+	Data[0] = ((CurrLEDMask & LEDS_LED1) ? 1 : 0);
+	Data[1] = ((CurrLEDMask & LEDS_LED2) ? 1 : 0);
+	Data[2] = ((CurrLEDMask & LEDS_LED3) ? 1 : 0);
+	Data[3] = ((CurrLEDMask & LEDS_LED4) ? 1 : 0);
+
+	*ReportSize = GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE;
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in] ReportID    Report ID of the received report from the host
+ *  \param[in] ReportType  The type of report that the host has sent, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature
+ *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the received report has been stored
+ *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
+ */
+void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                          const void* ReportData,
+                                          const uint16_t ReportSize)
+{
+	uint8_t* Data       = (uint8_t*)ReportData;
+	uint8_t  NewLEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+	if (Data[0])
+	  NewLEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
+
+	if (Data[1])
+	  NewLEDMask |= LEDS_LED2;
+
+	if (Data[2])
+	  NewLEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
+
+	if (Data[3])
+	  NewLEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(NewLEDMask);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/GenericHID.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/GenericHID.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8e290cd3d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/GenericHID.h
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for GenericHID.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _GENERICHID_H_
+#define _GENERICHID_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+		                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+		                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                                         void* ReportData,
+		                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize);
+		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+		                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+		                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                                          const void* ReportData,
+		                                          const uint16_t ReportSize);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/GenericHID.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/GenericHID.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..649fc62ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/GenericHID.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Generic HID Device
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *  \li Series AU XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxAxU)
+ *  \li Series B XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxBxU)
+ *  \li Series C XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxCxU)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Generic HID device demonstration application. This gives a simple reference application
+ *  for implementing a generic HID device, using the basic USB HID drivers in all modern
+ *  OSes (i.e. no special drivers required). By default it accepts and sends up to 8 byte reports
+ *  to and from a USB Host, and transmits the last sent report back to the host.
+ *
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function as a vendor HID device.
+ *  When controlled by a custom HID class application, reports can be sent and received by
+ *  both the standard data endpoint and control request methods defined in the HID specification.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>This token defines the size of the device reports, both sent and received (including report ID byte). The value
+ *        must be an integer ranging from 1 to 255.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/HostTestApp/test_generic_hid_libusb.js b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/HostTestApp/test_generic_hid_libusb.js
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..4203a08e4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/HostTestApp/test_generic_hid_libusb.js
@@ -0,0 +1,143 @@
+#!/usr/bin/env node
+
+//             LUFA Library
+//     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+//
+//  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+//           www.lufa-lib.org
+
+// LUFA Generic HID device demo host test script. This script will send a
+// continuous stream of generic reports to the device, to show a variable LED
+// pattern on the target board. Send and received report data is printed to
+// the terminal.
+//
+// You have to install the usb and async modules prior to executing this script:
+// apt-get install libusb-1.0-0-dev
+// npm install usb async sprintf
+
+var usb = require('usb');
+var async = require('async');
+var sprintf = require('sprintf');
+
+var deviceVid = 0x03EB;
+var devicePid = 0x204F;
+var reportLength = 8;
+
+function getAndInitHidDeviceAndInterface()
+{
+    device = usb.findByIds(deviceVid, devicePid);
+    if (!device) {
+        console.log('No device found');
+        process.exit(1);
+    }
+    device.open();
+
+    var hidInterface = device.interface(0);
+    if (hidInterface.isKernelDriverActive()) {
+        hidInterface.detachKernelDriver();
+    }
+    hidInterface.claim();
+
+    async.series([
+        function(callback) {
+            setConfiguration(0, function(error, data) {
+                callback();
+            });
+        }
+    ]);
+
+    return {hidDevice:device, hidInterface:hidInterface};
+}
+
+function read(hidInterface, callback)
+{
+    endpoint = hidInterface.endpoints[0];
+    endpoint.transfer(reportLength, function(error, data) {
+        if (error) {
+            console.log(error)
+        } else {
+            console.log("Received LED Pattern:", data.slice(0, 4));
+        }
+        callback();
+    });
+}
+
+function write(hidDevice, message, callback)
+{
+    hidDevice.controlTransfer(    // Send a Set Report control request
+        parseInt('00100001', 2),  // bmRequestType (constant for this control request)
+        0x09,                     // bmRequest (constant for this control request)
+        0x0809,                   // wValue (MSB is report type, LSB is report number)
+        0,                        // wIndex (interface number)
+        message,                  // message to be sent
+        function(error, data) {   // callback to be executed upon finishing the transfer
+            console.log("Sent LED Pattern:", message.slice(1, 5))
+            callback();
+        }
+    );
+}
+
+function setConfiguration(configurationNumber, callback)
+{
+    device.controlTransfer(                 // Send a Set Configuration control request
+        parseInt('00000000', 2),            // bmRequestType
+        0x09,                               // bmRequest
+        0,                                  // wValue (Configuration value)
+        0,                                  // wIndex
+        new Buffer(0),                      // message to be sent
+        callback                            // callback to be executed upon finishing the transfer
+    );
+}
+
+// @TODO: Fix this function because apparently it doesn't work for some reason.
+function getStringDescriptor(stringId, languageId, callback)
+{
+    var STRING_DESCRIPTOR_TYPE = 0x03;
+    var wValue = (STRING_DESCRIPTOR_TYPE << 8) | stringId;
+
+    device.controlTransfer(       // Send a Get Descriptor control request
+        parseInt('10000000', 2),  // bmRequestType
+        0x06,                     // bmRequest
+        wValue,                   // wValue
+        languageId,               // wIndex
+        64,                       // response length
+        callback                  // callback to be executed upon finishing the transfer
+    );
+}
+
+function setNextPattern()
+{
+    var pattern = [
+        hidInterface.interface,
+        (p >> 3) & 1,
+        (p >> 2) & 1,
+        (p >> 1) & 1,
+        (p >> 0) & 1
+    ];
+
+    async.series([
+        function(callback) {
+            write(hidDevice, new Buffer(pattern), callback);
+        },
+        function(callback) {
+            read(hidInterface, callback);
+        },
+        function(callback) {
+            p = (p + 1) % 16
+            setTimeout(setNextPattern, 200);
+            callback();
+        }]);
+}
+
+var hidDeviceAndInterface = getAndInitHidDeviceAndInterface();
+var hidDevice = hidDeviceAndInterface.hidDevice
+var hidInterface = hidDeviceAndInterface.hidInterface;
+
+console.log(sprintf("Connected to device 0x%04X/0x%04X - %s [%s]",
+            hidDevice.deviceDescriptor.idVendor,
+            hidDevice.deviceDescriptor.idProduct,
+            hidDevice.deviceDescriptor.iProduct,
+            hidDevice.deviceDescriptor.iManufacturer));
+
+p = 0
+setNextPattern();
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/HostTestApp/test_generic_hid_libusb.py b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/HostTestApp/test_generic_hid_libusb.py
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..b61970d7a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/HostTestApp/test_generic_hid_libusb.py
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+#!/usr/bin/env python
+
+"""
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+"""
+
+"""
+    LUFA Generic HID device demo host test script. This script will send a
+    continuous stream of generic reports to the device, to show a variable LED
+    pattern on the target board. Send and received report data is printed to
+    the terminal.
+
+    Requires the PyUSB library (http://sourceforge.net/apps/trac/pyusb/).
+"""
+
+import sys
+from time import sleep
+import usb.core
+import usb.util
+
+# Generic HID device VID, PID and report payload length (length is increased
+# by one to account for the Report ID byte that must be pre-pended)
+device_vid = 0x03EB
+device_pid = 0x204F
+
+def get_and_init_hid_device():
+    device = usb.core.find(idVendor=device_vid, idProduct=device_pid)
+
+    if device is None:
+        sys.exit("Could not find USB device.")
+
+    if device.is_kernel_driver_active(0):
+        try:
+            device.detach_kernel_driver(0)
+        except usb.core.USBError as exception:
+            sys.exit("Could not detatch kernel driver: %s" % str(exception))
+
+    try:
+        device.set_configuration()
+    except usb.core.USBError as exception:
+        sys.exit("Could not set configuration: %s" % str(exception))
+
+    return device
+
+def send_led_pattern(device, led1, led2, led3, led4):
+    # Report data for the demo is LED on/off data
+    report_data = [led1, led2, led3, led4]
+
+    # Send the generated report to the device
+    number_of_bytes_written = device.ctrl_transfer(  # Set Report control request
+        0b00100001,  # bmRequestType (constant for this control request)
+        0x09,        # bmRequest (constant for this control request)
+        0,           # wValue (MSB is report type, LSB is report number)
+        0,           # wIndex (interface number)
+        report_data  # report data to be sent
+    );
+    assert number_of_bytes_written == len(report_data)
+
+    print("Sent LED Pattern: {0}".format(report_data))
+
+def receive_led_pattern(hid_device):
+    endpoint = hid_device[0][(0,0)][0]
+    report_data = hid_device.read(endpoint.bEndpointAddress, endpoint.wMaxPacketSize)
+    return list(report_data)
+
+def main():
+    hid_device = get_and_init_hid_device()
+
+    print("Connected to device 0x%04X/0x%04X - %s [%s]" %
+          (hid_device.idVendor, hid_device.idProduct,
+           usb.util.get_string(hid_device, 256, hid_device.iProduct),
+           usb.util.get_string(hid_device, 256, hid_device.iManufacturer)))
+
+    p = 0
+    while (True):
+        # Convert the current pattern index to a bit-mask and send
+        send_led_pattern(hid_device,
+                         (p >> 3) & 1,
+                         (p >> 2) & 1,
+                         (p >> 1) & 1,
+                         (p >> 0) & 1)
+
+        # Receive and print the current LED pattern
+        led_pattern = receive_led_pattern(hid_device)[0:4]
+        print("Received LED Pattern: {0}".format(led_pattern))
+
+        # Compute next LED pattern in sequence
+        p = (p + 1) % 16
+
+        # Delay a bit for visual effect
+        sleep(.2)
+
+if __name__ == '__main__':
+    main()
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/HostTestApp/test_generic_hid_winusb.py b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/HostTestApp/test_generic_hid_winusb.py
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..286577280
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/HostTestApp/test_generic_hid_winusb.py
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+"""
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+"""
+
+"""
+    LUFA Generic HID device demo host test script. This script will send a
+    continuous stream of generic reports to the device, to show a variable LED
+    pattern on the target board. Send and received report data is printed to
+    the terminal.
+
+    Requires the pywinusb library (https://pypi.python.org/pypi/pywinusb/).
+"""
+
+import sys
+from time import sleep
+import pywinusb.hid as hid
+
+# Generic HID device VID, PID and report payload length (length is increased
+# by one to account for the Report ID byte that must be pre-pended)
+device_vid = 0x03EB
+device_pid = 0x204F
+report_length = 1 + 8
+
+
+def get_hid_device_handle():
+    hid_device_filter = hid.HidDeviceFilter(vendor_id=device_vid,
+                                            product_id=device_pid)
+
+    valid_hid_devices = hid_device_filter.get_devices()
+
+    if len(valid_hid_devices) is 0:
+        return None
+    else:
+        return valid_hid_devices[0]
+
+
+def send_led_pattern(device, led1, led2, led3, led4):
+    # Report data for the demo is the report ID (always zero) followed by the
+    # LED on/off data
+    report_data = [0, led1, led2, led3, led4]
+
+    # Zero-extend the array to the length the report should be
+    report_data.extend([0] * (report_length - len(report_data)))
+
+    # Send the generated report to the device
+    device.send_output_report(report_data)
+
+    print("Sent LED Pattern: {0}".format(report_data[1:5]))
+
+
+def received_led_pattern(report_data):
+    print("Received LED Pattern: {0}".format(report_data[1:5]))
+
+
+def main():
+    hid_device = get_hid_device_handle()
+
+    if hid_device is None:
+        print("No valid HID device found.")
+        sys.exit(1)
+
+    try:
+        hid_device.open()
+
+        print("Connected to device 0x%04X/0x%04X - %s [%s]" %
+              (hid_device.vendor_id, hid_device.product_id,
+               hid_device.product_name, hid_device.vendor_name))
+
+        # Set up the HID input report handler to receive reports
+        hid_device.set_raw_data_handler(received_led_pattern)
+
+        p = 0
+        while (hid_device.is_plugged()):
+            # Convert the current pattern index to a bit-mask and send
+            send_led_pattern(hid_device,
+                             (p >> 3) & 1,
+                             (p >> 2) & 1,
+                             (p >> 1) & 1,
+                             (p >> 0) & 1)
+
+            # Compute next LED pattern in sequence
+            p = (p + 1) % 16
+
+            # Delay a bit for visual effect
+            sleep(.2)
+
+    finally:
+        hid_device.close()
+
+
+if __name__ == '__main__':
+    main()
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..710f7c719
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Generic HID Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.generic_hid.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.generic_hid"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="Generic HID Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.generic_hid.example.xmega">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.generic_hid"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.xmega"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atxmega128a1u"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="32000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="48000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.device.class.generic_hid" caption="Generic HID Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Generic HID device demo, implementing a device whose LEDs can be controlled via HID messages from the host. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="GenericHID.txt"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="directory" value="HostTestApp"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="GenericHID.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="GenericHID.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e8808812e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2365 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Generic HID Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/ \
+                         HostTestApp/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..58e817644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/GenericHID/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = GenericHID
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c6542445d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_RC32MCLKSRC | USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH)
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX               1
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b257b7101
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,220 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM JoystickReport[] =
+{
+	/* Use the HID class driver's standard Joystick report.
+	 *   Min X/Y/Z Axis values: -100
+	 *   Max X/Y/Z Axis values:  100
+	 *   Min physical X/Y/Z Axis values (used to determine resolution): -1
+	 *   Max physical X/Y/Z Axis values (used to determine resolution):  1
+	 *   Buttons: 2
+	 */
+	HID_DESCRIPTOR_JOYSTICK(-100, 100, -1, 1, 2)
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2043,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.HID_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_Joystick,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = HID_CSCP_HIDClass,
+			.SubClass               = HID_CSCP_NonBootSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = HID_CSCP_NonBootProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_JoystickHID =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = HID_DTYPE_HID},
+
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(1,1,1),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = HID_DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(JoystickReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = JOYSTICK_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = JOYSTICK_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Joystick Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_HID:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_JoystickHID;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t);
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_Report:
+			Address = &JoystickReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(JoystickReport);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..47fe46c9a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// Joystick HID Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t              HID_JoystickHID;
+	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_Joystick = 0, /**< Joystick interface desciptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the Joystick HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define JOYSTICK_EPADDR              (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 1)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Joystick HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define JOYSTICK_EPSIZE              8
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Joystick.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Joystick.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..32cd4d9bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Joystick.c
@@ -0,0 +1,202 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the Joystick demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "Joystick.h"
+
+/** Buffer to hold the previously generated HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
+static uint8_t PrevJoystickHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_JoystickReport_Data_t)];
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Joystick_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber              = INTERFACE_ID_Joystick,
+				.ReportINEndpoint             =
+					{
+						.Address              = JOYSTICK_EPADDR,
+						.Size                 = JOYSTICK_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                = 1,
+					},
+				.PrevReportINBuffer           = PrevJoystickHIDReportBuffer,
+				.PrevReportINBufferSize       = sizeof(PrevJoystickHIDReportBuffer),
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		HID_Device_USBTask(&Joystick_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+	/* Start the PLL to multiply the 2MHz RC oscillator to 32MHz and switch the CPU core to run from it */
+	XMEGACLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ, 2000000, F_CPU);
+	XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL);
+
+	/* Start the 32MHz internal RC oscillator and start the DFLL to increase it to 48MHz using the USB SOF as a reference */
+	XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);
+	XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF, F_USB);
+
+	PMIC.CTRL = PMIC_LOLVLEN_bm | PMIC_MEDLVLEN_bm | PMIC_HILVLEN_bm;
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	ConfigSuccess &= HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Joystick_HID_Interface);
+
+	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Joystick_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Joystick_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]     HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in,out] ReportID    Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
+ *  \param[in]     ReportType  Type of the report to create, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_In or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature
+ *  \param[out]    ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
+ *  \param[out]    ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent)
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true to force the sending of the report, \c false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                         void* ReportData,
+                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize)
+{
+	USB_JoystickReport_Data_t* JoystickReport = (USB_JoystickReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
+
+	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL    = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus();
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  JoystickReport->Y = -100;
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  JoystickReport->Y =  100;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  JoystickReport->X = -100;
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  JoystickReport->X =  100;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+	  JoystickReport->Button |= (1 << 1);
+
+	if (ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
+	  JoystickReport->Button |= (1 << 0);
+
+	*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_JoystickReport_Data_t);
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in] ReportID    Report ID of the received report from the host
+ *  \param[in] ReportType  The type of report that the host has sent, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature
+ *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the received report has been stored
+ *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
+ */
+void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                          const void* ReportData,
+                                          const uint16_t ReportSize)
+{
+	// Unused (but mandatory for the HID class driver) in this demo, since there are no Host->Device reports
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Joystick.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Joystick.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8c8b33fa5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Joystick.h
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Joystick.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _JOYSTICK_H_
+#define _JOYSTICK_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the joystick HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC.
+		 *  This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			int8_t  X; /**< Current absolute joystick X position, as a signed 8-bit integer */
+			int8_t  Y; /**< Current absolute joystick Y position, as a signed 8-bit integer */
+			int8_t  Z; /**< Current absolute joystick Z position, as a signed 8-bit integer */
+			uint8_t Button; /**< Bit mask of the currently pressed joystick buttons */
+		} USB_JoystickReport_Data_t;
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+		                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+		                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                                         void* ReportData,
+		                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize);
+		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+		                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+		                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                                          const void* ReportData,
+		                                          const uint16_t ReportSize);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Joystick.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Joystick.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e3aec3d70
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/Joystick.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Joystick Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *  \li Series AU XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxAxU)
+ *  \li Series B XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxBxU)
+ *  \li Series C XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxCxU)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Joystick demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Keyboard device, for USB Joysticks
+ *  using the standard Keyboard HID profile.
+ *
+ *  This device will show up as a generic joystick device, with two buttons.
+ *  Pressing the joystick inwards is the first button, and the HWB button
+ *  is the second.
+ *
+ *  Moving the joystick on the selected board moves the joystick location on
+ *  the host computer.
+ *
+ *  Currently only single interface joysticks are supported.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..97d37a5aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Joystick HID Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.joystick.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.joystick"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="Joystick HID Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.joystick.example.xmega">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.joystick"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.xmega"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atxmega128a1u"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="32000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="48000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.device.class.joystick" caption="Joystick HID Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Joystick HID device demo, implementing a basic USB joystick that can send movement information to the host. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="Joystick.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="Joystick.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Joystick.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a48265c0c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Joystick Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9df157b74
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Joystick/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = Joystick
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c6542445d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_RC32MCLKSRC | USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH)
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX               1
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d45c1098f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,216 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] =
+{
+	/* Use the HID class driver's standard Keyboard report.
+	 *   Max simultaneous keys: 6
+	 */
+	HID_DESCRIPTOR_KEYBOARD(6)
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2042,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.HID_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_Keyboard,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = HID_CSCP_HIDClass,
+			.SubClass               = HID_CSCP_BootSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = HID_CSCP_KeyboardBootProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_KeyboardHID =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = HID_DTYPE_HID},
+
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(1,1,1),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = HID_DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(KeyboardReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = KEYBOARD_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Keyboard Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_HID:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_KeyboardHID;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t);
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_Report:
+			Address = &KeyboardReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(KeyboardReport);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8bdb50ff3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// Keyboard HID Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t              HID_KeyboardHID;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_Keyboard = 0, /**< Keyboard interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the Keyboard HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_EPADDR              (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 1)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Keyboard HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_EPSIZE              8
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Keyboard.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Keyboard.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..df606cd25
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Keyboard.c
@@ -0,0 +1,219 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the Keyboard demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "Keyboard.h"
+
+/** Buffer to hold the previously generated Keyboard HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
+static uint8_t PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t)];
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Keyboard_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber              = INTERFACE_ID_Keyboard,
+				.ReportINEndpoint             =
+					{
+						.Address              = KEYBOARD_EPADDR,
+						.Size                 = KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                = 1,
+					},
+				.PrevReportINBuffer           = PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer,
+				.PrevReportINBufferSize       = sizeof(PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer),
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		HID_Device_USBTask(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware()
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+	/* Start the PLL to multiply the 2MHz RC oscillator to 32MHz and switch the CPU core to run from it */
+	XMEGACLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ, 2000000, F_CPU);
+	XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL);
+
+	/* Start the 32MHz internal RC oscillator and start the DFLL to increase it to 48MHz using the USB SOF as a reference */
+	XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);
+	XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF, F_USB);
+
+	PMIC.CTRL = PMIC_LOLVLEN_bm | PMIC_MEDLVLEN_bm | PMIC_HILVLEN_bm;
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	ConfigSuccess &= HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+
+	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]     HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in,out] ReportID    Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
+ *  \param[in]     ReportType  Type of the report to create, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_In or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature
+ *  \param[out]    ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
+ *  \param[out]    ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent)
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true to force the sending of the report, \c false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                         void* ReportData,
+                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize)
+{
+	USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* KeyboardReport = (USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
+
+	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL    = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus();
+
+	uint8_t UsedKeyCodes = 0;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_A;
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_B;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_C;
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_D;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_E;
+
+	if (ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
+	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F;
+
+	if (UsedKeyCodes)
+	  KeyboardReport->Modifier = HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFIER_LEFTSHIFT;
+
+	*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t);
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in] ReportID    Report ID of the received report from the host
+ *  \param[in] ReportType  The type of report that the host has sent, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature
+ *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the received report has been stored
+ *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
+ */
+void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                          const void* ReportData,
+                                          const uint16_t ReportSize)
+{
+	uint8_t  LEDMask   = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+	uint8_t* LEDReport = (uint8_t*)ReportData;
+
+	if (*LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_NUMLOCK)
+	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
+
+	if (*LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_CAPSLOCK)
+	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
+
+	if (*LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_SCROLLLOCK)
+	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Keyboard.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Keyboard.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9e192a665
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Keyboard.h
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Keyboard.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _KEYBOARD_H_
+#define _KEYBOARD_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+		                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+		                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                                         void* ReportData,
+		                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize);
+		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+		                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+		                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                                          const void* ReportData,
+		                                          const uint16_t ReportSize);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Keyboard.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Keyboard.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9b4375b2e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/Keyboard.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Keyboard Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *  \li Series AU XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxAxU)
+ *  \li Series B XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxBxU)
+ *  \li Series C XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxCxU)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Keyboard Subclass</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Keyboard demonstration application. This gives a simple reference application
+ *  for implementing a USB Keyboard using the basic USB HID drivers in all modern
+ *  OSes (i.e. no special drivers required). It is boot protocol compatible, and thus
+ *  works under compatible BIOS as if it was a native keyboard (e.g. PS/2).
+ *
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function as a keyboard
+ *  when the USB connection to a host is present. To use the keyboard example,
+ *  manipulate the joystick to send the letters a, b, c, d and e. See the USB HID
+ *  documentation for more information on sending keyboard event and key presses. Unlike
+ *  other LUFA Keyboard demos, this example shows explicitly how to send multiple key presses
+ *  inside the same report to the host.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d7cdc17bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Keyboard HID Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.keyboard.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.keyboard"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="Keyboard HID Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.keyboard.example.xmega">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.keyboard"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.xmega"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atxmega128a1u"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="32000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="48000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.device.class.keyboard" caption="Keyboard HID Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Keyboard HID device demo, implementing a basic USB keyboard that can send key press information to the host. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="Keyboard.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="Keyboard.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Keyboard.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9962d7c79
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3b9365549
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Keyboard/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = Keyboard
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fa0397910
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_RC32MCLKSRC | USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH)
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX               3
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..663e425da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,289 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ *
+ *  This descriptor describes the mouse HID interface's report structure.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MouseReport[] =
+{
+	/* Use the HID class driver's standard Mouse report.
+	 *   Min X/Y Axis values: -1
+	 *   Max X/Y Axis values:  1
+	 *   Min physical X/Y Axis values (used to determine resolution): -1
+	 *   Max physical X/Y Axis values (used to determine resolution):  1
+	 *   Buttons: 3
+	 *   Absolute screen coordinates: false
+	 */
+	HID_DESCRIPTOR_MOUSE(-1, 1, -1, 1, 3, false)
+};
+
+/** Same as the MouseReport structure, but defines the keyboard HID interface's report structure. */
+const USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] =
+{
+	/* Use the HID class driver's standard Keyboard report.
+	 *   Max simultaneous keys: 6
+	 */
+	HID_DESCRIPTOR_KEYBOARD(6)
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x204D,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.HID1_KeyboardInterface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_Keyboard,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = HID_CSCP_HIDClass,
+			.SubClass               = HID_CSCP_BootSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = HID_CSCP_KeyboardBootProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID1_KeyboardHID =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = HID_DTYPE_HID},
+
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(1,1,1),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = HID_DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(KeyboardReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID1_ReportINEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = KEYBOARD_IN_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = HID_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.HID2_MouseInterface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_Mouse,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = HID_CSCP_HIDClass,
+			.SubClass               = HID_CSCP_BootSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = HID_CSCP_MouseBootProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID2_MouseHID =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = HID_DTYPE_HID},
+
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(1,1,1),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = HID_DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(MouseReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID2_ReportINEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = MOUSE_IN_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = HID_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Mouse and Keyboard Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_HID:
+			switch (wIndex)
+			{
+				case INTERFACE_ID_Keyboard:
+					Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor.HID1_KeyboardHID;
+					Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t);
+					break;
+				case INTERFACE_ID_Mouse:
+					Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor.HID2_MouseHID;
+					Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_Report:
+			switch (wIndex)
+			{
+				case INTERFACE_ID_Keyboard:
+					Address = &KeyboardReport;
+					Size    = sizeof(KeyboardReport);
+					break;
+				case INTERFACE_ID_Mouse:
+					Address = &MouseReport;
+					Size    = sizeof(MouseReport);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..70ee795db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// Keyboard HID Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID1_KeyboardInterface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t              HID1_KeyboardHID;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID1_ReportINEndpoint;
+
+			// Mouse HID Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID2_MouseInterface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t              HID2_MouseHID;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID2_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_Keyboard = 0, /**< Keyboard interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_Mouse    = 1, /**< Mouse interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the Keyboard HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_IN_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 1)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define MOUSE_IN_EPADDR           (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 3)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of each of the HID reporting IN endpoints. */
+		#define HID_EPSIZE                8
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7dacbbbe9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.c
@@ -0,0 +1,276 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the KeyboardMouse demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "KeyboardMouse.h"
+
+/** Buffer to hold the previously generated Keyboard HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
+static uint8_t PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t)];
+
+/** Buffer to hold the previously generated Mouse HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
+static uint8_t PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t)];
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another. This is for the keyboard HID
+ *  interface within the device.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Keyboard_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber              = INTERFACE_ID_Keyboard,
+				.ReportINEndpoint             =
+					{
+						.Address              = KEYBOARD_IN_EPADDR,
+						.Size                 = HID_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                = 1,
+					},
+				.PrevReportINBuffer           = PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer,
+				.PrevReportINBufferSize       = sizeof(PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer),
+			},
+	};
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another. This is for the mouse HID
+ *  interface within the device.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Mouse_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber              = INTERFACE_ID_Mouse,
+				.ReportINEndpoint             =
+					{
+						.Address              = MOUSE_IN_EPADDR,
+						.Size                 = HID_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                = 1,
+					},
+				.PrevReportINBuffer           = PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer,
+				.PrevReportINBufferSize       = sizeof(PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer),
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		HID_Device_USBTask(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+		HID_Device_USBTask(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware()
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+	/* Start the PLL to multiply the 2MHz RC oscillator to 32MHz and switch the CPU core to run from it */
+	XMEGACLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ, 2000000, F_CPU);
+	XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL);
+
+	/* Start the 32MHz internal RC oscillator and start the DFLL to increase it to 48MHz using the USB SOF as a reference */
+	XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);
+	XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF, F_USB);
+
+	PMIC.CTRL = PMIC_LOLVLEN_bm | PMIC_MEDLVLEN_bm | PMIC_HILVLEN_bm;
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+    LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+    LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	ConfigSuccess &= HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+	ConfigSuccess &= HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
+
+	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]     HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in,out] ReportID    Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
+ *  \param[in]     ReportType  Type of the report to create, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_In or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature
+ *  \param[out]    ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
+ *  \param[out]    ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent)
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true to force the sending of the report, \c false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                         void* ReportData,
+                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize)
+{
+	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL    = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus();
+
+	/* Determine which interface must have its report generated */
+	if (HIDInterfaceInfo == &Keyboard_HID_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* KeyboardReport = (USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
+
+		/* If first board button not being held down, no keyboard report */
+		if (!(ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1))
+		  return 0;
+
+		KeyboardReport->Modifier = HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFIER_LEFTSHIFT;
+
+		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+		  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_A;
+		else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+		  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_B;
+
+		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+		  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_C;
+		else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+		  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_D;
+
+		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+		  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_E;
+
+		*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t);
+		return false;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		USB_MouseReport_Data_t* MouseReport = (USB_MouseReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
+
+		/* If first board button being held down, no mouse report */
+		if (ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
+		  return 0;
+
+		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+		  MouseReport->Y = -1;
+		else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+		  MouseReport->Y =  1;
+
+		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+		  MouseReport->X = -1;
+		else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+		  MouseReport->X =  1;
+
+		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+		  MouseReport->Button |= (1 << 0);
+
+		*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t);
+		return true;
+	}
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in] ReportID    Report ID of the received report from the host
+ *  \param[in] ReportType  The type of report that the host has sent, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature
+ *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the received report has been stored
+ *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
+ */
+void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                          const void* ReportData,
+                                          const uint16_t ReportSize)
+{
+	if (HIDInterfaceInfo == &Keyboard_HID_Interface)
+	{
+		uint8_t  LEDMask   = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+		uint8_t* LEDReport = (uint8_t*)ReportData;
+
+		if (*LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_NUMLOCK)
+		  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
+
+		if (*LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_CAPSLOCK)
+		  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
+
+		if (*LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_SCROLLLOCK)
+		  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e40d106d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.h
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#ifndef _KEYBOARD_MOUSE_H_
+#define _KEYBOARD_MOUSE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+		                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+		                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                                         void* ReportData,
+		                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize);
+		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+		                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+		                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                                          const void* ReportData,
+		                                          const uint16_t ReportSize);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..20c89cc80
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Dual HID Keyboard and Mouse Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *  \li Series AU XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxAxU)
+ *  \li Series B XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxBxU)
+ *  \li Series C XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxCxU)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Keyboard/Mouse demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a composite device containing both USB Keyboard
+ *  and USB Mouse functionality using the basic USB HID drivers in all modern OSes
+ *  (i.e. no special drivers required). This example uses two separate HID
+ *  interfaces for each function. It is boot protocol compatible, and thus works under
+ *  compatible BIOS as if it was a native keyboard and mouse (e.g. PS/2).
+ *
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function
+ *  as a keyboard when the USB connection to a host is present and the HWB is not
+ *  pressed. When enabled, manipulate the joystick to send the letters
+ *  a, b, c, d and e. See the USB HID documentation for more information
+ *  on sending keyboard event and key presses.
+ *
+ *  When the HWB is pressed, the mouse mode is enabled. When enabled, move the
+ *  joystick to move the pointer, and push the joystick inwards to simulate a
+ *  left-button click.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4b5ca0121
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Keyboard and Mouse HID Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.keyboard_mouse.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.keyboard_mouse"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="Keyboard and Mouse HID Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.keyboard_mouse.example.xmega">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.keyboard_mouse"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.xmega"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atxmega128a1u"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="32000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="48000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.device.class.keyboard_mouse" caption="Keyboard and Mouse HID Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Keyboard and Mouse HID device demo, implementing a basic USB keyboard and mouse using a pair of HID interfaces. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="KeyboardMouse.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="KeyboardMouse.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="KeyboardMouse.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7428ae1cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Combined Keyboard/Mouse Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a0805d76a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouse/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = KeyboardMouse
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouseMultiReport/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouseMultiReport/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c6542445d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouseMultiReport/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_RC32MCLKSRC | USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH)
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX               1
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouseMultiReport/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouseMultiReport/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6d9c3c250
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouseMultiReport/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,279 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ *
+ *  This descriptor describes the multiple possible reports of the HID interface's report structure.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM HIDReport[] =
+{
+	/* Mouse Report */
+	HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x01), /* Generic Desktop */
+	HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x02), /* Mouse */
+	HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x01), /* Application */
+		HID_RI_REPORT_ID(8, HID_REPORTID_MouseReport),
+		HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x01), /* Pointer */
+		HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x00), /* Physical */
+			HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x09), /* Button */
+			HID_RI_USAGE_MINIMUM(8, 0x01),
+			HID_RI_USAGE_MAXIMUM(8, 0x03),
+			HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0x00),
+			HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 0x01),
+			HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x03),
+			HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x01),
+			HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE),
+			HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x01),
+			HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x05),
+			HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_CONSTANT),
+			HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x01), /* Generic Desktop */
+			HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x30), /* Usage X */
+			HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x31), /* Usage Y */
+			HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, -1),
+			HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 1),
+			HID_RI_PHYSICAL_MINIMUM(8, -1),
+			HID_RI_PHYSICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 1),
+			HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x02),
+			HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x08),
+			HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_RELATIVE),
+		HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0),
+	HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0),
+
+	/* Keyboard Report */
+	HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x01), /* Generic Desktop */
+	HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x06), /* Keyboard */
+	HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x01), /* Application */
+		HID_RI_REPORT_ID(8, HID_REPORTID_KeyboardReport),
+		HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x07), /* Key Codes */
+		HID_RI_USAGE_MINIMUM(8, 0xE0), /* Keyboard Left Control */
+		HID_RI_USAGE_MAXIMUM(8, 0xE7), /* Keyboard Right GUI */
+		HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0x00),
+		HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 0x01),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x01),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x08),
+		HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x01),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x08),
+		HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_CONSTANT),
+		HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x08), /* LEDs */
+		HID_RI_USAGE_MINIMUM(8, 0x01), /* Num Lock */
+		HID_RI_USAGE_MAXIMUM(8, 0x05), /* Kana */
+		HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x05),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x01),
+		HID_RI_OUTPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE | HID_IOF_NON_VOLATILE),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x01),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x03),
+		HID_RI_OUTPUT(8, HID_IOF_CONSTANT),
+		HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0x00),
+		HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 0x65),
+		HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x07), /* Keyboard */
+		HID_RI_USAGE_MINIMUM(8, 0x00), /* Reserved (no event indicated) */
+		HID_RI_USAGE_MAXIMUM(8, 0x65), /* Keyboard Application */
+		HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x06),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x08),
+		HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_ARRAY | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE),
+	HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0),
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2066,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.HID_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_KeyboardAndMouse,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = HID_CSCP_HIDClass,
+			.SubClass               = HID_CSCP_NonBootSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = HID_CSCP_NonBootProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_HIDData =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = HID_DTYPE_HID},
+
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(1,1,1),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = HID_DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(HIDReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = HID_IN_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = HID_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Multi HID Report Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_HID:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_HIDData;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t);
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_Report:
+			Address = &HIDReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(HIDReport);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouseMultiReport/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouseMultiReport/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..09a2b495c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouseMultiReport/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// Combined Keyboard/Mouse HID Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t              HID_HIDData;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_KeyboardAndMouse = 0, /**< Combined keyboard and mouse interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define HID_IN_EPADDR             (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 1)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of each of the HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define HID_EPSIZE                8
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the HID report IDs used in the device. */
+		enum
+		{
+			HID_REPORTID_MouseReport    = 0x01, /**< Report ID for the Mouse report within the device. */
+			HID_REPORTID_KeyboardReport = 0x02, /**< Report ID for the Keyboard report within the device. */
+		} HID_Report_IDs;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouseMultiReport/KeyboardMouseMultiReport.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouseMultiReport/KeyboardMouseMultiReport.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..256216c86
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouseMultiReport/KeyboardMouseMultiReport.c
@@ -0,0 +1,237 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the KeyboardMouseMultiReport demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "KeyboardMouseMultiReport.h"
+
+/** Buffer to hold the previously generated HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
+static uint8_t PrevHIDReportBuffer[MAX(sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t), sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t))];
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Device_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber              = INTERFACE_ID_KeyboardAndMouse,
+				.ReportINEndpoint             =
+					{
+						.Address              = HID_IN_EPADDR,
+						.Size                 = HID_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                = 1,
+					},
+				.PrevReportINBuffer           = PrevHIDReportBuffer,
+				.PrevReportINBufferSize       = sizeof(PrevHIDReportBuffer),
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		HID_Device_USBTask(&Device_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware()
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+	/* Start the PLL to multiply the 2MHz RC oscillator to 32MHz and switch the CPU core to run from it */
+	XMEGACLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ, 2000000, F_CPU);
+	XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL);
+
+	/* Start the 32MHz internal RC oscillator and start the DFLL to increase it to 48MHz using the USB SOF as a reference */
+	XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);
+	XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF, F_USB);
+
+	PMIC.CTRL = PMIC_LOLVLEN_bm | PMIC_MEDLVLEN_bm | PMIC_HILVLEN_bm;
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	ConfigSuccess &= HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Device_HID_Interface);
+
+	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Device_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Device_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]     HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in,out] ReportID    Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
+ *  \param[in]     ReportType  Type of the report to create, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_In or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature
+ *  \param[out]    ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
+ *  \param[out]    ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent)
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true to force the sending of the report, \c false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                         void* ReportData,
+                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize)
+{
+	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL    = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus();
+
+	if (!(ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1))
+	{
+		USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* KeyboardReport = (USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
+
+		KeyboardReport->Modifier = HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFIER_LEFTSHIFT;
+
+		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+		  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_A;
+		else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+		  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_B;
+
+		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+		  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_C;
+		else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+		  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_D;
+
+		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+		  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_E;
+
+		*ReportID   = HID_REPORTID_KeyboardReport;
+		*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t);
+		return false;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		USB_MouseReport_Data_t* MouseReport = (USB_MouseReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
+
+		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+		  MouseReport->Y = -1;
+		else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+		  MouseReport->Y =  1;
+
+		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+		  MouseReport->X = -1;
+		else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+		  MouseReport->X =  1;
+
+		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+		  MouseReport->Button |= (1 << 0);
+
+		*ReportID   = HID_REPORTID_MouseReport;
+		*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t);
+		return true;
+	}
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in] ReportID    Report ID of the received report from the host
+ *  \param[in] ReportType  The type of report that the host has sent, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature
+ *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the received report has been stored
+ *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
+ */
+void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                          const void* ReportData,
+                                          const uint16_t ReportSize)
+{
+	uint8_t  LEDMask   = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+	uint8_t* LEDReport = (uint8_t*)ReportData;
+
+	if (*LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_NUMLOCK)
+	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
+
+	if (*LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_CAPSLOCK)
+	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
+
+	if (*LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_SCROLLLOCK)
+	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouseMultiReport/KeyboardMouseMultiReport.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouseMultiReport/KeyboardMouseMultiReport.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e40d106d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouseMultiReport/KeyboardMouseMultiReport.h
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#ifndef _KEYBOARD_MOUSE_H_
+#define _KEYBOARD_MOUSE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+		                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+		                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                                         void* ReportData,
+		                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize);
+		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+		                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+		                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                                          const void* ReportData,
+		                                          const uint16_t ReportSize);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouseMultiReport/KeyboardMouseMultiReport.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouseMultiReport/KeyboardMouseMultiReport.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6ff910e16
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouseMultiReport/KeyboardMouseMultiReport.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Multiple Report HID Keyboard and Mouse Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *  \li Series AU XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxAxU)
+ *  \li Series B XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxBxU)
+ *  \li Series C XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxCxU)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Keyboard/Mouse demonstration application, using a single HID interface. This gives
+ *  a simple reference application for implementing a multiple HID report device
+ *  containing both USB Keyboard and USB Mouse functionality using the basic USB HID
+ *  drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers required). This example uses a
+ *  single HID interface that is shared between the two functions.
+ *
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function as a keyboard when
+ *  the USB connection to a host is present and the HWB is not pressed. When enabled,
+ *  manipulate the joystick to send the letters a, b, c, d and e. See the USB HID
+ *  documentation for more information on sending keyboard event and key presses.
+ *
+ *  When the HWB is pressed, the mouse mode is enabled. When enabled, move the joystick
+ *  to move the pointer, and push the joystick inwards to simulate a left-button click.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouseMultiReport/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouseMultiReport/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..39487fd8a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouseMultiReport/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Keyboard and Mouse HID (Multi Report) Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.keyboard_mouse_mr.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.keyboard_mouse_mr"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="Keyboard and Mouse HID (Multi Report) Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.keyboard_mouse_mr.example.xmega">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.keyboard_mouse_mr"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.xmega"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atxmega128a1u"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="32000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="48000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.device.class.keyboard_mouse_mr" caption="Keyboard and Mouse HID (Multi Report) Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Keyboard and Mouse HID device demo, implementing a basic USB keyboard and mouse using a single HID interface and multiple logical reports. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="KeyboardMouseMultiReport.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="KeyboardMouseMultiReport.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="KeyboardMouseMultiReport.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouseMultiReport/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouseMultiReport/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..138ef6b6a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouseMultiReport/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Combined Keyboard/Mouse (Multiple HID Report) Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouseMultiReport/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouseMultiReport/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8f55b3ee7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/KeyboardMouseMultiReport/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = KeyboardMouseMultiReport
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a06b60275
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_RC32MCLKSRC | USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH)
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX               2
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f7138ca59
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,314 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2048,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize   = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces          = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber      = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex    = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes         = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption      = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.Audio_ControlInterface =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioControl,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
+
+			.Class                    = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass,
+			.SubClass                 = AUDIO_CSCP_ControlSubclass,
+			.Protocol                 = AUDIO_CSCP_ControlProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_ControlInterface_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.ACSpecification          = VERSION_BCD(1,0,0),
+			.TotalLength              = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t),
+
+			.InCollection             = 1,
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream,
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 2,
+
+			.Class                    = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass,
+			.SubClass                 = AUDIO_CSCP_MIDIStreamingSubclass,
+			.Protocol                 = AUDIO_CSCP_StreamingProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_AudioInterface_AS_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_General,
+
+			.AudioSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,0,0),
+
+			.TotalLength              = (sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t) -
+			                             offsetof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t, Audio_StreamInterface_SPC))
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Emb =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_InputTerminal,
+
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_Embedded,
+			.JackID                   = 0x01,
+
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Ext =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_InputTerminal,
+
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_External,
+			.JackID                   = 0x02,
+
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_OutputTerminal,
+
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_Embedded,
+			.JackID                   = 0x03,
+
+			.NumberOfPins             = 1,
+			.SourceJackID             = {0x02},
+			.SourcePinID              = {0x01},
+
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_OutputTerminal,
+
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_External,
+			.JackID                   = 0x04,
+
+			.NumberOfPins             = 1,
+			.SourceJackID             = {0x01},
+			.SourcePinID              = {0x01},
+
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint =
+		{
+			.Endpoint =
+				{
+					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+					.EndpointAddress     = MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPADDR,
+					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+					.EndpointSize        = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+					.PollingIntervalMS   = 0x05
+				},
+
+			.Refresh                  = 0,
+			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSEndpoint},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSEndpoint_General,
+
+			.TotalEmbeddedJacks       = 0x01,
+			.AssociatedJackID         = {0x01}
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint =
+		{
+			.Endpoint =
+				{
+					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+					.EndpointAddress     = MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPADDR,
+					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+					.EndpointSize        = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+					.PollingIntervalMS   = 0x05
+				},
+
+			.Refresh                  = 0,
+			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSEndpoint},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSEndpoint_General,
+
+			.TotalEmbeddedJacks       = 0x01,
+			.AssociatedJackID         = {0x03}
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA MIDI Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..677b3e1ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,108 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the MIDI streaming data IN endpoint, for device-to-host data transfers. */
+		#define MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPADDR       (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 2)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the MIDI streaming data OUT endpoint, for host-to-device data transfers. */
+		#define MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPADDR      (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 1)
+
+		/** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE          64
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t     Config;
+
+			// MIDI Audio Control Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t                Audio_ControlInterface;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t       Audio_ControlInterface_SPC;
+
+			// MIDI Audio Streaming Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t                Audio_StreamInterface;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_AudioInterface_AS_t   Audio_StreamInterface_SPC;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t           MIDI_In_Jack_Emb;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t           MIDI_In_Jack_Ext;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t          MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t          MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t       MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t       MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_AudioControl = 0, /**< Audio control interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream  = 1, /**< Audio streaming interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/MIDI.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/MIDI.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..46260c090
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/MIDI.c
@@ -0,0 +1,211 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MIDI demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "MIDI.h"
+
+/** LUFA MIDI Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all MIDI Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t Keyboard_MIDI_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.StreamingInterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream,
+				.DataINEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address          = MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint          =
+					{
+						.Address          = MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		CheckJoystickMovement();
+
+		MIDI_EventPacket_t ReceivedMIDIEvent;
+		while (MIDI_Device_ReceiveEventPacket(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface, &ReceivedMIDIEvent))
+		{
+			if ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Event == MIDI_EVENT(0, MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON)) && (ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data3 > 0))
+			  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data2 > 64 ? LEDS_LED1 : LEDS_LED2);
+			else
+			  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_NO_LEDS);
+		}
+
+		MIDI_Device_USBTask(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+	/* Start the PLL to multiply the 2MHz RC oscillator to 32MHz and switch the CPU core to run from it */
+	XMEGACLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ, 2000000, F_CPU);
+	XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL);
+
+	/* Start the 32MHz internal RC oscillator and start the DFLL to increase it to 48MHz using the USB SOF as a reference */
+	XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);
+	XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF, F_USB);
+
+	PMIC.CTRL = PMIC_LOLVLEN_bm | PMIC_MEDLVLEN_bm | PMIC_HILVLEN_bm;
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Checks for changes in the position of the board joystick, sending MIDI events to the host upon each change. */
+void CheckJoystickMovement(void)
+{
+	static uint8_t PrevJoystickStatus;
+
+	uint8_t MIDICommand = 0;
+	uint8_t MIDIPitch;
+
+	/* Get current joystick mask, XOR with previous to detect joystick changes */
+	uint8_t JoystickStatus  = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t JoystickChanges = (JoystickStatus ^ PrevJoystickStatus);
+
+	/* Get board button status - if pressed use channel 10 (percussion), otherwise use channel 1 */
+	uint8_t Channel = ((Buttons_GetStatus() & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ? MIDI_CHANNEL(10) : MIDI_CHANNEL(1));
+
+	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_LEFT)
+	{
+		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_LEFT)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+		MIDIPitch   = 0x3C;
+	}
+
+	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_UP)
+	{
+		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_UP)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+		MIDIPitch   = 0x3D;
+	}
+
+	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_RIGHT)
+	{
+		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_RIGHT)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+		MIDIPitch   = 0x3E;
+	}
+
+	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_DOWN)
+	{
+		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_DOWN)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+		MIDIPitch   = 0x3F;
+	}
+
+	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_PRESS)
+	{
+		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_PRESS)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+		MIDIPitch   = 0x3B;
+	}
+
+	if (MIDICommand)
+	{
+		MIDI_EventPacket_t MIDIEvent = (MIDI_EventPacket_t)
+			{
+				.Event       = MIDI_EVENT(0, MIDICommand),
+
+				.Data1       = MIDICommand | Channel,
+				.Data2       = MIDIPitch,
+				.Data3       = MIDI_STANDARD_VELOCITY,
+			};
+
+		MIDI_Device_SendEventPacket(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface, &MIDIEvent);
+		MIDI_Device_Flush(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
+	}
+
+	PrevJoystickStatus = JoystickStatus;
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	ConfigSuccess &= MIDI_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	MIDI_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/MIDI.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/MIDI.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..93ed6b888
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/MIDI.h
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MIDI.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MIDI_H_
+#define _MIDI_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void CheckJoystickMovement(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/MIDI.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/MIDI.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c076be3bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/MIDI.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage MIDI Input Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *  \li Series AU XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxAxU)
+ *  \li Series B XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxBxU)
+ *  \li Series C XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxCxU)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Audio Class</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Standard Audio Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Audio Class Specification \n
+ *        USB-MIDI Audio Class Extension Specification \n
+ *        General MIDI Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  MIDI demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing the USB-MIDI class in USB devices.
+ *  It is built upon the USB Audio class.
+ *
+ *  Joystick movements are translated into note on/off messages and
+ *  are sent to the host PC as MIDI streams which can be read by any
+ *  MIDI program supporting MIDI IN devices.
+ *
+ *  If the HWB is not pressed, channel 1 (default piano) is used. If
+ *  the HWB is pressed, then channel 10 (default percussion) is selected.
+ *
+ *  This device implements MIDI-THRU mode, with the IN MIDI data being
+ *  generated by the device itself. OUT MIDI data is discarded.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..33a4fd583
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="MIDI Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.midi.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.midi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="MIDI Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.midi.example.xmega">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.midi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.xmega"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atxmega128a1u"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="32000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="48000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.device.class.midi" caption="MIDI Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		MIDI device demo, implementing a basic USB MIDI device that can send messages to the host. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="MIDI Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="MIDI.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="MIDI.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="MIDI.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b7b1862f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - MIDI Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4d868dcb0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MIDI/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = MIDI
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4be9d2b6b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
+ *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
+ *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
+ *  makefile or build system.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#define TOTAL_LUNS                1
+
+	#define DISK_READ_ONLY            false
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3c3b68bb1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_RC32MCLKSRC | USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH)
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX               4
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..598155a45
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,194 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2045,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED,
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.MS_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = MS_CSCP_MassStorageClass,
+			.SubClass               = MS_CSCP_SCSITransparentSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = MS_CSCP_BulkOnlyTransportProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Mass Storage Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..067bda8bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR         (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE         64
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// Mass Storage Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            MS_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataInEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataOutEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage = 0, /**< Mass storage interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d28eff298
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.c
@@ -0,0 +1,534 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Functions to manage the physical Dataflash media, including reading and writing of
+ *  blocks of data. These functions are called by the SCSI layer when data must be stored
+ *  or retrieved to/from the physical storage media. If a different media is used (such
+ *  as a SD card or EEPROM), functions similar to these will need to be generated.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASHMANAGER_C
+#include "DataflashManager.h"
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), from
+ *  the pre-selected data OUT endpoint. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the endpoint and writes
+ *  them to the Dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                  const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                  uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+#endif
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+
+	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+	  return;
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is currently empty */
+			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+			{
+				/* Clear the current endpoint bank */
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+				/* Wait until the host has sent another packet */
+				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Once all the Dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
+				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+				/* If less than one Dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+				{
+					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				}
+#endif
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
+			}
+
+			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the Dataflash */
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+			  return;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+	/* If the endpoint is empty, clear it ready for the next packet from the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), into
+ *  the pre-selected data IN endpoint. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                 const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                 uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+
+	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+	  return;
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is currently full */
+			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+			{
+				/* Clear the endpoint bank to send its contents to the host */
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+				/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for more data */
+				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+			}
+
+			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the Dataflash */
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+			  return;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* If the endpoint is full, send its contents to the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), from
+ *  the given RAM buffer. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the buffer and writes them to the
+ *  Dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. This can be linked to FAT libraries to write files to the
+ *  Dataflash.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
+ *  \param[in] BufferPtr     Pointer to the data source RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                      uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+                                      uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+#endif
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Once all the Dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
+				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+				/* If less than one Dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+				{
+					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				}
+#endif
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
+			}
+
+			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the Dataflash */
+			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+			  Dataflash_SendByte(*(BufferPtr++));
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), into
+ *  the preallocated RAM buffer. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the given buffer. This can be linked to FAT libraries to read
+ *  the files stored on the Dataflash.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
+ *  \param[out] BufferPtr    Pointer to the data destination RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                     uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+			}
+
+			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the Dataflash */
+			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+			  *(BufferPtr++) = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Disables the Dataflash memory write protection bits on the board Dataflash ICs, if enabled. */
+void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void)
+{
+	/* Select first Dataflash chip, send the read status register command */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+
+	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+	{
+		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+	}
+
+	/* Select second Dataflash chip (if present on selected board), send read status register command */
+	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+
+	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+	{
+		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+	}
+	#endif
+
+	/* Deselect current Dataflash chip */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Performs a simple test on the attached Dataflash IC(s) to ensure that they are working.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if all media chips are working, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ReturnByte;
+
+	/* Test first Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+	  return false;
+
+	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+	/* Test second Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+	  return false;
+	#endif
+
+	return true;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9f0cc4f3e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.h
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DataflashManager.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
+#define _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include "../MassStorage.h"
+		#include "../Descriptors.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE % 16)
+			#error Dataflash page size must be a multiple of 16 bytes.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Defines: */
+		/** Total number of bytes of the storage medium, comprised of one or more Dataflash ICs. */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES                ((uint32_t)DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)
+
+		/** Block size of the device. This is kept at 512 to remain compatible with the OS despite the underlying
+		 *  storage media (Dataflash) using a different native block size. Do not change this value.
+		 */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE           512
+
+		/** Total number of blocks of the virtual memory for reporting to the host as the device's total capacity. Do not
+		 *  change this value; change VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES instead to alter the media size.
+		 */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS               (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES / VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+
+		/** Blocks in each LUN, calculated from the total capacity divided by the total number of Logical Units in the device. */
+		#define LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS                    (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS / TOTAL_LUNS)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+		                                  const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                  uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+		                                 const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                 uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                      uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+		                                      uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                     uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+		                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void);
+		bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..122e38872
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c
@@ -0,0 +1,349 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage
+ *  devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information,
+ *  which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C
+#include "SCSI.h"
+
+/** Structure to hold the SCSI response data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's
+ *  features and capabilities.
+ */
+static const SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData =
+	{
+		.DeviceType          = DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK,
+		.PeripheralQualifier = 0,
+
+		.Removable           = true,
+
+		.Version             = 0,
+
+		.ResponseDataFormat  = 2,
+		.NormACA             = false,
+		.TrmTsk              = false,
+		.AERC                = false,
+
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x1F,
+
+		.SoftReset           = false,
+		.CmdQue              = false,
+		.Linked              = false,
+		.Sync                = false,
+		.WideBus16Bit        = false,
+		.WideBus32Bit        = false,
+		.RelAddr             = false,
+
+		.VendorID            = "LUFA",
+		.ProductID           = "Dataflash Disk",
+		.RevisionID          = {'0','.','0','0'},
+	};
+
+/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE
+ *  command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete.
+ */
+static SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData =
+	{
+		.ResponseCode        = 0x70,
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x0A,
+	};
+
+
+/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches
+ *  to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns
+ *  a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool CommandSuccess = false;
+
+	/* Run the appropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */
+	switch (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0])
+	{
+		case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Inquiry(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_WRITE);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_READ);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_START_STOP_UNIT:
+		case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY:
+		case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL:
+		case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10:
+			/* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */
+			CommandSuccess = true;
+			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+			break;
+		default:
+			/* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */
+			SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	/* Check if command was successfully processed */
+	if (CommandSuccess)
+	{
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return true;
+	}
+
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features
+ *  and capabilities to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint16_t AllocationLength  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3]);
+	uint16_t BytesTransferred  = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(InquiryData));
+
+	/* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */
+	if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) ||
+	     MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2])
+	{
+		/* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, NULL);
+
+	/* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */
+	Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL);
+
+	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command,
+ *  including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t  AllocationLength = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
+	uint8_t  BytesTransferred = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(SenseData));
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, NULL);
+	Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity
+ *  on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint32_t LastBlockAddressInLUN = (LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS - 1);
+	uint32_t MediaBlockSize        = VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE;
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&LastBlockAddressInLUN, sizeof(LastBlockAddressInLUN), NULL);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&MediaBlockSize, sizeof(MediaBlockSize), NULL);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. This command performs a quick check of the Dataflash ICs on the
+ *  board, and indicates if they are present and functioning correctly. Only the Self-Test portion of the diagnostic command is
+ *  supported.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Check to see if the SELF TEST bit is not set */
+	if (!(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & (1 << 2)))
+	{
+		/* Only self-test supported - update SENSE key and fail the command */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Check to see if all attached Dataflash ICs are functional */
+	if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation()))
+	{
+		/* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address
+ *  and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level Dataflash routine to handle the actual
+ *  reading and writing of the data.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *  \param[in] IsDataRead  Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE)
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                      const bool IsDataRead)
+{
+	uint32_t BlockAddress;
+	uint16_t TotalBlocks;
+
+	/* Check if the disk is write protected or not */
+	if ((IsDataRead == DATA_WRITE) && DISK_READ_ONLY)
+	{
+		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
+	BlockAddress = SwapEndian_32(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]);
+
+	/* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
+	TotalBlocks  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7]);
+
+	/* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */
+	if (BlockAddress >= LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS)
+	{
+		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	#if (TOTAL_LUNS > 1)
+	/* Adjust the given block address to the real media address based on the selected LUN */
+	BlockAddress += ((uint32_t)MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.LUN * LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS);
+	#endif
+
+	/* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */
+	if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ)
+	  DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+	else
+	  DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+
+	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE);
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI MODE SENSE (6) command. This command returns various informational pages about
+ *  the SCSI device, as well as the device's Write Protect status.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Send an empty header response with the Write Protect flag status */
+	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(DISK_READ_ONLY ? 0x80 : 0x00);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 4;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f663baa5c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for SCSI.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _SCSI_H_
+#define _SCSI_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "../MassStorage.h"
+		#include "../Descriptors.h"
+		#include "DataflashManager.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This
+		 *  is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about
+		 *  the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Key    New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] Acode  New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] Aqual  New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to
+		 */
+		#define SCSI_SET_SENSE(Key, Acode, Aqual)  do { SenseData.SenseKey                 = (Key);   \
+		                                                SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode      = (Acode); \
+		                                                SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = (Aqual); } while (0)
+
+		/** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_READ           true
+
+		/** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_WRITE          false
+
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a Block Media device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK   0x00
+
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a CD-ROM device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_CDROM   0x05
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C)
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+			                                      const bool IsDataRead);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/MassStorage.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/MassStorage.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..750101d88
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/MassStorage.c
@@ -0,0 +1,162 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MassStorage demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "MassStorage.h"
+
+/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t Disk_MS_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber           = INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage,
+				.DataINEndpoint            =
+					{
+						.Address           = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR,
+						.Size              = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks             = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address           = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR,
+						.Size              = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks             = 1,
+					},
+				.TotalLUNs                 = TOTAL_LUNS,
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		MS_Device_USBTask(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+	/* Start the PLL to multiply the 2MHz RC oscillator to 32MHz and switch the CPU core to run from it */
+	XMEGACLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ, 2000000, F_CPU);
+	XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL);
+
+	/* Start the 32MHz internal RC oscillator and start the DFLL to increase it to 48MHz using the USB SOF as a reference */
+	XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);
+	XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF, F_USB);
+
+	PMIC.CTRL = PMIC_LOLVLEN_bm | PMIC_MEDLVLEN_bm | PMIC_HILVLEN_bm;
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Dataflash_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Check if the Dataflash is working, abort if not */
+	if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation()))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		for(;;);
+	}
+
+	/* Clear Dataflash sector protections, if enabled */
+	DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	ConfigSuccess &= MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Mass Storage class driver callback function the reception of SCSI commands from the host, which must be processed.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool CommandSuccess;
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+	CommandSuccess = SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(MSInterfaceInfo);
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	return CommandSuccess;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/MassStorage.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/MassStorage.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..76474729d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/MassStorage.h
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MassStorage.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MASS_STORAGE_H_
+#define _MASS_STORAGE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include "Lib/SCSI.h"
+		#include "Lib/DataflashManager.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/MassStorage.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/MassStorage.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..31779e9c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/MassStorage.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Mass Storage Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *  \li Series AU XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxAxU)
+ *  \li Series B XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxBxU)
+ *  \li Series C XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxCxU)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Mass Storage Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Bulk-Only Transport</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n
+ *        USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n
+ *        SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n
+ *        SCSI Block Commands Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Mass Storage device demonstration application. This gives a simple
+ *  reference application for implementing a USB Mass Storage device using
+ *  the basic USB UFI drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers
+ *  required).
+ *
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function as an
+ *  external mass storage device which may be formatted and used in the same
+ *  manner as commercial USB Mass Storage devices.
+ *
+ *  You will need to format the mass storage drive upon first run of this
+ *  demonstration - as the device acts only as a data block transport between
+ *  the host and the storage media, it does not matter what file system is used,
+ *  as the data interpretation is performed by the host and not the USB device.
+ *
+ *  This demo is not restricted to only a single LUN (logical disk); by changing
+ *  the TOTAL_LUNS value in DataflashManager.h, any number of LUNs can be used
+ *  (from 1 to 255), with each LUN being allocated an equal portion of the available
+ *  Dataflash memory.
+ *
+ *  The USB control endpoint is managed entirely by the library using endpoint
+ *  interrupts, as the INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT option is enabled. This allows for
+ *  the host to reset the Mass Storage device state during long transfers without
+ *  the need for complicated polling logic.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>TOTAL_LUNS</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Total number of Logical Units (drives) in the device. The total device capacity is shared equally between each drive -
+ *        this can be set to any positive non-zero amount.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>DISK_READ_ONLY</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Configuration define, indicating if the disk should be write protected or not.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6f5a8dc03
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Mass Storage Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.mass_storage.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.mass_storage"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="Mass Storage Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.mass_storage.example.xmega">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.mass_storage"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.xmega"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atxmega128a1u"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="32000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="48000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.device.class.mass_storage" caption="Mass Storage Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Mass Storage device demo, implementing a basic USB storage disk using a Dataflash memory IC. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="Mass Storage Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="MassStorage.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="MassStorage.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/DataflashManager.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/SCSI.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="MassStorage.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/DataflashManager.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/SCSI.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.dataflash"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9629ccb8a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mass Storage Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c242c2602
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorage/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = MassStorage
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c Lib/DataflashManager.c Lib/SCSI.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4be9d2b6b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
+ *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
+ *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
+ *  makefile or build system.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#define TOTAL_LUNS                1
+
+	#define DISK_READ_ONLY            false
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..58fd4bb5a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_RC32MCLKSRC | USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH)
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX               5
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..90187c1e4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,254 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Matthias Hullin (lufa [at] matthias [dot] hullin [dot] net)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] =
+{
+	/* Use the HID class driver's standard Keyboard report.
+	 *   Max simultaneous keys: 6
+	 */
+	HID_DESCRIPTOR_KEYBOARD(6)
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2061,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED,
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.MS_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = MS_CSCP_MassStorageClass,
+			.SubClass               = MS_CSCP_SCSITransparentSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = MS_CSCP_BulkOnlyTransportProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.HID_KeyboardInterface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_Keyboard,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = HID_CSCP_HIDClass,
+			.SubClass               = HID_CSCP_BootSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = HID_CSCP_KeyboardBootProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_KeyboardHID =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = HID_DTYPE_HID},
+
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(1,1,1),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = HID_DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(KeyboardReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = KEYBOARD_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Mass Storage and Keyboard Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_HID:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_KeyboardHID;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t);
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_Report:
+			Address = &KeyboardReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(KeyboardReport);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e12dfa20d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Matthias Hullin (lufa [at] matthias [dot] hullin [dot] net)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the Keyboard HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_EPADDR              (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 1)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Keyboard HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_EPSIZE              8
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR       (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR      (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE       64
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// Mass Storage Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            MS_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataInEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataOutEndpoint;
+
+			// Generic HID Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_KeyboardInterface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t              HID_KeyboardHID;
+	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage = 0, /**< Mass storage interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_Keyboard    = 1, /**< Keyboard interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/DataflashManager.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/DataflashManager.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d28eff298
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/DataflashManager.c
@@ -0,0 +1,534 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Functions to manage the physical Dataflash media, including reading and writing of
+ *  blocks of data. These functions are called by the SCSI layer when data must be stored
+ *  or retrieved to/from the physical storage media. If a different media is used (such
+ *  as a SD card or EEPROM), functions similar to these will need to be generated.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASHMANAGER_C
+#include "DataflashManager.h"
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), from
+ *  the pre-selected data OUT endpoint. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the endpoint and writes
+ *  them to the Dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                  const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                  uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+#endif
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+
+	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+	  return;
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is currently empty */
+			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+			{
+				/* Clear the current endpoint bank */
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+				/* Wait until the host has sent another packet */
+				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Once all the Dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
+				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+				/* If less than one Dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+				{
+					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				}
+#endif
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
+			}
+
+			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the Dataflash */
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+			  return;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+	/* If the endpoint is empty, clear it ready for the next packet from the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), into
+ *  the pre-selected data IN endpoint. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                 const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                 uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+
+	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+	  return;
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is currently full */
+			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+			{
+				/* Clear the endpoint bank to send its contents to the host */
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+				/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for more data */
+				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+			}
+
+			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the Dataflash */
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+			  return;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* If the endpoint is full, send its contents to the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), from
+ *  the given RAM buffer. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the buffer and writes them to the
+ *  Dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. This can be linked to FAT libraries to write files to the
+ *  Dataflash.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
+ *  \param[in] BufferPtr     Pointer to the data source RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                      uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+                                      uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+#endif
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Once all the Dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
+				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+				/* If less than one Dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+				{
+					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				}
+#endif
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
+			}
+
+			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the Dataflash */
+			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+			  Dataflash_SendByte(*(BufferPtr++));
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), into
+ *  the preallocated RAM buffer. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the given buffer. This can be linked to FAT libraries to read
+ *  the files stored on the Dataflash.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
+ *  \param[out] BufferPtr    Pointer to the data destination RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                     uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+			}
+
+			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the Dataflash */
+			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+			  *(BufferPtr++) = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Disables the Dataflash memory write protection bits on the board Dataflash ICs, if enabled. */
+void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void)
+{
+	/* Select first Dataflash chip, send the read status register command */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+
+	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+	{
+		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+	}
+
+	/* Select second Dataflash chip (if present on selected board), send read status register command */
+	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+
+	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+	{
+		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+	}
+	#endif
+
+	/* Deselect current Dataflash chip */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Performs a simple test on the attached Dataflash IC(s) to ensure that they are working.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if all media chips are working, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ReturnByte;
+
+	/* Test first Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+	  return false;
+
+	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+	/* Test second Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+	  return false;
+	#endif
+
+	return true;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/DataflashManager.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/DataflashManager.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b48b3e851
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/DataflashManager.h
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DataflashManager.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
+#define _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include "../MassStorageKeyboard.h"
+		#include "../Descriptors.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE % 16)
+			#error Dataflash page size must be a multiple of 16 bytes.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Defines: */
+		/** Total number of bytes of the storage medium, comprised of one or more Dataflash ICs. */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES                ((uint32_t)DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)
+
+		/** Block size of the device. This is kept at 512 to remain compatible with the OS despite the underlying
+		 *  storage media (Dataflash) using a different native block size.
+		 */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE           512
+
+		/** Total number of blocks of the virtual memory for reporting to the host as the device's total capacity. */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS              (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES / VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+
+		/** Blocks in each LUN, calculated from the total capacity divided by the total number of Logical Units in the device. */
+		#define LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS         (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS / TOTAL_LUNS)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+		                                  const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                  uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+		                                 const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                 uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                      uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+		                                      uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                     uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+		                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void);
+		bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/SCSI.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/SCSI.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..122e38872
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/SCSI.c
@@ -0,0 +1,349 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage
+ *  devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information,
+ *  which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C
+#include "SCSI.h"
+
+/** Structure to hold the SCSI response data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's
+ *  features and capabilities.
+ */
+static const SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData =
+	{
+		.DeviceType          = DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK,
+		.PeripheralQualifier = 0,
+
+		.Removable           = true,
+
+		.Version             = 0,
+
+		.ResponseDataFormat  = 2,
+		.NormACA             = false,
+		.TrmTsk              = false,
+		.AERC                = false,
+
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x1F,
+
+		.SoftReset           = false,
+		.CmdQue              = false,
+		.Linked              = false,
+		.Sync                = false,
+		.WideBus16Bit        = false,
+		.WideBus32Bit        = false,
+		.RelAddr             = false,
+
+		.VendorID            = "LUFA",
+		.ProductID           = "Dataflash Disk",
+		.RevisionID          = {'0','.','0','0'},
+	};
+
+/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE
+ *  command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete.
+ */
+static SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData =
+	{
+		.ResponseCode        = 0x70,
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x0A,
+	};
+
+
+/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches
+ *  to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns
+ *  a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool CommandSuccess = false;
+
+	/* Run the appropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */
+	switch (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0])
+	{
+		case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Inquiry(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_WRITE);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_READ);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_START_STOP_UNIT:
+		case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY:
+		case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL:
+		case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10:
+			/* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */
+			CommandSuccess = true;
+			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+			break;
+		default:
+			/* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */
+			SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	/* Check if command was successfully processed */
+	if (CommandSuccess)
+	{
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return true;
+	}
+
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features
+ *  and capabilities to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint16_t AllocationLength  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3]);
+	uint16_t BytesTransferred  = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(InquiryData));
+
+	/* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */
+	if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) ||
+	     MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2])
+	{
+		/* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, NULL);
+
+	/* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */
+	Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL);
+
+	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command,
+ *  including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t  AllocationLength = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
+	uint8_t  BytesTransferred = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(SenseData));
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, NULL);
+	Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity
+ *  on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint32_t LastBlockAddressInLUN = (LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS - 1);
+	uint32_t MediaBlockSize        = VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE;
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&LastBlockAddressInLUN, sizeof(LastBlockAddressInLUN), NULL);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&MediaBlockSize, sizeof(MediaBlockSize), NULL);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. This command performs a quick check of the Dataflash ICs on the
+ *  board, and indicates if they are present and functioning correctly. Only the Self-Test portion of the diagnostic command is
+ *  supported.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Check to see if the SELF TEST bit is not set */
+	if (!(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & (1 << 2)))
+	{
+		/* Only self-test supported - update SENSE key and fail the command */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Check to see if all attached Dataflash ICs are functional */
+	if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation()))
+	{
+		/* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address
+ *  and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level Dataflash routine to handle the actual
+ *  reading and writing of the data.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *  \param[in] IsDataRead  Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE)
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                      const bool IsDataRead)
+{
+	uint32_t BlockAddress;
+	uint16_t TotalBlocks;
+
+	/* Check if the disk is write protected or not */
+	if ((IsDataRead == DATA_WRITE) && DISK_READ_ONLY)
+	{
+		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
+	BlockAddress = SwapEndian_32(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]);
+
+	/* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
+	TotalBlocks  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7]);
+
+	/* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */
+	if (BlockAddress >= LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS)
+	{
+		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	#if (TOTAL_LUNS > 1)
+	/* Adjust the given block address to the real media address based on the selected LUN */
+	BlockAddress += ((uint32_t)MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.LUN * LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS);
+	#endif
+
+	/* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */
+	if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ)
+	  DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+	else
+	  DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+
+	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE);
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI MODE SENSE (6) command. This command returns various informational pages about
+ *  the SCSI device, as well as the device's Write Protect status.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Send an empty header response with the Write Protect flag status */
+	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(DISK_READ_ONLY ? 0x80 : 0x00);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 4;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/SCSI.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/SCSI.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8ccc146ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/Lib/SCSI.h
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for SCSI.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _SCSI_H_
+#define _SCSI_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "../MassStorageKeyboard.h"
+		#include "../Descriptors.h"
+		#include "DataflashManager.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This
+		 *  is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about
+		 *  the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Key    New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] Acode  New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] Aqual  New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to
+		 */
+		#define SCSI_SET_SENSE(Key, Acode, Aqual)  do { SenseData.SenseKey                 = (Key);   \
+		                                                SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode      = (Acode); \
+		                                                SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = (Aqual); } while (0)
+
+		/** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_READ           true
+
+		/** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_WRITE          false
+
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a Block Media device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK   0x00
+
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a CD-ROM device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_CDROM   0x05
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C)
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+			                                      const bool IsDataRead);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/MassStorageKeyboard.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/MassStorageKeyboard.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a6ecb6bde
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/MassStorageKeyboard.c
@@ -0,0 +1,270 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Matthias Hullin (lufa [at] matthias [dot] hullin [dot] net)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MassStorageKeyboard demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "MassStorageKeyboard.h"
+
+/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t Disk_MS_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber           = INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage,
+				.DataINEndpoint            =
+					{
+						.Address           = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR,
+						.Size              = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks             = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint            =
+					{
+						.Address           = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR,
+						.Size              = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks             = 1,
+					},
+				.TotalLUNs                 = TOTAL_LUNS,
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Buffer to hold the previously generated Keyboard HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
+static uint8_t PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t)];
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Keyboard_HID_Interface =
+ 	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber              = INTERFACE_ID_Keyboard,
+				.ReportINEndpoint             =
+					{
+						.Address              = KEYBOARD_EPADDR,
+						.Size                 = KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                = 1,
+					},
+				.PrevReportINBuffer           = PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer,
+				.PrevReportINBufferSize       = sizeof(PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer),
+			},
+    };
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		MS_Device_USBTask(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+		HID_Device_USBTask(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+	/* Start the PLL to multiply the 2MHz RC oscillator to 32MHz and switch the CPU core to run from it */
+	XMEGACLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ, 2000000, F_CPU);
+	XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL);
+
+	/* Start the 32MHz internal RC oscillator and start the DFLL to increase it to 48MHz using the USB SOF as a reference */
+	XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);
+	XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF, F_USB);
+
+	PMIC.CTRL = PMIC_LOLVLEN_bm | PMIC_MEDLVLEN_bm | PMIC_HILVLEN_bm;
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Joystick_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	Dataflash_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Check if the Dataflash is working, abort if not */
+	if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation()))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		for(;;);
+	}
+
+	/* Clear Dataflash sector protections, if enabled */
+	DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	ConfigSuccess &= HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+	ConfigSuccess &= MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+
+	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Mass Storage class driver callback function the reception of SCSI commands from the host, which must be processed.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool CommandSuccess;
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+	CommandSuccess = SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(MSInterfaceInfo);
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	return CommandSuccess;
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
+{
+    HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]     HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in,out] ReportID    Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
+ *  \param[in]     ReportType  Type of the report to create, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_In or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature
+ *  \param[out]    ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
+ *  \param[out]    ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent)
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true to force the sending of the report, \c false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                         void* ReportData,
+                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize)
+{
+	USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* KeyboardReport = (USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
+
+	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL    = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus();
+
+	KeyboardReport->Modifier = HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFIER_LEFTSHIFT;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_A;
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_B;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_C;
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_D;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_E;
+
+	if (ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
+	  KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F;
+
+	*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t);
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in] ReportID    Report ID of the received report from the host
+ *  \param[in] ReportType  The type of report that the host has sent, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature
+ *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the received report has been stored
+ *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
+ */
+void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                          const void* ReportData,
+                                          const uint16_t ReportSize)
+{
+	uint8_t  LEDMask   = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+	uint8_t* LEDReport = (uint8_t*)ReportData;
+
+	if (*LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_NUMLOCK)
+	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
+
+	if (*LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_CAPSLOCK)
+	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
+
+	if (*LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_SCROLLLOCK)
+	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/MassStorageKeyboard.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/MassStorageKeyboard.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0494b46c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/MassStorageKeyboard.h
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Matthias Hullin (lufa [at] matthias [dot] hullin [dot] net)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MassStorageKeyboard.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MASS_STORAGE_KEYBOARD_H_
+#define _MASS_STORAGE_KEYBOARD_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include "Lib/SCSI.h"
+		#include "Lib/DataflashManager.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY         LEDS_LED2
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+		                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+		                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                                         void* ReportData,
+		                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize);
+		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+		                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+		                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                                          const void* ReportData,
+		                                          const uint16_t ReportSize);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/MassStorageKeyboard.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/MassStorageKeyboard.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c84769ade
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/MassStorageKeyboard.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Combined Mass Storage and Keyboard Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *  \li Series AU XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxAxU)
+ *  \li Series B XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxBxU)
+ *  \li Series C XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxCxU)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Classes:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Mass Storage Device \n
+ *        Human Interface Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclasses:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Bulk-Only Transport \n
+ *        Keyboard Subclass</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n
+ *        USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n
+ *        SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n
+ *        SCSI Block Commands Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Combined Mass Storage and Keyboard demonstration application. This gives a
+ *  simple reference application for implementing a dual class USB Mass Storage
+ *  and USB HID Keyboard device using the basic USB UFI and HID drivers in all
+ *  modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers required).
+ *
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function as an
+ *  external mass storage device (which may be formatted and used in the same
+ *  manner as commercial USB Mass Storage devices) and a USB keyboard.
+ *
+ *  You will need to format the mass storage drive upon first run of this
+ *  demonstration - as the device acts only as a data block transport between
+ *  the host and the storage media, it does not matter what file system is used,
+ *  as the data interpretation is performed by the host and not the USB device.
+ *
+ *  Keys on the USB keyboard can be pressed by moving the board's Joystick.
+ *
+ *  The USB control endpoint is managed entirely by the library using endpoint
+ *  interrupts, as the INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT option is enabled. This allows for
+ *  the host to reset the Mass Storage device state during long transfers without
+ *  the need for complicated polling logic.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>TOTAL_LUNS</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Total number of Logical Units (drives) in the device. The total device capacity is shared equally between each drive -
+ *        this can be set to any positive non-zero amount.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>DISK_READ_ONLY</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Configuration define, indicating if the disk should be write protected or not.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3cdb476b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Mass Storage and HID Keyboard Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.mass_storage_keyboard.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.mass_storage_keyboard"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="Mass Storage and HID Keyboard Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.mass_storage_keyboard.example.xmega">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.mass_storage_keyboard"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.xmega"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atxmega128a1u"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="32000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="48000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.device.class.mass_storage_keyboard" caption="Mass Storage and HID Keyboard Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Mass Storage and Keyboard device demo, implementing a basic USB storage disk using a Dataflash memory IC, and a basic HID keyboard. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+			<keyword value="Mass Storage Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="MassStorageKeyboard.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="MassStorageKeyboard.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/DataflashManager.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/SCSI.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="MassStorageKeyboard.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/DataflashManager.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/SCSI.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.dataflash"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6259b2f88
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Combined Mass Storage and Keyboard Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d5885d44b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/MassStorageKeyboard/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = MassStorageKeyboard
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c Lib/DataflashManager.c Lib/SCSI.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c6542445d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_RC32MCLKSRC | USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH)
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX               1
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c810ab527
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,221 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MouseReport[] =
+{
+	/* Use the HID class driver's standard Mouse report.
+	 *   Min X/Y Axis values: -1
+	 *   Max X/Y Axis values:  1
+	 *   Min physical X/Y Axis values (used to determine resolution): -1
+	 *   Max physical X/Y Axis values (used to determine resolution):  1
+	 *   Buttons: 3
+	 *   Absolute screen coordinates: false
+	 */
+	HID_DESCRIPTOR_MOUSE(-1, 1, -1, 1, 3, false)
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2041,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.HID_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_Mouse,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = HID_CSCP_HIDClass,
+			.SubClass               = HID_CSCP_BootSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = HID_CSCP_MouseBootProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_MouseHID =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = HID_DTYPE_HID},
+
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(1,1,1),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = HID_DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(MouseReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = MOUSE_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MOUSE_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Mouse Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_HID:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_MouseHID;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t);
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_Report:
+			Address = &MouseReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(MouseReport);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..40646b104
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define MOUSE_EPADDR              (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 1)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define MOUSE_EPSIZE              8
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// Mouse HID Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t              HID_MouseHID;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_Mouse = 0, /**< Mouse interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Mouse.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Mouse.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f326423bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Mouse.c
@@ -0,0 +1,202 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the Mouse demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "Mouse.h"
+
+/** Buffer to hold the previously generated Mouse HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
+static uint8_t PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t)];
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Mouse_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber              = INTERFACE_ID_Mouse,
+				.ReportINEndpoint             =
+					{
+						.Address              = MOUSE_EPADDR,
+						.Size                 = MOUSE_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                = 1,
+					},
+				.PrevReportINBuffer           = PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer,
+				.PrevReportINBufferSize       = sizeof(PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer),
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		HID_Device_USBTask(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+	/* Start the PLL to multiply the 2MHz RC oscillator to 32MHz and switch the CPU core to run from it */
+	XMEGACLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ, 2000000, F_CPU);
+	XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL);
+
+	/* Start the 32MHz internal RC oscillator and start the DFLL to increase it to 48MHz using the USB SOF as a reference */
+	XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);
+	XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF, F_USB);
+
+	PMIC.CTRL = PMIC_LOLVLEN_bm | PMIC_MEDLVLEN_bm | PMIC_HILVLEN_bm;
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	ConfigSuccess &= HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
+
+	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]     HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in,out] ReportID    Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
+ *  \param[in]     ReportType  Type of the report to create, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_In or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature
+ *  \param[out]    ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
+ *  \param[out]    ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent)
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true to force the sending of the report, \c false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                         void* ReportData,
+                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize)
+{
+	USB_MouseReport_Data_t* MouseReport = (USB_MouseReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
+
+	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL    = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus();
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  MouseReport->Y = -1;
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  MouseReport->Y =  1;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  MouseReport->X = -1;
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  MouseReport->X =  1;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+	  MouseReport->Button |= (1 << 0);
+
+	if (ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
+	  MouseReport->Button |= (1 << 1);
+
+	*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t);
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in] ReportID    Report ID of the received report from the host
+ *  \param[in] ReportType  The type of report that the host has sent, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature
+ *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the received report has been stored
+ *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
+ */
+void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                          const void* ReportData,
+                                          const uint16_t ReportSize)
+{
+	// Unused (but mandatory for the HID class driver) in this demo, since there are no Host->Device reports
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Mouse.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Mouse.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..32fd46cd9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Mouse.h
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Mouse.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MOUSE_H_
+#define _MOUSE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+		                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+		                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                                         void* ReportData,
+		                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize);
+		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+		                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+		                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                                          const void* ReportData,
+		                                          const uint16_t ReportSize);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Mouse.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Mouse.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e4673aeaa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/Mouse.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Mouse Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *  \li Series AU XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxAxU)
+ *  \li Series B XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxBxU)
+ *  \li Series C XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxCxU)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Mouse Subclass</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Mouse demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Mouse using the basic USB HID
+ *  drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers required). It is
+ *  boot protocol compatible, and thus works under compatible BIOS as if
+ *  it was a native mouse (e.g. PS/2).
+ *
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function
+ *  as a mouse when the USB connection to a host is present. To use
+ *  the mouse, move the joystick to move the pointer, and push the
+ *  joystick inwards to simulate a left-button click. The HWB serves as
+ *  the right mouse button.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1af0d7667
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Mouse HID Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.mouse.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.mouse"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="Mouse HID Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.mouse.example.xmega">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.mouse"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.xmega"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atxmega128a1u"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="32000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="48000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.device.class.mouse" caption="Mouse HID Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Mouse device demo, implementing a basic USB mouse device that can send movement information to the host. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="Mouse.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="Mouse.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Mouse.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..150171c06
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mouse Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6d9df2a61
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/Mouse/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = Mouse
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..92a4f818e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
+ *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
+ *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
+ *  makefile or build system.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#define CLIENT_IP_ADDRESS                { 10,     0,    0,    1}
+	#define SERVER_IP_ADDRESS                { 10,     0,    0,    2}
+
+	#define ADAPTER_MAC_ADDRESS              {0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00}
+	#define SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS               {0x00, 0x01, 0x00, 0x01, 0x00, 0x01}
+
+	#define NO_DECODE_ETHERNET
+	#define NO_DECODE_ARP
+	#define NO_DECODE_IP
+	#define NO_DECODE_ICMP
+	#define NO_DECODE_TCP
+	#define NO_DECODE_UDP
+	#define NO_DECODE_DHCP
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fa0397910
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_RC32MCLKSRC | USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH)
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX               3
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cab6717f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,244 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+	.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x204C,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_VendorSpecificProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Header =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.CDCSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_ACM =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM,
+
+			.Capabilities           = 0x00,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Union =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union,
+
+			.MasterInterfaceNumber  = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.SlaveInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_NotificationEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.RNDIS_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.RNDIS_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA RNDIS CDC Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4ac270fc8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 1)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 2)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                64
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// RNDIS CDC Control Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t CDC_Functional_Header;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t    CDC_Functional_ACM;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t  CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             CDC_NotificationEndpoint;
+
+			// RNDIS CDC Data Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             RNDIS_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             RNDIS_DataInEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI = 0, /**< CDC CCI interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI = 1, /**< CDC DCI interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/LUFA RNDIS.inf b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/LUFA RNDIS.inf
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f34e55f99
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/LUFA RNDIS.inf
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+;     Windows LUFA RNDIS Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+
+[DefaultInstall]
+CopyINF="LUFA RNDIS.inf"
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Net
+ClassGuid={4d36e972-e325-11ce-bfc1-08002be10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+DriverVer=7/1/2012,10.0.0.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTx86, NTamd64, NTia64
+
+[ControlFlags]
+ExcludeFromSelect=*
+
+[DriverInstall]
+Characteristics=0x84 ; NCF_PHYSICAL + NCF_HAS_UI
+BusType=15
+include=netrndis.inf
+needs=Usb_Rndis.ndi
+AddReg=Rndis_AddReg_Vista
+
+[DriverInstall.Services]
+include=netrndis.inf
+needs=Usb_Rndis.ndi.Services
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C
+
+[DeviceList.NTx86]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C
+
+[DeviceList.NTia64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org"
+DESCRIPTION="LUFA USB RNDIS Demo"
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6aaf0edd4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.c
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles the
+ *  conversion of physical MAC addresses to protocol IP addresses between the host and the
+ *  device.
+ */
+
+#include "ARP.h"
+
+/** Processes an ARP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ *  to the output Ethernet frame if the host is requesting the IP or MAC address of the
+ *  virtual server device on the network.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart   Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's ARP header
+ *  \param[out] OutDataStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's ARP header
+ *
+ *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
+ */
+int16_t ARP_ProcessARPPacket(void* InDataStart,
+                             void* OutDataStart)
+{
+	DecodeARPHeader(InDataStart);
+
+	ARP_Header_t* ARPHeaderIN  = (ARP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+	ARP_Header_t* ARPHeaderOUT = (ARP_Header_t*)OutDataStart;
+
+	/* Ensure that the ARP request is a IPv4 request packet */
+	if ((SwapEndian_16(ARPHeaderIN->ProtocolType) == ETHERTYPE_IPV4) &&
+	    (SwapEndian_16(ARPHeaderIN->Operation) == ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST))
+	{
+		/* If the ARP packet is requesting the MAC or IP of the virtual webserver, return the response */
+		if (IP_COMPARE(&ARPHeaderIN->TPA, &ServerIPAddress) ||
+		    MAC_COMPARE(&ARPHeaderIN->THA, &ServerMACAddress))
+		{
+			/* Fill out the ARP response header */
+			ARPHeaderOUT->HardwareType = ARPHeaderIN->HardwareType;
+			ARPHeaderOUT->ProtocolType = ARPHeaderIN->ProtocolType;
+			ARPHeaderOUT->HLEN         = ARPHeaderIN->HLEN;
+			ARPHeaderOUT->PLEN         = ARPHeaderIN->PLEN;
+			ARPHeaderOUT->Operation    = SwapEndian_16(ARP_OPERATION_REPLY);
+
+			/* Copy over the sender MAC/IP to the target fields for the response */
+			ARPHeaderOUT->THA = ARPHeaderIN->SHA;
+			ARPHeaderOUT->TPA = ARPHeaderIN->SPA;
+
+			/* Copy over the new sender MAC/IP - MAC and IP addresses of the virtual webserver */
+			ARPHeaderOUT->SHA = ServerMACAddress;
+			ARPHeaderOUT->SPA = ServerIPAddress;
+
+			/* Return the size of the response so far */
+			return sizeof(ARP_Header_t);
+		}
+	}
+
+	return NO_RESPONSE;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8535b8545
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.h
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ARP.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ARP_H_
+#define _ARP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** ARP header operation constant, indicating a request from a host for an address translation. */
+		#define ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST            1
+
+		/** ARP header operation constant, indicating a reply from a host giving an address translation. */
+		#define ARP_OPERATION_REPLY              2
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for an ARP packet inside an Ethernet frame. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t      HardwareType; /**< Hardware type constant, indicating the hardware used */
+			uint16_t      ProtocolType; /**< Protocol being resolved, usually ETHERTYPE_IPV4 */
+
+			uint8_t       HLEN; /**< Length in bytes of the source/destination hardware addresses */
+			uint8_t       PLEN; /**< Length in bytes of the source/destination protocol addresses */
+			uint16_t      Operation; /**< Type of operation, either ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST or ARP_OPERATION_REPLY */
+
+			MAC_Address_t SHA; /**< Sender's hardware address */
+			IP_Address_t  SPA; /**< Sender's protocol address */
+			MAC_Address_t THA; /**< Target's hardware address */
+			IP_Address_t  TPA; /**< Target's protocol address */
+		} ARP_Header_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		int16_t ARP_ProcessARPPacket(void* InDataStart,
+		                             void* OutDataStart);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b3b5d6943
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.c
@@ -0,0 +1,121 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) packet handling routines. This protocol
+ *  handles the automatic IP negotiation to the host, so that the host will use the provided
+ *  IP address given to it by the device.
+ */
+
+#include "DHCP.h"
+
+/** Processes a DHCP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ *  to the output Ethernet frame if the host is requesting or accepting an IP address.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] IPHeaderInStart     Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header
+ *  \param[in] DHCPHeaderInStart   Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's DHCP header
+ *  \param[out] DHCPHeaderOutStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's DHCP header
+ *
+ *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
+ */
+int16_t DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart,
+                               void* DHCPHeaderInStart,
+                               void* DHCPHeaderOutStart)
+{
+	IP_Header_t*   IPHeaderIN    = (IP_Header_t*)IPHeaderInStart;
+	DHCP_Header_t* DHCPHeaderIN  = (DHCP_Header_t*)DHCPHeaderInStart;
+	DHCP_Header_t* DHCPHeaderOUT = (DHCP_Header_t*)DHCPHeaderOutStart;
+
+	uint8_t* DHCPOptionsINStart  = ((uint8_t*)DHCPHeaderInStart  + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
+	uint8_t* DHCPOptionsOUTStart = ((uint8_t*)DHCPHeaderOutStart + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
+
+	DecodeDHCPHeader(DHCPHeaderInStart);
+
+	/* Zero out the response DHCP packet, as much of it is legacy and left at 0 */
+	memset(DHCPHeaderOUT, 0, sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
+
+	/* Fill out the response DHCP packet */
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->HardwareType          = DHCPHeaderIN->HardwareType;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->Operation             = DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->HardwareAddressLength = DHCPHeaderIN->HardwareAddressLength;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->Hops                  = 0;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->TransactionID         = DHCPHeaderIN->TransactionID;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->ElapsedSeconds        = 0;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->Flags                 = DHCPHeaderIN->Flags;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->YourIP                = ClientIPAddress;
+	memmove(&DHCPHeaderOUT->ClientHardwareAddress, &DHCPHeaderIN->ClientHardwareAddress, sizeof(MAC_Address_t));
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->Cookie                = SwapEndian_32(DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE);
+
+	/* Alter the incoming IP packet header so that the corrected IP source and destinations are used - this means that
+	   when the response IP header is generated, it will use the corrected addresses and not the null/broatcast addresses */
+	IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress      = ClientIPAddress;
+	IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress = ServerIPAddress;
+
+	/* Process the incoming DHCP packet options */
+	while (DHCPOptionsINStart[0] != DHCP_OPTION_END)
+	{
+		/* Find the Message Type DHCP option, to determine the type of DHCP packet */
+		if (DHCPOptionsINStart[0] == DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE)
+		{
+			if ((DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER) || (DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST))
+			{
+				/* Fill out the response DHCP packet options for a DHCP OFFER or ACK response */
+
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 1;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = (DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER) ? DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_OFFER
+																								: DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_ACK;
+
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_SUBNETMASK;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 4;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0x00;
+
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_DHCPSERVER;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = sizeof(IP_Address_t);
+				memcpy(DHCPOptionsOUTStart, &ServerIPAddress, sizeof(IP_Address_t));
+				DHCPOptionsOUTStart     += sizeof(IP_Address_t);
+
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_END;
+
+				return (sizeof(DHCP_Header_t) + 12 + sizeof(IP_Address_t));
+			}
+		}
+
+		/* Go to the next DHCP option - skip one byte if option is a padding byte, else skip the complete option's size */
+		DHCPOptionsINStart += ((DHCPOptionsINStart[0] == DHCP_OPTION_PAD) ? 1 : (DHCPOptionsINStart[1] + 2));
+	}
+
+	return NO_RESPONSE;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2d57397de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.h
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DHCP.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DHCP_H_
+#define _DHCP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** DHCP operation constant, indicating a request from a host to a DHCP server. */
+		#define DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST       0x01
+
+		/** DHCP operation constant, indicating a reply from a DHCP server to a host. */
+		#define DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY         0x02
+
+		/** Hardware type constant, indicating Ethernet as a carrier. */
+		#define DHCP_HTYPE_ETHERNET       0x01
+
+		/** Magic boot protocol "cookie", inserted into all BOOTP packets (BOOTP is the carrier of DHCP). */
+		#define DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE         0x63825363
+
+		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that a subnet mask will follow. */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_SUBNETMASK    1
+
+		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that the DHCP message type constant will follow. */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE   53
+
+		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that the IP address of the DHCP server will follow. */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_DHCPSERVER    54
+
+		/** DHCP option list entry header, used to pad out option data. */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_PAD           0
+
+		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating the end of option data. */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_END           255
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, requesting that a DHCP server offer an IP address. */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER 1
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, indicating that a DHCP server is offering an IP address. */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_OFFER    2
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, requesting that a DHCP server lease a given IP address. */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST  3
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, declining an offered DHCP server IP address lease. */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DECLINE  4
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, ACKing a host IP lease request. */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_ACK      5
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, NACKing a host IP lease request. */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_NACK     6
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, indicating that a host is releasing a leased IP address. */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_RELEASE  7
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a DHCP packet inside an Ethernet frame. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  Operation; /**< DHCP operation, either DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST or DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY */
+			uint8_t  HardwareType; /**< Hardware carrier type constant */
+			uint8_t  HardwareAddressLength;  /**< Length in bytes of a hardware (MAC) address on the network */
+			uint8_t  Hops; /**< Number of hops required to reach the server, unused */
+
+			uint32_t TransactionID; /**< Unique ID of the DHCP packet, for positive matching between sent and received packets */
+
+			uint16_t ElapsedSeconds; /**< Elapsed seconds since the request was made */
+			uint16_t Flags; /**< BOOTP packet flags */
+
+			IP_Address_t ClientIP; /**< Client IP address, if already leased an IP */
+			IP_Address_t YourIP; /**< Client IP address */
+			IP_Address_t NextServerIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+			IP_Address_t RelayAgentIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+
+			uint8_t ClientHardwareAddress[16]; /**< Hardware (MAC) address of the client making a request to the DHCP server */
+			uint8_t ServerHostnameString[64]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+			uint8_t BootFileName[128]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+
+			uint32_t Cookie; /**< Magic BOOTP protocol cookie to indicate a valid packet */
+		} DHCP_Header_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		int16_t DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart,
+		                               void* DHCPHeaderInStart,
+		                               void* DHCPHeaderOutStart);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..676039537
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.c
@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Ethernet frame packet handling routines. This protocol handles the processing of raw Ethernet
+ *  frames sent and received, deferring the processing of sub-packet protocols to the appropriate
+ *  protocol handlers, such as DHCP or ARP.
+ */
+
+#include "Ethernet.h"
+
+/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a MAC address to the virtual server MAC address. */
+const MAC_Address_t ServerMACAddress    = {SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS};
+
+/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting an IP address to the virtual server IP address. */
+const IP_Address_t  ServerIPAddress     = {SERVER_IP_ADDRESS};
+
+/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a MAC address to the broadcast MAC address. */
+const MAC_Address_t BroadcastMACAddress = {BROADCAST_MAC_ADDRESS};
+
+/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a IP address to the broadcast IP address. */
+const IP_Address_t  BroadcastIPAddress  = {BROADCAST_IP_ADDRESS};
+
+/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting an IP address to the client (host) IP address. */
+const IP_Address_t  ClientIPAddress     = {CLIENT_IP_ADDRESS};
+
+
+/** Processes an incoming Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response to the output Ethernet
+ *  frame buffer if the sub protocol handlers create a valid response.
+ */
+void Ethernet_ProcessPacket(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* const FrameIN,
+                            Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* const FrameOUT)
+{
+	DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(FrameIN->FrameData);
+
+	/* Cast the incoming Ethernet frame to the Ethernet header type */
+	Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameINHeader  = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameIN->FrameData;
+	Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameOUTHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameOUT->FrameData;
+
+	int16_t                  RetSize        = NO_RESPONSE;
+
+	/* Ensure frame is addressed to either all (broadcast) or the virtual webserver, and is a type II frame */
+	if ((MAC_COMPARE(&FrameINHeader->Destination, &ServerMACAddress) ||
+	     MAC_COMPARE(&FrameINHeader->Destination, &BroadcastMACAddress)) &&
+		 (SwapEndian_16(FrameIN->FrameLength) > ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE))
+	{
+		/* Process the packet depending on its protocol */
+		switch (SwapEndian_16(FrameINHeader->EtherType))
+		{
+			case ETHERTYPE_ARP:
+				RetSize = ARP_ProcessARPPacket(&FrameIN->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)],
+				                               &FrameOUT->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)]);
+				break;
+			case ETHERTYPE_IPV4:
+				RetSize = IP_ProcessIPPacket(FrameIN,
+				                             &FrameIN->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)],
+				                             &FrameOUT->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)]);
+				break;
+		}
+
+		/* Protocol processing routine has filled a response, complete the ethernet frame header */
+		if (RetSize > 0)
+		{
+			/* Fill out the response Ethernet frame header */
+			FrameOUTHeader->Source          = ServerMACAddress;
+			FrameOUTHeader->Destination     = FrameINHeader->Source;
+			FrameOUTHeader->EtherType       = FrameINHeader->EtherType;
+
+			/* Set the response length in the buffer and indicate that a response is ready to be sent */
+			FrameOUT->FrameLength           = (sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) + RetSize);
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Check if the packet was processed */
+	if (RetSize != NO_PROCESS)
+	{
+		/* Clear the frame buffer */
+		FrameIN->FrameLength = 0;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Calculates the appropriate ethernet checksum, consisting of the addition of the one's
+ *  compliment of each word, complimented.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Data   Pointer to the packet buffer data whose checksum must be calculated
+ *  \param[in] Bytes  Number of bytes in the data buffer to process
+ *
+ *  \return A 16-bit Ethernet checksum value
+ */
+uint16_t Ethernet_Checksum16(void* Data,
+                             uint16_t Bytes)
+{
+	uint16_t* Words    = (uint16_t*)Data;
+	uint32_t  Checksum = 0;
+
+	for (uint16_t CurrWord = 0; CurrWord < (Bytes >> 1); CurrWord++)
+	  Checksum += Words[CurrWord];
+
+	while (Checksum & 0xFFFF0000)
+	  Checksum = ((Checksum & 0xFFFF) + (Checksum >> 16));
+
+	return ~Checksum;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6de4a90cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.h
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Ethernet.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ETHERNET_H_
+#define _ETHERNET_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+		#include "ICMP.h"
+		#include "TCP.h"
+		#include "UDP.h"
+		#include "DHCP.h"
+		#include "ARP.h"
+		#include "IP.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Physical MAC address of the network broadcast address. */
+		#define BROADCAST_MAC_ADDRESS            {0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF}
+
+		/** Performs a comparison between two MAC addresses, indicating if they are identical.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] MAC1  First MAC address
+		 *  \param[in] MAC2  Second MAC address
+		 *
+		 *  \return True if the addresses match, \c false otherwise
+		 */
+		#define MAC_COMPARE(MAC1, MAC2)          (memcmp(MAC1, MAC2, sizeof(MAC_Address_t)) == 0)
+
+		/** Minimum size of an Ethernet packet in bytes, to conform to the Ethernet V2 packet standard. */
+		#define ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE            0x0600
+
+		/** Return value for all sub protocol handling routines, indicating that no response packet has been generated. */
+		#define NO_RESPONSE                      0
+
+		/** Return value for all sub protocol handling routines, indicating that the packet has not yet been handled. */
+		#define NO_PROCESS                       -1
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for an Ethernet frame header. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			MAC_Address_t Destination; /**< Physical MAC address of the packet recipient */
+			MAC_Address_t Source; /**< Physics MAC address of the packet source */
+			uint16_t      EtherType; /**< Ethernet packet sub-protocol type, for Ethernet V2 packets */
+		} Ethernet_Frame_Header_t;
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern const MAC_Address_t ServerMACAddress;
+		extern const IP_Address_t  ServerIPAddress;
+		extern const MAC_Address_t BroadcastMACAddress;
+		extern const IP_Address_t  BroadcastIPAddress;
+		extern const IP_Address_t  ClientIPAddress;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void     Ethernet_ProcessPacket(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* const FrameIN,
+		                                Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* const FrameOUT);
+		uint16_t Ethernet_Checksum16(void* Data,
+		                             uint16_t Bytes);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/EthernetProtocols.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/EthernetProtocols.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9db58d5de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/EthernetProtocols.h
@@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  General Ethernet protocol constants and type defines, for use by
+ *  all network protocol portions of the TCP/IP stack.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ETHERNET_PROTOCOLS_H_
+#define _ETHERNET_PROTOCOLS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define ETHERTYPE_IPV4                   0x0800
+		#define ETHERTYPE_ARP                    0x0806
+		#define ETHERTYPE_RARP                   0x8035
+		#define ETHERTYPE_APPLETALK              0x809b
+		#define ETHERTYPE_APPLETALKARP           0x80f3
+		#define ETHERTYPE_IEEE8021Q              0x8100
+		#define ETHERTYPE_NOVELLIPX              0x8137
+		#define ETHERTYPE_NOVELL                 0x8138
+		#define ETHERTYPE_IPV6                   0x86DD
+		#define ETHERTYPE_COBRANET               0x8819
+		#define ETHERTYPE_PROVIDERBRIDGING       0x88a8
+		#define ETHERTYPE_MPLSUNICAST            0x8847
+		#define ETHERTYPE_MPLSMULTICAST          0x8848
+		#define ETHERTYPE_PPPoEDISCOVERY         0x8863
+		#define ETHERTYPE_PPPoESESSION           0x8864
+		#define ETHERTYPE_EAPOVERLAN             0x888E
+		#define ETHERTYPE_HYPERSCSI              0x889A
+		#define ETHERTYPE_ATAOVERETHERNET        0x88A2
+		#define ETHERTYPE_ETHERCAT               0x88A4
+		#define ETHERTYPE_SERCOSIII              0x88CD
+		#define ETHERTYPE_CESoE                  0x88D8
+		#define ETHERTYPE_MACSECURITY            0x88E5
+		#define ETHERTYPE_FIBRECHANNEL           0x8906
+		#define ETHERTYPE_QINQ                   0x9100
+		#define ETHERTYPE_VLLT                   0xCAFE
+
+		#define PROTOCOL_ICMP                    1
+		#define PROTOCOL_IGMP                    2
+		#define PROTOCOL_TCP                     6
+		#define PROTOCOL_UDP                     17
+		#define PROTOCOL_OSPF                    89
+		#define PROTOCOL_SCTP                    132
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for an Ethernet frame buffer data and information structure. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  FrameData[ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX]; /**< Ethernet frame contents. */
+			uint16_t FrameLength; /**< Length in bytes of the Ethernet frame stored in the buffer. */
+		} Ethernet_Frame_Info_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a protocol IP address of a device on a network. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  Octets[4]; /**< Individual bytes of an IP address */
+		} IP_Address_t;
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..20a7b709d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.c
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles
+ *  Echo requests from the host, to indicate a successful network connection between the host
+ *  and the virtual server.
+ */
+
+#include "ICMP.h"
+
+/** Processes an ICMP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ *  to the output Ethernet frame if the host is issuing a ICMP ECHO request.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] FrameIN        Pointer to the incoming Ethernet frame information structure
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's ICMP header
+ *  \param[out] OutDataStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's ICMP header
+ *
+ *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
+ */
+int16_t ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* const FrameIN,
+                               void* InDataStart,
+                               void* OutDataStart)
+{
+	ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeaderIN  = (ICMP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+	ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeaderOUT = (ICMP_Header_t*)OutDataStart;
+
+	DecodeICMPHeader(InDataStart);
+
+	/* Determine if the ICMP packet is an echo request (ping) */
+	if (ICMPHeaderIN->Type == ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREQUEST)
+	{
+		/* Fill out the ICMP response packet */
+		ICMPHeaderOUT->Type     = ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREPLY;
+		ICMPHeaderOUT->Code     = 0;
+		ICMPHeaderOUT->Checksum = 0;
+		ICMPHeaderOUT->Id       = ICMPHeaderIN->Id;
+		ICMPHeaderOUT->Sequence = ICMPHeaderIN->Sequence;
+
+		intptr_t DataSize = FrameIN->FrameLength - ((((intptr_t)InDataStart + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)) - (intptr_t)FrameIN->FrameData));
+
+		/* Copy the remaining payload to the response - echo requests should echo back any sent data */
+		memmove(&((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)],
+		        &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)],
+			    DataSize);
+
+		ICMPHeaderOUT->Checksum = Ethernet_Checksum16(ICMPHeaderOUT, (DataSize + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)));
+
+		/* Return the size of the response so far */
+		return (DataSize + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t));
+	}
+
+	return NO_RESPONSE;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0226d35ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.h
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ICMP.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ICMP_H_
+#define _ICMP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP ECHO Reply message. */
+		#define ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREPLY              0
+
+		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating a packet destination is unreachable. */
+		#define ICMP_TYPE_DESTINATIONUNREACHABLE 3
+
+		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Source Quench message. */
+		#define ICMP_TYPE_SOURCEQUENCH           4
+
+		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Redirect message. */
+		#define ICMP_TYPE_REDIRECTMESSAGE        5
+
+		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP ECHO Request message. */
+		#define ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREQUEST            8
+
+		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Time Exceeded message. */
+		#define ICMP_TYPE_TIMEEXCEEDED           11
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for an ICMP message header. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t       Type; /**< ICMP message type, an \c ICMP_TYPE_* constant */
+			uint8_t       Code; /**< ICMP message code, indicating the message value */
+			uint16_t      Checksum; /**< Ethernet checksum of the ICMP message */
+			uint16_t      Id; /**< Id of the ICMP message */
+			uint16_t      Sequence; /**< Sequence number of the ICMP message, to link together message responses */
+		} ICMP_Header_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		int16_t ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* const FrameIN,
+		                               void* InDataStart,
+		                               void* OutDataStart);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..15013ce9d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.c
@@ -0,0 +1,116 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Internet Protocol (IP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles IP packets from the
+ *  host which typically encapsulate other protocols such as ICMP, UDP and TCP.
+ */
+
+#include "IP.h"
+
+/** Processes an IP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ *  to the output Ethernet frame if one is created by a sub-protocol handler.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] FrameIN        Pointer to the incoming Ethernet frame information structure
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header
+ *  \param[out] OutDataStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's IP header
+ *
+ *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE if no
+ *           response was generated, NO_PROCESS if the packet processing was deferred until the
+ *           next Ethernet packet handler iteration
+ */
+int16_t IP_ProcessIPPacket(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* const FrameIN,
+                           void* InDataStart,
+                           void* OutDataStart)
+{
+	DecodeIPHeader(InDataStart);
+
+	IP_Header_t* IPHeaderIN  = (IP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+	IP_Header_t* IPHeaderOUT = (IP_Header_t*)OutDataStart;
+
+	/* Header length is specified in number of longs in the packet header, convert to bytes */
+	uint16_t HeaderLengthBytes = (IPHeaderIN->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t));
+
+	int16_t  RetSize = NO_RESPONSE;
+
+	/* Check to ensure the IP packet is addressed to the virtual webserver's IP or the broadcast IP address */
+	if (!(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress, &ServerIPAddress)) &&
+	    !(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress, &BroadcastIPAddress)))
+	{
+		return NO_RESPONSE;
+	}
+
+	/* Pass off the IP payload to the appropriate protocol processing routine */
+	switch (IPHeaderIN->Protocol)
+	{
+		case PROTOCOL_ICMP:
+			RetSize = ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(FrameIN,
+			                                 &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes],
+			                                 &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]);
+			break;
+		case PROTOCOL_TCP:
+			RetSize = TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(InDataStart,
+			                               &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes],
+			                               &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]);
+			break;
+		case PROTOCOL_UDP:
+			RetSize = UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(InDataStart,
+			                               &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes],
+			                               &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	/* Check to see if the protocol processing routine has filled out a response */
+	if (RetSize > 0)
+	{
+		/* Fill out the response IP packet header */
+		IPHeaderOUT->TotalLength        = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(IP_Header_t) + RetSize);
+		IPHeaderOUT->TypeOfService      = 0;
+		IPHeaderOUT->HeaderLength       = (sizeof(IP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
+		IPHeaderOUT->Version            = 4;
+		IPHeaderOUT->Flags              = 0;
+		IPHeaderOUT->FragmentOffset     = 0;
+		IPHeaderOUT->Identification     = 0;
+		IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = 0;
+		IPHeaderOUT->Protocol           = IPHeaderIN->Protocol;
+		IPHeaderOUT->TTL                = DEFAULT_TTL;
+		IPHeaderOUT->SourceAddress      = IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress;
+		IPHeaderOUT->DestinationAddress = IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress;
+
+		IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = Ethernet_Checksum16(IPHeaderOUT, sizeof(IP_Header_t));
+
+		/* Return the size of the response so far */
+		return (sizeof(IP_Header_t) + RetSize);
+	}
+
+	return RetSize;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..645d7a9da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for IP.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _IP_H_
+#define _IP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Protocol IP address of the broadcast address. */
+		#define BROADCAST_IP_ADDRESS             {0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF}
+
+		/** Default Time To Live (TTL) value for sent packets, indicating the maximum allowable hops until their destination
+		 *  is reached.
+		 */
+		#define DEFAULT_TTL                      128
+
+		/** Performs a comparison between two IP addresses, indicating if they are identical.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] IP1  First IP address
+		 *  \param[in] IP2  Second IP address
+		 *
+		 *  \return True if the addresses match, \c false otherwise
+		 */
+		#define IP_COMPARE(IP1, IP2)             (memcmp(IP1, IP2, sizeof(IP_Address_t)) == 0)
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define of an IP packet header. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			unsigned     HeaderLength   : 4; /**< Total length of the packet header, in 4-byte blocks */
+			unsigned     Version        : 4; /**< IP protocol version */
+			uint8_t      TypeOfService; /**< Special service type identifier, indicating delay/throughput/reliability levels */
+			uint16_t     TotalLength; /**< Total length of the IP packet, in bytes */
+
+			uint16_t     Identification; /**< Identification value for identifying fragmented packets */
+			unsigned     FragmentOffset : 13; /**< Offset of this IP fragment */
+			unsigned     Flags          : 3; /**< Fragment flags, to indicate if a packet is fragmented */
+
+			uint8_t      TTL; /**< Maximum allowable number of hops to reach the packet destination */
+			uint8_t      Protocol; /**< Encapsulated protocol type */
+			uint16_t     HeaderChecksum; /**< Ethernet checksum of the IP header */
+
+			IP_Address_t SourceAddress; /**< Source protocol IP address of the packet */
+			IP_Address_t DestinationAddress; /**< Destination protocol IP address of the packet */
+		} IP_Header_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		int16_t IP_ProcessIPPacket(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* const FrameIN,
+		                           void* InDataStart,
+		                           void* OutDataStart);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..47e00a146
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.c
@@ -0,0 +1,277 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/* Protocol decoders for Ethernet, TCP, IP, ICMP and ARP. Each of these routines
+   accepts a header to the appropriate protocol and prints out pertinent information
+   on the packet through the serial port.
+
+   To disable printing of a specific protocol, define the token NO_DECODE_{Protocol}
+   in the project makefile, and pass it to the compiler using the -D switch.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Protocol decoding routines, for the plain-text decoding of Ethernet frames for debugging purposes.
+ *  Enabled protocol decoders will print incoming Ethernet frame contents through the USART in a human
+ *  readable format.
+ *
+ *  Note that the USART is a slow transmission medium, and will slow down packet processing considerably.
+ *  Packet decoding routines can be disabled by defining NO_DECODE_{Protocol Name} in the project makefile
+ *  and passing it to the compiler via the -D switch.
+ */
+
+#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+
+/** Decodes an Ethernet frame header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of an Ethernet frame of data
+ */
+void DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_ETHERNET)
+	Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("\r\n"));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("  ETHERNET\r\n"));
+
+	if (!(MAC_COMPARE(&FrameHeader->Destination, &ServerMACAddress)) &&
+	    !(MAC_COMPARE(&FrameHeader->Destination, &BroadcastMACAddress)))
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR("  + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n"));
+		return;
+	}
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("  + MAC Source : %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), FrameHeader->Source.Octets[0],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[1],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[2],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[3],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[4],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[5]);
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("  + MAC Dest: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"),    FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[0],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[1],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[2],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[3],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[4],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[5]);
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("  + Protocol: 0x%04x\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(FrameHeader->EtherType));
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes an ARP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of an ARP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeARPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_ARP)
+	ARP_Header_t* ARPHeader = (ARP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("   \\\r\n    ARP\r\n"));
+
+	if (!(IP_COMPARE(&ARPHeader->TPA, &ServerIPAddress)) &&
+	    !(MAC_COMPARE(&ARPHeader->THA, &ServerMACAddress)))
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR("    + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n"));
+		return;
+	}
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + Protocol: %x\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->ProtocolType));
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + Operation: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->Operation));
+
+	if (SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->ProtocolType) == ETHERTYPE_IPV4)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR("    + SHA MAC: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[0],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[1],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[2],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[3],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[4],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[5]);
+
+		printf_P(PSTR("    + SPA IP: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[0],
+		                                                ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[1],
+		                                                ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[2],
+		                                                ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[3]);
+
+		printf_P(PSTR("    + THA MAC: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), ARPHeader->THA.Octets[0],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[1],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[2],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[3],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[4],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[5]);
+
+		printf_P(PSTR("    + TPA IP: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[0],
+		                                                ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[1],
+		                                                ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[2],
+		                                                ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[3]);
+	}
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes an IP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of an IP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeIPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_IP)
+	IP_Header_t* IPHeader  = (IP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+
+	uint16_t HeaderLengthBytes = (IPHeader->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("   \\\r\n    IP\r\n"));
+
+	if (!(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeader->DestinationAddress, &ServerIPAddress)))
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR("    + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n"));
+		return;
+	}
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + Header Length: %u Bytes\r\n"), HeaderLengthBytes);
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + Packet Version: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->Version);
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + Total Length: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(IPHeader->TotalLength));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + Protocol: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->Protocol);
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + TTL: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->TTL);
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + IP Src: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[0],
+	                                                IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[1],
+	                                                IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[2],
+	                                                IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[3]);
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + IP Dst: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[0],
+	                                                IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[1],
+	                                                IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[2],
+	                                                IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[3]);
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes an ICMP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of an ICMP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeICMPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_ICMP)
+	ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeader  = (ICMP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    \\\r\n     ICMP\r\n"));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Type: %u\r\n"), ICMPHeader->Type);
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Code: %u\r\n"), ICMPHeader->Code);
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes a TCP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of a TCP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeTCPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_TCP)
+	TCP_Header_t* TCPHeader  = (TCP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+
+	uint16_t               HeaderLengthBytes = (TCPHeader->DataOffset * sizeof(uint32_t));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    \\\r\n     TCP\r\n"));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Header Length: %u Bytes\r\n"), HeaderLengthBytes);
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Source Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(TCPHeader->SourcePort));
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Destination Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(TCPHeader->DestinationPort));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Sequence Number: %lu\r\n"), SwapEndian_32(TCPHeader->SequenceNumber));
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Acknowledgment Number: %lu\r\n"), SwapEndian_32(TCPHeader->AcknowledgmentNumber));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Flags: 0x%02X\r\n"), TCPHeader->Flags);
+
+	if (TCP_GetPortState(TCPHeader->DestinationPort) == TCP_Port_Closed)
+	  printf_P(PSTR("     + NOT LISTENING ON DESTINATION PORT\r\n"));
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes an UDP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of a UDP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeUDPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_UDP)
+	UDP_Header_t* UDPHeader = (UDP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    \\\r\n     UDP\r\n"));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Source Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->SourcePort));
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Destination Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->DestinationPort));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Data Length: %d\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->Length));
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes an DHCP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of a DHCP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeDHCPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_DHCP)
+	uint8_t* DHCPOptions = (InDataStart + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     \\\r\n      DHCP\r\n"));
+
+	while (DHCPOptions[0] != DHCP_OPTION_END)
+	{
+		if (DHCPOptions[0] == DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE)
+		{
+			switch (DHCPOptions[2])
+			{
+				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER:
+					printf_P(PSTR("      + DISCOVER\r\n"));
+					break;
+				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST:
+					printf_P(PSTR("      + REQUEST\r\n"));
+					break;
+				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_RELEASE:
+					printf_P(PSTR("      + RELEASE\r\n"));
+					break;
+				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DECLINE:
+					printf_P(PSTR("      + DECLINE\r\n"));
+					break;
+			}
+		}
+
+		DHCPOptions += ((DHCPOptions[0] == DHCP_OPTION_PAD) ? 1 : (DHCPOptions[1] + 2));
+	}
+
+	#endif
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6a7d20195
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.h
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ProtocolDecoders.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _PROTOCOL_DECODERS_H_
+#define _PROTOCOL_DECODERS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(void* InDataStart);
+		void DecodeARPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+		void DecodeIPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+		void DecodeICMPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+		void DecodeTCPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+		void DecodeUDPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+		void DecodeDHCPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..892c5030b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.c
@@ -0,0 +1,632 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles the reliable in-order transmission
+ *  and reception of packets to and from devices on a network, to "ports" on the device. It is used in situations where data
+ *  delivery must be reliable and correct, e.g. HTTP, TELNET and most other non-streaming protocols.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_TCP_C
+#include "TCP.h"
+
+/** Port state table array. This contains the current status of TCP ports in the device. To save on space, only open ports are
+ *  stored - closed ports may be overwritten at any time, and the system will assume any ports not present in the array are closed. This
+ *  allows for MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS to be less than the number of ports used by the application if desired.
+ */
+TCP_PortState_t        PortStateTable[MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS];
+
+/** Connection state table array. This contains the current status of TCP connections in the device. To save on space, only active
+ *  (non-closed) connections are stored - closed connections may be overwritten at any time, and the system will assume any connections
+ *  not present in the array are closed.
+ */
+TCP_ConnectionState_t  ConnectionStateTable[MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS];
+
+
+/** Task to handle the calling of each registered application's callback function, to process and generate TCP packets at the application
+ *  level. If an application produces a response, this task constructs the appropriate Ethernet frame and places it into the Ethernet OUT
+ *  buffer for later transmission.
+ */
+void TCP_TCPTask(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
+		         Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* const FrameOUT)
+{
+	/* Run each application in sequence, to process incoming and generate outgoing packets */
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find the corresponding port entry in the port table */
+		for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS; PTableEntry++)
+		{
+			/* Run the application handler for the port */
+			if ((PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port  == ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port) &&
+			    (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State == TCP_Port_Open))
+			{
+				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry],
+				                                               &ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Bail out early if there is already a frame waiting to be sent in the Ethernet OUT buffer */
+	if (FrameOUT->FrameLength)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Send response packets from each application as the TCP packet buffers are filled by the applications */
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* For each completely received packet, pass it along to the listening application */
+		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT) &&
+		    (ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Ready))
+		{
+			Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameOUTHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameOUT->FrameData;
+			IP_Header_t*             IPHeaderOUT    = (IP_Header_t*)&FrameOUT->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)];
+			TCP_Header_t*            TCPHeaderOUT   = (TCP_Header_t*)&FrameOUT->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) +
+			                                                                              sizeof(IP_Header_t)];
+			void*                    TCPDataOUT     = &FrameOUT->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) +
+			                                                               sizeof(IP_Header_t) +
+			                                                               sizeof(TCP_Header_t)];
+
+			uint16_t PacketSize = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Length;
+
+			/* Fill out the TCP data */
+			TCPHeaderOUT->SourcePort           = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port;
+			TCPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort      = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort;
+			TCPHeaderOUT->SequenceNumber       = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberOut);
+			TCPHeaderOUT->AcknowledgmentNumber = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberIn);
+			TCPHeaderOUT->DataOffset           = (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
+			TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize           = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE);
+
+			TCPHeaderOUT->Flags                = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
+			TCPHeaderOUT->UrgentPointer        = 0;
+			TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = 0;
+			TCPHeaderOUT->Reserved             = 0;
+
+			memcpy(TCPDataOUT, ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Data, PacketSize);
+
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberOut += PacketSize;
+
+			TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = TCP_Checksum16(TCPHeaderOUT, &ServerIPAddress,
+			                                                    &ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress,
+			                                                    (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) + PacketSize));
+
+			PacketSize += sizeof(TCP_Header_t);
+
+			/* Fill out the response IP header */
+			IPHeaderOUT->TotalLength        = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(IP_Header_t) + PacketSize);
+			IPHeaderOUT->TypeOfService      = 0;
+			IPHeaderOUT->HeaderLength       = (sizeof(IP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
+			IPHeaderOUT->Version            = 4;
+			IPHeaderOUT->Flags              = 0;
+			IPHeaderOUT->FragmentOffset     = 0;
+			IPHeaderOUT->Identification     = 0;
+			IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = 0;
+			IPHeaderOUT->Protocol           = PROTOCOL_TCP;
+			IPHeaderOUT->TTL                = DEFAULT_TTL;
+			IPHeaderOUT->SourceAddress      = ServerIPAddress;
+			IPHeaderOUT->DestinationAddress = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress;
+
+			IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = Ethernet_Checksum16(IPHeaderOUT, sizeof(IP_Header_t));
+
+			PacketSize += sizeof(IP_Header_t);
+
+			/* Fill out the response Ethernet frame header */
+			FrameOUTHeader->Source          = ServerMACAddress;
+			FrameOUTHeader->Destination     = (MAC_Address_t){{0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00}};
+			FrameOUTHeader->EtherType       = SwapEndian_16(ETHERTYPE_IPV4);
+
+			PacketSize += sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t);
+
+			/* Set the response length in the buffer and indicate that a response is ready to be sent */
+			FrameOUT->FrameLength           = PacketSize;
+
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Ready = false;
+
+			break;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+/** Initializes the TCP protocol handler, clearing the port and connection state tables. This must be called before TCP packets are
+ *  processed.
+ */
+void TCP_Init(void)
+{
+	/* Initialize the port state table with all CLOSED entries */
+	for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS; PTableEntry++)
+	  PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = TCP_Port_Closed;
+
+	/* Initialize the connection table with all CLOSED entries */
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	  ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State = TCP_Connection_Closed;
+}
+
+/** Sets the state and callback handler of the given port, specified in big endian to the given state.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Port     Port whose state and callback function to set, specified in big endian
+ *  \param[in] State    New state of the port, a value from the \ref TCP_PortStates_t enum
+ *  \param[in] Handler  Application callback handler for the port
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the port state was set, \c false otherwise (no more space in the port state table)
+ */
+bool TCP_SetPortState(const uint16_t Port,
+                      const uint8_t State,
+                      void (*Handler)(TCP_ConnectionState_t*, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t*))
+{
+	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
+
+	/* Check to see if the port entry is already in the port state table */
+	for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS; PTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find existing entry for the port in the table, update it if found */
+		if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port == Port)
+		{
+			PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = State;
+			PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler = Handler;
+			return true;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Check if trying to open the port -- if so we need to find an unused (closed) entry and replace it */
+	if (State == TCP_Port_Open)
+	{
+		for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS; PTableEntry++)
+		{
+			/* Find a closed port entry in the table, change it to the given port and state */
+			if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State == TCP_Port_Closed)
+			{
+				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port  = Port;
+				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = State;
+				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler = Handler;
+				return true;
+			}
+		}
+
+		/* Port not in table and no room to add it, return failure */
+		return false;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Port not in table but trying to close it, so operation successful */
+		return true;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the current state of a given TCP port, specified in big endian.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Port  TCP port whose state is to be retrieved, given in big-endian
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the \ref TCP_PortStates_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t TCP_GetPortState(const uint16_t Port)
+{
+	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
+
+	for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS; PTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find existing entry for the port in the table, return the port status if found */
+		if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port == Port)
+		  return PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State;
+	}
+
+	/* Port not in table, assume closed */
+	return TCP_Port_Closed;
+}
+
+/** Sets the connection state of the given port, remote address and remote port to the given TCP connection state. If the
+ *  connection exists in the connection state table it is updated, otherwise it is created if possible.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Port           TCP port of the connection on the device, specified in big endian
+ *  \param[in] RemoteAddress  Remote protocol IP address of the connected device
+ *  \param[in] RemotePort     TCP port of the remote device in the connection, specified in big endian
+ *  \param[in] State          TCP connection state, a value from the \ref TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the connection was updated or created, \c false otherwise (no more space in the connection state table)
+ */
+bool TCP_SetConnectionState(const uint16_t Port,
+                            const IP_Address_t* RemoteAddress,
+                            const uint16_t RemotePort,
+                            const uint8_t State)
+{
+	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
+
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find port entry in the table */
+		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) &&
+		     IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, RemoteAddress) &&
+			 ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort)
+		{
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State = State;
+			return true;
+		}
+	}
+
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find empty entry in the table */
+		if (ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State == TCP_Connection_Closed)
+		{
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port          = Port;
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress = *RemoteAddress;
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort    = RemotePort;
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State         = State;
+			return true;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the current state of a given TCP connection to a host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Port           TCP port on the device in the connection, specified in big endian
+ *  \param[in] RemoteAddress  Remote protocol IP address of the connected host
+ *  \param[in] RemotePort     Remote TCP port of the connected host, specified in big endian
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the \ref TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t TCP_GetConnectionState(const uint16_t Port,
+                               const IP_Address_t* RemoteAddress,
+                               const uint16_t RemotePort)
+{
+	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
+
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find port entry in the table */
+		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) &&
+		     IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, RemoteAddress) &&
+			 ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort)
+
+		{
+			return ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return TCP_Connection_Closed;
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the connection info structure of a given connection to a host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Port           TCP port on the device in the connection, specified in big endian
+ *  \param[in] RemoteAddress  Remote protocol IP address of the connected host
+ *  \param[in] RemotePort     Remote TCP port of the connected host, specified in big endian
+ *
+ *  \return ConnectionInfo structure of the connection if found, NULL otherwise
+ */
+TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* TCP_GetConnectionInfo(const uint16_t Port,
+                                            const IP_Address_t* RemoteAddress,
+                                            const uint16_t RemotePort)
+{
+	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
+
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find port entry in the table */
+		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) &&
+		     IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, RemoteAddress) &&
+			 ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort)
+		{
+			return &ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return NULL;
+}
+
+/** Processes a TCP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ *  to the output Ethernet frame if one is created by a application handler.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] IPHeaderInStart     Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header
+ *  \param[in] TCPHeaderInStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's TCP header
+ *  \param[out] TCPHeaderOutStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's TCP header
+ *
+ *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE if no
+ *           response was generated, NO_PROCESS if the packet processing was deferred until the
+ *           next Ethernet packet handler iteration
+ */
+int16_t TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart,
+                             void* TCPHeaderInStart,
+                             void* TCPHeaderOutStart)
+{
+	IP_Header_t*  IPHeaderIN   = (IP_Header_t*)IPHeaderInStart;
+	TCP_Header_t* TCPHeaderIN  = (TCP_Header_t*)TCPHeaderInStart;
+	TCP_Header_t* TCPHeaderOUT = (TCP_Header_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart;
+
+	TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* ConnectionInfo;
+
+	DecodeTCPHeader(TCPHeaderInStart);
+
+	bool PacketResponse = false;
+
+	/* Check if the destination port is open and allows incoming connections */
+	if (TCP_GetPortState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort) == TCP_Port_Open)
+	{
+		/* Detect SYN from host to start a connection */
+		if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_SYN)
+		  TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Listen);
+
+		/* Detect RST from host to abort existing connection */
+		if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_RST)
+		{
+			if (TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+			                           TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed))
+			{
+				TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_RST | TCP_FLAG_ACK);
+				PacketResponse = true;
+			}
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			/* Process the incoming TCP packet based on the current connection state for the sender and port */
+			switch (TCP_GetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort))
+			{
+				case TCP_Connection_Listen:
+					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_SYN)
+					{
+						/* SYN connection starts a connection with a peer */
+						if (TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+						                           TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_SYNReceived))
+						{
+							TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_SYN | TCP_FLAG_ACK);
+
+							ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+							ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn  = (SwapEndian_32(TCPHeaderIN->SequenceNumber) + 1);
+							ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut = 0;
+							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse      = false;
+						}
+						else
+						{
+							TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_RST;
+						}
+
+						PacketResponse      = true;
+					}
+
+					break;
+				case TCP_Connection_SYNReceived:
+					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK)
+					{
+						/* ACK during the connection process completes the connection to a peer */
+
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Established);
+
+						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
+					}
+
+					break;
+				case TCP_Connection_Established:
+					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK))
+					{
+						/* FIN ACK when connected to a peer starts the finalization process */
+
+						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK);
+						PacketResponse      = true;
+
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_CloseWait);
+
+						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++;
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
+					}
+					else if ((TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK) || (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_ACK | TCP_FLAG_PSH)))
+					{
+						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+						/* Check if the buffer is currently in use either by a buffered data to send, or receive */
+						if ((ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse == false) && (ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Ready == false))
+						{
+							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_IN;
+							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse     = true;
+							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length    = 0;
+						}
+
+						/* Check if the buffer has been claimed by us to read in data from the peer */
+						if ((ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_IN) &&
+							(ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length != TCP_WINDOW_SIZE))
+						{
+							uint16_t IPOffset   = (IPHeaderIN->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t));
+							uint16_t TCPOffset  = (TCPHeaderIN->DataOffset * sizeof(uint32_t));
+							uint16_t DataLength = (SwapEndian_16(IPHeaderIN->TotalLength) - IPOffset - TCPOffset);
+
+							/* Copy the packet data into the buffer */
+							memcpy(&ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Data[ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length],
+								   &((uint8_t*)TCPHeaderInStart)[TCPOffset],
+								   DataLength);
+
+							ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn += DataLength;
+							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length    += DataLength;
+
+							/* Check if the buffer is full or if the PSH flag is set, if so indicate buffer ready */
+							if ((!(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE - ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length)) || (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_PSH))
+							{
+								ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse = false;
+								ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Ready = true;
+
+								TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
+								PacketResponse      = true;
+							}
+						}
+						else
+						{
+							/* Buffer is currently in use by the application, defer processing of the incoming packet */
+							return NO_PROCESS;
+						}
+					}
+
+					break;
+				case TCP_Connection_Closing:
+						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_ACK | TCP_FLAG_FIN);
+						PacketResponse      = true;
+
+						ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse = false;
+
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_FINWait1);
+
+					break;
+				case TCP_Connection_FINWait1:
+					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK))
+					{
+						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
+						PacketResponse      = true;
+
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++;
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
+
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed);
+					}
+					else if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK)
+					{
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_FINWait2);
+					}
+
+					break;
+				case TCP_Connection_FINWait2:
+					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK))
+					{
+						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
+						PacketResponse      = true;
+
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++;
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
+
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed);
+					}
+
+					break;
+				case TCP_Connection_CloseWait:
+					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK)
+					{
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed);
+					}
+
+					break;
+			}
+		}
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Port is not open, indicate via a RST/ACK response to the sender */
+		TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_RST | TCP_FLAG_ACK);
+		PacketResponse      = true;
+	}
+
+	/* Check if we need to respond to the sent packet */
+	if (PacketResponse)
+	{
+		ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+		                                       TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+		TCPHeaderOUT->SourcePort           = TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort;
+		TCPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort      = TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort;
+		TCPHeaderOUT->SequenceNumber       = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut);
+		TCPHeaderOUT->AcknowledgmentNumber = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn);
+		TCPHeaderOUT->DataOffset           = (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
+
+		if (!(ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse))
+		  TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize         = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE);
+		else
+		  TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize         = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE - ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length);
+
+		TCPHeaderOUT->UrgentPointer        = 0;
+		TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = 0;
+		TCPHeaderOUT->Reserved             = 0;
+
+		TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = TCP_Checksum16(TCPHeaderOUT, &IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress,
+		                                                    &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, sizeof(TCP_Header_t));
+
+		return sizeof(TCP_Header_t);
+	}
+
+	return NO_RESPONSE;
+}
+
+/** Calculates the appropriate TCP checksum, consisting of the addition of the one's compliment of each word,
+ *  complimented.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] TCPHeaderOutStart   Pointer to the start of the packet's outgoing TCP header
+ *  \param[in] SourceAddress       Source protocol IP address of the outgoing IP header
+ *  \param[in] DestinationAddress  Destination protocol IP address of the outgoing IP header
+ *  \param[in] TCPOutSize          Size in bytes of the TCP data header and payload
+ *
+ *  \return A 16-bit TCP checksum value
+ */
+static uint16_t TCP_Checksum16(void* TCPHeaderOutStart,
+                               const IP_Address_t* SourceAddress,
+                               const IP_Address_t* DestinationAddress,
+                               uint16_t TCPOutSize)
+{
+	uint32_t Checksum = 0;
+
+	/* TCP/IP checksums are the addition of the one's compliment of each word including the IP pseudo-header,
+	   complimented */
+
+	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)SourceAddress)[0];
+	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)SourceAddress)[1];
+	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)DestinationAddress)[0];
+	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)DestinationAddress)[1];
+	Checksum += SwapEndian_16(PROTOCOL_TCP);
+	Checksum += SwapEndian_16(TCPOutSize);
+
+	for (uint16_t CurrWord = 0; CurrWord < (TCPOutSize >> 1); CurrWord++)
+	  Checksum += ((uint16_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart)[CurrWord];
+
+	if (TCPOutSize & 0x01)
+	  Checksum += (((uint16_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart)[TCPOutSize >> 1] & 0x00FF);
+
+	while (Checksum & 0xFFFF0000)
+	  Checksum = ((Checksum & 0xFFFF) + (Checksum >> 16));
+
+	return ~Checksum;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..92fbdf362
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.h
@@ -0,0 +1,260 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for TCP.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _TCP_H_
+#define _TCP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Maximum number of TCP ports which can be open at the one time. */
+		#define MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS              1
+
+		/** Maximum number of TCP connections which can be sustained at the one time. */
+		#define MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS             3
+
+		/** TCP window size, giving the maximum number of bytes which can be buffered at the one time. */
+		#define TCP_WINDOW_SIZE                 512
+
+		/** Port number for HTTP transmissions. */
+		#define TCP_PORT_HTTP                   SwapEndian_16(80)
+
+		/** Data direction indicator for a TCP application buffer, indicating data from host-to-device. */
+		#define TCP_PACKETDIR_IN                false
+
+		/** Data direction indicator for a TCP application buffer, indicating data from device-to-host. */
+		#define TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT               true
+
+		/** Congestion Window Reduced TCP flag mask. */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_CWR                    (1 << 7)
+
+		/** Explicit Congestion Notification TCP flag mask. */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_ECE                    (1 << 6)
+
+		/** Urgent TCP flag mask. */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_URG                    (1 << 5)
+
+		/** Data Acknowledge TCP flag mask. */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_ACK                    (1 << 4)
+
+		/** Data Push TCP flag mask. */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_PSH                    (1 << 3)
+
+		/** Reset TCP flag mask. */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_RST                    (1 << 2)
+
+		/** Synchronize TCP flag mask. */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_SYN                    (1 << 1)
+
+		/** Connection Finalize TCP flag mask. */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_FIN                    (1 << 0)
+
+		/** Application macro: Determines if the given application buffer contains a packet received from the host
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to check
+		 *
+		 *  \return Boolean \c true if the buffer contains a packet from the host, \c false otherwise
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_HAS_RECEIVED_PACKET(Buffer)  (Buffer->Ready && (Buffer->Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_IN))
+
+		/** Application macro: Indicates if the application buffer is currently locked by the application for device-to-host transfers.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to check
+		 *
+		 *  \return Boolean \c true if the buffer has been captured by the application for device-to-host transmissions, \c false otherwise
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_HAVE_CAPTURED_BUFFER(Buffer) (!(Buffer->Ready) && Buffer->InUse && (Buffer->Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT))
+
+		/** Application macro: Indicates if the application can lock the buffer for multiple continued device-to-host transmissions.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to check
+		 *
+		 *  \return Boolean \c true if the buffer may be captured by the application for device-to-host transmissions, \c false otherwise
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_CAN_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer)   Buffer->InUse
+
+		/** Application macro: Captures the application buffer, locking it for device-to-host transmissions only. This should be
+		 *  performed when the application needs to transmit several packets worth of data in succession with no interruptions from the host.
+		 *
+		 *  \pre The application must check that the buffer can be locked first using TCP_APP_CAN_CAPTURE_BUFFER().
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to lock
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer)       do { Buffer->Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT; Buffer->InUse = true; } while (0)
+
+		/** Application macro: Releases a captured application buffer, allowing for host-to-device packets to be received.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to release
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_RELEASE_BUFFER(Buffer)       do { Buffer->InUse = false; } while (0)
+
+		/** Application macro: Sends the contents of the given application buffer to the host.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to send
+		 *  \param[in] Len     Length of data contained in the buffer
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Len)     do { Buffer->Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT; Buffer->Length = Len; Buffer->Ready = true; } while (0)
+
+		/** Application macro: Clears the application buffer, ready for a packet to be written to it.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to clear
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_CLEAR_BUFFER(Buffer)         do { Buffer->Ready = false; Buffer->Length = 0; } while (0)
+
+		/** Application macro: Closes an open connection to a host.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Connection  Open TCP connection to close
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(Connection)  do { Connection->State = TCP_Connection_Closing;  } while (0)
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for possible TCP port states. */
+		enum TCP_PortStates_t
+		{
+			TCP_Port_Closed            = 0, /**< TCP port closed, no connections to a host may be made on this port. */
+			TCP_Port_Open              = 1, /**< TCP port open, connections to a host may be made on this port. */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for possible TCP connection states. */
+		enum TCP_ConnectionStates_t
+		{
+			TCP_Connection_Listen      = 0, /**< Listening for a connection from a host */
+			TCP_Connection_SYNSent     = 1, /**< Unused */
+			TCP_Connection_SYNReceived = 2, /**< SYN received, waiting for ACK */
+			TCP_Connection_Established = 3, /**< Connection established in both directions */
+			TCP_Connection_FINWait1    = 4, /**< Closing, waiting for ACK */
+			TCP_Connection_FINWait2    = 5, /**< Closing, waiting for FIN ACK */
+			TCP_Connection_CloseWait   = 6, /**< Closing, waiting for ACK */
+			TCP_Connection_Closing     = 7, /**< Unused */
+			TCP_Connection_LastACK     = 8, /**< Unused */
+			TCP_Connection_TimeWait    = 9, /**< Unused */
+			TCP_Connection_Closed      = 10, /**< Connection closed in both directions */
+		};
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a TCP connection buffer structure, including size, data and direction. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t               Length; /**< Length of data in the TCP application buffer */
+			uint8_t                Data[TCP_WINDOW_SIZE]; /**< TCP application data buffer */
+			bool                   Direction; /**< Buffer transmission direction, either TCP_PACKETDIR_IN  or TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT */
+			bool                   Ready; /**< If data from host, indicates buffer ready to be read, otherwise indicates
+			                               *   buffer ready to be sent to the host
+			                               */
+			bool                   InUse; /**< Indicates if the buffer is locked to to the current direction, and cannot be changed */
+		} TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a TCP connection information structure. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t               SequenceNumberIn; /**< Current TCP sequence number for host-to-device */
+			uint32_t               SequenceNumberOut; /**< Current TCP sequence number for device-to-host */
+			TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t Buffer; /**< Connection application data buffer */
+		} TCP_ConnectionInfo_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a complete TCP connection state. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t               Port; /**< Connection port number on the device */
+			uint16_t               RemotePort; /**< Connection port number on the host */
+			IP_Address_t           RemoteAddress; /**< Connection protocol IP address of the host */
+			TCP_ConnectionInfo_t   Info; /**< Connection information, including application buffer */
+			uint8_t                State; /**< Current connection state, a value from the \ref TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum */
+		} TCP_ConnectionState_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a TCP port state. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t               Port; /**< TCP port number on the device */
+			uint8_t                State; /**< Current port state, a value from the \ref TCP_PortStates_t enum */
+			void                   (*ApplicationHandler) (TCP_ConnectionState_t* ConnectionState,
+			                                              TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* Buffer); /**< Port application handler */
+		} TCP_PortState_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a TCP packet header. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t               SourcePort; /**< Source port of the TCP packet */
+			uint16_t               DestinationPort; /**< Destination port of the TCP packet */
+
+			uint32_t               SequenceNumber; /**< Data sequence number of the packet */
+			uint32_t               AcknowledgmentNumber; /**< Data acknowledgment number of the packet */
+
+			unsigned               Reserved : 4; /**< Reserved, must be all 0 */
+			unsigned               DataOffset : 4; /**< Offset of the data from the start of the header, in 4 byte chunks */
+			uint8_t                Flags; /**< TCP packet flags */
+			uint16_t               WindowSize; /**< Current data window size (bytes remaining in reception buffer) */
+
+			uint16_t               Checksum; /**< TCP checksum */
+			uint16_t               UrgentPointer; /**< Urgent data pointer */
+		} TCP_Header_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void                  TCP_TCPTask(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
+		                                  Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* const FrameOUT);
+		void                  TCP_Init(void);
+		bool                  TCP_SetPortState(const uint16_t Port,
+		                                       const uint8_t State,
+		                                       void (*Handler)(TCP_ConnectionState_t*, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t*));
+		uint8_t               TCP_GetPortState(const uint16_t Port);
+		bool                  TCP_SetConnectionState(const uint16_t Port,
+		                                             const IP_Address_t* RemoteAddress,
+		                                             const uint16_t RemotePort,
+		                                             const uint8_t State);
+		uint8_t               TCP_GetConnectionState(const uint16_t Port,
+		                                             const IP_Address_t* RemoteAddress,
+		                                             const uint16_t RemotePort);
+		TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* TCP_GetConnectionInfo(const uint16_t Port,
+		                                            const IP_Address_t* RemoteAddress,
+		                                            const uint16_t RemotePort);
+		int16_t               TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart,
+		                                           void* TCPHeaderInStart,
+		                                           void* TCPHeaderOutStart);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_TCP_C)
+			static uint16_t TCP_Checksum16(void* TCPHeaderOutStart,
+			                               const IP_Address_t* SourceAddress,
+			                               const IP_Address_t* DestinationAddress,
+			                               uint16_t TCPOutSize);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..95911fc5d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.c
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  User Datagram Protocol (UDP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles high throughput, low
+ *  reliability packets which are typically used to encapsulate streaming data.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_UDP_C
+#include "UDP.h"
+
+/** Processes a UDP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ *  to the output Ethernet frame if a sub-protocol handler has created a response packet.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] IPHeaderInStart     Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header
+ *  \param[in] UDPHeaderInStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's UDP header
+ *  \param[out] UDPHeaderOutStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's UDP header
+ *
+ *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
+ */
+int16_t UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart,
+                             void* UDPHeaderInStart,
+                             void* UDPHeaderOutStart)
+{
+	UDP_Header_t* UDPHeaderIN  = (UDP_Header_t*)UDPHeaderInStart;
+	UDP_Header_t* UDPHeaderOUT = (UDP_Header_t*)UDPHeaderOutStart;
+
+	int16_t RetSize = NO_RESPONSE;
+
+	DecodeUDPHeader(UDPHeaderInStart);
+
+	switch (SwapEndian_16(UDPHeaderIN->DestinationPort))
+	{
+		case UDP_PORT_DHCP_REQUEST:
+			RetSize = DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(IPHeaderInStart,
+			                                 &((uint8_t*)UDPHeaderInStart)[sizeof(UDP_Header_t)],
+		                                     &((uint8_t*)UDPHeaderOutStart)[sizeof(UDP_Header_t)]);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	/* Check to see if the protocol processing routine has filled out a response */
+	if (RetSize > 0)
+	{
+		/* Fill out the response UDP packet header */
+		UDPHeaderOUT->SourcePort      = UDPHeaderIN->DestinationPort;
+		UDPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort = UDPHeaderIN->SourcePort;
+		UDPHeaderOUT->Checksum        = 0;
+		UDPHeaderOUT->Length          = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(UDP_Header_t) + RetSize);
+
+		/* Return the size of the response so far */
+		return (sizeof(UDP_Header_t) + RetSize);
+	}
+
+	return NO_RESPONSE;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2a6697780
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.h
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for UDP.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _UDP_H_
+#define _UDP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+		#include "DHCP.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Source UDP port for a DHCP request. */
+		#define UDP_PORT_DHCP_REQUEST 67
+
+		/** Destination UDP port for a DHCP reply. */
+		#define UDP_PORT_DHCP_REPLY   68
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a UDP packet header. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t SourcePort; /**< Packet source port */
+			uint16_t DestinationPort; /**< Packet destination port */
+			uint16_t Length; /**< Total packet length, in bytes */
+			uint16_t Checksum; /**< Optional UDP packet checksum */
+		} UDP_Header_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		int16_t UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart,
+		                             void* UDPHeaderInStart,
+		                             void* UDPHeaderOutStart);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..43558c2f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.c
@@ -0,0 +1,203 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Simple webserver application for demonstrating the RNDIS demo and TCP/IP stack. This
+ *  application will serve up a static HTTP web page when requested by the host.
+ */
+
+#include "Webserver.h"
+
+/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before the page contents. This indicates to the host that a page exists at the
+ *  given location, and gives extra connection information.
+ */
+const char HTTP200Header[] PROGMEM = "HTTP/1.1 200 OK\r\n"
+                                     "Server: LUFA RNDIS\r\n"
+                                     "Content-type: text/html\r\n"
+                                     "Connection: close\r\n\r\n";
+
+/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before a resource not found error. This indicates to the host that the given
+ *  given URL is invalid, and gives extra error information.
+ */
+const char HTTP404Header[] PROGMEM = "HTTP/1.1 404 Not Found\r\n"
+                                     "Server: LUFA RNDIS\r\n"
+                                     "Connection: close\r\n\r\n";
+
+/** HTTP page to serve to the host when a HTTP request is made. This page is too long for a single response, thus it is automatically
+ *  broken up into smaller blocks and sent as a series of packets each time the webserver application callback is run.
+ */
+const char HTTPPage[] PROGMEM =
+		"<html>"
+		"	<head>"
+		"		<title>"
+		"			LUFA Webserver Demo"
+		"		</title>"
+		"	</head>"
+		"	<body>"
+		"		<h1>Hello from your USB AVR!</h1>"
+		"		<p>"
+		"			Hello! Welcome to the LUFA RNDIS Demo Webserver test page, running on your USB AVR via the LUFA library. This demonstrates the HTTP webserver, TCP/IP stack and RNDIS demo all running atop the LUFA USB stack."
+		"			<br /><br />"
+		"			<small>Project Information: <a href=\"http://www.lufa-lib.org\">http://www.lufa-lib.org</a>.</small>"
+		"			<hr />"
+		"			<i>LUFA Version: </i>" LUFA_VERSION_STRING
+		"		</p>"
+		"	</body>"
+		"</html>";
+
+
+/** Initializes the Webserver application, opening the appropriate HTTP port in the TCP handler and registering the application
+ *  callback routine for packets sent to the HTTP protocol port.
+ */
+void Webserver_Init(void)
+{
+	/* Open the HTTP port in the TCP protocol so that HTTP connections to the device can be established */
+	TCP_SetPortState(TCP_PORT_HTTP, TCP_Port_Open, Webserver_ApplicationCallback);
+}
+
+/** Indicates if a given request equals the given HTTP command.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] RequestHeader  HTTP request made by the host
+ *  \param[in] Command        HTTP command to compare the request to
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command matches the request, \c false otherwise
+ */
+static bool IsHTTPCommand(uint8_t* RequestHeader,
+                          char* Command)
+{
+	/* Returns true if the non null terminated string in RequestHeader matches the null terminated string Command */
+	return (strncmp((char*)RequestHeader, Command, strlen(Command)) == 0);
+}
+
+/** Application callback routine, executed each time the TCP processing task runs. This callback determines what request
+ *  has been made (if any), and serves up appropriate responses.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] ConnectionState  Pointer to a TCP Connection State structure giving connection information
+ *  \param[in,out] Buffer       Pointer to the application's send/receive packet buffer
+ */
+void Webserver_ApplicationCallback(TCP_ConnectionState_t* const ConnectionState,
+                                   TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* const Buffer)
+{
+	char*          BufferDataStr = (char*)Buffer->Data;
+	static uint8_t PageBlock     = 0;
+
+	/* Check to see if a packet has been received on the HTTP port from a remote host */
+	if (TCP_APP_HAS_RECEIVED_PACKET(Buffer))
+	{
+		if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "GET"))
+		{
+			if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "GET / "))
+			{
+				PageBlock = 0;
+
+				/* Copy the HTTP 200 response header into the packet buffer */
+				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP200Header);
+
+				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
+				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));
+
+				/* Lock the buffer to Device->Host transmissions only while we send the page contents */
+				TCP_APP_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer);
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				/* Copy the HTTP 404 response header into the packet buffer */
+				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP404Header);
+
+				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
+				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));
+
+				/* All data sent, close the connection */
+				TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);
+			}
+		}
+		else if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "HEAD"))
+		{
+			if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "HEAD / "))
+			{
+				/* Copy the HTTP response header into the packet buffer */
+				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP200Header);
+
+				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
+				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				/* Copy the HTTP response header into the packet buffer */
+				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP404Header);
+
+				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
+				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));
+			}
+
+			/* All data sent, close the connection */
+			TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);
+		}
+		else if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "TRACE"))
+		{
+			/* Echo the host's query back to the host */
+			TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Buffer->Length);
+
+			/* All data sent, close the connection */
+			TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			/* Unknown request, just clear the buffer (drop the packet) */
+			TCP_APP_CLEAR_BUFFER(Buffer);
+		}
+	}
+	else if (TCP_APP_HAVE_CAPTURED_BUFFER(Buffer))
+	{
+		uint16_t RemLength = strlen_P(&HTTPPage[PageBlock * HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE]);
+		uint16_t Length;
+
+		/* Determine the length of the loaded block */
+		Length = ((RemLength > HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE) ? HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE : RemLength);
+
+		/* Copy the next buffer sized block of the page to the packet buffer */
+		strncpy_P(BufferDataStr, &HTTPPage[PageBlock * HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE], Length);
+
+		/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
+		TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Length);
+
+		/* Check to see if the entire page has been sent */
+		if (PageBlock++ == (sizeof(HTTPPage) / HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE))
+		{
+			/* Unlock the buffer so that the host can fill it with future packets */
+			TCP_APP_RELEASE_BUFFER(Buffer);
+
+			/* Close the connection to the host */
+			TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);
+		}
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..142dc7a03
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.h
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Webserver.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _WEBSERVER_H_
+#define _WEBSERVER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+
+		#include "TCP.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Maximum size of a HTTP response per transmission */
+		#define HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE     128
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void Webserver_Init(void);
+		void Webserver_ApplicationCallback(TCP_ConnectionState_t* const ConnectionState,
+		                                   TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* const Buffer);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bdb506117
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.c
@@ -0,0 +1,179 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the RNDISEthernet demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "RNDISEthernet.h"
+
+/** Message buffer for RNDIS messages processed by the RNDIS device class driver. */
+static uint8_t RNDIS_Message_Buffer[192];
+
+/** Global to store the incoming frame from the host before it is processed by the device. */
+static Ethernet_Frame_Info_t FrameIN;
+
+/** Global to store the outgoing frame created in the device before it is sent to the host. */
+static Ethernet_Frame_Info_t FrameOUT;
+
+/** LUFA RNDIS Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all RNDIS Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber         = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+				.DataINEndpoint                 =
+					{
+						.Address                = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint                =
+					{
+						.Address                = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+				.NotificationEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address                = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+				.AdapterVendorDescription       = "LUFA RNDIS Demo Adapter",
+				.AdapterMACAddress              = {ADAPTER_MAC_ADDRESS},
+				.MessageBuffer                  = RNDIS_Message_Buffer,
+				.MessageBufferLength            = sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Buffer),
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	TCP_Init();
+	Webserver_Init();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		if (RNDIS_Device_IsPacketReceived(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface))
+		{
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+			RNDIS_Device_ReadPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface, &FrameIN.FrameData, &FrameIN.FrameLength);
+			Ethernet_ProcessPacket(&FrameIN, &FrameOUT);
+
+			if (FrameOUT.FrameLength)
+			{
+				RNDIS_Device_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface, &FrameOUT.FrameData, FrameOUT.FrameLength);
+				FrameOUT.FrameLength = 0;
+			}
+
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+		}
+
+		TCP_TCPTask(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface, &FrameOUT);
+
+		RNDIS_Device_USBTask(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+	/* Start the PLL to multiply the 2MHz RC oscillator to 32MHz and switch the CPU core to run from it */
+	XMEGACLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ, 2000000, F_CPU);
+	XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL);
+
+	/* Start the 32MHz internal RC oscillator and start the DFLL to increase it to 48MHz using the USB SOF as a reference */
+	XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);
+	XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF, F_USB);
+
+	PMIC.CTRL = PMIC_LOLVLEN_bm | PMIC_MEDLVLEN_bm | PMIC_HILVLEN_bm;
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	ConfigSuccess &= RNDIS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	RNDIS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..56000547f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.h
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for RNDISEthernet.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _RNDISETHERNET_H_
+#define _RNDISETHERNET_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include "Lib/Ethernet.h"
+		#include "Lib/TCP.h"
+		#include "Lib/ARP.h"
+		#include "Lib/Webserver.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..496ab07a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,146 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage RNDIS Class Ethernet Demo (with Webserver/Telnet)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series AU XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxAxU)
+ *  \li Series B XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxBxU)
+ *  \li Series C XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxCxU)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Remote NDIS (Microsoft Proprietary CDC Class Networking Standard)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Microsoft RNDIS Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Remote Network Driver Interface demonstration application.
+ *  This gives a simple reference application for implementing
+ *  a CDC RNDIS device acting as a simple network interface for
+ *  ethernet packet exchange. RNDIS is a proprietary Microsoft
+ *  standard; this demo will only work on Windows 2000 (manually
+ *  patched with the Microsoft RNDIS hotfix) and above (with no
+ *  manual patches), or on the latest Linux kernels.
+ *
+ *  Before running, you will need to install the INF file that
+ *  is located in the RNDISEthernet project directory. This will
+ *  enable Windows to use its inbuilt RNDIS drivers, negating the
+ *  need for special Windows drivers for the device. To install,
+ *  right-click the .INF file and choose the Install option. If
+ *  Windows 2000 is used, the Microsoft INF file in the hotfix
+ *  will need to be altered to use the VID/PID of the demo and
+ *  then chosen instead of the LUFA RNDIS INF file when prompted.
+ *
+ *  When enumerated, this demo will install as a new network
+ *  adapter which ethernet packets can be sent to and received
+ *  from. Running on top of the adapter is a very simple TCP/IP
+ *  stack with a HTTP webserver and TELNET host which can be
+ *  accessed through a web browser at IP address 10.0.0.2:80 or
+ *  through a TELNET client at 10.0.0.2:25. This device also supports
+ *  ping echos via the ICMP protocol.
+ *
+ *  \note The TCP/IP stack in this demo has a number of limitations
+ *  and should serve as an example only - it is not fully featured nor
+ *  compliant to the TCP/IP specification. For complete projects, it is
+ *  recommended that it be replaced with an external open source TCP/IP
+ *  stack that is feature complete, such as the uIP stack.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>CLIENT_IP_ADDRESS</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Configures the IP address given to the client (PC) via the DHCP server.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>SERVER_IP_ADDRESS</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Configures the IP address of the virtual server.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>ADAPTER_MAC_ADDRESS</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Configures the MAC address of the RNDIS adapter on the host (PC) side.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Configures the MAC address of the virtual server on the network.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_ETHERNET</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received Ethernet headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_ARP</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received ARP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_IP</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received IP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_ICMP</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received ICMP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_TCP</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received TCP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_UDP</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received UDP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_DHCP</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received DHCP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8a85bf948
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="RNDIS Ethernet Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.rndis.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.rndis"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="RNDIS Ethernet Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.rndis.example.xmega">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.rndis"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.xmega"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atxmega128a1u"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="32000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="48000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.device.class.rndis" caption="RNDIS Ethernet Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Microsoft RNDIS Ethernet networking device demo, implementing a basic HTTP webserver. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="RNDIS Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="RNDISEthernet.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/ARP.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/DHCP.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/Ethernet.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/ICMP.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/IP.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/ProtocolDecoders.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/TCP.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/UDP.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/Webserver.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="RNDISEthernet.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/ARP.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/DHCP.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/Ethernet.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/ICMP.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/IP.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/ProtocolDecoders.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/TCP.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/UDP.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/Webserver.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/EthernetProtocols.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9147230ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - RNDIS Ethernet Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7d16d4268
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = RNDISEthernet
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c Lib/Ethernet.c Lib/ProtocolDecoders.c Lib/ICMP.c Lib/TCP.c Lib/UDP.c Lib/DHCP.c Lib/ARP.c \
+               Lib/IP.c Lib/Webserver.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3c3b68bb1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_RC32MCLKSRC | USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH)
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX               4
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..314151226
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,245 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+	.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2044,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Header =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.CDCSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_ACM =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM,
+
+			.Capabilities           = 0x06,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Union =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union,
+
+			.MasterInterfaceNumber  = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.SlaveInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_NotificationEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA CDC Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..733d08dc2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 2)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+
+			// CDC Control Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t    CDC_Functional_Header;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t       CDC_Functional_ACM;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t     CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_NotificationEndpoint;
+
+			// CDC Data Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI = 0, /**< CDC CCI interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI = 1, /**< CDC DCI interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/LUFA VirtualSerial.inf b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/LUFA VirtualSerial.inf
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..21d2d12b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/LUFA VirtualSerial.inf
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+;************************************************************
+; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+;************************************************************
+
+[DefaultInstall]
+CopyINF="LUFA VirtualSerial.inf"
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+DriverVer=7/1/2012,10.0.0.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTx86, NTamd64, NTia64
+
+[SourceDisksNames]
+
+[SourceDisksFiles]
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+[DriverInstall]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=FakeModemCopyFileSection
+AddReg=DriverInstall.AddReg
+
+[DriverInstall.Services]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, LowerFilter_Service_Inst
+
+[DriverInstall.AddReg]
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"msports.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
+
+[DeviceList.NTx86]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
+
+[DeviceList.NTia64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org"
+DESCRIPTION="LUFA CDC-ACM Virtual Serial Port"
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2d98df760
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.c
@@ -0,0 +1,187 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the VirtualSerial demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "VirtualSerial.h"
+
+/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+				.DataINEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address          = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint =
+					{
+						.Address          = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+				.NotificationEndpoint =
+					{
+						.Address          = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Standard file stream for the CDC interface when set up, so that the virtual CDC COM port can be
+ *  used like any regular character stream in the C APIs.
+ */
+static FILE USBSerialStream;
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	/* Create a regular character stream for the interface so that it can be used with the stdio.h functions */
+	CDC_Device_CreateStream(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, &USBSerialStream);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		CheckJoystickMovement();
+
+		/* Must throw away unused bytes from the host, or it will lock up while waiting for the device */
+		CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+
+		CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+	/* Start the PLL to multiply the 2MHz RC oscillator to 32MHz and switch the CPU core to run from it */
+	XMEGACLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ, 2000000, F_CPU);
+	XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL);
+
+	/* Start the 32MHz internal RC oscillator and start the DFLL to increase it to 48MHz using the USB SOF as a reference */
+	XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);
+	XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF, F_USB);
+
+	PMIC.CTRL = PMIC_LOLVLEN_bm | PMIC_MEDLVLEN_bm | PMIC_HILVLEN_bm;
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Checks for changes in the position of the board joystick, sending strings to the host upon each change. */
+void CheckJoystickMovement(void)
+{
+	uint8_t     JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	char*       ReportString  = NULL;
+	static bool ActionSent    = false;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Up\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Down\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Left\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Right\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Pressed\r\n";
+	else
+	  ActionSent = false;
+
+	if ((ReportString != NULL) && (ActionSent == false))
+	{
+		ActionSent = true;
+
+		/* Write the string to the virtual COM port via the created character stream */
+		fputs(ReportString, &USBSerialStream);
+
+		/* Alternatively, without the stream: */
+		// CDC_Device_SendString(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, ReportString);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	ConfigSuccess &= CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ad4f74f31
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.h
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for VirtualSerial.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _VIRTUALSERIAL_H_
+#define _VIRTUALSERIAL_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void CheckJoystickMovement(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..61b665674
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Communications Device Class (Virtual Serial Port) Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *  \li Series AU XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxAxU)
+ *  \li Series B XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxBxU)
+ *  \li Series C XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxCxU)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Communications Device Class demonstration application.
+ *  This gives a simple reference application for implementing
+ *  a CDC device acting as a virtual serial port. Joystick
+ *  actions are transmitted to the host as strings. The device
+ *  does not respond to serial data sent from the host.
+ *
+ *  After running this demo for the first time on a new computer,
+ *  you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo
+ *  project's directory as the device's driver when running under
+ *  Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers,
+ *  negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other
+ *  Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt
+ *  CDC-ACM drivers.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4839b7c5f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Virtual Serial CDC Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.cdc.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.cdc"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="Virtual Serial CDC Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.cdc.example.xmega">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.cdc"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.xmega"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atxmega128a1u"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="32000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="48000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.device.class.cdc" caption="Virtual Serial CDC Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Virtual Serial device demo, implementing a virtual serial channel between the host PC and the device. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="CDC Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="VirtualSerial.txt"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="LUFA VirtualSerial.inf"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="VirtualSerial.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="VirtualSerial.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0d0ae156c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Virtual Serial Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d476b575c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerial/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = VirtualSerial
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4be9d2b6b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
+ *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
+ *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
+ *  makefile or build system.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#define TOTAL_LUNS                1
+
+	#define DISK_READ_ONLY            false
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..58fd4bb5a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_RC32MCLKSRC | USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH)
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX               5
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..18533fda2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,295 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2068,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 3,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.CDC_IAD =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t), .Type = DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation},
+
+			.FirstInterfaceIndex    = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,
+
+			.IADStrIndex            = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Header =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.CDCSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_ACM =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM,
+
+			.Capabilities           = 0x06,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Union =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union,
+
+			.MasterInterfaceNumber  = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.SlaveInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_NotificationEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.MS_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = MS_CSCP_MassStorageClass,
+			.SubClass               = MS_CSCP_SCSITransparentSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = MS_CSCP_BulkOnlyTransportProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA CDC and Mass Storage Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d764bf45f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 1)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 2)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 3)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR         (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 4)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 5)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE         64
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+
+			// CDC Control Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t   CDC_IAD;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t    CDC_Functional_Header;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t       CDC_Functional_ACM;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t     CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_NotificationEndpoint;
+
+			// CDC Data Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
+
+			// Mass Storage Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               MS_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                MS_DataInEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                MS_DataOutEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI     = 0, /**< CDC CCI interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI     = 1, /**< CDC DCI interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage = 2, /**< Mass storage interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/LUFA VirtualSerialMassStorage.inf b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/LUFA VirtualSerialMassStorage.inf
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e5d8da5e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/LUFA VirtualSerialMassStorage.inf
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+;************************************************************
+; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+;************************************************************
+
+[DefaultInstall]
+CopyINF="LUFA VirtualSerialMassStorage.inf"
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+DriverVer=7/1/2012,10.0.0.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTx86, NTamd64, NTia64
+
+[SourceDisksNames]
+
+[SourceDisksFiles]
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+[DriverInstall]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=FakeModemCopyFileSection
+AddReg=DriverInstall.AddReg
+
+[DriverInstall.Services]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, LowerFilter_Service_Inst
+
+[DriverInstall.AddReg]
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"msports.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2068&MI_00
+
+[DeviceList.NTx86]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2068&MI_00
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2068&MI_00
+
+[DeviceList.NTia64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2068&MI_00
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org"
+DESCRIPTION="LUFA CDC-ACM Virtual Serial Port"
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d28eff298
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.c
@@ -0,0 +1,534 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Functions to manage the physical Dataflash media, including reading and writing of
+ *  blocks of data. These functions are called by the SCSI layer when data must be stored
+ *  or retrieved to/from the physical storage media. If a different media is used (such
+ *  as a SD card or EEPROM), functions similar to these will need to be generated.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASHMANAGER_C
+#include "DataflashManager.h"
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), from
+ *  the pre-selected data OUT endpoint. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the endpoint and writes
+ *  them to the Dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                  const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                  uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+#endif
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+
+	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+	  return;
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is currently empty */
+			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+			{
+				/* Clear the current endpoint bank */
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+				/* Wait until the host has sent another packet */
+				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Once all the Dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
+				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+				/* If less than one Dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+				{
+					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				}
+#endif
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
+			}
+
+			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the Dataflash */
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+			  return;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+	/* If the endpoint is empty, clear it ready for the next packet from the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), into
+ *  the pre-selected data IN endpoint. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                 const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                 uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+
+	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+	  return;
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is currently full */
+			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+			{
+				/* Clear the endpoint bank to send its contents to the host */
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+				/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for more data */
+				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+			}
+
+			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the Dataflash */
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+			  return;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* If the endpoint is full, send its contents to the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), from
+ *  the given RAM buffer. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the buffer and writes them to the
+ *  Dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. This can be linked to FAT libraries to write files to the
+ *  Dataflash.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
+ *  \param[in] BufferPtr     Pointer to the data source RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                      uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+                                      uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+#endif
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Once all the Dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
+				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+				/* If less than one Dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+				{
+					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				}
+#endif
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
+			}
+
+			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the Dataflash */
+			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+			  Dataflash_SendByte(*(BufferPtr++));
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), into
+ *  the preallocated RAM buffer. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the given buffer. This can be linked to FAT libraries to read
+ *  the files stored on the Dataflash.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
+ *  \param[out] BufferPtr    Pointer to the data destination RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                     uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+			}
+
+			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the Dataflash */
+			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+			  *(BufferPtr++) = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Disables the Dataflash memory write protection bits on the board Dataflash ICs, if enabled. */
+void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void)
+{
+	/* Select first Dataflash chip, send the read status register command */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+
+	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+	{
+		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+	}
+
+	/* Select second Dataflash chip (if present on selected board), send read status register command */
+	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+
+	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+	{
+		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+	}
+	#endif
+
+	/* Deselect current Dataflash chip */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Performs a simple test on the attached Dataflash IC(s) to ensure that they are working.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if all media chips are working, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ReturnByte;
+
+	/* Test first Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+	  return false;
+
+	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+	/* Test second Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+	  return false;
+	#endif
+
+	return true;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4737245a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.h
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DataflashManager.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
+#define _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include "../VirtualSerialMassStorage.h"
+		#include "../Descriptors.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE % 16)
+			#error Dataflash page size must be a multiple of 16 bytes.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Defines: */
+		/** Total number of bytes of the storage medium, comprised of one or more Dataflash ICs. */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES                ((uint32_t)DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)
+
+		/** Block size of the device. This is kept at 512 to remain compatible with the OS despite the underlying
+		 *  storage media (Dataflash) using a different native block size. Do not change this value.
+		 */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE           512
+
+		/** Total number of blocks of the virtual memory for reporting to the host as the device's total capacity. Do not
+		 *  change this value; change VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES instead to alter the media size.
+		 */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS               (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES / VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+
+		/** Blocks in each LUN, calculated from the total capacity divided by the total number of Logical Units in the device. */
+		#define LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS         (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS / TOTAL_LUNS)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+		                                  const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                  uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+		                                 const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                 uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                      uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+		                                      uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                     uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+		                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void);
+		bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..122e38872
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c
@@ -0,0 +1,349 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage
+ *  devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information,
+ *  which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C
+#include "SCSI.h"
+
+/** Structure to hold the SCSI response data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's
+ *  features and capabilities.
+ */
+static const SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData =
+	{
+		.DeviceType          = DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK,
+		.PeripheralQualifier = 0,
+
+		.Removable           = true,
+
+		.Version             = 0,
+
+		.ResponseDataFormat  = 2,
+		.NormACA             = false,
+		.TrmTsk              = false,
+		.AERC                = false,
+
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x1F,
+
+		.SoftReset           = false,
+		.CmdQue              = false,
+		.Linked              = false,
+		.Sync                = false,
+		.WideBus16Bit        = false,
+		.WideBus32Bit        = false,
+		.RelAddr             = false,
+
+		.VendorID            = "LUFA",
+		.ProductID           = "Dataflash Disk",
+		.RevisionID          = {'0','.','0','0'},
+	};
+
+/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE
+ *  command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete.
+ */
+static SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData =
+	{
+		.ResponseCode        = 0x70,
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x0A,
+	};
+
+
+/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches
+ *  to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns
+ *  a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool CommandSuccess = false;
+
+	/* Run the appropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */
+	switch (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0])
+	{
+		case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Inquiry(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_WRITE);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_READ);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_START_STOP_UNIT:
+		case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY:
+		case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL:
+		case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10:
+			/* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */
+			CommandSuccess = true;
+			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+			break;
+		default:
+			/* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */
+			SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	/* Check if command was successfully processed */
+	if (CommandSuccess)
+	{
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return true;
+	}
+
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features
+ *  and capabilities to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint16_t AllocationLength  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3]);
+	uint16_t BytesTransferred  = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(InquiryData));
+
+	/* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */
+	if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) ||
+	     MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2])
+	{
+		/* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, NULL);
+
+	/* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */
+	Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL);
+
+	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command,
+ *  including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t  AllocationLength = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
+	uint8_t  BytesTransferred = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(SenseData));
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, NULL);
+	Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity
+ *  on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint32_t LastBlockAddressInLUN = (LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS - 1);
+	uint32_t MediaBlockSize        = VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE;
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&LastBlockAddressInLUN, sizeof(LastBlockAddressInLUN), NULL);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&MediaBlockSize, sizeof(MediaBlockSize), NULL);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. This command performs a quick check of the Dataflash ICs on the
+ *  board, and indicates if they are present and functioning correctly. Only the Self-Test portion of the diagnostic command is
+ *  supported.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Check to see if the SELF TEST bit is not set */
+	if (!(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & (1 << 2)))
+	{
+		/* Only self-test supported - update SENSE key and fail the command */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Check to see if all attached Dataflash ICs are functional */
+	if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation()))
+	{
+		/* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address
+ *  and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level Dataflash routine to handle the actual
+ *  reading and writing of the data.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *  \param[in] IsDataRead  Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE)
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                      const bool IsDataRead)
+{
+	uint32_t BlockAddress;
+	uint16_t TotalBlocks;
+
+	/* Check if the disk is write protected or not */
+	if ((IsDataRead == DATA_WRITE) && DISK_READ_ONLY)
+	{
+		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
+	BlockAddress = SwapEndian_32(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]);
+
+	/* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
+	TotalBlocks  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7]);
+
+	/* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */
+	if (BlockAddress >= LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS)
+	{
+		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	#if (TOTAL_LUNS > 1)
+	/* Adjust the given block address to the real media address based on the selected LUN */
+	BlockAddress += ((uint32_t)MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.LUN * LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS);
+	#endif
+
+	/* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */
+	if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ)
+	  DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+	else
+	  DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+
+	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE);
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI MODE SENSE (6) command. This command returns various informational pages about
+ *  the SCSI device, as well as the device's Write Protect status.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Send an empty header response with the Write Protect flag status */
+	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(DISK_READ_ONLY ? 0x80 : 0x00);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 4;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d26a82bde
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for SCSI.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _SCSI_H_
+#define _SCSI_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "../VirtualSerialMassStorage.h"
+		#include "../Descriptors.h"
+		#include "DataflashManager.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This
+		 *  is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about
+		 *  the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Key    New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] Acode  New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] Aqual  New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to
+		 */
+		#define SCSI_SET_SENSE(Key, Acode, Aqual)  do { SenseData.SenseKey                 = (Key);   \
+		                                                SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode      = (Acode); \
+		                                                SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = (Aqual); } while (0)
+
+		/** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_READ           true
+
+		/** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_WRITE          false
+
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a Block Media device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK   0x00
+
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a CD-ROM device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_CDROM   0x05
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C)
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+			                                      const bool IsDataRead);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1d2028316
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.c
@@ -0,0 +1,241 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the VirtualSerialMassStorage demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "VirtualSerialMassStorage.h"
+
+/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber         = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+				.DataINEndpoint                 =
+					{
+						.Address                = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint                =
+					{
+						.Address                = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+				.NotificationEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address                = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+			},
+	};
+
+/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t Disk_MS_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber                = INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage,
+				.DataINEndpoint                 =
+					{
+						.Address                = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint                =
+					{
+						.Address                = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+				.TotalLUNs                      = TOTAL_LUNS,
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Standard file stream for the CDC interface when set up, so that the virtual CDC COM port can be
+ *  used like any regular character stream in the C APIs.
+ */
+static FILE USBSerialStream;
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	/* Create a regular character stream for the interface so that it can be used with the stdio.h functions */
+	CDC_Device_CreateStream(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, &USBSerialStream);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		CheckJoystickMovement();
+
+		/* Must throw away unused bytes from the host, or it will lock up while waiting for the device */
+		CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+
+		CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+		MS_Device_USBTask(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+	/* Start the PLL to multiply the 2MHz RC oscillator to 32MHz and switch the CPU core to run from it */
+	XMEGACLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ, 2000000, F_CPU);
+	XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL);
+
+	/* Start the 32MHz internal RC oscillator and start the DFLL to increase it to 48MHz using the USB SOF as a reference */
+	XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);
+	XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF, F_USB);
+
+	PMIC.CTRL = PMIC_LOLVLEN_bm | PMIC_MEDLVLEN_bm | PMIC_HILVLEN_bm;
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Joystick_Init();
+	Dataflash_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Check if the Dataflash is working, abort if not */
+	if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation()))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		for(;;);
+	}
+
+	/* Clear Dataflash sector protections, if enabled */
+	DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections();
+}
+
+/** Checks for changes in the position of the board joystick, sending strings to the host upon each change. */
+void CheckJoystickMovement(void)
+{
+	uint8_t     JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	char*       ReportString  = NULL;
+	static bool ActionSent    = false;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Up\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Down\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Left\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Right\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Pressed\r\n";
+	else
+	  ActionSent = false;
+
+	if ((ReportString != NULL) && (ActionSent == false))
+	{
+		ActionSent = true;
+
+		/* Write the string to the virtual COM port via the created character stream */
+		fputs(ReportString, &USBSerialStream);
+
+		/* Alternatively, without the stream: */
+		// CDC_Device_SendString(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, ReportString);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	ConfigSuccess &= CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+	ConfigSuccess &= MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+	MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Mass Storage class driver callback function the reception of SCSI commands from the host, which must be processed.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool CommandSuccess;
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+	CommandSuccess = SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(MSInterfaceInfo);
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	return CommandSuccess;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d60e8aa5a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.h
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for VirtualSerial.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _VIRTUALSERIAL_H_
+#define _VIRTUALSERIAL_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include "Lib/SCSI.h"
+		#include "Lib/DataflashManager.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void CheckJoystickMovement(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..caf83e499
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Communications Device Class (Virtual Serial Port) and Mass Storage Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series AU XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxAxU)
+ *  \li Series B XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxBxU)
+ *  \li Series C XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxCxU)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC) \n
+ *        Mass Storage Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM) \n
+ *        Bulk-Only Transport</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard \n
+ *        USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n
+ *        USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n
+ *        SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n
+ *        SCSI Block Commands Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Combined Communications Device Class/Mass Storage demonstration application.
+ *  This gives a simple reference application for implementing a combined
+ *  CDC and Mass Storage device acting as a both a virtual serial port and a flash
+ *  drive. Joystick actions are transmitted to the host as strings, and data can be
+ *  written to or read from the exposed flash drive interface in the same manner as
+ *  other USB flash drives. The device does not respond to serial data sent from the
+ *  host.
+ *
+ *  After running this demo for the first time on a new computer,
+ *  you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo
+ *  project's directory as the device's driver when running under
+ *  Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers,
+ *  negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other
+ *  Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt
+ *  CDC-ACM drivers.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>TOTAL_LUNS</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Total number of Logical Units (drives) in the device. The total device capacity is shared equally between each drive -
+ *        this can be set to any positive non-zero amount.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>DISK_READ_ONLY</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Configuration define, indicating if the disk should be write protected or not.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a73bcc21c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Virtual Serial CDC and Mass Storage Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.cdc_ms.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.cdc_ms"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="Virtual Serial CDC and Mass Storage Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.cdc_ms.example.xmega">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.cdc_ms"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.xmega"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atxmega128a1u"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="32000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="48000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.device.class.cdc_ms" caption="Virtual Serial CDC and Mass Storage Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Virtual Serial and Mass Storage device demo, implementing a virtual serial channel between the host PC and the device, and a basic USB storage disk using a Dataflash memory IC. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="CDC Class"/>

+			<keyword value="Mass Storage Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="VirtualSerialMassStorage.txt"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="LUFA VirtualSerialMassStorage.inf"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="VirtualSerialMassStorage.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/DataflashManager.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/SCSI.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="VirtualSerialMassStorage.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/DataflashManager.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/SCSI.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.dataflash"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c57c1fcae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Virtual Serial/Mass Storage Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1329aeba9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = VirtualSerialMassStorage
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c Lib/DataflashManager.c Lib/SCSI.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3c3b68bb1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_RC32MCLKSRC | USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH)
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX               4
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..029c80f0b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,323 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MouseReport[] =
+{
+	/* Use the HID class driver's standard Mouse report.
+	 *   Min X/Y Axis values: -1
+	 *   Max X/Y Axis values:  1
+	 *   Min physical X/Y Axis values (used to determine resolution): -1
+	 *   Max physical X/Y Axis values (used to determine resolution):  1
+	 *   Buttons: 3
+	 *   Absolute screen coordinates: false
+	 */
+	HID_DESCRIPTOR_MOUSE(-1, 1, -1, 1, 3, false)
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2062,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 3,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.CDC_IAD =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t), .Type = DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation},
+
+			.FirstInterfaceIndex    = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,
+
+			.IADStrIndex            = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Header =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.CDCSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_ACM =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM,
+
+			.Capabilities           = 0x06,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Union =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union,
+
+			.MasterInterfaceNumber  = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.SlaveInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_NotificationEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.HID_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_Mouse,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = HID_CSCP_HIDClass,
+			.SubClass               = HID_CSCP_BootSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = HID_CSCP_MouseBootProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_MouseHID =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = HID_DTYPE_HID},
+
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(1,1,1),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = HID_DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(MouseReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = MOUSE_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MOUSE_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA CDC and Mouse Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_HID:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_MouseHID;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t);
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_Report:
+			Address = &MouseReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(MouseReport);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ab64f42dd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,123 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 2)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define MOUSE_EPADDR                   (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 1)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define MOUSE_EPSIZE                   8
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+
+			// CDC Control Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t   CDC_IAD;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t    CDC_Functional_Header;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t       CDC_Functional_ACM;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t     CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_NotificationEndpoint;
+
+			// CDC Data Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
+
+			// Mouse HID Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               HID_Interface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t                 HID_MouseHID;
+	        USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI = 0, /**< CDC CCI interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI = 1, /**< CDC DCI interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_Mouse   = 2, /**< Mouse interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/LUFA VirtualSerialMouse.inf b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/LUFA VirtualSerialMouse.inf
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ac47e066b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/LUFA VirtualSerialMouse.inf
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+;************************************************************
+; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+;************************************************************
+
+[DefaultInstall]
+CopyINF="LUFA VirtualSerialMouse.inf"
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+DriverVer=7/1/2012,10.0.0.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTx86, NTamd64, NTia64
+
+[SourceDisksNames]
+
+[SourceDisksFiles]
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+[DriverInstall]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=FakeModemCopyFileSection
+AddReg=DriverInstall.AddReg
+
+[DriverInstall.Services]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, LowerFilter_Service_Inst
+
+[DriverInstall.AddReg]
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"msports.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2062&MI_00
+
+[DeviceList.NTx86]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2062&MI_00
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2062&MI_00
+
+[DeviceList.NTia64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2062&MI_00
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org"
+DESCRIPTION="LUFA CDC-ACM Virtual Serial Port"
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/VirtualSerialMouse.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/VirtualSerialMouse.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..02eb4875d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/VirtualSerialMouse.c
@@ -0,0 +1,267 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the VirtualSerialMouse demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "VirtualSerialMouse.h"
+
+/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber         = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+				.DataINEndpoint                 =
+					{
+						.Address                = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint                =
+					{
+						.Address                = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+				.NotificationEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address                = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Buffer to hold the previously generated Mouse HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
+static uint8_t PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t)];
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Mouse_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber                = INTERFACE_ID_Mouse,
+				.ReportINEndpoint               =
+					{
+						.Address                = MOUSE_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = MOUSE_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+				.PrevReportINBuffer             = PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer,
+				.PrevReportINBufferSize         = sizeof(PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer),
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		CheckJoystickMovement();
+
+		/* Must throw away unused bytes from the host, or it will lock up while waiting for the device */
+		CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+
+		CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+		HID_Device_USBTask(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+	/* Start the PLL to multiply the 2MHz RC oscillator to 32MHz and switch the CPU core to run from it */
+	XMEGACLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ, 2000000, F_CPU);
+	XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL);
+
+	/* Start the 32MHz internal RC oscillator and start the DFLL to increase it to 48MHz using the USB SOF as a reference */
+	XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);
+	XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF, F_USB);
+
+	PMIC.CTRL = PMIC_LOLVLEN_bm | PMIC_MEDLVLEN_bm | PMIC_HILVLEN_bm;
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Checks for changes in the position of the board joystick, sending strings to the host upon each change. */
+void CheckJoystickMovement(void)
+{
+	uint8_t     JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	char*       ReportString  = NULL;
+	static bool ActionSent    = false;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Up\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Down\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Left\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Right\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Pressed\r\n";
+	else
+	  ActionSent = false;
+
+	if ((ReportString != NULL) && (ActionSent == false))
+	{
+		ActionSent = true;
+
+		CDC_Device_SendString(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, ReportString);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	ConfigSuccess &= HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
+	ConfigSuccess &= CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+
+	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]     HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in,out] ReportID    Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
+ *  \param[in]     ReportType  Type of the report to create, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_In or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature
+ *  \param[out]    ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
+ *  \param[out]    ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent)
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true to force the sending of the report, \c false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                         void* ReportData,
+                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize)
+{
+	USB_MouseReport_Data_t* MouseReport = (USB_MouseReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
+
+	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL    = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus();
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  MouseReport->Y = -1;
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  MouseReport->Y =  1;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  MouseReport->X = -1;
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  MouseReport->X =  1;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+	  MouseReport->Button |= (1 << 0);
+
+	if (ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
+	  MouseReport->Button |= (1 << 1);
+
+	*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t);
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in] ReportID    Report ID of the received report from the host
+ *  \param[in] ReportType  The type of report that the host has sent, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature
+ *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the received report has been stored
+ *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
+ */
+void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                          const void* ReportData,
+                                          const uint16_t ReportSize)
+{
+	// Unused (but mandatory for the HID class driver) in this demo, since there are no Host->Device reports
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/VirtualSerialMouse.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/VirtualSerialMouse.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c1b9cea0d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/VirtualSerialMouse.h
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for VirtualSerialMouse.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _VIRTUALSERIAL_MOUSE_H_
+#define _VIRTUALSERIAL_MOUSE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void CheckJoystickMovement(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+		                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+		                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                                         void* ReportData,
+		                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize);
+		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+		                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+		                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                                          const void* ReportData,
+		                                          const uint16_t ReportSize);
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/VirtualSerialMouse.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/VirtualSerialMouse.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b8b32ed73
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/VirtualSerialMouse.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Combined Communications Device Class (Virtual Serial Port) and Mouse Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series AU XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxAxU)
+ *  \li Series B XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxBxU)
+ *  \li Series C XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxCxU)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC) \n
+ *        Human Interface Device Class (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM) \n
+ *        Mouse Subclass</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Combined Communications Device Class/Mouse demonstration application.
+ *  This gives a simple reference application for implementing a combined
+ *  CDC and HID device acting as a both a virtual serial port and a mouse.
+ *  Joystick actions are transmitted to the host as strings and as mouse
+ *  movements. The device does not respond to serial data sent from the host.
+ *
+ *  After running this demo for the first time on a new computer,
+ *  you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo
+ *  project's directory as the device's driver when running under
+ *  Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers,
+ *  negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other
+ *  Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt
+ *  CDC-ACM drivers.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..40d13050b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Virtual Serial CDC and Mouse HID Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.cdc_mouse.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.cdc_mouse"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="Virtual Serial CDC and Mouse HID Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.class.cdc_mouse.example.xmega">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.class.cdc_mouse"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.xmega"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atxmega128a1u"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="32000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="48000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.device.class.cdc_mouse" caption="Virtual Serial CDC and Mouse HID Device Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Virtual Serial and Mouse device demo, implementing a virtual serial channel between the host PC and the device, and a USB mouse. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="CDC Class"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="VirtualSerialMouse.txt"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="LUFA VirtualSerialMouse.inf"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="VirtualSerialMouse.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="VirtualSerialMouse.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7621a8789
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Combined Virtual Serial and Mouse Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6e861dcf6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMouse/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = VirtualSerialMouse
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1450df5e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+
+# Makefile to build all the LUFA Device Demos. Call with "make all" to
+# rebuild all Device demos.
+
+# Projects are pre-cleaned before each one is built, to ensure any
+# custom LUFA library build options are reflected in the compiled
+# code.
+
+PROJECT_DIRECTORIES := $(shell ls -d */)
+
+# This makefile is potentially infinitely recursive if something really bad
+# happens when determining the set of project directories - hard-abort if
+# more than 10 levels deep to avoid angry emails.
+ifeq ($(MAKELEVEL), 10)
+   $(error EMERGENCY ABORT: INFINITE RECURSION DETECTED)
+endif
+
+# Need to special-case building without a per-project object directory
+ifeq ($(OBJDIR),)
+   # If no target specified, force "clean all" and disallow parallel build
+   ifeq ($(MAKECMDGOALS),)
+      MAKECMDGOALS := clean all
+      .NOTPARALLEL:
+   endif
+
+   # If one of the targets is to build, force "clean" beforehand and disallow parallel build
+   ifneq ($(findstring all, $(MAKECMDGOALS)),)
+      MAKECMDGOALS := clean $(MAKECMDGOALS)
+      .NOTPARALLEL:
+   endif
+endif
+
+%: $(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES)
+	@echo . > /dev/null
+
+$(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES):
+	@$(MAKE) -C $@ $(MAKECMDGOALS)
+
+.PHONY: $(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES)
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/Incomplete/TestAndMeasurement/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/Incomplete/TestAndMeasurement/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3c3b68bb1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/Incomplete/TestAndMeasurement/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_RC32MCLKSRC | USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH)
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX               4
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/Incomplete/TestAndMeasurement/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/Incomplete/TestAndMeasurement/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bfb0ee5f3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/Incomplete/TestAndMeasurement/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,205 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Peter Lawrence (majbthrd [at] gmail [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = 0x00,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2065,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.TM_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_TestAndMeasurement,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 3,
+
+			.Class                  = 0xFE,
+			.SubClass               = 0x03,
+			.Protocol               = 0x01,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.TM_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = TMC_OUT_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = TMC_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.TM_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = TMC_IN_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = TMC_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.TM_NotificationEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = TMC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = TMC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA TMC Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/Incomplete/TestAndMeasurement/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/Incomplete/TestAndMeasurement/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c1e668855
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/Incomplete/TestAndMeasurement/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Peter Lawrence (majbthrd [at] gmail [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the TMC notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define TMC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR  (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 2)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the TMC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define TMC_IN_EPADDR            (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the TMC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define TMC_OUT_EPADDR           (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the TMC data endpoints. */
+		#define TMC_IO_EPSIZE            64
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the TMC notification endpoint. */
+		#define TMC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE  8
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// Test and Measurement Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            TM_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             TM_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             TM_DataInEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             TM_NotificationEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_TestAndMeasurement = 0, /**< Test and measurement interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/Incomplete/TestAndMeasurement/TestAndMeasurement.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/Incomplete/TestAndMeasurement/TestAndMeasurement.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b0e52308c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/Incomplete/TestAndMeasurement/TestAndMeasurement.c
@@ -0,0 +1,476 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "TestAndMeasurement.h"
+
+/** Contains the (usually static) capabilities of the TMC device. This table is requested by the
+ *  host upon enumeration to give it information on what features of the Test and Measurement USB
+ *  Class the device supports.
+ */
+TMC_Capabilities_t Capabilities =
+	{
+		.Status     = TMC_STATUS_SUCCESS,
+		.TMCVersion = VERSION_BCD(1.00),
+
+		.Interface  =
+			{
+				.ListenOnly             = false,
+				.TalkOnly               = false,
+				.PulseIndicateSupported = false,
+			},
+
+		.Device     =
+			{
+				.SupportsAbortINOnMatch = false,
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Current TMC control request that is being processed */
+static uint8_t RequestInProgress = 0;
+
+/** Stream callback abort flag for bulk IN data */
+static bool IsTMCBulkINReset = false;
+
+/** Stream callback abort flag for bulk OUT data */
+static bool IsTMCBulkOUTReset = false;
+
+/** Last used tag value for data transfers */
+static uint8_t CurrentTransferTag = 0;
+
+/** Length of last data transfer, for reporting to the host in case an in-progress transfer is aborted */
+static uint16_t LastTransferLength = 0;
+
+/** Buffer to hold the next message to sent to the TMC host */
+static uint8_t NextResponseBuffer[64];
+
+/** Indicates the length of the next response to send */
+static uint8_t NextResponseLen;
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		TMC_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+	/* Start the PLL to multiply the 2MHz RC oscillator to 32MHz and switch the CPU core to run from it */
+	XMEGACLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ, 2000000, F_CPU);
+	XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL);
+
+	/* Start the 32MHz internal RC oscillator and start the DFLL to increase it to 48MHz using the USB SOF as a reference */
+	XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);
+	XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF, F_USB);
+
+	PMIC.CTRL = PMIC_LOLVLEN_bm | PMIC_MEDLVLEN_bm | PMIC_HILVLEN_bm;
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs and stops the USB management and CDC management tasks.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
+ *  of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the CDC management task started.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	/* Setup TMC In, Out and Notification Endpoints */
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(TMC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, TMC_IO_EPSIZE, 1);
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(TMC_IN_EPADDR,  EP_TYPE_BULK, TMC_IO_EPSIZE, 1);
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(TMC_OUT_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK, TMC_IO_EPSIZE, 1);
+
+	/* Indicate endpoint configuration success or failure */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to
+ *  the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing
+ *  internally.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	uint8_t TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_SUCCESS;
+
+	/* Process TMC specific control requests */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case Req_InitiateAbortBulkOut:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT))
+			{
+				/* Check that no split transaction is already in progress and the data transfer tag is valid */
+				if (RequestInProgress != 0)
+				{
+					TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_IN_PROGRESS;
+				}
+				else if (USB_ControlRequest.wValue != CurrentTransferTag)
+				{
+					TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_TRANSFER_NOT_IN_PROGRESS;
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					/* Indicate that all in-progress/pending data OUT requests should be aborted */
+					IsTMCBulkOUTReset = true;
+
+					/* Save the split request for later checking when a new request is received */
+					RequestInProgress = Req_InitiateAbortBulkOut;
+				}
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Write the request response byte */
+				Endpoint_Write_8(TMCRequestStatus);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case Req_CheckAbortBulkOutStatus:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT))
+			{
+				/* Check that an ABORT BULK OUT transaction has been requested and that the request has completed */
+				if (RequestInProgress != Req_InitiateAbortBulkOut)
+				  TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_NOT_IN_PROGRESS;
+				else if (IsTMCBulkOUTReset)
+				  TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_PENDING;
+				else
+				  RequestInProgress = 0;
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Write the request response bytes */
+				Endpoint_Write_8(TMCRequestStatus);
+				Endpoint_Write_16_LE(0);
+				Endpoint_Write_32_LE(LastTransferLength);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case Req_InitiateAbortBulkIn:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT))
+			{
+				/* Check that no split transaction is already in progress and the data transfer tag is valid */
+				if (RequestInProgress != 0)
+				{
+					TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_IN_PROGRESS;
+				}
+				else if (USB_ControlRequest.wValue != CurrentTransferTag)
+				{
+					TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_TRANSFER_NOT_IN_PROGRESS;
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					/* Indicate that all in-progress/pending data IN requests should be aborted */
+					IsTMCBulkINReset = true;
+
+					/* Save the split request for later checking when a new request is received */
+					RequestInProgress = Req_InitiateAbortBulkIn;
+				}
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Write the request response bytes */
+				Endpoint_Write_8(TMCRequestStatus);
+				Endpoint_Write_8(CurrentTransferTag);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case Req_CheckAbortBulkInStatus:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT))
+			{
+				/* Check that an ABORT BULK IN transaction has been requested and that the request has completed */
+				if (RequestInProgress != Req_InitiateAbortBulkIn)
+				  TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_NOT_IN_PROGRESS;
+				else if (IsTMCBulkINReset)
+				  TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_PENDING;
+				else
+				  RequestInProgress = 0;
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Write the request response bytes */
+				Endpoint_Write_8(TMCRequestStatus);
+				Endpoint_Write_16_LE(0);
+				Endpoint_Write_32_LE(LastTransferLength);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case Req_InitiateClear:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				/* Check that no split transaction is already in progress */
+				if (RequestInProgress != 0)
+				{
+					Endpoint_Write_8(TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_IN_PROGRESS);
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					/* Indicate that all in-progress/pending data IN and OUT requests should be aborted */
+					IsTMCBulkINReset  = true;
+					IsTMCBulkOUTReset = true;
+
+					/* Save the split request for later checking when a new request is received */
+					RequestInProgress = Req_InitiateClear;
+				}
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Write the request response byte */
+				Endpoint_Write_8(TMCRequestStatus);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case Req_CheckClearStatus:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				/* Check that a CLEAR transaction has been requested and that the request has completed */
+				if (RequestInProgress != Req_InitiateClear)
+				  TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_NOT_IN_PROGRESS;
+				else if (IsTMCBulkINReset || IsTMCBulkOUTReset)
+				  TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_PENDING;
+				else
+				  RequestInProgress = 0;
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Write the request response bytes */
+				Endpoint_Write_8(TMCRequestStatus);
+				Endpoint_Write_8(0);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case Req_GetCapabilities:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Write the device capabilities to the control endpoint */
+				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&Capabilities, sizeof(TMC_Capabilities_t));
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+void ProcessSentMessage(uint8_t* const Data, const uint8_t Length)
+{
+	if (strncmp((char*)Data, "*IDN?", 5) == 0)
+	  strcpy((char*)NextResponseBuffer, "LUFA TMC DEMO");
+
+	NextResponseLen = strlen((char*)NextResponseBuffer);
+}
+
+uint8_t GetNextMessage(uint8_t* const Data)
+{
+	  strcpy((char*)NextResponseBuffer, "LUFA TMC DEMO");
+
+	NextResponseLen = strlen((char*)NextResponseBuffer);
+// ---
+	uint8_t DataLen = MIN(NextResponseLen, 64);
+
+	strlcpy((char*)Data, (char*)NextResponseBuffer, DataLen);
+
+	return DataLen;
+}
+
+/** Function to manage TMC data transmission and reception to and from the host. */
+void TMC_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	TMC_MessageHeader_t MessageHeader;
+	uint8_t             MessagePayload[128];
+
+	/* Try to read in a TMC message from the interface, process if one is available */
+	if (ReadTMCHeader(&MessageHeader))
+	{
+		/* Indicate busy */
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+		switch (MessageHeader.MessageID)
+		{
+			case TMC_MESSAGEID_DEV_DEP_MSG_OUT:
+				LastTransferLength = 0;
+				while (Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(MessagePayload, MIN(MessageHeader.TransferSize, sizeof(MessagePayload)), &LastTransferLength) ==
+				       ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+				{
+					if (IsTMCBulkOUTReset)
+					  break;
+				}
+
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+				ProcessSentMessage(MessagePayload, LastTransferLength);
+				break;
+			case TMC_MESSAGEID_DEV_DEP_MSG_IN:
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+				MessageHeader.TransferSize = GetNextMessage(MessagePayload);
+				MessageHeader.MessageIDSpecific.DeviceOUT.LastMessageTransaction = true;
+				WriteTMCHeader(&MessageHeader);
+
+				LastTransferLength = 0;
+				while (Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(MessagePayload, MessageHeader.TransferSize, &LastTransferLength) ==
+				       ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+				{
+					if (IsTMCBulkINReset)
+					  break;
+				}
+
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				break;
+			default:
+				Endpoint_StallTransaction();
+				break;
+		}
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	}
+
+	/* All pending data has been processed - reset the data abort flags */
+	IsTMCBulkINReset  = false;
+	IsTMCBulkOUTReset = false;
+}
+
+/** Attempts to read in the TMC message header from the TMC interface.
+ *
+ *  \param[out] MessageHeader  Pointer to a location where the read header (if any) should be stored
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if a header was read, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool ReadTMCHeader(TMC_MessageHeader_t* const MessageHeader)
+{
+	uint16_t BytesTransferred;
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Select the Data Out endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(TMC_OUT_EPADDR);
+
+	/* Abort if no command has been sent from the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Read in the header of the command from the host */
+	BytesTransferred = 0;
+	while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(MessageHeader, sizeof(TMC_MessageHeader_t), &BytesTransferred)) ==
+	       ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+	{
+		if (IsTMCBulkOUTReset)
+		  break;
+	}
+
+	/* Store the new command tag value for later use */
+	CurrentTransferTag = MessageHeader->Tag;
+
+	/* Indicate if the command has been aborted or not */
+	return (!(IsTMCBulkOUTReset) && (ErrorCode == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError));
+}
+
+bool WriteTMCHeader(TMC_MessageHeader_t* const MessageHeader)
+{
+	uint16_t BytesTransferred;
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Set the message tag of the command header */
+	MessageHeader->Tag        =  CurrentTransferTag;
+	MessageHeader->InverseTag = ~CurrentTransferTag;
+
+	/* Select the Data In endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(TMC_IN_EPADDR);
+
+	/* Send the command header to the host */
+	BytesTransferred = 0;
+	while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(MessageHeader, sizeof(TMC_MessageHeader_t), &BytesTransferred)) ==
+	       ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+	{
+		if (IsTMCBulkINReset)
+		  break;
+	}
+
+	/* Indicate if the command has been aborted or not */
+	return (!(IsTMCBulkINReset) && (ErrorCode == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError));
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/Incomplete/TestAndMeasurement/TestAndMeasurement.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/Incomplete/TestAndMeasurement/TestAndMeasurement.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ef050bd61
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/Incomplete/TestAndMeasurement/TestAndMeasurement.h
@@ -0,0 +1,150 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#ifndef _TESTANDMEASUREMENT_H_
+#define _TESTANDMEASUREMENT_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY                  LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING              (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY                    (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR                    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY                      LEDS_LED2
+
+		#define Req_InitiateAbortBulkOut              0x01
+		#define Req_CheckAbortBulkOutStatus           0x02
+		#define Req_InitiateAbortBulkIn               0x03
+		#define Req_CheckAbortBulkInStatus            0x04
+		#define Req_InitiateClear                     0x05
+		#define Req_CheckClearStatus                  0x06
+		#define Req_GetCapabilities                   0x07
+		#define Req_IndicatorPulse                    0x40
+
+		#define TMC_STATUS_SUCCESS                    0x01
+		#define TMC_STATUS_PENDING                    0x02
+		#define TMC_STATUS_FAILED                     0x80
+		#define TMC_STATUS_TRANSFER_NOT_IN_PROGRESS   0x81
+		#define TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_NOT_IN_PROGRESS      0x82
+		#define TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_IN_PROGRESS          0x83
+
+		#define TMC_MESSAGEID_DEV_DEP_MSG_OUT         0x01
+		#define TMC_MESSAGEID_DEV_DEP_MSG_IN          0x02
+		#define TMC_MESSAGEID_DEV_VENDOR_OUT          0x7E
+		#define TMC_MESSAGEID_DEV_VENDOR_IN           0x7F
+
+	/* Type Defines */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  Status;
+			uint8_t  Reserved;
+
+			uint16_t TMCVersion;
+
+			struct
+			{
+				unsigned ListenOnly             : 1;
+				unsigned TalkOnly               : 1;
+				unsigned PulseIndicateSupported : 1;
+				unsigned Reserved               : 5;
+			} Interface;
+
+			struct
+			{
+				unsigned SupportsAbortINOnMatch : 1;
+				unsigned Reserved               : 7;
+			} Device;
+
+			uint8_t Reserved2[6];
+			uint8_t Reserved3[12];
+		} TMC_Capabilities_t;
+
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t LastMessageTransaction;
+			uint8_t TermChar;
+			uint8_t Reserved[2];
+		} TMC_DevOUTMessageHeader_t;
+
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t LastMessageTransaction;
+			uint8_t Reserved[3];
+		} TMC_DevINMessageHeader_t;
+
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  MessageID;
+			uint8_t  Tag;
+			uint8_t  InverseTag;
+			uint8_t  Reserved;
+			uint32_t TransferSize;
+
+			union
+			{
+				TMC_DevOUTMessageHeader_t DeviceOUT;
+				TMC_DevINMessageHeader_t  DeviceIN;
+				uint32_t                  VendorSpecific;
+			} MessageIDSpecific;
+		} TMC_MessageHeader_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void TMC_Task(void);
+		bool ReadTMCHeader(TMC_MessageHeader_t* const MessageHeader);
+		bool WriteTMCHeader(TMC_MessageHeader_t* const MessageHeader);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/Incomplete/TestAndMeasurement/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/Incomplete/TestAndMeasurement/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c7dda069d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/Incomplete/TestAndMeasurement/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = TestAndMeasurement
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/AudioInput.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/AudioInput.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2937d8f86
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/AudioInput.c
@@ -0,0 +1,259 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the Audio Input demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "AudioInput.h"
+
+/** Flag to indicate if the streaming audio alternative interface has been selected by the host. */
+static bool StreamingAudioInterfaceSelected = false;
+
+/** Current audio sampling frequency of the streaming audio endpoint. */
+static uint32_t CurrentAudioSampleFrequency = 48000;
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	ADC_Init(ADC_FREE_RUNNING | ADC_PRESCALE_32);
+	ADC_SetupChannel(MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL);
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Start the ADC conversion in free running mode */
+	ADC_StartReading(ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC | ADC_RIGHT_ADJUSTED | ADC_GET_CHANNEL_MASK(MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL));
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs, and
+ *  configures the sample update and PWM timers.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	/* Sample reload timer initialization */
+	TIMSK0  = (1 << OCIE0A);
+	OCR0A   = ((F_CPU / 8 / CurrentAudioSampleFrequency) - 1);
+	TCCR0A  = (1 << WGM01);  // CTC mode
+	TCCR0B  = (1 << CS01);   // Fcpu/8 speed
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs, disables the sample update and PWM output timers and stops the USB and Audio management tasks.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Stop the sample reload timer */
+	TCCR0B = 0;
+
+	/* Indicate streaming audio interface not selected */
+	StreamingAudioInterfaceSelected = false;
+
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
+ *  of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	/* Setup Audio Stream Endpoint */
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AUDIO_STREAM_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS, AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE, 2);
+
+	/* Indicate endpoint configuration success or failure */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to
+ *  the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing
+ *  internally.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	/* Process General and Audio specific control requests */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case REQ_SetInterface:
+			/* Set Interface is not handled by the library, as its function is application-specific */
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+
+				/* Check if the host is enabling the audio interface (setting AlternateSetting to 1) */
+				StreamingAudioInterfaceSelected = ((USB_ControlRequest.wValue) != 0);
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case AUDIO_REQ_GetStatus:
+			/* Get Status request can be directed at either the interface or endpoint, neither is currently used
+			 * according to the latest USB Audio 1.0 standard, but must be ACKed with no data when requested */
+			if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) ||
+			    (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT)))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case AUDIO_REQ_SetCurrent:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT))
+			{
+				/* Extract out the relevant request information to get the target Endpoint address and control being set */
+				uint8_t EndpointAddress = (uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wIndex;
+				uint8_t EndpointControl = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue >> 8);
+
+				/* Only handle SET CURRENT requests to the audio endpoint's sample frequency property */
+				if ((EndpointAddress == AUDIO_STREAM_EPADDR) && (EndpointControl == AUDIO_EPCONTROL_SamplingFreq))
+				{
+					uint8_t SampleRate[3];
+
+					Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+					Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(SampleRate, sizeof(SampleRate));
+					Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+					/* Set the new sampling frequency to the value given by the host */
+					CurrentAudioSampleFrequency = (((uint32_t)SampleRate[2] << 16) | ((uint32_t)SampleRate[1] << 8) | (uint32_t)SampleRate[0]);
+
+					/* Adjust sample reload timer to the new frequency */
+					OCR0A = ((F_CPU / 8 / CurrentAudioSampleFrequency) - 1);
+				}
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case AUDIO_REQ_GetCurrent:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT))
+			{
+				/* Extract out the relevant request information to get the target Endpoint address and control being retrieved */
+				uint8_t EndpointAddress = (uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wIndex;
+				uint8_t EndpointControl = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue >> 8);
+
+				/* Only handle GET CURRENT requests to the audio endpoint's sample frequency property */
+				if ((EndpointAddress == AUDIO_STREAM_EPADDR) && (EndpointControl == AUDIO_EPCONTROL_SamplingFreq))
+				{
+					uint8_t SampleRate[3];
+
+					/* Convert the sampling rate value into the 24-bit format the host expects for the property */
+					SampleRate[2] = (CurrentAudioSampleFrequency >> 16);
+					SampleRate[1] = (CurrentAudioSampleFrequency >> 8);
+					SampleRate[0] = (CurrentAudioSampleFrequency &  0xFF);
+
+					Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+					Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(SampleRate, sizeof(SampleRate));
+					Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+				}
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** ISR to handle the reloading of the data endpoint with the next sample. */
+ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	uint8_t PrevEndpoint = Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint();
+
+	/* Select the audio stream endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AUDIO_STREAM_EPADDR);
+
+	/* Check if the current endpoint can be written to and that the audio interface is enabled */
+	if (Endpoint_IsINReady() && StreamingAudioInterfaceSelected)
+	{
+		int16_t AudioSample;
+
+		#if defined(USE_TEST_TONE)
+			static uint8_t SquareWaveSampleCount;
+			static int16_t CurrentWaveValue;
+
+			/* In test tone mode, generate a square wave at 1/256 of the sample rate */
+			if (SquareWaveSampleCount++ == 0xFF)
+			  CurrentWaveValue ^= 0x8000;
+
+			/* Only generate audio if the board button is being pressed */
+			AudioSample = (Buttons_GetStatus() & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ? CurrentWaveValue : 0;
+		#else
+			/* Audio sample is ADC value scaled to fit the entire range */
+			AudioSample = ((SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE / ADC_MAX_RANGE) * ADC_GetResult());
+
+			#if defined(MICROPHONE_BIASED_TO_HALF_RAIL)
+			/* Microphone is biased to half rail voltage, subtract the bias from the sample value */
+			AudioSample -= (SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE / 2);
+			#endif
+		#endif
+
+		/* Write the sample to the buffer */
+		Endpoint_Write_16_LE(AudioSample);
+
+		/* Check to see if the bank is now full */
+		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		{
+			/* Send the full packet to the host */
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+		}
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(PrevEndpoint);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/AudioInput.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/AudioInput.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a5c5946b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/AudioInput.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for AudioInput.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _AUDIO_INPUT_H_
+#define _AUDIO_INPUT_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Maximum audio sample value for the microphone input. */
+		#define SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE          0xFFFF
+
+		/** Maximum ADC range for the microphone input. */
+		#define ADC_MAX_RANGE             0x3FF
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/AudioInput.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/AudioInput.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9dc6c36b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/AudioInput.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Audio Input Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Audio Class</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Standard Audio Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Audio 1.0 Class Specification \n
+ *        USBIF Audio 1.0 Class Terminal Types Specification \n
+ *        USBIF Audio 1.0 Data Formats Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Audio demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Audio Input device using the
+ *  basic USB Audio 1.0 drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers
+ *  required).
+ *
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function as a
+ *  USB microphone. By default, the demo will produce a square wave test tone
+ *  when the board button is pressed. If USE_TEST_TONE is not defined in the
+ *  project makefile, incoming audio from the ADC channel 1 will be sampled
+ *  and sent to the host computer instead.
+ *
+ *  When in microphone mode, connect a microphone to the ADC channel 2.
+ *
+ *  Under Windows, if a driver request dialogue pops up, select the option
+ *  to automatically install the appropriate drivers.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>USE_TEST_TONE</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, this alters the demo to produce a square wave test tone when the first board button is pressed
+ *        instead of sampling the board microphone.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MICROPHONE_BIASED_TO_HALF_RAIL</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, this alters the demo so that the half VCC bias of the microphone input is subtracted.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8360102f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
+ *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
+ *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
+ *  makefile or build system.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#define MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL               2
+
+	#define MICROPHONE_BIASED_TO_HALF_RAIL
+	#define USE_TEST_TONE
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..796221604
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ac84eb67e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,312 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2047,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,2),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize   = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces          = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber      = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex    = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes         = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption      = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.Audio_ControlInterface =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioControl,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
+
+			.Class                    = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass,
+			.SubClass                 = AUDIO_CSCP_ControlSubclass,
+			.Protocol                 = AUDIO_CSCP_ControlProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_ControlInterface_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.ACSpecification          = VERSION_BCD(1,0,0),
+			.TotalLength              = (sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t) +
+			                             sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_InputTerminal_t) +
+			                             sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_OutputTerminal_t)),
+
+			.InCollection             = 1,
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream,
+		},
+
+	.Audio_InputTerminal =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_InputTerminal_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_InputTerminal,
+
+			.TerminalID               = 0x01,
+			.TerminalType             = AUDIO_TERMINAL_IN_MIC,
+			.AssociatedOutputTerminal = 0x00,
+
+			.TotalChannels            = 1,
+			.ChannelConfig            = 0,
+
+			.ChannelStrIndex          = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+			.TerminalStrIndex         = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_OutputTerminal =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_OutputTerminal_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_OutputTerminal,
+
+			.TerminalID               = 0x02,
+			.TerminalType             = AUDIO_TERMINAL_STREAMING,
+			.AssociatedInputTerminal  = 0x00,
+
+			.SourceID                 = 0x01,
+
+			.TerminalStrIndex         = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_Alt0 =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
+
+			.Class                    = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass,
+			.SubClass                 = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioStreamingSubclass,
+			.Protocol                 = AUDIO_CSCP_StreamingProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_Alt1 =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 1,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 1,
+
+			.Class                    = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass,
+			.SubClass                 = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioStreamingSubclass,
+			.Protocol                 = AUDIO_CSCP_StreamingProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AS_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_General,
+
+			.TerminalLink             = 0x02,
+
+			.FrameDelay               = 1,
+			.AudioFormat              = 0x0001
+		},
+
+	.Audio_AudioFormat =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Format_t) +
+			                                     sizeof(ConfigurationDescriptor.Audio_AudioFormatSampleRates),
+			                             .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_FormatType,
+
+			.FormatType               = 0x01,
+			.Channels                 = 0x01,
+
+			.SubFrameSize             = 0x02,
+			.BitResolution            = 16,
+
+			.TotalDiscreteSampleRates = (sizeof(ConfigurationDescriptor.Audio_AudioFormatSampleRates) / sizeof(USB_Audio_SampleFreq_t)),
+		},
+
+	.Audio_AudioFormatSampleRates =
+		{
+			AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(8000),
+			AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(11025),
+			AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(22050),
+			AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(44100),
+			AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(48000),
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Endpoint =
+				{
+					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+					.EndpointAddress     = AUDIO_STREAM_EPADDR,
+					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS | ENDPOINT_ATTR_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+					.EndpointSize        = AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+					.PollingIntervalMS   = 0x01
+				},
+
+			.Refresh                  = 0,
+			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamEndpoint_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSEndpoint},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSEndpoint_General,
+
+			.Attributes               = (AUDIO_EP_ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS | AUDIO_EP_SAMPLE_FREQ_CONTROL),
+
+			.LockDelayUnits           = 0x00,
+			.LockDelay                = 0x0000
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Audio In Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6ab6c0e52
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the Audio isochronous streaming data IN endpoint. */
+		#define AUDIO_STREAM_EPADDR          (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 1)
+
+		/** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. */
+		#define AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE           256
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t     Config;
+
+			// Audio Control Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t                Audio_ControlInterface;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t       Audio_ControlInterface_SPC;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_InputTerminal_t      Audio_InputTerminal;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_OutputTerminal_t     Audio_OutputTerminal;
+
+			// Audio Streaming Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t                Audio_StreamInterface_Alt0;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t                Audio_StreamInterface_Alt1;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AS_t       Audio_StreamInterface_SPC;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_Format_t             Audio_AudioFormat;
+			USB_Audio_SampleFreq_t                    Audio_AudioFormatSampleRates[5];
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t Audio_StreamEndpoint;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t Audio_StreamEndpoint_SPC;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_AudioControl = 0, /**< Audio control interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream  = 1, /**< Audio stream interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..dab549a75
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Audio Input Device Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.audio_input.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.audio_input"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.audio_input" caption="Audio Input Device Demo (Low Level APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Audio 1.0 Input device demo, implementing a basic USB microphone. This demo uses the Low Level LUFA APIs to manually implement a USB Class for demonstration purposes without using the simpler in-built LUFA Class Driver APIs.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="Audio Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="AudioInput.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="AudioInput.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="AudioInput.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.adc"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a3181cf7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Audio Input Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1acf3b956
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioInput/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = AudioInput
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2bccfdee8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.c
@@ -0,0 +1,293 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the AudioOutput demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "AudioOutput.h"
+
+/** Flag to indicate if the streaming audio alternative interface has been selected by the host. */
+static bool StreamingAudioInterfaceSelected = false;
+
+/** Current audio sampling frequency of the streaming audio endpoint. */
+static uint32_t CurrentAudioSampleFrequency = 48000;
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs, and
+ *  configures the sample update and PWM timers.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	/* Sample reload timer initialization */
+	TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A);
+	OCR0A  = ((F_CPU / 8 / CurrentAudioSampleFrequency) - 1);
+	TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01);  // CTC mode
+	TCCR0B = (1 << CS01);   // Fcpu/8 speed
+
+	#if defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO)
+	/* Set speaker as output */
+	DDRC  |= (1 << 6);
+	#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO)
+	/* Set speakers as outputs */
+	DDRC  |= ((1 << 6) | (1 << 5));
+	#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_PORTC)
+	/* Set PORTC as outputs */
+	DDRC  |= 0xFF;
+	#endif
+
+	#if (defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO) || defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO))
+	/* PWM speaker timer initialization */
+	TCCR3A = ((1 << WGM30) | (1 << COM3A1) | (1 << COM3A0)
+	                       | (1 << COM3B1) | (1 << COM3B0)); // Set on match, clear on TOP
+	TCCR3B = ((1 << WGM32) | (1 << CS30));  // Fast 8-Bit PWM, F_CPU speed
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs, disables the sample update and PWM output timers and stops the USB and Audio management tasks.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Stop the timers */
+	TCCR0B = 0;
+	#if (defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO) || defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO))
+	TCCR3B = 0;
+	#endif
+
+	#if defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO)
+	/* Set speaker as input to reduce current draw */
+	DDRC  &= ~(1 << 6);
+	#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO)
+	/* Set speakers as inputs to reduce current draw */
+	DDRC  &= ~((1 << 6) | (1 << 5));
+	#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_PORTC)
+	/* Set PORTC low */
+	PORTC = 0x00;
+	#endif
+
+	/* Indicate streaming audio interface not selected */
+	StreamingAudioInterfaceSelected = false;
+
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
+ *  of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	/* Setup Audio Stream Endpoint */
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AUDIO_STREAM_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS, AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE, 2);
+
+	/* Indicate endpoint configuration success or failure */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to
+ *  the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing
+ *  internally.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	/* Process General and Audio specific control requests */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case REQ_SetInterface:
+			/* Set Interface is not handled by the library, as its function is application-specific */
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+
+				/* Check if the host is enabling the audio interface (setting AlternateSetting to 1) */
+				StreamingAudioInterfaceSelected = ((USB_ControlRequest.wValue) != 0);
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case AUDIO_REQ_GetStatus:
+			/* Get Status request can be directed at either the interface or endpoint, neither is currently used
+			 * according to the latest USB Audio 1.0 standard, but must be ACKed with no data when requested */
+			if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) ||
+			    (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT)))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case AUDIO_REQ_SetCurrent:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT))
+			{
+				/* Extract out the relevant request information to get the target Endpoint address and control being set */
+				uint8_t EndpointAddress = (uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wIndex;
+				uint8_t EndpointControl = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue >> 8);
+
+				/* Only handle SET CURRENT requests to the audio endpoint's sample frequency property */
+				if ((EndpointAddress == AUDIO_STREAM_EPADDR) && (EndpointControl == AUDIO_EPCONTROL_SamplingFreq))
+				{
+					uint8_t SampleRate[3];
+
+					Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+					Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(SampleRate, sizeof(SampleRate));
+					Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+					/* Set the new sampling frequency to the value given by the host */
+					CurrentAudioSampleFrequency = (((uint32_t)SampleRate[2] << 16) | ((uint32_t)SampleRate[1] << 8) | (uint32_t)SampleRate[0]);
+
+					/* Adjust sample reload timer to the new frequency */
+					OCR0A = ((F_CPU / 8 / CurrentAudioSampleFrequency) - 1);
+				}
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case AUDIO_REQ_GetCurrent:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT))
+			{
+				/* Extract out the relevant request information to get the target Endpoint address and control being retrieved */
+				uint8_t EndpointAddress = (uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wIndex;
+				uint8_t EndpointControl = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue >> 8);
+
+				/* Only handle GET CURRENT requests to the audio endpoint's sample frequency property */
+				if ((EndpointAddress == AUDIO_STREAM_EPADDR) && (EndpointControl == AUDIO_EPCONTROL_SamplingFreq))
+				{
+					uint8_t SampleRate[3];
+
+					/* Convert the sampling rate value into the 24-bit format the host expects for the property */
+					SampleRate[2] = (CurrentAudioSampleFrequency >> 16);
+					SampleRate[1] = (CurrentAudioSampleFrequency >> 8);
+					SampleRate[0] = (CurrentAudioSampleFrequency &  0xFF);
+
+					Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+					Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(SampleRate, sizeof(SampleRate));
+					Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+				}
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** ISR to handle the reloading of the PWM timer with the next sample. */
+ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	uint8_t PrevEndpoint = Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint();
+
+	/* Select the audio stream endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AUDIO_STREAM_EPADDR);
+
+	/* Check if the current endpoint can be read from (contains a packet) and the host is sending data */
+	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived() && StreamingAudioInterfaceSelected)
+	{
+		/* Retrieve the signed 16-bit left and right audio samples, convert to 8-bit */
+		int8_t LeftSample_8Bit   = ((int16_t)Endpoint_Read_16_LE() >> 8);
+		int8_t RightSample_8Bit  = ((int16_t)Endpoint_Read_16_LE() >> 8);
+
+		/* Mix the two channels together to produce a mono, 8-bit sample */
+		int8_t MixedSample_8Bit  = (((int16_t)LeftSample_8Bit + (int16_t)RightSample_8Bit) >> 1);
+
+		/* Check to see if the bank is now empty */
+		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		{
+			/* Acknowledge the packet, clear the bank ready for the next packet */
+			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+		}
+
+		#if defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO)
+		/* Load the sample into the PWM timer channel */
+		OCR3A = (MixedSample_8Bit ^ (1 << 7));
+		#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO)
+		/* Load the dual 8-bit samples into the PWM timer channels */
+		OCR3A = (LeftSample_8Bit  ^ (1 << 7));
+		OCR3B = (RightSample_8Bit ^ (1 << 7));
+		#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_PORTC)
+		/* Load the 8-bit mixed sample into PORTC */
+		PORTC = MixedSample_8Bit;
+		#endif
+
+		uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+		/* Turn on LEDs as the sample amplitude increases */
+		if (MixedSample_8Bit > 16)
+		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4);
+		else if (MixedSample_8Bit > 8)
+		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3);
+		else if (MixedSample_8Bit > 4)
+		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+		else if (MixedSample_8Bit > 2)
+		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(PrevEndpoint);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bbac4dff6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.h
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for AudioOutput.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
+#define _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8f0c7d656
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Audio Output Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Audio Class</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Standard Audio Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Audio 1.0 Class Specification \n
+ *        USBIF Audio 1.0 Class Terminal Types Specification \n
+ *        USBIF Audio 1.0 Data Formats Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Audio demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Audio Output device using the
+ *  basic USB Audio 1.0 drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers
+ *  required).
+ *
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function
+ *  as a USB speaker. Outgoing audio will output in 8-bit PWM onto
+ *  the timer 3 output compare channel A for AUDIO_OUT_MONO mode, on
+ *  timer 3 channels A and B for AUDIO_OUT_STEREO and on PORTC as a signed
+ *  mono sample for AUDIO_OUT_PORTC. Audio output will also be indicated on
+ *  the board LEDs in all modes. Decouple audio outputs with a capacitor and
+ *  attach to a speaker to hear the audio.
+ *
+ *  Under Windows, if a driver request dialogue pops up, select the option
+ *  to automatically install the appropriate drivers.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AUDIO_OUT_STEREO</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, this outputs the audio samples in stereo to the timer output pins of the microcontroller.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AUDIO_OUT_MONO</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, this outputs the audio samples in mono to the timer output pin of the microcontroller.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AUDIO_OUT_PORTC</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, this outputs the audio samples in mono to port C of the microcontroller, for connection to an
+ *        external DAC.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e6684a611
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
+ *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
+ *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
+ *  makefile or build system.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#define AUDIO_OUT_STEREO
+//	#define AUDIO_OUT_MONO
+//	#define AUDIO_OUT_PORTC
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..796221604
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..dc5c420a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,312 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2046,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,2),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize   = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces          = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber      = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex    = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes         = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption      = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.Audio_ControlInterface =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioControl,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
+
+			.Class                    = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass,
+			.SubClass                 = AUDIO_CSCP_ControlSubclass,
+			.Protocol                 = AUDIO_CSCP_ControlProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_ControlInterface_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.ACSpecification          = VERSION_BCD(1,0,0),
+			.TotalLength              = (sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t) +
+			                             sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_InputTerminal_t) +
+			                             sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_OutputTerminal_t)),
+
+			.InCollection             = 1,
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream,
+		},
+
+	.Audio_InputTerminal =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_InputTerminal_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_InputTerminal,
+
+			.TerminalID               = 0x01,
+			.TerminalType             = AUDIO_TERMINAL_STREAMING,
+			.AssociatedOutputTerminal = 0x00,
+
+			.TotalChannels            = 2,
+			.ChannelConfig            = (AUDIO_CHANNEL_LEFT_FRONT | AUDIO_CHANNEL_RIGHT_FRONT),
+
+			.ChannelStrIndex          = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+			.TerminalStrIndex         = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_OutputTerminal =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_OutputTerminal_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_OutputTerminal,
+
+			.TerminalID               = 0x02,
+			.TerminalType             = AUDIO_TERMINAL_OUT_SPEAKER,
+			.AssociatedInputTerminal  = 0x00,
+
+			.SourceID                 = 0x01,
+
+			.TerminalStrIndex         = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_Alt0 =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
+
+			.Class                    = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass,
+			.SubClass                 = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioStreamingSubclass,
+			.Protocol                 = AUDIO_CSCP_StreamingProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_Alt1 =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 1,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 1,
+
+			.Class                    = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass,
+			.SubClass                 = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioStreamingSubclass,
+			.Protocol                 = AUDIO_CSCP_StreamingProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AS_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_General,
+
+			.TerminalLink             = 0x01,
+
+			.FrameDelay               = 1,
+			.AudioFormat              = 0x0001
+		},
+
+	.Audio_AudioFormat =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Format_t) +
+			                                     sizeof(ConfigurationDescriptor.Audio_AudioFormatSampleRates),
+			                             .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_FormatType,
+
+			.FormatType               = 0x01,
+			.Channels                 = 0x02,
+
+			.SubFrameSize             = 0x02,
+			.BitResolution            = 16,
+
+			.TotalDiscreteSampleRates = (sizeof(ConfigurationDescriptor.Audio_AudioFormatSampleRates) / sizeof(USB_Audio_SampleFreq_t)),
+		},
+
+	.Audio_AudioFormatSampleRates =
+		{
+			AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(8000),
+			AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(11025),
+			AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(22050),
+			AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(44100),
+			AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(48000),
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Endpoint =
+				{
+					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+					.EndpointAddress     = AUDIO_STREAM_EPADDR,
+					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS | ENDPOINT_ATTR_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+					.EndpointSize        = AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+					.PollingIntervalMS   = 0x01
+				},
+
+			.Refresh                  = 0,
+			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamEndpoint_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSEndpoint},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSEndpoint_General,
+
+			.Attributes               = (AUDIO_EP_ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS | AUDIO_EP_SAMPLE_FREQ_CONTROL),
+
+			.LockDelayUnits           = 0x00,
+			.LockDelay                = 0x0000
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Audio Out Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..821911283
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the Audio isochronous streaming data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define AUDIO_STREAM_EPADDR          (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 1)
+
+		/** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. */
+		#define AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE           256
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t     Config;
+
+			// Audio Control Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t                Audio_ControlInterface;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t       Audio_ControlInterface_SPC;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_InputTerminal_t      Audio_InputTerminal;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_OutputTerminal_t     Audio_OutputTerminal;
+
+			// Audio Streaming Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t                Audio_StreamInterface_Alt0;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t                Audio_StreamInterface_Alt1;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AS_t       Audio_StreamInterface_SPC;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_Format_t             Audio_AudioFormat;
+			USB_Audio_SampleFreq_t                    Audio_AudioFormatSampleRates[5];
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t Audio_StreamEndpoint;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t Audio_StreamEndpoint_SPC;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_AudioControl = 0, /**< Audio control interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream  = 1, /**< Audio stream interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cddfb8543
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Audio Output Device Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.audio_output.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.audio_output"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.audio_output" caption="Audio Output Device Demo (Low Level APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Audio 1.0 Output device demo, implementing a basic USB speaker. This demo uses the Low Level LUFA APIs to manually implement a USB Class for demonstration purposes without using the simpler in-built LUFA Class Driver APIs.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="Audio Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="AudioOutput.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="AudioOutput.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="AudioOutput.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..03c33a2d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Audio Output Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = YES
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c4c944172
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/AudioOutput/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = AudioOutput
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/BulkVendor.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/BulkVendor.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..14d098285
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/BulkVendor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,136 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the Bulk Vendor demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_BULKVENDOR_C
+#include "BulkVendor.h"
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		USB_USBTask();
+
+		uint8_t ReceivedData[VENDOR_IO_EPSIZE];
+		memset(ReceivedData, 0x00, sizeof(ReceivedData));
+
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(VENDOR_OUT_EPADDR);
+		if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+		{
+			Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(ReceivedData, VENDOR_IO_EPSIZE, NULL);
+			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+			Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(VENDOR_IN_EPADDR);
+			Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(ReceivedData, VENDOR_IO_EPSIZE, NULL);
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+	/* Start the PLL to multiply the 2MHz RC oscillator to 32MHz and switch the CPU core to run from it */
+	XMEGACLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ, 2000000, F_CPU);
+	XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL);
+
+	/* Start the 32MHz internal RC oscillator and start the DFLL to increase it to 48MHz using the USB SOF as a reference */
+	XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);
+	XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF, F_USB);
+
+	PMIC.CTRL = PMIC_LOLVLEN_bm | PMIC_MEDLVLEN_bm | PMIC_HILVLEN_bm;
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
+ *  of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	/* Setup Vendor Data Endpoints */
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(VENDOR_IN_EPADDR,  EP_TYPE_BULK, VENDOR_IO_EPSIZE, 1);
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(VENDOR_OUT_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK, VENDOR_IO_EPSIZE, 1);
+
+	/* Indicate endpoint configuration success or failure */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to
+ *  the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing
+ *  internally.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	// Process vendor specific control requests here
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/BulkVendor.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/BulkVendor.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3350e0e27
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/BulkVendor.h
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for BulkVendor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _BULK_VENDOR_H_
+#define _BULK_VENDOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY       LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING   (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY         (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR         (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY           LEDS_LED2
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/BulkVendor.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/BulkVendor.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0fe7cb950
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/BulkVendor.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Bulk Vendor Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *  \li Series AU XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxAxU)
+ *  \li Series B XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxBxU)
+ *  \li Series C XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxCxU)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Vendor (no official class)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Vendor (no official subclass)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>None</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Bulk Vendor demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB device that contains read/write bulk type
+ *  endpoints, for implementing custom USB protocols.
+ *
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and echo back packets
+ *  sent from the host.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3c3b68bb1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_RC32MCLKSRC | USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH)
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX               4
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5eaff96e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,194 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x206C,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED,
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.Vendor_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_Vendor,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = 0xFF,
+			.SubClass               = 0xFF,
+			.Protocol               = 0xFF,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Vendor_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = VENDOR_IN_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = VENDOR_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.Vendor_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = VENDOR_OUT_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = VENDOR_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Bulk Vendor Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6fe1d7917
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the Bulk Vendor device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define VENDOR_IN_EPADDR               (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the Bulk Vendor host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define VENDOR_OUT_EPADDR              (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Bulk Vendor data endpoints. */
+		#define VENDOR_IO_EPSIZE               64
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// Vendor Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Vendor_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             Vendor_DataInEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             Vendor_DataOutEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_Vendor = 0, /**< Vendor interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/HostTestApp/test_bulk_vendor.py b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/HostTestApp/test_bulk_vendor.py
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..882bd284d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/HostTestApp/test_bulk_vendor.py
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+"""
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+"""
+
+"""
+    LUFA Bulk Vendor device demo host test script. This script will send and
+    receive a continuous stream of packets to/from to the device, to show
+    bidirectional communications.
+
+    Requires the pyUSB library (http://sourceforge.net/projects/pyusb/).
+"""
+
+import sys
+from time import sleep
+import usb.core
+import usb.util
+
+# Bulk Vendor HID device VID and PID
+device_vid = 0x03EB
+device_pid = 0x206C
+device_in_ep  = 3
+device_out_ep = 4
+
+
+def get_vendor_device_handle():
+	dev_handle = usb.core.find(idVendor=device_vid, idProduct=device_pid)
+	return dev_handle
+
+
+def write(device, packet):
+    device.write(usb.util.ENDPOINT_OUT | device_out_ep, packet, 0, 1000)
+    print("Sent Packet: {0}".format(packet))
+
+
+def read(device):
+    packet = device.read(usb.util.ENDPOINT_IN | device_in_ep, 64, 0, 1000)
+    print("Received Packet: {0}".format(''.join([chr(x) for x in packet])))
+    return packet
+
+
+def main():
+    vendor_device = get_vendor_device_handle()
+
+    if vendor_device is None:
+        print("No valid Vendor device found.")
+        sys.exit(1)
+
+    vendor_device.set_configuration()
+
+    print("Connected to device 0x%04X/0x%04X - %s [%s]" %
+          (vendor_device.idVendor, vendor_device.idProduct,
+           usb.util.get_string(vendor_device, 255, vendor_device.iProduct),
+           usb.util.get_string(vendor_device, 255, vendor_device.iManufacturer)))
+
+    x = 0
+    while 1:
+    	x = x + 1 % 255
+    	write(vendor_device, "TEST PACKET %d" % x)
+    	read(vendor_device)
+    	sleep(1)
+
+if __name__ == '__main__':
+    main()
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/WindowsDriver/LUFA_Bulk_Vendor_Demo.inf b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/WindowsDriver/LUFA_Bulk_Vendor_Demo.inf
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..32a29fdc5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/WindowsDriver/LUFA_Bulk_Vendor_Demo.inf
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/WindowsDriver/amd64/libusb0.dll b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/WindowsDriver/amd64/libusb0.dll
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f916b0898
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/WindowsDriver/amd64/libusb0.dll
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/WindowsDriver/amd64/libusb0.sys b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/WindowsDriver/amd64/libusb0.sys
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0718dfb7c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/WindowsDriver/amd64/libusb0.sys
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/WindowsDriver/ia64/libusb0.dll b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/WindowsDriver/ia64/libusb0.dll
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..292df2785
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/WindowsDriver/ia64/libusb0.dll
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/WindowsDriver/ia64/libusb0.sys b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/WindowsDriver/ia64/libusb0.sys
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f17914b8c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/WindowsDriver/ia64/libusb0.sys
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/WindowsDriver/installer_x64.exe b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/WindowsDriver/installer_x64.exe
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c38919ee5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/WindowsDriver/installer_x64.exe
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/WindowsDriver/installer_x86.exe b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/WindowsDriver/installer_x86.exe
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..030ec300c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/WindowsDriver/installer_x86.exe
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/WindowsDriver/license/libusb0/installer_license.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/WindowsDriver/license/libusb0/installer_license.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..56bb2cda2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/WindowsDriver/license/libusb0/installer_license.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,851 @@
+Copyright (c) 2002-2004 Stephan Meyer, <ste_meyer@web.de>
+Copyright (c) 2000-2004 Johannes Erdfelt, <johannes@erdfelt.com>
+Copyright (c) 2000-2004 Thomas Sailer, <sailer@ife.ee.ethz.ch>
+Copyright (c) 2010 Travis Robinson, <libusbdotnet@gmail.com>
+
+This software is distributed under the following licenses:
+Driver:      GNU General Public License (GPL)
+Library, Test Files, Installer:    GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL)
+
+***********************************************************************
+                    GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+                       Version 3, 29 June 2007
+
+ Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/>
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+                            Preamble
+
+  The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for
+software and other kinds of works.
+
+  The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed
+to take away your freedom to share and change the works.  By contrast,
+the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to
+share and change all versions of a program--to make sure it remains free
+software for all its users.  We, the Free Software Foundation, use the
+GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to
+any other work released this way by its authors.  You can apply it to
+your programs, too.
+
+  When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price.  Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you
+want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new
+free programs, and that you know you can do these things.
+
+  To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you
+these rights or asking you to surrender the rights.  Therefore, you have
+certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if
+you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others.
+
+  For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same
+freedoms that you received.  You must make sure that they, too, receive
+or can get the source code.  And you must show them these terms so they
+know their rights.
+
+  Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps:
+(1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License
+giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it.
+
+  For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains
+that there is no warranty for this free software.  For both users' and
+authors' sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as
+changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to
+authors of previous versions.
+
+  Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run
+modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer
+can do so.  This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of
+protecting users' freedom to change the software.  The systematic
+pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to
+use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable.  Therefore, we
+have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those
+products.  If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we
+stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions
+of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users.
+
+  Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents.
+States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of
+software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to
+avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could
+make it effectively proprietary.  To prevent this, the GPL assures that
+patents cannot be used to render the program non-free.
+
+  The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+
+                       TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+  0. Definitions.
+
+  "This License" refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License.
+
+  "Copyright" also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of
+works, such as semiconductor masks.
+
+  "The Program" refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this
+License.  Each licensee is addressed as "you".  "Licensees" and
+"recipients" may be individuals or organizations.
+
+  To "modify" a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work
+in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an
+exact copy.  The resulting work is called a "modified version" of the
+earlier work or a work "based on" the earlier work.
+
+  A "covered work" means either the unmodified Program or a work based
+on the Program.
+
+  To "propagate" a work means to do anything with it that, without
+permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for
+infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a
+computer or modifying a private copy.  Propagation includes copying,
+distribution (with or without modification), making available to the
+public, and in some countries other activities as well.
+
+  To "convey" a work means any kind of propagation that enables other
+parties to make or receive copies.  Mere interaction with a user through
+a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying.
+
+  An interactive user interface displays "Appropriate Legal Notices"
+to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible
+feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2)
+tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the
+extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the
+work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License.  If
+the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a
+menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion.
+
+  1. Source Code.
+
+  The "source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work
+for making modifications to it.  "Object code" means any non-source
+form of a work.
+
+  A "Standard Interface" means an interface that either is an official
+standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of
+interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that
+is widely used among developers working in that language.
+
+  The "System Libraries" of an executable work include anything, other
+than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of
+packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major
+Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that
+Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an
+implementation is available to the public in source code form.  A
+"Major Component", in this context, means a major essential component
+(kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system
+(if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to
+produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it.
+
+  The "Corresponding Source" for a work in object code form means all
+the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable
+work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to
+control those activities.  However, it does not include the work's
+System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free
+programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but
+which are not part of the work.  For example, Corresponding Source
+includes interface definition files associated with source files for
+the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically
+linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require,
+such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those
+subprograms and other parts of the work.
+
+  The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users
+can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding
+Source.
+
+  The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that
+same work.
+
+  2. Basic Permissions.
+
+  All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of
+copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated
+conditions are met.  This License explicitly affirms your unlimited
+permission to run the unmodified Program.  The output from running a
+covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its
+content, constitutes a covered work.  This License acknowledges your
+rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law.
+
+  You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not
+convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains
+in force.  You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose
+of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you
+with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with
+the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do
+not control copyright.  Those thus making or running the covered works
+for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction
+and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of
+your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you.
+
+  Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under
+the conditions stated below.  Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10
+makes it unnecessary.
+
+  3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law.
+
+  No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological
+measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article
+11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or
+similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such
+measures.
+
+  When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid
+circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention
+is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to
+the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or
+modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work's
+users, your or third parties' legal rights to forbid circumvention of
+technological measures.
+
+  4. Conveying Verbatim Copies.
+
+  You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you
+receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and
+appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice;
+keep intact all notices stating that this License and any
+non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code;
+keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all
+recipients a copy of this License along with the Program.
+
+  You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey,
+and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee.
+
+  5. Conveying Modified Source Versions.
+
+  You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to
+produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the
+terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+    a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified
+    it, and giving a relevant date.
+
+    b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is
+    released under this License and any conditions added under section
+    7.  This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to
+    "keep intact all notices".
+
+    c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this
+    License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy.  This
+    License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7
+    additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts,
+    regardless of how they are packaged.  This License gives no
+    permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not
+    invalidate such permission if you have separately received it.
+
+    d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display
+    Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive
+    interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your
+    work need not make them do so.
+
+  A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent
+works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work,
+and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program,
+in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an
+"aggregate" if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not
+used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation's users
+beyond what the individual works permit.  Inclusion of a covered work
+in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other
+parts of the aggregate.
+
+  6. Conveying Non-Source Forms.
+
+  You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms
+of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the
+machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License,
+in one of these ways:
+
+    a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product
+    (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the
+    Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium
+    customarily used for software interchange.
+
+    b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product
+    (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a
+    written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as
+    long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product
+    model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a
+    copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the
+    product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical
+    medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no
+    more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this
+    conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the
+    Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge.
+
+    c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the
+    written offer to provide the Corresponding Source.  This
+    alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and
+    only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord
+    with subsection 6b.
+
+    d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated
+    place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the
+    Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no
+    further charge.  You need not require recipients to copy the
+    Corresponding Source along with the object code.  If the place to
+    copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source
+    may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party)
+    that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain
+    clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the
+    Corresponding Source.  Regardless of what server hosts the
+    Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is
+    available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements.
+
+    e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided
+    you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding
+    Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no
+    charge under subsection 6d.
+
+  A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded
+from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be
+included in conveying the object code work.
+
+  A "User Product" is either (1) a "consumer product", which means any
+tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family,
+or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation
+into a dwelling.  In determining whether a product is a consumer product,
+doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage.  For a particular
+product received by a particular user, "normally used" refers to a
+typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status
+of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user
+actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product.  A product
+is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial
+commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent
+the only significant mode of use of the product.
+
+  "Installation Information" for a User Product means any methods,
+procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install
+and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from
+a modified version of its Corresponding Source.  The information must
+suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object
+code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because
+modification has been made.
+
+  If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or
+specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as
+part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the
+User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a
+fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the
+Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied
+by the Installation Information.  But this requirement does not apply
+if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install
+modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has
+been installed in ROM).
+
+  The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a
+requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates
+for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for
+the User Product in which it has been modified or installed.  Access to a
+network may be denied when the modification itself materially and
+adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and
+protocols for communication across the network.
+
+  Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided,
+in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly
+documented (and with an implementation available to the public in
+source code form), and must require no special password or key for
+unpacking, reading or copying.
+
+  7. Additional Terms.
+
+  "Additional permissions" are terms that supplement the terms of this
+License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions.
+Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall
+be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent
+that they are valid under applicable law.  If additional permissions
+apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately
+under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by
+this License without regard to the additional permissions.
+
+  When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option
+remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of
+it.  (Additional permissions may be written to require their own
+removal in certain cases when you modify the work.)  You may place
+additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work,
+for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission.
+
+  Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you
+add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of
+that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms:
+
+    a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the
+    terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or
+
+    b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or
+    author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal
+    Notices displayed by works containing it; or
+
+    c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or
+    requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in
+    reasonable ways as different from the original version; or
+
+    d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or
+    authors of the material; or
+
+    e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some
+    trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or
+
+    f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that
+    material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of
+    it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for
+    any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on
+    those licensors and authors.
+
+  All other non-permissive additional terms are considered "further
+restrictions" within the meaning of section 10.  If the Program as you
+received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is
+governed by this License along with a term that is a further
+restriction, you may remove that term.  If a license document contains
+a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this
+License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms
+of that license document, provided that the further restriction does
+not survive such relicensing or conveying.
+
+  If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you
+must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the
+additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating
+where to find the applicable terms.
+
+  Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the
+form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions;
+the above requirements apply either way.
+
+  8. Termination.
+
+  You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly
+provided under this License.  Any attempt otherwise to propagate or
+modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under
+this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third
+paragraph of section 11).
+
+  However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your
+license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a)
+provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and
+finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright
+holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means
+prior to 60 days after the cessation.
+
+  Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is
+reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
+violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have
+received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that
+copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after
+your receipt of the notice.
+
+  Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the
+licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under
+this License.  If your rights have been terminated and not permanently
+reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same
+material under section 10.
+
+  9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies.
+
+  You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or
+run a copy of the Program.  Ancillary propagation of a covered work
+occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission
+to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance.  However,
+nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or
+modify any covered work.  These actions infringe copyright if you do
+not accept this License.  Therefore, by modifying or propagating a
+covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so.
+
+  10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients.
+
+  Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically
+receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and
+propagate that work, subject to this License.  You are not responsible
+for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
+
+  An "entity transaction" is a transaction transferring control of an
+organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an
+organization, or merging organizations.  If propagation of a covered
+work results from an entity transaction, each party to that
+transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever
+licenses to the work the party's predecessor in interest had or could
+give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the
+Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if
+the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts.
+
+  You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the
+rights granted or affirmed under this License.  For example, you may
+not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of
+rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation
+(including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that
+any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for
+sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it.
+
+  11. Patents.
+
+  A "contributor" is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this
+License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based.  The
+work thus licensed is called the contributor's "contributor version".
+
+  A contributor's "essential patent claims" are all patent claims
+owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or
+hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted
+by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version,
+but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a
+consequence of further modification of the contributor version.  For
+purposes of this definition, "control" includes the right to grant
+patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of
+this License.
+
+  Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free
+patent license under the contributor's essential patent claims, to
+make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and
+propagate the contents of its contributor version.
+
+  In the following three paragraphs, a "patent license" is any express
+agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent
+(such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to
+sue for patent infringement).  To "grant" such a patent license to a
+party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a
+patent against the party.
+
+  If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license,
+and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone
+to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a
+publicly available network server or other readily accessible means,
+then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so
+available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the
+patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner
+consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent
+license to downstream recipients.  "Knowingly relying" means you have
+actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the
+covered work in a country, or your recipient's use of the covered work
+in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that
+country that you have reason to believe are valid.
+
+  If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or
+arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a
+covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties
+receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify
+or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license
+you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered
+work and works based on it.
+
+  A patent license is "discriminatory" if it does not include within
+the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is
+conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are
+specifically granted under this License.  You may not convey a covered
+work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is
+in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment
+to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying
+the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the
+parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory
+patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work
+conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily
+for and in connection with specific products or compilations that
+contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement,
+or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007.
+
+  Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting
+any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may
+otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law.
+
+  12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom.
+
+  If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License.  If you cannot convey a
+covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may
+not convey it at all.  For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you
+to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey
+the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this
+License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program.
+
+  13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License.
+
+  Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have
+permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed
+under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single
+combined work, and to convey the resulting work.  The terms of this
+License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work,
+but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License,
+section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the
+combination as such.
+
+  14. Revised Versions of this License.
+
+  The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of
+the GNU General Public License from time to time.  Such new versions will
+be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
+address new problems or concerns.
+
+  Each version is given a distinguishing version number.  If the
+Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General
+Public License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the
+option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered
+version or of any later version published by the Free Software
+Foundation.  If the Program does not specify a version number of the
+GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published
+by the Free Software Foundation.
+
+  If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future
+versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy's
+public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you
+to choose that version for the Program.
+
+  Later license versions may give you additional or different
+permissions.  However, no additional obligations are imposed on any
+author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a
+later version.
+
+  15. Disclaimer of Warranty.
+
+  THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
+APPLICABLE LAW.  EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT
+HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY
+OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
+THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+PURPOSE.  THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM
+IS WITH YOU.  SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF
+ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+  16. Limitation of Liability.
+
+  IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS
+THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY
+GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE
+USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF
+DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD
+PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS),
+EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+  17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16.
+
+  If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided
+above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms,
+reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates
+an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the
+Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a
+copy of the Program in return for a fee.
+
+                     END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+            How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+  If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
+free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
+
+  To do so, attach the following notices to the program.  It is safest
+to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
+the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+    <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
+    Copyright (C) <year>  <name of author>
+
+    This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
+    it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+    the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or
+    (at your option) any later version.
+
+    This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+    but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+    GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+    You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+    along with this program.  If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+  If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short
+notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
+
+    <program>  Copyright (C) <year>  <name of author>
+    This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
+    This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
+    under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
+
+The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate
+parts of the General Public License.  Of course, your program's commands
+might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an "about box".
+
+  You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school,
+if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary.
+For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see
+<http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
+
+  The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program
+into proprietary programs.  If your program is a subroutine library, you
+may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with
+the library.  If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General
+Public License instead of this License.  But first, please read
+<http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html>.
+
+                   GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+                       Version 3, 29 June 2007
+
+ Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/>
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+
+  This version of the GNU Lesser General Public License incorporates
+the terms and conditions of version 3 of the GNU General Public
+License, supplemented by the additional permissions listed below.
+
+  0. Additional Definitions.
+
+  As used herein, "this License" refers to version 3 of the GNU Lesser
+General Public License, and the "GNU GPL" refers to version 3 of the GNU
+General Public License.
+
+  "The Library" refers to a covered work governed by this License,
+other than an Application or a Combined Work as defined below.
+
+  An "Application" is any work that makes use of an interface provided
+by the Library, but which is not otherwise based on the Library.
+Defining a subclass of a class defined by the Library is deemed a mode
+of using an interface provided by the Library.
+
+  A "Combined Work" is a work produced by combining or linking an
+Application with the Library.  The particular version of the Library
+with which the Combined Work was made is also called the "Linked
+Version".
+
+  The "Minimal Corresponding Source" for a Combined Work means the
+Corresponding Source for the Combined Work, excluding any source code
+for portions of the Combined Work that, considered in isolation, are
+based on the Application, and not on the Linked Version.
+
+  The "Corresponding Application Code" for a Combined Work means the
+object code and/or source code for the Application, including any data
+and utility programs needed for reproducing the Combined Work from the
+Application, but excluding the System Libraries of the Combined Work.
+
+  1. Exception to Section 3 of the GNU GPL.
+
+  You may convey a covered work under sections 3 and 4 of this License
+without being bound by section 3 of the GNU GPL.
+
+  2. Conveying Modified Versions.
+
+  If you modify a copy of the Library, and, in your modifications, a
+facility refers to a function or data to be supplied by an Application
+that uses the facility (other than as an argument passed when the
+facility is invoked), then you may convey a copy of the modified
+version:
+
+   a) under this License, provided that you make a good faith effort to
+   ensure that, in the event an Application does not supply the
+   function or data, the facility still operates, and performs
+   whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful, or
+
+   b) under the GNU GPL, with none of the additional permissions of
+   this License applicable to that copy.
+
+  3. Object Code Incorporating Material from Library Header Files.
+
+  The object code form of an Application may incorporate material from
+a header file that is part of the Library.  You may convey such object
+code under terms of your choice, provided that, if the incorporated
+material is not limited to numerical parameters, data structure
+layouts and accessors, or small macros, inline functions and templates
+(ten or fewer lines in length), you do both of the following:
+
+   a) Give prominent notice with each copy of the object code that the
+   Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are
+   covered by this License.
+
+   b) Accompany the object code with a copy of the GNU GPL and this license
+   document.
+
+  4. Combined Works.
+
+  You may convey a Combined Work under terms of your choice that,
+taken together, effectively do not restrict modification of the
+portions of the Library contained in the Combined Work and reverse
+engineering for debugging such modifications, if you also do each of
+the following:
+
+   a) Give prominent notice with each copy of the Combined Work that
+   the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are
+   covered by this License.
+
+   b) Accompany the Combined Work with a copy of the GNU GPL and this license
+   document.
+
+   c) For a Combined Work that displays copyright notices during
+   execution, include the copyright notice for the Library among
+   these notices, as well as a reference directing the user to the
+   copies of the GNU GPL and this license document.
+
+   d) Do one of the following:
+
+       0) Convey the Minimal Corresponding Source under the terms of this
+       License, and the Corresponding Application Code in a form
+       suitable for, and under terms that permit, the user to
+       recombine or relink the Application with a modified version of
+       the Linked Version to produce a modified Combined Work, in the
+       manner specified by section 6 of the GNU GPL for conveying
+       Corresponding Source.
+
+       1) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the
+       Library.  A suitable mechanism is one that (a) uses at run time
+       a copy of the Library already present on the user's computer
+       system, and (b) will operate properly with a modified version
+       of the Library that is interface-compatible with the Linked
+       Version.
+
+   e) Provide Installation Information, but only if you would otherwise
+   be required to provide such information under section 6 of the
+   GNU GPL, and only to the extent that such information is
+   necessary to install and execute a modified version of the
+   Combined Work produced by recombining or relinking the
+   Application with a modified version of the Linked Version. (If
+   you use option 4d0, the Installation Information must accompany
+   the Minimal Corresponding Source and Corresponding Application
+   Code. If you use option 4d1, you must provide the Installation
+   Information in the manner specified by section 6 of the GNU GPL
+   for conveying Corresponding Source.)
+
+  5. Combined Libraries.
+
+  You may place library facilities that are a work based on the
+Library side by side in a single library together with other library
+facilities that are not Applications and are not covered by this
+License, and convey such a combined library under terms of your
+choice, if you do both of the following:
+
+   a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based
+   on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities,
+   conveyed under the terms of this License.
+
+   b) Give prominent notice with the combined library that part of it
+   is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the
+   accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
+
+  6. Revised Versions of the GNU Lesser General Public License.
+
+  The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
+of the GNU Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new
+versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
+differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
+
+  Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the
+Library as you received it specifies that a certain numbered version
+of the GNU Lesser General Public License "or any later version"
+applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and
+conditions either of that published version or of any later version
+published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library as you
+received it does not specify a version number of the GNU Lesser
+General Public License, you may choose any version of the GNU Lesser
+General Public License ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
+
+  If the Library as you received it specifies that a proxy can decide
+whether future versions of the GNU Lesser General Public License shall
+apply, that proxy's public statement of acceptance of any version is
+permanent authorization for you to choose that version for the
+Library.
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/WindowsDriver/x86/libusb0.sys b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/WindowsDriver/x86/libusb0.sys
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5322e5b97
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/WindowsDriver/x86/libusb0.sys
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/WindowsDriver/x86/libusb0_x86.dll b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/WindowsDriver/x86/libusb0_x86.dll
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6e475b90a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/WindowsDriver/x86/libusb0_x86.dll
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e87f33eb0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">
+	<project caption="Bulk Vendor Device Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.vendor.example.avr8">
+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.vendor"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+		<generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>
+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+	</project>
+
+	<project caption="Bulk Vendor Device Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.vendor.example.xmega">
+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.vendor"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.xmega"/>
+		<generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+		<device-support value="atxmega128a1u"/>
+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="32000000UL"/>
+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="48000000UL"/>
+	</project>
+
+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.vendor" caption="Bulk Vendor Device Demo (Low Level APIs)">
+		<info type="description" value="summary">
+		Bulk Vendor Device demo, implementing a basic USB device with vendor-specific endpoints for custom protocol implementations. This demo uses the Low Level LUFA APIs to manually implement a USB Class for demonstration purposes without using the simpler in-built LUFA Class Driver APIs.
+		</info>
+
+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>
+
+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">
+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>
+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>
+		</info>
+
+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>
+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="BulkVendor.txt"/>
+		<build type="distribute" subtype="directory" value="HostTestApp"/>
+		<build type="distribute" subtype="directory" value="WindowsDriver"/>
+
+		<build type="c-source" value="BulkVendor.c"/>
+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>
+		<build type="header-file" value="BulkVendor.h"/>
+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>
+
+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>
+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>
+
+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>
+	</module>
+</asf>
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0d711a935
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2366 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Bulk Vendor Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/ \
+                         HostTestApp/ \
+                         WindowsDriver/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b2ecfc9c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/BulkVendor/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = BulkVendor
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..39b5236fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_RC32MCLKSRC | USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH)
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX               6
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9952ed92c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,360 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x204E,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 4,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.CDC1_IAD =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t), .Type = DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation},
+
+			.FirstInterfaceIndex    = INTERFACE_ID_CDC1_CCI,
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,
+
+			.IADStrIndex            = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC1_CCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC1_CCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC1_Functional_Header =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.CDCSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+		},
+
+	.CDC1_Functional_ACM =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM,
+
+			.Capabilities           = 0x06,
+		},
+
+	.CDC1_Functional_Union =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union,
+
+			.MasterInterfaceNumber  = INTERFACE_ID_CDC1_CCI,
+			.SlaveInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC1_DCI,
+		},
+
+	.CDC1_ManagementEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC1_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC1_DCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC1_DCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC1_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC1_RX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.CDC1_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC1_TX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_IAD =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t), .Type = DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation},
+
+			.FirstInterfaceIndex    = INTERFACE_ID_CDC2_CCI,
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,
+
+			.IADStrIndex            = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_CCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC2_CCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_Functional_Header =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.CDCSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_Functional_ACM =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM,
+
+			.Capabilities           = 0x06,
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_Functional_Union =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union,
+
+			.MasterInterfaceNumber  = INTERFACE_ID_CDC2_CCI,
+			.SlaveInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC2_DCI,
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_ManagementEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC2_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_DCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC2_DCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC2_RX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.CDC2_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC2_TX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Dual CDC Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e0842a498
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the first CDC interface's device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC1_TX_EPADDR                 (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 1)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the first CDC interface's host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC1_RX_EPADDR                 (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 2)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the first CDC interface's device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC1_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR       (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the second CDC interface's device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC2_TX_EPADDR                 (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 4)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the second CDC interface's host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC2_RX_EPADDR                 (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 5)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the second CDC interface's device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC2_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR       (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 6)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+
+			// First CDC Control Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t   CDC1_IAD;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC1_CCI_Interface;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t    CDC1_Functional_Header;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t       CDC1_Functional_ACM;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t     CDC1_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC1_ManagementEndpoint;
+
+			// First CDC Data Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC1_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC1_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC1_DataInEndpoint;
+
+			// Second CDC Control Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t   CDC2_IAD;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC2_CCI_Interface;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t    CDC2_Functional_Header;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t       CDC2_Functional_ACM;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t     CDC2_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC2_ManagementEndpoint;
+
+			// Second CDC Data Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC2_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC2_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC2_DataInEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC1_CCI = 0, /**< CDC1 CCI interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC1_DCI = 1, /**< CDC1 DCI interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC2_CCI = 2, /**< CDC2 CCI interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC2_DCI = 3, /**< CDC2 DCI interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..233ae750e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.c
@@ -0,0 +1,299 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the DualVirtualSerial demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "DualVirtualSerial.h"
+
+/** Contains the current baud rate and other settings of the first virtual serial port. While this demo does not use
+ *  the physical USART and thus does not use these settings, they must still be retained and returned to the host
+ *  upon request or the host will assume the device is non-functional.
+ *
+ *  These values are set by the host via a class-specific request, however they are not required to be used accurately.
+ *  It is possible to completely ignore these value or use other settings as the host is completely unaware of the physical
+ *  serial link characteristics and instead sends and receives data in endpoint streams.
+ */
+static CDC_LineEncoding_t LineEncoding1 = { .BaudRateBPS = 0,
+                                            .CharFormat  = CDC_LINEENCODING_OneStopBit,
+                                            .ParityType  = CDC_PARITY_None,
+                                            .DataBits    = 8                            };
+
+/** Contains the current baud rate and other settings of the second virtual serial port. While this demo does not use
+ *  the physical USART and thus does not use these settings, they must still be retained and returned to the host
+ *  upon request or the host will assume the device is non-functional.
+ *
+ *  These values are set by the host via a class-specific request, however they are not required to be used accurately.
+ *  It is possible to completely ignore these value or use other settings as the host is completely unaware of the physical
+ *  serial link characteristics and instead sends and receives data in endpoint streams.
+ */
+static CDC_LineEncoding_t LineEncoding2 = { .BaudRateBPS = 0,
+                                            .CharFormat  = CDC_LINEENCODING_OneStopBit,
+                                            .ParityType  = CDC_PARITY_None,
+                                            .DataBits    = 8                            };
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		CDC1_Task();
+		CDC2_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+	/* Start the PLL to multiply the 2MHz RC oscillator to 32MHz and switch the CPU core to run from it */
+	XMEGACLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ, 2000000, F_CPU);
+	XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL);
+
+	/* Start the 32MHz internal RC oscillator and start the DFLL to increase it to 48MHz using the USB SOF as a reference */
+	XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);
+	XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF, F_USB);
+
+	PMIC.CTRL = PMIC_LOLVLEN_bm | PMIC_MEDLVLEN_bm | PMIC_HILVLEN_bm;
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs and stops the USB management and CDC management tasks.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
+ *  of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the CDC management tasks are started.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	/* Setup first CDC Interface's Endpoints */
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC1_TX_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, 1);
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC1_RX_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, 1);
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC1_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, 1);
+
+	/* Setup second CDC Interface's Endpoints */
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC2_TX_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, 1);
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC2_RX_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, 1);
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC2_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, 1);
+
+	/* Reset line encoding baud rates so that the host knows to send new values */
+	LineEncoding1.BaudRateBPS = 0;
+	LineEncoding2.BaudRateBPS = 0;
+
+	/* Indicate endpoint configuration success or failure */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to
+ *  the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing
+ *  internally.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	/* Determine which interface's Line Coding data is being set from the wIndex parameter */
+	void* LineEncodingData = (USB_ControlRequest.wIndex == 0) ? &LineEncoding1 : &LineEncoding2;
+
+	/* Process CDC specific control requests */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case CDC_REQ_GetLineEncoding:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Write the line coding data to the control endpoint */
+				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(LineEncodingData, sizeof(CDC_LineEncoding_t));
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case CDC_REQ_SetLineEncoding:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Read the line coding data in from the host into the global struct */
+				Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(LineEncodingData, sizeof(CDC_LineEncoding_t));
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case CDC_REQ_SetControlLineState:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Function to manage CDC data transmission and reception to and from the host for the first CDC interface, which sends joystick
+ *  movements to the host as ASCII strings.
+ */
+void CDC1_Task(void)
+{
+	char*       ReportString    = NULL;
+	uint8_t     JoyStatus_LCL   = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	static bool ActionSent      = false;
+
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Determine if a joystick action has occurred */
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Up\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Down\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Left\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Right\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Pressed\r\n";
+	else
+	  ActionSent = false;
+
+	/* Flag management - Only allow one string to be sent per action */
+	if ((ReportString != NULL) && (ActionSent == false) && LineEncoding1.BaudRateBPS)
+	{
+		ActionSent = true;
+
+		/* Select the Serial Tx Endpoint */
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC1_TX_EPADDR);
+
+		/* Write the String to the Endpoint */
+		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(ReportString, strlen(ReportString), NULL);
+
+		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+		/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for another packet */
+		Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
+
+		/* Send an empty packet to ensure that the host does not buffer data sent to it */
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+	}
+
+	/* Select the Serial Rx Endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC1_RX_EPADDR);
+
+	/* Throw away any received data from the host */
+	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+}
+
+/** Function to manage CDC data transmission and reception to and from the host for the second CDC interface, which echoes back
+ *  all data sent to it from the host.
+ */
+void CDC2_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Select the Serial Rx Endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC2_RX_EPADDR);
+
+	/* Check to see if any data has been received */
+	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+	{
+		/* Create a temp buffer big enough to hold the incoming endpoint packet */
+		uint8_t  Buffer[Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()];
+
+		/* Remember how large the incoming packet is */
+		uint16_t DataLength = Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint();
+
+		/* Read in the incoming packet into the buffer */
+		Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Buffer, DataLength, NULL);
+
+		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+		/* Select the Serial Tx Endpoint */
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC2_TX_EPADDR);
+
+		/* Write the received data to the endpoint */
+		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&Buffer, DataLength, NULL);
+
+		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+		/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for the next packet */
+		Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
+
+		/* Send an empty packet to prevent host buffering */
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a8bc4ec4e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.h
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DualVirtualSerial.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DUAL_VIRTUALSERIAL_H_
+#define _DUAL_VIRTUALSERIAL_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void CDC1_Task(void);
+		void CDC2_Task(void);
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..af263cc75
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/DualVirtualSerial.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Dual Communications Device Class (Dual Virtual Serial Port) Device
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series AU XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxAxU)
+ *  \li Series B XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxBxU)
+ *  \li Series C XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxCxU)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Interface Association Descriptor ECN \n
+ *        USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Dual Communications Device Class demonstration application.
+ *  This gives a simple reference application for implementing
+ *  a compound device with dual CDC functions acting as a pair
+ *  of virtual serial ports. This demo uses Interface Association
+ *  Descriptors to link together the pair of related CDC
+ *  descriptors for each virtual serial port, which may not be
+ *  supported in all OSes - Windows Vista is supported, as is
+ *  XP (although the latter may need a hotfix to function).
+ *
+ *  Joystick actions are transmitted to the host as strings
+ *  through the first serial port. The device does not respond to
+ *  serial data sent from the host in the first serial port.
+ *
+ *  The second serial port echoes back data sent from the host.
+ *
+ *  After running this demo for the first time on a new computer,
+ *  you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo
+ *  project's directory as the device's driver when running under
+ *  Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers,
+ *  negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other
+ *  Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt
+ *  CDC-ACM drivers.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/LUFA DualVirtualSerial.inf b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/LUFA DualVirtualSerial.inf
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1a0e0248a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/LUFA DualVirtualSerial.inf
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+;************************************************************
+; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+;************************************************************
+
+[DefaultInstall]
+CopyINF="LUFA DualVirtualSerial.inf"
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+DriverVer=7/1/2012,10.0.0.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTx86, NTamd64, NTia64
+
+[SourceDisksNames]
+
+[SourceDisksFiles]
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+[DriverInstall]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=FakeModemCopyFileSection
+AddReg=DriverInstall.AddReg
+
+[DriverInstall.Services]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, LowerFilter_Service_Inst
+
+[DriverInstall.AddReg]
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"msports.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_00, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_02
+
+[DeviceList.NTx86]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_00, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_02
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_00, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_02
+
+[DeviceList.NTia64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_00, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_02
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org"
+DESCRIPTION="LUFA CDC-ACM Virtual Serial Port"
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..133d1b4f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Dual Virtual Serial Device Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.dual_cdc.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.dual_cdc"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="Dual Virtual Serial Device Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.dual_cdc.example.xmega">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.dual_cdc"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.xmega"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atxmega128a1u"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="32000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="48000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.dual_cdc" caption="Dual Virtual Serial Device Demo (Low Level APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Dual Virtual Serial (CDC) demo, implementing a pair of virtual serial port interfaces. This demo uses the Low Level LUFA APIs to manually implement a USB Class for demonstration purposes without using the simpler in-built LUFA Class Driver APIs.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="CDC Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="DualVirtualSerial.txt"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="LUFA DualVirtualSerial.inf"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="DualVirtualSerial.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="DualVirtualSerial.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4ed8962f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Dual Virtual Serial Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7b140fedb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/DualVirtualSerial/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = DualVirtualSerial
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..47b8ffef8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
+ *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
+ *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
+ *  makefile or build system.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#define GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE       8
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a06b60275
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_RC32MCLKSRC | USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH)
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX               2
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f104d1fd2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,238 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM GenericReport[] =
+{
+	HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(16, 0xFF00), /* Vendor Page 0 */
+	HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x01), /* Vendor Usage 1 */
+	HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x01), /* Vendor Usage 1 */
+	    HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x02), /* Vendor Usage 2 */
+	    HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0x00),
+	    HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 0xFF),
+	    HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x08),
+	    HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE),
+	    HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE),
+	    HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x03), /* Vendor Usage 3 */
+	    HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0x00),
+	    HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 0xFF),
+	    HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x08),
+	    HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE),
+	    HID_RI_OUTPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE | HID_IOF_NON_VOLATILE),
+	HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0),
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x204F,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.HID_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_GenericHID,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = HID_CSCP_HIDClass,
+			.SubClass               = HID_CSCP_NonBootSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = HID_CSCP_NonBootProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_GenericHID =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = HID_DTYPE_HID},
+
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(1,1,1),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = HID_DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(GenericReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = GENERIC_IN_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = GENERIC_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportOUTEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = GENERIC_OUT_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = GENERIC_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Generic HID Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_HID:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_GenericHID;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t);
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_Report:
+			Address = &GenericReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(GenericReport);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8e359682b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// Generic HID Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t              HID_GenericHID;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportOUTEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_GenericHID = 0, /**< GenericHID interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the Generic HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define GENERIC_IN_EPADDR         (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 1)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the Generic HID reporting OUT endpoint. */
+		#define GENERIC_OUT_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 2)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Generic HID reporting endpoint. */
+		#define GENERIC_EPSIZE            8
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/GenericHID.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/GenericHID.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8a8f2c0f3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/GenericHID.c
@@ -0,0 +1,253 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the GenericHID demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "GenericHID.h"
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		HID_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+	/* Start the PLL to multiply the 2MHz RC oscillator to 32MHz and switch the CPU core to run from it */
+	XMEGACLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ, 2000000, F_CPU);
+	XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL);
+
+	/* Start the 32MHz internal RC oscillator and start the DFLL to increase it to 48MHz using the USB SOF as a reference */
+	XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);
+	XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF, F_USB);
+
+	PMIC.CTRL = PMIC_LOLVLEN_bm | PMIC_MEDLVLEN_bm | PMIC_HILVLEN_bm;
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs and stops the USB management task.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration
+ *  of the USB device after enumeration, and configures the generic HID device endpoints.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	/* Setup HID Report Endpoints */
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(GENERIC_IN_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, GENERIC_EPSIZE, 1);
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(GENERIC_OUT_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, GENERIC_EPSIZE, 1);
+
+	/* Indicate endpoint configuration success or failure */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to
+ *  the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing
+ *  internally.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	/* Handle HID Class specific requests */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case HID_REQ_GetReport:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				uint8_t GenericData[GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE];
+				CreateGenericHIDReport(GenericData);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Write the report data to the control endpoint */
+				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&GenericData, sizeof(GenericData));
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_REQ_SetReport:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				uint8_t GenericData[GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE];
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Read the report data from the control endpoint */
+				Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(&GenericData, sizeof(GenericData));
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+				ProcessGenericHIDReport(GenericData);
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Function to process the last received report from the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] DataArray  Pointer to a buffer where the last received report has been stored
+ */
+void ProcessGenericHIDReport(uint8_t* DataArray)
+{
+	/*
+		This is where you need to process reports sent from the host to the device. This
+		function is called each time the host has sent a new report. DataArray is an array
+		holding the report sent from the host.
+	*/
+
+	uint8_t NewLEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+	if (DataArray[0])
+	  NewLEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
+
+	if (DataArray[1])
+	  NewLEDMask |= LEDS_LED2;
+
+	if (DataArray[2])
+	  NewLEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
+
+	if (DataArray[3])
+	  NewLEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(NewLEDMask);
+}
+
+/** Function to create the next report to send back to the host at the next reporting interval.
+ *
+ *  \param[out] DataArray  Pointer to a buffer where the next report data should be stored
+ */
+void CreateGenericHIDReport(uint8_t* DataArray)
+{
+	/*
+		This is where you need to create reports to be sent to the host from the device. This
+		function is called each time the host is ready to accept a new report. DataArray is
+		an array to hold the report to the host.
+	*/
+
+	uint8_t CurrLEDMask = LEDs_GetLEDs();
+
+	DataArray[0] = ((CurrLEDMask & LEDS_LED1) ? 1 : 0);
+	DataArray[1] = ((CurrLEDMask & LEDS_LED2) ? 1 : 0);
+	DataArray[2] = ((CurrLEDMask & LEDS_LED3) ? 1 : 0);
+	DataArray[3] = ((CurrLEDMask & LEDS_LED4) ? 1 : 0);
+}
+
+void HID_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(GENERIC_OUT_EPADDR);
+
+	/* Check to see if a packet has been sent from the host */
+	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+	{
+		/* Check to see if the packet contains data */
+		if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+		{
+			/* Create a temporary buffer to hold the read in report from the host */
+			uint8_t GenericData[GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE];
+
+			/* Read Generic Report Data */
+			Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&GenericData, sizeof(GenericData), NULL);
+
+			/* Process Generic Report Data */
+			ProcessGenericHIDReport(GenericData);
+		}
+
+		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(GENERIC_IN_EPADDR);
+
+	/* Check to see if the host is ready to accept another packet */
+	if (Endpoint_IsINReady())
+	{
+		/* Create a temporary buffer to hold the report to send to the host */
+		uint8_t GenericData[GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE];
+
+		/* Create Generic Report Data */
+		CreateGenericHIDReport(GenericData);
+
+		/* Write Generic Report Data */
+		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&GenericData, sizeof(GenericData), NULL);
+
+		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/GenericHID.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/GenericHID.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6c7664346
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/GenericHID.h
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for GenericHID.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _GENERICHID_H_
+#define _GENERICHID_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void HID_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+
+		void ProcessGenericHIDReport(uint8_t* DataArray);
+		void CreateGenericHIDReport(uint8_t* DataArray);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/GenericHID.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/GenericHID.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..649fc62ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/GenericHID.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Generic HID Device
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *  \li Series AU XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxAxU)
+ *  \li Series B XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxBxU)
+ *  \li Series C XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxCxU)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Generic HID device demonstration application. This gives a simple reference application
+ *  for implementing a generic HID device, using the basic USB HID drivers in all modern
+ *  OSes (i.e. no special drivers required). By default it accepts and sends up to 8 byte reports
+ *  to and from a USB Host, and transmits the last sent report back to the host.
+ *
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function as a vendor HID device.
+ *  When controlled by a custom HID class application, reports can be sent and received by
+ *  both the standard data endpoint and control request methods defined in the HID specification.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>This token defines the size of the device reports, both sent and received (including report ID byte). The value
+ *        must be an integer ranging from 1 to 255.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/HostTestApp/test_generic_hid.py b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/HostTestApp/test_generic_hid.py
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..286577280
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/HostTestApp/test_generic_hid.py
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+"""
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+"""
+
+"""
+    LUFA Generic HID device demo host test script. This script will send a
+    continuous stream of generic reports to the device, to show a variable LED
+    pattern on the target board. Send and received report data is printed to
+    the terminal.
+
+    Requires the pywinusb library (https://pypi.python.org/pypi/pywinusb/).
+"""
+
+import sys
+from time import sleep
+import pywinusb.hid as hid
+
+# Generic HID device VID, PID and report payload length (length is increased
+# by one to account for the Report ID byte that must be pre-pended)
+device_vid = 0x03EB
+device_pid = 0x204F
+report_length = 1 + 8
+
+
+def get_hid_device_handle():
+    hid_device_filter = hid.HidDeviceFilter(vendor_id=device_vid,
+                                            product_id=device_pid)
+
+    valid_hid_devices = hid_device_filter.get_devices()
+
+    if len(valid_hid_devices) is 0:
+        return None
+    else:
+        return valid_hid_devices[0]
+
+
+def send_led_pattern(device, led1, led2, led3, led4):
+    # Report data for the demo is the report ID (always zero) followed by the
+    # LED on/off data
+    report_data = [0, led1, led2, led3, led4]
+
+    # Zero-extend the array to the length the report should be
+    report_data.extend([0] * (report_length - len(report_data)))
+
+    # Send the generated report to the device
+    device.send_output_report(report_data)
+
+    print("Sent LED Pattern: {0}".format(report_data[1:5]))
+
+
+def received_led_pattern(report_data):
+    print("Received LED Pattern: {0}".format(report_data[1:5]))
+
+
+def main():
+    hid_device = get_hid_device_handle()
+
+    if hid_device is None:
+        print("No valid HID device found.")
+        sys.exit(1)
+
+    try:
+        hid_device.open()
+
+        print("Connected to device 0x%04X/0x%04X - %s [%s]" %
+              (hid_device.vendor_id, hid_device.product_id,
+               hid_device.product_name, hid_device.vendor_name))
+
+        # Set up the HID input report handler to receive reports
+        hid_device.set_raw_data_handler(received_led_pattern)
+
+        p = 0
+        while (hid_device.is_plugged()):
+            # Convert the current pattern index to a bit-mask and send
+            send_led_pattern(hid_device,
+                             (p >> 3) & 1,
+                             (p >> 2) & 1,
+                             (p >> 1) & 1,
+                             (p >> 0) & 1)
+
+            # Compute next LED pattern in sequence
+            p = (p + 1) % 16
+
+            # Delay a bit for visual effect
+            sleep(.2)
+
+    finally:
+        hid_device.close()
+
+
+if __name__ == '__main__':
+    main()
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cf1fb8009
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Generic HID Device Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.generic_hid.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.generic_hid"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="Generic HID Device Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.generic_hid.example.xmega">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.generic_hid"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.xmega"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atxmega128a1u"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="32000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="48000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.generic_hid" caption="Generic HID Device Demo (Low Level APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Generic HID device demo, implementing a device whose LEDs can be controlled via HID messages from the host. This demo uses the Low Level LUFA APIs to manually implement a USB Class for demonstration purposes without using the simpler in-built LUFA Class Driver APIs.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="GenericHID.txt"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="directory" value="HostTestApp"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="GenericHID.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="GenericHID.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e8808812e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2365 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Generic HID Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/ \
+                         HostTestApp/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..48c47d901
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/GenericHID/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = GenericHID
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c6542445d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_RC32MCLKSRC | USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH)
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX               1
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ec0ef595c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,240 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM JoystickReport[] =
+{
+	HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x01), /* Generic Desktop */
+	HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x04), /* Joystick */
+	HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x01), /* Application */
+		HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x01), /* Pointer */
+		HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x00), /* Physical */
+			HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x30), /* Usage X */
+			HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x31), /* Usage Y */
+			HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x32), /* Usage Z */
+			HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, -100),
+			HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 100),
+			HID_RI_PHYSICAL_MINIMUM(8, -1),
+			HID_RI_PHYSICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 1),
+			HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x03),
+			HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x08),
+			HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE),
+		HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0),
+		HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x09), /* Button */
+		HID_RI_USAGE_MINIMUM(8, 0x01),
+		HID_RI_USAGE_MAXIMUM(8, 0x02),
+		HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0x00),
+		HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 0x01),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x01),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x02),
+		HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x06),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x01),
+		HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_CONSTANT),
+	HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0),
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2043,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.HID_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_Joystick,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = HID_CSCP_HIDClass,
+			.SubClass               = HID_CSCP_NonBootSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = HID_CSCP_NonBootProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_JoystickHID =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = HID_DTYPE_HID},
+
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(1,1,1),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = HID_DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(JoystickReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = JOYSTICK_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = JOYSTICK_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Joystick Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_HID:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_JoystickHID;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Report:
+			Address = &JoystickReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(JoystickReport);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d4d148723
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// Joystick HID Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t              HID_JoystickHID;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_Joystick = 0, /**< Joystick interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the Joystick HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define JOYSTICK_EPADDR           (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 1)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Joystick HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define JOYSTICK_EPSIZE           8
+
+		/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */
+		#define DTYPE_HID                 0x21
+
+		/** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */
+		#define DTYPE_Report              0x22
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Joystick.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Joystick.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cabb6d6a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Joystick.c
@@ -0,0 +1,217 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the Joystick demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "Joystick.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		HID_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+	/* Start the PLL to multiply the 2MHz RC oscillator to 32MHz and switch the CPU core to run from it */
+	XMEGACLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ, 2000000, F_CPU);
+	XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL);
+
+	/* Start the 32MHz internal RC oscillator and start the DFLL to increase it to 48MHz using the USB SOF as a reference */
+	XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);
+	XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF, F_USB);
+
+	PMIC.CTRL = PMIC_LOLVLEN_bm | PMIC_MEDLVLEN_bm | PMIC_HILVLEN_bm;
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs and stops the USB management and joystick reporting tasks.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
+ *  of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the joystick reporting task started.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	/* Setup HID Report Endpoint */
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(JOYSTICK_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, JOYSTICK_EPSIZE, 1);
+
+	/* Indicate endpoint configuration success or failure */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to
+ *  the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing
+ *  internally.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	/* Handle HID Class specific requests */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case HID_REQ_GetReport:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				USB_JoystickReport_Data_t JoystickReportData;
+
+				/* Create the next HID report to send to the host */
+				GetNextReport(&JoystickReportData);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Write the report data to the control endpoint */
+				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&JoystickReportData, sizeof(JoystickReportData));
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Fills the given HID report data structure with the next HID report to send to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a HID report data structure to be filled
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the new report differs from the last report, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool GetNextReport(USB_JoystickReport_Data_t* const ReportData)
+{
+	static uint8_t PrevJoyStatus    = 0;
+	static uint8_t PrevButtonStatus = 0;
+	uint8_t        JoyStatus_LCL    = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t        ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus();
+	bool           InputChanged     = false;
+
+	/* Clear the report contents */
+	memset(ReportData, 0, sizeof(USB_JoystickReport_Data_t));
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  ReportData->Y = -100;
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  ReportData->Y =  100;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  ReportData->X = -100;
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  ReportData->X =  100;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+	  ReportData->Button |= (1 << 1);
+
+	if (ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
+	  ReportData->Button |= (1 << 0);
+
+	/* Check if the new report is different to the previous report */
+	InputChanged = (uint8_t)(PrevJoyStatus ^ JoyStatus_LCL) | (uint8_t)(PrevButtonStatus ^ ButtonStatus_LCL);
+
+	/* Save the current joystick status for later comparison */
+	PrevJoyStatus    = JoyStatus_LCL;
+	PrevButtonStatus = ButtonStatus_LCL;
+
+	/* Return whether the new report is different to the previous report or not */
+	return InputChanged;
+}
+
+/** Function to manage HID report generation and transmission to the host. */
+void HID_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Select the Joystick Report Endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(JOYSTICK_EPADDR);
+
+	/* Check to see if the host is ready for another packet */
+	if (Endpoint_IsINReady())
+	{
+		USB_JoystickReport_Data_t JoystickReportData;
+
+		/* Create the next HID report to send to the host */
+		GetNextReport(&JoystickReportData);
+
+		/* Write Joystick Report Data */
+		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&JoystickReportData, sizeof(JoystickReportData), NULL);
+
+		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+		/* Clear the report data afterwards */
+		memset(&JoystickReportData, 0, sizeof(JoystickReportData));
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Joystick.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Joystick.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..154819801
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Joystick.h
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Joystick.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _JOYSTICK_H_
+#define _JOYSTICK_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the joystick HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC.
+		 *  This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			int8_t  X; /**< Current absolute joystick X position, as a signed 8-bit integer */
+			int8_t  Y; /**< Current absolute joystick Y position, as a signed 8-bit integer */
+			int8_t  Z; /**< Current absolute joystick Z position, as a signed 8-bit integer */
+			uint8_t Button; /**< Bit mask of the currently pressed joystick buttons */
+		} USB_JoystickReport_Data_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void HID_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+		bool GetNextReport(USB_JoystickReport_Data_t* const ReportData);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Joystick.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Joystick.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e3aec3d70
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/Joystick.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Joystick Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *  \li Series AU XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxAxU)
+ *  \li Series B XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxBxU)
+ *  \li Series C XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxCxU)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Joystick demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Keyboard device, for USB Joysticks
+ *  using the standard Keyboard HID profile.
+ *
+ *  This device will show up as a generic joystick device, with two buttons.
+ *  Pressing the joystick inwards is the first button, and the HWB button
+ *  is the second.
+ *
+ *  Moving the joystick on the selected board moves the joystick location on
+ *  the host computer.
+ *
+ *  Currently only single interface joysticks are supported.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d37741bac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Joystick HID Device Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.joystick.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.joystick"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="Joystick HID Device Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.joystick.example.xmega">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.joystick"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.xmega"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atxmega128a1u"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="32000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="48000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.joystick" caption="Joystick HID Device Demo (Low Level APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Joystick HID device demo, implementing a basic USB joystick that can send movement information to the host. This demo uses the Low Level LUFA APIs to manually implement a USB Class for demonstration purposes without using the simpler in-built LUFA Class Driver APIs.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="Joystick.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="Joystick.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Joystick.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a48265c0c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Joystick Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b26b0317b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Joystick/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = Joystick
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a06b60275
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_RC32MCLKSRC | USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH)
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX               2
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..23384d407
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,255 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] =
+{
+	HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x01), /* Generic Desktop */
+	HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x06), /* Keyboard */
+	HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x01), /* Application */
+		HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x07), /* Key Codes */
+		HID_RI_USAGE_MINIMUM(8, 0xE0), /* Keyboard Left Control */
+		HID_RI_USAGE_MAXIMUM(8, 0xE7), /* Keyboard Right GUI */
+		HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0x00),
+		HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 0x01),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x01),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x08),
+		HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x01),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x08),
+		HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_CONSTANT),
+		HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x08), /* LEDs */
+		HID_RI_USAGE_MINIMUM(8, 0x01), /* Num Lock */
+		HID_RI_USAGE_MAXIMUM(8, 0x05), /* Kana */
+		HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x05),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x01),
+		HID_RI_OUTPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE | HID_IOF_NON_VOLATILE),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x01),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x03),
+		HID_RI_OUTPUT(8, HID_IOF_CONSTANT),
+		HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0x00),
+		HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 0x65),
+		HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x07), /* Keyboard */
+		HID_RI_USAGE_MINIMUM(8, 0x00), /* Reserved (no event indicated) */
+		HID_RI_USAGE_MAXIMUM(8, 0x65), /* Keyboard Application */
+		HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x06),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x08),
+		HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_ARRAY | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE),
+	HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0),
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2042,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.HID_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_Keyboard,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = HID_CSCP_HIDClass,
+			.SubClass               = HID_CSCP_BootSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = HID_CSCP_KeyboardBootProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_KeyboardHID =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = HID_DTYPE_HID},
+
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(1,1,1),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = HID_DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(KeyboardReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = KEYBOARD_IN_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportOUTEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = KEYBOARD_OUT_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Keyboard Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_HID:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_KeyboardHID;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t);
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_Report:
+			Address = &KeyboardReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(KeyboardReport);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..82b316b7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// Keyboard HID Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t              HID_KeyboardHID;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportOUTEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_Keyboard = 0, /**< Keyboard interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the Keyboard HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_IN_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 1)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the Keyboard HID reporting OUT endpoint. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_OUT_EPADDR       (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 2)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Keyboard HID reporting IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_EPSIZE           8
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Keyboard.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Keyboard.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7902493d6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Keyboard.c
@@ -0,0 +1,383 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the Keyboard demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "Keyboard.h"
+
+/** Indicates what report mode the host has requested, true for normal HID reporting mode, \c false for special boot
+ *  protocol reporting mode.
+ */
+static bool UsingReportProtocol = true;
+
+/** Current Idle period. This is set by the host via a Set Idle HID class request to silence the device's reports
+ *  for either the entire idle duration, or until the report status changes (e.g. the user presses a key).
+ */
+static uint16_t IdleCount = 500;
+
+/** Current Idle period remaining. When the IdleCount value is set, this tracks the remaining number of idle
+ *  milliseconds. This is separate to the IdleCount timer and is incremented and compared as the host may request
+ *  the current idle period via a Get Idle HID class request, thus its value must be preserved.
+ */
+static uint16_t IdleMSRemaining = 0;
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		HID_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+	/* Start the PLL to multiply the 2MHz RC oscillator to 32MHz and switch the CPU core to run from it */
+	XMEGACLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ, 2000000, F_CPU);
+	XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL);
+
+	/* Start the 32MHz internal RC oscillator and start the DFLL to increase it to 48MHz using the USB SOF as a reference */
+	XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);
+	XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF, F_USB);
+
+	PMIC.CTRL = PMIC_LOLVLEN_bm | PMIC_MEDLVLEN_bm | PMIC_HILVLEN_bm;
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	/* Default to report protocol on connect */
+	UsingReportProtocol = true;
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration
+ *  of the USB device after enumeration, and configures the keyboard device endpoints.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	/* Setup HID Report Endpoints */
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_IN_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, KEYBOARD_EPSIZE, 1);
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_OUT_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, KEYBOARD_EPSIZE, 1);
+
+	/* Turn on Start-of-Frame events for tracking HID report period expiry */
+	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
+
+	/* Indicate endpoint configuration success or failure */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to
+ *  the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing
+ *  internally.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	/* Handle HID Class specific requests */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case HID_REQ_GetReport:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReportData;
+
+				/* Create the next keyboard report for transmission to the host */
+				CreateKeyboardReport(&KeyboardReportData);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Write the report data to the control endpoint */
+				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReportData, sizeof(KeyboardReportData));
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_REQ_SetReport:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Wait until the LED report has been sent by the host */
+				while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+				{
+					if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+					  return;
+				}
+
+				/* Read in the LED report from the host */
+				uint8_t LEDStatus = Endpoint_Read_8();
+
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+
+				/* Process the incoming LED report */
+				ProcessLEDReport(LEDStatus);
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_REQ_GetProtocol:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Write the current protocol flag to the host */
+				Endpoint_Write_8(UsingReportProtocol);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_REQ_SetProtocol:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+
+				/* Set or clear the flag depending on what the host indicates that the current Protocol should be */
+				UsingReportProtocol = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue != 0);
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_REQ_SetIdle:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+
+				/* Get idle period in MSB, IdleCount must be multiplied by 4 to get number of milliseconds */
+				IdleCount = ((USB_ControlRequest.wValue & 0xFF00) >> 6);
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_REQ_GetIdle:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Write the current idle duration to the host, must be divided by 4 before sent to host */
+				Endpoint_Write_8(IdleCount >> 2);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
+{
+	/* One millisecond has elapsed, decrement the idle time remaining counter if it has not already elapsed */
+	if (IdleMSRemaining)
+	  IdleMSRemaining--;
+}
+
+/** Fills the given HID report data structure with the next HID report to send to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a HID report data structure to be filled
+ */
+void CreateKeyboardReport(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* const ReportData)
+{
+	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL     = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL  = Buttons_GetStatus();
+
+	uint8_t UsedKeyCodes      = 0;
+
+	/* Clear the report contents */
+	memset(ReportData, 0, sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t));
+
+	/* Make sent key uppercase by indicating that the left shift key is pressed */
+	ReportData->Modifier = HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFIER_LEFTSHIFT;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  ReportData->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_A;
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  ReportData->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_B;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  ReportData->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_C;
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  ReportData->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_D;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+	  ReportData->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_E;
+
+	if (ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
+	  ReportData->KeyCode[UsedKeyCodes++] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F;
+}
+
+/** Processes a received LED report, and updates the board LEDs states to match.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] LEDReport  LED status report from the host
+ */
+void ProcessLEDReport(const uint8_t LEDReport)
+{
+	uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_LED2;
+
+	if (LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_NUMLOCK)
+	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
+
+	if (LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_CAPSLOCK)
+	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
+
+	if (LEDReport & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_SCROLLLOCK)
+	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
+
+	/* Set the status LEDs to the current Keyboard LED status */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
+
+/** Sends the next HID report to the host, via the keyboard data endpoint. */
+void SendNextReport(void)
+{
+	static USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t PrevKeyboardReportData;
+	USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t        KeyboardReportData;
+	bool                             SendReport = false;
+
+	/* Create the next keyboard report for transmission to the host */
+	CreateKeyboardReport(&KeyboardReportData);
+
+	/* Check if the idle period is set and has elapsed */
+	if (IdleCount && (!(IdleMSRemaining)))
+	{
+		/* Reset the idle time remaining counter */
+		IdleMSRemaining = IdleCount;
+
+		/* Idle period is set and has elapsed, must send a report to the host */
+		SendReport = true;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Check to see if the report data has changed - if so a report MUST be sent */
+		SendReport = (memcmp(&PrevKeyboardReportData, &KeyboardReportData, sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t)) != 0);
+	}
+
+	/* Select the Keyboard Report Endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_IN_EPADDR);
+
+	/* Check if Keyboard Endpoint Ready for Read/Write and if we should send a new report */
+	if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed() && SendReport)
+	{
+		/* Save the current report data for later comparison to check for changes */
+		PrevKeyboardReportData = KeyboardReportData;
+
+		/* Write Keyboard Report Data */
+		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReportData, sizeof(KeyboardReportData), NULL);
+
+		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Reads the next LED status report from the host from the LED data endpoint, if one has been sent. */
+void ReceiveNextReport(void)
+{
+	/* Select the Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_OUT_EPADDR);
+
+	/* Check if Keyboard LED Endpoint contains a packet */
+	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+	{
+		/* Check to see if the packet contains data */
+		if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+		{
+			/* Read in the LED report from the host */
+			uint8_t LEDReport = Endpoint_Read_8();
+
+			/* Process the read LED report from the host */
+			ProcessLEDReport(LEDReport);
+		}
+
+		/* Handshake the OUT Endpoint - clear endpoint and ready for next report */
+		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Function to manage HID report generation and transmission to the host, when in report mode. */
+void HID_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Send the next keypress report to the host */
+	SendNextReport();
+
+	/* Process the LED report sent from the host */
+	ReceiveNextReport();
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Keyboard.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Keyboard.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..db8def358
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Keyboard.h
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Keyboard.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _KEYBOARD_H_
+#define _KEYBOARD_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY        LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING     (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY           (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR           (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void HID_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+
+		void CreateKeyboardReport(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* const ReportData);
+		void ProcessLEDReport(const uint8_t LEDReport);
+		void SendNextReport(void);
+		void ReceiveNextReport(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Keyboard.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Keyboard.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a1582a8f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/Keyboard.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Keyboard Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *  \li Series AU XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxAxU)
+ *  \li Series B XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxBxU)
+ *  \li Series C XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxCxU)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Keyboard demonstration application. This gives a simple reference application
+ *  for implementing a USB Keyboard using the basic USB HID drivers in all modern
+ *  OSes (i.e. no special drivers required). It is boot protocol compatible, and thus
+ *  works under compatible BIOS as if it was a native keyboard (e.g. PS/2).
+ *
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function as a keyboard
+ *  when the USB connection to a host is present. To use the keyboard example,
+ *  manipulate the joystick to send the letters a, b, c, d and e. See the USB HID
+ *  documentation for more information on sending keyboard event and key presses. Unlike
+ *  other LUFA Keyboard demos, this example shows explicitly how to send multiple key presses
+ *  inside the same report to the host.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4d386f46f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Keyboard HID Device Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.keyboard.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.keyboard"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="Keyboard HID Device Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.keyboard.example.xmega">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.keyboard"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.xmega"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atxmega128a1u"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="32000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="48000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.keyboard" caption="Keyboard HID Device Demo (Low Level APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Keyboard HID device demo, implementing a basic USB keyboard that can send key press information to the host. This demo uses the Low Level LUFA APIs to manually implement a USB Class for demonstration purposes without using the simpler in-built LUFA Class Driver APIs.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="Keyboard.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="Keyboard.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Keyboard.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9962d7c79
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1e54ae843
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Keyboard/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = Keyboard
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fa0397910
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_RC32MCLKSRC | USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH)
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX               3
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9a79cecf4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,346 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ *
+ *  This descriptor describes the mouse HID interface's report structure.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MouseReport[] =
+{
+	HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x01), /* Generic Desktop */
+	HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x02), /* Mouse */
+	HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x01), /* Application */
+		HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x01), /* Pointer */
+		HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x00), /* Physical */
+			HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x09), /* Button */
+			HID_RI_USAGE_MINIMUM(8, 0x01),
+			HID_RI_USAGE_MAXIMUM(8, 0x03),
+			HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0x00),
+			HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 0x01),
+			HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x03),
+			HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x01),
+			HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE),
+			HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x01),
+			HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x05),
+			HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_CONSTANT),
+			HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x01), /* Generic Desktop */
+			HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x30), /* Usage X */
+			HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x31), /* Usage Y */
+			HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, -1),
+			HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 1),
+			HID_RI_PHYSICAL_MINIMUM(8, -1),
+			HID_RI_PHYSICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 1),
+			HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x02),
+			HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x08),
+			HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_RELATIVE),
+		HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0),
+	HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0),
+};
+
+/** Same as the MouseReport structure, but defines the keyboard HID interface's report structure. */
+const USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] =
+{
+	HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x01), /* Generic Desktop */
+	HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x06), /* Keyboard */
+	HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x01), /* Application */
+		HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x07), /* Key Codes */
+		HID_RI_USAGE_MINIMUM(8, 0xE0), /* Keyboard Left Control */
+		HID_RI_USAGE_MAXIMUM(8, 0xE7), /* Keyboard Right GUI */
+		HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0x00),
+		HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 0x01),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x01),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x08),
+		HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x01),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x08),
+		HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_CONSTANT),
+		HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x08), /* LEDs */
+		HID_RI_USAGE_MINIMUM(8, 0x01), /* Num Lock */
+		HID_RI_USAGE_MAXIMUM(8, 0x05), /* Kana */
+		HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x05),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x01),
+		HID_RI_OUTPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE | HID_IOF_NON_VOLATILE),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x01),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x03),
+		HID_RI_OUTPUT(8, HID_IOF_CONSTANT),
+		HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0x00),
+		HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 0x65),
+		HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x07), /* Keyboard */
+		HID_RI_USAGE_MINIMUM(8, 0x00), /* Reserved (no event indicated) */
+		HID_RI_USAGE_MAXIMUM(8, 0x65), /* Keyboard Application */
+		HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x06),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x08),
+		HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_ARRAY | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE),
+	HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0),
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x204D,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.HID1_KeyboardInterface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_Keyboard,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = HID_CSCP_HIDClass,
+			.SubClass               = HID_CSCP_BootSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = HID_CSCP_KeyboardBootProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID1_KeyboardHID =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = HID_DTYPE_HID},
+
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(1,1,1),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = HID_DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(KeyboardReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID1_ReportINEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = KEYBOARD_IN_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = HID_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.HID1_ReportOUTEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = KEYBOARD_OUT_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = HID_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.HID2_MouseInterface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_Mouse,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = HID_CSCP_HIDClass,
+			.SubClass               = HID_CSCP_BootSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = HID_CSCP_MouseBootProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID2_MouseHID =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = HID_DTYPE_HID},
+
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(1,1,1),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = HID_DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(MouseReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID2_ReportINEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = MOUSE_IN_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = HID_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Mouse and Keyboard Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_HID:
+			switch (wIndex)
+			{
+				case (INTERFACE_ID_Keyboard):
+					Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor.HID1_KeyboardHID;
+					Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t);
+					break;
+				case (INTERFACE_ID_Mouse):
+					Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor.HID2_MouseHID;
+					Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t);
+					break;
+			}
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_Report:
+			switch (wIndex)
+			{
+				case INTERFACE_ID_Keyboard:
+					Address = &KeyboardReport;
+					Size    = sizeof(KeyboardReport);
+					break;
+				case INTERFACE_ID_Mouse:
+					Address = &MouseReport;
+					Size    = sizeof(MouseReport);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bb53313b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,107 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// Keyboard HID Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID1_KeyboardInterface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t              HID1_KeyboardHID;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID1_ReportINEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID1_ReportOUTEndpoint;
+
+			// Mouse HID Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID2_MouseInterface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t              HID2_MouseHID;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID2_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_Keyboard = 0, /**< Keyboard interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_Mouse    = 1, /**< Mouse interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the Keyboard HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_IN_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 1)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the Keyboard HID reporting OUT endpoint. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_OUT_EPADDR       (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 2)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define MOUSE_IN_EPADDR           (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of each of the HID reporting IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define HID_EPSIZE                8
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..831e49619
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.c
@@ -0,0 +1,321 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the KeyboardMouse demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "KeyboardMouse.h"
+
+/** Global structure to hold the current keyboard interface HID report, for transmission to the host */
+static USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReportData;
+
+/** Global structure to hold the current mouse interface HID report, for transmission to the host */
+static USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReportData;
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		Keyboard_HID_Task();
+		Mouse_HID_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+	/* Start the PLL to multiply the 2MHz RC oscillator to 32MHz and switch the CPU core to run from it */
+	XMEGACLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ, 2000000, F_CPU);
+	XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL);
+
+	/* Start the 32MHz internal RC oscillator and start the DFLL to increase it to 48MHz using the USB SOF as a reference */
+	XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);
+	XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF, F_USB);
+
+	PMIC.CTRL = PMIC_LOLVLEN_bm | PMIC_MEDLVLEN_bm | PMIC_HILVLEN_bm;
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs and stops the USB management task.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration
+ *  of the USB device after enumeration, and configures the keyboard and mouse device endpoints.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	/* Setup Keyboard HID Report Endpoints */
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_IN_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, HID_EPSIZE, 1);
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_OUT_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, HID_EPSIZE, 1);
+
+	/* Setup Mouse HID Report Endpoint */
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MOUSE_IN_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, HID_EPSIZE, 1);
+
+	/* Indicate endpoint configuration success or failure */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to
+ *  the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing
+ *  internally.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	uint8_t* ReportData;
+	uint8_t  ReportSize;
+
+	/* Handle HID Class specific requests */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case HID_REQ_GetReport:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Determine if it is the mouse or the keyboard data that is being requested */
+				if (!(USB_ControlRequest.wIndex))
+				{
+					ReportData = (uint8_t*)&KeyboardReportData;
+					ReportSize = sizeof(KeyboardReportData);
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					ReportData = (uint8_t*)&MouseReportData;
+					ReportSize = sizeof(MouseReportData);
+				}
+
+				/* Write the report data to the control endpoint */
+				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(ReportData, ReportSize);
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+				/* Clear the report data afterwards */
+				memset(ReportData, 0, ReportSize);
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_REQ_SetReport:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Wait until the LED report has been sent by the host */
+				while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+				{
+					if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+					  return;
+				}
+
+				/* Read in the LED report from the host */
+				uint8_t LEDStatus = Endpoint_Read_8();
+
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+
+				/* Process the incoming LED report */
+				Keyboard_ProcessLEDReport(LEDStatus);
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Processes a given Keyboard LED report from the host, and sets the board LEDs to match. Since the Keyboard
+ *  LED report can be sent through either the control endpoint (via a HID SetReport request) or the HID OUT
+ *  endpoint, the processing code is placed here to avoid duplicating it and potentially having different
+ *  behavior depending on the method used to sent it.
+ */
+void Keyboard_ProcessLEDReport(const uint8_t LEDStatus)
+{
+	uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_LED2;
+
+	if (LEDStatus & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_NUMLOCK)
+	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
+
+	if (LEDStatus & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_CAPSLOCK)
+	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
+
+	if (LEDStatus & HID_KEYBOARD_LED_SCROLLLOCK)
+	  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
+
+	/* Set the status LEDs to the current Keyboard LED status */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
+
+/** Keyboard task. This generates the next keyboard HID report for the host, and transmits it via the
+ *  keyboard IN endpoint when the host is ready for more data. Additionally, it processes host LED status
+ *  reports sent to the device via the keyboard OUT reporting endpoint.
+ */
+void Keyboard_HID_Task(void)
+{
+	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus();
+
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Check if board button is not pressed, if so mouse mode enabled */
+	if (!(Buttons_GetStatus() & BUTTONS_BUTTON1))
+	{
+		/* Make sent key uppercase by indicating that the left shift key is pressed */
+		KeyboardReportData.Modifier = HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFIER_LEFTSHIFT;
+
+		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+		  KeyboardReportData.KeyCode[0] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_A;
+		else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+		  KeyboardReportData.KeyCode[0] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_B;
+
+		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+		  KeyboardReportData.KeyCode[0] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_C;
+		else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+		  KeyboardReportData.KeyCode[0] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_D;
+
+		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+		  KeyboardReportData.KeyCode[0] = HID_KEYBOARD_SC_E;
+	}
+
+	/* Select the Keyboard Report Endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_IN_EPADDR);
+
+	/* Check if Keyboard Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */
+	if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+	{
+		/* Write Keyboard Report Data */
+		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReportData, sizeof(KeyboardReportData), NULL);
+
+		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+		/* Clear the report data afterwards */
+		memset(&KeyboardReportData, 0, sizeof(KeyboardReportData));
+	}
+
+	/* Select the Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_OUT_EPADDR);
+
+	/* Check if Keyboard LED Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */
+	if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+	{
+		/* Read in and process the LED report from the host */
+		Keyboard_ProcessLEDReport(Endpoint_Read_8());
+
+		/* Handshake the OUT Endpoint - clear endpoint and ready for next report */
+		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Mouse task. This generates the next mouse HID report for the host, and transmits it via the
+ *  mouse IN endpoint when the host is ready for more data.
+ */
+void Mouse_HID_Task(void)
+{
+	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus();
+
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Check if board button is pressed, if so mouse mode enabled */
+	if (Buttons_GetStatus() & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
+	{
+		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+		  MouseReportData.Y =  1;
+		else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+		  MouseReportData.Y = -1;
+
+		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+		  MouseReportData.X =  1;
+		else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+		  MouseReportData.X = -1;
+
+		if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+		  MouseReportData.Button |= (1 << 0);
+	}
+
+	/* Select the Mouse Report Endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MOUSE_IN_EPADDR);
+
+	/* Check if Mouse Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */
+	if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+	{
+		/* Write Mouse Report Data */
+		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&MouseReportData, sizeof(MouseReportData), NULL);
+
+		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+		/* Clear the report data afterwards */
+		memset(&MouseReportData, 0, sizeof(MouseReportData));
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d83ab7c71
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.h
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#ifndef _KEYBOARD_MOUSE_H_
+#define _KEYBOARD_MOUSE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY        LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING     (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY           (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR           (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void Keyboard_ProcessLEDReport(const uint8_t LEDStatus);
+		void Keyboard_HID_Task(void);
+		void Mouse_HID_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..20c89cc80
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Dual HID Keyboard and Mouse Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *  \li Series AU XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxAxU)
+ *  \li Series B XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxBxU)
+ *  \li Series C XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxCxU)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Keyboard/Mouse demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a composite device containing both USB Keyboard
+ *  and USB Mouse functionality using the basic USB HID drivers in all modern OSes
+ *  (i.e. no special drivers required). This example uses two separate HID
+ *  interfaces for each function. It is boot protocol compatible, and thus works under
+ *  compatible BIOS as if it was a native keyboard and mouse (e.g. PS/2).
+ *
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function
+ *  as a keyboard when the USB connection to a host is present and the HWB is not
+ *  pressed. When enabled, manipulate the joystick to send the letters
+ *  a, b, c, d and e. See the USB HID documentation for more information
+ *  on sending keyboard event and key presses.
+ *
+ *  When the HWB is pressed, the mouse mode is enabled. When enabled, move the
+ *  joystick to move the pointer, and push the joystick inwards to simulate a
+ *  left-button click.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d44bb8043
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Keyboard and Mouse HID Device Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.keyboard_mouse.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.keyboard_mouse"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="Keyboard and Mouse HID Device Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.keyboard_mouse.example.xmega">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.keyboard_mouse"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.xmega"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atxmega128a1u"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="32000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="48000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.keyboard_mouse" caption="Keyboard and Mouse HID Device Demo (Low Level APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Keyboard and Mouse HID device demo, implementing a basic USB keyboard and mouse using a pair of HID interfaces. This demo uses the Low Level LUFA APIs to manually implement a USB Class for demonstration purposes without using the simpler in-built LUFA Class Driver APIs.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="KeyboardMouse.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="KeyboardMouse.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="KeyboardMouse.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7428ae1cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Combined Keyboard/Mouse Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..88539ac9f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/KeyboardMouse/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = KeyboardMouse
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a06b60275
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_RC32MCLKSRC | USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH)
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX               2
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f7138ca59
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,314 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2048,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize   = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces          = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber      = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex    = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes         = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption      = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.Audio_ControlInterface =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioControl,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
+
+			.Class                    = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass,
+			.SubClass                 = AUDIO_CSCP_ControlSubclass,
+			.Protocol                 = AUDIO_CSCP_ControlProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_ControlInterface_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.ACSpecification          = VERSION_BCD(1,0,0),
+			.TotalLength              = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t),
+
+			.InCollection             = 1,
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream,
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 2,
+
+			.Class                    = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass,
+			.SubClass                 = AUDIO_CSCP_MIDIStreamingSubclass,
+			.Protocol                 = AUDIO_CSCP_StreamingProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_AudioInterface_AS_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_General,
+
+			.AudioSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,0,0),
+
+			.TotalLength              = (sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t) -
+			                             offsetof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t, Audio_StreamInterface_SPC))
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Emb =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_InputTerminal,
+
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_Embedded,
+			.JackID                   = 0x01,
+
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Ext =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_InputTerminal,
+
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_External,
+			.JackID                   = 0x02,
+
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_OutputTerminal,
+
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_Embedded,
+			.JackID                   = 0x03,
+
+			.NumberOfPins             = 1,
+			.SourceJackID             = {0x02},
+			.SourcePinID              = {0x01},
+
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_OutputTerminal,
+
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_External,
+			.JackID                   = 0x04,
+
+			.NumberOfPins             = 1,
+			.SourceJackID             = {0x01},
+			.SourcePinID              = {0x01},
+
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint =
+		{
+			.Endpoint =
+				{
+					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+					.EndpointAddress     = MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPADDR,
+					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+					.EndpointSize        = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+					.PollingIntervalMS   = 0x05
+				},
+
+			.Refresh                  = 0,
+			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSEndpoint},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSEndpoint_General,
+
+			.TotalEmbeddedJacks       = 0x01,
+			.AssociatedJackID         = {0x01}
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint =
+		{
+			.Endpoint =
+				{
+					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+					.EndpointAddress     = MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPADDR,
+					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+					.EndpointSize        = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+					.PollingIntervalMS   = 0x05
+				},
+
+			.Refresh                  = 0,
+			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSEndpoint},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSEndpoint_General,
+
+			.TotalEmbeddedJacks       = 0x01,
+			.AssociatedJackID         = {0x03}
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA MIDI Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..10bc43417
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,108 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the MIDI streaming data IN endpoint, for device-to-host data transfers. */
+		#define MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPADDR       (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 1)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the MIDI streaming data OUT endpoint, for host-to-device data transfers. */
+		#define MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPADDR      (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 2)
+
+		/** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE          64
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t     Config;
+
+			// MIDI Audio Control Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t                Audio_ControlInterface;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t       Audio_ControlInterface_SPC;
+
+			// MIDI Audio Streaming Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t                Audio_StreamInterface;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_AudioInterface_AS_t   Audio_StreamInterface_SPC;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t           MIDI_In_Jack_Emb;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t           MIDI_In_Jack_Ext;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t          MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t          MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t       MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t       MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_AudioControl = 0, /**< Audio control interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream  = 1, /**< Audio stream interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/MIDI.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/MIDI.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9208b0cdc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/MIDI.c
@@ -0,0 +1,224 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MIDI input demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "MIDI.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		MIDI_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+	/* Start the PLL to multiply the 2MHz RC oscillator to 32MHz and switch the CPU core to run from it */
+	XMEGACLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ, 2000000, F_CPU);
+	XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL);
+
+	/* Start the 32MHz internal RC oscillator and start the DFLL to increase it to 48MHz using the USB SOF as a reference */
+	XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);
+	XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF, F_USB);
+
+	PMIC.CTRL = PMIC_LOLVLEN_bm | PMIC_MEDLVLEN_bm | PMIC_HILVLEN_bm;
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs, disables the sample update and PWM output timers and stops the USB and MIDI management tasks.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
+ *  of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the MIDI management task started.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	/* Setup MIDI Data Endpoints */
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK, MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE, 1);
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK, MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE, 1);
+
+	/* Indicate endpoint configuration success or failure */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Task to handle the generation of MIDI note change events in response to presses of the board joystick, and send them
+ *  to the host.
+ */
+void MIDI_Task(void)
+{
+	static uint8_t PrevJoystickStatus;
+
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPADDR);
+
+	if (Endpoint_IsINReady())
+	{
+		uint8_t MIDICommand = 0;
+		uint8_t MIDIPitch;
+
+		uint8_t JoystickStatus  = Joystick_GetStatus();
+		uint8_t JoystickChanges = (JoystickStatus ^ PrevJoystickStatus);
+
+		/* Get board button status - if pressed use channel 10 (percussion), otherwise use channel 1 */
+		uint8_t Channel = ((Buttons_GetStatus() & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ? MIDI_CHANNEL(10) : MIDI_CHANNEL(1));
+
+		if (JoystickChanges & JOY_LEFT)
+		{
+			MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_LEFT)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+			MIDIPitch   = 0x3C;
+		}
+
+		if (JoystickChanges & JOY_UP)
+		{
+			MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_UP)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+			MIDIPitch   = 0x3D;
+		}
+
+		if (JoystickChanges & JOY_RIGHT)
+		{
+			MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_RIGHT)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+			MIDIPitch   = 0x3E;
+		}
+
+		if (JoystickChanges & JOY_DOWN)
+		{
+			MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_DOWN)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+			MIDIPitch   = 0x3F;
+		}
+
+		if (JoystickChanges & JOY_PRESS)
+		{
+			MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_PRESS)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+			MIDIPitch   = 0x3B;
+		}
+
+		/* Check if a MIDI command is to be sent */
+		if (MIDICommand)
+		{
+			MIDI_EventPacket_t MIDIEvent = (MIDI_EventPacket_t)
+				{
+					.Event       = MIDI_EVENT(0, MIDICommand),
+
+					.Data1       = MIDICommand | Channel,
+					.Data2       = MIDIPitch,
+					.Data3       = MIDI_STANDARD_VELOCITY,
+				};
+
+			/* Write the MIDI event packet to the endpoint */
+			Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&MIDIEvent, sizeof(MIDIEvent), NULL);
+
+			/* Send the data in the endpoint to the host */
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+		}
+
+		/* Save previous joystick value for next joystick change detection */
+		PrevJoystickStatus = JoystickStatus;
+	}
+
+	/* Select the MIDI OUT stream */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPADDR);
+
+	/* Check if a MIDI command has been received */
+	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+	{
+		MIDI_EventPacket_t MIDIEvent;
+
+		/* Read the MIDI event packet from the endpoint */
+		Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&MIDIEvent, sizeof(MIDIEvent), NULL);
+
+		/* Check to see if the sent command is a note on message with a non-zero velocity */
+		if ((MIDIEvent.Event == MIDI_EVENT(0, MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON)) && (MIDIEvent.Data3 > 0))
+		{
+			/* Change LEDs depending on the pitch of the sent note */
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(MIDIEvent.Data2 > 64 ? LEDS_LED1 : LEDS_LED2);
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			/* Turn off all LEDs in response to non Note On messages */
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_NO_LEDS);
+		}
+
+		/* If the endpoint is now empty, clear the bank */
+		if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
+		{
+			/* Clear the endpoint ready for new packet */
+			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+		}
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/MIDI.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/MIDI.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cfaefd631
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/MIDI.h
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for AudioOutput.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
+#define _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+   /* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+   /* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void MIDI_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/MIDI.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/MIDI.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c076be3bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/MIDI.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage MIDI Input Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *  \li Series AU XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxAxU)
+ *  \li Series B XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxBxU)
+ *  \li Series C XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxCxU)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Audio Class</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Standard Audio Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Audio Class Specification \n
+ *        USB-MIDI Audio Class Extension Specification \n
+ *        General MIDI Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  MIDI demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing the USB-MIDI class in USB devices.
+ *  It is built upon the USB Audio class.
+ *
+ *  Joystick movements are translated into note on/off messages and
+ *  are sent to the host PC as MIDI streams which can be read by any
+ *  MIDI program supporting MIDI IN devices.
+ *
+ *  If the HWB is not pressed, channel 1 (default piano) is used. If
+ *  the HWB is pressed, then channel 10 (default percussion) is selected.
+ *
+ *  This device implements MIDI-THRU mode, with the IN MIDI data being
+ *  generated by the device itself. OUT MIDI data is discarded.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..477b7d749
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="MIDI Device Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.midi.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.midi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="MIDI Device Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.midi.example.xmega">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.midi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.xmega"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atxmega128a1u"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="32000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="48000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.midi" caption="MIDI Device Demo (Low Level APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		MIDI device demo, implementing a basic USB MIDI device that can send messages to the host. This demo uses the Low Level LUFA APIs to manually implement a USB Class for demonstration purposes without using the simpler in-built LUFA Class Driver APIs.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="MIDI Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="MIDI.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="MIDI.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="MIDI.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b7b1862f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - MIDI Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..aeeb870b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MIDI/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = MIDI
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4be9d2b6b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
+ *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
+ *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
+ *  makefile or build system.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#define TOTAL_LUNS                1
+
+	#define DISK_READ_ONLY            false
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3c3b68bb1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_RC32MCLKSRC | USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH)
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX               4
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..598155a45
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,194 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2045,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED,
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.MS_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = MS_CSCP_MassStorageClass,
+			.SubClass               = MS_CSCP_SCSITransparentSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = MS_CSCP_BulkOnlyTransportProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Mass Storage Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..14b131d5e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR         (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE         64
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// Mass Storage Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            MS_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataInEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataOutEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage = 0, /**< Mass storage interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..41be81400
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.c
@@ -0,0 +1,530 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Functions to manage the physical Dataflash media, including reading and writing of
+ *  blocks of data. These functions are called by the SCSI layer when data must be stored
+ *  or retrieved to/from the physical storage media. If a different media is used (such
+ *  as a SD card or EEPROM), functions similar to these will need to be generated.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASHMANAGER_C
+#include "DataflashManager.h"
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), from
+ *  the pre-selected data OUT endpoint. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the endpoint and writes
+ *  them to the Dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                  uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+#endif
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+
+	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+	  return;
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is currently empty */
+			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+			{
+				/* Clear the current endpoint bank */
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+				/* Wait until the host has sent another packet */
+				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Once all the Dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
+				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+				/* If less than one Dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+				{
+					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				}
+#endif
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
+			}
+
+			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the Dataflash */
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+			if (IsMassStoreReset)
+			  return;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+	/* If the endpoint is empty, clear it ready for the next packet from the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), into
+ *  the pre-selected data IN endpoint. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                 uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+
+	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+	  return;
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is currently full */
+			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+			{
+				/* Clear the endpoint bank to send its contents to the host */
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+				/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for more data */
+				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+			}
+
+			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the Dataflash */
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+			if (IsMassStoreReset)
+			  return;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* If the endpoint is full, send its contents to the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), from
+ *  the given RAM buffer. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the buffer and writes them to the
+ *  Dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. This can be linked to FAT libraries to write files to the
+ *  Dataflash.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
+ *  \param[in] BufferPtr     Pointer to the data source RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                      uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+                                      uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+#endif
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Once all the Dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
+				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+				/* If less than one Dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+				{
+					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				}
+#endif
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
+			}
+
+			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the Dataflash */
+			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+			  Dataflash_SendByte(*(BufferPtr++));
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), into
+ *  the preallocated RAM buffer. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the given buffer. This can be linked to FAT libraries to read
+ *  the files stored on the Dataflash.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
+ *  \param[out] BufferPtr    Pointer to the data destination RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                     uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+			}
+
+			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the Dataflash */
+			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+			  *(BufferPtr++) = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Disables the Dataflash memory write protection bits on the board Dataflash ICs, if enabled. */
+void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void)
+{
+	/* Select first Dataflash chip, send the read status register command */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+
+	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+	{
+		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+	}
+
+	/* Select second Dataflash chip (if present on selected board), send read status register command */
+	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+
+	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+	{
+		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+	}
+	#endif
+
+	/* Deselect current Dataflash chip */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Performs a simple test on the attached Dataflash IC(s) to ensure that they are working.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if all media chips are working, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ReturnByte;
+
+	/* Test first Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+	  return false;
+
+	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+	/* Test second Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+	  return false;
+	#endif
+
+	return true;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3ad79b3bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.h
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DataflashManager.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
+#define _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include "../MassStorage.h"
+		#include "../Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE % 16)
+			#error Dataflash page size must be a multiple of 16 bytes.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Defines: */
+		/** Total number of bytes of the storage medium, comprised of one or more Dataflash ICs. */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES                ((uint32_t)DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)
+
+		/** Block size of the device. This is kept at 512 to remain compatible with the OS despite the underlying
+		 *  storage media (Dataflash) using a different native block size. Do not change this value.
+		 */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE           512
+
+		/** Total number of blocks of the virtual memory for reporting to the host as the device's total capacity. Do not
+		 *  change this value; change VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES instead to alter the media size.
+		 */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS               (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES / VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+
+		/** Blocks in each LUN, calculated from the total capacity divided by the total number of Logical Units in the device. */
+		#define LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS                    (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS / TOTAL_LUNS)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                  uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                 uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                      uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+		                                      uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                     uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+		                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void);
+		bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..81347fef7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c
@@ -0,0 +1,344 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage
+ *  devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information,
+ *  which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C
+#include "SCSI.h"
+
+/** Structure to hold the SCSI response data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's
+ *  features and capabilities.
+ */
+static const SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData =
+	{
+		.DeviceType          = DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK,
+		.PeripheralQualifier = 0,
+
+		.Removable           = true,
+
+		.Version             = 0,
+
+		.ResponseDataFormat  = 2,
+		.NormACA             = false,
+		.TrmTsk              = false,
+		.AERC                = false,
+
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x1F,
+
+		.SoftReset           = false,
+		.CmdQue              = false,
+		.Linked              = false,
+		.Sync                = false,
+		.WideBus16Bit        = false,
+		.WideBus32Bit        = false,
+		.RelAddr             = false,
+
+		.VendorID            = "LUFA",
+		.ProductID           = "Dataflash Disk",
+		.RevisionID          = {'0','.','0','0'},
+	};
+
+/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE
+ *  command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete.
+ */
+static SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData =
+	{
+		.ResponseCode        = 0x70,
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x0A,
+	};
+
+
+/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches
+ *  to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns
+ *  a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(void)
+{
+	bool CommandSuccess = false;
+
+	/* Run the appropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */
+	switch (CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0])
+	{
+		case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Inquiry();
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Request_Sense();
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10();
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic();
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(DATA_WRITE);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(DATA_READ);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6();
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_START_STOP_UNIT:
+		case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY:
+		case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL:
+		case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10:
+			/* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */
+			CommandSuccess = true;
+			CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+			break;
+		default:
+			/* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */
+			SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	/* Check if command was successfully processed */
+	if (CommandSuccess)
+	{
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return true;
+	}
+
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features
+ *  and capabilities to the host.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(void)
+{
+	uint16_t AllocationLength  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3]);
+	uint16_t BytesTransferred  = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(InquiryData));
+
+	/* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */
+	if ((CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) ||
+	     CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2])
+	{
+		/* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the INQUIRY data to the endpoint */
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, NULL);
+
+	/* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */
+	Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL);
+
+	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command,
+ *  including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  AllocationLength = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
+	uint8_t  BytesTransferred = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(SenseData));
+
+	/* Send the SENSE data - this indicates to the host the status of the last command */
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, NULL);
+
+	/* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */
+	Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL);
+
+	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity
+ *  on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(void)
+{
+	/* Send the total number of logical blocks in the current LUN */
+	Endpoint_Write_32_BE(LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS - 1);
+
+	/* Send the logical block size of the device (must be 512 bytes) */
+	Endpoint_Write_32_BE(VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE);
+
+	/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+	if (IsMassStoreReset)
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Send the endpoint data packet to the host */
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. This command performs a quick check of the Dataflash ICs on the
+ *  board, and indicates if they are present and functioning correctly. Only the Self-Test portion of the diagnostic command is
+ *  supported.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(void)
+{
+	/* Check to see if the SELF TEST bit is not set */
+	if (!(CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & (1 << 2)))
+	{
+		/* Only self-test supported - update SENSE key and fail the command */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Check to see if all attached Dataflash ICs are functional */
+	if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation()))
+	{
+		/* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address
+ *  and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level Dataflash routine to handle the actual
+ *  reading and writing of the data.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] IsDataRead  Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE)
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(const bool IsDataRead)
+{
+	uint32_t BlockAddress;
+	uint16_t TotalBlocks;
+
+	/* Check if the disk is write protected or not */
+	if ((IsDataRead == DATA_WRITE) && DISK_READ_ONLY)
+	{
+		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	BlockAddress = SwapEndian_32(*(uint32_t*)&CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]);
+	TotalBlocks  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7]);
+
+	/* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */
+	if (BlockAddress >= LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS)
+	{
+		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	#if (TOTAL_LUNS > 1)
+	/* Adjust the given block address to the real media address based on the selected LUN */
+	BlockAddress += ((uint32_t)CommandBlock.LUN * LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS);
+	#endif
+
+	/* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */
+	if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ)
+	  DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+	else
+	  DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+
+	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
+	CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE);
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI MODE SENSE (6) command. This command returns various informational pages about
+ *  the SCSI device, as well as the device's Write Protect status.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(void)
+{
+	/* Send an empty header response with the Write Protect flag status */
+	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(DISK_READ_ONLY ? 0x80 : 0x00);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
+	CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 4;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..36553bd7b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h
@@ -0,0 +1,150 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for SCSI.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _SCSI_H_
+#define _SCSI_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+
+		#include "../MassStorage.h"
+		#include "../Descriptors.h"
+		#include "DataflashManager.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This
+		 *  is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about
+		 *  the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Key    New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] Acode  New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] Aqual  New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to
+		 */
+		#define SCSI_SET_SENSE(Key, Acode, Aqual)  do { SenseData.SenseKey                 = (Key);   \
+		                                                SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode      = (Acode); \
+		                                                SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = (Aqual); } while (0)
+
+		/** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_READ           true
+
+		/** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_WRITE          false
+
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a Block Media device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK   0x00
+
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a CD-ROM device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_CDROM   0x05
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a SCSI response structure to a SCSI INQUIRY command. For details of the
+		 *  structure contents, refer to the SCSI specifications.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			unsigned DeviceType          : 5;
+			unsigned PeripheralQualifier : 3;
+
+			unsigned Reserved            : 7;
+			unsigned Removable           : 1;
+
+			uint8_t  Version;
+
+			unsigned ResponseDataFormat  : 4;
+			unsigned Reserved2           : 1;
+			unsigned NormACA             : 1;
+			unsigned TrmTsk              : 1;
+			unsigned AERC                : 1;
+
+			uint8_t  AdditionalLength;
+			uint8_t  Reserved3[2];
+
+			unsigned SoftReset           : 1;
+			unsigned CmdQue              : 1;
+			unsigned Reserved4           : 1;
+			unsigned Linked              : 1;
+			unsigned Sync                : 1;
+			unsigned WideBus16Bit        : 1;
+			unsigned WideBus32Bit        : 1;
+			unsigned RelAddr             : 1;
+
+			uint8_t  VendorID[8];
+			uint8_t  ProductID[16];
+			uint8_t  RevisionID[4];
+		} MS_SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a SCSI sense structure to a SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. For details of the
+		 *  structure contents, refer to the SCSI specifications.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  ResponseCode;
+
+			uint8_t  SegmentNumber;
+
+			unsigned SenseKey            : 4;
+			unsigned Reserved            : 1;
+			unsigned ILI                 : 1;
+			unsigned EOM                 : 1;
+			unsigned FileMark            : 1;
+
+			uint8_t  Information[4];
+			uint8_t  AdditionalLength;
+			uint8_t  CmdSpecificInformation[4];
+			uint8_t  AdditionalSenseCode;
+			uint8_t  AdditionalSenseQualifier;
+			uint8_t  FieldReplaceableUnitCode;
+			uint8_t  SenseKeySpecific[3];
+		} MS_SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(void);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C)
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(void);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(void);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(void);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(void);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(const bool IsDataRead);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(void);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/MassStorage.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/MassStorage.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4c274b92e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/MassStorage.c
@@ -0,0 +1,332 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the Mass Storage demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORAGE_C
+#include "MassStorage.h"
+
+/** Structure to hold the latest Command Block Wrapper issued by the host, containing a SCSI command to execute. */
+MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t  CommandBlock;
+
+/** Structure to hold the latest Command Status Wrapper to return to the host, containing the status of the last issued command. */
+MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t CommandStatus = { .Signature = MS_CSW_SIGNATURE };
+
+/** Flag to asynchronously abort any in-progress data transfers upon the reception of a mass storage reset command. */
+volatile bool IsMassStoreReset = false;
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		MassStorage_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+	/* Start the PLL to multiply the 2MHz RC oscillator to 32MHz and switch the CPU core to run from it */
+	XMEGACLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ, 2000000, F_CPU);
+	XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL);
+
+	/* Start the 32MHz internal RC oscillator and start the DFLL to increase it to 48MHz using the USB SOF as a reference */
+	XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);
+	XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF, F_USB);
+
+	PMIC.CTRL = PMIC_LOLVLEN_bm | PMIC_MEDLVLEN_bm | PMIC_HILVLEN_bm;
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Dataflash_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Check if the Dataflash is working, abort if not */
+	if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation()))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		for(;;);
+	}
+
+	/* Clear Dataflash sector protections, if enabled */
+	DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	/* Reset the MSReset flag upon connection */
+	IsMassStoreReset = false;
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs and stops the Mass Storage management task.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
+ *  of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the Mass Storage management task started.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	/* Setup Mass Storage Data Endpoints */
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR,  EP_TYPE_BULK, MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE, 1);
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK, MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE, 1);
+
+	/* Indicate endpoint configuration success or failure */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to
+ *  the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing
+ *  internally.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	/* Process UFI specific control requests */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case MS_REQ_MassStorageReset:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+
+				/* Indicate that the current transfer should be aborted */
+				IsMassStoreReset = true;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case MS_REQ_GetMaxLUN:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Indicate to the host the number of supported LUNs (virtual disks) on the device */
+				Endpoint_Write_8(TOTAL_LUNS - 1);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Task to manage the Mass Storage interface, reading in Command Block Wrappers from the host, processing the SCSI commands they
+ *  contain, and returning Command Status Wrappers back to the host to indicate the success or failure of the last issued command.
+ */
+void MassStorage_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Process sent command block from the host if one has been sent */
+	if (ReadInCommandBlock())
+	{
+		/* Indicate busy */
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+		/* Check direction of command, select Data IN endpoint if data is from the device */
+		if (CommandBlock.Flags & MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_IN)
+		  Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR);
+
+		/* Decode the received SCSI command, set returned status code */
+		CommandStatus.Status = SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand() ? MS_SCSI_COMMAND_Pass : MS_SCSI_COMMAND_Fail;
+
+		/* Load in the CBW tag into the CSW to link them together */
+		CommandStatus.Tag = CommandBlock.Tag;
+
+		/* Load in the data residue counter into the CSW */
+		CommandStatus.DataTransferResidue = CommandBlock.DataTransferLength;
+
+		/* Stall the selected data pipe if command failed (if data is still to be transferred) */
+		if ((CommandStatus.Status == MS_SCSI_COMMAND_Fail) && (CommandStatus.DataTransferResidue))
+		  Endpoint_StallTransaction();
+
+		/* Return command status block to the host */
+		ReturnCommandStatus();
+
+		/* Indicate ready */
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	}
+
+	/* Check if a Mass Storage Reset occurred */
+	if (IsMassStoreReset)
+	{
+		/* Reset the data endpoint banks */
+		Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR);
+		Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR);
+
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR);
+		Endpoint_ClearStall();
+		Endpoint_ResetDataToggle();
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR);
+		Endpoint_ClearStall();
+		Endpoint_ResetDataToggle();
+
+		/* Clear the abort transfer flag */
+		IsMassStoreReset = false;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Function to read in a command block from the host, via the bulk data OUT endpoint. This function reads in the next command block
+ *  if one has been issued, and performs validation to ensure that the block command is valid.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if a valid command block has been read in from the endpoint, \c false otherwise
+ */
+static bool ReadInCommandBlock(void)
+{
+	uint16_t BytesTransferred;
+
+	/* Select the Data Out endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR);
+
+	/* Abort if no command has been sent from the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Read in command block header */
+	BytesTransferred = 0;
+	while (Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&CommandBlock, (sizeof(CommandBlock) - sizeof(CommandBlock.SCSICommandData)),
+	                               &BytesTransferred) == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+	{
+		/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+		if (IsMassStoreReset)
+		  return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Verify the command block - abort if invalid */
+	if ((CommandBlock.Signature         != MS_CBW_SIGNATURE) ||
+	    (CommandBlock.LUN               >= TOTAL_LUNS)       ||
+		(CommandBlock.Flags              & 0x1F)             ||
+		(CommandBlock.SCSICommandLength == 0)                ||
+		(CommandBlock.SCSICommandLength >  sizeof(CommandBlock.SCSICommandData)))
+	{
+		/* Stall both data pipes until reset by host */
+		Endpoint_StallTransaction();
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR);
+		Endpoint_StallTransaction();
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Read in command block command data */
+	BytesTransferred = 0;
+	while (Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&CommandBlock.SCSICommandData, CommandBlock.SCSICommandLength,
+	                               &BytesTransferred) == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+	{
+		/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+		if (IsMassStoreReset)
+		  return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Returns the filled Command Status Wrapper back to the host via the bulk data IN endpoint, waiting for the host to clear any
+ *  stalled data endpoints as needed.
+ */
+static void ReturnCommandStatus(void)
+{
+	uint16_t BytesTransferred;
+
+	/* Select the Data Out endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR);
+
+	/* While data pipe is stalled, wait until the host issues a control request to clear the stall */
+	while (Endpoint_IsStalled())
+	{
+		/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+		if (IsMassStoreReset)
+		  return;
+	}
+
+	/* Select the Data In endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR);
+
+	/* While data pipe is stalled, wait until the host issues a control request to clear the stall */
+	while (Endpoint_IsStalled())
+	{
+		/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+		if (IsMassStoreReset)
+		  return;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the CSW to the endpoint */
+	BytesTransferred = 0;
+	while (Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&CommandStatus, sizeof(CommandStatus),
+	                                &BytesTransferred) == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+	{
+		/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+		if (IsMassStoreReset)
+		  return;
+	}
+
+	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/MassStorage.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/MassStorage.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cd2a71525
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/MassStorage.h
@@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MassStorage.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MASS_STORAGE_H_
+#define _MASS_STORAGE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include "Lib/SCSI.h"
+		#include "Lib/DataflashManager.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY       LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING   (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY         (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR         (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY           LEDS_LED2
+
+	/* Global Variables: */
+		extern MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t  CommandBlock;
+		extern MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t CommandStatus;
+		extern volatile bool             IsMassStoreReset;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void MassStorage_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORAGE_C)
+			static bool ReadInCommandBlock(void);
+			static void ReturnCommandStatus(void);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/MassStorage.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/MassStorage.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e54463414
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/MassStorage.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Mass Storage Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *  \li Series AU XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxAxU)
+ *  \li Series B XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxBxU)
+ *  \li Series C XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxCxU)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Mass Storage Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Bulk-Only Transport</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n
+ *        USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n
+ *        SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n
+ *        SCSI Block Commands Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Mass Storage device demonstration application. This gives a simple
+ *  reference application for implementing a USB Mass Storage device using
+ *  the basic USB UFI drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers
+ *  required).
+ *
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function as an
+ *  external mass storage device which may be formatted and used in the same
+ *  manner as commercial USB Mass Storage devices.
+ *
+ *  You will need to format the mass storage drive upon first run of this
+ *  demonstration - as the device acts only as a data block transport between
+ *  the host and the storage media, it does not matter what file system is used,
+ *  as the data interpretation is performed by the host and not the USB device.
+ *
+ *  This demo is not restricted to only a single LUN (logical disk); by changing
+ *  the TOTAL_LUNS value in DataflashManager.h, any number of LUNs can be used
+ *  (from 1 to 255), with each LUN being allocated an equal portion of the available
+ *  Dataflash memory.
+ *
+ *  The USB control endpoint is managed entirely by the library using endpoint
+ *  interrupts, as the INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT option is enabled. This allows for
+ *  the host to reset the Mass Storage device state during long transfers without
+ *  the need for complicated polling logic.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>TOTAL_LUNS</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Total number of Logical Units (drives) in the device. The total device capacity is shared equally between each drive
+ *        - this can be set to any positive non-zero amount.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>DISK_READ_ONLY</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Indicates if the disk should be write protected or not.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..68ae2c28e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Mass Storage Device Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.mass_storage.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.mass_storage"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="Mass Storage Device Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.mass_storage.example.xmega">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.mass_storage"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.xmega"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atxmega128a1u"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="32000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="48000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.mass_storage" caption="Mass Storage Device Demo (Low Level APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Mass Storage device demo, implementing a basic USB storage disk using a Dataflash memory IC. This demo uses the Low Level LUFA APIs to manually implement a USB Class for demonstration purposes without using the simpler in-built LUFA Class Driver APIs.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="Mass Storage Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="MassStorage.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="MassStorage.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/DataflashManager.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/SCSI.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="MassStorage.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/DataflashManager.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/SCSI.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.dataflash"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9629ccb8a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mass Storage Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c757bb0fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/MassStorage/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = MassStorage
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c Lib/DataflashManager.c Lib/SCSI.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c6542445d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_RC32MCLKSRC | USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH)
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX               1
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c2064272b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,240 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MouseReport[] =
+{
+	HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x01), /* Generic Desktop */
+	HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x02), /* Mouse */
+	HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x01), /* Application */
+		HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x01), /* Pointer */
+		HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x00), /* Physical */
+			HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x09), /* Button */
+			HID_RI_USAGE_MINIMUM(8, 0x01),
+			HID_RI_USAGE_MAXIMUM(8, 0x03),
+			HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0x00),
+			HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 0x01),
+			HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x03),
+			HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x01),
+			HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE),
+			HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x01),
+			HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x05),
+			HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_CONSTANT),
+			HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x01), /* Generic Desktop */
+			HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x30), /* Usage X */
+			HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x31), /* Usage Y */
+			HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, -1),
+			HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 1),
+			HID_RI_PHYSICAL_MINIMUM(8, -1),
+			HID_RI_PHYSICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 1),
+			HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x02),
+			HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x08),
+			HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_RELATIVE),
+		HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0),
+	HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0),
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2041,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.HID_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_Mouse,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = HID_CSCP_HIDClass,
+			.SubClass               = HID_CSCP_BootSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = HID_CSCP_MouseBootProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_MouseHID =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = HID_DTYPE_HID},
+
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(1,1,1),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = HID_DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(MouseReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = MOUSE_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MOUSE_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Mouse Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_HID:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_MouseHID;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t);
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_Report:
+			Address = &MouseReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(MouseReport);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..40646b104
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define MOUSE_EPADDR              (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 1)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define MOUSE_EPSIZE              8
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// Mouse HID Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t              HID_MouseHID;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_Mouse = 0, /**< Mouse interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Mouse.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Mouse.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..638e5f351
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Mouse.c
@@ -0,0 +1,311 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the Mouse demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "Mouse.h"
+
+/** Indicates what report mode the host has requested, true for normal HID reporting mode, \c false for special boot
+ *  protocol reporting mode.
+ */
+static bool UsingReportProtocol = true;
+
+/** Current Idle period. This is set by the host via a Set Idle HID class request to silence the device's reports
+ *  for either the entire idle duration, or until the report status changes (e.g. the user moves the mouse).
+ */
+static uint16_t IdleCount = 0;
+
+/** Current Idle period remaining. When the IdleCount value is set, this tracks the remaining number of idle
+ *  milliseconds. This is separate to the IdleCount timer and is incremented and compared as the host may request
+ *  the current idle period via a Get Idle HID class request, thus its value must be preserved.
+ */
+static uint16_t IdleMSRemaining = 0;
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		Mouse_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+	/* Start the PLL to multiply the 2MHz RC oscillator to 32MHz and switch the CPU core to run from it */
+	XMEGACLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ, 2000000, F_CPU);
+	XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL);
+
+	/* Start the 32MHz internal RC oscillator and start the DFLL to increase it to 48MHz using the USB SOF as a reference */
+	XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);
+	XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF, F_USB);
+
+	PMIC.CTRL = PMIC_LOLVLEN_bm | PMIC_MEDLVLEN_bm | PMIC_HILVLEN_bm;
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	/* Default to report protocol on connect */
+	UsingReportProtocol = true;
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs and stops the USB management and Mouse reporting tasks.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration
+ *  of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the mouse reporting task started.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	/* Setup HID Report Endpoint */
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MOUSE_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, MOUSE_EPSIZE, 1);
+
+	/* Turn on Start-of-Frame events for tracking HID report period expiry */
+	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
+
+	/* Indicate endpoint configuration success or failure */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to
+ *  the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing
+ *  internally.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	/* Handle HID Class specific requests */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case HID_REQ_GetReport:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReportData;
+
+				/* Create the next mouse report for transmission to the host */
+				CreateMouseReport(&MouseReportData);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Write the report data to the control endpoint */
+				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&MouseReportData, sizeof(MouseReportData));
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+				/* Clear the report data afterwards */
+				memset(&MouseReportData, 0, sizeof(MouseReportData));
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_REQ_GetProtocol:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Write the current protocol flag to the host */
+				Endpoint_Write_8(UsingReportProtocol);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_REQ_SetProtocol:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+
+				/* Set or clear the flag depending on what the host indicates that the current Protocol should be */
+				UsingReportProtocol = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue != 0);
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_REQ_SetIdle:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+
+				/* Get idle period in MSB, must multiply by 4 to get the duration in milliseconds */
+				IdleCount = ((USB_ControlRequest.wValue & 0xFF00) >> 6);
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_REQ_GetIdle:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Write the current idle duration to the host, must be divided by 4 before sent to host */
+				Endpoint_Write_8(IdleCount >> 2);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
+{
+	/* One millisecond has elapsed, decrement the idle time remaining counter if it has not already elapsed */
+	if (IdleMSRemaining)
+	  IdleMSRemaining--;
+}
+
+/** Fills the given HID report data structure with the next HID report to send to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[out] ReportData  Pointer to a HID report data structure to be filled
+ */
+void CreateMouseReport(USB_MouseReport_Data_t* const ReportData)
+{
+	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL    = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus();
+
+	/* Clear the report contents */
+	memset(ReportData, 0, sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t));
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  ReportData->Y = -1;
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  ReportData->Y =  1;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  ReportData->X = -1;
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  ReportData->X =  1;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+	  ReportData->Button |= (1 << 0);
+
+	if (ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
+	  ReportData->Button |= (1 << 1);
+}
+
+/** Sends the next HID report to the host, via the keyboard data endpoint. */
+void SendNextReport(void)
+{
+	static USB_MouseReport_Data_t PrevMouseReportData;
+	USB_MouseReport_Data_t        MouseReportData;
+	bool                          SendReport;
+
+	/* Create the next mouse report for transmission to the host */
+	CreateMouseReport(&MouseReportData);
+
+	/* Check to see if the report data has changed - if so a report MUST be sent */
+	SendReport = (memcmp(&PrevMouseReportData, &MouseReportData, sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t)) != 0);
+
+	/* Override the check if the Y or X values are non-zero - we want continuous movement while the joystick
+	 * is being held down (via continuous reports), otherwise the cursor will only move once per joystick toggle */
+	if ((MouseReportData.Y != 0) || (MouseReportData.X != 0))
+	  SendReport = true;
+
+	/* Check if the idle period is set and has elapsed */
+	if (IdleCount && (!(IdleMSRemaining)))
+	{
+		/* Reset the idle time remaining counter */
+		IdleMSRemaining = IdleCount;
+
+		/* Idle period is set and has elapsed, must send a report to the host */
+		SendReport = true;
+	}
+
+	/* Select the Mouse Report Endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MOUSE_EPADDR);
+
+	/* Check if Mouse Endpoint Ready for Read/Write and if we should send a new report */
+	if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed() && SendReport)
+	{
+		/* Save the current report data for later comparison to check for changes */
+		PrevMouseReportData = MouseReportData;
+
+		/* Write Mouse Report Data */
+		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&MouseReportData, sizeof(MouseReportData), NULL);
+
+		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Task to manage HID report generation and transmission to the host, when in report mode. */
+void Mouse_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Send the next mouse report to the host */
+	SendNextReport();
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Mouse.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Mouse.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ee330feb7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Mouse.h
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Mouse.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MOUSE_H_
+#define _MOUSE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void Mouse_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+
+		void CreateMouseReport(USB_MouseReport_Data_t* const ReportData);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Mouse.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Mouse.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7f1c38430
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/Mouse.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Mouse Device Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *  \li Series AU XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxAxU)
+ *  \li Series B XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxBxU)
+ *  \li Series C XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxCxU)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Mouse demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Mouse using the basic USB HID
+ *  drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers required). It is
+ *  boot protocol compatible, and thus works under compatible BIOS as if
+ *  it was a native mouse (e.g. PS/2).
+ *
+ *  On start-up the system will automatically enumerate and function
+ *  as a mouse when the USB connection to a host is present. To use
+ *  the mouse, move the joystick to move the pointer, and push the
+ *  joystick inwards to simulate a left-button click. The HWB serves as
+ *  the right mouse button.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ac21d0771
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Mouse HID Device Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.mouse.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.mouse"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="Mouse HID Device Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.mouse.example.xmega">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.mouse"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.xmega"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atxmega128a1u"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="32000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="48000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.mouse" caption="Mouse HID Device Demo (Low Level APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Mouse device demo, implementing a basic USB mouse device that can send movement information to the host. This demo uses the Low Level LUFA APIs to manually implement a USB Class for demonstration purposes without using the simpler in-built LUFA Class Driver APIs.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="Mouse.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="Mouse.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Mouse.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..150171c06
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mouse Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7230c176f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/Mouse/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = Mouse
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..92a4f818e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
+ *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
+ *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
+ *  makefile or build system.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#define CLIENT_IP_ADDRESS                { 10,     0,    0,    1}
+	#define SERVER_IP_ADDRESS                { 10,     0,    0,    2}
+
+	#define ADAPTER_MAC_ADDRESS              {0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00}
+	#define SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS               {0x00, 0x01, 0x00, 0x01, 0x00, 0x01}
+
+	#define NO_DECODE_ETHERNET
+	#define NO_DECODE_ARP
+	#define NO_DECODE_IP
+	#define NO_DECODE_ICMP
+	#define NO_DECODE_TCP
+	#define NO_DECODE_UDP
+	#define NO_DECODE_DHCP
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fa0397910
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_RC32MCLKSRC | USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH)
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX               3
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cab6717f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,244 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+	.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x204C,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_VendorSpecificProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Header =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.CDCSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_ACM =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM,
+
+			.Capabilities           = 0x00,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Union =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union,
+
+			.MasterInterfaceNumber  = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.SlaveInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_NotificationEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.RNDIS_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.RNDIS_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA RNDIS CDC Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fb345e8f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 1)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 2)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                64
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// RNDIS CDC Control Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t CDC_Functional_Header;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t    CDC_Functional_ACM;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t  CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             CDC_NotificationEndpoint;
+
+			// RNDIS CDC Data Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             RNDIS_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             RNDIS_DataInEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI = 0, /**< CDC CCI interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI = 1, /**< CDC DCI interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/LUFA RNDIS.inf b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/LUFA RNDIS.inf
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f34e55f99
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/LUFA RNDIS.inf
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+;     Windows LUFA RNDIS Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+
+[DefaultInstall]
+CopyINF="LUFA RNDIS.inf"
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Net
+ClassGuid={4d36e972-e325-11ce-bfc1-08002be10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+DriverVer=7/1/2012,10.0.0.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTx86, NTamd64, NTia64
+
+[ControlFlags]
+ExcludeFromSelect=*
+
+[DriverInstall]
+Characteristics=0x84 ; NCF_PHYSICAL + NCF_HAS_UI
+BusType=15
+include=netrndis.inf
+needs=Usb_Rndis.ndi
+AddReg=Rndis_AddReg_Vista
+
+[DriverInstall.Services]
+include=netrndis.inf
+needs=Usb_Rndis.ndi.Services
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C
+
+[DeviceList.NTx86]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C
+
+[DeviceList.NTia64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org"
+DESCRIPTION="LUFA USB RNDIS Demo"
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..99f3487b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.c
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles the
+ *  conversion of physical MAC addresses to protocol IP addresses between the host and the
+ *  device.
+ */
+
+#include "ARP.h"
+
+/** Processes an ARP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ *  to the output Ethernet frame if the host is requesting the IP or MAC address of the
+ *  virtual server device on the network.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's ARP header
+ *  \param[out] OutDataStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's ARP header
+ *
+ *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
+ */
+int16_t ARP_ProcessARPPacket(void* InDataStart,
+                             void* OutDataStart)
+{
+	DecodeARPHeader(InDataStart);
+
+	ARP_Header_t* ARPHeaderIN  = (ARP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+	ARP_Header_t* ARPHeaderOUT = (ARP_Header_t*)OutDataStart;
+
+	/* Ensure that the ARP request is a IPv4 request packet */
+	if ((SwapEndian_16(ARPHeaderIN->ProtocolType) == ETHERTYPE_IPV4) &&
+	    (SwapEndian_16(ARPHeaderIN->Operation) == ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST))
+	{
+		/* If the ARP packet is requesting the MAC or IP of the virtual webserver, return the response */
+		if (IP_COMPARE(&ARPHeaderIN->TPA, &ServerIPAddress) ||
+		    MAC_COMPARE(&ARPHeaderIN->THA, &ServerMACAddress))
+		{
+			/* Fill out the ARP response header */
+			ARPHeaderOUT->HardwareType = ARPHeaderIN->HardwareType;
+			ARPHeaderOUT->ProtocolType = ARPHeaderIN->ProtocolType;
+			ARPHeaderOUT->HLEN         = ARPHeaderIN->HLEN;
+			ARPHeaderOUT->PLEN         = ARPHeaderIN->PLEN;
+			ARPHeaderOUT->Operation    = SwapEndian_16(ARP_OPERATION_REPLY);
+
+			/* Copy over the sender MAC/IP to the target fields for the response */
+			ARPHeaderOUT->THA = ARPHeaderIN->SHA;
+			ARPHeaderOUT->TPA = ARPHeaderIN->SPA;
+
+			/* Copy over the new sender MAC/IP - MAC and IP addresses of the virtual webserver */
+			ARPHeaderOUT->SHA = ServerMACAddress;
+			ARPHeaderOUT->SPA = ServerIPAddress;
+
+			/* Return the size of the response so far */
+			return sizeof(ARP_Header_t);
+		}
+	}
+
+	return NO_RESPONSE;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..95a8f84b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.h
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ARP.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ARP_H_
+#define _ARP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** ARP header operation constant, indicating a request from a host for an address translation. */
+		#define ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST            1
+
+		/** ARP header operation constant, indicating a reply from a host giving an address translation. */
+		#define ARP_OPERATION_REPLY              2
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for an ARP packet inside an Ethernet frame. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t      HardwareType; /**< Hardware type constant, indicating the hardware used */
+			uint16_t      ProtocolType; /**< Protocol being resolved, usually ETHERTYPE_IPV4 */
+
+			uint8_t       HLEN; /**< Length in bytes of the source/destination hardware addresses */
+			uint8_t       PLEN; /**< Length in bytes of the source/destination protocol addresses */
+			uint16_t      Operation; /**< Type of operation, either ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST or ARP_OPERATION_REPLY */
+
+			MAC_Address_t SHA; /**< Sender's hardware address */
+			IP_Address_t  SPA; /**< Sender's protocol address */
+			MAC_Address_t THA; /**< Target's hardware address */
+			IP_Address_t  TPA; /**< Target's protocol address */
+		} ARP_Header_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		int16_t ARP_ProcessARPPacket(void* InDataStart,
+		                             void* OutDataStart);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3af972648
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.c
@@ -0,0 +1,121 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) packet handling routines. This protocol
+ *  handles the automatic IP negotiation to the host, so that the host will use the provided
+ *  IP address given to it by the device.
+ */
+
+#include "DHCP.h"
+
+/** Processes a DHCP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ *  to the output Ethernet frame if the host is requesting or accepting an IP address.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] IPHeaderInStart      Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header
+ *  \param[in] DHCPHeaderInStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's DHCP header
+ *  \param[out] DHCPHeaderOutStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's DHCP header
+ *
+ *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
+ */
+int16_t DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart,
+                               void* DHCPHeaderInStart,
+                               void* DHCPHeaderOutStart)
+{
+	IP_Header_t*   IPHeaderIN    = (IP_Header_t*)IPHeaderInStart;
+	DHCP_Header_t* DHCPHeaderIN  = (DHCP_Header_t*)DHCPHeaderInStart;
+	DHCP_Header_t* DHCPHeaderOUT = (DHCP_Header_t*)DHCPHeaderOutStart;
+
+	uint8_t* DHCPOptionsINStart  = (uint8_t*)(DHCPHeaderInStart  + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
+	uint8_t* DHCPOptionsOUTStart = (uint8_t*)(DHCPHeaderOutStart + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
+
+	DecodeDHCPHeader(DHCPHeaderInStart);
+
+	/* Zero out the response DHCP packet, as much of it is legacy and left at 0 */
+	memset(DHCPHeaderOUT, 0, sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
+
+	/* Fill out the response DHCP packet */
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->HardwareType          = DHCPHeaderIN->HardwareType;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->Operation             = DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->HardwareAddressLength = DHCPHeaderIN->HardwareAddressLength;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->Hops                  = 0;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->TransactionID         = DHCPHeaderIN->TransactionID;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->ElapsedSeconds        = 0;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->Flags                 = DHCPHeaderIN->Flags;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->YourIP                = ClientIPAddress;
+	memmove(&DHCPHeaderOUT->ClientHardwareAddress, &DHCPHeaderIN->ClientHardwareAddress, sizeof(MAC_Address_t));
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->Cookie                = SwapEndian_32(DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE);
+
+	/* Alter the incoming IP packet header so that the corrected IP source and destinations are used - this means that
+	   when the response IP header is generated, it will use the corrected addresses and not the null/broatcast addresses */
+	IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress      = ClientIPAddress;
+	IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress = ServerIPAddress;
+
+	/* Process the incoming DHCP packet options */
+	while (DHCPOptionsINStart[0] != DHCP_OPTION_END)
+	{
+		/* Find the Message Type DHCP option, to determine the type of DHCP packet */
+		if (DHCPOptionsINStart[0] == DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE)
+		{
+			if ((DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER) || (DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST))
+			{
+				/* Fill out the response DHCP packet options for a DHCP OFFER or ACK response */
+
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 1;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = (DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER) ? DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_OFFER
+																								: DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_ACK;
+
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_SUBNETMASK;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 4;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0x00;
+
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_DHCPSERVER;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = sizeof(IP_Address_t);
+				memcpy(DHCPOptionsOUTStart, &ServerIPAddress, sizeof(IP_Address_t));
+				DHCPOptionsOUTStart     += sizeof(IP_Address_t);
+
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_END;
+
+				return (sizeof(DHCP_Header_t) + 12 + sizeof(IP_Address_t));
+			}
+		}
+
+		/* Go to the next DHCP option - skip one byte if option is a padding byte, else skip the complete option's size */
+		DHCPOptionsINStart += ((DHCPOptionsINStart[0] == DHCP_OPTION_PAD) ? 1 : (DHCPOptionsINStart[1] + 2));
+	}
+
+	return NO_RESPONSE;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2d57397de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.h
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DHCP.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DHCP_H_
+#define _DHCP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** DHCP operation constant, indicating a request from a host to a DHCP server. */
+		#define DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST       0x01
+
+		/** DHCP operation constant, indicating a reply from a DHCP server to a host. */
+		#define DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY         0x02
+
+		/** Hardware type constant, indicating Ethernet as a carrier. */
+		#define DHCP_HTYPE_ETHERNET       0x01
+
+		/** Magic boot protocol "cookie", inserted into all BOOTP packets (BOOTP is the carrier of DHCP). */
+		#define DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE         0x63825363
+
+		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that a subnet mask will follow. */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_SUBNETMASK    1
+
+		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that the DHCP message type constant will follow. */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE   53
+
+		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that the IP address of the DHCP server will follow. */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_DHCPSERVER    54
+
+		/** DHCP option list entry header, used to pad out option data. */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_PAD           0
+
+		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating the end of option data. */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_END           255
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, requesting that a DHCP server offer an IP address. */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER 1
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, indicating that a DHCP server is offering an IP address. */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_OFFER    2
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, requesting that a DHCP server lease a given IP address. */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST  3
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, declining an offered DHCP server IP address lease. */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DECLINE  4
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, ACKing a host IP lease request. */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_ACK      5
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, NACKing a host IP lease request. */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_NACK     6
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, indicating that a host is releasing a leased IP address. */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_RELEASE  7
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a DHCP packet inside an Ethernet frame. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  Operation; /**< DHCP operation, either DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST or DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY */
+			uint8_t  HardwareType; /**< Hardware carrier type constant */
+			uint8_t  HardwareAddressLength;  /**< Length in bytes of a hardware (MAC) address on the network */
+			uint8_t  Hops; /**< Number of hops required to reach the server, unused */
+
+			uint32_t TransactionID; /**< Unique ID of the DHCP packet, for positive matching between sent and received packets */
+
+			uint16_t ElapsedSeconds; /**< Elapsed seconds since the request was made */
+			uint16_t Flags; /**< BOOTP packet flags */
+
+			IP_Address_t ClientIP; /**< Client IP address, if already leased an IP */
+			IP_Address_t YourIP; /**< Client IP address */
+			IP_Address_t NextServerIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+			IP_Address_t RelayAgentIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+
+			uint8_t ClientHardwareAddress[16]; /**< Hardware (MAC) address of the client making a request to the DHCP server */
+			uint8_t ServerHostnameString[64]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+			uint8_t BootFileName[128]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+
+			uint32_t Cookie; /**< Magic BOOTP protocol cookie to indicate a valid packet */
+		} DHCP_Header_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		int16_t DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart,
+		                               void* DHCPHeaderInStart,
+		                               void* DHCPHeaderOutStart);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..483e8bb27
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.c
@@ -0,0 +1,136 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Ethernet frame packet handling routines. This protocol handles the processing of raw Ethernet
+ *  frames sent and received, deferring the processing of sub-packet protocols to the appropriate
+ *  protocol handlers, such as DHCP or ARP.
+ */
+
+#include "Ethernet.h"
+
+/** Ethernet Frame buffer structure, to hold the incoming Ethernet frame from the host. */
+Ethernet_Frame_Info_t FrameIN;
+
+/** Ethernet Frame buffer structure, to hold the outgoing Ethernet frame to the host. */
+Ethernet_Frame_Info_t FrameOUT;
+
+/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a MAC address to the virtual server MAC address. */
+const MAC_Address_t ServerMACAddress    = {SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS};
+
+/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting an IP address to the virtual server IP address. */
+const IP_Address_t  ServerIPAddress     = {SERVER_IP_ADDRESS};
+
+/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a MAC address to the broadcast MAC address. */
+const MAC_Address_t BroadcastMACAddress = {BROADCAST_MAC_ADDRESS};
+
+/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a IP address to the broadcast IP address. */
+const IP_Address_t  BroadcastIPAddress  = {BROADCAST_IP_ADDRESS};
+
+/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting an IP address to the client (host) IP address. */
+const IP_Address_t  ClientIPAddress     = {CLIENT_IP_ADDRESS};
+
+
+/** Processes an incoming Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response to the output Ethernet
+ *  frame buffer if the sub protocol handlers create a valid response.
+ */
+void Ethernet_ProcessPacket(void)
+{
+	DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(FrameIN.FrameData);
+
+	/* Cast the incoming Ethernet frame to the Ethernet header type */
+	Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameINHeader  = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameIN.FrameData;
+	Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameOUTHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameOUT.FrameData;
+
+	int16_t                  RetSize        = NO_RESPONSE;
+
+	/* Ensure frame is addressed to either all (broadcast) or the virtual webserver, and is a type II frame */
+	if ((MAC_COMPARE(&FrameINHeader->Destination, &ServerMACAddress) ||
+	     MAC_COMPARE(&FrameINHeader->Destination, &BroadcastMACAddress)) &&
+		(SwapEndian_16(FrameIN.FrameLength) > ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE))
+	{
+		/* Process the packet depending on its protocol */
+		switch (SwapEndian_16(FrameINHeader->EtherType))
+		{
+			case ETHERTYPE_ARP:
+				RetSize = ARP_ProcessARPPacket(&FrameIN.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)],
+				                               &FrameOUT.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)]);
+				break;
+			case ETHERTYPE_IPV4:
+				RetSize = IP_ProcessIPPacket(&FrameIN.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)],
+				                             &FrameOUT.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)]);
+				break;
+		}
+
+		/* Protocol processing routine has filled a response, complete the ethernet frame header */
+		if (RetSize > 0)
+		{
+			/* Fill out the response Ethernet frame header */
+			FrameOUTHeader->Source          = ServerMACAddress;
+			FrameOUTHeader->Destination     = FrameINHeader->Source;
+			FrameOUTHeader->EtherType       = FrameINHeader->EtherType;
+
+			/* Set the response length in the buffer and indicate that a response is ready to be sent */
+			FrameOUT.FrameLength            = (sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) + RetSize);
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Check if the packet was processed */
+	if (RetSize != NO_PROCESS)
+	{
+		/* Clear the frame buffer */
+		FrameIN.FrameLength = 0;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Calculates the appropriate ethernet checksum, consisting of the addition of the one's
+ *  compliment of each word, complimented.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Data   Pointer to the packet buffer data whose checksum must be calculated
+ *  \param[in] Bytes  Number of bytes in the data buffer to process
+ *
+ *  \return A 16-bit Ethernet checksum value
+ */
+uint16_t Ethernet_Checksum16(void* Data,
+                             uint16_t Bytes)
+{
+	uint16_t* Words    = (uint16_t*)Data;
+	uint32_t  Checksum = 0;
+
+	for (uint16_t CurrWord = 0; CurrWord < (Bytes >> 1); CurrWord++)
+	  Checksum += Words[CurrWord];
+
+	while (Checksum & 0xFFFF0000)
+	  Checksum = ((Checksum & 0xFFFF) + (Checksum >> 16));
+
+	return ~Checksum;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..93d5c4771
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.h
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Ethernet.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ETHERNET_H_
+#define _ETHERNET_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+		#include "ICMP.h"
+		#include "TCP.h"
+		#include "UDP.h"
+		#include "DHCP.h"
+		#include "ARP.h"
+		#include "IP.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Physical MAC address of the network broadcast address. */
+		#define BROADCAST_MAC_ADDRESS            {0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF}
+
+		/** Performs a comparison between two MAC addresses, indicating if they are identical.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] MAC1  First MAC address
+		 *  \param[in] MAC2  Second MAC address
+		 *
+		 *  \return True if the addresses match, \c false otherwise
+		 */
+		#define MAC_COMPARE(MAC1, MAC2)          (memcmp(MAC1, MAC2, sizeof(MAC_Address_t)) == 0)
+
+		/** Maximum size of an incoming or outgoing Ethernet frame in bytes. */
+		#define ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX          1500
+
+		/** Minimum size of an Ethernet packet in bytes, to conform to the Ethernet V2 packet standard. */
+		#define ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE            0x0600
+
+		/** Return value for all sub protocol handling routines, indicating that no response packet has been generated. */
+		#define NO_RESPONSE                      0
+
+		/** Return value for all sub protocol handling routines, indicating that the packet has not yet been handled. */
+		#define NO_PROCESS                       -1
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for an Ethernet frame buffer data and information structure. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  FrameData[ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX]; /**< Ethernet frame contents. */
+			uint16_t FrameLength; /**< Length in bytes of the Ethernet frame stored in the buffer. */
+		} Ethernet_Frame_Info_t;
+
+		/** Type define for an Ethernet frame header. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			MAC_Address_t Destination; /**< Physical MAC address of the packet recipient */
+			MAC_Address_t Source; /**< Physics MAC address of the packet source */
+			uint16_t      EtherType; /**< Ethernet packet sub-protocol type, for Ethernet V2 packets */
+		} Ethernet_Frame_Header_t;
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern Ethernet_Frame_Info_t FrameIN;
+		extern Ethernet_Frame_Info_t FrameOUT;
+
+		extern const MAC_Address_t ServerMACAddress;
+		extern const IP_Address_t  ServerIPAddress;
+		extern const MAC_Address_t BroadcastMACAddress;
+		extern const IP_Address_t  BroadcastIPAddress;
+		extern const IP_Address_t  ClientIPAddress;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void     Ethernet_ProcessPacket(void);
+		uint16_t Ethernet_Checksum16(void* Data,
+		                             uint16_t Bytes);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/EthernetProtocols.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/EthernetProtocols.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bec6705ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/EthernetProtocols.h
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  General Ethernet protocol constants and type defines, for use by
+ *  all network protocol portions of the TCP/IP stack.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ETHERNET_PROTOCOLS_H_
+#define _ETHERNET_PROTOCOLS_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define ETHERTYPE_IPV4                   0x0800
+		#define ETHERTYPE_ARP                    0x0806
+		#define ETHERTYPE_RARP                   0x8035
+		#define ETHERTYPE_APPLETALK              0x809b
+		#define ETHERTYPE_APPLETALKARP           0x80f3
+		#define ETHERTYPE_IEEE8021Q              0x8100
+		#define ETHERTYPE_NOVELLIPX              0x8137
+		#define ETHERTYPE_NOVELL                 0x8138
+		#define ETHERTYPE_IPV6                   0x86DD
+		#define ETHERTYPE_COBRANET               0x8819
+		#define ETHERTYPE_PROVIDERBRIDGING       0x88a8
+		#define ETHERTYPE_MPLSUNICAST            0x8847
+		#define ETHERTYPE_MPLSMULTICAST          0x8848
+		#define ETHERTYPE_PPPoEDISCOVERY         0x8863
+		#define ETHERTYPE_PPPoESESSION           0x8864
+		#define ETHERTYPE_EAPOVERLAN             0x888E
+		#define ETHERTYPE_HYPERSCSI              0x889A
+		#define ETHERTYPE_ATAOVERETHERNET        0x88A2
+		#define ETHERTYPE_ETHERCAT               0x88A4
+		#define ETHERTYPE_SERCOSIII              0x88CD
+		#define ETHERTYPE_CESoE                  0x88D8
+		#define ETHERTYPE_MACSECURITY            0x88E5
+		#define ETHERTYPE_FIBRECHANNEL           0x8906
+		#define ETHERTYPE_QINQ                   0x9100
+		#define ETHERTYPE_VLLT                   0xCAFE
+
+		#define PROTOCOL_ICMP                    1
+		#define PROTOCOL_IGMP                    2
+		#define PROTOCOL_TCP                     6
+		#define PROTOCOL_UDP                     17
+		#define PROTOCOL_OSPF                    89
+		#define PROTOCOL_SCTP                    132
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a physical MAC address of a device on a network. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t       Octets[6]; /**< Individual bytes of a MAC address */
+		} RNDIS_MAC_Address_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a protocol IP address of a device on a network. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t       Octets[4]; /**< Individual bytes of an IP address */
+		} IP_Address_t;
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..90eae2c95
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.c
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles
+ *  Echo requests from the host, to indicate a successful network connection between the host
+ *  and the virtual server.
+ */
+
+#include "ICMP.h"
+
+/** Processes an ICMP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ *  to the output Ethernet frame if the host is issuing a ICMP ECHO request.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's ICMP header
+ *  \param[out] OutDataStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's ICMP header
+ *
+ *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
+ */
+int16_t ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(void* InDataStart,
+                               void* OutDataStart)
+{
+	ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeaderIN  = (ICMP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+	ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeaderOUT = (ICMP_Header_t*)OutDataStart;
+
+	DecodeICMPHeader(InDataStart);
+
+	/* Determine if the ICMP packet is an echo request (ping) */
+	if (ICMPHeaderIN->Type == ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREQUEST)
+	{
+		/* Fill out the ICMP response packet */
+		ICMPHeaderOUT->Type     = ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREPLY;
+		ICMPHeaderOUT->Code     = 0;
+		ICMPHeaderOUT->Checksum = 0;
+		ICMPHeaderOUT->Id       = ICMPHeaderIN->Id;
+		ICMPHeaderOUT->Sequence = ICMPHeaderIN->Sequence;
+
+		intptr_t DataSize = FrameIN.FrameLength - ((((intptr_t)InDataStart + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)) - (intptr_t)FrameIN.FrameData));
+
+		/* Copy the remaining payload to the response - echo requests should echo back any sent data */
+		memmove(&((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)],
+		        &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)],
+			    DataSize);
+
+		ICMPHeaderOUT->Checksum = Ethernet_Checksum16(ICMPHeaderOUT, (DataSize + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)));
+
+		/* Return the size of the response so far */
+		return (DataSize + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t));
+	}
+
+	return NO_RESPONSE;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..20322ad98
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ICMP.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ICMP_H_
+#define _ICMP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP ECHO Reply message. */
+		#define ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREPLY              0
+
+		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating a packet destination is unreachable. */
+		#define ICMP_TYPE_DESTINATIONUNREACHABLE 3
+
+		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Source Quench message. */
+		#define ICMP_TYPE_SOURCEQUENCH           4
+
+		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Redirect message. */
+		#define ICMP_TYPE_REDIRECTMESSAGE        5
+
+		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP ECHO Request message. */
+		#define ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREQUEST            8
+
+		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Time Exceeded message. */
+		#define ICMP_TYPE_TIMEEXCEEDED           11
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for an ICMP message header. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t       Type; /**< ICMP message type, an \c ICMP_TYPE_* constant */
+			uint8_t       Code; /**< ICMP message code, indicating the message value */
+			uint16_t      Checksum; /**< Ethernet checksum of the ICMP message */
+			uint16_t      Id; /**< Id of the ICMP message */
+			uint16_t      Sequence; /**< Sequence number of the ICMP message, to link together message responses */
+		} ICMP_Header_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		int16_t ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(void* InDataStart,
+		                               void* OutDataStart);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..16f97d057
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.c
@@ -0,0 +1,113 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Internet Protocol (IP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles IP packets from the
+ *  host which typically encapsulate other protocols such as ICMP, UDP and TCP.
+ */
+
+#include "IP.h"
+
+/** Processes an IP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ *  to the output Ethernet frame if one is created by a sub-protocol handler.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header
+ *  \param[out] OutDataStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's IP header
+ *
+ *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE if no
+ *           response was generated, NO_PROCESS if the packet processing was deferred until the
+ *           next Ethernet packet handler iteration
+ */
+int16_t IP_ProcessIPPacket(void* InDataStart,
+                           void* OutDataStart)
+{
+	DecodeIPHeader(InDataStart);
+
+	IP_Header_t* IPHeaderIN  = (IP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+	IP_Header_t* IPHeaderOUT = (IP_Header_t*)OutDataStart;
+
+	/* Header length is specified in number of longs in the packet header, convert to bytes */
+	uint16_t HeaderLengthBytes = (IPHeaderIN->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t));
+
+	int16_t  RetSize = NO_RESPONSE;
+
+	/* Check to ensure the IP packet is addressed to the virtual webserver's IP or the broadcast IP address */
+	if (!(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress, &ServerIPAddress)) &&
+	    !(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress, &BroadcastIPAddress)))
+	{
+		return NO_RESPONSE;
+	}
+
+	/* Pass off the IP payload to the appropriate protocol processing routine */
+	switch (IPHeaderIN->Protocol)
+	{
+		case PROTOCOL_ICMP:
+			RetSize = ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(&((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes],
+			                                 &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]);
+			break;
+		case PROTOCOL_TCP:
+			RetSize = TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(InDataStart,
+			                               &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes],
+			                               &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]);
+			break;
+		case PROTOCOL_UDP:
+			RetSize = UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(InDataStart,
+			                               &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes],
+			                               &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	/* Check to see if the protocol processing routine has filled out a response */
+	if (RetSize > 0)
+	{
+		/* Fill out the response IP packet header */
+		IPHeaderOUT->TotalLength        = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(IP_Header_t) + RetSize);
+		IPHeaderOUT->TypeOfService      = 0;
+		IPHeaderOUT->HeaderLength       = (sizeof(IP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
+		IPHeaderOUT->Version            = 4;
+		IPHeaderOUT->Flags              = 0;
+		IPHeaderOUT->FragmentOffset     = 0;
+		IPHeaderOUT->Identification     = 0;
+		IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = 0;
+		IPHeaderOUT->Protocol           = IPHeaderIN->Protocol;
+		IPHeaderOUT->TTL                = DEFAULT_TTL;
+		IPHeaderOUT->SourceAddress      = IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress;
+		IPHeaderOUT->DestinationAddress = IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress;
+
+		IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = Ethernet_Checksum16(IPHeaderOUT, sizeof(IP_Header_t));
+
+		/* Return the size of the response so far */
+		return (sizeof(IP_Header_t) + RetSize);
+	}
+
+	return RetSize;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d67e1785b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.h
@@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for IP.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _IP_H_
+#define _IP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Protocol IP address of the broadcast address. */
+		#define BROADCAST_IP_ADDRESS             {0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF}
+
+		/** Default Time To Live (TTL) value for sent packets, indicating the maximum allowable hops until their destination
+		 *  is reached.
+		 */
+		#define DEFAULT_TTL                      128
+
+		/** Performs a comparison between two IP addresses, indicating if they are identical.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] IP1  First IP address
+		 *  \param[in] IP2  Second IP address
+		 *
+		 *  \return True if the addresses match, \c false otherwise
+		 */
+		#define IP_COMPARE(IP1, IP2)             (memcmp(IP1, IP2, sizeof(IP_Address_t)) == 0)
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define of an IP packet header. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			unsigned     HeaderLength   : 4; /**< Total length of the packet header, in 4-byte blocks */
+			unsigned     Version        : 4; /**< IP protocol version */
+			uint8_t      TypeOfService; /**< Special service type identifier, indicating delay/throughput/reliability levels */
+			uint16_t     TotalLength; /**< Total length of the IP packet, in bytes */
+
+			uint16_t     Identification; /**< Identification value for identifying fragmented packets */
+			unsigned     FragmentOffset : 13; /**< Offset of this IP fragment */
+			unsigned     Flags          : 3; /**< Fragment flags, to indicate if a packet is fragmented */
+
+			uint8_t      TTL; /**< Maximum allowable number of hops to reach the packet destination */
+			uint8_t      Protocol; /**< Encapsulated protocol type */
+			uint16_t     HeaderChecksum; /**< Ethernet checksum of the IP header */
+
+			IP_Address_t SourceAddress; /**< Source protocol IP address of the packet */
+			IP_Address_t DestinationAddress; /**< Destination protocol IP address of the packet */
+		} IP_Header_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		int16_t IP_ProcessIPPacket(void* InDataStart,
+		                           void* OutDataStart);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b297ea76f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.c
@@ -0,0 +1,276 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/* Protocol decoders for Ethernet, TCP, IP, ICMP and ARP. Each of these routines
+   accepts a header to the appropriate protocol and prints out pertinent information
+   on the packet through the serial port.
+
+   To disable printing of a specific protocol, define the token NO_DECODE_{Protocol}
+   in the project makefile, and pass it to the compiler using the -D switch.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Protocol decoding routines, for the plain-text decoding of Ethernet frames for debugging purposes.
+ *  Enabled protocol decoders will print incoming Ethernet frame contents through the USART in a human
+ *  readable format.
+ *
+ *  Note that the USART is a slow transmission medium, and will slow down packet processing considerably.
+ *  Packet decoding routines can be disabled by defining NO_DECODE_{Protocol Name} in the project makefile
+ *  and passing it to the compiler via the -D switch.
+ */
+
+#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+
+/** Decodes an Ethernet frame header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of an Ethernet frame header
+ */
+void DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_ETHERNET)
+	Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("\r\n"));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("  ETHERNET\r\n"));
+
+	if (!(MAC_COMPARE(&FrameHeader->Destination, &ServerMACAddress)) &&
+	    !(MAC_COMPARE(&FrameHeader->Destination, &BroadcastMACAddress)))
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR("  + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n"));
+		return;
+	}
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("  + MAC Source : %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), FrameHeader->Source.Octets[0],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[1],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[2],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[3],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[4],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[5]);
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("  + MAC Dest: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"),    FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[0],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[1],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[2],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[3],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[4],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[5]);
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("  + Protocol: 0x%04x\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(FrameHeader->EtherType));
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes an ARP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of an ARP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeARPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_ARP)
+	ARP_Header_t* ARPHeader = (ARP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("   \\\r\n    ARP\r\n"));
+
+	if (!(IP_COMPARE(&ARPHeader->TPA, &ServerIPAddress)) &&
+	    !(MAC_COMPARE(&ARPHeader->THA, &ServerMACAddress)))
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR("    + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n"));
+		return;
+	}
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + Protocol: %x\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->ProtocolType));
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + Operation: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->Operation));
+
+	if (SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->ProtocolType) == ETHERTYPE_IPV4)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR("    + SHA MAC: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[0],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[1],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[2],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[3],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[4],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[5]);
+
+		printf_P(PSTR("    + SPA IP: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[0],
+		                                                ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[1],
+		                                                ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[2],
+		                                                ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[3]);
+
+		printf_P(PSTR("    + THA MAC: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), ARPHeader->THA.Octets[0],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[1],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[2],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[3],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[4],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[5]);
+
+		printf_P(PSTR("    + TPA IP: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[0],
+		                                                ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[1],
+		                                                ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[2],
+		                                                ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[3]);
+	}
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes an IP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of an IP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeIPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_IP)
+	IP_Header_t* IPHeader  = (IP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+
+	uint16_t HeaderLengthBytes = (IPHeader->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("   \\\r\n    IP\r\n"));
+
+	if (!(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeader->DestinationAddress, &ServerIPAddress)))
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR("    + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n"));
+		return;
+	}
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + Header Length: %u Bytes\r\n"), HeaderLengthBytes);
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + Packet Version: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->Version);
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + Total Length: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(IPHeader->TotalLength));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + Protocol: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->Protocol);
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + TTL: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->TTL);
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + IP Src: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[0],
+	                                                IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[1],
+	                                                IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[2],
+	                                                IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[3]);
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + IP Dst: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[0],
+	                                                IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[1],
+	                                                IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[2],
+	                                                IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[3]);
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes an ICMP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of an ICMP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeICMPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_ICMP)
+	ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeader  = (ICMP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    \\\r\n     ICMP\r\n"));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Type: %u\r\n"), ICMPHeader->Type);
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Code: %u\r\n"), ICMPHeader->Code);
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes a TCP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of a TCP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeTCPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_TCP)
+	TCP_Header_t* TCPHeader  = (TCP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+
+	uint16_t               HeaderLengthBytes = (TCPHeader->DataOffset * sizeof(uint32_t));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    \\\r\n     TCP\r\n"));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Header Length: %u Bytes\r\n"), HeaderLengthBytes);
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Source Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(TCPHeader->SourcePort));
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Destination Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(TCPHeader->DestinationPort));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Sequence Number: %lu\r\n"), SwapEndian_32(TCPHeader->SequenceNumber));
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Acknowledgment Number: %lu\r\n"), SwapEndian_32(TCPHeader->AcknowledgmentNumber));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Flags: 0x%02X\r\n"), TCPHeader->Flags);
+
+	if (TCP_GetPortState(TCPHeader->DestinationPort) == TCP_Port_Closed)
+	  printf_P(PSTR("     + NOT LISTENING ON DESTINATION PORT\r\n"));
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes an UDP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of a UDP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeUDPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_UDP)
+	UDP_Header_t* UDPHeader = (UDP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    \\\r\n     UDP\r\n"));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Source Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->SourcePort));
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Destination Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->DestinationPort));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Data Length: %d\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->Length));
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes an DHCP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of a DHCP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeDHCPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_DHCP)
+	uint8_t* DHCPOptions = (InDataStart + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     \\\r\n      DHCP\r\n"));
+
+	while (DHCPOptions[0] != DHCP_OPTION_END)
+	{
+		if (DHCPOptions[0] == DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE)
+		{
+			switch (DHCPOptions[2])
+			{
+				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER:
+					printf_P(PSTR("      + DISCOVER\r\n"));
+					break;
+				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST:
+					printf_P(PSTR("      + REQUEST\r\n"));
+					break;
+				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_RELEASE:
+					printf_P(PSTR("      + RELEASE\r\n"));
+					break;
+				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DECLINE:
+					printf_P(PSTR("      + DECLINE\r\n"));
+					break;
+			}
+		}
+
+		DHCPOptions += ((DHCPOptions[0] == DHCP_OPTION_PAD) ? 1 : (DHCPOptions[1] + 2));
+	}
+	#endif
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6a7d20195
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.h
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ProtocolDecoders.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _PROTOCOL_DECODERS_H_
+#define _PROTOCOL_DECODERS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(void* InDataStart);
+		void DecodeARPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+		void DecodeIPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+		void DecodeICMPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+		void DecodeTCPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+		void DecodeUDPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+		void DecodeDHCPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/RNDIS.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/RNDIS.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..751f0d9ab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/RNDIS.c
@@ -0,0 +1,394 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  RNDIS command handler functions. This handles RNDIS commands according to
+ *  the Microsoft RNDIS specification, creating a USB Ethernet network adapter.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_C
+#include "RNDIS.h"
+
+/** Physical MAC address of the network adapter, which becomes the MAC address of the host for packets sent to the adapter. */
+static const MAC_Address_t PROGMEM AdapterMACAddress     = {ADAPTER_MAC_ADDRESS};
+
+/** Vendor description of the adapter. This is overridden by the INF file required to install the appropriate RNDIS drivers for
+ *  the device, but may still be used by the OS in some circumstances.
+ */
+static const char PROGMEM AdapterVendorDescription[]     = "LUFA RNDIS Adapter";
+
+/** List of RNDIS OID commands supported by this adapter. */
+static const uint32_t PROGMEM AdapterSupportedOIDList[]  =
+							{
+								OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST,
+								OID_GEN_PHYSICAL_MEDIUM,
+								OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS,
+								OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED,
+								OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE,
+								OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE,
+								OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE,
+								OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED,
+								OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE,
+								OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE,
+								OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID,
+								OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION,
+								OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER,
+								OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE,
+								OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS,
+								OID_GEN_XMIT_OK,
+								OID_GEN_RCV_OK,
+								OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR,
+								OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR,
+								OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER,
+								OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS,
+								OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS,
+								OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST,
+								OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE,
+								OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT,
+								OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION,
+								OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS,
+							};
+
+/** Buffer for RNDIS messages (as distinct from Ethernet frames sent through the adapter. This must be big enough to hold the entire
+ *  Supported OID list, plus the response header. The buffer is half-duplex, and is written to as it is read to save on SRAM - for this
+ *  reason, care must be taken when constructing RNDIS responses that unread data is not overwritten when writing in responses.
+ */
+uint8_t                 RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(AdapterSupportedOIDList) + sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Complete_t)];
+
+/** Pointer to the RNDIS message header at the top of the RNDIS message buffer, for convenience. */
+RNDIS_Message_Header_t* MessageHeader = (RNDIS_Message_Header_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
+
+/** Indicates if a RNDIS message response is ready to be sent back to the host. */
+bool                    ResponseReady               = false;
+
+/** Current RNDIS adapter state, a value from the \c RNDIS_States_t enum. */
+uint8_t                 CurrRNDISState              = RNDIS_Uninitialized;
+
+/** Current Ethernet packet filter mask. This is non-zero when the adapter is initialized, or zero when disabled. */
+uint32_t                CurrPacketFilter            = 0;
+
+
+/** Processes the RNDIS message received by the host and stored in the RNDISMessageBuffer global buffer. If a response is
+ *  created, the ResponseReady global is updated so that the response is written back to the host upon request.
+ */
+void ProcessRNDISControlMessage(void)
+{
+	/* Note: Only a single buffer is used for both the received message and its response to save SRAM. Because of
+	         this, response bytes should be filled in order so that they do not clobber unread data in the buffer. */
+
+	switch (MessageHeader->MessageType)
+	{
+		case REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG:
+			/* Initialize the adapter - return information about the supported RNDIS version and buffer sizes */
+
+			ResponseReady = true;
+
+			RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t*  INITIALIZE_Message  = (RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
+			RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t* INITIALIZE_Response = (RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
+
+			INITIALIZE_Response->MessageType           = REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT;
+			INITIALIZE_Response->MessageLength         = sizeof(RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t);
+			INITIALIZE_Response->RequestId             = INITIALIZE_Message->RequestId;
+			INITIALIZE_Response->Status                = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS;
+
+			INITIALIZE_Response->MajorVersion          = REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MAJOR;
+			INITIALIZE_Response->MinorVersion          = REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MINOR;
+			INITIALIZE_Response->DeviceFlags           = REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTIONLESS;
+			INITIALIZE_Response->Medium                = REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3;
+			INITIALIZE_Response->MaxPacketsPerTransfer = 1;
+			INITIALIZE_Response->MaxTransferSize       = (sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) + ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX);
+			INITIALIZE_Response->PacketAlignmentFactor = 0;
+			INITIALIZE_Response->AFListOffset          = 0;
+			INITIALIZE_Response->AFListSize            = 0;
+
+			CurrRNDISState = RNDIS_Initialized;
+
+			break;
+		case REMOTE_NDIS_HALT_MSG:
+			/* Halt the adapter, reset the adapter state - note that no response should be returned when completed */
+
+			ResponseReady = false;
+			MessageHeader->MessageLength = 0;
+
+			CurrRNDISState = RNDIS_Uninitialized;
+
+			break;
+		case REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG:
+			/* Request for information about a parameter about the adapter, specified as an OID token */
+
+			ResponseReady = true;
+
+			RNDIS_Query_Message_t*  QUERY_Message  = (RNDIS_Query_Message_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
+			RNDIS_Query_Complete_t* QUERY_Response = (RNDIS_Query_Complete_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
+			uint32_t                Query_Oid      = QUERY_Message->Oid;
+
+			void*     QueryData                 = &RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t) +
+			                                                          QUERY_Message->InformationBufferOffset];
+			void*     ResponseData              = &RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Complete_t)];
+			uint16_t  ResponseSize;
+
+			QUERY_Response->MessageType         = REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_CMPLT;
+			QUERY_Response->MessageLength       = sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Complete_t);
+
+			if (ProcessNDISQuery(Query_Oid, QueryData, QUERY_Message->InformationBufferLength,
+			                     ResponseData, &ResponseSize))
+			{
+				QUERY_Response->Status                  = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS;
+				QUERY_Response->MessageLength          += ResponseSize;
+
+				QUERY_Response->InformationBufferLength = ResponseSize;
+				QUERY_Response->InformationBufferOffset = (sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Complete_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t));
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				QUERY_Response->Status                  = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED;
+
+				QUERY_Response->InformationBufferLength = 0;
+				QUERY_Response->InformationBufferOffset = 0;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG:
+			/* Request to set a parameter of the adapter, specified as an OID token */
+
+			ResponseReady = true;
+
+			RNDIS_Set_Message_t*  SET_Message  = (RNDIS_Set_Message_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
+			RNDIS_Set_Complete_t* SET_Response = (RNDIS_Set_Complete_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
+			uint32_t              SET_Oid      = SET_Message->Oid;
+
+			SET_Response->MessageType       = REMOTE_NDIS_SET_CMPLT;
+			SET_Response->MessageLength     = sizeof(RNDIS_Set_Complete_t);
+			SET_Response->RequestId         = SET_Message->RequestId;
+
+			void* SetData                   = &RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t) +
+			                                                      SET_Message->InformationBufferOffset];
+
+			if (ProcessNDISSet(SET_Oid, SetData, SET_Message->InformationBufferLength))
+			  SET_Response->Status        = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS;
+			else
+			  SET_Response->Status        = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED;
+
+			break;
+		case REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_MSG:
+			/* Soft reset the adapter */
+
+			ResponseReady = true;
+
+			RNDIS_Reset_Complete_t* RESET_Response = (RNDIS_Reset_Complete_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
+
+			RESET_Response->MessageType         = REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_CMPLT;
+			RESET_Response->MessageLength       = sizeof(RNDIS_Reset_Complete_t);
+			RESET_Response->Status              = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS;
+			RESET_Response->AddressingReset     = 0;
+
+			break;
+		case REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG:
+			/* Keep alive message sent to the adapter every 5 seconds when idle to ensure it is still responding */
+
+			ResponseReady = true;
+
+			RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t*  KEEPALIVE_Message  = (RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
+			RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t* KEEPALIVE_Response = (RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer;
+
+			KEEPALIVE_Response->MessageType     = REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT;
+			KEEPALIVE_Response->MessageLength   = sizeof(RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t);
+			KEEPALIVE_Response->RequestId       = KEEPALIVE_Message->RequestId;
+			KEEPALIVE_Response->Status          = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS;
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Processes RNDIS query commands, retrieving information from the adapter and reporting it back to the host. The requested
+ *  parameter is given as an OID value.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] OId            OId value of the parameter being queried
+ *  \param[in] QueryData      Pointer to any extra query data being sent by the host to the device inside the RNDIS message buffer
+ *  \param[in] QuerySize      Size in bytes of the extra query data being sent by the host
+ *  \param[out] ResponseData  Pointer to the start of the query response inside the RNDIS message buffer
+ *  \param[out] ResponseSize  Pointer to the size in bytes of the response data being sent to the host
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the query was handled, \c false otherwise
+ */
+static bool ProcessNDISQuery(const uint32_t OId, void* QueryData, uint16_t QuerySize,
+                             void* ResponseData, uint16_t* ResponseSize)
+{
+	/* Handler for REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG messages */
+
+	switch (OId)
+	{
+		case OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(AdapterSupportedOIDList);
+
+			/* Copy the list of supported NDIS OID tokens to the response buffer */
+			memcpy_P(ResponseData, AdapterSupportedOIDList, sizeof(AdapterSupportedOIDList));
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_PHYSICAL_MEDIUM:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+			/* Indicate that the device is a true ethernet link */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 0;
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+			/* Always indicate hardware ready */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = NDIS_HardwareStatus_Ready;
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED:
+		case OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+			/* Indicate 802.3 (Ethernet) supported by the adapter */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3;
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+			/* Vendor ID 0x0xFFFFFF is reserved for vendors who have not purchased a NDIS VID */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 0x00FFFFFF;
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE:
+		case OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE:
+		case OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+			/* Indicate that the maximum frame size is the size of the ethernet frame buffer */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX;
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(AdapterVendorDescription);
+
+			/* Copy vendor description string to the response buffer */
+			memcpy_P(ResponseData, AdapterVendorDescription, sizeof(AdapterVendorDescription));
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+			/* Always indicate that the adapter is connected to a network */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_CONNECTED;
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+			/* Indicate 10Mb/s link speed */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 100000;
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS:
+		case OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(MAC_Address_t);
+
+			/* Copy over the fixed adapter MAC to the response buffer */
+			memcpy_P(ResponseData, &AdapterMACAddress, sizeof(MAC_Address_t));
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+			/* Indicate only one multicast address supported */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 1;
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+			/* Indicate the current packet filter mask */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = CurrPacketFilter;
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_XMIT_OK:
+		case OID_GEN_RCV_OK:
+		case OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR:
+		case OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR:
+		case OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER:
+		case OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT:
+		case OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION:
+		case OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+			/* Unused statistic OIDs - always return 0 for each */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 0;
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+			/* Indicate maximum overall buffer (Ethernet frame and RNDIS header) the adapter can handle */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = (sizeof(RNDISMessageBuffer) + ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX);
+
+			return true;
+		default:
+			return false;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Processes RNDIS set commands, setting adapter parameters to values given by the host. The requested parameter is given
+ *  as an OID value.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] OId      OId value of the parameter being set
+ *  \param[in] SetData  Pointer to the parameter value in the RNDIS message buffer
+ *  \param[in] SetSize  Size in bytes of the parameter value being sent by the host
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the set was handled, \c false otherwise
+ */
+static bool ProcessNDISSet(uint32_t OId, void* SetData, uint16_t SetSize)
+{
+	/* Handler for REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG messages */
+
+	switch (OId)
+	{
+		case OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER:
+			/* Save the packet filter mask in case the host queries it again later */
+			CurrPacketFilter = *((uint32_t*)SetData);
+
+			/* Set the RNDIS state to initialized if the packet filter is non-zero */
+			CurrRNDISState = ((CurrPacketFilter) ? RNDIS_Data_Initialized : RNDIS_Data_Initialized);
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST:
+			/* Do nothing - throw away the value from the host as it is unused */
+
+			return true;
+		default:
+			return false;
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/RNDIS.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/RNDIS.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bb54a905e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/RNDIS.h
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for RNDIS.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _RNDIS_H_
+#define _RNDIS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "../RNDISEthernet.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern uint8_t                 RNDISMessageBuffer[];
+		extern RNDIS_Message_Header_t* MessageHeader;
+		extern bool                    ResponseReady;
+		extern uint8_t                 CurrRNDISState;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void ProcessRNDISControlMessage(void);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_C)
+			static bool ProcessNDISQuery(const uint32_t OId,
+			                             void* QueryData,
+			                             uint16_t QuerySize,
+			                             void* ResponseData,
+			                             uint16_t* ResponseSize);
+			static bool ProcessNDISSet(const uint32_t OId,
+			                           void* SetData,
+			                           uint16_t SetSize);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d7a8e3956
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.c
@@ -0,0 +1,631 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles the reliable in-order transmission
+ *  and reception of packets to and from devices on a network, to "ports" on the device. It is used in situations where data
+ *  delivery must be reliable and correct, e.g. HTTP, TELNET and most other non-streaming protocols.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_TCP_C
+#include "TCP.h"
+
+/** Port state table array. This contains the current status of TCP ports in the device. To save on space, only open ports are
+ *  stored - closed ports may be overwritten at any time, and the system will assume any ports not present in the array are closed. This
+ *  allows for MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS to be less than the number of ports used by the application if desired.
+ */
+TCP_PortState_t        PortStateTable[MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS];
+
+/** Connection state table array. This contains the current status of TCP connections in the device. To save on space, only active
+ *  (non-closed) connections are stored - closed connections may be overwritten at any time, and the system will assume any connections
+ *  not present in the array are closed.
+ */
+TCP_ConnectionState_t  ConnectionStateTable[MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS];
+
+
+/** Task to handle the calling of each registered application's callback function, to process and generate TCP packets at the application
+ *  level. If an application produces a response, this task constructs the appropriate Ethernet frame and places it into the Ethernet OUT
+ *  buffer for later transmission.
+ */
+void TCP_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Run each application in sequence, to process incoming and generate outgoing packets */
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find the corresponding port entry in the port table */
+		for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS; PTableEntry++)
+		{
+			/* Run the application handler for the port */
+			if ((PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port  == ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port) &&
+			    (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State == TCP_Port_Open))
+			{
+				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry],
+				                                               &ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Bail out early if there is already a frame waiting to be sent in the Ethernet OUT buffer */
+	if (FrameOUT.FrameLength)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Send response packets from each application as the TCP packet buffers are filled by the applications */
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* For each completely received packet, pass it along to the listening application */
+		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT) &&
+		    (ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Ready))
+		{
+			Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameOUTHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameOUT.FrameData;
+			IP_Header_t*             IPHeaderOUT    = (IP_Header_t*)&FrameOUT.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)];
+			TCP_Header_t*            TCPHeaderOUT   = (TCP_Header_t*)&FrameOUT.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) +
+			                                                                             sizeof(IP_Header_t)];
+			void*                    TCPDataOUT     = &FrameOUT.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) +
+			                                                              sizeof(IP_Header_t) +
+			                                                              sizeof(TCP_Header_t)];
+
+			uint16_t PacketSize = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Length;
+
+			/* Fill out the TCP data */
+			TCPHeaderOUT->SourcePort           = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port;
+			TCPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort      = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort;
+			TCPHeaderOUT->SequenceNumber       = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberOut);
+			TCPHeaderOUT->AcknowledgmentNumber = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberIn);
+			TCPHeaderOUT->DataOffset           = (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
+			TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize           = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE);
+
+			TCPHeaderOUT->Flags                = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
+			TCPHeaderOUT->UrgentPointer        = 0;
+			TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = 0;
+			TCPHeaderOUT->Reserved             = 0;
+
+			memcpy(TCPDataOUT, ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Data, PacketSize);
+
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberOut += PacketSize;
+
+			TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = TCP_Checksum16(TCPHeaderOUT, &ServerIPAddress,
+			                                                    &ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress,
+			                                                    (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) + PacketSize));
+
+			PacketSize += sizeof(TCP_Header_t);
+
+			/* Fill out the response IP header */
+			IPHeaderOUT->TotalLength        = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(IP_Header_t) + PacketSize);
+			IPHeaderOUT->TypeOfService      = 0;
+			IPHeaderOUT->HeaderLength       = (sizeof(IP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
+			IPHeaderOUT->Version            = 4;
+			IPHeaderOUT->Flags              = 0;
+			IPHeaderOUT->FragmentOffset     = 0;
+			IPHeaderOUT->Identification     = 0;
+			IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = 0;
+			IPHeaderOUT->Protocol           = PROTOCOL_TCP;
+			IPHeaderOUT->TTL                = DEFAULT_TTL;
+			IPHeaderOUT->SourceAddress      = ServerIPAddress;
+			IPHeaderOUT->DestinationAddress = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress;
+
+			IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = Ethernet_Checksum16(IPHeaderOUT, sizeof(IP_Header_t));
+
+			PacketSize += sizeof(IP_Header_t);
+
+			/* Fill out the response Ethernet frame header */
+			FrameOUTHeader->Source          = ServerMACAddress;
+			FrameOUTHeader->Destination     = (MAC_Address_t){{0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00}};
+			FrameOUTHeader->EtherType       = SwapEndian_16(ETHERTYPE_IPV4);
+
+			PacketSize += sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t);
+
+			/* Set the response length in the buffer and indicate that a response is ready to be sent */
+			FrameOUT.FrameLength            = PacketSize;
+
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Ready = false;
+
+			break;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+/** Initializes the TCP protocol handler, clearing the port and connection state tables. This must be called before TCP packets are
+ *  processed.
+ */
+void TCP_Init(void)
+{
+	/* Initialize the port state table with all CLOSED entries */
+	for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS; PTableEntry++)
+	  PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = TCP_Port_Closed;
+
+	/* Initialize the connection table with all CLOSED entries */
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	  ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State = TCP_Connection_Closed;
+}
+
+/** Sets the state and callback handler of the given port, specified in big endian to the given state.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Port     Port whose state and callback function to set, specified in big endian
+ *  \param[in] State    New state of the port, a value from the \ref TCP_PortStates_t enum
+ *  \param[in] Handler  Application callback handler for the port
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the port state was set, \c false otherwise (no more space in the port state table)
+ */
+bool TCP_SetPortState(const uint16_t Port,
+                      const uint8_t State,
+                      void (*Handler)(TCP_ConnectionState_t*, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t*))
+{
+	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
+
+	/* Check to see if the port entry is already in the port state table */
+	for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS; PTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find existing entry for the port in the table, update it if found */
+		if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port == Port)
+		{
+			PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = State;
+			PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler = Handler;
+			return true;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Check if trying to open the port -- if so we need to find an unused (closed) entry and replace it */
+	if (State == TCP_Port_Open)
+	{
+		for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS; PTableEntry++)
+		{
+			/* Find a closed port entry in the table, change it to the given port and state */
+			if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State == TCP_Port_Closed)
+			{
+				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port  = Port;
+				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = State;
+				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler = Handler;
+				return true;
+			}
+		}
+
+		/* Port not in table and no room to add it, return failure */
+		return false;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Port not in table but trying to close it, so operation successful */
+		return true;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the current state of a given TCP port, specified in big endian.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Port  TCP port whose state is to be retrieved, given in big-endian
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the \ref TCP_PortStates_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t TCP_GetPortState(const uint16_t Port)
+{
+	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
+
+	for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS; PTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find existing entry for the port in the table, return the port status if found */
+		if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port == Port)
+		  return PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State;
+	}
+
+	/* Port not in table, assume closed */
+	return TCP_Port_Closed;
+}
+
+/** Sets the connection state of the given port, remote address and remote port to the given TCP connection state. If the
+ *  connection exists in the connection state table it is updated, otherwise it is created if possible.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Port           TCP port of the connection on the device, specified in big endian
+ *  \param[in] RemoteAddress  Remote protocol IP address of the connected device
+ *  \param[in] RemotePort     TCP port of the remote device in the connection, specified in big endian
+ *  \param[in] State          TCP connection state, a value from the \ref TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the connection was updated or created, \c false otherwise (no more space in the connection state table)
+ */
+bool TCP_SetConnectionState(const uint16_t Port,
+                            const IP_Address_t* RemoteAddress,
+                            const uint16_t RemotePort,
+                            const uint8_t State)
+{
+	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
+
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find port entry in the table */
+		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) &&
+		     IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, RemoteAddress) &&
+			 ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort)
+		{
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State = State;
+			return true;
+		}
+	}
+
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find empty entry in the table */
+		if (ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State == TCP_Connection_Closed)
+		{
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port          = Port;
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress = *RemoteAddress;
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort    = RemotePort;
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State         = State;
+			return true;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the current state of a given TCP connection to a host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Port           TCP port on the device in the connection, specified in big endian
+ *  \param[in] RemoteAddress  Remote protocol IP address of the connected host
+ *  \param[in] RemotePort     Remote TCP port of the connected host, specified in big endian
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the \ref TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t TCP_GetConnectionState(const uint16_t Port,
+                               const IP_Address_t* RemoteAddress,
+                               const uint16_t RemotePort)
+{
+	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
+
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find port entry in the table */
+		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) &&
+		     IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, RemoteAddress) &&
+			 ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort)
+
+		{
+			return ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return TCP_Connection_Closed;
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the connection info structure of a given connection to a host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Port           TCP port on the device in the connection, specified in big endian
+ *  \param[in] RemoteAddress  Remote protocol IP address of the connected host
+ *  \param[in] RemotePort     Remote TCP port of the connected host, specified in big endian
+ *
+ *  \return ConnectionInfo structure of the connection if found, NULL otherwise
+ */
+TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* TCP_GetConnectionInfo(const uint16_t Port,
+                                            const IP_Address_t* RemoteAddress,
+                                            const uint16_t RemotePort)
+{
+	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
+
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find port entry in the table */
+		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) &&
+		     IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, RemoteAddress) &&
+			 ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort)
+		{
+			return &ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return NULL;
+}
+
+/** Processes a TCP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ *  to the output Ethernet frame if one is created by a application handler.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] IPHeaderInStart     Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header
+ *  \param[in] TCPHeaderInStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's TCP header
+ *  \param[out] TCPHeaderOutStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's TCP header
+ *
+ *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE if no
+ *           response was generated, NO_PROCESS if the packet processing was deferred until the
+ *           next Ethernet packet handler iteration
+ */
+int16_t TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart,
+                             void* TCPHeaderInStart,
+                             void* TCPHeaderOutStart)
+{
+	IP_Header_t*  IPHeaderIN   = (IP_Header_t*)IPHeaderInStart;
+	TCP_Header_t* TCPHeaderIN  = (TCP_Header_t*)TCPHeaderInStart;
+	TCP_Header_t* TCPHeaderOUT = (TCP_Header_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart;
+
+	TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* ConnectionInfo;
+
+	DecodeTCPHeader(TCPHeaderInStart);
+
+	bool PacketResponse = false;
+
+	/* Check if the destination port is open and allows incoming connections */
+	if (TCP_GetPortState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort) == TCP_Port_Open)
+	{
+		/* Detect SYN from host to start a connection */
+		if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_SYN)
+		  TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Listen);
+
+		/* Detect RST from host to abort existing connection */
+		if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_RST)
+		{
+			if (TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+			                           TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed))
+			{
+				TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_RST | TCP_FLAG_ACK);
+				PacketResponse = true;
+			}
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			/* Process the incoming TCP packet based on the current connection state for the sender and port */
+			switch (TCP_GetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort))
+			{
+				case TCP_Connection_Listen:
+					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_SYN)
+					{
+						/* SYN connection starts a connection with a peer */
+						if (TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+						                           TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_SYNReceived))
+						{
+							TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_SYN | TCP_FLAG_ACK);
+
+							ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+							ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn  = (SwapEndian_32(TCPHeaderIN->SequenceNumber) + 1);
+							ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut = 0;
+							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse      = false;
+						}
+						else
+						{
+							TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_RST;
+						}
+
+						PacketResponse      = true;
+					}
+
+					break;
+				case TCP_Connection_SYNReceived:
+					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK)
+					{
+						/* ACK during the connection process completes the connection to a peer */
+
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Established);
+
+						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
+					}
+
+					break;
+				case TCP_Connection_Established:
+					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK))
+					{
+						/* FIN ACK when connected to a peer starts the finalization process */
+
+						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK);
+						PacketResponse      = true;
+
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_CloseWait);
+
+						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++;
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
+					}
+					else if ((TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK) || (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_ACK | TCP_FLAG_PSH)))
+					{
+						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+						/* Check if the buffer is currently in use either by a buffered data to send, or receive */
+						if ((ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse == false) && (ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Ready == false))
+						{
+							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_IN;
+							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse     = true;
+							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length    = 0;
+						}
+
+						/* Check if the buffer has been claimed by us to read in data from the peer */
+						if ((ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_IN) &&
+							(ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length != TCP_WINDOW_SIZE))
+						{
+							uint16_t IPOffset   = (IPHeaderIN->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t));
+							uint16_t TCPOffset  = (TCPHeaderIN->DataOffset * sizeof(uint32_t));
+							uint16_t DataLength = (SwapEndian_16(IPHeaderIN->TotalLength) - IPOffset - TCPOffset);
+
+							/* Copy the packet data into the buffer */
+							memcpy(&ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Data[ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length],
+								   &((uint8_t*)TCPHeaderInStart)[TCPOffset],
+								   DataLength);
+
+							ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn += DataLength;
+							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length    += DataLength;
+
+							/* Check if the buffer is full or if the PSH flag is set, if so indicate buffer ready */
+							if ((!(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE - ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length)) || (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_PSH))
+							{
+								ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse = false;
+								ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Ready = true;
+
+								TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
+								PacketResponse      = true;
+							}
+						}
+						else
+						{
+							/* Buffer is currently in use by the application, defer processing of the incoming packet */
+							return NO_PROCESS;
+						}
+					}
+
+					break;
+				case TCP_Connection_Closing:
+						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_ACK | TCP_FLAG_FIN);
+						PacketResponse      = true;
+
+						ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse = false;
+
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_FINWait1);
+
+					break;
+				case TCP_Connection_FINWait1:
+					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK))
+					{
+						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
+						PacketResponse      = true;
+
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++;
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
+
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed);
+					}
+					else if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK)
+					{
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_FINWait2);
+					}
+
+					break;
+				case TCP_Connection_FINWait2:
+					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK))
+					{
+						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
+						PacketResponse      = true;
+
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++;
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
+
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed);
+					}
+
+					break;
+				case TCP_Connection_CloseWait:
+					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK)
+					{
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed);
+					}
+
+					break;
+			}
+		}
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Port is not open, indicate via a RST/ACK response to the sender */
+		TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_RST | TCP_FLAG_ACK);
+		PacketResponse      = true;
+	}
+
+	/* Check if we need to respond to the sent packet */
+	if (PacketResponse)
+	{
+		ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+		                                       TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+		TCPHeaderOUT->SourcePort           = TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort;
+		TCPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort      = TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort;
+		TCPHeaderOUT->SequenceNumber       = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut);
+		TCPHeaderOUT->AcknowledgmentNumber = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn);
+		TCPHeaderOUT->DataOffset           = (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
+
+		if (!(ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse))
+		  TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize         = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE);
+		else
+		  TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize         = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE - ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length);
+
+		TCPHeaderOUT->UrgentPointer        = 0;
+		TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = 0;
+		TCPHeaderOUT->Reserved             = 0;
+
+		TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = TCP_Checksum16(TCPHeaderOUT, &IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress,
+		                                                    &IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, sizeof(TCP_Header_t));
+
+		return sizeof(TCP_Header_t);
+	}
+
+	return NO_RESPONSE;
+}
+
+/** Calculates the appropriate TCP checksum, consisting of the addition of the one's compliment of each word,
+ *  complimented.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] TCPHeaderOutStart   Pointer to the start of the packet's outgoing TCP header
+ *  \param[in] SourceAddress       Source protocol IP address of the outgoing IP header
+ *  \param[in] DestinationAddress  Destination protocol IP address of the outgoing IP header
+ *  \param[in] TCPOutSize          Size in bytes of the TCP data header and payload
+ *
+ *  \return A 16-bit TCP checksum value
+ */
+static uint16_t TCP_Checksum16(void* TCPHeaderOutStart,
+                               const IP_Address_t* SourceAddress,
+                               const IP_Address_t* DestinationAddress,
+                               uint16_t TCPOutSize)
+{
+	uint32_t Checksum = 0;
+
+	/* TCP/IP checksums are the addition of the one's compliment of each word including the IP pseudo-header,
+	   complimented */
+
+	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)SourceAddress)[0];
+	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)SourceAddress)[1];
+	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)DestinationAddress)[0];
+	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)DestinationAddress)[1];
+	Checksum += SwapEndian_16(PROTOCOL_TCP);
+	Checksum += SwapEndian_16(TCPOutSize);
+
+	for (uint16_t CurrWord = 0; CurrWord < (TCPOutSize >> 1); CurrWord++)
+	  Checksum += ((uint16_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart)[CurrWord];
+
+	if (TCPOutSize & 0x01)
+	  Checksum += (((uint16_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart)[TCPOutSize >> 1] & 0x00FF);
+
+	while (Checksum & 0xFFFF0000)
+	  Checksum = ((Checksum & 0xFFFF) + (Checksum >> 16));
+
+	return ~Checksum;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0d96430ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.h
@@ -0,0 +1,260 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for TCP.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _TCP_H_
+#define _TCP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Maximum number of TCP ports which can be open at the one time. */
+		#define MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS              1
+
+		/** Maximum number of TCP connections which can be sustained at the one time. */
+		#define MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS             3
+
+		/** TCP window size, giving the maximum number of bytes which can be buffered at the one time. */
+		#define TCP_WINDOW_SIZE                 512
+
+		/** Port number for HTTP transmissions. */
+		#define TCP_PORT_HTTP                   SwapEndian_16(80)
+
+		/** Data direction indicator for a TCP application buffer, indicating data from host-to-device. */
+		#define TCP_PACKETDIR_IN                false
+
+		/** Data direction indicator for a TCP application buffer, indicating data from device-to-host. */
+		#define TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT               true
+
+		/** Congestion Window Reduced TCP flag mask. */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_CWR                    (1 << 7)
+
+		/** Explicit Congestion Notification TCP flag mask. */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_ECE                    (1 << 6)
+
+		/** Urgent TCP flag mask. */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_URG                    (1 << 5)
+
+		/** Data Acknowledge TCP flag mask. */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_ACK                    (1 << 4)
+
+		/** Data Push TCP flag mask. */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_PSH                    (1 << 3)
+
+		/** Reset TCP flag mask. */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_RST                    (1 << 2)
+
+		/** Synchronize TCP flag mask. */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_SYN                    (1 << 1)
+
+		/** Connection Finalize TCP flag mask. */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_FIN                    (1 << 0)
+
+		/** Application macro: Determines if the given application buffer contains a packet received from the host
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to check
+		 *
+		 *  \return Boolean \c true if the buffer contains a packet from the host, \c false otherwise
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_HAS_RECEIVED_PACKET(Buffer)  (Buffer->Ready && (Buffer->Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_IN))
+
+		/** Application macro: Indicates if the application buffer is currently locked by the application for device-to-host transfers.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to check
+		 *
+		 *  \return Boolean \c true if the buffer has been captured by the application for device-to-host transmissions, \c false otherwise
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_HAVE_CAPTURED_BUFFER(Buffer) (!(Buffer->Ready) && Buffer->InUse && \
+		                                              (Buffer->Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT))
+
+		/** Application macro: Indicates if the application can lock the buffer for multiple continued device-to-host transmissions.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to check
+		 *
+		 *  \return Boolean \c true if the buffer may be captured by the application for device-to-host transmissions, \c false otherwise
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_CAN_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer)   Buffer->InUse
+
+		/** Application macro: Captures the application buffer, locking it for device-to-host transmissions only. This should be
+		 *  performed when the application needs to transmit several packets worth of data in succession with no interruptions from the host.
+		 *
+		 *  \pre The application must check that the buffer can be locked first using TCP_APP_CAN_CAPTURE_BUFFER().
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to lock
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer)       do { Buffer->Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT; Buffer->InUse = true; } while (0)
+
+		/** Application macro: Releases a captured application buffer, allowing for host-to-device packets to be received.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to release
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_RELEASE_BUFFER(Buffer)       do { Buffer->InUse = false; } while (0)
+
+		/** Application macro: Sends the contents of the given application buffer to the host.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to send
+		 *  \param[in] Len     Length of data contained in the buffer
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Len)     do { Buffer->Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT; Buffer->Length = Len; Buffer->Ready = true; } while (0)
+
+		/** Application macro: Clears the application buffer, ready for a packet to be written to it.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to clear
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_CLEAR_BUFFER(Buffer)         do { Buffer->Ready = false; Buffer->Length = 0; } while (0)
+
+		/** Application macro: Closes an open connection to a host.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Connection  Open TCP connection to close
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(Connection)  do { Connection->State = TCP_Connection_Closing;  } while (0)
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for possible TCP port states. */
+		enum TCP_PortStates_t
+		{
+			TCP_Port_Closed            = 0, /**< TCP port closed, no connections to a host may be made on this port. */
+			TCP_Port_Open              = 1, /**< TCP port open, connections to a host may be made on this port. */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for possible TCP connection states. */
+		enum TCP_ConnectionStates_t
+		{
+			TCP_Connection_Listen      = 0, /**< Listening for a connection from a host */
+			TCP_Connection_SYNSent     = 1, /**< Unused */
+			TCP_Connection_SYNReceived = 2, /**< SYN received, waiting for ACK */
+			TCP_Connection_Established = 3, /**< Connection established in both directions */
+			TCP_Connection_FINWait1    = 4, /**< Closing, waiting for ACK */
+			TCP_Connection_FINWait2    = 5, /**< Closing, waiting for FIN ACK */
+			TCP_Connection_CloseWait   = 6, /**< Closing, waiting for ACK */
+			TCP_Connection_Closing     = 7, /**< Unused */
+			TCP_Connection_LastACK     = 8, /**< Unused */
+			TCP_Connection_TimeWait    = 9, /**< Unused */
+			TCP_Connection_Closed      = 10, /**< Connection closed in both directions */
+		};
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a TCP connection buffer structure, including size, data and direction. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t               Length; /**< Length of data in the TCP application buffer */
+			uint8_t                Data[TCP_WINDOW_SIZE]; /**< TCP application data buffer */
+			bool                   Direction; /**< Buffer transmission direction, either TCP_PACKETDIR_IN  or TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT */
+			bool                   Ready; /**< If data from host, indicates buffer ready to be read, otherwise indicates
+			                               *   buffer ready to be sent to the host
+			                               */
+			bool                   InUse; /**< Indicates if the buffer is locked to to the current direction, and cannot be changed */
+		} TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a TCP connection information structure. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t               SequenceNumberIn; /**< Current TCP sequence number for host-to-device */
+			uint32_t               SequenceNumberOut; /**< Current TCP sequence number for device-to-host */
+			TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t Buffer; /**< Connection application data buffer */
+		} TCP_ConnectionInfo_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a complete TCP connection state. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t               Port; /**< Connection port number on the device */
+			uint16_t               RemotePort; /**< Connection port number on the host */
+			IP_Address_t           RemoteAddress; /**< Connection protocol IP address of the host */
+			TCP_ConnectionInfo_t   Info; /**< Connection information, including application buffer */
+			uint8_t                State; /**< Current connection state, a value from the \ref TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum */
+		} TCP_ConnectionState_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a TCP port state. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t               Port; /**< TCP port number on the device */
+			uint8_t                State; /**< Current port state, a value from the \ref TCP_PortStates_t enum */
+			void                   (*ApplicationHandler) (TCP_ConnectionState_t* ConnectionState,
+			                                              TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* Buffer); /**< Port application handler */
+		} TCP_PortState_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a TCP packet header. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t               SourcePort; /**< Source port of the TCP packet */
+			uint16_t               DestinationPort; /**< Destination port of the TCP packet */
+
+			uint32_t               SequenceNumber; /**< Data sequence number of the packet */
+			uint32_t               AcknowledgmentNumber; /**< Data acknowledgment number of the packet */
+
+			unsigned               Reserved   : 4; /**< Reserved, must be all 0 */
+			unsigned               DataOffset : 4; /**< Offset of the data from the start of the header, in 4 byte chunks */
+			uint8_t                Flags; /**< TCP packet flags */
+			uint16_t               WindowSize; /**< Current data window size (bytes remaining in reception buffer) */
+
+			uint16_t               Checksum; /**< TCP checksum */
+			uint16_t               UrgentPointer; /**< Urgent data pointer */
+		} TCP_Header_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void                  TCP_Init(void);
+		void                  TCP_Task(void);
+		bool                  TCP_SetPortState(const uint16_t Port,
+		                                       const uint8_t State,
+		                                       void (*Handler)(TCP_ConnectionState_t*, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t*));
+		uint8_t               TCP_GetPortState(const uint16_t Port);
+		bool                  TCP_SetConnectionState(const uint16_t Port,
+		                                             const IP_Address_t* RemoteAddress,
+		                                             const uint16_t RemotePort,
+		                                             const uint8_t State);
+		uint8_t               TCP_GetConnectionState(const uint16_t Port,
+		                                             const IP_Address_t* RemoteAddress,
+		                                             const uint16_t RemotePort);
+		TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* TCP_GetConnectionInfo(const uint16_t Port,
+		                                            const IP_Address_t* RemoteAddress,
+		                                            const uint16_t RemotePort);
+		int16_t               TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart,
+		                                           void* TCPHeaderInStart,
+		                                           void* TCPHeaderOutStart);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_TCP_C)
+			static uint16_t TCP_Checksum16(void* TCPHeaderOutStart,
+			                               const IP_Address_t* SourceAddress,
+			                               const IP_Address_t* DestinationAddress,
+			                               uint16_t TCPOutSize);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..95911fc5d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.c
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  User Datagram Protocol (UDP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles high throughput, low
+ *  reliability packets which are typically used to encapsulate streaming data.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_UDP_C
+#include "UDP.h"
+
+/** Processes a UDP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ *  to the output Ethernet frame if a sub-protocol handler has created a response packet.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] IPHeaderInStart     Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header
+ *  \param[in] UDPHeaderInStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's UDP header
+ *  \param[out] UDPHeaderOutStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's UDP header
+ *
+ *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
+ */
+int16_t UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart,
+                             void* UDPHeaderInStart,
+                             void* UDPHeaderOutStart)
+{
+	UDP_Header_t* UDPHeaderIN  = (UDP_Header_t*)UDPHeaderInStart;
+	UDP_Header_t* UDPHeaderOUT = (UDP_Header_t*)UDPHeaderOutStart;
+
+	int16_t RetSize = NO_RESPONSE;
+
+	DecodeUDPHeader(UDPHeaderInStart);
+
+	switch (SwapEndian_16(UDPHeaderIN->DestinationPort))
+	{
+		case UDP_PORT_DHCP_REQUEST:
+			RetSize = DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(IPHeaderInStart,
+			                                 &((uint8_t*)UDPHeaderInStart)[sizeof(UDP_Header_t)],
+		                                     &((uint8_t*)UDPHeaderOutStart)[sizeof(UDP_Header_t)]);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	/* Check to see if the protocol processing routine has filled out a response */
+	if (RetSize > 0)
+	{
+		/* Fill out the response UDP packet header */
+		UDPHeaderOUT->SourcePort      = UDPHeaderIN->DestinationPort;
+		UDPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort = UDPHeaderIN->SourcePort;
+		UDPHeaderOUT->Checksum        = 0;
+		UDPHeaderOUT->Length          = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(UDP_Header_t) + RetSize);
+
+		/* Return the size of the response so far */
+		return (sizeof(UDP_Header_t) + RetSize);
+	}
+
+	return NO_RESPONSE;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ec191c4cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.h
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for UDP.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _UDP_H_
+#define _UDP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+		#include "DHCP.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Source UDP port for a DHCP request. */
+		#define UDP_PORT_DHCP_REQUEST 67
+
+		/** Destination UDP port for a DHCP reply. */
+		#define UDP_PORT_DHCP_REPLY   68
+
+		/** Source UDP port for a DNS request/response. */
+		#define UDP_PORT_DNS          53
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a UDP packet header. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t SourcePort; /**< Packet source port */
+			uint16_t DestinationPort; /**< Packet destination port */
+			uint16_t Length; /**< Total packet length, in bytes */
+			uint16_t Checksum; /**< Optional UDP packet checksum */
+		} UDP_Header_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		int16_t UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart,
+		                             void* UDPHeaderInStart,
+		                             void* UDPHeaderOutStart);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..925973c7d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.c
@@ -0,0 +1,203 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Simple webserver application for demonstrating the RNDIS demo and TCP/IP stack. This
+ *  application will serve up a static HTTP webpage when requested by the host.
+ */
+
+#include "Webserver.h"
+
+/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before the page contents. This indicates to the host that a page exists at the
+ *  given location, and gives extra connection information.
+ */
+const char PROGMEM HTTP200Header[] = "HTTP/1.1 200 OK\r\n"
+                                     "Server: LUFA RNDIS\r\n"
+                                     "Content-type: text/html\r\n"
+                                     "Connection: close\r\n\r\n";
+
+/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before a resource not found error. This indicates to the host that the given
+ *  given URL is invalid, and gives extra error information.
+ */
+const char PROGMEM HTTP404Header[] = "HTTP/1.1 404 Not Found\r\n"
+                                     "Server: LUFA RNDIS\r\n"
+                                     "Connection: close\r\n\r\n";
+
+/** HTTP page to serve to the host when a HTTP request is made. This page is too long for a single response, thus it is automatically
+ *  broken up into smaller blocks and sent as a series of packets each time the webserver application callback is run.
+ */
+const char PROGMEM HTTPPage[]   =
+		"<html>"
+		"	<head>"
+		"		<title>"
+		"			LUFA Webserver Demo"
+		"		</title>"
+		"	</head>"
+		"	<body>"
+		"		<h1>Hello from your USB AVR!</h1>"
+		"		<p>"
+		"			Hello! Welcome to the LUFA RNDIS Demo Webserver test page, running on your USB AVR via the LUFA library. This demonstrates the HTTP webserver, TCP/IP stack and RNDIS demo all running atop the LUFA USB stack."
+		"			<br /><br />"
+		"			<small>Project Information: <a href=\"http://www.lufa-lib.org\">http://www.lufa-lib.org</a>.</small>"
+		"			<hr />"
+		"			<i>LUFA Version: </i>" LUFA_VERSION_STRING
+		"		</p>"
+		"	</body>"
+		"</html>";
+
+
+/** Initializes the Webserver application, opening the appropriate HTTP port in the TCP handler and registering the application
+ *  callback routine for packets sent to the HTTP protocol port.
+ */
+void Webserver_Init(void)
+{
+	/* Open the HTTP port in the TCP protocol so that HTTP connections to the device can be established */
+	TCP_SetPortState(TCP_PORT_HTTP, TCP_Port_Open, Webserver_ApplicationCallback);
+}
+
+/** Indicates if a given request equals the given HTTP command.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] RequestHeader  HTTP request made by the host
+ *  \param[in] Command        HTTP command to compare the request to
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command matches the request, \c false otherwise
+ */
+static bool IsHTTPCommand(uint8_t* RequestHeader,
+                          char* Command)
+{
+	/* Returns true if the non null terminated string in RequestHeader matches the null terminated string Command */
+	return (strncmp((char*)RequestHeader, Command, strlen(Command)) == 0);
+}
+
+/** Application callback routine, executed each time the TCP processing task runs. This callback determines what request
+ *  has been made (if any), and serves up appropriate responses.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] ConnectionState  Pointer to a TCP Connection State structure giving connection information
+ *  \param[in,out] Buffer       Pointer to the application's send/receive packet buffer
+ */
+void Webserver_ApplicationCallback(TCP_ConnectionState_t* const ConnectionState,
+                                   TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* const Buffer)
+{
+	char*          BufferDataStr = (char*)Buffer->Data;
+	static uint8_t PageBlock     = 0;
+
+	/* Check to see if a packet has been received on the HTTP port from a remote host */
+	if (TCP_APP_HAS_RECEIVED_PACKET(Buffer))
+	{
+		if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "GET"))
+		{
+			if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "GET / "))
+			{
+				PageBlock = 0;
+
+				/* Copy the HTTP 200 response header into the packet buffer */
+				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP200Header);
+
+				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
+				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));
+
+				/* Lock the buffer to Device->Host transmissions only while we send the page contents */
+				TCP_APP_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer);
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				/* Copy the HTTP 404 response header into the packet buffer */
+				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP404Header);
+
+				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
+				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));
+
+				/* All data sent, close the connection */
+				TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);
+			}
+		}
+		else if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "HEAD"))
+		{
+			if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "HEAD / "))
+			{
+				/* Copy the HTTP response header into the packet buffer */
+				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP200Header);
+
+				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
+				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				/* Copy the HTTP response header into the packet buffer */
+				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP404Header);
+
+				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
+				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));
+			}
+
+			/* All data sent, close the connection */
+			TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);
+		}
+		else if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "TRACE"))
+		{
+			/* Echo the host's query back to the host */
+			TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Buffer->Length);
+
+			/* All data sent, close the connection */
+			TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			/* Unknown request, just clear the buffer (drop the packet) */
+			TCP_APP_CLEAR_BUFFER(Buffer);
+		}
+	}
+	else if (TCP_APP_HAVE_CAPTURED_BUFFER(Buffer))
+	{
+		uint16_t RemLength = strlen_P(&HTTPPage[PageBlock * HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE]);
+		uint16_t Length;
+
+		/* Determine the length of the loaded block */
+		Length = MIN(RemLength, HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE);
+
+		/* Copy the next buffer sized block of the page to the packet buffer */
+		strncpy_P(BufferDataStr, &HTTPPage[PageBlock * HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE], Length);
+
+		/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
+		TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Length);
+
+		/* Check to see if the entire page has been sent */
+		if (PageBlock++ == (sizeof(HTTPPage) / HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE))
+		{
+			/* Unlock the buffer so that the host can fill it with future packets */
+			TCP_APP_RELEASE_BUFFER(Buffer);
+
+			/* Close the connection to the host */
+			TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);
+		}
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8307d46da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.h
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Webserver.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _WEBSERVER_H_
+#define _WEBSERVER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+
+		#include "TCP.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Maximum size of a HTTP response per transmission */
+		#define  HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE     128
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void Webserver_Init(void);
+		void Webserver_ApplicationCallback(TCP_ConnectionState_t* const ConnectionState,
+		                                   TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* const Buffer);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f25c4754e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.c
@@ -0,0 +1,294 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the RNDISEthernet demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "RNDISEthernet.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	/* Webserver Initialization */
+	TCP_Init();
+	Webserver_Init();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		Ethernet_Task();
+		TCP_Task();
+		RNDIS_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+	/* Start the PLL to multiply the 2MHz RC oscillator to 32MHz and switch the CPU core to run from it */
+	XMEGACLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ, 2000000, F_CPU);
+	XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL);
+
+	/* Start the 32MHz internal RC oscillator and start the DFLL to increase it to 48MHz using the USB SOF as a reference */
+	XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);
+	XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF, F_USB);
+
+	PMIC.CTRL = PMIC_LOLVLEN_bm | PMIC_MEDLVLEN_bm | PMIC_HILVLEN_bm;
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs and stops all the relevant tasks.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration
+ *  of the USB device after enumeration, and configures the RNDIS device endpoints and starts the relevant tasks.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	/* Setup RNDIS Data Endpoints */
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, 1);
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, 1);
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, 1);
+
+	/* Indicate endpoint configuration success or failure */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to
+ *  the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing
+ *  internally.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	/* Process RNDIS class commands */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case RNDIS_REQ_SendEncapsulatedCommand:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Read in the RNDIS message into the message buffer */
+				Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(RNDISMessageBuffer, USB_ControlRequest.wLength);
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+				/* Process the RNDIS message */
+				ProcessRNDISControlMessage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case RNDIS_REQ_GetEncapsulatedResponse:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				/* Check if a response to the last message is ready */
+				if (!(MessageHeader->MessageLength))
+				{
+					/* Set the response to a single 0x00 byte to indicate that no response is ready */
+					RNDISMessageBuffer[0] = 0;
+					MessageHeader->MessageLength = 1;
+				}
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Write the message response data to the endpoint */
+				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(RNDISMessageBuffer, MessageHeader->MessageLength);
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+				/* Reset the message header once again after transmission */
+				MessageHeader->MessageLength = 0;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Task to manage the sending and receiving of encapsulated RNDIS data and notifications. This removes the RNDIS
+ *  wrapper from received Ethernet frames and places them in the FrameIN global buffer, or adds the RNDIS wrapper
+ *  to a frame in the FrameOUT global before sending the buffer contents to the host.
+ */
+void RNDIS_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Select the notification endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR);
+
+	/* Check if a message response is ready for the host */
+	if (Endpoint_IsINReady() && ResponseReady)
+	{
+		USB_Request_Header_t Notification = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+			{
+				.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+				.bRequest      = RNDIS_NOTIF_ResponseAvailable,
+				.wValue        = 0,
+				.wIndex        = 0,
+				.wLength       = 0,
+			};
+
+		/* Indicate that a message response is ready for the host */
+		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&Notification, sizeof(Notification), NULL);
+
+		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+		/* Indicate a response is no longer ready */
+		ResponseReady = false;
+	}
+
+	/* Don't process the data endpoints until the system is in the data initialized state, and the buffer is free */
+	if ((CurrRNDISState == RNDIS_Data_Initialized) && !(MessageHeader->MessageLength))
+	{
+		/* Create a new packet header for reading/writing */
+		RNDIS_Packet_Message_t RNDISPacketHeader;
+
+		/* Select the data OUT endpoint */
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPADDR);
+
+		/* Check if the data OUT endpoint contains data, and that the IN buffer is empty */
+		if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived() && !(FrameIN.FrameLength))
+		{
+			/* Read in the packet message header */
+			Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&RNDISPacketHeader, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t), NULL);
+
+			/* Stall the request if the data is too large */
+			if (RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength > ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX)
+			{
+				Endpoint_StallTransaction();
+				return;
+			}
+
+			/* Read in the Ethernet frame into the buffer */
+			Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(FrameIN.FrameData, RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength, NULL);
+
+			/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+			/* Store the size of the Ethernet frame */
+			FrameIN.FrameLength = RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength;
+		}
+
+		/* Select the data IN endpoint */
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPADDR);
+
+		/* Check if the data IN endpoint is ready for more data, and that the IN buffer is full */
+		if (Endpoint_IsINReady() && FrameOUT.FrameLength)
+		{
+			/* Clear the packet header with all 0s so that the relevant fields can be filled */
+			memset(&RNDISPacketHeader, 0, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t));
+
+			/* Construct the required packet header fields in the buffer */
+			RNDISPacketHeader.MessageType   = REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MSG;
+			RNDISPacketHeader.MessageLength = (sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) + FrameOUT.FrameLength);
+			RNDISPacketHeader.DataOffset    = (sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t));
+			RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength    = FrameOUT.FrameLength;
+
+			/* Send the packet header to the host */
+			Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&RNDISPacketHeader, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t), NULL);
+
+			/* Send the Ethernet frame data to the host */
+			Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(FrameOUT.FrameData, RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength, NULL);
+
+			/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+			/* Indicate Ethernet OUT buffer no longer full */
+			FrameOUT.FrameLength = 0;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+/** Ethernet frame processing task. This task checks to see if a frame has been received, and if so hands off the processing
+ *  of the frame to the Ethernet processing routines.
+ */
+void Ethernet_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Task for Ethernet processing. Incoming ethernet frames are loaded into the FrameIN structure, and
+	   outgoing frames should be loaded into the FrameOUT structure. Both structures can only hold a single
+	   Ethernet frame at a time, so the FrameInBuffer bool is used to indicate when the buffers contain data. */
+
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Check if a frame has been written to the IN frame buffer */
+	if (FrameIN.FrameLength)
+	{
+		/* Indicate packet processing started */
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+		/* Process the ethernet frame - replace this with your own Ethernet handler code as desired */
+		Ethernet_ProcessPacket();
+
+		/* Indicate packet processing complete */
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..90fbae335
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.h
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for RNDISEthernet.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _RNDISETHERNET_H_
+#define _RNDISETHERNET_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include "Lib/RNDIS.h"
+		#include "Lib/Ethernet.h"
+		#include "Lib/TCP.h"
+		#include "Lib/ARP.h"
+		#include "Lib/Webserver.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void RNDIS_Task(void);
+		void Ethernet_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..496ab07a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,146 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage RNDIS Class Ethernet Demo (with Webserver/Telnet)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series AU XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxAxU)
+ *  \li Series B XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxBxU)
+ *  \li Series C XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxCxU)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Remote NDIS (Microsoft Proprietary CDC Class Networking Standard)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Microsoft RNDIS Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Remote Network Driver Interface demonstration application.
+ *  This gives a simple reference application for implementing
+ *  a CDC RNDIS device acting as a simple network interface for
+ *  ethernet packet exchange. RNDIS is a proprietary Microsoft
+ *  standard; this demo will only work on Windows 2000 (manually
+ *  patched with the Microsoft RNDIS hotfix) and above (with no
+ *  manual patches), or on the latest Linux kernels.
+ *
+ *  Before running, you will need to install the INF file that
+ *  is located in the RNDISEthernet project directory. This will
+ *  enable Windows to use its inbuilt RNDIS drivers, negating the
+ *  need for special Windows drivers for the device. To install,
+ *  right-click the .INF file and choose the Install option. If
+ *  Windows 2000 is used, the Microsoft INF file in the hotfix
+ *  will need to be altered to use the VID/PID of the demo and
+ *  then chosen instead of the LUFA RNDIS INF file when prompted.
+ *
+ *  When enumerated, this demo will install as a new network
+ *  adapter which ethernet packets can be sent to and received
+ *  from. Running on top of the adapter is a very simple TCP/IP
+ *  stack with a HTTP webserver and TELNET host which can be
+ *  accessed through a web browser at IP address 10.0.0.2:80 or
+ *  through a TELNET client at 10.0.0.2:25. This device also supports
+ *  ping echos via the ICMP protocol.
+ *
+ *  \note The TCP/IP stack in this demo has a number of limitations
+ *  and should serve as an example only - it is not fully featured nor
+ *  compliant to the TCP/IP specification. For complete projects, it is
+ *  recommended that it be replaced with an external open source TCP/IP
+ *  stack that is feature complete, such as the uIP stack.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>CLIENT_IP_ADDRESS</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Configures the IP address given to the client (PC) via the DHCP server.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>SERVER_IP_ADDRESS</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Configures the IP address of the virtual server.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>ADAPTER_MAC_ADDRESS</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Configures the MAC address of the RNDIS adapter on the host (PC) side.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Configures the MAC address of the virtual server on the network.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_ETHERNET</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received Ethernet headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_ARP</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received ARP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_IP</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received IP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_ICMP</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received ICMP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_TCP</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received TCP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_UDP</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received UDP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_DHCP</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received DHCP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2cba10c9e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="RNDIS Ethernet Device Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.rndis.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.rndis"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="RNDIS Ethernet Device Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.rndis.example.xmega">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.rndis"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.xmega"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atxmega128a1u"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="32000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="48000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.rndis" caption="RNDIS Ethernet Device Demo (Low Level APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Microsoft RNDIS Ethernet networking device demo, implementing a basic HTTP webserver. This demo uses the Low Level LUFA APIs to manually implement a USB Class for demonstration purposes without using the simpler in-built LUFA Class Driver APIs.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="RNDIS Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="RNDISEthernet.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="RNDISEthernet.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/ARP.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/DHCP.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/Ethernet.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/ICMP.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/IP.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/ProtocolDecoders.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/RNDIS.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/TCP.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/UDP.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/Webserver.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="RNDISEthernet.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/ARP.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/DHCP.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/Ethernet.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/ICMP.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/IP.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/ProtocolDecoders.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/RNDIS.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/TCP.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/UDP.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/Webserver.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/EthernetProtocols.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9147230ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - RNDIS Ethernet Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..32e881888
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/RNDISEthernet/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = RNDISEthernet
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c Lib/Ethernet.c Lib/ProtocolDecoders.c Lib/RNDIS.c Lib/ICMP.c Lib/TCP.c Lib/UDP.c \
+               Lib/DHCP.c Lib/ARP.c Lib/IP.c Lib/Webserver.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8d282325e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_RC32MCLKSRC | USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH)
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX               4
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..314151226
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,245 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+	.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2044,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Header =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.CDCSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_ACM =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM,
+
+			.Capabilities           = 0x06,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Union =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union,
+
+			.MasterInterfaceNumber  = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.SlaveInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_NotificationEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA CDC Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d0a17a18e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 2)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+
+			// CDC Control Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t    CDC_Functional_Header;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t       CDC_Functional_ACM;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t     CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_NotificationEndpoint;
+
+			// CDC Data Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI = 0, /**< CDC CCI interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI = 1, /**< CDC DCI interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/LUFA VirtualSerial.inf b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/LUFA VirtualSerial.inf
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..21d2d12b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/LUFA VirtualSerial.inf
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+;************************************************************
+; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+;************************************************************
+
+[DefaultInstall]
+CopyINF="LUFA VirtualSerial.inf"
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+DriverVer=7/1/2012,10.0.0.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTx86, NTamd64, NTia64
+
+[SourceDisksNames]
+
+[SourceDisksFiles]
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+[DriverInstall]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=FakeModemCopyFileSection
+AddReg=DriverInstall.AddReg
+
+[DriverInstall.Services]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, LowerFilter_Service_Inst
+
+[DriverInstall.AddReg]
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"msports.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
+
+[DeviceList.NTx86]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
+
+[DeviceList.NTia64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org"
+DESCRIPTION="LUFA CDC-ACM Virtual Serial Port"
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cdd358571
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.c
@@ -0,0 +1,243 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the VirtualSerial demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and
+ *  is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "VirtualSerial.h"
+
+/** Contains the current baud rate and other settings of the virtual serial port. While this demo does not use
+ *  the physical USART and thus does not use these settings, they must still be retained and returned to the host
+ *  upon request or the host will assume the device is non-functional.
+ *
+ *  These values are set by the host via a class-specific request, however they are not required to be used accurately.
+ *  It is possible to completely ignore these value or use other settings as the host is completely unaware of the physical
+ *  serial link characteristics and instead sends and receives data in endpoint streams.
+ */
+static CDC_LineEncoding_t LineEncoding = { .BaudRateBPS = 0,
+                                           .CharFormat  = CDC_LINEENCODING_OneStopBit,
+                                           .ParityType  = CDC_PARITY_None,
+                                           .DataBits    = 8                            };
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		CDC_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+	/* Start the PLL to multiply the 2MHz RC oscillator to 32MHz and switch the CPU core to run from it */
+	XMEGACLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ, 2000000, F_CPU);
+	XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL);
+
+	/* Start the 32MHz internal RC oscillator and start the DFLL to increase it to 48MHz using the USB SOF as a reference */
+	XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);
+	XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF, F_USB);
+
+	PMIC.CTRL = PMIC_LOLVLEN_bm | PMIC_MEDLVLEN_bm | PMIC_HILVLEN_bm;
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs and stops the USB management and CDC management tasks.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
+ *  of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the CDC management task started.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	/* Setup CDC Data Endpoints */
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, 1);
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, 1);
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK,  CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, 1);
+
+	/* Reset line encoding baud rate so that the host knows to send new values */
+	LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS = 0;
+
+	/* Indicate endpoint configuration success or failure */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to
+ *  the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing
+ *  internally.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	/* Process CDC specific control requests */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case CDC_REQ_GetLineEncoding:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Write the line coding data to the control endpoint */
+				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&LineEncoding, sizeof(CDC_LineEncoding_t));
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case CDC_REQ_SetLineEncoding:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Read the line coding data in from the host into the global struct */
+				Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(&LineEncoding, sizeof(CDC_LineEncoding_t));
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case CDC_REQ_SetControlLineState:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+
+				/* NOTE: Here you can read in the line state mask from the host, to get the current state of the output handshake
+				         lines. The mask is read in from the wValue parameter in USB_ControlRequest, and can be masked against the
+						 CONTROL_LINE_OUT_* masks to determine the RTS and DTR line states using the following code:
+				*/
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Function to manage CDC data transmission and reception to and from the host. */
+void CDC_Task(void)
+{
+	char*       ReportString    = NULL;
+	uint8_t     JoyStatus_LCL   = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	static bool ActionSent      = false;
+
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Determine if a joystick action has occurred */
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Up\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Down\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Left\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Right\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Pressed\r\n";
+	else
+	  ActionSent = false;
+
+	/* Flag management - Only allow one string to be sent per action */
+	if ((ReportString != NULL) && (ActionSent == false) && LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS)
+	{
+		ActionSent = true;
+
+		/* Select the Serial Tx Endpoint */
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPADDR);
+
+		/* Write the String to the Endpoint */
+		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(ReportString, strlen(ReportString), NULL);
+
+		/* Remember if the packet to send completely fills the endpoint */
+		bool IsFull = (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE);
+
+		/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+		/* If the last packet filled the endpoint, send an empty packet to release the buffer on
+		 * the receiver (otherwise all data will be cached until a non-full packet is received) */
+		if (IsFull)
+		{
+			/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for another packet */
+			Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
+
+			/* Send an empty packet to ensure that the host does not buffer data sent to it */
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Select the Serial Rx Endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPADDR);
+
+	/* Throw away any received data from the host */
+	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bdfc9f03f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.h
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for VirtualSerial.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _VIRTUALSERIAL_H_
+#define _VIRTUALSERIAL_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY         LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING     (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY           (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR           (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void CDC_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..61b665674
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/VirtualSerial.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Communications Device Class (Virtual Serial Port) Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *  \li Series AU XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxAxU)
+ *  \li Series B XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxBxU)
+ *  \li Series C XMEGA AVRs (ATXMEGAxxxCxU)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Communications Device Class demonstration application.
+ *  This gives a simple reference application for implementing
+ *  a CDC device acting as a virtual serial port. Joystick
+ *  actions are transmitted to the host as strings. The device
+ *  does not respond to serial data sent from the host.
+ *
+ *  After running this demo for the first time on a new computer,
+ *  you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo
+ *  project's directory as the device's driver when running under
+ *  Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers,
+ *  negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other
+ *  Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt
+ *  CDC-ACM drivers.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1eb328b51
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Virtual Serial CDC Device Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.cdc.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.cdc"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="Virtual Serial CDC Device Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.cdc.example.xmega">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.cdc"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.xmega"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atxmega128a1u"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="32000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="48000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.device.lowlevel.cdc" caption="Virtual Serial CDC Device Demo (Low Level APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Virtual Serial device demo, implementing a virtual serial channel between the host PC and the device. This demo uses the Low Level LUFA APIs to manually implement a USB Class for demonstration purposes without using the simpler in-built LUFA Class Driver APIs.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="CDC Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="VirtualSerial.txt"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="LUFA VirtualSerial.inf"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="VirtualSerial.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="VirtualSerial.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0d0ae156c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Virtual Serial Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a7bada895
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/VirtualSerial/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = VirtualSerial
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1450df5e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/LowLevel/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+
+# Makefile to build all the LUFA Device Demos. Call with "make all" to
+# rebuild all Device demos.
+
+# Projects are pre-cleaned before each one is built, to ensure any
+# custom LUFA library build options are reflected in the compiled
+# code.
+
+PROJECT_DIRECTORIES := $(shell ls -d */)
+
+# This makefile is potentially infinitely recursive if something really bad
+# happens when determining the set of project directories - hard-abort if
+# more than 10 levels deep to avoid angry emails.
+ifeq ($(MAKELEVEL), 10)
+   $(error EMERGENCY ABORT: INFINITE RECURSION DETECTED)
+endif
+
+# Need to special-case building without a per-project object directory
+ifeq ($(OBJDIR),)
+   # If no target specified, force "clean all" and disallow parallel build
+   ifeq ($(MAKECMDGOALS),)
+      MAKECMDGOALS := clean all
+      .NOTPARALLEL:
+   endif
+
+   # If one of the targets is to build, force "clean" beforehand and disallow parallel build
+   ifneq ($(findstring all, $(MAKECMDGOALS)),)
+      MAKECMDGOALS := clean $(MAKECMDGOALS)
+      .NOTPARALLEL:
+   endif
+endif
+
+%: $(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES)
+	@echo . > /dev/null
+
+$(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES):
+	@$(MAKE) -C $@ $(MAKECMDGOALS)
+
+.PHONY: $(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES)
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3325e97d8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Device/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+
+# Makefile to build all the LUFA Class Driver and Low Level Demos. Call with
+# "make all" to rebuild all demos of both types.
+
+# Projects are pre-cleaned before each one is built, to ensure any
+# custom LUFA library build options are reflected in the compiled
+# code.
+
+all:
+
+%:
+	$(MAKE) -C ClassDriver $@
+	$(MAKE) -C LowLevel $@
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..db1d85b24
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bcd5b5872
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,221 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MouseReport[] =
+{
+	/* Use the HID class driver's standard Mouse report.
+	 *   Min X/Y Axis values: -1
+	 *   Max X/Y Axis values:  1
+	 *   Min physical X/Y Axis values (used to determine resolution): -1
+	 *   Max physical X/Y Axis values (used to determine resolution):  1
+	 *   Buttons: 3
+	 *   Absolute screen coordinates: false
+	 */
+	HID_DESCRIPTOR_MOUSE(-1, 1, -1, 1, 3, false)
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2041,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.HID_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_Mouse,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = HID_CSCP_HIDClass,
+			.SubClass               = HID_CSCP_BootSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = HID_CSCP_MouseBootProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_MouseHID =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = HID_DTYPE_HID},
+
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(1,1,1),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = HID_DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(MouseReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = MOUSE_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MOUSE_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Mouse Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_HID:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_MouseHID;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t);
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_Report:
+			Address = &MouseReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(MouseReport);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7ba3608e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// Mouse HID Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t              HID_MouseHID;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_Mouse = 0, /**< Mouse interface descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define MOUSE_EPADDR              (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 1)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define MOUSE_EPSIZE              8
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/DeviceFunctions.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/DeviceFunctions.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e81cd43ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/DeviceFunctions.c
@@ -0,0 +1,155 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Device Mode USB Mouse functionality for the MouseHostDevice demo. This file contains the Device mode
+ *  USB Mouse related code of the demo and is responsible for all the Device mode Mouse functionality.
+ */
+
+#include "DeviceFunctions.h"
+
+/** Buffer to hold the previously generated Mouse Device HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
+static uint8_t PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t)];
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Mouse_HID_Device_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber            = INTERFACE_ID_Mouse,
+				.ReportINEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address            = MOUSE_EPADDR,
+						.Size               = MOUSE_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks              = 1,
+					},
+				.PrevReportINBuffer         = PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer,
+				.PrevReportINBufferSize     = sizeof(PrevMouseHIDReportBuffer),
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB WakeUp event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Suspend event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	if (!(HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Mouse_HID_Device_Interface)))
+	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Mouse_HID_Device_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Mouse_HID_Device_Interface);
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]     HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in,out] ReportID    Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
+ *  \param[in]     ReportType  Type of the report to create, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_In or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature
+ *  \param[out]    ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
+ *  \param[out]    ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent)
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true to force the sending of the report, \c false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                         void* ReportData,
+                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize)
+{
+	USB_MouseReport_Data_t* MouseReport = (USB_MouseReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
+
+	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL    = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus();
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  MouseReport->Y = -1;
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  MouseReport->Y =  1;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  MouseReport->X =  1;
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  MouseReport->X = -1;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+	  MouseReport->Button |= (1 << 0);
+
+	if (ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
+	  MouseReport->Button |= (1 << 1);
+
+	*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t);
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in] ReportID    Report ID of the received report from the host
+ *  \param[in] ReportType  The type of report that the host has sent, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature
+ *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the received report has been stored
+ *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
+ */
+void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                          const void* ReportData,
+                                          const uint16_t ReportSize)
+{
+	// Unused (but mandatory for the HID class driver) in this demo, since there are no Host->Device reports
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/DeviceFunctions.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/DeviceFunctions.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..96a766598
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/DeviceFunctions.h
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DeviceFunctions.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MOUSE_DEVICE_FUNCTIONS_H_
+#define _MOUSE_DEVICE_FUNCTIONS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "MouseHostDevice.h"
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Mouse_HID_Device_Interface;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+		                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+		                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                                         void* ReportData,
+		                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize);
+		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+		                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+		                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                                          const void* ReportData,
+		                                          const uint16_t ReportSize);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/HostFunctions.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/HostFunctions.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ad0268b24
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/HostFunctions.c
@@ -0,0 +1,184 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Host Mode USB Mouse functionality for the MouseHostDevice demo. This file contains the Host mode
+ *  USB Mouse related code of the demo and is responsible for all the Host mode Mouse functionality.
+ */
+
+#include "HostFunctions.h"
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t Mouse_HID_Host_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipe             =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.DataINPipe             =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.HIDInterfaceProtocol   = HID_CSCP_MouseBootProtocol,
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+	if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+	                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+	{
+		printf("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n");
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Mouse_HID_Host_Interface,
+	                            ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != HID_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+	{
+		printf("Attached Device Not a Valid Mouse.\r\n");
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		printf("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n");
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (HID_Host_SetBootProtocol(&Mouse_HID_Host_Interface) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		printf("Could not Set Boot Protocol Mode.\r\n");
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	printf("Mouse Enumerated.\r\n");
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Host USB management task. This task handles the control of USB Mice while in USB Host mode,
+ *  setting up the appropriate data pipes and processing reports from the attached device.
+ */
+void MouseHost_Task(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	if (HID_Host_IsReportReceived(&Mouse_HID_Host_Interface))
+	{
+		uint8_t LEDMask  = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+		USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReport;
+		HID_Host_ReceiveReport(&Mouse_HID_Host_Interface, &MouseReport);
+
+		printf_P(PSTR("dX:%2d dY:%2d Button:%d\r\n"), MouseReport.X,
+		                                              MouseReport.Y,
+		                                              MouseReport.Button);
+		if (MouseReport.X > 0)
+		  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
+		else if (MouseReport.X < 0)
+		  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED2;
+
+		if (MouseReport.Y > 0)
+		  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
+		else if (MouseReport.Y < 0)
+		  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
+
+		if (MouseReport.Button)
+		  LEDMask  = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/HostFunctions.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/HostFunctions.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..aef2bacca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/HostFunctions.h
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for HostFunctions.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MOUSE_HOST_FUNCTIONS_H_
+#define _MOUSE_HOST_FUNCTIONS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "MouseHostDevice.h"
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t Mouse_HID_Host_Interface;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void MouseHost_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/MouseHostDevice.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/MouseHostDevice.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b8e98537d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/MouseHostDevice.c
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MouseHostDevice demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the overall control flow of the demo.
+ */
+
+#include "MouseHostDevice.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Mouse Host/Device Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		/* Determine which USB mode we are currently in */
+		if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Host)
+		{
+			MouseHost_Task();
+			HID_Host_USBTask(&Mouse_HID_Host_Interface);
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			HID_Device_USBTask(&Mouse_HID_Device_Interface);
+		}
+
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Joystick_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	USB_Init(USB_MODE_UID);
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB mode change event. */
+void EVENT_USB_UIDChange(void)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_YELLOW "UID Change to %S mode\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE),
+	         (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device) ? PSTR("Device") : PSTR("Host"));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/MouseHostDevice.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/MouseHostDevice.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..258c7c1e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/MouseHostDevice.h
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MouseHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MOUSE_HOST_DEVICE_H_
+#define _MOUSE_HOST_DEVICE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "DeviceFunctions.h"
+		#include "HostFunctions.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_UIDChange(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/MouseHostDevice.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/MouseHostDevice.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d3fb9a561
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/MouseHostDevice.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Mouse Host/Device Dual Role Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Dual Mode Host/Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Mouse host/device dual role demonstration application. This gives a simple
+ *  reference application for implementing a dual role USB Mouse, for USB mice
+ *  using the standard mouse boot protocol HID profile.
+ *
+ *  <b>When in host mode:</b>
+ *  Mouse movement and button presses are displayed on the board LEDs,
+ *  as well as printed out the serial terminal as formatted dY, dY and
+ *  button status information.
+ *
+ *  This uses a naive method where the mouse is set to Boot Protocol mode, so
+ *  that the report structure is fixed and known. A better implementation
+ *  uses the HID report parser for correct report data processing across
+ *  all compatible mice with advanced characteristics, as shown in the
+ *  MouseHostWithParser Host demo application.
+ *
+ *  Currently only single interface mice are supported.
+ *
+ *  <b>When in device mode:</b>
+ *  Upon enumeration the system will automatically enumerate and function
+ *  as a mouse when the USB connection to a host is present. To use
+ *  the mouse, move the joystick to move the pointer, and push the
+ *  joystick inwards to simulate a left-button click. The HWB serves as
+ *  the right mouse button.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7cd93babb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Mouse HID Dual USB Mode Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.dualrole.class.mouse.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.dualrole.class.mouse"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.dualrole.class.mouse" caption="Mouse HID Dual USB Mode Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Mouse host and device dual role demo, implementing a basic mouse device and host. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Dual Role"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="MouseHostDevice.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="MouseHostDevice.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="DeviceFunctions.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="HostFunctions.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="MouseHostDevice.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="DeviceFunctions.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="HostFunctions.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2c89342ab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mouse Host/Device Dual Role Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..929b668f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/MouseHostDevice/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = MouseHostDevice
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c DeviceFunctions.c HostFunctions.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..763f85090
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/ClassDriver/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+
+# Makefile to build all the LUFA Dual Role Demos. Call with "make all" to
+# rebuild all Dual Role demos.
+
+# Projects are pre-cleaned before each one is built, to ensure any
+# custom LUFA library build options are reflected in the compiled
+# code.
+
+PROJECT_DIRECTORIES := $(shell ls -d */)
+
+# This makefile is potentially infinitely recursive if something really bad
+# happens when determining the set of project directories - hard-abort if
+# more than 10 levels deep to avoid angry emails.
+ifeq ($(MAKELEVEL), 10)
+   $(error EMERGENCY ABORT: INFINITE RECURSION DETECTED)
+endif
+
+# Need to special-case building without a per-project object directory
+ifeq ($(OBJDIR),)
+   # If no target specified, force "clean all" and disallow parallel build
+   ifeq ($(MAKECMDGOALS),)
+      MAKECMDGOALS := clean all
+      .NOTPARALLEL:
+   endif
+
+   # If one of the targets is to build, force "clean" beforehand and disallow parallel build
+   ifneq ($(findstring all, $(MAKECMDGOALS)),)
+      MAKECMDGOALS := clean $(MAKECMDGOALS)
+      .NOTPARALLEL:
+   endif
+endif
+
+%: $(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES)
+	@echo . > /dev/null
+
+$(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES):
+	@$(MAKE) -C $@ $(MAKECMDGOALS)
+
+.PHONY: $(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES)
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f282d6f55
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/DualRole/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+
+# Makefile to build all the LUFA Class Driver and Low Level Demos. Call with
+# "make all" to rebuild all demos of both types.
+
+# Projects are pre-cleaned before each one is built, to ensure any
+# custom LUFA library build options are reflected in the compiled
+# code.
+
+all:
+
+%:
+	$(MAKE) -C ClassDriver $@
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AndroidAccessoryHost/AndroidAccessoryHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AndroidAccessoryHost/AndroidAccessoryHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8260ba9b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AndroidAccessoryHost/AndroidAccessoryHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,239 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the AndroidAccessoryHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "AndroidAccessoryHost.h"
+
+/** LUFA Android Open Accessory Class driver interface configuration and state information. This
+ *  structure is passed to all Android Open Accessory Class driver functions, so that multiple
+ *  instances of the same class within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t AndroidDevice_AOA_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipe             =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTPipe            =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.PropertyStrings =
+					{
+						[AOA_STRING_Manufacturer] = "Dean Camera",
+						[AOA_STRING_Model]        = "LUFA Android Demo",
+						[AOA_STRING_Description]  = "LUFA Android Demo",
+						[AOA_STRING_Version]      = "1.0",
+						[AOA_STRING_URI]          = "http://www.lufa-lib.org",
+						[AOA_STRING_Serial]       = "0000000012345678",
+					},
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Android Accessory Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		AOAHost_Task();
+
+		AOA_Host_USBTask(&AndroidDevice_AOA_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Task to manage an enumerated USB Android Accessory device once connected, to print received data
+ *  from the device to the serial port.
+ */
+void AOAHost_Task(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	if (AOA_Host_BytesReceived(&AndroidDevice_AOA_Interface))
+	{
+		/* Echo received bytes from the attached device through the USART */
+		int16_t ReceivedByte = AOA_Host_ReceiveByte(&AndroidDevice_AOA_Interface);
+		if (!(ReceivedByte < 0))
+		{
+			/* Turn on and off LED1 based on the bytes received */
+			LEDs_ChangeLEDs(LEDS_LED1, ReceivedByte ? LEDS_LED1 : LEDS_NO_LEDS);
+
+			putchar(ReceivedByte);
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor;
+
+	if (USB_Host_GetDeviceDescriptor(&DeviceDescriptor) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Device Descriptor.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	bool NeedModeSwitch;
+	if (!(AOA_Host_ValidateAccessoryDevice(&AndroidDevice_AOA_Interface, &DeviceDescriptor, &NeedModeSwitch)))
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Not an Android device.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (NeedModeSwitch)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Not in Accessory mode, switching...\r\n"));
+		AOA_Host_StartAccessoryMode(&AndroidDevice_AOA_Interface);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+	if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+	                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (AOA_Host_ConfigurePipes(&AndroidDevice_AOA_Interface,
+	                            ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != AOA_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid Android Accessory Class Device.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Android Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AndroidAccessoryHost/AndroidAccessoryHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AndroidAccessoryHost/AndroidAccessoryHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..81bbb7bae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AndroidAccessoryHost/AndroidAccessoryHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for AndroidAccessoryHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ANDROIDACCESSORY_HOST_H_
+#define _ANDROIDACCESSORY_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void AOAHost_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+#endif
+
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AndroidAccessoryHost/AndroidAccessoryHost.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AndroidAccessoryHost/AndroidAccessoryHost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..63d192d1a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AndroidAccessoryHost/AndroidAccessoryHost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Android Accessory Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Android Accessory Host Class</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Android Accessory Host Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Android Accessory Host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing an Android Accessory Host device capable of hosting
+ *  Android powered mobile devices to send and receive data.
+ *
+ *  Data sent from the Android device will be sent out the AVR's serial port.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AndroidAccessoryHost/AndroidHostApp/AndroidHostApp.zip b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AndroidAccessoryHost/AndroidHostApp/AndroidHostApp.zip
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c433d79e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AndroidAccessoryHost/AndroidHostApp/AndroidHostApp.zip
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AndroidAccessoryHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AndroidAccessoryHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..884b50398
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AndroidAccessoryHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     0
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AndroidAccessoryHost/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AndroidAccessoryHost/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..59efae361
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AndroidAccessoryHost/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Android Accessory Host Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.host.class.android.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.host.class.android"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.host.class.android" caption="Android Accessory Host Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Android Accessory Host demo, implementing a basic USB device whose LEDs can be controlled via an Android device. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="Android Accessory Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="AndroidAccessoryHost.txt"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="directory" value="AndroidHostApp"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="AndroidAccessoryHost.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="AndroidAccessoryHost.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AndroidAccessoryHost/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AndroidAccessoryHost/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a17aa3bb0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AndroidAccessoryHost/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Android Accessory Mode Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AndroidAccessoryHost/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AndroidAccessoryHost/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..24b7a5bbc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AndroidAccessoryHost/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = AndroidAccessoryHost
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioInputHost/AudioInputHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioInputHost/AudioInputHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ad78d2f8a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioInputHost/AudioInputHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,239 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the AudioInputHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "AudioInputHost.h"
+
+/** LUFA Audio Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all Audio Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t Microphone_Audio_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipe             =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1),
+					},
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Audio Input Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		Audio_Host_USBTask(&Microphone_Audio_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** ISR to handle the reloading of the PWM timer with the next sample. */
+ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	uint8_t PrevPipe = Pipe_GetCurrentPipe();
+
+	/* Check that the USB bus is ready for the next sample to read */
+	if (Audio_Host_IsSampleReceived(&Microphone_Audio_Interface))
+	{
+		/* Retrieve the signed 16-bit audio sample, convert to 8-bit */
+		int8_t Sample_8Bit = (Audio_Host_ReadSample16(&Microphone_Audio_Interface) >> 8);
+
+		/* Load the sample into the PWM timer channel */
+		OCR3A = (Sample_8Bit ^ (1 << 7));
+
+		uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+		/* Turn on LEDs as the sample amplitude increases */
+		if (Sample_8Bit > 16)
+		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4);
+		else if (Sample_8Bit > 8)
+		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3);
+		else if (Sample_8Bit > 4)
+		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+		else if (Sample_8Bit > 2)
+		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+	}
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PrevPipe);
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+	if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+	                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (Audio_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Microphone_Audio_Interface,
+	                              ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != AUDIO_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid Audio Input Device.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (Audio_Host_StartStopStreaming(&Microphone_Audio_Interface, true) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Enabling Audio Stream.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	USB_Audio_SampleFreq_t SampleRate = AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(48000);
+	if (Audio_Host_GetSetEndpointProperty(&Microphone_Audio_Interface, Microphone_Audio_Interface.Config.DataINPipe.Address,
+	                                      AUDIO_REQ_SetCurrent, AUDIO_EPCONTROL_SamplingFreq,
+	                                      sizeof(SampleRate), &SampleRate) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Audio Sampling Frequency.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Sample reload timer initialization */
+	TIMSK0  = (1 << OCIE0A);
+	OCR0A   = ((F_CPU / 8 / 48000) - 1);
+	TCCR0A  = (1 << WGM01);  // CTC mode
+	TCCR0B  = (1 << CS01);   // Fcpu/8 speed
+
+	/* Set speaker as output */
+	DDRC   |= (1 << 6);
+
+	/* PWM speaker timer initialization */
+	TCCR3A  = ((1 << WGM30) | (1 << COM3A1) | (1 << COM3A0)); // Set on match, clear on TOP
+	TCCR3B  = ((1 << WGM32) | (1 << CS30));  // Fast 8-Bit PWM, F_CPU speed
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Audio Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioInputHost/AudioInputHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioInputHost/AudioInputHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..eb27bb572
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioInputHost/AudioInputHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for AudioInputHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _AUDIO_INPUT_HOST_H_
+#define _AUDIO_INPUT_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioInputHost/AudioInputHost.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioInputHost/AudioInputHost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0736e0df4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioInputHost/AudioInputHost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Audio Input Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Audio Class</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Standard Audio Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Audio 1.0 Class Specification \n
+ *        USBIF Audio 1.0 Class Terminal Types Specification \n
+ *        USBIF Audio 1.0 Data Formats Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Audio Input host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Audio host, for USB Audio devices using
+ *  the USB Audio 1.0 class profile.
+ *
+ *  Incoming audio will output in 8-bit PWM onto the timer 3 output compare
+ *  channel A, and will also be indicated on the board LEDs. Decouple the PWM
+ *  output with a capacitor and attach to a speaker to hear the audio.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioInputHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioInputHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d657a214
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioInputHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioInputHost/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioInputHost/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c2daffbdf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioInputHost/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Audio Input Host Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.host.class.audio_input.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.host.class.audio_input"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.host.class.audio_input" caption="Audio Input Host Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Audio Input Host demo, implementing a basic USB audio sink that can output incoming audio data to a speaker. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="Audio Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="AudioInputHost.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="AudioInputHost.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="AudioInputHost.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioInputHost/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioInputHost/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2440541f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioInputHost/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Audio Input Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioInputHost/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioInputHost/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2447c8da9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioInputHost/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = AudioInputHost
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioOutputHost/AudioOutputHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioOutputHost/AudioOutputHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..958d3589f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioOutputHost/AudioOutputHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,243 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the AudioOutputHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "AudioOutputHost.h"
+
+/** LUFA Audio Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all Audio Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t Speaker_Audio_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataOUTPipe            =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2),
+					},
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Audio Output Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		Audio_Host_USBTask(&Speaker_Audio_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** ISR to handle the reloading of the PWM timer with the next sample. */
+ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	uint8_t PrevPipe = Pipe_GetCurrentPipe();
+
+	/* Check that the USB bus is ready for the next sample to write */
+	if (Audio_Host_IsReadyForNextSample(&Speaker_Audio_Interface))
+	{
+		int16_t AudioSample;
+
+		#if defined(USE_TEST_TONE)
+			static uint8_t SquareWaveSampleCount;
+			static int16_t CurrentWaveValue;
+
+			/* In test tone mode, generate a square wave at 1/256 of the sample rate */
+			if (SquareWaveSampleCount++ == 0xFF)
+			  CurrentWaveValue ^= 0x8000;
+
+			/* Only generate audio if the board button is being pressed */
+			AudioSample = (Buttons_GetStatus() & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ? CurrentWaveValue : 0;
+		#else
+			/* Audio sample is ADC value scaled to fit the entire range */
+			AudioSample = ((SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE / ADC_MAX_RANGE) * ADC_GetResult());
+
+			#if defined(MICROPHONE_BIASED_TO_HALF_RAIL)
+			/* Microphone is biased to half rail voltage, subtract the bias from the sample value */
+			AudioSample -= (SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE / 2);
+			#endif
+		#endif
+
+		Audio_Host_WriteSample16(&Speaker_Audio_Interface, AudioSample);
+		Audio_Host_WriteSample16(&Speaker_Audio_Interface, AudioSample);
+	}
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PrevPipe);
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	ADC_Init(ADC_FREE_RUNNING | ADC_PRESCALE_32);
+	ADC_SetupChannel(MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL);
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+
+	/* Start the ADC conversion in free running mode */
+	ADC_StartReading(ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC | ADC_RIGHT_ADJUSTED | ADC_GET_CHANNEL_MASK(MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL));
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+	if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+	                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (Audio_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Speaker_Audio_Interface,
+	                              ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != AUDIO_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid Audio Output Device.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (Audio_Host_StartStopStreaming(&Speaker_Audio_Interface, true) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Enabling Audio Stream.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	USB_Audio_SampleFreq_t SampleRate = AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(48000);
+	if (Audio_Host_GetSetEndpointProperty(&Speaker_Audio_Interface, Speaker_Audio_Interface.Config.DataOUTPipe.Address,
+	                                      AUDIO_REQ_SetCurrent, AUDIO_EPCONTROL_SamplingFreq,
+	                                      sizeof(SampleRate), &SampleRate) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Audio Sampling Frequency.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Sample reload timer initialization */
+	TIMSK0  = (1 << OCIE0A);
+	OCR0A   = ((F_CPU / 8 / 48000) - 1);
+	TCCR0A  = (1 << WGM01);  // CTC mode
+	TCCR0B  = (1 << CS01);   // Fcpu/8 speed
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Audio Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioOutputHost/AudioOutputHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioOutputHost/AudioOutputHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..677d8671e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioOutputHost/AudioOutputHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for AudioOutputHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _AUDIO_OUTPUT_HOST_H_
+#define _AUDIO_OUTPUT_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Maximum audio sample value for the microphone input. */
+		#define SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE          0xFFFF
+
+		/** Maximum ADC range for the microphone input. */
+		#define ADC_MAX_RANGE             0x3FF
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioOutputHost/AudioOutputHost.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioOutputHost/AudioOutputHost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5e79a33e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioOutputHost/AudioOutputHost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Audio Output Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Audio Class</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Standard Audio Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Audio 1.0 Class Specification \n
+ *        USBIF Audio 1.0 Class Terminal Types Specification \n
+ *        USBIF Audio 1.0 Data Formats Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Audio Output host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Audio host, for USB Audio devices using
+ *  the USB Audio 1.0 class profile.
+ *
+ *  By default, the demo will produce a square wave test tone when the board
+ *  button is pressed. If USE_TEST_TONE is not defined in the project makefile,
+ *  incoming audio from the ADC channel 1 will be sampled and sent to the attached
+ *  USB audio device instead.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Sets the ADC channel used by the demo for the input audio samples from an attached microphone.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>USE_TEST_TONE</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, this alters the demo to produce a square wave test tone when the first board button is pressed
+ *        instead of sampling the board microphone.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MICROPHONE_BIASED_TO_HALF_RAIL</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, this alters the demo so that the half VCC bias of the microphone input is subtracted.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioOutputHost/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioOutputHost/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8360102f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioOutputHost/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
+ *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
+ *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
+ *  makefile or build system.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#define MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL               2
+
+	#define MICROPHONE_BIASED_TO_HALF_RAIL
+	#define USE_TEST_TONE
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioOutputHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioOutputHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d657a214
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioOutputHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioOutputHost/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioOutputHost/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6bd97286b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioOutputHost/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Audio Output Host Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.host.class.audio_output.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.host.class.audio_output"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.host.class.audio_output" caption="Audio Output Host Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Audio Output Host demo, implementing a basic USB audio source that can output audio data to an attached device. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="Audio Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="AudioOutputHost.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="AudioOutputHost.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="AudioOutputHost.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.adc"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioOutputHost/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioOutputHost/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..29cf0ddac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioOutputHost/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Audio Output Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioOutputHost/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioOutputHost/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..016ddf45d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/AudioOutputHost/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = AudioOutputHost
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d657a214
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7bae451a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.c
@@ -0,0 +1,286 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the JoystickHostWithParser demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "JoystickHostWithParser.h"
+
+/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */
+static HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t Joystick_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipe             =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTPipe            =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.HIDInterfaceProtocol   = HID_CSCP_NonBootProtocol,
+				.HIDParserData          = &HIDReportInfo
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Joystick Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		JoystickHost_Task();
+
+		HID_Host_USBTask(&Joystick_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Task to manage an enumerated USB joystick once connected, to display movement
+ *  data as it is received.
+ */
+void JoystickHost_Task(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	if (HID_Host_IsReportReceived(&Joystick_HID_Interface))
+	{
+		uint8_t JoystickReport[Joystick_HID_Interface.State.LargestReportSize];
+		HID_Host_ReceiveReport(&Joystick_HID_Interface, &JoystickReport);
+
+		uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+		for (uint8_t ReportNumber = 0; ReportNumber < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ReportNumber++)
+		{
+			HID_ReportItem_t* ReportItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ReportNumber];
+
+			/* Update the report item value if it is contained within the current report */
+			if (!(USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(JoystickReport, ReportItem)))
+			  continue;
+
+			/* Determine what report item is being tested, process updated value as needed */
+			if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page        == USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON) &&
+			    (ReportItem->ItemType                     == HID_REPORT_ITEM_In))
+			{
+				if (ReportItem->Value)
+				  LEDMask = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+			else if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page   == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
+			         ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X)                  ||
+			          (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_Y))                 &&
+			         (ReportItem->ItemType                == HID_REPORT_ITEM_In))
+			{
+				int16_t DeltaMovement = HID_ALIGN_DATA(ReportItem, int16_t);
+
+				if (DeltaMovement)
+				{
+					if (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X)
+					  LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED1 : LEDS_LED2);
+					else
+					  LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED3 : LEDS_LED4);
+				}
+			}
+		}
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+	if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+	                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Joystick_HID_Interface,
+	                            ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != HID_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid Joystick.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (HID_Host_SetReportProtocol(&Joystick_HID_Interface) != 0)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Report Protocol Mode or Not a Valid Joystick.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Joystick Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Callback for the HID Report Parser. This function is called each time the HID report parser is about to store
+ *  an IN, OUT or FEATURE item into the HIDReportInfo structure. To save on RAM, we are able to filter out items
+ *  we aren't interested in (preventing us from being able to extract them later on, but saving on the RAM they would
+ *  have occupied).
+ *
+ *  \param[in] CurrentItem  Pointer to the item the HID report parser is currently working with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the item should be stored into the HID report structure, \c false if it should be discarded
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* const CurrentItem)
+{
+	bool IsJoystick = false;
+
+	/* Iterate through the item's collection path, until either the root collection node or a collection with the
+	 * Joystick Usage is found - this prevents Mice, which use identical descriptors except for the Joystick usage
+	 * parent node, from being erroneously treated as a joystick by the demo
+	 */
+	for (HID_CollectionPath_t* CurrPath = CurrentItem->CollectionPath; CurrPath != NULL; CurrPath = CurrPath->Parent)
+	{
+		if ((CurrPath->Usage.Page  == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
+		    (CurrPath->Usage.Usage == USAGE_JOYSTICK))
+		{
+			IsJoystick = true;
+			break;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* If a collection with the joystick usage was not found, indicate that we are not interested in this item */
+	if (!IsJoystick)
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Check the attributes of the current item - see if we are interested in it or not;
+	 * only store BUTTON and GENERIC_DESKTOP_CONTROL items into the Processed HID Report
+	 * structure to save RAM and ignore the rest
+	 */
+	return ((CurrentItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON) ||
+	        (CurrentItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL));
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a4d06e5f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.h
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for JoystickHostWithParser.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _JOYSTICK_HOST_H_
+#define _JOYSTICK_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY         LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING     (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY           (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR           (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a toggle button. */
+		#define USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON           0x09
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a Generic Desktop Control. */
+		#define USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL    0x01
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage for a Joystick. */
+		#define USAGE_JOYSTICK              0x04
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a X axis movement. */
+		#define USAGE_X                     0x30
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a Y axis movement. */
+		#define USAGE_Y                     0x31
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void JoystickHost_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* const CurrentItem);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9eba4ed86
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Joystick Host With HID Descriptor Parser Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Joystick host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Joystick host, for USB joysticks using
+ *  the standard joystick HID profile. It uses a HID parser for the HID
+ *  reports, allowing for correct operation across all USB joysticks. This
+ *  demo supports joysticks with a single HID report.
+ *
+ *  Joystick movement and button presses are displayed on the board LEDs.
+ *  On connection to a USB joystick, the report items will be processed and
+ *  printed as a formatted list through the USART before the joystick is
+ *  fully enumerated.
+ *
+ *  Currently only single interface joysticks are supported.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8899d8139
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Joystick HID (with parser) Host Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.host.class.joystick_parser.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.host.class.joystick_parser"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.host.class.joystick_parser" caption="Joystick HID (with parser) Host Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Joystick HID Host demo with HID parser, implementing a basic USB joystick host that can display movement data on the board LEDs. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="JoystickHostWithParser.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="JoystickHostWithParser.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="JoystickHostWithParser.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5af83f00d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Joystick Host Demo (Using HID Descriptor Parser)"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7b613fce6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/JoystickHostWithParser/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = JoystickHostWithParser
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d657a214
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..59ae85c9c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,244 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the KeyboardHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "KeyboardHost.h"
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t Keyboard_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipe             =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTPipe            =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.HIDInterfaceProtocol   = HID_CSCP_KeyboardBootProtocol,
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Keyboard Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		KeyboardHost_Task();
+
+		HID_Host_USBTask(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Task to manage an enumerated USB keyboard once connected, to display key state
+ *  data as it is received.
+ */
+void KeyboardHost_Task(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	if (HID_Host_IsReportReceived(&Keyboard_HID_Interface))
+	{
+		USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReport;
+		HID_Host_ReceiveReport(&Keyboard_HID_Interface, &KeyboardReport);
+
+		LEDs_ChangeLEDs(LEDS_LED1, (KeyboardReport.Modifier) ? LEDS_LED1 : 0);
+
+		uint8_t KeyCode = KeyboardReport.KeyCode[0];
+
+		if (KeyCode)
+		{
+			char PressedKey = 0;
+
+			LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED2);
+
+			/* Retrieve pressed key character if alphanumeric */
+			if ((KeyCode >= HID_KEYBOARD_SC_A) && (KeyCode <= HID_KEYBOARD_SC_Z))
+			{
+				PressedKey = (KeyCode - HID_KEYBOARD_SC_A) + 'A';
+			}
+			else if ((KeyCode >= HID_KEYBOARD_SC_1_AND_EXCLAMATION) &
+			         (KeyCode  < HID_KEYBOARD_SC_0_AND_CLOSING_PARENTHESIS))
+			{
+				PressedKey = (KeyCode - HID_KEYBOARD_SC_1_AND_EXCLAMATION) + '1';
+			}
+			else if (KeyCode == HID_KEYBOARD_SC_0_AND_CLOSING_PARENTHESIS)
+			{
+				PressedKey = '0';
+			}
+			else if (KeyCode == HID_KEYBOARD_SC_SPACE)
+			{
+				PressedKey = ' ';
+			}
+			else if (KeyCode == HID_KEYBOARD_SC_ENTER)
+			{
+				PressedKey = '\n';
+			}
+
+			if (PressedKey)
+			  putchar(PressedKey);
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+	if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+	                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Keyboard_HID_Interface,
+	                            ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != HID_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid Keyboard.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (HID_Host_SetBootProtocol(&Keyboard_HID_Interface) != 0)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Could not Set Boot Protocol Mode.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Keyboard Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8c8526419
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for KeyboardHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_
+#define _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void KeyboardHost_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..49cc672a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Keyboard Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Keyboard host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB keyboard host, for USB keyboards using
+ *  the standard keyboard HID profile.
+ *
+ *  Pressed alpha-numeric, enter or space key is transmitted through the serial
+ *  USART at serial settings 9600, 8, N, 1.
+ *
+ *  This uses a naive method where the keyboard is set to Boot Protocol mode, so
+ *  that the report structure is fixed and known. A better implementation
+ *  uses the HID report parser for correct report data processing across
+ *  all compatible mice with advanced characteristics, as shown in the
+ *  KeyboardHostWithParser demo application.
+ *
+ *  Currently only single interface keyboards are supported.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..46cd71fe7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Keyboard HID Host Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.host.class.keyboard.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.host.class.keyboard"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.host.class.keyboard" caption="Keyboard HID Host Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Keyboard HID Host demo, implementing a basic USB keyboard host that can display key press data on the board LEDs. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="KeyboardHost.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="KeyboardHost.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="KeyboardHost.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6ac6b0525
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..435e4942f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = KeyboardHost
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d657a214
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5864e32de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.c
@@ -0,0 +1,287 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the KeyboardHostWithParser demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "KeyboardHostWithParser.h"
+
+/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */
+static HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t Keyboard_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipe             =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTPipe            =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.HIDInterfaceProtocol   = HID_CSCP_NonBootProtocol,
+				.HIDParserData          = &HIDReportInfo
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Keyboard Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		KeyboardHost_Task();
+
+		HID_Host_USBTask(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Task to manage an enumerated USB keyboard once connected, to display key state
+ *  data as it is received.
+ */
+void KeyboardHost_Task(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	if (HID_Host_IsReportReceived(&Keyboard_HID_Interface))
+	{
+		uint8_t KeyboardReport[Keyboard_HID_Interface.State.LargestReportSize];
+		HID_Host_ReceiveReport(&Keyboard_HID_Interface, &KeyboardReport);
+
+		for (uint8_t ReportNumber = 0; ReportNumber < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ReportNumber++)
+		{
+			HID_ReportItem_t* ReportItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ReportNumber];
+
+			/* Update the report item value if it is contained within the current report */
+			if (!(USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(KeyboardReport, ReportItem)))
+			  continue;
+
+			/* Determine what report item is being tested, process updated value as needed */
+			if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page      == USAGE_PAGE_KEYBOARD) &&
+				(ReportItem->Attributes.BitSize         == 8)                   &&
+				(ReportItem->Attributes.Logical.Maximum > 1)                    &&
+				(ReportItem->ItemType                   == HID_REPORT_ITEM_In))
+			{
+				/* Key code is an unsigned char in length, cast to the appropriate type */
+				uint8_t KeyCode = (uint8_t)ReportItem->Value;
+
+				/* If scan-code is non-zero, a key is being pressed */
+				if (KeyCode)
+				{
+					/* Toggle status LED to indicate keypress */
+					LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED2);
+
+					char PressedKey = 0;
+
+					/* Convert scan-code to printable character if alphanumeric */
+					if ((KeyCode >= HID_KEYBOARD_SC_A) && (KeyCode <= HID_KEYBOARD_SC_Z))
+					{
+						PressedKey = (KeyCode - HID_KEYBOARD_SC_A) + 'A';
+					}
+					else if ((KeyCode >= HID_KEYBOARD_SC_1_AND_EXCLAMATION) &
+							 (KeyCode  < HID_KEYBOARD_SC_0_AND_CLOSING_PARENTHESIS))
+					{
+						PressedKey = (KeyCode - HID_KEYBOARD_SC_1_AND_EXCLAMATION) + '1';
+					}
+					else if (KeyCode == HID_KEYBOARD_SC_0_AND_CLOSING_PARENTHESIS)
+					{
+						PressedKey = '0';
+					}
+					else if (KeyCode == HID_KEYBOARD_SC_SPACE)
+					{
+						PressedKey = ' ';
+					}
+					else if (KeyCode == HID_KEYBOARD_SC_ENTER)
+					{
+						PressedKey = '\n';
+					}
+
+					/* Print the pressed key character out through the serial port if valid */
+					if (PressedKey)
+					  putchar(PressedKey);
+				}
+
+				/* Once a scan-code is found, stop scanning through the report items */
+				break;
+			}
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+	if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+	                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Keyboard_HID_Interface,
+	                            ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != HID_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid Keyboard.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (HID_Host_SetReportProtocol(&Keyboard_HID_Interface) != 0)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Report Protocol Mode or Not a Valid Keyboard.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Keyboard Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Callback for the HID Report Parser. This function is called each time the HID report parser is about to store
+ *  an IN, OUT or FEATURE item into the HIDReportInfo structure. To save on RAM, we are able to filter out items
+ *  we aren't interested in (preventing us from being able to extract them later on, but saving on the RAM they would
+ *  have occupied).
+ *
+ *  \param[in] CurrentItem  Pointer to the item the HID report parser is currently working with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the item should be stored into the HID report structure, \c false if it should be discarded
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* const CurrentItem)
+{
+	/* Check the attributes of the current item - see if we are interested in it or not;
+	 * only store KEYBOARD usage page items into the Processed HID Report structure to
+	 * save RAM and ignore the rest
+	 */
+	return (CurrentItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_KEYBOARD);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bd0049472
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.h
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for KeyboardHostWithParser.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_
+#define _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a desktop keyboard. */
+		#define USAGE_PAGE_KEYBOARD      0x07
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void KeyboardHost_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* const CurrentItem);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4c87965ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Keyboard Host With HID Descriptor Parser Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Keyboard host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Keyboard host, for USB keyboards using
+ *  the standard Keyboard HID profile. It uses a HID parser for the HID reports,
+ *  allowing for correct operation across all USB keyboards. This demo supports
+ *  keyboards with a single HID report.
+ *
+ *  Pressed alpha-numeric, enter or space key is transmitted through the serial
+ *  USART at serial settings 9600, 8, N, 1. On connection to a USB keyboard, the
+ *  report items will be processed and printed as a formatted list through the
+ *  USART before the keyboard is fully enumerated.
+ *
+ *  Currently only single interface keyboards are supported.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..924299f2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Keyboard HID (with parser) Host Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.host.class.keyboard_parser.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.host.class.keyboard_parser"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.host.class.keyboard_parser" caption="Keyboard HID (with parser) Host Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Keyboard HID Host demo with HID parser, implementing a basic USB keyboard host that can display key press data on the board LEDs. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="KeyboardHostWithParser.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="KeyboardHostWithParser.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="KeyboardHostWithParser.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e014d3ed7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Host Demo (Using HID Descriptor Parser)"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bef6b416d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = KeyboardHostWithParser
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d657a214
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..eb350c0e0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,272 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MIDIHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "MIDIHost.h"
+
+/** LUFA MIDI Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all MIDI Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t Keyboard_MIDI_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipe             =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTPipe            =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "MIDI Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		JoystickHost_Task();
+
+		MIDI_Host_USBTask(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	Joystick_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Task to manage an enumerated USB MIDI device once connected, to display received
+ *  note events from the host and send note changes in response to the board's joystick.
+ */
+void JoystickHost_Task(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	MIDI_EventPacket_t MIDIEvent;
+	while (MIDI_Host_ReceiveEventPacket(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface, &MIDIEvent))
+	{
+		bool NoteOnEvent  = (MIDIEvent.Event == MIDI_EVENT(0, MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON));
+		bool NoteOffEvent = (MIDIEvent.Event == MIDI_EVENT(0, MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF));
+
+		/* Display note events from the host */
+		if (NoteOnEvent || NoteOffEvent)
+		{
+			printf_P(PSTR("MIDI Note %s - Channel %d, Pitch %d, Velocity %d\r\n"), NoteOnEvent ? "On" : "Off",
+																				   ((MIDIEvent.Data1 & 0x0F) + 1),
+																				   MIDIEvent.Data2, MIDIEvent.Data3);
+		}
+	}
+
+	CheckJoystickMovement();
+}
+
+/** Checks for movement of the board's joystick, and sends corresponding MIDI note on/off
+ *  messages to the host.
+ */
+void CheckJoystickMovement(void)
+{
+	static uint8_t PrevJoystickStatus;
+
+	uint8_t MIDICommand = 0;
+	uint8_t MIDIPitch;
+
+	/* Get current joystick mask, XOR with previous to detect joystick changes */
+	uint8_t JoystickStatus  = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t JoystickChanges = (JoystickStatus ^ PrevJoystickStatus);
+
+	/* Get board button status - if pressed use channel 10 (percussion), otherwise use channel 1 */
+	uint8_t Channel = ((Buttons_GetStatus() & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ? MIDI_CHANNEL(10) : MIDI_CHANNEL(1));
+
+	if (JoystickChanges & JOY_LEFT)
+	{
+		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_LEFT)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+		MIDIPitch   = 0x3C;
+	}
+	else if (JoystickChanges & JOY_UP)
+	{
+		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_UP)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+		MIDIPitch   = 0x3D;
+	}
+	else if (JoystickChanges & JOY_RIGHT)
+	{
+		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_RIGHT)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+		MIDIPitch   = 0x3E;
+	}
+	else if (JoystickChanges & JOY_DOWN)
+	{
+		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_DOWN)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+		MIDIPitch   = 0x3F;
+	}
+	else if (JoystickChanges & JOY_PRESS)
+	{
+		MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_PRESS)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+		MIDIPitch   = 0x3B;
+	}
+
+	if (MIDICommand)
+	{
+		MIDI_EventPacket_t MIDIEvent = (MIDI_EventPacket_t)
+			{
+				.Event       = MIDI_EVENT(0, MIDICommand),
+
+				.Data1       = MIDICommand | Channel,
+				.Data2       = MIDIPitch,
+				.Data3       = MIDI_STANDARD_VELOCITY,
+			};
+
+		MIDI_Host_SendEventPacket(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface, &MIDIEvent);
+		MIDI_Host_Flush(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
+	}
+
+	PrevJoystickStatus = JoystickStatus;
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+	if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+	                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (MIDI_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface,
+	                             ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != MIDI_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid MIDI Class Device.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("MIDI Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a50a9bb28
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MIDIHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MIDI_HOST_H_
+#define _MIDI_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void CheckJoystickMovement(void);
+		void JoystickHost_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..33a8319f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage MIDI Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Audio Class Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>MIDI Subclass</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF USB MIDI Audio Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  MIDI host demonstration application. This demo will enumerate an attached USB-MIDI device, and print incoming MIDI note
+ *  on and off messages on any channel to the serial port. Pressing the board joystick will send note on and off messages to
+ *  the attached MIDI device, with the board HWB controlling the note channel.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..140c03ba7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="MIDI Host Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.host.class.midi.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.host.class.midi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.host.class.midi" caption="MIDI Host Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		MIDI Host demo, capable of sending and receiving MIDI messages to and from an attached device. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="MIDI Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="MIDIHost.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="MIDIHost.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="MIDIHost.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d675057e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - MIDI Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..11314bf1c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MIDIHost/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = MIDIHost
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..539b0a694
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            5000
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4e0739a00
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,311 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MassStorageHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "MassStorageHost.h"
+
+/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t FlashDisk_MS_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipe             =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTPipe            =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Mass Storage Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		MassStorageHost_Task();
+
+		MS_Host_USBTask(&FlashDisk_MS_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Task to manage an enumerated USB Mass Storage device once connected, to print out
+ *  data from the device.
+ */
+void MassStorageHost_Task(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Waiting until ready...\r\n"));
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		uint8_t ErrorCode = MS_Host_TestUnitReady(&FlashDisk_MS_Interface, 0);
+
+		if (!(ErrorCode))
+		  break;
+
+		/* Check if an error other than a logical command error (device busy) received */
+		if (ErrorCode != MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED)
+		{
+			puts_P(PSTR("Error waiting for device to be ready.\r\n"));
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+			USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+			return;
+		}
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Retrieving Capacity...\r\n"));
+
+	SCSI_Capacity_t DiskCapacity;
+	if (MS_Host_ReadDeviceCapacity(&FlashDisk_MS_Interface, 0, &DiskCapacity))
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error retrieving device capacity.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("%lu blocks of %lu bytes.\r\n"), DiskCapacity.Blocks, DiskCapacity.BlockSize);
+
+	uint8_t BlockBuffer[DiskCapacity.BlockSize];
+
+	if (MS_Host_ReadDeviceBlocks(&FlashDisk_MS_Interface, 0, 0x00000000, 1, DiskCapacity.BlockSize, BlockBuffer))
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error reading device block.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nContents of first block:\r\n"));
+
+	for (uint16_t Chunk = 0; Chunk < (DiskCapacity.BlockSize >> 4); Chunk++)
+	{
+		uint8_t* ChunkPtr = &BlockBuffer[Chunk << 4];
+
+		/* Print out the 16 bytes of the chunk in HEX format */
+		for (uint8_t ByteOffset = 0; ByteOffset < (1 << 4); ByteOffset++)
+		{
+			char CurrByte = *(ChunkPtr + ByteOffset);
+			printf_P(PSTR("%.2X "), CurrByte);
+		}
+
+		printf_P(PSTR("    "));
+
+		/* Print out the 16 bytes of the chunk in ASCII format */
+		for (uint8_t ByteOffset = 0; ByteOffset < (1 << 4); ByteOffset++)
+		{
+			char CurrByte = *(ChunkPtr + ByteOffset);
+			putchar(isprint(CurrByte) ? CurrByte : '.');
+		}
+
+		printf_P(PSTR("\r\n"));
+	}
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+	if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+	                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (MS_Host_ConfigurePipes(&FlashDisk_MS_Interface,
+	                           ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != MS_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid Mass Storage Device.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	uint8_t MaxLUNIndex;
+	if (MS_Host_GetMaxLUN(&FlashDisk_MS_Interface, &MaxLUNIndex))
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error retrieving max LUN index.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("Total LUNs: %d - Using first LUN in device.\r\n"), (MaxLUNIndex + 1));
+
+	if (MS_Host_ResetMSInterface(&FlashDisk_MS_Interface))
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error resetting Mass Storage interface.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData;
+	if (MS_Host_RequestSense(&FlashDisk_MS_Interface, 0, &SenseData) != 0)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error retrieving device sense.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (MS_Host_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(&FlashDisk_MS_Interface, 0, true))
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error setting Prevent Device Removal bit.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData;
+	if (MS_Host_GetInquiryData(&FlashDisk_MS_Interface, 0, &InquiryData))
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error retrieving device Inquiry data.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("Vendor \"%.8s\", Product \"%.16s\"\r\n"), InquiryData.VendorID, InquiryData.ProductID);
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Mass Storage Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..316610e47
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MassStorage.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MASS_STORAGE_HOST_H_
+#define _MASS_STORAGE_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <ctype.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void MassStorageHost_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4b07261c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Mass Storage Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Mass Storage Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Bulk Only</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n
+ *        USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n
+ *        SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n
+ *        SCSI Block Commands Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Mass Storage host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Mass Storage host, for USB storage devices
+ *  using the standard Mass Storage USB profile.
+ *
+ *  The first 512 bytes (boot sector) of an attached disk's memory will be dumped
+ *  out of the serial port in HEX and ASCII form when it is attached to the AT90USB1287
+ *  AVR. The device will then wait for HWB to be pressed, whereupon the entire ASCII contents
+ *  of the disk will be dumped to the serial port.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..54bfe50cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Mass Storage Host Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.host.class.ms.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.host.class.ms"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.host.class.ms" caption="Mass Storage Host Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Mass Storage Host demo, capable of reading and writing raw 512 byte segments to the device's serial port. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="Mass Storage Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="MassStorageHost.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="MassStorageHost.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="MassStorageHost.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..21c9814c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mass Storage Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..759c8b57b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = MassStorageHost
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d657a214
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f42fe899e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,227 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MouseHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "MouseHost.h"
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t Mouse_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipe             =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTPipe            =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.HIDInterfaceProtocol   = HID_CSCP_MouseBootProtocol,
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Mouse Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		MouseHost_Task();
+
+		HID_Host_USBTask(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Task to manage an enumerated USB mouse once connected, to display movement
+ *  data as it is received.
+ */
+void MouseHost_Task(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	if (HID_Host_IsReportReceived(&Mouse_HID_Interface))
+	{
+		uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+		USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReport;
+		HID_Host_ReceiveReport(&Mouse_HID_Interface, &MouseReport);
+
+		printf_P(PSTR("dX:%2d dY:%2d Button:%d\r\n"), MouseReport.X,
+		                                              MouseReport.Y,
+		                                              MouseReport.Button);
+		if (MouseReport.X > 0)
+		  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
+		else if (MouseReport.X < 0)
+		  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED2;
+
+		if (MouseReport.Y > 0)
+		  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
+		else if (MouseReport.Y < 0)
+		  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
+
+		if (MouseReport.Button)
+		  LEDMask  = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+	if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+	                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Mouse_HID_Interface,
+	                            ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != HID_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid Mouse.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (HID_Host_SetBootProtocol(&Mouse_HID_Interface) != 0)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Could not Set Boot Protocol Mode.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Mouse Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0c3a8e611
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MouseHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MOUSE_HOST_H_
+#define _MOUSE_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void MouseHost_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..29364537b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Mouse Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Mouse host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Mouse host, for USB mice using
+ *  the standard mouse HID profile.
+ *
+ *  Mouse movement and button presses are displayed on the board LEDs,
+ *  as well as printed out the serial terminal as formatted dY, dY and
+ *  button status information.
+ *
+ *  This uses a naive method where the mouse is set to Boot Protocol mode, so
+ *  that the report structure is fixed and known. A better implementation
+ *  uses the HID report parser for correct report data processing across
+ *  all compatible mice with advanced characteristics, as shown in the
+ *  MouseHostWithParser demo application.
+ *
+ *  Currently only single interface mice are supported.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b28860771
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Mouse HID Host Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.host.class.mouse.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.host.class.mouse"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.host.class.mouse" caption="Mouse HID Host Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Mouse HID Host demo, implementing a basic USB mouse host that can display movement data on the board LEDs. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="MouseHost.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="MouseHost.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="MouseHost.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..41adfaf05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mouse Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..aa5d69f2c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = MouseHost
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d657a214
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fdc4d615d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.c
@@ -0,0 +1,295 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MouseHostWithParser demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "MouseHostWithParser.h"
+
+/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */
+static HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t Mouse_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipe             =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTPipe            =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.HIDInterfaceProtocol   = HID_CSCP_NonBootProtocol,
+				.HIDParserData          = &HIDReportInfo
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Mouse Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		MouseHost_Task();
+
+		HID_Host_USBTask(&Mouse_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Task to manage an enumerated USB mouse once connected, to display movement
+ *  data as it is received.
+ */
+void MouseHost_Task(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	if (HID_Host_IsReportReceived(&Mouse_HID_Interface))
+	{
+		uint8_t MouseReport[Mouse_HID_Interface.State.LargestReportSize];
+		HID_Host_ReceiveReport(&Mouse_HID_Interface, &MouseReport);
+
+		uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+		for (uint8_t ReportNumber = 0; ReportNumber < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ReportNumber++)
+		{
+			HID_ReportItem_t* ReportItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ReportNumber];
+
+			/* Update the report item value if it is contained within the current report */
+			if (!(USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(MouseReport, ReportItem)))
+			  continue;
+
+			/* Determine what report item is being tested, process updated value as needed */
+			if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page        == USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON) &&
+			    (ReportItem->ItemType                     == HID_REPORT_ITEM_In))
+			{
+				if (ReportItem->Value)
+				  LEDMask = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+			else if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page   == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
+			         (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage  == USAGE_SCROLL_WHEEL)       &&
+			         (ReportItem->ItemType                == HID_REPORT_ITEM_In))
+			{
+				int16_t WheelDelta = HID_ALIGN_DATA(ReportItem, int16_t);
+
+				if (WheelDelta)
+				  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | ((WheelDelta > 0) ? LEDS_LED3 : LEDS_LED4));
+			}
+			else if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page   == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
+			         ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X)                  ||
+			          (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_Y))                 &&
+			         (ReportItem->ItemType                == HID_REPORT_ITEM_In))
+			{
+				int16_t DeltaMovement = HID_ALIGN_DATA(ReportItem, int16_t);
+
+				if (DeltaMovement)
+				{
+					if (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X)
+					  LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED1 : LEDS_LED2);
+					else
+					  LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED3 : LEDS_LED4);
+				}
+			}
+		}
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+	if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+	                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Mouse_HID_Interface,
+	                            ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != HID_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid Mouse.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (HID_Host_SetReportProtocol(&Mouse_HID_Interface) != 0)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Report Protocol Mode or Not a Valid Mouse.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Mouse Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Callback for the HID Report Parser. This function is called each time the HID report parser is about to store
+ *  an IN, OUT or FEATURE item into the HIDReportInfo structure. To save on RAM, we are able to filter out items
+ *  we aren't interested in (preventing us from being able to extract them later on, but saving on the RAM they would
+ *  have occupied).
+ *
+ *  \param[in] CurrentItem  Pointer to the item the HID report parser is currently working with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the item should be stored into the HID report structure, \c false if it should be discarded
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* const CurrentItem)
+{
+	bool IsMouse = false;
+
+	/* Iterate through the item's collection path, until either the root collection node or a collection with the
+	 * Mouse Usage is found - this prevents Joysticks, which use identical descriptors except for the Joystick usage
+	 * parent node, from being erroneously treated as a mouse by the demo
+	 */
+	for (HID_CollectionPath_t* CurrPath = CurrentItem->CollectionPath; CurrPath != NULL; CurrPath = CurrPath->Parent)
+	{
+		if ((CurrPath->Usage.Page  == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
+		    (CurrPath->Usage.Usage == USAGE_MOUSE))
+		{
+			IsMouse = true;
+			break;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* If a collection with the mouse usage was not found, indicate that we are not interested in this item */
+	if (!IsMouse)
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Check the attributes of the current item - see if we are interested in it or not;
+	 * only store BUTTON and GENERIC_DESKTOP_CONTROL items into the Processed HID Report
+	 * structure to save RAM and ignore the rest
+	 */
+	return ((CurrentItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON) ||
+	        (CurrentItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL));
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..064def450
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.h
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MouseHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MOUSE_HOST_H_
+#define _MOUSE_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY        LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING     (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY           (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR           (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a toggle button. */
+		#define USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON           0x09
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a Generic Desktop Control. */
+		#define USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL    0x01
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage for a Mouse. */
+		#define USAGE_MOUSE                 0x02
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a X axis movement. */
+		#define USAGE_X                     0x30
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a Y axis movement. */
+		#define USAGE_Y                     0x31
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a Scroll Wheel movement. */
+		#define USAGE_SCROLL_WHEEL          0x38
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void MouseHost_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* const CurrentItem);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9b1b7d055
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Mouse Host With HID Descriptor Parser Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Mouse host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Mouse host, for USB mice using
+ *  the standard mouse HID profile. It uses a HID parser for the HID
+ *  reports, allowing for correct operation across all USB mice. This
+ *  demo supports mice with a single HID report.
+ *
+ *  Mouse and scroll wheel movement and button presses are displayed
+ *  on the board LEDs. On connection to a USB mouse, the report items
+ *  will be processed and printed as a formatted list through the USART
+ *  before the mouse is fully enumerated.
+ *
+ *  Currently only single interface mice are supported.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..220eb457c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Mouse HID (with parser) Host Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.host.class.mouse_parser.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.host.class.mouse_parser"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.host.class.mouse_parser" caption="Mouse HID (with parser) Host Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Mouse HID Host demo with HID parser, implementing a basic USB mouse host that can display movement data on the board LEDs. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="MouseHostWithParser.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="MouseHostWithParser.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="MouseHostWithParser.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1336d998e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mouse Host Demo (Using HID Descriptor Parser)"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a6c1628a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = MouseHostWithParser
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d657a214
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ddc9d6fe2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,234 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the PrinterHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "PrinterHost.h"
+
+/** LUFA Printer Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all Printer Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t Printer_PRNT_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipe             =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTPipe            =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Printer Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		PrinterHost_Task();
+
+		PRNT_Host_USBTask(&Printer_PRNT_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Task to manage an enumerated USB printer once connected, to display device
+ *  information and print a test PCL page.
+ */
+void PrinterHost_Task(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Retrieving Device ID...\r\n"));
+
+	char DeviceIDString[300];
+	if (PRNT_Host_GetDeviceID(&Printer_PRNT_Interface, DeviceIDString,
+	                          sizeof(DeviceIDString)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Getting Device ID.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("Device ID: %s.\r\n"), DeviceIDString);
+
+	char     TestPageData[] = "\033%-12345X\033E" "LUFA PCL Test Page" "\033E\033%-12345X";
+	uint16_t TestPageLength = strlen(TestPageData);
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("Sending Test Page (%d bytes)...\r\n"), TestPageLength);
+
+	if (PRNT_Host_SendData(&Printer_PRNT_Interface, &TestPageData, TestPageLength) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Sending Page Data.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Test Page Sent.\r\n"));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+	if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+	                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (PRNT_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Printer_PRNT_Interface,
+	                             ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != PRNT_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid Printer Class Device.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (PRNT_Host_SetBidirectionalMode(&Printer_PRNT_Interface) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Bidirectional Mode.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Printer Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e330c2264
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for PrinterHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _PRINTER_HOST_H_
+#define _PRINTER_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void PrinterHost_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e2a482058
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Printer Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Printer Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Bidirectional Protocol</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Printer Class Specification \n
+ *        PCL Language Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Printer host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Printer host, for USB printers using
+ *  the bidirectional data encapsulation protocol and PCL language.
+ *
+ *  Upon connection of a compatible printer, the printer's device ID is sent
+ *  to the AVR's serial port, and a simple test page is printed using the PCL
+ *  printer language.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bd355cf35
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Printer Host Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.host.class.printer.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.host.class.printer"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.host.class.printer" caption="Printer Host Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Printer Host demo, implementing a basic USB printer host that can send raw printer control data to an attached device. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="Printer Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="PrinterHost.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="PrinterHost.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="PrinterHost.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f38d9823a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Printer Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9d1264eee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/PrinterHost/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = PrinterHost
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d657a214
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..782c351fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,253 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the RNDISEthernetHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "RNDISEthernetHost.h"
+
+/** Buffer to hold incoming and outgoing Ethernet packets. */
+static int8_t PacketBuffer[1024];
+
+/** LUFA RNDIS Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all RNDIS Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipe             =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTPipe            =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.NotificationPipe       =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 3),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.HostMaxPacketSize      = sizeof(PacketBuffer),
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "RNDIS Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		RNDISHost_Task();
+
+		RNDIS_Host_USBTask(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Task to manage an enumerated USB RNDIS device once connected, to display device
+ *  received data packets.
+ */
+void RNDISHost_Task(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	if (RNDIS_Host_IsPacketReceived(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+		uint16_t PacketLength;
+		RNDIS_Host_ReadPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface, &PacketBuffer, &PacketLength);
+
+		printf_P(PSTR("***PACKET (Size %d)***\r\n"), PacketLength);
+
+		for (uint16_t i = 0; i < PacketLength; i++)
+		  printf("0x%02x ", PacketBuffer[i]);
+
+		printf_P(PSTR("\r\n\r\n"));
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+	if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+	                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (RNDIS_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface,
+	                              ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid RNDIS Class Device.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (RNDIS_Host_InitializeDevice(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Initializing Device.\r\n"));
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("Device Max Transfer Size: %lu bytes.\r\n"), Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface.State.DeviceMaxPacketSize);
+
+	uint32_t PacketFilter = (REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_DIRECTED | REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_BROADCAST | REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_ALL_MULTICAST);
+	if (RNDIS_Host_SetRNDISProperty(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface, OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER,
+	                                &PacketFilter, sizeof(PacketFilter)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Packet Filter.\r\n"));
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	uint32_t VendorID;
+	if (RNDIS_Host_QueryRNDISProperty(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface, OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID,
+	                                  &VendorID, sizeof(VendorID)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Getting Vendor ID.\r\n"));
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("Device Vendor ID: 0x%08lX\r\n"), VendorID);
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("RNDIS Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d2f824040
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for RNDISEthernetHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _RNDIS_HOST_H_
+#define _RNDIS_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void RNDISHost_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e9edd6d66
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage RNDIS Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Remote NDIS (Microsoft Proprietary CDC Class Networking Standard)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Microsoft RNDIS Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  RNDIS host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a RNDIS Ethernet host, for USB devices such as
+ *  modems.
+ *
+ *  This demo will enumerate an attached USB RNDIS device, print out its vendor ID
+ *  and any received packets in raw form through the serial USART.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..37cedaaa5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="RNDIS Ethernet Host Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.host.class.rndis.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.host.class.rndis"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.host.class.rndis" caption="RNDIS Ethernet Host Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Microsoft RNDIS Ethernet Host demo, implementing a RNDIS host that can send and receive Ethernet data to and from an attached device. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="RNDIS Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="RNDISEthernetHost.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="RNDISEthernetHost.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="RNDISEthernetHost.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0d56dda37
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - RNDIS Ethernet Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0a166d5be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernetHost/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = RNDISEthernetHost
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d657a214
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6d70390cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,230 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the StillImageHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "StillImageHost.h"
+
+/** LUFA Still Image Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all Still Image Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t DigitalCamera_SI_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipe             =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTPipe            =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.EventsPipe             =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 3),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Still Image Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		StillImageHost_Task();
+
+		SI_Host_USBTask(&DigitalCamera_SI_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Task to manage an enumerated USB Still Image device once connected, to manage a
+ *  new PIMA session in order to send commands to the attached device.
+ */
+void StillImageHost_Task(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Opening Session...\r\n"));
+
+	if (SI_Host_OpenSession(&DigitalCamera_SI_Interface) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Could not open PIMA session.\r\n"));
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Turning off Device...\r\n"));
+
+	SI_Host_SendCommand(&DigitalCamera_SI_Interface, 0x1013, 0, NULL);
+	if (SI_Host_ReceiveResponse(&DigitalCamera_SI_Interface))
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Could not turn off device.\r\n"));
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Device Off.\r\n"));
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Closing Session...\r\n"));
+
+	if (SI_Host_CloseSession(&DigitalCamera_SI_Interface) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Could not close PIMA session.\r\n"));
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+	if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+	                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (SI_Host_ConfigurePipes(&DigitalCamera_SI_Interface,
+	                           ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != SI_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid Still Image Class Device.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Still Image Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a1d1afea0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for StillImageHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _STILL_IMAGE_HOST_H_
+#define _STILL_IMAGE_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void StillImageHost_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..193228a20
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Still Image Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Still Image Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Still Image Class Specification \n
+ *        PIMA 15740 Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Still Image host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a Still Image host, for USB devices such as
+ *  digital cameras.
+ *
+ *  This demo will enumerate an attached USB Still Image device, print out its
+ *  information structure, open a session with the device and finally close the
+ *  session.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4a5f6bfeb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Still Image Host Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.host.class.si.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.host.class.si"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.host.class.si" caption="Still Image Host Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Still Image Host demo, implementing a Still Image host that can send and receive PIMA data to and from an attached device. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="Still Image Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="StillImageHost.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="StillImageHost.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="StillImageHost.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c050dc2cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Still Image Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bf3f6ddcc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = StillImageHost
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d657a214
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..aa8093210
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,217 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the VirtualSerialHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "VirtualSerialHost.h"
+
+/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipe             =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTPipe            =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.NotificationPipe       =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 3),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "CDC Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		CDCHost_Task();
+
+		CDC_Host_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Task to manage an enumerated USB CDC device once connected, to print received data
+ *  from the device to the serial port.
+ */
+void CDCHost_Task(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	if (CDC_Host_BytesReceived(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface))
+	{
+		/* Echo received bytes from the attached device through the USART */
+		int16_t ReceivedByte = CDC_Host_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+		if (!(ReceivedByte < 0))
+		  putchar(ReceivedByte);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+	if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+	                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (CDC_Host_ConfigurePipes(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface,
+	                            ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != CDC_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid CDC Class Device.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface.State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS = 9600;
+	VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface.State.LineEncoding.CharFormat  = CDC_LINEENCODING_OneStopBit;
+	VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface.State.LineEncoding.ParityType  = CDC_PARITY_None;
+	VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface.State.LineEncoding.DataBits    = 8;
+
+	if (CDC_Host_SetLineEncoding(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface))
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Line Encoding.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("CDC Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..289f53a7f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for VirtualSerialHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _VIRTUALSERIAL_HOST_H_
+#define _VIRTUALSERIAL_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void CDCHost_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1e1f9f1ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage CDC Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  CDC host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference application
+ *  for implementing a USB CDC host, for CDC devices using the standard ACM profile.
+ *
+ *  This demo prints out received CDC data through the serial port.
+ *
+ *  Note that this demo is only compatible with devices which report the correct CDC
+ *  and ACM class, subclass and protocol values. Most USB-Serial cables have vendor
+ *  specific features, thus use vendor-specific class/subclass/protocol codes to force
+ *  the user to use specialized drivers. This demo is not compatible with such devices.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e456c9295
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Virtual Serial CDC Host Demo (Class Driver APIs)" id="lufa.demos.host.class.cdc.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.host.class.cdc"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.host.class.cdc" caption="Virtual Serial CDC Host Demo (Class Driver APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Virtual Serial Host demo, implementing a CDC host that can send and receive data to and from an attached device. This demo uses the user-friendly USB Class Driver APIs to provide a simple, abstracted interface into the USB stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="CDC Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="VirtualSerialHost.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="VirtualSerialHost.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="VirtualSerialHost.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ac8ecfa62
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Virtual Serial Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..380205bcb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialHost/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = VirtualSerialHost
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9e3919da4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+
+# Makefile to build all the LUFA Host Demos. Call with "make all" to
+# rebuild all Host demos.
+
+# Projects are pre-cleaned before each one is built, to ensure any
+# custom LUFA library build options are reflected in the compiled
+# code.
+
+PROJECT_DIRECTORIES := $(shell ls -d */)
+
+# This makefile is potentially infinitely recursive if something really bad
+# happens when determining the set of project directories - hard-abort if
+# more than 10 levels deep to avoid angry emails.
+ifeq ($(MAKELEVEL), 10)
+   $(error EMERGENCY ABORT: INFINITE RECURSION DETECTED)
+endif
+
+# Need to special-case building without a per-project object directory
+ifeq ($(OBJDIR),)
+   # If no target specified, force "clean all" and disallow parallel build
+   ifeq ($(MAKECMDGOALS),)
+      MAKECMDGOALS := clean all
+      .NOTPARALLEL:
+   endif
+
+   # If one of the targets is to build, force "clean" beforehand and disallow parallel build
+   ifneq ($(findstring all, $(MAKECMDGOALS)),)
+      MAKECMDGOALS := clean $(MAKECMDGOALS)
+      .NOTPARALLEL:
+   endif
+endif
+
+%: $(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES)
+	@echo . > /dev/null
+
+$(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES):
+	@$(MAKE) -C $@ $(MAKECMDGOALS)
+
+.PHONY: $(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES)
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/AndroidAccessoryHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/AndroidAccessoryHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9efbf37f3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/AndroidAccessoryHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,263 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the AndroidAccessoryHost demo. This file contains the main tasks
+ *  of the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "AndroidAccessoryHost.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Android Accessory Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		AndroidHost_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated. */
+void AndroidHost_Task(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Select the data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(ANDROID_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	/* Check to see if a packet has been received */
+	if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+	{
+		/* Re-freeze IN pipe after the packet has been received */
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+
+		/* Check if data is in the pipe */
+		if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+		{
+			uint8_t NextReceivedByte = Pipe_Read_8();
+			uint8_t LEDMask          = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+			if (NextReceivedByte & 0x01)
+			  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
+
+			if (NextReceivedByte & 0x02)
+			  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED2;
+
+			if (NextReceivedByte & 0x04)
+			  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
+
+			if (NextReceivedByte & 0x08)
+			  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
+
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			/* Clear the pipe after all data in the packet has been read, ready for the next packet */
+			Pipe_ClearIN();
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Re-freeze IN pipe after use */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Getting Device Data.\r\n"));
+
+	/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+	uint8_t ErrorCode = ProcessDeviceDescriptor();
+
+	bool RequiresModeSwitch = (ErrorCode == NonAccessoryModeAndroidDevice);
+
+	/* Error out if the device is not an Android device or an error occurred */
+	if ((ErrorCode != AccessoryModeAndroidDevice) && (ErrorCode != NonAccessoryModeAndroidDevice))
+	{
+		if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Device).\r\n"));
+		else
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+		printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("Android Device Detected - %sAccessory mode.\r\n"), (RequiresModeSwitch ? "Non-" : ""));
+
+	/* Check if a valid Android device was attached, but it is not current in Accessory mode */
+	if (RequiresModeSwitch)
+	{
+		uint16_t AndroidProtocol;
+
+		/* Fetch the version of the Android Accessory Protocol supported by the device */
+		if ((ErrorCode = Android_GetAccessoryProtocol(&AndroidProtocol)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+		{
+			printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Protocol).\r\n"
+			                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+			return;
+		}
+
+		/* Validate the returned protocol version */
+		if (AndroidProtocol != AOA_PROTOCOL_AccessoryV1)
+		{
+			puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Accessory Mode Not Supported."));
+
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+			return;
+		}
+
+		/* Send the device strings and start the Android Accessory Mode */
+		Android_SendString(AOA_STRING_Manufacturer, "Dean Camera");
+		Android_SendString(AOA_STRING_Model,        "LUFA Android Demo");
+		Android_SendString(AOA_STRING_Description,  "LUFA Android Demo");
+		Android_SendString(AOA_STRING_Version,      "1.0");
+		Android_SendString(AOA_STRING_URI,          "http://www.lufa-lib.org");
+		Android_SendString(AOA_STRING_Serial,       "0000000012345678");
+
+		Android_StartAccessoryMode();
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+
+	/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+	if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+	{
+		if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+		else
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+		printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
+		                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Accessory Mode Android Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/AndroidAccessoryHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/AndroidAccessoryHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b08b245fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/AndroidAccessoryHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for AndroidAccessoryHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ANDROID_ACCESSORY_HOST_H_
+#define _ANDROID_ACCESSORY_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include "DeviceDescriptor.h"
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+		#include "Lib/AndroidAccessoryCommands.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void AndroidHost_Task(void);
+
+	/* Event Handlers: */
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/AndroidAccessoryHost.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/AndroidAccessoryHost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..70e0935c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/AndroidAccessoryHost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Android Accessory Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Android Accessory Host Class</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Android Accessory Host Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Android Accessory Host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing an Android Accessory Host device capable of hosting
+ *  Android powered mobile devices to send and receive data.
+ *
+ *  Sent data from the Android device will be indicated onto the board's LEDs.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..884b50398
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     0
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..89302b680
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,164 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
+ *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for the first interface containing bulk IN and OUT data endpoints.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the \ref AndroidHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* DataINEndpoint  = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return DevControlError;
+	}
+
+	/* There should be only one compatible Android Accessory Mode interface in the device, attempt to find it */
+	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+	                              DCOMP_NextAndroidAccessoryInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+	{
+		return NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+	}
+
+	while (!(DataINEndpoint) || !(DataOUTEndpoint))
+	{
+		/* Get the next Android Accessory Mode interface's data endpoint descriptor */
+		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+		                              DCOMP_NextInterfaceBulkEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			/* Data endpoints not found within the first Android Accessory device interface, error out */
+			return NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+		}
+
+		/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* If the endpoint is a IN type endpoint */
+		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+		  DataINEndpoint  = EndpointData;
+		else
+		  DataOUTEndpoint = EndpointData;
+	}
+
+	/* Configure the Android Accessory data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(ANDROID_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress, DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize, 1);
+
+	/* Configure the Android Accessory data OUT pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(ANDROID_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress, DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointSize, 1);
+
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor containing the correct Android Accessory Mode Class, Subclass
+ *  and Protocol values.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DCOMP_NextAndroidAccessoryInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		if ((Interface->Class    == AOA_CSCP_AOADataClass)    &&
+		    (Interface->SubClass == AOA_CSCP_AOADataSubclass) &&
+		    (Interface->Protocol == AOA_CSCP_AOADataProtocol))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next bulk Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor, aborting the
+ *  search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DCOMP_NextInterfaceBulkEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* Endpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		uint8_t EndpointType = (Endpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
+
+		if ((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) && (!(Pipe_IsEndpointBound(Endpoint->EndpointAddress))))
+		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5b43d7049
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Pipe address of the Android Accessory data IN pipe. */
+		#define ANDROID_DATA_IN_PIPE         (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1)
+
+		/** Pipe address of the Android Accessory data OUT pipe. */
+		#define ANDROID_DATA_OUT_PIPE        (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2)
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the \ref ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum AndroidHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			DevControlError                 = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoCompatibleInterfaceFound      = 4, /**< A compatible interface with the required endpoints was not found */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+		uint8_t DCOMP_NextAndroidAccessoryInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DCOMP_NextInterfaceBulkEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/DeviceDescriptor.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/DeviceDescriptor.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2e3540857
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/DeviceDescriptor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptor processing routines, to determine the overall device parameters. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine information about
+ *  the attached device.
+ */
+
+#include "DeviceDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's Device Descriptor, to determine compatibility
+ *
+ *  This routine checks to ensure that the attached device's VID and PID matches Google's for Android devices.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the \ref AndroidHost_GetDeviceDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessDeviceDescriptor(void)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor;
+
+	/* Send the request to retrieve the device descriptor */
+	if (USB_Host_GetDeviceDescriptor(&DeviceDescriptor) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return DevControlError;
+
+	/* Validate returned data - ensure the returned data is a device descriptor */
+	if (DeviceDescriptor.Header.Type != DTYPE_Device)
+	  return InvalidDeviceDataReturned;
+
+	/* Check the product ID to determine if the Android device is in accessory mode */
+	if ((DeviceDescriptor.ProductID != ANDROID_ACCESSORY_PRODUCT_ID) &&
+	    (DeviceDescriptor.ProductID != ANDROID_ACCESSORY_ADB_PRODUCT_ID))
+	{
+		return NonAccessoryModeAndroidDevice;
+	}
+
+	return AccessoryModeAndroidDevice;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/DeviceDescriptor.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/DeviceDescriptor.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4a75fcc1a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/DeviceDescriptor.h
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DeviceDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DEVICEDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _DEVICEDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "AndroidAccessoryHost.h"
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the \ref ProcessDeviceDescriptor() function. */
+		enum AndroidHost_GetDeviceDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulDeviceRead            = 0, /**< Device Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			InvalidDeviceDataReturned       = 2, /**< The device returned an invalid Device Descriptor */
+			IncorrectAndroidDevice          = 3, /**< The attached device is not an Android device */
+			NonAccessoryModeAndroidDevice   = 4, /**< The attached device is an Android device in non-accessory mode */
+			AccessoryModeAndroidDevice      = 5, /**< The attached device is an Android device in accessory mode */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessDeviceDescriptor(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/Lib/AndroidAccessoryCommands.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/Lib/AndroidAccessoryCommands.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..750f9958f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/Lib/AndroidAccessoryCommands.c
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Android Accessory Mode utility functions, for the configuration of an attached
+ *  Android device into Android Accessory Mode ready for general communication.
+ */
+
+#include "AndroidAccessoryCommands.h"
+
+uint8_t Android_GetAccessoryProtocol(uint16_t* const Protocol)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+	{
+		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_VENDOR | REQREC_DEVICE),
+		.bRequest      = AOA_REQ_GetAccessoryProtocol,
+		.wValue        = 0,
+		.wIndex        = 0,
+		.wLength       = sizeof(uint16_t),
+	};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Protocol);
+}
+
+uint8_t Android_SendString(const uint8_t StringIndex,
+                           const char* const String)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+	{
+		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_VENDOR | REQREC_DEVICE),
+		.bRequest      = AOA_REQ_SendString,
+		.wValue        = 0,
+		.wIndex        = StringIndex,
+		.wLength       = (strlen(String) + 1),
+	};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest((char*)String);
+}
+
+uint8_t Android_StartAccessoryMode(void)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+	{
+		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_VENDOR | REQREC_DEVICE),
+		.bRequest      = AOA_REQ_StartAccessoryMode,
+		.wValue        = 0,
+		.wIndex        = 0,
+		.wLength       = 0,
+	};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/Lib/AndroidAccessoryCommands.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/Lib/AndroidAccessoryCommands.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..93b1b9658
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/Lib/AndroidAccessoryCommands.h
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for AndroidAccessoryCommands.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ANDROID_ACCESSORY_COMMANDS_H_
+#define _ANDROID_ACCESSORY_COMMANDS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <stdint.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t Android_GetAccessoryProtocol(uint16_t* const Protocol);
+		uint8_t Android_SendString(const uint8_t StringIndex,
+		                           const char* const String);
+		uint8_t Android_StartAccessoryMode(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..25b47661b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Android Accessory Host Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.android.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.android"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.android" caption="Android Accessory Host Demo (Low Level APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Android Accessory Host demo, implementing a basic USB device whose LEDs can be controlled via an Android device. This demo uses the Low Level LUFA APIs to manually implement a USB Class for demonstration purposes without using the simpler in-built LUFA Class Driver APIs.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="Android Accessory Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="AndroidAccessoryHost.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="AndroidAccessoryHost.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="DeviceDescriptor.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="ConfigDescriptor.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="AndroidAccessoryHost.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="DeviceDescriptor.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="ConfigDescriptor.h"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/AndroidAccessoryCommands.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/AndroidAccessoryCommands.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a17aa3bb0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Android Accessory Mode Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..57ccedd1b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AndroidAccessoryHost/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = AndroidAccessoryHost
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c ConfigDescriptor.c DeviceDescriptor.c Lib/AndroidAccessoryCommands.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioInputHost/AudioInputHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioInputHost/AudioInputHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a17648c37
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioInputHost/AudioInputHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,250 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the AudioInputHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "AudioInputHost.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Audio Input Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+	if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+	{
+		if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+		else
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+		printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
+		                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetInterfaceAltSetting(StreamingInterfaceIndex,
+	                                                 StreamingInterfaceAltSetting)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Could not set alternative streaming interface setting.\r\n"
+		                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT),
+			.bRequest      = AUDIO_REQ_SetCurrent,
+			.wValue        = (AUDIO_EPCONTROL_SamplingFreq << 8),
+			.wIndex        = StreamingEndpointAddress,
+			.wLength       = sizeof(USB_Audio_SampleFreq_t),
+		};
+
+	USB_Audio_SampleFreq_t SampleRate = AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(48000);
+
+	/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	/* Set the sample rate on the streaming interface endpoint */
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(&SampleRate)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Could not set requested Audio sample rate.\r\n"
+		                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Sample reload timer initialization */
+	TIMSK0  = (1 << OCIE0A);
+	OCR0A   = ((F_CPU / 8 / 48000) - 1);
+	TCCR0A  = (1 << WGM01);  // CTC mode
+	TCCR0B  = (1 << CS01);   // Fcpu/8 speed
+
+	/* Set speaker as output */
+	DDRC   |= (1 << 6);
+
+	/* PWM speaker timer initialization */
+	TCCR3A  = ((1 << WGM30) | (1 << COM3A1) | (1 << COM3A0)); // Set on match, clear on TOP
+	TCCR3B  = ((1 << WGM32) | (1 << CS30));  // Fast 8-Bit PWM, F_CPU speed
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Microphone Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** ISR to handle the reloading of the PWM timer with the next sample. */
+ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	uint8_t PrevPipe = Pipe_GetCurrentPipe();
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(AUDIO_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	/* Check if the current pipe can be read from (contains a packet) and the device is sending data */
+	if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+	{
+		/* Retrieve the signed 16-bit audio sample, convert to 8-bit */
+		int8_t Sample_8Bit = (Pipe_Read_16_LE() >> 8);
+
+		/* Check to see if the bank is now empty */
+		if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		{
+			/* Acknowledge the packet, clear the bank ready for the next packet */
+			Pipe_ClearIN();
+		}
+
+		/* Load the sample into the PWM timer channel */
+		OCR3A = (Sample_8Bit ^ (1 << 7));
+
+		uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+		/* Turn on LEDs as the sample amplitude increases */
+		if (Sample_8Bit > 16)
+		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4);
+		else if (Sample_8Bit > 8)
+		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3);
+		else if (Sample_8Bit > 4)
+		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+		else if (Sample_8Bit > 2)
+		  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+	}
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PrevPipe);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioInputHost/AudioInputHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioInputHost/AudioInputHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9f68c866b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioInputHost/AudioInputHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for AudioInputHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _AUDIO_INPUT_HOST_H_
+#define _AUDIO_INPUT_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioInputHost/AudioInputHost.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioInputHost/AudioInputHost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0736e0df4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioInputHost/AudioInputHost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Audio Input Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Audio Class</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Standard Audio Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Audio 1.0 Class Specification \n
+ *        USBIF Audio 1.0 Class Terminal Types Specification \n
+ *        USBIF Audio 1.0 Data Formats Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Audio Input host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Audio host, for USB Audio devices using
+ *  the USB Audio 1.0 class profile.
+ *
+ *  Incoming audio will output in 8-bit PWM onto the timer 3 output compare
+ *  channel A, and will also be indicated on the board LEDs. Decouple the PWM
+ *  output with a capacitor and attach to a speaker to hear the audio.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioInputHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioInputHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d657a214
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioInputHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioInputHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioInputHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8dd724667
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioInputHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,220 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
+ *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Index of the currently used Audio Streaming Interface within the device. */
+uint8_t StreamingInterfaceIndex      = 0;
+
+/** Alternative Setting of the currently used Audio Streaming Interface within the device. */
+uint8_t StreamingInterfaceAltSetting = 0;
+
+/** Address of the streaming audio endpoint currently in use within the device. */
+uint8_t StreamingEndpointAddress     = 0;
+
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for a Streaming Audio interface descriptor containing a valid Isochronous audio endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the \ref AudioHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+
+	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* AudioControlInterface   = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* AudioStreamingInterface = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint          = NULL;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return ControlError;
+	}
+
+	while (!(DataINEndpoint))
+	{
+		/* See if we've found a likely compatible interface, and if there is an endpoint within that interface */
+		if (!(AudioControlInterface) ||
+		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+		                              DComp_NextAudioInterfaceDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			/* Check if we haven't found an Audio Control interface yet, or if we have run out of related Audio Streaming interfaces */
+			if (!(AudioControlInterface) ||
+			    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+			                              DComp_NextAudioStreamInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+			{
+				/* Find a new Audio Control interface if the current one doesn't contain a compatible streaming interface */
+				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+				                              DComp_NextAudioControlInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+				{
+					/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+					return NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+				}
+
+				/* Save the interface in case we need to refer back to it later */
+				AudioControlInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+				/* Find the next Audio Streaming interface within that Audio Control interface */
+				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+				                              DComp_NextAudioStreamInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+				{
+					/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+					return NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+				}
+			}
+
+			/* Save the interface in case we need to refer back to it later */
+			AudioStreamingInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+			/* Skip the remainder of the loop as we have not found an endpoint yet */
+			continue;
+		}
+
+		/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* Save the endpoint if it is an IN type endpoint */
+		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+		  DataINEndpoint = EndpointData;
+	}
+
+	StreamingInterfaceIndex      = AudioStreamingInterface->InterfaceNumber;
+	StreamingInterfaceAltSetting = AudioStreamingInterface->AlternateSetting;
+	StreamingEndpointAddress     = DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress;
+
+	/* Configure the Audio data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(AUDIO_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS, DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress, DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize, 2);
+
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Audio Control Class, Subclass and Protocol values.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextAudioControlInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		if ((Interface->Class    == AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass) &&
+		    (Interface->SubClass == AUDIO_CSCP_ControlSubclass) &&
+		    (Interface->Protocol == AUDIO_CSCP_ControlProtocol))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Audio Streaming Class, Subclass and Protocol values.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextAudioStreamInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		if ((Interface->Class    == AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass) &&
+		    (Interface->SubClass == AUDIO_CSCP_AudioStreamingSubclass) &&
+		    (Interface->Protocol == AUDIO_CSCP_StreamingProtocol))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Isochronous Endpoint descriptor within the current interface, aborting the
+ *  search if another interface descriptor is found before the next endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextAudioInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* Endpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		if ((Endpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS)
+		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioInputHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioInputHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1fd4db8a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioInputHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "AudioInputHost.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Pipe address for the Audio data IN pipe. */
+		#define AUDIO_DATA_IN_PIPE          (PIPE_DIR_IN | 1)
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the \ref ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum AudioHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoCompatibleInterfaceFound      = 4, /**< A compatible interface with the required endpoints was not found */
+		};
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern uint8_t StreamingInterfaceIndex;
+		extern uint8_t StreamingInterfaceAltSetting;
+		extern uint8_t StreamingEndpointAddress;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+		uint8_t DComp_NextAudioControlInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextAudioStreamInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextAudioInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioInputHost/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioInputHost/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f6defd91d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioInputHost/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Audio Input Host Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.audio_input.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.audio_input"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.audio_input" caption="Audio Input Host Demo (Low Level APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Audio Input Host demo, implementing a basic USB audio sink that can output incoming audio data to a speaker. This demo uses the Low Level LUFA APIs to manually implement a USB Class for demonstration purposes without using the simpler in-built LUFA Class Driver APIs.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="Audio Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="AudioInputHost.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="AudioInputHost.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="ConfigDescriptor.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="AudioInputHost.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="ConfigDescriptor.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioInputHost/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioInputHost/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2440541f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioInputHost/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Audio Input Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioInputHost/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioInputHost/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..df1bd0bc8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioInputHost/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = AudioInputHost
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c ConfigDescriptor.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioOutputHost/AudioOutputHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioOutputHost/AudioOutputHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..819c83eeb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioOutputHost/AudioOutputHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,250 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the AudioOutputHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "AudioOutputHost.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Audio Output Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	Buttons_Init();
+	ADC_Init(ADC_FREE_RUNNING | ADC_PRESCALE_32);
+	ADC_SetupChannel(MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+
+	/* Start the ADC conversion in free running mode */
+	ADC_StartReading(ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC | ADC_RIGHT_ADJUSTED | ADC_GET_CHANNEL_MASK(MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL));
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+	if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+	{
+		if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+		else
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+		printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
+		                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetInterfaceAltSetting(StreamingInterfaceIndex,
+	                                                 StreamingInterfaceAltSetting)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Could not set alternative streaming interface setting.\r\n"
+		                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT),
+			.bRequest      = AUDIO_REQ_SetCurrent,
+			.wValue        = (AUDIO_EPCONTROL_SamplingFreq << 8),
+			.wIndex        = StreamingEndpointAddress,
+			.wLength       = sizeof(USB_Audio_SampleFreq_t),
+		};
+
+	USB_Audio_SampleFreq_t SampleRate = AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(48000);
+
+	/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	/* Set the sample rate on the streaming interface endpoint */
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(&SampleRate)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Could not set requested Audio sample rate.\r\n"
+		                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Sample reload timer initialization */
+	TIMSK0  = (1 << OCIE0A);
+	OCR0A   = ((F_CPU / 8 / 48000) - 1);
+	TCCR0A  = (1 << WGM01);  // CTC mode
+	TCCR0B  = (1 << CS01);   // Fcpu/8 speed
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Speaker Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** ISR to handle the reloading of the endpoint with the next sample. */
+ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	uint8_t PrevPipe = Pipe_GetCurrentPipe();
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(AUDIO_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	/* Check if the current pipe can be written to (device ready for more data) */
+	if (Pipe_IsOUTReady())
+	{
+		int16_t AudioSample;
+
+		#if defined(USE_TEST_TONE)
+			static uint8_t SquareWaveSampleCount;
+			static int16_t CurrentWaveValue;
+
+			/* In test tone mode, generate a square wave at 1/256 of the sample rate */
+			if (SquareWaveSampleCount++ == 0xFF)
+			  CurrentWaveValue ^= 0x8000;
+
+			/* Only generate audio if the board button is being pressed */
+			AudioSample = (Buttons_GetStatus() & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ? CurrentWaveValue : 0;
+		#else
+			/* Audio sample is ADC value scaled to fit the entire range */
+			AudioSample = ((SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE / ADC_MAX_RANGE) * ADC_GetResult());
+
+			#if defined(MICROPHONE_BIASED_TO_HALF_RAIL)
+			/* Microphone is biased to half rail voltage, subtract the bias from the sample value */
+			AudioSample -= (SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE / 2);
+			#endif
+		#endif
+
+		Pipe_Write_16_LE(AudioSample);
+		Pipe_Write_16_LE(AudioSample);
+
+		if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		  Pipe_ClearOUT();
+	}
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PrevPipe);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioOutputHost/AudioOutputHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioOutputHost/AudioOutputHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6b7ccce91
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioOutputHost/AudioOutputHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for AudioOutputHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _AUDIO_OUTPUT_HOST_H_
+#define _AUDIO_OUTPUT_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Maximum audio sample value for the microphone input. */
+		#define SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE          0xFFFF
+
+		/** Maximum ADC range for the microphone input. */
+		#define ADC_MAX_RANGE             0x3FF
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioOutputHost/AudioOutputHost.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioOutputHost/AudioOutputHost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5e79a33e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioOutputHost/AudioOutputHost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Audio Output Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Audio Class</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Standard Audio Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Audio 1.0 Class Specification \n
+ *        USBIF Audio 1.0 Class Terminal Types Specification \n
+ *        USBIF Audio 1.0 Data Formats Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Audio Output host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Audio host, for USB Audio devices using
+ *  the USB Audio 1.0 class profile.
+ *
+ *  By default, the demo will produce a square wave test tone when the board
+ *  button is pressed. If USE_TEST_TONE is not defined in the project makefile,
+ *  incoming audio from the ADC channel 1 will be sampled and sent to the attached
+ *  USB audio device instead.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Sets the ADC channel used by the demo for the input audio samples from an attached microphone.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>USE_TEST_TONE</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, this alters the demo to produce a square wave test tone when the first board button is pressed
+ *        instead of sampling the board microphone.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MICROPHONE_BIASED_TO_HALF_RAIL</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, this alters the demo so that the half VCC bias of the microphone input is subtracted.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioOutputHost/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioOutputHost/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8360102f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioOutputHost/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
+ *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
+ *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
+ *  makefile or build system.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#define MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL               2
+
+	#define MICROPHONE_BIASED_TO_HALF_RAIL
+	#define USE_TEST_TONE
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioOutputHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioOutputHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d657a214
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioOutputHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioOutputHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioOutputHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b1e675ab4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioOutputHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,220 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
+ *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Index of the currently used Audio Streaming Interface within the device. */
+uint8_t StreamingInterfaceIndex      = 0;
+
+/** Alternative Setting of the currently used Audio Streaming Interface within the device. */
+uint8_t StreamingInterfaceAltSetting = 0;
+
+/** Address of the streaming audio endpoint currently in use within the device. */
+uint8_t StreamingEndpointAddress     = 0;
+
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for a Streaming Audio interface descriptor containing a valid Isochronous audio endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the \ref AudioHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+
+	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* AudioControlInterface   = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* AudioStreamingInterface = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataOUTEndpoint         = NULL;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return ControlError;
+	}
+
+	while (!(DataOUTEndpoint))
+	{
+		/* See if we've found a likely compatible interface, and if there is an endpoint within that interface */
+		if (!(AudioControlInterface) ||
+		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+		                              DComp_NextAudioInterfaceDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			/* Check if we haven't found an Audio Control interface yet, or if we have run out of related Audio Streaming interfaces */
+			if (!(AudioControlInterface) ||
+			    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+				                          DComp_NextAudioStreamInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+			{
+				/* Find a new Audio Control interface if the current one doesn't contain a compatible streaming interface */
+				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+				                              DComp_NextAudioControlInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+				{
+					/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+					return NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+				}
+
+				/* Save the interface in case we need to refer back to it later */
+				AudioControlInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+				/* Find the next Audio Streaming interface within that Audio Control interface */
+				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+				                              DComp_NextAudioStreamInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+				{
+					/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+					return NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+				}
+			}
+
+			/* Save the interface in case we need to refer back to it later */
+			AudioStreamingInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+			/* Skip the remainder of the loop as we have not found an endpoint yet */
+			continue;
+		}
+
+		/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* Save the endpoint if it is an OUT type endpoint */
+		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT)
+		  DataOUTEndpoint = EndpointData;
+	}
+
+	StreamingInterfaceIndex      = AudioStreamingInterface->InterfaceNumber;
+	StreamingInterfaceAltSetting = AudioStreamingInterface->AlternateSetting;
+	StreamingEndpointAddress     = DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress;
+
+	/* Configure the Audio data OUT pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(AUDIO_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS, DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress, DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointSize, 2);
+
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Audio Control Class, Subclass and Protocol values.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextAudioControlInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		if ((Interface->Class    == AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass) &&
+		    (Interface->SubClass == AUDIO_CSCP_ControlSubclass) &&
+		    (Interface->Protocol == AUDIO_CSCP_ControlProtocol))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Audio Streaming Class, Subclass and Protocol values.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextAudioStreamInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		if ((Interface->Class    == AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass) &&
+		    (Interface->SubClass == AUDIO_CSCP_AudioStreamingSubclass) &&
+		    (Interface->Protocol == AUDIO_CSCP_StreamingProtocol))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Isochronous Endpoint descriptor within the current interface, aborting the
+ *  search if another interface descriptor is found before the next endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextAudioInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* Endpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		if ((Endpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS)
+		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioOutputHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioOutputHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4b9ace16f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioOutputHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "AudioOutputHost.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Pipe address for the Audio data OUT pipe. */
+		#define AUDIO_DATA_OUT_PIPE          (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 1)
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the \ref ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum AudioHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoCompatibleInterfaceFound      = 4, /**< A compatible interface with the required endpoints was not found */
+		};
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern uint8_t StreamingInterfaceIndex;
+		extern uint8_t StreamingInterfaceAltSetting;
+		extern uint8_t StreamingEndpointAddress;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+		uint8_t DComp_NextAudioControlInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextAudioStreamInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextAudioInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioOutputHost/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioOutputHost/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ebc1587c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioOutputHost/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Audio Output Host Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.audio_output.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.audio_output"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.audio_output" caption="Audio Output Host Demo (Low Level APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Audio Output Host demo, implementing a basic USB audio source that can output audio data to an attached device. This demo uses the Low Level LUFA APIs to manually implement a USB Class for demonstration purposes without using the simpler in-built LUFA Class Driver APIs.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="Audio Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="AudioOutputHost.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="AudioOutputHost.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="ConfigDescriptor.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="AudioOutputHost.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="ConfigDescriptor.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.adc"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioOutputHost/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioOutputHost/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..29cf0ddac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioOutputHost/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Audio Output Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioOutputHost/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioOutputHost/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fc3058af1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/AudioOutputHost/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = AudioOutputHost
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c ConfigDescriptor.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d657a214
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8efa20f12
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,183 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
+ *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the \ref GenericHIDHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+
+	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* HIDInterface    = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint  = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return ControlError;
+	}
+
+	while (!(DataINEndpoint) || !(DataOUTEndpoint))
+	{
+		/* See if we've found a likely compatible interface, and if there is an endpoint within that interface */
+		if (!(HIDInterface) ||
+		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+		                              DComp_NextHIDInterfaceDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			/* Not all HID devices have an OUT endpoint - if we've reached the end of the HID descriptor
+			 * but only found the mandatory IN endpoint, it's safe to continue with the device enumeration */
+			if (DataINEndpoint)
+			  break;
+
+			/* Get the next HID interface from the configuration descriptor */
+			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+										  DComp_NextHIDInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+			{
+				/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+				return NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+			}
+
+			/* Save the interface in case we need to refer back to it later */
+			HIDInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+			/* Clear any found endpoints */
+			DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;
+
+			/* Skip the remainder of the loop as we have not found an endpoint yet */
+			continue;
+		}
+
+		/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* If the endpoint is a IN type endpoint */
+		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+		  DataINEndpoint = EndpointData;
+		else
+		  DataOUTEndpoint = EndpointData;
+	}
+
+	/* Configure the HID data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(HID_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress, DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize, 1);
+	Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(DataINEndpoint->PollingIntervalMS);
+
+	/* Check if the HID interface contained an optional OUT data endpoint */
+	if (DataOUTEndpoint)
+	{
+		/* Configure the HID data OUT pipe */
+		Pipe_ConfigurePipe(HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress, DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointSize, 1);
+	}
+
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct HID Class value.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	/* Determine if the current descriptor is an interface descriptor */
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		/* Check the HID descriptor class, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
+		if (Interface->Class == HID_CSCP_HIDClass)
+		{
+			/* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor,
+ *  aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	/* Determine the type of the current descriptor */
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		/* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		/* Indicate that the search has failed prematurely and should be aborted */
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	/* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..968e67682
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "GenericHIDHost.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Pipe address for the HID data IN pipe. */
+		#define HID_DATA_IN_PIPE          (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1)
+
+		/** Pipe address for the HID data OUT pipe. */
+		#define HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE         (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2)
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the \ref ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum GenericHIDHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoCompatibleInterfaceFound      = 4, /**< A compatible interface with the required endpoints was not found */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+		uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b05dfa8eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,269 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the GenericHIDHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "GenericHIDHost.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Generic HID Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		ReadNextReport();
+
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+	if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+	{
+		if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+		else
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+		printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
+		                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("HID Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Reads in and processes the next report from the attached device, displaying the report
+ *  contents on the board LEDs and via the serial port.
+ */
+void ReadNextReport(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Select and unfreeze HID data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(HID_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	/* Check to see if a packet has been received */
+	if (!(Pipe_IsINReceived()))
+	{
+		/* Refreeze HID data IN pipe */
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Ensure pipe contains data before trying to read from it */
+	if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+	{
+		uint8_t ReportINData[Pipe_BytesInPipe()];
+
+		/* Read in HID report data */
+		Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&ReportINData, sizeof(ReportINData), NULL);
+
+		/* Print report data through the serial port */
+		for (uint16_t CurrByte = 0; CurrByte < sizeof(ReportINData); CurrByte++)
+		  printf_P(PSTR("0x%02X "), ReportINData[CurrByte]);
+
+		puts_P(PSTR("\r\n"));
+	}
+
+	/* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */
+	Pipe_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Refreeze HID data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+}
+
+/** Writes a report to the attached device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] ReportOUTData  Buffer containing the report to send to the device
+ *  \param[in] ReportIndex    Index of the report in the device (zero if the device does not use multiple reports)
+ *  \param[in] ReportType     Type of report to send, either REPORT_TYPE_OUT or REPORT_TYPE_FEATURE
+ *  \param[in] ReportLength   Length of the report to send
+ */
+void WriteNextReport(uint8_t* ReportOUTData,
+                     const uint8_t ReportIndex,
+                     const uint8_t ReportType,
+                     uint16_t ReportLength)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Select the HID data OUT pipe */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+
+	/* Not all HID devices have an OUT endpoint (some require OUT reports to be sent over the
+	 * control endpoint instead) - check to see if the OUT endpoint has been initialized */
+	if (Pipe_IsConfigured() && (ReportType == REPORT_TYPE_OUT))
+	{
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		/* Ensure pipe is ready to be written to before continuing */
+		if (!(Pipe_IsOUTReady()))
+		{
+			/* Refreeze the data OUT pipe */
+			Pipe_Freeze();
+
+			return;
+		}
+
+		/* If the report index is used, send it before the report data */
+		if (ReportIndex)
+		  Pipe_Write_8(ReportIndex);
+
+		/* Write out HID report data */
+		Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(ReportOUTData, ReportLength, NULL);
+
+		/* Clear the OUT endpoint, send last data packet */
+		Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+		/* Refreeze the data OUT pipe */
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Class specific request to send a HID report to the device */
+		USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+			{
+				.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+				.bRequest      = HID_REQ_SetReport,
+				.wValue        = ((ReportType << 8) | ReportIndex),
+				.wIndex        = 0,
+				.wLength       = ReportLength,
+			};
+
+		/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+		/* Send the request to the device */
+		USB_Host_SendControlRequest(ReportOUTData);
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..065c7ac71
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for GenericHIDHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _GENERICHID_HOST_H_
+#define _GENERICHID_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** HID Report Type to indicate an IN report. */
+		#define REPORT_TYPE_IN           1
+
+		/** HID Report Type to indicate an OUT report. */
+		#define REPORT_TYPE_OUT          2
+
+		/** HID Report Type to indicate a FEATURE report. */
+		#define REPORT_TYPE_FEATURE      3
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void ReadNextReport(void);
+		void WriteNextReport(uint8_t* ReportOUTData,
+		                     const uint8_t ReportIndex,
+		                     const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                     uint16_t ReportLength);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1c9b1875a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Generic HID Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Generic HID host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a Generic HID USB host, for any device implementing
+ *  the HID profile.
+ *
+ *  Received reports from the attached device are printed to the serial port.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2321a8139
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Generic HID Host Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.generic_hid.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.generic_hid"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.generic_hid" caption="Generic HID Host Demo (Low Level APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Generic HID Host demo, implementing a basic USB HID device that can send and receive data to and from an attached device. This demo uses the Low Level LUFA APIs to manually implement a USB Class for demonstration purposes without using the simpler in-built LUFA Class Driver APIs.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="GenericHIDHost.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="GenericHIDHost.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="ConfigDescriptor.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="GenericHIDHost.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="ConfigDescriptor.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..21dad31cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Generic HID Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..33a8b7e36
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/GenericHIDHost/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = GenericHIDHost
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c ConfigDescriptor.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d657a214
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..50740e02d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,187 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
+ *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint and HID descriptor.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the \ref JoystickHostWithParser_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+
+	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* HIDInterface   = NULL;
+	USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t*   HIDDescriptor  = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint = NULL;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return ControlError;
+	}
+
+	while (!(DataINEndpoint))
+	{
+		/* See if we've found a likely compatible interface, and if there is an endpoint within that interface */
+		if (!(HIDInterface) ||
+		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+		                              DComp_NextJoystickInterfaceDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			/* Get the next HID interface from the configuration descriptor */
+			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+										  DComp_NextJoystickInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+			{
+				/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+				return NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+			}
+
+			/* Save the interface in case we need to refer back to it later */
+			HIDInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+			/* Get the HID descriptor from the configuration descriptor */
+			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+										  DComp_NextHID) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+			{
+				/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+				return NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+			}
+
+			/* Save the HID descriptor for later use */
+			HIDDescriptor = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t);
+
+			/* Skip the remainder of the loop as we have not found an endpoint yet */
+			continue;
+		}
+
+		/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* If the endpoint is a IN type endpoint */
+		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+		  DataINEndpoint = EndpointData;
+	}
+
+	/* Configure the HID data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(JOYSTICK_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress, DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize, 1);
+	Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(DataINEndpoint->PollingIntervalMS);
+
+	/* Get the HID report size from the HID report descriptor */
+	HIDReportSize = HIDDescriptor->HIDReportLength;
+
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Joystick HID Class and Protocol values.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextJoystickInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		/* Check the HID descriptor class, break out if correct class interface found */
+		if ((Interface->Class == HID_CSCP_HIDClass))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor, aborting the
+ *  search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextJoystickInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	else
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next HID descriptor within the current HID interface descriptor.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextHID(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == HID_DTYPE_HID)
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	else
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b351a9ddc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "HIDReport.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Pipe address for the joystick report data pipe. */
+		#define JOYSTICK_DATA_IN_PIPE       (PIPE_DIR_IN | 1)
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the \ref ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum JoystickHostWithParser_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoHIDInterfaceFound             = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoHIDDescriptorFound            = 5, /**< A compatible HID descriptor was not found in the device's HID interface */
+			NoCompatibleInterfaceFound      = 4, /**< A compatible interface with the required endpoints was not found */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+		uint8_t DComp_NextJoystickInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextJoystickInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextHID(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/HIDReport.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/HIDReport.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8a5cecf4d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/HIDReport.c
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "HIDReport.h"
+
+/** Size in bytes of the attached device's HID report descriptor */
+uint16_t         HIDReportSize;
+
+/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */
+HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
+
+
+/** Function to read in the HID report descriptor from the attached device, and process it into easy-to-read
+ *  structures via the HID parser routines in the LUFA library.
+ *
+ *  \return  A value from the \ref JoystickHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void)
+{
+	/* Create a buffer big enough to hold the entire returned HID report */
+	uint8_t HIDReportData[HIDReportSize];
+
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_GetDescriptor,
+			.wValue        = (HID_DTYPE_Report << 8),
+			.wIndex        = 0,
+			.wLength       = HIDReportSize,
+		};
+
+	/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	/* Send control request to retrieve the HID report from the attached device */
+	if (USB_Host_SendControlRequest(HIDReportData) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return ParseControlError;
+
+	/* Send the HID report to the parser for processing */
+	if (USB_ProcessHIDReport(HIDReportData, HIDReportSize, &HIDReportInfo) != HID_PARSE_Successful)
+	  return ParseError;
+
+	return ParseSuccessful;
+}
+
+/** Callback for the HID Report Parser. This function is called each time the HID report parser is about to store
+ *  an IN, OUT or FEATURE item into the HIDReportInfo structure. To save on RAM, we are able to filter out items
+ *  we aren't interested in (preventing us from being able to extract them later on, but saving on the RAM they would
+ *  have occupied).
+ *
+ *  \param[in] CurrentItem  Pointer to the item the HID report parser is currently working with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the item should be stored into the HID report structure, \c false if it should be discarded
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* const CurrentItem)
+{
+	bool IsJoystick = false;
+
+	/* Iterate through the item's collection path, until either the root collection node or a collection with the
+	 * Joystick Usage is found - this prevents Mice, which use identical descriptors except for the Mouse usage
+	 * parent node, from being erroneously treated as a joystick
+	 */
+	for (HID_CollectionPath_t* CurrPath = CurrentItem->CollectionPath; CurrPath != NULL; CurrPath = CurrPath->Parent)
+	{
+		if ((CurrPath->Usage.Page  == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
+		    (CurrPath->Usage.Usage == USAGE_JOYSTICK))
+		{
+			IsJoystick = true;
+			break;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* If a collection with the joystick usage was not found, indicate that we are not interested in this item */
+	if (!IsJoystick)
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Check the attributes of the current joystick item - see if we are interested in it or not;
+	 * only store BUTTON and GENERIC_DESKTOP_CONTROL items into the Processed HID Report
+	 * structure to save RAM and ignore the rest
+	 */
+	return ((CurrentItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON) ||
+	        (CurrentItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL));
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/HIDReport.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/HIDReport.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..81c690d55
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/HIDReport.h
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for HIDReport.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _HID_REPORT_H_
+#define _HID_REPORT_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "JoystickHostWithParser.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a toggle button. */
+		#define USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON           0x09
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a Generic Desktop Control. */
+		#define USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL    0x01
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage for a Joystick. */
+		#define USAGE_JOYSTICK              0x04
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a X axis movement. */
+		#define USAGE_X                     0x30
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a Y axis movement. */
+		#define USAGE_Y                     0x31
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the \ref GetHIDReportData() function. */
+		enum JoystickHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t
+		{
+			ParseSuccessful         = 0, /**< HID report descriptor parsed successfully */
+			ParseError              = 1, /**< Failed to fully process the HID report descriptor */
+			ParseControlError       = 2, /**< Control error occurred while trying to read the device HID descriptor */
+		};
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern uint16_t         HIDReportSize;
+		extern HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* const CurrentItem);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1425d7448
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.c
@@ -0,0 +1,273 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the JoystickHostWithParser demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "JoystickHostWithParser.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Joystick HID Parser Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		JoystickHost_Task();
+
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+	if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+	{
+		if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+		else
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+		printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
+		                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("Processing HID Report (Size %d Bytes).\r\n"), HIDReportSize);
+
+	/* Get and process the device's first HID report descriptor */
+	if ((ErrorCode = GetHIDReportData()) != ParseSuccessful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Report Parse Error.\r\n"));
+
+		if (!(HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems))
+			puts_P(PSTR("Not a valid Joystick." ESC_FG_WHITE));
+		else
+			printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Joystick Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Task to read and process the HID report descriptor and HID reports from the device
+ *  and display the results onto the board LEDs.
+ */
+void JoystickHost_Task(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Select and unfreeze joystick data pipe */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(JOYSTICK_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	/* Check to see if a packet has been received */
+	if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+	{
+		/* Check if data has been received from the attached joystick */
+		if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+		{
+			/* Create buffer big enough for the report */
+			uint8_t JoystickReport[Pipe_BytesInPipe()];
+
+			/* Load in the joystick report */
+			Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(JoystickReport, Pipe_BytesInPipe(), NULL);
+
+			/* Process the read in joystick report from the device */
+			ProcessJoystickReport(JoystickReport);
+		}
+
+		/* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */
+		Pipe_ClearIN();
+	}
+
+	/* Freeze joystick data pipe */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+}
+
+/** Processes a read HID report from an attached joystick, extracting out elements via the HID parser results
+ *  as required and displays movement and button presses on the board LEDs.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] JoystickReport  Pointer to a HID report from an attached joystick device
+ */
+void ProcessJoystickReport(uint8_t* JoystickReport)
+{
+	uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+	/* Check each HID report item in turn, looking for joystick X/Y/button reports */
+	for (uint8_t ReportNumber = 0; ReportNumber < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ReportNumber++)
+	{
+		/* Create a temporary item pointer to the next report item */
+		HID_ReportItem_t* ReportItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ReportNumber];
+
+		bool FoundData;
+
+		if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page        == USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON) &&
+			(ReportItem->ItemType                     == HID_REPORT_ITEM_In))
+		{
+			/* Get the joystick button value */
+			FoundData = USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(JoystickReport, ReportItem);
+
+			/* For multi-report devices - if the requested data was not in the issued report, continue */
+			if (!(FoundData))
+			  continue;
+
+			/* If button is pressed, all LEDs are turned on */
+			if (ReportItem->Value)
+			  LEDMask = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+		}
+		else if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page   == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
+				 ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X)                  ||
+				  (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_Y))                 &&
+				 (ReportItem->ItemType                == HID_REPORT_ITEM_In))
+		{
+			/* Get the joystick relative position value */
+			FoundData = USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(JoystickReport, ReportItem);
+
+			/* For multi-report devices - if the requested data was not in the issued report, continue */
+			if (!(FoundData))
+			  continue;
+
+			int16_t DeltaMovement = HID_ALIGN_DATA(ReportItem, int16_t);
+
+			/* Check to see if a (non-zero) delta movement has been indicated */
+			if (DeltaMovement)
+			{
+				/* Determine if the report is for the X or Y delta movement, light LEDs as appropriate */
+				if (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X)
+				  LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED1 : LEDS_LED2);
+				else
+				  LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED3 : LEDS_LED4);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Display the button information on the board LEDs */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4a01bcdfb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.h
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for JoystickHostWithParser.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _JOYSTICK_HOST_H_
+#define _JOYSTICK_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+		#include "HIDReport.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void JoystickHost_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+		void ProcessJoystickReport(uint8_t* JoystickReport);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9eba4ed86
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/JoystickHostWithParser.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Joystick Host With HID Descriptor Parser Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Joystick host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Joystick host, for USB joysticks using
+ *  the standard joystick HID profile. It uses a HID parser for the HID
+ *  reports, allowing for correct operation across all USB joysticks. This
+ *  demo supports joysticks with a single HID report.
+ *
+ *  Joystick movement and button presses are displayed on the board LEDs.
+ *  On connection to a USB joystick, the report items will be processed and
+ *  printed as a formatted list through the USART before the joystick is
+ *  fully enumerated.
+ *
+ *  Currently only single interface joysticks are supported.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f2b919511
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Joystick HID (with parser) Host Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.joystick_parser.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.joystick_parser"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.joystick_parser" caption="Joystick HID (with parser) Host Demo (Low Level APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Joystick HID Host demo with HID parser, implementing a basic USB joystick host that can display movement data on the board LEDs. This demo uses the Low Level LUFA APIs to manually implement a USB Class for demonstration purposes without using the simpler in-built LUFA Class Driver APIs.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="JoystickHostWithParser.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="JoystickHostWithParser.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="ConfigDescriptor.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="HIDReport.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="JoystickHostWithParser.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="ConfigDescriptor.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="HIDReport.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5af83f00d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Joystick Host Demo (Using HID Descriptor Parser)"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..11c7961e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/JoystickHostWithParser/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = JoystickHostWithParser
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c ConfigDescriptor.c HIDReport.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d657a214
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bafece6ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,155 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
+ *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the \ref KeyboardHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+
+	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* HIDInterface   = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint = NULL;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return ControlError;
+	}
+
+	while (!(DataINEndpoint))
+	{
+		/* See if we've found a likely compatible interface, and if there is an endpoint within that interface */
+		if (!(HIDInterface) ||
+		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+		                              DComp_NextKeyboardInterfaceDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			/* Get the next HID interface from the configuration descriptor */
+			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+										  DComp_NextKeyboardInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+			{
+				/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+				return NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+			}
+
+			/* Save the interface in case we need to refer back to it later */
+			HIDInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+			/* Skip the remainder of the loop as we have not found an endpoint yet */
+			continue;
+		}
+
+		/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* If the endpoint is a IN type endpoint */
+		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+		  DataINEndpoint = EndpointData;
+	}
+
+	/* Configure the HID data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(KEYBOARD_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress, DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize, 1);
+	Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(DataINEndpoint->PollingIntervalMS);
+
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Keyboard HID Class and Protocol values.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		/* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
+		if ((Interface->Class    == HID_CSCP_HIDClass) &&
+		    (Interface->Protocol == HID_CSCP_KeyboardBootProtocol))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor, aborting the
+ *  search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	else
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cc2b26f21
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "KeyboardHost.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Pipe address for the keyboard data IN pipe. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_DATA_IN_PIPE          (PIPE_DIR_IN | 1)
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the \ref ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum KeyboardHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoCompatibleInterfaceFound      = 4, /**< A compatible interface with the required endpoints was not found */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+		uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f732b9d32
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,264 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the KeyboardHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "KeyboardHost.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Keyboard HID Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		KeyboardHost_Task();
+
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+	if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+	{
+		if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+		else
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+		printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
+		                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* HID class request to set the keyboard protocol to the Boot Protocol */
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = HID_REQ_SetProtocol,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = 0,
+			.wLength       = 0,
+		};
+
+	/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	/* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Protocol).\r\n"
+		                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Keyboard Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Task to read in and processes the next report from the attached device, displaying the report
+ *  contents on the board LEDs and via the serial port.
+ */
+void KeyboardHost_Task(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Select keyboard data pipe */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(KEYBOARD_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+
+	/* Unfreeze keyboard data pipe */
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	/* Check to see if a packet has been received */
+	if (!(Pipe_IsINReceived()))
+	{
+		/* Refreeze HID data IN pipe */
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Ensure pipe contains data before trying to read from it */
+	if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+	{
+		USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReport;
+
+		/* Read in keyboard report data */
+		Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReport, sizeof(KeyboardReport), NULL);
+
+		/* Indicate if the modifier byte is non-zero (special key such as shift is being pressed) */
+		LEDs_ChangeLEDs(LEDS_LED1, (KeyboardReport.Modifier) ? LEDS_LED1 : 0);
+
+		uint8_t KeyCode = KeyboardReport.KeyCode[0];
+
+		/* Check if a key has been pressed */
+		if (KeyCode)
+		{
+			/* Toggle status LED to indicate keypress */
+			LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED2);
+
+			char PressedKey = 0;
+
+			/* Retrieve pressed key character if alphanumeric */
+			if ((KeyCode >= HID_KEYBOARD_SC_A) && (KeyCode <= HID_KEYBOARD_SC_Z))
+			{
+				PressedKey = (KeyCode - HID_KEYBOARD_SC_A) + 'A';
+			}
+			else if ((KeyCode >= HID_KEYBOARD_SC_1_AND_EXCLAMATION) &
+					 (KeyCode  < HID_KEYBOARD_SC_0_AND_CLOSING_PARENTHESIS))
+			{
+				PressedKey = (KeyCode - HID_KEYBOARD_SC_1_AND_EXCLAMATION) + '1';
+			}
+			else if (KeyCode == HID_KEYBOARD_SC_0_AND_CLOSING_PARENTHESIS)
+			{
+				PressedKey = '0';
+			}
+			else if (KeyCode == HID_KEYBOARD_SC_SPACE)
+			{
+				PressedKey = ' ';
+			}
+			else if (KeyCode == HID_KEYBOARD_SC_ENTER)
+			{
+				PressedKey = '\n';
+			}
+
+			/* Print the pressed key character out through the serial port if valid */
+			if (PressedKey)
+			  putchar(PressedKey);
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */
+	Pipe_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Refreeze keyboard data pipe */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..74c949afd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for KeyboardHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_
+#define _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void KeyboardHost_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..206ccc011
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Keyboard Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Keyboard host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB keyboard host, for USB keyboards using
+ *  the standard keyboard HID profile.
+ *
+ *  Pressed alpha-numeric, enter or space key is transmitted through the serial
+ *  USART at serial settings 9600, 8, N, 1.
+ *
+ *  This uses a naive method where the keyboard is set to Boot Protocol mode, so
+ *  that the report structure is fixed and known. A better implementation
+ *  uses the HID report parser for correct report data processing across
+ *  all compatible mice with advanced characteristics, as shown in the
+ *  KeyboardHostWithParser demo application.
+ *
+ *  Currently only single interface keyboards are supported.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1256e3540
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Keyboard HID Host Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.keyboard.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.keyboard"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.keyboard" caption="Keyboard HID Host Demo (Low Level APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Keyboard HID Host demo, implementing a basic USB keyboard host that can display key press data on the board LEDs. This demo uses the Low Level LUFA APIs to manually implement a USB Class for demonstration purposes without using the simpler in-built LUFA Class Driver APIs.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="KeyboardHost.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="KeyboardHost.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="ConfigDescriptor.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="KeyboardHost.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="ConfigDescriptor.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6ac6b0525
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2a78d1503
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHost/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = KeyboardHost
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c ConfigDescriptor.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d657a214
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..59d8ea432
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,189 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
+ *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint and HID descriptor.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the \ref KeyboardHostWithParser_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+
+	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* HIDInterface   = NULL;
+	USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t*   HIDDescriptor  = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint = NULL;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return ControlError;
+	}
+
+	while (!(DataINEndpoint))
+	{
+		/* See if we've found a likely compatible interface, and if there is an endpoint within that interface */
+		if (!(HIDInterface) ||
+		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+		                              DComp_NextKeyboardInterfaceDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			/* Get the next HID interface from the configuration descriptor */
+			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+										  DComp_NextKeyboardInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+			{
+				/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+				return NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+			}
+
+			/* Save the interface in case we need to refer back to it later */
+			HIDInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+			/* Get the HID descriptor from the configuration descriptor */
+			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+										  DComp_NextHID) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+			{
+				/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+				return NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+			}
+
+			/* Save the HID descriptor for later use */
+			HIDDescriptor = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t);
+
+			/* Skip the remainder of the loop as we have not found an endpoint yet */
+			continue;
+		}
+
+		/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* If the endpoint is a IN type endpoint */
+		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+		  DataINEndpoint = EndpointData;
+	}
+
+	/* Configure the HID data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(KEYBOARD_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress, DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize, 1);
+	Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(DataINEndpoint->PollingIntervalMS);
+
+	/* Get the HID report size from the HID report descriptor */
+	HIDReportSize = HIDDescriptor->HIDReportLength;
+
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Keyboard HID Class and Protocol values.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		/* Check the HID descriptor class, break out if correct class interface found */
+		if (Interface->Class == HID_CSCP_HIDClass)
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor, aborting the
+ *  search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	else
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next HID descriptor within the current HID interface descriptor.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextHID(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == HID_DTYPE_HID)
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	else
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..20403becd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "HIDReport.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Pipe address for the keyboard report data IN pipe. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_DATA_IN_PIPE          (PIPE_DIR_IN | 1)
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the \ref ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum KeyboardHostWithParser_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoCompatibleInterfaceFound      = 4, /**< A compatible interface with the required endpoints was not found */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+		uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextHID(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3bae3f52d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.c
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "HIDReport.h"
+
+/** Size in bytes of the attached device's HID report descriptor */
+uint16_t         HIDReportSize;
+
+/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */
+HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
+
+
+/** Function to read in the HID report descriptor from the attached device, and process it into easy-to-read
+ *  structures via the HID parser routines in the LUFA library.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the \ref KeyboardHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void)
+{
+	/* Create a buffer big enough to hold the entire returned HID report */
+	uint8_t HIDReportData[HIDReportSize];
+
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_GetDescriptor,
+			.wValue        = (HID_DTYPE_Report << 8),
+			.wIndex        = 0,
+			.wLength       = HIDReportSize,
+		};
+
+	/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	/* Send control request to retrieve the HID report from the attached device */
+	if (USB_Host_SendControlRequest(HIDReportData) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return ParseControlError;
+
+	/* Send the HID report to the parser for processing */
+	if (USB_ProcessHIDReport(HIDReportData, HIDReportSize, &HIDReportInfo) != HID_PARSE_Successful)
+	  return ParseError;
+
+	return ParseSuccessful;
+}
+
+/** Callback for the HID Report Parser. This function is called each time the HID report parser is about to store
+ *  an IN, OUT or FEATURE item into the HIDReportInfo structure. To save on RAM, we are able to filter out items
+ *  we aren't interested in (preventing us from being able to extract them later on, but saving on the RAM they would
+ *  have occupied).
+ *
+ *  \param[in] CurrentItem  Pointer to the item the HID report parser is currently working with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the item should be stored into the HID report structure, \c false if it should be discarded
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* const CurrentItem)
+{
+	/* Check the attributes of the current item - see if we are interested in it or not;
+	 * only store KEYBOARD usage page items into the Processed HID Report structure to
+	 * save RAM and ignore the rest
+	 */
+	return (CurrentItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_KEYBOARD);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d7c45713d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.h
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for HIDReport.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _HID_REPORT_H_
+#define _HID_REPORT_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "KeyboardHostWithParser.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a desktop keyboard. */
+		#define USAGE_PAGE_KEYBOARD             0x07
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the \ref GetHIDReportData() function. */
+		enum KeyboardHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t
+		{
+			ParseSuccessful         = 0, /**< HID report descriptor parsed successfully */
+			ParseError              = 1, /**< Failed to fully process the HID report descriptor */
+			ParseControlError       = 2, /**< Control error occurred while trying to read the device HID descriptor */
+		};
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern uint16_t         HIDReportSize;
+		extern HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* const CurrentItem);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..699179235
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.c
@@ -0,0 +1,285 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the KeyboardHostWithParser demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "KeyboardHostWithParser.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Keyboard HID Parser Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		KeyboardHost_Task();
+
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+	if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+	{
+		if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+		else
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+		printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"));
+		printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("Processing HID Report (Size %d Bytes).\r\n"), HIDReportSize);
+
+	/* Get and process the device's first HID report descriptor */
+	if ((ErrorCode = GetHIDReportData()) != ParseSuccessful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Report Parse Error.\r\n"));
+
+		if (!(HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems))
+			puts_P(PSTR("Not a valid Keyboard." ESC_FG_WHITE));
+		else
+			printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Keyboard Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Task to read in and processes the next report from the attached device, displaying the report
+ *  contents on the board LEDs and via the serial port.
+ */
+void KeyboardHost_Task(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Select and unfreeze keyboard data pipe */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(KEYBOARD_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	/* Check to see if a packet has been received */
+	if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+	{
+		/* Check if data has been received from the attached keyboard */
+		if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+		{
+			/* Create buffer big enough for the report */
+			uint8_t KeyboardReport[Pipe_BytesInPipe()];
+
+			/* Load in the keyboard report */
+			Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(KeyboardReport, Pipe_BytesInPipe(), NULL);
+
+			/* Process the read in keyboard report from the device */
+			ProcessKeyboardReport(KeyboardReport);
+		}
+
+		/* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */
+		Pipe_ClearIN();
+	}
+
+	/* Freeze keyboard data pipe */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+}
+
+/** Processes a read HID report from an attached keyboard, extracting out elements via the HID parser results
+ *  as required and prints pressed characters to the serial port. Each time a key is typed, a board LED is toggled.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] KeyboardReport  Pointer to a HID report from an attached keyboard device
+ */
+void ProcessKeyboardReport(uint8_t* KeyboardReport)
+{
+	/* Check each HID report item in turn, looking for keyboard scan code reports */
+	for (uint8_t ReportNumber = 0; ReportNumber < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ReportNumber++)
+	{
+		/* Create a temporary item pointer to the next report item */
+		HID_ReportItem_t* ReportItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ReportNumber];
+
+		/* Check if the current report item is a keyboard scan-code */
+		if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page      == USAGE_PAGE_KEYBOARD) &&
+			(ReportItem->Attributes.BitSize         == 8)                   &&
+			(ReportItem->Attributes.Logical.Maximum > 1)                    &&
+			(ReportItem->ItemType                   == HID_REPORT_ITEM_In))
+		{
+			/* Retrieve the keyboard scan-code from the report data retrieved from the device */
+			bool FoundData = USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(KeyboardReport, ReportItem);
+
+			/* For multi-report devices - if the requested data was not in the issued report, continue */
+			if (!(FoundData))
+			  continue;
+
+			/* Key code is an unsigned char in length, cast to the appropriate type */
+			uint8_t KeyCode = (uint8_t)ReportItem->Value;
+
+			/* If scan-code is non-zero, a key is being pressed */
+			if (KeyCode)
+			{
+				/* Toggle status LED to indicate keypress */
+				LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED2);
+
+				char PressedKey = 0;
+
+				/* Retrieve pressed key character if alphanumeric */
+				if ((KeyCode >= HID_KEYBOARD_SC_A) && (KeyCode <= HID_KEYBOARD_SC_Z))
+				{
+					PressedKey = (KeyCode - HID_KEYBOARD_SC_A) + 'A';
+				}
+				else if ((KeyCode >= HID_KEYBOARD_SC_1_AND_EXCLAMATION) &
+						 (KeyCode  < HID_KEYBOARD_SC_0_AND_CLOSING_PARENTHESIS))
+				{
+					PressedKey = (KeyCode - HID_KEYBOARD_SC_1_AND_EXCLAMATION) + '1';
+				}
+				else if (KeyCode == HID_KEYBOARD_SC_0_AND_CLOSING_PARENTHESIS)
+				{
+					PressedKey = '0';
+				}
+				else if (KeyCode == HID_KEYBOARD_SC_SPACE)
+				{
+					PressedKey = ' ';
+				}
+				else if (KeyCode == HID_KEYBOARD_SC_ENTER)
+				{
+					PressedKey = '\n';
+				}
+
+				/* Print the pressed key character out through the serial port if valid */
+				if (PressedKey)
+				  putchar(PressedKey);
+			}
+
+			/* Once a scan-code is found, stop scanning through the report items */
+			break;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..00a000a92
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.h
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#ifndef _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_
+#define _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+		#include "HIDReport.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void KeyboardHost_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+		void ProcessKeyboardReport(uint8_t* KeyboardReport);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4c87965ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Keyboard Host With HID Descriptor Parser Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Keyboard host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Keyboard host, for USB keyboards using
+ *  the standard Keyboard HID profile. It uses a HID parser for the HID reports,
+ *  allowing for correct operation across all USB keyboards. This demo supports
+ *  keyboards with a single HID report.
+ *
+ *  Pressed alpha-numeric, enter or space key is transmitted through the serial
+ *  USART at serial settings 9600, 8, N, 1. On connection to a USB keyboard, the
+ *  report items will be processed and printed as a formatted list through the
+ *  USART before the keyboard is fully enumerated.
+ *
+ *  Currently only single interface keyboards are supported.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..beeaff9b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Keyboard HID (with parser) Host Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.keyboard_parser.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.keyboard_parser"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.keyboard_parser" caption="Keyboard HID (with parser) Host Demo (Low Level APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Keyboard HID Host demo with HID parser, implementing a basic USB keyboard host that can display key press data on the board LEDs. This demo uses the Low Level LUFA APIs to manually implement a USB Class for demonstration purposes without using the simpler in-built LUFA Class Driver APIs.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="KeyboardHostWithParser.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="KeyboardHostWithParser.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="ConfigDescriptor.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="HIDReport.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="KeyboardHostWithParser.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="ConfigDescriptor.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="HIDReport.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e014d3ed7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Host Demo (Using HID Descriptor Parser)"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c5b2a6674
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/KeyboardHostWithParser/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = KeyboardHostWithParser
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c ConfigDescriptor.c HIDReport.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d657a214
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f0c93e45a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,173 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
+ *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for a MIDI interface descriptor pair containing bulk data IN and OUT endpoints.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the \ref MIDIHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+
+	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* MIDIInterface   = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint  = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return ControlError;
+	}
+
+	while (!(DataINEndpoint) || !(DataOUTEndpoint))
+	{
+		/* See if we've found a likely compatible interface, and if there is an endpoint within that interface */
+		if (!(MIDIInterface) ||
+		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+		                              DComp_NextMIDIStreamingDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			/* Get the next Mass Storage interface from the configuration descriptor */
+			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+										  DComp_NextMIDIStreamingInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+			{
+				/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+				return NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+			}
+
+			/* Save the interface in case we need to refer back to it later */
+			MIDIInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+			/* Clear any found endpoints */
+			DataINEndpoint  = NULL;
+			DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;
+
+			/* Skip the remainder of the loop as we have not found an endpoint yet */
+			continue;
+		}
+
+		/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* If the endpoint is a IN type endpoint */
+		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+		  DataINEndpoint  = EndpointData;
+		else
+		  DataOUTEndpoint = EndpointData;
+	}
+
+	/* Configure the MIDI data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MIDI_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress, DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize, 1);
+
+	/* Configure the MIDI data OUT pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MIDI_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress, DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointSize, 1);
+
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct MIDI Streaming Class, Subclass and Protocol values.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextMIDIStreamingInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		/* Check the MIDI descriptor class, subclass and protocol, break out if correct data interface found */
+		if ((Interface->Class    == AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass)            &&
+		    (Interface->SubClass == AUDIO_CSCP_MIDIStreamingSubclass) &&
+		    (Interface->Protocol == AUDIO_CSCP_StreamingProtocol))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next bulk IN or OUT endpoint within the current interface, aborting the search if
+ *  another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextMIDIStreamingDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* Endpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* Check the endpoint type, break out if correct BULK type endpoint found */
+		if ((Endpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_BULK)
+		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..25e49fbee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "MIDIHost.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Pipe address for the MIDI data IN pipe. */
+		#define MIDI_DATA_IN_PIPE              (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1)
+
+		/** Pipe address for the MIDI data OUT pipe. */
+		#define MIDI_DATA_OUT_PIPE             (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2)
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the \ref ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum MIDIHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoCompatibleInterfaceFound      = 4, /**< A compatible interface with the required endpoints was not found */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+		uint8_t DComp_NextMIDIStreamingInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextMIDIStreamingDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8c37403ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,266 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MIDIHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "MIDIHost.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "MIDI Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		MIDIHost_Task();
+
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	Joystick_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+	if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+	{
+		if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+		else
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+		printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
+		                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("MIDI Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Task to read in note on/off messages from the attached MIDI device and print it to the serial port.
+ *  When the board joystick or buttons are pressed, note on/off messages are sent to the attached device.
+ */
+void MIDIHost_Task(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MIDI_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+	{
+		MIDI_EventPacket_t MIDIEvent;
+
+		Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&MIDIEvent, sizeof(MIDIEvent), NULL);
+
+		if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))
+		  Pipe_ClearIN();
+
+		bool NoteOnEvent  = (MIDIEvent.Event == MIDI_EVENT(0, MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON));
+		bool NoteOffEvent = (MIDIEvent.Event == MIDI_EVENT(0, MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF));
+
+		if (NoteOnEvent || NoteOffEvent)
+		{
+			printf_P(PSTR("MIDI Note %s - Channel %d, Pitch %d, Velocity %d\r\n"), NoteOnEvent ? "On" : "Off",
+																				   ((MIDIEvent.Data1 & 0x0F) + 1),
+																				   MIDIEvent.Data2, MIDIEvent.Data3);
+		}
+	}
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MIDI_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if (Pipe_IsOUTReady())
+	{
+		uint8_t MIDICommand = 0;
+		uint8_t MIDIPitch;
+
+		static uint8_t PrevJoystickStatus;
+		uint8_t JoystickStatus  = Joystick_GetStatus();
+		uint8_t JoystickChanges = (JoystickStatus ^ PrevJoystickStatus);
+
+		/* Get board button status - if pressed use channel 10 (percussion), otherwise use channel 1 */
+		uint8_t Channel = ((Buttons_GetStatus() & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ? MIDI_CHANNEL(10) : MIDI_CHANNEL(1));
+
+		if (JoystickChanges & JOY_LEFT)
+		{
+			MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_LEFT)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+			MIDIPitch   = 0x3C;
+		}
+
+		if (JoystickChanges & JOY_UP)
+		{
+			MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_UP)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+			MIDIPitch   = 0x3D;
+		}
+
+		if (JoystickChanges & JOY_RIGHT)
+		{
+			MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_RIGHT)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+			MIDIPitch   = 0x3E;
+		}
+
+		if (JoystickChanges & JOY_DOWN)
+		{
+			MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_DOWN)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+			MIDIPitch   = 0x3F;
+		}
+
+		if (JoystickChanges & JOY_PRESS)
+		{
+			MIDICommand = ((JoystickStatus & JOY_PRESS)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF);
+			MIDIPitch   = 0x3B;
+		}
+
+		/* Check if a MIDI command is to be sent */
+		if (MIDICommand)
+		{
+			MIDI_EventPacket_t MIDIEvent = (MIDI_EventPacket_t)
+				{
+					.Event       = MIDI_EVENT(0, MIDICommand),
+
+					.Data1       = MIDICommand | Channel,
+					.Data2       = MIDIPitch,
+					.Data3       = MIDI_STANDARD_VELOCITY,
+				};
+
+			/* Write the MIDI event packet to the pipe */
+			Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&MIDIEvent, sizeof(MIDIEvent), NULL);
+
+			/* Send the data in the pipe to the device */
+			Pipe_ClearOUT();
+		}
+
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+
+		/* Save previous joystick value for next joystick change detection */
+		PrevJoystickStatus = JoystickStatus;
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6741e7a74
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MIDIHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MIDI_HOST_H_
+#define _MIDI_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void MIDIHost_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..33a8319f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/MIDIHost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage MIDI Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Audio Class Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>MIDI Subclass</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF USB MIDI Audio Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  MIDI host demonstration application. This demo will enumerate an attached USB-MIDI device, and print incoming MIDI note
+ *  on and off messages on any channel to the serial port. Pressing the board joystick will send note on and off messages to
+ *  the attached MIDI device, with the board HWB controlling the note channel.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0a19a117d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="MIDI Host Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.midi.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.midi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.midi" caption="MIDI Host Demo (Low Level APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		MIDI Host demo, capable of sending and receiving MIDI messages to and from an attached device. This demo uses the Low Level LUFA APIs to manually implement a USB Class for demonstration purposes without using the simpler in-built LUFA Class Driver APIs.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="MIDI Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="MIDIHost.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="MIDIHost.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="ConfigDescriptor.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="MIDIHost.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="ConfigDescriptor.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d675057e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - MIDI Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3f4611dcb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MIDIHost/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = MIDIHost
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c ConfigDescriptor.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..539b0a694
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            5000
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4eebc14b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,173 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
+ *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for a MSD interface descriptor containing bulk IN and OUT data endpoints.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the \ref MassStorageHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+
+	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* MSInterface     = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint  = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return ControlError;
+	}
+
+	while (!(DataINEndpoint) || !(DataOUTEndpoint))
+	{
+		/* See if we've found a likely compatible interface, and if there is an endpoint within that interface */
+		if (!(MSInterface) ||
+		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+		                              DComp_NextMSInterfaceBulkDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			/* Get the next Mass Storage interface from the configuration descriptor */
+			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+										  DComp_NextMSInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+			{
+				/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+				return NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+			}
+
+			/* Save the interface in case we need to refer back to it later */
+			MSInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+			/* Clear any found endpoints */
+			DataINEndpoint  = NULL;
+			DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;
+
+			/* Skip the remainder of the loop as we have not found an endpoint yet */
+			continue;
+		}
+
+		/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* If the endpoint is a IN type endpoint */
+		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+		  DataINEndpoint  = EndpointData;
+		else
+		  DataOUTEndpoint = EndpointData;
+	}
+
+	/* Configure the Mass Storage data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress, DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize, 1);
+
+	/* Configure the Mass Storage data OUT pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress, DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointSize, 1);
+
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Mass Storage Class, Subclass and Protocol values.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextMSInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		/* Check the descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
+		if ((Interface->Class    == MASS_STORE_CLASS)    &&
+		    (Interface->SubClass == MASS_STORE_SUBCLASS) &&
+		    (Interface->Protocol == MASS_STORE_PROTOCOL))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Bulk Endpoint descriptor of the correct MSD interface, aborting the search if
+ *  another interface descriptor is found before the next endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextMSInterfaceBulkDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* Endpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* Check the endpoint type, break out if correct BULK type endpoint found */
+		if ((Endpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_BULK)
+		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..156a23eb5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "MassStorageHost.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Interface Class value for the Mass Storage Device class. */
+		#define MASS_STORE_CLASS               0x08
+
+		/** Interface Class value for the Mass Storage Device subclass. */
+		#define MASS_STORE_SUBCLASS            0x06
+
+		/** Interface Protocol value for the Bulk Only transport protocol. */
+		#define MASS_STORE_PROTOCOL            0x50
+
+		/** Pipe address of the Mass Storage data IN pipe. */
+		#define MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE        (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1)
+
+		/** Pipe address of the Mass Storage data OUT pipe. */
+		#define MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE       (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2)
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the \ref ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum MassStorageHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoCompatibleInterfaceFound      = 4, /**< A compatible interface with the required endpoints was not found */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+		uint8_t DComp_NextMSInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextMSInterfaceBulkDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/Lib/MassStoreCommands.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/Lib/MassStoreCommands.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2c803eb96
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/Lib/MassStoreCommands.c
@@ -0,0 +1,635 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Mass Storage Device commands, to issue MSD commands to the device for
+ *  reading device status, capacity, and other characteristics. This file
+ *  also contains block read and write functions, so that device blocks
+ *  can be read and written. In general, these functions would be chained
+ *  to a FAT library to give file-level access to an attached device's contents.
+ *
+ *  \note Many Mass Storage devices on the market are non-compliant to the
+ *        specifications and thus can prove difficult to interface with. It
+ *        may be necessary to retry the functions in the module several times
+ *        after they have returned and error to successfully send the command
+ *        to the device. Some devices may also need to have the stream function
+ *        timeout period extended beyond 100ms (some badly designed devices exceeding
+ *        1.5 seconds occasionally) by defining USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS to a
+ *        larger value in the project makefile and passing it to the compiler
+ *        via the -D switch.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORE_COMMANDS_C
+#include "MassStoreCommands.h"
+
+/** Current Tag value used in issued CBWs to the device. This is automatically incremented
+ *  each time a command is sent, and is not externally accessible.
+ */
+static uint32_t MassStore_Tag = 1;
+
+
+/** Routine to send the current CBW to the device, and increment the Tag value as needed.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] SCSICommandBlock  Pointer to a SCSI command block structure to send to the attached device
+ *  \param[in,out] BufferPtr     Pointer to a buffer for the data to send or receive to/from the device, or NULL if no data
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+static uint8_t MassStore_SendCommand(MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t* const SCSICommandBlock,
+                                     void* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+
+	/* Wrap Tag value when invalid - MS class defines tag values of 0 and 0xFFFFFFFF to be invalid */
+	if (++MassStore_Tag == 0xFFFFFFFF)
+	  MassStore_Tag = 1;
+
+	/* Each transmission should have a unique tag value, increment before use */
+	SCSICommandBlock->Tag = MassStore_Tag;
+
+	/* Select the OUT data pipe for CBW transmission */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	/* Write the CBW command to the OUT pipe */
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(SCSICommandBlock, sizeof(MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t), NULL)) !=
+	                                      PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	/* Send the data in the OUT pipe to the attached device */
+	Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+	/* Wait until command has been sent */
+	Pipe_WaitUntilReady();
+
+	/* Freeze pipe after use */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	if (BufferPtr != NULL)
+	{
+		/* Transfer the requested data (if any) to or from the device */
+		ErrorCode = MassStore_SendReceiveData(SCSICommandBlock, (void*)BufferPtr);
+
+		/* Only fail completely if the transfer fails without a STALL, as a logical STALL can be recovered from */
+		if ((ErrorCode != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError) && (ErrorCode != PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled))
+		{
+			Pipe_Freeze();
+			return ErrorCode;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Retrieve the returned SCSI status from the device */
+	MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSIStatusBlock;
+	return MassStore_GetReturnedStatus(&SCSIStatusBlock);
+}
+
+/** Waits until the attached device is ready to accept data following a CBW, checking
+ *  to ensure that the device has not stalled the transaction.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+static uint8_t MassStore_WaitForDataReceived(void)
+{
+	uint16_t TimeoutMSRem        = COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS;
+	uint16_t PreviousFrameNumber = USB_Host_GetFrameNumber();
+
+	/* Select the IN data pipe for data reception */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	/* Wait until data received in the IN pipe */
+	while (!(Pipe_IsINReceived()))
+	{
+		uint16_t CurrentFrameNumber = USB_Host_GetFrameNumber();
+
+		/* Check to see if a new frame has been issued (1ms elapsed) */
+		if (CurrentFrameNumber != PreviousFrameNumber)
+		{
+			/* Save the new frame number and decrement the timeout period */
+			PreviousFrameNumber = CurrentFrameNumber;
+			TimeoutMSRem--;
+
+			/* Check to see if the timeout period for the command has elapsed */
+			if (!(TimeoutMSRem))
+			  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_Timeout;
+		}
+
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		/* Check if pipe stalled (command failed by device) */
+		if (Pipe_IsStalled())
+		{
+			/* Clear the stall condition on the OUT pipe */
+			USB_Host_ClearEndpointStall(Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress());
+
+			return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;
+		}
+
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		/* Check if pipe stalled (command failed by device) */
+		if (Pipe_IsStalled())
+		{
+			/* Clear the stall condition on the IN pipe */
+			USB_Host_ClearEndpointStall(Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress());
+
+			return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;
+		}
+
+		/* Check to see if the device was disconnected, if so exit function */
+		if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+	};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+/** Sends or receives the transaction's data stage to or from the attached device, reading or
+ *  writing to the nominated buffer.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] SCSICommandBlock  Pointer to a SCSI command block structure being sent to the attached device
+ *  \param[in,out]  BufferPtr    Pointer to the data buffer to read from or write to
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+static uint8_t MassStore_SendReceiveData(MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t* const SCSICommandBlock,
+                                         void* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+	uint16_t BytesRem  = SCSICommandBlock->DataTransferLength;
+
+	/* Check the direction of the SCSI command data stage */
+	if (SCSICommandBlock->Flags & MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_IN)
+	{
+		/* Wait until the device has replied with some data */
+		if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_WaitForDataReceived()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+
+		/* Select the IN data pipe for data reception */
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		/* Read in the block data from the pipe */
+		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(BufferPtr, BytesRem, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+
+		/* Acknowledge the packet */
+		Pipe_ClearIN();
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Select the OUT data pipe for data transmission */
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		/* Write the block data to the pipe */
+		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(BufferPtr, BytesRem, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+
+		/* Acknowledge the packet */
+		Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+		while (!(Pipe_IsOUTReady()))
+		{
+			if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
+			  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Freeze used pipe after use */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+/** Routine to receive the current CSW from the device.
+ *
+ *  \param[out] SCSICommandStatus  Pointer to a destination where the returned status data should be stored
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED if the SCSI command fails
+ */
+static uint8_t MassStore_GetReturnedStatus(MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t* const SCSICommandStatus)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+
+	/* If an error in the command occurred, abort */
+	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_WaitForDataReceived()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Select the IN data pipe for data reception */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	/* Load in the CSW from the attached device */
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(SCSICommandStatus, sizeof(MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t), NULL)) !=
+	                                     PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	/* Clear the data ready for next reception */
+	Pipe_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Freeze the IN pipe after use */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	/* Check to see if command failed */
+	if (SCSICommandStatus->Status != MS_SCSI_COMMAND_Pass)
+	  ErrorCode = MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED;
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+/** Issues a Mass Storage class specific request to reset the attached device's Mass Storage interface,
+ *  readying the device for the next CBW. The Data endpoints are cleared of any STALL condition once this
+ *  command completes successfully.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum, or MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED if the SCSI command fails
+ */
+uint8_t MassStore_MassStorageReset(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = MS_REQ_MassStorageReset,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = 0,
+			.wLength       = 0,
+		};
+
+	/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Select first data pipe to clear STALL condition if one exists */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_ClearEndpointStall(Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress())) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Select second data pipe to clear STALL condition if one exists */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_ClearEndpointStall(Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress())) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+}
+
+/** Issues a Mass Storage class specific request to determine the index of the highest numbered Logical
+ *  Unit in the attached device.
+ *
+ *  \note Some devices do not support this request, and will STALL it when issued. To get around this,
+ *        on unsupported devices the max LUN index will be reported as zero and no error will be returned
+ *        if the device STALLs the request.
+ *
+ *  \param[out] MaxLUNIndex  Pointer to the location that the maximum LUN index value should be stored
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum, or MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED if the SCSI command fails
+ */
+uint8_t MassStore_GetMaxLUN(uint8_t* const MaxLUNIndex)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = MS_REQ_GetMaxLUN,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = 0,
+			.wLength       = 1,
+		};
+
+	/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(MaxLUNIndex)) == HOST_SENDCONTROL_SetupStalled)
+	{
+		/* Clear the pipe stall */
+		Pipe_ClearStall();
+
+		/* Some faulty Mass Storage devices don't implement the GET_MAX_LUN request, so assume a single LUN */
+		*MaxLUNIndex = 0;
+
+		/* Clear the error, and pretend the request executed correctly if the device STALLed it */
+		ErrorCode = HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+	}
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+/** Issues a SCSI Inquiry command to the attached device, to determine the device's information. This
+ *  gives information on the device's capabilities.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] LUNIndex    Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to
+ *  \param[out] InquiryPtr  Pointer to the inquiry data structure where the inquiry data from the device is to be stored
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED if the SCSI command fails
+ */
+uint8_t MassStore_Inquiry(const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+                          SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t* const InquiryPtr)
+{
+	/* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue INQUIRY command */
+	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+		{
+			.Signature          = MS_CBW_SIGNATURE,
+			.DataTransferLength = sizeof(SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t),
+			.Flags              = MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_IN,
+			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
+			.SCSICommandLength  = 6,
+			.SCSICommandData    =
+				{
+					SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY,
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					sizeof(SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t), // Allocation Length
+					0x00                    // Unused (control)
+				}
+		};
+
+	/* Send the command and any data to the attached device */
+	return MassStore_SendCommand(&SCSICommandBlock, InquiryPtr);
+}
+
+/** Issues a SCSI Request Sense command to the attached device, to determine the current SCSI sense information. This
+ *  gives error codes for the last issued SCSI command to the device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] LUNIndex   Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to
+ *  \param[out] SensePtr  Pointer to the sense data structure where the sense data from the device is to be stored
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED if the SCSI command fails
+ */
+uint8_t MassStore_RequestSense(const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+                               SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t* const SensePtr)
+{
+	/* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue REQUEST SENSE command */
+	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+		{
+			.Signature          = MS_CBW_SIGNATURE,
+			.DataTransferLength = sizeof(SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t),
+			.Flags              = MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_IN,
+			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
+			.SCSICommandLength  = 6,
+			.SCSICommandData =
+				{
+					SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE,
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					sizeof(SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t), // Allocation Length
+					0x00                    // Unused (control)
+				}
+		};
+
+	/* Send the command and any data to the attached device */
+	return MassStore_SendCommand(&SCSICommandBlock, SensePtr);
+}
+
+/** Issues a SCSI Device Block Read command to the attached device, to read in one or more data blocks from the
+ *  storage medium into a buffer.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] LUNIndex      Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Start block address to read from
+ *  \param[in] Blocks        Number of blocks to read from the device
+ *  \param[in] BlockSize     Size in bytes of each block to read
+ *  \param[out] BufferPtr    Pointer to the buffer where the read data is to be written to
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED if the SCSI command fails
+ */
+uint8_t MassStore_ReadDeviceBlock(const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+                                  const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                  const uint8_t Blocks,
+                                  const uint16_t BlockSize,
+                                  void* BufferPtr)
+{
+	/* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to read in the given blocks from the device */
+	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+		{
+			.Signature          = MS_CBW_SIGNATURE,
+			.DataTransferLength = ((uint32_t)Blocks * BlockSize),
+			.Flags              = MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_IN,
+			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
+			.SCSICommandLength  = 10,
+			.SCSICommandData    =
+				{
+					SCSI_CMD_READ_10,
+					0x00,                   // Unused (control bits, all off)
+					(BlockAddress >> 24),   // MSB of Block Address
+					(BlockAddress >> 16),
+					(BlockAddress >> 8),
+					(BlockAddress & 0xFF),  // LSB of Block Address
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // MSB of Total Blocks to Read
+					Blocks,                 // LSB of Total Blocks to Read
+					0x00                    // Unused (control)
+				}
+		};
+
+	/* Send the command and any data to the attached device */
+	return MassStore_SendCommand(&SCSICommandBlock, BufferPtr);
+}
+
+/** Issues a SCSI Device Block Write command to the attached device, to write one or more data blocks to the
+ *  storage medium from a buffer.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] LUNIndex      Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Start block address to write to
+ *  \param[in] Blocks        Number of blocks to write to in the device
+ *  \param[in] BlockSize     Size in bytes of each block to write
+ *  \param[in] BufferPtr     Pointer to the buffer where the write data is to be sourced from
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED if the SCSI command fails
+ */
+uint8_t MassStore_WriteDeviceBlock(const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+                                   const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                   const uint8_t Blocks,
+                                   const uint16_t BlockSize,
+                                   void* BufferPtr)
+{
+	/* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to write the given blocks to the device */
+	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+		{
+			.Signature          = MS_CBW_SIGNATURE,
+			.DataTransferLength = ((uint32_t)Blocks * BlockSize),
+			.Flags              = MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_OUT,
+			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
+			.SCSICommandLength  = 10,
+			.SCSICommandData    =
+				{
+					SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10,
+					0x00,                   // Unused (control bits, all off)
+					(BlockAddress >> 24),   // MSB of Block Address
+					(BlockAddress >> 16),
+					(BlockAddress >> 8),
+					(BlockAddress & 0xFF),  // LSB of Block Address
+					0x00,                   // Unused (reserved)
+					0x00,                   // MSB of Total Blocks to Write
+					Blocks,                 // LSB of Total Blocks to Write
+					0x00                    // Unused (control)
+				}
+		};
+
+	/* Send the command and any data to the attached device */
+	return MassStore_SendCommand(&SCSICommandBlock, BufferPtr);
+}
+
+/** Issues a SCSI Device Test Unit Ready command to the attached device, to determine if the device is ready to accept
+ *  other commands.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] LUNIndex      Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED if the SCSI command fails
+ */
+uint8_t MassStore_TestUnitReady(const uint8_t LUNIndex)
+{
+	/* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue TEST UNIT READY command */
+	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+		{
+			.Signature          = MS_CBW_SIGNATURE,
+			.DataTransferLength = 0,
+			.Flags              = MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_IN,
+			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
+			.SCSICommandLength  = 6,
+			.SCSICommandData    =
+				{
+					SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY,
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00                    // Unused (control)
+				}
+		};
+
+	/* Send the command and any data to the attached device */
+	return MassStore_SendCommand(&SCSICommandBlock, NULL);
+}
+
+/** Issues a SCSI Device Read Capacity command to the attached device, to determine the capacity of the
+ *  given Logical Unit within the device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] LUNIndex      Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to
+ *  \param[out] CapacityPtr  Device capacity structure where the capacity data is to be stored
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED if the SCSI command fails
+ */
+uint8_t MassStore_ReadCapacity(const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+                               SCSI_Capacity_t* const CapacityPtr)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+
+	/* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue READ CAPACITY command */
+	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+		{
+			.Signature          = MS_CBW_SIGNATURE,
+			.DataTransferLength = sizeof(SCSI_Capacity_t),
+			.Flags              = MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_IN,
+			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
+			.SCSICommandLength  = 10,
+			.SCSICommandData    =
+				{
+					SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10,
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // MSB of Logical block address
+					0x00,
+					0x00,
+					0x00,                   // LSB of Logical block address
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Partial Medium Indicator
+					0x00                    // Unused (control)
+				}
+		};
+
+	/* Send the command and any data to the attached device */
+	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_SendCommand(&SCSICommandBlock, CapacityPtr)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Endian-correct the read data */
+	CapacityPtr->Blocks    = SwapEndian_32(CapacityPtr->Blocks);
+	CapacityPtr->BlockSize = SwapEndian_32(CapacityPtr->BlockSize);
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+/** Issues a SCSI Device Prevent/Allow Medium Removal command to the attached device, to lock the physical media from
+ *  being removed. This is a legacy command for SCSI disks with removable storage (such as ZIP disks), but should still
+ *  be issued before the first read or write command is sent.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] LUNIndex        Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to
+ *  \param[in] PreventRemoval  Whether or not the LUN media should be locked to prevent removal or not
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED if the SCSI command fails
+ */
+uint8_t MassStore_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+                                            const bool PreventRemoval)
+{
+	/* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue PREVENT ALLOW MEDIUM REMOVAL command */
+	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+		{
+			.Signature          = MS_CBW_SIGNATURE,
+			.DataTransferLength = 0,
+			.Flags              = MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_OUT,
+			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
+			.SCSICommandLength  = 6,
+			.SCSICommandData    =
+				{
+					SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL,
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					PreventRemoval,         // Prevent flag
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00                    // Unused (control)
+				}
+		};
+
+	/* Send the command and any data to the attached device */
+	return MassStore_SendCommand(&SCSICommandBlock, NULL);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/Lib/MassStoreCommands.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/Lib/MassStoreCommands.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1d3372da5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/Lib/MassStoreCommands.h
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MassStoreCommands.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MASS_STORE_COMMANDS_H_
+#define _MASS_STORE_COMMANDS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include "../MassStorageHost.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Timeout period between the issuing of a CBW to a device, and the reception of the first packet. */
+		#define COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS             10000
+
+		/** Additional error code for Mass Storage functions when a device returns a logical command failure. */
+		#define MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED      0xC0
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORE_COMMANDS_C)
+			static uint8_t MassStore_SendCommand(MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t* const SCSICommandBlock,
+			                                     void* BufferPtr);
+			static uint8_t MassStore_WaitForDataReceived(void);
+			static uint8_t MassStore_SendReceiveData(MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t* const SCSICommandBlock,
+			                                         void* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static uint8_t MassStore_GetReturnedStatus(MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t* const SCSICommandStatus) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+		#endif
+
+		uint8_t MassStore_MassStorageReset(void);
+		uint8_t MassStore_GetMaxLUN(uint8_t* const MaxLUNIndex);
+		uint8_t MassStore_RequestSense(const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+		                               SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t* const SensePtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+		uint8_t MassStore_Inquiry(const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+		                          SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t* const InquiryPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+		uint8_t MassStore_ReadDeviceBlock(const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+		                                  const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                  const uint8_t Blocks,
+		                                  const uint16_t BlockSize,
+		                                  void* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(5);
+		uint8_t MassStore_WriteDeviceBlock(const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+		                                   const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                           const uint8_t Blocks,
+		                                   const uint16_t BlockSize,
+		                                   void* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(5);
+		uint8_t MassStore_ReadCapacity(const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+		                               SCSI_Capacity_t* const CapacityPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+		uint8_t MassStore_TestUnitReady(const uint8_t LUNIndex);
+		uint8_t MassStore_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+		                                            const bool PreventRemoval);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2361ab561
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,373 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MassStorageHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "MassStorageHost.h"
+
+/** Index of the highest available LUN (Logical Unit) in the attached Mass Storage Device */
+uint8_t MassStore_MaxLUNIndex;
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Mass Storage Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		MassStorageHost_Task();
+
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+	if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+	{
+		if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+		else
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+		printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
+		                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Mass Storage Disk Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read in blocks from
+ *  the device and print them to the serial port.
+ */
+void MassStorageHost_Task(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Indicate device busy via the status LEDs */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */
+	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_GetMaxLUN(&MassStore_MaxLUNIndex)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Get Max LUN"), ErrorCode);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Print number of LUNs detected in the attached device */
+	printf_P(PSTR("Total LUNs: %d - Using first LUN in device.\r\n"), (MassStore_MaxLUNIndex + 1));
+
+	/* Reset the Mass Storage device interface, ready for use */
+	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_MassStorageReset()) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Mass Storage Reset"), ErrorCode);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Get sense data from the device - many devices will not accept any other commands until the sense data
+	 * is read - both on start-up and after a failed command */
+	SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData;
+	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_RequestSense(0, &SenseData)) != 0)
+	{
+		ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Request Sense"), ErrorCode);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Set the prevent removal flag for the device, allowing it to be accessed */
+	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(0, true)) != 0)
+	{
+		ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Prevent/Allow Medium Removal"), ErrorCode);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Get inquiry data from the device */
+	SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData;
+	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_Inquiry(0, &InquiryData)) != 0)
+	{
+		ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Inquiry"), ErrorCode);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Print vendor and product names of attached device */
+	printf_P(PSTR("Vendor \"%.8s\", Product \"%.16s\"\r\n"), InquiryData.VendorID, InquiryData.ProductID);
+
+	/* Wait until disk ready */
+	puts_P(PSTR("Waiting until ready.."));
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		Serial_SendByte('.');
+
+		/* Abort if device removed */
+		if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
+		  break;
+
+		/* Check to see if the attached device is ready for new commands */
+		ErrorCode = MassStore_TestUnitReady(0);
+
+		/* If attached device is ready, abort the loop */
+		if (!(ErrorCode))
+		  break;
+
+		/* If an error other than a logical command failure (indicating device busy) returned, abort */
+		if (ErrorCode != MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED)
+		{
+			ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Test Unit Ready"), ErrorCode);
+			USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+			return;
+		}
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nRetrieving Capacity... "));
+
+	/* Create new structure for the disk's capacity in blocks and block size */
+	SCSI_Capacity_t DiskCapacity;
+
+	/* Retrieve disk capacity */
+	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_ReadCapacity(0, &DiskCapacity)) != 0)
+	{
+		ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Read Capacity"), ErrorCode);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Display the disk capacity in blocks * block size bytes */
+	printf_P(PSTR("%lu blocks of %lu bytes.\r\n"), DiskCapacity.Blocks, DiskCapacity.BlockSize);
+
+	/* Create a new buffer capable of holding a single block from the device */
+	uint8_t BlockBuffer[DiskCapacity.BlockSize];
+
+	/* Read in the first 512 byte block from the device */
+	if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_ReadDeviceBlock(0, 0x00000000, 1, DiskCapacity.BlockSize, BlockBuffer)) != 0)
+	{
+		ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Read Device Block"), ErrorCode);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nContents of first block:\r\n"));
+
+	/* Print out the first block in both HEX and ASCII, 16 bytes per line */
+	for (uint16_t Chunk = 0; Chunk < (DiskCapacity.BlockSize >> 4); Chunk++)
+	{
+		/* Pointer to the start of the current 16-byte chunk in the read block of data */
+		uint8_t* ChunkPtr = &BlockBuffer[Chunk << 4];
+
+		/* Print out the 16 bytes of the chunk in HEX format */
+		for (uint8_t ByteOffset = 0; ByteOffset < (1 << 4); ByteOffset++)
+		{
+			char CurrByte = *(ChunkPtr + ByteOffset);
+
+			printf_P(PSTR("%.2X "), CurrByte);
+		}
+
+		puts_P(PSTR("    "));
+
+		/* Print out the 16 bytes of the chunk in ASCII format */
+		for (uint8_t ByteOffset = 0; ByteOffset < (1 << 4); ByteOffset++)
+		{
+			char CurrByte = *(ChunkPtr + ByteOffset);
+
+			putchar(isprint(CurrByte) ? CurrByte : '.');
+		}
+
+		puts_P(PSTR("\r\n"));
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\n\r\nPress board button to read entire ASCII contents of disk...\r\n\r\n"));
+
+	/* Wait for the board button to be pressed */
+	while (!(Buttons_GetStatus() & BUTTONS_BUTTON1))
+	{
+		/* Abort if device removed */
+		if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return;
+	}
+
+	/* Print out the entire disk contents in ASCII format */
+	for (uint32_t CurrBlockAddress = 0; CurrBlockAddress < DiskCapacity.Blocks; CurrBlockAddress++)
+	{
+		/* Read in the next block of data from the device */
+		if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_ReadDeviceBlock(0, CurrBlockAddress, 1, DiskCapacity.BlockSize, BlockBuffer)) != 0)
+		{
+			ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Read Device Block"), ErrorCode);
+			USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+			return;
+		}
+
+		/* Send the ASCII data in the read in block to the serial port */
+		for (uint16_t Byte = 0; Byte < DiskCapacity.BlockSize; Byte++)
+		{
+			char CurrByte = BlockBuffer[Byte];
+
+			putchar(isprint(CurrByte) ? CurrByte : '.');
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Indicate device no longer busy */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+}
+
+/** Indicates that a communication error has occurred with the attached Mass Storage Device,
+ *  printing error codes to the serial port and waiting until the device is removed before
+ *  continuing.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] CommandString  ASCII string located in PROGMEM space indicating what operation failed
+ *  \param[in] ErrorCode      Error code of the function which failed to complete successfully
+ */
+void ShowDiskReadError(const char* CommandString,
+                       const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	if (ErrorCode == MASS_STORE_SCSI_COMMAND_FAILED)
+	{
+		/* Display the error code */
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "SCSI command error (%S).\r\n"), CommandString);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Display the error code */
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Command error (%S).\r\n"), CommandString);
+		printf_P(PSTR("  -- Error Code: %d" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+	}
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	/* Indicate device error via the status LEDs */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..58b2bf7bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MassStoreHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MASS_STORE_HOST_H_
+#define _MASS_STORE_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+		#include <ctype.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+		#include "Lib/MassStoreCommands.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void MassStorageHost_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+		void ShowDiskReadError(const char* CommandString,
+		                       const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4b07261c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Mass Storage Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Mass Storage Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Bulk Only</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n
+ *        USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n
+ *        SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n
+ *        SCSI Block Commands Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Mass Storage host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Mass Storage host, for USB storage devices
+ *  using the standard Mass Storage USB profile.
+ *
+ *  The first 512 bytes (boot sector) of an attached disk's memory will be dumped
+ *  out of the serial port in HEX and ASCII form when it is attached to the AT90USB1287
+ *  AVR. The device will then wait for HWB to be pressed, whereupon the entire ASCII contents
+ *  of the disk will be dumped to the serial port.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8f04f692e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Mass Storage Host Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.ms.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.ms"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.ms" caption="Mass Storage Host Demo (Low Level APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Mass Storage Host demo, capable of reading and writing raw 512 byte segments to the device's serial port. This demo uses the Low Level LUFA APIs to manually implement a USB Class for demonstration purposes without using the simpler in-built LUFA Class Driver APIs.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="Mass Storage Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="MassStorageHost.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="MassStorageHost.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="ConfigDescriptor.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="MassStorageHost.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="ConfigDescriptor.h"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/MassStoreCommands.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/MassStoreCommands.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..21c9814c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mass Storage Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..32470cb46
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MassStorageHost/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = MassStorageHost
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c ConfigDescriptor.c Lib/MassStoreCommands.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d657a214
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b6365cc99
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,159 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
+ *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the \ref MouseHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+
+	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* HIDInterface   = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint = NULL;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return ControlError;
+	}
+
+	while (!(DataINEndpoint))
+	{
+		/* See if we've found a likely compatible interface, and if there is an endpoint within that interface */
+		if (!(HIDInterface) ||
+		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+		                              DComp_NextMouseInterfaceDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			/* Get the next HID interface from the configuration descriptor */
+			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+										  DComp_NextMouseInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+			{
+				/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+				return NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+			}
+
+			/* Save the interface in case we need to refer back to it later */
+			HIDInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+			/* Skip the remainder of the loop as we have not found an endpoint yet */
+			continue;
+		}
+
+		/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* If the endpoint is a IN type endpoint */
+		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+		  DataINEndpoint = EndpointData;
+	}
+
+	/* Configure the HID data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MOUSE_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress, DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize, 1);
+	Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(DataINEndpoint->PollingIntervalMS);
+
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Mouse HID Class and Protocol values.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	/* Determine if the current descriptor is an interface descriptor */
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		/* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
+		if ((Interface->Class    == HID_CSCP_HIDClass) &&
+		    (Interface->Protocol == HID_CSCP_MouseBootProtocol))
+		{
+			/* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor, aborting the
+ *  search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	/* Determine the type of the current descriptor */
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	else
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fa3cafbad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "MouseHost.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Pipe address for the mouse data IN pipe. */
+		#define MOUSE_DATA_IN_PIPE          (PIPE_DIR_IN | 1)
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the \ref ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum MouseHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoCompatibleInterfaceFound      = 4, /**< A compatible interface with the required endpoints was not found */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+		uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/MouseHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/MouseHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e8685465d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/MouseHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,250 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MouseHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "MouseHost.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Mouse HID Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		MouseHost_Task();
+
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+	if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+	{
+		if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+		else
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+		printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
+		                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* HID class request to set the mouse protocol to the Boot Protocol */
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = HID_REQ_SetProtocol,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = 0,
+			.wLength       = 0,
+		};
+
+	/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	/* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Protocol).\r\n"
+								 " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Mouse Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Reads in and processes the next report from the attached device, displaying the report
+ *  contents on the board LEDs and via the serial port.
+ */
+void MouseHost_Task(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReport;
+	uint8_t                LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+	/* Select mouse data pipe */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MOUSE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+
+	/* Unfreeze mouse data pipe */
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	/* Check to see if a packet has been received */
+	if (!(Pipe_IsINReceived()))
+	{
+		/* No packet received (no movement), turn off LEDs */
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_NO_LEDS);
+
+		/* Refreeze HID data IN pipe */
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Ensure pipe contains data before trying to read from it */
+	if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+	{
+		/* Read in mouse report data */
+		Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&MouseReport, sizeof(MouseReport), NULL);
+
+		/* Alter status LEDs according to mouse X movement */
+		if (MouseReport.X > 0)
+		  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
+		else if (MouseReport.X < 0)
+		  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED2;
+
+		/* Alter status LEDs according to mouse Y movement */
+		if (MouseReport.Y > 0)
+		  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
+		else if (MouseReport.Y < 0)
+		  LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
+
+		/* Alter status LEDs according to mouse button position */
+		if (MouseReport.Button)
+		  LEDMask  = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+
+		/* Print mouse report data through the serial port */
+		printf_P(PSTR("dX:%2d dY:%2d Button:%d\r\n"), MouseReport.X,
+													  MouseReport.Y,
+													  MouseReport.Button);
+	}
+
+	/* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */
+	Pipe_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Refreeze mouse data pipe */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/MouseHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/MouseHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fc0ddb512
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/MouseHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MouseHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MOUSE_HOST_H_
+#define _MOUSE_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void MouseHost_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+		void ReadNextReport(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/MouseHost.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/MouseHost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..29364537b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/MouseHost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Mouse Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Mouse host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Mouse host, for USB mice using
+ *  the standard mouse HID profile.
+ *
+ *  Mouse movement and button presses are displayed on the board LEDs,
+ *  as well as printed out the serial terminal as formatted dY, dY and
+ *  button status information.
+ *
+ *  This uses a naive method where the mouse is set to Boot Protocol mode, so
+ *  that the report structure is fixed and known. A better implementation
+ *  uses the HID report parser for correct report data processing across
+ *  all compatible mice with advanced characteristics, as shown in the
+ *  MouseHostWithParser demo application.
+ *
+ *  Currently only single interface mice are supported.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4499986b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Mouse HID Host Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.mouse.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.mouse"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.mouse" caption="Mouse HID Host Demo (Low Level APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Keyboard HID Host demo, implementing a basic USB mouse host that can display movement data on the board LEDs. This demo uses the Low Level LUFA APIs to manually implement a USB Class for demonstration purposes without using the simpler in-built LUFA Class Driver APIs.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="MouseHost.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="MouseHost.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="ConfigDescriptor.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="MouseHost.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="ConfigDescriptor.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..41adfaf05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mouse Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a3622045e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHost/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = MouseHost
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c ConfigDescriptor.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d657a214
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ef06f956b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,187 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
+ *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint and HID descriptor.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the \ref MouseHostWithParser_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+
+	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* HIDInterface   = NULL;
+	USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t*   HIDDescriptor  = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint = NULL;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return ControlError;
+	}
+
+	while (!(DataINEndpoint))
+	{
+		/* See if we've found a likely compatible interface, and if there is an endpoint within that interface */
+		if (!(HIDInterface) ||
+		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+		                              DComp_NextMouseInterfaceDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			/* Get the next HID interface from the configuration descriptor */
+			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+										  DComp_NextMouseInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+			{
+				/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+				return NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+			}
+
+			/* Save the interface in case we need to refer back to it later */
+			HIDInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+			/* Get the HID descriptor from the configuration descriptor */
+			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+										  DComp_NextHID) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+			{
+				/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+				return NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+			}
+
+			/* Save the HID descriptor for later use */
+			HIDDescriptor = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t);
+
+			/* Skip the remainder of the loop as we have not found an endpoint yet */
+			continue;
+		}
+
+		/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* If the endpoint is a IN type endpoint */
+		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+		  DataINEndpoint = EndpointData;
+	}
+
+	/* Configure the HID data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MOUSE_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress, DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize, 1);
+	Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(DataINEndpoint->PollingIntervalMS);
+
+	/* Get the HID report size from the HID report descriptor */
+	HIDReportSize = HIDDescriptor->HIDReportLength;
+
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Mouse HID Class and Protocol values.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		/* Check the HID descriptor class, break out if correct class interface found */
+		if (Interface->Class == HID_CSCP_HIDClass)
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor, aborting the
+ *  search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	else
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next HID descriptor within the current HID interface descriptor.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextHID(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == HID_DTYPE_HID)
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	else
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4393c9b38
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "HIDReport.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Pipe address for the mouse report data IN pipe. */
+		#define MOUSE_DATA_IN_PIPE          (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 1)
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the \ref ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum MouseHostWithParser_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoCompatibleInterfaceFound      = 4, /**< A compatible interface with the required endpoints was not found */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+		uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextHID(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0c90f7a3e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.c
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "HIDReport.h"
+
+/** Size in bytes of the attached device's HID report descriptor */
+uint16_t         HIDReportSize;
+
+/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */
+HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
+
+
+/** Function to read in the HID report descriptor from the attached device, and process it into easy-to-read
+ *  structures via the HID parser routines in the LUFA library.
+ *
+ *  \return  A value from the \ref MouseHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void)
+{
+	/* Create a buffer big enough to hold the entire returned HID report */
+	uint8_t HIDReportData[HIDReportSize];
+
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_GetDescriptor,
+			.wValue        = (HID_DTYPE_Report << 8),
+			.wIndex        = 0,
+			.wLength       = HIDReportSize,
+		};
+
+	/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	/* Send control request to retrieve the HID report from the attached device */
+	if (USB_Host_SendControlRequest(HIDReportData) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return ParseControlError;
+
+	/* Send the HID report to the parser for processing */
+	if (USB_ProcessHIDReport(HIDReportData, HIDReportSize, &HIDReportInfo) != HID_PARSE_Successful)
+	  return ParseError;
+
+	return ParseSuccessful;
+}
+
+/** Callback for the HID Report Parser. This function is called each time the HID report parser is about to store
+ *  an IN, OUT or FEATURE item into the HIDReportInfo structure. To save on RAM, we are able to filter out items
+ *  we aren't interested in (preventing us from being able to extract them later on, but saving on the RAM they would
+ *  have occupied).
+ *
+ *  \param[in] CurrentItem  Pointer to the item the HID report parser is currently working with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the item should be stored into the HID report structure, \c false if it should be discarded
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* const CurrentItem)
+{
+	bool IsMouse = false;
+
+	/* Iterate through the item's collection path, until either the root collection node or a collection with the
+	 * Mouse Usage is found - this prevents Joysticks, which use identical descriptors except for the Joystick usage
+	 * parent node, from being erroneously treated as a mouse
+	 */
+	for (HID_CollectionPath_t* CurrPath = CurrentItem->CollectionPath; CurrPath != NULL; CurrPath = CurrPath->Parent)
+	{
+		if ((CurrPath->Usage.Page  == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
+		    (CurrPath->Usage.Usage == USAGE_MOUSE))
+		{
+			IsMouse = true;
+			break;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* If a collection with the mouse usage was not found, indicate that we are not interested in this item */
+	if (!IsMouse)
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Check the attributes of the current mouse item - see if we are interested in it or not;
+	 * only store BUTTON and GENERIC_DESKTOP_CONTROL items into the Processed HID Report
+	 * structure to save RAM and ignore the rest
+	 */
+	return ((CurrentItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON) ||
+	        (CurrentItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL));
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2136a2c04
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for HIDReport.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _HID_REPORT_H_
+#define _HID_REPORT_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "MouseHostWithParser.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage for a Mouse. */
+		#define USAGE_MOUSE                 0x02
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a toggle button. */
+		#define USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON           0x09
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a Generic Desktop Control. */
+		#define USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL    0x01
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a X axis movement. */
+		#define USAGE_X                     0x30
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a Y axis movement. */
+		#define USAGE_Y                     0x31
+
+		/** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a Scroll Wheel movement. */
+		#define USAGE_SCROLL_WHEEL          0x38
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the \ref GetHIDReportData() function. */
+		enum MouseHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t
+		{
+			ParseSuccessful         = 0, /**< HID report descriptor parsed successfully */
+			ParseError              = 1, /**< Failed to fully process the HID report descriptor */
+			ParseControlError       = 2, /**< Control error occurred while trying to read the device HID descriptor */
+		};
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern uint16_t         HIDReportSize;
+		extern HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* const CurrentItem);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ed8c9b08b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.c
@@ -0,0 +1,289 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MouseHostWithParser demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "MouseHostWithParser.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Mouse HID Parser Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		MouseHost_Task();
+
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+	if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+	{
+		if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+		else
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+		printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
+		                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("Processing HID Report (Size %d Bytes).\r\n"), HIDReportSize);
+
+	/* Get and process the device's first HID report descriptor */
+	if ((ErrorCode = GetHIDReportData()) != ParseSuccessful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Report Parse Error.\r\n"));
+
+		if (!(HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems))
+			puts_P(PSTR("Not a valid Mouse." ESC_FG_WHITE));
+		else
+			printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Mouse Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Task to read and process the HID report descriptor and HID reports from the device and display the
+ *  results onto the board LEDs.
+ */
+void MouseHost_Task(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Select and unfreeze mouse data pipe */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MOUSE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	/* Check to see if a packet has been received */
+	if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+	{
+		/* Check if data has been received from the attached mouse */
+		if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+		{
+			/* Create buffer big enough for the report */
+			uint8_t MouseReport[Pipe_BytesInPipe()];
+
+			/* Load in the mouse report */
+			Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(MouseReport, Pipe_BytesInPipe(), NULL);
+
+			/* Process the read in mouse report from the device */
+			ProcessMouseReport(MouseReport);
+		}
+
+		/* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */
+		Pipe_ClearIN();
+	}
+
+	/* Freeze mouse data pipe */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+}
+
+/** Processes a read HID report from an attached mouse, extracting out elements via the HID parser results
+ *  as required and displays movement and button presses on the board LEDs.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MouseReport  Pointer to a HID report from an attached mouse device
+ */
+void ProcessMouseReport(uint8_t* MouseReport)
+{
+	uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+	/* Check each HID report item in turn, looking for mouse X/Y/button reports */
+	for (uint8_t ReportNumber = 0; ReportNumber < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ReportNumber++)
+	{
+		/* Create a temporary item pointer to the next report item */
+		HID_ReportItem_t* ReportItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ReportNumber];
+
+		bool FoundData;
+
+		if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page        == USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON) &&
+			(ReportItem->ItemType                     == HID_REPORT_ITEM_In))
+		{
+			/* Get the mouse button value */
+			FoundData = USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(MouseReport, ReportItem);
+
+			/* For multi-report devices - if the requested data was not in the issued report, continue */
+			if (!(FoundData))
+			  continue;
+
+			/* If button is pressed, all LEDs are turned on */
+			if (ReportItem->Value)
+			  LEDMask = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+		}
+		else if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page   == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
+				 (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage  == USAGE_SCROLL_WHEEL)       &&
+				 (ReportItem->ItemType                == HID_REPORT_ITEM_In))
+		{
+			/* Get the mouse wheel value if it is contained within the current
+			 * report, if not, skip to the next item in the parser list
+			 */
+			if (!(USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(MouseReport, ReportItem)))
+			  continue;
+
+			int16_t WheelDelta = HID_ALIGN_DATA(ReportItem, int16_t);
+
+			if (WheelDelta)
+			  LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | ((WheelDelta > 0) ? LEDS_LED3 : LEDS_LED4));
+		}
+		else if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page   == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
+				 ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X)                  ||
+				  (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_Y))                 &&
+				 (ReportItem->ItemType                == HID_REPORT_ITEM_In))
+		{
+			/* Get the mouse relative position value */
+			FoundData = USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(MouseReport, ReportItem);
+
+			/* For multi-report devices - if the requested data was not in the issued report, continue */
+			if (!(FoundData))
+			  continue;
+
+			int16_t DeltaMovement = HID_ALIGN_DATA(ReportItem, int16_t);
+
+			/* Check to see if a (non-zero) delta movement has been indicated */
+			if (DeltaMovement)
+			{
+				/* Determine if the report is for the X or Y delta movement, light LEDs as appropriate */
+				if (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X)
+				  LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED1 : LEDS_LED2);
+				else
+				  LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED3 : LEDS_LED4);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Display the button information on the board LEDs */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..89407b464
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.h
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MouseHostWithParser.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MOUSE_HOST_H_
+#define _MOUSE_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+		#include "HIDReport.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void MouseHost_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+		void ProcessMouseReport(uint8_t* MouseReport);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9b1b7d055
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Mouse Host With HID Descriptor Parser Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Mouse host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Mouse host, for USB mice using
+ *  the standard mouse HID profile. It uses a HID parser for the HID
+ *  reports, allowing for correct operation across all USB mice. This
+ *  demo supports mice with a single HID report.
+ *
+ *  Mouse and scroll wheel movement and button presses are displayed
+ *  on the board LEDs. On connection to a USB mouse, the report items
+ *  will be processed and printed as a formatted list through the USART
+ *  before the mouse is fully enumerated.
+ *
+ *  Currently only single interface mice are supported.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e06dbea4a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Mouse HID (with parser) Host Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.mouse_parser.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.mouse_parser"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.mouse_parser" caption="Mouse HID (with parser) Host Demo (Low Level APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Mouse HID Host demo with HID parser, implementing a basic USB mouse host that can display movement data on the board LEDs. This demo uses the Low Level LUFA APIs to manually implement a USB Class for demonstration purposes without using the simpler in-built LUFA Class Driver APIs.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="MouseHostWithParser.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="MouseHostWithParser.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="ConfigDescriptor.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="HIDReport.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="MouseHostWithParser.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="ConfigDescriptor.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="HIDReport.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1336d998e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mouse Host Demo (Using HID Descriptor Parser)"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..72144f189
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/MouseHostWithParser/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = MouseHostWithParser
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c ConfigDescriptor.c HIDReport.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d657a214
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ce10bf839
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,177 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Interface number for the bidirectional Printer interface found within the device. */
+uint8_t PrinterInterfaceNumber;
+
+/** Interface Alternate Setting number for the bidirectional Printer interface found within the device. */
+uint8_t PrinterAltSetting;
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for a bidirectional Printer interface descriptor containing bulk IN and OUT data endpoints.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the \ref PrinterHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+
+	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* PrinterInterface = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint   = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataOUTEndpoint  = NULL;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return ControlError;
+	}
+
+	while (!(DataINEndpoint) || !(DataOUTEndpoint))
+	{
+		/* See if we've found a likely compatible interface, and if there is an endpoint within that interface */
+		if (!(PrinterInterface) ||
+		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+		                              DComp_NextPrinterInterfaceBulkDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			/* Get the next Printer interface from the configuration descriptor */
+			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+										  DComp_NextBidirectionalPrinterInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+			{
+				/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+				return NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+			}
+
+			/* Save the interface in case we need to refer back to it later */
+			PrinterInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+			/* Clear any found endpoints */
+			DataINEndpoint  = NULL;
+			DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;
+
+			/* Skip the remainder of the loop as we have not found an endpoint yet */
+			continue;
+		}
+
+		/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* If the endpoint is a IN type endpoint */
+		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+		  DataINEndpoint  = EndpointData;
+		else
+		  DataOUTEndpoint = EndpointData;
+	}
+
+	/* Save Printer interface details for later use */
+	PrinterInterfaceNumber = PrinterInterface->InterfaceNumber;
+	PrinterAltSetting      = PrinterInterface->AlternateSetting;
+
+	/* Configure the Printer data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(PRINTER_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress, DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize, 1);
+
+	/* Configure the Printer data OUT pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(PRINTER_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress, DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointSize, 1);
+
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Bidirectional Printer Interface descriptor of the current Printer interface,
+ *  aborting the search if the end of the descriptors is found.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextBidirectionalPrinterInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		/* Check the descriptor class, subclass and protocol, break out if correct value interface found */
+		if ((Interface->Class    == PRNT_CSCP_PrinterClass)    &&
+		    (Interface->SubClass == PRNT_CSCP_PrinterSubclass) &&
+			(Interface->Protocol == PRNT_CSCP_BidirectionalProtocol))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Bulk Endpoint descriptor of the current Printer interface, aborting the
+ *  search if another interface descriptor is found before the next endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextPrinterInterfaceBulkDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* Endpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* Check the endpoint type, break out if correct BULK type endpoint found */
+		if ((Endpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_BULK)
+		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..68a9bbe8a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "PrinterHost.h"
+		#include "Lib/PrinterCommands.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Pipe address of the Printer data IN pipe. */
+		#define PRINTER_DATA_IN_PIPE             (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1)
+
+		/** Pipe address of the Printer data OUT pipe. */
+		#define PRINTER_DATA_OUT_PIPE            (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2)
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the \ref ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum PrinterHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoCompatibleInterfaceFound      = 4, /**< A compatible interface with the required endpoints was not found */
+		};
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		/** Interface index of the Bidirectional Printer interface within the device, once the Configuration
+		 *  Descriptor has been processed.
+		 */
+		extern uint8_t PrinterInterfaceNumber;
+
+		/** Interface Alternate Setting index of the Bidirectional Printer interface within the device, once
+		 *  the Configuration Descriptor has been processed.
+		 */
+		extern uint8_t PrinterAltSetting;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+		uint8_t DComp_NextBidirectionalPrinterInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextPrinterInterfaceBulkDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/Lib/PrinterCommands.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/Lib/PrinterCommands.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..09af1cdf5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/Lib/PrinterCommands.c
@@ -0,0 +1,162 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Printer Device commands, to send/receive data to and from an attached USB
+ *  printer, and to send and receive Printer Class control requests.
+ */
+
+#include "PrinterCommands.h"
+
+/** Sends the given data directly to the printer via the data endpoints, for the sending of print commands in printer
+ *  languages accepted by the attached printer (e.g. PCL).
+ *
+ *  \param[in] PrinterCommands  Pointer to the data to send to the attached printer
+ *  \param[in] CommandSize  Size of the data to send to the attached printer
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t Printer_SendData(const void* const PrinterCommands,
+                         const uint16_t CommandSize)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PRINTER_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(PrinterCommands, CommandSize, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+	Pipe_WaitUntilReady();
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+/** Issues a Printer class Get Device ID command to the attached device, to retrieve the device ID string (which indicates
+ *  the accepted printer languages, the printer's model and other pertinent information).
+ *
+ *  \param[out] DeviceIDString Pointer to the destination where the returned string should be stored
+ *  \param[in] BufferSize  Size in bytes of the allocated buffer for the returned Device ID string
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t Printer_GetDeviceID(char* DeviceIDString,
+                            const uint16_t BufferSize)
+{
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+	uint16_t DeviceIDStringLength = 0;
+
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = PRNT_REQ_GetDeviceID,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = PrinterInterfaceNumber,
+			.wLength       = sizeof(DeviceIDStringLength),
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(&DeviceIDStringLength)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	if (!(DeviceIDStringLength))
+	{
+		DeviceIDString[0] = 0x00;
+		return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+	}
+
+	DeviceIDStringLength = SwapEndian_16(DeviceIDStringLength);
+
+	if (DeviceIDStringLength > BufferSize)
+	  DeviceIDStringLength = BufferSize;
+
+	USB_ControlRequest.wLength = DeviceIDStringLength;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(DeviceIDString)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Move string back two characters to remove the string length value from the start of the array */
+	memmove(&DeviceIDString[0], &DeviceIDString[2], DeviceIDStringLength - 2);
+
+	DeviceIDString[DeviceIDStringLength - 2] = 0x00;
+
+	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+}
+
+/** Issues a Printer class Get Port Status command to the attached device, to retrieve the current status flags of the
+ *  printer.
+ *
+ *  \param[out] PortStatus  Pointer to the destination where the printer's status flag values should be stored
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t Printer_GetPortStatus(uint8_t* const PortStatus)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = PRNT_REQ_GetPortStatus,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = PrinterInterfaceNumber,
+			.wLength       = sizeof(uint8_t),
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(PortStatus);
+}
+
+/** Issues a Printer class Soft Reset command to the attached device, to reset the printer ready for new input without
+ *  physically cycling the printer's power.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t Printer_SoftReset(void)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = PRNT_REQ_SoftReset,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = PrinterInterfaceNumber,
+			.wLength       = 0,
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/Lib/PrinterCommands.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/Lib/PrinterCommands.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..dad7c4e71
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/Lib/PrinterCommands.h
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for PrinterCommands.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _PRINTER_COMMANDS_H_
+#define _PRINTER_COMMANDS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "../PrinterHost.h"
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t Printer_SendData(const void* const PrinterCommands,
+		                         const uint16_t CommandSize);
+		uint8_t Printer_GetDeviceID(char* DeviceIDString,
+		                            const uint16_t BufferSize);
+		uint8_t Printer_GetPortStatus(uint8_t* const PortStatus);
+		uint8_t Printer_SoftReset(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f57be350a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,226 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the PrinterHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "PrinterHost.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Printer Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		PrinterHost_Task();
+
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+	if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+	{
+		if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+		else
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+		printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
+		                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Some printers use alternate settings to determine the communication protocol used - if so, send a SetInterface
+	 * request to switch to the interface alternate setting with the Bidirectional protocol */
+	if (PrinterAltSetting)
+	{
+		if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetInterfaceAltSetting(PrinterInterfaceNumber, PrinterAltSetting)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+		{
+			printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Interface).\r\n"
+			                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+			USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+			return;
+		}
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Retrieving Device ID...\r\n"));
+
+	char DeviceIDString[300];
+	if ((ErrorCode = Printer_GetDeviceID(DeviceIDString, sizeof(DeviceIDString))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Device ID).\r\n"
+		                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("Printer Device ID: %s\r\n"), DeviceIDString);
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Printer Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Task to manage an enumerated USB printer once connected, to display device
+ *  information and print a test PCL page.
+ */
+void PrinterHost_Task(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Indicate device busy via the status LEDs */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+	char  TestPageData[]    = "\033%-12345X\033E" "LUFA PCL Test Page" "\033E\033%-12345X";
+	uint16_t TestPageLength = strlen(TestPageData);
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("Sending Test Page (%d bytes)...\r\n"), TestPageLength);
+
+	/* Send the test page to the attached printer */
+	if ((ErrorCode = Printer_SendData(&TestPageData, TestPageLength)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Error Sending Test Page.\r\n"
+		                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Test Page Sent.\r\n"));
+
+	/* Indicate device no longer busy */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..15f43629f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for PrinterHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MASS_STORE_HOST_H_
+#define _MASS_STORE_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+		#include "Lib/PrinterCommands.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern uint8_t PrinterInterfaceNumber;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void PrinterHost_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e2a482058
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/PrinterHost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Printer Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Printer Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Bidirectional Protocol</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Printer Class Specification \n
+ *        PCL Language Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Printer host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a USB Printer host, for USB printers using
+ *  the bidirectional data encapsulation protocol and PCL language.
+ *
+ *  Upon connection of a compatible printer, the printer's device ID is sent
+ *  to the AVR's serial port, and a simple test page is printed using the PCL
+ *  printer language.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7f8606360
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Printer Host Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.printer.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.printer"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.printer" caption="Printer Host Demo (Low Level APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Printer Host demo, implementing a basic USB printer host that can send raw printer control data to an attached device. This demo uses the Low Level LUFA APIs to manually implement a USB Class for demonstration purposes without using the simpler in-built LUFA Class Driver APIs.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="Printer Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="PrinterHost.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="PrinterHost.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="ConfigDescriptor.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="PrinterHost.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="ConfigDescriptor.h"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/PrinterCommands.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/PrinterCommands.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f38d9823a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Printer Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d6393c728
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/PrinterHost/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = PrinterHost
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c ConfigDescriptor.c Lib/PrinterCommands.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d657a214
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1a8bf9a6c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,235 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
+ *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for a RNDIS interface descriptor containing bulk data IN and OUT endpoints, and an interrupt event endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the \ref RNDISHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+
+	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* RNDISControlInterface  = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint         = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataOUTEndpoint        = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  NotificationEndpoint   = NULL;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return ControlError;
+	}
+
+	while (!(DataINEndpoint) || !(DataOUTEndpoint) || !(NotificationEndpoint))
+	{
+		/* See if we've found a likely compatible interface, and if there is an endpoint within that interface */
+		if (!(RNDISControlInterface) ||
+		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+		                              DComp_NextCDCDataInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			/* Check if we have already found the control interface's notification endpoint or not */
+			if (NotificationEndpoint)
+			{
+				/* Get the next RNDIS data interface from the configuration descriptor */
+				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+											  DComp_NextCDCDataInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+				{
+					/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+					return NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+				}
+
+				/* Clear any found endpoints */
+				DataINEndpoint       = NULL;
+				DataOUTEndpoint      = NULL;
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				/* Get the next RNDIS control interface from the configuration descriptor */
+				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+											  DComp_NextCDCControlInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+				{
+					/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+					return NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+				}
+
+				/* Save the interface in case we need to refer back to it later */
+				RNDISControlInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+				/* Clear any found endpoints */
+				NotificationEndpoint = NULL;
+			}
+
+			/* Skip the remainder of the loop as we have not found an endpoint yet */
+			continue;
+		}
+
+		/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* If the endpoint is a IN type endpoint */
+		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+		{
+			/* Check if the found endpoint is a interrupt or bulk type descriptor */
+			if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)
+			  NotificationEndpoint = EndpointData;
+			else
+			  DataINEndpoint = EndpointData;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			DataOUTEndpoint = EndpointData;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Configure the RNDIS data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(RNDIS_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress, DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize, 1);
+
+	/* Configure the RNDIS data OUT pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(RNDIS_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress, DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointSize, 1);
+
+	/* Configure the RNDIS notification pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(RNDIS_NOTIFICATION_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, NotificationEndpoint->EndpointAddress, NotificationEndpoint->EndpointSize, 1);
+	Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(NotificationEndpoint->PollingIntervalMS);
+
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct CDC control Class, Subclass and Protocol values.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextCDCControlInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		/* Check the CDC descriptor class, subclass and protocol, break out if correct control interface found */
+		if ((Interface->Class    == CDC_CSCP_CDCClass)    &&
+		    (Interface->SubClass == CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass) &&
+		    (Interface->Protocol == CDC_CSCP_VendorSpecificProtocol))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct CDC data Class, Subclass and Protocol values.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextCDCDataInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		/* Check the CDC descriptor class, subclass and protocol, break out if correct data interface found */
+		if ((Interface->Class    == CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass)   &&
+		    (Interface->SubClass == CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass) &&
+		    (Interface->Protocol == CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next bulk IN or OUT endpoint, or interrupt IN endpoint within the current interface,
+ *  aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint (so that it may be compared
+ *  using a different comparator to determine if it is another CDC class interface).
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextCDCDataInterfaceEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* Endpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* Check the endpoint type, break out if correct BULK or INTERRUPT type endpoint found */
+		if (((Endpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_BULK) ||
+		    ((Endpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4b4ff6a4d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "RNDISEthernetHost.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Pipe address for the RNDIS data IN pipe. */
+		#define RNDIS_DATA_IN_PIPE             (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1)
+
+		/** Pipe address for the RNDIS data OUT pipe. */
+		#define RNDIS_DATA_OUT_PIPE            (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2)
+
+		/** Pipe address for the RNDIS notification IN pipe. */
+		#define RNDIS_NOTIFICATION_PIPE        (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the \ref ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum RNDISHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoCompatibleInterfaceFound      = 4, /**< A compatible interface with the required endpoints was not found */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+		uint8_t DComp_NextCDCControlInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextCDCDataInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextCDCDataInterfaceEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/Lib/RNDISCommands.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/Lib/RNDISCommands.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..347b9c1d5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/Lib/RNDISCommands.c
@@ -0,0 +1,311 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  RNDIS Device commands, to issue RNDIS commands to the device for
+ *  the control and data transfer between the host and RNDIS device.
+ */
+
+#include "RNDISCommands.h"
+
+/** Current RNDIS Request ID, for associating sent commands with received data */
+uint32_t RequestID = 0;
+
+
+/** Function to send the given encapsulated RNDIS command to the device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Buffer  Source command data buffer to send to the device
+ *  \param[in] Length   Number of bytes to send
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(void* const Buffer,
+                                      const uint16_t Length)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = RNDIS_REQ_SendEncapsulatedCommand,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = 0,
+			.wLength       = Length,
+		};
+
+	/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Buffer);
+}
+
+/** Function to receive the given encapsulated RNDIS response from the device.
+ *
+ *  \param[out] Buffer  Destination command data buffer to write read data from the device to
+ *  \param[in] Length   Number of bytes to read
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(void* const Buffer,
+                                      const uint16_t Length)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = RNDIS_REQ_GetEncapsulatedResponse,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = 0,
+			.wLength       = Length,
+		};
+
+	/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Buffer);
+}
+
+/** Sends a RNDIS KEEPALIVE command to the device, to ensure that it does not enter standby mode after periods
+ *  of long inactivity.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum or RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED if the device returned a
+ *          logical command failure
+ */
+uint8_t RNDIS_SendKeepAlive(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t  KeepAliveMessage;
+	RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t KeepAliveMessageResponse;
+
+	KeepAliveMessage.MessageType     = REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG;
+	KeepAliveMessage.MessageLength   = sizeof(RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t);
+	KeepAliveMessage.RequestId       = RequestID++;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(&KeepAliveMessage,
+	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(&KeepAliveMessageResponse,
+	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+}
+
+/** Initializes the attached RNDIS device's RNDIS interface.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HostMaxPacketSize  Size of the packet buffer on the host
+ *  \param[out] DeviceMaxPacketSize   Pointer to where the packet buffer size of the device is to be stored
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum or RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED if the device returned a
+ *          logical command failure
+ */
+uint8_t RNDIS_InitializeDevice(const uint16_t HostMaxPacketSize,
+                               uint16_t* const DeviceMaxPacketSize)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t  InitMessage;
+	RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t InitMessageResponse;
+
+	InitMessage.MessageType     = REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG;
+	InitMessage.MessageLength   = sizeof(RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t);
+	InitMessage.RequestId       = RequestID++;
+
+	InitMessage.MajorVersion    = REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MAJOR;
+	InitMessage.MinorVersion    = REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MINOR;
+	InitMessage.MaxTransferSize = HostMaxPacketSize;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(&InitMessage,
+	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(&InitMessageResponse,
+	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	if (InitMessageResponse.Status != REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS)
+	  return RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED;
+
+	*DeviceMaxPacketSize = InitMessageResponse.MaxTransferSize;
+
+	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+}
+
+/** Sets a given RNDIS property of an attached RNDIS device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Oid  OID number of the parameter to set
+ *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to where the property data is to be sourced from
+ *  \param[in] Length  Length in bytes of the property data to sent to the device
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum or RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED if the device returned a
+ *          logical command failure
+ */
+uint8_t RNDIS_SetRNDISProperty(const uint32_t Oid,
+                               void* Buffer,
+                               const uint16_t Length)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	struct
+	{
+		RNDIS_Set_Message_t SetMessage;
+		uint8_t             ContiguousBuffer[Length];
+	} SetMessageData;
+
+	RNDIS_Set_Complete_t SetMessageResponse;
+
+	SetMessageData.SetMessage.MessageType    = REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG;
+	SetMessageData.SetMessage.MessageLength  = sizeof(RNDIS_Set_Message_t) + Length;
+	SetMessageData.SetMessage.RequestId      = RequestID++;
+
+	SetMessageData.SetMessage.Oid            = Oid;
+	SetMessageData.SetMessage.InformationBufferLength = Length;
+	SetMessageData.SetMessage.InformationBufferOffset = (sizeof(RNDIS_Set_Message_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t));
+	SetMessageData.SetMessage.DeviceVcHandle = 0;
+
+	memcpy(SetMessageData.ContiguousBuffer, Buffer, Length);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(&SetMessageData,
+	                                               SetMessageData.SetMessage.MessageLength)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(&SetMessageResponse,
+	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_Set_Complete_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	if (SetMessageResponse.Status != REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS)
+	  return RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED;
+
+	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+}
+
+/** Gets a given RNDIS property of an attached RNDIS device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Oid  OID number of the parameter to get
+ *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to where the property data is to be written to
+ *  \param[in] MaxLength  Length in bytes of the destination buffer size
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum or RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED if the device returned a
+ *          logical command failure
+ */
+uint8_t RNDIS_QueryRNDISProperty(const uint32_t Oid,
+                                 void* Buffer,
+                                 const uint16_t MaxLength)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	RNDIS_Query_Message_t QueryMessage;
+
+	struct
+	{
+		RNDIS_Query_Complete_t QueryMessageResponse;
+		uint8_t                ContiguousBuffer[MaxLength];
+	} QueryMessageResponseData;
+
+	QueryMessage.MessageType    = REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG;
+	QueryMessage.MessageLength  = sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Message_t);
+	QueryMessage.RequestId      = RequestID++;
+
+	QueryMessage.Oid            = Oid;
+	QueryMessage.InformationBufferLength = 0;
+	QueryMessage.InformationBufferOffset = 0;
+	QueryMessage.DeviceVcHandle = 0;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(&QueryMessage,
+	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Message_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(&QueryMessageResponseData,
+	                                               sizeof(QueryMessageResponseData))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	if (QueryMessageResponseData.QueryMessageResponse.Status != REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS)
+	  return RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED;
+
+	memcpy(Buffer, &QueryMessageResponseData.ContiguousBuffer, MaxLength);
+
+	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the size of a received packet, discarding the remainder of the RNDIS packet header to leave only the
+ *  packet contents for processing by the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[out] PacketLength  Size of the packet currently in the pipe
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t RNDIS_GetPacketLength(uint16_t* const PacketLength)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(RNDIS_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+	Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_IN);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	{
+		*PacketLength = 0;
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+	}
+
+	RNDIS_Packet_Message_t DeviceMessage;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&DeviceMessage, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t), NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	*PacketLength = (uint16_t)DeviceMessage.DataLength;
+
+	Pipe_Discard_Stream(DeviceMessage.DataOffset - (sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t)),
+	                    NULL);
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/Lib/RNDISCommands.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/Lib/RNDISCommands.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c343f7cce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/Lib/RNDISCommands.h
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for RNDISCommands.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _RNDIS_COMMANDS_H_
+#define _RNDIS_COMMANDS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "../RNDISEthernetHost.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Additional error code for RNDIS functions when a device returns a logical command failure. */
+		#define RNDIS_COMMAND_FAILED                  0xC0
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(void* const Buffer,
+		                                      const uint16_t Length);
+		uint8_t RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(void* const Buffer,
+		                                      const uint16_t Length);
+
+		uint8_t RNDIS_SendKeepAlive(void);
+		uint8_t RNDIS_InitializeDevice(const uint16_t HostMaxPacketSize,
+		                               uint16_t* const DeviceMaxPacketSize);
+		uint8_t RNDIS_SetRNDISProperty(const uint32_t Oid,
+		                               void* Buffer,
+		                               const uint16_t Length);
+		uint8_t RNDIS_QueryRNDISProperty(const uint32_t Oid,
+		                                 void* Buffer,
+		                                 const uint16_t MaxLength);
+		uint8_t RNDIS_GetPacketLength(uint16_t* const PacketLength);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..76504f44c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,249 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the RNDISEthernetHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "RNDISEthernetHost.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "RNDIS Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		RNDISHost_Task();
+
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+	if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+	{
+		if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+		else
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+		printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
+		                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	uint16_t DeviceMaxPacketSize;
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_InitializeDevice(1024, &DeviceMaxPacketSize)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Error Initializing Device.\r\n"
+		                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("Device Max Transfer Size: %lu bytes.\r\n"), DeviceMaxPacketSize);
+
+	/* We set the default filter to only receive packets we would be interested in */
+	uint32_t PacketFilter = (REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_DIRECTED | REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_BROADCAST | REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_ALL_MULTICAST);
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SetRNDISProperty(OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER,
+	                                        &PacketFilter, sizeof(PacketFilter))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Error Setting Device Packet Filter.\r\n"
+		                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	uint32_t VendorID;
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_QueryRNDISProperty(OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID,
+	                                          &VendorID, sizeof(VendorID))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Error Getting Vendor ID.\r\n"
+		                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("Device Vendor ID: 0x%08lX\r\n"), VendorID);
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("RNDIS Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Task to read in data received from the attached RNDIS device and print it to the serial port.
+ */
+void RNDISHost_Task(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+	uint16_t PacketLength;
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetPacketLength(&PacketLength)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Packet Reception Error.\r\n"
+		                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (!(PacketLength))
+	  return;
+
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("***PACKET (Size %d)***\r\n"), PacketLength);
+
+	if (PacketLength > 1024)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Packet too large.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+		Pipe_Discard_Stream(PacketLength, NULL);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		uint8_t PacketBuffer[PacketLength];
+
+		Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&PacketBuffer, PacketLength, NULL);
+
+		for (uint16_t i = 0; i < PacketLength; i++)
+		  printf("0x%02x ", PacketBuffer[i]);
+	}
+
+	Pipe_ClearIN();
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	printf("\r\n\r\n");
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..970fc35e5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISEthernetHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for RNDISEthernetHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _RNDIS_HOST_H_
+#define _RNDIS_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+		#include "Lib/RNDISCommands.h"
+
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void RNDISHost_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISHost.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISHost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e9edd6d66
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/RNDISHost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage RNDIS Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Remote NDIS (Microsoft Proprietary CDC Class Networking Standard)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Microsoft RNDIS Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  RNDIS host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a RNDIS Ethernet host, for USB devices such as
+ *  modems.
+ *
+ *  This demo will enumerate an attached USB RNDIS device, print out its vendor ID
+ *  and any received packets in raw form through the serial USART.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..38f71272e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="RNDIS Ethernet Host Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.rndis.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.rndis"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.rndis" caption="RNDIS Ethernet Host Demo (Low Level APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Microsoft RNDIS Ethernet Host demo, implementing a RNDIS host that can send and receive Ethernet data to and from an attached device. This demo uses the Low Level LUFA APIs to manually implement a USB Class for demonstration purposes without using the simpler in-built LUFA Class Driver APIs.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="RNDIS Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="RNDISHost.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="RNDISEthernetHost.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="ConfigDescriptor.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="RNDISEthernetHost.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="ConfigDescriptor.h"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/RNDISCommands.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/RNDISCommands.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0ece36d65
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - RNDIS Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4f78b5d8c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/RNDISEthernetHost/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = RNDISEthernetHost
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c ConfigDescriptor.c Lib/RNDISCommands.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d657a214
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3a629e0a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,190 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
+ *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for a SI interface descriptor containing bulk IN and OUT data endpoints.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the \ref StillImageHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+
+	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* StillImageInterface = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint      = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataOUTEndpoint     = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  EventsEndpoint      = NULL;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return ControlError;
+	}
+
+	while (!(DataINEndpoint) || !(DataOUTEndpoint))
+	{
+		/* See if we've found a likely compatible interface, and if there is an endpoint within that interface */
+		if (!(StillImageInterface) ||
+		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+		                              DComp_NextStillImageInterfaceDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			/* Get the next Still Image interface from the configuration descriptor */
+			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+										  DComp_NextStillImageInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+			{
+				/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+				return NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+			}
+
+			/* Save the interface in case we need to refer back to it later */
+			StillImageInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+			/* Clear any found endpoints */
+			DataINEndpoint  = NULL;
+			DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;
+			EventsEndpoint  = NULL;
+
+			/* Skip the remainder of the loop as we have not found an endpoint yet */
+			continue;
+		}
+
+		/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* If the endpoint is a IN type endpoint */
+		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+		{
+			/* Check if the found endpoint is a interrupt or bulk type descriptor */
+			if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)
+			  EventsEndpoint = EndpointData;
+			else
+			  DataINEndpoint = EndpointData;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			DataOUTEndpoint = EndpointData;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Configure the Still Image data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress, DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize, 1);
+
+	/* Configure the Still Image data OUT pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress, DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointSize, 1);
+
+	/* Configure the Still Image events pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, EventsEndpoint->EndpointAddress, EventsEndpoint->EndpointSize, 1);
+	Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(EventsEndpoint->PollingIntervalMS);
+
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Still Image Class, Subclass and Protocol values.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextStillImageInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		/* Check the descriptor class, subclass and protocol, break out if correct interface found */
+		if ((Interface->Class    == SI_CSCP_StillImageClass)    &&
+		    (Interface->SubClass == SI_CSCP_StillImageSubclass) &&
+		    (Interface->Protocol == SI_CSCP_BulkOnlyProtocol))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interrupt or Bulk Endpoint descriptor of the current SI interface, aborting the
+ *  search if another interface descriptor is found before the next endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextStillImageInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* Endpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* Check the endpoint type, break out if correct BULK or INTERRUPT type endpoint found */
+		if (((Endpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_BULK) ||
+		    ((Endpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7a00f40de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "StillImageHost.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Pipe address of the Still Image data IN pipe. */
+		#define SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE            (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1)
+
+		/** Pipe address of the Still Image data OUT pipe. */
+		#define SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE           (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2)
+
+		/** Pipe address of the Still Image events IN pipe. */
+		#define SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE             (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the \ref ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum StillImageHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoCompatibleInterfaceFound      = 4, /**< A compatible interface with the required endpoints was not found */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+		uint8_t DComp_NextStillImageInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextStillImageInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/Lib/PIMACodes.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/Lib/PIMACodes.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e8b00875f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/Lib/PIMACodes.h
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header containing macros for possible PIMA commands. Refer to the PIMA standard
+ *  documentation for more information on each PIMA command.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _PIMA_CODES_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define PIMA_OPERATION_GETDEVICEINFO         0x1001
+		#define PIMA_OPERATION_OPENSESSION           0x1002
+		#define PIMA_OPERATION_CLOSESESSION          0x1003
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/Lib/StillImageCommands.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/Lib/StillImageCommands.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0d23d46f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/Lib/StillImageCommands.c
@@ -0,0 +1,268 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Still Image Device commands, to issue PIMA commands to the device for
+ *  reading device status, capacity, and other characteristics as well as
+ *  reading and writing of stored image data.
+ */
+
+#include "StillImageCommands.h"
+
+/** PIMA block container for the block to send to the device */
+PIMA_Container_t PIMA_SendBlock;
+
+/** PIMA block container for the last received block from the device */
+PIMA_Container_t PIMA_ReceivedBlock;
+
+/** PIMA block container for the last event block received from the device */
+PIMA_Container_t PIMA_EventBlock;
+
+
+/** Function to send the PIMA command container to the attached still image device. */
+void SImage_SendBlockHeader(void)
+{
+	/* Unfreeze the data OUT pipe ready for data transmission */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	/* Write the PIMA block to the data OUT pipe */
+	Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&PIMA_SendBlock, PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0), NULL);
+
+	/* If the block type is a command, send its parameters (if any) */
+	if (PIMA_SendBlock.Type == PIMA_CONTAINER_CommandBlock)
+	{
+		/* Determine the size of the parameters in the block via the data length attribute */
+		uint8_t ParamBytes = (PIMA_SendBlock.DataLength - PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0));
+
+		/* Check if any parameters in the command block */
+		if (ParamBytes)
+		{
+			/* Write the PIMA parameters to the data OUT pipe */
+			Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&PIMA_SendBlock.Params, ParamBytes, NULL);
+		}
+
+		/* Send the PIMA command block to the attached device */
+		Pipe_ClearOUT();
+	}
+
+	/* Freeze pipe after use */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+}
+
+/** Function to receive a PIMA event container from the attached still image device.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t SImage_ReceiveEventHeader(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Unfreeze the events pipe */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	/* Read in the event data into the global structure */
+	ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&PIMA_EventBlock, sizeof(PIMA_EventBlock), NULL);
+
+	/* Clear the pipe after read complete to prepare for next event */
+	Pipe_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Freeze the event pipe again after use */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+/** Function to receive a PIMA response container from the attached still image device.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t SImage_ReceiveBlockHeader(void)
+{
+	uint16_t TimeoutMSRem        = COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS;
+	uint16_t PreviousFrameNumber = USB_Host_GetFrameNumber();
+
+	/* Unfreeze the data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	/* Wait until data received on the IN pipe */
+	while (!(Pipe_IsINReceived()))
+	{
+		uint16_t CurrentFrameNumber = USB_Host_GetFrameNumber();
+
+		/* Check to see if a new frame has been issued (1ms elapsed) */
+		if (CurrentFrameNumber != PreviousFrameNumber)
+		{
+			/* Save the new frame number and decrement the timeout period */
+			PreviousFrameNumber = CurrentFrameNumber;
+			TimeoutMSRem--;
+
+			/* Check to see if the timeout period for the command has elapsed */
+			if (!(TimeoutMSRem))
+			  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_Timeout;
+		}
+
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		/* Check if pipe stalled (command failed by device) */
+		if (Pipe_IsStalled())
+		{
+			/* Clear the stall condition on the OUT pipe */
+			USB_Host_ClearEndpointStall(Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress());
+
+			/* Return error code and break out of the loop */
+			return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;
+		}
+
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		/* Check if pipe stalled (command failed by device) */
+		if (Pipe_IsStalled())
+		{
+			/* Clear the stall condition on the IN pipe */
+			USB_Host_ClearEndpointStall(Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress());
+
+			/* Return error code */
+			return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;
+		}
+
+		/* Check to see if the device was disconnected, if so exit function */
+		if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+	}
+
+	/* Load in the response from the attached device */
+	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&PIMA_ReceivedBlock, PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0), NULL);
+
+	/* Check if the returned block type is a response block */
+	if (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Type == PIMA_CONTAINER_ResponseBlock)
+	{
+		/* Determine the size of the parameters in the block via the data length attribute */
+		uint8_t ParamBytes = (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.DataLength - PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0));
+
+		/* Check if the device has returned any parameters */
+		if (ParamBytes)
+		{
+			/* Read the PIMA parameters from the data IN pipe */
+			Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Params, ParamBytes, NULL);
+		}
+
+		/* Clear pipe bank after use */
+		Pipe_ClearIN();
+	}
+
+	/* Freeze the IN pipe after use */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+/** Function to send the given data to the device, after a command block has been issued.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Buffer  Source data buffer to send to the device
+ *  \param[in] Bytes   Number of bytes to send
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t SImage_SendData(void* const Buffer,
+                        const uint16_t Bytes)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Unfreeze the data OUT pipe */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	/* Write the data contents to the pipe */
+	ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, Bytes, NULL);
+
+	/* Send the last packet to the attached device */
+	Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+	/* Freeze the pipe again after use */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+/** Function to receive the given data from the device, after a response block has been received.
+ *
+ *  \param[out] Buffer  Destination data buffer to put read bytes from the device
+ *  \param[in] Bytes    Number of bytes to receive
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t SImage_ReadData(void* const Buffer,
+                        const uint16_t Bytes)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Unfreeze the data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	/* Read in the data into the buffer */
+	ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(Buffer, Bytes, NULL);
+
+	/* Freeze the pipe again after use */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+/** Function to test if a PIMA event block is waiting to be read in from the attached device.
+ *
+ *  \return True if an event is waiting to be read in from the device, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool SImage_IsEventReceived(void)
+{
+	bool IsEventReceived = false;
+
+	/* Unfreeze the Event pipe */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	/* If the pipe contains data, an event has been received */
+	if (Pipe_BytesInPipe())
+	  IsEventReceived = true;
+
+	/* Freeze the pipe after use */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return IsEventReceived;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/Lib/StillImageCommands.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/Lib/StillImageCommands.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..714a3fef7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/Lib/StillImageCommands.h
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for StillImageCommands.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _STILL_IMAGE_COMMANDS_H_
+#define _STILL_IMAGE_COMMANDS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "PIMACodes.h"
+		#include "../StillImageHost.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Timeout period between the issuing of a command to a device, and the reception of the first packet. */
+		#define COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS        10000
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern PIMA_Container_t PIMA_SendBlock;
+		extern PIMA_Container_t PIMA_ReceivedBlock;
+		extern PIMA_Container_t PIMA_EventBlock;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void    SImage_SendBlockHeader(void);
+		uint8_t SImage_ReceiveBlockHeader(void);
+		uint8_t SImage_ReceiveEventHeader(void);
+		uint8_t SImage_SendData(void* const Buffer,
+		                        const uint16_t Bytes);
+		uint8_t SImage_ReadData(void* const Buffer,
+		                        const uint16_t Bytes);
+		bool    SImage_IsEventReceived(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f7838cf6c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,365 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the StillImageHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "StillImageHost.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "Still Image Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		StillImageHost_Task();
+
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+	if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+	{
+		if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+		else
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+		printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
+		                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Still Image Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Task to print device information through the serial port, and open/close a test PIMA session with the
+ *  attached Still Image device.
+ */
+void StillImageHost_Task(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Indicate device busy via the status LEDs */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Retrieving Device Info...\r\n"));
+
+	PIMA_SendBlock = (PIMA_Container_t)
+		{
+			.DataLength    = PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0),
+			.Type          = PIMA_CONTAINER_CommandBlock,
+			.Code          = PIMA_OPERATION_GETDEVICEINFO,
+			.TransactionID = 0x00000000,
+			.Params        = {},
+		};
+
+	/* Send the GETDEVICEINFO block */
+	SImage_SendBlockHeader();
+
+	/* Receive the response data block */
+	if ((ErrorCode = SImage_ReceiveBlockHeader()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		ShowCommandError(ErrorCode, false);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Calculate the size of the returned device info data structure */
+	uint16_t DeviceInfoSize = (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.DataLength - PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0));
+
+	/* Create a buffer large enough to hold the entire device info */
+	uint8_t DeviceInfo[DeviceInfoSize];
+
+	/* Read in the data block data (containing device info) */
+	SImage_ReadData(DeviceInfo, DeviceInfoSize);
+
+	/* Once all the data has been read, the pipe must be cleared before the response can be sent */
+	Pipe_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Create a pointer for walking through the info dataset */
+	uint8_t* DeviceInfoPos = DeviceInfo;
+
+	/* Skip over the data before the unicode device information strings */
+	DeviceInfoPos +=  8;                                          // Skip to VendorExtensionDesc String
+	DeviceInfoPos += (1 + UNICODE_STRING_LENGTH(*DeviceInfoPos)); // Skip over VendorExtensionDesc String
+	DeviceInfoPos +=  2;                                          // Skip over FunctionalMode
+	DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1));      // Skip over Supported Operations Array
+	DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1));      // Skip over Supported Events Array
+	DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1));      // Skip over Supported Device Properties Array
+	DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1));      // Skip over Capture Formats Array
+	DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1));      // Skip over Image Formats Array
+
+	/* Extract and convert the Manufacturer Unicode string to ASCII and print it through the USART */
+	char Manufacturer[*DeviceInfoPos];
+	UnicodeToASCII(DeviceInfoPos, Manufacturer);
+	printf_P(PSTR("   Manufacturer: %s\r\n"), Manufacturer);
+
+	DeviceInfoPos += 1 + UNICODE_STRING_LENGTH(*DeviceInfoPos);   // Skip over Manufacturer String
+
+	/* Extract and convert the Model Unicode string to ASCII and print it through the USART */
+	char Model[*DeviceInfoPos];
+	UnicodeToASCII(DeviceInfoPos, Model);
+	printf_P(PSTR("   Model: %s\r\n"), Model);
+
+	DeviceInfoPos += 1 + UNICODE_STRING_LENGTH(*DeviceInfoPos);   // Skip over Model String
+
+	/* Extract and convert the Device Version Unicode string to ASCII and print it through the USART */
+	char DeviceVersion[*DeviceInfoPos];
+	UnicodeToASCII(DeviceInfoPos, DeviceVersion);
+	printf_P(PSTR("   Device Version: %s\r\n"), DeviceVersion);
+
+	/* Receive the final response block from the device */
+	if ((ErrorCode = SImage_ReceiveBlockHeader()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		ShowCommandError(ErrorCode, false);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Verify that the command completed successfully */
+	if ((PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Type != PIMA_CONTAINER_ResponseBlock) || (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code != PIMA_RESPONSE_OK))
+	{
+		ShowCommandError(PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code, true);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Opening Session...\r\n"));
+
+	PIMA_SendBlock = (PIMA_Container_t)
+		{
+			.DataLength    = PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(1),
+			.Type          = PIMA_CONTAINER_CommandBlock,
+			.Code          = PIMA_OPERATION_OPENSESSION,
+			.TransactionID = 0x00000000,
+			.Params        = {0x00000001},
+		};
+
+	/* Send the OPENSESSION block, open a session with an ID of 0x0001 */
+	SImage_SendBlockHeader();
+
+	/* Receive the response block from the device */
+	if ((ErrorCode = SImage_ReceiveBlockHeader()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		ShowCommandError(ErrorCode, false);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Verify that the command completed successfully */
+	if ((PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Type != PIMA_CONTAINER_ResponseBlock) || (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code != PIMA_RESPONSE_OK))
+	{
+		ShowCommandError(PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code, true);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Closing Session...\r\n"));
+
+	PIMA_SendBlock = (PIMA_Container_t)
+		{
+			.DataLength    = PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(1),
+			.Type          = PIMA_CONTAINER_CommandBlock,
+			.Code          = PIMA_OPERATION_CLOSESESSION,
+			.TransactionID = 0x00000001,
+			.Params        = {0x00000001},
+		};
+
+	/* Send the CLOSESESSION block, close the session with an ID of 0x0001 */
+	SImage_SendBlockHeader();
+
+	/* Receive the response block from the device */
+	if ((ErrorCode = SImage_ReceiveBlockHeader()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		ShowCommandError(ErrorCode, false);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Verify that the command completed successfully */
+	if ((PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Type != PIMA_CONTAINER_ResponseBlock) || (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code != PIMA_RESPONSE_OK))
+	{
+		ShowCommandError(PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code, true);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("Done.\r\n"));
+
+	/* Indicate device no longer busy */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+}
+
+/** Function to convert a given Unicode encoded string to ASCII. This function will only work correctly on Unicode
+ *  strings which contain ASCII printable characters only.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] UnicodeString  Pointer to a Unicode encoded input string
+ *  \param[out] Buffer        Pointer to a buffer where the converted ASCII string should be stored
+ */
+void UnicodeToASCII(uint8_t* UnicodeString,
+                    char* Buffer)
+{
+	/* Get the number of characters in the string, skip to the start of the string data */
+	uint8_t CharactersRemaining = *(UnicodeString++);
+
+	/* Loop through the entire unicode string */
+	while (CharactersRemaining--)
+	{
+		/* Load in the next unicode character (only the lower byte, as only Unicode coded ASCII is supported) */
+		*(Buffer++) = *UnicodeString;
+
+		/* Jump to the next unicode character */
+		UnicodeString += 2;
+	}
+
+	/* Null terminate the string */
+	*Buffer = 0;
+}
+
+/** Displays a PIMA command error via the device's serial port.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] ErrorCode          Error code of the function which failed to complete successfully
+ *  \param[in] ResponseCodeError  Indicates if the error is due to a command failed indication from the device, or a communication failure
+ */
+void ShowCommandError(uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                      bool ResponseCodeError)
+{
+	const char* FailureType = ((ResponseCodeError) ? PSTR("Response Code != OK") : PSTR("Transaction Fail"));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Command Error (%S).\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), FailureType, ErrorCode);
+
+	/* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ebceb0280
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for StillImageHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _STILL_IMAGE_HOST_H_
+#define _STILL_IMAGE_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+		#include "Lib/StillImageCommands.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void StillImageHost_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+		void UnicodeToASCII(uint8_t* UnicodeString,
+		                    char* Buffer);
+		void ShowCommandError(uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                      bool ResponseCodeError);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..193228a20
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Still Image Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Still Image Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Still Image Class Specification \n
+ *        PIMA 15740 Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Still Image host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ *  application for implementing a Still Image host, for USB devices such as
+ *  digital cameras.
+ *
+ *  This demo will enumerate an attached USB Still Image device, print out its
+ *  information structure, open a session with the device and finally close the
+ *  session.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cbf1e2ca2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Still Image Host Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.si.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.si"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.si" caption="Still Image Host Demo (Low Level APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Still Image Host demo, implementing a Still Image host that can send and receive PIMA data to and from an attached device. This demo uses the Low Level LUFA APIs to manually implement a USB Class for demonstration purposes without using the simpler in-built LUFA Class Driver APIs.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="Still Image Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="StillImageHost.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="StillImageHost.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="ConfigDescriptor.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="StillImageHost.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="ConfigDescriptor.h"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/StillImageCommands.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/StillImageCommands.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/PIMACodes.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c050dc2cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Still Image Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1889fa57c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/StillImageHost/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = StillImageHost
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c ConfigDescriptor.c Lib/StillImageCommands.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d657a214
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..28b596bd6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,234 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
+ *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for a CDC interface descriptor containing bulk data IN and OUT endpoints, and an interrupt event endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the \ref CDCHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+
+	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* CDCControlInterface  = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint       = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataOUTEndpoint      = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  NotificationEndpoint = NULL;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return ControlError;
+	}
+
+	while (!(DataINEndpoint) || !(DataOUTEndpoint) || !(NotificationEndpoint))
+	{
+		/* See if we've found a likely compatible interface, and if there is an endpoint within that interface */
+		if (!(CDCControlInterface) ||
+		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+		                              DComp_NextCDCDataInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			/* Check if we have already found the control interface's notification endpoint or not */
+			if (NotificationEndpoint)
+			{
+				/* Get the next CDC data interface from the configuration descriptor */
+				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+											  DComp_NextCDCDataInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+				{
+					/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+					return NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+				}
+
+				/* Clear any found endpoints */
+				DataINEndpoint       = NULL;
+				DataOUTEndpoint      = NULL;
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				/* Get the next CDC control interface from the configuration descriptor */
+				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+											  DComp_NextCDCControlInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+				{
+					/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+					return NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+				}
+
+				/* Save the interface in case we need to refer back to it later */
+				CDCControlInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+				/* Clear any found endpoints */
+				NotificationEndpoint = NULL;
+			}
+
+			/* Skip the remainder of the loop as we have not found an endpoint yet */
+			continue;
+		}
+
+		/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* If the endpoint is a IN type endpoint */
+		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+		{
+			/* Check if the found endpoint is a interrupt or bulk type descriptor */
+			if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)
+			  NotificationEndpoint = EndpointData;
+			else
+			  DataINEndpoint = EndpointData;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			DataOUTEndpoint = EndpointData;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Configure the CDC data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(CDC_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress, DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize, 1);
+
+	/* Configure the CDC data OUT pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(CDC_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress, DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointSize, 1);
+
+	/* Configure the CDC notification pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(CDC_NOTIFICATION_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, NotificationEndpoint->EndpointAddress, NotificationEndpoint->EndpointSize, 1);
+	Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(NotificationEndpoint->PollingIntervalMS);
+
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct CDC control Class, Subclass and Protocol values.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextCDCControlInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		/* Check the CDC descriptor class, subclass and protocol, break out if correct control interface found */
+		if ((Interface->Class    == CDC_CSCP_CDCClass)    &&
+		    (Interface->SubClass == CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass) &&
+		    (Interface->Protocol == CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct CDC data Class, Subclass and Protocol values.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextCDCDataInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		/* Check the CDC descriptor class, subclass and protocol, break out if correct data interface found */
+		if ((Interface->Class    == CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass)   &&
+		    (Interface->SubClass == CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass) &&
+		    (Interface->Protocol == CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next bulk IN or OUT endpoint, or interrupt IN endpoint within the current interface,
+ *  aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint (so that it may be compared
+ *  using a different comparator to determine if it is another CDC class interface).
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextCDCDataInterfaceEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* Endpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		if (((Endpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_BULK) ||
+		    ((Endpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c587f3ac1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "VirtualSerialHost.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Pipe address for the CDC data IN pipe. */
+		#define CDC_DATA_IN_PIPE               (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1)
+
+		/** Pipe address for the CDC data OUT pipe. */
+		#define CDC_DATA_OUT_PIPE              (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2)
+
+		/** Pipe address for the CDC notification IN pipe. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_PIPE          (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the \ref ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum CDCHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoCompatibleInterfaceFound      = 4, /**< A compatible interface with the required endpoints was not found */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+		uint8_t DComp_NextCDCControlInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextCDCDataInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextCDCDataInterfaceEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3fef27b11
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,239 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the VirtualSerialHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "VirtualSerialHost.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "CDC Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		CDCHost_Task();
+
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "Device Attached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_GREEN "\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+	if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+	{
+		if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+		else
+		  puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+		printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"
+		                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	CDC_LineEncoding_t LineEncoding = { .BaudRateBPS = 9600,
+	                                    .CharFormat  = CDC_LINEENCODING_OneStopBit,
+	                                    .ParityType  = CDC_PARITY_None,
+	                                    .DataBits    = 8                            };
+
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+	{
+		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+		.bRequest      = CDC_REQ_SetLineEncoding,
+		.wValue        = 0,
+		.wIndex        = 0,
+		.wLength       = sizeof(LineEncoding),
+	};
+
+	/* Set the Line Encoding of the CDC interface within the device, so that it is ready to accept data */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+	if (USB_Host_SendControlRequest(&LineEncoding) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Control Error (Set Line Encoding).\r\n"
+		                         " -- Error Code: %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("CDC Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Task to read in data received from the attached CDC device and print it to the serial port.
+ */
+void CDCHost_Task(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Select the data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(CDC_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	/* Check to see if a packet has been received */
+	if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+	{
+		/* Re-freeze IN pipe after the packet has been received */
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+
+		/* Check if data is in the pipe */
+		if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+		{
+			/* Get the length of the pipe data, and create a new buffer to hold it */
+			uint16_t BufferLength = Pipe_BytesInPipe();
+			uint8_t  Buffer[BufferLength];
+
+			/* Read in the pipe data to the temporary buffer */
+			Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(Buffer, BufferLength, NULL);
+
+			/* Print out the buffer contents to the USART */
+			for (uint16_t BufferByte = 0; BufferByte < BufferLength; BufferByte++)
+			  putchar(Buffer[BufferByte]);
+		}
+
+		/* Clear the pipe after it is read, ready for the next packet */
+		Pipe_ClearIN();
+	}
+
+	/* Re-freeze IN pipe after use */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	/* Select and unfreeze the notification pipe */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(CDC_NOTIFICATION_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	/* Check if a packet has been received */
+	if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+	{
+		/* Discard the unused event notification */
+		Pipe_ClearIN();
+	}
+
+	/* Freeze notification IN pipe after use */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b84e66511
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for VirtualSerialHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _VIRTUALSERIAL_HOST_H_
+#define _VIRTUALSERIAL_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void CDCHost_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1e1f9f1ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/VirtualSerialHost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage CDC Host Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  CDC host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference application
+ *  for implementing a USB CDC host, for CDC devices using the standard ACM profile.
+ *
+ *  This demo prints out received CDC data through the serial port.
+ *
+ *  Note that this demo is only compatible with devices which report the correct CDC
+ *  and ACM class, subclass and protocol values. Most USB-Serial cables have vendor
+ *  specific features, thus use vendor-specific class/subclass/protocol codes to force
+ *  the user to use specialized drivers. This demo is not compatible with such devices.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cb0d568d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Virtual Serial CDC Host Demo (Low Level APIs)" id="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.cdc.example.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.cdc"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.demos.host.lowlevel.cdc" caption="Virtual Serial CDC Host Demo (Low Level APIs)">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Virtual Serial Host demo, implementing a CDC host that can send and receive data to and from an attached device. This demo uses the Low Level LUFA APIs to manually implement a USB Class for demonstration purposes without using the simpler in-built LUFA Class Driver APIs.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="CDC Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="VirtualSerialHost.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="VirtualSerialHost.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="ConfigDescriptor.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="VirtualSerialHost.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="ConfigDescriptor.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ac8ecfa62
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Virtual Serial Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0ac79fdd9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/VirtualSerialHost/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = VirtualSerialHost
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c ConfigDescriptor.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9e3919da4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/LowLevel/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+
+# Makefile to build all the LUFA Host Demos. Call with "make all" to
+# rebuild all Host demos.
+
+# Projects are pre-cleaned before each one is built, to ensure any
+# custom LUFA library build options are reflected in the compiled
+# code.
+
+PROJECT_DIRECTORIES := $(shell ls -d */)
+
+# This makefile is potentially infinitely recursive if something really bad
+# happens when determining the set of project directories - hard-abort if
+# more than 10 levels deep to avoid angry emails.
+ifeq ($(MAKELEVEL), 10)
+   $(error EMERGENCY ABORT: INFINITE RECURSION DETECTED)
+endif
+
+# Need to special-case building without a per-project object directory
+ifeq ($(OBJDIR),)
+   # If no target specified, force "clean all" and disallow parallel build
+   ifeq ($(MAKECMDGOALS),)
+      MAKECMDGOALS := clean all
+      .NOTPARALLEL:
+   endif
+
+   # If one of the targets is to build, force "clean" beforehand and disallow parallel build
+   ifneq ($(findstring all, $(MAKECMDGOALS)),)
+      MAKECMDGOALS := clean $(MAKECMDGOALS)
+      .NOTPARALLEL:
+   endif
+endif
+
+%: $(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES)
+	@echo . > /dev/null
+
+$(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES):
+	@$(MAKE) -C $@ $(MAKECMDGOALS)
+
+.PHONY: $(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES)
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3325e97d8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/Host/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+
+# Makefile to build all the LUFA Class Driver and Low Level Demos. Call with
+# "make all" to rebuild all demos of both types.
+
+# Projects are pre-cleaned before each one is built, to ensure any
+# custom LUFA library build options are reflected in the compiled
+# code.
+
+all:
+
+%:
+	$(MAKE) -C ClassDriver $@
+	$(MAKE) -C LowLevel $@
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..752f64ab1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Demos/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+
+# Makefile to build all the LUFA Demos. Call with "make all" to
+# rebuild all demos.
+
+# Projects are pre-cleaned before each one is built, to ensure any
+# custom LUFA library build options are reflected in the compiled
+# code.
+
+all:
+
+%:
+	$(MAKE) -C Device $@
+	$(MAKE) -C Host $@
+	$(MAKE) -C DualRole $@
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/HID_EEPROM_Loader/HID_EEPROM_Loader.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/HID_EEPROM_Loader/HID_EEPROM_Loader.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7ee46b4db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/HID_EEPROM_Loader/HID_EEPROM_Loader.c
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Special application to extract an EEPROM image stored in FLASH memory, and
+ *  copy it to the device EEPROM. This application is designed to be used with
+ *  the HID build system module of LUFA to program the EEPROM of a target device
+ *  that uses the HID bootloader protocol, which does not have native EEPROM
+ *  programming support.
+ */
+
+#include <avr/io.h>
+#include <avr/eeprom.h>
+#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+/* References to the binary EEPROM data linked in the AVR's FLASH memory space */
+extern const char _binary_InputEEData_bin_start[];
+extern const char _binary_InputEEData_bin_end[];
+extern const char _binary_InputEEData_bin_size[];
+
+/* Friendly names for the embedded binary data stored in FLASH memory space */
+#define InputEEData       _binary_InputEEData_bin_start
+#define InputEEData_size  ((int)_binary_InputEEData_bin_size)
+
+int main(void)
+{
+	/* Copy out the embedded EEPROM data from FLASH to EEPROM memory space */
+	for (uint16_t i = 0; i < InputEEData_size; i++)
+	  eeprom_update_byte((uint8_t*)i, pgm_read_byte(&InputEEData[i]));
+
+	/* Infinite loop once complete */
+	for (;;);
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/HID_EEPROM_Loader/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/HID_EEPROM_Loader/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9fd188c93
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/HID_EEPROM_Loader/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+#

+#             LUFA Library

+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.

+#

+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

+#           www.lufa-lib.org

+#

+# --------------------------------------

+#         LUFA Project Makefile.

+# --------------------------------------

+

+# Run "make help" for target help.

+

+MCU          = at90usb1287

+ARCH         = AVR8

+F_CPU        = 1000000

+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)

+OPTIMIZATION = s

+TARGET       = HID_EEPROM_Loader

+SRC          = $(TARGET).c

+LUFA_PATH    = ../../../LUFA

+CC_FLAGS     =

+LD_FLAGS     =

+OBJECT_FILES = InputEEData.o

+

+# Default target

+all:

+

+# Determine the AVR sub-architecture of the build main application object file

+FIND_AVR_SUBARCH = avr$(shell avr-objdump -f $(TARGET).o | grep architecture | cut -d':' -f3 | cut -d',' -f1)

+

+# Create a linkable object file with the input binary EEPROM data stored in the FLASH section

+InputEEData.o: InputEEData.bin $(TARGET).o $(MAKEFILE_LIST)

+	@echo $(MSG_OBJCPY_CMD) Converting \"$<\" to a object file \"$@\"

+	avr-objcopy -I binary -O elf32-avr -B $(call FIND_AVR_SUBARCH) --rename-section .data=.progmem.data,contents,alloc,readonly,data $< $@

+

+# Include LUFA build script makefiles

+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk

+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk

+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk

+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk

+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..943383418
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+
+LUFA_BUILD_MODULES         += ATPROGRAM
+LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS         += atprogram atprogram-ee
+LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS  += MCU TARGET
+LUFA_BUILD_OPTIONAL_VARS   += ATPROGRAM_PROGRAMMER ATPROGRAM_INTERFACE ATPROGRAM_PORT
+LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_VARS   +=
+LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_MACROS +=
+
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+#             LUFA ATPROGRAM Programmer Buildsystem Makefile Module.
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# DESCRIPTION:
+#   Provides a set of targets to re-program a device using the Atmel atprogram
+#   utility in AVR Studio 5.x and Atmel Studio 6.0 onwards.
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TARGETS:
+#
+#    atprogram                 - Program target FLASH with application using
+#                                atprogram
+#    atprogram-ee              - Program target EEPROM with application data
+#                                using atprogram
+#
+# MANDATORY PARAMETERS:
+#
+#    MCU                       - Microcontroller device model name
+#    TARGET                    - Application name
+#
+# OPTIONAL PARAMETERS:
+#
+#    ATPROGRAM_PROGRAMMER      - Name of programming hardware to use
+#    ATPROGRAM_INTERFACE       - Name of programming interface to use
+#    ATPROGRAM_PORT            - Name of communication port to use
+#
+# PROVIDED VARIABLES:
+#
+#    (None)
+#
+# PROVIDED MACROS:
+#
+#    (None)
+#
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+SHELL = /bin/sh
+
+ERROR_IF_UNSET   ?= $(if $(filter undefined, $(origin $(strip $(1)))), $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) value not set))
+ERROR_IF_EMPTY   ?= $(if $(strip $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option cannot be blank))
+ERROR_IF_NONBOOL ?= $(if $(filter Y N, $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option must be Y or N))
+
+# Default values of optionally user-supplied variables
+ATPROGRAM_PROGRAMMER ?= jtagice3
+ATPROGRAM_INTERFACE  ?= jtag
+ATPROGRAM_PORT       ?=
+
+# Sanity check user supplied values
+$(foreach MANDATORY_VAR, $(LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS), $(call ERROR_IF_UNSET, $(MANDATORY_VAR)))
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, MCU)
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, TARGET)
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, ATPROGRAM_PROGRAMMER)
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, ATPROGRAM_INTERFACE)
+
+# Output Messages
+MSG_ATPROGRAM_CMD    := ' [ATPRGRM] :'
+
+# Construct base atprogram command flags
+BASE_ATPROGRAM_FLAGS := --tool $(ATPROGRAM_PROGRAMMER) --interface $(ATPROGRAM_INTERFACE) --device $(MCU)
+ifneq ($(ATPROGRAM_PORT),)
+   BASE_ATPROGRAM_FLAGS += --port $(ATPROGRAM_PORT)
+endif
+
+# Construct the flags to use for the various memory spaces
+ifeq ($(ARCH), AVR8)
+   ATPROGRAM_FLASH_FLAGS  := --chiperase --flash
+   ATPROGRAM_EEPROM_FLAGS := --eeprom
+else ifeq ($(ARCH), XMEGA)
+   ATPROGRAM_FLASH_FLAGS  := --erase --flash
+   ATPROGRAM_EEPROM_FLAGS := --eeprom
+else ifeq ($(ARCH), UC3)
+   ATPROGRAM_FLASH_FLAGS  := --erase
+   ATPROGRAM_EEPROM_FLAGS := --eeprom
+else
+   $(error Unsupported architecture "$(ARCH)")
+endif
+
+# Programs in the target FLASH memory using ATPROGRAM
+atprogram: $(TARGET).elf $(MAKEFILE_LIST)
+	@echo $(MSG_ATPROGRAM_CMD) Programming device \"$(MCU)\" FLASH using \"$(ATPROGRAM_PROGRAMMER)\"
+	atprogram $(BASE_ATPROGRAM_FLAGS) program $(ATPROGRAM_FLASH_FLAGS) --file $<
+
+# Programs in the target EEPROM memory using ATPROGRAM
+atprogram-ee: $(TARGET).elf $(MAKEFILE_LIST)
+	@echo $(MSG_ATPROGRAM_CMD) Programming device \"$(MCU)\" EEPROM using \"$(ATPROGRAM_PROGRAMMER)\"
+	atprogram $(BASE_ATPROGRAM_FLAGS) program $(ATPROGRAM_EEPROM_FLAGS) --file $<
+
+# Phony build targets for this module
+.PHONY: atprogram atprogram-ee
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4eff4181c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+
+LUFA_BUILD_MODULES         += AVRDUDE
+LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS         += avrdude avrdude-ee
+LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS  += MCU TARGET
+LUFA_BUILD_OPTIONAL_VARS   += AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER AVRDUDE_PORT AVRDUDE_FLAGS
+LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_VARS   +=
+LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_MACROS +=
+
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+#             LUFA AVRDUDE Programmer Buildsystem Makefile Module.
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# DESCRIPTION:
+#   Provides a set of targets to re-program a device using the open source
+#   avr-dude utility.
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TARGETS:
+#
+#    avrdude                   - Program target FLASH with application using
+#                                avrdude
+#    avrdude-ee                - Program target EEPROM with application data
+#                                using avrdude
+#
+# MANDATORY PARAMETERS:
+#
+#    MCU                       - Microcontroller device model name
+#    TARGET                    - Application name
+#
+# OPTIONAL PARAMETERS:
+#
+#    AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER        - Name of programming hardware to use
+#    AVRDUDE_PORT              - Name of communication port to use
+#    AVRDUDE_FLAGS             - Flags to pass to avr-dude
+#
+# PROVIDED VARIABLES:
+#
+#    (None)
+#
+# PROVIDED MACROS:
+#
+#    (None)
+#
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+SHELL = /bin/sh
+
+ERROR_IF_UNSET   ?= $(if $(filter undefined, $(origin $(strip $(1)))), $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) value not set))
+ERROR_IF_EMPTY   ?= $(if $(strip $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option cannot be blank))
+ERROR_IF_NONBOOL ?= $(if $(filter Y N, $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option must be Y or N))
+
+# Default values of optionally user-supplied variables
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER ?= jtagicemkii
+AVRDUDE_PORT       ?= usb
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS      ?=
+
+# Sanity check user supplied values
+$(foreach MANDATORY_VAR, $(LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS), $(call ERROR_IF_UNSET, $(MANDATORY_VAR)))
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, MCU)
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, TARGET)
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, AVRDUDE_PORT)
+
+# Output Messages
+MSG_AVRDUDE_CMD    := ' [AVRDUDE] :'
+
+# Construct base avrdude command flags
+BASE_AVRDUDE_FLAGS := -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+
+# Programs in the target FLASH memory using AVRDUDE
+avrdude: $(TARGET).hex $(MAKEFILE_LIST)
+	@echo $(MSG_AVRDUDE_CMD) Programming device \"$(MCU)\" FLASH using \"$(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)\" on port \"$(AVRDUDE_PORT)\"
+	avrdude $(BASE_AVRDUDE_FLAGS) -U flash:w:$< $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS)
+
+# Programs in the target EEPROM memory using AVRDUDE
+avrdude-ee: $(TARGET).eep $(MAKEFILE_LIST)
+	@echo $(MSG_AVRDUDE_CMD) Programming device \"$(MCU)\" EEPROM using \"$(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)\" on port \"$(AVRDUDE_PORT)\"
+	avrdude $(BASE_AVRDUDE_FLAGS) -U eeprom:w:$< $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS)
+
+# Phony build targets for this module
+.PHONY: avrdude avrdude-ee
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/lufa_build.mk b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/lufa_build.mk
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b9b144aee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/lufa_build.mk
@@ -0,0 +1,351 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+
+LUFA_BUILD_MODULES         += BUILD
+LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS         += size symbol-sizes all lib elf bin hex lss clean mostlyclean
+LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS  += TARGET ARCH MCU SRC F_USB LUFA_PATH
+LUFA_BUILD_OPTIONAL_VARS   += BOARD OPTIMIZATION C_STANDARD CPP_STANDARD F_CPU C_FLAGS CPP_FLAGS ASM_FLAGS CC_FLAGS LD_FLAGS OBJDIR OBJECT_FILES DEBUG_TYPE DEBUG_LEVEL LINKER_RELAXATIONS COMPILER_PATH
+LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_VARS   +=
+LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_MACROS +=
+
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+#               LUFA GCC Compiler Buildsystem Makefile Module.
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# DESCRIPTION:
+#   Provides a set of targets to build a C, C++ and/or Assembly application
+#   via the AVR-GCC compiler.
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TARGETS:
+#
+#    size                      - List built application size
+#    symbol-sizes              - Print application symbols from the binary ELF
+#                                file as a list sorted by size in bytes
+#    all                       - Build application and list size
+#    lib                       - Build and archive source files into a library
+#    elf                       - Build application ELF debug object file
+#    bin                       - Build application BIN binary object file
+#    hex                       - Build application HEX object file
+#    lss                       - Build application LSS assembly listing file
+#    clean                     - Remove all project intermediary and binary
+#                                output files
+#    mostlyclean               - Remove intermediary output files, but
+#                                preserve binaries
+#    <filename>.s              - Compile C/C++ source file into an assembly file
+#                                for manual code inspection
+#
+# MANDATORY PARAMETERS:
+#
+#    TARGET                    - Application name
+#    ARCH                      - Device architecture name
+#    MCU                       - Microcontroller device model name
+#    SRC                       - List of input source files (*.c, *.cpp, *.S)
+#    F_USB                     - Speed of the input clock of the USB controller
+#                                in Hz
+#    LUFA_PATH                 - Path to the LUFA library core
+#
+# OPTIONAL PARAMETERS:
+#
+#    BOARD                     - LUFA board hardware
+#    OPTIMIZATION              - Optimization level
+#    C_STANDARD                - C Language Standard to use
+#    CPP_STANDARD              - C++ Language Standard to use
+#    F_CPU                     - Speed of the CPU, in Hz
+#    C_FLAGS                   - Flags to pass to the C compiler only
+#    CPP_FLAGS                 - Flags to pass to the C++ compiler only
+#    ASM_FLAGS                 - Flags to pass to the assembler only
+#    CC_FLAGS                  - Common flags to pass to the C/C++ compiler and
+#                                assembler
+#    LD_FLAGS                  - Flags to pass to the linker
+#    LINKER_RELAXATIONS        - Enable or disable linker relaxations to
+#                                decrease binary size (note: can cause link
+#                                failures on systems with an unpatched binutils)
+#    OBJDIR                    - Directory for the output object and dependency
+#                                files; if equal to ".", the output files will
+#                                be generated in the same folder as the sources
+#    OBJECT_FILES              - Extra object files to link in to the binaries
+#    DEBUG_FORMAT              - Format of the debugging information to
+#                                generate in the compiled object files
+#    DEBUG_LEVEL               - Level the debugging information to generate in
+#                                the compiled object files
+#    COMPILER_PATH             - Location of the GCC toolchain to use
+#
+# PROVIDED VARIABLES:
+#
+#    (None)
+#
+# PROVIDED MACROS:
+#
+#    (None)
+#
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+SHELL = /bin/sh
+
+ERROR_IF_UNSET   ?= $(if $(filter undefined, $(origin $(strip $(1)))), $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) value not set))
+ERROR_IF_EMPTY   ?= $(if $(strip $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option cannot be blank))
+ERROR_IF_NONBOOL ?= $(if $(filter Y N, $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option must be Y or N))
+
+# Default values of optionally user-supplied variables
+COMPILER_PATH      ?=
+BOARD              ?= NONE
+OPTIMIZATION       ?= s
+F_CPU              ?=
+C_STANDARD         ?= gnu99
+CPP_STANDARD       ?= gnu++98
+C_FLAGS            ?=
+CPP_FLAGS          ?=
+ASM_FLAGS          ?=
+CC_FLAGS           ?=
+OBJDIR             ?= .
+OBJECT_FILES       ?=
+DEBUG_FORMAT       ?= dwarf-2
+DEBUG_LEVEL        ?= 2
+LINKER_RELAXATIONS ?= Y
+
+# Sanity check user supplied values
+$(foreach MANDATORY_VAR, $(LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS), $(call ERROR_IF_UNSET, $(MANDATORY_VAR)))
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, MCU)
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, TARGET)
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, ARCH)
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, F_USB)
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, LUFA_PATH)
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, BOARD)
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, OPTIMIZATION)
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, C_STANDARD)
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, CPP_STANDARD)
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, OBJDIR)
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, DEBUG_FORMAT)
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, DEBUG_LEVEL)
+$(call ERROR_IF_NONBOOL, LINKER_RELAXATIONS)
+
+# Determine the utility prefix to use for the selected architecture
+ifeq ($(ARCH), AVR8)
+   CROSS        := $(COMPILER_PATH)avr
+else ifeq ($(ARCH), XMEGA)
+   CROSS        := $(COMPILER_PATH)avr
+   $(warning The XMEGA device support is currently EXPERIMENTAL (incomplete and/or non-functional), and is included for preview purposes only.)
+else ifeq ($(ARCH), UC3)
+   CROSS        := $(COMPILER_PATH)avr32
+   $(warning The UC3 device support is currently EXPERIMENTAL (incomplete and/or non-functional), and is included for preview purposes only.)
+else
+   $(error Unsupported architecture "$(ARCH)")
+endif
+
+# Output Messages
+MSG_INFO_MESSAGE := ' [INFO]    :'
+MSG_COMPILE_CMD  := ' [GCC]     :'
+MSG_ASSEMBLE_CMD := ' [GAS]     :'
+MSG_NM_CMD       := ' [NM]      :'
+MSG_REMOVE_CMD   := ' [RM]      :'
+MSG_LINK_CMD     := ' [LNK]     :'
+MSG_ARCHIVE_CMD  := ' [AR]      :'
+MSG_SIZE_CMD     := ' [SIZE]    :'
+MSG_OBJCPY_CMD   := ' [OBJCPY]  :'
+MSG_OBJDMP_CMD   := ' [OBJDMP]  :'
+
+# Convert input source file list to differentiate them by type
+C_SOURCE   := $(filter %.c, $(SRC))
+CPP_SOURCE := $(filter %.cpp, $(SRC))
+ASM_SOURCE := $(filter %.S, $(SRC))
+
+# Create a list of unknown source file types, if any are found throw an error
+UNKNOWN_SOURCE := $(filter-out $(C_SOURCE) $(CPP_SOURCE) $(ASM_SOURCE), $(SRC))
+ifneq ($(UNKNOWN_SOURCE),)
+   $(error Unknown input source file formats: $(UNKNOWN_SOURCE))
+endif
+
+# Convert input source filenames into a list of required output object files
+OBJECT_FILES += $(addsuffix .o, $(basename $(SRC)))
+
+# Check if an output object file directory was specified instead of the input file location
+ifneq ($(OBJDIR),.)
+   # Prefix all the object filenames with the output object file directory path
+   OBJECT_FILES    := $(addprefix $(patsubst %/,%,$(OBJDIR))/, $(notdir $(OBJECT_FILES)))
+
+   # Check if any object file (without path) appears more than once in the object file list
+   ifneq ($(words $(sort $(OBJECT_FILES))), $(words $(OBJECT_FILES)))
+       $(error Cannot build with OBJDIR parameter set - one or more object file name is not unique)
+   endif
+
+   # Create the output object file directory if it does not exist and add it to the virtual path list
+   $(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2> /dev/null)
+   VPATH           += $(dir $(SRC))
+endif
+
+# Create a list of dependency files from the list of object files
+DEPENDENCY_FILES := $(OBJECT_FILES:%.o=%.d)
+
+# Create a list of common flags to pass to the compiler/linker/assembler
+BASE_CC_FLAGS    := -pipe -g$(DEBUG_FORMAT) -g$(DEBUG_LEVEL)
+ifeq ($(ARCH), AVR8)
+   BASE_CC_FLAGS += -mmcu=$(MCU) -fshort-enums -fno-inline-small-functions -fpack-struct
+else ifeq ($(ARCH), XMEGA)
+   BASE_CC_FLAGS += -mmcu=$(MCU) -fshort-enums -fno-inline-small-functions -fpack-struct
+else ifeq ($(ARCH), UC3)
+   BASE_CC_FLAGS += -mpart=$(MCU:at32%=%) -masm-addr-pseudos
+endif
+BASE_CC_FLAGS += -Wall -fno-strict-aliasing -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -ffunction-sections
+BASE_CC_FLAGS += -I. -I$(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_PATH))/..
+BASE_CC_FLAGS += -DARCH=ARCH_$(ARCH) -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL
+ifneq ($(F_CPU),)
+   BASE_CC_FLAGS += -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+endif
+ifeq ($(LINKER_RELAXATIONS), Y)
+BASE_CC_FLAGS += -mrelax
+endif
+
+# This flag is required for bootloaders as GCC will emit invalid jump table
+# assembly code for devices with large amounts of flash; the jump table target
+# is extracted from FLASH without using the correct ELPM instruction, resulting
+# in a pseudo-random jump target.
+BASE_CC_FLAGS += -fno-jump-tables
+
+# Additional language specific compiler flags
+BASE_C_FLAGS   := -x c -O$(OPTIMIZATION) -std=$(C_STANDARD) -Wstrict-prototypes
+BASE_CPP_FLAGS := -x c++ -O$(OPTIMIZATION) -std=$(CPP_STANDARD)
+BASE_ASM_FLAGS := -x assembler-with-cpp
+
+# Create a list of flags to pass to the linker
+BASE_LD_FLAGS := -lm -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref -Wl,--gc-sections
+ifeq ($(LINKER_RELAXATIONS), Y)
+   BASE_LD_FLAGS += -Wl,--relax
+endif
+ifeq ($(ARCH), AVR8)
+   BASE_LD_FLAGS += -mmcu=$(MCU)
+else ifeq ($(ARCH), XMEGA)
+   BASE_LD_FLAGS += -mmcu=$(MCU)
+else ifeq ($(ARCH), UC3)
+   BASE_LD_FLAGS += -mpart=$(MCU:at32%=%) --rodata-writable --direct-data
+endif
+
+# Determine flags to pass to the size utility based on its reported features (only invoke if size target required)
+# and on an architecture where this non-standard patch is available
+ifneq ($(ARCH), UC3)
+size: SIZE_MCU_FLAG    := $(shell $(CROSS)-size --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+size: SIZE_FORMAT_FLAG := $(shell $(CROSS)-size --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+endif
+
+# Pre-build informational target, to give compiler and project name information when building
+build_begin:
+	@echo $(MSG_INFO_MESSAGE) Begin compilation of project \"$(TARGET)\"...
+	@echo ""
+	@$(CROSS)-gcc --version
+
+# Post-build informational target, to project name information when building has completed
+build_end:
+	@echo $(MSG_INFO_MESSAGE) Finished building project \"$(TARGET)\".
+
+# Prints size information of a compiled application (FLASH, RAM and EEPROM usages)
+size: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo $(MSG_SIZE_CMD) Determining size of \"$<\"
+	@echo ""
+	$(CROSS)-size $(SIZE_MCU_FLAG) $(SIZE_FORMAT_FLAG) $<
+
+# Prints size information on the symbols within a compiled application in decimal bytes
+symbol-sizes: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo $(MSG_NM_CMD) Extracting \"$<\" symbols with decimal byte sizes
+	$(CROSS)-nm --size-sort --demangle --radix=d $<
+
+# Cleans intermediary build files, leaving only the compiled application files
+mostlyclean:
+	@echo $(MSG_REMOVE_CMD) Removing object files of \"$(TARGET)\"
+	rm -f $(OBJECT_FILES)
+	@echo $(MSG_REMOVE_CMD) Removing dependency files of \"$(TARGET)\"
+	rm -f $(DEPENDENCY_FILES)
+
+# Cleans all build files, leaving only the original source code
+clean: mostlyclean
+	@echo $(MSG_REMOVE_CMD) Removing output files of \"$(TARGET)\"
+	rm -f $(TARGET).elf $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).bin $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET).map $(TARGET).lss $(TARGET).sym lib$(TARGET).a
+
+# Performs a complete build of the user application and prints size information afterwards
+all: build_begin elf hex bin lss sym size build_end
+
+# Helper targets, to build a specific type of output file without having to know the project target name
+lib: lib$(TARGET).a
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+bin: $(TARGET).bin
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+
+# Default target to *create* the user application's specified source files; if this rule is executed by
+# make, the input source file doesn't exist and an error needs to be presented to the user
+$(SRC):
+	$(error Source file does not exist: $@)
+
+# Compiles an input C source file and generates an assembly listing for it
+%.s: %.c $(MAKEFILE_LIST)
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILE_CMD) Generating assembly from C file \"$(notdir $<)\"
+	$(CROSS)-gcc -S $(BASE_CC_FLAGS) $(BASE_C_FLAGS) $(CC_FLAGS) $(C_FLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+# Compiles an input C++ source file and generates an assembly listing for it
+%.s: %.cpp $(MAKEFILE_LIST)
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILE_CMD) Generating assembly from C++ file \"$(notdir $<)\"
+	$(CROSS)-gcc -S $(BASE_CC_FLAGS) $(BASE_CPP_FLAGS) $(CC_FLAGS) $(CPP_FLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+# Compiles an input C source file and generates a linkable object file for it
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o: %.c $(MAKEFILE_LIST)
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILE_CMD) Compiling C file \"$(notdir $<)\"
+	$(CROSS)-gcc -c $(BASE_CC_FLAGS) $(BASE_C_FLAGS) $(CC_FLAGS) $(C_FLAGS) -MMD -MP -MF $(@:%.o=%.d) $< -o $@
+
+# Compiles an input C++ source file and generates a linkable object file for it
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o: %.cpp $(MAKEFILE_LIST)
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILE_CMD) Compiling C++ file \"$(notdir $<)\"
+	$(CROSS)-gcc -c $(BASE_CC_FLAGS) $(BASE_CPP_FLAGS) $(CC_FLAGS) $(CPP_FLAGS) -MMD -MP -MF $(@:%.o=%.d) $< -o $@
+
+# Assembles an input ASM source file and generates a linkable object file for it
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o: %.S $(MAKEFILE_LIST)
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLE_CMD) Assembling \"$(notdir $<)\"
+	$(CROSS)-gcc -c $(BASE_CC_FLAGS) $(BASE_ASM_FLAGS) $(CC_FLAGS) $(ASM_FLAGS) -MMD -MP -MF $(@:%.o=%.d) $< -o $@
+
+# Generates a library archive file from the user application, which can be linked into other applications
+.PRECIOUS  : $(OBJECT_FILES)
+.SECONDARY : %.a
+%.a: $(OBJECT_FILES)
+	@echo $(MSG_ARCHIVE_CMD) Archiving object files into \"$@\"
+	$(CROSS)-ar rcs $@ $(OBJECT_FILES)
+
+# Generates an ELF debug file from the user application, which can be further processed for FLASH and EEPROM data
+# files, or used for programming and debugging directly
+.PRECIOUS  : $(OBJECT_FILES)
+.SECONDARY : %.elf
+%.elf: $(OBJECT_FILES)
+	@echo $(MSG_LINK_CMD) Linking object files into \"$@\"
+	$(CROSS)-gcc $^ -o $@ $(BASE_LD_FLAGS) $(LD_FLAGS)
+
+# Extracts out the loadable FLASH memory data from the project ELF file, and creates an Intel HEX format file of it
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo $(MSG_OBJCPY_CMD) Extracting HEX file data from \"$<\"
+	$(CROSS)-objcopy -O ihex -R .eeprom -R .fuse -R .lock -R .signature $< $@
+
+# Extracts out the loadable FLASH memory data from the project ELF file, and creates an Binary format file of it
+%.bin: %.elf
+	@echo $(MSG_OBJCPY_CMD) Extracting BIN file data from \"$<\"
+	$(CROSS)-objcopy -O binary -R .eeprom -R .fuse -R .lock -R .signature $< $@
+
+# Extracts out the loadable EEPROM memory data from the project ELF file, and creates an Intel HEX format file of it
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo $(MSG_OBJCPY_CMD) Extracting EEP file data from \"$<\"
+	$(CROSS)-objcopy -O ihex -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Creates an assembly listing file from an input project ELF file, containing interleaved assembly and source data
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo $(MSG_OBJDMP_CMD) Extracting LSS file data from \"$<\"
+	$(CROSS)-objdump -h -d -S -z $< > $@
+
+# Creates a symbol file listing the loadable and discarded symbols from an input project ELF file
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo $(MSG_NM_CMD) Extracting SYM file data from \"$<\"
+	$(CROSS)-nm -n $< > $@
+
+# Include build dependency files
+-include $(DEPENDENCY_FILES)
+
+# Phony build targets for this module
+.PHONY: build_begin build_end size symbol-sizes lib elf hex lss clean mostlyclean
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/lufa_core.mk b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/lufa_core.mk
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7d974664b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/lufa_core.mk
@@ -0,0 +1,175 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+
+LUFA_BUILD_MODULES         += CORE
+LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS         += help list_targets list_modules list_mandatory list_optional list_provided list_macros
+LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS  +=
+LUFA_BUILD_OPTIONAL_VARS   +=
+LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_VARS   +=
+LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_MACROS +=
+
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+#               LUFA Core Build System Makefile Module.
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# DESCRIPTION:
+#   Provides a set of core build targets for the LUFA build system
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TARGETS:
+#
+#    help                      - Build system help
+#    list_targets              - List all build targets
+#    list_modules              - List all build modules
+#    list_mandatory            - List all mandatory make variables required by
+#                                the included build modules of the application
+#    list_optional             - List all optional make variables required by
+#                                the included build modules of the application
+#    list_provided             - List all provided make variables from the
+#                                included build modules of the application
+#    list_macros               - List all provided make macros from the
+#                                included build modules of the application
+#
+# MANDATORY PARAMETERS:
+#
+#    (None)
+#
+# OPTIONAL PARAMETERS:
+#
+#    (None)
+#
+# PROVIDED VARIABLES:
+#
+#    (None)
+#
+# PROVIDED MACROS:
+#
+#    (None)
+#
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+SHELL = /bin/sh
+
+# Converts a given input to a printable output using "(None)" if no items are in the list
+CONVERT_TO_PRINTABLE           = $(if $(strip $(1)), $(1), (None))
+
+
+# Build sorted and filtered lists of the included build module data
+SORTED_LUFA_BUILD_MODULES      = $(sort $(LUFA_BUILD_MODULES))
+SORTED_LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS      = $(sort $(LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS))
+SORTED_LUFA_MANDATORY_VARS     = $(sort $(LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS))
+SORTED_LUFA_OPTIONAL_VARS      = $(filter-out $(SORTED_LUFA_MANDATORY_VARS), $(sort $(LUFA_BUILD_OPTIONAL_VARS)))
+SORTED_LUFA_PROVIDED_VARS      = $(sort $(LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_VARS))
+SORTED_LUFA_PROVIDED_MACROS    = $(sort $(LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_MACROS))
+
+# Create printable versions of the sorted build module data (use "(None)" when no data is available)
+PRINTABLE_LUFA_BUILD_MODULES   = $(call CONVERT_TO_PRINTABLE, $(SORTED_LUFA_BUILD_MODULES))
+PRINTABLE_LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS   = $(call CONVERT_TO_PRINTABLE, $(SORTED_LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS))
+PRINTABLE_LUFA_MANDATORY_VARS  = $(call CONVERT_TO_PRINTABLE, $(SORTED_LUFA_MANDATORY_VARS))
+PRINTABLE_LUFA_OPTIONAL_VARS   = $(call CONVERT_TO_PRINTABLE, $(SORTED_LUFA_OPTIONAL_VARS))
+PRINTABLE_LUFA_PROVIDED_VARS   = $(call CONVERT_TO_PRINTABLE, $(SORTED_LUFA_PROVIDED_VARS))
+PRINTABLE_LUFA_PROVIDED_MACROS = $(call CONVERT_TO_PRINTABLE, $(SORTED_LUFA_PROVIDED_MACROS))
+
+help:
+	@echo "==================================================================="
+	@echo "                       LUFA Build System 2.0                       "
+	@echo "      (C) Dean Camera, 2014 { dean @ fourwalledcubicle . com }     "
+	@echo "==================================================================="
+	@echo "DESCRIPTION:                                                       "
+	@echo " This build system is a set of makefile modules for (GNU) Make, to "
+	@echo " provide a simple system for building LUFA powered applications.   "
+	@echo " Each makefile module can be included from within a user makefile, "
+	@echo " to expose the build rules documented in the comments at the top of"
+	@echo " each build module.                                                "
+	@echo "                                                                   "
+	@echo "USAGE:                                                             "
+	@echo " To execute a rule, define all variables indicated in the desired  "
+	@echo " module as a required parameter before including the build module  "
+	@echo " in your project makefile. Parameters marked as optional will      "
+	@echo " assume a default value in the modules if not user-assigned.       "
+	@echo "                                                                   "
+	@echo " By default the target output shows both a friendly summary, as    "
+	@echo " well as the actual invoked command. To suppress the output of the "
+	@echo " invoked commands and show only the friendly command output, run   "
+	@echo " make with the \"-s\" switch added before the target(s).           "
+	@echo "                                                                   "
+	@echo "SEE ALSO:                                                          "
+	@echo " For more information, see the 'Build System' chapter of the LUFA  "
+	@echo " project documentation.                                            "
+	@echo "==================================================================="
+	@echo "                                                                   "
+	@echo "  Currently used build system modules in this application:         "
+	@echo "                                                                   "
+	@printf " %b" "$(PRINTABLE_LUFA_BUILD_MODULES:%=   - %\n)"
+	@echo "                                                                   "
+	@echo "                                                                   "
+	@echo "  Currently available build targets in this application:           "
+	@echo "                                                                   "
+	@printf " %b" "$(PRINTABLE_LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS:%=   - %\n)"
+	@echo "                                                                   "
+	@echo "                                                                   "
+	@echo "  Mandatory variables required by the selected build Modules:      "
+	@echo "                                                                   "
+	@printf " %b" "$(PRINTABLE_LUFA_MANDATORY_VARS:%=   - %\n)"
+	@echo "                                                                   "
+	@echo "                                                                   "
+	@echo "  Optional variables required by the selected build Modules:       "
+	@echo "                                                                   "
+	@printf " %b" "$(PRINTABLE_LUFA_OPTIONAL_VARS:%=   - %\n)"
+	@echo "                                                                   "
+	@echo "                                                                   "
+	@echo "  Variables provided by the selected build Modules:                "
+	@echo "                                                                   "
+	@printf " %b" "$(PRINTABLE_LUFA_PROVIDED_VARS:%=   - %\n)"
+	@echo "                                                                   "
+	@echo "                                                                   "
+	@echo "  Macros provided by the selected build Modules:                   "
+	@echo "                                                                   "
+	@printf " %b" "$(PRINTABLE_LUFA_PROVIDED_MACROS:%=   - %\n)"
+	@echo "                                                                   "
+	@echo "==================================================================="
+	@echo "   The LUFA BuildSystem 2.0 - Powered By Positive Thinking (tm)    "
+	@echo "==================================================================="
+
+# Lists build modules included by the project makefile, in alphabetical order
+list_modules:
+	@echo Currently Used Build System Modules:
+	@printf " %b" "$(PRINTABLE_LUFA_BUILD_MODULES:%=   - %\n)"
+
+# Lists build targets included by the project makefile, in alphabetical order
+list_targets:
+	@echo Currently Available Build Targets:
+	@printf " %b" "$(PRINTABLE_LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS:%=   - %\n)"
+
+# Lists mandatory variables that must be set by the project makefile, in alphabetical order
+list_mandatory:
+	@echo Mandatory Variables for Included Modules:
+	@printf " %b" "$(PRINTABLE_LUFA_MANDATORY_VARS:%=   - %\n)"
+
+# Lists optional variables that must be set by the project makefile, in alphabetical order
+list_optional:
+	@echo Optional Variables for Included Modules:
+	@printf " %b" "$(PRINTABLE_LUFA_OPTIONAL_VARS:%=   - %\n)"
+
+# Lists variables provided by the included build modules, in alphabetical order
+list_provided:
+	@echo Variables Provided by the Included Modules:
+	@printf " %b" "$(PRINTABLE_LUFA_PROVIDED_VARS:%=   - %\n)"
+
+# Lists macros provided by the included build modules, in alphabetical order
+list_macros:
+	@echo Macros Provided by the Included Modules:
+	@printf " %b" "$(PRINTABLE_LUFA_PROVIDED_MACROS:%=   - %\n)"
+
+# Disable default in-built make rules (those that are needed are explicitly
+# defined, and doing so has performance benefits when recursively building)
+ifeq ($(filter -r,$(MAKEFLAGS)),)
+  MAKEFLAGS += -r
+endif
+.SUFFIXES:
+
+# Phony build targets for this module
+.PHONY: help list_modules list_targets list_mandatory list_optional list_provided list_macros
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0b9b61164
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
@@ -0,0 +1,107 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+
+LUFA_BUILD_MODULES         += CPPCHECK
+LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS         += cppcheck cppcheck-config
+LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS  += SRC
+LUFA_BUILD_OPTIONAL_VARS   += CPPCHECK_INCLUDES CPPCHECK_EXCLUDES CPPCHECK_MSG_TEMPLATE CPPCHECK_ENABLE \
+                              CPPCHECK_SUPPRESS CPPCHECK_FAIL_ON_WARNING CPPCHECK_QUIET CPPCHECK_FLAGS
+LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_VARS   +=
+LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_MACROS +=
+
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+#                LUFA CPPCheck Buildsystem Makefile Module.
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# DESCRIPTION:
+#   Provides a set of targets to scan a project with the free "cppcheck" static
+#   analysis tool, to check for code errors at runtime
+#   (see http://cppcheck.sourceforge.net).
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TARGETS:
+#
+#    cppcheck                  - Scan the project with CPPCheck
+#    cppcheck-config           - Use CPPCheck to look for missing include files
+#
+# MANDATORY PARAMETERS:
+#
+#    SRC                       - List of source files to statically analyze
+#
+# OPTIONAL PARAMETERS:
+#
+#    CPPCHECK_INCLUDES         - Extra include paths to search for missing
+#                                header files
+#    CPPCHECK_EXCLUDES         - Source file paths to exclude checking (can be
+#                                a path fragment if desired)
+#    CPPCHECK_MSG_TEMPLATE     - Template for cppcheck error and warning output
+#    CPPCHECK_ENABLE           - General cppcheck category checks to enable
+#    CPPCHECK_SUPPRESS         - Specific cppcheck warnings to disable by ID
+#    CPPCHECK_FAIL_ON_WARNING  - Set to Y to fail the build on cppcheck
+#                                warnings, N to continue even if warnings occur
+#    CPPCHECK_QUIET            - Enable cppcheck verbose or quiet output mode
+#    CPPCHECK_FLAGS            - Additional flags to pass to cppcheck
+#
+# PROVIDED VARIABLES:
+#
+#    (None)
+#
+# PROVIDED MACROS:
+#
+#    (None)
+#
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+SHELL = /bin/sh
+
+ERROR_IF_UNSET   ?= $(if $(filter undefined, $(origin $(strip $(1)))), $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) value not set))
+ERROR_IF_EMPTY   ?= $(if $(strip $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option cannot be blank))
+ERROR_IF_NONBOOL ?= $(if $(filter Y N, $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option must be Y or N))
+
+# Default values of optionally user-supplied variables
+CPPCHECK_INCLUDES            ?=
+CPPCHECK_EXCLUDES            ?=
+CPPCHECK_MSG_TEMPLATE        ?= {file}:{line}: {severity} ({id}): {message}
+CPPCHECK_ENABLE              ?= all
+CPPCHECK_SUPPRESS            ?= variableScope missingInclude
+CPPCHECK_FAIL_ON_WARNING     ?= Y
+CPPCHECK_QUIET               ?= Y
+CPPCHECK_FLAGS               ?=
+
+# Sanity check user supplied values
+$(foreach MANDATORY_VAR, $(LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS), $(call ERROR_IF_UNSET, $(MANDATORY_VAR)))
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, SRC)
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, CPPCHECK_MSG_TEMPLATE)
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, CPPCHECK_ENABLE)
+$(call ERROR_IF_NONBOOL, CPPCHECK_FAIL_ON_WARNING)
+$(call ERROR_IF_NONBOOL, CPPCHECK_QUIET)
+
+# Build a default argument list for cppcheck
+BASE_CPPCHECK_FLAGS := --template="$(CPPCHECK_MSG_TEMPLATE)" $(CPPCHECK_INCLUDES:%=-I%) $(CPPCHECK_EXCLUDES:%=-i%) --inline-suppr --force --std=c99
+
+# Sanity check parameters and construct additional command line arguments to cppcheck
+ifeq ($(CPPCHECK_FAIL_ON_WARNING), Y)
+   BASE_CPPCHECK_FLAGS += --error-exitcode=1
+endif
+ifeq ($(CPPCHECK_QUIET), Y)
+   BASE_CPPCHECK_FLAGS += --quiet
+endif
+
+# Output Messages
+MSG_CPPCHECK_CMD         := ' [CPPCHECK]:'
+
+# Checks the CPPCheck configuration as used in the user project, to determine if any paths are missing or invalid
+cppcheck-config: $(MAKEFILE_LIST)
+	@echo $(MSG_CPPCHECK_CMD) Checking cppcheck configuration check on source files
+	cppcheck $(BASE_CPPCHECK_FLAGS) --check-config $(CPPCHECK_FLAGS) $(SRC)
+
+# Runs a static analysis using CPPCheck to determine if there are any issues
+cppcheck: $(MAKEFILE_LIST)
+	@echo $(MSG_CPPCHECK_CMD) Performing static analysis on source files
+	cppcheck $(BASE_CPPCHECK_FLAGS) --enable=$(CPPCHECK_ENABLE) $(CPPCHECK_SUPPRESS:%=--suppress=%) $(CPPCHECK_FLAGS) $(SRC)
+
+# Phony build targets for this module
+.PHONY: cppcheck-config cppcheck
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/lufa_dfu.mk b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..956adc8ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+
+LUFA_BUILD_MODULES         += DFU
+LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS         += flip flip-ee dfu dfu-ee
+LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS  += MCU TARGET
+LUFA_BUILD_OPTIONAL_VARS   +=
+LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_VARS   +=
+LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_MACROS +=
+
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+#               LUFA DFU Bootloader Buildsystem Makefile Module.
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# DESCRIPTION:
+#   Provides a set of targets to re-program a device currently running a DFU
+#   class bootloader with a project's FLASH and EEPROM files.
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TARGETS:
+#
+#    flip                      - Program FLASH into target via Atmel FLIP
+#    flip-ee                   - Program EEPROM into target via Atmel FLIP
+#    dfu                       - Program FLASH into target via dfu-programmer
+#    dfu-ee                    - Program EEPROM into target via dfu-programmer
+#
+# MANDATORY PARAMETERS:
+#
+#    MCU                       - Microcontroller device model name
+#    TARGET                    - Application name
+#
+# OPTIONAL PARAMETERS:
+#
+#    (None)
+#
+# PROVIDED VARIABLES:
+#
+#    (None)
+#
+# PROVIDED MACROS:
+#
+#    (None)
+#
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+SHELL = /bin/sh
+
+ERROR_IF_UNSET   ?= $(if $(filter undefined, $(origin $(strip $(1)))), $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) value not set))
+ERROR_IF_EMPTY   ?= $(if $(strip $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option cannot be blank))
+ERROR_IF_NONBOOL ?= $(if $(filter Y N, $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option must be Y or N))
+
+# Sanity-check values of mandatory user-supplied variables
+$(foreach MANDATORY_VAR, $(LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS), $(call ERROR_IF_UNSET, $(MANDATORY_VAR)))
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, MCU)
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, TARGET)
+
+# Output Messages
+MSG_COPY_CMD   := ' [CP]      :'
+MSG_REMOVE_CMD := ' [RM]      :'
+MSG_DFU_CMD    := ' [DFU]     :'
+
+# Programs in the target FLASH memory using BATCHISP, the command line tool used by FLIP
+flip: $(TARGET).hex $(MAKEFILE_LIST)
+	@echo $(MSG_DFU_CMD) Programming FLASH with batchisp using \"$<\"
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f loadbuffer $< program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+# Programs in the target EEPROM memory using BATCHISP, the command line tool used by FLIP
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).eep $(MAKEFILE_LIST)
+	@echo $(MSG_COPY_CMD) Copying EEP file to temporary file \"$<.hex\"
+	cp $< $<.hex
+	@echo $(MSG_DFU_CMD) Programming EEPROM with batchisp using \"$<.hex\"
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $<.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	@echo $(MSG_REMOVE_CMD) Removing temporary file \"$<.hex\"
+	rm $<.hex
+
+# Programs in the target FLASH memory using DFU-PROGRAMMER
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex $(MAKEFILE_LIST)
+	@echo $(MSG_DFU_CMD) Programming FLASH with dfu-programmer using \"$<\"
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash $<
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+# Programs in the target EEPROM memory using DFU-PROGRAMMER
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).eep $(MAKEFILE_LIST)
+	@echo $(MSG_DFU_CMD) Programming EEPROM with dfu-programmer using \"$<\"
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom-flash $<
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+# Phony build targets for this module
+.PHONY: flip flip-ee dfu dfu-ee
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..babf28798
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+
+LUFA_BUILD_MODULES         += DOXYGEN
+LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS         += doxygen doxygen_upgrade doxygen_create
+LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS  += LUFA_PATH
+LUFA_BUILD_OPTIONAL_VARS   += DOXYGEN_CONF DOXYGEN_FAIL_ON_WARNING DOXYGEN_OVERRIDE_PARAMS
+LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_VARS   +=
+LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_MACROS +=
+
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+#                 LUFA Doxygen Buildsystem Makefile Module.
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# DESCRIPTION:
+#   Provides a set of targets to automatically build Doxygen documentation for
+#   a project (see www.doxygen.org).
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TARGETS:
+#
+#    doxygen                   - Build Doxygen Documentation
+#    doxygen_create            - Create a new Doxygen configuration file using
+#                                the latest template
+#    doxygen_upgrade           - Upgrade an existing Doxygen configuration file
+#                                to the latest template
+#
+# MANDATORY PARAMETERS:
+#
+#    LUFA_PATH                 - Path to the LUFA library core
+#
+# OPTIONAL PARAMETERS:
+#
+#    DOXYGEN_CONF              - Doxygen configuration filename
+#    DOXYGEN_FAIL_ON_WARNING   - Set to Y to fail the build on Doxygen warnings,
+#                                N to continue even if warnings occur
+#    DOXYGEN_OVERRIDE_PARAMS   - Parameters to override in the doxygen
+#                                configuration file
+# PROVIDED VARIABLES:
+#
+#    (None)
+#
+# PROVIDED MACROS:
+#
+#    (None)
+#
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+SHELL = /bin/sh
+
+ERROR_IF_UNSET   ?= $(if $(filter undefined, $(origin $(strip $(1)))), $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) value not set))
+ERROR_IF_EMPTY   ?= $(if $(strip $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option cannot be blank))
+ERROR_IF_NONBOOL ?= $(if $(filter Y N, $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option must be Y or N))
+
+# Default values of optionally user-supplied variables
+DOXYGEN_CONF            ?= doxyfile
+DOXYGEN_FAIL_ON_WARNING ?= Y
+DOXYGEN_OVERRIDE_PARAMS ?= QUIET=YES HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET=$(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_PATH))/DoxygenPages/Style/Style.css
+
+# Sanity check user supplied values
+$(foreach MANDATORY_VAR, $(LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS), $(call ERROR_IF_UNSET, $(MANDATORY_VAR)))
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, DOXYGEN_CONF)
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, LUFA_PATH)
+$(call ERROR_IF_NONBOOL, DOXYGEN_FAIL_ON_WARNING)
+
+# Output Messages
+MSG_DOXYGEN_CMD         := ' [DOXYGEN] :'
+
+# Determine Doxygen invocation command
+BASE_DOXYGEN_CMD := ( cat $(DOXYGEN_CONF) $(DOXYGEN_OVERRIDE_PARAMS:%=; echo "%") ) | doxygen -
+ifeq ($(DOXYGEN_FAIL_ON_WARNING), Y)
+   DOXYGEN_CMD := if ( $(BASE_DOXYGEN_CMD) 2>&1 | grep -v "warning: ignoring unsupported tag" ;); then exit 1; fi;
+else
+   DOXYGEN_CMD := $(BASE_DOXYGEN_CMD)
+endif
+
+# Error if the specified Doxygen configuration file does not exist
+$(DOXYGEN_CONF):
+	$(error Doxygen configuration file $@ does not exist)
+
+# Builds the project documentation using the specified configuration file and the DOXYGEN tool
+doxygen: $(DOXYGEN_CONF) $(MAKEFILE_LIST)
+	@echo $(MSG_DOXYGEN_CMD) Configuration file \"$(DOXYGEN_CONF)\" with parameters \"$(DOXYGEN_OVERRIDE_PARAMS)\"
+	$(DOXYGEN_CMD)
+
+# Upgrades an existing Doxygen configuration file to the latest Doxygen template, preserving settings
+doxygen_upgrade: $(DOXYGEN_CONF) $(MAKEFILE_LIST)
+	@echo $(MSG_DOXYGEN_CMD) Upgrading configuration file \"$(DOXYGEN_CONF)\" with latest template
+	doxygen -u $(DOXYGEN_CONF) > /dev/null
+
+# Creates a new Doxygen configuration file with the set file name
+doxygen_create: $(MAKEFILE_LIST)
+	@echo $(MSG_DOXYGEN_CMD) Creating new configuration file \"$(DOXYGEN_CONF)\" with latest template
+	doxygen -g $(DOXYGEN_CONF) > /dev/null
+
+# Phony build targets for this module
+.PHONY: doxygen doxygen_upgrade doxygen_create
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/lufa_hid.mk b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/lufa_hid.mk
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e79b7bf4d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/lufa_hid.mk
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+
+LUFA_BUILD_MODULES         += HID
+LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS         += hid hid-ee teensy teensy-ee
+LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS  += MCU TARGET
+LUFA_BUILD_OPTIONAL_VARS   +=
+LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_VARS   +=
+LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_MACROS +=
+
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+#               LUFA HID Bootloader Buildsystem Makefile Module.
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# DESCRIPTION:
+#   Provides a set of targets to re-program a device currently running a HID
+#   class bootloader with a project's FLASH files.
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TARGETS:
+#
+#    hid                       - Program FLASH into target via
+#                                hid_bootloader_cli
+#    hid-ee                    - Program EEPROM into target via a temporary
+#                                AVR application and hid_bootloader_cli
+#    teensy                    - Program FLASH into target via
+#                                teensy_loader_cli
+#    teensy-ee                 - Program EEPROM into target via a temporary
+#                                AVR application and teensy_loader_cli
+#
+# MANDATORY PARAMETERS:
+#
+#    MCU                       - Microcontroller device model name
+#    TARGET                    - Application name
+#
+# OPTIONAL PARAMETERS:
+#
+#    (None)
+#
+# PROVIDED VARIABLES:
+#
+#    (None)
+#
+# PROVIDED MACROS:
+#
+#    (None)
+#
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+SHELL = /bin/sh
+
+LUFA_MODULE_PATH := $(patsubst %/,%,$(dir $(lastword $(MAKEFILE_LIST))))
+
+ERROR_IF_UNSET   ?= $(if $(filter undefined, $(origin $(strip $(1)))), $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) value not set))
+ERROR_IF_EMPTY   ?= $(if $(strip $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option cannot be blank))
+ERROR_IF_NONBOOL ?= $(if $(filter Y N, $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option must be Y or N))
+
+# Sanity-check values of mandatory user-supplied variables
+$(foreach MANDATORY_VAR, $(LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS), $(call ERROR_IF_UNSET, $(MANDATORY_VAR)))
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, MCU)
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, TARGET)
+
+# Output Messages
+MSG_HID_BOOTLOADER_CMD := ' [HID]     :'
+MSG_OBJCPY_CMD         := ' [OBJCPY]  :'
+MSG_MAKE_CMD           := ' [MAKE]    :'
+
+# Programs in the target FLASH memory using the HID_BOOTLOADER_CLI tool
+hid: $(TARGET).hex $(MAKEFILE_LIST)
+	@echo $(MSG_HID_BOOTLOADER_CMD) Programming FLASH with hid_bootloader_cli using \"$<\"
+	hid_bootloader_cli -mmcu=$(MCU) -v $<
+
+# Programs in the target EEPROM memory using the HID_BOOTLOADER_CLI tool (note: clears target FLASH memory)
+hid-ee: $(TARGET).eep $(MAKEFILE_LIST)
+	@echo $(MSG_OBJCPY_CMD) Converting \"$<\" to a binary file \"InputEEData.bin\"
+	avr-objcopy -I ihex -O binary $< $(LUFA_MODULE_PATH)/HID_EEPROM_Loader/InputEEData.bin
+	@echo $(MSG_MAKE_CMD) Making EEPROM loader application for \"$<\"
+	$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_MODULE_PATH)/HID_EEPROM_Loader/ MCU=$(MCU) clean hid
+
+# Programs in the target FLASH memory using the TEENSY_BOOTLOADER_CLI tool
+teensy: $(TARGET).hex $(MAKEFILE_LIST)
+	@echo $(MSG_HID_BOOTLOADER_CMD) Programming FLASH with teensy_loader_cli using \"$<\"
+	teensy_loader_cli -mmcu=$(MCU) -v $<
+
+# Programs in the target EEPROM memory using the TEENSY_BOOTLOADER_CLI tool (note: clears target FLASH memory)
+teensy-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(MAKEFILE_LIST)
+	@echo $(MSG_OBJCPY_CMD) Converting \"$<\" to a binary file \"InputEEData.bin\"
+	avr-objcopy -I ihex -O binary $< $(LUFA_MODULE_PATH)/HID_EEPROM_Loader/InputEEData.bin
+	@echo $(MSG_MAKE_CMD) Making EEPROM loader application for \"$<\"
+	$(MAKE) -s -C $(LUFA_MODULE_PATH)/HID_EEPROM_Loader/ MCU=$(MCU) clean teensy
+
+# Phony build targets for this module
+.PHONY: hid hid-ee teensy teensy-ee
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/lufa_sources.mk b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/lufa_sources.mk
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cc3492ecc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Build/lufa_sources.mk
@@ -0,0 +1,144 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+
+LUFA_BUILD_MODULES         += SOURCES
+LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS         +=
+LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS  += LUFA_PATH ARCH
+LUFA_BUILD_OPTIONAL_VARS   +=
+LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_VARS   += LUFA_SRC_USB_DEVICE LUFA_SRC_USB_HOST    \
+                              LUFA_SRC_USB LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS_DEVICE    \
+                              LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS_HOST LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS \
+                              LUFA_SRC_TEMPERATURE LUFA_SRC_SERIAL     \
+                              LUFA_SRC_TWI LUFA_SRC_PLATFORM
+LUFA_BUILD_PROVIDED_MACROS +=
+
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+#               LUFA Sources Buildsystem Makefile Module.
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# DESCRIPTION:
+#   Provides a set of makefile variables for the various LUFA module sources.
+#   Once included, the sources required to use a given LUFA module will become
+#   available using the makefile variable names listed in the LUFA project
+#   documentation.
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# TARGETS:
+#
+#    (None)
+#
+# MANDATORY PARAMETERS:
+#
+#    LUFA_PATH                 - Path to the LUFA library core
+#    ARCH                      - Device architecture name
+#
+# OPTIONAL PARAMETERS:
+#
+#    (None)
+#
+# PROVIDED VARIABLES:
+#
+#    LUFA_SRC_USB_DEVICE       - List of LUFA USB driver source files required
+#                                for USB Device mode only
+#    LUFA_SRC_USB_HOST         - List of LUFA USB driver source files required
+#                                for USB Host mode only
+#    LUFA_SRC_USB              - List of LUFA USB driver source files for all
+#                                USB modes
+#    LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS_DEVICE  - List of LUFA USB Class driver source files for
+#                                USB Device mode only
+#    LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS_HOST    - List of LUFA USB Class driver source files for
+#                                USB Host mode only
+#    LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS         - List of LUFA USB Class driver source files for
+#                                all USB modes
+#    LUFA_SRC_TEMPERATURE      - List of LUFA temperature sensor driver source
+#                                files
+#    LUFA_SRC_SERIAL           - List of LUFA Serial U(S)ART driver source files
+#    LUFA_SRC_TWI              - List of LUFA TWI driver source files
+#    LUFA_SRC_PLATFORM         - List of LUFA architecture specific platform
+#                                management source files
+#
+# PROVIDED MACROS:
+#
+#    (None)
+#
+# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+SHELL = /bin/sh
+
+ERROR_IF_UNSET   ?= $(if $(filter undefined, $(origin $(strip $(1)))), $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) value not set))
+ERROR_IF_EMPTY   ?= $(if $(strip $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option cannot be blank))
+ERROR_IF_NONBOOL ?= $(if $(filter Y N, $($(strip $(1)))), , $(error Makefile $(strip $(1)) option must be Y or N))
+
+# Sanity check user supplied values
+$(foreach MANDATORY_VAR, $(LUFA_BUILD_MANDATORY_VARS), $(call ERROR_IF_UNSET, $(MANDATORY_VAR)))
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, LUFA_PATH)
+$(call ERROR_IF_EMPTY, ARCH)
+
+# Allow LUFA_ROOT_PATH to be overridden elsewhere to support legacy LUFA makefiles
+LUFA_ROOT_PATH ?= $(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_PATH))
+
+# Construct LUFA module source variables
+LUFA_SRC_USB_COMMON      := $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Core/$(ARCH)/USBController_$(ARCH).c   \
+                            $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Core/$(ARCH)/USBInterrupt_$(ARCH).c    \
+                            $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Core/ConfigDescriptors.c               \
+                            $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Core/Events.c                          \
+                            $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Core/USBTask.c                         \
+                            $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDParser.c               \
+
+LUFA_SRC_USB_HOST        := $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Core/$(ARCH)/Host_$(ARCH).c            \
+                            $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Core/$(ARCH)/Pipe_$(ARCH).c            \
+                            $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Core/$(ARCH)/PipeStream_$(ARCH).c      \
+                            $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Core/HostStandardReq.c                 \
+                            $(LUFA_SRC_USB_COMMON)
+
+LUFA_SRC_USB_DEVICE      := $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Core/$(ARCH)/Device_$(ARCH).c          \
+                            $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Core/$(ARCH)/Endpoint_$(ARCH).c        \
+                            $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Core/$(ARCH)/EndpointStream_$(ARCH).c  \
+                            $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Core/DeviceStandardReq.c               \
+                            $(LUFA_SRC_USB_COMMON)
+
+LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS_DEVICE := $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/AudioClassDevice.c        \
+                            $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDCClassDevice.c          \
+                            $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HIDClassDevice.c          \
+                            $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorageClassDevice.c  \
+                            $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDIClassDevice.c         \
+                            $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/PrinterClassDevice.c      \
+                            $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDISClassDevice.c        \
+
+LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS_HOST   := $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AndroidAccessoryClassHost.c \
+                            $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AudioClassHost.c            \
+                            $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDCClassHost.c              \
+                            $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDClassHost.c              \
+                            $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorageClassHost.c      \
+                            $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDIClassHost.c             \
+                            $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/PrinterClassHost.c          \
+                            $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDISClassHost.c            \
+                            $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImageClassHost.c
+
+LUFA_SRC_USB             := $(sort $(LUFA_SRC_USB_COMMON) $(LUFA_SRC_USB_HOST) $(LUFA_SRC_USB_DEVICE))
+
+LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS        := $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS_DEVICE) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS_HOST)
+
+LUFA_SRC_TEMPERATURE     := $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/Board/Temperature.c
+
+LUFA_SRC_SERIAL          := $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/Peripheral/$(ARCH)/Serial_$(ARCH).c
+
+LUFA_SRC_TWI             := $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Drivers/Peripheral/$(ARCH)/TWI_$(ARCH).c
+
+ifeq ($(ARCH), UC3)
+   LUFA_SRC_PLATFORM     := $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Platform/UC3/Exception.S   \
+                            $(LUFA_ROOT_PATH)/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.c
+else
+   LUFA_SRC_PLATFORM     :=
+endif
+
+# Build a list of all available module sources
+LUFA_SRC_ALL_FILES   := $(LUFA_SRC_USB)            \
+                        $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)       \
+                        $(LUFA_SRC_TEMPERATURE)    \
+                        $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)         \
+                        $(LUFA_SRC_TWI)            \
+                        $(LUFA_SRC_PLATFORM)
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DeviceTemplate/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DeviceTemplate/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..71cebe891
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DeviceTemplate/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,180 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor describes the overall device
+ *  characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size
+ *  and the number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the
+ *  USB host when the enumeration process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(2,0,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = 64,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x0000,
+	.ProductID              = 0x0000,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,2),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = 1
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize   = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces          = 0,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber      = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex    = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes         = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption      = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(14), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Your Name Here"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(15), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA USB Device"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress
+									#if defined(HAS_MULTIPLE_DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS_SPACES)
+									, uint8_t* const DescriptorMemorySpace
+									#endif
+									)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	#if defined(HAS_MULTIPLE_DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS_SPACES)
+	*DescriptorMemorySpace = MEMSPACE_RAM;
+	#endif
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DeviceTemplate/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DeviceTemplate/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6d8145d0c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DeviceTemplate/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+  /* Macros: */
+    #if (defined(ARCH_HAS_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE) && \
+         !(defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS)))
+      #define HAS_MULTIPLE_DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS_SPACES
+    #endif
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DeviceTemplate/DeviceApplication.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DeviceTemplate/DeviceApplication.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ddaa9d089
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DeviceTemplate/DeviceApplication.c
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the USB device application. This file contains the
+ *  main tasks of the application and is responsible for the initial
+ *  application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "DeviceApplication.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+		/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+		MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+		wdt_disable();
+
+		/* Disable clock division */
+		clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+		/* Hardware Initialization */
+		USB_Init(USB_MODE_Device, USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL);
+	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+		/* Start the PLL to multiply the 2MHz RC oscillator to 32MHz and switch the CPU core to run from it */
+		XMEGACLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ, 2000000, F_CPU);
+		XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL);
+
+		/* Start the 32MHz internal RC oscillator and start the DFLL to increase it to 48MHz using the USB SOF as a reference */
+		XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);
+		XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF, F_USB);
+
+		PMIC.CTRL = PMIC_LOLVLEN_bm | PMIC_MEDLVLEN_bm | PMIC_HILVLEN_bm;
+
+		/* Hardware Initialization */
+		USB_Init(USB_OPT_RC32MCLKSRC | USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH);
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DeviceTemplate/DeviceApplication.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DeviceTemplate/DeviceApplication.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..325176c53
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DeviceTemplate/DeviceApplication.h
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DeviceApplication.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _USB_DEVICE_APPLICATION_H_
+#define _USB_DEVICE_APPLICATION_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DeviceTemplate/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DeviceTemplate/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fd65db283
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DeviceTemplate/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="USB Device Template" id="lufa.templates.device.project.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.templates.device"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8_template"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<project caption="USB Device Template" id="lufa.templates.device.project.xmega">

+		<require idref="lufa.templates.device"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.xmega"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8_template"/>

+

+		<device-support value="atxmega256a3bu"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="a3bu_xplained"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="32000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="48000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.templates.device" caption="USB Device Template">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Template for a LUFA USB device mode application.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="Template Projects"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="DeviceApplication.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="DeviceApplication.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value=".."/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="../LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DriverStubs/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DriverStubs/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5a1e58364
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DriverStubs/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Custom Board Hardware Information Driver (Template)
+ *
+ *  This is a stub driver header file, for implementing custom board
+ *  layout hardware with compatible LUFA board specific drivers. If
+ *  the library is configured to use the BOARD_USER board mode, this
+ *  driver file should be completed and copied into the "/Board/" folder
+ *  inside the application's folder.
+ *
+ *  This stub is for the board-specific component of the LUFA Board Hardware
+ *  information driver.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_USER_H__
+#define __BOARD_USER_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		// TODO: Add any required includes here
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware Buttons mounted if defined. */
+//			#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+
+			/** Indicates the board has a hardware Dataflash mounted if defined. */
+//			#define BOARD_HAS_DATAFLASH
+
+			/** Indicates the board has a hardware Joystick mounted if defined. */
+//			#define BOARD_HAS_JOYSTICK
+
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted if defined. */
+//			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DriverStubs/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DriverStubs/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b3c2f2b42
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DriverStubs/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Custom Board Button Hardware Driver (Template)
+ *
+ *  This is a stub driver header file, for implementing custom board
+ *  layout hardware with compatible LUFA board specific drivers. If
+ *  the library is configured to use the BOARD_USER board mode, this
+ *  driver file should be completed and copied into the "/Board/" folder
+ *  inside the application's folder.
+ *
+ *  This stub is for the board-specific component of the LUFA Buttons driver,
+ *  for the control of physical board-mounted GPIO pushbuttons.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_USER_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_USER_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		// TODO: Add any required includes here
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1          // TODO: Add mask for first board button here
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				// TODO: Initialize the appropriate port pins as an inputs here, with pull-ups
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				// TODO: Clear the appropriate port pins as high impedance inputs here
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				// TODO: Return current button status here, debounced if required
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DriverStubs/Dataflash.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DriverStubs/Dataflash.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..83acb2f12
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DriverStubs/Dataflash.h
@@ -0,0 +1,223 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Custom Board Dataflash Hardware Driver (Template)
+ *
+ *  This is a stub driver header file, for implementing custom board
+ *  layout hardware with compatible LUFA board specific drivers. If
+ *  the library is configured to use the BOARD_USER board mode, this
+ *  driver file should be completed and copied into the "/Board/" folder
+ *  inside the application's folder.
+ *
+ *  This stub is for the board-specific component of the LUFA Dataflash
+ *  driver.
+*/
+
+#ifndef __DATAFLASH_USER_H__
+#define __DATAFLASH_USER_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		// TODO: Add any required includes here
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK                // TODO: Replace this with a mask of all the /CS pins of all Dataflashes
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR                 // TODO: Replace with the DDR register name for the board's Dataflash ICs
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT                // TODO: Replace with the PORT register name for the board's Dataflash ICs
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS                 1 // TODO: Replace with the number of Dataflashes on the board, max 2
+
+			/** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP                    0
+
+			/** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP1                      // TODO: Replace with mask with the pin attached to the first Dataflash /CS set
+
+			/** Mask for the second dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP2                      // TODO: Replace with mask with the pin attached to the second Dataflash /CS set
+
+			/** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash ICs. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE                  // TODO: Replace with the page size for the Dataflash ICs
+
+			/** Total number of pages inside each of the board's dataflash ICs. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                      // TODO: Replace with the total number of pages inside one of the Dataflash ICs
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			/** Initializes the dataflash driver so that commands and data may be sent to an attached dataflash IC.
+			 *  The microcontroller's SPI driver MUST be initialized before any of the dataflash commands are used.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_Init(void)
+			{
+				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR  |= DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;
+				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT |= DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns a byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash
+			 *
+			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+				// TODO
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and ignores the next byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+				// TODO
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a dummy byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns the next byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void)
+			{
+				// TODO
+			}
+
+			/** Determines the currently selected dataflash chip.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Mask of the currently selected Dataflash chip, either \ref DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP if no chip is selected
+			 *          or a DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is the chip number).
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void)
+			{
+				return (~DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT & DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK);
+			}
+
+			/** Selects the given dataflash chip.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in]  ChipMask  Mask of the Dataflash IC to select, in the form of a \c DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is
+			 *              the chip number).
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask)
+			{
+				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT = ((DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT | DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK) & ~ChipMask);
+			}
+
+			/** Deselects the current dataflash chip, so that no dataflash is selected. */
+			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void)
+			{
+				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP);
+			}
+
+			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to
+			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one
+			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside
+			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs
+			 *  are deselected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from
+			 *                          0 to ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress)
+			{
+				Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+				if (PageAddress >= (DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  return;
+
+				#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+					if (PageAddress & 0x01)
+					  Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+					else
+					  Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+				#else
+					Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+				#endif
+			}
+
+			/** Toggles the select line of the currently selected dataflash IC, so that it is ready to receive
+			 *  a new command.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(void)
+			{
+				uint8_t SelectedChipMask = Dataflash_GetSelectedChip();
+
+				Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+				Dataflash_SelectChip(SelectedChipMask);
+			}
+
+			/** Spin-loops while the currently selected dataflash is busy executing a command, such as a main
+			 *  memory page program or main memory to buffer transfer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(void)
+			{
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+				while (!(Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_READY));
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with
+			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-bit address.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC
+			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress,
+			                                              const uint16_t BufferByte)
+			{
+				#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+					PageAddress >>= 1;
+				#endif
+
+				Dataflash_SendByte(PageAddress >> 5);
+				Dataflash_SendByte((PageAddress << 3) | (BufferByte >> 8));
+				Dataflash_SendByte(BufferByte);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DriverStubs/Joystick.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DriverStubs/Joystick.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..07542ab72
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DriverStubs/Joystick.h
@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Custom Board Joystick Hardware Driver (Template)
+ *
+ *  This is a stub driver header file, for implementing custom board
+ *  layout hardware with compatible LUFA board specific drivers. If
+ *  the library is configured to use the BOARD_USER board mode, this
+ *  driver file should be completed and copied into the "/Board/" folder
+ *  inside the application's folder.
+ *
+ *  This stub is for the board-specific component of the LUFA Joystick
+ *  driver, for a digital four-way (plus button) joystick.
+*/
+
+#ifndef __JOYSTICK_USER_H__
+#define __JOYSTICK_USER_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		// TODO: Add any required includes here
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */
+			#define JOY_LEFT                  // TODO: Add mask to indicate joystick left position here
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */
+			#define JOY_RIGHT                 // TODO: Add mask to indicate joystick right position here
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */
+			#define JOY_UP                    // TODO: Add mask to indicate joystick up position here
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */
+			#define JOY_DOWN                  // TODO: Add mask to indicate joystick down position here
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */
+			#define JOY_PRESS                 // TODO: Add mask to indicate joystick pressed position here
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Joystick_Init(void)
+			{
+				// TODO: Initialize joystick port pins as inputs with pull-ups
+			}
+
+			static inline void Joystick_Disable(void)
+			{
+				// TODO: Clear the joystick pins as high impedance inputs here
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				// TODO: Return current joystick position data which can be obtained by masking against the JOY_* macros
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DriverStubs/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DriverStubs/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..437397279
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/DriverStubs/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,130 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Custom Board LED Hardware Driver (Template)
+ *
+ *  This is a stub driver header file, for implementing custom board
+ *  layout hardware with compatible LUFA board specific drivers. If
+ *  the library is configured to use the BOARD_USER board mode, this
+ *  driver file should be completed and copied into the "/Board/" folder
+ *  inside the application's folder.
+ *
+ *  This stub is for the board-specific component of the LUFA LEDs driver,
+ *  for the LEDs (up to four) mounted on most development boards.
+*/
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_USER_H__
+#define __LEDS_USER_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		// TODO: Add any required includes here
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        // TODO: Add mask for first board LED here
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        // TODO: Add mask for second board LED here
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        // TODO: Add mask for third board LED here
+
+			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED4        // TODO: Add mask for fourth board LED here
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				// TODO: Add code to initialize LED port pins as outputs here
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				// TODO: Clear the LED port pins as high impedance inputs here
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				// TODO: Add code to turn on LEDs given in the LEDMask mask here, leave others as-is
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				// TODO: Add code to turn off LEDs given in the LEDMask mask here, leave others as-is
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				// TODO: Add code to turn on only LEDs given in the LEDMask mask here, all others off
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				// TODO: Add code to set the Leds in the given LEDMask to the status given in ActiveMask here
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				// TODO: Add code to toggle the Leds in the given LEDMask, ignoring all others
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				// TODO: Add code to return the current LEDs status' here which can be masked against LED_LED* macros
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/HostTemplate/HostApplication.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/HostTemplate/HostApplication.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1ac03788d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/HostTemplate/HostApplication.c
@@ -0,0 +1,133 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the USB host application. This file contains the
+ *  main tasks of the application and is responsible for the initial
+ *  application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "HostApplication.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	USB_Init(USB_MODE_Host, USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+	if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+	                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+	{
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+
+}
+
+/* Required callback for retrieving descriptors from a LUFA device - unless the USB_HOST_ONLY configuration
+ * option is set, this is still required even in an application that uses host mode only.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		const uint8_t wIndex,
+		const void** const DescriptorAddress
+#if defined(HAS_MULTIPLE_DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS_SPACES)
+		, uint8_t* const DescriptorMemorySpace
+#endif
+)
+{
+	return 0;
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/HostTemplate/HostApplication.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/HostTemplate/HostApplication.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..16dbb535a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/HostTemplate/HostApplication.h
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for HostApplication.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _USB_HOST_APPLICATION_H_
+#define _USB_HOST_APPLICATION_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#if (defined(ARCH_HAS_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE) && \
+			 !(defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS)))
+		  #define HAS_MULTIPLE_DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS_SPACES
+		#endif
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/HostTemplate/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/HostTemplate/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c1996ec71
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/HostTemplate/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="USB Host Template" id="lufa.templates.host.project">

+		<require idref="lufa.templates.host"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8_template"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.templates.host" caption="USB Host Template">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Template for a LUFA USB host mode application.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="Template Projects"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="HostApplication.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="HostApplication.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value=".."/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="../LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ab7fc7520
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,167 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File (Template)
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which can be used to configure LUFA's
+ *  compile time options, as an alternative to the compile time
+ *  constants supplied through a makefile. To use this configuration
+ *  header, copy this into your project's root directory and supply
+ *  the \c USE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER token to the compiler so that it is
+ *  defined in all compiled source files.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LUFA_CONFIG_H__
+#define __LUFA_CONFIG_H__
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+//		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+// 		#define MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+	#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+//		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/WindowsINF/LUFA CDC-ACM.inf b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/WindowsINF/LUFA CDC-ACM.inf
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..212b5bbcb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/WindowsINF/LUFA CDC-ACM.inf
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+;     Windows LUFA CDC ACM Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+
+[DefaultInstall]
+CopyINF="LUFA CDC-ACM.inf"
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+DriverVer=7/1/2012,10.0.0.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTx86, NTamd64, NTia64
+
+[SourceDisksNames]
+
+[SourceDisksFiles]
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+[DriverInstall]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=FakeModemCopyFileSection
+AddReg=DriverInstall.AddReg
+
+[DriverInstall.Services]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, LowerFilter_Service_Inst
+
+[DriverInstall.AddReg]
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"msports.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
+
+[DeviceList.NTx86]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
+
+[DeviceList.NTia64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org"
+DESCRIPTION="LUFA CDC-ACM Virtual Serial Port"
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/WindowsINF/LUFA RNDIS.inf b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/WindowsINF/LUFA RNDIS.inf
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..73ca50e68
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/WindowsINF/LUFA RNDIS.inf
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+;     Windows LUFA RNDIS Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+
+[DefaultInstall]
+CopyINF="LUFA RNDIS.inf"
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Net
+ClassGuid={4d36e972-e325-11ce-bfc1-08002be10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+DriverVer=7/1/2012,10.0.0.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTx86, NTamd64, NTia64
+
+[ControlFlags]
+ExcludeFromSelect=*
+
+[DriverInstall]
+Characteristics=0x84 ; NCF_PHYSICAL + NCF_HAS_UI
+BusType=15
+include=netrndis.inf
+needs=Usb_Rndis.ndi
+AddReg=Rndis_AddReg_Vista
+
+[DriverInstall.Services]
+include=netrndis.inf
+needs=Usb_Rndis.ndi.Services
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C
+
+[DeviceList.NTx86]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C
+
+[DeviceList.NTia64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org"
+DESCRIPTION="LUFA RNDIS USB Ethernet Adapter"
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/makefile_template b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/makefile_template
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..efb6aa76f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/CodeTemplates/makefile_template
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = Target
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) $(LUFA_SRC_PLATFORM)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Common/ArchitectureSpecific.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Common/ArchitectureSpecific.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..292e27b37
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Common/ArchitectureSpecific.h
@@ -0,0 +1,185 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Architecture specific definitions relating to specific processor architectures.
+ *
+ *  \copydetails Group_ArchitectureSpecific
+ *
+ *  \note Do not include this file directly, rather include the Common.h header file instead to gain this file's
+ *        functionality.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Common
+ *  \defgroup Group_ArchitectureSpecific Architecture Specific Definitions
+ *  \brief Architecture specific definitions relating to specific processor architectures.
+ *
+ *  Architecture specific macros, functions and other definitions, which relate to specific architectures. This
+ *  definitions may or may not be available in some form on other architectures, and thus should be protected by
+ *  preprocessor checks in portable code to prevent compile errors.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LUFA_ARCHSPEC_H__
+#define __LUFA_ARCHSPEC_H__
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_COMMON_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Common/Common.h instead to gain this functionality.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) || (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+					/** Re-enables the AVR's JTAG bus in software, until a system reset. This will re-enable JTAG debugging
+					 *  interface after is has been disabled in software via \ref JTAG_DISABLE().
+					 *
+					 *  \note This macro is not available for all architectures.
+					 */
+					#define JTAG_ENABLE()               do {                                     \
+					                                        __asm__ __volatile__ (               \
+					                                        "in __tmp_reg__,__SREG__" "\n\t"     \
+					                                        "cli" "\n\t"                         \
+					                                        "out %1, %0" "\n\t"                  \
+					                                        "out __SREG__, __tmp_reg__" "\n\t"   \
+					                                        "out %1, %0" "\n\t"                  \
+					                                        :                                    \
+					                                        : "r" (MCUCR & ~(1 << JTD)),         \
+					                                          "M" (_SFR_IO_ADDR(MCUCR))          \
+					                                        : "r0");                             \
+					                                    } while (0)
+
+					/** Disables the AVR's JTAG bus in software, until a system reset. This will override the current JTAG
+					 *  status as set by the JTAGEN fuse, disabling JTAG debugging and reverting the JTAG pins back to GPIO
+					 *  mode.
+					 *
+					 *  \note This macro is not available for all architectures.
+					 */
+					#define JTAG_DISABLE()              do {                                     \
+					                                        __asm__ __volatile__ (               \
+					                                        "in __tmp_reg__,__SREG__" "\n\t"     \
+					                                        "cli" "\n\t"                         \
+					                                        "out %1, %0" "\n\t"                  \
+					                                        "out __SREG__, __tmp_reg__" "\n\t"   \
+					                                        "out %1, %0" "\n\t"                  \
+					                                        :                                    \
+					                                        : "r" (MCUCR | (1 << JTD)),          \
+					                                          "M" (_SFR_IO_ADDR(MCUCR))          \
+					                                        : "r0");                             \
+					                                    } while (0)
+				#endif
+
+				/** Defines a volatile \c NOP statement which cannot be optimized out by the compiler, and thus can always
+				 *  be set as a breakpoint in the resulting code. Useful for debugging purposes, where the optimizer
+				 *  removes/reorders code to the point where break points cannot reliably be set.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This macro is not available for all architectures.
+				 */
+				#define JTAG_DEBUG_POINT()              __asm__ __volatile__ ("nop" ::)
+
+				/** Defines an explicit JTAG break point in the resulting binary via the assembly \c BREAK statement. When
+				 *  a JTAG is used, this causes the program execution to halt when reached until manually resumed.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This macro is not available for all architectures.
+				 */
+				#define JTAG_DEBUG_BREAK()              __asm__ __volatile__ ("break" ::)
+
+				/** Macro for testing condition "x" and breaking via \ref JTAG_DEBUG_BREAK() if the condition is false.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This macro is not available for all architectures.
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] Condition  Condition that will be evaluated.
+				*/
+				#define JTAG_ASSERT(Condition)          do {                       \
+				                                            if (!(Condition))      \
+				                                              JTAG_DEBUG_BREAK();  \
+				                                        } while (0)
+
+				/** Macro for testing condition \c "x" and writing debug data to the stdout stream if \c false. The stdout stream
+				 *  must be pre-initialized before this macro is run and linked to an output device, such as the microcontroller's
+				 *  USART peripheral.
+				 *
+				 *  The output takes the form "{FILENAME}: Function {FUNCTION NAME}, Line {LINE NUMBER}: Assertion {Condition} failed."
+				 *
+				 *  \note This macro is not available for all architectures.
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] Condition  Condition that will be evaluated,
+				 */
+				#define STDOUT_ASSERT(Condition)        do {                                                           \
+				                                            if (!(Condition))                                          \
+				                                              printf_P(PSTR("%s: Function \"%s\", Line %d: "           \
+				                                                            "Assertion \"%s\" failed.\r\n"),           \
+				                                                            __FILE__, __func__, __LINE__, #Condition); \
+				                                        } while (0)
+
+				#if !defined(pgm_read_ptr) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+					/** Reads a pointer out of PROGMEM space on the AVR8 architecture. This is a wrapper for the avr-libc
+					 *  \c pgm_read_word() macro with a \c void* cast, so that its value can be assigned directly to a
+					 *  pointer variable or used in pointer arithmetic without further casting in C.
+					 *
+					 *  \note This macro is not available for all architectures.
+					 *
+					 *  \param[in] Address  Address of the pointer to read.
+					 *
+					 *  \return Pointer retrieved from PROGMEM space.
+					 */
+					#define pgm_read_ptr(Address)       (void*)pgm_read_word(Address)
+				#endif
+			#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
+				#define JTAG_DEBUG_POINT()              __asm__ __volatile__ ("nop" ::)
+				#define JTAG_DEBUG_BREAK()              __asm__ __volatile__ ("breakpoint" ::)
+				#define JTAG_ASSERT(Condition)          do {                                                    \
+				                                            if (!(Condition))                                   \
+				                                              JTAG_DEBUG_BREAK();                               \
+				                                        } while (0)
+				#define STDOUT_ASSERT(Condition)        do {                                                    \
+				                                            if (!(Condition))                                   \
+				                                              printf("%s: Function \"%s\", Line %d: "           \
+				                                                     "Assertion \"%s\" failed.\r\n",            \
+				                                                     __FILE__, __func__, __LINE__, #Condition); \
+				                                        } while (0)
+			#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Common/Architectures.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Common/Architectures.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..265b41244
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Common/Architectures.h
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Supported library architecture defines.
+ *
+ *  \copydetails Group_Architectures
+ *
+ *  \note Do not include this file directly, rather include the Common.h header file instead to gain this file's
+ *        functionality.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Common
+ *  \defgroup Group_Architectures Hardware Architectures
+ *  \brief Supported library architecture defines.
+ *
+ *  Architecture macros for selecting the desired target microcontroller architecture. One of these values should be
+ *  defined as the value of \c ARCH in the user project makefile via the \c -D compiler switch to GCC, to select the
+ *  target architecture.
+ *
+ *  The selected architecture should remain consistent with the makefile \c ARCH value, which is used to select the
+ *  underlying driver source files for each architecture.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LUFA_ARCHITECTURES_H__
+#define __LUFA_ARCHITECTURES_H__
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_COMMON_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Common/Common.h instead to gain this functionality.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Selects the Atmel 8-bit AVR (AT90USB* and ATMEGA*U* chips) architecture. */
+			#define ARCH_AVR8           0
+
+			/** Selects the Atmel 32-bit UC3 AVR (AT32UC3* chips) architecture. */
+			#define ARCH_UC3            1
+
+			/** Selects the Atmel XMEGA AVR (ATXMEGA* chips) architecture. */
+			#define ARCH_XMEGA          2
+
+			#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				#define ARCH_           ARCH_AVR8
+
+				#if !defined(ARCH)
+					#define ARCH        ARCH_AVR8
+				#endif
+			#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Common/Attributes.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Common/Attributes.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..dc5c6be4c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Common/Attributes.h
@@ -0,0 +1,150 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Special function/variable attribute macros.
+ *
+ *  \copydetails Group_FuncVarAttributes
+ *
+ *  \note Do not include this file directly, rather include the Common.h header file instead to gain this file's
+ *        functionality.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Common
+ *  \defgroup Group_FuncVarAttributes Function/Variable Attributes
+ *  \brief Special function/variable attribute macros.
+ *
+ *  This module contains macros for applying specific attributes to functions and variables to control various
+ *  optimizer and code generation features of the compiler. Attributes may be placed in the function prototype
+ *  or variable declaration in any order, and multiple attributes can be specified for a single item via a space
+ *  separated list.
+ *
+ *  On incompatible versions of GCC or on other compilers, these macros evaluate to nothing unless they are
+ *  critical to the code's function and thus must throw a compile error when used.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LUFA_ATTR_H__
+#define __LUFA_ATTR_H__
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_COMMON_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Common/Common.h instead to gain this functionality.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			#if (__GNUC__ >= 3) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Indicates to the compiler that the function can not ever return, so that any stack restoring or
+				 *  return code may be omitted by the compiler in the resulting binary.
+				 */
+				#define ATTR_NO_RETURN               __attribute__ ((noreturn))
+
+				/** Indicates that the function returns a value which should not be ignored by the user code. When
+				 *  applied, any ignored return value from calling the function will produce a compiler warning.
+				 */
+				#define ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT      __attribute__ ((warn_unused_result))
+
+				/** Indicates that the specified parameters of the function are pointers which should never be \c NULL.
+				 *  When applied as a 1-based comma separated list the compiler will emit a warning if the specified
+				 *  parameters are known at compiler time to be \c NULL at the point of calling the function.
+				 */
+				#define ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(...)   __attribute__ ((nonnull (__VA_ARGS__)))
+
+				/** Removes any preamble or postamble from the function. When used, the function will not have any
+				 *  register or stack saving code. This should be used with caution, and when used the programmer
+				 *  is responsible for maintaining stack and register integrity.
+				 */
+				#define ATTR_NAKED                   __attribute__ ((naked))
+
+				/** Prevents the compiler from considering a specified function for in-lining. When applied, the given
+				 *  function will not be in-lined under any circumstances.
+				 */
+				#define ATTR_NO_INLINE               __attribute__ ((noinline))
+
+				/** Forces the compiler to inline the specified function. When applied, the given function will be
+				 *  in-lined under all circumstances.
+				 */
+				#define ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE           __attribute__ ((always_inline))
+
+				/** Indicates that the specified function is pure, in that it has no side-effects other than global
+				 *  or parameter variable access.
+				 */
+				#define ATTR_PURE                    __attribute__ ((pure))
+
+				/** Indicates that the specified function is constant, in that it has no side effects other than
+				 *  parameter access.
+				 */
+				#define ATTR_CONST                   __attribute__ ((const))
+
+				/** Marks a given function as deprecated, which produces a warning if the function is called. */
+				#define ATTR_DEPRECATED              __attribute__ ((deprecated))
+
+				/** Marks a function as a weak reference, which can be overridden by other functions with an
+				 *  identical name (in which case the weak reference is discarded at link time).
+				 */
+				#define ATTR_WEAK                    __attribute__ ((weak))
+			#endif
+
+			/** Forces the compiler to not automatically zero the given global variable on startup, so that the
+			 *  current RAM contents is retained. Under most conditions this value will be random due to the
+			 *  behavior of volatile memory once power is removed, but may be used in some specific circumstances,
+			 *  like the passing of values back after a system watchdog reset.
+			 */
+			#define ATTR_NO_INIT                     __attribute__ ((section (".noinit")))
+
+			/** Places the function in one of the initialization sections, which execute before the main function
+			 *  of the application. Refer to the avr-libc manual for more information on the initialization sections.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] SectionIndex  Initialization section number where the function should be placed.
+			 */
+			#define ATTR_INIT_SECTION(SectionIndex)  __attribute__ ((used, naked, section (".init" #SectionIndex )))
+
+			/** Marks a function as an alias for another function.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Func  Name of the function which the given function name should alias.
+			 */
+			#define ATTR_ALIAS(Func)                 __attribute__ ((alias( #Func )))
+
+			/** Marks a variable or struct element for packing into the smallest space available, omitting any
+			 *  alignment bytes usually added between fields to optimize field accesses.
+			 */
+			#define ATTR_PACKED                      __attribute__ ((packed))
+
+			/** Indicates the minimum alignment in bytes for a variable or struct element.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Bytes  Minimum number of bytes the item should be aligned to.
+			 */
+			#define ATTR_ALIGNED(Bytes)              __attribute__ ((aligned(Bytes)))
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Common/BoardTypes.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Common/BoardTypes.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..06ff4ddb4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Common/BoardTypes.h
@@ -0,0 +1,254 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Supported pre-made board hardware defines.
+ *
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardTypes
+ *
+ *  \note Do not include this file directly, rather include the Common.h header file instead to gain this file's
+ *        functionality.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Common
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardTypes Board Types
+ *  \brief Supported pre-made board hardware defines.
+ *
+ *  Board macros for indicating the chosen physical board hardware to the library. These macros should be used when
+ *  defining the \c BOARD token to the chosen hardware via the \c -D switch in the project makefile. If a custom
+ *  board is used, the \ref BOARD_NONE or \ref BOARD_USER values should be selected.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LUFA_BOARDTYPES_H__
+#define __LUFA_BOARDTYPES_H__
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_COMMON_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Common/Common.h instead to gain this functionality.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Selects the user-defined board drivers, which should be placed in the user project's folder
+			 *  under a directory named \c /Board/. Each board driver should be named identically to the LUFA
+			 *  master board driver (i.e., driver in the \c LUFA/Drivers/Board directory) so that the library
+			 *  can correctly identify it.
+			 */
+			#define BOARD_USER                 0
+
+			/** Disables board drivers when operation will not be adversely affected (e.g. LEDs) - use of board drivers
+			 *  such as the Joystick driver, where the removal would adversely affect the code's operation is still disallowed. */
+			#define BOARD_NONE                 1
+
+			/** Selects the USBKEY specific board drivers, including Temperature, Button, Dataflash, Joystick and LED drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_USBKEY               2
+
+			/** Selects the STK525 specific board drivers, including Temperature, Button, Dataflash, Joystick and LED drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_STK525               3
+
+			/** Selects the STK526 specific board drivers, including Temperature, Button, Dataflash, Joystick and LED drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_STK526               4
+
+			/** Selects the RZUSBSTICK specific board drivers, including the driver for the boards LEDs. */
+			#define BOARD_RZUSBSTICK           5
+
+			/** Selects the ATAVRUSBRF01 specific board drivers, including the driver for the board LEDs. */
+			#define BOARD_ATAVRUSBRF01         6
+
+			/** Selects the BUMBLEB specific board drivers, using the officially recommended peripheral layout. */
+			#define BOARD_BUMBLEB              7
+
+			/** Selects the XPLAIN (Revision 2 or newer) specific board drivers, including LED and Dataflash drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_XPLAIN               8
+
+			/** Selects the XPLAIN (Revision 1) specific board drivers, including LED and Dataflash drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1          9
+
+			/** Selects the EVK527 specific board drivers, including Temperature, Button, Dataflash, Joystick and LED drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_EVK527               10
+
+			/** Selects the Teensy version 1.x specific board drivers, including the driver for the board LEDs. */
+			#define BOARD_TEENSY               11
+
+			/** Selects the USBTINY MKII specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_USBTINYMKII          12
+
+			/** Selects the Benito specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_BENITO               13
+
+			/** Selects the JM-DB-U2 specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_JMDBU2               14
+
+			/** Selects the Olimex AVR-USB-162 specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_OLIMEX162            15
+
+			/** Selects the UDIP specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_UDIP                 16
+
+			/** Selects the BUI specific board drivers, including the driver for the board LEDs. */
+			#define BOARD_BUI                  17
+
+			/** Selects the Arduino Uno specific board drivers, including the driver for the board LEDs. */
+			#define BOARD_UNO                  18
+
+			/** Selects the Busware CUL V3 specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_CULV3                19
+
+			/** Selects the Blackcat USB JTAG specific board drivers, including the driver for the board LEDs. */
+			#define BOARD_BLACKCAT             20
+
+			/** Selects the Maximus specific board drivers, including the driver for the board LEDs. */
+			#define BOARD_MAXIMUS              21
+
+			/** Selects the Minimus specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_MINIMUS              22
+
+			/** Selects the Adafruit U4 specific board drivers, including the Button driver. */
+			#define BOARD_ADAFRUITU4           23
+
+			/** Selects the Microsin AVR-USB162 specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_MICROSIN162          24
+
+			/** Selects the Kernel Concepts USBFOO specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_USBFOO               25
+
+			/** Selects the Sparkfun ATMEGA8U2 specific board drivers, including the driver for the board LEDs. */
+			#define BOARD_SPARKFUN8U2          26
+
+			/** Selects the Atmel EVK1101 specific board drivers, including the Button, Joystick and LED drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_EVK1101              27
+
+			/** Selects the Busware TUL specific board drivers, including the Button and LED drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_TUL                  28
+
+			/** Selects the Atmel EVK1100 specific board drivers, including the Button, Joystick and LED drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_EVK1100              29
+
+			/** Selects the Atmel EVK1104 specific board drivers, including the Button and LED drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_EVK1104              30
+
+			/** Selects the Atmel XMEGA A3BU Xplained specific board drivers, including Dataflash, Button and LED drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_A3BU_XPLAINED        31
+
+			/** Selects the Teensy version 2.x specific board drivers, including the driver for the board LEDs. */
+			#define BOARD_TEENSY2              32
+
+			/** Selects the USB2AX version 1 and 2 specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_USB2AX               33
+
+			/** Selects the USB2AX version 3 specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_USB2AX_V3            34
+
+			/** Selects the Micropendous 32U2 specific board drivers, including the Button and LED drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_32U2    35
+
+			/** Selects the Micropendous A specific board drivers, including the driver for the board Button. */
+			#define BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_A       36
+
+			/** Selects the Micropendous 1 specific board drivers, including the driver for the board Button. */
+			#define BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_1       37
+
+			/** Selects the Micropendous 2 specific board drivers, including the driver for the board Button. */
+			#define BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_2       38
+
+			/** Selects the Micropendous 3 specific board drivers, including the driver for the board Button. */
+			#define BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_3       39
+
+			/** Selects the Micropendous 4 specific board drivers, including the driver for the board Button. */
+			#define BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_4       40
+
+			/** Selects the Micropendous DIP specific board drivers, including the driver for the board Button. */
+			#define BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_DIP     41
+
+			/** Selects the Micropendous (Arduino-like) revision 1 specific board drivers, including the Button and LED drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_REV1    42
+
+			/** Selects the Micropendous (Arduino-like) revision 2 specific board drivers, including the Button and LED drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_REV2    43
+
+			/** Selects the XMEGA B1 Xplained specific board drivers, including the Button and LED drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_B1_XPLAINED          44
+
+			/** Selects the Bitwizard Multio specific board drivers, including the driver for the board LEDs. */
+			#define BOARD_MULTIO               45
+
+			/** Selects the Bitwizard Big-Multio specific board drivers, including the driver for the board LEDs. */
+			#define BOARD_BIGMULTIO            46
+
+			/** Selects the DorkbotPDX Duce specific board drivers, including the driver for the board LEDs. */
+			#define BOARD_DUCE                 47
+
+			/** Selects the Olimex AVR-USB-32U4 specific board drivers, including the Button and LED drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_OLIMEX32U4           48
+
+			/** Selects the Olimex AVR-USB-T32U4 specific board drivers, including the Button and LED drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_OLIMEXT32U4          49
+
+			/** Selects the Olimex AVR-ISP-MK2 specific board drivers, including the Button and LED drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_OLIMEXISPMK2         50
+
+			/** Selects the Arduino Leonardo specific board drivers, including the driver for the board LEDs. */
+			#define BOARD_LEONARDO             51
+
+			/** Selects the UC3-A3 Xplained specific board drivers, including the Button and LED drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_UC3A3_XPLAINED       52
+
+			/** Selects the USB2AX version 3.1 specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_USB2AX_V31           53
+
+			/** Selects the Stange-ISP specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_STANGE_ISP           54
+
+			/** Selects the XMEGA C3 XPLAINED specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_C3_XPLAINED          55
+
+			/** Selects the U2S specific board drivers, including the Button and LEDs drivers. */
+			#define BOARD_U2S                  56
+
+			/** Selects the Arduino YUN specific board drivers, including the driver for the board LEDs. */
+			#define BOARD_YUN                  57
+
+			/** Selects the Arduino Micro specific board drivers, including the driver for the board LEDs. */
+			#define BOARD_MICRO                58
+
+			#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				#define BOARD_                 BOARD_NONE
+
+				#if !defined(BOARD)
+					#define BOARD              BOARD_NONE
+				#endif
+			#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Common/Common.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Common/Common.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3e12e4f33
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Common/Common.h
@@ -0,0 +1,393 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \dir
+ *  \brief Common library header files.
+ *
+ *  This folder contains header files which are common to all parts of the LUFA library. They may be used freely in
+ *  user applications.
+ */
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Common library convenience headers, macros and functions.
+ *
+ *  \copydetails Group_Common
+ */
+
+/** \defgroup Group_Common Common Utility Headers - LUFA/Drivers/Common/Common.h
+ *  \brief Common library convenience headers, macros and functions.
+ *
+ *  Common utility headers containing macros, functions, enums and types which are common to all
+ *  aspects of the library.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+/** \defgroup Group_GlobalInt Global Interrupt Macros
+ *  \brief Convenience macros for the management of interrupts globally within the device.
+ *
+ *  Macros and functions to create and control global interrupts within the device.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LUFA_COMMON_H__
+#define __LUFA_COMMON_H__
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_COMMON_H
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <stdint.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		#include <stddef.h>
+
+		#include "Architectures.h"
+		#include "BoardTypes.h"
+		#include "ArchitectureSpecific.h"
+		#include "CompilerSpecific.h"
+		#include "Attributes.h"
+
+		#if defined(USE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER)
+			#include "LUFAConfig.h"
+		#endif
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Architecture specific utility includes: */
+		#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			/** Type define for an unsigned integer the same width as the selected architecture's machine register.
+			 *  This is distinct from the non-specific standard int data type, whose width is machine dependant but
+			 *  which may not reflect the actual machine register width on some targets (e.g. AVR8).
+			 */
+			typedef MACHINE_REG_t uint_reg_t;
+		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+			#include <avr/io.h>
+			#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+			#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+			#include <avr/eeprom.h>
+			#include <avr/boot.h>
+			#include <math.h>
+			#include <util/delay.h>
+
+			typedef uint8_t uint_reg_t;
+
+			#define ARCH_HAS_EEPROM_ADDRESS_SPACE
+			#define ARCH_HAS_FLASH_ADDRESS_SPACE
+			#define ARCH_HAS_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE
+			#define ARCH_LITTLE_ENDIAN
+
+			#include "Endianness.h"
+		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
+			#include <avr32/io.h>
+			#include <math.h>
+
+			// === TODO: Find abstracted way to handle these ===
+			#define PROGMEM
+			#define pgm_read_byte(x)         *x
+			#define memcmp_P(...)            memcmp(__VA_ARGS__)
+			#define memcpy_P(...)            memcpy(__VA_ARGS__)
+			// =================================================
+
+			typedef uint32_t uint_reg_t;
+
+			#define ARCH_BIG_ENDIAN
+
+			#include "Endianness.h"
+		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+			#include <avr/io.h>
+			#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+			#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+			#include <avr/eeprom.h>
+			#include <math.h>
+			#include <util/delay.h>
+
+			typedef uint8_t uint_reg_t;
+
+			#define ARCH_HAS_EEPROM_ADDRESS_SPACE
+			#define ARCH_HAS_FLASH_ADDRESS_SPACE
+			#define ARCH_HAS_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE
+			#define ARCH_LITTLE_ENDIAN
+
+			#include "Endianness.h"
+		#else
+			#error Unknown device architecture specified.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				// Obsolete, retained for compatibility with user code
+				#define MACROS                  do
+				#define MACROE                  while (0)
+			#endif
+
+			/** Convenience macro to determine the larger of two values.
+			 *
+			 *  \attention This macro should only be used with operands that do not have side effects from being evaluated
+			 *             multiple times.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] x  First value to compare
+			 *  \param[in] y  First value to compare
+			 *
+			 *  \return The larger of the two input parameters
+			 */
+			#if !defined(MAX) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				#define MAX(x, y)               (((x) > (y)) ? (x) : (y))
+			#endif
+
+			/** Convenience macro to determine the smaller of two values.
+			 *
+			 *  \attention This macro should only be used with operands that do not have side effects from being evaluated
+			 *             multiple times.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] x  First value to compare.
+			 *  \param[in] y  First value to compare.
+			 *
+			 *  \return The smaller of the two input parameters
+			 */
+			#if !defined(MIN) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				#define MIN(x, y)               (((x) < (y)) ? (x) : (y))
+			#endif
+
+			#if !defined(STRINGIFY) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Converts the given input into a string, via the C Preprocessor. This macro puts literal quotation
+				 *  marks around the input, converting the source into a string literal.
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] x  Input to convert into a string literal.
+				 *
+				 *  \return String version of the input.
+				 */
+				#define STRINGIFY(x)            #x
+
+				/** Converts the given input into a string after macro expansion, via the C Preprocessor. This macro puts
+				 *  literal quotation marks around the expanded input, converting the source into a string literal.
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] x  Input to expand and convert into a string literal.
+				 *
+				 *  \return String version of the expanded input.
+				 */
+				#define STRINGIFY_EXPANDED(x)   STRINGIFY(x)
+			#endif
+
+			#if !defined(CONCAT) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Concatenates the given input into a single token, via the C Preprocessor.
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] x  First item to concatenate.
+				 *  \param[in] y  Second item to concatenate.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Concatenated version of the input.
+				 */
+				#define CONCAT(x, y)            x ## y
+
+				/** CConcatenates the given input into a single token after macro expansion, via the C Preprocessor.
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] x  First item to concatenate.
+				 *  \param[in] y  Second item to concatenate.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Concatenated version of the expanded input.
+				 */
+				#define CONCAT_EXPANDED(x, y)   CONCAT(x, y)
+			#endif
+
+			#if !defined(ISR) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Macro for the definition of interrupt service routines, so that the compiler can insert the required
+				 *  prologue and epilogue code to properly manage the interrupt routine without affecting the main thread's
+				 *  state with unintentional side-effects.
+				 *
+				 *  Interrupt handlers written using this macro may still need to be registered with the microcontroller's
+				 *  Interrupt Controller (if present) before they will properly handle incoming interrupt events.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This macro is only supplied on some architectures, where the standard library does not include a valid
+				 *        definition. If an existing definition exists, the alternative definition here will be ignored.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_GlobalInt
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] Name  Unique name of the interrupt service routine.
+				 */
+				#define ISR(Name, ...)          void Name (void) __attribute__((__interrupt__)) __VA_ARGS__; void Name (void)
+			#endif
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Function to reverse the individual bits in a byte - i.e. bit 7 is moved to bit 0, bit 6 to bit 1,
+			 *  etc.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data whose bits are to be reversed.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Input data with the individual bits reversed (mirrored).
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t BitReverse(uint8_t Byte) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST;
+			static inline uint8_t BitReverse(uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+				Byte = (((Byte & 0xF0) >> 4) | ((Byte & 0x0F) << 4));
+				Byte = (((Byte & 0xCC) >> 2) | ((Byte & 0x33) << 2));
+				Byte = (((Byte & 0xAA) >> 1) | ((Byte & 0x55) << 1));
+
+				return Byte;
+			}
+
+			/** Function to perform a blocking delay for a specified number of milliseconds. The actual delay will be
+			 *  at a minimum the specified number of milliseconds, however due to loop overhead and internal calculations
+			 *  may be slightly higher.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Milliseconds  Number of milliseconds to delay
+			 */
+			static inline void Delay_MS(uint16_t Milliseconds) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Delay_MS(uint16_t Milliseconds)
+			{
+				#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+				if (GCC_IS_COMPILE_CONST(Milliseconds))
+				{
+					_delay_ms(Milliseconds);
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					while (Milliseconds--)
+					  _delay_ms(1);
+				}
+				#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
+				while (Milliseconds--)
+				{
+					__builtin_mtsr(AVR32_COUNT, 0);
+					while ((uint32_t)__builtin_mfsr(AVR32_COUNT) < (F_CPU / 1000));
+				}
+				#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+				if (GCC_IS_COMPILE_CONST(Milliseconds))
+				{
+					_delay_ms(Milliseconds);
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					while (Milliseconds--)
+					  _delay_ms(1);
+				}
+				#endif
+			}
+
+			/** Retrieves a mask which contains the current state of the global interrupts for the device. This
+			 *  value can be stored before altering the global interrupt enable state, before restoring the
+			 *  flag(s) back to their previous values after a critical section using \ref SetGlobalInterruptMask().
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_GlobalInt
+			 *
+			 *  \return  Mask containing the current Global Interrupt Enable Mask bit(s).
+			 */
+			static inline uint_reg_t GetGlobalInterruptMask(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint_reg_t GetGlobalInterruptMask(void)
+			{
+				GCC_MEMORY_BARRIER();
+
+				#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+				return SREG;
+				#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
+				return __builtin_mfsr(AVR32_SR);
+				#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+				return SREG;
+				#endif
+			}
+
+			/** Sets the global interrupt enable state of the microcontroller to the mask passed into the function.
+			 *  This can be combined with \ref GetGlobalInterruptMask() to save and restore the Global Interrupt Enable
+			 *  Mask bit(s) of the device after a critical section has completed.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_GlobalInt
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] GlobalIntState  Global Interrupt Enable Mask value to use
+			 */
+			static inline void SetGlobalInterruptMask(const uint_reg_t GlobalIntState) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void SetGlobalInterruptMask(const uint_reg_t GlobalIntState)
+			{
+				GCC_MEMORY_BARRIER();
+
+				#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+				SREG = GlobalIntState;
+				#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
+				if (GlobalIntState & AVR32_SR_GM)
+				  __builtin_ssrf(AVR32_SR_GM_OFFSET);
+				else
+				  __builtin_csrf(AVR32_SR_GM_OFFSET);
+				#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+				SREG = GlobalIntState;
+				#endif
+
+				GCC_MEMORY_BARRIER();
+			}
+
+			/** Enables global interrupt handling for the device, allowing interrupts to be handled.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_GlobalInt
+			 */
+			static inline void GlobalInterruptEnable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void GlobalInterruptEnable(void)
+			{
+				GCC_MEMORY_BARRIER();
+
+				#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+				sei();
+				#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
+				__builtin_csrf(AVR32_SR_GM_OFFSET);
+				#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+				sei();
+				#endif
+
+				GCC_MEMORY_BARRIER();
+			}
+
+			/** Disabled global interrupt handling for the device, preventing interrupts from being handled.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_GlobalInt
+			 */
+			static inline void GlobalInterruptDisable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void GlobalInterruptDisable(void)
+			{
+				GCC_MEMORY_BARRIER();
+
+				#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+				cli();
+				#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
+				__builtin_ssrf(AVR32_SR_GM_OFFSET);
+				#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+				cli();
+				#endif
+
+				GCC_MEMORY_BARRIER();
+			}
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Common/CompilerSpecific.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Common/CompilerSpecific.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9979fffbb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Common/CompilerSpecific.h
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Compiler specific definitions for code optimization and correctness.
+ *
+ *  \copydetails Group_CompilerSpecific
+ *
+ *  \note Do not include this file directly, rather include the Common.h header file instead to gain this file's
+ *        functionality.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Common
+ *  \defgroup Group_CompilerSpecific Compiler Specific Definitions
+ *  \brief Compiler specific definitions for code optimization and correctness.
+ *
+ *  Compiler specific definitions to expose certain compiler features which may increase the level of code optimization
+ *  for a specific compiler, or correct certain issues that may be present such as memory barriers for use in conjunction
+ *  with atomic variable access.
+ *
+ *  Where possible, on alternative compilers, these macros will either have no effect, or default to returning a sane value
+ *  so that they can be used in existing code without the need for extra compiler checks in the user application code.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LUFA_COMPILERSPEC_H__
+#define __LUFA_COMPILERSPEC_H__
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_COMMON_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Common/Common.h instead to gain this functionality.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			#if defined(__GNUC__) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Forces GCC to use pointer indirection (via the device's pointer register pairs) when accessing the given
+				 *  struct pointer. In some cases GCC will emit non-optimal assembly code when accessing a structure through
+				 *  a pointer, resulting in a larger binary. When this macro is used on a (non \c const) structure pointer before
+				 *  use, it will force GCC to use pointer indirection on the elements rather than direct store and load
+				 *  instructions.
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in, out] StructPtr  Pointer to a structure which is to be forced into indirect access mode.
+				 */
+				#define GCC_FORCE_POINTER_ACCESS(StructPtr)   __asm__ __volatile__("" : "=b" (StructPtr) : "0" (StructPtr))
+
+				/** Forces GCC to create a memory barrier, ensuring that memory accesses are not reordered past the barrier point.
+				 *  This can be used before ordering-critical operations, to ensure that the compiler does not re-order the resulting
+				 *  assembly output in an unexpected manner on sections of code that are ordering-specific.
+				 */
+				#define GCC_MEMORY_BARRIER()                  __asm__ __volatile__("" ::: "memory");
+
+				/** Determines if the specified value can be determined at compile-time to be a constant value when compiling under GCC.
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] x  Value to check compile-time constantness of.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Boolean \c true if the given value is known to be a compile time constant, \c false otherwise.
+				 */
+				#define GCC_IS_COMPILE_CONST(x)               __builtin_constant_p(x)
+			#else
+				#define GCC_FORCE_POINTER_ACCESS(StructPtr)
+				#define GCC_MEMORY_BARRIER()
+				#define GCC_IS_COMPILE_CONST(x)               0
+			#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Common/Endianness.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Common/Endianness.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2eb3ad094
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Common/Endianness.h
@@ -0,0 +1,493 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Endianness and Byte Ordering macros and functions.
+ *
+ *  \copydetails Group_Endianness
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Endianness
+ *  \defgroup Group_ByteSwapping Byte Reordering
+ *  \brief Macros and functions for forced byte reordering.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Endianness
+ *  \defgroup Group_EndianConversion Endianness Conversion
+ *  \brief Macros and functions for automatic endianness conversion.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Common
+ *  \defgroup Group_Endianness Endianness and Byte Ordering
+ *  \brief Convenience macros and functions relating to byte (re-)ordering
+ *
+ *  Common library convenience macros and functions relating to byte (re-)ordering.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LUFA_ENDIANNESS_H__
+#define __LUFA_ENDIANNESS_H__
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_COMMON_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Common/Common.h instead to gain this functionality.
+		#endif
+
+		#if !(defined(ARCH_BIG_ENDIAN) || defined(ARCH_LITTLE_ENDIAN))
+			#error ARCH_BIG_ENDIAN or ARCH_LITTLE_ENDIAN not set for the specified architecture.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Swaps the byte ordering of a 16-bit value at compile-time. Do not use this macro for swapping byte orderings
+			 *  of dynamic values computed at runtime, use \ref SwapEndian_16() instead. The result of this macro can be used
+			 *  inside struct or other variable initializers outside of a function, something that is not possible with the
+			 *  inline function variant.
+			 *
+			 *  \hideinitializer
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_ByteSwapping
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] x  16-bit value whose byte ordering is to be swapped.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Input value with the byte ordering reversed.
+			 */
+			#define SWAPENDIAN_16(x)            (uint16_t)((((x) & 0xFF00) >> 8) | (((x) & 0x00FF) << 8))
+
+			/** Swaps the byte ordering of a 32-bit value at compile-time. Do not use this macro for swapping byte orderings
+			 *  of dynamic values computed at runtime- use \ref SwapEndian_32() instead. The result of this macro can be used
+			 *  inside struct or other variable initializers outside of a function, something that is not possible with the
+			 *  inline function variant.
+			 *
+			 *  \hideinitializer
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_ByteSwapping
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] x  32-bit value whose byte ordering is to be swapped.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Input value with the byte ordering reversed.
+			 */
+			#define SWAPENDIAN_32(x)            (uint32_t)((((x) & 0xFF000000UL) >> 24UL) | (((x) & 0x00FF0000UL) >> 8UL) | \
+			                                               (((x) & 0x0000FF00UL) << 8UL)  | (((x) & 0x000000FFUL) << 24UL))
+
+			#if defined(ARCH_BIG_ENDIAN) && !defined(le16_to_cpu)
+				#define le16_to_cpu(x)           SwapEndian_16(x)
+				#define le32_to_cpu(x)           SwapEndian_32(x)
+				#define be16_to_cpu(x)           (x)
+				#define be32_to_cpu(x)           (x)
+				#define cpu_to_le16(x)           SwapEndian_16(x)
+				#define cpu_to_le32(x)           SwapEndian_32(x)
+				#define cpu_to_be16(x)           (x)
+				#define cpu_to_be32(x)           (x)
+				#define LE16_TO_CPU(x)           SWAPENDIAN_16(x)
+				#define LE32_TO_CPU(x)           SWAPENDIAN_32(x)
+				#define BE16_TO_CPU(x)           (x)
+				#define BE32_TO_CPU(x)           (x)
+				#define CPU_TO_LE16(x)           SWAPENDIAN_16(x)
+				#define CPU_TO_LE32(x)           SWAPENDIAN_32(x)
+				#define CPU_TO_BE16(x)           (x)
+				#define CPU_TO_BE32(x)           (x)
+			#elif !defined(le16_to_cpu)
+				/** \name Run-time endianness conversion */
+				//@{
+
+				/** Performs a conversion between a Little Endian encoded 16-bit piece of data and the
+				 *  Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture.
+				 *
+				 *  On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness
+				 *        conversion, use \ref LE16_TO_CPU instead.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
+				 */
+				#define le16_to_cpu(x)           (x)
+
+				/** Performs a conversion between a Little Endian encoded 32-bit piece of data and the
+				 *  Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture.
+				 *
+				 *  On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness
+				 *        conversion, use \ref LE32_TO_CPU instead.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
+				 */
+				#define le32_to_cpu(x)           (x)
+
+				/** Performs a conversion between a Big Endian encoded 16-bit piece of data and the
+				 *  Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture.
+				 *
+				 *  On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness
+				 *        conversion, use \ref BE16_TO_CPU instead.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
+				 */
+				#define be16_to_cpu(x)           SwapEndian_16(x)
+
+				/** Performs a conversion between a Big Endian encoded 32-bit piece of data and the
+				 *  Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture.
+				 *
+				 *  On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness
+				 *        conversion, use \ref BE32_TO_CPU instead.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
+				 */
+				#define be32_to_cpu(x)           SwapEndian_32(x)
+
+				/** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 16-bit piece of data to ensure that it
+				 *  is in Little Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture.
+				 *
+				 *  On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness
+				 *        conversion, use \ref CPU_TO_LE16 instead.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
+				 */
+				#define cpu_to_le16(x)           (x)
+
+				/** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 32-bit piece of data to ensure that it
+				 *  is in Little Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture.
+				 *
+				 *  On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness
+				 *        conversion, use \ref CPU_TO_LE32 instead.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
+				 */
+				#define cpu_to_le32(x)           (x)
+
+				/** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 16-bit piece of data to ensure that it
+				 *  is in Big Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture.
+				 *
+				 *  On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness
+				 *        conversion, use \ref CPU_TO_BE16 instead.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
+				 */
+				#define cpu_to_be16(x)           SwapEndian_16(x)
+
+				/** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 32-bit piece of data to ensure that it
+				 *  is in Big Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture.
+				 *
+				 *  On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This macro is designed for run-time conversion of data - for compile-time endianness
+				 *        conversion, use \ref CPU_TO_BE32 instead.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
+				 */
+				#define cpu_to_be32(x)           SwapEndian_32(x)
+
+				//@}
+
+				/** \name Compile-time endianness conversion */
+				//@{
+
+				/** Performs a conversion between a Little Endian encoded 16-bit piece of data and the
+				 *  Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture.
+				 *
+				 *  On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run time endianness
+				 *        conversion, use \ref le16_to_cpu instead.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
+				 */
+				#define LE16_TO_CPU(x)           (x)
+
+				/** Performs a conversion between a Little Endian encoded 32-bit piece of data and the
+				 *  Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture.
+				 *
+				 *  On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run time endianness
+				 *        conversion, use \ref le32_to_cpu instead.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
+				 */
+				#define LE32_TO_CPU(x)           (x)
+
+				/** Performs a conversion between a Big Endian encoded 16-bit piece of data and the
+				 *  Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture.
+				 *
+				 *  On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run-time endianness
+				 *        conversion, use \ref be16_to_cpu instead.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
+				 */
+				#define BE16_TO_CPU(x)           SWAPENDIAN_16(x)
+
+				/** Performs a conversion between a Big Endian encoded 32-bit piece of data and the
+				 *  Endianness of the currently selected CPU architecture.
+				 *
+				 *  On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run-time endianness
+				 *        conversion, use \ref be32_to_cpu instead.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
+				 */
+				#define BE32_TO_CPU(x)           SWAPENDIAN_32(x)
+
+				/** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 16-bit piece of data to ensure that it
+				 *  is in Little Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture.
+				 *
+				 *  On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run-time endianness
+				 *        conversion, use \ref cpu_to_le16 instead.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
+				 */
+				#define CPU_TO_LE16(x)           (x)
+
+				/** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 32-bit piece of data to ensure that it
+				 *  is in Little Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture.
+				 *
+				 *  On little endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run-time endianness
+				 *        conversion, use \ref cpu_to_le32 instead.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
+				 */
+				#define CPU_TO_LE32(x)           (x)
+
+				/** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 16-bit piece of data to ensure that it
+				 *  is in Big Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture.
+				 *
+				 *  On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run-time endianness
+				 *        conversion, use \ref cpu_to_be16 instead.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
+				 */
+				#define CPU_TO_BE16(x)           SWAPENDIAN_16(x)
+
+				/** Performs a conversion on a natively encoded 32-bit piece of data to ensure that it
+				 *  is in Big Endian format regardless of the currently selected CPU architecture.
+				 *
+				 *  On big endian architectures, this macro does nothing.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This macro is designed for compile-time conversion of data - for run-time endianness
+				 *        conversion, use \ref cpu_to_be32 instead.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_EndianConversion
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] x  Data to perform the endianness conversion on.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Endian corrected version of the input value.
+				 */
+				#define CPU_TO_BE32(x)           SWAPENDIAN_32(x)
+
+				//! @}
+			#endif
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Function to reverse the byte ordering of the individual bytes in a 16 bit value.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_ByteSwapping
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Word  Word of data whose bytes are to be swapped.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Input data with the individual bytes reversed.
+			 */
+			static inline uint16_t SwapEndian_16(const uint16_t Word) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST;
+			static inline uint16_t SwapEndian_16(const uint16_t Word)
+			{
+				if (GCC_IS_COMPILE_CONST(Word))
+				  return SWAPENDIAN_16(Word);
+
+				uint8_t Temp;
+
+				union
+				{
+					uint16_t Word;
+					uint8_t  Bytes[2];
+				} Data;
+
+				Data.Word = Word;
+
+				Temp = Data.Bytes[0];
+				Data.Bytes[0] = Data.Bytes[1];
+				Data.Bytes[1] = Temp;
+
+				return Data.Word;
+			}
+
+			/** Function to reverse the byte ordering of the individual bytes in a 32 bit value.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_ByteSwapping
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] DWord  Double word of data whose bytes are to be swapped.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Input data with the individual bytes reversed.
+			 */
+			static inline uint32_t SwapEndian_32(const uint32_t DWord) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST;
+			static inline uint32_t SwapEndian_32(const uint32_t DWord)
+			{
+				if (GCC_IS_COMPILE_CONST(DWord))
+				  return SWAPENDIAN_32(DWord);
+
+				uint8_t Temp;
+
+				union
+				{
+					uint32_t DWord;
+					uint8_t  Bytes[4];
+				} Data;
+
+				Data.DWord = DWord;
+
+				Temp = Data.Bytes[0];
+				Data.Bytes[0] = Data.Bytes[3];
+				Data.Bytes[3] = Temp;
+
+				Temp = Data.Bytes[1];
+				Data.Bytes[1] = Data.Bytes[2];
+				Data.Bytes[2] = Temp;
+
+				return Data.DWord;
+			}
+
+			/** Function to reverse the byte ordering of the individual bytes in a n byte value.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_ByteSwapping
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] Data    Pointer to a number containing an even number of bytes to be reversed.
+			 *  \param[in]     Length  Length of the data in bytes.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Input data with the individual bytes reversed.
+			 */
+			static inline void SwapEndian_n(void* const Data,
+			                                uint8_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static inline void SwapEndian_n(void* const Data,
+			                                uint8_t Length)
+			{
+				uint8_t* CurrDataPos = (uint8_t*)Data;
+
+				while (Length > 1)
+				{
+					uint8_t Temp = *CurrDataPos;
+					*CurrDataPos = *(CurrDataPos + Length - 1);
+					*(CurrDataPos + Length - 1) = Temp;
+
+					CurrDataPos++;
+					Length -= 2;
+				}
+			}
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/BuildSystem.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/BuildSystem.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7ddfa1be3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/BuildSystem.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,975 @@
+/** \file

+ *

+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special

+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.

+ */

+

+/** \page Page_BuildSystem The LUFA Build System

+ *

+ *  \section Sec_BuildSystem_Overview Overview of the LUFA Build System

+ *  The LUFA build system is an attempt at making a set of re-usable, modular build make files which

+ *  can be referenced in a LUFA powered project, to minimize the amount of code required in an

+ *  application makefile. The system is written in GNU Make, and each module is independent of

+ *  one-another.

+ *

+ *  For details on the prerequisites needed for Linux and Windows machines to be able to use the LUFA

+ *  build system, see \ref Sec_CompilingApps_Prerequisites.

+ *

+ *  To use a LUFA build system module, simply add an include to your project makefile. All user projects

+ *  should at a minimum include \ref Page_BuildModule_CORE for base functionality:

+ *  \code

+ *  include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk

+ *  \endcode

+ *

+ *  Once included in your project makefile, the associated build module targets will be added to your

+ *  project's build makefile targets automatically. To call a build target, run <tt>make {TARGET_NAME}</tt>

+ *  from the command line, substituting in the appropriate target name.

+ *

+ *  \see \ref Sec_ConfiguringApps_AppMakefileParams for a copy of the sample LUFA project makefile.

+ *

+ *  Each build module may have one or more mandatory parameters (GNU Make variables) which <i>must</i>

+ *  be supplied in the project makefile for the module to work, and one or more optional parameters which

+ *  may be defined and which will assume a sensible default if not.

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildSystem_Modules Available Modules

+ *

+ *  The following modules are included in this LUFA release:

+ *

+ *  \li \subpage Page_BuildModule_ATPROGRAM - Device Programming

+ *  \li \subpage Page_BuildModule_AVRDUDE - Device Programming

+ *  \li \subpage Page_BuildModule_BUILD - Compiling/Assembling/Linking

+ *  \li \subpage Page_BuildModule_CORE - Core Build System Functions

+ *  \li \subpage Page_BuildModule_CPPCHECK - Static Code Analysis

+ *  \li \subpage Page_BuildModule_DFU - Device Programming

+ *  \li \subpage Page_BuildModule_DOXYGEN - Automated Source Code Documentation

+ *  \li \subpage Page_BuildModule_HID - Device Programming

+ *  \li \subpage Page_BuildModule_SOURCES - LUFA Module Source Code Variables

+ *

+ *  If you have problems building using the LUFA build system, see \subpage Page_BuildTroubleshooting for resolution steps.

+ */

+

+ /** \page Page_BuildModule_BUILD The BUILD build module

+ *

+ *  The BUILD LUFA build system module, providing targets for the compilation,

+ *  assembling and linking of an application from source code into binary files

+ *  suitable for programming into a target device, using the GCC compiler.

+ *

+ *  To use this module in your application makefile, add the following code:

+ *  \code

+ *  include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk

+ *  \endcode

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_BUILD_Requirements Requirements

+ *  This module requires the the architecture appropriate binaries of the GCC compiler are available in your

+ *  system's <b>PATH</b> variable. The GCC compiler and associated toolchain is distributed in Atmel AVR Studio

+ *  5.x and Atmel Studio 6.x installation directories, as well as in many third party distribution packages.

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_BUILD_Targets Targets

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>size</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Display size of the compiled application FLASH and SRAM segments.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>symbol-sizes</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Display a size-sorted list of symbols from the compiled application, in decimal bytes.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>lib</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Build and archive all source files into a library A binary file.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>all</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Build and link the application into ELF debug and HEX binary files.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>elf</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Build and link the application into an ELF debug file.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>bin</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Build and link the application and produce a BIN binary file.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>hex</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Build and link the application and produce HEX and EEP binary files.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>lss</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Build and link the application and produce a LSS source code/assembly code mixed listing file.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>clean</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Remove all intermediary files and binary output files.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>mostlyclean</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Remove all intermediary files but preserve any binary output files.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt><i>&lt;filename&gt;</i>.s</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Create an assembly listing of a given input C/C++ source file.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_BUILD_MandatoryParams Mandatory Parameters

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>TARGET</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Name of the application output file prefix (e.g. <tt>TestApplication</tt>).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>ARCH</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Architecture of the target processor (see \ref Page_DeviceSupport).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>MCU</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Name of the Atmel processor model (e.g. <tt>at90usb1287</tt>).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>SRC</tt></td>

+ *    <td>List of relative or absolute paths to the application C (.c), C++ (.cpp) and Assembly (.S) source files.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>F_USB</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Speed in Hz of the input clock frequency to the target's USB controller.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>LUFA_PATH</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Path to the LUFA library core, either relative or absolute (e.g. <tt>../LUFA-000000/LUFA/</tt>).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_BUILD_OptionalParams Optional Parameters

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>BOARD</tt></td>

+ *    <td>LUFA board hardware drivers to use (see \ref Page_DeviceSupport).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>OPTIMIZATION</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Optimization level to use when compiling source files (see GCC manual).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>C_STANDARD</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Version of the C standard to apply when compiling C++ source files (see GCC manual).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>CPP_STANDARD</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Version of the C++ standard to apply when compiling C++ source files (see GCC manual).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>DEBUG_FORMAT</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Format of the debug information to embed in the generated object files (see GCC manual).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>DEBUG_LEVEL</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Level of the debugging information to embed in the generated object files (see GCC manual).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>F_CPU</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Speed of the processor CPU clock, in Hz.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>C_FLAGS</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Flags to pass to the C compiler only, after the automatically generated flags.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>CPP_FLAGS</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Flags to pass to the C++ compiler only, after the automatically generated flags.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>ASM_FLAGS</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Flags to pass to the assembler only, after the automatically generated flags.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>CC_FLAGS</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Common flags to pass to the C/C++ compiler and assembler, after the automatically generated flags.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>COMPILER_PATH</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Directory where the C/C++ toolchain is located, if not available in the system <tt>PATH</tt>.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>LD_FLAGS</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Flags to pass to the linker, after the automatically generated flags.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>LINKER_RELAXATIONS</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Enables or disables linker relaxations when linking the application binary. This can reduce the total size

+ *        of the application by replacing full \c CALL instructions with smaller \c RCALL instructions where possible.

+ *        \note On some unpatched versions of binutils, this can cause link failures in some circumstances. If you

+ *              receive a link error <tt>relocation truncated to fit: R_AVR_13_PCREL</tt>, disable this setting.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>OBJDIR</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Directory to place the generated object and dependency files. If set to "." the same folder as the source file will be used.

+ *        \note When this option is enabled, all source filenames <b>must</b> be unique.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>OBJECT_FILES</tt></td>

+ *    <td>List of additional object files that should be linked into the resulting binary.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_BUILD_ProvidedVariables Module Provided Variables

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><i>None</i></td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_BUILD_ProvidedMacros Module Provided Macros

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><i>None</i></td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ */

+

+/** \page Page_BuildModule_CORE The CORE build module

+ *

+ *  The core LUFA build system module, providing common build system help and information targets.

+ *

+ *  To use this module in your application makefile, add the following code:

+ *  \code

+ *  include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk

+ *  \endcode

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_CORE_Requirements Requirements

+ *  This module has no requirements outside a standard *nix shell like environment; the <tt>sh</tt>

+ *  shell, GNU <tt>make</tt> and *nix CoreUtils (<tt>echo</tt>, <tt>printf</tt>, etc.).

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_CORE_Targets Targets

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>help</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Display build system help and configuration information.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>list_targets</tt></td>

+ *    <td>List all available build targets from the build system.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>list_modules</tt></td>

+ *    <td>List all available build modules from the build system.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>list_mandatory</tt></td>

+ *    <td>List all mandatory parameters required by the included modules.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>list_optional</tt></td>

+ *    <td>List all optional parameters required by the included modules.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>list_provided</tt></td>

+ *    <td>List all variables provided by the included modules.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>list_macros</tt></td>

+ *    <td>List all macros provided by the included modules.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_CORE_MandatoryParams Mandatory Parameters

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><i>None</i></td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_CORE_OptionalParams Optional Parameters

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><i>None</i></td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_CORE_ProvidedVariables Module Provided Variables

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><i>None</i></td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_CORE_ProvidedMacros Module Provided Macros

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><i>None</i></td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ */

+

+/** \page Page_BuildModule_ATPROGRAM The ATPROGRAM build module

+ *

+ *  The ATPROGRAM programming utility LUFA build system module, providing targets to reprogram an

+ *  Atmel processor FLASH and EEPROM memories with a project's compiled binary output files.

+ *

+ *  To use this module in your application makefile, add the following code:

+ *  \code

+ *  include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk

+ *  \endcode

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_ATPROGRAM_Requirements Requirements

+ *  This module requires the <tt>atprogram.exe</tt> utility to be available in your system's <b>PATH</b>

+ *  variable. The <tt>atprogram.exe</tt> utility is distributed in Atmel AVR Studio 5.x and Atmel Studio 6.x

+ *  inside the application install folder's "\atbackend" subdirectory.

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_ATPROGRAM_Targets Targets

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>atprogram</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Program the device FLASH memory with the application's executable data.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>atprogram-ee</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Program the device EEPROM memory with the application's EEPROM data.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_ATPROGRAM_MandatoryParams Mandatory Parameters

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>MCU</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Name of the Atmel processor model (e.g. <tt>at90usb1287</tt>).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>TARGET</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Name of the application output file prefix (e.g. <tt>TestApplication</tt>).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_ATPROGRAM_OptionalParams Optional Parameters

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>ATPROGRAM_PROGRAMMER</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Name of the Atmel programmer or debugger tool to communicate with (e.g. <tt>jtagice3</tt>).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>ATPROGRAM_INTERFACE</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Name of the programming interface to use when programming the target (e.g. <tt>spi</tt>).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>ATPROGRAM_PORT</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Name of the communication port to use when when programming with a serially connected tool (e.g. <tt>COM2</tt>).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_ATPROGRAM_ProvidedVariables Module Provided Variables

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><i>None</i></td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_ATPROGRAM_ProvidedMacros Module Provided Macros

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><i>None</i></td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ */

+

+/** \page Page_BuildModule_AVRDUDE The AVRDUDE build module

+ *

+ *  The AVRDUDE programming utility LUFA build system module, providing targets to reprogram an

+ *  Atmel processor FLASH and EEPROM memories with a project's compiled binary output files.

+ *

+ *  To use this module in your application makefile, add the following code:

+ *  \code

+ *  include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk

+ *  \endcode

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_AVRDUDE_Requirements Requirements

+ *  This module requires the <tt>avrdude</tt> utility to be available in your system's <b>PATH</b>

+ *  variable. The <tt>avrdude</tt> utility is distributed in the old WinAVR project releases for

+ *  Windows (<a>http://winavr.sourceforge.net</a>) or can be installed on *nix systems via the project's

+ *  source code (<a>https://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude</a>) or through the package manager.

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_AVRDUDE_Targets Targets

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>avrdude</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Program the device FLASH memory with the application's executable data.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>avrdude-ee</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Program the device EEPROM memory with the application's EEPROM data.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_AVRDUDE_MandatoryParams Mandatory Parameters

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>MCU</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Name of the Atmel processor model (e.g. <tt>at90usb1287</tt>).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>TARGET</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Name of the application output file prefix (e.g. <tt>TestApplication</tt>).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_AVRDUDE_OptionalParams Optional Parameters

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Name of the programmer or debugger tool to communicate with (e.g. <tt>jtagicemkii</tt>).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>AVRDUDE_PORT</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Name of the communication port to use when when programming with the connected tool (e.g. <tt>COM2</tt>, <tt>/dev/ttyUSB0</tt> or <tt>usb</tt>).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>AVRDUDE_FLAGS</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Additional flags to pass to avrdude when programming, applied after the automatically generated flags.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_AVRDUDE_ProvidedVariables Module Provided Variables

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><i>None</i></td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_AVRDUDE_ProvidedMacros Module Provided Macros

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><i>None</i></td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ */

+

+ /** \page Page_BuildModule_CPPCHECK The CPPCHECK build module

+ *

+ *  The CPPCHECK programming utility LUFA build system module, providing targets to statically

+ *  analyze C and C++ source code for errors and performance/style issues.

+ *

+ *  To use this module in your application makefile, add the following code:

+ *  \code

+ *  include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk

+ *  \endcode

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_CPPCHECK_Requirements Requirements

+ *  This module requires the <tt>cppcheck</tt> utility to be available in your system's <b>PATH</b>

+ *  variable. The <tt>cppcheck</tt> utility is distributed through the project's home page

+ *  (<a>http://cppcheck.sourceforge.net</a>) for Windows, and can be installed on *nix systems via

+ *  the project's source code or through the package manager.

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_CPPCHECK_Targets Targets

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>cppcheck</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Statically analyze the project source code for issues.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>cppcheck-config</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Check the <tt>cppcheck</tt> configuration - scan source code and warn about missing header files and other issues.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_CPPCHECK_MandatoryParams Mandatory Parameters

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>SRC</tt></td>

+ *    <td>List of source files to statically analyze.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_CPPCHECK_OptionalParams Optional Parameters

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>CPPCHECK_INCLUDES</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Path of extra directories to check when attemting to resolve C/C++ header file includes.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>CPPCHECK_EXCLUDES</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Paths or path fragments to exclude when analyzing.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>CPPCHECK_MSG_TEMPLATE</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Output message template to use when printing errors, warnings and information (see <tt>cppcheck</tt> documentation).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>CPPCHECK_ENABLE</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Analysis rule categories to enable (see <tt>cppcheck</tt> documentation).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>CPPCHECK_SUPPRESS</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Specific analysis rules to suppress (see <tt>cppcheck</tt> documentation).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>CPPCHECK_FAIL_ON_WARNING</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Set to <b>Y</b> to fail the analysis job with an error exit code if warnings are found, <b>N</b> to continue without failing.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>CPPCHECK_QUIET</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Set to <b>Y</b> to suppress all output except warnings and errors, <b>N</b> to show verbose output information.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>CPPCHECK_FLAGS</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Extra flags to pass to <tt>cppcheck</tt>, after the automatically generated flags.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_CPPCHECK_ProvidedVariables Module Provided Variables

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><i>None</i></td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_CPPCHECK_ProvidedMacros Module Provided Macros

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><i>None</i></td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ */

+

+ /** \page Page_BuildModule_DFU The DFU build module

+ *

+ *  The DFU programming utility LUFA build system module, providing targets to reprogram an

+ *  Atmel processor FLASH and EEPROM memories with a project's compiled binary output files.

+ *  This module requires a DFU class bootloader to be running in the target, compatible with

+ *  the DFU bootloader protocol as published by Atmel.

+ *

+ *  To use this module in your application makefile, add the following code:

+ *  \code

+ *  include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk

+ *  \endcode

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_DFU_Requirements Requirements

+ *  This module requires either the <tt>batchisp</tt> utility from Atmel's FLIP utility, or the open

+ *  source <tt>dfu-programmer</tt> utility (<a>http://dfu-programmer.sourceforge.net/</a>) to be

+ *  available in your system's <b>PATH</b> variable. On *nix systems the <tt>dfu-programmer</tt> utility

+ *  can be installed via the project's source code or through the package manager.

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_DFU_Targets Targets

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>dfu</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Program the device FLASH memory with the application's executable data using <tt>dfu-programmer</tt>.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>dfu-ee</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Program the device EEPROM memory with the application's EEPROM data using <tt>dfu-programmer</tt>.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>flip</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Program the device FLASH memory with the application's executable data using <tt>batchisp</tt>.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>flip-ee</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Program the device EEPROM memory with the application's EEPROM data using <tt>batchisp</tt>.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_DFU_MandatoryParams Mandatory Parameters

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>MCU</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Name of the Atmel processor model (e.g. <tt>at90usb1287</tt>).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>TARGET</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Name of the application output file prefix (e.g. <tt>TestApplication</tt>).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_DFU_OptionalParams Optional Parameters

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><i>None</i></td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_DFU_ProvidedVariables Module Provided Variables

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><i>None</i></td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_DFU_ProvidedMacros Module Provided Macros

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><i>None</i></td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ */

+

+ /** \page Page_BuildModule_DOXYGEN The DOXYGEN build module

+ *

+ *  The DOXYGEN code documentation utility LUFA build system module, providing targets to generate

+ *  project HTML and other format documentation from a set of source files that include special

+ *  Doxygen comments.

+ *

+ *  To use this module in your application makefile, add the following code:

+ *  \code

+ *  include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk

+ *  \endcode

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_DOXYGEN_Requirements Requirements

+ *  This module requires the <tt>doxygen</tt> utility from the Doxygen website

+ *  (<a>http://www.doxygen.org/</a>) to be available in your system's <b>PATH</b> variable. On *nix

+ *  systems the <tt>doxygen</tt> utility can be installed via the project's source code or through

+ *  the package manager.

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_DOXYGEN_Targets Targets

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>doxygen</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Generate project documentation.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>doxygen_create</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Create a new Doxygen configuration file using the latest template.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>doxygen_upgrade</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Upgrade an existing Doxygen configuration file to the latest template</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_DOXYGEN_MandatoryParams Mandatory Parameters

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>LUFA_PATH</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Path to the LUFA library core, either relative or absolute (e.g. <tt>../LUFA-000000/LUFA/</tt>).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_DOXYGEN_OptionalParams Optional Parameters

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>DOXYGEN_CONF</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Name and path of the base Doxygen configuration file for the project.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>DOXYGEN_FAIL_ON_WARNING</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Set to <b>Y</b> to fail the generation with an error exit code if warnings are found other than unsupported configuration parameters, <b>N</b> to continue without failing.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>DOXYGEN_OVERRIDE_PARAMS</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Extra Doxygen configuration parameters to apply, overriding the corresponding config entry in the project's configuration file (e.g. <tt>QUIET=YES</tt>).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_DOXYGEN_ProvidedVariables Module Provided Variables

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><i>None</i></td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_DOXYGEN_ProvidedMacros Module Provided Macros

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><i>None</i></td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ */

+

+ /** \page Page_BuildModule_HID The HID build module

+ *

+ *  The HID programming utility LUFA build system module, providing targets to reprogram an

+ *  Atmel processor's FLASH memory with a project's compiled binary output file. This module

+ *  requires a HID class bootloader to be running in the target, using a protocol compatible

+ *  with the PJRC "HalfKay" protocol (<a>http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/halfkay_protocol.html</a>).

+ *

+ *  To use this module in your application makefile, add the following code:

+ *  \code

+ *  include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk

+ *  \endcode

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_HID_Requirements Requirements

+ *  This module requires either the <tt>hid_bootloader_cli</tt> utility from the included LUFA HID

+ *  class bootloader API subdirectory, or the <tt>teensy_loader_cli</tt> utility from PJRC

+ *  (<a>http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/loader_cli.html</a>) to be available in your system's <b>PATH</b>

+ *  variable.

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_HID_Targets Targets

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>hid</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Program the device FLASH memory with the application's executable data using <tt>hid_bootloader_cli</tt>.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>hid-ee</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Program the device EEPROM memory with the application's EEPROM data using <tt>hid_bootloader_cli</tt> and

+ *        a temporary AVR application programmed into the target's FLASH.

+ *        \note This will erase the currently loaded application in the target.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>teensy</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Program the device FLASH memory with the application's executable data using <tt>teensy_loader_cli</tt>.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>teensy-ee</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Program the device EEPROM memory with the application's EEPROM data using <tt>teensy_loader_cli</tt> and

+ *        a temporary AVR application programmed into the target's FLASH.

+ *        \note This will erase the currently loaded application in the target.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_HID_MandatoryParams Mandatory Parameters

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>MCU</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Name of the Atmel processor model (e.g. <tt>at90usb1287</tt>).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>TARGET</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Name of the application output file prefix (e.g. <tt>TestApplication</tt>).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_HID_OptionalParams Optional Parameters

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><i>None</i></td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_HID_ProvidedVariables Module Provided Variables

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><i>None</i></td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_HID_ProvidedMacros Module Provided Macros

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><i>None</i></td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ */

+

+ /** \page Page_BuildModule_SOURCES The SOURCES build module

+ *

+ *  The SOURCES LUFA build system module, providing variables listing the various LUFA source files

+ *  required to be build by a project for a given LUFA module. This module gives a way to reference

+ *  LUFA source files symbolically, so that changes to the library structure do not break the library

+ *  makefile.

+ *

+ *  To use this module in your application makefile, add the following code:

+ *  \code

+ *  include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk

+ *  \endcode

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_SOURCES_Requirements Requirements

+ *  None.

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_SOURCES_Targets Targets

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><i>None</i></td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_SOURCES_MandatoryParams Mandatory Parameters

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>LUFA_PATH</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Path to the LUFA library core, either relative or absolute (e.g. <tt>../LUFA-000000/LUFA/</tt>).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>ARCH</tt></td>

+ *    <td>Architecture of the target processor (see \ref Page_DeviceSupport).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_SOURCES_OptionalParams Optional Parameters

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><i>None</i></td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_SOURCES_ProvidedVariables Module Provided Variables

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>LUFA_SRC_USB</tt></td>

+ *    <td>List of LUFA USB driver source files.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS</tt></td>

+ *    <td>List of LUFA USB Class driver source files.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>LUFA_SRC_TEMPERATURE</tt></td>

+ *    <td>List of LUFA temperature sensor driver source files.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>LUFA_SRC_SERIAL</tt></td>

+ *    <td>List of LUFA Serial U(S)ART driver source files.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>LUFA_SRC_TWI</tt></td>

+ *    <td>List of LUFA TWI driver source files.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><tt>LUFA_SRC_PLATFORM</tt></td>

+ *    <td>List of LUFA architecture specific platform management source files.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  \section SSec_BuildModule_SOURCES_ProvidedMacros Module Provided Macros

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td><i>None</i></td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ */

+

+/** \page Page_BuildTroubleshooting Troubleshooting Information

+ *

+ *  LUFA uses a lot of advanced features of the AVR-GCC compiler, linker, and surrounding binaries. This can sometimes lead to problems compiling applications if one of these

+ *  features is buggy in the version of the tools used in a build environment. Missing utilities and incorrectly set makefile configuration options can also result in different

+ *  errors being produced when compilation or other operations are attempted. The table below lists a set of commonly encountered errors and their resolutions.

+ *

+ *  <table>

+ *    <tr>

+ *    <th>Problem</th>

+ *    <th>Resolution</th>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td>Error &quot;<b><tt>relocation truncated to fit: R_AVR_13_PCREL against symbol <i>{X}</i></tt></b>&quot; shown when compiling.</td>

+ *    <td>Try compiling with the setting <tt>LINKER_RELAXATIONS=N</tt> in your LUFA Build System 2.0 makefile, or remove the line <tt>-Wl,--relax</tt>

+ *        from other makefiles. Alternatively, make sure you have the latest version of the Atmel Toolchain installed for your system.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td>Error &quot;<b><tt>error: ld terminated with signal 11 [Segmentation fault]</tt></b>&quot; shown when compiling.</td>

+ *    <td>Try compiling with the setting <tt>DEBUG_LEVEL=2</tt> in your LUFA Build System 2.0 makefile, or make sure you are using <tt>binutils</tt> version 2.22 or later.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td>Error &quot;<b><tt>EMERGENCY ABORT: INFINITE RECURSION DETECTED</tt></b>&quot; shown when compiling.</td>

+ *    <td>Make sure you are using an up to date version of GNU Make when compiling. This error is a safety system added to the mid-level makefiles, to prevent an issue with

+ *        GNU make or other variants of Make causing an infinitely recursive build.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td>Error &quot;<b><tt>Unsupported architecture &quot;<i>{X}</i>&quot;</tt></b>&quot; shown when compiling.</td>

+ *    <td>Ensure your makefile's <tt>ARCH</tt> setting is set to one of the architecture names (case-sensitive) supported by the version of LUFA you are compiling against.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td>Error &quot;<b><tt>Makefile <i>{X}</i> value not set</tt></b>&quot; shown when compiling.</td>

+ *    <td>The specified Makefile value was not configured in your project's makefile or on the command line, and the nominated setting is required by one or more LUFA

+ *        build system modules. Define the value in your project makefile and try again.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td>Error &quot;<b><tt>Makefile <i>{X}</i> option cannot be blank</tt></b>&quot; shown when compiling.</td>

+ *    <td>The specified Makefile value was configured in your project's makefile or on the command line, but was set to an empty value. For the nominated configuration

+ *        option, an empty value is not allowed. Define the nominated setting to a correct non-blank value and try again.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td>Error &quot;<b><tt>Makefile <i>{X}</i> option must be Y or N</tt></b>&quot; shown when compiling.</td>

+ *    <td>The specified Makefile value was configured in your project's makefile or on the command line, but was set to a value other than a Y (for "Yes") or "N" (for "No").

+ *        This configuration option is required to be one of the aforementioned boolean values, and other values are invalid. Set this option to either Y or N and try again.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td>Error &quot;<b><tt>Unknown input source file formats: <i>{X}</i></tt></b>&quot; shown when compiling.</td>

+ *    <td>The nominated source files, specified in your project's makefile in the <tt>SRC</tt> configuration option, has an extension that the LUFA build system does not

+ *        recognise. The file extensions are case sensitive, and must be one of the supported formats (<tt>*.c</tt>, <tt>*.cpp</tt> or <tt>*.S</tt>).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td>Error &quot;<b><tt>Cannot build with OBJDIR parameter set - one or more object file name is not unique</tt></b>&quot; shown when compiling.</td>

+ *    <td>When a project is built with a non-empty <tt>OBJDIR</tt> object directory name set, all input source files must have unique names, excluding extension and path.

+ *        This means that input files that are named identically and differ only by their path or extension are invalid when this mode is used.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td>Error &quot;<b><tt>Source file does not exist: <i>{X}</i></tt></b>&quot; shown when compiling.</td>

+ *    <td>The nominated input source file, specified in the user project's <tt>SRC</tt> parameter, could not be found. Ensure the source file exists and the absolute or

+ *        relative path given in the user project makefile is correct and try again.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td>Error &quot;<b><tt>Doxygen configuration file <i>{X}</i> does not exist</tt></b>&quot; shown when upgrading a Doxygen configuration file.</td>

+ *    <td>The nominated Doxygen configuration file, specified in the user project's <tt>DOXYGEN_CONF</tt> parameter, could not be found. Ensure the configuration file exists

+ *        and the absolute or relative path given in the user project makefile is correct and try again, or run the appropriate makefile target to generate a new configuration

+ *        file.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td>Error &quot;<b><tt>avr-gcc: error: unrecognized option '<i>{X}</i>'</tt></b>&quot; shown when compiling.</td>

+ *    <td>An unrecognised option was supplied to the compiler, usually in the <tt>C_FLAGS</tt>, <tt>CPP_FLAGS</tt>, <tt>ASM_FLAGS</tt> or <tt>CC_FLAGS</tt> configuration

+ *        options. The nominated compiler switch may be invalid, or unsupported by the version of AVR-GCC on the host system. Remove the unrecognised flag if invalid, or

+ *        upgrade to the latest AVR-GCC. If the option is a valid linker option, use the prefix "-Wl," to ensure it is passed to the linker correctly.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td>Error &quot;<b><tt>makefile:{X}: {Y}.mk: No such file or directory</tt></b>&quot; shown when make is invoked.</td>

+ *    <td>The path to the nominated makefile module was incorrect. This usually indicates that the makefile <tt>LUFA_PATH</tt> option is not set to a valid relative or

+ *        absolute path to the LUFA library core.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td>Error &quot;<b><tt>fatal error: LUFAConfig.h: No such file or directory</tt></b>&quot; shown when compiling.</td>

+ *    <td>The <tt>USE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER</tt> compile time option was set in the user project makefile, but the user supplied <tt>LUFAConfig.h</tt> header could not be

+ *        found. Ensure that the directory that contains this configuration file is correctly passed to the compiler via the -I switch in the makefile <tt>CC_FLAGS</tt>

+ *        parameter.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td>Error &quot;<b><tt>ld.exe: section .apitable_trampolines loaded at <i>{X}</i> overlaps section .text</tt></b>&quot; shown when compiling a bootloader.</td>

+ *    <td>The bootloader is compiling too large for the given <tt>FLASH_SIZE_KB</tt> and <tt>BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB</tt> parameters set in the bootloader makefile. This

+ *        usually indicates that these values are incorrect for the specified device the bootloader is targeting. If these values are correct, a newer version of the

+ *        compiler may need to be used to ensure that the bootloader is built within the section size constraints of the target device.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td>Error &quot;<b><tt>unknown MCU '<i>{X}</i>' specified</tt></b>&quot; shown when compiling.</td>

+ *    <td>The specified microcontroller device model name set in the user application's makefile as the <tt>MCU</tt> parameter is incorrect, or unsupported by the

+ *        version of the compiler being used. Make sure the model name is correct, or upgrade to the latest Atmel Toolchain to obtain newer device support.</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *   <tr>

+ *    <td>Error &quot;<b><tt>undefined reference to `<i>{X}</i>'</tt></b>&quot; shown when compiling.</td>

+ *    <td>This is usually caused by a missing source file in the user application's <tt>SRC</tt> configuration parameter. If the indicated symbol is one from the LUFA

+ *        library, you may be missing a LUFA source makefile module (see \ref Page_BuildModule_SOURCES).</td>

+ *   </tr>

+ *  </table>

+ *

+ *  For troubleshooting other errors you encounter, please see \ref Sec_ProjectHelp.

+ */

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/BuildingLinkableLibraries.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/BuildingLinkableLibraries.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cbbae4b8e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/BuildingLinkableLibraries.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \page Page_BuildLibrary Building as a Linkable Library
+ *
+ *  The LUFA library can be built as a proper linkable library (with the extension .a) under AVR-GCC, so that
+ *  the library does not need to be recompiled with each revision of a user project. Instructions for creating
+ *  a library from a given source tree can be found in the AVR-GCC user manual included in the WinAVR install
+ *  /Docs/ directory.
+ *
+ *  However, building the library is <b>not recommended</b>, as the static (compile-time) options will be
+ *  unable to be changed without a recompilation of the LUFA code. Therefore, if the library is to be built
+ *  from the LUFA source, it should be made to be application-specific and compiled with the static options
+ *  that are required for each project (which should be recorded along with the library).
+ *
+ *  Normal library use has the library components compiled in at the same point as the application code, as
+ *  demonstrated in the library demos and applications. This is the preferred method, as the library is recompiled
+ *  each time to ensure that all static options for a particular application are applied.
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/ChangeLog.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/ChangeLog.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..482c8868e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/ChangeLog.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,1597 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+ /** \page Page_ChangeLog Project Changelog
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog140928 Version 140928
+  *  <b>New:</b>
+  *  - Core:
+  *   - Updated the BUILD build system module to add a new COMPILER_PATH optional variable
+  *   - Added Serial_IsSendReady() and Serial_IsSendComplete() functions to the Serial hardware peripheral driver
+  *   - Added support for the Arduino Yun board (ATMEGA32U4 co-processor)
+  *   - Added support for the Arduino Micro board (thanks to Zoltán Szőke)
+  *  - Library Applications:
+  *   - Added new Dual MIDI class driver device demo
+  *
+  *  <b>Changed:</b>
+  *  - Core:
+  *   - The RNDIS device class driver now takes a user-supplied buffer and buffer length for the internal RNDIS
+  *     message management (thanks to Peter Mc Shane)
+  *
+  *  <b>Fixed:</b>
+  *  - Core:
+  *   - Fixed device class driver pipe configuration routines returning success with a partially constructed instance
+  *     when a pipe configuration failed (thanks to Helge Suess)
+  *   - Fixed incorrect XMEGA DFLL reference frequency (thanks to Martin Aakerberg)
+  *   - Fixed possible infinite loop in the control endpoint stream write function (thanks to Clayton Knight)
+  *   - Fixed missing HID report ID prefix on HID class driver GetReport request responses (thanks to Bert van Hall)
+  *   - Fixed incorrect XMEGA USB controller clock division factory for non-Full Speed operation (thanks to Bert van Hall)
+  *   - Fixed the LUFA build system to prevent incorrect code from being generated in newer toolchains when building for larger
+  *     FLASH memory devices (thanks to demultiplexer)
+  *   - Fixed missing parenthesis in the MIDI_EVENT() macro which could cause incorrect results (thanks to hexwab)
+  *   - Fixed mixed capitalization of TWI in the XMEGA TWI driver causing compilation failures (thanks to Jacob Schloss)
+  *   - Fixed broken AVR8 USART-SPI peripheral driver (thanks to Phil Zakielarz)
+  *  - Library Applications:
+  *   - Fixed spurious 0xFE USART byte sent in the USBtoSerial project when the baud rate is changed (thanks to Carl Kjeldsen)
+  *   - Fixed blocking USART reads causing low throughput on slow baud rates in the USBtoSerial project (thanks to Nevada Smith)
+  *   - Fixed USART reception overrun corrupting the internal buffers in the USBtoSerial project (thanks to Nevada Smith)
+  *   - Fixed broken LowLevel Audio Out demo sampling frequency configuration (thanks to Torsten Duwe)
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog140302 Version 140302
+  *  <b>New:</b>
+  *  - Library Applications:
+  *   - Added new Bulk Vendor low level device demo
+  *   - Added new libUSB host Python and NodeJS application examples for the Class driver GenericHID demo (thanks to Laszlo Monda)
+  *   - Added new AVR8 USB option to keep 3.3V regulator enabled (thanks to Michael Hanselmann)
+  *   - Added new USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR() and USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY() convenience macros (thanks to Laszlo Monda)
+  *
+  *  <b>Changed:</b>
+  *  - Library Applications:
+  *   - Refactored out USB interface IDs in the demo applications into enums (thanks to Laszlo Monda)
+  *   - AVRISP-MKII Clone Project PDI/TPI frequency increased from 250KHz to 2MHz as it is now stable
+  *   - Increased TPI/PDI handshake delay to 100us from 1us to support targets with high amounts of capacitance on their
+  *     /RESET lines (thanks to Paul Duke)
+  *   - Changed the VERSION_BCD() macro to accept the major/minor/revision values as separate parameters
+  *
+  *  <b>Fixed:</b>
+  *  - Core:
+  *   - Fixed MIDI device class driver MIDI_Device_ReceiveEventPacket() for the XMEGA architecture
+  *  - Library Applications:
+  *   - Fixed incorrect signature bytes returned in the DFU bootloader
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog130901 Version 130901
+  *  <b>New:</b>
+  *  - Core:
+  *   - Added additional MIDI command definitions to the MIDI class driver (thanks to Daniel Dreibrodt)
+  *   - Added new CONCAT() and CONCAT_EXPANDED() convenience macros
+  *   - Added new Printer Device Class driver
+  *   - Added support for the XMEGA C3 Xplained board
+  *   - Added support for the U2S board (thanks to megal0maniac)
+  *   - Added TWI Master driver for the XMEGA architecture (thanks to Michael Janssen)
+  *  - Library Applications:
+  *   - Added new Printer class bootloader
+  *   - Added new Mass Storage class bootloader
+  *   - Added XMEGA support for class driver device demos (where applicable)
+  *   - Added Python host application example for the Generic HID class driver device demo
+  *   - Added Python alternative host application for the HID class bootloader
+  *
+  *  <b>Changed:</b>
+  *  - Core:
+  *   - Updated the BUILD build system module to produce binary BIN files in addition to Intel HEX files
+  *   - Updated the Android Accessory Class to accept version 2 protocol devices (with version 1 functionality)
+  *   - All board drivers now implement dummy functions and constants when BOARD is set to NONE
+  *   - Added missing LEDs to the XMEGA A3BU Xplained board LED driver (thanks to Michael Janssen)
+  *   - Changed board Dataflash drivers to automatically configure the appropriate SPI interface for the selected board
+  *  - Library Applications:
+  *   - Re-added Set Control Line State request handling to the CDC class bootloader to prevent issues with the .NET serial
+  *     class (thanks to Erik Lins)
+  *   - TemperatureDataLogger project dummy RTC mode now tracks real time (thanks to David Lazarus)
+  *
+  *  <b>Fixed:</b>
+  *  - Core:
+  *   - Fixed Low Speed USB devices broken when using the library HID Class driver (thanks to Michael)
+  *   - Fixed possible register corruption in USB Host mode on AVR8 devices when ORDERED_EP_CONFIG is used (thanks to Martin Aakerberg)
+  *   - Fixed Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress() returning invalid endpoint directions on AVR8 architecture devices (thanks to decerri)
+  *     under some circumstances
+  *   - Fixed incorrect USB device state set when a suspended LUFA device is woken while addressed but not configured (thanks to Balaji Krishnan)
+  *   - Fixed broken USART SPI driver for the AVR8 architecture due to incorrect initialization
+  *   - Fixed re-enumeration issue of XMEGA architecture targets (thanks to Jaroslav Jedlinsky)
+  *   - Fixed error receiving PIMA events via the Still Image Host class driver
+  *  - Library Applications:
+  *   - Added handler for SCSI_CMD_START_STOP_UNIT in demos using the Mass Storage class, to prevent ejection errors on *nix systems due to an
+  *     unknown SCSI command
+  *   - Fixed incorrect HID report descriptor generated for 16-bit axis ranges by the HID_DESCRIPTOR_MOUSE() and HID_DESCRIPTOR_JOYSTICK()
+  *     macros (thanks to Armory)
+  *   - Fixed incorrect HID report descriptor generated for button multiples of 8 by the HID_DESCRIPTOR_MOUSE() and HID_DESCRIPTOR_JOYSTICK()
+  *     macros
+  *   - Fixed race condition in the DFU class bootloader causing failed device reprogramming in some circumstances (thanks to Luis Mendes)
+  *   - Fixed incorrect time/date configuration data order in the TempDataLogger host application (thanks to David Lazarus)
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog130303 Version 130303
+  *  <b>New:</b>
+  *  - Core:
+  *   - Added support for the Arduino Leonardo board
+  *   - Added support for the Atmel UC3-A3 Xplained board
+  *   - Added support for the Xevelabs USB2AX revision 3.1 board
+  *   - Added support for the Dimex Stange-ISP board (thanks to Gerhard Wesser)
+  *   - Added new \c doxygen_upgrade and \c doxygen_create targets to the DOXYGEN build system module
+  *   - Added new Board Hardware Information board driver
+  *  - Library Applications:
+  *   - Added a different device serial number when the AVRISP-MKII Clone project is in libUSB compatibility mode, so that
+  *     both the libUSB and Jungo drivers can be installed at the same time without having to use a filter driver
+  *
+  *  <b>Changed:</b>
+  *  - Core:
+  *   - Added workaround for broken VBUS detection on AVR8 devices when a bootloader starts the application
+  *     via a software jump without first turning off the OTG pad (thanks to Simon Inns)
+  *  - Library Applications:
+  *   - Increased throughput in the USBtoSerial project now that data transmission is non-blocking (thanks to Joseph Lacerte)
+  *   - Updated bootloader makefiles to remove dependency on the \c bc command line calculator tool
+  *   - Updated AVRISP-MKII Clone Programmer project so that the SCK clock period is saved in EEPROM (thanks to Gerhard Wesser)
+  *   - Changed all *_SendByte() function prototypes to accept a void pointer for the input buffer (thanks to Simon Kuppers)
+  *
+  *  <b>Fixed:</b>
+  *  - Core:
+  *   - Fixed incorrectly issuing STALL response to unsupported control request SETUP packets, rather than in the data/status stage
+  *   - Fixed inverted LEDs_GetLEDs() function implementation for the Benito, Minimus and Arduino UNO boards
+  *   - Fixed missing Windows 32-bit compatibility sections in the LUFA INF driver files (thanks to Christan Beharrell)
+  *   - Fixed logic hole breaking USB operations on a USB controller with only one supported USB mode and no USB_DEVICE_ONLY or USB_HOST_ONLY
+  *     configuration token set
+  *   - Fixed possible rounding in the VERSION_BCD() macros for some 0.01 step increments (thanks to Oliver Zander)
+  *   - Fixed incorrect Dataflash functionality in the USBKEY board if the driver is modified for a single Dataflash chip (thanks to Jonathan Oakley)
+  *   - Fixed incorrect definitions of \c HID_KEYBOARD_LED_KANA, \c HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_EQUAL_SIGN and \c HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_EQUAL_SIGN_AS400
+  *     and added a missing definition for \c HID_KEYBOARD_SC_APPLICATION (thanks to David Monro)
+  *   - Fixed maximum allowed keyboard key code usage of \c 0x65 rather than \c 0xFF for the \c HID_DESCRIPTOR_KEYBOARD() macro (thanks to David Monro)
+  *   - Fixed hardware race condition that could cause failed device enumerations for AVR8 and UC3 architectures (thanks to Mike Beyhs)
+  *   - Fixed incorrect Minimus board LED definitions (thanks to Joonas Lahtinen)
+  *   - Fixed incorrect ordering of the linker options in the build system causing link failures in some cases
+  *   - Fixed bug in the TWI peripheral driver for the AVR8 devices causing incorrect failure codes to be returned in some cases (thanks to Peter K)
+  *   - Fixed swapped LED3 and LED4 masks for the Olimex-32U4 development board LED driver
+  *   - Fixed potential NULL pointer dereference in the HID Host mode Class Driver (thanks to Pavel Kuzmin)
+  *  - Library Applications:
+  *   - Fixed broken RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT compile time option in the AVRISP-MKII project
+  *   - Fixed incompatibility in the CDC class bootloader on some systems (thanks to Sylvain Munaut)
+  *   - Fixed lengthy timeouts in the USBtoSerial project if no application on the host is consuming data (thanks to Nicolas Saugnier)
+  *   - Fixed lengthy automatic data flushing in the CDC and MIDI device class drivers
+  *   - Fixed incorrect LED masks for received data display in the Device GenericHID demos (thanks to Denys Berkovskyy)
+  *   - Fixed incorrect output in the HIDReportViewer project when no device is connected (thanks to Pavel Kuzmin)
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog120730 Version 120730
+  *  <b>New:</b>
+  *  - Core:
+  *   - Added new, revamped modular build system with new makefile templates
+  *   - Added support for the BitWizard Multio and Big-Multio boards
+  *   - Added support for the DorkbotPDX Duce board
+  *   - Added support for the Olimex AVR-USB-32U4 board
+  *   - Added support for the Olimex AVR-USB-T32U4 board
+  *   - Added support for the Olimex AVR-ISP-MK2 board
+  *   - Added new Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable() function
+  *   - Added new Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable() function
+  *   - Added build test to verify correct compilation of all board drivers using all driver APIs
+  *   - Added build test to verify correct compilation of all bootloaders using all supported devices
+  *   - Added build test to verify that there are no detectable errors in the codebase via static analysis
+  *   - Added new JTAG_ENABLE() macro for the AVR8 architecture
+  *  - Library Applications:
+  *   - Modified the CDC Host demos to set a default CDC Line Encoding on enumerated devices
+  *   - Added Dataflash operational checks and aborts to all projects using the Dataflash to ensure it is working correctly before use
+  *   - Added new SerialToLCD user project contributed by Simon Foster
+  *   - Added new RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT compile time option to the AVRISP-MKII clone programmer project (thanks to Robert Spitzenpfeil)
+  *
+  *  <b>Changed:</b>
+  *  - Core:
+  *   - Android Accessory Host property strings changed from a struct of pointer to an array to prevent unaligned access on greater than 8-bit architectures
+  *   - Audio Device Class driver changed to also require the index of the Audio Control interface within the device, for SET/GET/CUR/MIN/MAX/RES property adjustments
+  *   - Removed variable axis support from the HID_DESCRIPTOR_JOYSTICK() macro due to OS incompatibilities, replaced with fixed 3-axis joystick report structure
+  *   - Removed the old pseudo-scheduler from the library as it was unused and deprecated since the 090810 release
+  *   - Endpoint indexes are now specified as full endpoint addresses within the device in device mode, rather than a logical index
+  *   - The Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint() function no longer takes an endpoint direction as a parameter, as this is now deduced from the specified full endpoint
+  *     address and type
+  *   - The Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint() function no longer takes a number of banks as a special mask; the number of banks is now specified as an integer parameter
+  *   - Endpoints are now configured via instances of a new struct USB_Endpoint_Table_t in all device mode class drivers, rather than a list of endpoint parameters
+  *   - Pipe indexes are now specified as full pipe addresses within the host in host mode, rather than a logical index
+  *   - The Pipe_ConfigurePipe() function no longer takes an pipe token as a parameter, as this is now deduced from the specified full pipe address and type
+  *   - The Pipe_ConfigurePipe() function no longer takes a number of banks as a special mask; the number of banks is now specified as an integer parameter
+  *   - Pipes are now configured via instances of a new struct USB_Pipe_Table_t in all host mode class drivers, rather than a list of pipe parameters
+  *   - Added support for various assert and debugging macros for the UC3 devices
+  *   - Changed MIDI event structure MIDI_EventPacket_t to use a single field for the combined virtual cable index and command ID, to prevent bitfield packing issues
+  *     on some architectures (thanks to Darren Gibbs)
+  *   - Changed board LED driver implementations of LEDs_ToggleLEDs() for the AVR8 architecture to use the fast PIN register toggle alternative function for speed
+  *  - Library Applications:
+  *   - Raised the guard bits in the AVRISP-MKII clone project when in PDI and TPI to 32, to prevent communication errors on low quality connections to a target
+  *   - Added additional bootloader API data to expose the bootloader start address and class to the DFU and CDC class bootloaders
+  *   - Reverted AVRISP-MKII clone project watchdog based command timeout patch in favour of a hardware timer, to allow for use in devices with WDTRST fuse programmed
+  *   - The library bootloaders will now correctly start the user application after a watchdog-based application start, even if the /HWB line is held low externally
+  *     during the reset phase
+  *   - Increased endpoint polling interval for all demos and projects to 5ms, as 1ms was causing some enumeration issues on some machines (thanks to Riku Salminen)
+  *
+  *  <b>Fixed:</b>
+  *  - Core:
+  *   - Fixed possible enumeration error if the user application selects a pipe other than the default Control pipe between the Powered and Default states of
+  *     the host state machine
+  *   - Fixed incorrect call to the user callback CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetInterfaceProperty() in the Audio Class device driver (thanks to Tiit Ratsep)
+  *   - Fixed compile error for the UC3 architecture when INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT is specified (thanks to Andrus Aaslaid)
+  *   - Fixed compile error if LEDs_Disable() is called and BOARD=NONE is set (thanks to Sam Lin)
+  *   - Fixed inverted LED logic in the OLIMEX162 board LED driver
+  *   - Fixed incorrect response to GET STATUS requests in device mode if NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER or NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP tokens are defined (thanks to Georg Glock)
+  *   - Fixed inverted LED logic in the USB2AX board LED driver
+  *   - Fixed possible deadlock in the CDC device driver if the USB connection is dropped while the CDC_REQ_SetLineEncoding control request is being processed by
+  *     the stack (thanks to Jonathan Hudgins)
+  *   - Fixed broken MIDI host driver MIDI_Host_ReceiveEventPacket() function due to not unfreezing the MIDI data IN pipe before use (thanks to Michael Brown)
+  *   - Fixed swapped Little Endian/Big Endian endpoint and pipe write code for the UC3 devices (thanks to Andrew Chu)
+  *   - Fixed the JTAG_DISABLE() macro clearing all other bits in MCUSR when called
+  *   - Fixed incorrect Micropendous board LED driver LEDs_SetAllLEDs() and LEDs_ChangeLEDs() function implementations (thanks to MitchJS)
+  *   - Fixed endianess issues in the RNDIS host class driver for UC3 devices (thanks to Andrew Chu)
+  *  - Library Applications:
+  *   - Fixed error in the AVRISP-MKII programmer when ISP mode is used at 64KHz (thanks to Ben R. Porter)
+  *   - Fixed AVRISP-MKII programmer project failing to compile for the U4 chips when VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL is defined to an invalid channel and NO_VTARGET_DETECT is
+  *     defined (thanks to Steven Morehouse)
+  *   - Fixed AVRISP-MKII programmer project reset line polarity inverted when the generated EEP file is loaded into the USB AVR's EEPROM and avr-dude is used
+  *   - Fixed CDC and DFU bootloaders failing to compile when the bootloader section size is 8KB or more (thanks to Georg Glock)
+  *   - Fixed CDC and DFU bootloaders API function offsets incorrect on some devices (thanks to Rod DeMay)
+  *   - Fixed incorrect DFU version number reported to the host in the  DFU bootloader descriptors (thanks to Georg Glock)
+  *   - Fixed incorrect version hundredths value encoding in VERSION_BCD() macro (thanks to Georg Glock)
+  *   - Fixed invalid configuration descriptor in the low level KeyboardMouse device demo (thanks to Jun Wako)
+  *   - Fixed CDC and DFU bootloaders API page erase and write function failures (thanks to Martin Lambert)
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog120219 Version 120219
+  *  <b>New:</b>
+  *  - Core:
+  *   - Added support for the XMEGA A3BU Xplained board
+  *   - Added support for the new B series XMEGA devices
+  *   - Added support for version 2 of the Teensy boards (thanks to Christoph Redecker)
+  *   - Added support for the USB2AX boards, hardware revision 1-3
+  *   - Added new Android Accessory Host class driver
+  *   - Added new USB_Host_GetDescriptor(), USB_Host_GetDeviceConfiguration() and USB_Host_GetInterfaceAltSetting() functions
+  *   - Added new CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetInterfaceProperty() callback to the Audio Device Class driver
+  *   - Added new LEDs_Disable(), Buttons_Disable() and Joystick_Disable() functions to the board hardware drivers
+  *   - Added support for the Micropendous family of boards (Arduino-like revisions 1 and 2, DIP, 32U2, A, 1, 2, 3 and 4)
+  *   - Added INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE and NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT compile time options (thanks to Opendous Inc.)
+  *   - Added support for the Atmel XMEGA B1 Xplained board
+  *   - Added Serial USART peripheral driver for the XMEGA architecture
+  *   - Added Master Mode SPI USART peripheral driver for the XMEGA and AVR8 architectures
+  *   - Added build test to verify correct compilation of as many modules as possible under as many architectures as possible under the C and C++ languages
+  *   - Added build test to verify correct compilation of the USB driver when forced into single USB mode under as many architectures as possible
+  *  - Library Applications:
+  *   - Added User Application APIs to the CDC and DFU class bootloaders
+  *   - Added INVERTED_ISP_MISO compile time option to the AVRISP-MKII clone project (thanks to Chuck Rohs)
+  *   - Added new Android Accessory Host demo (thanks to Opendous Inc.)
+  *
+  *  <b>Changed:</b>
+  *  - Core:
+  *   - When automatic PLL management mode is enabled on the U4 series AVR8 chips, the PLL is now configured for 48MHz and not
+  *     a divided 96MHz, to lower power consumption and to keep the system within the datasheet specs for 3.3V operation (thanks to Scott Vitale)
+  *   - Added Class, ClassDevice, ClassHost and ClassCommon to the internal class driver source filenames to prevent ambiguities
+  *   - Altered the Mass Storage Host class driver so that SCSI data STALLs from the attached device can be recovered from automatically without
+  *     having to reset the Mass Storage interface
+  *   - USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED constant renamed to USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED, as this was misnamed (thanks to NXP Semiconductors)
+  *   - Reordered board name definition indexes so that a misspelled BOARD compile option will default to BOARD_USER rather than BOARD_USBKEY
+  *   - Altered the HID class driver to only try to construct at maximum one packet per USB frame, to reduce CPU usage
+  *   - All USB Class Driver configuration struct values are now non-const, to allow for run-time modifications if required before configuring an instance
+  *  - Library Applications:
+  *   - Altered the Mass Storage Host LowLevel demo so that SCSI data STALLs from the attached device can be recovered from automatically without
+  *     having to reset the Mass Storage interface
+  *   - Updated the AVRISP-MKII Clone programmer project to be compatible with the latest version of AVR Studio (version 5.1)
+  *   - Changed the AVRISP-MKII Clone programmer project to report a fixed 3.3V VTARGET voltage on USB AVRs lacking an ADC instead of 5V to prevent
+  *     warnings in AVR Studio 5.1 when programming XMEGA devices
+  *   - Allow serial strings to be generated on the older AVR8 devices which do not explicitly state they contain unique values in the datasheet,
+  *     as this appears to be implemented in hardware
+  *
+  *  <b>Fixed:</b>
+  *  - Core:
+  *   - Fixed ring buffer size limited to 255 elements, instead of the intended 65535 elements.
+  *   - Fixed CDC class drivers not saving and sending all 16-bits of the control line states (thanks to Matthew Swabey)
+  *   - Fixed race conditions in the CDC, HID and Mass Storage class drivers when processing some control requests
+  *   - Fixed misspelled HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFIER_* macros in the HID class driver (thanks to Laszlo Monda)
+  *   - Fixed broken AVR32 endpoint/pipe communications when ORDERED_EP_CONFIG compile time option is not enabled (thanks to Matthias Jahr)
+  *   - Fixed broken compilation for the AVR32 devices if the NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time option was not enabled (thanks to Matthias Jahr)
+  *   - Fixed compiler warning on GCC with \c -wundef compile flag is used (thanks to Georg Glock)
+  *   - Fixed incorrect implementation of LEDs_ToggleLEDs() for the Adafruit-U4 board (thanks to Caroline Saliman)
+  *   - Fixed broken compilation of LUFA under C++ compilers when the Serial peripheral module header file is included in a C++ source file
+  *   - Fixed missing semicolon in the UC3 architecture host pipe functions
+  *   - Fixed failed compilation for the XMEGA architecture if USB_DEVICE_ONLY us not specified
+  *   - Fixed UC3 architecture ignoring the pipe size when Pipe_ConfigurePipe() is called
+  *  - Library Applications:
+  *   - Added reliability patches to the AVRISP-MKII Clone project's PDI/TPI protocols (thanks to Justin Mattair)
+  *   - Fixed AVRISP-MKII Clone compile warning on AVR8 U4 targets even when NO_VTARGET_DETECT is enabled
+  *   - Fixed AVRISP-MKII Clone failing to start application firmware once a TPI programming session is exited
+  *   - Fixed DFU class bootloader not resetting the LED pins as high impedance inputs when a software jump to the user applications is requested
+  *   - Fixed AVRISP-MKII Clone timing out on long programming commands such as programming the EEPROM on an ATMEGA8 (thanks to Martin Kelling)
+  *   - Fixed invalid PID value used in the TempDataLogger project host application (thanks to Anupam Pathak)
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog111009 Version 111009
+  *  <b>New:</b>
+  *  - Core:
+  *   - Added USE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER compile time option to include a LUFAConfig.h header in the user director for LUFA configuration
+  *     tokens as an alternative to tokens defined in the project makefile
+  *   - Added new USB_Host_SetInterfaceAltSetting() convenience function for the selection of an interface's alternative setting
+  *   - Added Audio class control request definitions
+  *   - Added new CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetEndpointProperty() callback to the Audio Device Class driver to allow for endpoint control manipulations
+  *     such as data sample rates
+  *   - Added support for the Audio class GET STATUS request in the Audio Device Class driver so that it is correctly ACKed when sent by the host
+  *   - Added new EVENT_Audio_Device_StreamStartStop() event to the Audio Device Class driver to detect stream start/stop events
+  *   - Added board driver support for the Busware TUL board
+  *   - Added board hardware driver support for the EVK1100 board
+  *   - Added board hardware driver support for the EVK1104 board
+  *   - Added new Host mode Audio Class driver
+  *   - Added new SPI_GetCurrentMode() function to the SPI peripheral driver
+  *   - Added RingBuffer_GetFreeCount() function to the Ring Buffer driver
+  *   - Added new HID_Host_SetIdlePeriod() function to the HID Host Class driver
+  *   - Added new USB_Host_ConfigurationNumber global variable to indicate the selected configuration in an attached device
+  *   - Added new USB_Host_GetDeviceStatus() function to the host standard request function set
+  *   - Added AVR USB XMEGA architecture port (currently incomplete/experimental)
+  *   - Added new STRINGIFY() and STRINGIFY_EXPANDED() convenience macros
+  *   - Added new JTAG_DISABLE() macro for the AVR8 architecture
+  *   - Added Device Qualifier standard descriptor structure definitions USB_StdDescriptor_DeviceQualifier_t and USB_Descriptor_DeviceQualifier_t
+  *  - Library Applications:
+  *   - Added RNDIS device mode to the Webserver project
+  *   - Added new incomplete AndroidAccessoryHost Host LowLevel demo
+  *   - Added new HIDReportViewer project
+  *   - Added new MediaControl project
+  *   - Added new AudioInputHost Host ClassDriver demo
+  *   - Added new AudioOutputHost Host ClassDriver demo
+  *   - Added new AudioInputHost Host LowLevel demo
+  *   - Added new AudioOutputHost Host LowLevel demo
+  *   - Added new "checksource" target to all library project makefiles
+  *   - Added new VTARGET_USE_INTERNAL_REF configuration option to the AVRISP-MKII clone project (thanks to Volker Bosch)
+  *
+  *  <b>Changed:</b>
+  *  - Core:
+  *   - Altered the definition of the USB_Audio_Descriptor_Format_t descriptor so that the user is now responsible for supplying
+  *     the supported audio sampling rates, to allow for multiple audio interfaces with different numbers of supported rates and/or
+  *     continuous sample rates
+  *   - Pipe_BoundEndpointNumber() has been renamed to Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress(), and now returns the correct endpoint direction
+  *     as part of the endpoint address
+  *   - Renamed global state variables that are specific to a certain USB mode to clearly indicate which mode the variable relates to,
+  *     by changing the USB_* prefix to USB_Device_* or USB_Host_*
+  *   - Removed the HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval and HOST_STATE_Suspended host state machine states, as these are no longer required
+  *   - Altered the USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration() function to update the global Host state machine state and the new
+  *     USB_Host_ConfigurationNumber global as required
+  *   - Added endian correcting code to the library USB class drivers for multiple architecture support
+  *   - Removed the ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_* macros, replaced by ENDPOINT_DIR_* instead
+  *   - Renamed the JTAG_DEBUG_ASSERT() macro to JTAG_ASSERT()
+  *   - Added variable number of axis to HID_DESCRIPTOR_JOYSTICK() for multi-axis joysticks above just X and Y
+  *   - Renamed USB_Host_ClearPipeStall() to USB_Host_ClearEndpointStall() as the function works on an endpoint address within the attached device,
+  *     and not a Pipe within the host
+  *   - The MS_Host_ResetMSInterface() now performs a full Mass Storage reset sequence to prevent data corruption in the event of a device
+  *     lock up or timeout (thanks to David Lyons)
+  *   - Added endian-correction to the CDC driver's Line Encoding control request handlers.
+  *  - Library Applications:
+  *   - Modified the Low Level and Class Driver AudioInput and AudioOutput demos to support multiple audio sample rates
+  *   - Updated all host mode demos and projects to use the EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete() event callback for device configuration
+  *     instead of manual host state machine manipulations in the main application task
+  *   - Changed the reports in the GenericHID device demos to control the board LEDs, to reduce user confusion over the callback routines
+  *   - Added reliability patches to the AVRISP-MKII Clone project's ISP and PDI/TPI protocols (thanks to Justin Mattair)
+  *
+  *  <b>Fixed:</b>
+  *  - Core:
+  *   - Large number of documentation and code comment corrections (thanks to Andrey from Microsin.ru)
+  *   - Fixed possibility of the AVR's SPI interface being pulled out of master mode if the /SS pin is a input and pulled low (thanks
+  *     to Andrey from Microsin.ru)
+  *   - Fixed compile error when FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE compile time option was disabled, and a USE_*_DESCRIPTORS compile time
+  *     option was not enabled on the AVR8s
+  *   - Fixed lack of C++ compatibility in some internal header files causing compile errors when using LUFA in C++ projects
+  *   - Fixed error in the pipe unordered allocation algorithm for the AVR8 devices breaking compatibility with some devices
+  *   - Fixed USB_USBTask not being called internally in stream transfers between packets when Partial Stream Transfers are used
+  *   - Fixed swapped TWI_ADDRESS_READ and TWI_ADDRESS_WRITE values
+  *   - Fixed TWI_ReadPacket() not releasing the TWI bus on read completion
+  *   - Fixed optimization error in the HID Parser item value USB_SetHIDReportItemInfo() and USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo() routines if the report item was
+  *     \c NULL (which should be allowable according to the API)
+  *   - Fixed HID Parser CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem() callback function not being passed a cacheable report item pointer
+  *   - Fixed HID Parser's largest report size bit count not including the size of the last parsed report item
+  *   - Fixed HID host driver's largest HID report size count corrupt when the number of report bits exceeds 255
+  *  - Library Applications:
+  *   - Fixed incorrect signature in the CDC and DFU class bootloaders for the ATMEGA8U2
+  *   - Fixed KeyboardHost and KeyboardHostWithParser demos displaying incorrect values when numerical keys were pressed
+  *   - Fixed compile errors in the incomplete BluetoothHost demo application (thanks to Timo Lindfors)
+  *   - Fixed incorrect Dataflash buffer use in the DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM() function of several demos/projects (thanks to Jeremy Willden)
+  *   - Fixed incorrect logging interval (always 500ms longer than requested) in the TempDataLogger project
+  *   - Fixed incorrect buffer size check in the USBtoSerial project (thanks to Yuri A Nikiforov)
+  *   - Fixed port state table corruption in the TCP layer of the RNDIS Ethernet device demos
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog110528 Version 110528
+  *  <b>New:</b>
+  *  - Core:
+  *   - Added new ORDERED_EP_CONFIG compile time option to restrict endpoint/pipe configuration to ascending order
+  *     in exchange for a smaller compiled program binary size
+  *   - Added a new general RingBuff.h miscellaneous ring buffer library driver header
+  *   - Added new GCC_FORCE_POINTER_ACCESS() macro to correct GCC's mishandling of struct pointer accesses
+  *   - Added new GCC_MEMORY_BARRIER() macro to prevent instruction reordering across boundaries
+  *   - Added basic driver example use code to the library documentation
+  *   - Added new Endpoint_Null_Stream() and Pipe_Null_Stream() functions
+  *   - Added new ADC_GET_CHANNEL_MASK() convenience macro
+  *   - Added new HID report item macros (with HID_RI_ prefix) to allow for easy creation and editing of HID report descriptors
+  *   - Added new HID_DESCRIPTOR_MOUSE(), HID_DESCRIPTOR_KEYBOARD(), HID_DESCRIPTOR_JOYSTICK() and HID_DESCRIPTOR_VENDOR() macros
+  *     for easy automatic creation of basic USB HID device reports
+  *   - Added new MAX() and MIN() convenience macros
+  *   - Added new Serial_SendData() function to the Serial driver
+  *   - Added board driver support for the Sparkfun ATMEGA8U2 breakout board
+  *   - Added TWI baud rate prescaler and bit length parameters to the TWI_Init() function (thanks to Thomas Herlinghaus)
+  *   - Internal restructuring for eventual multiple architecture ports
+  *   - Added AVR32 UC3 architecture port (currently incomplete/experimental)
+  *   - Added new architecture independent functions to enable, disable, save and restore the Global Interrupt Enable flags
+  *   - Added new RNDIS Device Class Driver packet send and receive functions
+  *  - Library Applications:
+  *   - Added ability to write protect Mass Storage disk write operations from the host OS
+  *   - Added new MIDIToneGenerator project
+  *   - Added new KeyboardMouseMultiReport Device ClassDriver demo
+  *   - Added new VirtualSerialMassStorage Device ClassDriver demo
+  *   - Added HID class bootloader, compatible with a modified version of the command line Teensy loader from PJRC.com
+  *   - Added LED flashing to the CDC and DFU class bootloaders to indicate when they are running
+  *
+  *  <b>Changed:</b>
+  *  - Core:
+  *   - Unordered Endpoint/Pipe configuration is now allowed once again by default via the previous reconfig workaround
+  *   - Refactored Host mode Class Driver *_Host_ConfigurePipes() routines to be more space efficient when compiled
+  *   - Added new *_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed error codes for the *_Host_ConfigurePipes() routines
+  *   - The USARTStream global is now public and documented in the SerialStream module, allowing for the serial USART
+  *     stream to be accessed via its handle rather than via the implicit stdout and stdin streams
+  *   - The FAST_STREAM_TRANSFERS compile time option has been removed due to lack of use and low cost/benefit ratio
+  *   - Altered all endpoint/pipe stream transfers so that the new BytesProcessed parameter now points to a location
+  *     where the number of bytes in the transfer that have been completed can be stored (or NULL if entire transaction
+  *     should be performed in one chunk)
+  *   - The NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS compile time option has now been removed due to the new partial stream transfer feature
+  *   - Changed over all project and demo HID report descriptors to use the new HID report item macros
+  *   - Moved the HIDParser.c source file to the LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/ directory from the LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/
+  *   - Added support to the HID parser for extended USAGE items that contain the usage page as well as the usage index
+  *   - Removed the SerialStream driver, rolled functionality into the regular Serial peripheral driver via the new
+  *     Serial_CreateStream() and Serial_CreateBlockingStream() functions
+  *   - Renamed the low level Serial byte send/receive functions, to be consistent with the CDC class driver byte functions
+  *   - Altered the behaviour of the serial byte reception function so that is is non-blocking, and now returns a negative
+  *     value if no character is received (to remain consistent with the CDC class driver byte reception routines)
+  *   - Renamed the PRNT_Host_SendString(), CDC_Host_SendString() and CDC_Device_SendString() functions to *_SendData(), and
+  *     added new versions of the *_SendString() routines that expect a null terminated string instead
+  *   - Renamed all driver termination *_ShutDown() functions to the more logical name *_Disable()
+  *   - Reduced latency for executing the Start-Of-Frame events (if enabled in the user application)
+  *   - Removed Pipe_ClearErrorFlags(), pipe error flags are now automatically cleared when Pipe_ClearError() is called
+  *   - Endpoint_ResetFIFO() renamed to Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(), to be consistent with the Pipe_ResetPipe() function name
+  *   - Implemented on-demand PLL clock generation for the U4, U6 and U7 series USB AVRs when automatic PLL mode is specified
+  *   - F_CLOCK changed to F_USB to be more descriptive, and applicable on future architecture ports
+  *   - Renamed all low level Endpoint_Read_*, Endpoint_Write_* and Endpoint_Discard_* functions to use the number of bits instead of
+  *     a symbolic size (Byte, Word, DWord) so that the function names are applicable and correct across all architectures
+  *   - Renamed all low level Pipe_Read_*, Pipe_Write_* and Pipe_Discard_* functions to use the number of bits instead of
+  *     a symbolic size (Byte, Word, DWord) so that the function names are applicable and correct across all architectures
+  *   - Separated out board drivers by architecture in the library internals for better organisation
+  *  - Library Applications:
+  *   - Changed the XPLAINBridge software UART to use the regular timer CTC mode instead of the alternative CTC mode
+  *     via the Input Capture register, to reduce user confusion
+  *   - Combined page and word ISP programming mode code in the AVRISP-MKII clone project to reduce compiled size and
+  *     increase maintainability of the code
+  *   - Changed over library projects to use the new general ring buffer library driver module
+  *   - Added new high level TWI packet read/write commands, altered behaviour of the TWI_StartTransmission() function
+  *   - Changed TempDataLogger project's DS1307 driver to simplify the function interface and prevent a possible race condition
+  *   - Changed AVRISP-MKII project to use the Watchdog interrupt for command timeouts, to reduce CPU usage and free timer 0
+  *     for other uses
+  *   - Updated the software USART code in the XPLAIN Bridge application so that the incoming bits are sampled at their mid-point
+  *     instead of starting point, to give maximum reliability (thanks to Anton Staaf)
+  *
+  *  <b>Fixed:</b>
+  *  - Core:
+  *   - Fixed broken USBFOO board drivers due to missing BOARD_USBFOO define
+  *   - Fixed HID host class driver incorrectly binding to HID devices that do not have an OUT endpoint
+  *   - Fixed incorrect definition of the HID_KEYBOARD_SC_D constant in the HID class driver (thanks to Opendous Inc.)
+  *   - Fixed incorrect definition of the HID_KEYBOARD_SC_RIGHT_ARROW constant in the HID class driver (thanks to Joby Taffey)
+  *   - Fixed incorrect endpoint initialisation order in the several device demos (thanks to Rick Drolet)
+  *   - Fixed inverted Minimus board LEDs
+  *   - Fixed incorrect byte ordering in the Audio_Device_WriteSample24 function (thanks to WZab)
+  *   - Fixed several functions in the Host mode Still Image Class driver returning an error code from the incorrect
+  *     error code enum (thanks to Daniel Seibert)
+  *   - Fixed ReportID not being removed from the feature/out report data array in the HID class driver when Report IDs are used
+  *   - Fixed incorrect BUTTONS_BUTTON1 definition for the Minimus board
+  *   - Fixed Still Image Host class driver exiting the descriptor search routine prematurely if the data pipes (but not event pipe)
+  *     is found
+  *   - Fixed missing call to Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests() in the Pipe_ConfigurePipe() routine
+  *   - Fixed Remote Wakeup broken on the AVRs due to the mechanism only operating when the SUSPI bit is set (thanks to Holger Steinhaus)
+  *   - Fixed possible invalid program execution when in host mode if corrupt descriptor lengths are supplied by the attached device
+  *  - Library Applications:
+  *   - Fixed Benito project discarding incoming data from the USB virtual serial port when the USART is busy
+  *   - Fixed broken DFU bootloader, added XPLAIN support for bootloader start when XCK jumpered to ground
+  *   - Fixed broken HID_REQ_GetReport request handler in the Low Level GenericHID demo
+  *   - Fixed possible lost data in the XPLAINBridge, USBtoSerial and Benito projects when the host exceeds the packet
+  *     timeout period on received packets as set by USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS (thanks to Justin Rajewski)
+  *   - Fixed possible programming problem in the AVRISP-MKII clone project when programming specific patterns into a target
+  *     memory space that is only byte (not page) addressable
+  *   - Fixed errors in the incomplete Test and Measurement device demo preventing proper operation (thanks to Pavel Plotnikov)
+  *   - Fixed programming errors in the AVRISP-MKII project when the programming packet is a round multiple of the endpoint bank
+  *     size under avrdude (thanks to Steffan Woltjer)
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog101122 Version 101122
+  *  <b>New:</b>
+  *  - Core:
+  *    - Added new SCSI_ASENSE_NOT_READY_TO_READY_CHANGE constant to the Mass Storage class driver, to indicate when a previously
+  *      not ready removable medium has now become ready for the host's use (thanks to Martin Degelsegger)
+  *    - Moved the Pipe and Endpoint stream related code to two new USB library core source files EndpointStream.c and PipeStream.c
+  *    - Added new USB_Device_GetFrameNumber() and USB_Host_GetFrameNumber() functions to retrieve the current USB frame number
+  *    - Added new USB_Host_EnableSOFEvents(), USB_Host_DisableSOFEvents() and EVENT_USB_Host_StartOfFrame() for the user application
+  *      handling of USB Start of Frame events while in USB Host mode
+  *    - Added new PRNT_Host_BytesReceived(), PRNT_Host_ReceiveByte(), PRNT_Host_SendByte() and PRNT_Host_Flush() functions to the
+  *      Print Host Class driver
+  *    - Added class specific descriptor alternative struct type defines with standard USB-IF element naming
+  *    - Added new project makefile template to the library and moved board driver stub files into in a new "CodeTemplates" directory
+  *    - Added board hardware driver support for the Adafruit U4 breakout board
+  *    - Added board hardware driver support for the Arduino Uno development board
+  *    - Added board hardware driver support for the Blackcat USB JTAG board (thanks to the PSGroove team)
+  *    - Added board hardware driver support for the Busware BUI development board
+  *    - Added board hardware driver support for the Busware CUL V3 868MHZ radio board (thanks to Dirk Tostmann)
+  *    - Added board hardware driver support for the Kernel Concepts USBFOO development board
+  *    - Added board hardware driver support for the Linnix UDIP development board
+  *    - Added board hardware driver support for the Olimex AVR-USB-162 development board (thanks to Steve Fawcett)
+  *    - Added board hardware driver support for the Maximus board (thanks to the PSGroove team)
+  *    - Added board hardware driver support for the Microsin AVR-USB162 breakout board
+  *    - Added board hardware driver support for the Minimus board (thanks to the PSGroove team)
+  *    - Added new NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH compile time option to disable automatic flushing of interfaces when the USB management
+  *      tasks for each driver is called
+  *    - Added standard keyboard HID report scan-code defines (thanks to Laszlo Monda)
+  *    - Added new Pipe_GetBusyBanks(), Endpoint_GetBusyBanks() and Endpoint_AbortPendingIN() functions
+  *  - Library Applications:
+  *    - Added default test tone generation mode to the Device mode AudioInput demos
+  *    - Added new NO_BLOCK_SUPPORT, NO_EEPROM_BYTE_SUPPORT, NO_FLASH_BYTE_SUPPORT and NO_LOCK_BYTE_WRITE_SUPPORT compile time options to the
+  *      CDC class bootloader
+  *    - Added new XCK_RESCUE_CLOCK_ENABLE compile time option to the AVRISP-MKII clone programmer project (thanks to Tom Light)
+  *
+  *  <b>Changed:</b>
+  *  - Core:
+  *    - Removed complicated logic for the Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint() function to use inlined or function called versions
+  *      depending of if the given bank size is a compile time constant, as the compiler does a better job of optimizing
+  *      with basic code
+  *    - Changed the signature of the CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor() callback function so that the descriptor pointer is const, to remove
+  *      the need for extra casting inside the callback (thanks to Jonathan Kollasch)
+  *    - Reduced HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS to 1000ms down from 1500ms to improve device compatibility while in USB Host mode
+  *    - Removed the EVENT_USB_InitFailure() event, not specifying a USB mode correctly now defaults to UID selection mode
+  *    - Renamed and moved class driver common constant definitions to make the naming scheme more uniform
+  *    - Moved the USB mode specifier constants into a new enum, so that they are semantically related to one another
+  *    - Renamed ENDPOINT_DOUBLEBANK_SUPPORTED() to ENDPOINT_BANKS_SUPPORTED() and changed it to return the maximum number of supported banks for
+  *      the given endpoint
+  *    - Better algorithm to extract and convert the internal device serial number into a string descriptor (if present)
+  *    - All USB class drivers are now automatically included when LUFA/Drivers/USB.h is included, and no longer need to be separately included
+  *    - The MIDI class drivers now automatically flushes the MIDI interface when the MIDI class driver's USBTask() function is called
+  *    - Renamed the EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event to EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() as it is now fired before the library
+  *      request handlers, not afterwards
+  *  - Library Applications:
+  *    - Changed over all device demos to use a clearer algorithm for the configuring of the application's endpoints
+  *    - Added missing DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation() function to the MassStorageKeyboard demo, removed redundant
+  *      SCSI_Codes.h file as these values are part of the MassStorage Class Driver
+  *    - Added compile time error to the AVRISP-MKII project when built for the U4 chips, as the default VTARGET detection ADC channel
+  *      does not exist on these chips (thanks to Marco)
+  *    - Changed all Device mode LowLevel demos and Device Class drivers so that the control request is acknowledged and any data
+  *      transferred as quickly as possible without any processing in between sections, so that long callbacks or event handlers will
+  *      not break communications with the host by exceeding the maximum control request stage timeout period
+  *    - Changed over all demos, drivers and internal functions to use the current frame number over the Start of Frame flag where possible
+  *      to free up the Start of Frame flag for interrupt use in the user application
+  *    - All project makefiles now correctly clean intermediate build files from assembly and C++ sources (thanks to Daniel Czigany)
+  *    - Changed default value for the reset polarity parameter in the AVRISP-MKII project so that it defaults to active low drive
+  *    - Changed configuration descriptor parser for all host mode projects and class drivers to ensure better compatibility with devices
+  *    - All LowLevel demos changed to use the constants and types defined in the USB class drivers
+  *    - Changed AudioInput and AudioOutput demos to reload the next sample via an interrupt rather than polling the sample timer
+  *    - Rescue clock of the AVRISP-MKII moved to the AVR's OCR1A pin, so that the clock can be generated at all times
+  *    - Changed ClassDriver MIDI demos to process all incoming events in a loop until the bank becomes empty rather than one at a time
+  *    - Changed LowLevel MIDI demos to only clear the incoming event bank once it has become empty to support packed event packets
+  *
+  *  <b>Fixed:</b>
+  *  - Core:
+  *    - Fixed USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo() function modifying the given report item's data when the report item does not exist
+  *      within the supplied report of a multiple report HID device
+  *    - Fixed critical pipe/endpoint memory allocation issue where the bank memory address space could be silently overlapped
+  *      in the USB controller if the endpoints or pipes were allocated in anything other than ascending order (thanks to Martin Degelsegger)
+  *    - Added LEDs_ToggleLEDs() function to several board LED drivers which were missing it (thanks to Andrei Krainev)
+  *    - Fixed SET FEATURE and CLEAR FEATURE control requests directed at an unconfigured endpoint causing request timeouts
+  *    - Fixed USB_Host_ClearPipeStall() incorrectly determining the endpoint direction from the currently selected pipe
+  *    - Fixed JTAG_DEBUG_POINT() and JTAG_DEBUG_BREAK() macros not compiling under pure C99 standards mode
+  *    - Fixed endpoint selection within the CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport() callback function causing broken GET REPORT requests
+  *    - Fixed incorrect command name for EEPROM memory programming in the makefile dfu-ee target
+  *    - Fixed incorrect LEDs_ChangeLEDs() function in the Benito board LED driver
+  *    - Fixed incorrect USB_DeviceState value when unconfiguring the device without an address set
+  *    - Fixed SPI driver not explicitly setting /SS and MISO pins as inputs when SPI_Init() is called
+  *    - Fixed random enumeration failure while in device mode due to interrupts causing the Set Address request to exceed maximum timings
+  *    - Fixed MIDI_Host_Flush() not aborting early when the specified MIDI host interface was not configured
+  *    - Fixed MIDI class driver send routines silently discarding packets if the endpoint or pipe is busy (thanks to Robin Green)
+  *  - Library Applications:
+  *    - Fixed MassStorage based demos and projects resetting the SCSI sense values before the command is executed, leading to
+  *      missed SCSI sense values when the host retrieves the sense key (thanks to Martin Degelsegger)
+  *    - Fixed USBtoSerial and Benito project SetLineEncoding calls failing if the USART is busy, due to the RX ISR delaying the control
+  *      request handler
+  *    - Fixed LowLevel PrinterHost demo not sending control requests to the attached printer with the correct printer interface wIndex value
+  *    - Fixed incorrect signature reported in the CDC class bootloader for the ATMEGA32U2
+  *    - Fixed BootloaderCDC project failing on some operating systems due to removed Line Encoding options (thanks to Alexey Belyaev)
+  *    - Fixed broken FLASH/EEPROM programming in the AVRISP-MKII clone project when writing in non-paged mode and the polling byte cannot be used
+  *    - Fixed ISR definition conflict in the XPLAIN bridge between the software UART and the AVRISP-MKII ISP modules
+  *    - Fixed USBtoSerial and XPLAINBridge demos discarding data from the PC if the send buffer becomes full
+  *    - Fixed broken input in the MagStripe reader project due to an incorrect HID report descriptor
+  *    - Fixed incorrect PollingIntervalMS values in the demo/project/bootloader endpoint descriptors (thanks to MCS Electronics)
+  *    - Fixed AVRISP-MKII clone project not starting the target's program automatically after exiting TPI programming mode
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog100807 Version 100807
+  *  <b>New:</b>
+  *  - Added new ADC_DisableChannel() function (thanks to Mich Davis)
+  *  - Added new VTARGET_REF_VOLTS and VTARGET_SCALE_FACTOR compile time defines to the AVRISP-MKII programmer project to set
+  *    the VTARGET reference voltage and scale factor
+  *  - Added new pgm_read_ptr() macro to Common.h for reading of pointers out of flash memory space
+  *  - Added new SWAPENDIAN_16() and SWAPENDIAN_32() macros to Common.h for statically initialized variables at compile time
+  *  - Added new Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Device.c file to house Device mode specific functions that are more complicated than simple macros
+  *  - Added new AVRStudio 4 project files for all library demos, projects and bootloaders
+  *  - Added ability to set the serial baud rate via the user's terminal in the XPLAINBridge project
+  *  - Added new LUFA module variables for the different source modules in the core library makefile to simplify project makefiles
+  *  - Added start of a new Test and Measurement class demo (thanks to Peter Lawrence)
+  *  - Added new SPI_ORDER_* data order masks to the SPI peripheral driver
+  *  - Added support to the AVRISP-MKII project for ISP speeds slower than 125KHz via a new software SPI driver
+  *  - Added support for the new button/LED on the latest model USBTINY-MKII
+  *
+  *  <b>Changed:</b>
+  *  - The RingBuff library code has been replaced in the XPLAINBridge, Benito and USBtoSerial projects with an ultra lightweight
+  *    ring buffer to help improve the reliability of the projects
+  *  - The EEPROM stream read/write functions now use eeprom_update_byte() instead of eeprom_write_byte(), so that only
+  *    changed bytes are written to EEPROM to preserve its lifespan
+  *  - Changed over the AVRISP-MKII and TemperatureDataLogger projects to use eeprom_update_byte() when writing non-volatile
+  *    parameters to EEPROM to preserve its lifespan
+  *  - Removed unused line encoding data and control requests from the CDC Bootloader code, to save space
+  *  - Renamed SERIAL_STREAM_ASSERT() macro to STDOUT_ASSERT()
+  *  - The USB_Device_IsRemoteWakeupSent() and USB_Device_IsUSBSuspended() macros have been deleted, as they are now obsolete
+  *  - Rewrote the implementation of the SwapEndian_16() and SwapEndian_32() functions so that they compile down in most instances to
+  *    minimal loads and stores rather than complicated shifts
+  *  - The software UART in the XPLAINBridge has been largely altered to try to improve upon its performance and reliability
+  *  - The USBtoSerial and Benito projects now flushes received data via a flush timer, so that several bytes can be transmitted at once
+  *  - Removed the automated checking of event names in the demo, project and bootloader makefiles due to inconsistencies between the
+  *    behaviour of the command line tools used to perform the check on each platform
+  *  - Internal USB driver source files renamed and moved to ease future possible architecture ports
+  *  - All internal pseudo-function macros have been converted to true inline functions for type-safety and readability
+  *  - Changed LED indicator masks for the AVRISP-MKII project, so that there are defined roles for each LED
+  *  - Altered the CDC Device and Host Class drivers' receive byte routines, so that no data is indicated by the function returning a
+  *    negative value (thanks to Andreas Paulin)
+  *  - Added auto flushing of OUT data to the CDC Host Class driver's USBTask function to automatically flush the send pipe buffer
+  *
+  *  <b>Fixed:</b>
+  *  - Fixed AVRISP project sending a LOAD EXTENDED ADDRESS command to 128KB AVRs after programming or reading from
+  *    the last page of FLASH (thanks to Gerard Sexton)
+  *  - Fixed AVRISP project not sending a full erase-and-write EEPROM command to XMEGA targets when writing to the EEPROM
+  *    instead of the split write-only command (thanks to Tim Margush)
+  *  - Fixed RNDISEthernet demos crashing when calculating checksums for Ethernet/TCP packets of more than ~500 bytes due to
+  *    an overflow in the checksum calculation loop (thanks to Kevin Malec)
+  *  - Fixed XPLAINBridge project not correctly reading the XMEGA's supply voltage when reporting back to the host
+  *  - Fixed incorrect signature for the ATMEGA32U2 in the DFU bootloader (thanks to Axel Rohde)
+  *  - Fixed internal device serial not being accessible on the ATMEGAXXU2 AVRs (thanks to Axel Rohde)
+  *  - Fixed void pointer arithmetic in ConfigDescriptor.h breaking C++ compatibility (thanks to Michael Hennebry)
+  *  - Fixed broken PDI EEPROM Section Erase functionality in the AVRISP-MKII project
+  *  - Fixed USB_Device_SendRemoteWakeup() not working when the USB clock was frozen during USB bus suspend (thanks to Brian Dickman)
+  *  - Fixed occasional lockup of the AVRISP project due to the timeout extension code incorrectly extending the timeout in
+  *    PDI and TPI programming modes infinitely
+  *  - Fixed HID device class driver still using PrevReportINBuffer for GetReport control requests even when it has been
+  *    set to NULL by the user application (thanks to Axel Rohde)
+  *  - Fixed MIDI_Device_SendEventPacket() not correctly waiting for the endpoint to become ready (thanks to Robin Green)
+  *  - Fixed Benito and USBtoSerial projects not turning off the USART before reconfiguring it, which could cause incorrect
+  *    operation to occur (thanks to Bob Paddock)
+  *  - Fixed Serial peripheral driver not turning off the USART before reconfiguring it, which would cause incorrect operation
+  *    to occur (thanks to Bob Paddock)
+  *  - Fixed software application start command broken in the DFU class bootloader when dfu-programmer is used due to application
+  *    start address corruption
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog100513 Version 100513
+  *  <b>New:</b>
+  *  - Added incomplete MIDIToneGenerator project
+  *  - Added new Relay Controller Board project (thanks to OBinou)
+  *  - Added board hardware driver support for the Teensy, USBTINY MKII, Benito and JM-DB-U2 lines of third party USB AVR boards
+  *  - Added new ATTR_NO_INIT variable attribute for global variables that should not be automatically cleared on startup
+  *  - Added new ENDPOINT_*_BusSuspended error code to the Endpoint function, so that the stream functions early-abort if the bus
+  *    is suspended before or during a transfer
+  *  - Added new EVENT_CDC_Device_BreakSent() event and CDC_Host_SendBreak() function to the Device and Host CDC Class drivers
+  *  - Added ReportType parameter to the HID device class driver CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport() function so that FEATURE
+  *    reports from the host to the device can be correctly processed
+  *  - Added ReportType parameter to the HID host class driver HID_Host_SendReportByID() function so that FEATURE reports can be
+  *    issued to the attached device
+  *
+  *  <b>Changed:</b>
+  *  - AVRISP programmer project now has a more robust timeout system
+  *  - Added a timeout value to the TWI_StartTransmission() function, within which the addressed device must respond
+  *  - Webserver project now uses the board LEDs to indicate the current IP configuration state
+  *  - Added ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER compile time option to the Webserver project to disable the TELNET server if desired
+  *  - Increased throughput of the USBtoSerial demo on systems that send multiple bytes per packet (thanks to Opendous Inc.)
+  *  - Double bank CDC endpoints in the XPLAIN Bridge project, re-enable JTAG once the mode selection pin has been sampled.
+  *  - Standardized the naming scheme given to configuration descriptor sub-elements in the Device mode demos, bootloaders
+  *    and projects
+  *  - All Class Driver Host mode demos now correctly set the board LEDs to READY once the enumeration process has completed
+  *  - Added LIBUSB_FILTERDRV_COMPAT compile time option to the AVRISP programmer project to make the code compatible with Windows
+  *    builds of avrdude at the expense of AVRStudio compatibility
+  *  - Removed two-step endpoint/pipe bank clear and switch sequence for smaller, faster endpoint/pipe code
+  *  - The USB_Init() function no longer calls sei() - the user is now responsible for enabling interrupts when they are ready
+  *    for them to be enabled (thanks to Andrei Krainev)
+  *  - The Audio_Device_IsSampleReceived() and Audio_Device_IsReadyForNextSample() functions are now inline, to reduce overhead
+  *  - Removed the cast to uint16_t on the set baud rate in the USBtoSerial project, so that the higher >1M baud rates can be
+  *    selected (thanks to Steffan Woltjer)
+  *  - Removed software PDI and TPI emulation from the AVRISP-MKII clone project as it was very buggy and slow - PDI and TPI must
+  *    now be implemented via separate programming headers
+  *  - The CDC class bootloader now uses a watchdog reset rather than a soft-reset when exited to ensure that all hardware is
+  *    properly reset to their defaults
+  *  - Device mode class driver callbacks are now fired before the control request status stage is sent to prevent the host from
+  *    timing out if another request is immediately fired and the device has a lengthy callback routine
+  *  - The TeensyHID bootloader has been removed, per request from Paul at PJRC
+  *  - The LIBUSB_FILTERDRV_COMPAT compile time option in the XPLAINBridge and AVRISP-MKII projects has been renamed
+  *    LIBUSB_DRIVER_COMPAT, as it applies to all software on all platforms using the libUSB driver
+  *
+  *  <b>Fixed:</b>
+  *  - Fixed possible device lockup when INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT is enabled and the control endpoint is not properly
+  *    selected when the ISR completes
+  *  - Fixed AVRISP-MKII clone project not correctly issuing LOAD EXTENDED ADDRESS commands when the extended address
+  *    boundary is crossed during programming or read back (thanks to Gerard Sexton)
+  *  - Fixed warnings when building the AVRISP-MKII clone project with the ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL compile time option disabled
+  *  - Fixed software PDI/TPI programming mode in the AVRISP project not correctly toggling just the clock pin
+  *  - Fixed TWI_StartTransmission() corrupting the contents of the GPIOR0 register
+  *  - Fixed TWI driver not aborting when faced with no response after attempting to address a device on the bus
+  *  - Fixed ADC routines not correctly returning the last result when multiple channels were read
+  *  - Fixed ADC routines failing to read the extended channels (Channels 8 to 13, Internal Temperature Sensor) on the
+  *    U4 series USB AVR parts
+  *  - Fixed LowLevel MassStorage demo broken on the U2 series USB AVRs due to unsupported double-banked endpoint modes used
+  *  - Fixed compilation error in the AudioInput demos when MICROPHONE_BIASED_TO_HALF_RAIL is defined (thanks to C. Scott Ananian)
+  *  - Fixed incorrect definition of HID_ALIGN_DATA() causing incorrect HID report item data alignment
+  *  - Fixed Still Image Host class driver not resetting the transaction ID when a new session is opened, fixed driver not sending
+  *    a valid session ID to the device
+  *  - Removed invalid dfu and flip related targets from the bootloaders - bootloaders can only be replaced with an external programmer
+  *  - Fixed Set/Clear Feature requests directed to a non-configured endpoint not returning a stall to the host
+  *  - Fixed HID Device Class Driver not allocating a temporary buffer when the host requests a report via the control endpoint and the
+  *    user has set the PrevReportINBuffer driver configuration element to NULL (thanks to Lars Noschinski)
+  *  - Fixed device state not being reset to DEVICE_STATE_Default if the host sets a 0x00 device address
+  *  - Fixed device not stalling configuration requests before the device's address has been set
+  *  - Fixed possibility of internal signature retrieval being corrupted if an interrupt occurs during a signature byte
+  *    read (thanks to Andrei Krainev)
+  *  - Fixed device state not being reset back to the default state if the host sets the address to 0
+  *  - Fixed Set Configuration requests not being stalled until the host has set the device's address
+  *  - Fixed Host mode HID class driver not sending the correct report type when HID_Host_SendReportByID() was called and the
+  *    HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY compile time option is set
+  *  - Fixed INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT compile time option preventing other interrupts from occurring while the control endpoint
+  *    request is being processed, causing possible lockups if a USB interrupt occurs during a transfer
+  *  - Remove incorrect Abstract Call Management class specific descriptor from the CDC demos, bootloaders and projects
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog100219 Version 100219
+  *
+  *  <b>New:</b>
+  *  - Added TPI programming support for 6-pin ATTINY devices to the AVRISP programmer project (thanks to Tom Light)
+  *  - Added command timeout counter to the AVRISP project so that the device no longer freezes when incorrectly connected
+  *    to a target
+  *  - Added new TemperatureDataLogger application, a USB data logger which writes to the device's dataflash and appears to
+  *    the host as a standard Mass Storage device when inserted
+  *  - Added MIDI event packing support to the MIDI Device and Host mode Class drivers, allowing for multiple MIDI events to
+  *    sent or received in packed form in a single USB packet
+  *  - Added new MIDI send buffer flush routines to the MIDI Device and Host mode Class drivers, to flush packed events
+  *  - Added master mode hardware TWI driver for easy TWI peripheral control
+  *  - Added ADC MUX masks for the standard ADC input channels on all AVR models with an ADC, altered demos to use these masks
+  *    as on some models, the channel number is not identical to its single-ended ADC MUX mask
+  *  - New Webserver project, a RNDIS host USB webserver using the open source uIP TCP/IP network stack and FatFS library
+  *  - New BOARD value option BOARD_NONE (equivalent to not specifying BOARD) which will remove all board hardware drivers which
+  *    do not adversely affect the code operation (currently only the LEDs driver)
+  *  - Added keyboard modifier masks (HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_*) and LED report masks (KEYBOARD_LED_*) to the HID class driver and
+  *    Keyboard demos
+  *  - Added .5MHz recovery clock to the AVRISP programmer project when in ISP programming mode to correct mis-set fuses
+  *
+  *  <b>Changed:</b>
+  *  - Slowed down software USART carried PDI programming in the AVRISP project to prevent transmission errors
+  *  - Renamed the AVRISP project folder to AVRISP-MKII to reduce confusion
+  *  - Renamed the RESET_LINE_* makefile tokens in the AVRISP MKII Project to AUX_LINE_*, as they are not always used for target
+  *    reset
+  *  - Changed over the MassStorageKeyboard Class driver device demo to use Start of Frame events rather than a timer to keep track
+  *    of elapsed milliseconds
+  *  - Inlined currently unused (but standardized) maintenance functions in the Device and Host Class drivers to save space
+  *  - The XPLAINBridge project now selects between a USB to Serial bridge and a PDI programmer on startup, reading the JTAG port's
+  *    TDI pin to determine which mode to use
+  *  - Removed the stream example code from the Low Level VirtualSerial demos, as they were buggy and only served to add clutter
+  *
+  *  <b>Fixed:</b>
+  *  - Fixed AVRISP project not able to enter programming mode when ISP protocol is used
+  *  - Fixed AVRISP PDI race condition where the guard time between direction changes could be interpreted as a start bit
+  *  - Fixed ADC_IsReadingComplete() returning an inverted result
+  *  - Fixed blocking CDC streams not aborting when the host is disconnected
+  *  - Fixed XPLAIN board Dataflash driver broken due to incorrect preprocessor commands
+  *  - Fixed inverted XPLAIN LED driver output (LED turned on when it was supposed to be turned off, and vice-versa)
+  *  - Fixed Class Driver struct interface numbers in the KeyboardMouse and VirtualSerialMouse demos (thanks to Renaud Cerrato)
+  *  - Fixed invalid USB controller PLL prescaler values for the ATMEGAxxU2 controllers
+  *  - Fixed lack of support for the ATMEGA32U2 in the DFU and CDC class bootloaders
+  *  - Fixed Benito project not resetting the target AVR automatically when programming has completed
+  *  - Fixed DFU bootloader programming not discarding the correct number of filler bytes from the host when non-aligned programming
+  *    ranges are specified (thanks to Thomas Bleeker)
+  *  - Fixed CDC and RNDIS host demos and class drivers - bidirectional endpoints should use two separate pipes, not one half-duplex pipe
+  *  - Fixed Pipe_IsEndpointBound() not taking the endpoint's direction into account
+  *  - Fixed EEPROM and FLASH ISP programming in the AVRISP project
+  *  - Fixed incorrect values of USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED and USB_CONFIG_ATTR_REMOTEWAKEUP tokens (thanks to Claus Christensen)
+  *  - Fixed SerialStream driver blocking while waiting for characters to be received instead of returning EOF
+  *  - Fixed SerialStream driver not setting stdin to the created serial stream (thanks to Mike Alexander)
+  *  - Fixed USB_GetHIDReportSize() returning the number of bits in the specified report instead of bytes
+  *  - Fixed AVRISP project not extending the command delay after each successful page/word/byte program
+  *  - Fixed accuracy of the SERIAL_UBBRVAL() and SERIAL_2X_UBBRVAL() macros for higher baud rates (thanks to Renaud Cerrato)
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog091223 Version 091223
+  *
+  *  <b>New:</b>
+  *  - Added activity LED indicators to the AVRISP project to indicate when the device is busy processing a command
+  *  - The USB target family and allowable USB mode tokens are now public and documented (USB_CAN_BE_*, USB_SERIES_*_AVR)
+  *  - Added new XPLAIN USB to Serial Bridge project (thanks to John Steggall for initial proof-of-concept, David Prentice
+  *    and Peter Danneger for revised software USART code)
+  *  - Added new RNDIS Ethernet Host LowLevel demo
+  *  - Added new RNDIS Ethernet Host Class Driver
+  *  - Added new RNDIS Ethernet Host ClassDriver demo
+  *  - Added CDC_Host_Flush() function to the CDC Host Class driver to flush sent data to the attached device
+  *  - Added PDI programming support for XMEGA devices to the AVRISP programmer project (thanks to Justin Mattair)
+  *  - Added support for the XPLAIN board Dataflash, with new XPLAIN_REV1 board target for the different Dataflash used
+  *    on the first revision boards compared to the one mounted on later revisions
+  *  - Added new HID_ALIGN_DATA() macro to return the pre-retrieved value of a HID report item, left-aligned to a given datatype
+  *  - Added new PreviousValue to the HID Report Parser report item structure, for easy monitoring of previous report item values
+  *  - Added new EVK527 board target
+  *  - Added new USB_Host_GetDeviceStringDescriptor() convenience function
+  *  - Added new LEDNotification project to the library, to give a visual LED notification on new events from the host
+  *  - Added new NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP and NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER compile time options
+  *
+  *  <b>Changed:</b>
+  *  - Removed code in the Keyboard demos to send zeroed reports between two reports with differing numbers of key codes
+  *    as this relied on non-standard OS driver behaviour to repeat key groups
+  *  - The SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t and SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t type defines are now part of the Mass Storage Class
+  *    driver common defines, rather than being defined in the Host mode Class driver section only
+  *  - The USB_MODE_HOST token is now defined even when host mode is not available
+  *  - The CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport() HID Device Class driver callback now has a new ReportType parameter to
+  *    indicate the report type to generate
+  *  - All Class Drivers now return false or the "DeviceDisconnected" error code of their respective error enums when a function
+  *    is called when no host/device is connected where possible
+  *  - The HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnect enum value has been renamed to HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected to be in line
+  *    with the rest of the library error codes
+  *  - Make MIDI device demos also turn off the on board LEDs if MIDI Note On messages are sent with a velocity of zero,
+  *    which some devices use instead of Note Off messages (thanks to Robin Green)
+  *  - The CDC demos are now named "VirtualSerial" instead to indicate the demos' function rather than its implemented USB class,
+  *    to reduce confusion and to be in line with the rest of the LUFA demos
+  *  - The SImage_Host_SendBlockHeader() and SImage_Host_ReceiveBlockHeader() Still Image Host Class driver functions are now public
+  *
+  *  <b>Fixed:</b>
+  *  - Added missing CDC_Host_CreateBlockingStream() function code to the CDC Host Class driver
+  *  - Fixed incorrect values for REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_* enum values causing corrupt data in the HID Host Parser
+  *  - Fixed misnamed SI_Host_USBTask() and SI_Host_ConfigurePipes() functions
+  *  - Fixed broken USB_GetNextDescriptor() function causing the descriptor to jump ahead double the expected amount
+  *  - Fixed Pipe_IsEndpointBound() not masking the given Endpoint Address against PIPE_EPNUM_MASK
+  *  - Fixed host state machine not enabling Auto VBUS mode when HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS is set to zero
+  *  - Fixed misnamed Pipe_SetPipeToken() macro for setting a pipe's direction
+  *  - Fixed CDCHost failing on devices with bidirectional endpoints
+  *  - Fixed USB driver failing to define the PLL prescaler mask for the ATMEGA8U2 and ATMEGA16U2
+  *  - Fixed HID Parser not distributing the Usage Min and Usage Max values across an array of report items
+  *  - Fixed Mass Storage Host Class driver and Low Level demo not clearing the error condition if an attached device returns a
+  *    STALL to a GET MAX LUN request (thanks to Martin Luxen)
+  *  - Fixed TeensyHID bootloader not properly shutting down the USB interface to trigger a disconnection on the host before resetting
+  *  - Fixed MassStorageHost Class driver demo not having USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS compile time option set properly to prevent slow
+  *    devices from timing out the data pipes
+  *  - Fixed the definition of the Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() macro for the U4 series AVR parts
+  *  - Fixed MIDI host Class driver MIDI_Host_SendEventPacket() routine not properly checking for Pipe ready before writing
+  *  - Fixed use of deprecated struct initializers, removed library unused parameter warnings when compiled with -Wextra enabled
+  *  - Fixed Still Image Host Class driver truncating the PIMA response code (thanks to Daniel Seibert)
+  *  - Fixed USB_CurrentMode not being reset to USB_MODE_NONE when the USB interface is shut down and both Host and Device modes can be
+  *    used (thanks to Daniel Levy)
+  *  - Fixed TeensyHID bootloader not enumerating to the host correctly (thanks to Clint Fisher)
+  *  - Fixed AVRISP project timeouts not checking for the correct timeout period (thanks to Carl Ott)
+  *  - Fixed STK525 Dataflash driver using incorrect bit-shifting for Dataflash addresses (thanks to Tim Mitchell)
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog091122 Version 091122
+  *
+  *  <b>New:</b>
+  *  - Added new Dual Role Keyboard/Mouse demo
+  *  - Added new HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY compile time token to reduce the size of the HID Host Class driver when
+  *    Report protocol is not needed
+  *  - Added new MIDI LowLevel and ClassDriver Host demo, add new MIDI Host Class driver
+  *  - Added new CDC/Mouse ClassDriver device demo
+  *  - Added new Joystick Host ClassDriver and LowLevel demos
+  *  - Added new Printer Host mode Class driver
+  *  - Added new Printer Host mode ClassDriver demo
+  *  - Added optional support for double banked endpoints and pipes in the Device and Host mode Class drivers
+  *  - Added new stream creation function to the CDC Class drivers, to easily make standard I/O streams from CDC Class driver instances
+  *
+  *  <b>Changed:</b>
+  *  - Removed mostly useless "TestApp" demo, as it was mainly useful only for checking for syntax errors in the library
+  *  - MIDI device demos now receive MIDI events from the host and display note ON messages via the board LEDs
+  *  - Cleanups to the Device mode Mass Storage demo application SCSI routines
+  *  - Changed Audio Class driver sample read/write functions to be inline, to reduce the number of cycles needed to transfer
+  *    samples to and from the device (allowing more time for sample processing and output)
+  *  - Audio class Device mode demos now work at both 16MHz and 8MHz, rather than just at 8MHz
+  *  - The previous USBtoSerial demo has been moved into the projects directory, as it was just a modified CDC demo
+  *  - The Endpoint/Pipe functions now use the const qualifier on the input buffer
+  *  - Changed the CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem() callback to pass a HID_ReportItem_t rather than just the current
+  *    item's attributes, to expose more information on the item (including it's type, collection path, etc.)
+  *  - Changed MouseHostWithParser demos to check that the report items have a Mouse usage collection as a parent at some point,
+  *    to prevent Joysticks from enumerating with the demo
+  *  - Corrected the name of the misnamed USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() function to USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor().
+  *  - Keyboard LowLevel/ClassDriver demos now support multiple simultaneous key presses (up to 6) per report
+  *
+  *  <b>Fixed:</b>
+  *  - Fixed PrinterHost demo returning invalid Device ID data when the attached device does not have a
+  *    device ID (thanks to Andrei Krainev)
+  *  - Changed LUFA_VERSION_INTEGER define to use BCD values, to make comparisons easier
+  *  - Fixed issue in the HID Host class driver's HID_Host_SendReportByID() routine using the incorrect mode (control/pipe)
+  *    to send report to the attached device
+  *  - Fixed ClassDriver AudioOutput device demo not selecting an audio output mode
+  *  - Fixed incorrect SampleFrequencyType value in the AudioInput and AudioOutput ClassDriver demos' descriptors
+  *  - Fixed incorrect event name rule in demo/project/bootloader makefiles
+  *  - Fixed HID device class driver not reselecting the correct endpoint once the user callback routines have been called
+  *  - Corrected HID descriptor in the Joystick Device demos - buttons should be placed outside the pointer collection
+  *  - Fixed HID report parser collection paths invalid due to misplaced semicolon in the free path item search loop
+  *  - Fixed HID host Class driver report send/receive report broken when issued through the control pipe
+  *  - Fixed HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR compile time option being ignored when in host mode (thanks to David Lyons)
+  *  - Fixed LowLevel Keyboard demo not saving the issues report only after it has been sent to the host
+  *  - Fixed Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_* functions not sending a terminating IN when given data Length is zero
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog090924 Version 090924
+  *
+  *  <b>New:</b>
+  *  - Added new host mode class drivers and matching demos to the library for rapid application development
+  *  - Added flag to the HID report parser to indicate if a device has multiple reports
+  *  - Added new EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event, controlled by the new USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents() and
+  *    USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents() macros to give bus-synchronized millisecond interrupts when in USB device mode
+  *  - Added new Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection() macro for bidirectional endpoints
+  *  - Added new AVRISP project, a LUFA powered clone of the Atmel AVRISP-MKII programmer
+  *  - Added ShutDown() functions for all hardware peripheral drivers, so that peripherals can be turned off after use
+  *  - Added new CDC_Device_Flush() command to the device mode CDC Class driver to flush Device->Host data
+  *  - Added extra masks to the SPI driver, changed SPI_Init() so that the clock polarity and sample modes can be set
+  *  - Added new callback to the HID report parser, so that the user application can filter only the items it is interested
+  *    in to be stored into the HIDReportInfo structure to save RAM
+  *  - Added support for the officially recommended external peripheral layout for the BUMBLEB board (thanks to Dave Fletcher)
+  *  - Added new Pipe_IsFrozen() macro to determine if the currently selected pipe is frozen
+  *  - Added new USB_GetHIDReportSize() function to the HID report parser to retrieve the size of a given report by its ID
+  *  - Added new combined Mass Storage and Keyboard demo (thanks to Matthias Hullin)
+  *
+  *  <b>Changed:</b>
+  *  - SetIdle requests to the HID device driver with a 0 idle period (send changes only) now only affect the requested
+  *    HID interface within the device, not all HID interfaces
+  *  - Added explicit attribute masks to the device mode demos' descriptors
+  *  - Added return values to the CDC and MIDI class driver transmit functions
+  *  - Optimized Endpoint_Read_Word_* and Pipe_Read_Word_* macros to reduce compiled size
+  *  - Added non-null function parameter pointer restrictions to USB Class drivers to improve user code reliability
+  *  - Added new "Common" section to the class drivers, to hold all mode-independent definitions for clarity
+  *  - Moved SCSI command/sense constants into the Mass Storage Class driver, instead of the user-code
+  *  - Altered the SCSI commands in the LowLevel Mass Storage Host to save on FLASH space by reducing function calls
+  *  - Changed the parameters and behaviour of the USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() function so that it now performs size checks
+  *    and data validations internally, to simplify user code
+  *  - Changed HIDParser to only zero out important values in the Parsed HID Report Item Information structure to save cycles
+  *  - The HID report parser now always processed FEATURE items - HID_ENABLE_FEATURE_PROCESSING token now has no effect
+  *  - The HID report parser now always ignores constant-data items, HID_INCLUDE_CONSTANT_DATA_ITEMS token now has no effect
+  *  - The Benito Programmer project now has its own unique VID/PID pair allocated from the Atmel donated LUFA VID/PID pool
+  *  - Add in new invalid event hook check targets to project makefiles to produce compilation errors when invalid event names
+  *    are used in a project
+  *  - The HID Report Parser now gives information on the total length of each report within a HID interface
+  *  - The USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES compile time token has been removed - there are now separate USB_Descriptor_* and
+  *    USB_StdDescriptor_* structures for both the LUFA and standardized element naming conventions so both may be used
+  *
+  *  <b>Fixed:</b>
+  *  - Fixed possible lockup in the CDC device class driver, when the host sends data that is a multiple of the
+  *    endpoint's bank
+  *  - Fixed swapped parameters in the HID state memory copy call while processing a HID PUSH item in the HID report parser
+  *  - Fixed memory corruption HID report parser when too many COLLECTION or PUSH items were processed
+  *  - Fixed HID report parser not resetting the FEATURE item count when a REPORT ID item is encountered
+  *  - Fixed USBtoSerial demos not reading in UDR1 when the USART receives data but the USB interface is not enumerated,
+  *    causing continuous USART receive interrupts
+  *  - Fixed misspelled event name in the Class driver USBtoSerial demo, preventing correct operation
+  *  - Fixed invalid data being returned when a GetStatus request is issued in Device mode with an unhandled data recipient
+  *  - Added hardware USART receive interrupt and software buffering to the Benito project to ensure received data is not
+  *    missed or corrupted
+  *  - Fixed Device mode HID Class driver always sending IN packets, even when nothing to report
+  *  - Fixed Device mode HID Class driver not explicitly initializing the ReportSize parameter to zero before calling callback
+  *    routine, so that ignored callbacks don't cause incorrect data to be sent
+  *  - Fixed StillImageHost not correctly freezing and unfreezing data pipes while waiting for a response block header
+  *  - Fixed error in the PrinterHost demo preventing the full page data from being sent to the attached device (thanks to John Andrews)
+  *  - Fixed CDC based demos and projects' INF driver files under 64 bit versions of Windows (thanks to Ronny Hanson, Thomas Bleeker)
+  *  - Re-add in missing flip, flip-ee, dfu and dfu-ee targets to project makefiles (thanks to Opendous Inc.)
+  *  - Fix allowable F_CPU values comment in project makefiles to more accurately reflect the allowable values on the USB AVRs
+  *  - Fixed DFU and CDC class bootloaders on the series 2 USB AVRs, corrected invalid signatures, added support for the new
+  *    ATMEGAxx2 series 2 variant AVRs to the DFU bootloader
+  *  - Fixed Low Level USBtoSerial demo not storing received characters (thanks to Michael Cooper)
+  *  - Fixed MIDI Device Class driver not sending/receiving MIDI packets of the correct size (thanks to Thomas Bleeker)
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog090810 Version 090810
+  *
+  *  <b>New:</b>
+  *  - Added new device class drivers and matching demos to the library for rapid application development
+  *  - Added new PrinterHost demo (thanks to John Andrews)
+  *  - Added USB Missile Launcher project, submitted by Dave Fletcher
+  *  - Added new Benito Arduino Programmer project
+  *  - Added incomplete device and host mode demos for later enhancement
+  *  - Updated MassStorage device block write routines to use ping-pong Dataflash buffering to increase throughput by around 30%
+  *  - Error status LEDs shown when device endpoint configuration fails to complete in all demos and projects
+  *  - Added new USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration() convenience function for easy configuration selection of devices while in USB
+  *    host mode
+  *  - Added new USB_Host_ClearPipeStall() convenience function to clear a stall condition on an attached device's endpoint
+  *  - Added new USB_Host_GetDeviceDescriptor() convenience function to retrieve the attached device's Device descriptor
+  *  - Added new Endpoint_ClearStatusStage() convenience function to assist with the status stages of control transfers
+  *  - Added new USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL define for using the unique serial numbers in some AVR models as the USB device's serial number,
+  *    added NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL compile time option to turn off new serial number reading code
+  *  - Added new DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK() macro to the Dataflash driver, which returns the Dataflash select mask for the given chip index
+  *  - Added new HOST_STATE_WaitForDeviceRemoval host state machine state for non-blocking disabling of device communications until the
+  *    device has been removed (for use when an error occurs or communications with the device have completed)
+  *  - Added new FAST_STREAM_TRANSFERS compile time option for faster stream transfers via multiple bytes copied per stream loop
+  *  - Added stdio stream demo code to the CDC device demos, to show how to create standard streams out of the virtual serial ports
+  *  - Added new EEPROM and FLASH buffer versions of the Endpoint and Pipe stream functions
+  *  - Added new USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS and FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS compile time options
+  *  - Added support for the new ATMEGA32U2, ATMEGA16U2 and ATMEGA8U2 AVR models
+  *  - Added new USB_DeviceState variable to keep track of the current Device mode USB state
+  *  - Added new LEDs_ToggleLEDs() function to the LEDs driver
+  *  - Added new Pipe_BoundEndpointNumber() and Pipe_IsEndpointBound() functions
+  *  - Added new DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR and HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR compile time options
+  *  - Added 404 Not Found errors to the webserver in the RNDIS demos to indicate invalid URLs
+  *
+  *  <b>Changed:</b>
+  *  - Deprecated pseudo-scheduler and removed dynamic memory allocator from the library (first no longer needed and second unused)
+  *  - The device-mode CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor() function now has an extra parameter so that the memory space in which the requested
+  *    descriptor is located can be specified. This means that descriptors can now be located in multiple memory spaces within a device.
+  *  - Removed vague USB_IsConnected global - test USB_DeviceState or USB_HostState explicitly to gain previous functionality
+  *  - Removed USB_IsSuspended global - test USB_DeviceState against DEVICE_STATE_Suspended instead
+  *  - Extended USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() routine to require the configuration number within the device to fetch
+  *  - Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy() now always ensures that the dataflash is ready for the next command immediately after returning,
+  *    no need to call Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS() afterwards
+  *  - Low level API MIDI device demo no longer blocks if a note change event is sent while the endpoint is not ready
+  *  - Pipe_GetErrorFlags() now returns additional error flags for overflow and underflow errors
+  *  - Pipe stream functions now automatically set the correct pipe token, so that bidirectional pipes can be used
+  *  - Pipe_ConfigurePipe() now automatically defaults IN pipes to accepting infinite IN requests, this can still be changed by calling
+  *    the existing Pipe_SetFiniteINRequests() function
+  *  - Changed F_USB entries in project makefiles to alias to F_CPU by default, as this is the most common case
+  *  - Host mode demos now use sane terminal escape codes, so that text is always readable and events/program output is visually distinguished
+  *    from one another using foreground colours
+  *  - Internal per-device preprocessing conditions changed to per-device series rather than per-controller group for finer-grain
+  *    internal control
+  *  - Interrupts are no longer disabled during the processing of Control Requests on the default endpoint while in device mode
+  *  - AudioOutput demos now always output to board LEDs, regardless of output mode (removed AUDIO_OUT_LEDS project option)
+  *  - Removed SINGLE_DEVICE_CONFIGURATION compile time option in favor of the new FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS option so that the exact number
+  *    of device configurations can be defined statically
+  *  - Removed VBUS events, as they are already exposed to the user application via the regular device connection and disconnection events
+  *  - Renamed and altered existing events to properly separate out Host and Device mode events
+  *  - All demos switched over from GNU99 standards mode to C99 standards mode, to reduce the dependencies on GCC-only language extensions
+  *
+  *  <b>Fixed:</b>
+  *  - Changed bootloaders to use FLASHEND rather than the existence of RAMPZ to determine if far FLASH pointers are needed to fix
+  *    bootloaders on some of the USB AVR devices where avr-libc erroneously defines RAMPZ
+  *  - Fixes to MassStorageHost for better device compatibility (increase command timeout, change MassStore_WaitForDataReceived()
+  *    to only unfreeze and check one data pipe at a time) to prevent incorrect device enumerations and freezes while transferring data
+  *  - Make Pipe_ConfigurePipe() mask the given endpoint number against PIPE_EPNUM_MASK to ensure the endpoint IN direction bit is
+  *    cleared to prevent endpoint type corruption
+  *  - Fixed issue opening CDC-ACM ports on hosts when the CDC device tries to send data before the host has set the line encoding
+  *  - Fixed USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL option being ignored during device disconnects on some models (thanks to Brian Dickman)
+  *  - Fixed documentation mentioning Pipe_GetCurrentToken() function when correct function name is Pipe_GetPipeToken()
+  *  - Fixed ADC driver for the ATMEGA32U4 and ATMEGA16U4 (thanks to Opendous Inc.)
+  *  - Fixed CDCHost demo unfreezing the pipes at the point of configuration, rather than use
+  *  - Fixed MassStorage demo not clearing the reset flag when a Mass Storage Reset is issued while not processing a command
+  *  - Fixed USB_Host_SendControlRequest() not re-suspending the USB bus when initial device ready-wait fails
+  *  - Fixed USB Pad regulator not being disabled on some AVR models when the USB_OPT_REG_DISABLED option is used
+  *  - Fixed Host mode to Device mode UID change not causing a USB Disconnect event when a device was connected
+  *  - Fixed Mouse/Keyboard demos not performing the correct arithmetic on the Idle period at the right times (thanks to Brian Dickman)
+  *  - Fixed GenericHID failing HID class tests due to incorrect Logical Minimum and Logical Maximum values (thanks to Soren Greiner)
+  *  - Fixed incorrect PIPE_EPNUM_MASK mask causing pipe failures on devices with endpoint addresses of 8 and above (thanks to John Andrews)
+  *  - Fixed report data alignment issues in the MouseHostWithParser demo when X and Y movement data size is not a multiple of 8 bits
+  *  - Fixed HID Report Descriptor Parser not correctly resetting internal states when a REPORT ID element is encountered
+  *  - Fixed incorrect BUTTONS_BUTTON1 for the STK526 target
+  *  - Fixed RNDIS demos freezing when more than one connection was attempted simultaneously, causing memory corruption
+  *  - Fixed USBtoSerial demo receiving noise from the USART due to pull-up not being enabled
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog090605 Version 090605
+  *
+  *  - Fixed bug in RNDISEthernet and DualCDC demos not using the correct USB_ControlRequest structure for control request data
+  *  - Fixed documentation showing incorrect USB mode support on the supported AVRs list
+  *  - Fixed RNDISEthernet not working under Linux due to Linux requiring an "optional" RNDIS request which was unhandled
+  *  - Fixed Mouse and Keyboard device demos not acting in accordance with the HID specification for idle periods (thanks to Brian Dickman)
+  *  - Removed support for endpoint/pipe non-control interrupts; these did not act in the way users expected, and had many subtle issues
+  *  - Fixed Device Mode not handling Set Feature and Clear Feature Chapter 9 requests that are addressed to the device (thanks to Brian Dickman)
+  *  - Moved control endpoint interrupt handling into the library itself, enable via the new INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT token
+  *  - Fixed CDCHost not clearing configured pipes and resetting configured pipes mask when a partially enumerated invalid CDC
+  *    interface is skipped
+  *  - Clarified the size of library tokens which accept integer values in the Compile Time Tokens page, values now use the smallest datatype
+  *    inside the library that is able to hold their defined value to save space
+  *  - Removed DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS() macro as it was largely superfluous and only served to obfuscate code
+  *  - Rewritten event system to remove all macros, to make user code clearer
+  *  - Fixed incorrect ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK mask preventing endpoints above EP3 from being selected (thanks to Jonathan Oakley)
+  *  - Removed STREAM_CALLBACK() macro - callbacks now use regular function definitions to clarify user code
+  *  - Removed DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR() macro - comparators should now use regular function definitions to clarify user code
+  *  - USB_IsConnected is now cleared before the USB_Disconnect() event is fired in response to VBUS being removed
+  *  - Fixed incorrect PID value being used in the USBtoSerial project (thanks to Phill)
+  *  - Deleted StdDescriptors.c, renamed USB_GetDescriptor() to CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor, moved ConfigDescriptor.c/.h from the
+  *    LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ directory to LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ in preparation for the new USB class APIs
+  *  - Moved out each demos' functionality library files (e.g. Ring Buffer library) to /Lib directories for a better directory structure
+  *  - Removed Tx interrupt from the USBtoSerial demo; now sends characters via polling to ensure more time for the Rx interrupt
+  *  - Fixed possible enumeration errors from spin-loops which may fail to exit if the USB connection is severed before the exit condition
+  *    becomes true
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog090510 Version 090510
+  *
+  *  - Added new GenericHIDHost demo
+  *  - Corrections to the KeyboardHost and MouseHost demos' pipe handling to freeze and unfreeze the data pipes at the point of use
+  *  - KeyboardHost, MouseHost and GenericHIDHost demos now save and restore the currently selected pipe inside the pipe ISR
+  *  - Changed GenericHID device demo to use the LUFA scheduler, added INTERRUPT_DATA_ENDPOINT and INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT compile
+  *    time options
+  *  - All comments in the library, bootloaders, demos and projects have now been spell-checked and spelling mistakes/typos corrected
+  *  - Added new PIMA_DATA_SIZE() define to the Still Image Host demo
+  *  - Add call to MassStore_WaitForDataReceived() in MassStore_GetReturnedStatus() to ensure that the CSW has been received in the
+  *    extended MSC timeout period before continuing, to prevent long processing delays from causing the MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()
+  *    to early-abort (thanks to Dmitry Maksimov)
+  *  - Move StdRequestType.h, StreamCallbacks.h, USBMode.h from the LowLevel USB driver directory to the HighLevel USB driver directory,
+  *    where they are more suited
+  *  - Removed all binary constants and replaced with decimal or hexadecimal constants so that unpatched GCC compilers can still build the
+  *    code without having to be itself patched and recompiled first
+  *  - Added preprocessor checks and documentation to the bootloaders giving information about missing SIGNATURE_x defines due to
+  *    outdated avr-libc versions.
+  *  - Added support to the CDCHost demo for devices with multiple CDC interfaces which are not the correct ACM type preceding the desired
+  *    ACM CDC interface
+  *  - Fixed GenericHID demo not starting USB and HID management tasks when not using interrupt driven modes (thanks to Carl Kjeldsen)
+  *  - Fixed RNDISEthenet demo checking the incorrect message field for packet size constraints (thanks to Jonathan Oakley)
+  *  - Fixed WriteNextReport code in the GenericHIDHost demo using incorrect parameter types and not selecting the correct endpoint
+  *  - Adjusted sample CTC timer calculations in the AudioOutput and AudioInput demos to match the CTC calculations in the AVR datasheet,
+  *    and to fix instances where rounding caused the endpoint to underflow (thanks to Robin Theunis)
+  *  - The USB_Host_SendControlRequest() function no longer automatically selects the Control pipe (pipe 0), so that other control type
+  *    pipes can be used with the function
+  *  - The USB Host management task now saves and restores the currently selected pipe before and after the task completes
+  *  - Fixed GenericHIDHost demo report write routine incorrect for control type requests (thanks to Andrei Krainev)
+  *  - Removed Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank() and Pipe_ClearCurrentBank() in favor of new Endpoint_ClearIN(), Endpoint_ClearOUT(),
+  *    Pipe_ClearIN() and Pipe_ClearOUT() macros (done to allow for the detection of packets of zero length)
+  *  - Renamed *_ReadWriteAllowed() macros to *_IsReadWriteAllowed() to remain consistent with the rest of the LUFA API
+  *  - Endpoint_IsSetupReceived() macro has been renamed to Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived(), Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived() macro has been
+  *    renamed to Endpoint_ClearSETUP(), the Pipe_IsSetupSent() macro has been renamed to Pipe_IsSETUPSent() and the
+  *    Pipe_ClearSetupSent() macro is no longer applicable and should be removed - changes made to compliment the new endpoint and pipe
+  *    bank management API
+  *  - Updated all demos, bootloaders and projects to use the new endpoint and pipe management APIs (thanks to Roman Thiel from Curetis AG)
+  *  - Updated library Doxygen documentation, added groups, changed documentation macro functions to real functions for clarity
+  *  - Removed old endpoint and pipe aliased read/write/discard routines which did not have an explicit endian specifier for clarity
+  *  - Removed the ButtLoadTag.h header file, as no one used for its intended purpose anyway
+  *  - Renamed the main Drivers/AT90USBXXX directory to Drivers/Peripheral, renamed the Serial_Stream driver to SerialStream
+  *  - Fixed CDC and USBtoSerial demos freezing where buffers were full while still transmitting or receiving (thanks to Peter Hand)
+  *  - Removed "Host_" section of the function names in ConfigDescriptor.h, as most of the routines can now be used in device mode on the
+  *    device descriptor
+  *  - Renamed functions in the HID parser to have a "USB_" prefix and the acronym "HID" in the name
+  *  - Fixed incorrect HID interface class and subclass values in the Mouse and KeyboardMouse demos (thanks to Brian Dickman)
+  *  - Capitalized the "Descriptor_Search" and "Descriptor_Search_Comp" prefixes of the values in the DSearch_Return_ErrorCodes_t and
+  *    DSearch_Comp_Return_ErrorCodes_t enums
+  *  - Removed "ERROR" from the enum names in the endpoint and pipe stream error code enums
+  *  - Renamed the USB_PowerOnErrorCodes_t enum to USB_InitErrorCodes_t, renamed the POWERON_ERROR_NoUSBModeSpecified enum value to
+  *    USB_INITERROR_NoUSBModeSpecified
+  *  - Renamed USB_PowerOnFail event to USB_InitFailure
+  *  - Renamed OTG.h header functions to be more consistent with the rest of the library API
+  *  - Changed over all deprecated GCC structure tag initializers to the standardized C99 format (thanks to Mike Alexander)
+  *  - USB_HostRequest renamed to USB_ControlRequest, entire control request header is now read into USB_ControlRequest in Device mode
+  *    rather than having the library pass only partially read header data to the application
+  *  - The USB_UnhandledControlPacket event has had its parameters removed, in favor of accessing the new USB_ControlRequest structure
+  *  - The Endpoint control stream functions now correctly send a ZLP to the host when less data than requested is sent
+  *  - Fixed USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled flag never being set (the REMOTE WAKEUP Set Feature request was not being handled)
+  *  - Renamed the FEATURELESS_CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE compile-time token to CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+  *  - Endpoint configuration is now refined to give better output when all configurations have static inputs - removed the now useless
+  *    STATIC_ENDPOINT_CONFIGURATION compile time token
+  *  - Fixed SPI driver init function not clearing SPI2X bit when not needed
+  *  - Fixed PREVENT ALLOW MEDIUM REMOVAL command issuing in the MassStorageHost demo using incorrect parameters (thanks to Mike Alex)
+  *  - Fixed MassStorageHost demo broken due to an incorrect if statement test in MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()
+  *  - Fixed reversed signature byte ordering in the CDC bootloader (thanks to Johannes Raschke)
+  *  - Changed PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE from 8 to 64 to try to prevent problems with faulty devices which do not respect the given
+  *    wLength value when reading in the device descriptor
+  *  - Fixed missing semicolon in the ATAVRUSBRF01 LED board driver code (thanks to Morten Lund)
+  *  - Changed LED board driver code to define dummy LED masks for the first four board LEDs, so that user code can be compiled for boards
+  *    with less than four LEDs without code modifications (thanks to Morten Lund)
+  *  - Changed HWB board driver to Buttons driver, to allow for the support of future boards with more than one mounted GPIO button
+  *  - Serial driver now correctly calculates the baud register value when in double speed mode
+  *  - Init function of the Serial driver is now static inline to product smaller code for the common-case of static init values
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog090401 Version 090401
+  *
+  *  - Fixed MagStripe project configuration descriptor containing an unused (blank) endpoint descriptor
+  *  - Incorporated makefile changes by Denver Gingerich to retain compatibility with stock (non-WinAVR) AVR-GCC installations
+  *  - Fixed makefile EEPROM programming targets programming FLASH data in addition to EEPROM data
+  *  - LUFA devices now enumerate correctly with LUFA hosts
+  *  - Fixed Configuration Descriptor search routine freezing when a comparator returned a failure
+  *  - Removed HID report item serial dump in the MouseHostWithParser and KeyboardHostWithParser - useful only for debugging, and
+  *    slowed down the enumeration of HID devices too much
+  *  - Increased the number of bits per track which can be read in the MagStripe project to 8192 when compiled for the AT90USBXXX6/7
+  *  - Fixed KeyboardMouse demo discarding the wIndex value in the REQ_GetReport request
+  *  - USBtoSerial demo now discards all Rx data when not connected to a USB host, rather than buffering characters for transmission
+  *    next time the device is attached to a host.
+  *  - Added new F_USB compile time constant to the library and makefiles, to give the raw input clock (used to feed the PLL before any
+  *    clock prescaling is performed) frequency, so that the PLL prescale mask can be determined
+  *  - Changed stream wait timeout counter to be 16-bit, so that very long timeout periods can be set for correct communications with
+  *    badly designed hosts or devices which greatly exceed the USB specification limits
+  *  - Mass Storage Host demo now uses a USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS of two seconds to maintain compatibility with poorly designed devices
+  *  - Function attribute ATTR_ALWAYSINLINE renamed to ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE to match other function attribute macro naming conventions
+  *  - Added ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE attribute to several key inlined library components, to ensure they are inlined in all circumstances
+  *  - Removed SetSystemClockPrescaler() macro, the clock_prescale_set() avr-libc macro has been corrected in recent avr-libc versions
+  *  - Fixed incorrect/missing control status stage transfers on demos, bootloaders and applications (thanks to Nate Lawson)
+  *  - The NO_CLEARSET_FEATURE_REQUEST compile time token has been renamed to FEATURELESS_CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE, and its function expanded
+  *    to also remove parts of the Get Status chapter 9 request to further reduce code usage
+  *  - Makefile updated to include output giving the currently selected BOARD parameter value
+  *  - Board Dataflash driver now allows for dataflash ICs which use different shifts for setting the current page/byte address (thanks
+  *    to Kenneth Clubb)
+  *  - Added DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM() and DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM() functions to the MassStorage demo, to allow for easy
+  *    interfacing with a FAT library for dataflash file level access
+  *  - Corrected CDC class bootloader to fix a few bugs, changed address counter to store x2 addresses for convenience
+  *  - Fixed typos in the SPI driver SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_64 and SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_128 masks (thanks to Markus Zocholl)
+  *  - Keyboard and Mouse device demos (normal, data interrupt and fully interrupt driven) combined into unified keyboard and mouse demos
+  *  - Keyboard and Mouse host demos (normal and data interrupt driven) combined into unified keyboard and mouse demos
+  *  - Removed AVRISP_Programmer project due to code quality concerns
+  *  - Fixed CDC demo not sending an empty packet after each transfer to prevent the host from buffering incoming data
+  *  - Fixed documentation typos and preprocessor checks relating to misspellings of the USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS token (thanks to Ian Gregg)
+  *  - Fixed USBTask.h not conditionally including HostChapter9.h only when USB_CAN_BE_HOST is defined (thanks to Ian Gregg)
+  *  - Fixed incorrect ADC driver init register manipulation (thanks to Tobias)
+  *  - Added new GenericHID device demo application
+  *  - Fixed Still Image Host SImage_SendData() function not clearing the pipe bank after sending data
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog090209 Version 090209
+  *
+  *  - PWM timer mode in AudioOut demo changed to Fast PWM for speed
+  *  - Updated Magstripe project to work with the latest hardware revision
+  *  - Fixed library not responding to the BCERRI flag correctly in host mode, leading to device lockups
+  *  - Fixed library handling Get Descriptor requests when not addressed as standard requests to the device or interface (thanks to
+  *    Nate Lawson)
+  *  - Fixed serious data corruption issue in MassStorage demo dataflash write routine
+  *  - Added new NO_CLEARSET_FEATURE_REQUEST compile time token
+  *  - USB task now restores previous global interrupt state after execution, rather than forcing global interrupts to be enabled
+  *  - Fixed USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event firing after each configuration change, rather than once after the initial configuration
+  *  - Added ENDPOINT_DOUBLEBANK_SUPPORTED() macros to Endpoint.h, altered ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE() to allow user to specify endpoint
+  *  - ENDPOINT_MAX_ENDPOINTS changed to ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS, PIPE_MAX_PIPES changed to PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES
+  *  - Endpoint and Pipe non-control stream functions now ensure endpoint or pipe is ready before reading or writing
+  *  - Changed Teensy bootloader to use a watchdog reset when exiting rather than a software jump
+  *  - Fixed integer promotion error in MassStorage and MassStorageHost demos, corrupting read/write transfers
+  *  - SPI_SendByte is now SPI_TransferByte, added new SPI_SendByte and SPI_ReceiveByte functions for fast one-way transfer
+  *  - MassStorage demo changed to use new fast one-way SPI transfers to increase throughput
+  *  - MassStorage handling of Mass Storage Reset class request improved
+  *  - Altered MassStorage demo dataflash block read code for speed
+  *  - Added USB_IsSuspended global flag
+  *  - Simplified internal Dual Mode (OTG) USB library code to reduce code size
+  *  - Extended stream timeout period to 100ms from 50ms
+  *  - Mass Storage Host demo commands now all return an error code from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+  *  - Added SubErrorCode parameter to the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event
+  *  - VBUS drop interrupt now disabled during the manual-to-auto VBUS delivery handoff
+  *  - Simplified low level backend so that device/host mode initialization uses the same code paths
+  *  - Added workaround for faulty Mass Storage devices which do not implement the required GET_MAX_LUN request
+  *  - Removed buggy Telnet application from the RNDIS demo
+  *  - Moved Mass Storage class requests in the Mass Storage Host demo to wrapper functions in MassStoreCommands.c
+  *  - Fixed incorrect SCSI command size value in the Request Sense command in MassStoreCommands.c
+  *  - Added SetProtocol request to HID class non-parser Mouse and Keyboard demos to force devices to use the correct Boot Protocol
+  *  - Added new "dfu" and "flip" programming targets to project makefiles
+  *  - HID_PARSE_Sucessful enum member typo corrected to HID_PARSE_Successful
+  *  - Changed COLLECTION item structures in the HID descriptor parser to include the collection's Usage Page value
+  *  - Serial driver now sets Tx line as output, enables pull-up on Rx line
+  *  - Fixed smaller USB AVRs raising multiple connection and disconnection events when NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT is disabled
+  *  - Added HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS to give the host delay after a device is connected before it is enumerated
+  *  - Fixed KeyboardHostWithParser demo linking against the wrong global variables
+  *  - Completed doxygen documentation of remaining library bootloaders, demos and projects
+  *  - Fixed incorrect bootloader start address in the TeensyHID bootloader
+  *  - Added HWB button whole-disk ASCII dump functionality to MassStoreHost demo
+  *  - Replaced printf_P(PSTR("%c"), {Variable}) calls with putchar(<Variable>) for speed and size savings
+  *  - Serial driver now accepts baud rates over 16-bits in size, added double speed flag option
+  *  - Fixed incorrect callback abort return value in Pipe.c
+  *  - Added new flip-ee and dfu-ee makefile targets (courtesy of Opendous Inc.)
+  *  - Removed reboot-on-disconnect code from the TeensyHID bootloader, caused problems on some systems
+  *  - Fixed AudioOutput and AudioInput demos looping on the endpoint data, rather than processing a sample at a time and returning
+  *    each time the task runs to allow for other tasks to execute
+  *  - Added support for the Atmel ATAVRUSBRF01 board
+  *  - Added AVRISP Programmer Project, courtesy of Opendous Inc.
+  *  - Fixed CDC Host demo not searching through both CDC interfaces for endpoints
+  *  - Fixed incorrect Product String descriptor length in the DFU class bootloader
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog081224 Version 081224
+  *
+  *  - MyUSB name changed to LUFA, the Lightweight USB Framework for AVRs
+  *  - Fixed Mass Storage Host demo's MassStore_SendCommand() delay in the incorrect place
+  *  - Fixed USBtoSerial demo not calling ReconfigureUSART() after a change in the line encoding
+  *  - Fixed infinite loop in host mode Host-to-Device control transfers with data stages
+  *  - HID report parser now supports devices with multiple reports in one interface via Report IDs
+  *  - Fixed RZUSBSTICK board LED driver header incorrect macro definition order causing compile errors
+  *  - Calling USB_Init() when the USB interface is already configured now forces a complete interface reset
+  *    and re-enumeration - fixes MyUSB DFU bootloader not switching to app code correctly when soft reset used
+  *  - Fixed "No newline at end of file" warning when stream callbacks are enabled
+  *  - DFU bootloader now uses fixed signature bytes per device, rather than reading them out dynamically for size
+  *  - Added new FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE and USE_SINGLE_DEVICE_CONFIGURATION switches to statically define certain values to
+  *    reduce compiled binary size
+  *  - Added new NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT switch to prevent the library from trying to determine bus connection
+  *    state from the suspension and wake up events on the smaller USB AVRs
+  *  - Added summary of all library compile time tokens to the documentation
+  *  - Added overview of the LUFA scheduler to the documentation
+  *  - Removed MANUAL_PLL_CONTROL compile time token, replaced with a mask for the USB_Init() Options parameter
+  *  - CDC bootloader now uses the correct non-far or far versions of the pgm_* functions depending on if RAMPZ is defined
+  *  - Doxygen documentation now contains documentation on all the projects, bootloaders and most demos included with the library
+  *  - CDC bootloader now runs user application when USB disconnected rather than waiting for a hard reset
+  *  - MouseHostWithParser and KeyboardHostWithParser now support multiple-report devices
+  *  - RNDIS demo can now close connections correctly using the new TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION() macro - used in Webserver
+  *  - Fixed the DFU bootloader, no longer freezes up when certain files are programmed into an AVR, made reading/writing faster
+  *  - Fixed mouse/joystick up/down movements reversed - HID mouse X/Y coordinates use a left-handed coordinate system, not a normal
+  *    right-handed system
+  *  - Added stub code to the CDC and USBtoSerial demos showing how to read and set the RS-232 handshake lines - not currently used in
+  *    the demos, but the example code and supporting defines are now in place
+  *  - Interrupts are now disabled when processing a control request in device mode, to avoid exceeding the strict control request
+  *    timing requirements.
+  *  - All demos now use a central StatusUpdate() function rather than direct calls to the board LED functions, so that the demos can
+  *    easily be altered to show different LED combinations (or do something else entirely) as the demo's status changes
+  *  - Removed LED commands from the CDC bootloader, unused by most AVR910 programming software
+  *  - Fixed RNDIS demo ICMP ping requests echoing back incorrect data
+  *  - Added DHCP server code to RNDIS demo, allowing for hands-free auto configuration on any PC
+  *  - Fixed DFU bootloader PID value for the ATMEGA16U4 AVR
+  *  - Endpoint and Pipe configuration functions now return an error code indicating success or failure
+  *  - USB Reset in device mode now resets and disables all device endpoints
+  *  - Added intermediate states to the host mode state machine, reducing the USB task blocking time to no more than 1ms explicitly per
+  *    invocation when in host mode
+  *  - Added support for the ATMEGA32U6 microcontroller
+  *  - Added STATIC_ENDPOINT_CONFIGURATION compile time option, enabled in the bootloaders to minimize space usage
+  *  - Removed redundant code from the USB device GetStatus() chapter 9 processing routine
+  *  - Added new TeensyHID bootloader, compatible with the Teensy HID protocol (http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/)
+  *  - Versions are now numbered by release dates, rather than arbitrary major/minor revision numbers
+  *  - USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled is now correctly set and cleared by SetFeature and ClearFeature requests from the host
+  *  - Changed prototype of GetDescriptor, so that it now returns the descriptor size (or zero if the descriptor doesn't exist)
+  *    rather than passing the size back to the caller through a parameter and returning a boolean
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog153 Version 1.5.3 (081002)
+  *
+  *  - Fixed CDC bootloader using pgmspace macros for some descriptors inappropriately
+  *  - Updated all Mouse and Keyboard device demos to include boot protocol support (now works in BIOS)
+  *  - Renamed bootloader directories to remove spaces, which were causing build problems on several OSes
+  *  - Removed serial number strings from all but the MassStore demo where it is required - users were not
+  *    modifying the code to either omit the descriptor or use a unique serial per device causing problems
+  *    when multiple units of the same device were plugged in at the same time
+  *  - AudioOutput and AudioInput demos now correctly silence endpoints when not enabled by the host
+  *  - Added KeyboardMouse demo (Keyboard and Mouse functionality combined into a single demo)
+  *  - Added DriverStubs directory to house board level driver templates, to make MyUSB compatible custom board
+  *    driver creation easier
+  *  - Extended MassStorage demo to support multiple LUNs, 2 by default
+  *  - Fixed incorrect device address mask, preventing the device from enumerating with addresses larger than 63
+  *  - Fixed incorrect data direction mask in the GetStatus standard request, preventing it from being handled
+  *  - Fixed incorrect GetStatus standard request for endpoints, now returns the endpoint STALL status correctly
+  *  - Added in new USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled and USB_CurrentlySelfPowered flags rather than using fixed values
+  *  - Added DualCDC demo to demonstrate the use of Interface Association Descriptors
+  *  - Added pipe NAK detection and clearing API
+  *  - Added pipe status change (NAK, STALL, etc.) interrupt API
+  *  - Fixed MassStorageHost demo so that it no longer freezes randomly when issuing several commands in a row
+  *  - Host demos configuration descriptor routines now return a unique error code when the returned data does
+  *    not have a valid configuration descriptor header
+  *  - Added Endpoint_WaitUntilReady() and Pipe_WaitUntilReady() functions
+  *  - Stream functions now have software timeouts, timeout period can be set by the USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS token
+  *  - All demos now pass the USB.org automated Chapter 9 device compliance tests
+  *  - All HID demos now pass the USB.org automated HID compliance tests
+  *  - Polling interval of the interrupt endpoint in the CDC based demos changed to 0xFF to fix problems on Linux systems
+  *  - Changed stream functions to accept a new callback function, with NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS used to disable all callbacks
+  *  - Mass Storage demo Dataflash management routines changed to use the endpoint stream functions
+  *  - Added AVRStudio project files for each demo in addition to the existing Programmer's Notepad master project file
+  *  - Re-added call to ReconfigureUSART() in USBtoSerial SetLineCoding request, so that baud rate changes
+  *    are reflected in the hardware (change was previously lost)
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog152 Version 1.5.2 (080731)
+  *
+  *  - Fixed SwapEndian_32() function in Common.h so that it now works correctly (wrong parameter types)
+  *  - Updated RNDIS demo - notification endpoint is no longer blocking so that it works with faulty Linux RNDIS
+  *    implementations (where the notification endpoint is ignored in favor of polling the control endpoint)
+  *  - Fixed incorrect Vendor Description string return size in RNDIS demo for the OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION OID token
+  *  - Added very basic TCP/IP stack and HTTP/TELNET servers to RNDIS demo
+  *  - Fixed DFU bootloader exit causing programming software to complain about failed writes
+  *  - Fixed DFU bootloader EEPROM programming mode wiping first flash page
+  *  - Fixed Clear/Set Feature device standard request processing code (fixing MassStorage demo in the process)
+  *  - Added support for the ATMEGA16U4 AVR microcontroller
+  *  - Library license changed from LGPLv3 to MIT license
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog151 Version 1.5.1 (080707)
+  *
+  *  - Changed host demos to enable the host function task on the firing of the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event
+  *    rather than the USB_DeviceAttached event
+  *  - HID Usage Stack now forcefully cleared after an IN/OUT/FEATURE item has been completely processed to remove
+  *    any referenced but not created usages
+  *  - Changed USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts() and USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(), USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfType(),
+  *    USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeBefore(), USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeAfter() to normal functions (from inline)
+  *  - Fixed USBtoSerial demo not sending data, only receiving
+  *  - Fixed main makefile to make all by default, fixed MagStripe directory case to prevent case-sensitive path problems
+  *  - ConfigDescriptor functions made normal, instead of static inline
+  *  - Pipe/Endpoint *_Ignore_* functions changed to *_Discard_*, old names still present as aliases
+  *  - Fixed ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE define to be correct on limited USB controller AVRs
+  *  - Changed endpoint and pipe size translation routines to use previous IF/ELSE IF cascade code, new algorithmic
+  *    approach was buggy and caused problems
+  *  - Bootloaders now compile with -fno-inline-small-functions option to reduce code size
+  *  - Audio demos now use correct endpoint sizes for full and limited controller USB AVRs, double banking in all cases
+  *    to be in line with the specification (isochronous endpoints MUST be double banked)
+  *  - Added Interface Association descriptor to StdDescriptors.h, based on the relevant USB2.0 ECN
+  *  - Fixed MIDI demo, corrected Audio Streaming descriptor to follow the MIDI-specific AS structure
+  *  - Fixed HID class demo descriptors so that the HID interface's protocol is 0x00 (required for non-boot protocol HID
+  *    devices) to prevent problems on hosts expecting the boot protocol functions to be supported
+  *  - Added read/write control stream functions to Endpoint.h
+  *  - Fixed AudioOut demo not setting port pins to inputs on USB disconnect properly
+  *  - Added RNDISEthernet demo application
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog150 Version 1.5.0 (080610)
+  *
+  *  - Fixed MIDI demo, now correctly waits for the endpoint to be ready between multiple note messages
+  *  - Added CDC Host demo application
+  *  - Added KeyboardFullInt demo application
+  *  - Endpoint and Pipe creation routines now mask endpoint/pipe size with the size mask, to remove transaction
+  *    size bits not required for the routines (improves compatibility with devices)
+  *  - Fixed AudioInput demo - now correctly sends sampled audio to the host PC
+  *  - Fixed AudioOutput demo once more -- apparently Windows requires endpoint packets to be >=192 bytes
+  *  - Shrunk round-robin scheduler code slightly via the use of struct pointers rather than array indexes
+  *  - Fixed off-by-one error when determining if the Usage Stack is full inside the HID Report parser
+  *  - Renamed Magstripe.h to MagstripeHW.h and moved driver out of the library and into the MagStripe demo folder
+  *  - Added preprocessor checks to enable C linkage on the library components when used with a C++ compiler
+  *  - Added Still Image Host demo application
+  *  - The USB device task now restores the previously selected endpoint, allowing control requests to be transparently
+  *    handled via interrupts while other endpoints are serviced through polling
+  *  - Fixed device signature being sent in reverse order in the CDC bootloader
+  *  - Host demos now have a separate ConfigDescriptor.c/.h file for configuration descriptor processing
+  *  - HostWithParser demos now have a separate HIDReport.c/.h file for HID report processing and dumping
+  *  - Removed non-mandatory commands from MassStorage demo to save space, fixed SENSE ResponseCode value
+  *  - CDC demos now send empty packets after sending a full one to prevent buffering issues on the host
+  *  - Updated demo descriptors to use VID/PID values donated by Atmel
+  *  - Added DoxyGen documentation to the source files
+  *  - Fixed Serial_IsCharReceived() definition, was previously reversed
+  *  - Removed separate USB_Descriptor_Language_t descriptor, USB_Descriptor_String_t is used instead
+  *  - Removed unused Device Qualifier descriptor structure
+  *  - Renamed the USB_CreateEndpoints event to the more appropriate USB_ConfigurationChanged
+  *  - Fixed MassStorageHost demo reading in the block data in reverse
+  *  - Removed outdated typedefs in StdRequestType.h, superseded by the macro masks
+  *  - Corrected OTG.h is now included when the AVR supports both Host and Device modes, for creating OTG products
+  *  - USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event is now also fired when in device mode and the host has finished its enumeration
+  *  - Interrupt driven demos now properly restore previously selected endpoint when ISR is complete
+  *  - The value of USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS can now be overridden in the user project makefile to a custom fixed timeout value
+  *  - Renamed USB_Host_SOFGeneration_* macros to more friendly USB_Host_SuspendBus(), USB_Host_ResumeBus()
+  *    and USB_Host_IsBusSuspended()
+  *  - Renamed *_*_Is* macros to *_Is* to make all flag checking macros consistent, Pipe_SetInterruptFreq() is now
+  *    Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod() to use the correct terminology
+  *  - UnicodeString member of USB_Descriptor_String_t struct changed to an ordinary int array type, so that the GCC
+  *    Unicode strings (prefixed with an L before the opening quotation mark) can be used instead of explicit arrays
+  *    of ASCII characters
+  *  - Fixed Endpoint/Pipes being configured incorrectly if the maximum endpoint/pipe size for the selected USB AVR
+  *    model was given as the bank size
+  *  - HID device demos now use a true raw array for the HID report descriptor rather than a struct wrapped array
+  *  - Added VERSION_BCD() macro, fixed reported HID and USB version numbers in demo descriptors
+  *  - Cleaned up GetDescriptor device chapter 9 handler function
+  *  - Added GET_REPORT class specific request to HID demos to make them complaint to the HID class
+  *  - Cleaned up setting of USB_IsInitialized and USB_IsConnected values to only when needed
+  *  - Removed Atomic.c and ISRMacro.h; the library was already only compatible with recent avr-lib-c for other reasons
+  *  - All demos and library functions now use USB standardized names for the USB data (bRequest, wLength, etc.)
+  *  - Added USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES token to switch back to the non-standard descriptor element names
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog141 Version 1.4.1 (090519)
+  *
+  *  - Enhanced KeyboardWithParser demo, now prints out pressed alphanumeric characters like the standard demo
+  *  - Fixed MassStorage demo, read/writes using non mode-10 commands now work correctly
+  *  - Corrected version number in Version.h
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog140 Version 1.4.0 (090505)
+  *
+  *  - Added HID Report Parser API to the library
+  *  - Added Mouse and Keyboard host demo applications, using the new HID report parser engine
+  *  - Added MouseFullInt demo, which demonstrates a fully interrupt (including control requests) mouse device
+  *  - Fixed incorrect length value in the audio control descriptor of the AudioOutput and AudioInput demos
+  *  - Added MIDI device demo application to the library
+  *  - Fixed problem preventing USB devices from being resumed from a suspended state
+  *  - Added new CDC class bootloader to the library, based on the AVR109 bootloader protocol
+  *  - Added header to each demo application indicating the mode, class, subclass, standards used and supported speed
+  *  - Functions expecting endpoint/pipe numbers are no longer automatically masked against ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK or
+  *    PIPE_PIPENUM_MASK - this should be manually added to code which requires it
+  *  - Fixed DFU class bootloader - corrected frequency of flash page writes, greatly reducing programming time
+  *  - Renamed AVR_HOST_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() to USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() and AVR_HOST_GetNextDescriptor()
+  *    to USB_Host_GetNextDescriptor()
+  *  - Added new USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeBefore() and USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeAfter() routines
+  *  - Moved configuration descriptor routines to MyUSB/Drivers/USB/Class/, new accompanying ConfigDescriptors.c file
+  *  - Added new configuration descriptor comparator API for more powerful descriptor parsing, updated host demos to use the
+  *    new comparator API
+  *  - Fixed MassStorageHost demo capacity printout, and changed data read/write mode from little-endian to the correct
+  *    big-endian for SCSI devices
+  *  - Fixed macro/function naming consistency; USB_HOST is now USB_Host, USB_DEV is now USB_Device
+  *  - Added better error reporting to host demos
+  *  - Added 10 microsecond delay after addressing devices in host mode, to prevent control stalls
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog132 Version 1.3.2 (080401)
+  *
+  *  - Added call to ReconfigureUSART() in USBtoSerial SetLineCoding request, so that baud rate changes
+  *    are reflected in the hardware
+  *  - Fixed CDC and USBtoSerial demos - Stream commands do not work for control endpoints, and the
+  *    GetLineCoding request had an incorrect RequestType mask preventing it from being processed
+  *  - Improved reliability of the USBtoSerial demo, adding a busy wait while the buffer is full
+  *  - Device control endpoint size is now determined from the device's descriptors rather than being fixed
+  *  - Separated out SPI code into new SPI driver in AT90USBXXX driver directory
+  *  - Bootloader now returns correct PID for the selected USB AVR model, not just the AT90USB128X PID
+  *  - Added support for the RZUSBSTICK board
+  *  - Bicolour driver removed in favor of generic LEDs driver
+  *  - Added support for the ATMEGA32U4 AVR
+  *  - Added MANUAL_PLL_CONTROL compile time option to prevent the USB library from manipulating the PLL
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog131 Version 1.3.1 (080319)
+  *
+  *  - Fixed USB to Serial demo - class value in the descriptors was incorrect
+  *  - Control endpoint size changed from 64 bytes to 8 bytes to save on USB FIFO RAM and to allow low
+  *    speed mode devices to enumerate properly
+  *  - USB to Serial demo data endpoints changed to dual-banked 16 byte to allow the demo to work
+  *    on USB AVRs with limited USB FIFO RAM
+  *  - Changed demo endpoint numbers to use endpoints 3 and 4 for double banking, to allow limited
+  *    USB device controller AVRs (AT90USB162, AT90USB82) to function correctly
+  *  - Updated Audio Out demo to use timer 1 for AVRs lacking a timer 3 for the PWM output
+  *  - Fixed incorrect USB_DEV_OPT_HIGHSPEED entry in the Mass Storage device demo makefile
+  *  - Optimized Mass Storage demo for a little extra transfer speed
+  *  - Added LED indicators to the Keyboard demo for Caps Lock, Num Lock and Scroll Lock
+  *  - Added Endpoint_Read_Stream, Endpoint_Write_Stream, Pipe_Read_Stream and Pipe_Write_Stream functions
+  *    (including Big and Little Endian variants)
+  *  - Made Dataflash functions inline for speed, removed now empty Dataflash.c driver file
+  *  - Added new SetSystemClockPrescaler() macro (thanks to Joerg Wunsch)
+  *  - Fixed Endpoint_ClearStall() to function correctly on full USB controller AVRs (AT90USBXXX6/7)
+  *  - Endpoint_Setup_In_Clear() and Endpoint_Setup_Out_Clear() no longer set FIFOCON, in line with the
+  *    directives in the datasheet
+  *  - Fixed PLL prescaler defines for all AVR models and frequencies
+  *  - Fixed ENDPOINT_INT_IN and ENDPOINT_INT_OUT definitions
+  *  - Added interrupt driven keyboard and mouse device demos
+  *  - Combined USB_Device_ClearFeature and USB_Device_SetFeature requests into a single routine for code
+  *    size savings
+  *  - Added missing Pipe_GetCurrentPipe() macro to Pipe.h
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog130 Version 1.3.0 (080307)
+  *
+  *  - Unnecessary control endpoint config removed from device mode
+  *  - Fixed device standard request interpreter accidentally processing some class-specific requests
+  *  - Added USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS and USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS compile time options to instruct the library
+  *    to use descriptors stored in RAM or EEPROM rather than flash memory
+  *  - All demos now disable watchdog on startup, in case it has been enabled by fuses or the bootloader
+  *  - USB_DEV_OPT_LOWSPEED option now works correctly
+  *  - Added ability to set the USB options statically for a binary size reduction via the USE_STATIC_OPTIONS
+  *    compile time define
+  *  - USB_Init no longer takes a Mode parameter if compiled for a USB device with no host mode option, or
+  *    if forced to a particular mode via the USB_HOST_ONLY or USB_DEVICE_ONLY compile time options
+  *  - USB_Init no longer takes an Options parameter if options statically configured by USE_STATIC_OPTIONS
+  *  - Endpoint_Ignore_* and Pipe_Ignore_* made smaller by making the dummy variable non-volatile so that the
+  *    compiler can throw away the result more efficiently
+  *  - Added in an optional GroupID value to each scheduler entry, so that groups of tasks can once again be
+  *    controlled by the new Scheduler_SetGroupTaskMode() routine
+  *  - Added support for AT90USB162 and AT90USB82 AVR models
+  *  - Added support for the STK525 and STK526 boards
+  *  - Added support for custom board drivers to be supplied by selecting the board type as BOARD_USER, and
+  *    placing board drivers in {Application Directory}/Board/
+  *  - PLL is now stopped and USB clock is frozen when detached from host in device mode, to save power
+  *  - Joystick defines are now in sync with the schematics - orientation will be rotated for the USBKEY
+  *  - Fixed USB_DEV_IsUSBSuspended() - now checks the correct register
+  *  - Fixed data transfers to devices when in host mode
+  *  - Renamed USB_DEV_OPT_HIGHSPEED to USB_DEV_OPT_FULLSPEED and USB_HOST_IsDeviceHighSpeed() to
+  *    USB_HOST_IsDeviceFullSpeed() to be in line with the official USB speed names (to avoid confusion with
+  *    the real high speed mode, which is unavailable on the USB AVRs)
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog120 Version 1.2.0 (080204)
+  *
+  *  - Added USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event for host mode
+  *  - Added new Scheduler_Init routine to prepare the scheduler, so that tasks can be started and
+  *    stopped before the scheduler has been started (via Scheduler_Start)
+  *  - Connection events in both Device and Host mode are now interrupt-driven, allowing the USB management
+  *    task to be stopped when the USB is not connected to a host or device
+  *  - All demos updated to stop the USB task when not in use via the appropriate USB events
+  *  - Mass Storage Host demo application updated to function correctly with all USB flash disks
+  *  - Mass Storage Host demo application now prints out the capacity and number of LUNs in the attached
+  *    device, and prints the first block as hexadecimal numbers rather than ASCII characters
+  *  - Endpoint and Pipe clearing routines now clear the Endpoint/Pipe interrupt and status flags
+  *  - Shifted error handling code in the host enum state machine to a single block, to reduce code complexity
+  *  - Added in DESCRIPTOR_TYPE, DESCRIPTOR_SIZE and DESCRIPTOR_CAST macros to make config descriptor processing
+  *    clearer in USB hosts and DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS for convenience in USB devices
+  *  - Added in alloca macro to common.h, in case the user is using an old version of avr-lib-c missing the macro
+  *
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_ChangeLog110 Version 1.1.0 (080125)
+  *
+  *  - Fixed DCONNI interrupt being enabled accidentally after a USB reset
+  *  - Fixed DDISCI interrupt not being disabled when a device is not connected
+  *  - Added workaround for powerless pull-up devices causing false disconnect interrupts
+  *  - Added USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event for Host mode
+  *  - AVR_HOST_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor routine no longer modifies ConfigSizePtr if a valid buffer
+  *    pointer is passed
+  *  - Added ALLOCABLE_BYTES to DynAlloc, and added code to make the size of key storage variables
+  *    dependent on size of memory parameters passed in via the user project's makefile
+  *  - Fixed incorrect device reset routine being called in USBTask
+  *  - Devices which do not connect within the standard 300mS are now supported
+  *  - Removed incorrect ATTR_PURE from Scheduler_SetTaskMode(), which was preventing tasks from being
+  *    started/stopped, as well as USB_InitTaskPointer(), which was breaking dual device/host USB projects
+  *  - Changed scheduler to use the task name rather than IDs for setting the task mode, eliminating the
+  *    need to have a task ID list
+  *  - ID transition interrupt now raises the appropriate device/host disconnect event if device attached
+  *  - Fixed double VBUS change (and VBUS -) event when detaching in device mode
+  *  - Added ability to disable ANSI terminal codes by the defining of DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES in makefile
+  *  - Removed return from ConfigurePipe and ConfigureEndpoint functions - use Pipe_IsConfigured() and
+  *    Endpoint_IsConfigured() after calling the config functions to determine success
+  */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/CompileTimeTokens.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/CompileTimeTokens.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ab075cff7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/CompileTimeTokens.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,223 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \page Page_TokenSummary Summary of Compile Tokens
+ *
+ *  The following lists all the possible tokens which can be defined in a project makefile, and passed to the
+ *  compiler via the -D switch, to alter the LUFA library code. These tokens may alter the library behaviour,
+ *  or remove features unused by a given application in order to save flash space.
+ *
+ *  \note If the \c USE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER token is defined, the library will include a header file named \c LUFAConfig.h located
+ *        in the user directory where the below compile time tokens may be defined. This allows for an alternative to makefile
+ *        defined tokens for configuring the library.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_TokenSummary_NonUSBTokens Non USB Related Tokens
+ *  This section describes compile tokens which affect non-USB sections of the LUFA library.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES</b> - (\ref Group_Terminal) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n
+ *      If an application contains ANSI terminal control codes listed in TerminalCodes.h, it might be desired to remove them
+ *      at compile time for use with a terminal which is non-ANSI control code aware, without modifying the source code. If
+ *      this token is defined, all ANSI control codes in the application code from the TerminalCodes.h header are removed from
+ *      the source code at compile time.
+ *
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_TokenSummary_USBClassTokens USB Class Driver Related Tokens
+ *  This section describes compile tokens which affect USB class-specific drivers in the LUFA library.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY</b> - (\ref Group_USBClassHIDHost) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n
+ *      By default, the USB HID Host class driver is designed to work with HID devices using either the Boot or Report HID
+ *      communication protocols. On devices where the Report protocol is not used (i.e. in applications where only basic
+ *      Mouse or Keyboard operation is desired, using boot compatible devices), the code responsible for the Report protocol
+ *      mode can be removed to save space in the compiled application by defining this token. When defined, it is still necessary
+ *      to explicitly put the attached device into Boot protocol mode via a call to \ref HID_Host_SetBootProtocol().
+ *
+ *  \li <b>HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH</b>=<i>x</i> - (\ref Group_HIDParser) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n
+ *      HID reports may contain PUSH and POP elements, to store and retrieve the current HID state table onto a stack. This
+ *      allows for reports to save the state table before modifying it slightly for a data item, and then restore the previous
+ *      state table in a compact manner. This token may be defined to a non-zero 8-bit value to give the maximum depth of the state
+ *      table stack. If not defined, this defaults to the value indicated in the HID.h file documentation.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH</b>=<i>x</i> - (\ref Group_HIDParser) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n
+ *      HID reports generally contain many USAGE elements, which are assigned to INPUT, OUTPUT and FEATURE items in succession
+ *      when multiple items are defined at once (via REPORT COUNT elements). This allows for several items to be defined with
+ *      different usages in a compact manner. This token may be defined to a non-zero 8-bit value to set the maximum depth of the
+ *      usage stack, indicating the maximum number of USAGE items which can be stored temporarily until the next INPUT, OUTPUT
+ *      and FEATURE item. If not defined, this defaults to the value indicated in the HID.h file documentation.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS</b>=<i>x</i> - (\ref Group_HIDParser) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n
+ *      HID reports generally contain several COLLECTION elements, used to group related data items together. Collection information
+ *      is stored separately in the processed usage structure (and referred to by the data elements in the structure) to save space.
+ *      This token may be defined to a non-zero 8-bit value to set the maximum number of COLLECTION items which can be processed by the
+ *      parser into the resultant processed report structure. If not defined, this defaults to the value indicated in the HID.h file
+ *      documentation.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS</b>=<i>x</i> - (\ref Group_HIDParser) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n
+ *      All HID reports contain one or more INPUT, OUTPUT and/or FEATURE items describing the data which can be sent to and from the HID
+ *      device. Each item has associated usages, bit offsets in the item reports and other associated data indicating the manner in which
+ *      the report data should be interpreted by the host. This token may be defined to a non-zero 8-bit value to set the maximum number of
+ *      data elements which can be stored in the processed HID report structure, including INPUT, OUTPUT and (if enabled) FEATURE items.
+ *      If a item has a multiple count (i.e. a REPORT COUNT of more than 1), each item in the report count is placed separately in the
+ *      processed HID report table. If not defined, this defaults to the value indicated in the HID.h file documentation.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS</b>=<i>x</i> - (\ref Group_HIDParser) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n
+ *      HID reports may contain several report IDs, to logically distinguish grouped device data from one another - for example, a combination
+ *      keyboard and mouse might use report IDs to separate the keyboard reports from the mouse reports. In order to determine the size of each
+ *      report, and thus know how many bytes must be read or written, the size of each report (IN, OUT and FEATURE) must be calculated and
+ *      stored. This token may be defined to a non-zero 8-bit value to set the maximum number of report IDs in a device which can be processed
+ *      and their sizes calculated/stored into the resultant processed report structure. If not defined, this defaults to the value indicated in
+ *      the HID.h file documentation.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH</b> - (\ref Group_USBClassDrivers) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n
+ *      Many of the device and host mode class drivers automatically flush any data waiting to be written to an interface, when the corresponding
+ *      USB management task is executed. This is usually desirable to ensure that any queued data is sent as soon as possible once and new data is
+ *      constructed in the main program loop. However, if flushing is to be controlled manually by the user application via the *_Flush() commands,
+ *      the compile time token may be defined in the application's makefile to disable automatic flushing during calls to the class driver USB
+ *      management tasks.
+ *
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_TokenSummary_USBTokens General USB Driver Related Tokens
+ *  This section describes compile tokens which affect USB driver stack as a whole in the LUFA library.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>ORDERED_EP_CONFIG</b> - (\ref Group_EndpointManagement , \ref Group_PipeManagement) - <i>AVR8, UC3</i> \n
+ *      The USB AVRs do not allow for Endpoints and Pipes to be configured out of order; they <i>must</i> be configured in an ascending order to
+ *      prevent data corruption issues. However, by default LUFA employs a workaround to allow for unordered Endpoint/Pipe initialization. This compile
+ *      time token may be used to restrict the initialization order to ascending indexes only in exchange for a smaller compiled binary size. Use
+ *      caution when applied to applications using the library USB Class drivers; the user application must ensure that all endpoints and pipes are
+ *      allocated sequentially.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>USE_STATIC_OPTIONS</b>=<i>x</i> - (\ref Group_USBManagement) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n
+ *      By default, the USB_Init() function accepts dynamic options at runtime to alter the library behaviour, including whether the USB pad
+ *      voltage regulator is enabled, and the device speed when in device mode. By defining this token to a mask comprised of the USB options
+ *      mask defines usually passed as the Options parameter to USB_Init(), the resulting compiled binary can be decreased in size by removing
+ *      the dynamic options code, and replacing it with the statically set options. When defined, the USB_Init() function no longer accepts an
+ *      Options parameter.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>USB_DEVICE_ONLY</b> - (\ref Group_USBManagement) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n
+ *      For the USB AVR models supporting both device and host USB modes, the USB_Init() function contains a Mode parameter which specifies the
+ *      mode the library should be initialized to. If only device mode is required, the code for USB host mode can be removed from the binary to
+ *      save space. When defined, the USB_Init() function no longer accepts a Mode parameter. This define is irrelevant on smaller USB AVRs which
+ *      do not support host mode.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>USB_HOST_ONLY</b> - (\ref Group_USBManagement) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n
+ *      Same as USB_DEVICE_ONLY, except the library is fixed to USB host mode rather than USB device mode. Not available on some USB AVR models.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS</b>=<i>x</i> - (\ref Group_USBManagement) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n
+ *      When endpoint and/or pipe stream functions are used, by default there is a timeout between each transfer which the connected device or host
+ *      must satisfy, or the stream function aborts the remaining data transfer. This token may be defined to a non-zero 16-bit value to set the timeout
+ *      period for stream transfers, specified in milliseconds. If not defined, the default value specified in LowLevel.h is used instead.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT</b> - (\ref Group_Events) - <i>AVR8 Only</i> \n
+ *      On the smaller USB AVRs, the USB controller lacks VBUS events to determine the physical connection state of the USB bus to a host. In lieu of
+ *      VBUS events, the library attempts to determine the connection state via the bus suspension and wake up events instead. This however may be
+ *      slightly inaccurate due to the possibility of the host suspending the bus while the device is still connected. If accurate connection status is
+ *      required, the VBUS line of the USB connector should be routed to an AVR pin to detect its level, so that the USB_DeviceState global
+ *      can be accurately set and the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Connect() and \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect() events manually raised by the RAISE_EVENT macro.
+ *      When defined, this token disables the library's auto-detection of the connection state by the aforementioned suspension and wake up events.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>NO_SOF_EVENTS</b> - (\ref Group_Events) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n
+ *      By default, there exists a LUFA application event for the start of each USB frame while the USB bus is not suspended in either host or device mode.
+ *      This event can be selectively enabled or disabled by calling the appropriate device or host mode function. When this compile time token is defined,
+ *      the ability to receive USB Start of Frame events via the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() or \ref EVENT_USB_Host_StartOfFrame() events is removed,
+ *      reducing the compiled program's binary size.
+ *
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_TokenSummary_USBDeviceTokens USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens
+ *  This section describes compile tokens which affect USB driver stack of the LUFA library when used in Device mode.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS</b> - (\ref Group_StdDescriptors) - <i>AVR8 Only</i> \n
+ *      Define this token to indicate to the USB driver that all device descriptors are stored in RAM, rather than being located in any one
+ *      of the AVR's memory spaces. RAM descriptors may be desirable in applications where the descriptors need to be modified at runtime.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS</b> - (\ref Group_StdDescriptors) - <i>AVR8 Only</i> \n
+ *      Similar to USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS, but all descriptors are stored in the AVR's FLASH memory rather than RAM.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS</b> - (\ref Group_StdDescriptors) - <i>AVR8 Only</i> \n
+ *      Similar to USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS, but all descriptors are stored in the AVR's EEPROM memory rather than RAM.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL</b> - (\ref Group_StdDescriptors) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n
+ *      Some AVR models contain a unique serial number which can be used as the device serial number, while in device mode. This allows
+ *      the host to uniquely identify the device regardless of if it is moved between USB ports on the same computer, allowing allocated
+ *      resources (such as drivers, COM Port number allocations) to be preserved. This is not needed in many apps, and so the code that
+ *      performs this task can be disabled by defining this option and passing it to the compiler via the -D switch.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE</b>=<i>x</i> - (\ref Group_EndpointManagement) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n
+ *      By default, the library determines the size of the control endpoint (when in device mode) by reading the device descriptor.
+ *      Normally this reduces the amount of configuration required for the library, allows the value to change dynamically (if
+ *      descriptors are stored in EEPROM or RAM rather than flash memory) and reduces code maintenance. However, this token can be
+ *      defined to a non-zero value instead to give the size in bytes of the control endpoint, to reduce the size of the compiled
+ *      binary.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR</b> - (\ref Group_Device) - <i>AVR8 Only</i> \n
+ *      One of the most frequently used global variables in the stack is the USB_DeviceState global, which indicates the current state of
+ *      the Device State Machine. To reduce the amount of code and time required to access and modify this global in an application, this token
+ *      may be defined to a value between 0 and 2 to fix the state variable into one of the three general purpose IO registers inside the AVR
+ *      reserved for application use. When defined, the corresponding GPIOR register should not be used within the user application except
+ *      implicitly via the library APIs.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS</b>=<i>x</i> - (\ref Group_Device) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n
+ *      By default, the library determines the number of configurations a USB device supports by reading the device descriptor. This reduces
+ *      the amount of configuration required to set up the library, and allows the value to change dynamically (if descriptors are stored in
+ *      EEPROM or RAM rather than flash memory) and reduces code maintenance. However, this value may be fixed via this token in the project
+ *      makefile to reduce the compiled size of the binary at the expense of flexibility.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE</b> - (\ref Group_Device) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n
+ *      In some limited USB device applications, there are no device endpoints other than the control endpoint; i.e. all device communication
+ *      is through control endpoint requests. Defining this token will remove several features related to the selection and control of device
+ *      endpoints internally, saving space. Generally, this is usually only useful in (some) bootloaders and is best avoided.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX</b> - (\ref Group_Device) - <i>XMEGA Only</i> \n
+ *      Defining this value to the highest index (not address - this excludes the direction flag) endpoint within the device will restrict the
+ *      number of FIFOs created internally for the endpoint buffers, reducing the total RAM usage.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT</b> - (\ref Group_USBManagement) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n
+ *      Some applications prefer to not call the USB_USBTask() management task regularly while in device mode, as it can complicate code significantly.
+ *      Instead, when device mode is used this token can be passed to the library via the -D switch to allow the library to manage the USB control
+ *      endpoint entirely via USB controller interrupts asynchronously to the user application. When defined, USB_USBTask() does not need to be called
+ *      when in USB device mode.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP</b> - (\ref Group_Device) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n
+ *      Many devices do not require the use of the Remote Wakeup features of USB, used to wake up the USB host when suspended. On these devices,
+ *      the code required to manage device Remote Wakeup can be disabled by defining this token and passing it to the library via the -D switch.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER</b> - (\ref Group_Device) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n
+ *      USB devices may be bus powered, self powered, or a combination of both. When a device can be both bus powered and self powered, the host may
+ *      query the device to determine the current power source, via \ref USB_Device_CurrentlySelfPowered. For solely bus powered devices, this global
+ *      and the code required to manage it may be disabled by passing this token to the library via the -D switch.
+ *
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_TokenSummary_USBHostTokens USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens
+ *
+ *  This section describes compile tokens which affect USB driver stack of the LUFA library when used in Host mode.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR</b> - (\ref Group_Host) - <i>AVR8 Only</i> \n
+ *      One of the most frequently used global variables in the stack is the USB_HostState global, which indicates the current state of
+ *      the Host State Machine. To reduce the amount of code and time required to access and modify this global in an application, this token
+ *      may be defined to a value between 0 and 2 to fix the state variable into one of the three general purpose IO registers inside the AVR
+ *      reserved for application use. When defined, the corresponding GPIOR register should not be used within the user application except
+ *      implicitly via the library APIs.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS</b>=<i>x</i> - (\ref Group_Host) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n
+ *      When a control transfer is initiated in host mode to an attached device, a timeout is used to abort the transfer if the attached
+ *      device fails to respond within the timeout period. This token may be defined to a non-zero 16-bit value to set the timeout period for
+ *      control transfers, specified in milliseconds. If not defined, the default value specified in Host.h is used instead.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS</b>=<i>x</i> - (\ref Group_Host) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n
+ *      Some devices require a delay of up to 5 seconds after they are connected to VBUS before the enumeration process can be started, or
+ *      they will fail to enumerate correctly. By placing a delay before the enumeration process, it can be ensured that the bus has settled
+ *      back to a known idle state before communications occur with the device. This token may be defined to a 16-bit value to set the device
+ *      settle period, specified in milliseconds. If not defined, the default value specified in Host.h is used instead.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE</b> - (\ref Group_Host) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n
+ *      If enabled, this will indicate that the USB target VBUS line polarity is inverted; i.e. it should be pulled low to enable VBUS to the
+ *      target, and pulled high to stop the target VBUS generation.
+ *      \n
+ *      \attention On AVR8 architecture devices, this compile time option requires \c NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT to be set.
+ *
+ *  \li <b>NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT</b> - (\ref Group_Host) - <i>All Architectures</i> \n
+ *      Disables the automatic management of VBUS to the target, i.e. automatic shut down in the even of an overcurrent situation. When enabled, VBUS
+ *      is enabled while the USB controller is initialized in USB Host mode.
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/CompilingApps.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/CompilingApps.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..08f81d2ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/CompilingApps.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \page Page_CompilingApps Compiling the Demos, Bootloaders and Projects
+ *
+ *  The following details how to compile the included LUFA demos, applications and bootloaders using AVR-GCC.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_CompilingApps_Prerequisites Prerequisites
+ *  Before you can compile any of the LUFA library code or demos, you will need a recent distribution of avr-libc (1.6.2+)
+ *  and the AVR-GCC (4.2+) compiler. A standard "coreutils" package for your system is also required for command line
+ *  compilation of LUFA based applications.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_CompilingApps_PreqWindows Windows Prerequisites
+ *  On Windows, you will need a copy of the latest Atmel Toolchain (<a>http://www.atmel.com/tools/ATMELAVRTOOLCHAINFORWINDOWS.aspx</a>),
+ *  either downloaded and installed as a standalone package, or installed as part of Atmel Studio. You will need to ensure
+ *  that the "bin" directory of the toolchain is available in your system's <b>PATH</b> environment variable.
+ *
+ *  In addition, you will need to install a ported version of the ZSH or BASH *nix shells, and a standard set of *nix
+ *  utilities such as <i>cut</i>, <i>find</i> and <i>sed</i>. These can be found in the "basic" system package of the
+ *  of the MinGW installer (<a>http://www.mingw.org</a>). Once installed, add the "msys\1.0\bin" of the MinGW installation
+ *  folder is added to your system's <b>PATH</b> environment variable.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_CompilingApps_PreqLinux Linux Prerequisites
+ *  On Linux systems you will need to install the latest Linux distribution of the standalone Atmel Toolchain from the
+ *  Atmel website (<a>http://www.atmel.com/tools/ATMELAVRTOOLCHAINFORLINUX.aspx</a>), or use the latest avr-libc and avr-gcc packages
+ *  for your chosen distribution's package manager. For full device support, the Atmel standalone Toolchain package is recommended.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_CompilingApps_Compiling Compiling a LUFA Application
+ *  Compiling the LUFA demos, applications and/or bootloaders is very simple. LUFA comes with makefile scripts for
+ *  each individual demo, bootloader and project folder, as well as scripts in the Demos/, Bootloaders/, Projects/
+ *  and the LUFA root directory. Compilation of projects can be started from any of the above directories, with a build
+ *  started from an upper directory in the directory structure executing build of all child directories under it. This
+ *  means that while a build inside a particular demo directory will build only that particular demo, a build started from
+ *  the /Demos/ directory will build all LUFA demo projects sequentially.
+ *
+ *  To build a project from the source via the command line, the command <b>"make all"</b> should be executed from the command
+ *  line in the directory of interest. To remove compiled files (including the binary output, all intermediately files and all
+ *  diagnostic output files), execute <b>"make clean"</b>. Once a "make all" has been run and no errors were encountered, the
+ *  resulting binary will be located in the generated ".HEX" file. If your project makes use of pre-initialized EEPROM
+ *  variables, the generated ".EEP" file will contain the project's EEPROM data.
+ *
+ *  \see \ref Page_BuildSystem for information on the LUFA build system.
+ */
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/ConfiguringApps.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/ConfiguringApps.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..15b660e92
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/ConfiguringApps.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,157 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \page Page_ConfiguringApps Configuring the Demos, Bootloaders and Projects
+ *
+ *  If the target microcontroller model, architecture, clock speed, board or other settings are different from the current
+ *  settings, they must be changed and the project recompiled from the source code before being programmed into the microcontroller.
+ *  Most project configuration options are located in the <tt>makefile</tt> build script inside each LUFA application's folder,
+ *  however some demo or application-specific configuration settings are located in one or more of the source files of the project.
+ *  See each project's individual documentation for application-specific configuration values.
+ *
+ *  Each project "makefile" contains all the script and configuration data required to compile each project. When opened with
+ *  any regular basic text editor such as Notepad or WordPad (ensure that the save format is a pure ASCII text format) the
+ *  build configuration settings may be altered.
+ *
+ *  \see \ref Page_BuildSystem for information on the LUFA build system.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_ConfiguringApps_AppMakefileParams The Default Application Makefile Template
+ *
+ *  Below is a copy of the default LUFA application makefile, which can be used as a template for each application.
+ *
+ *  \verbinclude makefile_template
+ *
+ *  Inside each makefile, a number of configuration variables are listed with the syntax "<VARIABLE NAME> = <VALUE>". For
+ *  each application, the important standard variables which should be altered are:
+ *
+ *    - <b>MCU</b>, the target processor model
+ *    - <b>ARCH</b>, the target microcontroller architecture
+ *    - <b>BOARD</b>, the target board hardware
+ *    - <b>F_CPU</b>, the target CPU master clock frequency, after any prescaling
+ *    - <b>F_USB</b>, the target raw input clock to the USB module of the processor
+ *    - <b>OPTIMIZATION</b>, the level of optimization to compile with
+ *    - <b>TARGET</b>, the name of the target output binary and other files
+ *    - <b>SRC</b>, the list of source files to compile/assemble/link
+ *    - <b>LUFA_PATH</b>, the path to the LUFA library core source code
+ *    - <b>CC_FLAGS</b>, the common command line flags to pass to the C/C++ compiler, assembler and linker
+ *    - <b>LD_FLAGS</b>, the command line flags to pass to the linker
+ *
+ *  These values should be changed to reflect the build hardware.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_ConfiguringApps_MCU The MCU Parameter
+ *  This parameter indicates the target microcontroller model for the compiled application. This should be set to the model of the target
+ *  microcontroller (such as the AT90USB1287, or the ATMEGA32U4), in all lower-case (e.g. "at90usb1287"). Note that not all demos support all the
+ *  microcontroller models and architectures, as they may make use of peripherals or modes only present in some devices.
+ *
+ *  For supported processor models, see \ref Page_DeviceSupport.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_ConfiguringApps_ARCH The ARCH Parameter
+ *  This parameter indicates the target microcontroller architecture the library is to be compiled for. Different microcontroller
+ *  architectures require different source files to be compiled into the final binary, and so this option must be set to the correct
+ *  architecture for the selected platform.
+ *
+ *  For supported processor architectures, see \ref Page_DeviceSupport.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_ConfiguringApps_BOARD The BOARD Parameter
+ *  This parameter indicates the target board hardware for the compiled application. Some LUFA library drivers are board-specific,
+ *  such as the LED driver, and the library needs to know the layout of the target board. If you are using one of the board models listed
+ *  on the main library page, change this parameter to the board name in all UPPER-case.
+ *
+ *  If you are not using any board-specific drivers in the LUFA library, or you are using a custom board layout, change this to read
+ *  "USER" (no quotes) instead of a standard board name. If the USER board type is selected and the application makes use of one or more
+ *  board-specific hardware drivers inside the LUFA library, then the appropriate stub drives files should be copied from the \c /CodeTemplates/DriverStubs/
+ *  directory into a /Board/ folder inside the application directory, and the stub driver completed with the appropriate code to drive the
+ *  custom board's hardware.
+ *
+ *  For boards with built in hardware driver support within the LUFA library, see \ref Page_DeviceSupport.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_ConfiguringApps_F_CPU The F_CPU Parameter
+ *  This parameter indicates the target microcontroller's main CPU clock frequency, in Hz. This is used by many libraries (and applications) for
+ *  timing related purposes, and should reflect the actual CPU speed after any prescaling or adjustments are performed.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_ConfiguringApps_F_USB The F_USB Parameter
+ *  This parameter indicates the raw input clock frequency to the USB module within the microcontroller in Hz. This may be very different on some platforms
+ *  to the main CPU clock or other peripheral/bus clocks.
+ *
+ *    \note On AVR8 platforms, this must be equal to \c 8000000 or \c 16000000.
+ *
+ *    \note On XMEGA platforms, this must be equal to a multiple of 6000000 from \c 6000000 to \c 48000000.
+ *
+ *    \note On UC3 platforms, this must be equal to a multiple of 12000000 from \c 12000000 to \c 48000000.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_ConfiguringApps_OPTIMIZATION The OPTIMIZATION Parameter
+ *  This parameter indicates the level of optimization to use when compiling the application. This will allow you to compile with an optimization level
+ *  supported by GCC, from <tt>0</tt> (no optimization) to <tt>3</tt> (fastest runtime optimization) or <tt>s</tt> (smallest size).
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_ConfiguringApps_TARGET The TARGET Parameter
+ *  This parameter indicates the application target name, which is used as the base filename for the build binary and debugging files. This will be the
+ *  name of the output files once linked together into the final application, ready to load into the target.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_ConfiguringApps_SRC The SRC Parameter
+ *  This parameter indicates the source files used to compile the application, as a list of C (<tt>*.c</tt>), C++ (<tt>*.cpp</tt>) and Assembly (<tt>*.S</tt>) files. Note that
+ *  all assembly files must end in a <b>capital</b> .S extension, as lowercase .s files are reserved for GCC intermediate files.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_ConfiguringApps_LUFA_PATH The LUFA_PATH Parameter
+ *  As each LUFA program requires the LUFA library source code to compile correctly, the application must know where the LUFA library is located. This
+ *  value specifies the path to the LUFA library core. This path may be relative or absolute, however note than even under Windows based systems the
+ *  forward-slash (/) path separator must be used.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_ConfiguringApps_CC_FLAGS The CC_FLAGS Parameter
+ *  This parameter lists the compiler flags passed to the C/C++ compiler, the assembler and the linker. These are used as-is directly to GCC and thus
+ *  must match GCC's command line options as given in the GCC manual. This variable may be used to define tokens directly on the command line, enable or
+ *  disable warnings, adjust the target-specific tuning parameters or other options.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_ConfiguringApps_LD_FLAGS The LD_FLAGS Parameter
+ *  This parameter lists the linker flags passed exclusively to the linker. These are used as-is directly to GCC and thus must match GCC's command line
+ *  linker options as given in the GCC manual. This variable may be used to create or relocate custom data sections, or enable linker specific behaviors.
+ *
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_ExampleAppConfig Example Application Makefile Configurations
+ *  Below is an example makefile for an AVR8 based AT90USB1287 running at 8MHz, to compile a program called "MyApplication":
+ *  \verbatim
+    MCU          = at90usb1287
+    ARCH         = AVR8
+    BOARD        = NONE
+    F_CPU        = 8000000
+    F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+    OPTIMIZATION = s
+    TARGET       = MyApplication
+    SRC          = MyApplication.c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+    LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+    CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+    LD_FLAGS     =
+    \endverbatim
+ *
+ *  Below is an example makefile for an XMEGA based ATXMEGA128A1U running at 32MHz, to compile a program called "MyApplication":
+ *  \verbatim
+    MCU          = atxmega128a1u
+    ARCH         = XMEGA
+    BOARD        = NONE
+    F_CPU        = 32000000
+    F_USB        = 48000000
+    OPTIMIZATION = s
+    TARGET       = MyApplication
+    SRC          = MyApplication.c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+    LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+    CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+    LD_FLAGS     =
+    \endverbatim
+ *
+ *  Below is an example makefile for a UC3 based AT32UC3A0512 running at 50MHz, to compile a program called "MyApplication":
+ *  \verbatim
+    MCU          = uc3a0512
+    ARCH         = UC3
+    BOARD        = NONE
+    F_CPU        = 50000000
+    F_USB        = 48000000
+    OPTIMIZATION = s
+    TARGET       = MyApplication
+    SRC          = MyApplication.c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+    LUFA_PATH    = ../../../../LUFA
+    CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+    LD_FLAGS     =
+    \endverbatim
+ */
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/DevelopingWithLUFA.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/DevelopingWithLUFA.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9a02f95b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/DevelopingWithLUFA.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/**
+ *  \page Page_DevelopingWithLUFA Developing With LUFA
+ *
+ *  This section of the manual contains information on LUFA development, such as Getting Started information,
+ *  information on compile-time tuning of the library and other developer-related sections.
+ *
+ *  <b>Subsections:</b>
+ *  \li \subpage Page_BuildSystem - The LUFA Buildsystem
+ *  \li \subpage Page_TokenSummary - Summary of Compile Time Tokens
+ *  \li \subpage Page_Migration - Migrating from an Older LUFA Version
+ *  \li \subpage Page_VIDPID - Allocated USB VID and PID Values
+ *  \li \subpage Page_OSDrivers - Operating System Driver Information
+ *  \li \subpage Page_BuildLibrary - Building as a Linkable Library
+ *  \li \subpage Page_ExportingLibrary - Exporting LUFA for IDE Use
+ *  \li \subpage Page_WritingBoardDrivers - How to Write Custom Board Drivers
+ *  \li \subpage Page_SoftwareBootloaderStart - How to jump to the bootloader in software
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/DeviceSupport.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/DeviceSupport.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2a4b9c335
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/DeviceSupport.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,422 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/**
+ *  \page Page_DeviceSupport Device and Hardware Support
+ *
+ *  <b>Atmel Microcontrollers:</b>
+ *  \li \subpage Page_AVR8Support - Atmel AVR8 Support
+ *  \li \subpage Page_UC3Support - Atmel AVR32 UC3 Support
+ *  \li \subpage Page_XMEGASupport - Atmel XMEGA Support
+ */
+
+/**
+ *  \page Page_AVR8Support Atmel 8-Bit AVR (AVR8) Support
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_AVR8Support_Devices Supported Microcontroller Models
+ *
+ *  Currently supported AVR8 models:
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <th width="150px">Part</th>
+ *   <th width="150px">USB Device Mode</th>
+ *   <th width="150px">USB Host Mode</th>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT90USB82</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>ATMEGA8U2</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT90USB162</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>ATMEGA16U2</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>ATMEGA16U4</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>ATMEGA32U2</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>ATMEGA32U4</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT90USB646</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT90USB647</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT90USB1286</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT90USB1287</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_AVR8Support_Boards Supported Atmel Boards
+ *  Currently supported Atmel AVR8 boards (see \ref Group_BoardTypes):
+ *   - AT90USBKEY
+ *   - ATAVRUSBRF01
+ *   - EVK527
+ *   - RZUSBSTICK
+ *   - STK525
+ *   - STK526
+ *   - XPLAIN (Original green board, <i>not</i> the newer blue XPLAINED family boards)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_AVR8Support_ThirdParty Supported Third Party Boards
+ *  Currently supported third-party boards (see \ref Group_BoardTypes for makefile \c BOARD constant names):
+ *   - Adafruit U4 Breakout Board
+ *   - Arduino Leonardo
+ *   - Arduino Micro
+ *   - Arduino Uno
+ *   - Arduino Yun
+ *   - Bitwizard Multio and Big-Multio
+ *   - Busware BUI
+ *   - Busware CUL V3
+ *   - Busware TUL
+ *   - DorkbotPDX Duce
+ *   - Fletchtronics Bumble-B (using manufacturer recommended peripheral layout)
+ *   - Kernel Concepts USBFOO
+ *   - Linnix UDIP
+ *   - MattairTech JM-DB-U2
+ *   - Maximus USB
+ *   - Micropendous Boards (Micropendous-32U2, Micropendous-1, Micropendous-2)
+ *   - Microsin AVR-USB162
+ *   - Minimus USB
+ *   - Olimex AVR-USB-162, AVR-USB-32U4 and AVR-USB-T32U4 Boards
+ *   - Olimex AVR-ISP-MK2
+ *   - Paranoid Studio's US2AX (V1, V2 and V3 hardware revisions)
+ *   - PJRC Teensy (1.x and 2.x versions)
+ *   - Rikus' U2S
+ *   - Sparkfun U2 Breakout Board
+ *   - Stange ISP Programmer Board
+ *   - TCNISO Blackcat USB JTAG
+ *   - Tempusdictum Benito
+ *   - Tom's USBTINY-MKII (all revisions and versions)
+ *   - Custom User Boards (with Board Drivers if desired, see \ref Page_WritingBoardDrivers)
+ */
+
+/**
+ *  \page Page_UC3Support Atmel 32-Bit UC3 AVR (UC3)
+ *
+ *  \warning The AVR32 UC3 device support is currently <b>experimental</b>, and is included for preview purposes only.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_UC3Support_Devices Supported Microcontroller Models
+ *
+ *  Currently supported UC3 models:
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <th width="150px">Part</th>
+ *   <th width="150px">USB Device Mode</th>
+ *   <th width="150px">USB Host Mode</th>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT32UC3A364</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT32UC3A364S</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT32UC3A464</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT32UC3A464S</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT32UC3B064</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT32UC3B164</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT32UC3A0128</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT32UC3A1128</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT32UC3A3128</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT32UC3A3128S</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT32UC3A4128</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT32UC3A4128S</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT32UC3B0128</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT32UC3B1128</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT32UC3A0256</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT32UC3A1256</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT32UC3A3256</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT32UC3A3256S</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT32UC3A4256</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT32UC3A4256S</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT32UC3B0256</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT32UC3B1256</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT32UC3A0512</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT32UC3A1512</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT32UC3B0512</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>AT32UC3B1512</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_UC3Support_Boards Supported Atmel Boards
+ *
+ *  Currently supported Atmel UC3 boards (see \ref Group_BoardTypes):
+ *   - EVK1100
+ *   - EVK1101
+ *   - EVK1104
+ *   - UC3-A3 Xplained
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_UC3Support_ThirdParty Supported Third Party Boards
+ *
+ *  Currently supported third-party boards (see \ref Group_BoardTypes for makefile \c BOARD constant names):
+ *   - Custom User Boards (with Board Drivers if desired, see \ref Page_WritingBoardDrivers)
+ */
+
+/**
+ *  \page Page_XMEGASupport Atmel USB XMEGA AVR (XMEGA)
+ *
+ *  \warning The XMEGA device support is currently <b>experimental</b> (incomplete and/or non-functional), and is included for preview purposes only.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_XMEGASupport_Devices Supported Microcontroller Models
+ *
+ *  Currently supported XMEGA models:
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <th width="150px">Part</th>
+ *   <th width="150px">USB Device Mode</th>
+ *   <th width="150px">USB Host Mode</th>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>ATXMEGA16A4U</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>ATXMEGA32A4U</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>ATXMEGA64A4U</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>ATXMEGA128A4U</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>ATXMEGA64A3U</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>ATXMEGA128A3U</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>ATXMEGA192A3U</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>ATXMEGA256A3U</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>ATXMEGA256A3BU</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>ATXMEGA128A1U</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>ATXMEGA64B3</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>ATXMEGA128B3</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>ATXMEGA64B1</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>ATXMEGA128B1</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>ATXMEGA64C3</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>ATXMEGA128C3</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>ATXMEGA192C3</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>ATXMEGA256C3</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>ATXMEGA384C3</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>ATXMEGA16C4</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>ATXMEGA32C4</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_XMEGASupport_Boards Supported Atmel Boards
+ *  Currently supported Atmel XMEGA boards (see \ref Group_BoardTypes):
+ *   - XMEGA A3BU Xplained
+ *   - XMEGA B1 Xplained
+ *   - XMEGA C3 Xplained
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_XMEGASupport_ThirdParty Supported Third Party Boards
+ *  Currently supported third-party boards (see \ref Group_BoardTypes for makefile \c BOARD constant names):
+ *   - Custom User Boards (with Board Drivers if desired, see \ref Page_WritingBoardDrivers)
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/DirectorySummaries.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/DirectorySummaries.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..87b863c28
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/DirectorySummaries.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \dir Platform
+ *  \brief Platform specific drivers.
+ *
+ *  This folder contains platform specific drivers and defines for various supported architectures. These may or may
+ *  not be used in a LUFA application, and are provided for convenience purposes.
+ *
+ *  \dir Drivers
+ *  \brief Library hardware and software drivers.
+ *
+ *  This folder contains all the library hardware and software drivers for each supported board, architecture and
+ *  microcontroller model.
+ *
+ *  \dir Drivers/Misc
+ *  \brief Miscellaneous driver files.
+ *
+ *  This folder contains drivers for aspects other than the USB interface, board hardware or microcontroller peripherals.
+ *
+ *  \dir Drivers/Peripheral
+ *  \brief Microcontroller peripheral driver files.
+ *
+ *  This folder contains drivers for various low level microcontroller peripherals, usually located on the microcontroller
+ *  die within the same physical chip.
+ *
+ *  \dir Drivers/USB
+ *  \brief USB controller peripheral driver files.
+ *
+ *  This folder contains the complete LUFA USB stack and controller files, including the core driver and stack, as well
+ *  as the USB class driver implementations.
+ *
+ *  \dir Drivers/USB/Core
+ *  \brief Core USB driver files.
+ *
+ *  This folder contains the core USB stack and controller driver files, to correctly implement USB functionality on the
+ *  target architecture and microcontroller model. This
+ *
+ *  \dir Drivers/USB/Class
+ *  \brief USB Class helper driver files.
+ *
+ *  This folder contains drivers for implementing functionality of standardized USB classes. These are not used directly by the library,
+ *  but provide a standard and library-maintained way of implementing functionality from some of the defined USB classes without extensive
+ *  development effort. Is is recommended that these drivers be used where possible to reduce maintenance of user applications.
+ *
+ *  \dir Drivers/USB/Class/Device
+ *  \brief USB Device Class helper driver files.
+ *
+ *  Device mode drivers for the standard USB classes.
+ *
+ *  \dir Drivers/USB/Class/Host
+ *  \brief USB Host Class helper driver files.
+ *
+ *  Host mode drivers for the standard USB classes.
+ *
+ *  \dir Drivers/Board
+ *  \brief Board hardware driver files.
+ *
+ *  This folder contains drivers for interfacing with the physical hardware on supported commercial boards, primarily from
+ *  the Atmel corporation. Header files in this folder should be included in user applications requiring the functionality of
+ *  hardware placed on supported boards.
+ *
+ *  \dir CodeTemplates
+ *  \brief Code templates for use in LUFA powered applications.
+ *
+ *  This contains code templates for board drivers, sample LUFA project makefiles and other similar templates that can be copied into
+ *  a LUFA powered application and modified to speed up development.
+ *
+ *  \dir CodeTemplates/DriverStubs
+ *  \brief Driver stub header files for custom boards, to allow the LUFA board drivers to operate.
+ *
+ *  This contains stub files for the LUFA board drivers. If the LUFA board drivers are used with board hardware other than those
+ *  directly supported by the library, the BOARD parameter of the application's makefile can be set to "USER", and these stub files
+ *  copied to the "/Board/" directory of the application's folder. When fleshed out with working driver code for the custom board,
+ *  the corresponding LUFA board APIs will work correctly with the non-standard board hardware.
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Donating.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Donating.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4a4b6aa72
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Donating.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/**
+ *  \page Page_Donating Donating to Support This Project
+ *
+ *  \image html Images/Author.jpg "Dean Camera, LUFA Developer"
+ *
+ *  I am a 24 year old Atmel Applications Engineer, living in Trondheim, Norway and working on LUFA in my spare time.
+ *  The development and support of this library requires much effort from myself, as I am the sole developer, maintainer
+ *  and supporter. Please consider donating a small amount to support this and my future Open Source projects - All
+ *  donations are <i>greatly</i> appreciated.
+ *
+ *  Note that commercial entities can remove the attribution portion of the LUFA license by a one-time fee - see
+ *  \ref Page_LicenseInfo for more details (<b>Note: Please do NOT pay this in advance through the donation link below -
+ *  contact author for payment details.</b>).
+ *
+ *  \htmlonly
+ *    \image html "http://www.pledgie.com/campaigns/6927.png"
+ *  \endhtmlonly
+ *  <a href="http://www.lufa-lib.org/donate">Donate to this project via PayPal</a> - Thanks in Advance!
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/ExportingLibrary.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/ExportingLibrary.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..095184862
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/ExportingLibrary.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \page Page_ExportingLibrary Exporting the Library for IDE Use
+ *
+ *  While LUFA was designed to allow for easy compilation in a makefile driven environment,
+ *  it is possible to export the library into a form suitable for drop-in use inside of an
+ *  IDE.
+ *
+ *  \note <b>LUFA is also available as a native Atmel Studio 6.1 extension</b>, which integrates LUFA into
+ *        Atmel Studio including all demos and projects. If you are running Atmel Studio 6.1 or later, the
+ *        below instructions are not required; download and install the native LUFA extension from the
+ *        <a href="http://gallery.atmel.com">Atmel Gallery</a> instead.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_LibraryExport Exporting the Library
+ *  An export of the library is at its most basic, a direct copy of the main "LUFA" source folder from the
+ *  root download folder; this contains the library core which can be re-used within external projects.
+ *  However, as many IDEs attempt to automatically compile all included source files, it is necessary to
+ *  exclude some directories and files from the library core export to allow for easier integration into
+ *  an IDE project.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_ManualExport Manual Export
+ *  To manually export the library core, copy over the main LUFA library folder from the LUFA root directory,
+ *  renaming as desired. Within the library core folder, the following directories should be removed or
+ *  excluded from your IDE import:
+ *   - Documentation/
+ *   - DoxygenPages/
+ *   - CodeTemplates/
+ *   - StudioIntegration/
+ *
+ *  If required, files from the CodeTemplates/ subdirectory may be copied to your IDE project as needed.
+ *
+ *  The resulting copy of the library may then be imported into your chosen IDE according to the instructions
+ *  shown in \ref Sec_LibraryImport.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_AutomaticExport Automatic Export
+ *  If desired, the steps indicated in \ref SSec_ManualExport may be automatically performed, by running the
+ *  command <b><code>make export_tar</code></b> from the command line. This will generate two .tar files in the
+ *  current directory, named <code>LUFA_YYMMDD.tar</code> and <code>LUFA_YYMMDD_Code_Templates.tar</code> (where
+ *  "YYMMDD" is the version of the library being exported). The first archive contains the exported LUFA core
+ *  with the non-required files removed, while the second contains an archived copy of the code template files
+ *  for the current LUFA version.
+ *
+ *  The resulting archived copy of the library may then be extracted to your chosen IDE project source directory
+ *  and imported according to the instructions shown in \ref Sec_LibraryImport.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_LibraryImport Importing the Library
+ *  An exported copy of the library may be imported wholesale into an IDE project, if the instructions detailed
+ *  in \ref Sec_LibraryExport are followed.
+ *
+ *  Specific instructions for importing an exported version of LUFA into various IDEs are listed below.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_AS56_Import Importing into AVRStudio 5.x/Atmel Studio 6.0
+ *  To import LUFA into a new or existing project, the following steps must be followed.
+ *
+ *  \subsubsection SSSec_AS56_Import_Step1 Copy over the exported library
+ *  Copy over the exported library archive created via the steps listed in \ref Sec_LibraryExport to your AS5/AS6
+ *  project directory.
+ *
+ *  \image html Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step1.png
+ *
+ *  \subsubsection SSSec_AS56_Import_Step2 Extract exported library
+ *  Extract out the contents of the archive to a new folder. This may be any name you wish, however keep in mind
+ *  that this name will need to be referenced within your user application under most circumstances. It is
+ *  suggested that this folder be named "LUFA", or "LUFA" followed by the version string for easy reference.
+ *
+ *  \image html Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step2.png
+ *
+ *  \subsubsection SSSec_AS56_Import_Step3 Add the library files
+ *  Open your AVRStudio 5/Atmel Studio 6 project. From the "Solution Explorer" pane, click the "Show All Files"
+ *  button on the toolbar to display ghosted icons of files and folders located in the project source directory
+ *  that are not currently added to the project.
+ *
+ *  \image html Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step3.png
+ *
+ *  Right-click the ghosted version of the extracted LUFA export folder in the Solution Explorer pane, and
+ *  choose the "Add to Project" option from the context menu. This will add the entire LUFA source tree to the
+ *  current project.
+ *
+ *  \subsubsection SSSec_AS56_Import_Step4 Open Project Toolchain Properties
+ *  In the Solution Explorer pane, click the project node, and press the "Properties" button in the toolbar to
+ *  open the Project Properties window. This window allows you to configure the various project global compiler,
+ *  assembler and linker options.
+ *
+ *  \image html Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step4.png
+ *
+ *  Click the "Toolchain" tab on the left side of the Project Properties window.
+ *
+ *  \subsubsection SSSec_AS56_Import_Step5 Configure Project Toolchain Properties
+ *
+ *  In the GNU C Compiler section, open the "Symbols" page. Click the "Add Item" button to the top-right of the
+ *  "Defined Symbols" section to add new symbols.
+ *
+ *  At a minimum, you will need to define the following symbols (for more information on these symbols, see
+ *  \ref Page_ConfiguringApps):
+ *   - ARCH
+ *   - F_CPU
+ *   - F_USB
+ *   - BOARD
+ *  \image html Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step5_1.png
+ *
+ *  Next, open the GNU C Compiler section's "Optimization" page. Ensure that the option to prepare functions for
+ *  garbage collection is enabled.
+ *  \image html Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step5_2.png
+ *
+ *  Finally, in the GNU C Linker section, open the "Optimization" page. Ensure that the option to garbage collect
+ *  unused sections is selected.
+ *  \image html Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step5_3.png
+ */
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/FutureChanges.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/FutureChanges.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..af1186374
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/FutureChanges.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+ /** \page Page_FutureChanges Future Changes
+  *
+  *  Below is a list of future changes which are proposed for the LUFA library, but not yet started/complete.
+  *  This gives an unordered list of future changes which may be available in future releases of the library.
+  *  If you have an item to add to this list, please contact the library author via email, the LUFA mailing list,
+  *  or post your suggestion as an enhancement request to the project bug tracker.
+  *
+  *  <b>Targeted for Future Releases:</b>
+  *  - Code Features
+  *      -# Add hub support when in Host mode for multiple devices
+  *      -# Investigate virtual hubs when in device mode instead of composite devices
+  *      -# Re-add interrupt Pipe/Endpoint support
+  *      -# Update stream APIs to use DMA transfers on supported architectures
+  *      -# Pull out third party libraries into a separate folder and reference them as required
+  *      -# Add a LUFA_YIELD macro for integration into a third-party RTOS
+  *      -# Abstract out Mass Storage byte send/receive to prevent low level API use in projects
+  *      -# Fix HID report parser usage support for array types
+  *      -# Make HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS a global variable that can be changed
+  *      -# Add MANDATORY_EVENT_FUNCTIONS compile time option
+  *      -# Add watchdog support to the library and apps/bootloaders
+  *      -# Limit the maximum size of control transfers
+  *  - Testing/Verification
+  *      -# Re-run USBIF test suite on all classes to formally verify operation
+  *      -# Implement automated functional testing of all demos
+  *  - Documentation/Support
+  *      -# Add detailed overviews of how each demo works
+  *      -# Add board overviews
+  *      -# Write LUFA tutorials
+  *  - Demos/Projects
+  *      -# Add class driver support for Test and Measurement class
+  *      -# Add class driver support for EEM class
+  *      -# Add class driver support for ECM class
+  *      -# Add class driver generic HID report host demo
+  *      -# Implement flow control for USB to Serial project
+  *  - Ports
+  *      -# Port all demos to multiple architectures
+  *      -# Finish USB XMEGA port
+  *      -# Add AVR32 UC3C, UC3D and UC3L support
+  *      -# Other (commercial) C compilers
+  */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/GettingStarted.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/GettingStarted.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9ceec1e04
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/GettingStarted.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \page Page_GettingStarted Getting Started
+ *
+ *  Getting started with LUFA is easy; read the content below to get on your way to your first LUFA powered application.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_DemosOverview The LUFA Demo Applications
+ *
+ *  Out of the box, LUFA contains a large number of pre-made class demos for you to test, experiment with and
+ *  ultimately build upon for your own projects. All the demos (where possible) come pre-configured to build and
+ *  run correctly on the AT90USB1287 AVR microcontroller, mounted on the Atmel USBKEY board and running at an 8MHz
+ *  master clock. This is due to two reasons; one, it is the hardware the author possesses, and two, it is the most
+ *  popular Atmel USB demonstration board to date. To learn how to reconfigure, recompile and program the included
+ *  LUFA applications using different settings, see the subsections below.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_ClassOrLowLevel Class Driver and Low Level Demos
+ *
+ *  Most of the included demos in the /Demos/ folder come in both ClassDriver and LowLevel varieties. If you are new
+ *  to LUFA, it is highly recommended that you look at the ClassDriver versions first, which use the pre-made USB
+ *  Class Drivers (\ref Group_USBClassDrivers) to simplify the use of the standard USB classes in user applications.
+ *  These demos give a basic but easy to use interface to the USB class used in the demo application, such as HID or
+ *  CDC.
+ *
+ *  Those needing absolute control over the class implementation can look at the LowLevel demos, which implement the
+ *  required USB class directly in the demo application using the lowest level LUFA APIs.
+ *
+ *
+ *  <b>Subsections:</b>
+ *  \li \subpage Page_ConfiguringApps - How to Configure the Included Demos, Projects and Bootloaders
+ *  \li \subpage Page_CompilingApps - How to Compile the Included Demos, Projects and Bootloaders
+ *  \li \subpage Page_ProgrammingApps - How to Program an AVR with the Included Demos, Projects and Bootloaders
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Groups.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Groups.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2dfa4209d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Groups.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \defgroup Group_BoardDrivers Board Drivers
+ *
+ *  \brief Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to the control of physical board hardware.
+ */
+
+/** \defgroup Group_PeripheralDrivers On-chip Peripheral Drivers
+ *
+ *  \brief Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to the control of AVR subsystems.
+ */
+
+/** \defgroup Group_MiscDrivers Miscellaneous Drivers
+ *
+ *  \brief Miscellaneous driver Functions, macros, variables, enums and types.
+ */
+
+/** \defgroup Group_PlatformDrivers_AVR8 AVR8
+ *  \ingroup Group_PlatformDrivers
+ *
+ *  \brief Drivers relating to the AVR8 architecture platform, such as clock setup and interrupt management.
+ */
+
+/** \defgroup Group_PlatformDrivers_XMEGA XMEGA
+ *  \ingroup Group_PlatformDrivers
+ *
+ *  \brief Drivers relating to the XMEGA architecture platform, such as clock setup and interrupt management.
+ */
+
+/** \defgroup Group_PlatformDrivers_UC3 UC3
+ *  \ingroup Group_PlatformDrivers
+ *
+ *  \brief Drivers relating to the UC3 architecture platform, such as clock setup and interrupt management.
+ */
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step1.png b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step1.png
index 4f0c26f37..4f0c26f37 100644
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step1.png
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step1.png
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step2.png b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step2.png
index 6e309ae41..6e309ae41 100644
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step2.png
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step2.png
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step3.png b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step3.png
index 8192c9ae8..8192c9ae8 100644
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step3.png
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step3.png
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step4.png b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step4.png
index 2bb8f5fc8..2bb8f5fc8 100644
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step4.png
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step4.png
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step5_1.png b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step5_1.png
index f3a49ba9c..f3a49ba9c 100644
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step5_1.png
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step5_1.png
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step5_2.png b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step5_2.png
index 078f4ec8d..078f4ec8d 100644
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step5_2.png
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step5_2.png
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step5_3.png b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step5_3.png
index 8a8571bd8..8a8571bd8 100644
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step5_3.png
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/AS5_AS6_Import/AS5_AS6_Import_Step5_3.png
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/Author.jpg b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/Author.jpg
index e8f5541a0..e8f5541a0 100644
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/Author.jpg
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/Author.jpg
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/LUFA.png b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/LUFA.png
index 54fa1a664..54fa1a664 100644
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/LUFA.png
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/LUFA.png
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/LUFA_thumb.png b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/LUFA_thumb.png
index efa538677..efa538677 100644
--- a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-120730/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/LUFA_thumb.png
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/LUFA_thumb.png
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/KnownIssues.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/KnownIssues.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7018fec4d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/KnownIssues.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,170 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+ /** \page Page_KnownIssues Known Issues
+  *  The following are known issues present in each official LUFA release. This list should contain all known
+  *  issues in the library. Most of these issues should be corrected in the future release - see
+  *  \ref Page_FutureChanges for a list of planned changes in future releases.
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_KnownIssues140928 Version 140928
+  *  - AVR8 Architecture
+  *    - No known issues.
+  *  - UC3 Architecture
+  *    \warning The UC3 device support is currently <b>experimental</b> (incomplete and/or non-functional), and is included for preview purposes only. \n
+  *
+  *    - No demos, bootloaders or projects have been ported for the UC3 devices in the current release,
+  *      although the architecture is supported in the LUFA core library.
+  *    - DMA transfers to and from the USB controller are not yet implemented for this release.
+  *    - The UC3C, UC3D and UC3L sub-families of UC3 are not currently supported by the library due to their
+  *      altered USB controller design.
+  *    - The various \c *_CreateStream() functions for creating standard \c <stdio.h> compatible virtual file
+  *      streams are not available on the UC3 architecture, due to a lack of suitable library support.
+  *  - XMEGA Architecture
+  *    \warning The XMEGA device support is currently <b>experimental</b> (incomplete and/or non-functional), and is included for preview purposes only.
+  *
+  *    - Endpoints of more than 64 bytes are not currently supported in this release.
+  *    - Isochronous endpoints are not currently supported in this release. As a result, the audio class
+  *      cannot be used on XMEGA devices.
+  *    - Multiple-bank endpoints are not currently supported in this release.
+  *    - Early silicon revisions of the ATXMEGA128A1U are incompatible with LUFA, due to their various errata
+  *      relating to the USB controller.
+  *  - Architecture Independent
+  *    - The LUFA library is not watchdog aware, and thus timeouts are possible if short periods are used
+  *      and a lengthy USB operation is initiated.
+  *    - No LUFA provided driver INF files for Windows are signed, and thus may fail to install on systems where driver signing is enforced (e.g. Windows 8).
+  *  - Build System
+  *    - No known issues.
+  *  - Atmel Studio Integration
+  *    - Not all devices are listed in the "Supported Parts" screen when selecting a device. To select an alternative device, change the "Show Device" drop-down to "All Parts".
+  *    - When switching boards after changing the device selection, a second conflicting \c BOARD symbol definition can be created that prevents successful compilation. To fix, open the project properties window (<i>Project->Project {name} Properties...</i> menu item), click the "Toolchain" tab, click "Symbols" under the "AVR/GNU C Compiler" section and remove the incorrect definition.
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_KnownIssues140302 Version 140302
+  *  - AVR8 Architecture
+  *    - No known issues.
+  *  - UC3 Architecture
+  *    \warning The UC3 device support is currently <b>experimental</b> (incomplete and/or non-functional), and is included for preview purposes only. \n
+  *
+  *    - No demos, bootloaders or projects have been ported for the UC3 devices in the current release,
+  *      although the architecture is supported in the LUFA core library.
+  *    - DMA transfers to and from the USB controller are not yet implemented for this release.
+  *    - The UC3C, UC3D and UC3L sub-families of UC3 are not currently supported by the library due to their
+  *      altered USB controller design.
+  *    - The various \c *_CreateStream() functions for creating standard \c <stdio.h> compatible virtual file
+  *      streams are not available on the UC3 architecture, due to a lack of suitable library support.
+  *  - XMEGA Architecture
+  *    \warning The XMEGA device support is currently <b>experimental</b> (incomplete and/or non-functional), and is included for preview purposes only.
+  *
+  *    - Endpoints of more than 64 bytes are not currently supported in this release.
+  *    - Isochronous endpoints are not currently supported in this release. As a result, the audio class
+  *      cannot be used on XMEGA devices.
+  *    - Multiple-bank endpoints are not currently supported in this release.
+  *    - Early silicon revisions of the ATXMEGA128A1U are incompatible with LUFA, due to their various errata
+  *      relating to the USB controller.
+  *  - Architecture Independent
+  *    - The LUFA library is not watchdog aware, and thus timeouts are possible if short periods are used
+  *      and a lengthy USB operation is initiated.
+  *    - No LUFA provided driver INF files for Windows are signed, and thus may fail to install on systems where driver signing is enforced (e.g. Windows 8).
+  *  - Build System
+  *    - No known issues.
+  *  - Atmel Studio Integration
+  *    - Not all devices are listed in the "Supported Parts" screen when selecting a device. To select an alternative device, change the "Show Device" drop-down to "All Parts".
+  *    - When switching boards after changing the device selection, a second conflicting BOARD symbol definition can be created that prevents successful compilation. To fix, open the project properties window (<i>Project->Project {name} Properties...</i> menu item), click the Toolchain tab, click "Symbols" under the "AVR/GNU C Compiler" section and remove the incorrect definition.
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_KnownIssues130901 Version 130901
+  *  - AVR8 Architecture
+  *    - No known issues.
+  *  - UC3 Architecture
+  *    \warning The UC3 device support is currently <b>experimental</b> (incomplete and/or non-functional), and is included for preview purposes only. \n
+  *
+  *    - No demos, bootloaders or projects have been ported for the UC3 devices in the current release,
+  *      although the architecture is supported in the LUFA core library.
+  *    - DMA transfers to and from the USB controller are not yet implemented for this release.
+  *    - The UC3C, UC3D and UC3L sub-families of UC3 are not currently supported by the library due to their
+  *      altered USB controller design.
+  *    - The various \c *_CreateStream() functions for creating standard \c <stdio.h> compatible virtual file
+  *      streams are not available on the UC3 architecture, due to a lack of suitable library support.
+  *  - XMEGA Architecture
+  *    \warning The XMEGA device support is currently <b>experimental</b> (incomplete and/or non-functional), and is included for preview purposes only.
+  *
+  *    - Endpoints of more than 64 bytes are not currently supported in this release.
+  *    - Isochronous endpoints are not currently supported in this release. As a result, the audio class
+  *      cannot be used on XMEGA devices.
+  *    - Multiple-bank endpoints are not currently supported in this release.
+  *    - Early silicon revisions of the ATXMEGA128A1U are incompatible with LUFA, due to their various errata
+  *      relating to the USB controller.
+  *  - Architecture Independent
+  *    - The LUFA library is not watchdog aware, and thus timeouts are possible if short periods are used
+  *      and a lengthy USB operation is initiated.
+  *    - No LUFA provided driver INF files for Windows are signed, and thus may fail to install on systems where driver signing is enforced (e.g. Windows 8).
+  *  - Build System
+  *    - No known issues.
+  *  - Atmel Studio Integration
+  *    - Not all devices are listed in the "Supported Parts" screen when selecting a device. To select an alternative device, change the "Show Device" drop-down to "All Parts".
+  *    - When switching boards after changing the device selection, a second conflicting BOARD symbol definition can be created that prevents successful compilation. To fix, open the project properties window (<i>Project->Project {name} Properties...</i> menu item), click the Toolchain tab, click "Symbols" under the "AVR/GNU C Compiler" section and remove the incorrect definition.
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_KnownIssues130303 Version 130303
+  *  - AVR8 Architecture
+  *    - No known issues.
+  *  - UC3 Architecture
+  *    \warning The UC3 device support is currently <b>experimental</b> (incomplete and/or non-functional), and is included for preview purposes only. \n
+  *
+  *    - No demos, bootloaders or projects have been ported for the UC3 devices in the current release,
+  *      although the architecture is supported in the LUFA core library.
+  *    - DMA transfers to and from the USB controller are not yet implemented for this release.
+  *    - The UC3C, UC3D and UC3L sub-families of UC3 are not currently supported by the library due to their
+  *      altered USB controller design.
+  *    - The various \c CreateStream() functions for creating standard \c <stdio.h> compatible virtual file
+  *      streams are not available on the UC3 architecture, due to a lack of suitable library support.
+  *  - XMEGA Architecture
+  *    \warning The XMEGA device support is currently <b>experimental</b> (incomplete and/or non-functional), and is included for preview purposes only.
+  *
+  *    - No demos, bootloaders or projects have been ported for the XMEGA devices in the current release,
+  *      although the architecture is supported in the LUFA core library.
+  *    - Endpoints of more than 64 bytes are not currently supported in this release.
+  *    - Isochronous endpoints are not currently supported in this release. As a result, the audio class
+  *      cannot be used on XMEGA devices.
+  *    - Multiple-bank endpoints are not currently supported in this release.
+  *    - Early revisions of the ATXMEGA128A1U are incompatible with LUFA, due to their various errata
+  *      relating to the USB controller.
+  *  - Architecture Independent
+  *    - The LUFA library is not watchdog aware, and thus timeouts are possible if short periods are used
+  *      and a lengthy USB operation is initiated.
+  *    - No LUFA provided driver INF files for Windows are signed, and thus may fail to install on systems where driver signing is enforced (e.g. Windows 8).
+  *  - Build System
+  *    - No known issues.
+  *
+  *  \section Sec_KnownIssues120730 Version 120730
+  *  - AVR8 Architecture
+  *    - No known issues.
+  *  - UC3 Architecture
+  *    \warning The UC3 device support is currently <b>experimental</b> (incomplete and/or non-functional), and is included for preview purposes only. \n
+  *
+  *    - No demos, bootloaders or projects have been ported for the UC3 devices in the current release,
+  *      although the architecture is supported in the LUFA core library.
+  *    - DMA transfers to and from the USB controller are not yet implemented for this release.
+  *    - The UC3C, UC3D and UC3L sub-families of UC3 are not currently supported by the library due to their
+  *      altered USB controller design.
+  *    - The various \c CreateStream() functions for creating standard \c <stdio.h> compatible virtual file
+  *      streams are not available on the UC3 architecture, due to a lack of suitable library support.
+  *  - XMEGA Architecture
+  *    \warning The XMEGA device support is currently <b>experimental</b> (incomplete and/or non-functional), and is included for preview purposes only.
+  *
+  *    - No demos, bootloaders or projects have been ported for the XMEGA devices in the current release,
+  *      although the architecture is supported in the LUFA core library.
+  *    - Endpoints of more than 64 bytes are not currently supported in this release.
+  *    - Isochronous endpoints are not currently supported in this release. As a result, the audio class
+  *      cannot be used on XMEGA devices.
+  *    - Multiple-bank endpoints are not currently supported in this release.
+  *    - Early revisions of the ATXMEGA128A1U are incompatible with LUFA, due to their various errata
+  *      relating to the USB controller.
+  *  - Architecture Independent
+  *    - The LUFA library is not watchdog aware, and thus timeouts are possible if short periods are used
+  *      and a lengthy USB operation is initiated.
+  *    - No LUFA provided driver INF files for Windows are signed, and thus may fail to install on systems where driver signing is enforced (e.g. Windows 8).
+  *  - Build System
+  *    - No known issues.
+  */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/LUFAPoweredProjects.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/LUFAPoweredProjects.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b1816d061
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/LUFAPoweredProjects.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,224 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \page Page_LUFAPoweredProjects User Projects Powered by LUFA
+ *
+ *  LUFA is currently in use all around the world, in many applications both commercial and non-commercial. Below is a
+ *  list of known public LUFA powered projects, which all use the LUFA library in some way. Feel free to visit each project's
+ *  home page for more information on each project.
+ *
+ *  If you have a project that you would like to add to this list, please contact me via the details on the main page of this
+ *  documentation.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_BoardsUsingLUFA AVR-USB Development Boards Using LUFA
+ *
+ *  The following is a list of known AVR USB development boards, which recommend using LUFA for the USB stack. Some of these
+ *  are open design, and all are available for purchase as completed development boards suitable for project development.
+ *
+ *  \li AVR-USB-162, a USBKEY-like development board for the AT90USB162: http://olimex.com/dev/avr-usb-162.html
+ *  \li Benito #7, a no-frills USB board: http://www.dorkbotpdx.org/wiki/benito
+ *  \li Duce, the successor to the Benito #7: http://dorkbotpdx.org/wiki/duce
+ *  \li JM-DB-U2, an ATMEGA32U2 development board: http://u2.mattair.net/index.html
+ *  \li Micropendous, an open design/source set of AVR USB development boards: http://micropendous.org/
+ *  \li Microsin AVR-USB162 breakout board, a DIY AT90USB162 development board: http://microsin.ru/content/view/685/44/
+ *  \li Minimus USB, a board specially designed for PSGroove: http://www.minimususb.com/
+ *  \li Nanduino, a do-it-yourself AT90USB162 board: http://www.makestuff.eu/wordpress/?page_id=569
+ *  \li Sparkfun ATMEGA8U2 breakout board: http://www.sparkfun.com/products/10277
+ *  \li Teensy and Teensy++, two other AVR USB development boards: http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/index.html
+ *  \li U2DIL/U4DIL, a set of DIP layout USB AVR boards: http://www.reworld.eu/re/en/products/u2dil/
+ *  \li USB2AX, a tiny USB to serial converter board: http://paranoidstudio.assembla.com/wiki/show/paranoidstudio/USB2AX
+ *  \li USBFOO 2, AT90USB162 based development board: http://shop.kernelconcepts.de/product_info.php?products_id=102
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_LUFAProjects Projects Using LUFA (Hobbyist)
+ *
+ *  The following are known hobbyist projects using LUFA. Most are open source, and show off interesting ways that the LUFA library
+ *  can be incorporated into many different applications.
+ *
+ *  \li Accelerometer Game Joystick: http://www.crictor.co.il/he/episodes/joystick/
+ *  \li Adjacent Reality Motion Tracker: http://www.adjacentreality.org/
+ *  \li AD9833 based USB Function Generator: http://tuomasnylund.fi/drupal6/content/ad9833-based-usb-function-generator
+ *  \li AERY development platform for the AVR32 devices: http://www.aery32.com/
+ *  \li AM Radio transmitter: http://amcinnes.info/2012/uc_am_xmit/
+ *  \li Arcade Controller: http://fletchtronics.net/arcade-controller-made-petunia
+ *  \li Arcade Joystick: http://jamie.lentin.co.uk/embedded/arcade-joystick/
+ *  \li AttoBasic AVR BASIC interpreter: http://cappels.org/dproj/AttoBasic_Home/AttoBasic_Home.html
+ *  \li AVR USB Modem, a 3G Wireless Modem host: http://code.google.com/p/avrusbmodem/
+ *  \li Bicycle POV: http://www.code.google.com/p/bicycleledpov/
+ *  \li Bluetooth Explorerbot: http://code.google.com/p/bluetooth-explorerbot/
+ *  \li Bus Ninja, an AVR clone of the popular BusPirate project: http://blog.hodgepig.org/busninja/
+ *  \li CAMTRIG, a remote Camera Trigger device: http://code.astraw.com/projects/motmot/camtrig
+ *  \li ChameleonMini, a smart card emulator: https://github.com/skuep/ChameleonMini
+ *  \li CD Driver Emulator Dongle for ISO Files: http://cdemu.blogspot.com/
+ *  \li ChipWhisperer, a signal capture device: https://www.assembla.com/spaces/chipwhisperer/wiki/ChipWhisperer_Rev2_Capture_Hardware
+ *  \li ClockTamer, a configurable clock generator: http://code.google.com/p/clock-tamer/
+ *  \li Collection of alternative Arduino Uno firmwares: http://hunt.net.nz/users/darran/
+ *  \li Computer controlled LED matrix (Russian): http://we.easyelectronics.ru/AVR/nebolshoy-primer-s-lufa-hidapi.html
+ *  \li CULFW, a 868MHz RF packet encoder/decoder: http://www.koeniglich.de/culfw/culfw.html
+ *  \li Dashkey, a custom PC keyboard controller: http://geekhack.org/showwiki.php?title=Island:19096
+ *  \li DIY PS3 controller emulator: https://code.google.com/p/diyps3controller/
+ *  \li EMuSer, a USB-RS422 adapter for E-Mu samplers: http://www.emxp.net/EMuSer.htm
+ *  \li EQ Track, a telescope mount controller: http://sourceforge.net/projects/eqtrack/
+ *  \li Estick JTAG, an ARM JTAG debugger: http://code.google.com/p/estick-jtag/
+ *  \li "Fingerlicking Wingdinger" (WARNING: Bad language if no Javascript), a MIDI controller: http://noisybox.net/electronics/wingdinger/
+ *  \li Flyatar, a real-time fly tracking system: https://github.com/peterpolidoro/Flyatar
+ *  \li FootJoy, a 22 button, 6-axis josystick with keyboard and mouse modes: https://bitbucket.org/sirbrialliance/foot-joy/
+ *  \li Gamecube controller to USB adapter: https://www.facebook.com/media/set/?set=a.10150202447076304.310536.688776303&l=df53851c50
+ *  \li Garmin GPS USB to NMEA standard serial sentence translator: http://github.com/nall/garmin-transmogrifier/tree/master
+ *  \li Geiger Counter with USB interface: http://www.hforsten.com/i-made-a-geiger-counter.html
+ *  \li Generic HID Device Creator: http://generichid.sourceforge.net/
+ *  \li Generic HID Open Source Framework: http://www.waitingforfriday.com/index.php/USB_Generic_HID_Open_Source_Framework_for_Atmel_AVR_and_Windows
+ *  \li Ghetto Drum, a MIDI drum controller: http://noisybox.net/art/gdrum/
+ *  \li GPS enabled lap timer for vehicles: http://www.assembla.com/code/ironlung/subversion/nodes/trunk/LapTimer
+ *  \li GSynth, an 8-bit sound synthesizer: https://github.com/gcielniak/GSynth
+ *  \li Gumbi, a Python library and USB GPIO controller: https://code.google.com/p/gumbi/
+ *  \li Hardware Volume Control: https://github.com/davidk/hw-volume-control
+ *  \li Hiduino, a USB-MIDI replacement firmware for the Arduino Uno: http://code.google.com/p/hiduino/
+ *  \li IBM capacitive keybord replacement controller: http://downloads.cornall.co/ibm-capsense-usb-web/ibm-capsense-usb.html
+ *  \li Ikea RGB LED USB modification: http://slashhome.se/p/projects/id/ikea_dioder_usb/#project
+ *  \li IR electricity meter monitor: http://sourceforge.net/projects/irmetermon/
+ *  \li IR Remote to Keyboard decoder: http://netzhansa.blogspot.com/2010/04/our-living-room-hi-fi-setup-needs-mp3.html
+ *  \li Jukebox panic button: http://thinkl33t.co.uk/the-panic-button
+ *  \li Kinesis replacement firmware: https://github.com/chrisandreae/kinesis-firmware
+ *  \li LED Panel controller: http://projects.peterpolidoro.net/caltech/panelscontroller/panelscontroller.htm
+ *  \li Linux Secure Storage Dongle: http://github.com/TomMD/teensy
+ *  \li LUFA powered DDR dance mat (French): http://logicien-parfait.fr/dokuwiki/doku.php?id=projet:ddr_repair
+ *  \li Macintosh SIMM ROM Programmer: https://code.google.com/p/mac-rom-simm-programmer/
+ *  \li MakeTV Episode Dispenser: http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BkWUi18hl3g
+ *  \li Mec64,a Commodore 64 keyboard: http://deskthority.net/workshop-f7/mec64-keyboard-t4522.html
+ *  \li MidiMonster, a USB-to-MIDI gateway board: http://www.dorkbotpdx.org/wiki/midimonster
+ *  \li MIDI Theremin: http://baldwisdom.com/usb-midi-controller-theremin-style-on-arduino-uno/
+ *  \li MIDI interface hack of a toy Guitar: http://blog.x37v.info/2011/06/26/toy-guitar-hacked-midi-conroller
+ *  \li MiniBloq, a graphical Ardunio programming environment : http://minibloq.org/
+ *  \li MiXley, a port of the Teacup 3D printer firmware for the USB AVRs: http://codaset.com/michielh/mixley
+ *  \li Mobo 4.3, a USB controlled all band (160-10m) HF SDR transceiver: http://sites.google.com/site/lofturj/mobo4_3
+ *  \li Moco, a native Arduino Uno MIDI replacement firmware: http://web.mac.com/kuwatay/morecat_lab./MocoLUFA.html
+ *  \li Monash ECSE Smart Packet Radio Testbed: http://www.ecse.monash.edu.au/twiki/bin/view/WSRNLab/SmartPacketRadio
+ *  \li Motherboard BIOS flasher: http://www.coreboot.org/InSystemFlasher
+ *  \li Multi-button Joystick (French): http://logicien-parfait.fr/dokuwiki/doku.php?id=projet:joystick
+ *  \li Music Playing Alarm Clock (Tutorial): http://www.instructables.com/id/Music-Playing-Alarm-Clock/
+ *  \li Nehebkau, Laptop Controlled Keyboard and Mouse: http://www.frank-zhao.com/cache/nehebkau.php
+ *  \li NeroJTAG, a JTAG dongle: https://github.com/makestuff/neroJtag
+ *  \li NES Controller USB modification: https://github.com/nfd/nes_adapter
+ *  \li Nikon wireless camera remote control (Norwegian): http://hekta.org/~hpe1119/
+ *  \li Nintendo Four-Score, USB NES 4-player controller adapter: http://www.waitingforfriday.com/index.php/Nintendo_Four_Score_USB
+ *  \li Numpad keyboard: http://tuomasnylund.fi/drupal6/content/usb-cherry-mx-numpad
+ *  \li Opendous-JTAG, an open source ARM JTAG debugger: http://code.google.com/p/opendous-jtag/
+ *  \li Openkubus, an open source hardware-based authentication dongle: http://code.google.com/p/openkubus/
+ *  \li Orbee, a USB connected RGB Orb for notifications: http://www.franksworkshop.com.au/Electronics/Orbee/Orbee.htm
+ *  \li Password keyring: http://owlsan.blogspot.no/2014/06/keyring-project-version-10.html
+ *  \li Picade alternative firmware, a retro Arcade controller/cabinet: https://github.com/rktrlng/picade_lufa
+ *  \li PPM signal generator over USB: https://github.com/G33KatWork/USBPPM
+ *  \li Programmable keyboard controller: http://41j.com/blog/2011/10/a-programmable-keyboard-controller/
+ *  \li Programmable XBOX controller: http://richard-burke.dyndns.org/wordpress/pan-galactic-gargantuan-gargle-brain-aka-xbox-360-usb-controller/
+ *  \li Project Surface, a touch interface controller for Windows 8: https://code.google.com/p/project-surface/
+ *  \li PSGroove, a Playstation 3 Homebrew dongle: http://github.com/psgroove
+ *  \li PS/2 to USB adapter: https://github.com/makestuff/p2ukbd
+ *  \li RaspiFace, an Arduino platform bridge for the Raspberry Pi: http://www.raspiface.com/
+ *  \li Reflow oven controller: http://danstrother.com/2011/01/15/reflow-oven-controller/
+ *  \li RFPirate, a RF experimentation platform: https://github.com/ebuller/RF-Pirate
+ *  \li RF Power Meter, based on the AD8307 log amp: https://sites.google.com/site/lofturj/ad8307-power-meter
+ *  \li RF Transceiver using the MRF49XA: http://alternet.us.com/?page_id=1494
+ *  \li SD Card reader: http://elasticsheep.com/2010/04/teensy2-usb-mass-storage-with-an-sd-card/
+ *  \li SDR1, a Software Defined Radio firmware: https://code.google.com/p/sdr-mk1/
+ *  \li SEGA Megadrive/Genesis Development Cartridge: http://www.makestuff.eu/wordpress/?page_id=398
+ *  \li Serial Line bus analyser: http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/projects/SerialAnalyzer.html
+ *  \li Simple USB LED Controller (SULC): https://github.com/scottbez1/sulc
+ *  \li SNES custom FLASH ROM: http://electrifiedfoolingmachine.co/?page_id=633
+ *  \li Smartcard Detective: https://code.google.com/p/smartcarddetective/
+ *  \li SmartportVHD Apple II Mass Storage adapter: http://pcedric3.free.fr/SmartportVHD/
+ *  \li Single LED Matrix Display: http://guysoft.wordpress.com/2009/10/08/bumble-b/
+ *  \li Simple USB LED Controller: https://github.com/scottbez1/sulc
+ *  \li Stripe Snoop, a Magnetic Card reader: http://www.ossguy.com/ss_usb/
+ *  \li Stylophone, with USB MIDI connectivity: http://www.waitingforfriday.com/index.php/Stylophone_Studio_5
+ *  \li Teensy SD Card .WAV file player: http://elasticsheep.com/2010/04/teensy2-usb-wav-player-part-1/
+ *  \li Touch It (Fabulously), presumably art: http://touch.it.fa.bulo.us/ly/
+ *  \li Touchscreen Input Device: http://capnstech.blogspot.com/2010/07/touchscreen-update.html
+ *  \li UDFS, a BBC Micro USB disk filing system: https://github.com/makestuff/udfs
+ *  \li Universal USB AVR Module: http://usbavr.bplaced.net/
+ *  \li USB2AX, a USB to Dynamixel network adapter: http://paranoidstudio.assembla.com/wiki/show/paranoidstudio/USB2AX
+ *  \li USBPass, a USB password keeper: http://sroz.net/projects/usbpass/
+ *  \li USB Business Card: http://www.limpkin.fr/index.php?post/2012/09/15/My-new-business-card
+ *  \li USB Function Generator: http://tuomasnylund.fi/drupal6/content/ad9833-based-usb-function-generator
+ *  \li USB Infrared Receiver/Transmitter: http://vaton4.web2001.cz/
+ *  \li USB Interface for Playstation Portable Devices: http://forums.ps2dev.org/viewtopic.php?t=11001
+ *  \li USB MIDI to DMX controller: http://github.com/hanshuebner/miDiMX
+ *  \li USB Mood Light: https://github.com/hsbp/usb_moodlight
+ *  \li USB powered Geiger Counter: http://uhrheber.wordpress.com/2011/04/28/a-usb-powered-geiger-counter-for-the-z2-and-other-computers/
+ *  \li Userial, a USB to Serial converter with SPI, I2C and other protocols: http://www.tty1.net/userial/
+ *  \li Wii Classic Controller to USB converter: https://github.com/crazyiop/wii-classic-2-usb
+ *  \li Wireless MIDI Guitar system: http://www.ise.pw.edu.pl/~wzab/wireless_guitar_system/
+ *  \li XBOX 360 Startup Sound Changer: http://www.homebrew-connection.org/change-your-xbox-360-startup-sounds-yourself/
+ *  \li Xnormidi, a C MIDI library: http://x37v.info/projects/xnormidi
+ *  \li XUM1541, a Commodore 64 floppy drive to USB adapter: http://www.root.org/~nate/c64/xum1541/
+ *  \li Zeus, a touch screen computer for music manipulation: http://www.benbengler.com/developments_zeus.html
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_LUFACommercialProjects Projects Using LUFA (Commercial)
+ *
+ *  The following is a list of known commercial products using LUFA. Some of these are open source, although many are "black-box"
+ *  solutions with no source code given. Those companies which have purchased a Commercial License to LUFA (see \ref Page_LicenseInfo)
+ *  are not listed here unless specifically requested.
+ *
+ *  \li Alphasphere, a MIDI input sphere device for music creation: http://www.alphasphere.com/
+ *  \li Arduino Uno and Leonardo, official Arduino boards: http://www.arduino.cc
+ *  \li ARPS Locator: http://la3t.hamradio.no/lab//?id=tracker_en
+ *  \li AsTeRICS assistive technologies project, HID actuator: http://www.asterics.eu
+ *  \li BitFury, a Bitcoin ASIC miner: https://github.com/aauer1/LUFA-BitFury/tree/master/Projects/BitfuryBTC
+ *  \li Ceberus, a MadCatz Xbox 360 arcade stick modifier: http://www.phreakmods.com/products/cerberus
+ *  \li CFFA3000, a CompactFlash interface for the Apple II: http://www.dreher.net/CFforAppleII
+ *  \li Digital Survey Instruments Magnetometer and Pointer: http://www.digitalsurveyinstruments.com/
+ *  \li FinchRobot, a robot designed for educational use: http://www.finchrobot.com/
+ *  \li Flysight, a GPS logger for wingsuit pilots: http://flysight.ca/
+ *  \li Goldilocks, an Arduino compatible clone: http://feilipu.me/2014/03/08/goldilocks-1284p-arduino-uno-clone/
+ *  \li HummingBird Kit, a robotics learning platform: http://www.hummingbirdkit.com/
+ *  \li LP1, an AVRISP-MKII Clone AVR Programmer: http://embeddedglow.com/items/LP1/LP1.php
+ *  \li Penguino, an Arduino Board With On-Board LUFA Powered Debugger/Programmer: http://wiki.icy.com.au/PenguinoAVR
+ *  \li PhatIO, a filesystem based I/O interface: http://www.phatio.com/
+ *  \li PIR-1, an IR control interface for consumer electronics: http://www.promixis.com/pir-1.php
+ *  \li PIR-4, a USB Connected 4 port IR transmitter: http://promixis.com/pir-4.php
+ *  \li PortPilot, a USB device charger with power meter: http://portpilot.net/
+ *  \li KeyGlove, an alternative input system: http://www.keyglove.net/
+ *  \li Many of Busware's Products: http://www.busware.de/
+ *  \li MIDIFighter, a USB-MIDI controller: http://www.midifighter.com/
+ *  \li MIDI USB Arduino Shield: http://openpipe.cc/products/midi-usb-shield/
+ *  \li Norduino, a wireless Arduino: http://norduino.robomotic.com/norduino-is-now-usb-hid/
+ *  \li Olimex AVR-ISP-MK2, an AVRISP-MKII Clone AVR Programmer: https://www.olimex.com/dev/avr-isp-mk2.html
+ *  \li Retrode, a USB Games Console Cartridge Reader: http://www.retrode.org
+ *  \li RFI21.1EU UHF RFID reader: http://www.metra.cz/rfid/uhf-rfid-ctecky/rfi21-1eu-uhf-rfid-ctecka.htm
+ *  \li SmartCardDetective, a Smart Card analysis tool: http://www.smartcarddetective.com/
+ *  \li TimelapsePlus, a digital camera time lapse tool: https://github.com/timelapseplus/TimelapsePlus-Firmware
+ *  \li USBTINY-MKII, an AVRISP-MKII Clone AVR Programmer: http://tom-itx.no-ip.biz:81/~webpage/boards/USBTiny_Mkii/USBTiny_Mkii_index.php
+ *  \li UDS18B20 USB Temperature sensor: http://toughlog.org/uds18b20/
+ *  \li VMeter, a USB MIDI touch strip controller: http://www.vmeter.net/
+ *  \li XMEGA Development Board, using LUFA as an On-Board Programmer: http://xmega.mattair.net/
+ *  \li Zeptoprog, a multifunction AVR programmer: http://www.mattairtech.com/index.php/featured/zeptoprog.html
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_LUFAPublications Publications Mentioning LUFA
+ *  The following are published magazines which have either mentioned or featured the LUFA library.
+ *
+ *  \li Elektor Magazine, "My First AVR-USB" by Antoine Authier (feature), January 2010 Issue
+ *  \li Elektor Magazine, "USB is Cool/Sucks" by Jerry Jacobs and Chris Vossen (minor mention), January 2010 Issue
+ *  \li Elektor Magazine, "20 x Open Source" by Jens Nickel, March 2010 Issue
+ *  \li Circuit Cellar Magazine, "Advanced USB Design Debugging" by Collin O'Flynn, August 2010 Issue
+ *  \li "Some Assembly Required: Assembly Language Programming with the AVR Microcontroller" by Timothy S. Margush
+ *  \li Elektor Magazine, "Taming the Beast (2)" by Clemens Valens/Raymond Vermeulen, January 2014 Issue
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_LUFANotableMentions Other Notable Mentions of LUFA
+ *  The following are non-print but notable mentions of the LUFA library.
+ *
+ *  \li Adafruit "Ask an Engineer", 7th November 2010
+ *  \li Arduino 2010 Keynote speech
+ *  \li The Amp Hour podcast blog #11
+ *  \li Blackhat 2011 conference, "Exploiting USB Devices with Arduino"
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_PortsAndForks Non-Official LUFA Ports and Forks
+ *  The following are unofficial forks of the LUFA codebase, which implement different features such as support for
+ *  additional architectures.
+ *
+ *  \li NXP's official LPCOpen "LPCUSBLib" LUFA fork, for LPC devices: http://www.lpcware.com/
+ *  \li Kevin Mehall's LUFA port to the NXP LPC13xx: https://github.com/kevinmehall/LUFA-LPC13xx
+ *  \li Mark Ding's port for the Silicon Labs SiM3U1xx: https://www.github.com/MarkDing/USB_CDC
+ *  \li Mark Ding's port for the Silicon Labs EFM32 Giant Gecko: https://github.com/MarkDing/lufa-efm32
+ */
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/LibraryResources.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/LibraryResources.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f69d4344c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/LibraryResources.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/**
+ *  \page Page_Resources Library Resources
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_UnofficialResources Unofficial Resources
+ *  Unofficial Russian LUFA documentation translation: http://microsin.ru/Download.cnt/doc/LUFA/ \n
+ *  Tutorial for LUFA USB Control Transfers: http://www.avrbeginners.net/new/tutorials/usb-control-transfers-with-lufa/
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_ProjectPages LUFA Related Webpages
+ *  Project Homepage: http://www.lufa-lib.org \n
+ *  Commercial Licenses: http://www.lufa-lib.org/license \n
+ *  Author's Website: http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com \n
+ *  Development Blog: http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com/blog \n
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_ProjectHelp Assistance With LUFA
+ *  Support Mailing List: http://www.lufa-lib.org/support \n
+ *  Author's Email: dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com \n
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_InDevelopment Latest In-Development Source Code
+ *  Issue Tracker: http://www.lufa-lib.org/tracker \n
+ *  Public GIT Repository: http://www.lufa-lib.org/git \n
+ *  Latest Repository Source Archive: http://www.lufa-lib.org/latest-archive \n
+ *  Commit RSS Feed: http://www.lufa-lib.org/rss \n
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBResources USB Resources
+ *  USB-IF Website: http://www.usb.org \n
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/LicenseInfo.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/LicenseInfo.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..86ed124bb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/LicenseInfo.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/**
+ *  \page Page_LicenseInfo Source Code License
+ *
+ *  The LUFA library is currently released under the MIT license, included below.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_LicenseForHumans License Summary for Human Beings
+ *  Everyone is free to use LUFA without payment - even in commercial applications
+ *  where the product source code is not publicly disclosed. However, use of the
+ *  library must be in accordance with the library license conditions.
+ *
+ *  If you wish to use LUFA without payment, you <b>must</b> include a copy of the
+ *  full license text below with your product or project - on your website, and in
+ *  an accompanying manual or other materials for the product. As long as the entire
+ *  license text is made available and obvious to the users of your product, you
+ *  are free to incorporate the LUFA library into your product without special
+ *  additional licensing.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_CommercialLicenses Commercial Licensing
+ *  In some instances the small requirement for public disclosure of LUFA within a
+ *  product is unwanted; in these instances a commercial license is offered up as an
+ *  alternative to the standard LUFA license.
+ *
+ *  Commercial entities can opt out of the public disclosure clause in this license
+ *  for a one-time US$1500 payment. This provides a non-exclusive modified MIT
+ *  licensed which allows for the free use of the LUFA library, bootloaders and
+ *  (where the sole copyright is attributed to Dean Camera) demos without public
+ *  disclosure within an organization, in addition to three free hours of consultation
+ *  with the library author, and priority support.
+ *
+ *  Please visit the Commercial License link on \ref Page_Resources for more information on
+ *  ordering a commercial license for your company.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_LicenseText LUFA License Text
+ *
+ *  \verbinclude License.txt
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/MainPage.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/MainPage.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e737c39b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/MainPage.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/**
+ *  \mainpage
+ *
+ *  \image html Images/LUFA.png
+ *  <div align="center"><small><i>Logo design by <a href="http://www.studiomonsoon.com">Studio Monsoon Photography</a></i></small></div>
+ *  \n
+ *  <div align="center"><a href="http://www.lufa-lib.org">http://www.lufa-lib.org</a></div>
+ *  \n
+ *
+ *  <b>LUFA is donationware. For author and donation information, see \ref Page_Donating.</b>
+ *
+ *  LUFA is an open-source USB library for the USB-enabled AVR microcontrollers, released under the MIT license (see \ref Page_LicenseInfo).
+ *  It supports a large number of USB AVR models and boards (see \ref Page_DeviceSupport). It is designed to provide an easy to use,
+ *  feature rich framework for the development of USB peripherals and hosts.
+ *
+ *  LUFA focuses on the microcontroller side of USB development only; it includes no PC host USB driver development facilities - other projects
+ *  such as the Windows Driver Development Kit, Windows USB Device Mode Framework and libusb may be of interest for developing custom OS drivers.
+ *  While custom USB devices can be made with LUFA using such tools, the included demos all use the inbuilt OS drivers for each USB class for
+ *  simplicity.
+ *
+ *  The library is currently in a stable release, suitable for download and incorporation into user projects for
+ *  both host and device modes. For information about the project progression, see the blog link at \ref Page_Resources.
+ *
+ *  LUFA is written specifically for the free AVR-GCC compiler, and uses several GCC-only extensions to make the
+ *  library API more streamlined and robust. You can download AVR-GCC for free in a convenient windows package,
+ *  from the the WinAVR website (see \ref Page_Resources).
+ *
+ *  The only required AVR peripherals for LUFA is the USB controller itself and interrupts - LUFA does not require the use of the
+ *  microcontroller's timers or other hardware, leaving more hardware to the application developer.
+ *
+ *  Accompanying LUFA in the download package is a set of example demo applications, plus several Bootloaders of different classes
+ *  and open source LUFA powered projects.
+ *
+ *  <b>Subsections:</b>
+ *  \li \subpage Page_LicenseInfo - Project source license and commercial use information
+ *  \li \subpage Page_Donating - Donating to support this project
+ *  \li \subpage Page_DeviceSupport - Current Device and Hardware Support
+ *  \li \subpage Page_ChangeLog - Project Changelog
+ *  \li \subpage Page_KnownIssues - Known Issues
+ *  \li \subpage Page_FutureChanges - Planned Changes to the Library
+ *  \li \subpage Page_GettingStarted - Getting started with LUFA
+ *  \li \subpage Page_DevelopingWithLUFA - Developing with LUFA
+ *  \li \subpage Page_LUFAPoweredProjects - Other Projects Using LUFA
+ *  \li \subpage Page_Resources - LUFA and USB Related Resources
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/MigrationInformation.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/MigrationInformation.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bc47d1475
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/MigrationInformation.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,708 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \page Page_Migration Migrating from Older Versions
+ *
+ *  Below is migration information for updating existing projects based on previous versions of the LUFA library
+ *  to the next version released. It does not indicate all new additions to the library in each version change, only
+ *  areas relevant to making older projects compatible with the API changes of each new release.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Migration140928 Migrating from 140302 to 140928
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - The device mode RNDIS class driver now requires a user-supplied buffer and buffer length to operate, rather
+ *      than allocating this buffer internally.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Migration140302 Migrating from 130901 to 140302
+ *  <b>USB Core</b>
+ *    - The \c VERSION_BCD() macro has changed from accepting one floating point parameter to taking three distinct major/minor/revision integer parameters, as
+ *      some edge cases caused incorrect parsing of the input float into the final integer BCD encoded value.
+ *
+ *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>
+ *    - The \c ATTR_NEVER_INLINE macro, erroneously introduced in a previous release has been removed, as it duplicates the existing \c ATTR_NO_INLINE macro.
+ *
+ *  <b>Build System</b>
+ *    - The default configuration file for Doxygen is now "doxyfile" rather than "Doxygen.conf", to conform to the Doxygen project's own default file name.
+ *      Set \c DOXYGEN_CONF to override the new default file name.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Migration130901 Migrating from 130303 to 130901
+ *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>
+ *    - The Board Dataflash \c Dataflash_Init() function now automatically configures the appropriate communication interface.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Migration130303 Migrating from 120730 to 130303
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - The \ref HID_KEYBOARD_LED_KANA macro was previously misspelled as \c HID_KEYBOARD_LED_KATANA, and had an incorrect value. User applications requiring this
+ *      constant should use the new name, and remove any workarounds for the previously incorrect macro definition.
+ *    - The \c HID_KEYBOARD_SC_EQUAL_SIGN macro has been renamed to \ref HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_EQUAL_SIGN, and the previous definition of
+ *      \c HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_EQUAL_SIGN has been renamed \ref HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_EQUAL_SIGN_AS400 to conform to the definitions in the HID specification.
+ *
+ *  <b>Host Mode</b>
+ *    - The \ref HID_KEYBOARD_LED_KANA macro was previously misspelled as \c HID_KEYBOARD_LED_KATANA, and had an incorrect value. User applications requiring this
+ *      constant should use the new name, and remove any workarounds for the previously incorrect macro definition.
+ *    - The \c HID_KEYBOARD_SC_EQUAL_SIGN macro has been renamed to \ref HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_EQUAL_SIGN, and the previous definition of
+ *      \c HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_EQUAL_SIGN has been renamed \ref HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_EQUAL_SIGN_AS400 to conform to the definitions in the HID specification.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Migration120730 Migrating from 120219 to 120730
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - The device mode Audio Class driver now requires an additional configuration parameter, the Audio Control interface index. Existing applications should
+ *      be adjusted to specify the additional configuration parameter.
+ *    - The HID_DESCRIPTOR_JOYSTICK() macro no longer takes a variable number of axis as a parameter, due to OS incompatibilities; this macro now uses a fixed
+ *      3 axis of data. User applications should update their calls to this macro and their report structures to suit a fixed 3-axis joystick report. If a user
+ *      application requires more than 3 axis' of data, a custom report descriptor will need to be constructed by hand.
+ *    - The \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint() function no longer takes in masks for the banks and direction; the number of banks is now an integer argument, and
+ *      the direction is obtained from the full endpoint address within the device. Applications calling Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint() should update their API
+ *      call to use a full endpoint address (including ENDPOINT_DIR_IN or ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT direction in the MSB of the endpoint address) and an integer number
+ *      of banks.
+ *    - All endpoint functions now operate on full endpoint addresses within the device, rather than a directionless endpoint index. Applications should update
+ *      their API calls to use full endpoint addresses when required within the device.
+ *    - All device mode class drivers have been updated to use a new unified endpoint description structure for all endpoints; existing applications will need
+ *      to update their class driver struct instantiation to match the new scheme (see \ref USB_Endpoint_Table_t).
+ *    - The \c ENDPOINT_BANKS_SUPPORTED() and \c ENDPOINT_MAX_ENDPOINT_SIZE() macros have been removed, as these do not function correctly with the new addressing
+ *      scheme for the endpoint APIs. Please refer to the target device's datasheet for the maximum bank size of each endpoint.
+ *    - The MIDI class driver \ref MIDI_EventPacket_t event packet no longer contains separate \c CableIndex and \c Command entries; these have been combined
+ *      into a single \c Event element which can be constructed using the new macro \ref MIDI_EVENT(). Existing applications should use the new macro and structure
+ *      element name.
+ *
+ *  <b>Host Mode</b>
+ *    - The Android Accessory Host class driver property strings are now a array of \c char* rather than a struct of named pointers. Existing applications
+ *      should use C99 Designated Initializers with the property string indexes located in \ref AOA_Strings_t instead.
+ *    - The \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe() function no longer takes in masks for the banks and token; the number of banks is now an integer argument, and the token
+ *      is now inferred from the full pipe address within the device, and the pipe type. Applications calling Pipe_ConfigurePipe() should update their API
+ *      call to use a full pipe address (including PIPE_DIR_IN or PIPE_DIR_OUT direction in the MSB of the pipe address) and an integer number of banks.
+ *    - All pipe functions now operate on full pipe addresses within the device, rather than a directionless pipe index. Applications should update their API
+ *      calls to use full pipe addresses when required within the device.
+ *    - All host mode class drivers have been updated to use a new unified pipe description structure for all pipes; existing applications will need to update
+ *      their class driver struct instantiation to match the new scheme (see \ref USB_Pipe_Table_t).
+ *    - The MIDI class driver \ref MIDI_EventPacket_t event packet no longer contains seperate \c CableIndex and \c Command entries; these have been combined
+ *      into a single \c Event element which can be constructed using the new macro \ref MIDI_EVENT(). Existing applications should use the new macro and structure
+ *      element name.
+ *    - The library "LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/ConfigDescriptor.c" source file has been renamed "LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/ConfigDescriptors.c" as this was clashing with
+ *      files in some low level host mode demo applications, preventing parallel project builds. If you are referencing the project source files directly instead
+ *      of using the makefile module names, you will need to adjust your project makefile.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Migration120219 Migrating from 111009 to 120219
+ *  <b>USB Core</b>
+ *    - The HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_* macros in the HID class driver have been corrected to HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFIER_* (note the spelling of "modifier").
+ *      Existing applications should switch over to the correctly spelled macro names.
+ *    - The names of the USB Device and USB Host class driver files have changed; a new "ClassDevice" and "ClassHost" postfix has been added to the
+ *      respective class driver files. Projects referencing the class driver source files by filename rather than the LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS makefile
+ *      variable should append these postfixes to the source file names. Projects including the USB class driver dispatch headers directly should either
+ *      switch to including the main USB driver header instead, or use the updated header filenames.
+ *    - The USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED constant has been renamed to USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED, as this was misnamed. All devices must set this bit in
+ *      the Configuration descriptor's attributes field. As all devices are assumed to be bus-powered unless stated otherwise with the
+ *      USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED flag a replacement constant for bus powered devices is not provided.
+ *
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - The device mode Audio class driver now requires a new user application callback, \ref CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetInterfaceProperty().
+ *      Existing applications must implement this new callback, however if no audio entities are defined in the audio device's descriptors,
+ *      this function may be hard-coded to always return false for previous behaviour to be retained.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Migration111009 Migrating from 110528 to 111009
+ *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>
+ *    - The \c JTAG_DEBUG_ASSERT() macro has been renamed \ref JTAG_ASSERT() to be consistent with \ref STDOUT_ASSERT().
+ *
+ *  <b>USB Core</b>
+ *    - By default, unordered Endpoint and Pipe configuration is now allowed once again, via the previous workaround of
+ *      reconfiguring all Endpoints/Pipes in order each time a new Endpoint/Pipe is created. To minimize the compiled program
+ *      size, the new \c ORDERED_EP_CONFIG compile time option may be defined in the project makefile to restrict the ordering
+ *      in exchange for a smaller compiled binary size.
+ *    - The previous \c F_CLOCK symbol, required in the project makefile, has been renamed to \c F_USB. This is due to the previous name
+ *      being far too generic for use in future architecture ports, where multiple clock domains are used.
+ *
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - The Endpoint stream functions now all require a \c BytesProcessed parameter instead of the previous callback parameter.
+ *      This should be set to \c NULL to retain previous behaviour of the functions, or point to a location where the number of bytes
+ *      processed in the current transaction can be stored. If the \c BytesProcessed parameter is non \c NULL, each time the endpoint
+ *      bank becomes full and the packet is sent, the routine will exit with the new \ref ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer
+ *      error code to allow the user application to determine when to send the next chunk of data.
+ *    - The \ref CDC_Device_SendString() function now expects a null terminated string instead of an explicit length. Existing code
+ *      should use the new \ref CDC_Device_SendData() function, or remove the length parameter from the function call.
+ *    - The \c Endpoint_ResetFIFO() function has been renamed to \ref Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(), to make the API function names more
+ *      consistent. Existing applications using the old function name should simply replace it with a call to the new function name.
+ *    - The \c Endpoint_*_Byte() functions have been renamed Endpoint_*_8() to ensure they are correct across all architectures. Existing
+ *      code using these functions should replace the previous function names with the new function names.
+ *    - The \c Endpoint_*_Word() functions have been renamed Endpoint_*_16() to ensure they are correct across all architectures. Existing
+ *      code using these functions should replace the previous function names with the new function names.
+ *    - The \c Endpoint_*_DWord() functions have been renamed Endpoint_*_32() to ensure they are correct across all architectures. Existing
+ *      code using these functions should replace the previous function names with the new function names.
+ *    - The Device mode RNDIS class driver no longer stores the incoming and outgoing packets in the class driver instance; the user is
+ *      now expected to manually define a storage location for the packet data. Packets must now be sent and received manually via a call
+ *      to \ref RNDIS_Device_ReadPacket() and/or \ref RNDIS_Device_SendPacket().
+ *    - The definition of the Audio class \ref USB_Audio_Descriptor_Format_t has been altered, to remove the fixed singular
+ *      audio sample rate in the descriptor definition, and to rename the \c SampleFrequencyType to the more appropriate
+ *      \c TotalDiscreteSampleRates. Existing applications will need to add an array of \ref USB_Audio_SampleFreq_t elements
+ *      immediately following any \ref USB_Audio_Descriptor_Format_t descriptors, and insert the appropriate sampling rates
+ *      supported by the device, as well as rename the descriptor elements to match the updated element names.
+ *    - The device mode Audio class driver now requires a new user application callback, \ref CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetEndpointProperty().
+ *      Existing applications must implement this new callback, however if multiple sample rates or pitch control is not used,
+ *      this function may be hard-coded to always return false for previous behaviour to be retained.
+ *    - The \c USB_ConfigurationNumber, \c USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled and \c USB_CurrentlySelfPowered globals have been renamed to
+ *      \ref USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber, \ref USB_Device_RemoteWakeupEnabled and \ref USB_Device_CurrentlySelfPowered to clearly indicate
+ *      the USB mode they relate to. Existing applications using these variables should rename all references to the previous names.
+ *    - The \c ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN and \c ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT macros have now been replaced by \ref ENDPOINT_DIR_IN and
+ *      \ref ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT to improve code clarity.
+ *    - The \ref HID_DESCRIPTOR_JOYSTICK() macro now takes an additional (first) parameter indicating the number of axis in the joystick.
+ *
+ *  <b>Host Mode</b>
+ *    - The Pipe stream functions now all require a \c BytesProcessed parameter instead of the previous callback parameter.
+ *      This should be set to \c NULL to retain previous behaviour of the functions, or point to a location where the number of bytes
+ *      processed in the current transaction can be stored. If the BytesProcessed parameter is non \c NULL, each time the pipe
+ *      bank becomes full and the packet is sent, the routine will exit with the new \ref PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer
+ *      error code to allow the user application to determine when to send the next chunk of data.
+ *    - The \ref PRNT_Host_SendString() and \ref CDC_Host_SendString() functions now expect a null terminated string instead of an explicit
+ *      length. Existing code should use the new \ref PRNT_Host_SendData() and \ref CDC_Host_SendData() functions, or remove the
+ *      length parameter from the function call.
+ *    - The \c Pipe_ClearErrorFlags() function has been removed, as the pipe error flags are now automatically cleared when the
+ *      \ref Pipe_ClearError() function is called.
+ *    - The \c Pipe_*_Byte() functions have been renamed Pipe_*_8() to ensure they are correct across all architectures. Existing code using
+ *      these functions should replace the previous function names with the new function names.
+ *    - The \c Pipe_*_Word() functions have been renamed Pipe_*_16() to ensure they are correct across all architectures. Existing code using
+ *      these functions should replace the previous function names with the new function names.
+ *    - The \c Pipe_*_DWord() functions have been renamed Pipe_*_32() to ensure they are correct across all architectures. Existing code using
+ *      these functions should replace the previous function names with the new function names.
+ *    - The \c USB_Host_ClearPipeStall() function has been renamed to USB_Host_ClearEndpointStall(), as it operates on a full endpoint address
+ *      within the attached device and not a pipe within the host. Existing code using the old function name should update the function calls and
+ *      check for correct usage.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Migration101122 Migrating from 100807 to 101122
+ *  <b>USB Core</b>
+ *    - A new USB driver source file, \c Drivers/USB/HighLevel/EndpointStream.c now exists. This source file should be added
+ *      to all project makefiles using the USB driver of LUFA, or the makefile should be updated to use the new module source
+ *      variables.
+ *    - A new USB driver source file, \c Drivers/USB/HighLevel/PipeStream.c now exists. This source file should be added to all
+ *      project makefiles using the USB driver of LUFA, or the makefile should be updated to use the new module source variables.
+ *    - The \c EVENT_USB_InitFailure() event has been removed, as the \ref USB_Init() function will no longer fail; if not USB mode is
+ *      specified, the controller will default to UID selection mode.
+ *    - The USB mode specifier constants have been moved into a new enum and renamed. Existing projects should use the equivalent
+ *      value in the new \ref USB_Modes_t enum.
+ *    - All class driver headers are now included as part of the standard \c LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h master dispatch header, and should
+ *      no longer be included separately. Class driver module source files must still be added as a separate module in the project's
+ *      makefile if used.
+ *
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - Endpoints MUST be allocated in ascending order to ensure that bank corruption does not occur. Ensure that your user application
+ *      allocated endpoints in ascending order - or if your application uses the USB device mode class drivers, ensure that each instance's
+ *      endpoint indexes are not overlapped with other interface's endpoints.
+ *    - The signature for the \ref CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor() callback has changed, the \c void** \c const \c DescriptorAddress parameter is
+ *      now \c const \c void** \c const \c DescriptorAddress. Existing applications should update their callback signatures to match this, and
+ *      eliminate any casting of descriptor pointers to a non \c const pointer.
+ *    - The names of the class specific descriptor type defines in the USB Class drivers have changed - refer to the driver documentation
+ *      for each class driver for the new class specific descriptor type names.
+ *    - The \c ENDPOINT_DOUBLEBANK_SUPPORTED() macro is has been renamed \c ENDPOINT_BANKS_SUPPORTED() and now returns the total number of
+ *      banks supported by the given endpoint. Existing code should switch to the new naming scheme, and test that the return value of the
+ *      macro is equal to or greater than 2 to regain the previous functionality.
+ *    - The \c EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest() event is now named \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() and fires before (not after)
+ *      the internal library event handlers. Existing code should rename the event handlers in the user application to match the new event
+ *      name, and should ensure that the new execution order does not affect the application's operation.
+ *
+ *  <b>Host Mode</b>
+ *    - Pipes MUST be allocated in ascending order to ensure that bank corruption does not occur. Ensure that your user application
+ *      allocated pipes in ascending order - or if your application uses the USB host mode class drivers, ensure that each instance's
+ *      pipe indexes are not overlapped with other interface's pipes.
+ *    - The \c PRNT_Host_SendData() function has been renamed to \ref PRNT_Host_SendString(). Existing applications should simply
+ *      replace all references to the obsolete function name with the new function name.
+ *    - The names of the class specific descriptor type defines in the USB Class drivers have changed - refer to the driver documentation
+ *      for each class driver for the new class specific descriptor type names.
+ *    - The Still Image Host class' function prefix has been changed from \c SImage_ to  \c SI_, to remain consistent with the rest of the
+ *      driver's enums, type defines and constants.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Migration100807 Migrating from 100513 to 100807
+ *
+ *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>
+ *    - The Dataflash board driver stub file has changed, as dataflash functions previously located in the internal
+ *      Dataflash driver of the library have now been moved to the individual board files. Existing drivers can
+ *      copy-paste the new functions from the board Dataflash stub driver.
+ *
+ *  <b>USB Core</b>
+ *    - A new USB driver source file, \c Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Device.c now exists. This source file should be added to all project
+ *      makefiles using the USB driver of LUFA, or the makefile should be updated to use the new module source variables.
+ *    - The \c Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c source file has moved to \c Drivers/USB/HighLevel/DeviceStandardReq.c - this should
+ *      be updated in all project makefiles, or the makefile should be updated to use the new module source variables.
+ *    - The \c Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.h source file has moved to \c Drivers/USB/HighLevel/HostStandardReq.c - this should
+ *      be updated in all project makefiles, or the makefile should be updated to use the new module source variables.
+ *    - The \c Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c source file has moved to \c Drivers/LowLevel/USBController.c - this should be updated
+ *      in all project makefiles, or the makefile should be updated to use the new module source variables.
+ *
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - The \c USB_Device_IsRemoteWakeupSent() macro has been removed, as the remote wakeup request is now fully handled by the
+ *      enhanced \ref USB_Device_SendRemoteWakeup() function. Existing code may now discard any checks to \c USB_Device_IsRemoteWakeupSent().
+ *    - The \c USB_Device_IsUSBSuspended() macro has been removed, as it is obsolete. Existing code should compare \ref USB_DeviceState
+ *      to see if it the device is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Suspended state instead.
+ *    - The \ref CDC_Device_ReceiveByte() function has changed, and now returns a signed 16-bit integer, with -1 indicating no data was
+ *      received. This allows for more efficient coding, as a call to \ref CDC_Device_BytesReceived() is no longer needed if the exact
+ *      number of queued bytes received is not needed.
+ *
+ *  <b>Host Mode</b>
+ *    - The \ref CDC_Host_ReceiveByte() function has changed, and now returns a signed 16-bit integer, with -1 indicating no data was
+ *      received. This allows for more efficient coding, as a call to \ref CDC_Host_BytesReceived() is no longer needed if the exact
+ *      number of queued bytes received is not needed.
+ *    - The \ref CDC_Host_USBTask() now calls \ref CDC_Host_Flush() automatically, flushing any queued data to the attached device. Manual
+ *      flushing of the interface is no longer needed if the flushes should be in sync with calls to \ref CDC_Host_USBTask().
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Migration100513 Migrating from 100219 to 100513
+ *
+ *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>
+ *    - The \ref TWI_StartTransmission() function now takes in a timeout period, expressed in milliseconds, within which the addressed
+ *      device must respond or the function will abort.
+ *
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - The \ref USB_Init() function no longer calls \c sei() to enable global interrupts, as the user application may need
+ *      to perform other initialization before it is ready to handle global interrupts. The user application is now responsible
+ *      for enabling global interrupts before or shortly after calling \ref USB_Init() to ensure that the enumeration process
+ *      functions correctly.
+ *    - The \c USBInterrupt.c USB driver source file has been relocated from \c LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ to \c LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel.
+ *      Projects must update their makefile SRC values accordingly.
+ *    - The HID Device Class driver's function signature for the \ref CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport() function has been changed, to
+ *      allow for a new \c ReportType parameter. This new parameter must be added in all user applications using the Device mode HID Class
+ *      Driver, but may be ignored unless Host-to-Device FEATURE HID reports are used.
+ *
+ *  <b>Host Mode</b>
+ *    - The \ref USB_Init() function no longer calls \c sei() to enable global interrupts, as the user application may need
+ *      to perform other initialization before it is ready to handle global interrupts. The user application is now responsible
+ *      for enabling global interrupts before or shortly after calling \ref USB_Init() to ensure that the enumeration process
+ *      functions correctly.
+ *    - The \c USBInterrupt.c USB driver source file has been relocated from \c LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ to \c LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel.
+ *      Projects must update their makefile \c SRC values accordingly.
+ *    - The HID Host Class driver's function signature for the \ref HID_Host_SendReportByID() function has been changed, to allow for a new
+ *      ReportType parameter. Existing calls to this function should substitute \c REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Out as this parameter's value.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Migration100219 Migrating from 091223 to 100219
+ *
+ *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>
+ *    - Due to some ADC channels not being identical to their ADC MUX selection masks for single-ended conversions on some AVR models,
+ *      the ADC driver now has explicit masks for each of the standard ADC channels (see \ref Group_ADC). These masks should be used
+ *      when calling the ADC functions to ensure proper operation across all AVR models. Note that the \ref ADC_SetupChannel() function
+ *      is an exception, and should always be called with a channel number rather than a channel mask.
+ *
+ *  <b>Host Mode</b>
+ *    - The MIDI Host Class driver send and receive routines now operate on packed events, where multiple MIDI events may be
+ *      packed into a single USB packet. This means that the sending of MIDI events will now be delayed until the MIDI send
+ *      pipe bank is full. To override this new behaviour and revert to the previous behaviour, the user application may manually
+ *      flush the queued event(s) to the device by calling \ref MIDI_Host_Flush().
+ *    - The \ref Pipe_IsEndpointBound() function now takes the endpoint's direction into account, by checking if the MSB of the endpoint's address
+ *      is set to denote IN endpoints. If the previous functionality where the direction is to be discounted is required, mask the endpoint
+ *      address against the \ref PIPE_EPNUM_MASK token before calling \ref Pipe_IsEndpointBound().
+ *
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - The MIDI Device Class driver send and receive routines now operate on packed events, where multiple MIDI events may be
+ *      packed into a single USB packet. This means that the sending of MIDI events will now be delayed until the MIDI send
+ *      endpoint bank is full. To override this new behaviour and revert to the previous behaviour, the user application may manually
+ *      flush the queued event(s) to the host by calling \ref MIDI_Device_Flush().
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Migration091223 Migrating from 091122 to 091223
+ *
+ *  <b>Host Mode</b>
+ *    - The Still Image Host Class driver \ref SI_Host_USBTask() and \ref SI_Host_ConfigurePipes() functions were misnamed, and are
+ *      now named \c SImage_Host_USBTask() and \c SImage_Host_ConfigurePipes() respectively.
+ *    - The \c HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnect enum value has been renamed to \ref HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected to be in
+ *      line with the rest of the library error codes.
+ *    - The HID Parser item usages no longer contain separate minimum and maximum values, as this was a violation of the HID
+ *      specification. Instead, the values are distributed evenly across each item as its usage value, to ensure that all items
+ *      can be distinguished from one-another.
+ *
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - The \ref CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport() HID Device Class driver callback now has a new \c ReportType parameter to
+ *      indicate the report type to generate. Existing applications may simply add and ignore this additional parameter.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Migration091122 Migrating from 090924 to 091122
+ *
+ *  <b>Host Mode</b>
+ *    - The \c HID_PARSE_UsageStackOverflow HID parser error constant is now named \ref HID_PARSE_UsageListOverflow
+ *    - The \ref CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem() HID Parser callback now passes a complete \ref HID_ReportItem_t to the
+ *      user application, instead of just its attributes.
+ *    - The \c USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() function was incorrectly named and is now called \ref USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor().
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Migration090924 Migrating from 090810 to 090924
+ *
+ *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>
+ *    - The \c ADC_Off() function has been renamed to \c ADC_ShutDown() to be consistent with the rest of the library.
+ *    - The \ref SPI_Init() routine's parameters have changed, so that the clock polarity and data sampling modes can be set. See
+ *      the \ref SPI_Init() function documentation for more details
+ *    - The \ref Dataflash_Init() routine no longer initializes the SPI bus - the SPI bus should be initialized manually via a
+ *      call to \ref SPI_Init() before using the Dataflash driver
+ *
+ *  <b>Host Mode</b>
+ *    - The \c USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() function's parameters and behaviour has changed; the user is required to
+ *      preallocate the largest allowable buffer, and pass the size of the buffer to the function. This allows for a single
+ *      call to the function to retrieve, size check and validate the Configuration Descriptor rather than having the user
+ *      application perform these intermediary steps.
+ *    - The HID report parser now requires a mandatory callback in the user code, to filter only the items the application
+ *      is interested in into the processed HID report item structure to save RAM. See \ref CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem().
+ *    - The HID report parser now always parses FEATURE and always ignores constant-data items - the \c HID_ENABLE_FEATURE_PROCESSING
+ *      and \c HID_INCLUDE_CONSTANT_DATA_ITEMS compile time tokens now have no effect.
+ *    - The \c USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES compile time token has been removed - there are now separate \c USB_Descriptor_*
+ *      and \c USB_StdDescriptor_* structures for both the LUFA and standardized element naming conventions so that both may be used in
+ *      the one project. For existing projects using the standardized names, change all code to use the \c USB_StdDescriptor_* variants.
+ *
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - The \c USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES compile time token has been removed - there are now separate \c USB_Descriptor_*
+ *      and \c USB_StdDescriptor_* structures for both the LUFA and standardized element naming conventions so that both may be used in
+ *      the one project. For existing projects using the standardized names, change all code to use the \c USB_StdDescriptor_* variants.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Migration090810 Migrating from 090605 to 090810
+ *
+ *  <b>All</b>
+ *    - The "Simple Scheduler" has been <i>deprecated</i>, as it was little more than an abstracted loop and caused much confusion.
+ *      User applications using the scheduler should switch to regular loops instead. The scheduler code will be removed in a future
+ *      release.
+ *    - The "Dynamic Memory Block Allocator" has been removed, as it was unused in (and unrelated to) the LUFA library and never
+ *      used in user applications.
+ *
+ *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>
+ *    - The \c ATTR_NOINLINE function attribute macro has been renamed to \ref ATTR_NO_INLINE to be in line with the rest of the function attribute
+ *      macro names.
+ *
+ *  <b>Library Demos</b>
+ *    - Most demos now have a corresponding Class Driver implementation, which uses the new internal library class drivers for the standard
+ *      USB classes. This allows for more rapid device and host development, and so should be used in preference to the low level APIs where
+ *      possible so that fixes to the class drivers propagate to all applications which use them automatically with each new LUFA release.
+ *
+ *  <b>Host Mode</b>
+ *    - The \c HIDParser.c module has moved from \c LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ to \c LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/.
+ *    - The \c USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() function now requires the desired configuration index within the device as its first
+ *      parameter, to add support for multi-configuration devices. Existing code should use a configuration index of 1 to indicate the
+ *      first configuration descriptor within the device.
+ *    - The non-standard "Ready" host state has been removed. Existing \ref HOST_STATE_Configured code should be moved to the end of
+ *      the existing \ref HOST_STATE_Addressed state, and the existing HOST_STATE_Ready state code should be moved to the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured
+ *      state.
+ *    - The \c USB_IsConnected global has been removed, as it is too vague for general use. Test \ref USB_HostState explicitly to ensure the host is
+ *      in the desired state instead.
+ *    - The USB event names have been changed and their firing conditions changed to properly separate out Host mode events from Device mode
+ *      events. See the \ref Group_Events page for details on the new event names and firing conditions.
+ *
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - The \ref CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor() function now takes an extra parameter to specify the descriptor's memory space so that
+ *      descriptors in mixed memory spaces can be used. The previous functionality can be returned by defining the \c USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+ *      token in the project makefile to fix all descriptors into FLASH space and remove the extra function parameter.
+ *    - The \c USB_IsSuspended global has been removed - test \ref USB_DeviceState against \ref DEVICE_STATE_Suspended instead.
+ *    - The \c USB_IsConnected global has been removed, as it is too vague for general use. Test \ref USB_DeviceState explicitly to ensure the device
+ *      is in the desired state instead.
+ *    - The VBUS events have been removed, as they are already exposed to the user via the \c USB_Connect and \c USB_Disconnect events.
+ *    - The USB event names have been changed and their firing conditions changed to properly separate out Host mode events from Device mode
+ *      events. See the \ref Group_Events page for details on the new event names and firing conditions.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Migration090605 Migrating from 090510 to 090605
+ *
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - Support for non-control data endpoint interrupts has been dropped due to many issues in the implementation. All existing
+ *      projects using interrupts on non-control endpoints should switch to polling. For control interrupts, the library can
+ *      manage the control endpoint via interrupts automatically by compiling with the \c INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT token defined.
+ *    - The \c DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS() macro has been removed. User applications should use normal casts to obtain a descriptor's memory
+ *      address.
+ *    - The library events system has been rewritten, so that all macros have been removed to allow for clearer user code. See
+ *      \ref Group_Events for new API details.
+ *    - The \c STREAM_CALLBACK() macro has been removed. User applications should replace all instances of the macro with regular
+ *      function signatures of a function accepting no arguments and returning a \c uint8_t value.
+ *    - The \c Event_DeviceError() event no longer exists, as its sole caller (unlinked \c USB_GetDescriptor() function) now produces a
+ *      compilation error rather than a runtime error. The \c StdDescriptors.c file no longer exists as a result, and should be removed
+ *      from project makefiles.
+ *    - The \c USB_GetDescriptor() function has been renamed to \ref CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor() to be in line with the new \c CALLBACK_
+ *      function prefixes for functions which <i>must</i> be implemented in the user application.
+ *
+ *  <b>Host Mode</b>
+ *    - Support for non-control data pipe interrupts has been dropped due to many issues in the implementation. All existing
+ *      projects using interrupts on non-control pipes should switch to polling.
+ *    - The library events system has been rewritten, so that all macros have been removed to allow for clearer user code. See
+ *      \ref Group_Events for new API details.
+ *    - The \c STREAM_CALLBACK() macro has been removed. User applications should replace all instances of the macro with regular
+ *      function signatures of a function accepting no arguments and returning a \c uint8_t value.
+ *    - The \c DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR() macro has been removed. User applications should replace all instances of the macro with
+ *      regular function signatures of a function accepting a void pointer to the descriptor to test, and returning a \c uint8_t value.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Migration090510 Migrating from 090401 to 090510
+ *
+ *  <b>All</b>
+ *    - The \c ButtLoadTag.h header has been removed, as it was never used for its intended purpose. Projects should either remove all
+ *      \c BUTTLOADTAG() elements, or download and extract \c ButtLoadTag.h header from the ButtLoad project.
+ *    - The \c Drivers/AT90USBXXX/ directory has been renamed to \c Drivers/Peripheral/.
+ *    - The \c Serial_Stream driver has been renamed to \c SerialStream to remain consistent with the rest of the library naming scheme.
+ *    - The HWB driver has changed to the \c Buttons driver. See the board Buttons driver documentation for the new API.
+ *
+ *  <b>Dual Role Mode</b>
+ *    - The \c USB_PowerOnFail event has been renamed to \c USB_InitFailure.
+ *    - The functions in \c OTG.h have been renamed to remain more consistent with the library API. See the functions in \c OTG.h for more
+ *      details.
+ *
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - The \c Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank() macro has been removed, and is now replaced with the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN(), \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT()
+ *      macros. See \c Endpoint.h documentation for more details on the new endpoint management macros.
+ *    - The \c Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed() macro has been renamed to \ref Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed() to be more consistent with the rest of
+ *      the API naming scheme.
+ *    - The \c Endpoint_IsSetupINReady() and \c Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived() macros have been renamed to \ref Endpoint_IsINReady() and
+ *      \ref Endpoint_IsOUTReceived() respectively.
+ *    - The \c Endpoint_IsSetupReceived() macro has been renamed to \ref Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived().
+ *    - The \c Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived() macro has been renamed to \ref Endpoint_ClearSETUP().
+ *    - All endpoint read/write/discard aliases which did not have an explicitly endianness specifier (such as \c Endpoint_Read_Word()) have
+ *      been removed for clarity. Existing projects should use the \c _LE suffix on such calls to use the explicit Little Endian versions.
+ *    - The \c USB_UnhandledControlPacket event no longer has any parameters. User code should no longer attempt to read in the remainder of
+ *      the Control Request header as all Control Request header data is now preloaded by the library and made available in the
+ *      USB_ControlRequest structure.
+ *    - The \c FEATURELESS_CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE token has been renamed to \c CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE.
+ *    - The \c STATIC_ENDPOINT_CONFIGURATION is no longer applicable as the library will apply this optimization when appropriate automatically.
+ *    - The values of the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t and \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enums have had the \c ERROR_ portion
+ *      of their names removed.
+ *
+ *  <b>Host Mode</b>
+ *    - The \ref USB_Host_SendControlRequest() function no longer automatically selects the Control pipe (pipe 0) to allow it to be used on
+ *      other control type pipes. Care should be taken to ensure that the Control pipe is always selected before the function is called
+ *      in existing projects where the Control pipe is to be operated on.
+ *    - The USB Host management task now saves and restores the currently selected pipe before and after the task runs. Projects no longer
+ *      need to manage this manually when calling the USB management task.
+ *    - The \c Pipe_ClearCurrentBank() macro has been removed, and is now replaced with the Pipe_ClearIN(), Pipe_ClearOUT() macros. See
+ *      Pipe.h documentation for more details on the new pipe management macros.
+ *    - The \c Pipe_ReadWriteAllowed() macro has been renamed to \ref Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed() to be more consistent with the rest of the API
+ *      naming scheme.
+ *    - The \c Pipe_IsSetupINReceived() and \c Pipe_IsOutReady() macros have been renamed to \ref Pipe_IsINReceived() and \ref Pipe_IsOUTReady()
+ *      respectively.
+ *    - The new \ref Pipe_ClearSETUP() macro should be used to send SETUP transactions, rather than the previous \c Pipe_ClearSetupOUT() macro.
+ *    - The \c Pipe_IsSetupSent() macro has been renamed to \ref Pipe_IsSETUPSent().
+ *    - The \c Pipe_ClearSetupSent() macro is no longer applicable and should be removed.
+ *    - All pipe read/write/discard aliases which did not have an explicitly endianness specifier (such as \c Pipe_Read_Word()) have
+ *      been removed for clarity. Existing projects should use the \c _LE suffix on such calls to use the explicit Little Endian versions.
+ *    - The \c Host_IsResetBusDone() macro has been renamed to \c Host_IsBusResetComplete().
+ *    - The \c Pipe_Ignore_Word() and \c Pipe_Ignore_DWord() functions have been renamed to \c Pipe_Discard_Word() and \c Pipe_Discard_DWord()
+ *      to remain consistent with the rest of the pipe API.
+ *    - It is no longer needed to manually include the headers from \c LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class, as they are now included along with the rest
+ *      of the USB headers when \c LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h is included.
+ *    - Functions in the \c ConfigDescriptor.h header file no longer have \c Host_ as part of their names.
+ *    - The \c ProcessHIDReport() has been renamed to \ref USB_ProcessHIDReport(), \c GetReportItemInfo() has been renamed to \ref USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo()
+ *      and \c SetReportItemInfo() has been renamed to \ref USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo().
+ *    - The values of the \ref DSearch_Return_ErrorCodes_t and \ref DSearch_Comp_Return_ErrorCodes_t enums have had their respective \c Descriptor_Search
+ *      and \c Descriptor_Search_Comp prefixes changed to all caps.
+ *    - The \c USB_HostRequest global has been renamed to \ref USB_ControlRequest, and is used in Device mode also. The \c USB_Host_Request_Header_t
+ *      structure type has been renamed to \ref USB_Request_Header_t.
+ *    - The values of the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum have had the \c ERROR_ portion of their names removed.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Migration090401 Migrating from 090209 to 090401
+ *
+ *  <b>All</b>
+ *    - LUFA projects must now give the raw input clock frequency (before any prescaling) as a compile time constant \c F_USB,
+ *      defined in the project makefile and passed to the compiler via the -D switch.
+ *    - The makefile EEPROM programming targets for FLIP and dfu-programmer no longer program in the FLASH data in addition to the
+ *      EEPROM data into the device. If both are to be programmed, both the EEPROM and FLASH programming targets must be called.
+ *    - As the avr-libc macro has been corrected in recent avr-libc distributions, the \c SetSystemClockPrescaler() macro has been removed.
+ *      Include \c <avr/power.h> and call \c clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); instead on recent avr-libc distributions.
+ *
+ *  <b>Library Demos</b>
+ *    - The USBtoSerial demo now discards all data when not connected to a host, rather than buffering it for later transmission.
+ *
+ *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>
+ *    - The \c ATTR_ALWAYSINLINE function attribute macro has been renamed to \ref ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE.
+ *    - Custom board Dataflash drivers now require the implementation of \ref Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage() and \ref Dataflash_SendAddressBytes().
+ *
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - The \c NO_CLEARSET_FEATURE_REQUEST compile time token has been renamed to \c FEATURELESS_CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE, and its function expanded
+ *      to also remove parts of the Get Status chapter 9 request to further reduce code usage. On all applications currently using the
+ *      \c NO_CLEARSET_FEATURE_REQUEST compile time token, it can be replaced with the \c FEATURELESS_CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE token with no further
+ *      modifications required.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Migration090209 Migrating from 081217 to 090209
+ *
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - The \c ENDPOINT_MAX_ENDPOINTS constant has been renamed to the more appropriate name of \c ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS.
+ *    - The \c USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS stream timeout default period has been extended to 100ms. This can be overridden in the user
+ *      makefile if desired to restore the previous 50ms timeout.
+ *
+ *  <b>Host Mode</b>
+ *    - The \c PIPE_MAX_ENDPOINTS constant has been renamed to the more appropriate name of \c PIPE_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS.
+ *    - The \c USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS stream timeout default period has been extended to 100ms. This can be overridden in the user
+ *      makefile if desired to restore the previous 50ms timeout.
+ *    - The \c USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event now contains a second \c SubErrorCode parameter, giving the error code of the function
+ *      which failed.
+ *    - The \c HID_PARSE_Sucessful enum member constant name has been corrected to \ref HID_PARSE_Successful.
+ *
+ *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>
+ *    - The previous \c SPI_SendByte() functionality is now located in \ref SPI_TransferByte(). \ref SPI_SendByte() now discards the return byte
+ *      for speed, to compliment the new \ref SPI_ReceiveByte() function. If bidirectional SPI transfers are required, calls to \ref SPI_SendByte()
+ *      should be changed to \ref SPI_TransferByte().
+ *    - The serial driver now sets the Tx line as an output explicitly, and enables the pull-up of the Rx line.
+ *    - The \ref Serial_Init() and \c SerialStream_Init() functions now take a second \c DoubleSpeed parameter, which indicates if the USART
+ *      should be initialized in double speed mode - useful in some circumstances for attaining baud rates not usually possible at the given AVR
+ *      clock speed.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Migration171208 Migrating from V1.5.3 to 081217
+ *
+ *  <b>All</b>
+ *    - The MyUSB project name has been changed to LUFA (Lightweight Framework for USB AVRs). All references to MyUSB, including macro names,
+ *      have been changed to LUFA.
+ *
+ *  <b>Library Demos</b>
+ *    - The ReconfigureUSART() routine in the USBtoSerial demo was not being called after new line encoding
+ *      parameters were set by the host. Projects built on the USBtoSerial code should update to the latest version.
+ *    - The HID Parser now supports multiple report (on a single endpoint) HID devices. The MouseHostWithParser and
+ *      KeyboardHostWithPaser demos use the updated API functions to function correctly on such devices. Projects
+ *      built on either "WithParser" demo should update to the latest code.
+ *    - The RNDIS demo TCP stack has been modified so that connections can be properly closed. It is still not
+ *      recommended that the MyUSB RNDIS demo TCP/IP stack be used for anything other than demonstration purposes,
+ *      as it is neither a full nor a standards compliant implementation.
+ *
+ *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>
+ *    - The Serial_IsCharReceived() macro has been changed to the correct spelling of Serial_IsCharReceived() in Serial.h.
+ *
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - The MANUAL_PLL_CONTROL compile time token has been removed, and replaced with a USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL mask
+ *      to be used in the Options parameter of the USB_Init() function.
+ *    - Calling USB_Init() now forces a complete USB interface reset and enumeration, even if the USB interface is
+ *      currently initialized.
+ *    - Interrupts are now disabled when processing control requests, to avoid problems with interrupts causing the library
+ *      or user request processing code to exceed the strict USB timing requirements on control transfers.
+ *    - The USB Reset event now resets and disables all device endpoints. If user code depends on endpoints remaining configured
+ *      after a Reset event, it should be altered to explicitly re-initialize all user endpoints.
+ *    - The prototype for the GetDescriptor function has been changed, as the return value was redundant. The function now
+ *      returns the size of the descriptor, rather than passing it back via a parameter, or returns NO_DESCRIPTOR if the specified
+ *      descriptor does not exist.
+ *    - The NO_DESCRIPTOR_STRING macro has been renamed NO_DESCRIPTOR, and is now also used as a possible return value for the
+ *      GetDescriptor function.
+ *
+ *  <b>Host Mode</b>
+ *    - The MANUAL_PLL_CONTROL compile time token has been removed, and replaced with a USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL mask
+ *      to be used in the Options parameter of the USB_Init() function.
+ *    - The HID report parser now supports multiple Report IDs. The HID report parser GetReportItemInfo() and
+ *      SetReportItemInfo() routines now return a boolean, set if the requested report item was located in the
+ *      current report. If sending a report to a multi-report device, the first byte of the report is automatically
+ *      set to the report ID of the given report item.
+ *    - Calling USB_Init() now forces a complete USB interface reset and enumeration, even if the USB interface is
+ *      currently initialized.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Migration152 Migrating from V1.5.2 to V1.5.3
+ *
+ *  <b>Library Demos</b>
+ *    - Previously, all demos contained a serial number string descriptor, filled with all zeros. A serial number
+ *      string is required in Mass Storage devices, or devices which are to retain settings when moved between
+ *      ports on a machine. As people were not changing the serial number value, this was causing conflicts and so
+ *      the serial number descriptor has been removed from all but the Mass Storage demo, which requires it.
+ *    - The AudioOut and AudioIn demos did not previously silence their endpoints when the host has deactivated
+ *      them. Projects built upon either demo should upgrade to the latest code.
+ *    - The FEATURE_ENDPOINT macro has been renamed FEATURE_ENDPOINT_HALT, and is now correctly documented.
+ *    - The MassStoreHost demo contained errors which caused it to lock up randomly on certain devices. Projects built
+ *      on the MassStoreDemo code should update to the latest version.
+ *    - The Interrupt type endpoint in the CDC based demos previously had a polling interval of 0x02, which caused
+ *      problems on some Linux systems. This has been changed to 0xFF, projects built on the CDC demos should upgrade
+ *      to the latest code.
+ *    - The HID keyboard and mouse demos were not previously boot mode compatible. To enable boot mode support, projects
+ *      built on the keyboard or mouse demos (or derivatives) should upgrade to the latest code.
+ *    - The Mass Storage demo was not previously standards compliant. Projects built on the Mass Storage demo should
+ *      upgrade to the latest code.
+ *    - The USART was not being reconfigured after the host sent new encoding settings in the USBtoSerial demo. This was
+ *      previously discovered and fixed, but the change was lost. Projects built on the USBtoSerial demo should update
+ *      to the latest code.
+ *
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - The endpoint non-control stream functions now have a default timeout of 50ms between packets in the stream.
+ *      If this timeout is exceeded, the function returns the new ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_ERROR_Timeout error value. The
+ *      timeout value can be overridden by defining the USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS in the project makefile to the desired
+ *      timeout duration in ms.
+ *    - Rather than returning fixed values, the flags indicating if the device has Remote Wakeup currently enabled
+ *      and/or is self-powered are now accessed and set through the new USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled and
+ *      USB_CurrentlySelfPowered macros. See the DevChapter9.h documentation for more details.
+ *    - All endpoint stream functions now require an extra Callback function parameter. Existing code may be updated
+ *      to either supply NO_STREAM_CALLBACK as the extra parameter, or disable stream callbacks altogether by passing
+ *      the token NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS to the compiler using the -D switch.
+ *
+ *  <b>Host Mode</b>
+ *    - The pipe non-control stream functions now have a default timeout of 50ms between packets in the stream.
+ *      If this timeout is exceeded, the function returns the new PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_Timeout error value. The
+ *      timeout value can be overridden by defining the USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS in the project makefile to the desired
+ *      timeout duration in ms.
+ *    - CollectionPath_t has been renamed to HID_CollectionPath_t to be more in line with the other HID parser structures.
+ *    - All pipe stream functions now require an extra Callback function parameter. Existing code may be updated
+ *      to either supply NO_STREAM_CALLBACK as the extra parameter, or disable stream callbacks altogether by passing
+ *      the token NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS to the compiler using the -D switch.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Migration151 Migrating from V1.5.1 to V1.5.2
+ *
+ *  <b>Library Demos</b>
+ *    - The RNDIS demo application has been updated so that it is functional on Linux under earlier implementations
+ *      of the RNDIS specification, which had non-standard behaviour. Projects built upon the demo should upgrade
+ *      to the latest code.
+ *    - The DFU class bootloader has had several bugs corrected in this release. It is recommended that where
+ *      possible any existing devices upgrade to the latest bootloader code.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Migration150 Migrating from V1.5.0 to V1.5.1
+ *
+ *  <b>Library Demos</b>
+ *    - The USBtoSerial demo was broken in the 1.5.0 release, due to incorrect register polling in place of the
+ *      global "Transmitting" flag. The change has been reverted in this release. Projects built upon the demo
+ *      should upgrade to the latest code.
+ *    - The HID class demos did not implement the mandatory GetReport HID class request. Projects built upon the HID
+ *      demos should upgrade to the latest code.
+ *    - The HID class demos incorrectly reported themselves as boot-protocol enabled HID devices in their descriptors.
+ *      Projects built upon the HID demos should upgrade to the latest code.
+ *    - The MIDI device demo had incorrect AudioStreaming interface descriptors. Projects built upon the MIDI demo
+ *      should upgrade to the latest code.
+ *    - The AudioOut demo did not correctly tristate the speaker pins when USB was disconnected, wasting power.
+ *      Projects built upon the AudioOut demo should upgrade to the latest code.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Migration141 Migrating from V1.4.1 to V1.5.0
+ *
+ *  <b>Library Demos</b>
+ *    - Previous versions of the library demos had incorrectly encoded BCD version numbers in the descriptors. To
+ *      avoid such mistakes in the future, the VERSION_BCD macro has been added to StdDescriptors.h. Existing
+ *      projects should at least manually correct the BCD version numbers, or preferably update the descriptors to
+ *      encode the version number in BCD format using the new macro.
+ *    - The mandatory GetReport class-specific request was accidentally omitted from previous versions of the demos
+ *      based on the Human Interface Device (HID) class. This has been corrected, and any user projects based on the
+ *      HID demos should also be updated accordingly.
+ *    - The CDC demos now correctly send an empty packet directly after a full packet, to end the transmission.
+ *      Failure to do this on projects which always or frequently send full packets will cause buffering issues on
+ *      the host OS. All CDC user projects are advised to update their transmission routines in the same manner as
+ *      the library CDC demos.
+ *    - The previous interrupt-driven Endpoint/Pipe demos did not properly save and restore the currently selected
+ *      Endpoint/Pipe when the ISR fired. This has been corrected - user projects based on the interrupt driven
+ *      demos should also update to properly save and restore the selected Endpoint/Pipe.
+ *
+ *  <b>Non-USB Library Components</b>
+ *    - The Atomic.h and ISRMacro.h header files in MyUSB/Common have been removed, as the library is now only
+ *      compatible with avr-libc library versions newer than the time before the functionality of the deleted
+ *      headers was available.
+ *
+ *  <b>Device Mode</b>
+ *    - The GetDescriptor function (see StdDescriptors.h) now has a new prototype, with altered parameter names and
+ *      functions. Existing projects will need to update the GetDescriptor implementation to reflect the new API.
+ *      The previously split Type and Index parameters are now passed as the original wValue parameter to the
+ *      function, to make way for the USB specification wIndex parameter which is <i>not</i> the same as the
+ *      previous Index parameter.
+ *    - The USB_UnhandledControlPacket event (see Events.h) now has new parameter names, to be in line with the
+ *      official USB specification. Existing code will need to be altered to use the new parameter names.
+ *    - The USB_CreateEndpoints event (see Events.h) has been renamed to USB_ConfigurationChanged, which is more
+ *      appropriate. It fires in an identical manner to the previously named event, thus the only change to be made
+ *      is the event name itself in the user project.
+ *    - The USB_Descriptor_Language_t structure no longer exists in StdDescriptors.h, as this was a
+ *      pseudo-descriptor modeled on the string descriptor. It is replaced by the true USB_Descriptor_String_t type
+ *      descriptor as indicated in the USB specification, thus all device code must be updated accordingly.
+ *    - The names of several Endpoint macros have been changed to be more consistent with the rest of the library,
+ *      with no implementation changes. This means that existing code can be altered to use the new macro names
+ *      with no other considerations required. See Endpoint.h for the new macro names.
+ *    - The previous version of the MassStorage demo had an incorrect value in the SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t
+ *      structure named SenseData in SCSI.c which caused some problems with some hosts. User projects based on this
+ *      demo should correct the structure value to maintain compatibility across multiple OS platforms.
+ *    - By default, the descriptor structures use the official USB specification names for the elements. Previous
+ *      versions of the library used non-standard (but more verbose) names, which are still usable in the current
+ *      and future releases when the correct compile time option is enabled. See the StdDescriptors.h file
+ *      documentation for more details.
+ *
+ *  <b>Host Mode</b>
+ *    - The USB_Host_Request_Header_t structure in HostChapter9.h (used for issuing control requests) has had its
+ *      members renamed to the official USB specification names for requests. Existing code will need to be updated
+ *      to use the new names.
+ *    - The names of several Pipe macros have been changed to be more consistent with the rest of the library,
+ *      with no implementation changes. This means that existing code can be altered to use the new macro names
+ *      with no other considerations required. See Pipe.h for the new macro names.
+ *    - By default, the descriptor structures use the official USB specification names for the elements. Previous
+ *      versions of the library used non-standard (but more verbose) names, which are still usable in the current
+ *      and future releases when the correct compile time option is enabled. See the StdDescriptors.h file
+ *      documentation for more details.
+ *    - The names of the macros in Host.h for controlling the SOF generation have been renamed, see the Host.h
+ *      module documentation for the new macro names.
+ *
+ *  <b>Dual Role Mode</b>
+ *    - The OTG.h header file has been corrected so that the macros now perform their stated functions. Any existing
+ *      projects using custom headers to fix the broken OTG header should now be altered to once again use the OTG
+ *      header inside the library.
+ *    - The USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event (see Events.h) now also fires in Device mode, when the host has
+ *      finished enumerating the device. Projects relying on the event only firing in Host mode should be updated
+ *      so that the event action only occurs when the USB_Mode global is set to USB_MODE_HOST.
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/OSDrivers.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/OSDrivers.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4823c5b08
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/OSDrivers.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \page Page_OSDrivers Operating System Drivers
+ *
+ *  Most of the USB classes supported by LUFA are also supported natively in
+ *  most operating systems, without extra drivers being required. However, in
+ *  some cases, a driver file is required in order for the device to enumerate
+ *  and function correctly.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_OSClassSupport Operating System USB Class Support
+ *  The table below lists the supported LUFA USB classes, and their associated
+ *  <i>native</i> support on modern operating systems.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <th width="200px">USB Class</th>
+ *   <th width="150px">Android</th>
+ *   <th width="150px">Windows</th>
+ *   <th width="150px">Linux</th>
+ *   <th width="150px">OS X</th>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>Android Open Accessory</td>
+ *   <td>2.3.4+</td>
+ *   <td>N/A</td>
+ *   <td>N/A</td>
+ *   <td>N/A</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>Audio 1.0</td>
+ *   <td>N/A</td>
+ *   <td>XP+</td>
+ *   <td>2.6.?+</td>
+ *   <td>10.?+</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>CDC-ACM</td>
+ *   <td>N/A</td>
+ *   <td>XP+</td>
+ *   <td>2.6.?+</td>
+ *   <td>10.?+</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>HID</td>
+ *   <td>3.?+</td>
+ *   <td>XP+</td>
+ *   <td>2.6.?+</td>
+ *   <td>10.?+</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>MIDI</td>
+ *   <td>N/A</td>
+ *   <td>XP+</td>
+ *   <td>2.6.?+</td>
+ *   <td>10.?+</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>Mass Storage</td>
+ *   <td>N/A</td>
+ *   <td>XP+</td>
+ *   <td>2.6.?+</td>
+ *   <td>10.?+</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>Printer</td>
+ *   <td>N/A</td>
+ *   <td>XP+</td>
+ *   <td>2.6.?+</td>
+ *   <td>10.?+</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>RNDIS</td>
+ *   <td>N/A</td>
+ *   <td>XP+</td>
+ *   <td>2.6.?+</td>
+ *   <td>N/A</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>Still Image</td>
+ *   <td>N/A</td>
+ *   <td>XP+</td>
+ *   <td>2.6.?+</td>
+ *   <td>10.?+</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_WinINFTemplates Windows INF Drivers
+ *  Windows uses INF driver files to associate a USB device of a specific class,
+ *  VID/PID ID pair, Windows Compatibility ID or other characteristic to a kernel
+ *  driver. In most cases these files are build into the operating system, and
+ *  no special user action or driver files are required for a device using a
+ *  standard USB class to enumerate. However, for some classes, a specific INF
+ *  driver must be created and given to the operating system for the device to
+ *  enumerate.
+ *
+ *  Those USB classes requiring a custom INF driver file in Windows are listed
+ *  below, along with a basic INF template for each class.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_WinINF_CDC Windows CDC INF Template
+ *  This template is required for all CDC-ACM devices on Windows XP or newer.
+ *  \verbinclude "WindowsINF/LUFA CDC-ACM.inf"
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_WinINF_RNDIS Windows RNDIS INF Template
+ *  This template is required for all RNDIS devices on Windows XP or newer.
+ *  \verbinclude "WindowsINF/LUFA RNDIS.inf"
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/ProgrammingApps.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/ProgrammingApps.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4759ac87a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/ProgrammingApps.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \page Page_ProgrammingApps Programming an Application into a USB AVR
+ *
+ *  Once you have built an application, you will need a way to program in the resulting ".HEX" file (and, if your
+ *  application uses EEPROM variables with initial values, also a ".EEP" file) into your USB AVR. Normally, the
+ *  reprogramming of an AVR device must be performed using a special piece of programming hardware, through one of the
+ *  supported AVR programming protocols - ISP, HVSP, HVPP, JTAG, dW or PDI. This can be done through a custom programmer,
+ *  a third party programmer, or an official Atmel AVR tool - for more information, see the <a>atmel.com</a> website.
+ *
+ *  Alternatively, you can use the bootloader. From the Atmel factory, each USB AVR comes preloaded with the Atmel
+ *  DFU (Device Firmware Update) class bootloader, a small piece of AVR firmware which allows the remainder of the
+ *  AVR to be programmed through a non-standard interface such as the serial USART port, SPI, or (in this case) USB.
+ *  Bootloaders have the advantage of not requiring any special hardware for programming, and cannot usually be erased
+ *  or broken without an external programming device. They have disadvantages however; they cannot change the fuses of
+ *  the AVR (special configuration settings that control the operation of the chip itself) and a small portion of the
+ *  AVR's FLASH program memory must be reserved to contain the bootloader firmware, and thus cannot be used by the
+ *  loaded application.
+ *
+ *  If you wish to use the DFU bootloader to program in your application, refer to your DFU programmer's documentation.
+ *  Atmel provides a free utility called FLIP which is USB AVR compatible, and an open source (Linux compatible)
+ *  alternative exists called "dfu-programmer".
+ *
+ *  \see \ref Page_BuildModule_DFU for information on the LUFA build system DFU module, for automatic DFU bootloader
+ *  programming makefile targets.
+ */
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/SoftwareBootloaderJump.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/SoftwareBootloaderJump.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0b69612b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/SoftwareBootloaderJump.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/**
+ *  \page Page_SoftwareBootloaderStart Entering the Bootloader via Software
+ *
+ *  A common requirement of many applications is the ability to jump to the programmed bootloader of a chip
+ *  on demand, via the code's firmware (i.e. not as a result of any physical user interaction with the
+ *  hardware). This might be required because the device does not have any physical user input, or simply
+ *  just to streamline the device upgrade process on the host PC.
+ *
+ *  The following C code snippets may be used to enter the bootloader upon request by the user application.
+ *  By using the watchdog to physically reset the controller, it is ensured that all system hardware is
+ *  completely reset to their defaults before the bootloader is run. This is important; since bootloaders
+ *  are written to occupy a very limited space, they usually make assumptions about the register states based
+ *  on the default values after a hard-reset of the chip.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_SoftareBootAVR8 AVR8 Architecture
+ *  The following software bootloader jump code is written for the AVR8 architecture.
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *  #include <avr/wdt.h>
+ *  #include <avr/io.h>
+ *  #include <util/delay.h>
+ *
+ *  #include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+ *  #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+ *
+ *  uint32_t Boot_Key ATTR_NO_INIT;
+ *
+ *  #define MAGIC_BOOT_KEY            0xDC42ACCA
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_START_ADDRESS  ((FLASH_SIZE_BYTES - BOOTLOADER_SEC_SIZE_BYTES) >> 1)
+ *
+ *  void Bootloader_Jump_Check(void) ATTR_INIT_SECTION(3);
+ *  void Bootloader_Jump_Check(void)
+ *  {
+ *      // If the reset source was the bootloader and the key is correct, clear it and jump to the bootloader
+ *      if ((MCUSR & (1 << WDRF)) && (Boot_Key == MAGIC_BOOT_KEY))
+ *      {
+ *          Boot_Key = 0;
+ *          ((void (*)(void))BOOTLOADER_START_ADDRESS)();
+ *      }
+ *  }
+ *
+ *  void Jump_To_Bootloader(void)
+ *  {
+ *      // If USB is used, detach from the bus and reset it
+ *      USB_Disable();
+ *
+ *      // Disable all interrupts
+ *      cli();
+ *
+ *      // Wait two seconds for the USB detachment to register on the host
+ *      Delay_MS(2000);
+ *
+ *      // Set the bootloader key to the magic value and force a reset
+ *      Boot_Key = MAGIC_BOOT_KEY;
+ *      wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS);
+ *      for (;;);
+ *  }
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  Note that the bootloader magic key can be any arbitrary value. The <em>FLASH_SIZE_BYTES</em> and
+ *  <em>BOOTLOADER_SEC_SIZE_BYTES</em> tokens should be replaced with the total flash size of the AVR
+ *  in bytes, and the allocated size of the bootloader section for the target AVR.
+ *
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Style/Footer.htm b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Style/Footer.htm
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a72c5bdd2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Style/Footer.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+<!--BEGIN GENERATE_TREEVIEW-->
+	<div id="nav-path" class="navpath"><!-- id is needed for treeview function! -->
+		<ul>
+			<li class="footer" style="float:left !important;">
+				$generatedby
+				<a href="http://www.doxygen.org/index.html">
+					<img class="footer" src="$relpath$doxygen.png" alt="doxygen"/>
+				</a>
+				$doxygenversion
+			</li>
+
+			<li class="footer">
+				<a href="http://www.lufa-lib.org" title="LUFA Project Page">LUFA Project Page</a> | <a href="http://www.lufa-lib.org/support" title="LUFA Support List">Support Mailing List</a> | <a href="http://www.lufa-lib.org/donate" title="Donate to Support LUFA">Donate</a> | <a href="http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com" title="Four Walled Cubicle Website">Four Walled Cubicle</a> - LUFA, the Lightweight USB Framework for AVRs
+			</li>
+		</ul>
+	</div>
+<!--END GENERATE_TREEVIEW-->
+<!--BEGIN !GENERATE_TREEVIEW-->
+		<hr class="footer"/>
+		<div class="footer">
+			<span style="float: left;">
+				$generatedby
+				<a href="http://www.doxygen.org/index.html">
+					<img class="footer" src="$relpath$doxygen.png" alt="doxygen"/>
+				</a>
+				$doxygenversion
+			</span>
+
+			<span style="margin-right: 20px; float: right;">
+				<a href="http://www.lufa-lib.org" title="LUFA Project Page">LUFA Project Page</a> | <a href="http://www.lufa-lib.org/support" title="LUFA Support List">Support Mailing List</a> | <a href="http://www.lufa-lib.org/donate" title="Donate to Support LUFA">Donate</a> | <a href="http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com" title="Four Walled Cubicle Website">Four Walled Cubicle</a> - LUFA, the Lightweight USB Framework for AVRs
+			</span>
+		</div>
+<!--END !GENERATE_TREEVIEW-->
+	</body>
+</html>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Style/Style.css b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Style/Style.css
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..933215546
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/Style/Style.css
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/* ============================= */
+/*    Page Header Formattings    */
+/* ============================= */
+#titlearea {
+	background-color:#E1E7F4;
+	background-image:url('nav_f.png');
+	background-repeat:repeat-x;
+	color:#20335A;
+	font-weight:bold;
+	text-shadow:0 1px 1px rgba(255, 255, 255, 0.9);
+}
+
+#projectlogo {
+	padding-left: 10px;
+}
+
+/* ============================= */
+/*    General Text Formattings   */
+/* ============================= */
+body,table,div,p,dl {
+	font-family:Lucida Grande, Verdana, Geneva, Arial, sans-serif;
+	font-size:13px;
+	line-height:1.3;
+}
+
+div.header, div.contents p {
+	padding-left:12px;
+}
+
+/* ============================= */
+/* API Documentation Formattings */
+/* ============================= */
+div.contents table.memberdecls, .paramname {
+	font-family:Consolas, Monaco, courier, sans-serif;
+	font-size:105%;
+	padding-right:20px;
+}
+
+/* ============================= */
+/*    HTML Heading Formattings   */
+/* ============================= */
+h1, h2, h3, h4 {
+	font-family:Lucida Grande, Verdana, Geneva, Arial, sans-serif;
+}
+
+h1 {
+	font-size:25px;
+	margin-bottom:10px;
+}
+
+h2 {
+	color:#42657B;
+	font-size:17px;
+}
+
+h3 {
+	font-size:15px;
+}
+
+h4 {
+	font-size:13px;
+}
+
+/* ============================= */
+/*    Code Snippet Formattings   */
+/* ============================= */
+span.keyword {
+	color:#008000;
+}
+
+span.keywordtype {
+	color:#604020;
+}
+
+span.keywordflow {
+	color:#e08000;
+}
+
+span.comment {
+	color:#008000;
+}
+
+span.preprocessor {
+	color:#806020;
+}
+
+span.stringliteral {
+	color:#002080;
+}
+
+span.charliteral {
+	color:#008080;
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/VIDAndPIDValues.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/VIDAndPIDValues.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8b1722044
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/VIDAndPIDValues.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,199 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \page Page_VIDPID VID and PID values
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_VIDPID_Allocations VID and PID Allocations
+ *  The LUFA library uses VID/PID combinations generously donated by Atmel. The following VID/PID combinations
+ *  are used within the LUFA demos, and thus may be re-used by derivations of each demo. Free PID values may be
+ *  used by future LUFA demo projects.
+ *
+ *  <b>These VID/PID values should not be used in commercial designs under any circumstances.</b> Private projects
+ *  may use the following values freely, but must accept any collisions due to other LUFA derived private projects
+ *  sharing identical values. It is suggested that private projects using interfaces compatible with existing
+ *  demos share the same VID/PID value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th>VID</th>
+ *    <th>PID</th>
+ *    <th>Usage</th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>0x2040</td>
+ *    <td>Test VID/PID (See \ref Sec_Test_VIDPID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>0x2041</td>
+ *    <td>Mouse Demo Application</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>0x2042</td>
+ *    <td>Keyboard Demo Application</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>0x2043</td>
+ *    <td>Joystick Demo Application</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>0x2044</td>
+ *    <td>CDC Demo Application</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>0x2045</td>
+ *    <td>Mass Storage Demo Application</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>0x2046</td>
+ *    <td>Audio Output Demo Application</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>0x2047</td>
+ *    <td>Audio Input Demo Application</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>0x2048</td>
+ *    <td>MIDI Demo Application</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>0x2049</td>
+ *    <td>MagStripe Project</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>0x204A</td>
+ *    <td>CDC Class Bootloader</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>0x204B</td>
+ *    <td>USB to Serial Demo Application</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>0x204C</td>
+ *    <td>RNDIS Demo Application</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>0x204D</td>
+ *    <td>Combined Keyboard and Mouse Demo Application</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>0x204E</td>
+ *    <td>Dual CDC Demo Application</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x204F
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>Generic HID Demo Application</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>0x2060</td>
+ *    <td>Benito Programmer Project</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>0x2061</td>
+ *    <td>Combined Mass Storage and Keyboard Demo</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>0x2062</td>
+ *    <td>Combined CDC and Mouse Demo</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>0x2063</td>
+ *    <td>Mass Storage/HID Interface Datalogger Project</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>0x2064</td>
+ *    <td>Interfaceless Control-Only LUFA Devices</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>0x2065</td>
+ *    <td>Test and Measurement Demo</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x2066
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>Multiple Report Keyboard/Mouse HID Demo</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>0x2067</td>
+ *    <td>HID Class Bootloader</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>0x2068</td>
+ *    <td>Virtual Serial/Mass Storage Demo</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>
+ *     0x2069
+ *    </td>
+ *    <td>Webserver Project</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>0x206A</td>
+ *    <td>Media Control Project</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>0x206B</td>
+ *    <td>Printer Class Bootloader</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>0x206C</td>
+ *    <td>Bulk Vendor Demo Application</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>0x206D</td>
+ *    <td>Dual MIDI Demo Application</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>0x206E</td>
+ *    <td><i>Currently Unallocated</i></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>0x03EB</td>
+ *    <td>0x206F</td>
+ *    <td><i>Currently Unallocated</i></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Test_VIDPID The Test VID/PID Combination
+ *  For use in testing of LUFA powered devices during development only, by non-commercial entities.
+ *  All devices must accept collisions on this VID/PID range (from other in-development LUFA devices)
+ *  to be resolved by using a unique release number in the Device Descriptor. No devices using this
+ *  VID/PID combination may be released to the general public.
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/WritingBoardDrivers.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/WritingBoardDrivers.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b2ff07e66
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/DoxygenPages/WritingBoardDrivers.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \page Page_WritingBoardDrivers Writing LUFA Board Drivers
+ *
+ *  LUFA ships with several basic pre-made board drivers, to control hardware present on the supported board
+ *  hardware - such as Dataflash ICs, LEDs, Joysticks, or other hardware peripherals. When compiling an application
+ *  which makes use of one or more board drivers located in <i>LUFA/Drivers/Board</i>, you must also indicate which
+ *  board hardware you are using in your project makefile. This is done by defining the <tt>BOARD</tt> macro using
+ *  the <tt>-D</tt> switch passed to the compiler, with a constant of <tt>BOARD_{Name}</tt>. For example,
+ *  <tt>-DBOARD=BOARD_USBKEY</tt> instructs the compiler to use the USBKEY board hardware drivers.
+ *
+ *  If your application does not use <i>any</i> board level drivers, you can omit the definition of the <tt>BOARD</tt>
+ *  macro. However, some users may wish to write their own custom board hardware drivers which are to remain compatible
+ *  with the LUFA hardware API. To do this, the <tt>BOARD</tt> macro should be defined to the value <tt>BOARD_USER</tt>.
+ *  This indicates that the board level drivers should be located in a folder named "Board" located inside the
+ *  application's folder.
+ *
+ *  When used, the driver stub files located in the <tt>LUFA/CodeTemplates/DriverStubs</tt> folder should be copied to
+ *  the user application's <tt>Board/</tt> directory, and filled out to include the values and code needed to control
+ *  the custom board hardware. Once done, the existing LUFA board level APIs (accessed in the regular
+ *  <tt>LUFA/Drivers/Board/</tt> folder) will redirect to the user board drivers, maintaining code compatibility and
+ *  allowing for a different board to be selected through the project makefile with no code changes.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_BoardTemplates Board Driver Templates
+ *
+ *  The templates for each board driver are reproduced below.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_BoardTemplates_Board Template for USER <Board/Board.h>
+ *  \include "DriverStubs/Board.h"
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_BoardTemplates_Buttons Template for USER <Board/Buttons.h>
+ *  \include "DriverStubs/Buttons.h"
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_BoardTemplates_Dataflash Template for USER <Board/Dataflash.h>
+ *  \include "DriverStubs/Dataflash.h"
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_BoardTemplates_Joystick Template for USER <Board/Joystick.h>
+ *  \include "DriverStubs/Joystick.h"
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_BoardTemplates_LEDs Template for USER <Board/LEDs.h>
+ *  \include "DriverStubs/LEDs.h"
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/ADAFRUITU4/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/ADAFRUITU4/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..48016e0bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/ADAFRUITU4/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Adafruit U4 Breakout board.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_ADAFRUITU4
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_ADAFRUITU4 ADAFRUITU4
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Adafruit U4 Breakout board.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Adafruit U4 Breakout board (http://ladyada.net/products/atmega32u4breakout).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_ADAFRUITU4_H__
+#define __BOARD_ADAFRUITU4_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/ADAFRUITU4/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/ADAFRUITU4/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9f312207b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/ADAFRUITU4/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Adafruit U4 Breakout board.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_ADAFRUITU4
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_ADAFRUITU4 ADAFRUITU4
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Adafruit U4 Breakout board.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Adafruit U4 Breakout board (http://ladyada.net/products/atmega32u4breakout).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTE.6</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_ADAFRUITU4_H__
+#define __LEDS_ADAFRUITU4_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    LEDS_LED1
+
+			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRE  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTE &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+         	}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRE  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTE &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+         	}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTE |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTE &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTE  = ((PORTE & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTE  = ((PORTE & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PINE   = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (PORTE & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/ATAVRUSBRF01/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/ATAVRUSBRF01/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..07000ecdd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/ATAVRUSBRF01/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Atmel ATAVRUSBRF01.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_ATAVRUSBRF01
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_ATAVRUSBRF01 ATAVRUSBRF01
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Atmel ATAVRUSBRF01.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Atmel ATAVRUSBRF01.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_ATAVRUSBRF01_H__
+#define __BOARD_ATAVRUSBRF01_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Buttons.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware Buttons mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/ATAVRUSBRF01/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/ATAVRUSBRF01/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8b815dbcb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/ATAVRUSBRF01/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel ATAVRUSBRF01.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_ATAVRUSBRF01
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_ATAVRUSBRF01 ATAVRUSBRF01
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel ATAVRUSBRF01.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel ATAVRUSBRF01.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_ATAVRUSBRF01_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_ATAVRUSBRF01_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/ATAVRUSBRF01/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/ATAVRUSBRF01/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..76e89fd0d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/ATAVRUSBRF01/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,139 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel ATAVRUSBRF01.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_ATAVRUSBRF01
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_ATAVRUSBRF01 ATAVRUSBRF01
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel ATAVRUSBRF01.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel ATAVRUSBRF01.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>RX LED</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.0</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Red</td><td>TX LED</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.1</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_ATAVRUSBRF01_H__
+#define __LEDS_ATAVRUSBRF01_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 0)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 1)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD |= (LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = (PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | (LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PIND  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BENITO/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BENITO/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5584e1ea7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BENITO/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Tempusdictum Benito.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_BENITO
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_BENITO BENITO
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Tempusdictum Benito.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Tempusdictum Benito (http://dorkbotpdx.org/wiki/benito).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_BENITO_H__
+#define __BOARD_BENITO_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Buttons.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware Buttons mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BENITO/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BENITO/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..96d14a3ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BENITO/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Tempusdictum Benito.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_BENITO
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_BENITO BENITO
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Tempusdictum Benito.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Tempusdictum Benito (http://dorkbotpdx.org/wiki/benito).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_BENITO_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_BENITO_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BENITO/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BENITO/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..49df44191
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BENITO/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,139 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Tempusdictum Benito.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_BENITO
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_BENITO BENITO
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Tempusdictum Benito.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Tempusdictum Benito (http://dorkbotpdx.org/wiki/benito).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>TX LED</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTC.7</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Red</td><td>RX LED</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTC.6</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_BENITO_H__
+#define __LEDS_BENITO_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 7)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRC  |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTC |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRC  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTC &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTC &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTC |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTC = ((PORTC | LEDS_ALL_LEDS) & ~LEDMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTC = ((PORTC | LEDMask) & ~ActiveMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PINC  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (~PORTC & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BIGMULTIO/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BIGMULTIO/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9d4e30130
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BIGMULTIO/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Bitwizard Big-Multio.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_BIGMULTIO
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_BIGMULTIO BIGMULTIO
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Bitwizard Big-Multio.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Bitwizard Big-Multio (http://www.bitwizard.nl/wiki/index.php/Usbbigmultio).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_BIGMULTIO_H__
+#define __BOARD_BIGMULTIO_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BIGMULTIO/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BIGMULTIO/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..93d5bec97
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BIGMULTIO/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,161 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Bitwizard Big-Multio.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_BIGMULTIO
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_BIGMULTIO BIGMULTIO
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Bitwizard Big-Multio.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Bitwizard Big-Multio (http://www.bitwizard.nl/wiki/index.php/Usbbigmultio).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Unknown</td><td>LED0</td><td>High</td><td>PORTF.6</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Unknown</td><td>LED1</td><td>High</td><td>PORTF.7</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Unknown</td><td>LED2</td><td>High</td><td>PORTE.2</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_BIGMULTIO_H__
+#define __LEDS_BIGMULTIO_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define LEDS_PORTF_LEDS       (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+			#define LEDS_PORTE_LEDS       LEDS_LED3
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 7)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 2)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRF  |=  LEDS_PORTF_LEDS;
+				DDRE  |=  LEDS_PORTE_LEDS;
+
+				PORTF &= ~LEDS_PORTF_LEDS;
+				PORTE &= ~LEDS_PORTE_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRF  &= ~LEDS_PORTF_LEDS;
+				DDRE  &= ~LEDS_PORTE_LEDS;
+
+				PORTF &= ~LEDS_PORTF_LEDS;
+				PORTE &= ~LEDS_PORTE_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTF |= (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTF_LEDS);
+				PORTE |= (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTF &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTF_LEDS);
+				PORTE &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTF = (PORTF & ~LEDS_PORTF_LEDS) | (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTF_LEDS);
+				PORTE = (PORTE & ~LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) | (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTF = (PORTF & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTF_LEDS)) | (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTF_LEDS);
+				PORTE = (PORTE & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS)) | (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PINF  = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTF_LEDS);
+				PINE  = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return ((PORTF & LEDS_PORTF_LEDS) | (PORTE & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS));
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BLACKCAT/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BLACKCAT/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6eec7bf7d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BLACKCAT/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the BLACKCAT USB JTAG.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_BLACKCAT
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_BLACKCAT BLACKCAT
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the BLACKCAT USB JTAG.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the TCNISO Blackcat USB JTAG (http://www.embeddedcomputers.net/products/BlackcatUSB).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_BLACKCAT_H__
+#define __BOARD_BLACKCAT_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BLACKCAT/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BLACKCAT/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4a72039ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BLACKCAT/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,139 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the BLACKCAT USB JTAG.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_BLACKCAT
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_BLACKCAT BLACKCAT
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the BLACKCAT USB JTAG.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the TCNISO Blackcat USB JTAG (http://www.embeddedcomputers.net/products/BlackcatUSB).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Unknown</td><td>LED0</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.6</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Unknown</td><td>LED1</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.3</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_BLACKCAT_H__
+#define __LEDS_BLACKCAT_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 3)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PIND  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUI/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUI/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..067e870d8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUI/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Busware BUI.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_BUI
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_BUI BUI
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Busware BUI.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Busware BUI (http://www.busware.de/tiki-index.php?page=BUI).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_BUI_H__
+#define __BOARD_BUI_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUI/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUI/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e06edb5fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUI/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,143 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Busware BUI.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_BUI
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_BUI BUI
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Busware BUI.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Busware BUI (http://www.busware.de/tiki-index.php?page=BUI).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Red</td><td>RGB LED</td><td>High</td><td>PORTC.2</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Green</td><td>RGB LED</td><td>High</td><td>PORTC.3</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Blue</td><td>RGB LED</td><td>High</td><td>PORTC.4</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_BUI_H__
+#define __LEDS_BUI_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 2)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 3)
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 4)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRC  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTC &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRC  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTC &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTC |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTC &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTC = (PORTC & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTC = (PORTC & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PINC  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (PORTC & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUMBLEB/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUMBLEB/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..906f0b5e0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUMBLEB/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Fletchtronics BUMBLEB.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_BUMBLEB
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_BUMBLEB BUMBLEB
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Fletchtronics BUMBLEB.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Fletchtronics BUMBLEB (http://fletchtronics.net/bumble-b).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_BUMBLEB_H__
+#define __BOARD_BUMBLEB_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Buttons.h"
+		#include "../../Joystick.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware Buttons mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+
+			/** Indicates the board has a hardware Joystick mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_JOYSTICK
+
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUMBLEB/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUMBLEB/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..049542591
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUMBLEB/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,105 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Fletchtronics BUMBLEB.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_BUMBLEB
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_BUMBLEB BUMBLEB
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Fletchtronics BUMBLEB.
+ *
+ *  Board specific buttons driver header for the Fletchtronics BUMBLEB (http://fletchtronics.net/bumble-b). The BUMBLEB
+ *  third-party board does not include any on-board peripherals, but does have an officially recommended external peripheral
+ *  layout for buttons, LEDs and a Joystick.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_BUMBLEB_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_BUMBLEB_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUMBLEB/Joystick.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUMBLEB/Joystick.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..82d085e89
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUMBLEB/Joystick.h
@@ -0,0 +1,123 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Fletchtronics BUMBLEB.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Joystick_BUMBLEB
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Joystick
+ *  \defgroup Group_Joystick_BUMBLEB BUMBLEB
+ *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Fletchtronics BUMBLEB.
+ *
+ *  Board specific joystick driver header for the Fletchtronics BUMBLEB (http://fletchtronics.net/bumble-b). The BUMBLEB
+ *  third-party board does not include any on-board peripherals, but does have an officially recommended external peripheral
+ *  layout for buttons, LEDs and a Joystick.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Left Port Pin</th><th>Up Port Pin</th><th>Right Port Pin</th><th>Down Port Pin</th><th>Press Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>PORTD.2</td><td>PORTD.3</td><td>PORTD.0</td><td>PORTD.1</td><td>PORTD.4</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __JOYSTICK_BUMBLEB_H__
+#define __JOYSTICK_BUMBLEB_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define JOY_MASK                 ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1) | (1 << 2) | (1 << 3) | (1 << 4))
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */
+			#define JOY_LEFT                  (1 << 2)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */
+			#define JOY_UP                    (1 << 3)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */
+			#define JOY_RIGHT                 (1 << 0)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */
+			#define JOY_DOWN                  (1 << 1)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */
+			#define JOY_PRESS                 (1 << 4)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Joystick_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~JOY_MASK;
+				PORTD |=  JOY_MASK;
+			}
+
+			static inline void Joystick_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~JOY_MASK;
+				PORTD &= ~JOY_MASK;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return (uint8_t)(~PIND & JOY_MASK);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUMBLEB/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUMBLEB/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5cd7b483c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUMBLEB/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,149 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Fletchtronics BUMBLEB.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_BUMBLEB
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_BUMBLEB BUMBLEB
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Fletchtronics BUMBLEB.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Fletchtronics BUMBLEB (http://fletchtronics.net/bumble-b). The BUMBLEB
+ *  third-party board does not include any on-board peripherals, but does have an officially recommended external
+ *  peripheral layout for buttons, LEDs and a Joystick.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>N/A</td><td>User Supplied</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.4</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>N/A</td><td>User Supplied</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.5</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>N/A</td><td>User Supplied</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.6</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED4</td><td>N/A</td><td>User Supplied</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.7</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_BUMBLEB_H__
+#define __LEDS_BUMBLEB_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 4)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 5)
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED4        (1 << 7)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTB &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTB &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask)
+			{
+				PORTB |= LedMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask)
+			{
+				PORTB &= ~LedMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask)
+			{
+				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LedMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LedMask) | ActiveMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PINB  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (PORTB & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/CULV3/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/CULV3/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..777902d27
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/CULV3/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Busware CUL V3.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_CULV3
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_CULV3 CULV3
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Busware CUL V3.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Busware CUL V3 (http://busware.de/tiki-index.php?page=CUL).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_CULV3_H__
+#define __BOARD_CULV3_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Buttons.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware Buttons mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/CULV3/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/CULV3/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6a26a9980
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/CULV3/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Busware CULV3.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_CULV3
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_CULV3 CULV3
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Busware CULV3.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Busware CUL V3 (http://busware.de/tiki-index.php?page=CUL).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.2</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_CULV3_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_CULV3_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 2)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTE |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTE &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PINE & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/CULV3/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/CULV3/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3d2b8fda0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/CULV3/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Busware CUL V3.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_CULV3
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_CULV3 CULV3
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Busware CUL V3.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Busware CUL V3 (http://busware.de/tiki-index.php?page=CUL).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Yellow</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTE.6</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_CULV3_H__
+#define __LEDS_CULV3_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    LEDS_LED1
+
+			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRE  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTE &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+         	}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRE  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTE &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+         	}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTE |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTE &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTE = ((PORTE & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTE = ((PORTE & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PINE  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (PORTE & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/DUCE/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/DUCE/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..44cf6918b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/DUCE/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the DorkbotPDX Duce.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_DUCE
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_DUCE DUCE
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the DorkbotPDX Duce.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the DorkbotPDX Duce (http://dorkbotpdx.org/wiki/duce).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_DUCE_H__
+#define __BOARD_DUCE_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/DUCE/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/DUCE/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..83cadedff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/DUCE/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,147 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the DorkbotPDX Duce.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_DUCE
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_DUCE DUCE
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the DorkbotPDX Duce.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the DorkbotPDX Duce (http://dorkbotpdx.org/wiki/duce).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Red</td><td>Bicolor Indicator 1</td><td>High</td><td>PORTC.4</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Green</td><td>Bicolor Indicator 1</td><td>High</td><td>PORTC.5</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Red</td><td>Bicolor Indicator 2</td><td>High</td><td>PORTC.6</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED4</td><td>Green</td><td>Bicolor Indicator 2</td><td>High</td><td>PORTC.7</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_DUCE_H__
+#define __LEDS_DUCE_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 4)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 5)
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED4        (1 << 7)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRC  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTC &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRC  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTC &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTC |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTC &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTC = ((PORTC & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTC = ((PORTC & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PINC  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (PORTC & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c77c18b9b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Atmel EVK527.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_EVK527
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_EVK527 EVK527
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Atmel EVK527.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Atmel EVK527.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_EVK527_H__
+#define __BOARD_EVK527_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Buttons.h"
+		#include "../../Dataflash.h"
+		#include "../../Joystick.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware Buttons mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+
+			/** Indicates the board has a hardware Dataflash mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_DATAFLASH
+
+			/** Indicates the board has a hardware Joystick mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_JOYSTICK
+
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..239880cc6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK527.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_EVK527
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_EVK527 EVK527
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK527.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK527.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.2</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_EVK527_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_EVK527_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 2)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTE |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTE &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PINE & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/Dataflash.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/Dataflash.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..38b2b5889
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/Dataflash.h
@@ -0,0 +1,222 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel EVK527.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Dataflash_EVK527
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash
+ *  \defgroup Group_Dataflash_EVK527 EVK527
+ *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel EVK527.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel EVK527.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Select Pin</th><th>SPI Port</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>DATAFLASH_CHIP1</td><td>AT45DB321C (4MB)</td><td>PORTE.6</td><td>SPI0</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __DATAFLASH_EVK527_H__
+#define __DATAFLASH_EVK527_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../../Misc/AT45DB321C.h"
+		#include "../../../Peripheral/SPI.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK                DATAFLASH_CHIP1
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR                 DDRE
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT                PORTE
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS                 1
+
+			/** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP                    0
+
+			/** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP1                      (1 << 6)
+
+			/** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash IC. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE                  512
+
+			/** Total number of pages inside the board's dataflash IC. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                      8192
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Initializes the dataflash driver so that commands and data may be sent to an attached dataflash IC.
+			 *  The appropriate SPI interface will be automatically configured.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_Init(void)
+			{
+				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR  |= DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;
+				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT |= DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;
+
+				SPI_Init(SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2 | SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST | SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING | SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING | SPI_MODE_MASTER);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns a byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash
+			 *
+			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+				return SPI_TransferByte(Byte);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and ignores the next byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+				SPI_SendByte(Byte);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a dummy byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns the next byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void)
+			{
+				return SPI_ReceiveByte();
+			}
+
+			/** Determines the currently selected dataflash chip.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Mask of the currently selected Dataflash chip, either \ref DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP if no chip is selected
+			 *          or a DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is the chip number).
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void)
+			{
+				return (~DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT & DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK);
+			}
+
+			/** Selects the given dataflash chip.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in]  ChipMask  Mask of the Dataflash IC to select, in the form of a \c DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is
+			 *              the chip number).
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask)
+			{
+				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT = ((DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT | DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK) & ~ChipMask);
+			}
+
+			/** Deselects the current dataflash chip, so that no dataflash is selected. */
+			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void)
+			{
+				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP);
+			}
+
+			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to
+			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one
+			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside
+			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs
+			 *  are deselected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from
+			 *                          0 to ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress)
+			{
+				Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+				if (PageAddress >= DATAFLASH_PAGES)
+				  return;
+
+				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+			}
+
+			/** Toggles the select line of the currently selected dataflash IC, so that it is ready to receive
+			 *  a new command.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(void)
+			{
+				uint8_t SelectedChipMask = Dataflash_GetSelectedChip();
+
+				Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+				Dataflash_SelectChip(SelectedChipMask);
+			}
+
+			/** Spin-loops while the currently selected dataflash is busy executing a command, such as a main
+			 *  memory page program or main memory to buffer transfer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(void)
+			{
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+				while (!(Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_READY));
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with
+			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-bit address.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC
+			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress,
+			                                              const uint16_t BufferByte)
+			{
+				Dataflash_SendByte(PageAddress >> 5);
+				Dataflash_SendByte((PageAddress << 3) | (BufferByte >> 8));
+				Dataflash_SendByte(BufferByte);
+			}
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/Joystick.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/Joystick.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..492c70699
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/Joystick.h
@@ -0,0 +1,130 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel EVK527.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Joystick_EVK527
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Joystick
+ *  \defgroup Group_Joystick_EVK527 EVK527
+ *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel EVK527.
+ *
+ *  Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel EVK527.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Left Port Pin</th><th>Up Port Pin</th><th>Right Port Pin</th><th>Down Port Pin</th><th>Press Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>PORTF.4</td><td>PORTF.5</td><td>PORTF.7</td><td>PORTC.6</td><td>PORTF.6</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __JOYSTICK_EVK527_H__
+#define __JOYSTICK_EVK527_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define JOY_FMASK                 ((1 << 4) | (1 << 5) | (1 << 6) | (1 << 7))
+			#define JOY_CMASK                 (1 << 6)
+
+			#define JOY_PORTC_MASK_SHIFT      3
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */
+			#define JOY_LEFT                  (1 << 4)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */
+			#define JOY_RIGHT                 (1 << 7)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */
+			#define JOY_UP                    (1 << 5)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */
+			#define JOY_DOWN                 ((1 << 6) >> JOY_PORTC_MASK_SHIFT)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */
+			#define JOY_PRESS                 (1 << 6)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Joystick_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRF  &= ~JOY_FMASK;
+				DDRC  &= ~JOY_CMASK;
+
+				PORTF |=  JOY_FMASK;
+				PORTC |=  JOY_CMASK;
+			}
+
+			static inline void Joystick_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRF  &= ~JOY_FMASK;
+				DDRC  &= ~JOY_CMASK;
+
+				PORTF &= ~JOY_FMASK;
+				PORTC &= ~JOY_CMASK;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return (((uint8_t)~PINF & JOY_FMASK) | (((uint8_t)~PINC & JOY_CMASK) >> JOY_PORTC_MASK_SHIFT));
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..84e689a4b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,143 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK527.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_EVK527
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_EVK527 EVK527
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK527.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK527.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.5</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.6</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_EVK527_H__
+#define __LEDS_EVK527_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 5)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 7)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PIND  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/JMDBU2/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/JMDBU2/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0f1aca09d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/JMDBU2/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Mattairtech JM-DB-U2.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_JMDBU2
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_JMDBU2 JMDBU2
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Mattairtech JM-DB-U2.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Mattairtech JM-DB-U2 (http://u2.mattair.net/index.html).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_JMDBU2_H__
+#define __BOARD_JMDBU2_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Buttons.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware Buttons mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/JMDBU2/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/JMDBU2/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..80500993d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/JMDBU2/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Mattairtech JM-DB-U2.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_JMDBU2
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_JMDBU2 JMDBU2
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Mattairtech JM-DB-U2.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Mattairtech JM-DB-U2 (http://u2.mattair.net/index.html).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_JMDBU2_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_JMDBU2_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/JMDBU2/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/JMDBU2/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..562103e33
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/JMDBU2/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Mattairtech JM-DB-U2.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_JMDBU2
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_JMDBU2 JMDBU2
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Mattairtech JM-DB-U2.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Mattairtech JM-DB-U2 (http://u2.mattair.net/index.html).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.4</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_JMDBU2_H__
+#define __LEDS_JMDBU2_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 4)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    LEDS_LED1
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PIND  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/LEONARDO/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/LEONARDO/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..95ef437f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/LEONARDO/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Arduino Leonardo board.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_LEONARDO
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_LEONARDO LEONARDO
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Arduino Leonardo board.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Arduino Leonardo board (http://arduino.cc/en/Main/arduinoBoardLeonardo).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_LEONARDO_H__
+#define __BOARD_LEONARDO_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/LEONARDO/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/LEONARDO/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ea7d41c01
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/LEONARDO/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Arduino Leonardo board.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_LEONARDO
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_LEONARDO LEONARDO
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Arduino Leonardo board.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Arduino Leonardo board (http://arduino.cc/en/Main/arduinoBoardLeonardo).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Yellow</td><td>RX</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTB.0</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Yellow</td><td>TX</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.5</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Yellow</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTC.7</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_LEONARDO_H__
+#define __LEDS_LEONARDO_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define LEDS_PORTB_LEDS       (LEDS_LED1)
+			#define LEDS_PORTD_LEDS       (LEDS_LED2)
+			#define LEDS_PORTC_LEDS       (LEDS_LED3)
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 0)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 5)
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 7)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  |=  LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;
+				PORTB |=  LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;
+				DDRD  |=  LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+				PORTD |=  LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+				DDRC  |=  LEDS_PORTC_LEDS;
+				PORTC &= ~LEDS_PORTC_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  &= ~LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;
+				PORTB &= ~LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;
+				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+				DDRC  &= ~LEDS_PORTC_LEDS;
+				PORTC &= ~LEDS_PORTC_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);
+				PORTD &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);
+				PORTC |=  (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB |=  (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);
+				PORTD |=  (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);
+				PORTC &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB = ((PORTB |  LEDS_PORTB_LEDS) & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS));
+				PORTD = ((PORTD |  LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS));
+				PORTC = ((PORTC & ~LEDS_PORTC_LEDS) |  (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS));
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTB = ((PORTB |  (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS)) & ~(ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS));
+				PORTD = ((PORTD |  (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS)) & ~(ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS));
+				PORTC = ((PORTC & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS)) |  (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS));
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PINB  = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);
+				PIND  = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);
+				PINC  = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return ((~PORTB & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS) | (~PORTD & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) | (PORTC & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS));
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MAXIMUS/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MAXIMUS/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..929e60a8c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MAXIMUS/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Maximus board.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_MAXIMUS
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_MAXIMUS MAXIMUS
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Maximus board.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Maximus (http://www.avrusb.com/).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_MAXIMUS_H__
+#define __BOARD_MAXIMUS_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MAXIMUS/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MAXIMUS/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..695949a17
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MAXIMUS/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,139 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Maximus.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_MAXIMUS
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_MAXIMUS MAXIMUS
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Maximus.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Maximus (http://www.avrusb.com/).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>LG</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.6</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Red</td><td>LR</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.7</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_MAXIMUS_H__
+#define __LEDS_MAXIMUS_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 7)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+
+			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTB &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTB &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PINB  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (PORTB & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICRO/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICRO/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..622bfc8b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICRO/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Arduino Micro board.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_MICRO
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_MICRO MICRO
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Arduino Micro board.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Arduino Micro board (http://arduino.cc/en/Main/arduinoBoardMicro).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_MICRO_H__
+#define __BOARD_MICRO_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICRO/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICRO/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c3e471d5f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICRO/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Arduino Micro board.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_MICRO
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_MICRO MICRO
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Arduino Micro board.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Arduino Micro board (http://arduino.cc/en/Main/arduinoBoardMicro).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Yellow</td><td>RX</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.0</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Yellow</td><td>TX</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.5</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTC.7</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_MICRO_H__
+#define __LEDS_MICRO_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define LEDS_PORTB_LEDS       (LEDS_LED1)
+			#define LEDS_PORTD_LEDS       (LEDS_LED2)
+			#define LEDS_PORTC_LEDS       (LEDS_LED3)
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 0)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 5)
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 7)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  |=  LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;
+				PORTB &= ~LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;
+				DDRD  |=  LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+				DDRC  |=  LEDS_PORTC_LEDS;
+				PORTC &= ~LEDS_PORTC_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  &= ~LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;
+				PORTB &= ~LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;
+				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+				DDRC  &= ~LEDS_PORTC_LEDS;
+				PORTC &= ~LEDS_PORTC_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB |=  (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);
+				PORTD |=  (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);
+				PORTC |=  (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);
+				PORTD &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);
+				PORTC &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LEDS_PORTB_LEDS) | (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS));
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) | (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS));
+				PORTC = ((PORTC & ~LEDS_PORTC_LEDS) | (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS));
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS)) | (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS));
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS)) | (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS));
+				PORTC = ((PORTC & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS)) | (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS));
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB ^= (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);
+				PORTD ^= (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);
+				PORTC ^= (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return ((PORTB & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS) | (PORTD & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) | (PORTC & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS));
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b84bf790b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,149 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Micropendous series boards.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_MICROPENDOUS_32U2
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_MICROPENDOUS_A MICROPENDOUS_A
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Micropendous A (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/MicropendousA).
+ *
+ *  See \ref Group_BoardInfo_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 for more details.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_MICROPENDOUS_1 MICROPENDOUS_1
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Micropendous 1 (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/Micropendous1).
+ *
+ *  See \ref Group_BoardInfo_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 for more details.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_MICROPENDOUS_2 MICROPENDOUS_2
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Micropendous 2 (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/Micropendous2).
+ *
+ *  See \ref Group_BoardInfo_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 for more details.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_MICROPENDOUS_3 MICROPENDOUS_3
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Micropendous 3 (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/Micropendous3).
+ *
+ *  See \ref Group_BoardInfo_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 for more details.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_MICROPENDOUS_4 MICROPENDOUS_4
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Micropendous 4 (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/Micropendous4).
+ *
+ *  See \ref Group_BoardInfo_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 for more details.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_MICROPENDOUS_DIP MICROPENDOUS_DIP
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Micropendous DIP (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/MicropendousDIP).
+ *
+ *  See \ref Group_BoardInfo_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 for more details.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_MICROPENDOUS_REV1 MICROPENDOUS_REV1
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Micropendous Arduino-like Revision 1 (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/Micropendous).
+ *
+ *  See \ref Group_BoardInfo_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 for more details.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_MICROPENDOUS_REV2 MICROPENDOUS_REV2
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Micropendous Arduino-like Revision 2 (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/Micropendous).
+ *
+ *  See \ref Group_BoardInfo_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 for more details.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 MICROPENDOUS_32U2
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Micropendous series boards.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Micropendous series boards (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_H__
+#define __BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			#if ((BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_32U2) || (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_A) || \
+			     (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_1)    || (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_2) || \
+			     (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_3)    || (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_4) || \
+			     (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_REV1) || (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_REV2) || \
+			     (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_DIP) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
+				#include "../../Buttons.h"
+
+				/** Indicates the board has hardware Buttons mounted. */
+				#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+			#endif
+
+			#if ((BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_REV1) || (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_REV2) || \
+			     (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_32U2) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
+				#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+				/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+				#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+			#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8adff2d30
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,205 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Micropendous series boards.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_32U2
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_A MICROPENDOUS_A
+ *  \brief Board specific Button driver header for the Micropendous A (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/MicropendousA).
+ *
+ *  See \ref Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 for more details.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_1 MICROPENDOUS_1
+ *  \brief Board specific Button driver header for the Micropendous 1 (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/Micropendous1).
+ *
+ *  See \ref Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 for more details.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_2 MICROPENDOUS_2
+ *  \brief Board specific Button driver header for the Micropendous 2 (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/Micropendous2).
+ *
+ *  See \ref Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 for more details.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_3 MICROPENDOUS_3
+ *  \brief Board specific Button driver header for the Micropendous 3 (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/Micropendous3).
+ *
+ *  See \ref Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 for more details.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_4 MICROPENDOUS_4
+ *  \brief Board specific Button driver header for the Micropendous 4 (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/Micropendous4).
+ *
+ *  See \ref Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 for more details.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_DIP MICROPENDOUS_DIP
+ *  \brief Board specific Button driver header for the Micropendous DIP (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/MicropendousDIP).
+ *
+ *  See \ref Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 for more details.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_REV1 MICROPENDOUS_REV1
+ *  \brief Board specific Button driver header for the Micropendous Arduino-like Revision 1 (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/Micropendous).
+ *
+ *  See \ref Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 for more details.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_REV2 MICROPENDOUS_REV2
+ *  \brief Board specific Button driver header for the Micropendous Arduino-like Revision 2 (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/Micropendous).
+ *
+ *  See \ref Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 for more details.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 MICROPENDOUS_32U2
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Micropendous 32U2.
+ *
+ *  \note There are multiple supported Micropendous boards, compile with <code>BOARD = MICROPENDOUS_{VERSION}</code>.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Micropendous 32U2 (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/Micropendous_32U2).
+ *
+ *  <b>BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_1 and BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_32U2</b>:
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  <b>Other Revisions</b>:
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.2</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_MICROPENDOUS_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_MICROPENDOUS_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		#if (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_32U2)
+			#define _BOARD_BUTTON1_MASK             (1 << 7)
+			#define _BOARD_BUTTON_PORTLETTER        D
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_A)
+			#define _BOARD_BUTTON1_MASK             (1 << 2)
+			#define _BOARD_BUTTON_PORTLETTER        E
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_1)
+			#define _BOARD_BUTTON1_MASK             (1 << 7)
+			#define _BOARD_BUTTON_PORTLETTER        D
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_2)
+			#define _BOARD_BUTTON1_MASK             (1 << 2)
+			#define _BOARD_BUTTON_PORTLETTER        E
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_3)
+			#define _BOARD_BUTTON1_MASK             (1 << 2)
+			#define _BOARD_BUTTON_PORTLETTER        E
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_4)
+			#define _BOARD_BUTTON1_MASK             (1 << 2)
+			#define _BOARD_BUTTON_PORTLETTER        E
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_DIP)
+			#define _BOARD_BUTTON1_MASK             (1 << 2)
+			#define _BOARD_BUTTON_PORTLETTER        E
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_REV1)
+			#define _BOARD_BUTTON1_MASK             (1 << 2)
+			#define _BOARD_BUTTON_PORTLETTER        E
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_REV2)
+			#define _BOARD_BUTTON1_MASK             (1 << 2)
+			#define _BOARD_BUTTON_PORTLETTER        E
+		#endif
+
+		#define _BOARD_BUTTON_PORT                  CONCAT_EXPANDED(PORT, _BOARD_BUTTON_PORTLETTER)
+		#define _BOARD_BUTTON_PIN                   CONCAT_EXPANDED(PIN,  _BOARD_BUTTON_PORTLETTER)
+		#define _BOARD_BUTTON_DDR                   CONCAT_EXPANDED(DDR,  _BOARD_BUTTON_PORTLETTER)
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1     _BOARD_BUTTON1_MASK
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				_BOARD_BUTTON_DDR  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				_BOARD_BUTTON_PORT |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				_BOARD_BUTTON_DDR  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				_BOARD_BUTTON_PORT &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((_BOARD_BUTTON_PIN & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..253ad3142
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,174 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Micropendous series boards.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_MICROPENDOUS_32U2
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_MICROPENDOUS_REV1 MICROPENDOUS_REV1
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Micropendous Arduino-like Revision 1 (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/Micropendous).
+ *
+ *  See \ref Group_LEDs_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 for more details.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_MICROPENDOUS_REV2 MICROPENDOUS_REV2
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Micropendous Arduino-like Revision 2 (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/Micropendous).
+ *
+ *  See \ref Group_LEDs_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 for more details.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_MICROPENDOUS_32U2 MICROPENDOUS_32U2
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Micropendous-32U2.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Micropendous 32U2 (https://code.google.com/p/micropendous/wiki/Micropendous_32U2).
+ *
+ *  <b>BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_32U2</b>:
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.6</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  <b>Other Revisions</b>:
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.1</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_MICROPENDOUS_H__
+#define __LEDS_MICROPENDOUS_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		#if (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_32U2)
+			#define _BOARD_LED1_MASK                (1 << 6)
+			#define _BOARD_LED_PORTLETTER           D
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_REV1)
+			#define _BOARD_LED1_MASK                (1 << 1)
+			#define _BOARD_LED_PORTLETTER           B
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_REV2)
+			#define _BOARD_LED1_MASK                (1 << 1)
+			#define _BOARD_LED_PORTLETTER           B
+		#endif
+
+		#define _BOARD_LED_PORT                     CONCAT_EXPANDED(PORT, _BOARD_LED_PORTLETTER)
+		#define _BOARD_LED_PIN                      CONCAT_EXPANDED(PIN,  _BOARD_LED_PORTLETTER)
+		#define _BOARD_LED_DDR                      CONCAT_EXPANDED(DDR,  _BOARD_LED_PORTLETTER)
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        _BOARD_LED1_MASK
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    LEDS_LED1
+
+			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				_BOARD_LED_DDR  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				_BOARD_LED_PORT &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				_BOARD_LED_DDR  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				_BOARD_LED_PORT &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				_BOARD_LED_PORT |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				_BOARD_LED_PORT &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				_BOARD_LED_PORT = ((_BOARD_LED_PORT & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				_BOARD_LED_PORT = ((_BOARD_LED_PORT & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				_BOARD_LED_PIN  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (_BOARD_LED_PORT & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROSIN162/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROSIN162/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3ffb028c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROSIN162/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Microsin AVR-USB162 board.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_MICROSIN162
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_MICROSIN162 MICROSIN162
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Microsin AVR-USB162 board.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Microsin AVR-USB162 board (http://microsin.ru/content/view/685/44/).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_MICROSIN162_H__
+#define __BOARD_MICROSIN162_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Buttons.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware Buttons mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROSIN162/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROSIN162/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..68344feb2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROSIN162/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Microsin AVR-USB162 board.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_MICROSIN162
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_MICROSIN162 MICROSIN162
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Microsin AVR-USB162 board.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Microsin AVR-USB162 board (http://microsin.ru/content/view/685/44/).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_MICROSIN162_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_MICROSIN162_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROSIN162/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROSIN162/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..51d1b3eba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROSIN162/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Microsin AVR-USB162 board.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_MICROSIN162
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_MICROSIN162 MICROSIN162
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Microsin AVR-USB162 board.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Microsin AVR-USB162 board (http://microsin.ru/content/view/685/44/).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.4</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_MICROSIN162_H__
+#define __LEDS_MICROSIN162_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 4)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    LEDS_LED1
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD | LEDS_ALL_LEDS) & ~LEDMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD | LEDMask) & ~ActiveMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PIND  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (~PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MINIMUS/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MINIMUS/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..80b8b3c86
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MINIMUS/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the MINIMUS.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_MINIMUS
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_MINIMUS MINIMUS
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the MINIMUS.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the MINIMUS.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_MINIMUS_H__
+#define __BOARD_MINIMUS_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Buttons.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware Buttons mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MINIMUS/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MINIMUS/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ec94445a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MINIMUS/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the MINIMUS.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_MINIMUS
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_MINIMUS MINIMUS
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the MINIMUS.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the MINIMUS.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_MINIMUS_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_MINIMUS_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MINIMUS/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MINIMUS/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..adc34686f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MINIMUS/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,139 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the MINIMUS.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_MINIMUS
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_MINIMUS MINIMUS
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the MINIMUS.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Minimus USB (http://www.minimususb.com/).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Blue</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.5</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Red</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.6</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_MINIMUS_H__
+#define __LEDS_MINIMUS_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 5)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+
+			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD |=  LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD | LEDS_ALL_LEDS) & ~LEDMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PIND  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (~PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MULTIO/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MULTIO/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..84f3d8725
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MULTIO/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Bitwizard Multio.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_MULTIO
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_MULTIO MULTIO
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Bitwizard Multio.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Bitwizard Multio (http://www.bitwizard.nl/wiki/index.php/USB-multio).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_MULTIO_H__
+#define __BOARD_MULTIO_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MULTIO/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MULTIO/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ca6d44041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/MULTIO/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,161 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Bitwizard Multio.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_MULTIO
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_MULTIO MULTIO
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Bitwizard Multio.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Bitwizard Multio (http://www.bitwizard.nl/wiki/index.php/USB-multio).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.0</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTC.2</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_MULTIO_H__
+#define __LEDS_MULTIO_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define LEDS_PORTD_LEDS       (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+			#define LEDS_PORTC_LEDS       LEDS_LED2
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 0)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 2)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 7)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  |=  LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+				DDRC  |=  LEDS_PORTC_LEDS;
+
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+				PORTC &= ~LEDS_PORTC_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+				DDRC  &= ~LEDS_PORTC_LEDS;
+
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+				PORTC &= ~LEDS_PORTC_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD |= (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);
+				PORTC |= (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);
+				PORTC &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = (PORTD & ~LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) | (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);
+				PORTC = (PORTC & ~LEDS_PORTC_LEDS) | (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = (PORTD & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS)) | (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);
+				PORTC = (PORTC & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS)) | (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PIND  = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);
+				PINC  = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return ((PORTD & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) | (PORTC & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS));
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX162/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX162/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b9bcf7734
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX162/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Olimex AVR-USB-162 Development Board.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_OLIMEX162
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_OLIMEX162 OLIMEX162
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Olimex AVR-USB-162 Development Board.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Olimex AVR-USB-162 Development Board (http://www.olimex.com/dev/avr-usb-162.html).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_OLIMEX162_H__
+#define __BOARD_OLIMEX162_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Buttons.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware Buttons mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX162/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX162/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3714c5e9a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX162/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-162 Development Board.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_OLIMEX162
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_OLIMEX162 OLIMEX162
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-162 Development Board.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-162 Development Board (http://www.olimex.com/dev/avr-usb-162.html).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_OLIMEX162_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_OLIMEX162_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX162/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX162/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5ecc1f5d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX162/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-162.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_OLIMEX162
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_OLIMEX162 OLIMEX162
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-162.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-162 (http://www.olimex.com/dev/avr-usb-162.html).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Yellow</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.4</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_OLIMEX162_H__
+#define __LEDS_OLIMEX162_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 4)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    LEDS_LED1
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PIND  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX32U4/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX32U4/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..657b15c6d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX32U4/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Olimex AVR-USB-32U4 Development Board.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_OLIMEX32U4
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_OLIMEX32U4 OLIMEX32U4
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Olimex AVR-USB-32U4 Development Board.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Olimex AVR-USB-32U4 Development Board (http://www.olimex.com/dev/olimexino-32u4.html).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_OLIMEX32U4_H__
+#define __BOARD_OLIMEX32U4_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Buttons.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware Buttons mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX32U4/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX32U4/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8e33fd965
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX32U4/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-32U4 Development Board.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_OLIMEX32U4
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_OLIMEX32U4 OLIMEX32U4
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-32U4 Development Board.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-32U4 Development Board (http://www.olimex.com/dev/olimexino-32u4.html).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.2</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_OLIMEX32U4_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_OLIMEX32U4_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 2)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTE |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTE &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PINE & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX32U4/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX32U4/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..259859c90
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX32U4/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,179 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-32U4.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_OLIMEX32U4
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_OLIMEX32U4 OLIMEX32U4
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-32U4.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-32U4 (http://www.olimex.com/dev/olimexino-32u4.html).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>TX</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.5</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Yellow</td><td>RX</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.0</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator (Default Unconnected)</td><td>High</td><td>PORTE.6</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED4</td><td>Yellow</td><td>General Indicator (Default Unconnected)</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.5</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_OLIMEX32U4_H__
+#define __LEDS_OLIMEX32U4_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define LEDS_PORTB_LEDS       (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+			#define LEDS_PORTD_LEDS       (LEDS_LED1)
+			#define LEDS_PORTE_LEDS       (LEDS_LED3)
+
+			#define LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT 1
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        ((1 << 5) >> LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 0)
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED4        (1 << 5)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  |=  LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;
+				PORTB &= ~LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;
+				DDRD  |=  (LEDS_PORTD_LEDS << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT);
+				PORTD &= ~(LEDS_PORTD_LEDS << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT);
+				DDRE  |=  LEDS_PORTE_LEDS;
+				PORTE &= ~LEDS_PORTE_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  &= ~LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;
+				PORTB &= ~LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;
+				DDRD  &= ~(LEDS_PORTD_LEDS << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT);
+				PORTD &= ~(LEDS_PORTD_LEDS << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT);
+				DDRE  &= ~LEDS_PORTE_LEDS;
+				PORTE &= ~LEDS_PORTE_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB |= (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);
+				PORTD |= ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT);
+				PORTE |= (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);
+				PORTD &= ~((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT);
+				PORTE &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LEDS_PORTB_LEDS) | (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS));
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~(LEDS_PORTD_LEDS << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT)) |
+				         ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT));
+				PORTE = ((PORTE & ~LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) | (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS));
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS)) | (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS));
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT)) |
+				         ((ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT));
+				PORTE = ((PORTE & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS)) | (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS));
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PINB  = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);
+				PIND  = ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT);
+				PINE  = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return ((PORTB & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS) |
+				        ((PORTD & (LEDS_PORTD_LEDS << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT)) >> LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT) |
+				        (PORTE & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS));
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXISPMK2/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXISPMK2/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d318a82b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXISPMK2/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Olimex AVR-ISP-MK2 Development Board.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_OLIMEXISPMK2
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_OLIMEXISPMK2 OLIMEXISPMK2
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Olimex AVR-ISP-MK2 Development Board.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Olimex AVR-ISP-MK2 Development Board (https://www.olimex.com/dev/avr-isp-mk2.html).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_OLIMEXISPMK2_H__
+#define __BOARD_OLIMEXISPMK2_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Buttons.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware Buttons mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXISPMK2/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXISPMK2/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..aff10b103
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXISPMK2/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Olimex AVR-ISP-MK2 Development Board.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_OLIMEXISPMK2
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_OLIMEXISPMK2 OLIMEXISPMK2
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Olimex AVR-ISP-MK2.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Olimex AVR-ISP-MK2 Development Board (https://www.olimex.com/dev/avr-isp-mk2.html).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_OLIMEXISPMK2_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_OLIMEXISPMK2_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXISPMK2/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXISPMK2/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..033fca05e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXISPMK2/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,143 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Olimex AVR-ISP-MK2 Development Board.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_OLIMEXISPMK2
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_OLIMEXISPMK2 OLIMEXISPMK2
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Olimex AVR-ISP-MK2.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Olimex AVR-ISP-MK2 Development Board (https://www.olimex.com/dev/avr-isp-mk2.html).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Yellow</td><td>Target Power</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.5</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Red</td><td>Activity</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.6</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Green</td><td>Ready</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.7</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_OLIMEXISPMK2_H__
+#define __LEDS_OLIMEXISPMK2_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 5)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 7)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTB &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTB &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PINB  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (PORTB & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXT32U4/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXT32U4/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..690fee153
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXT32U4/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Olimex AVR-USB-T32U4 Development Board.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_OLIMEXT32U4
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_OLIMEXT32U4 OLIMEXT32U4
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Olimex AVR-USB-T32U4 Development Board.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Olimex AVR-USB-T32U4 Development Board (http://www.olimex.com/dev/avr-t32u4.html).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_OLIMEXT32U4_H__
+#define __BOARD_OLIMEXT32U4_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Buttons.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware Buttons mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXT32U4/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXT32U4/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..634eda9cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXT32U4/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-T32U4 Development Board.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_OLIMEXT32U4
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_OLIMEXT32U4 OLIMEXT32U4
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-32U4 Development Board.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-T32U4 Development Board (http://www.olimex.com/dev/avr-t32u4.html).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.2</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_OLIMEXT32U4_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_OLIMEXT32U4_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 2)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTE |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTE &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PINE & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXT32U4/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXT32U4/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2bbaf6826
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXT32U4/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-T32U4.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_OLIMEXT32U4
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_OLIMEXT32U4 OLIMEXT32U4
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-T32U4.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Olimex AVR-USB-T32U4 (http://www.olimex.com/dev/avr-t32u4.html).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Yellow</td><td>RX</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.0</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Green</td><td>TX</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.5</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>N/A</td><td>General Indicator (Not Mounted)</td><td>High</td><td>PORTE.6</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_OLIMEXT32U4_H__
+#define __LEDS_OLIMEXT32U4_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define LEDS_PORTB_LEDS       (LEDS_LED1)
+			#define LEDS_PORTD_LEDS       (LEDS_LED2)
+			#define LEDS_PORTE_LEDS       (LEDS_LED3)
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 0)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 5)
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  |=  LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;
+				PORTB &= ~LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;
+				DDRD  |=  LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+				DDRE  |=  LEDS_PORTE_LEDS;
+				PORTE &= ~LEDS_PORTE_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  &= ~LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;
+				PORTB &= ~LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;
+				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+				DDRE  &= ~LEDS_PORTE_LEDS;
+				PORTE &= ~LEDS_PORTE_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB |= (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);
+				PORTD |= (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);
+				PORTE |= (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);
+				PORTD &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);
+				PORTE &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LEDS_PORTB_LEDS) | (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS));
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) | (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS));
+				PORTE = ((PORTE & ~LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) | (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS));
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS)) | (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS));
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS)) | (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS));
+				PORTE = ((PORTE & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS)) | (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS));
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PINB  = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);
+				PIND  = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);
+				PINE  = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return ((PORTB & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS) | (PORTD & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) | (PORTE & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS));
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/RZUSBSTICK/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/RZUSBSTICK/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6fc366673
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/RZUSBSTICK/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Atmel RZUSBSTICK.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_RZUSBSTICK
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_RZUSBSTICK RZUSBSTICK
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Atmel RZUSBSTICK.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Atmel RZUSBSTICK.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_RZUSBSTICK_H__
+#define __BOARD_RZUSBSTICK_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/RZUSBSTICK/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/RZUSBSTICK/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6ebcdfc6b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/RZUSBSTICK/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,175 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel RZUSBSTICK.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_RZUSBSTICK
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_RZUSBSTICK RZUSBSTICK
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel RZUSBSTICK.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel RZUSBSTICK.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Blue</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Red</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.5</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.6</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Yellow</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.7</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_RZUSBSTICK_H__
+#define __LEDS_RZUSBSTICK_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define LEDS_PORTD_LEDS       (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+			#define LEDS_PORTE_LEDS       (LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+			#define LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT 4
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 7)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 5)
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        ((1 << 6) >> LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)
+
+			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED4        ((1 << 7) >> LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  |=  LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_LED1;
+				PORTD |=  LEDS_LED2;
+
+				DDRE  |=  (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);
+				PORTE |=  (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+
+				DDRE  &= ~(LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);
+				PORTE &= ~(LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD |=  (LEDMask & LEDS_LED1);
+				PORTD &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_LED2);
+				PORTE &= ~((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_LED1);
+				PORTD |=  (LEDMask & LEDS_LED2);
+				PORTE |=  ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = (((PORTD & ~LEDS_LED1) |  (LEDMask & LEDS_LED1)) |
+				         ((PORTD |  LEDS_LED2) & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_LED2)));
+				PORTE = ((PORTE | (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)) &
+				        ~((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT));
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = (((PORTD & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_LED1)) |  (ActiveMask & LEDS_LED1)) |
+				         ((PORTD |  (LEDMask & LEDS_LED2)) & ~(ActiveMask & LEDS_LED2)));
+				PORTE = ((PORTE | ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)) &
+				        ~((ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT));
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PIND  = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);
+				PINE  = ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (((PORTD & LEDS_LED1) | (~PORTD & LEDS_LED2)) |
+				        ((~PORTE & (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)) >> LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT));
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/SPARKFUN8U2/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/SPARKFUN8U2/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..49cc2e510
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/SPARKFUN8U2/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Sparkfun ATMEGA8U2 breakout board.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_SPARKFUN8U2
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_SPARKFUN8U2 SPARKFUN8U2
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Sparkfun ATMEGA8U2 breakout board.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Sparkfun ATMEGA8U2 breakout board (http://www.sparkfun.com/products/10277).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_SPARKFUN8U2_H__
+#define __BOARD_SPARKFUN8U2_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/SPARKFUN8U2/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/SPARKFUN8U2/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b8eb4abfe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/SPARKFUN8U2/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Sparkfun ATMEGA8U2 breakout board.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_SPARKFUN8U2
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_SPARKFUN8U2 SPARKFUN8U2
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Sparkfun ATMEGA8U2 breakout board.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Sparkfun ATMEGA8U2 breakout board (http://www.sparkfun.com/products/10277).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTB.4</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_SPARKFUN8U2_H__
+#define __LEDS_SPARKFUN8U2_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 4)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    LEDS_LED1
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTB |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTB &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB = ((PORTB | LEDS_ALL_LEDS) & ~LEDMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTB = ((PORTB | LEDMask) & ~ActiveMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PINB  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (~PORTB & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STANGE_ISP/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STANGE_ISP/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..36594fcc0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STANGE_ISP/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Dimex Stange-ISP board.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_STANGE_ISP
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_STANGE_ISP STANGE_ISP
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Dimex Stange-ISP board.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Dimex Stange-ISP board (http://www.diamex.de/dxshop/USB-ISP-Programmer-fuer-Atmel-AVR).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_STANGE_ISP_H__
+#define __BOARD_STANGE_ISP_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Buttons.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware Buttons mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STANGE_ISP/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STANGE_ISP/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d4576b688
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STANGE_ISP/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific button driver header for the Dimex Stange-ISP board.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_STANGE_ISP
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_STANGE_ISP STANGE_ISP
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Dimex Stange-ISP.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Dimex Stange-ISP board (http://www.diamex.de/dxshop/USB-ISP-Programmer-fuer-Atmel-AVR).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_STANGE_ISP_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_STANGE_ISP_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STANGE_ISP/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STANGE_ISP/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9f1068379
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STANGE_ISP/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,138 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Dimex Stange-ISP board.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_STANGE_ISP
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_STANGE_ISP STANGE_ISP
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Dimex Stange-ISP board.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Dimex Stange-ISP board (http://www.diamex.de/dxshop/USB-ISP-Programmer-fuer-Atmel-AVR).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.0</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Red</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.1</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_STANGE_ISP_LEDS_H__
+#define __LEDS_STANGE_ISP_LEDS_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+	#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+	#if defined(__cplusplus)
+	extern "C" {
+	#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+	#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+		#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 0)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 1)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs (const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD | LEDS_ALL_LEDS) & ~LEDMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs ( const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD | LEDMask) & ~ActiveMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PIND  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (~PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+	#if defined(__cplusplus)
+	}
+	#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bda925bb5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Atmel STK525.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_STK525
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_STK525 STK525
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Atmel STK525.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Atmel STK525.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_STK525_H__
+#define __BOARD_STK525_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Buttons.h"
+		#include "../../Dataflash.h"
+		#include "../../Joystick.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware Buttons mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+
+			/** Indicates the board has a hardware Dataflash mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_DATAFLASH
+
+			/** Indicates the board has a hardware Joystick mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_JOYSTICK
+
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..532a46f1d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel STK525.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_STK525
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_STK525 STK525
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel STK525.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel STK525.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.2</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_STK525_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_STK525_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 2)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTE |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTE &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PINE & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/Dataflash.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/Dataflash.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..825a7a524
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/Dataflash.h
@@ -0,0 +1,222 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel STK525.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Dataflash_STK525
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash
+ *  \defgroup Group_Dataflash_STK525 STK525
+ *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel STK525.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel STK525.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Select Pin</th><th>SPI Port</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>DATAFLASH_CHIP1</td><td>AT45DB321C (4MB)</td><td>PORTB.4</td><td>SPI0</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __DATAFLASH_STK525_H__
+#define __DATAFLASH_STK525_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../../Misc/AT45DB321C.h"
+		#include "../../../Peripheral/SPI.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK                DATAFLASH_CHIP1
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR                 DDRB
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT                PORTB
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS                 1
+
+			/** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP                    0
+
+			/** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP1                      (1 << 4)
+
+			/** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash IC. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE                  512
+
+			/** Total number of pages inside the board's dataflash IC. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                      8192
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Initializes the dataflash driver so that commands and data may be sent to an attached dataflash IC.
+			 *  The appropriate SPI interface will be automatically configured.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_Init(void)
+			{
+				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR  |= DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;
+				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT |= DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;
+
+				SPI_Init(SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2 | SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST | SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING | SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING | SPI_MODE_MASTER);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns a byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash
+			 *
+			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+				return SPI_TransferByte(Byte);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and ignores the next byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+				SPI_SendByte(Byte);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a dummy byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns the next byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void)
+			{
+				return SPI_ReceiveByte();
+			}
+
+			/** Determines the currently selected dataflash chip.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Mask of the currently selected Dataflash chip, either \ref DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP if no chip is selected
+			 *          or a DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is the chip number).
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void)
+			{
+				return (~DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT & DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK);
+			}
+
+			/** Selects the given dataflash chip.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in]  ChipMask  Mask of the Dataflash IC to select, in the form of a \c DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is
+			 *              the chip number).
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask)
+			{
+				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT = ((DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT | DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK) & ~ChipMask);
+			}
+
+			/** Deselects the current dataflash chip, so that no dataflash is selected. */
+			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void)
+			{
+				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP);
+			}
+
+			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to
+			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one
+			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside
+			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs
+			 *  are deselected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from
+			 *                          0 to ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress)
+			{
+				Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+				if (PageAddress >= DATAFLASH_PAGES)
+				  return;
+
+				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+			}
+
+			/** Toggles the select line of the currently selected dataflash IC, so that it is ready to receive
+			 *  a new command.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(void)
+			{
+				uint8_t SelectedChipMask = Dataflash_GetSelectedChip();
+
+				Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+				Dataflash_SelectChip(SelectedChipMask);
+			}
+
+			/** Spin-loops while the currently selected dataflash is busy executing a command, such as a main
+			 *  memory page program or main memory to buffer transfer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(void)
+			{
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+				while (!(Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_READY));
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with
+			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-bit address.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC
+			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress,
+			                                              const uint16_t BufferByte)
+			{
+				Dataflash_SendByte(PageAddress >> 6);
+				Dataflash_SendByte((PageAddress << 2) | (BufferByte >> 8));
+				Dataflash_SendByte(BufferByte);
+			}
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/Joystick.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/Joystick.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6b9b4f42c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/Joystick.h
@@ -0,0 +1,130 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel STK525.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Joystick_STK525
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Joystick
+ *  \defgroup Group_Joystick_STK525 STK525
+ *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel STK525.
+ *
+ *  Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel STK525.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Left Port Pin</th><th>Up Port Pin</th><th>Right Port Pin</th><th>Down Port Pin</th><th>Press Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>PORTB.6</td><td>PORTB.7</td><td>PORTE.4</td><td>PORTE.5</td><td>PORTB.5</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __JOYSTICK_STK525_H__
+#define __JOYSTICK_STK525_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define JOY_BMASK                 ((1 << 5) | (1 << 6) | (1 << 7))
+			#define JOY_EMASK                 ((1 << 4) | (1 << 5))
+
+			#define JOY_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT      1
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */
+			#define JOY_LEFT                  (1 << 6)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */
+			#define JOY_RIGHT                ((1 << 4) >> JOY_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */
+			#define JOY_UP                    (1 << 7)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */
+			#define JOY_DOWN                 ((1 << 5) >> JOY_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */
+			#define JOY_PRESS                 (1 << 5)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Joystick_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  &= ~JOY_BMASK;
+				DDRE  &= ~JOY_EMASK;
+
+				PORTB |=  JOY_BMASK;
+				PORTE |=  JOY_EMASK;
+			}
+
+			static inline void Joystick_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  &= ~JOY_BMASK;
+				DDRE  &= ~JOY_EMASK;
+
+				PORTB &= ~JOY_BMASK;
+				PORTE &= ~JOY_EMASK;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return (((uint8_t)~PINB & JOY_BMASK) | (((uint8_t)~PINE & JOY_EMASK) >> JOY_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT));
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..53948b461
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,147 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel STK525.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_STK525
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_STK525 STK525
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel STK525.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel STK525.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.4</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.5</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.6</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED4</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_STK525_H__
+#define __LEDS_STK525_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 4)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 5)
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 7)
+
+			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED4        (1 << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PIND  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6be146fcd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Atmel STK526.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_STK526
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_STK526 STK526
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Atmel STK526.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Atmel STK526.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_STK526_H__
+#define __BOARD_STK526_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Buttons.h"
+		#include "../../Dataflash.h"
+		#include "../../Joystick.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware Buttons mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+
+			/** Indicates the board has a hardware Dataflash mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_DATAFLASH
+
+			/** Indicates the board has a hardware Joystick mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_JOYSTICK
+
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bc598d389
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel STK526.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_STK526
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_STK526 STK526
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel STK526.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel STK526.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_STK526_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_STK526_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/Dataflash.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/Dataflash.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d2a59b12e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/Dataflash.h
@@ -0,0 +1,222 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel STK525.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Dataflash_STK526
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash
+ *  \defgroup Group_Dataflash_STK526 STK526
+ *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel STK525.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel STK525.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Select Pin</th><th>SPI Port</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>DATAFLASH_CHIP1</td><td>AT45DB642D (8MB)</td><td>PORTC.2</td><td>SPI0</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __DATAFLASH_STK526_H__
+#define __DATAFLASH_STK526_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../../Misc/AT45DB642D.h"
+		#include "../../../Peripheral/SPI.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK                DATAFLASH_CHIP1
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR                 DDRC
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT                PORTC
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS                 1
+
+			/** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP                    0
+
+			/** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP1                      (1 << 2)
+
+			/** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash IC. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE                  1024
+
+			/** Total number of pages inside the board's dataflash IC. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                      8192
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Initializes the dataflash driver so that commands and data may be sent to an attached dataflash IC.
+			 *  The appropriate SPI interface will be automatically configured.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_Init(void)
+			{
+				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR  |= DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;
+				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT |= DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;
+
+				SPI_Init(SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2 | SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST | SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING | SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING | SPI_MODE_MASTER);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns a byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash
+			 *
+			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+				return SPI_TransferByte(Byte);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and ignores the next byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+				SPI_SendByte(Byte);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a dummy byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns the next byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void)
+			{
+				return SPI_ReceiveByte();
+			}
+
+			/** Determines the currently selected dataflash chip.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Mask of the currently selected Dataflash chip, either \ref DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP if no chip is selected
+			 *          or a DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is the chip number).
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void)
+			{
+				return (~DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT & DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK);
+			}
+
+			/** Selects the given dataflash chip.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in]  ChipMask  Mask of the Dataflash IC to select, in the form of a \c DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is
+			 *              the chip number).
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask)
+			{
+				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT = ((DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT | DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK) & ~ChipMask);
+			}
+
+			/** Deselects the current dataflash chip, so that no dataflash is selected. */
+			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void)
+			{
+				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP);
+			}
+
+			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to
+			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one
+			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside
+			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs
+			 *  are deselected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from
+			 *                          0 to ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress)
+			{
+				Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+				if (PageAddress >= DATAFLASH_PAGES)
+				  return;
+
+				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+			}
+
+			/** Toggles the select line of the currently selected dataflash IC, so that it is ready to receive
+			 *  a new command.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(void)
+			{
+				uint8_t SelectedChipMask = Dataflash_GetSelectedChip();
+
+				Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+				Dataflash_SelectChip(SelectedChipMask);
+			}
+
+			/** Spin-loops while the currently selected dataflash is busy executing a command, such as a main
+			 *  memory page program or main memory to buffer transfer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(void)
+			{
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+				while (!(Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_READY));
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with
+			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-bit address.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC
+			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress,
+			                                              const uint16_t BufferByte)
+			{
+				Dataflash_SendByte(PageAddress >> 5);
+				Dataflash_SendByte((PageAddress << 3) | (BufferByte >> 8));
+				Dataflash_SendByte(BufferByte);
+			}
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/Joystick.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/Joystick.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7decabc5d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/Joystick.h
@@ -0,0 +1,123 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel STK526.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Joystick_STK526
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Joystick
+ *  \defgroup Group_Joystick_STK526 STK526
+ *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel STK526.
+ *
+ *  Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel STK526.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Left Port Pin</th><th>Up Port Pin</th><th>Right Port Pin</th><th>Down Port Pin</th><th>Press Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>PORTB.4</td><td>PORTB.5</td><td>PORTB.6</td><td>PORTB.7</td><td>PORTB.0</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __JOYSTICK_STK526_H__
+#define __JOYSTICK_STK526_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define JOY_BMASK                 ((1 << 0) | (1 << 4) | (1 << 5) | (1 << 6) | (1 << 7))
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */
+			#define JOY_LEFT                  (1 << 4)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */
+			#define JOY_RIGHT                 (1 << 6)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */
+			#define JOY_UP                    (1 << 5)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */
+			#define JOY_DOWN                  (1 << 7)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */
+			#define JOY_PRESS                 (1 << 0)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Joystick_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  &= ~JOY_BMASK;
+
+				PORTB |=  JOY_BMASK;
+			}
+
+			static inline void Joystick_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  &= ~JOY_BMASK;
+
+				PORTB &= ~JOY_BMASK;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((uint8_t)~PINB & JOY_BMASK);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..71525e961
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,147 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel STK526.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_STK526
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_STK526 STK526
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel STK526.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel STK526.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.1</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.0</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.5</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED4</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.4</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_STK526_H__
+#define __LEDS_STK526_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 1)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 0)
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 5)
+
+			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED4        (1 << 4)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PIND  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TEENSY/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TEENSY/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..52e4d6114
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TEENSY/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the PJRC Teensy 1.x/2.x boards.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_TEENSY
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_TEENSY2 TEENSY2
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the PJRC Teensy 2 boards.
+ *
+ *  See \ref Group_BoardInfo_TEENSY for more details.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_TEENSY TEENSY
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the PJRC Teensy 1.x/2.x boards.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the PJRC Teensy boards (http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/index.html).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_TEENSY_H__
+#define __BOARD_TEENSY_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TEENSY/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TEENSY/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9f872247e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TEENSY/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,176 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the PJRC Teensy 1.x/2.x boards.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_TEENSY
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_TEENSY2 TEENSY2
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the PJRC Teensy 2 boards.
+ *
+ *  See \ref Group_LEDs_TEENSY for more details.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_TEENSY TEENSY
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the PJRC Teensy 1.x/2.x boards.
+ *
+ *  \note For version 2 Teensy boards, compile with <code>BOARD = TEENSY2</code>.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the PJRC Teensy boards (http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/index.html).
+ *
+ *  <b>TEENSY</b>:
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.6</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  <b>TEENSY2</b>:
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.6</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_TEENSY_H__
+#define __LEDS_TEENSY_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    LEDS_LED1
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+
+				#if (BOARD == BOARD_TEENSY2)
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				#else
+				PORTD |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				#endif
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				#if (BOARD == BOARD_TEENSY2)
+				PORTD |=  LEDMask;
+				#else
+				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;
+				#endif
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				#if (BOARD == BOARD_TEENSY2)
+				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;
+				#else
+				PORTD |=  LEDMask;
+				#endif
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				#if (BOARD == BOARD_TEENSY2)
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
+				#else
+				PORTD = ((PORTD | LEDS_ALL_LEDS) & ~LEDMask);
+				#endif
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				#if (BOARD == BOARD_TEENSY2)
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
+				#else
+				PORTD = ((PORTD | LEDMask) & ~ActiveMask);
+				#endif
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PIND  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				#if (BOARD == BOARD_TEENSY2)
+				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+				#else
+				return (~PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+				#endif
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TUL/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TUL/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7759c37cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TUL/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the TUL.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_TUL
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_TUL TUL
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the TUL.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Busware TUL (http://www.busware.de/tiki-index.php?page=TUL).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_TUL_H__
+#define __BOARD_TUL_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Buttons.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware Buttons mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TUL/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TUL/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bbcca263d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TUL/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the TUL.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_TUL
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_TUL TUL
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the TUL.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Busware TUL (http://www.busware.de/tiki-index.php?page=TUL).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.2</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_TUL_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_TUL_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 2)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTE |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTE &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PINE & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TUL/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TUL/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8a14b8a9a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/TUL/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Busware TUL.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_TUL
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_TUL TUL
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Busware TUL.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Busware TUL (http://www.busware.de/tiki-index.php?page=TUL).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTF.0</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_TUL_H__
+#define __LEDS_TUL_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 0)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    LEDS_LED1
+
+			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRF  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTF &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRF  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTF &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTF |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTF &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTF = ((PORTF & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTF = ((PORTF & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PINF  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (PORTF & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/U2S/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/U2S/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..128580a95
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/U2S/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the U2S.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_U2S
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_U2S U2S
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the U2S.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the U2S (http://sites.google.com/site/megau2s/).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_U2S__
+#define __BOARD_U2S__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Buttons.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has a hardware Buttons mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+
+			/** Indicates the board has a hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/U2S/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/U2S/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..30f0a9f5b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/U2S/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the U2S.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_U2S
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_U2S U2S
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the U2S.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the U2S (http://sites.google.com/site/megau2s/).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTC.4</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_U2S__
+#define __BUTTONS_U2S__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 4)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRC  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTC |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRC  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTC &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PINC & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/U2S/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/U2S/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d7cf7cfb1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/U2S/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the U2S.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_U2S
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_U2S U2S
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the U2S.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the U2S (http://sites.google.com/site/megau2s/).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Red</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTC.2</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_U2S__
+#define __LEDS_U2S__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 2)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    LEDS_LED1
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRC  |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTC |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRC  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTC &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTC &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTC |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTC = ((PORTC | LEDS_ALL_LEDS) & ~LEDMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTC = ((PORTC | LEDMask) & ~ActiveMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PINC  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (~PORTC & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/UDIP/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/UDIP/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3a400053c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/UDIP/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the UDIP.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_UDIP
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_UDIP UDIP
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the UDIP.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Linnix UDIP (http://linnix.com/udip/).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_UDIP_H__
+#define __BOARD_UDIP_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Buttons.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware Buttons mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/UDIP/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/UDIP/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..dab29a60a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/UDIP/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the UDIP.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_UDIP
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_UDIP UDIP
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the UDIP.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Linnix UDIP (http://linnix.com/udip/).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_UDIP_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_UDIP_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/UDIP/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/UDIP/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fbcc8ff66
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/UDIP/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,163 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Linnix UDIP.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_UDIP
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_UDIP UDIP
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Linnix UDIP.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Linnix UDIP (http://linnix.com/udip/).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>Bicolor Indicator 1</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.6</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Red</td><td>Bicolor Indicator 1</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.5</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Green</td><td>Bicolor Indicator 2</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.5</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED4</td><td>Red</td><td>Bicolor Indicator 2</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.4</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_UDIP_H__
+#define __LEDS_UDIP_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define LEDS_PORTB_LEDS       (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+			#define LEDS_PORTD_LEDS       (LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+			#define LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT 1
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 5)
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        ((1 << 5) >> LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT)
+
+			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED4        ((1 << 4) >> LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRB |= LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;
+				DDRD |= (LEDS_PORTD_LEDS << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRB &= ~LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;
+				DDRD &= ~(LEDS_PORTD_LEDS << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB |= (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);
+				PORTD |= ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);
+				PORTD &= ~((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB = (PORTB & ~LEDS_PORTB_LEDS) | (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);
+				PORTD = (PORTD & ~(LEDS_PORTD_LEDS << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT)) |
+				        ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTB = (PORTB & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS)) | (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);
+				PORTD = (PORTD & ~((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT)) |
+				        ((ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PINB  = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);
+				PIND  = ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT);
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return ((PORTB & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS) | ((PORTD & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) >> LEDS_PORTD_MASK_SHIFT));
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/UNO/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/UNO/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b23f8d0fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/UNO/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Arduino Uno.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_UNO
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_UNO UNO
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Arduino Uno.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Arduino Uno (http://arduino.cc/en/Main/ArduinoBoardUno).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_UNO_H__
+#define __BOARD_UNO_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/UNO/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/UNO/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..006c3a5dd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/UNO/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,139 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Arduino Uno.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_UNO
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_UNO UNO
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Arduino Uno.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Arduino Uno (http://arduino.cc/en/Main/ArduinoBoardUno).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Yellow</td><td>RX</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.4</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Yellow</td><td>TX</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.5</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_UNO_H__
+#define __LEDS_UNO_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 4)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 5)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD | LEDS_ALL_LEDS) & ~LEDMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD | LEDMask) & ~ActiveMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PIND  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (~PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USB2AX/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USB2AX/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..05a4dea5a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USB2AX/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,105 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Xevelabs USB2AX.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_USB2AX
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_USB2AX_V31 USB2AX_V31
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Xevelabs USB2AX revision 3.1.
+ *
+ *  See \ref Group_BoardInfo_USB2AX for more details.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_USB2AX_V3 USB2AX_V3
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Xevelabs USB2AX revision 3.
+ *
+ *  See \ref Group_BoardInfo_USB2AX for more details.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_USB2AX USB2AX
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Xevelabs USB2AX.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Xevelabs USB2AX (http://paranoidstudio.assembla.com/wiki/show/paranoidstudio/USB2AX).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_USB2AX_H__
+#define __BOARD_USB2AX_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Buttons.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			#if (BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX) || (BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX_V3) || \
+			    defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				#include "../../Buttons.h"
+
+				/** Indicates the board has hardware Buttons mounted. */
+				#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+			#endif
+
+			#if ((BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX) || (BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX_V3) || \
+			     (BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX_V31) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
+				#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+				/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+				#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+			#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USB2AX/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USB2AX/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..170a9affb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USB2AX/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Xevelabs USB2AX.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_USB2AX
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_USB2AX_V31 USB2AX_V31
+ *  \brief Board specific Button driver header for the Xevelabs USB2AX revision 3.1.
+ *
+ *  See \ref Group_Buttons_USB2AX for more details.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_USB2AX_V3 USB2AX_V3
+ *  \brief Board specific Button driver header for the Xevelabs USB2AX revision 3.
+ *
+ *  See \ref Group_Buttons_USB2AX for more details.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_USB2AX USB2AX
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Xevelabs USB2AX revisions 1 and 2.
+ *
+ *  \note For version 3 USB2AX boards, compile with <code>BOARD = USB2AX_V3</code> and for version 3.1, with <code>BOARD = USB2AX_V31</code>.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Paranoid Studio USB2AX (http://paranoidstudio.assembla.com/wiki/show/paranoidstudio/USB2AX).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_USB2AX_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_USB2AX_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USB2AX/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USB2AX/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..03550fc00
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USB2AX/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,218 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Xevelabs USB2AX.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_USB2AX
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_USB2AX_V31 USB2AX_V31
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Xevelabs USB2AX revision 3.1.
+ *
+ *  See \ref Group_LEDs_USB2AX for more details.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_USB2AX_V3 USB2AX_V3
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Xevelabs USB2AX revision 3.
+ *
+ *  See \ref Group_LEDs_USB2AX for more details.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_USB2AX USB2AX
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Xevelabs USB2AX revisions 1 and 2.
+ *
+ *  \note For version 3 USB2AX boards, compile with <code>BOARD = USB2AX_V3</code> and for version 3.1, with <code>BOARD = USB2AX_V31</code>.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Xevelabs USB2AX (http://paranoidstudio.assembla.com/wiki/show/paranoidstudio/USB2AX).
+ *
+ *  <b>USB2AX</b>:
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTC.6</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  <b>USB2AX_V3</b>:
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.1</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  <b>USB2AX_V31</b>:
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.5</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Red</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.6</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_USB2AX_H__
+#define __LEDS_USB2AX_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#if (BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX_V31)
+                #define USB2AX_LEDS_LED1   (1 << 5)
+                #define USB2AX_LEDS_LED2   (1 << 6)
+            #elif (BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX_V3)
+				#define USB2AX_LEDS_LED1   (1 << 1)
+                #define USB2AX_LEDS_LED2   0
+			#else
+				#define USB2AX_LEDS_LED1   (1 << 6)
+                #define USB2AX_LEDS_LED2   0
+			#endif
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        USB2AX_LEDS_LED1
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        USB2AX_LEDS_LED2
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				#if (BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX)
+				DDRC  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTC &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				#else
+				DDRD  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				#endif
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				#if (BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX)
+				DDRC  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTC &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				#else
+				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				#endif
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				#if (BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX)
+				PORTC |= LEDMask;
+				#else
+				PORTD |= LEDMask;
+				#endif
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				#if (BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX)
+				PORTC &= ~LEDMask;
+				#else
+				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;
+				#endif
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				#if (BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX)
+				PORTC = ((PORTC & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
+				#else
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
+				#endif
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				#if (BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX)
+				PORTC = ((PORTC & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
+				#else
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
+				#endif
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				#if (BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX)
+				PINC  = LEDMask;
+				#else
+				PIND  = LEDMask;
+				#endif
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				#if (BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX)
+				return (PORTC & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+				#else
+				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+				#endif
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBFOO/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBFOO/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..15c41ab5e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBFOO/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Kernel Concepts USBFOO.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_USBFOO
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_USBFOO USBFOO
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Kernel Concepts USBFOO.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Kernel Concepts USBFOO (http://shop.kernelconcepts.de/product_info.php?products_id=102).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_USBFOO_H__
+#define __BOARD_USBFOO_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Buttons.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware Buttons mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBFOO/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBFOO/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e901437d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBFOO/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Kernel Concepts USBFOO.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_USBFOO
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_USBFOO USBFOO
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Kernel Concepts USBFOO.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Kernel Concepts USBFOO (http://shop.kernelconcepts.de/product_info.php?products_id=102).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_USBFOO_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_USBFOO_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBFOO/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBFOO/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e396630df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBFOO/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Kernel Concepts USBFOO.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_USBFOO
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_USBFOO USBFOO
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Kernel Concepts USBFOO.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Kernel Concepts USBFOO (http://shop.kernelconcepts.de/product_info.php?products_id=102).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.4</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_USBFOO_H__
+#define __LEDS_USBFOO_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 4)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    LEDS_LED1
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD | LEDS_ALL_LEDS) & ~LEDMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD | LEDMask) & ~ActiveMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PIND  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (~PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..366305656
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Atmel USBKEY.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_USBKEY
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_USBKEY USBKEY
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Atmel USBKEY.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Atmel USBKEY.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_USBKEY_H__
+#define __BOARD_USBKEY_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Buttons.h"
+		#include "../../Dataflash.h"
+		#include "../../Joystick.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware Buttons mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+
+			/** Indicates the board has a hardware Dataflash mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_DATAFLASH
+
+			/** Indicates the board has a hardware Joystick mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_JOYSTICK
+
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3ec7b3acd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel USBKEY.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_USBKEY
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_USBKEY USBKEY
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel USBKEY.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel USBKEY.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.2</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_USBKEY_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_USBKEY_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 2)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTE |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRE  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTE &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PINE & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/Dataflash.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/Dataflash.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..85a8dda3d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/Dataflash.h
@@ -0,0 +1,237 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel USBKEY.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Dataflash_USBKEY
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash
+ *  \defgroup Group_Dataflash_USBKEY USBKEY
+ *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel USBKEY.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel USBKEY board.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Select Pin</th><th>SPI Port</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>DATAFLASH_CHIP1</td><td>AT45DB642D (8MB)</td><td>PORTE.0</td><td>SPI0</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>DATAFLASH_CHIP2</td><td>AT45DB642D (8MB)</td><td>PORTE.1</td><td>SPI0</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __DATAFLASH_USBKEY_H__
+#define __DATAFLASH_USBKEY_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../../Misc/AT45DB642D.h"
+		#include "../../../Peripheral/SPI.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK                (DATAFLASH_CHIP1 | DATAFLASH_CHIP2)
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR                 DDRE
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT                PORTE
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS                 2
+
+			/** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP                    0
+
+			/** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP1                      (1 << 0)
+
+			/** Mask for the second dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP2                      (1 << 1)
+
+			/** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash ICs. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE                  1024
+
+			/** Total number of pages inside each of the board's dataflash ICs. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                      8192
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Initializes the dataflash driver so that commands and data may be sent to an attached dataflash IC.
+			 *  The appropriate SPI interface will be automatically configured.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_Init(void)
+			{
+				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR  |= DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;
+				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT |= DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;
+
+				SPI_Init(SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2 | SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST | SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING | SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING | SPI_MODE_MASTER);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns a byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash
+			 *
+			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+				return SPI_TransferByte(Byte);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and ignores the next byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+				SPI_SendByte(Byte);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a dummy byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns the next byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void)
+			{
+				return SPI_ReceiveByte();
+			}
+
+			/** Determines the currently selected dataflash chip.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Mask of the currently selected Dataflash chip, either \ref DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP if no chip is selected
+			 *          or a DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is the chip number).
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void)
+			{
+				return (~DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT & DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK);
+			}
+
+			/** Selects the given dataflash chip.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in]  ChipMask  Mask of the Dataflash IC to select, in the form of a \c DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is
+			 *              the chip number).
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask)
+			{
+				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT = ((DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT | DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK) & ~ChipMask);
+			}
+
+			/** Deselects the current dataflash chip, so that no dataflash is selected. */
+			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void)
+			{
+				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP);
+			}
+
+			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to
+			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one
+			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside
+			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs
+			 *  are deselected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from
+			 *                          0 to ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress)
+			{
+				Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+				if (PageAddress >= (DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  return;
+
+				#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+					if (PageAddress & 0x01)
+					  Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+					else
+					  Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+				#else
+					Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+				#endif
+			}
+
+			/** Toggles the select line of the currently selected dataflash IC, so that it is ready to receive
+			 *  a new command.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(void)
+			{
+				uint8_t SelectedChipMask = Dataflash_GetSelectedChip();
+
+				Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+				Dataflash_SelectChip(SelectedChipMask);
+			}
+
+			/** Spin-loops while the currently selected dataflash is busy executing a command, such as a main
+			 *  memory page program or main memory to buffer transfer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(void)
+			{
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+				while (!(Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_READY));
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with
+			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-bit address.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC
+			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress,
+			                                              const uint16_t BufferByte)
+			{
+				#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+					PageAddress >>= 1;
+				#endif
+
+				Dataflash_SendByte(PageAddress >> 5);
+				Dataflash_SendByte((PageAddress << 3) | (BufferByte >> 8));
+				Dataflash_SendByte(BufferByte);
+			}
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/Joystick.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/Joystick.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..45d5a66a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/Joystick.h
@@ -0,0 +1,130 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel USBKEY.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Joystick_USBKEY
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Joystick
+ *  \defgroup Group_Joystick_USBKEY USBKEY
+ *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel USBKEY.
+ *
+ *  Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel USBKEY.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Left Port Pin</th><th>Up Port Pin</th><th>Right Port Pin</th><th>Down Port Pin</th><th>Press Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>PORTB.6</td><td>PORTB.7</td><td>PORTE.4</td><td>PORTE.5</td><td>PORTB.5</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __JOYSTICK_USBKEY_H__
+#define __JOYSTICK_USBKEY_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define JOY_BMASK                 ((1 << 5) | (1 << 6) | (1 << 7))
+			#define JOY_EMASK                 ((1 << 4) | (1 << 5))
+
+			#define JOY_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT      1
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */
+			#define JOY_LEFT                  (1 << 6)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */
+			#define JOY_RIGHT                ((1 << 4) >> JOY_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */
+			#define JOY_UP                    (1 << 7)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */
+			#define JOY_DOWN                 ((1 << 5) >> JOY_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */
+			#define JOY_PRESS                 (1 << 5)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Joystick_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  &= ~JOY_BMASK;
+				DDRE  &= ~JOY_EMASK;
+
+				PORTB |=  JOY_BMASK;
+				PORTE |=  JOY_EMASK;
+			}
+
+			static inline void Joystick_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  &= ~JOY_BMASK;
+				DDRE  &= ~JOY_EMASK;
+
+				PORTB &= ~JOY_BMASK;
+				PORTE &= ~JOY_EMASK;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return (((uint8_t)~PINB & JOY_BMASK) | (((uint8_t)~PINE & JOY_EMASK) >> JOY_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT));
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..dc02da52e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,147 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel USBKEY.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_USBKEY
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_USBKEY USBKEY
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel USBKEY.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel USBKEY.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Red</td><td>Bicolor Indicator 1</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.4</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Green</td><td>Bicolor Indicator 1</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.5</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Red</td><td>Bicolor Indicator 2</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.6</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED4</td><td>Green</td><td>Bicolor Indicator 2</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_USBKEY_H__
+#define __LEDS_USBKEY_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 4)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 5)
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 7)
+
+			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED4        (1 << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LEDMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDMask) | ActiveMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PIND  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBTINYMKII/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBTINYMKII/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..492aced78
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBTINYMKII/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for Tom's USBTINY MKII.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_USBTINYMKII
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_USBTINYMKII USBTINYMKII
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for Tom's USBTINY MKII.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for Tom's USBTINY MKII (http://tom-itx.dyndns.org:81/~webpage/).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_USBTINYMKII_H__
+#define __BOARD_USBTINYMKII_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Buttons.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware Buttons mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBTINYMKII/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBTINYMKII/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..682239cd7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBTINYMKII/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for Tom's USBTINY MKII.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_USBTINYMKII
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_USBTINYMKII USBTINYMKII
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for Tom's USBTINY MKII.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for Tom's USBTINY MKII (http://tom-itx.dyndns.org:81/~webpage/).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>HWB Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.7</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_USBTINYMKII_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_USBTINYMKII_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1      (1 << 7)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD |=  BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRD  &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTD &= ~BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PIND & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ^ BUTTONS_BUTTON1);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBTINYMKII/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBTINYMKII/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a2decbc49
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBTINYMKII/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,143 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for Tom's USBTINY MKII.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_USBTINYMKII
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_USBTINYMKII USBTINYMKII
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for Tom's USBTINY MKII.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for Tom's USBTINY MKII (http://tom-itx.dyndns.org:81/~webpage/).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Red</td><td>Bicolor Indicator 1</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.6</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Green</td><td>Bicolor Indicator 1</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.7</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Red</td><td>Target Power</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.5</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_USBTINYMKII_H__
+#define __LEDS_USBTINYMKII_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 7)
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 5)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  |=  LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTB &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTB &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask)
+			{
+				PORTB |= LedMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask)
+			{
+				PORTB &= ~LedMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask)
+			{
+				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LedMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTB = ((PORTB & ~LedMask) | ActiveMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PINB  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (PORTB & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/XPLAIN/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/XPLAIN/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..57ad4c98b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/XPLAIN/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the original Atmel XPLAIN.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_XPLAIN
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_XPLAIN_REV1 XPLAIN_REV1
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the original Atmel XPLAIN, revision 1.
+ *
+ *  See \ref Group_BoardInfo_XPLAIN for more details.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_XPLAIN XPLAIN
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the original Atmel XPLAIN.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the original Atmel XPLAIN.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_XPLAIN_H__
+#define __BOARD_XPLAIN_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Dataflash.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has a hardware Dataflash mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_DATAFLASH
+
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/XPLAIN/Dataflash.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/XPLAIN/Dataflash.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a8078f61f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/XPLAIN/Dataflash.h
@@ -0,0 +1,245 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the original Atmel XPLAIN.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Dataflash_XPLAIN
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash
+ *  \defgroup Group_Dataflash_XPLAIN_REV1 XPLAIN_REV1
+ *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the original Atmel XPLAIN, revision 1.
+ *
+ *  See \ref Group_Dataflash_XPLAIN for more details.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash
+ *  \defgroup Group_Dataflash_XPLAIN XPLAIN
+ *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the original Atmel XPLAIN.
+ *
+ *  \note For the first revision XPLAIN board, compile with <code>BOARD = BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1</code>.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel XPLAIN.
+ *
+ *  <b>Revision 1 Boards</b>:
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Select Pin</th><th>SPI Port</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>DATAFLASH_CHIP1</td><td>AT45DB041D (512KB)</td><td>PORTB.5</td><td>SPI0</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  <b>Other Board Revisions</b>:
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Select Pin</th><th>SPI Port</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>DATAFLASH_CHIP1</td><td>AT45DB642D (8MB)</td><td>PORTB.5</td><td>SPI0</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __DATAFLASH_XPLAIN_H__
+#define __DATAFLASH_XPLAIN_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+		#include "../../../Misc/AT45DB642D.h"
+		#include "../../../Peripheral/SPI.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK                DATAFLASH_CHIP1
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR                 DDRB
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT                PORTB
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS                 1
+
+			/** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP                    0
+
+			/** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP1                      (1 << 5)
+
+			#if ((BOARD != BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
+				/** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash ICs. */
+				#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE              1024
+
+				/** Total number of pages inside each of the board's dataflash ICs. */
+				#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                  8192
+			#else
+				#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE              256
+
+				#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                  2048
+			#endif
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Initializes the dataflash driver so that commands and data may be sent to an attached dataflash IC.
+			 *  The appropriate SPI interface will be automatically configured.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_Init(void)
+			{
+				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR  |= DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;
+				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT |= DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;
+
+				SPI_Init(SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2 | SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST | SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING | SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING | SPI_MODE_MASTER);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns a byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash
+			 *
+			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+				return SPI_TransferByte(Byte);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and ignores the next byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+				SPI_SendByte(Byte);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a dummy byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns the next byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void)
+			{
+				return SPI_ReceiveByte();
+			}
+
+			/** Determines the currently selected dataflash chip.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Mask of the currently selected Dataflash chip, either \ref DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP if no chip is selected
+			 *          or a DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is the chip number).
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void)
+			{
+				return (~DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT & DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK);
+			}
+
+			/** Selects the given dataflash chip.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in]  ChipMask  Mask of the Dataflash IC to select, in the form of a \c DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is
+			 *              the chip number).
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask)
+			{
+				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT = ((DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT | DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK) & ~ChipMask);
+			}
+
+			/** Deselects the current dataflash chip, so that no dataflash is selected. */
+			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void)
+			{
+				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP);
+			}
+
+			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to
+			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one
+			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside
+			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs
+			 *  are deselected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from
+			 *                          0 to ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress)
+			{
+				Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+				if (PageAddress >= DATAFLASH_PAGES)
+				  return;
+
+				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+			}
+
+			/** Toggles the select line of the currently selected dataflash IC, so that it is ready to receive
+			 *  a new command.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(void)
+			{
+				uint8_t SelectedChipMask = Dataflash_GetSelectedChip();
+
+				Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+				Dataflash_SelectChip(SelectedChipMask);
+			}
+
+			/** Spin-loops while the currently selected dataflash is busy executing a command, such as a main
+			 *  memory page program or main memory to buffer transfer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(void)
+			{
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+				while (!(Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_READY));
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with
+			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-bit address.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC
+			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress,
+			                                              const uint16_t BufferByte)
+			{
+				Dataflash_SendByte(PageAddress >> 5);
+				Dataflash_SendByte((PageAddress << 3) | (BufferByte >> 8));
+				Dataflash_SendByte(BufferByte);
+			}
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/XPLAIN/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/XPLAIN/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..338b1b419
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/XPLAIN/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the original Atmel XPLAIN.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_XPLAIN
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_XPLAIN_REV1 XPLAIN_REV1
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the original Atmel XPLAIN, revision 1.
+ *
+ *  See \ref Group_LEDs_XPLAIN for more details.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_XPLAIN XPLAIN
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the original Atmel XPLAIN.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel XPLAIN.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTB.6</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_XPLAIN_H__
+#define __LEDS_XPLAIN_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    LEDS_LED1
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTB |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				PORTB &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB &= ~LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB |= LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB = ((PORTB | LEDS_ALL_LEDS) & ~LEDMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTB = ((PORTB | LEDMask) & ~ActiveMask);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PINB  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (~PORTB & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/YUN/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/YUN/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1d99302f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/YUN/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Arduino Yun board.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_YUN
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_YUN YUN
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Arduino Yun board.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Arduino Yun board (http://arduino.cc/en/Main/arduinoBoardYun).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_YUN_H__
+#define __BOARD_YUN_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/YUN/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/YUN/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bcdd47f9b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/AVR8/YUN/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Arduino Yun board.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_YUN
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_YUN YUN
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Arduino Yun board.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Arduino Yun board (http://arduino.cc/en/Main/arduinoBoardYun).
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Yellow</td><td>RX</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTB.0</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Yellow</td><td>TX</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.5</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Red</td><td>General Indicator</td><td>High</td><td>PORTC.7</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_YUN_H__
+#define __LEDS_YUN_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define LEDS_PORTB_LEDS       (LEDS_LED1)
+			#define LEDS_PORTD_LEDS       (LEDS_LED2)
+			#define LEDS_PORTC_LEDS       (LEDS_LED3)
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 0)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 5)
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 7)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  |=  LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;
+				PORTB |=  LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;
+				DDRD  |=  LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+				PORTD |=  LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+				DDRC  |=  LEDS_PORTC_LEDS;
+				PORTC &= ~LEDS_PORTC_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  &= ~LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;
+				PORTB &= ~LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;
+				DDRD  &= ~LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+				PORTD &= ~LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+				DDRC  &= ~LEDS_PORTC_LEDS;
+				PORTC &= ~LEDS_PORTC_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);
+				PORTD &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);
+				PORTC |=  (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB |=  (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);
+				PORTD |=  (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);
+				PORTC &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB = ((PORTB |  LEDS_PORTB_LEDS) & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS));
+				PORTD = ((PORTD |  LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS));
+				PORTC = ((PORTC & ~LEDS_PORTC_LEDS) |  (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS));
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTB = ((PORTB |  (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS)) & ~(ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS));
+				PORTD = ((PORTD |  (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS)) & ~(ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS));
+				PORTC = ((PORTC & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS)) |  (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS));
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PINB  = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);
+				PIND  = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);
+				PINC  = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return ((~PORTB & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS) | (~PORTD & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS) | (PORTC & LEDS_PORTC_LEDS));
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..27f495361
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,167 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board hardware information driver.
+ *
+ *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the board-specific information driver, to give information
+ *  on the hardware contained on a specific board.
+ *
+ *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct board driver header file for the
+ *  currently selected board.
+ *
+ *  If the \c BOARD value is set to \c BOARD_USER, this will include the \c /Board/Board.h file in the user project
+ *  directory.
+ *
+ *  For possible \c BOARD makefile values, see \ref Group_BoardTypes.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardDrivers
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo Board Information Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h
+ *  \brief Board hardware information driver.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_BoardInfo_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - None
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_H__
+#define __BOARD_H__
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../Common/Common.h"
+
+		#if (BOARD == BOARD_USBKEY)
+			#include "AVR8/USBKEY/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK525)
+			#include "AVR8/STK525/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK526)
+			#include "AVR8/STK526/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_RZUSBSTICK)
+			#include "AVR8/RZUSBSTICK/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_ATAVRUSBRF01)
+			#include "AVR8/ATAVRUSBRF01/Board.h"
+		#elif ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+			#include "AVR8/XPLAIN/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BUMBLEB)
+			#include "AVR8/BUMBLEB/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK527)
+			#include "AVR8/EVK527/Board.h"
+		#elif ((BOARD == BOARD_TEENSY) || (BOARD == BOARD_TEENSY2))
+			#include "AVR8/TEENSY/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBTINYMKII)
+			#include "AVR8/USBTINYMKII/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BENITO)
+			#include "AVR8/BENITO/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_JMDBU2)
+			#include "AVR8/JMDBU2/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_OLIMEX162)
+			#include "AVR8/OLIMEX162/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBFOO)
+			#include "AVR8/USBFOO/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_UDIP)
+			#include "AVR8/UDIP/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BUI)
+			#include "AVR8/BUI/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_UNO)
+			#include "AVR8/UNO/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_CULV3)
+			#include "AVR8/CULV3/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BLACKCAT)
+			#include "AVR8/BLACKCAT/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MAXIMUS)
+			#include "AVR8/MAXIMUS/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MINIMUS)
+			#include "AVR8/MINIMUS/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_ADAFRUITU4)
+			#include "AVR8/ADAFRUITU4/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MICROSIN162)
+			#include "AVR8/MICROSIN162/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_SPARKFUN8U2)
+			#include "AVR8/SPARKFUN8U2/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK1101)
+			#include "UC3/EVK1101/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_TUL)
+			#include "AVR8/TUL/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK1100)
+			#include "UC3/EVK1100/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK1104)
+			#include "UC3/EVK1104/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_A3BU_XPLAINED)
+			#include "XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/Board.h"
+		#elif ((BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX) || (BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX_V3) || (BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX_V31))
+			#include "AVR8/USB2AX/Board.h"
+		#elif ((BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_REV1) || (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_REV2) || \
+		       (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_32U2) || (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_A) || \
+		       (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_1)    || (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_2) || \
+		       (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_3)    || (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_4) || \
+		       (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_DIP))
+			#include "AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_B1_XPLAINED)
+			#include "XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MULTIO)
+			#include "AVR8/MULTIO/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BIGMULTIO)
+			#include "AVR8/BIGMULTIO/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_DUCE)
+			#include "AVR8/DUCE/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_OLIMEX32U4)
+			#include "AVR8/OLIMEX32U4/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_OLIMEXT32U4)
+			#include "AVR8/OLIMEXT32U4/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_OLIMEXISPMK2)
+			#include "AVR8/OLIMEXISPMK2/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_LEONARDO)
+			#include "AVR8/LEONARDO/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_UC3A3_XPLAINED)
+			#include "UC3/UC3A3_XPLAINED/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STANGE_ISP)
+			#include "AVR8/STANGE_ISP/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_C3_XPLAINED)
+			#include "XMEGA/C3_XPLAINED/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_U2S)
+			#include "AVR8/U2S/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_YUN)
+			#include "AVR8/YUN/Board.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MICRO)
+			#include "AVR8/MICRO/Board.h"
+		#else
+			#include "Board/Board.h"
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..dc22cc1ab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,188 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Digital button board hardware driver.
+ *
+ *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the board-specific Buttons driver, for boards containing
+ *  physical pushbuttons connected to the microcontroller's GPIO pins.
+ *
+ *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct Button driver header file for the
+ *  currently selected board.
+ *
+ *  If the \c BOARD value is set to \c BOARD_USER, this will include the \c /Board/Buttons.h file in the user project
+ *  directory.
+ *
+ *  For possible \c BOARD makefile values, see \ref Group_BoardTypes.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardDrivers
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons Buttons Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h
+ *  \brief Digital button board hardware driver.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Buttons_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - None
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Buttons_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Hardware buttons driver. This provides an easy to use driver for the hardware buttons present on many boards.
+ *  It provides a way to easily configure and check the status of all the buttons on the board so that appropriate
+ *  actions can be taken.
+ *
+ *  If the \c BOARD value is set to \c BOARD_USER, this will include the \c /Board/Buttons.h file in the user project
+ *  directory. Otherwise, it will include the appropriate built-in board driver header file.
+ *
+ *  For possible \c BOARD makefile values, see \ref Group_BoardTypes.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Buttons_ExampleUsage Example Usage
+ *  The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical
+ *  application.
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *      // Initialize the button driver before first use
+ *      Buttons_Init();
+ *
+ *      printf("Waiting for button press...\r\n");
+ *
+ *      // Loop until a board button has been pressed
+ *      uint8_t ButtonPress;
+ *      while (!(ButtonPress = Buttons_GetStatus())) {};
+ *
+ *      // Display which button was pressed (assuming two board buttons)
+ *      printf("Button pressed: %s\r\n", (ButtonPress == BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ? "Button 1" : "Button 2");
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_H__
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../Common/Common.h"
+
+		#if (BOARD == BOARD_NONE)
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1  0
+			static inline void       Buttons_Init(void) {};
+			static inline uint_reg_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) { return 0; };
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBKEY)
+			#include "AVR8/USBKEY/Buttons.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK525)
+			#include "AVR8/STK525/Buttons.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK526)
+			#include "AVR8/STK526/Buttons.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_ATAVRUSBRF01)
+			#include "AVR8/ATAVRUSBRF01/Buttons.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BUMBLEB)
+			#include "AVR8/BUMBLEB/Buttons.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK527)
+			#include "AVR8/EVK527/Buttons.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBTINYMKII)
+			#include "AVR8/USBTINYMKII/Buttons.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BENITO)
+			#include "AVR8/BENITO/Buttons.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_JMDBU2)
+			#include "AVR8/JMDBU2/Buttons.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_OLIMEX162)
+			#include "AVR8/OLIMEX162/Buttons.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBFOO)
+			#include "AVR8/USBFOO/Buttons.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_UDIP)
+			#include "AVR8/UDIP/Buttons.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_CULV3)
+			#include "AVR8/CULV3/Buttons.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MINIMUS)
+			#include "AVR8/MINIMUS/Buttons.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MICROSIN162)
+			#include "AVR8/MICROSIN162/Buttons.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK1101)
+			#include "UC3/EVK1101/Buttons.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_TUL)
+			#include "AVR8/TUL/Buttons.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK1100)
+			#include "UC3/EVK1100/Buttons.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK1104)
+			#include "UC3/EVK1104/Buttons.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_A3BU_XPLAINED)
+			#include "XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/Buttons.h"
+		#elif ((BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX) || (BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX_V3))
+			#include "AVR8/USB2AX/Buttons.h"
+		#elif ((BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_32U2) || (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_A) || \
+		       (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_1)    || (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_2) || \
+		       (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_3)    || (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_4) || \
+		       (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_REV1) || (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_REV2) || \
+		       (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_DIP))
+			#include "AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/Buttons.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_B1_XPLAINED)
+			#include "XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/Buttons.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_OLIMEX32U4)
+			#include "AVR8/OLIMEX32U4/Buttons.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_OLIMEXT32U4)
+			#include "AVR8/OLIMEXT32U4/Buttons.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_OLIMEXISPMK2)
+			#include "AVR8/OLIMEXISPMK2/Buttons.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_UC3A3_XPLAINED)
+			#include "UC3/UC3A3_XPLAINED/Buttons.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STANGE_ISP)
+			#include "AVR8/STANGE_ISP/Buttons.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_C3_XPLAINED)
+			#include "XMEGA/C3_XPLAINED/Buttons.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_U2S)
+			#include "AVR8/U2S/Buttons.h"
+		#else
+			#include "Board/Buttons.h"
+		#endif
+
+	/* Pseudo-Functions for Doxygen: */
+	#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/** Initializes the buttons driver, so that the current button position can be read. This sets the appropriate
+		 *  I/O pins to an inputs with pull-ups enabled.
+		 *
+		 *  This must be called before any Button driver functions are used.
+		 */
+		static inline void Buttons_Init(void);
+
+		/** Disables the buttons driver, releasing the I/O pins back to their default high-impedance input mode. */
+		static inline void Buttons_Disable(void);
+
+		/** Returns a mask indicating which board buttons are currently pressed.
+		 *
+		 *  \return Mask of \c BUTTONS_BUTTON* constants indicating which board buttons are currently pressed.
+		 */
+		static inline uint_reg_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+	#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9b4bf5613
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h
@@ -0,0 +1,264 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master include file for the board dataflash IC driver.
+ *  \brief Atmel Dataflash storage IC board hardware driver.
+ *
+ *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the board-specific Atmel dataflash driver, for boards containing
+ *  Atmel Dataflash ICs for external non-volatile storage.
+ *
+ *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct dataflash driver header file for
+ *  the currently selected board.
+ *
+ *  If the \c BOARD value is set to \c BOARD_USER, this will include the \c /Board/Dataflash.h file in the user project
+ *  directory.
+ *
+ *  For possible \c BOARD makefile values, see \ref Group_BoardTypes.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardDrivers
+ *  \defgroup Group_Dataflash Dataflash Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h
+ *  \brief Atmel Dataflash storage IC board hardware driver.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dataflash_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - None
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dataflash_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Dataflash driver. This module provides an easy to use interface for the Dataflash ICs located on many boards,
+ *  for the storage of large amounts of data into the Dataflash's non-volatile memory.
+ *
+ *  If the \c BOARD value is set to \c BOARD_USER, this will include the \c /Board/Dataflash.h file in the user project
+ *  directory. Otherwise, it will include the appropriate built-in board driver header file.
+ *
+ *  For possible \c BOARD makefile values, see \ref Group_BoardTypes.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Dataflash_ExampleUsage Example Usage
+ *  The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical
+ *  application.
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *      // Initialize the board Dataflash driver before first use
+ *      Dataflash_Init();
+ *
+ *      uint8_t WriteBuffer[DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE];
+ *      uint8_t ReadBuffer[DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE];
+ *
+ *      // Fill page write buffer with a repeating pattern
+ *      for (uint16_t i = 0; i < DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE; i++)
+ *        WriteBuffer[i] = (i & 0xFF);
+ *
+ *      // Must select the chip of interest first before operating on it
+ *      Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+ *
+ *      // Write to the Dataflash's first internal memory buffer
+ *      printf("Writing data to first dataflash buffer:\r\n");
+ *      Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+ *      Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
+ *
+ *      for (uint16_t i = 0; i < DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE; i++)
+ *        Dataflash_SendByte(WriteBuffer[i]);
+ *
+ *      // Commit the Dataflash's first memory buffer to the non-volatile FLASH memory
+ *      printf("Committing page to non-volatile memory page index 5:\r\n");
+ *      Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+ *      Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(5, 0);
+ *      Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+ *
+ *      // Read the page from non-volatile FLASH memory into the Dataflash's second memory buffer
+ *      printf("Reading data into second dataflash buffer:\r\n");
+ *      Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2);
+ *      Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(5, 0);
+ *      Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+ *
+ *      // Read the Dataflash's second internal memory buffer
+ *      Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF2READ);
+ *      Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
+ *
+ *      for (uint16_t i = 0; i < DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE; i++)
+ *        ReadBuffer[i] = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+ *
+ *      // Deselect the chip after use
+ *      Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __DATAFLASH_H__
+#define __DATAFLASH_H__
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Retrieves the Dataflash chip select mask for the given Dataflash chip index.
+			 *
+			 *  \attention This macro will only work correctly on chip index numbers that are compile-time
+			 *             constants defined by the preprocessor.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] index  Index of the dataflash chip mask to retrieve.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Mask for the given Dataflash chip's /CS pin
+			 */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(index)      CONCAT_EXPANDED(DATAFLASH_CHIP, index)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Initializes the dataflash driver so that commands and data may be sent to an attached dataflash IC.
+			 *
+			 *  \note The microcontroller's physical interface driver connected to the Dataflash IC must be initialized before
+			 *        any of the dataflash commands are used. This is usually a SPI hardware port, but on some devices/boards may
+			 *        be a USART operating in SPI Master mode.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_Init(void);
+
+			/** Determines the currently selected dataflash chip.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Mask of the currently selected Dataflash chip, either \ref DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP if no chip is selected
+			 *  or a \c DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is the chip number).
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+
+			/** Selects the given dataflash chip.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in]  ChipMask  Mask of the Dataflash IC to select, in the form of a \c DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is
+			 *              the chip number).
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+
+			/** Deselects the current dataflash chip, so that no dataflash is selected. */
+			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+
+			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to
+			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one
+			 *  dataflash IC, this will select \ref DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside
+			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs
+			 *  are deselected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from
+			 *                          0 to ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress);
+
+			/** Toggles the select line of the currently selected dataflash IC, so that it is ready to receive
+			 *  a new command.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(void);
+
+			/** Spin-loops while the currently selected dataflash is busy executing a command, such as a main
+			 *  memory page program or main memory to buffer transfer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(void);
+
+			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with
+			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-bit address.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC
+			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress,
+			                                              const uint16_t BufferByte);
+
+			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns a byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash
+			 *
+			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+
+			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and ignores the next byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+
+			/** Sends a dummy byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns the next byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+
+		/* Includes: */
+			#if (BOARD == BOARD_NONE)
+				#define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS  0
+				#define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP     0
+				#define DATAFLASH_CHIP1       0
+				#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE   0
+				#define DATAFLASH_PAGES       0
+				static inline void    Dataflash_Init(void) {};
+				static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) { return 0; };
+				static inline void    Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) {};
+				static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void) { return 0; };
+				static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void) { return 0; };
+				static inline void    Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask) {};
+				static inline void    Dataflash_DeselectChip(void) {};
+				static inline void    Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress) {};
+				static inline void    Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(void) {};
+				static inline void    Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(void) {};
+				static inline void    Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress,
+				                                                 const uint16_t BufferByte) {};
+			#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBKEY)
+				#include "AVR8/USBKEY/Dataflash.h"
+			#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK525)
+				#include "AVR8/STK525/Dataflash.h"
+			#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK526)
+				#include "AVR8/STK526/Dataflash.h"
+			#elif ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+				#include "AVR8/XPLAIN/Dataflash.h"
+			#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK527)
+				#include "AVR8/EVK527/Dataflash.h"
+			#elif (BOARD == BOARD_A3BU_XPLAINED)
+				#include "XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/Dataflash.h"
+			#elif (BOARD == BOARD_B1_XPLAINED)
+				#include "XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/Dataflash.h"
+			#else
+				#include "Board/Dataflash.h"
+			#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4ecf61fef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h
@@ -0,0 +1,151 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Digital joystick board hardware driver.
+ *
+ *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the board-specific Joystick driver, for boards containing a
+ *  digital joystick.
+ *
+ *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct joystick driver header file for the
+ *  currently selected board.
+ *
+ *  If the \c BOARD value is set to \c BOARD_USER, this will include the \c /Board/Joystick.h file in the user project
+ *  directory.
+ *
+ *  For possible \c BOARD makefile values, see \ref Group_BoardTypes.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardDrivers
+ *  \defgroup Group_Joystick Joystick Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h
+ *  \brief Digital joystick board hardware driver.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Joystick_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - None
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Joystick_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Hardware Joystick driver. This module provides an easy to use interface to control the hardware digital Joystick
+ *  located on many boards.
+ *
+ *  If the \c BOARD value is set to \c BOARD_USER, this will include the \c /Board/Joystick.h file in the user project
+ *  directory. Otherwise, it will include the appropriate built-in board driver header file.
+ *
+ *  For possible \c BOARD makefile values, see \ref Group_BoardTypes.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Joystick_ExampleUsage Example Usage
+ *  The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical
+ *  application.
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *      // Initialize the board Joystick driver before first use
+ *      Joystick_Init();
+ *
+ *      printf("Waiting for joystick movement...\r\n");
+ *
+ *      // Loop until a the joystick has been moved
+ *      uint8_t JoystickMovement;
+ *      while (!(JoystickMovement = Joystick_GetStatus())) {};
+ *
+ *      // Display which direction the joystick was moved in
+ *      printf("Joystick moved:\r\n");
+ *
+ *      if (JoystickMovement & (JOY_UP | JOY_DOWN))
+ *        printf("%s ", (JoystickMovement & JOY_UP) ? "Up" : "Down");
+ *
+ *      if (JoystickMovement & (JOY_LEFT | JOY_RIGHT))
+ *        printf("%s ", (JoystickMovement & JOY_LEFT) ? "Left" : "Right");
+ *
+ *      if (JoystickMovement & JOY_PRESS)
+ *        printf("Pressed");
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __JOYSTICK_H__
+#define __JOYSTICK_H__
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../Common/Common.h"
+
+		#if (BOARD == BOARD_NONE)
+			#define JOY_UP           0
+			#define JOY_DOWN         0
+			#define JOY_LEFT         0
+			#define JOY_RIGHT        0
+			#define JOY_PRESS        0
+			static inline void       Joystick_Init(void) {};
+			static inline uint_reg_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) { return 0; };
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBKEY)
+			#include "AVR8/USBKEY/Joystick.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK525)
+			#include "AVR8/STK525/Joystick.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK526)
+			#include "AVR8/STK526/Joystick.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BUMBLEB)
+			#include "AVR8/BUMBLEB/Joystick.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK527)
+			#include "AVR8/EVK527/Joystick.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK1101)
+			#include "UC3/EVK1101/Joystick.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK1100)
+			#include "UC3/EVK1100/Joystick.h"
+		#else
+			#include "Board/Joystick.h"
+		#endif
+
+	/* Pseudo-Functions for Doxygen: */
+	#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/** Initializes the joystick driver so that the joystick position can be read. This sets the appropriate
+		 *  I/O pins to inputs with their pull-ups enabled.
+		 *
+		 *  This must be called before any Joystick driver functions are used.
+		 */
+		static inline void Joystick_Init(void);
+
+		/** Disables the joystick driver, releasing the I/O pins back to their default high-impedance input mode. */
+		static inline void Joystick_Disable(void);
+
+		/** Returns the current status of the joystick, as a mask indicating the direction the joystick is
+		 *  currently facing in (multiple bits can be set).
+		 *
+		 *  \return Mask of \c JOYSTICK_* constants indicating the current joystick direction(s).
+		 */
+		static inline uint_reg_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+	#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..392714a4e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,298 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LED board hardware driver.
+ *
+ *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the board-specific LED driver, for boards containing user
+ *  controllable LEDs.
+ *
+ *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct LED driver header file for the
+ *  currently selected board.
+ *
+ *  If the \c BOARD value is set to \c BOARD_USER, this will include the \c /Board/LEDs.h file in the user project
+ *  directory.
+ *
+ *  For possible \c BOARD makefile values, see \ref Group_BoardTypes.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardDrivers
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs LEDs Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h
+ *  \brief LED board hardware driver.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_LEDs_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - None
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_LEDs_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Hardware LEDs driver. This provides an easy to use driver for the hardware LEDs present on many boards. It
+ *  provides an interface to configure, test and change the status of all the board LEDs.
+ *
+ *  If the \c BOARD value is set to \c BOARD_USER, this will include the \c /Board/LEDs.h file in the user project
+ *  directory. Otherwise, it will include the appropriate built-in board driver header file. If the BOARD value
+ *  is set to \c BOARD_NONE, this driver is silently disabled.
+ *
+ *  For possible \c BOARD makefile values, see \ref Group_BoardTypes.
+ *
+ *  \note To make code as compatible as possible, it is assumed that all boards carry a minimum of four LEDs. If
+ *        a board contains less than four LEDs, the remaining LED masks are defined to 0 so as to have no effect.
+ *        If other behavior is desired, either alias the remaining LED masks to existing LED masks via the -D
+ *        switch in the project makefile, or alias them to nothing in the makefile to cause compilation errors when
+ *        a non-existing LED is referenced in application code. Note that this means that it is possible to make
+ *        compatible code for a board with no LEDs by making a board LED driver (see \ref Page_WritingBoardDrivers)
+ *        which contains only stub functions and defines no LEDs.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_LEDs_ExampleUsage Example Usage
+ *  The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical
+ *  application.
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *      // Initialize the board LED driver before first use
+ *      LEDs_Init();
+ *
+ *      // Turn on each of the four LEDs in turn
+ *      LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1);
+ *      Delay_MS(500);
+ *      LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED2);
+ *      Delay_MS(500);
+ *      LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED3);
+ *      Delay_MS(500);
+ *      LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED4);
+ *      Delay_MS(500);
+ *
+ *      // Turn on all LEDs
+ *      LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+ *      Delay_MS(1000);
+ *
+ *      // Turn on LED 1, turn off LED 2, leaving LEDs 3 and 4 in their current state
+ *      LEDs_ChangeLEDs((LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2), LEDS_LED1);
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_H__
+#define __LEDS_H__
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../Common/Common.h"
+
+		#if (BOARD == BOARD_NONE)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void) {};
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void) {};
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint_reg_t LEDMask) {};
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint_reg_t LEDMask) {};
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint_reg_t LEDMask) {};
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint_reg_t LEDMask, const uint_reg_t ActiveMask) {};
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint_reg_t LEDMask) {};
+			static inline uint_reg_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) { return 0; }
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBKEY)
+			#include "AVR8/USBKEY/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK525)
+			#include "AVR8/STK525/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK526)
+			#include "AVR8/STK526/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_RZUSBSTICK)
+			#include "AVR8/RZUSBSTICK/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_ATAVRUSBRF01)
+			#include "AVR8/ATAVRUSBRF01/LEDs.h"
+		#elif ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+			#include "AVR8/XPLAIN/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BUMBLEB)
+			#include "AVR8/BUMBLEB/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK527)
+			#include "AVR8/EVK527/LEDs.h"
+		#elif ((BOARD == BOARD_TEENSY) || (BOARD == BOARD_TEENSY2))
+			#include "AVR8/TEENSY/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBTINYMKII)
+			#include "AVR8/USBTINYMKII/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BENITO)
+			#include "AVR8/BENITO/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_JMDBU2)
+			#include "AVR8/JMDBU2/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_OLIMEX162)
+			#include "AVR8/OLIMEX162/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBFOO)
+			#include "AVR8/USBFOO/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_UDIP)
+			#include "AVR8/UDIP/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BUI)
+			#include "AVR8/BUI/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_UNO)
+			#include "AVR8/UNO/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_CULV3)
+			#include "AVR8/CULV3/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BLACKCAT)
+			#include "AVR8/BLACKCAT/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MAXIMUS)
+			#include "AVR8/MAXIMUS/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MINIMUS)
+			#include "AVR8/MINIMUS/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_ADAFRUITU4)
+			#include "AVR8/ADAFRUITU4/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MICROSIN162)
+			#include "AVR8/MICROSIN162/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_SPARKFUN8U2)
+			#include "AVR8/SPARKFUN8U2/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK1101)
+			#include "UC3/EVK1101/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_TUL)
+			#include "AVR8/TUL/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK1100)
+			#include "UC3/EVK1100/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_EVK1104)
+			#include "UC3/EVK1104/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_A3BU_XPLAINED)
+			#include "XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/LEDs.h"
+		#elif ((BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX) || (BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX_V3) || (BOARD == BOARD_USB2AX_V31))
+			#include "AVR8/USB2AX/LEDs.h"
+		#elif ((BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_REV1) || (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_REV2) || \
+		       (BOARD == BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_32U2))
+			#include "AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_B1_XPLAINED)
+			#include "XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MULTIO)
+			#include "AVR8/MULTIO/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_BIGMULTIO)
+			#include "AVR8/BIGMULTIO/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_DUCE)
+			#include "AVR8/DUCE/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_OLIMEX32U4)
+			#include "AVR8/OLIMEX32U4/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_OLIMEXT32U4)
+			#include "AVR8/OLIMEXT32U4/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_OLIMEXISPMK2)
+			#include "AVR8/OLIMEXISPMK2/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_LEONARDO)
+			#include "AVR8/LEONARDO/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_UC3A3_XPLAINED)
+			#include "UC3/UC3A3_XPLAINED/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_STANGE_ISP)
+			#include "AVR8/STANGE_ISP/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_C3_XPLAINED)
+			#include "XMEGA/C3_XPLAINED/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_U2S)
+			#include "AVR8/U2S/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_YUN)
+			#include "AVR8/YUN/LEDs.h"
+		#elif (BOARD == BOARD_MICRO)
+			#include "AVR8/MICRO/LEDs.h"
+		#else
+			#include "Board/LEDs.h"
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			#if !defined(LEDS_NO_LEDS)
+				#define LEDS_NO_LEDS   0
+			#endif
+
+			#if !defined(LEDS_ALL_LEDS)
+				#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS  (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+			#endif
+
+			#if !defined(LEDS_LED1)
+				#define LEDS_LED1      0
+			#endif
+
+			#if !defined(LEDS_LED2)
+				#define LEDS_LED2      0
+			#endif
+
+			#if !defined(LEDS_LED3)
+				#define LEDS_LED3      0
+			#endif
+
+			#if !defined(LEDS_LED4)
+				#define LEDS_LED4      0
+			#endif
+		#endif
+
+	/* Pseudo-Functions for Doxygen: */
+	#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/** Initializes the board LED driver so that the LEDs can be controlled. This sets the appropriate port
+		 *  I/O pins as outputs, and sets the LEDs to default to off.
+		 *
+		 *  This must be called before any LED driver functions are used.
+		 */
+		static inline void LEDs_Init(void);
+
+		/** Disables the board LED driver, releasing the I/O pins back to their default high-impedance input mode. */
+		static inline void LEDs_Disable(void);
+
+		/** Turns on the LEDs specified in the given LED mask.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] LEDMask  Mask of the board LEDs to manipulate (see board-specific LEDs.h driver file).
+		 */
+		static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint_reg_t LEDMask);
+
+		/** Turns off the LEDs specified in the given LED mask.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] LEDMask  Mask of the board LEDs to manipulate (see board-specific LEDs.h driver file).
+		 */
+		static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint_reg_t LEDMask);
+
+		/** Turns off all LEDs not specified in the given LED mask, and turns on all the LEDs in the given LED
+		 *  mask.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] LEDMask  Mask of the board LEDs to manipulate (see board-specific LEDs.h driver file).
+		 */
+		static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint_reg_t LEDMask);
+
+		/** Turns off all LEDs in the LED mask that are not set in the active mask, and turns on all the LEDs
+		 *  specified in both the LED and active masks.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] LEDMask     Mask of the board LEDs to manipulate (see board-specific LEDs.h driver file).
+		 *  \param[in] ActiveMask  Mask of whether the LEDs in the LED mask should be turned on or off.
+		 */
+		static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint_reg_t LEDMask,
+		                                   const uint_reg_t ActiveMask);
+
+		/** Toggles all LEDs in the LED mask, leaving all others in their current states.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] LEDMask  Mask of the board LEDs to manipulate (see board-specific LEDs.h driver file).
+		 */
+		static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint_reg_t LEDMask);
+
+		/** Returns the status of all the board LEDs; set LED masks in the return value indicate that the
+		 *  corresponding LED is on.
+		 *
+		 *  \return Mask of \c LEDS_LED* constants indicating which of the board LEDs are currently turned on.
+		 */
+		static inline uint_reg_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+	#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8b09f1094
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.c
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_TEMPERATURE_C
+#include "Temperature.h"
+
+#if defined(TEMPERATURE_SENSOR_DRIVER_COMPATIBLE)
+
+static const uint16_t PROGMEM Temperature_Lookup[TEMP_TABLE_SIZE] =
+{
+	0x3B4, 0x3B0, 0x3AB, 0x3A6, 0x3A0, 0x39A, 0x394, 0x38E, 0x388, 0x381, 0x37A, 0x373,
+	0x36B, 0x363, 0x35B, 0x353, 0x34A, 0x341, 0x338, 0x32F, 0x325, 0x31B, 0x311, 0x307,
+	0x2FC, 0x2F1, 0x2E6, 0x2DB, 0x2D0, 0x2C4, 0x2B8, 0x2AC, 0x2A0, 0x294, 0x288, 0x27C,
+	0x26F, 0x263, 0x256, 0x24A, 0x23D, 0x231, 0x225, 0x218, 0x20C, 0x200, 0x1F3, 0x1E7,
+	0x1DB, 0x1CF, 0x1C4, 0x1B8, 0x1AC, 0x1A1, 0x196, 0x18B, 0x180, 0x176, 0x16B, 0x161,
+	0x157, 0x14D, 0x144, 0x13A, 0x131, 0x128, 0x11F, 0x117, 0x10F, 0x106, 0x0FE, 0x0F7,
+	0x0EF, 0x0E8, 0x0E1, 0x0DA, 0x0D3, 0x0CD, 0x0C7, 0x0C0, 0x0BA, 0x0B5, 0x0AF, 0x0AA,
+	0x0A4, 0x09F, 0x09A, 0x096, 0x091, 0x08C, 0x088, 0x084, 0x080, 0x07C, 0x078, 0x074,
+	0x071, 0x06D, 0x06A, 0x067, 0x064, 0x061, 0x05E, 0x05B, 0x058, 0x055, 0x053, 0x050,
+	0x04E, 0x04C, 0x049, 0x047, 0x045, 0x043, 0x041, 0x03F, 0x03D, 0x03C, 0x03A, 0x038
+};
+
+int8_t Temperature_GetTemperature(void)
+{
+	uint16_t Temp_ADC = ADC_GetChannelReading(ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC | ADC_RIGHT_ADJUSTED | TEMP_ADC_CHANNEL_MASK);
+
+	if (Temp_ADC > pgm_read_word(&Temperature_Lookup[0]))
+	  return TEMP_MIN_TEMP;
+
+	for (uint16_t Index = 0; Index < TEMP_TABLE_SIZE; Index++)
+	{
+		if (Temp_ADC > pgm_read_word(&Temperature_Lookup[Index]))
+		  return (Index + TEMP_TABLE_OFFSET_DEGREES);
+	}
+
+	return TEMP_MAX_TEMP;
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d20c6f701
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.h
@@ -0,0 +1,147 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief NTC Temperature Sensor board hardware driver.
+ *
+ *  Master include file for the board temperature sensor driver, for the USB boards which contain a temperature sensor.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardDrivers
+ *  \defgroup Group_Temperature Temperature Sensor Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.h
+ *  \brief NTC Temperature Sensor board hardware driver.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Temperature_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_TEMPERATURE)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Temperature_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Temperature sensor driver. This provides an easy to use interface for the hardware temperature sensor located
+ *  on many boards. It provides an interface to configure the sensor and appropriate ADC channel, plus read out the
+ *  current temperature in degrees C. It is designed for and will only work with the temperature sensor located on the
+ *  official Atmel USB AVR boards, as each sensor has different characteristics.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Temperature_ExampleUsage Example Usage
+ *  The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical
+ *  application.
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *      // Initialize the ADC and board temperature sensor drivers before first use
+ *      ADC_Init(ADC_FREE_RUNNING | ADC_PRESCALE_128);
+ *      Temperature_Init();
+ *
+ *      // Display converted temperature in degrees Celsius
+ *      printf("Current Temperature: %d Degrees\r\n", Temperature_GetTemperature());
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __TEMPERATURE_H__
+#define __TEMPERATURE_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if ((BOARD == BOARD_USBKEY) || (BOARD == BOARD_STK525) || \
+		     (BOARD == BOARD_STK526) || (BOARD == BOARD_EVK527))
+			#define TEMPERATURE_SENSOR_DRIVER_COMPATIBLE
+		#endif
+
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_TEMPERATURE_C) && !defined(TEMPERATURE_SENSOR_DRIVER_COMPATIBLE)
+			#error The selected board does not contain a compatible temperature sensor.
+		#endif
+
+	#if defined(TEMPERATURE_SENSOR_DRIVER_COMPATIBLE)
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../Peripheral/ADC.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** ADC channel number for the temperature sensor. */
+			#define TEMP_ADC_CHANNEL       0
+
+			/** ADC channel MUX mask for the temperature sensor. */
+			#define TEMP_ADC_CHANNEL_MASK  ADC_CHANNEL0
+
+			/** Size of the temperature sensor lookup table, in lookup values */
+			#define TEMP_TABLE_SIZE        120
+
+			/** Minimum returnable temperature from the \ref Temperature_GetTemperature() function. */
+			#define TEMP_MIN_TEMP          TEMP_TABLE_OFFSET_DEGREES
+
+			/** Maximum returnable temperature from the \ref Temperature_GetTemperature() function. */
+			#define TEMP_MAX_TEMP          ((TEMP_TABLE_SIZE - 1) + TEMP_TABLE_OFFSET_DEGREES)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Initializes the temperature sensor driver, including setting up the appropriate ADC channel.
+			 *  This must be called before any other temperature sensor routines.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre The ADC itself (not the ADC channel) must be configured separately before calling the
+			 *       temperature sensor functions.
+			 */
+			static inline void Temperature_Init(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Temperature_Init(void)
+			{
+				ADC_SetupChannel(TEMP_ADC_CHANNEL);
+			}
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Performs a complete ADC on the temperature sensor channel, and converts the result into a
+			 *  valid temperature between \ref TEMP_MIN_TEMP and \ref TEMP_MAX_TEMP in degrees Celsius.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Signed temperature value in degrees Celsius.
+			 */
+			int8_t Temperature_GetTemperature(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define TEMP_TABLE_OFFSET_DEGREES   -21
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0c34a3f04
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Atmel EVK1100.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_EVK1100
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_EVK1100 EVK1100
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Atmel Atmel EVK1100.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Atmel Atmel EVK1100.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_EVK1100_H__
+#define __BOARD_EVK1100_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Buttons.h"
+		#include "../../Joystick.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware Buttons mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+
+			/** Indicates the board has a hardware Joystick mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_JOYSTICK
+
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fa452003f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1100.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_EVK1100
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_EVK1100 EVK1100
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1100.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1100.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>SW0 Button</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO88</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON2</td><td>SW1 Button</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO85</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON3</td><td>SW2 Button</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO82</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_EVK1100_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_EVK1100_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define BUTTONS_PORT          2
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Mask of the first button on the board */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1       (1UL << 24)
+
+			/** Mask of the second button on the board */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON2       (1UL << 21)
+
+			/** Mask of the third button on the board */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON3       (1UL << 18)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].gpers = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].puers = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].gperc = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].puerc = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);
+			}
+
+			static inline uint32_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint32_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return (~(AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_MOVE_PORT].pvr & (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2)));
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/Joystick.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/Joystick.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..72dd769b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/Joystick.h
@@ -0,0 +1,122 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel EVK1100.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Joystick_EVK1100
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Joystick
+ *  \defgroup Group_Joystick_EVK1100 EVK1100
+ *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel EVK1100.
+ *
+ *  Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel EVK1100.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Left Port Pin</th><th>Up Port Pin</th><th>Right Port Pin</th><th>Down Port Pin</th><th>Press Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>GPIO25</td><td>GPIO26</td><td>GPIO28</td><td>GPIO27</td><td>GPIO20</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __JOYSTICK_EVK1100_H__
+#define __JOYSTICK_EVK1100_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define JOY_PORT                 0
+			#define JOY_MASK                ((1UL << 28) | (1UL << 27) | (1UL << 26) | (1UL << 25) | (1UL << 20))
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */
+			#define JOY_LEFT                  (1UL << 25)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */
+			#define JOY_UP                    (1UL << 26)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */
+			#define JOY_RIGHT                 (1UL << 28)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */
+			#define JOY_DOWN                  (1UL << 27)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */
+			#define JOY_PRESS                 (1UL << 20)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Joystick_Init(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PORT].gpers = JOY_MASK;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PORT].gpers = JOY_MASK;
+			};
+
+			static inline void Joystick_Disable(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PORT].gperc = JOY_MASK;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PORT].gperc = JOY_MASK;
+			};
+
+			static inline uint32_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint32_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return (uint32_t)(~(AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PORT].pvr & JOY_MASK));
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f66eddbc1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,173 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1100.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_EVK1100
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_EVK1100 EVK1100
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1100.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1100.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>LED0 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO51</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Green</td><td>LED1 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO52</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Green</td><td>LED2 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO53</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED4</td><td>Green</td><td>LED3 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO54</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED5</td><td>Green</td><td>LED4 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO59</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED6</td><td>Green</td><td>LED5 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO60</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED7</td><td>Green</td><td>LED6 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO61</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED8</td><td>Green</td><td>LED7 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO62</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_EVK1100_H__
+#define __LEDS_EVK1100_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define LEDS_PORT        1
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1UL << 19)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1UL << 20)
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        (1UL << 21)
+
+			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED4        (1UL << 22)
+
+			/** LED mask for the fifth LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED5        (1UL << 27)
+
+			/** LED mask for the sixth LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED6        (1UL << 28)
+
+			/** LED mask for the seventh LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED7        (1UL << 29)
+
+			/** LED mask for the eighth LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED8        (1UL << 30)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4 \
+			                          LEDS_LED5 | LEDS_LED6 | LEDS_LED7 | LEDS_LED8)
+
+			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].gpers = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].oders = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs  = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].gperc = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].oderc = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrc  = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrc  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs  = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrc  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask, const uint32_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs  = LEDMask;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrc  = ActiveMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrt  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint32_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint32_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (~AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovr & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d5f95a6a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Atmel EVK1101.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_EVK1101
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_EVK1101 EVK1101
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Atmel Atmel EVK1101.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Atmel Atmel EVK1101.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_EVK1101_H__
+#define __BOARD_EVK1101_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Buttons.h"
+		#include "../../Joystick.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware Buttons mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+
+			/** Indicates the board has a hardware Joystick mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_JOYSTICK
+
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3de4b3373
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,113 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1101.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_EVK1101
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_EVK1101 EVK1101
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1101.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1101.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>SW0 Button</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO34</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON2</td><td>SW1 Button</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO35</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_EVK1101_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_EVK1101_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define BUTTONS_PORT          1
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Mask of the first button on the board */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1       (1UL << 2)
+
+			/** Mask of the second button on the board */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON2       (1UL << 3)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].gpers = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].puers = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].gperc = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].puerc = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);
+			}
+
+			static inline uint32_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint32_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return (~(AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].pvr & (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2)));
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/Joystick.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/Joystick.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f7a9a7538
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/Joystick.h
@@ -0,0 +1,131 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel EVK1101.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Joystick_EVK1101
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Joystick
+ *  \defgroup Group_Joystick_EVK1101 EVK1101
+ *  \brief Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel EVK1101.
+ *
+ *  Board specific joystick driver header for the Atmel EVK1101.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Left Port Pin</th><th>Up Port Pin</th><th>Right Port Pin</th><th>Down Port Pin</th><th>Press Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>GPIO38</td><td>GPIO39</td><td>GPIO41</td><td>GPIO40</td><td>GPIO13</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __JOYSTICK_EVK1101_H__
+#define __JOYSTICK_EVK1101_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define JOY_MOVE_PORT            1
+			#define JOY_MOVE_MASK            ((1UL << 6) | (1UL << 7) | (1UL << 8) | (1UL << 9))
+			#define JOY_PRESS_PORT           0
+			#define JOY_PRESS_MASK           (1UL << 13)
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */
+			#define JOY_LEFT                  (1UL << 6)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */
+			#define JOY_UP                    (1UL << 7)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */
+			#define JOY_RIGHT                 (1UL << 9)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */
+			#define JOY_DOWN                  (1UL << 8)
+
+			/** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */
+			#define JOY_PRESS                 (1UL << 13)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Joystick_Init(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_MOVE_PORT].gpers  = JOY_MOVE_MASK;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PRESS_PORT].gpers = JOY_PRESS_MASK;
+
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_MOVE_PORT].puers  = JOY_MOVE_MASK;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PRESS_PORT].puers = JOY_PRESS_MASK;
+			};
+
+			static inline void Joystick_Disable(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_MOVE_PORT].gperc  = JOY_MOVE_MASK;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PRESS_PORT].gperc = JOY_PRESS_MASK;
+
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_MOVE_PORT].puerc  = JOY_MOVE_MASK;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PRESS_PORT].puerc = JOY_PRESS_MASK;
+			};
+
+			static inline uint32_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint32_t Joystick_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return (uint32_t)(~((AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_MOVE_PORT].pvr  & JOY_MOVE_MASK) |
+				                    (AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_PRESS_PORT].pvr & JOY_PRESS_MASK)));
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..dad7771a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1101.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_EVK1101
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_EVK1101 EVK1101
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1101.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1101.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>LED0 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO7</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Green</td><td>LED1 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO8</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Green</td><td>LED2 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO21</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED4</td><td>Green</td><td>LED3 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO22</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_EVK1101_H__
+#define __LEDS_EVK1101_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define LEDS_PORT        0
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1UL << 7)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1UL << 8)
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        (1UL << 21)
+
+			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED4        (1UL << 22)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].gpers = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].oders = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs  = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].gperc = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].oderc = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrc  = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrc  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs  = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrc  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask, const uint32_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrs  = LEDMask;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrc  = ActiveMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovrt  = LEDMask;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint32_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint32_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return (~AVR32_GPIO.port[LEDS_PORT].ovr & LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1104/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1104/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..aa7adbfb0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1104/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Atmel EVK1104.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_EVK1104
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_EVK1104 EVK1104
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Atmel Atmel EVK1104.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Atmel Atmel EVK1104.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_EVK1104_H__
+#define __BOARD_EVK1104_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Buttons.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware Buttons mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1104/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1104/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..dfcfb665e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1104/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1104.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_EVK1104
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_EVK1104 EVK1104
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1104.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel EVK1104.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>SW0 Button</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO42</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_EVK1104_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_EVK1104_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define BUTTONS_PORT          1
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Mask of the first button on the board */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1       (1UL << 10)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].gpers = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].puers = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].gperc = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].puerc = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);
+			}
+
+			static inline uint32_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint32_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return (~(AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_MOVE_PORT].pvr & (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2)));
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1104/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1104/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2258a267f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1104/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,174 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1104.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_EVK1104
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_EVK1104 EVK1104
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1104.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel EVK1104.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Green</td><td>LED0 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO67</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Green</td><td>LED1 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO101</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Green</td><td>LED2 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO102</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED4</td><td>Green</td><td>LED3 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO105</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_EVK1104_H__
+#define __LEDS_EVK1104_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define LEDS_LEDMASK2    (1UL << 3)
+			#define LEDS_LEDMASK3   ((1UL << 9) | (1UL << 6) | (1UL << 5))
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1UL << 3)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1UL << 5)
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        (1UL << 9)
+
+			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED4        (1UL << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[2].gpers = LEDS_LEDMASK2;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[2].oders = LEDS_LEDMASK2;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrs  = LEDS_LEDMASK2;
+
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].gpers = LEDS_LEDMASK3;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].oders = LEDS_LEDMASK3;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrs  = LEDS_LEDMASK3;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[2].gperc = LEDS_LEDMASK2;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[2].oderc = LEDS_LEDMASK2;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrc  = LEDS_LEDMASK2;
+
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].gperc = LEDS_LEDMASK3;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].oderc = LEDS_LEDMASK3;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrc  = LEDS_LEDMASK3;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrc  = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK2);
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrc  = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK3);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrs  = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK2);
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrs  = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK3);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrs  = LEDS_LEDMASK2;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrc  = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK2);
+
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrs  = LEDS_LEDMASK3;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrc  = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK3);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask, const uint32_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrs  = (LEDMask    & LEDS_LEDMASK2);
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrc  = (ActiveMask & LEDS_LEDMASK2);
+
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrs  = (LEDMask    & LEDS_LEDMASK3);
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrc  = (ActiveMask & LEDS_LEDMASK3);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovrt  = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK2);
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrt  = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK3);
+			}
+
+			static inline uint32_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint32_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return ((~AVR32_GPIO.port[2].ovr & LEDS_LEDMASK2) | (~AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovr & LEDS_LEDMASK3));
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/UC3A3_XPLAINED/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/UC3A3_XPLAINED/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ec4d9c7c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/UC3A3_XPLAINED/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Atmel UC3-A3 Xplained.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_UC3_A3_XPLAINED
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_UC3_A3_XPLAINED UC3_A3_XPLAINED
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Atmel UC3-A3 Xplained.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Atmel UC3-A3 Xplained.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_UC3_A3_XPLAINED_H__
+#define __BOARD_UC3_A3_XPLAINED_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Buttons.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware Buttons mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/UC3A3_XPLAINED/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/UC3A3_XPLAINED/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8accb6fe1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/UC3A3_XPLAINED/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel UC3-A3 Xplained.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_UC3A3_XPLAINED
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_UC3A3_XPLAINED UC3A3_XPLAINED
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel UC3-A3 Xplained.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel UC3-A3 Xplained.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>SW0 Button</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO32</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_UC3A3_XPLAINED_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_UC3A3_XPLAINED_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define BUTTONS_PORT          1
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Mask of the first button on the board */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1       (1UL << 0)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].gpers = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].puers = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].gperc = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[BUTTONS_PORT].puerc = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);
+			}
+
+			static inline uint32_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint32_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return (~(AVR32_GPIO.port[JOY_MOVE_PORT].pvr & (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2)));
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/UC3A3_XPLAINED/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/UC3A3_XPLAINED/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..66b7834c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/UC3/UC3A3_XPLAINED/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,182 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel UC3-A3 Xplained.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_UC3A3_XPLAINED
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_UC3A3_XPLAINED UC3A3_XPLAINED
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel UC3-A3 Xplained.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel UC3-A3 Xplained.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Yellow</td><td>LED0 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO35</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Yellow</td><td>LED1 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO73</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Yellow</td><td>LED2 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO34</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED4</td><td>Yellow</td><td>LED3 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO38</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED5</td><td>Green</td><td>Status</td><td>Low</td><td>GPIO50</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED6</td><td>Red</td><td>Power</td><td>High</td><td>GPIO49</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_UC3A3_XPLAINED_H__
+#define __LEDS_UC3A3_XPLAINED_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define LEDS_LEDMASK1   ((1UL << 3) | (1UL << 2) | (1UL << 6) | (1UL << 18) | (1UL << 17))
+			#define LEDS_LEDMASK3    (1UL << 9)
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1UL << 3)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1UL << 9)
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        (1UL << 2)
+
+			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED4        (1UL << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for the fifth LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED5        (1UL << 18)
+
+			/** LED mask for the sixth LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED6        (1UL << 17)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4 | LEDS_LED5 | LEDS_LED6)
+
+			/** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[1].gpers = LEDS_LEDMASK1;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[1].oders = LEDS_LEDMASK1;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[1].ovrs  = LEDS_LEDMASK1;
+
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].gpers = LEDS_LEDMASK3;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].oders = LEDS_LEDMASK3;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrs  = LEDS_LEDMASK3;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[1].gperc = LEDS_LEDMASK1;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[1].oderc = LEDS_LEDMASK1;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[1].ovrc  = LEDS_LEDMASK1;
+
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].gperc = LEDS_LEDMASK3;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].oderc = LEDS_LEDMASK3;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrc  = LEDS_LEDMASK3;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[1].ovrc  = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK1);
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrc  = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK3);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[1].ovrs  = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK1);
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrs  = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK3);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[1].ovrs  = LEDS_LEDMASK1;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[1].ovrc  = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK1);
+
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrs  = LEDS_LEDMASK3;
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrc  = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK3);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask, const uint32_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[1].ovrs  = (LEDMask    & LEDS_LEDMASK1);
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[1].ovrc  = (ActiveMask & LEDS_LEDMASK1);
+
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrs  = (LEDMask    & LEDS_LEDMASK3);
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrc  = (ActiveMask & LEDS_LEDMASK3);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint32_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[1].ovrt  = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK1);
+				AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovrt  = (LEDMask & LEDS_LEDMASK3);
+			}
+
+			static inline uint32_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint32_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return ((~AVR32_GPIO.port[1].ovr & LEDS_LEDMASK1) | (~AVR32_GPIO.port[3].ovr & LEDS_LEDMASK3));
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..824c3db49
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Atmel XMEGA A3BU Xplained.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_A3BU_XPLAINED
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_A3BU_XPLAINED A3BU_XPLAINED
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Atmel XMEGA A3BU Xplained.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Atmel XMEGA A3BU Xplained.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_A3BU_XPLAINED_H__
+#define __BOARD_A3BU_XPLAINED_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Buttons.h"
+		#include "../../Dataflash.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware Buttons mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+
+			/** Indicates the board has a hardware Dataflash mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_DATAFLASH
+
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d5119eb5c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel XMEGA A3BU Xplained.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_A3BU_XPLAINED
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_A3BU_XPLAINED A3BU_XPLAINED
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel XMEGA A3BU Xplained.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel XMEGA A3BU Xplained.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>SW0 Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.5</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON2</td><td>SW1 Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTF.1</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON3</td><td>SW2 Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTF.2</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_A3BU_XPLAINED_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_A3BU_XPLAINED_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1          (1 << 5)
+
+			/** Button mask for the second button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON2          (1 << 1)
+
+			/** Button mask for the third button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON3          (1 << 2)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				PORTE.OUTCLR   = BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTE.PIN5CTRL = (PORT_OPC_PULLUP_gc | PORT_INVEN_bm);
+
+				PORTF.OUTCLR   = (BUTTONS_BUTTON2 | BUTTONS_BUTTON3);
+				PORTF.PIN1CTRL = (PORT_OPC_PULLUP_gc | PORT_INVEN_bm);
+				PORTF.PIN2CTRL = (PORT_OPC_PULLUP_gc | PORT_INVEN_bm);
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				PORTE.OUTCLR   = BUTTONS_BUTTON1;
+				PORTE.PIN5CTRL = 0;
+
+				PORTF.OUTCLR   = (BUTTONS_BUTTON2 | BUTTONS_BUTTON3);
+				PORTF.PIN1CTRL = 0;
+				PORTF.PIN2CTRL = 0;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((PORTE_IN & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) | (PORTF_IN & (BUTTONS_BUTTON2 | BUTTONS_BUTTON3)));
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/Dataflash.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/Dataflash.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2d0983941
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/Dataflash.h
@@ -0,0 +1,228 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel XMEGA A3BU Xplained.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Dataflash_A3BU_XPLAINED
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash
+ *  \defgroup Group_Dataflash_A3BU_XPLAINED A3BU_XPLAINED
+ *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel XMEGA A3BU Xplained.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel XMEGA A3BU Xplained board.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Select Pin</th><th>SPI Port</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>DATAFLASH_CHIP1</td><td>AT45DB642D (8MB)</td><td>PORTF.4</td><td>USARTD0 (In SPI Mode)</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __DATAFLASH_A3BU_XPLAINED_H__
+#define __DATAFLASH_A3BU_XPLAINED_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../../Misc/AT45DB642D.h"
+		#include "../../../Peripheral/SerialSPI.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK                DATAFLASH_CHIP1
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT                PORTF
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS                 1
+
+			/** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP                    0
+
+			/** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP1                      (1 << 4)
+
+			/** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash ICs. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE                  1024
+
+			/** Total number of pages inside each of the board's dataflash ICs. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                      8192
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Initializes the dataflash driver so that commands and data may be sent to an attached dataflash IC.
+			 *  The appropriate SPI interface will be automatically configured.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_Init(void)
+			{
+				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT.DIRSET   = DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;
+
+				PORTCFG.MPCMASK                = DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;
+				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT.PIN0CTRL = PORT_INVEN_bm;
+
+				SerialSPI_Init(&USARTD0, (USART_SPI_SCK_LEAD_RISING | USART_SPI_SAMPLE_LEADING | USART_SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST), (F_CPU / 2));
+
+				PORTD.DIRSET   = PIN3_bm | PIN1_bm;
+				PORTD.DIRCLR   = PIN2_bm;
+				PORTC.PIN2CTRL = PORT_OPC_PULLUP_gc;
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns a byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash
+			 *
+			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+				return SerialSPI_TransferByte(&USARTD0, Byte);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and ignores the next byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+				SerialSPI_SendByte(&USARTD0, Byte);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a dummy byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns the next byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void)
+			{
+				return SerialSPI_ReceiveByte(&USARTD0);
+			}
+
+			/** Determines the currently selected dataflash chip.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Mask of the currently selected Dataflash chip, either \ref DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP if no chip is selected
+			 *          or a DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is the chip number).
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void)
+			{
+				return (DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT.OUT & DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK);
+			}
+
+			/** Selects the given dataflash chip.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in]  ChipMask  Mask of the Dataflash IC to select, in the form of a \c DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is
+			 *              the chip number).
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask)
+			{
+				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT.OUTCLR = DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;
+				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT.OUTSET = ChipMask;
+			}
+
+			/** Deselects the current dataflash chip, so that no dataflash is selected. */
+			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void)
+			{
+				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP);
+			}
+
+			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to
+			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one
+			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside
+			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs
+			 *  are deselected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from
+			 *                          0 to ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress)
+			{
+				Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+				if (PageAddress >= (DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  return;
+
+				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+			}
+
+			/** Toggles the select line of the currently selected dataflash IC, so that it is ready to receive
+			 *  a new command.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(void)
+			{
+				uint8_t SelectedChipMask = Dataflash_GetSelectedChip();
+
+				Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+				Dataflash_SelectChip(SelectedChipMask);
+			}
+
+			/** Spin-loops while the currently selected dataflash is busy executing a command, such as a main
+			 *  memory page program or main memory to buffer transfer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(void)
+			{
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+				while (!(Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_READY));
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with
+			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-bit address.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC
+			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress,
+			                                              const uint16_t BufferByte)
+			{
+				Dataflash_SendByte(PageAddress >> 5);
+				Dataflash_SendByte((PageAddress << 3) | (BufferByte >> 8));
+				Dataflash_SendByte(BufferByte);
+			}
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..16abfbc97
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,181 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel XMEGA A3BU Xplained.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_A3BU_XPLAINED
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_A3BU_XPLAINED A3BU_XPLAINED
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel XMEGA A3BU Xplained.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel XMEGA A3BU Xplained.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Yellow</td><td>LED0 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTR.0</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Yellow</td><td>LED1 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTR.1</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Red</td><td>Status Bicolour Red LED</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.4</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED4</td><td>Green</td><td>Status Bicolour Green LED</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.5</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_A3BU_XPLAINED_H__
+#define __LEDS_A3BU_XPLAINED_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define LEDS_PORTR_LEDS       (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+			#define LEDS_PORTD_LEDS       (LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 0)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 1)
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 4)
+
+			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED4        (1 << 5)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				PORTR.DIRSET    = LEDS_PORTR_LEDS;
+				PORTR.OUTCLR    = LEDS_PORTR_LEDS;
+
+				PORTCFG.MPCMASK = LEDS_PORTR_LEDS;
+				PORTR.PIN0CTRL  = PORT_INVEN_bm;
+
+				PORTD.DIRSET    = LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+				PORTD.OUTCLR    = LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+
+				PORTD.PIN4CTRL  = PORT_INVEN_bm;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				PORTR.DIRCLR    = LEDS_PORTR_LEDS;
+				PORTR.OUTCLR    = LEDS_PORTR_LEDS;
+
+				PORTCFG.MPCMASK = 0;
+				PORTR.PIN0CTRL  = LEDS_PORTR_LEDS;
+
+				PORTD.DIRCLR    = LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+				PORTD.OUTCLR    = LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+
+				PORTD.PIN4CTRL  = 0;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTR_OUTSET = LEDMask & LEDS_PORTR_LEDS;
+				PORTD_OUTSET = LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTR_OUTCLR = LEDMask & LEDS_PORTR_LEDS;
+				PORTD_OUTCLR = LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTR_OUTCLR = LEDS_PORTR_LEDS;
+				PORTD_OUTCLR = LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+
+				PORTR_OUTSET = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTR_LEDS);
+				PORTD_OUTSET = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTR_OUTCLR = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTR_LEDS);
+				PORTD_OUTCLR = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);
+
+				PORTR_OUTSET = (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTR_LEDS);
+				PORTD_OUTSET = (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTR_OUTTGL = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTR_LEDS);
+				PORTD_OUTTGL = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return ((PORTR_OUT & LEDS_PORTR_LEDS) | (PORTD_OUT & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS));
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d807d18b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Atmel XMEGA B1 Xplained.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_B1_XPLAINED
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_B1_XPLAINED B1_XPLAINED
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Atmel XMEGA B1 Xplained.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Atmel XMEGA B1 Xplained.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_B1_XPLAINED_H__
+#define __BOARD_B1_XPLAINED_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Buttons.h"
+		#include "../../Dataflash.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware Buttons mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+
+			/** Indicates the board has a hardware Dataflash mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_DATAFLASH
+
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9c458b496
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel XMEGA B1 Xplained.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_B1_XPLAINED
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_B1_XPLAINED B1_XPLAINED
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel XMEGA B1 Xplained.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel XMEGA B1 Xplained.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>Touch CS0 Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.0</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON2</td><td>Touch CS1 Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.1</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON3</td><td>Touch CS2 Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.2</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON4</td><td>Touch CS3 Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.3</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_B1_XPLAINED_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_B1_XPLAINED_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1          (1 << 0)
+
+			/** Button mask for the second button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON2          (1 << 1)
+
+			/** Button mask for the third button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON3          (1 << 2)
+
+			/** Button mask for the fourth button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON4          (1 << 3)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				PORTE.OUTSET    = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2 | BUTTONS_BUTTON3 | BUTTONS_BUTTON4);
+
+				PORTCFG.MPCMASK = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2 | BUTTONS_BUTTON3 | BUTTONS_BUTTON4);
+				PORTE.PIN0CTRL  = (PORT_INVEN_bm | PORT_OPC_PULLUP_gc);
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				PORTE.OUTCLR    = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2 | BUTTONS_BUTTON3 | BUTTONS_BUTTON4);
+
+				PORTCFG.MPCMASK = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2 | BUTTONS_BUTTON3 | BUTTONS_BUTTON4);
+				PORTE.PIN0CTRL  = 0;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return (PORTE_IN & (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2 | BUTTONS_BUTTON3 | BUTTONS_BUTTON4));
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/Dataflash.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/Dataflash.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f02ca4af0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/Dataflash.h
@@ -0,0 +1,229 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel XMEGA B1 Xplained.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Dataflash_B1_XPLAINED
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Dataflash
+ *  \defgroup Group_Dataflash_B1_XPLAINED B1_XPLAINED
+ *  \brief Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel XMEGA B1 Xplained.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Dataflash driver header for the Atmel XMEGA B1 Xplained board.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Select Pin</th><th>SPI Port</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>DATAFLASH_CHIP1</td><td>AT45DB642D (8MB)</td><td>PORTD.2</td><td>USARTC0 (In SPI Mode, Remapped)</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __DATAFLASH_B1_XPLAINED_H__
+#define __DATAFLASH_B1_XPLAINED_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../../Misc/AT45DB642D.h"
+		#include "../../../Peripheral/SerialSPI.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK                DATAFLASH_CHIP1
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT                PORTD
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS                 1
+
+			/** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP                    0
+
+			/** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_CHIP1                      (1 << 2)
+
+			/** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash ICs. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE                  1024
+
+			/** Total number of pages inside each of the board's dataflash ICs. */
+			#define DATAFLASH_PAGES                      8192
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Initializes the dataflash driver so that commands and data may be sent to an attached dataflash IC.
+			 *  The appropriate SPI interface will be automatically configured.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_Init(void)
+			{
+				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT.DIRSET   = DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;
+
+				PORTCFG.MPCMASK                = DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;
+				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT.PIN0CTRL = PORT_INVEN_bm;
+
+				SerialSPI_Init(&USARTC0, (USART_SPI_SCK_LEAD_RISING | USART_SPI_SAMPLE_LEADING | USART_SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST), (F_CPU / 2));
+
+				PORTC.REMAP   |= PORT_USART0_bm;
+				PORTC.DIRSET   = PIN7_bm | PIN5_bm;
+				PORTC.DIRCLR   = PIN6_bm;
+				PORTC.PIN6CTRL = PORT_OPC_PULLUP_gc;
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns a byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash
+			 *
+			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+				return SerialSPI_TransferByte(&USARTC0, Byte);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and ignores the next byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+				SerialSPI_SendByte(&USARTC0, Byte);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a dummy byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns the next byte from the dataflash.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Last response byte from the dataflash
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void)
+			{
+				return SerialSPI_ReceiveByte(&USARTC0);
+			}
+
+			/** Determines the currently selected dataflash chip.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Mask of the currently selected Dataflash chip, either \ref DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP if no chip is selected
+			 *          or a DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is the chip number).
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(void)
+			{
+				return (DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT.OUT & DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK);
+			}
+
+			/** Selects the given dataflash chip.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in]  ChipMask  Mask of the Dataflash IC to select, in the form of a \c DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is
+			 *              the chip number).
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChip(const uint8_t ChipMask)
+			{
+				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT.OUTCLR = DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK;
+				DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT.OUTSET = (ChipMask & DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK);
+			}
+
+			/** Deselects the current dataflash chip, so that no dataflash is selected. */
+			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Dataflash_DeselectChip(void)
+			{
+				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP);
+			}
+
+			/** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to
+			 *  ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one
+			 *  dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside
+			 *  the total number of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs
+			 *  are deselected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from
+			 *                          0 to ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1).
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress)
+			{
+				Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+				if (PageAddress >= (DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  return;
+
+				Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+			}
+
+			/** Toggles the select line of the currently selected dataflash IC, so that it is ready to receive
+			 *  a new command.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(void)
+			{
+				uint8_t SelectedChipMask = Dataflash_GetSelectedChip();
+
+				Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+				Dataflash_SelectChip(SelectedChipMask);
+			}
+
+			/** Spin-loops while the currently selected dataflash is busy executing a command, such as a main
+			 *  memory page program or main memory to buffer transfer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(void)
+			{
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+				while (!(Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_READY));
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with
+			 *  dataflash commands which require a complete 24-bit address.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] PageAddress  Page address within the selected dataflash IC
+			 *  \param[in] BufferByte   Address within the dataflash's buffer
+			 */
+			static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress,
+			                                              const uint16_t BufferByte)
+			{
+				Dataflash_SendByte(PageAddress >> 5);
+				Dataflash_SendByte((PageAddress << 3) | (BufferByte >> 8));
+				Dataflash_SendByte(BufferByte);
+			}
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7bd31ad09
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,183 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel XMEGA B1 Xplained.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_B1_XPLAINED
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_B1_XPLAINED B1_XPLAINED
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel XMEGA B1 Xplained.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel XMEGA B1 Xplained.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Yellow</td><td>LED0 LED</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.4</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Yellow</td><td>LED1 LED</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.5</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Yellow</td><td>LED2 LED</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.6</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED4</td><td>Yellow</td><td>LED3 LED</td><td>High</td><td>PORTB.7</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED5</td><td>Green</td><td>USB LED</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTE.4</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_B1_XPLAINED_H__
+#define __LEDS_B1_XPLAINED_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define LEDS_PORTB_LEDS        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+			#define LEDS_PORTE_LEDS        LEDS_LED5
+
+			#define LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT  1
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 4)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 5)
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 6)
+
+			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED4        (1 << 7)
+
+			/** LED mask for the fifth LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED5       ((1 << 4) >> LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4 | LEDS_LED5)
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				PORTB.DIRSET    = LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;
+				PORTB.OUTCLR    = LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;
+
+				PORTCFG.MPCMASK = LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;
+				PORTB.PIN0CTRL  = PORT_INVEN_bm;
+
+				PORTE.DIRSET    = (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);
+				PORTE.OUTCLR    = (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				PORTB.DIRCLR    = LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;
+				PORTB.OUTCLR    = LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;
+
+				PORTCFG.MPCMASK = 0;
+				PORTB.PIN0CTRL  = LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;
+
+				PORTE.DIRCLR    = (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);
+				PORTE.OUTCLR    = (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB_OUTSET = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);
+				PORTE_OUTSET = ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB_OUTCLR = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);
+				PORTE_OUTCLR = ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB_OUTCLR = LEDS_PORTB_LEDS;
+				PORTE_OUTCLR = (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);
+
+				PORTB_OUTSET = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);
+				PORTE_OUTSET = ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTB_OUTCLR =  (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);
+				PORTE_OUTCLR = ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);
+
+				PORTB_OUTSET =  (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);
+				PORTE_OUTSET = ((ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTB_OUTTGL = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS);
+				PORTE_OUTTGL = ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT);
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return ((PORTB_OUT & LEDS_PORTB_LEDS) | (PORTE_OUT & (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)));
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/C3_XPLAINED/Board.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/C3_XPLAINED/Board.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d90cc3a5c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/C3_XPLAINED/Board.h
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Atmel XMEGA C3 Xplained.
+ *  \copydetails Group_BoardInfo_C3_XPLAINED
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Board driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_BoardInfo
+ *  \defgroup Group_BoardInfo_C3_XPLAINED C3_XPLAINED
+ *  \brief Board specific information header for the Atmel XMEGA C3 Xplained.
+ *
+ *  Board specific information header for the Atmel XMEGA C3 Xplained.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BOARD_C3_XPLAINED_H__
+#define __BOARD_C3_XPLAINED_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Buttons.h"
+		#include "../../Dataflash.h"
+		#include "../../LEDs.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Board.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware Buttons mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_BUTTONS
+
+			/** Indicates the board has hardware LEDs mounted. */
+			#define BOARD_HAS_LEDS
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/C3_XPLAINED/Buttons.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/C3_XPLAINED/Buttons.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..db62b1d1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/C3_XPLAINED/Buttons.h
@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel XMEGA C3 Xplained.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Buttons_C3_XPLAINED
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the Buttons driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Buttons
+ *  \defgroup Group_Buttons_C3_XPLAINED C3_XPLAINED
+ *  \brief Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel XMEGA C3 Xplained.
+ *
+ *  Board specific Buttons driver header for the Atmel XMEGA C3 Xplained.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON1</td><td>SW0 Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTF.1</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>BUTTONS_BUTTON2</td><td>SW1 Button</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTF.2</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __BUTTONS_C3_XPLAINED_H__
+#define __BUTTONS_C3_XPLAINED_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_BUTTONS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Button mask for the first button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON1          (1 << 1)
+
+			/** Button mask for the second button on the board. */
+			#define BUTTONS_BUTTON2          (1 << 2)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void Buttons_Init(void)
+			{
+				PORTF.OUTCLR   = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);
+				PORTF.PIN1CTRL = (PORT_OPC_PULLUP_gc | PORT_INVEN_bm);
+				PORTF.PIN2CTRL = (PORT_OPC_PULLUP_gc | PORT_INVEN_bm);
+			}
+
+			static inline void Buttons_Disable(void)
+			{
+				PORTF.OUTCLR   = (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2);
+				PORTF.PIN1CTRL = 0;
+				PORTF.PIN2CTRL = 0;
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Buttons_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return (PORTF_IN & (BUTTONS_BUTTON1 | BUTTONS_BUTTON2));
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/C3_XPLAINED/LEDs.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/C3_XPLAINED/LEDs.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..737624bd3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Board/XMEGA/C3_XPLAINED/LEDs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,181 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel XMEGA C3 Xplained.
+ *  \copydetails Group_LEDs_C3_XPLAINED
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_LEDs
+ *  \defgroup Group_LEDs_C3_XPLAINED C3_XPLAINED
+ *  \brief Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel XMEGA C3 Xplained.
+ *
+ *  Board specific LED driver header for the Atmel XMEGA C3 Xplained.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *    <tr><th>Name</th><th>Color</th><th>Info</th><th>Active Level</th><th>Port Pin</th></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED1</td><td>Yellow</td><td>LED0 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTR.0</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED2</td><td>Yellow</td><td>LED1 LED</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTR.1</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED3</td><td>Red</td><td>Status Bicolour Red LED</td><td>Low</td><td>PORTD.4</td></tr>
+ *    <tr><td>LEDS_LED4</td><td>Green</td><td>Status Bicolour Green LED</td><td>High</td><td>PORTD.5</td></tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LEDS_C3_XPLAINED_H__
+#define __LEDS_C3_XPLAINED_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define LEDS_PORTR_LEDS       (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+			#define LEDS_PORTD_LEDS       (LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED1        (1 << 0)
+
+			/** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED2        (1 << 1)
+
+			/** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED3        (1 << 4)
+
+			/** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_LED4        (1 << 5)
+
+			/** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */
+			#define LEDS_ALL_LEDS    (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+			/** LED mask for none of the board LEDs. */
+			#define LEDS_NO_LEDS     0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			static inline void LEDs_Init(void)
+			{
+				PORTR.DIRSET    = LEDS_PORTR_LEDS;
+				PORTR.OUTCLR    = LEDS_PORTR_LEDS;
+
+				PORTCFG.MPCMASK = LEDS_PORTR_LEDS;
+				PORTR.PIN0CTRL  = PORT_INVEN_bm;
+
+				PORTD.DIRSET    = LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+				PORTD.OUTCLR    = LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+
+				PORTD.PIN4CTRL  = PORT_INVEN_bm;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_Disable(void)
+			{
+				PORTR.DIRCLR    = LEDS_PORTR_LEDS;
+				PORTR.OUTCLR    = LEDS_PORTR_LEDS;
+
+				PORTCFG.MPCMASK = 0;
+				PORTR.PIN0CTRL  = LEDS_PORTR_LEDS;
+
+				PORTD.DIRCLR    = LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+				PORTD.OUTCLR    = LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+
+				PORTD.PIN4CTRL  = 0;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTR_OUTSET = LEDMask & LEDS_PORTR_LEDS;
+				PORTD_OUTSET = LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTR_OUTCLR = LEDMask & LEDS_PORTR_LEDS;
+				PORTD_OUTCLR = LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTR_OUTCLR = LEDS_PORTR_LEDS;
+				PORTD_OUTCLR = LEDS_PORTD_LEDS;
+
+				PORTR_OUTSET = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTR_LEDS);
+				PORTD_OUTSET = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask,
+			                                   const uint8_t ActiveMask)
+			{
+				PORTR_OUTCLR = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTR_LEDS);
+				PORTD_OUTCLR = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);
+
+				PORTR_OUTSET = (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTR_LEDS);
+				PORTD_OUTSET = (ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline void LEDs_ToggleLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask)
+			{
+				PORTR_OUTTGL = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTR_LEDS);
+				PORTD_OUTTGL = (LEDMask & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS);
+			}
+
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void)
+			{
+				return ((PORTR_OUT & LEDS_PORTR_LEDS) | (PORTD_OUT & LEDS_PORTD_LEDS));
+			}
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/AT45DB321C.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/AT45DB321C.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..25069286f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/AT45DB321C.h
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Command constants for the Atmel AT45DB321C Dataflash.
+ *  \copydetails Group_AT45DB321C
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_MiscDrivers
+ *  \defgroup Group_AT45DB321C Atmel AT45DB321C Dataflash Commands - LUFA/Drivers/Misc/AT45DB321C.h
+ *  \brief Command constants for the Atmel AT45DB321C Dataflash.
+ *
+ *  Dataflash command constants for the Atmel AT45DB321C Dataflash IC.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __AT45DB321C_CMDS_H__
+#define __AT45DB321C_CMDS_H__
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** \name Dataflash Status Values */
+			//@{
+			#define DF_STATUS_READY                         (1 << 7)
+			#define DF_STATUS_COMPMISMATCH                  (1 << 6)
+			#define DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON           (1 << 1)
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name Dataflash Commands */
+			//@{
+			#define DF_CMD_GETSTATUS                        0xD7
+
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1                   0x53
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2                   0x55
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1COMP               0x60
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2COMP               0x61
+			#define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF1                 0x58
+			#define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF2                 0x59
+
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD                  0xD2
+			#define DF_CMD_CONTARRAYREAD_LF                 0xE8
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1READ_LF                     0xD4
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2READ_LF                     0xD6
+
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE                       0x84
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE                       0x87
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE          0x83
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE          0x86
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEM                   0x88
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEM                   0x89
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF1          0x82
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF2          0x85
+
+			#define DF_CMD_PAGEERASE                        0x81
+			#define DF_CMD_BLOCKERASE                       0x50
+
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF              ((char[]){0x3D, 0x2A, 0x7F, 0xCF})
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE1        0x3D
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE2        0x2A
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE3        0x7F
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE4        0xCF
+
+			#define DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO       0x9F
+			//@}
+
+			/** Manufacturer code for Atmel Corporation, returned by Atmel Dataflash ICs in response to the \c DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO command. */
+			#define DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL                   0x1F
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/AT45DB642D.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/AT45DB642D.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ebbad71f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/AT45DB642D.h
@@ -0,0 +1,116 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Command constants for the Atmel AT45DB642D Dataflash.
+ *  \copydetails Group_AT45DB642D
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_MiscDrivers
+ *  \defgroup Group_AT45DB642D Atmel AT45DB642D Dataflash Commands - LUFA/Drivers/Misc/AT45DB642D.h
+ *  \brief Command constants for the Atmel AT45DB642D Dataflash.
+ *
+ *  Dataflash command constants for the Atmel AT45DB642D Dataflash IC.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __AT45DB642D_CMDS_H__
+#define __AT45DB642D_CMDS_H__
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** \name Dataflash Status Values */
+			//@{
+			#define DF_STATUS_READY                         (1 << 7)
+			#define DF_STATUS_COMPMISMATCH                  (1 << 6)
+			#define DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON           (1 << 1)
+			#define DF_STATUS_BINARYPAGESIZE_ON             (1 << 0)
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name Dataflash Commands */
+			//@{
+			#define DF_CMD_GETSTATUS                        0xD7
+			#define DF_CMD_POWERDOWN                        0xB9
+			#define DF_CMD_WAKEUP                           0xAB
+
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1                   0x53
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2                   0x55
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1COMP               0x60
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2COMP               0x61
+			#define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF1                 0x58
+			#define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF2                 0x59
+
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD                  0xD2
+			#define DF_CMD_CONTARRAYREAD_LF                 0x03
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1READ_LF                     0xD1
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2READ_LF                     0xD3
+
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE                       0x84
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE                       0x87
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE          0x83
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE          0x86
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEM                   0x88
+			#define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEM                   0x89
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF1          0x82
+			#define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF2          0x85
+
+			#define DF_CMD_PAGEERASE                        0x81
+			#define DF_CMD_BLOCKERASE                       0x50
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORERASE                      0x7C
+
+			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE                        ((char[]){0xC7, 0x94, 0x80, 0x9A})
+			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE1                  0xC7
+			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE2                  0x94
+			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE3                  0x80
+			#define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE4                  0x9A
+
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF              ((char[]){0x3D, 0x2A, 0x7F, 0x9A})
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE1        0x3D
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE2        0x2A
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE3        0x7F
+			#define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE4        0x9A
+
+			#define DF_CMD_BINARYPAGESIZEMODEON             ((char[]){0x3D, 0x2A, 0x80, 0xA6})
+			#define DF_CMD_BINARYPAGESIZEMODEON_BYTE1       0x3D
+			#define DF_CMD_BINARYPAGESIZEMODEON_BYTE2       0x2A
+			#define DF_CMD_BINARYPAGESIZEMODEON_BYTE3       0x80
+			#define DF_CMD_BINARYPAGESIZEMODEON_BYTE4       0xA6
+
+			#define DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO       0x9F
+			//@}
+
+			/** Manufacturer code for Atmel Corporation, returned by Atmel Dataflash ICs in response to the \c DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO command. */
+			#define DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL                   0x1F
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/RingBuffer.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/RingBuffer.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..68fdb8e92
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/RingBuffer.h
@@ -0,0 +1,308 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Lightweight ring (circular) buffer, for fast insertion/deletion of bytes.
+ *
+ *  Lightweight ring buffer, for fast insertion/deletion. Multiple buffers can be created of
+ *  different sizes to suit different needs.
+ *
+ *  Note that for each buffer, insertion and removal operations may occur at the same time (via
+ *  a multi-threaded ISR based system) however the same kind of operation (two or more insertions
+ *  or deletions) must not overlap. If there is possibility of two or more of the same kind of
+ *  operating occurring at the same point in time, atomic (mutex) locking should be used.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_MiscDrivers
+ *  \defgroup Group_RingBuff Generic Byte Ring Buffer - LUFA/Drivers/Misc/RingBuffer.h
+ *  \brief Lightweight ring buffer, for fast insertion/deletion of bytes.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_RingBuff_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - None
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_RingBuff_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Lightweight ring buffer, for fast insertion/deletion. Multiple buffers can be created of
+ *  different sizes to suit different needs.
+ *
+ *  Note that for each buffer, insertion and removal operations may occur at the same time (via
+ *  a multi-threaded ISR based system) however the same kind of operation (two or more insertions
+ *  or deletions) must not overlap. If there is possibility of two or more of the same kind of
+ *  operating occurring at the same point in time, atomic (mutex) locking should be used.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_RingBuff_ExampleUsage Example Usage
+ *  The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical
+ *  application.
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *      // Create the buffer structure and its underlying storage array
+ *      RingBuffer_t Buffer;
+ *      uint8_t      BufferData[128];
+ *
+ *      // Initialize the buffer with the created storage array
+ *      RingBuffer_InitBuffer(&Buffer, BufferData, sizeof(BufferData));
+ *
+ *      // Insert some data into the buffer
+ *      RingBuffer_Insert(&Buffer, 'H');
+ *      RingBuffer_Insert(&Buffer, 'E');
+ *      RingBuffer_Insert(&Buffer, 'L');
+ *      RingBuffer_Insert(&Buffer, 'L');
+ *      RingBuffer_Insert(&Buffer, 'O');
+ *
+ *      // Cache the number of stored bytes in the buffer
+ *      uint16_t BufferCount = RingBuffer_GetCount(&Buffer);
+ *
+ *      // Printer stored data length
+ *      printf("Buffer Length: %d, Buffer Data: \r\n", BufferCount);
+ *
+ *      // Print contents of the buffer one character at a time
+ *      while (BufferCount--)
+ *        putc(RingBuffer_Remove(&Buffer));
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __RING_BUFFER_H__
+#define __RING_BUFFER_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** \brief Ring Buffer Management Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a new ring buffer object. Buffers should be initialized via a call to
+		 *  \ref RingBuffer_InitBuffer() before use.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t* In; /**< Current storage location in the circular buffer. */
+			uint8_t* Out; /**< Current retrieval location in the circular buffer. */
+			uint8_t* Start; /**< Pointer to the start of the buffer's underlying storage array. */
+			uint8_t* End; /**< Pointer to the end of the buffer's underlying storage array. */
+			uint16_t Size; /**< Size of the buffer's underlying storage array. */
+			uint16_t Count; /**< Number of bytes currently stored in the buffer. */
+		} RingBuffer_t;
+
+	/* Inline Functions: */
+		/** Initializes a ring buffer ready for use. Buffers must be initialized via this function
+		 *  before any operations are called upon them. Already initialized buffers may be reset
+		 *  by re-initializing them using this function.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[out] Buffer   Pointer to a ring buffer structure to initialize.
+		 *  \param[out] DataPtr  Pointer to a global array that will hold the data stored into the ring buffer.
+		 *  \param[out] Size     Maximum number of bytes that can be stored in the underlying data array.
+		 */
+		static inline void RingBuffer_InitBuffer(RingBuffer_t* Buffer,
+		                                         uint8_t* const DataPtr,
+		                                         const uint16_t Size) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+		static inline void RingBuffer_InitBuffer(RingBuffer_t* Buffer,
+		                                         uint8_t* const DataPtr,
+		                                         const uint16_t Size)
+		{
+			GCC_FORCE_POINTER_ACCESS(Buffer);
+
+			uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask();
+			GlobalInterruptDisable();
+
+			Buffer->In     = DataPtr;
+			Buffer->Out    = DataPtr;
+			Buffer->Start  = &DataPtr[0];
+			Buffer->End    = &DataPtr[Size];
+			Buffer->Size   = Size;
+			Buffer->Count  = 0;
+
+			SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt);
+		}
+
+		/** Retrieves the current number of bytes stored in a particular buffer. This value is computed
+		 *  by entering an atomic lock on the buffer, so that the buffer cannot be modified while the
+		 *  computation takes place. This value should be cached when reading out the contents of the buffer,
+		 *  so that as small a time as possible is spent in an atomic lock.
+		 *
+		 *  \note The value returned by this function is guaranteed to only be the minimum number of bytes
+		 *        stored in the given buffer; this value may change as other threads write new data, thus
+		 *        the returned number should be used only to determine how many successive reads may safely
+		 *        be performed on the buffer.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to a ring buffer structure whose count is to be computed.
+		 *
+		 *  \return Number of bytes currently stored in the buffer.
+		 */
+		static inline uint16_t RingBuffer_GetCount(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+		static inline uint16_t RingBuffer_GetCount(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer)
+		{
+			uint16_t Count;
+
+			uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask();
+			GlobalInterruptDisable();
+
+			Count = Buffer->Count;
+
+			SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt);
+			return Count;
+		}
+
+		/** Retrieves the free space in a particular buffer. This value is computed by entering an atomic lock
+		 *  on the buffer, so that the buffer cannot be modified while the computation takes place.
+		 *
+		 *  \note The value returned by this function is guaranteed to only be the maximum number of bytes
+		 *        free in the given buffer; this value may change as other threads write new data, thus
+		 *        the returned number should be used only to determine how many successive writes may safely
+		 *        be performed on the buffer when there is a single writer thread.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to a ring buffer structure whose free count is to be computed.
+		 *
+		 *  \return Number of free bytes in the buffer.
+		 */
+		static inline uint16_t RingBuffer_GetFreeCount(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+		static inline uint16_t RingBuffer_GetFreeCount(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer)
+		{
+			return (Buffer->Size - RingBuffer_GetCount(Buffer));
+		}
+
+		/** Atomically determines if the specified ring buffer contains any data. This should
+		 *  be tested before removing data from the buffer, to ensure that the buffer does not
+		 *  underflow.
+		 *
+		 *  If the data is to be removed in a loop, store the total number of bytes stored in the
+		 *  buffer (via a call to the \ref RingBuffer_GetCount() function) in a temporary variable
+		 *  to reduce the time spent in atomicity locks.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in,out] Buffer  Pointer to a ring buffer structure to insert into.
+		 *
+		 *  \return Boolean \c true if the buffer contains no free space, \c false otherwise.
+		 */
+		static inline bool RingBuffer_IsEmpty(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+		static inline bool RingBuffer_IsEmpty(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer)
+		{
+			return (RingBuffer_GetCount(Buffer) == 0);
+		}
+
+		/** Atomically determines if the specified ring buffer contains any free space. This should
+		 *  be tested before storing data to the buffer, to ensure that no data is lost due to a
+		 *  buffer overrun.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in,out] Buffer  Pointer to a ring buffer structure to insert into.
+		 *
+		 *  \return Boolean \c true if the buffer contains no free space, \c false otherwise.
+		 */
+		static inline bool RingBuffer_IsFull(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+		static inline bool RingBuffer_IsFull(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer)
+		{
+			return (RingBuffer_GetCount(Buffer) == Buffer->Size);
+		}
+
+		/** Inserts an element into the ring buffer.
+		 *
+		 *  \warning Only one execution thread (main program thread or an ISR) may insert into a single buffer
+		 *           otherwise data corruption may occur. Insertion and removal may occur from different execution
+		 *           threads.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in,out] Buffer  Pointer to a ring buffer structure to insert into.
+		 *  \param[in]     Data    Data element to insert into the buffer.
+		 */
+		static inline void RingBuffer_Insert(RingBuffer_t* Buffer,
+		                                     const uint8_t Data) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+		static inline void RingBuffer_Insert(RingBuffer_t* Buffer,
+		                                     const uint8_t Data)
+		{
+			GCC_FORCE_POINTER_ACCESS(Buffer);
+
+			*Buffer->In = Data;
+
+			if (++Buffer->In == Buffer->End)
+			  Buffer->In = Buffer->Start;
+
+			uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask();
+			GlobalInterruptDisable();
+
+			Buffer->Count++;
+
+			SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt);
+		}
+
+		/** Removes an element from the ring buffer.
+		 *
+		 *  \warning Only one execution thread (main program thread or an ISR) may remove from a single buffer
+		 *           otherwise data corruption may occur. Insertion and removal may occur from different execution
+		 *           threads.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in,out] Buffer  Pointer to a ring buffer structure to retrieve from.
+		 *
+		 *  \return Next data element stored in the buffer.
+		 */
+		static inline uint8_t RingBuffer_Remove(RingBuffer_t* Buffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+		static inline uint8_t RingBuffer_Remove(RingBuffer_t* Buffer)
+		{
+			GCC_FORCE_POINTER_ACCESS(Buffer);
+
+			uint8_t Data = *Buffer->Out;
+
+			if (++Buffer->Out == Buffer->End)
+			  Buffer->Out = Buffer->Start;
+
+			uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask();
+			GlobalInterruptDisable();
+
+			Buffer->Count--;
+
+			SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt);
+
+			return Data;
+		}
+
+		/** Returns the next element stored in the ring buffer, without removing it.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in,out] Buffer  Pointer to a ring buffer structure to retrieve from.
+		 *
+		 *  \return Next data element stored in the buffer.
+		 */
+		static inline uint8_t RingBuffer_Peek(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+		static inline uint8_t RingBuffer_Peek(RingBuffer_t* const Buffer)
+		{
+			return *Buffer->Out;
+		}
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d43fe010c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h
@@ -0,0 +1,231 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief ANSI terminal special escape code macros.
+ *
+ *  ANSI terminal compatible escape sequences. These escape sequences are designed to be concatenated with existing
+ *  strings to modify their display on a compatible terminal application.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_MiscDrivers
+ *  \defgroup Group_Terminal ANSI Terminal Escape Codes - LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h
+ *  \brief ANSI terminal special escape code macros.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Terminal_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - None
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Terminal_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Escape code macros for ANSI compliant text terminals.
+ *
+ *  \note If desired, the macro \c DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES can be defined in the project makefile and passed to the GCC
+ *        compiler via the -D switch to disable the terminal codes without modifying the source, for use with non
+ *        compatible terminals (any terminal codes then equate to empty strings).
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Terminal_ExampleUsage Example Usage
+ *  The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical
+ *  application.
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *      printf("Normal String, "
+ *             ESC_BOLD_ON "Bold String, "
+ *             ESC_UNDERLINE_ON "Bold and Underlined String"
+ *             ESC_RESET ESC_FG_BLUE ESC_BG_YELLOW "Normal Blue-on-Yellow String");
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __TERMINALCODES_H__
+#define __TERMINALCODES_H__
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			#if !defined(DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES)
+				/** Creates an ANSI escape sequence with the specified payload.
+				 *
+				 *  \param[in] EscapeSeq  Payload to encode as an ANSI escape sequence, a \c ESC_* mask.
+				 */
+				#define ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(EscapeSeq)  "\33[" EscapeSeq
+			#else
+				#define ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(EscapeSeq)
+			#endif
+
+			/** \name Text Display Modifier Control Sequences */
+			//@{
+			/** Turns on bold so that any following text is printed to the terminal in bold. */
+			#define ESC_BOLD_ON                     ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("1m")
+
+			/** Turns on italics so that any following text is printed to the terminal in italics. */
+			#define ESC_ITALICS_ON                  ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("3m")
+
+			/** Turns on underline so that any following text is printed to the terminal underlined. */
+			#define ESC_UNDERLINE_ON                ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("4m")
+
+			/** Turns on inverse so that any following text is printed to the terminal in inverted colours. */
+			#define ESC_INVERSE_ON                  ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("7m")
+
+			/** Turns on strike-through so that any following text is printed to the terminal with a line through the
+			 *  center.
+			 */
+			#define ESC_STRIKETHROUGH_ON            ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("9m")
+
+			/** Turns off bold so that any following text is printed to the terminal in non bold. */
+			#define ESC_BOLD_OFF                    ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("22m")
+
+			/** Turns off italics so that any following text is printed to the terminal in non italics. */
+			#define ESC_ITALICS_OFF                 ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("23m")
+
+			/** Turns off underline so that any following text is printed to the terminal non underlined. */
+			#define ESC_UNDERLINE_OFF               ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("24m")
+
+			/** Turns off inverse so that any following text is printed to the terminal in non inverted colours. */
+			#define ESC_INVERSE_OFF                 ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("27m")
+
+			/** Turns off strike-through so that any following text is printed to the terminal without a line through
+			 *  the center.
+			 */
+			#define ESC_STRIKETHROUGH_OFF           ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("29m")
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name Text Colour Control Sequences */
+			//@{
+			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to black. */
+			#define ESC_FG_BLACK                    ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("30m")
+
+			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to red. */
+			#define ESC_FG_RED                      ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("31m")
+
+			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to green. */
+			#define ESC_FG_GREEN                    ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("32m")
+
+			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to yellow. */
+			#define ESC_FG_YELLOW                   ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("33m")
+
+			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to blue. */
+			#define ESC_FG_BLUE                     ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("34m")
+
+			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to magenta. */
+			#define ESC_FG_MAGENTA                  ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("35m")
+
+			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to cyan. */
+			#define ESC_FG_CYAN                     ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("36m")
+
+			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to white. */
+			#define ESC_FG_WHITE                    ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("37m")
+
+			/** Sets the foreground (text) colour to the terminal's default. */
+			#define ESC_FG_DEFAULT                  ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("39m")
+
+			/** Sets the text background colour to black. */
+			#define ESC_BG_BLACK                    ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("40m")
+
+			/** Sets the text background colour to red. */
+			#define ESC_BG_RED                      ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("41m")
+
+			/** Sets the text background colour to green. */
+			#define ESC_BG_GREEN                    ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("42m")
+
+			/** Sets the text background colour to yellow. */
+			#define ESC_BG_YELLOW                   ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("43m")
+
+			/** Sets the text background colour to blue. */
+			#define ESC_BG_BLUE                     ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("44m")
+
+			/** Sets the text background colour to magenta. */
+			#define ESC_BG_MAGENTA                  ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("45m")
+
+			/** Sets the text background colour to cyan. */
+			#define ESC_BG_CYAN                     ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("46m")
+
+			/** Sets the text background colour to white. */
+			#define ESC_BG_WHITE                    ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("47m")
+
+			/** Sets the text background colour to the terminal's default. */
+			#define ESC_BG_DEFAULT                  ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("49m")
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name Cursor Positioning Control Sequences */
+			//@{
+			/** Saves the current cursor position so that it may be restored with \ref ESC_CURSOR_POS_RESTORE. */
+			#define ESC_CURSOR_POS_SAVE             ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("s")
+
+			/** Restores the cursor position to the last position saved with \ref ESC_CURSOR_POS_SAVE. */
+			#define ESC_CURSOR_POS_RESTORE          ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("u")
+
+			/** Sets the cursor position to the given line and column.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Line    Line number to position the cursor at.
+			 *  \param[in] Column  Column number to position the cursor at.
+			 */
+			#define ESC_CURSOR_POS(Line, Column)    ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(#Line ";" #Column "H")
+
+			/** Moves the cursor up the given number of lines.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Lines  Number of lines to move the cursor position
+			 */
+			#define ESC_CURSOR_UP(Lines)            ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(#Lines "A")
+
+			/** Moves the cursor down the given number of lines.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Lines  Number of lines to move the cursor position
+			 */
+			#define ESC_CURSOR_DOWN(Lines)          ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(#Lines "B")
+
+			/** Moves the cursor to the right the given number of columns.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Columns  Number of columns to move the cursor position
+			 */
+			#define ESC_CURSOR_FORWARD(Columns)     ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(#Columns "C")
+
+			/** Moves the cursor to the left the given number of columns.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Columns  Number of columns to move the cursor position
+			 */
+			#define ESC_CURSOR_BACKWARD(Columns)    ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(#Columns "D")
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name Miscellaneous Control Sequences */
+			//@{
+			/** Resets any escape sequence modifiers back to their defaults. */
+			#define ESC_RESET                       ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("0m")
+
+			/** Erases the entire display, returning the cursor to the top left. */
+			#define ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY               ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("2J")
+
+			/** Erases the current line, returning the cursor to the far left. */
+			#define ESC_ERASE_LINE                  ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("K")
+			//@}
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..295c6e1e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Hardware Analogue-to-Digital converter driver.
+ *
+ *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the device-specific ADC driver, for microcontrollers
+ *  containing an ADC.
+ *
+ *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct ADC driver header file for the
+ *  currently selected architecture and microcontroller model.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_PeripheralDrivers
+ *  \defgroup Group_ADC ADC Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h
+ *  \brief Hardware Analogue-to-Digital converter driver.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_ADC_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - None
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_ADC_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Hardware ADC driver. This module provides an easy to use driver for the hardware ADC
+ *  present on many microcontrollers, for the conversion of analogue signals into the
+ *  digital domain.
+ *
+ *  \note The exact API for this driver may vary depending on the target used - see
+ *        individual target module documentation for the API specific to your target processor.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __ADC_H__
+#define __ADC_H__
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_ADC_H
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+			#include "AVR8/ADC_AVR8.h"
+		#else
+			#error The ADC peripheral driver is not currently available for your selected architecture.
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/ADC_AVR8.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/ADC_AVR8.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..03b6ed0c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/ADC_AVR8.h
@@ -0,0 +1,446 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief ADC Peripheral Driver (AVR8)
+ *
+ *  On-chip Analogue-to-Digital converter (ADC) driver for supported U4, U6 and U7 model AVRs that contain an ADC
+ *  peripheral internally.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the ADC driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_ADC
+ *  \defgroup Group_ADC_AVR8 ADC Peripheral Driver (AVR8)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_ADC_AVR8_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  On-chip Analogue-to-Digital converter (ADC) driver for supported U4, U6 and U7 model AVRs that contain an ADC
+ *  peripheral internally.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the ADC driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_ADC_AVR8_ExampleUsage Example Usage
+ *  The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical
+ *  application.
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *      // Initialize the ADC driver before first use
+ *      ADC_Init(ADC_FREE_RUNNING | ADC_PRESCALE_32);
+ *
+ *      // Must setup the ADC channel to read beforehand
+ *      ADC_SetupChannel(1);
+ *
+ *      // Perform a single conversion of the ADC channel 1
+ *      ADC_GetChannelReading(ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC | ADC_RIGHT_ADJUSTED | ADC_CHANNEL1);
+ *      printf("Conversion Result: %d\r\n", ADC_GetResult());
+ *
+ *      // Start reading ADC channel 1 in free running (continuous conversion) mode
+ *      ADC_StartReading(ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC | ADC_RIGHT_ADJUSTED | ADC_CHANNEL1);
+ *      for (;;)
+ *      {
+ *           while (!(ADC_IsReadingComplete())) {};
+ *           printf("Conversion Result: %d\r\n", ADC_GetResult());
+ *      }
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __ADC_AVR8_H__
+#define __ADC_AVR8_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_ADC_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+		#if !(defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || \
+		      defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) || \
+			  defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__)  || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__))
+			#error The ADC peripheral driver is not currently available for your selected microcontroller model.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** \name ADC Reference Configuration Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** Reference mask, for using the voltage present at the AVR's AREF pin for the ADC reference. */
+			#define ADC_REFERENCE_AREF              0
+
+			/** Reference mask, for using the voltage present at the AVR's AVCC pin for the ADC reference. */
+			#define ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC              (1 << REFS0)
+
+			/** Reference mask, for using the internally generated 2.56V reference voltage as the ADC reference. */
+			#define ADC_REFERENCE_INT2560MV         ((1 << REFS1) | (1 << REFS0))
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name ADC Result Adjustment Configuration Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** Left-adjusts the 10-bit ADC result, so that the upper 8 bits of the value returned by the
+			 *  \ref ADC_GetResult() macro contain the 8 most significant bits of the result.
+			 */
+			#define ADC_LEFT_ADJUSTED               (1 << ADLAR)
+
+			/** Right-adjusts the 10-bit ADC result, so that the lower 8 bits of the value returned by the
+			 *  \ref ADC_GetResult() macro contain the 8 least significant bits of the result.
+			 */
+			#define ADC_RIGHT_ADJUSTED              (0 << ADLAR)
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name ADC Mode Configuration Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** Sets the ADC mode to free running, so that conversions take place continuously as fast as the ADC
+			 *  is capable of at the given input clock speed.
+			 */
+			#define ADC_FREE_RUNNING                (1 << ADATE)
+
+			/** Sets the ADC mode to single conversion, so that only a single conversion will take place before
+			 *  the ADC returns to idle.
+			 */
+			#define ADC_SINGLE_CONVERSION           (0 << ADATE)
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name ADC Prescaler Configuration Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 2 the AVR's system clock. */
+			#define ADC_PRESCALE_2                  (1 << ADPS0)
+
+			/** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 4 the AVR's system clock. */
+			#define ADC_PRESCALE_4                  (1 << ADPS1)
+
+			/** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 8 the AVR's system clock. */
+			#define ADC_PRESCALE_8                  ((1 << ADPS0) | (1 << ADPS1))
+
+			/** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 16 the AVR's system clock. */
+			#define ADC_PRESCALE_16                 (1 << ADPS2)
+
+			/** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 32 the AVR's system clock. */
+			#define ADC_PRESCALE_32                 ((1 << ADPS2) | (1 << ADPS0))
+
+			/** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 64 the AVR's system clock. */
+			#define ADC_PRESCALE_64                 ((1 << ADPS2) | (1 << ADPS1))
+
+			/** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 128 the AVR's system clock. */
+			#define ADC_PRESCALE_128                ((1 << ADPS2) | (1 << ADPS1) | (1 << ADPS0))
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name ADC MUX Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** MUX mask define for the ADC0 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading() and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading(). */
+			#define ADC_CHANNEL0                    (0x00 << MUX0)
+
+			/** MUX mask define for the ADC1 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading() and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading(). */
+			#define ADC_CHANNEL1                    (0x01 << MUX0)
+
+			#if (!(defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
+				/** MUX mask define for the ADC2 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading() and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading().
+				 *
+				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.
+				 */
+				#define ADC_CHANNEL2                (0x02 << MUX0)
+
+				/** MUX mask define for the ADC3 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading() and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading().
+				 *
+				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.
+				 */
+				#define ADC_CHANNEL3                (0x03 << MUX0)
+			#endif
+
+			/** MUX mask define for the ADC4 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading() and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading(). */
+			#define ADC_CHANNEL4                    (0x04 << MUX0)
+
+			/** MUX mask define for the ADC5 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading() and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading(). */
+			#define ADC_CHANNEL5                    (0x05 << MUX0)
+
+			/** MUX mask define for the ADC6 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading() and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading(). */
+			#define ADC_CHANNEL6                    (0x06 << MUX0)
+
+			/** MUX mask define for the ADC7 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading. */
+			#define ADC_CHANNEL7                    (0x07 << MUX0)
+
+			#if (defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__)  || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
+				/** MUX mask define for the ADC8 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading() and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading().
+				 *
+				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.
+				 */
+				#define ADC_CHANNEL8                ((1 << 8) | (0x00 << MUX0))
+
+				/** MUX mask define for the ADC9 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading() and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading().
+				 *
+				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.
+				 */
+				#define ADC_CHANNEL9                ((1 << 8) | (0x01 << MUX0))
+
+				/** MUX mask define for the ADC10 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading() and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading().
+				 *
+				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.
+				 */
+				#define ADC_CHANNEL10               ((1 << 8) | (0x02 << MUX0))
+
+				/** MUX mask define for the ADC11 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading() and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading().
+				 *
+				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.
+				 */
+				#define ADC_CHANNEL11               ((1 << 8) | (0x03 << MUX0))
+
+				/** MUX mask define for the ADC12 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading() and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading().
+				 *
+				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.
+				 */
+				#define ADC_CHANNEL12               ((1 << 8) | (0x04 << MUX0))
+
+				/** MUX mask define for the ADC13 channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading() and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading().
+				 *
+				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.
+				 */
+				#define ADC_CHANNEL13               ((1 << 8) | (0x05 << MUX0))
+
+				/** MUX mask define for the internal temperature sensor channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading() and
+				 *  \ref ADC_GetChannelReading().
+				 *
+				 *  \note Not available on all AVR models.
+				 */
+				#define ADC_INT_TEMP_SENS           ((1 << 8) | (0x07 << MUX0))
+			#endif
+
+			/** MUX mask define for the internal 1.1V band-gap channel of the ADC. See \ref ADC_StartReading() and \ref ADC_GetChannelReading(). */
+			#define ADC_1100MV_BANDGAP              (0x1E << MUX0)
+
+			/** Retrieves the ADC MUX mask for the given ADC channel number.
+			 *
+			 *  \attention This macro will only work correctly on channel numbers that are compile-time
+			 *             constants defined by the preprocessor.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Channel  Index of the ADC channel whose MUX mask is to be retrieved.
+			 */
+			#define ADC_GET_CHANNEL_MASK(Channel)   CONCAT_EXPANDED(ADC_CHANNEL, Channel)
+			//@}
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Configures the given ADC channel, ready for ADC conversions. This function sets the
+			 *  associated port pin as an input and disables the digital portion of the I/O to reduce
+			 *  power consumption.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This must only be called for ADC channels with are connected to a physical port
+			 *        pin of the AVR, denoted by its special alternative function ADCx.
+			 *
+			 *  \warning The channel number must be specified as an integer, and <b>not</b> a \c ADC_CHANNEL* mask.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] ChannelIndex  ADC channel number to set up for conversions.
+			 */
+			static inline void ADC_SetupChannel(const uint8_t ChannelIndex)
+			{
+				#if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || \
+					 defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__))
+				DDRF  &= ~(1 << ChannelIndex);
+				DIDR0 |=  (1 << ChannelIndex);
+				#elif (defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__))
+				if (ChannelIndex < 8)
+				{
+					DDRF  &= ~(1 << ChannelIndex);
+					DIDR0 |=  (1 << ChannelIndex);
+				}
+				else if (ChannelIndex == 8)
+				{
+					DDRD  &= ~(1 << 4);
+					DIDR2 |=  (1 << 0);
+				}
+				else if (ChannelIndex < 11)
+				{
+					DDRD  &= ~(1 << (ChannelIndex - 3));
+					DIDR2 |=  (1 << (ChannelIndex - 8));
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					DDRB  &= ~(1 << (ChannelIndex - 7));
+					DIDR2 |=  (1 << (ChannelIndex - 8));
+				}
+				#endif
+			}
+
+			/** De-configures the given ADC channel, re-enabling digital I/O mode instead of analog. This
+			 *  function sets the associated port pin as an input and re-enabled the digital portion of
+			 *  the I/O.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This must only be called for ADC channels with are connected to a physical port
+			 *        pin of the AVR, denoted by its special alternative function ADCx.
+			 *
+			 *  \warning The channel number must be specified as an integer, and <b>not</b> a \c ADC_CHANNEL* mask.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] ChannelIndex  ADC channel number to set up for conversions.
+			 */
+			static inline void ADC_DisableChannel(const uint8_t ChannelIndex)
+			{
+				#if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || \
+					 defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__))
+				DDRF  &= ~(1 << ChannelIndex);
+				DIDR0 &= ~(1 << ChannelIndex);
+				#elif (defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__))
+				if (ChannelIndex < 8)
+				{
+					DDRF  &= ~(1 << ChannelIndex);
+					DIDR0 &= ~(1 << ChannelIndex);
+				}
+				else if (ChannelIndex == 8)
+				{
+					DDRD  &= ~(1 << 4);
+					DIDR2 &= ~(1 << 0);
+				}
+				else if (ChannelIndex < 11)
+				{
+					DDRD  &= ~(1 << (ChannelIndex - 3));
+					DIDR2 &= ~(1 << (ChannelIndex - 8));
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					DDRB  &= ~(1 << (ChannelIndex - 7));
+					DIDR2 &= ~(1 << (ChannelIndex - 8));
+				}
+				#endif
+			}
+
+			/** Starts the reading of the given channel, but does not wait until the conversion has completed.
+			 *  Once executed, the conversion status can be determined via the \ref ADC_IsReadingComplete() macro and
+			 *  the result read via the \ref ADC_GetResult() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  If the ADC has been initialized in free running mode, calling this function once will begin the repeated
+			 *  conversions. If the ADC is in single conversion mode (or the channel to convert from is to be changed),
+			 *  this function must be called each time a conversion is to take place.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] MUXMask  ADC channel mask, reference mask and adjustment mask.
+			 */
+			static inline void ADC_StartReading(const uint16_t MUXMask)
+			{
+				ADMUX = MUXMask;
+
+				#if (defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__)  || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
+				if (MUXMask & (1 << 8))
+				  ADCSRB |=  (1 << MUX5);
+				else
+				  ADCSRB &= ~(1 << MUX5);
+				#endif
+
+				ADCSRA |= (1 << ADSC);
+			}
+
+			/** Indicates if the current ADC conversion is completed, or still in progress.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c false if the reading is still taking place, or true if the conversion is
+			 *          complete and ready to be read out with \ref ADC_GetResult().
+			 */
+			static inline bool ADC_IsReadingComplete(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool ADC_IsReadingComplete(void)
+			{
+				return ((ADCSRA & (1 << ADIF)) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Retrieves the conversion value of the last completed ADC conversion and clears the reading
+			 *  completion flag.
+			 *
+			 *  \return The result of the last ADC conversion as an unsigned value.
+			 */
+			static inline uint16_t ADC_GetResult(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint16_t ADC_GetResult(void)
+			{
+				ADCSRA |= (1 << ADIF);
+				return ADC;
+			}
+
+			/** Performs a complete single reading from channel, including a polling spin-loop to wait for the
+			 *  conversion to complete, and the returning of the converted value.
+			 *
+			 *  \note For free running mode, the automated conversions should be initialized with a single call
+			 *        to \ref ADC_StartReading() to select the channel and begin the automated conversions, and
+			 *        the results read directly from the \ref ADC_GetResult() instead to reduce overhead.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] MUXMask  Mask comprising of an ADC channel mask, reference mask and adjustment mask.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Converted ADC result for the given ADC channel.
+			 */
+			static inline uint16_t ADC_GetChannelReading(const uint16_t MUXMask) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint16_t ADC_GetChannelReading(const uint16_t MUXMask)
+			{
+				ADC_StartReading(MUXMask);
+
+				while (!(ADC_IsReadingComplete()));
+
+				return ADC_GetResult();
+			}
+
+			/** Initializes the ADC, ready for conversions. This must be called before any other ADC operations.
+			 *  The "mode" parameter should be a mask comprised of a conversion mode (free running or single) and
+			 *  prescaler masks.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Mode  Mask of ADC prescale and mode settings.
+			 */
+			static inline void ADC_Init(const uint8_t Mode) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void ADC_Init(const uint8_t Mode)
+			{
+				ADCSRA = ((1 << ADEN) | Mode);
+			}
+
+			/** Turns off the ADC. If this is called, any further ADC operations will require a call to
+			 *  \ref ADC_Init() before the ADC can be used again.
+			 */
+			static inline void ADC_Disable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void ADC_Disable(void)
+			{
+				ADCSRA = 0;
+			}
+
+			/** Indicates if the ADC is currently enabled.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the ADC subsystem is currently enabled, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool ADC_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool ADC_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return ((ADCSRA & (1 << ADEN)) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/SPI_AVR8.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/SPI_AVR8.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1b8f53e2b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/SPI_AVR8.h
@@ -0,0 +1,258 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief SPI Peripheral Driver (AVR8)
+ *
+ *  On-chip SPI driver for the 8-bit AVR microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the SPI driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_SPI
+ *  \defgroup Group_SPI_AVR8 SPI Peripheral Driver (AVR8)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_SPI_AVR8_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Driver for the hardware SPI port available on most 8-bit AVR microcontroller models. This
+ *  module provides an easy to use driver for the setup and transfer of data over the
+ *  AVR's SPI port.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the SPI driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_SPI_AVR8_ExampleUsage Example Usage
+ *  The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical
+ *  application.
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *      // Initialize the SPI driver before first use
+ *      SPI_Init(SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2 | SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST | SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING |
+ *               SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING | SPI_MODE_MASTER);
+ *
+ *      // Send several bytes, ignoring the returned data
+ *      SPI_SendByte(0x01);
+ *      SPI_SendByte(0x02);
+ *      SPI_SendByte(0x03);
+ *
+ *      // Receive several bytes, sending a dummy 0x00 byte each time
+ *      uint8_t Byte1 = SPI_ReceiveByte();
+ *      uint8_t Byte2 = SPI_ReceiveByte();
+ *      uint8_t Byte3 = SPI_ReceiveByte();
+ *
+ *      // Send a byte, and store the received byte from the same transaction
+ *      uint8_t ResponseByte = SPI_TransferByte(0xDC);
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __SPI_AVR8_H__
+#define __SPI_AVR8_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_SPI_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED            (1 << SPE)
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** \name SPI Prescaler Configuration Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** SPI prescaler mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 2. */
+			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2           SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED
+
+			/** SPI prescaler mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 4. */
+			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_4           0
+
+			/** SPI prescaler mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 8. */
+			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_8           (SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED | (1 << SPR0))
+
+			/** SPI prescaler mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 16. */
+			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_16          (1 << SPR0)
+
+			/** SPI prescaler mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 32. */
+			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_32          (SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED | (1 << SPR1))
+
+			/** SPI prescaler mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 64. */
+			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_64          (SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED | (1 << SPR1) | (1 << SPR0))
+
+			/** SPI prescaler mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 128. */
+			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_128         ((1 << SPR1) | (1 << SPR0))
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name SPI SCK Polarity Configuration Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** SPI clock polarity mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that the SCK should lead on the rising edge. */
+			#define SPI_SCK_LEAD_RISING            (0 << CPOL)
+
+			/** SPI clock polarity mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that the SCK should lead on the falling edge. */
+			#define SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING           (1 << CPOL)
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name SPI Sample Edge Configuration Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** SPI data sample mode mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that the data should sampled on the leading edge. */
+			#define SPI_SAMPLE_LEADING             (0 << CPHA)
+
+			/** SPI data sample mode mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that the data should be sampled on the trailing edge. */
+			#define SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING            (1 << CPHA)
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name SPI Data Ordering Configuration Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** SPI data order mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that data should be shifted out MSB first. */
+			#define SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST            (0 << DORD)
+
+			/** SPI data order mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that data should be shifted out LSB first. */
+			#define SPI_ORDER_LSB_FIRST            (1 << DORD)
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name SPI Mode Configuration Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** SPI mode mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that the SPI interface should be initialized into slave mode. */
+			#define SPI_MODE_SLAVE                 (0 << MSTR)
+
+			/** SPI mode mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that the SPI interface should be initialized into master mode. */
+			#define SPI_MODE_MASTER                (1 << MSTR)
+			//@}
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Initializes the SPI subsystem, ready for transfers. Must be called before calling any other
+			 *  SPI routines.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] SPIOptions  SPI Options, a mask consisting of one of each of the \c SPI_SPEED_*,
+			 *                         \c SPI_SCK_*, \c SPI_SAMPLE_*, \c SPI_ORDER_* and \c SPI_MODE_* masks.
+			 */
+			static inline void SPI_Init(const uint8_t SPIOptions);
+			static inline void SPI_Init(const uint8_t SPIOptions)
+			{
+				/* Prevent high rise times on PB.0 (/SS) from forcing a change to SPI slave mode */
+				DDRB  |= (1 << 0);
+				PORTB |= (1 << 0);
+
+				DDRB  |=  ((1 << 1) | (1 << 2));
+				DDRB  &= ~(1 << 3);
+				PORTB |=  (1 << 3);
+
+				if (SPIOptions & SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED)
+				  SPSR |= (1 << SPI2X);
+				else
+				  SPSR &= ~(1 << SPI2X);
+
+				/* Switch /SS to input mode after configuration to allow for forced mode changes */
+				DDRB &= ~(1 << 0);
+
+				SPCR  = ((1 << SPE) | SPIOptions);
+			}
+
+			/** Turns off the SPI driver, disabling and returning used hardware to their default configuration. */
+			static inline void SPI_Disable(void);
+			static inline void SPI_Disable(void)
+			{
+				DDRB  &= ~((1 << 1) | (1 << 2));
+				PORTB &= ~((1 << 0) | (1 << 3));
+
+				SPCR   = 0;
+				SPSR   = 0;
+			}
+
+			/** Retrieves the currently selected SPI mode, once the SPI interface has been configured.
+			 *
+			 *  \return \ref SPI_MODE_MASTER if the interface is currently in SPI Master mode, \ref SPI_MODE_SLAVE otherwise
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t SPI_GetCurrentMode(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t SPI_GetCurrentMode(void)
+			{
+				return (SPCR & SPI_MODE_MASTER);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends and receives a byte through the SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte to send through the SPI interface.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Response byte from the attached SPI device.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t SPI_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t SPI_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+				SPDR = Byte;
+				while (!(SPSR & (1 << SPIF)));
+				return SPDR;
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a byte through the SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete. The response
+			 *  byte sent to from the attached SPI device is ignored.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte to send through the SPI interface.
+			 */
+			static inline void SPI_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void SPI_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+				SPDR = Byte;
+				while (!(SPSR & (1 << SPIF)));
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a dummy byte through the SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete. The response
+			 *  byte from the attached SPI device is returned.
+			 *
+			 *  \return The response byte from the attached SPI device.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t SPI_ReceiveByte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t SPI_ReceiveByte(void)
+			{
+				SPDR = 0x00;
+				while (!(SPSR & (1 << SPIF)));
+				return SPDR;
+			}
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/SerialSPI_AVR8.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/SerialSPI_AVR8.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8d58369a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/SerialSPI_AVR8.h
@@ -0,0 +1,208 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master SPI Mode Serial USART Peripheral Driver (XMEGA)
+ *
+ *  On-chip Master SPI mode USART driver for the XMEGA AVR microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the SPI Master
+ *        Mode USART driver dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_SerialSPI
+ *  \defgroup Group_SerialSPI_AVR8 Master SPI Mode Serial USART Peripheral Driver (AVR8)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_SerialSPI_AVR8_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  On-chip serial USART driver for the 8-bit AVR8 microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the SPI Master
+ *        driver dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialSPI.h.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_SerialSPI_AVR8_ExampleUsage Example Usage
+ *  The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical
+ *  application.
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *      // Initialize the Master SPI mode USART driver before first use, with 1Mbit baud
+ *      SerialSPI_Init((USART_SPI_SCK_LEAD_RISING | USART_SPI_SAMPLE_LEADING | USART_SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST), 1000000);
+ *
+ *      // Send several bytes, ignoring the returned data
+ *      SerialSPI_SendByte(0x01);
+ *      SerialSPI_SendByte(0x02);
+ *      SerialSPI_SendByte(0x03);
+ *
+ *      // Receive several bytes, sending a dummy 0x00 byte each time
+ *      uint8_t Byte1 = SerialSPI_ReceiveByte();
+ *      uint8_t Byte2 = SerialSPI_ReceiveByte();
+ *      uint8_t Byte3 = SerialSPI_ReceiveByte();
+ *
+ *      // Send a byte, and store the received byte from the same transaction
+ *      uint8_t ResponseByte = SerialSPI_TransferByte(0xDC);
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __SERIAL_SPI_AVR8_H__
+#define __SERIAL_SPI_AVR8_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_SERIAL_SPI_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			#define SERIAL_SPI_UBBRVAL(Baud)             ((Baud < (F_CPU / 2)) ? ((F_CPU / (2 * Baud)) - 1) : 0)
+
+			/* Master USART SPI mode flag definitions missing in the AVR8 toolchain */
+			#if !defined(UCPHA1)
+				#define UCPHA1                           1
+			#endif
+			#if !defined(UDORD1)
+				#define UDORD1                           2
+			#endif
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** \name SPI SCK Polarity Configuration Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** SPI clock polarity mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that the SCK should lead on the rising edge. */
+			#define USART_SPI_SCK_LEAD_RISING            (0 << UCPOL1)
+
+			/** SPI clock polarity mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that the SCK should lead on the falling edge. */
+			#define USART_SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING           (1 << UCPOL1)
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name SPI Sample Edge Configuration Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** SPI data sample mode mask for \ref SerialSPI_Init(). Indicates that the data should sampled on the leading edge. */
+			#define USART_SPI_SAMPLE_LEADING             (0 << UCPHA1)
+
+			/** SPI data sample mode mask for \ref SerialSPI_Init(). Indicates that the data should be sampled on the trailing edge. */
+			#define USART_SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING            (1 << UCPHA1)
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name SPI Data Ordering Configuration Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** SPI data order mask for \ref SerialSPI_Init(). Indicates that data should be shifted out MSB first. */
+			#define USART_SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST            (0 << UDORD1)
+
+			/** SPI data order mask for \ref SerialSPI_Init(). Indicates that data should be shifted out LSB first. */
+			#define USART_SPI_ORDER_LSB_FIRST            (1 << UDORD1)
+			//@}
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Initialize the USART module in Master SPI mode.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in]     SPIOptions   USART SPI Options, a mask consisting of one of each of the \c USART_SPI_SCK_*,
+			 *                              \c USART_SPI_SAMPLE_* and \c USART_SPI_ORDER_* masks.
+			 *  \param[in]     BaudRate     SPI baud rate, in bits per second.
+			 */
+			static inline void SerialSPI_Init(const uint8_t SPIOptions,
+			                                  const uint32_t BaudRate)
+			{
+				DDRD  |= ((1 << 3) | (1 << 5));
+				PORTD |= (1 << 2);
+
+				UCSR1C = ((1 << UMSEL11) | (1 << UMSEL10) | SPIOptions);
+				UCSR1B = ((1 << TXEN1)  | (1 << RXEN1));
+
+				UBRR1  = SERIAL_SPI_UBBRVAL(BaudRate);
+			}
+
+			/** Turns off the USART driver, disabling and returning used hardware to their default configuration. */
+			static inline void SerialSPI_Disable(void)
+			{
+				UCSR1B = 0;
+				UCSR1A = 0;
+				UCSR1C = 0;
+
+				UBRR1  = 0;
+
+				DDRD  &= ~((1 << 3) | (1 << 5));
+				PORTD &= ~(1 << 2);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends and receives a byte through the USART SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] DataByte  Byte to send through the USART SPI interface.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Response byte from the attached SPI device.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t SerialSPI_TransferByte(const uint8_t DataByte)
+			{
+				UDR1 = DataByte;
+				while (!(UCSR1A & (1 << TXC1)));
+				UCSR1A = (1 << TXC1);
+				return UDR1;
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a byte through the USART SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete. The response
+			 *  byte sent to from the attached SPI device is ignored.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] DataByte  Byte to send through the USART SPI interface.
+			 */
+			static inline void SerialSPI_SendByte(const uint8_t DataByte)
+			{
+				SerialSPI_TransferByte(DataByte);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a dummy byte through the USART SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete. The response
+			 *  byte from the attached SPI device is returned.
+			 *
+			 *  \return The response byte from the attached SPI device.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t SerialSPI_ReceiveByte(void)
+			{
+				return SerialSPI_TransferByte(0);
+			}
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/Serial_AVR8.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/Serial_AVR8.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8785a4b6d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/Serial_AVR8.c
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_SERIAL_C
+#include "../Serial.h"
+
+FILE USARTSerialStream;
+
+int Serial_putchar(char DataByte,
+                   FILE *Stream)
+{
+	(void)Stream;
+
+	Serial_SendByte(DataByte);
+	return 0;
+}
+
+int Serial_getchar(FILE *Stream)
+{
+	(void)Stream;
+
+	if (!(Serial_IsCharReceived()))
+	  return _FDEV_EOF;
+
+	return Serial_ReceiveByte();
+}
+
+int Serial_getchar_Blocking(FILE *Stream)
+{
+	(void)Stream;
+
+	while (!(Serial_IsCharReceived()));
+	return Serial_ReceiveByte();
+}
+
+void Serial_SendString_P(const char* FlashStringPtr)
+{
+	uint8_t CurrByte;
+
+	while ((CurrByte = pgm_read_byte(FlashStringPtr)) != 0x00)
+	{
+		Serial_SendByte(CurrByte);
+		FlashStringPtr++;
+	}
+}
+
+void Serial_SendString(const char* StringPtr)
+{
+	uint8_t CurrByte;
+
+	while ((CurrByte = *StringPtr) != 0x00)
+	{
+		Serial_SendByte(CurrByte);
+		StringPtr++;
+	}
+}
+
+void Serial_SendData(const void* Buffer,
+                     uint16_t Length)
+{
+	while (Length--)
+	  Serial_SendByte(*((uint8_t*)Buffer++));
+}
+
+void Serial_CreateStream(FILE* Stream)
+{
+	if (!(Stream))
+	{
+		Stream = &USARTSerialStream;
+		stdin  = Stream;
+		stdout = Stream;
+	}
+
+	*Stream = (FILE)FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(Serial_putchar, Serial_getchar, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);
+}
+
+void Serial_CreateBlockingStream(FILE* Stream)
+{
+	if (!(Stream))
+	{
+		Stream = &USARTSerialStream;
+		stdin  = Stream;
+		stdout = Stream;
+	}
+
+	*Stream = (FILE)FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(Serial_putchar, Serial_getchar_Blocking, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/Serial_AVR8.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/Serial_AVR8.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e8860a511
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/Serial_AVR8.h
@@ -0,0 +1,270 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Serial USART Peripheral Driver (AVR8)
+ *
+ *  On-chip serial USART driver for the 8-bit AVR microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USART driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Serial
+ *  \defgroup Group_Serial_AVR8 Serial USART Peripheral Driver (AVR8)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Serial_AVR8_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  On-chip serial USART driver for the 8-bit AVR microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USART driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Serial_AVR8_ExampleUsage Example Usage
+ *  The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical
+ *  application.
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *      // Initialize the serial USART driver before first use, with 9600 baud (and no double-speed mode)
+ *      Serial_Init(9600, false);
+ *
+ *      // Send a string through the USART
+ *      Serial_SendString("Test String\r\n");
+ *
+ *      // Send a raw byte through the USART
+ *      Serial_SendByte(0xDC);
+ *
+ *      // Receive a byte through the USART (or -1 if no data received)
+ *      int16_t DataByte = Serial_ReceiveByte();
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __SERIAL_AVR8_H__
+#define __SERIAL_AVR8_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Misc/TerminalCodes.h"
+
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_SERIAL_H) && !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_SERIAL_C)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* External Variables: */
+			extern FILE USARTSerialStream;
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			int Serial_putchar(char DataByte,
+			                   FILE *Stream);
+			int Serial_getchar(FILE *Stream);
+			int Serial_getchar_Blocking(FILE *Stream);
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Macro for calculating the baud value from a given baud rate when the \c U2X (double speed) bit is
+			 *  not set.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Baud  Target serial UART baud rate.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Closest UBRR register value for the given UART frequency.
+			 */
+			#define SERIAL_UBBRVAL(Baud)    ((((F_CPU / 16) + (Baud / 2)) / (Baud)) - 1)
+
+			/** Macro for calculating the baud value from a given baud rate when the \c U2X (double speed) bit is
+			 *  set.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Baud  Target serial UART baud rate.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Closest UBRR register value for the given UART frequency.
+			 */
+			#define SERIAL_2X_UBBRVAL(Baud) ((((F_CPU / 8) + (Baud / 2)) / (Baud)) - 1)
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Transmits a given NUL terminated string located in program space (FLASH) through the USART.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] FlashStringPtr  Pointer to a string located in program space.
+			 */
+			void Serial_SendString_P(const char* FlashStringPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Transmits a given NUL terminated string located in SRAM memory through the USART.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] StringPtr  Pointer to a string located in SRAM space.
+			 */
+			void Serial_SendString(const char* StringPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Transmits a given buffer located in SRAM memory through the USART.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to a buffer containing the data to send.
+			 *  \param[in] Length  Length of the data to send, in bytes.
+			 */
+			void Serial_SendData(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Creates a standard character stream from the USART so that it can be used with all the regular functions
+			 *  in the avr-libc \c <stdio.h> library that accept a \c FILE stream as a destination (e.g. \c fprintf). The created
+			 *  stream is bidirectional and can be used for both input and output functions.
+			 *
+			 *  Reading data from this stream is non-blocking, i.e. in most instances, complete strings cannot be read in by a single
+			 *  fetch, as the endpoint will not be ready at some point in the transmission, aborting the transfer. However, this may
+			 *  be used when the read data is processed byte-per-bye (via \c getc()) or when the user application will implement its own
+			 *  line buffering.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] Stream  Pointer to a FILE structure where the created stream should be placed, if \c NULL, \c stdout
+			 *                         and \c stdin will be configured to use the USART.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre The USART must first be configured via a call to \ref Serial_Init() before the stream is used.
+			 */
+			void Serial_CreateStream(FILE* Stream);
+
+			/** Identical to \ref Serial_CreateStream(), except that reads are blocking until the calling stream function terminates
+			 *  the transfer.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] Stream  Pointer to a FILE structure where the created stream should be placed, if \c NULL, \c stdout
+			 *                         and \c stdin will be configured to use the USART.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre The USART must first be configured via a call to \ref Serial_Init() before the stream is used.
+			 */
+			void Serial_CreateBlockingStream(FILE* Stream);
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Initializes the USART, ready for serial data transmission and reception. This initializes the interface to
+			 *  standard 8-bit, no parity, 1 stop bit settings suitable for most applications.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] BaudRate     Serial baud rate, in bits per second.
+			 *  \param[in] DoubleSpeed  Enables double speed mode when set, halving the sample time to double the baud rate.
+			 */
+			static inline void Serial_Init(const uint32_t BaudRate,
+			                               const bool DoubleSpeed);
+			static inline void Serial_Init(const uint32_t BaudRate,
+			                               const bool DoubleSpeed)
+			{
+				UBRR1  = (DoubleSpeed ? SERIAL_2X_UBBRVAL(BaudRate) : SERIAL_UBBRVAL(BaudRate));
+
+				UCSR1C = ((1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10));
+				UCSR1A = (DoubleSpeed ? (1 << U2X1) : 0);
+				UCSR1B = ((1 << TXEN1)  | (1 << RXEN1));
+
+				DDRD  |= (1 << 3);
+				PORTD |= (1 << 2);
+			}
+
+			/** Turns off the USART driver, disabling and returning used hardware to their default configuration. */
+			static inline void Serial_Disable(void);
+			static inline void Serial_Disable(void)
+			{
+				UCSR1B = 0;
+				UCSR1A = 0;
+				UCSR1C = 0;
+
+				UBRR1  = 0;
+
+				DDRD  &= ~(1 << 3);
+				PORTD &= ~(1 << 2);
+			}
+
+			/** Indicates whether a character has been received through the USART.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if a character has been received, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Serial_IsCharReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Serial_IsCharReceived(void)
+			{
+				return ((UCSR1A & (1 << RXC1)) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Indicates whether there is hardware buffer space for a new transmit on the USART. This
+			 *  function can be used to determine if a call to \ref Serial_SendByte() will block in advance.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if a character can be queued for transmission immediately, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Serial_IsSendReady(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Serial_IsSendReady(void)
+			{
+				return ((UCSR1A & (1 << UDRE1)) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Indicates whether the hardware USART transmit buffer is completely empty, indicating all
+			 *  pending transmissions have completed.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if no characters are buffered for transmission, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Serial_IsSendComplete(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Serial_IsSendComplete(void)
+			{
+				return ((UCSR1A & (1 << TXC1)) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Transmits a given byte through the USART.
+			 *
+			 *  \note If no buffer space is available in the hardware USART, this function will block. To check if
+			 *        space is available before calling this function, see \ref Serial_IsSendReady().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] DataByte  Byte to transmit through the USART.
+			 */
+			static inline void Serial_SendByte(const char DataByte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Serial_SendByte(const char DataByte)
+			{
+				while (!(Serial_IsSendReady()));
+				UDR1 = DataByte;
+			}
+
+			/** Receives the next byte from the USART.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next byte received from the USART, or a negative value if no byte has been received.
+			 */
+			static inline int16_t Serial_ReceiveByte(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline int16_t Serial_ReceiveByte(void)
+			{
+				if (!(Serial_IsCharReceived()))
+				  return -1;
+
+				return UDR1;
+			}
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/TWI_AVR8.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/TWI_AVR8.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2a6c160e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/TWI_AVR8.c
@@ -0,0 +1,209 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) && defined(TWCR)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_TWI_C
+#include "../TWI.h"
+
+uint8_t TWI_StartTransmission(const uint8_t SlaveAddress,
+                              const uint8_t TimeoutMS)
+{
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		bool     BusCaptured = false;
+		uint16_t TimeoutRemaining;
+
+		TWCR = ((1 << TWINT) | (1 << TWSTA) | (1 << TWEN));
+
+		TimeoutRemaining = (TimeoutMS * 100);
+		while (TimeoutRemaining && !(BusCaptured))
+		{
+			if (TWCR & (1 << TWINT))
+			{
+				switch (TWSR & TW_STATUS_MASK)
+				{
+					case TW_START:
+					case TW_REP_START:
+						BusCaptured = true;
+						break;
+					case TW_MT_ARB_LOST:
+						TWCR = ((1 << TWINT) | (1 << TWSTA) | (1 << TWEN));
+						continue;
+					default:
+						TWCR = (1 << TWEN);
+						return TWI_ERROR_BusFault;
+				}
+			}
+
+			_delay_us(10);
+			TimeoutRemaining--;
+		}
+
+		if (!(TimeoutRemaining))
+		{
+			TWCR = (1 << TWEN);
+			return TWI_ERROR_BusCaptureTimeout;
+		}
+
+		TWDR = SlaveAddress;
+		TWCR = ((1 << TWINT) | (1 << TWEN));
+
+		TimeoutRemaining = (TimeoutMS * 100);
+		while (TimeoutRemaining)
+		{
+			if (TWCR & (1 << TWINT))
+			  break;
+
+			_delay_us(10);
+			TimeoutRemaining--;
+		}
+
+		if (!(TimeoutRemaining))
+		  return TWI_ERROR_SlaveResponseTimeout;
+
+		switch (TWSR & TW_STATUS_MASK)
+		{
+			case TW_MT_SLA_ACK:
+			case TW_MR_SLA_ACK:
+				return TWI_ERROR_NoError;
+			default:
+				TWCR = ((1 << TWINT) | (1 << TWSTO) | (1 << TWEN));
+				return TWI_ERROR_SlaveNotReady;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+bool TWI_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+{
+	TWDR = Byte;
+	TWCR = ((1 << TWINT) | (1 << TWEN));
+	while (!(TWCR & (1 << TWINT)));
+
+	return ((TWSR & TW_STATUS_MASK) == TW_MT_DATA_ACK);
+}
+
+bool TWI_ReceiveByte(uint8_t* const Byte,
+					 const bool LastByte)
+{
+	uint8_t TWCRMask;
+
+	if (LastByte)
+	  TWCRMask = ((1 << TWINT) | (1 << TWEN));
+	else
+	  TWCRMask = ((1 << TWINT) | (1 << TWEN) | (1 << TWEA));
+
+	TWCR = TWCRMask;
+	while (!(TWCR & (1 << TWINT)));
+	*Byte = TWDR;
+
+	uint8_t Status = (TWSR & TW_STATUS_MASK);
+
+	return ((LastByte) ? (Status == TW_MR_DATA_NACK) : (Status == TW_MR_DATA_ACK));
+}
+
+uint8_t TWI_ReadPacket(const uint8_t SlaveAddress,
+                       const uint8_t TimeoutMS,
+                       const uint8_t* InternalAddress,
+                       uint8_t InternalAddressLen,
+                       uint8_t* Buffer,
+                       uint8_t Length)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = TWI_StartTransmission((SlaveAddress & TWI_DEVICE_ADDRESS_MASK) | TWI_ADDRESS_WRITE,
+	                                       TimeoutMS)) == TWI_ERROR_NoError)
+	{
+		while (InternalAddressLen--)
+		{
+			if (!(TWI_SendByte(*(InternalAddress++))))
+			{
+				ErrorCode = TWI_ERROR_SlaveNAK;
+				break;
+			}
+		}
+
+		if ((ErrorCode = TWI_StartTransmission((SlaveAddress & TWI_DEVICE_ADDRESS_MASK) | TWI_ADDRESS_READ,
+											   TimeoutMS)) == TWI_ERROR_NoError)
+		{
+			while (Length--)
+			{
+				if (!(TWI_ReceiveByte(Buffer++, (Length == 0))))
+				{
+					ErrorCode = TWI_ERROR_SlaveNAK;
+					break;
+				}
+			}
+
+			TWI_StopTransmission();
+		}
+	}
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+uint8_t TWI_WritePacket(const uint8_t SlaveAddress,
+                        const uint8_t TimeoutMS,
+                        const uint8_t* InternalAddress,
+                        uint8_t InternalAddressLen,
+                        const uint8_t* Buffer,
+                        uint8_t Length)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = TWI_StartTransmission((SlaveAddress & TWI_DEVICE_ADDRESS_MASK) | TWI_ADDRESS_WRITE,
+	                                       TimeoutMS)) == TWI_ERROR_NoError)
+	{
+		while (InternalAddressLen--)
+		{
+			if (!(TWI_SendByte(*(InternalAddress++))))
+			{
+				ErrorCode = TWI_ERROR_SlaveNAK;
+				break;
+			}
+		}
+
+		while (Length--)
+		{
+			if (!(TWI_SendByte(*(Buffer++))))
+			{
+				ErrorCode = TWI_ERROR_SlaveNAK;
+				break;
+			}
+		}
+
+		TWI_StopTransmission();
+	}
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/TWI_AVR8.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/TWI_AVR8.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..584b584fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/TWI_AVR8.h
@@ -0,0 +1,305 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief TWI Peripheral Driver (AVR8)
+ *
+ *  On-chip TWI driver for the 8-bit AVR microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the TWI driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_TWI
+ *  \defgroup Group_TWI_AVR8 TWI Peripheral Driver (AVR8)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_TWI_AVR8_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Master mode TWI driver for the 8-bit AVR microcontrollers which contain a hardware TWI module.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the TWI driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_TWI_AVR8_ExampleUsage Example Usage
+ *  The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical
+ *  application.
+ *
+ *  <b>Low Level API Example:</b>
+ *  \code
+ *      // Initialize the TWI driver before first use at 200KHz
+ *      TWI_Init(TWI_BIT_PRESCALE_1, TWI_BITLENGTH_FROM_FREQ(1, 200000));
+ *
+ *      // Start a write session to device at device address 0xA0, internal address 0xDC with a 10ms timeout
+ *      if (TWI_StartTransmission(0xA0 | TWI_ADDRESS_WRITE, 10) == TWI_ERROR_NoError)
+ *      {
+ *          TWI_SendByte(0xDC);
+ *
+ *          TWI_SendByte(0x01);
+ *          TWI_SendByte(0x02);
+ *          TWI_SendByte(0x03);
+ *
+ *          // Must stop transmission afterwards to release the bus
+ *          TWI_StopTransmission();
+ *      }
+ *
+ *      // Start a read session to device at address 0xA0, internal address 0xDC with a 10ms timeout
+ *      if (TWI_StartTransmission(0xA0 | TWI_ADDRESS_WRITE, 10) == TWI_ERROR_NoError)
+ *      {
+ *          TWI_SendByte(0xDC);
+ *          TWI_StopTransmission();
+ *
+ *          if (TWI_StartTransmission(0xA0 | TWI_ADDRESS_READ, 10) == TWI_ERROR_NoError)
+ *          {
+ *              uint8_t Byte1, Byte2, Byte3;
+ *
+ *              // Read three bytes, acknowledge after the third byte is received
+ *              TWI_ReceiveByte(&Byte1, false);
+ *              TWI_ReceiveByte(&Byte2, false);
+ *              TWI_ReceiveByte(&Byte3, true);
+ *
+ *              // Must stop transmission afterwards to release the bus
+ *              TWI_StopTransmission();
+ *          }
+ *      }
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  <b>High Level API Example:</b>
+ *  \code
+ *      // Initialize the TWI driver before first use at 200KHz
+ *      TWI_Init(TWI_BIT_PRESCALE_1, TWI_BITLENGTH_FROM_FREQ(1, 200000));
+ *
+ *      // Start a write session to device at device address 0xA0, internal address 0xDC with a 10ms timeout
+ *      uint8_t InternalWriteAddress = 0xDC;
+ *      uint8_t WritePacket[3] = {0x01, 0x02, 0x03};
+ *
+ *      TWI_WritePacket(0xA0, 10, &InternalWriteAddress, sizeof(InternalWriteAddress),
+ *                      &WritePacket, sizeof(WritePacket);
+ *
+ *      // Start a read session to device at address 0xA0, internal address 0xDC with a 10ms timeout
+ *      uint8_t InternalReadAddress = 0xDC;
+ *      uint8_t ReadPacket[3];
+ *
+ *      TWI_ReadPacket(0xA0, 10, &InternalReadAddress, sizeof(InternalReadAddress),
+ *                     &ReadPacket, sizeof(ReadPacket);
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __TWI_AVR8_H__
+#define __TWI_AVR8_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+		#include <stdio.h>
+		#include <util/twi.h>
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_TWI_H) && !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_TWI_C)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+		#if !(defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || \
+		      defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) || \
+			  defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__)  || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__))
+			#error The TWI peripheral driver is not currently available for your selected microcontroller model.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** TWI slave device address mask for a read session. Mask with a slave device base address to obtain
+			 *  the correct TWI bus address for the slave device when reading data from it.
+			 */
+			#define TWI_ADDRESS_READ         0x01
+
+			/** TWI slave device address mask for a write session. Mask with a slave device base address to obtain
+			 *  the correct TWI bus address for the slave device when writing data to it.
+			 */
+			#define TWI_ADDRESS_WRITE        0x00
+
+			/** Mask to retrieve the base address for a TWI device, which can then be ORed with \ref TWI_ADDRESS_READ
+			 *  or \ref TWI_ADDRESS_WRITE to obtain the device's read and write address respectively.
+			 */
+			#define TWI_DEVICE_ADDRESS_MASK  0xFE
+
+			/** Bit length prescaler for \ref TWI_Init(). This mask multiplies the TWI bit length prescaler by 1. */
+			#define TWI_BIT_PRESCALE_1       ((0 << TWPS1) | (0 << TWPS0))
+
+			/** Bit length prescaler for \ref TWI_Init(). This mask multiplies the TWI bit length prescaler by 4. */
+			#define TWI_BIT_PRESCALE_4       ((0 << TWPS1) | (1 << TWPS0))
+
+			/** Bit length prescaler for \ref TWI_Init(). This mask multiplies the TWI bit length prescaler by 16. */
+			#define TWI_BIT_PRESCALE_16      ((1 << TWPS1) | (0 << TWPS0))
+
+			/** Bit length prescaler for \ref TWI_Init(). This mask multiplies the TWI bit length prescaler by 64. */
+			#define TWI_BIT_PRESCALE_64      ((1 << TWPS1) | (1 << TWPS0))
+
+			/** Calculates the length of each bit on the TWI bus for a given target frequency. This may be used with
+			 *  the \ref TWI_Init() function to convert a bus frequency to a number of clocks for the \c BitLength
+			 *  parameter.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Prescale   Prescaler set on the TWI bus.
+			 *  \param[in] Frequency  Desired TWI bus frequency in Hz.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Bit length in clocks for the given TWI bus frequency at the given prescaler value.
+			 */
+			#define TWI_BITLENGTH_FROM_FREQ(Prescale, Frequency) ((((F_CPU / (Prescale)) / (Frequency)) - 16) / 2)
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible return codes of the TWI transfer start routine and other dependant TWI functions. */
+			enum TWI_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				TWI_ERROR_NoError              = 0, /**< Indicates that the command completed successfully. */
+				TWI_ERROR_BusFault             = 1, /**< A TWI bus fault occurred while attempting to capture the bus. */
+				TWI_ERROR_BusCaptureTimeout    = 2, /**< A timeout occurred whilst waiting for the bus to be ready. */
+				TWI_ERROR_SlaveResponseTimeout = 3, /**< No ACK received at the nominated slave address within the timeout period. */
+				TWI_ERROR_SlaveNotReady        = 4, /**< Slave NAKed the TWI bus START condition. */
+				TWI_ERROR_SlaveNAK             = 5, /**< Slave NAKed whilst attempting to send data to the device. */
+			};
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Initializes the TWI hardware into master mode, ready for data transmission and reception. This must be
+			 *  before any other TWI operations.
+			 *
+			 *  The generated SCL frequency will be according to the formula <pre>F_CPU / (16 + 2 * BitLength + 4 ^ Prescale)</pre>.
+			 *
+			 *  \attention The value of the \c BitLength parameter should not be set below 10 or invalid bus conditions may
+			 *             occur, as indicated in the AVR8 microcontroller datasheet.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Prescale   Prescaler to use when determining the bus frequency, a \c TWI_BIT_PRESCALE_* value.
+			 *  \param[in] BitLength  Length of the bits sent on the bus.
+			 */
+			static inline void TWI_Init(const uint8_t Prescale,
+			                            const uint8_t BitLength) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void TWI_Init(const uint8_t Prescale,
+			                            const uint8_t BitLength)
+			{
+				TWCR |= (1 << TWEN);
+				TWSR  = Prescale;
+				TWBR  = BitLength;
+			}
+
+			/** Turns off the TWI driver hardware. If this is called, any further TWI operations will require a call to
+			 *  \ref TWI_Init() before the TWI can be used again.
+			 */
+			static inline void TWI_Disable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void TWI_Disable(void)
+			{
+				TWCR &= ~(1 << TWEN);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a TWI STOP onto the TWI bus, terminating communication with the currently addressed device. */
+			static inline void TWI_StopTransmission(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void TWI_StopTransmission(void)
+			{
+				TWCR = ((1 << TWINT) | (1 << TWSTO) | (1 << TWEN));
+			}
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Begins a master mode TWI bus communication with the given slave device address.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] SlaveAddress  Address of the slave TWI device to communicate with.
+			 *  \param[in] TimeoutMS     Timeout period within which the slave must respond, in milliseconds.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref TWI_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t TWI_StartTransmission(const uint8_t SlaveAddress,
+			                              const uint8_t TimeoutMS);
+
+			/** Sends a byte to the currently addressed device on the TWI bus.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte to send to the currently addressed device
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the recipient ACKed the byte, \c false otherwise
+			 */
+			bool TWI_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte);
+
+			/** Receives a byte from the currently addressed device on the TWI bus.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Byte      Location where the read byte is to be stored.
+			 *  \param[in] LastByte  Indicates if the byte should be ACKed if false, NAKed if true.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the byte reception successfully completed, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool TWI_ReceiveByte(uint8_t* const Byte,
+			                     const bool LastByte) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** High level function to perform a complete packet transfer over the TWI bus to the specified
+			 *  device.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] SlaveAddress        Base address of the TWI slave device to communicate with.
+			 *  \param[in] TimeoutMS           Timeout for bus capture and slave START ACK, in milliseconds.
+			 *  \param[in] InternalAddress     Pointer to a location where the internal slave read start address is stored.
+			 *  \param[in] InternalAddressLen  Size of the internal device address, in bytes.
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer              Pointer to a buffer where the read packet data is to be stored.
+			 *  \param[in] Length              Size of the packet to read, in bytes.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref TWI_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t TWI_ReadPacket(const uint8_t SlaveAddress,
+			                       const uint8_t TimeoutMS,
+			                       const uint8_t* InternalAddress,
+			                       uint8_t InternalAddressLen,
+			                       uint8_t* Buffer,
+			                       uint8_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+			/** High level function to perform a complete packet transfer over the TWI bus from the specified
+			 *  device.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] SlaveAddress        Base address of the TWI slave device to communicate with
+			 *  \param[in] TimeoutMS           Timeout for bus capture and slave START ACK, in milliseconds
+			 *  \param[in] InternalAddress     Pointer to a location where the internal slave write start address is stored
+			 *  \param[in] InternalAddressLen  Size of the internal device address, in bytes
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer              Pointer to a buffer where the packet data to send is stored
+			 *  \param[in] Length              Size of the packet to send, in bytes
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref TWI_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t TWI_WritePacket(const uint8_t SlaveAddress,
+			                        const uint8_t TimeoutMS,
+			                        const uint8_t* InternalAddress,
+			                        uint8_t InternalAddressLen,
+			                        const uint8_t* Buffer,
+			                        uint8_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..54c46423e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Hardware Serial Peripheral Interface driver.
+ *
+ *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the device-specific SPI driver, for microcontrollers
+ *  containing a hardware SPI.
+ *
+ *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct SPI driver header file for the
+ *  currently selected architecture and microcontroller model.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_PeripheralDrivers
+ *  \defgroup Group_SPI SPI Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h
+ *  \brief Hardware Serial Peripheral Interface driver.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_SPI_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - None
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_SPI_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Hardware SPI driver. This module provides an easy to use driver for the setup and transfer of data over
+ *  the selected architecture and microcontroller model's SPI port.
+ *
+ *  \note The exact API for this driver may vary depending on the target used - see
+ *        individual target module documentation for the API specific to your target processor.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __SPI_H__
+#define __SPI_H__
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_SPI_H
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+			#include "AVR8/SPI_AVR8.h"
+		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+			#include "XMEGA/SPI_XMEGA.h"
+		#else
+			#error The SPI peripheral driver is not currently available for your selected architecture.
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..46ee61b20
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Hardware Serial USART driver.
+ *
+ *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the device-specific USART driver, for microcontrollers
+ *  containing a hardware USART.
+ *
+ *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct ADC driver header file for the
+ *  currently selected architecture and microcontroller model.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_PeripheralDrivers
+ *  \defgroup Group_Serial Serial USART Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h
+ *  \brief Hardware Serial USART driver.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Serial_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/<i>ARCH</i>/Serial_<i>ARCH</i>.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Serial_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Hardware serial USART driver. This module provides an easy to use driver for the setup and transfer
+ *  of data over the selected architecture and microcontroller model's USART port.
+ *
+ *  \note The exact API for this driver may vary depending on the target used - see
+ *        individual target module documentation for the API specific to your target processor.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __SERIAL_H__
+#define __SERIAL_H__
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_SERIAL_H
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+			#include "AVR8/Serial_AVR8.h"
+		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+			#include "XMEGA/Serial_XMEGA.h"
+		#else
+			#error The Serial peripheral driver is not currently available for your selected architecture.
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialSPI.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialSPI.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9a42ba5d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialSPI.h
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Hardware SPI Master Mode Serial USART driver.
+ *
+ *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the device-specific SPI Master Mode USART driver, for
+ *  microcontrollers containing a hardware USART capable of operating in a Master SPI mode.
+ *
+ *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct ADC driver header file for the
+ *  currently selected architecture and microcontroller model.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_PeripheralDrivers
+ *  \defgroup Group_SerialSPI Master SPI Mode Serial USART Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialSPI.h
+ *  \brief Hardware SPI Master Mode Serial USART driver.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_SerialSPI_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - None
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_SerialSPI_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Hardware SPI Master Mode serial USART driver. This module provides an easy to use driver for the setup and transfer
+ *  of data over the selected architecture and microcontroller model's USART port, using a SPI framing format.
+ *
+ *  \note The exact API for this driver may vary depending on the target used - see
+ *        individual target module documentation for the API specific to your target processor.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __SERIAL_SPI_H__
+#define __SERIAL_SPI_H__
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_SERIAL_SPI_H
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+			#include "AVR8/SerialSPI_AVR8.h"
+		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+			#include "XMEGA/SerialSPI_XMEGA.h"
+		#else
+			#error The Serial SPI Master Mode peripheral driver is not currently available for your selected architecture.
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5290e6679
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Hardware Two Wire Interface (I2C) driver.
+ *
+ *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the device-specific SPI driver, for microcontrollers
+ *  containing a hardware TWI.
+ *
+ *  User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct TWI driver header file for the
+ *  currently selected architecture and microcontroller model.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_PeripheralDrivers
+ *  \defgroup Group_TWI TWI Driver - LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h
+ *  \brief Hardware Two Wire Interface (I2C) driver.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_TWI_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/<i>ARCH</i>/TWI_<i>ARCH</i>.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_TWI)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_TWI_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Hardware TWI driver. This module provides an easy to use driver for the setup and transfer of data over
+ *  the selected architecture and microcontroller model's TWI bus port.
+ *
+ *  \note The exact API for this driver may vary depending on the target used - see
+ *        individual target module documentation for the API specific to your target processor.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __TWI_H__
+#define __TWI_H__
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_TWI_H
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+			#include "AVR8/TWI_AVR8.h"
+		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+			#include "XMEGA/TWI_XMEGA.h"
+		#else
+			#error The TWI peripheral driver is not currently available for your selected architecture.
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/SPI_XMEGA.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/SPI_XMEGA.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c6230481e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/SPI_XMEGA.h
@@ -0,0 +1,251 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief SPI Peripheral Driver (XMEGA)
+ *
+ *  On-chip SPI driver for the XMEGA microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the SPI driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_SPI
+ *  \defgroup Group_SPI_XMEGA SPI Peripheral Driver (XMEGA)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_SPI_XMEGA_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Driver for the hardware SPI port(s) available on XMEGA AVR microcontroller models. This
+ *  module provides an easy to use driver for the setup and transfer of data over the AVR's
+ *  SPI ports.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the SPI driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h.
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *      // Initialize the SPI driver before first use
+ *      SPI_Init(&SPIC,
+ *               SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2 | SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST | SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING |
+ *               SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING | SPI_MODE_MASTER);
+ *
+ *      // Send several bytes, ignoring the returned data
+ *      SPI_SendByte(&SPIC, 0x01);
+ *      SPI_SendByte(&SPIC, 0x02);
+ *      SPI_SendByte(&SPIC, 0x03);
+ *
+ *      // Receive several bytes, sending a dummy 0x00 byte each time
+ *      uint8_t Byte1 = SPI_ReceiveByte(&SPIC);
+ *      uint8_t Byte2 = SPI_ReceiveByte(&SPIC);
+ *      uint8_t Byte3 = SPI_ReceiveByte(&SPIC);
+ *
+ *      // Send a byte, and store the received byte from the same transaction
+ *      uint8_t ResponseByte = SPI_TransferByte(&SPIC, 0xDC);
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __SPI_XMEGA_H__
+#define __SPI_XMEGA_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_SPI_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED            SPI_CLK2X_bm
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** \name SPI Prescaler Configuration Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** SPI prescaler mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 2. */
+			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2           SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED
+
+			/** SPI prescaler mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 4. */
+			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_4           0
+
+			/** SPI prescaler mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 8. */
+			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_8           (SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED | (1 << SPI_PRESCALER_gp))
+
+			/** SPI prescaler mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 16. */
+			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_16          (1 << SPI_PRESCALER_gp)
+
+			/** SPI prescaler mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 32. */
+			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_32          (SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED | (2 << SPI_PRESCALER_gp))
+
+			/** SPI prescaler mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 64. */
+			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_64          (2 << SPI_PRESCALER_gp)
+
+			/** SPI prescaler mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 128. */
+			#define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_128         (3 << SPI_PRESCALER_gp)
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name SPI SCK Polarity Configuration Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** SPI clock polarity mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that the SCK should lead on the rising edge. */
+			#define SPI_SCK_LEAD_RISING            0
+
+			/** SPI clock polarity mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that the SCK should lead on the falling edge. */
+			#define SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING           SPI_MODE1_bm
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name SPI Sample Edge Configuration Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** SPI data sample mode mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that the data should sampled on the leading edge. */
+			#define SPI_SAMPLE_LEADING             0
+
+			/** SPI data sample mode mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that the data should be sampled on the trailing edge. */
+			#define SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING            SPI_MODE0_bm
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name SPI Data Ordering Configuration Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** SPI data order mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that data should be shifted out MSB first. */
+			#define SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST            0
+
+			/** SPI data order mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that data should be shifted out LSB first. */
+			#define SPI_ORDER_LSB_FIRST            SPI_DORD_bm
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name SPI Mode Configuration Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** SPI mode mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that the SPI interface should be initialized into slave mode. */
+			#define SPI_MODE_SLAVE                 0
+
+			/** SPI mode mask for \ref SPI_Init(). Indicates that the SPI interface should be initialized into master mode. */
+			#define SPI_MODE_MASTER                SPI_MASTER_bm
+			//@}
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Initializes the SPI subsystem, ready for transfers. Must be called before calling any other
+			 *  SPI routines.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] SPI         Pointer to the base of the SPI peripheral within the device.
+			 *  \param[in]     SPIOptions  SPI Options, a mask consisting of one of each of the \c SPI_SPEED_*,
+			 *                             \c SPI_SCK_*, \c SPI_SAMPLE_*, \c SPI_ORDER_* and \c SPI_MODE_* masks.
+			 */
+			static inline void SPI_Init(SPI_t* const SPI,
+			                            const uint8_t SPIOptions) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static inline void SPI_Init(SPI_t* const SPI,
+			                            const uint8_t SPIOptions)
+			{
+				SPI->CTRL = (SPIOptions | SPI_ENABLE_bm);
+			}
+
+			/** Turns off the SPI driver, disabling and returning used hardware to their default configuration.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] SPI   Pointer to the base of the SPI peripheral within the device.
+			 */
+			static inline void SPI_Disable(SPI_t* const SPI) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static inline void SPI_Disable(SPI_t* const SPI)
+			{
+				SPI->CTRL &= ~SPI_ENABLE_bm;
+			}
+
+			/** Retrieves the currently selected SPI mode, once the SPI interface has been configured.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] SPI  Pointer to the base of the SPI peripheral within the device.
+			 *
+			 *  \return \ref SPI_MODE_MASTER if the interface is currently in SPI Master mode, \ref SPI_MODE_SLAVE otherwise
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t SPI_GetCurrentMode(SPI_t* const SPI) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static inline uint8_t SPI_GetCurrentMode(SPI_t* const SPI)
+			{
+				return (SPI->CTRL & SPI_MASTER_bm);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends and receives a byte through the SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] SPI   Pointer to the base of the SPI peripheral within the device.
+			 *  \param[in]     Byte  Byte to send through the SPI interface.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Response byte from the attached SPI device.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t SPI_TransferByte(SPI_t* const SPI,
+			                                       const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static inline uint8_t SPI_TransferByte(SPI_t* const SPI,
+			                                       const uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+				SPI->DATA = Byte;
+				while (!(SPI->STATUS & SPI_IF_bm));
+				return SPI->DATA;
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a byte through the SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete. The response
+			 *  byte sent to from the attached SPI device is ignored.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] SPI   Pointer to the base of the SPI peripheral within the device.
+			 *  \param[in]     Byte  Byte to send through the SPI interface.
+			 */
+			static inline void SPI_SendByte(SPI_t* const SPI,
+			                                const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static inline void SPI_SendByte(SPI_t* const SPI,
+			                                const uint8_t Byte)
+			{
+				SPI->DATA = Byte;
+				while (!(SPI->STATUS & SPI_IF_bm));
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a dummy byte through the SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete. The response
+			 *  byte from the attached SPI device is returned.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] SPI  Pointer to the base of the SPI peripheral within the device.
+			 *
+			 *  \return The response byte from the attached SPI device.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t SPI_ReceiveByte(SPI_t* const SPI) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static inline uint8_t SPI_ReceiveByte(SPI_t* const SPI)
+			{
+				SPI->DATA = 0;
+				while (!(SPI->STATUS & SPI_IF_bm));
+				return SPI->DATA;
+			}
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/SerialSPI_XMEGA.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/SerialSPI_XMEGA.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a981ce6a6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/SerialSPI_XMEGA.h
@@ -0,0 +1,212 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master SPI Mode Serial USART Peripheral Driver (XMEGA)
+ *
+ *  On-chip Master SPI mode USART driver for the XMEGA AVR microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the SPI Master
+ *        Mode USART driver dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_SerialSPI
+ *  \defgroup Group_SerialSPI_XMEGA Master SPI Mode Serial USART Peripheral Driver (XMEGA)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_SerialSPI_XMEGA_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  On-chip serial USART driver for the XMEGA AVR microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the ADC driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialSPI.h.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_SerialSPI_XMEGA_ExampleUsage Example Usage
+ *  The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical
+ *  application.
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *      // Initialize the Master SPI mode USART driver before first use, with 1Mbit baud
+ *      SerialSPI_Init(&USARTD0, (USART_SPI_SCK_LEAD_RISING | USART_SPI_SAMPLE_LEADING | USART_SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST), 1000000);
+ *
+ *      // Send several bytes, ignoring the returned data
+ *      SerialSPI_SendByte(&USARTD0, 0x01);
+ *      SerialSPI_SendByte(&USARTD0, 0x02);
+ *      SerialSPI_SendByte(&USARTD0, 0x03);
+ *
+ *      // Receive several bytes, sending a dummy 0x00 byte each time
+ *      uint8_t Byte1 = SerialSPI_ReceiveByte(&USARTD);
+ *      uint8_t Byte2 = SerialSPI_ReceiveByte(&USARTD);
+ *      uint8_t Byte3 = SerialSPI_ReceiveByte(&USARTD);
+ *
+ *      // Send a byte, and store the received byte from the same transaction
+ *      uint8_t ResponseByte = SerialSPI_TransferByte(&USARTD0, 0xDC);
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __SERIAL_SPI_XMEGA_H__
+#define __SERIAL_SPI_XMEGA_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_SERIAL_SPI_H)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			#define SERIAL_SPI_UBBRVAL(Baud)       ((Baud < (F_CPU / 2)) ? ((F_CPU / (2 * Baud)) - 1) : 0)
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** \name SPI SCK Polarity Configuration Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** SPI clock polarity mask for \ref SerialSPI_Init(). Indicates that the SCK should lead on the rising edge. */
+			#define USART_SPI_SCK_LEAD_RISING      0
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name SPI Sample Edge Configuration Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** SPI data sample mode mask for \ref SerialSPI_Init(). Indicates that the data should sampled on the leading edge. */
+			#define USART_SPI_SAMPLE_LEADING       0
+
+			/** SPI data sample mode mask for \ref SerialSPI_Init(). Indicates that the data should be sampled on the trailing edge. */
+			#define USART_SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING      (1 << 1)
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name SPI Data Ordering Configuration Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** SPI data order mask for \ref SerialSPI_Init(). Indicates that data should be shifted out MSB first. */
+			#define USART_SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST      0
+
+			/** SPI data order mask for \ref SerialSPI_Init(). Indicates that data should be shifted out LSB first. */
+			#define USART_SPI_ORDER_LSB_FIRST      (1 << 2)
+			//@}
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Initialize the USART module in Master SPI mode.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] USART        Pointer to the base of the USART peripheral within the device.
+			 *  \param[in]     SPIOptions   USART SPI Options, a mask consisting of one of each of the \c USART_SPI_SCK_*,
+			 *                              \c USART_SPI_SAMPLE_* and \c USART_SPI_ORDER_* masks.
+			 *  \param[in]     BaudRate     SPI baud rate, in bits per second.
+			 */
+			static inline void SerialSPI_Init(USART_t* const USART,
+			                                  const uint8_t SPIOptions,
+			                                  const uint32_t BaudRate) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static inline void SerialSPI_Init(USART_t* const USART,
+			                                  const uint8_t SPIOptions,
+			                                  const uint32_t BaudRate)
+			{
+				uint16_t BaudValue = SERIAL_SPI_UBBRVAL(BaudRate);
+
+				USART->BAUDCTRLB = (BaudValue >> 8);
+				USART->BAUDCTRLA = (BaudValue & 0xFF);
+
+				USART->CTRLC = (USART_CMODE_MSPI_gc | SPIOptions);
+				USART->CTRLB = (USART_RXEN_bm | USART_TXEN_bm);
+			}
+
+			/** Turns off the USART driver, disabling and returning used hardware to their default configuration.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] USART  Pointer to the base of the USART peripheral within the device.
+			 */
+			static inline void SerialSPI_Disable(USART_t* const USART) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static inline void SerialSPI_Disable(USART_t* const USART)
+			{
+				USART->CTRLA = 0;
+				USART->CTRLB = 0;
+				USART->CTRLC = 0;
+			}
+
+			/** Sends and receives a byte through the USART SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] USART     Pointer to the base of the USART peripheral within the device.
+			 *  \param[in]     DataByte  Byte to send through the USART SPI interface.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Response byte from the attached SPI device.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t SerialSPI_TransferByte(USART_t* const USART,
+			                                             const uint8_t DataByte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static inline uint8_t SerialSPI_TransferByte(USART_t* const USART,
+			                                             const uint8_t DataByte)
+			{
+				USART->DATA   = DataByte;
+				while (!(USART->STATUS & USART_TXCIF_bm));
+				USART->STATUS = USART_TXCIF_bm;
+				return USART->DATA;
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a byte through the USART SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete. The response
+			 *  byte sent to from the attached SPI device is ignored.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] USART     Pointer to the base of the USART peripheral within the device.
+			 *  \param[in]     DataByte  Byte to send through the USART SPI interface.
+			 */
+			static inline void SerialSPI_SendByte(USART_t* const USART,
+			                                      const uint8_t DataByte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static inline void SerialSPI_SendByte(USART_t* const USART,
+			                                      const uint8_t DataByte)
+			{
+				SerialSPI_TransferByte(USART, DataByte);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a dummy byte through the USART SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete. The response
+			 *  byte from the attached SPI device is returned.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] USART  Pointer to the base of the USART peripheral within the device.
+			 *
+			 *  \return The response byte from the attached SPI device.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t SerialSPI_ReceiveByte(USART_t* const USART) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static inline uint8_t SerialSPI_ReceiveByte(USART_t* const USART)
+			{
+				return SerialSPI_TransferByte(USART, 0);
+			}
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/Serial_XMEGA.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/Serial_XMEGA.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4e2935730
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/Serial_XMEGA.c
@@ -0,0 +1,122 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_SERIAL_C
+#include "../Serial.h"
+
+FILE USARTSerialStream;
+
+int Serial_putchar(char DataByte,
+                   FILE *Stream)
+{
+	USART_t* USART = fdev_get_udata(Stream);
+
+	Serial_SendByte(USART, DataByte);
+	return 0;
+}
+
+int Serial_getchar(FILE *Stream)
+{
+	USART_t* USART = fdev_get_udata(Stream);
+
+	if (!(Serial_IsCharReceived(USART)))
+	  return _FDEV_EOF;
+
+	return Serial_ReceiveByte(USART);
+}
+
+int Serial_getchar_Blocking(FILE *Stream)
+{
+	USART_t* USART = fdev_get_udata(Stream);
+
+	while (!(Serial_IsCharReceived(USART)));
+	return Serial_ReceiveByte(USART);
+}
+
+void Serial_SendString_P(USART_t* const USART,
+                         const char* FlashStringPtr)
+{
+	uint8_t CurrByte;
+
+	while ((CurrByte = pgm_read_byte(FlashStringPtr)) != 0x00)
+	{
+		Serial_SendByte(USART, CurrByte);
+		FlashStringPtr++;
+	}
+}
+
+void Serial_SendString(USART_t* const USART,
+                       const char* StringPtr)
+{
+	uint8_t CurrByte;
+
+	while ((CurrByte = *StringPtr) != 0x00)
+	{
+		Serial_SendByte(USART, CurrByte);
+		StringPtr++;
+	}
+}
+
+void Serial_SendData(USART_t* const USART,
+                     const void* Buffer,
+                     uint16_t Length)
+{
+	while (Length--)
+	  Serial_SendByte(USART, *((uint8_t*)Buffer++));
+}
+
+void Serial_CreateStream(FILE* Stream)
+{
+	if (!(Stream))
+	{
+		Stream = &USARTSerialStream;
+		stdin  = Stream;
+		stdout = Stream;
+	}
+
+	*Stream = (FILE)FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(Serial_putchar, Serial_getchar, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);
+}
+
+void Serial_CreateBlockingStream(FILE* Stream)
+{
+	if (!(Stream))
+	{
+		Stream = &USARTSerialStream;
+		stdin  = Stream;
+		stdout = Stream;
+	}
+
+	*Stream = (FILE)FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(Serial_putchar, Serial_getchar_Blocking, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/Serial_XMEGA.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/Serial_XMEGA.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ad34c8535
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/Serial_XMEGA.h
@@ -0,0 +1,286 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Serial USART Peripheral Driver (XMEGA)
+ *
+ *  On-chip serial USART driver for the XMEGA AVR microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USART driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Serial
+ *  \defgroup Group_Serial_XMEGA Serial USART Peripheral Driver (XMEGA)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Serial_XMEGA_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  On-chip serial USART driver for the XMEGA AVR microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USART driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Serial_XMEGA_ExampleUsage Example Usage
+ *  The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical
+ *  application.
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *      // Initialize the serial USART driver before first use, with 9600 baud (and no double-speed mode)
+ *      Serial_Init(&USARTD0, 9600, false);
+ *
+ *      // Send a string through the USART
+ *      Serial_TxString(&USARTD0, "Test String\r\n");
+ *
+ *      // Receive a byte through the USART
+ *      uint8_t DataByte = Serial_RxByte(&USARTD0);
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __SERIAL_XMEGA_H__
+#define __SERIAL_XMEGA_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../../Misc/TerminalCodes.h"
+
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_SERIAL_H) && !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_SERIAL_C)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* External Variables: */
+			extern FILE USARTSerialStream;
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			int Serial_putchar(char DataByte,
+			                   FILE *Stream);
+			int Serial_getchar(FILE *Stream);
+			int Serial_getchar_Blocking(FILE *Stream);
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Macro for calculating the baud value from a given baud rate when the \c U2X (double speed) bit is
+			 *  not set.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Baud  Target serial UART baud rate.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Closest UBRR register value for the given UART frequency.
+			 */
+			#define SERIAL_UBBRVAL(Baud)    ((((F_CPU / 16) + (Baud / 2)) / (Baud)) - 1)
+
+			/** Macro for calculating the baud value from a given baud rate when the \c U2X (double speed) bit is
+			 *  set.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Baud  Target serial UART baud rate.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Closest UBRR register value for the given UART frequency.
+			 */
+			#define SERIAL_2X_UBBRVAL(Baud) ((((F_CPU / 8) + (Baud / 2)) / (Baud)) - 1)
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Transmits a given string located in program space (FLASH) through the USART.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] USART           Pointer to the base of the USART peripheral within the device.
+			 *  \param[in]     FlashStringPtr  Pointer to a string located in program space.
+			 */
+			void Serial_SendString_P(USART_t* const USART,
+			                         const char* FlashStringPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Transmits a given string located in SRAM memory through the USART.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] USART      Pointer to the base of the USART peripheral within the device.
+			 *  \param[in]     StringPtr  Pointer to a string located in SRAM space.
+			 */
+			void Serial_SendString(USART_t* const USART,
+			                       const char* StringPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Transmits a given buffer located in SRAM memory through the USART.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] USART   Pointer to the base of the USART peripheral within the device.
+			 *  \param[in]     Buffer  Pointer to a buffer containing the data to send.
+			 *  \param[in]     Length  Length of the data to send, in bytes.
+			 */
+			void Serial_SendData(USART_t* const USART,
+			                     const void* Buffer,
+			                     uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Creates a standard character stream from the USART so that it can be used with all the regular functions
+			 *  in the avr-libc \c <stdio.h> library that accept a \c FILE stream as a destination (e.g. \c fprintf). The created
+			 *  stream is bidirectional and can be used for both input and output functions.
+			 *
+			 *  Reading data from this stream is non-blocking, i.e. in most instances, complete strings cannot be read in by a single
+			 *  fetch, as the endpoint will not be ready at some point in the transmission, aborting the transfer. However, this may
+			 *  be used when the read data is processed byte-per-bye (via \c getc()) or when the user application will implement its own
+			 *  line buffering.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] Stream  Pointer to a FILE structure where the created stream should be placed, if \c NULL, \c stdout
+			 *                         and \c stdin will be configured to use the USART.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre The USART must first be configured via a call to \ref Serial_Init() before the stream is used.
+			 */
+			void Serial_CreateStream(FILE* Stream);
+
+			/** Identical to \ref Serial_CreateStream(), except that reads are blocking until the calling stream function terminates
+			 *  the transfer.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] Stream  Pointer to a FILE structure where the created stream should be placed, if \c NULL, \c stdout
+			 *                         and \c stdin will be configured to use the USART.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre The USART must first be configured via a call to \ref Serial_Init() before the stream is used.
+			 */
+			void Serial_CreateBlockingStream(FILE* Stream);
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Initializes the USART, ready for serial data transmission and reception. This initializes the interface to
+			 *  standard 8-bit, no parity, 1 stop bit settings suitable for most applications.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] USART        Pointer to the base of the USART peripheral within the device.
+			 *  \param[in]     BaudRate     Serial baud rate, in bits per second.
+			 *  \param[in]     DoubleSpeed  Enables double speed mode when set, halving the sample time to double the baud rate.
+			 */
+			static inline void Serial_Init(USART_t* const USART,
+			                               const uint32_t BaudRate,
+			                               const bool DoubleSpeed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static inline void Serial_Init(USART_t* const USART,
+			                               const uint32_t BaudRate,
+			                               const bool DoubleSpeed)
+			{
+				uint16_t BaudValue = (DoubleSpeed ? SERIAL_2X_UBBRVAL(BaudRate) : SERIAL_UBBRVAL(BaudRate));
+
+				USART->BAUDCTRLB = (BaudValue >> 8);
+				USART->BAUDCTRLA = (BaudValue & 0xFF);
+
+				USART->CTRLC = (USART_CMODE_ASYNCHRONOUS_gc | USART_PMODE_DISABLED_gc | USART_CHSIZE_8BIT_gc);
+				USART->CTRLB = (USART_RXEN_bm | USART_TXEN_bm | (DoubleSpeed ? USART_CLK2X_bm : 0));
+			}
+
+			/** Turns off the USART driver, disabling and returning used hardware to their default configuration.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] USART  Pointer to the base of the USART peripheral within the device.
+			 */
+			static inline void Serial_Disable(USART_t* const USART) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static inline void Serial_Disable(USART_t* const USART)
+			{
+				USART->CTRLA = 0;
+				USART->CTRLB = 0;
+				USART->CTRLC = 0;
+			}
+
+			/** Indicates whether a character has been received through the USART.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] USART  Pointer to the base of the USART peripheral within the device.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if a character has been received, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Serial_IsCharReceived(USART_t* const USART) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static inline bool Serial_IsCharReceived(USART_t* const USART)
+			{
+				return ((USART->STATUS & USART_RXCIF_bm) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Indicates whether there is hardware buffer space for a new transmit on the USART. This
+			 *  function can be used to determine if a call to \ref Serial_SendByte() will block in advance.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] USART  Pointer to the base of the USART peripheral within the device.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if a character can be queued for transmission immediately, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Serial_IsSendReady(USART_t* const USART) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static inline bool Serial_IsSendReady(USART_t* const USART)
+			{
+				return (USART->STATUS & USART_DREIF_bm) ? true : false;
+			}
+
+			/** Indicates whether the hardware USART transmit buffer is completely empty, indicating all
+			 *  pending transmissions have completed.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] USART  Pointer to the base of the USART peripheral within the device.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if no characters are buffered for transmission, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Serial_IsSendComplete(USART_t* const USART) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static inline bool Serial_IsSendComplete(USART_t* const USART)
+			{
+				return (USART->STATUS & USART_TXCIF_bm) ? true : false;
+			}
+
+			/** Transmits a given byte through the USART.
+			 *
+			 *  \note If no buffer space is available in the hardware USART, this function will block. To check if
+			 *        space is available before calling this function, see \ref Serial_IsSendReady().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] USART     Pointer to the base of the USART peripheral within the device.
+			 *  \param[in]     DataByte  Byte to transmit through the USART.
+			 */
+			static inline void Serial_SendByte(USART_t* const USART,
+			                                   const char DataByte) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static inline void Serial_SendByte(USART_t* const USART,
+			                                   const char DataByte)
+			{
+				while (!(Serial_IsSendReady(USART)));
+				USART->DATA = DataByte;
+			}
+
+			/** Receives the next byte from the USART.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] USART  Pointer to the base of the USART peripheral within the device.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next byte received from the USART, or a negative value if no byte has been received.
+			 */
+			static inline int16_t Serial_ReceiveByte(USART_t* const USART) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static inline int16_t Serial_ReceiveByte(USART_t* const USART)
+			{
+				if (!(Serial_IsCharReceived(USART)))
+				  return -1;
+
+				USART->STATUS = USART_RXCIF_bm;
+				return USART->DATA;
+			}
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/TWI_XMEGA.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/TWI_XMEGA.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6f8ab1d4c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/TWI_XMEGA.c
@@ -0,0 +1,185 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_TWI_C
+#include "../TWI.h"
+
+uint8_t TWI_StartTransmission(TWI_t* const TWI,
+                              const uint8_t SlaveAddress,
+                              const uint8_t TimeoutMS)
+{
+	uint16_t TimeoutRemaining;
+
+	TWI->MASTER.ADDR = SlaveAddress;
+
+	TimeoutRemaining = (TimeoutMS * 100);
+	while (TimeoutRemaining)
+	{
+		uint8_t status = TWI->MASTER.STATUS;
+
+		if ((status & (TWI_MASTER_WIF_bm | TWI_MASTER_ARBLOST_bm)) == (TWI_MASTER_WIF_bm | TWI_MASTER_ARBLOST_bm))
+		{
+			TWI->MASTER.ADDR = SlaveAddress;
+		}
+		else if ((status & (TWI_MASTER_WIF_bm | TWI_MASTER_RXACK_bm)) == (TWI_MASTER_WIF_bm | TWI_MASTER_RXACK_bm))
+		{
+			TWI_StopTransmission(TWI);
+			return TWI_ERROR_SlaveResponseTimeout;
+		}
+		else if (status & (TWI_MASTER_WIF_bm | TWI_MASTER_RIF_bm))
+		{
+			return TWI_ERROR_NoError;
+		}
+
+		_delay_us(10);
+		TimeoutRemaining--;
+	}
+
+	if (!(TimeoutRemaining)) {
+		if (TWI->MASTER.STATUS & TWI_MASTER_CLKHOLD_bm) {
+			TWI_StopTransmission(TWI);
+		}
+	}
+
+	return TWI_ERROR_BusCaptureTimeout;
+}
+
+bool TWI_SendByte(TWI_t* const TWI,
+                  const uint8_t Byte)
+{
+	TWI->MASTER.DATA = Byte;
+
+	while (!(TWI->MASTER.STATUS & TWI_MASTER_WIF_bm));
+
+	return (TWI->MASTER.STATUS & TWI_MASTER_WIF_bm) && !(TWI->MASTER.STATUS & TWI_MASTER_RXACK_bm);
+}
+
+bool TWI_ReceiveByte(TWI_t* const TWI,
+                     uint8_t* const Byte,
+                     const bool LastByte)
+{
+	if ((TWI->MASTER.STATUS & (TWI_MASTER_BUSERR_bm | TWI_MASTER_ARBLOST_bm)) == (TWI_MASTER_BUSERR_bm | TWI_MASTER_ARBLOST_bm)) {
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	while (!(TWI->MASTER.STATUS & TWI_MASTER_RIF_bm));
+
+	*Byte = TWI->MASTER.DATA;
+
+	if (LastByte)
+	  TWI->MASTER.CTRLC = TWI_MASTER_ACKACT_bm | TWI_MASTER_CMD_STOP_gc;
+	else
+	  TWI->MASTER.CTRLC = TWI_MASTER_CMD_RECVTRANS_gc;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+uint8_t TWI_ReadPacket(TWI_t* const TWI,
+                       const uint8_t SlaveAddress,
+                       const uint8_t TimeoutMS,
+                       const uint8_t* InternalAddress,
+                       uint8_t InternalAddressLen,
+                       uint8_t* Buffer,
+                       uint8_t Length)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = TWI_StartTransmission(TWI, (SlaveAddress & TWI_DEVICE_ADDRESS_MASK) | TWI_ADDRESS_WRITE,
+	                                       TimeoutMS)) == TWI_ERROR_NoError)
+	{
+		while (InternalAddressLen--)
+		{
+			if (!(TWI_SendByte(TWI, *(InternalAddress++))))
+			{
+				ErrorCode = TWI_ERROR_SlaveNAK;
+				break;
+			}
+		}
+
+		if ((ErrorCode = TWI_StartTransmission(TWI, (SlaveAddress & TWI_DEVICE_ADDRESS_MASK) | TWI_ADDRESS_READ,
+		                                       TimeoutMS)) == TWI_ERROR_NoError)
+		{
+			while (Length--)
+			{
+				if (!(TWI_ReceiveByte(TWI, Buffer++, (Length == 0))))
+				{
+					ErrorCode = TWI_ERROR_SlaveNAK;
+					break;
+				}
+			}
+		}
+
+		TWI_StopTransmission(TWI);
+	}
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+uint8_t TWI_WritePacket(TWI_t* const TWI,
+                        const uint8_t SlaveAddress,
+                        const uint8_t TimeoutMS,
+                        const uint8_t* InternalAddress,
+                        uint8_t InternalAddressLen,
+                        const uint8_t* Buffer,
+                        uint8_t Length)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = TWI_StartTransmission(TWI, (SlaveAddress & TWI_DEVICE_ADDRESS_MASK) | TWI_ADDRESS_WRITE,
+	                                       TimeoutMS)) == TWI_ERROR_NoError)
+	{
+		while (InternalAddressLen--)
+		{
+			if (!(TWI_SendByte(TWI, *(InternalAddress++))))
+			{
+				ErrorCode = TWI_ERROR_SlaveNAK;
+				break;
+			}
+		}
+
+		while (Length--)
+		{
+			if (!(TWI_SendByte(TWI, *(Buffer++))))
+			{
+				ErrorCode = TWI_ERROR_SlaveNAK;
+				break;
+			}
+		}
+
+		TWI_StopTransmission(TWI);
+	}
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/TWI_XMEGA.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/TWI_XMEGA.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..72437e5e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/TWI_XMEGA.h
@@ -0,0 +1,302 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief TWI Peripheral Driver (XMEGA)
+ *
+ *  On-chip TWI driver for the XMEGA Family of AVR microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the TWI driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_TWI
+ *  \defgroup Group_TWI_XMEGA TWI Peripheral Driver (XMEGA)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_TWI_XMEGA_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Master mode TWI driver for the 8-bit AVR microcontrollers which contain a hardware TWI module.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the TWI driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_TWI_XMEGA_ExampleUsage Example Usage
+ *  The following snippet is an example of how this module may be used within a typical
+ *  application.
+ *
+ *  <b>Low Level API Example:</b>
+ *  \code
+ *      // Initialize the TWI driver before first use at 200KHz
+ *      TWI_Init(&TWIC, TWI_BAUD_FROM_FREQ(200000));
+ *
+ *      // Start a write session to device at device address 0xA0, internal address 0xDC with a 10ms timeout
+ *      if (TWI_StartTransmission(&TWIC, 0xA0 | TWI_ADDRESS_WRITE, 10) == TWI_ERROR_NoError)
+ *      {
+ *          TWI_SendByte(&TWIC, 0xDC);
+ *
+ *          TWI_SendByte(&TWIC, 0x01);
+ *          TWI_SendByte(&TWIC, 0x02);
+ *          TWI_SendByte(&TWIC, 0x03);
+ *
+ *          // Must stop transmission afterwards to release the bus
+ *          TWI_StopTransmission(&TWIC);
+ *      }
+ *
+ *      // Start a read session to device at address 0xA0, internal address 0xDC with a 10ms timeout
+ *      if (TWI_StartTransmission(&TWIC, 0xA0 | TWI_ADDRESS_WRITE, 10) == TWI_ERROR_NoError)
+ *      {
+ *          TWI_SendByte(&TWIC, 0xDC);
+ *          TWI_StopTransmission(&TWIC);
+ *
+ *          if (TWI_StartTransmission(&TWIC, 0xA0 | TWI_ADDRESS_READ, 10) == TWI_ERROR_NoError)
+ *          {
+ *              uint8_t Byte1, Byte2, Byte3;
+ *
+ *              // Read three bytes, acknowledge after the third byte is received
+ *              TWI_ReceiveByte(&TWIC, &Byte1, false);
+ *              TWI_ReceiveByte(&TWIC, &Byte2, false);
+ *              TWI_ReceiveByte(&TWIC, &Byte3, true);
+ *
+ *              // Must stop transmission afterwards to release the bus
+ *              TWI_StopTransmission(&TWIC);
+ *          }
+ *      }
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  <b>High Level API Example:</b>
+ *  \code
+ *      // Initialize the TWI driver before first use at 200KHz
+ *      TWI_Init(&TWIC, TWI_BAUD_FROM_FREQ(200000));
+ *
+ *      // Start a write session to device at device address 0xA0, internal address 0xDC with a 10ms timeout
+ *      uint8_t InternalWriteAddress = 0xDC;
+ *      uint8_t WritePacket[3] = {0x01, 0x02, 0x03};
+ *
+ *      TWI_WritePacket(&TWIC, 0xA0, 10, &InternalWriteAddress, sizeof(InternalWriteAddress),
+ *                      &WritePacket, sizeof(WritePacket);
+ *
+ *      // Start a read session to device at address 0xA0, internal address 0xDC with a 10ms timeout
+ *      uint8_t InternalReadAddress = 0xDC;
+ *      uint8_t ReadPacket[3];
+ *
+ *      TWI_ReadPacket(&TWIC, 0xA0, 10, &InternalReadAddress, sizeof(InternalReadAddress),
+ *                     &ReadPacket, sizeof(ReadPacket);
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __TWI_XMEGA_H__
+#define __TWI_XMEGA_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_TWI_H) && !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_TWI_C)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** TWI slave device address mask for a read session. Mask with a slave device base address to obtain
+			 *  the correct TWI bus address for the slave device when reading data from it.
+			 */
+			#define TWI_ADDRESS_READ         0x01
+
+			/** TWI slave device address mask for a write session. Mask with a slave device base address to obtain
+			 *  the correct TWI bus address for the slave device when writing data to it.
+			 */
+			#define TWI_ADDRESS_WRITE        0x00
+
+			/** Mask to retrieve the base address for a TWI device, which can then be ORed with \ref TWI_ADDRESS_READ
+			 *  or \ref TWI_ADDRESS_WRITE to obtain the device's read and write address respectively.
+			 */
+			#define TWI_DEVICE_ADDRESS_MASK  0xFE
+
+			/** Calculates the length of each bit on the TWI bus for a given target frequency. This may be used with
+			 *  the \ref TWI_Init() function to convert a bus frequency to a number of clocks for the \c BitLength
+			 *  parameter.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Frequency  Desired TWI bus frequency in Hz.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Bit length in clocks for the given TWI bus frequency at the given prescaler value.
+			 */
+			#define TWI_BAUD_FROM_FREQ(Frequency) ((F_CPU / (2 * Frequency)) - 5)
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible return codes of the TWI transfer start routine and other dependant TWI functions. */
+			enum TWI_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				TWI_ERROR_NoError              = 0, /**< Indicates that the command completed successfully. */
+				TWI_ERROR_BusFault             = 1, /**< A TWI bus fault occurred while attempting to capture the bus. */
+				TWI_ERROR_BusCaptureTimeout    = 2, /**< A timeout occurred whilst waiting for the bus to be ready. */
+				TWI_ERROR_SlaveResponseTimeout = 3, /**< No ACK received at the nominated slave address within the timeout period. */
+				TWI_ERROR_SlaveNotReady        = 4, /**< Slave NAKed the TWI bus START condition. */
+				TWI_ERROR_SlaveNAK             = 5, /**< Slave NAKed whilst attempting to send data to the device. */
+			};
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Initializes the TWI hardware into master mode, ready for data transmission and reception. This must be
+			 *  before any other TWI operations.
+			 *
+			 *  The generated SCL frequency will be according to the formula <pre>F_CPU / (2 * (5 + (BAUD)))</pre>.
+			 *
+			 *  \attention The value of the \c BitLength parameter should not be set below 10 or invalid bus conditions may
+			 *             occur, as indicated in the XMEGA microcontroller datasheet.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] TWI   Pointer to the base of the TWI peripheral within the device.
+			 *  \param[in] Baud  Value of the BAUD register of the TWI Master.
+			 */
+			static inline void TWI_Init(TWI_t* const TWI,
+			                            const uint8_t Baud) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static inline void TWI_Init(TWI_t* const TWI,
+			                            const uint8_t Baud)
+			{
+				TWI->CTRL          = 0x00;
+				TWI->MASTER.BAUD   = Baud;
+				TWI->MASTER.CTRLA  = TWI_MASTER_ENABLE_bm;
+				TWI->MASTER.CTRLB  = 0;
+				TWI->MASTER.STATUS = TWI_MASTER_BUSSTATE_IDLE_gc;
+			}
+
+			/** Turns off the TWI driver hardware. If this is called, any further TWI operations will require a call to
+			 *  \ref TWI_Init() before the TWI can be used again.
+	   		 *
+			 *  \param[in] TWI  Pointer to the base of the TWI peripheral within the device.
+			 */
+			static inline void TWI_Disable(TWI_t* const TWI) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static inline void TWI_Disable(TWI_t* const TWI)
+			{
+				TWI->MASTER.CTRLA &= ~TWI_MASTER_ENABLE_bm;
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a TWI STOP onto the TWI bus, terminating communication with the currently addressed device.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] TWI  Pointer to the base of the TWI peripheral within the device.
+			 */
+			static inline void TWI_StopTransmission(TWI_t* const TWI) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static inline void TWI_StopTransmission(TWI_t* const TWI)
+			{
+				TWI->MASTER.CTRLC = TWI_MASTER_ACKACT_bm | TWI_MASTER_CMD_STOP_gc;
+			}
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Begins a master mode TWI bus communication with the given slave device address.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] TWI           Pointer to the base of the TWI peripheral within the device.
+			 *  \param[in] SlaveAddress  Address of the slave TWI device to communicate with.
+			 *  \param[in] TimeoutMS     Timeout period within which the slave must respond, in milliseconds.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref TWI_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t TWI_StartTransmission(TWI_t* const TWI,
+			                              const uint8_t SlaveAddress,
+			                              const uint8_t TimeoutMS) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Sends a byte to the currently addressed device on the TWI bus.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] TWI   Pointer to the base of the TWI peripheral within the device.
+			 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte to send to the currently addressed device
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the recipient ACKed the byte, \c false otherwise
+			 */
+			bool TWI_SendByte(TWI_t* const TWI,
+			                  const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Receives a byte from the currently addressed device on the TWI bus.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] TWI       Pointer to the base of the TWI peripheral within the device.
+			 *  \param[in] Byte      Location where the read byte is to be stored.
+			 *  \param[in] LastByte  Indicates if the byte should be ACKed if false, NAKed if true.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the byte reception successfully completed, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool TWI_ReceiveByte(TWI_t* const TWI,
+			                     uint8_t* const Byte,
+			                     const bool LastByte) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** High level function to perform a complete packet transfer over the TWI bus to the specified
+			 *  device.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] TWI                 Pointer to the base of the TWI peripheral within the device.
+			 *  \param[in] SlaveAddress        Base address of the TWI slave device to communicate with.
+			 *  \param[in] TimeoutMS           Timeout for bus capture and slave START ACK, in milliseconds.
+			 *  \param[in] InternalAddress     Pointer to a location where the internal slave read start address is stored.
+			 *  \param[in] InternalAddressLen  Size of the internal device address, in bytes.
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer              Pointer to a buffer where the read packet data is to be stored.
+			 *  \param[in] Length              Size of the packet to read, in bytes.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref TWI_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t TWI_ReadPacket(TWI_t* const TWI,
+			                       const uint8_t SlaveAddress,
+			                       const uint8_t TimeoutMS,
+			                       const uint8_t* InternalAddress,
+			                       uint8_t InternalAddressLen,
+			                       uint8_t* Buffer,
+			                       uint8_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(4);
+
+			/** High level function to perform a complete packet transfer over the TWI bus from the specified
+			 *  device.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] TWI                 Pointer to the base of the TWI peripheral within the device.
+			 *  \param[in] SlaveAddress        Base address of the TWI slave device to communicate with
+			 *  \param[in] TimeoutMS           Timeout for bus capture and slave START ACK, in milliseconds
+			 *  \param[in] InternalAddress     Pointer to a location where the internal slave write start address is stored
+			 *  \param[in] InternalAddressLen  Size of the internal device address, in bytes
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer              Pointer to a buffer where the packet data to send is stored
+			 *  \param[in] Length              Size of the packet to send, in bytes
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref TWI_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t TWI_WritePacket(TWI_t* const TWI,
+			                        const uint8_t SlaveAddress,
+			                        const uint8_t TimeoutMS,
+			                        const uint8_t* InternalAddress,
+			                        uint8_t InternalAddressLen,
+			                        const uint8_t* Buffer,
+			                        uint8_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(4);
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/AndroidAccessoryClass.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/AndroidAccessoryClass.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..24978ca2e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/AndroidAccessoryClass.h
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master include file for the library USB Android Open Accessory Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Master include file for the library USB Android Open Accessory Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.
+ *
+ *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of
+ *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassAOA Android Open Accessory Class Driver
+ *  \brief USB class driver for the Google Android Open Accessory class standard.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassAOA_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AndroidAccessoryClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassAOA_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Android Open Accessory Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the USB Android Open Accessory
+ *  Class, for Host USB mode. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the Android Open Accessory Class
+ *  manually via the low-level LUFA APIs.
+ *
+ *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with
+ *  Host using the USB Android Open Accessory Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _AOA_CLASS_H_
+#define _AOA_CLASS_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_AOA_DRIVER
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../Core/USBMode.h"
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+			#include "Host/AndroidAccessoryClassHost.h"
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/AudioClass.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/AudioClass.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0e3ca8d75
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/AudioClass.h
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master include file for the library USB Audio 1.0 Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Master include file for the library USB Audio 1.0 Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.
+ *
+ *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of
+ *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassAudio Audio 1.0 Class Driver
+ *  \brief USB class driver for the USB-IF Audio 1.0 class standard.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassAudio_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/AudioClassDevice.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AudioClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassAudio_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Audio 1.0 Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the USB Audio 1.0 Class, for both
+ *  Device and Host USB modes. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the Audio 1.0 class
+ *  manually via the low-level LUFA APIs.
+ *
+ *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with
+ *  Hosts or Devices using the USB Audio 1.0 Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _AUDIO_CLASS_H_
+#define _AUDIO_CLASS_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_DRIVER
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../Core/USBMode.h"
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+			#include "Device/AudioClassDevice.h"
+		#endif
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+			#include "Host/AudioClassHost.h"
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDCClass.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDCClass.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3bad74bfa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/CDCClass.h
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master include file for the library USB CDC-ACM Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Master include file for the library USB CDC Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.
+ *
+ *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of
+ *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassCDC CDC-ACM (Virtual Serial) Class Driver
+ *  \brief USB class driver for the USB-IF CDC-ACM (Virtual Serial) class standard.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassCDC_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDCClassDevice.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDCClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassCDC_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  CDC Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the USB CDC-ACM class Virtual Serial
+ *  Ports, for both Device and Host USB modes. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the
+ *  CDC class manually via the low-level LUFA APIs.
+ *
+ *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with
+ *  Hosts or Devices using the USB CDC Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CDC_CLASS_H_
+#define _CDC_CLASS_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DRIVER
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../Core/USBMode.h"
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+			#include "Device/CDCClassDevice.h"
+		#endif
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+			#include "Host/CDCClassHost.h"
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/AndroidAccessoryClassCommon.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/AndroidAccessoryClassCommon.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c3153dab7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/AndroidAccessoryClassCommon.h
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Android Open Accessory Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Android Open Accessory Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassAOA
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassAOACommon  Common Class Definitions
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassAOACommon_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB
+ *  Android Open Accessory Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _AOA_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+#define _AOA_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../Core/StdDescriptors.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_AOA_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Product ID value in a Device Descriptor to indicate an Android device in Open Accessory mode. */
+		#define ANDROID_ACCESSORY_PRODUCT_ID        0x2D00
+
+		/** Product ID value in a Device Descriptor to indicate an Android device in Open Accessory and Android Debug mode. */
+		#define ANDROID_ACCESSORY_ADB_PRODUCT_ID    0x2D01
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for possible Class, Subclass and Protocol values of device and interface descriptors relating to the
+		 *  Android Open Accessory class.
+		 */
+		enum AOA_Descriptor_ClassSubclassProtocol_t
+		{
+			AOA_CSCP_AOADataClass    = 0xFF, /**< Descriptor Class value indicating that the device or interface
+			                                  *   belongs to the AOA data class.
+			                                  */
+			AOA_CSCP_AOADataSubclass = 0xFF, /**< Descriptor Subclass value indicating that the device or interface
+			                                  *   belongs to AOA data subclass.
+			                                  */
+			AOA_CSCP_AOADataProtocol = 0x00, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device or interface
+			                                  *   belongs to the AOA data class protocol.
+			                                  */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the Android Open Accessory class specific control requests that can be issued by the USB bus host. */
+		enum AOA_ClassRequests_t
+		{
+			AOA_REQ_GetAccessoryProtocol    = 0x33, /**< Android Open Accessory control request to retrieve the device's supported Accessory Protocol version. */
+			AOA_REQ_SendString              = 0x34, /**< Android Open Accessory control request to set an accessory property string in the device. */
+			AOA_REQ_StartAccessoryMode      = 0x35, /**< Android Open Accessory control request to switch the device into Accessory mode. */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the possible Android Open Accessory property string indexes. */
+		enum AOA_Strings_t
+		{
+			AOA_STRING_Manufacturer         = 0, /**< Index of the Manufacturer property string. */
+			AOA_STRING_Model                = 1, /**< Index of the Model Name property string. */
+			AOA_STRING_Description          = 2, /**< Index of the Description property string. */
+			AOA_STRING_Version              = 3, /**< Index of the Version Number property string. */
+			AOA_STRING_URI                  = 4, /**< Index of the URI Information property string. */
+			AOA_STRING_Serial               = 5, /**< Index of the Serial Number property string. */
+
+			#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			AOA_STRING_TOTAL_STRINGS
+			#endif
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the possible Android Open Accessory protocol versions. */
+		enum AOA_Protocols_t
+		{
+			AOA_PROTOCOL_AccessoryV1        = 0x0001, /**< Android Open Accessory version 1. */
+			AOA_PROTOCOL_AccessoryV2        = 0x0002, /**< Android Open Accessory version 2. */
+		};
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/AudioClassCommon.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/AudioClassCommon.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2db5eeea1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/AudioClassCommon.h
@@ -0,0 +1,780 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Audio 1.0 Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Audio 1.0 Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassAudio
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassAudioCommon  Common Class Definitions
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassAudioCommon_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB
+ *  Audio 1.0 Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _AUDIO_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+#define _AUDIO_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../Core/StdDescriptors.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** \name Audio Channel Masks */
+		//@{
+		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_CHANNEL_LEFT_FRONT           (1 << 0)
+
+		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_CHANNEL_RIGHT_FRONT          (1 << 1)
+
+		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_CHANNEL_CENTER_FRONT         (1 << 2)
+
+		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_CHANNEL_LOW_FREQ_ENHANCE     (1 << 3)
+
+		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_CHANNEL_LEFT_SURROUND        (1 << 4)
+
+		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_CHANNEL_RIGHT_SURROUND       (1 << 5)
+
+		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_CHANNEL_LEFT_OF_CENTER       (1 << 6)
+
+		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_CHANNEL_RIGHT_OF_CENTER      (1 << 7)
+
+		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_CHANNEL_SURROUND             (1 << 8)
+
+		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_CHANNEL_SIDE_LEFT            (1 << 9)
+
+		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_CHANNEL_SIDE_RIGHT           (1 << 10)
+
+		/** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_CHANNEL_TOP                  (1 << 11)
+		//@}
+
+		/** \name Audio Feature Masks */
+		//@{
+		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_FEATURE_MUTE                 (1 << 0)
+
+		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_FEATURE_VOLUME               (1 << 1)
+
+		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_FEATURE_BASS                 (1 << 2)
+
+		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_FEATURE_MID                  (1 << 3)
+
+		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_FEATURE_TREBLE               (1 << 4)
+
+		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_FEATURE_GRAPHIC_EQUALIZER    (1 << 5)
+
+		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_FEATURE_AUTOMATIC_GAIN       (1 << 6)
+
+		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_FEATURE_DELAY                (1 << 7)
+
+		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_FEATURE_BASS_BOOST           (1 << 8)
+
+		/** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_FEATURE_BASS_LOUDNESS        (1 << 9)
+		//@}
+
+		/** \name Audio Terminal Types */
+		//@{
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_UNDEFINED           0x0100
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_STREAMING           0x0101
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_VENDOR              0x01FF
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_IN_UNDEFINED        0x0200
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_IN_MIC              0x0201
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_IN_DESKTOP_MIC      0x0202
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_IN_PERSONAL_MIC     0x0203
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_IN_OMNIDIR_MIC      0x0204
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_IN_MIC_ARRAY        0x0205
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_IN_PROCESSING_MIC   0x0206
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_IN_OUT_UNDEFINED    0x0300
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_OUT_SPEAKER         0x0301
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_OUT_HEADPHONES      0x0302
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_OUT_HEAD_MOUNTED    0x0303
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_OUT_DESKTOP         0x0304
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_OUT_ROOM            0x0305
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_OUT_COMMUNICATION   0x0306
+
+		/** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */
+		#define AUDIO_TERMINAL_OUT_LOWFREQ         0x0307
+		//@}
+
+		/** Convenience macro to fill a 24-bit \ref USB_Audio_SampleFreq_t structure with the given sample rate as a 24-bit number.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] freq  Required audio sampling frequency in HZ
+		 */
+		#define AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ(freq)           {.Byte1 = ((uint32_t)freq & 0xFF), .Byte2 = (((uint32_t)freq >> 8) & 0xFF), .Byte3 = (((uint32_t)freq >> 16) & 0xFF)}
+
+		/** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class-specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint
+		 *  accepts only filled endpoint packets of audio samples.
+		 */
+		#define AUDIO_EP_FULL_PACKETS_ONLY        (1 << 7)
+
+		/** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class-specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint
+		 *  will accept partially filled endpoint packets of audio samples.
+		 */
+		#define AUDIO_EP_ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS    (0 << 7)
+
+		/** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class-specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint
+		 *  allows for sampling frequency adjustments to be made via control requests directed at the endpoint.
+		 */
+		#define AUDIO_EP_SAMPLE_FREQ_CONTROL      (1 << 0)
+
+		/** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class-specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint
+		 *  allows for pitch adjustments to be made via control requests directed at the endpoint.
+		 */
+		#define AUDIO_EP_PITCH_CONTROL            (1 << 1)
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for possible Class, Subclass and Protocol values of device and interface descriptors relating to the Audio
+		 *  device class.
+		 */
+		enum Audio_Descriptor_ClassSubclassProtocol_t
+		{
+			AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass                     = 0x01, /**< Descriptor Class value indicating that the device or
+			                                                   *   interface belongs to the USB Audio 1.0 class.
+			                                                   */
+			AUDIO_CSCP_ControlSubclass                = 0x01, /**< Descriptor Subclass value indicating that the device or
+			                                                   *   interface belongs to the Audio Control subclass.
+			                                                   */
+			AUDIO_CSCP_ControlProtocol                = 0x00, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device or
+			                                                   *   interface belongs to the Audio Control protocol.
+			                                                   */
+			AUDIO_CSCP_AudioStreamingSubclass         = 0x02, /**< Descriptor Subclass value indicating that the device or
+			                                                   *   interface belongs to the MIDI Streaming subclass.
+			                                                   */
+			AUDIO_CSCP_MIDIStreamingSubclass          = 0x03, /**< Descriptor Subclass value indicating that the device or
+			                                                   *   interface belongs to the Audio streaming subclass.
+			                                                   */
+			AUDIO_CSCP_StreamingProtocol              = 0x00, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device or
+			                                                   *   interface belongs to the Streaming Audio protocol.
+			                                                   */
+		};
+
+		/** Audio class specific interface description subtypes, for the Audio Control interface. */
+		enum Audio_CSInterface_AC_SubTypes_t
+		{
+			AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header         = 0x01, /**< Audio class specific control interface header. */
+			AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_InputTerminal  = 0x02, /**< Audio class specific control interface Input Terminal. */
+			AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_OutputTerminal = 0x03, /**< Audio class specific control interface Output Terminal. */
+			AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Mixer          = 0x04, /**< Audio class specific control interface Mixer Unit. */
+			AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Selector       = 0x05, /**< Audio class specific control interface Selector Unit. */
+			AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Feature        = 0x06, /**< Audio class specific control interface Feature Unit. */
+			AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Processing     = 0x07, /**< Audio class specific control interface Processing Unit. */
+			AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Extension      = 0x08, /**< Audio class specific control interface Extension Unit. */
+		};
+
+		/** Audio class specific interface description subtypes, for the Audio Streaming interface. */
+		enum Audio_CSInterface_AS_SubTypes_t
+		{
+			AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_General        = 0x01, /**< Audio class specific streaming interface general descriptor. */
+			AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_FormatType     = 0x02, /**< Audio class specific streaming interface format type descriptor. */
+			AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_FormatSpecific = 0x03, /**< Audio class specific streaming interface format information descriptor. */
+		};
+
+		/** Audio class specific endpoint description subtypes, for the Audio Streaming interface. */
+		enum Audio_CSEndpoint_SubTypes_t
+		{
+			AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSEndpoint_General         = 0x01, /**< Audio class specific endpoint general descriptor. */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the Audio class specific control requests that can be issued by the USB bus host. */
+		enum Audio_ClassRequests_t
+		{
+			AUDIO_REQ_SetCurrent    = 0x01, /**< Audio class-specific request to set the current value of a parameter within the device. */
+			AUDIO_REQ_SetMinimum    = 0x02, /**< Audio class-specific request to set the minimum value of a parameter within the device. */
+			AUDIO_REQ_SetMaximum    = 0x03, /**< Audio class-specific request to set the maximum value of a parameter within the device. */
+			AUDIO_REQ_SetResolution = 0x04, /**< Audio class-specific request to set the resolution value of a parameter within the device. */
+			AUDIO_REQ_SetMemory     = 0x05, /**< Audio class-specific request to set the memory value of a parameter within the device. */
+			AUDIO_REQ_GetCurrent    = 0x81, /**< Audio class-specific request to get the current value of a parameter within the device. */
+			AUDIO_REQ_GetMinimum    = 0x82, /**< Audio class-specific request to get the minimum value of a parameter within the device. */
+			AUDIO_REQ_GetMaximum    = 0x83, /**< Audio class-specific request to get the maximum value of a parameter within the device. */
+			AUDIO_REQ_GetResolution = 0x84, /**< Audio class-specific request to get the resolution value of a parameter within the device. */
+			AUDIO_REQ_GetMemory     = 0x85, /**< Audio class-specific request to get the memory value of a parameter within the device. */
+			AUDIO_REQ_GetStatus     = 0xFF, /**< Audio class-specific request to get the device status. */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for Audio class specific Endpoint control modifiers which can be set and retrieved by a USB host, if the corresponding
+		 *  endpoint control is indicated to be supported in the Endpoint's Audio-class specific endpoint descriptor.
+		 */
+		enum Audio_EndpointControls_t
+		{
+			AUDIO_EPCONTROL_SamplingFreq = 0x01, /**< Sampling frequency adjustment of the endpoint. */
+			AUDIO_EPCONTROL_Pitch        = 0x02, /**< Pitch adjustment of the endpoint. */
+		};
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** \brief Audio class-specific Input Terminal Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific input terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device
+		 *  contains an input audio source, either from a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example,
+		 *  a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_InputTerminal_t for the version of this type with standard element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */
+			uint8_t                 Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,
+			                                  *   must be \ref AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_InputTerminal.
+			                                  */
+
+			uint8_t                 TerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device. */
+			uint16_t                TerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a \c TERMINAL_* mask. */
+			uint8_t                 AssociatedOutputTerminal; /**< ID of associated output terminal, for physically grouped terminals
+			                                                   *   such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset.
+			                                                   */
+			uint8_t                 TotalChannels; /**< Total number of separate audio channels within this interface (right, left, etc.) */
+			uint16_t                ChannelConfig; /**< \c CHANNEL_* masks indicating what channel layout is supported by this terminal. */
+
+			uint8_t                 ChannelStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this channel within the device. */
+			uint8_t                 TerminalStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_Descriptor_InputTerminal_t;
+
+		/** \brief Audio class-specific Input Terminal Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific input terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device
+		 *  contains an input audio source, either from a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example,
+		 *  a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_Descriptor_InputTerminal_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific
+		 *       element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+			uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
+			                           *   given by the specific class.
+			                           */
+
+			uint8_t  bDescriptorSubtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,
+			                              *   must be \ref AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_InputTerminal.
+			                              */
+			uint8_t  bTerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device. */
+			uint16_t wTerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a \c TERMINAL_* mask. */
+			uint8_t  bAssocTerminal; /**< ID of associated output terminal, for physically grouped terminals
+			                          *   such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset.
+			                          */
+			uint8_t  bNrChannels; /**< Total number of separate audio channels within this interface (right, left, etc.) */
+			uint16_t wChannelConfig; /**< \c CHANNEL_* masks indicating what channel layout is supported by this terminal. */
+
+			uint8_t  iChannelNames; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this channel within the device. */
+			uint8_t  iTerminal; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_InputTerminal_t;
+
+		/** \brief Audio class-specific Output Terminal Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific output terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device
+		 *  contains an output audio sink, either to a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example,
+		 *  a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_OutputTerminal_t for the version of this type with standard element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */
+			uint8_t                 Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,
+			                                  *   must be \ref AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_OutputTerminal.
+			                                  */
+
+			uint8_t                 TerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device. */
+			uint16_t                TerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a \c TERMINAL_* mask. */
+			uint8_t                 AssociatedInputTerminal; /**< ID of associated input terminal, for physically grouped terminals
+			                                                    *   such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset.
+			                                                    */
+			uint8_t                 SourceID; /**< ID value of the unit this terminal's audio is sourced from. */
+
+			uint8_t                 TerminalStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_Descriptor_OutputTerminal_t;
+
+		/** \brief Audio class-specific Output Terminal Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific output terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device
+		 *  contains an output audio sink, either to a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example,
+		 *  a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_Descriptor_OutputTerminal_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific
+		 *       element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+			uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,
+			                           *   must be \ref AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_OutputTerminal.
+			                           */
+
+			uint8_t  bDescriptorSubtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,
+			                              *   a value from the \ref Audio_CSInterface_AC_SubTypes_t enum.
+			                              */
+			uint8_t  bTerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device. */
+			uint16_t wTerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a \c TERMINAL_* mask. */
+			uint8_t  bAssocTerminal; /**< ID of associated input terminal, for physically grouped terminals
+			                          *   such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset.
+			                          */
+			uint8_t  bSourceID; /**< ID value of the unit this terminal's audio is sourced from. */
+
+			uint8_t  iTerminal; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_OutputTerminal_t;
+
+		/** \brief Audio class-specific Interface Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific interface descriptor. This follows a regular interface descriptor to
+		 *  supply extra information about the audio device's layout to the host. See the USB Audio specification for more
+		 *  details.
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_Interface_AC_t for the version of this type with standard element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */
+			uint8_t                 Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,
+			                                  *   a value from the \ref Audio_CSInterface_AS_SubTypes_t enum.
+			                                  */
+
+			uint16_t                ACSpecification; /**< Binary Coded Decimal value, indicating the supported Audio Class specification version.
+			                                          *
+			                                          *   \see \ref VERSION_BCD() utility macro.
+			                                          */
+			uint16_t                TotalLength; /**< Total length of the Audio class-specific descriptors, including this descriptor. */
+
+			uint8_t                 InCollection; /**< Total number of Audio Streaming interfaces linked to this Audio Control interface (must be 1). */
+			uint8_t                 InterfaceNumber; /**< Interface number of the associated Audio Streaming interface. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t;
+
+		/** \brief Audio class-specific Interface Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific interface descriptor. This follows a regular interface descriptor to
+		 *  supply extra information about the audio device's layout to the host. See the USB Audio specification for more
+		 *  details.
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific
+		 *       element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+			uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
+			                           *   given by the specific class.
+			                           */
+
+			uint8_t  bDescriptorSubtype;/**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,
+			                             *   a value from the \ref Audio_CSInterface_AS_SubTypes_t enum.
+			                             */
+
+			uint16_t bcdADC; /**< Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported Audio Class specification version.
+			                  *
+			                  *   \see \ref VERSION_BCD() utility macro.
+			                  */
+			uint16_t wTotalLength; /**< Total length of the Audio class-specific descriptors, including this descriptor. */
+
+			uint8_t  bInCollection; /**< Total number of Audio Streaming interfaces linked to this Audio Control interface (must be 1). */
+			uint8_t  bInterfaceNumbers; /**< Interface number of the associated Audio Streaming interface. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_Interface_AC_t;
+
+		/** \brief Audio class-specific Feature Unit Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific Feature Unit descriptor. This indicates to the host what features
+		 *  are present in the device's audio stream for basic control, such as per-channel volume. See the USB Audio
+		 *  specification for more details.
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_FeatureUnit_t for the version of this type with standard element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */
+			uint8_t                 Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,
+			                                  *   must be \ref AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Feature.
+			                                  */
+
+			uint8_t                 UnitID; /**< ID value of this feature unit - must be a unique value within the device. */
+			uint8_t                 SourceID; /**< Source ID value of the audio source input into this feature unit. */
+
+			uint8_t                 ControlSize; /**< Size of each element in the \c ChannelControls array. */
+			uint8_t                 ChannelControls[3]; /**< Feature masks for the control channel, and each separate audio channel. */
+
+			uint8_t                 FeatureUnitStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_Descriptor_FeatureUnit_t;
+
+		/** \brief Audio class-specific Feature Unit Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific Feature Unit descriptor. This indicates to the host what features
+		 *  are present in the device's audio stream for basic control, such as per-channel volume. See the USB Audio
+		 *  specification for more details.
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_Descriptor_FeatureUnit_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific
+		 *       element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+			uint8_t bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
+			                          *   given by the specific class.
+			                          */
+
+			uint8_t bDescriptorSubtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,
+			                             *   must be \ref AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Feature.
+			                             */
+
+			uint8_t bUnitID; /**< ID value of this feature unit - must be a unique value within the device. */
+			uint8_t bSourceID; /**< Source ID value of the audio source input into this feature unit. */
+
+			uint8_t bControlSize; /**< Size of each element in the \c ChannelControls array. */
+			uint8_t bmaControls[3]; /**< Feature masks for the control channel, and each separate audio channel. */
+
+			uint8_t iFeature; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_FeatureUnit_t;
+
+		/** \brief Audio class-specific Streaming Audio Interface Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific streaming interface descriptor. This indicates to the host
+		 *  how audio streams within the device are formatted. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_Interface_AS_t for the version of this type with standard element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */
+			uint8_t                 Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,
+			                                  *   a value from the \ref Audio_CSInterface_AS_SubTypes_t enum.
+			                                  */
+
+			uint8_t                 TerminalLink; /**< ID value of the output terminal this descriptor is describing. */
+
+			uint8_t                 FrameDelay; /**< Delay in frames resulting from the complete sample processing from input to output. */
+			uint16_t                AudioFormat; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AS_t;
+
+		/** \brief Audio class-specific Streaming Audio Interface Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific streaming interface descriptor. This indicates to the host
+		 *  how audio streams within the device are formatted. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AS_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific
+		 *       element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+			uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
+			                           *   given by the specific class.
+			                           */
+
+			uint8_t  bDescriptorSubtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,
+			                              *   a value from the \ref Audio_CSInterface_AS_SubTypes_t enum.
+			                              */
+
+			uint8_t  bTerminalLink; /**< ID value of the output terminal this descriptor is describing. */
+
+			uint8_t  bDelay; /**< Delay in frames resulting from the complete sample processing from input to output. */
+			uint16_t wFormatTag; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_Interface_AS_t;
+
+		/** \brief Audio class-specific Format Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific audio format descriptor. This is used to give the host full details
+		 *  about the number of channels, the sample resolution, acceptable sample frequencies and encoding method used
+		 *  in the device's audio streams. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 *
+		 *  \attention This descriptor <b>must</b> be followed by one or more \ref USB_Audio_SampleFreq_t elements containing
+		 *             the continuous or discrete sample frequencies.
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_Format_t for the version of this type with standard element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */
+			uint8_t                 Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,
+			                                  *   must be \ref AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_FormatType.
+			                                  */
+
+			uint8_t                 FormatType; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification. */
+			uint8_t                 Channels; /**< Total number of discrete channels in the stream. */
+
+			uint8_t                 SubFrameSize; /**< Size in bytes of each channel's sample data in the stream. */
+			uint8_t                 BitResolution; /**< Bits of resolution of each channel's samples in the stream. */
+
+			uint8_t                 TotalDiscreteSampleRates; /**< Total number of discrete sample frequencies supported by the device. When
+			                                                   *   zero, this must be followed by the lower and upper continuous sampling
+			                                                   *   frequencies supported by the device; otherwise, this must be followed
+			                                                   *   by the given number of discrete sampling frequencies supported.
+			                                                   */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_Descriptor_Format_t;
+
+		/** \brief 24-Bit Audio Frequency Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a 24-bit audio sample frequency structure. As GCC does not contain a built in 24-bit datatype,
+		 *  this this structure is used to build up the value instead. Fill this structure with the \ref AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQ() macro.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t Byte1; /**< Lowest 8 bits of the 24-bit value. */
+			uint8_t Byte2; /**< Middle 8 bits of the 24-bit value. */
+			uint8_t Byte3; /**< Upper 8 bits of the 24-bit value. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_SampleFreq_t;
+
+		/** \brief Audio class-specific Format Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific audio format descriptor. This is used to give the host full details
+		 *  about the number of channels, the sample resolution, acceptable sample frequencies and encoding method used
+		 *  in the device's audio streams. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 *
+		 *  \attention This descriptor <b>must</b> be followed by one or more 24-bit integer elements containing the continuous
+		 *             or discrete sample frequencies.
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_Descriptor_Format_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific
+		 *       element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+			uint8_t bDescriptorType; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,
+			                          *   must be \ref AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_FormatType.
+			                          */
+
+			uint8_t bDescriptorSubtype;/**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,
+			                            *   a value from the \ref Audio_CSInterface_AS_SubTypes_t enum.
+			                            */
+
+			uint8_t bFormatType; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification. */
+			uint8_t bNrChannels; /**< Total number of discrete channels in the stream. */
+
+			uint8_t bSubFrameSize; /**< Size in bytes of each channel's sample data in the stream. */
+			uint8_t bBitResolution; /**< Bits of resolution of each channel's samples in the stream. */
+
+			uint8_t bSampleFrequencyType; /**< Total number of sample frequencies supported by the device. When
+			                               *   zero, this must be followed by the lower and upper continuous sampling
+			                               *   frequencies supported by the device; otherwise, this must be followed
+			                               *   by the given number of discrete sampling frequencies supported.
+			                               */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_Format_t;
+
+		/** \brief Audio class-specific Streaming Endpoint Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific endpoint descriptor. This contains a regular endpoint
+		 *  descriptor with a few Audio-class-specific extensions. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t for the version of this type with standard element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t Endpoint; /**< Standard endpoint descriptor describing the audio endpoint. */
+
+			uint8_t                   Refresh; /**< Always set to zero for Audio class devices. */
+			uint8_t                   SyncEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint address to send synchronization information to, if needed (zero otherwise). */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t;
+
+		/** \brief Audio class-specific Streaming Endpoint Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific endpoint descriptor. This contains a regular endpoint
+		 *  descriptor with a few Audio-class-specific extensions. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific
+		 *       element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+			uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a
+			                           *   value given by the specific class.
+			                           */
+			uint8_t  bEndpointAddress; /**< Logical address of the endpoint within the device for the current
+			                            *   configuration, including direction mask.
+			                            */
+			uint8_t  bmAttributes; /**< Endpoint attributes, comprised of a mask of the endpoint type (\c EP_TYPE_*)
+			                        *   and attributes (\c ENDPOINT_ATTR_*) masks.
+			                        */
+			uint16_t wMaxPacketSize; /**< Size of the endpoint bank, in bytes. This indicates the maximum packet size
+			                          *   that the endpoint can receive at a time.
+			                          */
+			uint8_t  bInterval; /**< Polling interval in milliseconds for the endpoint if it is an INTERRUPT or
+			                     *   ISOCHRONOUS type.
+			                     */
+
+			uint8_t  bRefresh; /**< Always set to zero for Audio class devices. */
+			uint8_t  bSynchAddress; /**< Endpoint address to send synchronization information to, if needed (zero otherwise). */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t;
+
+		/** \brief Audio class-specific Extended Endpoint Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific extended endpoint descriptor. This contains extra information
+		 *  on the usage of endpoints used to stream audio in and out of the USB Audio device, and follows an Audio
+		 *  class-specific extended endpoint descriptor. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t for the version of this type with standard element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */
+			uint8_t                 Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,
+			                                  *   a value from the \ref Audio_CSEndpoint_SubTypes_t enum.
+			                                  */
+
+			uint8_t                 Attributes; /**< Audio class-specific endpoint attributes, such as \ref AUDIO_EP_FULL_PACKETS_ONLY. */
+
+			uint8_t                 LockDelayUnits; /**< Units used for the LockDelay field, see Audio class specification. */
+			uint16_t                LockDelay; /**< Time required to internally lock endpoint's internal clock recovery circuitry. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t;
+
+		/** \brief Audio class-specific Extended Endpoint Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific extended endpoint descriptor. This contains extra information
+		 *  on the usage of endpoints used to stream audio in and out of the USB Audio device, and follows an Audio
+		 *  class-specific extended endpoint descriptor. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific
+		 *       element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+			uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
+			                           *   given by the specific class.
+			                           */
+
+			uint8_t  bDescriptorSubtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors,
+			                              *   a value from the \ref Audio_CSEndpoint_SubTypes_t enum.
+			                              */
+
+			uint8_t  bmAttributes; /**< Audio class-specific endpoint attributes, such as \ref AUDIO_EP_FULL_PACKETS_ONLY. */
+
+			uint8_t  bLockDelayUnits; /**< Units used for the LockDelay field, see Audio class specification. */
+			uint16_t wLockDelay; /**< Time required to internally lock endpoint's internal clock recovery circuitry. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_Audio_StdDescriptor_StreamEndpoint_Spc_t;
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/CDCClassCommon.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/CDCClassCommon.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..94e6c68db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/CDCClassCommon.h
@@ -0,0 +1,391 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB CDC Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB CDC Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassCDC
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassCDCCommon  Common Class Definitions
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassCDCCommon_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB
+ *  CDC Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CDC_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+#define _CDC_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../Core/StdDescriptors.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** \name Virtual Control Line Masks */
+		//@{
+		/** Mask for the DTR handshake line for use with the \ref CDC_REQ_SetControlLineState class-specific request
+		 *  from the host, to indicate that the DTR line state should be high.
+		 */
+		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_DTR         (1 << 0)
+
+		/** Mask for the RTS handshake line for use with the \ref CDC_REQ_SetControlLineState class-specific request
+		 *  from the host, to indicate that the RTS line state should be high.
+		 */
+		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_RTS         (1 << 1)
+
+		/** Mask for the DCD handshake line for use with the \ref CDC_NOTIF_SerialState class-specific notification
+		 *  from the device to the host, to indicate that the DCD line state is currently high.
+		 */
+		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_DCD          (1 << 0)
+
+		/** Mask for the DSR handshake line for use with the \ref CDC_NOTIF_SerialState class-specific notification
+		 *  from the device to the host, to indicate that the DSR line state is currently high.
+		 */
+		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_DSR          (1 << 1)
+
+		/** Mask for the BREAK handshake line for use with the \ref CDC_NOTIF_SerialState class-specific notification
+		 *  from the device to the host, to indicate that the BREAK line state is currently high.
+		 */
+		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_BREAK        (1 << 2)
+
+		/** Mask for the RING handshake line for use with the \ref CDC_NOTIF_SerialState class-specific notification
+		 *  from the device to the host, to indicate that the RING line state is currently high.
+		 */
+		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_RING         (1 << 3)
+
+		/** Mask for use with the \ref CDC_NOTIF_SerialState class-specific notification from the device to the host,
+		 *  to indicate that a framing error has occurred on the virtual serial port.
+		 */
+		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_FRAMEERROR   (1 << 4)
+
+		/** Mask for use with the \ref CDC_NOTIF_SerialState class-specific notification from the device to the host,
+		 *  to indicate that a parity error has occurred on the virtual serial port.
+		 */
+		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_PARITYERROR  (1 << 5)
+
+		/** Mask for use with the \ref CDC_NOTIF_SerialState class-specific notification from the device to the host,
+		 *  to indicate that a data overrun error has occurred on the virtual serial port.
+		 */
+		#define CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_OVERRUNERROR (1 << 6)
+		//@}
+
+		/** Macro to define a CDC class-specific functional descriptor. CDC functional descriptors have a
+		 *  uniform structure but variable sized data payloads, thus cannot be represented accurately by
+		 *  a single \c typedef \c struct. A macro is used instead so that functional descriptors can be created
+		 *  easily by specifying the size of the payload. This allows \c sizeof() to work correctly.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] DataSize  Size in bytes of the CDC functional descriptor's data payload.
+		 */
+		#define CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(DataSize)        \
+		     struct                                        \
+		     {                                             \
+		          USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header;          \
+			      uint8_t                 SubType;         \
+		          uint8_t                 Data[DataSize];  \
+		     }
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for possible Class, Subclass and Protocol values of device and interface descriptors relating to the CDC
+		 *  device class.
+		 */
+		enum CDC_Descriptor_ClassSubclassProtocol_t
+		{
+			CDC_CSCP_CDCClass               = 0x02, /**< Descriptor Class value indicating that the device or interface
+			                                         *   belongs to the CDC class.
+			                                         */
+			CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificSubclass     = 0x00, /**< Descriptor Subclass value indicating that the device or interface
+			                                         *   belongs to no specific subclass of the CDC class.
+			                                         */
+			CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass            = 0x02, /**< Descriptor Subclass value indicating that the device or interface
+			                                         *   belongs to the Abstract Control Model CDC subclass.
+			                                         */
+			CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol      = 0x01, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device or interface
+			                                         *   belongs to the AT Command protocol of the CDC class.
+			                                         */
+			CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificProtocol     = 0x00, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device or interface
+			                                         *   belongs to no specific protocol of the CDC class.
+			                                         */
+			CDC_CSCP_VendorSpecificProtocol = 0xFF, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device or interface
+			                                         *   belongs to a vendor-specific protocol of the CDC class.
+			                                         */
+			CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass           = 0x0A, /**< Descriptor Class value indicating that the device or interface
+			                                         *   belongs to the CDC Data class.
+			                                         */
+			CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass         = 0x00, /**< Descriptor Subclass value indicating that the device or interface
+			                                         *   belongs to no specific subclass of the CDC data class.
+			                                         */
+			CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol         = 0x00, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device or interface
+			                                         *   belongs to no specific protocol of the CDC data class.
+			                                         */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the CDC class specific control requests that can be issued by the USB bus host. */
+		enum CDC_ClassRequests_t
+		{
+			CDC_REQ_SendEncapsulatedCommand = 0x00, /**< CDC class-specific request to send an encapsulated command to the device. */
+			CDC_REQ_GetEncapsulatedResponse = 0x01, /**< CDC class-specific request to retrieve an encapsulated command response from the device. */
+			CDC_REQ_SetLineEncoding         = 0x20, /**< CDC class-specific request to set the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */
+			CDC_REQ_GetLineEncoding         = 0x21, /**< CDC class-specific request to get the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */
+			CDC_REQ_SetControlLineState     = 0x22, /**< CDC class-specific request to set the current virtual serial port handshake line states. */
+			CDC_REQ_SendBreak               = 0x23, /**< CDC class-specific request to send a break to the receiver via the carrier channel. */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the CDC class specific notification requests that can be issued by a CDC device to a host. */
+		enum CDC_ClassNotifications_t
+		{
+			CDC_NOTIF_SerialState = 0x20, /**< Notification type constant for a change in the virtual serial port
+			                               *   handshake line states, for use with a \ref USB_Request_Header_t
+			                               *   notification structure when sent to the host via the CDC notification
+			                               *   endpoint.
+			                               */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the CDC class specific interface descriptor subtypes. */
+		enum CDC_DescriptorSubtypes_t
+		{
+			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header           = 0x00, /**< CDC class-specific Header functional descriptor. */
+			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_CallManagement   = 0x01, /**< CDC class-specific Call Management functional descriptor. */
+			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM              = 0x02, /**< CDC class-specific Abstract Control Model functional descriptor. */
+			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_DirectLine       = 0x03, /**< CDC class-specific Direct Line functional descriptor. */
+			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_TelephoneRinger  = 0x04, /**< CDC class-specific Telephone Ringer functional descriptor. */
+			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_TelephoneCall    = 0x05, /**< CDC class-specific Telephone Call functional descriptor. */
+			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union            = 0x06, /**< CDC class-specific Union functional descriptor. */
+			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_CountrySelection = 0x07, /**< CDC class-specific Country Selection functional descriptor. */
+			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_TelephoneOpModes = 0x08, /**< CDC class-specific Telephone Operation Modes functional descriptor. */
+			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_USBTerminal      = 0x09, /**< CDC class-specific USB Terminal functional descriptor. */
+			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_NetworkChannel   = 0x0A, /**< CDC class-specific Network Channel functional descriptor. */
+			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ProtocolUnit     = 0x0B, /**< CDC class-specific Protocol Unit functional descriptor. */
+			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ExtensionUnit    = 0x0C, /**< CDC class-specific Extension Unit functional descriptor. */
+			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_MultiChannel     = 0x0D, /**< CDC class-specific Multi-Channel Management functional descriptor. */
+			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_CAPI             = 0x0E, /**< CDC class-specific Common ISDN API functional descriptor. */
+			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Ethernet         = 0x0F, /**< CDC class-specific Ethernet functional descriptor. */
+			CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ATM              = 0x10, /**< CDC class-specific Asynchronous Transfer Mode functional descriptor. */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the possible line encoding formats of a virtual serial port. */
+		enum CDC_LineEncodingFormats_t
+		{
+			CDC_LINEENCODING_OneStopBit          = 0, /**< Each frame contains one stop bit. */
+			CDC_LINEENCODING_OneAndAHalfStopBits = 1, /**< Each frame contains one and a half stop bits. */
+			CDC_LINEENCODING_TwoStopBits         = 2, /**< Each frame contains two stop bits. */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the possible line encoding parity settings of a virtual serial port. */
+		enum CDC_LineEncodingParity_t
+		{
+			CDC_PARITY_None  = 0, /**< No parity bit mode on each frame. */
+			CDC_PARITY_Odd   = 1, /**< Odd parity bit mode on each frame. */
+			CDC_PARITY_Even  = 2, /**< Even parity bit mode on each frame. */
+			CDC_PARITY_Mark  = 3, /**< Mark parity bit mode on each frame. */
+			CDC_PARITY_Space = 4, /**< Space parity bit mode on each frame. */
+		};
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** \brief CDC class-specific Functional Header Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a CDC class-specific functional header descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device
+		 *  contains one or more CDC functional data descriptors, which give the CDC interface's capabilities and configuration.
+		 *  See the CDC class specification for more details.
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_CDC_StdDescriptor_FunctionalHeader_t for the version of this type with standard element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */
+			uint8_t                 Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between CDC class-specific descriptors,
+			                                  *   must be \ref CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header.
+			                                  */
+			uint16_t                CDCSpecification; /**< Version number of the CDC specification implemented by the device,
+			                                           *   encoded in BCD format.
+			                                           *
+			                                           *   \see \ref VERSION_BCD() utility macro.
+			                                           */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t;
+
+		/** \brief CDC class-specific Functional Header Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a CDC class-specific functional header descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device
+		 *  contains one or more CDC functional data descriptors, which give the CDC interface's capabilities and configuration.
+		 *  See the CDC class specification for more details.
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific
+		 *       element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  bFunctionLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+			uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
+			                           *   given by the specific class.
+			                           */
+			uint8_t  bDescriptorSubType; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between CDC class-specific descriptors,
+			                              *   must be \ref CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header.
+			                              */
+			uint16_t bcdCDC; /**< Version number of the CDC specification implemented by the device, encoded in BCD format.
+			                  *
+			                  *   \see \ref VERSION_BCD() utility macro.
+			                  */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_CDC_StdDescriptor_FunctionalHeader_t;
+
+		/** \brief CDC class-specific Functional ACM Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a CDC class-specific functional ACM descriptor. This indicates to the host that the CDC interface
+		 *  supports the CDC ACM subclass of the CDC specification. See the CDC class specification for more details.
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_CDC_StdDescriptor_FunctionalACM_t for the version of this type with standard element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */
+			uint8_t                 Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between CDC class-specific descriptors,
+			                                  *   must be \ref CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM.
+			                                  */
+			uint8_t                 Capabilities; /**< Capabilities of the ACM interface, given as a bit mask. For most devices,
+			                                       *   this should be set to a fixed value of \c 0x06 - for other capabilities, refer
+			                                       *   to the CDC ACM specification.
+			                                       */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t;
+
+		/** \brief CDC class-specific Functional ACM Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a CDC class-specific functional ACM descriptor. This indicates to the host that the CDC interface
+		 *  supports the CDC ACM subclass of the CDC specification. See the CDC class specification for more details.
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific
+		 *       element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t bFunctionLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+			uint8_t bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
+			                          *   given by the specific class.
+			                          */
+			uint8_t bDescriptorSubType; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between CDC class-specific descriptors,
+			                             *   must be \ref CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM.
+			                             */
+			uint8_t bmCapabilities; /**< Capabilities of the ACM interface, given as a bit mask. For most devices,
+			                         *   this should be set to a fixed value of 0x06 - for other capabilities, refer
+			                         *   to the CDC ACM specification.
+			                         */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_CDC_StdDescriptor_FunctionalACM_t;
+
+		/** \brief CDC class-specific Functional Union Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a CDC class-specific functional Union descriptor. This indicates to the host that specific
+		 *  CDC control and data interfaces are related. See the CDC class specification for more details.
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_CDC_StdDescriptor_FunctionalUnion_t for the version of this type with standard element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */
+			uint8_t                 Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between CDC class-specific descriptors,
+			                                  *   must be \ref CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union.
+			                                  */
+			uint8_t                 MasterInterfaceNumber; /**< Interface number of the CDC Control interface. */
+			uint8_t                 SlaveInterfaceNumber; /**< Interface number of the CDC Data interface. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t;
+
+		/** \brief CDC class-specific Functional Union Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a CDC class-specific functional Union descriptor. This indicates to the host that specific
+		 *  CDC control and data interfaces are related. See the CDC class specification for more details.
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific
+		 *       element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t bFunctionLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+			uint8_t bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
+			                          *   given by the specific class.
+			                          */
+			uint8_t bDescriptorSubType; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between CDC class-specific descriptors,
+			                             *   must be \ref CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union.
+			                             */
+			uint8_t bMasterInterface; /**< Interface number of the CDC Control interface. */
+			uint8_t bSlaveInterface0; /**< Interface number of the CDC Data interface. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_CDC_StdDescriptor_FunctionalUnion_t;
+
+		/** \brief CDC Virtual Serial Port Line Encoding Settings Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a CDC Line Encoding structure, used to hold the various encoding parameters for a virtual
+		 *  serial port.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t BaudRateBPS; /**< Baud rate of the virtual serial port, in bits per second. */
+			uint8_t  CharFormat; /**< Character format of the virtual serial port, a value from the
+								  *   \ref CDC_LineEncodingFormats_t enum.
+								  */
+			uint8_t  ParityType; /**< Parity setting of the virtual serial port, a value from the
+								  *   \ref CDC_LineEncodingParity_t enum.
+								  */
+			uint8_t  DataBits; /**< Bits of data per character of the virtual serial port. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED CDC_LineEncoding_t;
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDClassCommon.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDClassCommon.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9d701fbeb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDClassCommon.h
@@ -0,0 +1,682 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB HID Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB HID Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassHID
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassHIDCommon  Common Class Definitions
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassHIDCommon_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB
+ *  HID Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _HID_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+#define _HID_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../Core/StdDescriptors.h"
+		#include "HIDParser.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_HID_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** \name Keyboard Standard Report Modifier Masks */
+		//@{
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left control key is currently pressed. */
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFIER_LEFTCTRL                    (1 << 0)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left shift key is currently pressed. */
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFIER_LEFTSHIFT                   (1 << 1)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left alt key is currently pressed. */
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFIER_LEFTALT                     (1 << 2)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's left GUI key is currently pressed. */
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFIER_LEFTGUI                     (1 << 3)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right control key is currently pressed. */
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFIER_RIGHTCTRL                   (1 << 4)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right shift key is currently pressed. */
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFIER_RIGHTSHIFT                  (1 << 5)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right alt key is currently pressed. */
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFIER_RIGHTALT                    (1 << 6)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard report modifier byte, indicating that the keyboard's right GUI key is currently pressed. */
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFIER_RIGHTGUI                    (1 << 7)
+		//@}
+
+		/** \name Keyboard Standard Report LED Masks */
+		//@{
+		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's NUM LOCK mode is currently set. */
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_LED_NUMLOCK                          (1 << 0)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's CAPS LOCK mode is currently set. */
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_LED_CAPSLOCK                         (1 << 1)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's SCROLL LOCK mode is currently set. */
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_LED_SCROLLLOCK                       (1 << 2)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's COMPOSE mode is currently set. */
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_LED_COMPOSE                          (1 << 3)
+
+		/** Constant for a keyboard output report LED byte, indicating that the host's KANA mode is currently set. */
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_LED_KANA                             (1 << 4)
+		//@}
+
+		/** \name Keyboard Standard Report Key Scan-codes */
+		//@{
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_ERROR_ROLLOVER                    0x01
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_POST_FAIL                         0x02
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_ERROR_UNDEFINED                   0x03
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_A                                 0x04
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_B                                 0x05
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_C                                 0x06
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_D                                 0x07
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_E                                 0x08
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F                                 0x09
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_G                                 0x0A
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_H                                 0x0B
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_I                                 0x0C
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_J                                 0x0D
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_K                                 0x0E
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_L                                 0x0F
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_M                                 0x10
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_N                                 0x11
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_O                                 0x12
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_P                                 0x13
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_Q                                 0x14
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_R                                 0x15
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_S                                 0x16
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_T                                 0x17
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_U                                 0x18
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_V                                 0x19
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_W                                 0x1A
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_X                                 0x1B
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_Y                                 0x1C
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_Z                                 0x1D
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_1_AND_EXCLAMATION                 0x1E
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_2_AND_AT                          0x1F
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_3_AND_HASHMARK                    0x20
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_4_AND_DOLLAR                      0x21
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_5_AND_PERCENTAGE                  0x22
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_6_AND_CARET                       0x23
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_7_AND_AMPERSAND                   0x24
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_8_AND_ASTERISK                    0x25
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_9_AND_OPENING_PARENTHESIS         0x26
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_0_AND_CLOSING_PARENTHESIS         0x27
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_ENTER                             0x28
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_ESCAPE                            0x29
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_BACKSPACE                         0x2A
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_TAB                               0x2B
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_SPACE                             0x2C
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_MINUS_AND_UNDERSCORE              0x2D
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_EQUAL_AND_PLUS                    0x2E
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_OPENING_BRACKET_AND_OPENING_BRACE 0x2F
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_CLOSING_BRACKET_AND_CLOSING_BRACE 0x30
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_BACKSLASH_AND_PIPE                0x31
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_NON_US_HASHMARK_AND_TILDE         0x32
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_SEMICOLON_AND_COLON               0x33
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_APOSTROPHE_AND_QUOTE              0x34
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_GRAVE_ACCENT_AND_TILDE            0x35
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_COMMA_AND_LESS_THAN_SIGN          0x36
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_DOT_AND_GREATER_THAN_SIGN         0x37
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_SLASH_AND_QUESTION_MARK           0x38
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_CAPS_LOCK                         0x39
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F1                                0x3A
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F2                                0x3B
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F3                                0x3C
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F4                                0x3D
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F5                                0x3E
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F6                                0x3F
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F7                                0x40
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F8                                0x41
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F9                                0x42
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F10                               0x43
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F11                               0x44
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F12                               0x45
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_PRINT_SCREEN                      0x46
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_SCROLL_LOCK                       0x47
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_PAUSE                             0x48
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_INSERT                            0x49
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_HOME                              0x4A
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_PAGE_UP                           0x4B
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_DELETE                            0x4C
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_END                               0x4D
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_PAGE_DOWN                         0x4E
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_RIGHT_ARROW                       0x4F
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LEFT_ARROW                        0x50
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_DOWN_ARROW                        0x51
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_UP_ARROW                          0x52
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_NUM_LOCK                          0x53
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_SLASH                      0x54
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_ASTERISK                   0x55
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_MINUS                      0x56
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_PLUS                       0x57
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_ENTER                      0x58
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_1_AND_END                  0x59
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_2_AND_DOWN_ARROW           0x5A
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_3_AND_PAGE_DOWN            0x5B
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_4_AND_LEFT_ARROW           0x5C
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_5                          0x5D
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_6_AND_RIGHT_ARROW          0x5E
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_7_AND_HOME                 0x5F
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_8_AND_UP_ARROW             0x60
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_9_AND_PAGE_UP              0x61
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_0_AND_INSERT               0x62
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_DOT_AND_DELETE             0x63
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_NON_US_BACKSLASH_AND_PIPE         0x64
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_APPLICATION                       0x65
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_POWER                             0x66
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_EQUAL_SIGN                 0x67
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F13                               0x68
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F14                               0x69
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F15                               0x6A
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F16                               0x6B
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F17                               0x6C
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F18                               0x6D
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F19                               0x6E
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F20                               0x6F
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F21                               0x70
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F22                               0x71
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F23                               0x72
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_F24                               0x73
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_EXECUTE                           0x74
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_HELP                              0x75
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_MENU                              0x76
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_SELECT                            0x77
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_STOP                              0x78
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_AGAIN                             0x79
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_UNDO                              0x7A
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_CUT                               0x7B
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_COPY                              0x7C
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_PASTE                             0x7D
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_FIND                              0x7E
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_MUTE                              0x7F
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_VOLUME_UP                         0x80
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_VOLUME_DOWN                       0x81
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LOCKING_CAPS_LOCK                 0x82
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LOCKING_NUM_LOCK                  0x83
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LOCKING_SCROLL_LOCK               0x84
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_COMMA                      0x85
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_EQUAL_SIGN_AS400           0x86
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_INTERNATIONAL1                    0x87
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_INTERNATIONAL2                    0x88
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_INTERNATIONAL3                    0x89
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_INTERNATIONAL4                    0x8A
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_INTERNATIONAL5                    0x8B
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_INTERNATIONAL6                    0x8C
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_INTERNATIONAL7                    0x8D
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_INTERNATIONAL8                    0x8E
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_INTERNATIONAL9                    0x8F
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LANG1                             0x90
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LANG2                             0x91
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LANG3                             0x92
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LANG4                             0x93
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LANG5                             0x94
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LANG6                             0x95
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LANG7                             0x96
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LANG8                             0x97
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LANG9                             0x98
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_ALTERNATE_ERASE                   0x99
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_SYSREQ                            0x9A
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_CANCEL                            0x9B
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_CLEAR                             0x9C
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_PRIOR                             0x9D
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_RETURN                            0x9E
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_SEPARATOR                         0x9F
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_OUT                               0xA0
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_OPER                              0xA1
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_CLEAR_AND_AGAIN                   0xA2
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_CRSEL_AND_PROPS                   0xA3
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_EXSEL                             0xA4
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_00                         0xB0
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_000                        0xB1
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_THOUSANDS_SEPARATOR               0xB2
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_DECIMAL_SEPARATOR                 0xB3
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_CURRENCY_UNIT                     0xB4
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_CURRENCY_SUB_UNIT                 0xB5
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_OPENING_PARENTHESIS        0xB6
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_CLOSING_PARENTHESIS        0xB7
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_OPENING_BRACE              0xB8
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_CLOSING_BRACE              0xB9
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_TAB                        0xBA
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_BACKSPACE                  0xBB
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_A                          0xBC
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_B                          0xBD
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_C                          0xBE
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_D                          0xBF
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_E                          0xC0
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_F                          0xC1
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_XOR                        0xC2
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_CARET                      0xC3
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_PERCENTAGE                 0xC4
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_LESS_THAN_SIGN             0xC5
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_GREATER_THAN_SIGN          0xC6
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_AMP                        0xC7
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_AMP_AMP                    0xC8
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_PIPE                       0xC9
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_PIPE_PIPE                  0xCA
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_COLON                      0xCB
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_HASHMARK                   0xCC
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_SPACE                      0xCD
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_AT                         0xCE
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_EXCLAMATION_SIGN           0xCF
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_MEMORY_STORE               0xD0
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_MEMORY_RECALL              0xD1
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_MEMORY_CLEAR               0xD2
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_MEMORY_ADD                 0xD3
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_MEMORY_SUBTRACT            0xD4
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_MEMORY_MULTIPLY            0xD5
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_MEMORY_DIVIDE              0xD6
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_PLUS_AND_MINUS             0xD7
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_CLEAR                      0xD8
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_CLEAR_ENTRY                0xD9
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_BINARY                     0xDA
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_OCTAL                      0xDB
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_DECIMAL                    0xDC
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_KEYPAD_HEXADECIMAL                0xDD
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LEFT_CONTROL                      0xE0
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LEFT_SHIFT                        0xE1
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LEFT_ALT                          0xE2
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_LEFT_GUI                          0xE3
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_RIGHT_CONTROL                     0xE4
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_RIGHT_SHIFT                       0xE5
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_RIGHT_ALT                         0xE6
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_RIGHT_GUI                         0xE7
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_MEDIA_PLAY                        0xE8
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_MEDIA_STOP                        0xE9
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_MEDIA_PREVIOUS_TRACK              0xEA
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_MEDIA_NEXT_TRACK                  0xEB
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_MEDIA_EJECT                       0xEC
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_MEDIA_VOLUME_UP                   0xED
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_MEDIA_VOLUME_DOWN                 0xEE
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_MEDIA_MUTE                        0xEF
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_MEDIA_WWW                         0xF0
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_MEDIA_BACKWARD                    0xF1
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_MEDIA_FORWARD                     0xF2
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_MEDIA_CANCEL                      0xF3
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_MEDIA_SEARCH                      0xF4
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_MEDIA_SLEEP                       0xF8
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_MEDIA_LOCK                        0xF9
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_MEDIA_RELOAD                      0xFA
+		#define HID_KEYBOARD_SC_MEDIA_CALCULATOR                  0xFB
+		//@}
+
+		/** \name Common HID Device Report Descriptors */
+		//@{
+		/** \hideinitializer
+		 *  A list of HID report item array elements that describe a typical HID USB Joystick. The resulting report
+		 *  descriptor is structured according to the following layout:
+		 *
+		 *  \code
+		 *  struct
+		 *  {
+		 *      intA_t X; // Signed X axis value
+		 *      intA_t Y; // Signed Y axis value
+		 *      intA_t Z; // Signed Z axis value
+		 *      uintB_t Buttons; // Pressed buttons bitmask
+		 *  } Joystick_Report;
+		 *  \endcode
+		 *
+		 *  Where \c uintA_t is a type large enough to hold the ranges of the signed \c MinAxisVal and \c MaxAxisVal values,
+		 *  and \c intB_t is a type large enough to hold one bit per button.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] MinAxisVal      Minimum logical axis value (16-bit).
+		 *  \param[in] MaxAxisVal      Maximum logical axis value (16-bit).
+		 *  \param[in] MinPhysicalVal  Minimum physical axis value, for movement resolution calculations (16-bit).
+		 *  \param[in] MaxPhysicalVal  Maximum physical axis value, for movement resolution calculations (16-bit).
+		 *  \param[in] Buttons         Total number of buttons in the device (8-bit).
+		 */
+		#define HID_DESCRIPTOR_JOYSTICK(MinAxisVal, MaxAxisVal, MinPhysicalVal, MaxPhysicalVal, Buttons) \
+			HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x01),                     \
+			HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x04),                          \
+			HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x01),                     \
+				HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x01),                      \
+				HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x00),                 \
+					HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x30),                  \
+					HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x31),                  \
+					HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x32),                  \
+					HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(16, MinAxisVal), \
+					HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(16, MaxAxisVal), \
+					HID_RI_PHYSICAL_MINIMUM(16, MinPhysicalVal), \
+					HID_RI_PHYSICAL_MAXIMUM(16, MaxPhysicalVal), \
+					HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 3),              \
+					HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, (((MinAxisVal >= -128) && (MaxAxisVal <= 127)) ? 8 : 16)), \
+					HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE), \
+				HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0),                   \
+				HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x09),                 \
+				HID_RI_USAGE_MINIMUM(8, 0x01),              \
+				HID_RI_USAGE_MAXIMUM(8, Buttons),           \
+				HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0x00),            \
+				HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 0x01),            \
+				HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x01),                \
+				HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, Buttons),            \
+				HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE), \
+				HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, (Buttons % 8) ? (8 - (Buttons % 8)) : 0), \
+				HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x01),               \
+				HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_CONSTANT),          \
+			HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0)
+
+		/** \hideinitializer
+		 *  A list of HID report item array elements that describe a typical HID USB keyboard. The resulting report descriptor
+		 *  is compatible with \ref USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t when \c MaxKeys is equal to 6. For other values, the report will
+		 *  be structured according to the following layout:
+		 *
+		 *  \code
+		 *  struct
+		 *  {
+		 *      uint8_t Modifier; // Keyboard modifier byte indicating pressed modifier keys (\c HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_* masks)
+		 *      uint8_t Reserved; // Reserved for OEM use, always set to 0.
+		 *      uint8_t KeyCode[MaxKeys]; // Length determined by the number of keys that can be reported
+		 *  } Keyboard_Report;
+		 *  \endcode
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] MaxKeys  Number of simultaneous keys that can be reported at the one time (8-bit).
+		 */
+		#define HID_DESCRIPTOR_KEYBOARD(MaxKeys)            \
+			HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x01),                     \
+			HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x06),                          \
+			HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x01),                     \
+				HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x07),                 \
+				HID_RI_USAGE_MINIMUM(8, 0xE0),              \
+				HID_RI_USAGE_MAXIMUM(8, 0xE7),              \
+				HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0x00),            \
+				HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 0x01),            \
+				HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x01),                \
+				HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x08),               \
+				HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE), \
+				HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x01),               \
+				HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x08),                \
+				HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_CONSTANT),          \
+				HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x08),                 \
+				HID_RI_USAGE_MINIMUM(8, 0x01),              \
+				HID_RI_USAGE_MAXIMUM(8, 0x05),              \
+				HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x05),               \
+				HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x01),                \
+				HID_RI_OUTPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE | HID_IOF_NON_VOLATILE), \
+				HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x01),               \
+				HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x03),                \
+				HID_RI_OUTPUT(8, HID_IOF_CONSTANT),         \
+				HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0x00),            \
+				HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 0xFF),            \
+				HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x07),                 \
+				HID_RI_USAGE_MINIMUM(8, 0x00),              \
+				HID_RI_USAGE_MAXIMUM(8, 0xFF),              \
+				HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, MaxKeys),            \
+				HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x08),                \
+				HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_ARRAY | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE), \
+			HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0)
+
+		/** \hideinitializer
+		 *  A list of HID report item array elements that describe a typical HID USB mouse. The resulting report descriptor
+		 *  is compatible with \ref USB_MouseReport_Data_t if the \c MinAxisVal and \c MaxAxisVal values fit within a \c int8_t range
+		 *  and the number of Buttons is less than 8. For other values, the report is structured according to the following layout:
+		 *
+		 *  \code
+		 *  struct
+		 *  {
+		 *      uintA_t Buttons; // Pressed buttons bitmask
+		 *      intB_t X; // X axis value
+		 *      intB_t Y; // Y axis value
+		 *  } Mouse_Report;
+		 *  \endcode
+		 *
+		 *  Where \c intA_t is a type large enough to hold one bit per button, and \c intB_t is a type large enough to hold the
+		 *  ranges of the signed \c MinAxisVal and \c MaxAxisVal values.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] MinAxisVal      Minimum X/Y logical axis value (16-bit).
+		 *  \param[in] MaxAxisVal      Maximum X/Y logical axis value (16-bit).
+		 *  \param[in] MinPhysicalVal  Minimum X/Y physical axis value, for movement resolution calculations (16-bit).
+		 *  \param[in] MaxPhysicalVal  Maximum X/Y physical axis value, for movement resolution calculations (16-bit).
+		 *  \param[in] Buttons         Total number of buttons in the device (8-bit).
+		 *  \param[in] AbsoluteCoords  Boolean \c true to use absolute X/Y coordinates (e.g. touchscreen).
+		 */
+		#define HID_DESCRIPTOR_MOUSE(MinAxisVal, MaxAxisVal, MinPhysicalVal, MaxPhysicalVal, Buttons, AbsoluteCoords) \
+			HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x01),                     \
+			HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x02),                          \
+			HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x01),                     \
+				HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x01),                      \
+				HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x00),                 \
+					HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x09),             \
+					HID_RI_USAGE_MINIMUM(8, 0x01),          \
+					HID_RI_USAGE_MAXIMUM(8, Buttons),       \
+					HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0x00),        \
+					HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 0x01),        \
+					HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, Buttons),        \
+					HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x01),            \
+					HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE), \
+					HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x01),           \
+					HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, (Buttons % 8) ? (8 - (Buttons % 8)) : 0), \
+					HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_CONSTANT),      \
+					HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x01),             \
+					HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x30),                  \
+					HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x31),                  \
+					HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(16, MinAxisVal), \
+					HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(16, MaxAxisVal), \
+					HID_RI_PHYSICAL_MINIMUM(16, MinPhysicalVal), \
+					HID_RI_PHYSICAL_MAXIMUM(16, MaxPhysicalVal), \
+					HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x02),           \
+					HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, (((MinAxisVal >= -128) && (MaxAxisVal <= 127)) ? 8 : 16)), \
+					HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | (AbsoluteCoords ? HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE : HID_IOF_RELATIVE)), \
+				HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0),                   \
+			HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0)
+
+		/** \hideinitializer
+		 *  A list of HID report item array elements that describe a typical Vendor Defined byte array HID report descriptor,
+		 *  used for transporting arbitrary data between the USB host and device via HID reports. The resulting report should be
+		 *  a \c uint8_t byte array of the specified length in both Device to Host (IN) and Host to Device (OUT) directions.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] VendorPageNum    Vendor Defined HID Usage Page index, ranging from 0x00 to 0xFF.
+		 *  \param[in] CollectionUsage  Vendor Usage for the encompassing report IN and OUT collection, ranging from 0x00 to 0xFF.
+		 *  \param[in] DataINUsage      Vendor Usage for the IN report data, ranging from 0x00 to 0xFF.
+		 *  \param[in] DataOUTUsage     Vendor Usage for the OUT report data, ranging from 0x00 to 0xFF.
+		 *  \param[in] NumBytes         Length of the data IN and OUT reports.
+		 */
+		#define HID_DESCRIPTOR_VENDOR(VendorPageNum, CollectionUsage, DataINUsage, DataOUTUsage, NumBytes) \
+			HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(16, (0xFF00 | VendorPageNum)), \
+			HID_RI_USAGE(8, CollectionUsage),           \
+			HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x01),                 \
+				HID_RI_USAGE(8, DataINUsage),           \
+				HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0x00),        \
+				HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 0xFF),        \
+				HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x08),            \
+				HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, NumBytes),       \
+				HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE), \
+				HID_RI_USAGE(8, DataOUTUsage),          \
+				HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0x00),        \
+				HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 0xFF),        \
+				HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x08),            \
+				HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, NumBytes),       \
+				HID_RI_OUTPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE | HID_IOF_NON_VOLATILE), \
+			HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0)
+		//@}
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Enum for possible Class, Subclass and Protocol values of device and interface descriptors relating to the HID
+		 *  device class.
+		 */
+		enum HID_Descriptor_ClassSubclassProtocol_t
+		{
+			HID_CSCP_HIDClass             = 0x03, /**< Descriptor Class value indicating that the device or interface
+			                                       *   belongs to the HID class.
+			                                       */
+			HID_CSCP_NonBootSubclass      = 0x00, /**< Descriptor Subclass value indicating that the device or interface
+			                                       *   does not implement a HID boot protocol.
+			                                       */
+			HID_CSCP_BootSubclass         = 0x01, /**< Descriptor Subclass value indicating that the device or interface
+			                                       *   implements a HID boot protocol.
+			                                       */
+			HID_CSCP_NonBootProtocol      = 0x00, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device or interface
+			                                       *   does not belong to a HID boot protocol.
+			                                       */
+			HID_CSCP_KeyboardBootProtocol = 0x01, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device or interface
+			                                       *   belongs to the Keyboard HID boot protocol.
+			                                       */
+			HID_CSCP_MouseBootProtocol    = 0x02, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device or interface
+			                                       *   belongs to the Mouse HID boot protocol.
+			                                       */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the HID class specific control requests that can be issued by the USB bus host. */
+		enum HID_ClassRequests_t
+		{
+			HID_REQ_GetReport       = 0x01, /**< HID class-specific Request to get the current HID report from the device. */
+			HID_REQ_GetIdle         = 0x02, /**< HID class-specific Request to get the current device idle count. */
+			HID_REQ_GetProtocol     = 0x03, /**< HID class-specific Request to get the current HID report protocol mode. */
+			HID_REQ_SetReport       = 0x09, /**< HID class-specific Request to set the current HID report to the device. */
+			HID_REQ_SetIdle         = 0x0A, /**< HID class-specific Request to set the device's idle count. */
+			HID_REQ_SetProtocol     = 0x0B, /**< HID class-specific Request to set the current HID report protocol mode. */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the HID class specific descriptor types. */
+		enum HID_DescriptorTypes_t
+		{
+			HID_DTYPE_HID           = 0x21, /**< Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */
+			HID_DTYPE_Report        = 0x22, /**< Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the different types of HID reports. */
+		enum HID_ReportItemTypes_t
+		{
+			HID_REPORT_ITEM_In      = 0, /**< Indicates that the item is an IN report type. */
+			HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out     = 1, /**< Indicates that the item is an OUT report type. */
+			HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature = 2, /**< Indicates that the item is a FEATURE report type. */
+		};
+
+		/** \brief HID class-specific HID Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for the HID class-specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID
+		 *  specification for details on the structure elements.
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_HID_StdDescriptor_HID_t for the version of this type with standard element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */
+
+			uint16_t                HIDSpec; /**< BCD encoded version that the HID descriptor and device complies to.
+			                                  *
+			                                  *   \see \ref VERSION_BCD() utility macro.
+			                                  */
+			uint8_t                 CountryCode; /**< Country code of the localized device, or zero if universal. */
+
+			uint8_t                 TotalReportDescriptors; /**< Total number of HID report descriptors for the interface. */
+
+			uint8_t                 HIDReportType; /**< Type of HID report, set to \ref HID_DTYPE_Report. */
+			uint16_t                HIDReportLength; /**< Length of the associated HID report descriptor, in bytes. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t;
+
+		/** \brief HID class-specific HID Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for the HID class-specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID
+		 *  specification for details on the structure elements.
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific
+		 *       element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+			uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
+			                           *   given by the specific class.
+			                           */
+
+			uint16_t bcdHID; /**< BCD encoded version that the HID descriptor and device complies to.
+			                  *
+			                  *   \see \ref VERSION_BCD() utility macro.
+			                  */
+			uint8_t  bCountryCode; /**< Country code of the localized device, or zero if universal. */
+
+			uint8_t  bNumDescriptors; /**< Total number of HID report descriptors for the interface. */
+
+			uint8_t  bDescriptorType2; /**< Type of HID report, set to \ref HID_DTYPE_Report. */
+			uint16_t wDescriptorLength; /**< Length of the associated HID report descriptor, in bytes. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_HID_StdDescriptor_HID_t;
+
+		/** \brief Standard HID Boot Protocol Mouse Report.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a standard Boot Protocol Mouse report
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t Button; /**< Button mask for currently pressed buttons in the mouse. */
+			int8_t  X; /**< Current delta X movement of the mouse. */
+			int8_t  Y; /**< Current delta Y movement on the mouse. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_MouseReport_Data_t;
+
+		/** \brief Standard HID Boot Protocol Keyboard Report.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a standard Boot Protocol Keyboard report
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t Modifier; /**< Keyboard modifier byte, indicating pressed modifier keys (a combination of
+			                   *   \c HID_KEYBOARD_MODIFER_* masks).
+			                   */
+			uint8_t Reserved; /**< Reserved for OEM use, always set to 0. */
+			uint8_t KeyCode[6]; /**< Key codes of the currently pressed keys. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t;
+
+		/** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */
+		typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t;
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDParser.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDParser.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d93508f49
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDParser.c
@@ -0,0 +1,389 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_HID_DRIVER
+#include "HIDParser.h"
+
+uint8_t USB_ProcessHIDReport(const uint8_t* ReportData,
+                             uint16_t ReportSize,
+                             HID_ReportInfo_t* const ParserData)
+{
+	HID_StateTable_t      StateTable[HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH];
+	HID_StateTable_t*     CurrStateTable     = &StateTable[0];
+	HID_CollectionPath_t* CurrCollectionPath = NULL;
+	HID_ReportSizeInfo_t* CurrReportIDInfo   = &ParserData->ReportIDSizes[0];
+	uint16_t              UsageList[HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH];
+	uint8_t               UsageListSize      = 0;
+	HID_MinMax_t          UsageMinMax        = {0, 0};
+
+	memset(ParserData,       0x00, sizeof(HID_ReportInfo_t));
+	memset(CurrStateTable,   0x00, sizeof(HID_StateTable_t));
+	memset(CurrReportIDInfo, 0x00, sizeof(HID_ReportSizeInfo_t));
+
+	ParserData->TotalDeviceReports = 1;
+
+	while (ReportSize)
+	{
+		uint8_t  HIDReportItem  = *ReportData;
+		uint32_t ReportItemData;
+
+		ReportData++;
+		ReportSize--;
+
+		switch (HIDReportItem & HID_RI_DATA_SIZE_MASK)
+		{
+			case HID_RI_DATA_BITS_32:
+				ReportItemData  = (((uint32_t)ReportData[3] << 24) | ((uint32_t)ReportData[2] << 16) |
+			                       ((uint16_t)ReportData[1] << 8)  | ReportData[0]);
+				ReportSize     -= 4;
+				ReportData     += 4;
+				break;
+
+			case HID_RI_DATA_BITS_16:
+				ReportItemData  = (((uint16_t)ReportData[1] << 8) | (ReportData[0]));
+				ReportSize     -= 2;
+				ReportData     += 2;
+				break;
+
+			case HID_RI_DATA_BITS_8:
+				ReportItemData  = ReportData[0];
+				ReportSize     -= 1;
+				ReportData     += 1;
+				break;
+
+			default:
+				ReportItemData  = 0;
+				break;
+		}
+
+		switch (HIDReportItem & (HID_RI_TYPE_MASK | HID_RI_TAG_MASK))
+		{
+			case HID_RI_PUSH(0):
+				if (CurrStateTable == &StateTable[HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH - 1])
+				  return HID_PARSE_HIDStackOverflow;
+
+				memcpy((CurrStateTable + 1),
+				       CurrStateTable,
+				       sizeof(HID_ReportItem_t));
+
+				CurrStateTable++;
+				break;
+
+			case HID_RI_POP(0):
+				if (CurrStateTable == &StateTable[0])
+				  return HID_PARSE_HIDStackUnderflow;
+
+				CurrStateTable--;
+				break;
+
+			case HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(0):
+				if ((HIDReportItem & HID_RI_DATA_SIZE_MASK) == HID_RI_DATA_BITS_32)
+				  CurrStateTable->Attributes.Usage.Page = (ReportItemData >> 16);
+
+				CurrStateTable->Attributes.Usage.Page       = ReportItemData;
+				break;
+
+			case HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(0):
+				CurrStateTable->Attributes.Logical.Minimum  = ReportItemData;
+				break;
+
+			case HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(0):
+				CurrStateTable->Attributes.Logical.Maximum  = ReportItemData;
+				break;
+
+			case HID_RI_PHYSICAL_MINIMUM(0):
+				CurrStateTable->Attributes.Physical.Minimum = ReportItemData;
+				break;
+
+			case HID_RI_PHYSICAL_MAXIMUM(0):
+				CurrStateTable->Attributes.Physical.Maximum = ReportItemData;
+				break;
+
+			case HID_RI_UNIT_EXPONENT(0):
+				CurrStateTable->Attributes.Unit.Exponent    = ReportItemData;
+				break;
+
+			case HID_RI_UNIT(0):
+				CurrStateTable->Attributes.Unit.Type        = ReportItemData;
+				break;
+
+			case HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(0):
+				CurrStateTable->Attributes.BitSize          = ReportItemData;
+				break;
+
+			case HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(0):
+				CurrStateTable->ReportCount                 = ReportItemData;
+				break;
+
+			case HID_RI_REPORT_ID(0):
+				CurrStateTable->ReportID                    = ReportItemData;
+
+				if (ParserData->UsingReportIDs)
+				{
+					CurrReportIDInfo = NULL;
+
+					for (uint8_t i = 0; i < ParserData->TotalDeviceReports; i++)
+					{
+						if (ParserData->ReportIDSizes[i].ReportID == CurrStateTable->ReportID)
+						{
+							CurrReportIDInfo = &ParserData->ReportIDSizes[i];
+							break;
+						}
+					}
+
+					if (CurrReportIDInfo == NULL)
+					{
+						if (ParserData->TotalDeviceReports == HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS)
+						  return HID_PARSE_InsufficientReportIDItems;
+
+						CurrReportIDInfo = &ParserData->ReportIDSizes[ParserData->TotalDeviceReports++];
+						memset(CurrReportIDInfo, 0x00, sizeof(HID_ReportSizeInfo_t));
+					}
+				}
+
+				ParserData->UsingReportIDs = true;
+
+				CurrReportIDInfo->ReportID = CurrStateTable->ReportID;
+				break;
+
+			case HID_RI_USAGE(0):
+				if (UsageListSize == HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH)
+				  return HID_PARSE_UsageListOverflow;
+
+				UsageList[UsageListSize++] = ReportItemData;
+				break;
+
+			case HID_RI_USAGE_MINIMUM(0):
+				UsageMinMax.Minimum = ReportItemData;
+				break;
+
+			case HID_RI_USAGE_MAXIMUM(0):
+				UsageMinMax.Maximum = ReportItemData;
+				break;
+
+			case HID_RI_COLLECTION(0):
+				if (CurrCollectionPath == NULL)
+				{
+					CurrCollectionPath = &ParserData->CollectionPaths[0];
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					HID_CollectionPath_t* ParentCollectionPath = CurrCollectionPath;
+
+					CurrCollectionPath = &ParserData->CollectionPaths[1];
+
+					while (CurrCollectionPath->Parent != NULL)
+					{
+						if (CurrCollectionPath == &ParserData->CollectionPaths[HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS - 1])
+						  return HID_PARSE_InsufficientCollectionPaths;
+
+						CurrCollectionPath++;
+					}
+
+					CurrCollectionPath->Parent = ParentCollectionPath;
+				}
+
+				CurrCollectionPath->Type       = ReportItemData;
+				CurrCollectionPath->Usage.Page = CurrStateTable->Attributes.Usage.Page;
+
+				if (UsageListSize)
+				{
+					CurrCollectionPath->Usage.Usage = UsageList[0];
+
+					for (uint8_t i = 1; i < UsageListSize; i++)
+					  UsageList[i - 1] = UsageList[i];
+
+					UsageListSize--;
+				}
+				else if (UsageMinMax.Minimum <= UsageMinMax.Maximum)
+				{
+					CurrCollectionPath->Usage.Usage = UsageMinMax.Minimum++;
+				}
+
+				break;
+
+			case HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0):
+				if (CurrCollectionPath == NULL)
+				  return HID_PARSE_UnexpectedEndCollection;
+
+				CurrCollectionPath = CurrCollectionPath->Parent;
+				break;
+
+			case HID_RI_INPUT(0):
+			case HID_RI_OUTPUT(0):
+			case HID_RI_FEATURE(0):
+				for (uint8_t ReportItemNum = 0; ReportItemNum < CurrStateTable->ReportCount; ReportItemNum++)
+				{
+					HID_ReportItem_t NewReportItem;
+
+					memcpy(&NewReportItem.Attributes,
+					       &CurrStateTable->Attributes,
+					       sizeof(HID_ReportItem_Attributes_t));
+
+					NewReportItem.ItemFlags      = ReportItemData;
+					NewReportItem.CollectionPath = CurrCollectionPath;
+					NewReportItem.ReportID       = CurrStateTable->ReportID;
+
+					if (UsageListSize)
+					{
+						NewReportItem.Attributes.Usage.Usage = UsageList[0];
+
+						for (uint8_t i = 1; i < UsageListSize; i++)
+						  UsageList[i - 1] = UsageList[i];
+
+						UsageListSize--;
+					}
+					else if (UsageMinMax.Minimum <= UsageMinMax.Maximum)
+					{
+						NewReportItem.Attributes.Usage.Usage = UsageMinMax.Minimum++;
+					}
+
+					uint8_t ItemTypeTag = (HIDReportItem & (HID_RI_TYPE_MASK | HID_RI_TAG_MASK));
+
+					if (ItemTypeTag == HID_RI_INPUT(0))
+					  NewReportItem.ItemType = HID_REPORT_ITEM_In;
+					else if (ItemTypeTag == HID_RI_OUTPUT(0))
+					  NewReportItem.ItemType = HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out;
+					else
+					  NewReportItem.ItemType = HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature;
+
+					NewReportItem.BitOffset = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[NewReportItem.ItemType];
+
+					CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[NewReportItem.ItemType] += CurrStateTable->Attributes.BitSize;
+
+					ParserData->LargestReportSizeBits = MAX(ParserData->LargestReportSizeBits, CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[NewReportItem.ItemType]);
+
+					if (ParserData->TotalReportItems == HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS)
+					  return HID_PARSE_InsufficientReportItems;
+
+					memcpy(&ParserData->ReportItems[ParserData->TotalReportItems],
+					       &NewReportItem, sizeof(HID_ReportItem_t));
+
+					if (!(ReportItemData & HID_IOF_CONSTANT) && CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(&NewReportItem))
+					  ParserData->TotalReportItems++;
+				}
+
+				break;
+
+			default:
+				break;
+		}
+
+		if ((HIDReportItem & HID_RI_TYPE_MASK) == HID_RI_TYPE_MAIN)
+		{
+			UsageMinMax.Minimum = 0;
+			UsageMinMax.Maximum = 0;
+			UsageListSize       = 0;
+		}
+	}
+
+	if (!(ParserData->TotalReportItems))
+	  return HID_PARSE_NoUnfilteredReportItems;
+
+	return HID_PARSE_Successful;
+}
+
+bool USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(const uint8_t* ReportData,
+                              HID_ReportItem_t* const ReportItem)
+{
+	if (ReportItem == NULL)
+	  return false;
+
+	uint16_t DataBitsRem  = ReportItem->Attributes.BitSize;
+	uint16_t CurrentBit   = ReportItem->BitOffset;
+	uint32_t BitMask      = (1 << 0);
+
+	if (ReportItem->ReportID)
+	{
+		if (ReportItem->ReportID != ReportData[0])
+		  return false;
+
+		ReportData++;
+	}
+
+	ReportItem->PreviousValue = ReportItem->Value;
+	ReportItem->Value = 0;
+
+	while (DataBitsRem--)
+	{
+		if (ReportData[CurrentBit / 8] & (1 << (CurrentBit % 8)))
+		  ReportItem->Value |= BitMask;
+
+		CurrentBit++;
+		BitMask <<= 1;
+	}
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+void USB_SetHIDReportItemInfo(uint8_t* ReportData,
+                              HID_ReportItem_t* const ReportItem)
+{
+	if (ReportItem == NULL)
+	  return;
+
+	uint16_t DataBitsRem  = ReportItem->Attributes.BitSize;
+	uint16_t CurrentBit   = ReportItem->BitOffset;
+	uint32_t BitMask      = (1 << 0);
+
+	if (ReportItem->ReportID)
+	{
+		ReportData[0] = ReportItem->ReportID;
+		ReportData++;
+	}
+
+	ReportItem->PreviousValue = ReportItem->Value;
+
+	while (DataBitsRem--)
+	{
+		if (ReportItem->Value & (1 << (CurrentBit % 8)))
+		  ReportData[CurrentBit / 8] |= BitMask;
+
+		CurrentBit++;
+		BitMask <<= 1;
+	}
+}
+
+uint16_t USB_GetHIDReportSize(HID_ReportInfo_t* const ParserData,
+                              const uint8_t ReportID,
+                              const uint8_t ReportType)
+{
+	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS; i++)
+	{
+		uint16_t ReportSizeBits = ParserData->ReportIDSizes[i].ReportSizeBits[ReportType];
+
+		if (ParserData->ReportIDSizes[i].ReportID == ReportID)
+		  return (ReportSizeBits / 8) + ((ReportSizeBits % 8) ? 1 : 0);
+	}
+
+	return 0;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDParser.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDParser.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1f84ef44f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDParser.h
@@ -0,0 +1,364 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB Human Interface Device (HID) Class report descriptor parser.
+ *
+ *  This file allows for the easy parsing of complex HID report descriptors, which describes the data that
+ *  a HID device transmits to the host. It also provides an easy API for extracting and processing the data
+ *  elements inside a HID report sent from an attached HID device.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USB
+ *  \defgroup Group_HIDParser HID Report Parser
+ *  \brief USB Human Interface Device (HID) Class report descriptor parser.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_HIDParser_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_HIDParser_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Human Interface Device (HID) class report descriptor parser. This module implements a parser than is
+ *  capable of processing a complete HID report descriptor, and outputting a flat structure containing the
+ *  contents of the report in an a more friendly format. The parsed data may then be further processed and used
+ *  within an application to process sent and received HID reports to and from an attached HID device.
+ *
+ *  A HID report descriptor consists of a set of HID report items, which describe the function and layout
+ *  of data exchanged between a HID device and a host, including both the physical encoding of each item
+ *  (such as a button, key press or joystick axis) in the sent and received data packets - known as "reports" -
+ *  as well as other information about each item such as the usages, data range, physical location and other
+ *  characteristics. In this way a HID device can retain a high degree of flexibility in its capabilities, as it
+ *  is not forced to comply with a given report layout or feature-set.
+ *
+ *  This module also contains routines for the processing of data in an actual HID report, using the parsed report
+ *  descriptor data as a guide for the encoding.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __HIDPARSER_H__
+#define __HIDPARSER_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+		#include "HIDReportData.h"
+		#include "HIDClassCommon.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#if !defined(HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			/** Constant indicating the maximum stack depth of the state table. A larger state table
+			 *  allows for more PUSH/POP report items to be nested, but consumes more memory. By default
+			 *  this is set to 2 levels (allowing non-nested PUSH items) but this can be overridden by
+			 *  defining \c HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH to another value in the user project makefile, passing the
+			 *  define to the compiler using the -D compiler switch.
+			 */
+			#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH    2
+		#endif
+
+		#if !defined(HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			/** Constant indicating the maximum stack depth of the usage table. A larger usage table
+			 *  allows for more USAGE items to be indicated sequentially for REPORT COUNT entries of more than
+			 *  one, but requires more stack space. By default this is set to 8 levels (allowing for a report
+			 *  item with a count of 8) but this can be overridden by defining \c HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH to another
+			 *  value in the user project makefile, passing the define to the compiler using the -D compiler
+			 *  switch.
+			 */
+			#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH         8
+		#endif
+
+		#if !defined(HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			/** Constant indicating the maximum number of COLLECTION items (nested or unnested) that can be
+			 *  processed in the report item descriptor. A large value allows for more COLLECTION items to be
+			 *  processed, but consumes more memory. By default this is set to 10 collections, but this can be
+			 *  overridden by defining \c HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS to another value in the user project makefile, passing
+			 *  the define to the compiler using the -D compiler switch.
+			 */
+			#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS           10
+		#endif
+
+		#if !defined(HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			/** Constant indicating the maximum number of report items (IN, OUT or FEATURE) that can be processed
+			 *  in the report item descriptor and stored in the user HID Report Info structure. A large value allows
+			 *  for more report items to be stored, but consumes more memory. By default this is set to 20 items,
+			 *  but this can be overridden by defining \c HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS to another value in the user project
+			 *  makefile, and passing the define to the compiler using the -D compiler switch.
+			 */
+			#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS           20
+		#endif
+
+		#if !defined(HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			/** Constant indicating the maximum number of unique report IDs that can be processed in the report item
+			 *  descriptor for the report size information array in the user HID Report Info structure. A large value
+			 *  allows for more report ID report sizes to be stored, but consumes more memory. By default this is set
+			 *  to 10 items, but this can be overridden by defining \c HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS to another value in the user project
+			 *  makefile, and passing the define to the compiler using the -D compiler switch. Note that IN, OUT and FEATURE
+			 *  items sharing the same report ID consume only one size item in the array.
+			 */
+			#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS            10
+		#endif
+
+		/** Returns the value a given HID report item (once its value has been fetched via \ref USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo())
+		 *  left-aligned to the given data type. This allows for signed data to be interpreted correctly, by shifting the data
+		 *  leftwards until the data's sign bit is in the correct position.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] ReportItem  HID Report Item whose retrieved value is to be aligned.
+		 *  \param[in] Type        Data type to align the HID report item's value to.
+		 *
+		 *  \return Left-aligned data of the given report item's pre-retrieved value for the given datatype.
+		 */
+		#define HID_ALIGN_DATA(ReportItem, Type) ((Type)(ReportItem->Value << ((8 * sizeof(Type)) - ReportItem->Attributes.BitSize)))
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible error codes in the return value of the \ref USB_ProcessHIDReport() function. */
+			enum HID_Parse_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				HID_PARSE_Successful                  = 0, /**< Successful parse of the HID report descriptor, no error. */
+				HID_PARSE_HIDStackOverflow            = 1, /**< More than \ref HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH nested PUSHes in the report. */
+				HID_PARSE_HIDStackUnderflow           = 2, /**< A POP was found when the state table stack was empty. */
+				HID_PARSE_InsufficientReportItems     = 3, /**< More than \ref HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS report items in the report. */
+				HID_PARSE_UnexpectedEndCollection     = 4, /**< An END COLLECTION item found without matching COLLECTION item. */
+				HID_PARSE_InsufficientCollectionPaths = 5, /**< More than \ref HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS collections in the report. */
+				HID_PARSE_UsageListOverflow           = 6, /**< More than \ref HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH usages listed in a row. */
+				HID_PARSE_InsufficientReportIDItems   = 7, /**< More than \ref HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS report IDs in the device. */
+				HID_PARSE_NoUnfilteredReportItems     = 8, /**< All report items from the device were filtered by the filtering callback routine. */
+			};
+
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** \brief HID Parser Report Item Min/Max Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for an attribute with both minimum and maximum values (e.g. Logical Min/Max).
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint32_t Minimum; /**< Minimum value for the attribute. */
+				uint32_t Maximum; /**< Maximum value for the attribute. */
+			} HID_MinMax_t;
+
+			/** \brief HID Parser Report Item Unit Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for the Unit attributes of a report item.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint32_t Type;     /**< Unit type (refer to HID specifications for details). */
+				uint8_t  Exponent; /**< Unit exponent (refer to HID specifications for details). */
+			} HID_Unit_t;
+
+			/** \brief HID Parser Report Item Usage Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for the Usage attributes of a report item.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint16_t Page;  /**< Usage page of the report item. */
+				uint16_t Usage; /**< Usage of the report item. */
+			} HID_Usage_t;
+
+			/** \brief HID Parser Report Item Collection Path Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a COLLECTION object. Contains the collection attributes and a reference to the
+			 *  parent collection if any.
+			 */
+			typedef struct HID_CollectionPath
+			{
+				uint8_t                    Type;   /**< Collection type (e.g. "Generic Desktop"). */
+				HID_Usage_t                Usage;  /**< Collection usage. */
+				struct HID_CollectionPath* Parent; /**< Reference to parent collection, or \c NULL if root collection. */
+			} HID_CollectionPath_t;
+
+			/** \brief HID Parser Report Item Attributes Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for all the data attributes of a report item, except flags.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint8_t      BitSize;  /**< Size in bits of the report item's data. */
+
+				HID_Usage_t  Usage;    /**< Usage of the report item. */
+				HID_Unit_t   Unit;     /**< Unit type and exponent of the report item. */
+				HID_MinMax_t Logical;  /**< Logical minimum and maximum of the report item. */
+				HID_MinMax_t Physical; /**< Physical minimum and maximum of the report item. */
+			} HID_ReportItem_Attributes_t;
+
+			/** \brief HID Parser Report Item Details Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a report item (IN, OUT or FEATURE) layout attributes and other details.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint16_t                    BitOffset;      /**< Bit offset in the IN, OUT or FEATURE report of the item. */
+				uint8_t                     ItemType;       /**< Report item type, a value in \ref HID_ReportItemTypes_t. */
+				uint16_t                    ItemFlags;      /**< Item data flags, a mask of \c HID_IOF_* constants. */
+				uint8_t                     ReportID;       /**< Report ID this item belongs to, or 0x00 if device has only one report */
+				HID_CollectionPath_t*       CollectionPath; /**< Collection path of the item. */
+
+				HID_ReportItem_Attributes_t Attributes;     /**< Report item attributes. */
+
+				uint32_t                    Value;          /**< Current value of the report item - use \ref HID_ALIGN_DATA() when processing
+				                                             *   a retrieved value so that it is aligned to a specific type.
+				                                             */
+				uint32_t                    PreviousValue;  /**< Previous value of the report item. */
+			} HID_ReportItem_t;
+
+			/** \brief HID Parser Report Size Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a report item size information structure, to retain the size of a device's reports by ID.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint8_t  ReportID; /**< Report ID of the report within the HID interface. */
+				uint16_t ReportSizeBits[3]; /**< Total number of bits in each report type for the given Report ID,
+				                             *   indexed by the \ref HID_ReportItemTypes_t enum.
+				                             */
+			} HID_ReportSizeInfo_t;
+
+			/** \brief HID Parser State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a complete processed HID report, including all report item data and collections.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint8_t              TotalReportItems; /**< Total number of report items stored in the \c ReportItems array. */
+				HID_ReportItem_t     ReportItems[HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS]; /**< Report items array, including all IN, OUT
+			                                                            *   and FEATURE items.
+				                                                        */
+				HID_CollectionPath_t CollectionPaths[HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS]; /**< All collection items, referenced
+				                                                            *   by the report items.
+				                                                            */
+				uint8_t              TotalDeviceReports; /**< Number of reports within the HID interface */
+				HID_ReportSizeInfo_t ReportIDSizes[HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS]; /**< Report sizes for each report in the interface */
+				uint16_t             LargestReportSizeBits; /**< Largest report that the attached device will generate, in bits */
+				bool                 UsingReportIDs; /**< Indicates if the device has at least one REPORT ID
+				                                      *   element in its HID report descriptor.
+				                                      */
+			} HID_ReportInfo_t;
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Function to process a given HID report returned from an attached device, and store it into a given
+			 *  \ref HID_ReportInfo_t structure.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in]  ReportData  Buffer containing the device's HID report table.
+			 *  \param[in]  ReportSize  Size in bytes of the HID report table.
+			 *  \param[out] ParserData  Pointer to a \ref HID_ReportInfo_t instance for the parser output.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value in the \ref HID_Parse_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t USB_ProcessHIDReport(const uint8_t* ReportData,
+			                             uint16_t ReportSize,
+			                             HID_ReportInfo_t* const ParserData) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+			/** Extracts the given report item's value out of the given HID report and places it into the Value
+			 *  member of the report item's \ref HID_ReportItem_t structure.
+			 *
+			 *  When called on a report with an item that exists in that report, this copies the report item's \c Value
+			 *  to its \c PreviousValue element for easy checking to see if an item's value has changed before processing
+			 *  a report. If the given item does not exist in the report, the function does not modify the report item's
+			 *  data.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in]     ReportData  Buffer containing an IN or FEATURE report from an attached device.
+			 *  \param[in,out] ReportItem  Pointer to the report item of interest in a \ref HID_ReportInfo_t ReportItem array.
+			 *
+			 *  \returns Boolean \c true if the item to retrieve was located in the given report, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(const uint8_t* ReportData,
+			                              HID_ReportItem_t* const ReportItem) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Retrieves the given report item's value out of the \c Value member of the report item's
+			 *  \ref HID_ReportItem_t structure and places it into the correct position in the HID report
+			 *  buffer. The report buffer is assumed to have the appropriate bits cleared before calling
+			 *  this function (i.e., the buffer should be explicitly cleared before report values are added).
+			 *
+			 *  When called, this copies the report item's \c Value element to its \c PreviousValue element for easy
+			 *  checking to see if an item's value has changed before sending a report.
+			 *
+			 *  If the device has multiple HID reports, the first byte in the report is set to the report ID of the given item.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] ReportData  Buffer holding the current OUT or FEATURE report data.
+			 *  \param[in]  ReportItem  Pointer to the report item of interest in a \ref HID_ReportInfo_t ReportItem array.
+			 */
+			void USB_SetHIDReportItemInfo(uint8_t* ReportData,
+			                              HID_ReportItem_t* const ReportItem) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Retrieves the size of a given HID report in bytes from its Report ID.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] ParserData  Pointer to a \ref HID_ReportInfo_t instance containing the parser output.
+			 *  \param[in] ReportID    Report ID of the report whose size is to be determined.
+			 *  \param[in] ReportType  Type of the report whose size is to be determined, a value from the
+			 *                         \ref HID_ReportItemTypes_t enum.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Size of the report in bytes, or \c 0 if the report does not exist.
+			 */
+			uint16_t USB_GetHIDReportSize(HID_ReportInfo_t* const ParserData,
+			                              const uint8_t ReportID,
+			                              const uint8_t ReportType) ATTR_CONST ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Callback routine for the HID Report Parser. This callback <b>must</b> be implemented by the user code when
+			 *  the parser is used, to determine what report IN, OUT and FEATURE item's information is stored into the user
+			 *  \ref HID_ReportInfo_t structure. This can be used to filter only those items the application will be using, so that
+			 *  no RAM is wasted storing the attributes for report items which will never be referenced by the application.
+			 *
+			 *  Report item pointers passed to this callback function may be cached by the user application for later use
+			 *  when processing report items. This provides faster report processing in the user application than would
+			 *  a search of the entire parsed report item table for each received or sent report.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] CurrentItem  Pointer to the current report item for user checking.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the item should be stored into the \ref HID_ReportInfo_t structure, \c false if
+			 *          it should be ignored.
+			 */
+			bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* const CurrentItem);
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				 HID_ReportItem_Attributes_t Attributes;
+				 uint8_t                     ReportCount;
+				 uint8_t                     ReportID;
+			} HID_StateTable_t;
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDReportData.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDReportData.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..df4302cc7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDReportData.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Constants for HID report item attributes.
+ *
+ *  HID report item constants for report item attributes. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  details on each flag's meaning when applied to an IN, OUT or FEATURE item.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_HIDParser
+ *  \defgroup Group_HIDReportItemConst HID Report Descriptor Item Constants
+ *
+ *  General HID constant definitions for HID Report Descriptor elements.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __HIDREPORTDATA_H__
+#define __HIDREPORTDATA_H__
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define HID_RI_DATA_SIZE_MASK                   0x03
+			#define HID_RI_TYPE_MASK                        0x0C
+			#define HID_RI_TAG_MASK                         0xF0
+
+			#define HID_RI_TYPE_MAIN                        0x00
+			#define HID_RI_TYPE_GLOBAL                      0x04
+			#define HID_RI_TYPE_LOCAL                       0x08
+
+			#define HID_RI_DATA_BITS_0                      0x00
+			#define HID_RI_DATA_BITS_8                      0x01
+			#define HID_RI_DATA_BITS_16                     0x02
+			#define HID_RI_DATA_BITS_32                     0x03
+			#define HID_RI_DATA_BITS(DataBits)              CONCAT_EXPANDED(HID_RI_DATA_BITS_, DataBits)
+
+			#define _HID_RI_ENCODE_0(Data)
+			#define _HID_RI_ENCODE_8(Data)                  , (Data & 0xFF)
+			#define _HID_RI_ENCODE_16(Data)                 _HID_RI_ENCODE_8(Data)  _HID_RI_ENCODE_8(Data >> 8)
+			#define _HID_RI_ENCODE_32(Data)                 _HID_RI_ENCODE_16(Data) _HID_RI_ENCODE_16(Data >> 16)
+			#define _HID_RI_ENCODE(DataBits, ...)           CONCAT_EXPANDED(_HID_RI_ENCODE_, DataBits(__VA_ARGS__))
+
+			#define _HID_RI_ENTRY(Type, Tag, DataBits, ...) (Type | Tag | HID_RI_DATA_BITS(DataBits)) _HID_RI_ENCODE(DataBits, (__VA_ARGS__))
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+		/** \name HID Input, Output and Feature Report Descriptor Item Flags */
+		//@{
+			#define HID_IOF_CONSTANT                        (1 << 0)
+			#define HID_IOF_DATA                            (0 << 0)
+			#define HID_IOF_VARIABLE                        (1 << 1)
+			#define HID_IOF_ARRAY                           (0 << 1)
+			#define HID_IOF_RELATIVE                        (1 << 2)
+			#define HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE                        (0 << 2)
+			#define HID_IOF_WRAP                            (1 << 3)
+			#define HID_IOF_NO_WRAP                         (0 << 3)
+			#define HID_IOF_NON_LINEAR                      (1 << 4)
+			#define HID_IOF_LINEAR                          (0 << 4)
+			#define HID_IOF_NO_PREFERRED_STATE              (1 << 5)
+			#define HID_IOF_PREFERRED_STATE                 (0 << 5)
+			#define HID_IOF_NULLSTATE                       (1 << 6)
+			#define HID_IOF_NO_NULL_POSITION                (0 << 6)
+			#define HID_IOF_VOLATILE                        (1 << 7)
+			#define HID_IOF_NON_VOLATILE                    (0 << 7)
+			#define HID_IOF_BUFFERED_BYTES                  (1 << 8)
+			#define HID_IOF_BITFIELD                        (0 << 8)
+		//@}
+
+		/** \name HID Report Descriptor Item Macros */
+		//@{
+			#define HID_RI_INPUT(DataBits, ...)             _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_MAIN  , 0x80, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)
+			#define HID_RI_OUTPUT(DataBits, ...)            _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_MAIN  , 0x90, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)
+			#define HID_RI_COLLECTION(DataBits, ...)        _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_MAIN  , 0xA0, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)
+			#define HID_RI_FEATURE(DataBits, ...)           _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_MAIN  , 0xB0, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)
+			#define HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(DataBits, ...)    _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_MAIN  , 0xC0, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)
+			#define HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(DataBits, ...)        _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_GLOBAL, 0x00, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)
+			#define HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(DataBits, ...)   _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_GLOBAL, 0x10, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)
+			#define HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(DataBits, ...)   _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_GLOBAL, 0x20, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)
+			#define HID_RI_PHYSICAL_MINIMUM(DataBits, ...)  _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_GLOBAL, 0x30, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)
+			#define HID_RI_PHYSICAL_MAXIMUM(DataBits, ...)  _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_GLOBAL, 0x40, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)
+			#define HID_RI_UNIT_EXPONENT(DataBits, ...)     _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_GLOBAL, 0x50, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)
+			#define HID_RI_UNIT(DataBits, ...)              _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_GLOBAL, 0x60, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)
+			#define HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(DataBits, ...)       _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_GLOBAL, 0x70, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)
+			#define HID_RI_REPORT_ID(DataBits, ...)         _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_GLOBAL, 0x80, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)
+			#define HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(DataBits, ...)      _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_GLOBAL, 0x90, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)
+			#define HID_RI_PUSH(DataBits, ...)              _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_GLOBAL, 0xA0, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)
+			#define HID_RI_POP(DataBits, ...)               _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_GLOBAL, 0xB0, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)
+			#define HID_RI_USAGE(DataBits, ...)             _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_LOCAL , 0x00, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)
+			#define HID_RI_USAGE_MINIMUM(DataBits, ...)     _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_LOCAL , 0x10, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)
+			#define HID_RI_USAGE_MAXIMUM(DataBits, ...)     _HID_RI_ENTRY(HID_RI_TYPE_LOCAL , 0x20, DataBits, __VA_ARGS__)
+		//@}
+
+/** @} */
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/MIDIClassCommon.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/MIDIClassCommon.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b6f603455
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/MIDIClassCommon.h
@@ -0,0 +1,363 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB MIDI Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB MIDI Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassMIDI
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassMIDICommon  Common Class Definitions
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassMIDICommon_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB
+ *  MIDI Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MIDI_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+#define _MIDI_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_DRIVER
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../Core/StdDescriptors.h"
+		#include "AudioClassCommon.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** \name MIDI Command Values
+		 *  See http://www.midi.org/techspecs/midimessages.php for more information.
+		 */
+		//@{
+		/** MIDI command for System Exclusive (SysEx) single event that has one byte of data total. */
+		#define MIDI_COMMAND_SYSEX_1BYTE           MIDI_COMMAND_SYSEX_END_1BYTE
+
+		/** MIDI command for System Exclusive (SysEx) single event that has two bytes of data total. */
+		#define MIDI_COMMAND_SYSEX_2BYTE           0x20
+
+		/** MIDI command for System Exclusive (SysEx) single event that has three bytes of data total. */
+		#define MIDI_COMMAND_SYSEX_3BYTE           0x30
+
+		/** MIDI command for System Exclusive (SysEx) stream event that has at least four bytes of data total. */
+		#define MIDI_COMMAND_SYSEX_START_3BYTE     0x40
+
+		/** MIDI command for System Exclusive (SysEx) stream event terminator with one remaining data byte. */
+		#define MIDI_COMMAND_SYSEX_END_1BYTE       0x50
+
+		/** MIDI command for System Exclusive (SysEx) stream event terminator with two remaining data bytes. */
+		#define MIDI_COMMAND_SYSEX_END_2BYTE       0x60
+
+		/** MIDI command for System Exclusive (SysEx) stream event terminator with three remaining data bytes. */
+		#define MIDI_COMMAND_SYSEX_END_3BYTE       0x70
+
+		/** MIDI command for a note off (deactivation) event. */
+		#define MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF              0x80
+
+		/** MIDI command for a note on (activation) event. */
+		#define MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON               0x90
+
+		/** MIDI command for a note pressure change event. */
+		#define MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_PRESSURE         0xA0
+
+		/** MIDI command for a control change event. */
+		#define MIDI_COMMAND_CONTROL_CHANGE        0xB0
+
+		/** MIDI command for a control change event. */
+		#define MIDI_COMMAND_PROGRAM_CHANGE        0xC0
+
+		/** MIDI command for a channel pressure change event. */
+		#define MIDI_COMMAND_CHANNEL_PRESSURE      0xD0
+
+		/** MIDI command for a pitch change event. */
+		#define MIDI_COMMAND_PITCH_WHEEL_CHANGE    0xE0
+		//@}
+
+		/** Standard key press velocity value used for all note events. */
+		#define MIDI_STANDARD_VELOCITY             64
+
+		/** Convenience macro. MIDI channels are numbered from 1-10 (natural numbers) however the logical channel
+		 *  addresses are zero-indexed. This converts a natural MIDI channel number into the logical channel address.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] channel  MIDI channel number to address.
+		 *
+		 *  \return Constructed MIDI channel ID.
+		 */
+		#define MIDI_CHANNEL(channel)              ((channel) - 1)
+
+		/** Constructs a MIDI event ID from a given MIDI command and a virtual MIDI cable index. This can then be
+		 *  used to create and decode \ref MIDI_EventPacket_t MIDI event packets.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] virtualcable  Index of the virtual MIDI cable the event relates to
+		 *  \param[in] command       MIDI command to send through the virtual MIDI cable
+		 *
+		 *  \return Constructed MIDI event ID.
+		 */
+		#define MIDI_EVENT(virtualcable, command)  (((virtualcable) << 4) | ((command) >> 4))
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible MIDI jack types in a MIDI device jack descriptor. */
+		enum MIDI_JackTypes_t
+		{
+			MIDI_JACKTYPE_Embedded = 0x01, /**< MIDI class descriptor jack type value for an embedded (logical) MIDI input or output jack. */
+			MIDI_JACKTYPE_External = 0x02, /**< MIDI class descriptor jack type value for an external (physical) MIDI input or output jack. */
+		};
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** \brief MIDI class-specific Streaming Interface Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific MIDI streaming interface descriptor. This indicates to the host
+		 *  how MIDI the specification compliance of the device and the total length of the Audio class-specific descriptors.
+		 *  See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_MIDI_StdDescriptor_AudioInterface_AS_t for the version of this type with standard element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */
+			uint8_t                 Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors. */
+
+			uint16_t                AudioSpecification; /**< Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported Audio Class
+			                                             *   specification version.
+			                                             *
+			                                             *   \see \ref VERSION_BCD() utility macro.
+			                                             */
+			uint16_t                TotalLength; /**< Total length of the Audio class-specific descriptors, including this descriptor. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_MIDI_Descriptor_AudioInterface_AS_t;
+
+		/** \brief MIDI class-specific Streaming Interface Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific MIDI streaming interface descriptor. This indicates to the host
+		 *  how MIDI the specification compliance of the device and the total length of the Audio class-specific descriptors.
+		 *  See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_MIDI_Descriptor_AudioInterface_AS_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific
+		 *       element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+			uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
+			                           *   given by the specific class.
+			                           */
+
+			uint8_t  bDescriptorSubtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors. */
+
+			uint16_t bcdMSC; /**< Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported MIDI Class specification version.
+			                  *
+			                  *   \see \ref VERSION_BCD() utility macro.
+			                  */
+			uint16_t wTotalLength; /**< Total length of the Audio class-specific descriptors, including this descriptor. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_MIDI_StdDescriptor_AudioInterface_AS_t;
+
+		/** \brief MIDI class-specific Input Jack Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific MIDI IN jack. This gives information to the host on a MIDI input, either
+		 *  a physical input jack, or a logical jack (receiving input data internally, or from the host via an endpoint).
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_MIDI_StdDescriptor_InputJack_t for the version of this type with standard element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */
+			uint8_t                 Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors. */
+
+			uint8_t                 JackType; /**< Type of jack, one of the \c JACKTYPE_* mask values. */
+			uint8_t                 JackID; /**< ID value of this jack - must be a unique value within the device. */
+
+			uint8_t                 JackStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t;
+
+		/** \brief MIDI class-specific Input Jack Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific MIDI IN jack. This gives information to the host on a MIDI input, either
+		 *  a physical input jack, or a logical jack (receiving input data internally, or from the host via an endpoint).
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific
+		 *       element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+			uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
+			                           *   given by the specific class.
+			                           */
+
+			uint8_t  bDescriptorSubtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors. */
+
+			uint8_t  bJackType; /**< Type of jack, one of the \c JACKTYPE_* mask values. */
+			uint8_t  bJackID; /**< ID value of this jack - must be a unique value within the device. */
+
+			uint8_t  iJack; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_MIDI_StdDescriptor_InputJack_t;
+
+		/** \brief MIDI class-specific Output Jack Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific MIDI OUT jack. This gives information to the host on a MIDI output, either
+		 *  a physical output jack, or a logical jack (sending output data internally, or to the host via an endpoint).
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_MIDI_StdDescriptor_OutputJack_t for the version of this type with standard element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors. */
+
+			uint8_t                   JackType; /**< Type of jack, one of the \c JACKTYPE_* mask values. */
+			uint8_t                   JackID; /**< ID value of this jack - must be a unique value within the device. */
+
+			uint8_t                   NumberOfPins; /**< Number of output channels within the jack, either physical or logical. */
+			uint8_t                   SourceJackID[1]; /**< ID of each output pin's source data jack. */
+			uint8_t                   SourcePinID[1]; /**< Pin number in the input jack of each output pin's source data. */
+
+			uint8_t                   JackStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t;
+
+		/** \brief MIDI class-specific Output Jack Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific MIDI OUT jack. This gives information to the host on a MIDI output, either
+		 *  a physical output jack, or a logical jack (sending output data internally, or to the host via an endpoint).
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific
+		 *       element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+			uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
+			                           *   given by the specific class.
+			                           */
+
+			uint8_t  bDescriptorSubtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors. */
+
+			uint8_t  bJackType; /**< Type of jack, one of the \c JACKTYPE_* mask values. */
+			uint8_t  bJackID; /**< ID value of this jack - must be a unique value within the device. */
+
+			uint8_t  bNrInputPins; /**< Number of output channels within the jack, either physical or logical. */
+			uint8_t  baSourceID[1]; /**< ID of each output pin's source data jack. */
+			uint8_t  baSourcePin[1]; /**< Pin number in the input jack of each output pin's source data. */
+
+			uint8_t  iJack; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_MIDI_StdDescriptor_OutputJack_t;
+
+		/** \brief Audio class-specific Jack Endpoint Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific extended MIDI jack endpoint descriptor. This contains extra information
+		 *  on the usage of MIDI endpoints used to stream MIDI events in and out of the USB Audio device, and follows an Audio
+		 *  class-specific extended MIDI endpoint descriptor. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_MIDI_StdDescriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t for the version of this type with standard element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t   Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length. */
+			uint8_t                   Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors. */
+
+			uint8_t                   TotalEmbeddedJacks; /**< Total number of jacks inside this endpoint. */
+			uint8_t                   AssociatedJackID[1]; /**< IDs of each jack inside the endpoint. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t;
+
+		/** \brief Audio class-specific Jack Endpoint Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for an Audio class-specific extended MIDI jack endpoint descriptor. This contains extra information
+		 *  on the usage of MIDI endpoints used to stream MIDI events in and out of the USB Audio device, and follows an Audio
+		 *  class-specific extended MIDI endpoint descriptor. See the USB Audio specification for more details.
+		 *
+		 *  \see \ref USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific
+		 *       element names.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+			uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
+			                           *   given by the specific class.
+			                           */
+
+			uint8_t  bDescriptorSubtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class-specific descriptors. */
+
+			uint8_t  bNumEmbMIDIJack; /**< Total number of jacks inside this endpoint. */
+			uint8_t  bAssocJackID[1]; /**< IDs of each jack inside the endpoint. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_MIDI_StdDescriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t;
+
+		/** \brief MIDI Class Driver Event Packet.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a USB MIDI event packet, used to encapsulate sent and received MIDI messages from a USB MIDI interface.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  Event; /**< MIDI event type, constructed with the \ref MIDI_EVENT() macro. */
+
+			uint8_t  Data1; /**< First byte of data in the MIDI event. */
+			uint8_t  Data2; /**< Second byte of data in the MIDI event. */
+			uint8_t  Data3; /**< Third byte of data in the MIDI event. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED MIDI_EventPacket_t;
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/MassStorageClassCommon.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/MassStorageClassCommon.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8a12f31b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/MassStorageClassCommon.h
@@ -0,0 +1,368 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassMS
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassMSCommon  Common Class Definitions
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassMSCommon_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB
+ *  Mass Storage Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MS_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+#define _MS_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../Core/StdDescriptors.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MS_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Magic signature for a Command Block Wrapper used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only transport protocol. */
+		#define MS_CBW_SIGNATURE                               0x43425355UL
+
+		/** Magic signature for a Command Status Wrapper used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only transport protocol. */
+		#define MS_CSW_SIGNATURE                               0x53425355UL
+
+		/** Mask for a Command Block Wrapper's flags attribute to specify a command with data sent from host-to-device. */
+		#define MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_OUT                        (0 << 7)
+
+		/** Mask for a Command Block Wrapper's flags attribute to specify a command with data sent from device-to-host. */
+		#define MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_IN                         (1 << 7)
+
+		/** \name SCSI Commands*/
+		//@{
+		/** SCSI Command Code for an INQUIRY command. */
+		#define SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY                               0x12
+
+		/** SCSI Command Code for a REQUEST SENSE command. */
+		#define SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE                         0x03
+
+		/** SCSI Command Code for a TEST UNIT READY command. */
+		#define SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY                       0x00
+
+		/** SCSI Command Code for a READ CAPACITY (10) command. */
+		#define SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10                      0x25
+
+		/** SCSI Command Code for a START STOP UNIT command. */
+		#define SCSI_CMD_START_STOP_UNIT                       0x1B
+
+		/** SCSI Command Code for a SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. */
+		#define SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC                       0x1D
+
+		/** SCSI Command Code for a PREVENT ALLOW MEDIUM REMOVAL command. */
+		#define SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL          0x1E
+
+		/** SCSI Command Code for a WRITE (10) command. */
+		#define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10                              0x2A
+
+		/** SCSI Command Code for a READ (10) command. */
+		#define SCSI_CMD_READ_10                               0x28
+
+		/** SCSI Command Code for a WRITE (6) command. */
+		#define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_6                               0x0A
+
+		/** SCSI Command Code for a READ (6) command. */
+		#define SCSI_CMD_READ_6                                0x08
+
+		/** SCSI Command Code for a VERIFY (10) command. */
+		#define SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10                             0x2F
+
+		/** SCSI Command Code for a MODE SENSE (6) command. */
+		#define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6                          0x1A
+
+		/** SCSI Command Code for a MODE SENSE (10) command. */
+		#define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_10                         0x5A
+		//@}
+
+		/** \name SCSI Sense Key Values */
+		//@{
+		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate no error has occurred. */
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD                            0x00
+
+		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that the device has recovered from an error. */
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_RECOVERED_ERROR                 0x01
+
+		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that the device is not ready for a new command. */
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_NOT_READY                       0x02
+
+		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate an error whilst accessing the medium. */
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MEDIUM_ERROR                    0x03
+
+		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate a hardware error has occurred. */
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR                  0x04
+
+		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that an illegal request has been issued. */
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST                 0x05
+
+		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that the unit requires attention from the host to indicate
+		 *  a reset event, medium removal or other condition.
+		 */
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_UNIT_ATTENTION                  0x06
+
+		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that a write attempt on a protected block has been made. */
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT                    0x07
+
+		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate an error while trying to write to a write-once medium. */
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_BLANK_CHECK                     0x08
+
+		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate a vendor specific error has occurred. */
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VENDOR_SPECIFIC                 0x09
+
+		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that an EXTENDED COPY command has aborted due to an error. */
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_COPY_ABORTED                    0x0A
+
+		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that the device has aborted the issued command. */
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ABORTED_COMMAND                 0x0B
+
+		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate an attempt to write past the end of a partition has been made. */
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VOLUME_OVERFLOW                 0x0D
+
+		/** SCSI Sense Code to indicate that the source data did not match the data read from the medium. */
+		#define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MISCOMPARE                      0x0E
+		//@}
+
+		/** \name SCSI Additional Sense Codes */
+		//@{
+		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate no additional sense information is available. */
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION          0x00
+
+		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate that the logical unit (LUN) addressed is not ready. */
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_UNIT_NOT_READY             0x04
+
+		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate an invalid field was encountered while processing the issued command. */
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB               0x24
+
+		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate that a medium that was previously indicated as not ready has now
+		 *  become ready for use.
+		 */
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_NOT_READY_TO_READY_CHANGE          0x28
+
+		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate that an attempt to write to a protected area was made. */
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED                    0x27
+
+		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate an error whilst formatting the device medium. */
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_FORMAT_ERROR                       0x31
+
+		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate an invalid command was issued. */
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND                    0x20
+
+		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate a write to a block out outside of the medium's range was issued. */
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE 0x21
+
+		/** SCSI Additional Sense Code to indicate that no removable medium is inserted into the device. */
+		#define SCSI_ASENSE_MEDIUM_NOT_PRESENT                 0x3A
+		//@}
+
+		/** \name SCSI Additional Sense Key Code Qualifiers */
+		//@{
+		/** SCSI Additional Sense Qualifier Code to indicate no additional sense qualifier information is available. */
+		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER                      0x00
+
+		/** SCSI Additional Sense Qualifier Code to indicate that a medium format command failed to complete. */
+		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_FORMAT_COMMAND_FAILED             0x01
+
+		/** SCSI Additional Sense Qualifier Code to indicate that an initializing command must be issued before the issued
+		 *  command can be executed.
+		 */
+		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_INITIALIZING_COMMAND_REQUIRED     0x02
+
+		/** SCSI Additional Sense Qualifier Code to indicate that an operation is currently in progress. */
+		#define SCSI_ASENSEQ_OPERATION_IN_PROGRESS             0x07
+		//@}
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for possible Class, Subclass and Protocol values of device and interface descriptors relating to the Mass
+		 *  Storage device class.
+		 */
+		enum MS_Descriptor_ClassSubclassProtocol_t
+		{
+			MS_CSCP_MassStorageClass          = 0x08, /**< Descriptor Class value indicating that the device or interface
+			                                           *   belongs to the Mass Storage class.
+			                                           */
+			MS_CSCP_SCSITransparentSubclass   = 0x06, /**< Descriptor Subclass value indicating that the device or interface
+			                                           *   belongs to the SCSI Transparent Command Set subclass of the Mass
+			                                           *   storage class.
+			                                           */
+			MS_CSCP_BulkOnlyTransportProtocol = 0x50, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device or interface
+			                                           *   belongs to the Bulk Only Transport protocol of the Mass Storage class.
+			                                           */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the Mass Storage class specific control requests that can be issued by the USB bus host. */
+		enum MS_ClassRequests_t
+		{
+			MS_REQ_GetMaxLUN                  = 0xFE, /**< Mass Storage class-specific request to retrieve the total number of Logical
+			                                           *   Units (drives) in the SCSI device.
+			                                           */
+			MS_REQ_MassStorageReset           = 0xFF, /**< Mass Storage class-specific request to reset the Mass Storage interface,
+			                                           *   ready for the next command.
+		                                               */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the possible command status wrapper return status codes. */
+		enum MS_CommandStatusCodes_t
+		{
+			MS_SCSI_COMMAND_Pass              = 0, /**< Command completed with no error */
+			MS_SCSI_COMMAND_Fail              = 1, /**< Command failed to complete - host may check the exact error via a
+			                                        *   SCSI REQUEST SENSE command.
+			                                        */
+			MS_SCSI_COMMAND_PhaseError        = 2, /**< Command failed due to being invalid in the current phase. */
+		};
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** \brief Mass Storage Class Command Block Wrapper.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a Command Block Wrapper, used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only Transport protocol.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t Signature; /**< Command block signature, must be \ref MS_CBW_SIGNATURE to indicate a valid Command Block. */
+			uint32_t Tag; /**< Unique command ID value, to associate a command block wrapper with its command status wrapper. */
+			uint32_t DataTransferLength; /**< Length of the optional data portion of the issued command, in bytes. */
+			uint8_t  Flags; /**< Command block flags, indicating command data direction. */
+			uint8_t  LUN; /**< Logical Unit number this command is issued to. */
+			uint8_t  SCSICommandLength; /**< Length of the issued SCSI command within the SCSI command data array. */
+			uint8_t  SCSICommandData[16]; /**< Issued SCSI command in the Command Block. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t;
+
+		/** \brief Mass Storage Class Command Status Wrapper.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a Command Status Wrapper, used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only Transport protocol.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t Signature; /**< Status block signature, must be \ref MS_CSW_SIGNATURE to indicate a valid Command Status. */
+			uint32_t Tag; /**< Unique command ID value, to associate a command block wrapper with its command status wrapper. */
+			uint32_t DataTransferResidue; /**< Number of bytes of data not processed in the SCSI command. */
+			uint8_t  Status; /**< Status code of the issued command - a value from the \ref MS_CommandStatusCodes_t enum. */
+		} ATTR_PACKED MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t;
+
+		/** \brief Mass Storage Class SCSI Sense Structure
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a SCSI Sense structure. Structures of this type are filled out by the
+		 *  device via the \ref MS_Host_RequestSense() function, indicating the current sense data of the
+		 *  device (giving explicit error codes for the last issued command). For details of the
+		 *  structure contents, refer to the SCSI specifications.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  ResponseCode;
+
+			uint8_t  SegmentNumber;
+
+			unsigned SenseKey            : 4;
+			unsigned Reserved            : 1;
+			unsigned ILI                 : 1;
+			unsigned EOM                 : 1;
+			unsigned FileMark            : 1;
+
+			uint8_t  Information[4];
+			uint8_t  AdditionalLength;
+			uint8_t  CmdSpecificInformation[4];
+			uint8_t  AdditionalSenseCode;
+			uint8_t  AdditionalSenseQualifier;
+			uint8_t  FieldReplaceableUnitCode;
+			uint8_t  SenseKeySpecific[3];
+		} ATTR_PACKED SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t;
+
+		/** \brief Mass Storage Class SCSI Inquiry Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a SCSI Inquiry structure. Structures of this type are filled out by the
+		 *  device via the \ref MS_Host_GetInquiryData() function, retrieving the attached device's
+		 *  information.
+		 *
+		 *  For details of the structure contents, refer to the SCSI specifications.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			unsigned DeviceType          : 5;
+			unsigned PeripheralQualifier : 3;
+
+			unsigned Reserved            : 7;
+			unsigned Removable           : 1;
+
+			uint8_t  Version;
+
+			unsigned ResponseDataFormat  : 4;
+			unsigned Reserved2           : 1;
+			unsigned NormACA             : 1;
+			unsigned TrmTsk              : 1;
+			unsigned AERC                : 1;
+
+			uint8_t  AdditionalLength;
+			uint8_t  Reserved3[2];
+
+			unsigned SoftReset           : 1;
+			unsigned CmdQue              : 1;
+			unsigned Reserved4           : 1;
+			unsigned Linked              : 1;
+			unsigned Sync                : 1;
+			unsigned WideBus16Bit        : 1;
+			unsigned WideBus32Bit        : 1;
+			unsigned RelAddr             : 1;
+
+			uint8_t  VendorID[8];
+			uint8_t  ProductID[16];
+			uint8_t  RevisionID[4];
+		} ATTR_PACKED SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t;
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/PrinterClassCommon.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/PrinterClassCommon.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1edd1dd0e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/PrinterClassCommon.h
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Printer Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Printer Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassPrinter
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassPrinterCommon  Common Class Definitions
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassPrinterCommon_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB
+ *  Printer Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _PRINTER_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+#define _PRINTER_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../Core/StdDescriptors.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_PRINTER_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** \name Virtual Printer Status Line Masks */
+		//@{
+		/** Port status mask for a printer device, indicating that an error has *not* occurred. */
+		#define PRNT_PORTSTATUS_NOTERROR    (1 << 3)
+
+		/** Port status mask for a printer device, indicating that the device is currently selected. */
+		#define PRNT_PORTSTATUS_SELECT      (1 << 4)
+
+		/** Port status mask for a printer device, indicating that the device is currently out of paper. */
+		#define PRNT_PORTSTATUS_PAPEREMPTY  (1 << 5)
+		//@}
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for possible Class, Subclass and Protocol values of device and interface descriptors relating to the Printer
+		 *  device class.
+		 */
+		enum PRNT_Descriptor_ClassSubclassProtocol_t
+		{
+			PRNT_CSCP_PrinterClass          = 0x07, /**< Descriptor Class value indicating that the device or interface
+			                                         *   belongs to the Printer class.
+			                                         */
+			PRNT_CSCP_PrinterSubclass       = 0x01, /**< Descriptor Subclass value indicating that the device or interface
+			                                         *   belongs to the Printer subclass.
+			                                         */
+			PRNT_CSCP_BidirectionalProtocol = 0x02, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device or interface
+			                                         *   belongs to the Bidirectional protocol of the Printer class.
+			                                         */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the Printer class specific control requests that can be issued by the USB bus host. */
+		enum PRNT_ClassRequests_t
+		{
+			PRNT_REQ_GetDeviceID            = 0x00, /**< Printer class-specific request to retrieve the Unicode ID
+			                                         *   string of the device, containing the device's name, manufacturer
+			                                         *   and supported printer languages.
+			                                         */
+			PRNT_REQ_GetPortStatus          = 0x01, /**< Printer class-specific request to get the current status of the
+			                                         *   virtual printer port, for device selection and ready states.
+			                                         */
+			PRNT_REQ_SoftReset              = 0x02, /**< Printer class-specific request to reset the device, ready for new
+			                                         *   printer commands.
+			                                         */
+		};
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/RNDISClassCommon.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/RNDISClassCommon.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..640745efe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/RNDISClassCommon.h
@@ -0,0 +1,411 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB RNDIS Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB RNDIS Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassRNDIS
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassRNDISCommon  Common Class Definitions
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassRNDISCommon_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB
+ *  RNDIS Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _RNDIS_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+#define _RNDIS_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DRIVER
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../Core/StdDescriptors.h"
+		#include "CDCClassCommon.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Additional error code for RNDIS functions when a device returns a logical command failure. */
+		#define RNDIS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED        0x80
+
+		/** Implemented RNDIS Version Major. */
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MAJOR             0x01
+
+		/** Implemented RNDIS Version Minor. */
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MINOR             0x00
+
+		/** \name RNDIS Message Values */
+		//@{
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MSG                0x00000001UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG            0x00000002UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_HALT_MSG                  0x00000003UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG                 0x00000004UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG                   0x00000005UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_MSG                 0x00000006UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_INDICATE_STATUS_MSG       0x00000007UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG             0x00000008UL
+		//@}
+
+		/** \name RNDIS Response Values */
+		//@{
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT          0x80000002UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_CMPLT               0x80000004UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_SET_CMPLT                 0x80000005UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_CMPLT               0x80000006UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT           0x80000008UL
+		//@}
+
+		/** \name RNDIS Status Values */
+		//@{
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS            0x00000000UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_FAILURE            0xC0000001UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_INVALID_DATA       0xC0010015UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED      0xC00000BBUL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_MEDIA_CONNECT      0x4001000BUL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_MEDIA_DISCONNECT   0x4001000CUL
+		//@}
+
+		/** \name RNDIS Media States */
+		//@{
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_CONNECTED     0x00000000UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_DISCONNECTED  0x00000001UL
+		//@}
+
+		/** \name RNDIS Media Types */
+		//@{
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3              0x00000000UL
+		//@}
+
+		/** \name RNDIS Connection Types */
+		//@{
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTIONLESS	      0x00000001UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTION_ORIENTED    0x00000002UL
+		//@}
+
+		/** \name RNDIS Packet Types */
+		//@{
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_DIRECTED           0x00000001UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MULTICAST          0x00000002UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_ALL_MULTICAST      0x00000004UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_BROADCAST          0x00000008UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_SOURCE_ROUTING     0x00000010UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_PROMISCUOUS        0x00000020UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_SMT                0x00000040UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_ALL_LOCAL          0x00000080UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_GROUP              0x00001000UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_ALL_FUNCTIONAL     0x00002000UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_FUNCTIONAL         0x00004000UL
+		#define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MAC_FRAME          0x00008000UL
+		//@}
+
+		/** \name RNDIS OID Values */
+		//@{
+		#define OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST                0x00010101UL
+		#define OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS               0x00010102UL
+		#define OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED               0x00010103UL
+		#define OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE                  0x00010104UL
+		#define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE            0x00010106UL
+		#define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE            0x00010111UL
+		#define OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED                    0x00010107UL
+		#define OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE           0x0001010AUL
+		#define OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE            0x0001010BUL
+		#define OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID                     0x0001010CUL
+		#define OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION            0x0001010DUL
+		#define OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER         0x0001010EUL
+		#define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE            0x00010111UL
+		#define OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS          0x00010114UL
+		#define OID_GEN_PHYSICAL_MEDIUM               0x00010202UL
+		#define OID_GEN_XMIT_OK                       0x00020101UL
+		#define OID_GEN_RCV_OK                        0x00020102UL
+		#define OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR                    0x00020103UL
+		#define OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR                     0x00020104UL
+		#define OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER                 0x00020105UL
+		#define OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS           0x01010101UL
+		#define OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS             0x01010102UL
+		#define OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST              0x01010103UL
+		#define OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE           0x01010104UL
+		#define OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT         0x01020101UL
+		#define OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION          0x01020102UL
+		#define OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS        0x01020103UL
+		//@}
+
+		/** Maximum size in bytes of an Ethernet frame according to the Ethernet standard. */
+		#define ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX               1500
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the RNDIS class specific control requests that can be issued by the USB bus host. */
+		enum RNDIS_ClassRequests_t
+		{
+			RNDIS_REQ_SendEncapsulatedCommand = 0x00, /**< RNDIS request to issue a host-to-device NDIS command. */
+			RNDIS_REQ_GetEncapsulatedResponse = 0x01, /**< RNDIS request to issue a device-to-host NDIS response. */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the possible NDIS adapter states. */
+		enum RNDIS_States_t
+		{
+			RNDIS_Uninitialized    = 0, /**< Adapter currently uninitialized. */
+			RNDIS_Initialized      = 1, /**< Adapter currently initialized but not ready for data transfers. */
+			RNDIS_Data_Initialized = 2, /**< Adapter currently initialized and ready for data transfers. */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the RNDIS class specific notification requests that can be issued by a RNDIS device to a host. */
+		enum RNDIS_ClassNotifications_t
+		{
+			RNDIS_NOTIF_ResponseAvailable = 0x01, /**< Notification request value for a RNDIS Response Available notification. */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the NDIS hardware states. */
+		enum NDIS_Hardware_Status_t
+		{
+			NDIS_HardwareStatus_Ready, /**< Hardware Ready to accept commands from the host. */
+			NDIS_HardwareStatus_Initializing, /**< Hardware busy initializing. */
+			NDIS_HardwareStatus_Reset, /**< Hardware reset. */
+			NDIS_HardwareStatus_Closing, /**< Hardware currently closing. */
+			NDIS_HardwareStatus_NotReady /**< Hardware not ready to accept commands from the host. */
+		};
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** \brief MAC Address Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a physical MAC address of a device on a network.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t Octets[6]; /**< Individual bytes of a MAC address */
+		} ATTR_PACKED MAC_Address_t;
+
+		/** \brief RNDIS Common Message Header Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a RNDIS message header, sent before RNDIS messages.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType; /**< RNDIS message type, a \c REMOTE_NDIS_*_MSG constant */
+			uint32_t MessageLength; /**< Total length of the RNDIS message, in bytes */
+		} ATTR_PACKED RNDIS_Message_Header_t;
+
+		/** \brief RNDIS Message Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a RNDIS packet message, used to encapsulate Ethernet packets sent to and from the adapter.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t DataOffset;
+			uint32_t DataLength;
+			uint32_t OOBDataOffset;
+			uint32_t OOBDataLength;
+			uint32_t NumOOBDataElements;
+			uint32_t PerPacketInfoOffset;
+			uint32_t PerPacketInfoLength;
+			uint32_t VcHandle;
+			uint32_t Reserved;
+		} ATTR_PACKED RNDIS_Packet_Message_t;
+
+		/** \brief RNDIS Initialization Message Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a RNDIS Initialize command message.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+
+			uint32_t MajorVersion;
+			uint32_t MinorVersion;
+			uint32_t MaxTransferSize;
+		} ATTR_PACKED RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t;
+
+		/** \brief RNDIS Initialize Complete Message Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a RNDIS Initialize Complete response message.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+			uint32_t Status;
+
+			uint32_t MajorVersion;
+			uint32_t MinorVersion;
+			uint32_t DeviceFlags;
+			uint32_t Medium;
+			uint32_t MaxPacketsPerTransfer;
+			uint32_t MaxTransferSize;
+			uint32_t PacketAlignmentFactor;
+			uint32_t AFListOffset;
+			uint32_t AFListSize;
+		} ATTR_PACKED RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t;
+
+		/** \brief RNDIS Keep Alive Message Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a RNDIS Keep Alive command message.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+		} ATTR_PACKED RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t;
+
+		/** \brief RNDIS Keep Alive Complete Message Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a RNDIS Keep Alive Complete response message.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+			uint32_t Status;
+		} ATTR_PACKED RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t;
+
+		/** \brief RNDIS Reset Complete Message Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a RNDIS Reset Complete response message.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t Status;
+
+			uint32_t AddressingReset;
+		} ATTR_PACKED RNDIS_Reset_Complete_t;
+
+		/** \brief RNDIS OID Property Set Message Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a RNDIS OID Property Set command message.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+
+			uint32_t Oid;
+			uint32_t InformationBufferLength;
+			uint32_t InformationBufferOffset;
+			uint32_t DeviceVcHandle;
+		} ATTR_PACKED RNDIS_Set_Message_t;
+
+		/** \brief RNDIS OID Property Set Complete Message Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a RNDIS OID Property Set Complete response message.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+			uint32_t Status;
+		} ATTR_PACKED RNDIS_Set_Complete_t;
+
+		/** \brief RNDIS OID Property Query Message Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a RNDIS OID Property Query command message.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+
+			uint32_t Oid;
+			uint32_t InformationBufferLength;
+			uint32_t InformationBufferOffset;
+			uint32_t DeviceVcHandle;
+		} ATTR_PACKED RNDIS_Query_Message_t;
+
+		/** \brief RNDIS OID Property Query Complete Message Structure.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a RNDIS OID Property Query Complete response message.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t MessageType;
+			uint32_t MessageLength;
+			uint32_t RequestId;
+			uint32_t Status;
+
+			uint32_t InformationBufferLength;
+			uint32_t InformationBufferOffset;
+		} ATTR_PACKED RNDIS_Query_Complete_t;
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/StillImageClassCommon.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/StillImageClassCommon.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..09a9eab35
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/StillImageClassCommon.h
@@ -0,0 +1,161 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Still Image Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Common definitions and declarations for the library USB Still Image Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassSI
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassSICommon  Common Class Definitions
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassSICommon_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Constants, Types and Enum definitions that are common to both Device and Host modes for the USB
+ *  Still Image Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _SI_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+#define _SI_CLASS_COMMON_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../Core/StdDescriptors.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_SI_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Length in bytes of a given Unicode string's character length.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Chars  Total number of Unicode characters in the string.
+		 *
+		 *  \return Number of bytes of the given unicode string.
+		 */
+		#define UNICODE_STRING_LENGTH(Chars)  ((Chars) << 1)
+
+		/** Used in the DataLength field of a PIMA container, to give the total container size in bytes for
+		 *  a command container.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Params  Number of parameters which are to be sent in the \c Param field of the container.
+		 */
+		#define PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(Params)     ((sizeof(PIMA_Container_t) - 12) + ((Params) * sizeof(uint32_t)))
+
+		/** Used in the DataLength field of a PIMA container, to give the total container size in bytes for
+		 *  a data container.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] DataLen  Length in bytes of the data in the container.
+		 */
+		#define PIMA_DATA_SIZE(DataLen)       ((sizeof(PIMA_Container_t) - 12) + (DataLen))
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible PIMA contains types. */
+		enum PIMA_Container_Types_t
+		{
+			PIMA_CONTAINER_Undefined     = 0, /**< Undefined container type. */
+			PIMA_CONTAINER_CommandBlock  = 1, /**< Command Block container type. */
+			PIMA_CONTAINER_DataBlock     = 2, /**< Data Block container type. */
+			PIMA_CONTAINER_ResponseBlock = 3, /**< Response container type. */
+			PIMA_CONTAINER_EventBlock    = 4, /**< Event Block container type. */
+		};
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for possible Class, Subclass and Protocol values of device and interface descriptors relating to the
+		 *  Still Image device class.
+		 */
+		enum SI_Descriptor_ClassSubclassProtocol_t
+		{
+			SI_CSCP_StillImageClass             = 0x06, /**< Descriptor Class value indicating that the device or interface
+			                                             *   belongs to the Still Image class.
+			                                             */
+			SI_CSCP_StillImageSubclass          = 0x01, /**< Descriptor Subclass value indicating that the device or interface
+			                                             *   belongs to the Still Image subclass.
+			                                             */
+			SI_CSCP_BulkOnlyProtocol            = 0x01, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device or interface
+			                                             *   belongs to the Bulk Only Transport protocol of the Still Image class.
+			                                             */
+		};
+
+		/** Enums for the possible status codes of a returned Response Block from an attached PIMA compliant Still Image device. */
+		enum PIMA_ResponseCodes_t
+		{
+			PIMA_RESPONSE_OK                    = 1, /**< Response code indicating no error in the issued command. */
+			PIMA_RESPONSE_GeneralError          = 2, /**< Response code indicating a general error while processing the
+			                                          *  issued command.
+			                                          */
+			PIMA_RESPONSE_SessionNotOpen        = 3, /**< Response code indicating that the sent command requires an open
+			                                          *   session before being issued.
+			                                          */
+			PIMA_RESPONSE_InvalidTransaction    = 4, /**< Response code indicating an invalid transaction occurred. */
+			PIMA_RESPONSE_OperationNotSupported = 5, /**< Response code indicating that the issued command is not supported
+			                                          *   by the attached device.
+			                                          */
+			PIMA_RESPONSE_ParameterNotSupported = 6, /**< Response code indicating that one or more of the issued command's
+			                                          *   parameters are not supported by the device.
+			                                          */
+		};
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** \brief PIMA Still Image Device Command/Response Container.
+		 *
+		 *  Type define for a PIMA container, use to send commands and receive responses to and from an
+		 *  attached Still Image device.
+		 *
+		 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t DataLength; /**< Length of the container and data, in bytes. */
+			uint16_t Type; /**< Container type, a value from the \ref PIMA_Container_Types_t enum. */
+			uint16_t Code; /**< Command, event or response code of the container. */
+			uint32_t TransactionID; /**< Unique container ID to link blocks together. */
+			uint32_t Params[3]; /**< Block parameters to be issued along with the block code (command blocks only). */
+		} ATTR_PACKED PIMA_Container_t;
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/AudioClassDevice.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/AudioClassDevice.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f862ba764
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/AudioClassDevice.c
@@ -0,0 +1,197 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_DRIVER
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_DEVICE_C
+#include "AudioClassDevice.h"
+
+void Audio_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived()))
+	  return;
+
+	if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT) == REQREC_INTERFACE)
+	{
+		uint8_t InterfaceIndex = (USB_ControlRequest.wIndex & 0xFF);
+
+		if ((InterfaceIndex != AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.ControlInterfaceNumber) &&
+		    (InterfaceIndex != AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.StreamingInterfaceNumber))
+		{
+			return;
+		}
+	}
+	else if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT) == REQREC_ENDPOINT)
+	{
+		uint8_t EndpointAddress = (USB_ControlRequest.wIndex & 0xFF);
+
+		if ((EndpointAddress != AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address) &&
+		    (EndpointAddress != AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Address))
+		{
+			return;
+		}
+	}
+
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case REQ_SetInterface:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+
+				AudioInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceEnabled = ((USB_ControlRequest.wValue & 0xFF) != 0);
+				EVENT_Audio_Device_StreamStartStop(AudioInterfaceInfo);
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case AUDIO_REQ_GetStatus:
+			if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) ||
+			    (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT)))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case AUDIO_REQ_SetCurrent:
+		case AUDIO_REQ_SetMinimum:
+		case AUDIO_REQ_SetMaximum:
+		case AUDIO_REQ_SetResolution:
+			if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT) == REQREC_ENDPOINT)
+			{
+				uint8_t EndpointProperty = USB_ControlRequest.bRequest;
+				uint8_t EndpointAddress  = (uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wIndex;
+				uint8_t EndpointControl  = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue >> 8);
+
+				if (CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetEndpointProperty(AudioInterfaceInfo, EndpointProperty, EndpointAddress,
+				                                                 EndpointControl, NULL, NULL))
+				{
+					uint16_t ValueLength = USB_ControlRequest.wLength;
+					uint8_t  Value[ValueLength];
+
+					Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+					Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(Value, ValueLength);
+					Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+					CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetEndpointProperty(AudioInterfaceInfo, EndpointProperty, EndpointAddress,
+					                                             EndpointControl, &ValueLength, Value);
+				}
+			}
+			else if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT) == REQREC_INTERFACE)
+			{
+				uint8_t  Property  = USB_ControlRequest.bRequest;
+				uint8_t  Entity    = (USB_ControlRequest.wIndex >> 8);
+				uint16_t Parameter = USB_ControlRequest.wValue;
+
+				if (CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetInterfaceProperty(AudioInterfaceInfo, Property, Entity,
+				                                                  Parameter, NULL, NULL))
+				{
+					uint16_t ValueLength = USB_ControlRequest.wLength;
+					uint8_t  Value[ValueLength];
+
+					Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+					Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(Value, ValueLength);
+					Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+					CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetInterfaceProperty(AudioInterfaceInfo, Property, Entity,
+				                                                  Parameter, &ValueLength, Value);
+				}
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case AUDIO_REQ_GetCurrent:
+		case AUDIO_REQ_GetMinimum:
+		case AUDIO_REQ_GetMaximum:
+		case AUDIO_REQ_GetResolution:
+			if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT) == REQREC_ENDPOINT)
+			{
+				uint8_t  EndpointProperty = USB_ControlRequest.bRequest;
+				uint8_t  EndpointAddress  = (uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wIndex;
+				uint8_t  EndpointControl  = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue >> 8);
+				uint16_t ValueLength      = USB_ControlRequest.wLength;
+				uint8_t  Value[ValueLength];
+
+				if (CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetEndpointProperty(AudioInterfaceInfo, EndpointProperty, EndpointAddress,
+				                                                 EndpointControl, &ValueLength, Value))
+				{
+					Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+					Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(Value, ValueLength);
+					Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+				}
+			}
+			else if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT) == REQREC_INTERFACE)
+			{
+				uint8_t  Property    = USB_ControlRequest.bRequest;
+				uint8_t  Entity      = (USB_ControlRequest.wIndex >> 8);
+				uint16_t Parameter   = USB_ControlRequest.wValue;
+				uint16_t ValueLength = USB_ControlRequest.wLength;
+				uint8_t  Value[ValueLength];
+
+				if (CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetInterfaceProperty(AudioInterfaceInfo, Property, Entity,
+				                                                  Parameter, &ValueLength, Value))
+				{
+					Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+					Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(Value, ValueLength);
+					Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+				}
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+bool Audio_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	memset(&AudioInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(AudioInterfaceInfo->State));
+
+	AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Type  = EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS;
+	AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Type = EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS;
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(&AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint, 1)))
+	  return false;
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(&AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint, 1)))
+	  return false;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+void Audio_Device_Event_Stub(void)
+{
+
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/AudioClassDevice.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/AudioClassDevice.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6cdf4db70
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/AudioClassDevice.h
@@ -0,0 +1,396 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Device mode driver for the library USB Audio 1.0 Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Device mode driver for the library USB Audio 1.0 Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassAudio
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassAudioDevice Audio 1.0 Class Device Mode Driver
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassAudioDevice_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/AudioClassDevice.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassAudioDevice_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Device Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the Audio 1.0 USB Class driver.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _AUDIO_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
+#define _AUDIO_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "../Common/AudioClassCommon.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** \brief Audio Class Device Mode Configuration and State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made for each Audio interface
+			 *  within the user application, and passed to each of the Audio class driver functions as the
+			 *  \c AudioInterfaceInfo parameter. This stores each Audio interface's configuration and state information.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					uint8_t  ControlInterfaceNumber; /**< Index of the Audio Control interface within the device this
+					                                  *   structure controls.
+					                                  */
+					uint8_t  StreamingInterfaceNumber; /**< Index of the Audio Streaming interface within the device this
+														*   structure controls.
+														*/
+
+					USB_Endpoint_Table_t DataINEndpoint; /**< Data IN endpoint configuration table. */
+					USB_Endpoint_Table_t DataOUTEndpoint; /**< Data OUT endpoint configuration table. */
+				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
+				           */
+				struct
+				{
+					bool InterfaceEnabled; /**< Set and cleared by the class driver to indicate if the host has enabled the streaming endpoints
+					                        *   of the Audio Streaming interface.
+					                        */
+				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				          *   are reset to their defaults when the interface is enumerated.
+				          */
+			} USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t;
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Configures the endpoints of a given Audio interface, ready for use. This should be linked to the library
+			 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged() event so that the endpoints are configured when the configuration containing the
+			 *  given Audio interface is selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the endpoints were successfully configured, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool Audio_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Processes incoming control requests from the host, that are directed to the given Audio class interface. This should be
+			 *  linked to the library \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.
+			 */
+			void Audio_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Audio class driver callback for the setting and retrieval of streaming endpoint properties. This callback must be implemented
+			 *  in the user application to handle property manipulations on streaming audio endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  When the DataLength parameter is NULL, this callback should only indicate whether the specified operation is valid for
+			 *  the given endpoint index, and should return as fast as possible. When non-NULL, this value may be altered for GET operations
+			 *  to indicate the size of the retrieved data.
+			 *
+			 *  \note The length of the retrieved data stored into the Data buffer on GET operations should not exceed the initial value
+			 *        of the \c DataLength parameter.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     EndpointProperty    Property of the endpoint to get or set, a value from \ref Audio_ClassRequests_t.
+			 *  \param[in]     EndpointAddress     Address of the streaming endpoint whose property is being referenced.
+			 *  \param[in]     EndpointControl     Parameter of the endpoint to get or set, a value from \ref Audio_EndpointControls_t.
+			 *  \param[in,out] DataLength          For SET operations, the length of the parameter data to set. For GET operations, the maximum
+			 *                                     length of the retrieved data. When NULL, the function should return whether the given property
+			 *                                     and parameter is valid for the requested endpoint without reading or modifying the Data buffer.
+			 *  \param[in,out] Data                Pointer to a location where the parameter data is stored for SET operations, or where
+			 *                                     the retrieved data is to be stored for GET operations.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the property GET/SET was successful, \c false otherwise
+			 */
+			bool CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetEndpointProperty(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+			                                                  const uint8_t EndpointProperty,
+			                                                  const uint8_t EndpointAddress,
+			                                                  const uint8_t EndpointControl,
+			                                                  uint16_t* const DataLength,
+			                                                  uint8_t* Data) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Audio class driver callback for the setting and retrieval of streaming interface properties. This callback must be implemented
+			 *  in the user application to handle property manipulations on streaming audio interfaces.
+			 *
+			 *  When the DataLength parameter is NULL, this callback should only indicate whether the specified operation is valid for
+			 *  the given entity and should return as fast as possible. When non-NULL, this value may be altered for GET operations
+			 *  to indicate the size of the retrieved data.
+			 *
+			 *  \note The length of the retrieved data stored into the Data buffer on GET operations should not exceed the initial value
+			 *        of the \c DataLength parameter.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     Property            Property of the interface to get or set, a value from \ref Audio_ClassRequests_t.
+			 *  \param[in]     EntityAddress       Address of the audio entity whose property is being referenced.
+			 *  \param[in]     Parameter           Parameter of the entity to get or set, specific to each type of entity (see USB Audio specification).
+			 *  \param[in,out] DataLength          For SET operations, the length of the parameter data to set. For GET operations, the maximum
+			 *                                     length of the retrieved data. When NULL, the function should return whether the given property
+			 *                                     and parameter is valid for the requested endpoint without reading or modifying the Data buffer.
+			 *  \param[in,out] Data                Pointer to a location where the parameter data is stored for SET operations, or where
+			 *                                     the retrieved data is to be stored for GET operations.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the property GET/SET was successful, \c false otherwise
+			 */
+			bool CALLBACK_Audio_Device_GetSetInterfaceProperty(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+			                                                   const uint8_t Property,
+			                                                   const uint8_t EntityAddress,
+			                                                   const uint16_t Parameter,
+			                                                   uint16_t* const DataLength,
+			                                                   uint8_t* Data) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Audio class driver event for an Audio Stream start/stop change. This event fires each time the device receives a stream enable or
+			 *  disable control request from the host, to start and stop the audio stream. The current state of the stream can be determined by the
+			 *  State.InterfaceEnabled value inside the Audio interface structure passed as a parameter.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.
+			 */
+			void EVENT_Audio_Device_StreamStartStop(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo);
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** General management task for a given Audio class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should
+			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.
+			 */
+			static inline void Audio_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+			                                        ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Audio_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				(void)AudioInterfaceInfo;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the given audio interface is ready for a sample to be read from it, and selects the streaming
+			 *  OUT endpoint ready for reading.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
+			 *       the call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the given Audio interface has a sample to be read, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Audio_Device_IsSampleReceived(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+			                                                 ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Audio_Device_IsSampleReceived(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(AudioInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceEnabled))
+				  return false;
+
+				Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Address);
+				return Endpoint_IsOUTReceived();
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the given audio interface is ready to accept the next sample to be written to it, and selects
+			 *  the streaming IN endpoint ready for writing.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
+			 *       the call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the given Audio interface is ready to accept the next sample, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Audio_Device_IsReadyForNextSample(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+			                                                     ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Audio_Device_IsReadyForNextSample(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(AudioInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceEnabled))
+				  return false;
+
+				Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);
+				return Endpoint_IsINReady();
+			}
+
+			/** Reads the next 8-bit audio sample from the current audio interface.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This should be preceded immediately by a call to the \ref Audio_Device_IsSampleReceived() function to ensure
+			 *       that the correct endpoint is selected and ready for data.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return  Signed 8-bit audio sample from the audio interface.
+			 */
+			static inline int8_t Audio_Device_ReadSample8(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+			                                              ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline int8_t Audio_Device_ReadSample8(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				int8_t Sample;
+
+				(void)AudioInterfaceInfo;
+
+				Sample = Endpoint_Read_8();
+
+				if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
+				  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+				return Sample;
+			}
+
+			/** Reads the next 16-bit audio sample from the current audio interface.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This should be preceded immediately by a call to the \ref Audio_Device_IsSampleReceived() function to ensure
+			 *       that the correct endpoint is selected and ready for data.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return  Signed 16-bit audio sample from the audio interface.
+			 */
+			static inline int16_t Audio_Device_ReadSample16(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+			                                                ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline int16_t Audio_Device_ReadSample16(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				int16_t Sample;
+
+				(void)AudioInterfaceInfo;
+
+				Sample = (int16_t)Endpoint_Read_16_LE();
+
+				if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
+				  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+				return Sample;
+			}
+
+			/** Reads the next 24-bit audio sample from the current audio interface.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This should be preceded immediately by a call to the \ref Audio_Device_IsSampleReceived() function to ensure
+			 *       that the correct endpoint is selected and ready for data.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Signed 24-bit audio sample from the audio interface.
+			 */
+			static inline int32_t Audio_Device_ReadSample24(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+			                                                ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline int32_t Audio_Device_ReadSample24(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				int32_t Sample;
+
+				(void)AudioInterfaceInfo;
+
+				Sample = (((uint32_t)Endpoint_Read_8() << 16) | Endpoint_Read_16_LE());
+
+				if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
+				  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+				return Sample;
+			}
+
+			/** Writes the next 8-bit audio sample to the current audio interface.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This should be preceded immediately by a call to the \ref Audio_Device_IsReadyForNextSample() function to
+			 *       ensure that the correct endpoint is selected and ready for data.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     Sample              Signed 8-bit audio sample.
+			 */
+			static inline void Audio_Device_WriteSample8(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+			                                             const int8_t Sample) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Audio_Device_WriteSample8(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+			                                             const int8_t Sample)
+			{
+				Endpoint_Write_8(Sample);
+
+				if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Size)
+				  Endpoint_ClearIN();
+			}
+
+			/** Writes the next 16-bit audio sample to the current audio interface.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This should be preceded immediately by a call to the \ref Audio_Device_IsReadyForNextSample() function to
+			 *       ensure that the correct endpoint is selected and ready for data.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     Sample              Signed 16-bit audio sample.
+			 */
+			static inline void Audio_Device_WriteSample16(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+			                                              const int16_t Sample) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Audio_Device_WriteSample16(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+			                                              const int16_t Sample)
+			{
+				Endpoint_Write_16_LE(Sample);
+
+				if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Size)
+				  Endpoint_ClearIN();
+			}
+
+			/** Writes the next 24-bit audio sample to the current audio interface.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This should be preceded immediately by a call to the \ref Audio_Device_IsReadyForNextSample() function to
+			 *       ensure that the correct endpoint is selected and ready for data.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     Sample              Signed 24-bit audio sample.
+			 */
+			static inline void Audio_Device_WriteSample24(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+			                                              const int32_t Sample) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Audio_Device_WriteSample24(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+			                                              const int32_t Sample)
+			{
+				Endpoint_Write_16_LE(Sample);
+				Endpoint_Write_8(Sample >> 16);
+
+				if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Size)
+				  Endpoint_ClearIN();
+			}
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_DEVICE_C)
+				void Audio_Device_Event_Stub(void) ATTR_CONST;
+
+				void EVENT_Audio_Device_StreamStartStop(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+				                                        ATTR_WEAK ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALIAS(Audio_Device_Event_Stub);
+			#endif
+
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDCClassDevice.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDCClassDevice.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f4e74cf90
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDCClassDevice.c
@@ -0,0 +1,341 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DRIVER
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DEVICE_C
+#include "CDCClassDevice.h"
+
+void CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived()))
+	  return;
+
+	if (USB_ControlRequest.wIndex != CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.ControlInterfaceNumber)
+	  return;
+
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case CDC_REQ_GetLineEncoding:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()));
+
+				Endpoint_Write_32_LE(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS);
+				Endpoint_Write_8(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.CharFormat);
+				Endpoint_Write_8(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.ParityType);
+				Endpoint_Write_8(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.DataBits);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case CDC_REQ_SetLineEncoding:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+				{
+					if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+					  return;
+				}
+
+				CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS = Endpoint_Read_32_LE();
+				CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.CharFormat  = Endpoint_Read_8();
+				CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.ParityType  = Endpoint_Read_8();
+				CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.DataBits    = Endpoint_Read_8();
+
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+
+				EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(CDCInterfaceInfo);
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case CDC_REQ_SetControlLineState:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+
+				CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.HostToDevice = USB_ControlRequest.wValue;
+
+				EVENT_CDC_Device_ControLineStateChanged(CDCInterfaceInfo);
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case CDC_REQ_SendBreak:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+
+				EVENT_CDC_Device_BreakSent(CDCInterfaceInfo, (uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue);
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+bool CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	memset(&CDCInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(CDCInterfaceInfo->State));
+
+	CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Type       = EP_TYPE_BULK;
+	CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Type      = EP_TYPE_BULK;
+	CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationEndpoint.Type = EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT;
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(&CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint, 1)))
+	  return false;
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(&CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint, 1)))
+	  return false;
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(&CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationEndpoint, 1)))
+	  return false;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+void CDC_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS))
+	  return;
+
+	#if !defined(NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH)
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);
+
+	if (Endpoint_IsINReady())
+	  CDC_Device_Flush(CDCInterfaceInfo);
+	#endif
+}
+
+uint8_t CDC_Device_SendString(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,
+                              const char* const String)
+{
+	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS))
+	  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);
+	return Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(String, strlen(String), NULL);
+}
+
+uint8_t CDC_Device_SendData(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,
+                            const void* const Buffer,
+                            const uint16_t Length)
+{
+	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS))
+	  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);
+	return Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, Length, NULL);
+}
+
+uint8_t CDC_Device_SendByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,
+                            const uint8_t Data)
+{
+	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS))
+	  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	{
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+		uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+		if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()) != ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(Data);
+	return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t CDC_Device_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS))
+	  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
+	  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;
+
+	bool BankFull = !(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed());
+
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	if (BankFull)
+	{
+		if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()) != ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+	}
+
+	return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;
+}
+
+uint16_t CDC_Device_BytesReceived(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS))
+	  return 0;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Address);
+
+	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+	{
+		if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
+		{
+			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+			return 0;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			return Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint();
+		}
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		return 0;
+	}
+}
+
+int16_t CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS))
+	  return -1;
+
+	int16_t ReceivedByte = -1;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Address);
+
+	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+	{
+		if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())
+		  ReceivedByte = Endpoint_Read_8();
+
+		if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
+		  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	}
+
+	return ReceivedByte;
+}
+
+void CDC_Device_SendControlLineStateChange(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS))
+	  return;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationEndpoint.Address);
+
+	USB_Request_Header_t Notification = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = CDC_NOTIF_SerialState,
+			.wValue        = CPU_TO_LE16(0),
+			.wIndex        = CPU_TO_LE16(0),
+			.wLength       = CPU_TO_LE16(sizeof(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost)),
+		};
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&Notification, sizeof(USB_Request_Header_t), NULL);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost,
+	                         sizeof(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost),
+	                         NULL);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+#if defined(FDEV_SETUP_STREAM)
+void CDC_Device_CreateStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,
+                             FILE* const Stream)
+{
+	*Stream = (FILE)FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(CDC_Device_putchar, CDC_Device_getchar, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);
+	fdev_set_udata(Stream, CDCInterfaceInfo);
+}
+
+void CDC_Device_CreateBlockingStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,
+                                     FILE* const Stream)
+{
+	*Stream = (FILE)FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(CDC_Device_putchar, CDC_Device_getchar_Blocking, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);
+	fdev_set_udata(Stream, CDCInterfaceInfo);
+}
+
+static int CDC_Device_putchar(char c,
+                              FILE* Stream)
+{
+	return CDC_Device_SendByte((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream), c) ? _FDEV_ERR : 0;
+}
+
+static int CDC_Device_getchar(FILE* Stream)
+{
+	int16_t ReceivedByte = CDC_Device_ReceiveByte((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream));
+
+	if (ReceivedByte < 0)
+	  return _FDEV_EOF;
+
+	return ReceivedByte;
+}
+
+static int CDC_Device_getchar_Blocking(FILE* Stream)
+{
+	int16_t ReceivedByte;
+
+	while ((ReceivedByte = CDC_Device_ReceiveByte((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream))) < 0)
+	{
+		if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return _FDEV_EOF;
+
+		CDC_Device_USBTask((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream));
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+
+	return ReceivedByte;
+}
+#endif
+
+void CDC_Device_Event_Stub(void)
+{
+
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDCClassDevice.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDCClassDevice.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..05c0fdddb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDCClassDevice.h
@@ -0,0 +1,352 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Device mode driver for the library USB CDC Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Device mode driver for the library USB CDC Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassCDC
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassCDCDevice CDC Class Device Mode Driver
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassCDCDevice_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDCClassDevice.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassCDCDevice_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Device Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the CDC USB Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note There are several major drawbacks to the CDC-ACM standard USB class, however
+ *        it is very standardized and thus usually available as a built-in driver on
+ *        most platforms, and so is a better choice than a proprietary serial class.
+ *
+ *        One major issue with CDC-ACM is that it requires two Interface descriptors,
+ *        which will upset most hosts when part of a multi-function "Composite" USB
+ *        device. This is because each interface will be loaded into a separate driver
+ *        instance, causing the two interfaces be become unlinked. To prevent this, you
+ *        should use the "Interface Association Descriptor" addendum to the USB 2.0 standard
+ *        which is available on most OSes when creating Composite devices.
+ *
+ *        Another major oversight is that there is no mechanism for the host to notify the
+ *        device that there is a data sink on the host side ready to accept data. This
+ *        means that the device may try to send data while the host isn't listening, causing
+ *        lengthy blocking timeouts in the transmission routines. It is thus highly recommended
+ *        that the virtual serial line DTR (Data Terminal Ready) signal be used where possible
+ *        to determine if a host application is ready for data.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CDC_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
+#define _CDC_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "../Common/CDCClassCommon.h"
+
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** \brief CDC Class Device Mode Configuration and State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made for each CDC interface
+			 *  within the user application, and passed to each of the CDC class driver functions as the
+			 *  CDCInterfaceInfo parameter. This stores each CDC interface's configuration and state information.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					uint8_t ControlInterfaceNumber; /**< Interface number of the CDC control interface within the device. */
+
+					USB_Endpoint_Table_t DataINEndpoint; /**< Data IN endpoint configuration table. */
+					USB_Endpoint_Table_t DataOUTEndpoint; /**< Data OUT endpoint configuration table. */
+					USB_Endpoint_Table_t NotificationEndpoint; /**< Notification IN Endpoint configuration table. */
+				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
+				           */
+				struct
+				{
+					struct
+					{
+						uint16_t HostToDevice; /**< Control line states from the host to device, as a set of \c CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_*
+											    *   masks. This value is updated each time \ref CDC_Device_USBTask() is called.
+											    */
+						uint16_t DeviceToHost; /**< Control line states from the device to host, as a set of \c CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_*
+											    *   masks - to notify the host of changes to these values, call the
+											    *   \ref CDC_Device_SendControlLineStateChange() function.
+											    */
+					} ControlLineStates; /**< Current states of the virtual serial port's control lines between the device and host. */
+
+					CDC_LineEncoding_t LineEncoding; /**< Line encoding used in the virtual serial port, for the device's information.
+					                                  *   This is generally only used if the virtual serial port data is to be
+					                                  *   reconstructed on a physical UART.
+					                                  */
+				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				          *   are reset to their defaults when the interface is enumerated.
+				          */
+			} USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t;
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Configures the endpoints of a given CDC interface, ready for use. This should be linked to the library
+			 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged() event so that the endpoints are configured when the configuration containing
+			 *  the given CDC interface is selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the endpoints were successfully configured, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Processes incoming control requests from the host, that are directed to the given CDC class interface. This should be
+			 *  linked to the library \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.
+			 */
+			void CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** General management task for a given CDC class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should
+			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.
+			 */
+			void CDC_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** CDC class driver event for a line encoding change on a CDC interface. This event fires each time the host requests a
+			 *  line encoding change (containing the serial parity, baud and other configuration information) and may be hooked in the
+			 *  user program by declaring a handler function with the same name and parameters listed here. The new line encoding
+			 *  settings are available in the \c LineEncoding structure inside the CDC interface structure passed as a parameter.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.
+			 */
+			void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** CDC class driver event for a control line state change on a CDC interface. This event fires each time the host requests a
+			 *  control line state change (containing the virtual serial control line states, such as DTR) and may be hooked in the
+			 *  user program by declaring a handler function with the same name and parameters listed here. The new control line states
+			 *  are available in the \c ControlLineStates.HostToDevice value inside the CDC interface structure passed as a parameter, set as
+			 *  a mask of \c CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_* masks.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.
+			 */
+			void EVENT_CDC_Device_ControLineStateChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** CDC class driver event for a send break request sent to the device from the host. This is generally used to separate
+			 *  data or to indicate a special condition to the receiving device.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     Duration          Duration of the break that has been sent by the host, in milliseconds.
+			 */
+			void EVENT_CDC_Device_BreakSent(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,
+			                                const uint8_t Duration) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Sends a given data buffer to the attached USB host, if connected. If a host is not connected when the function is
+			 *  called, the string is discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the host until either the endpoint bank
+			 *  becomes full, or the \ref CDC_Device_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to the host. This allows
+			 *  for multiple bytes to be packed into a single endpoint packet, increasing data throughput.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
+			 *       the call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     Buffer            Pointer to a buffer containing the data to send to the device.
+			 *  \param[in]     Length            Length of the data to send to the host.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t CDC_Device_SendData(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,
+			                            const void* const Buffer,
+			                            const uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** Sends a given null terminated string to the attached USB host, if connected. If a host is not connected when
+			 *  the function is called, the string is discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the host until either
+			 *  the endpoint bank becomes full, or the \ref CDC_Device_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to
+			 *  the host. This allows for multiple bytes to be packed into a single endpoint packet, increasing data throughput.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
+			 *       the call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     String            Pointer to the null terminated string to send to the host.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t CDC_Device_SendString(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,
+			                              const char* const String) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** Sends a given byte to the attached USB host, if connected. If a host is not connected when the function is called, the
+			 *  byte is discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the host until either the endpoint bank becomes full, or the
+			 *  \ref CDC_Device_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to the host. This allows for multiple bytes to be
+			 *  packed into a single endpoint packet, increasing data throughput.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
+			 *       the call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     Data              Byte of data to send to the host.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t CDC_Device_SendByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,
+			                            const uint8_t Data) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Determines the number of bytes received by the CDC interface from the host, waiting to be read. This indicates the number
+			 *  of bytes in the OUT endpoint bank only, and thus the number of calls to \ref CDC_Device_ReceiveByte() which are guaranteed to
+			 *  succeed immediately. If multiple bytes are to be received, they should be buffered by the user application, as the endpoint
+			 *  bank will not be released back to the USB controller until all bytes are read.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
+			 *       the call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Total number of buffered bytes received from the host.
+			 */
+			uint16_t CDC_Device_BytesReceived(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Reads a byte of data from the host. If no data is waiting to be read of if a USB host is not connected, the function
+			 *  returns a negative value. The \ref CDC_Device_BytesReceived() function may be queried in advance to determine how many
+			 *  bytes are currently buffered in the CDC interface's data receive endpoint bank, and thus how many repeated calls to this
+			 *  function which are guaranteed to succeed.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
+			 *       the call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next received byte from the host, or a negative value if no data received.
+			 */
+			int16_t CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Flushes any data waiting to be sent, ensuring that the send buffer is cleared.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
+			 *       the call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t CDC_Device_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Sends a Serial Control Line State Change notification to the host. This should be called when the virtual serial
+			 *  control lines (DCD, DSR, etc.) have changed states, or to give BREAK notifications to the host. Line states persist
+			 *  until they are cleared via a second notification. This should be called each time the CDC class driver's
+			 *  \c ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost value is updated to push the new states to the USB host.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
+			 *       the call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.
+			 */
+			void CDC_Device_SendControlLineStateChange(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			#if defined(FDEV_SETUP_STREAM) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			/** Creates a standard character stream for the given CDC Device instance so that it can be used with all the regular
+			 *  functions in the standard <stdio.h> library that accept a \c FILE stream as a destination (e.g. \c fprintf()). The created
+			 *  stream is bidirectional and can be used for both input and output functions.
+			 *
+			 *  Reading data from this stream is non-blocking, i.e. in most instances, complete strings cannot be read in by a single
+			 *  fetch, as the endpoint will not be ready at some point in the transmission, aborting the transfer. However, this may
+			 *  be used when the read data is processed byte-per-bye (via \c getc()) or when the user application will implement its own
+			 *  line buffering.
+			 *
+			 *  \note The created stream can be given as \c stdout if desired to direct the standard output from all \c <stdio.h> functions
+			 *        to the given CDC interface.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function is not available on all microcontroller architectures.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in,out] Stream            Pointer to a FILE structure where the created stream should be placed.
+			 */
+			void CDC_Device_CreateStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,
+			                             FILE* const Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** Identical to \ref CDC_Device_CreateStream(), except that reads are blocking until the calling stream function terminates
+			 *  the transfer. While blocking, the USB and CDC service tasks are called repeatedly to maintain USB communications.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function is not available on all microcontroller architectures.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in,out] Stream            Pointer to a FILE structure where the created stream should be placed.
+			 */
+			void CDC_Device_CreateBlockingStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,
+			                                     FILE* const Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+			#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DEVICE_C)
+				#if defined(FDEV_SETUP_STREAM)
+				static int CDC_Device_putchar(char c,
+				                              FILE* Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+				static int CDC_Device_getchar(FILE* Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static int CDC_Device_getchar_Blocking(FILE* Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				#endif
+
+				void CDC_Device_Event_Stub(void) ATTR_CONST;
+
+				void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+				                                          ATTR_WEAK ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALIAS(CDC_Device_Event_Stub);
+				void EVENT_CDC_Device_ControLineStateChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+				                                             ATTR_WEAK ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALIAS(CDC_Device_Event_Stub);
+				void EVENT_CDC_Device_BreakSent(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,
+				                                const uint8_t Duration) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
+				                                ATTR_ALIAS(CDC_Device_Event_Stub);
+			#endif
+
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HIDClassDevice.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HIDClassDevice.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..03a745c1a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HIDClassDevice.c
@@ -0,0 +1,211 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_HID_DRIVER
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_HID_DEVICE_C
+#include "HIDClassDevice.h"
+
+void HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived()))
+	  return;
+
+	if (USB_ControlRequest.wIndex != HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.InterfaceNumber)
+	  return;
+
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case HID_REQ_GetReport:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				uint16_t ReportSize = 0;
+				uint8_t  ReportID   = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue & 0xFF);
+				uint8_t  ReportType = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue >> 8) - 1;
+				uint8_t  ReportData[HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBufferSize];
+
+				memset(ReportData, 0, sizeof(ReportData));
+
+				CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(HIDInterfaceInfo, &ReportID, ReportType, ReportData, &ReportSize);
+
+				if (HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBuffer != NULL)
+				{
+					memcpy(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBuffer, ReportData,
+					       HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBufferSize);
+				}
+
+				Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				if (ReportID)
+				  Endpoint_Write_8(ReportID);
+
+				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(ReportData, ReportSize);
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_REQ_SetReport:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				uint16_t ReportSize = USB_ControlRequest.wLength;
+				uint8_t  ReportID   = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue & 0xFF);
+				uint8_t  ReportType = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue >> 8) - 1;
+				uint8_t  ReportData[ReportSize];
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(ReportData, ReportSize);
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+				CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(HIDInterfaceInfo, ReportID, ReportType,
+				                                     &ReportData[ReportID ? 1 : 0], ReportSize - (ReportID ? 1 : 0));
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_REQ_GetProtocol:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()));
+				Endpoint_Write_8(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.UsingReportProtocol);
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_REQ_SetProtocol:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+
+				HIDInterfaceInfo->State.UsingReportProtocol = ((USB_ControlRequest.wValue & 0xFF) != 0x00);
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_REQ_SetIdle:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+
+				HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleCount = ((USB_ControlRequest.wValue & 0xFF00) >> 6);
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_REQ_GetIdle:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()));
+				Endpoint_Write_8(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleCount >> 2);
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+bool HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	memset(&HIDInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(HIDInterfaceInfo->State));
+	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.UsingReportProtocol = true;
+	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleCount           = 500;
+
+	HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.ReportINEndpoint.Type = EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT;
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(&HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.ReportINEndpoint, 1)))
+	  return false;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+void HID_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	if (HIDInterfaceInfo->State.PrevFrameNum == USB_Device_GetFrameNumber())
+	{
+		#if defined(USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED)
+		if (!(USB_Options & USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED))
+		  return;
+		#else
+		return;
+		#endif
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.ReportINEndpoint.Address);
+
+	if (Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+	{
+		uint8_t  ReportINData[HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBufferSize];
+		uint8_t  ReportID     = 0;
+		uint16_t ReportINSize = 0;
+
+		memset(ReportINData, 0, sizeof(ReportINData));
+
+		bool ForceSend         = CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(HIDInterfaceInfo, &ReportID, HID_REPORT_ITEM_In,
+		                                                             ReportINData, &ReportINSize);
+		bool StatesChanged     = false;
+		bool IdlePeriodElapsed = (HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleCount && !(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleMSRemaining));
+
+		if (HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBuffer != NULL)
+		{
+			StatesChanged = (memcmp(ReportINData, HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBuffer, ReportINSize) != 0);
+			memcpy(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBuffer, ReportINData, HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.PrevReportINBufferSize);
+		}
+
+		if (ReportINSize && (ForceSend || StatesChanged || IdlePeriodElapsed))
+		{
+			HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleMSRemaining = HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleCount;
+
+			Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.ReportINEndpoint.Address);
+
+			if (ReportID)
+			  Endpoint_Write_8(ReportID);
+
+			Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(ReportINData, ReportINSize, NULL);
+
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+		}
+
+		HIDInterfaceInfo->State.PrevFrameNum = USB_Device_GetFrameNumber();
+	}
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HIDClassDevice.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HIDClassDevice.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f373cf076
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HIDClassDevice.h
@@ -0,0 +1,210 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Device mode driver for the library USB HID Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Device mode driver for the library USB HID Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassHID
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassHIDDevice HID Class Device Mode Driver
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassHIDDevice_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HIDClassDevice.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassHIDDevice_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Device Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the HID USB Class driver.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _HID_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
+#define _HID_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "../Common/HIDClassCommon.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_HID_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** \brief HID Class Device Mode Configuration and State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made for each HID interface
+			 *  within the user application, and passed to each of the HID class driver functions as the
+			 *  \c HIDInterfaceInfo parameter. This stores each HID interface's configuration and state information.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Due to technical limitations, the HID device class driver does not utilize a separate OUT
+			 *        endpoint for host->device communications. Instead, the host->device data (if any) is sent to
+			 *        the device via the control endpoint.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					uint8_t  InterfaceNumber; /**< Interface number of the HID interface within the device. */
+
+					USB_Endpoint_Table_t ReportINEndpoint; /**< Data IN HID report endpoint configuration table. */
+
+					void*    PrevReportINBuffer; /**< Pointer to a buffer where the previously created HID input report can be
+					                              *  stored by the driver, for comparison purposes to detect report changes that
+					                              *  must be sent immediately to the host. This should point to a buffer big enough
+					                              *  to hold the largest HID input report sent from the HID interface. If this is set
+					                              *  to \c NULL, it is up to the user to force transfers when needed in the
+					                              *  \ref CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport() callback function.
+					                              *
+					                              *  \note Due to the single buffer, the internal driver can only correctly compare
+					                              *        subsequent reports with identical report IDs. In multiple report devices,
+					                              *        this buffer should be set to \c NULL and the decision to send reports made
+					                              *        by the user application instead.
+					                              */
+					uint8_t  PrevReportINBufferSize; /**< Size in bytes of the given input report buffer. This is used to create a
+					                                  *  second buffer of the same size within the driver so that subsequent reports
+					                                  *  can be compared. If the user app is to determine when reports are to be sent
+					                                  *  exclusively (i.e. \c PrevReportINBuffer is \c NULL) this value must still be
+					                                  *  set to the size of the largest report the device can issue to the host.
+					                                  */
+				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
+				           */
+				struct
+				{
+					bool     UsingReportProtocol; /**< Indicates if the HID interface is set to Boot or Report protocol mode. */
+					uint16_t PrevFrameNum; /**< Frame number of the previous HID report packet opportunity. */
+					uint16_t IdleCount; /**< Report idle period, in milliseconds, set by the host. */
+					uint16_t IdleMSRemaining; /**< Total number of milliseconds remaining before the idle period elapsed - this
+				                               *   should be decremented by the user application if non-zero each millisecond. */
+				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				          *   are reset to their defaults when the interface is enumerated.
+				          */
+			} USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t;
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Configures the endpoints of a given HID interface, ready for use. This should be linked to the library
+			 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged() event so that the endpoints are configured when the configuration
+			 *  containing the given HID interface is selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the endpoints were successfully configured, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Processes incoming control requests from the host, that are directed to the given HID class interface. This should be
+			 *  linked to the library \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class configuration and state.
+			 */
+			void HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** General management task for a given HID class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should
+			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class configuration and state.
+			 */
+			void HID_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** HID class driver callback for the user creation of a HID IN report. This callback may fire in response to either
+			 *  HID class control requests from the host, or by the normal HID endpoint polling procedure. Inside this callback the
+			 *  user is responsible for the creation of the next HID input report to be sent to the host.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in,out] ReportID          If preset to a non-zero value, this is the report ID being requested by the host. If zero,
+			 *                                   this should be set to the report ID of the generated HID input report (if any). If multiple
+			 *                                   reports are not sent via the given HID interface, this parameter should be ignored.
+			 *  \param[in]     ReportType        Type of HID report to generate, either \ref HID_REPORT_ITEM_In or \ref HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature.
+			 *  \param[out]    ReportData        Pointer to a buffer where the generated HID report should be stored.
+			 *  \param[out]    ReportSize        Number of bytes in the generated input report, or zero if no report is to be sent.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true to force the sending of the report even if it is identical to the previous report and still within
+			 *          the idle period (useful for devices which report relative movement), \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+			                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+			                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+			                                         void* ReportData,
+			                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
+			                                         ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(4) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(5);
+
+			/** HID class driver callback for the user processing of a received HID OUT report. This callback may fire in response to
+			 *  either HID class control requests from the host, or by the normal HID endpoint polling procedure. Inside this callback
+			 *  the user is responsible for the processing of the received HID output report from the host.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     ReportID          Report ID of the received output report. If multiple reports are not received via the given HID
+			 *                                   interface, this parameter should be ignored.
+			 *  \param[in]     ReportType        Type of received HID report, either \ref HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out or \ref HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature.
+			 *  \param[in]     ReportData        Pointer to a buffer where the received HID report is stored.
+			 *  \param[in]     ReportSize        Size in bytes of the received report from the host.
+			 */
+			void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+			                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+			                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+			                                          const void* ReportData,
+			                                          const uint16_t ReportSize) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(4);
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Indicates that a millisecond of idle time has elapsed on the given HID interface, and the interface's idle count should be
+			 *  decremented. This should be called once per millisecond so that hardware key-repeats function correctly. It is recommended
+			 *  that this be called by the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event, once SOF events have been enabled via
+			 *  \ref USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class configuration and state.
+			 */
+			static inline void HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static inline void HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				if (HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleMSRemaining)
+				  HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IdleMSRemaining--;
+			}
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDIClassDevice.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDIClassDevice.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b00252597
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDIClassDevice.c
@@ -0,0 +1,131 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_DRIVER
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_DEVICE_C
+#include "MIDIClassDevice.h"
+
+bool MIDI_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	memset(&MIDIInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(MIDIInterfaceInfo->State));
+
+	MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Type  = EP_TYPE_BULK;
+	MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Type = EP_TYPE_BULK;
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(&MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint, 1)))
+	  return false;
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(&MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint, 1)))
+	  return false;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+void MIDI_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	#if !defined(NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH)
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);
+
+	if (Endpoint_IsINReady())
+	  MIDI_Device_Flush(MIDIInterfaceInfo);
+	#endif
+}
+
+uint8_t MIDI_Device_SendEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo,
+                                    const MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event)
+{
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(Event, sizeof(MIDI_EventPacket_t), NULL)) != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t MIDI_Device_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);
+
+	if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())
+	{
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+		if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()) != ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;
+}
+
+bool MIDI_Device_ReceiveEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo,
+                                    MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event)
+{
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return false;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Address);
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+		return false;
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  return false;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(Event, sizeof(MIDI_EventPacket_t), NULL);
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDIClassDevice.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDIClassDevice.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..70eb44291
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDIClassDevice.h
@@ -0,0 +1,175 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Device mode driver for the library USB MIDI Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Device mode driver for the library USB MIDI Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassMIDI
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassMIDIDevice MIDI Class Device Mode Driver
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassMIDIDevice_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDIClassDevice.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassMIDIDevice_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Device Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the MIDI USB Class driver.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MIDI_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
+#define _MIDI_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "../Common/MIDIClassCommon.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Type Define: */
+			/** \brief MIDI Class Device Mode Configuration and State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made for each MIDI interface
+			 *  within the user application, and passed to each of the MIDI class driver functions as the
+			 *  \c MIDIInterfaceInfo parameter. This stores each MIDI interface's configuration and state information.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					uint8_t  StreamingInterfaceNumber; /**< Index of the Audio Streaming interface within the device this structure controls. */
+
+					USB_Endpoint_Table_t DataINEndpoint; /**< Data IN endpoint configuration table. */
+					USB_Endpoint_Table_t DataOUTEndpoint; /**< Data OUT endpoint configuration table. */
+				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
+				           */
+
+				struct
+				{
+					uint8_t RESERVED; // No state information for this class
+				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				          *   are reset to their defaults when the interface is enumerated.
+				          */
+			} USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t;
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Configures the endpoints of a given MIDI interface, ready for use. This should be linked to the library
+			 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged() event so that the endpoints are configured when the configuration
+			 *  containing the given MIDI interface is selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the endpoints were successfully configured, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool MIDI_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** General management task for a given MIDI class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should
+			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state.
+			 */
+			void MIDI_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Sends a MIDI event packet to the host. If no host is connected, the event packet is discarded. Events are queued into the
+			 *  endpoint bank until either the endpoint bank is full, or \ref MIDI_Device_Flush() is called. This allows for multiple
+			 *  MIDI events to be packed into a single endpoint packet, increasing data throughput.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     Event              Pointer to a populated \ref MIDI_EventPacket_t structure containing the MIDI event to send.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t MIDI_Device_SendEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo,
+			                                    const MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+
+			/** Flushes the MIDI send buffer, sending any queued MIDI events to the host. This should be called to override the
+			 *  \ref MIDI_Device_SendEventPacket() function's packing behavior, to flush queued events.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t MIDI_Device_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Receives a MIDI event packet from the host. Events are unpacked from the endpoint, thus if the endpoint bank contains
+			 *  multiple MIDI events from the host in the one packet, multiple calls to this function will return each individual event.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[out]    Event              Pointer to a USB_MIDI_EventPacket_t structure where the received MIDI event is to be placed.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if a MIDI event packet was received, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool MIDI_Device_ReceiveEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo,
+			                                    MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Processes incoming control requests from the host, that are directed to the given MIDI class interface. This should be
+			 *  linked to the library \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state.
+			 */
+			static inline void MIDI_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static inline void MIDI_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				(void)MIDIInterfaceInfo;
+			}
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorageClassDevice.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorageClassDevice.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d0907963a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorageClassDevice.c
@@ -0,0 +1,215 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_MS_DRIVER
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORAGE_DEVICE_C
+#include "MassStorageClassDevice.h"
+
+void MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived()))
+	  return;
+
+	if (USB_ControlRequest.wIndex != MSInterfaceInfo->Config.InterfaceNumber)
+	  return;
+
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case MS_REQ_MassStorageReset:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+
+				MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset = true;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case MS_REQ_GetMaxLUN:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()));
+				Endpoint_Write_8(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.TotalLUNs - 1);
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+bool MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	memset(&MSInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(MSInterfaceInfo->State));
+
+	MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Type  = EP_TYPE_BULK;
+	MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Type = EP_TYPE_BULK;
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(&MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint, 1)))
+	  return false;
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(&MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint, 1)))
+	  return false;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+void MS_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Address);
+
+	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+	{
+		if (MS_Device_ReadInCommandBlock(MSInterfaceInfo))
+		{
+			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.Flags & MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_IN)
+			  Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);
+
+			bool SCSICommandResult = CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(MSInterfaceInfo);
+
+			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandStatus.Status              = (SCSICommandResult) ? MS_SCSI_COMMAND_Pass : MS_SCSI_COMMAND_Fail;
+			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandStatus.Signature           = CPU_TO_LE32(MS_CSW_SIGNATURE);
+			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandStatus.Tag                 = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.Tag;
+			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandStatus.DataTransferResidue = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength;
+
+			if (!(SCSICommandResult) && (le32_to_cpu(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandStatus.DataTransferResidue)))
+			  Endpoint_StallTransaction();
+
+			MS_Device_ReturnCommandStatus(MSInterfaceInfo);
+		}
+	}
+
+	if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+	{
+		Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Address);
+		Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);
+
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Address);
+		Endpoint_ClearStall();
+		Endpoint_ResetDataToggle();
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);
+		Endpoint_ClearStall();
+		Endpoint_ResetDataToggle();
+
+		MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset = false;
+	}
+}
+
+static bool MS_Device_ReadInCommandBlock(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint16_t BytesProcessed;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Address);
+
+	BytesProcessed = 0;
+	while (Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock,
+	                               (sizeof(MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t) - 16), &BytesProcessed) ==
+	                               ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+	{
+		if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+		  return false;
+	}
+
+	if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.Signature         != CPU_TO_LE32(MS_CBW_SIGNATURE))     ||
+	    (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.LUN               >= MSInterfaceInfo->Config.TotalLUNs) ||
+		(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.Flags              & 0x1F)                              ||
+		(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandLength == 0)                                 ||
+		(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandLength >  16))
+	{
+		Endpoint_StallTransaction();
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);
+		Endpoint_StallTransaction();
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	BytesProcessed = 0;
+	while (Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData,
+	                                MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandLength, &BytesProcessed) ==
+	                                ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+	{
+		if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+		  return false;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+static void MS_Device_ReturnCommandStatus(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Address);
+
+	while (Endpoint_IsStalled())
+	{
+		#if !defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)
+		USB_USBTask();
+		#endif
+
+		if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+		  return;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);
+
+	while (Endpoint_IsStalled())
+	{
+		#if !defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)
+		USB_USBTask();
+		#endif
+
+		if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+		  return;
+	}
+
+	uint16_t BytesProcessed = 0;
+	while (Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandStatus,
+	                                sizeof(MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t), &BytesProcessed) ==
+	                                ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+	{
+		if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+		  return;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorageClassDevice.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorageClassDevice.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..513221308
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorageClassDevice.h
@@ -0,0 +1,161 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Device mode driver for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Device mode driver for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassMS
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassMSDevice Mass Storage Class Device Mode Driver
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassMSDevice_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorageClassDevice.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassMSDevice_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Device Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the Mass Storage USB Class driver.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MS_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
+#define _MS_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "../Common/MassStorageClassCommon.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MS_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** \brief Mass Storage Class Device Mode Configuration and State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made for each Mass Storage interface
+			 *  within the user application, and passed to each of the Mass Storage class driver functions as the
+			 *  \c MSInterfaceInfo parameter. This stores each Mass Storage interface's configuration and state information.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					uint8_t  InterfaceNumber; /**< Interface number of the Mass Storage interface within the device. */
+
+					USB_Endpoint_Table_t DataINEndpoint; /**< Data IN endpoint configuration table. */
+					USB_Endpoint_Table_t DataOUTEndpoint; /**< Data OUT endpoint configuration table. */
+
+					uint8_t  TotalLUNs; /**< Total number of logical drives in the Mass Storage interface. */
+				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
+				           */
+				struct
+				{
+					MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t  CommandBlock; /**< Mass Storage class command block structure, stores the received SCSI
+															 *   command from the host which is to be processed.
+															 */
+					MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t CommandStatus; /**< Mass Storage class command status structure, set elements to indicate
+															  *   the issued command's success or failure to the host.
+															  */
+					volatile bool IsMassStoreReset; /**< Flag indicating that the host has requested that the Mass Storage interface be reset
+											         *   and that all current Mass Storage operations should immediately abort.
+											         */
+				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				          *   are reset to their defaults when the interface is enumerated.
+				          */
+			} USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t;
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Configures the endpoints of a given Mass Storage interface, ready for use. This should be linked to the library
+			 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged() event so that the endpoints are configured when the configuration
+			 *  containing the given Mass Storage interface is selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the endpoints were successfully configured, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Processes incoming control requests from the host, that are directed to the given Mass Storage class interface. This should be
+			 *  linked to the library \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state.
+			 */
+			void MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** General management task for a given Mass Storage class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should
+			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage configuration and state.
+			 */
+			void MS_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Mass Storage class driver callback for the user processing of a received SCSI command. This callback will fire each time the
+			 *  host sends a SCSI command which requires processing by the user application. Inside this callback the user is responsible
+			 *  for the processing of the received SCSI command from the host. The SCSI command is available in the CommandBlock structure
+			 *  inside the Mass Storage class state structure passed as a parameter to the callback function.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the SCSI command was successfully processed, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORAGE_DEVICE_C)
+				static void MS_Device_ReturnCommandStatus(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static bool MS_Device_ReadInCommandBlock(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			#endif
+
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/PrinterClassDevice.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/PrinterClassDevice.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fd3454b1a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/PrinterClassDevice.c
@@ -0,0 +1,314 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_PRINTER_DRIVER
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_PRINTER_DEVICE_C
+#include "PrinterClassDevice.h"
+
+void PRNT_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived()))
+	  return;
+
+	if (USB_ControlRequest.wIndex != PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.InterfaceNumber)
+	  return;
+
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case PRNT_REQ_GetDeviceID:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+				{
+					if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+					  return;
+				}
+
+				uint16_t IEEEStringLen = strlen(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.IEEE1284String);
+				Endpoint_Write_16_BE(IEEEStringLen);
+				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.IEEE1284String, IEEEStringLen);
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case PRNT_REQ_GetPortStatus:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+				{
+					if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+					  return;
+				}
+
+				Endpoint_Write_8(PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.PortStatus);
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case PRNT_REQ_SoftReset:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+
+				PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.IsPrinterReset = true;
+
+				EVENT_PRNT_Device_SoftReset(PRNTInterfaceInfo);
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+bool PRNT_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	memset(&PRNTInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(PRNTInterfaceInfo->State));
+	PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.PortStatus = PRNT_PORTSTATUS_NOTERROR | PRNT_PORTSTATUS_SELECT;
+
+	PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Type  = EP_TYPE_BULK;
+	PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Type = EP_TYPE_BULK;
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(&PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint, 1)))
+	  return false;
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(&PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint, 1)))
+	  return false;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+void PRNT_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	#if !defined(NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH)
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);
+
+	if (Endpoint_IsINReady())
+	  PRNT_Device_Flush(PRNTInterfaceInfo);
+	#endif
+
+	if (PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.IsPrinterReset)
+	{
+		Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Address);
+		Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);
+
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Address);
+		Endpoint_ClearStall();
+		Endpoint_ResetDataToggle();
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);
+		Endpoint_ClearStall();
+		Endpoint_ResetDataToggle();
+
+		PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.IsPrinterReset = false;
+	}
+}
+
+uint8_t PRNT_Device_SendString(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,
+                               const char* const String)
+{
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);
+	return Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(String, strlen(String), NULL);
+}
+
+uint8_t PRNT_Device_SendData(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,
+                             const void* const Buffer,
+                             const uint16_t Length)
+{
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);
+	return Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, Length, NULL);
+}
+
+uint8_t PRNT_Device_SendByte(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,
+                             const uint8_t Data)
+{
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	{
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+		uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+		if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()) != ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(Data);
+	return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t PRNT_Device_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
+	  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;
+
+	bool BankFull = !(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed());
+
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	if (BankFull)
+	{
+		if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()) != ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+	}
+
+	return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;
+}
+
+uint16_t PRNT_Device_BytesReceived(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return 0;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Address);
+
+	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+	{
+		if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
+		{
+			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+			return 0;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			return Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint();
+		}
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		return 0;
+	}
+}
+
+int16_t PRNT_Device_ReceiveByte(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return -1;
+
+	int16_t ReceivedByte = -1;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Address);
+
+	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+	{
+		if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())
+		  ReceivedByte = Endpoint_Read_8();
+
+		if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
+		  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	}
+
+	return ReceivedByte;
+}
+
+#if defined(FDEV_SETUP_STREAM)
+void PRNT_Device_CreateStream(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,
+                              FILE* const Stream)
+{
+	*Stream = (FILE)FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(PRNT_Device_putchar, PRNT_Device_getchar, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);
+	fdev_set_udata(Stream, PRNTInterfaceInfo);
+}
+
+void PRNT_Device_CreateBlockingStream(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,
+                                      FILE* const Stream)
+{
+	*Stream = (FILE)FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(PRNT_Device_putchar, PRNT_Device_getchar_Blocking, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);
+	fdev_set_udata(Stream, PRNTInterfaceInfo);
+}
+
+static int PRNT_Device_putchar(char c,
+                               FILE* Stream)
+{
+	return PRNT_Device_SendByte((USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream), c) ? _FDEV_ERR : 0;
+}
+
+static int PRNT_Device_getchar(FILE* Stream)
+{
+	int16_t ReceivedByte = PRNT_Device_ReceiveByte((USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream));
+
+	if (ReceivedByte < 0)
+	  return _FDEV_EOF;
+
+	return ReceivedByte;
+}
+
+static int PRNT_Device_getchar_Blocking(FILE* Stream)
+{
+	int16_t ReceivedByte;
+
+	while ((ReceivedByte = PRNT_Device_ReceiveByte((USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream))) < 0)
+	{
+		if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return _FDEV_EOF;
+
+		PRNT_Device_USBTask((USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream));
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+
+	return ReceivedByte;
+}
+#endif
+
+void PRNT_Device_Event_Stub(void)
+{
+
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/PrinterClassDevice.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/PrinterClassDevice.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d9d9644cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/PrinterClassDevice.h
@@ -0,0 +1,293 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Device mode driver for the library USB Printer Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Device mode driver for the library USB Printer Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassPrinter
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassPrinterDevice Printer Class Device Mode Driver
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassPrinterDevice_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/PrinterClassDevice.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassPrinterDevice_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Device Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the Printer USB Class driver.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _PRINTER_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
+#define _PRINTER_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "../Common/PrinterClassCommon.h"
+
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_PRINTER_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** \brief Printer Class Device Mode Configuration and State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made for each Printer interface
+			 *  within the user application, and passed to each of the Printer class driver functions as the
+			 *  PRNTInterfaceInfo parameter. This stores each Printer interface's configuration and state information.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					uint8_t InterfaceNumber; /**< Interface number of the Printer interface within the device. */
+
+					USB_Endpoint_Table_t DataINEndpoint; /**< Data IN endpoint configuration table. */
+					USB_Endpoint_Table_t DataOUTEndpoint; /**< Data OUT endpoint configuration table. */
+
+					char* IEEE1284String; /**< IEEE 1284 identification string, sent to the host during enumeration
+					                       *   to identify the printer model, manufacturer and other characteristics.
+					                       */
+				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
+				           */
+				struct
+				{
+					uint8_t PortStatus; /**< Current status of the Printer virtual port, a collection of \c PRNT_PORTSTATUS_*
+					                     *   bitmask values.
+					                     */
+
+					volatile bool IsPrinterReset; /**< Flag indicating that the host has requested that the Printer interface be reset
+											       *   and that all current Mass Storage operations should immediately abort.
+											       */
+				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				          *   are reset to their defaults when the interface is enumerated.
+				          */
+			} USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t;
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Configures the endpoints of a given Printer interface, ready for use. This should be linked to the library
+			 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged() event so that the endpoints are configured when the configuration containing
+			 *  the given Printer interface is selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the endpoints were successfully configured, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool PRNT_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Processes incoming control requests from the host, that are directed to the given Printer class interface. This should be
+			 *  linked to the library \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class configuration and state.
+			 */
+			void PRNT_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** General management task for a given Printer class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should
+			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class configuration and state.
+			 */
+			void PRNT_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Printer class driver event for a soft reset request on a Printer interface. This event fires each time the host
+			 *  requests a reset of the printer interface's internal state, and may be hooked in the user program by declaring a
+			 *  handler function with the same name and parameters listed here.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class configuration and state.
+			 */
+			void EVENT_PRNT_Device_SoftReset(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Sends a given data buffer to the attached USB host, if connected. If a host is not connected when the function is
+			 *  called, the string is discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the host until either the endpoint bank
+			 *  becomes full, or the \ref PRNT_Device_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to the host. This allows
+			 *  for multiple bytes to be packed into a single endpoint packet, increasing data throughput.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
+			 *       the call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     Buffer            Pointer to a buffer containing the data to send to the device.
+			 *  \param[in]     Length            Length of the data to send to the host.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t PRNT_Device_SendData(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,
+			                             const void* const Buffer,
+			                             const uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** Sends a given null terminated string to the attached USB host, if connected. If a host is not connected when
+			 *  the function is called, the string is discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the host until either
+			 *  the endpoint bank becomes full, or the \ref PRNT_Device_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to
+			 *  the host. This allows for multiple bytes to be packed into a single endpoint packet, increasing data throughput.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
+			 *       the call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     String            Pointer to the null terminated string to send to the host.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t PRNT_Device_SendString(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,
+			                               const char* const String) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** Sends a given byte to the attached USB host, if connected. If a host is not connected when the function is called, the
+			 *  byte is discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the host until either the endpoint bank becomes full, or the
+			 *  \ref PRNT_Device_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to the host. This allows for multiple bytes to be
+			 *  packed into a single endpoint packet, increasing data throughput.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
+			 *       the call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     Data              Byte of data to send to the host.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t PRNT_Device_SendByte(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,
+			                             const uint8_t Data) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Determines the number of bytes received by the Printer interface from the host, waiting to be read. This indicates the number
+			 *  of bytes in the OUT endpoint bank only, and thus the number of calls to \ref PRNT_Device_ReceiveByte() which are guaranteed to
+			 *  succeed immediately. If multiple bytes are to be received, they should be buffered by the user application, as the endpoint
+			 *  bank will not be released back to the USB controller until all bytes are read.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
+			 *       the call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Total number of buffered bytes received from the host.
+			 */
+			uint16_t PRNT_Device_BytesReceived(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Reads a byte of data from the host. If no data is waiting to be read of if a USB host is not connected, the function
+			 *  returns a negative value. The \ref PRNT_Device_BytesReceived() function may be queried in advance to determine how many
+			 *  bytes are currently buffered in the Printer interface's data receive endpoint bank, and thus how many repeated calls to this
+			 *  function which are guaranteed to succeed.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
+			 *       the call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next received byte from the host, or a negative value if no data received.
+			 */
+			int16_t PRNT_Device_ReceiveByte(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Flushes any data waiting to be sent, ensuring that the send buffer is cleared.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or
+			 *       the call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t PRNT_Device_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			#if defined(FDEV_SETUP_STREAM) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			/** Creates a standard character stream for the given Printer Device instance so that it can be used with all the regular
+			 *  functions in the standard <stdio.h> library that accept a \c FILE stream as a destination (e.g. \c fprintf()). The created
+			 *  stream is bidirectional and can be used for both input and output functions.
+			 *
+			 *  Reading data from this stream is non-blocking, i.e. in most instances, complete strings cannot be read in by a single
+			 *  fetch, as the endpoint will not be ready at some point in the transmission, aborting the transfer. However, this may
+			 *  be used when the read data is processed byte-per-bye (via \c getc()) or when the user application will implement its own
+			 *  line buffering.
+			 *
+			 *  \note The created stream can be given as \c stdout if desired to direct the standard output from all \c <stdio.h> functions
+			 *        to the given Printer interface.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function is not available on all microcontroller architectures.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in,out] Stream            Pointer to a FILE structure where the created stream should be placed.
+			 */
+			void PRNT_Device_CreateStream(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,
+			                              FILE* const Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** Identical to \ref PRNT_Device_CreateStream(), except that reads are blocking until the calling stream function terminates
+			 *  the transfer. While blocking, the USB and Printer service tasks are called repeatedly to maintain USB communications.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function is not available on all microcontroller architectures.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in,out] Stream            Pointer to a FILE structure where the created stream should be placed.
+			 */
+			void PRNT_Device_CreateBlockingStream(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,
+			                                      FILE* const Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+			#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_PRINTER_DEVICE_C)
+				#if defined(FDEV_SETUP_STREAM)
+				static int PRNT_Device_putchar(char c,
+				                               FILE* Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+				static int PRNT_Device_getchar(FILE* Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static int PRNT_Device_getchar_Blocking(FILE* Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				#endif
+
+				void PRNT_Device_Event_Stub(void) ATTR_CONST;
+
+				void EVENT_PRNT_Device_SoftReset(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo)
+				                                 ATTR_WEAK ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALIAS(PRNT_Device_Event_Stub);
+
+			#endif
+
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDISClassDevice.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDISClassDevice.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6ee73c5bb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDISClassDevice.c
@@ -0,0 +1,508 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_DRIVER
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_DEVICE_C
+#include "RNDISClassDevice.h"
+
+static const uint32_t PROGMEM AdapterSupportedOIDList[]  =
+	{
+		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST),
+		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_PHYSICAL_MEDIUM),
+		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS),
+		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED),
+		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE),
+		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE),
+		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE),
+		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED),
+		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE),
+		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE),
+		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID),
+		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION),
+		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER),
+		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE),
+		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS),
+		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_XMIT_OK),
+		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_RCV_OK),
+		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR),
+		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR),
+		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER),
+		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS),
+		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS),
+		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST),
+		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE),
+		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT),
+		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION),
+		CPU_TO_LE32(OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS),
+	};
+
+void RNDIS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived()))
+	  return;
+
+	if (USB_ControlRequest.wIndex != RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.ControlInterfaceNumber)
+	  return;
+
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case RNDIS_REQ_SendEncapsulatedCommand:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.MessageBuffer, USB_ControlRequest.wLength);
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+				RNDIS_Device_ProcessRNDISControlMessage(RNDISInterfaceInfo);
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case RNDIS_REQ_GetEncapsulatedResponse:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				RNDIS_Message_Header_t* MessageHeader = (RNDIS_Message_Header_t*)RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.MessageBuffer;
+
+				if (!(MessageHeader->MessageLength))
+				{
+					RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.MessageBuffer[0] = 0;
+					MessageHeader->MessageLength                = CPU_TO_LE32(1);
+				}
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.MessageBuffer, le32_to_cpu(MessageHeader->MessageLength));
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+				MessageHeader->MessageLength = CPU_TO_LE32(0);
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+bool RNDIS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	memset(&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State));
+
+	RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Type       = EP_TYPE_BULK;
+	RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Type      = EP_TYPE_BULK;
+	RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationEndpoint.Type = EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT;
+
+	if (RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.MessageBuffer == NULL)
+	  return false;
+
+	if (RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.MessageBufferLength < RNDIS_DEVICE_MIN_MESSAGE_BUFFER_LENGTH)
+	  return false;
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(&RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint, 1)))
+	  return false;
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(&RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint, 1)))
+	  return false;
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(&RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationEndpoint, 1)))
+	  return false;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+void RNDIS_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationEndpoint.Address);
+
+	if (Endpoint_IsINReady() && RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady)
+	{
+		USB_Request_Header_t Notification = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+			{
+				.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+				.bRequest      = RNDIS_NOTIF_ResponseAvailable,
+				.wValue        = CPU_TO_LE16(0),
+				.wIndex        = CPU_TO_LE16(0),
+				.wLength       = CPU_TO_LE16(0),
+			};
+
+		Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&Notification, sizeof(USB_Request_Header_t), NULL);
+
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+		RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady = false;
+	}
+}
+
+void RNDIS_Device_ProcessRNDISControlMessage(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Note: Only a single buffer is used for both the received message and its response to save SRAM. Because of
+	         this, response bytes should be filled in order so that they do not clobber unread data in the buffer. */
+
+	RNDIS_Message_Header_t* MessageHeader = (RNDIS_Message_Header_t*)RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.MessageBuffer;
+
+	switch (le32_to_cpu(MessageHeader->MessageType))
+	{
+		case REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG:
+			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady     = true;
+
+			RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t*  INITIALIZE_Message  =
+			               (RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t*)RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.MessageBuffer;
+			RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t* INITIALIZE_Response =
+			               (RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t*)RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.MessageBuffer;
+
+			INITIALIZE_Response->MessageType            = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT);
+			INITIALIZE_Response->MessageLength          = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t));
+			INITIALIZE_Response->RequestId              = INITIALIZE_Message->RequestId;
+			INITIALIZE_Response->Status                 = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS);
+
+			INITIALIZE_Response->MajorVersion           = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MAJOR);
+			INITIALIZE_Response->MinorVersion           = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MINOR);
+			INITIALIZE_Response->DeviceFlags            = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTIONLESS);
+			INITIALIZE_Response->Medium                 = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3);
+			INITIALIZE_Response->MaxPacketsPerTransfer  = CPU_TO_LE32(1);
+			INITIALIZE_Response->MaxTransferSize        = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) + ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX);
+			INITIALIZE_Response->PacketAlignmentFactor  = CPU_TO_LE32(0);
+			INITIALIZE_Response->AFListOffset           = CPU_TO_LE32(0);
+			INITIALIZE_Response->AFListSize             = CPU_TO_LE32(0);
+
+			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrRNDISState    = RNDIS_Initialized;
+			break;
+		case REMOTE_NDIS_HALT_MSG:
+			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady     = false;
+
+			MessageHeader->MessageLength                = CPU_TO_LE32(0);
+
+			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrRNDISState    = RNDIS_Uninitialized;
+			break;
+		case REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG:
+			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady     = true;
+
+			RNDIS_Query_Message_t*  QUERY_Message       = (RNDIS_Query_Message_t*)RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.MessageBuffer;
+			RNDIS_Query_Complete_t* QUERY_Response      = (RNDIS_Query_Complete_t*)RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.MessageBuffer;
+			uint32_t                Query_Oid           = CPU_TO_LE32(QUERY_Message->Oid);
+
+			void*    QueryData    = &RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.MessageBuffer[sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t) +
+			                                                                  le32_to_cpu(QUERY_Message->InformationBufferOffset)];
+			void*    ResponseData = &RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.MessageBuffer[sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Complete_t)];
+			uint16_t ResponseSize;
+
+			QUERY_Response->MessageType                 = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_CMPLT);
+
+			if (RNDIS_Device_ProcessNDISQuery(RNDISInterfaceInfo, Query_Oid, QueryData, le32_to_cpu(QUERY_Message->InformationBufferLength),
+			                                  ResponseData, &ResponseSize))
+			{
+				QUERY_Response->Status                  = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS);
+				QUERY_Response->MessageLength           = cpu_to_le32(sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Complete_t) + ResponseSize);
+
+				QUERY_Response->InformationBufferLength = CPU_TO_LE32(ResponseSize);
+				QUERY_Response->InformationBufferOffset = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Complete_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t));
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				QUERY_Response->Status                  = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED);
+				QUERY_Response->MessageLength           = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Complete_t));
+
+				QUERY_Response->InformationBufferLength = CPU_TO_LE32(0);
+				QUERY_Response->InformationBufferOffset = CPU_TO_LE32(0);
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG:
+			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady     = true;
+
+			RNDIS_Set_Message_t*  SET_Message           = (RNDIS_Set_Message_t*)RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.MessageBuffer;
+			RNDIS_Set_Complete_t* SET_Response          = (RNDIS_Set_Complete_t*)RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.MessageBuffer;
+			uint32_t              SET_Oid               = le32_to_cpu(SET_Message->Oid);
+
+			SET_Response->MessageType                   = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_SET_CMPLT);
+			SET_Response->MessageLength                 = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(RNDIS_Set_Complete_t));
+			SET_Response->RequestId                     = SET_Message->RequestId;
+
+			void* SetData = &RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.MessageBuffer[sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t) +
+			                                                              le32_to_cpu(SET_Message->InformationBufferOffset)];
+
+			SET_Response->Status = RNDIS_Device_ProcessNDISSet(RNDISInterfaceInfo, SET_Oid, SetData,
+			                                                   le32_to_cpu(SET_Message->InformationBufferLength)) ?
+			                                                   REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS : REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED;
+			break;
+		case REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_MSG:
+			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady     = true;
+
+			RNDIS_Reset_Complete_t* RESET_Response      = (RNDIS_Reset_Complete_t*)RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.MessageBuffer;
+
+			RESET_Response->MessageType                 = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_CMPLT);
+			RESET_Response->MessageLength               = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(RNDIS_Reset_Complete_t));
+			RESET_Response->Status                      = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS);
+			RESET_Response->AddressingReset             = CPU_TO_LE32(0);
+
+			break;
+		case REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG:
+			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ResponseReady     = true;
+
+			RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t*  KEEPALIVE_Message  =
+			                (RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t*)RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.MessageBuffer;
+			RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t* KEEPALIVE_Response =
+			                (RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t*)RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.MessageBuffer;
+
+			KEEPALIVE_Response->MessageType             = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT);
+			KEEPALIVE_Response->MessageLength           = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t));
+			KEEPALIVE_Response->RequestId               = KEEPALIVE_Message->RequestId;
+			KEEPALIVE_Response->Status                  = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS);
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+static bool RNDIS_Device_ProcessNDISQuery(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
+                                          const uint32_t OId,
+                                          void* const QueryData,
+                                          const uint16_t QuerySize,
+                                          void* ResponseData,
+                                          uint16_t* const ResponseSize)
+{
+	(void)QueryData;
+	(void)QuerySize;
+
+	switch (OId)
+	{
+		case OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(AdapterSupportedOIDList);
+
+			memcpy_P(ResponseData, AdapterSupportedOIDList, sizeof(AdapterSupportedOIDList));
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_PHYSICAL_MEDIUM:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+			/* Indicate that the device is a true ethernet link */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = CPU_TO_LE32(0);
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = CPU_TO_LE32(NDIS_HardwareStatus_Ready);
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED:
+		case OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3);
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+			/* Vendor ID 0x0xFFFFFF is reserved for vendors who have not purchased a NDIS VID */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = CPU_TO_LE32(0x00FFFFFF);
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE:
+		case OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE:
+		case OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = CPU_TO_LE32(ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX);
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION:
+			*ResponseSize = (strlen(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.AdapterVendorDescription) + 1);
+
+			memcpy(ResponseData, RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.AdapterVendorDescription, *ResponseSize);
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_CONNECTED);
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+			/* Indicate 10Mb/s link speed */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = CPU_TO_LE32(100000);
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS:
+		case OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(MAC_Address_t);
+
+			memcpy(ResponseData, &RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.AdapterMACAddress, sizeof(MAC_Address_t));
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+			/* Indicate only one multicast address supported */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = CPU_TO_LE32(1);
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = cpu_to_le32(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrPacketFilter);
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_XMIT_OK:
+		case OID_GEN_RCV_OK:
+		case OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR:
+		case OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR:
+		case OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER:
+		case OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT:
+		case OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION:
+		case OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+			/* Unused statistic OIDs - always return 0 for each */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = CPU_TO_LE32(0);
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE:
+			*ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t);
+
+			/* Indicate maximum overall buffer (Ethernet frame and RNDIS header) the adapter can handle */
+			*((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = CPU_TO_LE32(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.MessageBufferLength + ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX);
+
+			return true;
+		default:
+			return false;
+	}
+}
+
+static bool RNDIS_Device_ProcessNDISSet(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
+                                        const uint32_t OId,
+                                        const void* SetData,
+                                        const uint16_t SetSize)
+{
+	(void)SetSize;
+
+	switch (OId)
+	{
+		case OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER:
+			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrPacketFilter = le32_to_cpu(*((uint32_t*)SetData));
+			RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrRNDISState   = (RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrPacketFilter) ? RNDIS_Data_Initialized : RNDIS_Initialized;
+
+			return true;
+		case OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST:
+			/* Do nothing - throw away the value from the host as it is unused */
+
+			return true;
+		default:
+			return false;
+	}
+}
+
+bool RNDIS_Device_IsPacketReceived(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) ||
+	    (RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrRNDISState != RNDIS_Data_Initialized))
+	{
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Address);
+	return Endpoint_IsOUTReceived();
+}
+
+uint8_t RNDIS_Device_ReadPacket(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
+                                void* Buffer,
+                                uint16_t* const PacketLength)
+{
+	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) ||
+	    (RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrRNDISState != RNDIS_Data_Initialized))
+	{
+		return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTEndpoint.Address);
+
+	*PacketLength = 0;
+
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+		return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+
+	RNDIS_Packet_Message_t RNDISPacketHeader;
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&RNDISPacketHeader, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t), NULL);
+
+	if (le32_to_cpu(RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength) > ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX)
+	{
+		Endpoint_StallTransaction();
+
+		return RNDIS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED;
+	}
+
+	*PacketLength = (uint16_t)le32_to_cpu(RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength);
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(Buffer, *PacketLength, NULL);
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t RNDIS_Device_SendPacket(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
+                                void* Buffer,
+                                const uint16_t PacketLength)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	if ((USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) ||
+	    (RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.CurrRNDISState != RNDIS_Data_Initialized))
+	{
+		return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()) != ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	RNDIS_Packet_Message_t RNDISPacketHeader;
+
+	memset(&RNDISPacketHeader, 0, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t));
+
+	RNDISPacketHeader.MessageType   = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MSG);
+	RNDISPacketHeader.MessageLength = cpu_to_le32(sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) + PacketLength);
+	RNDISPacketHeader.DataOffset    = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t));
+	RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength    = cpu_to_le32(PacketLength);
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&RNDISPacketHeader, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t), NULL);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, PacketLength, NULL);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDISClassDevice.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDISClassDevice.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2821d7deb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDISClassDevice.h
@@ -0,0 +1,207 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Device mode driver for the library USB RNDIS Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Device mode driver for the library USB RNDIS Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassRNDIS
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassRNDISDevice RNDIS Class Device Mode Driver
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassRNDISDevice_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDISClassDevice.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassRNDISDevice_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Device Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the RNDIS USB Class driver.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _RNDIS_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
+#define _RNDIS_CLASS_DEVICE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "../Common/RNDISClassCommon.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** \brief RNDIS Class Device Mode Configuration and State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made for each RNDIS interface
+			 *  within the user application, and passed to each of the RNDIS class driver functions as the
+			 *  \c RNDISInterfaceInfo parameter. This stores each RNDIS interface's configuration and state information.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					uint8_t  ControlInterfaceNumber; /**< Interface number of the RNDIS control interface within the device. */
+
+					USB_Endpoint_Table_t DataINEndpoint; /**< Data IN endpoint configuration table. */
+					USB_Endpoint_Table_t DataOUTEndpoint; /**< Data OUT endpoint configuration table. */
+					USB_Endpoint_Table_t NotificationEndpoint; /**< Notification IN Endpoint configuration table. */
+
+					char*         AdapterVendorDescription; /**< String description of the adapter vendor. */
+					MAC_Address_t AdapterMACAddress; /**< MAC address of the adapter. */
+
+					uint8_t*      MessageBuffer; /**< Buffer where RNDIS messages can be stored by the internal driver. This
+					                              *   should be at least 132 bytes in length for minimal functionality. */
+					uint16_t      MessageBufferLength; /**< Length in bytes of the \ref MessageBuffer RNDIS buffer. */
+				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
+				           */
+				struct
+				{
+					bool     ResponseReady; /**< Internal flag indicating if a RNDIS message is waiting to be returned to the host. */
+					uint8_t  CurrRNDISState; /**< Current RNDIS state of the adapter, a value from the \ref RNDIS_States_t enum. */
+					uint32_t CurrPacketFilter; /**< Current packet filter mode, used internally by the class driver. */
+				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				          *   are reset to their defaults when the interface is enumerated.
+				          */
+			} USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t;
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Configures the endpoints of a given RNDIS interface, ready for use. This should be linked to the library
+			 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged() event so that the endpoints are configured when the configuration
+			 *  containing the given RNDIS interface is selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a RNDIS Class configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the endpoints were successfully configured, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool RNDIS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Processes incoming control requests from the host, that are directed to the given RNDIS class interface. This should be
+			 *  linked to the library \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a RNDIS Class configuration and state.
+			 */
+			void RNDIS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** General management task for a given RNDIS class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should
+			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a RNDIS Class configuration and state.
+			 */
+			void RNDIS_Device_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Determines if a packet is currently waiting for the device to read in and process.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if a packet is waiting to be read in by the host, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool RNDIS_Device_IsPacketReceived(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Retrieves the next pending packet from the device, discarding the remainder of the RNDIS packet header to leave
+			 *  only the packet contents for processing by the device in the nominated buffer.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[out]    Buffer              Pointer to a buffer where the packer data is to be written to.
+			 *  \param[out]    PacketLength        Pointer to where the length in bytes of the read packet is to be stored.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t RNDIS_Device_ReadPacket(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
+											void* Buffer,
+											uint16_t* const PacketLength) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Sends the given packet to the attached RNDIS device, after adding a RNDIS packet message header.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Device state machine is in the \ref DEVICE_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     Buffer              Pointer to a buffer where the packer data is to be read from.
+			 *  \param[in]     PacketLength        Length in bytes of the packet to send.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t RNDIS_Device_SendPacket(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
+											void* Buffer,
+											const uint16_t PacketLength) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define RNDIS_DEVICE_MIN_MESSAGE_BUFFER_LENGTH  sizeof(AdapterSupportedOIDList) + sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Complete_t)
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+		#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_DEVICE_C)
+			static void RNDIS_Device_ProcessRNDISControlMessage(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)
+			                                                    ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static bool RNDIS_Device_ProcessNDISQuery(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
+			                                          const uint32_t OId,
+                                                      void* const QueryData,
+                                                      const uint16_t QuerySize,
+										              void* ResponseData,
+                                                      uint16_t* const ResponseSize) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
+			                                          ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(5) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(6);
+			static bool RNDIS_Device_ProcessNDISSet(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
+                                                    const uint32_t OId,
+			                                        const void* SetData,
+                                                    const uint16_t SetSize) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
+			                                        ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		#endif
+
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HIDClass.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HIDClass.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d2eea7532
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HIDClass.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master include file for the library USB HID Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Master include file for the library USB HID Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.
+ *
+ *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of
+ *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassHID HID Class Driver
+ *  \brief USB class driver for the USB-IF Human Interface Device (HID) class standard.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassHID_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HIDClassDevice.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassHID_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  HID Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the USB HID Class, for both Device
+ *  and Host USB modes. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the HID class manually
+ *  via the low-level LUFA APIs.
+ *
+ *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with
+ *  Hosts or Devices using the USB HID Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _HID_CLASS_H_
+#define _HID_CLASS_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_HID_DRIVER
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../Core/USBMode.h"
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+			#include "Device/HIDClassDevice.h"
+		#endif
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+			#include "Host/HIDClassHost.h"
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AndroidAccessoryClassHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AndroidAccessoryClassHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ac8d5dc5c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AndroidAccessoryClassHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,422 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_AOA_DRIVER
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_ANDROIDACCESSORY_HOST_C
+#include "AndroidAccessoryClassHost.h"
+
+bool AOA_Host_ValidateAccessoryDevice(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,
+                                      const USB_Descriptor_Device_t* const DeviceDescriptor,
+                                      bool* const NeedModeSwitch)
+{
+	(void)AOAInterfaceInfo;
+
+	if (DeviceDescriptor->Header.Type != DTYPE_Device)
+	  return false;
+
+	*NeedModeSwitch = ((DeviceDescriptor->ProductID != ANDROID_ACCESSORY_PRODUCT_ID) &&
+	                   (DeviceDescriptor->ProductID != ANDROID_ACCESSORY_ADB_PRODUCT_ID));
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+uint8_t AOA_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,
+                                uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+                                void* ConfigDescriptorData)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint  = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* AOAInterface    = NULL;
+
+	memset(&AOAInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(AOAInterfaceInfo->State));
+
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)
+	  return AOA_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;
+
+	if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+	                              DCOMP_AOA_Host_NextAndroidAccessoryInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+	{
+		return AOA_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+	}
+
+	AOAInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+	while (!(DataINEndpoint) || !(DataOUTEndpoint))
+	{
+		if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+		                              DCOMP_AOA_Host_NextInterfaceBulkEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			return AOA_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+		}
+
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+		  DataINEndpoint  = EndpointData;
+		else
+		  DataOUTEndpoint = EndpointData;
+	}
+
+	AOAInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Size  = le16_to_cpu(DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize);
+	AOAInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.EndpointAddress = DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress;
+	AOAInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Type  = EP_TYPE_BULK;
+
+	AOAInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Size = le16_to_cpu(DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointSize);
+	AOAInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.EndpointAddress = DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress;
+	AOAInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Type = EP_TYPE_BULK;
+
+	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&AOAInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe, 1)))
+	  return AOA_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed;
+
+	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&AOAInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe, 1)))
+	  return AOA_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed;
+
+	AOAInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive        = true;
+	AOAInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber = AOAInterface->InterfaceNumber;
+
+	return AOA_ENUMERROR_NoError;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DCOMP_AOA_Host_NextAndroidAccessoryInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		if ((Interface->Class    == AOA_CSCP_AOADataClass)    &&
+		    (Interface->SubClass == AOA_CSCP_AOADataSubclass) &&
+		    (Interface->Protocol == AOA_CSCP_AOADataProtocol))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DCOMP_AOA_Host_NextInterfaceBulkEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* Endpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		uint8_t EndpointType = (Endpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
+
+		if ((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) && (!(Pipe_IsEndpointBound(Endpoint->EndpointAddress))))
+		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+void AOA_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(AOAInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return;
+
+	#if !defined(NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH)
+	AOA_Host_Flush(AOAInterfaceInfo);
+	#endif
+}
+
+uint8_t AOA_Host_StartAccessoryMode(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	uint16_t AccessoryProtocol;
+	if ((ErrorCode = AOA_Host_GetAccessoryProtocol(&AccessoryProtocol)) != HOST_WAITERROR_Successful)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	if ((AccessoryProtocol != CPU_TO_LE16(AOA_PROTOCOL_AccessoryV1)) && (AccessoryProtocol != CPU_TO_LE16(AOA_PROTOCOL_AccessoryV2)))
+	  return AOA_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED;
+
+	for (uint8_t PropertyIndex = 0; PropertyIndex < AOA_STRING_TOTAL_STRINGS; PropertyIndex++)
+	{
+		if ((ErrorCode = AOA_Host_SendPropertyString(AOAInterfaceInfo, PropertyIndex)) != HOST_WAITERROR_Successful)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+	{
+		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_VENDOR | REQREC_DEVICE),
+		.bRequest      = AOA_REQ_StartAccessoryMode,
+		.wValue        = 0,
+		.wIndex        = 0,
+		.wLength       = 0,
+	};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);
+}
+
+static uint8_t AOA_Host_GetAccessoryProtocol(uint16_t* const Protocol)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+	{
+		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_VENDOR | REQREC_DEVICE),
+		.bRequest      = AOA_REQ_GetAccessoryProtocol,
+		.wValue        = 0,
+		.wIndex        = 0,
+		.wLength       = sizeof(uint16_t),
+	};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Protocol);
+}
+
+static uint8_t AOA_Host_SendPropertyString(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,
+                                           const uint8_t StringIndex)
+{
+	const char* String = AOAInterfaceInfo->Config.PropertyStrings[StringIndex];
+
+	if (String == NULL)
+	  String = "";
+
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+	{
+		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_VENDOR | REQREC_DEVICE),
+		.bRequest      = AOA_REQ_SendString,
+		.wValue        = 0,
+		.wIndex        = StringIndex,
+		.wLength       = (strlen(String) + 1),
+	};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest((char*)String);
+}
+
+uint8_t AOA_Host_SendData(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,
+                          const void* const Buffer,
+                          const uint16_t Length)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(AOAInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(AOAInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);
+
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+	ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, Length, NULL);
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+uint8_t AOA_Host_SendString(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,
+                            const char* const String)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(AOAInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(AOAInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);
+
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+	ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(String, strlen(String), NULL);
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+uint8_t AOA_Host_SendByte(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,
+                          const uint8_t Data)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(AOAInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(AOAInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	{
+		Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()) != PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	Pipe_Write_8(Data);
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;
+}
+
+uint16_t AOA_Host_BytesReceived(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(AOAInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return 0;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(AOAInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+	{
+		if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))
+		{
+			Pipe_ClearIN();
+			Pipe_Freeze();
+			return 0;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			Pipe_Freeze();
+			return Pipe_BytesInPipe();
+		}
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+
+		return 0;
+	}
+}
+
+int16_t AOA_Host_ReceiveByte(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(AOAInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return -1;
+
+	int16_t ReceivedByte = -1;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(AOAInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+	{
+		if (Pipe_BytesInPipe())
+		  ReceivedByte = Pipe_Read_8();
+
+		if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))
+		  Pipe_ClearIN();
+	}
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return ReceivedByte;
+}
+
+uint8_t AOA_Host_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(AOAInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(AOAInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))
+	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;
+
+	bool BankFull = !(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed());
+
+	Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+	if (BankFull)
+	{
+		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()) != PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+
+		Pipe_ClearOUT();
+	}
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;
+}
+
+#if defined(FDEV_SETUP_STREAM)
+void AOA_Host_CreateStream(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,
+                           FILE* const Stream)
+{
+	*Stream = (FILE)FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(AOA_Host_putchar, AOA_Host_getchar, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);
+	fdev_set_udata(Stream, AOAInterfaceInfo);
+}
+
+void AOA_Host_CreateBlockingStream(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,
+                                   FILE* const Stream)
+{
+	*Stream = (FILE)FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(AOA_Host_putchar, AOA_Host_getchar_Blocking, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);
+	fdev_set_udata(Stream, AOAInterfaceInfo);
+}
+
+static int AOA_Host_putchar(char c,
+                            FILE* Stream)
+{
+	return AOA_Host_SendByte((USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream), c) ? _FDEV_ERR : 0;
+}
+
+static int AOA_Host_getchar(FILE* Stream)
+{
+	int16_t ReceivedByte = AOA_Host_ReceiveByte((USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream));
+
+	if (ReceivedByte < 0)
+	  return _FDEV_EOF;
+
+	return ReceivedByte;
+}
+
+static int AOA_Host_getchar_Blocking(FILE* Stream)
+{
+	int16_t ReceivedByte;
+
+	while ((ReceivedByte = AOA_Host_ReceiveByte((USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream))) < 0)
+	{
+		if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return _FDEV_EOF;
+
+		AOA_Host_USBTask((USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream));
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+
+	return ReceivedByte;
+}
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AndroidAccessoryClassHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AndroidAccessoryClassHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0476f2e02
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AndroidAccessoryClassHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,314 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB Android Open Accessory Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Host mode driver for the library USB Android Open Accessory Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassAOA
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassAndroidAccessoryHost Android Open Accessory Class Host Mode Driver
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassAndroidAccessoryHost_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AndroidAccessoryClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassAndroidAccessoryHost_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the Android Open Accessory USB Class driver.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __AOA_CLASS_HOST_H__
+#define __AOA_CLASS_HOST_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "../Common/AndroidAccessoryClassCommon.h"
+
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_AOA_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Error code for some Android Open Accessory Host functions, indicating a logical (and not hardware) error. */
+			#define AOA_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED              0x80
+
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** \brief Android Open Accessory Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,
+			 *  and passed to each of the Android Open Accessory class driver functions as the \c AOAInterfaceInfo
+			 *  parameter. This stores each Android Open Accessory interface's configuration and state information.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataINPipe; /**< Data IN Pipe configuration table. */
+					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataOUTPipe; /**< Data OUT Pipe configuration table. */
+
+					char*    PropertyStrings[AOA_STRING_TOTAL_STRINGS]; /**< Android Accessory property strings, sent to identify the accessory when the
+					                                                     *   Android device is switched into Open Accessory mode. */
+				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
+				           */
+				struct
+				{
+					bool IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid
+					                *   after \ref AOA_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the
+					                *   Configured state.
+					                */
+					uint8_t  InterfaceNumber; /**< Interface index of the AOA interface within the attached device. */
+				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when
+						  *   the interface is enumerated.
+						  */
+			} USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t;
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref AOA_Host_ConfigurePipes() function. */
+			enum AOA_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				AOA_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully. */
+				AOA_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor. */
+				AOA_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound = 2, /**< A compatible Android Open Accessory interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor. */
+				AOA_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed    = 3, /**< One or more pipes for the specified interface could not be configured correctly. */
+			};
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** General management task for a given Android Open Accessory host class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface.
+			 *  This should be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AOAInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Android Open Accessory Class host configuration and state.
+			 */
+			void AOA_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Validates a device descriptor, to check if the device is a valid Android device, and if it is currently in Android Open Accessory mode.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AOAInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an AOA Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     DeviceDescriptor  Pointer a buffer containing the attached device's Device Descriptor.
+			 *  \param[out]    NeedModeSwitch    Pointer to a boolean where the mode switch requirement of the attached device is to be stored.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the attached device is a valid Android device, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool AOA_Host_ValidateAccessoryDevice(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,
+                                                  const USB_Descriptor_Device_t* const DeviceDescriptor,
+			                                      bool* const NeedModeSwitch) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given Android Open Accessory host interface instance using the Configuration
+			 *  Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given Android Open Accessory Host instance's
+			 *  state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it is found within the device. This should be
+			 *  called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while the host state machine is in the Addressed state.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AOAInterfaceInfo      Pointer to a structure containing an AOA Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorSize  Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.
+			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorData  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref AOA_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t AOA_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,
+			                                uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+			                                void* ConfigDescriptorData) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+			/** Starts Accessory Mode in the attached Android device. This function will validate the device's Android Open Accessory protocol
+			 *  version, send the configured property strings, and request a switch to Android Open Accessory mode.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AOAInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an AOA Class host configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum, or \ref AOA_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if a logical error occurred..
+			 */
+			uint8_t AOA_Host_StartAccessoryMode(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Sends a given data buffer to the attached USB device, if connected. If a device is not connected when the function is
+			 *  called, the data will be discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the device until either the pipe bank
+			 *  becomes full, or the \ref AOA_Host_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to the device. This allows for
+			 *  multiple bytes to be packed into a single pipe packet, increasing data throughput.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AOAInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a AOA Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     Buffer            Pointer to a buffer containing the data to send to the device.
+			 *  \param[in]     Length            Length of the data to send to the device.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t AOA_Host_SendData(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,
+			                          const void* const Buffer,
+			                          const uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Sends a given null-terminated string to the attached USB device, if connected. If a device is not connected when the
+			 *  function is called, the string is discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the device until either the pipe
+			 *  bank becomes full, or the \ref AOA_Host_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to the device. This allows
+			 *  for multiple bytes to be packed into a single pipe packet, increasing data throughput.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AOAInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a AOA Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     String            Pointer to the null terminated string to send to the device.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t AOA_Host_SendString(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,
+			                            const char* const String) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** Sends a given byte to the attached USB device, if connected. If a device is not connected when the function is called, the
+			 *  byte is discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the device until either the pipe bank becomes full, or the
+			 *  \ref AOA_Host_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to the host. This allows for multiple bytes to be
+			 *  packed into a single pipe packet, increasing data throughput.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AOAInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a AOA Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     Data              Byte of data to send to the device.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t AOA_Host_SendByte(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,
+			                          const uint8_t Data) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Determines the number of bytes received by the AOA interface from the device, waiting to be read. This indicates the number
+			 *  of bytes in the IN pipe bank only, and thus the number of calls to \ref AOA_Host_ReceiveByte() which are guaranteed to succeed
+			 *  immediately. If multiple bytes are to be received, they should be buffered by the user application, as the pipe bank will not be
+			 *  released back to the USB controller until all bytes are read.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AOAInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a AOA Class host configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Total number of buffered bytes received from the device.
+			 */
+			uint16_t AOA_Host_BytesReceived(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Reads a byte of data from the device. If no data is waiting to be read of if a USB device is not connected, the function
+			 *  returns a negative value. The \ref AOA_Host_BytesReceived() function may be queried in advance to determine how many bytes
+			 *  are currently buffered in the AOA interface's data receive pipe.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AOAInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a AOA Class host configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next received byte from the device, or a negative value if no data received.
+			 */
+			int16_t AOA_Host_ReceiveByte(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Flushes any data waiting to be sent, ensuring that the send buffer is cleared.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AOAInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a AOA Class host configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t AOA_Host_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Creates a standard character stream for the given AOA Device instance so that it can be used with all the regular
+			 *  functions in the standard \c <stdio.h> library that accept a \c FILE stream as a destination (e.g. \c fprintf). The created
+			 *  stream is bidirectional and can be used for both input and output functions.
+			 *
+			 *  Reading data from this stream is non-blocking, i.e. in most instances, complete strings cannot be read in by a single
+			 *  fetch, as the endpoint will not be ready at some point in the transmission, aborting the transfer. However, this may
+			 *  be used when the read data is processed byte-per-bye (via \c getc()) or when the user application will implement its own
+			 *  line buffering.
+			 *
+			 *  \note The created stream can be given as \c stdout if desired to direct the standard output from all \c <stdio.h> functions
+			 *        to the given AOA interface.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function is not available on all microcontroller architectures.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AOAInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a AOA Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in,out] Stream            Pointer to a FILE structure where the created stream should be placed.
+			 */
+			void AOA_Host_CreateStream(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,
+			                           FILE* const Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** Identical to \ref AOA_Host_CreateStream(), except that reads are blocking until the calling stream function terminates
+			 *  the transfer. While blocking, the USB and AOA service tasks are called repeatedly to maintain USB communications.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function is not available on all microcontroller architectures.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AOAInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a AOA Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in,out] Stream            Pointer to a FILE structure where the created stream should be placed.
+			 */
+			void AOA_Host_CreateBlockingStream(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,
+			                                   FILE* const Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_ANDROIDACCESSORY_HOST_C)
+				#if defined(FDEV_SETUP_STREAM)
+				static int AOA_Host_putchar(char c,
+				                            FILE* Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+				static int AOA_Host_getchar(FILE* Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static int AOA_Host_getchar_Blocking(FILE* Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				#endif
+
+				static uint8_t AOA_Host_GetAccessoryProtocol(uint16_t* const Protocol) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static uint8_t AOA_Host_SendPropertyString(USB_ClassInfo_AOA_Host_t* const AOAInterfaceInfo,
+			                                               const uint8_t StringIndex) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+				static uint8_t DCOMP_AOA_Host_NextAndroidAccessoryInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+				                                                            ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static uint8_t DCOMP_AOA_Host_NextInterfaceBulkEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+				                                                        ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			#endif
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AudioClassHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AudioClassHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3b5bceb6a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AudioClassHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,223 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_DRIVER
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_HOST_C
+#include "AudioClassHost.h"
+
+uint8_t Audio_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+                                  uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+                                  void* ConfigDescriptorData)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint          = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataOUTEndpoint         = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* AudioControlInterface   = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* AudioStreamingInterface = NULL;
+
+	memset(&AudioInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(AudioInterfaceInfo->State));
+
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)
+	  return AUDIO_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;
+
+	while ((AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address  && !(DataINEndpoint)) ||
+	       (AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address && !(DataOUTEndpoint)))
+	{
+		if (!(AudioControlInterface) ||
+		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+		                              DCOMP_Audio_Host_NextAudioInterfaceDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			if (!(AudioControlInterface) ||
+			    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+			                              DCOMP_Audio_Host_NextAudioStreamInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+			{
+				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+				                              DCOMP_Audio_Host_NextAudioControlInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+				{
+					return AUDIO_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+				}
+
+				AudioControlInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+				                              DCOMP_Audio_Host_NextAudioStreamInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+				{
+					return AUDIO_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+				}
+			}
+
+			AudioStreamingInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+			DataINEndpoint  = NULL;
+			DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;
+
+			continue;
+		}
+
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+		  DataINEndpoint  = EndpointData;
+		else
+		  DataOUTEndpoint = EndpointData;
+	}
+
+	AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Size   = le16_to_cpu(DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize);
+	AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.EndpointAddress = DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress;
+	AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Type   = EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS;
+	AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Banks  = 2;
+
+	AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Size  = le16_to_cpu(DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointSize);
+	AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.EndpointAddress = DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress;
+	AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Type  = EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS;
+	AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Banks = 2;
+
+	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe, 1)))
+	  return AUDIO_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed;
+
+	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe, 1)))
+	  return AUDIO_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed;
+
+	AudioInterfaceInfo->State.ControlInterfaceNumber    = AudioControlInterface->InterfaceNumber;
+	AudioInterfaceInfo->State.StreamingInterfaceNumber  = AudioStreamingInterface->InterfaceNumber;
+	AudioInterfaceInfo->State.EnabledStreamingAltIndex  = AudioStreamingInterface->AlternateSetting;
+	AudioInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive = true;
+
+	return AUDIO_ENUMERROR_NoError;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DCOMP_Audio_Host_NextAudioControlInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		if ((Interface->Class    == AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass) &&
+		    (Interface->SubClass == AUDIO_CSCP_ControlSubclass) &&
+		    (Interface->Protocol == AUDIO_CSCP_ControlProtocol))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DCOMP_Audio_Host_NextAudioStreamInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		if ((Interface->Class    == AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass) &&
+		    (Interface->SubClass == AUDIO_CSCP_AudioStreamingSubclass) &&
+		    (Interface->Protocol == AUDIO_CSCP_StreamingProtocol))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DCOMP_Audio_Host_NextAudioInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* Endpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		if ((Endpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS)
+		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+uint8_t Audio_Host_StartStopStreaming(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+			                          const bool EnableStreaming)
+{
+	if (!(AudioInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	return USB_Host_SetInterfaceAltSetting(AudioInterfaceInfo->State.StreamingInterfaceNumber,
+	                                       EnableStreaming ? AudioInterfaceInfo->State.EnabledStreamingAltIndex : 0);
+}
+
+uint8_t Audio_Host_GetSetEndpointProperty(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+			                              const uint8_t DataPipeIndex,
+			                              const uint8_t EndpointProperty,
+			                              const uint8_t EndpointControl,
+			                              const uint16_t DataLength,
+			                              void* const Data)
+{
+	if (!(AudioInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t RequestType;
+	uint8_t EndpointAddress;
+
+	if (EndpointProperty & 0x80)
+	  RequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT);
+	else
+	  RequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT);
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(DataPipeIndex);
+	EndpointAddress = Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress();
+
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = RequestType,
+			.bRequest      = EndpointProperty,
+			.wValue        = ((uint16_t)EndpointControl << 8),
+			.wIndex        = EndpointAddress,
+			.wLength       = DataLength,
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Data);
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AudioClassHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AudioClassHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b00bb5fcd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AudioClassHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,411 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB Audio 1.0 Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Host mode driver for the library USB Audio 1.0 Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassAudio
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassAudioHost Audio 1.0 Class Host Mode Driver
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassAudioHost_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AudioClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassAudioHost_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the Audio 1.0 USB Class driver.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __AUDIO_CLASS_HOST_H__
+#define __AUDIO_CLASS_HOST_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "../Common/AudioClassCommon.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** \brief Audio Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,
+			 *  and passed to each of the Audio class driver functions as the \c AudioInterfaceInfo parameter. This
+			 *  stores each Audio interface's configuration and state information.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataINPipe; /**< Data IN Pipe configuration table. */
+					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataOUTPipe; /**< Data OUT Pipe configuration table. */
+				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
+				           */
+				struct
+				{
+					bool IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid
+					                *   after \ref Audio_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the
+					                *   Configured state.
+					                */
+					uint8_t ControlInterfaceNumber; /**< Interface index of the Audio Control interface within the attached device. */
+					uint8_t StreamingInterfaceNumber; /**< Interface index of the Audio Streaming interface within the attached device. */
+
+					uint8_t EnabledStreamingAltIndex; /**< Alternative setting index of the Audio Streaming interface when the stream is enabled. */
+				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when
+						  *   the interface is enumerated.
+						  */
+			} USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t;
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref Audio_Host_ConfigurePipes() function. */
+			enum AUDIO_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				AUDIO_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully. */
+				AUDIO_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor. */
+				AUDIO_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound = 2, /**< A compatible AUDIO interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor. */
+				AUDIO_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed    = 3, /**< One or more pipes for the specified interface could not be configured correctly. */
+			};
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given Audio host interface instance using the Configuration
+			 *  Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given Audio Host instance's
+			 *  state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it is found within the
+			 *  device. This should be called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while the host state
+			 *  machine is in the Addressed state.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo    Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorSize  Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.
+			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorData  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref AUDIO_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Audio_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+			                                  uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+			                                  void* ConfigDescriptorData) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+			/** Starts or stops the audio streaming for the given configured Audio Host interface, allowing for audio samples to be
+			 *  send and/or received.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     EnableStreaming     Boolean true to enable streaming of the specified interface, \c false to disable
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Audio_Host_StartStopStreaming(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+			                                      const bool EnableStreaming) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Gets or sets the specified property of a streaming audio class endpoint that is bound to a pipe in the given
+			 *  class instance.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     DataPipeIndex       Index of the data pipe whose bound endpoint is to be altered.
+			 *  \param[in]     EndpointProperty    Property of the endpoint to get or set, a value from \ref Audio_ClassRequests_t.
+			 *  \param[in]     EndpointControl     Parameter of the endpoint to get or set, a value from \ref Audio_EndpointControls_t.
+			 *  \param[in,out] DataLength          For SET operations, the length of the parameter data to set. For GET operations, the maximum
+			 *                                     length of the retrieved data.
+			 *  \param[in,out] Data                Pointer to a location where the parameter data is stored for SET operations, or where
+			 *                                     the retrieved data is to be stored for GET operations.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Audio_Host_GetSetEndpointProperty(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+			                                          const uint8_t DataPipeIndex,
+			                                          const uint8_t EndpointProperty,
+			                                          const uint8_t EndpointControl,
+			                                          const uint16_t DataLength,
+			                                          void* const Data) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(6);
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** General management task for a given Audio host class interface, required for the correct operation of
+			 *  the interface. This should be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task
+			 *  \ref USB_USBTask().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class host configuration and state.
+			 */
+			static inline void Audio_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+			                                      ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Audio_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				(void)AudioInterfaceInfo;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the given audio interface is ready for a sample to be read from it, and selects the streaming
+			 *  IN pipe ready for reading.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or
+			 *       the call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the given Audio interface has a sample to be read, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Audio_Host_IsSampleReceived(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+			                                               ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Audio_Host_IsSampleReceived(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(AudioInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+				  return false;
+
+				bool SampleReceived = false;
+
+				Pipe_SelectPipe(AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);
+				Pipe_Unfreeze();
+				SampleReceived = Pipe_IsINReceived();
+				Pipe_Freeze();
+
+				return SampleReceived;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the given audio interface is ready to accept the next sample to be written to it, and selects
+			 *  the streaming OUT pipe ready for writing.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or
+			 *       the call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the given Audio interface is ready to accept the next sample, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Audio_Host_IsReadyForNextSample(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+			                                                   ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Audio_Host_IsReadyForNextSample(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(AudioInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+				  return false;
+
+				Pipe_SelectPipe(AudioInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);
+				return Pipe_IsOUTReady();
+			}
+
+			/** Reads the next 8-bit audio sample from the current audio interface.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This should be preceded immediately by a call to the \ref Audio_Host_IsSampleReceived() function to ensure
+			 *       that the correct pipe is selected and ready for data.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return  Signed 8-bit audio sample from the audio interface.
+			 */
+			static inline int8_t Audio_Host_ReadSample8(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+			                                            ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline int8_t Audio_Host_ReadSample8(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				int8_t Sample;
+
+				(void)AudioInterfaceInfo;
+
+				Sample = Pipe_Read_8();
+
+				if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))
+				{
+					Pipe_Unfreeze();
+					Pipe_ClearIN();
+					Pipe_Freeze();
+				}
+
+				return Sample;
+			}
+
+			/** Reads the next 16-bit audio sample from the current audio interface.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This should be preceded immediately by a call to the \ref Audio_Host_IsSampleReceived() function to ensure
+			 *       that the correct pipe is selected and ready for data.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return  Signed 16-bit audio sample from the audio interface.
+			 */
+			static inline int16_t Audio_Host_ReadSample16(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+			                                              ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline int16_t Audio_Host_ReadSample16(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				int16_t Sample;
+
+				(void)AudioInterfaceInfo;
+
+				Sample = (int16_t)Pipe_Read_16_LE();
+
+				if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))
+				{
+					Pipe_Unfreeze();
+					Pipe_ClearIN();
+					Pipe_Freeze();
+				}
+
+				return Sample;
+			}
+
+			/** Reads the next 24-bit audio sample from the current audio interface.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This should be preceded immediately by a call to the \ref Audio_Host_IsSampleReceived() function to ensure
+			 *       that the correct pipe is selected and ready for data.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Signed 24-bit audio sample from the audio interface.
+			 */
+			static inline int32_t Audio_Host_ReadSample24(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+			                                              ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline int32_t Audio_Host_ReadSample24(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				int32_t Sample;
+
+				(void)AudioInterfaceInfo;
+
+				Sample = (((uint32_t)Pipe_Read_8() << 16) | Pipe_Read_16_LE());
+
+				if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))
+				{
+					Pipe_Unfreeze();
+					Pipe_ClearIN();
+					Pipe_Freeze();
+				}
+
+				return Sample;
+			}
+
+			/** Writes the next 8-bit audio sample to the current audio interface.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This should be preceded immediately by a call to the \ref Audio_Host_IsReadyForNextSample() function to
+			 *       ensure that the correct pipe is selected and ready for data.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     Sample              Signed 8-bit audio sample.
+			 */
+			static inline void Audio_Host_WriteSample8(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+			                                           const int8_t Sample) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Audio_Host_WriteSample8(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+			                                           const int8_t Sample)
+			{
+				(void)AudioInterfaceInfo;
+
+				Pipe_Write_8(Sample);
+
+				if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+				{
+					Pipe_Unfreeze();
+					Pipe_ClearOUT();
+					Pipe_WaitUntilReady();
+					Pipe_Freeze();
+				}
+			}
+
+			/** Writes the next 16-bit audio sample to the current audio interface.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This should be preceded immediately by a call to the \ref Audio_Host_IsReadyForNextSample() function to
+			 *       ensure that the correct pipe is selected and ready for data.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     Sample              Signed 16-bit audio sample.
+			 */
+			static inline void Audio_Host_WriteSample16(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+			                                            const int16_t Sample) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Audio_Host_WriteSample16(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+			                                            const int16_t Sample)
+			{
+				(void)AudioInterfaceInfo;
+
+				Pipe_Write_16_LE(Sample);
+
+				if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+				{
+					Pipe_Unfreeze();
+					Pipe_ClearOUT();
+					Pipe_WaitUntilReady();
+					Pipe_Freeze();
+				}
+			}
+
+			/** Writes the next 24-bit audio sample to the current audio interface.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This should be preceded immediately by a call to the \ref Audio_Host_IsReadyForNextSample() function to
+			 *       ensure that the correct pipe is selected and ready for data.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] AudioInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Audio Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     Sample              Signed 24-bit audio sample.
+			 */
+			static inline void Audio_Host_WriteSample24(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+			                                            const int32_t Sample) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Audio_Host_WriteSample24(USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Host_t* const AudioInterfaceInfo,
+			                                            const int32_t Sample)
+			{
+				(void)AudioInterfaceInfo;
+
+				Pipe_Write_16_LE(Sample);
+				Pipe_Write_8(Sample >> 16);
+
+				if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+				{
+					Pipe_Unfreeze();
+					Pipe_ClearOUT();
+					Pipe_WaitUntilReady();
+					Pipe_Freeze();
+				}
+			}
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_AUDIO_HOST_C)
+				static uint8_t DCOMP_Audio_Host_NextAudioControlInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+				                                                          ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static uint8_t DCOMP_Audio_Host_NextAudioStreamInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+				                                                         ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static uint8_t DCOMP_Audio_Host_NextAudioInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+				                                                               ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			#endif
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDCClassHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDCClassHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b32a237cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDCClassHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,477 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DRIVER
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_HOST_C
+#include "CDCClassHost.h"
+
+uint8_t CDC_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,
+                                uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+                                void* ConfigDescriptorData)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint       = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataOUTEndpoint      = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  NotificationEndpoint = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* CDCControlInterface  = NULL;
+
+	memset(&CDCInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(CDCInterfaceInfo->State));
+
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)
+	  return CDC_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;
+
+	while (!(DataINEndpoint) || !(DataOUTEndpoint) || !(NotificationEndpoint))
+	{
+		if (!(CDCControlInterface) ||
+		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+		                              DCOMP_CDC_Host_NextCDCInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			if (NotificationEndpoint)
+			{
+				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+				                              DCOMP_CDC_Host_NextCDCDataInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+				{
+					return CDC_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+				}
+
+				DataINEndpoint  = NULL;
+				DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+				                              DCOMP_CDC_Host_NextCDCControlInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+				{
+					return CDC_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+				}
+
+				CDCControlInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+				NotificationEndpoint = NULL;
+			}
+
+			continue;
+		}
+
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+		{
+			if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)
+			  NotificationEndpoint = EndpointData;
+			else
+			  DataINEndpoint = EndpointData;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			DataOUTEndpoint = EndpointData;
+		}
+	}
+
+	CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Size  = le16_to_cpu(DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize);
+	CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.EndpointAddress = DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress;
+	CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Type  = EP_TYPE_BULK;
+
+	CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Size = le16_to_cpu(DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointSize);
+	CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.EndpointAddress = DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress;
+	CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Type = EP_TYPE_BULK;
+
+	CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipe.Size = le16_to_cpu(NotificationEndpoint->EndpointSize);
+	CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipe.EndpointAddress = NotificationEndpoint->EndpointAddress;
+	CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipe.Type = EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT;
+
+	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe, 1)))
+	  return CDC_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed;
+
+	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe, 1)))
+	  return CDC_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed;
+
+	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipe, 1)))
+	  return CDC_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed;
+
+	CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlInterfaceNumber = CDCControlInterface->InterfaceNumber;
+	CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.HostToDevice = (CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_RTS | CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_DTR);
+	CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost = (CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_DCD  | CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_DSR);
+	CDCInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive = true;
+
+	return CDC_ENUMERROR_NoError;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DCOMP_CDC_Host_NextCDCControlInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		if ((Interface->Class    == CDC_CSCP_CDCClass)    &&
+		    (Interface->SubClass == CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass) &&
+		    (Interface->Protocol == CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DCOMP_CDC_Host_NextCDCDataInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		if ((Interface->Class    == CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass)   &&
+		    (Interface->SubClass == CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass) &&
+		    (Interface->Protocol == CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DCOMP_CDC_Host_NextCDCInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* Endpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		uint8_t EndpointType = (Endpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
+
+		if (((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) || (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)) &&
+		    !(Pipe_IsEndpointBound(Endpoint->EndpointAddress)))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+void CDC_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+	{
+		USB_Request_Header_t Notification;
+		Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&Notification, sizeof(USB_Request_Header_t), NULL);
+
+		if ((Notification.bRequest      == CDC_NOTIF_SerialState) &&
+		    (Notification.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)))
+		{
+			Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost,
+			                    sizeof(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost),
+			                    NULL);
+
+			Pipe_ClearIN();
+
+			EVENT_CDC_Host_ControLineStateChanged(CDCInterfaceInfo);
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			Pipe_ClearIN();
+		}
+	}
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	#if !defined(NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH)
+	CDC_Host_Flush(CDCInterfaceInfo);
+	#endif
+}
+
+uint8_t CDC_Host_SetLineEncoding(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+	{
+		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+		.bRequest      = CDC_REQ_SetLineEncoding,
+		.wValue        = 0,
+		.wIndex        = CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlInterfaceNumber,
+		.wLength       = sizeof(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding),
+	};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(&CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding);
+}
+
+uint8_t CDC_Host_SendControlLineStateChange(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+	{
+		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+		.bRequest      = CDC_REQ_SetControlLineState,
+		.wValue        = CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.HostToDevice,
+		.wIndex        = CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlInterfaceNumber,
+		.wLength       = 0,
+	};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);
+}
+
+uint8_t CDC_Host_SendBreak(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,
+                           const uint8_t Duration)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+	{
+		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+		.bRequest      = CDC_REQ_SendBreak,
+		.wValue        = Duration,
+		.wIndex        = CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlInterfaceNumber,
+		.wLength       = 0,
+	};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);
+}
+
+uint8_t CDC_Host_SendData(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,
+                          const void* const Buffer,
+                          const uint16_t Length)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);
+
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+	ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, Length, NULL);
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+uint8_t CDC_Host_SendString(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,
+                            const char* const String)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);
+
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+	ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(String, strlen(String), NULL);
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+uint8_t CDC_Host_SendByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,
+                          const uint8_t Data)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	{
+		Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()) != PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	Pipe_Write_8(Data);
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;
+}
+
+uint16_t CDC_Host_BytesReceived(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return 0;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+	{
+		if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))
+		{
+			Pipe_ClearIN();
+			Pipe_Freeze();
+			return 0;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			Pipe_Freeze();
+			return Pipe_BytesInPipe();
+		}
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+
+		return 0;
+	}
+}
+
+int16_t CDC_Host_ReceiveByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return -1;
+
+	int16_t ReceivedByte = -1;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+	{
+		if (Pipe_BytesInPipe())
+		  ReceivedByte = Pipe_Read_8();
+
+		if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))
+		  Pipe_ClearIN();
+	}
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return ReceivedByte;
+}
+
+uint8_t CDC_Host_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(CDCInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))
+	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;
+
+	bool BankFull = !(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed());
+
+	Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+	if (BankFull)
+	{
+		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()) != PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+
+		Pipe_ClearOUT();
+	}
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;
+}
+
+#if defined(FDEV_SETUP_STREAM)
+void CDC_Host_CreateStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,
+                           FILE* const Stream)
+{
+	*Stream = (FILE)FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(CDC_Host_putchar, CDC_Host_getchar, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);
+	fdev_set_udata(Stream, CDCInterfaceInfo);
+}
+
+void CDC_Host_CreateBlockingStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,
+                                   FILE* const Stream)
+{
+	*Stream = (FILE)FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(CDC_Host_putchar, CDC_Host_getchar_Blocking, _FDEV_SETUP_RW);
+	fdev_set_udata(Stream, CDCInterfaceInfo);
+}
+
+static int CDC_Host_putchar(char c,
+                            FILE* Stream)
+{
+	return CDC_Host_SendByte((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream), c) ? _FDEV_ERR : 0;
+}
+
+static int CDC_Host_getchar(FILE* Stream)
+{
+	int16_t ReceivedByte = CDC_Host_ReceiveByte((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream));
+
+	if (ReceivedByte < 0)
+	  return _FDEV_EOF;
+
+	return ReceivedByte;
+}
+
+static int CDC_Host_getchar_Blocking(FILE* Stream)
+{
+	int16_t ReceivedByte;
+
+	while ((ReceivedByte = CDC_Host_ReceiveByte((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream))) < 0)
+	{
+		if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return _FDEV_EOF;
+
+		CDC_Host_USBTask((USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t*)fdev_get_udata(Stream));
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+
+	return ReceivedByte;
+}
+#endif
+
+void CDC_Host_Event_Stub(void)
+{
+
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDCClassHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDCClassHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..aeee23e50
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDCClassHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,351 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB CDC Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Host mode driver for the library USB CDC Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassCDC
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassCDCHost CDC Class Host Mode Driver
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassCDCHost_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDCClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassCDCHost_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the CDC USB Class driver.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __CDC_CLASS_HOST_H__
+#define __CDC_CLASS_HOST_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "../Common/CDCClassCommon.h"
+
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** \brief CDC Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,
+			 *  and passed to each of the CDC class driver functions as the \c CDCInterfaceInfo parameter. This
+			 *  stores each CDC interface's configuration and state information.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataINPipe; /**< Data IN Pipe configuration table. */
+					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataOUTPipe; /**< Data OUT Pipe configuration table. */
+					USB_Pipe_Table_t NotificationPipe; /**< Notification IN Pipe configuration table. */
+				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
+				           */
+				struct
+				{
+					bool IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid
+					                *   after \ref CDC_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the
+					                *   Configured state.
+					                */
+					uint8_t  ControlInterfaceNumber; /**< Interface index of the CDC-ACM control interface within the attached device. */
+
+					struct
+					{
+						uint16_t HostToDevice; /**< Control line states from the host to device, as a set of \c CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_*
+						                        *   masks - to notify the device of changes to these values, call the
+						                        *   \ref CDC_Host_SendControlLineStateChange() function.
+						                        */
+						uint16_t DeviceToHost; /**< Control line states from the device to host, as a set of \c CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_*
+						                        *   masks. This value is updated each time \ref CDC_Host_USBTask() is called.
+						                        */
+					} ControlLineStates; /**< Current states of the virtual serial port's control lines between the device and host. */
+
+					CDC_LineEncoding_t LineEncoding; /**< Line encoding used in the virtual serial port, for the device's information.
+					                                  *   This is generally only used if the virtual serial port data is to be
+					                                  *   reconstructed on a physical UART. When set by the host application, the
+					                                  *   \ref CDC_Host_SetLineEncoding() function must be called to push the changes
+					                                  *   to the device.
+					                                  */
+				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when
+						  *   the interface is enumerated.
+						  */
+			} USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t;
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref CDC_Host_ConfigurePipes() function. */
+			enum CDC_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				CDC_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully. */
+				CDC_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor. */
+				CDC_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound = 2, /**< A compatible CDC interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor. */
+				CDC_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed    = 3, /**< One or more pipes for the specified interface could not be configured correctly. */
+			};
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** General management task for a given CDC host class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should
+			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an CDC Class host configuration and state.
+			 */
+			void CDC_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given CDC host interface instance using the Configuration
+			 *  Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given CDC Host instance's
+			 *  state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it is found within the device.
+			 *  This should be called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while the host state machine is in
+			 *  the Addressed state.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo      Pointer to a structure containing an CDC Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorSize  Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.
+			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorData  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref CDC_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t CDC_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,
+			                                uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+			                                void* ConfigDescriptorData) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+			/** Sets the line encoding for the attached device's virtual serial port. This should be called when the \c LineEncoding
+			 *  values of the interface have been changed to push the new settings to the USB device.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t CDC_Host_SetLineEncoding(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Sends a Serial Control Line State Change notification to the device. This should be called when the virtual serial
+			 *  control lines (DTR, RTS, etc.) have changed states. Line states persist until they are cleared via a second
+			 *  notification. This should be called each time the CDC class driver's \c ControlLineStates.HostToDevice value is updated
+			 *  to push the new states to the USB device.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t CDC_Host_SendControlLineStateChange(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Sends a Send Break request to the device. This is generally used to separate data or to indicate a special condition
+			 *  to the receiving device.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     Duration          Duration of the break, in milliseconds.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t CDC_Host_SendBreak(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,
+			                           const uint8_t Duration) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Sends a given data buffer to the attached USB device, if connected. If a device is not connected when the function is
+			 *  called, the data will be discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the device until either the pipe bank
+			 *  becomes full, or the \ref CDC_Host_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to the device. This allows for
+			 *  multiple bytes to be packed into a single pipe packet, increasing data throughput.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     Buffer            Pointer to a buffer containing the data to send to the device.
+			 *  \param[in]     Length            Length of the data to send to the device.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t CDC_Host_SendData(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,
+			                          const void* const Buffer,
+			                          const uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Sends a given null-terminated string to the attached USB device, if connected. If a device is not connected when the
+			 *  function is called, the string is discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the device until either the pipe
+			 *  bank becomes full, or the \ref CDC_Host_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to the device. This allows
+			 *  for multiple bytes to be packed into a single pipe packet, increasing data throughput.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     String            Pointer to the null terminated string to send to the device.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t CDC_Host_SendString(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,
+			                            const char* const String) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** Sends a given byte to the attached USB device, if connected. If a device is not connected when the function is called, the
+			 *  byte is discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the device until either the pipe bank becomes full, or the
+			 *  \ref CDC_Host_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to the host. This allows for multiple bytes to be
+			 *  packed into a single pipe packet, increasing data throughput.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     Data              Byte of data to send to the device.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t CDC_Host_SendByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,
+			                          const uint8_t Data) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Determines the number of bytes received by the CDC interface from the device, waiting to be read. This indicates the number
+			 *  of bytes in the IN pipe bank only, and thus the number of calls to \ref CDC_Host_ReceiveByte() which are guaranteed to succeed
+			 *  immediately. If multiple bytes are to be received, they should be buffered by the user application, as the pipe bank will not be
+			 *  released back to the USB controller until all bytes are read.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Total number of buffered bytes received from the device.
+			 */
+			uint16_t CDC_Host_BytesReceived(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Reads a byte of data from the device. If no data is waiting to be read of if a USB device is not connected, the function
+			 *  returns a negative value. The \ref CDC_Host_BytesReceived() function may be queried in advance to determine how many bytes
+			 *  are currently buffered in the CDC interface's data receive pipe.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next received byte from the device, or a negative value if no data received.
+			 */
+			int16_t CDC_Host_ReceiveByte(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Flushes any data waiting to be sent, ensuring that the send buffer is cleared.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t CDC_Host_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			#if defined(FDEV_SETUP_STREAM) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			/** Creates a standard character stream for the given CDC Device instance so that it can be used with all the regular
+			 *  functions in the standard \c <stdio.h> library that accept a \c FILE stream as a destination (e.g. \c fprintf). The created
+			 *  stream is bidirectional and can be used for both input and output functions.
+			 *
+			 *  Reading data from this stream is non-blocking, i.e. in most instances, complete strings cannot be read in by a single
+			 *  fetch, as the endpoint will not be ready at some point in the transmission, aborting the transfer. However, this may
+			 *  be used when the read data is processed byte-per-bye (via \c getc()) or when the user application will implement its own
+			 *  line buffering.
+			 *
+			 *  \note The created stream can be given as \c stdout if desired to direct the standard output from all \c <stdio.h> functions
+			 *        to the given CDC interface.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function is not available on all microcontroller architectures.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in,out] Stream            Pointer to a FILE structure where the created stream should be placed.
+			 */
+			void CDC_Host_CreateStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,
+			                           FILE* const Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** Identical to \ref CDC_Host_CreateStream(), except that reads are blocking until the calling stream function terminates
+			 *  the transfer. While blocking, the USB and CDC service tasks are called repeatedly to maintain USB communications.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function is not available on all microcontroller architectures.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in,out] Stream            Pointer to a FILE structure where the created stream should be placed.
+			 */
+			void CDC_Host_CreateBlockingStream(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo,
+			                                   FILE* const Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)  ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+			#endif
+
+			/** CDC class driver event for a control line state change on a CDC host interface. This event fires each time the device notifies
+			 *  the host of a control line state change (containing the virtual serial control line states, such as DCD) and may be hooked in the
+			 *  user program by declaring a handler function with the same name and parameters listed here. The new control line states
+			 *  are available in the \c ControlLineStates.DeviceToHost value inside the CDC host interface structure passed as a parameter, set as
+			 *  a mask of \c CDC_CONTROL_LINE_IN_* masks.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a CDC Class host configuration and state.
+			 */
+			void EVENT_CDC_Host_ControLineStateChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_CDC_HOST_C)
+				#if defined(FDEV_SETUP_STREAM)
+				static int CDC_Host_putchar(char c,
+				                            FILE* Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+				static int CDC_Host_getchar(FILE* Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static int CDC_Host_getchar_Blocking(FILE* Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				#endif
+
+				void CDC_Host_Event_Stub(void) ATTR_CONST;
+
+				void EVENT_CDC_Host_ControLineStateChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Host_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+				                                           ATTR_WEAK ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALIAS(CDC_Host_Event_Stub);
+
+				static uint8_t DCOMP_CDC_Host_NextCDCControlInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+				                                                      ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static uint8_t DCOMP_CDC_Host_NextCDCDataInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+				                                                   ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static uint8_t DCOMP_CDC_Host_NextCDCInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+				                                                       ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			#endif
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDClassHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDClassHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b43435dcb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDClassHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,399 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_HID_DRIVER
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_HID_HOST_C
+#include "HIDClassHost.h"
+
+uint8_t HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+                                void* ConfigDescriptorData)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint  = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* HIDInterface    = NULL;
+	USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t*   HIDDescriptor   = NULL;
+
+	memset(&HIDInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(HIDInterfaceInfo->State));
+
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)
+	  return HID_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;
+
+	while (!(DataINEndpoint) || !(DataOUTEndpoint))
+	{
+		if (!(HIDInterface) ||
+		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+		                              DCOMP_HID_Host_NextHIDInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			if (DataINEndpoint)
+			  break;
+
+			do
+			{
+				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+				                              DCOMP_HID_Host_NextHIDInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+				{
+					return HID_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+				}
+
+				HIDInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+			} while (HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDInterfaceProtocol &&
+					 (HIDInterface->Protocol != HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDInterfaceProtocol));
+
+			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+			                              DCOMP_HID_Host_NextHIDDescriptor) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+			{
+				return HID_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+			}
+
+			HIDDescriptor = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t);
+
+			DataINEndpoint  = NULL;
+			DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;
+
+			continue;
+		}
+
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+		  DataINEndpoint  = EndpointData;
+		else
+		  DataOUTEndpoint = EndpointData;
+	}
+
+	HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Size  = le16_to_cpu(DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize);
+	HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.EndpointAddress = DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress;
+	HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Type  = EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT;
+
+	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe, 1)))
+	  return HID_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed;
+
+	if (DataOUTEndpoint)
+	{
+		HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Size = le16_to_cpu(DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointSize);
+		HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.EndpointAddress = DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress;
+		HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Type = EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT;
+
+		if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe, 1)))
+		  return HID_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed;
+	}
+
+	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber      = HIDInterface->InterfaceNumber;
+	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.HIDReportSize        = LE16_TO_CPU(HIDDescriptor->HIDReportLength);
+	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.SupportsBootProtocol = (HIDInterface->SubClass != HID_CSCP_NonBootProtocol);
+	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.LargestReportSize    = 8;
+	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive             = true;
+
+	return HID_ENUMERROR_NoError;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DCOMP_HID_Host_NextHIDInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		if (Interface->Class == HID_CSCP_HIDClass)
+		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DCOMP_HID_Host_NextHIDDescriptor(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == HID_DTYPE_HID)
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	else
+	  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DCOMP_HID_Host_NextHIDInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* Endpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		if (!(Pipe_IsEndpointBound(Endpoint->EndpointAddress)))
+		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
+uint8_t HID_Host_ReceiveReportByID(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                   const uint8_t ReportID,
+                                   void* Buffer)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+	{
+		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+		.bRequest      = HID_REQ_SetReport,
+		.wValue        = ((HID_REPORT_ITEM_In + 1) << 8) | ReportID,
+		.wIndex        = HIDInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
+		.wLength       = USB_GetHIDReportSize(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDParserData, ReportID, HID_REPORT_ITEM_In),
+	};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Buffer);
+}
+#endif
+
+uint8_t HID_Host_ReceiveReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                               void* Buffer)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	uint16_t ReportSize;
+	uint8_t* BufferPos = Buffer;
+
+#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
+	if (!(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.UsingBootProtocol))
+	{
+		uint8_t ReportID = 0;
+
+		if (HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDParserData->UsingReportIDs)
+		{
+			ReportID = Pipe_Read_8();
+			*(BufferPos++) = ReportID;
+		}
+
+		ReportSize = USB_GetHIDReportSize(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDParserData, ReportID, HID_REPORT_ITEM_In);
+	}
+	else
+#endif
+	{
+		ReportSize = Pipe_BytesInPipe();
+	}
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(BufferPos, ReportSize, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_ClearIN();
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t HID_Host_SendReportByID(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
+                                const uint8_t ReportID,
+#endif
+                                const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                void* Buffer,
+                                const uint16_t ReportSize)
+{
+#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+
+	if (HIDInterfaceInfo->State.DeviceUsesOUTPipe && (ReportType == HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out))
+	{
+		uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		if (ReportID)
+		  Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&ReportID, sizeof(ReportID), NULL);
+
+		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, ReportSize, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+
+		Pipe_ClearOUT();
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+
+		return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+	}
+	else
+#endif
+	{
+		USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = HID_REQ_SetReport,
+#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
+			.wValue        = ((ReportType + 1) << 8) | ReportID,
+#else
+			.wValue        = ((ReportType + 1) << 8),
+#endif
+			.wIndex        = HIDInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
+			.wLength       = ReportSize,
+		};
+
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+		return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Buffer);
+	}
+}
+
+bool HID_Host_IsReportReceived(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return false;
+
+	bool ReportReceived;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	ReportReceived = Pipe_IsINReceived();
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return ReportReceived;
+}
+
+uint8_t HID_Host_SetBootProtocol(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	if (!(HIDInterfaceInfo->State.SupportsBootProtocol))
+	  return HID_ERROR_LOGICAL;
+
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = HID_REQ_SetProtocol,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = HIDInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
+			.wLength       = 0,
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.LargestReportSize = 8;
+	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.UsingBootProtocol = true;
+
+	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+}
+
+uint8_t HID_Host_SetIdlePeriod(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                               const uint16_t MS)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = HID_REQ_SetIdle,
+			.wValue        = ((MS << 6) & 0xFF00),
+			.wIndex        = HIDInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
+			.wLength       = 0,
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);
+}
+
+#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
+uint8_t HID_Host_SetReportProtocol(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	uint8_t HIDReportData[HIDInterfaceInfo->State.HIDReportSize];
+
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_GetDescriptor,
+			.wValue        = (HID_DTYPE_Report << 8),
+			.wIndex        = HIDInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
+			.wLength       = HIDInterfaceInfo->State.HIDReportSize,
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(HIDReportData)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	if (HIDInterfaceInfo->State.UsingBootProtocol)
+	{
+		USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+			{
+				.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+				.bRequest      = HID_REQ_SetProtocol,
+				.wValue        = 1,
+				.wIndex        = HIDInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
+				.wLength       = 0,
+			};
+
+		if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+
+		HIDInterfaceInfo->State.UsingBootProtocol = false;
+	}
+
+	if (HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDParserData == NULL)
+	  return HID_ERROR_LOGICAL;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_ProcessHIDReport(HIDReportData, HIDInterfaceInfo->State.HIDReportSize,
+	                                      HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDParserData)) != HID_PARSE_Successful)
+	{
+		return HID_ERROR_LOGICAL | ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	uint16_t LargestReportSizeBits = HIDInterfaceInfo->Config.HIDParserData->LargestReportSizeBits;
+	HIDInterfaceInfo->State.LargestReportSize = (LargestReportSizeBits >> 3) + ((LargestReportSizeBits & 0x07) != 0);
+
+	return 0;
+}
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDClassHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDClassHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..703b698df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDClassHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,313 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB HID Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Host mode driver for the library USB HID Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassHID
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassHIDHost HID Class Host Mode Driver
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassHIDHost_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassHIDHost_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the HID USB Class driver.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __HID_CLASS_HOST_H__
+#define __HID_CLASS_HOST_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "../Common/HIDClassCommon.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_HID_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Error code for some HID Host functions, indicating a logical (and not hardware) error. */
+			#define HID_ERROR_LOGICAL              0x80
+
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** \brief HID Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,
+			 *  and passed to each of the HID class driver functions as the \c HIDInterfaceInfo parameter. This
+			 *  stores each HID interface's configuration and state information.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataINPipe; /**< Data IN Pipe configuration table. */
+					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataOUTPipe; /**< Data OUT Pipe configuration table. */
+
+					uint8_t  HIDInterfaceProtocol; /**< HID interface protocol value to match against if a specific
+					                                *   boot subclass protocol is required, a protocol value from the
+					                                *   \ref HID_Descriptor_ClassSubclassProtocol_t enum.
+					                                */
+					#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
+					HID_ReportInfo_t* HIDParserData; /**< HID parser data to store the parsed HID report data, when boot protocol
+					                                  *   is not used.
+					                                  *
+					                                  *  \note When the \c HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY compile time token is defined,
+					                                  *        this field is unavailable.
+					                                  */
+					#endif
+				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
+				           */
+				struct
+				{
+					bool IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid
+					                *   after \ref HID_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the
+					                *   Configured state.
+					                */
+					uint8_t InterfaceNumber; /**< Interface index of the HID interface within the attached device. */
+
+					bool SupportsBootProtocol; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance supports the HID Boot
+					                            *   Protocol when enabled via \ref HID_Host_SetBootProtocol().
+					                            */
+					bool DeviceUsesOUTPipe; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance uses a separate OUT data pipe for
+					                         *   OUT reports, or if OUT reports are sent via the control pipe instead.
+					                         */
+					bool UsingBootProtocol; /**< Indicates that the interface is currently initialized in Boot Protocol mode */
+					uint16_t HIDReportSize; /**< Size in bytes of the HID report descriptor in the device. */
+
+					uint8_t LargestReportSize; /**< Largest report the device will send, in bytes. */
+				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				          *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when
+				          *   the interface is enumerated.
+				          */
+			} USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t;
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref HID_Host_ConfigurePipes() function. */
+			enum HID_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				HID_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully. */
+				HID_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor. */
+				HID_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound = 2, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor. */
+				HID_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed    = 3, /**< One or more pipes for the specified interface could not be configured correctly. */
+			};
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given HID host interface instance using the Configuration
+			 *  Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given HID Host instance's
+			 *  state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it is found within the
+			 *  device. This should be called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while the host state
+			 *  machine is in the Addressed state.
+			 *
+			 *  \attention Once the device pipes are configured, the HID device's reporting protocol <b>must</b> be set via a call
+			 *             to either the \ref HID_Host_SetBootProtocol() or \ref HID_Host_SetReportProtocol() function.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo      Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorSize  Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.
+			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorData  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref HID_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+			                                uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+			                                void* ConfigDescriptorData) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+
+			/** Receives a HID IN report from the attached HID device, when a report has been received on the HID IN Data pipe.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \attention The destination buffer should be large enough to accommodate the largest report that the attached device
+			 *             can generate.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     Buffer            Buffer to store the received report into.
+			 *
+			 *  \return An error code from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t HID_Host_ReceiveReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+			                               void* Buffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
+			/** Receives a HID IN report from the attached device, by the report ID.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \note When the \c HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY compile time token is defined, this method is unavailable.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     ReportID          Report ID of the received report if ControlRequest is false, set by the to the Report ID to fetch.
+			 *  \param[in]     Buffer            Buffer to store the received report into.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t HID_Host_ReceiveReportByID(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+			                                   const uint8_t ReportID,
+			                                   void* Buffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+			#endif
+
+			/** Sends an OUT or FEATURE report to the currently attached HID device, using the device's OUT pipe if available,
+			 *  or the device's Control pipe if not.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \note When the \c HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY compile time token is defined, the ReportID parameter is removed
+			 *        from the parameter list of this function.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     ReportID          Report ID of the report to send to the device, or 0 if the device does not use report IDs.
+			 *  \param[in]     ReportType        Type of report to issue to the device, either \ref HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out or \ref HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature.
+			 *  \param[in]     Buffer            Buffer containing the report to send to the attached device.
+			 *  \param[in]     ReportSize        Report size in bytes to send to the attached device.
+			 *
+			 *  \return An error code from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum if the DeviceUsesOUTPipe flag is set in
+			 *          the interface's state structure, a value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum otherwise.
+			 */
+			uint8_t HID_Host_SendReportByID(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+			#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
+			                                const uint8_t ReportID,
+			#endif
+			                                const uint8_t ReportType,
+			                                void* Buffer,
+			                                const uint16_t ReportSize) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
+			#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
+			                                ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(4);
+			#else
+			                                ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+			#endif
+
+			/** Determines if a HID IN report has been received from the attached device on the data IN pipe.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if a report has been received, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool HID_Host_IsReportReceived(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Switches the attached HID device's reporting protocol over to the Boot Report protocol mode, on supported devices.
+			 *
+			 *  \note When the \c HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY compile time token is defined, this method must still be called
+			 *        to explicitly place the attached device into boot protocol mode before use.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return \ref HID_ERROR_LOGICAL if the device does not support Boot Protocol mode, a value from the
+			 *          \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum otherwise.
+			 */
+			uint8_t HID_Host_SetBootProtocol(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Sets the idle period for the attached HID device to the specified interval. The HID idle period determines the rate
+			 *  at which the device should send a report, when no state changes have occurred; i.e. on HID keyboards, this sets the
+			 *  hardware key repeat interval.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     MS                Idle period as a multiple of four milliseconds, zero to disable hardware repeats
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t HID_Host_SetIdlePeriod(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+			                               const uint16_t MS) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			#if !defined(HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY)
+			/** Switches the attached HID device's reporting protocol over to the standard Report protocol mode. This also retrieves
+			 *  and parses the device's HID report descriptor, so that the size of each report can be determined in advance.
+			 *
+			 *  \attention Whether this function is used or not, the \ref CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem() callback from the HID
+			 *             Report Parser this function references <b>must</b> be implemented in the user code.
+			 *
+			 *  \note When the \c HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY compile time token is defined, this method is unavailable.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum if an error occurs while retrieving the HID
+			 *          Report descriptor or the setting of the Report protocol, \ref HID_ERROR_LOGICAL if the HID interface does
+			 *          not have a valid \ref HID_ReportInfo_t structure set in its configuration, a mask of \ref HID_ERROR_LOGICAL
+			 *          and a value from the \ref HID_Parse_ErrorCodes_t otherwise.
+			 */
+			uint8_t HID_Host_SetReportProtocol(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			#endif
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** General management task for a given Human Interface Class host class interface, required for the correct operation of
+			 *  the interface. This should be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task
+			 *  \ref USB_USBTask().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a HID Class host configuration and state.
+			 */
+			static inline void HID_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static inline void HID_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				(void)HIDInterfaceInfo;
+			}
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_HID_HOST_C)
+				static uint8_t DCOMP_HID_Host_NextHIDInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+				                                               ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static uint8_t DCOMP_HID_Host_NextHIDDescriptor(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+				                                                ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static uint8_t DCOMP_HID_Host_NextHIDInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+				                                                       ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			#endif
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDIClassHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDIClassHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8b898cba5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDIClassHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,231 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_DRIVER
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_HOST_C
+#include "MIDIClassHost.h"
+
+uint8_t MIDI_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo,
+                                 uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+                                 void* ConfigDescriptorData)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint  = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* MIDIInterface   = NULL;
+
+	memset(&MIDIInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(MIDIInterfaceInfo->State));
+
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)
+	  return MIDI_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;
+
+	while (!(DataINEndpoint) || !(DataOUTEndpoint))
+	{
+		if (!(MIDIInterface) ||
+		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+		                              DCOMP_MIDI_Host_NextMIDIStreamingDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+			                              DCOMP_MIDI_Host_NextMIDIStreamingInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+			{
+				return MIDI_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+			}
+
+			MIDIInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+			DataINEndpoint  = NULL;
+			DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;
+
+			continue;
+		}
+
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+		  DataINEndpoint  = EndpointData;
+		else
+		  DataOUTEndpoint = EndpointData;
+	}
+
+	MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Size  = le16_to_cpu(DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize);
+	MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.EndpointAddress = DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress;
+	MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Type  = EP_TYPE_BULK;
+
+	MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Size = le16_to_cpu(DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointSize);
+	MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.EndpointAddress = DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress;
+	MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Type = EP_TYPE_BULK;
+
+	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe, 1)))
+	  return MIDI_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed;
+
+	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe, 1)))
+	  return MIDI_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed;
+
+	MIDIInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber = MIDIInterface->InterfaceNumber;
+	MIDIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive = true;
+
+	return MIDI_ENUMERROR_NoError;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DCOMP_MIDI_Host_NextMIDIStreamingInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		if ((Interface->Class    == AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass)            &&
+		    (Interface->SubClass == AUDIO_CSCP_MIDIStreamingSubclass) &&
+		    (Interface->Protocol == AUDIO_CSCP_StreamingProtocol))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DCOMP_MIDI_Host_NextMIDIStreamingDataEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* Endpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		uint8_t EndpointType = (Endpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
+
+		if ((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) && !(Pipe_IsEndpointBound(Endpoint->EndpointAddress)))
+		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+void MIDI_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MIDIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return;
+
+	#if !defined(NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH)
+	MIDI_Host_Flush(MIDIInterfaceInfo);
+	#endif
+}
+
+uint8_t MIDI_Host_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MIDIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if (Pipe_BytesInPipe())
+	{
+		Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()) != PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError)
+		{
+			Pipe_Freeze();
+			return ErrorCode;
+		}
+	}
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t MIDI_Host_SendEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo,
+                                  MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MIDIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Event, sizeof(MIDI_EventPacket_t), NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+bool MIDI_Host_ReceiveEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo,
+                                  MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MIDIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	bool DataReady = false;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MIDIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+	{
+		if (Pipe_BytesInPipe())
+		{
+			Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(Event, sizeof(MIDI_EventPacket_t), NULL);
+			DataReady = true;
+		}
+
+		if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))
+		  Pipe_ClearIN();
+	}
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return DataReady;
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDIClassHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDIClassHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7624f8ed9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDIClassHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,190 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB MIDI Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Host mode driver for the library USB MIDI Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassMIDI
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassMIDIHost MIDI Class Host Mode Driver
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassMIDIHost_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDIClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassMIDIHost_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the MIDI USB Class driver.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __MIDI_CLASS_HOST_H__
+#define __MIDI_CLASS_HOST_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "../Common/MIDIClassCommon.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** \brief MIDI Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,
+			 *  and passed to each of the MIDI class driver functions as the \c MIDIInterfaceInfo parameter. This
+			 *  stores each MIDI interface's configuration and state information.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataINPipe; /**< Data IN Pipe configuration table. */
+					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataOUTPipe; /**< Data OUT Pipe configuration table. */
+				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
+				           */
+				struct
+				{
+					bool     IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid
+					                    *   after \ref MIDI_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the
+					                    *   Configured state.
+					                    */
+					uint8_t  InterfaceNumber; /**< Interface index of the MIDI interface within the attached device. */
+				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when
+						  *   the interface is enumerated.
+						  */
+			} USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t;
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref MIDI_Host_ConfigurePipes() function. */
+			enum MIDI_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				MIDI_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully. */
+				MIDI_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor. */
+				MIDI_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound = 2, /**< A compatible MIDI interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor. */
+				MIDI_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed    = 3, /**< One or more pipes for the specified interface could not be configured correctly. */
+			};
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given MIDI host interface instance using the Configuration
+			 *  Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given MIDI Host instance's
+			 *  state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it is found within the device.
+			 *  This should be called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while the host state machine is in
+			 *  the Addressed state.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo     Pointer to a structure containing an MIDI Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorSize  Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.
+			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorData  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref MIDI_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t MIDI_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo,
+			                                 uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+			                                 void* ConfigDescriptorData) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+			/** General management task for a given MIDI host class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should
+			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an MIDI Class host configuration and state.
+			 */
+			void MIDI_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Sends a MIDI event packet to the device. If no device is connected, the event packet is discarded.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     Event              Pointer to a populated USB_MIDI_EventPacket_t structure containing the MIDI event to send.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t MIDI_Host_SendEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo,
+			                                  MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** Flushes the MIDI send buffer, sending any queued MIDI events to the device. This should be called to override the
+			 *  \ref MIDI_Host_SendEventPacket() function's packing behavior, to flush queued events. Events are queued into the
+			 *  pipe bank until either the pipe bank is full, or \ref MIDI_Host_Flush() is called. This allows for multiple MIDI
+			 *  events to be packed into a single pipe packet, increasing data throughput.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			 uint8_t MIDI_Host_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Receives a MIDI event packet from the device.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MIDIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MIDI Class configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[out]    Event              Pointer to a USB_MIDI_EventPacket_t structure where the received MIDI event is to be placed.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if a MIDI event packet was received, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool MIDI_Host_ReceiveEventPacket(USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t* const MIDIInterfaceInfo,
+			                                  MIDI_EventPacket_t* const Event) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_HOST_C)
+				static uint8_t DCOMP_MIDI_Host_NextMIDIStreamingInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+				                                                          ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static uint8_t DCOMP_MIDI_Host_NextMIDIStreamingDataEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+				                                                             ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			#endif
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorageClassHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorageClassHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ac448a55b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorageClassHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,579 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_MS_DRIVER
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORAGE_HOST_C
+#include "MassStorageClassHost.h"
+
+uint8_t MS_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                               uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+							   void* ConfigDescriptorData)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint       = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataOUTEndpoint      = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* MassStorageInterface = NULL;
+
+	memset(&MSInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(MSInterfaceInfo->State));
+
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)
+	  return MS_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;
+
+	while (!(DataINEndpoint) || !(DataOUTEndpoint))
+	{
+		if (!(MassStorageInterface) ||
+		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+		                              DCOMP_MS_Host_NextMSInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+			                              DCOMP_MS_Host_NextMSInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+			{
+				return MS_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+			}
+
+			MassStorageInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+			DataINEndpoint  = NULL;
+			DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;
+
+			continue;
+		}
+
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+		  DataINEndpoint  = EndpointData;
+		else
+		  DataOUTEndpoint = EndpointData;
+	}
+
+	MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Size  = le16_to_cpu(DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize);
+	MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.EndpointAddress = DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress;
+	MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Type  = EP_TYPE_BULK;
+
+	MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Size = le16_to_cpu(DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointSize);
+	MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.EndpointAddress = DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress;
+	MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Type = EP_TYPE_BULK;
+
+	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe, 1)))
+	  return MS_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed;
+
+	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe, 1)))
+	  return MS_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed;
+
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber = MassStorageInterface->InterfaceNumber;
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive = true;
+
+	return MS_ENUMERROR_NoError;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DCOMP_MS_Host_NextMSInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		if ((Interface->Class    == MS_CSCP_MassStorageClass)        &&
+		    (Interface->SubClass == MS_CSCP_SCSITransparentSubclass) &&
+		    (Interface->Protocol == MS_CSCP_BulkOnlyTransportProtocol))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DCOMP_MS_Host_NextMSInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* Endpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		uint8_t EndpointType = (Endpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
+
+		if ((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) && (!(Pipe_IsEndpointBound(Endpoint->EndpointAddress))))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+static uint8_t MS_Host_SendCommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                   MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t* const SCSICommandBlock,
+                                   const void* const BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+
+	if (++MSInterfaceInfo->State.TransactionTag == 0xFFFFFFFF)
+	  MSInterfaceInfo->State.TransactionTag = 1;
+
+	SCSICommandBlock->Signature = CPU_TO_LE32(MS_CBW_SIGNATURE);
+	SCSICommandBlock->Tag       = cpu_to_le32(MSInterfaceInfo->State.TransactionTag);
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(SCSICommandBlock, sizeof(MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t),
+	                                      NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	Pipe_ClearOUT();
+	Pipe_WaitUntilReady();
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	if (BufferPtr != NULL)
+	{
+		ErrorCode = MS_Host_SendReceiveData(MSInterfaceInfo, SCSICommandBlock, (void*)BufferPtr);
+
+		if ((ErrorCode != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError) && (ErrorCode != PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled))
+		{
+			Pipe_Freeze();
+			return ErrorCode;
+		}
+	}
+
+	MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSIStatusBlock;
+	return MS_Host_GetReturnedStatus(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSIStatusBlock);
+}
+
+static uint8_t MS_Host_WaitForDataReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint16_t TimeoutMSRem        = MS_COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS;
+	uint16_t PreviousFrameNumber = USB_Host_GetFrameNumber();
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	while (!(Pipe_IsINReceived()))
+	{
+		uint16_t CurrentFrameNumber = USB_Host_GetFrameNumber();
+
+		if (CurrentFrameNumber != PreviousFrameNumber)
+		{
+			PreviousFrameNumber = CurrentFrameNumber;
+
+			if (!(TimeoutMSRem--))
+			  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_Timeout;
+		}
+
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		if (Pipe_IsStalled())
+		{
+			USB_Host_ClearEndpointStall(Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress());
+			return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;
+		}
+
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		if (Pipe_IsStalled())
+		{
+			USB_Host_ClearEndpointStall(Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress());
+			return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;
+		}
+
+		if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+	};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+static uint8_t MS_Host_SendReceiveData(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                       MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t* const SCSICommandBlock,
+                                       void* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+	uint16_t BytesRem  = le32_to_cpu(SCSICommandBlock->DataTransferLength);
+
+	if (SCSICommandBlock->Flags & MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_IN)
+	{
+		if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_WaitForDataReceived(MSInterfaceInfo)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+		{
+			Pipe_Freeze();
+			return ErrorCode;
+		}
+
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(BufferPtr, BytesRem, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+
+		Pipe_ClearIN();
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(BufferPtr, BytesRem, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+
+		Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+		while (!(Pipe_IsOUTReady()))
+		{
+			if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
+			  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+		}
+	}
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+static uint8_t MS_Host_GetReturnedStatus(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                         MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t* const SCSICommandStatus)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_WaitForDataReceived(MSInterfaceInfo)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(SCSICommandStatus, sizeof(MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t),
+	                                     NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	Pipe_ClearIN();
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	if (SCSICommandStatus->Status != MS_SCSI_COMMAND_Pass)
+	  ErrorCode = MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED;
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+uint8_t MS_Host_ResetMSInterface(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = MS_REQ_MassStorageReset,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = MSInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
+			.wLength       = 0,
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_ClearEndpointStall(Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress())) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(MSInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_ClearEndpointStall(Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress())) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+}
+
+uint8_t MS_Host_GetMaxLUN(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                          uint8_t* const MaxLUNIndex)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = MS_REQ_GetMaxLUN,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = MSInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
+			.wLength       = 1,
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(MaxLUNIndex)) == HOST_SENDCONTROL_SetupStalled)
+	{
+		*MaxLUNIndex = 0;
+		ErrorCode    = HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+	}
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+uint8_t MS_Host_GetInquiryData(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                               const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+                               SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t* const InquiryData)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+		{
+			.DataTransferLength = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t)),
+			.Flags              = MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_IN,
+			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
+			.SCSICommandLength  = 6,
+			.SCSICommandData    =
+				{
+					SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY,
+					0x00,                            // Reserved
+					0x00,                            // Reserved
+					0x00,                            // Reserved
+					sizeof(SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t), // Allocation Length
+					0x00                             // Unused (control)
+				}
+		};
+
+	return MS_Host_SendCommand(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandBlock, InquiryData);
+}
+
+uint8_t MS_Host_TestUnitReady(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                              const uint8_t LUNIndex)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+		{
+			.DataTransferLength = CPU_TO_LE32(0),
+			.Flags              = MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_IN,
+			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
+			.SCSICommandLength  = 6,
+			.SCSICommandData    =
+				{
+					SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY,
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00                    // Unused (control)
+				}
+		};
+
+	return MS_Host_SendCommand(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandBlock, NULL);
+}
+
+uint8_t MS_Host_ReadDeviceCapacity(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                   const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+                                   SCSI_Capacity_t* const DeviceCapacity)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+		{
+			.DataTransferLength = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(SCSI_Capacity_t)),
+			.Flags              = MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_IN,
+			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
+			.SCSICommandLength  = 10,
+			.SCSICommandData    =
+				{
+					SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10,
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // MSB of Logical block address
+					0x00,
+					0x00,
+					0x00,                   // LSB of Logical block address
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Partial Medium Indicator
+					0x00                    // Unused (control)
+				}
+		};
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = MS_Host_SendCommand(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandBlock, DeviceCapacity)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	DeviceCapacity->Blocks    = BE32_TO_CPU(DeviceCapacity->Blocks);
+	DeviceCapacity->BlockSize = BE32_TO_CPU(DeviceCapacity->BlockSize);
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t MS_Host_RequestSense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                             const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+                             SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t* const SenseData)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+		{
+			.DataTransferLength = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t)),
+			.Flags              = MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_IN,
+			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
+			.SCSICommandLength  = 6,
+			.SCSICommandData    =
+				{
+					SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE,
+					0x00,                                  // Reserved
+					0x00,                                  // Reserved
+					0x00,                                  // Reserved
+					sizeof(SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t), // Allocation Length
+					0x00                                   // Unused (control)
+				}
+		};
+
+	return MS_Host_SendCommand(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandBlock, SenseData);
+}
+
+uint8_t MS_Host_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                          const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+                                          const bool PreventRemoval)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+		{
+			.DataTransferLength = CPU_TO_LE32(0),
+			.Flags              = MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_OUT,
+			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
+			.SCSICommandLength  = 6,
+			.SCSICommandData    =
+				{
+					SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL,
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					PreventRemoval,         // Prevent flag
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00                    // Unused (control)
+				}
+		};
+
+	return MS_Host_SendCommand(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandBlock, NULL);
+}
+
+uint8_t MS_Host_ReadDeviceBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                 const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+                                 const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                 const uint8_t Blocks,
+                                 const uint16_t BlockSize,
+                                 void* BlockBuffer)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+		{
+			.DataTransferLength = cpu_to_le32((uint32_t)Blocks * BlockSize),
+			.Flags              = MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_IN,
+			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
+			.SCSICommandLength  = 10,
+			.SCSICommandData    =
+				{
+					SCSI_CMD_READ_10,
+					0x00,                   // Unused (control bits, all off)
+					(BlockAddress >> 24),   // MSB of Block Address
+					(BlockAddress >> 16),
+					(BlockAddress >> 8),
+					(BlockAddress & 0xFF),  // LSB of Block Address
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // MSB of Total Blocks to Read
+					Blocks,                 // LSB of Total Blocks to Read
+					0x00                    // Unused (control)
+				}
+		};
+
+	return MS_Host_SendCommand(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandBlock, BlockBuffer);
+}
+
+uint8_t MS_Host_WriteDeviceBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                  const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+                                  const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                  const uint8_t Blocks,
+                                  const uint16_t BlockSize,
+                                  const void* BlockBuffer)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock = (MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+		{
+			.DataTransferLength = cpu_to_le32((uint32_t)Blocks * BlockSize),
+			.Flags              = MS_COMMAND_DIR_DATA_OUT,
+			.LUN                = LUNIndex,
+			.SCSICommandLength  = 10,
+			.SCSICommandData    =
+				{
+					SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10,
+					0x00,                   // Unused (control bits, all off)
+					(BlockAddress >> 24),   // MSB of Block Address
+					(BlockAddress >> 16),
+					(BlockAddress >> 8),
+					(BlockAddress & 0xFF),  // LSB of Block Address
+					0x00,                   // Reserved
+					0x00,                   // MSB of Total Blocks to Write
+					Blocks,                 // LSB of Total Blocks to Write
+					0x00                    // Unused (control)
+				}
+		};
+
+	return MS_Host_SendCommand(MSInterfaceInfo, &SCSICommandBlock, BlockBuffer);
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorageClassHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorageClassHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6e558073b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorageClassHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,335 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Host mode driver for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassMS
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassMassStorageHost Mass Storage Class Host Mode Driver
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassMassStorageHost_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorageClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassMassStorageHost_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the Mass Storage USB Class driver.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __MS_CLASS_HOST_H__
+#define __MS_CLASS_HOST_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "../Common/MassStorageClassCommon.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MS_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Error code for some Mass Storage Host functions, indicating a logical (and not hardware) error. */
+			#define MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED              0x80
+
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** \brief Mass Storage Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,
+			 *  and passed to each of the Mass Storage class driver functions as the \c MSInterfaceInfo parameter. This
+			 *  stores each Mass Storage interface's configuration and state information.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataINPipe; /**< Data IN Pipe configuration table. */
+					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataOUTPipe; /**< Data OUT Pipe configuration table. */
+				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
+				           */
+				struct
+				{
+					bool     IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid
+					                    *   after \ref MS_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the
+					                    *   Configured state.
+					                    */
+					uint8_t  InterfaceNumber; /**< Interface index of the Mass Storage interface within the attached device. */
+
+					uint32_t TransactionTag; /**< Current transaction tag for data synchronizing of packets. */
+				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when
+						  *   the interface is enumerated.
+						  */
+			} USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t;
+
+			/** \brief SCSI Device LUN Capacity Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  SCSI capacity structure, to hold the total capacity of the device in both the number
+			 *  of blocks in the current LUN, and the size of each block. This structure is filled by
+			 *  the device when the \ref MS_Host_ReadDeviceCapacity() function is called.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint32_t Blocks; /**< Number of blocks in the addressed LUN of the device. */
+				uint32_t BlockSize; /**< Number of bytes in each block in the addressed LUN. */
+			} SCSI_Capacity_t;
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref MS_Host_ConfigurePipes() function. */
+			enum MS_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				MS_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully. */
+				MS_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor. */
+				MS_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound = 2, /**< A compatible Mass Storage interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor. */
+				MS_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed    = 3, /**< One or more pipes for the specified interface could not be configured correctly. */
+			};
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given Mass Storage host interface instance using the
+			 *  Configuration Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given Mass
+			 *  Storage Host instance's state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it
+			 *  is found within the device. This should be called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while
+			 *  the host state machine is in the Addressed state.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo         Pointer to a structure containing an MS Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorSize    Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.
+			 *  \param[in]     DeviceConfigDescriptor  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref MS_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t MS_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+			                               uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+			                               void* DeviceConfigDescriptor) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+			/** Sends a MASS STORAGE RESET control request to the attached device, resetting the Mass Storage Interface
+			 *  and readying it for the next Mass Storage command. This should be called after a failed SCSI request to
+			 *  ensure the attached Mass Storage device is ready to receive the next command.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t MS_Host_ResetMSInterface(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Sends a GET MAX LUN control request to the attached device, retrieving the index of the highest LUN (Logical
+			 *  UNit, a logical drive) in the device. This value can then be used in the other functions of the Mass Storage
+			 *  Host mode Class driver to address a specific LUN within the device.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Some devices do not support this request, and will STALL it when issued. To get around this,
+			 *        on unsupported devices the max LUN index will be reported as zero and no error will be returned
+			 *        if the device STALLs the request.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[out]    MaxLUNIndex      Pointer to a location where the highest LUN index value should be stored.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t MS_Host_GetMaxLUN(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+			                          uint8_t* const MaxLUNIndex) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** Retrieves the Mass Storage device's inquiry data for the specified LUN, indicating the device characteristics and
+			 *  properties.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     LUNIndex         LUN index within the device the command is being issued to.
+			 *  \param[out]    InquiryData      Location where the read inquiry data should be stored.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum or \ref MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED.
+			 */
+			uint8_t MS_Host_GetInquiryData(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+			                               const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+			                               SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t* const InquiryData) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
+			                               ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+			/** Sends a TEST UNIT READY command to the device, to determine if it is ready to accept other SCSI commands.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     LUNIndex         LUN index within the device the command is being issued to.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum or \ref MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if not ready.
+			 */
+			uint8_t MS_Host_TestUnitReady(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+			                              const uint8_t LUNIndex) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Retrieves the total capacity of the attached USB Mass Storage device, in blocks, and block size.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     LUNIndex         LUN index within the device the command is being issued to.
+			 *  \param[out]    DeviceCapacity   Pointer to the location where the capacity information should be stored.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum or \ref MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if not ready.
+			 */
+			uint8_t MS_Host_ReadDeviceCapacity(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+			                                   const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+			                                   SCSI_Capacity_t* const DeviceCapacity) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
+			                                   ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+			/** Retrieves the device sense data, indicating the current device state and error codes for the previously
+			 *  issued command.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     LUNIndex         LUN index within the device the command is being issued to.
+			 *  \param[out]    SenseData        Pointer to the location where the sense information should be stored.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum or \ref MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if not ready.
+			 */
+			uint8_t MS_Host_RequestSense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+			                             const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+			                             SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t* const SenseData) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
+			                             ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+			/** Issues a PREVENT MEDIUM REMOVAL command, to logically (or, depending on the type of device, physically) lock
+			 *  the device from removal so that blocks of data on the medium can be read or altered.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     LUNIndex         LUN index within the device the command is being issued to.
+			 *  \param[in]     PreventRemoval   Boolean \c true if the device should be locked from removal, \c false otherwise.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum or \ref MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if not ready.
+			 */
+			uint8_t MS_Host_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+			                                          const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+			                                          const bool PreventRemoval) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Reads blocks of data from the attached Mass Storage device's medium.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     LUNIndex         LUN index within the device the command is being issued to.
+			 *  \param[in]     BlockAddress     Starting block address within the device to read from.
+			 *  \param[in]     Blocks           Total number of blocks to read.
+			 *  \param[in]     BlockSize        Size in bytes of each block within the device.
+			 *  \param[out]    BlockBuffer      Pointer to where the read data from the device should be stored.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum or \ref MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if not ready.
+			 */
+			uint8_t MS_Host_ReadDeviceBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+			                                 const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+			                                 const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+			                                 const uint8_t Blocks,
+			                                 const uint16_t BlockSize,
+			                                 void* BlockBuffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(6);
+
+			/** Writes blocks of data to the attached Mass Storage device's medium.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a MS Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     LUNIndex         LUN index within the device the command is being issued to.
+			 *  \param[in]     BlockAddress     Starting block address within the device to write to.
+			 *  \param[in]     Blocks           Total number of blocks to read.
+			 *  \param[in]     BlockSize        Size in bytes of each block within the device.
+			 *  \param[in]     BlockBuffer      Pointer to where the data to write should be sourced from.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum or \ref MS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if not ready.
+			 */
+			uint8_t MS_Host_WriteDeviceBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+			                                  const uint8_t LUNIndex,
+			                                  const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+			                                  const uint8_t Blocks,
+			                                  const uint16_t BlockSize,
+			                                  const void* BlockBuffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(6);
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** General management task for a given Mass Storage host class interface, required for the correct operation of
+			 *  the interface. This should be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task
+			 *  \ref USB_USBTask().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an Mass Storage Class host configuration and state.
+			 */
+			static inline void MS_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void MS_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				(void)MSInterfaceInfo;
+			}
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define MS_COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS        10000
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORAGE_HOST_C)
+				static uint8_t MS_Host_SendCommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+				                                   MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t* const SCSICommandBlock,
+				                                   const void* const BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+				static uint8_t MS_Host_WaitForDataReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static uint8_t MS_Host_SendReceiveData(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+				                                       MS_CommandBlockWrapper_t* const SCSICommandBlock,
+				                                       void* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+				static uint8_t MS_Host_GetReturnedStatus(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Host_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+				                                         MS_CommandStatusWrapper_t* const SCSICommandStatus)
+				                                         ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+				static uint8_t DCOMP_MS_Host_NextMSInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+				                                             ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static uint8_t DCOMP_MS_Host_NextMSInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+				                                                     ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			#endif
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/PrinterClassHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/PrinterClassHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fd32e1c28
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/PrinterClassHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,400 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_PRINTER_DRIVER
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_PRINTER_HOST_C
+#include "PrinterClassHost.h"
+
+uint8_t PRNT_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,
+                                 uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+							     void* ConfigDescriptorData)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint   = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataOUTEndpoint  = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* PrinterInterface = NULL;
+
+	memset(&PRNTInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(PRNTInterfaceInfo->State));
+
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)
+	  return PRNT_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;
+
+	while (!(DataINEndpoint) || !(DataOUTEndpoint))
+	{
+		if (!(PrinterInterface) ||
+		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+		                              DCOMP_PRNT_Host_NextPRNTInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+			                              DCOMP_PRNT_Host_NextPRNTInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+			{
+				return PRNT_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+			}
+
+			PrinterInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+			DataINEndpoint  = NULL;
+			DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;
+
+			continue;
+		}
+
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+		  DataINEndpoint  = EndpointData;
+		else
+		  DataOUTEndpoint = EndpointData;
+	}
+
+	PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Size  = le16_to_cpu(DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize);
+	PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.EndpointAddress = DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress;
+	PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Type  = EP_TYPE_BULK;
+
+	PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Size = le16_to_cpu(DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointSize);
+	PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.EndpointAddress = DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress;
+	PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Type = EP_TYPE_BULK;
+
+	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe, 1)))
+	  return PRNT_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed;
+
+	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe, 1)))
+	  return PRNT_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed;
+
+	PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber  = PrinterInterface->InterfaceNumber;
+	PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.AlternateSetting = PrinterInterface->AlternateSetting;
+	PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive = true;
+
+	return PRNT_ENUMERROR_NoError;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DCOMP_PRNT_Host_NextPRNTInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		if ((Interface->Class    == PRNT_CSCP_PrinterClass)    &&
+		    (Interface->SubClass == PRNT_CSCP_PrinterSubclass) &&
+		    (Interface->Protocol == PRNT_CSCP_BidirectionalProtocol))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DCOMP_PRNT_Host_NextPRNTInterfaceEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* Endpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		uint8_t EndpointType = (Endpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
+
+		if (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK)
+		  return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+void PRNT_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return;
+
+	#if !defined(NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH)
+	PRNT_Host_Flush(PRNTInterfaceInfo);
+	#endif
+}
+
+uint8_t PRNT_Host_SetBidirectionalMode(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if (PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.AlternateSetting)
+	{
+		uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+		if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SetInterfaceAltSetting(PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
+		                                                 PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.AlternateSetting)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+		{
+			return ErrorCode;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+}
+
+uint8_t PRNT_Host_GetPortStatus(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,
+                                uint8_t* const PortStatus)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = PRNT_REQ_GetPortStatus,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
+			.wLength       = sizeof(uint8_t),
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(PortStatus);
+}
+
+uint8_t PRNT_Host_SoftReset(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = PRNT_REQ_SoftReset,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
+			.wLength       = 0,
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);
+}
+
+uint8_t PRNT_Host_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))
+	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;
+
+	bool BankFull = !(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed());
+
+	Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+	if (BankFull)
+	{
+		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()) != PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+
+		Pipe_ClearOUT();
+	}
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t PRNT_Host_SendByte(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,
+                           const uint8_t Data)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	{
+		Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()) != PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	Pipe_Write_8(Data);
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t PRNT_Host_SendString(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,
+                             const char* const String)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(String, strlen(String), NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+	ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady();
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+uint8_t PRNT_Host_SendData(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,
+                           const void* Buffer,
+                           const uint16_t Length)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, Length, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+	ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady();
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+uint16_t PRNT_Host_BytesReceived(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return 0;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+	{
+		if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))
+		{
+			Pipe_ClearIN();
+			Pipe_Freeze();
+			return 0;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			Pipe_Freeze();
+			return Pipe_BytesInPipe();
+		}
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+
+		return 0;
+	}
+}
+
+int16_t PRNT_Host_ReceiveByte(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	int16_t ReceivedByte = -1;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PRNTInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+	{
+		if (Pipe_BytesInPipe())
+		  ReceivedByte = Pipe_Read_8();
+
+		if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))
+		  Pipe_ClearIN();
+	}
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return ReceivedByte;
+}
+
+uint8_t PRNT_Host_GetDeviceID(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,
+                              char* const DeviceIDString,
+                              const uint16_t BufferSize)
+{
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+	uint16_t DeviceIDStringLength = 0;
+
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = PRNT_REQ_GetDeviceID,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = PRNTInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber,
+			.wLength       = sizeof(DeviceIDStringLength),
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(&DeviceIDStringLength)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	if (!(DeviceIDStringLength))
+	{
+		DeviceIDString[0] = 0x00;
+		return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+	}
+
+	DeviceIDStringLength = be16_to_cpu(DeviceIDStringLength);
+
+	if (DeviceIDStringLength > BufferSize)
+	  DeviceIDStringLength = BufferSize;
+
+	USB_ControlRequest.wLength = DeviceIDStringLength;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(DeviceIDString)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	memmove(&DeviceIDString[0], &DeviceIDString[2], DeviceIDStringLength - 2);
+
+	DeviceIDString[DeviceIDStringLength - 2] = 0x00;
+
+	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/PrinterClassHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/PrinterClassHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8089aa592
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/PrinterClassHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,285 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB Printer Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Host mode driver for the library USB Printer Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassPrinter
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassPrinterHost Printer Class Host Mode Driver
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassPrinterHost_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/PrinterClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassPrinterHost_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the Printer USB Class driver.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __PRINTER_CLASS_HOST_H__
+#define __PRINTER_CLASS_HOST_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "../Common/PrinterClassCommon.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_PRINTER_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** \brief Printer Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,
+			 *  and passed to each of the Printer class driver functions as the \c PRNTInterfaceInfo parameter. This
+			 *  stores each Printer interface's configuration and state information.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataINPipe; /**< Data IN Pipe configuration table. */
+					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataOUTPipe; /**< Data OUT Pipe configuration table. */
+				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
+				           */
+				struct
+				{
+					bool IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid
+					                *   after \ref PRNT_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the
+					                *   Configured state.
+					                */
+					uint8_t InterfaceNumber; /**< Interface index of the Printer interface within the attached device. */
+					uint8_t AlternateSetting; /**< Alternate setting within the Printer Interface in the attached device. */
+				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when
+						  *   the interface is enumerated.
+						  */
+			} USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t;
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref PRNT_Host_ConfigurePipes() function. */
+			enum PRNT_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				PRNT_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully. */
+				PRNT_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor. */
+				PRNT_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound = 2, /**< A compatible Printer interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor. */
+				PRNT_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed    = 3, /**< One or more pipes for the specified interface could not be configured correctly. */
+			};
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given Printer host interface instance using the
+			 *  Configuration Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given Printer
+			 *  instance's state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it is found within
+			 *  the device. This should be called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while the host state
+			 *  machine is in the Addressed state.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo     Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorSize  Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.
+			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorData  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref PRNT_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t PRNT_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,
+			                                 uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+			                                 void* ConfigDescriptorData) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+			/** General management task for a given Printer host class interface, required for the correct operation of
+			 *  the interface. This should be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task
+			 *  \ref USB_USBTask().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state.
+			 */
+			void PRNT_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Configures the printer to enable Bidirectional mode, if it is not already in this mode. This should be called
+			 *  once the connected device's configuration has been set, to ensure the printer is ready to accept commands.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t PRNT_Host_SetBidirectionalMode(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Retrieves the status of the virtual Printer port's inbound status lines. The result can then be masked against the
+			 *  \c PRNT_PORTSTATUS_* macros to determine the printer port's status.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[out]    PortStatus         Location where the retrieved port status should be stored.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t PRNT_Host_GetPortStatus(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,
+			                                uint8_t* const PortStatus)
+			                                ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** Soft-resets the attached printer, readying it for new commands.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t PRNT_Host_SoftReset(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Flushes any data waiting to be sent, ensuring that the send buffer is cleared.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t PRNT_Host_Flush(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Sends the given null terminated string to the attached printer's input endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     String             Pointer to a null terminated string to send.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t PRNT_Host_SendString(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,
+			                             const char* const String) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** Sends the given raw data stream to the attached printer's input endpoint. This should contain commands that the
+			 *  printer is able to understand - for example, PCL data. Not all printers accept all printer languages; see
+			 *  \ref PRNT_Host_GetDeviceID() for details on determining acceptable languages for an attached printer.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     Buffer             Pointer to a buffer containing the raw command stream to send to the printer.
+			 *  \param[in]     Length             Size in bytes of the command stream to be sent.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t PRNT_Host_SendData(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,
+			                           const void* Buffer,
+			                           const uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** Sends a given byte to the attached USB device, if connected. If a device is not connected when the function is called, the
+			 *  byte is discarded. Bytes will be queued for transmission to the device until either the pipe bank becomes full, or the
+			 *  \ref PRNT_Host_Flush() function is called to flush the pending data to the host. This allows for multiple bytes to be
+			 *  packed into a single pipe packet, increasing data throughput.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     Data               Byte of data to send to the device.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t PRNT_Host_SendByte(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,
+			                           const uint8_t Data) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Determines the number of bytes received by the printer interface from the device, waiting to be read. This indicates the number
+			 *  of bytes in the IN pipe bank only, and thus the number of calls to \ref PRNT_Host_ReceiveByte() which are guaranteed to succeed
+			 *  immediately. If multiple bytes are to be received, they should be buffered by the user application, as the pipe bank will not be
+			 *  released back to the USB controller until all bytes are read.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Total number of buffered bytes received from the device.
+			 */
+			uint16_t PRNT_Host_BytesReceived(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Reads a byte of data from the device. If no data is waiting to be read of if a USB device is not connected, the function
+			 *  returns a negative value. The \ref PRNT_Host_BytesReceived() function may be queried in advance to determine how many bytes
+			 *  are currently buffered in the Printer interface's data receive pipe.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next received byte from the device, or a negative value if no data received.
+			 */
+			int16_t PRNT_Host_ReceiveByte(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Retrieves the attached printer device's ID string, formatted according to IEEE 1284. This string is sent as a
+			 *  Unicode string from the device and is automatically converted to an ASCII encoded C string by this function, thus
+			 *  the maximum reportable string length is two less than the size given (to accommodate the Unicode string length
+			 *  bytes which are removed).
+			 *
+			 *  This string, when supported, contains the model, manufacturer and acceptable printer languages for the attached device.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] PRNTInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Printer Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[out]    DeviceIDString     Pointer to a buffer where the Device ID string should be stored, in ASCII format.
+			 *  \param[in]     BufferSize         Size in bytes of the buffer allocated for the Device ID string.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t PRNT_Host_GetDeviceID(USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Host_t* const PRNTInterfaceInfo,
+			                              char* const DeviceIDString,
+			                              const uint16_t BufferSize) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_PRINTER_HOST_C)
+				static uint8_t DCOMP_PRNT_Host_NextPRNTInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+				                                                 ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static uint8_t DCOMP_PRNT_Host_NextPRNTInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+				                                                         ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			#endif
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDISClassHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDISClassHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3ed51c8d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDISClassHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,476 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_DRIVER
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_HOST_C
+#include "RNDISClassHost.h"
+
+uint8_t RNDIS_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
+                                  uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+                                  void* ConfigDescriptorData)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint        = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataOUTEndpoint       = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  NotificationEndpoint  = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* RNDISControlInterface = NULL;
+
+	memset(&RNDISInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State));
+
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)
+	  return RNDIS_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;
+
+	RNDISControlInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+	while (!(DataINEndpoint) || !(DataOUTEndpoint) || !(NotificationEndpoint))
+	{
+		if (!(RNDISControlInterface) ||
+		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+		                              DCOMP_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			if (NotificationEndpoint)
+			{
+				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+											  DCOMP_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISDataInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+				{
+					return RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+				}
+
+				DataINEndpoint  = NULL;
+				DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+											  DCOMP_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISControlInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+				{
+					return RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+				}
+
+				RNDISControlInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+				NotificationEndpoint = NULL;
+			}
+
+			continue;
+		}
+
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+		{
+			if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)
+			  NotificationEndpoint = EndpointData;
+			else
+			  DataINEndpoint = EndpointData;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			DataOUTEndpoint = EndpointData;
+		}
+	}
+
+	RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Size  = le16_to_cpu(DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize);
+	RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.EndpointAddress = DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress;
+	RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Type  = EP_TYPE_BULK;
+
+	RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Size = le16_to_cpu(DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointSize);
+	RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.EndpointAddress = DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress;
+	RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Type = EP_TYPE_BULK;
+
+	RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipe.Size = le16_to_cpu(NotificationEndpoint->EndpointSize);
+	RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipe.EndpointAddress = NotificationEndpoint->EndpointAddress;
+	RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipe.Type = EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT;
+
+	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe, 1)))
+	  return RNDIS_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed;
+
+	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe, 1)))
+	  return RNDIS_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed;
+
+	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.NotificationPipe, 1)))
+	  return RNDIS_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed;
+
+	RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ControlInterfaceNumber = RNDISControlInterface->InterfaceNumber;
+	RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive = true;
+
+	return RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoError;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DCOMP_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISControlInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		if ((Interface->Class    == CDC_CSCP_CDCClass)    &&
+		    (Interface->SubClass == CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass) &&
+		    (Interface->Protocol == CDC_CSCP_VendorSpecificProtocol))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DCOMP_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISDataInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor,
+		                                                         USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		if ((Interface->Class    == CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass)   &&
+		    (Interface->SubClass == CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass) &&
+		    (Interface->Protocol == CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+static uint8_t DCOMP_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* Endpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		uint8_t EndpointType = (Endpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
+
+		if (((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) || (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)) &&
+		    !(Pipe_IsEndpointBound(Endpoint->EndpointAddress)))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+static uint8_t RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
+                                             void* Buffer,
+                                             const uint16_t Length)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = RNDIS_REQ_SendEncapsulatedCommand,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ControlInterfaceNumber,
+			.wLength       = Length,
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Buffer);
+}
+
+static uint8_t RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
+                                             void* Buffer,
+                                             const uint16_t Length)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = RNDIS_REQ_GetEncapsulatedResponse,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.ControlInterfaceNumber,
+			.wLength       = Length,
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Buffer);
+}
+
+uint8_t RNDIS_Host_SendKeepAlive(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t  KeepAliveMessage;
+	RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t KeepAliveMessageResponse;
+
+	KeepAliveMessage.MessageType     = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG);
+	KeepAliveMessage.MessageLength   = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t));
+	KeepAliveMessage.RequestId       = cpu_to_le32(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RequestID++);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &KeepAliveMessage,
+	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_KeepAlive_Message_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &KeepAliveMessageResponse,
+	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_KeepAlive_Complete_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+}
+
+uint8_t RNDIS_Host_InitializeDevice(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t  InitMessage;
+	RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t InitMessageResponse;
+
+	InitMessage.MessageType     = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG);
+	InitMessage.MessageLength   = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t));
+	InitMessage.RequestId       = cpu_to_le32(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RequestID++);
+
+	InitMessage.MajorVersion    = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MAJOR);
+	InitMessage.MinorVersion    = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MINOR);
+	InitMessage.MaxTransferSize = cpu_to_le32(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.HostMaxPacketSize);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &InitMessage,
+	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_Initialize_Message_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &InitMessageResponse,
+	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_Initialize_Complete_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	if (InitMessageResponse.Status != CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS))
+	  return RNDIS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED;
+
+	RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.DeviceMaxPacketSize = le32_to_cpu(InitMessageResponse.MaxTransferSize);
+
+	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+}
+
+uint8_t RNDIS_Host_SetRNDISProperty(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
+                                    const uint32_t Oid,
+                                    void* Buffer,
+                                    const uint16_t Length)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	struct
+	{
+		RNDIS_Set_Message_t SetMessage;
+		uint8_t             ContiguousBuffer[Length];
+	} SetMessageData;
+
+	RNDIS_Set_Complete_t SetMessageResponse;
+
+	SetMessageData.SetMessage.MessageType    = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG);
+	SetMessageData.SetMessage.MessageLength  = cpu_to_le32(sizeof(RNDIS_Set_Message_t) + Length);
+	SetMessageData.SetMessage.RequestId      = cpu_to_le32(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RequestID++);
+
+	SetMessageData.SetMessage.Oid            = cpu_to_le32(Oid);
+	SetMessageData.SetMessage.InformationBufferLength = cpu_to_le32(Length);
+	SetMessageData.SetMessage.InformationBufferOffset = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(RNDIS_Set_Message_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t));
+	SetMessageData.SetMessage.DeviceVcHandle = CPU_TO_LE32(0);
+
+	memcpy(&SetMessageData.ContiguousBuffer, Buffer, Length);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &SetMessageData,
+	                                               (sizeof(RNDIS_Set_Message_t) + Length))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &SetMessageResponse,
+	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_Set_Complete_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	if (SetMessageResponse.Status != CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS))
+	  return RNDIS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED;
+
+	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+}
+
+uint8_t RNDIS_Host_QueryRNDISProperty(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
+                                      const uint32_t Oid,
+                                      void* Buffer,
+                                      const uint16_t MaxLength)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	RNDIS_Query_Message_t QueryMessage;
+
+	struct
+	{
+		RNDIS_Query_Complete_t QueryMessageResponse;
+		uint8_t                ContiguousBuffer[MaxLength];
+	} QueryMessageResponseData;
+
+	QueryMessage.MessageType    = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG);
+	QueryMessage.MessageLength  = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Message_t));
+	QueryMessage.RequestId      = cpu_to_le32(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.RequestID++);
+
+	QueryMessage.Oid            = cpu_to_le32(Oid);
+	QueryMessage.InformationBufferLength = CPU_TO_LE32(0);
+	QueryMessage.InformationBufferOffset = CPU_TO_LE32(0);
+	QueryMessage.DeviceVcHandle = CPU_TO_LE32(0);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &QueryMessage,
+	                                               sizeof(RNDIS_Query_Message_t))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(RNDISInterfaceInfo, &QueryMessageResponseData,
+	                                               sizeof(QueryMessageResponseData))) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	if (QueryMessageResponseData.QueryMessageResponse.Status != CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS))
+	  return RNDIS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED;
+
+	memcpy(Buffer, &QueryMessageResponseData.ContiguousBuffer, MaxLength);
+
+	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+}
+
+bool RNDIS_Host_IsPacketReceived(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool PacketWaiting;
+
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return false;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);
+
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+	PacketWaiting = Pipe_IsINReceived();
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return PacketWaiting;
+}
+
+uint8_t RNDIS_Host_ReadPacket(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
+                              void* Buffer,
+                              uint16_t* const PacketLength)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	{
+		if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+		  Pipe_ClearIN();
+
+		*PacketLength = 0;
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+	}
+
+	RNDIS_Packet_Message_t DeviceMessage;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&DeviceMessage, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t),
+	                                     NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	*PacketLength = (uint16_t)le32_to_cpu(DeviceMessage.DataLength);
+
+	Pipe_Discard_Stream(le32_to_cpu(DeviceMessage.DataOffset) -
+	                    (sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t)),
+	                    NULL);
+
+	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(Buffer, *PacketLength, NULL);
+
+	if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))
+	  Pipe_ClearIN();
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t RNDIS_Host_SendPacket(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
+                              void* Buffer,
+                              const uint16_t PacketLength)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	RNDIS_Packet_Message_t DeviceMessage;
+
+	memset(&DeviceMessage, 0, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t));
+	DeviceMessage.MessageType   = CPU_TO_LE32(REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MSG);
+	DeviceMessage.MessageLength = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) + PacketLength);
+	DeviceMessage.DataOffset    = CPU_TO_LE32(sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t));
+	DeviceMessage.DataLength    = cpu_to_le32(PacketLength);
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(RNDISInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&DeviceMessage, sizeof(RNDIS_Packet_Message_t),
+	                                      NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	{
+		return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, PacketLength, NULL);
+	Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDISClassHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDISClassHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..79334b41b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDISClassHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,270 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB RNDIS Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Host mode driver for the library USB RNDIS Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassRNDIS
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassRNDISHost RNDIS Class Host Mode Driver
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassRNDISHost_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDISClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassRNDISHost_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the Microsoft RNDIS Ethernet
+ *  USB Class driver.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __RNDIS_CLASS_HOST_H__
+#define __RNDIS_CLASS_HOST_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "../Common/RNDISClassCommon.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** \brief RNDIS Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,
+			 *  and passed to each of the RNDIS class driver functions as the \c RNDISInterfaceInfo parameter. This
+			 *  stores each RNDIS interface's configuration and state information.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataINPipe; /**< Data IN Pipe configuration table. */
+					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataOUTPipe; /**< Data OUT Pipe configuration table. */
+					USB_Pipe_Table_t NotificationPipe; /**< Notification IN Pipe configuration table. */
+
+					uint32_t HostMaxPacketSize; /**< Maximum size of a packet which can be buffered by the host. */
+				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
+				           */
+				struct
+				{
+					bool IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid
+					                *   after \ref RNDIS_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the
+					                *   Configured state.
+					                */
+					uint8_t ControlInterfaceNumber; /**< Interface index of the RNDIS control interface within the attached device. */
+
+					uint32_t DeviceMaxPacketSize; /**< Maximum size of a packet which can be buffered by the attached RNDIS device. */
+
+					uint32_t RequestID; /**< Request ID counter to give a unique ID for each command/response pair. */
+				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when
+						  *   the interface is enumerated.
+						  */
+			} USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t;
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref RNDIS_Host_ConfigurePipes() function. */
+			enum RNDIS_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully. */
+				RNDIS_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor. */
+				RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound = 2, /**< A compatible RNDIS interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor. */
+				RNDIS_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed    = 3, /**< One or more pipes for the specified interface could not be configured correctly. */
+			};
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given RNDIS host interface instance using the Configuration
+			 *  Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given RNDIS Host instance's
+			 *  state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it is found within the device.
+			 *  This should be called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while the host state machine is in
+			 *  the Addressed state.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo    Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorSize  Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.
+			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorData  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref RNDIS_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t RNDIS_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
+			                                  uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+			                                  void* ConfigDescriptorData) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+			/** Sends a RNDIS KEEPALIVE command to the device, to ensure that it does not enter standby mode after periods
+			 *  of long inactivity.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum or \ref RNDIS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if the device returned a
+			 *          logical command failure.
+			 */
+			uint8_t RNDIS_Host_SendKeepAlive(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Initializes the attached RNDIS device's RNDIS interface. This should be called after the device's pipes have been
+			 *  configured via the call to \ref RNDIS_Host_ConfigurePipes().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum or \ref RNDIS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if the
+			 *          device returned a logical command failure.
+			 */
+			uint8_t RNDIS_Host_InitializeDevice(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Sets a given RNDIS property of an attached RNDIS device.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     Oid                 OID number of the parameter to set.
+			 *  \param[in]     Buffer              Pointer to where the property data is to be sourced from.
+			 *  \param[in]     Length              Length in bytes of the property data to sent to the device.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum or \ref RNDIS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if the
+			 *          device returned a logical command failure.
+			 */
+			uint8_t RNDIS_Host_SetRNDISProperty(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
+			                                    const uint32_t Oid,
+			                                    void* Buffer,
+			                                    const uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+			/** Gets a given RNDIS property of an attached RNDIS device.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     Oid                 OID number of the parameter to get.
+			 *  \param[in]     Buffer              Pointer to where the property data is to be written to.
+			 *  \param[in]     MaxLength           Length in bytes of the destination buffer size.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum or \ref RNDIS_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if the
+			 *          device returned a logical command failure.
+			 */
+			uint8_t RNDIS_Host_QueryRNDISProperty(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
+			                                      const uint32_t Oid,
+			                                      void* Buffer,
+			                                      const uint16_t MaxLength) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+			/** Determines if a packet is currently waiting for the host to read in and process.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if a packet is waiting to be read in by the host, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool RNDIS_Host_IsPacketReceived(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Retrieves the next pending packet from the device, discarding the remainder of the RNDIS packet header to leave
+			 *  only the packet contents for processing by the host in the nominated buffer.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[out]    Buffer              Pointer to a buffer where the packer data is to be written to.
+			 *  \param[out]    PacketLength        Pointer to where the length in bytes of the read packet is to be stored.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t RNDIS_Host_ReadPacket(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
+			                              void* Buffer,
+			                              uint16_t* const PacketLength) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2)
+			                              ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+			/** Sends the given packet to the attached RNDIS device, after adding a RNDIS packet message header.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     Buffer              Pointer to a buffer where the packer data is to be read from.
+			 *  \param[in]     PacketLength        Length in bytes of the packet to send.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t RNDIS_Host_SendPacket(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
+			                              void* Buffer,
+			                              const uint16_t PacketLength) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** General management task for a given RNDIS host class interface, required for the correct operation of the interface. This should
+			 *  be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task \ref USB_USBTask().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] RNDISInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing an RNDIS Class host configuration and state.
+			 */
+			static inline void RNDIS_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void RNDIS_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				(void)RNDISInterfaceInfo;
+			}
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_HOST_C)
+				static uint8_t RNDIS_SendEncapsulatedCommand(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
+				                                             void* Buffer,
+				                                             const uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
+				                                             ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+				static uint8_t RNDIS_GetEncapsulatedResponse(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t* const RNDISInterfaceInfo,
+				                                             void* Buffer,
+				                                             const uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
+				                                             ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+				static uint8_t DCOMP_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISControlInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+				                                                          ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static uint8_t DCOMP_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISDataInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+				                                                       ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static uint8_t DCOMP_RNDIS_Host_NextRNDISInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+				                                                           ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			#endif
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImageClassHost.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImageClassHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..24a6308f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImageClassHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,436 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../../Core/USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_SI_DRIVER
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_STILLIMAGE_HOST_C
+#include "StillImageClassHost.h"
+
+uint8_t SI_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo,
+                               uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+                               void* ConfigDescriptorData)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint      = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataOUTEndpoint     = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  EventsEndpoint      = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* StillImageInterface = NULL;
+
+	memset(&SIInterfaceInfo->State, 0x00, sizeof(SIInterfaceInfo->State));
+
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)
+	  return SI_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor;
+
+	while (!(DataINEndpoint) || !(DataOUTEndpoint) || !(EventsEndpoint))
+	{
+		if (!(StillImageInterface) ||
+		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+		                              DCOMP_SI_Host_NextSIInterfaceEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+			                              DCOMP_SI_Host_NextSIInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+			{
+				return SI_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+			}
+
+			StillImageInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+			DataINEndpoint  = NULL;
+			DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;
+			EventsEndpoint  = NULL;
+
+			continue;
+		}
+
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+		{
+			if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)
+			  EventsEndpoint = EndpointData;
+			else
+			  DataINEndpoint = EndpointData;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			DataOUTEndpoint = EndpointData;
+		}
+	}
+
+	SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Size  = le16_to_cpu(DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize);
+	SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.EndpointAddress = DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress;
+	SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Type  = EP_TYPE_BULK;
+
+	SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Size = le16_to_cpu(DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointSize);
+	SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.EndpointAddress = DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress;
+	SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Type = EP_TYPE_BULK;
+
+	SIInterfaceInfo->Config.EventsPipe.Size = le16_to_cpu(EventsEndpoint->EndpointSize);
+	SIInterfaceInfo->Config.EventsPipe.EndpointAddress = EventsEndpoint->EndpointAddress;
+	SIInterfaceInfo->Config.EventsPipe.Type = EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT;
+
+	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe, 1)))
+	  return SI_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed;
+
+	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe, 1)))
+	  return SI_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed;
+
+	if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(&SIInterfaceInfo->Config.EventsPipe, 1)))
+	  return SI_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed;
+
+	SIInterfaceInfo->State.InterfaceNumber = StillImageInterface->InterfaceNumber;
+	SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive = true;
+
+	return SI_ENUMERROR_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t DCOMP_SI_Host_NextSIInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		if ((Interface->Class    == SI_CSCP_StillImageClass)    &&
+		    (Interface->SubClass == SI_CSCP_StillImageSubclass) &&
+		    (Interface->Protocol == SI_CSCP_BulkOnlyProtocol))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+uint8_t DCOMP_SI_Host_NextSIInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* Endpoint = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		uint8_t EndpointType = (Endpoint->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
+
+		if (((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) || (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)) &&
+		    (!(Pipe_IsEndpointBound(Endpoint->EndpointAddress))))
+		{
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+uint8_t SI_Host_SendBlockHeader(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo,
+                                PIMA_Container_t* const PIMAHeader)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	if (SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsSessionOpen)
+	  PIMAHeader->TransactionID = cpu_to_le32(SIInterfaceInfo->State.TransactionID++);
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(PIMAHeader, PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0), NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	uint8_t ParamBytes = (PIMAHeader->DataLength - PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0));
+
+	if (ParamBytes)
+	{
+		if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&PIMAHeader->Params, ParamBytes, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+	}
+
+	Pipe_ClearOUT();
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t SI_Host_ReceiveBlockHeader(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo,
+                                   PIMA_Container_t* const PIMAHeader)
+{
+	uint16_t TimeoutMSRem        = SI_COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS;
+	uint16_t PreviousFrameNumber = USB_Host_GetFrameNumber();
+
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	while (!(Pipe_IsINReceived()))
+	{
+		uint16_t CurrentFrameNumber = USB_Host_GetFrameNumber();
+
+		if (CurrentFrameNumber != PreviousFrameNumber)
+		{
+			PreviousFrameNumber = CurrentFrameNumber;
+
+			if (!(TimeoutMSRem--))
+			  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_Timeout;
+		}
+
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		if (Pipe_IsStalled())
+		{
+			USB_Host_ClearEndpointStall(Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress());
+			return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;
+		}
+
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		if (Pipe_IsStalled())
+		{
+			USB_Host_ClearEndpointStall(Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress());
+			return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;
+		}
+
+		if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+	}
+
+	Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(PIMAHeader, PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0), NULL);
+
+	if (PIMAHeader->Type == CPU_TO_LE16(PIMA_CONTAINER_ResponseBlock))
+	{
+		uint8_t ParamBytes = (PIMAHeader->DataLength - PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0));
+
+		if (ParamBytes)
+		  Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&PIMAHeader->Params, ParamBytes, NULL);
+
+		Pipe_ClearIN();
+	}
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t SI_Host_SendData(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo,
+                         const void* Buffer,
+                         const uint16_t Bytes)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataOUTPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, Bytes, NULL);
+
+	Pipe_ClearOUT();
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+uint8_t SI_Host_ReadData(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo,
+                         void* Buffer,
+                         const uint16_t Bytes)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.DataINPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(Buffer, Bytes, NULL);
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+bool SI_Host_IsEventReceived(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool IsEventReceived = false;
+
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return false;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.EventsPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+	  IsEventReceived = true;
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return IsEventReceived;
+}
+
+uint8_t SI_Host_ReceiveEventHeader(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo,
+                                   PIMA_Container_t* const PIMAHeader)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(SIInterfaceInfo->Config.EventsPipe.Address);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(PIMAHeader, sizeof(PIMA_Container_t), NULL);
+
+	Pipe_ClearIN();
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+uint8_t SI_Host_OpenSession(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	SIInterfaceInfo->State.TransactionID = 0;
+	SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsSessionOpen = false;
+
+	PIMA_Container_t PIMABlock = (PIMA_Container_t)
+		{
+			.DataLength    = CPU_TO_LE32(PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(1)),
+			.Type          = CPU_TO_LE16(PIMA_CONTAINER_CommandBlock),
+			.Code          = CPU_TO_LE16(0x1002),
+			.Params        = {CPU_TO_LE32(1)},
+		};
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = SI_Host_SendBlockHeader(SIInterfaceInfo, &PIMABlock)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = SI_Host_ReceiveBlockHeader(SIInterfaceInfo, &PIMABlock)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	if ((PIMABlock.Type != CPU_TO_LE16(PIMA_CONTAINER_ResponseBlock)) || (PIMABlock.Code != CPU_TO_LE16(0x2001)))
+	  return SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED;
+
+	SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsSessionOpen = true;
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t SI_Host_CloseSession(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	PIMA_Container_t PIMABlock = (PIMA_Container_t)
+		{
+			.DataLength    = CPU_TO_LE32(PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(1)),
+			.Type          = CPU_TO_LE16(PIMA_CONTAINER_CommandBlock),
+			.Code          = CPU_TO_LE16(0x1003),
+			.Params        = {CPU_TO_LE32(1)},
+		};
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = SI_Host_SendBlockHeader(SIInterfaceInfo, &PIMABlock)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = SI_Host_ReceiveBlockHeader(SIInterfaceInfo, &PIMABlock)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsSessionOpen = false;
+
+	if ((PIMABlock.Type != CPU_TO_LE16(PIMA_CONTAINER_ResponseBlock)) || (PIMABlock.Code != CPU_TO_LE16(0x2001)))
+	  return SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED;
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t SI_Host_SendCommand(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo,
+                            const uint16_t Operation,
+                            const uint8_t TotalParams,
+                            uint32_t* const Params)
+{
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	PIMA_Container_t PIMABlock = (PIMA_Container_t)
+		{
+			.DataLength    = cpu_to_le32(PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(TotalParams)),
+			.Type          = CPU_TO_LE16(PIMA_CONTAINER_CommandBlock),
+			.Code          = cpu_to_le16(Operation),
+		};
+
+	memcpy(&PIMABlock.Params, Params, sizeof(uint32_t) * TotalParams);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = SI_Host_SendBlockHeader(SIInterfaceInfo, &PIMABlock)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t SI_Host_ReceiveResponse(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+	PIMA_Container_t PIMABlock;
+
+	if ((USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) || !(SIInterfaceInfo->State.IsActive))
+	  return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = SI_Host_ReceiveBlockHeader(SIInterfaceInfo, &PIMABlock)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	if ((PIMABlock.Type != CPU_TO_LE16(PIMA_CONTAINER_ResponseBlock)) || (PIMABlock.Code != CPU_TO_LE16(0x2001)))
+	  return SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED;
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImageClassHost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImageClassHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f9f41adb6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImageClassHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,317 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Host mode driver for the library USB Still Image Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Host mode driver for the library USB Still Image Class driver.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB module driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassSI
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassStillImageHost Still Image Class Host Mode Driver
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassStillImageHost_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImageClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassStillImageHost_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Host Mode USB Class driver framework interface, for the Still Image USB Class driver.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __SI_CLASS_HOST_H__
+#define __SI_CLASS_HOST_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../USB.h"
+		#include "../Common/StillImageClassCommon.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_SI_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Error code for some Still Image Host functions, indicating a logical (and not hardware) error. */
+			#define SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED              0x80
+
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** \brief Still Image Class Host Mode Configuration and State Structure.
+			 *
+			 *  Class state structure. An instance of this structure should be made within the user application,
+			 *  and passed to each of the Still Image class driver functions as the \c SIInterfaceInfo parameter. This
+			 *  stores each Still Image interface's configuration and state information.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataINPipe; /**< Data IN Pipe configuration table. */
+					USB_Pipe_Table_t DataOUTPipe; /**< Data OUT Pipe configuration table. */
+					USB_Pipe_Table_t EventsPipe; /**< Event notification IN Pipe configuration table. */
+				} Config; /**< Config data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+				           *   <b>must</b> be set or the interface will fail to enumerate and operate correctly.
+				           */
+				struct
+				{
+					bool     IsActive; /**< Indicates if the current interface instance is connected to an attached device, valid
+					                    *   after \ref SI_Host_ConfigurePipes() is called and the Host state machine is in the
+					                    *   Configured state.
+					                    */
+					uint8_t  InterfaceNumber; /**< Interface index of the Still Image interface within the attached device. */
+
+					bool IsSessionOpen; /**< Indicates if a PIMA session is currently open with the attached device. */
+					uint32_t TransactionID; /**< Transaction ID for the next transaction to send to the device. */
+				} State; /**< State data for the USB class interface within the device. All elements in this section
+						  *   <b>may</b> be set to initial values, but may also be ignored to default to sane values when
+						  *   the interface is enumerated.
+						  */
+			} USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t;
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible error codes returned by the \ref SI_Host_ConfigurePipes() function. */
+			enum SI_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				SI_ENUMERROR_NoError                    = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully. */
+				SI_ENUMERROR_InvalidConfigDescriptor    = 1, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor. */
+				SI_ENUMERROR_NoCompatibleInterfaceFound = 2, /**< A compatible Still Image interface was not found in the device's
+				                                              *   Configuration Descriptor.
+				                                              */
+				SI_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigurationFailed    = 3, /**< One or more pipes for the specified interface could not be configured correctly. */
+			};
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Host interface configuration routine, to configure a given Still Image host interface instance using the
+			 *  Configuration Descriptor read from an attached USB device. This function automatically updates the given Still
+			 *  Image Host instance's state values and configures the pipes required to communicate with the interface if it is
+			 *  found within the device. This should be called once after the stack has enumerated the attached device, while
+			 *  the host state machine is in the Addressed state.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo       Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorSize  Length of the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.
+			 *  \param[in]     ConfigDescriptorData  Pointer to a buffer containing the attached device's Configuration Descriptor.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref SI_Host_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t SI_Host_ConfigurePipes(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo,
+			                               uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize,
+			                               void* ConfigDescriptorData) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+			/** Opens a new PIMA session with the attached device. This should be used before any session-orientated PIMA commands
+			 *  are issued to the device. Only one session can be open at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or \ref SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if the device
+			 *          returned a logical command failure.
+			 */
+			uint8_t SI_Host_OpenSession(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Closes an already opened PIMA session with the attached device. This should be used after all session-orientated
+			 *  PIMA commands have been issued to the device.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or \ref SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if the device
+			 *          returned a logical command failure.
+			 */
+			uint8_t SI_Host_CloseSession(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Sends a raw PIMA block header to the device, filling out the transaction ID automatically. This can be used to send
+			 *  arbitrary PIMA blocks to the device with or without parameters.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     PIMAHeader       Pointer to a PIMA container structure that is to be sent.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t SI_Host_SendBlockHeader(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo,
+			                                PIMA_Container_t* const PIMAHeader) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
+			                                ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** Receives a raw PIMA block header from the device. This can be used to receive arbitrary PIMA blocks from the device with
+			 *  or without parameters.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[out]    PIMAHeader       Pointer to a PIMA container structure where the received block is to be stored.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t SI_Host_ReceiveBlockHeader(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo,
+			                                   PIMA_Container_t* const PIMAHeader) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
+			                                   ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** Sends a given PIMA command to the attached device, filling out the PIMA command header's Transaction ID automatically.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     Operation        PIMA operation code to issue to the device.
+			 *  \param[in]     TotalParams      Total number of 32-bit parameters to send to the device in the issued command block.
+			 *  \param[in]     Params           Pointer to an array of 32-bit values containing the parameters to send in the command block.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or \ref SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if the device
+			 *          returned a logical command failure.
+			 */
+			uint8_t SI_Host_SendCommand(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo,
+			                            const uint16_t Operation,
+			                            const uint8_t TotalParams,
+			                            uint32_t* const Params) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Receives and checks a response block from the attached Still Image device, once a command has been issued and all data
+			 *  associated with the command has been transferred.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or \ref SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if the device
+			 *          returned a logical command failure.
+			 */
+			uint8_t SI_Host_ReceiveResponse(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Indicates if the device has issued a PIMA event block to the host via the asynchronous events pipe.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if an event is waiting to be read, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool SI_Host_IsEventReceived(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Receives an asynchronous event block from the device via the asynchronous events pipe.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[out]    PIMAHeader       Pointer to a PIMA container structure where the event should be stored.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum, or \ref SI_ERROR_LOGICAL_CMD_FAILED if the device
+			 *          returned a logical command failure.
+			 */
+			uint8_t SI_Host_ReceiveEventHeader(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo,
+			                                   PIMA_Container_t* const PIMAHeader) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
+			                                   ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** Sends arbitrary data to the attached device, for use in the data phase of PIMA commands which require data
+			 *  transfer beyond the regular PIMA command block parameters.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[in]     Buffer           Pointer to a buffer where the data to send has been stored.
+			 *  \param[in]     Bytes            Length in bytes of the data in the buffer to send to the attached device.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t SI_Host_SendData(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo,
+			                         const void* Buffer,
+			                         const uint16_t Bytes) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** Receives arbitrary data from the attached device, for use in the data phase of PIMA commands which require data
+			 *  transfer beyond the regular PIMA command block parameters.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This function must only be called when the Host state machine is in the \ref HOST_STATE_Configured state or the
+			 *       call will fail.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state.
+			 *  \param[out]    Buffer           Pointer to a buffer where the received data is to be stored.
+			 *  \param[in]     Bytes            Length in bytes of the data to read.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t SI_Host_ReadData(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo,
+			                         void* Buffer,
+			                         const uint16_t Bytes) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** General management task for a given Still Image host class interface, required for the correct operation of the
+			 *  interface. This should be called frequently in the main program loop, before the master USB management task
+			 *  \ref USB_USBTask().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] SIInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Still Image Class host configuration and state.
+			 */
+			static inline void SI_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void SI_Host_USBTask(USB_ClassInfo_SI_Host_t* const SIInterfaceInfo)
+			{
+				(void)SIInterfaceInfo;
+			}
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define SI_COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS        10000
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_STILLIMAGE_HOST_C)
+				static uint8_t DCOMP_SI_Host_NextSIInterface(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+				                                             ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+				static uint8_t DCOMP_SI_Host_NextSIInterfaceEndpoint(void* const CurrentDescriptor)
+				                                                     ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			#endif
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MIDIClass.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MIDIClass.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7e6ba1c5b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MIDIClass.h
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master include file for the library USB MIDI Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Master include file for the library USB MIDI Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.
+ *
+ *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of
+ *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassMIDI MIDI Class Driver
+ *  \brief USB class driver for the USB-IF MIDI class standard.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassMIDI_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDIClassDevice.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDIClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassMIDI_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  MIDI Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the USB MIDI Class, for both Device
+ *  and Host USB modes. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the MIDI class manually
+ *  via the low-level LUFA APIs.
+ *
+ *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with
+ *  Hosts or Devices using the USB MIDI Class.
+ *
+ *  \note The USB MIDI class is actually a special case of the regular Audio class, thus this module depends on
+ *        structure definitions from the \ref Group_USBClassAudioDevice class driver module.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MIDI_CLASS_H_
+#define _MIDI_CLASS_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_MIDI_DRIVER
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../Core/USBMode.h"
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+			#include "Device/MIDIClassDevice.h"
+		#endif
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+			#include "Host/MIDIClassHost.h"
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorageClass.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorageClass.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..79a052163
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorageClass.h
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master include file for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Master include file for the library USB Mass Storage Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.
+ *
+ *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of
+ *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassMS Mass Storage Class Driver
+ *  \brief USB class driver for the USB-IF Bulk-Only Transport Mass Storage class standard.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassMS_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorageClassDevice.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorageClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassMS_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Mass Storage Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the USB Mass Storage Class, for both
+ *  Device and Host USB modes. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the Mass Storage class
+ *  manually via the low-level LUFA APIs.
+ *
+ *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with
+ *  Hosts or Devices using the USB Mass Storage Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MS_CLASS_H_
+#define _MS_CLASS_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_MS_DRIVER
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../Core/USBMode.h"
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+			#include "Device/MassStorageClassDevice.h"
+		#endif
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+			#include "Host/MassStorageClassHost.h"
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/PrinterClass.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/PrinterClass.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..91121b5d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/PrinterClass.h
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master include file for the library USB Printer Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Master include file for the library USB Printer Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.
+ *
+ *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of
+ *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassPrinter Printer Class Driver
+ *  \brief USB class driver for the USB-IF Printer class standard.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassPrinter_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/PrinterClassDevice.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/PrinterClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassPrinter_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Printer Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the USB Printer Class, for the base
+ *  USB Printer transport layer for USB Host mode only. Note that printers are free to implement whatever printer language
+ *  they choose on top of this (e.g. Postscript), and so this driver exposes low level data transport functions only rather
+ *  than high level raster or text functions. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the Printer
+ *  class manually via the low-level LUFA APIs.
+ *
+ *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with
+ *  Devices using the USB Printer Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _PRINTER_CLASS_H_
+#define _PRINTER_CLASS_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_PRINTER_DRIVER
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../Core/USBMode.h"
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+			#include "Device/PrinterClassDevice.h"
+		#endif
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+			#include "Host/PrinterClassHost.h"
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDISClass.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDISClass.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1555f0d23
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDISClass.h
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master include file for the library USB RNDIS Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Master include file for the library USB RNDIS Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.
+ *
+ *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of
+ *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassRNDIS RNDIS (Networking) Class Driver
+ *  \brief USB class driver for the Microsoft Remote Network Driver Interface Specification (RNDIS) class standard.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassRNDIS_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDISClassDevice.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDISClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassRNDIS_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  RNDIS Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the Microsoft USB RNDIS Networking
+ *  Class, for both Device and Host USB modes. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the
+ *  RNDIS class manually via the low-level LUFA APIs.
+ *
+ *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with
+ *  Hosts using the USB RNDIS Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _RNDIS_CLASS_H_
+#define _RNDIS_CLASS_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_DRIVER
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../Core/USBMode.h"
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+			#include "Device/RNDISClassDevice.h"
+		#endif
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+			#include "Host/RNDISClassHost.h"
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/StillImageClass.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/StillImageClass.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f2ec37b03
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/StillImageClass.h
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master include file for the library USB Still Image Class driver.
+ *
+ *  Master include file for the library USB Still Image Class driver, for both host and device modes, where available.
+ *
+ *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of this optional class driver, instead of
+ *  including any headers in the USB/ClassDriver/Device, USB/ClassDriver/Host or USB/ClassDriver/Common subdirectories.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBClassDrivers
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBClassSI Still Image Class Driver
+ *  \brief USB class driver for the USB-IF Still Image (PIMA-compliant) class standard.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassSI_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImageClassHost.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USBClassSI_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Still Image Class Driver module. This module contains an internal implementation of the USB Still Image Class,
+ *  for USB Host mode only. User applications can use this class driver instead of implementing the Still Image class
+ *  manually via the low-level LUFA APIs.
+ *
+ *  This module is designed to simplify the user code by exposing only the required interface needed to interface with
+ *  Devices using the USB Still Image Class.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _SI_CLASS_H_
+#define _SI_CLASS_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_SI_DRIVER
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../Core/USBMode.h"
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+			#include "Host/StillImageClassHost.h"
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Device_AVR8.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Device_AVR8.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d23e7b846
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Device_AVR8.c
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+
+#include "../Device.h"
+
+void USB_Device_SendRemoteWakeup(void)
+{
+	if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL))
+	{
+		USB_PLL_On();
+		while (!(USB_PLL_IsReady()));
+	}
+
+	USB_CLK_Unfreeze();
+
+	UDCON |= (1 << RMWKUP);
+	while (UDCON & (1 << RMWKUP));
+}
+
+#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Device_AVR8.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Device_AVR8.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5efffe7b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Device_AVR8.h
@@ -0,0 +1,269 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB Device definitions for the AVR8 microcontrollers.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Device_AVR8
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Device
+ *  \defgroup Group_Device_AVR8 Device Management (AVR8)
+ *  \brief USB Device definitions for the AVR8 microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  Architecture specific USB Device definitions for the Atmel 8-bit AVR microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __USBDEVICE_AVR8_H__
+#define __USBDEVICE_AVR8_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../USBController.h"
+		#include "../StdDescriptors.h"
+		#include "../USBInterrupt.h"
+		#include "../Endpoint.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+		#if (defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS))
+			#error USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS and USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS are mutually exclusive.
+		#endif
+
+		#if (defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS))
+			#error USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS and USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS are mutually exclusive.
+		#endif
+
+		#if (defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS))
+			#error USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS and USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS are mutually exclusive.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** \name USB Device Mode Option Masks */
+			//@{
+			#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Mask for the Options parameter of the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the
+				 *  USB interface should be initialized in low speed (1.5Mb/s) mode.
+				 *
+				 *  \note Low Speed mode is not available on all USB AVR models.
+				 *        \n
+				 *
+				 *  \note Restrictions apply on the number, size and type of endpoints which can be used
+				 *        when running in low speed mode - please refer to the USB 2.0 specification.
+				 */
+				#define USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED            (1 << 0)
+			#endif
+
+			/** Mask for the Options parameter of the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the
+			 *  USB interface should be initialized in full speed (12Mb/s) mode.
+			 */
+			#define USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED               (0 << 0)
+			//@}
+
+			#if (!defined(NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL) && \
+			     (defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || \
+			      defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_2_AVR) || \
+				  defined(__DOXYGEN__)))
+				/** String descriptor index for the device's unique serial number string descriptor within the device.
+				 *  This unique serial number is used by the host to associate resources to the device (such as drivers or COM port
+				 *  number allocations) to a device regardless of the port it is plugged in to on the host. Some microcontrollers contain
+				 *  a unique serial number internally, and setting the device descriptors serial number string index to this value
+				 *  will cause it to use the internal serial number.
+				 *
+				 *  On unsupported devices, this will evaluate to \ref NO_DESCRIPTOR and so will force the host to create a pseudo-serial
+				 *  number for the device.
+				 */
+				#define USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL            0xDC
+
+				/** Length of the device's unique internal serial number, in bits, if present on the selected microcontroller
+				 *  model.
+				 */
+				#define INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS    80
+
+				/** Start address of the internal serial number, in the appropriate address space, if present on the selected microcontroller
+				 *  model.
+				 */
+				#define INTERNAL_SERIAL_START_ADDRESS  0x0E
+			#else
+				#define USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL            NO_DESCRIPTOR
+
+				#define INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS    0
+				#define INTERNAL_SERIAL_START_ADDRESS  0
+			#endif
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Sends a Remote Wakeup request to the host. This signals to the host that the device should
+			 *  be taken out of suspended mode, and communications should resume.
+			 *
+			 *  Typically, this is implemented so that HID devices (mice, keyboards, etc.) can wake up the
+			 *  host computer when the host has suspended all USB devices to enter a low power state.
+			 *
+			 *  \attention This function should only be used if the device has indicated to the host that it
+			 *             supports the Remote Wakeup feature in the device descriptors, and should only be
+			 *             issued if the host is currently allowing remote wakeup events from the device (i.e.,
+			 *             the \ref USB_Device_RemoteWakeupEnabled flag is set). When the \c NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+			 *             compile time option is used, this function is unavailable.
+			 *             \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \attention The USB clock must be running for this function to operate. If the stack is initialized with
+			 *             the \ref USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL option enabled, the user must ensure that the PLL is running
+			 *             before attempting to call this function.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref Group_StdDescriptors for more information on the RMWAKEUP feature and device descriptors.
+			 */
+			void USB_Device_SendRemoteWakeup(void);
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Returns the current USB frame number, when in device mode. Every millisecond the USB bus is active (i.e. enumerated to a host)
+			 *  the frame number is incremented by one.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Current USB frame number from the USB controller.
+			 */
+			static inline uint16_t USB_Device_GetFrameNumber(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint16_t USB_Device_GetFrameNumber(void)
+			{
+				return UDFNUM;
+			}
+
+			#if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS)
+				/** Enables the device mode Start Of Frame events. When enabled, this causes the
+				 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event to fire once per millisecond, synchronized to the USB bus,
+				 *  at the start of each USB frame when enumerated in device mode.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This function is not available when the \c NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined.
+				 */
+				static inline void USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+				static inline void USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents(void)
+				{
+					USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SOFI);
+				}
+
+				/** Disables the device mode Start Of Frame events. When disabled, this stops the firing of the
+				 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event when enumerated in device mode.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This function is not available when the \c NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined.
+				 */
+				static inline void USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+				static inline void USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents(void)
+				{
+					USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SOFI);
+				}
+			#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			#if defined(USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED)
+			static inline void USB_Device_SetLowSpeed(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Device_SetLowSpeed(void)
+			{
+				UDCON |=  (1 << LSM);
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Device_SetFullSpeed(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Device_SetFullSpeed(void)
+			{
+				UDCON &= ~(1 << LSM);
+			}
+			#endif
+
+			static inline void USB_Device_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Device_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address)
+			{
+				UDADDR = (UDADDR & (1 << ADDEN)) | (Address & 0x7F);
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Device_EnableDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Device_EnableDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address)
+			{
+				(void)Address;
+
+				UDADDR |= (1 << ADDEN);
+			}
+
+			static inline bool USB_Device_IsAddressSet(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline bool USB_Device_IsAddressSet(void)
+			{
+				return (UDADDR & (1 << ADDEN));
+			}
+
+			#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL != NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+			static inline void USB_Device_GetSerialString(uint16_t* const UnicodeString) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static inline void USB_Device_GetSerialString(uint16_t* const UnicodeString)
+			{
+				uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask();
+				GlobalInterruptDisable();
+
+				uint8_t SigReadAddress = INTERNAL_SERIAL_START_ADDRESS;
+
+				for (uint8_t SerialCharNum = 0; SerialCharNum < (INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS / 4); SerialCharNum++)
+				{
+					uint8_t SerialByte = boot_signature_byte_get(SigReadAddress);
+
+					if (SerialCharNum & 0x01)
+					{
+						SerialByte >>= 4;
+						SigReadAddress++;
+					}
+
+					SerialByte &= 0x0F;
+
+					UnicodeString[SerialCharNum] = cpu_to_le16((SerialByte >= 10) ?
+															   (('A' - 10) + SerialByte) : ('0' + SerialByte));
+				}
+
+				SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt);
+			}
+			#endif
+
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/EndpointStream_AVR8.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/EndpointStream_AVR8.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5782824cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/EndpointStream_AVR8.c
@@ -0,0 +1,275 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+
+#include "EndpointStream_AVR8.h"
+
+#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
+uint8_t Endpoint_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length,
+                                uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)
+{
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+	uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
+	  Length -= *BytesProcessed;
+
+	while (Length)
+	{
+		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		{
+			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+			if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
+			{
+				*BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;
+				return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;
+			}
+
+			if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
+			  return ErrorCode;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			Endpoint_Discard_8();
+
+			Length--;
+			BytesInTransfer++;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t Endpoint_Null_Stream(uint16_t Length,
+                             uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)
+{
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+	uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
+	  Length -= *BytesProcessed;
+
+	while (Length)
+	{
+		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		{
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+			if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
+			{
+				*BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;
+				return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;
+			}
+
+			if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
+			  return ErrorCode;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			Endpoint_Write_8(0);
+
+			Length--;
+			BytesInTransfer++;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+/* The following abuses the C preprocessor in order to copy-paste common code with slight alterations,
+ * so that the code needs to be written once. It is a crude form of templating to reduce code maintenance. */
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(*BufferPtr)
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(*BufferPtr)
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Endpoint_Read_8()
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Stream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Endpoint_Read_8()
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+#if defined(ARCH_HAS_FLASH_ADDRESS_SPACE)
+	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_PStream_LE
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount
+	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(pgm_read_byte(BufferPtr))
+	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_PStream_BE
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount
+	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(pgm_read_byte(BufferPtr))
+	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+#endif
+
+#if defined(ARCH_HAS_EEPROM_ADDRESS_SPACE)
+	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_EStream_LE
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount
+	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(eeprom_read_byte(BufferPtr))
+	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_EStream_BE
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount
+	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(eeprom_read_byte(BufferPtr))
+	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_EStream_LE
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
+	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount
+	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_update_byte(BufferPtr, Endpoint_Read_8())
+	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_EStream_BE
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
+	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount
+	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_update_byte(BufferPtr, Endpoint_Read_8())
+	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(*BufferPtr)
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(*BufferPtr)
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Endpoint_Read_8()
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Endpoint_Read_8()
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"
+
+#if defined(ARCH_HAS_FLASH_ADDRESS_SPACE)
+	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_LE
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount
+	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(pgm_read_byte(BufferPtr))
+	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"
+
+	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_BE
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount
+	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(pgm_read_byte(BufferPtr))
+	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"
+#endif
+
+#if defined(ARCH_HAS_EEPROM_ADDRESS_SPACE)
+	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_LE
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount
+	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(eeprom_read_byte(BufferPtr))
+	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"
+
+	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_BE
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount
+	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(eeprom_read_byte(BufferPtr))
+	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"
+
+	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Control_EStream_LE
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount
+	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_update_byte(BufferPtr, Endpoint_Read_8())
+	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"
+
+	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Control_EStream_BE
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount
+	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_update_byte(BufferPtr, Endpoint_Read_8())
+	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/EndpointStream_AVR8.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/EndpointStream_AVR8.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..203278976
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/EndpointStream_AVR8.h
@@ -0,0 +1,658 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Endpoint data stream transmission and reception management for the AVR8 microcontrollers.
+ *  \copydetails Group_EndpointStreamRW_AVR8
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
+ *  \defgroup Group_EndpointStreamRW_AVR8 Read/Write of Multi-Byte Streams (AVR8)
+ *  \brief Endpoint data stream transmission and reception management for the Atmel AVR8 architecture.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of data streams from
+ *  and to endpoints.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __ENDPOINT_STREAM_AVR8_H__
+#define __ENDPOINT_STREAM_AVR8_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../USBMode.h"
+		#include "../USBTask.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** \name Stream functions for null data */
+			//@{
+
+			/** Reads and discards the given number of bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank,
+			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically
+			 *  discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the user is responsible for manually
+			 *  discarding the last packet from the host via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,
+			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid
+			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time
+			 *  the endpoint bank becomes empty while there is still data to process (and after the current
+			 *  packet has been acknowledged) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the total number
+			 *  of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of
+			 *  \ref ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed
+			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters
+			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;
+			 *
+			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Discard_Stream(512, NULL)) != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;
+			 *
+			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;
+			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Discard_Stream(512, &BytesProcessed)) == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required
+			 *  }
+			 *
+			 *  if (ErrorCode != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to discard via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current
+			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length,
+			                                uint16_t* const BytesProcessed);
+
+			/** Writes a given number of zeroed bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank, sending
+			 *  full packets to the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically sent once the
+			 *  remaining bytes have been written; the user is responsible for manually sending the last
+			 *  packet to the host via the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,
+			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid
+			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time
+			 *  the endpoint bank becomes full while there is still data to process (and after the current
+			 *  packet transmission has been initiated) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the
+			 *  total number of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of
+			 *  \ref ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed
+			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters
+			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;
+			 *
+			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Null_Stream(512, NULL)) != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;
+			 *
+			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;
+			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Null_Stream(512, &BytesProcessed)) == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required
+			 *  }
+			 *
+			 *  if (ErrorCode != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of zero bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current
+			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Null_Stream(uint16_t Length,
+			                             uint16_t* const BytesProcessed);
+
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name Stream functions for RAM source/destination data */
+			//@{
+
+			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,
+			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;
+			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the
+			 *  \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,
+			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid
+			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time
+			 *  the endpoint bank becomes full while there is still data to process (and after the current
+			 *  packet transmission has been initiated) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the
+			 *  total number of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of
+			 *  \ref ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed
+			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters
+			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t DataStream[512];
+			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;
+			 *
+			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),
+			 *                                            NULL)) != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t  DataStream[512];
+			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;
+			 *
+			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;
+			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),
+			 *                                               &BytesProcessed)) == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required
+			 *  }
+			 *
+			 *  if (ErrorCode != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current
+			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                                 uint16_t Length,
+			                                 uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,
+			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;
+			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the
+			 *  \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current
+			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                                 uint16_t Length,
+			                                 uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,
+			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically
+			 *  discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the user is responsible for manually
+			 *  discarding the last packet from the host via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,
+			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid
+			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time
+			 *  the endpoint bank becomes empty while there is still data to process (and after the current
+			 *  packet has been acknowledged) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the total number
+			 *  of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of
+			 *  \ref ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed
+			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters
+			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t DataStream[512];
+			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;
+			 *
+			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),
+			 *                                           NULL)) != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t  DataStream[512];
+			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;
+			 *
+			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;
+			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),
+			 *                                              &BytesProcessed)) == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required
+			 *  }
+			 *
+			 *  if (ErrorCode != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current
+			 *                              transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(void* const Buffer,
+			                                uint16_t Length,
+			                                uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,
+			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically
+			 *  discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the user is responsible for manually
+			 *  discarding the last packet from the host via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current
+			 *                              transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Stream_BE(void* const Buffer,
+			                                uint16_t Length,
+			                                uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the CONTROL type endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,
+			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The host OUT acknowledgement is not automatically cleared
+			 *  in both failure and success states; the user is responsible for manually clearing the status OUT packet
+			 *  to finalize the transfer's status stage via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically sends the last packet in the data stage of the transaction; when the
+			 *        function returns, the user is responsible for clearing the <b>status</b> stage of the transaction.
+			 *        Note that the status stage packet is sent or received in the opposite direction of the data flow.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                                         uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the CONTROL type endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,
+			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The host OUT acknowledgement is not automatically cleared
+			 *  in both failure and success states; the user is responsible for manually clearing the status OUT packet
+			 *  to finalize the transfer's status stage via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically sends the last packet in the data stage of the transaction; when the
+			 *        function returns, the user is responsible for clearing the <b>status</b> stage of the transaction.
+			 *        Note that the status stage packet is sent or received in the opposite direction of the data flow.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_BE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                                         uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the CONTROL endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,
+			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The device IN acknowledgement is not
+			 *  automatically sent after success or failure states; the user is responsible for manually sending the
+			 *  status IN packet to finalize the transfer's status stage via the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically sends the last packet in the data stage of the transaction; when the
+			 *        function returns, the user is responsible for clearing the <b>status</b> stage of the transaction.
+			 *        Note that the status stage packet is sent or received in the opposite direction of the data flow.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in]  Length  Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(void* const Buffer,
+			                                        uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the CONTROL endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,
+			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The device IN acknowledgement is not
+			 *  automatically sent after success or failure states; the user is responsible for manually sending the
+			 *  status IN packet to finalize the transfer's status stage via the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically sends the last packet in the data stage of the transaction; when the
+			 *        function returns, the user is responsible for clearing the <b>status</b> stage of the transaction.
+			 *        Note that the status stage packet is sent or received in the opposite direction of the data flow.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in]  Length  Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_BE(void* const Buffer,
+			                                        uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name Stream functions for EEPROM source/destination data */
+			//@{
+
+			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current
+			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_EStream_LE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                                  uint16_t Length,
+			                                  uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current
+			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_EStream_BE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                                  uint16_t Length,
+			                                  uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** EEPROM buffer destination version of \ref Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to, located in EEPROM memory space.
+			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current
+			 *                              transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_EStream_LE(void* const Buffer,
+			                                 uint16_t Length,
+			                                 uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** EEPROM buffer destination version of \ref Endpoint_Read_Stream_BE().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to, located in EEPROM memory space.
+			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current
+			 *                              transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_EStream_BE(void* const Buffer,
+			                                 uint16_t Length,
+			                                 uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** EEPROM buffer source version of Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically sends the last packet in the data stage of the transaction; when the
+			 *        function returns, the user is responsible for clearing the <b>status</b> stage of the transaction.
+			 *        Note that the status stage packet is sent or received in the opposite direction of the data flow.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_LE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                                          uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_BE().
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically sends the last packet in the data stage of the transaction; when the
+			 *        function returns, the user is responsible for clearing the <b>status</b> stage of the transaction.
+			 *        Note that the status stage packet is sent or received in the opposite direction of the data flow.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_BE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                                          uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE().
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically sends the last packet in the data stage of the transaction; when the
+			 *        function returns, the user is responsible for clearing the <b>status</b> stage of the transaction.
+			 *        Note that the status stage packet is sent or received in the opposite direction of the data flow.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in]  Length  Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_EStream_LE(void* const Buffer,
+			                                         uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_BE().
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically sends the last packet in the data stage of the transaction; when the
+			 *        function returns, the user is responsible for clearing the <b>status</b> stage of the transaction.
+			 *        Note that the status stage packet is sent or received in the opposite direction of the data flow.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in]  Length  Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_EStream_BE(void* const Buffer,
+			                                         uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name Stream functions for PROGMEM source/destination data */
+			//@{
+
+			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE().
+			 *
+			 *  \pre The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current
+			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_PStream_LE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                                  uint16_t Length,
+			                                  uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE().
+			 *
+			 *  \pre The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current
+			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_PStream_BE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                                  uint16_t Length,
+			                                  uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE().
+			 *
+			 *  \pre The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically sends the last packet in the data stage of the transaction; when the
+			 *        function returns, the user is responsible for clearing the <b>status</b> stage of the transaction.
+			 *        Note that the status stage packet is sent or received in the opposite direction of the data flow.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_LE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                                          uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_BE().
+			 *
+			 *  \pre The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically sends the last packet in the data stage of the transaction; when the
+			 *        function returns, the user is responsible for clearing the <b>status</b> stage of the transaction.
+			 *        Note that the status stage packet is sent or received in the opposite direction of the data flow.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_BE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                                          uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			//@}
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Endpoint_AVR8.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Endpoint_AVR8.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f5d20341b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Endpoint_AVR8.c
@@ -0,0 +1,201 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+
+#include "../Endpoint.h"
+
+#if !defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE)
+uint8_t USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP_DEFAULT_SIZE;
+#endif
+
+bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(const USB_Endpoint_Table_t* const Table,
+                                     const uint8_t Entries)
+{
+	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < Entries; i++)
+	{
+		if (!(Table[i].Address))
+		  continue;
+
+		if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(Table[i].Address, Table[i].Type, Table[i].Size, Table[i].Banks)))
+		  return false;
+	}
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_Prv(const uint8_t Number,
+                                    const uint8_t UECFG0XData,
+                                    const uint8_t UECFG1XData)
+{
+#if defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE) || defined(ORDERED_EP_CONFIG)
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(Number);
+	Endpoint_EnableEndpoint();
+
+	UECFG1X = 0;
+	UECFG0X = UECFG0XData;
+	UECFG1X = UECFG1XData;
+
+	return Endpoint_IsConfigured();
+#else
+	for (uint8_t EPNum = Number; EPNum < ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS; EPNum++)
+	{
+		uint8_t UECFG0XTemp;
+		uint8_t UECFG1XTemp;
+		uint8_t UEIENXTemp;
+
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(EPNum);
+
+		if (EPNum == Number)
+		{
+			UECFG0XTemp = UECFG0XData;
+			UECFG1XTemp = UECFG1XData;
+			UEIENXTemp  = 0;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			UECFG0XTemp = UECFG0X;
+			UECFG1XTemp = UECFG1X;
+			UEIENXTemp  = UEIENX;
+		}
+
+		if (!(UECFG1XTemp & (1 << ALLOC)))
+		  continue;
+
+		Endpoint_DisableEndpoint();
+		UECFG1X &= ~(1 << ALLOC);
+
+		Endpoint_EnableEndpoint();
+		UECFG0X = UECFG0XTemp;
+		UECFG1X = UECFG1XTemp;
+		UEIENX  = UEIENXTemp;
+
+		if (!(Endpoint_IsConfigured()))
+		  return false;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(Number);
+	return true;
+#endif
+}
+
+void Endpoint_ClearEndpoints(void)
+{
+	UEINT = 0;
+
+	for (uint8_t EPNum = 0; EPNum < ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS; EPNum++)
+	{
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(EPNum);
+		UEIENX  = 0;
+		UEINTX  = 0;
+		UECFG1X = 0;
+		Endpoint_DisableEndpoint();
+	}
+}
+
+void Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(void)
+{
+	if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST)
+	{
+		while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+		{
+			if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+			  return;
+		}
+
+		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+		{
+			if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+			  return;
+		}
+
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+	}
+}
+
+#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
+uint8_t Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(void)
+{
+	#if (USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS < 0xFF)
+	uint8_t  TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;
+	#else
+	uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;
+	#endif
+
+	uint16_t PreviousFrameNumber = USB_Device_GetFrameNumber();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		if (Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection() == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+		{
+			if (Endpoint_IsINReady())
+			  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+			  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;
+		}
+
+		uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;
+
+		if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
+		else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)
+		  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_BusSuspended;
+		else if (Endpoint_IsStalled())
+		  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_EndpointStalled;
+
+		uint16_t CurrentFrameNumber = USB_Device_GetFrameNumber();
+
+		if (CurrentFrameNumber != PreviousFrameNumber)
+		{
+			PreviousFrameNumber = CurrentFrameNumber;
+
+			if (!(TimeoutMSRem--))
+			  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_Timeout;
+		}
+	}
+}
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Endpoint_AVR8.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Endpoint_AVR8.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1632d93cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Endpoint_AVR8.h
@@ -0,0 +1,819 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB Endpoint definitions for the AVR8 microcontrollers.
+ *  \copydetails Group_EndpointManagement_AVR8
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_EndpointRW
+ *  \defgroup Group_EndpointRW_AVR8 Endpoint Data Reading and Writing (AVR8)
+ *  \brief Endpoint data read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR8 architecture.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing from and to endpoints.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
+ *  \defgroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_AVR8 Read/Write of Primitive Data Types (AVR8)
+ *  \brief Endpoint primitive read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR8 architecture.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of primitive data types
+ *  from and to endpoints.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement
+ *  \defgroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_AVR8 Endpoint Packet Management (AVR8)
+ *  \brief Endpoint packet management definitions for the Atmel AVR8 architecture.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to packet management of endpoints.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_EndpointManagement
+ *  \defgroup Group_EndpointManagement_AVR8 Endpoint Management (AVR8)
+ *  \brief Endpoint management definitions for the Atmel AVR8 architecture.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros and enums related to endpoint management when in USB Device mode. This
+ *  module contains the endpoint management macros, as well as endpoint interrupt and data
+ *  send/receive functions for various data types.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __ENDPOINT_AVR8_H__
+#define __ENDPOINT_AVR8_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../USBTask.h"
+		#include "../USBInterrupt.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST
+			                                                                       ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes)
+			{
+				uint8_t  MaskVal    = 0;
+				uint16_t CheckBytes = 8;
+
+				while (CheckBytes < Bytes)
+				{
+					MaskVal++;
+					CheckBytes <<= 1;
+				}
+
+				return (MaskVal << EPSIZE0);
+			}
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			void Endpoint_ClearEndpoints(void);
+			bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_Prv(const uint8_t Number,
+			                                    const uint8_t UECFG0XData,
+			                                    const uint8_t UECFG1XData);
+
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			#if (!defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
+				/** Default size of the default control endpoint's bank, until altered by the control endpoint bank size
+				 *  value in the device descriptor. Not available if the \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token is defined.
+				 */
+				#define ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP_DEFAULT_SIZE     8
+			#endif
+
+			#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+					/** Total number of endpoints (including the default control endpoint at address 0) which may
+					 *  be used in the device. Different USB AVR models support different amounts of endpoints,
+					 *  this value reflects the maximum number of endpoints for the currently selected AVR model.
+					 */
+					#define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS        7
+				#else
+					#define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS        5
+				#endif
+			#else
+				#define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS            1
+			#endif
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible error return codes of the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady() function.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointRW_AVR8
+			 */
+			enum Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError                 = 0, /**< Endpoint is ready for next packet, no error. */
+				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_EndpointStalled         = 1, /**< The endpoint was stalled during the stream
+				                                                 *   transfer by the host or device.
+				                                                 */
+				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected      = 2,	/**< Device was disconnected from the host while
+				                                                 *   waiting for the endpoint to become ready.
+				                                                 */
+				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_BusSuspended            = 3, /**< The USB bus has been suspended by the host and
+				                                                 *   no USB endpoint traffic can occur until the bus
+				                                                 *   has resumed.
+				                                                 */
+				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_Timeout                 = 4, /**< The host failed to accept or send the next packet
+				                                                 *   within the software timeout period set by the
+				                                                 *   \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro.
+				                                                 */
+			};
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Configures the specified endpoint address with the given endpoint type, bank size and number of hardware
+			 *  banks. Once configured, the endpoint may be read from or written to, depending on its direction.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Address    Endpoint address to configure.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Type       Type of endpoint to configure, a \c EP_TYPE_* mask. Not all endpoint types
+			 *                        are available on Low Speed USB devices - refer to the USB 2.0 specification.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Size       Size of the endpoint's bank, where packets are stored before they are transmitted
+			 *                        to the USB host, or after they have been received from the USB host (depending on
+			 *                        the endpoint's data direction). The bank size must indicate the maximum packet size
+			 *                        that the endpoint can handle.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Banks      Number of banks to use for the endpoint being configured.
+			 *
+			 *  \attention When the \c ORDERED_EP_CONFIG compile time option is used, Endpoints <b>must</b> be configured in
+			 *             ascending order, or bank corruption will occur.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Different endpoints may have different maximum packet sizes based on the endpoint's index - please
+			 *        refer to the chosen microcontroller model's datasheet to determine the maximum bank size for each endpoint.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note The default control endpoint should not be manually configured by the user application, as
+			 *        it is automatically configured by the library internally.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine will automatically select the specified endpoint upon success. Upon failure, the endpoint
+			 *        which failed to reconfigure correctly will be selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the configuration succeeded, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(const uint8_t Address,
+			                                              const uint8_t Type,
+			                                              const uint16_t Size,
+			                                              const uint8_t Banks) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(const uint8_t Address,
+			                                              const uint8_t Type,
+			                                              const uint16_t Size,
+			                                              const uint8_t Banks)
+			{
+				uint8_t Number = (Address & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK);
+
+				if (Number >= ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS)
+				  return false;
+
+				return Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_Prv(Number,
+				                                      ((Type << EPTYPE0) | ((Address & ENDPOINT_DIR_IN) ? (1 << EPDIR) : 0)),
+				                                      ((1 << ALLOC) | ((Banks > 1) ? (1 << EPBK0) : 0) | Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(Size)));
+			}
+
+			/** Indicates the number of bytes currently stored in the current endpoint's selected bank.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointRW_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \return Total number of bytes in the currently selected Endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(void)
+			{
+				#if (defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR))
+					return UEBCX;
+				#elif defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR)
+					return (((uint16_t)UEBCHX << 8) | UEBCLX);
+				#elif defined(USB_SERIES_2_AVR)
+					return UEBCLX;
+				#endif
+			}
+
+			/** Determines the currently selected endpoint's direction.
+			 *
+			 *  \return The currently selected endpoint's direction, as a \c ENDPOINT_DIR_* mask.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection(void)
+			{
+				return (UECFG0X & (1 << EPDIR)) ? ENDPOINT_DIR_IN : ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT;
+			}
+
+			/** Get the endpoint address of the currently selected endpoint. This is typically used to save
+			 *  the currently selected endpoint so that it can be restored after another endpoint has been
+			 *  manipulated.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Index of the currently selected endpoint.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint(void)
+			{
+				#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
+					return ((UENUM & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK) | Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection());
+				#else
+					return ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP;
+				#endif
+			}
+
+			/** Selects the given endpoint address.
+			 *
+			 *  Any endpoint operations which do not require the endpoint address to be indicated will operate on
+			 *  the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Address Endpoint address to select.
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(const uint8_t Address)
+			{
+				#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
+					UENUM = (Address & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK);
+				#endif
+			}
+
+			/** Resets the endpoint bank FIFO. This clears all the endpoint banks and resets the USB controller's
+			 *  data In and Out pointers to the bank's contents.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Address  Endpoint address whose FIFO buffers are to be reset.
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(const uint8_t Address)
+			{
+				UERST = (1 << (Address & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK));
+				UERST = 0;
+			}
+
+			/** Enables the currently selected endpoint so that data can be sent and received through it to
+			 *  and from a host.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Endpoints must first be configured properly via \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint().
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_EnableEndpoint(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_EnableEndpoint(void)
+			{
+				UECONX |= (1 << EPEN);
+			}
+
+			/** Disables the currently selected endpoint so that data cannot be sent and received through it
+			 *  to and from a host.
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_DisableEndpoint(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_DisableEndpoint(void)
+			{
+				UECONX &= ~(1 << EPEN);
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is enabled, but not necessarily configured.
+			 *
+			 * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint is enabled, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsEnabled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsEnabled(void)
+			{
+				return ((UECONX & (1 << EPEN)) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Retrieves the number of busy banks in the currently selected endpoint, which have been queued for
+			 *  transmission via the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() command, or are awaiting acknowledgment via the
+			 *  \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() command.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \return Total number of busy banks in the selected endpoint.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetBusyBanks(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetBusyBanks(void)
+			{
+				return (UESTA0X & (0x03 << NBUSYBK0));
+			}
+
+			/** Aborts all pending IN transactions on the currently selected endpoint, once the bank
+			 *  has been queued for transmission to the host via \ref Endpoint_ClearIN(). This function
+			 *  will terminate all queued transactions, resetting the endpoint banks ready for a new
+			 *  packet.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_AVR8
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_AbortPendingIN(void)
+			{
+				while (Endpoint_GetBusyBanks() != 0)
+				{
+					UEINTX |= (1 << RXOUTI);
+					while (UEINTX & (1 << RXOUTI));
+				}
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint may be read from (if data is waiting in the endpoint
+			 *  bank and the endpoint is an OUT direction, or if the bank is not yet full if the endpoint is an IN
+			 *  direction). This function will return false if an error has occurred in the endpoint, if the endpoint
+			 *  is an OUT direction and no packet (or an empty packet) has been received, or if the endpoint is an IN
+			 *  direction and the endpoint bank is full.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint may be read from or written to, depending
+			 *          on its direction.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed(void)
+			{
+				return ((UEINTX & (1 << RWAL)) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is configured.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint has been configured, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsConfigured(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsConfigured(void)
+			{
+				return ((UESTA0X & (1 << CFGOK)) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Returns a mask indicating which INTERRUPT type endpoints have interrupted - i.e. their
+			 *  interrupt duration has elapsed. Which endpoints have interrupted can be determined by
+			 *  masking the return value against <tt>(1 << <i>{Endpoint Number}</i>)</tt>.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Mask whose bits indicate which endpoints have interrupted.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetEndpointInterrupts(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetEndpointInterrupts(void)
+			{
+				return UEINT;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the specified endpoint number has interrupted (valid only for INTERRUPT type
+			 *  endpoints).
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Address  Address of the endpoint whose interrupt flag should be tested.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the specified endpoint has interrupted, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(const uint8_t Address)
+			{
+				return ((Endpoint_GetEndpointInterrupts() & (1 << (Address & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK))) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the selected IN endpoint is ready for a new packet to be sent to the host.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the current endpoint is ready for an IN packet, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsINReady(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsINReady(void)
+			{
+				return ((UEINTX & (1 << TXINI)) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the selected OUT endpoint has received new packet from the host.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if current endpoint is has received an OUT packet, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsOUTReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsOUTReceived(void)
+			{
+				return ((UEINTX & (1 << RXOUTI)) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the current CONTROL type endpoint has received a SETUP packet.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the selected endpoint has received a SETUP packet, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived(void)
+			{
+				return ((UEINTX & (1 << RXSTPI)) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Clears a received SETUP packet on the currently selected CONTROL type endpoint, freeing up the
+			 *  endpoint for the next packet.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \note This is not applicable for non CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_ClearSETUP(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_ClearSETUP(void)
+			{
+				UEINTX &= ~(1 << RXSTPI);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends an IN packet to the host on the currently selected endpoint, freeing up the endpoint for the
+			 *  next packet and switching to the alternative endpoint bank if double banked.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_AVR8
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_ClearIN(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_ClearIN(void)
+			{
+				#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
+					UEINTX &= ~((1 << TXINI) | (1 << FIFOCON));
+				#else
+					UEINTX &= ~(1 << TXINI);
+				#endif
+			}
+
+			/** Acknowledges an OUT packet to the host on the currently selected endpoint, freeing up the endpoint
+			 *  for the next packet and switching to the alternative endpoint bank if double banked.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_AVR8
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_ClearOUT(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_ClearOUT(void)
+			{
+				#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
+					UEINTX &= ~((1 << RXOUTI) | (1 << FIFOCON));
+				#else
+					UEINTX &= ~(1 << RXOUTI);
+				#endif
+			}
+
+			/** Stalls the current endpoint, indicating to the host that a logical problem occurred with the
+			 *  indicated endpoint and that the current transfer sequence should be aborted. This provides a
+			 *  way for devices to indicate invalid commands to the host so that the current transfer can be
+			 *  aborted and the host can begin its own recovery sequence.
+			 *
+			 *  The currently selected endpoint remains stalled until either the \ref Endpoint_ClearStall() macro
+			 *  is called, or the host issues a CLEAR FEATURE request to the device for the currently selected
+			 *  endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_AVR8
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_StallTransaction(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_StallTransaction(void)
+			{
+				UECONX |= (1 << STALLRQ);
+			}
+
+			/** Clears the STALL condition on the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_AVR8
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_ClearStall(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_ClearStall(void)
+			{
+				UECONX |= (1 << STALLRQC);
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is stalled, \c false otherwise.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint is stalled, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsStalled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsStalled(void)
+			{
+				return ((UECONX & (1 << STALLRQ)) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Resets the data toggle of the currently selected endpoint. */
+			static inline void Endpoint_ResetDataToggle(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_ResetDataToggle(void)
+			{
+				UECONX |= (1 << RSTDT);
+			}
+
+			/** Sets the direction of the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] DirectionMask  New endpoint direction, as a \c ENDPOINT_DIR_* mask.
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(const uint8_t DirectionMask) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(const uint8_t DirectionMask)
+			{
+				UECFG0X = ((UECFG0X & ~(1 << EPDIR)) | (DirectionMask ? (1 << EPDIR) : 0));
+			}
+
+			/** Reads one byte from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next byte in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_Read_8(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_Read_8(void)
+			{
+				return UEDATX;
+			}
+
+			/** Writes one byte to the currently selected endpoint's bank, for IN direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write into the the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_8(const uint8_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_8(const uint8_t Data)
+			{
+				UEDATX = Data;
+			}
+
+			/** Discards one byte from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_AVR8
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_8(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_8(void)
+			{
+				uint8_t Dummy;
+
+				Dummy = UEDATX;
+
+				(void)Dummy;
+			}
+
+			/** Reads two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for OUT
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next two bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_LE(void)
+			{
+				union
+				{
+					uint16_t Value;
+					uint8_t  Bytes[2];
+				} Data;
+
+				Data.Bytes[0] = UEDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[1] = UEDATX;
+
+				return Data.Value;
+			}
+
+			/** Reads two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for OUT
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next two bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_BE(void)
+			{
+				union
+				{
+					uint16_t Value;
+					uint8_t  Bytes[2];
+				} Data;
+
+				Data.Bytes[1] = UEDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[0] = UEDATX;
+
+				return Data.Value;
+			}
+
+			/** Writes two bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for IN
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data)
+			{
+				UEDATX = (Data & 0xFF);
+				UEDATX = (Data >> 8);
+			}
+
+			/** Writes two bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for IN
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data)
+			{
+				UEDATX = (Data >> 8);
+				UEDATX = (Data & 0xFF);
+			}
+
+			/** Discards two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_AVR8
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_16(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_16(void)
+			{
+				uint8_t Dummy;
+
+				Dummy = UEDATX;
+				Dummy = UEDATX;
+
+				(void)Dummy;
+			}
+
+			/** Reads four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for OUT
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next four bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_LE(void)
+			{
+				union
+				{
+					uint32_t Value;
+					uint8_t  Bytes[4];
+				} Data;
+
+				Data.Bytes[0] = UEDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[1] = UEDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[2] = UEDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[3] = UEDATX;
+
+				return Data.Value;
+			}
+
+			/** Reads four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for OUT
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next four bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_BE(void)
+			{
+				union
+				{
+					uint32_t Value;
+					uint8_t  Bytes[4];
+				} Data;
+
+				Data.Bytes[3] = UEDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[2] = UEDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[1] = UEDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[0] = UEDATX;
+
+				return Data.Value;
+			}
+
+			/** Writes four bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for IN
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data)
+			{
+				UEDATX = (Data &  0xFF);
+				UEDATX = (Data >> 8);
+				UEDATX = (Data >> 16);
+				UEDATX = (Data >> 24);
+			}
+
+			/** Writes four bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for IN
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data)
+			{
+				UEDATX = (Data >> 24);
+				UEDATX = (Data >> 16);
+				UEDATX = (Data >> 8);
+				UEDATX = (Data &  0xFF);
+			}
+
+			/** Discards four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_AVR8
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_32(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_32(void)
+			{
+				uint8_t Dummy;
+
+				Dummy = UEDATX;
+				Dummy = UEDATX;
+				Dummy = UEDATX;
+				Dummy = UEDATX;
+
+				(void)Dummy;
+			}
+
+		/* External Variables: */
+			/** Global indicating the maximum packet size of the default control endpoint located at address
+			 *  0 in the device. This value is set to the value indicated in the device descriptor in the user
+			 *  project once the USB interface is initialized into device mode.
+			 *
+			 *  If space is an issue, it is possible to fix this to a static value by defining the control
+			 *  endpoint size in the \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token passed to the compiler in the makefile
+			 *  via the -D switch. When a fixed control endpoint size is used, the size is no longer dynamically
+			 *  read from the descriptors at runtime and instead fixed to the given value. When used, it is
+			 *  important that the descriptor control endpoint size value matches the size given as the
+			 *  \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token - it is recommended that the \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token
+			 *  be used in the device descriptors to ensure this.
+			 *
+			 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
+			 *             changed in value.
+			 */
+			#if (!defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
+				extern uint8_t USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize;
+			#else
+				#define USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE
+			#endif
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Configures a table of endpoint descriptions, in sequence. This function can be used to configure multiple
+			 *  endpoints at the same time.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Endpoints with a zero address will be ignored, thus this function cannot be used to configure the
+			 *        control endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Table    Pointer to a table of endpoint descriptions.
+			 *  \param[in] Entries  Number of entries in the endpoint table to configure.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if all endpoints configured successfully, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(const USB_Endpoint_Table_t* const Table,
+			                                     const uint8_t Entries);
+
+			/** Completes the status stage of a control transfer on a CONTROL type endpoint automatically,
+			 *  with respect to the data direction. This is a convenience function which can be used to
+			 *  simplify user control request handling.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should not be called on non CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 */
+			void Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(void);
+
+			/** Spin-loops until the currently selected non-control endpoint is ready for the next packet of data
+			 *  to be read or written to it.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should not be called on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointRW_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(void);
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Host_AVR8.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Host_AVR8.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4e38c75a6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Host_AVR8.c
@@ -0,0 +1,297 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_HOST_C
+#include "../Host.h"
+
+void USB_Host_ProcessNextHostState(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode    = HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError;
+	uint8_t SubErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError;
+
+	static uint16_t WaitMSRemaining;
+	static uint8_t  PostWaitState;
+
+	switch (USB_HostState)
+	{
+		case HOST_STATE_WaitForDevice:
+			if (WaitMSRemaining)
+			{
+				if ((SubErrorCode = USB_Host_WaitMS(1)) != HOST_WAITERROR_Successful)
+				{
+					USB_HostState = PostWaitState;
+					ErrorCode     = HOST_ENUMERROR_WaitStage;
+					break;
+				}
+
+				if (!(--WaitMSRemaining))
+				  USB_HostState = PostWaitState;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Powered:
+			WaitMSRemaining = HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS;
+
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForDeviceSettle;
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForDeviceSettle:
+			if (WaitMSRemaining--)
+			{
+				Delay_MS(1);
+				break;
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off();
+
+				USB_OTGPAD_On();
+				USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Enable();
+				USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_On();
+
+				#if defined(NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT)
+				USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Enable();
+				USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_On();
+				#endif
+
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForConnect;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForConnect:
+			if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_DCONNI))
+			{
+				USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DCONNI);
+				USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DDISCI);
+
+				USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_VBERRI);
+				USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_VBERRI);
+
+				USB_Host_ResumeBus();
+				Pipe_ClearPipes();
+
+				HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(100, HOST_STATE_Powered_DoReset);
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Powered_DoReset:
+			USB_Host_ResetDevice();
+
+			HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(200, HOST_STATE_Powered_ConfigPipe);
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Powered_ConfigPipe:
+			if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE, EP_TYPE_CONTROL, ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE, 1)))
+			{
+				ErrorCode    = HOST_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigError;
+				SubErrorCode = 0;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Default;
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Default:
+			USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+				{
+					.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
+					.bRequest      = REQ_GetDescriptor,
+					.wValue        = (DTYPE_Device << 8),
+					.wIndex        = 0,
+					.wLength       = 8,
+				};
+
+			uint8_t DataBuffer[8];
+
+			Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+			if ((SubErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(DataBuffer)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				ErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_ControlError;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			USB_Host_ControlPipeSize = DataBuffer[offsetof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t, Endpoint0Size)];
+
+			USB_Host_ResetDevice();
+
+			HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(200, HOST_STATE_Default_PostReset);
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Default_PostReset:
+			if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE, EP_TYPE_CONTROL, ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, USB_Host_ControlPipeSize, 1)))
+			{
+				ErrorCode    = HOST_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigError;
+				SubErrorCode = 0;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+				{
+					.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
+					.bRequest      = REQ_SetAddress,
+					.wValue        = USB_HOST_DEVICEADDRESS,
+					.wIndex        = 0,
+					.wLength       = 0,
+				};
+
+			if ((SubErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				ErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_ControlError;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(100, HOST_STATE_Default_PostAddressSet);
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Default_PostAddressSet:
+			USB_Host_SetDeviceAddress(USB_HOST_DEVICEADDRESS);
+
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Addressed;
+
+			EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete();
+			break;
+
+		default:
+			break;
+	}
+
+	if ((ErrorCode != HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError) && (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Unattached))
+	{
+		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(ErrorCode, SubErrorCode);
+
+		USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off();
+
+		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();
+
+		USB_ResetInterface();
+	}
+}
+
+uint8_t USB_Host_WaitMS(uint8_t MS)
+{
+	bool    BusSuspended = USB_Host_IsBusSuspended();
+	uint8_t ErrorCode    = HOST_WAITERROR_Successful;
+	bool    HSOFIEnabled = USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+
+	USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+	USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+
+	USB_Host_ResumeBus();
+
+	while (MS)
+	{
+		if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI))
+		{
+			USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+			MS--;
+		}
+
+		if ((USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached) || (USB_CurrentMode != USB_MODE_Host))
+		{
+			ErrorCode = HOST_WAITERROR_DeviceDisconnect;
+
+			break;
+		}
+
+		if (Pipe_IsError())
+		{
+			Pipe_ClearError();
+			ErrorCode = HOST_WAITERROR_PipeError;
+
+			break;
+		}
+
+		if (Pipe_IsStalled())
+		{
+			Pipe_ClearStall();
+			ErrorCode = HOST_WAITERROR_SetupStalled;
+
+			break;
+		}
+	}
+
+	if (BusSuspended)
+	  USB_Host_SuspendBus();
+
+	if (HSOFIEnabled)
+	  USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+static void USB_Host_ResetDevice(void)
+{
+	bool BusSuspended = USB_Host_IsBusSuspended();
+
+	USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_DDISCI);
+
+	USB_Host_ResetBus();
+	while (!(USB_Host_IsBusResetComplete()));
+	USB_Host_ResumeBus();
+
+	USB_Host_ConfigurationNumber = 0;
+
+	bool HSOFIEnabled = USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+
+	USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+	USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+
+	for (uint8_t MSRem = 10; MSRem != 0; MSRem--)
+	{
+		/* Workaround for powerless-pull-up devices. After a USB bus reset,
+		   all disconnection interrupts are suppressed while a USB frame is
+		   looked for - if it is found within 10ms, the device is still
+		   present.                                                        */
+
+		if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI))
+		{
+			USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+			USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DDISCI);
+			break;
+		}
+
+		Delay_MS(1);
+	}
+
+	if (HSOFIEnabled)
+	  USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+
+	if (BusSuspended)
+	  USB_Host_SuspendBus();
+
+	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_DDISCI);
+}
+
+#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Host_AVR8.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Host_AVR8.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f0ffa5a54
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Host_AVR8.h
@@ -0,0 +1,372 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB Host definitions for the AVR8 microcontrollers.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Host_AVR8
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Host
+ *  \defgroup Group_Host_AVR8 Host Management (AVR8)
+ *  \brief USB Host definitions for the AVR8 microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  Architecture specific USB Host definitions for the Atmel 8-bit AVR microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __USBHOST_AVR8_H__
+#define __USBHOST_AVR8_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../StdDescriptors.h"
+		#include "../Pipe.h"
+		#include "../USBInterrupt.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+		#if defined(INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE) && !defined(NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT)
+			#error The INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE compile option requires NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT for the AVR8 architecture.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the fixed USB device address which any attached device is enumerated to when in
+			 *  host mode. As only one USB device may be attached to the AVR in host mode at any one time
+			 *  and that the address used is not important (other than the fact that it is non-zero), a
+			 *  fixed value is specified by the library.
+			 */
+			#define USB_HOST_DEVICEADDRESS                 1
+
+			#if !defined(HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Constant for the delay in milliseconds after a device is connected before the library
+				 *  will start the enumeration process. Some devices require a delay of up to 5 seconds
+				 *  after connection before the enumeration process can start or incorrect operation will
+				 *  occur.
+				 *
+				 *  The default delay value may be overridden in the user project makefile by defining the
+				 *  \c HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS token to the required delay in milliseconds, and passed to the
+				 *  compiler using the -D switch.
+				 */
+				#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS        1000
+			#endif
+
+			/** Enum for the error codes for the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_HostError() event.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref Group_Events for more information on this event.
+			 */
+			enum USB_Host_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				HOST_ERROR_VBusVoltageDip       = 0, /**< VBUS voltage dipped to an unacceptable level. This
+				                                      *   error may be the result of an attached device drawing
+				                                      *   too much current from the VBUS line, or due to the
+				                                      *   AVR's power source being unable to supply sufficient
+				                                      *   current.
+				                                      */
+			};
+
+			/** Enum for the error codes for the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed() event.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref Group_Events for more information on this event.
+			 */
+			enum USB_Host_EnumerationErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError          = 0, /**< No error occurred. Used internally, this is not a valid
+				                                      *   ErrorCode parameter value for the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed()
+				                                      *   event.
+				                                      */
+				HOST_ENUMERROR_WaitStage        = 1, /**< One of the delays between enumeration steps failed
+				                                      *   to complete successfully, due to a timeout or other
+				                                      *   error.
+				                                      */
+				HOST_ENUMERROR_NoDeviceDetected = 2, /**< No device was detected, despite the USB data lines
+				                                      *   indicating the attachment of a device.
+				                                      */
+				HOST_ENUMERROR_ControlError     = 3, /**< One of the enumeration control requests failed to
+				                                      *   complete successfully.
+				                                      */
+				HOST_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigError  = 4, /**< The default control pipe (address 0) failed to
+				                                      *   configure correctly.
+				                                      */
+			};
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Returns the current USB frame number, when in host mode. Every millisecond the USB bus is active (i.e. not suspended)
+			 *  the frame number is incremented by one.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Current USB frame number from the USB controller.
+			 */
+			static inline uint16_t USB_Host_GetFrameNumber(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint16_t USB_Host_GetFrameNumber(void)
+			{
+				return UHFNUM;
+			}
+
+			#if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS)
+				/** Enables the host mode Start Of Frame events. When enabled, this causes the
+				 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Host_StartOfFrame() event to fire once per millisecond, synchronized to the USB bus,
+				 *  at the start of each USB frame when a device is enumerated while in host mode.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This function is not available when the \c NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined.
+				 */
+				static inline void USB_Host_EnableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+				static inline void USB_Host_EnableSOFEvents(void)
+				{
+					USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+				}
+
+				/** Disables the host mode Start Of Frame events. When disabled, this stops the firing of the
+				 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Host_StartOfFrame() event when enumerated in host mode.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This function is not available when the \c NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined.
+				 */
+				static inline void USB_Host_DisableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+				static inline void USB_Host_DisableSOFEvents(void)
+				{
+					USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+				}
+			#endif
+
+			/** Resets the USB bus, including the endpoints in any attached device and pipes on the AVR host.
+			 *  USB bus resets leave the default control pipe configured (if already configured).
+			 *
+			 *  If the USB bus has been suspended prior to issuing a bus reset, the attached device will be
+			 *  woken up automatically and the bus resumed after the reset has been correctly issued.
+			 */
+			static inline void USB_Host_ResetBus(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Host_ResetBus(void)
+			{
+				UHCON |=  (1 << RESET);
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if a previously issued bus reset (via the \ref USB_Host_ResetBus() macro) has
+			 *  completed.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if no bus reset is currently being sent, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool USB_Host_IsBusResetComplete(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool USB_Host_IsBusResetComplete(void)
+			{
+				return ((UHCON & (1 << RESET)) ? false : true);
+			}
+
+			/** Resumes USB communications with an attached and enumerated device, by resuming the transmission
+			 *  of the 1MS Start Of Frame messages to the device. When resumed, USB communications between the
+			 *  host and attached device may occur.
+			 */
+			static inline void USB_Host_ResumeBus(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Host_ResumeBus(void)
+			{
+				UHCON |=  (1 << SOFEN);
+			}
+
+			/** Suspends the USB bus, preventing any communications from occurring between the host and attached
+			 *  device until the bus has been resumed. This stops the transmission of the 1MS Start Of Frame
+			 *  messages to the device.
+			 *
+			 *  \attention While the USB bus is suspended, all USB interrupt sources are also disabled; this means that
+			 *             some events (such as device disconnections) will not fire until the bus is resumed.
+			 */
+			static inline void USB_Host_SuspendBus(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Host_SuspendBus(void)
+			{
+				UHCON &= ~(1 << SOFEN);
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the USB bus has been suspended via the use of the \ref USB_Host_SuspendBus() macro,
+			 *  false otherwise. While suspended, no USB communications can occur until the bus is resumed,
+			 *  except for the Remote Wakeup event from the device if supported.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the bus is currently suspended, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool USB_Host_IsBusSuspended(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool USB_Host_IsBusSuspended(void)
+			{
+				return ((UHCON & (1 << SOFEN)) ? false : true);
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the attached device is currently enumerated in Full Speed mode (12Mb/s), or
+			 *  false if the attached device is enumerated in Low Speed mode (1.5Mb/s).
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the attached device is enumerated in Full Speed mode, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool USB_Host_IsDeviceFullSpeed(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool USB_Host_IsDeviceFullSpeed(void)
+			{
+				return ((USBSTA & (1 << SPEED)) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the attached device is currently issuing a Remote Wakeup request, requesting
+			 *  that the host resume the USB bus and wake up the device, \c false otherwise.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the attached device has sent a Remote Wakeup request, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool USB_Host_IsRemoteWakeupSent(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool USB_Host_IsRemoteWakeupSent(void)
+			{
+				return ((UHINT & (1 << RXRSMI)) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Clears the flag indicating that a Remote Wakeup request has been issued by an attached device. */
+			static inline void USB_Host_ClearRemoteWakeupSent(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Host_ClearRemoteWakeupSent(void)
+			{
+				UHINT &= ~(1 << RXRSMI);
+			}
+
+			/** Accepts a Remote Wakeup request from an attached device. This must be issued in response to
+			 *  a device's Remote Wakeup request within 2ms for the request to be accepted and the bus to
+			 *  be resumed.
+			 */
+			static inline void USB_Host_ResumeFromWakeupRequest(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Host_ResumeFromWakeupRequest(void)
+			{
+				UHCON |=  (1 << RESUME);
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if a resume from Remote Wakeup request is currently being sent to an attached
+			 *  device.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if no resume request is currently being sent, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool USB_Host_IsResumeFromWakeupRequestSent(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool USB_Host_IsResumeFromWakeupRequestSent(void)
+			{
+				return ((UHCON & (1 << RESUME)) ? false : true);
+			}
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			static inline void USB_Host_HostMode_On(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Host_HostMode_On(void)
+			{
+				USBCON |=  (1 << HOST);
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Host_HostMode_Off(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Host_HostMode_Off(void)
+			{
+				USBCON &= ~(1 << HOST);
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Enable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Enable(void)
+			{
+				OTGCON &= ~(1 << VBUSHWC);
+				UHWCON |=  (1 << UVCONE);
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Enable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Enable(void)
+			{
+				OTGCON |=  (1 << VBUSHWC);
+				UHWCON &= ~(1 << UVCONE);
+
+				DDRE   |=  (1 << 7);
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_On(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_On(void)
+			{
+				OTGCON |=  (1 << VBUSREQ);
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_On(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_On(void)
+			{
+				#if defined(INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE)
+				PORTE  &= ~(1 << 7);
+				#else
+				PORTE  |=  (1 << 7);
+				#endif
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off(void)
+			{
+				OTGCON |=  (1 << VBUSRQC);
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off(void)
+			{
+				#if defined(INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE)
+				PORTE  |=  (1 << 7);
+				#else
+				PORTE  &= ~(1 << 7);
+				#endif
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Host_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Host_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address)
+			{
+				UHADDR  =  (Address & 0x7F);
+			}
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			enum USB_Host_WaitMSErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				HOST_WAITERROR_Successful       = 0,
+				HOST_WAITERROR_DeviceDisconnect = 1,
+				HOST_WAITERROR_PipeError        = 2,
+				HOST_WAITERROR_SetupStalled     = 3,
+			};
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			void    USB_Host_ProcessNextHostState(void);
+			uint8_t USB_Host_WaitMS(uint8_t MS);
+
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_HOST_C)
+				static void USB_Host_ResetDevice(void);
+			#endif
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/OTG_AVR8.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/OTG_AVR8.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c2e849627
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/OTG_AVR8.h
@@ -0,0 +1,159 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB OTG definitions for the AVR8 microcontrollers.
+ *  \copydetails Group_OTG_AVR8
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_OTG
+ *  \defgroup Group_OTG_AVR8 USB On The Go (OTG) Management (AVR8)
+ *  \brief USB OTG definitions for the AVR8 microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  Architecture specific USB OTG definitions for the Atmel 8-bit AVR microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __USBOTG_AVR8_H__
+#define __USBOTG_AVR8_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Mask for the VBUS pulsing method of SRP, supported by some OTG devices.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_OTG_Device_InitiateSRP().
+			 */
+			#define USB_OTG_SRP_VBUS                   (1 << SRPSEL)
+
+			/** Mask for the Data + pulsing method of SRP, supported by some OTG devices.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_OTG_Device_InitiateSRP().
+			 */
+			#define USB_OTG_STP_DATA                   0
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Initiate a Host Negotiation Protocol request. This indicates to the other connected device
+			 *  that the device wishes to change device/host roles.
+			 */
+			static inline void USB_OTG_Device_RequestHNP(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_OTG_Device_RequestHNP(void)
+			{
+				OTGCON |=  (1 << HNPREQ);
+			}
+
+			/** Cancel a Host Negotiation Protocol request. This stops a pending HNP request to the other
+			 *  connected device.
+			 */
+			static inline void USB_OTG_Device_CancelHNPRequest(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_OTG_Device_CancelHNPRequest(void)
+			{
+				OTGCON &= ~(1 << HNPREQ);
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the device is currently sending a HNP to an attached host.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if currently sending a HNP to the other connected device, \c false otherwise
+			 */
+			static inline bool USB_OTG_Device_IsSendingHNP(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool USB_OTG_Device_IsSendingHNP(void)
+			{
+				return ((OTGCON & (1 << HNPREQ)) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Initiates a Session Request Protocol request. Most OTG devices turn off VBUS when the USB
+			 *  interface is not in use, to conserve power. Sending a SRP to a USB OTG device running in
+			 *  host mode indicates that VBUS should be applied and a session started.
+			 *
+			 *  There are two different methods of sending a SRP - either pulses on the VBUS line, or by
+			 *  pulsing the Data + line via the internal pull-up resistor.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] SRPTypeMask  Mask indicating the type of SRP to use, either \ref USB_OTG_SRP_VBUS or
+			 *                          \ref USB_OTG_STP_DATA.
+			 */
+			static inline void USB_OTG_Device_InitiateSRP(const uint8_t SRPTypeMask) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_OTG_Device_InitiateSRP(const uint8_t SRPTypeMask)
+			{
+				OTGCON = ((OTGCON & ~(1 << SRPSEL)) | (SRPTypeMask | (1 << SRPREQ)));
+			}
+
+			/** Accepts a HNP from a connected device, indicating that both devices should exchange
+			 *  device/host roles.
+			 */
+			static inline void USB_OTG_Host_AcceptHNP(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_OTG_Host_AcceptHNP(void)
+			{
+				OTGCON |=  (1 << HNPREQ);
+			}
+
+			/** Rejects a HNP from a connected device, indicating that both devices should remain in their
+			 *  current device/host roles.
+			 */
+			static inline void USB_OTG_Host_RejectHNP(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_OTG_Host_RejectHNP(void)
+			{
+				OTGCON &= ~(1 << HNPREQ);
+			}
+
+			/** Indicates if the connected device is currently sending a HNP request.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if a HNP is currently being issued by the connected device, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool USB_OTG_Host_IsHNPReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool USB_OTG_Host_IsHNPReceived(void)
+			{
+				return ((OTGCON & (1 << HNPREQ)) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/PipeStream_AVR8.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/PipeStream_AVR8.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..47169b3fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/PipeStream_AVR8.c
@@ -0,0 +1,221 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+
+#include "PipeStream_AVR8.h"
+
+uint8_t Pipe_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length,
+                            uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)
+{
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+	uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;
+
+	Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_IN);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
+	  Length -= *BytesProcessed;
+
+	while (Length)
+	{
+		if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		{
+			Pipe_ClearIN();
+
+			if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
+			{
+				*BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;
+				return PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;
+			}
+
+			if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))
+			  return ErrorCode;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			Pipe_Discard_8();
+
+			Length--;
+			BytesInTransfer++;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t Pipe_Null_Stream(uint16_t Length,
+                         uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)
+{
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+	uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;
+
+	Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_OUT);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
+	  Length -= *BytesProcessed;
+
+	while (Length)
+	{
+		if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		{
+			Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+			if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
+			{
+				*BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;
+				return PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;
+			}
+
+			USB_USBTask();
+
+			if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))
+			  return ErrorCode;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			Pipe_Write_8(0);
+
+			Length--;
+			BytesInTransfer++;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+/* The following abuses the C preprocessor in order to copy-paste common code with slight alterations,
+ * so that the code needs to be written once. It is a crude form of templating to reduce code maintenance. */
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Write_Stream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_OUT
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearOUT()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   DataStream += Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Pipe_Write_8(*BufferPtr)
+#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Write_Stream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_OUT
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearOUT()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   DataStream -= Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Pipe_Write_8(*BufferPtr)
+#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Read_Stream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_IN
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearIN()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   DataStream += Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Pipe_Read_8()
+#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Read_Stream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_IN
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearIN()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   DataStream -= Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Pipe_Read_8()
+#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Write_PStream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_OUT
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearOUT()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   DataStream += Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Pipe_Write_8(pgm_read_byte(BufferPtr))
+#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Write_PStream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_OUT
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearOUT()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   DataStream -= Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Pipe_Write_8(pgm_read_byte(BufferPtr))
+#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Write_EStream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_OUT
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearOUT()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   DataStream += Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Pipe_Write_8(eeprom_read_byte(BufferPtr))
+#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Write_EStream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_OUT
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearOUT()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   DataStream -= Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Pipe_Write_8(eeprom_read_byte(BufferPtr))
+#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Read_EStream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_IN
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearIN()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   DataStream += Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_update_byte(BufferPtr, Pipe_Read_8())
+#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Read_EStream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_IN
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearIN()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   DataStream -= Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_update_byte(BufferPtr, Pipe_Read_8())
+#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
+
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/PipeStream_AVR8.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/PipeStream_AVR8.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..264dab54e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/PipeStream_AVR8.h
@@ -0,0 +1,442 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Pipe data stream transmission and reception management for the AVR8 microcontrollers
+ *  \copydetails Group_PipeStreamRW_AVR8
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_PipeStreamRW
+ *  \defgroup Group_PipeStreamRW_AVR8 Read/Write of Multi-Byte Streams (AVR8)
+ *  \brief Pipe data stream transmission and reception management for the Atmel AVR8 architecture.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of data streams from
+ *  and to pipes.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __PIPE_STREAM_AVR8_H__
+#define __PIPE_STREAM_AVR8_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../USBMode.h"
+		#include "../USBTask.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** \name Stream functions for null data */
+			//@{
+
+			/** Reads and discards the given number of bytes from the pipe, discarding fully read packets from the host
+			 *  as needed. The last packet is not automatically discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the
+			 *  user is responsible for manually discarding the last packet from the device via the \ref Pipe_ClearIN() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once, failing or
+			 *  succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid storage location, the transfer
+			 *  will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time the pipe bank becomes empty while there is still data
+			 *  to process (and after the current packet has been acknowledged) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with
+			 *  the total number of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of
+			 *  \ref PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed in the user code - to
+			 *  continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters and it will resume until the BytesProcessed
+			 *  value reaches the total transfer length.
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;
+			 *
+			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Discard_Stream(512, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;
+			 *
+			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;
+			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Discard_Stream(512, &BytesProcessed)) == PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required
+			 *  }
+			 *
+			 *  if (ErrorCode != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  \note The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without
+			 *        having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to discard via the currently selected pipe.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should
+			 *                             updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be processed at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length,
+			                            uint16_t* const BytesProcessed);
+
+			/** Writes a given number of zeroed bytes to the pipe, sending full pipe packets from the host to the device
+			 *  as needed. The last packet is not automatically sent once the remaining bytes has been written; the
+			 *  user is responsible for manually discarding the last packet from the device via the \ref Pipe_ClearOUT() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once, failing or
+			 *  succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid storage location, the transfer
+			 *  will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time the pipe bank becomes full while there is still data
+			 *  to process (and after the current packet transmission has been initiated) the BytesProcessed location will be
+			 *  updated with the total number of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of
+			 *  \ref PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed in the user code - to
+			 *  continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters and it will resume until the BytesProcessed
+			 *  value reaches the total transfer length.
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;
+			 *
+			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Null_Stream(512, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;
+			 *
+			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;
+			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Null_Stream(512, &BytesProcessed)) == PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required
+			 *  }
+			 *
+			 *  if (ErrorCode != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  \note The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without
+			 *        having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of zero bytes to write via the currently selected pipe.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should
+			 *                             updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be processed at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_Null_Stream(uint16_t Length,
+			                         uint16_t* const BytesProcessed);
+
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name Stream functions for RAM source/destination data */
+			//@{
+
+			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the pipe from the given buffer in little endian,
+			 *  sending full packets to the device as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;
+			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the
+			 *  \ref Pipe_ClearOUT() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is
+			 *  executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.
+			 *
+			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,
+			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid
+			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time
+			 *  the pipe bank becomes full while there is still data to process (and after the current
+			 *  packet transmission has been initiated) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the
+			 *  total number of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of
+			 *  \ref PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed
+			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters
+			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t DataStream[512];
+			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;
+			 *
+			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),
+			 *                                        NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t  DataStream[512];
+			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;
+			 *
+			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;
+			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),
+			 *                                           &BytesProcessed)) == PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required
+			 *  }
+			 *
+			 *  if (ErrorCode != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  \note The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without
+			 *        having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should
+			 *                             updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                             uint16_t Length,
+			                             uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the pipe from the given buffer in big endian,
+			 *  sending full packets to the device as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;
+			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the
+			 *  \ref Pipe_ClearOUT() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is
+			 *  executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.
+			 *
+			 *  \note The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without
+			 *        having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should
+			 *                             updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_Write_Stream_BE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                             uint16_t Length,
+			                             uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the pipe into the given buffer in little endian,
+			 *  sending full packets to the device as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;
+			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the
+			 *  \ref Pipe_ClearIN() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is
+			 *  executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.
+			 *
+			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,
+			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid
+			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time
+			 *  the pipe bank becomes empty while there is still data to process (and after the current
+			 *  packet has been acknowledged) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the total number
+			 *  of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of
+			 *  \ref PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed
+			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters
+			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t DataStream[512];
+			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;
+			 *
+			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),
+			 *                                       NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t  DataStream[512];
+			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;
+			 *
+			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;
+			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),
+			 *                                          &BytesProcessed)) == PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required
+			 *  }
+			 *
+			 *  if (ErrorCode != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  \note The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without
+			 *        having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe to read from.
+			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should
+			 *                              updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(void* const Buffer,
+			                            uint16_t Length,
+			                            uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the pipe into the given buffer in big endian,
+			 *  sending full packets to the device as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;
+			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the
+			 *  \ref Pipe_ClearIN() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is
+			 *  executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.
+			 *
+			 *  \note The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without
+			 *        having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe to read from.
+			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should
+			 *                              updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_Read_Stream_BE(void* const Buffer,
+			                            uint16_t Length,
+			                            uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name Stream functions for EEPROM source/destination data */
+			//@{
+
+			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Pipe_Write_Stream_LE().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should
+			 *                             updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_Write_EStream_LE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                              uint16_t Length,
+			                              uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Pipe_Write_Stream_BE().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should
+			 *                             updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_Write_EStream_BE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                              uint16_t Length,
+			                              uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Pipe_Read_Stream_LE().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe to read from.
+			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should
+			 *                              updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_Read_EStream_LE(void* const Buffer,
+			                             uint16_t Length,
+			                             uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Pipe_Read_Stream_BE().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe to read from.
+			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should
+			 *                              updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_Read_EStream_BE(void* const Buffer,
+			                             uint16_t Length,
+			                             uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name Stream functions for PROGMEM source/destination data */
+			//@{
+
+			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Pipe_Write_Stream_LE().
+			 *
+			 *  \pre The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should
+			 *                             updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_Write_PStream_LE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                              uint16_t Length,
+			                              uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Pipe_Write_Stream_BE().
+			 *
+			 *  \pre The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should
+			 *                             updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_Write_PStream_BE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                              uint16_t Length,
+			                              uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			//@}
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Pipe_AVR8.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Pipe_AVR8.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fc99ae416
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Pipe_AVR8.c
@@ -0,0 +1,210 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+
+#include "../Pipe.h"
+
+uint8_t USB_Host_ControlPipeSize = PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE;
+
+bool Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(const USB_Pipe_Table_t* const Table,
+                             const uint8_t Entries)
+{
+	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < Entries; i++)
+	{
+		if (!(Table[i].Address))
+		  continue;
+
+		if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipe(Table[i].Address, Table[i].Type, Table[i].EndpointAddress, Table[i].Size, Table[i].Banks)))
+		{
+			return false;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+bool Pipe_ConfigurePipe(const uint8_t Address,
+                        const uint8_t Type,
+                        const uint8_t EndpointAddress,
+                        const uint16_t Size,
+                        const uint8_t Banks)
+{
+	uint8_t Number = (Address & PIPE_EPNUM_MASK);
+	uint8_t Token  = (Address & PIPE_DIR_IN) ? PIPE_TOKEN_IN : PIPE_TOKEN_OUT;
+
+	if (Number >= PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES)
+	  return false;
+
+	if (Type == EP_TYPE_CONTROL)
+	  Token = PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP;
+
+#if defined(ORDERED_EP_CONFIG)
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(Number);
+	Pipe_EnablePipe();
+
+	UPCFG1X = 0;
+
+	UPCFG0X = ((Type << EPTYPE0) | Token | ((EndpointAddress & PIPE_EPNUM_MASK) << PEPNUM0));
+	UPCFG1X = ((1 << ALLOC) | ((Banks > 1) ? (1 << EPBK0) : 0) | Pipe_BytesToEPSizeMask(Size));
+
+	Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests();
+
+	return Pipe_IsConfigured();
+#else
+	for (uint8_t PNum = Number; PNum < PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES; PNum++)
+	{
+		uint8_t UPCFG0XTemp;
+		uint8_t UPCFG1XTemp;
+		uint8_t UPCFG2XTemp;
+		uint8_t UPIENXTemp;
+
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(PNum);
+
+		if (PNum == Number)
+		{
+			UPCFG0XTemp = ((Type << EPTYPE0) | Token | ((EndpointAddress & PIPE_EPNUM_MASK) << PEPNUM0));
+			UPCFG1XTemp = ((1 << ALLOC) | ((Banks > 1) ? (1 << EPBK0) : 0) | Pipe_BytesToEPSizeMask(Size));
+			UPCFG2XTemp = 0;
+			UPIENXTemp  = 0;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			UPCFG0XTemp = UPCFG0X;
+			UPCFG1XTemp = UPCFG1X;
+			UPCFG2XTemp = UPCFG2X;
+			UPIENXTemp  = UPIENX;
+		}
+
+		if (!(UPCFG1XTemp & (1 << ALLOC)))
+		  continue;
+
+		Pipe_DisablePipe();
+		UPCFG1X &= ~(1 << ALLOC);
+
+		Pipe_EnablePipe();
+		UPCFG0X = UPCFG0XTemp;
+		UPCFG1X = UPCFG1XTemp;
+		UPCFG2X = UPCFG2XTemp;
+		UPIENX  = UPIENXTemp;
+
+		Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests();
+
+		if (!(Pipe_IsConfigured()))
+		  return false;
+	}
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(Number);
+	return true;
+#endif
+}
+
+void Pipe_ClearPipes(void)
+{
+	UPINT = 0;
+
+	for (uint8_t PNum = 0; PNum < PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES; PNum++)
+	{
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(PNum);
+		UPIENX  = 0;
+		UPINTX  = 0;
+		UPCFG1X = 0;
+		Pipe_DisablePipe();
+	}
+}
+
+bool Pipe_IsEndpointBound(const uint8_t EndpointAddress)
+{
+	uint8_t PrevPipeNumber = Pipe_GetCurrentPipe();
+
+	for (uint8_t PNum = 0; PNum < PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES; PNum++)
+	{
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(PNum);
+
+		if (!(Pipe_IsConfigured()))
+		  continue;
+
+		if (Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress() == EndpointAddress)
+		  return true;
+	}
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PrevPipeNumber);
+	return false;
+}
+
+uint8_t Pipe_WaitUntilReady(void)
+{
+	#if (USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS < 0xFF)
+	uint8_t  TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;
+	#else
+	uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;
+	#endif
+
+	uint16_t PreviousFrameNumber = USB_Host_GetFrameNumber();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		if (Pipe_GetPipeToken() == PIPE_TOKEN_IN)
+		{
+			if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+			  return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			if (Pipe_IsOUTReady())
+			  return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;
+		}
+
+		if (Pipe_IsStalled())
+		  return PIPE_READYWAIT_PipeStalled;
+		else if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+		uint16_t CurrentFrameNumber = USB_Host_GetFrameNumber();
+
+		if (CurrentFrameNumber != PreviousFrameNumber)
+		{
+			PreviousFrameNumber = CurrentFrameNumber;
+
+			if (!(TimeoutMSRem--))
+			  return PIPE_READYWAIT_Timeout;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Pipe_AVR8.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Pipe_AVR8.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bac324ffc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Pipe_AVR8.h
@@ -0,0 +1,922 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB Pipe definitions for the AVR8 microcontrollers.
+ *  \copydetails Group_PipeManagement_AVR8
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_PipeRW
+ *  \defgroup Group_PipeRW_AVR8 Pipe Data Reading and Writing (AVR8)
+ *  \brief Pipe data read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR8 architecture.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing from and to pipes.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW
+ *  \defgroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_AVR8 Read/Write of Primitive Data Types (AVR8)
+ *  \brief Pipe primitive data read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR8 architecture.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of primitive data types
+ *  from and to pipes.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement
+ *  \defgroup Group_PipePacketManagement_AVR8 Pipe Packet Management (AVR8)
+ *  \brief Pipe packet management definitions for the Atmel AVR8 architecture.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to packet management of pipes.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq
+ *  \defgroup Group_PipeControlReq_AVR8 Pipe Control Request Management (AVR8)
+ *  \brief Pipe control request management definitions for the Atmel AVR8 architecture.
+ *
+ *  Module for host mode request processing. This module allows for the transmission of standard, class and
+ *  vendor control requests to the default control endpoint of an attached device while in host mode.
+ *
+ *  \see Chapter 9 of the USB 2.0 specification.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_PipeManagement
+ *  \defgroup Group_PipeManagement_AVR8 Pipe Management (AVR8)
+ *  \brief Pipe management definitions for the Atmel AVR8 architecture.
+ *
+ *  This module contains functions, macros and enums related to pipe management when in USB Host mode. This
+ *  module contains the pipe management macros, as well as pipe interrupt and data send/receive functions
+ *  for various data types.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __PIPE_AVR8_H__
+#define __PIPE_AVR8_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../USBTask.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** \name Pipe Error Flag Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that an overflow error occurred in the pipe on the received data. */
+			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_OVERFLOW         (1 << 6)
+
+			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that an underflow error occurred in the pipe on the received data. */
+			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_UNDERFLOW        (1 << 5)
+
+			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a CRC error occurred in the pipe on the received data. */
+			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_CRC16            (1 << 4)
+
+			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware timeout error occurred in the pipe. */
+			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_TIMEOUT          (1 << 3)
+
+			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware PID error occurred in the pipe. */
+			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_PID              (1 << 2)
+
+			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware data PID error occurred in the pipe. */
+			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATAPID          (1 << 1)
+
+			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware data toggle error occurred in the pipe. */
+			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATATGL          (1 << 0)
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name Pipe Token Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** Token mask for \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken() and \ref Pipe_GetPipeToken(). This sets the pipe as a SETUP token (for CONTROL type pipes),
+			 *  which will trigger a control request on the attached device when data is written to the pipe.
+			 */
+			#define PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP                (0 << PTOKEN0)
+
+			/** Token mask for \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken() and \ref Pipe_GetPipeToken(). This sets the pipe as a IN token (for non-CONTROL type pipes),
+			 *  indicating that the pipe data will flow from device to host.
+			 */
+			#define PIPE_TOKEN_IN                   (1 << PTOKEN0)
+
+			/** Token mask for \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken() and \ref Pipe_GetPipeToken(). This sets the pipe as a OUT token (for non-CONTROL type pipes),
+			 *  indicating that the pipe data will flow from host to device.
+			 */
+			#define PIPE_TOKEN_OUT                  (2 << PTOKEN0)
+			//@}
+
+			/** Default size of the default control pipe's bank, until altered by the Endpoint0Size value
+			 *  in the device descriptor of the attached device.
+			 */
+			#define PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE   64
+
+			/** Total number of pipes (including the default control pipe at address 0) which may be used in
+			 *  the device. Different USB AVR models support different amounts of pipes, this value reflects
+			 *  the maximum number of pipes for the currently selected AVR model.
+			 */
+			#define PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES                7
+
+			/** Size in bytes of the largest pipe bank size possible in the device. Not all banks on each AVR
+			 *  model supports the largest bank size possible on the device; different pipe numbers support
+			 *  different maximum bank sizes. This value reflects the largest possible bank of any pipe on the
+			 *  currently selected USB AVR model.
+			 */
+			#define PIPE_MAX_SIZE                   256
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible error return codes of the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady() function.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeRW_AVR8
+			 */
+			enum Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError                 = 0, /**< Pipe ready for next packet, no error. */
+				PIPE_READYWAIT_PipeStalled             = 1,	/**< The device stalled the pipe while waiting. */
+				PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected      = 2,	/**< Device was disconnected from the host while waiting. */
+				PIPE_READYWAIT_Timeout                 = 3, /**< The device failed to accept or send the next packet
+				                                             *   within the software timeout period set by the
+				                                             *   \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro.
+				                                             */
+			};
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Indicates the number of bytes currently stored in the current pipes's selected bank.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeRW_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \return Total number of bytes in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline uint16_t Pipe_BytesInPipe(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint16_t Pipe_BytesInPipe(void)
+			{
+				return UPBCX;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines the currently selected pipe's direction.
+			 *
+			 *  \return The currently selected pipe's direction, as a \c PIPE_DIR_* mask.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeDirection(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeDirection(void)
+			{
+				return (UPCFG0X & (1 << EPDIR)) ? PIPE_DIR_IN : PIPE_DIR_OUT;
+			}
+
+			/** Returns the pipe address of the currently selected pipe. This is typically used to save the
+			 *  currently selected pipe address so that it can be restored after another pipe has been manipulated.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Index of the currently selected pipe.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetCurrentPipe(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetCurrentPipe(void)
+			{
+				return ((UPNUM & PIPE_PIPENUM_MASK) | Pipe_GetPipeDirection());
+			}
+
+			/** Selects the given pipe address. Any pipe operations which do not require the pipe address to be
+			 *  indicated will operate on the currently selected pipe.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Address  Address of the pipe to select.
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_SelectPipe(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_SelectPipe(const uint8_t Address)
+			{
+				UPNUM = (Address & PIPE_PIPENUM_MASK);
+			}
+
+			/** Resets the desired pipe, including the pipe banks and flags.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Address  Address of the pipe to reset.
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_ResetPipe(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_ResetPipe(const uint8_t Address)
+			{
+				UPRST = (1 << (Address & PIPE_PIPENUM_MASK));
+				UPRST = 0;
+			}
+
+			/** Enables the currently selected pipe so that data can be sent and received through it to and from
+			 *  an attached device.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre The currently selected pipe must first be configured properly via \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe().
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_EnablePipe(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_EnablePipe(void)
+			{
+				UPCONX |= (1 << PEN);
+			}
+
+			/** Disables the currently selected pipe so that data cannot be sent and received through it to and
+			 *  from an attached device.
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_DisablePipe(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_DisablePipe(void)
+			{
+				UPCONX &= ~(1 << PEN);
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the currently selected pipe is enabled, but not necessarily configured.
+			 *
+			 * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected pipe is enabled, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsEnabled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsEnabled(void)
+			{
+				return ((UPCONX & (1 << PEN)) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Gets the current pipe token, indicating the pipe's data direction and type.
+			 *
+			 *  \return The current pipe token, as a \c PIPE_TOKEN_* mask.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeToken(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeToken(void)
+			{
+				return (UPCFG0X & (0x03 << PTOKEN0));
+			}
+
+			/** Sets the token for the currently selected pipe to one of the tokens specified by the \c PIPE_TOKEN_*
+			 *  masks. This can be used on CONTROL type pipes, to allow for bidirectional transfer of data during
+			 *  control requests, or on regular pipes to allow for half-duplex bidirectional data transfer to devices
+			 *  which have two endpoints of opposite direction sharing the same endpoint address within the device.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Token  New pipe token to set the selected pipe to, as a \c PIPE_TOKEN_* mask.
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_SetPipeToken(const uint8_t Token) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_SetPipeToken(const uint8_t Token)
+			{
+				UPCFG0X = ((UPCFG0X & ~(0x03 << PTOKEN0)) | Token);
+			}
+
+			/** Configures the currently selected pipe to allow for an unlimited number of IN requests. */
+			static inline void Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(void)
+			{
+				UPCONX |= (1 << INMODE);
+			}
+
+			/** Configures the currently selected pipe to only allow the specified number of IN requests to be
+			 *  accepted by the pipe before it is automatically frozen.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] TotalINRequests  Total number of IN requests that the pipe may receive before freezing.
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_SetFiniteINRequests(const uint8_t TotalINRequests) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_SetFiniteINRequests(const uint8_t TotalINRequests)
+			{
+				UPCONX &= ~(1 << INMODE);
+				UPINRQX = TotalINRequests;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the currently selected pipe is configured.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the selected pipe is configured, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsConfigured(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsConfigured(void)
+			{
+				return ((UPSTAX & (1 << CFGOK)) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Retrieves the endpoint address of the endpoint within the attached device that the currently selected
+			 *  pipe is bound to.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Endpoint address the currently selected pipe is bound to.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress(void)
+			{
+				uint8_t UPCFG0X_Temp = UPCFG0X;
+
+				return (((UPCFG0X_Temp >> PEPNUM0) & PIPE_EPNUM_MASK) |
+				        ((UPCFG0X_Temp & (1 << PTOKEN1)) ? ENDPOINT_DIR_IN : ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT));
+			}
+
+			/** Sets the period between interrupts for an INTERRUPT type pipe to a specified number of milliseconds.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Milliseconds  Number of milliseconds between each pipe poll.
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(const uint8_t Milliseconds) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(const uint8_t Milliseconds)
+			{
+				UPCFG2X = Milliseconds;
+			}
+
+			/** Returns a mask indicating which pipe's interrupt periods have elapsed, indicating that the pipe should
+			 *  be serviced.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Mask whose bits indicate which pipes have interrupted.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeInterrupts(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeInterrupts(void)
+			{
+				return UPINT;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the specified pipe address has interrupted (valid only for INTERRUPT type
+			 *  pipes).
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Address  Address of the pipe whose interrupt flag should be tested.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the specified pipe has interrupted, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Pipe_HasPipeInterrupted(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Pipe_HasPipeInterrupted(const uint8_t Address)
+			{
+				return ((UPINT & (1 << (Address & PIPE_PIPENUM_MASK))) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Unfreezes the selected pipe, allowing it to communicate with an attached device. */
+			static inline void Pipe_Unfreeze(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_Unfreeze(void)
+			{
+				UPCONX &= ~(1 << PFREEZE);
+			}
+
+			/** Freezes the selected pipe, preventing it from communicating with an attached device. */
+			static inline void Pipe_Freeze(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_Freeze(void)
+			{
+				UPCONX |= (1 << PFREEZE);
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the currently selected pipe is frozen, and not able to accept data.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected pipe is frozen, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsFrozen(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsFrozen(void)
+			{
+				return ((UPCONX & (1 << PFREEZE)) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Clears the error flags for the currently selected pipe. */
+			static inline void Pipe_ClearError(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_ClearError(void)
+			{
+				UPERRX = 0;
+				UPINTX &= ~(1 << PERRI);
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the master pipe error flag is set for the currently selected pipe, indicating that
+			 *  some sort of hardware error has occurred on the pipe.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags() macro for information on retrieving the exact error flag.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if an error has occurred on the selected pipe, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsError(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsError(void)
+			{
+				return ((UPINTX & (1 << PERRI)) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Gets a mask of the hardware error flags which have occurred on the currently selected pipe. This
+			 *  value can then be masked against the \c PIPE_ERRORFLAG_* masks to determine what error has occurred.
+			 *
+			 *  \return  Mask comprising of \c PIPE_ERRORFLAG_* bits indicating what error has occurred on the selected pipe.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetErrorFlags(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetErrorFlags(void)
+			{
+				return ((UPERRX & (PIPE_ERRORFLAG_CRC16 | PIPE_ERRORFLAG_TIMEOUT |
+				                   PIPE_ERRORFLAG_PID   | PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATAPID |
+				                   PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATATGL)) |
+				        (UPSTAX & (PIPE_ERRORFLAG_OVERFLOW | PIPE_ERRORFLAG_UNDERFLOW)));
+			}
+
+			/** Retrieves the number of busy banks in the currently selected pipe, which have been queued for
+			 *  transmission via the \ref Pipe_ClearOUT() command, or are awaiting acknowledgement via the
+			 *  \ref Pipe_ClearIN() command.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \return Total number of busy banks in the selected pipe.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetBusyBanks(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetBusyBanks(void)
+			{
+				return (UPSTAX & (0x03 << NBUSYBK0));
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the currently selected pipe may be read from (if data is waiting in the pipe
+			 *  bank and the pipe is an IN direction, or if the bank is not yet full if the pipe is an OUT
+			 *  direction). This function will return false if an error has occurred in the pipe, or if the pipe
+			 *  is an IN direction and no packet (or an empty packet) has been received, or if the pipe is an OUT
+			 *  direction and the pipe bank is full.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function is not valid on CONTROL type pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected pipe may be read from or written to, depending
+			 *          on its direction.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed(void)
+			{
+				return ((UPINTX & (1 << RWAL)) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if a packet has been received on the currently selected IN pipe from the attached device.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the current pipe has received an IN packet, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsINReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsINReceived(void)
+			{
+				return ((UPINTX & (1 << RXINI)) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the currently selected OUT pipe is ready to send an OUT packet to the attached device.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the current pipe is ready for an OUT packet, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsOUTReady(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsOUTReady(void)
+			{
+				return ((UPINTX & (1 << TXOUTI)) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if no SETUP request is currently being sent to the attached device on the selected
+			 *  CONTROL type pipe.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the current pipe is ready for a SETUP packet, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsSETUPSent(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsSETUPSent(void)
+			{
+				return ((UPINTX & (1 << TXSTPI)) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Sends the currently selected CONTROL type pipe's contents to the device as a SETUP packet.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_AVR8
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_ClearSETUP(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_ClearSETUP(void)
+			{
+				UPINTX &= ~((1 << TXSTPI) | (1 << FIFOCON));
+			}
+
+			/** Acknowledges the reception of a setup IN request from the attached device on the currently selected
+			 *  pipe, freeing the bank ready for the next packet.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_AVR8
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_ClearIN(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_ClearIN(void)
+			{
+				UPINTX &= ~((1 << RXINI) | (1 << FIFOCON));
+			}
+
+			/** Sends the currently selected pipe's contents to the device as an OUT packet on the selected pipe, freeing
+			 *  the bank ready for the next packet.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_AVR8
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_ClearOUT(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_ClearOUT(void)
+			{
+				UPINTX &= ~((1 << TXOUTI) | (1 << FIFOCON));
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the device sent a NAK (Negative Acknowledge) in response to the last sent packet on
+			 *  the currently selected pipe. This occurs when the host sends a packet to the device, but the device
+			 *  is not currently ready to handle the packet (i.e. its endpoint banks are full). Once a NAK has been
+			 *  received, it must be cleared using \ref Pipe_ClearNAKReceived() before the previous (or any other) packet
+			 *  can be re-sent.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if an NAK has been received on the current pipe, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsNAKReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsNAKReceived(void)
+			{
+				return ((UPINTX & (1 << NAKEDI)) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Clears the NAK condition on the currently selected pipe.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref Pipe_IsNAKReceived() for more details.
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_ClearNAKReceived(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_ClearNAKReceived(void)
+			{
+				UPINTX &= ~(1 << NAKEDI);
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the currently selected pipe has had the STALL condition set by the attached device.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the current pipe has been stalled by the attached device, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsStalled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsStalled(void)
+			{
+				return ((UPINTX & (1 << RXSTALLI)) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Clears the STALL condition detection flag on the currently selected pipe, but does not clear the
+			 *  STALL condition itself (this must be done via a ClearFeature control request to the device).
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_AVR8
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_ClearStall(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_ClearStall(void)
+			{
+				UPINTX &= ~(1 << RXSTALLI);
+			}
+
+			/** Reads one byte from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next byte in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_Read_8(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_Read_8(void)
+			{
+				return UPDATX;
+			}
+
+			/** Writes one byte to the currently selected pipe's bank, for IN direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write into the the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_Write_8(const uint8_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_Write_8(const uint8_t Data)
+			{
+				UPDATX = Data;
+			}
+
+			/** Discards one byte from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_AVR8
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_Discard_8(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_Discard_8(void)
+			{
+				uint8_t Dummy;
+
+				Dummy = UPDATX;
+
+				(void)Dummy;
+			}
+
+			/** Reads two bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for OUT
+			 *  direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next two bytes in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_16_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_16_LE(void)
+			{
+				union
+				{
+					uint16_t Value;
+					uint8_t  Bytes[2];
+				} Data;
+
+				Data.Bytes[0] = UPDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[1] = UPDATX;
+
+				return Data.Value;
+			}
+
+			/** Reads two bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for OUT
+			 *  direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next two bytes in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_16_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_16_BE(void)
+			{
+				union
+				{
+					uint16_t Value;
+					uint8_t  Bytes[2];
+				} Data;
+
+				Data.Bytes[1] = UPDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[0] = UPDATX;
+
+				return Data.Value;
+			}
+
+			/** Writes two bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for IN
+			 *  direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data)
+			{
+				UPDATX = (Data & 0xFF);
+				UPDATX = (Data >> 8);
+			}
+
+			/** Writes two bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for IN
+			 *  direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data)
+			{
+				UPDATX = (Data >> 8);
+				UPDATX = (Data & 0xFF);
+			}
+
+			/** Discards two bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_AVR8
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_Discard_16(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_Discard_16(void)
+			{
+				uint8_t Dummy;
+
+				Dummy = UPDATX;
+				Dummy = UPDATX;
+
+				(void)Dummy;
+			}
+
+			/** Reads four bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for OUT
+			 *  direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next four bytes in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_32_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_32_LE(void)
+			{
+				union
+				{
+					uint32_t Value;
+					uint8_t  Bytes[4];
+				} Data;
+
+				Data.Bytes[0] = UPDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[1] = UPDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[2] = UPDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[3] = UPDATX;
+
+				return Data.Value;
+			}
+
+			/** Reads four bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for OUT
+			 *  direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next four bytes in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_32_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_32_BE(void)
+			{
+				union
+				{
+					uint32_t DWord;
+					uint8_t  Bytes[4];
+				} Data;
+
+				Data.Bytes[3] = UPDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[2] = UPDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[1] = UPDATX;
+				Data.Bytes[0] = UPDATX;
+
+				return Data.DWord;
+			}
+
+			/** Writes four bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for IN
+			 *  direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data)
+			{
+				UPDATX = (Data &  0xFF);
+				UPDATX = (Data >> 8);
+				UPDATX = (Data >> 16);
+				UPDATX = (Data >> 24);
+			}
+
+			/** Writes four bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for IN
+			 *  direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data)
+			{
+				UPDATX = (Data >> 24);
+				UPDATX = (Data >> 16);
+				UPDATX = (Data >> 8);
+				UPDATX = (Data &  0xFF);
+			}
+
+			/** Discards four bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_AVR8
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_Discard_32(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_Discard_32(void)
+			{
+				uint8_t Dummy;
+
+				Dummy = UPDATX;
+				Dummy = UPDATX;
+				Dummy = UPDATX;
+				Dummy = UPDATX;
+
+				(void)Dummy;
+			}
+
+		/* External Variables: */
+			/** Global indicating the maximum packet size of the default control pipe located at address
+			 *  0 in the device. This value is set to the value indicated in the attached device's device
+		     *  descriptor once the USB interface is initialized into host mode and a device is attached
+			 *  to the USB bus.
+			 *
+			 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
+			 *             changed in value.
+			 */
+			extern uint8_t USB_Host_ControlPipeSize;
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Configures a table of pipe descriptions, in sequence. This function can be used to configure multiple
+			 *  pipes at the same time.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Pipe with a zero address will be ignored, thus this function cannot be used to configure the
+			 *        control pipe.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Table    Pointer to a table of pipe descriptions.
+			 *  \param[in] Entries  Number of entries in the pipe table to configure.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if all pipes configured successfully, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(const USB_Pipe_Table_t* const Table,
+			                             const uint8_t Entries);
+
+			/** Configures the specified pipe address with the given pipe type, endpoint address within the attached device,
+			 *  bank size and number of hardware banks.
+			 *
+			 *  A newly configured pipe is frozen by default, and must be unfrozen before use via the \ref Pipe_Unfreeze()
+			 *  before being used. Pipes should be kept frozen unless waiting for data from a device while in IN mode, or
+			 *  sending data to the device in OUT mode. IN type pipes are also automatically configured to accept infinite
+			 *  numbers of IN requests without automatic freezing - this can be overridden by a call to
+			 *  \ref Pipe_SetFiniteINRequests().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Address          Pipe address to configure.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Type             Type of pipe to configure, an \c EP_TYPE_* mask. Not all pipe types are available on Low
+			 *                              Speed USB devices - refer to the USB 2.0 specification.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] EndpointAddress  Endpoint address within the attached device that the pipe should interface to.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Size             Size of the pipe's bank, where packets are stored before they are transmitted to
+			 *                              the USB device, or after they have been received from the USB device (depending on
+			 *                              the pipe's data direction). The bank size must indicate the maximum packet size that
+			 *                              the pipe can handle.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Banks            Number of banks to use for the pipe being configured.
+			 *
+			 *  \attention When the \c ORDERED_EP_CONFIG compile time option is used, Pipes <b>must</b> be configured in ascending order,
+			 *             or bank corruption will occur.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Certain microcontroller model's pipes may have different maximum packet sizes based on the pipe's
+			 *        index - refer to the chosen microcontroller's datasheet to determine the maximum bank size for each pipe.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note The default control pipe should not be manually configured by the user application, as it is
+			 *        automatically configured by the library internally.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine will automatically select the specified pipe upon success. Upon failure, the pipe which
+			 *        failed to reconfigure correctly will be selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the configuration succeeded, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool Pipe_ConfigurePipe(const uint8_t Address,
+			                        const uint8_t Type,
+			                        const uint8_t EndpointAddress,
+			                        const uint16_t Size,
+			                        const uint8_t Banks);
+
+			/** Spin-loops until the currently selected non-control pipe is ready for the next packet of data to be read
+			 *  or written to it, aborting in the case of an error condition (such as a timeout or device disconnect).
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeRW_AVR8
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_WaitUntilReady(void);
+
+			/** Determines if a pipe has been bound to the given device endpoint address. If a pipe which is bound to the given
+			 *  endpoint is found, it is automatically selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] EndpointAddress Address and direction mask of the endpoint within the attached device to check.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if a pipe bound to the given endpoint address of the specified direction is found,
+			 *          \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool Pipe_IsEndpointBound(const uint8_t EndpointAddress) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#if !defined(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP)
+				#define ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP          0
+			#endif
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes)
+			{
+				uint8_t  MaskVal    = 0;
+				uint16_t CheckBytes = 8;
+
+				while ((CheckBytes < Bytes) && (CheckBytes < PIPE_MAX_SIZE))
+				{
+					MaskVal++;
+					CheckBytes <<= 1;
+				}
+
+				return (MaskVal << EPSIZE0);
+			}
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			void Pipe_ClearPipes(void);
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..59c620ae5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#if defined(TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME)
+
+uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (void* const Buffer,
+                            uint16_t Length)
+{
+	uint8_t* DataStream = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));
+
+	if (!(Length))
+	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	while (Length)
+	{
+		uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;
+
+		if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+		else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;
+		else if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_HostAborted;
+
+		if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+		{
+			while (Length && Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())
+			{
+				TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+				TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, 1);
+				Length--;
+			}
+
+			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+		}
+	}
+
+	while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+	{
+		uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;
+
+		if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+		else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;
+	}
+
+	return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE
+#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME
+#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..98887009c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#if defined(TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME)
+
+uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (const void* const Buffer,
+                            uint16_t Length)
+{
+	uint8_t* DataStream     = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));
+	bool     LastPacketFull = false;
+
+	if (Length > USB_ControlRequest.wLength)
+	  Length = USB_ControlRequest.wLength;
+	else if (!(Length))
+	  Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	while (Length || LastPacketFull)
+	{
+		uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;
+
+		if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+		else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;
+		else if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_HostAborted;
+		else if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+		  break;
+
+		if (Endpoint_IsINReady())
+		{
+			uint16_t BytesInEndpoint = Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint();
+
+			while (Length && (BytesInEndpoint < USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize))
+			{
+				TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+				TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, 1);
+				Length--;
+				BytesInEndpoint++;
+			}
+
+			LastPacketFull = (BytesInEndpoint == USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize);
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+		}
+	}
+
+	while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+	{
+		uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;
+
+		if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+		else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;
+		else if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_HostAborted;
+	}
+
+	return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE
+#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME
+#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d51afdfb1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#if defined(TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME)
+
+uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE const Buffer,
+                            uint16_t Length,
+                            uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)
+{
+	uint8_t* DataStream      = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));
+	uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
+	{
+		Length -= *BytesProcessed;
+		TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, *BytesProcessed);
+	}
+
+	while (Length)
+	{
+		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		{
+			TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT();
+
+			#if !defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)
+			USB_USBTask();
+			#endif
+
+			if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
+			{
+				*BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;
+				return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;
+			}
+
+			if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
+			  return ErrorCode;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+			TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, 1);
+			Length--;
+			BytesInTransfer++;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE
+#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE
+#undef TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2685c9b9d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#if defined(TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME)
+
+uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE const Buffer,
+                            uint16_t Length,
+                            uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)
+{
+	uint8_t* DataStream      = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));
+	uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_SetPipeToken(TEMPLATE_TOKEN);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
+	{
+		Length -= *BytesProcessed;
+		TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, *BytesProcessed);
+	}
+
+	while (Length)
+	{
+		if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		{
+			TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE();
+
+			if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
+			{
+				*BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;
+				return PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;
+			}
+
+			if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))
+			  return ErrorCode;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+			TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, 1);
+			Length--;
+			BytesInTransfer++;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE
+#undef TEMPLATE_TOKEN
+#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE
+#undef TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/USBController_AVR8.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/USBController_AVR8.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..71c5f916d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/USBController_AVR8.c
@@ -0,0 +1,273 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_CONTROLLER_C
+#include "../USBController.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+volatile uint8_t USB_CurrentMode = USB_MODE_None;
+#endif
+
+#if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)
+volatile uint8_t USB_Options;
+#endif
+
+void USB_Init(
+               #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+               const uint8_t Mode
+               #endif
+
+               #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS))
+               ,
+               #elif (!defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS))
+               void
+               #endif
+
+               #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)
+               const uint8_t Options
+               #endif
+               )
+{
+	#if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)
+	USB_Options = Options;
+	#endif
+
+	#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)
+	/* Workaround for AVR8 bootloaders that fail to turn off the OTG pad before running
+	 * the loaded application. This causes VBUS detection to fail unless we first force
+	 * it off to reset it. */
+	USB_OTGPAD_Off();
+	#endif
+
+	if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_REG_DISABLED))
+	  USB_REG_On();
+	else
+	  USB_REG_Off();
+
+	if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL))
+	{
+		#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR)
+		PLLFRQ = (1 << PDIV2);
+		#endif
+	}
+
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+	if (Mode == USB_MODE_UID)
+	{
+		UHWCON |=  (1 << UIDE);
+		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_IDTI);
+		USB_CurrentMode = USB_GetUSBModeFromUID();
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		UHWCON &= ~(1 << UIDE);
+		USB_CurrentMode = Mode;
+	}
+	#endif
+
+	USB_IsInitialized = true;
+
+	USB_ResetInterface();
+}
+
+void USB_Disable(void)
+{
+	USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts();
+	USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts();
+
+	USB_Detach();
+	USB_Controller_Disable();
+
+	if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL))
+	  USB_PLL_Off();
+
+	if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_REG_KEEP_ENABLED))
+	  USB_REG_Off();
+
+	#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)
+	USB_OTGPAD_Off();
+	#endif
+
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+	USB_CurrentMode = USB_MODE_None;
+	#endif
+
+	USB_IsInitialized = false;
+}
+
+void USB_ResetInterface(void)
+{
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+	bool UIDModeSelectEnabled = ((UHWCON & (1 << UIDE)) != 0);
+	#endif
+
+	USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts();
+	USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts();
+
+	USB_Controller_Reset();
+
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+	if (UIDModeSelectEnabled)
+	  USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_IDTI);
+	#endif
+
+	USB_CLK_Unfreeze();
+
+	if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device)
+	{
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+		#if (defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR))
+		UHWCON |=  (1 << UIMOD);
+		#endif
+
+		if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL))
+		{
+			#if defined(USB_SERIES_2_AVR)
+			USB_PLL_On();
+			while (!(USB_PLL_IsReady()));
+			#else
+			USB_PLL_Off();
+			#endif
+		}
+
+		USB_Init_Device();
+		#endif
+	}
+	else if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Host)
+	{
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+		UHWCON &= ~(1 << UIMOD);
+
+		if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL))
+		{
+			#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+			USB_PLL_On();
+			while (!(USB_PLL_IsReady()));
+			#endif
+		}
+
+		USB_Init_Host();
+		#endif
+	}
+
+	#if (defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR))
+	USB_OTGPAD_On();
+	#endif
+}
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+static void USB_Init_Device(void)
+{
+	USB_DeviceState                 = DEVICE_STATE_Unattached;
+	USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber  = 0;
+
+	#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)
+	USB_Device_RemoteWakeupEnabled  = false;
+	#endif
+
+	#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER)
+	USB_Device_CurrentlySelfPowered = false;
+	#endif
+
+	#if !defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE)
+	USB_Descriptor_Device_t* DeviceDescriptorPtr;
+
+	#if defined(ARCH_HAS_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE) && \
+	    !(defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS))
+	uint8_t DescriptorAddressSpace;
+
+	if (CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor((DTYPE_Device << 8), 0, (void*)&DeviceDescriptorPtr, &DescriptorAddressSpace) != NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+	{
+		if (DescriptorAddressSpace == MEMSPACE_FLASH)
+		  USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = pgm_read_byte(&DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size);
+		else if (DescriptorAddressSpace == MEMSPACE_EEPROM)
+		  USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = eeprom_read_byte(&DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size);
+		else
+		  USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size;
+	}
+	#else
+	if (CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor((DTYPE_Device << 8), 0, (void*)&DeviceDescriptorPtr) != NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+	{
+		#if defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS)
+		USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size;
+		#elif defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS)
+		USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = eeprom_read_byte(&DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size);
+		#else
+		USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = pgm_read_byte(&DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size);
+		#endif
+	}
+	#endif
+	#endif
+
+	#if (defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR))
+	if (USB_Options & USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED)
+	  USB_Device_SetLowSpeed();
+	else
+	  USB_Device_SetFullSpeed();
+
+	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_VBUSTI);
+	#endif
+
+	Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, EP_TYPE_CONTROL,
+							   USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize, 1);
+
+	USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SUSPI);
+	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SUSPI);
+	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_EORSTI);
+
+	USB_Attach();
+}
+#endif
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+static void USB_Init_Host(void)
+{
+	USB_HostState                = HOST_STATE_Unattached;
+	USB_Host_ConfigurationNumber = 0;
+	USB_Host_ControlPipeSize     = PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE;
+
+	USB_Host_HostMode_On();
+
+	USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off();
+	USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Enable();
+	USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_On();
+
+	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SRPI);
+	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_BCERRI);
+
+	USB_Attach();
+}
+#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/USBController_AVR8.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/USBController_AVR8.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..de34f42a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/USBController_AVR8.h
@@ -0,0 +1,432 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB Controller definitions for the AVR8 microcontrollers.
+ *  \copydetails Group_USBManagement_AVR8
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBManagement
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBManagement_AVR8 USB Interface Management (AVR8)
+ *  \brief USB Controller definitions for the AVR8 microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to the setup and management of the USB interface.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __USBCONTROLLER_AVR8_H__
+#define __USBCONTROLLER_AVR8_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../USBMode.h"
+		#include "../Events.h"
+		#include "../USBTask.h"
+		#include "../USBInterrupt.h"
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			#include "../Host.h"
+			#include "../OTG.h"
+			#include "../Pipe.h"
+			#include "../HostStandardReq.h"
+			#include "../PipeStream.h"
+		#endif
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			#include "../Device.h"
+			#include "../Endpoint.h"
+			#include "../DeviceStandardReq.h"
+			#include "../EndpointStream.h"
+		#endif
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks and Defines: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+		#if !defined(F_USB)
+			#error F_USB is not defined. You must define F_USB to the frequency of the unprescaled USB controller clock in your project makefile.
+		#endif
+
+		#if (F_USB == 8000000)
+			#if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB82__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__) || \
+			     defined(__AVR_ATmega8U2__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega16U2__) || \
+			     defined(__AVR_ATmega32U2__))
+				#define USB_PLL_PSC                0
+			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__))
+				#define USB_PLL_PSC                0
+			#elif (defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__)  || defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__))
+				#define USB_PLL_PSC                ((1 << PLLP1) | (1 << PLLP0))
+			#elif (defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__)  || defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__))
+				#define USB_PLL_PSC                ((1 << PLLP1) | (1 << PLLP0))
+			#endif
+		#elif (F_USB == 16000000)
+			#if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB82__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__) || \
+			     defined(__AVR_ATmega8U2__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega16U2__) || \
+			     defined(__AVR_ATmega32U2__))
+				#define USB_PLL_PSC                (1 << PLLP0)
+			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__))
+				#define USB_PLL_PSC                (1 << PINDIV)
+			#elif (defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__))
+				#define USB_PLL_PSC                ((1 << PLLP2) | (1 << PLLP1))
+			#elif (defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__))
+				#define USB_PLL_PSC                ((1 << PLLP2) | (1 << PLLP0))
+			#endif
+		#endif
+
+		#if !defined(USB_PLL_PSC)
+			#error No PLL prescale value available for chosen F_USB value and AVR model.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** \name USB Controller Option Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** Regulator disable option mask for \ref USB_Init(). This indicates that the internal 3.3V USB data pad
+			 *  regulator should be disabled and the AVR's VCC level used for the data pads.
+			 *
+			 *  \note See USB AVR data sheet for more information on the internal pad regulator.
+			 */
+			#define USB_OPT_REG_DISABLED               (1 << 1)
+
+			/** Regulator enable option mask for \ref USB_Init(). This indicates that the internal 3.3V USB data pad
+			 *  regulator should be enabled to regulate the data pin voltages from the VBUS level down to a level within
+			 *  the range allowable by the USB standard.
+			 *
+			 *  \note See USB AVR data sheet for more information on the internal pad regulator.
+			 */
+			#define USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED                (0 << 1)
+
+			/** Option mask for \ref USB_Init() to keep regulator enabled at all times. Indicates that \ref USB_Disable()
+			 *  should not disable the regulator as it would otherwise. Has no effect if regulator is disabled using
+			 *  \ref USB_OPT_REG_DISABLED.
+			 *
+			 *  \note See USB AVR data sheet for more information on the internal pad regulator.
+			 */
+			#define USB_OPT_REG_KEEP_ENABLED           (1 << 3)
+
+			/** Manual PLL control option mask for \ref USB_Init(). This indicates to the library that the user application
+			 *  will take full responsibility for controlling the AVR's PLL (used to generate the high frequency clock
+			 *  that the USB controller requires) and ensuring that it is locked at the correct frequency for USB operations.
+			 */
+			#define USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL                 (1 << 2)
+
+			/** Automatic PLL control option mask for \ref USB_Init(). This indicates to the library that the library should
+			 *  take full responsibility for controlling the AVR's PLL (used to generate the high frequency clock
+			 *  that the USB controller requires) and ensuring that it is locked at the correct frequency for USB operations.
+			 */
+			#define USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL                   (0 << 2)
+			//@}
+
+			#if !defined(USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Constant for the maximum software timeout period of the USB data stream transfer functions
+				 *  (both control and standard) when in either device or host mode. If the next packet of a stream
+				 *  is not received or acknowledged within this time period, the stream function will fail.
+				 *
+				 *  This value may be overridden in the user project makefile as the value of the
+				 *  \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS token, and passed to the compiler using the -D switch.
+				 */
+				#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS       100
+			#endif
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Determines if the VBUS line is currently high (i.e. the USB host is supplying power).
+				 *
+				 *  \note This function is not available on some AVR models which do not support hardware VBUS monitoring.
+				 *
+				 *  \return Boolean \c true if the VBUS line is currently detecting power from a host, \c false otherwise.
+				 */
+				static inline bool USB_VBUS_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+				static inline bool USB_VBUS_GetStatus(void)
+				{
+					return ((USBSTA & (1 << VBUS)) ? true : false);
+				}
+			#endif
+
+			/** Detaches the device from the USB bus. This has the effect of removing the device from any
+			 *  attached host, ceasing USB communications. If no host is present, this prevents any host from
+			 *  enumerating the device once attached until \ref USB_Attach() is called.
+			 */
+			static inline void USB_Detach(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Detach(void)
+			{
+				UDCON  |=  (1 << DETACH);
+			}
+
+			/** Attaches the device to the USB bus. This announces the device's presence to any attached
+			 *  USB host, starting the enumeration process. If no host is present, attaching the device
+			 *  will allow for enumeration once a host is connected to the device.
+			 *
+			 *  This is inexplicably also required for proper operation while in host mode, to enable the
+			 *  attachment of a device to the host. This is despite the bit being located in the device-mode
+			 *  register and despite the datasheet making no mention of its requirement in host mode.
+			 */
+			static inline void USB_Attach(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Attach(void)
+			{
+				UDCON  &= ~(1 << DETACH);
+			}
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Main function to initialize and start the USB interface. Once active, the USB interface will
+			 *  allow for device connection to a host when in device mode, or for device enumeration while in
+			 *  host mode.
+			 *
+			 *  As the USB library relies on interrupts for the device and host mode enumeration processes,
+			 *  the user must enable global interrupts before or shortly after this function is called. In
+			 *  device mode, interrupts must be enabled within 500ms of this function being called to ensure
+			 *  that the host does not time out whilst enumerating the device. In host mode, interrupts may be
+			 *  enabled at the application's leisure however enumeration will not begin of an attached device
+			 *  until after this has occurred.
+			 *
+			 *  Calling this function when the USB interface is already initialized will cause a complete USB
+			 *  interface reset and re-enumeration.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Mode     Mask indicating what mode the USB interface is to be initialized to, a value
+			 *                      from the \ref USB_Modes_t enum.
+			 *                      \note This parameter does not exist on devices with only one supported USB
+			 *                            mode (device or host).
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Options  Mask indicating the options which should be used when initializing the USB
+			 *                      interface to control the USB interface's behavior. This should be comprised of
+			 *                      a \c USB_OPT_REG_* mask to control the regulator, a \c USB_OPT_*_PLL mask to control the
+			 *                      PLL, and a \c USB_DEVICE_OPT_* mask (when the device mode is enabled) to set the device
+			 *                      mode speed.
+			 *
+			 *  \note To reduce the FLASH requirements of the library if only device or host mode is required,
+			 *        the mode can be statically set in the project makefile by defining the token \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+			 *        (for device mode) or \c USB_HOST_ONLY (for host mode), passing the token to the compiler
+			 *        via the -D switch. If the mode is statically set, this parameter does not exist in the
+			 *        function prototype.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note To reduce the FLASH requirements of the library if only fixed settings are required,
+			 *        the options may be set statically in the same manner as the mode (see the Mode parameter of
+			 *        this function). To statically set the USB options, pass in the \c USE_STATIC_OPTIONS token,
+			 *        defined to the appropriate options masks. When the options are statically set, this
+			 *        parameter does not exist in the function prototype.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note The mode parameter does not exist on devices where only one mode is possible, such as USB
+			 *        AVR models which only implement the USB device mode in hardware.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref Group_Device for the \c USB_DEVICE_OPT_* masks.
+			 */
+			void USB_Init(
+			               #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			               const uint8_t Mode
+			               #endif
+
+			               #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			               ,
+			               #elif (!defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS))
+			               void
+			               #endif
+
+			               #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			               const uint8_t Options
+			               #endif
+			               );
+
+			/** Shuts down the USB interface. This turns off the USB interface after deallocating all USB FIFO
+			 *  memory, endpoints and pipes. When turned off, no USB functionality can be used until the interface
+			 *  is restarted with the \ref USB_Init() function.
+			 */
+			void USB_Disable(void);
+
+			/** Resets the interface, when already initialized. This will re-enumerate the device if already connected
+			 *  to a host, or re-enumerate an already attached device when in host mode.
+			 */
+			void USB_ResetInterface(void);
+
+		/* Global Variables: */
+			#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Indicates the mode that the USB interface is currently initialized to, a value from the
+				 *  \ref USB_Modes_t enum.
+				 *
+				 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
+				 *             changed in value.
+				 *
+				 *  \note When the controller is initialized into UID auto-detection mode, this variable will hold the
+				 *        currently selected USB mode (i.e. \ref USB_MODE_Device or \ref USB_MODE_Host). If the controller
+				 *        is fixed into a specific mode (either through the \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY or \c USB_HOST_ONLY compile time
+				 *        options, or a limitation of the USB controller in the chosen device model) this will evaluate to
+				 *        a constant of the appropriate value and will never evaluate to \ref USB_MODE_None even when the
+				 *        USB interface is not initialized.
+				 */
+				extern volatile uint8_t USB_CurrentMode;
+			#elif defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+				#define USB_CurrentMode USB_MODE_Host
+			#elif defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+				#define USB_CurrentMode USB_MODE_Device
+			#endif
+
+			#if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Indicates the current USB options that the USB interface was initialized with when \ref USB_Init()
+				 *  was called. This value will be one of the \c USB_MODE_* masks defined elsewhere in this module.
+				 *
+				 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
+				 *             changed in value.
+				 */
+				extern volatile uint8_t USB_Options;
+			#elif defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)
+				#define USB_Options USE_STATIC_OPTIONS
+			#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_CONTROLLER_C)
+				#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+				static void USB_Init_Device(void);
+				#endif
+
+				#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+				static void USB_Init_Host(void);
+				#endif
+			#endif
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			static inline void USB_PLL_On(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_PLL_On(void)
+			{
+				PLLCSR = USB_PLL_PSC;
+				PLLCSR = (USB_PLL_PSC | (1 << PLLE));
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_PLL_Off(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_PLL_Off(void)
+			{
+				PLLCSR = 0;
+			}
+
+			static inline bool USB_PLL_IsReady(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool USB_PLL_IsReady(void)
+			{
+				return ((PLLCSR & (1 << PLOCK)) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_REG_On(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_REG_On(void)
+			{
+			#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)
+				UHWCON |=  (1 << UVREGE);
+			#else
+				REGCR  &= ~(1 << REGDIS);
+			#endif
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_REG_Off(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_REG_Off(void)
+			{
+			#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)
+				UHWCON &= ~(1 << UVREGE);
+			#else
+				REGCR  |=  (1 << REGDIS);
+			#endif
+			}
+
+			#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)
+			static inline void USB_OTGPAD_On(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_OTGPAD_On(void)
+			{
+				USBCON |=  (1 << OTGPADE);
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_OTGPAD_Off(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_OTGPAD_Off(void)
+			{
+				USBCON &= ~(1 << OTGPADE);
+			}
+			#endif
+
+			static inline void USB_CLK_Freeze(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_CLK_Freeze(void)
+			{
+				USBCON |=  (1 << FRZCLK);
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_CLK_Unfreeze(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_CLK_Unfreeze(void)
+			{
+				USBCON &= ~(1 << FRZCLK);
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Controller_Enable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Controller_Enable(void)
+			{
+				USBCON |=  (1 << USBE);
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Controller_Disable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Controller_Disable(void)
+			{
+				USBCON &= ~(1 << USBE);
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Controller_Reset(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Controller_Reset(void)
+			{
+				USBCON &= ~(1 << USBE);
+				USBCON |=  (1 << USBE);
+			}
+
+			#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+			static inline uint8_t USB_GetUSBModeFromUID(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t USB_GetUSBModeFromUID(void)
+			{
+				if (USBSTA & (1 << ID))
+				  return USB_MODE_Device;
+				else
+				  return USB_MODE_Host;
+			}
+			#endif
+
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/USBInterrupt_AVR8.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/USBInterrupt_AVR8.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7efaea65a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/USBInterrupt_AVR8.c
@@ -0,0 +1,279 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../USBInterrupt.h"
+
+void USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(void)
+{
+	#if defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)
+	USBCON &= ~((1 << VBUSTE) | (1 << IDTE));
+	#elif defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR)
+	USBCON &= ~(1 << VBUSTE);
+	#endif
+
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+	OTGIEN  = 0;
+	#endif
+
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+	UHIEN   = 0;
+	#endif
+
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+	UDIEN   = 0;
+	#endif
+}
+
+void USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(void)
+{
+	#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)
+	USBINT = 0;
+	#endif
+
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+	OTGINT = 0;
+	#endif
+
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+	UHINT  = 0;
+	#endif
+
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+	UDINT  = 0;
+	#endif
+}
+
+ISR(USB_GEN_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+	#if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS)
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_SOFI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_SOFI))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SOFI);
+
+		EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame();
+	}
+	#endif
+
+	#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR)
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_VBUSTI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_VBUSTI))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_VBUSTI);
+
+		if (USB_VBUS_GetStatus())
+		{
+			if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL))
+			{
+				USB_PLL_On();
+				while (!(USB_PLL_IsReady()));
+			}
+
+			USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Powered;
+			EVENT_USB_Device_Connect();
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL))
+			  USB_PLL_Off();
+
+			USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Unattached;
+			EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect();
+		}
+	}
+	#endif
+
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_SUSPI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_SUSPI))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SUSPI);
+		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_WAKEUPI);
+
+		USB_CLK_Freeze();
+
+		if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL))
+		  USB_PLL_Off();
+
+		#if defined(USB_SERIES_2_AVR) && !defined(NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT)
+		USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Unattached;
+		EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect();
+		#else
+		USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Suspended;
+		EVENT_USB_Device_Suspend();
+		#endif
+	}
+
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_WAKEUPI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_WAKEUPI))
+	{
+		if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL))
+		{
+			USB_PLL_On();
+			while (!(USB_PLL_IsReady()));
+		}
+
+		USB_CLK_Unfreeze();
+
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_WAKEUPI);
+
+		USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_WAKEUPI);
+		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SUSPI);
+
+		if (USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber)
+		  USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Configured;
+		else
+		  USB_DeviceState = (USB_Device_IsAddressSet()) ? DEVICE_STATE_Addressed : DEVICE_STATE_Powered;
+
+		#if defined(USB_SERIES_2_AVR) && !defined(NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT)
+		EVENT_USB_Device_Connect();
+		#else
+		EVENT_USB_Device_WakeUp();
+		#endif
+	}
+
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_EORSTI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_EORSTI))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_EORSTI);
+
+		USB_DeviceState                = DEVICE_STATE_Default;
+		USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber = 0;
+
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SUSPI);
+		USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SUSPI);
+		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_WAKEUPI);
+
+		Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, EP_TYPE_CONTROL,
+		                           USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize, 1);
+
+		#if defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)
+		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_RXSTPI);
+		#endif
+
+		EVENT_USB_Device_Reset();
+	}
+	#endif
+
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+	#if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS)
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_HSOFI))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+
+		EVENT_USB_Host_StartOfFrame();
+	}
+	#endif
+
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_DDISCI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_DDISCI))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DDISCI);
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DCONNI);
+		USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_DDISCI);
+
+		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();
+
+		USB_ResetInterface();
+	}
+
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_VBERRI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_VBERRI))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_VBERRI);
+
+		USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off();
+		USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off();
+
+		EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(HOST_ERROR_VBusVoltageDip);
+		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();
+
+		USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Unattached;
+	}
+
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_SRPI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_SRPI))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SRPI);
+		USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SRPI);
+
+		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached();
+
+		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_DDISCI);
+
+		USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Powered;
+	}
+
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_BCERRI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_BCERRI))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_BCERRI);
+
+		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(HOST_ENUMERROR_NoDeviceDetected, 0);
+		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();
+
+		USB_ResetInterface();
+	}
+	#endif
+
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_IDTI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_IDTI))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_IDTI);
+
+		if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+		  EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect();
+
+		if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Unattached)
+		  EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();
+
+		USB_CurrentMode = USB_GetUSBModeFromUID();
+		USB_ResetInterface();
+
+		EVENT_USB_UIDChange();
+	}
+	#endif
+}
+
+#if defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT) && defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+ISR(USB_COM_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	uint8_t PrevSelectedEndpoint = Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint();
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP);
+	USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_RXSTPI);
+
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	USB_Device_ProcessControlRequest();
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP);
+	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_RXSTPI);
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(PrevSelectedEndpoint);
+}
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/USBInterrupt_AVR8.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/USBInterrupt_AVR8.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e6f5ff994
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/USBInterrupt_AVR8.h
@@ -0,0 +1,375 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB Controller Interrupt definitions for the AVR8 microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  This file contains definitions required for the correct handling of low level USB service routine interrupts
+ *  from the USB controller.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __USBINTERRUPT_AVR8_H__
+#define __USBINTERRUPT_AVR8_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Enums: */
+			enum USB_Interrupts_t
+			{
+				#if (defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
+				USB_INT_VBUSTI  = 0,
+				#endif
+				#if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
+				USB_INT_IDTI    = 1,
+				#endif
+				#if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
+				USB_INT_WAKEUPI = 2,
+				USB_INT_SUSPI   = 3,
+				USB_INT_EORSTI  = 4,
+				USB_INT_SOFI    = 5,
+				USB_INT_RXSTPI  = 6,
+				#endif
+				#if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
+				USB_INT_HSOFI   = 7,
+				USB_INT_DCONNI  = 8,
+				USB_INT_DDISCI  = 9,
+				USB_INT_RSTI    = 10,
+				USB_INT_BCERRI  = 11,
+				USB_INT_VBERRI  = 12,
+				USB_INT_SRPI    = 13,
+				#endif
+			};
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			static inline void USB_INT_Enable(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_INT_Enable(const uint8_t Interrupt)
+			{
+				switch (Interrupt)
+				{
+					#if (defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR))
+					case USB_INT_VBUSTI:
+						USBCON |= (1 << VBUSTE);
+						break;
+					#endif
+					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+					case USB_INT_IDTI:
+						USBCON |= (1 << IDTE);
+						break;
+					#endif
+					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+					case USB_INT_WAKEUPI:
+						UDIEN  |= (1 << WAKEUPE);
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_SUSPI:
+						UDIEN  |= (1 << SUSPE);
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_EORSTI:
+						UDIEN  |= (1 << EORSTE);
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_SOFI:
+						UDIEN  |= (1 << SOFE);
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_RXSTPI:
+						UEIENX |= (1 << RXSTPE);
+						break;
+					#endif
+					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+					case USB_INT_HSOFI:
+						UHIEN  |= (1 << HSOFE);
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_DCONNI:
+						UHIEN  |= (1 << DCONNE);
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_DDISCI:
+						UHIEN  |= (1 << DDISCE);
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_RSTI:
+						UHIEN  |= (1 << RSTE);
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_BCERRI:
+						OTGIEN |= (1 << BCERRE);
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_VBERRI:
+						OTGIEN |= (1 << VBERRE);
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_SRPI:
+						OTGIEN |= (1 << SRPE);
+						break;
+					#endif
+					default:
+						break;
+				}
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_INT_Disable(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_INT_Disable(const uint8_t Interrupt)
+			{
+				switch (Interrupt)
+				{
+					#if (defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR))
+					case USB_INT_VBUSTI:
+						USBCON &= ~(1 << VBUSTE);
+						break;
+					#endif
+					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+					case USB_INT_IDTI:
+						USBCON &= ~(1 << IDTE);
+						break;
+					#endif
+					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+					case USB_INT_WAKEUPI:
+						UDIEN  &= ~(1 << WAKEUPE);
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_SUSPI:
+						UDIEN  &= ~(1 << SUSPE);
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_EORSTI:
+						UDIEN  &= ~(1 << EORSTE);
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_SOFI:
+						UDIEN  &= ~(1 << SOFE);
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_RXSTPI:
+						UEIENX &= ~(1 << RXSTPE);
+						break;
+					#endif
+					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+					case USB_INT_HSOFI:
+						UHIEN  &= ~(1 << HSOFE);
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_DCONNI:
+						UHIEN  &= ~(1 << DCONNE);
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_DDISCI:
+						UHIEN  &= ~(1 << DDISCE);
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_RSTI:
+						UHIEN  &= ~(1 << RSTE);
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_BCERRI:
+						OTGIEN &= ~(1 << BCERRE);
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_VBERRI:
+						OTGIEN &= ~(1 << VBERRE);
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_SRPI:
+						OTGIEN &= ~(1 << SRPE);
+						break;
+					#endif
+					default:
+						break;
+				}
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_INT_Clear(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_INT_Clear(const uint8_t Interrupt)
+			{
+				switch (Interrupt)
+				{
+					#if (defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR))
+					case USB_INT_VBUSTI:
+						USBINT &= ~(1 << VBUSTI);
+						break;
+					#endif
+					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+					case USB_INT_IDTI:
+						USBINT &= ~(1 << IDTI);
+						break;
+					#endif
+					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+					case USB_INT_WAKEUPI:
+						UDINT  &= ~(1 << WAKEUPI);
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_SUSPI:
+						UDINT  &= ~(1 << SUSPI);
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_EORSTI:
+						UDINT  &= ~(1 << EORSTI);
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_SOFI:
+						UDINT  &= ~(1 << SOFI);
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_RXSTPI:
+						UEINTX &= ~(1 << RXSTPI);
+						break;
+					#endif
+					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+					case USB_INT_HSOFI:
+						UHINT  &= ~(1 << HSOFI);
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_DCONNI:
+						UHINT  &= ~(1 << DCONNI);
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_DDISCI:
+						UHINT  &= ~(1 << DDISCI);
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_RSTI:
+						UHINT  &= ~(1 << RSTI);
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_BCERRI:
+						OTGINT &= ~(1 << BCERRI);
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_VBERRI:
+						OTGINT &= ~(1 << VBERRI);
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_SRPI:
+						OTGINT &= ~(1 << SRPI);
+						break;
+					#endif
+					default:
+						break;
+				}
+			}
+
+			static inline bool USB_INT_IsEnabled(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline bool USB_INT_IsEnabled(const uint8_t Interrupt)
+			{
+				switch (Interrupt)
+				{
+					#if (defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR))
+					case USB_INT_VBUSTI:
+						return (USBCON & (1 << VBUSTE));
+					#endif
+					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+					case USB_INT_IDTI:
+						return (USBCON & (1 << IDTE));
+					#endif
+					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+					case USB_INT_WAKEUPI:
+						return (UDIEN  & (1 << WAKEUPE));
+					case USB_INT_SUSPI:
+						return (UDIEN  & (1 << SUSPE));
+					case USB_INT_EORSTI:
+						return (UDIEN  & (1 << EORSTE));
+					case USB_INT_SOFI:
+						return (UDIEN  & (1 << SOFE));
+					case USB_INT_RXSTPI:
+						return (UEIENX & (1 << RXSTPE));
+					#endif
+					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+					case USB_INT_HSOFI:
+						return (UHIEN  & (1 << HSOFE));
+					case USB_INT_DCONNI:
+						return (UHIEN  & (1 << DCONNE));
+					case USB_INT_DDISCI:
+						return (UHIEN  & (1 << DDISCE));
+					case USB_INT_RSTI:
+						return (UHIEN  & (1 << RSTE));
+					case USB_INT_BCERRI:
+						return (OTGIEN & (1 << BCERRE));
+					case USB_INT_VBERRI:
+						return (OTGIEN & (1 << VBERRE));
+					case USB_INT_SRPI:
+						return (OTGIEN & (1 << SRPE));
+					#endif
+					default:
+						return false;
+				}
+			}
+
+			static inline bool USB_INT_HasOccurred(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline bool USB_INT_HasOccurred(const uint8_t Interrupt)
+			{
+				switch (Interrupt)
+				{
+					#if (defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_6_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_7_AVR))
+					case USB_INT_VBUSTI:
+						return (USBINT & (1 << VBUSTI));
+					#endif
+					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+					case USB_INT_IDTI:
+						return (USBINT & (1 << IDTI));
+					#endif
+					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+					case USB_INT_WAKEUPI:
+						return (UDINT  & (1 << WAKEUPI));
+					case USB_INT_SUSPI:
+						return (UDINT  & (1 << SUSPI));
+					case USB_INT_EORSTI:
+						return (UDINT  & (1 << EORSTI));
+					case USB_INT_SOFI:
+						return (UDINT  & (1 << SOFI));
+					case USB_INT_RXSTPI:
+						return (UEINTX & (1 << RXSTPI));
+					#endif
+					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+					case USB_INT_HSOFI:
+						return (UHINT  & (1 << HSOFI));
+					case USB_INT_DCONNI:
+						return (UHINT  & (1 << DCONNI));
+					case USB_INT_DDISCI:
+						return (UHINT  & (1 << DDISCI));
+					case USB_INT_RSTI:
+						return (UHINT  & (1 << RSTI));
+					case USB_INT_BCERRI:
+						return (OTGINT & (1 << BCERRI));
+					case USB_INT_VBERRI:
+						return (OTGINT & (1 << VBERRI));
+					case USB_INT_SRPI:
+						return (OTGINT & (1 << SRPI));
+					#endif
+					default:
+						return false;
+				}
+			}
+
+		/* Includes: */
+			#include "../USBMode.h"
+			#include "../Events.h"
+			#include "../USBController.h"
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			void USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(void);
+			void USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(void);
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/ConfigDescriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/ConfigDescriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..da6812a32
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/ConfigDescriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,146 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "ConfigDescriptors.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(const uint8_t ConfigNumber,
+                                           uint16_t* const ConfigSizePtr,
+                                           void* const BufferPtr,
+                                           const uint16_t BufferSize)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+	uint8_t ConfigHeader[sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t)];
+
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_GetDescriptor,
+			.wValue        = ((DTYPE_Configuration << 8) | (ConfigNumber - 1)),
+			.wIndex        = 0,
+			.wLength       = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t),
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(ConfigHeader)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	*ConfigSizePtr = le16_to_cpu(DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigHeader, USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t)->TotalConfigurationSize);
+
+	if (*ConfigSizePtr > BufferSize)
+	  return HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow;
+
+	USB_ControlRequest.wLength = *ConfigSizePtr;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(BufferPtr)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(BufferPtr) != DTYPE_Configuration)
+	  return HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData;
+
+	return HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful;
+}
+#endif
+
+void USB_GetNextDescriptorOfType(uint16_t* const BytesRem,
+                                 void** const CurrConfigLoc,
+                                 const uint8_t Type)
+{
+	while (*BytesRem)
+	{
+		USB_GetNextDescriptor(BytesRem, CurrConfigLoc);
+
+		if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(*CurrConfigLoc) == Type)
+		  return;
+	}
+}
+
+void USB_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeBefore(uint16_t* const BytesRem,
+                                       void** const CurrConfigLoc,
+                                       const uint8_t Type,
+                                       const uint8_t BeforeType)
+{
+	while (*BytesRem)
+	{
+		USB_GetNextDescriptor(BytesRem, CurrConfigLoc);
+
+		if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(*CurrConfigLoc) == Type)
+		{
+			return;
+		}
+		else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(*CurrConfigLoc) == BeforeType)
+		{
+			*BytesRem = 0;
+			return;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+void USB_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeAfter(uint16_t* const BytesRem,
+                                      void** const CurrConfigLoc,
+                                      const uint8_t Type,
+                                      const uint8_t AfterType)
+{
+	USB_GetNextDescriptorOfType(BytesRem, CurrConfigLoc, AfterType);
+
+	if (*BytesRem)
+	  USB_GetNextDescriptorOfType(BytesRem, CurrConfigLoc, Type);
+}
+
+uint8_t USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(uint16_t* const BytesRem,
+                                  void** const CurrConfigLoc,
+                                  ConfigComparatorPtr_t const ComparatorRoutine)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	while (*BytesRem)
+	{
+		uint8_t* PrevDescLoc  = *CurrConfigLoc;
+		uint16_t PrevBytesRem = *BytesRem;
+
+		USB_GetNextDescriptor(BytesRem, CurrConfigLoc);
+
+		if ((ErrorCode = ComparatorRoutine(*CurrConfigLoc)) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound)
+		{
+			if (ErrorCode == DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail)
+			{
+				*CurrConfigLoc = PrevDescLoc;
+				*BytesRem      = PrevBytesRem;
+			}
+
+			return ErrorCode;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_EndOfDescriptor;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/ConfigDescriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/ConfigDescriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b4a9788c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/ConfigDescriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,287 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB Configuration Descriptor definitions.
+ *  \copydetails Group_ConfigDescriptorParser
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_StdDescriptors
+ *  \defgroup Group_ConfigDescriptorParser Configuration Descriptor Parser
+ *  \brief USB Configuration Descriptor definitions.
+ *
+ *  This section of the library gives a friendly API which can be used in host applications to easily
+ *  parse an attached device's configuration descriptor so that endpoint, interface and other descriptor
+ *  data can be extracted and used as needed.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __CONFIGDESCRIPTORS_H__
+#define __CONFIGDESCRIPTORS_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "USBMode.h"
+		#include "HostStandardReq.h"
+		#include "StdDescriptors.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Casts a pointer to a descriptor inside the configuration descriptor into a pointer to the given
+			 *  descriptor type.
+			 *
+			 *  Usage Example:
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t* CurrDescriptor = &ConfigDescriptor[0]; // Pointing to the configuration header
+			 *  USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t* ConfigHeaderPtr = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrDescriptor,
+			 *                                                           USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t);
+			 *
+			 *  // Can now access elements of the configuration header struct using the -> indirection operator
+			 *  \endcode
+			 */
+			#define DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(DescriptorPtr, Type) ((Type*)(DescriptorPtr))
+
+			/** Casts a pointer to a descriptor inside the configuration descriptor into the given descriptor
+			 *  type (as an actual struct instance rather than a pointer to a struct).
+			 *
+			 *  Usage Example:
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t* CurrDescriptor = &ConfigDescriptor[0]; // Pointing to the configuration header
+			 *  USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t ConfigHeader = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrDescriptor,
+			 *                                                       USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t);
+			 *
+			 *  // Can now access elements of the configuration header struct using the . operator
+			 *  \endcode
+			 */
+			#define DESCRIPTOR_CAST(DescriptorPtr, Type)  (*DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(DescriptorPtr, Type))
+
+			/** Returns the descriptor's type, expressed as the 8-bit type value in the header of the descriptor.
+			 *  This value's meaning depends on the descriptor's placement in the descriptor, but standard type
+			 *  values can be accessed in the \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t enum.
+			 */
+			#define DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(DescriptorPtr)    DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(DescriptorPtr, USB_Descriptor_Header_t)->Type
+
+			/** Returns the descriptor's size, expressed as the 8-bit value indicating the number of bytes. */
+			#define DESCRIPTOR_SIZE(DescriptorPtr)    DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(DescriptorPtr, USB_Descriptor_Header_t)->Size
+
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** Type define for a Configuration Descriptor comparator function (function taking a pointer to an array
+			 *  of type void, returning a uint8_t value).
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_GetNextDescriptorComp function for more details.
+			 */
+			typedef uint8_t (* ConfigComparatorPtr_t)(void*);
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible return codes of the \ref USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() function. */
+			enum USB_Host_GetConfigDescriptor_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful       = 0, /**< No error occurred while retrieving the configuration descriptor. */
+				HOST_GETCONFIG_DeviceDisconnect = 1, /**< The attached device was disconnected while retrieving the configuration
+				                                      *   descriptor.
+				                                      */
+				HOST_GETCONFIG_PipeError        = 2, /**< An error occurred in the pipe while sending the request. */
+				HOST_GETCONFIG_SetupStalled     = 3, /**< The attached device stalled the request to retrieve the configuration
+				                                      *   descriptor.
+				                                      */
+				HOST_GETCONFIG_SoftwareTimeOut  = 4, /**< The request or data transfer timed out. */
+				HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow     = 5, /**< The device's configuration descriptor is too large to fit into the allocated
+				                                      *   buffer.
+				                                      */
+				HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData      = 6, /**< The device returned invalid configuration descriptor data. */
+			};
+
+			/** Enum for return values of a descriptor comparator function. */
+			enum DSearch_Return_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found                = 0, /**< Current descriptor matches comparator criteria. */
+				DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail                 = 1, /**< No further descriptor could possibly match criteria, fail the search. */
+				DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound             = 2, /**< Current descriptor does not match comparator criteria. */
+			};
+
+			/** Enum for return values of \ref USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(). */
+			enum DSearch_Comp_Return_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found           = 0, /**< Configuration descriptor now points to descriptor which matches
+				                                             *   search criteria of the given comparator function. */
+				DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Fail            = 1, /**< Comparator function returned \ref DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail. */
+				DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_EndOfDescriptor = 2, /**< End of configuration descriptor reached before match found. */
+			};
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Retrieves the configuration descriptor data from an attached device via a standard request into a buffer,
+			 *  including validity and size checking to prevent a buffer overflow.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in]     ConfigNumber   Device configuration descriptor number to fetch from the device (usually set to 1 for
+			 *                                single configuration devices).
+			 *  \param[in,out] ConfigSizePtr  Pointer to a location for storing the retrieved configuration descriptor size.
+			 *  \param[out]    BufferPtr      Pointer to the buffer for storing the configuration descriptor data.
+			 *  \param[out]    BufferSize     Size of the allocated buffer where the configuration descriptor is to be stored.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_GetConfigDescriptor_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(const uint8_t ConfigNumber,
+			                                           uint16_t* const ConfigSizePtr,
+			                                           void* const BufferPtr,
+			                                           const uint16_t BufferSize) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+			/** Skips to the next sub-descriptor inside the configuration descriptor of the specified type value.
+			 *  The bytes remaining value is automatically decremented.
+			 *
+			 * \param[in,out] BytesRem       Pointer to the number of bytes remaining of the configuration descriptor.
+			 * \param[in,out] CurrConfigLoc  Pointer to the current descriptor inside the configuration descriptor.
+			 * \param[in]     Type           Descriptor type value to search for.
+			 */
+			void USB_GetNextDescriptorOfType(uint16_t* const BytesRem,
+			                                 void** const CurrConfigLoc,
+			                                 const uint8_t Type)
+			                                 ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** Skips to the next sub-descriptor inside the configuration descriptor of the specified type value,
+			 *  which must come before a descriptor of the second given type value. If the BeforeType type
+			 *  descriptor is reached first, the number of bytes remaining to process is set to zero and the
+			 *  function exits. The bytes remaining value is automatically decremented.
+			 *
+			 * \param[in,out] BytesRem       Pointer to the number of bytes remaining of the configuration descriptor.
+			 * \param[in,out] CurrConfigLoc  Pointer to the current descriptor inside the configuration descriptor.
+			 * \param[in]     Type           Descriptor type value to search for.
+			 * \param[in]     BeforeType     Descriptor type value which must not be reached before the given Type descriptor.
+			 */
+			void USB_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeBefore(uint16_t* const BytesRem,
+			                                       void** const CurrConfigLoc,
+			                                       const uint8_t Type,
+			                                       const uint8_t BeforeType)
+			                                       ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** Skips to the next sub-descriptor inside the configuration descriptor of the specified type value,
+			 *  which must come after a descriptor of the second given type value. The bytes remaining value is
+			 *  automatically decremented.
+			 *
+			 * \param[in,out] BytesRem       Pointer to the number of bytes remaining of the configuration descriptor.
+			 * \param[in,out] CurrConfigLoc  Pointer to the current descriptor inside the configuration descriptor.
+			 * \param[in]     Type           Descriptor type value to search for.
+			 * \param[in]     AfterType      Descriptor type value which must be reached before the given Type descriptor.
+			 */
+			void USB_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeAfter(uint16_t* const BytesRem,
+			                                      void** const CurrConfigLoc,
+			                                      const uint8_t Type,
+			                                      const uint8_t AfterType)
+			                                      ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+			/** Searches for the next descriptor in the given configuration descriptor using a pre-made comparator
+			 *  function. The routine updates the position and remaining configuration descriptor bytes values
+			 *  automatically. If a comparator routine fails a search, the descriptor pointer is retreated back
+			 *  so that the next descriptor search invocation will start from the descriptor which first caused the
+			 *  original search to fail. This behavior allows for one comparator to be used immediately after another
+			 *  has failed, starting the second search from the descriptor which failed the first.
+			 *
+			 *  Comparator functions should be standard functions which accept a pointer to the header of the current
+			 *  descriptor inside the configuration descriptor which is being compared, and should return a value from
+			 *  the \ref DSearch_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum as a uint8_t value.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function is available in USB Host mode only.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in,out] BytesRem           Pointer to an int storing the remaining bytes in the configuration descriptor.
+			 *  \param[in,out] CurrConfigLoc      Pointer to the current position in the configuration descriptor.
+			 *  \param[in]     ComparatorRoutine  Name of the comparator search function to use on the configuration descriptor.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Value of one of the members of the \ref DSearch_Comp_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 *
+			 *  Usage Example:
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t EndpointSearcher(void* CurrentDescriptor); // Comparator Prototype
+			 *
+			 *  uint8_t EndpointSearcher(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+			 *  {
+			 *     if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+			 *         return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+			 *     else
+			 *         return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+			 *  }
+			 *
+			 *  //...
+			 *
+			 *  // After retrieving configuration descriptor:
+			 *  if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&BytesRemaining, &CurrentConfigLoc, EndpointSearcher) ==
+			 *      Descriptor_Search_Comp_Found)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Do something with the endpoint descriptor
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 */
+			uint8_t USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(uint16_t* const BytesRem,
+			                                  void** const CurrConfigLoc,
+			                                  ConfigComparatorPtr_t const ComparatorRoutine) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1)
+			                                  ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Skips over the current sub-descriptor inside the configuration descriptor, so that the pointer then
+			    points to the next sub-descriptor. The bytes remaining value is automatically decremented.
+			 *
+			 * \param[in,out] BytesRem       Pointer to the number of bytes remaining of the configuration descriptor.
+			 * \param[in,out] CurrConfigLoc  Pointer to the current descriptor inside the configuration descriptor.
+			 */
+			static inline void USB_GetNextDescriptor(uint16_t* const BytesRem,
+			                                         void** CurrConfigLoc) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+			static inline void USB_GetNextDescriptor(uint16_t* const BytesRem,
+			                                         void** CurrConfigLoc)
+			{
+				uint16_t CurrDescriptorSize = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(*CurrConfigLoc, USB_Descriptor_Header_t).Size;
+
+				if (*BytesRem < CurrDescriptorSize)
+				  CurrDescriptorSize = *BytesRem;
+
+				*CurrConfigLoc  = (void*)((uintptr_t)*CurrConfigLoc + CurrDescriptorSize);
+				*BytesRem      -= CurrDescriptorSize;
+			}
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Device.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Device.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..10d739f56
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Device.h
@@ -0,0 +1,159 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Common USB Device definitions for all architectures.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Device
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USB
+ *  \defgroup Group_Device Device Management
+ *  \brief USB Device management definitions for USB device mode.
+ *
+ *  USB Device mode related definitions common to all architectures. This module contains definitions which
+ *  are used when the USB controller is initialized in device mode.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __USBDEVICE_H__
+#define __USBDEVICE_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "USBMode.h"
+		#include "StdDescriptors.h"
+		#include "USBInterrupt.h"
+		#include "Endpoint.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the various states of the USB Device state machine. Only some states are
+			 *  implemented in the LUFA library - other states are left to the user to implement.
+			 *
+			 *  For information on each possible USB device state, refer to the USB 2.0 specification.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_DeviceState, which stores the current device state machine state.
+			 */
+			enum USB_Device_States_t
+			{
+				DEVICE_STATE_Unattached                   = 0, /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
+				                                                *   that the device is not currently connected to a host.
+				                                                */
+				DEVICE_STATE_Powered                      = 1, /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
+				                                                *   that the device is connected to a host, but enumeration has not
+				                                                *   yet begun.
+				                                                */
+				DEVICE_STATE_Default                      = 2, /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
+				                                                *   that the device's USB bus has been reset by the host and it is
+				                                                *   now waiting for the host to begin the enumeration process.
+				                                                */
+				DEVICE_STATE_Addressed                    = 3, /**< Internally implemented by the library. This state indicates
+				                                                *   that the device has been addressed by the USB Host, but is not
+				                                                *   yet configured.
+				                                                */
+				DEVICE_STATE_Configured                   = 4, /**< May be implemented by the user project. This state indicates
+				                                                *   that the device has been enumerated by the host and is ready
+				                                                *   for USB communications to begin.
+				                                                */
+				DEVICE_STATE_Suspended                    = 5, /**< May be implemented by the user project. This state indicates
+				                                                *   that the USB bus has been suspended by the host, and the device
+				                                                *   should power down to a minimal power level until the bus is
+				                                                *   resumed.
+				                                                */
+			};
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Function to retrieve a given descriptor's size and memory location from the given descriptor type value,
+			 *  index and language ID. This function MUST be overridden in the user application (added with full, identical
+			 *  prototype and name so that the library can call it to retrieve descriptor data.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] wValue                  The type of the descriptor to retrieve in the upper byte, and the index in the
+			 *                                     lower byte (when more than one descriptor of the given type exists, such as the
+			 *                                     case of string descriptors). The type may be one of the standard types defined
+			 *                                     in the DescriptorTypes_t enum, or may be a class-specific descriptor type value.
+			 *  \param[in] wIndex                  The language ID of the string to return if the \c wValue type indicates
+			 *                                     \ref DTYPE_String, otherwise zero for standard descriptors, or as defined in a
+			 *                                     class-specific standards.
+			 *  \param[out] DescriptorAddress      Pointer to the descriptor in memory. This should be set by the routine to
+			 *                                     the address of the descriptor.
+			 *  \param[out] DescriptorMemorySpace  A value from the \ref USB_DescriptorMemorySpaces_t enum to indicate the memory
+			 *                                     space in which the descriptor is stored. This parameter does not exist when one
+			 *                                     of the \c USE_*_DESCRIPTORS compile time options is used, or on architectures which
+			 *                                     use a unified address space.
+			 *
+			 *  \note By default, the library expects all descriptors to be located in flash memory via the \c PROGMEM attribute.
+			 *        If descriptors should be located in RAM or EEPROM instead (to speed up access in the case of RAM, or to
+			 *        allow the descriptors to be changed dynamically at runtime) either the \c USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS or the
+			 *        \c USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS tokens may be defined in the project makefile and passed to the compiler by the -D
+			 *        switch.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Size in bytes of the descriptor if it exists, zero or \ref NO_DESCRIPTOR otherwise.
+			 */
+			uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+			                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+			                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress
+			#if (defined(ARCH_HAS_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)) && \
+			    !(defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS))
+			                                    , uint8_t* const DescriptorMemorySpace
+			#endif
+			                                    ) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+	/* Architecture Includes: */
+		#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+			#include "AVR8/Device_AVR8.h"
+		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
+			#include "UC3/Device_UC3.h"
+		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+			#include "XMEGA/Device_XMEGA.h"
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/DeviceStandardReq.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/DeviceStandardReq.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..adf615a9c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/DeviceStandardReq.c
@@ -0,0 +1,380 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_DEVICESTDREQ_C
+#include "DeviceStandardReq.h"
+
+uint8_t USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber;
+
+#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER)
+bool    USB_Device_CurrentlySelfPowered;
+#endif
+
+#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)
+bool    USB_Device_RemoteWakeupEnabled;
+#endif
+
+void USB_Device_ProcessControlRequest(void)
+{
+	#if defined(ARCH_BIG_ENDIAN)
+	USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType = Endpoint_Read_8();
+	USB_ControlRequest.bRequest      = Endpoint_Read_8();
+	USB_ControlRequest.wValue        = Endpoint_Read_16_LE();
+	USB_ControlRequest.wIndex        = Endpoint_Read_16_LE();
+	USB_ControlRequest.wLength       = Endpoint_Read_16_LE();
+	#else
+	uint8_t* RequestHeader = (uint8_t*)&USB_ControlRequest;
+
+	for (uint8_t RequestHeaderByte = 0; RequestHeaderByte < sizeof(USB_Request_Header_t); RequestHeaderByte++)
+	  *(RequestHeader++) = Endpoint_Read_8();
+	#endif
+
+	EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest();
+
+	if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())
+	{
+		uint8_t bmRequestType = USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType;
+
+		switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+		{
+			case REQ_GetStatus:
+				if ((bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE)) ||
+					(bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_ENDPOINT)))
+				{
+					USB_Device_GetStatus();
+				}
+
+				break;
+			case REQ_ClearFeature:
+			case REQ_SetFeature:
+				if ((bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE)) ||
+					(bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_ENDPOINT)))
+				{
+					USB_Device_ClearSetFeature();
+				}
+
+				break;
+			case REQ_SetAddress:
+				if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE))
+				  USB_Device_SetAddress();
+
+				break;
+			case REQ_GetDescriptor:
+				if ((bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE)) ||
+					(bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE)))
+				{
+					USB_Device_GetDescriptor();
+				}
+
+				break;
+			case REQ_GetConfiguration:
+				if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE))
+				  USB_Device_GetConfiguration();
+
+				break;
+			case REQ_SetConfiguration:
+				if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE))
+				  USB_Device_SetConfiguration();
+
+				break;
+
+			default:
+				break;
+		}
+	}
+
+	if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())
+	{
+		Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+		Endpoint_StallTransaction();
+	}
+}
+
+static void USB_Device_SetAddress(void)
+{
+	uint8_t DeviceAddress = (USB_ControlRequest.wValue & 0x7F);
+
+	USB_Device_SetDeviceAddress(DeviceAddress);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+	Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+
+	while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()));
+
+	USB_Device_EnableDeviceAddress(DeviceAddress);
+
+	USB_DeviceState = (DeviceAddress) ? DEVICE_STATE_Addressed : DEVICE_STATE_Default;
+}
+
+static void USB_Device_SetConfiguration(void)
+{
+	#if defined(FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS)
+	if ((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue > FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS)
+	  return;
+	#else
+	USB_Descriptor_Device_t* DevDescriptorPtr;
+
+	#if defined(ARCH_HAS_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE)
+		#if defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS)
+			#define MemoryAddressSpace  MEMSPACE_FLASH
+		#elif defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS)
+			#define MemoryAddressSpace  MEMSPACE_EEPROM
+		#elif defined(USE_SRAM_DESCRIPTORS)
+			#define MemoryAddressSpace  MEMSPACE_SRAM
+		#else
+			uint8_t MemoryAddressSpace;
+		#endif
+	#endif
+
+	if (CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor((DTYPE_Device << 8), 0, (void*)&DevDescriptorPtr
+	#if defined(ARCH_HAS_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE) && \
+	    !(defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS))
+	                               , &MemoryAddressSpace
+	#endif
+	                               ) == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+	{
+		return;
+	}
+
+	#if defined(ARCH_HAS_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE)
+	if (MemoryAddressSpace == MEMSPACE_FLASH)
+	{
+		if (((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue > pgm_read_byte(&DevDescriptorPtr->NumberOfConfigurations)))
+		  return;
+	}
+	else if (MemoryAddressSpace == MEMSPACE_EEPROM)
+	{
+		if (((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue > eeprom_read_byte(&DevDescriptorPtr->NumberOfConfigurations)))
+		  return;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		if ((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue > DevDescriptorPtr->NumberOfConfigurations)
+		  return;
+	}
+	#else
+	if ((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue > DevDescriptorPtr->NumberOfConfigurations)
+	  return;
+	#endif
+	#endif
+
+	Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+	USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber = (uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue;
+
+	Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+
+	if (USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber)
+	  USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Configured;
+	else
+	  USB_DeviceState = (USB_Device_IsAddressSet()) ? DEVICE_STATE_Configured : DEVICE_STATE_Powered;
+
+	EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged();
+}
+
+static void USB_Device_GetConfiguration(void)
+{
+	Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+}
+
+#if !defined(NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL) && (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL != NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+static void USB_Device_GetInternalSerialDescriptor(void)
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header;
+		uint16_t                UnicodeString[INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS / 4];
+	} SignatureDescriptor;
+
+	SignatureDescriptor.Header.Type = DTYPE_String;
+	SignatureDescriptor.Header.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS / 4);
+
+	USB_Device_GetSerialString(SignatureDescriptor.UnicodeString);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&SignatureDescriptor, sizeof(SignatureDescriptor));
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+}
+#endif
+
+static void USB_Device_GetDescriptor(void)
+{
+	const void* DescriptorPointer;
+	uint16_t    DescriptorSize;
+
+	#if defined(ARCH_HAS_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE) && \
+	    !(defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS))
+	uint8_t DescriptorAddressSpace;
+	#endif
+
+	#if !defined(NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL) && (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL != NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+	if (USB_ControlRequest.wValue == ((DTYPE_String << 8) | USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL))
+	{
+		USB_Device_GetInternalSerialDescriptor();
+		return;
+	}
+	#endif
+
+	if ((DescriptorSize = CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(USB_ControlRequest.wValue, USB_ControlRequest.wIndex,
+	                                                 &DescriptorPointer
+	#if defined(ARCH_HAS_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE) && \
+	    !(defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS))
+	                                                 , &DescriptorAddressSpace
+	#endif
+													 )) == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+	{
+		return;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+	#if defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS) || !defined(ARCH_HAS_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE)
+	Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(DescriptorPointer, DescriptorSize);
+	#elif defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS)
+	Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_LE(DescriptorPointer, DescriptorSize);
+	#elif defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS)
+	Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_LE(DescriptorPointer, DescriptorSize);
+	#else
+	if (DescriptorAddressSpace == MEMSPACE_FLASH)
+	  Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_LE(DescriptorPointer, DescriptorSize);
+	else if (DescriptorAddressSpace == MEMSPACE_EEPROM)
+	  Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_LE(DescriptorPointer, DescriptorSize);
+	else
+	  Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(DescriptorPointer, DescriptorSize);
+	#endif
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+}
+
+static void USB_Device_GetStatus(void)
+{
+	uint8_t CurrentStatus = 0;
+
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType)
+	{
+		case (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE):
+			#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER)
+			if (USB_Device_CurrentlySelfPowered)
+			  CurrentStatus |= FEATURE_SELFPOWERED_ENABLED;
+			#endif
+
+			#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)
+			if (USB_Device_RemoteWakeupEnabled)
+			  CurrentStatus |= FEATURE_REMOTE_WAKEUP_ENABLED;
+			#endif
+			break;
+		case (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_ENDPOINT):
+			#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
+			Endpoint_SelectEndpoint((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wIndex & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK);
+
+			CurrentStatus = Endpoint_IsStalled();
+
+			Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP);
+			#endif
+
+			break;
+		default:
+			return;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+	Endpoint_Write_16_LE(CurrentStatus);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+}
+
+static void USB_Device_ClearSetFeature(void)
+{
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT)
+	{
+		#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)
+		case REQREC_DEVICE:
+			if ((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue == FEATURE_SEL_DeviceRemoteWakeup)
+			  USB_Device_RemoteWakeupEnabled = (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest == REQ_SetFeature);
+			else
+			  return;
+
+			break;
+		#endif
+		#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
+		case REQREC_ENDPOINT:
+			if ((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wValue == FEATURE_SEL_EndpointHalt)
+			{
+				uint8_t EndpointIndex = ((uint8_t)USB_ControlRequest.wIndex & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK);
+
+				if (EndpointIndex == ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP)
+				  return;
+
+				Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(EndpointIndex);
+
+				if (Endpoint_IsEnabled())
+				{
+					if (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest == REQ_SetFeature)
+					{
+						Endpoint_StallTransaction();
+					}
+					else
+					{
+						Endpoint_ClearStall();
+						Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(EndpointIndex);
+						Endpoint_ResetDataToggle();
+					}
+				}
+			}
+
+			break;
+		#endif
+		default:
+			return;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+	Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/DeviceStandardReq.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/DeviceStandardReq.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..396e20554
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/DeviceStandardReq.h
@@ -0,0 +1,158 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB device standard request management.
+ *
+ *  This file contains the function prototypes necessary for the processing of incoming standard control requests
+ *  when the library is in USB device mode.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __DEVICESTDREQ_H__
+#define __DEVICESTDREQ_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "USBMode.h"
+		#include "StdDescriptors.h"
+		#include "Events.h"
+		#include "StdRequestType.h"
+		#include "USBTask.h"
+		#include "USBController.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Enums: */
+			#if defined(ARCH_HAS_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Enum for the possible descriptor memory spaces, for the \c MemoryAddressSpace parameter of the
+				 *  \ref CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor() function. This can be used when none of the \c USE_*_DESCRIPTORS
+				 *  compile time options are used, to indicate in which memory space the descriptor is stored.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_Device
+				 */
+				enum USB_DescriptorMemorySpaces_t
+				{
+					#if defined(ARCH_HAS_FLASH_ADDRESS_SPACE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+					MEMSPACE_FLASH    = 0, /**< Indicates the requested descriptor is located in FLASH memory. */
+					#endif
+					#if defined(ARCH_HAS_EEPROM_ADDRESS_SPACE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+					MEMSPACE_EEPROM   = 1, /**< Indicates the requested descriptor is located in EEPROM memory. */
+					#endif
+					MEMSPACE_RAM      = 2, /**< Indicates the requested descriptor is located in RAM memory. */
+				};
+			#endif
+
+		/* Global Variables: */
+			/** Indicates the currently set configuration number of the device. USB devices may have several
+			 *  different configurations which the host can select between; this indicates the currently selected
+			 *  value, or 0 if no configuration has been selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
+			 *             changed in value.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_Device
+			 */
+			extern uint8_t USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber;
+
+			#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)
+				/** Indicates if the host is currently allowing the device to issue remote wakeup events. If this
+				 *  flag is cleared, the device should not issue remote wakeup events to the host.
+				 *
+				 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
+				 *             changed in value.
+				 *
+				 *  \note To reduce FLASH usage of the compiled applications where Remote Wakeup is not supported,
+				 *        this global and the underlying management code can be disabled by defining the
+				 *        \c NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP token in the project makefile and passing it to the compiler via
+				 *        the -D switch.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_Device
+				 */
+				extern bool USB_Device_RemoteWakeupEnabled;
+			#endif
+
+			#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER)
+				/** Indicates if the device is currently being powered by its own power supply, rather than being
+				 *  powered by the host's USB supply. This flag should remain cleared if the device does not
+				 *  support self powered mode, as indicated in the device descriptors.
+				 *
+				 *  \ingroup Group_Device
+				 */
+				extern bool USB_Device_CurrentlySelfPowered;
+			#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		#if defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS)
+			#error USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS and USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS are mutually exclusive.
+		#elif defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS)
+			#error USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS and USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS are mutually exclusive.
+		#elif defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS)
+			#error USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS and USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS are mutually exclusive.
+		#elif defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS)
+			#error Only one of the USE_*_DESCRIPTORS modes should be selected.
+		#endif
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			void USB_Device_ProcessControlRequest(void);
+
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_DEVICESTDREQ_C)
+				static void USB_Device_SetAddress(void);
+				static void USB_Device_SetConfiguration(void);
+				static void USB_Device_GetConfiguration(void);
+				static void USB_Device_GetDescriptor(void);
+				static void USB_Device_GetStatus(void);
+				static void USB_Device_ClearSetFeature(void);
+
+				#if !defined(NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL) && (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL != NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+					static void USB_Device_GetInternalSerialDescriptor(void);
+				#endif
+			#endif
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Endpoint.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Endpoint.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bf41376f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Endpoint.h
@@ -0,0 +1,130 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB Endpoint definitions for all architectures.
+ *  \copydetails Group_EndpointManagement
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_EndpointManagement
+ *  \defgroup Group_EndpointRW Endpoint Data Reading and Writing
+ *  \brief Endpoint data read/write definitions.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing from and to endpoints.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_EndpointRW
+ *  \defgroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW Read/Write of Primitive Data Types
+ *  \brief Endpoint data primitive read/write definitions.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of primitive data types
+ *  from and to endpoints.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_EndpointManagement
+ *  \defgroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement Endpoint Packet Management
+ *  \brief USB Endpoint package management definitions.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to packet management of endpoints.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USB
+ *  \defgroup Group_EndpointManagement Endpoint Management
+ *  \brief Endpoint management definitions.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros and enums related to endpoint management when in USB Device mode. This
+ *  module contains the endpoint management macros, as well as endpoint interrupt and data
+ *  send/receive functions for various data types.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __ENDPOINT_H__
+#define __ENDPOINT_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "USBMode.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** Type define for a endpoint table entry, used to configure endpoints in groups via
+			 *  \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable().
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint8_t  Address; /**< Address of the endpoint to configure, or zero if the table entry is to be unused. */
+				uint16_t Size; /**< Size of the endpoint bank, in bytes. */
+				uint8_t  Type; /**< Type of the endpoint, a \c EP_TYPE_* mask. */
+				uint8_t  Banks; /**< Number of hardware banks to use for the endpoint. */
+			} USB_Endpoint_Table_t;
+
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Endpoint number mask, for masking against endpoint addresses to retrieve the endpoint's
+			 *  numerical address in the device.
+			 */
+			#define ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK                     0x0F
+
+			/** Endpoint address for the default control endpoint, which always resides in address 0. This is
+			 *  defined for convenience to give more readable code when used with the endpoint macros.
+			 */
+			#define ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP                      0
+
+	/* Architecture Includes: */
+		#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+			#include "AVR8/Endpoint_AVR8.h"
+		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
+			#include "UC3/Endpoint_UC3.h"
+		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+			#include "XMEGA/Endpoint_XMEGA.h"
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/EndpointStream.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/EndpointStream.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5675c323c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/EndpointStream.h
@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Endpoint data stream transmission and reception management.
+ *  \copydetails Group_EndpointStreamRW
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_EndpointRW
+ *  \defgroup Group_EndpointStreamRW Read/Write of Multi-Byte Streams
+ *  \brief Endpoint data stream transmission and reception management.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of data streams from
+ *  and to endpoints.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __ENDPOINT_STREAM_H__
+#define __ENDPOINT_STREAM_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "USBMode.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible error return codes of the \c Endpoint_*_Stream_* functions. */
+			enum Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError            = 0, /**< Command completed successfully, no error. */
+				ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_EndpointStalled    = 1, /**< The endpoint was stalled during the stream
+				                                           *   transfer by the host or device.
+				                                           */
+				ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected = 2, /**< Device was disconnected from the host during
+				                                           *   the transfer.
+				                                           */
+				ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_BusSuspended       = 3, /**< The USB bus has been suspended by the host and
+				                                           *   no USB endpoint traffic can occur until the bus
+				                                           *   has resumed.
+				                                           */
+				ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_Timeout            = 4, /**< The host failed to accept or send the next packet
+				                                           *   within the software timeout period set by the
+				                                           *   \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro.
+				                                           */
+				ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer = 5, /**< Indicates that the endpoint bank became full or empty before
+				                                           *   the complete contents of the current stream could be
+				                                           *   transferred. The endpoint stream function should be called
+				                                           *   again to process the next chunk of data in the transfer.
+				                                           */
+			};
+
+			/** Enum for the possible error return codes of the \c Endpoint_*_Control_Stream_* functions. */
+			enum Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_NoError            = 0, /**< Command completed successfully, no error. */
+				ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_HostAborted        = 1, /**< The aborted the transfer prematurely. */
+				ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected = 2, /**< Device was disconnected from the host during
+				                                            *   the transfer.
+				                                            */
+				ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended       = 3, /**< The USB bus has been suspended by the host and
+				                                            *   no USB endpoint traffic can occur until the bus
+				                                            *   has resumed.
+				                                            */
+			};
+
+	/* Architecture Includes: */
+		#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+			#include "AVR8/EndpointStream_AVR8.h"
+		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
+			#include "UC3/EndpointStream_UC3.h"
+		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+			#include "XMEGA/EndpointStream_XMEGA.h"
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Events.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Events.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a63b002fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Events.c
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_EVENTS_C
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "Events.h"
+
+void USB_Event_Stub(void)
+{
+
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Events.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Events.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9c85112fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Events.h
@@ -0,0 +1,372 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB Event management definitions.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Events
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USB
+ *  \defgroup Group_Events USB Events
+ *  \brief USB Event management definitions.
+ *
+ *  This module contains macros and functions relating to the management of library events, which are small
+ *  pieces of code similar to ISRs which are run when a given condition is met. Each event can be fired from
+ *  multiple places in the user or library code, which may or may not be inside an ISR, thus each handler
+ *  should be written to be as small and fast as possible to prevent possible problems.
+ *
+ *  Events can be hooked by the user application by declaring a handler function with the same name and parameters
+ *  listed here. If an event with no user-associated handler is fired within the library, it by default maps to an
+ *  internal empty stub function.
+ *
+ *  Each event must only have one associated event handler, but can be raised by multiple sources by calling the
+ *  event handler function (with any required event parameters).
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __USBEVENTS_H__
+#define __USBEVENTS_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "USBMode.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Pseudo-Functions for Doxygen: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_EVENTS_C) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			/** Event for USB mode pin level change. This event fires when the USB interface is set to dual role
+			 *  mode, and the UID pin level has changed to indicate a new mode (device or host). This event fires
+			 *  before the mode is switched to the newly indicated mode but after the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect
+			 *  event has fired (if disconnected before the role change).
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event only exists on microcontrollers that support dual role USB modes.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event does not exist if the \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY or \c USB_HOST_ONLY tokens have been supplied
+			 *        to the compiler (see \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
+			 */
+			void EVENT_USB_UIDChange(void);
+
+			/** Event for USB host error. This event fires when a hardware fault has occurred whilst the USB
+			 *  interface is in host mode.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] ErrorCode  Error code indicating the failure reason, a value in \ref USB_Host_ErrorCodes_t.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event only exists on microcontrollers that supports USB host mode.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event does not exist if the \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
+			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
+			 */
+			void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+
+			/** Event for USB device attachment. This event fires when a the USB interface is in host mode, and
+			 *  a USB device has been connected to the USB interface. This is interrupt driven, thus fires before
+			 *  the standard \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Connect() event and so can be used to programmatically start the USB
+			 *  management task to reduce CPU consumption.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event only exists on microcontrollers that supports USB host mode.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event does not exist if the \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
+			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_USBTask() for more information on the USB management task and reducing CPU usage.
+			 */
+			void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+
+			/** Event for USB device removal. This event fires when a the USB interface is in host mode, and
+			 *  a USB device has been removed the USB interface whether or not it has been enumerated. This
+			 *  can be used to programmatically stop the USB management task to reduce CPU consumption.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event only exists on microcontrollers that supports USB host mode.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event does not exist if the \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
+			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_USBTask() for more information on the USB management task and reducing CPU usage.
+			 */
+			void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+
+			/** Event for USB device enumeration failure. This event fires when a the USB interface is
+			 *  in host mode, and an attached USB device has failed to enumerate completely.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] ErrorCode     Error code indicating the failure reason, a value in
+			 *                           \ref USB_Host_EnumerationErrorCodes_t.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] SubErrorCode  Sub error code indicating the reason for failure - for example, if the
+			 *                           ErrorCode parameter indicates a control error, this will give the error
+			 *                           code returned by the \ref USB_Host_SendControlRequest() function.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event only exists on microcontrollers that supports USB host mode.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event does not exist if the \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
+			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
+			 */
+			void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+			                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+
+			/** Event for USB device enumeration completion. This event fires when a the USB interface is
+			 *  in host mode and an attached USB device has been completely enumerated and is ready to be
+			 *  controlled by the user application.
+			 *
+			 *  This event is time-critical; exceeding OS-specific delays within this event handler (typically of around
+			 *  1 second) when a transaction is waiting to be processed by the device will prevent break communications
+			 *  and cause the host to reset the USB bus.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event only exists on microcontrollers that supports USB host mode.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event does not exist if the \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
+			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
+			 */
+			void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+			/** Event for USB Start Of Frame detection, when enabled. This event fires at the start of each USB
+			 *  frame, once per millisecond, and is synchronized to the USB bus. This can be used as an accurate
+			 *  millisecond timer source when the USB bus is not suspended while in host mode.
+			 *
+			 *  This event is time-critical; it is run once per millisecond and thus long handlers will significantly
+			 *  degrade device performance. This event should only be enabled when needed to reduce device wake-ups.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event is not normally active - it must be manually enabled and disabled via the
+			 *        \ref USB_Host_EnableSOFEvents() and \ref USB_Host_DisableSOFEvents() commands after enumeration of
+			 *        a USB device.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event does not exist if the \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
+			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
+			 */
+			void EVENT_USB_Host_StartOfFrame(void);
+
+			/** Event for USB device connection. This event fires when the microcontroller is in USB Device mode
+			 *  and the device is connected to a USB host, beginning the enumeration process measured by a rising
+			 *  level on the microcontroller's VBUS sense pin.
+			 *
+			 *  This event is time-critical; exceeding OS-specific delays within this event handler (typically of around
+			 *  two seconds) will prevent the device from enumerating correctly.
+			 *
+			 *  \attention This event may fire multiple times during device enumeration on the microcontrollers with limited USB controllers
+			 *             if \c NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT is not defined.
+			 *
+			 *  \note For the microcontrollers with limited USB controller functionality, VBUS sensing is not available.
+			 *        this means that the current connection state is derived from the bus suspension and wake up events by default,
+			 *        which is not always accurate (host may suspend the bus while still connected). If the actual connection state
+			 *        needs to be determined, VBUS should be routed to an external pin, and the auto-detect behavior turned off by
+			 *        passing the \c NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT token to the compiler via the -D switch at compile time. The connection
+			 *        and disconnection events may be manually fired, and the \ref USB_DeviceState global changed manually.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref Group_USBManagement for more information on the USB management task and reducing CPU usage.
+			 */
+			void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+
+			/** Event for USB device disconnection. This event fires when the microcontroller is in USB Device mode and the device is
+			 *  disconnected from a host, measured by a falling level on the microcontroller's VBUS sense pin.
+			 *
+			 *  \attention This event may fire multiple times during device enumeration on the microcontrollers with limited USB controllers
+			 *             if \c NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT is not defined.
+			 *
+			 *  \note For the microcontrollers with limited USB controllers, VBUS sense is not available to the USB controller.
+			 *        this means that the current connection state is derived from the bus suspension and wake up events by default,
+			 *        which is not always accurate (host may suspend the bus while still connected). If the actual connection state
+			 *        needs to be determined, VBUS should be routed to an external pin, and the auto-detect behavior turned off by
+			 *        passing the \c NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT token to the compiler via the -D switch at compile time. The connection
+			 *        and disconnection events may be manually fired, and the \ref USB_DeviceState global changed manually.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref Group_USBManagement for more information on the USB management task and reducing CPU usage.
+			 */
+			void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+
+			/** Event for control requests. This event fires when a the USB host issues a control request
+			 *  to the mandatory device control endpoint (of address 0). This may either be a standard
+			 *  request that the library may have a handler code for internally, or a class specific request
+			 *  issued to the device which must be handled appropriately. If a request is not processed in the
+			 *  user application via this event, it will be passed to the library for processing internally
+			 *  if a suitable handler exists.
+			 *
+			 *  This event is time-critical; each packet within the request transaction must be acknowledged or
+			 *  sent within 50ms or the host will abort the transfer.
+			 *
+			 *  The library internally handles all standard control requests with the exceptions of SYNC FRAME,
+			 *  SET DESCRIPTOR and SET INTERFACE. These and all other non-standard control requests will be left
+			 *  for the user to process via this event if desired. If not handled in the user application or by
+			 *  the library internally, unknown requests are automatically STALLed.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event does not exist if the \c USB_HOST_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
+			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note Requests should be handled in the same manner as described in the USB 2.0 Specification,
+			 *        or appropriate class specification. In all instances, the library has already read the
+			 *        request SETUP parameters into the \ref USB_ControlRequest structure which should then be used
+			 *        by the application to determine how to handle the issued request.
+			 */
+			void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+			/** Event for USB configuration number changed. This event fires when a the USB host changes the
+			 *  selected configuration number while in device mode. This event should be hooked in device
+			 *  applications to create the endpoints and configure the device for the selected configuration.
+			 *
+			 *  This event is time-critical; exceeding OS-specific delays within this event handler (typically of around
+			 *  one second) will prevent the device from enumerating correctly.
+			 *
+			 *  This event fires after the value of \ref USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber has been changed.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event does not exist if the \c USB_HOST_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
+			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
+			 */
+			void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+
+			/** Event for USB suspend. This event fires when a the USB host suspends the device by halting its
+			 *  transmission of Start Of Frame pulses to the device. This is generally hooked in order to move
+			 *  the device over to a low power state until the host wakes up the device. If the USB interface is
+			 *  enumerated with the \ref USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL option set, the library will automatically suspend the
+			 *  USB PLL before the event is fired to save power.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event does not exist if the \c USB_HOST_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
+			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event does not exist on the microcontrollers with limited USB VBUS sensing abilities
+			 *        when the \c NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT compile time token is not set - see
+			 *        \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref EVENT_USB_Device_WakeUp() event for accompanying Wake Up event.
+			 */
+			void EVENT_USB_Device_Suspend(void);
+
+			/** Event for USB wake up. This event fires when a the USB interface is suspended while in device
+			 *  mode, and the host wakes up the device by supplying Start Of Frame pulses. This is generally
+			 *  hooked to pull the user application out of a low power state and back into normal operating
+			 *  mode. If the USB interface is enumerated with the \ref USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL option set, the library
+			 *  will automatically restart the USB PLL before the event is fired.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event does not exist if the \c USB_HOST_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
+			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event does not exist on the microcontrollers with limited USB VBUS sensing abilities
+			 *        when the \c NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT compile time token is not set - see
+			 *        \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Suspend() event for accompanying Suspend event.
+			 */
+			void EVENT_USB_Device_WakeUp(void);
+
+			/** Event for USB interface reset. This event fires when the USB interface is in device mode, and
+			 *  a the USB host requests that the device reset its interface. This event fires after the control
+			 *  endpoint has been automatically configured by the library.
+			 *
+			 *  This event is time-critical; exceeding OS-specific delays within this event handler (typically of around
+			 *  two seconds) will prevent the device from enumerating correctly.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event does not exist if the \c USB_HOST_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
+			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
+			 */
+			void EVENT_USB_Device_Reset(void);
+
+			/** Event for USB Start Of Frame detection, when enabled. This event fires at the start of each USB
+			 *  frame, once per millisecond, and is synchronized to the USB bus. This can be used as an accurate
+			 *  millisecond timer source when the USB bus is enumerated in device mode to a USB host.
+			 *
+			 *  This event is time-critical; it is run once per millisecond and thus long handlers will significantly
+			 *  degrade device performance. This event should only be enabled when needed to reduce device wake-ups.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre This event is not normally active - it must be manually enabled and disabled via the
+			 *       \ref USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents() and \ref USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents() commands after enumeration.
+			 *       \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This event does not exist if the \c USB_HOST_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see
+			 *        \ref Group_USBManagement documentation).
+			 */
+			void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_EVENTS_C)
+				void USB_Event_Stub(void) ATTR_CONST;
+
+				#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+					void EVENT_USB_UIDChange(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
+				#endif
+
+				#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+					void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
+					void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
+					void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
+					void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
+					void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                                                const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+					                                            ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
+					void EVENT_USB_Host_StartOfFrame(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
+				#endif
+
+				#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+					void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
+					void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
+					void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
+					void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
+					void EVENT_USB_Device_Suspend(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
+					void EVENT_USB_Device_WakeUp(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
+					void EVENT_USB_Device_Reset(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
+					void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub);
+				#endif
+			#endif
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Host.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Host.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6146cc5ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Host.h
@@ -0,0 +1,139 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Common USB Host definitions for all architectures.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Host
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USB
+ *  \defgroup Group_Host Host Management
+ *  \brief USB Host management definitions for USB host mode.
+ *
+ *  USB Host mode related macros and enums. This module contains macros and enums which are used when
+ *  the USB controller is initialized in host mode.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __USBHOST_H__
+#define __USBHOST_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "USBMode.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the various states of the USB Host state machine.
+			 *
+			 *  For information on each possible USB host state, refer to the USB 2.0 specification.
+			 *  Several of the USB host states are broken up further into multiple smaller sub-states,
+			 *  so that they can be internally implemented inside the library in an efficient manner.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_HostState, which stores the current host state machine state.
+			 */
+			enum USB_Host_States_t
+			{
+				HOST_STATE_WaitForDevice                = 0,  /**< This state indicates that the stack is waiting for an interval
+				                                               *   to elapse before continuing with the next step of the device
+				                                               *   enumeration process.
+				                                               */
+				HOST_STATE_Unattached                   = 1,  /**< This state indicates that the host state machine is waiting for
+				                                               *   a device to be attached so that it can start the enumeration process.
+				                                               */
+				HOST_STATE_Powered                      = 2,  /**< This state indicates that a device has been attached, and the
+				                                               *   library's internals are being configured to begin the enumeration
+				                                               *   process.
+				                                               */
+				HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForDeviceSettle  = 3,  /**< This state indicates that the stack is waiting for the initial
+				                                               *   settling period to elapse before beginning the enumeration process.
+				                                               */
+				HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForConnect       = 4,  /**< This state indicates that the stack is waiting for a connection event
+				                                               *   from the USB controller to indicate a valid USB device has been attached
+				                                               *   to the bus and is ready to be enumerated.
+				                                               */
+				HOST_STATE_Powered_DoReset              = 5,  /**< This state indicates that a valid USB device has been attached, and that
+				                                               *   it will now be reset to ensure it is ready for enumeration.
+				                                               */
+				HOST_STATE_Powered_ConfigPipe           = 6,  /**< This state indicates that the attached device is currently powered and
+				                                               *   reset, and that the control pipe is now being configured by the stack.
+				                                               */
+				HOST_STATE_Default                      = 7,  /**< This state indicates that the stack is currently retrieving the control
+				                                               *   endpoint's size from the device, so that the control pipe can be altered
+				                                               *   to match.
+				                                               */
+				HOST_STATE_Default_PostReset            = 8,  /**< This state indicates that the control pipe is being reconfigured to match
+				                                               *   the retrieved control endpoint size from the device, and the device's USB
+				                                               *   bus address is being set.
+				                                               */
+				HOST_STATE_Default_PostAddressSet       = 9,  /**< This state indicates that the device's address has now been set, and the
+				                                               *   stack is has now completed the device enumeration process. This state causes
+				                                               *   the stack to change the current USB device address to that set for the
+				                                               *   connected device, before progressing to the \ref HOST_STATE_Addressed state
+				                                               *   ready for use in the user application.
+				                                               */
+				HOST_STATE_Addressed                    = 10, /**< Indicates that the device has been enumerated and addressed, and is now waiting
+				                                               *   for the user application to configure the device ready for use.
+				                                               */
+				HOST_STATE_Configured                   = 11, /**< Indicates that the device has been configured into a valid device configuration,
+				                                               *   ready for general use by the user application.
+				                                               */
+			};
+
+	/* Architecture Includes: */
+		#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+			#include "AVR8/Host_AVR8.h"
+		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
+			#include "UC3/Host_UC3.h"
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/HostStandardReq.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/HostStandardReq.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4a21ce73c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/HostStandardReq.c
@@ -0,0 +1,322 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_HOSTSTDREQ_C
+#include "HostStandardReq.h"
+
+uint8_t USB_Host_ConfigurationNumber;
+
+static uint8_t USB_Host_SendControlRequest_PRV(void* const BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint8_t* DataStream   = (uint8_t*)BufferPtr;
+	uint8_t  ReturnStatus = HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+	uint16_t DataLen      = USB_ControlRequest.wLength;
+
+	USB_Host_ResumeBus();
+
+	if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitMS(1)) != HOST_WAITERROR_Successful)
+	  return ReturnStatus;
+
+	Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP);
+	Pipe_ClearError();
+
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	#if defined(ARCH_BIG_ENDIAN)
+	Pipe_Write_8(USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType);
+	Pipe_Write_8(USB_ControlRequest.bRequest);
+	Pipe_Write_16_LE(USB_ControlRequest.wValue);
+	Pipe_Write_16_LE(USB_ControlRequest.wIndex);
+	Pipe_Write_16_LE(USB_ControlRequest.wLength);
+	#else
+	uint8_t* HeaderStream = (uint8_t*)&USB_ControlRequest;
+
+	for (uint8_t HeaderByte = 0; HeaderByte < sizeof(USB_Request_Header_t); HeaderByte++)
+	  Pipe_Write_8(*(HeaderStream++));
+	#endif
+
+	Pipe_ClearSETUP();
+
+	if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitForIOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_SetupSent)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	  return ReturnStatus;
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitMS(1)) != HOST_WAITERROR_Successful)
+	  return ReturnStatus;
+
+	if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & CONTROL_REQTYPE_DIRECTION) == REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST)
+	{
+		Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_IN);
+
+		if (DataStream != NULL)
+		{
+			while (DataLen)
+			{
+				Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+				if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitForIOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_InReceived)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+				  return ReturnStatus;
+
+				if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe()))
+				  DataLen = 0;
+
+				while (Pipe_BytesInPipe() && DataLen)
+				{
+					*(DataStream++) = Pipe_Read_8();
+					DataLen--;
+				}
+
+				Pipe_Freeze();
+				Pipe_ClearIN();
+			}
+		}
+
+		Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_OUT);
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitForIOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_OutReady)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+		  return ReturnStatus;
+
+		Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+		if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitForIOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_OutReady)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+		  return ReturnStatus;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		if (DataStream != NULL)
+		{
+			Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_OUT);
+			Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+			while (DataLen)
+			{
+				if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitForIOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_OutReady)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+				  return ReturnStatus;
+
+				while (DataLen && (Pipe_BytesInPipe() < USB_Host_ControlPipeSize))
+				{
+					Pipe_Write_8(*(DataStream++));
+					DataLen--;
+				}
+
+				Pipe_ClearOUT();
+			}
+
+			if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitForIOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_OutReady)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			  return ReturnStatus;
+
+			Pipe_Freeze();
+		}
+
+		Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_IN);
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitForIOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_InReceived)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+		  return ReturnStatus;
+
+		Pipe_ClearIN();
+	}
+
+	return ReturnStatus;
+}
+
+static uint8_t USB_Host_WaitForIOS(const uint8_t WaitType)
+{
+	#if (USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS < 0xFF)
+	uint8_t  TimeoutCounter = USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS;
+	#else
+	uint16_t TimeoutCounter = USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS;
+	#endif
+
+	while (!(((WaitType == USB_HOST_WAITFOR_SetupSent)  && Pipe_IsSETUPSent())  ||
+	         ((WaitType == USB_HOST_WAITFOR_InReceived) && Pipe_IsINReceived()) ||
+	         ((WaitType == USB_HOST_WAITFOR_OutReady)   && Pipe_IsOUTReady())))
+	{
+		uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+		if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_WaitMS(1)) != HOST_WAITERROR_Successful)
+		  return ErrorCode;
+
+		if (!(TimeoutCounter--))
+		  return HOST_SENDCONTROL_SoftwareTimeOut;
+	}
+
+	return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful;
+}
+
+uint8_t USB_Host_SendControlRequest(void* const BufferPtr)
+{
+	bool BusSuspended    = USB_Host_IsBusSuspended();
+	uint8_t ReturnStatus = USB_Host_SendControlRequest_PRV(BufferPtr);
+
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+
+	if (BusSuspended)
+	  USB_Host_SuspendBus();
+
+	Pipe_ResetPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	return ReturnStatus;
+}
+
+uint8_t USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(const uint8_t ConfigNumber)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_SetConfiguration,
+			.wValue        = ConfigNumber,
+			.wIndex        = 0,
+			.wLength       = 0,
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) == HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		USB_Host_ConfigurationNumber = ConfigNumber;
+		USB_HostState                = (ConfigNumber) ? HOST_STATE_Configured : HOST_STATE_Addressed;
+	}
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceConfiguration(uint8_t* const ConfigNumber)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_GetConfiguration,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = 0,
+			.wLength       = sizeof(uint8_t),
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(ConfigNumber);
+}
+
+uint8_t USB_Host_GetDescriptor(const uint8_t Type,
+                               const uint8_t Index,
+                               void* const Buffer,
+                               const uint8_t BufferLength)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_GetDescriptor,
+			.wValue        = (((uint16_t)Type << 8) | Index),
+			.wIndex        = 0,
+			.wLength       = BufferLength,
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Buffer);
+}
+
+uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceStatus(uint8_t* const FeatureStatus)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_GetStatus,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = 0,
+			.wLength       = 0,
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(FeatureStatus);
+}
+
+uint8_t USB_Host_ClearEndpointStall(const uint8_t EndpointAddress)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_ENDPOINT),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_ClearFeature,
+			.wValue        = FEATURE_SEL_EndpointHalt,
+			.wIndex        = EndpointAddress,
+			.wLength       = 0,
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);
+}
+
+uint8_t USB_Host_SetInterfaceAltSetting(const uint8_t InterfaceIndex,
+                                        const uint8_t AltSetting)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_SetInterface,
+			.wValue        = AltSetting,
+			.wIndex        = InterfaceIndex,
+			.wLength       = 0,
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);
+}
+
+uint8_t USB_Host_GetInterfaceAltSetting(const uint8_t InterfaceIndex,
+                                        uint8_t* const AltSetting)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+		{
+			.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+			.bRequest      = REQ_GetInterface,
+			.wValue        = 0,
+			.wIndex        = InterfaceIndex,
+			.wLength       = sizeof(uint8_t),
+		};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(AltSetting);
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/HostStandardReq.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/HostStandardReq.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bd67bcb9e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/HostStandardReq.h
@@ -0,0 +1,292 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB host standard request management.
+ *
+ *  This file contains the function prototypes necessary for the issuing of outgoing standard control requests
+ *  when the library is in USB host mode.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __HOSTSTDREQ_H__
+#define __HOSTSTDREQ_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "USBMode.h"
+		#include "StdRequestType.h"
+		#include "USBController.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			#if !defined(USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Constant for the maximum software timeout period of sent USB control transactions to an attached
+				 *  device. If a device fails to respond to a sent control request within this period, the
+				 *  library will return a timeout error code.
+				 *
+				 *  This value may be overridden in the user project makefile as the value of the
+				 *  \ref USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS token, and passed to the compiler using the -D switch.
+				 */
+				#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS                1000
+			#endif
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the \ref USB_Host_SendControlRequest() return code, indicating the reason for the error
+			 *  if the transfer of the request is unsuccessful.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq
+			 */
+			enum USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful         = 0, /**< No error occurred in the request transfer. */
+				HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnected = 1, /**< The attached device was disconnected during the
+				                                        *     request transfer.
+				                                        */
+				HOST_SENDCONTROL_PipeError          = 2, /**< An error occurred in the pipe while sending the request. */
+				HOST_SENDCONTROL_SetupStalled       = 3, /**< The attached device stalled the request, usually
+				                                          *   indicating that the request is unsupported on the device.
+				                                          */
+				HOST_SENDCONTROL_SoftwareTimeOut    = 4, /**< The request or data transfer timed out. */
+			};
+
+		/* Global Variables: */
+			/** Indicates the currently set configuration number of the attached device. This indicates the currently
+			 *  selected configuration value if one has been set successfully, or 0 if no configuration has been selected.
+			 *
+			 *  To set a device configuration, call the \ref USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration() function.
+			 *
+			 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
+			 *             changed in value.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_Host
+			 */
+			extern uint8_t USB_Host_ConfigurationNumber;
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Sends the request stored in the \ref USB_ControlRequest global structure to the attached device,
+			 *  and transfers the data stored in the buffer to the device, or from the device to the buffer
+			 *  as requested. The transfer is made on the currently selected pipe.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] BufferPtr  Pointer to the start of the data buffer if the request has a data stage, or
+			 *                        \c NULL if the request transfers no data to or from the device.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result.
+			 */
+			uint8_t USB_Host_SendControlRequest(void* const BufferPtr);
+
+			/** Sends a SET CONFIGURATION standard request to the attached device, with the given configuration index.
+			 *
+			 *  This routine will automatically update the \ref USB_HostState and \ref USB_Host_ConfigurationNumber
+			 *  state variables according to the given function parameters and the result of the request.
+			 *
+			 *  \note After this routine returns, the control pipe will be selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] ConfigNumber  Configuration index to send to the device.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result.
+			 */
+			uint8_t USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(const uint8_t ConfigNumber);
+
+			/** Sends a GET CONFIGURATION standard request to the attached device, to retrieve the currently selected
+			 *  device configuration index.
+			 *
+			 *  \note After this routine returns, the control pipe will be selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] ConfigNumber  Pointer to a location where the retrieved configuration index should be stored.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result.
+			 */
+			uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceConfiguration(uint8_t* const ConfigNumber) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Sends a GET DESCRIPTOR standard request to the attached device, requesting the  descriptor of the
+			 *  specified type and index.
+			 *
+			 *  \note After this routine returns, the control pipe will be selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in]  Type          Type of descriptor to retrieve, a value from the \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t enum.
+			 *  \param[in]  Index         Index of the descriptor to retrieve.
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer        Pointer to the destination buffer where the retrieved string descriptor is to be stored.
+			 *  \param[in]  BufferLength  Maximum size of the string descriptor which can be stored into the buffer.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result.
+			 */
+			uint8_t USB_Host_GetDescriptor(const uint8_t Type,
+			                               const uint8_t Index,
+			                               void* const Buffer,
+			                               const uint8_t BufferLength) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+			/** Retrieves the current feature status of the attached device, via a GET STATUS standard request. The
+			 *  retrieved feature status can then be examined by masking the retrieved value with the various
+			 *  \c FEATURE_* masks for bus/self power information and remote wakeup support.
+			 *
+			 *  \note After this routine returns, the control pipe will be selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out]  FeatureStatus  Location where the retrieved feature status should be stored.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result.
+			 */
+			uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceStatus(uint8_t* const FeatureStatus) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Clears a stall condition on the given pipe, via a CLEAR FEATURE standard request to the attached device.
+			 *
+			 *  \note After this routine returns, the control pipe will be selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] EndpointAddress  Address of the endpoint to clear, including the endpoint's direction.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result.
+			 */
+			uint8_t USB_Host_ClearEndpointStall(const uint8_t EndpointAddress);
+
+			/** Selects a given alternative setting for the specified interface, via a SET INTERFACE standard request to
+			 *  the attached device.
+			 *
+			 *  \note After this routine returns, the control pipe will be selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] InterfaceIndex  Index of the interface whose alternative setting is to be altered.
+			 *  \param[in] AltSetting      Index of the interface's alternative setting which is to be selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result.
+			 */
+			uint8_t USB_Host_SetInterfaceAltSetting(const uint8_t InterfaceIndex,
+			                                        const uint8_t AltSetting);
+
+
+			/** Retrieves the current alternative setting for the specified interface, via a GET INTERFACE standard request to
+			 *  the attached device.
+			 *
+			 *  \note After this routine returns, the control pipe will be selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in]  InterfaceIndex  Index of the interface whose alternative setting is to be altered.
+			 *  \param[out] AltSetting      Pointer to a location where the retrieved alternative setting value should be stored.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result.
+			 */
+			uint8_t USB_Host_GetInterfaceAltSetting(const uint8_t InterfaceIndex,
+			                                        uint8_t* const AltSetting) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Sends a GET DESCRIPTOR standard request to the attached device, requesting the device descriptor.
+			 *  This can be used to easily retrieve information about the device such as its VID, PID and power
+			 *  requirements. This is a convenience wrapper for \ref USB_Host_GetDescriptor().
+			 *
+			 *  \note After this routine returns, the control pipe will be selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] DeviceDescriptorPtr  Pointer to the destination device descriptor structure where
+			 *                                   the read data is to be stored.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceDescriptor(USB_Descriptor_Device_t* const DeviceDescriptorPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static inline uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceDescriptor(USB_Descriptor_Device_t* const DeviceDescriptorPtr)
+			{
+				return USB_Host_GetDescriptor(DTYPE_Device, 0, DeviceDescriptorPtr, sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t));
+			}
+
+			/** Sends a GET DESCRIPTOR standard request to the attached device, requesting the string descriptor
+			 *  of the specified index. This can be used to easily retrieve string descriptors from the device by
+			 *  index, after the index is obtained from the Device or Configuration descriptors. This is a convenience
+			 *  wrapper for \ref USB_Host_GetDescriptor().
+			 *
+			 *  \note After this routine returns, the control pipe will be selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in]  Index        Index of the string descriptor to retrieve.
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer       Pointer to the destination buffer where the retrieved string descriptor is
+			 *                           to be stored.
+			 *  \param[in] BufferLength  Maximum size of the string descriptor which can be stored into the buffer.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceStringDescriptor(const uint8_t Index,
+			                                                         void* const Buffer,
+			                                                         const uint8_t BufferLength) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+			static inline uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceStringDescriptor(const uint8_t Index,
+			                                                         void* const Buffer,
+			                                                         const uint8_t BufferLength)
+			{
+				return USB_Host_GetDescriptor(DTYPE_String, Index,  Buffer, BufferLength);
+			}
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Enums: */
+			enum USB_WaitForTypes_t
+			{
+				USB_HOST_WAITFOR_SetupSent,
+				USB_HOST_WAITFOR_InReceived,
+				USB_HOST_WAITFOR_OutReady,
+			};
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_HOSTSTDREQ_C)
+				static uint8_t USB_Host_SendControlRequest_PRV(void* const BufferPtr);
+				static uint8_t USB_Host_WaitForIOS(const uint8_t WaitType);
+			#endif
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/OTG.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/OTG.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..58d47bace
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/OTG.h
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Common USB OTG definitions for all architectures.
+ *  \copydetails Group_OTG
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USB
+ *  \defgroup Group_OTG USB On The Go (OTG) Management
+ *  \brief USB OTG management definitions.
+ *
+ *  This module contains macros for embedded USB hosts with dual role On The Go capabilities, for managing role
+ *  exchange. OTG is a way for two USB dual role devices to talk to one another directly without fixed device/host
+ *  roles.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __USBOTG_H__
+#define __USBOTG_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "USBMode.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Architecture Includes: */
+		#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+			#include "AVR8/OTG_AVR8.h"
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Pipe.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Pipe.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ca3fdbe7a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Pipe.h
@@ -0,0 +1,144 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Common USB Pipe definitions for all architectures.
+ *  \copydetails Group_PipeManagement
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_PipeManagement
+ *  \defgroup Group_PipeRW Pipe Data Reading and Writing
+ *  \brief Pipe data read/write definitions.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing from and to pipes.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_PipeRW
+ *  \defgroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW Read/Write of Primitive Data Types
+ *  \brief Pipe data primitive read/write definitions.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of primitive data types
+ *  from and to pipes.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_PipeManagement
+ *  \defgroup Group_PipePacketManagement Pipe Packet Management
+ *  \brief Pipe packet management definitions.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to packet management of pipes.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_PipeManagement
+ *  \defgroup Group_PipeControlReq Pipe Control Request Management
+ *  \brief Pipe control request definitions.
+ *
+ *  Module for host mode request processing. This module allows for the transmission of standard, class and
+ *  vendor control requests to the default control endpoint of an attached device while in host mode.
+ *
+ *  \see Chapter 9 of the USB 2.0 specification.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USB
+ *  \defgroup Group_PipeManagement Pipe Management
+ *  \brief Pipe management definitions.
+ *
+ *  This module contains functions, macros and enums related to pipe management when in USB Host mode. This
+ *  module contains the pipe management macros, as well as pipe interrupt and data send/receive functions
+ *  for various data types.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __PIPE_H__
+#define __PIPE_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "USBMode.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** Type define for a pipe table entry, used to configure pipes in groups via
+			 *  \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable().
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint8_t  Address; /**< Address of the pipe to configure, or zero if the table entry is to be unused. */
+				uint16_t Size; /**< Size of the pipe bank, in bytes. */
+				uint8_t  EndpointAddress; /**< Address of the endpoint in the connected device. */
+				uint8_t  Type; /**< Type of the endpoint, a \c EP_TYPE_* mask. */
+				uint8_t  Banks; /**< Number of hardware banks to use for the pipe. */
+			} USB_Pipe_Table_t;
+
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Pipe address for the default control pipe, which always resides in address 0. This is
+			 *  defined for convenience to give more readable code when used with the pipe macros.
+			 */
+			#define PIPE_CONTROLPIPE                0
+
+			/** Pipe number mask, for masking against pipe addresses to retrieve the pipe's numerical address
+			 *  in the device.
+			 */
+			#define PIPE_PIPENUM_MASK               0x0F
+
+			/** Endpoint number mask, for masking against endpoint addresses to retrieve the endpoint's
+			 *  numerical address in the attached device.
+			 */
+			#define PIPE_EPNUM_MASK                 0x0F
+
+	/* Architecture Includes: */
+		#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+			#include "AVR8/Pipe_AVR8.h"
+		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
+			#include "UC3/Pipe_UC3.h"
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/PipeStream.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/PipeStream.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..239969687
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/PipeStream.h
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Pipe data stream transmission and reception management.
+ *  \copydetails Group_PipeStreamRW
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_PipeRW
+ *  \defgroup Group_PipeStreamRW Read/Write of Multi-Byte Streams
+ *  \brief Pipe data stream transmission and reception management.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of data streams from
+ *  and to pipes.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __PIPE_STREAM_H__
+#define __PIPE_STREAM_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "USBMode.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible error return codes of the Pipe_*_Stream_* functions. */
+			enum Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError            = 0, /**< Command completed successfully, no error. */
+				PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled        = 1, /**< The device stalled the pipe during the transfer. */
+				PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected = 2, /**< Device was disconnected from the host during
+			                                           *   the transfer.
+			                                           */
+				PIPE_RWSTREAM_Timeout            = 3, /**< The device failed to accept or send the next packet
+				                                       *   within the software timeout period set by the
+				                                       *   \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro.
+				                                       */
+				PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer = 4, /**< Indicates that the pipe bank became full/empty before the
+				                                       *   complete contents of the stream could be transferred.
+				                                       */
+			};
+
+	/* Architecture Includes: */
+		#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+			#include "AVR8/PipeStream_AVR8.h"
+		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
+			#include "UC3/PipeStream_UC3.h"
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/StdDescriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/StdDescriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e0a1a37f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/StdDescriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,765 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Common standard USB Descriptor definitions for all architectures.
+ *  \copydetails Group_StdDescriptors
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USB
+ *  \defgroup Group_StdDescriptors USB Descriptors
+ *  \brief Standard USB Descriptor definitions.
+ *
+ *  Standard USB device descriptor defines and retrieval routines, for USB devices. This module contains
+ *  structures and macros for the easy creation of standard USB descriptors in USB device projects.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __USBDESCRIPTORS_H__
+#define __USBDESCRIPTORS_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "USBMode.h"
+		#include "Events.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates that a given descriptor does not exist in the device. This can be used inside descriptors
+			 *  for string descriptor indexes, or may be use as a return value for GetDescriptor when the specified
+			 *  descriptor does not exist.
+			 */
+			#define NO_DESCRIPTOR                     0
+
+			/** Macro to calculate the power value for the configuration descriptor, from a given number of milliamperes.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] mA  Maximum number of milliamps the device consumes when the given configuration is selected.
+			 */
+			#define USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(mA)           ((mA) >> 1)
+
+			/** Macro to calculate the Unicode length of a string with a given number of Unicode characters.
+			 *  Should be used in string descriptor's headers for giving the string descriptor's byte length.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] UnicodeChars  Number of Unicode characters in the string text.
+			 */
+			#define USB_STRING_LEN(UnicodeChars)      (sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Header_t) + ((UnicodeChars) << 1))
+
+			/** Convenience macro to easily create \ref USB_Descriptor_String_t instances from a wide character string.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This macro is for little-endian systems only.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] String  String to initialize a USB String Descriptor structure with.
+			 */
+			#define USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(String)     { .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Header_t) + (sizeof(String) - 2), .Type = DTYPE_String}, .UnicodeString = String }
+
+			/** Convenience macro to easily create \ref USB_Descriptor_String_t instances from an array of characters.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] ...  Characters to initialize a USB String Descriptor structure with.
+			 */
+			#define USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(...)  { .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Header_t) + sizeof((uint16_t){__VA_ARGS__}), .Type = DTYPE_String}, .UnicodeString = {__VA_ARGS__} }
+
+			/** Macro to encode a given major/minor/revision version number into Binary Coded Decimal format for descriptor
+			 *  fields requiring BCD encoding, such as the USB version number in the standard device descriptor.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This value is automatically converted into Little Endian, suitable for direct use inside device
+			 *        descriptors on all architectures without endianness conversion macros.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in]  Major     Major version number to encode.
+			 *  \param[in]  Minor     Minor version number to encode.
+			 *  \param[in]  Revision  Revision version number to encode.
+			 */
+			#define VERSION_BCD(Major, Minor, Revision) \
+			                                          CPU_TO_LE16( ((Major & 0xFF) << 8) | \
+			                                                       ((Minor & 0x0F) << 4) | \
+			                                                       (Revision & 0x0F) )
+
+			/** String language ID for the English language. Should be used in \ref USB_Descriptor_String_t descriptors
+			 *  to indicate that the English language is supported by the device in its string descriptors.
+			 */
+			#define LANGUAGE_ID_ENG                   0x0409
+
+			/** \name USB Configuration Descriptor Attribute Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** Mask for the reserved bit in the Configuration Descriptor's \c ConfigAttributes field, which must be set on all
+			 *  devices for historical purposes.
+			 */
+			#define USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED          0x80
+
+			/** Can be masked with other configuration descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t
+			 *  descriptor's \c ConfigAttributes value to indicate that the specified configuration can draw its power
+			 *  from the device's own power source.
+			 */
+			#define USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED       0x40
+
+			/** Can be masked with other configuration descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t
+			 *  descriptor's \c ConfigAttributes value to indicate that the specified configuration supports the
+			 *  remote wakeup feature of the USB standard, allowing a suspended USB device to wake up the host upon
+			 *  request.
+			 */
+			#define USB_CONFIG_ATTR_REMOTEWAKEUP      0x20
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name Endpoint Descriptor Attribute Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's
+			 *  \c Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is not synchronized.
+			 *
+			 *  \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint attributes.
+			 */
+			#define ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC             (0 << 2)
+
+			/** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's
+			 *  \c Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is asynchronous.
+			 *
+			 *  \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint attributes.
+			 */
+			#define ENDPOINT_ATTR_ASYNC               (1 << 2)
+
+			/** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's
+			 *  \c Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is adaptive.
+			 *
+			 *  \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint attributes.
+			 */
+			#define ENDPOINT_ATTR_ADAPTIVE            (2 << 2)
+
+			/** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's
+			 *  \c Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is synchronized.
+			 *
+			 *  \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint attributes.
+			 */
+			#define ENDPOINT_ATTR_SYNC                (3 << 2)
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name Endpoint Descriptor Usage Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's
+			 *  \c Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is used for data transfers.
+			 *
+			 *  \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint usage attributes.
+			 */
+			#define ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA               (0 << 4)
+
+			/** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's
+			 *  \c Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is used for feedback.
+			 *
+			 *  \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint usage attributes.
+			 */
+			#define ENDPOINT_USAGE_FEEDBACK           (1 << 4)
+
+			/** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's
+			 *  \c Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is used for implicit feedback.
+			 *
+			 *  \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint usage attributes.
+			 */
+			#define ENDPOINT_USAGE_IMPLICIT_FEEDBACK  (2 << 4)
+			//@}
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible standard descriptor types, as given in each descriptor's header. */
+			enum USB_DescriptorTypes_t
+			{
+				DTYPE_Device                    = 0x01, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is a device descriptor. */
+				DTYPE_Configuration             = 0x02, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is a configuration descriptor. */
+				DTYPE_String                    = 0x03, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is a string descriptor. */
+				DTYPE_Interface                 = 0x04, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is an interface descriptor. */
+				DTYPE_Endpoint                  = 0x05, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is an endpoint descriptor. */
+				DTYPE_DeviceQualifier           = 0x06, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is a device qualifier descriptor. */
+				DTYPE_Other                     = 0x07, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is of other type. */
+				DTYPE_InterfacePower            = 0x08, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is an interface power descriptor. */
+				DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation      = 0x0B, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is an interface association descriptor. */
+				DTYPE_CSInterface               = 0x24, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is a class specific interface descriptor. */
+				DTYPE_CSEndpoint                = 0x25, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is a class specific endpoint descriptor. */
+			};
+
+			/** Enum for possible Class, Subclass and Protocol values of device and interface descriptors. */
+			enum USB_Descriptor_ClassSubclassProtocol_t
+			{
+				USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass          = 0x00, /**< Descriptor Class value indicating that the device does not belong
+				                                         *   to a particular class at the device level.
+				                                         */
+				USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass       = 0x00, /**< Descriptor Subclass value indicating that the device does not belong
+				                                         *   to a particular subclass at the device level.
+				                                         */
+				USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol       = 0x00, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device does not belong
+				                                         *   to a particular protocol at the device level.
+				                                         */
+				USB_CSCP_VendorSpecificClass    = 0xFF, /**< Descriptor Class value indicating that the device/interface belongs
+				                                         *   to a vendor specific class.
+				                                         */
+				USB_CSCP_VendorSpecificSubclass = 0xFF, /**< Descriptor Subclass value indicating that the device/interface belongs
+				                                         *   to a vendor specific subclass.
+				                                         */
+				USB_CSCP_VendorSpecificProtocol = 0xFF, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device/interface belongs
+				                                         *   to a vendor specific protocol.
+				                                         */
+				USB_CSCP_IADDeviceClass         = 0xEF, /**< Descriptor Class value indicating that the device belongs to the
+				                                         *   Interface Association Descriptor class.
+				                                         */
+				USB_CSCP_IADDeviceSubclass      = 0x02, /**< Descriptor Subclass value indicating that the device belongs to the
+				                                         *   Interface Association Descriptor subclass.
+				                                         */
+				USB_CSCP_IADDeviceProtocol      = 0x01, /**< Descriptor Protocol value indicating that the device belongs to the
+				                                         *   Interface Association Descriptor protocol.
+				                                         */
+			};
+
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** \brief Standard USB Descriptor Header (LUFA naming conventions).
+			 *
+             *  Type define for all descriptors' standard header, indicating the descriptor's length and type. This structure
+			 *  uses LUFA-specific element names to make each element's purpose clearer.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_StdDescriptor_Header_t for the version of this type with standard element names.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint8_t Size; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+				uint8_t Type; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
+				               *   given by the specific class.
+				               */
+			} ATTR_PACKED USB_Descriptor_Header_t;
+
+			/** \brief Standard USB Descriptor Header (USB-IF naming conventions).
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for all descriptors' standard header, indicating the descriptor's length and type. This structure
+			 *  uses the relevant standard's given element names to ensure compatibility with the standard.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_Descriptor_Header_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific element names.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint8_t bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+				uint8_t bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
+				                          *   given by the specific class.
+				                          */
+			} ATTR_PACKED USB_StdDescriptor_Header_t;
+
+			/** \brief Standard USB Device Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a standard Device Descriptor. This structure uses LUFA-specific element names to make each
+			 *  element's purpose clearer.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_StdDescriptor_Device_t for the version of this type with standard element names.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */
+
+				uint16_t USBSpecification; /**< BCD of the supported USB specification.
+				                            *
+				                            *   \see \ref VERSION_BCD() utility macro.
+				                            */
+				uint8_t  Class; /**< USB device class. */
+				uint8_t  SubClass; /**< USB device subclass. */
+				uint8_t  Protocol; /**< USB device protocol. */
+
+				uint8_t  Endpoint0Size; /**< Size of the control (address 0) endpoint's bank in bytes. */
+
+				uint16_t VendorID; /**< Vendor ID for the USB product. */
+				uint16_t ProductID; /**< Unique product ID for the USB product. */
+				uint16_t ReleaseNumber; /**< Product release (version) number.
+				                         *
+				                         *   \see \ref VERSION_BCD() utility macro.
+				                         */
+				uint8_t  ManufacturerStrIndex; /**< String index for the manufacturer's name. The
+				                                *   host will request this string via a separate
+				                                *   control request for the string descriptor.
+				                                *
+				                                *   \note If no string supplied, use \ref NO_DESCRIPTOR.
+				                                */
+				uint8_t  ProductStrIndex; /**< String index for the product name/details.
+				                           *
+				                           *  \see ManufacturerStrIndex structure entry.
+				                           */
+				uint8_t  SerialNumStrIndex; /**< String index for the product's globally unique hexadecimal
+				                             *   serial number, in uppercase Unicode ASCII.
+				                             *
+				                             *  \note On some microcontroller models, there is an embedded serial number
+				                             *        in the chip which can be used for the device serial number.
+				                             *        To use this serial number, set this to \c USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
+				                             *        On unsupported devices, this will evaluate to \ref NO_DESCRIPTOR
+				                             *        and will cause the host to generate a pseudo-unique value for the
+				                             *        device upon insertion.
+				                             *
+				                             *  \see \c ManufacturerStrIndex structure entry.
+				                             */
+				uint8_t  NumberOfConfigurations; /**< Total number of configurations supported by
+				                                  *   the device.
+				                                  */
+			} ATTR_PACKED USB_Descriptor_Device_t;
+
+			/** \brief Standard USB Device Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a standard Device Descriptor. This structure uses the relevant standard's given element names
+			 *  to ensure compatibility with the standard.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_Descriptor_Device_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific element names.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint8_t  bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+				uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
+				                              *   given by the specific class.
+				                              */
+				uint16_t bcdUSB; /**< BCD of the supported USB specification.
+				                  *
+				                  *   \see \ref VERSION_BCD() utility macro.
+				                  */
+				uint8_t  bDeviceClass; /**< USB device class. */
+				uint8_t  bDeviceSubClass; /**< USB device subclass. */
+				uint8_t  bDeviceProtocol; /**< USB device protocol. */
+				uint8_t  bMaxPacketSize0; /**< Size of the control (address 0) endpoint's bank in bytes. */
+				uint16_t idVendor; /**< Vendor ID for the USB product. */
+				uint16_t idProduct; /**< Unique product ID for the USB product. */
+				uint16_t bcdDevice; /**< Product release (version) number.
+				                     *
+				                     *   \see \ref VERSION_BCD() utility macro.
+				                     */
+				uint8_t  iManufacturer; /**< String index for the manufacturer's name. The
+				                         *   host will request this string via a separate
+				                         *   control request for the string descriptor.
+				                         *
+				                         *   \note If no string supplied, use \ref NO_DESCRIPTOR.
+				                         */
+				uint8_t  iProduct; /**< String index for the product name/details.
+				                    *
+				                    *  \see ManufacturerStrIndex structure entry.
+				                    */
+				uint8_t iSerialNumber; /**< String index for the product's globally unique hexadecimal
+				                        *   serial number, in uppercase Unicode ASCII.
+				                        *
+				                        *  \note On some microcontroller models, there is an embedded serial number
+				                        *        in the chip which can be used for the device serial number.
+				                        *        To use this serial number, set this to \c USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
+				                        *        On unsupported devices, this will evaluate to \ref NO_DESCRIPTOR
+				                        *        and will cause the host to generate a pseudo-unique value for the
+				                        *        device upon insertion.
+				                        *
+				                        *  \see \c ManufacturerStrIndex structure entry.
+				                        */
+				uint8_t  bNumConfigurations; /**< Total number of configurations supported by
+				                              *   the device.
+				                              */
+			} ATTR_PACKED USB_StdDescriptor_Device_t;
+
+			/** \brief Standard USB Device Qualifier Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a standard Device Qualifier Descriptor. This structure uses LUFA-specific element names
+			 *  to make each element's purpose clearer.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_StdDescriptor_DeviceQualifier_t for the version of this type with standard element names.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */
+
+				uint16_t USBSpecification; /**< BCD of the supported USB specification.
+				                            *
+				                            *   \see \ref VERSION_BCD() utility macro.
+				                            */
+				uint8_t  Class; /**< USB device class. */
+				uint8_t  SubClass; /**< USB device subclass. */
+				uint8_t  Protocol; /**< USB device protocol. */
+
+				uint8_t  Endpoint0Size; /**< Size of the control (address 0) endpoint's bank in bytes. */
+				uint8_t  NumberOfConfigurations; /**< Total number of configurations supported by
+				                                  *   the device.
+				                                  */
+				uint8_t  Reserved; /**< Reserved for future use, must be 0. */
+			} ATTR_PACKED USB_Descriptor_DeviceQualifier_t;
+
+			/** \brief Standard USB Device Qualifier Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a standard Device Qualifier Descriptor. This structure uses the relevant standard's given element names
+			 *  to ensure compatibility with the standard.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_Descriptor_DeviceQualifier_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific element names.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint8_t  bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+				uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
+				                           *   given by the specific class.
+				                           */
+				uint16_t bcdUSB; /**< BCD of the supported USB specification.
+				                  *
+				                  *   \see \ref VERSION_BCD() utility macro.
+				                  */
+				uint8_t  bDeviceClass; /**< USB device class. */
+				uint8_t  bDeviceSubClass; /**< USB device subclass. */
+				uint8_t  bDeviceProtocol; /**< USB device protocol. */
+				uint8_t  bMaxPacketSize0; /**< Size of the control (address 0) endpoint's bank in bytes. */
+				uint8_t  bNumConfigurations; /**< Total number of configurations supported by
+				                              *   the device.
+				                              */
+				uint8_t  bReserved; /**< Reserved for future use, must be 0. */
+			} ATTR_PACKED USB_StdDescriptor_DeviceQualifier_t;
+
+			/** \brief Standard USB Configuration Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a standard Configuration Descriptor header. This structure uses LUFA-specific element names
+			 *  to make each element's purpose clearer.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_StdDescriptor_Configuration_Header_t for the version of this type with standard element names.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */
+
+				uint16_t TotalConfigurationSize; /**< Size of the configuration descriptor header,
+				                                  *   and all sub descriptors inside the configuration.
+				                                  */
+				uint8_t  TotalInterfaces; /**< Total number of interfaces in the configuration. */
+
+				uint8_t  ConfigurationNumber; /**< Configuration index of the current configuration. */
+				uint8_t  ConfigurationStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing the configuration. */
+
+				uint8_t  ConfigAttributes; /**< Configuration attributes, comprised of a mask of \c USB_CONFIG_ATTR_* masks.
+				                            *   On all devices, this should include USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED at a minimum.
+				                            */
+
+				uint8_t  MaxPowerConsumption; /**< Maximum power consumption of the device while in the
+				                               *   current configuration, calculated by the \ref USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA()
+				                               *   macro.
+				                               */
+			} ATTR_PACKED USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t;
+
+			/** \brief Standard USB Configuration Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a standard Configuration Descriptor header. This structure uses the relevant standard's given element names
+			 *  to ensure compatibility with the standard.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_Descriptor_Device_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific element names.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint8_t  bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+				uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
+				                           *   given by the specific class.
+				                           */
+				uint16_t wTotalLength; /**< Size of the configuration descriptor header,
+				                           *   and all sub descriptors inside the configuration.
+				                           */
+				uint8_t  bNumInterfaces; /**< Total number of interfaces in the configuration. */
+				uint8_t  bConfigurationValue; /**< Configuration index of the current configuration. */
+				uint8_t  iConfiguration; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing the configuration. */
+				uint8_t  bmAttributes; /**< Configuration attributes, comprised of a mask of \c USB_CONFIG_ATTR_* masks.
+				                        *   On all devices, this should include USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED at a minimum.
+				                        */
+				uint8_t  bMaxPower; /**< Maximum power consumption of the device while in the
+				                     *   current configuration, calculated by the \ref USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA()
+				                     *   macro.
+				                     */
+			} ATTR_PACKED USB_StdDescriptor_Configuration_Header_t;
+
+			/** \brief Standard USB Interface Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a standard Interface Descriptor. This structure uses LUFA-specific element names
+			 *  to make each element's purpose clearer.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_StdDescriptor_Interface_t for the version of this type with standard element names.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */
+
+				uint8_t InterfaceNumber; /**< Index of the interface in the current configuration. */
+				uint8_t AlternateSetting; /**< Alternate setting for the interface number. The same
+				                           *   interface number can have multiple alternate settings
+				                           *   with different endpoint configurations, which can be
+				                           *   selected by the host.
+				                           */
+				uint8_t TotalEndpoints; /**< Total number of endpoints in the interface. */
+
+				uint8_t Class; /**< Interface class ID. */
+				uint8_t SubClass; /**< Interface subclass ID. */
+				uint8_t Protocol; /**< Interface protocol ID. */
+
+				uint8_t InterfaceStrIndex; /**< Index of the string descriptor describing the interface. */
+			} ATTR_PACKED USB_Descriptor_Interface_t;
+
+			/** \brief Standard USB Interface Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a standard Interface Descriptor. This structure uses the relevant standard's given element names
+			 *  to ensure compatibility with the standard.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_Descriptor_Interface_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific element names.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint8_t bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+				uint8_t bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
+				                          *   given by the specific class.
+				                          */
+				uint8_t bInterfaceNumber; /**< Index of the interface in the current configuration. */
+				uint8_t bAlternateSetting; /**< Alternate setting for the interface number. The same
+				                            *   interface number can have multiple alternate settings
+				                            *   with different endpoint configurations, which can be
+				                            *   selected by the host.
+				                            */
+				uint8_t bNumEndpoints; /**< Total number of endpoints in the interface. */
+				uint8_t bInterfaceClass; /**< Interface class ID. */
+				uint8_t bInterfaceSubClass; /**< Interface subclass ID. */
+				uint8_t bInterfaceProtocol; /**< Interface protocol ID. */
+				uint8_t iInterface; /**< Index of the string descriptor describing the
+				                     *   interface.
+				                     */
+			} ATTR_PACKED USB_StdDescriptor_Interface_t;
+
+			/** \brief Standard USB Interface Association Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a standard Interface Association Descriptor. This structure uses LUFA-specific element names
+			 *  to make each element's purpose clearer.
+			 *
+			 *  This descriptor has been added as a supplement to the USB2.0 standard, in the ECN located at
+			 *  <a>http://www.usb.org/developers/docs/InterfaceAssociationDescriptor_ecn.pdf</a>. It allows composite
+			 *  devices with multiple interfaces related to the same function to have the multiple interfaces bound
+			 *  together at the point of enumeration, loading one generic driver for all the interfaces in the single
+			 *  function. Read the ECN for more information.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_StdDescriptor_Interface_Association_t for the version of this type with standard element names.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */
+
+				uint8_t FirstInterfaceIndex; /**< Index of the first associated interface. */
+				uint8_t TotalInterfaces; /**< Total number of associated interfaces. */
+
+				uint8_t Class; /**< Interface class ID. */
+				uint8_t SubClass; /**< Interface subclass ID. */
+				uint8_t Protocol; /**< Interface protocol ID. */
+
+				uint8_t IADStrIndex; /**< Index of the string descriptor describing the
+				                      *   interface association.
+				                      */
+			} ATTR_PACKED USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t;
+
+			/** \brief Standard USB Interface Association Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a standard Interface Association Descriptor. This structure uses the relevant standard's given
+			 *  element names to ensure compatibility with the standard.
+			 *
+			 *  This descriptor has been added as a supplement to the USB2.0 standard, in the ECN located at
+			 *  <a>http://www.usb.org/developers/docs/InterfaceAssociationDescriptor_ecn.pdf</a>. It allows composite
+			 *  devices with multiple interfaces related to the same function to have the multiple interfaces bound
+			 *  together at the point of enumeration, loading one generic driver for all the interfaces in the single
+			 *  function. Read the ECN for more information.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific
+			 *       element names.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint8_t bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+				uint8_t bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a value
+				                          *   given by the specific class.
+				                          */
+				uint8_t bFirstInterface; /**< Index of the first associated interface. */
+				uint8_t bInterfaceCount; /**< Total number of associated interfaces. */
+				uint8_t bFunctionClass; /**< Interface class ID. */
+				uint8_t bFunctionSubClass; /**< Interface subclass ID. */
+				uint8_t bFunctionProtocol; /**< Interface protocol ID. */
+				uint8_t iFunction; /**< Index of the string descriptor describing the
+				                    *   interface association.
+				                    */
+			} ATTR_PACKED USB_StdDescriptor_Interface_Association_t;
+
+			/** \brief Standard USB Endpoint Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a standard Endpoint Descriptor. This structure uses LUFA-specific element names
+			 *  to make each element's purpose clearer.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_StdDescriptor_Endpoint_t for the version of this type with standard element names.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */
+
+				uint8_t  EndpointAddress; /**< Logical address of the endpoint within the device for the current
+				                           *   configuration, including direction mask.
+				                           */
+				uint8_t  Attributes; /**< Endpoint attributes, comprised of a mask of the endpoint type (EP_TYPE_*)
+				                      *   and attributes (ENDPOINT_ATTR_*) masks.
+				                      */
+				uint16_t EndpointSize; /**< Size of the endpoint bank, in bytes. This indicates the maximum packet
+				                        *   size that the endpoint can receive at a time.
+				                        */
+				uint8_t  PollingIntervalMS; /**< Polling interval in milliseconds for the endpoint if it is an INTERRUPT
+				                             *   or ISOCHRONOUS type.
+				                             */
+			} ATTR_PACKED USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t;
+
+			/** \brief Standard USB Endpoint Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a standard Endpoint Descriptor. This structure uses the relevant standard's given
+			 *  element names to ensure compatibility with the standard.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t for the version of this type with non-standard LUFA specific
+			 *       element names.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint8_t  bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+				uint8_t  bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t or a
+				                           *   value given by the specific class.
+				                           */
+				uint8_t  bEndpointAddress; /**< Logical address of the endpoint within the device for the current
+				                            *   configuration, including direction mask.
+				                            */
+				uint8_t  bmAttributes; /**< Endpoint attributes, comprised of a mask of the endpoint type (EP_TYPE_*)
+				                        *   and attributes (ENDPOINT_ATTR_*) masks.
+				                        */
+				uint16_t wMaxPacketSize; /**< Size of the endpoint bank, in bytes. This indicates the maximum packet size
+				                          *   that the endpoint can receive at a time.
+				                          */
+				uint8_t  bInterval; /**< Polling interval in milliseconds for the endpoint if it is an INTERRUPT or
+				                     *   ISOCHRONOUS type.
+				                     */
+			} ATTR_PACKED USB_StdDescriptor_Endpoint_t;
+
+			/** \brief Standard USB String Descriptor (LUFA naming conventions).
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a standard string descriptor. Unlike other standard descriptors, the length
+			 *  of the descriptor for placement in the descriptor header must be determined by the \ref USB_STRING_LEN()
+			 *  macro rather than by the size of the descriptor structure, as the length is not fixed.
+			 *
+			 *  This structure should also be used for string index 0, which contains the supported language IDs for
+			 *  the device as an array.
+			 *
+			 *  This structure uses LUFA-specific element names to make each element's purpose clearer.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_StdDescriptor_String_t for the version of this type with standard element names.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */
+
+				#if (((ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) || (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)) && !defined(__DOXYGEN__))
+				wchar_t  UnicodeString[];
+				#else
+				uint16_t UnicodeString[]; /**< String data, as unicode characters (alternatively,
+				                           *   string language IDs). If normal ASCII characters are
+				                           *   to be used, they must be added as an array of characters
+				                           *   rather than a normal C string so that they are widened to
+				                           *   Unicode size.
+				                           *
+				                           *   Under GCC, strings prefixed with the "L" character (before
+				                           *   the opening string quotation mark) are considered to be
+				                           *   Unicode strings, and may be used instead of an explicit
+				                           *   array of ASCII characters on little endian devices with
+				                           *   UTF-16-LE \c wchar_t encoding.
+				                           */
+				#endif
+			} ATTR_PACKED USB_Descriptor_String_t;
+
+			/** \brief Standard USB String Descriptor (USB-IF naming conventions).
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a standard string descriptor. Unlike other standard descriptors, the length
+			 *  of the descriptor for placement in the descriptor header must be determined by the \ref USB_STRING_LEN()
+			 *  macro rather than by the size of the descriptor structure, as the length is not fixed.
+			 *
+			 *  This structure should also be used for string index 0, which contains the supported language IDs for
+			 *  the device as an array.
+			 *
+			 *  This structure uses the relevant standard's given element names to ensure compatibility with the standard.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref USB_Descriptor_String_t for the version of this type with with non-standard LUFA specific
+			 *       element names.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Regardless of CPU architecture, these values should be stored as little endian.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint8_t bLength; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */
+				uint8_t bDescriptorType; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in \ref USB_DescriptorTypes_t
+				                          *   or a value given by the specific class.
+				                          */
+				uint16_t bString[]; /**< String data, as unicode characters (alternatively, string language IDs).
+				                     *   If normal ASCII characters are to be used, they must be added as an array
+				                     *   of characters rather than a normal C string so that they are widened to
+				                     *   Unicode size.
+				                     *
+				                     *   Under GCC, strings prefixed with the "L" character (before the opening string
+				                     *   quotation mark) are considered to be Unicode strings, and may be used instead
+				                     *   of an explicit array of ASCII characters.
+				                     */
+			} ATTR_PACKED USB_StdDescriptor_String_t;
+
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/StdRequestType.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/StdRequestType.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b2506cd7d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/StdRequestType.h
@@ -0,0 +1,258 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB control endpoint request definitions.
+ *  \copydetails Group_StdRequest
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USB
+ *  \defgroup Group_StdRequest Standard USB Requests
+ *  \brief USB control endpoint request definitions.
+ *
+ *  This module contains definitions for the various control request parameters, so that the request
+ *  details (such as data direction, request recipient, etc.) can be extracted via masking.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __STDREQTYPE_H__
+#define __STDREQTYPE_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "USBMode.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Mask for the request type parameter, to indicate the direction of the request data (Host to Device
+			 *  or Device to Host). The result of this mask should then be compared to the request direction masks.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \c REQDIR_* macros for masks indicating the request data direction.
+			 */
+			#define CONTROL_REQTYPE_DIRECTION  0x80
+
+			/** Mask for the request type parameter, to indicate the type of request (Device, Class or Vendor
+			 *  Specific). The result of this mask should then be compared to the request type masks.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \c REQTYPE_* macros for masks indicating the request type.
+			 */
+			#define CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE       0x60
+
+			/** Mask for the request type parameter, to indicate the recipient of the request (Device, Interface
+			 *  Endpoint or Other). The result of this mask should then be compared to the request recipient
+			 *  masks.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \c REQREC_* macros for masks indicating the request recipient.
+			 */
+			#define CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT  0x1F
+
+			/** \name Control Request Data Direction Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** Request data direction mask, indicating that the request data will flow from host to device.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_DIRECTION macro.
+			 */
+			#define REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE        (0 << 7)
+
+			/** Request data direction mask, indicating that the request data will flow from device to host.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_DIRECTION macro.
+			 */
+			#define REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST        (1 << 7)
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name Control Request Type Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** Request type mask, indicating that the request is a standard request.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE macro.
+			 */
+			#define REQTYPE_STANDARD           (0 << 5)
+
+			/** Request type mask, indicating that the request is a class-specific request.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE macro.
+			 */
+			#define REQTYPE_CLASS              (1 << 5)
+
+			/** Request type mask, indicating that the request is a vendor specific request.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE macro.
+			 */
+			#define REQTYPE_VENDOR             (2 << 5)
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name Control Request Recipient Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** Request recipient mask, indicating that the request is to be issued to the device as a whole.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT macro.
+			 */
+			#define REQREC_DEVICE              (0 << 0)
+
+			/** Request recipient mask, indicating that the request is to be issued to an interface in the
+			 *  currently selected configuration.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT macro.
+			 */
+			#define REQREC_INTERFACE           (1 << 0)
+
+			/** Request recipient mask, indicating that the request is to be issued to an endpoint in the
+			 *  currently selected configuration.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT macro.
+			 */
+			#define REQREC_ENDPOINT            (2 << 0)
+
+			/** Request recipient mask, indicating that the request is to be issued to an unspecified element
+			 *  in the currently selected configuration.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT macro.
+			 */
+			#define REQREC_OTHER               (3 << 0)
+			//@}
+
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			/** \brief Standard USB Control Request
+			 *
+			 *  Type define for a standard USB control request.
+			 *
+			 *  \see The USB 2.0 specification for more information on standard control requests.
+			 */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint8_t  bmRequestType; /**< Type of the request. */
+				uint8_t  bRequest; /**< Request command code. */
+				uint16_t wValue; /**< wValue parameter of the request. */
+				uint16_t wIndex; /**< wIndex parameter of the request. */
+				uint16_t wLength; /**< Length of the data to transfer in bytes. */
+			} ATTR_PACKED USB_Request_Header_t;
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enumeration for the various standard request commands. These commands are applicable when the
+			 *  request type is \ref REQTYPE_STANDARD (with the exception of \ref REQ_GetDescriptor, which is always
+			 *  handled regardless of the request type value).
+			 *
+			 *  \see Chapter 9 of the USB 2.0 Specification.
+			 */
+			enum USB_Control_Request_t
+			{
+				REQ_GetStatus           = 0, /**< Implemented in the library for device and endpoint recipients. Passed
+				                              *   to the user application for other recipients via the
+				                              *   \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event when received in
+				                              *   device mode. */
+				REQ_ClearFeature        = 1, /**< Implemented in the library for device and endpoint recipients. Passed
+				                              *   to the user application for other recipients via the
+				                              *   \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event when received in
+				                              *   device mode. */
+				REQ_SetFeature          = 3, /**< Implemented in the library for device and endpoint recipients. Passed
+				                              *   to the user application for other recipients via the
+				                              *   \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event when received in
+				                              *   device mode. */
+				REQ_SetAddress          = 5, /**< Implemented in the library for the device recipient. Passed
+				                              *   to the user application for other recipients via the
+				                              *   \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event when received in
+				                              *   device mode. */
+				REQ_GetDescriptor       = 6, /**< Implemented in the library for device and interface recipients. Passed to the
+				                              *   user application for other recipients via the
+				                              *   \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event when received in
+				                              *   device mode. */
+				REQ_SetDescriptor       = 7, /**< Not implemented in the library, passed to the user application
+				                              *   via the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event when received in
+				                              *   device mode. */
+				REQ_GetConfiguration    = 8, /**< Implemented in the library for the device recipient. Passed
+				                              *   to the user application for other recipients via the
+				                              *   \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event when received in
+				                              *   device mode. */
+				REQ_SetConfiguration    = 9, /**< Implemented in the library for the device recipient. Passed
+				                              *   to the user application for other recipients via the
+				                              *   \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event when received in
+				                              *   device mode. */
+				REQ_GetInterface        = 10, /**< Not implemented in the library, passed to the user application
+				                              *   via the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event when received in
+				                              *   device mode. */
+				REQ_SetInterface        = 11, /**< Not implemented in the library, passed to the user application
+				                              *   via the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event when received in
+				                              *   device mode. */
+				REQ_SynchFrame          = 12, /**< Not implemented in the library, passed to the user application
+				                              *   via the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event when received in
+				                              *   device mode. */
+			};
+
+			/** Feature Selector values for Set Feature and Clear Feature standard control requests directed to the device, interface
+			 *  and endpoint recipients.
+			 */
+			enum USB_Feature_Selectors_t
+			{
+				FEATURE_SEL_EndpointHalt       = 0x00, /**< Feature selector for Clear Feature or Set Feature commands. When
+				                                        *   used in a Set Feature or Clear Feature request this indicates that an
+				                                        *   endpoint (whose address is given elsewhere in the request) should have
+				                                        *   its stall condition changed.
+				                                        */
+				FEATURE_SEL_DeviceRemoteWakeup = 0x01, /**< Feature selector for Device level Remote Wakeup enable set or clear.
+			                                            *   This feature can be controlled by the host on devices which indicate
+			                                            *   remote wakeup support in their descriptors to selectively disable or
+			                                            *   enable remote wakeup.
+			                                            */
+				FEATURE_SEL_TestMode           = 0x02, /**< Feature selector for Test Mode features, used to test the USB controller
+			                                            *   to check for incorrect operation.
+			                                            */
+			};
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+		#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			/* Macros: */
+				#define FEATURE_SELFPOWERED_ENABLED     (1 << 0)
+				#define FEATURE_REMOTE_WAKEUP_ENABLED   (1 << 1)
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Device_UC3.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Device_UC3.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6f6de3f5e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Device_UC3.c
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+
+#include "../Device.h"
+
+void USB_Device_SendRemoteWakeup(void)
+{
+	USB_CLK_Unfreeze();
+
+	AVR32_USBB.UDCON.rmwkup = true;
+	while (AVR32_USBB.UDCON.rmwkup);
+}
+
+#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Device_UC3.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Device_UC3.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5579ea0bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Device_UC3.h
@@ -0,0 +1,267 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB Device definitions for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Device_UC3
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Device
+ *  \defgroup Group_Device_UC3 Device Management (UC3)
+ *  \brief USB Device definitions for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  Architecture specific USB Device definitions for the Atmel 32-bit UC3 AVR microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __USBDEVICE_UC3_H__
+#define __USBDEVICE_UC3_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../USBController.h"
+		#include "../StdDescriptors.h"
+		#include "../USBInterrupt.h"
+		#include "../Endpoint.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** \name USB Device Mode Option Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** Mask for the Options parameter of the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the
+			 *  USB interface should be initialized in low speed (1.5Mb/s) mode.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Restrictions apply on the number, size and type of endpoints which can be used
+			 *        when running in low speed mode - please refer to the USB 2.0 specification.
+			 */
+			#define USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED                (1 << 0)
+
+			/** Mask for the Options parameter of the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the
+			 *  USB interface should be initialized in full speed (12Mb/s) mode.
+			 */
+			#define USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED               (0 << 0)
+
+			#if defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A3_AVR32) || defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A4_AVR32) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Mask for the Options parameter of the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the
+				 *  USB interface should be initialized in high speed (480Mb/s) mode.
+				 */
+				#define USB_DEVICE_OPT_HIGHSPEED           (1 << 1)
+			#endif
+			//@}
+
+			#if (!defined(NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL) && \
+			     (defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A3_AVR32) || defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A4_AVR32) || \
+				  defined(__DOXYGEN__)))
+				/** String descriptor index for the device's unique serial number string descriptor within the device.
+				 *  This unique serial number is used by the host to associate resources to the device (such as drivers or COM port
+				 *  number allocations) to a device regardless of the port it is plugged in to on the host. Some microcontrollers contain
+				 *  a unique serial number internally, and setting the device descriptors serial number string index to this value
+				 *  will cause it to use the internal serial number.
+				 *
+				 *  On unsupported devices, this will evaluate to \ref NO_DESCRIPTOR and so will force the host to create a pseudo-serial
+				 *  number for the device.
+				 */
+				#define USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL             0xDC
+
+				/** Length of the device's unique internal serial number, in bits, if present on the selected microcontroller
+				 *  model.
+				 */
+				#define INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS     120
+
+				/** Start address of the internal serial number, in the appropriate address space, if present on the selected microcontroller
+				 *  model.
+				 */
+				#define INTERNAL_SERIAL_START_ADDRESS   0x80800204
+			#else
+				#define USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL             NO_DESCRIPTOR
+
+				#define INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS     0
+				#define INTERNAL_SERIAL_START_ADDRESS   0
+			#endif
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Sends a Remote Wakeup request to the host. This signals to the host that the device should
+			 *  be taken out of suspended mode, and communications should resume.
+			 *
+			 *  Typically, this is implemented so that HID devices (mice, keyboards, etc.) can wake up the
+			 *  host computer when the host has suspended all USB devices to enter a low power state.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function should only be used if the device has indicated to the host that it
+			 *        supports the Remote Wakeup feature in the device descriptors, and should only be
+			 *        issued if the host is currently allowing remote wakeup events from the device (i.e.,
+			 *        the \ref USB_Device_RemoteWakeupEnabled flag is set). When the \c NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+			 *        compile time option is used, this function is unavailable.
+			 *
+			 *  \note The USB clock must be running for this function to operate. If the stack is initialized with
+			 *        the \ref USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL option enabled, the user must ensure that the PLL is running
+			 *        before attempting to call this function.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref Group_StdDescriptors for more information on the RMWAKEUP feature and device descriptors.
+			 */
+			void USB_Device_SendRemoteWakeup(void);
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Returns the current USB frame number, when in device mode. Every millisecond the USB bus is active (i.e. enumerated to a host)
+			 *  the frame number is incremented by one.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Current USB frame number from the USB controller.
+			 */
+			static inline uint16_t USB_Device_GetFrameNumber(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint16_t USB_Device_GetFrameNumber(void)
+			{
+				return AVR32_USBB.UDFNUM.fnum;
+			}
+
+			#if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS)
+				/** Enables the device mode Start Of Frame events. When enabled, this causes the
+				 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event to fire once per millisecond, synchronized to the USB bus,
+				 *  at the start of each USB frame when enumerated in device mode.
+				 *
+				 *  \note Not available when the \c NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined.
+				 */
+				static inline void USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+				static inline void USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents(void)
+				{
+					USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SOFI);
+				}
+
+				/** Disables the device mode Start Of Frame events. When disabled, this stops the firing of the
+				 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event when enumerated in device mode.
+				 *
+				 *  \note Not available when the \c NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined.
+				 */
+				static inline void USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+				static inline void USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents(void)
+				{
+					USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SOFI);
+				}
+			#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			static inline void USB_Device_SetLowSpeed(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Device_SetLowSpeed(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_USBB.UDCON.ls      = true;
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Device_SetFullSpeed(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Device_SetFullSpeed(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_USBB.UDCON.ls      = false;
+				#if defined(USB_DEVICE_OPT_HIGHSPEED)
+				AVR32_USBB.UDCON.spdconf = 3;
+				#endif
+			}
+
+			#if defined(USB_DEVICE_OPT_HIGHSPEED)
+			static inline void USB_Device_SetHighSpeed(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Device_SetHighSpeed(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_USBB.UDCON.ls      = false;
+				AVR32_USBB.UDCON.spdconf = 0;
+			}
+			#endif
+
+			static inline void USB_Device_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Device_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address)
+			{
+				AVR32_USBB.UDCON.uadd  = Address;
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Device_EnableDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Device_EnableDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address)
+			{
+				(void)Address;
+
+				AVR32_USBB.UDCON.adden = true;
+			}
+
+			static inline bool USB_Device_IsAddressSet(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline bool USB_Device_IsAddressSet(void)
+			{
+				return AVR32_USBB.UDCON.adden;
+			}
+
+			#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL != NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+			static inline void USB_Device_GetSerialString(uint16_t* const UnicodeString) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static inline void USB_Device_GetSerialString(uint16_t* const UnicodeString)
+			{
+				uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask();
+				GlobalInterruptDisable();
+
+				uint8_t* SigReadAddress = (uint8_t*)INTERNAL_SERIAL_START_ADDRESS;
+
+				for (uint8_t SerialCharNum = 0; SerialCharNum < (INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS / 4); SerialCharNum++)
+				{
+					uint8_t SerialByte = *SigReadAddress;
+
+					if (SerialCharNum & 0x01)
+					{
+						SerialByte >>= 4;
+						SigReadAddress++;
+					}
+
+					SerialByte &= 0x0F;
+
+					UnicodeString[SerialCharNum] = cpu_to_le16((SerialByte >= 10) ?
+															   (('A' - 10) + SerialByte) : ('0' + SerialByte));
+				}
+
+				SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt);
+			}
+			#endif
+
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/EndpointStream_UC3.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/EndpointStream_UC3.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6e9862927
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/EndpointStream_UC3.c
@@ -0,0 +1,235 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+
+#include "EndpointStream_UC3.h"
+
+#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
+uint8_t Endpoint_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length,
+                                uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)
+{
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+	uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
+	  Length -= *BytesProcessed;
+
+	while (Length)
+	{
+		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		{
+			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+			if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
+			{
+				*BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;
+				return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;
+			}
+
+			if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
+			  return ErrorCode;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			Endpoint_Discard_8();
+
+			Length--;
+			BytesInTransfer++;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t Endpoint_Null_Stream(uint16_t Length,
+                             uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)
+{
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+	uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
+	  Length -= *BytesProcessed;
+
+	while (Length)
+	{
+		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		{
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+			if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
+			{
+				*BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;
+				return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;
+			}
+
+			if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
+			  return ErrorCode;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			Endpoint_Write_8(0);
+
+			Length--;
+			BytesInTransfer++;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+/* The following abuses the C preprocessor in order to copy-paste common code with slight alterations,
+ * so that the code needs to be written once. It is a crude form of templating to reduce code maintenance. */
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(*BufferPtr)
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(*BufferPtr)
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Endpoint_Read_8()
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Stream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Endpoint_Read_8()
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+#if defined(ARCH_HAS_FLASH_ADDRESS_SPACE)
+	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_PStream_LE
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount
+	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(pgm_read_byte(BufferPtr))
+	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_PStream_BE
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount
+	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(pgm_read_byte(BufferPtr))
+	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+#endif
+
+#if defined(ARCH_HAS_EEPROM_ADDRESS_SPACE)
+	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_EStream_LE
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount
+	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(eeprom_read_byte(BufferPtr))
+	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_EStream_BE
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount
+	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(eeprom_read_byte(BufferPtr))
+	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_EStream_LE
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
+	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount
+	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_update_byte(BufferPtr, Endpoint_Read_8())
+	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_EStream_BE
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
+	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount
+	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_update_byte(BufferPtr, Endpoint_Read_8())
+	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(*BufferPtr)
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(*BufferPtr)
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Endpoint_Read_8()
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Endpoint_Read_8()
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"
+
+#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/EndpointStream_UC3.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/EndpointStream_UC3.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..831c71407
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/EndpointStream_UC3.h
@@ -0,0 +1,438 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Endpoint data stream transmission and reception management for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.
+ *  \copydetails Group_EndpointStreamRW_UC3
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
+ *  \defgroup Group_EndpointStreamRW_UC3 Read/Write of Multi-Byte Streams (UC3)
+ *  \brief Endpoint data stream transmission and reception management for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of data streams from
+ *  and to endpoints.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __ENDPOINT_STREAM_UC3_H__
+#define __ENDPOINT_STREAM_UC3_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../USBMode.h"
+		#include "../USBTask.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** \name Stream functions for null data */
+			//@{
+
+			/** Reads and discards the given number of bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank,
+			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically
+			 *  discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the user is responsible for manually
+			 *  discarding the last packet from the host via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,
+			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid
+			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time
+			 *  the endpoint bank becomes empty while there is still data to process (and after the current
+			 *  packet has been acknowledged) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the total number
+			 *  of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of
+			 *  \ref ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed
+			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters
+			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;
+			 *
+			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Discard_Stream(512, NULL)) != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;
+			 *
+			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;
+			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Discard_Stream(512, &BytesProcessed)) == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required
+			 *  }
+			 *
+			 *  if (ErrorCode != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to discard via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current
+			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length,
+			                                uint16_t* const BytesProcessed);
+
+			/** Writes a given number of zeroed bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank, sending
+			 *  full packets to the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically sent once the
+			 *  remaining bytes have been written; the user is responsible for manually sending the last
+			 *  packet to the host via the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,
+			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid
+			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time
+			 *  the endpoint bank becomes full while there is still data to process (and after the current
+			 *  packet transmission has been initiated) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the
+			 *  total number of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of
+			 *  \ref ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed
+			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters
+			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;
+			 *
+			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Null_Stream(512, NULL)) != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;
+			 *
+			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;
+			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Null_Stream(512, &BytesProcessed)) == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required
+			 *  }
+			 *
+			 *  if (ErrorCode != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of zero bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current
+			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Null_Stream(uint16_t Length,
+			                             uint16_t* const BytesProcessed);
+
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name Stream functions for RAM source/destination data */
+			//@{
+
+			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,
+			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;
+			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the
+			 *  \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,
+			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid
+			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time
+			 *  the endpoint bank becomes full while there is still data to process (and after the current
+			 *  packet transmission has been initiated) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the
+			 *  total number of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of
+			 *  \ref ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed
+			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters
+			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t DataStream[512];
+			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;
+			 *
+			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),
+			 *                                            NULL)) != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t  DataStream[512];
+			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;
+			 *
+			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;
+			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),
+			 *                                               &BytesProcessed)) == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required
+			 *  }
+			 *
+			 *  if (ErrorCode != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current
+			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                                 uint16_t Length,
+			                                 uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,
+			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;
+			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the
+			 *  \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current
+			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                                 uint16_t Length,
+			                                 uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,
+			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically
+			 *  discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the user is responsible for manually
+			 *  discarding the last packet from the host via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,
+			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid
+			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time
+			 *  the endpoint bank becomes empty while there is still data to process (and after the current
+			 *  packet has been acknowledged) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the total number
+			 *  of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of
+			 *  \ref ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed
+			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters
+			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t DataStream[512];
+			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;
+			 *
+			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),
+			 *                                           NULL)) != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t  DataStream[512];
+			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;
+			 *
+			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;
+			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),
+			 *                                              &BytesProcessed)) == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required
+			 *  }
+			 *
+			 *  if (ErrorCode != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current
+			 *                              transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(void* const Buffer,
+			                                uint16_t Length,
+			                                uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,
+			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically
+			 *  discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the user is responsible for manually
+			 *  discarding the last packet from the host via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current
+			 *                              transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Stream_BE(void* const Buffer,
+			                                uint16_t Length,
+			                                uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the CONTROL type endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,
+			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The host OUT acknowledgement is not automatically cleared
+			 *  in both failure and success states; the user is responsible for manually clearing the status OUT packet
+			 *  to finalize the transfer's status stage via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically sends the last packet in the data stage of the transaction; when the
+			 *        function returns, the user is responsible for clearing the <b>status</b> stage of the transaction.
+			 *        Note that the status stage packet is sent or received in the opposite direction of the data flow.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                                         uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the CONTROL type endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,
+			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The host OUT acknowledgement is not automatically cleared
+			 *  in both failure and success states; the user is responsible for manually clearing the status OUT packet
+			 *  to finalize the transfer's status stage via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically sends the last packet in the data stage of the transaction; when the
+			 *        function returns, the user is responsible for clearing the <b>status</b> stage of the transaction.
+			 *        Note that the status stage packet is sent or received in the opposite direction of the data flow.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_BE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                                         uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the CONTROL endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,
+			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The device IN acknowledgement is not
+			 *  automatically sent after success or failure states; the user is responsible for manually sending the
+			 *  status IN packet to finalize the transfer's status stage via the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically sends the last packet in the data stage of the transaction; when the
+			 *        function returns, the user is responsible for clearing the <b>status</b> stage of the transaction.
+			 *        Note that the status stage packet is sent or received in the opposite direction of the data flow.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in]  Length  Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(void* const Buffer,
+			                                        uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the CONTROL endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,
+			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The device IN acknowledgement is not
+			 *  automatically sent after success or failure states; the user is responsible for manually sending the
+			 *  status IN packet to finalize the transfer's status stage via the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically sends the last packet in the data stage of the transaction; when the
+			 *        function returns, the user is responsible for clearing the <b>status</b> stage of the transaction.
+			 *        Note that the status stage packet is sent or received in the opposite direction of the data flow.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in]  Length  Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_BE(void* const Buffer,
+			                                        uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			//@}
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Endpoint_UC3.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Endpoint_UC3.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5dce488f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Endpoint_UC3.c
@@ -0,0 +1,196 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+
+#include "../Endpoint.h"
+
+#if !defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE)
+uint8_t USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP_DEFAULT_SIZE;
+#endif
+
+volatile uint32_t USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint = ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP;
+volatile uint8_t* USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS];
+
+bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(const USB_Endpoint_Table_t* const Table,
+                                     const uint8_t Entries)
+{
+	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < Entries; i++)
+	{
+		if (!(Table[i].Address))
+		  continue;
+
+		if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(Table[i].Address, Table[i].Type, Table[i].Size, Table[i].Banks)))
+		{
+			return false;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_Prv(const uint8_t Number,
+                                    const uint32_t UECFG0Data)
+{
+	USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[Number] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[Number * ENDPOINT_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];
+
+#if defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE) || defined(ORDERED_EP_CONFIG)
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(Number);
+	Endpoint_EnableEndpoint();
+
+	(&AVR32_USBB.uecfg0)[Number] = 0;
+	(&AVR32_USBB.uecfg0)[Number] = UECFG0Data;
+
+	return Endpoint_IsConfigured();
+#else
+	for (uint8_t EPNum = Number; EPNum < ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS; EPNum++)
+	{
+		uint32_t UECFG0Temp;
+
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(EPNum);
+
+		if (EPNum == Number)
+		{
+			UECFG0Temp = UECFG0Data;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			UECFG0Temp = (&AVR32_USBB.uecfg0)[EPNum];
+		}
+
+		if (!(UECFG0Temp & AVR32_USBB_ALLOC_MASK))
+		  continue;
+
+		Endpoint_DisableEndpoint();
+		(&AVR32_USBB.uecfg0)[EPNum] &= ~AVR32_USBB_ALLOC_MASK;
+
+		Endpoint_EnableEndpoint();
+		(&AVR32_USBB.uecfg0)[EPNum] = UECFG0Temp;
+
+		if (!(Endpoint_IsConfigured()))
+		  return false;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(Number);
+	return true;
+#endif
+}
+
+void Endpoint_ClearEndpoints(void)
+{
+	for (uint8_t EPNum = 0; EPNum < ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS; EPNum++)
+	{
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(EPNum);
+		(&AVR32_USBB.uecfg0)[EPNum]    = 0;
+		(&AVR32_USBB.uecon0clr)[EPNum] = -1;
+		USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[EPNum]    = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[EPNum * 0x10000];
+		Endpoint_DisableEndpoint();
+	}
+}
+
+void Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(void)
+{
+	if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST)
+	{
+		while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+		{
+			if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+			  return;
+		}
+
+		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+		{
+			if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+			  return;
+		}
+
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+	}
+}
+
+#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
+uint8_t Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(void)
+{
+	#if (USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS < 0xFF)
+	uint8_t  TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;
+	#else
+	uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;
+	#endif
+
+	uint16_t PreviousFrameNumber = USB_Device_GetFrameNumber();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		if (Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection() == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+		{
+			if (Endpoint_IsINReady())
+			  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+			  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;
+		}
+
+		uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;
+
+		if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
+		else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)
+		  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_BusSuspended;
+		else if (Endpoint_IsStalled())
+		  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_EndpointStalled;
+
+		uint16_t CurrentFrameNumber = USB_Device_GetFrameNumber();
+
+		if (CurrentFrameNumber != PreviousFrameNumber)
+		{
+			PreviousFrameNumber = CurrentFrameNumber;
+
+			if (!(TimeoutMSRem--))
+			  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_Timeout;
+		}
+	}
+}
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Endpoint_UC3.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Endpoint_UC3.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cf35d2b60
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Endpoint_UC3.h
@@ -0,0 +1,794 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB Endpoint definitions for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.
+ *  \copydetails Group_EndpointManagement_UC3
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_EndpointRW
+ *  \defgroup Group_EndpointRW_UC3 Endpoint Data Reading and Writing (UC3)
+ *  \brief Endpoint data read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing from and to endpoints.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
+ *  \defgroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3 Read/Write of Primitive Data Types (UC3)
+ *  \brief Endpoint primitive read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of primitive data types
+ *  from and to endpoints.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement
+ *  \defgroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3 Endpoint Packet Management (UC3)
+ *  \brief Endpoint packet management definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to packet management of endpoints.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_EndpointManagement
+ *  \defgroup Group_EndpointManagement_UC3 Endpoint Management (UC3)
+ *  \brief Endpoint management definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros and enums related to endpoint management when in USB Device mode. This
+ *  module contains the endpoint management macros, as well as endpoint interrupt and data
+ *  send/receive functions for various data types.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __ENDPOINT_UC3_H__
+#define __ENDPOINT_UC3_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../USBTask.h"
+		#include "../USBInterrupt.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define ENDPOINT_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE            (64 * 1024UL)
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST
+			                                                                        ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes)
+			{
+				uint8_t  MaskVal    = 0;
+				uint16_t CheckBytes = 8;
+
+				while (CheckBytes < Bytes)
+				{
+					MaskVal++;
+					CheckBytes <<= 1;
+				}
+
+				return (MaskVal << AVR32_USBB_EPSIZE_OFFSET);
+			}
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			void Endpoint_ClearEndpoints(void);
+			bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_Prv(const uint8_t Number,
+			                                    const uint32_t UECFGXData);
+
+		/* External Variables: */
+			extern volatile uint32_t USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint;
+			extern volatile uint8_t* USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[];
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			#if (!defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
+				/** Default size of the default control endpoint's bank, until altered by the control endpoint bank size
+				 *  value in the device descriptor. Not available if the \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token is defined.
+				 */
+				#define ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP_DEFAULT_SIZE     8
+			#endif
+
+			#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				#if defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A3_AVR32) || defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A4_AVR32)
+					#define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS        8
+				#else
+					/** Total number of endpoints (including the default control endpoint at address 0) which may
+					 *  be used in the device. Different AVR models support different amounts of endpoints,
+					 *  this value reflects the maximum number of endpoints for the currently selected AVR model.
+					 */
+					#define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS        7
+				#endif
+			#else
+				#define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS            1
+			#endif
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible error return codes of the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady() function.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointRW_UC3
+			 */
+			enum Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError                 = 0, /**< Endpoint is ready for next packet, no error. */
+				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_EndpointStalled         = 1, /**< The endpoint was stalled during the stream
+				                                                 *   transfer by the host or device.
+				                                                 */
+				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected      = 2,	/**< Device was disconnected from the host while
+				                                                 *   waiting for the endpoint to become ready.
+				                                                 */
+				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_BusSuspended            = 3, /**< The USB bus has been suspended by the host and
+				                                                 *   no USB endpoint traffic can occur until the bus
+				                                                 *   has resumed.
+				                                                 */
+				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_Timeout                 = 4, /**< The host failed to accept or send the next packet
+				                                                 *   within the software timeout period set by the
+				                                                 *   \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro.
+				                                                 */
+			};
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Configures the specified endpoint address with the given endpoint type, bank size and number of hardware
+			 *  banks. Once configured, the endpoint may be read from or written to, depending on its direction.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Address    Endpoint address to configure.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Type       Type of endpoint to configure, a \c EP_TYPE_* mask. Not all endpoint types
+			 *                        are available on Low Speed USB devices - refer to the USB 2.0 specification.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Size       Size of the endpoint's bank, where packets are stored before they are transmitted
+			 *                        to the USB host, or after they have been received from the USB host (depending on
+			 *                        the endpoint's data direction). The bank size must indicate the maximum packet size
+			 *                        that the endpoint can handle.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Banks      Number of hardware banks to use for the endpoint being configured.
+			 *
+			 *  \attention When the \c ORDERED_EP_CONFIG compile time option is used, Endpoints <b>must</b> be configured in
+			 *             ascending order, or bank corruption will occur.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Different endpoints may have different maximum packet sizes based on the endpoint's index - refer to
+			 *        the chosen microcontroller model's datasheet to determine the maximum bank size for each endpoint.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note The default control endpoint should not be manually configured by the user application, as
+			 *        it is automatically configured by the library internally.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine will automatically select the specified endpoint upon success. Upon failure, the endpoint
+			 *        which failed to reconfigure correctly will be selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the configuration succeeded, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(const uint8_t Address,
+			                                              const uint8_t Type,
+			                                              const uint16_t Size,
+			                                              const uint8_t Banks) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(const uint8_t Address,
+			                                              const uint8_t Type,
+			                                              const uint16_t Size,
+			                                              const uint8_t Banks)
+			{
+				uint8_t Number = (Address & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK);
+
+				if (Number >= ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS)
+				  return false;
+
+				return Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_Prv(Number,
+				                                      (AVR32_USBB_ALLOC_MASK |
+				                                       ((uint32_t)Type << AVR32_USBB_EPTYPE_OFFSET) |
+				                                       ((Address & ENDPOINT_DIR_IN) ? AVR32_USBB_UECFG0_EPDIR_MASK : 0) |
+				                                       ((Banks > 1) ? AVR32_USBB_UECFG0_EPBK_SINGLE : AVR32_USBB_UECFG0_EPBK_DOUBLE) |
+				                                       Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(Size)));
+			}
+
+			/** Indicates the number of bytes currently stored in the current endpoint's selected bank.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointRW_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \return Total number of bytes in the currently selected Endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(void)
+			{
+				return (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].byct;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines the currently selected endpoint's direction.
+			 *
+			 *  \return The currently selected endpoint's direction, as a \c ENDPOINT_DIR_* mask.
+			 */
+			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection(void)
+			{
+				return ((&AVR32_USBB.UECFG0)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].epdir ? ENDPOINT_DIR_IN : ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT);
+			}
+
+			/** Get the endpoint address of the currently selected endpoint. This is typically used to save
+			 *  the currently selected endpoint so that it can be restored after another endpoint has been
+			 *  manipulated.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Index of the currently selected endpoint.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint(void)
+			{
+				return (USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint | Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection());
+			}
+
+			/** Selects the given endpoint address.
+			 *
+			 *  Any endpoint operations which do not require the endpoint address to be indicated will operate on
+			 *  the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Address  Endpoint address to select.
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(const uint8_t Address)
+			{
+				USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint = (Address & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK);
+			}
+
+			/** Resets the endpoint bank FIFO. This clears all the endpoint banks and resets the USB controller's
+			 *  data In and Out pointers to the bank's contents.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Address  Endpoint number whose FIFO buffers are to be reset.
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(const uint8_t Address)
+			{
+				uint32_t EndpointNumber = (Address & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK);
+
+				AVR32_USBB.uerst |=  (AVR32_USBB_EPRST0_MASK << EndpointNumber);
+				AVR32_USBB.uerst &= ~(AVR32_USBB_EPRST0_MASK << EndpointNumber);
+				USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[EndpointNumber] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[EndpointNumber * ENDPOINT_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];
+			}
+
+			/** Enables the currently selected endpoint so that data can be sent and received through it to
+			 *  and from a host.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Endpoints must first be configured properly via \ref Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint().
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_EnableEndpoint(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_EnableEndpoint(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_USBB.uerst |=  (AVR32_USBB_EPEN0_MASK << USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint);
+			}
+
+			/** Disables the currently selected endpoint so that data cannot be sent and received through it
+			 *  to and from a host.
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_DisableEndpoint(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_DisableEndpoint(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_USBB.uerst &= ~(AVR32_USBB_EPEN0_MASK << USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint);
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is enabled, but not necessarily configured.
+			 *
+			 * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint is enabled, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsEnabled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsEnabled(void)
+			{
+				return ((AVR32_USBB.uerst & (AVR32_USBB_EPEN0_MASK << USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint)) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Retrieves the number of busy banks in the currently selected endpoint, which have been queued for
+			 *  transmission via the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() command, or are awaiting acknowledgement via the
+			 *  \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() command.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \return Total number of busy banks in the selected endpoint.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetBusyBanks(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetBusyBanks(void)
+			{
+				return (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].nbusybk;
+			}
+
+			/** Aborts all pending IN transactions on the currently selected endpoint, once the bank
+			 *  has been queued for transmission to the host via \ref Endpoint_ClearIN(). This function
+			 *  will terminate all queued transactions, resetting the endpoint banks ready for a new
+			 *  packet.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_AbortPendingIN(void)
+			{
+				while (Endpoint_GetBusyBanks() != 0)
+				{
+					(&AVR32_USBB.UECON0SET)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].killbks = true;
+					while ((&AVR32_USBB.UECON0)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].killbk);
+				}
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint may be read from (if data is waiting in the endpoint
+			 *  bank and the endpoint is an OUT direction, or if the bank is not yet full if the endpoint is an IN
+			 *  direction). This function will return false if an error has occurred in the endpoint, if the endpoint
+			 *  is an OUT direction and no packet (or an empty packet) has been received, or if the endpoint is an IN
+			 *  direction and the endpoint bank is full.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint may be read from or written to, depending
+			 *          on its direction.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed(void)
+			{
+				return (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].rwall;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is configured.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint has been configured, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsConfigured(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsConfigured(void)
+			{
+				return (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].cfgok;
+			}
+
+			/** Returns a mask indicating which INTERRUPT type endpoints have interrupted - i.e. their
+			 *  interrupt duration has elapsed. Which endpoints have interrupted can be determined by
+			 *  masking the return value against <tt>(1 << <i>{Endpoint Number}</i>)</tt>.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Mask whose bits indicate which endpoints have interrupted.
+			 */
+			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_GetEndpointInterrupts(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_GetEndpointInterrupts(void)
+			{
+				return ((AVR32_USBB.udint & (AVR32_USBB_EP6INT_MASK | AVR32_USBB_EP5INT_MASK |
+				                             AVR32_USBB_EP4INT_MASK | AVR32_USBB_EP3INT_MASK |
+				                             AVR32_USBB_EP2INT_MASK | AVR32_USBB_EP1INT_MASK |
+				                             AVR32_USBB_EP0INT_MASK)) >> AVR32_USBB_EP0INT_OFFSET);
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the specified endpoint number has interrupted (valid only for INTERRUPT type
+			 *  endpoints).
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Address  Address of the endpoint whose interrupt flag should be tested.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the specified endpoint has interrupted, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(const uint8_t Address)
+			{
+				return ((Endpoint_GetEndpointInterrupts() & (AVR32_USBB_EP0INT_MASK << (Address & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK))) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the selected IN endpoint is ready for a new packet to be sent to the host.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the current endpoint is ready for an IN packet, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsINReady(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsINReady(void)
+			{
+				return (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].txini;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the selected OUT endpoint has received new packet from the host.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if current endpoint is has received an OUT packet, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsOUTReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsOUTReceived(void)
+			{
+				return (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].rxouti;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the current CONTROL type endpoint has received a SETUP packet.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the selected endpoint has received a SETUP packet, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived(void)
+			{
+				return (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].rxstpi;
+			}
+
+			/** Clears a received SETUP packet on the currently selected CONTROL type endpoint, freeing up the
+			 *  endpoint for the next packet.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \note This is not applicable for non CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_ClearSETUP(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_ClearSETUP(void)
+			{
+				(&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0CLR)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].rxstpic = true;
+				USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint * ENDPOINT_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];
+			}
+
+			/** Sends an IN packet to the host on the currently selected endpoint, freeing up the endpoint for the
+			 *  next packet and switching to the alternative endpoint bank if double banked.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_ClearIN(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_ClearIN(void)
+			{
+				(&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0CLR)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].txinic   = true;
+				(&AVR32_USBB.UECON0CLR)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].fifoconc = true;
+				USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint * ENDPOINT_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];
+			}
+
+			/** Acknowledges an OUT packet to the host on the currently selected endpoint, freeing up the endpoint
+			 *  for the next packet and switching to the alternative endpoint bank if double banked.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_ClearOUT(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_ClearOUT(void)
+			{
+				(&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0CLR)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].rxoutic  = true;
+				(&AVR32_USBB.UECON0CLR)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].fifoconc = true;
+				USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint * ENDPOINT_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];
+			}
+
+			/** Stalls the current endpoint, indicating to the host that a logical problem occurred with the
+			 *  indicated endpoint and that the current transfer sequence should be aborted. This provides a
+			 *  way for devices to indicate invalid commands to the host so that the current transfer can be
+			 *  aborted and the host can begin its own recovery sequence.
+			 *
+			 *  The currently selected endpoint remains stalled until either the \ref Endpoint_ClearStall() macro
+			 *  is called, or the host issues a CLEAR FEATURE request to the device for the currently selected
+			 *  endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_StallTransaction(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_StallTransaction(void)
+			{
+				(&AVR32_USBB.UECON0SET)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].stallrqs = true;
+			}
+
+			/** Clears the STALL condition on the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_ClearStall(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_ClearStall(void)
+			{
+				(&AVR32_USBB.UECON0CLR)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].stallrqc = true;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is stalled, \c false otherwise.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint is stalled, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsStalled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsStalled(void)
+			{
+				return (&AVR32_USBB.UECON0)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].stallrq;
+			}
+
+			/** Resets the data toggle of the currently selected endpoint. */
+			static inline void Endpoint_ResetDataToggle(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_ResetDataToggle(void)
+			{
+				(&AVR32_USBB.UECON0SET)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].rstdts = true;
+			}
+
+			/** Sets the direction of the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] DirectionMask  New endpoint direction, as a \c ENDPOINT_DIR_* mask.
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(const uint32_t DirectionMask) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(const uint32_t DirectionMask)
+			{
+				(&AVR32_USBB.UECFG0)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].epdir = (DirectionMask == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+			}
+
+			/** Reads one byte from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next byte in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_Read_8(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_Read_8(void)
+			{
+				return *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);
+			}
+
+			/** Writes one byte to the currently selected endpoint's bank, for IN direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write into the the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_8(const uint8_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_8(const uint8_t Data)
+			{
+				*(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++) = Data;
+			}
+
+			/** Discards one byte from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_8(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_8(void)
+			{
+				uint8_t Dummy;
+
+				Dummy = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);
+
+				(void)Dummy;
+			}
+
+			/** Reads two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for OUT
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next two bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_LE(void)
+			{
+				uint16_t Byte0 = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);
+				uint16_t Byte1 = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);
+
+				return ((Byte1 << 8) | Byte0);
+			}
+
+			/** Reads two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for OUT
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next two bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_BE(void)
+			{
+				uint16_t Byte0 = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);
+				uint16_t Byte1 = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);
+
+				return ((Byte0 << 8) | Byte1);
+			}
+
+			/** Writes two bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for IN
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data)
+			{
+				*(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data & 0xFF);
+				*(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 8);
+			}
+
+			/** Writes two bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for IN
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data)
+			{
+				*(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 8);
+				*(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data & 0xFF);
+			}
+
+			/** Discards two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_16(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_16(void)
+			{
+				uint8_t Dummy;
+
+				Dummy = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);
+				Dummy = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);
+
+				(void)Dummy;
+			}
+
+			/** Reads four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for OUT
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next four bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_LE(void)
+			{
+				uint32_t Byte0 = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);
+				uint32_t Byte1 = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);
+				uint32_t Byte2 = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);
+				uint32_t Byte3 = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);
+
+				return ((Byte3 << 24) | (Byte2 << 16) | (Byte1 << 8) | Byte0);
+			}
+
+			/** Reads four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for OUT
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next four bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_BE(void)
+			{
+				uint32_t Byte0 = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);
+				uint32_t Byte1 = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);
+				uint32_t Byte2 = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);
+				uint32_t Byte3 = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);
+
+				return ((Byte0 << 24) | (Byte1 << 16) | (Byte2 << 8) | Byte3);
+			}
+
+			/** Writes four bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for IN
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data)
+			{
+				*(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data &  0xFF);
+				*(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 8);
+				*(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 16);
+				*(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 24);
+			}
+
+			/** Writes four bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for IN
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data)
+			{
+				*(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 24);
+				*(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 16);
+				*(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data >> 8);
+				*(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++) = (Data &  0xFF);
+			}
+
+			/** Discards four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_UC3
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_32(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_32(void)
+			{
+				uint8_t Dummy;
+
+				Dummy = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);
+				Dummy = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);
+				Dummy = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);
+				Dummy = *(USB_Endpoint_FIFOPos[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint]++);
+
+				(void)Dummy;
+			}
+
+		/* External Variables: */
+			/** Global indicating the maximum packet size of the default control endpoint located at address
+			 *  0 in the device. This value is set to the value indicated in the device descriptor in the user
+			 *  project once the USB interface is initialized into device mode.
+			 *
+			 *  If space is an issue, it is possible to fix this to a static value by defining the control
+			 *  endpoint size in the \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token passed to the compiler in the makefile
+			 *  via the -D switch. When a fixed control endpoint size is used, the size is no longer dynamically
+			 *  read from the descriptors at runtime and instead fixed to the given value. When used, it is
+			 *  important that the descriptor control endpoint size value matches the size given as the
+			 *  \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token - it is recommended that the \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token
+			 *  be used in the device descriptors to ensure this.
+			 *
+			 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
+			 *             changed in value.
+			 */
+			#if (!defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
+				extern uint8_t USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize;
+			#else
+				#define USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE
+			#endif
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Configures a table of endpoint descriptions, in sequence. This function can be used to configure multiple
+			 *  endpoints at the same time.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Endpoints with a zero address will be ignored, thus this function cannot be used to configure the
+			 *        control endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Table    Pointer to a table of endpoint descriptions.
+			 *  \param[in] Entries  Number of entries in the endpoint table to configure.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if all endpoints configured successfully, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(const USB_Endpoint_Table_t* const Table,
+			                                     const uint8_t Entries);
+
+			/** Completes the status stage of a control transfer on a CONTROL type endpoint automatically,
+			 *  with respect to the data direction. This is a convenience function which can be used to
+			 *  simplify user control request handling.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should not be called on non CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 */
+			void Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(void);
+
+			/** Spin-loops until the currently selected non-control endpoint is ready for the next packet of data
+			 *  to be read or written to it.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should not be called on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointRW_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(void);
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Host_UC3.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Host_UC3.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..77807525f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Host_UC3.c
@@ -0,0 +1,297 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_HOST_C
+#include "../Host.h"
+
+void USB_Host_ProcessNextHostState(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ErrorCode    = HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError;
+	uint8_t SubErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError;
+
+	static uint16_t WaitMSRemaining;
+	static uint8_t  PostWaitState;
+
+	switch (USB_HostState)
+	{
+		case HOST_STATE_WaitForDevice:
+			if (WaitMSRemaining)
+			{
+				if ((SubErrorCode = USB_Host_WaitMS(1)) != HOST_WAITERROR_Successful)
+				{
+					USB_HostState = PostWaitState;
+					ErrorCode     = HOST_ENUMERROR_WaitStage;
+					break;
+				}
+
+				if (!(--WaitMSRemaining))
+				  USB_HostState = PostWaitState;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Powered:
+			WaitMSRemaining = HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS;
+
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForDeviceSettle;
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForDeviceSettle:
+			if (WaitMSRemaining--)
+			{
+				Delay_MS(1);
+				break;
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off();
+
+				USB_OTGPAD_On();
+				USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Enable();
+				USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_On();
+
+				#if defined(NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT)
+				USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Enable();
+				USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_On();
+				#endif
+
+				USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForConnect;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Powered_WaitForConnect:
+			if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_DCONNI))
+			{
+				USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DCONNI);
+				USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DDISCI);
+
+				USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_VBERRI);
+				USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_VBERRI);
+
+				USB_Host_ResumeBus();
+				Pipe_ClearPipes();
+
+				HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(100, HOST_STATE_Powered_DoReset);
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Powered_DoReset:
+			USB_Host_ResetDevice();
+
+			HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(200, HOST_STATE_Powered_ConfigPipe);
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Powered_ConfigPipe:
+			if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE, EP_TYPE_CONTROL, ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE, 1)))
+			{
+				ErrorCode    = HOST_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigError;
+				SubErrorCode = 0;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Default;
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Default:
+			USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+				{
+					.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
+					.bRequest      = REQ_GetDescriptor,
+					.wValue        = (DTYPE_Device << 8),
+					.wIndex        = 0,
+					.wLength       = 8,
+				};
+
+			uint8_t DataBuffer[8];
+
+			Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+			if ((SubErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(DataBuffer)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				ErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_ControlError;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			USB_Host_ControlPipeSize = DataBuffer[offsetof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t, Endpoint0Size)];
+
+			USB_Host_ResetDevice();
+
+			HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(200, HOST_STATE_Default_PostReset);
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Default_PostReset:
+			if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE, EP_TYPE_CONTROL, ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, USB_Host_ControlPipeSize, 1)))
+			{
+				ErrorCode    = HOST_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigError;
+				SubErrorCode = 0;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+				{
+					.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
+					.bRequest      = REQ_SetAddress,
+					.wValue        = USB_HOST_DEVICEADDRESS,
+					.wIndex        = 0,
+					.wLength       = 0,
+				};
+
+			if ((SubErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+			{
+				ErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_ControlError;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(100, HOST_STATE_Default_PostAddressSet);
+			break;
+		case HOST_STATE_Default_PostAddressSet:
+			USB_Host_SetDeviceAddress(USB_HOST_DEVICEADDRESS);
+
+			USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Addressed;
+
+			EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete();
+			break;
+
+		default:
+			break;
+	}
+
+	if ((ErrorCode != HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError) && (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Unattached))
+	{
+		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(ErrorCode, SubErrorCode);
+
+		USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off();
+
+		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();
+
+		USB_ResetInterface();
+	}
+}
+
+uint8_t USB_Host_WaitMS(uint8_t MS)
+{
+	bool    BusSuspended = USB_Host_IsBusSuspended();
+	uint8_t ErrorCode    = HOST_WAITERROR_Successful;
+	bool    HSOFIEnabled = USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+
+	USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+	USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+
+	USB_Host_ResumeBus();
+
+	while (MS)
+	{
+		if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI))
+		{
+			USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+			MS--;
+		}
+
+		if ((USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached) || (USB_CurrentMode != USB_MODE_Host))
+		{
+			ErrorCode = HOST_WAITERROR_DeviceDisconnect;
+
+			break;
+		}
+
+		if (Pipe_IsError())
+		{
+			Pipe_ClearError();
+			ErrorCode = HOST_WAITERROR_PipeError;
+
+			break;
+		}
+
+		if (Pipe_IsStalled())
+		{
+			Pipe_ClearStall();
+			ErrorCode = HOST_WAITERROR_SetupStalled;
+
+			break;
+		}
+	}
+
+	if (BusSuspended)
+	  USB_Host_SuspendBus();
+
+	if (HSOFIEnabled)
+	  USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+
+	return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+static void USB_Host_ResetDevice(void)
+{
+	bool BusSuspended = USB_Host_IsBusSuspended();
+
+	USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_DDISCI);
+
+	USB_Host_ResetBus();
+	while (!(USB_Host_IsBusResetComplete()));
+	USB_Host_ResumeBus();
+
+	USB_Host_ConfigurationNumber = 0;
+
+	bool HSOFIEnabled = USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+
+	USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+	USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+
+	for (uint8_t MSRem = 10; MSRem != 0; MSRem--)
+	{
+		/* Workaround for powerless-pull-up devices. After a USB bus reset,
+		   all disconnection interrupts are suppressed while a USB frame is
+		   looked for - if it is found within 10ms, the device is still
+		   present.                                                        */
+
+		if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI))
+		{
+			USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+			USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DDISCI);
+			break;
+		}
+
+		Delay_MS(1);
+	}
+
+	if (HSOFIEnabled)
+	  USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+
+	if (BusSuspended)
+	  USB_Host_SuspendBus();
+
+	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_DDISCI);
+}
+
+#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Host_UC3.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Host_UC3.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..eb803b073
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Host_UC3.h
@@ -0,0 +1,363 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB Host definitions for the AVR32 UC3B microcontrollers.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Host_UC3B
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Host
+ *  \defgroup Group_Host_UC3B Host Management (UC3B)
+ *  \brief USB Host definitions for the AVR32 UC3B microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  Architecture specific USB Host definitions for the Atmel 32-bit AVR UC3B microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __USBHOST_UC3B_H__
+#define __USBHOST_UC3B_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../StdDescriptors.h"
+		#include "../Pipe.h"
+		#include "../USBInterrupt.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the fixed USB device address which any attached device is enumerated to when in
+			 *  host mode. As only one USB device may be attached to the AVR in host mode at any one time
+			 *  and that the address used is not important (other than the fact that it is non-zero), a
+			 *  fixed value is specified by the library.
+			 */
+			#define USB_HOST_DEVICEADDRESS                 1
+
+			#if !defined(HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Constant for the delay in milliseconds after a device is connected before the library
+				 *  will start the enumeration process. Some devices require a delay of up to 5 seconds
+				 *  after connection before the enumeration process can start or incorrect operation will
+				 *  occur.
+				 *
+				 *  The default delay value may be overridden in the user project makefile by defining the
+				 *  \c HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS token to the required delay in milliseconds, and passed to the
+				 *  compiler using the -D switch.
+				 */
+				#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS        1000
+			#endif
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the error codes for the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_HostError() event.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref Group_Events for more information on this event.
+			 */
+			enum USB_Host_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				HOST_ERROR_VBusVoltageDip       = 0, /**< VBUS voltage dipped to an unacceptable level. This
+				                                      *   error may be the result of an attached device drawing
+				                                      *   too much current from the VBUS line, or due to the
+				                                      *   AVR's power source being unable to supply sufficient
+				                                      *   current.
+				                                      */
+			};
+
+			/** Enum for the error codes for the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed() event.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref Group_Events for more information on this event.
+			 */
+			enum USB_Host_EnumerationErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError          = 0, /**< No error occurred. Used internally, this is not a valid
+				                                      *   ErrorCode parameter value for the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed()
+				                                      *   event.
+				                                      */
+				HOST_ENUMERROR_WaitStage        = 1, /**< One of the delays between enumeration steps failed
+				                                      *   to complete successfully, due to a timeout or other
+				                                      *   error.
+				                                      */
+				HOST_ENUMERROR_NoDeviceDetected = 2, /**< No device was detected, despite the USB data lines
+				                                      *   indicating the attachment of a device.
+				                                      */
+				HOST_ENUMERROR_ControlError     = 3, /**< One of the enumeration control requests failed to
+				                                      *   complete successfully.
+				                                      */
+				HOST_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigError  = 4, /**< The default control pipe (address 0) failed to
+				                                      *   configure correctly.
+				                                      */
+			};
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Returns the current USB frame number, when in host mode. Every millisecond the USB bus is active (i.e. not suspended)
+			 *  the frame number is incremented by one.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Current USB frame number from the USB controller.
+			 */
+			static inline uint16_t USB_Host_GetFrameNumber(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint16_t USB_Host_GetFrameNumber(void)
+			{
+				return AVR32_USBB_UHFNUM;
+			}
+
+			#if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS)
+				/** Enables the host mode Start Of Frame events. When enabled, this causes the
+				 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Host_StartOfFrame() event to fire once per millisecond, synchronized to the USB bus,
+				 *  at the start of each USB frame when a device is enumerated while in host mode.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This function is not available when the \c NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined.
+				 */
+				static inline void USB_Host_EnableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+				static inline void USB_Host_EnableSOFEvents(void)
+				{
+					USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+				}
+
+				/** Disables the host mode Start Of Frame events. When disabled, this stops the firing of the
+				 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Host_StartOfFrame() event when enumerated in host mode.
+				 *
+				 *  \note This function is not available when the \c NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined.
+				 */
+				static inline void USB_Host_DisableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+				static inline void USB_Host_DisableSOFEvents(void)
+				{
+					USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+				}
+			#endif
+
+			/** Resets the USB bus, including the endpoints in any attached device and pipes on the AVR host.
+			 *  USB bus resets leave the default control pipe configured (if already configured).
+			 *
+			 *  If the USB bus has been suspended prior to issuing a bus reset, the attached device will be
+			 *  woken up automatically and the bus resumed after the reset has been correctly issued.
+			 */
+			static inline void USB_Host_ResetBus(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Host_ResetBus(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_USBB.UHCON.reset = true;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if a previously issued bus reset (via the \ref USB_Host_ResetBus() macro) has
+			 *  completed.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if no bus reset is currently being sent, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool USB_Host_IsBusResetComplete(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool USB_Host_IsBusResetComplete(void)
+			{
+				return AVR32_USBB.UHCON.reset;
+			}
+
+			/** Resumes USB communications with an attached and enumerated device, by resuming the transmission
+			 *  of the 1MS Start Of Frame messages to the device. When resumed, USB communications between the
+			 *  host and attached device may occur.
+			 */
+			static inline void USB_Host_ResumeBus(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Host_ResumeBus(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_USBB.UHCON.sofe = true;
+			}
+
+			/** Suspends the USB bus, preventing any communications from occurring between the host and attached
+			 *  device until the bus has been resumed. This stops the transmission of the 1MS Start Of Frame
+			 *  messages to the device.
+			 *
+			 *  \note While the USB bus is suspended, all USB interrupt sources are also disabled; this means that
+			 *        some events (such as device disconnections) will not fire until the bus is resumed.
+			 */
+			static inline void USB_Host_SuspendBus(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Host_SuspendBus(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_USBB.UHCON.sofe = false;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the USB bus has been suspended via the use of the \ref USB_Host_SuspendBus() macro,
+			 *  false otherwise. While suspended, no USB communications can occur until the bus is resumed,
+			 *  except for the Remote Wakeup event from the device if supported.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the bus is currently suspended, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool USB_Host_IsBusSuspended(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool USB_Host_IsBusSuspended(void)
+			{
+				return AVR32_USBB.UHCON.sofe;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the attached device is currently enumerated in Full Speed mode (12Mb/s), or
+			 *  false if the attached device is enumerated in Low Speed mode (1.5Mb/s).
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the attached device is enumerated in Full Speed mode, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool USB_Host_IsDeviceFullSpeed(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool USB_Host_IsDeviceFullSpeed(void)
+			{
+				return (AVR32_USBB.USBSTA.speed == AVR32_USBB_SPEED_FULL);
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the attached device is currently issuing a Remote Wakeup request, requesting
+			 *  that the host resume the USB bus and wake up the device, \c false otherwise.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the attached device has sent a Remote Wakeup request, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool USB_Host_IsRemoteWakeupSent(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool USB_Host_IsRemoteWakeupSent(void)
+			{
+				return AVR32_USBB.UHINT.rxrsmi;
+			}
+
+			/** Clears the flag indicating that a Remote Wakeup request has been issued by an attached device. */
+			static inline void USB_Host_ClearRemoteWakeupSent(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Host_ClearRemoteWakeupSent(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR.rxrsmic = true;
+			}
+
+			/** Accepts a Remote Wakeup request from an attached device. This must be issued in response to
+			 *  a device's Remote Wakeup request within 2ms for the request to be accepted and the bus to
+			 *  be resumed.
+			 */
+			static inline void USB_Host_ResumeFromWakeupRequest(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Host_ResumeFromWakeupRequest(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_USBB.UHCON.resume = true;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if a resume from Remote Wakeup request is currently being sent to an attached
+			 *  device.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if no resume request is currently being sent, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool USB_Host_IsResumeFromWakeupRequestSent(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool USB_Host_IsResumeFromWakeupRequestSent(void)
+			{
+				return AVR32_USBB.UHCON.resume;
+			}
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			static inline void USB_Host_HostMode_On(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Host_HostMode_On(void)
+			{
+				// Not required for UC3B
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Host_HostMode_Off(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Host_HostMode_Off(void)
+			{
+				// Not required for UC3B
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Enable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Enable(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vbushwc = false;
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Enable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Enable(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vbushwc = true;
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_On(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_On(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_USBB.USBSTASET.vbusrqs = true;
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_On(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_On(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_USBB.USBSTASET.vbusrqs = true;
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.vbusrqc = true;
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.vbusrqc = true;
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Host_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Host_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address)
+			{
+				AVR32_USBB.UHADDR1.uhaddr_p0 = Address;
+				AVR32_USBB.UHADDR1.uhaddr_p1 = Address;
+				AVR32_USBB.UHADDR1.uhaddr_p2 = Address;
+				AVR32_USBB.UHADDR1.uhaddr_p3 = Address;
+				AVR32_USBB.UHADDR2.uhaddr_p4 = Address;
+				AVR32_USBB.UHADDR2.uhaddr_p5 = Address;
+				AVR32_USBB.UHADDR2.uhaddr_p6 = Address;
+			}
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			enum USB_Host_WaitMSErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				HOST_WAITERROR_Successful       = 0,
+				HOST_WAITERROR_DeviceDisconnect = 1,
+				HOST_WAITERROR_PipeError        = 2,
+				HOST_WAITERROR_SetupStalled     = 3,
+			};
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			void    USB_Host_ProcessNextHostState(void);
+			uint8_t USB_Host_WaitMS(uint8_t MS);
+
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_HOST_C)
+				static void USB_Host_ResetDevice(void);
+			#endif
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/PipeStream_UC3.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/PipeStream_UC3.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7dfe44858
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/PipeStream_UC3.c
@@ -0,0 +1,166 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+
+#include "PipeStream_UC3.h"
+
+uint8_t Pipe_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length,
+                            uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)
+{
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+	uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;
+
+	Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_IN);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
+	  Length -= *BytesProcessed;
+
+	while (Length)
+	{
+		if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		{
+			Pipe_ClearIN();
+
+			if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
+			{
+				*BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;
+				return PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;
+			}
+
+			if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))
+			  return ErrorCode;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			Pipe_Discard_8();
+
+			Length--;
+			BytesInTransfer++;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t Pipe_Null_Stream(uint16_t Length,
+                         uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)
+{
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+	uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;
+
+	Pipe_SetPipeToken(PIPE_TOKEN_OUT);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
+	  Length -= *BytesProcessed;
+
+	while (Length)
+	{
+		if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		{
+			Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+			if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
+			{
+				*BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;
+				return PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;
+			}
+
+			USB_USBTask();
+
+			if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))
+			  return ErrorCode;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			Pipe_Write_8(0);
+
+			Length--;
+			BytesInTransfer++;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+/* The following abuses the C preprocessor in order to copy-paste common code with slight alterations,
+ * so that the code needs to be written once. It is a crude form of templating to reduce code maintenance. */
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Write_Stream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_OUT
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearOUT()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   DataStream += Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Pipe_Write_8(*BufferPtr)
+#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Write_Stream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_OUT
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearOUT()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   DataStream -= Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Pipe_Write_8(*BufferPtr)
+#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Read_Stream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_IN
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearIN()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   DataStream += Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Pipe_Read_8()
+#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Pipe_Read_Stream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_TOKEN                            PIPE_TOKEN_IN
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE()                     Pipe_ClearIN()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   DataStream -= Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Pipe_Read_8()
+#include "Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"
+
+#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/PipeStream_UC3.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/PipeStream_UC3.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4dd79c975
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/PipeStream_UC3.h
@@ -0,0 +1,352 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Pipe data stream transmission and reception management for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.
+ *  \copydetails Group_PipeStreamRW_UC3
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_PipeStreamRW
+ *  \defgroup Group_PipeStreamRW_UC3 Read/Write of Multi-Byte Streams (UC3)
+ *  \brief Pipe data stream transmission and reception management for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of data streams from
+ *  and to pipes.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __PIPE_STREAM_UC3_H__
+#define __PIPE_STREAM_UC3_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../USBMode.h"
+		#include "../USBTask.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** \name Stream functions for null data */
+			//@{
+
+			/** Reads and discards the given number of bytes from the pipe, discarding fully read packets from the host
+			 *  as needed. The last packet is not automatically discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the
+			 *  user is responsible for manually discarding the last packet from the device via the \ref Pipe_ClearIN() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once, failing or
+			 *  succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid storage location, the transfer
+			 *  will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time the pipe bank becomes empty while there is still data
+			 *  to process (and after the current packet has been acknowledged) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with
+			 *  the total number of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of
+			 *  \ref PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed in the user code - to
+			 *  continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters and it will resume until the BytesProcessed
+			 *  value reaches the total transfer length.
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;
+			 *
+			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Discard_Stream(512, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;
+			 *
+			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;
+			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Discard_Stream(512, &BytesProcessed)) == PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required
+			 *  }
+			 *
+			 *  if (ErrorCode != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  \note The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without
+			 *        having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to discard via the currently selected pipe.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should
+			 *                             updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be processed at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length,
+			                            uint16_t* const BytesProcessed);
+
+			/** Writes a given number of zeroed bytes to the pipe, sending full pipe packets from the host to the device
+			 *  as needed. The last packet is not automatically sent once the remaining bytes has been written; the
+			 *  user is responsible for manually discarding the last packet from the device via the \ref Pipe_ClearOUT() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once, failing or
+			 *  succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid storage location, the transfer
+			 *  will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time the pipe bank becomes full while there is still data
+			 *  to process (and after the current packet transmission has been initiated) the BytesProcessed location will be
+			 *  updated with the total number of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of
+			 *  \ref PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed in the user code - to
+			 *  continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters and it will resume until the BytesProcessed
+			 *  value reaches the total transfer length.
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;
+			 *
+			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Null_Stream(512, NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;
+			 *
+			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;
+			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Null_Stream(512, &BytesProcessed)) == PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required
+			 *  }
+			 *
+			 *  if (ErrorCode != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  \note The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without
+			 *        having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of zero bytes to write via the currently selected pipe.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should
+			 *                             updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be processed at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_Null_Stream(uint16_t Length,
+			                         uint16_t* const BytesProcessed);
+
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name Stream functions for RAM source/destination data */
+			//@{
+
+			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the pipe from the given buffer in little endian,
+			 *  sending full packets to the device as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;
+			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the
+			 *  \ref Pipe_ClearOUT() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is
+			 *  executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.
+			 *
+			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,
+			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid
+			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time
+			 *  the pipe bank becomes full while there is still data to process (and after the current
+			 *  packet transmission has been initiated) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the
+			 *  total number of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of
+			 *  \ref PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed
+			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters
+			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t DataStream[512];
+			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;
+			 *
+			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),
+			 *                                        NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t  DataStream[512];
+			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;
+			 *
+			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;
+			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),
+			 *                                           &BytesProcessed)) == PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required
+			 *  }
+			 *
+			 *  if (ErrorCode != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  \note The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without
+			 *        having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should
+			 *                             updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                             uint16_t Length,
+			                             uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the pipe from the given buffer in big endian,
+			 *  sending full packets to the device as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;
+			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the
+			 *  \ref Pipe_ClearOUT() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is
+			 *  executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.
+			 *
+			 *  \note The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without
+			 *        having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should
+			 *                             updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_Write_Stream_BE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                             uint16_t Length,
+			                             uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the pipe into the given buffer in little endian,
+			 *  sending full packets to the device as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;
+			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the
+			 *  \ref Pipe_ClearIN() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is
+			 *  executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.
+			 *
+			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,
+			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid
+			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time
+			 *  the pipe bank becomes empty while there is still data to process (and after the current
+			 *  packet has been acknowledged) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the total number
+			 *  of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of
+			 *  \ref PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed
+			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters
+			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t DataStream[512];
+			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;
+			 *
+			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),
+			 *                                       NULL)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t  DataStream[512];
+			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;
+			 *
+			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;
+			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),
+			 *                                          &BytesProcessed)) == PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required
+			 *  }
+			 *
+			 *  if (ErrorCode != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  \note The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without
+			 *        having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe to read from.
+			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should
+			 *                              updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(void* const Buffer,
+			                            uint16_t Length,
+			                            uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the pipe into the given buffer in big endian,
+			 *  sending full packets to the device as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;
+			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the
+			 *  \ref Pipe_ClearIN() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is
+			 *  executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers.
+			 *
+			 *  \note The pipe token is set automatically, thus this can be used on bi-directional pipes directly without
+			 *        having to explicitly change the data direction with a call to \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe to read from.
+			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes already processed should
+			 *                              updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_Read_Stream_BE(void* const Buffer,
+			                            uint16_t Length,
+			                            uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			//@}
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Pipe_UC3.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Pipe_UC3.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a24c7b1d6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Pipe_UC3.c
@@ -0,0 +1,209 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+
+#include "../Pipe.h"
+
+uint8_t USB_Host_ControlPipeSize = PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE;
+
+volatile uint32_t USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe = PIPE_CONTROLPIPE;
+volatile uint8_t* USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES];
+
+bool Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(const USB_Pipe_Table_t* const Table,
+                             const uint8_t Entries)
+{
+	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < Entries; i++)
+	{
+		if (!(Table[i].Address))
+		  continue;
+
+		if (!(Pipe_ConfigurePipe(Table[i].Address, Table[i].Type, Table[i].EndpointAddress, Table[i].Size, Table[i].Banks)))
+		{
+			return false;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+bool Pipe_ConfigurePipe(const uint8_t Address,
+                        const uint8_t Type,
+                        const uint8_t EndpointAddress,
+                        const uint16_t Size,
+                        const uint8_t Banks)
+{
+	uint8_t Number = (Address & PIPE_EPNUM_MASK);
+	uint8_t Token  = (Address & PIPE_DIR_IN) ? PIPE_TOKEN_IN : PIPE_TOKEN_OUT;
+
+	if (Number >= PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES)
+	  return false;
+
+	if (Type == EP_TYPE_CONTROL)
+	  Token = PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP;
+
+	USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[Number]     = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[Number * PIPE_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];
+
+#if defined(ORDERED_EP_CONFIG)
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(Number);
+	Pipe_EnablePipe();
+
+	(&AVR32_USBB.upcfg0)[Number] = 0;
+	(&AVR32_USBB.upcfg0)[Number] = (AVR32_USBB_ALLOC_MASK |
+	                                ((uint32_t)Type  << AVR32_USBB_PTYPE_OFFSET)  |
+	                                ((uint32_t)Token << AVR32_USBB_PTOKEN_OFFSET) |
+	                                ((Banks > 1) ? AVR32_USBB_PBK_MASK : 0)       |
+	                                Pipe_BytesToEPSizeMask(Size) |
+	                                ((uint32_t)Number << AVR32_USBB_PEPNUM_OFFSET));
+
+	Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests();
+
+	return Pipe_IsConfigured();
+#else
+	for (uint8_t PNum = Number; PNum < PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES; PNum++)
+	{
+		uint32_t UPCFG0Temp;
+
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(PNum);
+
+		if (PNum == Number)
+		{
+			UPCFG0Temp = (AVR32_USBB_ALLOC_MASK |
+			              ((uint32_t)Type  << AVR32_USBB_PTYPE_OFFSET)  |
+			              ((uint32_t)Token << AVR32_USBB_PTOKEN_OFFSET) |
+			              ((Banks > 1) ? AVR32_USBB_PBK_MASK : 0)       |
+			              Pipe_BytesToEPSizeMask(Size) |
+			              ((EndpointAddress & PIPE_EPNUM_MASK) << AVR32_USBB_PEPNUM_OFFSET));
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			UPCFG0Temp = (&AVR32_USBB.upcfg0)[PNum];
+		}
+
+		if (!(UPCFG0Temp & AVR32_USBB_ALLOC_MASK))
+		  continue;
+
+		Pipe_DisablePipe();
+		(&AVR32_USBB.upcfg0)[PNum] &= ~AVR32_USBB_ALLOC_MASK;
+
+		Pipe_EnablePipe();
+		(&AVR32_USBB.upcfg0)[PNum] = UPCFG0Temp;
+
+		Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests();
+
+		if (!(Pipe_IsConfigured()))
+		  return false;
+	}
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(Number);
+	return true;
+#endif
+}
+
+void Pipe_ClearPipes(void)
+{
+	for (uint8_t PNum = 0; PNum < PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES; PNum++)
+	{
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(PNum);
+		(&AVR32_USBB.upcfg0)[PNum]    = 0;
+		(&AVR32_USBB.upcon0clr)[PNum] = -1;
+		USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[PNum]        = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[PNum * 0x10000];
+		Pipe_DisablePipe();
+	}
+}
+
+bool Pipe_IsEndpointBound(const uint8_t EndpointAddress)
+{
+	uint8_t PrevPipeNumber = Pipe_GetCurrentPipe();
+
+	for (uint8_t PNum = 0; PNum < PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES; PNum++)
+	{
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(PNum);
+
+		if (!(Pipe_IsConfigured()))
+		  continue;
+
+		if (Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress() == EndpointAddress)
+		  return true;
+	}
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PrevPipeNumber);
+	return false;
+}
+
+uint8_t Pipe_WaitUntilReady(void)
+{
+	#if (USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS < 0xFF)
+	uint8_t  TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;
+	#else
+	uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;
+	#endif
+
+	uint16_t PreviousFrameNumber = USB_Host_GetFrameNumber();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		if (Pipe_GetPipeToken() == PIPE_TOKEN_IN)
+		{
+			if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+			  return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			if (Pipe_IsOUTReady())
+			  return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError;
+		}
+
+		if (Pipe_IsStalled())
+		  return PIPE_READYWAIT_PipeStalled;
+		else if (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
+
+		uint16_t CurrentFrameNumber = USB_Host_GetFrameNumber();
+
+		if (CurrentFrameNumber != PreviousFrameNumber)
+		{
+			PreviousFrameNumber = CurrentFrameNumber;
+
+			if (!(TimeoutMSRem--))
+			  return PIPE_READYWAIT_Timeout;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Pipe_UC3.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Pipe_UC3.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1a0ada8b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Pipe_UC3.h
@@ -0,0 +1,924 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB Pipe definitions for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.
+ *  \copydetails Group_PipeManagement_UC3
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_PipeRW
+ *  \defgroup Group_PipeRW_UC3 Pipe Data Reading and Writing (UC3)
+ *  \brief Pipe data read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing from and to pipes.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW
+ *  \defgroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3 Read/Write of Primitive Data Types (UC3)
+ *  \brief Pipe primitive data read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of primitive data types
+ *  from and to pipes.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement
+ *  \defgroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3 Pipe Packet Management (UC3)
+ *  \brief Pipe packet management definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to packet management of pipes.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_PipeControlReq
+ *  \defgroup Group_PipeControlReq_UC3 Pipe Control Request Management (UC3)
+ *  \brief Pipe control request management definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.
+ *
+ *  Module for host mode request processing. This module allows for the transmission of standard, class and
+ *  vendor control requests to the default control endpoint of an attached device while in host mode.
+ *
+ *  \see Chapter 9 of the USB 2.0 specification.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_PipeManagement
+ *  \defgroup Group_PipeManagement_UC3 Pipe Management (UC3)
+ *  \brief Pipe management definitions for the Atmel AVR32 UC3 architecture.
+ *
+ *  This module contains functions, macros and enums related to pipe management when in USB Host mode. This
+ *  module contains the pipe management macros, as well as pipe interrupt and data send/receive functions
+ *  for various data types.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __PIPE_UC3_H__
+#define __PIPE_UC3_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../USBTask.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define PIPE_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE     (64 * 1024UL)
+
+		/* External Variables: */
+			extern volatile uint32_t USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe;
+			extern volatile uint8_t* USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[];
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** \name Pipe Error Flag Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that an overflow error occurred in the pipe on the received data. */
+			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_OVERFLOW         (AVR32_USBB_UPSTA0_OVERFI_MASK << 8)
+
+			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a CRC error occurred in the pipe on the received data. */
+			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_CRC16            AVR32_USBB_UPERR0_CRC16_MASK
+
+			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware timeout error occurred in the pipe. */
+			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_TIMEOUT          AVR32_USBB_UPERR0_TIMEOUT_MASK
+
+			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware PID error occurred in the pipe. */
+			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_PID              AVR32_USBB_UPERR0_PID_MASK
+
+			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware data PID error occurred in the pipe. */
+			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATAPID          AVR32_USBB_UPERR0_DATAPID_MASK
+
+			/** Mask for \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware data toggle error occurred in the pipe. */
+			#define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATATGL          AVR32_USBB_UPERR0_DATATGL_MASK
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name Pipe Token Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** Token mask for \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken() and \ref Pipe_GetPipeToken(). This sets the pipe as a SETUP token (for CONTROL type pipes),
+			 *  which will trigger a control request on the attached device when data is written to the pipe.
+			 */
+			#define PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP                AVR32_USBB_UPCFG0_PTOKEN_SETUP
+
+			/** Token mask for \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken() and \ref Pipe_GetPipeToken(). This sets the pipe as a IN token (for non-CONTROL type pipes),
+			 *  indicating that the pipe data will flow from device to host.
+			 */
+			#define PIPE_TOKEN_IN                   AVR32_USBB_UPCFG0_PTOKEN_IN
+
+			/** Token mask for \ref Pipe_SetPipeToken() and \ref Pipe_GetPipeToken(). This sets the pipe as a OUT token (for non-CONTROL type pipes),
+			 *  indicating that the pipe data will flow from host to device.
+			 */
+			#define PIPE_TOKEN_OUT                  AVR32_USBB_UPCFG0_PTOKEN_OUT
+			//@}
+
+			/** Default size of the default control pipe's bank, until altered by the Endpoint0Size value
+			 *  in the device descriptor of the attached device.
+			 */
+			#define PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE   64
+
+			#if defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A3_AVR32) || defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A4_AVR32) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Total number of pipes (including the default control pipe at address 0) which may be used in
+				 *  the device.
+				 */
+				#define PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES            8
+			#else
+				#define PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES            7
+			#endif
+
+			/** Size in bytes of the largest pipe bank size possible in the device. Not all banks on each AVR
+			 *  model supports the largest bank size possible on the device; different pipe numbers support
+			 *  different maximum bank sizes. This value reflects the largest possible bank of any pipe on the
+			 *  currently selected UC3 AVR model.
+			 */
+			#define PIPE_MAX_SIZE                   256
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible error return codes of the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady() function.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeRW_UC3
+			 */
+			enum Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError                 = 0, /**< Pipe ready for next packet, no error. */
+				PIPE_READYWAIT_PipeStalled             = 1,	/**< The device stalled the pipe while waiting. */
+				PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected      = 2,	/**< Device was disconnected from the host while waiting. */
+				PIPE_READYWAIT_Timeout                 = 3, /**< The device failed to accept or send the next packet
+				                                             *   within the software timeout period set by the
+				                                             *   \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro.
+				                                             */
+			};
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Indicates the number of bytes currently stored in the current pipes's selected bank.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeRW_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \return Total number of bytes in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline uint16_t Pipe_BytesInPipe(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint16_t Pipe_BytesInPipe(void)
+			{
+				return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].pbyct;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines the currently selected pipe's direction.
+			 *
+			 *  \return The currently selected pipe's direction, as a \c PIPE_DIR_* mask.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeDirection(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeDirection(void)
+			{
+				return (((&AVR32_USBB.UPCFG0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].ptoken == PIPE_TOKEN_OUT) ? PIPE_DIR_OUT : PIPE_DIR_IN);
+			}
+
+			/** Returns the pipe address of the currently selected pipe. This is typically used to save the
+			 *  currently selected pipe number so that it can be restored after another pipe has been manipulated.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Index of the currently selected pipe.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetCurrentPipe(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetCurrentPipe(void)
+			{
+				return (USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe | Pipe_GetPipeDirection());
+			}
+
+			/** Selects the given pipe address. Any pipe operations which do not require the pipe address to be
+			 *  indicated will operate on the currently selected pipe.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Address  Address of the pipe to select.
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_SelectPipe(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_SelectPipe(const uint8_t Address)
+			{
+				USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe = (Address & PIPE_EPNUM_MASK);
+			}
+
+			/** Resets the desired pipe, including the pipe banks and flags.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Address  Index of the pipe to reset.
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_ResetPipe(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_ResetPipe(const uint8_t Address)
+			{
+				uint32_t PipeNumber = (Address & PIPE_EPNUM_MASK);
+
+				AVR32_USBB.uprst |=  (AVR32_USBB_PRST0_MASK << PipeNumber);
+				AVR32_USBB.uprst &= ~(AVR32_USBB_PRST0_MASK << PipeNumber);
+				USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[PipeNumber] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[PipeNumber * PIPE_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];
+			}
+
+			/** Enables the currently selected pipe so that data can be sent and received through it to and from
+			 *  an attached device.
+			 *
+			 *  \pre The currently selected pipe must first be configured properly via \ref Pipe_ConfigurePipe().
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_EnablePipe(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_EnablePipe(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_USBB.uprst |=  (AVR32_USBB_PEN0_MASK << USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe);
+			}
+
+			/** Disables the currently selected pipe so that data cannot be sent and received through it to and
+			 *  from an attached device.
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_DisablePipe(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_DisablePipe(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_USBB.uprst &= ~(AVR32_USBB_PEN0_MASK << USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe);
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the currently selected pipe is enabled, but not necessarily configured.
+			 *
+			 * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected pipe is enabled, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsEnabled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsEnabled(void)
+			{
+				return ((AVR32_USBB.uprst & (AVR32_USBB_PEN0_MASK << USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe)) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Gets the current pipe token, indicating the pipe's data direction and type.
+			 *
+			 *  \return The current pipe token, as a \c PIPE_TOKEN_* mask.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeToken(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeToken(void)
+			{
+				return (&AVR32_USBB.UPCFG0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].ptoken;
+			}
+
+			/** Sets the token for the currently selected pipe to one of the tokens specified by the \c PIPE_TOKEN_*
+			 *  masks. This can be used on CONTROL type pipes, to allow for bidirectional transfer of data during
+			 *  control requests, or on regular pipes to allow for half-duplex bidirectional data transfer to devices
+			 *  which have two endpoints of opposite direction sharing the same endpoint address within the device.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Token  New pipe token to set the selected pipe to, as a \c PIPE_TOKEN_* mask.
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_SetPipeToken(const uint8_t Token) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_SetPipeToken(const uint8_t Token)
+			{
+				(&AVR32_USBB.UPCFG0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].ptoken = Token;
+			}
+
+			/** Configures the currently selected pipe to allow for an unlimited number of IN requests. */
+			static inline void Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(void)
+			{
+				(&AVR32_USBB.UPINRQ0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].inmode = true;
+			}
+
+			/** Configures the currently selected pipe to only allow the specified number of IN requests to be
+			 *  accepted by the pipe before it is automatically frozen.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] TotalINRequests  Total number of IN requests that the pipe may receive before freezing.
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_SetFiniteINRequests(const uint8_t TotalINRequests) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_SetFiniteINRequests(const uint8_t TotalINRequests)
+			{
+				(&AVR32_USBB.UPINRQ0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].inmode = false;
+				(&AVR32_USBB.UPINRQ0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].inrq   = TotalINRequests;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the currently selected pipe is configured.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the selected pipe is configured, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsConfigured(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsConfigured(void)
+			{
+				return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].cfgok;
+			}
+
+			/** Retrieves the endpoint address of the endpoint within the attached device that the currently selected
+			 *  pipe is bound to.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Endpoint address the currently selected pipe is bound to.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetBoundEndpointAddress(void)
+			{
+				return ((&AVR32_USBB.UPCFG0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].pepnum |
+				        ((Pipe_GetPipeToken() == PIPE_TOKEN_IN) ? PIPE_DIR_IN : PIPE_DIR_OUT));
+			}
+
+			/** Sets the period between interrupts for an INTERRUPT type pipe to a specified number of milliseconds.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Milliseconds  Number of milliseconds between each pipe poll.
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(const uint8_t Milliseconds) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(const uint8_t Milliseconds)
+			{
+				(&AVR32_USBB.UPCFG0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].intfrq = Milliseconds;
+			}
+
+			/** Returns a mask indicating which pipe's interrupt periods have elapsed, indicating that the pipe should
+			 *  be serviced.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Mask whose bits indicate which pipes have interrupted.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeInterrupts(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetPipeInterrupts(void)
+			{
+				return ((AVR32_USBB.uhint & (AVR32_USBB_P6INT_MASK | AVR32_USBB_P5INT_MASK |
+				                             AVR32_USBB_P4INT_MASK | AVR32_USBB_P3INT_MASK |
+				                             AVR32_USBB_P2INT_MASK | AVR32_USBB_P1INT_MASK |
+				                             AVR32_USBB_P0INT_MASK)) >> AVR32_USBB_P0INT_OFFSET);
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the specified pipe address has interrupted (valid only for INTERRUPT type
+			 *  pipes).
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Address  Address of the pipe whose interrupt flag should be tested.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the specified pipe has interrupted, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Pipe_HasPipeInterrupted(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Pipe_HasPipeInterrupted(const uint8_t Address)
+			{
+				return ((AVR32_USBB.uhint & (AVR32_USBB_P0INTES_MASK << (Address & PIPE_EPNUM_MASK))) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Unfreezes the selected pipe, allowing it to communicate with an attached device. */
+			static inline void Pipe_Unfreeze(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_Unfreeze(void)
+			{
+				(&AVR32_USBB.UPCON0CLR)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].pfreezec = true;
+			}
+
+			/** Freezes the selected pipe, preventing it from communicating with an attached device. */
+			static inline void Pipe_Freeze(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_Freeze(void)
+			{
+				(&AVR32_USBB.UPCON0SET)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].pfreezes = true;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the currently selected pipe is frozen, and not able to accept data.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected pipe is frozen, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsFrozen(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsFrozen(void)
+			{
+				return (((&AVR32_USBB.UPCON0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].pfreeze) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Clears the error flags for the currently selected pipe. */
+			static inline void Pipe_ClearError(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_ClearError(void)
+			{
+				(&AVR32_USBB.uperr0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe] = 0;
+				(&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0CLR)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].overfic  = true;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the master pipe error flag is set for the currently selected pipe, indicating that
+			 *  some sort of hardware error has occurred on the pipe.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref Pipe_GetErrorFlags() macro for information on retrieving the exact error flag.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if an error has occurred on the selected pipe, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsError(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsError(void)
+			{
+				return (((&AVR32_USBB.upsta0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe] &
+				        (AVR32_USBB_PERRI_MASK | AVR32_USBB_OVERFI_MASK)) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Gets a mask of the hardware error flags which have occurred on the currently selected pipe. This
+			 *  value can then be masked against the \c PIPE_ERRORFLAG_* masks to determine what error has occurred.
+			 *
+			 *  \return  Mask comprising of \c PIPE_ERRORFLAG_* bits indicating what error has occurred on the selected pipe.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetErrorFlags(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetErrorFlags(void)
+			{
+
+				return (((&AVR32_USBB.uperr0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe] &
+				        (PIPE_ERRORFLAG_CRC16 | PIPE_ERRORFLAG_TIMEOUT |
+				         PIPE_ERRORFLAG_PID   | PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATAPID |
+				         PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATATGL)) |
+				        (((&AVR32_USBB.upsta0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe] << 8) &
+						 PIPE_ERRORFLAG_OVERFLOW));
+			}
+
+			/** Retrieves the number of busy banks in the currently selected pipe, which have been queued for
+			 *  transmission via the \ref Pipe_ClearOUT() command, or are awaiting acknowledgement via the
+			 *  \ref Pipe_ClearIN() command.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \return Total number of busy banks in the selected pipe.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetBusyBanks(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_GetBusyBanks(void)
+			{
+				return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].nbusybk;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the currently selected pipe may be read from (if data is waiting in the pipe
+			 *  bank and the pipe is an IN direction, or if the bank is not yet full if the pipe is an OUT
+			 *  direction). This function will return false if an error has occurred in the pipe, or if the pipe
+			 *  is an IN direction and no packet (or an empty packet) has been received, or if the pipe is an OUT
+			 *  direction and the pipe bank is full.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function is not valid on CONTROL type pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected pipe may be read from or written to, depending
+			 *          on its direction.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed(void)
+			{
+				return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].rwall;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if a packet has been received on the currently selected IN pipe from the attached device.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the current pipe has received an IN packet, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsINReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsINReceived(void)
+			{
+				return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].rxini;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the currently selected OUT pipe is ready to send an OUT packet to the attached device.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the current pipe is ready for an OUT packet, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsOUTReady(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsOUTReady(void)
+			{
+				return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].txouti;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if no SETUP request is currently being sent to the attached device on the selected
+			 *  CONTROL type pipe.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the current pipe is ready for a SETUP packet, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsSETUPSent(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsSETUPSent(void)
+			{
+				return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].txstpi;
+			}
+
+			/** Sends the currently selected CONTROL type pipe's contents to the device as a SETUP packet.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_ClearSETUP(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_ClearSETUP(void)
+			{
+				(&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0CLR)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].txstpic = true;
+				(&AVR32_USBB.UPCON0CLR)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].fifoconc = true;
+				USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe * PIPE_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];
+			}
+
+			/** Acknowledges the reception of a setup IN request from the attached device on the currently selected
+			 *  pipe, freeing the bank ready for the next packet.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_ClearIN(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_ClearIN(void)
+			{
+				(&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0CLR)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].rxinic   = true;
+				(&AVR32_USBB.UPCON0CLR)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].fifoconc = true;
+				USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe * PIPE_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];
+			}
+
+			/** Sends the currently selected pipe's contents to the device as an OUT packet on the selected pipe, freeing
+			 *  the bank ready for the next packet.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_ClearOUT(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_ClearOUT(void)
+			{
+				(&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0CLR)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].txoutic  = true;
+				(&AVR32_USBB.UPCON0CLR)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].fifoconc = true;
+				USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe * PIPE_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the device sent a NAK (Negative Acknowledge) in response to the last sent packet on
+			 *  the currently selected pipe. This occurs when the host sends a packet to the device, but the device
+			 *  is not currently ready to handle the packet (i.e. its endpoint banks are full). Once a NAK has been
+			 *  received, it must be cleared using \ref Pipe_ClearNAKReceived() before the previous (or any other) packet
+			 *  can be re-sent.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if an NAK has been received on the current pipe, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsNAKReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsNAKReceived(void)
+			{
+				return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].nakedi;
+			}
+
+			/** Clears the NAK condition on the currently selected pipe.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref Pipe_IsNAKReceived() for more details.
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_ClearNAKReceived(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_ClearNAKReceived(void)
+			{
+				(&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0CLR)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].nakedic = true;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the currently selected pipe has had the STALL condition set by the attached device.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the current pipe has been stalled by the attached device, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsStalled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Pipe_IsStalled(void)
+			{
+				return (&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].rxstalldi;
+			}
+
+			/** Clears the STALL condition detection flag on the currently selected pipe, but does not clear the
+			 *  STALL condition itself (this must be done via a ClearFeature control request to the device).
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePacketManagement_UC3
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_ClearStall(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_ClearStall(void)
+			{
+				(&AVR32_USBB.UPSTA0CLR)[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe].rxstalldic = true;
+				USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe] = &AVR32_USBB_SLAVE[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe * PIPE_HSB_ADDRESS_SPACE_SIZE];
+			}
+
+			/** Reads one byte from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next byte in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_Read_8(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_Read_8(void)
+			{
+				return *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);
+			}
+
+			/** Writes one byte to the currently selected pipe's bank, for IN direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write into the the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_Write_8(const uint8_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_Write_8(const uint8_t Data)
+			{
+				*(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++) = Data;
+			}
+
+			/** Discards one byte from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_Discard_8(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_Discard_8(void)
+			{
+				uint8_t Dummy;
+
+				Dummy = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);
+
+				(void)Dummy;
+			}
+
+			/** Reads two bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for OUT
+			 *  direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next two bytes in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_16_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_16_LE(void)
+			{
+				uint16_t Byte0 = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);
+				uint16_t Byte1 = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);
+
+				return ((Byte1 << 8) | Byte0);
+			}
+
+			/** Reads two bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for OUT
+			 *  direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next two bytes in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_16_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_16_BE(void)
+			{
+				uint16_t Byte0 = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);
+				uint16_t Byte1 = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);
+
+				return ((Byte0 << 8) | Byte1);
+			}
+
+			/** Writes two bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for IN
+			 *  direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data)
+			{
+				*(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data & 0xFF);
+				*(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 8);
+			}
+
+			/** Writes two bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for IN
+			 *  direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data)
+			{
+				*(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 8);
+				*(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data & 0xFF);
+			}
+
+			/** Discards two bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_Discard_16(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_Discard_16(void)
+			{
+				uint8_t Dummy;
+
+				Dummy = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);
+				Dummy = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);
+
+				(void)Dummy;
+			}
+
+			/** Reads four bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for OUT
+			 *  direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next four bytes in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_32_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_32_LE(void)
+			{
+				uint32_t Byte0 = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);
+				uint32_t Byte1 = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);
+				uint32_t Byte2 = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);
+				uint32_t Byte3 = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);
+
+				return ((Byte3 << 24) | (Byte2 << 16) | (Byte1 << 8) | Byte0);
+			}
+
+			/** Reads four bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for OUT
+			 *  direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next four bytes in the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_32_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_32_BE(void)
+			{
+				uint32_t Byte0 = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);
+				uint32_t Byte1 = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);
+				uint32_t Byte2 = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);
+				uint32_t Byte3 = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);
+
+				return ((Byte0 << 24) | (Byte1 << 16) | (Byte2 << 8) | Byte3);
+			}
+
+			/** Writes four bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for IN
+			 *  direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data)
+			{
+				*(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data &  0xFF);
+				*(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 8);
+				*(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 16);
+				*(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 24);
+			}
+
+			/** Writes four bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for IN
+			 *  direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected pipe's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data)
+			{
+				*(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 24);
+				*(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 16);
+				*(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data >> 8);
+				*(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++) = (Data &  0xFF);
+			}
+
+			/** Discards four bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipePrimitiveRW_UC3
+			 */
+			static inline void Pipe_Discard_32(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Pipe_Discard_32(void)
+			{
+				uint8_t Dummy;
+
+				Dummy = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);
+				Dummy = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);
+				Dummy = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);
+				Dummy = *(USB_Pipe_FIFOPos[USB_Pipe_SelectedPipe]++);
+
+				(void)Dummy;
+			}
+
+		/* External Variables: */
+			/** Global indicating the maximum packet size of the default control pipe located at address
+			 *  0 in the device. This value is set to the value indicated in the attached device's device
+		     *  descriptor once the USB interface is initialized into host mode and a device is attached
+			 *  to the USB bus.
+			 *
+			 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
+			 *             changed in value.
+			 */
+			extern uint8_t USB_Host_ControlPipeSize;
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Configures a table of pipe descriptions, in sequence. This function can be used to configure multiple
+			 *  pipes at the same time.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Pipe with a zero address will be ignored, thus this function cannot be used to configure the
+			 *        control pipe.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Table    Pointer to a table of pipe descriptions.
+			 *  \param[in] Entries  Number of entries in the pipe table to configure.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if all pipes configured successfully, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool Pipe_ConfigurePipeTable(const USB_Pipe_Table_t* const Table,
+			                             const uint8_t Entries);
+
+			/** Configures the specified pipe address with the given pipe type, endpoint address within the attached device,
+			 *  bank size and number of hardware banks.
+			 *
+			 *  A newly configured pipe is frozen by default, and must be unfrozen before use via the \ref Pipe_Unfreeze()
+			 *  before being used. Pipes should be kept frozen unless waiting for data from a device while in IN mode, or
+			 *  sending data to the device in OUT mode. IN type pipes are also automatically configured to accept infinite
+			 *  numbers of IN requests without automatic freezing - this can be overridden by a call to
+			 *  \ref Pipe_SetFiniteINRequests().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Address          Pipe address to configure.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Type             Type of pipe to configure, an \c EP_TYPE_* mask. Not all pipe types are available on Low
+			 *                              Speed USB devices - refer to the USB 2.0 specification.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] EndpointAddress  Endpoint address within the attached device that the pipe should interface to.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Size             Size of the pipe's bank, where packets are stored before they are transmitted to
+			 *                              the USB device, or after they have been received from the USB device (depending on
+			 *                              the pipe's data direction). The bank size must indicate the maximum packet size that
+			 *                              the pipe can handle.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Banks            Number of banks to use for the pipe being configured.
+			 *
+			 *  \note When the \c ORDERED_EP_CONFIG compile time option is used, Pipes <b>must</b> be configured in ascending order,
+			 *        or bank corruption will occur.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note Certain microcontroller model's pipes may have different maximum packet sizes based on the pipe's
+			 *        index - refer to the chosen microcontroller's datasheet to determine the maximum bank size for each pipe.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note The default control pipe should not be manually configured by the user application, as it is
+			 *        automatically configured by the library internally.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine will automatically select the specified pipe upon success. Upon failure, the pipe which
+			 *        failed to reconfigure correctly will be selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the configuration succeeded, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool Pipe_ConfigurePipe(const uint8_t Address,
+			                        const uint8_t Type,
+			                        const uint8_t EndpointAddress,
+			                        const uint16_t Size,
+			                        const uint8_t Banks);
+
+			/** Spin-loops until the currently selected non-control pipe is ready for the next packet of data to be read
+			 *  or written to it, aborting in the case of an error condition (such as a timeout or device disconnect).
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_PipeRW_UC3
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Pipe_WaitUntilReady(void);
+
+			/** Determines if a pipe has been bound to the given device endpoint address. If a pipe which is bound to the given
+			 *  endpoint is found, it is automatically selected.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] EndpointAddress Address and direction mask of the endpoint within the attached device to check.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if a pipe bound to the given endpoint address of the specified direction is found,
+			 *          \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool Pipe_IsEndpointBound(const uint8_t EndpointAddress) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#if !defined(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP)
+				#define ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP          0
+			#endif
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Pipe_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes)
+			{
+				uint8_t  MaskVal    = 0;
+				uint16_t CheckBytes = 8;
+
+				while ((CheckBytes < Bytes) && (CheckBytes < PIPE_MAX_SIZE))
+				{
+					MaskVal++;
+					CheckBytes <<= 1;
+				}
+
+				return (MaskVal << AVR32_USBB_PSIZE_OFFSET);
+			}
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			void Pipe_ClearPipes(void);
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..59c620ae5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#if defined(TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME)
+
+uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (void* const Buffer,
+                            uint16_t Length)
+{
+	uint8_t* DataStream = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));
+
+	if (!(Length))
+	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	while (Length)
+	{
+		uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;
+
+		if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+		else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;
+		else if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_HostAborted;
+
+		if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+		{
+			while (Length && Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())
+			{
+				TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+				TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, 1);
+				Length--;
+			}
+
+			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+		}
+	}
+
+	while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+	{
+		uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;
+
+		if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+		else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;
+	}
+
+	return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE
+#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME
+#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..98887009c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#if defined(TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME)
+
+uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (const void* const Buffer,
+                            uint16_t Length)
+{
+	uint8_t* DataStream     = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));
+	bool     LastPacketFull = false;
+
+	if (Length > USB_ControlRequest.wLength)
+	  Length = USB_ControlRequest.wLength;
+	else if (!(Length))
+	  Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	while (Length || LastPacketFull)
+	{
+		uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;
+
+		if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+		else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;
+		else if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_HostAborted;
+		else if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+		  break;
+
+		if (Endpoint_IsINReady())
+		{
+			uint16_t BytesInEndpoint = Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint();
+
+			while (Length && (BytesInEndpoint < USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize))
+			{
+				TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+				TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, 1);
+				Length--;
+				BytesInEndpoint++;
+			}
+
+			LastPacketFull = (BytesInEndpoint == USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize);
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+		}
+	}
+
+	while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+	{
+		uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;
+
+		if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+		else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;
+		else if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_HostAborted;
+	}
+
+	return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE
+#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME
+#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d51afdfb1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#if defined(TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME)
+
+uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE const Buffer,
+                            uint16_t Length,
+                            uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)
+{
+	uint8_t* DataStream      = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));
+	uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
+	{
+		Length -= *BytesProcessed;
+		TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, *BytesProcessed);
+	}
+
+	while (Length)
+	{
+		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		{
+			TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT();
+
+			#if !defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)
+			USB_USBTask();
+			#endif
+
+			if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
+			{
+				*BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;
+				return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;
+			}
+
+			if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
+			  return ErrorCode;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+			TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, 1);
+			Length--;
+			BytesInTransfer++;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE
+#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE
+#undef TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2685c9b9d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#if defined(TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME)
+
+uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE const Buffer,
+                            uint16_t Length,
+                            uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)
+{
+	uint8_t* DataStream      = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));
+	uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+
+	Pipe_SetPipeToken(TEMPLATE_TOKEN);
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
+	{
+		Length -= *BytesProcessed;
+		TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, *BytesProcessed);
+	}
+
+	while (Length)
+	{
+		if (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		{
+			TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE();
+
+			if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
+			{
+				*BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;
+				return PIPE_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;
+			}
+
+			if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady()))
+			  return ErrorCode;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+			TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, 1);
+			Length--;
+			BytesInTransfer++;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE
+#undef TEMPLATE_TOKEN
+#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE
+#undef TEMPLATE_CLEAR_PIPE
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBController_UC3.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBController_UC3.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fda0ddc39
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBController_UC3.c
@@ -0,0 +1,222 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_CONTROLLER_C
+#include "../USBController.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+volatile uint8_t USB_CurrentMode = USB_MODE_None;
+#endif
+
+#if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)
+volatile uint8_t USB_Options;
+#endif
+
+void USB_Init(
+               #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+               const uint8_t Mode
+               #endif
+
+               #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS))
+               ,
+               #elif (!defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS))
+               void
+               #endif
+
+               #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)
+               const uint8_t Options
+               #endif
+               )
+{
+	#if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)
+	USB_Options = Options;
+	#endif
+
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+	if (Mode == USB_MODE_UID)
+	{
+		AVR32_USBB.USBCON.uide = true;
+		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_IDTI);
+		USB_CurrentMode = USB_GetUSBModeFromUID();
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		AVR32_USBB.USBCON.uide = false;
+		USB_CurrentMode = Mode;
+	}
+	#else
+	AVR32_USBB.USBCON.uide = false;
+	#endif
+
+	USB_IsInitialized = true;
+
+	USB_ResetInterface();
+}
+
+void USB_Disable(void)
+{
+	USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts();
+	USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts();
+
+	USB_Detach();
+	USB_Controller_Disable();
+
+	USB_OTGPAD_Off();
+
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+	USB_CurrentMode = USB_MODE_None;
+	#endif
+
+	AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[3].cen = false;
+
+	USB_IsInitialized = false;
+}
+
+void USB_ResetInterface(void)
+{
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+	bool UIDModeSelectEnabled = AVR32_USBB.USBCON.uide;
+	#endif
+
+	AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[AVR32_PM_GCLK_USBB].pllsel = !(USB_Options & USB_OPT_GCLK_SRC_OSC);
+	AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[AVR32_PM_GCLK_USBB].oscsel = !(USB_Options & USB_OPT_GCLK_CHANNEL_0);
+	AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[AVR32_PM_GCLK_USBB].diven  = (F_USB != USB_CLOCK_REQUIRED_FREQ);
+	AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[AVR32_PM_GCLK_USBB].div    = (F_USB == USB_CLOCK_REQUIRED_FREQ) ? 0 : (uint32_t)((F_USB / USB_CLOCK_REQUIRED_FREQ / 2) - 1);
+	AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[AVR32_PM_GCLK_USBB].cen    = true;
+
+	USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts();
+	USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts();
+
+	USB_Controller_Reset();
+
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+	if (UIDModeSelectEnabled)
+	  USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_IDTI);
+	#endif
+
+	USB_CLK_Unfreeze();
+
+	if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device)
+	{
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+		AVR32_USBB.USBCON.uimod = true;
+
+		USB_Init_Device();
+		#endif
+	}
+	else if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Host)
+	{
+		#if defined(INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE)
+		AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vbuspo = true;
+		#endif
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+		AVR32_USBB.USBCON.uimod = false;
+
+		USB_Init_Host();
+		#endif
+	}
+
+	USB_OTGPAD_On();
+}
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+static void USB_Init_Device(void)
+{
+	USB_DeviceState                 = DEVICE_STATE_Unattached;
+	USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber  = 0;
+
+	#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)
+	USB_Device_RemoteWakeupEnabled  = false;
+	#endif
+
+	#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER)
+	USB_Device_CurrentlySelfPowered = false;
+	#endif
+
+	#if !defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE)
+	USB_Descriptor_Device_t* DeviceDescriptorPtr;
+
+	if (CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor((DTYPE_Device << 8), 0, (void*)&DeviceDescriptorPtr) != NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+	  USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size;
+	#endif
+
+	if (USB_Options & USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED)
+	{
+		USB_Device_SetLowSpeed();
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		#if defined(USB_DEVICE_OPT_HIGHSPEED)
+		if (USB_Options & USB_DEVICE_OPT_HIGHSPEED)
+		  USB_Device_SetHighSpeed();
+		else
+		  USB_Device_SetFullSpeed();
+		#else
+		USB_Device_SetFullSpeed();
+		#endif
+	}
+
+	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_VBUSTI);
+
+	Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, EP_TYPE_CONTROL,
+							   USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize, 1);
+
+	USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SUSPI);
+	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SUSPI);
+	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_EORSTI);
+
+	USB_Attach();
+}
+#endif
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+static void USB_Init_Host(void)
+{
+	USB_HostState                = HOST_STATE_Unattached;
+	USB_Host_ConfigurationNumber = 0;
+	USB_Host_ControlPipeSize     = PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE;
+
+	USB_Host_HostMode_On();
+
+	USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_On();
+
+	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_DCONNI);
+	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_BCERRI);
+
+	USB_Attach();
+}
+#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBController_UC3.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBController_UC3.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2e824583a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBController_UC3.h
@@ -0,0 +1,353 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB Controller definitions for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.
+ *  \copydetails Group_USBManagement_UC3
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBManagement
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBManagement_UC3 USB Interface Management (UC3)
+ *  \brief USB Controller definitions for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to the setup and management of the USB interface.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __USBCONTROLLER_UC3_H__
+#define __USBCONTROLLER_UC3_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../USBMode.h"
+		#include "../Events.h"
+		#include "../USBTask.h"
+		#include "../USBInterrupt.h"
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			#include "../Host.h"
+			#include "../OTG.h"
+			#include "../Pipe.h"
+			#include "../HostStandardReq.h"
+			#include "../PipeStream.h"
+		#endif
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			#include "../Device.h"
+			#include "../Endpoint.h"
+			#include "../DeviceStandardReq.h"
+			#include "../EndpointStream.h"
+		#endif
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks and Defines: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+		#if !defined(F_USB)
+			#error F_USB is not defined. You must define F_USB to the frequency of the clock input to the USB module.
+		#endif
+
+		#if (defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A3_AVR) || defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A4_AVR))
+			#if ((F_USB < 12000000) || (F_USB % 12000000))
+				#error Invalid F_USB specified. F_USB must be a multiple of 12MHz for UC3A3 and UC3A4 devices.
+			#endif
+		#else
+			#if ((F_USB < 48000000) || (F_USB % 48000000))
+				#error Invalid F_USB specified. F_USB must be a multiple of 48MHz for UC3A and UC3B devices.
+			#endif
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** \name USB Controller Option Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** Selects one of the system's main clock oscillators as the input clock to the USB Generic Clock source
+			 *  generation module. This indicates that an external oscillator should be used directly instead of an
+			 *  internal PLL clock source.
+			 */
+			#define USB_OPT_GCLK_SRC_OSC               (1 << 2)
+
+			/** Selects one of the system's PLL oscillators as the input clock to the USB Generic Clock source
+			 *  generation module. This indicates that one of the device's PLL outputs should be used instead of an
+			 *  external oscillator source.
+			 */
+			#define USB_OPT_GCLK_SRC_PLL               (0 << 2)
+
+			/** Selects PLL or External Oscillator 0 as the USB Generic Clock source module input clock. */
+			#define USB_OPT_GCLK_CHANNEL_0             (1 << 3)
+
+			/** Selects PLL or External Oscillator 1 as the USB Generic Clock source module input clock. */
+			#define USB_OPT_GCLK_CHANNEL_1             (0 << 3)
+			//@}
+
+			#if !defined(USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Constant for the maximum software timeout period of the USB data stream transfer functions
+				 *  (both control and standard) when in either device or host mode. If the next packet of a stream
+				 *  is not received or acknowledged within this time period, the stream function will fail.
+				 *
+				 *  This value may be overridden in the user project makefile as the value of the
+				 *  \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS token, and passed to the compiler using the -D switch.
+				 */
+				#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS       100
+			#endif
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Determines if the VBUS line is currently high (i.e. the USB host is supplying power).
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the VBUS line is currently detecting power from a host, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool USB_VBUS_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool USB_VBUS_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				return AVR32_USBB.USBSTA.vbus;
+			}
+
+			/** Detaches the device from the USB bus. This has the effect of removing the device from any
+			 *  attached host, ceasing USB communications. If no host is present, this prevents any host from
+			 *  enumerating the device once attached until \ref USB_Attach() is called.
+			 */
+			static inline void USB_Detach(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Detach(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_USBB.UDCON.detach = true;
+			}
+
+			/** Attaches the device to the USB bus. This announces the device's presence to any attached
+			 *  USB host, starting the enumeration process. If no host is present, attaching the device
+			 *  will allow for enumeration once a host is connected to the device.
+			 *
+			 *  This is inexplicably also required for proper operation while in host mode, to enable the
+			 *  attachment of a device to the host. This is despite the bit being located in the device-mode
+			 *  register and despite the datasheet making no mention of its requirement in host mode.
+			 */
+			static inline void USB_Attach(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Attach(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_USBB.UDCON.detach = false;
+			}
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Main function to initialize and start the USB interface. Once active, the USB interface will
+			 *  allow for device connection to a host when in device mode, or for device enumeration while in
+			 *  host mode.
+			 *
+			 *  As the USB library relies on interrupts for the device and host mode enumeration processes,
+			 *  the user must enable global interrupts before or shortly after this function is called. In
+			 *  device mode, interrupts must be enabled within 500ms of this function being called to ensure
+			 *  that the host does not time out whilst enumerating the device. In host mode, interrupts may be
+			 *  enabled at the application's leisure however enumeration will not begin of an attached device
+			 *  until after this has occurred.
+			 *
+			 *  Calling this function when the USB interface is already initialized will cause a complete USB
+			 *  interface reset and re-enumeration.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Mode     Mask indicating what mode the USB interface is to be initialized to, a value
+			 *                      from the \ref USB_Modes_t enum.
+			 *                      \note This parameter does not exist on devices with only one supported USB
+			 *                            mode (device or host).
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Options  Mask indicating the options which should be used when initializing the USB
+			 *                      interface to control the USB interface's behavior. This should be comprised of
+			 *                      a \c USB_OPT_REG_* mask to control the regulator, a \c USB_OPT_*_PLL mask to control the
+			 *                      PLL, and a \c USB_DEVICE_OPT_* mask (when the device mode is enabled) to set the device
+			 *                      mode speed.
+			 *
+			 *  \note To reduce the FLASH requirements of the library if only device or host mode is required,
+			 *        the mode can be statically set in the project makefile by defining the token \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+			 *        (for device mode) or \c USB_HOST_ONLY (for host mode), passing the token to the compiler
+			 *        via the -D switch. If the mode is statically set, this parameter does not exist in the
+			 *        function prototype.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note To reduce the FLASH requirements of the library if only fixed settings are required,
+			 *        the options may be set statically in the same manner as the mode (see the Mode parameter of
+			 *        this function). To statically set the USB options, pass in the \c USE_STATIC_OPTIONS token,
+			 *        defined to the appropriate options masks. When the options are statically set, this
+			 *        parameter does not exist in the function prototype.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref Group_Device for the \c USB_DEVICE_OPT_* masks.
+			 */
+			void USB_Init(
+			               #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			               const uint8_t Mode
+			               #endif
+
+			               #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			               ,
+			               #elif (!defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS))
+			               void
+			               #endif
+
+			               #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			               const uint8_t Options
+			               #endif
+			               );
+
+			/** Shuts down the USB interface. This turns off the USB interface after deallocating all USB FIFO
+			 *  memory, endpoints and pipes. When turned off, no USB functionality can be used until the interface
+			 *  is restarted with the \ref USB_Init() function.
+			 */
+			void USB_Disable(void);
+
+			/** Resets the interface, when already initialized. This will re-enumerate the device if already connected
+			 *  to a host, or re-enumerate an already attached device when in host mode.
+			 */
+			void USB_ResetInterface(void);
+
+		/* Global Variables: */
+			#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Indicates the mode that the USB interface is currently initialized to, a value from the
+				 *  \ref USB_Modes_t enum.
+				 *
+				 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
+				 *             changed in value.
+				 *
+				 *  \note When the controller is initialized into UID auto-detection mode, this variable will hold the
+				 *        currently selected USB mode (i.e. \ref USB_MODE_Device or \ref USB_MODE_Host). If the controller
+				 *        is fixed into a specific mode (either through the \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY or \c USB_HOST_ONLY compile time
+				 *        options, or a limitation of the USB controller in the chosen device model) this will evaluate to
+				 *        a constant of the appropriate value and will never evaluate to \ref USB_MODE_None even when the
+				 *        USB interface is not initialized.
+				 */
+				extern volatile uint8_t USB_CurrentMode;
+			#elif defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+				#define USB_CurrentMode USB_MODE_Host
+			#elif defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+				#define USB_CurrentMode USB_MODE_Device
+			#endif
+
+			#if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Indicates the current USB options that the USB interface was initialized with when \ref USB_Init()
+				 *  was called. This value will be one of the \c USB_MODE_* masks defined elsewhere in this module.
+				 *
+				 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
+				 *             changed in value.
+				 */
+				extern volatile uint8_t USB_Options;
+			#elif defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)
+				#define USB_Options USE_STATIC_OPTIONS
+			#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#if defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A3_AVR32) || defined(USB_SERIES_UC3A4_AVR32)
+				#define USB_CLOCK_REQUIRED_FREQ  12000000UL
+			#else
+				#define USB_CLOCK_REQUIRED_FREQ  48000000UL
+			#endif
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_CONTROLLER_C)
+				#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+				static void USB_Init_Device(void);
+				#endif
+
+				#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+				static void USB_Init_Host(void);
+				#endif
+			#endif
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			static inline void USB_OTGPAD_On(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_OTGPAD_On(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_USBB.USBCON.otgpade = true;
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_OTGPAD_Off(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_OTGPAD_Off(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_USBB.USBCON.otgpade = false;
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_CLK_Freeze(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_CLK_Freeze(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_USBB.USBCON.frzclk = true;
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_CLK_Unfreeze(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_CLK_Unfreeze(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_USBB.USBCON.frzclk = false;
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Controller_Enable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Controller_Enable(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_USBB.USBCON.usbe = true;
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Controller_Disable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Controller_Disable(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_USBB.USBCON.usbe = false;
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Controller_Reset(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Controller_Reset(void)
+			{
+				AVR32_USBB.USBCON.usbe = false;
+				AVR32_USBB.USBCON.usbe = true;
+			}
+
+			#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+			static inline uint8_t USB_GetUSBModeFromUID(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t USB_GetUSBModeFromUID(void)
+			{
+				if (AVR32_USBB.USBSTA.id)
+				  return USB_MODE_Device;
+				else
+				  return USB_MODE_Host;
+			}
+			#endif
+
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBInterrupt_UC3.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBInterrupt_UC3.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..83ada8cc1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBInterrupt_UC3.c
@@ -0,0 +1,228 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../USBInterrupt.h"
+
+void USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(void)
+{
+	AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vbuste     = false;
+	AVR32_USBB.USBCON.idte       = false;
+
+	AVR32_USBB.uhinteclr         = -1;
+	AVR32_USBB.udinteclr         = -1;
+}
+
+void USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(void)
+{
+	AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.vbustic = true;
+	AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.idtic   = true;
+
+	AVR32_USBB.uhintclr          = -1;
+	AVR32_USBB.udintclr          = -1;
+}
+
+ISR(USB_GEN_vect)
+{
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+	#if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS)
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_SOFI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_SOFI))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SOFI);
+
+		EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame();
+	}
+	#endif
+
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_VBUSTI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_VBUSTI))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_VBUSTI);
+
+		if (USB_VBUS_GetStatus())
+		{
+			USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Powered;
+			EVENT_USB_Device_Connect();
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Unattached;
+			EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect();
+		}
+	}
+
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_SUSPI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_SUSPI))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SUSPI);
+		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_WAKEUPI);
+
+		USB_CLK_Freeze();
+
+		USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Suspended;
+		EVENT_USB_Device_Suspend();
+	}
+
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_WAKEUPI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_WAKEUPI))
+	{
+		USB_CLK_Unfreeze();
+
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_WAKEUPI);
+
+		USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_WAKEUPI);
+		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SUSPI);
+
+		if (USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber)
+		  USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Configured;
+		else
+		  USB_DeviceState = (USB_Device_IsAddressSet()) ? DEVICE_STATE_Addressed : DEVICE_STATE_Powered;
+
+		EVENT_USB_Device_WakeUp();
+	}
+
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_EORSTI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_EORSTI))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_EORSTI);
+
+		USB_DeviceState                = DEVICE_STATE_Default;
+		USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber = 0;
+
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SUSPI);
+		USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SUSPI);
+		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_WAKEUPI);
+
+		USB_Device_SetDeviceAddress(0);
+		Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, EP_TYPE_CONTROL,
+		                           USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize, 1);
+
+		#if defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)
+		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_RXSTPI);
+		#endif
+
+		EVENT_USB_Device_Reset();
+	}
+	#endif
+
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+	#if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS)
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_HSOFI))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+
+		EVENT_USB_Host_StartOfFrame();
+	}
+	#endif
+
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_DDISCI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_DDISCI))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DDISCI);
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DCONNI);
+		USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_DDISCI);
+
+		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();
+
+		USB_ResetInterface();
+	}
+
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_VBERRI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_VBERRI))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_VBERRI);
+
+		USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off();
+		USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off();
+
+		EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(HOST_ERROR_VBusVoltageDip);
+		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();
+
+		USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Unattached;
+	}
+
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_DCONNI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_DCONNI))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DCONNI);
+		USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_DCONNI);
+
+		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached();
+
+		USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_DDISCI);
+
+		USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Powered;
+	}
+
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_BCERRI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_BCERRI))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_BCERRI);
+
+		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(HOST_ENUMERROR_NoDeviceDetected, 0);
+		EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();
+
+		USB_ResetInterface();
+	}
+	#endif
+
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_IDTI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_IDTI))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_IDTI);
+
+		if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+		  EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect();
+
+		if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Unattached)
+		  EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached();
+
+		USB_CurrentMode = USB_GetUSBModeFromUID();
+		USB_ResetInterface();
+
+		EVENT_USB_UIDChange();
+	}
+	#endif
+}
+
+#if defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT) && defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+ISR(USB_COM_vect)
+{
+	uint8_t PrevSelectedEndpoint = Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint();
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP);
+	USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_RXSTPI);
+
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	USB_Device_ProcessControlRequest();
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP);
+	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_RXSTPI);
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(PrevSelectedEndpoint);
+}
+#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBInterrupt_UC3.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBInterrupt_UC3.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ddd5389c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBInterrupt_UC3.h
@@ -0,0 +1,376 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB Controller Interrupt definitions for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  This file contains definitions required for the correct handling of low level USB service routine interrupts
+ *  from the USB controller.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __USBINTERRUPT_UC3_H__
+#define __USBINTERRUPT_UC3_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* External Variables: */
+			extern volatile uint32_t USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint;
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			enum USB_Interrupts_t
+			{
+				USB_INT_VBUSTI  = 0,
+				#if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
+				USB_INT_IDTI    = 1,
+				#endif
+				#if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
+				USB_INT_WAKEUPI = 2,
+				USB_INT_SUSPI   = 3,
+				USB_INT_EORSTI  = 4,
+				USB_INT_SOFI    = 5,
+				USB_INT_RXSTPI  = 6,
+				#endif
+				#if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
+				USB_INT_HSOFI   = 7,
+				USB_INT_DCONNI  = 8,
+				USB_INT_DDISCI  = 9,
+				USB_INT_RSTI    = 10,
+				USB_INT_BCERRI  = 11,
+				USB_INT_VBERRI  = 12,
+				#endif
+			};
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			static inline void USB_INT_Enable(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_INT_Enable(const uint8_t Interrupt)
+			{
+				switch (Interrupt)
+				{
+					case USB_INT_VBUSTI:
+						AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vbuste      = true;
+						break;
+					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+					case USB_INT_IDTI:
+						AVR32_USBB.USBCON.idte        = true;
+						break;
+					#endif
+					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+					case USB_INT_WAKEUPI:
+						AVR32_USBB.UDINTESET.wakeupes = true;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_SUSPI:
+						AVR32_USBB.UDINTESET.suspes   = true;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_EORSTI:
+						AVR32_USBB.UDINTESET.eorstes  = true;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_SOFI:
+						AVR32_USBB.UDINTESET.sofes    = true;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_RXSTPI:
+						(&AVR32_USBB.UECON0SET)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].rxstpes = true;
+						break;
+					#endif
+					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+					case USB_INT_HSOFI:
+						AVR32_USBB.UHINTESET.hsofies  = true;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_DCONNI:
+						AVR32_USBB.UHINTESET.dconnies = true;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_DDISCI:
+						AVR32_USBB.UHINTESET.ddiscies = true;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_RSTI:
+						AVR32_USBB.UHINTESET.rsties   = true;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_BCERRI:
+						AVR32_USBB.USBCON.bcerre      = true;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_VBERRI:
+						AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vberre      = true;
+						break;
+					#endif
+					default:
+						break;
+				}
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_INT_Disable(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_INT_Disable(const uint8_t Interrupt)
+			{
+				switch (Interrupt)
+				{
+					case USB_INT_VBUSTI:
+						AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vbuste      = false;
+						break;
+					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+					case USB_INT_IDTI:
+						AVR32_USBB.USBCON.idte        = false;
+						break;
+					#endif
+					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+					case USB_INT_WAKEUPI:
+						AVR32_USBB.UDINTECLR.wakeupec = true;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_SUSPI:
+						AVR32_USBB.UDINTECLR.suspec   = true;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_EORSTI:
+						AVR32_USBB.UDINTECLR.eorstec  = true;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_SOFI:
+						AVR32_USBB.UDINTECLR.sofec    = true;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_RXSTPI:
+						(&AVR32_USBB.UECON0CLR)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].rxstpec = true;
+						break;
+					#endif
+					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+					case USB_INT_HSOFI:
+						AVR32_USBB.UHINTECLR.hsofiec  = true;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_DCONNI:
+						AVR32_USBB.UHINTECLR.dconniec = true;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_DDISCI:
+						AVR32_USBB.UHINTECLR.ddisciec = true;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_RSTI:
+						AVR32_USBB.UHINTECLR.rstiec   = true;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_BCERRI:
+						AVR32_USBB.USBCON.bcerre      = false;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_VBERRI:
+						AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vberre      = false;
+						break;
+					#endif
+					default:
+						break;
+				}
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_INT_Clear(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_INT_Clear(const uint8_t Interrupt)
+			{
+				switch (Interrupt)
+				{
+					case USB_INT_VBUSTI:
+						AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.vbustic = true;
+						(void)AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR;
+						break;
+					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+					case USB_INT_IDTI:
+						AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.idtic   = true;
+						(void)AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR;
+						break;
+					#endif
+					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+					case USB_INT_WAKEUPI:
+						AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR.wakeupc  = true;
+						(void)AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_SUSPI:
+						AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR.suspc    = true;
+						(void)AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_EORSTI:
+						AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR.eorstc   = true;
+						(void)AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_SOFI:
+						AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR.sofc     = true;
+						(void)AVR32_USBB.UDINTCLR;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_RXSTPI:
+						(&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0CLR)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].rxstpic = true;
+						break;
+					#endif
+					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+					case USB_INT_HSOFI:
+						AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR.hsofic   = true;
+						(void)AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_DCONNI:
+						AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR.dconnic  = true;
+						(void)AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_DDISCI:
+						AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR.ddiscic  = true;
+						(void)AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_RSTI:
+						AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR.rstic    = true;
+						(void)AVR32_USBB.UHINTCLR;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_BCERRI:
+						AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.bcerric = true;
+						(void)AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_VBERRI:
+						AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR.vberric = true;
+						(void)AVR32_USBB.USBSTACLR;
+						break;
+					#endif
+					default:
+						break;
+				}
+			}
+
+			static inline bool USB_INT_IsEnabled(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline bool USB_INT_IsEnabled(const uint8_t Interrupt)
+			{
+				switch (Interrupt)
+				{
+					case USB_INT_VBUSTI:
+						return AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vbuste;
+					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+					case USB_INT_IDTI:
+						return AVR32_USBB.USBCON.idte;
+					#endif
+					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+					case USB_INT_WAKEUPI:
+						return AVR32_USBB.UDINTE.wakeupe;
+					case USB_INT_SUSPI:
+						return AVR32_USBB.UDINTE.suspe;
+					case USB_INT_EORSTI:
+						return AVR32_USBB.UDINTE.eorste;
+					case USB_INT_SOFI:
+						return AVR32_USBB.UDINTE.sofe;
+					case USB_INT_RXSTPI:
+						return (&AVR32_USBB.UECON0)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].rxstpe;
+					#endif
+					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+					case USB_INT_HSOFI:
+						return AVR32_USBB.UHINTE.hsofie;
+					case USB_INT_DCONNI:
+						return AVR32_USBB.UHINTE.dconnie;
+					case USB_INT_DDISCI:
+						return AVR32_USBB.UHINTE.ddiscie;
+					case USB_INT_RSTI:
+						return AVR32_USBB.UHINTE.rstie;
+					case USB_INT_BCERRI:
+						return AVR32_USBB.USBCON.bcerre;
+					case USB_INT_VBERRI:
+						return AVR32_USBB.USBCON.vberre;
+					#endif
+					default:
+						return false;
+				}
+			}
+
+			static inline bool USB_INT_HasOccurred(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline bool USB_INT_HasOccurred(const uint8_t Interrupt)
+			{
+				switch (Interrupt)
+				{
+					case USB_INT_VBUSTI:
+						return AVR32_USBB.USBSTA.vbusti;
+					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+					case USB_INT_IDTI:
+						return AVR32_USBB.USBSTA.idti;
+					#endif
+					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+					case USB_INT_WAKEUPI:
+						return AVR32_USBB.UDINT.wakeup;
+					case USB_INT_SUSPI:
+						return AVR32_USBB.UDINT.susp;
+					case USB_INT_EORSTI:
+						return AVR32_USBB.UDINT.eorst;
+					case USB_INT_SOFI:
+						return AVR32_USBB.UDINT.sof;
+					case USB_INT_RXSTPI:
+						return (&AVR32_USBB.UESTA0)[USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint].rxstpi;
+					#endif
+					#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+					case USB_INT_HSOFI:
+						return AVR32_USBB.UHINT.hsofi;
+					case USB_INT_DCONNI:
+						return AVR32_USBB.UHINT.dconni;
+					case USB_INT_DDISCI:
+						return AVR32_USBB.UHINT.ddisci;
+					case USB_INT_RSTI:
+						return AVR32_USBB.UHINT.rsti;
+					case USB_INT_BCERRI:
+						return AVR32_USBB.USBSTA.bcerri;
+					case USB_INT_VBERRI:
+						return AVR32_USBB.USBSTA.vberri;
+					#endif
+					default:
+						return false;
+				}
+			}
+
+		/* Includes: */
+			#include "../USBMode.h"
+			#include "../Events.h"
+			#include "../USBController.h"
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			void USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(void);
+			void USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(void);
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Interrupt service routine handler for the USB controller ISR group. This interrupt routine <b>must</b> be
+				 *  linked to the entire USB controller ISR vector group inside the AVR32's interrupt controller peripheral,
+				 *  using the user application's preferred USB controller driver.
+				 */
+				void USB_GEN_vect(void);
+			#else
+				ISR(USB_GEN_vect);
+			#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBController.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBController.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c1d74c32b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBController.h
@@ -0,0 +1,165 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Common USB Controller definitions for all architectures.
+ *  \copydetails Group_USBManagement
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USB
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBManagement USB Interface Management
+ *  \brief USB Controller definitions for general USB controller management.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to the setup and management of the USB interface.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __USBCONTROLLER_H__
+#define __USBCONTROLLER_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "USBMode.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks and Defines: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Defines: */
+		/** \name Endpoint Direction Masks */
+		//@{
+		/** Endpoint direction mask, for masking against endpoint addresses to retrieve the endpoint's
+		 *  direction for comparing with the \c ENDPOINT_DIR_* masks.
+		 */
+		#define ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK                  0x80
+
+		/** Endpoint address direction mask for an OUT direction (Host to Device) endpoint. This may be ORed with
+		 *  the index of the address within a device to obtain the full endpoint address.
+		 */
+		#define ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT                   0x00
+
+		/** Endpoint address direction mask for an IN direction (Device to Host) endpoint. This may be ORed with
+		 *  the index of the address within a device to obtain the full endpoint address.
+		 */
+		#define ENDPOINT_DIR_IN                    0x80
+		//@}
+
+		/** \name Pipe Direction Masks */
+		//@{
+		/** Pipe direction mask, for masking against pipe addresses to retrieve the pipe's
+		 *  direction for comparing with the \c PIPE_DIR_* masks.
+		 */
+		#define PIPE_DIR_MASK                      0x80
+
+		/** Endpoint address direction mask for an OUT direction (Host to Device) endpoint. This may be ORed with
+		 *  the index of the address within a device to obtain the full endpoint address.
+		 */
+		#define PIPE_DIR_OUT                       0x00
+
+		/** Endpoint address direction mask for an IN direction (Device to Host) endpoint. This may be ORed with
+		 *  the index of the address within a device to obtain the full endpoint address.
+		 */
+		#define PIPE_DIR_IN                        0x80
+		//@}
+
+		/** \name Endpoint/Pipe Type Masks */
+		//@{
+		/** Mask for determining the type of an endpoint from an endpoint descriptor. This should then be compared
+		 *  with the \c EP_TYPE_* masks to determine the exact type of the endpoint.
+		 */
+		#define EP_TYPE_MASK                       0x03
+
+		/** Mask for a CONTROL type endpoint or pipe.
+		 *
+		 *  \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions.
+		 */
+		#define EP_TYPE_CONTROL                    0x00
+
+		/** Mask for an ISOCHRONOUS type endpoint or pipe.
+		 *
+		 *  \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions.
+		 */
+		#define EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS                0x01
+
+		/** Mask for a BULK type endpoint or pipe.
+		 *
+		 *  \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions.
+		 */
+		#define EP_TYPE_BULK                       0x02
+
+		/** Mask for an INTERRUPT type endpoint or pipe.
+		 *
+		 *  \note See \ref Group_EndpointManagement and \ref Group_PipeManagement for endpoint/pipe functions.
+		 */
+		#define EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT                  0x03
+		//@}
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible USB controller modes, for initialization via \ref USB_Init() and indication back to the
+		 *  user application via \ref USB_CurrentMode.
+		 */
+		enum USB_Modes_t
+		{
+			USB_MODE_None   = 0, /**< Indicates that the controller is currently not initialized in any specific USB mode. */
+			USB_MODE_Device = 1, /**< Indicates that the controller is currently initialized in USB Device mode. */
+			USB_MODE_Host   = 2, /**< Indicates that the controller is currently initialized in USB Host mode. */
+			USB_MODE_UID    = 3, /**< Indicates that the controller should determine the USB mode from the UID pin of the
+			                      *   USB connector.
+			                      */
+		};
+
+	/* Architecture Includes: */
+		#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+			#include "AVR8/USBController_AVR8.h"
+		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
+			#include "UC3/USBController_UC3.h"
+		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+			#include "XMEGA/USBController_XMEGA.h"
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBInterrupt.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBInterrupt.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3dcfd5fed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBInterrupt.h
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB controller interrupt service routine management.
+ *
+ *  This file contains definitions required for the correct handling of low level USB service routine interrupts
+ *  from the USB controller.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __USBINTERRUPT_H__
+#define __USBINTERRUPT_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "USBMode.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Architecture Includes: */
+		#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+			#include "AVR8/USBInterrupt_AVR8.h"
+		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
+			#include "UC3/USBInterrupt_UC3.h"
+		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+			#include "XMEGA/USBInterrupt_XMEGA.h"
+		#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBMode.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBMode.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..09cf3076b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBMode.h
@@ -0,0 +1,283 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB mode and feature support definitions.
+ *  \copydetails Group_USBMode
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USB
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBMode USB Mode Tokens
+ *  \brief USB mode and feature support definitions.
+ *
+ *  This file defines macros indicating the type of USB controller the library is being compiled for, and its
+ *  capabilities. These macros may then be referenced in the user application to selectively enable or disable
+ *  code sections depending on if they are defined or not.
+ *
+ *  After the inclusion of the master USB driver header, one or more of the following tokens may be defined, to
+ *  allow the user code to conditionally enable or disable code based on the USB controller family and allowable
+ *  USB modes. These tokens may be tested against to eliminate code relating to a USB mode which is not enabled for
+ *  the given compilation.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __USBMODE_H__
+#define __USBMODE_H__
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+	#if defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the Series 2 AVR8 USB controller
+		 *  (i.e. AT90USBxxx2 or ATMEGAxxU2) when defined.
+		 */
+		#define USB_SERIES_2_AVR
+
+		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the Series 4 AVR8 USB controller
+		 *  (i.e. ATMEGAxxU4) when defined.
+		 */
+		#define USB_SERIES_4_AVR
+
+		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the Series 6 AVR8 USB controller
+		 *  (i.e. AT90USBxxx6) when defined.
+		 */
+		#define USB_SERIES_6_AVR
+
+		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the Series 7 AVR8 USB controller
+		 *  (i.e. AT90USBxxx7) when defined.
+		 */
+		#define USB_SERIES_7_AVR
+
+		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the AVR32 UC3A0 Series USB controller
+		 *  (i.e. AT32UC3A0*) when defined.
+		 */
+		#define USB_SERIES_UC3A0_AVR
+
+		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the AVR32 UC3A1 Series USB controller
+		 *  (i.e. AT32UC3A1*) when defined.
+		 */
+		#define USB_SERIES_UC3A1_AVR
+
+		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the AVR32 UC3A3 Series USB controller
+		 *  (i.e. AT32UC3A3*) when defined.
+		 */
+		#define USB_SERIES_UC3A3_AVR
+
+		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the AVR32 UC3A4 Series USB controller
+		 *  (i.e. AT32UC3A4*) when defined.
+		 */
+		#define USB_SERIES_UC3A4_AVR
+
+		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the AVR32 UC3B0 Series USB controller
+		 *  (i.e. AT32UC3B0*) when defined.
+		 */
+		#define USB_SERIES_UC3B0_AVR
+
+		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the AVR32 UC3B1 Series USB controller
+		 *  (i.e. AT32UC3B1*) when defined.
+		 */
+		#define USB_SERIES_UC3B1_AVR
+
+		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the XMEGA A1U Series USB controller
+		 *  (i.e. ATXMEGA*A1U) when defined.
+		 */
+		#define USB_SERIES_A1U_XMEGA
+
+		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the XMEGA A3U Series USB controller
+		 *  (i.e. ATXMEGA*A3U) when defined.
+		 */
+		#define USB_SERIES_A3U_XMEGA
+
+		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the XMEGA A4U Series USB controller
+		 *  (i.e. ATXMEGA*A4U) when defined.
+		 */
+		#define USB_SERIES_A4U_XMEGA
+
+		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the XMEGA B1 Series USB controller
+		 *  (i.e. ATXMEGA*B1) when defined.
+		 */
+		#define USB_SERIES_B1_XMEGA
+
+		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the XMEGA B3 Series USB controller
+		 *  (i.e. ATXMEGA*B3) when defined.
+		 */
+		#define USB_SERIES_B3_XMEGA
+
+		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the XMEGA C3 Series USB controller
+		 *  (i.e. ATXMEGA*C3) when defined.
+		 */
+		#define USB_SERIES_C3_XMEGA
+
+		/** Indicates that the target AVR microcontroller belongs to the XMEGA C4 Series USB controller
+		 *  (i.e. ATXMEGA*C4) when defined.
+		 */
+		#define USB_SERIES_C4_XMEGA
+
+		/** Indicates that the target microcontroller and compilation settings allow for the
+		 *  target to be configured in USB Device mode when defined.
+		 */
+		#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE
+
+		/** Indicates that the target microcontroller and compilation settings allow for the
+		 *  target to be configured in USB Host mode when defined.
+		 */
+		#define USB_CAN_BE_HOST
+
+		/** Indicates that the target microcontroller and compilation settings allow for the
+		 *  target to be configured in either USB Device or Host mode when defined.
+		 */
+		#define USB_CAN_BE_BOTH
+	#else
+		/* Macros: */
+			#if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB82__)  || \
+			     defined(__AVR_ATmega32U2__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega16U2__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega8U2__))
+				#define USB_SERIES_2_AVR
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE
+			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__))
+				#define USB_SERIES_4_AVR
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE
+			#elif (defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__))
+				#define USB_SERIES_6_AVR
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE
+			#elif (defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__))
+				#define USB_SERIES_7_AVR
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_HOST
+			#elif (defined(__AVR32_UC3A0512__) || defined(__AVR32_UC3A0256__) || \
+			       defined(__AVR32_UC3A0128__) || defined(__AVR32_UC3A064__))
+				#define USB_SERIES_UC3A0_AVR32
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_HOST
+			#elif (defined(__AVR32_UC3A1512__) || defined(__AVR32_UC3A1256__) || \
+			       defined(__AVR32_UC3A1128__) || defined(__AVR32_UC3A164__))
+				#define USB_SERIES_UC3A1_AVR32
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_HOST
+			#elif (defined(__AVR32_UC3A3256__) || defined(__AVR32_UC3A3256S__) || \
+			       defined(__AVR32_UC3A3128__) || defined(__AVR32_UC3A3128S__) || \
+			       defined(__AVR32_UC3A364__)  || defined(__AVR32_UC3A364S__))
+				#define USB_SERIES_UC3A3_AVR32
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_HOST
+			#elif (defined(__AVR32_UC3A4256__) || defined(__AVR32_UC3A4256S__) || \
+			       defined(__AVR32_UC3A4128__) || defined(__AVR32_UC3A4128S__) || \
+			       defined(__AVR32_UC3A464__)  || defined(__AVR32_UC3A464S__))
+				#define USB_SERIES_UC3A4_AVR32
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_HOST
+			#elif (defined(__AVR32_UC3B0512__) || defined(__AVR32_UC3B0256__) || \
+			       defined(__AVR32_UC3B0128__) || defined(__AVR32_UC3B064__))
+				#define USB_SERIES_UC3B0_AVR32
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_HOST
+			#elif (defined(__AVR32_UC3B1512__) || defined(__AVR32_UC3B1256__) || \
+			       defined(__AVR32_UC3B1128__) || defined(__AVR32_UC3B164__))
+				#define USB_SERIES_UC3B1_AVR32
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_HOST
+			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATxmega128A1U__) || defined(__AVR_ATxmega64A1U__))
+				#define USB_SERIES_A1U_XMEGA
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE
+			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATxmega64A3U__) || defined(__AVR_ATxmega128A3U__) || \
+			       defined(__AVR_ATxmega192A3U__) || defined(__AVR_ATxmega256A3U__))
+				#define USB_SERIES_A3U_XMEGA
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE
+			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATxmega256A3BU__))
+				#define USB_SERIES_A3BU_XMEGA
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE
+			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATxmega16A4U__) || defined(__AVR_ATxmega32A4U__) || \
+			       defined(__AVR_ATxmega64A4U__) || defined(__AVR_ATxmega128A4U__))
+				#define USB_SERIES_A4U_XMEGA
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE
+			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATxmega128B1__) || defined(__AVR_ATxmega64B1__))
+				#define USB_SERIES_B1_XMEGA
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE
+			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATxmega128B3__) || defined(__AVR_ATxmega64B3__))
+				#define USB_SERIES_B3_XMEGA
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE
+			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATxmega128C3__) || defined(__AVR_ATxmega64C3__) || \
+			       defined(__AVR_ATxmega192C3__) || defined(__AVR_ATxmega256C3__) || \
+				   defined(__AVR_ATxmega384C3__))
+				#define USB_SERIES_C3_XMEGA
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE
+			#elif (defined(__AVR_ATxmega16C4__) || defined(__AVR_ATxmega32C4__))
+				#define USB_SERIES_C4_XMEGA
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE
+			#endif
+
+			#if (defined(USB_HOST_ONLY) && defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY))
+				#error USB_HOST_ONLY and USB_DEVICE_ONLY are mutually exclusive.
+			#elif defined(USB_HOST_ONLY)
+				#if !defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+					#error USB_HOST_ONLY is not available for the currently selected microcontroller model.
+				#else
+					#undef USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE
+				#endif
+			#elif defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)
+				#if !defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+					#error USB_DEVICE_ONLY is not available for the currently selected microcontroller model.
+				#else
+					#undef USB_CAN_BE_HOST
+				#endif
+			#endif
+
+			#if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) && defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST))
+				#define USB_CAN_BE_BOTH
+			#endif
+
+			#if (!defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) && !defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST))
+				#error The currently selected device, USB mode or architecture is not supported.
+			#endif
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBTask.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBTask.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..30a3cd682
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBTask.c
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USBTASK_C
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "USBTask.h"
+
+volatile bool        USB_IsInitialized;
+USB_Request_Header_t USB_ControlRequest;
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) && !defined(HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR)
+volatile uint8_t     USB_HostState;
+#endif
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) && !defined(DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR)
+volatile uint8_t     USB_DeviceState;
+#endif
+
+void USB_USBTask(void)
+{
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+		if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device)
+		  USB_DeviceTask();
+		else if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Host)
+		  USB_HostTask();
+	#elif defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+		USB_HostTask();
+	#elif defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+		USB_DeviceTask();
+	#endif
+}
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+static void USB_DeviceTask(void)
+{
+	if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+	  return;
+
+	uint8_t PrevEndpoint = Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint();
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP);
+
+	if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())
+	  USB_Device_ProcessControlRequest();
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(PrevEndpoint);
+}
+#endif
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+static void USB_HostTask(void)
+{
+	uint8_t PrevPipe = Pipe_GetCurrentPipe();
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+	USB_Host_ProcessNextHostState();
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PrevPipe);
+}
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBTask.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBTask.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7205ea1da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBTask.h
@@ -0,0 +1,200 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Main USB service task management.
+ *
+ *  This file contains the function definitions required for the main USB service task, which must be called
+ *  from the user application to ensure that the USB connection to or from a connected USB device is maintained.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __USBTASK_H__
+#define __USBTASK_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "USBMode.h"
+		#include "USBController.h"
+		#include "Events.h"
+		#include "StdRequestType.h"
+		#include "StdDescriptors.h"
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+			#include "DeviceStandardReq.h"
+		#endif
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+			#include "HostStandardReq.h"
+		#endif
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Global Variables: */
+			/** Indicates if the USB interface is currently initialized but not necessarily connected to a host
+			 *  or device (i.e. if \ref USB_Init() has been run). If this is false, all other library globals related
+			 *  to the USB driver are invalid.
+			 *
+			 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
+			 *             changed in value.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_USBManagement
+			 */
+			extern volatile bool USB_IsInitialized;
+
+			/** Structure containing the last received Control request when in Device mode (for use in user-applications
+			 *  inside of the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event, or for filling up with a control request to
+			 *  issue when in Host mode before calling \ref USB_Host_SendControlRequest().
+			 *
+			 *  \note The contents of this structure is automatically endian-corrected for the current CPU architecture.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_USBManagement
+			 */
+			 extern USB_Request_Header_t USB_ControlRequest;
+
+			#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				#if !defined(HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+					/** Indicates the current host state machine state. When in host mode, this indicates the state
+					 *  via one of the values of the \ref USB_Host_States_t enum values.
+					 *
+					 *  This value should not be altered by the user application as it is handled automatically by the
+					 *  library.
+					 *
+					 *  To reduce program size and speed up checks of this global on the AVR8 architecture, it can be
+					 *  placed into one of the AVR's \c GPIOR hardware registers instead of RAM by defining the
+					 *  \c HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR token to a value between 0 and 2 in the project makefile and passing it to
+					 *  the compiler via the -D switch. When defined, the corresponding GPIOR register should not be used
+					 *  in the user application except implicitly via the library APIs.
+					 *
+					 *  \note This global is only present if the user application can be a USB host.
+					 *
+					 *  \see \ref USB_Host_States_t for a list of possible device states.
+					 *
+					 *  \ingroup Group_Host
+					 */
+					extern volatile uint8_t USB_HostState;
+				#else
+					#define USB_HostState            CONCAT_EXPANDED(GPIOR, HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR)
+				#endif
+			#endif
+
+			#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				#if !defined(DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+					/** Indicates the current device state machine state. When in device mode, this indicates the state
+					 *  via one of the values of the \ref USB_Device_States_t enum values.
+					 *
+					 *  This value should not be altered by the user application as it is handled automatically by the
+					 *  library. The only exception to this rule is if the NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT token is used
+					 *  (see \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Connect() and \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect() events).
+					 *
+					 *  To reduce program size and speed up checks of this global on the AVR8 architecture, it can be
+					 *  placed into one of the AVR's \c GPIOR hardware registers instead of RAM by defining the
+					 *  \c DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR token to a value between 0 and 2 in the project makefile and passing it to
+					 *  the compiler via the -D switch. When defined, the corresponding GPIOR register should not be used
+					 *  in the user application except implicitly via the library APIs.
+					 *
+					 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
+					 *             changed in value except in the circumstances outlined above.
+					 *
+					 *  \note This global is only present if the user application can be a USB device.
+					 *        \n\n
+					 *
+					 *  \see \ref USB_Device_States_t for a list of possible device states.
+					 *
+					 *  \ingroup Group_Device
+					 */
+					extern volatile uint8_t USB_DeviceState;
+				#else
+					#define USB_DeviceState            CONCAT_EXPANDED(GPIOR, DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR)
+				#endif
+			#endif
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** This is the main USB management task. The USB driver requires this task to be executed
+			 *  continuously when the USB system is active (device attached in host mode, or attached to a host
+			 *  in device mode) in order to manage USB communications. This task may be executed inside an RTOS,
+			 *  fast timer ISR or the main user application loop.
+			 *
+			 *  The USB task must be serviced within 30ms while in device mode, or within 1ms while in host mode.
+			 *  The task may be serviced at all times, or (for minimum CPU consumption):
+			 *
+			 *    - In device mode, it may be disabled at start-up, enabled on the firing of the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Connect()
+			 *      event and disabled again on the firing of the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect() event.
+			 *
+			 *    - In host mode, it may be disabled at start-up, enabled on the firing of the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached()
+			 *      event and disabled again on the firing of the \ref EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete() or
+			 *      \ref EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed() events.
+			 *
+			 *  If in device mode (only), the control endpoint can instead be managed via interrupts entirely by the library
+			 *  by defining the INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT token and passing it to the compiler via the -D switch.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref Group_Events for more information on the USB events.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_USBManagement
+			 */
+			void USB_USBTask(void);
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USBTASK_C)
+				#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+					static void USB_HostTask(void);
+				#endif
+
+				#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+					static void USB_DeviceTask(void);
+				#endif
+			#endif
+
+		/* Macros: */
+			#define HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(Duration, NextState) do { USB_HostState   = HOST_STATE_WaitForDevice; \
+			                                                          WaitMSRemaining = (Duration);               \
+			                                                          PostWaitState   = (NextState);              } while (0)
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Device_XMEGA.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Device_XMEGA.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..10c3279f3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Device_XMEGA.c
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+
+#include "../Device.h"
+
+void USB_Device_SendRemoteWakeup(void)
+{
+	USB.CTRLB |= USB_RWAKEUP_bm;
+}
+
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Device_XMEGA.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Device_XMEGA.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b203e1026
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Device_XMEGA.h
@@ -0,0 +1,266 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB Device definitions for the AVR XMEGA microcontrollers.
+ *  \copydetails Group_Device_XMEGA
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_Device
+ *  \defgroup Group_Device_XMEGA Device Management (XMEGA)
+ *  \brief USB Device definitions for the AVR XMEGA microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  Architecture specific USB Device definitions for the Atmel AVR XMEGA microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __USBDEVICE_XMEGA_H__
+#define __USBDEVICE_XMEGA_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../USBController.h"
+		#include "../StdDescriptors.h"
+		#include "../USBInterrupt.h"
+		#include "../Endpoint.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+		#if (defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS))
+			#error USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS and USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS are mutually exclusive.
+		#endif
+
+		#if (defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS))
+			#error USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS and USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS are mutually exclusive.
+		#endif
+
+		#if (defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS))
+			#error USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS and USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS are mutually exclusive.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** \name USB Device Mode Option Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** Mask for the Options parameter of the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the
+			 *  USB interface should be initialized in low speed (1.5Mb/s) mode.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Low Speed mode is not available on all USB AVR models.
+			 *        \n
+			 *
+			 *  \note Restrictions apply on the number, size and type of endpoints which can be used
+			 *        when running in low speed mode - refer to the USB 2.0 specification.
+			 */
+			#define USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED        (1 << 0)
+
+			#if (F_USB > 6000000)
+				/** Mask for the Options parameter of the \ref USB_Init() function. This indicates that the
+				 *  USB interface should be initialized in full speed (12Mb/s) mode.
+				 */
+				#define USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED   (0 << 0)
+			#endif
+			//@}
+
+			#if (!defined(NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
+				/** String descriptor index for the device's unique serial number string descriptor within the device.
+				 *  This unique serial number is used by the host to associate resources to the device (such as drivers or COM port
+				 *  number allocations) to a device regardless of the port it is plugged in to on the host. Some microcontrollers contain
+				 *  a unique serial number internally, and setting the device descriptors serial number string index to this value
+				 *  will cause it to use the internal serial number.
+				 *
+				 *  On unsupported devices, this will evaluate to \ref NO_DESCRIPTOR and so will force the host to create a pseudo-serial
+				 *  number for the device.
+				 */
+				#define USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL            0xDC
+
+				/** Length of the device's unique internal serial number, in bits, if present on the selected microcontroller
+				 *  model.
+				 */
+				#define INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS    (8 * (1 + (offsetof(NVM_PROD_SIGNATURES_t, COORDY1) - offsetof(NVM_PROD_SIGNATURES_t, LOTNUM0))))
+
+				/** Start address of the internal serial number, in the appropriate address space, if present on the selected microcontroller
+				 *  model.
+				 */
+				#define INTERNAL_SERIAL_START_ADDRESS  offsetof(NVM_PROD_SIGNATURES_t, LOTNUM0)
+			#else
+				#define USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL            NO_DESCRIPTOR
+
+				#define INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS    0
+				#define INTERNAL_SERIAL_START_ADDRESS  0
+			#endif
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Sends a Remote Wakeup request to the host. This signals to the host that the device should
+			 *  be taken out of suspended mode, and communications should resume.
+			 *
+			 *  Typically, this is implemented so that HID devices (mice, keyboards, etc.) can wake up the
+			 *  host computer when the host has suspended all USB devices to enter a low power state.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function should only be used if the device has indicated to the host that it
+			 *        supports the Remote Wakeup feature in the device descriptors, and should only be
+			 *        issued if the host is currently allowing remote wakeup events from the device (i.e.,
+			 *        the \ref USB_Device_RemoteWakeupEnabled flag is set). When the \c NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+			 *        compile time option is used, this function is unavailable.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note The USB clock must be running for this function to operate. If the stack is initialized with
+			 *        the \ref USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL option enabled, the user must ensure that the PLL is running
+			 *        before attempting to call this function.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref Group_StdDescriptors for more information on the RMWAKEUP feature and device descriptors.
+			 */
+			void USB_Device_SendRemoteWakeup(void);
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Returns the current USB frame number, when in device mode. Every millisecond the USB bus is active (i.e. enumerated to a host)
+			 *  the frame number is incremented by one.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Current USB frame number from the USB controller.
+			 */
+			static inline uint16_t USB_Device_GetFrameNumber(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint16_t USB_Device_GetFrameNumber(void)
+			{
+				return ((USB_EndpointTable_t*)USB.EPPTR)->FrameNum;
+			}
+
+			#if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS)
+			/** Enables the device mode Start Of Frame events. When enabled, this causes the
+			 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event to fire once per millisecond, synchronized to the USB bus,
+			 *  at the start of each USB frame when enumerated in device mode.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function is not available when the \c NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined.
+			 */
+			static inline void USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents(void)
+			{
+				USB.INTCTRLA |=  USB_SOFIE_bm;
+			}
+
+			/** Disables the device mode Start Of Frame events. When disabled, this stops the firing of the
+			 *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame() event when enumerated in device mode.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function is not available when the \c NO_SOF_EVENTS compile time token is defined.
+			 */
+			static inline void USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Device_DisableSOFEvents(void)
+			{
+				USB.INTCTRLA &= ~USB_SOFIE_bm;
+			}
+			#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			static inline void USB_Device_SetLowSpeed(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Device_SetLowSpeed(void)
+			{
+				USB.CTRLA &= ~USB_SPEED_bm;
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Device_SetFullSpeed(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Device_SetFullSpeed(void)
+			{
+				USB.CTRLA |=  USB_SPEED_bm;
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Device_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Device_SetDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address)
+			{
+				(void)Address;
+
+				/* No implementation for XMEGA architecture */
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Device_EnableDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Device_EnableDeviceAddress(const uint8_t Address)
+			{
+				USB.ADDR = Address;
+			}
+
+			static inline bool USB_Device_IsAddressSet(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline bool USB_Device_IsAddressSet(void)
+			{
+				return ((USB.ADDR != 0) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Device_GetSerialString(uint16_t* const UnicodeString) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			static inline void USB_Device_GetSerialString(uint16_t* const UnicodeString)
+			{
+				uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask();
+				GlobalInterruptDisable();
+
+				uint8_t SigReadAddress = INTERNAL_SERIAL_START_ADDRESS;
+
+				for (uint8_t SerialCharNum = 0; SerialCharNum < (INTERNAL_SERIAL_LENGTH_BITS / 4); SerialCharNum++)
+				{
+					uint8_t SerialByte;
+
+					NVM.CMD    = NVM_CMD_READ_CALIB_ROW_gc;
+					SerialByte = pgm_read_byte(SigReadAddress);
+					NVM.CMD    = 0;
+
+					if (SerialCharNum & 0x01)
+					{
+						SerialByte >>= 4;
+						SigReadAddress++;
+					}
+
+					SerialByte &= 0x0F;
+
+					UnicodeString[SerialCharNum] = cpu_to_le16((SerialByte >= 10) ?
+															   (('A' - 10) + SerialByte) : ('0' + SerialByte));
+				}
+
+				SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt);
+			}
+
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/EndpointStream_XMEGA.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/EndpointStream_XMEGA.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..421d71709
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/EndpointStream_XMEGA.c
@@ -0,0 +1,275 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+
+#include "EndpointStream_XMEGA.h"
+
+#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
+uint8_t Endpoint_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length,
+                                uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)
+{
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+	uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
+	  Length -= *BytesProcessed;
+
+	while (Length)
+	{
+		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		{
+			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+			if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
+			{
+				*BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;
+				return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;
+			}
+
+			if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
+			  return ErrorCode;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			Endpoint_Discard_8();
+
+			Length--;
+			BytesInTransfer++;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+uint8_t Endpoint_Null_Stream(uint16_t Length,
+                             uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)
+{
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+	uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
+	  Length -= *BytesProcessed;
+
+	while (Length)
+	{
+		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		{
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+			if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
+			{
+				*BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;
+				return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;
+			}
+
+			if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
+			  return ErrorCode;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			Endpoint_Write_8(0);
+
+			Length--;
+			BytesInTransfer++;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+/* The following abuses the C preprocessor in order to copy-paste common code with slight alterations,
+ * so that the code needs to be written once. It is a crude form of templating to reduce code maintenance. */
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(*BufferPtr)
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(*BufferPtr)
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Endpoint_Read_8()
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Stream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
+#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Endpoint_Read_8()
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+#if defined(ARCH_HAS_FLASH_ADDRESS_SPACE)
+	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_PStream_LE
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount
+	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(pgm_read_byte(BufferPtr))
+	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_PStream_BE
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount
+	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(pgm_read_byte(BufferPtr))
+	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+#endif
+
+#if defined(ARCH_HAS_EEPROM_ADDRESS_SPACE)
+	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_EStream_LE
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount
+	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(eeprom_read_byte(BufferPtr))
+	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_EStream_BE
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      const void*
+	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearIN()
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount
+	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(eeprom_read_byte(BufferPtr))
+	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_EStream_LE
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
+	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount
+	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_update_byte(BufferPtr, Endpoint_Read_8())
+	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+
+	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_EStream_BE
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE                      void*
+	#define  TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT()                 Endpoint_ClearOUT()
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount
+	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_update_byte(BufferPtr, Endpoint_Read_8())
+	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(*BufferPtr)
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(*BufferPtr)
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Endpoint_Read_8()
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"
+
+#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_BE
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount
+#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         *BufferPtr = Endpoint_Read_8()
+#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"
+
+#if defined(ARCH_HAS_FLASH_ADDRESS_SPACE)
+	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_LE
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount
+	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(pgm_read_byte(BufferPtr))
+	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"
+
+	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_BE
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount
+	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(pgm_read_byte(BufferPtr))
+	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"
+#endif
+
+#if defined(ARCH_HAS_EEPROM_ADDRESS_SPACE)
+	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_LE
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount
+	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(eeprom_read_byte(BufferPtr))
+	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"
+
+	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_BE
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount
+	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         Endpoint_Write_8(eeprom_read_byte(BufferPtr))
+	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"
+
+	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Control_EStream_LE
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            0
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr += Amount
+	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_update_byte(BufferPtr, Endpoint_Read_8())
+	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"
+
+	#define  TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME                        Endpoint_Read_Control_EStream_BE
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length)            (Length - 1)
+	#define  TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(BufferPtr, Amount)   BufferPtr -= Amount
+	#define  TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(BufferPtr)         eeprom_update_byte(BufferPtr, Endpoint_Read_8())
+	#include "Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/EndpointStream_XMEGA.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/EndpointStream_XMEGA.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cba6537db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/EndpointStream_XMEGA.h
@@ -0,0 +1,658 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Endpoint data stream transmission and reception management for the AVR XMEGA microcontrollers.
+ *  \copydetails Group_EndpointStreamRW_XMEGA
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_EndpointStreamRW
+ *  \defgroup Group_EndpointStreamRW_XMEGA Read/Write of Multi-Byte Streams (XMEGA)
+ *  \brief Endpoint data stream transmission and reception management for the Atmel AVR XMEGA architecture.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of data streams from
+ *  and to endpoints.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __ENDPOINT_STREAM_XMEGA_H__
+#define __ENDPOINT_STREAM_XMEGA_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../USBMode.h"
+		#include "../USBTask.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** \name Stream functions for null data */
+			//@{
+
+			/** Reads and discards the given number of bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank,
+			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically
+			 *  discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the user is responsible for manually
+			 *  discarding the last packet from the host via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,
+			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid
+			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time
+			 *  the endpoint bank becomes empty while there is still data to process (and after the current
+			 *  packet has been acknowledged) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the total number
+			 *  of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of
+			 *  \ref ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed
+			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters
+			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;
+			 *
+			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Discard_Stream(512, NULL)) != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;
+			 *
+			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;
+			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Discard_Stream(512, &BytesProcessed)) == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required
+			 *  }
+			 *
+			 *  if (ErrorCode != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to discard via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current
+			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length,
+			                                uint16_t* const BytesProcessed);
+
+			/** Writes a given number of zeroed bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank, sending
+			 *  full packets to the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically sent once the
+			 *  remaining bytes have been written; the user is responsible for manually sending the last
+			 *  packet to the host via the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,
+			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid
+			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time
+			 *  the endpoint bank becomes full while there is still data to process (and after the current
+			 *  packet transmission has been initiated) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the
+			 *  total number of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of
+			 *  \ref ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed
+			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters
+			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;
+			 *
+			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Null_Stream(512, NULL)) != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;
+			 *
+			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;
+			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Null_Stream(512, &BytesProcessed)) == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required
+			 *  }
+			 *
+			 *  if (ErrorCode != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of zero bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current
+			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Null_Stream(uint16_t Length,
+			                             uint16_t* const BytesProcessed);
+
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name Stream functions for RAM source/destination data */
+			//@{
+
+			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,
+			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;
+			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the
+			 *  \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,
+			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid
+			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time
+			 *  the endpoint bank becomes full while there is still data to process (and after the current
+			 *  packet transmission has been initiated) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the
+			 *  total number of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of
+			 *  \ref ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed
+			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters
+			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t DataStream[512];
+			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;
+			 *
+			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),
+			 *                                            NULL)) != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t  DataStream[512];
+			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;
+			 *
+			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;
+			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),
+			 *                                               &BytesProcessed)) == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required
+			 *  }
+			 *
+			 *  if (ErrorCode != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current
+			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                                 uint16_t Length,
+			                                 uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,
+			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent;
+			 *  the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the
+			 *  \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current
+			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                                 uint16_t Length,
+			                                 uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,
+			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically
+			 *  discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the user is responsible for manually
+			 *  discarding the last packet from the host via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  If the BytesProcessed parameter is \c NULL, the entire stream transfer is attempted at once,
+			 *  failing or succeeding as a single unit. If the BytesProcessed parameter points to a valid
+			 *  storage location, the transfer will instead be performed as a series of chunks. Each time
+			 *  the endpoint bank becomes empty while there is still data to process (and after the current
+			 *  packet has been acknowledged) the BytesProcessed location will be updated with the total number
+			 *  of bytes processed in the stream, and the function will exit with an error code of
+			 *  \ref ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer. This allows for any abort checking to be performed
+			 *  in the user code - to continue the transfer, call the function again with identical parameters
+			 *  and it will resume until the BytesProcessed value reaches the total transfer length.
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Single Stream Transfer Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t DataStream[512];
+			 *  uint8_t ErrorCode;
+			 *
+			 *  if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),
+			 *                                           NULL)) != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *       // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  <b>Partial Stream Transfers Example:</b>
+			 *  \code
+			 *  uint8_t  DataStream[512];
+			 *  uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+			 *  uint16_t BytesProcessed;
+			 *
+			 *  BytesProcessed = 0;
+			 *  while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(DataStream, sizeof(DataStream),
+			 *                                              &BytesProcessed)) == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream not yet complete - do other actions here, abort if required
+			 *  }
+			 *
+			 *  if (ErrorCode != ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+			 *  {
+			 *      // Stream failed to complete - check ErrorCode here
+			 *  }
+			 *  \endcode
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current
+			 *                              transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(void* const Buffer,
+			                                uint16_t Length,
+			                                uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,
+			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically
+			 *  discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the user is responsible for manually
+			 *  discarding the last packet from the host via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current
+			 *                              transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Stream_BE(void* const Buffer,
+			                                uint16_t Length,
+			                                uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the CONTROL type endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,
+			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The host OUT acknowledgement is not automatically cleared
+			 *  in both failure and success states; the user is responsible for manually clearing the status OUT packet
+			 *  to finalize the transfer's status stage via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically sends the last packet in the data stage of the transaction; when the
+			 *        function returns, the user is responsible for clearing the <b>status</b> stage of the transaction.
+			 *        Note that the status stage packet is sent or received in the opposite direction of the data flow.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                                         uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Writes the given number of bytes to the CONTROL type endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,
+			 *  sending full packets to the host as needed. The host OUT acknowledgement is not automatically cleared
+			 *  in both failure and success states; the user is responsible for manually clearing the status OUT packet
+			 *  to finalize the transfer's status stage via the \ref Endpoint_ClearOUT() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically sends the last packet in the data stage of the transaction; when the
+			 *        function returns, the user is responsible for clearing the <b>status</b> stage of the transaction.
+			 *        Note that the status stage packet is sent or received in the opposite direction of the data flow.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_BE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                                         uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the CONTROL endpoint from the given buffer in little endian,
+			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The device IN acknowledgement is not
+			 *  automatically sent after success or failure states; the user is responsible for manually sending the
+			 *  status IN packet to finalize the transfer's status stage via the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically sends the last packet in the data stage of the transaction; when the
+			 *        function returns, the user is responsible for clearing the <b>status</b> stage of the transaction.
+			 *        Note that the status stage packet is sent or received in the opposite direction of the data flow.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in]  Length  Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(void* const Buffer,
+			                                        uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** Reads the given number of bytes from the CONTROL endpoint from the given buffer in big endian,
+			 *  discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The device IN acknowledgement is not
+			 *  automatically sent after success or failure states; the user is responsible for manually sending the
+			 *  status IN packet to finalize the transfer's status stage via the \ref Endpoint_ClearIN() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically sends the last packet in the data stage of the transaction; when the
+			 *        function returns, the user is responsible for clearing the <b>status</b> stage of the transaction.
+			 *        Note that the status stage packet is sent or received in the opposite direction of the data flow.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in]  Length  Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_BE(void* const Buffer,
+			                                        uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name Stream functions for EEPROM source/destination data */
+			//@{
+
+			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current
+			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_EStream_LE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                                  uint16_t Length,
+			                                  uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current
+			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_EStream_BE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                                  uint16_t Length,
+			                                  uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** EEPROM buffer destination version of \ref Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to, located in EEPROM memory space.
+			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current
+			 *                              transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_EStream_LE(void* const Buffer,
+			                                 uint16_t Length,
+			                                 uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** EEPROM buffer destination version of \ref Endpoint_Read_Stream_BE().
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer          Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to, located in EEPROM memory space.
+			 *  \param[in]  Length          Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *  \param[in]  BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current
+			 *                              transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be read at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_EStream_BE(void* const Buffer,
+			                                 uint16_t Length,
+			                                 uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** EEPROM buffer source version of Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically sends the last packet in the data stage of the transaction; when the
+			 *        function returns, the user is responsible for clearing the <b>status</b> stage of the transaction.
+			 *        Note that the status stage packet is sent or received in the opposite direction of the data flow.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_LE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                                          uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_BE().
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically sends the last packet in the data stage of the transaction; when the
+			 *        function returns, the user is responsible for clearing the <b>status</b> stage of the transaction.
+			 *        Note that the status stage packet is sent or received in the opposite direction of the data flow.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_EStream_BE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                                          uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE().
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically sends the last packet in the data stage of the transaction; when the
+			 *        function returns, the user is responsible for clearing the <b>status</b> stage of the transaction.
+			 *        Note that the status stage packet is sent or received in the opposite direction of the data flow.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in]  Length  Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_EStream_LE(void* const Buffer,
+			                                         uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** EEPROM buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_BE().
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically sends the last packet in the data stage of the transaction; when the
+			 *        function returns, the user is responsible for clearing the <b>status</b> stage of the transaction.
+			 *        Note that the status stage packet is sent or received in the opposite direction of the data flow.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[out] Buffer  Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to.
+			 *  \param[in]  Length  Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_EStream_BE(void* const Buffer,
+			                                         uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			//@}
+
+			/** \name Stream functions for PROGMEM source/destination data */
+			//@{
+
+			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE().
+			 *
+			 *  \pre The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current
+			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_PStream_LE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                                  uint16_t Length,
+			                                  uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE().
+			 *
+			 *  \pre The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer          Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length          Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *  \param[in] BytesProcessed  Pointer to a location where the total number of bytes processed in the current
+			 *                             transaction should be updated, \c NULL if the entire stream should be written at once.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_PStream_BE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                                  uint16_t Length,
+			                                  uint16_t* const BytesProcessed) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE().
+			 *
+			 *  \pre The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically sends the last packet in the data stage of the transaction; when the
+			 *        function returns, the user is responsible for clearing the <b>status</b> stage of the transaction.
+			 *        Note that the status stage packet is sent or received in the opposite direction of the data flow.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_LE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                                          uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+			/** FLASH buffer source version of \ref Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_BE().
+			 *
+			 *  \pre The FLASH data must be located in the first 64KB of FLASH for this function to work correctly.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This function automatically sends the last packet in the data stage of the transaction; when the
+			 *        function returns, the user is responsible for clearing the <b>status</b> stage of the transaction.
+			 *        Note that the status stage packet is sent or received in the opposite direction of the data flow.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained
+			 *           together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Buffer  Pointer to the source data buffer to read from.
+			 *  \param[in] Length  Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_PStream_BE(const void* const Buffer,
+			                                          uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+			//@}
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Endpoint_XMEGA.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Endpoint_XMEGA.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8155ecf7d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Endpoint_XMEGA.c
@@ -0,0 +1,268 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+
+#include "../Endpoint.h"
+
+#if !defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE)
+uint8_t USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP_DEFAULT_SIZE;
+#endif
+
+Endpoint_FIFOPair_t       USB_Endpoint_FIFOs[ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS];
+
+volatile uint8_t          USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint;
+volatile USB_EP_t*        USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle;
+volatile Endpoint_FIFO_t* USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO;
+
+bool Endpoint_IsINReady(void)
+{
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint | ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	return ((USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->STATUS & USB_EP_BUSNACK0_bm) ? true : false);
+}
+
+bool Endpoint_IsOUTReceived(void)
+{
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint & ~ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	if (USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->STATUS & USB_EP_TRNCOMPL0_bm)
+	{
+		USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Length = USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->CNT;
+		return true;
+	}
+
+	return false;
+}
+
+bool Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived(void)
+{
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint & ~ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	if (USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->STATUS & USB_EP_SETUP_bm)
+	{
+		USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Length = USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->CNT;
+		return true;
+	}
+
+	return false;
+}
+
+void Endpoint_ClearSETUP(void)
+{
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint & ~ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+	USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->STATUS &= ~(USB_EP_SETUP_bm | USB_EP_TRNCOMPL0_bm | USB_EP_BUSNACK0_bm | USB_EP_OVF_bm);
+	USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->STATUS |= USB_EP_TOGGLE_bm;
+	USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Position  = 0;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint | ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+	USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->STATUS |= USB_EP_TOGGLE_bm;
+	USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Position  = 0;
+}
+
+void Endpoint_ClearIN(void)
+{
+	USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->CNT     = USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Position;
+	USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->STATUS &= ~(USB_EP_TRNCOMPL0_bm | USB_EP_BUSNACK0_bm | USB_EP_OVF_bm);
+	USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Position  = 0;
+}
+
+void Endpoint_ClearOUT(void)
+{
+	USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->STATUS &= ~(USB_EP_TRNCOMPL0_bm | USB_EP_BUSNACK0_bm | USB_EP_OVF_bm);
+	USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Position  = 0;
+}
+
+void Endpoint_StallTransaction(void)
+{
+	USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->CTRL |= USB_EP_STALL_bm;
+
+	if ((USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->CTRL & USB_EP_TYPE_gm) == USB_EP_TYPE_CONTROL_gc)
+	{
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint ^ ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+		USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->CTRL |= USB_EP_STALL_bm;
+	}
+}
+
+uint8_t Endpoint_Read_8(void)
+{
+	return USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Data[USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Position++];
+}
+
+void Endpoint_Write_8(const uint8_t Data)
+{
+	USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Data[USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Position++] = Data;
+}
+
+void Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(const uint8_t Address)
+{
+	uint8_t EndpointNumber = (Address & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK);
+
+	USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint = Address;
+
+	Endpoint_FIFOPair_t* EndpointFIFOPair = &USB_Endpoint_FIFOs[EndpointNumber];
+	USB_EndpointTable_t* EndpointTable    = (USB_EndpointTable_t*)USB.EPPTR;
+
+	if (Address & ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+	{
+		USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO   = &EndpointFIFOPair->IN;
+		USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle = &EndpointTable->Endpoints[EndpointNumber].IN;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO   = &EndpointFIFOPair->OUT;
+		USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle = &EndpointTable->Endpoints[EndpointNumber].OUT;
+	}
+}
+
+bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(const USB_Endpoint_Table_t* const Table,
+                                     const uint8_t Entries)
+{
+	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < Entries; i++)
+	{
+		if (!(Table[i].Address))
+		  continue;
+
+		if (!(Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(Table[i].Address, Table[i].Type, Table[i].Size, Table[i].Banks)))
+		{
+			return false;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_PRV(const uint8_t Address,
+                                    const uint8_t Config,
+                                    const uint8_t Size)
+{
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(Address);
+
+	USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->CTRL    = 0;
+	USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->STATUS  = (Address & ENDPOINT_DIR_IN) ? USB_EP_BUSNACK0_bm : 0;
+	USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->CTRL    = Config;
+	USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->CNT     = 0;
+	USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->DATAPTR = (intptr_t)USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Data;
+
+	USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Length    = (Address & ENDPOINT_DIR_IN) ? Size : 0;
+	USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Position  = 0;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+void Endpoint_ClearEndpoints(void)
+{
+	for (uint8_t EPNum = 0; EPNum < ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS; EPNum++)
+	{
+		((USB_EndpointTable_t*)USB.EPPTR)->Endpoints[EPNum].IN.CTRL  = 0;
+		((USB_EndpointTable_t*)USB.EPPTR)->Endpoints[EPNum].OUT.CTRL = 0;
+	}
+}
+
+void Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(void)
+{
+	if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST)
+	{
+		while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+		{
+			if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+			  return;
+		}
+
+		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+		{
+			if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+			  return;
+		}
+
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+	}
+}
+
+#if !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
+uint8_t Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(void)
+{
+	#if (USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS < 0xFF)
+	uint8_t  TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;
+	#else
+	uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS;
+	#endif
+
+	uint16_t PreviousFrameNumber = USB_Device_GetFrameNumber();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		if (Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection() == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+		{
+			if (Endpoint_IsINReady())
+			  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+			  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError;
+		}
+
+		uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;
+
+		if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected;
+		else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)
+		  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_BusSuspended;
+		else if (Endpoint_IsStalled())
+		  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_EndpointStalled;
+
+		uint16_t CurrentFrameNumber = USB_Device_GetFrameNumber();
+
+		if (CurrentFrameNumber != PreviousFrameNumber)
+		{
+			PreviousFrameNumber = CurrentFrameNumber;
+
+			if (!(TimeoutMSRem--))
+			  return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_Timeout;
+		}
+	}
+}
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Endpoint_XMEGA.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Endpoint_XMEGA.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..42c476b24
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Endpoint_XMEGA.h
@@ -0,0 +1,689 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB Endpoint definitions for the AVR XMEGA microcontrollers.
+ *  \copydetails Group_EndpointManagement_XMEGA
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_EndpointRW
+ *  \defgroup Group_EndpointRW_XMEGA Endpoint Data Reading and Writing (XMEGA)
+ *  \brief Endpoint data read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR XMEGA architecture.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing from and to endpoints.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW
+ *  \defgroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA Read/Write of Primitive Data Types (XMEGA)
+ *  \brief Endpoint primitive read/write definitions for the Atmel AVR XMEGA architecture.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to data reading and writing of primitive data types
+ *  from and to endpoints.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement
+ *  \defgroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA Endpoint Packet Management (XMEGA)
+ *  \brief Endpoint packet management definitions for the Atmel AVR XMEGA architecture.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to packet management of endpoints.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_EndpointManagement
+ *  \defgroup Group_EndpointManagement_XMEGA Endpoint Management (XMEGA)
+ *  \brief Endpoint management definitions for the Atmel AVR XMEGA architecture.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros and enums related to endpoint management when in USB Device mode. This
+ *  module contains the endpoint management macros, as well as endpoint interrupt and data
+ *  send/receive functions for various data types.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __ENDPOINT_XMEGA_H__
+#define __ENDPOINT_XMEGA_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../USBTask.h"
+		#include "../USBInterrupt.h"
+		#include "../USBController.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			#if (!defined(MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX) && !defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Total number of endpoints (including the default control endpoint at address 0) which may
+				 *  be used in the device. Different USB AVR models support different amounts of endpoints,
+				 *  this value reflects the maximum number of endpoints for the currently selected AVR model.
+				 */
+				#define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS            16
+			#else
+				#if defined(CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE)
+					#define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS        1
+				#else
+					#define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS        (MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX + 1)
+				#endif
+			#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				uint8_t Data[64];
+
+				uint8_t Length;
+				uint8_t Position;
+			} Endpoint_FIFO_t;
+
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				Endpoint_FIFO_t OUT;
+				Endpoint_FIFO_t IN;
+			} Endpoint_FIFOPair_t;
+
+		/* External Variables: */
+			extern Endpoint_FIFOPair_t       USB_Endpoint_FIFOs[ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS];
+			extern volatile uint8_t          USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint;
+			extern volatile USB_EP_t*        USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle;
+			extern volatile Endpoint_FIFO_t* USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO;
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST
+			                                                                       ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes)
+			{
+				uint8_t  MaskVal    = 0;
+				uint16_t CheckBytes = 8;
+
+				while (CheckBytes < Bytes)
+				{
+					MaskVal++;
+					CheckBytes <<= 1;
+				}
+
+				return (MaskVal << USB_EP_BUFSIZE_gp);
+			}
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_PRV(const uint8_t Address,
+			                                    const uint8_t Config,
+			                                    const uint8_t Size);
+			void Endpoint_ClearEndpoints(void);
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			#if (!defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
+				/** Default size of the default control endpoint's bank, until altered by the control endpoint bank size
+				 *  value in the device descriptor. Not available if the \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token is defined.
+				 */
+				#define ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP_DEFAULT_SIZE     8
+			#endif
+
+		/* Enums: */
+			/** Enum for the possible error return codes of the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady() function.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointRW_XMEGA
+			 */
+			enum Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t
+			{
+				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError                 = 0, /**< Endpoint is ready for next packet, no error. */
+				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_EndpointStalled         = 1, /**< The endpoint was stalled during the stream
+				                                                 *   transfer by the host or device.
+				                                                 */
+				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected      = 2,	/**< Device was disconnected from the host while
+				                                                 *   waiting for the endpoint to become ready.
+				                                                 */
+				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_BusSuspended            = 3, /**< The USB bus has been suspended by the host and
+				                                                 *   no USB endpoint traffic can occur until the bus
+				                                                 *   has resumed.
+				                                                 */
+				ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_Timeout                 = 4, /**< The host failed to accept or send the next packet
+				                                                 *   within the software timeout period set by the
+				                                                 *   \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro.
+				                                                 */
+			};
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Selects the given endpoint address.
+			 *
+			 *  Any endpoint operations which do not require the endpoint address to be indicated will operate on
+			 *  the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Address  Endpoint address to select.
+			 */
+			void Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(const uint8_t Address);
+
+			/** Configures the specified endpoint address with the given endpoint type, bank size and number of hardware
+			 *  banks. Once configured, the endpoint may be read from or written to, depending on its direction.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Address    Endpoint address to configure.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Type       Type of endpoint to configure, a \c EP_TYPE_* mask. Not all endpoint types
+			 *                        are available on Low Speed USB devices - refer to the USB 2.0 specification.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Size       Size of the endpoint's bank, where packets are stored before they are transmitted
+			 *                        to the USB host, or after they have been received from the USB host (depending on
+			 *                        the endpoint's data direction). The bank size must indicate the maximum packet size
+			 *                        that the endpoint can handle.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Banks      Number of hardware banks to use for the endpoint being configured.
+			 *
+			 *  \note The default control endpoint should not be manually configured by the user application, as
+			 *        it is automatically configured by the library internally.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine will automatically select the specified endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the configuration succeeded, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(const uint8_t Address,
+			                                              const uint8_t Type,
+			                                              const uint16_t Size,
+			                                              const uint8_t Banks) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(const uint8_t Address,
+			                                              const uint8_t Type,
+			                                              const uint16_t Size,
+			                                              const uint8_t Banks)
+			{
+				uint8_t EPConfigMask = (USB_EP_INTDSBL_bm | ((Banks > 1) ? USB_EP_PINGPONG_bm : 0) | Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(Size));
+
+				if ((Address & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK) >= ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS)
+				  return false;
+
+				// TODO - Fix once limitations are lifted
+				EPConfigMask &= ~USB_EP_PINGPONG_bm;
+				if (Size > 64)
+				  return false;
+
+				switch (Type)
+				{
+					case EP_TYPE_CONTROL:
+						EPConfigMask |= USB_EP_TYPE_CONTROL_gc;
+						break;
+					case EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS:
+						EPConfigMask |= USB_EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS_gc;
+						break;
+					default:
+						EPConfigMask |= USB_EP_TYPE_BULK_gc;
+						break;
+				}
+
+				if (Type == EP_TYPE_CONTROL)
+				  Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_PRV(Address ^ ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, EPConfigMask, Size);
+
+				return Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint_PRV(Address, EPConfigMask, Size);
+			}
+
+			/** Indicates the number of bytes currently stored in the current endpoint's selected bank.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointRW_XMEGA
+			 *
+			 *  \return Total number of bytes in the currently selected Endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(void)
+			{
+				if (USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint & ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+				  return USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Position;
+				else
+				  return (USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Length - USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Position);
+			}
+
+			/** Get the endpoint address of the currently selected endpoint. This is typically used to save
+			 *  the currently selected endpoint so that it can be restored after another endpoint has been
+			 *  manipulated.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Index of the currently selected endpoint.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint(void)
+			{
+				return USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint;
+			}
+
+			/** Resets the endpoint bank FIFO. This clears all the endpoint banks and resets the USB controller's
+			 *  data In and Out pointers to the bank's contents.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Address  Endpoint address whose FIFO buffers are to be reset.
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(const uint8_t Address) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_ResetEndpoint(const uint8_t Address)
+			{
+				if (Address & ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+				  USB_Endpoint_FIFOs[Address & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK].IN.Position  = 0;
+				else
+				  USB_Endpoint_FIFOs[Address & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK].OUT.Position = 0;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is enabled, but not necessarily configured.
+			 *
+			 * \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint is enabled, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsEnabled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsEnabled(void)
+			{
+				return true;
+			}
+
+			/** Aborts all pending IN transactions on the currently selected endpoint, once the bank
+			 *  has been queued for transmission to the host via \ref Endpoint_ClearIN(). This function
+			 *  will terminate all queued transactions, resetting the endpoint banks ready for a new
+			 *  packet.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_AbortPendingIN(void)
+			{
+				USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->STATUS |= USB_EP_BUSNACK0_bm;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint may be read from (if data is waiting in the endpoint
+			 *  bank and the endpoint is an OUT direction, or if the bank is not yet full if the endpoint is an IN
+			 *  direction). This function will return false if an error has occurred in the endpoint, if the endpoint
+			 *  is an OUT direction and no packet (or an empty packet) has been received, or if the endpoint is an IN
+			 *  direction and the endpoint bank is full.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint may be read from or written to, depending
+			 *          on its direction.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed(void)
+			{
+				return (USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Position < USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Length);
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is configured.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint has been configured, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsConfigured(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsConfigured(void)
+			{
+				return ((USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->CTRL & USB_EP_TYPE_gm) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the selected IN endpoint is ready for a new packet to be sent to the host.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the current endpoint is ready for an IN packet, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool Endpoint_IsINReady(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+
+			/** Determines if the selected OUT endpoint has received new packet from the host.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if current endpoint is has received an OUT packet, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool Endpoint_IsOUTReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+
+			/** Determines if the current CONTROL type endpoint has received a SETUP packet.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the selected endpoint has received a SETUP packet, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+
+			/** Clears a received SETUP packet on the currently selected CONTROL type endpoint, freeing up the
+			 *  endpoint for the next packet.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA
+			 *
+			 *  \note This is not applicable for non CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 */
+			void Endpoint_ClearSETUP(void);
+
+			/** Sends an IN packet to the host on the currently selected endpoint, freeing up the endpoint for the
+			 *  next packet and switching to the alternative endpoint bank if double banked.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA
+			 */
+			void Endpoint_ClearIN(void);
+
+			/** Acknowledges an OUT packet to the host on the currently selected endpoint, freeing up the endpoint
+			 *  for the next packet and switching to the alternative endpoint bank if double banked.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA
+			 */
+			void Endpoint_ClearOUT(void);
+
+			/** Stalls the current endpoint, indicating to the host that a logical problem occurred with the
+			 *  indicated endpoint and that the current transfer sequence should be aborted. This provides a
+			 *  way for devices to indicate invalid commands to the host so that the current transfer can be
+			 *  aborted and the host can begin its own recovery sequence.
+			 *
+			 *  The currently selected endpoint remains stalled until either the \ref Endpoint_ClearStall() macro
+			 *  is called, or the host issues a CLEAR FEATURE request to the device for the currently selected
+			 *  endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA
+			 */
+			void Endpoint_StallTransaction(void);
+
+			/** Clears the STALL condition on the currently selected endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_ClearStall(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_ClearStall(void)
+			{
+				USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->CTRL &= ~USB_EP_STALL_bm;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines if the currently selected endpoint is stalled, \c false otherwise.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPacketManagement_XMEGA
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the currently selected endpoint is stalled, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsStalled(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool Endpoint_IsStalled(void)
+			{
+				return ((USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->CTRL & USB_EP_STALL_bm) ? true : false);
+			}
+
+			/** Resets the data toggle of the currently selected endpoint. */
+			static inline void Endpoint_ResetDataToggle(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_ResetDataToggle(void)
+			{
+				USB_Endpoint_SelectedHandle->STATUS &= ~USB_EP_TOGGLE_bm;
+			}
+
+			/** Determines the currently selected endpoint's direction.
+			 *
+			 *  \return The currently selected endpoint's direction, as a \c ENDPOINT_DIR_* mask.
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint8_t Endpoint_GetEndpointDirection(void)
+			{
+				return (USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint & ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+			}
+
+			/** Reads one byte from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next byte in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_Read_8(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+
+			/** Writes one byte to the currently selected endpoint's bank, for IN direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write into the the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			void Endpoint_Write_8(const uint8_t Data);
+
+			/** Discards one byte from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_8(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_8(void)
+			{
+				USB_Endpoint_SelectedFIFO->Position++;
+			}
+
+			/** Reads two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for OUT
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next two bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_LE(void)
+			{
+				uint16_t Byte0 = Endpoint_Read_8();
+				uint16_t Byte1 = Endpoint_Read_8();
+
+				return ((Byte1 << 8) | Byte0);
+			}
+
+			/** Reads two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for OUT
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next two bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_16_BE(void)
+			{
+				uint16_t Byte0 = Endpoint_Read_8();
+				uint16_t Byte1 = Endpoint_Read_8();
+
+				return ((Byte0 << 8) | Byte1);
+			}
+
+			/** Writes two bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for IN
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_LE(const uint16_t Data)
+			{
+				Endpoint_Write_8(Data & 0xFF);
+				Endpoint_Write_8(Data >> 8);
+			}
+
+			/** Writes two bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for IN
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_16_BE(const uint16_t Data)
+			{
+				Endpoint_Write_8(Data >> 8);
+				Endpoint_Write_8(Data & 0xFF);
+			}
+
+			/** Discards two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_16(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_16(void)
+			{
+				Endpoint_Discard_8();
+				Endpoint_Discard_8();
+			}
+
+			/** Reads four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for OUT
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next four bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_LE(void)
+			{
+				uint32_t Byte0 = Endpoint_Read_8();
+				uint32_t Byte1 = Endpoint_Read_8();
+				uint32_t Byte2 = Endpoint_Read_8();
+				uint32_t Byte3 = Endpoint_Read_8();
+
+				return ((Byte3 << 24) | (Byte2 << 16) | (Byte1 << 8) | Byte0);
+			}
+
+			/** Reads four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for OUT
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA
+			 *
+			 *  \return Next four bytes in the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_32_BE(void)
+			{
+				uint32_t Byte0 = Endpoint_Read_8();
+				uint32_t Byte1 = Endpoint_Read_8();
+				uint32_t Byte2 = Endpoint_Read_8();
+				uint32_t Byte3 = Endpoint_Read_8();
+
+				return ((Byte0 << 24) | (Byte1 << 16) | (Byte2 << 8) | Byte3);
+			}
+
+			/** Writes four bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for IN
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_LE(const uint32_t Data)
+			{
+				Endpoint_Write_8(Data & 0xFF);
+				Endpoint_Write_8(Data >> 8);
+				Endpoint_Write_8(Data >> 16);
+				Endpoint_Write_8(Data >> 24);
+			}
+
+			/** Writes four bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for IN
+			 *  direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Data  Data to write to the currently selected endpoint's FIFO buffer.
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Write_32_BE(const uint32_t Data)
+			{
+				Endpoint_Write_8(Data >> 24);
+				Endpoint_Write_8(Data >> 16);
+				Endpoint_Write_8(Data >> 8);
+				Endpoint_Write_8(Data & 0xFF);
+			}
+
+			/** Discards four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointPrimitiveRW_XMEGA
+			 */
+			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_32(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void Endpoint_Discard_32(void)
+			{
+				Endpoint_Discard_8();
+				Endpoint_Discard_8();
+				Endpoint_Discard_8();
+				Endpoint_Discard_8();
+			}
+
+		/* External Variables: */
+			/** Global indicating the maximum packet size of the default control endpoint located at address
+			 *  0 in the device. This value is set to the value indicated in the device descriptor in the user
+			 *  project once the USB interface is initialized into device mode.
+			 *
+			 *  If space is an issue, it is possible to fix this to a static value by defining the control
+			 *  endpoint size in the \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token passed to the compiler in the makefile
+			 *  via the -D switch. When a fixed control endpoint size is used, the size is no longer dynamically
+			 *  read from the descriptors at runtime and instead fixed to the given value. When used, it is
+			 *  important that the descriptor control endpoint size value matches the size given as the
+			 *  \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token - it is recommended that the \c FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token
+			 *  be used in the device descriptors to ensure this.
+			 *
+			 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
+			 *             changed in value.
+			 */
+			#if (!defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
+				extern uint8_t USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize;
+			#else
+				#define USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE
+			#endif
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Configures a table of endpoint descriptions, in sequence. This function can be used to configure multiple
+			 *  endpoints at the same time.
+			 *
+			 *  \note Endpoints with a zero address will be ignored, thus this function cannot be used to configure the
+			 *        control endpoint.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Table    Pointer to a table of endpoint descriptions.
+			 *  \param[in] Entries  Number of entries in the endpoint table to configure.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if all endpoints configured successfully, \c false otherwise.
+			 */
+			bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointTable(const USB_Endpoint_Table_t* const Table,
+			                                     const uint8_t Entries);
+
+			/** Completes the status stage of a control transfer on a CONTROL type endpoint automatically,
+			 *  with respect to the data direction. This is a convenience function which can be used to
+			 *  simplify user control request handling.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should not be called on non CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 */
+			void Endpoint_ClearStatusStage(void);
+
+			/** Spin-loops until the currently selected non-control endpoint is ready for the next packet of data
+			 *  to be read or written to it.
+			 *
+			 *  \note This routine should not be called on CONTROL type endpoints.
+			 *
+			 *  \ingroup Group_EndpointRW_XMEGA
+			 *
+			 *  \return A value from the \ref Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum.
+			 */
+			uint8_t Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(void);
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Host_XMEGA.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Host_XMEGA.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c46773303
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Host_XMEGA.c
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+
+#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/PipeStream_XMEGA.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/PipeStream_XMEGA.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c46773303
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/PipeStream_XMEGA.c
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+
+#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Pipe_XMEGA.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Pipe_XMEGA.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..69f369e43
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Pipe_XMEGA.c
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../USBMode.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0bd384348
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#if defined(TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME)
+
+uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (void* const Buffer,
+                            uint16_t Length)
+{
+	uint8_t* DataStream = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint & ~ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	if (!(Length))
+	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	while (Length)
+	{
+		uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;
+
+		if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+		else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;
+		else if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_HostAborted;
+
+		if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+		{
+			while (Length && Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())
+			{
+				TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+				TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, 1);
+				Length--;
+			}
+
+			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+		}
+	}
+
+	while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+	{
+		uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;
+
+		if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+		else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;
+	}
+
+	return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE
+#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME
+#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..703f253c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#if defined(TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME)
+
+uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (const void* const Buffer,
+                            uint16_t Length)
+{
+	uint8_t* DataStream     = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));
+	bool     LastPacketFull = false;
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(USB_Endpoint_SelectedEndpoint | ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	if (Length > USB_ControlRequest.wLength)
+	  Length = USB_ControlRequest.wLength;
+	else if (!(Length))
+	  Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	while (Length || LastPacketFull)
+	{
+		uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;
+
+		if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+		else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;
+		else if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_HostAborted;
+		else if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+		  break;
+
+		if (Endpoint_IsINReady())
+		{
+			uint16_t BytesInEndpoint = Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint();
+
+			while (Length && (BytesInEndpoint < USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize))
+			{
+				TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+				TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, 1);
+				Length--;
+				BytesInEndpoint++;
+			}
+
+			LastPacketFull = (BytesInEndpoint == USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize);
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+		}
+	}
+
+	while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+	{
+		uint8_t USB_DeviceState_LCL = USB_DeviceState;
+
+		if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+		else if (USB_DeviceState_LCL == DEVICE_STATE_Suspended)
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_BusSuspended;
+		else if (Endpoint_IsSETUPReceived())
+		  return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_HostAborted;
+	}
+
+	return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE
+#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME
+#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d51afdfb1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#if defined(TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME)
+
+uint8_t TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME (TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE const Buffer,
+                            uint16_t Length,
+                            uint16_t* const BytesProcessed)
+{
+	uint8_t* DataStream      = ((uint8_t*)Buffer + TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET(Length));
+	uint16_t BytesInTransfer = 0;
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+
+	if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
+	  return ErrorCode;
+
+	if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
+	{
+		Length -= *BytesProcessed;
+		TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, *BytesProcessed);
+	}
+
+	while (Length)
+	{
+		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		{
+			TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT();
+
+			#if !defined(INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT)
+			USB_USBTask();
+			#endif
+
+			if (BytesProcessed != NULL)
+			{
+				*BytesProcessed += BytesInTransfer;
+				return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer;
+			}
+
+			if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()))
+			  return ErrorCode;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE(DataStream);
+			TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE(DataStream, 1);
+			Length--;
+			BytesInTransfer++;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+#undef TEMPLATE_FUNC_NAME
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_TYPE
+#undef TEMPLATE_TRANSFER_BYTE
+#undef TEMPLATE_CLEAR_ENDPOINT
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_OFFSET
+#undef TEMPLATE_BUFFER_MOVE
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBController_XMEGA.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBController_XMEGA.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..99589809e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBController_XMEGA.c
@@ -0,0 +1,204 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_CONTROLLER_C
+#include "../USBController.h"
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+volatile uint8_t USB_CurrentMode = USB_MODE_None;
+#endif
+
+#if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)
+volatile uint8_t USB_Options;
+#endif
+
+/* Ugly workaround to ensure an aligned table, since __BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT__ == 1 for the 8-bit AVR-GCC toolchain */
+uint8_t USB_EndpointTable[sizeof(USB_EndpointTable_t) + 1];
+
+void USB_Init(
+               #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+               const uint8_t Mode
+               #endif
+
+               #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS))
+               ,
+               #elif (!defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS))
+               void
+               #endif
+
+               #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)
+               const uint8_t Options
+               #endif
+               )
+{
+	#if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)
+	USB_Options = Options;
+	#endif
+
+	uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask();
+	GlobalInterruptDisable();
+
+	NVM.CMD  = NVM_CMD_READ_CALIB_ROW_gc;
+	USB.CAL0 = pgm_read_byte(offsetof(NVM_PROD_SIGNATURES_t, USBCAL0));
+	USB.CAL1 = pgm_read_byte(offsetof(NVM_PROD_SIGNATURES_t, USBCAL1));
+	NVM.CMD  = NVM_CMD_NO_OPERATION_gc;
+
+	/* Ugly workaround to ensure an aligned table, since __BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT__ == 1 for the 8-bit AVR-GCC toolchain */
+	USB.EPPTR = ((intptr_t)&USB_EndpointTable[1] & ~(1 << 0));
+	USB.CTRLA = (USB_STFRNUM_bm | ((ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS - 1) << USB_MAXEP_gp));
+
+	if ((USB_Options & USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH) == USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH)
+	  USB.INTCTRLA = (3 << USB_INTLVL_gp);
+	else if ((USB_Options & USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIMED) == USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIMED)
+	  USB.INTCTRLA = (2 << USB_INTLVL_gp);
+	else
+	  USB.INTCTRLA = (1 << USB_INTLVL_gp);
+
+	SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt);
+
+	#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH)
+	USB_CurrentMode = Mode;
+	#endif
+
+	USB_IsInitialized = true;
+
+	USB_ResetInterface();
+}
+
+void USB_Disable(void)
+{
+	USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts();
+	USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts();
+
+	USB_Detach();
+	USB_Controller_Disable();
+
+	USB_IsInitialized = false;
+}
+
+void USB_ResetInterface(void)
+{
+	uint8_t PrescalerNeeded;
+
+	#if defined(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED)
+	if (USB_Options & USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED)
+	  PrescalerNeeded = F_USB / 6000000;
+	else
+	  PrescalerNeeded = F_USB / 48000000;
+	#else
+	PrescalerNeeded = F_USB / 6000000;
+	#endif
+
+	uint8_t DividerIndex = 0;
+	while (PrescalerNeeded > 0)
+	{
+		DividerIndex++;
+		PrescalerNeeded >>= 1;
+	}
+
+	CLK.USBCTRL = (DividerIndex - 1) << CLK_USBPSDIV_gp;
+
+	if (USB_Options & USB_OPT_PLLCLKSRC)
+	  CLK.USBCTRL |= (CLK_USBSRC_PLL_gc   | CLK_USBSEN_bm);
+	else
+	  CLK.USBCTRL |= (CLK_USBSRC_RC32M_gc | CLK_USBSEN_bm);
+
+	USB_Device_SetDeviceAddress(0);
+
+	USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts();
+	USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts();
+
+	USB_Controller_Reset();
+	USB_Init_Device();
+}
+
+#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+static void USB_Init_Device(void)
+{
+	USB_DeviceState                 = DEVICE_STATE_Unattached;
+	USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber  = 0;
+
+	#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP)
+	USB_Device_RemoteWakeupEnabled  = false;
+	#endif
+
+	#if !defined(NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER)
+	USB_Device_CurrentlySelfPowered = false;
+	#endif
+
+	#if !defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE)
+	USB_Descriptor_Device_t* DeviceDescriptorPtr;
+
+	#if defined(ARCH_HAS_MULTI_ADDRESS_SPACE) && \
+	    !(defined(USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) || defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS))
+	uint8_t DescriptorAddressSpace;
+
+	if (CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor((DTYPE_Device << 8), 0, (void*)&DeviceDescriptorPtr, &DescriptorAddressSpace) != NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+	{
+		if (DescriptorAddressSpace == MEMSPACE_FLASH)
+		  USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = pgm_read_byte(&DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size);
+		else if (DescriptorAddressSpace == MEMSPACE_EEPROM)
+		  USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = eeprom_read_byte(&DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size);
+		else
+		  USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size;
+	}
+	#else
+	if (CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor((DTYPE_Device << 8), 0, (void*)&DeviceDescriptorPtr) != NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+	{
+		#if defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS)
+		USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size;
+		#elif defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS)
+		USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = eeprom_read_byte(&DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size);
+		#else
+		USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize = pgm_read_byte(&DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size);
+		#endif
+	}
+	#endif
+	#endif
+
+	if (USB_Options & USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED)
+	  USB_Device_SetLowSpeed();
+	else
+	  USB_Device_SetFullSpeed();
+
+	Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, EP_TYPE_CONTROL,
+							   USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize, 1);
+
+	USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_BUSEVENTI);
+
+	USB_Attach();
+}
+#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBController_XMEGA.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBController_XMEGA.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..15d4eec34
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBController_XMEGA.h
@@ -0,0 +1,313 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB Controller definitions for the AVR XMEGA microcontrollers.
+ *  \copydetails Group_USBManagement_XMEGA
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_USBManagement
+ *  \defgroup Group_USBManagement_XMEGA USB Interface Management (XMEGA)
+ *  \brief USB Controller definitions for the AVR XMEGA microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  Functions, macros, variables, enums and types related to the setup and management of the USB interface.
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef __USBCONTROLLER_XMEGA_H__
+#define __USBCONTROLLER_XMEGA_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "../USBMode.h"
+		#include "../Events.h"
+		#include "../USBTask.h"
+		#include "../USBInterrupt.h"
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Macros: */
+			#if defined(MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX)
+				#define ENDPOINT_TABLE_COUNT  (MAX_ENDPOINT_INDEX + 1)
+			#else
+				#define ENDPOINT_TABLE_COUNT  16
+			#endif
+
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			typedef struct
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					USB_EP_t OUT;
+					USB_EP_t IN;
+				} Endpoints[ENDPOINT_TABLE_COUNT];
+				uint16_t FrameNum;
+			} ATTR_PACKED USB_EndpointTable_t;
+
+		/* External Variables: */
+			extern uint8_t USB_EndpointTable[];
+	#endif
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			#include "../Device.h"
+			#include "../Endpoint.h"
+			#include "../DeviceStandardReq.h"
+			#include "../EndpointStream.h"
+		#endif
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks and Defines: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+		#if !defined(F_USB)
+			#error F_USB is not defined. You must define F_USB to the frequency of the unprescaled USB controller clock in your project makefile.
+		#endif
+
+		#if ((F_USB % 6000000) || (F_USB < 6000000))
+			#error Invalid F_USB specified. F_USB must be a multiple of 6MHz for USB Low Speed operation, and a multiple of 48MHz for Full Speed operation.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** \name USB Controller Option Masks */
+			//@{
+			/** Sets the USB bus interrupt priority level to be low priority. The USB bus interrupt is used for Start of Frame events, bus suspend
+			 *  and resume events, bus reset events and other events related to the management of the USB bus.
+			 */
+			#define USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRILOW           ((0 << 2) | (0 << 1))
+
+			/** Sets the USB bus interrupt priority level to be medium priority. The USB bus interrupt is used for Start of Frame events, bus suspend
+			 *  and resume events, bus reset events and other events related to the management of the USB bus.
+			 */
+			#define USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIMED           ((0 << 2) | (1 << 1))
+
+			/** Sets the USB bus interrupt priority level to be high priority. The USB bus interrupt is used for Start of Frame events, bus suspend
+			 *  and resume events, bus reset events and other events related to the management of the USB bus.
+			 */
+			#define USB_OPT_BUSEVENT_PRIHIGH          ((1 << 2) | (0 << 1))
+
+			/** Sets the USB controller to source its clock from the internal RC 32MHz clock, once it has been DFLL calibrated to 48MHz. */
+			#define USB_OPT_RC32MCLKSRC               (0 << 3)
+
+			/** Sets the USB controller to source its clock from the internal PLL. */
+			#define USB_OPT_PLLCLKSRC                 (1 << 3)
+			//@}
+
+			#if !defined(USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Constant for the maximum software timeout period of the USB data stream transfer functions
+				 *  (both control and standard) when in either device or host mode. If the next packet of a stream
+				 *  is not received or acknowledged within this time period, the stream function will fail.
+				 *
+				 *  This value may be overridden in the user project makefile as the value of the
+				 *  \ref USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS token, and passed to the compiler using the -D switch.
+				 */
+				#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS       100
+			#endif
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Detaches the device from the USB bus. This has the effect of removing the device from any
+			 *  attached host, ceasing USB communications. If no host is present, this prevents any host from
+			 *  enumerating the device once attached until \ref USB_Attach() is called.
+			 */
+			static inline void USB_Detach(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Detach(void)
+			{
+				USB.CTRLB &= ~USB_ATTACH_bm;
+			}
+
+			/** Attaches the device to the USB bus. This announces the device's presence to any attached
+			 *  USB host, starting the enumeration process. If no host is present, attaching the device
+			 *  will allow for enumeration once a host is connected to the device.
+			 *
+			 *  This is inexplicably also required for proper operation while in host mode, to enable the
+			 *  attachment of a device to the host. This is despite the bit being located in the device-mode
+			 *  register and despite the datasheet making no mention of its requirement in host mode.
+			 */
+			static inline void USB_Attach(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Attach(void)
+			{
+				USB.CTRLB |= USB_ATTACH_bm;
+			}
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Main function to initialize and start the USB interface. Once active, the USB interface will
+			 *  allow for device connection to a host when in device mode, or for device enumeration while in
+			 *  host mode.
+			 *
+			 *  As the USB library relies on interrupts for the device and host mode enumeration processes,
+			 *  the user must enable global interrupts before or shortly after this function is called. In
+			 *  device mode, interrupts must be enabled within 500ms of this function being called to ensure
+			 *  that the host does not time out whilst enumerating the device. In host mode, interrupts may be
+			 *  enabled at the application's leisure however enumeration will not begin of an attached device
+			 *  until after this has occurred.
+			 *
+			 *  Calling this function when the USB interface is already initialized will cause a complete USB
+			 *  interface reset and re-enumeration.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Mode     Mask indicating what mode the USB interface is to be initialized to, a value
+			 *                      from the \ref USB_Modes_t enum.
+			 *                      \note This parameter does not exist on devices with only one supported USB
+			 *                            mode (device or host).
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Options  Mask indicating the options which should be used when initializing the USB
+			 *                      interface to control the USB interface's behavior. This should be comprised of
+			 *                      a \c USB_OPT_REG_* mask to control the regulator, a \c USB_OPT_*_PLL mask to control the
+			 *                      PLL, and a \c USB_DEVICE_OPT_* mask (when the device mode is enabled) to set the device
+			 *                      mode speed.
+			 *
+			 *  \note To reduce the FLASH requirements of the library if only device or host mode is required,
+			 *        the mode can be statically set in the project makefile by defining the token \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+			 *        (for device mode) or \c USB_HOST_ONLY (for host mode), passing the token to the compiler
+			 *        via the -D switch. If the mode is statically set, this parameter does not exist in the
+			 *        function prototype.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note To reduce the FLASH requirements of the library if only fixed settings are required,
+			 *        the options may be set statically in the same manner as the mode (see the Mode parameter of
+			 *        this function). To statically set the USB options, pass in the \c USE_STATIC_OPTIONS token,
+			 *        defined to the appropriate options masks. When the options are statically set, this
+			 *        parameter does not exist in the function prototype.
+			 *        \n\n
+			 *
+			 *  \note The mode parameter does not exist on devices where only one mode is possible, such as USB
+			 *        AVR models which only implement the USB device mode in hardware.
+			 *
+			 *  \see \ref Group_Device for the \c USB_DEVICE_OPT_* masks.
+			 */
+			void USB_Init(
+			               #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			               const uint8_t Mode
+			               #endif
+
+			               #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			               ,
+			               #elif (!defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS))
+			               void
+			               #endif
+
+			               #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			               const uint8_t Options
+			               #endif
+			               );
+
+			/** Shuts down the USB interface. This turns off the USB interface after deallocating all USB FIFO
+			 *  memory, endpoints and pipes. When turned off, no USB functionality can be used until the interface
+			 *  is restarted with the \ref USB_Init() function.
+			 */
+			void USB_Disable(void);
+
+			/** Resets the interface, when already initialized. This will re-enumerate the device if already connected
+			 *  to a host, or re-enumerate an already attached device when in host mode.
+			 */
+			void USB_ResetInterface(void);
+
+		/* Global Variables: */
+			#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Indicates the mode that the USB interface is currently initialized to, a value from the
+				 *  \ref USB_Modes_t enum.
+				 *
+				 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
+				 *             changed in value.
+				 *
+				 *  \note When the controller is initialized into UID auto-detection mode, this variable will hold the
+				 *        currently selected USB mode (i.e. \ref USB_MODE_Device or \ref USB_MODE_Host). If the controller
+				 *        is fixed into a specific mode (either through the \c USB_DEVICE_ONLY or \c USB_HOST_ONLY compile time
+				 *        options, or a limitation of the USB controller in the chosen device model) this will evaluate to
+				 *        a constant of the appropriate value and will never evaluate to \ref USB_MODE_None even when the
+				 *        USB interface is not initialized.
+				 */
+				extern volatile uint8_t USB_CurrentMode;
+			#elif defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST)
+				#define USB_CurrentMode USB_MODE_Host
+			#elif defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE)
+				#define USB_CurrentMode USB_MODE_Device
+			#endif
+
+			#if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+				/** Indicates the current USB options that the USB interface was initialized with when \ref USB_Init()
+				 *  was called. This value will be one of the \c USB_MODE_* masks defined elsewhere in this module.
+				 *
+				 *  \attention This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually
+				 *             changed in value.
+				 */
+				extern volatile uint8_t USB_Options;
+			#elif defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)
+				#define USB_Options USE_STATIC_OPTIONS
+			#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_CONTROLLER_C)
+				static void USB_Init_Device(void);
+			#endif
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			static inline void USB_Controller_Enable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Controller_Enable(void)
+			{
+				USB.CTRLA |=  USB_ENABLE_bm;
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Controller_Disable(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Controller_Disable(void)
+			{
+				USB.CTRLA &= ~USB_ENABLE_bm;
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_Controller_Reset(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_Controller_Reset(void)
+			{
+				USB.CTRLA &= ~USB_ENABLE_bm;
+				USB.CTRLA |=  USB_ENABLE_bm;
+			}
+
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBInterrupt_XMEGA.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBInterrupt_XMEGA.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f03f3f292
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBInterrupt_XMEGA.c
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+#include "../USBInterrupt.h"
+
+void USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(void)
+{
+	USB.INTCTRLA    &= USB_INTLVL_gm;
+	USB.INTCTRLB     = 0;
+}
+
+void USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(void)
+{
+	USB.INTFLAGSACLR = 0xFF;
+	USB.INTFLAGSBCLR = 0xFF;
+}
+
+ISR(USB_BUSEVENT_vect)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_SOF_EVENTS)
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_SOFI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_SOFI))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SOFI);
+
+		EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame();
+	}
+	#endif
+
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Suspend))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Suspend);
+
+		#if !defined(NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT)
+		USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Unattached;
+		EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect();
+		#else
+		USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Suspended;
+		EVENT_USB_Device_Suspend();
+		#endif
+	}
+
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Resume))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Resume);
+
+		if (USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber)
+		  USB_DeviceState = DEVICE_STATE_Configured;
+		else
+		  USB_DeviceState = (USB_Device_IsAddressSet()) ? DEVICE_STATE_Addressed : DEVICE_STATE_Powered;
+
+		#if !defined(NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT)
+		EVENT_USB_Device_Connect();
+		#else
+		EVENT_USB_Device_WakeUp();
+		#endif
+	}
+
+	if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Reset))
+	{
+		USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Reset);
+
+		USB_DeviceState                = DEVICE_STATE_Default;
+		USB_Device_ConfigurationNumber = 0;
+
+		USB_Device_EnableDeviceAddress(0);
+
+		Endpoint_ClearEndpoints();
+		Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, EP_TYPE_CONTROL,
+		                           USB_Device_ControlEndpointSize, 1);
+
+		EVENT_USB_Device_Reset();
+	}
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBInterrupt_XMEGA.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBInterrupt_XMEGA.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e224e225a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBInterrupt_XMEGA.h
@@ -0,0 +1,172 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief USB Controller Interrupt definitions for the AVR XMEGA microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  This file contains definitions required for the correct handling of low level USB service routine interrupts
+ *  from the USB controller.
+ *
+ *  \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the USB driver
+ *        dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __USBINTERRUPT_XMEGA_H__
+#define __USBINTERRUPT_XMEGA_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER)
+			#error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h instead.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Enums: */
+			enum USB_Interrupts_t
+			{
+				USB_INT_BUSEVENTI         = 1,
+				USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Suspend = 2,
+				USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Resume  = 3,
+				USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Reset   = 4,
+				USB_INT_SOFI              = 5,
+			};
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			static inline void USB_INT_Enable(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_INT_Enable(const uint8_t Interrupt)
+			{
+				switch (Interrupt)
+				{
+					case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI:
+						USB.INTCTRLA |= USB_BUSEVIE_bm;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_SOFI:
+						USB.INTCTRLA |= USB_SOFIE_bm;
+						break;
+					default:
+						break;
+				}
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_INT_Disable(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_INT_Disable(const uint8_t Interrupt)
+			{
+				switch (Interrupt)
+				{
+					case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI:
+						USB.INTCTRLA &= ~USB_BUSEVIE_bm;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_SOFI:
+						USB.INTCTRLA &= ~USB_SOFIE_bm;
+						break;
+					default:
+						break;
+				}
+			}
+
+			static inline void USB_INT_Clear(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void USB_INT_Clear(const uint8_t Interrupt)
+			{
+				switch (Interrupt)
+				{
+					case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Suspend:
+						USB.INTFLAGSACLR = USB_SUSPENDIF_bm;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Resume:
+						USB.INTFLAGSACLR = USB_RESUMEIF_bm;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Reset:
+						USB.INTFLAGSACLR = USB_RSTIF_bm;
+						break;
+					case USB_INT_SOFI:
+						USB.INTFLAGSACLR = USB_SOFIF_bm;
+						break;
+					default:
+						break;
+				}
+			}
+
+			static inline bool USB_INT_IsEnabled(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline bool USB_INT_IsEnabled(const uint8_t Interrupt)
+			{
+				switch (Interrupt)
+				{
+					case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI:
+						return ((USB.INTCTRLA & USB_BUSEVIE_bm) ? true : false);
+					case USB_INT_SOFI:
+						return ((USB.INTCTRLA & USB_SOFIE_bm) ? true : false);
+					default:
+						return false;
+				}
+			}
+
+			static inline bool USB_INT_HasOccurred(const uint8_t Interrupt) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline bool USB_INT_HasOccurred(const uint8_t Interrupt)
+			{
+				switch (Interrupt)
+				{
+					case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Suspend:
+						return ((USB.INTFLAGSACLR & USB_SUSPENDIF_bm) ? true : false);
+					case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Resume:
+						return ((USB.INTFLAGSACLR & USB_RESUMEIF_bm) ? true : false);
+					case USB_INT_BUSEVENTI_Reset:
+						return ((USB.INTFLAGSACLR & USB_RSTIF_bm) ? true : false);
+					case USB_INT_SOFI:
+						return ((USB.INTFLAGSACLR & USB_SOFIF_bm) ? true : false);
+					default:
+						return false;
+				}
+			}
+
+		/* Includes: */
+			#include "../USBMode.h"
+			#include "../Events.h"
+			#include "../USBController.h"
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			void USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(void);
+			void USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(void);
+	#endif
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a8df26fd1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h
@@ -0,0 +1,422 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Master include file for the library USB functionality.
+ *
+ *  Master include file for the library USB functionality.
+ *
+ *  This file should be included in all user projects making use of the USB portions of the library, instead of
+ *  the individual USB driver submodule headers.
+ */
+
+/** \defgroup Group_USB USB Core - LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h
+ *
+ *  \brief Core driver for the microcontroller hardware USB module
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USB_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/ConfigDescriptors.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/DeviceStandardReq.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/Events.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/HostStandardReq.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/USBTask.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/<i>ARCH</i>/Device_<i>ARCH</i>.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/<i>ARCH</i>/Endpoint_<i>ARCH</i>.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/<i>ARCH</i>/EndpointStream_<i>ARCH</i>.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/<i>ARCH</i>/Host_<i>ARCH</i>.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/<i>ARCH</i>/Pipe_<i>ARCH</i>.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/<i>ARCH</i>/PipeStream_<i>ARCH</i>.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/<i>ARCH</i>/USBController_<i>ARCH</i>.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Core/<i>ARCH</i>/USBInterrupt_<i>ARCH</i>.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>
+ *    - LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDParser.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_USB)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USB_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Driver and framework for the USB controller of the selected architecture and microcontroller model. This module
+ *  consists of many submodules, and is designed to provide an easy way to configure and control USB host, device
+ *  or OTG mode USB applications.
+ *
+ *  The USB stack requires the sole control over the USB controller in the microcontroller only; i.e. it does not
+ *  require any additional timers or other peripherals to operate. This ensures that the USB stack requires as few
+ *  resources as possible.
+ *
+ *  The USB stack can be used in Device Mode for connections to USB Hosts (see \ref Group_Device), in Host mode for
+ *  hosting of other USB devices (see \ref Group_Host), or as a dual role device which can either act as a USB host
+ *  or device depending on what peripheral is connected (see \ref Group_OTG). Both modes also require a common set
+ *  of USB management functions found \ref Group_USBManagement.
+ */
+
+/** \defgroup Group_USBClassDrivers USB Class Drivers
+ *
+ *  \brief Drivers for the various standardized USB device classes
+ *
+ *  Drivers for both host and device mode of the standard USB classes, for rapid application development.
+ *  Class drivers give a framework which sits on top of the low level library API, allowing for standard
+ *  USB classes to be implemented in a project with minimal user code. These drivers can be used in
+ *  conjunction with the library low level APIs to implement interfaces both via the class drivers and via
+ *  the standard library APIs.
+ *
+ *  Multiple device mode class drivers can be used within a project, including multiple instances of the
+ *  same class driver. In this way, USB Hosts and Devices can be made quickly using the internal class drivers
+ *  so that more time and effort can be put into the end application instead of the USB protocol.
+ *
+ *  The available class drivers and their modes are listed below.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <th width="200px">USB Class</th>
+ *   <th width="90px">Device Mode</th>
+ *   <th width="90px">Host Mode</th>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>Android Open Accessory</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>Audio 1.0</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>CDC-ACM</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>HID</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>MIDI</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>Mass Storage</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>Printer</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>RNDIS</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td>Still Image</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#EE0000">No</td>
+ *   <td bgcolor="#00EE00">Yes</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_USB_UsingClassDrivers Using the Class Drivers
+ *  To make the Class drivers easy to integrate into a user application, they all implement a standardized
+ *  design with similarly named/used function, enums, defines and types. The two different modes are implemented
+ *  slightly differently, and thus will be explained separately. For information on a specific class driver, read
+ *  the class driver's module documentation.
+ *
+ *  \subsection Sec_USB_ClassDriverDevice Device Mode Class Drivers
+ *  Implementing a Device Mode Class Driver in a user application requires a number of steps to be followed. Firstly,
+ *  the module configuration and state structure must be added to the project source. These structures are named in a
+ *  similar manner between classes, that of <tt>USB_ClassInfo_<i>{Class Name}</i>_Device_t</tt>, and are used to hold the
+ *  complete state and configuration for each class instance. Multiple class instances is where the power of the class
+ *  drivers lie; multiple interfaces of the same class simply require more instances of the Class Driver's \c USB_ClassInfo_*
+ *  structure.
+ *
+ *  Inside the ClassInfo structure lies two sections, a \c Config section, and a \c State section. The \c Config
+ *  section contains the instance's configuration parameters, and <b>must have all fields set by the user application</b>
+ *  before the class driver is used. Each Device mode Class driver typically contains a set of configuration parameters
+ *  for the endpoint size/number of the associated logical USB interface, plus any class-specific configuration parameters.
+ *
+ *  The following is an example of a properly initialized instance of the Audio Class Driver structure:
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *  USB_ClassInfo_Audio_Device_t My_Audio_Interface =
+ *  {
+ *      .Config =
+ *          {
+ *              .StreamingInterfaceNumber = 1,
+ *              .DataINEndpoint           =
+ *                  {
+ *                      .Address          = (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 1),
+ *                      .Size             = 64,
+ *                      .Banks            = 1,
+ *                  },
+ *          },
+ *  };
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  \note The class driver's configuration parameters should match those used in the device's descriptors that are
+ *  sent to the host.
+ *
+ *  To initialize the Class driver instance, the driver's <tt><i>{Class Name}</i>_Device_ConfigureEndpoints()</tt> function
+ *  should be called in response to the \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged() event. This function will return a
+ *  boolean true value if the driver successfully initialized the instance. Like all the class driver functions, this function
+ *  takes in the address of the specific instance you wish to initialize - in this manner, multiple separate instances of
+ *  the same class type can be initialized like this:
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *  void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+ *  {
+ *      LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+ *
+ *      if (!(Audio_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&My_Audio_Interface)))
+ *          LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+ *  }
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  Once initialized, it is important to maintain the class driver's state by repeatedly calling the Class Driver's
+ *  <tt><i>{Class Name}</i>_Device_USBTask()</tt> function in the main program loop. The exact implementation of this
+ *  function varies between class drivers, and can be used for any internal class driver purpose to maintain each
+ *  instance. Again, this function uses the address of the instance to operate on, and thus needs to be called for each
+ *  separate instance, just like the main USB maintenance routine \ref USB_USBTask():
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *  int main(void)
+ *  {
+ *      SetupHardware();
+ *
+ *      LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+ *
+ *      for (;;)
+ *      {
+ *          if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+ *            Create_And_Process_Samples();
+ *
+ *          Audio_Device_USBTask(&My_Audio_Interface);
+ *          USB_USBTask();
+ *      }
+ *  }
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  The final standardized Device Class Driver function is the Control Request handler function
+ *  <tt><i>{Class Name}</i>_Device_ProcessControlRequest()</tt>, which should be called when the
+ *  \ref EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest() event fires. This function should also be called for
+ *  each class driver instance, using the address of the instance to operate on as the function's
+ *  parameter. The request handler will abort if it is determined that the current request is not
+ *  targeted at the given class driver instance, thus these methods can safely be called
+ *  one-after-another in the event handler with no form of error checking:
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *  void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+ *  {
+ *      Audio_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&My_Audio_Interface);
+ *  }
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  Each class driver may also define a set of callback functions (which are prefixed by \c CALLBACK_*
+ *  in the function's name) which <b>must</b> also be added to the user application - refer to each
+ *  individual class driver's documentation for mandatory callbacks. In addition, each class driver may
+ *  also define a set of events (identifiable by their prefix of \c EVENT_* in the function's name), which
+ *  the user application <b>may</b> choose to implement, or ignore if not needed.
+ *
+ *  The individual Device Mode Class Driver documentation contains more information on the non-standardized,
+ *  class-specific functions which the user application can then use on the driver instances, such as data
+ *  read and write routines. See each driver's individual documentation for more information on the
+ *  class-specific functions.
+ *
+ *  \subsection Sec_USB_ClassDriverHost Host Mode Class Drivers
+ *  Implementing a Host Mode Class Driver in a user application requires a number of steps to be followed. Firstly,
+ *  the module configuration and state structure must be added to the project source. These structures are named in a
+ *  similar manner between classes, that of <tt>USB_ClassInfo_<b>{Class Name}</b>_Host_t</tt>, and are used to hold the
+ *  complete state and configuration for each class instance. Multiple class instances is where the power of the class
+ *  drivers lie; multiple interfaces of the same class simply require more instances of the Class Driver's \c USB_ClassInfo_*
+ *  structure.
+ *
+ *  Inside the \c USB_ClassInfo_* structure lies two sections, a \c Config section, and a \c State section. The \c Config
+ *  section contains the instance's configuration parameters, and <b>must have all fields set by the user application</b>
+ *  before the class driver is used. Each Device mode Class driver typically contains a set of configuration parameters
+ *  for the endpoint size/number of the associated logical USB interface, plus any class-specific configuration parameters.
+ *
+ *  The following is an example of a properly initialized instance of the MIDI Host Class Driver structure:
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *  USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Host_t My_MIDI_Interface =
+ *  {
+ *      .Config =
+ *          {
+ *              .DataINPipe             =
+ *                  {
+ *                      .Address        = (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1),
+ *                      .Size           = 64,
+ *                      .Banks          = 1,
+ *                  },
+ *              .DataOUTPipe            =
+ *                  {
+ *                      .Address        = (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2),
+ *                      .Size           = 64,
+ *                      .Banks          = 1,
+ *                  },
+ *          },
+ *  };
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  To initialize the Class driver instance, the driver's <tt><b>{Class Name}</b>_Host_ConfigurePipes()</tt> function
+ *  should be called in response to the \c EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete() event firing. This function will
+ *  will return an error code from the class driver's <tt><b>{Class Name}</b>_EnumerationFailure_ErrorCodes_t</tt> enum
+ *  to indicate if the driver successfully initialized the instance and bound it to an interface in the attached device.
+ *  Like all the class driver functions, this function takes in the address of the specific instance you wish to initialize -
+ *  in this manner, multiple separate instances of the same class type can be initialized. A fragment of a Class Driver
+ *  based Host mode application may look like the following:
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *  void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+ *  {
+ *      LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+ *
+ *      uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+ *      uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+ *
+ *      if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+ *                                             sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+ *      {
+ *          LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+ *          return;
+ *      }
+ *
+ *      if (MIDI_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface,
+ *                                   ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != MIDI_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+ *      {
+ *          LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+ *          return;
+ *      }
+ *
+ *      if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+ *      {
+ *          LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+ *          return;
+ *      }
+ *
+ *      LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+ *  }
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  Note that the function also requires the device's configuration descriptor so that it can determine which interface
+ *  in the device to bind to - this can be retrieved as shown in the above fragment using the
+ *  \ref USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() function. If the device does not implement the interface the class driver
+ *  is looking for, if all the matching interfaces are already bound to class driver instances or if an error occurs while
+ *  binding to a device interface (for example, a device endpoint bank larger that the maximum supported bank size is used)
+ *  the configuration will fail.
+ *
+ *  To complete the device enumeration after binding the host mode Class Drivers to the attached device, a call to
+ *  \c USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration() must be made. If the device configuration is not set within the
+ *  \c EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete() event, the host still will assume the device enumeration has failed.
+ *
+ *  Once initialized, it is important to maintain the class driver's state by repeatedly calling the Class Driver's
+ *  <tt><b>{Class Name}</b>_Host_USBTask()</tt> function in the main program loop. The exact implementation of this
+ *  function varies between class drivers, and can be used for any internal class driver purpose to maintain each
+ *  instance. Again, this function uses the address of the instance to operate on, and thus needs to be called for each
+ *  separate instance, just like the main USB maintenance routine \ref USB_USBTask():
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *  int main(void)
+ *  {
+ *      SetupHardware();
+ *
+ *      LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+ *
+ *      for (;;)
+ *      {
+ *          if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+ *              Create_And_Process_Samples();
+ *
+ *          MIDI_Host_USBTask(&My_Audio_Interface);
+ *          USB_USBTask();
+ *      }
+ *  }
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  Each class driver may also define a set of callback functions (which are prefixed by \c CALLBACK_*
+ *  in the function's name) which <b>must</b> also be added to the user application - refer to each
+ *  individual class driver's documentation for mandatory callbacks. In addition, each class driver may
+ *  also define a set of events (identifiable by their prefix of \c EVENT_* in the function's name), which
+ *  the user application <b>may</b> choose to implement, or ignore if not needed.
+ *
+ *  The individual Host Mode Class Driver documentation contains more information on the non-standardized,
+ *  class-specific functions which the user application can then use on the driver instances, such as data
+ *  read and write routines. See each driver's individual documentation for more information on the
+ *  class-specific functions.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __USB_H__
+#define __USB_H__
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define __INCLUDE_FROM_USB_DRIVER
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../Common/Common.h"
+		#include "Core/USBMode.h"
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "Core/USBTask.h"
+		#include "Core/Events.h"
+		#include "Core/StdDescriptors.h"
+		#include "Core/ConfigDescriptors.h"
+		#include "Core/USBController.h"
+		#include "Core/USBInterrupt.h"
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			#include "Core/Host.h"
+			#include "Core/Pipe.h"
+			#include "Core/HostStandardReq.h"
+			#include "Core/PipeStream.h"
+		#endif
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			#include "Core/Device.h"
+			#include "Core/Endpoint.h"
+			#include "Core/DeviceStandardReq.h"
+			#include "Core/EndpointStream.h"
+		#endif
+
+		#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			#include "Core/OTG.h"
+		#endif
+
+		#include "Class/AndroidAccessoryClass.h"
+		#include "Class/AudioClass.h"
+		#include "Class/CDCClass.h"
+		#include "Class/HIDClass.h"
+		#include "Class/MassStorageClass.h"
+		#include "Class/MIDIClass.h"
+		#include "Class/PrinterClass.h"
+		#include "Class/RNDISClass.h"
+		#include "Class/StillImageClass.h"
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/License.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/License.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8d4ad7536
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/License.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+                  LUFA Library
+        Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+     dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+                www.lufa-lib.org
+
+
+Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without
+fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+this software.
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Platform/Platform.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Platform/Platform.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a9eedebc4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Platform/Platform.h
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Architecture Specific Hardware Platform Drivers.
+ *
+ *  This file is the master dispatch header file for the device-specific hardware platform drivers, for low level
+ *  hardware configuration and management. The platform drivers are a set of drivers which are designed to provide
+ *  a high level management layer for the various low level system functions such as clock control and interrupt
+ *  management.
+ *
+ *  User code may choose to either include this master dispatch header file to include all available platform
+ *  driver header files for the current architecture, or may choose to only include the specific platform driver
+ *  modules required for a particular application.
+ */
+
+/** \defgroup Group_PlatformDrivers System Platform Drivers - LUFA/Platform/Platform.h
+ *  \brief Hardware platform drivers.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_PlatformDrivers_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - <b>UC3 Architecture Only:</b> LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_PLATFORM)</i>
+ *    - <b>UC3 Architecture Only:</b> LUFA/Platform/UC3/Exception.S <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_PLATFORM)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_PlatformDrivers_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Device-specific hardware platform drivers, for low level hardware configuration and management. The platform
+ *  drivers are a set of drivers which are designed to provide a high level management layer for the various low level
+ *  system functions such as clock control and interrupt management.
+ *
+ *  User code may choose to either include this master dispatch header file to include all available platform
+ *  driver header files for the current architecture, or may choose to only include the specific platform driver
+ *  modules required for a particular application.
+ *
+ *  \note The exact APIs and availability of sub-modules within the platform driver group may vary depending on the
+ *        target used - see individual target module documentation for the API specific to your target processor.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LUFA_PLATFORM_H__
+#define __LUFA_PLATFORM_H__
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#if (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
+			#include "UC3/ClockManagement.h"
+			#include "UC3/InterruptManagement.h"
+		#elif (ARCH == ARCH_XMEGA)
+			#include "XMEGA/ClockManagement.h"
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Platform/UC3/ClockManagement.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Platform/UC3/ClockManagement.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fb062628e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Platform/UC3/ClockManagement.h
@@ -0,0 +1,338 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Module Clock Driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  Clock management driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers. This driver allows for the configuration
+ *  of the various clocks within the device to clock the various peripherals.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_PlatformDrivers_UC3
+ *  \defgroup Group_PlatformDrivers_UC3Clocks Clock Management Driver - LUFA/Platform/UC3/ClockManagement.h
+ *  \brief Module Clock Driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_PlatformDrivers_UC3Clocks_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - None
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_PlatformDrivers_UC3Clocks_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Clock management driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers. This driver allows for the configuration
+ *  of the various clocks within the device to clock the various peripherals.
+ *
+ *  Usage Example:
+ *  \code
+ *		#include <LUFA/Platform/UC3/ClockManagement.h>
+ *
+ *		void main(void)
+ *		{
+ *			// Start the master external oscillator which will be used as the main clock reference
+ *			UC3CLK_StartExternalOscillator(0, EXOSC_MODE_8MHZ_OR_MORE, EXOSC_START_0CLK);
+ *
+ *			// Start the PLL for the CPU clock, switch CPU to it
+ *			UC3CLK_StartPLL(0, CLOCK_SRC_OSC0, 12000000, F_CPU);
+ *			UC3CLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL0, F_CPU);
+ *
+ *			// Start the PLL for the USB Generic Clock module
+ *			UC3CLK_StartPLL(1, CLOCK_SRC_OSC0, 12000000, 48000000);
+ *		}
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _UC3_CLOCK_MANAGEMENT_H_
+#define _UC3_CLOCK_MANAGEMENT_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Enum for the possible external oscillator types. */
+			enum UC3_Extern_OSC_ClockTypes_t
+			{
+				EXOSC_MODE_CLOCK         = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_MODE_EXT_CLOCK,  /**< External clock (non-crystal) mode. */
+				EXOSC_MODE_900KHZ_MAX    = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_MODE_CRYSTAL_G0, /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or slower than 900KHz. */
+				EXOSC_MODE_3MHZ_MAX      = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_MODE_CRYSTAL_G1, /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or slower than 3MHz. */
+				EXOSC_MODE_8MHZ_MAX      = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_MODE_CRYSTAL_G2, /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or slower than 8MHz. */
+				EXOSC_MODE_8MHZ_OR_MORE  = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_MODE_CRYSTAL_G3, /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or faster than 8MHz. */
+			};
+
+			/** Enum for the possible external oscillator startup times. */
+			enum UC3_Extern_OSC_ClockStartup_t
+			{
+				EXOSC_START_0CLK         = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_STARTUP_0_RCOSC,     /**< Immediate startup, no delay. */
+				EXOSC_START_64CLK        = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_STARTUP_64_RCOSC,    /**< Wait 64 clock cycles before startup for stability. */
+				EXOSC_START_128CLK       = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_STARTUP_128_RCOSC,   /**< Wait 128 clock cycles before startup for stability. */
+				EXOSC_START_2048CLK      = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_STARTUP_2048_RCOSC,  /**< Wait 2048 clock cycles before startup for stability. */
+				EXOSC_START_4096CLK      = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_STARTUP_4096_RCOSC,  /**< Wait 4096 clock cycles before startup for stability. */
+				EXOSC_START_8192CLK      = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_STARTUP_8192_RCOSC,  /**< Wait 8192 clock cycles before startup for stability. */
+				EXOSC_START_16384CLK     = AVR32_PM_OSCCTRL0_STARTUP_16384_RCOSC, /**< Wait 16384 clock cycles before startup for stability. */
+			};
+
+			/** Enum for the possible module clock sources. */
+			enum UC3_System_ClockSource_t
+			{
+				CLOCK_SRC_SLOW_CLK       = 0, /**< Clock sourced from the internal slow clock. */
+				CLOCK_SRC_OSC0           = 1, /**< Clock sourced from the Oscillator 0 clock. */
+				CLOCK_SRC_OSC1           = 2, /**< Clock sourced from the Oscillator 1 clock. */
+				CLOCK_SRC_PLL0           = 3, /**< Clock sourced from the PLL 0 clock. */
+				CLOCK_SRC_PLL1           = 4, /**< Clock sourced from the PLL 1 clock. */
+			};
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Starts the given external oscillator of the UC3 microcontroller, with the given options. This routine blocks until
+			 *  the oscillator is ready for use.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Channel  Index of the external oscillator to start.
+			 *  \param[in] Type     Type of clock attached to the given oscillator channel, a value from \ref UC3_Extern_OSC_ClockTypes_t.
+			 *  \param[in] Startup  Startup time of the external oscillator, a value from \ref UC3_Extern_OSC_ClockStartup_t.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the external oscillator was successfully started, \c false if invalid parameters specified.
+			 */
+			static inline bool UC3CLK_StartExternalOscillator(const uint8_t Channel,
+			                                                  const uint8_t Type,
+			                                                  const uint8_t Startup) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool UC3CLK_StartExternalOscillator(const uint8_t Channel,
+			                                                  const uint8_t Type,
+			                                                  const uint8_t Startup)
+			{
+				switch (Channel)
+				{
+					case 0:
+						AVR32_PM.OSCCTRL0.startup = Startup;
+						AVR32_PM.OSCCTRL0.mode    = Type;
+						break;
+					case 1:
+						AVR32_PM.OSCCTRL1.startup = Startup;
+						AVR32_PM.OSCCTRL1.mode    = Type;
+						break;
+					default:
+						return false;
+				}
+
+				AVR32_PM.mcctrl |= (1 << (AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_OSC0EN_OFFSET + Channel));
+
+				while (!(AVR32_PM.poscsr & (1 << (AVR32_PM_POSCSR_OSC0RDY_OFFSET + Channel))));
+				return true;
+			}
+
+			/** Stops the given external oscillator of the UC3 microcontroller.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Channel  Index of the external oscillator to stop.
+			 */
+			static inline void UC3CLK_StopExternalOscillator(const uint8_t Channel) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void UC3CLK_StopExternalOscillator(const uint8_t Channel)
+			{
+				AVR32_PM.mcctrl &= ~(1 << (AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_OSC0EN_OFFSET + Channel));
+			}
+
+			/** Starts the given PLL of the UC3 microcontroller, with the given options. This routine blocks until the PLL is ready for use.
+			 *
+			 *  \attention The output frequency must be equal to or greater than the source frequency.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Channel     Index of the PLL to start.
+			 *  \param[in] Source      Clock source for the PLL, a value from \ref UC3_System_ClockSource_t.
+			 *  \param[in] SourceFreq  Frequency of the PLL's clock source, in Hz.
+			 *  \param[in] Frequency   Target frequency of the PLL's output.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the PLL was successfully started, \c false if invalid parameters specified.
+			 */
+			static inline bool UC3CLK_StartPLL(const uint8_t Channel,
+			                                   const uint8_t Source,
+			                                   const uint32_t SourceFreq,
+			                                   const uint32_t Frequency) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool UC3CLK_StartPLL(const uint8_t Channel,
+			                                   const uint8_t Source,
+			                                   const uint32_t SourceFreq,
+			                                   const uint32_t Frequency)
+			{
+				if (SourceFreq > Frequency)
+				  return false;
+
+				switch (Source)
+				{
+					case CLOCK_SRC_OSC0:
+						AVR32_PM.PLL[Channel].pllosc = 0;
+						break;
+					case CLOCK_SRC_OSC1:
+						AVR32_PM.PLL[Channel].pllosc = 1;
+						break;
+					default:
+						return false;
+				}
+
+				AVR32_PM.PLL[Channel].pllmul = (Frequency / SourceFreq) ? (((Frequency / SourceFreq) - 1) / 2) : 0;
+				AVR32_PM.PLL[Channel].plldiv = 0;
+				AVR32_PM.PLL[Channel].pllen  = true;
+
+				while (!(AVR32_PM.poscsr & (1 << (AVR32_PM_POSCSR_LOCK0_OFFSET + Channel))));
+				return true;
+			}
+
+			/** Stops the given PLL of the UC3 microcontroller.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Channel  Index of the PLL to stop.
+			 */
+			static inline void UC3CLK_StopPLL(const uint8_t Channel) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void UC3CLK_StopPLL(const uint8_t Channel)
+			{
+				AVR32_PM.PLL[Channel].pllen = false;
+			}
+
+			/** Starts the given Generic Clock of the UC3 microcontroller, with the given options.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Channel     Index of the Generic Clock to start.
+			 *  \param[in] Source      Clock source for the Generic Clock, a value from \ref UC3_System_ClockSource_t.
+			 *  \param[in] SourceFreq  Frequency of the Generic Clock's clock source, in Hz.
+			 *  \param[in] Frequency   Target frequency of the Generic Clock's output.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the Generic Clock was successfully started, \c false if invalid parameters specified.
+			 */
+			static inline bool UC3CLK_StartGenericClock(const uint8_t Channel,
+			                                            const uint8_t Source,
+			                                            const uint32_t SourceFreq,
+			                                            const uint32_t Frequency) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool UC3CLK_StartGenericClock(const uint8_t Channel,
+			                                            const uint8_t Source,
+			                                            const uint32_t SourceFreq,
+			                                            const uint32_t Frequency)
+			{
+				if (Channel >= AVR32_PM_GCLK_NUM)
+				  return false;
+
+				if (SourceFreq < Frequency)
+				  return false;
+
+				switch (Source)
+				{
+					case CLOCK_SRC_OSC0:
+						AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].pllsel = false;
+						AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].oscsel = 0;
+						break;
+					case CLOCK_SRC_OSC1:
+						AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].pllsel = false;
+						AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].oscsel = 1;
+						break;
+					case CLOCK_SRC_PLL0:
+						AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].pllsel = true;
+						AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].oscsel = 0;
+						break;
+					case CLOCK_SRC_PLL1:
+						AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].pllsel = true;
+						AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].oscsel = 1;
+						break;
+					default:
+						return false;
+				}
+
+				AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].diven = (SourceFreq > Frequency) ? true : false;
+				AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].div   = (((SourceFreq / Frequency) - 1) / 2);
+				AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].cen   = true;
+
+				return true;
+			}
+
+			/** Stops the given generic clock of the UC3 microcontroller.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Channel  Index of the generic clock to stop.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the generic clock was successfully stopped, \c false if invalid parameters specified.
+			 */
+			static inline bool UC3CLK_StopGenericClock(const uint8_t Channel) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool UC3CLK_StopGenericClock(const uint8_t Channel)
+			{
+				if (Channel >= AVR32_PM_GCLK_NUM)
+				  return false;
+
+				AVR32_PM.GCCTRL[Channel].cen = false;
+
+				return true;
+			}
+
+			/** Sets the clock source for the main microcontroller core. The given clock source should be configured
+			 *  and ready for use before this function is called.
+			 *
+			 *  This function will configure the FLASH controller's wait states automatically to suit the given clock source.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Source      Clock source for the CPU core, a value from \ref UC3_System_ClockSource_t.
+			 *  \param[in] SourceFreq  Frequency of the CPU core's clock source, in Hz.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the CPU core clock was successfully altered, \c false if invalid parameters specified.
+			 */
+			static inline bool UC3CLK_SetCPUClockSource(const uint8_t Source,
+			                                            const uint32_t SourceFreq) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool UC3CLK_SetCPUClockSource(const uint8_t Source,
+			                                            const uint32_t SourceFreq)
+			{
+				if (SourceFreq > AVR32_PM_CPU_MAX_FREQ)
+				  return false;
+
+				AVR32_FLASHC.FCR.fws = (SourceFreq > AVR32_FLASHC_FWS_0_MAX_FREQ) ? true : false;
+
+				switch (Source)
+				{
+					#if defined(AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_MCSEL_SLOW)
+					case CLOCK_SRC_SLOW_CLK:
+						AVR32_PM.MCCTRL.mcsel = AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_MCSEL_SLOW;
+						break;
+					#endif
+					#if defined(AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_MCSEL_OSC0)
+					case CLOCK_SRC_OSC0:
+						AVR32_PM.MCCTRL.mcsel = AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_MCSEL_OSC0;
+						break;
+					#endif
+					#if defined(AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_MCSEL_PLL0)
+					case CLOCK_SRC_PLL0:
+						AVR32_PM.MCCTRL.mcsel = AVR32_PM_MCCTRL_MCSEL_PLL0;
+						break;
+					#endif
+					default:
+						return false;
+				}
+
+				return true;
+			}
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Platform/UC3/Exception.S b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Platform/UC3/Exception.S
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3a5f24005
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Platform/UC3/Exception.S
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#if defined(__AVR32__)
+#include <avr32/io.h>
+
+.section .exception_handlers, "ax", @progbits
+
+// ================= EXCEPTION TABLE ================
+.balign  0x200
+.global  EVBA_Table
+EVBA_Table:
+
+.org  0x000
+Exception_Unrecoverable_Exception:
+	rjmp $
+.org  0x004
+Exception_TLB_Multiple_Hit:
+	rjmp $
+.org  0x008
+Exception_Bus_Error_Data_Fetch:
+	rjmp $
+.org  0x00C
+Exception_Bus_Error_Instruction_Fetch:
+	rjmp $
+.org  0x010
+Exception_NMI:
+	rjmp $
+.org  0x014
+Exception_Instruction_Address:
+	rjmp $
+.org  0x018
+Exception_ITLB_Protection:
+	rjmp $
+.org  0x01C
+Exception_OCD_Breakpoint:
+	rjmp $
+.org  0x020
+Exception_Illegal_Opcode:
+	rjmp $
+.org  0x024
+Exception_Unimplemented_Instruction:
+	rjmp $
+.org  0x028
+Exception_Privilege_Violation:
+	rjmp $
+.org  0x02C
+Exception_Floating_Point:
+	rjmp $
+.org  0x030
+Exception_Coprocessor_Absent:
+	rjmp $
+.org  0x034
+Exception_Data_Address_Read:
+	rjmp $
+.org  0x038
+Exception_Data_Address_Write:
+	rjmp $
+.org  0x03C
+Exception_DTLB_Protection_Read:
+	rjmp $
+.org  0x040
+Exception_DTLB_Protection_Write:
+	rjmp $
+.org  0x044
+Exception_DTLB_Modified:
+	rjmp $
+.org  0x050
+Exception_ITLB_Miss:
+	rjmp $
+.org  0x060
+Exception_DTLB_Miss_Read:
+	rjmp $
+.org  0x070
+Exception_DTLB_Miss_Write:
+	rjmp $
+.org  0x100
+Exception_Supervisor_Call:
+    rjmp $
+// ============== END OF EXCEPTION TABLE =============
+
+// ============= GENERAL INTERRUPT HANDLER ===========
+.balign 4
+.irp    Level, 0, 1, 2, 3
+Exception_INT\Level:
+	mov     r12, \Level
+	call    INTC_GetInterruptHandler
+	mov     pc, r12
+.endr
+// ========= END OF GENERAL INTERRUPT HANDLER ========
+
+// ====== GENERAL INTERRUPT HANDLER OFFSET TABLE ======
+.balign 4
+.global Autovector_Table
+Autovector_Table:
+.irp    Level, 0, 1, 2, 3
+	.word ((AVR32_INTC_INT0 + \Level) << AVR32_INTC_IPR_INTLEVEL_OFFSET) | (Exception_INT\Level - EVBA_Table)
+.endr
+// === END OF GENERAL INTERRUPT HANDLER OFFSET TABLE ===
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..80d193f12
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.c
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "../../Common/Common.h"
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_UC3)
+
+#define  __INCLUDE_FROM_INTMANAGEMENT_C
+#include "InterruptManagement.h"
+
+/** Interrupt vector table, containing the ISR to call for each interrupt group */
+InterruptHandlerPtr_t InterruptHandlers[AVR32_INTC_NUM_INT_GRPS];
+
+/** ISR for unhandled interrupt groups */
+ISR(Unhandled_Interrupt)
+{
+	for (;;);
+}
+
+InterruptHandlerPtr_t INTC_GetInterruptHandler(const uint_reg_t InterruptLevel)
+{
+	return InterruptHandlers[AVR32_INTC.icr[AVR32_INTC_INT3 - InterruptLevel]];
+}
+
+void INTC_Init(void)
+{
+	for (uint8_t InterruptGroup = 0; InterruptGroup < AVR32_INTC_NUM_INT_GRPS; InterruptGroup++)
+	{
+		InterruptHandlers[InterruptGroup] = Unhandled_Interrupt;
+		AVR32_INTC.ipr[InterruptGroup]    = Autovector_Table[AVR32_INTC_INT0];
+	}
+
+	__builtin_mtsr(AVR32_EVBA, (uintptr_t)&EVBA_Table);
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..90198cddd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.h
@@ -0,0 +1,174 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Interrupt Controller Driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  Interrupt controller driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers, for the configuration of interrupt
+ *  handlers within the device.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_PlatformDrivers_UC3
+ *  \defgroup Group_PlatformDrivers_UC3Interrupts Interrupt Controller Driver - LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.h
+ *  \brief Interrupt Controller Driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_PlatformDrivers_UC3Interrupts_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.c <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_PLATFORM)</i>
+ *    - LUFA/Platform/UC3/Exception.S <i>(Makefile source module name: LUFA_SRC_PLATFORM)</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_PlatformDrivers_UC3Interrupts_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Interrupt controller driver for the AVR32 UC3 microcontrollers, for the configuration of interrupt
+ *  handlers within the device.
+ *
+ *  Usage Example:
+ *  \code
+ *		#include <LUFA/Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.h>
+ *
+ *		ISR(USB_Group_IRQ_Handler)
+ *		{
+ *			// USB group handler code here
+ *		}
+ *
+ *		void main(void)
+ *		{
+ *			INTC_Init();
+ *			INTC_RegisterGroupHandler(INTC_IRQ_GROUP(AVR32_USBB_IRQ), AVR32_INTC_INT0, USB_Group_IRQ_Handler);
+ *		}
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _UC3_INTERRUPT_MANAGEMENT_H_
+#define _UC3_INTERRUPT_MANAGEMENT_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+	#if !defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+		/* Type Defines: */
+			typedef void (*InterruptHandlerPtr_t)(void);
+
+		/* External Variables: */
+			#if defined(__INCLUDE_FROM_INTMANAGEMENT_C)
+				extern const void        EVBA_Table;
+			#endif
+			extern InterruptHandlerPtr_t InterruptHandlers[AVR32_INTC_NUM_INT_GRPS];
+			extern const uint32_t        Autovector_Table[];
+	#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Converts a given interrupt index into its associated interrupt group.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] IRQIndex  Index of the interrupt request to convert.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Interrupt group number associated with the interrupt index.
+			 */
+			#define INTC_IRQ_GROUP(IRQIndex)  (IRQIndex / 32)
+
+			/** Converts a given interrupt index into its associated interrupt line.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] IRQIndex  Index of the interrupt request to convert.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Interrupt line number associated with the interrupt index.
+			 */
+			#define INTC_IRQ_LINE(IRQIndex)   (IRQIndex % 32)
+
+		/* Function Prototypes: */
+			/** Initializes the interrupt controller ready to handle interrupts. This must be called at the
+			 *  start of the user program before any interrupts are registered or enabled.
+			 */
+			void INTC_Init(void);
+
+			/** Retrieves the associated interrupt handler for the interrupt group currently being fired. This
+			 *  is called directly from the exception handler routine before dispatching to the ISR.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] InterruptLevel  Priority level of the interrupt.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Pointer to the associated interrupt handler function, or NULL if no handler set.
+			 */
+			InterruptHandlerPtr_t INTC_GetInterruptHandler(const uint_reg_t InterruptLevel);
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Registers a handler for a given interrupt group. On the AVR32 UC3 devices, interrupts are grouped by
+			 *  peripheral. To save on SRAM used, a single ISR handles all interrupt lines within a single group - to
+			 *  determine the exact line that has interrupted within the group ISR handler, use \ref INTC_GetGroupInterrupts().
+			 *
+			 *  If multiple interrupts with the same group are registered, the last registered handler will become the
+			 *  handler called for interrupts raised within that group.
+			 *
+			 *  To obtain the group number of a specific interrupt index, use the \ref INTC_IRQ_GROUP() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] GroupNumber       Group number of the interrupt group to register a handler for.
+			 *  \param[in] InterruptLevel    Priority level for the specified interrupt, a \c AVR32_INTC_INT* mask.
+			 *  \param[in] Handler           Address of the ISR handler for the interrupt group.
+			 */
+			static inline void INTC_RegisterGroupHandler(const uint16_t GroupNumber,
+			                                             const uint8_t InterruptLevel,
+			                                             const InterruptHandlerPtr_t Handler) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void INTC_RegisterGroupHandler(const uint16_t GroupNumber,
+			                                             const uint8_t InterruptLevel,
+			                                             const InterruptHandlerPtr_t Handler)
+			{
+				InterruptHandlers[GroupNumber] = Handler;
+				AVR32_INTC.ipr[GroupNumber]    = Autovector_Table[InterruptLevel];
+			}
+
+			/** Retrieves the pending interrupts for a given interrupt group. The result of this function should be masked
+			 *  against interrupt request indexes converted to a request line number via the \ref INTC_IRQ_LINE() macro. To
+			 *  obtain the group number of a given interrupt request, use the \ref INTC_IRQ_GROUP() macro.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] GroupNumber Group number of the interrupt group to check.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Mask of pending interrupt lines for the given interrupt group.
+			 */
+			static inline uint_reg_t INTC_GetGroupInterrupts(const uint16_t GroupNumber) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline uint_reg_t INTC_GetGroupInterrupts(const uint16_t GroupNumber)
+			{
+				return AVR32_INTC.irr[GroupNumber];
+			}
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Platform/UC3/UC3ExperimentalInfo.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Platform/UC3/UC3ExperimentalInfo.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8aadb3ed7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Platform/UC3/UC3ExperimentalInfo.txt
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+Please note that the UC3 architecture support is EXPERIMENTAL at this time, and may be non-functional/incomplete in some areas. Please refer to the Known Issues section of the LUFA manual.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Platform/XMEGA/ClockManagement.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Platform/XMEGA/ClockManagement.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9edaa7223
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Platform/XMEGA/ClockManagement.h
@@ -0,0 +1,397 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Module Clock Driver for the AVR USB XMEGA microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  Clock management driver for the AVR USB XMEGA microcontrollers. This driver allows for the configuration
+ *  of the various clocks within the device to clock the various peripherals.
+ */
+
+/** \ingroup Group_PlatformDrivers_XMEGA
+ *  \defgroup Group_PlatformDrivers_XMEGAClocks Clock Management Driver - LUFA/Platform/XMEGA/ClockManagement.h
+ *  \brief Module Clock Driver for the AVR USB XMEGA microcontrollers.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_PlatformDrivers_XMEGAClocks_Dependencies Module Source Dependencies
+ *  The following files must be built with any user project that uses this module:
+ *    - None
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_PlatformDrivers_XMEGAClocks_ModDescription Module Description
+ *  Clock management driver for the AVR USB XMEGA microcontrollers. This driver allows for the configuration
+ *  of the various clocks within the device to clock the various peripherals.
+ *
+ *  Usage Example:
+ *  \code
+ *   	#include <LUFA/Platform/XMEGA/ClockManagement.h>
+ *
+ *   	void main(void)
+ *   	{
+ *   		// Start the PLL to multiply the 2MHz RC oscillator to F_CPU and switch the CPU core to run from it
+ *   		XMEGACLK_StartPLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ, 2000000, F_CPU);
+ *   		XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(CLOCK_SRC_PLL);
+ *
+ *   		// Start the 32MHz internal RC oscillator and start the DFLL to increase it to F_USB using the USB SOF as a reference
+ *   		XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ);
+ *   		XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ, DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF, F_USB);
+ *   	}
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef _XMEGA_CLOCK_MANAGEMENT_H_
+#define _XMEGA_CLOCK_MANAGEMENT_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include "../../Common/Common.h"
+
+	/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			extern "C" {
+		#endif
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Enum for the possible external oscillator frequency ranges. */
+			enum XMEGA_Extern_OSC_ClockFrequency_t
+			{
+				EXOSC_FREQ_2MHZ_MAX      = OSC_FRQRANGE_04TO2_gc,  /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or slower than 2MHz. */
+				EXOSC_FREQ_9MHZ_MAX      = OSC_FRQRANGE_2TO9_gc,   /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or slower than 9MHz. */
+				EXOSC_FREQ_12MHZ_MAX     = OSC_FRQRANGE_9TO12_gc,  /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or slower than 12MHz. */
+				EXOSC_FREQ_16MHZ_MAX     = OSC_FRQRANGE_12TO16_gc, /**< External crystal oscillator equal to or slower than 16MHz. */
+			};
+
+			/** Enum for the possible external oscillator startup times. */
+			enum XMEGA_Extern_OSC_ClockStartup_t
+			{
+				EXOSC_START_6CLK         = OSC_XOSCSEL_EXTCLK_gc,      /**< Wait 6 clock cycles before startup (external clock). */
+				EXOSC_START_32KCLK       = OSC_XOSCSEL_32KHz_gc,       /**< Wait 32K clock cycles before startup (32.768KHz crystal). */
+				EXOSC_START_256CLK       = OSC_XOSCSEL_XTAL_256CLK_gc, /**< Wait 256 clock cycles before startup. */
+				EXOSC_START_1KCLK        = OSC_XOSCSEL_XTAL_1KCLK_gc,  /**< Wait 1K clock cycles before startup. */
+				EXOSC_START_16KCLK       = OSC_XOSCSEL_XTAL_16KCLK_gc, /**< Wait 16K clock cycles before startup. */
+			};
+
+			/** Enum for the possible module clock sources. */
+			enum XMEGA_System_ClockSource_t
+			{
+				CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ    = 0, /**< Clock sourced from the Internal 2MHz RC Oscillator clock. */
+				CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ   = 1, /**< Clock sourced from the Internal 32MHz RC Oscillator clock. */
+				CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32KHZ   = 2, /**< Clock sourced from the Internal 32KHz RC Oscillator clock. */
+				CLOCK_SRC_XOSC          = 3, /**< Clock sourced from the External Oscillator clock. */
+				CLOCK_SRC_PLL           = 4, /**< Clock sourced from the Internal PLL clock. */
+			};
+
+			/** Enum for the possible DFLL clock reference sources. */
+			enum XMEGA_System_DFLLReference_t
+			{
+				DFLL_REF_INT_RC32KHZ   = 0, /**< Reference clock sourced from the Internal 32KHz RC Oscillator clock. */
+				DFLL_REF_EXT_RC32KHZ   = 1, /**< Reference clock sourced from the External 32KHz RC Oscillator clock connected to TOSC pins. */
+				DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF    = 2, /**< Reference clock sourced from the USB Start Of Frame packets. */
+			};
+
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Write a value to a location protected by the XMEGA CCP protection mechanism. This function uses inline assembly to ensure that
+			 *  the protected address is written to within four clock cycles of the CCP key being written.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Address  Address to write to, a memory address protected by the CCP mechanism
+			 *  \param[in] Value    Value to write to the protected location
+			 */
+			static inline void XMEGACLK_CCP_Write(volatile void* Address, const uint8_t Value) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void XMEGACLK_CCP_Write(volatile void* Address, const uint8_t Value)
+			{
+				__asm__ __volatile__ (
+					"out %0, __zero_reg__" "\n\t" /* Zero RAMPZ using fixed zero value register */
+					"movw r30, %1"         "\n\t" /* Copy address to Z register pair */
+					"out %2, %3"           "\n\t" /* Write key to CCP register */
+					"st Z, %4"             "\n\t" /* Indirectly write value to address */
+					: /* No output operands */
+					: /* Input operands: */ "m" (RAMPZ), "e" (Address), "m" (CCP), "r" (CCP_IOREG_gc), "r" (Value)
+					: /* Clobbered registers: */ "r30", "r31"
+				);
+			}
+
+			/** Starts the external oscillator of the XMEGA microcontroller, with the given options. This routine blocks until
+			 *  the oscillator is ready for use.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] FreqRange  Frequency range of the external oscillator, a value from \ref XMEGA_Extern_OSC_ClockFrequency_t.
+			 *  \param[in] Startup    Startup time of the external oscillator, a value from \ref XMEGA_Extern_OSC_ClockStartup_t.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the external oscillator was successfully started, \c false if invalid parameters specified.
+			 */
+			static inline bool XMEGACLK_StartExternalOscillator(const uint8_t FreqRange,
+			                                                    const uint8_t Startup) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool XMEGACLK_StartExternalOscillator(const uint8_t FreqRange,
+			                                                    const uint8_t Startup)
+			{
+				OSC.XOSCCTRL  = (FreqRange | ((Startup == EXOSC_START_32KCLK) ? OSC_X32KLPM_bm : 0) | Startup);
+				OSC.CTRL     |= OSC_XOSCEN_bm;
+
+				while (!(OSC.STATUS & OSC_XOSCRDY_bm));
+				return true;
+			}
+
+			/** Stops the external oscillator of the XMEGA microcontroller. */
+			static inline void XMEGACLK_StopExternalOscillator(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void XMEGACLK_StopExternalOscillator(void)
+			{
+				OSC.CTRL     &= ~OSC_XOSCEN_bm;
+			}
+
+			/** Starts the given internal oscillator of the XMEGA microcontroller, with the given options. This routine blocks until
+			 *  the oscillator is ready for use.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Source  Internal oscillator to start, a value from \ref XMEGA_System_ClockSource_t.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the internal oscillator was successfully started, \c false if invalid parameters specified.
+			 */
+			static inline bool XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(const uint8_t Source) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool XMEGACLK_StartInternalOscillator(const uint8_t Source)
+			{
+				switch (Source)
+				{
+					case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ:
+						OSC.CTRL |= OSC_RC2MEN_bm;
+						while (!(OSC.STATUS & OSC_RC2MRDY_bm));
+						return true;
+					case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ:
+						OSC.CTRL |= OSC_RC32MEN_bm;
+						while (!(OSC.STATUS & OSC_RC32MRDY_bm));
+						return true;
+					case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32KHZ:
+						OSC.CTRL |= OSC_RC32KEN_bm;
+						while (!(OSC.STATUS & OSC_RC32KRDY_bm));
+						return true;
+					default:
+						return false;
+				}
+			}
+
+			/** Stops the given internal oscillator of the XMEGA microcontroller.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Source  Internal oscillator to stop, a value from \ref XMEGA_System_ClockSource_t.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the internal oscillator was successfully stopped, \c false if invalid parameters specified.
+			 */
+			static inline bool XMEGACLK_StopInternalOscillator(const uint8_t Source) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool XMEGACLK_StopInternalOscillator(const uint8_t Source)
+			{
+				switch (Source)
+				{
+					case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ:
+						OSC.CTRL &= ~OSC_RC2MEN_bm;
+						return true;
+					case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ:
+						OSC.CTRL &= ~OSC_RC32MEN_bm;
+						return true;
+					case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32KHZ:
+						OSC.CTRL &= ~OSC_RC32KEN_bm;
+						return true;
+					default:
+						return false;
+				}
+			}
+
+			/** Starts the PLL of the XMEGA microcontroller, with the given options. This routine blocks until the PLL is ready for use.
+			 *
+			 *  \attention The output frequency must be equal to or greater than the source frequency.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Source       Clock source for the PLL, a value from \ref XMEGA_System_ClockSource_t.
+			 *  \param[in] SourceFreq   Frequency of the PLL's clock source, in Hz.
+			 *  \param[in] Frequency    Target frequency of the PLL's output.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the PLL was successfully started, \c false if invalid parameters specified.
+			 */
+			static inline bool XMEGACLK_StartPLL(const uint8_t Source,
+			                                     const uint32_t SourceFreq,
+			                                     const uint32_t Frequency) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool XMEGACLK_StartPLL(const uint8_t Source,
+			                                     const uint32_t SourceFreq,
+			                                     const uint32_t Frequency)
+			{
+				uint8_t MulFactor = (Frequency / SourceFreq);
+
+				if (SourceFreq > Frequency)
+				  return false;
+
+				if (MulFactor > 31)
+				  return false;
+
+				switch (Source)
+				{
+					case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ:
+						OSC.PLLCTRL = (OSC_PLLSRC_RC2M_gc  | MulFactor);
+						break;
+					case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ:
+						OSC.PLLCTRL = (OSC_PLLSRC_RC32M_gc | MulFactor);
+						break;
+					case CLOCK_SRC_XOSC:
+						OSC.PLLCTRL = (OSC_PLLSRC_XOSC_gc  | MulFactor);
+						break;
+					default:
+						return false;
+				}
+
+				OSC.CTRL |= OSC_PLLEN_bm;
+
+				while (!(OSC.STATUS & OSC_PLLRDY_bm));
+				return true;
+			}
+
+			/** Stops the PLL of the XMEGA microcontroller. */
+			static inline void XMEGACLK_StopPLL(void) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline void XMEGACLK_StopPLL(void)
+			{
+				OSC.CTRL &= ~OSC_PLLEN_bm;
+			}
+
+			/** Starts the DFLL of the XMEGA microcontroller, with the given options.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Source     RC Clock source for the DFLL, a value from \ref XMEGA_System_ClockSource_t.
+			 *  \param[in] Reference  Reference clock source for the DFLL, an value from \ref XMEGA_System_DFLLReference_t.
+			 *  \param[in] Frequency  Target frequency of the DFLL's output.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the DFLL was successfully started, \c false if invalid parameters specified.
+			 */
+			static inline bool XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(const uint8_t Source,
+			                                      const uint8_t Reference,
+			                                      const uint32_t Frequency) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool XMEGACLK_StartDFLL(const uint8_t Source,
+			                                      const uint8_t Reference,
+			                                      const uint32_t Frequency)
+			{
+				uint16_t DFLLCompare = (Frequency / 1024);
+
+				switch (Source)
+				{
+					case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ:
+						OSC.DFLLCTRL   |= (Reference << OSC_RC2MCREF_bp);
+						DFLLRC2M.COMP1  = (DFLLCompare & 0xFF);
+						DFLLRC2M.COMP2  = (DFLLCompare >> 8);
+						DFLLRC2M.CTRL   = DFLL_ENABLE_bm;
+						break;
+					case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ:
+						OSC.DFLLCTRL   |= (Reference << OSC_RC32MCREF_gp);
+						DFLLRC32M.COMP1 = (DFLLCompare & 0xFF);
+						DFLLRC32M.COMP2 = (DFLLCompare >> 8);
+
+						if (Reference == DFLL_REF_INT_USBSOF)
+						{
+							NVM.CMD        = NVM_CMD_READ_CALIB_ROW_gc;
+							DFLLRC32M.CALA = pgm_read_byte(offsetof(NVM_PROD_SIGNATURES_t, USBRCOSCA));
+							DFLLRC32M.CALB = pgm_read_byte(offsetof(NVM_PROD_SIGNATURES_t, USBRCOSC));
+							NVM.CMD        = 0;
+						}
+
+						DFLLRC32M.CTRL  = DFLL_ENABLE_bm;
+						break;
+					default:
+						return false;
+				}
+
+				return true;
+			}
+
+			/** Stops the given DFLL of the XMEGA microcontroller.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Source  RC Clock source for the DFLL to be stopped, a value from \ref XMEGA_System_ClockSource_t.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the DFLL was successfully stopped, \c false if invalid parameters specified.
+			 */
+			static inline bool XMEGACLK_StopDFLL(const uint8_t Source) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool XMEGACLK_StopDFLL(const uint8_t Source)
+			{
+				switch (Source)
+				{
+					case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ:
+						DFLLRC2M.CTRL = 0;
+						break;
+					case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ:
+						DFLLRC32M.CTRL = 0;
+						break;
+					default:
+						return false;
+				}
+
+				return true;
+			}
+
+			/** Sets the clock source for the main microcontroller core. The given clock source should be configured
+			 *  and ready for use before this function is called.
+			 *
+			 *  \param[in] Source      Clock source for the CPU core, a value from \ref XMEGA_System_ClockSource_t.
+			 *
+			 *  \return Boolean \c true if the CPU core clock was successfully altered, \c false if invalid parameters specified.
+			 */
+			static inline bool XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(const uint8_t Source) ATTR_ALWAYS_INLINE;
+			static inline bool XMEGACLK_SetCPUClockSource(const uint8_t Source)
+			{
+				uint8_t ClockSourceMask = 0;
+
+				switch (Source)
+				{
+					case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC2MHZ:
+						ClockSourceMask = CLK_SCLKSEL_RC2M_gc;
+						break;
+					case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32MHZ:
+						ClockSourceMask = CLK_SCLKSEL_RC32M_gc;
+						break;
+					case CLOCK_SRC_INT_RC32KHZ:
+						ClockSourceMask = CLK_SCLKSEL_RC32K_gc;
+						break;
+					case CLOCK_SRC_XOSC:
+						ClockSourceMask = CLK_SCLKSEL_XOSC_gc;
+						break;
+					case CLOCK_SRC_PLL:
+						ClockSourceMask = CLK_SCLKSEL_PLL_gc;
+						break;
+					default:
+						return false;
+				}
+
+				uint_reg_t CurrentGlobalInt = GetGlobalInterruptMask();
+				GlobalInterruptDisable();
+
+				XMEGACLK_CCP_Write(&CLK.CTRL, ClockSourceMask);
+
+				SetGlobalInterruptMask(CurrentGlobalInt);
+
+				Delay_MS(1);
+				return (CLK.CTRL == ClockSourceMask);
+			}
+
+	/* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */
+		#if defined(__cplusplus)
+			}
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Platform/XMEGA/XMEGAExperimentalInfo.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Platform/XMEGA/XMEGAExperimentalInfo.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..42144aac4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Platform/XMEGA/XMEGAExperimentalInfo.txt
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+Please note that the XMEGA architecture support is EXPERIMENTAL at this time, and may be non-functional/incomplete in some areas. Please refer to the Known Issues section of the LUFA manual.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/Docbook/mshelp/placeholder.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/Docbook/mshelp/placeholder.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..486e9a427
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/Docbook/mshelp/placeholder.txt
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+Copy the Microsoft HV1 Docbook transform contents into this directory (i.e. with the XSLT files in the current folder). The HV1 transform proposal can be found at http://sourceforge.net/tracker/?func=detail&aid=3610290&group_id=21935&atid=373750 .

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/Docbook/placeholder.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/Docbook/placeholder.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c017acfd7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/Docbook/placeholder.txt
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+Copy the Docbook XSLT docbook-xsl-1.78.1 release contents into this directory (i.e. with the root Docbook files in the current folder). The Docbook releases can be found at http://sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-xsl/ .

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/HV1/helpcontentsetup.msha b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/HV1/helpcontentsetup.msha
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cb1c4b9eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/HV1/helpcontentsetup.msha
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+<!--
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+-->
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+	<head>
+		<title>LUFA Help</title>
+	</head>
+	<body class="vendor-book">
+		<div class="details">
+			<span class="vendor">FourWalledCubicle</span>
+			<span class="product">LUFA</span>
+			<span class="name">LUFA Help</span>
+			<span class="locale">en-us</span>
+		</div>
+		<div class="package-list">
+			<div class="package">
+				<span class="name">LUFA</span>
+				<a class="current-link" href="lufa_studio_help.mshc">lufa_studio_help.mshc</a>
+			</div>
+		</div>
+	</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/HV1/lufa_docbook_transform.xslt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/HV1/lufa_docbook_transform.xslt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2ebda6d5d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/HV1/lufa_docbook_transform.xslt
@@ -0,0 +1,808 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+
+<xsl:stylesheet xmlns:xsl="http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform" version="1.0">
+
+	<xsl:output method="xml" indent="no"/>
+
+	<xsl:param name="keyword.namespace" select="'Atmel.Language.C'"/>
+
+	<xsl:template name="generate.book.title">
+		<xsl:text>LUFA Library</xsl:text>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template name="generate.book.id">
+		<xsl:param name="book.title"/>
+		<xsl:choose>
+			<xsl:when test="@id">
+				<xsl:value-of select="@id"/>
+			</xsl:when>
+			<xsl:otherwise>
+				<xsl:value-of select="translate($book.title, ' ','')"/>
+			</xsl:otherwise>
+		</xsl:choose>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template name="generate.index.id">
+		<xsl:param name="name"/>
+		<xsl:variable name="book.title">
+			<xsl:call-template name="generate.book.title"/>
+		</xsl:variable>
+		<xsl:variable name="book.id">
+			<xsl:call-template name="generate.book.id">
+				<xsl:with-param name="book.title" select="$book.title"/>
+			</xsl:call-template>
+		</xsl:variable>
+
+		<indexterm id="{$keyword.namespace}.{$name}">
+			<primary>
+				<xsl:value-of select="$book.title"/>
+			</primary>
+			<secondary>
+				<xsl:value-of select="$name"/>
+			</secondary>
+		</indexterm>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="doxygen">
+		<xsl:variable name="book.title">
+			<xsl:call-template name="generate.book.title"/>
+		</xsl:variable>
+
+		<xsl:variable name="book.id">
+			<xsl:call-template name="generate.book.id">
+				<xsl:with-param name="book.title" select="$book.title"/>
+			</xsl:call-template>
+		</xsl:variable>
+
+		<book id="{$book.id}">
+			<title>
+				<xsl:value-of select="$book.title"/>
+			</title>
+
+			<!-- Add index chapter -->
+			<xsl:apply-templates select="compounddef[@kind = 'page' and @id = 'indexpage']">
+				<xsl:with-param name="element.type" select="'chapter'"/>
+				<xsl:with-param name="page.title"   select="'Library Information'"/>
+			</xsl:apply-templates>
+
+			<!-- Add free-floating chapters -->
+			<xsl:apply-templates select="compounddef[@kind = 'page' and not(@id = 'indexpage') and not(//innerpage/@refid = @id)]">
+				<xsl:with-param name="element.type" select="'chapter'"/>
+			</xsl:apply-templates>
+
+			<!-- Add Modules chapter -->
+			<chapter>
+				<title>Modules</title>
+				<xsl:apply-templates select="compounddef[@kind = 'group' and not(//innergroup/@refid = @id)]"/>
+			</chapter>
+		</book>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="compounddef[@kind = 'page']">
+		<xsl:param name="element.type" select="'section'"/>
+		<xsl:param name="page.title"   select="title"/>
+
+		<xsl:element name="{$element.type}">
+			<xsl:attribute name="id">
+				<xsl:value-of select="@id"/>
+			</xsl:attribute>
+
+			<xsl:variable name="name">
+				<xsl:text>LUFA.</xsl:text>
+				<xsl:value-of select="translate(compoundname, '_', '.')"/>
+			</xsl:variable>
+
+			<xsl:call-template name="generate.index.id">
+				<xsl:with-param name="name" select="$name"/>
+			</xsl:call-template>
+
+			<title>
+				<xsl:value-of select="$page.title"/>
+			</title>
+
+			<xsl:apply-templates select="detaileddescription"/>
+
+			<xsl:if test="not(innerpage) and count(detaileddescription//sect1)">
+				<para>
+					<emphasis role="bold">Subsections:</emphasis>
+					<itemizedlist>
+						<xsl:for-each select="detaileddescription//sect1">
+							<listitem>
+								<link linkend="{@id}">
+									<xsl:value-of select="title"/>
+								</link>
+							</listitem>
+						</xsl:for-each>
+					</itemizedlist>
+				</para>
+			</xsl:if>
+
+			<xsl:for-each select="innerpage">
+				<xsl:apply-templates select="ancestor::*/compounddef[@kind = 'page' and @id = current()/@refid]"/>
+			</xsl:for-each>
+		</xsl:element>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="compounddef[@kind = 'group']">
+		<section id="{@id}">
+			<title>
+				<xsl:value-of select="title"/>
+			</title>
+
+			<xsl:variable name="name">
+				<xsl:text>LUFA.</xsl:text>
+				<xsl:value-of select="translate(compoundname, '_', '.')"/>
+			</xsl:variable>
+
+			<xsl:call-template name="generate.index.id">
+				<xsl:with-param name="name" select="$name"/>
+			</xsl:call-template>
+
+			<xsl:apply-templates select="detaileddescription"/>
+
+			<xsl:if test="count(innergroup)">
+				<para>
+					<emphasis role="bold">Subgroups:</emphasis>
+					<itemizedlist>
+						<xsl:for-each select="innergroup">
+							<listitem>
+								<link linkend="{@refid}">
+									<xsl:value-of select="text()"/>
+								</link>
+							</listitem>
+						</xsl:for-each>
+					</itemizedlist>
+				</para>
+			</xsl:if>
+
+			<xsl:apply-templates select="sectiondef"/>
+
+			<xsl:for-each select="innerclass">
+				<xsl:apply-templates select="ancestor::*/compounddef[@id = current()/@refid]"/>
+			</xsl:for-each>
+
+			<xsl:for-each select="innergroup">
+				<xsl:apply-templates select="ancestor::*/compounddef[@kind = 'group' and @id = current()/@refid]"/>
+			</xsl:for-each>
+		</section>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="compounddef[@kind = 'struct' or @kind = 'union']">
+		<xsl:variable name="name" select="compoundname"/>
+
+		<section id="{@id}" xreflabel="{$name}">
+			<title>
+				<xsl:choose>
+					<xsl:when test="@kind = 'struct'">
+						<xsl:text>Struct </xsl:text>
+					</xsl:when>
+
+					<xsl:when test="@kind = 'union'">
+						<xsl:text>Union </xsl:text>
+					</xsl:when>
+				</xsl:choose>
+
+				<xsl:value-of select="$name"/>
+			</title>
+
+			<xsl:call-template name="generate.index.id">
+				<xsl:with-param name="name" select="$name"/>
+			</xsl:call-template>
+
+			<xsl:apply-templates select="detaileddescription"/>
+
+			<xsl:for-each select="sectiondef[@kind = 'public-attrib']">
+				<table>
+					<title>
+						<xsl:value-of select="$name"/>
+					</title>
+
+					<tgroup cols="3">
+						<thead>
+							<row>
+								<entry>Type</entry>
+								<entry>Name</entry>
+								<entry>Description</entry>
+							</row>
+						</thead>
+
+						<tbody>
+							<xsl:for-each select="memberdef">
+								<row id="{@id}" xreflabel="{name}">
+									<entry>
+										<xsl:value-of select="type"/>
+									</entry>
+									<entry>
+										<xsl:value-of select="name"/>
+										<xsl:if test="starts-with(argsstring, '[')">
+											<xsl:text>[]</xsl:text>
+										</xsl:if>
+
+										<xsl:variable name="struct.element.name">
+											<xsl:value-of select="$name"/>
+											<xsl:text>.</xsl:text>
+											<xsl:value-of select="name"/>
+										</xsl:variable>
+
+										<xsl:call-template name="generate.index.id">
+											<xsl:with-param name="name" select="$struct.element.name"/>
+										</xsl:call-template>
+									</entry>
+									<entry>
+										<xsl:apply-templates select="detaileddescription"/>
+									</entry>
+								</row>
+							</xsl:for-each>
+						</tbody>
+					</tgroup>
+				</table>
+			</xsl:for-each>
+		</section>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="memberdef[@kind = 'function']">
+		<section id="{@id}" xreflabel="{name}">
+			<title>
+				<xsl:text>Function </xsl:text>
+				<xsl:value-of select="name"/>
+				<xsl:text>()</xsl:text>
+			</title>
+
+			<xsl:call-template name="generate.index.id">
+				<xsl:with-param name="name" select="name"/>
+			</xsl:call-template>
+
+			<para>
+				<emphasis role="italic">
+					<xsl:value-of select="briefdescription"/>
+				</emphasis>
+			</para>
+
+			<programlisting language="c">
+				<emphasis role="keyword">
+					<xsl:value-of select="type"/>
+				</emphasis>
+				<xsl:text> </xsl:text>
+				<xsl:value-of select="name"/>
+				<xsl:text>(</xsl:text>
+
+				<xsl:choose>
+					<xsl:when test="not(param[1]/declname)">
+						<emphasis role="keyword">void</emphasis>
+					</xsl:when>
+
+					<xsl:otherwise>
+						<xsl:for-each select="param">
+							<xsl:if test="position() > 1">
+								<xsl:text>,</xsl:text>
+							</xsl:if>
+							<xsl:text>&#10;&#9;</xsl:text>
+							<emphasis role="keyword">
+								<xsl:value-of select="type"/>
+							</emphasis>
+							<xsl:text> </xsl:text>
+							<xsl:value-of select="declname"/>
+						</xsl:for-each>
+					</xsl:otherwise>
+				</xsl:choose>
+
+				<xsl:text>)</xsl:text>
+			</programlisting>
+
+			<xsl:apply-templates select="detaileddescription"/>
+		</section>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="memberdef[@kind = 'enum']">
+		<section id="{@id}" xreflabel="{name}">
+			<title>
+				<xsl:text>Enum </xsl:text>
+				<xsl:value-of select="name"/>
+			</title>
+
+			<xsl:call-template name="generate.index.id">
+				<xsl:with-param name="name" select="name"/>
+			</xsl:call-template>
+
+			<xsl:apply-templates select="detaileddescription"/>
+
+			<table>
+				<title>Members</title>
+				<tgroup cols="2">
+					<thead>
+						<row>
+							<entry>Enum Value</entry>
+							<entry>Description</entry>
+						</row>
+					</thead>
+
+					<tbody>
+						<xsl:for-each select="enumvalue">
+							<row>
+								<entry>
+									<para id="{@id}" xreflabel="{name}">
+										<xsl:value-of select="name"/>
+
+										<xsl:call-template name="generate.index.id">
+											<xsl:with-param name="name" select="name"/>
+										</xsl:call-template>
+									</para>
+								</entry>
+								<entry>
+									<xsl:apply-templates select="detaileddescription"/>
+								</entry>
+							</row>
+						</xsl:for-each>
+					</tbody>
+				</tgroup>
+			</table>
+		</section>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="memberdef[@kind = 'define']">
+		<section id="{@id}" xreflabel="{name}">
+			<title>
+				<xsl:text>Macro </xsl:text>
+				<xsl:value-of select="name"/>
+			</title>
+
+			<xsl:call-template name="generate.index.id">
+				<xsl:with-param name="name" select="name"/>
+			</xsl:call-template>
+
+			<programlisting language="c">
+				<emphasis role="preprocessor">
+					<xsl:text>#define </xsl:text>
+					<xsl:value-of select="name"/>
+					<xsl:if test="count(param) > 0">
+						<xsl:text>(</xsl:text>
+						<xsl:for-each select="param/defname">
+							<xsl:if test="position() > 1">
+								<xsl:text>,</xsl:text>
+							</xsl:if>
+							<xsl:value-of select="."/>
+						</xsl:for-each>
+						<xsl:text>)</xsl:text>
+					</xsl:if>
+					<xsl:text> </xsl:text>
+
+					<!-- Split long macro definitions across multiple lines -->
+					<xsl:if test="(string-length(initializer) > 50) or (count(param) > 0)">
+						<xsl:text>\&#10;&#9;</xsl:text>
+					</xsl:if>
+
+					<xsl:value-of select="initializer"/>
+				</emphasis>
+				<xsl:text> </xsl:text>
+			</programlisting>
+
+			<xsl:apply-templates select="detaileddescription"/>
+		</section>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="memberdef[@kind = 'typedef']">
+		<section id="{@id}" xreflabel="{name}">
+			<title>
+				<xsl:text>Type </xsl:text>
+				<xsl:value-of select="name"/>
+			</title>
+
+			<xsl:call-template name="generate.index.id">
+				<xsl:with-param name="name" select="name"/>
+			</xsl:call-template>
+
+			<programlisting language="c">
+				<emphasis role="keyword">
+					<xsl:text>typedef </xsl:text>
+					<xsl:value-of select="type"/>
+				</emphasis>
+				<xsl:text> </xsl:text>
+				<xsl:value-of select="name"/>
+				<xsl:text> </xsl:text>
+				<xsl:value-of select="argsstring"/>
+			</programlisting>
+
+			<xsl:apply-templates select="detaileddescription"/>
+		</section>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+
+	<xsl:template match="memberdef[@kind = 'variable']">
+		<section id="{@id}" xreflabel="{name}">
+			<title>
+				<xsl:text>Variable </xsl:text>
+				<xsl:value-of select="name"/>
+			</title>
+
+			<xsl:call-template name="generate.index.id">
+				<xsl:with-param name="name" select="name"/>
+			</xsl:call-template>
+
+			<programlisting language="c">
+				<emphasis role="keyword">
+					<xsl:value-of select="type"/>
+				</emphasis>
+				<xsl:text> </xsl:text>
+				<xsl:value-of select="name"/>
+			</programlisting>
+
+			<xsl:apply-templates select="detaileddescription"/>
+		</section>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="linebreak | simplesectsep">
+		<!-- MUST be on two separate lines, as this is a *literal* newline -->
+		<literallayout>
+		</literallayout>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="verbatim">
+		<programlisting>
+			<xsl:apply-templates/>
+		</programlisting>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="sectiondef">
+		<para>
+			<xsl:value-of select="description"/>
+		</para>
+
+		<xsl:apply-templates select="memberdef"/>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="simplesect" mode="struct">
+		<footnote>
+			<xsl:apply-templates/>
+		</footnote>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="simplesect">
+		<xsl:choose>
+			<xsl:when test="@kind = 'par'">
+				<note>
+					<title>
+						<xsl:value-of select="title"/>
+					</title>
+					<xsl:apply-templates/>
+				</note>
+			</xsl:when>
+
+			<xsl:when test="@kind = 'return'">
+				<note>
+					<title>Returns</title>
+					<xsl:apply-templates/>
+				</note>
+			</xsl:when>
+
+			<xsl:when test="@kind = 'warning'">
+				<warning>
+					<title>Warning</title>
+					<xsl:apply-templates/>
+				</warning>
+			</xsl:when>
+
+			<xsl:when test="@kind = 'pre'">
+				<note>
+					<title>Precondition</title>
+					<xsl:apply-templates/>
+				</note>
+			</xsl:when>
+
+			<xsl:when test="@kind = 'see'">
+				<note>
+					<title>See also</title>
+					<xsl:apply-templates/>
+				</note>
+			</xsl:when>
+
+			<xsl:when test="@kind = 'note'">
+				<note>
+					<title>Note</title>
+					<xsl:apply-templates/>
+				</note>
+			</xsl:when>
+
+		</xsl:choose>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="parameterlist[@kind = 'param']">
+		<table>
+			<title>Parameters</title>
+			<tgroup cols="3">
+				<thead>
+					<row>
+						<entry>Data Direction</entry>
+						<entry>Parameter Name</entry>
+						<entry>Description</entry>
+					</row>
+				</thead>
+				<tbody>
+					<xsl:for-each select="parameteritem">
+						<row>
+							<xsl:apply-templates select="."/>
+						</row>
+					</xsl:for-each>
+				</tbody>
+			</tgroup>
+		</table>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="parameterlist[@kind = 'retval']">
+		<table>
+			<title>Return Values</title>
+			<tgroup cols="2">
+				<thead>
+					<row>
+						<entry>Return Value</entry>
+						<entry>Description</entry>
+					</row>
+				</thead>
+				<tbody>
+					<xsl:for-each select="parameteritem">
+						<row>
+							<xsl:apply-templates select="."/>
+						</row>
+					</xsl:for-each>
+				</tbody>
+			</tgroup>
+		</table>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="parameteritem">
+		<xsl:if test="parent::parameterlist/@kind = 'param'">
+			<entry>
+				<para>
+					<xsl:choose>
+						<xsl:when test="not(descendant::parametername/@direction)">
+							<emphasis role="italic">?</emphasis>
+						</xsl:when>
+
+						<xsl:otherwise>
+							<emphasis role="bold">
+								[<xsl:value-of select="descendant::parametername/@direction"/>]
+							</emphasis>
+						</xsl:otherwise>
+					</xsl:choose>
+				</para>
+			</entry>
+		</xsl:if>
+
+		<entry>
+			<para>
+				<xsl:value-of select="parameternamelist/parametername"/>
+			</para>
+		</entry>
+
+		<entry>
+			<xsl:apply-templates select="parameterdescription"/>
+		</entry>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="parameterdescription">
+		<para>
+			<xsl:apply-templates/>
+		</para>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="type">
+		<xsl:apply-templates/>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="bold">
+		<emphasis role="bold">
+			<xsl:apply-templates/>
+		</emphasis>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="emphasis">
+		<emphasis role="italic">
+			<xsl:apply-templates/>
+		</emphasis>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="small">
+		<xsl:apply-templates/>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="mdash | ndash">
+		<!-- Doxygen bug; double dashed are replaced with single HTML dash
+		     entities, even in verbatim-like <tt> sections -->
+		<xsl:text>--</xsl:text>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="computeroutput | preformatted">
+		<computeroutput>
+			<xsl:apply-templates/>
+		</computeroutput>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="codeline">
+			<xsl:apply-templates/>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="ulink">
+		<ulink url="{@url}">
+			<xsl:value-of select="."/>
+		</ulink>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="superscript">
+		<superscript>
+			<xsl:apply-templates/>
+		</superscript>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="subscript">
+		<subscript>
+			<xsl:apply-templates/>
+		</subscript>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="para">
+		<para>
+			<xsl:apply-templates/>
+		</para>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="ref">
+		<xsl:choose>
+			<!-- Don't show links inside program listings -->
+			<xsl:when test="ancestor::programlisting">
+				<xsl:value-of select="."/>
+			</xsl:when>
+
+			<!-- Don't show links to file compound definitions, as they are discarded -->
+			<xsl:when test="ancestor::*/compounddef[@kind = 'file' and @id = current()/@refid]">
+				<xsl:value-of select="."/>
+			</xsl:when>
+
+			<!-- Show links outside program listings -->
+			<xsl:otherwise>
+				<link linkend="{@refid}">
+					<xsl:value-of select="text()"/>
+				</link>
+			</xsl:otherwise>
+		</xsl:choose>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="entry">
+		<entry>
+			<xsl:apply-templates/>
+		</entry>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="table[caption]">
+		<table>
+			<title>
+				<xsl:value-of select="caption"/>
+			</title>
+
+			<tgroup cols="{@cols}">
+				<thead>
+					<xsl:apply-templates select="row[entry/@thead = 'yes']"/>
+				</thead>
+
+				<tbody>
+					<xsl:apply-templates select="row[entry/@thead != 'yes']"/>
+				</tbody>
+			</tgroup>
+		</table>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="table[not(caption)]">
+		<informaltable>
+			<tgroup cols="{@cols}">
+				<thead>
+					<xsl:apply-templates select="row[entry/@thead = 'yes']"/>
+				</thead>
+
+				<tbody>
+					<xsl:apply-templates select="row[entry/@thead != 'yes']"/>
+				</tbody>
+			</tgroup>
+		</informaltable>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="row">
+		<row>
+			<xsl:apply-templates/>
+		</row>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="itemizedlist">
+		<itemizedlist>
+			<xsl:apply-templates/>
+		</itemizedlist>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="orderedlist">
+		<orderedlist>
+			<xsl:apply-templates/>
+		</orderedlist>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="listitem">
+		<listitem>
+			<xsl:apply-templates/>
+		</listitem>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="programlisting">
+		<programlisting language="c">
+			<xsl:for-each select="codeline[position() > 1 or highlight]">
+				<xsl:apply-templates select="."/>
+				<xsl:text>&#10;</xsl:text>
+			</xsl:for-each>
+		</programlisting>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="highlight">
+		<emphasis role="{@class}">
+			<xsl:apply-templates/>
+		</emphasis>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="highlight[1]/text()">
+		<xsl:choose>
+			<xsl:when test="substring(., 1, 1) = '*'">
+				<xsl:value-of select="substring(., 2)"/>
+			</xsl:when>
+
+			<xsl:otherwise>
+				<xsl:value-of select="."/>
+			</xsl:otherwise>
+		</xsl:choose>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="sp[ancestor::codeline]">
+		<xsl:text> </xsl:text>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="image">
+		<mediaobject>
+			<imageobject>
+				<imagedata align="center">
+					<xsl:attribute name="fileref">
+						<xsl:text>images/</xsl:text>
+						<xsl:value-of select="@name"/>
+					</xsl:attribute>
+				</imagedata>
+			</imageobject>
+		</mediaobject>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="detaileddescription">
+		<xsl:apply-templates/>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="sect1 | sect2 | sect3 | sect4 | sect5 | sect6 | sect7 | sect8 | sect9">
+		<section>
+			<xsl:if test="@id">
+				<xsl:attribute name="id">
+					<xsl:value-of select="@id"/>
+				</xsl:attribute>
+			</xsl:if>
+
+			<title>
+				<xsl:value-of select="title"/>
+			</title>
+
+			<xsl:apply-templates/>
+		</section>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="anchor">
+		<xsl:if test="@id">
+			<indexterm id="{@id}"/>
+		</xsl:if>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="title"/>
+
+	<xsl:template match="htmlonly"/>
+
+	<xsl:template match="*">
+		<xsl:message>NO XSL TEMPLATE MATCH: <xsl:value-of select="local-name()"/></xsl:message>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+</xsl:stylesheet>
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/HV1/lufa_helpcontentsetup_transform.xslt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/HV1/lufa_helpcontentsetup_transform.xslt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b43354f8d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/HV1/lufa_helpcontentsetup_transform.xslt
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+<!--
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+-->
+
+<!-- Atmel Studio HV1 Setup XHTML transform file -->
+
+<!-- Updates a helpcontentsetup.msha document to add appropriate version
+     information. -->
+<xsl:stylesheet xmlns:xsl="http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform" xmlns:xhtml="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" version="1.0">
+	<xsl:output method="xml" omit-xml-declaration="yes"/>
+
+	<!-- Need to input the LUFA extension version for later use -->
+	<xsl:param name="extension-version"/>
+
+	<!-- Recursively match and copy/process all nodes/attributes -->
+	<xsl:template match="node()">
+		<xsl:copy>
+			<xsl:copy-of select="@*"/>
+			<xsl:apply-templates select="node()"/>
+		</xsl:copy>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<!-- Update the LUFA help package file name -->
+	<xsl:template match="xhtml:div[@class='package']/xhtml:a">
+		<xsl:copy>
+			<xsl:copy-of select="@class"/>
+
+			<xsl:attribute name="href">
+				<xsl:text>lufa_help_</xsl:text>
+				<xsl:value-of select="$extension-version"/>
+				<xsl:text>.mshc</xsl:text>
+			</xsl:attribute>
+
+			<xsl:text>lufa_help_</xsl:text>
+			<xsl:value-of select="$extension-version"/>
+			<xsl:text>.mshc</xsl:text>
+		</xsl:copy>
+	</xsl:template>
+</xsl:stylesheet>
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/HV1/lufa_hv1_transform.xslt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/HV1/lufa_hv1_transform.xslt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ee8a38340
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/HV1/lufa_hv1_transform.xslt
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<!--

+             LUFA Library

+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.

+

+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

+           www.lufa-lib.org

+-->

+

+<!-- Docbook XML to Microsoft Help Viewer 1.0 transform file -->

+

+<xsl:stylesheet xmlns:xsl="http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform" version="1.0">

+

+	<xsl:import href="../Docbook/mshelp/docbook.xsl"/>

+

+	<xsl:output method="xml" indent="no"/>

+

+	<xsl:template match="emphasis[@role = 'keyword' or @role = 'keywordtype' or @role = 'keywordflow']">

+		<span class="hl-keyword" style="color: #0079C1">

+			<xsl:apply-templates/>

+		</span>

+	</xsl:template>

+

+	<xsl:template match="emphasis[@role = 'stringliteral' or @role = 'charliteral']">

+		<span class="hl-string" style="color: #800000">

+			<xsl:apply-templates/>

+		</span>

+	</xsl:template>

+

+	<xsl:template match="emphasis[@role = 'comment']">

+		<em class="hl-comment" style="color: #008000">

+			<xsl:apply-templates/>

+		</em>

+	</xsl:template>

+

+	<xsl:template match="emphasis[@role = 'preprocessor']">

+		<span class="hl-preprocessor" style="color: #A000A0">

+			<xsl:apply-templates/>

+		</span>

+	</xsl:template>

+

+	<xsl:template match="emphasis[@role = 'normal' and ancestor::programlisting]">

+		<xsl:apply-templates />

+	</xsl:template>

+

+</xsl:stylesheet>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/HV1/lufa_studio_help_styling.css b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/HV1/lufa_studio_help_styling.css
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..49eb7e970
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/HV1/lufa_studio_help_styling.css
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+/*

+             LUFA Library

+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.

+

+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

+           www.lufa-lib.org

+*/

+

+.programlisting {

+ 	display: block;

+ 	margin-left: 15px;

+ 	padding: 10px;

+ 	background-color: #f4f4f4;

+ 	border: 1px solid #aaaaaa;

+ 	font-family: "Consolas", "Courier New", sans-serif;

+ }

+

+ code {

+ 	background-color: #f4f4f4;

+ 	font-family: "Consolas", "Courier New", sans-serif;

+ }

+

+.note, .warning, .tip {

+	display: block;

+ 	margin-left: 15px;

+ 	padding-left: 10px;

+ 	padding-bottom: 5px;

+ 	background-color: #f4f4f4;

+ 	border: 1px solid #aaaaaa;

+}

+

+table {

+	border: 1px solid #aaaaaa;

+	border-collapse: collapse;

+	margin-left: 15px;

+	font-size: 10pt;

+}

+

+table thead {

+ 	background-color: #f4f4f4;

+}

+

+table thead th {

+	padding: 5px;

+}

+

+table tbody td {

+	padding: 5px;

+}

+

+ul {

+	padding-left: 20px;

+}

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/ProjectGenerator/placeholder.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/ProjectGenerator/placeholder.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e89b0404b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/ProjectGenerator/placeholder.txt
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+Copy the ASF Project Generator into this directory (i.e. with the Python scripts in the current folder). The project generator can be extracted from the release versions of Atmel Studio's ASF extension.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/VSIX/LUFA.dll b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/VSIX/LUFA.dll
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..665b8029f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/VSIX/LUFA.dll
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/VSIX/LUFA.pkgdef b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/VSIX/LUFA.pkgdef
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b1b2f943b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/VSIX/LUFA.pkgdef
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/VSIX/[Content_Types].xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/VSIX/[Content_Types].xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..05ef8b6ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/VSIX/[Content_Types].xml
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+<Types xmlns="http://schemas.openxmlformats.org/package/2006/content-types">

+	<Default Extension="vsixmanifest" ContentType="text/xml"/>

+	<Default Extension="cache" ContentType="text/xml"/>

+	<Default Extension="png" ContentType="application/octet-stream"/>

+	<Default Extension="txt" ContentType="text/plain"/>

+	<Default Extension="xml" ContentType="text/xml"/>

+	<Default Extension="zip" ContentType="application/octet-stream"/>

+	<Default Extension="dll" ContentType="application/octet-stream" />

+	<Default Extension="pkgdef" ContentType="text/plain" />

+	<Default Extension="htm" ContentType="text/html" />

+	<Default Extension="msha" ContentType="text/html" />

+	<Default Extension="mshc" ContentType="application/octet-stream"/>

+</Types>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/VSIX/asf-manifest.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/VSIX/asf-manifest.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..794fd689e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/VSIX/asf-manifest.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+<AsfContentProvider Version="1.0.0">

+	<Identifier Id="0e160d5c-e331-48d9-850b-e0387912171b">

+		<Org>FourWalledCubicle</Org>

+		<ShortName>LUFA</ShortName>

+		<Author>Dean Camera</Author>

+		<Description/>

+		<FollowFolderStructure>True</FollowFolderStructure>

+	</Identifier>

+	<AsfContent Type="zip" Path="contents.zip">

+		<Content>

+			<Version>0</Version>

+			<HelpURL/>

+			<Locator/>

+			<DbXMLPath>content.xml.cache</DbXMLPath>

+			<Description/>

+		</Content>

+	</AsfContent>

+</AsfContentProvider>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/VSIX/extension.vsixmanifest b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/VSIX/extension.vsixmanifest
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ea6edeb25
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/VSIX/extension.vsixmanifest
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>

+

+<Vsix xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema" Version="1.0.0" xmlns="http://schemas.microsoft.com/developer/vsx-schema/2010">

+	<Identifier Id="FourWalledCubicle.LUFA.0e160d5c-e331-48d9-850b-e0387912171b">

+		<Name>LUFA Library</Name>

+		<Author>Dean Camera</Author>

+		<Version>0</Version>

+		<MoreInfoUrl>http://www.lufa-lib.org</MoreInfoUrl>

+		<Description xml:space="preserve">LUFA, the Lightweight USB Framework for AVRs.</Description>

+

+		<License>License.txt</License>

+		<Icon>LUFA_thumb.png</Icon>

+		<PreviewImage>LUFA.png</PreviewImage>

+

+		<SupportedProducts>

+			<IsolatedShell Version="6.1">AtmelStudio</IsolatedShell>

+			<IsolatedShell Version="6.2">AtmelStudio</IsolatedShell>

+		</SupportedProducts>

+

+		<SupportedFrameworkRuntimeEdition MinVersion="4.0" MaxVersion="4.5"/>

+		<Locale>1033</Locale>

+

+	    <AllUsers>false</AllUsers>

+	</Identifier>

+

+	<References/>

+

+	<Content>

+		<VsPackage>LUFA.pkgdef</VsPackage>

+	    <CustomExtension Type="MSHelp">helpcontentsetup.msha</CustomExtension>

+		<CustomExtension Type="asf-manifest">asf-manifest.xml</CustomExtension>

+	</Content>

+</Vsix>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/VSIX/generate_caches.py b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/VSIX/generate_caches.py
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c51cff400
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/VSIX/generate_caches.py
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+"""

+             LUFA Library

+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.

+

+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

+           www.lufa-lib.org

+"""

+

+import sys

+sys.path.append("ProjectGenerator")

+

+

+def show_message(message):

+    print("[Project Generator] %s" % message)

+    sys.stdout.flush()

+

+

+def main(lufa_root_path):

+    try:

+        from asf_avrstudio5_interface import PythonFacade

+    except ImportError:

+        print("Fatal Error: The ASF project generator is missing.")

+        return 1

+

+    p = PythonFacade(lufa_root_path)

+

+    show_message("Checking database sanity...")

+    p.check_extension_database_sanity(lufa_root_path)

+

+    show_message("Building cache files...")

+    p.generate_extension_cache_files(lufa_root_path)

+

+    show_message("Cache files created.")

+    return 0

+

+

+if __name__ == "__main__":

+    sys.exit(main(sys.argv[1]))

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/VSIX/lufa_asfmanifest_transform.xslt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/VSIX/lufa_asfmanifest_transform.xslt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8fc98412f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/VSIX/lufa_asfmanifest_transform.xslt
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+<!--
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+-->
+
+<!-- Atmel Studio framework VSIX XML transform file -->
+
+<!-- Updates an asf-manifest.xml document to add appropriate version
+     information. -->
+<xsl:stylesheet xmlns:xsl="http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform" version="1.0">
+	<xsl:output method="xml" omit-xml-declaration="yes"/>
+
+	<!-- Need to input the LUFA version for later use -->
+	<xsl:param name="lufa-version"/>
+
+	<!-- Recursively match and copy/process all nodes/attributes -->
+	<xsl:template match="@*|node()">
+		<xsl:copy>
+			<xsl:apply-templates select="@*|node()"/>
+		</xsl:copy>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<!-- Update the LUFA version to the version passed as a parameter -->
+	<xsl:template match="Version">
+		<xsl:copy>
+			<xsl:value-of select="substring($lufa-version, 1, 2)"/>
+			<xsl:text>.</xsl:text>
+			<xsl:value-of select="substring($lufa-version, 3, 2)"/>
+			<xsl:text>.</xsl:text>
+			<xsl:value-of select="substring($lufa-version, 5, 2)"/>
+		</xsl:copy>
+	</xsl:template>
+</xsl:stylesheet>
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/VSIX/lufa_vsmanifest_transform.xslt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/VSIX/lufa_vsmanifest_transform.xslt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..db12d9ea2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/VSIX/lufa_vsmanifest_transform.xslt
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+<!--
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+-->
+
+<!-- Atmel Studio framework VSIX XML transform file -->
+
+<!-- Updates the version element of a Visual Studio VSIX manifest file to the
+     value passed as a parameter to the stylesheet transform -->
+<xsl:stylesheet xmlns:xsl="http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform" xmlns:vs="http://schemas.microsoft.com/developer/vsx-schema/2010" version="1.0">
+	<xsl:output method="xml" omit-xml-declaration="yes"/>
+
+	<!-- Need to input the extension version for later use -->
+	<xsl:param name="extension-version"/>
+
+	<!-- Recursively match and copy/process all nodes/attributes -->
+	<xsl:template match="@*|node()">
+		<xsl:copy>
+			<xsl:apply-templates select="@*|node()"/>
+		</xsl:copy>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<!-- Update the extension version to the version passed as a parameter -->
+	<xsl:template match="vs:Version">
+		<xsl:copy>
+			<xsl:value-of select="$extension-version"/>
+		</xsl:copy>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+</xsl:stylesheet>
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/XDK/lufa_extension_transform.xslt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/XDK/lufa_extension_transform.xslt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f50f8a4dd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/XDK/lufa_extension_transform.xslt
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+<!--
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+-->
+
+<!-- Atmel Studio framework Extension XML transform file -->
+
+<!-- Creates an extension.xml document from a given manifest list of XML files,
+     and adds appropriate documentation base URI entries and version
+     information. -->
+<xsl:stylesheet xmlns:xsl="http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform" version="1.0">
+	<xsl:output method="xml" omit-xml-declaration="yes"/>
+
+	<!-- Store the LUFA version mentioned in the root node for later use -->
+	<xsl:param name="lufa-version" select="lufa-manifest/@version"/>
+
+	<!-- Read manifest list and then process all FDK nodes in the referenced
+	     document -->
+	<xsl:template match="lufa-manifest">
+		<xsl:comment>This file has been automatically generated from the LUFA Atmel Studio integration XML files.</xsl:comment>
+
+		<extension-container xmlversion="2.0">
+			<xsl:for-each select="xml-source">
+				<xsl:apply-templates select="document(@filename)/lufa/extension-container/*"/>
+			</xsl:for-each>
+		</extension-container>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<!-- Recursively match and copy/process all nodes/attributes -->
+	<xsl:template match="@*|node()">
+		<xsl:copy>
+			<xsl:apply-templates select="@*|node()"/>
+		</xsl:copy>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<!-- Update the extension version to the version of LUFA being used -->
+	<xsl:template match="extension/@version">
+		<xsl:attribute name="version">
+			<xsl:value-of select="substring($lufa-version, 1, 2)"/>
+			<xsl:text>.</xsl:text>
+			<xsl:value-of select="substring($lufa-version, 3, 2)"/>
+			<xsl:text>.</xsl:text>
+			<xsl:value-of select="substring($lufa-version, 5, 2)"/>
+		</xsl:attribute>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<!-- Update the extension online help URLs to the version of LUFA being
+	     used -->
+	<xsl:template match="online-help/*/@baseurl">
+		<xsl:attribute name="baseurl">
+			<xsl:value-of select="current()"/>
+			<xsl:value-of select="$lufa-version"/>
+			<xsl:text>/html/</xsl:text>
+		</xsl:attribute>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<xsl:template match="online-help/index-page/@url">
+		<xsl:attribute name="url">
+			<xsl:value-of select="current()"/>
+			<xsl:value-of select="$lufa-version"/>
+			<xsl:text>/html/</xsl:text>
+		</xsl:attribute>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+</xsl:stylesheet>
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/XDK/lufa_filelist_transform.xslt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/XDK/lufa_filelist_transform.xslt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9affc9f67
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/XDK/lufa_filelist_transform.xslt
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+<!--
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+-->
+
+<!-- Atmel Studio framework Module XML transform file -->
+
+<!-- Outputs a flat file list of all source files referenced in all modules of
+     the input manifest XML file, so that they can be checked for existence. -->
+<xsl:stylesheet xmlns:xsl="http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform" version="1.0">
+	<xsl:output method="xml" omit-xml-declaration="yes"/>
+
+	<!-- Read manifest list, add a comment to indicate the source filename
+	     and then process all ASF nodes in the referenced document -->
+	<xsl:template match="lufa-manifest">
+		<xsl:for-each select="xml-source">
+			<xsl:comment>Sourced from <xsl:value-of select="@filename"/></xsl:comment>
+			<xsl:apply-templates select="document(@filename)/lufa/asf/*"/>
+		</xsl:for-each>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<!-- Recursively match and process all nodes/attributes -->
+	<xsl:template match="@*|node()">
+		<xsl:apply-templates select="@*|node()"/>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<!-- Match source file nodes, output filename -->
+	<xsl:template match="build[@type='c-source']|build[@type='header-file']|build[@type='distribute']">
+		<xsl:value-of select="@value"/>
+		<xsl:text>&#xA;</xsl:text>
+	</xsl:template>
+</xsl:stylesheet>
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/XDK/lufa_indent_transform.xslt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/XDK/lufa_indent_transform.xslt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..166f42571
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/XDK/lufa_indent_transform.xslt
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+<!--
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+-->
+
+<!-- Atmel Studio framework XML transform file -->
+
+<!-- Indents a given XML document to match the node hierarchy. -->
+<xsl:stylesheet version="1.0" xmlns:xsl="http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform">
+	<xsl:output method="xml" omit-xml-declaration="yes" indent="yes"/>
+
+	<!-- Remove all white-space on all elements so that they can be indented -->
+	<xsl:strip-space elements="*"/>
+
+	<!-- Match the root node and copy, so that the output will be a correctly
+	     indented version of the input document -->
+	<xsl:template match="/">
+		<xsl:copy-of select="."/>
+	</xsl:template>
+</xsl:stylesheet>
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/XDK/lufa_module_transform.xslt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/XDK/lufa_module_transform.xslt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ee9a050c1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/XDK/lufa_module_transform.xslt
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+<!--
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+-->
+
+<!-- Atmel Studio framework Module XML transform file -->
+
+<!-- Creates an asf.xml module document from a given manifest list of XML files,
+     and adds appropriate documentation links by cross-referencing the Doxygen
+     tag output file to map Doxygen group names to generated filenames. -->
+<xsl:stylesheet xmlns:xsl="http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform" version="1.0">
+	<xsl:output method="xml" omit-xml-declaration="yes"/>
+
+	<!-- Store the LUFA Doxygen tag filename mentioned in the root node for later use -->
+	<xsl:param name="lufa-doxygen-tagfile" select="lufa-manifest/@tagfile"/>
+
+	<!-- Store the LUFA Doxygen documentation filename mentioned in the root node for later use -->
+	<xsl:param name="lufa-doxygen-docfile" select="lufa-manifest/@docfile"/>
+
+	<!-- Read manifest list, add a comment to indicate the source filename
+	     and then copy/process all ASF nodes in the referenced document -->
+	<xsl:template match="lufa-manifest">
+		<xsl:comment>This file has been automatically generated from the LUFA Atmel Studio integration XML files.</xsl:comment>
+
+		<asf xmlversion="1.0">
+			<xsl:for-each select="xml-source">
+				<xsl:comment>Sourced from <xsl:value-of select="@filename"/></xsl:comment>
+				<xsl:apply-templates select="document(@filename)/lufa/asf/*"/>
+			</xsl:for-each>
+		</asf>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<!-- Recursively match and copy/process all nodes/attributes -->
+	<xsl:template match="@*|node()">
+		<xsl:copy>
+			<xsl:apply-templates select="@*|node()"/>
+		</xsl:copy>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+	<!-- For Doxygen entry point nodes we need to convert them into help link
+	     nodes instead and add descriptions, so that they show up as links in
+	     Studio correctly -->
+	<xsl:template match="build[@type='doxygen-entry-point']">
+		<!-- select-by-config entries should not have a help link -->
+		<xsl:if test="not(parent::select-by-config)">
+			<build type="online-help" subtype="module-help-page-append">
+			 	<xsl:attribute name="value">
+			 		<!-- Extract filename of the HTML file that contains the documentation for this module from the Doxgen tag file -->
+				    <xsl:value-of select="document($lufa-doxygen-tagfile)/tagfile/compound[name=current()/@value]/filename"/>
+	  			</xsl:attribute>
+	  		</build>
+	  	</xsl:if>
+
+		<!-- Modules inside a select-by-config entries should not have a help link -->
+		<xsl:if test="not(parent::module and ../parent::select-by-config)">
+			<info type="description" value="summary">
+			 	<!-- Extract brief description of the module from the Doxygen combined XML documentation file -->
+				<xsl:value-of select="document($lufa-doxygen-docfile)/doxygen/compounddef[compoundname=current()/@value]/briefdescription/para"/>
+			</info>
+	  	</xsl:if>
+	</xsl:template>
+
+</xsl:stylesheet>
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..28afdda58
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+<!--

+             LUFA Library

+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.

+

+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

+           www.lufa-lib.org

+-->

+

+<!-- Atmel Studio framework integration file -->

+

+<lufa>

+	<extension-container>

+		<extension uuid="0e160d5c-e331-48d9-850b-e0387912171b" org="FourWalledCubicle" shortname="LUFA" version="" fullname="Lightweight USB Framework for AVRs (LUFA)">

+			<author name="Dean Camera" website="http://www.lufa-lib.org/" email="dean@fourwalledcubicle.com"/>

+			<description>Lightweight USB Framework for AVRs (LUFA), a USB software stack/framework.</description>

+			<icon-image path="LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/LUFA_thumb.png"/>

+			<preview-image path="LUFA/DoxygenPages/Images/LUFA.png"/>

+			<license caption="LUFA License" path="LUFA/License.txt"/>

+			<release-notes caption="LUFA Information" url="http://www.lufa-lib.org"/>

+			<online-help>

+				<index-page caption="LUFA Documentation" url="http://www.lufa-lib.org/documentation/"/>

+				<module-help-page scheme="append" baseurl="http://www.lufa-lib.org/documentation/"/>

+				<module-guide-page scheme="append" baseurl="http://www.lufa-lib.org/documentation/"/>

+			</online-help>

+			<dependencies/>

+		</extension>

+	</extension-container>

+

+	<asf>

+		<device-alias-map name="lufa_avr8">

+			<device-support value="at90usb82"/>

+			<device-support value="atmega8u2"/>

+			<device-support value="at90usb162"/>

+			<device-support value="atmega16u2"/>

+			<device-support value="atmega16u4"/>

+			<device-support value="atmega32u2"/>

+			<device-support value="atmega32u4"/>

+			<device-support value="at90usb646"/>

+			<device-support value="at90usb647"/>

+			<device-support value="at90usb1286"/>

+			<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		</device-alias-map>

+

+		<device-alias-map name="lufa_xmega">

+			<device-support value="atxmega16a4u"/>

+			<device-support value="atxmega32a4u"/>

+			<device-support value="atxmega64a4u"/>

+			<device-support value="atxmega128a4u"/>

+			<device-support value="atxmega64a3u"/>

+			<device-support value="atxmega128a3u"/>

+			<device-support value="atxmega192a3u"/>

+			<device-support value="atxmega256a3u"/>

+			<device-support value="atxmega256a3bu"/>

+			<device-support value="atxmega128a1u"/>

+			<device-support value="atxmega64b3"/>

+			<device-support value="atxmega128b3"/>

+			<device-support value="atxmega64b1"/>

+			<device-support value="atxmega128b1"/>

+			<device-support value="atxmega64c3"/>

+			<device-support value="atxmega128c3"/>

+			<!-- <device-support value="atxmega192c3"/> Wait for ASFP-3339 merge and release before enabling -->

+			<device-support value="atxmega256c3"/>

+			<device-support value="atxmega384c3"/>

+			<device-support value="atxmega16c4"/>

+		</device-alias-map>

+

+		<device-alias-map name="lufa_uc3">

+			<device-support value="at32uc3a364"/>

+			<device-support value="at32uc3a364s"/>

+			<device-support value="at32uc3a464"/>

+			<device-support value="at32uc3a464s"/>

+			<device-support value="at32uc3b064"/>

+			<device-support value="at32uc3b164"/>

+			<device-support value="at32uc3a0128"/>

+			<device-support value="at32uc3a1128"/>

+			<device-support value="at32uc3a3128"/>

+			<device-support value="at32uc3a3128s"/>

+			<device-support value="at32uc3a4128"/>

+			<device-support value="at32uc3a4128s"/>

+			<device-support value="at32uc3b0128"/>

+			<device-support value="at32uc3b1128"/>

+			<device-support value="at32uc3a0256"/>

+			<device-support value="at32uc3a1256"/>

+			<device-support value="at32uc3a3256"/>

+			<device-support value="at32uc3a3256s"/>

+			<device-support value="at32uc3a4256"/>

+			<device-support value="at32uc3a4256s"/>

+			<device-support value="at32uc3b0256"/>

+			<device-support value="at32uc3b1256"/>

+			<device-support value="at32uc3a0512"/>

+			<device-support value="at32uc3a1512"/>

+			<device-support value="at32uc3b0512"/>

+			<device-support value="at32uc3b1512"/>

+		</device-alias-map>

+	</asf>

+</lufa>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_common.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_common.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9e17b188b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_common.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+<!--

+             LUFA Library

+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.

+

+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

+           www.lufa-lib.org

+-->

+

+<!-- Atmel Studio framework integration file -->

+

+<lufa>

+	<asf>

+		<module type="service" id="lufa.common" caption="LUFA Common Infrastructure">

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+			<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>

+			<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_Common"/>

+

+			<build type="include-path" value=".."/>

+			<build type="header-file" subtype="api" value="Version.h"/>

+			<build type="distribute" subtype="license" value="License.txt"/>

+

+			<build type="header-file" subtype="api" value="Common/Common.h"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Common/Architectures.h"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Common/ArchitectureSpecific.h"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Common/Attributes.h"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Common/BoardTypes.h"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Common/CompilerSpecific.h"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Common/Endianness.h"/>

+		</module>

+	</asf>

+</lufa>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_board.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_board.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3677d2003
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_board.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+<!--

+             LUFA Library

+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.

+

+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

+           www.lufa-lib.org

+-->

+

+<!-- Atmel Studio framework integration file -->

+

+<lufa>

+	<asf>

+		<board id="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8" vendor="LUFA" caption="AVR8 Architecture">

+			<device-support value="mega"/>

+

+			<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+			<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.info"/>

+		</board>

+

+		<board id="lufa.boards.dummy.xmega" vendor="LUFA" caption="XMEGA Architecture">

+			<device-support value="xmega"/>

+

+			<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+			<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.info"/>

+		</board>

+

+		<board id="lufa.boards.dummy.uc3" vendor="LUFA" caption="UC3 Architecture">

+			<device-support value="uc3"/>

+

+			<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+			<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.info"/>

+		</board>

+

+		<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board.info" caption="LUFA Board Hardware Information Driver">

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+			<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo"/>

+

+			<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+

+			<build type="include-path" value=".."/>

+			<build type="header-file"  subtype="api" value="Drivers/Board/Board.h"/>

+		</module>

+

+		<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board.leds" caption="LUFA Board LED Driver">

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+			<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_LEDs"/>

+

+			<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+

+			<build type="include-path" value=".."/>

+			<build type="header-file"  subtype="api" value="Drivers/Board/LEDs.h"/>

+		</module>

+

+		<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board.buttons" caption="LUFA Board Buttons Driver">

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+			<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_Buttons"/>

+

+			<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+

+			<build type="include-path" value=".."/>

+			<build type="header-file"  subtype="api" value="Drivers/Board/Buttons.h"/>

+		</module>

+

+		<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board.dataflash" caption="LUFA Board Dataflash Driver">

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+			<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_Dataflash"/>

+

+			<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+

+			<build type="include-path" value=".."/>

+			<build type="header-file"  subtype="api" value="Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h"/>

+		</module>

+

+		<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board.joystick" caption="LUFA Board Joystick Driver">

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+			<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_Joystick"/>

+

+			<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+

+			<build type="include-path" value=".."/>

+			<build type="header-file"  subtype="api" value="Drivers/Board/Joystick.h"/>

+		</module>

+

+		<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board.temperature" caption="LUFA Board Temperature Sensor Driver">

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+			<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_Temperature"/>

+

+			<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+			<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.adc"/>

+

+			<build type="c-source"     value="Drivers/Board/Temperature.c"/>

+			<build type="include-path" value=".."/>

+			<build type="header-file"  subtype="api" value="Drivers/Board/Temperature.h"/>

+		</module>

+	</asf>

+</lufa>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_board_names.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_board_names.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4b099920b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_board_names.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,853 @@
+<!--

+             LUFA Library

+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.

+

+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

+           www.lufa-lib.org

+-->

+

+<!-- Atmel Studio framework integration file -->

+

+<lufa>

+	<asf>

+		<select-by-config id="lufa.drivers.board" name="lufa.drivers.board.name" default="none" caption="LUFA Board Support">

+			<info type="description" value="summary">

+				Board hardware (LEDs, Buttons, etc.) drivers for the preconfigured LUFA boards. Note that only the boards

+				compatible with the currently selected device will be shown.

+

+				To disable all hardware drivers silently, use NONE. To supply customer drivers, use USER (see manual).

+			</info>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#none" caption="Board Support - None">

+				<device-support value="avr"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_NONE"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#user" caption="Board Support - User Supplied">

+				<device-support value="avr"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_USER"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#adafruit_u4" caption="Board Support - ADAFRUITU4">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_ADAFRUITU4"/>

+

+				<device-support value="atmega32u4"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_ADAFRUITU4"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/ADAFRUITU4/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/ADAFRUITU4/LEDs.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#atavrusbrf01" caption="Board Support - ATAVRUSBRF01">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_ATAVRUSBRF01"/>

+

+				<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_ATAVRUSBRF01"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/ATAVRUSBRF01/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/ATAVRUSBRF01/Buttons.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/ATAVRUSBRF01/LEDs.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#benito" caption="Board Support - BENITO">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_BENITO"/>

+

+				<device-support value="at90usb162"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_BENITO"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/BENITO/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/BENITO/Buttons.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/BENITO/LEDs.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#big_multio" caption="Board Support - BIGMULTIO">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_BIGMULTIO"/>

+

+				<device-support value="atmega32u4"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_BIGMULTIO"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/BIGMULTIO/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/BIGMULTIO/LEDs.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#blackcat" caption="Board Support - BLACKCAT">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_BLACKCAT"/>

+

+				<device-support value="at90usb162"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_BLACKCAT"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/BLACKCAT/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/BLACKCAT/LEDs.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#bui" caption="Board Support - BUI">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_BUI"/>

+

+				<device-support value="at90usb646"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_BUI"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUI/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUI/LEDs.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#bumbleb" caption="Board Support - BUMBLEB">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_BUMBLEB"/>

+

+				<device-support value="at90usb162"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_BUMBLEB"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUMBLEB/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUMBLEB/Buttons.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUMBLEB/Joystick.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/BUMBLEB/LEDs.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#culv3" caption="Board Support - CULV3">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_CULV3"/>

+

+				<device-support value="atmega32u4"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_CULV3"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/CULV3/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/CULV3/Buttons.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/CULV3/LEDs.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#duce" caption="Board Support - DUCE">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_DUCE"/>

+

+				<device-support value="atmega32u2"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_DUCE"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/DUCE/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/DUCE/LEDs.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#evk527" caption="Board Support - EVK527">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_EVK527"/>

+

+				<device-support value="atmega32u4"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_EVK527"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.at45db321c"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.spi"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.dataflash"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/Buttons.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/Dataflash.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/Joystick.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/EVK527/LEDs.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#jm_db_u2" caption="Board Support - JMDBU2">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_JMDBU2"/>

+

+				<device-support value="atmega32u2"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_JMDBU2"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/JMDBU2/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/JMDBU2/Buttons.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/JMDBU2/LEDs.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#leonardo" caption="Board Support - LEONARDO">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_LEONARDO"/>

+

+				<device-support value="atmega32u4"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_LEONARDO"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/LEONARDO/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/LEONARDO/LEDs.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#maximus" caption="Board Support - MAXIMUS">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_MAXIMUS"/>

+

+				<device-support value="at90usb162"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_MAXIMUS"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MAXIMUS/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MAXIMUS/LEDs.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#micropendous_32u2" caption="Board Support - MICROPENDOUS_32U2">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_MICROPENDOUS_32U2"/>

+

+				<device-support value="atmega32u2"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_32U2"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/LEDs.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/Buttons.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#micropendous_a" caption="Board Support - MICROPENDOUS_A">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_MICROPENDOUS_A"/>

+

+				<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_A"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/Buttons.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#micropendous_1" caption="Board Support - MICROPENDOUS_1">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_MICROPENDOUS_1"/>

+

+				<device-support value="at90usb162"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_1"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/Buttons.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#micropendous_2" caption="Board Support - MICROPENDOUS_2">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_MICROPENDOUS_2"/>

+

+				<device-support value="atmega32u4"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_2"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/Buttons.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#micropendous_3" caption="Board Support - MICROPENDOUS_3">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_MICROPENDOUS_3"/>

+

+				<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_3"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/Buttons.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#micropendous_4" caption="Board Support - MICROPENDOUS_4">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_MICROPENDOUS_4"/>

+

+				<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_4"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/Buttons.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#micropendous_dip" caption="Board Support - MICROPENDOUS_DIP">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_MICROPENDOUS_DIP"/>

+

+				<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_DIP"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/Buttons.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#micropendous_rev1" caption="Board Support - MICROPENDOUS_REV1">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_MICROPENDOUS_REV1"/>

+

+				<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_REV1"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/LEDs.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/Buttons.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#micropendous_rev2" caption="Board Support - MICROPENDOUS_REV2">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_MICROPENDOUS_REV2"/>

+

+				<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_MICROPENDOUS_REV2"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/LEDs.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROPENDOUS/Buttons.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#microsin_162" caption="Board Support - MICROSIN162">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_MICROSIN162"/>

+

+				<device-support value="atmega162"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_MICROSIN162"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROSIN162/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROSIN162/LEDs.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICROSIN162/Buttons.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#minimus" caption="Board Support - MINIMUS">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_MINIMUS"/>

+

+				<device-support value="atmega32u2"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_MINIMUS"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MINIMUS/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MINIMUS/LEDs.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MINIMUS/Buttons.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#multio" caption="Board Support - MULTIO">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_MULTIO"/>

+

+				<device-support value="at90usb162"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_MULTIO"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MULTIO/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MULTIO/LEDs.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#olimex_162" caption="Board Support - OLIMEX162">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_OLIMEX162"/>

+

+				<device-support value="at90usb162"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_OLIMEX162"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX162/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX162/LEDs.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX162/Buttons.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#olimex_32u4" caption="Board Support - OLIMEX32U4">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_OLIMEX32U4"/>

+

+				<device-support value="atmega32u4"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_OLIMEX32U4"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX32U4/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX32U4/LEDs.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEX32U4/Buttons.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#olimex_isp_mkii" caption="Board Support - OLIMEXISPMK2">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_OLIMEXISPMK2"/>

+

+				<device-support value="at90usb162"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_OLIMEXISPMK2"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXISPMK2/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXISPMK2/LEDs.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXISPMK2/Buttons.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#olimex_t32u4" caption="Board Support - OLIMEX_T32U4">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_OLIMEXT32U4"/>

+

+				<device-support value="atmega32u4"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_OLIMEXT32U4"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXT32U4/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXT32U4/LEDs.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/OLIMEXT32U4/Buttons.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#rzusbstick" caption="Board Support - RZUSBSTICK">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_RZUSBSTICK"/>

+

+				<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_RZUSBSTICK"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/RZUSBSTICK/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/RZUSBSTICK/LEDs.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#sparkfun_8u2" caption="Board Support - SPARKFUN8U2">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_SPARKFUN8U2"/>

+

+				<device-support value="atmega8u2"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_SPARKFUN8U2"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/SPARKFUN8U2/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/SPARKFUN8U2/LEDs.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#stk525" caption="Board Support - STK525">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_STK525"/>

+

+				<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+				<device-support value="at90usb1286"/>

+				<device-support value="at90usb647"/>

+				<device-support value="at90usb646"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_STK525"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.at45db321c"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.spi"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.dataflash"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/Buttons.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/Dataflash.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/Joystick.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK525/LEDs.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#stk526" caption="Board Support - STK526">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_STK526"/>

+

+				<device-support value="at90usb162"/>

+				<device-support value="at90usb82"/>

+				<device-support value="atmega32u2"/>

+				<device-support value="atmega16u2"/>

+				<device-support value="atmega8u2"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_STK526"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.at45db642d"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.spi"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.dataflash"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/Buttons.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/Dataflash.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/Joystick.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/STK526/LEDs.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#teensy" caption="Board Support - TEENSY">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_TEENSY"/>

+

+				<device-support value="at90usb162"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_TEENSY"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/TEENSY/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/TEENSY/LEDs.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#teensy2" caption="Board Support - TEENSY2">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_TEENSY2"/>

+

+				<device-support value="at90usb646"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_TEENSY2"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/TEENSY/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/TEENSY/LEDs.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#tul" caption="Board Support - TUL">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_TUL"/>

+

+				<device-support value="atmega32u4"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_TUL"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/TUL/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/TUL/Buttons.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/TUL/LEDs.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#udip" caption="Board Support - UDIP">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_UDIP"/>

+

+				<device-support value="atmega32u2"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_UDIP"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/UDIP/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/UDIP/Buttons.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/UDIP/LEDs.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#uno" caption="Board Support - UNO">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_UNO"/>

+

+				<device-support value="atmega8u2"/>

+				<device-support value="atmega16u2"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_UNO"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/UNO/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/UNO/LEDs.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#usb2ax" caption="Board Support - USB2AX">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_USB2AX"/>

+

+				<device-support value="atmega32u2"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_USB2AX"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/USB2AX/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/USB2AX/Buttons.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/USB2AX/LEDs.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#usb2ax_v3" caption="Board Support - USB2AX_V3">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_USB2AX_V3"/>

+

+				<device-support value="atmega32u2"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_USB2AX_V3"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/USB2AX/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/USB2AX/Buttons.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/USB2AX/LEDs.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#usb2ax_v3_1" caption="Board Support - USB2AX_V31">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_USB2AX_V31"/>

+

+				<device-support value="atmega32u2"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_USB2AX_V31"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/USB2AX/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/USB2AX/Buttons.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/USB2AX/LEDs.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#usbfoo" caption="Board Support - USBFOO">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_USBFOO"/>

+

+				<device-support value="atmega162"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_USBFOO"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBFOO/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBFOO/Buttons.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBFOO/LEDs.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#usbkey" caption="Board Support - USBKEY">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_USBKEY"/>

+

+				<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_USBKEY"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.at45db642d"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.spi"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.dataflash"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/Buttons.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/Dataflash.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/Joystick.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBKEY/LEDs.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#usbtiny_mkii" caption="Board Support - USBTINYMKII">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_USBTINYMKII"/>

+

+				<device-support value="at90usb162"/>

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_USBTINYMKII"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBTINYMKII/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBTINYMKII/Buttons.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/USBTINYMKII/LEDs.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#xplain_rev1" caption="Board Support - XPLAIN (HW Rev 1)">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_XPLAIN_REV1"/>

+

+				<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.at45db642d"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.spi"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.dataflash"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/XPLAIN/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/XPLAIN/Dataflash.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/XPLAIN/LEDs.h"/>

+

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#xplain" caption="Board Support - XPLAIN (HW Rev 2+)">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_XPLAIN"/>

+

+				<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.at45db642d"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.spi"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.dataflash"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/XPLAIN/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/XPLAIN/Dataflash.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/XPLAIN/LEDs.h"/>

+

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_XPLAIN"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#a3bu_xplained" caption="Board Support - A3BU_XPLAINED">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_A3BU_XPLAINED"/>

+

+				<device-support value="atxmega256a3bu"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.at45db642d"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart_spi"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.dataflash"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/Buttons.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/Dataflash.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/XMEGA/A3BU_XPLAINED/LEDs.h"/>

+

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_A3BU_XPLAINED"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#b1_xplained" caption="Board Support - B1_XPLAINED">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_B1_XPLAINED"/>

+

+				<device-support value="atxmega128b1"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.at45db642d"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart_spi"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.dataflash"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/Buttons.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/Dataflash.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/XMEGA/B1_XPLAINED/LEDs.h"/>

+

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_B1_XPLAINED"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#evk1100" caption="Board Support - EVK1100">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_EVK1100"/>

+

+				<device-support value="at32uc3a0512"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/Buttons.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/Joystick.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1100/LEDs.h"/>

+

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_EVK1100"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#evk1101" caption="Board Support - EVK1101">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_EVK1101"/>

+

+				<device-support value="at32uc3b0256"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/Buttons.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/Joystick.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1101/LEDs.h"/>

+

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_EVK1101"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#evk1104" caption="Board Support - EVK1104">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_EVK1104"/>

+

+				<device-support value="at32uc3a3256"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1104/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1104/Buttons.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/UC3/EVK1104/LEDs.h"/>

+

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_EVK1104"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#uc3a3_xplained" caption="Board Support - UC3A3_XPLAINED">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_UC3_A3_XPLAINED"/>

+

+				<device-support value="at32uc3a3256"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/UC3/UC3A3_XPLAINED/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/UC3/UC3A3_XPLAINED/Buttons.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/UC3/UC3A3_XPLAINED/LEDs.h"/>

+

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_UC3A3_XPLAINED"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#stange_isp" caption="Board Support - STANGE_ISP">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_STANGE_ISP"/>

+

+				<device-support value="at90usb162"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/STANGE_ISP/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/STANGE_ISP/Buttons.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/STANGE_ISP/LEDs.h"/>

+

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_STANGE_ISP"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#c3_xplained" caption="Board Support - C3_XPLAINED">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_C3_XPLAINED"/>

+

+				<device-support value="atxmega384c3"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/XMEGA/C3_XPLAINED/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/XMEGA/C3_XPLAINED/Buttons.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/XMEGA/C3_XPLAINED/LEDs.h"/>

+

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_C3_XPLAINED"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#u2s" caption="Board Support - U2S">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_U2S"/>

+

+				<device-support value="atmega32u2"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/U2S/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/U2S/Buttons.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/U2S/LEDs.h"/>

+

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_U2S"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#yun" caption="Board Support - YUN">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_YUN"/>

+

+				<device-support value="atmega32u4"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/YUN/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/YUN/LEDs.h"/>

+

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_YUN"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.board#yun" caption="Board Support - MICRO">

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_BoardInfo_MICRO"/>

+

+				<device-support value="atmega32u4"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICRO/Board.h"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Board/AVR8/MICRO/LEDs.h"/>

+

+				<build type="define" name="BOARD" value="BOARD_MICRO"/>

+			</module>

+		</select-by-config>

+	</asf>

+</lufa>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_misc.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_misc.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8680ca2df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_misc.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+<!--

+             LUFA Library

+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.

+

+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

+           www.lufa-lib.org

+-->

+

+<!-- Atmel Studio framework integration file -->

+

+<lufa>

+	<asf>

+		<module type="component" id="lufa.drivers.misc.at45db321c" caption="LUFA AT45DB321C Dataflash Commands">

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+			<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_AT45DB321C"/>

+

+			<build type="include-path" value=".."/>

+			<build type="header-file" subtype="api" value="Drivers/Misc/AT45DB321C.h"/>

+		</module>

+

+		<module type="component" id="lufa.drivers.misc.at45db642d" caption="LUFA AT45DB642D Dataflash Commands">

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+			<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_AT45DB321C"/>

+

+			<build type="include-path" value=".."/>

+			<build type="header-file" subtype="api" value="Drivers/Misc/AT45DB642D.h"/>

+		</module>

+

+		<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.misc.ringbuffer" caption="LUFA Ring Buffer">

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+			<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_RingBuff"/>

+

+			<build type="include-path" value=".."/>

+			<build type="header-file" subtype="api" value="Drivers/Misc/RingBuffer.h"/>

+		</module>

+

+		<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi" caption="LUFA ANSI Terminal Commands">

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+			<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_Terminal"/>

+

+			<build type="include-path" value=".."/>

+			<build type="header-file" subtype="api" value="Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h"/>

+		</module>

+	</asf>

+</lufa>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_peripheral.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_peripheral.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3a982e565
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_peripheral.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,198 @@
+<!--

+             LUFA Library

+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.

+

+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

+           www.lufa-lib.org

+-->

+

+<!-- Atmel Studio framework integration file -->

+

+<lufa>

+	<asf>

+		<select-by-device id="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart" caption="LUFA USART Driver">

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart#avr8" caption="LUFA USART Driver - AVR8">

+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_Serial"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+

+				<build type="c-source" value="Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/Serial_AVR8.c"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/Serial_AVR8.h"/>

+				<build type="include-path" value=".."/>

+				<build type="header-file" subtype="api" value="Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart#xmega" caption="LUFA USART Driver - AVR8">

+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_Serial"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+

+				<build type="c-source" value="Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/Serial_XMEGA.c"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/Serial_XMEGA.h"/>

+				<build type="include-path" value=".."/>

+				<build type="header-file" subtype="api" value="Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart#uc3" caption="LUFA USART Driver - UC3">

+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_Serial"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+

+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>

+			</module>

+		</select-by-device>

+

+		<select-by-device id="lufa.drivers.peripheral.spi" caption="LUFA SPI Driver">

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.peripheral.spi#avr8" caption="LUFA SPI Driver - AVR8">

+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_SPI"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/SPI_AVR8.h"/>

+				<build type="include-path" value=".."/>

+				<build type="header-file" subtype="api" value="Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.peripheral.spi#xmega" caption="LUFA SPI Driver - XMEGA">

+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_SPI"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/SPI_XMEGA.h"/>

+				<build type="include-path" value=".."/>

+				<build type="header-file" subtype="api" value="Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.peripheral.spi#uc3" caption="LUFA SPI Driver - UC3">

+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_SPI"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+

+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>

+			</module>

+		</select-by-device>

+

+		<select-by-device id="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart_spi" caption="LUFA USART SPI Driver">

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart_spi#avr8" caption="LUFA USART SPI Driver - AVR8">

+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_SerialSPI"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/SerialSPI_AVR8.h"/>

+				<build type="include-path" value=".."/>

+				<build type="header-file" subtype="api"  value="Drivers/Peripheral/SerialSPI.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart_spi#xmega" caption="LUFA USART SPI Driver - XMEGA">

+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_SerialSPI"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/SerialSPI_XMEGA.h"/>

+				<build type="include-path" value=".."/>

+				<build type="header-file" subtype="api" value="Drivers/Peripheral/SerialSPI.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart_spi#uc3" caption="LUFA USART SPI Driver - UC3">

+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_SerialSPI"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+

+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>

+			</module>

+		</select-by-device>

+

+		<select-by-device id="lufa.drivers.peripheral.twi" caption="LUFA TWI Master Driver">

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.peripheral.twi#avr8" caption="LUFA TWI Master Driver - AVR8">

+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_TWI"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+

+				<build type="c-source" value="Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/TWI_AVR8.c"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/TWI_AVR8.h"/>

+				<build type="include-path" value=".."/>

+				<build type="header-file" subtype="api" value="Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.peripheral.twi#xmega" caption="LUFA TWI Master Driver - XMEGA">

+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_TWI"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+

+				<build type="c-source" value="Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/TWI_XMEGA.c"/>

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Peripheral/XMEGA/TWI_XMEGA.h"/>

+				<build type="include-path" value=".."/>

+				<build type="header-file" subtype="api" value="Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.peripheral.twi#uc3" caption="LUFA TWI Master Driver - UC3">

+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_TWI"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+

+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>

+			</module>

+		</select-by-device>

+

+		<select-by-device id="lufa.drivers.peripheral.adc" caption="LUFA ADC Driver">

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.peripheral.adc#avr8" caption="LUFA ADC Driver - AVR8">

+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_ADC"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+

+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/Peripheral/AVR8/ADC_AVR8.h"/>

+				<build type="include-path" value=".."/>

+				<build type="header-file" subtype="api" value="Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.peripheral.adc#xmega" caption="LUFA ADC Driver - XMEGA">

+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_ADC"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+

+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.peripheral.adc#uc3" caption="LUFA ADC Driver - UC3">

+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_ADC"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+

+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>

+			</module>

+		</select-by-device>

+	</asf>

+</lufa>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7ff4b3949
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+<!--

+             LUFA Library

+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.

+

+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

+           www.lufa-lib.org

+-->

+

+<!-- Atmel Studio framework integration file -->

+

+<lufa>

+	<asf>

+		<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.usb" caption="LUFA USB Driver">

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+			<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USB"/>

+

+			<build type="define" name="USE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER" value=""/>

+			<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="CodeTemplates"/>

+			<build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+			<build type="include-path" value=".."/>

+			<build type="header-file" subtype="api" value="Drivers/USB/USB.h"/>

+

+			<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+			<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb.class"/>

+			<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb.core"/>

+		</module>

+	</asf>

+</lufa>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_class.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_class.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cd18bf10e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_class.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+<!--

+             LUFA Library

+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.

+

+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

+           www.lufa-lib.org

+-->

+

+<!-- Atmel Studio framework integration file -->

+

+<lufa>

+	<asf>

+		<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class" caption="LUFA USB Class Drivers">

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+			<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>

+			<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassDrivers"/>

+

+			<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb.class.android"/>

+			<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb.class.audio"/>

+			<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb.class.cdc"/>

+			<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb.class.hid"/>

+			<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb.class.ms"/>

+			<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb.class.midi"/>

+			<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb.class.printer"/>

+			<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb.class.rndis"/>

+			<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb.class.si"/>

+		</module>

+	</asf>

+</lufa>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_class_android.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_class_android.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..345171257
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_class_android.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+<!--
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+-->
+
+<!-- Atmel Studio framework integration file -->
+
+<lufa>
+	<asf>
+		<select-by-config id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.android" name="lufa.drivers.usb.class.android.mode" default="host" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - Android Accessory">
+			<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassAOA"/>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.android#host" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - Android Accessory (Host)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions and Host mode implementation of the Android Open Accessory USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassAOA"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/AndroidAccessoryClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/AndroidAccessoryClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AndroidAccessoryClassHost.h"/>
+				<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AndroidAccessoryClassHost.c"/>
+			</module>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.android#definitions_only" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - Android Accessory (Definitions Only)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions only (no implementations) of the Android Open Accessory USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassAOA"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/AndroidAccessoryClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/AndroidAccessoryClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AndroidAccessoryClassHost.h"/>
+			</module>
+		</select-by-config>
+	</asf>
+</lufa>
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_class_audio.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_class_audio.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5f7c3ad4d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_class_audio.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
+<!--
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+-->
+
+<!-- Atmel Studio framework integration file -->
+
+<!--
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+-->
+
+<!-- Atmel Studio framework integration file -->
+
+<lufa>
+	<asf>
+		<select-by-config id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.audio" name="lufa.drivers.usb.class.audio.mode" default="host_device" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - Audio 1.0">
+			<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassAudio"/>
+
+			<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.audio#host_device" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - Audio 1.0 (Host/Device)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions and Host/Device mode implementations of the Audio 1.0 USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassAudio"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/AudioClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/AudioClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/AudioClassDevice.h"/>
+				<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/AudioClassDevice.c"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AudioClassHost.h"/>
+				<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AudioClassHost.c"/>
+			</module>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.audio#host" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - Audio 1.0 (Host)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions and Host mode implementation of the Audio 1.0 USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassAudio"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/AudioClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/AudioClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/AudioClassDevice.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AudioClassHost.h"/>
+				<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AudioClassHost.c"/>
+			</module>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.audio#device" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - Audio 1.0 (Device)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions and Device mode implementation of the Audio 1.0 USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassAudio"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/AudioClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/AudioClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/AudioClassDevice.h"/>
+				<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/AudioClassDevice.c"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AudioClassHost.h"/>
+			</module>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.audio#definitions_only" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - Audio 1.0 (Definitions Only)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions only (no implementations) of the Audio 1.0 USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassAudio"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/AudioClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/AudioClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/AudioClassDevice.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/AudioClassHost.h"/>
+			</module>
+		</select-by-config>
+	</asf>
+</lufa>
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_class_cdc.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_class_cdc.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..65d8cc98f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_class_cdc.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+<!--
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+-->
+
+<!-- Atmel Studio framework integration file -->
+
+<lufa>
+	<asf>
+		<select-by-config id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.cdc" name="lufa.drivers.usb.class.cdc.mode" default="host_device" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - CDC">
+			<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassCDC"/>
+
+			<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.cdc#host_device" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - CDC (Host/Device)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions and Host/Device mode implementations of the CDC USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassCDC"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/CDCClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/CDCClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDCClassDevice.h"/>
+				<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDCClassDevice.c"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDCClassHost.h"/>
+				<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDCClassHost.c"/>
+			</module>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.cdc#host" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - CDC (Host)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions and Host mode implementation of the CDC USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassCDC"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/CDCClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/CDCClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDCClassDevice.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDCClassHost.h"/>
+				<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDCClassHost.c"/>
+			</module>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.cdc#device" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - CDC (Device)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions and Device mode implementation of the CDC USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassCDC"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/CDCClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/CDCClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDCClassDevice.h"/>
+				<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDCClassDevice.c"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDCClassHost.h"/>
+			</module>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.cdc#definitions_only" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - CDC (Definitions Only)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions only (no implementations) of the CDC USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassCDC"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/CDCClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/CDCClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/CDCClassDevice.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/CDCClassHost.h"/>
+			</module>
+		</select-by-config>
+	</asf>
+</lufa>
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_class_hid.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_class_hid.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3d533fb53
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_class_hid.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+<!--
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+-->
+
+<!-- Atmel Studio framework integration file -->
+
+<lufa>
+	<asf>
+		<select-by-config id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.hid" name="lufa.drivers.usb.class.hid.mode" default="host_device" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - HID">
+			<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassHID"/>
+
+			<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.hid#host_device" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - HID (Host/Device)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions and Host/Device mode implementations of the HID USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassHID"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/HIDClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HIDClassDevice.h"/>
+				<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HIDClassDevice.c"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDClassHost.h"/>
+				<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDClassHost.c"/>
+			</module>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.hid#host" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - HID (Host)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions and Host mode implementation of the HID USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassHID"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/HIDClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HIDClassDevice.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDClassHost.h"/>
+				<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDClassHost.c"/>
+			</module>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.hid#device" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - HID (Device)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions and Device mode implementation of the HID USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassHID"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/HIDClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HIDClassDevice.h"/>
+				<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HIDClassDevice.c"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDClassHost.h"/>
+			</module>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.hid#definitions_only" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - HID (Definitions Only)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions only (no implementations) of the HID USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassHID"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/HIDClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/HIDClassDevice.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDClassHost.h"/>
+			</module>
+		</select-by-config>
+	</asf>
+</lufa>
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_class_midi.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_class_midi.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3ddab0bbd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_class_midi.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+<!--
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+-->
+
+<!-- Atmel Studio framework integration file -->
+
+<lufa>
+	<asf>
+		<select-by-config id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.midi" name="lufa.drivers.usb.class.midi.mode" default="host_device" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - MIDI">
+			<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassMIDI"/>
+
+			<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.midi#host_device" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - MIDI (Host/Device)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions and Host/Device mode implementations of the MIDI USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassMIDI"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/MIDIClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/MIDIClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDIClassDevice.h"/>
+				<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDIClassDevice.c"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDIClassHost.h"/>
+				<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDIClassHost.c"/>
+			</module>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.midi#host" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - MIDI (Host)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions and Host mode implementation of the MIDI USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassMIDI"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/MIDIClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/MIDIClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDIClassDevice.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDIClassHost.h"/>
+				<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDIClassHost.c"/>
+			</module>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.midi#device" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - MIDI (Device)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions and Device mode implementation of the MIDI USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassMIDI"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/MIDIClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/MIDIClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDIClassDevice.h"/>
+				<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDIClassDevice.c"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDIClassHost.h"/>
+			</module>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.midi#definitions_only" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - MIDI (Definitions Only)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions only (no implementations) of the MIDI USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassMIDI"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/MIDIClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/MIDIClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MIDIClassDevice.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MIDIClassHost.h"/>
+			</module>
+		</select-by-config>
+	</asf>
+</lufa>
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_class_ms.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_class_ms.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..283b85ca7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_class_ms.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+<!--
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+-->
+
+<!-- Atmel Studio framework integration file -->
+
+<lufa>
+	<asf>
+		<select-by-config id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.ms" name="lufa.drivers.usb.class.ms.mode" default="host_device" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - Mass Storage">
+			<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassMS"/>
+
+			<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.ms#host_device" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - Mass Storage (Host/Device)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions and Host/Device mode implementations of the Mass Storage USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassMS"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorageClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/MassStorageClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorageClassDevice.h"/>
+				<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorageClassDevice.c"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorageClassHost.h"/>
+				<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorageClassHost.c"/>
+			</module>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.ms#host" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - Mass Storage (Host)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions and Host mode implementation of the Mass Storage USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassMS"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorageClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/MassStorageClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorageClassDevice.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorageClassHost.h"/>
+				<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorageClassHost.c"/>
+			</module>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.ms#device" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - Mass Storage (Device)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions and Device mode implementation of the Mass Storage USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassMS"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorageClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/MassStorageClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorageClassDevice.h"/>
+				<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorageClassDevice.c"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorageClassHost.h"/>
+			</module>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.ms#definitions_only" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - Mass Storage (Definitions Only)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions only (no implementations) of the Mass Storage USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassMS"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/MassStorageClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/MassStorageClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/MassStorageClassDevice.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/MassStorageClassHost.h"/>
+			</module>
+		</select-by-config>
+	</asf>
+</lufa>
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_class_printer.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_class_printer.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2465035ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_class_printer.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+<!--
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+-->
+
+<!-- Atmel Studio framework integration file -->
+
+<lufa>
+	<asf>
+		<select-by-config id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.printer" name="lufa.drivers.usb.class.printer.mode" default="host_device" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - Printer">
+			<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassPrinter"/>
+
+			<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.printer#host_device" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - Printer (Host/Device)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions and Host/Device mode implementations of the Printer USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassPrinter"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/PrinterClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/PrinterClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/PrinterClassDevice.h"/>
+				<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/PrinterClassDevice.c"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/PrinterClassHost.h"/>
+				<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/PrinterClassHost.c"/>
+			</module>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.printer#host" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - Printer (Host)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions and Host mode implementation of the Printer USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassPrinter"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/PrinterClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/PrinterClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/PrinterClassDevice.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/PrinterClassHost.h"/>
+				<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/PrinterClassHost.c"/>
+			</module>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.printer#device" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - Printer (Device)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions and Device mode implementation of the Printer USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassPrinter"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/PrinterClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/PrinterClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/PrinterClassDevice.h"/>
+				<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/PrinterClassDevice.c"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/PrinterClassHost.h"/>
+			</module>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.printer#definitions_only" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - Printer (Definitions Only)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions only (no implementations) of the Printer USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassPrinter"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/PrinterClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/PrinterClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/PrinterClassDevice.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/PrinterClassHost.h"/>
+			</module>
+		</select-by-config>
+	</asf>
+</lufa>
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_class_rndis.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_class_rndis.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6a606679d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_class_rndis.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+<!--
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+-->
+
+<!-- Atmel Studio framework integration file -->
+
+<lufa>
+	<asf>
+		<select-by-config id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.rndis" name="lufa.drivers.usb.class.rndis.mode" default="host_device" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - RNDIS Ethernet">
+			<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassRNDIS"/>
+
+			<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.rndis#host_device" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - RNDIS Ethernet (Host/Device)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions and Host/Device mode implementations of the RNDIS Ethernet USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassRNDIS"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/RNDISClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/RNDISClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDISClassDevice.h"/>
+				<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDISClassDevice.c"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDISClassHost.h"/>
+				<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDISClassHost.c"/>
+			</module>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.rndis#host" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - RNDIS Ethernet (Host)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions and Host mode implementation of the RNDIS Ethernet USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassRNDIS"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/RNDISClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/RNDISClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDISClassDevice.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDISClassHost.h"/>
+				<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDISClassHost.c"/>
+			</module>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.rndis#device" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - RNDIS Ethernet (Device)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions and Device mode implementation of the RNDIS Ethernet USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassRNDIS"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/RNDISClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/RNDISClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDISClassDevice.h"/>
+				<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDISClassDevice.c"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDISClassHost.h"/>
+			</module>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.rndis#definitions_only" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - RNDIS Ethernet (Definitions Only)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions only (no implementations) of the RNDIS Ethernet USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassRNDIS"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/RNDISClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/RNDISClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDISClassDevice.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/RNDISClassHost.h"/>
+			</module>
+		</select-by-config>
+	</asf>
+</lufa>
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_class_si.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_class_si.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c1bf8d560
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_class_si.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+<!--
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+-->
+
+<!-- Atmel Studio framework integration file -->
+
+<lufa>
+	<asf>
+		<select-by-config id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.si" name="lufa.drivers.usb.class.si.mode" default="host" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - Still Image">
+			<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassSI"/>
+
+			<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.si#host" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - Still Image (Host)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions and Host mode implementation of the Still Image USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassSI"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/StillImageClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/StillImageClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImageClassHost.h"/>
+				<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImageClassHost.c"/>
+			</module>
+
+			<module type="service" id="lufa.drivers.usb.class.si#definitions_only" caption="LUFA USB Class Driver - Still Image (Definitions Only)">
+				<info type="description" value="summary">
+					Common definitions only (no implementations) of the Still Image USB class.
+				</info>
+
+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBClassSI"/>
+
+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/StillImageClass.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/StillImageClassCommon.h"/>
+				<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Host/StillImageClassHost.h"/>
+			</module>
+		</select-by-config>
+	</asf>
+</lufa>
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_core.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_core.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..58f8917ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_core.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+<!--

+             LUFA Library

+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.

+

+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

+           www.lufa-lib.org

+-->

+

+<!-- Atmel Studio framework integration file -->

+

+<lufa>

+	<asf>

+		<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.usb.core.common" caption="LUFA USB Core Driver - Common">

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+			<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBManagement"/>

+

+			<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>

+

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/Device.h"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/Endpoint.h"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/Host.h"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/Pipe.h"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/OTG.h"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/USBController.h"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/USBInterrupt.h"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/EndpointStream.h"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/PipeStream.h"/>

+	        <build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/ConfigDescriptors.c"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/ConfigDescriptors.h"/>

+	        <build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/DeviceStandardReq.c"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/DeviceStandardReq.h"/>

+	        <build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/Events.c"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/Events.h"/>

+	        <build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/HostStandardReq.c"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/HostStandardReq.h"/>

+	        <build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/USBTask.c"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/USBTask.h"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/USBMode.h"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/StdDescriptors.h"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/StdRequestType.h"/>

+

+	        <build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDParser.c"/>

+	        <build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDParser.h"/>

+	        <build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Class/Common/HIDReportData.h"/>

+	    </module>

+

+		<select-by-device id="lufa.drivers.usb.core" caption="LUFA USB Core Driver">

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.usb.core#avr8" caption="LUFA USB Core Driver - AVR8">

+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+

+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>

+

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBManagement_AVR8"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb.core.common"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb.core.avr8"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.usb.core#xmega" caption="LUFA USB Core Driver - XMEGA">

+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+

+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>

+

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBManagement_XMEGA"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb.core.common"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb.core.xmega"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.usb.core#uc3" caption="LUFA USB Core Driver - UC3">

+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>

+

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBManagement_UC3"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb.core.common"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb.core.uc3"/>

+			</module>

+		</select-by-device>

+	</asf>

+</lufa>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_core_avr8.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_core_avr8.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..166b9257a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_core_avr8.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+<!--

+             LUFA Library

+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.

+

+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

+           www.lufa-lib.org

+-->

+

+<!-- Atmel Studio framework integration file -->

+

+<lufa>

+	<asf>

+		<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.usb.core.avr8" caption="LUFA USB Core Driver for AVR8">

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+

+			<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>

+

+			<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBManagement_AVR8"/>

+

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"/>

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"/>

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"/>

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"/>

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Device_AVR8.c"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Device_AVR8.h"/>

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Endpoint_AVR8.c"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Endpoint_AVR8.h"/>

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Host_AVR8.c"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Host_AVR8.h"/>

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Pipe_AVR8.c"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/Pipe_AVR8.h"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/OTG_AVR8.h"/>

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/USBController_AVR8.c"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/USBController_AVR8.h"/>

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/USBInterrupt_AVR8.c"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/USBInterrupt_AVR8.h"/>

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/EndpointStream_AVR8.c"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/EndpointStream_AVR8.h"/>

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/PipeStream_AVR8.c"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/AVR8/PipeStream_AVR8.h"/>

+		</module>

+	</asf>

+</lufa>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_core_uc3.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_core_uc3.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7e0540cda
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_core_uc3.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+<!--

+             LUFA Library

+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.

+

+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

+           www.lufa-lib.org

+-->

+

+<!-- Atmel Studio framework integration file -->

+

+<lufa>

+	<asf>

+		<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.usb.core.uc3" caption="LUFA USB Core Driver for UC3">

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+			<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>

+

+			<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBManagement_UC3"/>

+

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"/>

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"/>

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"/>

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Template/Template_Pipe_RW.c"/>

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Device_UC3.c"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Device_UC3.h"/>

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Endpoint_UC3.c"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Endpoint_UC3.h"/>

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Host_UC3.c"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Host_UC3.h"/>

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Pipe_UC3.c"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/Pipe_UC3.h"/>

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBController_UC3.c"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBController_UC3.h"/>

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBInterrupt_UC3.c"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/USBInterrupt_UC3.h"/>

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/EndpointStream_UC3.c"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/EndpointStream_UC3.h"/>

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/PipeStream_UC3.c"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/UC3/PipeStream_UC3.h"/>

+		</module>

+	</asf>

+</lufa>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_core_xmega.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_core_xmega.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9e9f4f6a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_drivers_usb_core_xmega.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+<!--

+             LUFA Library

+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.

+

+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

+           www.lufa-lib.org

+-->

+

+<!-- Atmel Studio framework integration file -->

+

+<lufa>

+	<asf>

+		<module type="driver" id="lufa.drivers.usb.core.xmega" caption="LUFA USB Core Driver for XMEGA">

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+

+			<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>

+

+			<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_USBManagement_XMEGA"/>

+

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_R.c"/>

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_Control_W.c"/>

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Template/Template_Endpoint_RW.c"/>

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Device_XMEGA.c"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Device_XMEGA.h"/>

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Endpoint_XMEGA.c"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Endpoint_XMEGA.h"/>

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/Pipe_XMEGA.c"/>

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBController_XMEGA.c"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBController_XMEGA.h"/>

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBInterrupt_XMEGA.c"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/USBInterrupt_XMEGA.h"/>

+			<build type="c-source"    value="Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/EndpointStream_XMEGA.c"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Drivers/USB/Core/XMEGA/EndpointStream_XMEGA.h"/>

+		</module>

+	</asf>

+</lufa>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_platform.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_platform.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..02c7463ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_platform.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+<!--

+             LUFA Library

+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.

+

+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

+           www.lufa-lib.org

+-->

+

+<!-- Atmel Studio framework integration file -->

+

+<lufa>

+	<asf>

+		<select-by-device id="lufa.platform" caption="LUFA Platform Specific Support">

+			<module type="service" id="lufa.platform#avr8" caption="LUFA Platform Specific Support - AVR8">

+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+

+				<build type="define" name="ARCH" value="ARCH_AVR8"/>

+

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_PlatformDrivers"/>

+

+				<build type="include-path" value=".."/>

+				<build type="header-file" subtype="api" value="Platform/Platform.h"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="service" id="lufa.platform#xmega" caption="LUFA Platform Specific Support - XMEGA">

+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+

+				<build type="define" name="ARCH" value="ARCH_XMEGA"/>

+

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_PlatformDrivers"/>

+

+				<build type="include-path" value=".."/>

+				<build type="header-file" subtype="api" value="Platform/Platform.h"/>

+

+				<build type="distribute" value="Platform/XMEGA/XMEGAExperimentalInfo.txt" subtype="license"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.platform.xmega"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+			</module>

+

+			<module type="service" id="lufa.platform#uc3" caption="LUFA Platform Specific Support - UC3">

+				<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+				<build type="define" name="ARCH" value="ARCH_UC3"/>

+

+				<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_PlatformDrivers"/>

+

+				<build type="include-path" value=".."/>

+				<build type="header-file" subtype="api" value="Platform/Platform.h"/>

+

+				<build type="distribute" value="Platform/UC3/UC3ExperimentalInfo.txt" subtype="license"/>

+

+				<require idref="lufa.platform.uc3"/>

+				<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+			</module>

+		</select-by-device>

+	</asf>

+</lufa>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_platform_uc3.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_platform_uc3.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a488c4b83
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_platform_uc3.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+<!--

+             LUFA Library

+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.

+

+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

+           www.lufa-lib.org

+-->

+

+<!-- Atmel Studio framework integration file -->

+

+<lufa>

+	<asf>

+		<module type="driver" id="lufa.platform.uc3" caption="LUFA UC3 Platform Drivers">

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+			<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>

+

+			<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_PlatformDrivers_UC3"/>

+

+			<build type="header-file" value="Platform/UC3/ClockManagement.h"/>

+			<build type="header-file" value="Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.h"/>

+			<build type="c-source" value="Platform/UC3/InterruptManagement.c"/>

+			<build type="asm-source" value="Platform/UC3/Exception.S"/>

+		</module>

+	</asf>

+</lufa>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_platform_xmega.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_platform_xmega.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1674a77b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_platform_xmega.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+<!--

+             LUFA Library

+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.

+

+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

+           www.lufa-lib.org

+-->

+

+<!-- Atmel Studio framework integration file -->

+

+<lufa>

+	<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+		<module type="driver" id="lufa.platform.xmega" caption="LUFA XMEGA Platform Drivers">

+			<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+

+			<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>

+

+			<build type="doxygen-entry-point" value="Group_PlatformDrivers_XMEGA"/>

+

+			<build type="header-file" value="Platform/XMEGA/ClockManagement.h"/>

+		</module>

+	</asf>

+</lufa>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_toolchain.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_toolchain.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..031c8a2be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/lufa_toolchain.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+<!--

+             LUFA Library

+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.

+

+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

+           www.lufa-lib.org

+-->

+

+<!-- Atmel Studio framework integration file -->

+

+<lufa>

+	<asf>

+		<select-by-device id="common.utils.toolchain_config" caption="Toolchain configuration defaults">

+			<module type="build-specific" id="common.utils.toolchain_config#avr" caption="Toolchain configuration defaults for 8-bit AVR">

+				<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>

+				<device-support value="avr"/>

+

+				<toolchain-config name="avrgcc.compiler.general.ChangeDefaultBitFieldUnsigned" value="True" toolchain="avrgcc"/>

+				<toolchain-config name="avrgcc.compiler.general.ChangeDefaultCharTypeUnsigned" value="True" toolchain="avrgcc"/>

+				<toolchain-config name="avrgcc.compiler.optimization.OtherFlags" value="-fdata-sections" toolchain="avrgcc"/>

+				<toolchain-config name="avrgcc.compiler.optimization.PrepareFunctionsForGarbageCollection" value="True" toolchain="avrgcc"/>

+				<toolchain-config name="avrgcc.compiler.warnings.AllWarnings" value="True" toolchain="avrgcc"/>

+				<toolchain-config name="avrgcc.compiler.miscellaneous.OtherFlags" value="-mrelax -std=gnu99 -fno-strict-aliasing -fno-jump-tables" toolchain="avrgcc"/>

+				<toolchain-config name="avrgcc.linker.optimization.GarbageCollectUnusedSections" value="True" toolchain="avrgcc"/>

+				<toolchain-config name="avrgcc.linker.optimization.RelaxBranches" value="True" toolchain="avrgcc"/>

+			</module>

+		</select-by-device>

+

+		<module type="build-specific" id="common.utils.toolchain_config#uc3" caption="Toolchain configuration defaults for 32-bit AVR">

+			<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>

+			<device-support value="uc3"/>

+

+			<toolchain-config name="avrgcc.compiler.general.ChangeDefaultBitFieldUnsigned" value="True" toolchain="avr32gcc"/>

+			<toolchain-config name="avrgcc.compiler.general.ChangeDefaultCharTypeUnsigned" value="True" toolchain="avr32gcc"/>

+			<toolchain-config name="avr32gcc.compiler.optimization.OtherFlags" value="-fdata-sections" toolchain="avr32gcc"/>

+			<toolchain-config name="avr32gcc.compiler.optimization.PrepareFunctionsForGarbageCollection" value="True" toolchain="avr32gcc"/>

+			<toolchain-config name="avr32gcc.compiler.warnings.AllWarnings" value="True" toolchain="avr32gcc"/>

+			<toolchain-config name="avr32gcc.compiler.miscellaneous.OtherFlags" value="-mrelax -std=gnu99 -fno-strict-aliasing -mno-cond-exec-before-reload" toolchain="avr32gcc"/>

+			<toolchain-config name="avr32gcc.linker.optimization.GarbageCollectUnusedSections" value="True" toolchain="avr32gcc"/>

+			<toolchain-config name="avr32gcc.linker.optimization.RelaxBranches" value="True" toolchain="avr32gcc"/>

+		</module>

+	</asf>

+</lufa>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2649598d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/StudioIntegration/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,140 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2013.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# ---------------------------------------
+#  Makefile for the LUFA Atmel Studio Integration.
+# ---------------------------------------
+
+LUFA_ROOT            := ..
+LUFA_VERSION_NUM     := $(shell grep LUFA_VERSION_STRING $(LUFA_ROOT)/Version.h | cut -d'"' -f2)
+
+ifneq ($(LUFA_VERSION_NUM),000000)
+  EXT_VERSION_NUM    := $(shell date +"%y.%m.%d").$(LUFA_VERSION_NUM)
+  EXT_VSIX_NAME      := LUFA-RELEASE-$(LUFA_VERSION_NUM).vsix
+else
+  EXT_VERSION_NUM    := 0.$(shell date +"%y%m%d.%H%M%S")
+  EXT_VSIX_NAME      := LUFA-TESTING-$(shell date +"%y.%m.%d-%H.%M.%S").vsix
+
+  $(warning No LUFA version set - assuming a test version should be created.)
+endif
+
+DOXYGEN_TAG_FILE_XML := $(LUFA_ROOT)/Documentation/lufa_doc_tags.xml
+DOXYGEN_COMBINED_XML := $(LUFA_ROOT)/Documentation/xml/lufa_doc.xml
+TEMP_MANIFEST_XML    := manifest.xml
+EXTENSION_OUTPUT_XML := $(LUFA_ROOT)/../extension.xml
+MODULE_OUTPUT_XML    := $(LUFA_ROOT)/asf.xml
+MSHELP_OUTPUT_XML    := $(LUFA_ROOT)/../lufa_help_$(EXT_VERSION_NUM).mshc
+XML_FILES            := $(filter-out $(TEMP_MANIFEST_FILE), $(shell ls *.xml))
+VSIX_ASSETS          := $(LUFA_ROOT)/DoxygenPages/Images/LUFA_thumb.png     \
+                        $(LUFA_ROOT)/DoxygenPages/Images/LUFA.png           \
+                        $(LUFA_ROOT)/License.txt                            \
+                        VSIX/"[Content_Types].xml"                          \
+                        VSIX/LUFA.dll                                       \
+                        VSIX/LUFA.pkgdef
+VSIX_GEN_PARAMS     := --stringparam extension-version "$(EXT_VERSION_NUM)" \
+                       --stringparam lufa-version "$(LUFA_VERSION_NUM)"
+MSHELP_GEN_PARAMS   := --stringparam generate.toc "book toc"                \
+                       --stringparam chunk.quietly "1"                      \
+                       --stringparam chunk.section.depth "3"                \
+                       --stringparam chunk.first.sections "1"               \
+                       --stringparam chapter.autolabel "0"                  \
+                       --stringparam root.filename "LUFA"                   \
+                       --stringparam html.stylesheet "lufa_studio_help_styling.css"
+
+all: clear_project_dirs generate_xml check_filenames generate_vsix
+
+clear_project_dirs:
+	@make -s -C $(LUFA_ROOT)/.. clean
+
+clean:
+	@rm -f $(TEMP_MANIFEST_XML) $(MODULE_OUTPUT_XML) $(EXTENSION_OUTPUT_XML) $(DOXYGEN_TAG_FILE_XML) $(DOXYGEN_COMBINED_XML) $(MSHELP_OUTPUT_XML)
+	@rm -rf mshelp
+	@cd $(LUFA_ROOT)/.. && rm -f contents.zip exampleProjects.xml content.xml.cache extension.vsixmanifest asf-manifest.xml extension.xml helpcontentsetup.msha $(notdir $(VSIX_ASSETS)) *.vsix *.mshc
+
+$(DOXYGEN_TAG_FILE_XML):
+	@$(MAKE) -C ../ doxygen DOXYGEN_OVERRIDE_PARAMS="GENERATE_TAGFILE=Documentation/lufa_doc_tags.xml GENERATE_HTML=no GENERATE_XML=yes"
+
+$(DOXYGEN_COMBINED_XML): $(DOXYGEN_TAG_FILE_XML)
+	@xsltproc $(dir $@)/combine.xslt $(dir $@)/index.xml > $(DOXYGEN_COMBINED_XML)
+
+$(TEMP_MANIFEST_XML): $(DOXYGEN_TAG_FILE_XML) $(DOXYGEN_COMBINED_XML)
+	@echo Generating temporary module manifest XML...
+
+	@printf "<lufa-manifest version=\"%s\" tagfile=\"%s\" docfile=\"%s\">\n" $(LUFA_VERSION_NUM) $(DOXYGEN_TAG_FILE_XML) $(DOXYGEN_COMBINED_XML) > $@
+	@for i in $(XML_FILES); do \
+		printf "\t<xml-source filename=\"%s\"/>\n" $$i >> $@; \
+	done;
+	@echo '</lufa-manifest>' >> $@
+
+$(MODULE_OUTPUT_XML): $(TEMP_MANIFEST_XML)
+	@echo Generating library core XDK module manifest file...
+	@xsltproc XDK/lufa_module_transform.xslt $< | xsltproc XDK/lufa_indent_transform.xslt - > $(MODULE_OUTPUT_XML)
+
+$(EXTENSION_OUTPUT_XML): $(TEMP_MANIFEST_XML)
+	@echo Generating library XDK extension manifest file...
+	@xsltproc XDK/lufa_extension_transform.xslt $< | xsltproc XDK/lufa_indent_transform.xslt - > $(EXTENSION_OUTPUT_XML)
+
+$(MSHELP_OUTPUT_XML): $(DOXYGEN_COMBINED_XML)
+	@echo Converting Doxygen XML to DocBook...
+	@-mkdir mshelp 2> /dev/null
+	@xsltproc HV1/lufa_docbook_transform.xslt $(DOXYGEN_COMBINED_XML) > mshelp/lufa_docbook.xml
+
+	@echo Converting DocBook XML to Microsoft Help 1.0...
+	@cd mshelp && xsltproc $(MSHELP_GEN_PARAMS) ../HV1/lufa_hv1_transform.xslt lufa_docbook.xml
+
+	@echo Copying help assets...
+	@cp HV1/lufa_studio_help_styling.css mshelp
+	@-mkdir mshelp/images 2> /dev/null
+	@cp `find $(LUFA_ROOT)/DoxygenPages/Images -type f` mshelp/images
+
+	@echo Archiving help content...
+	@cd mshelp && zip ../$(MSHELP_OUTPUT_XML) -q -0  -r *.html *.css images
+
+	@echo Generating HV1 manifest...
+	@xsltproc $(VSIX_GEN_PARAMS) HV1/lufa_helpcontentsetup_transform.xslt HV1/helpcontentsetup.msha > $(LUFA_ROOT)/../helpcontentsetup.msha
+
+generate_help: $(MSHELP_OUTPUT_XML)
+
+generate_xml: $(EXTENSION_OUTPUT_XML) $(MODULE_OUTPUT_XML)
+
+generate_vsix: $(EXTENSION_OUTPUT_XML) $(MODULE_OUTPUT_XML) $(MSHELP_OUTPUT_XML)
+	@echo Generating XDK cache files...
+	@rm -f $(LUFA_ROOT)/../content.xml.cache
+	@rm -f $(LUFA_ROOT)/../ExampleProjects.xml
+	@python VSIX/generate_caches.py $(LUFA_ROOT)/../
+
+	@echo Archiving XDK content...
+	@rm -f contents.zip
+	@cd $(LUFA_ROOT)/../ && zip contents.zip -q -0 -r --exclude=*Documentation* --exclude=*StudioIntegration* LUFA Bootloaders Demos Projects README.txt
+
+	@echo Creating VSIX dependencies...
+	@cp $(VSIX_ASSETS) $(LUFA_ROOT)/..
+	@xsltproc $(VSIX_GEN_PARAMS) VSIX/lufa_vsmanifest_transform.xslt VSIX/extension.vsixmanifest > $(LUFA_ROOT)/../extension.vsixmanifest
+	@xsltproc $(VSIX_GEN_PARAMS) VSIX/lufa_asfmanifest_transform.xslt VSIX/asf-manifest.xml > $(LUFA_ROOT)/../asf-manifest.xml
+
+	@echo Generating Atmel Studio VSIX file...
+	cd $(LUFA_ROOT)/../ && zip $(EXT_VSIX_NAME) -q -9 contents.zip exampleProjects.xml content.xml.cache extension.vsixmanifest asf-manifest.xml extension.xml helpcontentsetup.msha $(notdir $(MSHELP_OUTPUT_XML)) $(notdir $(VSIX_ASSETS))
+
+	@echo "Atmel Studio VSIX extension file generated."
+
+check_filenames: $(MODULE_OUTPUT_XML)
+	@echo Verifying referenced filenames of XDK modules...
+	@for f in `find $(LUFA_ROOT)/../ -name "asf.xml"`; do \
+		echo "Checking $$f..."; \
+		asf_file_dir=`dirname $$f`; \
+		xsltproc XDK/lufa_filelist_transform.xslt $$f | sed -e "/^$$/d" | while read -r i; do \
+			if ( ( ! test -f "$$asf_file_dir/$$i" ) && ( ! test -d "$$asf_file_dir/$$i" ) ); then \
+				echo "Source file \"$$i\" referenced in $$f does not exist!"; \
+				exit 1; \
+			fi; \
+		done || exit 1; \
+	done;
+
+check_database:
+	python ProjectGenerator/project_generator.py -b $(LUFA_ROOT)/../ --main-ext-uuid=0e160d5c-e331-48d9-850b-e0387912171b CHECK
+
+.PHONY: all clean generate_help generate_xml generate_vsix check_filenames check_database
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Version.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Version.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..264c941a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/Version.h
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  \brief LUFA library version constants.
+ *
+ *  Version constants for informational purposes and version-specific macro creation. This header file contains the
+ *  current LUFA version number in several forms, for use in the user-application (for example, for printing out
+ *  whilst debugging, or for testing for version compatibility).
+ */
+
+#ifndef __LUFA_VERSION_H__
+#define __LUFA_VERSION_H__
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Indicates the version number of the library, as an integer. */
+			#define LUFA_VERSION_INTEGER     0x140928
+
+			/** Indicates the version number of the library, as a string. */
+			#define LUFA_VERSION_STRING      "140928"
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..77e8def61
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2368 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 000000
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           = ./DoxygenPages/Images/LUFA_thumb.png
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = NO
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = NO
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = NO
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = YES
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 1
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/ \
+                         StudioIntegration/ \
+                         License.txt
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = _* \
+                         __*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           = ./ \
+                         CodeTemplates/
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             = ./
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            = ./DoxygenPages/Style/Footer.htm
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  = ./DoxygenPages/Style/Style.css
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 120
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = com.lufa-lib.library.documentation
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = DeanCamera
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               = ../LUFA.chm
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 300
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://www.mathjax.org/mathjax
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = YES
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM \
+                         EEMEM \
+                         ATTR_PACKED
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = YES
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = YES
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = YES
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = YES
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..88449a936
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/LUFA/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# ---------------------------------------
+#  Makefile for the LUFA library itself.
+# ---------------------------------------
+
+LUFA_VERSION_NUM         = $(shell grep LUFA_VERSION_STRING $(LUFA_PATH)/Version.h | cut -d'"' -f2)
+EXCLUDE_FROM_EXPORT     := Documentation DoxygenPages CodeTemplates Build StudioIntegration doxyfile *.tar *.o *.d *.lss *.lst *.hex *.elf *.hex *.eep *.map *.bin
+
+# Default target - no default action when attempting to build the core directly
+all:
+
+# Export the library core as a TAR archive for importing into an IDE
+export_tar:
+	@echo Exporting LUFA library to a TAR archive...
+	@tar -cf LUFA_$(LUFA_VERSION_NUM).tar --directory=. $(EXCLUDE_FROM_EXPORT:%=--exclude=%) *
+	@tar -cf LUFA_$(LUFA_VERSION_NUM)_Code_Templates.tar CodeTemplates
+	@echo Export LUFA_$(LUFA_VERSION_NUM).tar complete.
+
+# Display the LUFA version of this library copy
+version:
+	@echo "LUFA $(LUFA_VERSION_NUM)"
+
+# Check if this is being included from a legacy or non LUFA build system makefile
+ifneq ($(LUFA_PATH),)
+  LUFA_ROOT_PATH = $(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_PATH))/LUFA/
+
+  include $(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_PATH))/LUFA/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+else
+  LUFA_BUILD_MODULES     += MASTER
+  LUFA_BUILD_TARGETS     += export_tar version
+
+  LUFA_PATH               = .
+  ARCH                    = {AVR8,UC3,XMEGA}
+  DOXYGEN_OVERRIDE_PARAMS = QUIET=YES PROJECT_NUMBER=$(LUFA_VERSION_NUM)
+
+  # Remove all object and associated files from the LUFA library core
+  clean:
+	rm -f $(LUFA_SRC_ALL_FILES:%.c=%.o)
+	rm -f $(LUFA_SRC_ALL_FILES:%.c=%.d)
+	rm -f $(LUFA_SRC_ALL_FILES:%.c=%.lst)
+
+  include Build/lufa_core.mk
+  include Build/lufa_sources.mk
+  include Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+endif
+
+.PHONY: all export_tar version clean
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Maintenance/lufa_functionlist_transform.xslt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Maintenance/lufa_functionlist_transform.xslt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..671f30f4a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Maintenance/lufa_functionlist_transform.xslt
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+<!--
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+-->
+
+<!-- Extracts out all function signatures from a combined Doxygen XML output. -->
+
+<xsl:stylesheet xmlns:xsl="http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform" version="1.0">
+	<xsl:output method="xml" omit-xml-declaration="yes"/>
+
+	<xsl:template match="doxygen">
+		<xsl:for-each select="//memberdef[@kind = 'function']">
+			<xsl:value-of select="definition"/><xsl:value-of select="argsstring"/><xsl:text>;&#10;</xsl:text>
+		</xsl:for-each>
+	</xsl:template>
+</xsl:stylesheet>
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Maintenance/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Maintenance/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c0938f8de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Maintenance/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+
+# Maintenance scripts not required by general LUFA users, used for project development purposes.
+
+
+# Path to the root of the LUFA tree
+LUFA_ROOT := ../
+
+all:
+
+# Print a list of all filenames and line numbers that exceed an allowed threshold
+line-lengths:
+	awk '{ if (length > 120) { print FILENAME, ":", FNR, "[", length, "]" } }' `find $(LUFA_ROOT) -name *.[ch]`
+
+# Generate a header containing all library functions
+function-list:
+	$(MAKE) -C $(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_ROOT))/LUFA doxygen DOXYGEN_OVERRIDE_PARAMS="GENERATE_HTML=no GENERATE_XML=yes"
+	@xsltproc $(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_ROOT))/LUFA/Documentation/xml/combine.xslt $(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_ROOT))/LUFA/Documentation/xml/index.xml > temp.xml
+	@xsltproc lufa_functionlist_transform.xslt temp.xml > function_list.h
+	@sort function_list.h | uniq > function_list_unique.h
+	@rm temp.xml
+
+# Update all Doxygen configuration files to the latest Doxygen version
+upgrade-doxygen:
+	@echo Upgrading Doxygen files...
+	@for doxygen_conf in `find $(LUFA_ROOT) -name doxyfile`; do \
+	  doxygen -u $$doxygen_conf;                                \
+	done;
+	@echo Doxygen configuration update complete.
+
+# Make all possible bootloaders for all targets and configurations as set by the BootloaderTest build test
+# and store them in a separate directory called "Bootloaders"
+bootloaders:
+	@echo "build_bootloaders:" > BuildMakefile
+	@printf "\t-mkdir Bootloaders 2>/dev/null\n\n" >> BuildMakefile
+
+	@while read line;                                         \
+	 do                                                       \
+	   build_cfg=`echo $$line | grep -v "#" | sed 's/ //g'`;  \
+	                                                          \
+	   if ( test -n "$$build_cfg" ); then                     \
+	     build_bootloader=`echo $$build_cfg | cut -d'=' -f1`; \
+		 build_cfg=`echo $$build_cfg | cut -d'=' -f2-`;       \
+		                                                      \
+	     build_arch=`echo $$build_cfg | cut -d':' -f1`;       \
+	     build_mcu=`echo $$build_cfg | cut -d':' -f2`;        \
+	     build_board=`echo $$build_cfg | cut -d':' -f3`;      \
+	     build_flashsize=`echo $$build_cfg | cut -d':' -f4`;  \
+	     build_bootsize=`echo $$build_cfg | cut -d':' -f5`;   \
+	     build_fusb=`echo $$build_cfg | cut -d':' -f6`;       \
+	                                                          \
+	     printf "Found '%s' with FLASH: %3s KB, BOOT: %3s KB, MCU: %12s / %4s, BOARD: %s, F_USB: %sMHz\n" $$build_bootloader $$build_flashsize $$build_bootsize $$build_mcu $$build_arch $$build_board $$build_fusb; \
+	                                                          \
+	     printf "\t-mkdir Bootloaders/%s 2>/dev/null\n" $$build_bootloader >> BuildMakefile; \
+	     printf "\t@echo Building '%s' with FLASH: %3s KB, BOOT: %3s KB, MCU: %12s, BOARD: %s, F_USB: %sMHz\n" $$build_bootloader $$build_flashsize $$build_bootsize $$build_mcu $$build_board $$build_fusb >> BuildMakefile; \
+	     printf "\t$(MAKE) -C $(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_ROOT))/Bootloaders/%s/ clean hex ARCH=%s MCU=%s BOARD=%s FLASH_SIZE_KB=%s BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB=%s F_USB=%s000000 DEBUG_LEVEL=0\n" $$build_bootloader $$build_arch $$build_mcu $$build_board $$build_flashsize $$build_bootsize $$build_fusb >> BuildMakefile; \
+		 printf "\tmv $(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_ROOT))/Bootloaders/%s/Bootloader%s.hex Bootloaders/%s/%s-%s-%s-BOARD_%s-BOOT_%sKB-%sMHz.hex\n\n" $$build_bootloader $$build_bootloader $$build_bootloader $$build_bootloader $$build_arch $$build_mcu $$build_board $$build_bootsize $$build_fusb >> BuildMakefile; \
+	   fi;                                                    \
+	 done < $(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_ROOT))/BuildTests/BootloaderTest/BootloaderDeviceMap.cfg
+
+	 $(MAKE) -f BuildMakefile build_bootloaders
+	 cp $(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_ROOT))/LUFA/License.txt Bootloaders
+	 rm -f BuildMakefile
+
+# Check the working branch documentation, ensure no placeholder values
+check-documentation-placeholders:
+	@echo Checking for release suitability...
+	@if ( grep "XXXXXX" $(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_ROOT))/LUFA/DoxygenPages/*.txt > /dev/null ;); then \
+	  echo "  ERROR: Doxygen documentation has not been updated for release!";    \
+	  exit 1;                                                                     \
+	fi;
+	@if ( grep "000000" $(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_ROOT))/LUFA/Version.h > /dev/null ;); then          \
+	  echo "  ERROR: Version header has not been updated for release!";           \
+	  exit 1;                                                                     \
+	fi;
+	@echo Done.
+
+# Validate the working branch - compile all documentation, demos/projects/examples and run build tests
+validate-branch:
+	$(MAKE) -C $(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_ROOT)) doxygen
+	$(MAKE) -C $(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_ROOT)) all DEBUG_LEVEL=0
+	$(MAKE) -C $(patsubst %/,%,$(LUFA_ROOT))/BuildTests all
+
+# Validate the working branch for general release, check for placeholder documentation then build and test everything
+validate-release: check-documentation-placeholders validate-branch
+
+
+.PHONY: all upgrade-doxygen bootloaders check-documentation-placeholders validate-branch
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP-MKII.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP-MKII.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9cff5b421
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP-MKII.c
@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the AVRISP project. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "AVRISP-MKII.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+	V2Protocol_Init();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		#if (BOARD == BOARD_USBTINYMKII)
+		/* On the USBTINY-MKII target, there is a secondary LED which indicates the current selected power
+		   mode - either VBUS, or sourced from the VTARGET pin of the programming connectors */
+		LEDs_ChangeLEDs(LEDMASK_VBUSPOWER, (PIND & (1 << 0)) ? 0 : LEDMASK_VBUSPOWER);
+		#endif
+
+		AVRISP_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	#if defined(RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT)
+	UpdateCurrentCompatibilityMode();
+	#endif
+
+	/* USB Stack Initialization */
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	/* Setup AVRISP Data OUT endpoint */
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK, AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE, 1);
+
+	/* Setup AVRISP Data IN endpoint if it is using a physically different endpoint */
+	if ((AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK) != (AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPADDR & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK))
+	  ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK, AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE, 1);
+
+	/* Indicate endpoint configuration success or failure */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Processes incoming V2 Protocol commands from the host, returning a response when required. */
+void AVRISP_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	V2Params_UpdateParamValues();
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPADDR);
+
+	/* Check to see if a V2 Protocol command has been received */
+	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_BUSY);
+
+		/* Pass off processing of the V2 Protocol command to the V2 Protocol handler */
+		V2Protocol_ProcessCommand();
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	}
+}
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  wValue                 Descriptor type and index to retrieve
+ *  \param[in]  wIndex                 Sub-index to retrieve (such as a localized string language)
+ *  \param[out] DescriptorAddress      Address of the retrieved descriptor
+ *  \param[out] DescriptorMemorySpace  Memory space that the descriptor is stored in
+ *
+ *  \return Length of the retrieved descriptor in bytes, or NO_DESCRIPTOR if the descriptor was not found
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress,
+                                    uint8_t* DescriptorMemorySpace)
+{
+	return AVRISP_GetDescriptor(wValue, wIndex, DescriptorAddress, DescriptorMemorySpace);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP-MKII.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP-MKII.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..70f86f41c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP-MKII.h
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for AVRISP.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _AVRISP_H_
+#define _AVRISP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+		#if defined(ADC)
+			#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h>
+		#endif
+
+		#include "AVRISPDescriptors.h"
+		#include "Lib/V2Protocol.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY         LEDS_LED2
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR         LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_BUSY             (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the target is being powered by VBUS. */
+		#define LEDMASK_VBUSPOWER         LEDS_LED3
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void AVRISP_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress,
+		                                    uint8_t* const DescriptorMemorySpace)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(4);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP-MKII.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP-MKII.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..71ef387a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP-MKII.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,385 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage AVRISP MKII Programmer Project
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2) - <i>8KB versions with reduced features only</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Device</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Vendor Specific Class</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *   <td>N/A</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Atmel AVRISP MKII Protocol Specification</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description
+ *
+ *  Firmware for an Atmel Studio/AVR Studio compatible AVRISP-MKII clone programmer. This project will enable the USB
+ *  AVR series of microcontrollers to act as a clone of the official Atmel AVRISP-MKII programmer, usable within
+ *  Atmel Studio/AVR Studio or with any software capable of driving a real Atmel AVRISP-MKII programmer. In its most
+ *  basic form, it allows for the programming of AVR TINY, MEGA and XMEGA devices aat the programmer's VCC voltage from
+ *  within Atmel Studio/AVR Studio with no special hardware other than the USB AVR and the parts needed for the USB
+ *  interface. If the user desires, more advanced circuits incorporating level conversion can be made to allow for the
+ *  programming of target AVRs running at a different voltage to the programmer.
+ *
+ *  This device spoofs Atmel's official AVRISP-MKII device PID so that it remains compatible with Atmel's AVRISP-MKII
+ *  drivers. When prompted, direct your OS to install Atmel's AVRISP-MKII drivers provided with Atmel Studio/AVR Studio.
+ *
+ *  Note that this design currently has the following limitations:
+ *    - No reversed/shorted target connector detection and notification
+ *    - A separate header is required for each of the ISP, PDI and TPI programming protocols that the user wishes to use
+ *
+ *  On AVR models with an ADC converter, the USB AVR's AVCC pin should be tied to 5V (e.g. VBUS) and the
+ *  \c VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL token should be set to an appropriate ADC channel number in the project makefile for VTARGET
+ *  detection to operate correctly. On models without an ADC converter, VTARGET will report a fixed 3.3V level at all times
+ *  which should allow the programmer to remain compatible at the protocol level with all AVR devices.
+ *
+ *  While this application can be compiled for USB AVRs with as little as 8KB of FLASH, for full functionality 16KB or more
+ *  of FLASH is required. On 8KB devices, ISP or PDI/TPI protocol programming support can be disabled to reduce program size.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_KnownIssues Known Issues:
+ *
+ *  \par Incompatible with newer AVRDUDE releases.
+ *  Due to <a href="http://savannah.nongnu.org/bugs/index.php?40831">a change in 6.0.1 and never AVRDUDE releases</a>,
+ *  these builds are incompatible with the AVRISP-MKII clone project. Use an older 5.x release until AVRDUDE is patched.
+ *
+ *  \par XMEGA EEPROM programming fails in some cases.
+ *  Several users have reported that XMEGA EEPROM programming fails unless the chip is erased first. If a non-blank EEPROM
+ *  is present, writing further EEPROM data causes corruption.
+ *  <a href="https://github.com/abcminiuser/lufa/issues/25">LUFA issue tracker entry</a>.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Installation Installation
+ *  The programmer supports multiple platforms, both Windows and Linux.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_LinuxInstallation Linux Installation
+ *  On Linux systems, the programmer should be usable out of the box with no special setup other than (on some systems)
+ *  editing of the system permissions to allow the programmer to be used from a non-elevated (root) context. The programmer
+ *  is compatible with the free open source AVRDude programming software project.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_WindowsInstallation Windows Installation
+ *  On Windows systems, due to an unfortunate limitation of the USB AVR devices and the driver used in the official AVR
+ *  Studio/Atmel Studio platform, the programmer cannot be made compatible with AVRDude and AVR Studio/Atmel Studio at the
+ *  same time. Instead, the programmer will be compatible with the official Atmel software by default, with a recompilation
+ *  with the \c LIBUSB_DRIVER_COMPAT token (see \ref Sec_Options) being required to use the alternative libUSB driver
+ *  compatibility mode that will allow the programmer to work under AVRDude on Windows.
+ *
+ *  If compiled for Atmel Studio/AVR Studio compatibility, install the Jungo device drivers that ship with the Atmel software.
+ *  If compiled in the alternative libUSB compatibility mode for AVRDude use, install the libUSB drivers that are included
+ *  with your compiled copy of AVRDude, or create them using the libUSB-Win32 (http://sourceforge.net/projects/libusb-win32)
+ *  project.
+ *
+ *  For convenience, the programmer will report two different serial numbers depending on the firmware compatibility mode, so
+ *  that the correct driver can be installed for the matching firmware. If the \c RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT compile option
+ *  is used (see \ref Sec_Options) this allows for an easy way to automatically switch device drivers along with the firmware
+ *  compatibility mode. The serials are:
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Serial Number:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Compatibility Mode:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>000200012345</td>
+ *    <td>Jungo (Atmel Studio) Compatibility</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>000200112345</td>
+ *    <td>libUSB Compatibility</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_ISP ISP Connections
+ *  Connections to the device for SPI programming (when enabled):
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Programmer Pin:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Target Device Pin:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>ISP 6 Pin Layout:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MISO</td>
+ *    <td>PDO</td>
+ *    <td>1</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>ADCx <b><sup>1</sup></b></td>
+ *    <td>VTARGET</td>
+ *    <td>2</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>SCLK</td>
+ *    <td>SCLK</td>
+ *    <td>3</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MOSI</td>
+ *    <td>PDI</td>
+ *    <td>4</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>PORTx.y <b><sup>2</sup></b></td>
+ *    <td>/RESET</td>
+ *    <td>5</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>GND</td>
+ *    <td>GND</td>
+ *    <td>6</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  In addition, the AVR's OCR1A pin will generate a 4MHz clock, to act as an external rescue device clock if the
+ *  fuses have been mis-set. To use the recovery clock, connect the OCR1A pin of the USB AVR to the target AVR's
+ *  XTAL1 pin, and set the ISP programming speed to 125KHz (note: other ISP speeds will not work correctly).
+ *
+ *  <b><sup>1</sup></b> <i>Optional, see \ref Sec_Options section - for USB AVRs with ADC modules only</i> \n
+ *  <b><sup>2</sup></b> <i>See AUX line related tokens in the \ref Sec_Options section</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_PDI PDI Connections
+ *  Connections to the device for PDI programming (when enabled):
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Programmer Pin:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Target Device Pin:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>PDI 6 Pin Layout:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Tx/Rx <b><sup>2</sup></b></td>
+ *    <td>DATA</td>
+ *    <td>1</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>ADCx <b><sup>1</sup></b></td>
+ *    <td>VTARGET</td>
+ *    <td>2</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *    <td>3</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *    <td>4</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>XCK</td>
+ *    <td>CLOCK</td>
+ *    <td>5</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>GND</td>
+ *    <td>GND</td>
+ *    <td>6</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  <b><sup>1</sup></b> <i>Optional, see \ref Sec_Options section - for USB AVRs with ADC modules only</i> \n
+ *  <b><sup>2</sup></b> <i>The AVR's Tx and Rx become the DATA line when connected together via a pair of 220 ohm resistors</i> \n
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_TPI TPI Connections
+ *  Connections to the device for TPI programming (when enabled):
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Programmer Pin:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Target Device Pin:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>TPI 6 Pin Layout:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Tx/Rx <b><sup>2</sup></b></td>
+ *    <td>DATA</td>
+ *    <td>1</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>ADCx <b><sup>1</sup></b></td>
+ *    <td>VTARGET</td>
+ *    <td>2</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>XCK <b><sup>2</sup></b></td>
+ *    <td>CLOCK</td>
+ *    <td>3</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *    <td>4</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>PORTx.y <b><sup>3</sup></b></td>
+ *    <td>/RESET</td>
+ *    <td>5</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>GND</td>
+ *    <td>GND</td>
+ *    <td>6</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  <b><sup>1</sup></b> <i>Optional, see \ref Sec_Options section - for USB AVRs with ADC modules only</i> \n
+ *  <b><sup>2</sup></b> <i>The AVR's Tx and Rx become the DATA line when connected together via a pair of 220 ohm resistors</i> \n
+ *  <b><sup>3</sup></b> <i>See AUX line related tokens in the \ref Sec_Options section</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AUX_LINE_PORT</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>PORT register for the programmer's AUX target line. The use of this line varies between the programming protocols,
+ *        but is generally used for the target's /RESET line.
+ *        \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for the XPLAIN board.</i></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AUX_LINE_PIN</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>PIN register for the programmer's AUX target line. The use of this line varies between the programming protocols,
+ *        but is generally used for the target's /RESET line.
+ *        \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for the XPLAIN board.</i></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AUX_LINE_DDR</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>DDR register for the programmer's AUX target line. The use of this line varies between the programming protocols,
+ *        but is generally used for the target's /RESET line.
+ *        \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for the XPLAIN board.</i></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AUX_LINE_MASK</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Mask for the programmer's AUX target line. The use of this line varies between the programming protocols,
+ *        but is generally used for the target's /RESET line. <b>Must not be the AVR's /SS pin</b>.
+ *        \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for the XPLAIN board.</i></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>ADC channel number (on supported AVRs) to use for VTARGET level detection, if NO_VTARGET_DETECT is not defined.
+ *        \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for targets lacking an ADC.</i></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Define to enable SPI programming protocol support.
+ *        \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for the XPLAIN board.</i></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Define to enable PDI and TPI programming protocol support.
+ *        \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for the XPLAIN board.</i></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_VTARGET_DETECT</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Define to disable VTARGET sampling and reporting on AVR models with an ADC converter. This will cause the programmer
+ *        to report a fixed 3.3V target voltage to the host regardless of the real target voltage.
+ *        \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for targets lacking an ADC.</i></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>VTARGET_REF_VOLTS</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Indicates the programmer AVR's AVCC reference voltage when measuring the target's supply voltage. Note that the supply
+ *        voltage should never exceed the reference voltage on the programmer AVR without some form of protection to prevent damage
+ *        to the ADC.
+ *        \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for targets lacking an ADC, or when NO_VTARGET_DETECT is defined.</i></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>VTARGET_USE_INTERNAL_REF</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Selects the internal 2.56V ADC reference voltage, instead of using the AVR's VREF pin. When enabled, this option will
+ *        override the VTARGET_REF_VOLTS configuration option.
+ *        \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for targets lacking an ADC, or when NO_VTARGET_DETECT is defined.</i></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>VTARGET_SCALE_FACTOR</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Indicates the target's supply voltage scale factor when applied to the ADC. A simple resistive divider can be used on the
+ *        ADC pin for measuring the target's supply voltage, so that voltages above the programmer AVR's AVCC reference voltage can be
+ *        measured. This should be the reciprocal of the division performed - e.g. if the VTARGET voltage is halved, this should be set
+ *        to 2.
+ *        \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for targets lacking an ADC, or when NO_VTARGET_DETECT is defined.</i></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>LIBUSB_DRIVER_COMPAT</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Define to switch to a non-standard endpoint scheme, breaking compatibility with Atmel Studio/AVR Studio under Windows but
+ *        making the code compatible with software such as avrdude (all platforms) that use the libUSB driver.
+ *
+ *        \note This option is incompatible with \c RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Define to make the /RESET line of the AVR toggle between Jungo and libUSB driver compatibility modes. Each time the AVR is
+ *        reset externally via the reset pin, the compatibility mode will be toggled. The compatibility mode is preserved between
+ *        power cycles and is not toggled via other forms of reset such as Watchdog or Brown Out.
+ *
+ *        When this option is enabled, all board LEDs will flash twice on startup for Jungo compatibility mode, and five times for
+ *        libUSB compatibility mode.
+ *
+ *        \note This option is incompatible with \c LIBUSB_DRIVER_COMPAT.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>XCK_RESCUE_CLOCK_ENABLE</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Define to move the ISP rescue clock to the AVR's XCK pin instead of the OCR1A output pin. This is useful for existing programming
+ *        hardware that does not expose the OCR1A pin of the AVR, but <i>may</i> cause some issues with PDI programming mode.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>INVERTED_ISP_MISO</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Define to invert the received data on the ISP MISO line. This is sometimes needed depending on the level translation hardware used,
+ *        if the translator hardware inverts the received logic level.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>FIRMWARE_VERSION_MINOR</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Define to set the minor firmware revision nunber reported to the host on request. By default this will use a firmware version compatible
+ *        with the latest Atmel IDE version, however if desired the reported minor value can be adjusted here.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISPDescriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISPDescriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a098e7020
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISPDescriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,302 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "AVRISPDescriptors.h"
+
+#if defined(RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+	/** Indicates if an external reset has occurred and the compatibility mode needs to be altered */
+	static bool AVRISP_NeedCompatibilitySwitch ATTR_NO_INIT;
+
+	/** Current AVRISP data IN endpoint address. */
+	uint8_t AVRISP_CurrDataINEndpointAddress;
+
+	/** Saved AVRISP data IN endpoint address in EEPROM. */
+	uint8_t AVRISP_CurrDataINEndpointAddress_EEPROM EEMEM;
+#endif
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM AVRISP_DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_VendorSpecificClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2104,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(2,0,0),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = AVRISP_STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = AVRISP_STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = AVRISP_STRING_ID_Serial,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+AVRISP_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t AVRISP_ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(AVRISP_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.AVRISP_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_AVRISP,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = USB_CSCP_VendorSpecificClass,
+			.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.AVRISP_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+#if defined(RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT)
+			.EndpointAddress        = 0,
+#else
+			.EndpointAddress        = AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR,
+#endif
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
+		},
+
+	.AVRISP_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
+		},
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM AVRISP_LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM AVRISP_ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"ATMEL");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM AVRISP_ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"AVRISP mkII");
+
+/** Serial number string. This is a Unicode string containing the device's unique serial number, expressed as a
+ *  series of uppercase hexadecimal digits.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t AVRISP_SerialString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"000200012345\0"
+    // Note: Real AVRISP-MKII has the embedded NUL byte, bug in firmware?
+);
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t AVRISP_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                              const uint8_t wIndex,
+                              const void** const DescriptorAddress,
+                              uint8_t* DescriptorMemorySpace)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	*DescriptorMemorySpace = MEMSPACE_FLASH;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &AVRISP_DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			*DescriptorMemorySpace = MEMSPACE_RAM;
+			#if defined(RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT)
+				/* Update the configuration descriptor with the current endpoint address */
+				AVRISP_ConfigurationDescriptor.AVRISP_DataInEndpoint.EndpointAddress = AVRISP_CurrDataINEndpointAddress;
+			#endif
+
+			Address = &AVRISP_ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(AVRISP_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case AVRISP_STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &AVRISP_LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&AVRISP_LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case AVRISP_STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &AVRISP_ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&AVRISP_ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case AVRISP_STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &AVRISP_ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&AVRISP_ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case AVRISP_STRING_ID_Serial:
+					Address = &AVRISP_SerialString;
+					Size    = AVRISP_SerialString.Header.Size;
+
+					/* Update serial number to have a different serial based on the current endpoint address */
+					((uint16_t*)&AVRISP_SerialString.UnicodeString)[6] = cpu_to_le16('0' + (AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK));
+
+					*DescriptorMemorySpace = MEMSPACE_RAM;
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
+#if defined(RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+/** Checks the state of the system status register MCUSR and indicates via a flag if
+ *  the current AVRISP driver compatibility mode needs to be reset.
+ *
+ *  When the \c RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT compile time option is enabled, pulling
+ *  the reset line of the AVR low will toggle between Jungo and libUSB compatibility
+ *  modes. Other forms of reset (such as power on or watchdog) will not force a mode
+ *  change.
+ */
+void CheckExternalReset(void)
+{
+	/* If an external reset occurred, we need to change compatibility mode */
+	AVRISP_NeedCompatibilitySwitch = (MCUSR == (1 << EXTRF));
+
+	MCUSR = 0;
+}
+
+/** Updates the device descriptors so that the correct compatibility mode is used
+ *  when the \c RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT compile time option is enabled. This
+ *  configures the programmer for either Jungo or libUSB driver compatibility. Each
+ *  time the AVR is reset via pulling the reset line low the compatibility mode will
+ *  be toggled. The current mode is stored in EEPROM and preserved through power
+ *  cycles of the AVR.
+ */
+void UpdateCurrentCompatibilityMode(void)
+{
+	/* Load the current IN endpoint address stored in EEPROM */
+	AVRISP_CurrDataINEndpointAddress = eeprom_read_byte(&AVRISP_CurrDataINEndpointAddress_EEPROM);
+
+	/* Check if we need to switch compatibility modes */
+	if (AVRISP_NeedCompatibilitySwitch)
+	{
+		/* Toggle between compatibility modes */
+		AVRISP_CurrDataINEndpointAddress = (AVRISP_CurrDataINEndpointAddress == AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR_LIBUSB) ?
+				AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR_JUNGO : AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR_LIBUSB;
+
+		/* Save the new mode into EEPROM */
+		eeprom_update_byte(&AVRISP_CurrDataINEndpointAddress_EEPROM, AVRISP_CurrDataINEndpointAddress);
+	}
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_NO_LEDS);
+
+	/* Validate IN endpoint address and indicate current mode via LED flashes */
+	switch (AVRISP_CurrDataINEndpointAddress)
+	{
+		default:
+			/* Default to Jungo compatibility mode if saved EEPROM is invalid */
+			AVRISP_CurrDataINEndpointAddress = AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR_JUNGO;
+		case AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR_JUNGO:
+			/* Two flashes for Jungo compatibility mode */
+			for (uint8_t i = 0; i < 4; i++)
+			{
+				LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+				Delay_MS(100);
+			}
+			break;
+		case AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR_LIBUSB:
+			/* Five flashes for libUSB compatibility mode */
+			for (uint8_t i = 0; i < 10; i++)
+			{
+				LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+				Delay_MS(100);
+			}
+			break;
+	}
+
+	Delay_MS(500);
+}
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISPDescriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISPDescriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..40d711387
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISPDescriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if defined(LIBUSB_DRIVER_COMPAT) && defined(RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT)
+			#error LIBUSB_DRIVER_COMPAT and RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT are mutually exclusive.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the AVRISP data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPADDR         (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 2)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the AVRISP data IN endpoint, when in Jungo driver compatibility mode. */
+		#define AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR_JUNGO    (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 2)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the AVRISP data IN endpoint, when in LibUSB driver compatibility mode. */
+		#define AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR_LIBUSB   (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		#if defined(RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT)
+			#define AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR      AVRISP_CurrDataINEndpointAddress
+		#elif defined(LIBUSB_DRIVER_COMPAT)
+			#define AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR      AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR_LIBUSB
+		#else
+			/** Endpoint address of the AVRISP data IN endpoint. */
+			#define AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR      AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR_JUNGO
+		#endif
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the AVRISP data endpoint. */
+		#define AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE             64
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+
+			// Atmel AVRISP-MKII Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               AVRISP_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                AVRISP_DataInEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                AVRISP_DataOutEndpoint;
+		} AVRISP_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_AVRISP = 0, /**< AVRISP interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum AVRISP_StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			AVRISP_STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			AVRISP_STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			AVRISP_STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+			AVRISP_STRING_ID_Serial       = 3, /**< Serial number string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		#if defined(RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT)
+			extern uint8_t AVRISP_CurrDataINEndpointAddress;
+		#endif
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t AVRISP_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                              const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                              const void** const DescriptorAddress,
+		                              uint8_t* const DescriptorMemorySpace)
+		                              ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(4);
+
+		#if defined(RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT)
+		void CheckExternalReset(void) ATTR_NAKED ATTR_INIT_SECTION(3);
+		void UpdateCurrentCompatibilityMode(void);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..979b354c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
+ *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
+ *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
+ *  makefile or build system.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#define AUX_LINE_PORT              PORTB
+	#define AUX_LINE_PIN               PINB
+	#define AUX_LINE_DDR               DDRB
+	#if (BOARD == BOARD_U2S)
+		#define AUX_LINE_MASK          (1 << 0)
+	#else
+		#define AUX_LINE_MASK          (1 << 4)
+	#endif
+
+	#define ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
+	#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
+
+	#define VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL        2
+	#define VTARGET_REF_VOLTS          5
+	#define VTARGET_SCALE_FACTOR       1
+//	#define VTARGET_USE_INTERNAL_REF
+//	#define NO_VTARGET_DETECT
+//	#define XCK_RESCUE_CLOCK_ENABLE
+//	#define INVERTED_ISP_MISO
+
+	#define LIBUSB_DRIVER_COMPAT
+//	#define RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT
+//	#define FIRMWARE_VERSION_MINOR     0x11
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9c1715ced
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      16
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..60552564e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.c
@@ -0,0 +1,531 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  ISP Protocol handler, to process V2 Protocol wrapped ISP commands used in Atmel programmer devices.
+ */
+
+#include "ISPProtocol.h"
+
+#if defined(ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE_ISP command, which attempts to enter programming mode on
+ *  the attached device, returning success or failure back to the host.
+ */
+void ISPProtocol_EnterISPMode(void)
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t TimeoutMS;
+		uint8_t PinStabDelayMS;
+		uint8_t ExecutionDelayMS;
+		uint8_t SynchLoops;
+		uint8_t ByteDelay;
+		uint8_t PollValue;
+		uint8_t PollIndex;
+		uint8_t EnterProgBytes[4];
+	} Enter_ISP_Params;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Enter_ISP_Params, sizeof(Enter_ISP_Params), NULL);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	uint8_t ResponseStatus = STATUS_CMD_FAILED;
+
+	CurrentAddress = 0;
+
+	/* Perform execution delay, initialize SPI bus */
+	ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Enter_ISP_Params.ExecutionDelayMS);
+	ISPTarget_EnableTargetISP();
+
+	ISPTarget_ChangeTargetResetLine(true);
+	ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Enter_ISP_Params.PinStabDelayMS);
+
+	/* Continuously attempt to synchronize with the target until either the number of attempts specified
+	 * by the host has exceeded, or the the device sends back the expected response values */
+	while (Enter_ISP_Params.SynchLoops-- && TimeoutTicksRemaining)
+	{
+		uint8_t ResponseBytes[4];
+
+		for (uint8_t RByte = 0; RByte < sizeof(ResponseBytes); RByte++)
+		{
+			ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Enter_ISP_Params.ByteDelay);
+			ResponseBytes[RByte] = ISPTarget_TransferByte(Enter_ISP_Params.EnterProgBytes[RByte]);
+		}
+
+		/* Check if polling disabled, or if the polled value matches the expected value */
+		if (!(Enter_ISP_Params.PollIndex) || (ResponseBytes[Enter_ISP_Params.PollIndex - 1] == Enter_ISP_Params.PollValue))
+		{
+			ResponseStatus = STATUS_CMD_OK;
+			break;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			ISPTarget_ChangeTargetResetLine(false);
+			ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Enter_ISP_Params.PinStabDelayMS);
+			ISPTarget_ChangeTargetResetLine(true);
+			ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Enter_ISP_Params.PinStabDelayMS);
+		}
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE_ISP);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(ResponseStatus);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_LEAVE_ISP command, which releases the target from programming mode. */
+void ISPProtocol_LeaveISPMode(void)
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t PreDelayMS;
+		uint8_t PostDelayMS;
+	} Leave_ISP_Params;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Leave_ISP_Params, sizeof(Leave_ISP_Params), NULL);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	/* Perform pre-exit delay, release the target /RESET, disable the SPI bus and perform the post-exit delay */
+	ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Leave_ISP_Params.PreDelayMS);
+	ISPTarget_ChangeTargetResetLine(false);
+	ISPTarget_DisableTargetISP();
+	ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Leave_ISP_Params.PostDelayMS);
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_LEAVE_PROGMODE_ISP);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP and CMD_PROGRAM_EEPROM_ISP commands, writing out bytes,
+ *  words or pages of data to the attached device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] V2Command  Issued V2 Protocol command byte from the host
+ */
+void ISPProtocol_ProgramMemory(uint8_t V2Command)
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint16_t BytesToWrite;
+		uint8_t  ProgrammingMode;
+		uint8_t  DelayMS;
+		uint8_t  ProgrammingCommands[3];
+		uint8_t  PollValue1;
+		uint8_t  PollValue2;
+		uint8_t  ProgData[256]; // Note, the Jungo driver has a very short ACK timeout period, need to buffer the
+	} Write_Memory_Params;      // whole page and ACK the packet as fast as possible to prevent it from aborting
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Write_Memory_Params, (sizeof(Write_Memory_Params) -
+	                                               sizeof(Write_Memory_Params.ProgData)), NULL);
+	Write_Memory_Params.BytesToWrite = SwapEndian_16(Write_Memory_Params.BytesToWrite);
+
+	if (Write_Memory_Params.BytesToWrite > sizeof(Write_Memory_Params.ProgData))
+	{
+		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+		Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+		Endpoint_Write_8(V2Command);
+		Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_FAILED);
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+		return;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Write_Memory_Params.ProgData, Write_Memory_Params.BytesToWrite, NULL);
+
+	// The driver will terminate transfers that are a round multiple of the endpoint bank in size with a ZLP, need
+	// to catch this and discard it before continuing on with packet processing to prevent communication issues
+	if (((sizeof(uint8_t) + sizeof(Write_Memory_Params) - sizeof(Write_Memory_Params.ProgData)) +
+	    Write_Memory_Params.BytesToWrite) % AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE == 0)
+	{
+		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+		Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	uint8_t  ProgrammingStatus = STATUS_CMD_OK;
+	uint8_t  PollValue         = (V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP) ? Write_Memory_Params.PollValue1 :
+	                                                                    Write_Memory_Params.PollValue2;
+	uint16_t PollAddress       = 0;
+	uint8_t* NextWriteByte     = Write_Memory_Params.ProgData;
+	uint16_t PageStartAddress  = (CurrentAddress & 0xFFFF);
+
+	for (uint16_t CurrentByte = 0; CurrentByte < Write_Memory_Params.BytesToWrite; CurrentByte++)
+	{
+		uint8_t ByteToWrite     = *(NextWriteByte++);
+		uint8_t ProgrammingMode = Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingMode;
+
+		/* Check to see if we need to send a LOAD EXTENDED ADDRESS command to the target */
+		if (MustLoadExtendedAddress)
+		{
+			ISPTarget_LoadExtendedAddress();
+			MustLoadExtendedAddress = false;
+		}
+
+		ISPTarget_SendByte(Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[0]);
+		ISPTarget_SendByte(CurrentAddress >> 8);
+		ISPTarget_SendByte(CurrentAddress & 0xFF);
+		ISPTarget_SendByte(ByteToWrite);
+
+		/* AVR FLASH addressing requires us to modify the write command based on if we are writing a high
+		 * or low byte at the current word address */
+		if (V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP)
+		  Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[0] ^= READ_WRITE_HIGH_BYTE_MASK;
+
+		/* Check to see if we have a valid polling address */
+		if (!(PollAddress) && (ByteToWrite != PollValue))
+		{
+			if ((CurrentByte & 0x01) && (V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP))
+			  Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[2] |=  READ_WRITE_HIGH_BYTE_MASK;
+			else
+			  Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[2] &= ~READ_WRITE_HIGH_BYTE_MASK;
+
+			PollAddress = (CurrentAddress & 0xFFFF);
+		}
+
+		/* If in word programming mode, commit the byte to the target's memory */
+		if (!(ProgrammingMode & PROG_MODE_PAGED_WRITES_MASK))
+		{
+			/* If the current polling address is invalid, switch to timed delay write completion mode */
+			if (!(PollAddress) && !(ProgrammingMode & PROG_MODE_WORD_READYBUSY_MASK))
+			  ProgrammingMode = (ProgrammingMode & ~PROG_MODE_WORD_VALUE_MASK) | PROG_MODE_WORD_TIMEDELAY_MASK;
+
+			ProgrammingStatus = ISPTarget_WaitForProgComplete(ProgrammingMode, PollAddress, PollValue,
+			                                                  Write_Memory_Params.DelayMS,
+			                                                  Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[2]);
+
+			/* Abort the programming loop early if the byte/word programming failed */
+			if (ProgrammingStatus != STATUS_CMD_OK)
+			  break;
+
+			/* Must reset the polling address afterwards, so it is not erroneously used for the next byte */
+			PollAddress = 0;
+		}
+
+		/* EEPROM just increments the address each byte, flash needs to increment on each word and
+		 * also check to ensure that a LOAD EXTENDED ADDRESS command is issued each time the extended
+		 * address boundary has been crossed during FLASH memory programming */
+		if ((CurrentByte & 0x01) || (V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_EEPROM_ISP))
+		{
+			CurrentAddress++;
+
+			if ((V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP) && !(CurrentAddress & 0xFFFF))
+			  MustLoadExtendedAddress = true;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* If the current page must be committed, send the PROGRAM PAGE command to the target */
+	if (Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingMode & PROG_MODE_COMMIT_PAGE_MASK)
+	{
+		ISPTarget_SendByte(Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[1]);
+		ISPTarget_SendByte(PageStartAddress >> 8);
+		ISPTarget_SendByte(PageStartAddress & 0xFF);
+		ISPTarget_SendByte(0x00);
+
+		/* Check if polling is enabled and possible, if not switch to timed delay mode */
+		if ((Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingMode & PROG_MODE_PAGED_VALUE_MASK) && !(PollAddress))
+		{
+			Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingMode = (Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingMode & ~PROG_MODE_PAGED_VALUE_MASK) |
+												   PROG_MODE_PAGED_TIMEDELAY_MASK;
+		}
+
+		ProgrammingStatus = ISPTarget_WaitForProgComplete(Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingMode, PollAddress, PollValue,
+		                                                  Write_Memory_Params.DelayMS,
+		                                                  Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[2]);
+
+		/* Check to see if the FLASH address has crossed the extended address boundary */
+		if ((V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP) && !(CurrentAddress & 0xFFFF))
+		  MustLoadExtendedAddress = true;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(V2Command);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(ProgrammingStatus);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_READ_FLASH_ISP and CMD_READ_EEPROM_ISP commands, reading in bytes,
+ *  words or pages of data from the attached device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] V2Command  Issued V2 Protocol command byte from the host
+ */
+void ISPProtocol_ReadMemory(uint8_t V2Command)
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint16_t BytesToRead;
+		uint8_t  ReadMemoryCommand;
+	} Read_Memory_Params;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Read_Memory_Params, sizeof(Read_Memory_Params), NULL);
+	Read_Memory_Params.BytesToRead = SwapEndian_16(Read_Memory_Params.BytesToRead);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(V2Command);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+
+	/* Read each byte from the device and write them to the packet for the host */
+	for (uint16_t CurrentByte = 0; CurrentByte < Read_Memory_Params.BytesToRead; CurrentByte++)
+	{
+		/* Check to see if we need to send a LOAD EXTENDED ADDRESS command to the target */
+		if (MustLoadExtendedAddress)
+		{
+			ISPTarget_LoadExtendedAddress();
+			MustLoadExtendedAddress = false;
+		}
+
+		/* Read the next byte from the desired memory space in the device */
+		ISPTarget_SendByte(Read_Memory_Params.ReadMemoryCommand);
+		ISPTarget_SendByte(CurrentAddress >> 8);
+		ISPTarget_SendByte(CurrentAddress & 0xFF);
+		Endpoint_Write_8(ISPTarget_ReceiveByte());
+
+		/* Check if the endpoint bank is currently full, if so send the packet */
+		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		{
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+			Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
+		}
+
+		/* AVR FLASH addressing requires us to modify the read command based on if we are reading a high
+		 * or low byte at the current word address */
+		if (V2Command == CMD_READ_FLASH_ISP)
+		  Read_Memory_Params.ReadMemoryCommand ^= READ_WRITE_HIGH_BYTE_MASK;
+
+		/* EEPROM just increments the address each byte, flash needs to increment on each word and
+		 * also check to ensure that a LOAD EXTENDED ADDRESS command is issued each time the extended
+		 * address boundary has been crossed */
+		if ((CurrentByte & 0x01) || (V2Command == CMD_READ_EEPROM_ISP))
+		{
+			CurrentAddress++;
+
+			if ((V2Command != CMD_READ_EEPROM_ISP) && !(CurrentAddress & 0xFFFF))
+			  MustLoadExtendedAddress = true;
+		}
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+
+	bool IsEndpointFull = !(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed());
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Ensure last packet is a short packet to terminate the transfer */
+	if (IsEndpointFull)
+	{
+		Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+		Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_CHI_ERASE_ISP command, clearing the target's FLASH memory. */
+void ISPProtocol_ChipErase(void)
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t EraseDelayMS;
+		uint8_t PollMethod;
+		uint8_t EraseCommandBytes[4];
+	} Erase_Chip_Params;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Erase_Chip_Params, sizeof(Erase_Chip_Params), NULL);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	uint8_t ResponseStatus = STATUS_CMD_OK;
+
+	/* Send the chip erase commands as given by the host to the device */
+	for (uint8_t SByte = 0; SByte < sizeof(Erase_Chip_Params.EraseCommandBytes); SByte++)
+	  ISPTarget_SendByte(Erase_Chip_Params.EraseCommandBytes[SByte]);
+
+	/* Use appropriate command completion check as given by the host (delay or busy polling) */
+	if (!(Erase_Chip_Params.PollMethod))
+	  ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Erase_Chip_Params.EraseDelayMS);
+	else
+	  ResponseStatus = ISPTarget_WaitWhileTargetBusy();
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_CHIP_ERASE_ISP);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(ResponseStatus);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_READ_FUSE_ISP, CMD_READ_LOCK_ISP, CMD_READ_SIGNATURE_ISP and CMD_READ_OSCCAL commands,
+ *  reading the requested configuration byte from the device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] V2Command  Issued V2 Protocol command byte from the host
+ */
+void ISPProtocol_ReadFuseLockSigOSCCAL(uint8_t V2Command)
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t RetByte;
+		uint8_t ReadCommandBytes[4];
+	} Read_FuseLockSigOSCCAL_Params;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Read_FuseLockSigOSCCAL_Params, sizeof(Read_FuseLockSigOSCCAL_Params), NULL);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	uint8_t ResponseBytes[4];
+
+	/* Send the Fuse or Lock byte read commands as given by the host to the device, store response */
+	for (uint8_t RByte = 0; RByte < sizeof(ResponseBytes); RByte++)
+	  ResponseBytes[RByte] = ISPTarget_TransferByte(Read_FuseLockSigOSCCAL_Params.ReadCommandBytes[RByte]);
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(V2Command);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(ResponseBytes[Read_FuseLockSigOSCCAL_Params.RetByte - 1]);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_WRITE_FUSE_ISP and CMD_WRITE_LOCK_ISP commands, writing the requested configuration
+ *  byte to the device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] V2Command  Issued V2 Protocol command byte from the host
+ */
+void ISPProtocol_WriteFuseLock(uint8_t V2Command)
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t WriteCommandBytes[4];
+	} Write_FuseLockSig_Params;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Write_FuseLockSig_Params, sizeof(Write_FuseLockSig_Params), NULL);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	/* Send the Fuse or Lock byte program commands as given by the host to the device */
+	for (uint8_t SByte = 0; SByte < sizeof(Write_FuseLockSig_Params.WriteCommandBytes); SByte++)
+	  ISPTarget_SendByte(Write_FuseLockSig_Params.WriteCommandBytes[SByte]);
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(V2Command);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_SPI_MULTI command, writing and reading arbitrary SPI data to and from the attached device. */
+void ISPProtocol_SPIMulti(void)
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t TxBytes;
+		uint8_t RxBytes;
+		uint8_t RxStartAddr;
+		uint8_t TxData[255];
+	} SPI_Multi_Params;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&SPI_Multi_Params, (sizeof(SPI_Multi_Params) - sizeof(SPI_Multi_Params.TxData)), NULL);
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&SPI_Multi_Params.TxData, SPI_Multi_Params.TxBytes, NULL);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_SPI_MULTI);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+
+	uint8_t CurrTxPos = 0;
+	uint8_t CurrRxPos = 0;
+
+	/* Write out bytes to transmit until the start of the bytes to receive is met */
+	while (CurrTxPos < SPI_Multi_Params.RxStartAddr)
+	{
+		if (CurrTxPos < SPI_Multi_Params.TxBytes)
+		  ISPTarget_SendByte(SPI_Multi_Params.TxData[CurrTxPos]);
+		else
+		  ISPTarget_SendByte(0);
+
+		CurrTxPos++;
+	}
+
+	/* Transmit remaining bytes with padding as needed, read in response bytes */
+	while (CurrRxPos < SPI_Multi_Params.RxBytes)
+	{
+		if (CurrTxPos < SPI_Multi_Params.TxBytes)
+		  Endpoint_Write_8(ISPTarget_TransferByte(SPI_Multi_Params.TxData[CurrTxPos++]));
+		else
+		  Endpoint_Write_8(ISPTarget_ReceiveByte());
+
+		/* Check to see if we have filled the endpoint bank and need to send the packet */
+		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		{
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+			Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
+		}
+
+		CurrRxPos++;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+
+	bool IsEndpointFull = !(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed());
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Ensure last packet is a short packet to terminate the transfer */
+	if (IsEndpointFull)
+	{
+		Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+		Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Blocking delay for a given number of milliseconds. This provides a simple wrapper around
+ *  the avr-libc provided delay function, so that the delay function can be called with a
+ *  constant value (to prevent run-time floating point operations being required).
+ *
+ *  \param[in] DelayMS  Number of milliseconds to delay for
+ */
+void ISPProtocol_DelayMS(uint8_t DelayMS)
+{
+	while (DelayMS-- && TimeoutTicksRemaining)
+	  Delay_MS(1);
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..29d2bf747
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.h
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ISPProtocol.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ISP_PROTOCOL_
+#define _ISP_PROTOCOL_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <util/delay.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "../V2Protocol.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+			#undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
+
+			#if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
+				#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
+			#endif
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Mask for the reading or writing of the high byte in a FLASH word when issuing a low-level programming command. */
+		#define READ_WRITE_HIGH_BYTE_MASK       (1 << 3)
+
+		#define PROG_MODE_PAGED_WRITES_MASK     (1 << 0)
+		#define PROG_MODE_WORD_TIMEDELAY_MASK   (1 << 1)
+		#define PROG_MODE_WORD_VALUE_MASK       (1 << 2)
+		#define PROG_MODE_WORD_READYBUSY_MASK   (1 << 3)
+		#define PROG_MODE_PAGED_TIMEDELAY_MASK  (1 << 4)
+		#define PROG_MODE_PAGED_VALUE_MASK      (1 << 5)
+		#define PROG_MODE_PAGED_READYBUSY_MASK  (1 << 6)
+		#define PROG_MODE_COMMIT_PAGE_MASK      (1 << 7)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void ISPProtocol_EnterISPMode(void);
+		void ISPProtocol_LeaveISPMode(void);
+		void ISPProtocol_ProgramMemory(const uint8_t V2Command);
+		void ISPProtocol_ReadMemory(const uint8_t V2Command);
+		void ISPProtocol_ChipErase(void);
+		void ISPProtocol_ReadFuseLockSigOSCCAL(const uint8_t V2Command);
+		void ISPProtocol_WriteFuseLock(const uint8_t V2Command);
+		void ISPProtocol_SPIMulti(void);
+		void ISPProtocol_DelayMS(uint8_t DelayMS);
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6cfe01708
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.c
@@ -0,0 +1,370 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Target-related functions for the ISP Protocol decoder.
+ */
+
+#include "ISPTarget.h"
+
+#if defined(ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+
+/** List of hardware SPI prescaler masks for possible AVRStudio ISP programming speeds.
+ *
+ *  \hideinitializer
+ */
+static const uint8_t SPIMaskFromSCKDuration[] PROGMEM =
+{
+#if (F_CPU == 8000000)
+	SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2,    // AVRStudio =   8MHz SPI, Actual =   4MHz SPI
+	SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2,    // AVRStudio =   4MHz SPI, Actual =   4MHz SPI
+	SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_4,    // AVRStudio =   2MHz SPI, Actual =   2MHz SPI
+	SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_8,    // AVRStudio =   1MHz SPI, Actual =   1MHz SPI
+	SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_16,   // AVRStudio = 500KHz SPI, Actual = 500KHz SPI
+	SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_32,   // AVRStudio = 250KHz SPI, Actual = 250KHz SPI
+	SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_64,   // AVRStudio = 125KHz SPI, Actual = 125KHz SPI
+#elif (F_CPU == 16000000)
+	SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2,    // AVRStudio =   8MHz SPI, Actual =   8MHz SPI
+	SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_4,    // AVRStudio =   4MHz SPI, Actual =   4MHz SPI
+	SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_8,    // AVRStudio =   2MHz SPI, Actual =   2MHz SPI
+	SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_16,   // AVRStudio =   1MHz SPI, Actual =   1MHz SPI
+	SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_32,   // AVRStudio = 500KHz SPI, Actual = 500KHz SPI
+	SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_64,   // AVRStudio = 250KHz SPI, Actual = 250KHz SPI
+	SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_128   // AVRStudio = 125KHz SPI, Actual = 125KHz SPI
+#else
+	#error No SPI prescaler masks for chosen F_CPU speed.
+#endif
+};
+
+/** Lookup table to convert the slower ISP speeds into a compare value for the software SPI driver.
+ *
+ *  \hideinitializer
+ */
+static const uint16_t TimerCompareFromSCKDuration[] PROGMEM =
+{
+	TIMER_COMP(96386), TIMER_COMP(89888), TIMER_COMP(84211), TIMER_COMP(79208), TIMER_COMP(74767),
+	TIMER_COMP(70797), TIMER_COMP(67227), TIMER_COMP(64000), TIMER_COMP(61069), TIMER_COMP(58395),
+	TIMER_COMP(55945), TIMER_COMP(51613), TIMER_COMP(49690), TIMER_COMP(47905), TIMER_COMP(46243),
+	TIMER_COMP(43244), TIMER_COMP(41885), TIMER_COMP(39409), TIMER_COMP(38278), TIMER_COMP(36200),
+	TIMER_COMP(34335), TIMER_COMP(32654), TIMER_COMP(31129), TIMER_COMP(29740), TIMER_COMP(28470),
+	TIMER_COMP(27304), TIMER_COMP(25724), TIMER_COMP(24768), TIMER_COMP(23461), TIMER_COMP(22285),
+	TIMER_COMP(21221), TIMER_COMP(20254), TIMER_COMP(19371), TIMER_COMP(18562), TIMER_COMP(17583),
+	TIMER_COMP(16914), TIMER_COMP(16097), TIMER_COMP(15356), TIMER_COMP(14520), TIMER_COMP(13914),
+	TIMER_COMP(13224), TIMER_COMP(12599), TIMER_COMP(12031), TIMER_COMP(11511), TIMER_COMP(10944),
+	TIMER_COMP(10431), TIMER_COMP(9963),  TIMER_COMP(9468),  TIMER_COMP(9081),  TIMER_COMP(8612),
+	TIMER_COMP(8239),  TIMER_COMP(7851),  TIMER_COMP(7498),  TIMER_COMP(7137),  TIMER_COMP(6809),
+	TIMER_COMP(6478),  TIMER_COMP(6178),  TIMER_COMP(5879),  TIMER_COMP(5607),  TIMER_COMP(5359),
+	TIMER_COMP(5093),  TIMER_COMP(4870),  TIMER_COMP(4633),  TIMER_COMP(4418),  TIMER_COMP(4209),
+	TIMER_COMP(4019),  TIMER_COMP(3823),  TIMER_COMP(3645),  TIMER_COMP(3474),  TIMER_COMP(3310),
+	TIMER_COMP(3161),  TIMER_COMP(3011),  TIMER_COMP(2869),  TIMER_COMP(2734),  TIMER_COMP(2611),
+	TIMER_COMP(2484),  TIMER_COMP(2369),  TIMER_COMP(2257),  TIMER_COMP(2152),  TIMER_COMP(2052),
+	TIMER_COMP(1956),  TIMER_COMP(1866),  TIMER_COMP(1779),  TIMER_COMP(1695),  TIMER_COMP(1615),
+	TIMER_COMP(1539),  TIMER_COMP(1468),  TIMER_COMP(1398),  TIMER_COMP(1333),  TIMER_COMP(1271),
+	TIMER_COMP(1212),  TIMER_COMP(1155),  TIMER_COMP(1101),  TIMER_COMP(1049),  TIMER_COMP(1000),
+	TIMER_COMP(953),   TIMER_COMP(909),   TIMER_COMP(866),   TIMER_COMP(826),   TIMER_COMP(787),
+	TIMER_COMP(750),   TIMER_COMP(715),   TIMER_COMP(682),   TIMER_COMP(650),   TIMER_COMP(619),
+	TIMER_COMP(590),   TIMER_COMP(563),   TIMER_COMP(536),   TIMER_COMP(511),   TIMER_COMP(487),
+	TIMER_COMP(465),   TIMER_COMP(443),   TIMER_COMP(422),   TIMER_COMP(402),   TIMER_COMP(384),
+	TIMER_COMP(366),   TIMER_COMP(349),   TIMER_COMP(332),   TIMER_COMP(317),   TIMER_COMP(302),
+	TIMER_COMP(288),   TIMER_COMP(274),   TIMER_COMP(261),   TIMER_COMP(249),   TIMER_COMP(238),
+	TIMER_COMP(226),   TIMER_COMP(216),   TIMER_COMP(206),   TIMER_COMP(196),   TIMER_COMP(187),
+	TIMER_COMP(178),   TIMER_COMP(170),   TIMER_COMP(162),   TIMER_COMP(154),   TIMER_COMP(147),
+	TIMER_COMP(140),   TIMER_COMP(134),   TIMER_COMP(128),   TIMER_COMP(122),   TIMER_COMP(116),
+	TIMER_COMP(111),   TIMER_COMP(105),   TIMER_COMP(100),   TIMER_COMP(95.4),  TIMER_COMP(90.9),
+	TIMER_COMP(86.6),  TIMER_COMP(82.6),  TIMER_COMP(78.7),  TIMER_COMP(75.0),  TIMER_COMP(71.5),
+	TIMER_COMP(68.2),  TIMER_COMP(65.0),  TIMER_COMP(61.9),  TIMER_COMP(59.0),  TIMER_COMP(56.3),
+	TIMER_COMP(53.6),  TIMER_COMP(51.1)
+};
+
+/** Currently selected SPI driver, either hardware (for fast ISP speeds) or software (for slower ISP speeds). */
+bool HardwareSPIMode = true;
+
+/** Software SPI data register for sending and receiving */
+static volatile uint8_t SoftSPI_Data;
+
+/** Number of bits left to transfer in the software SPI driver */
+static volatile uint8_t SoftSPI_BitsRemaining;
+
+
+/** ISR to handle software SPI transmission and reception */
+ISR(TIMER1_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	/* Check if rising edge (output next bit) or falling edge (read in next bit) */
+	if (!(PINB & (1 << 1)))
+	{
+		if (SoftSPI_Data & (1 << 7))
+		  PORTB |=  (1 << 2);
+		else
+		  PORTB &= ~(1 << 2);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		SoftSPI_Data <<= 1;
+
+		if (!(--SoftSPI_BitsRemaining))
+		{
+			TCCR1B = 0;
+			TIFR1  = (1 << OCF1A);
+		}
+
+		if (PINB & (1 << 3))
+		  SoftSPI_Data |= (1 << 0);
+	}
+
+	/* Fast toggle of PORTB.1 via the PIN register (see datasheet) */
+	PINB |= (1 << 1);
+}
+
+/** Initializes the appropriate SPI driver (hardware or software, depending on the selected ISP speed) ready for
+ *  communication with the attached target.
+ */
+void ISPTarget_EnableTargetISP(void)
+{
+	uint8_t SCKDuration = V2Params_GetParameterValue(PARAM_SCK_DURATION);
+
+	if (SCKDuration < sizeof(SPIMaskFromSCKDuration))
+	{
+		HardwareSPIMode = true;
+
+		SPI_Init(pgm_read_byte(&SPIMaskFromSCKDuration[SCKDuration]) | SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST |
+		                       SPI_SCK_LEAD_RISING | SPI_SAMPLE_LEADING | SPI_MODE_MASTER);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		HardwareSPIMode = false;
+
+		DDRB  |= ((1 << 1) | (1 << 2));
+		PORTB |= ((1 << 0) | (1 << 3));
+
+		ISPTarget_ConfigureSoftwareSPI(SCKDuration);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Shuts down the current selected SPI driver (hardware or software, depending on the selected ISP speed) so that no
+ *  further communications can occur until the driver is re-initialized.
+ */
+void ISPTarget_DisableTargetISP(void)
+{
+	if (HardwareSPIMode)
+	{
+		SPI_Disable();
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		DDRB  &= ~((1 << 1) | (1 << 2));
+		PORTB &= ~((1 << 0) | (1 << 3));
+
+		/* Must re-enable rescue clock once software ISP has exited, as the timer for the rescue clock is
+		 * re-purposed for software SPI */
+		ISPTarget_ConfigureRescueClock();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the AVR to produce a 4MHz rescue clock out of the OCR1A pin of the AVR, so
+ *  that it can be fed into the XTAL1 pin of an AVR whose fuses have been mis-configured for
+ *  an external clock rather than a crystal. When used, the ISP speed must be 125KHz for this
+ *  functionality to work correctly.
+ */
+void ISPTarget_ConfigureRescueClock(void)
+{
+	#if defined(XCK_RESCUE_CLOCK_ENABLE)
+		/* Configure XCK as an output for the specified AVR model */
+		DDRD  |= (1 << 5);
+
+		/* Start USART to generate a 4MHz clock on the XCK pin */
+		UBRR1  = ((F_CPU / 2 / ISP_RESCUE_CLOCK_SPEED) - 1);
+		UCSR1B = (1 << TXEN1);
+		UCSR1C = (1 << UMSEL10) | (1 << UPM11) | (1 << USBS1) | (1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10) | (1 << UCPOL1);
+	#else
+		/* Configure OCR1A as an output for the specified AVR model */
+		#if defined(USB_SERIES_2_AVR)
+		DDRC |= (1 << 6);
+		#else
+		DDRB |= (1 << 5);
+		#endif
+
+		/* Start Timer 1 to generate a 4MHz clock on the OCR1A pin */
+		TIMSK1 = 0;
+		TCNT1  = 0;
+		OCR1A  = ((F_CPU / 2 / ISP_RESCUE_CLOCK_SPEED) - 1);
+		TCCR1A = (1 << COM1A0);
+		TCCR1B = ((1 << WGM12) | (1 << CS10));
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Configures the AVR's timer ready to produce software SPI for the slower ISP speeds that
+ *  cannot be obtained when using the AVR's hardware SPI module.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] SCKDuration  Duration of the desired software ISP SCK clock
+ */
+void ISPTarget_ConfigureSoftwareSPI(const uint8_t SCKDuration)
+{
+	/* Configure Timer 1 for software SPI using the specified SCK duration */
+	TIMSK1 = (1 << OCIE1A);
+	TCNT1  = 0;
+	OCR1A  = pgm_read_word(&TimerCompareFromSCKDuration[SCKDuration - sizeof(SPIMaskFromSCKDuration)]);
+	TCCR1A = 0;
+	TCCR1B = 0;
+}
+
+/** Sends and receives a single byte of data to and from the attached target via software SPI.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the attached target
+ *
+ *  \return Received byte of data from the attached target
+ */
+uint8_t ISPTarget_TransferSoftSPIByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+{
+	SoftSPI_Data          = Byte;
+	SoftSPI_BitsRemaining = 8;
+
+	/* Set initial MOSI pin state according to the byte to be transferred */
+	if (SoftSPI_Data & (1 << 7))
+	  PORTB |=  (1 << 2);
+	else
+	  PORTB &= ~(1 << 2);
+
+	TCNT1  = 0;
+	TCCR1B = ((1 << WGM12) | (1 << CS11));
+	while (SoftSPI_BitsRemaining && TimeoutTicksRemaining);
+	TCCR1B = 0;
+
+	return SoftSPI_Data;
+}
+
+/** Asserts or deasserts the target's reset line, using the correct polarity as set by the host using a SET PARAM command.
+ *  When not asserted, the line is tristated so as not to interfere with normal device operation.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] ResetTarget  Boolean true when the target should be held in reset, \c false otherwise
+ */
+void ISPTarget_ChangeTargetResetLine(const bool ResetTarget)
+{
+	if (ResetTarget)
+	{
+		AUX_LINE_DDR |= AUX_LINE_MASK;
+
+		if (!(V2Params_GetParameterValue(PARAM_RESET_POLARITY)))
+		  AUX_LINE_PORT |=  AUX_LINE_MASK;
+		else
+		  AUX_LINE_PORT &= ~AUX_LINE_MASK;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		AUX_LINE_DDR  &= ~AUX_LINE_MASK;
+		AUX_LINE_PORT &= ~AUX_LINE_MASK;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Waits until the target has completed the last operation, by continuously polling the device's
+ *  BUSY flag until it is cleared, or until the command timeout period has expired.
+ *
+ *  \return V2 Protocol status \ref STATUS_CMD_OK if the no timeout occurred, \ref STATUS_RDY_BSY_TOUT otherwise
+ */
+uint8_t ISPTarget_WaitWhileTargetBusy(void)
+{
+	do
+	{
+		ISPTarget_SendByte(0xF0);
+		ISPTarget_SendByte(0x00);
+		ISPTarget_SendByte(0x00);
+	}
+	while ((ISPTarget_ReceiveByte() & 0x01) && TimeoutTicksRemaining);
+
+	return (TimeoutTicksRemaining > 0) ? STATUS_CMD_OK : STATUS_RDY_BSY_TOUT;
+}
+
+/** Sends a low-level LOAD EXTENDED ADDRESS command to the target, for addressing of memory beyond the
+ *  64KB boundary. This sends the command with the correct address as indicated by the current address
+ *  pointer variable set by the host when a SET ADDRESS command is issued.
+ */
+void ISPTarget_LoadExtendedAddress(void)
+{
+	ISPTarget_SendByte(LOAD_EXTENDED_ADDRESS_CMD);
+	ISPTarget_SendByte(0x00);
+	ISPTarget_SendByte(CurrentAddress >> 16);
+	ISPTarget_SendByte(0x00);
+}
+
+/** Waits until the last issued target memory programming command has completed, via the check mode given and using
+ *  the given parameters.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] ProgrammingMode  Programming mode used and completion check to use, a mask of \c PROG_MODE_* constants
+ *  \param[in] PollAddress      Memory address to poll for completion if polling check mode used
+ *  \param[in] PollValue        Poll value to check against if polling check mode used
+ *  \param[in] DelayMS          Milliseconds to delay before returning if delay check mode used
+ *  \param[in] ReadMemCommand   Device low-level READ MEMORY command to send if value check mode used
+ *
+ *  \return V2 Protocol status \ref STATUS_CMD_OK if the no timeout occurred, \ref STATUS_RDY_BSY_TOUT or
+ *          \ref STATUS_CMD_TOUT otherwise
+ */
+uint8_t ISPTarget_WaitForProgComplete(const uint8_t ProgrammingMode,
+                                      const uint16_t PollAddress,
+                                      const uint8_t PollValue,
+                                      const uint8_t DelayMS,
+                                      const uint8_t ReadMemCommand)
+{
+	uint8_t ProgrammingStatus = STATUS_CMD_OK;
+
+	/* Determine method of Programming Complete check */
+	switch (ProgrammingMode & ~(PROG_MODE_PAGED_WRITES_MASK | PROG_MODE_COMMIT_PAGE_MASK))
+	{
+		case PROG_MODE_WORD_TIMEDELAY_MASK:
+		case PROG_MODE_PAGED_TIMEDELAY_MASK:
+			ISPProtocol_DelayMS(DelayMS);
+			break;
+		case PROG_MODE_WORD_VALUE_MASK:
+		case PROG_MODE_PAGED_VALUE_MASK:
+			do
+			{
+				ISPTarget_SendByte(ReadMemCommand);
+				ISPTarget_SendByte(PollAddress >> 8);
+				ISPTarget_SendByte(PollAddress & 0xFF);
+			}
+			while ((ISPTarget_TransferByte(0x00) == PollValue) && TimeoutTicksRemaining);
+
+			if (!(TimeoutTicksRemaining))
+			  ProgrammingStatus = STATUS_CMD_TOUT;
+
+			break;
+		case PROG_MODE_WORD_READYBUSY_MASK:
+		case PROG_MODE_PAGED_READYBUSY_MASK:
+			ProgrammingStatus = ISPTarget_WaitWhileTargetBusy();
+			break;
+	}
+
+	/* Program complete - reset timeout */
+	TimeoutTicksRemaining = COMMAND_TIMEOUT_TICKS;
+
+	return ProgrammingStatus;
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1687abac1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.h
@@ -0,0 +1,147 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ISPTarget.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ISP_TARGET_
+#define _ISP_TARGET_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <util/delay.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h>
+
+		#include "../V2Protocol.h"
+		#include "ISPProtocol.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+			#undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
+
+			#if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
+				#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
+			#endif
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Low level device command to issue an extended FLASH address, for devices with over 128KB of FLASH. */
+		#define LOAD_EXTENDED_ADDRESS_CMD     0x4D
+
+		/** Macro to convert an ISP frequency to a number of timer clock cycles for the software SPI driver. */
+		#define TIMER_COMP(freq)              (((F_CPU / 8) / 2 / freq) - 1)
+
+		/** ISP rescue clock speed in Hz, for clocking targets with incorrectly set fuses. */
+		#define ISP_RESCUE_CLOCK_SPEED        4000000
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern bool HardwareSPIMode;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void    ISPTarget_EnableTargetISP(void);
+		void    ISPTarget_DisableTargetISP(void);
+		void    ISPTarget_ConfigureRescueClock(void);
+		void    ISPTarget_ConfigureSoftwareSPI(const uint8_t SCKDuration);
+		uint8_t ISPTarget_TransferSoftSPIByte(const uint8_t Byte);
+		void    ISPTarget_ChangeTargetResetLine(const bool ResetTarget);
+		uint8_t ISPTarget_WaitWhileTargetBusy(void);
+		void    ISPTarget_LoadExtendedAddress(void);
+		uint8_t ISPTarget_WaitForProgComplete(const uint8_t ProgrammingMode,
+		                                      const uint16_t PollAddress,
+		                                      const uint8_t PollValue,
+		                                      const uint8_t DelayMS,
+		                                      const uint8_t ReadMemCommand);
+
+	/* Inline Functions: */
+		/** Sends a byte of ISP data to the attached target, using the appropriate SPI hardware or
+		 *  software routines depending on the selected ISP speed.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the attached target
+		 */
+		static inline void ISPTarget_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+		{
+			if (HardwareSPIMode)
+			  SPI_SendByte(Byte);
+			else
+			  ISPTarget_TransferSoftSPIByte(Byte);
+		}
+
+		/** Receives a byte of ISP data from the attached target, using the appropriate
+		 *  SPI hardware or software routines depending on the selected ISP speed.
+		 *
+		 *  \return Received byte of data from the attached target
+		 */
+		static inline uint8_t ISPTarget_ReceiveByte(void)
+		{
+			uint8_t ReceivedByte;
+
+			if (HardwareSPIMode)
+			  ReceivedByte = SPI_ReceiveByte();
+			else
+			  ReceivedByte = ISPTarget_TransferSoftSPIByte(0x00);
+
+			#if defined(INVERTED_ISP_MISO)
+			return ~ReceivedByte;
+			#else
+			return  ReceivedByte;
+			#endif
+		}
+
+		/** Sends and receives a byte of ISP data to and from the attached target, using the
+		 *  appropriate SPI hardware or software routines depending on the selected ISP speed.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the attached target
+		 *
+		 *  \return Received byte of data from the attached target
+		 */
+		static inline uint8_t ISPTarget_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+		{
+			uint8_t ReceivedByte;
+
+			if (HardwareSPIMode)
+			  ReceivedByte = SPI_TransferByte(Byte);
+			else
+			  ReceivedByte = ISPTarget_TransferSoftSPIByte(Byte);
+
+			#if defined(INVERTED_ISP_MISO)
+			return ~ReceivedByte;
+			#else
+			return  ReceivedByte;
+			#endif
+		}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2Protocol.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2Protocol.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a4fada724
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2Protocol.c
@@ -0,0 +1,267 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  V2Protocol handler, to process V2 Protocol commands used in Atmel programmer devices.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_V2PROTOCOL_C
+#include "V2Protocol.h"
+
+/** Current memory address for FLASH/EEPROM memory read/write commands */
+uint32_t CurrentAddress;
+
+/** Flag to indicate that the next read/write operation must update the device's current extended FLASH address */
+bool MustLoadExtendedAddress;
+
+
+/** ISR to manage timeouts whilst processing a V2Protocol command */
+ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_NOBLOCK)
+{
+	if (TimeoutTicksRemaining)
+	  TimeoutTicksRemaining--;
+	else
+	  TCCR0B = 0;
+}
+
+/** Initializes the hardware and software associated with the V2 protocol command handling. */
+void V2Protocol_Init(void)
+{
+	#if defined(ADC) && !defined(NO_VTARGET_DETECT)
+	/* Initialize the ADC converter for VTARGET level detection on supported AVR models */
+	ADC_Init(ADC_FREE_RUNNING | ADC_PRESCALE_128);
+	ADC_SetupChannel(VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL);
+	ADC_StartReading(VTARGET_REF_MASK | ADC_RIGHT_ADJUSTED | VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL_MASK);
+	#endif
+
+	/* Timeout timer initialization (~10ms period) */
+	OCR0A  = (((F_CPU / 1024) / 100) - 1);
+	TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01);
+	TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A);
+
+	V2Params_LoadNonVolatileParamValues();
+
+	#if defined(ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL)
+	ISPTarget_ConfigureRescueClock();
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Master V2 Protocol packet handler, for received V2 Protocol packets from a connected host.
+ *  This routine decodes the issued command and passes off the handling of the command to the
+ *  appropriate function.
+ */
+void V2Protocol_ProcessCommand(void)
+{
+	uint8_t V2Command = Endpoint_Read_8();
+
+	/* Reset timeout counter duration and start the timer */
+	TimeoutTicksRemaining = COMMAND_TIMEOUT_TICKS;
+	TCCR0B = ((1 << CS02) | (1 << CS00));
+
+	switch (V2Command)
+	{
+		case CMD_SIGN_ON:
+			V2Protocol_SignOn();
+			break;
+		case CMD_SET_PARAMETER:
+		case CMD_GET_PARAMETER:
+			V2Protocol_GetSetParam(V2Command);
+			break;
+		case CMD_LOAD_ADDRESS:
+			V2Protocol_LoadAddress();
+			break;
+		case CMD_RESET_PROTECTION:
+			V2Protocol_ResetProtection();
+			break;
+#if defined(ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL)
+		case CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE_ISP:
+			ISPProtocol_EnterISPMode();
+			break;
+		case CMD_LEAVE_PROGMODE_ISP:
+			ISPProtocol_LeaveISPMode();
+			break;
+		case CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP:
+		case CMD_PROGRAM_EEPROM_ISP:
+			ISPProtocol_ProgramMemory(V2Command);
+			break;
+		case CMD_READ_FLASH_ISP:
+		case CMD_READ_EEPROM_ISP:
+			ISPProtocol_ReadMemory(V2Command);
+			break;
+		case CMD_CHIP_ERASE_ISP:
+			ISPProtocol_ChipErase();
+			break;
+		case CMD_READ_FUSE_ISP:
+		case CMD_READ_LOCK_ISP:
+		case CMD_READ_SIGNATURE_ISP:
+		case CMD_READ_OSCCAL_ISP:
+			ISPProtocol_ReadFuseLockSigOSCCAL(V2Command);
+			break;
+		case CMD_PROGRAM_FUSE_ISP:
+		case CMD_PROGRAM_LOCK_ISP:
+			ISPProtocol_WriteFuseLock(V2Command);
+			break;
+		case CMD_SPI_MULTI:
+			ISPProtocol_SPIMulti();
+			break;
+#endif
+#if defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
+		case CMD_XPROG_SETMODE:
+			XPROGProtocol_SetMode();
+			break;
+		case CMD_XPROG:
+			XPROGProtocol_Command();
+			break;
+#endif
+		default:
+			V2Protocol_UnknownCommand(V2Command);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	/* Disable the timeout management timer */
+	TCCR0B = 0;
+
+	Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT);
+}
+
+/** Handler for unknown V2 protocol commands. This discards all sent data and returns a
+ *  STATUS_CMD_UNKNOWN status back to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] V2Command  Issued V2 Protocol command byte from the host
+ */
+static void V2Protocol_UnknownCommand(const uint8_t V2Command)
+{
+	/* Discard all incoming data */
+	while (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE)
+	{
+		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+		Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(V2Command);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_UNKNOWN);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_SIGN_ON command, returning the programmer ID string to the host. */
+static void V2Protocol_SignOn(void)
+{
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_SIGN_ON);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(sizeof(PROGRAMMER_ID) - 1);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PROGRAMMER_ID, (sizeof(PROGRAMMER_ID) - 1), NULL);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_RESET_PROTECTION command, implemented as a dummy ACK function as
+ *  no target short-circuit protection is currently implemented.
+ */
+static void V2Protocol_ResetProtection(void)
+{
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_RESET_PROTECTION);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_SET_PARAMETER and CMD_GET_PARAMETER commands from the host, setting or
+ *  getting a device parameter's value from the parameter table.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] V2Command  Issued V2 Protocol command byte from the host
+ */
+static void V2Protocol_GetSetParam(const uint8_t V2Command)
+{
+	uint8_t ParamID = Endpoint_Read_8();
+	uint8_t ParamValue;
+
+	if (V2Command == CMD_SET_PARAMETER)
+	  ParamValue = Endpoint_Read_8();
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(V2Command);
+
+	uint8_t ParamPrivs = V2Params_GetParameterPrivileges(ParamID);
+
+	if ((V2Command == CMD_SET_PARAMETER) && (ParamPrivs & PARAM_PRIV_WRITE))
+	{
+		Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+		V2Params_SetParameterValue(ParamID, ParamValue);
+	}
+	else if ((V2Command == CMD_GET_PARAMETER) && (ParamPrivs & PARAM_PRIV_READ))
+	{
+		Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+		Endpoint_Write_8(V2Params_GetParameterValue(ParamID));
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_FAILED);
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_LOAD_ADDRESS command, loading the given device address into a
+ *  global storage variable for later use, and issuing LOAD EXTENDED ADDRESS commands
+ *  to the attached device as required.
+ */
+static void V2Protocol_LoadAddress(void)
+{
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_BE(&CurrentAddress, sizeof(CurrentAddress), NULL);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	if (CurrentAddress & (1UL << 31))
+	  MustLoadExtendedAddress = true;
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_LOAD_ADDRESS);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2Protocol.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2Protocol.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..143e6965d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2Protocol.h
@@ -0,0 +1,105 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for V2Protocol.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _V2_PROTOCOL_
+#define _V2_PROTOCOL_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "../AVRISPDescriptors.h"
+		#include "V2ProtocolConstants.h"
+		#include "V2ProtocolParams.h"
+		#include "ISP/ISPProtocol.h"
+		#include "XPROG/XPROGProtocol.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+			#undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
+
+			#if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
+				#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
+			#endif
+		#endif
+
+		#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) && ((VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL == 2) || (VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL == 3)) && !defined(NO_VTARGET_DETECT)
+			#error The U4 AVR chips do not contain ADC channels 2 or 3. Please change VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL or define NO_VTARGET_DETECT in the makefile.
+		#endif
+
+		#if defined(VTARGET_USE_INTERNAL_REF)
+			#undef  VTARGET_REF_VOLTS
+			#define VTARGET_REF_VOLTS 2.56
+
+			#define VTARGET_REF_MASK ADC_REFERENCE_INT2560MV
+		#else
+			#define VTARGET_REF_MASK ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Programmer ID string, returned to the host during the CMD_SIGN_ON command processing. */
+		#define PROGRAMMER_ID              "AVRISP_MK2"
+
+		/** Timeout period for each issued command from the host before it is aborted (in 10ms ticks). */
+		#define COMMAND_TIMEOUT_TICKS      100
+
+		/** Command timeout ticks remaining counter, GPIOR for speed. */
+		#define TimeoutTicksRemaining      GPIOR1
+
+		/** MUX mask for the VTARGET ADC channel number. */
+		#define VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL_MASK   ADC_GET_CHANNEL_MASK(VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL)
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern uint32_t CurrentAddress;
+		extern bool     MustLoadExtendedAddress;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void V2Protocol_Init(void);
+		void V2Protocol_ProcessCommand(void);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_V2PROTOCOL_C)
+			static void V2Protocol_UnknownCommand(const uint8_t V2Command);
+			static void V2Protocol_SignOn(void);
+			static void V2Protocol_GetSetParam(const uint8_t V2Command);
+			static void V2Protocol_ResetProtection(void);
+			static void V2Protocol_LoadAddress(void);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolConstants.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolConstants.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..efa8ee674
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolConstants.h
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Macros for the V2 Protocol Packet Commands and Responses.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _V2_PROTOCOL_CONSTANTS_
+#define _V2_PROTOCOL_CONSTANTS_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define CMD_SIGN_ON                 0x01
+		#define CMD_SET_PARAMETER           0x02
+		#define CMD_GET_PARAMETER           0x03
+		#define CMD_OSCCAL                  0x05
+		#define CMD_LOAD_ADDRESS            0x06
+		#define CMD_FIRMWARE_UPGRADE        0x07
+		#define CMD_RESET_PROTECTION        0x0A
+		#define CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE_ISP      0x10
+		#define CMD_LEAVE_PROGMODE_ISP      0x11
+		#define CMD_CHIP_ERASE_ISP          0x12
+		#define CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP       0x13
+		#define CMD_READ_FLASH_ISP          0x14
+		#define CMD_PROGRAM_EEPROM_ISP      0x15
+		#define CMD_READ_EEPROM_ISP         0x16
+		#define CMD_PROGRAM_FUSE_ISP        0x17
+		#define CMD_READ_FUSE_ISP           0x18
+		#define CMD_PROGRAM_LOCK_ISP        0x19
+		#define CMD_READ_LOCK_ISP           0x1A
+		#define CMD_READ_SIGNATURE_ISP      0x1B
+		#define CMD_READ_OSCCAL_ISP         0x1C
+		#define CMD_SPI_MULTI               0x1D
+		#define CMD_XPROG                   0x50
+		#define CMD_XPROG_SETMODE           0x51
+
+		#define STATUS_CMD_OK               0x00
+		#define STATUS_CMD_TOUT             0x80
+		#define STATUS_RDY_BSY_TOUT         0x81
+		#define STATUS_SET_PARAM_MISSING    0x82
+		#define STATUS_CMD_FAILED           0xC0
+		#define STATUS_CMD_UNKNOWN          0xC9
+		#define STATUS_CMD_ILLEGAL_PARAM    0xCA
+		#define STATUS_ISP_READY            0x00
+		#define STATUS_CONN_FAIL_MOSI       0x01
+		#define STATUS_CONN_FAIL_RST        0x02
+		#define STATUS_CONN_FAIL_SCK        0x04
+		#define STATUS_TGT_NOT_DETECTED     0x10
+		#define STATUS_TGT_REVERSE_INSERTED 0x20
+
+		#define PARAM_BUILD_NUMBER_LOW      0x80
+		#define PARAM_BUILD_NUMBER_HIGH     0x81
+		#define PARAM_HW_VER                0x90
+		#define PARAM_SW_MAJOR              0x91
+		#define PARAM_SW_MINOR              0x92
+		#define PARAM_VTARGET               0x94
+		#define PARAM_SCK_DURATION          0x98
+		#define PARAM_RESET_POLARITY        0x9E
+		#define PARAM_STATUS_TGT_CONN       0xA1
+		#define PARAM_DISCHARGEDELAY        0xA4
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2f287060c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.c
@@ -0,0 +1,207 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  V2Protocol parameter handler, to process V2 Protocol device parameters.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_V2PROTOCOL_PARAMS_C
+#include "V2ProtocolParams.h"
+
+/* Non-Volatile Parameter Values for EEPROM storage */
+static uint8_t EEMEM EEPROM_Reset_Polarity = 0x01;
+
+/* Non-Volatile Parameter Values for EEPROM storage */
+static uint8_t EEMEM EEPROM_SCK_Duration   = 0x06;
+
+/* Volatile Parameter Values for RAM storage */
+static ParameterItem_t ParameterTable[] =
+	{
+		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_BUILD_NUMBER_LOW,
+		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ,
+		  .ParamValue       = 0                                  },
+
+		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_BUILD_NUMBER_HIGH,
+		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ,
+		  .ParamValue       = 0                                  },
+
+		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_HW_VER,
+		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ,
+		  .ParamValue       = 0x00                               },
+
+		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_SW_MAJOR,
+		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ,
+		  .ParamValue       = 0x01                               },
+
+		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_SW_MINOR,
+		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ,
+		  .ParamValue       = FIRMWARE_VERSION_MINOR             },
+
+		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_VTARGET,
+		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ,
+		  .ParamValue       = (uint8_t)(3.3 * 10)                },
+
+		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_SCK_DURATION,
+		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ | PARAM_PRIV_WRITE,
+		  .ParamValue       = 6                                  },
+
+		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_RESET_POLARITY,
+		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ | PARAM_PRIV_WRITE,
+		  .ParamValue       = 0x01                               },
+
+		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_STATUS_TGT_CONN,
+		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ,
+		  .ParamValue       = STATUS_ISP_READY                   },
+
+		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_DISCHARGEDELAY,
+		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ | PARAM_PRIV_WRITE,
+		  .ParamValue       = 0x00                               },
+	};
+
+
+/** Loads saved non-volatile parameter values from the EEPROM into the parameter table, as needed. */
+void V2Params_LoadNonVolatileParamValues(void)
+{
+	/* Read parameter values that are stored in non-volatile EEPROM */
+	uint8_t ResetPolarity = eeprom_read_byte(&EEPROM_Reset_Polarity);
+	uint8_t SCKDuration   = eeprom_read_byte(&EEPROM_SCK_Duration);
+
+	/* Update current parameter table if the EEPROM contents was not blank */
+	if (ResetPolarity != 0xFF)
+	  V2Params_GetParamFromTable(PARAM_RESET_POLARITY)->ParamValue = ResetPolarity;
+
+	/* Update current parameter table if the EEPROM contents was not blank */
+	if (SCKDuration != 0xFF)
+	  V2Params_GetParamFromTable(PARAM_SCK_DURATION)->ParamValue   = SCKDuration;
+}
+
+/** Updates any parameter values that are sourced from hardware rather than explicitly set by the host, such as
+ *  VTARGET levels from the ADC on supported AVR models.
+ */
+void V2Params_UpdateParamValues(void)
+{
+	#if (defined(ADC) && !defined(NO_VTARGET_DETECT))
+	/* Update VTARGET parameter with the latest ADC conversion of VTARGET on supported AVR models */
+	V2Params_GetParamFromTable(PARAM_VTARGET)->ParamValue = (((uint16_t)(VTARGET_REF_VOLTS * 10 * VTARGET_SCALE_FACTOR) * ADC_GetResult()) / 1024);
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the host PC read/write privileges for a given parameter in the parameter table. This should
+ *  be called before calls to \ref V2Params_GetParameterValue() or \ref V2Params_SetParameterValue() when
+ *  getting or setting parameter values in response to requests from the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] ParamID  Parameter ID whose privileges are to be retrieved from the table
+ *
+ *  \return Privileges for the requested parameter, as a mask of \c PARAM_PRIV_* masks
+ */
+uint8_t V2Params_GetParameterPrivileges(const uint8_t ParamID)
+{
+	ParameterItem_t* const ParamInfo = V2Params_GetParamFromTable(ParamID);
+
+	if (ParamInfo == NULL)
+	  return 0;
+
+	return ParamInfo->ParamPrivileges;
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the current value for a given parameter in the parameter table.
+ *
+ *  \note This function does not first check for read privileges - if the value is being sent to the host via a
+ *        GET PARAM command, \ref V2Params_GetParameterPrivileges() should be called first to ensure that the
+ *        parameter is host-readable.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] ParamID  Parameter ID whose value is to be retrieved from the table
+ *
+ *  \return Current value of the parameter in the table, or 0 if not found
+ */
+uint8_t V2Params_GetParameterValue(const uint8_t ParamID)
+{
+	ParameterItem_t* const ParamInfo = V2Params_GetParamFromTable(ParamID);
+
+	if (ParamInfo == NULL)
+	  return 0;
+
+	return ParamInfo->ParamValue;
+}
+
+/** Sets the value for a given parameter in the parameter table.
+ *
+ *  \note This function does not first check for write privileges - if the value is being sourced from the host
+ *        via a SET PARAM command, \ref V2Params_GetParameterPrivileges() should be called first to ensure that the
+ *        parameter is host-writable.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] ParamID  Parameter ID whose value is to be set in the table
+ *  \param[in] Value    New value to set the parameter to
+ *
+ *  \return Pointer to the associated parameter information from the parameter table if found, NULL otherwise
+ */
+void V2Params_SetParameterValue(const uint8_t ParamID,
+                                const uint8_t Value)
+{
+	ParameterItem_t* const ParamInfo = V2Params_GetParamFromTable(ParamID);
+
+	if (ParamInfo == NULL)
+	  return;
+
+	ParamInfo->ParamValue = Value;
+
+	/* The target RESET line polarity is a non-volatile parameter, save to EEPROM when changed */
+	if (ParamID == PARAM_RESET_POLARITY)
+	  eeprom_update_byte(&EEPROM_Reset_Polarity, Value);
+
+	/* The target SCK line period is a non-volatile parameter, save to EEPROM when changed */
+	if (ParamID == PARAM_SCK_DURATION)
+	  eeprom_update_byte(&EEPROM_SCK_Duration, Value);
+}
+
+/** Retrieves a parameter entry (including ID, value and privileges) from the parameter table that matches the given
+ *  parameter ID.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] ParamID  Parameter ID to find in the table
+ *
+ *  \return Pointer to the associated parameter information from the parameter table if found, NULL otherwise
+ */
+static ParameterItem_t* const V2Params_GetParamFromTable(const uint8_t ParamID)
+{
+	ParameterItem_t* CurrTableItem = ParameterTable;
+
+	/* Find the parameter in the parameter table if present */
+	for (uint8_t TableIndex = 0; TableIndex < TABLE_PARAM_COUNT; TableIndex++)
+	{
+		if (ParamID == CurrTableItem->ParamID)
+		  return CurrTableItem;
+
+		CurrTableItem++;
+	}
+
+	return NULL;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1155dbe4d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.h
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for V2ProtocolParams.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _V2_PROTOCOL_PARAMS_
+#define _V2_PROTOCOL_PARAMS_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/eeprom.h>
+
+		#if defined(ADC)
+			#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h>
+		#endif
+
+		#include "V2Protocol.h"
+		#include "V2ProtocolConstants.h"
+		#include "ISP/ISPTarget.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Parameter privilege mask to allow the host PC to read the parameter's value. */
+		#define PARAM_PRIV_READ     (1 << 0)
+
+		/** Parameter privilege mask to allow the host PC to change the parameter's value. */
+		#define PARAM_PRIV_WRITE    (1 << 1)
+
+		/** Total number of parameters in the parameter table */
+		#define TABLE_PARAM_COUNT   (sizeof(ParameterTable) / sizeof(ParameterTable[0]))
+
+		#if (!defined(FIRMWARE_VERSION_MINOR) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
+			/** Minor firmware version, reported to the host on request; must match the version
+			 *  the host is expecting, or it (may) reject further communications with the programmer. */
+			#define FIRMWARE_VERSION_MINOR   0x17
+		#endif
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a parameter table entry indicating a PC readable or writable device parameter. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			const uint8_t ParamID; /**< Parameter ID number to uniquely identify the parameter within the device */
+			const uint8_t ParamPrivileges;  /**< Parameter privileges to allow the host to read or write the parameter's value */
+			uint8_t ParamValue; /**< Current parameter's value within the device */
+		} ParameterItem_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void    V2Params_LoadNonVolatileParamValues(void);
+		void    V2Params_UpdateParamValues(void);
+
+		uint8_t V2Params_GetParameterPrivileges(const uint8_t ParamID);
+		uint8_t V2Params_GetParameterValue(const uint8_t ParamID);
+		void    V2Params_SetParameterValue(const uint8_t ParamID,
+		                                   const uint8_t Value);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_V2PROTOCOL_PARAMS_C)
+			static ParameterItem_t* const V2Params_GetParamFromTable(const uint8_t ParamID);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..277e58f2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.c
@@ -0,0 +1,274 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Target-related functions for the TINY target's NVM module.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_TINYNVM_C
+#include "TINYNVM.h"
+
+#if defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+
+/** Sends the given pointer address to the target's TPI pointer register */
+static void TINYNVM_SendPointerAddress(const uint16_t AbsoluteAddress)
+{
+	/* Send the given 16-bit address to the target, LSB first */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SSTPR | 0);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(AbsoluteAddress & 0xFF);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SSTPR | 1);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(AbsoluteAddress >> 8);
+}
+
+/** Sends a SIN command to the target with the specified I/O address, ready for the data byte to be written.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Address  6-bit I/O address to write to in the target's I/O memory space
+ */
+static void TINYNVM_SendReadNVMRegister(const uint8_t Address)
+{
+	/* The TPI command for reading from the I/O space uses strange addressing, where the I/O address's upper
+	 * two bits of the 6-bit address are shifted left once - use function to reduce code size */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SIN(Address));
+}
+
+/** Sends a SOUT command to the target with the specified I/O address, ready for the data byte to be read.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Address  6-bit I/O address to read from in the target's I/O memory space
+ */
+static void TINYNVM_SendWriteNVMRegister(const uint8_t Address)
+{
+	/* The TPI command for reading from the I/O space uses strange addressing, where the I/O address's upper
+	 * two bits of the 6-bit address are shifted left once - use function to reduce code size */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SOUT(Address));
+}
+
+/** Busy-waits while the NVM controller is busy performing a NVM operation, such as a FLASH page read.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the NVM controller became ready within the timeout period, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy(void)
+{
+	/* Poll the STATUS register to check to see if NVM access has been enabled */
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		/* Send the SLDCS command to read the TPI STATUS register to see the NVM bus is active */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SLDCS(TPI_REG_STATUS));
+
+		uint8_t StatusRegister = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte();
+
+		/* We might have timed out waiting for the status register read response, check here */
+		if (!(TimeoutTicksRemaining))
+		  return false;
+
+		/* Check the status register read response to see if the NVM bus is enabled */
+		if (StatusRegister & TPI_STATUS_NVM)
+		  return true;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Waits while the target's NVM controller is busy performing an operation, exiting if the
+ *  timeout period expires.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the NVM controller became ready within the timeout period, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy(void)
+{
+	/* Poll the STATUS register to check to see if NVM access has been enabled */
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		/* Send the SIN command to read the TPI STATUS register to see the NVM bus is busy */
+		TINYNVM_SendReadNVMRegister(XPROG_Param_NVMCSRRegAddr);
+
+		uint8_t StatusRegister = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte();
+
+		/* We might have timed out waiting for the status register read response, check here */
+		if (!(TimeoutTicksRemaining))
+		  return false;
+
+		/* Check to see if the BUSY flag is still set */
+		if (!(StatusRegister & (1 << 7)))
+		  return true;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Enables the physical TPI interface on the target and enables access to the internal NVM controller.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the TPI interface was enabled successfully, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool TINYNVM_EnableTPI(void)
+{
+	/* Enable TPI programming mode with the attached target */
+	XPROGTarget_EnableTargetTPI();
+
+	/* Lower direction change guard time to 32 USART bits */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SSTCS(TPI_REG_CTRL));
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x02);
+
+	/* Enable access to the XPROG NVM bus by sending the documented NVM access key to the device */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SKEY);
+	for (uint8_t i = sizeof(TPI_NVMENABLE_KEY); i > 0; i--)
+	  XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_NVMENABLE_KEY[i - 1]);
+
+	/* Wait until the NVM bus becomes active */
+	return TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy();
+}
+
+/** Removes access to the target's NVM controller and physically disables the target's physical TPI interface. */
+void TINYNVM_DisableTPI(void)
+{
+	TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy();
+
+	do
+	{
+		/* Clear the NVMEN bit in the TPI STATUS register to disable TPI mode */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SSTCS(TPI_REG_STATUS));
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x00);
+
+		/* Read back the STATUS register, check to see if it took effect */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SLDCS(TPI_REG_STATUS));
+	} while (XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte() != 0x00);
+
+	XPROGTarget_DisableTargetTPI();
+}
+
+/** Reads memory from the target's memory spaces.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  ReadAddress  Start address to read from within the target's address space
+ *  \param[out] ReadBuffer   Buffer to store read data into
+ *  \param[in]  ReadSize     Length of the data to read from the device
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command sequence complete successfully
+ */
+bool TINYNVM_ReadMemory(const uint16_t ReadAddress,
+                        uint8_t* ReadBuffer,
+                        uint16_t ReadSize)
+{
+	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+	if (!(TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Set the NVM control register to the NO OP command for memory reading */
+	TINYNVM_SendWriteNVMRegister(XPROG_Param_NVMCMDRegAddr);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TINY_NVM_CMD_NOOP);
+
+	/* Send the address of the location to read from */
+	TINYNVM_SendPointerAddress(ReadAddress);
+
+	while (ReadSize-- && TimeoutTicksRemaining)
+	{
+		/* Read the byte of data from the target */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SLD(TPI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI));
+		*(ReadBuffer++) = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte();
+	}
+
+	return (TimeoutTicksRemaining > 0);
+}
+
+/** Writes word addressed memory to the target's memory spaces.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] WriteAddress  Start address to write to within the target's address space
+ *  \param[in] WriteBuffer   Buffer to source data from
+ *  \param[in] WriteLength   Total number of bytes to write to the device (must be an integer multiple of 2)
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command sequence complete successfully
+ */
+bool TINYNVM_WriteMemory(const uint16_t WriteAddress,
+                         uint8_t* WriteBuffer,
+                         uint16_t WriteLength)
+{
+	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+	if (!(TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Must have an integer number of words to write - if extra byte, word-align via a dummy high byte */
+	if (WriteLength & 0x01)
+	  WriteBuffer[WriteLength++] = 0xFF;
+
+	/* Set the NVM control register to the WORD WRITE command for memory writing */
+	TINYNVM_SendWriteNVMRegister(XPROG_Param_NVMCMDRegAddr);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TINY_NVM_CMD_WORDWRITE);
+
+	/* Send the address of the location to write to */
+	TINYNVM_SendPointerAddress(WriteAddress);
+
+	while (WriteLength)
+	{
+		/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+		if (!(TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+		  return false;
+
+		/* Write the low byte of data to the target */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SST(TPI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI));
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(*(WriteBuffer++));
+
+		/* Write the high byte of data to the target */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SST(TPI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI));
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(*(WriteBuffer++));
+
+		/* Need to decrement the write length twice, since we wrote a whole two-byte word */
+		WriteLength -= 2;
+	}
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Erases the target's memory space.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] EraseCommand  NVM erase command to send to the device
+ *  \param[in] Address       Address inside the memory space to erase
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command sequence complete successfully
+ */
+bool TINYNVM_EraseMemory(const uint8_t EraseCommand,
+                         const uint16_t Address)
+{
+	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+	if (!(TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Set the NVM control register to the target memory erase command */
+	TINYNVM_SendWriteNVMRegister(XPROG_Param_NVMCMDRegAddr);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(EraseCommand);
+
+	/* Write to a high byte location within the target address space to start the erase process */
+	TINYNVM_SendPointerAddress(Address | 0x0001);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SST(TPI_POINTER_INDIRECT));
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x00);
+
+	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+	if (!(TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+	  return false;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..915c00cc5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.h
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for TINYNVM.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _TINY_NVM_
+#define _TINY_NVM_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+
+		#include "XPROGProtocol.h"
+		#include "XPROGTarget.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+			#undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
+
+			#if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
+				#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
+			#endif
+		#endif
+
+	/* Defines: */
+		#define TINY_NVM_CMD_NOOP              0x00
+		#define TINY_NVM_CMD_CHIPERASE         0x10
+		#define TINY_NVM_CMD_SECTIONERASE      0x14
+		#define TINY_NVM_CMD_WORDWRITE         0x1D
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		bool TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy(void);
+		bool TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy(void);
+		bool TINYNVM_EnableTPI(void);
+		void TINYNVM_DisableTPI(void);
+		bool TINYNVM_ReadMemory(const uint16_t ReadAddress,
+		                        uint8_t* ReadBuffer,
+		                        uint16_t ReadLength);
+		bool TINYNVM_WriteMemory(const uint16_t WriteAddress,
+		                         uint8_t* WriteBuffer,
+		                         uint16_t WriteLength);
+		bool TINYNVM_EraseMemory(const uint8_t EraseCommand,
+		                         const uint16_t Address);
+
+		#if (defined(INCLUDE_FROM_TINYNVM_C) && defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL))
+			static void TINYNVM_SendReadNVMRegister(const uint8_t Address);
+			static void TINYNVM_SendWriteNVMRegister(const uint8_t Address);
+			static void TINYNVM_SendPointerAddress(const uint16_t AbsoluteAddress);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d0b5752fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.c
@@ -0,0 +1,468 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Target-related functions for the XMEGA target's NVM module.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_XMEGA_NVM_C
+#include "XMEGANVM.h"
+
+#if defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+
+/** Sends the given 32-bit absolute address to the target.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] AbsoluteAddress  Absolute address to send to the target
+ */
+static void XMEGANVM_SendAddress(const uint32_t AbsoluteAddress)
+{
+	/* Send the given 32-bit address to the target, LSB first */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(AbsoluteAddress &  0xFF);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(AbsoluteAddress >> 8);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(AbsoluteAddress >> 16);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(AbsoluteAddress >> 24);
+}
+
+/** Sends the given NVM register address to the target.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Register  NVM register whose absolute address is to be sent
+ */
+static void XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(const uint8_t Register)
+{
+	/* Determine the absolute register address from the NVM base memory address and the NVM register address */
+	uint32_t Address = XPROG_Param_NVMBase | Register;
+
+	/* Send the calculated 32-bit address to the target, LSB first */
+	XMEGANVM_SendAddress(Address);
+}
+
+/** Busy-waits while the NVM controller is busy performing a NVM operation, such as a FLASH page read or CRC
+ *  calculation.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the NVM controller became ready within the timeout period, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy(void)
+{
+	/* Poll the STATUS register to check to see if NVM access has been enabled */
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		/* Send the LDCS command to read the PDI STATUS register to see the NVM bus is active */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_LDCS(PDI_REG_STATUS));
+
+		uint8_t StatusRegister = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte();
+
+		/* We might have timed out waiting for the status register read response, check here */
+		if (!(TimeoutTicksRemaining))
+		  return false;
+
+		/* Check the status register read response to see if the NVM bus is enabled */
+		if (StatusRegister & PDI_STATUS_NVM)
+		  return true;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Waits while the target's NVM controller is busy performing an operation, exiting if the
+ *  timeout period expires.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the NVM controller became ready within the timeout period, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy(void)
+{
+	/* Preload the pointer register with the NVM STATUS register address to check the BUSY flag */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_ST(PDI_POINTER_DIRECT, PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES));
+	XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_STATUS);
+
+	/* Poll the NVM STATUS register while the NVM controller is busy */
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		/* Fetch the current status value via the pointer register (without auto-increment afterwards) */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_LD(PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+
+		uint8_t StatusRegister = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte();
+
+		/* We might have timed out waiting for the status register read response, check here */
+		if (!(TimeoutTicksRemaining))
+		  return false;
+
+		/* Check to see if the BUSY flag is still set */
+		if (!(StatusRegister & (1 << 7)))
+		  return true;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Enables the physical PDI interface on the target and enables access to the internal NVM controller.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the PDI interface was enabled successfully, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool XMEGANVM_EnablePDI(void)
+{
+	/* Enable PDI programming mode with the attached target */
+	XPROGTarget_EnableTargetPDI();
+
+	/* Store the RESET key into the RESET PDI register to keep the XMEGA in reset */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STCS(PDI_REG_RESET));
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_RESET_KEY);
+
+	/* Lower direction change guard time to 32 USART bits */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STCS(PDI_REG_CTRL));
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x02);
+
+	/* Enable access to the XPROG NVM bus by sending the documented NVM access key to the device */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_KEY);
+	for (uint8_t i = sizeof(PDI_NVMENABLE_KEY); i > 0; i--)
+	  XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_NVMENABLE_KEY[i - 1]);
+
+	/* Wait until the NVM bus becomes active */
+	return XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy();
+}
+
+/** Removes access to the target's NVM controller and physically disables the target's physical PDI interface. */
+void XMEGANVM_DisablePDI(void)
+{
+	XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy();
+
+	/* Clear the RESET key in the RESET PDI register to allow the XMEGA to run - must perform this until the
+	 * change takes effect, as in some cases it takes multiple writes (silicon bug?).
+	 */
+	do
+	{
+		/* Clear reset register */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STCS(PDI_REG_RESET));
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x00);
+
+		/* Read back the reset register, check to see if it took effect */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_LDCS(PDI_REG_RESET));
+	} while (XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte() != 0x00);
+
+	XPROGTarget_DisableTargetPDI();
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the CRC value of the given memory space.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  CRCCommand  NVM CRC command to issue to the target
+ *  \param[out] CRCDest     CRC Destination when read from the target
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command sequence complete successfully
+ */
+bool XMEGANVM_GetMemoryCRC(const uint8_t CRCCommand,
+                           uint32_t* const CRCDest)
+{
+	*CRCDest = 0;
+
+	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+	if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Set the NVM command to the correct CRC read command */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+	XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(CRCCommand);
+
+	/* Set CMDEX bit in NVM CTRLA register to start the CRC generation */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+	XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLA);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_NVM_BIT_CTRLA_CMDEX);
+
+	/* Wait until the NVM bus is ready again */
+	if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy()))
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+	if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Load the PDI pointer register with the DAT0 register start address */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_ST(PDI_POINTER_DIRECT, PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES));
+	XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_DAT0);
+
+	/* Send the REPEAT command to grab the CRC bytes */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_REPEAT(PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_CRC_LENGTH_BYTES - 1);
+
+	/* Read in the CRC bytes from the target */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_LD(PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < XMEGA_CRC_LENGTH_BYTES; i++)
+	  ((uint8_t*)CRCDest)[i] = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte();
+
+	return (TimeoutTicksRemaining > 0);
+}
+
+/** Reads memory from the target's memory spaces.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  ReadAddress  Start address to read from within the target's address space
+ *  \param[out] ReadBuffer   Buffer to store read data into
+ *  \param[in]  ReadSize     Number of bytes to read
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command sequence complete successfully
+ */
+bool XMEGANVM_ReadMemory(const uint32_t ReadAddress,
+                         uint8_t* ReadBuffer,
+                         uint16_t ReadSize)
+{
+	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+	if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Send the READNVM command to the NVM controller for reading of an arbitrary location */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+	XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_NVM_CMD_READNVM);
+
+	if (ReadSize > 1)
+	{
+		/* Load the PDI pointer register with the start address we want to read from */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_ST(PDI_POINTER_DIRECT, PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES));
+		XMEGANVM_SendAddress(ReadAddress);
+
+		/* Send the REPEAT command with the specified number of bytes to read */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_REPEAT(PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(ReadSize - 1);
+
+		/* Send a LD command with indirect access and post-increment to read out the bytes */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_LD(PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		while (ReadSize-- && TimeoutTicksRemaining)
+		  *(ReadBuffer++) = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte();
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Send a LDS command with the read address to read out the requested byte */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_LDS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XMEGANVM_SendAddress(ReadAddress);
+		*(ReadBuffer++) = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte();
+	}
+
+	return (TimeoutTicksRemaining > 0);
+}
+
+/** Writes byte addressed memory to the target's memory spaces.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  WriteCommand  Command to send to the device to write each memory byte
+ *  \param[in]  WriteAddress  Address to write to within the target's address space
+ *  \param[in]  Byte          Byte to write to the target
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command sequence complete successfully
+ */
+bool XMEGANVM_WriteByteMemory(const uint8_t WriteCommand,
+                              const uint32_t WriteAddress,
+                              const uint8_t Byte)
+{
+	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+	if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Send the memory write command to the target */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+	XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(WriteCommand);
+
+	/* Send new memory byte to the memory of the target */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+	XMEGANVM_SendAddress(WriteAddress);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(Byte);
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Writes page addressed memory to the target's memory spaces.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  WriteBuffCommand  Command to send to the device to write a byte to the memory page buffer
+ *  \param[in]  EraseBuffCommand  Command to send to the device to erase the memory page buffer
+ *  \param[in]  WritePageCommand  Command to send to the device to write the page buffer to the destination memory
+ *  \param[in]  PageMode          Bitfield indicating what operations need to be executed on the specified page
+ *  \param[in]  WriteAddress      Start address to write the page data to within the target's address space
+ *  \param[in]  WriteBuffer       Buffer to source data from
+ *  \param[in]  WriteSize         Number of bytes to write
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command sequence complete successfully
+ */
+bool XMEGANVM_WritePageMemory(const uint8_t WriteBuffCommand,
+                              const uint8_t EraseBuffCommand,
+                              const uint8_t WritePageCommand,
+                              const uint8_t PageMode,
+                              const uint32_t WriteAddress,
+                              const uint8_t* WriteBuffer,
+                              uint16_t WriteSize)
+{
+	if (PageMode & XPROG_PAGEMODE_ERASE)
+	{
+		/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+		if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+		  return false;
+
+		/* Send the memory buffer erase command to the target */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(EraseBuffCommand);
+
+		/* Set CMDEX bit in NVM CTRLA register to start the buffer erase */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLA);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_NVM_BIT_CTRLA_CMDEX);
+	}
+
+	if (WriteSize)
+	{
+		/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+		if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+		  return false;
+
+		/* Send the memory buffer write command to the target */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(WriteBuffCommand);
+
+		/* Load the PDI pointer register with the start address we want to write to */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_ST(PDI_POINTER_DIRECT, PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES));
+		XMEGANVM_SendAddress(WriteAddress);
+
+		/* Send the REPEAT command with the specified number of bytes to write */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_REPEAT(PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(WriteSize - 1);
+
+		/* Send a ST command with indirect access and post-increment to write the bytes */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_ST(PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		while (WriteSize--)
+		  XPROGTarget_SendByte(*(WriteBuffer++));
+	}
+
+	if (PageMode & XPROG_PAGEMODE_WRITE)
+	{
+		/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+		if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+		  return false;
+
+		/* Send the memory write command to the target */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(WritePageCommand);
+
+		/* Send the address of the first page location to write the memory page */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XMEGANVM_SendAddress(WriteAddress);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x00);
+	}
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Erases a specific memory space of the target.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] EraseCommand  NVM erase command to send to the device
+ *  \param[in] Address       Address inside the memory space to erase
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command sequence complete successfully
+ */
+bool XMEGANVM_EraseMemory(const uint8_t EraseCommand,
+                          const uint32_t Address)
+{
+	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+	if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+	  return false;
+
+	/* EEPROM and Chip erasures are triggered differently to FLASH section erasures */
+	if (EraseCommand == XMEGA_NVM_CMD_CHIPERASE)
+	{
+		/* Send the memory erase command to the target */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(EraseCommand);
+
+		/* Set CMDEX bit in NVM CTRLA register to start the erase sequence */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLA);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_NVM_BIT_CTRLA_CMDEX);
+	}
+	else if (EraseCommand == XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROM)
+	{
+		/* Send the EEPROM page buffer erase command to the target */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROMPAGEBUFF);
+
+		/* Set CMDEX bit in NVM CTRLA register to start the buffer erase */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLA);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_NVM_BIT_CTRLA_CMDEX);
+
+		/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+		if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+		  return false;
+
+		/* Send the EEPROM memory buffer write command to the target */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_NVM_CMD_LOADEEPROMPAGEBUFF);
+
+		/* Load the PDI pointer register with the EEPROM page start address */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_ST(PDI_POINTER_DIRECT, PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES));
+		XMEGANVM_SendAddress(Address);
+
+		/* Send the REPEAT command with the specified number of bytes to write */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_REPEAT(PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(XPROG_Param_EEPageSize - 1);
+
+		/* Send a ST command with indirect access and post-increment to tag each byte in the EEPROM page buffer */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_ST(PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		for (uint8_t PageByte = 0; PageByte < XPROG_Param_EEPageSize; PageByte++)
+		  XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x00);
+
+		/* Send the memory erase command to the target */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(EraseCommand);
+
+		/* Set CMDEX bit in NVM CTRLA register to start the EEPROM erase sequence */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLA);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_NVM_BIT_CTRLA_CMDEX);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Send the memory erase command to the target */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(EraseCommand);
+
+		/* Other erase modes just need us to address a byte within the target memory space */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XMEGANVM_SendAddress(Address);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x00);
+	}
+
+	/* Wait until the NVM bus is ready again */
+	if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy()))
+	  return false;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d038b6c0b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.h
@@ -0,0 +1,140 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for XMEGANVM.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _XMEGA_NVM_
+#define _XMEGA_NVM_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+
+		#include "XPROGProtocol.h"
+		#include "XPROGTarget.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+			#undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
+
+			#if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
+				#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
+			#endif
+		#endif
+
+	/* Defines: */
+		#define XMEGA_CRC_LENGTH_BYTES               3
+
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_ADDR0                  0x00
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_ADDR1                  0x01
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_ADDR2                  0x02
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_DAT0                   0x04
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_DAT1                   0x05
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_DAT2                   0x06
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD                    0x0A
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLA                  0x0B
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLB                  0x0C
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_INTCTRL                0x0D
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_STATUS                 0x0F
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_LOCKBITS               0x10
+
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_BIT_CTRLA_CMDEX            (1 << 0)
+
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_NOOP                   0x00
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_CHIPERASE              0x40
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_READNVM                0x43
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_LOADFLASHPAGEBUFF      0x23
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEFLASHPAGEBUFF     0x26
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEFLASHPAGE         0x2B
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEFLASHPAGE         0x2E
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEWRITEFLASH        0x2F
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_FLASHCRC               0x78
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEAPPSEC            0x20
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEAPPSECPAGE        0x22
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEAPPSECPAGE        0x24
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEWRITEAPPSECPAGE   0x25
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_APPCRC                 0x38
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEBOOTSEC           0x68
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEBOOTSECPAGE       0x2A
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEBOOTSECPAGE       0x2C
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEWRITEBOOTSECPAGE  0x2D
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_BOOTCRC                0x39
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_READUSERSIG            0x03
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEUSERSIG           0x18
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEUSERSIG           0x1A
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_READCALIBRATION        0x02
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_READFUSE               0x07
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEFUSE              0x4C
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITELOCK              0x08
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_LOADEEPROMPAGEBUFF     0x33
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROMPAGEBUFF    0x36
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROM            0x30
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROMPAGE        0x32
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEEEPROMPAGE        0x34
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEWRITEEEPROMPAGE   0x35
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_READEEPROM             0x06
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		bool XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy(void);
+		bool XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy(void);
+		bool XMEGANVM_EnablePDI(void);
+		void XMEGANVM_DisablePDI(void);
+		bool XMEGANVM_GetMemoryCRC(const uint8_t CRCCommand,
+			                       uint32_t* const CRCDest);
+		bool XMEGANVM_ReadMemory(const uint32_t ReadAddress,
+		                         uint8_t* ReadBuffer,
+		                         uint16_t ReadSize);
+		bool XMEGANVM_WriteByteMemory(const uint8_t WriteCommand,
+		                              const uint32_t WriteAddress,
+		                              const uint8_t Byte);
+		bool XMEGANVM_WritePageMemory(const uint8_t WriteBuffCommand,
+		                              const uint8_t EraseBuffCommand,
+		                              const uint8_t WritePageCommand,
+		                              const uint8_t PageMode,
+		                              const uint32_t WriteAddress,
+		                              const uint8_t* WriteBuffer,
+		                              uint16_t WriteSize);
+		bool XMEGANVM_EraseMemory(const uint8_t EraseCommand,
+		                          const uint32_t Address);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_XMEGANVM_C)
+			static void XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(const uint8_t Register);
+			static void XMEGANVM_SendAddress(const uint32_t AbsoluteAddress);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0915f97cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.c
@@ -0,0 +1,480 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  XPROG Protocol handler, to process V2 Protocol wrapped XPROG commands used in Atmel programmer devices.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_XPROGPROTOCOL_C
+#include "XPROGProtocol.h"
+
+#if defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+/** Base absolute address for the target's NVM controller for PDI programming */
+uint32_t XPROG_Param_NVMBase       = 0x010001C0;
+
+/** Size in bytes of the target's EEPROM page */
+uint16_t XPROG_Param_EEPageSize    = 32;
+
+/** Address of the TPI device's NVMCMD register for TPI programming */
+uint8_t  XPROG_Param_NVMCMDRegAddr = 0x33;
+
+/** Address of the TPI device's NVMCSR register for TPI programming */
+uint8_t  XPROG_Param_NVMCSRRegAddr = 0x32;
+
+/** Currently selected XPROG programming protocol */
+uint8_t  XPROG_SelectedProtocol    = XPROG_PROTOCOL_PDI;
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_XPROG_SETMODE command, which sets the programmer-to-target protocol used for PDI/TPI
+ *  programming.
+ */
+void XPROGProtocol_SetMode(void)
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t Protocol;
+	} SetMode_XPROG_Params;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&SetMode_XPROG_Params, sizeof(SetMode_XPROG_Params), NULL);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	XPROG_SelectedProtocol = SetMode_XPROG_Params.Protocol;
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_XPROG_SETMODE);
+	Endpoint_Write_8((SetMode_XPROG_Params.Protocol != XPROG_PROTOCOL_JTAG) ? STATUS_CMD_OK : STATUS_CMD_FAILED);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_XPROG command, which wraps up XPROG commands in a V2 wrapper which need to be
+ *  removed and processed so that the underlying XPROG command can be handled.
+ */
+void XPROGProtocol_Command(void)
+{
+	uint8_t XPROGCommand = Endpoint_Read_8();
+
+	switch (XPROGCommand)
+	{
+		case XPROG_CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE:
+			XPROGProtocol_EnterXPROGMode();
+			break;
+		case XPROG_CMD_LEAVE_PROGMODE:
+			XPROGProtocol_LeaveXPROGMode();
+			break;
+		case XPROG_CMD_ERASE:
+			XPROGProtocol_Erase();
+			break;
+		case XPROG_CMD_WRITE_MEM:
+			XPROGProtocol_WriteMemory();
+			break;
+		case XPROG_CMD_READ_MEM:
+			XPROGProtocol_ReadMemory();
+			break;
+		case XPROG_CMD_CRC:
+			XPROGProtocol_ReadCRC();
+			break;
+		case XPROG_CMD_SET_PARAM:
+			XPROGProtocol_SetParam();
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Handler for the XPROG ENTER_PROGMODE command to establish a connection with the attached device. */
+static void XPROGProtocol_EnterXPROGMode(void)
+{
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	bool NVMBusEnabled = false;
+
+	if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPROG_PROTOCOL_PDI)
+	  NVMBusEnabled = XMEGANVM_EnablePDI();
+	else if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPROG_PROTOCOL_TPI)
+	  NVMBusEnabled = TINYNVM_EnableTPI();
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_XPROG);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(XPROG_CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(NVMBusEnabled ? XPROG_ERR_OK : XPROG_ERR_FAILED);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the XPROG LEAVE_PROGMODE command to terminate the PDI programming connection with
+ *  the attached device.
+ */
+static void XPROGProtocol_LeaveXPROGMode(void)
+{
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPROG_PROTOCOL_PDI)
+	  XMEGANVM_DisablePDI();
+	else
+	  TINYNVM_DisableTPI();
+
+	#if defined(XCK_RESCUE_CLOCK_ENABLE) && defined(ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL)
+	/* If the XCK rescue clock option is enabled, we need to restart it once the
+	 * XPROG mode has been exited, since the XPROG protocol stops it after use. */
+	ISPTarget_ConfigureRescueClock();
+	#endif
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_XPROG);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(XPROG_CMD_LEAVE_PROGMODE);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(XPROG_ERR_OK);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the XPRG ERASE command to erase a specific memory address space in the attached device. */
+static void XPROGProtocol_Erase(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_OK;
+
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t  MemoryType;
+		uint32_t Address;
+	} Erase_XPROG_Params;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Erase_XPROG_Params, sizeof(Erase_XPROG_Params), NULL);
+	Erase_XPROG_Params.Address = SwapEndian_32(Erase_XPROG_Params.Address);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	uint8_t EraseCommand;
+
+	if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPROG_PROTOCOL_PDI)
+	{
+		/* Determine which NVM command to send to the device depending on the memory to erase */
+		switch (Erase_XPROG_Params.MemoryType)
+		{
+			case XPROG_ERASE_CHIP:
+				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_CHIPERASE;
+				break;
+			case XPROG_ERASE_APP:
+				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEAPPSEC;
+				break;
+			case XPROG_ERASE_BOOT:
+				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEBOOTSEC;
+				break;
+			case XPROG_ERASE_EEPROM:
+				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROM;
+				break;
+			case XPROG_ERASE_APP_PAGE:
+				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEAPPSECPAGE;
+				break;
+			case XPROG_ERASE_BOOT_PAGE:
+				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEBOOTSECPAGE;
+				break;
+			case XPROG_ERASE_EEPROM_PAGE:
+				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROMPAGE;
+				break;
+			case XPROG_ERASE_USERSIG:
+				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEUSERSIG;
+				break;
+			default:
+				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_NOOP;
+				break;
+		}
+
+		/* Erase the target memory, indicate timeout if occurred */
+		if (!(XMEGANVM_EraseMemory(EraseCommand, Erase_XPROG_Params.Address)))
+		  ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_TIMEOUT;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		if (Erase_XPROG_Params.MemoryType == XPROG_ERASE_CHIP)
+		  EraseCommand = TINY_NVM_CMD_CHIPERASE;
+		else
+		  EraseCommand = TINY_NVM_CMD_SECTIONERASE;
+
+		/* Erase the target memory, indicate timeout if occurred */
+		if (!(TINYNVM_EraseMemory(EraseCommand, Erase_XPROG_Params.Address)))
+		  ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_TIMEOUT;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_XPROG);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(XPROG_CMD_ERASE);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(ReturnStatus);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the XPROG WRITE_MEMORY command to write to a specific memory space within the attached device. */
+static void XPROGProtocol_WriteMemory(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_OK;
+
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t  MemoryType;
+		uint8_t  PageMode;
+		uint32_t Address;
+		uint16_t Length;
+		uint8_t  ProgData[256];
+	} WriteMemory_XPROG_Params;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&WriteMemory_XPROG_Params, (sizeof(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params) -
+	                                                    sizeof(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params).ProgData), NULL);
+	WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Address = SwapEndian_32(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Address);
+	WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Length  = SwapEndian_16(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Length);
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.ProgData, WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Length, NULL);
+
+	// The driver will terminate transfers that are a round multiple of the endpoint bank in size with a ZLP, need
+	// to catch this and discard it before continuing on with packet processing to prevent communication issues
+	if (((sizeof(uint8_t) + sizeof(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params) - sizeof(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.ProgData)) +
+	    WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Length) % AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE == 0)
+	{
+		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+		Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPROG_PROTOCOL_PDI)
+	{
+		/* Assume FLASH page programming by default, as it is the common case */
+		uint8_t WriteCommand     = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEFLASHPAGE;
+		uint8_t WriteBuffCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_LOADFLASHPAGEBUFF;
+		uint8_t EraseBuffCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEFLASHPAGEBUFF;
+		bool    PagedMemory      = true;
+
+		switch (WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.MemoryType)
+		{
+			case XPROG_MEM_TYPE_APPL:
+				WriteCommand     = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEAPPSECPAGE;
+				break;
+			case XPROG_MEM_TYPE_BOOT:
+				WriteCommand     = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEBOOTSECPAGE;
+				break;
+			case XPROG_MEM_TYPE_EEPROM:
+				WriteCommand     = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEWRITEEEPROMPAGE;
+				WriteBuffCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_LOADEEPROMPAGEBUFF;
+				EraseBuffCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROMPAGEBUFF;
+				break;
+			case XPROG_MEM_TYPE_USERSIG:
+				WriteCommand     = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEUSERSIG;
+				break;
+			case XPROG_MEM_TYPE_FUSE:
+				WriteCommand     = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEFUSE;
+				PagedMemory      = false;
+				break;
+			case XPROG_MEM_TYPE_LOCKBITS:
+				WriteCommand     = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITELOCK;
+				PagedMemory      = false;
+				break;
+		}
+
+		/* Send the appropriate memory write commands to the device, indicate timeout if occurred */
+		if ((PagedMemory && !(XMEGANVM_WritePageMemory(WriteBuffCommand, EraseBuffCommand, WriteCommand,
+													   WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.PageMode, WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Address,
+													   WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.ProgData, WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Length))) ||
+		   (!PagedMemory && !(XMEGANVM_WriteByteMemory(WriteCommand, WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Address,
+													   WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.ProgData[0]))))
+		{
+			ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_TIMEOUT;
+		}
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Send write command to the TPI device, indicate timeout if occurred */
+		if (!(TINYNVM_WriteMemory(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Address, WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.ProgData,
+		      WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Length)))
+		{
+			ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_TIMEOUT;
+		}
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_XPROG);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(XPROG_CMD_WRITE_MEM);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(ReturnStatus);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the XPROG READ_MEMORY command to read data from a specific address space within the
+ *  attached device.
+ */
+static void XPROGProtocol_ReadMemory(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_OK;
+
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t  MemoryType;
+		uint32_t Address;
+		uint16_t Length;
+	} ReadMemory_XPROG_Params;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&ReadMemory_XPROG_Params, sizeof(ReadMemory_XPROG_Params), NULL);
+	ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Address = SwapEndian_32(ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Address);
+	ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Length  = SwapEndian_16(ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Length);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	uint8_t ReadBuffer[256];
+
+	if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPROG_PROTOCOL_PDI)
+	{
+		/* Read the PDI target's memory, indicate timeout if occurred */
+		if (!(XMEGANVM_ReadMemory(ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Address, ReadBuffer, ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Length)))
+		  ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_TIMEOUT;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Read the TPI target's memory, indicate timeout if occurred */
+		if (!(TINYNVM_ReadMemory(ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Address, ReadBuffer, ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Length)))
+		  ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_TIMEOUT;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_XPROG);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(XPROG_CMD_READ_MEM);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(ReturnStatus);
+
+	if (ReturnStatus == XPROG_ERR_OK)
+	  Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(ReadBuffer, ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Length, NULL);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the XPROG CRC command to read a specific memory space's CRC value for comparison between the
+ *  attached device's memory and a data set on the host.
+ */
+static void XPROGProtocol_ReadCRC(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_OK;
+
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t CRCType;
+	} ReadCRC_XPROG_Params;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&ReadCRC_XPROG_Params, sizeof(ReadCRC_XPROG_Params), NULL);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	uint32_t MemoryCRC;
+
+	if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPROG_PROTOCOL_PDI)
+	{
+		uint8_t CRCCommand;
+
+		/* Determine which NVM command to send to the device depending on the memory to CRC */
+		switch (ReadCRC_XPROG_Params.CRCType)
+		{
+			case XPROG_CRC_APP:
+				CRCCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_APPCRC;
+				break;
+			case XPROG_CRC_BOOT:
+				CRCCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_BOOTCRC;
+				break;
+			default:
+				CRCCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_FLASHCRC;
+				break;
+		}
+
+		/* Perform and retrieve the memory CRC, indicate timeout if occurred */
+		if (!(XMEGANVM_GetMemoryCRC(CRCCommand, &MemoryCRC)))
+		  ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_TIMEOUT;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* TPI does not support memory CRC */
+		ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_FAILED;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_XPROG);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(XPROG_CMD_CRC);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(ReturnStatus);
+
+	if (ReturnStatus == XPROG_ERR_OK)
+	{
+		Endpoint_Write_8(MemoryCRC >> 16);
+		Endpoint_Write_16_LE(MemoryCRC & 0xFFFF);
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the XPROG SET_PARAM command to set a XPROG parameter for use when communicating with the
+ *  attached device.
+ */
+static void XPROGProtocol_SetParam(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_OK;
+
+	uint8_t XPROGParam = Endpoint_Read_8();
+
+	/* Determine which parameter is being set, store the new parameter value */
+	switch (XPROGParam)
+	{
+		case XPROG_PARAM_NVMBASE:
+			XPROG_Param_NVMBase       = Endpoint_Read_32_BE();
+			break;
+		case XPROG_PARAM_EEPPAGESIZE:
+			XPROG_Param_EEPageSize    = Endpoint_Read_16_BE();
+			break;
+		case XPROG_PARAM_NVMCMD_REG:
+			XPROG_Param_NVMCMDRegAddr = Endpoint_Read_8();
+			break;
+		case XPROG_PARAM_NVMCSR_REG:
+			XPROG_Param_NVMCSRRegAddr = Endpoint_Read_8();
+			break;
+		case XPROG_PARAM_UNKNOWN_1:
+			/* TODO: Undocumented parameter added in AVRStudio 5.1, purpose unknown. Must ACK and discard or
+			         the communication with AVRStudio 5.1 will fail.
+			*/
+			Endpoint_Discard_16();
+			break;
+		default:
+			ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_FAILED;
+			break;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_XPROG);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(XPROG_CMD_SET_PARAM);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(ReturnStatus);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..830abc26d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.h
@@ -0,0 +1,136 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for XPROGProtocol.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _XPROG_PROTOCOL_
+#define _XPROG_PROTOCOL_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <util/delay.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "../V2Protocol.h"
+		#include "XMEGANVM.h"
+		#include "TINYNVM.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+			/* On the XPLAIN board, we only need PDI programming
+			   for the ATXMEGA128A1 - disable ISP to prevent hardware
+			   damage and force-enable XPROG.
+			 */
+			#undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
+
+			#if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
+				#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
+			#endif
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define XPROG_CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE             0x01
+		#define XPROG_CMD_LEAVE_PROGMODE             0x02
+		#define XPROG_CMD_ERASE                      0x03
+		#define XPROG_CMD_WRITE_MEM                  0x04
+		#define XPROG_CMD_READ_MEM                   0x05
+		#define XPROG_CMD_CRC                        0x06
+		#define XPROG_CMD_SET_PARAM                  0x07
+
+		#define XPROG_MEM_TYPE_APPL                  1
+		#define XPROG_MEM_TYPE_BOOT                  2
+		#define XPROG_MEM_TYPE_EEPROM                3
+		#define XPROG_MEM_TYPE_FUSE                  4
+		#define XPROG_MEM_TYPE_LOCKBITS              5
+		#define XPROG_MEM_TYPE_USERSIG               6
+		#define XPROG_MEM_TYPE_FACTORY_CALIBRATION   7
+
+		#define XPROG_ERASE_CHIP                     1
+		#define XPROG_ERASE_APP                      2
+		#define XPROG_ERASE_BOOT                     3
+		#define XPROG_ERASE_EEPROM                   4
+		#define XPROG_ERASE_APP_PAGE                 5
+		#define XPROG_ERASE_BOOT_PAGE                6
+		#define XPROG_ERASE_EEPROM_PAGE              7
+		#define XPROG_ERASE_USERSIG                  8
+
+		#define XPROG_MEM_WRITE_ERASE                0
+		#define XPROG_MEM_WRITE_WRITE                1
+
+		#define XPROG_CRC_APP                        1
+		#define XPROG_CRC_BOOT                       2
+		#define XPROG_CRC_FLASH                      3
+
+		#define XPROG_ERR_OK                         0
+		#define XPROG_ERR_FAILED                     1
+		#define XPROG_ERR_COLLISION                  2
+		#define XPROG_ERR_TIMEOUT                    3
+
+		#define XPROG_PARAM_NVMBASE                  0x01
+		#define XPROG_PARAM_EEPPAGESIZE              0x02
+		#define XPROG_PARAM_NVMCMD_REG               0x03
+		#define XPROG_PARAM_NVMCSR_REG               0x04
+		#define XPROG_PARAM_UNKNOWN_1                0x05
+
+		#define XPROG_PROTOCOL_PDI                   0x00
+		#define XPROG_PROTOCOL_JTAG                  0x01
+		#define XPROG_PROTOCOL_TPI                   0x02
+
+		#define XPROG_PAGEMODE_WRITE                 (1 << 1)
+		#define XPROG_PAGEMODE_ERASE                 (1 << 0)
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern uint32_t XPROG_Param_NVMBase;
+		extern uint16_t XPROG_Param_EEPageSize;
+		extern uint8_t  XPROG_Param_NVMCSRRegAddr;
+		extern uint8_t  XPROG_Param_NVMCMDRegAddr;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void XPROGProtocol_SetMode(void);
+		void XPROGProtocol_Command(void);
+
+		#if (defined(INCLUDE_FROM_XPROGPROTOCOL_C) && defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL))
+			static void XPROGProtocol_EnterXPROGMode(void);
+			static void XPROGProtocol_LeaveXPROGMode(void);
+			static void XPROGProtocol_SetParam(void);
+			static void XPROGProtocol_Erase(void);
+			static void XPROGProtocol_WriteMemory(void);
+			static void XPROGProtocol_ReadMemory(void);
+			static void XPROGProtocol_ReadCRC(void);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..75b43f0fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.c
@@ -0,0 +1,209 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Target-related functions for the PDI Protocol decoder.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_XPROGTARGET_C
+#include "XPROGTarget.h"
+
+#if defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+
+/** Flag to indicate if the USART is currently in Tx or Rx mode. */
+bool IsSending;
+
+/** Enables the target's PDI interface, holding the target in reset until PDI mode is exited. */
+void XPROGTarget_EnableTargetPDI(void)
+{
+	IsSending = false;
+
+	/* Set Tx and XCK as outputs, Rx as input */
+	DDRD |=  (1 << 5) | (1 << 3);
+	DDRD &= ~(1 << 2);
+
+	/* Set DATA line high for at least 90ns to disable /RESET functionality */
+	PORTD |= (1 << 3);
+	_delay_us(100);
+
+	/* Set up the synchronous USART for XMEGA communications - 8 data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits */
+	UBRR1  = ((F_CPU / 2 / XPROG_HARDWARE_SPEED) - 1);
+	UCSR1B = (1 << TXEN1);
+	UCSR1C = (1 << UMSEL10) | (1 << UPM11) | (1 << USBS1) | (1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10) | (1 << UCPOL1);
+
+	/* Send two IDLEs of 12 bits each to enable PDI interface (need at least 16 idle bits) */
+	XPROGTarget_SendIdle();
+	XPROGTarget_SendIdle();
+}
+
+/** Enables the target's TPI interface, holding the target in reset until TPI mode is exited. */
+void XPROGTarget_EnableTargetTPI(void)
+{
+	IsSending = false;
+
+	/* Set /RESET line low for at least 400ns to enable TPI functionality */
+	AUX_LINE_DDR  |=  AUX_LINE_MASK;
+	AUX_LINE_PORT &= ~AUX_LINE_MASK;
+	_delay_us(100);
+
+	/* Set Tx and XCK as outputs, Rx as input */
+	DDRD |=  (1 << 5) | (1 << 3);
+	DDRD &= ~(1 << 2);
+
+	/* Set up the synchronous USART for TPI communications - 8 data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits */
+	UBRR1  = ((F_CPU / 2 / XPROG_HARDWARE_SPEED) - 1);
+	UCSR1B = (1 << TXEN1);
+	UCSR1C = (1 << UMSEL10) | (1 << UPM11) | (1 << USBS1) | (1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10) | (1 << UCPOL1);
+
+	/* Send two IDLEs of 12 bits each to enable TPI interface (need at least 16 idle bits) */
+	XPROGTarget_SendIdle();
+	XPROGTarget_SendIdle();
+}
+
+/** Disables the target's PDI interface, exits programming mode and starts the target's application. */
+void XPROGTarget_DisableTargetPDI(void)
+{
+	/* Switch to Rx mode to ensure that all pending transmissions are complete */
+	if (IsSending)
+	  XPROGTarget_SetRxMode();
+
+	/* Turn off receiver and transmitter of the USART, clear settings */
+	UCSR1A  = ((1 << TXC1) | (1 << RXC1));
+	UCSR1B  = 0;
+	UCSR1C  = 0;
+
+	/* Tristate all pins */
+	DDRD  &= ~((1 << 5) | (1 << 3));
+	PORTD &= ~((1 << 5) | (1 << 3) | (1 << 2));
+}
+
+/** Disables the target's TPI interface, exits programming mode and starts the target's application. */
+void XPROGTarget_DisableTargetTPI(void)
+{
+	/* Switch to Rx mode to ensure that all pending transmissions are complete */
+	if (IsSending)
+	  XPROGTarget_SetRxMode();
+
+	/* Turn off receiver and transmitter of the USART, clear settings */
+	UCSR1A |= (1 << TXC1) | (1 << RXC1);
+	UCSR1B  = 0;
+	UCSR1C  = 0;
+
+	/* Set all USART lines as inputs, tristate */
+	DDRD  &= ~((1 << 5) | (1 << 3));
+	PORTD &= ~((1 << 5) | (1 << 3) | (1 << 2));
+
+	/* Tristate target /RESET line */
+	AUX_LINE_DDR  &= ~AUX_LINE_MASK;
+	AUX_LINE_PORT &= ~AUX_LINE_MASK;
+}
+
+/** Sends a byte via the USART.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Byte  Byte to send through the USART
+ */
+void XPROGTarget_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+{
+	/* Switch to Tx mode if currently in Rx mode */
+	if (!(IsSending))
+	  XPROGTarget_SetTxMode();
+
+	/* Wait until there is space in the hardware Tx buffer before writing */
+	while (!(UCSR1A & (1 << UDRE1)));
+	UCSR1A |= (1 << TXC1);
+	UDR1    = Byte;
+}
+
+/** Receives a byte via the hardware USART, blocking until data is received or timeout expired.
+ *
+ *  \return Received byte from the USART
+ */
+uint8_t XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte(void)
+{
+	/* Switch to Rx mode if currently in Tx mode */
+	if (IsSending)
+	  XPROGTarget_SetRxMode();
+
+	/* Wait until a byte has been received before reading */
+	while (!(UCSR1A & (1 << RXC1)) && TimeoutTicksRemaining);
+
+	return UDR1;
+}
+
+/** Sends an IDLE via the USART to the attached target, consisting of a full frame of idle bits. */
+void XPROGTarget_SendIdle(void)
+{
+	/* Switch to Tx mode if currently in Rx mode */
+	if (!(IsSending))
+	  XPROGTarget_SetTxMode();
+
+	/* Need to do nothing for a full frame to send an IDLE */
+	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < BITS_IN_USART_FRAME; i++)
+	{
+		/* Wait for a full cycle of the clock */
+		while (PIND & (1 << 5));
+		while (!(PIND & (1 << 5)));
+		while (PIND & (1 << 5));
+	}
+}
+
+static void XPROGTarget_SetTxMode(void)
+{
+	/* Wait for a full cycle of the clock */
+	while (PIND & (1 << 5));
+	while (!(PIND & (1 << 5)));
+	while (PIND & (1 << 5));
+
+	PORTD  |=  (1 << 3);
+	DDRD   |=  (1 << 3);
+
+	UCSR1B &= ~(1 << RXEN1);
+	UCSR1B |=  (1 << TXEN1);
+
+	IsSending = true;
+}
+
+static void XPROGTarget_SetRxMode(void)
+{
+	while (!(UCSR1A & (1 << TXC1)));
+	UCSR1A |=  (1 << TXC1);
+
+	UCSR1B &= ~(1 << TXEN1);
+	UCSR1B |=  (1 << RXEN1);
+
+	DDRD   &= ~(1 << 3);
+	PORTD  &= ~(1 << 3);
+
+	IsSending = false;
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..560d39d96
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.h
@@ -0,0 +1,136 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for XPROGTarget.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _XPROG_TARGET_
+#define _XPROG_TARGET_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+
+		#include "../V2Protocol.h"
+		#include "XPROGProtocol.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+			#undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
+
+			#if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
+				#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
+			#endif
+		#endif
+
+		/** Serial carrier TPI/PDI speed in Hz, when hardware TPI/PDI mode is used. */
+		#define XPROG_HARDWARE_SPEED       2000000
+
+		/** Total number of bits in a single USART frame. */
+		#define BITS_IN_USART_FRAME        12
+
+ 		/** \name PDI Related Constants
+ 		 * @{
+ 		 */
+		#define PDI_CMD_LDS(AddressSize, DataSize)  (0x00 | (  AddressSize << 2) | DataSize)
+		#define PDI_CMD_LD(PointerAccess, DataSize) (0x20 | (PointerAccess << 2) | DataSize)
+		#define PDI_CMD_STS(AddressSize, DataSize)  (0x40 | (  AddressSize << 2) | DataSize)
+		#define PDI_CMD_ST(PointerAccess, DataSize) (0x60 | (PointerAccess << 2) | DataSize)
+		#define PDI_CMD_LDCS(PDIReg)                (0x80 | PDIReg)
+		#define PDI_CMD_REPEAT(DataSize)            (0xA0 | DataSize)
+		#define PDI_CMD_STCS(PDIReg)                (0xC0 | PDIReg)
+		#define PDI_CMD_KEY                         0xE0
+
+		#define PDI_REG_STATUS             0
+		#define PDI_REG_RESET              1
+		#define PDI_REG_CTRL               2
+
+		#define PDI_STATUS_NVM             (1 << 1)
+
+		#define PDI_RESET_KEY              0x59
+		#define PDI_NVMENABLE_KEY          (uint8_t[]){0x12, 0x89, 0xAB, 0x45, 0xCD, 0xD8, 0x88, 0xFF}
+
+		#define PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE         0
+		#define PDI_DATASIZE_2BYTES        1
+		#define PDI_DATASIZE_3BYTES        2
+		#define PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES        3
+
+		#define PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT       0
+		#define PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI    1
+		#define PDI_POINTER_DIRECT         2
+ 		/** @} */
+
+ 		/** \name TPI Related Constants
+ 		 * @{
+ 		 */
+ 		#define TPI_CMD_SLD(PointerAccess) (0x20 | PointerAccess)
+		#define TPI_CMD_SST(PointerAccess) (0x60 | PointerAccess)
+		#define TPI_CMD_SSTPR              0x68
+		#define TPI_CMD_SIN(Address)       (0x10 | ((Address & 0x30) << 1) | (Address & 0x0F))
+		#define TPI_CMD_SOUT(Address)      (0x90 | ((Address & 0x30) << 1) | (Address & 0x0F))
+		#define TPI_CMD_SLDCS(TPIReg)      (0x80 | TPIReg)
+		#define TPI_CMD_SSTCS(TPIReg)      (0xC0 | TPIReg)
+		#define TPI_CMD_SKEY               0xE0
+
+		#define TPI_REG_STATUS             0x00
+		#define TPI_REG_CTRL               0x02
+		#define TPI_REG_ID                 0x0F
+
+		#define TPI_STATUS_NVM             (1 << 1)
+
+		#define TPI_NVMENABLE_KEY          (uint8_t[]){0x12, 0x89, 0xAB, 0x45, 0xCD, 0xD8, 0x88, 0xFF}
+
+		#define TPI_POINTER_INDIRECT       0
+		#define TPI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI    4
+ 		/** @} */
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void    XPROGTarget_EnableTargetPDI(void);
+		void    XPROGTarget_EnableTargetTPI(void);
+		void    XPROGTarget_DisableTargetPDI(void);
+		void    XPROGTarget_DisableTargetTPI(void);
+		void    XPROGTarget_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte);
+		uint8_t XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte(void);
+		void    XPROGTarget_SendIdle(void);
+		bool    XPROGTarget_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy(void);
+
+		#if (defined(INCLUDE_FROM_XPROGTARGET_C) && defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL))
+			static void XPROGTarget_SetTxMode(void);
+			static void XPROGTarget_SetRxMode(void);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d89b8852f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="AVRISP-MKII Clone Programmer" id="lufa.projects.avrispmkii_clone.avr8">

+ 		<require idref="lufa.projects.avrispmkii_clone"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<!-- Required by the XPLAIN Bridge project as well, so split into a meta module -->

+	<module type="meta" id="lufa.projects.avrispmkii_clone.src" caption="AVRISP-MKII Clone Programmer">

+		<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<build type="include-path" value="."/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="AVRISPDescriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="AVRISPDescriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="include-path" value="Lib"/>

+

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/V2ProtocolConstants.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/V2Protocol.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/V2Protocol.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/V2ProtocolParams.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/V2ProtocolParams.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.adc"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.spi"/>

+	</module>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.projects.avrispmkii_clone" caption="AVRISP-MKII Clone Programmer">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Clone firmware of the Atmel AVRISP-MKII programmer.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="AVRISP-MKII.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="AVRISP-MKII.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="AVRISP-MKII.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.projects.avrispmkii_clone.src"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.adc"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.spi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6c8698751
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "AVRISP-MKII Clone Programmer Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c89648d5a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = AVRISP-MKII
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c AVRISPDescriptors.c Lib/V2Protocol.c Lib/V2ProtocolParams.c Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.c Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.c Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.c \
+               Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.c Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.c Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Benito.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Benito.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b5a0560f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Benito.c
@@ -0,0 +1,311 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the Benito project. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "Benito.h"
+
+/** Circular buffer to hold data from the serial port before it is sent to the host. */
+static RingBuffer_t USARTtoUSB_Buffer;
+
+/** Underlying data buffer for \ref USARTtoUSB_Buffer, where the stored bytes are located. */
+static uint8_t      USARTtoUSB_Buffer_Data[128];
+
+/** Pulse generation counters to keep track of the number of milliseconds remaining for each pulse type */
+volatile struct
+{
+	uint8_t ResetPulse; /**< Milliseconds remaining for target /RESET pulse */
+	uint8_t TxLEDPulse; /**< Milliseconds remaining for data Tx LED pulse */
+	uint8_t RxLEDPulse; /**< Milliseconds remaining for data Rx LED pulse */
+	uint8_t PingPongLEDPulse; /**< Milliseconds remaining for enumeration Tx/Rx ping-pong LED pulse */
+} PulseMSRemaining;
+
+/** Milliseconds remaining until the receive buffer is flushed to the USB host */
+uint8_t FlushPeriodRemaining = RECEIVE_BUFFER_FLUSH_MS;
+
+/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+				.DataINEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address          = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint =
+					{
+						.Address          = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+				.NotificationEndpoint =
+					{
+						.Address          = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	RingBuffer_InitBuffer(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer, USARTtoUSB_Buffer_Data, sizeof(USARTtoUSB_Buffer_Data));
+
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		/* Echo bytes from the host to the target via the hardware USART */
+		if ((UCSR1A & (1 << UDRE1)) && CDC_Device_BytesReceived(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface))
+		{
+			UDR1 = CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+
+			LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(LEDMASK_TX);
+			PulseMSRemaining.TxLEDPulse = TX_RX_LED_PULSE_MS;
+		}
+
+		/* Check if the millisecond timer has elapsed */
+		if (TIFR0 & (1 << OCF0A))
+		{
+			/* Clear flush timer expiry flag */
+			TIFR0 |= (1 << TOV0);
+
+			/* Check if the reset pulse period has elapsed, if so tristate the target reset line */
+			if (PulseMSRemaining.ResetPulse && !(--PulseMSRemaining.ResetPulse))
+			{
+				LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(LEDMASK_BUSY);
+				AVR_RESET_LINE_DDR &= ~AVR_RESET_LINE_MASK;
+			}
+
+			/* Check if the LEDs should be ping-ponging (during enumeration) */
+			if (PulseMSRemaining.PingPongLEDPulse && !(--PulseMSRemaining.PingPongLEDPulse))
+			{
+				LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDMASK_TX | LEDMASK_RX);
+				PulseMSRemaining.PingPongLEDPulse = PING_PONG_LED_PULSE_MS;
+			}
+
+			/* Turn off TX LED(s) once the TX pulse period has elapsed */
+			if (PulseMSRemaining.TxLEDPulse && !(--PulseMSRemaining.TxLEDPulse))
+			  LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(LEDMASK_TX);
+
+			/* Turn off RX LED(s) once the RX pulse period has elapsed */
+			if (PulseMSRemaining.RxLEDPulse && !(--PulseMSRemaining.RxLEDPulse))
+			  LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(LEDMASK_RX);
+
+			/* Check if the receive buffer flush period has expired */
+			uint16_t BufferCount = RingBuffer_GetCount(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer);
+			if (!(--FlushPeriodRemaining) || (BufferCount > 200))
+			{
+				FlushPeriodRemaining = RECEIVE_BUFFER_FLUSH_MS;
+
+				/* Start RX LED indicator pulse */
+				if (BufferCount)
+				{
+					LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(LEDMASK_RX);
+					PulseMSRemaining.RxLEDPulse = TX_RX_LED_PULSE_MS;
+				}
+
+				/* Echo bytes from the target to the host via the virtual serial port */
+				while (BufferCount--)
+				{
+					/* Try to send the next byte of data to the host, abort if there is an error without dequeuing */
+					if (CDC_Device_SendByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface,
+											RingBuffer_Peek(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer)) != ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError)
+					{
+						break;
+					}
+
+					/* Dequeue the already sent byte from the buffer now we have confirmed that no transmission error occurred */
+					RingBuffer_Remove(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer);
+				}
+			}
+		}
+
+		CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Millisecond Timer Interrupt */
+	OCR0A  = (F_CPU / 64 / 1000);
+	TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01);
+	TCCR0B = ((1 << CS01) | (1 << CS00));
+
+	/* Tristate target /RESET Line */
+	AVR_RESET_LINE_PORT &= ~AVR_RESET_LINE_MASK;
+	AVR_RESET_LINE_DDR  &= ~AVR_RESET_LINE_MASK;
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	PulseMSRemaining.PingPongLEDPulse = PING_PONG_LED_PULSE_MS;
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_TX);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	PulseMSRemaining.PingPongLEDPulse = 0;
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_NO_LEDS);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	ConfigSuccess &= CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+
+	PulseMSRemaining.PingPongLEDPulse = 0;
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDS_NO_LEDS : LEDMASK_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to
+ *  the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing
+ *  internally.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the CDC Class driver Line Encoding Changed event.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the CDC class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ */
+void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t ConfigMask = 0;
+
+	switch (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.ParityType)
+	{
+		case CDC_PARITY_Odd:
+			ConfigMask = ((1 << UPM11) | (1 << UPM10));
+			break;
+		case CDC_PARITY_Even:
+			ConfigMask = (1 << UPM11);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	if (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.CharFormat == CDC_LINEENCODING_TwoStopBits)
+	  ConfigMask |= (1 << USBS1);
+
+	switch (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.DataBits)
+	{
+		case 6:
+			ConfigMask |= (1 << UCSZ10);
+			break;
+		case 7:
+			ConfigMask |= (1 << UCSZ11);
+			break;
+		case 8:
+			ConfigMask |= ((1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10));
+			break;
+	}
+
+	/* Must turn off USART before reconfiguring it, otherwise incorrect operation may occur */
+	UCSR1B = 0;
+	UCSR1A = 0;
+	UCSR1C = 0;
+
+	/* Set the new baud rate before configuring the USART */
+	UBRR1  = SERIAL_2X_UBBRVAL(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS);
+
+	/* Reconfigure the USART in double speed mode for a wider baud rate range at the expense of accuracy */
+	UCSR1C = ConfigMask;
+	UCSR1A = (1 << U2X1);
+	UCSR1B = ((1 << RXCIE1) | (1 << TXEN1) | (1 << RXEN1));
+}
+
+/** ISR to manage the reception of data from the serial port, placing received bytes into a circular buffer
+ *  for later transmission to the host.
+ */
+ISR(USART1_RX_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	uint8_t ReceivedByte = UDR1;
+
+	if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  RingBuffer_Insert(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer, ReceivedByte);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the CDC Class driver Host-to-Device Line Encoding Changed event.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the CDC class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ */
+void EVENT_CDC_Device_ControLineStateChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	static bool PreviousDTRState = false;
+	bool        CurrentDTRState  = (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.HostToDevice & CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_DTR);
+
+	/* Check if the DTR line has been asserted - if so, start the target AVR's reset pulse */
+	if (!(PreviousDTRState) && CurrentDTRState)
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_BUSY);
+
+		AVR_RESET_LINE_DDR |= AVR_RESET_LINE_MASK;
+		PulseMSRemaining.ResetPulse = AVR_RESET_PULSE_MS;
+	}
+
+	PreviousDTRState = CurrentDTRState;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Benito.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Benito.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b77409bd0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Benito.h
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Benito.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _BENITO_H_
+#define _BENITO_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/RingBuffer.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate TX activity. */
+		#define LEDMASK_TX               LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate RX activity. */
+		#define LEDMASK_RX               LEDS_LED2
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_ERROR            (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_BUSY             (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+		void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo);
+		void EVENT_CDC_Device_ControLineStateChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Benito.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Benito.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..07bec52b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Benito.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Benito Arduino Programmer Project
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Device</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *   <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard \n
+ *       Arduino Bootloader Specification</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Firmware for a USB AVR powered programmer for Arduino boards using the official Arduino bootloader. This
+ *  project acts like a regular USB to Serial bridge, except that asserting the DTR line will cause a pulse
+ *  to appear on a given port pin, to control the target's /RESET pin.
+ *
+ *  This is primarily designed to fit the Benito board from www.dorkbotpdx.org, but will suit all USB AVRs.
+ *
+ *  After running this project for the first time on a new computer, you will need to supply the .INF file located
+ *  in this project's directory as the device's driver when running under Windows. This will enable Windows to use
+ *  its inbuilt CDC drivers, negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other Operating Systems should
+ *  automatically use their own inbuilt CDC-ACM drivers.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AVR_RESET_LINE_PORT</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Indicates the PORT register of the pin used to generate the target /RESET line pulse.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AVR_RESET_LINE_DDR</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Indicates the DDR register of the pin used to generate the target /RESET line pulse.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AVR_RESET_LINE_MASK</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Indicates the mask of the pin used to generate the target /RESET line pulse.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AVR_RESET_PULSE_MS</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Pulse length in milliseconds for the target /RESET pulse.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>TX_RX_LED_PULSE_MS</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Pulse length in milliseconds for the activity Tx/Rx LEDs.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>PING_PONG_LED_PULSE_MS</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Pulse length in milliseconds for the enumeration LED ping-ponging between toggles.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>RECEIVE_BUFFER_FLUSH_MS</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Period between flushings of received data buffer to the attached USB host.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..85bf57938
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
+ *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
+ *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
+ *  makefile or build system.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#define AVR_RESET_LINE_PORT            PORTD
+	#define AVR_RESET_LINE_DDR             DDRD
+	#define AVR_RESET_LINE_MASK            (1 << 4)
+
+	#define AVR_RESET_PULSE_MS             10
+
+	#define TX_RX_LED_PULSE_MS             30
+	#define PING_PONG_LED_PULSE_MS         100
+
+	#define RECEIVE_BUFFER_FLUSH_MS        10
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1bf1f19e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e21a6ee54
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,244 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+	.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2060,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Header =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.CDCSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_ACM =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM,
+
+			.Capabilities           = 0x06,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Union =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union,
+
+			.MasterInterfaceNumber  = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.SlaveInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_NotificationEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Benito Arduino Programmer");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..95223ee2d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 2)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+
+			// CDC Command Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t    CDC_Functional_Header;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t       CDC_Functional_ACM;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t     CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_NotificationEndpoint;
+
+			// CDC Data Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI = 0, /**< CDC CCI interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI = 1, /**< CDC DCI interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/LUFA Benito Programmer.inf b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/LUFA Benito Programmer.inf
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..75e93a8a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/LUFA Benito Programmer.inf
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+;************************************************************
+; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+;************************************************************
+
+[DefaultInstall]
+CopyINF="LUFA Benito Programmer.inf"
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+DriverVer=7/1/2012,10.0.0.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTx86, NTamd64, NTia64
+
+[SourceDisksNames]
+
+[SourceDisksFiles]
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+[DriverInstall]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=FakeModemCopyFileSection
+AddReg=DriverInstall.AddReg
+
+[DriverInstall.Services]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, LowerFilter_Service_Inst
+
+[DriverInstall.AddReg]
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"msports.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2060
+
+[DeviceList.NTx86]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2060
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2060
+
+[DeviceList.NTia64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2060
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org"
+DESCRIPTION="LUFA Benito Programmer"
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6f36da767
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Benito Programmer" id="lufa.projects.benito.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.projects.benito"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.projects.benito" caption="Benito Programmer">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Benito AVR programmer.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="CDC Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="Benito.txt"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="LUFA Benito Programmer.inf"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="Benito.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Benito.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ringbuffer"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..487c43c80
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "Benito Arduino Programmer Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a1fa59e35
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = atmega32u2
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = BENITO
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = Benito
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d657a214
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..924fe1dd2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.c
@@ -0,0 +1,325 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the HIDReportViewer project. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "HIDReportViewer.h"
+
+/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */
+static HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t Device_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipe             =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTPipe            =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.HIDInterfaceProtocol   = HID_CSCP_NonBootProtocol,
+				.HIDParserData          = &HIDReportInfo
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "HID Device Report Viewer Running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		RetrieveDeviceData();
+
+		HID_Host_USBTask(&Device_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Task to retrieve the HID device information from an attached device, and output
+ *  the relevant data to the serial port for analysis.
+ */
+void RetrieveDeviceData(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+	OutputReportSizes();
+	OutputParsedReportItems();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+}
+
+/** Prints a summary of the device's HID report sizes from the HID parser output to the serial port
+ *  for display to the user.
+ */
+void OutputReportSizes(void)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR("\r\n\r\nTotal Device Reports: %" PRId8 "\r\n"), HIDReportInfo.TotalDeviceReports);
+
+	for (uint8_t ReportIndex = 0; ReportIndex < HIDReportInfo.TotalDeviceReports; ReportIndex++)
+	{
+		const HID_ReportSizeInfo_t* CurrReportIDInfo = &HIDReportInfo.ReportIDSizes[ReportIndex];
+
+		uint8_t ReportSizeInBits      = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[HID_REPORT_ITEM_In];
+		uint8_t ReportSizeOutBits     = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out];
+		uint8_t ReportSizeFeatureBits = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature];
+
+		/* Print out the byte sizes of each report within the device */
+		printf_P(PSTR("  + Report ID 0x%02" PRIX8 "\r\n"
+					  "    - Input Data:   %" PRId8 " bits (%" PRId8 " bytes)\r\n"
+					  "    - Output Data:  %" PRId8 " bits (%" PRId8 " bytes)\r\n"
+					  "    - Feature Data: %" PRId8 " bits (%" PRId8 " bytes)\r\n"),
+				 CurrReportIDInfo->ReportID,
+				 ReportSizeInBits,
+				 ((ReportSizeInBits      >> 3) + ((ReportSizeInBits      & 0x07) != 0)),
+				 ReportSizeOutBits,
+				 ((ReportSizeOutBits     >> 3) + ((ReportSizeOutBits     & 0x07) != 0)),
+				 ReportSizeFeatureBits,
+				 ((ReportSizeFeatureBits >> 3) + ((ReportSizeFeatureBits & 0x07) != 0)));
+	}
+}
+
+/** Prints a summary of the device's parsed and stored report items along with their attributes
+ *  to the serial port for display to the user.
+ */
+void OutputParsedReportItems(void)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR("\r\nReport Items (%" PRId8 " in Table):\r\n"), HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems);
+
+	for (uint8_t ItemIndex = 0; ItemIndex < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ItemIndex++)
+	{
+		const HID_ReportItem_t* RItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ItemIndex];
+
+		printf_P(PSTR("  + Item %" PRId8 ":\r\n"
+					  "    - Report ID:          0x%02" PRIX8  "\r\n"
+					  "    - Data Direction:     %s\r\n"
+					  "    - Item Flags:         0x%02" PRIX8  "\r\n"
+					  "    - Item Offset (Bits): 0x%02" PRIX8  "\r\n"
+					  "    - Item Size (Bits):   0x%02" PRIX8  "\r\n"
+					  "    - Usage Page:         0x%04" PRIX16 "\r\n"
+					  "    - Usage:              0x%04" PRIX16 "\r\n"
+					  "    - Unit Type:          0x%08" PRIX32 "\r\n"
+					  "    - Unit Exponent:      0x%02" PRIX8  "\r\n"
+					  "    - Logical Minimum:    0x%08" PRIX32 "\r\n"
+					  "    - Logical Maximum:    0x%08" PRIX32 "\r\n"
+					  "    - Physical Minimum:   0x%08" PRIX32 "\r\n"
+					  "    - Physical Maximum:   0x%08" PRIX32 "\r\n"
+					  "    - Collection Path:\r\n"),
+				 ItemIndex,
+				 RItem->ReportID,
+				 ((RItem->ItemType == HID_REPORT_ITEM_In) ? "IN" : ((RItem->ItemType == HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out) ? "OUT" : "FEATURE")),
+				 RItem->ItemFlags,
+				 RItem->BitOffset,
+				 RItem->Attributes.BitSize,
+				 RItem->Attributes.Usage.Page,
+				 RItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage,
+				 RItem->Attributes.Unit.Type,
+				 RItem->Attributes.Unit.Exponent,
+				 RItem->Attributes.Logical.Minimum,
+				 RItem->Attributes.Logical.Maximum,
+				 RItem->Attributes.Physical.Minimum,
+				 RItem->Attributes.Physical.Maximum);
+
+		OutputCollectionPath(RItem->CollectionPath);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Prints the HID Collection path (along with each node's attributes) to the serial port
+ *  for display to the user, from the given starting node to the root node.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] CollectionPath  Starting HID Collection node to print
+ */
+void OutputCollectionPath(const HID_CollectionPath_t* const CollectionPath)
+{
+	const HID_CollectionPath_t* CurrentNode = CollectionPath;
+
+	while (CurrentNode != NULL)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR("      |\r\n"
+					  "      - Type:  0x%02" PRIX8 "\r\n"
+					  "      - Usage: 0x%02" PRIX8 "\r\n"),
+					  CurrentNode->Type, CurrentNode->Usage);
+
+		CurrentNode = CurrentNode->Parent;
+	}
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("      |\r\n"
+				  "      END\r\n"));
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+	if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+	                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Device_HID_Interface,
+	                            ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != HID_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid HID Device.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (HID_Host_SetReportProtocol(&Device_HID_Interface) != 0)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Report Protocol Mode.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("HID Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Callback for the HID Report Parser. This function is called each time the HID report parser is about to store
+ *  an IN, OUT or FEATURE item into the HIDReportInfo structure. To save on RAM, we are able to filter out items
+ *  we aren't interested in (preventing us from being able to extract them later on, but saving on the RAM they would
+ *  have occupied).
+ *
+ *  \param[in] CurrentItem  Pointer to the item the HID report parser is currently working with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the item should be stored into the HID report structure, \c false if it should be discarded
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* const CurrentItem)
+{
+	return true;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2b4edc39b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.h
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for HIDReportViewer.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _HID_REPORT_VIEWER_H_
+#define _HID_REPORT_VIEWER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+		#include <inttypes.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY         (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void RetrieveDeviceData(void);
+		void OutputReportSizes(void);
+		void OutputParsedReportItems(void);
+		void OutputCollectionPath(const HID_CollectionPath_t* const CollectionPath);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* const CurrentItem);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fccc892c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage HID Device Report Viewer Programmer Project
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Host</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Firmware for a HID Report viewer. This project is designed to aid in the debugging of USB HID Hosts, where the contents of an
+ *  unknown HID device's HID Report need to be examined. Once a HID device has been plugged into this application, the HID report
+ *  descriptor will be parsed using the internal LUFA HID report parser, and the results dumped to the serial port in a human
+ *  readable format. This output will contain information on the sizes of the reports within the device's HID interface, as well as
+ *  information on each report element (size, usage, minimum/maximum values, etc.).
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7819aabf8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="HID Report Viewer" id="lufa.projects.hid_viewer.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.projects.hid_viewer"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.projects.hid_viewer" caption="HID Report Viewer">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		HID device report viewer project.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="HIDReportViewer.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="HIDReportViewer.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="HIDReportViewer.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3a5ac5692
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "HID Device Report Viewer Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7336a7edf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = HIDReportViewer
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.Designer.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.Designer.cs
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2b189943a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.Designer.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,131 @@
+namespace CPUMonitor
+{
+    partial class frmCPU
+    {
+        /// <summary>
+        /// Required designer variable.
+        /// </summary>
+        private System.ComponentModel.IContainer components = null;
+
+        /// <summary>
+        /// Clean up any resources being used.
+        /// </summary>
+        /// <param name="disposing">true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false.</param>
+        protected override void Dispose(bool disposing)
+        {
+            if (disposing && (components != null))
+            {
+                components.Dispose();
+            }
+            base.Dispose(disposing);
+        }
+
+        #region Windows Form Designer generated code
+
+        /// <summary>
+        /// Required method for Designer support - do not modify
+        /// the contents of this method with the code editor.
+        /// </summary>
+        private void InitializeComponent()
+        {
+            this.components = new System.ComponentModel.Container();
+            this.serSerialPort = new System.IO.Ports.SerialPort(this.components);
+            this.tmrCPUTimer = new System.Windows.Forms.Timer(this.components);
+            this.cmbComPort = new System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox();
+            this.pcCPUUsage = new System.Diagnostics.PerformanceCounter();
+            this.lblCPU = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
+            this.nicoNotifyIcon = new System.Windows.Forms.NotifyIcon(this.components);
+            this.btnMinimizeToTray = new System.Windows.Forms.Button();
+            this.btnExit = new System.Windows.Forms.Button();
+            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.pcCPUUsage)).BeginInit();
+            this.SuspendLayout();
+            // 
+            // tmrCPUTimer
+            // 
+            this.tmrCPUTimer.Enabled = true;
+            this.tmrCPUTimer.Interval = 1000;
+            this.tmrCPUTimer.Tick += new System.EventHandler(this.tmrCPUTimer_Tick);
+            // 
+            // cmbComPort
+            // 
+            this.cmbComPort.FormattingEnabled = true;
+            this.cmbComPort.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(48, 12);
+            this.cmbComPort.Name = "cmbComPort";
+            this.cmbComPort.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(156, 21);
+            this.cmbComPort.TabIndex = 0;
+            this.cmbComPort.SelectedIndexChanged += new System.EventHandler(this.cbPort_SelectedIndexChanged);
+            // 
+            // pcCPUUsage
+            // 
+            this.pcCPUUsage.CategoryName = "Processor";
+            this.pcCPUUsage.CounterName = "% Processor Time";
+            this.pcCPUUsage.InstanceName = "_Total";
+            // 
+            // lblCPU
+            // 
+            this.lblCPU.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 14.25F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0)));
+            this.lblCPU.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(44, 36);
+            this.lblCPU.Name = "lblCPU";
+            this.lblCPU.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(160, 28);
+            this.lblCPU.TabIndex = 1;
+            this.lblCPU.Text = "0%";
+            this.lblCPU.TextAlign = System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.MiddleCenter;
+            // 
+            // nicoNotifyIcon
+            // 
+            this.nicoNotifyIcon.Text = "CPU Usage Monitor";
+            this.nicoNotifyIcon.Visible = true;
+            // 
+            // btnMinimizeToTray
+            // 
+            this.btnMinimizeToTray.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(12, 67);
+            this.btnMinimizeToTray.Name = "btnMinimizeToTray";
+            this.btnMinimizeToTray.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(111, 28);
+            this.btnMinimizeToTray.TabIndex = 2;
+            this.btnMinimizeToTray.Text = "Minimize to Tray";
+            this.btnMinimizeToTray.UseVisualStyleBackColor = true;
+            this.btnMinimizeToTray.Click += new System.EventHandler(this.btnMinimizeToTray_Click);
+            // 
+            // btnExit
+            // 
+            this.btnExit.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(126, 67);
+            this.btnExit.Name = "btnExit";
+            this.btnExit.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(111, 28);
+            this.btnExit.TabIndex = 3;
+            this.btnExit.Text = "Exit";
+            this.btnExit.UseVisualStyleBackColor = true;
+            this.btnExit.Click += new System.EventHandler(this.btnExit_Click);
+            // 
+            // frmCPU
+            // 
+            this.AutoScaleDimensions = new System.Drawing.SizeF(6F, 13F);
+            this.AutoScaleMode = System.Windows.Forms.AutoScaleMode.Font;
+            this.ClientSize = new System.Drawing.Size(249, 106);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.btnExit);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.btnMinimizeToTray);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.lblCPU);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.cmbComPort);
+            this.FormBorderStyle = System.Windows.Forms.FormBorderStyle.FixedSingle;
+            this.MaximizeBox = false;
+            this.Name = "frmCPU";
+            this.Text = "CPU Usage Monitor";
+            this.WindowState = System.Windows.Forms.FormWindowState.Minimized;
+            this.Load += new System.EventHandler(this.Form1_Load);
+            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.pcCPUUsage)).EndInit();
+            this.ResumeLayout(false);
+
+        }
+
+        #endregion
+
+        private System.IO.Ports.SerialPort serSerialPort;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Timer tmrCPUTimer;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox cmbComPort;
+        private System.Diagnostics.PerformanceCounter pcCPUUsage;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblCPU;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.NotifyIcon nicoNotifyIcon;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Button btnMinimizeToTray;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Button btnExit;
+    }
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.cs
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..32543fc59
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+using System;
+using System.Collections.Generic;
+using System.ComponentModel;
+using System.Data;
+using System.Drawing;
+using System.Linq;
+using System.Text;
+using System.Windows.Forms;
+using Microsoft.Win32;
+
+namespace CPUMonitor
+{
+    public partial class frmCPU : Form
+    {
+        private RegistryKey AppRegKey;
+
+        private const int LIGHT_MAX = 0x1F;
+
+        public frmCPU()
+        {
+            InitializeComponent();
+
+            nicoNotifyIcon.Icon = this.Icon;
+            nicoNotifyIcon.MouseClick += new MouseEventHandler(TrayIconClick);        
+        }
+
+        private void Form1_Load(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            AppRegKey = Registry.CurrentUser.CreateSubKey("Software\\CPUMonitor");
+
+            String[] PortNames = System.IO.Ports.SerialPort.GetPortNames();
+            Array.Sort<String>(PortNames, delegate(string strA, string strB) { return int.Parse(strA.Substring(3)).CompareTo(int.Parse(strB.Substring(3))); });
+            cmbComPort.Items.Clear();
+            cmbComPort.Items.AddRange(PortNames);
+
+            cmbComPort.SelectedIndex = System.Convert.ToInt32(AppRegKey.GetValue("Port", "1")) - 1;
+            serSerialPort.PortName = cmbComPort.Text;
+
+            Hide();
+        }
+
+        private void NotifyLight(int Red, int Green, int Blue)
+        {
+            byte[] buffer = new byte[3];
+            buffer[0] = (byte)(0x80 | (Red & LIGHT_MAX));
+            buffer[1] = (byte)(0x40 | (Green & LIGHT_MAX));
+            buffer[2] = (byte)(0x20 | (Blue & LIGHT_MAX));
+
+            try
+            {
+                serSerialPort.PortName = cmbComPort.Text;
+                serSerialPort.Open();
+                serSerialPort.Write(buffer, 0, buffer.Length);
+                serSerialPort.Close();
+            }
+            catch (Exception e)
+            {
+
+            }
+        }
+
+        private void tmrCPUTimer_Tick(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            float CPUUsage = pcCPUUsage.NextValue();
+
+            int Red = 0;
+            int Green = 0;
+            int Blue = 0;
+
+            if (CPUUsage < 25)
+            {
+                Green = (int)((LIGHT_MAX / 25) * CPUUsage);
+            }
+            else if (CPUUsage < 50)
+            {
+                Blue = (int)((LIGHT_MAX / 25) * (CPUUsage - 25));
+                Green = LIGHT_MAX - Blue;
+            }
+            else if (CPUUsage < 75)
+            {
+                Red = (int)((LIGHT_MAX / 25) * (CPUUsage - 50));
+                Blue = LIGHT_MAX - Red;
+            }
+            else
+            {
+                Red = LIGHT_MAX;
+            }
+
+            NotifyLight(Red, Green, Blue);
+            lblCPU.Text = ((int)CPUUsage).ToString() + "%";
+        }
+
+        private void btnExit_Click(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            Application.Exit();
+        }
+
+        private void btnMinimizeToTray_Click(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            this.Hide();
+        }
+
+        private void TrayIconClick(object sender, MouseEventArgs e)
+        {
+            this.Show();
+            this.WindowState = FormWindowState.Normal;
+        }
+
+        private void cbPort_SelectedIndexChanged(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            AppRegKey.SetValue("Port", cmbComPort.SelectedIndex + 1);
+            serSerialPort.PortName = cmbComPort.Text;
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.csproj b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.csproj
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d568a9dc4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.csproj
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<Project ToolsVersion="4.0" DefaultTargets="Build" xmlns="http://schemas.microsoft.com/developer/msbuild/2003">
+  <PropertyGroup>
+    <Configuration Condition=" '$(Configuration)' == '' ">Debug</Configuration>
+    <Platform Condition=" '$(Platform)' == '' ">AnyCPU</Platform>
+    <ProductVersion>9.0.21022</ProductVersion>
+    <SchemaVersion>2.0</SchemaVersion>
+    <ProjectGuid>{6040B049-4241-4FFD-B388-AACDA78D1469}</ProjectGuid>
+    <OutputType>WinExe</OutputType>
+    <AppDesignerFolder>Properties</AppDesignerFolder>
+    <RootNamespace>CPUMonitor</RootNamespace>
+    <AssemblyName>CPUMonitor</AssemblyName>
+    <TargetFrameworkVersion>v3.5</TargetFrameworkVersion>
+    <FileAlignment>512</FileAlignment>
+    <FileUpgradeFlags>
+    </FileUpgradeFlags>
+    <OldToolsVersion>3.5</OldToolsVersion>
+    <UpgradeBackupLocation />
+  </PropertyGroup>
+  <PropertyGroup Condition=" '$(Configuration)|$(Platform)' == 'Debug|AnyCPU' ">
+    <DebugSymbols>true</DebugSymbols>
+    <DebugType>full</DebugType>
+    <Optimize>false</Optimize>
+    <OutputPath>bin\Debug\</OutputPath>
+    <DefineConstants>DEBUG;TRACE</DefineConstants>
+    <ErrorReport>prompt</ErrorReport>
+    <WarningLevel>4</WarningLevel>
+  </PropertyGroup>
+  <PropertyGroup Condition=" '$(Configuration)|$(Platform)' == 'Release|AnyCPU' ">
+    <DebugType>pdbonly</DebugType>
+    <Optimize>true</Optimize>
+    <OutputPath>bin\Release\</OutputPath>
+    <DefineConstants>TRACE</DefineConstants>
+    <ErrorReport>prompt</ErrorReport>
+    <WarningLevel>4</WarningLevel>
+  </PropertyGroup>
+  <ItemGroup>
+    <Reference Include="System" />
+    <Reference Include="System.Core">
+      <RequiredTargetFramework>3.5</RequiredTargetFramework>
+    </Reference>
+    <Reference Include="System.Xml.Linq">
+      <RequiredTargetFramework>3.5</RequiredTargetFramework>
+    </Reference>
+    <Reference Include="System.Data.DataSetExtensions">
+      <RequiredTargetFramework>3.5</RequiredTargetFramework>
+    </Reference>
+    <Reference Include="System.Data" />
+    <Reference Include="System.Deployment" />
+    <Reference Include="System.Drawing" />
+    <Reference Include="System.Windows.Forms" />
+    <Reference Include="System.Xml" />
+  </ItemGroup>
+  <ItemGroup>
+    <Compile Include="CPUMonitor.cs">
+      <SubType>Form</SubType>
+    </Compile>
+    <Compile Include="CPUMonitor.Designer.cs">
+      <DependentUpon>CPUMonitor.cs</DependentUpon>
+    </Compile>
+    <Compile Include="Program.cs" />
+    <Compile Include="Properties\AssemblyInfo.cs" />
+    <EmbeddedResource Include="CPUMonitor.resx">
+      <DependentUpon>CPUMonitor.cs</DependentUpon>
+      <SubType>Designer</SubType>
+    </EmbeddedResource>
+    <EmbeddedResource Include="Properties\Resources.resx">
+      <Generator>ResXFileCodeGenerator</Generator>
+      <LastGenOutput>Resources.Designer.cs</LastGenOutput>
+      <SubType>Designer</SubType>
+    </EmbeddedResource>
+    <Compile Include="Properties\Resources.Designer.cs">
+      <AutoGen>True</AutoGen>
+      <DependentUpon>Resources.resx</DependentUpon>
+      <DesignTime>True</DesignTime>
+    </Compile>
+    <None Include="Properties\Settings.settings">
+      <Generator>SettingsSingleFileGenerator</Generator>
+      <LastGenOutput>Settings.Designer.cs</LastGenOutput>
+    </None>
+    <Compile Include="Properties\Settings.Designer.cs">
+      <AutoGen>True</AutoGen>
+      <DependentUpon>Settings.settings</DependentUpon>
+      <DesignTimeSharedInput>True</DesignTimeSharedInput>
+    </Compile>
+  </ItemGroup>
+  <Import Project="$(MSBuildToolsPath)\Microsoft.CSharp.targets" />
+  <!-- To modify your build process, add your task inside one of the targets below and uncomment it. 
+       Other similar extension points exist, see Microsoft.Common.targets.
+  <Target Name="BeforeBuild">
+  </Target>
+  <Target Name="AfterBuild">
+  </Target>
+  -->
+</Project>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.resx b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.resx
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c62b1b020
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.resx
@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<root>
+  <!-- 
+    Microsoft ResX Schema 
+    
+    Version 2.0
+    
+    The primary goals of this format is to allow a simple XML format 
+    that is mostly human readable. The generation and parsing of the 
+    various data types are done through the TypeConverter classes 
+    associated with the data types.
+    
+    Example:
+    
+    ... ado.net/XML headers & schema ...
+    <resheader name="resmimetype">text/microsoft-resx</resheader>
+    <resheader name="version">2.0</resheader>
+    <resheader name="reader">System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader>
+    <resheader name="writer">System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader>
+    <data name="Name1"><value>this is my long string</value><comment>this is a comment</comment></data>
+    <data name="Color1" type="System.Drawing.Color, System.Drawing">Blue</data>
+    <data name="Bitmap1" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64">
+        <value>[base64 mime encoded serialized .NET Framework object]</value>
+    </data>
+    <data name="Icon1" type="System.Drawing.Icon, System.Drawing" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64">
+        <value>[base64 mime encoded string representing a byte array form of the .NET Framework object]</value>
+        <comment>This is a comment</comment>
+    </data>
+                
+    There are any number of "resheader" rows that contain simple 
+    name/value pairs.
+    
+    Each data row contains a name, and value. The row also contains a 
+    type or mimetype. Type corresponds to a .NET class that support 
+    text/value conversion through the TypeConverter architecture. 
+    Classes that don't support this are serialized and stored with the 
+    mimetype set.
+    
+    The mimetype is used for serialized objects, and tells the 
+    ResXResourceReader how to depersist the object. This is currently not 
+    extensible. For a given mimetype the value must be set accordingly:
+    
+    Note - application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64 is the format 
+    that the ResXResourceWriter will generate, however the reader can 
+    read any of the formats listed below.
+    
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized with 
+            : System.Runtime.Serialization.Formatters.Binary.BinaryFormatter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+    
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.soap.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized with 
+            : System.Runtime.Serialization.Formatters.Soap.SoapFormatter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized into a byte array 
+            : using a System.ComponentModel.TypeConverter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+    -->
+  <xsd:schema id="root" xmlns="" xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema" xmlns:msdata="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:xml-msdata">
+    <xsd:import namespace="http://www.w3.org/XML/1998/namespace" />
+    <xsd:element name="root" msdata:IsDataSet="true">
+      <xsd:complexType>
+        <xsd:choice maxOccurs="unbounded">
+          <xsd:element name="metadata">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" use="required" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute ref="xml:space" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="assembly">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:attribute name="alias" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="data">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+                <xsd:element name="comment" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="2" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" use="required" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="3" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="4" />
+              <xsd:attribute ref="xml:space" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="resheader">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" use="required" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+        </xsd:choice>
+      </xsd:complexType>
+    </xsd:element>
+  </xsd:schema>
+  <resheader name="resmimetype">
+    <value>text/microsoft-resx</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="version">
+    <value>2.0</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="reader">
+    <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="writer">
+    <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <metadata name="serSerialPort.TrayLocation" type="System.Drawing.Point, System.Drawing, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b03f5f7f11d50a3a">
+    <value>17, 17</value>
+  </metadata>
+  <metadata name="tmrCPUTimer.TrayLocation" type="System.Drawing.Point, System.Drawing, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b03f5f7f11d50a3a">
+    <value>137, 17</value>
+  </metadata>
+  <metadata name="pcCPUUsage.TrayLocation" type="System.Drawing.Point, System.Drawing, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b03f5f7f11d50a3a">
+    <value>262, 17</value>
+  </metadata>
+  <metadata name="nicoNotifyIcon.TrayLocation" type="System.Drawing.Point, System.Drawing, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b03f5f7f11d50a3a">
+    <value>383, 17</value>
+  </metadata>
+</root>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Program.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Program.cs
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cb4fd89f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Program.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+using System;
+using System.Collections.Generic;
+using System.Linq;
+using System.Windows.Forms;
+
+namespace CPUMonitor
+{
+    static class Program
+    {
+        /// <summary>
+        /// The main entry point for the application.
+        /// </summary>
+        [STAThread]
+        static void Main()
+        {
+            Application.EnableVisualStyles();
+            Application.SetCompatibleTextRenderingDefault(false);
+            Application.Run(new frmCPU());
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..85d31fcba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+using System.Reflection;
+using System.Runtime.CompilerServices;
+using System.Runtime.InteropServices;
+
+// General Information about an assembly is controlled through the following 
+// set of attributes. Change these attribute values to modify the information
+// associated with an assembly.
+[assembly: AssemblyTitle("CPUMonitor")]
+[assembly: AssemblyDescription("")]
+[assembly: AssemblyConfiguration("")]
+[assembly: AssemblyCompany("Microsoft")]
+[assembly: AssemblyProduct("CPUMonitor")]
+[assembly: AssemblyCopyright("Copyright © Microsoft 2009")]
+[assembly: AssemblyTrademark("")]
+[assembly: AssemblyCulture("")]
+
+// Setting ComVisible to false makes the types in this assembly not visible 
+// to COM components.  If you need to access a type in this assembly from 
+// COM, set the ComVisible attribute to true on that type.
+[assembly: ComVisible(false)]
+
+// The following GUID is for the ID of the typelib if this project is exposed to COM
+[assembly: Guid("3e4a61da-cdde-46de-848b-b5206d225e21")]
+
+// Version information for an assembly consists of the following four values:
+//
+//      Major Version
+//      Minor Version 
+//      Build Number
+//      Revision
+//
+// You can specify all the values or you can default the Build and Revision Numbers 
+// by using the '*' as shown below:
+// [assembly: AssemblyVersion("1.0.*")]
+[assembly: AssemblyVersion("1.0.0.0")]
+[assembly: AssemblyFileVersion("1.0.0.0")]
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bf80e05fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// <auto-generated>
+//     This code was generated by a tool.
+//     Runtime Version:4.0.30319.239
+//
+//     Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if
+//     the code is regenerated.
+// </auto-generated>
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+namespace CPUMonitor.Properties {
+    using System;
+    
+    
+    /// <summary>
+    ///   A strongly-typed resource class, for looking up localized strings, etc.
+    /// </summary>
+    // This class was auto-generated by the StronglyTypedResourceBuilder
+    // class via a tool like ResGen or Visual Studio.
+    // To add or remove a member, edit your .ResX file then rerun ResGen
+    // with the /str option, or rebuild your VS project.
+    [global::System.CodeDom.Compiler.GeneratedCodeAttribute("System.Resources.Tools.StronglyTypedResourceBuilder", "4.0.0.0")]
+    [global::System.Diagnostics.DebuggerNonUserCodeAttribute()]
+    [global::System.Runtime.CompilerServices.CompilerGeneratedAttribute()]
+    internal class Resources {
+        
+        private static global::System.Resources.ResourceManager resourceMan;
+        
+        private static global::System.Globalization.CultureInfo resourceCulture;
+        
+        [global::System.Diagnostics.CodeAnalysis.SuppressMessageAttribute("Microsoft.Performance", "CA1811:AvoidUncalledPrivateCode")]
+        internal Resources() {
+        }
+        
+        /// <summary>
+        ///   Returns the cached ResourceManager instance used by this class.
+        /// </summary>
+        [global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableAttribute(global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableState.Advanced)]
+        internal static global::System.Resources.ResourceManager ResourceManager {
+            get {
+                if (object.ReferenceEquals(resourceMan, null)) {
+                    global::System.Resources.ResourceManager temp = new global::System.Resources.ResourceManager("CPUMonitor.Properties.Resources", typeof(Resources).Assembly);
+                    resourceMan = temp;
+                }
+                return resourceMan;
+            }
+        }
+        
+        /// <summary>
+        ///   Overrides the current thread's CurrentUICulture property for all
+        ///   resource lookups using this strongly typed resource class.
+        /// </summary>
+        [global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableAttribute(global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableState.Advanced)]
+        internal static global::System.Globalization.CultureInfo Culture {
+            get {
+                return resourceCulture;
+            }
+            set {
+                resourceCulture = value;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Resources.resx b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Resources.resx
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..af7dbebba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Resources.resx
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<root>
+  <!-- 
+    Microsoft ResX Schema 
+    
+    Version 2.0
+    
+    The primary goals of this format is to allow a simple XML format 
+    that is mostly human readable. The generation and parsing of the 
+    various data types are done through the TypeConverter classes 
+    associated with the data types.
+    
+    Example:
+    
+    ... ado.net/XML headers & schema ...
+    <resheader name="resmimetype">text/microsoft-resx</resheader>
+    <resheader name="version">2.0</resheader>
+    <resheader name="reader">System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader>
+    <resheader name="writer">System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader>
+    <data name="Name1"><value>this is my long string</value><comment>this is a comment</comment></data>
+    <data name="Color1" type="System.Drawing.Color, System.Drawing">Blue</data>
+    <data name="Bitmap1" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64">
+        <value>[base64 mime encoded serialized .NET Framework object]</value>
+    </data>
+    <data name="Icon1" type="System.Drawing.Icon, System.Drawing" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64">
+        <value>[base64 mime encoded string representing a byte array form of the .NET Framework object]</value>
+        <comment>This is a comment</comment>
+    </data>
+                
+    There are any number of "resheader" rows that contain simple 
+    name/value pairs.
+    
+    Each data row contains a name, and value. The row also contains a 
+    type or mimetype. Type corresponds to a .NET class that support 
+    text/value conversion through the TypeConverter architecture. 
+    Classes that don't support this are serialized and stored with the 
+    mimetype set.
+    
+    The mimetype is used for serialized objects, and tells the 
+    ResXResourceReader how to depersist the object. This is currently not 
+    extensible. For a given mimetype the value must be set accordingly:
+    
+    Note - application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64 is the format 
+    that the ResXResourceWriter will generate, however the reader can 
+    read any of the formats listed below.
+    
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized with 
+            : System.Serialization.Formatters.Binary.BinaryFormatter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+    
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.soap.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized with 
+            : System.Runtime.Serialization.Formatters.Soap.SoapFormatter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized into a byte array 
+            : using a System.ComponentModel.TypeConverter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+    -->
+  <xsd:schema id="root" xmlns="" xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema" xmlns:msdata="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:xml-msdata">
+    <xsd:element name="root" msdata:IsDataSet="true">
+      <xsd:complexType>
+        <xsd:choice maxOccurs="unbounded">
+          <xsd:element name="metadata">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="assembly">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:attribute name="alias" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="data">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+                <xsd:element name="comment" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="2" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="3" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="4" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="resheader">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" use="required" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+        </xsd:choice>
+      </xsd:complexType>
+    </xsd:element>
+  </xsd:schema>
+  <resheader name="resmimetype">
+    <value>text/microsoft-resx</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="version">
+    <value>2.0</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="reader">
+    <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="writer">
+    <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value>
+  </resheader>
+</root>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..690fde3ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// <auto-generated>
+//     This code was generated by a tool.
+//     Runtime Version:4.0.30319.239
+//
+//     Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if
+//     the code is regenerated.
+// </auto-generated>
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+namespace CPUMonitor.Properties {
+    
+    
+    [global::System.Runtime.CompilerServices.CompilerGeneratedAttribute()]
+    [global::System.CodeDom.Compiler.GeneratedCodeAttribute("Microsoft.VisualStudio.Editors.SettingsDesigner.SettingsSingleFileGenerator", "10.0.0.0")]
+    internal sealed partial class Settings : global::System.Configuration.ApplicationSettingsBase {
+        
+        private static Settings defaultInstance = ((Settings)(global::System.Configuration.ApplicationSettingsBase.Synchronized(new Settings())));
+        
+        public static Settings Default {
+            get {
+                return defaultInstance;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Settings.settings b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Settings.settings
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..39645652a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Settings.settings
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+<SettingsFile xmlns="http://schemas.microsoft.com/VisualStudio/2004/01/settings" CurrentProfile="(Default)">
+  <Profiles>
+    <Profile Name="(Default)" />
+  </Profiles>
+  <Settings />
+</SettingsFile>
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..078f7e675
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..aed252fe9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,245 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+	.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2044,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Header =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.CDCSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_ACM =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM,
+
+			.Capabilities           = 0x06,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Union =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union,
+
+			.MasterInterfaceNumber  = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.SlaveInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_NotificationEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LED Notifier");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ce014c632
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 2)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+
+			// CDC Command Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t    CDC_Functional_Header;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t       CDC_Functional_ACM;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t     CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_NotificationEndpoint;
+
+			// CDC Data Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI = 0, /**< CDC CCI interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI = 1, /**< CDC DCI interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.Designer.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.Designer.cs
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..595083a4a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.Designer.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,149 @@
+namespace LEDMixer
+{
+    partial class LEDMixer
+    {
+        /// <summary>
+        /// Required designer variable.
+        /// </summary>
+        private System.ComponentModel.IContainer components = null;
+
+        /// <summary>
+        /// Clean up any resources being used.
+        /// </summary>
+        /// <param name="disposing">true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false.</param>
+        protected override void Dispose(bool disposing)
+        {
+            if (disposing && (components != null))
+            {
+                components.Dispose();
+            }
+            base.Dispose(disposing);
+        }
+
+        #region Windows Form Designer generated code
+
+        /// <summary>
+        /// Required method for Designer support - do not modify
+        /// the contents of this method with the code editor.
+        /// </summary>
+        private void InitializeComponent()
+        {
+            this.components = new System.ComponentModel.Container();
+            this.tbRed = new System.Windows.Forms.TrackBar();
+            this.tbGreen = new System.Windows.Forms.TrackBar();
+            this.tbBlue = new System.Windows.Forms.TrackBar();
+            this.serSerialPort = new System.IO.Ports.SerialPort(this.components);
+            this.cbPort = new System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox();
+            this.lblRed = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
+            this.lblBlue = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
+            this.lblGreen = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
+            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.tbRed)).BeginInit();
+            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.tbGreen)).BeginInit();
+            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.tbBlue)).BeginInit();
+            this.SuspendLayout();
+            // 
+            // tbRed
+            // 
+            this.tbRed.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(54, 64);
+            this.tbRed.Maximum = 512;
+            this.tbRed.Name = "tbRed";
+            this.tbRed.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(230, 45);
+            this.tbRed.TabIndex = 0;
+            this.tbRed.Scroll += new System.EventHandler(this.tbRed_Scroll);
+            // 
+            // tbGreen
+            // 
+            this.tbGreen.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(54, 115);
+            this.tbGreen.Maximum = 512;
+            this.tbGreen.Name = "tbGreen";
+            this.tbGreen.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(230, 45);
+            this.tbGreen.TabIndex = 1;
+            this.tbGreen.Scroll += new System.EventHandler(this.tbGreen_Scroll);
+            // 
+            // tbBlue
+            // 
+            this.tbBlue.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(54, 163);
+            this.tbBlue.Maximum = 512;
+            this.tbBlue.Name = "tbBlue";
+            this.tbBlue.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(230, 45);
+            this.tbBlue.TabIndex = 2;
+            this.tbBlue.Scroll += new System.EventHandler(this.tbBlue_Scroll);
+            // 
+            // cbPort
+            // 
+            this.cbPort.FormattingEnabled = true;
+            this.cbPort.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(97, 12);
+            this.cbPort.Name = "cbPort";
+            this.cbPort.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(99, 21);
+            this.cbPort.TabIndex = 3;
+            this.cbPort.SelectedIndexChanged += new System.EventHandler(this.cbPort_SelectedIndexChanged);
+            // 
+            // lblRed
+            // 
+            this.lblRed.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 9.75F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0)));
+            this.lblRed.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(3, 64);
+            this.lblRed.Name = "lblRed";
+            this.lblRed.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(48, 29);
+            this.lblRed.TabIndex = 4;
+            this.lblRed.Text = "Red";
+            this.lblRed.TextAlign = System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.MiddleRight;
+            // 
+            // lblBlue
+            // 
+            this.lblBlue.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 9.75F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0)));
+            this.lblBlue.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(3, 115);
+            this.lblBlue.Name = "lblGreen";
+            this.lblBlue.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(50, 27);
+            this.lblBlue.TabIndex = 5;
+            this.lblBlue.Text = "Green";
+            this.lblBlue.TextAlign = System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.MiddleRight;
+            // 
+            // lblGreen
+            // 
+            this.lblGreen.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 9.75F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0)));
+            this.lblGreen.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(3, 163);
+            this.lblGreen.Name = "lblBlue";
+            this.lblGreen.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(50, 25);
+            this.lblGreen.TabIndex = 6;
+            this.lblGreen.Text = "Blue";
+            this.lblGreen.TextAlign = System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.MiddleRight;
+            // 
+            // LEDMixer
+            // 
+            this.AutoScaleDimensions = new System.Drawing.SizeF(6F, 13F);
+            this.AutoScaleMode = System.Windows.Forms.AutoScaleMode.Font;
+            this.ClientSize = new System.Drawing.Size(284, 207);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.lblGreen);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.lblBlue);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.lblRed);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.cbPort);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.tbBlue);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.tbGreen);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.tbRed);
+            this.FormBorderStyle = System.Windows.Forms.FormBorderStyle.FixedSingle;
+            this.MaximizeBox = false;
+            this.MinimizeBox = false;
+            this.Name = "LEDMixer";
+            this.Text = "LED Mixer";
+            this.Load += new System.EventHandler(this.LEDMixer_Load);
+            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.tbRed)).EndInit();
+            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.tbGreen)).EndInit();
+            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.tbBlue)).EndInit();
+            this.ResumeLayout(false);
+            this.PerformLayout();
+
+        }
+
+        #endregion
+
+        private System.Windows.Forms.TrackBar tbRed;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.TrackBar tbGreen;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.TrackBar tbBlue;
+        private System.IO.Ports.SerialPort serSerialPort;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox cbPort;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblRed;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblBlue;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblGreen;
+    }
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.cs
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..dfaffed30
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+using System;
+using System.Collections.Generic;
+using System.ComponentModel;
+using System.Data;
+using System.Drawing;
+using System.Linq;
+using System.Text;
+using System.Windows.Forms;
+
+namespace LEDMixer
+{
+    public partial class LEDMixer : Form
+    {
+        private const int LIGHT_MAX = 0x1F;
+        
+        public LEDMixer()
+        {
+            InitializeComponent();
+        }
+
+        private void LEDMixer_Load(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            String[] PortNames = System.IO.Ports.SerialPort.GetPortNames();
+            Array.Sort<String>(PortNames, delegate(string strA, string strB) { return int.Parse(strA.Substring(3)).CompareTo(int.Parse(strB.Substring(3))); });
+            cbPort.Items.Clear();
+            cbPort.Items.AddRange(PortNames);
+
+            cbPort.SelectedIndex = 0;
+
+            tbRed.Maximum = LIGHT_MAX;
+            tbGreen.Maximum = LIGHT_MAX;
+            tbBlue.Maximum = LIGHT_MAX;
+        }
+
+        private void tbRed_Scroll(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            NotifyLight(tbRed.Value, tbGreen.Value, tbBlue.Value);
+        }
+
+        private void tbGreen_Scroll(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            NotifyLight(tbRed.Value, tbGreen.Value, tbBlue.Value);
+        }
+
+        private void tbBlue_Scroll(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            NotifyLight(tbRed.Value, tbGreen.Value, tbBlue.Value);
+        }
+        
+        private void NotifyLight(int Red, int Green, int Blue)
+        {
+            byte[] buffer = new byte[3];
+            buffer[0] = (byte)(0x80 | (Red & LIGHT_MAX));
+            buffer[1] = (byte)(0x40 | (Green & LIGHT_MAX));
+            buffer[2] = (byte)(0x20 | (Blue & LIGHT_MAX));
+
+            try
+            {
+                serSerialPort.PortName = cbPort.Text;
+                serSerialPort.Open();
+                serSerialPort.Write(buffer, 0, buffer.Length);
+                serSerialPort.Close();
+            }
+            catch (Exception e)
+            {
+
+            }
+        }
+
+        private void cbPort_SelectedIndexChanged(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            NotifyLight(tbRed.Value, tbGreen.Value, tbBlue.Value);
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.csproj b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.csproj
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6287ddcff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.csproj
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<Project ToolsVersion="4.0" DefaultTargets="Build" xmlns="http://schemas.microsoft.com/developer/msbuild/2003">
+  <PropertyGroup>
+    <Configuration Condition=" '$(Configuration)' == '' ">Debug</Configuration>
+    <Platform Condition=" '$(Platform)' == '' ">AnyCPU</Platform>
+    <ProductVersion>9.0.21022</ProductVersion>
+    <SchemaVersion>2.0</SchemaVersion>
+    <ProjectGuid>{A7814DA7-FA30-4A3D-878F-2E1975F9B27D}</ProjectGuid>
+    <OutputType>WinExe</OutputType>
+    <AppDesignerFolder>Properties</AppDesignerFolder>
+    <RootNamespace>LEDMixer</RootNamespace>
+    <AssemblyName>LEDMixer</AssemblyName>
+    <TargetFrameworkVersion>v3.5</TargetFrameworkVersion>
+    <FileAlignment>512</FileAlignment>
+    <FileUpgradeFlags>
+    </FileUpgradeFlags>
+    <OldToolsVersion>3.5</OldToolsVersion>
+    <UpgradeBackupLocation />
+  </PropertyGroup>
+  <PropertyGroup Condition=" '$(Configuration)|$(Platform)' == 'Debug|AnyCPU' ">
+    <DebugSymbols>true</DebugSymbols>
+    <DebugType>full</DebugType>
+    <Optimize>false</Optimize>
+    <OutputPath>bin\Debug\</OutputPath>
+    <DefineConstants>DEBUG;TRACE</DefineConstants>
+    <ErrorReport>prompt</ErrorReport>
+    <WarningLevel>4</WarningLevel>
+  </PropertyGroup>
+  <PropertyGroup Condition=" '$(Configuration)|$(Platform)' == 'Release|AnyCPU' ">
+    <DebugType>pdbonly</DebugType>
+    <Optimize>true</Optimize>
+    <OutputPath>bin\Release\</OutputPath>
+    <DefineConstants>TRACE</DefineConstants>
+    <ErrorReport>prompt</ErrorReport>
+    <WarningLevel>4</WarningLevel>
+  </PropertyGroup>
+  <ItemGroup>
+    <Reference Include="System" />
+    <Reference Include="System.Core">
+      <RequiredTargetFramework>3.5</RequiredTargetFramework>
+    </Reference>
+    <Reference Include="System.Xml.Linq">
+      <RequiredTargetFramework>3.5</RequiredTargetFramework>
+    </Reference>
+    <Reference Include="System.Data.DataSetExtensions">
+      <RequiredTargetFramework>3.5</RequiredTargetFramework>
+    </Reference>
+    <Reference Include="System.Data" />
+    <Reference Include="System.Deployment" />
+    <Reference Include="System.Drawing" />
+    <Reference Include="System.Windows.Forms" />
+    <Reference Include="System.Xml" />
+  </ItemGroup>
+  <ItemGroup>
+    <Compile Include="LEDMixer.cs">
+      <SubType>Form</SubType>
+    </Compile>
+    <Compile Include="LEDMixer.Designer.cs">
+      <DependentUpon>LEDMixer.cs</DependentUpon>
+    </Compile>
+    <Compile Include="Program.cs" />
+    <Compile Include="Properties\AssemblyInfo.cs" />
+    <EmbeddedResource Include="LEDMixer.resx">
+      <DependentUpon>LEDMixer.cs</DependentUpon>
+      <SubType>Designer</SubType>
+    </EmbeddedResource>
+    <EmbeddedResource Include="Properties\Resources.resx">
+      <Generator>ResXFileCodeGenerator</Generator>
+      <LastGenOutput>Resources.Designer.cs</LastGenOutput>
+      <SubType>Designer</SubType>
+    </EmbeddedResource>
+    <Compile Include="Properties\Resources.Designer.cs">
+      <AutoGen>True</AutoGen>
+      <DependentUpon>Resources.resx</DependentUpon>
+      <DesignTime>True</DesignTime>
+    </Compile>
+    <None Include="Properties\Settings.settings">
+      <Generator>SettingsSingleFileGenerator</Generator>
+      <LastGenOutput>Settings.Designer.cs</LastGenOutput>
+    </None>
+    <Compile Include="Properties\Settings.Designer.cs">
+      <AutoGen>True</AutoGen>
+      <DependentUpon>Settings.settings</DependentUpon>
+      <DesignTimeSharedInput>True</DesignTimeSharedInput>
+    </Compile>
+  </ItemGroup>
+  <Import Project="$(MSBuildToolsPath)\Microsoft.CSharp.targets" />
+  <!-- To modify your build process, add your task inside one of the targets below and uncomment it. 
+       Other similar extension points exist, see Microsoft.Common.targets.
+  <Target Name="BeforeBuild">
+  </Target>
+  <Target Name="AfterBuild">
+  </Target>
+  -->
+</Project>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.resx b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.resx
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0601840d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.resx
@@ -0,0 +1,123 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<root>
+  <!-- 
+    Microsoft ResX Schema 
+    
+    Version 2.0
+    
+    The primary goals of this format is to allow a simple XML format 
+    that is mostly human readable. The generation and parsing of the 
+    various data types are done through the TypeConverter classes 
+    associated with the data types.
+    
+    Example:
+    
+    ... ado.net/XML headers & schema ...
+    <resheader name="resmimetype">text/microsoft-resx</resheader>
+    <resheader name="version">2.0</resheader>
+    <resheader name="reader">System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader>
+    <resheader name="writer">System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader>
+    <data name="Name1"><value>this is my long string</value><comment>this is a comment</comment></data>
+    <data name="Color1" type="System.Drawing.Color, System.Drawing">Blue</data>
+    <data name="Bitmap1" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64">
+        <value>[base64 mime encoded serialized .NET Framework object]</value>
+    </data>
+    <data name="Icon1" type="System.Drawing.Icon, System.Drawing" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64">
+        <value>[base64 mime encoded string representing a byte array form of the .NET Framework object]</value>
+        <comment>This is a comment</comment>
+    </data>
+                
+    There are any number of "resheader" rows that contain simple 
+    name/value pairs.
+    
+    Each data row contains a name, and value. The row also contains a 
+    type or mimetype. Type corresponds to a .NET class that support 
+    text/value conversion through the TypeConverter architecture. 
+    Classes that don't support this are serialized and stored with the 
+    mimetype set.
+    
+    The mimetype is used for serialized objects, and tells the 
+    ResXResourceReader how to depersist the object. This is currently not 
+    extensible. For a given mimetype the value must be set accordingly:
+    
+    Note - application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64 is the format 
+    that the ResXResourceWriter will generate, however the reader can 
+    read any of the formats listed below.
+    
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized with 
+            : System.Runtime.Serialization.Formatters.Binary.BinaryFormatter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+    
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.soap.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized with 
+            : System.Runtime.Serialization.Formatters.Soap.SoapFormatter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized into a byte array 
+            : using a System.ComponentModel.TypeConverter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+    -->
+  <xsd:schema id="root" xmlns="" xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema" xmlns:msdata="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:xml-msdata">
+    <xsd:import namespace="http://www.w3.org/XML/1998/namespace" />
+    <xsd:element name="root" msdata:IsDataSet="true">
+      <xsd:complexType>
+        <xsd:choice maxOccurs="unbounded">
+          <xsd:element name="metadata">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" use="required" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute ref="xml:space" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="assembly">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:attribute name="alias" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="data">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+                <xsd:element name="comment" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="2" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" use="required" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="3" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="4" />
+              <xsd:attribute ref="xml:space" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="resheader">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" use="required" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+        </xsd:choice>
+      </xsd:complexType>
+    </xsd:element>
+  </xsd:schema>
+  <resheader name="resmimetype">
+    <value>text/microsoft-resx</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="version">
+    <value>2.0</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="reader">
+    <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="writer">
+    <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <metadata name="serSerialPort.TrayLocation" type="System.Drawing.Point, System.Drawing, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b03f5f7f11d50a3a">
+    <value>17, 17</value>
+  </metadata>
+</root>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Program.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Program.cs
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8958f86d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Program.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+using System;
+using System.Collections.Generic;
+using System.Linq;
+using System.Windows.Forms;
+
+namespace LEDMixer
+{
+    static class Program
+    {
+        /// <summary>
+        /// The main entry point for the application.
+        /// </summary>
+        [STAThread]
+        static void Main()
+        {
+            Application.EnableVisualStyles();
+            Application.SetCompatibleTextRenderingDefault(false);
+            Application.Run(new LEDMixer());
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c88194381
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+using System.Reflection;
+using System.Runtime.CompilerServices;
+using System.Runtime.InteropServices;
+
+// General Information about an assembly is controlled through the following 
+// set of attributes. Change these attribute values to modify the information
+// associated with an assembly.
+[assembly: AssemblyTitle("LEDMixer")]
+[assembly: AssemblyDescription("")]
+[assembly: AssemblyConfiguration("")]
+[assembly: AssemblyCompany("Microsoft")]
+[assembly: AssemblyProduct("LEDMixer")]
+[assembly: AssemblyCopyright("Copyright © Microsoft 2009")]
+[assembly: AssemblyTrademark("")]
+[assembly: AssemblyCulture("")]
+
+// Setting ComVisible to false makes the types in this assembly not visible 
+// to COM components.  If you need to access a type in this assembly from 
+// COM, set the ComVisible attribute to true on that type.
+[assembly: ComVisible(false)]
+
+// The following GUID is for the ID of the typelib if this project is exposed to COM
+[assembly: Guid("335c1112-9aa6-42a0-9765-5cc6deb78c88")]
+
+// Version information for an assembly consists of the following four values:
+//
+//      Major Version
+//      Minor Version 
+//      Build Number
+//      Revision
+//
+// You can specify all the values or you can default the Build and Revision Numbers 
+// by using the '*' as shown below:
+// [assembly: AssemblyVersion("1.0.*")]
+[assembly: AssemblyVersion("1.0.0.0")]
+[assembly: AssemblyFileVersion("1.0.0.0")]
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..53e3f2e0b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// <auto-generated>
+//     This code was generated by a tool.
+//     Runtime Version:4.0.30319.239
+//
+//     Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if
+//     the code is regenerated.
+// </auto-generated>
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+namespace LEDMixer.Properties {
+    using System;
+    
+    
+    /// <summary>
+    ///   A strongly-typed resource class, for looking up localized strings, etc.
+    /// </summary>
+    // This class was auto-generated by the StronglyTypedResourceBuilder
+    // class via a tool like ResGen or Visual Studio.
+    // To add or remove a member, edit your .ResX file then rerun ResGen
+    // with the /str option, or rebuild your VS project.
+    [global::System.CodeDom.Compiler.GeneratedCodeAttribute("System.Resources.Tools.StronglyTypedResourceBuilder", "4.0.0.0")]
+    [global::System.Diagnostics.DebuggerNonUserCodeAttribute()]
+    [global::System.Runtime.CompilerServices.CompilerGeneratedAttribute()]
+    internal class Resources {
+        
+        private static global::System.Resources.ResourceManager resourceMan;
+        
+        private static global::System.Globalization.CultureInfo resourceCulture;
+        
+        [global::System.Diagnostics.CodeAnalysis.SuppressMessageAttribute("Microsoft.Performance", "CA1811:AvoidUncalledPrivateCode")]
+        internal Resources() {
+        }
+        
+        /// <summary>
+        ///   Returns the cached ResourceManager instance used by this class.
+        /// </summary>
+        [global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableAttribute(global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableState.Advanced)]
+        internal static global::System.Resources.ResourceManager ResourceManager {
+            get {
+                if (object.ReferenceEquals(resourceMan, null)) {
+                    global::System.Resources.ResourceManager temp = new global::System.Resources.ResourceManager("LEDMixer.Properties.Resources", typeof(Resources).Assembly);
+                    resourceMan = temp;
+                }
+                return resourceMan;
+            }
+        }
+        
+        /// <summary>
+        ///   Overrides the current thread's CurrentUICulture property for all
+        ///   resource lookups using this strongly typed resource class.
+        /// </summary>
+        [global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableAttribute(global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableState.Advanced)]
+        internal static global::System.Globalization.CultureInfo Culture {
+            get {
+                return resourceCulture;
+            }
+            set {
+                resourceCulture = value;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Resources.resx b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Resources.resx
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..af7dbebba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Resources.resx
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<root>
+  <!-- 
+    Microsoft ResX Schema 
+    
+    Version 2.0
+    
+    The primary goals of this format is to allow a simple XML format 
+    that is mostly human readable. The generation and parsing of the 
+    various data types are done through the TypeConverter classes 
+    associated with the data types.
+    
+    Example:
+    
+    ... ado.net/XML headers & schema ...
+    <resheader name="resmimetype">text/microsoft-resx</resheader>
+    <resheader name="version">2.0</resheader>
+    <resheader name="reader">System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader>
+    <resheader name="writer">System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader>
+    <data name="Name1"><value>this is my long string</value><comment>this is a comment</comment></data>
+    <data name="Color1" type="System.Drawing.Color, System.Drawing">Blue</data>
+    <data name="Bitmap1" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64">
+        <value>[base64 mime encoded serialized .NET Framework object]</value>
+    </data>
+    <data name="Icon1" type="System.Drawing.Icon, System.Drawing" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64">
+        <value>[base64 mime encoded string representing a byte array form of the .NET Framework object]</value>
+        <comment>This is a comment</comment>
+    </data>
+                
+    There are any number of "resheader" rows that contain simple 
+    name/value pairs.
+    
+    Each data row contains a name, and value. The row also contains a 
+    type or mimetype. Type corresponds to a .NET class that support 
+    text/value conversion through the TypeConverter architecture. 
+    Classes that don't support this are serialized and stored with the 
+    mimetype set.
+    
+    The mimetype is used for serialized objects, and tells the 
+    ResXResourceReader how to depersist the object. This is currently not 
+    extensible. For a given mimetype the value must be set accordingly:
+    
+    Note - application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64 is the format 
+    that the ResXResourceWriter will generate, however the reader can 
+    read any of the formats listed below.
+    
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized with 
+            : System.Serialization.Formatters.Binary.BinaryFormatter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+    
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.soap.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized with 
+            : System.Runtime.Serialization.Formatters.Soap.SoapFormatter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized into a byte array 
+            : using a System.ComponentModel.TypeConverter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+    -->
+  <xsd:schema id="root" xmlns="" xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema" xmlns:msdata="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:xml-msdata">
+    <xsd:element name="root" msdata:IsDataSet="true">
+      <xsd:complexType>
+        <xsd:choice maxOccurs="unbounded">
+          <xsd:element name="metadata">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="assembly">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:attribute name="alias" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="data">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+                <xsd:element name="comment" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="2" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="3" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="4" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="resheader">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" use="required" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+        </xsd:choice>
+      </xsd:complexType>
+    </xsd:element>
+  </xsd:schema>
+  <resheader name="resmimetype">
+    <value>text/microsoft-resx</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="version">
+    <value>2.0</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="reader">
+    <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="writer">
+    <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value>
+  </resheader>
+</root>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d79f28b80
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// <auto-generated>
+//     This code was generated by a tool.
+//     Runtime Version:4.0.30319.239
+//
+//     Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if
+//     the code is regenerated.
+// </auto-generated>
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+namespace LEDMixer.Properties {
+    
+    
+    [global::System.Runtime.CompilerServices.CompilerGeneratedAttribute()]
+    [global::System.CodeDom.Compiler.GeneratedCodeAttribute("Microsoft.VisualStudio.Editors.SettingsDesigner.SettingsSingleFileGenerator", "10.0.0.0")]
+    internal sealed partial class Settings : global::System.Configuration.ApplicationSettingsBase {
+        
+        private static Settings defaultInstance = ((Settings)(global::System.Configuration.ApplicationSettingsBase.Synchronized(new Settings())));
+        
+        public static Settings Default {
+            get {
+                return defaultInstance;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Settings.settings b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Settings.settings
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..39645652a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Settings.settings
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+<SettingsFile xmlns="http://schemas.microsoft.com/VisualStudio/2004/01/settings" CurrentProfile="(Default)">
+  <Profiles>
+    <Profile Name="(Default)" />
+  </Profiles>
+  <Settings />
+</SettingsFile>
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..07455764d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.c
@@ -0,0 +1,176 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the LEDNotfier project. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "LEDNotifier.h"
+
+/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+				.DataINEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address          = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint =
+					{
+						.Address          = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+				.NotificationEndpoint =
+					{
+						.Address          = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Counter for the software PWM. */
+static volatile uint8_t SoftPWM_Count;
+
+/** Duty cycle for the first software PWM channel. */
+static volatile uint8_t SoftPWM_Channel1_Duty;
+
+/** Duty cycle for the second software PWM channel. */
+static volatile uint8_t SoftPWM_Channel2_Duty;
+
+/** Duty cycle for the third software PWM channel. */
+static volatile uint8_t SoftPWM_Channel3_Duty;
+
+/** Standard file stream for the CDC interface when set up, so that the virtual CDC COM port can be
+ *  used like any regular character stream in the C APIs.
+ */
+static FILE USBSerialStream;
+
+
+/** Interrupt handler for managing the software PWM channels for the LEDs */
+ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+
+	if (++SoftPWM_Count == 0b00011111)
+	  SoftPWM_Count = 0;
+
+	if (SoftPWM_Count >= SoftPWM_Channel1_Duty)
+	  LEDMask &= ~LEDS_LED1;
+
+	if (SoftPWM_Count >= SoftPWM_Channel2_Duty)
+	  LEDMask &= ~LEDS_LED2;
+
+	if (SoftPWM_Count >= SoftPWM_Channel3_Duty)
+	  LEDMask &= ~LEDS_LED3;
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	/* Create a regular blocking character stream for the interface so that it can be used with the stdio.h functions */
+	CDC_Device_CreateBlockingStream(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, &USBSerialStream);
+
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		/* Read in next LED colour command from the host */
+		uint8_t ColourUpdate = fgetc(&USBSerialStream);
+
+		/* Top 3 bits select the LED, bottom 5 control the brightness */
+		uint8_t Channel = (ColourUpdate & 0b11100000);
+		uint8_t Duty    = (ColourUpdate & 0b00011111);
+
+		if (Channel & (1 << 5))
+		  SoftPWM_Channel1_Duty = Duty;
+
+		if (Channel & (1 << 6))
+		  SoftPWM_Channel2_Duty = Duty;
+
+		if (Channel & (1 << 7))
+		  SoftPWM_Channel3_Duty = Duty;
+
+		CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Timer Initialization */
+	OCR0A  = 100;
+	TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01);
+	TCCR0B = (1 << CS00);
+	TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7a0a9ae46
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.h
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for LEDNotifier.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LEDNOTIFIER_H_
+#define _LEDNOTIFIER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..53728f448
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage USB LED Notifier Project
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li AT90USB646
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  USB LED Notifier Project. This project is designed for the Busware BUI board, however it can run easily on any
+ *  USB AVR. It is a generic RGB LED controller (via a three channel software PWM) which listens for commands from the
+ *  host on a CDC virtual serial port. When new commands are received, it updates the board LEDs.
+ *
+ *  This can be controlled with any host application that can write to the virtual serial port, allowing it to become
+ *  a visual notification system for any number of custom host applications, such as a new unread email notifier.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LUFA LED Notifier.inf b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LUFA LED Notifier.inf
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..dc3f0e74a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LUFA LED Notifier.inf
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+;************************************************************
+; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+;************************************************************
+
+[DefaultInstall]
+CopyINF="LUFA LED Notifier.inf"
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+DriverVer=7/1/2012,10.0.0.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTx86, NTamd64, NTia64
+
+[SourceDisksNames]
+
+[SourceDisksFiles]
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+[DriverInstall]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=FakeModemCopyFileSection
+AddReg=DriverInstall.AddReg
+
+[DriverInstall.Services]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, LowerFilter_Service_Inst
+
+[DriverInstall.AddReg]
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"msports.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
+
+[DeviceList.NTx86]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
+
+[DeviceList.NTia64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org"
+DESCRIPTION="LUFA CDC-ACM Virtual Serial Port"
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..01f346838
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="LED Notifier Widget" id="lufa.projects.led_notifier.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.projects.led_notifier"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.projects.led_notifier" caption="LED Notifier Widget">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		RGB LED notification widget project.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="CDC Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="LEDNotifier.txt"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="LUFA LED Notifier.inf"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="directory" value="CPUUsageApp"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="directory" value="LEDMixerApp"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="LEDNotifier.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="LEDNotifier.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1a1e500f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2366 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - USB LED Notifier Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/ \
+                         CPUUsageApp/ \
+                         LEDMixerApp/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c4e033478
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = BUI
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = LEDNotifier
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2e249cf1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
+ *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
+ *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
+ *  makefile or build system.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#define MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES     3
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..078f7e675
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f7138ca59
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,314 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2048,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize   = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces          = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber      = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex    = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes         = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption      = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.Audio_ControlInterface =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioControl,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
+
+			.Class                    = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass,
+			.SubClass                 = AUDIO_CSCP_ControlSubclass,
+			.Protocol                 = AUDIO_CSCP_ControlProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_ControlInterface_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.ACSpecification          = VERSION_BCD(1,0,0),
+			.TotalLength              = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t),
+
+			.InCollection             = 1,
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream,
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 2,
+
+			.Class                    = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass,
+			.SubClass                 = AUDIO_CSCP_MIDIStreamingSubclass,
+			.Protocol                 = AUDIO_CSCP_StreamingProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_AudioInterface_AS_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_General,
+
+			.AudioSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,0,0),
+
+			.TotalLength              = (sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t) -
+			                             offsetof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t, Audio_StreamInterface_SPC))
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Emb =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_InputTerminal,
+
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_Embedded,
+			.JackID                   = 0x01,
+
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Ext =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_InputTerminal,
+
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_External,
+			.JackID                   = 0x02,
+
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_OutputTerminal,
+
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_Embedded,
+			.JackID                   = 0x03,
+
+			.NumberOfPins             = 1,
+			.SourceJackID             = {0x02},
+			.SourcePinID              = {0x01},
+
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_OutputTerminal,
+
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_External,
+			.JackID                   = 0x04,
+
+			.NumberOfPins             = 1,
+			.SourceJackID             = {0x01},
+			.SourcePinID              = {0x01},
+
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint =
+		{
+			.Endpoint =
+				{
+					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+					.EndpointAddress     = MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPADDR,
+					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+					.EndpointSize        = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+					.PollingIntervalMS   = 0x05
+				},
+
+			.Refresh                  = 0,
+			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSEndpoint},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSEndpoint_General,
+
+			.TotalEmbeddedJacks       = 0x01,
+			.AssociatedJackID         = {0x01}
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint =
+		{
+			.Endpoint =
+				{
+					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+					.EndpointAddress     = MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPADDR,
+					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+					.EndpointSize        = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+					.PollingIntervalMS   = 0x05
+				},
+
+			.Refresh                  = 0,
+			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSEndpoint},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSEndpoint_General,
+
+			.TotalEmbeddedJacks       = 0x01,
+			.AssociatedJackID         = {0x03}
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA MIDI Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9a0d6414e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the MIDI streaming data IN endpoint, for device-to-host data transfers. */
+		#define MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPADDR       (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 2)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the MIDI streaming data OUT endpoint, for host-to-device data transfers. */
+		#define MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPADDR      (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 1)
+
+		/** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE          64
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t     Config;
+
+			// MIDI Audio Control Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t                Audio_ControlInterface;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t       Audio_ControlInterface_SPC;
+
+			// MIDI Audio Streaming Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t                Audio_StreamInterface;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_AudioInterface_AS_t   Audio_StreamInterface_SPC;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t           MIDI_In_Jack_Emb;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t           MIDI_In_Jack_Ext;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t          MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t          MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t       MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t       MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_AudioControl = 0, /**< Audio control interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream  = 1, /**< Audio stream interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..dd4529adc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.c
@@ -0,0 +1,252 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MIDI demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "MIDIToneGenerator.h"
+
+/** LUFA MIDI Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all MIDI Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t Keyboard_MIDI_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.StreamingInterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream,
+				.DataINEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address          = MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address          = MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+			},
+	};
+
+/** 8-bit 256 entry Sine Wave lookup table */
+static const uint8_t SineTable[256] =
+{
+	128, 131, 134, 137, 140, 143, 146, 149, 152, 156, 159, 162, 165, 168, 171, 174,
+	176, 179, 182, 185, 188, 191, 193, 196, 199, 201, 204, 206, 209, 211, 213, 216,
+	218, 220, 222, 224, 226, 228, 230, 232, 234, 236, 237, 239, 240, 242, 243, 245,
+	246, 247, 248, 249, 250, 251, 252, 252, 253, 254, 254, 255, 255, 255, 255, 255,
+	255, 255, 255, 255, 255, 255, 254, 254, 253, 252, 252, 251, 250, 249, 248, 247,
+	246, 245, 243, 242, 240, 239, 237, 236, 234, 232, 230, 228, 226, 224, 222, 220,
+	218, 216, 213, 211, 209, 206, 204, 201, 199, 196, 193, 191, 188, 185, 182, 179,
+	176, 174, 171, 168, 165, 162, 159, 156, 152, 149, 146, 143, 140, 137, 134, 131,
+	128, 124, 121, 118, 115, 112, 109, 106, 103,  99,  96,  93,  90,  87,  84,  81,
+	 79,  76,  73,  70,  67,  64,  62,  59,  56,  54,  51,  49,  46,  44,  42,  39,
+	 37,  35,  33,  31,  29,  27,  25,  23,  21,  19,  18,  16,  15,  13,  12,  10,
+	  9,   8,   7,   6,   5,   4,   3,   3,   2,   1,   1,   0,   0,   0,   0,   0,
+	  0,   0,   0,   0,   0,   0,   1,   1,   2,   3,   3,   4,   5,   6,   7,   8,
+	  9,  10,  12,  13,  15,  16,  18,  19,  21,  23,  25,  27,  29,  31,  33,  35,
+	 37,  39,  42,  44,  46,  49,  51,  54,  56,  59,  62,  64,  67,  70,  73,  76,
+	 79,  81,  84,  87,  90,  93,  96,  99, 103, 106, 109, 112, 115, 118, 121, 124,
+};
+
+/** Array of structures describing each note being generated */
+static DDSNoteData NoteData[MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES];
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		MIDI_EventPacket_t ReceivedMIDIEvent;
+		if (MIDI_Device_ReceiveEventPacket(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface, &ReceivedMIDIEvent))
+		{
+			if ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Event == MIDI_EVENT(0, MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON)) && ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data1 & 0x0F) == 0))
+			{
+				DDSNoteData* LRUNoteStruct = &NoteData[0];
+
+				/* Find a free entry in the note table to use for the note being turned on */
+				for (uint8_t i = 0; i < MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES; i++)
+				{
+					/* Check if the note is unused */
+					if (!(NoteData[i].Pitch))
+					{
+						/* If a note is unused, it's age is essentially infinite - always prefer unused note entries */
+						LRUNoteStruct = &NoteData[i];
+						break;
+					}
+					else if (NoteData[i].LRUAge >= LRUNoteStruct->LRUAge)
+					{
+						/* If an older entry that the current entry has been found, prefer overwriting that one */
+						LRUNoteStruct = &NoteData[i];
+					}
+
+					NoteData[i].LRUAge++;
+				}
+
+				/* Update the oldest note entry with the new note data and reset its age */
+				LRUNoteStruct->Pitch          = ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data2;
+				LRUNoteStruct->TableIncrement = (uint32_t)(BASE_INCREMENT * SCALE_FACTOR) +
+						                         ((uint32_t)(BASE_INCREMENT * NOTE_OCTIVE_RATIO * SCALE_FACTOR) *
+						                          (ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data2 - BASE_PITCH_INDEX));
+				LRUNoteStruct->TablePosition  = 0;
+				LRUNoteStruct->LRUAge         = 0;
+
+				/* Turn on indicator LED to indicate note generation activity */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1);
+			}
+			else if ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Event == MIDI_EVENT(0, MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF)) && ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data1 & 0x0F) == 0))
+			{
+				bool FoundActiveNote = false;
+
+				/* Find the note in the note table to turn off */
+				for (uint8_t i = 0; i < MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES; i++)
+				{
+					if (NoteData[i].Pitch == ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data2)
+					  NoteData[i].Pitch = 0;
+					else if (NoteData[i].Pitch)
+					  FoundActiveNote   = true;
+				}
+
+				/* If all notes off, turn off the indicator LED */
+				if (!(FoundActiveNote))
+				  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_NO_LEDS);
+			}
+		}
+
+		MIDI_Device_USBTask(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** ISR to handle the reloading of the PWM timer with the next sample. */
+ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	uint16_t MixedSample = 0;
+
+	/* Sum together all the active notes to form a single sample */
+	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES; i++)
+	{
+		/* A non-zero pitch indicates the note is active */
+		if (NoteData[i].Pitch)
+		{
+			/* Use the top 8 bits of the table position as the sample table index */
+			uint8_t TableIndex = (NoteData[i].TablePosition >> 24);
+
+			/* Add the new tone sample to the accumulator and increment the table position */
+			MixedSample += SineTable[TableIndex];
+			NoteData[i].TablePosition += NoteData[i].TableIncrement;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Output clamped mixed sample value to the PWM */
+	OCR3A = (MixedSample <= 0xFF) ? MixedSample : 0xFF;
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Sample reload timer initialization */
+	TIMSK0  = (1 << OCIE0A);
+	OCR0A   = (VIRTUAL_SAMPLE_TABLE_SIZE / 8);
+	TCCR0A  = (1 << WGM01);  // CTC mode
+	TCCR0B  = (1 << CS01);   // Fcpu/8 speed
+
+	/* Set speaker as output */
+	DDRC |= (1 << 6);
+
+	/* PWM speaker timer initialization */
+	TCCR3A  = ((1 << WGM31) | (1 << COM3A1) | (1 << COM3A0)); // Set on match, clear on TOP
+	TCCR3B  = ((1 << WGM32) | (1 << CS30));  // Fast 8-Bit PWM, Fcpu speed
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	/* Set speaker as output */
+	DDRC |= (1 << 6);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+
+	/* Disable any notes currently being played */
+	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES; i++)
+	  NoteData[i].Pitch = 0;
+
+	/* Set speaker as input to reduce current draw */
+	DDRC &= ~(1 << 6);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	ConfigSuccess &= MIDI_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	MIDI_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b0661c3f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.h
@@ -0,0 +1,105 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for AudioOutput.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
+#define _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** Scale factor used to convert the floating point frequencies and ratios into a fixed point number */
+		#define SCALE_FACTOR               65536
+
+		/** Base (lowest) allowable MIDI note frequency */
+		#define BASE_FREQUENCY             27.5
+
+		/** Ratio between each note in an octave */
+		#define NOTE_OCTIVE_RATIO          1.05946
+
+		/** Lowest valid MIDI pitch index */
+		#define BASE_PITCH_INDEX           21
+
+		/** Number of samples in the virtual sample table (can be expanded to lower maximum frequency, but allow for
+		 *  more simultaneous notes due to the reduced amount of processing time needed when the samples are spaced out)
+		 */
+		#define VIRTUAL_SAMPLE_TABLE_SIZE  512
+
+		/** Sample table increments per period for the base MIDI note frequency */
+		#define BASE_INCREMENT             (((F_CPU / VIRTUAL_SAMPLE_TABLE_SIZE / 2) / BASE_FREQUENCY))
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  LRUAge;
+			uint8_t  Pitch;
+			uint32_t TableIncrement;
+			uint32_t TablePosition;
+		} DDSNoteData;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7d0f019ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage MIDI Tone Generator Project
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Audio Class</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Standard Audio Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Audio Class Specification \n
+ *        USB-MIDI Audio Class Extension Specification \n
+ *        General MIDI Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  MIDI note synthesiser project. This project implements a basic DDS frequency synthesiser, capable of producing 8-bit PWM sine
+ *  waves of variable frequency. When attached to a USB host, this project will allow for multiple MIDI notes to be synthesised into
+ *  audiable sound via PWM, using the notes sent to MIDI channel 1.
+ *
+ *  Outgoing audio will output in 8-bit PWM onto the timer 3 output compare channel A. Decouple the audio output with a capacitor
+ *  and attach to a speaker to hear the audio.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Sets the maximum number of MIDI notes that can be generated simultaneously. More notes require more processing time,
+ *        and thus a value that is too high will cause audiable sound distortion due to insufficient CPU time.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6795c1bb8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="MIDI Tone Generator" id="lufa.projects.midi_tone_gen.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.projects.midi_tone_gen"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.projects.midi_tone_gen" caption="MIDI Tone Generator">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		MIDI tone generator project.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="MIDI Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="MIDIToneGenerator.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="MIDIToneGenerator.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="MIDIToneGenerator.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3c623c815
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - MIDI Tone Generator Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..77d771b71
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = MIDIToneGenerator
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..da4113323
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
+ *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
+ *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
+ *  makefile or build system.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#define MAG_T1_CLOCK         (1 << 0)
+	#define MAG_T1_DATA          (1 << 1)
+	#define MAG_T2_CLOCK         (1 << 2)
+	#define MAG_T2_DATA          (1 << 3)
+	#define MAG_T3_CLOCK         (1 << 4)
+	#define MAG_T3_DATA          (1 << 5)
+	#define MAG_CARDPRESENT      (1 << 6)
+
+	#define MAG_PORT             PORTC
+	#define MAG_PIN              PINC
+	#define MAG_DDR              DDRC
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a7decf5a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1c6e9f043
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,216 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID report descriptor. This is a HID class specific descriptor, which defines the structure of the
+ *  reports sent and received by the HID device to and from the USB host. It indicates what data is sent,
+ *  where in the report each element is located and exactly how the data should be interpreted and used.
+ *
+ *  See the HID class specification for more information on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] =
+{
+	/* Use the HID class driver's standard Keyboard report.
+	 *   Max simultaneous keys: 6
+	 */
+	HID_DESCRIPTOR_KEYBOARD(6)
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2042,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.HID_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_Keyboard,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = HID_CSCP_HIDClass,
+			.SubClass               = HID_CSCP_BootSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = HID_CSCP_KeyboardBootProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_KeyboardHID =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = HID_DTYPE_HID},
+
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(1,1,1),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = HID_DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(KeyboardReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = KEYBOARD_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera and Denver Gingerich");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Magnetic Card Reader");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_HID:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_KeyboardHID;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t);
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_Report:
+			Address = &KeyboardReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(KeyboardReport);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..54436fc18
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; /**< Configuration descriptor header structure */
+
+			// Keyboard HID Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface; /**< Keyboard interface descriptor */
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t              HID_KeyboardHID; /**< Keyboard HID descriptor */
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint; /**< Keyboard key report endpoint descriptor */
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_Keyboard = 0, /**< Keyboard interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the keyboard key press reporting endpoint. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_EPADDR              (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 1)
+
+		/** Size of the keyboard report endpoints, in bytes. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_EPSIZE              8
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/CircularBitBuffer.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/CircularBitBuffer.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fbd511b81
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/CircularBitBuffer.c
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** Circular bit buffer library. This will allow for individual bits
+ *  to be stored in packed form inside circular buffers, to reduce
+ *  overall RAM usage.
+ */
+
+#include "CircularBitBuffer.h"
+
+/** Function to initialize or reset a bit buffer, ready for data to be stored into it. */
+void BitBuffer_Init(BitBuffer_t* const Buffer)
+{
+	/* Reset the number of stored bits in the buffer */
+	Buffer->Elements        = 0;
+
+	/* Reset the data in and out pointer structures in the buffer to the first buffer bit */
+	Buffer->In.CurrentByte  = Buffer->Data;
+	Buffer->In.ByteMask     = (1 << 0);
+	Buffer->Out.CurrentByte = Buffer->Data;
+	Buffer->Out.ByteMask    = (1 << 0);
+}
+
+/** Function to store the given bit into the given bit buffer. */
+void BitBuffer_StoreNextBit(BitBuffer_t* const Buffer,
+                            const bool Bit)
+{
+	/* If the bit to store is true, set the next bit in the buffer */
+	if (Bit)
+	  *Buffer->In.CurrentByte |= Buffer->In.ByteMask;
+
+	/* Increment the number of stored bits in the buffer counter */
+	Buffer->Elements++;
+
+	/* Check if the current buffer byte is full of stored bits */
+	if (Buffer->In.ByteMask == (1 << 7))
+	{
+		/* Check if the end of the buffer has been reached, if so reset to start of buffer, otherwise advance to next bit */
+		if (Buffer->In.CurrentByte != &Buffer->Data[sizeof(Buffer->Data) - 1])
+		  Buffer->In.CurrentByte++;
+		else
+		  Buffer->In.CurrentByte = Buffer->Data;
+
+		/* Reset the storage bit mask in the current buffer byte to the first bit */
+		Buffer->In.ByteMask = (1 << 0);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Shift the current storage bit mask to the next bit in the current byte */
+		Buffer->In.ByteMask <<= 1;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Function to retrieve the next bit stored in the given bit buffer. */
+bool BitBuffer_GetNextBit(BitBuffer_t* const Buffer)
+{
+	/* Retrieve the value of the next bit stored in the buffer */
+	bool Bit = ((*Buffer->Out.CurrentByte & Buffer->Out.ByteMask) != 0);
+
+	/* Clear the buffer bit */
+	*Buffer->Out.CurrentByte &= ~Buffer->Out.ByteMask;
+
+	/* Decrement the number of stored bits in the buffer counter */
+	Buffer->Elements--;
+
+	/* Check if the current buffer byte is empty of stored bits */
+	if (Buffer->Out.ByteMask == (1 << 7))
+	{
+		/* Check if the end of the buffer has been reached, if so reset to start of buffer, otherwise advance to next bit */
+		if (Buffer->Out.CurrentByte != &Buffer->Data[sizeof(Buffer->Data) - 1])
+		  Buffer->Out.CurrentByte++;
+		else
+		  Buffer->Out.CurrentByte = Buffer->Data;
+
+		/* Reset the retrieval bit mask in the current buffer byte to the first bit */
+		Buffer->Out.ByteMask = (1 << 0);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Shift the current retrieval bit mask to the next bit in the current byte */
+		Buffer->Out.ByteMask <<= 1;
+	}
+
+	/* Return the retrieved bit from the buffer */
+	return Bit;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/CircularBitBuffer.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/CircularBitBuffer.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..918c82533
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/CircularBitBuffer.h
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for CircularBitBuffer.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CIRCULARBITBUFFER_H_
+#define _CIRCULARBITBUFFER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) || \
+		     defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			/** Maximum number of bits which can be stored into a bit buffer. The memory usage is one eighth of this value per buffer. */
+			#define MAX_BITS 8192
+		#else
+			#define MAX_BITS 1024
+		#endif
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a pointer to a bit in a bit buffer. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t* CurrentByte; /**< Pointer to the current byte in the buffer */
+			uint8_t  ByteMask; /**< Mask of the current bit in the buffer */
+		} BitBufferPointer_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a circular packet bit buffer. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t            Data[MAX_BITS / 8]; /**< Buffer to hold the stored bits in packed form */
+			uint16_t           Elements; /**< Number of stored bits in the bit buffer */
+
+			BitBufferPointer_t In; /**< Bit pointer to the next storage location in the buffer */
+			BitBufferPointer_t Out; /**< Bit pointer to the next retrieval location in the buffer */
+		} BitBuffer_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		/** Initializes or resets a given bit buffer, ready to store new bits.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in,out] Buffer  Bit buffer to initialize
+		 */
+		void BitBuffer_Init(BitBuffer_t* const Buffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+		/** Stores a bit into the next location inside a given bit buffer.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in,out] Buffer  Bit buffer to store a bit into
+		 *  \param[in] Bit  Bit to store into the buffer
+		 */
+		void BitBuffer_StoreNextBit(BitBuffer_t* const Buffer,
+		                            const bool Bit) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+		/** Retrieves a bit from the next location inside a given bit buffer.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in,out] Buffer  Bit buffer to retrieve a bit from
+		 *
+		 *  \return Next bit from the buffer
+		 */
+		bool BitBuffer_GetNextBit(BitBuffer_t* const Buffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/MagstripeHW.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/MagstripeHW.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..45c040eec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/MagstripeHW.h
@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/*
+	NOTE: The user of this include file MUST define the following macros
+	prior to including the file:
+
+	MAG_T1_CLOCK_PIN   Pin connected to Track 1 clock wire (i.e.. PORTC1)
+	MAG_T1_DATA_PIN    Pin connected to Track 1 data wire (i.e.. PORTC2)
+	MAG_T2_CLOCK_PIN   Pin connected to Track 2 clock wire (i.e.. PORTC3)
+	MAG_T2_DATA_PIN    Pin connected to Track 2 data wire (i.e.. PORTC0)
+	MAG_T3_CLOCK_PIN   Pin connected to Track 3 clock wire (i.e.. PORTC5)
+	MAG_T3_DATA_PIN    Pin connected to Track 3 data wire (i.e.. PORTC6)
+	MAG_CLS_PIN        Pin connected to card loaded wire (i.e.. PORTC4)
+	MAG_PIN            PIN macro for the reader's port (i.e.. PINC)
+	MAG_DDR            DDR macro for the reader's port (i.e.. DDRC)
+	MAG_PORT           PORT macro for the reader's port (i.e.. PORTC)
+
+	The example macros listed above assume that the Track 2 data wire is
+	connected to pin 0 on port C, the Track 2 clock wire is connected to
+	pin 3 on port C (similarly for Tracks 1 and 3), and the card loaded
+	wire is connected to pin 4 on port C.
+
+	If the mag-stripe reader you are using only reads one or two tracks,
+	then set the clock and data pins for the tracks it doesn't read to a
+	pin that is unused.  For example, on the AT90USBKey, any of the pins on
+	port C that do not have wires attached will be unused since they are
+	not connected to any onboard devices (such as the joystick or
+	temperature sensor).
+
+	Connecting wires to pins on different ports (i.e.. a data wire to pin 0
+	on port C and a clock wire to pin 0 on port D) is currently
+	unsupported.  All pins specified above must be on the same port.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Driver header for a TTL Magnetic Card reader device (such as the Omron V3B-4K).
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MAGSTRIPEHW_H_
+#define _MAGSTRIPEHW_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Mask of the track data, clock and card detection pins. */
+			#define MAG_MASK    (MAG_T1_DATA | MAG_T1_CLOCK | \
+			                     MAG_T2_DATA | MAG_T2_CLOCK | \
+			                     MAG_T3_DATA | MAG_T3_CLOCK | \
+			                     MAG_CARDPRESENT)
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Initializes the magnetic stripe card reader ports and pins so that the card reader
+			 *  device can be controlled and read by the card reader driver. This must be called before
+			 *  trying to read any of the card reader's status lines.
+			 */
+			static inline void Magstripe_Init(void)
+			{
+				MAG_DDR  &= ~MAG_MASK;
+				MAG_PORT |=  MAG_MASK;
+			};
+
+			/** Returns the status of all the magnetic card reader's outputs.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A mask indicating which card lines are high or low
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Magstripe_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Magstripe_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				/* Mag-stripe IOs are active low and must be inverted when read */
+				return ((uint8_t)~MAG_PIN & MAG_MASK);
+			}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7cf7373a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.c
@@ -0,0 +1,228 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MagStripe reader program. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "Magstripe.h"
+
+/** Bit buffers to hold the read bits for each of the three magnetic card tracks before they are transmitted
+ *  to the host as keyboard presses.
+ */
+static BitBuffer_t TrackDataBuffers[TOTAL_TRACKS];
+
+/** Pointer to the current track buffer being sent to the host. */
+static BitBuffer_t* CurrentTrackBuffer = &TrackDataBuffers[TOTAL_TRACKS];
+
+/** Buffer to hold the previously generated Keyboard HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
+static uint8_t PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t)];
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Keyboard_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber            = INTERFACE_ID_Keyboard,
+				.ReportINEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address            = KEYBOARD_EPADDR,
+						.Size               = KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks              = 1,
+					},
+				.PrevReportINBuffer         = PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer,
+				.PrevReportINBufferSize     = sizeof(PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer),
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	for (uint8_t Buffer = 0; Buffer < TOTAL_TRACKS; Buffer++)
+	  BitBuffer_Init(&TrackDataBuffers[Buffer]);
+
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		if (Magstripe_GetStatus() & MAG_CARDPRESENT)
+		  ReadMagstripeData();
+
+		HID_Device_USBTask(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Magstripe_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Determines if a card has been inserted, and if so reads in each track's contents into the bit buffers
+ *  until they are read out to the host as a series of keyboard presses.
+ */
+void ReadMagstripeData(void)
+{
+	/* Arrays to hold the buffer pointers, clock and data bit masks for the separate card tracks */
+	const struct
+	{
+		uint8_t ClockMask;
+		uint8_t DataMask;
+	} TrackInfo[] = {{MAG_T1_CLOCK, MAG_T1_DATA},
+	                 {MAG_T2_CLOCK, MAG_T2_DATA},
+	                 {MAG_T3_CLOCK, MAG_T3_DATA}};
+
+	uint8_t Magstripe_Prev = 0;
+	uint8_t Magstripe_LCL  = Magstripe_GetStatus();
+
+	while (Magstripe_LCL & MAG_CARDPRESENT)
+	{
+		for (uint8_t Track = 0; Track < TOTAL_TRACKS; Track++)
+		{
+			bool DataPinLevel      = ((Magstripe_LCL & TrackInfo[Track].DataMask) != 0);
+			bool ClockPinLevel     = ((Magstripe_LCL & TrackInfo[Track].ClockMask) != 0);
+			bool ClockLevelChanged = (((Magstripe_LCL ^ Magstripe_Prev) & TrackInfo[Track].ClockMask) != 0);
+
+			/* Sample data on rising clock edges from the card reader */
+			if (ClockPinLevel && ClockLevelChanged)
+			  BitBuffer_StoreNextBit(&TrackDataBuffers[Track], DataPinLevel);
+		}
+
+		Magstripe_Prev = Magstripe_LCL;
+		Magstripe_LCL  = Magstripe_GetStatus();
+	}
+
+	CurrentTrackBuffer = &TrackDataBuffers[0];
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+
+	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]     HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in,out] ReportID    Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
+ *  \param[in]     ReportType  Type of the report to create, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_In or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature
+ *  \param[out]    ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
+ *  \param[out]    ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent)
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true to force the sending of the report, \c false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                         void* ReportData,
+                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize)
+{
+	USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* KeyboardReport = (USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
+
+	static bool IsKeyReleaseReport;
+
+	/* Key reports must be interleaved with key release reports, or repeated keys will be ignored */
+	IsKeyReleaseReport = !IsKeyReleaseReport;
+
+	if ((IsKeyReleaseReport) || (CurrentTrackBuffer == &TrackDataBuffers[TOTAL_TRACKS]))
+	{
+		/* No more data to send, or key release report between key presses */
+		KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = KEY_NONE;
+	}
+	else if (!(CurrentTrackBuffer->Elements))
+	{
+		/* End of current track, send an enter press and change to the next track's buffer */
+		KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = KEY_ENTER;
+		CurrentTrackBuffer++;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Still data in the current track; convert next bit to a 1 or 0 keypress */
+		KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = BitBuffer_GetNextBit(CurrentTrackBuffer) ? KEY_1 : KEY_0;
+	}
+
+	*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t);
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** HID Class driver callback function for the processing of a received HID report from the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID interface structure for the HID interface being referenced
+ *  \param[in] ReportID          Report ID of the received report from the host
+ *  \param[in] ReportType        The type of report that the host has sent, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature
+ *  \param[in] ReportData        Pointer to the report buffer where the received report is stored
+ *  \param[in] ReportSize        Size in bytes of the report received from the host
+ */
+void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                          const void* ReportData,
+                                          const uint16_t ReportSize)
+{
+	// Ignore keyboard LED reports from the host, but still need to declare the callback routine
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..79a0f126f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.h
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Magstripe.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MAGSTRIPE_H_
+#define _MAGSTRIPE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "Lib/MagstripeHW.h"
+		#include "Lib/CircularBitBuffer.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Total number of tracks which can be read from the card, between 1 and 3. */
+		#define TOTAL_TRACKS       3
+
+		/** HID keyboard keycode to indicate that no is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEY_NONE           0
+
+		/** HID keyboard keycode to indicate that the "1" key is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEY_1              30
+
+		/** HID keyboard keycode to indicate that the "0" key is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEY_0              39
+
+		/** HID keyboard keycode to indicate that the enter key is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEY_ENTER          40
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void ReadMagstripeData(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+		                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+		                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                                         void* ReportData,
+		                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize);
+		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+		                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+		                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                                          const void* ReportData,
+		                                          const uint16_t ReportSize);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a11dfaf80
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,163 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Denver Gingerich's USBSnoop Magnetic Card Reader Project
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  \li AT90USB1287
+ *  \li AT90USB1286
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Device</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Keyboard</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *   <td>USBIF HID Standard, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Firmware for a USB AVR powered USB TTL magnetic stripe reader (using a card
+ *  reader such as the Omron V3B-4K) by Denver Gingerich. This project is designed
+ *  to be used with the open source Stripe Snoop project at <a>http://stripesnoop.sourceforge.net/</a>.
+ *
+ *  See <a>http://ossguy.com/ss_usb/</a> for the USB reader hardware project website,
+ *  including construction and support details.
+ *
+ *  To use, connect your magnetic card reader device to the USB AVR as follows (pin and port mapping may be adjusted
+ *  from the project makefile):
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Signal:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>AVR Port:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Track 1 Data</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 1</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Track 1 Clock</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 2</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Track 2 Data</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 3</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Track 2 Clock</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 0</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Track 3 Data</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 5</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Track 3 Clock</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 6</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Card Detect</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 4</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  This project is based on the LUFA Keyboard project demonstration application, written by Denver Gingerich.
+ *
+ *  This application uses a keyboard HID driver to communicate the data collected a TTL magnetic stripe reader
+ *  to the connected computer. The raw bitstream obtained from the magnetic stripe reader is "typed" through
+ *  the keyboard driver as 0's and 1's. After every card swipe, the project will send a return key.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAX_BITS</td>
+ *    <td>CircularBitBuffer.h</td>
+ *    <td>Gives the maximum number of bits per track which can be buffered by the device for later transmission to a host.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAG_T1_CLOCK</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's CLOCK line for the reader's track 1 output.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAG_T1_DATA</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's DATA line for the reader's track 1 output.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAG_T2_CLOCK</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's CLOCK line for the reader's track 2 output.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAG_T2_DATA</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's DATA line for the reader's track 2 output.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAG_T3_CLOCK</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's CLOCK line for the reader's track 3 output.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAG_T3_DATA</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's DATA line for the reader's track 3 output.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAG_CARDPRESENT</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's card detection output.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAG_PIN</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>PIN register that the magnetic card reader device is attached to.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAG_PORT</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>PORT register that the magnetic card reader device is attached to.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAG_DDR</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>DDR register that the magnetic card reader device is attached to.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9fc5311e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Magnetic Strip Card Reader" id="lufa.projects.magstripe.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.projects.magstripe"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.projects.magstripe" caption="Magnetic Strip Card Reader">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Magnetic strip card reader project.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="Magstripe.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="Magstripe.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Magstripe.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/CircularBitBuffer.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/CircularBitBuffer.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/MagstripeHW.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7f112e1dc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "Denver Gingerich's Stripe Snoop Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b45917fbf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = NONE
+F_CPU        = 16000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = Magstripe
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c Lib/CircularBitBuffer.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..078f7e675
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..678ab6a94
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,234 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MediaControlReport[] =
+{
+	HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x0C), /* Consumer Page */
+	HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x01), /* Consumer Controls */
+	HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x01), /* Application */
+		HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xB0), /* Play */
+		HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xB1), /* Pause */
+		HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xB3), /* Fast Forward */
+		HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xB4), /* Rewind */
+		HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xB5), /* Next Track */
+		HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xB6), /* Previous Track */
+		HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xB7), /* Stop */
+		HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xCD), /* Play/Pause (toggle) */
+		HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xE2), /* Mute */
+		HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xE9), /* Volume Up */
+		HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xEA), /* Volume Down */
+		HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x01),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x0B),
+		HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0),
+		HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 1),
+		HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_RELATIVE),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x05),
+		HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_CONSTANT),
+	HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0),
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x206A,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.HID_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_HID,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = HID_CSCP_HIDClass,
+			.SubClass               = HID_CSCP_NonBootSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = HID_CSCP_NonBootProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_MediaControlHID =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = HID_DTYPE_HID},
+
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(1,1,1),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = HID_DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(MediaControlReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = MEDIACONTROL_HID_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MEDIACONTROL_HID_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Media Controller");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_HID:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_MediaControlHID;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t);
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_Report:
+			Address = &MediaControlReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(MediaControlReport);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b8c0b8859
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// Media Controller HID Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t              HID_MediaControlHID;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_HID = 0, /**< HID interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the Media Control HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define MEDIACONTROL_HID_EPADDR           (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 1)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Media Control HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define MEDIACONTROL_HID_EPSIZE           8
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/MediaController.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/MediaController.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..70522e7b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/MediaController.c
@@ -0,0 +1,184 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MediaControl project. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "MediaController.h"
+
+/** Buffer to hold the previously generated Media Control HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
+static uint8_t PrevMediaControlHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_MediaReport_Data_t)];
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t MediaControl_HID_Interface =
+ 	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber              = INTERFACE_ID_HID,
+				.ReportINEndpoint             =
+					{
+						.Address              = MEDIACONTROL_HID_EPADDR,
+						.Size                 = MEDIACONTROL_HID_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                = 1,
+					},
+				.PrevReportINBuffer           = PrevMediaControlHIDReportBuffer,
+				.PrevReportINBufferSize       = sizeof(PrevMediaControlHIDReportBuffer),
+			},
+    };
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		HID_Device_USBTask(&MediaControl_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware()
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	ConfigSuccess &= HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&MediaControl_HID_Interface);
+
+	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&MediaControl_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&MediaControl_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]     HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in,out] ReportID    Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
+ *  \param[in]     ReportType  Type of the report to create, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_In or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature
+ *  \param[out]    ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
+ *  \param[out]    ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent)
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true to force the sending of the report, \c false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                         void* ReportData,
+                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize)
+{
+	USB_MediaReport_Data_t* MediaReport = (USB_MediaReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
+
+	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL    = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus();
+
+	/* Update the Media Control report with the user button presses */
+	MediaReport->Mute          = ((ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ? true : false);
+	MediaReport->PlayPause     = ((JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS) ? true : false);
+	MediaReport->VolumeUp      = ((JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)    ? true : false);
+	MediaReport->VolumeDown    = ((JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)  ? true : false);
+	MediaReport->PreviousTrack = ((JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)  ? true : false);
+	MediaReport->NextTrack     = ((JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT) ? true : false);
+
+	*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_MediaReport_Data_t);
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in] ReportID    Report ID of the received report from the host
+ *  \param[in] ReportType  The type of report that the host has sent, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature
+ *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the received report has been stored
+ *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
+ */
+void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                          const void* ReportData,
+                                          const uint16_t ReportSize)
+{
+	// Unused (but mandatory for the HID class driver) in this demo, since there are no Host->Device reports
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/MediaController.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/MediaController.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6a36d4421
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/MediaController.h
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MediaControl.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MEDIACONTROL_H_
+#define _MEDIACONTROL_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a Media Control HID report. This report contains the bits to match the usages defined
+		 *  in the HID report of the device. When set to a true value, the relevant media controls on the host will
+		 *  be triggered.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			unsigned Play           : 1;
+			unsigned Pause          : 1;
+			unsigned FForward       : 1;
+			unsigned Rewind         : 1;
+			unsigned NextTrack      : 1;
+			unsigned PreviousTrack  : 1;
+			unsigned Stop           : 1;
+			unsigned PlayPause      : 1;
+			unsigned Mute           : 1;
+			unsigned VolumeUp       : 1;
+			unsigned VolumeDown     : 1;
+			unsigned RESERVED       : 5;
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_MediaReport_Data_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+		                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+		                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                                         void* ReportData,
+		                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize);
+		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+		                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+		                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                                          const void* ReportData,
+		                                          const uint16_t ReportSize);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/MediaController.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/MediaController.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..dece2132a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/MediaController.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Media Controller Project
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Media Controller project. This project implements a basic Media Control device, to signal the host to play, pause, toggle playback,
+ *  mute and/or adjust the host volume, in addition to other such media commands. This project may be extended to create a dedicated
+ *  media playback control device, for home media centers or other equipment. By default, some of the most commonly used playback controls
+ *  are controlled by the board joystick and LEDs, however this may be altered as desired.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2d476da51
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Media Controller" id="lufa.projects.media_control.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.projects.media_control"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.projects.media_control" caption="Media Controller">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Magnetic strip card reader project.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="MediaController.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="MediaController.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="MediaController.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f6fff7354
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Media Controller Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7db333810
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = MediaController
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..38f4dca9e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              0
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/ConfigDescriptor.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/ConfigDescriptor.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a90e25548
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,185 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
+ *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the GenericHIDHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+
+	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* HIDInterface    = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint  = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return ControlError;
+	}
+
+	while (!(DataINEndpoint) || !(DataOUTEndpoint))
+	{
+		/* See if we've found a likely compatible interface, and if there is an endpoint within that interface */
+		if (!(HIDInterface) ||
+		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+		                              DComp_NextHIDInterfaceDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			/* Not all HID devices have an OUT endpoint - if we've reached the end of the HID descriptor
+			 * but only found the mandatory IN endpoint, it's safe to continue with the device enumeration */
+			if (DataINEndpoint)
+			  break;
+
+			/* Get the next HID interface from the configuration descriptor */
+			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+			                              DComp_NextHIDInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+			{
+				/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+				return NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+			}
+
+			/* Save the interface in case we need to refer back to it later */
+			HIDInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+			/* Clear any found endpoints */
+			DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;
+
+			/* Skip the remainder of the loop as we have not found an endpoint yet */
+			continue;
+		}
+
+		/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* If the endpoint is a IN type endpoint */
+		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+		  DataINEndpoint  = EndpointData;
+		else
+		  DataOUTEndpoint = EndpointData;
+	}
+
+	/* Configure the HID data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(HID_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress, DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize, 1);
+	Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(DataINEndpoint->PollingIntervalMS);
+
+	/* Check if the HID interface contained an optional OUT data endpoint */
+	if (DataOUTEndpoint)
+	{
+		/* Configure the HID data OUT pipe */
+		Pipe_ConfigurePipe(HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress, DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointSize, 1);
+	}
+
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct HID Class value.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	/* Determine if the current descriptor is an interface descriptor */
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		/* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
+		if (Interface->Class == HID_CLASS)
+		{
+			/* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor,
+ *  aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	/* Determine the type of the current descriptor */
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		/* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		/* Indicate that the search has failed prematurely and should be aborted */
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/ConfigDescriptor.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/ConfigDescriptor.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..50481340d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "MissileLauncher.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class. */
+		#define HID_CLASS                 0x03
+
+		/** Pipe address for the HID data IN pipe. */
+		#define HID_DATA_IN_PIPE          (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1)
+
+		/** Pipe address for the HID data OUT pipe. */
+		#define HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE         (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2)
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the \ref ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum GenericHIDHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoCompatibleInterfaceFound      = 4, /**< A compatible interface with the required endpoints was not found */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+		uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a33c4cf7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.c
@@ -0,0 +1,323 @@
+/*
+            USB Missile Launcher Demo
+        Copyright (C) Dave Fletcher, 2010.
+         fletch at fletchtronics dot net
+
+       Based on research by Scott Weston at
+        http://code.google.com/p/pymissile
+ */
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Dave Fletcher (fletch [at] fletchtronics [dot] net)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/*
+ *  Missile Launcher host. This is a host driver for the popular USB-controller table top toy missile launchers,
+ *  which can typically aim and fire small foam "missiles" from a spring-loaded turret. This project controls the
+ *  launcher via a joystick and button to aim and fire missiles at targets without a PC.
+ */
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MissileLauncher application. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the application and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration as well
+ *  as the sending of commands to the attached launcher toy.
+ */
+
+#include "MissileLauncher.h"
+
+/** Launcher first init command report data sequence */
+static const uint8_t CMD_INITA[8]     = {  85, 83, 66, 67,  0,  0,  4,  0  };
+
+/** Launcher second init command report data sequence */
+static const uint8_t CMD_INITB[8]     = {  85, 83, 66, 67,  0, 64,  2,  0  };
+
+/** Launcher command report data sequence to stop all movement */
+static const uint8_t CMD_STOP[8]      = {   0,  0,  0,  0,  0,  0,  8,  8  };
+
+/** Launcher command report data sequence to move left */
+static const uint8_t CMD_LEFT[8]      = {   0,  1,  0,  0,  0,  0,  8,  8  };
+
+/** Launcher command report data sequence to move right */
+static const uint8_t CMD_RIGHT[8]     = {   0,  0,  1,  0,  0,  0,  8,  8  };
+
+/** Launcher command report data sequence to move up */
+static const uint8_t CMD_UP[8]        = {   0,  0,  0,  1,  0,  0,  8,  8  };
+
+/** Launcher command report data sequence to move down */
+static const uint8_t CMD_DOWN[8]      = {   0,  0,  0,  0,  1,  0,  8,  8  };
+
+/** Launcher command report data sequence to move left and up */
+static const uint8_t CMD_LEFTUP[8]    = {   0,  1,  0,  1,  0,  0,  8,  8  };
+
+/** Launcher command report data sequence to move right and up */
+static const uint8_t CMD_RIGHTUP[8]   = {   0,  0,  1,  1,  0,  0,  8,  8  };
+
+/** Launcher command report data sequence to move left and down */
+static const uint8_t CMD_LEFTDOWN[8]  = {   0,  1,  0,  0,  1,  0,  8,  8  };
+
+/** Launcher command report data sequence to move right and down */
+static const uint8_t CMD_RIGHTDOWN[8] = {   0,  0,  1,  0,  1,  0,  8,  8  };
+
+/** Launcher command report data sequence to fire a missile */
+static const uint8_t CMD_FIRE[8]      = {   0,  0,  0,  0,  0,  1,  8,  8  };
+
+/** Last command sent to the launcher, to determine what new command (if any) must be sent */
+static const uint8_t* CmdState;
+
+/** Buffer to hold a command to send to the launcher */
+static uint8_t CmdBuffer[LAUNCHER_CMD_BUFFER_SIZE];
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	CmdState = CMD_STOP;
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		Read_Joystick_Status();
+		DiscardNextReport();
+
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+	Joystick_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+}
+
+/** Reads the joystick and button status, sending commands to the launcher as needed. */
+void Read_Joystick_Status(void)
+{
+	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t Buttons_LCL   = Buttons_GetStatus();
+
+	if (Buttons_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
+	  Send_Command(CMD_FIRE);
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  Send_Command(CMD_UP);
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  Send_Command(CMD_DOWN);
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  Send_Command(CMD_LEFT);
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  Send_Command(CMD_RIGHT);
+	else if (CmdState != CMD_STOP)
+	  Send_Command(CMD_STOP);
+}
+
+/** Lower level send routine, copies report into a larger buffer and sends.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Report  Report data to send.
+ *  \param[in] ReportSize  Report length in bytes.
+ */
+void Send_Command_Report(const uint8_t* const Report,
+                         const uint16_t ReportSize)
+{
+	memcpy(CmdBuffer, Report, 8);
+	WriteNextReport(CmdBuffer, ReportSize);
+}
+
+/** Sends one of the \c CMD_* command constants to the attached device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Command  One of the command constants.
+ */
+void Send_Command(const uint8_t* const Command)
+{
+	if ((CmdState == CMD_STOP && Command != CMD_STOP) ||
+		(CmdState != CMD_STOP && Command == CMD_STOP))
+	{
+		LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED4);
+
+		Send_Command_Report(CMD_INITA, 8);
+		Send_Command_Report(CMD_INITB, 8);
+		Send_Command_Report(Command, LAUNCHER_CMD_BUFFER_SIZE);
+	}
+
+	CmdState = Command;
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+	if (ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+	if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Reads in and discards the next report from the attached device. */
+void DiscardNextReport(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Select and unfreeze HID data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(HID_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	/* Check to see if a packet has been received */
+	if (!(Pipe_IsINReceived()))
+	{
+		/* Refreeze HID data IN pipe */
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */
+	Pipe_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Refreeze HID data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+}
+
+/** Writes a report to the attached device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] ReportOUTData  Buffer containing the report to send to the device
+ *  \param[in] ReportLength  Length of the report to send
+ */
+void WriteNextReport(uint8_t* const ReportOUTData,
+                     const uint16_t ReportLength)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Select and unfreeze HID data OUT pipe */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+
+	/* Not all HID devices have an OUT endpoint (some require OUT reports to be sent over the
+	 * control endpoint instead) - check to see if the OUT endpoint has been initialized */
+	if (Pipe_IsConfigured())
+	{
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		/* Ensure pipe is ready to be written to before continuing */
+		if (!(Pipe_IsOUTReady()))
+		{
+			/* Refreeze the data OUT pipe */
+			Pipe_Freeze();
+
+			return;
+		}
+
+		/* Write out HID report data */
+		Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(ReportOUTData, ReportLength, NULL);
+
+		/* Clear the OUT endpoint, send last data packet */
+		Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+		/* Refreeze the data OUT pipe */
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Class specific request to send a HID report to the device */
+		USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+			{
+				.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+				.bRequest      = HID_REQ_SetReport,
+				.wValue        = 0x02,
+				.wIndex        = 0x01,
+				.wLength       = ReportLength,
+			};
+
+		/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+		/* Send the request to the device */
+		USB_Host_SendControlRequest(ReportOUTData);
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3a5057322
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.h
@@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MissileLauncher.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MISSILELAUNCHER_HOST_H_
+#define _MISSILELAUNCHER_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING   (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY         (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR         (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** Size of the Launcher report command buffer. */
+		#define LAUNCHER_CMD_BUFFER_SIZE  64
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void Read_Joystick_Status(void);
+        void Send_Command_Report(const uint8_t* const Report,
+		                         const uint16_t ReportSize);
+        void Send_Command(const uint8_t* const Command);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+		void DiscardNextReport(void);
+		void WriteNextReport(uint8_t* const ReportOUTData,
+		                     const uint16_t ReportLength);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a0ddd15cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage David Fletcher's Missile Launcher
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Missile Launcher host. This is a host driver for the popular USB-controller table top toy missile launchers,
+ *  which can typically aim and fire small foam "missiles" from a spring-loaded turret. This project controls the
+ *  launcher via a joystick and button to aim and fire missiles at targets without a PC.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1b8ac1bd5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Missile Launcher" id="lufa.projects.missile_launcher.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.projects.missile_launcher"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.projects.missile_launcher" caption="Missile Launcher">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Missile launcher project.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="MissileLauncher.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="MissileLauncher.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="ConfigDescriptor.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="MissileLauncher.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="ConfigDescriptor.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..37f91e4e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "Dave Fletcher's Missile Launcher Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..635f5d5a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = MissileLauncher
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c ConfigDescriptor.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f561bf68f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              0
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d5951867a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,188 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  OBinou (obconseil [at] gmail [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM RelayBoard_DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_VendorSpecificClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x04B4,
+	.ProductID              = 0xFD11,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(2,0,0),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = STRING_ID_Serial,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM RelayBoard_ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED,
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(500)
+		},
+
+	.RelayBoardInterface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_RelayBoard,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 0,
+
+			.Class                  = USB_CSCP_VendorSpecificClass,
+			.SubClass               = 0x00,
+			.Protocol               = 0x00,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM RelayBoard_LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM RelayBoard_ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"SISPM");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM RelayBoard_ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"RelayBoard");
+
+/** Serial number string. This is a Unicode string containing the device's unique serial number, expressed as a
+ *  series of uppercase hexadecimal digits.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM RelayBoard_SerialString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"00001");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &RelayBoard_DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &RelayBoard_ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &RelayBoard_LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&RelayBoard_LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &RelayBoard_ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&RelayBoard_ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &RelayBoard_ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&RelayBoard_ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Serial:
+					Address = &RelayBoard_SerialString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&RelayBoard_SerialString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..33790dc69
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  OBinou (obconseil [at] gmail [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// Relay Board Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            RelayBoardInterface;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_RelayBoard = 0, /**< Relay board interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Serial       = 3, /**< Serial number string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..dccfe11a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.c
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  OBinou (obconseil [at] gmail [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the RelayBoard program. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "RelayBoard.h"
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	  USB_USBTask();
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the project's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Initialize Relays */
+	DDRC  |=  ALL_RELAYS;
+	PORTC &= ~ALL_RELAYS;
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+    const uint8_t SerialNumber[5] = { 0, 0, 0, 0, 1 };
+	uint8_t ControlData[2]        = { 0, 0 };
+
+    switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case 0x09:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED1);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(ControlData, sizeof(ControlData));
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+				switch (USB_ControlRequest.wValue)
+				{
+					case 0x303:
+						if (ControlData[1]) PORTC &= ~RELAY1; else PORTC |= RELAY1;
+						break;
+					case 0x306:
+						if (ControlData[1]) PORTC &= ~RELAY2; else PORTC |= RELAY2;
+						break;
+					case 0x309:
+						if (ControlData[1]) PORTC &= ~RELAY3; else PORTC |= RELAY3;
+						break;
+					case 0x30c:
+						if (ControlData[1]) PORTC &= ~RELAY4; else PORTC |= RELAY4;
+						break;
+				}
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case 0x01:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED1);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				switch (USB_ControlRequest.wValue)
+				{
+					case 0x301:
+						Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(SerialNumber, sizeof(SerialNumber));
+						break;
+					case 0x303:
+						ControlData[1] = (PORTC & RELAY1) ? 2 : 3;
+						break;
+					case 0x306:
+						ControlData[1] = (PORTC & RELAY2) ? 2 : 3;
+						break;
+					case 0x309:
+						ControlData[1] = (PORTC & RELAY3) ? 2 : 3;
+						break;
+					case 0x30c:
+						ControlData[1] = (PORTC & RELAY4) ? 2 : 3;
+						break;
+				}
+
+				if (ControlData[1])
+				  Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(ControlData, sizeof(ControlData));
+
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c2269224f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.h
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  OBinou (obconseil [at] gmail [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for RelayBoard.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _RELAYBOARD_H_
+#define _RELAYBOARD_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define RELAY1      (1 << 7)
+		#define RELAY2      (1 << 6)
+		#define RELAY3      (1 << 5)
+		#define RELAY4      (1 << 4)
+		#define ALL_RELAYS  (RELAY1 | RELAY2 | RELAY3 | RELAY4)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4b190dfe3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage OB's Quad-Relay outlet control using a Teensy2++
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  \li AT90USB1286
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Device</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *   <td>None</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *   <td>None</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *   <td>USB Standards</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Firmware for a Teensy2++ AVR-based miniboard to control four relays, using the
+ *  same protocol used by the commercially available Silver Shield PM power outlets
+ *  ( http://sourceforge.net/projects/sispmctl ) sold for some time. Because this
+ *  project mimics the original device, it can be controlled using the "sismpctl"
+ *  package included in many Linux distributions - including router-orientated
+ *  versions such as OpenWRT - to control the board's relays.
+ *
+ *  Relays 1 to 4 are respectively wired to pins C4, C5, C6 and C7 of the Teensy++ V2,
+ *  which are the PORTC bits 4 to 7 of the AT90USB1286. The relays MUST be wired through
+ *  a transistor, and a diode must be added in antiparallel on the relay's coil pins to
+ *  protect the transistor from back EMF generated from the relay when the coil is turned off.
+ *  The transistor base pin is wired to the Teensy data port through a 10K resistor. A
+ *  LED may be also be added as a relay status indicator on each channel.
+ *
+ *  The Relay coil will be driven by the transistor, but the power will come from
+ *  the 5V from the PC's USB port: Be careful in choosing the relay to avoid overloading
+ *  the PC, as the maximum current used MUST remains under ~450mA @ 5V.
+ *
+ *  The author's tested relays are 2 Finder 32.21.7.005.2000, coil il 125ohm, which can
+ *  handle 5A @ 250VAC. Be careful to use proper isolation if high voltages are manipulated.
+ *  The author used Hotglue to isolate all parts of the PCB in contact with high voltage.
+ *
+ *  See <a>http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/</a> for the Teensy2++ website.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Signal:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>AVR Port:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Relay 1</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 4</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Relay 2</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 5</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Relay 3</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 6</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Relay 4</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 7</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Teensy2++ Yellow Led</td>
+ *    <td>PORTD, pin 6</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e3a2ef4b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Relay Board Controller" id="lufa.projects.relay_board.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.projects.relay_board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.projects.relay_board" caption="Relay Board Controller">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Relay Board Controller project.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="RelayBoard.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="RelayBoard.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="RelayBoard.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6c119a555
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "OB's Dual-Relay Outlet Control Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bde15357e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = RelayBoard
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1bf1f19e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f6ee88e21
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,257 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2012  Simon Foster (simon.foster [at] inbox [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
+ * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
+ * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
+ * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
+ * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
+ * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
+ * port location).
+ */
+#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
+#endif
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+	.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x204B,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Header =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.CDCSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_ACM =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM,
+
+			.Capabilities           = 0x06,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Union =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union,
+
+			.MasterInterfaceNumber  = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.SlaveInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_NotificationEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Simon Foster");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"USB-HD44780 Adapter");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ed26aeed1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2012  Simon Foster (simon.foster [at] inbox [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 2)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+
+			// CDC Command Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t    CDC_Functional_Header;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t       CDC_Functional_ACM;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t     CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_NotificationEndpoint;
+
+			// CDC Data Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI = 0, /**< CDC CCI interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI = 1, /**< CDC DCI interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/Lib/HD44780.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/Lib/HD44780.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a91e79310
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/Lib/HD44780.c
@@ -0,0 +1,127 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2012  Simon Foster (simon.foster [at] inbox [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "HD44780.h"
+
+static void HD44780_WriteNibble(const uint8_t nib)
+{
+	/* Read PORTD and clear the ENABLE and PD0..3 bits
+	   then OR in the data */
+
+	PORTD = (PORTD & ~(ENABLE | LO4_MASK)) | (nib & LO4_MASK);
+
+	/* Enforce address setup time (tAS) 60ns
+	   60 @ 16MHz = <1
+	   Let's us a few NOPs for good measure */
+	asm volatile("nop\n\t"
+	             "nop\n\t"
+	             :: );
+
+	/* Take enable high and enforce Enable High time (tEH=450ns)
+	   450ns @ 16MHz = 7.2 => 7 NOPs */
+
+	PORTD |= ENABLE;
+
+	asm volatile("nop\n\t"
+	             "nop\n\t"
+	             "nop\n\t"
+	             "nop\n\t"
+	             "nop\n\t"
+	             "nop\n\t"
+	             "nop\n\t"
+	             "nop\n\t"
+	             :: );
+
+	/* Take enable low and enforce Enable Low time (tEL=500ns)
+	   500ns @ 16MHz = 8.0 => 7 NOPs */
+	PORTD &= ~ENABLE;
+
+	asm volatile("nop\n\t"
+	             "nop\n\t"
+	             "nop\n\t"
+	             "nop\n\t"
+	             "nop\n\t"
+	             "nop\n\t"
+	             "nop\n\t"
+	             "nop\n\t"
+	             :: );
+}
+
+static void HD44780_WriteByte(const uint8_t c)
+{
+	HD44780_WriteNibble(HI4(c));
+	HD44780_WriteNibble(LO4(c));
+}
+
+static void HD44780_PowerUp4Bit(void)
+{
+	/* Wait for more than 40 ms after VCC rises to 2.7 V */
+	_delay_ms(40);
+	HD44780_WriteNibble(0x03);        // FN_SET 8-bit
+
+	/* Wait for more than 4.1 ms */
+	_delay_ms(5);
+	HD44780_WriteNibble(0x03);        // FN_SET 8-bit
+
+	/* Wait for more than 100 µs */
+	_delay_us(100);
+	HD44780_WriteNibble(0x03);        // FN_SET 8-bit
+
+	/* From now on we must allow 40us for each command */
+	_delay_us(50);
+	HD44780_WriteNibble(0x02);        // FN_SET 4-bit
+
+	/* The LCD is now in 4-bit mode so we can continue
+	   using the 4-bit API */
+	_delay_us(50);
+}
+
+void HD44780_Initialize(void)
+{
+	PORTD &= ~ALL_BITS;
+	DDRD  |=  ALL_BITS;
+	HD44780_PowerUp4Bit();
+}
+
+void HD44780_WriteCommand(const uint8_t c)
+{
+	PORTD &= ~RS;
+	HD44780_WriteByte(c);
+	_delay_us(50);
+}
+
+void HD44780_WriteData(const uint8_t c)
+{
+	PORTD |=  RS;
+	HD44780_WriteByte(c);
+	PORTD &= ~RS;
+	_delay_us(50);
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/Lib/HD44780.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/Lib/HD44780.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b6dbe905e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/Lib/HD44780.h
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2012  Simon Foster (simon.foster [at] inbox [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for HD44780.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _HD44780_H_
+#define _HD44780_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <util/delay.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define RS                  (1 << 4)    /* PD4 */
+		#define ENABLE              (1 << 7)    /* PD7 */
+
+		#define HI4_MASK            0xF0
+		#define LO4_MASK            0x0F        /* PD0-PD3 */
+
+		#define ALL_BITS            (RS | ENABLE | LO4_MASK)
+
+		#define HI4(c)              ((c & HI4_MASK) >> 4)
+		#define LO4(c)              ((c & LO4_MASK) >> 0)
+
+		#define CMD_DISPLAY_ON      0x0C
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void HD44780_Initialize(void);
+		void HD44780_WriteData(const uint8_t c);
+		void HD44780_WriteCommand(const uint8_t c);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/SerialToLCD.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/SerialToLCD.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..21588c947
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/SerialToLCD.c
@@ -0,0 +1,170 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2012  Simon Foster (simon.foster [at] inbox [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the SerialToLCD program. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "SerialToLCD.h"
+
+/** Circular buffer to hold data from the host before it is sent to the LCD */
+static RingBuffer_t FromHost_Buffer;
+
+/** Underlying data buffer for \ref FromHost_Buffer, where the stored bytes are located. */
+static uint8_t      FromHost_Buffer_Data[128];
+
+/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+				.DataINEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address          = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint =
+					{
+						.Address          = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+				.NotificationEndpoint =
+					{
+						.Address          = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	RingBuffer_InitBuffer(&FromHost_Buffer, FromHost_Buffer_Data, sizeof(FromHost_Buffer_Data));
+
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		/* Only try to read in bytes from the CDC interface if the transmit buffer is not full */
+		if (!(RingBuffer_IsFull(&FromHost_Buffer)))
+		{
+			int16_t ReceivedByte = CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+
+			/* Read bytes from the USB OUT endpoint into the USART transmit buffer */
+			if (!(ReceivedByte < 0))
+			  RingBuffer_Insert(&FromHost_Buffer, ReceivedByte);
+		}
+
+		while (RingBuffer_GetCount(&FromHost_Buffer) > 0)
+		{
+			static uint8_t EscapePending = 0;
+			int16_t HD44780Byte = RingBuffer_Remove(&FromHost_Buffer);
+
+			if (HD44780Byte == COMMAND_ESCAPE)
+			{
+				if (EscapePending)
+				{
+					HD44780_WriteData(HD44780Byte);
+					EscapePending = 0;
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					/* Next received character is the command byte */
+					EscapePending = 1;
+				}
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				if (EscapePending)
+				{
+					HD44780_WriteCommand(HD44780Byte);
+					EscapePending = 0;
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					HD44780_WriteData(HD44780Byte);
+				}
+			}
+		}
+
+		CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the application's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Power up the HD44780 Interface */
+	HD44780_Initialize();
+	HD44780_WriteCommand(CMD_DISPLAY_ON);
+
+	/* Start the flush timer so that overflows occur rapidly to push received bytes to the USB interface */
+	TCCR0B = (1 << CS02);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/SerialToLCD.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/SerialToLCD.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..73455b1d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/SerialToLCD.h
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2012  Simon Foster (simon.foster [at] inbox [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for SerialToLCD.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _SERIALTOLCD_H_
+#define _SERIALTOLCD_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "Lib/HD44780.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/RingBuffer.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define COMMAND_ESCAPE     0x1B
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/SerialToLCD.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/SerialToLCD.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a2f339648
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/SerialToLCD.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Simon Foster's USB Serial to HD44780 LCD Project
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  \li AT90USB162
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Firmware for a USB Virtual Serial to HD44780 LCD controller project, by Simon Foster. This
+ *  project connects a standard HD7780 compatible LCD controller to a PC via a virtual serial
+ *  link, so that data supplied by the host can be written to the display. This project is
+ *  designed to use the Minimum USB AVR board, however it can be modified to suit other hardware
+ *  if desired.
+ *
+ *  LCD Datasheet:    http://www.sparkfun.com/datasheets/LCD/HD44780.pdf \n
+ *  More Information: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/HD44780_Character_LCD \n
+ *
+ *  Below are the connections between the AVR Minimus board and LCD.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>AVR Pin:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>HD44780 LCD Pin:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>VCC</td>
+ *    <td>VCC</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>GND</td>
+ *    <td>GND</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>PD0</td>
+ *    <td>DB4</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>PD1</td>
+ *    <td>DB5</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>PD2</td>
+ *    <td>DB6</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>PD3</td>
+ *    <td>DB7</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>PD4</td>
+ *    <td>/RS</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>GND</td>
+ *    <td>/RW</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>PD7</td>
+ *    <td>/E</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..07c241903
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="USB Serial to LCD Display" id="lufa.projects.serial_to_lcd.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.projects.serial_to_lcd"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.projects.serial_to_lcd" caption="USB Serial to LCD Display">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		USB Serial to LCD Controller project.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="CDC Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="SerialToLCD.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="SerialToLCD.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="SerialToLCD.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/HD44780.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/HD44780.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ringbuffer"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..38ac031ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "Simon Foster's USB Serial to HD44780 LCD Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b7e6d4211
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb162
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = MINIMUS
+F_CPU        = 16000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = SerialToLCD
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c Lib/HD44780.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5ac7011f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
+ *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
+ *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
+ *  makefile or build system.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#define DUMMY_RTC
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4d5f58a4a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              0
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c5ff3e146
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,257 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM GenericReport[] =
+{
+	/* Use the HID class driver's standard Vendor HID report.
+	 *  Vendor Usage Page: 1
+	 *  Vendor Collection Usage: 1
+	 *  Vendor Report IN Usage: 2
+	 *  Vendor Report OUT Usage: 3
+	 *  Vendor Report Size: GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE
+	 */
+	HID_DESCRIPTOR_VENDOR(0x00, 0x01, 0x02, 0x03, GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE)
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2063,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.MS_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = MS_CSCP_MassStorageClass,
+			.SubClass               = MS_CSCP_SCSITransparentSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = MS_CSCP_BulkOnlyTransportProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.HID_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_HID,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = HID_CSCP_HIDClass,
+			.SubClass               = HID_CSCP_NonBootSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = HID_CSCP_NonBootProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_GenericHID =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = HID_DTYPE_HID},
+
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(1,1,1),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = HID_DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(GenericReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = GENERIC_IN_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = GENERIC_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Temperature Datalogger");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_HID:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_GenericHID;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t);
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_Report:
+			Address = &GenericReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(GenericReport);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..42d4ca2f3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "TempDataLogger.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR         (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE         64
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the Generic HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define GENERIC_IN_EPADDR              (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 1)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Generic HID reporting endpoint. */
+		#define GENERIC_EPSIZE                 16
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Generic HID reports (including report ID byte). */
+		#define GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE            sizeof(Device_Report_t)
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// Mass Storage Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            MS_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataInEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataOutEndpoint;
+
+			// Settings Management Generic HID Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t              HID_GenericHID;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage = 0, /**< Mass storage interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_HID         = 1, /**< HID interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/DataflashManager.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/DataflashManager.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d8dc54dad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/DataflashManager.c
@@ -0,0 +1,534 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Functions to manage the physical Dataflash media, including reading and writing of
+ *  blocks of data. These functions are called by the SCSI layer when data must be stored
+ *  or retrieved to/from the physical storage media. If a different media is used (such
+ *  as a SD card or EEPROM), functions similar to these will need to be generated.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASHMANAGER_C
+#include "DataflashManager.h"
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), from
+ *  the pre-selected data OUT endpoint. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the endpoint and writes
+ *  them to the Dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                  const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                  uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+#endif
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+
+	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+	  return;
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is currently empty */
+			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+			{
+				/* Clear the current endpoint bank */
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+				/* Wait until the host has sent another packet */
+				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Once all the Dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
+				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+				/* If less than one Dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+				{
+					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				}
+#endif
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
+			}
+
+			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the Dataflash */
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+			  return;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+	/* If the endpoint is empty, clear it ready for the next packet from the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), into
+ *  the pre-selected data IN endpoint. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                 const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                 uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+
+	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+	  return;
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is currently full */
+			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+			{
+				/* Clear the endpoint bank to send its contents to the host */
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+				/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for more data */
+				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+			}
+
+			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the Dataflash */
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+			  return;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* If the endpoint is full, send its contents to the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), from
+ *  the given RAM buffer. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the buffer and writes them to the
+ *  Dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. This can be linked to FAT libraries to write files to the
+ *  Dataflash.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
+ *  \param[in] BufferPtr     Pointer to the data source RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                      uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+                                      const uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+#endif
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Once all the Dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
+				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+				/* If less than one Dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+				{
+					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				}
+#endif
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
+			}
+
+			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the Dataflash */
+			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+			  Dataflash_SendByte(*(BufferPtr++));
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), into
+ *  the preallocated RAM buffer. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the given buffer. This can be linked to FAT libraries to read
+ *  the files stored on the Dataflash.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
+ *  \param[out] BufferPtr    Pointer to the data destination RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                     uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+			}
+
+			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the Dataflash */
+			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+			  *(BufferPtr++) = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Disables the Dataflash memory write protection bits on the board Dataflash ICs, if enabled. */
+void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void)
+{
+	/* Select first Dataflash chip, send the read status register command */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+
+	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+	{
+		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+	}
+
+	/* Select second Dataflash chip (if present on selected board), send read status register command */
+	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+
+	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+	{
+		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+	}
+	#endif
+
+	/* Deselect current Dataflash chip */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Performs a simple test on the attached Dataflash IC(s) to ensure that they are working.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if all media chips are working, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ReturnByte;
+
+	/* Test first Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+	  return false;
+
+	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+	/* Test second Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+	  return false;
+	#endif
+
+	return true;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/DataflashManager.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/DataflashManager.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d93130d3b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/DataflashManager.h
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DataflashManager.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
+#define _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include "../TempDataLogger.h"
+		#include "../Descriptors.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE % 16)
+			#error Dataflash page size must be a multiple of 16 bytes.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Defines: */
+		/** Total number of bytes of the storage medium, comprised of one or more Dataflash ICs. */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES                ((uint32_t)DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)
+
+		/** Block size of the device. This is kept at 512 to remain compatible with the OS despite the underlying
+		 *  storage media (Dataflash) using a different native block size. Do not change this value.
+		 */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE           512
+
+		/** Total number of blocks of the virtual memory for reporting to the host as the device's total capacity. Do not
+		 *  change this value; change VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES instead to alter the media size.
+		 */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS               (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES / VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+		                                  const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                  uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+		                                 const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                 uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                      uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+		                                      const uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                     uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+		                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void);
+		bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/00readme.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/00readme.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..80d8843d1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/00readme.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+FatFs Module Source Files R0.09a                       (C)ChaN, 2012
+
+
+FILES
+
+  ffconf.h   Configuration file for FatFs module.
+  ff.h       Common include file for FatFs and application module.
+  ff.c       FatFs module.
+  diskio.h   Common include file for FatFs and disk I/O module.
+  diskio.c   An example of glue function to attach existing disk I/O module to FatFs.
+  integer.h  Integer type definitions for FatFs.
+  option     Optional external functions.
+
+  Low level disk I/O module is not included in this archive because the FatFs
+  module is only a generic file system layer and not depend on any specific
+  storage device. You have to provide a low level disk I/O module that written
+  to control your storage device.
+
+
+
+AGREEMENTS
+
+ FatFs module is an open source software to implement FAT file system to
+ small embedded systems. This is a free software and is opened for education,
+ research and commercial developments under license policy of following trems.
+
+  Copyright (C) 2012, ChaN, all right reserved.
+
+ * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
+ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
+   personal, non-profit or commercial product UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
+ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
+
+
+
+REVISION HISTORY
+
+  Feb 26, 2006  R0.00  Prototype
+
+  Apr 29, 2006  R0.01  First release.
+
+  Jun 01, 2006  R0.02  Added FAT12.
+                       Removed unbuffered mode.
+                       Fixed a problem on small (<32M) patition.
+
+  Jun 10, 2006  R0.02a Added a configuration option _FS_MINIMUM.
+
+  Sep 22, 2006  R0.03  Added f_rename.
+                       Changed option _FS_MINIMUM to _FS_MINIMIZE.
+
+  Dec 11, 2006  R0.03a Improved cluster scan algolithm to write files fast.
+                       Fixed f_mkdir creates incorrect directory on FAT32.
+
+  Feb 04, 2007  R0.04  Supported multiple drive system. (FatFs)
+                       Changed some APIs for multiple drive system.
+                       Added f_mkfs. (FatFs)
+                       Added _USE_FAT32 option. (Tiny-FatFs)
+
+  Apr 01, 2007  R0.04a Supported multiple partitions on a plysical drive. (FatFs)
+                       Fixed an endian sensitive code in f_mkfs. (FatFs)
+                       Added a capability of extending the file size to f_lseek.
+                       Added minimization level 3.
+                       Fixed a problem that can collapse a sector when recreate an
+                       existing file in any sub-directory at non FAT32 cfg. (Tiny-FatFs)
+
+  May 05, 2007  R0.04b Added _USE_NTFLAG option.
+                       Added FSInfo support.
+                       Fixed some problems corresponds to FAT32. (Tiny-FatFs)
+                       Fixed DBCS name can result FR_INVALID_NAME.
+                       Fixed short seek (0 < ofs <= csize) collapses the file object.
+
+  Aug 25, 2007  R0.05  Changed arguments of f_read, f_write.
+                       Changed arguments of f_mkfs. (FatFs)
+                       Fixed f_mkfs on FAT32 creates incorrect FSInfo. (FatFs)
+                       Fixed f_mkdir on FAT32 creates incorrect directory. (FatFs)
+
+  Feb 03, 2008  R0.05a Added f_truncate().
+                       Added f_utime().
+                       Fixed off by one error at FAT sub-type determination.
+                       Fixed btr in f_read() can be mistruncated.
+                       Fixed cached sector is not flushed when create and close without write.
+
+  Apr 01, 2008  R0.06  Added f_forward(). (Tiny-FatFs)
+                       Added string functions: fputc(), fputs(), fprintf() and fgets().
+                       Improved performance of f_lseek() on move to the same or following cluster.
+
+  Apr 01, 2009, R0.07  Merged Tiny-FatFs as a buffer configuration option.
+                       Added long file name support.
+                       Added multiple code page support.
+                       Added re-entrancy for multitask operation.
+                       Added auto cluster size selection to f_mkfs().
+                       Added rewind option to f_readdir().
+                       Changed result code of critical errors.
+                       Renamed string functions to avoid name collision.
+
+  Apr 14, 2009, R0.07a Separated out OS dependent code on reentrant cfg.
+                       Added multiple sector size support.
+
+  Jun 21, 2009, R0.07c Fixed f_unlink() may return FR_OK on error.
+                       Fixed wrong cache control in f_lseek().
+                       Added relative path feature.
+                       Added f_chdir().
+                       Added f_chdrive().
+                       Added proper case conversion for extended characters.
+
+  Nov 03, 2009 R0.07e  Separated out configuration options from ff.h to ffconf.h.
+                       Added a configuration option, _LFN_UNICODE.
+                       Fixed f_unlink() fails to remove a sub-dir on _FS_RPATH.
+                       Fixed name matching error on the 13 char boundary.
+                       Changed f_readdir() to return the SFN with always upper case on non-LFN cfg.
+
+  May 15, 2010, R0.08  Added a memory configuration option. (_USE_LFN)
+                       Added file lock feature. (_FS_SHARE)
+                       Added fast seek feature. (_USE_FASTSEEK)
+                       Changed some types on the API, XCHAR->TCHAR.
+                       Changed fname member in the FILINFO structure on Unicode cfg.
+                       String functions support UTF-8 encoding files on Unicode cfg.
+
+  Aug 16,'10 R0.08a    Added f_getcwd(). (_FS_RPATH = 2)
+                       Added sector erase feature. (_USE_ERASE)
+                       Moved file lock semaphore table from fs object to the bss.
+                       Fixed a wrong directory entry is created on non-LFN cfg when the given name contains ';'.
+                       Fixed f_mkfs() creates wrong FAT32 volume.
+
+  Jan 15,'11 R0.08b    Fast seek feature is also applied to f_read() and f_write().
+                       f_lseek() reports required table size on creating CLMP.
+                       Extended format syntax of f_printf function.
+                       Ignores duplicated directory separators in given path names.
+
+  Sep 06,'11 R0.09     f_mkfs() supports multiple partition to finish the multiple partition feature.
+                       Added f_fdisk(). (_MULTI_PARTITION = 2)
+
+  Aug 27,'12 R0.09a    Fixed assertion failure due to OS/2 EA on FAT12/16.
+                       Changed API rejects null object pointer to avoid crash.
+                       Changed option name _FS_SHARE to _FS_LOCK.
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/diskio.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/diskio.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8cc8cd404
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/diskio.c
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Low level disk I/O module skeleton for FatFs     (C)ChaN, 2007        */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* This is a stub disk I/O module that acts as front end of the existing */
+/* disk I/O modules and attach it to FatFs module with common interface. */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#include "diskio.h"
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Initialize a Drive                                                    */
+
+DSTATUS disk_initialize (
+	BYTE drv				/* Physical drive number (0..) */
+)
+{
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Return Disk Status                                                    */
+
+DSTATUS disk_status (
+	BYTE drv		/* Physical drive number (0..) */
+)
+{
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Read Sector(s)                                                        */
+
+DRESULT disk_read (
+	BYTE drv,		/* Physical drive number (0..) */
+	BYTE *buff,		/* Data buffer to store read data */
+	DWORD sector,	/* Sector address (LBA) */
+	BYTE count		/* Number of sectors to read (1..128) */
+)
+{
+	DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(sector, count, buff);
+	return RES_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Write Sector(s)                                                       */
+
+#if _READONLY == 0
+DRESULT disk_write (
+	BYTE drv,			/* Physical drive number (0..) */
+	const BYTE *buff,	/* Data to be written */
+	DWORD sector,		/* Sector address (LBA) */
+	BYTE count			/* Number of sectors to write (1..128) */
+)
+{
+	DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(sector, count, buff);
+	return RES_OK;
+}
+#endif /* _READONLY */
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Miscellaneous Functions                                               */
+
+DRESULT disk_ioctl (
+	BYTE drv,		/* Physical drive number (0..) */
+	BYTE ctrl,		/* Control code */
+	void *buff		/* Buffer to send/receive control data */
+)
+{
+	if (ctrl == CTRL_SYNC)
+	  return RES_OK;
+	else
+	  return RES_PARERR;
+}
+
+
+DWORD get_fattime (void)
+{
+	TimeDate_t CurrTimeDate;
+
+	RTC_GetTimeDate(&CurrTimeDate);
+
+
+	return ((DWORD)(20 + CurrTimeDate.Year) << 25) |
+	             ((DWORD)CurrTimeDate.Month << 21) |
+	               ((DWORD)CurrTimeDate.Day << 16) |
+	              ((DWORD)CurrTimeDate.Hour << 11) |
+	             ((DWORD)CurrTimeDate.Minute << 5) |
+	      (((DWORD)CurrTimeDate.Second >> 1) << 0);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/diskio.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/diskio.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d3c3149a5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/diskio.h
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+/  Low level disk interface module include file
+/-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#ifndef _DISKIO_DEFINED
+#define _DISKIO_DEFINED
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C" {
+#endif
+
+#include "integer.h"
+
+#include "../DataflashManager.h"
+
+
+/* Status of Disk Functions */
+typedef BYTE	DSTATUS;
+
+/* Results of Disk Functions */
+typedef enum {
+	RES_OK = 0,		/* 0: Successful */
+	RES_ERROR,		/* 1: R/W Error */
+	RES_WRPRT,		/* 2: Write Protected */
+	RES_NOTRDY,		/* 3: Not Ready */
+	RES_PARERR		/* 4: Invalid Parameter */
+} DRESULT;
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------*/
+/* Prototypes for disk control functions */
+
+DSTATUS disk_initialize (BYTE);
+DSTATUS disk_status (BYTE);
+DRESULT disk_read (BYTE, BYTE*, DWORD, BYTE);
+#if	_READONLY == 0
+DRESULT disk_write (BYTE, const BYTE*, DWORD, BYTE);
+#endif
+DRESULT disk_ioctl (BYTE, BYTE, void*);
+
+
+/* Disk Status Bits (DSTATUS) */
+
+#define STA_NOINIT		0x01	/* Drive not initialized */
+#define STA_NODISK		0x02	/* No medium in the drive */
+#define STA_PROTECT		0x04	/* Write protected */
+
+/* Generic command */
+#define CTRL_SYNC			0	/* Mandatory for write functions */
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+}
+#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ff.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ff.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..059b5885a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ff.c
@@ -0,0 +1,4139 @@
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/  FatFs - FAT file system module  R0.09a                 (C)ChaN, 2012
+/-----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ FatFs module is a generic FAT file system module for small embedded systems.
+/ This is a free software that opened for education, research and commercial
+/ developments under license policy of following terms.
+/
+/  Copyright (C) 2012, ChaN, all right reserved.
+/
+/ * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
+/ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
+/   personal, non-profit or commercial products UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
+/ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
+/
+/-----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ Feb 26,'06 R0.00  Prototype.
+/
+/ Apr 29,'06 R0.01  First stable version.
+/
+/ Jun 01,'06 R0.02  Added FAT12 support.
+/                   Removed unbuffered mode.
+/                   Fixed a problem on small (<32M) partition.
+/ Jun 10,'06 R0.02a Added a configuration option (_FS_MINIMUM).
+/
+/ Sep 22,'06 R0.03  Added f_rename().
+/                   Changed option _FS_MINIMUM to _FS_MINIMIZE.
+/ Dec 11,'06 R0.03a Improved cluster scan algorithm to write files fast.
+/                   Fixed f_mkdir() creates incorrect directory on FAT32.
+/
+/ Feb 04,'07 R0.04  Supported multiple drive system.
+/                   Changed some interfaces for multiple drive system.
+/                   Changed f_mountdrv() to f_mount().
+/                   Added f_mkfs().
+/ Apr 01,'07 R0.04a Supported multiple partitions on a physical drive.
+/                   Added a capability of extending file size to f_lseek().
+/                   Added minimization level 3.
+/                   Fixed an endian sensitive code in f_mkfs().
+/ May 05,'07 R0.04b Added a configuration option _USE_NTFLAG.
+/                   Added FSInfo support.
+/                   Fixed DBCS name can result FR_INVALID_NAME.
+/                   Fixed short seek (<= csize) collapses the file object.
+/
+/ Aug 25,'07 R0.05  Changed arguments of f_read(), f_write() and f_mkfs().
+/                   Fixed f_mkfs() on FAT32 creates incorrect FSInfo.
+/                   Fixed f_mkdir() on FAT32 creates incorrect directory.
+/ Feb 03,'08 R0.05a Added f_truncate() and f_utime().
+/                   Fixed off by one error at FAT sub-type determination.
+/                   Fixed btr in f_read() can be mistruncated.
+/                   Fixed cached sector is not flushed when create and close without write.
+/
+/ Apr 01,'08 R0.06  Added fputc(), fputs(), fprintf() and fgets().
+/                   Improved performance of f_lseek() on moving to the same or following cluster.
+/
+/ Apr 01,'09 R0.07  Merged Tiny-FatFs as a configuration option. (_FS_TINY)
+/                   Added long file name feature.
+/                   Added multiple code page feature.
+/                   Added re-entrancy for multitask operation.
+/                   Added auto cluster size selection to f_mkfs().
+/                   Added rewind option to f_readdir().
+/                   Changed result code of critical errors.
+/                   Renamed string functions to avoid name collision.
+/ Apr 14,'09 R0.07a Separated out OS dependent code on reentrant cfg.
+/                   Added multiple sector size feature.
+/ Jun 21,'09 R0.07c Fixed f_unlink() can return FR_OK on error.
+/                   Fixed wrong cache control in f_lseek().
+/                   Added relative path feature.
+/                   Added f_chdir() and f_chdrive().
+/                   Added proper case conversion to extended char.
+/ Nov 03,'09 R0.07e Separated out configuration options from ff.h to ffconf.h.
+/                   Fixed f_unlink() fails to remove a sub-dir on _FS_RPATH.
+/                   Fixed name matching error on the 13 char boundary.
+/                   Added a configuration option, _LFN_UNICODE.
+/                   Changed f_readdir() to return the SFN with always upper case on non-LFN cfg.
+/
+/ May 15,'10 R0.08  Added a memory configuration option. (_USE_LFN = 3)
+/                   Added file lock feature. (_FS_SHARE)
+/                   Added fast seek feature. (_USE_FASTSEEK)
+/                   Changed some types on the API, XCHAR->TCHAR.
+/                   Changed fname member in the FILINFO structure on Unicode cfg.
+/                   String functions support UTF-8 encoding files on Unicode cfg.
+/ Aug 16,'10 R0.08a Added f_getcwd(). (_FS_RPATH = 2)
+/                   Added sector erase feature. (_USE_ERASE)
+/                   Moved file lock semaphore table from fs object to the bss.
+/                   Fixed a wrong directory entry is created on non-LFN cfg when the given name contains ';'.
+/                   Fixed f_mkfs() creates wrong FAT32 volume.
+/ Jan 15,'11 R0.08b Fast seek feature is also applied to f_read() and f_write().
+/                   f_lseek() reports required table size on creating CLMP.
+/                   Extended format syntax of f_printf function.
+/                   Ignores duplicated directory separators in given path name.
+/
+/ Sep 06,'11 R0.09  f_mkfs() supports multiple partition to finish the multiple partition feature.
+/                   Added f_fdisk(). (_MULTI_PARTITION = 2)
+/ Aug 27,'12 R0.09a Fixed assertion failure due to OS/2 EA on FAT12/16 volume.
+/                   Changed f_open() and f_opendir reject null object pointer to avoid crash.
+/                   Changed option name _FS_SHARE to _FS_LOCK.
+/---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#include "ff.h"			/* FatFs configurations and declarations */
+#include "diskio.h"		/* Declarations of low level disk I/O functions */
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+   Module Private Definitions
+
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#if _FATFS != 4004	/* Revision ID */
+#error Wrong include file (ff.h).
+#endif
+
+
+/* Definitions on sector size */
+#if _MAX_SS != 512 && _MAX_SS != 1024 && _MAX_SS != 2048 && _MAX_SS != 4096
+#error Wrong sector size.
+#endif
+#if _MAX_SS != 512
+#define	SS(fs)	((fs)->ssize)	/* Variable sector size */
+#else
+#define	SS(fs)	512U			/* Fixed sector size */
+#endif
+
+
+/* Reentrancy related */
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+#if _USE_LFN == 1
+#error Static LFN work area must not be used in re-entrant configuration.
+#endif
+#define	ENTER_FF(fs)		{ if (!lock_fs(fs)) return FR_TIMEOUT; }
+#define	LEAVE_FF(fs, res)	{ unlock_fs(fs, res); return res; }
+#else
+#define	ENTER_FF(fs)
+#define LEAVE_FF(fs, res)	return res
+#endif
+
+#define	ABORT(fs, res)		{ fp->flag |= FA__ERROR; LEAVE_FF(fs, res); }
+
+
+/* File access control feature */
+#if _FS_LOCK
+#if _FS_READONLY
+#error _FS_LOCK must be 0 on read-only cfg.
+#endif
+typedef struct {
+	FATFS *fs;				/* File ID 1, volume (NULL:blank entry) */
+	DWORD clu;				/* File ID 2, directory */
+	WORD idx;				/* File ID 3, directory index */
+	WORD ctr;				/* File open counter, 0:none, 0x01..0xFF:read open count, 0x100:write mode */
+} FILESEM;
+#endif
+
+
+
+/* DBCS code ranges and SBCS extend char conversion table */
+
+#if _CODE_PAGE == 932	/* Japanese Shift-JIS */
+#define _DF1S	0x81	/* DBC 1st byte range 1 start */
+#define _DF1E	0x9F	/* DBC 1st byte range 1 end */
+#define _DF2S	0xE0	/* DBC 1st byte range 2 start */
+#define _DF2E	0xFC	/* DBC 1st byte range 2 end */
+#define _DS1S	0x40	/* DBC 2nd byte range 1 start */
+#define _DS1E	0x7E	/* DBC 2nd byte range 1 end */
+#define _DS2S	0x80	/* DBC 2nd byte range 2 start */
+#define _DS2E	0xFC	/* DBC 2nd byte range 2 end */
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 936	/* Simplified Chinese GBK */
+#define _DF1S	0x81
+#define _DF1E	0xFE
+#define _DS1S	0x40
+#define _DS1E	0x7E
+#define _DS2S	0x80
+#define _DS2E	0xFE
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 949	/* Korean */
+#define _DF1S	0x81
+#define _DF1E	0xFE
+#define _DS1S	0x41
+#define _DS1E	0x5A
+#define _DS2S	0x61
+#define _DS2E	0x7A
+#define _DS3S	0x81
+#define _DS3E	0xFE
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 950	/* Traditional Chinese Big5 */
+#define _DF1S	0x81
+#define _DF1E	0xFE
+#define _DS1S	0x40
+#define _DS1E	0x7E
+#define _DS2S	0xA1
+#define _DS2E	0xFE
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 437	/* U.S. (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0x41,0x8E,0x41,0x8F,0x80,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x49,0x49,0x49,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x4F,0x99,0x4F,0x55,0x55,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0x41,0x49,0x4F,0x55,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 720	/* Arabic (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x45,0x41,0x84,0x41,0x86,0x43,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x49,0x49,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x49,0x49,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 737	/* Greek (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87, \
+				0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0xAA,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0x97,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xE4,0xED,0xEE,0xE7,0xE8,0xF1,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 775	/* Baltic (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x91,0xA0,0x8E,0x95,0x8F,0x80,0xAD,0xED,0x8A,0x8A,0xA1,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xE0,0xA3,0xA3,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xBD,0xBE,0xC6,0xC7,0xA5,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE3,0xE8,0xE8,0xEA,0xEA,0xEE,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 850	/* Multilingual Latin 1 (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0xDE,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE7,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 852	/* Latin 2 (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xDE,0x8F,0x80,0x9D,0xD3,0x8A,0x8A,0xD7,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x91,0xE2,0x99,0x95,0x95,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9B,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA4,0xA4,0xA6,0xA6,0xA8,0xA8,0xAA,0x8D,0xAC,0xB8,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBD,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC6,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD2,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xB7,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE3,0xD5,0xE6,0xE6,0xE8,0xE9,0xE8,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xDD,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xEB,0xFC,0xFC,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 855	/* Cyrillic (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x81,0x81,0x83,0x83,0x85,0x85,0x87,0x87,0x89,0x89,0x8B,0x8B,0x8D,0x8D,0x8F,0x8F,0x91,0x91,0x93,0x93,0x95,0x95,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x99,0x9B,0x9B,0x9D,0x9D,0x9F,0x9F, \
+				0xA1,0xA1,0xA3,0xA3,0xA5,0xA5,0xA7,0xA7,0xA9,0xA9,0xAB,0xAB,0xAD,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB6,0xB6,0xB8,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBE,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD3,0xD3,0xD5,0xD5,0xD7,0xD7,0xDD,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xE0,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE2,0xE2,0xE4,0xE4,0xE6,0xE6,0xE8,0xE8,0xEA,0xEA,0xEC,0xEC,0xEE,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF2,0xF2,0xF4,0xF4,0xF6,0xF6,0xF8,0xF8,0xFA,0xFA,0xFC,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 857	/* Turkish (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0x98,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9E, \
+				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA6,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xDE,0x59,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 858	/* Multilingual Latin 1 + Euro (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0xDE,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE7,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 862	/* Hebrew (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0x41,0x49,0x4F,0x55,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 866	/* Russian (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x9d,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F,0xF0,0xF0,0xF2,0xF2,0xF4,0xF4,0xF6,0xF6,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 874	/* Thai (OEM, Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1250 /* Central Europe (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xA3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xA5,0xAA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBC,0xAF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1251 /* Cyrillic (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x82,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x80,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F, \
+				0xA0,0xA2,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB2,0xA5,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xA8,0xB9,0xAA,0xBB,0xA3,0xBD,0xBD,0xAF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1252 /* Latin 1 (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0xAd,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0xAE,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0x9F}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1253 /* Greek (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xA2,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA, \
+				0xE0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xF2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xFB,0xBC,0xFD,0xBF,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1254 /* Turkish (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0x9F}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1255 /* Hebrew (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1256 /* Arabic (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0x41,0xE1,0x41,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0x43,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x45,0xEC,0xED,0x49,0x49,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0x4F,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0x55,0xFA,0x55,0x55,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1257 /* Baltic (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xA8,0xB9,0xAA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xAF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1258 /* Vietnam (OEM, Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0xAC,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xEC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xF2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xFE,0x9F}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1	/* ASCII (for only non-LFN cfg) */
+#if _USE_LFN
+#error Cannot use LFN feature without valid code page.
+#endif
+#define _DF1S	0
+
+#else
+#error Unknown code page
+
+#endif
+
+
+/* Character code support macros */
+#define IsUpper(c)	(((c)>='A')&&((c)<='Z'))
+#define IsLower(c)	(((c)>='a')&&((c)<='z'))
+#define IsDigit(c)	(((c)>='0')&&((c)<='9'))
+
+#if _DF1S		/* Code page is DBCS */
+
+#ifdef _DF2S	/* Two 1st byte areas */
+#define IsDBCS1(c)	(((BYTE)(c) >= _DF1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DF2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF2E))
+#else			/* One 1st byte area */
+#define IsDBCS1(c)	((BYTE)(c) >= _DF1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF1E)
+#endif
+
+#ifdef _DS3S	/* Three 2nd byte areas */
+#define IsDBCS2(c)	(((BYTE)(c) >= _DS1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS2E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS3S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS3E))
+#else			/* Two 2nd byte areas */
+#define IsDBCS2(c)	(((BYTE)(c) >= _DS1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS2E))
+#endif
+
+#else			/* Code page is SBCS */
+
+#define IsDBCS1(c)	0
+#define IsDBCS2(c)	0
+
+#endif /* _DF1S */
+
+
+/* Name status flags */
+#define NS			11		/* Index of name status byte in fn[] */
+#define NS_LOSS		0x01	/* Out of 8.3 format */
+#define NS_LFN		0x02	/* Force to create LFN entry */
+#define NS_LAST		0x04	/* Last segment */
+#define NS_BODY		0x08	/* Lower case flag (body) */
+#define NS_EXT		0x10	/* Lower case flag (ext) */
+#define NS_DOT		0x20	/* Dot entry */
+
+
+/* FAT sub-type boundaries */
+/* Note that the FAT spec by Microsoft says 4085 but Windows works with 4087! */
+#define MIN_FAT16	4086	/* Minimum number of clusters for FAT16 */
+#define	MIN_FAT32	65526	/* Minimum number of clusters for FAT32 */
+
+
+/* FatFs refers the members in the FAT structures as byte array instead of
+/ structure member because the structure is not binary compatible between
+/ different platforms */
+
+#define BS_jmpBoot			0	/* Jump instruction (3) */
+#define BS_OEMName			3	/* OEM name (8) */
+#define BPB_BytsPerSec		11	/* Sector size [byte] (2) */
+#define BPB_SecPerClus		13	/* Cluster size [sector] (1) */
+#define BPB_RsvdSecCnt		14	/* Size of reserved area [sector] (2) */
+#define BPB_NumFATs			16	/* Number of FAT copies (1) */
+#define BPB_RootEntCnt		17	/* Number of root dir entries for FAT12/16 (2) */
+#define BPB_TotSec16		19	/* Volume size [sector] (2) */
+#define BPB_Media			21	/* Media descriptor (1) */
+#define BPB_FATSz16			22	/* FAT size [sector] (2) */
+#define BPB_SecPerTrk		24	/* Track size [sector] (2) */
+#define BPB_NumHeads		26	/* Number of heads (2) */
+#define BPB_HiddSec			28	/* Number of special hidden sectors (4) */
+#define BPB_TotSec32		32	/* Volume size [sector] (4) */
+#define BS_DrvNum			36	/* Physical drive number (2) */
+#define BS_BootSig			38	/* Extended boot signature (1) */
+#define BS_VolID			39	/* Volume serial number (4) */
+#define BS_VolLab			43	/* Volume label (8) */
+#define BS_FilSysType		54	/* File system type (1) */
+#define BPB_FATSz32			36	/* FAT size [sector] (4) */
+#define BPB_ExtFlags		40	/* Extended flags (2) */
+#define BPB_FSVer			42	/* File system version (2) */
+#define BPB_RootClus		44	/* Root dir first cluster (4) */
+#define BPB_FSInfo			48	/* Offset of FSInfo sector (2) */
+#define BPB_BkBootSec		50	/* Offset of backup boot sector (2) */
+#define BS_DrvNum32			64	/* Physical drive number (2) */
+#define BS_BootSig32		66	/* Extended boot signature (1) */
+#define BS_VolID32			67	/* Volume serial number (4) */
+#define BS_VolLab32			71	/* Volume label (8) */
+#define BS_FilSysType32		82	/* File system type (1) */
+#define	FSI_LeadSig			0	/* FSI: Leading signature (4) */
+#define	FSI_StrucSig		484	/* FSI: Structure signature (4) */
+#define	FSI_Free_Count		488	/* FSI: Number of free clusters (4) */
+#define	FSI_Nxt_Free		492	/* FSI: Last allocated cluster (4) */
+#define MBR_Table			446	/* MBR: Partition table offset (2) */
+#define	SZ_PTE				16	/* MBR: Size of a partition table entry */
+#define BS_55AA				510	/* Boot sector signature (2) */
+
+#define	DIR_Name			0	/* Short file name (11) */
+#define	DIR_Attr			11	/* Attribute (1) */
+#define	DIR_NTres			12	/* NT flag (1) */
+#define DIR_CrtTimeTenth	13	/* Created time sub-second (1) */
+#define	DIR_CrtTime			14	/* Created time (2) */
+#define	DIR_CrtDate			16	/* Created date (2) */
+#define DIR_LstAccDate		18	/* Last accessed date (2) */
+#define	DIR_FstClusHI		20	/* Higher 16-bit of first cluster (2) */
+#define	DIR_WrtTime			22	/* Modified time (2) */
+#define	DIR_WrtDate			24	/* Modified date (2) */
+#define	DIR_FstClusLO		26	/* Lower 16-bit of first cluster (2) */
+#define	DIR_FileSize		28	/* File size (4) */
+#define	LDIR_Ord			0	/* LFN entry order and LLE flag (1) */
+#define	LDIR_Attr			11	/* LFN attribute (1) */
+#define	LDIR_Type			12	/* LFN type (1) */
+#define	LDIR_Chksum			13	/* Sum of corresponding SFN entry */
+#define	LDIR_FstClusLO		26	/* Filled by zero (0) */
+#define	SZ_DIR				32		/* Size of a directory entry */
+#define	LLE					0x40	/* Last long entry flag in LDIR_Ord */
+#define	DDE					0xE5	/* Deleted directory entry mark in DIR_Name[0] */
+#define	NDDE				0x05	/* Replacement of the character collides with DDE */
+
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Module private work area                                   */
+/*------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Note that uninitialized variables with static duration are
+/  zeroed/nulled at start-up. If not, the compiler or start-up
+/  routine is out of ANSI-C standard.
+*/
+
+#if _VOLUMES
+static
+FATFS *FatFs[_VOLUMES];	/* Pointer to the file system objects (logical drives) */
+#else
+#error Number of volumes must not be 0.
+#endif
+
+static
+WORD Fsid;				/* File system mount ID */
+
+#if _FS_RPATH
+static
+BYTE CurrVol;			/* Current drive */
+#endif
+
+#if _FS_LOCK
+static
+FILESEM	Files[_FS_LOCK];	/* File lock semaphores */
+#endif
+
+#if _USE_LFN == 0			/* No LFN feature */
+#define	DEF_NAMEBUF			BYTE sfn[12]
+#define INIT_BUF(dobj)		(dobj).fn = sfn
+#define	FREE_BUF()
+
+#elif _USE_LFN == 1			/* LFN feature with static working buffer */
+static WCHAR LfnBuf[_MAX_LFN+1];
+#define	DEF_NAMEBUF			BYTE sfn[12]
+#define INIT_BUF(dobj)		{ (dobj).fn = sfn; (dobj).lfn = LfnBuf; }
+#define	FREE_BUF()
+
+#elif _USE_LFN == 2 		/* LFN feature with dynamic working buffer on the stack */
+#define	DEF_NAMEBUF			BYTE sfn[12]; WCHAR lbuf[_MAX_LFN+1]
+#define INIT_BUF(dobj)		{ (dobj).fn = sfn; (dobj).lfn = lbuf; }
+#define	FREE_BUF()
+
+#elif _USE_LFN == 3 		/* LFN feature with dynamic working buffer on the heap */
+#define	DEF_NAMEBUF			BYTE sfn[12]; WCHAR *lfn
+#define INIT_BUF(dobj)		{ lfn = ff_memalloc((_MAX_LFN + 1) * 2); \
+							  if (!lfn) LEAVE_FF((dobj).fs, FR_NOT_ENOUGH_CORE); \
+							  (dobj).lfn = lfn;	(dobj).fn = sfn; }
+#define	FREE_BUF()			ff_memfree(lfn)
+
+#else
+#error Wrong LFN configuration.
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+   Module Private Functions
+
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* String functions                                                      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/* Copy memory to memory */
+static
+void mem_cpy (void* dst, const void* src, UINT cnt) {
+	BYTE *d = (BYTE*)dst;
+	const BYTE *s = (const BYTE*)src;
+
+#if _WORD_ACCESS == 1
+	while (cnt >= sizeof (int)) {
+		*(int*)d = *(int*)s;
+		d += sizeof (int); s += sizeof (int);
+		cnt -= sizeof (int);
+	}
+#endif
+	while (cnt--)
+		*d++ = *s++;
+}
+
+/* Fill memory */
+static
+void mem_set (void* dst, int val, UINT cnt) {
+	BYTE *d = (BYTE*)dst;
+
+	while (cnt--)
+		*d++ = (BYTE)val;
+}
+
+/* Compare memory to memory */
+static
+int mem_cmp (const void* dst, const void* src, UINT cnt) {
+	const BYTE *d = (const BYTE *)dst, *s = (const BYTE *)src;
+	int r = 0;
+
+	while (cnt-- && (r = *d++ - *s++) == 0) ;
+	return r;
+}
+
+/* Check if chr is contained in the string */
+static
+int chk_chr (const char* str, int chr) {
+	while (*str && *str != chr) str++;
+	return *str;
+}
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Request/Release grant to access the volume                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+
+static
+int lock_fs (
+	FATFS *fs		/* File system object */
+)
+{
+	return ff_req_grant(fs->sobj);
+}
+
+
+static
+void unlock_fs (
+	FATFS *fs,		/* File system object */
+	FRESULT res		/* Result code to be returned */
+)
+{
+	if (fs &&
+		res != FR_NOT_ENABLED &&
+		res != FR_INVALID_DRIVE &&
+		res != FR_INVALID_OBJECT &&
+		res != FR_TIMEOUT) {
+		ff_rel_grant(fs->sobj);
+	}
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* File lock control functions                                           */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _FS_LOCK
+
+static
+FRESULT chk_lock (	/* Check if the file can be accessed */
+	DIR* dj,		/* Directory object pointing the file to be checked */
+	int acc			/* Desired access (0:Read, 1:Write, 2:Delete/Rename) */
+)
+{
+	UINT i, be;
+
+	/* Search file semaphore table */
+	for (i = be = 0; i < _FS_LOCK; i++) {
+		if (Files[i].fs) {	/* Existing entry */
+			if (Files[i].fs == dj->fs &&	 	/* Check if the file matched with an open file */
+				Files[i].clu == dj->sclust &&
+				Files[i].idx == dj->index) break;
+		} else {			/* Blank entry */
+			be++;
+		}
+	}
+	if (i == _FS_LOCK)	/* The file is not opened */
+		return (be || acc == 2) ? FR_OK : FR_TOO_MANY_OPEN_FILES;	/* Is there a blank entry for new file? */
+
+	/* The file has been opened. Reject any open against writing file and all write mode open */
+	return (acc || Files[i].ctr == 0x100) ? FR_LOCKED : FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+static
+int enq_lock (void)	/* Check if an entry is available for a new file */
+{
+	UINT i;
+
+	for (i = 0; i < _FS_LOCK && Files[i].fs; i++) ;
+	return (i == _FS_LOCK) ? 0 : 1;
+}
+
+
+static
+UINT inc_lock (	/* Increment file open counter and returns its index (0:int error) */
+	DIR* dj,	/* Directory object pointing the file to register or increment */
+	int acc		/* Desired access mode (0:Read, !0:Write) */
+)
+{
+	UINT i;
+
+
+	for (i = 0; i < _FS_LOCK; i++) {	/* Find the file */
+		if (Files[i].fs == dj->fs &&
+			Files[i].clu == dj->sclust &&
+			Files[i].idx == dj->index) break;
+	}
+
+	if (i == _FS_LOCK) {				/* Not opened. Register it as new. */
+		for (i = 0; i < _FS_LOCK && Files[i].fs; i++) ;
+		if (i == _FS_LOCK) return 0;	/* No space to register (int err) */
+		Files[i].fs = dj->fs;
+		Files[i].clu = dj->sclust;
+		Files[i].idx = dj->index;
+		Files[i].ctr = 0;
+	}
+
+	if (acc && Files[i].ctr) return 0;	/* Access violation (int err) */
+
+	Files[i].ctr = acc ? 0x100 : Files[i].ctr + 1;	/* Set semaphore value */
+
+	return i + 1;
+}
+
+
+static
+FRESULT dec_lock (	/* Decrement file open counter */
+	UINT i			/* Semaphore index */
+)
+{
+	WORD n;
+	FRESULT res;
+
+
+	if (--i < _FS_LOCK) {
+		n = Files[i].ctr;
+		if (n == 0x100) n = 0;
+		if (n) n--;
+		Files[i].ctr = n;
+		if (!n) Files[i].fs = 0;
+		res = FR_OK;
+	} else {
+		res = FR_INT_ERR;
+	}
+	return res;
+}
+
+
+static
+void clear_lock (	/* Clear lock entries of the volume */
+	FATFS *fs
+)
+{
+	UINT i;
+
+	for (i = 0; i < _FS_LOCK; i++) {
+		if (Files[i].fs == fs) Files[i].fs = 0;
+	}
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Change window offset                                                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT move_window (
+	FATFS *fs,		/* File system object */
+	DWORD sector	/* Sector number to make appearance in the fs->win[] */
+)					/* Move to zero only writes back dirty window */
+{
+	DWORD wsect;
+
+
+	wsect = fs->winsect;
+	if (wsect != sector) {	/* Changed current window */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+		if (fs->wflag) {	/* Write back dirty window if needed */
+			if (disk_write(fs->drv, fs->win, wsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+				return FR_DISK_ERR;
+			fs->wflag = 0;
+			if (wsect < (fs->fatbase + fs->fsize)) {	/* In FAT area */
+				BYTE nf;
+				for (nf = fs->n_fats; nf > 1; nf--) {	/* Reflect the change to all FAT copies */
+					wsect += fs->fsize;
+					disk_write(fs->drv, fs->win, wsect, 1);
+				}
+			}
+		}
+#endif
+		if (sector) {
+			if (disk_read(fs->drv, fs->win, sector, 1) != RES_OK)
+				return FR_DISK_ERR;
+			fs->winsect = sector;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Clean-up cached data                                                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+FRESULT sync (	/* FR_OK: successful, FR_DISK_ERR: failed */
+	FATFS *fs	/* File system object */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+
+
+	res = move_window(fs, 0);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		/* Update FSInfo sector if needed */
+		if (fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && fs->fsi_flag) {
+			fs->winsect = 0;
+			/* Create FSInfo structure */
+			mem_set(fs->win, 0, 512);
+			ST_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);
+			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_LeadSig, 0x41615252);
+			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_StrucSig, 0x61417272);
+			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Free_Count, fs->free_clust);
+			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Nxt_Free, fs->last_clust);
+			/* Write it into the FSInfo sector */
+			disk_write(fs->drv, fs->win, fs->fsi_sector, 1);
+			fs->fsi_flag = 0;
+		}
+		/* Make sure that no pending write process in the physical drive */
+		if (disk_ioctl(fs->drv, CTRL_SYNC, 0) != RES_OK)
+			res = FR_DISK_ERR;
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get sector# from cluster#                                             */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+DWORD clust2sect (	/* !=0: Sector number, 0: Failed - invalid cluster# */
+	FATFS *fs,		/* File system object */
+	DWORD clst		/* Cluster# to be converted */
+)
+{
+	clst -= 2;
+	if (clst >= (fs->n_fatent - 2)) return 0;		/* Invalid cluster# */
+	return clst * fs->csize + fs->database;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FAT access - Read value of a FAT entry                                */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+DWORD get_fat (	/* 0xFFFFFFFF:Disk error, 1:Internal error, Else:Cluster status */
+	FATFS *fs,	/* File system object */
+	DWORD clst	/* Cluster# to get the link information */
+)
+{
+	UINT wc, bc;
+	BYTE *p;
+
+
+	if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->n_fatent)	/* Check range */
+		return 1;
+
+	switch (fs->fs_type) {
+	case FS_FAT12 :
+		bc = (UINT)clst; bc += bc / 2;
+		if (move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (bc / SS(fs)))) break;
+		wc = fs->win[bc % SS(fs)]; bc++;
+		if (move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (bc / SS(fs)))) break;
+		wc |= fs->win[bc % SS(fs)] << 8;
+		return (clst & 1) ? (wc >> 4) : (wc & 0xFFF);
+
+	case FS_FAT16 :
+		if (move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (clst / (SS(fs) / 2)))) break;
+		p = &fs->win[clst * 2 % SS(fs)];
+		return LD_WORD(p);
+
+	case FS_FAT32 :
+		if (move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (clst / (SS(fs) / 4)))) break;
+		p = &fs->win[clst * 4 % SS(fs)];
+		return LD_DWORD(p) & 0x0FFFFFFF;
+	}
+
+	return 0xFFFFFFFF;	/* An error occurred at the disk I/O layer */
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FAT access - Change value of a FAT entry                              */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+
+FRESULT put_fat (
+	FATFS *fs,	/* File system object */
+	DWORD clst,	/* Cluster# to be changed in range of 2 to fs->n_fatent - 1 */
+	DWORD val	/* New value to mark the cluster */
+)
+{
+	UINT bc;
+	BYTE *p;
+	FRESULT res;
+
+
+	if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->n_fatent) {	/* Check range */
+		res = FR_INT_ERR;
+
+	} else {
+		switch (fs->fs_type) {
+		case FS_FAT12 :
+			bc = (UINT)clst; bc += bc / 2;
+			res = move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (bc / SS(fs)));
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			p = &fs->win[bc % SS(fs)];
+			*p = (clst & 1) ? ((*p & 0x0F) | ((BYTE)val << 4)) : (BYTE)val;
+			bc++;
+			fs->wflag = 1;
+			res = move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (bc / SS(fs)));
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			p = &fs->win[bc % SS(fs)];
+			*p = (clst & 1) ? (BYTE)(val >> 4) : ((*p & 0xF0) | ((BYTE)(val >> 8) & 0x0F));
+			break;
+
+		case FS_FAT16 :
+			res = move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (clst / (SS(fs) / 2)));
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			p = &fs->win[clst * 2 % SS(fs)];
+			ST_WORD(p, (WORD)val);
+			break;
+
+		case FS_FAT32 :
+			res = move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (clst / (SS(fs) / 4)));
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			p = &fs->win[clst * 4 % SS(fs)];
+			val |= LD_DWORD(p) & 0xF0000000;
+			ST_DWORD(p, val);
+			break;
+
+		default :
+			res = FR_INT_ERR;
+		}
+		fs->wflag = 1;
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FAT handling - Remove a cluster chain                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+FRESULT remove_chain (
+	FATFS *fs,			/* File system object */
+	DWORD clst			/* Cluster# to remove a chain from */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD nxt;
+#if _USE_ERASE
+	DWORD scl = clst, ecl = clst, rt[2];
+#endif
+
+	if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->n_fatent) {	/* Check range */
+		res = FR_INT_ERR;
+
+	} else {
+		res = FR_OK;
+		while (clst < fs->n_fatent) {			/* Not a last link? */
+			nxt = get_fat(fs, clst);			/* Get cluster status */
+			if (nxt == 0) break;				/* Empty cluster? */
+			if (nxt == 1) { res = FR_INT_ERR; break; }	/* Internal error? */
+			if (nxt == 0xFFFFFFFF) { res = FR_DISK_ERR; break; }	/* Disk error? */
+			res = put_fat(fs, clst, 0);			/* Mark the cluster "empty" */
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			if (fs->free_clust != 0xFFFFFFFF) {	/* Update FSInfo */
+				fs->free_clust++;
+				fs->fsi_flag = 1;
+			}
+#if _USE_ERASE
+			if (ecl + 1 == nxt) {	/* Is next cluster contiguous? */
+				ecl = nxt;
+			} else {				/* End of contiguous clusters */ 
+				rt[0] = clust2sect(fs, scl);					/* Start sector */
+				rt[1] = clust2sect(fs, ecl) + fs->csize - 1;	/* End sector */
+				disk_ioctl(fs->drv, CTRL_ERASE_SECTOR, rt);		/* Erase the block */
+				scl = ecl = nxt;
+			}
+#endif
+			clst = nxt;	/* Next cluster */
+		}
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FAT handling - Stretch or Create a cluster chain                      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+DWORD create_chain (	/* 0:No free cluster, 1:Internal error, 0xFFFFFFFF:Disk error, >=2:New cluster# */
+	FATFS *fs,			/* File system object */
+	DWORD clst			/* Cluster# to stretch. 0 means create a new chain. */
+)
+{
+	DWORD cs, ncl, scl;
+	FRESULT res;
+
+
+	if (clst == 0) {		/* Create a new chain */
+		scl = fs->last_clust;			/* Get suggested start point */
+		if (!scl || scl >= fs->n_fatent) scl = 1;
+	}
+	else {					/* Stretch the current chain */
+		cs = get_fat(fs, clst);			/* Check the cluster status */
+		if (cs < 2) return 1;			/* It is an invalid cluster */
+		if (cs < fs->n_fatent) return cs;	/* It is already followed by next cluster */
+		scl = clst;
+	}
+
+	ncl = scl;				/* Start cluster */
+	for (;;) {
+		ncl++;							/* Next cluster */
+		if (ncl >= fs->n_fatent) {		/* Wrap around */
+			ncl = 2;
+			if (ncl > scl) return 0;	/* No free cluster */
+		}
+		cs = get_fat(fs, ncl);			/* Get the cluster status */
+		if (cs == 0) break;				/* Found a free cluster */
+		if (cs == 0xFFFFFFFF || cs == 1)/* An error occurred */
+			return cs;
+		if (ncl == scl) return 0;		/* No free cluster */
+	}
+
+	res = put_fat(fs, ncl, 0x0FFFFFFF);	/* Mark the new cluster "last link" */
+	if (res == FR_OK && clst != 0) {
+		res = put_fat(fs, clst, ncl);	/* Link it to the previous one if needed */
+	}
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		fs->last_clust = ncl;			/* Update FSINFO */
+		if (fs->free_clust != 0xFFFFFFFF) {
+			fs->free_clust--;
+			fs->fsi_flag = 1;
+		}
+	} else {
+		ncl = (res == FR_DISK_ERR) ? 0xFFFFFFFF : 1;
+	}
+
+	return ncl;		/* Return new cluster number or error code */
+}
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FAT handling - Convert offset into cluster with link map table        */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#if _USE_FASTSEEK
+static
+DWORD clmt_clust (	/* <2:Error, >=2:Cluster number */
+	FIL* fp,		/* Pointer to the file object */
+	DWORD ofs		/* File offset to be converted to cluster# */
+)
+{
+	DWORD cl, ncl, *tbl;
+
+
+	tbl = fp->cltbl + 1;	/* Top of CLMT */
+	cl = ofs / SS(fp->fs) / fp->fs->csize;	/* Cluster order from top of the file */
+	for (;;) {
+		ncl = *tbl++;			/* Number of cluters in the fragment */
+		if (!ncl) return 0;		/* End of table? (error) */
+		if (cl < ncl) break;	/* In this fragment? */
+		cl -= ncl; tbl++;		/* Next fragment */
+	}
+	return cl + *tbl;	/* Return the cluster number */
+}
+#endif	/* _USE_FASTSEEK */
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Directory handling - Set directory index                              */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT dir_sdi (
+	DIR *dj,		/* Pointer to directory object */
+	WORD idx		/* Index of directory table */
+)
+{
+	DWORD clst;
+	WORD ic;
+
+
+	dj->index = idx;
+	clst = dj->sclust;
+	if (clst == 1 || clst >= dj->fs->n_fatent)	/* Check start cluster range */
+		return FR_INT_ERR;
+	if (!clst && dj->fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32)	/* Replace cluster# 0 with root cluster# if in FAT32 */
+		clst = dj->fs->dirbase;
+
+	if (clst == 0) {	/* Static table (root-dir in FAT12/16) */
+		dj->clust = clst;
+		if (idx >= dj->fs->n_rootdir)		/* Index is out of range */
+			return FR_INT_ERR;
+		dj->sect = dj->fs->dirbase + idx / (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR);	/* Sector# */
+	}
+	else {				/* Dynamic table (sub-dirs or root-dir in FAT32) */
+		ic = SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR * dj->fs->csize;	/* Entries per cluster */
+		while (idx >= ic) {	/* Follow cluster chain */
+			clst = get_fat(dj->fs, clst);				/* Get next cluster */
+			if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR;	/* Disk error */
+			if (clst < 2 || clst >= dj->fs->n_fatent)	/* Reached to end of table or int error */
+				return FR_INT_ERR;
+			idx -= ic;
+		}
+		dj->clust = clst;
+		dj->sect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst) + idx / (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR);	/* Sector# */
+	}
+
+	dj->dir = dj->fs->win + (idx % (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR)) * SZ_DIR;	/* Ptr to the entry in the sector */
+
+	return FR_OK;	/* Seek succeeded */
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Directory handling - Move directory table index next                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT dir_next (	/* FR_OK:Succeeded, FR_NO_FILE:End of table, FR_DENIED:EOT and could not stretch */
+	DIR *dj,		/* Pointer to directory object */
+	int stretch		/* 0: Do not stretch table, 1: Stretch table if needed */
+)
+{
+	DWORD clst;
+	WORD i;
+
+
+	stretch = stretch;		/* To suppress warning on read-only cfg. */
+	i = dj->index + 1;
+	if (!i || !dj->sect)	/* Report EOT when index has reached 65535 */
+		return FR_NO_FILE;
+
+	if (!(i % (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR))) {	/* Sector changed? */
+		dj->sect++;					/* Next sector */
+
+		if (dj->clust == 0) {	/* Static table */
+			if (i >= dj->fs->n_rootdir)	/* Report EOT when end of table */
+				return FR_NO_FILE;
+		}
+		else {					/* Dynamic table */
+			if (((i / (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR)) & (dj->fs->csize - 1)) == 0) {	/* Cluster changed? */
+				clst = get_fat(dj->fs, dj->clust);				/* Get next cluster */
+				if (clst <= 1) return FR_INT_ERR;
+				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+				if (clst >= dj->fs->n_fatent) {					/* When it reached end of dynamic table */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+					BYTE c;
+					if (!stretch) return FR_NO_FILE;			/* When do not stretch, report EOT */
+					clst = create_chain(dj->fs, dj->clust);		/* Stretch cluster chain */
+					if (clst == 0) return FR_DENIED;			/* No free cluster */
+					if (clst == 1) return FR_INT_ERR;
+					if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+					/* Clean-up stretched table */
+					if (move_window(dj->fs, 0)) return FR_DISK_ERR;	/* Flush active window */
+					mem_set(dj->fs->win, 0, SS(dj->fs));			/* Clear window buffer */
+					dj->fs->winsect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst);	/* Cluster start sector */
+					for (c = 0; c < dj->fs->csize; c++) {		/* Fill the new cluster with 0 */
+						dj->fs->wflag = 1;
+						if (move_window(dj->fs, 0)) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+						dj->fs->winsect++;
+					}
+					dj->fs->winsect -= c;						/* Rewind window address */
+#else
+					return FR_NO_FILE;			/* Report EOT */
+#endif
+				}
+				dj->clust = clst;				/* Initialize data for new cluster */
+				dj->sect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	dj->index = i;
+	dj->dir = dj->fs->win + (i % (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR)) * SZ_DIR;
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Directory handling - Load/Store start cluster number                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+DWORD ld_clust (
+	FATFS *fs,	/* Pointer to the fs object */
+	BYTE *dir	/* Pointer to the directory entry */
+)
+{
+	DWORD cl;
+
+	cl = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
+	if (fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32)
+		cl |= (DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16;
+
+	return cl;
+}
+
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+void st_clust (
+	BYTE *dir,	/* Pointer to the directory entry */
+	DWORD cl	/* Value to be set */
+)
+{
+	ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO, cl);
+	ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI, cl >> 16);
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* LFN handling - Test/Pick/Fit an LFN segment from/to directory entry   */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _USE_LFN
+static
+const BYTE LfnOfs[] = {1,3,5,7,9,14,16,18,20,22,24,28,30};	/* Offset of LFN chars in the directory entry */
+
+
+static
+int cmp_lfn (			/* 1:Matched, 0:Not matched */
+	WCHAR *lfnbuf,		/* Pointer to the LFN to be compared */
+	BYTE *dir			/* Pointer to the directory entry containing a part of LFN */
+)
+{
+	UINT i, s;
+	WCHAR wc, uc;
+
+
+	i = ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & ~LLE) - 1) * 13;	/* Get offset in the LFN buffer */
+	s = 0; wc = 1;
+	do {
+		uc = LD_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s]);	/* Pick an LFN character from the entry */
+		if (wc) {	/* Last char has not been processed */
+			wc = ff_wtoupper(uc);		/* Convert it to upper case */
+			if (i >= _MAX_LFN || wc != ff_wtoupper(lfnbuf[i++]))	/* Compare it */
+				return 0;				/* Not matched */
+		} else {
+			if (uc != 0xFFFF) return 0;	/* Check filler */
+		}
+	} while (++s < 13);				/* Repeat until all chars in the entry are checked */
+
+	if ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & LLE) && wc && lfnbuf[i])	/* Last segment matched but different length */
+		return 0;
+
+	return 1;						/* The part of LFN matched */
+}
+
+
+
+static
+int pick_lfn (			/* 1:Succeeded, 0:Buffer overflow */
+	WCHAR *lfnbuf,		/* Pointer to the Unicode-LFN buffer */
+	BYTE *dir			/* Pointer to the directory entry */
+)
+{
+	UINT i, s;
+	WCHAR wc, uc;
+
+
+	i = ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & 0x3F) - 1) * 13;	/* Offset in the LFN buffer */
+
+	s = 0; wc = 1;
+	do {
+		uc = LD_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s]);		/* Pick an LFN character from the entry */
+		if (wc) {	/* Last char has not been processed */
+			if (i >= _MAX_LFN) return 0;	/* Buffer overflow? */
+			lfnbuf[i++] = wc = uc;			/* Store it */
+		} else {
+			if (uc != 0xFFFF) return 0;		/* Check filler */
+		}
+	} while (++s < 13);						/* Read all character in the entry */
+
+	if (dir[LDIR_Ord] & LLE) {				/* Put terminator if it is the last LFN part */
+		if (i >= _MAX_LFN) return 0;		/* Buffer overflow? */
+		lfnbuf[i] = 0;
+	}
+
+	return 1;
+}
+
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+void fit_lfn (
+	const WCHAR *lfnbuf,	/* Pointer to the LFN buffer */
+	BYTE *dir,				/* Pointer to the directory entry */
+	BYTE ord,				/* LFN order (1-20) */
+	BYTE sum				/* SFN sum */
+)
+{
+	UINT i, s;
+	WCHAR wc;
+
+
+	dir[LDIR_Chksum] = sum;			/* Set check sum */
+	dir[LDIR_Attr] = AM_LFN;		/* Set attribute. LFN entry */
+	dir[LDIR_Type] = 0;
+	ST_WORD(dir+LDIR_FstClusLO, 0);
+
+	i = (ord - 1) * 13;				/* Get offset in the LFN buffer */
+	s = wc = 0;
+	do {
+		if (wc != 0xFFFF) wc = lfnbuf[i++];	/* Get an effective char */
+		ST_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s], wc);	/* Put it */
+		if (!wc) wc = 0xFFFF;		/* Padding chars following last char */
+	} while (++s < 13);
+	if (wc == 0xFFFF || !lfnbuf[i]) ord |= LLE;	/* Bottom LFN part is the start of LFN sequence */
+	dir[LDIR_Ord] = ord;			/* Set the LFN order */
+}
+
+#endif
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Create numbered name                                                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _USE_LFN
+void gen_numname (
+	BYTE *dst,			/* Pointer to generated SFN */
+	const BYTE *src,	/* Pointer to source SFN to be modified */
+	const WCHAR *lfn,	/* Pointer to LFN */
+	WORD seq			/* Sequence number */
+)
+{
+	BYTE ns[8], c;
+	UINT i, j;
+
+
+	mem_cpy(dst, src, 11);
+
+	if (seq > 5) {	/* On many collisions, generate a hash number instead of sequential number */
+		do seq = (seq >> 1) + (seq << 15) + (WORD)*lfn++; while (*lfn);
+	}
+
+	/* itoa (hexdecimal) */
+	i = 7;
+	do {
+		c = (seq % 16) + '0';
+		if (c > '9') c += 7;
+		ns[i--] = c;
+		seq /= 16;
+	} while (seq);
+	ns[i] = '~';
+
+	/* Append the number */
+	for (j = 0; j < i && dst[j] != ' '; j++) {
+		if (IsDBCS1(dst[j])) {
+			if (j == i - 1) break;
+			j++;
+		}
+	}
+	do {
+		dst[j++] = (i < 8) ? ns[i++] : ' ';
+	} while (j < 8);
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Calculate sum of an SFN                                               */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _USE_LFN
+static
+BYTE sum_sfn (
+	const BYTE *dir		/* Ptr to directory entry */
+)
+{
+	BYTE sum = 0;
+	UINT n = 11;
+
+	do sum = (sum >> 1) + (sum << 7) + *dir++; while (--n);
+	return sum;
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Directory handling - Find an object in the directory                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT dir_find (
+	DIR *dj			/* Pointer to the directory object linked to the file name */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	BYTE c, *dir;
+#if _USE_LFN
+	BYTE a, ord, sum;
+#endif
+
+	res = dir_sdi(dj, 0);			/* Rewind directory object */
+	if (res != FR_OK) return res;
+
+#if _USE_LFN
+	ord = sum = 0xFF;
+#endif
+	do {
+		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+		if (res != FR_OK) break;
+		dir = dj->dir;					/* Ptr to the directory entry of current index */
+		c = dir[DIR_Name];
+		if (c == 0) { res = FR_NO_FILE; break; }	/* Reached to end of table */
+#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
+		a = dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_MASK;
+		if (c == DDE || ((a & AM_VOL) && a != AM_LFN)) {	/* An entry without valid data */
+			ord = 0xFF;
+		} else {
+			if (a == AM_LFN) {			/* An LFN entry is found */
+				if (dj->lfn) {
+					if (c & LLE) {		/* Is it start of LFN sequence? */
+						sum = dir[LDIR_Chksum];
+						c &= ~LLE; ord = c;	/* LFN start order */
+						dj->lfn_idx = dj->index;
+					}
+					/* Check validity of the LFN entry and compare it with given name */
+					ord = (c == ord && sum == dir[LDIR_Chksum] && cmp_lfn(dj->lfn, dir)) ? ord - 1 : 0xFF;
+				}
+			} else {					/* An SFN entry is found */
+				if (!ord && sum == sum_sfn(dir)) break;	/* LFN matched? */
+				ord = 0xFF; dj->lfn_idx = 0xFFFF;	/* Reset LFN sequence */
+				if (!(dj->fn[NS] & NS_LOSS) && !mem_cmp(dir, dj->fn, 11)) break;	/* SFN matched? */
+			}
+		}
+#else		/* Non LFN configuration */
+		if (!(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_VOL) && !mem_cmp(dir, dj->fn, 11)) /* Is it a valid entry? */
+			break;
+#endif
+		res = dir_next(dj, 0);		/* Next entry */
+	} while (res == FR_OK);
+
+	return res;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Read an object from the directory                                     */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1
+static
+FRESULT dir_read (
+	DIR *dj			/* Pointer to the directory object that pointing the entry to be read */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	BYTE c, *dir;
+#if _USE_LFN
+	BYTE a, ord = 0xFF, sum = 0xFF;
+#endif
+
+	res = FR_NO_FILE;
+	while (dj->sect) {
+		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+		if (res != FR_OK) break;
+		dir = dj->dir;					/* Ptr to the directory entry of current index */
+		c = dir[DIR_Name];
+		if (c == 0) { res = FR_NO_FILE; break; }	/* Reached to end of table */
+#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
+		a = dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_MASK;
+		if (c == DDE || (!_FS_RPATH && c == '.') || ((a & AM_VOL) && a != AM_LFN)) {	/* An entry without valid data */
+			ord = 0xFF;
+		} else {
+			if (a == AM_LFN) {			/* An LFN entry is found */
+				if (c & LLE) {			/* Is it start of LFN sequence? */
+					sum = dir[LDIR_Chksum];
+					c &= ~LLE; ord = c;
+					dj->lfn_idx = dj->index;
+				}
+				/* Check LFN validity and capture it */
+				ord = (c == ord && sum == dir[LDIR_Chksum] && pick_lfn(dj->lfn, dir)) ? ord - 1 : 0xFF;
+			} else {					/* An SFN entry is found */
+				if (ord || sum != sum_sfn(dir))	/* Is there a valid LFN? */
+					dj->lfn_idx = 0xFFFF;		/* It has no LFN. */
+				break;
+			}
+		}
+#else		/* Non LFN configuration */
+		if (c != DDE && (_FS_RPATH || c != '.') && !(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_VOL))	/* Is it a valid entry? */
+			break;
+#endif
+		res = dir_next(dj, 0);				/* Next entry */
+		if (res != FR_OK) break;
+	}
+
+	if (res != FR_OK) dj->sect = 0;
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Register an object to the directory                                   */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+FRESULT dir_register (	/* FR_OK:Successful, FR_DENIED:No free entry or too many SFN collision, FR_DISK_ERR:Disk error */
+	DIR *dj				/* Target directory with object name to be created */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	BYTE c, *dir;
+#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
+	WORD n, ne, is;
+	BYTE sn[12], *fn, sum;
+	WCHAR *lfn;
+
+
+	fn = dj->fn; lfn = dj->lfn;
+	mem_cpy(sn, fn, 12);
+
+	if (_FS_RPATH && (sn[NS] & NS_DOT))		/* Cannot create dot entry */
+		return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+
+	if (sn[NS] & NS_LOSS) {			/* When LFN is out of 8.3 format, generate a numbered name */
+		fn[NS] = 0; dj->lfn = 0;			/* Find only SFN */
+		for (n = 1; n < 100; n++) {
+			gen_numname(fn, sn, lfn, n);	/* Generate a numbered name */
+			res = dir_find(dj);				/* Check if the name collides with existing SFN */
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+		}
+		if (n == 100) return FR_DENIED;		/* Abort if too many collisions */
+		if (res != FR_NO_FILE) return res;	/* Abort if the result is other than 'not collided' */
+		fn[NS] = sn[NS]; dj->lfn = lfn;
+	}
+
+	if (sn[NS] & NS_LFN) {			/* When LFN is to be created, reserve an SFN + LFN entries. */
+		for (ne = 0; lfn[ne]; ne++) ;
+		ne = (ne + 25) / 13;
+	} else {						/* Otherwise reserve only an SFN entry. */
+		ne = 1;
+	}
+
+	/* Reserve contiguous entries */
+	res = dir_sdi(dj, 0);
+	if (res != FR_OK) return res;
+	n = is = 0;
+	do {
+		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+		if (res != FR_OK) break;
+		c = *dj->dir;				/* Check the entry status */
+		if (c == DDE || c == 0) {	/* Is it a blank entry? */
+			if (n == 0) is = dj->index;	/* First index of the contiguous entry */
+			if (++n == ne) break;	/* A contiguous entry that required count is found */
+		} else {
+			n = 0;					/* Not a blank entry. Restart to search */
+		}
+		res = dir_next(dj, 1);		/* Next entry with table stretch */
+	} while (res == FR_OK);
+
+	if (res == FR_OK && ne > 1) {	/* Initialize LFN entry if needed */
+		res = dir_sdi(dj, is);
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			sum = sum_sfn(dj->fn);	/* Sum of the SFN tied to the LFN */
+			ne--;
+			do {					/* Store LFN entries in bottom first */
+				res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+				if (res != FR_OK) break;
+				fit_lfn(dj->lfn, dj->dir, (BYTE)ne, sum);
+				dj->fs->wflag = 1;
+				res = dir_next(dj, 0);	/* Next entry */
+			} while (res == FR_OK && --ne);
+		}
+	}
+
+#else	/* Non LFN configuration */
+	res = dir_sdi(dj, 0);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		do {	/* Find a blank entry for the SFN */
+			res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			c = *dj->dir;
+			if (c == DDE || c == 0) break;	/* Is it a blank entry? */
+			res = dir_next(dj, 1);			/* Next entry with table stretch */
+		} while (res == FR_OK);
+	}
+#endif
+
+	if (res == FR_OK) {		/* Initialize the SFN entry */
+		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			dir = dj->dir;
+			mem_set(dir, 0, SZ_DIR);	/* Clean the entry */
+			mem_cpy(dir, dj->fn, 11);	/* Put SFN */
+#if _USE_LFN
+			dir[DIR_NTres] = *(dj->fn+NS) & (NS_BODY | NS_EXT);	/* Put NT flag */
+#endif
+			dj->fs->wflag = 1;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Remove an object from the directory                                   */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY && !_FS_MINIMIZE
+static
+FRESULT dir_remove (	/* FR_OK: Successful, FR_DISK_ERR: A disk error */
+	DIR *dj				/* Directory object pointing the entry to be removed */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
+	WORD i;
+
+	i = dj->index;	/* SFN index */
+	res = dir_sdi(dj, (WORD)((dj->lfn_idx == 0xFFFF) ? i : dj->lfn_idx));	/* Goto the SFN or top of the LFN entries */
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		do {
+			res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			*dj->dir = DDE;			/* Mark the entry "deleted" */
+			dj->fs->wflag = 1;
+			if (dj->index >= i) break;	/* When reached SFN, all entries of the object has been deleted. */
+			res = dir_next(dj, 0);		/* Next entry */
+		} while (res == FR_OK);
+		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_INT_ERR;
+	}
+
+#else			/* Non LFN configuration */
+	res = dir_sdi(dj, dj->index);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			*dj->dir = DDE;			/* Mark the entry "deleted" */
+			dj->fs->wflag = 1;
+		}
+	}
+#endif
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Pick a segment and create the object name in directory form           */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT create_name (
+	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the directory object */
+	const TCHAR **path	/* Pointer to pointer to the segment in the path string */
+)
+{
+#ifdef _EXCVT
+	static const BYTE excvt[] = _EXCVT;	/* Upper conversion table for extended chars */
+#endif
+
+#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
+	BYTE b, cf;
+	WCHAR w, *lfn;
+	UINT i, ni, si, di;
+	const TCHAR *p;
+
+	/* Create LFN in Unicode */
+	for (p = *path; *p == '/' || *p == '\\'; p++) ;	/* Strip duplicated separator */
+	lfn = dj->lfn;
+	si = di = 0;
+	for (;;) {
+		w = p[si++];					/* Get a character */
+		if (w < ' ' || w == '/' || w == '\\') break;	/* Break on end of segment */
+		if (di >= _MAX_LFN)				/* Reject too long name */
+			return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+#if !_LFN_UNICODE
+		w &= 0xFF;
+		if (IsDBCS1(w)) {				/* Check if it is a DBC 1st byte (always false on SBCS cfg) */
+			b = (BYTE)p[si++];			/* Get 2nd byte */
+			if (!IsDBCS2(b))
+				return FR_INVALID_NAME;	/* Reject invalid sequence */
+			w = (w << 8) + b;			/* Create a DBC */
+		}
+		w = ff_convert(w, 1);			/* Convert ANSI/OEM to Unicode */
+		if (!w) return FR_INVALID_NAME;	/* Reject invalid code */
+#endif
+		if (w < 0x80 && chk_chr("\"*:<>\?|\x7F", w)) /* Reject illegal chars for LFN */
+			return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		lfn[di++] = w;					/* Store the Unicode char */
+	}
+	*path = &p[si];						/* Return pointer to the next segment */
+	cf = (w < ' ') ? NS_LAST : 0;		/* Set last segment flag if end of path */
+#if _FS_RPATH
+	if ((di == 1 && lfn[di-1] == '.') || /* Is this a dot entry? */
+		(di == 2 && lfn[di-1] == '.' && lfn[di-2] == '.')) {
+		lfn[di] = 0;
+		for (i = 0; i < 11; i++)
+			dj->fn[i] = (i < di) ? '.' : ' ';
+		dj->fn[i] = cf | NS_DOT;		/* This is a dot entry */
+		return FR_OK;
+	}
+#endif
+	while (di) {						/* Strip trailing spaces and dots */
+		w = lfn[di-1];
+		if (w != ' ' && w != '.') break;
+		di--;
+	}
+	if (!di) return FR_INVALID_NAME;	/* Reject nul string */
+
+	lfn[di] = 0;						/* LFN is created */
+
+	/* Create SFN in directory form */
+	mem_set(dj->fn, ' ', 11);
+	for (si = 0; lfn[si] == ' ' || lfn[si] == '.'; si++) ;	/* Strip leading spaces and dots */
+	if (si) cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN;
+	while (di && lfn[di - 1] != '.') di--;	/* Find extension (di<=si: no extension) */
+
+	b = i = 0; ni = 8;
+	for (;;) {
+		w = lfn[si++];					/* Get an LFN char */
+		if (!w) break;					/* Break on end of the LFN */
+		if (w == ' ' || (w == '.' && si != di)) {	/* Remove spaces and dots */
+			cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; continue;
+		}
+
+		if (i >= ni || si == di) {		/* Extension or end of SFN */
+			if (ni == 11) {				/* Long extension */
+				cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; break;
+			}
+			if (si != di) cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN;	/* Out of 8.3 format */
+			if (si > di) break;			/* No extension */
+			si = di; i = 8; ni = 11;	/* Enter extension section */
+			b <<= 2; continue;
+		}
+
+		if (w >= 0x80) {				/* Non ASCII char */
+#ifdef _EXCVT
+			w = ff_convert(w, 0);		/* Unicode -> OEM code */
+			if (w) w = excvt[w - 0x80];	/* Convert extended char to upper (SBCS) */
+#else
+			w = ff_convert(ff_wtoupper(w), 0);	/* Upper converted Unicode -> OEM code */
+#endif
+			cf |= NS_LFN;				/* Force create LFN entry */
+		}
+
+		if (_DF1S && w >= 0x100) {		/* Double byte char (always false on SBCS cfg) */
+			if (i >= ni - 1) {
+				cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; i = ni; continue;
+			}
+			dj->fn[i++] = (BYTE)(w >> 8);
+		} else {						/* Single byte char */
+			if (!w || chk_chr("+,;=[]", w)) {	/* Replace illegal chars for SFN */
+				w = '_'; cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN;/* Lossy conversion */
+			} else {
+				if (IsUpper(w)) {		/* ASCII large capital */
+					b |= 2;
+				} else {
+					if (IsLower(w)) {	/* ASCII small capital */
+						b |= 1; w -= 0x20;
+					}
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		dj->fn[i++] = (BYTE)w;
+	}
+
+	if (dj->fn[0] == DDE) dj->fn[0] = NDDE;	/* If the first char collides with deleted mark, replace it with 0x05 */
+
+	if (ni == 8) b <<= 2;
+	if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x0C || (b & 0x03) == 0x03)	/* Create LFN entry when there are composite capitals */
+		cf |= NS_LFN;
+	if (!(cf & NS_LFN)) {						/* When LFN is in 8.3 format without extended char, NT flags are created */
+		if ((b & 0x03) == 0x01) cf |= NS_EXT;	/* NT flag (Extension has only small capital) */
+		if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x04) cf |= NS_BODY;	/* NT flag (Filename has only small capital) */
+	}
+
+	dj->fn[NS] = cf;	/* SFN is created */
+
+	return FR_OK;
+
+
+#else	/* Non-LFN configuration */
+	BYTE b, c, d, *sfn;
+	UINT ni, si, i;
+	const char *p;
+
+	/* Create file name in directory form */
+	for (p = *path; *p == '/' || *p == '\\'; p++) ;	/* Strip duplicated separator */
+	sfn = dj->fn;
+	mem_set(sfn, ' ', 11);
+	si = i = b = 0; ni = 8;
+#if _FS_RPATH
+	if (p[si] == '.') { /* Is this a dot entry? */
+		for (;;) {
+			c = (BYTE)p[si++];
+			if (c != '.' || si >= 3) break;
+			sfn[i++] = c;
+		}
+		if (c != '/' && c != '\\' && c > ' ') return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		*path = &p[si];									/* Return pointer to the next segment */
+		sfn[NS] = (c <= ' ') ? NS_LAST | NS_DOT : NS_DOT;	/* Set last segment flag if end of path */
+		return FR_OK;
+	}
+#endif
+	for (;;) {
+		c = (BYTE)p[si++];
+		if (c <= ' ' || c == '/' || c == '\\') break;	/* Break on end of segment */
+		if (c == '.' || i >= ni) {
+			if (ni != 8 || c != '.') return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			i = 8; ni = 11;
+			b <<= 2; continue;
+		}
+		if (c >= 0x80) {				/* Extended char? */
+			b |= 3;						/* Eliminate NT flag */
+#ifdef _EXCVT
+			c = excvt[c - 0x80];		/* Upper conversion (SBCS) */
+#else
+#if !_DF1S	/* ASCII only cfg */
+			return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+#endif
+#endif
+		}
+		if (IsDBCS1(c)) {				/* Check if it is a DBC 1st byte (always false on SBCS cfg) */
+			d = (BYTE)p[si++];			/* Get 2nd byte */
+			if (!IsDBCS2(d) || i >= ni - 1)	/* Reject invalid DBC */
+				return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			sfn[i++] = c;
+			sfn[i++] = d;
+		} else {						/* Single byte code */
+			if (chk_chr("\"*+,:;<=>\?[]|\x7F", c))	/* Reject illegal chrs for SFN */
+				return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			if (IsUpper(c)) {			/* ASCII large capital? */
+				b |= 2;
+			} else {
+				if (IsLower(c)) {		/* ASCII small capital? */
+					b |= 1; c -= 0x20;
+				}
+			}
+			sfn[i++] = c;
+		}
+	}
+	*path = &p[si];						/* Return pointer to the next segment */
+	c = (c <= ' ') ? NS_LAST : 0;		/* Set last segment flag if end of path */
+
+	if (!i) return FR_INVALID_NAME;		/* Reject nul string */
+	if (sfn[0] == DDE) sfn[0] = NDDE;	/* When first char collides with DDE, replace it with 0x05 */
+
+	if (ni == 8) b <<= 2;
+	if ((b & 0x03) == 0x01) c |= NS_EXT;	/* NT flag (Name extension has only small capital) */
+	if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x04) c |= NS_BODY;	/* NT flag (Name body has only small capital) */
+
+	sfn[NS] = c;		/* Store NT flag, File name is created */
+
+	return FR_OK;
+#endif
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get file information from directory entry                             */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1
+static
+void get_fileinfo (		/* No return code */
+	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the directory object */
+	FILINFO *fno	 	/* Pointer to the file information to be filled */
+)
+{
+	UINT i;
+	BYTE nt, *dir;
+	TCHAR *p, c;
+
+
+	p = fno->fname;
+	if (dj->sect) {
+		dir = dj->dir;
+		nt = dir[DIR_NTres];		/* NT flag */
+		for (i = 0; i < 8; i++) {	/* Copy name body */
+			c = dir[i];
+			if (c == ' ') break;
+			if (c == NDDE) c = (TCHAR)DDE;
+			if (_USE_LFN && (nt & NS_BODY) && IsUpper(c)) c += 0x20;
+#if _LFN_UNICODE
+			if (IsDBCS1(c) && i < 7 && IsDBCS2(dir[i+1]))
+				c = (c << 8) | dir[++i];
+			c = ff_convert(c, 1);
+			if (!c) c = '?';
+#endif
+			*p++ = c;
+		}
+		if (dir[8] != ' ') {		/* Copy name extension */
+			*p++ = '.';
+			for (i = 8; i < 11; i++) {
+				c = dir[i];
+				if (c == ' ') break;
+				if (_USE_LFN && (nt & NS_EXT) && IsUpper(c)) c += 0x20;
+#if _LFN_UNICODE
+				if (IsDBCS1(c) && i < 10 && IsDBCS2(dir[i+1]))
+					c = (c << 8) | dir[++i];
+				c = ff_convert(c, 1);
+				if (!c) c = '?';
+#endif
+				*p++ = c;
+			}
+		}
+		fno->fattrib = dir[DIR_Attr];				/* Attribute */
+		fno->fsize = LD_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize);	/* Size */
+		fno->fdate = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtDate);		/* Date */
+		fno->ftime = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime);		/* Time */
+	}
+	*p = 0;		/* Terminate SFN str by a \0 */
+
+#if _USE_LFN
+	if (fno->lfname && fno->lfsize) {
+		TCHAR *tp = fno->lfname;
+		WCHAR w, *lfn;
+
+		i = 0;
+		if (dj->sect && dj->lfn_idx != 0xFFFF) {/* Get LFN if available */
+			lfn = dj->lfn;
+			while ((w = *lfn++) != 0) {			/* Get an LFN char */
+#if !_LFN_UNICODE
+				w = ff_convert(w, 0);			/* Unicode -> OEM conversion */
+				if (!w) { i = 0; break; }		/* Could not convert, no LFN */
+				if (_DF1S && w >= 0x100)		/* Put 1st byte if it is a DBC (always false on SBCS cfg) */
+					tp[i++] = (TCHAR)(w >> 8);
+#endif
+				if (i >= fno->lfsize - 1) { i = 0; break; }	/* Buffer overflow, no LFN */
+				tp[i++] = (TCHAR)w;
+			}
+		}
+		tp[i] = 0;	/* Terminate the LFN str by a \0 */
+	}
+#endif
+}
+#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1 */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Follow a file path                                                    */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT follow_path (	/* FR_OK(0): successful, !=0: error code */
+	DIR *dj,			/* Directory object to return last directory and found object */
+	const TCHAR *path	/* Full-path string to find a file or directory */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	BYTE *dir, ns;
+
+
+#if _FS_RPATH
+	if (*path == '/' || *path == '\\') { /* There is a heading separator */
+		path++;	dj->sclust = 0;		/* Strip it and start from the root dir */
+	} else {							/* No heading separator */
+		dj->sclust = dj->fs->cdir;	/* Start from the current dir */
+	}
+#else
+	if (*path == '/' || *path == '\\')	/* Strip heading separator if exist */
+		path++;
+	dj->sclust = 0;						/* Start from the root dir */
+#endif
+
+	if ((UINT)*path < ' ') {			/* Nul path means the start directory itself */
+		res = dir_sdi(dj, 0);
+		dj->dir = 0;
+	} else {							/* Follow path */
+		for (;;) {
+			res = create_name(dj, &path);	/* Get a segment */
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			res = dir_find(dj);				/* Find it */
+			ns = *(dj->fn+NS);
+			if (res != FR_OK) {				/* Failed to find the object */
+				if (res != FR_NO_FILE) break;	/* Abort if any hard error occurred */
+				/* Object not found */
+				if (_FS_RPATH && (ns & NS_DOT)) {	/* If dot entry is not exit */
+					dj->sclust = 0; dj->dir = 0;	/* It is the root dir */
+					res = FR_OK;
+					if (!(ns & NS_LAST)) continue;
+				} else {							/* Could not find the object */
+					if (!(ns & NS_LAST)) res = FR_NO_PATH;
+				}
+				break;
+			}
+			if (ns & NS_LAST) break;			/* Last segment match. Function completed. */
+			dir = dj->dir;						/* There is next segment. Follow the sub directory */
+			if (!(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)) {	/* Cannot follow because it is a file */
+				res = FR_NO_PATH; break;
+			}
+			dj->sclust = ld_clust(dj->fs, dir);
+		}
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Load a sector and check if it is an FAT Volume Boot Record            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+BYTE check_fs (	/* 0:FAT-VBR, 1:Any BR but not FAT, 2:Not a BR, 3:Disk error */
+	FATFS *fs,	/* File system object */
+	DWORD sect	/* Sector# (lba) to check if it is an FAT boot record or not */
+)
+{
+	if (disk_read(fs->drv, fs->win, sect, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Load boot record */
+		return 3;
+	if (LD_WORD(&fs->win[BS_55AA]) != 0xAA55)		/* Check record signature (always placed at offset 510 even if the sector size is >512) */
+		return 2;
+
+	if ((LD_DWORD(&fs->win[BS_FilSysType]) & 0xFFFFFF) == 0x544146)	/* Check "FAT" string */
+		return 0;
+	if ((LD_DWORD(&fs->win[BS_FilSysType32]) & 0xFFFFFF) == 0x544146)
+		return 0;
+
+	return 1;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Check if the file system object is valid or not                       */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT chk_mounted (	/* FR_OK(0): successful, !=0: any error occurred */
+	const TCHAR **path,	/* Pointer to pointer to the path name (drive number) */
+	FATFS **rfs,		/* Pointer to pointer to the found file system object */
+	BYTE wmode			/* !=0: Check write protection for write access */
+)
+{
+	BYTE fmt, b, pi, *tbl;
+	UINT vol;
+	DSTATUS stat;
+	DWORD bsect, fasize, tsect, sysect, nclst, szbfat;
+	WORD nrsv;
+	const TCHAR *p = *path;
+	FATFS *fs;
+
+
+	/* Get logical drive number from the path name */
+	vol = p[0] - '0';					/* Is there a drive number? */
+	if (vol <= 9 && p[1] == ':') {		/* Found a drive number, get and strip it */
+		p += 2; *path = p;				/* Return pointer to the path name */
+	} else {							/* No drive number is given */
+#if _FS_RPATH
+		vol = CurrVol;					/* Use current drive */
+#else
+		vol = 0;						/* Use drive 0 */
+#endif
+	}
+
+	/* Check if the file system object is valid or not */
+	*rfs = 0;
+	if (vol >= _VOLUMES) 				/* Is the drive number valid? */
+		return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
+	fs = FatFs[vol];					/* Get corresponding file system object */
+	if (!fs) return FR_NOT_ENABLED;		/* Is the file system object available? */
+
+	ENTER_FF(fs);						/* Lock file system */
+
+	*rfs = fs;							/* Return pointer to the corresponding file system object */
+	if (fs->fs_type) {					/* If the volume has been mounted */
+		stat = disk_status(fs->drv);
+		if (!(stat & STA_NOINIT)) {		/* and the physical drive is kept initialized (has not been changed), */
+			if (!_FS_READONLY && wmode && (stat & STA_PROTECT))	/* Check write protection if needed */
+				return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
+			return FR_OK;				/* The file system object is valid */
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* The file system object is not valid. */
+	/* Following code attempts to mount the volume. (analyze BPB and initialize the fs object) */
+
+	fs->fs_type = 0;					/* Clear the file system object */
+	fs->drv = LD2PD(vol);				/* Bind the logical drive and a physical drive */
+	stat = disk_initialize(fs->drv);	/* Initialize the physical drive */
+	if (stat & STA_NOINIT)				/* Check if the initialization succeeded */
+		return FR_NOT_READY;			/* Failed to initialize due to no medium or hard error */
+	if (!_FS_READONLY && wmode && (stat & STA_PROTECT))	/* Check disk write protection if needed */
+		return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
+#if _MAX_SS != 512						/* Get disk sector size (variable sector size cfg only) */
+	if (disk_ioctl(fs->drv, GET_SECTOR_SIZE, &fs->ssize) != RES_OK)
+		return FR_DISK_ERR;
+#endif
+	/* Search FAT partition on the drive. Supports only generic partitions, FDISK and SFD. */
+	fmt = check_fs(fs, bsect = 0);		/* Load sector 0 and check if it is an FAT-VBR (in SFD) */
+	if (LD2PT(vol) && !fmt) fmt = 1;	/* Force non-SFD if the volume is forced partition */
+	if (fmt == 1) {						/* Not an FAT-VBR, the physical drive can be partitioned */
+		/* Check the partition listed in the partition table */
+		pi = LD2PT(vol);
+		if (pi) pi--;
+		tbl = &fs->win[MBR_Table + pi * SZ_PTE];/* Partition table */
+		if (tbl[4]) {						/* Is the partition existing? */
+			bsect = LD_DWORD(&tbl[8]);		/* Partition offset in LBA */
+			fmt = check_fs(fs, bsect);		/* Check the partition */
+		}
+	}
+	if (fmt == 3) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+	if (fmt) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;		/* No FAT volume is found */
+
+	/* An FAT volume is found. Following code initializes the file system object */
+
+	if (LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_BytsPerSec) != SS(fs))		/* (BPB_BytsPerSec must be equal to the physical sector size) */
+		return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;
+
+	fasize = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_FATSz16);				/* Number of sectors per FAT */
+	if (!fasize) fasize = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_FATSz32);
+	fs->fsize = fasize;
+
+	fs->n_fats = b = fs->win[BPB_NumFATs];				/* Number of FAT copies */
+	if (b != 1 && b != 2) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;		/* (Must be 1 or 2) */
+	fasize *= b;										/* Number of sectors for FAT area */
+
+	fs->csize = b = fs->win[BPB_SecPerClus];			/* Number of sectors per cluster */
+	if (!b || (b & (b - 1))) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;	/* (Must be power of 2) */
+
+	fs->n_rootdir = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_RootEntCnt);	/* Number of root directory entries */
+	if (fs->n_rootdir % (SS(fs) / SZ_DIR)) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;	/* (BPB_RootEntCnt must be sector aligned) */
+
+	tsect = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_TotSec16);				/* Number of sectors on the volume */
+	if (!tsect) tsect = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_TotSec32);
+
+	nrsv = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_RsvdSecCnt);				/* Number of reserved sectors */
+	if (!nrsv) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;					/* (BPB_RsvdSecCnt must not be 0) */
+
+	/* Determine the FAT sub type */
+	sysect = nrsv + fasize + fs->n_rootdir / (SS(fs) / SZ_DIR);	/* RSV+FAT+DIR */
+	if (tsect < sysect) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;		/* (Invalid volume size) */
+	nclst = (tsect - sysect) / fs->csize;				/* Number of clusters */
+	if (!nclst) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;				/* (Invalid volume size) */
+	fmt = FS_FAT12;
+	if (nclst >= MIN_FAT16) fmt = FS_FAT16;
+	if (nclst >= MIN_FAT32) fmt = FS_FAT32;
+
+	/* Boundaries and Limits */
+	fs->n_fatent = nclst + 2;							/* Number of FAT entries */
+	fs->database = bsect + sysect;						/* Data start sector */
+	fs->fatbase = bsect + nrsv; 						/* FAT start sector */
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
+		if (fs->n_rootdir) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;		/* (BPB_RootEntCnt must be 0) */
+		fs->dirbase = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_RootClus);	/* Root directory start cluster */
+		szbfat = fs->n_fatent * 4;						/* (Required FAT size) */
+	} else {
+		if (!fs->n_rootdir)	return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;	/* (BPB_RootEntCnt must not be 0) */
+		fs->dirbase = fs->fatbase + fasize;				/* Root directory start sector */
+		szbfat = (fmt == FS_FAT16) ?					/* (Required FAT size) */
+			fs->n_fatent * 2 : fs->n_fatent * 3 / 2 + (fs->n_fatent & 1);
+	}
+	if (fs->fsize < (szbfat + (SS(fs) - 1)) / SS(fs))	/* (BPB_FATSz must not be less than required) */
+		return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+	/* Initialize cluster allocation information */
+	fs->free_clust = 0xFFFFFFFF;
+	fs->last_clust = 0;
+
+	/* Get fsinfo if available */
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
+	 	fs->fsi_flag = 0;
+		fs->fsi_sector = bsect + LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_FSInfo);
+		if (disk_read(fs->drv, fs->win, fs->fsi_sector, 1) == RES_OK &&
+			LD_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA) == 0xAA55 &&
+			LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_LeadSig) == 0x41615252 &&
+			LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_StrucSig) == 0x61417272) {
+				fs->last_clust = LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Nxt_Free);
+				fs->free_clust = LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Free_Count);
+		}
+	}
+#endif
+	fs->fs_type = fmt;		/* FAT sub-type */
+	fs->id = ++Fsid;		/* File system mount ID */
+	fs->winsect = 0;		/* Invalidate sector cache */
+	fs->wflag = 0;
+#if _FS_RPATH
+	fs->cdir = 0;			/* Current directory (root dir) */
+#endif
+#if _FS_LOCK				/* Clear file lock semaphores */
+	clear_lock(fs);
+#endif
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Check if the file/dir object is valid or not                          */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT validate (	/* FR_OK(0): The object is valid, !=0: Invalid */
+	void* obj		/* Pointer to the object FIL/DIR to check validity */
+)
+{
+	FIL *fil;
+
+
+	fil = (FIL*)obj;	/* Assuming offset of fs and id in the FIL/DIR is identical */
+	if (!fil->fs || !fil->fs->fs_type || fil->fs->id != fil->id)
+		return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
+
+	ENTER_FF(fil->fs);		/* Lock file system */
+
+	if (disk_status(fil->fs->drv) & STA_NOINIT)
+		return FR_NOT_READY;
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+   Public Functions
+
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Mount/Unmount a Logical Drive                                         */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_mount (
+	BYTE vol,		/* Logical drive number to be mounted/unmounted */
+	FATFS *fs		/* Pointer to new file system object (NULL for unmount)*/
+)
+{
+	FATFS *rfs;
+
+
+	if (vol >= _VOLUMES)		/* Check if the drive number is valid */
+		return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
+	rfs = FatFs[vol];			/* Get current fs object */
+
+	if (rfs) {
+#if _FS_LOCK
+		clear_lock(rfs);
+#endif
+#if _FS_REENTRANT				/* Discard sync object of the current volume */
+		if (!ff_del_syncobj(rfs->sobj)) return FR_INT_ERR;
+#endif
+		rfs->fs_type = 0;		/* Clear old fs object */
+	}
+
+	if (fs) {
+		fs->fs_type = 0;		/* Clear new fs object */
+#if _FS_REENTRANT				/* Create sync object for the new volume */
+		if (!ff_cre_syncobj(vol, &fs->sobj)) return FR_INT_ERR;
+#endif
+	}
+	FatFs[vol] = fs;			/* Register new fs object */
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Open or Create a File                                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_open (
+	FIL *fp,			/* Pointer to the blank file object */
+	const TCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file name */
+	BYTE mode			/* Access mode and file open mode flags */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	BYTE *dir;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	if (!fp) return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
+	fp->fs = 0;			/* Clear file object */
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+	mode &= FA_READ | FA_WRITE | FA_CREATE_ALWAYS | FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_CREATE_NEW;
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, (BYTE)(mode & ~FA_READ));
+#else
+	mode &= FA_READ;
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0);
+#endif
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);	/* Follow the file path */
+		dir = dj.dir;
+#if !_FS_READONLY	/* R/W configuration */
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			if (!dir)	/* Current dir itself */
+				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+#if _FS_LOCK
+			else
+				res = chk_lock(&dj, (mode & ~FA_READ) ? 1 : 0);
+#endif
+		}
+		/* Create or Open a file */
+		if (mode & (FA_CREATE_ALWAYS | FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_CREATE_NEW)) {
+			DWORD dw, cl;
+
+			if (res != FR_OK) {					/* No file, create new */
+				if (res == FR_NO_FILE)			/* There is no file to open, create a new entry */
+#if _FS_LOCK
+					res = enq_lock() ? dir_register(&dj) : FR_TOO_MANY_OPEN_FILES;
+#else
+					res = dir_register(&dj);
+#endif
+				mode |= FA_CREATE_ALWAYS;		/* File is created */
+				dir = dj.dir;					/* New entry */
+			}
+			else {								/* Any object is already existing */
+				if (dir[DIR_Attr] & (AM_RDO | AM_DIR)) {	/* Cannot overwrite it (R/O or DIR) */
+					res = FR_DENIED;
+				} else {
+					if (mode & FA_CREATE_NEW)	/* Cannot create as new file */
+						res = FR_EXIST;
+				}
+			}
+			if (res == FR_OK && (mode & FA_CREATE_ALWAYS)) {	/* Truncate it if overwrite mode */
+				dw = get_fattime();					/* Created time */
+				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_CrtTime, dw);
+				dir[DIR_Attr] = 0;					/* Reset attribute */
+				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize, 0);		/* size = 0 */
+				cl = ld_clust(dj.fs, dir);			/* Get start cluster */
+				st_clust(dir, 0);					/* cluster = 0 */
+				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+				if (cl) {							/* Remove the cluster chain if exist */
+					dw = dj.fs->winsect;
+					res = remove_chain(dj.fs, cl);
+					if (res == FR_OK) {
+						dj.fs->last_clust = cl - 1;	/* Reuse the cluster hole */
+						res = move_window(dj.fs, dw);
+					}
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		else {	/* Open an existing file */
+			if (res == FR_OK) {						/* Follow succeeded */
+				if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) {		/* It is a directory */
+					res = FR_NO_FILE;
+				} else {
+					if ((mode & FA_WRITE) && (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_RDO)) /* R/O violation */
+						res = FR_DENIED;
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			if (mode & FA_CREATE_ALWAYS)			/* Set file change flag if created or overwritten */
+				mode |= FA__WRITTEN;
+			fp->dir_sect = dj.fs->winsect;			/* Pointer to the directory entry */
+			fp->dir_ptr = dir;
+#if _FS_LOCK
+			fp->lockid = inc_lock(&dj, (mode & ~FA_READ) ? 1 : 0);
+			if (!fp->lockid) res = FR_INT_ERR;
+#endif
+		}
+
+#else				/* R/O configuration */
+		if (res == FR_OK) {					/* Follow succeeded */
+			dir = dj.dir;
+			if (!dir) {						/* Current dir itself */
+				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			} else {
+				if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)	/* It is a directory */
+					res = FR_NO_FILE;
+			}
+		}
+#endif
+		FREE_BUF();
+
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			fp->flag = mode;					/* File access mode */
+			fp->sclust = ld_clust(dj.fs, dir);	/* File start cluster */
+			fp->fsize = LD_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize);	/* File size */
+			fp->fptr = 0;						/* File pointer */
+			fp->dsect = 0;
+#if _USE_FASTSEEK
+			fp->cltbl = 0;						/* Normal seek mode */
+#endif
+			fp->fs = dj.fs; fp->id = dj.fs->id;	/* Validate file object */
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Read File                                                             */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_read (
+	FIL *fp, 		/* Pointer to the file object */
+	void *buff,		/* Pointer to data buffer */
+	UINT btr,		/* Number of bytes to read */
+	UINT *br		/* Pointer to number of bytes read */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD clst, sect, remain;
+	UINT rcnt, cc;
+	BYTE csect, *rbuff = buff;
+
+
+	*br = 0;	/* Clear read byte counter */
+
+	res = validate(fp);							/* Check validity */
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)					/* Aborted file? */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+	if (!(fp->flag & FA_READ)) 					/* Check access mode */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
+	remain = fp->fsize - fp->fptr;
+	if (btr > remain) btr = (UINT)remain;		/* Truncate btr by remaining bytes */
+
+	for ( ;  btr;								/* Repeat until all data read */
+		rbuff += rcnt, fp->fptr += rcnt, *br += rcnt, btr -= rcnt) {
+		if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) {		/* On the sector boundary? */
+			csect = (BYTE)(fp->fptr / SS(fp->fs) & (fp->fs->csize - 1));	/* Sector offset in the cluster */
+			if (!csect) {						/* On the cluster boundary? */
+				if (fp->fptr == 0) {			/* On the top of the file? */
+					clst = fp->sclust;			/* Follow from the origin */
+				} else {						/* Middle or end of the file */
+#if _USE_FASTSEEK
+					if (fp->cltbl)
+						clst = clmt_clust(fp, fp->fptr);	/* Get cluster# from the CLMT */
+					else
+#endif
+						clst = get_fat(fp->fs, fp->clust);	/* Follow cluster chain on the FAT */
+				}
+				if (clst < 2) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->clust = clst;				/* Update current cluster */
+			}
+			sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->clust);	/* Get current sector */
+			if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+			sect += csect;
+			cc = btr / SS(fp->fs);				/* When remaining bytes >= sector size, */
+			if (cc) {							/* Read maximum contiguous sectors directly */
+				if (csect + cc > fp->fs->csize)	/* Clip at cluster boundary */
+					cc = fp->fs->csize - csect;
+				if (disk_read(fp->fs->drv, rbuff, sect, (BYTE)cc) != RES_OK)
+					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+#if !_FS_READONLY && _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2			/* Replace one of the read sectors with cached data if it contains a dirty sector */
+#if _FS_TINY
+				if (fp->fs->wflag && fp->fs->winsect - sect < cc)
+					mem_cpy(rbuff + ((fp->fs->winsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), fp->fs->win, SS(fp->fs));
+#else
+				if ((fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) && fp->dsect - sect < cc)
+					mem_cpy(rbuff + ((fp->dsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), fp->buf, SS(fp->fs));
+#endif
+#endif
+				rcnt = SS(fp->fs) * cc;			/* Number of bytes transferred */
+				continue;
+			}
+#if !_FS_TINY
+			if (fp->dsect != sect) {			/* Load data sector if not in cache */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+				if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {		/* Write-back dirty sector cache */
+					if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+						ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+					fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+				}
+#endif
+				if (disk_read(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, sect, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Fill sector cache */
+					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+			}
+#endif
+			fp->dsect = sect;
+		}
+		rcnt = SS(fp->fs) - ((UINT)fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs));	/* Get partial sector data from sector buffer */
+		if (rcnt > btr) rcnt = btr;
+#if _FS_TINY
+		if (move_window(fp->fs, fp->dsect))		/* Move sector window */
+			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+		mem_cpy(rbuff, &fp->fs->win[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt);	/* Pick partial sector */
+#else
+		mem_cpy(rbuff, &fp->buf[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt);	/* Pick partial sector */
+#endif
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK);
+}
+
+
+
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Write File                                                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_write (
+	FIL *fp,			/* Pointer to the file object */
+	const void *buff,	/* Pointer to the data to be written */
+	UINT btw,			/* Number of bytes to write */
+	UINT *bw			/* Pointer to number of bytes written */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD clst, sect;
+	UINT wcnt, cc;
+	const BYTE *wbuff = buff;
+	BYTE csect;
+
+
+	*bw = 0;	/* Clear write byte counter */
+
+	res = validate(fp);						/* Check validity */
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)				/* Aborted file? */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+	if (!(fp->flag & FA_WRITE))				/* Check access mode */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
+	if ((DWORD)(fp->fsize + btw) < fp->fsize) btw = 0;	/* File size cannot reach 4GB */
+
+	for ( ;  btw;							/* Repeat until all data written */
+		wbuff += wcnt, fp->fptr += wcnt, *bw += wcnt, btw -= wcnt) {
+		if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) {	/* On the sector boundary? */
+			csect = (BYTE)(fp->fptr / SS(fp->fs) & (fp->fs->csize - 1));	/* Sector offset in the cluster */
+			if (!csect) {					/* On the cluster boundary? */
+				if (fp->fptr == 0) {		/* On the top of the file? */
+					clst = fp->sclust;		/* Follow from the origin */
+					if (clst == 0)			/* When no cluster is allocated, */
+						fp->sclust = clst = create_chain(fp->fs, 0);	/* Create a new cluster chain */
+				} else {					/* Middle or end of the file */
+#if _USE_FASTSEEK
+					if (fp->cltbl)
+						clst = clmt_clust(fp, fp->fptr);	/* Get cluster# from the CLMT */
+					else
+#endif
+						clst = create_chain(fp->fs, fp->clust);	/* Follow or stretch cluster chain on the FAT */
+				}
+				if (clst == 0) break;		/* Could not allocate a new cluster (disk full) */
+				if (clst == 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->clust = clst;			/* Update current cluster */
+			}
+#if _FS_TINY
+			if (fp->fs->winsect == fp->dsect && move_window(fp->fs, 0))	/* Write-back sector cache */
+				ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+#else
+			if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {		/* Write-back sector cache */
+				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+			}
+#endif
+			sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->clust);	/* Get current sector */
+			if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+			sect += csect;
+			cc = btw / SS(fp->fs);			/* When remaining bytes >= sector size, */
+			if (cc) {						/* Write maximum contiguous sectors directly */
+				if (csect + cc > fp->fs->csize)	/* Clip at cluster boundary */
+					cc = fp->fs->csize - csect;
+				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, wbuff, sect, (BYTE)cc) != RES_OK)
+					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+#if _FS_TINY
+				if (fp->fs->winsect - sect < cc) {	/* Refill sector cache if it gets invalidated by the direct write */
+					mem_cpy(fp->fs->win, wbuff + ((fp->fs->winsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), SS(fp->fs));
+					fp->fs->wflag = 0;
+				}
+#else
+				if (fp->dsect - sect < cc) { /* Refill sector cache if it gets invalidated by the direct write */
+					mem_cpy(fp->buf, wbuff + ((fp->dsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), SS(fp->fs));
+					fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+				}
+#endif
+				wcnt = SS(fp->fs) * cc;		/* Number of bytes transferred */
+				continue;
+			}
+#if _FS_TINY
+			if (fp->fptr >= fp->fsize) {	/* Avoid silly cache filling at growing edge */
+				if (move_window(fp->fs, 0)) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->fs->winsect = sect;
+			}
+#else
+			if (fp->dsect != sect) {		/* Fill sector cache with file data */
+				if (fp->fptr < fp->fsize &&
+					disk_read(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, sect, 1) != RES_OK)
+						ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+			}
+#endif
+			fp->dsect = sect;
+		}
+		wcnt = SS(fp->fs) - ((UINT)fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs));/* Put partial sector into file I/O buffer */
+		if (wcnt > btw) wcnt = btw;
+#if _FS_TINY
+		if (move_window(fp->fs, fp->dsect))	/* Move sector window */
+			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+		mem_cpy(&fp->fs->win[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], wbuff, wcnt);	/* Fit partial sector */
+		fp->fs->wflag = 1;
+#else
+		mem_cpy(&fp->buf[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], wbuff, wcnt);	/* Fit partial sector */
+		fp->flag |= FA__DIRTY;
+#endif
+	}
+
+	if (fp->fptr > fp->fsize) fp->fsize = fp->fptr;	/* Update file size if needed */
+	fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN;						/* Set file change flag */
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Synchronize the File Object                                           */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_sync (
+	FIL *fp		/* Pointer to the file object */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD tim;
+	BYTE *dir;
+
+
+	res = validate(fp);					/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		if (fp->flag & FA__WRITTEN) {	/* Has the file been written? */
+#if !_FS_TINY	/* Write-back dirty buffer */
+			if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {
+				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+					LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+			}
+#endif
+			/* Update the directory entry */
+			res = move_window(fp->fs, fp->dir_sect);
+			if (res == FR_OK) {
+				dir = fp->dir_ptr;
+				dir[DIR_Attr] |= AM_ARC;					/* Set archive bit */
+				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize, fp->fsize);		/* Update file size */
+				st_clust(dir, fp->sclust);					/* Update start cluster */
+				tim = get_fattime();						/* Update updated time */
+				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim);
+				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_LstAccDate, 0);
+				fp->flag &= ~FA__WRITTEN;
+				fp->fs->wflag = 1;
+				res = sync(fp->fs);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+}
+
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Close File                                                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_close (
+	FIL *fp		/* Pointer to the file object to be closed */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+
+
+#if _FS_READONLY
+	res = validate(fp);
+	{
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+		FATFS *fs = fp->fs;
+#endif
+		if (res == FR_OK) fp->fs = 0;	/* Discard file object */
+		LEAVE_FF(fs, res);
+	}
+#else
+	res = f_sync(fp);		/* Flush cached data */
+#if _FS_LOCK
+	if (res == FR_OK) {		/* Decrement open counter */
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+		FATFS *fs = fp->fs;;
+		res = validate(fp);
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			res = dec_lock(fp->lockid);	
+			unlock_fs(fs, FR_OK);
+		}
+#else
+		res = dec_lock(fp->lockid);
+#endif
+	}
+#endif
+	if (res == FR_OK) fp->fs = 0;	/* Discard file object */
+	return res;
+#endif
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Current Drive/Directory Handlings                                     */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#if _FS_RPATH >= 1
+
+FRESULT f_chdrive (
+	BYTE drv		/* Drive number */
+)
+{
+	if (drv >= _VOLUMES) return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
+
+	CurrVol = drv;
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+FRESULT f_chdir (
+	const TCHAR *path	/* Pointer to the directory path */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);		/* Follow the path */
+		FREE_BUF();
+		if (res == FR_OK) {					/* Follow completed */
+			if (!dj.dir) {
+				dj.fs->cdir = dj.sclust;	/* Start directory itself */
+			} else {
+				if (dj.dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)	/* Reached to the directory */
+					dj.fs->cdir = ld_clust(dj.fs, dj.dir);
+				else
+					res = FR_NO_PATH;		/* Reached but a file */
+			}
+		}
+		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_NO_PATH;
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+#if _FS_RPATH >= 2
+FRESULT f_getcwd (
+	TCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the directory path */
+	UINT sz_path	/* Size of path */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	UINT i, n;
+	DWORD ccl;
+	TCHAR *tp;
+	FILINFO fno;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	*path = 0;
+	res = chk_mounted((const TCHAR**)&path, &dj.fs, 0);	/* Get current volume */
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		i = sz_path;		/* Bottom of buffer (dir stack base) */
+		dj.sclust = dj.fs->cdir;			/* Start to follow upper dir from current dir */
+		while ((ccl = dj.sclust) != 0) {	/* Repeat while current dir is a sub-dir */
+			res = dir_sdi(&dj, 1);			/* Get parent dir */
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			res = dir_read(&dj);
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			dj.sclust = ld_clust(dj.fs, dj.dir);	/* Goto parent dir */
+			res = dir_sdi(&dj, 0);
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			do {							/* Find the entry links to the child dir */
+				res = dir_read(&dj);
+				if (res != FR_OK) break;
+				if (ccl == ld_clust(dj.fs, dj.dir)) break;	/* Found the entry */
+				res = dir_next(&dj, 0);	
+			} while (res == FR_OK);
+			if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_INT_ERR;/* It cannot be 'not found'. */
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+#if _USE_LFN
+			fno.lfname = path;
+			fno.lfsize = i;
+#endif
+			get_fileinfo(&dj, &fno);		/* Get the dir name and push it to the buffer */
+			tp = fno.fname;
+			if (_USE_LFN && *path) tp = path;
+			for (n = 0; tp[n]; n++) ;
+			if (i < n + 3) {
+				res = FR_NOT_ENOUGH_CORE; break;
+			}
+			while (n) path[--i] = tp[--n];
+			path[--i] = '/';
+		}
+		tp = path;
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			*tp++ = '0' + CurrVol;			/* Put drive number */
+			*tp++ = ':';
+			if (i == sz_path) {				/* Root-dir */
+				*tp++ = '/';
+			} else {						/* Sub-dir */
+				do		/* Add stacked path str */
+					*tp++ = path[i++];
+				while (i < sz_path);
+			}
+		}
+		*tp = 0;
+		FREE_BUF();
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+#endif /* _FS_RPATH >= 2 */
+#endif /* _FS_RPATH >= 1 */
+
+
+
+#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Seek File R/W Pointer                                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_lseek (
+	FIL *fp,		/* Pointer to the file object */
+	DWORD ofs		/* File pointer from top of file */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+
+
+	res = validate(fp);					/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)			/* Check abort flag */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+
+#if _USE_FASTSEEK
+	if (fp->cltbl) {	/* Fast seek */
+		DWORD cl, pcl, ncl, tcl, dsc, tlen, ulen, *tbl;
+
+		if (ofs == CREATE_LINKMAP) {	/* Create CLMT */
+			tbl = fp->cltbl;
+			tlen = *tbl++; ulen = 2;	/* Given table size and required table size */
+			cl = fp->sclust;			/* Top of the chain */
+			if (cl) {
+				do {
+					/* Get a fragment */
+					tcl = cl; ncl = 0; ulen += 2;	/* Top, length and used items */
+					do {
+						pcl = cl; ncl++;
+						cl = get_fat(fp->fs, cl);
+						if (cl <= 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+						if (cl == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+					} while (cl == pcl + 1);
+					if (ulen <= tlen) {		/* Store the length and top of the fragment */
+						*tbl++ = ncl; *tbl++ = tcl;
+					}
+				} while (cl < fp->fs->n_fatent);	/* Repeat until end of chain */
+			}
+			*fp->cltbl = ulen;	/* Number of items used */
+			if (ulen <= tlen)
+				*tbl = 0;		/* Terminate table */
+			else
+				res = FR_NOT_ENOUGH_CORE;	/* Given table size is smaller than required */
+
+		} else {						/* Fast seek */
+			if (ofs > fp->fsize)		/* Clip offset at the file size */
+				ofs = fp->fsize;
+			fp->fptr = ofs;				/* Set file pointer */
+			if (ofs) {
+				fp->clust = clmt_clust(fp, ofs - 1);
+				dsc = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->clust);
+				if (!dsc) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+				dsc += (ofs - 1) / SS(fp->fs) & (fp->fs->csize - 1);
+				if (fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs) && dsc != fp->dsect) {	/* Refill sector cache if needed */
+#if !_FS_TINY
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+					if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {		/* Write-back dirty sector cache */
+						if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+							ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+						fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+					}
+#endif
+					if (disk_read(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, dsc, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Load current sector */
+						ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+#endif
+					fp->dsect = dsc;
+				}
+			}
+		}
+	} else
+#endif
+
+	/* Normal Seek */
+	{
+		DWORD clst, bcs, nsect, ifptr;
+
+		if (ofs > fp->fsize					/* In read-only mode, clip offset with the file size */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+			 && !(fp->flag & FA_WRITE)
+#endif
+			) ofs = fp->fsize;
+
+		ifptr = fp->fptr;
+		fp->fptr = nsect = 0;
+		if (ofs) {
+			bcs = (DWORD)fp->fs->csize * SS(fp->fs);	/* Cluster size (byte) */
+			if (ifptr > 0 &&
+				(ofs - 1) / bcs >= (ifptr - 1) / bcs) {	/* When seek to same or following cluster, */
+				fp->fptr = (ifptr - 1) & ~(bcs - 1);	/* start from the current cluster */
+				ofs -= fp->fptr;
+				clst = fp->clust;
+			} else {									/* When seek to back cluster, */
+				clst = fp->sclust;						/* start from the first cluster */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+				if (clst == 0) {						/* If no cluster chain, create a new chain */
+					clst = create_chain(fp->fs, 0);
+					if (clst == 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+					if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+					fp->sclust = clst;
+				}
+#endif
+				fp->clust = clst;
+			}
+			if (clst != 0) {
+				while (ofs > bcs) {						/* Cluster following loop */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+					if (fp->flag & FA_WRITE) {			/* Check if in write mode or not */
+						clst = create_chain(fp->fs, clst);	/* Force stretch if in write mode */
+						if (clst == 0) {				/* When disk gets full, clip file size */
+							ofs = bcs; break;
+						}
+					} else
+#endif
+						clst = get_fat(fp->fs, clst);	/* Follow cluster chain if not in write mode */
+					if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+					if (clst <= 1 || clst >= fp->fs->n_fatent) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+					fp->clust = clst;
+					fp->fptr += bcs;
+					ofs -= bcs;
+				}
+				fp->fptr += ofs;
+				if (ofs % SS(fp->fs)) {
+					nsect = clust2sect(fp->fs, clst);	/* Current sector */
+					if (!nsect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+					nsect += ofs / SS(fp->fs);
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		if (fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs) && nsect != fp->dsect) {	/* Fill sector cache if needed */
+#if !_FS_TINY
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+			if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {			/* Write-back dirty sector cache */
+				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+			}
+#endif
+			if (disk_read(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, nsect, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Fill sector cache */
+				ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+#endif
+			fp->dsect = nsect;
+		}
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+		if (fp->fptr > fp->fsize) {			/* Set file change flag if the file size is extended */
+			fp->fsize = fp->fptr;
+			fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN;
+		}
+#endif
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Create a Directory Object                                             */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_opendir (
+	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to directory object to create */
+	const TCHAR *path	/* Pointer to the directory path */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	FATFS *fs;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	if (!dj) return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj->fs, 0);
+	fs = dj->fs;
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(*dj);
+		res = follow_path(dj, path);			/* Follow the path to the directory */
+		FREE_BUF();
+		if (res == FR_OK) {						/* Follow completed */
+			if (dj->dir) {						/* It is not the root dir */
+				if (dj->dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) {	/* The object is a directory */
+					dj->sclust = ld_clust(fs, dj->dir);
+				} else {						/* The object is not a directory */
+					res = FR_NO_PATH;
+				}
+			}
+			if (res == FR_OK) {
+				dj->id = fs->id;
+				res = dir_sdi(dj, 0);			/* Rewind dir */
+			}
+		}
+		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_NO_PATH;
+		if (res != FR_OK) dj->fs = 0;			/* Invalidate the dir object if function faild */
+	} else {
+		dj->fs = 0;
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Read Directory Entry in Sequence                                      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_readdir (
+	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the open directory object */
+	FILINFO *fno		/* Pointer to file information to return */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = validate(dj);						/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		if (!fno) {
+			res = dir_sdi(dj, 0);			/* Rewind the directory object */
+		} else {
+			INIT_BUF(*dj);
+			res = dir_read(dj);				/* Read an directory item */
+			if (res == FR_NO_FILE) {		/* Reached end of dir */
+				dj->sect = 0;
+				res = FR_OK;
+			}
+			if (res == FR_OK) {				/* A valid entry is found */
+				get_fileinfo(dj, fno);		/* Get the object information */
+				res = dir_next(dj, 0);		/* Increment index for next */
+				if (res == FR_NO_FILE) {
+					dj->sect = 0;
+					res = FR_OK;
+				}
+			}
+			FREE_BUF();
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj->fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+#if _FS_MINIMIZE == 0
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get File Status                                                       */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_stat (
+	const TCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file path */
+	FILINFO *fno		/* Pointer to file information to return */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);	/* Follow the file path */
+		if (res == FR_OK) {				/* Follow completed */
+			if (dj.dir)		/* Found an object */
+				get_fileinfo(&dj, fno);
+			else			/* It is root dir */
+				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		}
+		FREE_BUF();
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get Number of Free Clusters                                           */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_getfree (
+	const TCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the logical drive number (root dir) */
+	DWORD *nclst,		/* Pointer to the variable to return number of free clusters */
+	FATFS **fatfs		/* Pointer to pointer to corresponding file system object to return */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	FATFS *fs;
+	DWORD n, clst, sect, stat;
+	UINT i;
+	BYTE fat, *p;
+
+
+	/* Get drive number */
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, fatfs, 0);
+	fs = *fatfs;
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		/* If free_clust is valid, return it without full cluster scan */
+		if (fs->free_clust <= fs->n_fatent - 2) {
+			*nclst = fs->free_clust;
+		} else {
+			/* Get number of free clusters */
+			fat = fs->fs_type;
+			n = 0;
+			if (fat == FS_FAT12) {
+				clst = 2;
+				do {
+					stat = get_fat(fs, clst);
+					if (stat == 0xFFFFFFFF) { res = FR_DISK_ERR; break; }
+					if (stat == 1) { res = FR_INT_ERR; break; }
+					if (stat == 0) n++;
+				} while (++clst < fs->n_fatent);
+			} else {
+				clst = fs->n_fatent;
+				sect = fs->fatbase;
+				i = 0; p = 0;
+				do {
+					if (!i) {
+						res = move_window(fs, sect++);
+						if (res != FR_OK) break;
+						p = fs->win;
+						i = SS(fs);
+					}
+					if (fat == FS_FAT16) {
+						if (LD_WORD(p) == 0) n++;
+						p += 2; i -= 2;
+					} else {
+						if ((LD_DWORD(p) & 0x0FFFFFFF) == 0) n++;
+						p += 4; i -= 4;
+					}
+				} while (--clst);
+			}
+			fs->free_clust = n;
+			if (fat == FS_FAT32) fs->fsi_flag = 1;
+			*nclst = n;
+		}
+	}
+	LEAVE_FF(fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Truncate File                                                         */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_truncate (
+	FIL *fp		/* Pointer to the file object */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD ncl;
+
+
+	if (!fp) return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
+
+	res = validate(fp);						/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR) {			/* Check abort flag */
+			res = FR_INT_ERR;
+		} else {
+			if (!(fp->flag & FA_WRITE))		/* Check access mode */
+				res = FR_DENIED;
+		}
+	}
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		if (fp->fsize > fp->fptr) {
+			fp->fsize = fp->fptr;	/* Set file size to current R/W point */
+			fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN;
+			if (fp->fptr == 0) {	/* When set file size to zero, remove entire cluster chain */
+				res = remove_chain(fp->fs, fp->sclust);
+				fp->sclust = 0;
+			} else {				/* When truncate a part of the file, remove remaining clusters */
+				ncl = get_fat(fp->fs, fp->clust);
+				res = FR_OK;
+				if (ncl == 0xFFFFFFFF) res = FR_DISK_ERR;
+				if (ncl == 1) res = FR_INT_ERR;
+				if (res == FR_OK && ncl < fp->fs->n_fatent) {
+					res = put_fat(fp->fs, fp->clust, 0x0FFFFFFF);
+					if (res == FR_OK) res = remove_chain(fp->fs, ncl);
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		if (res != FR_OK) fp->flag |= FA__ERROR;
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Delete a File or Directory                                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_unlink (
+	const TCHAR *path		/* Pointer to the file or directory path */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj, sdj;
+	BYTE *dir;
+	DWORD dclst;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);		/* Follow the file path */
+		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
+			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;			/* Cannot remove dot entry */
+#if _FS_LOCK
+		if (res == FR_OK) res = chk_lock(&dj, 2);	/* Cannot remove open file */
+#endif
+		if (res == FR_OK) {					/* The object is accessible */
+			dir = dj.dir;
+			if (!dir) {
+				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;		/* Cannot remove the start directory */
+			} else {
+				if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_RDO)
+					res = FR_DENIED;		/* Cannot remove R/O object */
+			}
+			dclst = ld_clust(dj.fs, dir);
+			if (res == FR_OK && (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)) {	/* Is it a sub-dir? */
+				if (dclst < 2) {
+					res = FR_INT_ERR;
+				} else {
+					mem_cpy(&sdj, &dj, sizeof (DIR));	/* Check if the sub-dir is empty or not */
+					sdj.sclust = dclst;
+					res = dir_sdi(&sdj, 2);		/* Exclude dot entries */
+					if (res == FR_OK) {
+						res = dir_read(&sdj);
+						if (res == FR_OK		/* Not empty dir */
+#if _FS_RPATH
+						|| dclst == dj.fs->cdir	/* Current dir */
+#endif
+						) res = FR_DENIED;
+						if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_OK;	/* Empty */
+					}
+				}
+			}
+			if (res == FR_OK) {
+				res = dir_remove(&dj);		/* Remove the directory entry */
+				if (res == FR_OK) {
+					if (dclst)				/* Remove the cluster chain if exist */
+						res = remove_chain(dj.fs, dclst);
+					if (res == FR_OK) res = sync(dj.fs);
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		FREE_BUF();
+	}
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Create a Directory                                                    */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_mkdir (
+	const TCHAR *path		/* Pointer to the directory path */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	BYTE *dir, n;
+	DWORD dsc, dcl, pcl, tim = get_fattime();
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);			/* Follow the file path */
+		if (res == FR_OK) res = FR_EXIST;		/* Any object with same name is already existing */
+		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_NO_FILE && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
+			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) {				/* Can create a new directory */
+			dcl = create_chain(dj.fs, 0);		/* Allocate a cluster for the new directory table */
+			res = FR_OK;
+			if (dcl == 0) res = FR_DENIED;		/* No space to allocate a new cluster */
+			if (dcl == 1) res = FR_INT_ERR;
+			if (dcl == 0xFFFFFFFF) res = FR_DISK_ERR;
+			if (res == FR_OK)					/* Flush FAT */
+				res = move_window(dj.fs, 0);
+			if (res == FR_OK) {					/* Initialize the new directory table */
+				dsc = clust2sect(dj.fs, dcl);
+				dir = dj.fs->win;
+				mem_set(dir, 0, SS(dj.fs));
+				mem_set(dir+DIR_Name, ' ', 8+3);	/* Create "." entry */
+				dir[DIR_Name] = '.';
+				dir[DIR_Attr] = AM_DIR;
+				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim);
+				st_clust(dir, dcl);
+				mem_cpy(dir+SZ_DIR, dir, SZ_DIR); 	/* Create ".." entry */
+				dir[33] = '.'; pcl = dj.sclust;
+				if (dj.fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && pcl == dj.fs->dirbase)
+					pcl = 0;
+				st_clust(dir+SZ_DIR, pcl);
+				for (n = dj.fs->csize; n; n--) {	/* Write dot entries and clear following sectors */
+					dj.fs->winsect = dsc++;
+					dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+					res = move_window(dj.fs, 0);
+					if (res != FR_OK) break;
+					mem_set(dir, 0, SS(dj.fs));
+				}
+			}
+			if (res == FR_OK) res = dir_register(&dj);	/* Register the object to the directoy */
+			if (res != FR_OK) {
+				remove_chain(dj.fs, dcl);			/* Could not register, remove cluster chain */
+			} else {
+				dir = dj.dir;
+				dir[DIR_Attr] = AM_DIR;				/* Attribute */
+				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim);		/* Created time */
+				st_clust(dir, dcl);					/* Table start cluster */
+				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+				res = sync(dj.fs);
+			}
+		}
+		FREE_BUF();
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Change Attribute                                                      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_chmod (
+	const TCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file path */
+	BYTE value,			/* Attribute bits */
+	BYTE mask			/* Attribute mask to change */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	BYTE *dir;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);		/* Follow the file path */
+		FREE_BUF();
+		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
+			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			dir = dj.dir;
+			if (!dir) {						/* Is it a root directory? */
+				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			} else {						/* File or sub directory */
+				mask &= AM_RDO|AM_HID|AM_SYS|AM_ARC;	/* Valid attribute mask */
+				dir[DIR_Attr] = (value & mask) | (dir[DIR_Attr] & (BYTE)~mask);	/* Apply attribute change */
+				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+				res = sync(dj.fs);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Change Timestamp                                                      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_utime (
+	const TCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file/directory name */
+	const FILINFO *fno	/* Pointer to the time stamp to be set */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	BYTE *dir;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);	/* Follow the file path */
+		FREE_BUF();
+		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
+			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			dir = dj.dir;
+			if (!dir) {					/* Root directory */
+				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			} else {					/* File or sub-directory */
+				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, fno->ftime);
+				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtDate, fno->fdate);
+				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+				res = sync(dj.fs);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Rename File/Directory                                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_rename (
+	const TCHAR *path_old,	/* Pointer to the old name */
+	const TCHAR *path_new	/* Pointer to the new name */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR djo, djn;
+	BYTE buf[21], *dir;
+	DWORD dw;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path_old, &djo.fs, 1);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		djn.fs = djo.fs;
+		INIT_BUF(djo);
+		res = follow_path(&djo, path_old);		/* Check old object */
+		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (djo.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
+			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+#if _FS_LOCK
+		if (res == FR_OK) res = chk_lock(&djo, 2);
+#endif
+		if (res == FR_OK) {						/* Old object is found */
+			if (!djo.dir) {						/* Is root dir? */
+				res = FR_NO_FILE;
+			} else {
+				mem_cpy(buf, djo.dir+DIR_Attr, 21);		/* Save the object information except for name */
+				mem_cpy(&djn, &djo, sizeof (DIR));		/* Check new object */
+				res = follow_path(&djn, path_new);
+				if (res == FR_OK) res = FR_EXIST;		/* The new object name is already existing */
+				if (res == FR_NO_FILE) { 				/* Is it a valid path and no name collision? */
+/* Start critical section that an interruption or error can cause cross-link */
+					res = dir_register(&djn);			/* Register the new entry */
+					if (res == FR_OK) {
+						dir = djn.dir;					/* Copy object information except for name */
+						mem_cpy(dir+13, buf+2, 19);
+						dir[DIR_Attr] = buf[0] | AM_ARC;
+						djo.fs->wflag = 1;
+						if (djo.sclust != djn.sclust && (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)) {		/* Update .. entry in the directory if needed */
+							dw = clust2sect(djo.fs, ld_clust(djo.fs, dir));
+							if (!dw) {
+								res = FR_INT_ERR;
+							} else {
+								res = move_window(djo.fs, dw);
+								dir = djo.fs->win+SZ_DIR;	/* .. entry */
+								if (res == FR_OK && dir[1] == '.') {
+									dw = (djo.fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && djn.sclust == djo.fs->dirbase) ? 0 : djn.sclust;
+									st_clust(dir, dw);
+									djo.fs->wflag = 1;
+								}
+							}
+						}
+						if (res == FR_OK) {
+							res = dir_remove(&djo);		/* Remove old entry */
+							if (res == FR_OK)
+								res = sync(djo.fs);
+						}
+					}
+/* End critical section */
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		FREE_BUF();
+	}
+	LEAVE_FF(djo.fs, res);
+}
+
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE == 0 */
+#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1 */
+#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2 */
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Forward data to the stream directly (available on only tiny cfg)      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _USE_FORWARD && _FS_TINY
+
+FRESULT f_forward (
+	FIL *fp, 						/* Pointer to the file object */
+	UINT (*func)(const BYTE*,UINT),	/* Pointer to the streaming function */
+	UINT btr,						/* Number of bytes to forward */
+	UINT *bf						/* Pointer to number of bytes forwarded */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD remain, clst, sect;
+	UINT rcnt;
+	BYTE csect;
+
+
+	*bf = 0;	/* Clear transfer byte counter */
+
+	if (!fp) return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
+
+	res = validate(fp);								/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)						/* Check error flag */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+	if (!(fp->flag & FA_READ))						/* Check access mode */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
+
+	remain = fp->fsize - fp->fptr;
+	if (btr > remain) btr = (UINT)remain;			/* Truncate btr by remaining bytes */
+
+	for ( ;  btr && (*func)(0, 0);					/* Repeat until all data transferred or stream becomes busy */
+		fp->fptr += rcnt, *bf += rcnt, btr -= rcnt) {
+		csect = (BYTE)(fp->fptr / SS(fp->fs) & (fp->fs->csize - 1));	/* Sector offset in the cluster */
+		if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) {			/* On the sector boundary? */
+			if (!csect) {							/* On the cluster boundary? */
+				clst = (fp->fptr == 0) ?			/* On the top of the file? */
+					fp->sclust : get_fat(fp->fs, fp->clust);
+				if (clst <= 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->clust = clst;					/* Update current cluster */
+			}
+		}
+		sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->clust);		/* Get current data sector */
+		if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+		sect += csect;
+		if (move_window(fp->fs, sect))				/* Move sector window */
+			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+		fp->dsect = sect;
+		rcnt = SS(fp->fs) - (WORD)(fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs));	/* Forward data from sector window */
+		if (rcnt > btr) rcnt = btr;
+		rcnt = (*func)(&fp->fs->win[(WORD)fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt);
+		if (!rcnt) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK);
+}
+#endif /* _USE_FORWARD */
+
+
+
+#if _USE_MKFS && !_FS_READONLY
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Create File System on the Drive                                       */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#define N_ROOTDIR	512		/* Number of root dir entries for FAT12/16 */
+#define N_FATS		1		/* Number of FAT copies (1 or 2) */
+
+
+FRESULT f_mkfs (
+	BYTE drv,		/* Logical drive number */
+	BYTE sfd,		/* Partitioning rule 0:FDISK, 1:SFD */
+	UINT au			/* Allocation unit size [bytes] */
+)
+{
+	static const WORD vst[] = { 1024,   512,  256,  128,   64,    32,   16,    8,    4,    2,   0};
+	static const WORD cst[] = {32768, 16384, 8192, 4096, 2048, 16384, 8192, 4096, 2048, 1024, 512};
+	BYTE fmt, md, sys, *tbl, pdrv, part;
+	DWORD n_clst, vs, n, wsect;
+	UINT i;
+	DWORD b_vol, b_fat, b_dir, b_data;	/* LBA */
+	DWORD n_vol, n_rsv, n_fat, n_dir;	/* Size */
+	FATFS *fs;
+	DSTATUS stat;
+
+
+	/* Check mounted drive and clear work area */
+	if (drv >= _VOLUMES) return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
+	if (sfd > 1) return FR_INVALID_PARAMETER;
+	if (au & (au - 1)) return FR_INVALID_PARAMETER;
+	fs = FatFs[drv];
+	if (!fs) return FR_NOT_ENABLED;
+	fs->fs_type = 0;
+	pdrv = LD2PD(drv);	/* Physical drive */
+	part = LD2PT(drv);	/* Partition (0:auto detect, 1-4:get from partition table)*/
+
+	/* Get disk statics */
+	stat = disk_initialize(pdrv);
+	if (stat & STA_NOINIT) return FR_NOT_READY;
+	if (stat & STA_PROTECT) return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
+#if _MAX_SS != 512					/* Get disk sector size */
+	if (disk_ioctl(pdrv, GET_SECTOR_SIZE, &SS(fs)) != RES_OK || SS(fs) > _MAX_SS)
+		return FR_DISK_ERR;
+#endif
+	if (_MULTI_PARTITION && part) {
+		/* Get partition information from partition table in the MBR */
+		if (disk_read(pdrv, fs->win, 0, 1) != RES_OK) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+		if (LD_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA) != 0xAA55) return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;
+		tbl = &fs->win[MBR_Table + (part - 1) * SZ_PTE];
+		if (!tbl[4]) return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;	/* No partition? */
+		b_vol = LD_DWORD(tbl+8);	/* Volume start sector */
+		n_vol = LD_DWORD(tbl+12);	/* Volume size */
+	} else {
+		/* Create a partition in this function */
+		if (disk_ioctl(pdrv, GET_SECTOR_COUNT, &n_vol) != RES_OK || n_vol < 128)
+			return FR_DISK_ERR;
+		b_vol = (sfd) ? 0 : 63;		/* Volume start sector */
+		n_vol -= b_vol;				/* Volume size */
+	}
+
+	if (!au) {				/* AU auto selection */
+		vs = n_vol / (2000 / (SS(fs) / 512));
+		for (i = 0; vs < vst[i]; i++) ;
+		au = cst[i];
+	}
+	au /= SS(fs);		/* Number of sectors per cluster */
+	if (au == 0) au = 1;
+	if (au > 128) au = 128;
+
+	/* Pre-compute number of clusters and FAT sub-type */
+	n_clst = n_vol / au;
+	fmt = FS_FAT12;
+	if (n_clst >= MIN_FAT16) fmt = FS_FAT16;
+	if (n_clst >= MIN_FAT32) fmt = FS_FAT32;
+
+	/* Determine offset and size of FAT structure */
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
+		n_fat = ((n_clst * 4) + 8 + SS(fs) - 1) / SS(fs);
+		n_rsv = 32;
+		n_dir = 0;
+	} else {
+		n_fat = (fmt == FS_FAT12) ? (n_clst * 3 + 1) / 2 + 3 : (n_clst * 2) + 4;
+		n_fat = (n_fat + SS(fs) - 1) / SS(fs);
+		n_rsv = 1;
+		n_dir = (DWORD)N_ROOTDIR * SZ_DIR / SS(fs);
+	}
+	b_fat = b_vol + n_rsv;				/* FAT area start sector */
+	b_dir = b_fat + n_fat * N_FATS;		/* Directory area start sector */
+	b_data = b_dir + n_dir;				/* Data area start sector */
+	if (n_vol < b_data + au - b_vol) return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;	/* Too small volume */
+
+	/* Align data start sector to erase block boundary (for flash memory media) */
+	if (disk_ioctl(pdrv, GET_BLOCK_SIZE, &n) != RES_OK || !n || n > 32768) n = 1;
+	n = (b_data + n - 1) & ~(n - 1);	/* Next nearest erase block from current data start */
+	n = (n - b_data) / N_FATS;
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {		/* FAT32: Move FAT offset */
+		n_rsv += n;
+		b_fat += n;
+	} else {					/* FAT12/16: Expand FAT size */
+		n_fat += n;
+	}
+
+	/* Determine number of clusters and final check of validity of the FAT sub-type */
+	n_clst = (n_vol - n_rsv - n_fat * N_FATS - n_dir) / au;
+	if (   (fmt == FS_FAT16 && n_clst < MIN_FAT16)
+		|| (fmt == FS_FAT32 && n_clst < MIN_FAT32))
+		return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;
+
+	switch (fmt) {	/* Determine system ID for partition table */
+	case FS_FAT12:	sys = 0x01; break;
+	case FS_FAT16:	sys = (n_vol < 0x10000) ? 0x04 : 0x06; break;
+	default: 		sys = 0x0C;
+	}
+
+	if (_MULTI_PARTITION && part) {
+		/* Update system ID in the partition table */
+		tbl = &fs->win[MBR_Table + (part - 1) * SZ_PTE];
+		tbl[4] = sys;
+		if (disk_write(pdrv, fs->win, 0, 1) != RES_OK) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+		md = 0xF8;
+	} else {
+		if (sfd) {	/* No partition table (SFD) */
+			md = 0xF0;
+		} else {	/* Create partition table (FDISK) */
+			mem_set(fs->win, 0, SS(fs));
+			tbl = fs->win+MBR_Table;	/* Create partition table for single partition in the drive */
+			tbl[1] = 1;						/* Partition start head */
+			tbl[2] = 1;						/* Partition start sector */
+			tbl[3] = 0;						/* Partition start cylinder */
+			tbl[4] = sys;					/* System type */
+			tbl[5] = 254;					/* Partition end head */
+			n = (b_vol + n_vol) / 63 / 255;
+			tbl[6] = (BYTE)((n >> 2) | 63);	/* Partition end sector */
+			tbl[7] = (BYTE)n;				/* End cylinder */
+			ST_DWORD(tbl+8, 63);			/* Partition start in LBA */
+			ST_DWORD(tbl+12, n_vol);		/* Partition size in LBA */
+			ST_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);	/* MBR signature */
+			if (disk_write(pdrv, fs->win, 0, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Write it to the MBR sector */
+				return FR_DISK_ERR;
+			md = 0xF8;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Create BPB in the VBR */
+	tbl = fs->win;							/* Clear sector */
+	mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs));
+	mem_cpy(tbl, "\xEB\xFE\x90" "MSDOS5.0", 11);/* Boot jump code, OEM name */
+	i = SS(fs);								/* Sector size */
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_BytsPerSec, i);
+	tbl[BPB_SecPerClus] = (BYTE)au;			/* Sectors per cluster */
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_RsvdSecCnt, n_rsv);		/* Reserved sectors */
+	tbl[BPB_NumFATs] = N_FATS;				/* Number of FATs */
+	i = (fmt == FS_FAT32) ? 0 : N_ROOTDIR;	/* Number of rootdir entries */
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_RootEntCnt, i);
+	if (n_vol < 0x10000) {					/* Number of total sectors */
+		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_TotSec16, n_vol);
+	} else {
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_TotSec32, n_vol);
+	}
+	tbl[BPB_Media] = md;					/* Media descriptor */
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_SecPerTrk, 63);			/* Number of sectors per track */
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_NumHeads, 255);			/* Number of heads */
+	ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_HiddSec, b_vol);		/* Hidden sectors */
+	n = get_fattime();						/* Use current time as VSN */
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+BS_VolID32, n);		/* VSN */
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_FATSz32, n_fat);	/* Number of sectors per FAT */
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_RootClus, 2);		/* Root directory start cluster (2) */
+		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_FSInfo, 1);			/* FSInfo record offset (VBR+1) */
+		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_BkBootSec, 6);		/* Backup boot record offset (VBR+6) */
+		tbl[BS_DrvNum32] = 0x80;			/* Drive number */
+		tbl[BS_BootSig32] = 0x29;			/* Extended boot signature */
+		mem_cpy(tbl+BS_VolLab32, "NO NAME    " "FAT32   ", 19);	/* Volume label, FAT signature */
+	} else {
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+BS_VolID, n);			/* VSN */
+		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_FATSz16, n_fat);	/* Number of sectors per FAT */
+		tbl[BS_DrvNum] = 0x80;				/* Drive number */
+		tbl[BS_BootSig] = 0x29;				/* Extended boot signature */
+		mem_cpy(tbl+BS_VolLab, "NO NAME    " "FAT     ", 19);	/* Volume label, FAT signature */
+	}
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);			/* Signature (Offset is fixed here regardless of sector size) */
+	if (disk_write(pdrv, tbl, b_vol, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Write it to the VBR sector */
+		return FR_DISK_ERR;
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32)							/* Write backup VBR if needed (VBR+6) */
+		disk_write(pdrv, tbl, b_vol + 6, 1);
+
+	/* Initialize FAT area */
+	wsect = b_fat;
+	for (i = 0; i < N_FATS; i++) {		/* Initialize each FAT copy */
+		mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs));			/* 1st sector of the FAT  */
+		n = md;								/* Media descriptor byte */
+		if (fmt != FS_FAT32) {
+			n |= (fmt == FS_FAT12) ? 0x00FFFF00 : 0xFFFFFF00;
+			ST_DWORD(tbl+0, n);				/* Reserve cluster #0-1 (FAT12/16) */
+		} else {
+			n |= 0xFFFFFF00;
+			ST_DWORD(tbl+0, n);				/* Reserve cluster #0-1 (FAT32) */
+			ST_DWORD(tbl+4, 0xFFFFFFFF);
+			ST_DWORD(tbl+8, 0x0FFFFFFF);	/* Reserve cluster #2 for root dir */
+		}
+		if (disk_write(pdrv, tbl, wsect++, 1) != RES_OK)
+			return FR_DISK_ERR;
+		mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs));			/* Fill following FAT entries with zero */
+		for (n = 1; n < n_fat; n++) {		/* This loop may take a time on FAT32 volume due to many single sector writes */
+			if (disk_write(pdrv, tbl, wsect++, 1) != RES_OK)
+				return FR_DISK_ERR;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Initialize root directory */
+	i = (fmt == FS_FAT32) ? au : n_dir;
+	do {
+		if (disk_write(pdrv, tbl, wsect++, 1) != RES_OK)
+			return FR_DISK_ERR;
+	} while (--i);
+
+#if _USE_ERASE	/* Erase data area if needed */
+	{
+		DWORD eb[2];
+
+		eb[0] = wsect; eb[1] = wsect + (n_clst - ((fmt == FS_FAT32) ? 1 : 0)) * au - 1;
+		disk_ioctl(pdrv, CTRL_ERASE_SECTOR, eb);
+	}
+#endif
+
+	/* Create FSInfo if needed */
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_LeadSig, 0x41615252);
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_StrucSig, 0x61417272);
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_Free_Count, n_clst - 1);	/* Number of free clusters */
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_Nxt_Free, 2);				/* Last allocated cluster# */
+		ST_WORD(tbl+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);
+		disk_write(pdrv, tbl, b_vol + 1, 1);	/* Write original (VBR+1) */
+		disk_write(pdrv, tbl, b_vol + 7, 1);	/* Write backup (VBR+7) */
+	}
+
+	return (disk_ioctl(pdrv, CTRL_SYNC, 0) == RES_OK) ? FR_OK : FR_DISK_ERR;
+}
+
+
+#if _MULTI_PARTITION == 2
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Divide Physical Drive                                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_fdisk (
+	BYTE pdrv,			/* Physical drive number */
+	const DWORD szt[],	/* Pointer to the size table for each partitions */
+	void* work			/* Pointer to the working buffer */
+)
+{
+	UINT i, n, sz_cyl, tot_cyl, b_cyl, e_cyl, p_cyl;
+	BYTE s_hd, e_hd, *p, *buf = (BYTE*)work;
+	DSTATUS stat;
+	DWORD sz_disk, sz_part, s_part;
+
+
+	stat = disk_initialize(pdrv);
+	if (stat & STA_NOINIT) return FR_NOT_READY;
+	if (stat & STA_PROTECT) return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
+	if (disk_ioctl(pdrv, GET_SECTOR_COUNT, &sz_disk)) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+
+	/* Determine CHS in the table regardless of the drive geometry */
+	for (n = 16; n < 256 && sz_disk / n / 63 > 1024; n *= 2) ;
+	if (n == 256) n--;
+	e_hd = n - 1;
+	sz_cyl = 63 * n;
+	tot_cyl = sz_disk / sz_cyl;
+
+	/* Create partition table */
+	mem_set(buf, 0, _MAX_SS);
+	p = buf + MBR_Table; b_cyl = 0;
+	for (i = 0; i < 4; i++, p += SZ_PTE) {
+		p_cyl = (szt[i] <= 100) ? (DWORD)tot_cyl * szt[i] / 100 : szt[i] / sz_cyl;
+		if (!p_cyl) continue;
+		s_part = (DWORD)sz_cyl * b_cyl;
+		sz_part = (DWORD)sz_cyl * p_cyl;
+		if (i == 0) {	/* Exclude first track of cylinder 0 */
+			s_hd = 1;
+			s_part += 63; sz_part -= 63;
+		} else {
+			s_hd = 0;
+		}
+		e_cyl = b_cyl + p_cyl - 1;
+		if (e_cyl >= tot_cyl) return FR_INVALID_PARAMETER;
+
+		/* Set partition table */
+		p[1] = s_hd;						/* Start head */
+		p[2] = (BYTE)((b_cyl >> 2) + 1);	/* Start sector */
+		p[3] = (BYTE)b_cyl;					/* Start cylinder */
+		p[4] = 0x06;						/* System type (temporary setting) */
+		p[5] = e_hd;						/* End head */
+		p[6] = (BYTE)((e_cyl >> 2) + 63);	/* End sector */
+		p[7] = (BYTE)e_cyl;					/* End cylinder */
+		ST_DWORD(p + 8, s_part);			/* Start sector in LBA */
+		ST_DWORD(p + 12, sz_part);			/* Partition size */
+
+		/* Next partition */
+		b_cyl += p_cyl;
+	}
+	ST_WORD(p, 0xAA55);
+
+	/* Write it to the MBR */
+	return (disk_write(pdrv, buf, 0, 1) || disk_ioctl(pdrv, CTRL_SYNC, 0)) ? FR_DISK_ERR : FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+#endif /* _MULTI_PARTITION == 2 */
+#endif /* _USE_MKFS && !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+#if _USE_STRFUNC
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get a string from the file                                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+TCHAR* f_gets (
+	TCHAR* buff,	/* Pointer to the string buffer to read */
+	int len,		/* Size of string buffer (characters) */
+	FIL* fil		/* Pointer to the file object */
+)
+{
+	int n = 0;
+	TCHAR c, *p = buff;
+	BYTE s[2];
+	UINT rc;
+
+
+	while (n < len - 1) {			/* Read bytes until buffer gets filled */
+		f_read(fil, s, 1, &rc);
+		if (rc != 1) break;			/* Break on EOF or error */
+		c = s[0];
+#if _LFN_UNICODE					/* Read a character in UTF-8 encoding */
+		if (c >= 0x80) {
+			if (c < 0xC0) continue;	/* Skip stray trailer */
+			if (c < 0xE0) {			/* Two-byte sequence */
+				f_read(fil, s, 1, &rc);
+				if (rc != 1) break;
+				c = ((c & 0x1F) << 6) | (s[0] & 0x3F);
+				if (c < 0x80) c = '?';
+			} else {
+				if (c < 0xF0) {		/* Three-byte sequence */
+					f_read(fil, s, 2, &rc);
+					if (rc != 2) break;
+					c = (c << 12) | ((s[0] & 0x3F) << 6) | (s[1] & 0x3F);
+					if (c < 0x800) c = '?';
+				} else {			/* Reject four-byte sequence */
+					c = '?';
+				}
+			}
+		}
+#endif
+#if _USE_STRFUNC >= 2
+		if (c == '\r') continue;	/* Strip '\r' */
+#endif
+		*p++ = c;
+		n++;
+		if (c == '\n') break;		/* Break on EOL */
+	}
+	*p = 0;
+	return n ? buff : 0;			/* When no data read (eof or error), return with error. */
+}
+
+
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+#include <stdarg.h>
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Put a character to the file                                           */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+int f_putc (
+	TCHAR c,	/* A character to be output */
+	FIL* fil	/* Pointer to the file object */
+)
+{
+	UINT bw, btw;
+	BYTE s[3];
+
+
+#if _USE_STRFUNC >= 2
+	if (c == '\n') f_putc ('\r', fil);	/* LF -> CRLF conversion */
+#endif
+
+#if _LFN_UNICODE	/* Write the character in UTF-8 encoding */
+	if (c < 0x80) {			/* 7-bit */
+		s[0] = (BYTE)c;
+		btw = 1;
+	} else {
+		if (c < 0x800) {	/* 11-bit */
+			s[0] = (BYTE)(0xC0 | (c >> 6));
+			s[1] = (BYTE)(0x80 | (c & 0x3F));
+			btw = 2;
+		} else {			/* 16-bit */
+			s[0] = (BYTE)(0xE0 | (c >> 12));
+			s[1] = (BYTE)(0x80 | ((c >> 6) & 0x3F));
+			s[2] = (BYTE)(0x80 | (c & 0x3F));
+			btw = 3;
+		}
+	}
+#else				/* Write the character without conversion */
+	s[0] = (BYTE)c;
+	btw = 1;
+#endif
+	f_write(fil, s, btw, &bw);		/* Write the char to the file */
+	return (bw == btw) ? 1 : EOF;	/* Return the result */
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Put a string to the file                                              */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+int f_puts (
+	const TCHAR* str,	/* Pointer to the string to be output */
+	FIL* fil			/* Pointer to the file object */
+)
+{
+	int n;
+
+
+	for (n = 0; *str; str++, n++) {
+		if (f_putc(*str, fil) == EOF) return EOF;
+	}
+	return n;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Put a formatted string to the file                                    */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+int f_printf (
+	FIL* fil,			/* Pointer to the file object */
+	const TCHAR* str,	/* Pointer to the format string */
+	...					/* Optional arguments... */
+)
+{
+	va_list arp;
+	BYTE f, r;
+	UINT i, j, w;
+	ULONG v;
+	TCHAR c, d, s[16], *p;
+	int res, chc, cc;
+
+
+	va_start(arp, str);
+
+	for (cc = res = 0; cc != EOF; res += cc) {
+		c = *str++;
+		if (c == 0) break;			/* End of string */
+		if (c != '%') {				/* Non escape character */
+			cc = f_putc(c, fil);
+			if (cc != EOF) cc = 1;
+			continue;
+		}
+		w = f = 0;
+		c = *str++;
+		if (c == '0') {				/* Flag: '0' padding */
+			f = 1; c = *str++;
+		} else {
+			if (c == '-') {			/* Flag: left justified */
+				f = 2; c = *str++;
+			}
+		}
+		while (IsDigit(c)) {		/* Precision */
+			w = w * 10 + c - '0';
+			c = *str++;
+		}
+		if (c == 'l' || c == 'L') {	/* Prefix: Size is long int */
+			f |= 4; c = *str++;
+		}
+		if (!c) break;
+		d = c;
+		if (IsLower(d)) d -= 0x20;
+		switch (d) {				/* Type is... */
+		case 'S' :					/* String */
+			p = va_arg(arp, TCHAR*);
+			for (j = 0; p[j]; j++) ;
+			chc = 0;
+			if (!(f & 2)) {
+				while (j++ < w) chc += (cc = f_putc(' ', fil));
+			}
+			chc += (cc = f_puts(p, fil));
+			while (j++ < w) chc += (cc = f_putc(' ', fil));
+			if (cc != EOF) cc = chc;
+			continue;
+		case 'C' :					/* Character */
+			cc = f_putc((TCHAR)va_arg(arp, int), fil); continue;
+		case 'B' :					/* Binary */
+			r = 2; break;
+		case 'O' :					/* Octal */
+			r = 8; break;
+		case 'D' :					/* Signed decimal */
+		case 'U' :					/* Unsigned decimal */
+			r = 10; break;
+		case 'X' :					/* Hexdecimal */
+			r = 16; break;
+		default:					/* Unknown type (pass-through) */
+			cc = f_putc(c, fil); continue;
+		}
+
+		/* Get an argument and put it in numeral */
+		v = (f & 4) ? (ULONG)va_arg(arp, long) : ((d == 'D') ? (ULONG)(long)va_arg(arp, int) : (ULONG)va_arg(arp, unsigned int));
+		if (d == 'D' && (v & 0x80000000)) {
+			v = 0 - v;
+			f |= 8;
+		}
+		i = 0;
+		do {
+			d = (TCHAR)(v % r); v /= r;
+			if (d > 9) d += (c == 'x') ? 0x27 : 0x07;
+			s[i++] = d + '0';
+		} while (v && i < sizeof s / sizeof s[0]);
+		if (f & 8) s[i++] = '-';
+		j = i; d = (f & 1) ? '0' : ' ';
+		res = 0;
+		while (!(f & 2) && j++ < w) res += (cc = f_putc(d, fil));
+		do res += (cc = f_putc(s[--i], fil)); while(i);
+		while (j++ < w) res += (cc = f_putc(' ', fil));
+		if (cc != EOF) cc = res;
+	}
+
+	va_end(arp);
+	return (cc == EOF) ? cc : res;
+}
+
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+#endif /* _USE_STRFUNC */
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ff.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ff.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..627cbaabe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ff.h
@@ -0,0 +1,337 @@
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/  FatFs - FAT file system module include file  R0.09a    (C)ChaN, 2012
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ FatFs module is a generic FAT file system module for small embedded systems.
+/ This is a free software that opened for education, research and commercial
+/ developments under license policy of following terms.
+/
+/  Copyright (C) 2012, ChaN, all right reserved.
+/
+/ * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
+/ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
+/   personal, non-profit or commercial product UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
+/ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
+/
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#ifndef _FATFS
+#define _FATFS	4004	/* Revision ID */
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C" {
+#endif
+
+#include "integer.h"	/* Basic integer types */
+#include "ffconf.h"		/* FatFs configuration options */
+
+#if _FATFS != _FFCONF
+#error Wrong configuration file (ffconf.h).
+#endif
+
+
+
+/* Definitions of volume management */
+
+#if _MULTI_PARTITION		/* Multiple partition configuration */
+typedef struct {
+	BYTE pd;	/* Physical drive number */
+	BYTE pt;	/* Partition: 0:Auto detect, 1-4:Forced partition) */
+} PARTITION;
+extern PARTITION VolToPart[];	/* Volume - Partition resolution table */
+#define LD2PD(vol) (VolToPart[vol].pd)	/* Get physical drive number */
+#define LD2PT(vol) (VolToPart[vol].pt)	/* Get partition index */
+
+#else							/* Single partition configuration */
+#define LD2PD(vol) (BYTE)(vol)	/* Each logical drive is bound to the same physical drive number */
+#define LD2PT(vol) 0			/* Always mounts the 1st partition or in SFD */
+
+#endif
+
+
+
+/* Type of path name strings on FatFs API */
+
+#if _LFN_UNICODE			/* Unicode string */
+#if !_USE_LFN
+#error _LFN_UNICODE must be 0 in non-LFN cfg.
+#endif
+#ifndef _INC_TCHAR
+typedef WCHAR TCHAR;
+#define _T(x) L ## x
+#define _TEXT(x) L ## x
+#endif
+
+#else						/* ANSI/OEM string */
+#ifndef _INC_TCHAR
+typedef char TCHAR;
+#define _T(x) x
+#define _TEXT(x) x
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
+
+
+/* File system object structure (FATFS) */
+
+typedef struct {
+	BYTE	fs_type;		/* FAT sub-type (0:Not mounted) */
+	BYTE	drv;			/* Physical drive number */
+	BYTE	csize;			/* Sectors per cluster (1,2,4...128) */
+	BYTE	n_fats;			/* Number of FAT copies (1,2) */
+	BYTE	wflag;			/* win[] dirty flag (1:must be written back) */
+	BYTE	fsi_flag;		/* fsinfo dirty flag (1:must be written back) */
+	WORD	id;				/* File system mount ID */
+	WORD	n_rootdir;		/* Number of root directory entries (FAT12/16) */
+#if _MAX_SS != 512
+	WORD	ssize;			/* Bytes per sector (512, 1024, 2048 or 4096) */
+#endif
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+	_SYNC_t	sobj;			/* Identifier of sync object */
+#endif
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+	DWORD	last_clust;		/* Last allocated cluster */
+	DWORD	free_clust;		/* Number of free clusters */
+	DWORD	fsi_sector;		/* fsinfo sector (FAT32) */
+#endif
+#if _FS_RPATH
+	DWORD	cdir;			/* Current directory start cluster (0:root) */
+#endif
+	DWORD	n_fatent;		/* Number of FAT entries (= number of clusters + 2) */
+	DWORD	fsize;			/* Sectors per FAT */
+	DWORD	fatbase;		/* FAT start sector */
+	DWORD	dirbase;		/* Root directory start sector (FAT32:Cluster#) */
+	DWORD	database;		/* Data start sector */
+	DWORD	winsect;		/* Current sector appearing in the win[] */
+	BYTE	win[_MAX_SS];	/* Disk access window for Directory, FAT (and Data on tiny cfg) */
+} FATFS;
+
+
+
+/* File object structure (FIL) */
+
+typedef struct {
+	FATFS*	fs;				/* Pointer to the related file system object */
+	WORD	id;				/* File system mount ID of the related file system object */
+	BYTE	flag;			/* File status flags */
+	BYTE	pad1;
+	DWORD	fptr;			/* File read/write pointer (0ed on file open) */
+	DWORD	fsize;			/* File size */
+	DWORD	sclust;			/* File data start cluster (0:no data cluster, always 0 when fsize is 0) */
+	DWORD	clust;			/* Current cluster of fpter */
+	DWORD	dsect;			/* Current data sector of fpter */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+	DWORD	dir_sect;		/* Sector containing the directory entry */
+	BYTE*	dir_ptr;		/* Pointer to the directory entry in the window */
+#endif
+#if _USE_FASTSEEK
+	DWORD*	cltbl;			/* Pointer to the cluster link map table (null on file open) */
+#endif
+#if _FS_LOCK
+	UINT	lockid;			/* File lock ID (index of file semaphore table Files[]) */
+#endif
+#if !_FS_TINY
+	BYTE	buf[_MAX_SS];	/* File data read/write buffer */
+#endif
+} FIL;
+
+
+
+/* Directory object structure (DIR) */
+
+typedef struct {
+	FATFS*	fs;				/* Pointer to the owner file system object */
+	WORD	id;				/* Owner file system mount ID */
+	WORD	index;			/* Current read/write index number */
+	DWORD	sclust;			/* Table start cluster (0:Root dir) */
+	DWORD	clust;			/* Current cluster */
+	DWORD	sect;			/* Current sector */
+	BYTE*	dir;			/* Pointer to the current SFN entry in the win[] */
+	BYTE*	fn;				/* Pointer to the SFN (in/out) {file[8],ext[3],status[1]} */
+#if _USE_LFN
+	WCHAR*	lfn;			/* Pointer to the LFN working buffer */
+	WORD	lfn_idx;		/* Last matched LFN index number (0xFFFF:No LFN) */
+#endif
+} DIR;
+
+
+
+/* File status structure (FILINFO) */
+
+typedef struct {
+	DWORD	fsize;			/* File size */
+	WORD	fdate;			/* Last modified date */
+	WORD	ftime;			/* Last modified time */
+	BYTE	fattrib;		/* Attribute */
+	TCHAR	fname[13];		/* Short file name (8.3 format) */
+#if _USE_LFN
+	TCHAR*	lfname;			/* Pointer to the LFN buffer */
+	UINT 	lfsize;			/* Size of LFN buffer in TCHAR */
+#endif
+} FILINFO;
+
+
+
+/* File function return code (FRESULT) */
+
+typedef enum {
+	FR_OK = 0,				/* (0) Succeeded */
+	FR_DISK_ERR,			/* (1) A hard error occurred in the low level disk I/O layer */
+	FR_INT_ERR,				/* (2) Assertion failed */
+	FR_NOT_READY,			/* (3) The physical drive cannot work */
+	FR_NO_FILE,				/* (4) Could not find the file */
+	FR_NO_PATH,				/* (5) Could not find the path */
+	FR_INVALID_NAME,		/* (6) The path name format is invalid */
+	FR_DENIED,				/* (7) Access denied due to prohibited access or directory full */
+	FR_EXIST,				/* (8) Access denied due to prohibited access */
+	FR_INVALID_OBJECT,		/* (9) The file/directory object is invalid */
+	FR_WRITE_PROTECTED,		/* (10) The physical drive is write protected */
+	FR_INVALID_DRIVE,		/* (11) The logical drive number is invalid */
+	FR_NOT_ENABLED,			/* (12) The volume has no work area */
+	FR_NO_FILESYSTEM,		/* (13) There is no valid FAT volume */
+	FR_MKFS_ABORTED,		/* (14) The f_mkfs() aborted due to any parameter error */
+	FR_TIMEOUT,				/* (15) Could not get a grant to access the volume within defined period */
+	FR_LOCKED,				/* (16) The operation is rejected according to the file sharing policy */
+	FR_NOT_ENOUGH_CORE,		/* (17) LFN working buffer could not be allocated */
+	FR_TOO_MANY_OPEN_FILES,	/* (18) Number of open files > _FS_SHARE */
+	FR_INVALID_PARAMETER	/* (19) Given parameter is invalid */
+} FRESULT;
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FatFs module application interface                           */
+
+FRESULT f_mount (BYTE, FATFS*);						/* Mount/Unmount a logical drive */
+FRESULT f_open (FIL*, const TCHAR*, BYTE);			/* Open or create a file */
+FRESULT f_read (FIL*, void*, UINT, UINT*);			/* Read data from a file */
+FRESULT f_lseek (FIL*, DWORD);						/* Move file pointer of a file object */
+FRESULT f_close (FIL*);								/* Close an open file object */
+FRESULT f_opendir (DIR*, const TCHAR*);				/* Open an existing directory */
+FRESULT f_readdir (DIR*, FILINFO*);					/* Read a directory item */
+FRESULT f_stat (const TCHAR*, FILINFO*);			/* Get file status */
+FRESULT f_write (FIL*, const void*, UINT, UINT*);	/* Write data to a file */
+FRESULT f_getfree (const TCHAR*, DWORD*, FATFS**);	/* Get number of free clusters on the drive */
+FRESULT f_truncate (FIL*);							/* Truncate file */
+FRESULT f_sync (FIL*);								/* Flush cached data of a writing file */
+FRESULT f_unlink (const TCHAR*);					/* Delete an existing file or directory */
+FRESULT	f_mkdir (const TCHAR*);						/* Create a new directory */
+FRESULT f_chmod (const TCHAR*, BYTE, BYTE);			/* Change attribute of the file/dir */
+FRESULT f_utime (const TCHAR*, const FILINFO*);		/* Change times-tamp of the file/dir */
+FRESULT f_rename (const TCHAR*, const TCHAR*);		/* Rename/Move a file or directory */
+FRESULT f_chdrive (BYTE);							/* Change current drive */
+FRESULT f_chdir (const TCHAR*);						/* Change current directory */
+FRESULT f_getcwd (TCHAR*, UINT);					/* Get current directory */
+FRESULT f_forward (FIL*, UINT(*)(const BYTE*,UINT), UINT, UINT*);	/* Forward data to the stream */
+FRESULT f_mkfs (BYTE, BYTE, UINT);					/* Create a file system on the drive */
+FRESULT	f_fdisk (BYTE, const DWORD[], void*);		/* Divide a physical drive into some partitions */
+int f_putc (TCHAR, FIL*);							/* Put a character to the file */
+int f_puts (const TCHAR*, FIL*);					/* Put a string to the file */
+int f_printf (FIL*, const TCHAR*, ...);				/* Put a formatted string to the file */
+TCHAR* f_gets (TCHAR*, int, FIL*);					/* Get a string from the file */
+
+#define f_eof(fp) (((fp)->fptr == (fp)->fsize) ? 1 : 0)
+#define f_error(fp) (((fp)->flag & FA__ERROR) ? 1 : 0)
+#define f_tell(fp) ((fp)->fptr)
+#define f_size(fp) ((fp)->fsize)
+
+#ifndef EOF
+#define EOF (-1)
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Additional user defined functions                            */
+
+/* RTC function */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+DWORD get_fattime (void);
+#endif
+
+/* Unicode support functions */
+#if _USE_LFN						/* Unicode - OEM code conversion */
+WCHAR ff_convert (WCHAR, UINT);		/* OEM-Unicode bidirectional conversion */
+WCHAR ff_wtoupper (WCHAR);			/* Unicode upper-case conversion */
+#if _USE_LFN == 3					/* Memory functions */
+void* ff_memalloc (UINT);			/* Allocate memory block */
+void ff_memfree (void*);			/* Free memory block */
+#endif
+#endif
+
+/* Sync functions */
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+int ff_cre_syncobj (BYTE, _SYNC_t*);/* Create a sync object */
+int ff_req_grant (_SYNC_t);			/* Lock sync object */
+void ff_rel_grant (_SYNC_t);		/* Unlock sync object */
+int ff_del_syncobj (_SYNC_t);		/* Delete a sync object */
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Flags and offset address                                     */
+
+
+/* File access control and file status flags (FIL.flag) */
+
+#define	FA_READ				0x01
+#define	FA_OPEN_EXISTING	0x00
+#define FA__ERROR			0x80
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+#define	FA_WRITE			0x02
+#define	FA_CREATE_NEW		0x04
+#define	FA_CREATE_ALWAYS	0x08
+#define	FA_OPEN_ALWAYS		0x10
+#define FA__WRITTEN			0x20
+#define FA__DIRTY			0x40
+#endif
+
+
+/* FAT sub type (FATFS.fs_type) */
+
+#define FS_FAT12	1
+#define FS_FAT16	2
+#define FS_FAT32	3
+
+
+/* File attribute bits for directory entry */
+
+#define	AM_RDO	0x01	/* Read only */
+#define	AM_HID	0x02	/* Hidden */
+#define	AM_SYS	0x04	/* System */
+#define	AM_VOL	0x08	/* Volume label */
+#define AM_LFN	0x0F	/* LFN entry */
+#define AM_DIR	0x10	/* Directory */
+#define AM_ARC	0x20	/* Archive */
+#define AM_MASK	0x3F	/* Mask of defined bits */
+
+
+/* Fast seek feature */
+#define CREATE_LINKMAP	0xFFFFFFFF
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------*/
+/* Multi-byte word access macros  */
+
+#if _WORD_ACCESS == 1	/* Enable word access to the FAT structure */
+#define	LD_WORD(ptr)		(WORD)(*(WORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr))
+#define	LD_DWORD(ptr)		(DWORD)(*(DWORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr))
+#define	ST_WORD(ptr,val)	*(WORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr)=(WORD)(val)
+#define	ST_DWORD(ptr,val)	*(DWORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr)=(DWORD)(val)
+#else					/* Use byte-by-byte access to the FAT structure */
+#define	LD_WORD(ptr)		(WORD)(((WORD)*((BYTE*)(ptr)+1)<<8)|(WORD)*(BYTE*)(ptr))
+#define	LD_DWORD(ptr)		(DWORD)(((DWORD)*((BYTE*)(ptr)+3)<<24)|((DWORD)*((BYTE*)(ptr)+2)<<16)|((WORD)*((BYTE*)(ptr)+1)<<8)|*(BYTE*)(ptr))
+#define	ST_WORD(ptr,val)	*(BYTE*)(ptr)=(BYTE)(val); *((BYTE*)(ptr)+1)=(BYTE)((WORD)(val)>>8)
+#define	ST_DWORD(ptr,val)	*(BYTE*)(ptr)=(BYTE)(val); *((BYTE*)(ptr)+1)=(BYTE)((WORD)(val)>>8); *((BYTE*)(ptr)+2)=(BYTE)((DWORD)(val)>>16); *((BYTE*)(ptr)+3)=(BYTE)((DWORD)(val)>>24)
+#endif
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+}
+#endif
+
+#endif /* _FATFS */
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..63a4e7823
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h
@@ -0,0 +1,191 @@
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/  FatFs - FAT file system module configuration file  R0.09a (C)ChaN, 2012
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/
+/ CAUTION! Do not forget to make clean the project after any changes to
+/ the configuration options.
+/
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#ifndef _FFCONF
+#define _FFCONF 4004	/* Revision ID */
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ Function and Buffer Configurations
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#define	_FS_TINY	1		/* 0:Normal or 1:Tiny */
+/* When _FS_TINY is set to 1, FatFs uses the sector buffer in the file system
+/  object instead of the sector buffer in the individual file object for file
+/  data transfer. This reduces memory consumption 512 bytes each file object. */
+
+
+#define _FS_READONLY	0	/* 0:Read/Write or 1:Read only */
+/* Setting _FS_READONLY to 1 defines read only configuration. This removes
+/  writing functions, f_write, f_sync, f_unlink, f_mkdir, f_chmod, f_rename,
+/  f_truncate and useless f_getfree. */
+
+
+#define _FS_MINIMIZE	2	/* 0 to 3 */
+/* The _FS_MINIMIZE option defines minimization level to remove some functions.
+/
+/   0: Full function.
+/   1: f_stat, f_getfree, f_unlink, f_mkdir, f_chmod, f_truncate and f_rename
+/      are removed.
+/   2: f_opendir and f_readdir are removed in addition to 1.
+/   3: f_lseek is removed in addition to 2. */
+
+
+#define	_USE_STRFUNC	0	/* 0:Disable or 1-2:Enable */
+/* To enable string functions, set _USE_STRFUNC to 1 or 2. */
+
+
+#define	_USE_MKFS	0		/* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */
+/* To enable f_mkfs function, set _USE_MKFS to 1 and set _FS_READONLY to 0 */
+
+
+#define	_USE_FORWARD	0	/* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */
+/* To enable f_forward function, set _USE_FORWARD to 1 and set _FS_TINY to 1. */
+
+
+#define	_USE_FASTSEEK	0	/* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */
+/* To enable fast seek feature, set _USE_FASTSEEK to 1. */
+
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ Locale and Namespace Configurations
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#define _CODE_PAGE	932
+/* The _CODE_PAGE specifies the OEM code page to be used on the target system.
+/  Incorrect setting of the code page can cause a file open failure.
+/
+/   932  - Japanese Shift-JIS (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
+/   936  - Simplified Chinese GBK (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
+/   949  - Korean (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
+/   950  - Traditional Chinese Big5 (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
+/   1250 - Central Europe (Windows)
+/   1251 - Cyrillic (Windows)
+/   1252 - Latin 1 (Windows)
+/   1253 - Greek (Windows)
+/   1254 - Turkish (Windows)
+/   1255 - Hebrew (Windows)
+/   1256 - Arabic (Windows)
+/   1257 - Baltic (Windows)
+/   1258 - Vietnam (OEM, Windows)
+/   437  - U.S. (OEM)
+/   720  - Arabic (OEM)
+/   737  - Greek (OEM)
+/   775  - Baltic (OEM)
+/   850  - Multilingual Latin 1 (OEM)
+/   858  - Multilingual Latin 1 + Euro (OEM)
+/   852  - Latin 2 (OEM)
+/   855  - Cyrillic (OEM)
+/   866  - Russian (OEM)
+/   857  - Turkish (OEM)
+/   862  - Hebrew (OEM)
+/   874  - Thai (OEM, Windows)
+/	1    - ASCII only (Valid for non LFN cfg.)
+*/
+
+
+#define	_USE_LFN	0		/* 0 to 3 */
+#define	_MAX_LFN	255		/* Maximum LFN length to handle (12 to 255) */
+/* The _USE_LFN option switches the LFN support.
+/
+/   0: Disable LFN feature. _MAX_LFN and _LFN_UNICODE have no effect.
+/   1: Enable LFN with static working buffer on the BSS. Always NOT reentrant.
+/   2: Enable LFN with dynamic working buffer on the STACK.
+/   3: Enable LFN with dynamic working buffer on the HEAP.
+/
+/  The LFN working buffer occupies (_MAX_LFN + 1) * 2 bytes. To enable LFN,
+/  Unicode handling functions ff_convert() and ff_wtoupper() must be added
+/  to the project. When enable to use heap, memory control functions
+/  ff_memalloc() and ff_memfree() must be added to the project. */
+
+
+#define	_LFN_UNICODE	0	/* 0:ANSI/OEM or 1:Unicode */
+/* To switch the character code set on FatFs API to Unicode,
+/  enable LFN feature and set _LFN_UNICODE to 1. */
+
+
+#define _FS_RPATH		0	/* 0 to 2 */
+/* The _FS_RPATH option configures relative path feature.
+/
+/   0: Disable relative path feature and remove related functions.
+/   1: Enable relative path. f_chdrive() and f_chdir() are available.
+/   2: f_getcwd() is available in addition to 1.
+/
+/  Note that output of the f_readdir fnction is affected by this option. */
+
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ Physical Drive Configurations
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#define _VOLUMES	1
+/* Number of volumes (logical drives) to be used. */
+
+
+#define	_MAX_SS		512		/* 512, 1024, 2048 or 4096 */
+/* Maximum sector size to be handled.
+/  Always set 512 for memory card and hard disk but a larger value may be
+/  required for on-board flash memory, floppy disk and optical disk.
+/  When _MAX_SS is larger than 512, it configures FatFs to variable sector size
+/  and GET_SECTOR_SIZE command must be implememted to the disk_ioctl function. */
+
+
+#define	_MULTI_PARTITION	0	/* 0:Single partition, 1/2:Enable multiple partition */
+/* When set to 0, each volume is bound to the same physical drive number and
+/ it can mount only first primaly partition. When it is set to 1, each volume
+/ is tied to the partitions listed in VolToPart[]. */
+
+
+#define	_USE_ERASE	0	/* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */
+/* To enable sector erase feature, set _USE_ERASE to 1. CTRL_ERASE_SECTOR command
+/  should be added to the disk_ioctl functio. */
+
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ System Configurations
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#define _WORD_ACCESS	1	/* 0 or 1 */
+/* Set 0 first and it is always compatible with all platforms. The _WORD_ACCESS
+/  option defines which access method is used to the word data on the FAT volume.
+/
+/   0: Byte-by-byte access.
+/   1: Word access. Do not choose this unless following condition is met.
+/
+/  When the byte order on the memory is big-endian or address miss-aligned word
+/  access results incorrect behavior, the _WORD_ACCESS must be set to 0.
+/  If it is not the case, the value can also be set to 1 to improve the
+/  performance and code size.
+*/
+
+
+/* A header file that defines sync object types on the O/S, such as
+/  windows.h, ucos_ii.h and semphr.h, must be included prior to ff.h. */
+
+#define _FS_REENTRANT	0		/* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */
+#define _FS_TIMEOUT		1000	/* Timeout period in unit of time ticks */
+#define	_SYNC_t			HANDLE	/* O/S dependent type of sync object. e.g. HANDLE, OS_EVENT*, ID and etc.. */
+
+/* The _FS_REENTRANT option switches the reentrancy (thread safe) of the FatFs module.
+/
+/   0: Disable reentrancy. _SYNC_t and _FS_TIMEOUT have no effect.
+/   1: Enable reentrancy. Also user provided synchronization handlers,
+/      ff_req_grant, ff_rel_grant, ff_del_syncobj and ff_cre_syncobj
+/      function must be added to the project. */
+
+
+#define	_FS_LOCK	0	/* 0:Disable or >=1:Enable */
+/* To enable file lock control feature, set _FS_LOCK to 1 or greater.
+   The value defines how many files can be opened simultaneously. */
+
+
+#endif /* _FFCONFIG */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/integer.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/integer.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5408fe6b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/integer.h
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+/*-------------------------------------------*/
+/* Integer type definitions for FatFs module */
+/*-------------------------------------------*/
+
+#ifndef _INTEGER
+#define _INTEGER
+
+#ifdef _WIN32	/* FatFs development platform */
+
+#include <windows.h>
+#include <tchar.h>
+
+#else			/* Embedded platform */
+
+/* These types must be 16-bit, 32-bit or larger integer */
+typedef int				INT;
+typedef unsigned int	UINT;
+
+/* These types must be 8-bit integer */
+typedef char			CHAR;
+typedef unsigned char	UCHAR;
+typedef unsigned char	BYTE;
+
+/* These types must be 16-bit integer */
+typedef short			SHORT;
+typedef unsigned short	USHORT;
+typedef unsigned short	WORD;
+typedef unsigned short	WCHAR;
+
+/* These types must be 32-bit integer */
+typedef long			LONG;
+typedef unsigned long	ULONG;
+typedef unsigned long	DWORD;
+
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/RTC.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/RTC.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a5a0f911d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/RTC.c
@@ -0,0 +1,159 @@
+/*
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+#include "RTC.h"
+
+#if defined(DUMMY_RTC)
+
+/** Current dummy RTC time and date */
+static volatile TimeDate_t DummyRTC_Count;
+
+void RTC_Init(void)
+{
+	DummyRTC_Count.Hour   = 0;
+	DummyRTC_Count.Minute = 0;
+	DummyRTC_Count.Second = 0;
+	DummyRTC_Count.Day    = 1;
+	DummyRTC_Count.Month  = 1;
+	DummyRTC_Count.Year   = 00;
+}
+
+void RTC_Tick500ms(void)
+{
+	static bool HalfSecondElapsed = false;
+
+	HalfSecondElapsed = !HalfSecondElapsed;
+	if (HalfSecondElapsed == false)
+	  return;
+
+	if (++DummyRTC_Count.Second < 60)
+	  return;
+
+	DummyRTC_Count.Second = 0;
+
+	if (++DummyRTC_Count.Minute < 60)
+	  return;
+
+	DummyRTC_Count.Minute = 0;
+
+	if (++DummyRTC_Count.Hour < 24)
+	  return;
+
+	DummyRTC_Count.Hour = 0;
+
+	static const char MonthLength[12] = {31, 28, 31, 30, 31, 30, 31, 31, 30, 31, 30, 31};
+	uint8_t DaysInMonth = MonthLength[DummyRTC_Count.Month - 1];
+
+	/* Check if we need to account for a leap year */
+	if ((DummyRTC_Count.Month == 2) &&
+	    ((!(DummyRTC_Count.Year % 400)) || ((DummyRTC_Count.Year % 100) && !(DummyRTC_Count.Year % 4))))
+	{
+		DaysInMonth++;
+	}
+
+	if (++DummyRTC_Count.Day <= DaysInMonth)
+	  return;
+
+	DummyRTC_Count.Day = 1;
+
+	if (++DummyRTC_Count.Month <= 12)
+	  return;
+
+	DummyRTC_Count.Month = 1;
+	DummyRTC_Count.Year++;
+}
+
+bool RTC_SetTimeDate(const TimeDate_t* NewTimeDate)
+{
+	GlobalInterruptDisable();
+	DummyRTC_Count = *NewTimeDate;
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+bool RTC_GetTimeDate(TimeDate_t* const TimeDate)
+{
+	GlobalInterruptDisable();
+	*TimeDate = DummyRTC_Count;
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+#else
+
+void RTC_Init(void)
+{
+	/* Unused for a real external DS1307 RTC device */
+}
+
+void RTC_Tick500ms(void)
+{
+	/* Unused for a real external DS1307 RTC device */
+}
+
+bool RTC_SetTimeDate(const TimeDate_t* NewTimeDate)
+{
+	DS1307_DateTimeRegs_t NewRegValues;
+	const uint8_t         WriteAddress = 0;
+
+	// Convert new time data to the DS1307's time register layout
+	NewRegValues.Byte1.Fields.TenSec    = (NewTimeDate->Second / 10);
+	NewRegValues.Byte1.Fields.Sec       = (NewTimeDate->Second % 10);
+	NewRegValues.Byte1.Fields.CH        = false;
+	NewRegValues.Byte2.Fields.TenMin    = (NewTimeDate->Minute / 10);
+	NewRegValues.Byte2.Fields.Min       = (NewTimeDate->Minute % 10);
+	NewRegValues.Byte3.Fields.TenHour   = (NewTimeDate->Hour / 10);
+	NewRegValues.Byte3.Fields.Hour      = (NewTimeDate->Hour % 10);
+	NewRegValues.Byte3.Fields.TwelveHourMode = false;
+
+	// Convert new date data to the DS1307's date register layout
+	NewRegValues.Byte4.Fields.DayOfWeek = 0;
+	NewRegValues.Byte5.Fields.TenDay    = (NewTimeDate->Day / 10);
+	NewRegValues.Byte5.Fields.Day       = (NewTimeDate->Day % 10);
+	NewRegValues.Byte6.Fields.TenMonth  = (NewTimeDate->Month / 10);
+	NewRegValues.Byte6.Fields.Month     = (NewTimeDate->Month % 10);
+	NewRegValues.Byte7.Fields.TenYear   = (NewTimeDate->Year / 10);
+	NewRegValues.Byte7.Fields.Year      = (NewTimeDate->Year % 10);
+
+	// Write the new Time and Date into the DS1307
+	if (TWI_WritePacket(DS1307_ADDRESS, 10, &WriteAddress, sizeof(WriteAddress),
+	                   (uint8_t*)&NewRegValues, sizeof(DS1307_DateTimeRegs_t)) != TWI_ERROR_NoError)
+	{
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+bool RTC_GetTimeDate(TimeDate_t* const TimeDate)
+{
+	DS1307_DateTimeRegs_t CurrentRegValues;
+	const uint8_t         ReadAddress = 0;
+
+	// Read in the stored Time and Date from the DS1307
+	if (TWI_ReadPacket(DS1307_ADDRESS, 10, &ReadAddress, sizeof(ReadAddress),
+	                   (uint8_t*)&CurrentRegValues, sizeof(DS1307_DateTimeRegs_t)) != TWI_ERROR_NoError)
+	{
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	// Convert stored time value into decimal
+	TimeDate->Second  = (CurrentRegValues.Byte1.Fields.TenSec  * 10) + CurrentRegValues.Byte1.Fields.Sec;
+	TimeDate->Minute  = (CurrentRegValues.Byte2.Fields.TenMin  * 10) + CurrentRegValues.Byte2.Fields.Min;
+	TimeDate->Hour    = (CurrentRegValues.Byte3.Fields.TenHour * 10) + CurrentRegValues.Byte3.Fields.Hour;
+
+	// Convert stored date value into decimal
+	TimeDate->Day    = (CurrentRegValues.Byte5.Fields.TenDay   * 10) + CurrentRegValues.Byte5.Fields.Day;
+	TimeDate->Month  = (CurrentRegValues.Byte6.Fields.TenMonth * 10) + CurrentRegValues.Byte6.Fields.Month;
+	TimeDate->Year   = (CurrentRegValues.Byte7.Fields.TenYear  * 10) + CurrentRegValues.Byte7.Fields.Year;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/RTC.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/RTC.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ae4fbfe16
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/RTC.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+#ifndef _RTC_H_
+#define _RTC_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t Hour;
+			uint8_t Minute;
+			uint8_t Second;
+			uint8_t Day;
+			uint8_t Month;
+			uint8_t Year;
+		} TimeDate_t;
+
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			union
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					unsigned Sec            : 4;
+					unsigned TenSec         : 3;
+					unsigned CH             : 1;
+				} Fields;
+
+				uint8_t IntVal;
+			} Byte1;
+
+			union
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					unsigned Min            : 4;
+					unsigned TenMin         : 3;
+					unsigned Reserved       : 1;
+				} Fields;
+
+				uint8_t IntVal;
+			} Byte2;
+
+			union
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					unsigned Hour            : 4;
+					unsigned TenHour         : 2;
+					unsigned TwelveHourMode  : 1;
+					unsigned Reserved        : 1;
+				} Fields;
+
+				uint8_t IntVal;
+			} Byte3;
+
+			union
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					unsigned DayOfWeek       : 3;
+					unsigned Reserved        : 5;
+				} Fields;
+
+				uint8_t IntVal;
+			} Byte4;
+
+			union
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					unsigned Day             : 4;
+					unsigned TenDay          : 2;
+					unsigned Reserved        : 2;
+				} Fields;
+
+				uint8_t IntVal;
+			} Byte5;
+
+			union
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					unsigned Month           : 4;
+					unsigned TenMonth        : 1;
+					unsigned Reserved        : 3;
+				} Fields;
+
+				uint8_t IntVal;
+			} Byte6;
+
+			union
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					unsigned Year            : 4;
+					unsigned TenYear         : 4;
+				} Fields;
+
+				uint8_t IntVal;
+			} Byte7;
+		} DS1307_DateTimeRegs_t;
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** TWI address of the DS1307 device on the bus. */
+		#define DS1307_ADDRESS       0xD0
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void RTC_Init(void);
+		void RTC_Tick500ms(void);
+		bool RTC_SetTimeDate(const TimeDate_t* NewTimeDate);
+		bool RTC_GetTimeDate(TimeDate_t* const TimeDate);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/SCSI.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/SCSI.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..315f2e3a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/SCSI.c
@@ -0,0 +1,344 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage
+ *  devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information,
+ *  which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C
+#include "SCSI.h"
+
+/** Structure to hold the SCSI response data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's
+ *  features and capabilities.
+ */
+static const SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData =
+	{
+		.DeviceType          = DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK,
+		.PeripheralQualifier = 0,
+
+		.Removable           = true,
+
+		.Version             = 0,
+
+		.ResponseDataFormat  = 2,
+		.NormACA             = false,
+		.TrmTsk              = false,
+		.AERC                = false,
+
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x1F,
+
+		.SoftReset           = false,
+		.CmdQue              = false,
+		.Linked              = false,
+		.Sync                = false,
+		.WideBus16Bit        = false,
+		.WideBus32Bit        = false,
+		.RelAddr             = false,
+
+		.VendorID            = "LUFA",
+		.ProductID           = "Dataflash Disk",
+		.RevisionID          = {'0','.','0','0'},
+	};
+
+/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE
+ *  command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete.
+ */
+static SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData =
+	{
+		.ResponseCode        = 0x70,
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x0A,
+	};
+
+
+/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches
+ *  to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns
+ *  a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool CommandSuccess = false;
+
+	/* Run the appropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */
+	switch (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0])
+	{
+		case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Inquiry(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_WRITE);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_READ);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_START_STOP_UNIT:
+		case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY:
+		case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL:
+		case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10:
+			/* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */
+			CommandSuccess = true;
+			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+			break;
+		default:
+			/* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */
+			SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	/* Check if command was successfully processed */
+	if (CommandSuccess)
+	{
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return true;
+	}
+
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features
+ *  and capabilities to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint16_t AllocationLength  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3]);
+	uint16_t BytesTransferred  = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(InquiryData));
+
+	/* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */
+	if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) ||
+	     MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2])
+	{
+		/* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, NULL);
+
+	/* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */
+	Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL);
+
+	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command,
+ *  including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t  AllocationLength = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
+	uint8_t  BytesTransferred = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(SenseData));
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, NULL);
+	Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity
+ *  on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint32_t LastBlockAddressInLUN = (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS - 1);
+	uint32_t MediaBlockSize        = VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE;
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&LastBlockAddressInLUN, sizeof(LastBlockAddressInLUN), NULL);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&MediaBlockSize, sizeof(MediaBlockSize), NULL);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. This command performs a quick check of the Dataflash ICs on the
+ *  board, and indicates if they are present and functioning correctly. Only the Self-Test portion of the diagnostic command is
+ *  supported.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Check to see if the SELF TEST bit is not set */
+	if (!(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & (1 << 2)))
+	{
+		/* Only self-test supported - update SENSE key and fail the command */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Check to see if all attached Dataflash ICs are functional */
+	if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation()))
+	{
+		/* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address
+ *  and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level Dataflash routine to handle the actual
+ *  reading and writing of the data.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *  \param[in] IsDataRead  Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE)
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                      const bool IsDataRead)
+{
+	uint32_t BlockAddress;
+	uint16_t TotalBlocks;
+
+	/* Check if the disk is write protected or not */
+	if ((IsDataRead == DATA_WRITE) && DISK_READ_ONLY)
+	{
+		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
+	BlockAddress = SwapEndian_32(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]);
+
+	/* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
+	TotalBlocks  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7]);
+
+	/* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */
+	if (BlockAddress >= VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS)
+	{
+		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */
+	if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ)
+	  DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+	else
+	  DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+
+	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE);
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI MODE SENSE (6) command. This command returns various informational pages about
+ *  the SCSI device, as well as the device's Write Protect status.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Send an empty header response with the Write Protect flag status */
+	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(DISK_READ_ONLY ? 0x80 : 0x00);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 4;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/SCSI.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/SCSI.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ec9c3e2a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/SCSI.h
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for SCSI.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _SCSI_H_
+#define _SCSI_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "../TempDataLogger.h"
+		#include "../Descriptors.h"
+		#include "DataflashManager.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This
+		 *  is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about
+		 *  the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Key    New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] Acode  New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] Aqual  New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to
+		 */
+		#define SCSI_SET_SENSE(Key, Acode, Aqual)  do { SenseData.SenseKey                 = (Key);   \
+		                                                SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode      = (Acode); \
+		                                                SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = (Aqual); } while (0)
+
+		/** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_READ           true
+
+		/** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_WRITE          false
+
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a Block Media device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK   0x00
+
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a CD-ROM device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_CDROM   0x05
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C)
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+			                                      const bool IsDataRead);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempDataLogger.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempDataLogger.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..44904fbe1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempDataLogger.c
@@ -0,0 +1,331 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the TemperatureDataLogger project. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "TempDataLogger.h"
+
+/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t Disk_MS_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber           = INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage,
+				.DataINEndpoint            =
+					{
+						.Address           = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR,
+						.Size              = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks             = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address           = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR,
+						.Size              = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks             = 1,
+					},
+				.TotalLUNs                 = 1,
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Buffer to hold the previously generated HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
+static uint8_t PrevHIDReportBuffer[GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE];
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Generic_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber              = INTERFACE_ID_HID,
+				.ReportINEndpoint             =
+					{
+						.Address              = GENERIC_IN_EPADDR,
+						.Size                 = GENERIC_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                = 1,
+					},
+				.PrevReportINBuffer           = PrevHIDReportBuffer,
+				.PrevReportINBufferSize       = sizeof(PrevHIDReportBuffer),
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Non-volatile Logging Interval value in EEPROM, stored as a number of 500ms ticks */
+static uint8_t EEMEM LoggingInterval500MS_EEPROM = DEFAULT_LOG_INTERVAL;
+
+/** SRAM Logging Interval value fetched from EEPROM, stored as a number of 500ms ticks */
+static uint8_t LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM;
+
+/** Total number of 500ms logging ticks elapsed since the last log value was recorded */
+static uint16_t CurrentLoggingTicks;
+
+/** FAT Fs structure to hold the internal state of the FAT driver for the Dataflash contents. */
+static FATFS DiskFATState;
+
+/** FAT Fs structure to hold a FAT file handle for the log data write destination. */
+static FIL TempLogFile;
+
+
+/** ISR to handle the 500ms ticks for sampling and data logging */
+ISR(TIMER1_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	/* Signal a 500ms tick has elapsed to the RTC */
+	RTC_Tick500ms();
+
+	/* Check to see if the logging interval has expired */
+	if (++CurrentLoggingTicks < LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Reset log tick counter to prepare for next logging interval */
+	CurrentLoggingTicks = 0;
+
+	uint8_t LEDMask = LEDs_GetLEDs();
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+	/* Only log when not connected to a USB host */
+	if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+	{
+		TimeDate_t CurrentTimeDate;
+		RTC_GetTimeDate(&CurrentTimeDate);
+
+		char     LineBuffer[100];
+		uint16_t BytesWritten;
+
+		BytesWritten = sprintf(LineBuffer, "%02d/%02d/20%02d, %02d:%02d:%02d, %d Degrees\r\n",
+		                       CurrentTimeDate.Day, CurrentTimeDate.Month, CurrentTimeDate.Year,
+		                       CurrentTimeDate.Hour, CurrentTimeDate.Minute, CurrentTimeDate.Second,
+		                       Temperature_GetTemperature());
+
+		f_write(&TempLogFile, LineBuffer, BytesWritten, &BytesWritten);
+		f_sync(&TempLogFile);
+	}
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	/* Fetch logging interval from EEPROM */
+	LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM = eeprom_read_byte(&LoggingInterval500MS_EEPROM);
+
+	/* Check if the logging interval is invalid (0xFF) indicating that the EEPROM is blank */
+	if (LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM == 0xFF)
+	  LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM = DEFAULT_LOG_INTERVAL;
+
+	/* Mount and open the log file on the Dataflash FAT partition */
+	OpenLogFile();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		MS_Device_USBTask(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+		HID_Device_USBTask(&Generic_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Opens the log file on the Dataflash's FAT formatted partition according to the current date */
+void OpenLogFile(void)
+{
+	char LogFileName[12];
+
+	/* Get the current date for the filename as "DDMMYY.csv" */
+	TimeDate_t CurrentTimeDate;
+	RTC_GetTimeDate(&CurrentTimeDate);
+	sprintf(LogFileName, "%02d%02d%02d.csv", CurrentTimeDate.Day, CurrentTimeDate.Month, CurrentTimeDate.Year);
+
+	/* Mount the storage device, open the file */
+	f_mount(0, &DiskFATState);
+	f_open(&TempLogFile, LogFileName, FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_WRITE);
+	f_lseek(&TempLogFile, TempLogFile.fsize);
+}
+
+/** Closes the open data log file on the Dataflash's FAT formatted partition */
+void CloseLogFile(void)
+{
+	/* Sync any data waiting to be written, unmount the storage device */
+	f_sync(&TempLogFile);
+	f_close(&TempLogFile);
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	ADC_Init(ADC_FREE_RUNNING | ADC_PRESCALE_128);
+	Temperature_Init();
+	Dataflash_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+	TWI_Init(TWI_BIT_PRESCALE_4, TWI_BITLENGTH_FROM_FREQ(4, 50000));
+	RTC_Init();
+
+	/* 500ms logging interval timer configuration */
+	OCR1A   = (((F_CPU / 256) / 2) - 1);
+	TCCR1B  = (1 << WGM12) | (1 << CS12);
+	TIMSK1  = (1 << OCIE1A);
+
+	/* Check if the Dataflash is working, abort if not */
+	if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation()))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		for(;;);
+	}
+
+	/* Clear Dataflash sector protections, if enabled */
+	DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	/* Close the log file so that the host has exclusive file system access */
+	CloseLogFile();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+
+	/* Mount and open the log file on the Dataflash FAT partition */
+	OpenLogFile();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	ConfigSuccess &= HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Generic_HID_Interface);
+	ConfigSuccess &= MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Generic_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Mass Storage class driver callback function the reception of SCSI commands from the host, which must be processed.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool CommandSuccess;
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+	CommandSuccess = SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(MSInterfaceInfo);
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	return CommandSuccess;
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]     HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in,out] ReportID    Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
+ *  \param[in]     ReportType  Type of the report to create, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_In or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature
+ *  \param[out]    ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
+ *  \param[out]    ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent)
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true to force the sending of the report, \c false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                         void* ReportData,
+                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize)
+{
+	Device_Report_t* ReportParams = (Device_Report_t*)ReportData;
+
+	RTC_GetTimeDate(&ReportParams->TimeDate);
+
+	ReportParams->LogInterval500MS = LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM;
+
+	*ReportSize = sizeof(Device_Report_t);
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in] ReportID    Report ID of the received report from the host
+ *  \param[in] ReportType  The type of report that the host has sent, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature
+ *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the received report has been stored
+ *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
+ */
+void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                          const void* ReportData,
+                                          const uint16_t ReportSize)
+{
+	Device_Report_t* ReportParams = (Device_Report_t*)ReportData;
+
+	RTC_SetTimeDate(&ReportParams->TimeDate);
+
+	/* If the logging interval has changed from its current value, write it to EEPROM */
+	if (LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM != ReportParams->LogInterval500MS)
+	{
+		LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM = ReportParams->LogInterval500MS;
+		eeprom_update_byte(&LoggingInterval500MS_EEPROM, LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM);
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempDataLogger.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempDataLogger.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..70d17f4da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempDataLogger.h
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for TempDataLogger.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _TEMP_DATALOGGER_H_
+#define _TEMP_DATALOGGER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include "Lib/SCSI.h"
+		#include "Lib/DataflashManager.h"
+		#include "Lib/FATFs/ff.h"
+		#include "Lib/RTC.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
+
+		/** Default log interval when the EEPROM is blank, in 500ms ticks. */
+		#define DEFAULT_LOG_INTERVAL     10
+
+		/** Indicates if the disk is write protected or not. */
+		#define DISK_READ_ONLY           false
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			TimeDate_t TimeDate;
+			uint8_t    LogInterval500MS;
+		} Device_Report_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void OpenLogFile(void);
+		void CloseLogFile(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+		                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+		                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                                         void* ReportData,
+		                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize);
+		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+		                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+		                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                                          const void* ReportData,
+		                                          const uint16_t ReportSize);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/COPYING.LESSER.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/COPYING.LESSER.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bdf8db0ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/COPYING.LESSER.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,166 @@
+		   GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+                       Version 3, 29 June 2007
+
+ Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/>
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+
+  This version of the GNU Lesser General Public License incorporates
+the terms and conditions of version 3 of the GNU General Public
+License, supplemented by the additional permissions listed below.
+
+  0. Additional Definitions.
+
+  As used herein, "this License" refers to version 3 of the GNU Lesser
+General Public License, and the "GNU GPL" refers to version 3 of the GNU
+General Public License.
+
+  "The Library" refers to a covered work governed by this License,
+other than an Application or a Combined Work as defined below.
+
+  An "Application" is any work that makes use of an interface provided
+by the Library, but which is not otherwise based on the Library.
+Defining a subclass of a class defined by the Library is deemed a mode
+of using an interface provided by the Library.
+
+  A "Combined Work" is a work produced by combining or linking an
+Application with the Library.  The particular version of the Library
+with which the Combined Work was made is also called the "Linked
+Version".
+
+  The "Minimal Corresponding Source" for a Combined Work means the
+Corresponding Source for the Combined Work, excluding any source code
+for portions of the Combined Work that, considered in isolation, are
+based on the Application, and not on the Linked Version.
+
+  The "Corresponding Application Code" for a Combined Work means the
+object code and/or source code for the Application, including any data
+and utility programs needed for reproducing the Combined Work from the
+Application, but excluding the System Libraries of the Combined Work.
+
+  1. Exception to Section 3 of the GNU GPL.
+
+  You may convey a covered work under sections 3 and 4 of this License
+without being bound by section 3 of the GNU GPL.
+
+  2. Conveying Modified Versions.
+
+  If you modify a copy of the Library, and, in your modifications, a
+facility refers to a function or data to be supplied by an Application
+that uses the facility (other than as an argument passed when the
+facility is invoked), then you may convey a copy of the modified
+version:
+
+   a) under this License, provided that you make a good faith effort to
+   ensure that, in the event an Application does not supply the
+   function or data, the facility still operates, and performs
+   whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful, or
+
+   b) under the GNU GPL, with none of the additional permissions of
+   this License applicable to that copy.
+
+  3. Object Code Incorporating Material from Library Header Files.
+
+  The object code form of an Application may incorporate material from
+a header file that is part of the Library.  You may convey such object
+code under terms of your choice, provided that, if the incorporated
+material is not limited to numerical parameters, data structure
+layouts and accessors, or small macros, inline functions and templates
+(ten or fewer lines in length), you do both of the following:
+
+   a) Give prominent notice with each copy of the object code that the
+   Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are
+   covered by this License.
+
+   b) Accompany the object code with a copy of the GNU GPL and this license
+   document.
+
+  4. Combined Works.
+
+  You may convey a Combined Work under terms of your choice that,
+taken together, effectively do not restrict modification of the
+portions of the Library contained in the Combined Work and reverse
+engineering for debugging such modifications, if you also do each of
+the following:
+
+   a) Give prominent notice with each copy of the Combined Work that
+   the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are
+   covered by this License.
+
+   b) Accompany the Combined Work with a copy of the GNU GPL and this license
+   document.
+
+   c) For a Combined Work that displays copyright notices during
+   execution, include the copyright notice for the Library among
+   these notices, as well as a reference directing the user to the
+   copies of the GNU GPL and this license document.
+
+   d) Do one of the following:
+
+       0) Convey the Minimal Corresponding Source under the terms of this
+       License, and the Corresponding Application Code in a form
+       suitable for, and under terms that permit, the user to
+       recombine or relink the Application with a modified version of
+       the Linked Version to produce a modified Combined Work, in the
+       manner specified by section 6 of the GNU GPL for conveying
+       Corresponding Source.
+
+       1) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the
+       Library.  A suitable mechanism is one that (a) uses at run time
+       a copy of the Library already present on the user's computer
+       system, and (b) will operate properly with a modified version
+       of the Library that is interface-compatible with the Linked
+       Version.
+
+   e) Provide Installation Information, but only if you would otherwise
+   be required to provide such information under section 6 of the
+   GNU GPL, and only to the extent that such information is
+   necessary to install and execute a modified version of the
+   Combined Work produced by recombining or relinking the
+   Application with a modified version of the Linked Version. (If
+   you use option 4d0, the Installation Information must accompany
+   the Minimal Corresponding Source and Corresponding Application
+   Code. If you use option 4d1, you must provide the Installation
+   Information in the manner specified by section 6 of the GNU GPL
+   for conveying Corresponding Source.)
+
+  5. Combined Libraries.
+
+  You may place library facilities that are a work based on the
+Library side by side in a single library together with other library
+facilities that are not Applications and are not covered by this
+License, and convey such a combined library under terms of your
+choice, if you do both of the following:
+
+   a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based
+   on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities,
+   conveyed under the terms of this License.
+
+   b) Give prominent notice with the combined library that part of it
+   is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the
+   accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
+
+  6. Revised Versions of the GNU Lesser General Public License.
+
+  The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
+of the GNU Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new
+versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
+differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
+
+  Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the
+Library as you received it specifies that a certain numbered version
+of the GNU Lesser General Public License "or any later version"
+applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and
+conditions either of that published version or of any later version
+published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library as you
+received it does not specify a version number of the GNU Lesser
+General Public License, you may choose any version of the GNU Lesser
+General Public License ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
+
+  If the Library as you received it specifies that a proxy can decide
+whether future versions of the GNU Lesser General Public License shall
+apply, that proxy's public statement of acceptance of any version is
+permanent authorization for you to choose that version for the
+Library.
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/COPYING.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/COPYING.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..10926e87f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/COPYING.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,675 @@
+                    GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+                       Version 3, 29 June 2007
+
+ Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/>
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+                            Preamble
+
+  The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for
+software and other kinds of works.
+
+  The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed
+to take away your freedom to share and change the works.  By contrast,
+the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to
+share and change all versions of a program--to make sure it remains free
+software for all its users.  We, the Free Software Foundation, use the
+GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to
+any other work released this way by its authors.  You can apply it to
+your programs, too.
+
+  When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price.  Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you
+want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new
+free programs, and that you know you can do these things.
+
+  To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you
+these rights or asking you to surrender the rights.  Therefore, you have
+certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if
+you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others.
+
+  For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same
+freedoms that you received.  You must make sure that they, too, receive
+or can get the source code.  And you must show them these terms so they
+know their rights.
+
+  Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps:
+(1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License
+giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it.
+
+  For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains
+that there is no warranty for this free software.  For both users' and
+authors' sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as
+changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to
+authors of previous versions.
+
+  Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run
+modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer
+can do so.  This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of
+protecting users' freedom to change the software.  The systematic
+pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to
+use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable.  Therefore, we
+have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those
+products.  If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we
+stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions
+of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users.
+
+  Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents.
+States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of
+software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to
+avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could
+make it effectively proprietary.  To prevent this, the GPL assures that
+patents cannot be used to render the program non-free.
+
+  The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+
+                       TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+  0. Definitions.
+
+  "This License" refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License.
+
+  "Copyright" also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of
+works, such as semiconductor masks.
+
+  "The Program" refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this
+License.  Each licensee is addressed as "you".  "Licensees" and
+"recipients" may be individuals or organizations.
+
+  To "modify" a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work
+in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an
+exact copy.  The resulting work is called a "modified version" of the
+earlier work or a work "based on" the earlier work.
+
+  A "covered work" means either the unmodified Program or a work based
+on the Program.
+
+  To "propagate" a work means to do anything with it that, without
+permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for
+infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a
+computer or modifying a private copy.  Propagation includes copying,
+distribution (with or without modification), making available to the
+public, and in some countries other activities as well.
+
+  To "convey" a work means any kind of propagation that enables other
+parties to make or receive copies.  Mere interaction with a user through
+a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying.
+
+  An interactive user interface displays "Appropriate Legal Notices"
+to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible
+feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2)
+tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the
+extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the
+work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License.  If
+the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a
+menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion.
+
+  1. Source Code.
+
+  The "source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work
+for making modifications to it.  "Object code" means any non-source
+form of a work.
+
+  A "Standard Interface" means an interface that either is an official
+standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of
+interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that
+is widely used among developers working in that language.
+
+  The "System Libraries" of an executable work include anything, other
+than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of
+packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major
+Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that
+Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an
+implementation is available to the public in source code form.  A
+"Major Component", in this context, means a major essential component
+(kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system
+(if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to
+produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it.
+
+  The "Corresponding Source" for a work in object code form means all
+the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable
+work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to
+control those activities.  However, it does not include the work's
+System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free
+programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but
+which are not part of the work.  For example, Corresponding Source
+includes interface definition files associated with source files for
+the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically
+linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require,
+such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those
+subprograms and other parts of the work.
+
+  The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users
+can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding
+Source.
+
+  The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that
+same work.
+
+  2. Basic Permissions.
+
+  All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of
+copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated
+conditions are met.  This License explicitly affirms your unlimited
+permission to run the unmodified Program.  The output from running a
+covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its
+content, constitutes a covered work.  This License acknowledges your
+rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law.
+
+  You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not
+convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains
+in force.  You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose
+of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you
+with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with
+the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do
+not control copyright.  Those thus making or running the covered works
+for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction
+and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of
+your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you.
+
+  Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under
+the conditions stated below.  Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10
+makes it unnecessary.
+
+  3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law.
+
+  No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological
+measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article
+11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or
+similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such
+measures.
+
+  When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid
+circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention
+is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to
+the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or
+modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work's
+users, your or third parties' legal rights to forbid circumvention of
+technological measures.
+
+  4. Conveying Verbatim Copies.
+
+  You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you
+receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and
+appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice;
+keep intact all notices stating that this License and any
+non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code;
+keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all
+recipients a copy of this License along with the Program.
+
+  You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey,
+and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee.
+
+  5. Conveying Modified Source Versions.
+
+  You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to
+produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the
+terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+    a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified
+    it, and giving a relevant date.
+
+    b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is
+    released under this License and any conditions added under section
+    7.  This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to
+    "keep intact all notices".
+
+    c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this
+    License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy.  This
+    License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7
+    additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts,
+    regardless of how they are packaged.  This License gives no
+    permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not
+    invalidate such permission if you have separately received it.
+
+    d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display
+    Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive
+    interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your
+    work need not make them do so.
+
+  A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent
+works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work,
+and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program,
+in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an
+"aggregate" if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not
+used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation's users
+beyond what the individual works permit.  Inclusion of a covered work
+in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other
+parts of the aggregate.
+
+  6. Conveying Non-Source Forms.
+
+  You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms
+of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the
+machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License,
+in one of these ways:
+
+    a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product
+    (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the
+    Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium
+    customarily used for software interchange.
+
+    b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product
+    (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a
+    written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as
+    long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product
+    model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a
+    copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the
+    product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical
+    medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no
+    more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this
+    conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the
+    Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge.
+
+    c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the
+    written offer to provide the Corresponding Source.  This
+    alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and
+    only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord
+    with subsection 6b.
+
+    d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated
+    place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the
+    Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no
+    further charge.  You need not require recipients to copy the
+    Corresponding Source along with the object code.  If the place to
+    copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source
+    may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party)
+    that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain
+    clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the
+    Corresponding Source.  Regardless of what server hosts the
+    Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is
+    available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements.
+
+    e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided
+    you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding
+    Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no
+    charge under subsection 6d.
+
+  A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded
+from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be
+included in conveying the object code work.
+
+  A "User Product" is either (1) a "consumer product", which means any
+tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family,
+or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation
+into a dwelling.  In determining whether a product is a consumer product,
+doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage.  For a particular
+product received by a particular user, "normally used" refers to a
+typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status
+of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user
+actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product.  A product
+is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial
+commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent
+the only significant mode of use of the product.
+
+  "Installation Information" for a User Product means any methods,
+procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install
+and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from
+a modified version of its Corresponding Source.  The information must
+suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object
+code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because
+modification has been made.
+
+  If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or
+specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as
+part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the
+User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a
+fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the
+Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied
+by the Installation Information.  But this requirement does not apply
+if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install
+modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has
+been installed in ROM).
+
+  The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a
+requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates
+for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for
+the User Product in which it has been modified or installed.  Access to a
+network may be denied when the modification itself materially and
+adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and
+protocols for communication across the network.
+
+  Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided,
+in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly
+documented (and with an implementation available to the public in
+source code form), and must require no special password or key for
+unpacking, reading or copying.
+
+  7. Additional Terms.
+
+  "Additional permissions" are terms that supplement the terms of this
+License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions.
+Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall
+be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent
+that they are valid under applicable law.  If additional permissions
+apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately
+under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by
+this License without regard to the additional permissions.
+
+  When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option
+remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of
+it.  (Additional permissions may be written to require their own
+removal in certain cases when you modify the work.)  You may place
+additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work,
+for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission.
+
+  Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you
+add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of
+that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms:
+
+    a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the
+    terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or
+
+    b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or
+    author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal
+    Notices displayed by works containing it; or
+
+    c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or
+    requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in
+    reasonable ways as different from the original version; or
+
+    d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or
+    authors of the material; or
+
+    e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some
+    trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or
+
+    f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that
+    material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of
+    it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for
+    any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on
+    those licensors and authors.
+
+  All other non-permissive additional terms are considered "further
+restrictions" within the meaning of section 10.  If the Program as you
+received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is
+governed by this License along with a term that is a further
+restriction, you may remove that term.  If a license document contains
+a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this
+License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms
+of that license document, provided that the further restriction does
+not survive such relicensing or conveying.
+
+  If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you
+must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the
+additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating
+where to find the applicable terms.
+
+  Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the
+form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions;
+the above requirements apply either way.
+
+  8. Termination.
+
+  You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly
+provided under this License.  Any attempt otherwise to propagate or
+modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under
+this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third
+paragraph of section 11).
+
+  However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your
+license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a)
+provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and
+finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright
+holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means
+prior to 60 days after the cessation.
+
+  Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is
+reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
+violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have
+received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that
+copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after
+your receipt of the notice.
+
+  Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the
+licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under
+this License.  If your rights have been terminated and not permanently
+reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same
+material under section 10.
+
+  9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies.
+
+  You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or
+run a copy of the Program.  Ancillary propagation of a covered work
+occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission
+to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance.  However,
+nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or
+modify any covered work.  These actions infringe copyright if you do
+not accept this License.  Therefore, by modifying or propagating a
+covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so.
+
+  10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients.
+
+  Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically
+receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and
+propagate that work, subject to this License.  You are not responsible
+for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
+
+  An "entity transaction" is a transaction transferring control of an
+organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an
+organization, or merging organizations.  If propagation of a covered
+work results from an entity transaction, each party to that
+transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever
+licenses to the work the party's predecessor in interest had or could
+give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the
+Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if
+the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts.
+
+  You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the
+rights granted or affirmed under this License.  For example, you may
+not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of
+rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation
+(including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that
+any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for
+sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it.
+
+  11. Patents.
+
+  A "contributor" is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this
+License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based.  The
+work thus licensed is called the contributor's "contributor version".
+
+  A contributor's "essential patent claims" are all patent claims
+owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or
+hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted
+by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version,
+but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a
+consequence of further modification of the contributor version.  For
+purposes of this definition, "control" includes the right to grant
+patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of
+this License.
+
+  Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free
+patent license under the contributor's essential patent claims, to
+make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and
+propagate the contents of its contributor version.
+
+  In the following three paragraphs, a "patent license" is any express
+agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent
+(such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to
+sue for patent infringement).  To "grant" such a patent license to a
+party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a
+patent against the party.
+
+  If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license,
+and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone
+to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a
+publicly available network server or other readily accessible means,
+then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so
+available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the
+patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner
+consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent
+license to downstream recipients.  "Knowingly relying" means you have
+actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the
+covered work in a country, or your recipient's use of the covered work
+in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that
+country that you have reason to believe are valid.
+
+  If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or
+arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a
+covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties
+receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify
+or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license
+you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered
+work and works based on it.
+
+  A patent license is "discriminatory" if it does not include within
+the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is
+conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are
+specifically granted under this License.  You may not convey a covered
+work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is
+in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment
+to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying
+the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the
+parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory
+patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work
+conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily
+for and in connection with specific products or compilations that
+contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement,
+or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007.
+
+  Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting
+any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may
+otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law.
+
+  12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom.
+
+  If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License.  If you cannot convey a
+covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may
+not convey it at all.  For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you
+to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey
+the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this
+License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program.
+
+  13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License.
+
+  Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have
+permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed
+under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single
+combined work, and to convey the resulting work.  The terms of this
+License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work,
+but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License,
+section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the
+combination as such.
+
+  14. Revised Versions of this License.
+
+  The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of
+the GNU General Public License from time to time.  Such new versions will
+be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
+address new problems or concerns.
+
+  Each version is given a distinguishing version number.  If the
+Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General
+Public License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the
+option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered
+version or of any later version published by the Free Software
+Foundation.  If the Program does not specify a version number of the
+GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published
+by the Free Software Foundation.
+
+  If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future
+versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy's
+public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you
+to choose that version for the Program.
+
+  Later license versions may give you additional or different
+permissions.  However, no additional obligations are imposed on any
+author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a
+later version.
+
+  15. Disclaimer of Warranty.
+
+  THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
+APPLICABLE LAW.  EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT
+HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY
+OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
+THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+PURPOSE.  THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM
+IS WITH YOU.  SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF
+ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+  16. Limitation of Liability.
+
+  IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS
+THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY
+GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE
+USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF
+DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD
+PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS),
+EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+  17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16.
+
+  If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided
+above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms,
+reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates
+an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the
+Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a
+copy of the Program in return for a fee.
+
+                     END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+            How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+  If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
+free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
+
+  To do so, attach the following notices to the program.  It is safest
+to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
+the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+    <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
+    Copyright (C) <year>  <name of author>
+
+    This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
+    it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+    the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or
+    (at your option) any later version.
+
+    This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+    but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+    GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+    You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+    along with this program.  If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+  If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short
+notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
+
+    <program>  Copyright (C) <year>  <name of author>
+    This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
+    This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
+    under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
+
+The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate
+parts of the General Public License.  Of course, your program's commands
+might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an "about box".
+
+  You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school,
+if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary.
+For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see
+<http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
+
+  The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program
+into proprietary programs.  If your program is a subroutine library, you
+may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with
+the library.  If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General
+Public License instead of this License.  But first, please read
+<http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html>.
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.Designer.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.Designer.cs
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..58fac5144
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.Designer.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,181 @@
+namespace Project1HostApp
+{
+    partial class frmDataloggerSettings
+    {
+        /// <summary>
+        /// Required designer variable.
+        /// </summary>
+        private System.ComponentModel.IContainer components = null;
+
+        /// <summary>
+        /// Clean up any resources being used.
+        /// </summary>
+        /// <param name="disposing">true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false.</param>
+        protected override void Dispose(bool disposing)
+        {
+            if (disposing && (components != null))
+            {
+                components.Dispose();
+            }
+            base.Dispose(disposing);
+        }
+
+        #region Windows Form Designer generated code
+
+        /// <summary>
+        /// Required method for Designer support - do not modify
+        /// the contents of this method with the code editor.
+        /// </summary>
+        private void InitializeComponent()
+        {
+            this.btnSetValues = new System.Windows.Forms.Button();
+            this.dtpTime = new System.Windows.Forms.DateTimePicker();
+            this.lblTime = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
+            this.lblLoggingInterval = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
+            this.nudLogInterval = new System.Windows.Forms.NumericUpDown();
+            this.lblSeconds = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
+            this.btnGetValues = new System.Windows.Forms.Button();
+            this.lblDate = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
+            this.dtpDate = new System.Windows.Forms.DateTimePicker();
+            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.nudLogInterval)).BeginInit();
+            this.SuspendLayout();
+            // 
+            // btnSetValues
+            // 
+            this.btnSetValues.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(168, 136);
+            this.btnSetValues.Name = "btnSetValues";
+            this.btnSetValues.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(90, 35);
+            this.btnSetValues.TabIndex = 0;
+            this.btnSetValues.Text = "Set Values";
+            this.btnSetValues.UseVisualStyleBackColor = true;
+            this.btnSetValues.Click += new System.EventHandler(this.btnSetValues_Click);
+            // 
+            // dtpTime
+            // 
+            this.dtpTime.CustomFormat = "";
+            this.dtpTime.Format = System.Windows.Forms.DateTimePickerFormat.Time;
+            this.dtpTime.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(148, 61);
+            this.dtpTime.Name = "dtpTime";
+            this.dtpTime.ShowUpDown = true;
+            this.dtpTime.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(110, 20);
+            this.dtpTime.TabIndex = 1;
+            // 
+            // lblTime
+            // 
+            this.lblTime.AutoSize = true;
+            this.lblTime.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 8.25F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0)));
+            this.lblTime.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(51, 67);
+            this.lblTime.Name = "lblTime";
+            this.lblTime.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(82, 13);
+            this.lblTime.TabIndex = 2;
+            this.lblTime.Text = "Device Time:";
+            // 
+            // lblLoggingInterval
+            // 
+            this.lblLoggingInterval.AutoSize = true;
+            this.lblLoggingInterval.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 8.25F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0)));
+            this.lblLoggingInterval.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(30, 101);
+            this.lblLoggingInterval.Name = "lblLoggingInterval";
+            this.lblLoggingInterval.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(103, 13);
+            this.lblLoggingInterval.TabIndex = 3;
+            this.lblLoggingInterval.Text = "Logging Interval:";
+            // 
+            // nudLogInterval
+            // 
+            this.nudLogInterval.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(148, 94);
+            this.nudLogInterval.Maximum = new decimal(new int[] {
+            60,
+            0,
+            0,
+            0});
+            this.nudLogInterval.Minimum = new decimal(new int[] {
+            1,
+            0,
+            0,
+            0});
+            this.nudLogInterval.Name = "nudLogInterval";
+            this.nudLogInterval.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(51, 20);
+            this.nudLogInterval.TabIndex = 5;
+            this.nudLogInterval.Value = new decimal(new int[] {
+            5,
+            0,
+            0,
+            0});
+            // 
+            // lblSeconds
+            // 
+            this.lblSeconds.AutoSize = true;
+            this.lblSeconds.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(209, 101);
+            this.lblSeconds.Name = "lblSeconds";
+            this.lblSeconds.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(49, 13);
+            this.lblSeconds.TabIndex = 6;
+            this.lblSeconds.Text = "Seconds";
+            // 
+            // btnGetValues
+            // 
+            this.btnGetValues.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(30, 136);
+            this.btnGetValues.Name = "btnGetValues";
+            this.btnGetValues.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(90, 35);
+            this.btnGetValues.TabIndex = 7;
+            this.btnGetValues.Text = "Get Values";
+            this.btnGetValues.UseVisualStyleBackColor = true;
+            this.btnGetValues.Click += new System.EventHandler(this.btnGetValues_Click);
+            // 
+            // lblDate
+            // 
+            this.lblDate.AutoSize = true;
+            this.lblDate.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 8.25F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0)));
+            this.lblDate.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(51, 33);
+            this.lblDate.Name = "lblDate";
+            this.lblDate.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(82, 13);
+            this.lblDate.TabIndex = 8;
+            this.lblDate.Text = "Device Date:";
+            // 
+            // dtpDate
+            // 
+            this.dtpDate.CustomFormat = "dd/MM/yyyy";
+            this.dtpDate.Format = System.Windows.Forms.DateTimePickerFormat.Custom;
+            this.dtpDate.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(148, 27);
+            this.dtpDate.Name = "dtpDate";
+            this.dtpDate.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(110, 20);
+            this.dtpDate.TabIndex = 9;
+            // 
+            // frmDataloggerSettings
+            // 
+            this.AutoScaleDimensions = new System.Drawing.SizeF(6F, 13F);
+            this.AutoScaleMode = System.Windows.Forms.AutoScaleMode.Font;
+            this.ClientSize = new System.Drawing.Size(300, 197);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.dtpDate);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.lblDate);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.btnGetValues);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.lblSeconds);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.nudLogInterval);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.lblLoggingInterval);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.lblTime);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.dtpTime);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.btnSetValues);
+            this.MaximizeBox = false;
+            this.MinimizeBox = false;
+            this.Name = "frmDataloggerSettings";
+            this.Text = "Datalogger";
+            this.Load += new System.EventHandler(this.frmDataloggerSettings_Load);
+            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.nudLogInterval)).EndInit();
+            this.ResumeLayout(false);
+            this.PerformLayout();
+
+        }
+
+        #endregion
+
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Button btnSetValues;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.DateTimePicker dtpTime;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblTime;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblLoggingInterval;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.NumericUpDown nudLogInterval;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblSeconds;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Button btnGetValues;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblDate;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.DateTimePicker dtpDate;
+    }
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.cs
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c3d1e1564
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,179 @@
+using System;
+using System.Collections.Generic;
+using System.ComponentModel;
+using System.Data;
+using System.Drawing;
+using System.Linq;
+using System.Text;
+using System.Windows.Forms;
+using Hid;
+
+namespace Project1HostApp
+{
+    public partial class frmDataloggerSettings : Form
+    {
+        private const int DEVICE_VID = 0x03EB;
+        private const int DEVICE_PID = 0x2063;
+
+        private struct Device_Report_t
+        {
+            public Byte Day;
+            public Byte Month;
+            public Byte Year;
+
+            public Byte Hour;
+            public Byte Minute;
+            public Byte Second;
+
+            public Byte LogInterval500MS;
+
+            public Byte[] ToReport()
+            {
+                Byte[] Report = new Byte[7];
+
+                Report[0] = this.Hour;
+                Report[1] = this.Minute;
+                Report[2] = this.Second;
+                Report[3] = this.Day;
+                Report[4] = this.Month;
+                Report[5] = this.Year;
+                Report[6] = this.LogInterval500MS;
+
+                return Report;
+            }
+
+            public void FromReport(Byte[] Report)
+            {
+                this.Hour = Report[0];
+                this.Minute = Report[1];
+                this.Second = Report[2];
+                this.Day = Report[3];
+                this.Month = Report[4];
+                this.Year = Report[5];
+                this.LogInterval500MS = Report[6];
+            }
+        };
+
+        private IDevice GetDeviceConnection()
+        {
+            IDevice[] ConnectedDevices = DeviceFactory.Enumerate(DEVICE_VID, DEVICE_PID);
+            IDevice ConnectionHandle = null;
+
+            if (ConnectedDevices.Count() > 0)
+                ConnectionHandle = ConnectedDevices[0];
+            else
+                return null;
+
+            // Fix report handle under Windows
+            if (ConnectionHandle is Hid.Win32.Win32DeviceSet)
+            {
+                ((Hid.Win32.Win32DeviceSet)ConnectionHandle).AddDevice(0x00,
+                    ((Hid.Win32.Win32DeviceSet)ConnectionHandle).UnallocatedDevices[0]);
+            }
+
+            return ConnectionHandle;
+        }
+
+        public frmDataloggerSettings()
+        {
+            InitializeComponent();
+        }
+
+        private void btnSetValues_Click(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            IDevice ConnectionHandle = GetDeviceConnection();
+
+            if (ConnectionHandle == null)
+            {
+                MessageBox.Show("Error: Cannot connect to Datalogger device.");
+                return;
+            }
+
+            Device_Report_t DeviceReport = new Device_Report_t();
+            DeviceReport.Day = (byte)dtpDate.Value.Day;
+            DeviceReport.Month = (byte)dtpDate.Value.Month;
+            DeviceReport.Year = (byte)((dtpDate.Value.Year < 2000) ? 0 : (dtpDate.Value.Year - 2000));
+            DeviceReport.Hour = (byte)dtpTime.Value.Hour;
+            DeviceReport.Minute = (byte)dtpTime.Value.Minute;
+            DeviceReport.Second = (byte)dtpTime.Value.Second;
+            DeviceReport.LogInterval500MS = (byte)(nudLogInterval.Value * 2);
+
+            try
+            {
+                ConnectionHandle.Write(0x00, DeviceReport.ToReport());
+                MessageBox.Show("Device parameters updated successfully.");
+            }
+            catch (Exception ex)
+            {
+                MessageBox.Show("Error: " + ex.Message);
+            }
+        }
+
+        private void btnGetValues_Click(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            IDevice ConnectionHandle = GetDeviceConnection();
+
+            if (ConnectionHandle == null)
+            {
+                MessageBox.Show("Error: Cannot connect to Datalogger device.");
+                return;
+            }
+
+            Device_Report_t DeviceReport = new Device_Report_t();
+
+            try
+            {
+                Byte[] Report = new Byte[7];
+
+                ConnectionHandle.Read(0x00, Report);
+                DeviceReport.FromReport(Report);
+                String msgText = "Device parameters retrieved successfully.";
+
+                try
+                {
+                    dtpDate.Value = new DateTime(
+                        (2000 + DeviceReport.Year),
+                        DeviceReport.Month,
+                        DeviceReport.Day);
+
+                    dtpTime.Value = new DateTime(
+                        DateTime.Now.Year, DateTime.Now.Month, DateTime.Now.Day,
+                        DeviceReport.Hour,
+                        DeviceReport.Minute,
+                        DeviceReport.Second);
+                }
+                catch (Exception ex)
+                {
+                    msgText = "Problem reading device:\n" +
+                        ex.Message +
+                        "\nY:" + DeviceReport.Year.ToString() +
+                        " M:" + DeviceReport.Month.ToString() +
+                        " D:" + DeviceReport.Day.ToString() +
+                        "\n\nUsing current date and time.";
+                    dtpDate.Value = DateTime.Now;
+                    dtpTime.Value = DateTime.Now;
+                }
+
+                try
+                {
+                    nudLogInterval.Value = (DeviceReport.LogInterval500MS / 2);
+                }
+                catch (Exception ex)
+                {
+                    nudLogInterval.Value = nudLogInterval.Minimum;
+                }
+
+                MessageBox.Show(msgText);
+            }
+            catch (Exception ex)
+            {
+                MessageBox.Show("Error: " + ex.Message);
+            }
+        }
+
+        private void frmDataloggerSettings_Load(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.resx b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.resx
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..19dc0dd8b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.resx
@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<root>
+  <!-- 
+    Microsoft ResX Schema 
+    
+    Version 2.0
+    
+    The primary goals of this format is to allow a simple XML format 
+    that is mostly human readable. The generation and parsing of the 
+    various data types are done through the TypeConverter classes 
+    associated with the data types.
+    
+    Example:
+    
+    ... ado.net/XML headers & schema ...
+    <resheader name="resmimetype">text/microsoft-resx</resheader>
+    <resheader name="version">2.0</resheader>
+    <resheader name="reader">System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader>
+    <resheader name="writer">System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader>
+    <data name="Name1"><value>this is my long string</value><comment>this is a comment</comment></data>
+    <data name="Color1" type="System.Drawing.Color, System.Drawing">Blue</data>
+    <data name="Bitmap1" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64">
+        <value>[base64 mime encoded serialized .NET Framework object]</value>
+    </data>
+    <data name="Icon1" type="System.Drawing.Icon, System.Drawing" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64">
+        <value>[base64 mime encoded string representing a byte array form of the .NET Framework object]</value>
+        <comment>This is a comment</comment>
+    </data>
+                
+    There are any number of "resheader" rows that contain simple 
+    name/value pairs.
+    
+    Each data row contains a name, and value. The row also contains a 
+    type or mimetype. Type corresponds to a .NET class that support 
+    text/value conversion through the TypeConverter architecture. 
+    Classes that don't support this are serialized and stored with the 
+    mimetype set.
+    
+    The mimetype is used for serialized objects, and tells the 
+    ResXResourceReader how to depersist the object. This is currently not 
+    extensible. For a given mimetype the value must be set accordingly:
+    
+    Note - application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64 is the format 
+    that the ResXResourceWriter will generate, however the reader can 
+    read any of the formats listed below.
+    
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized with 
+            : System.Runtime.Serialization.Formatters.Binary.BinaryFormatter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+    
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.soap.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized with 
+            : System.Runtime.Serialization.Formatters.Soap.SoapFormatter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized into a byte array 
+            : using a System.ComponentModel.TypeConverter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+    -->
+  <xsd:schema id="root" xmlns="" xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema" xmlns:msdata="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:xml-msdata">
+    <xsd:import namespace="http://www.w3.org/XML/1998/namespace" />
+    <xsd:element name="root" msdata:IsDataSet="true">
+      <xsd:complexType>
+        <xsd:choice maxOccurs="unbounded">
+          <xsd:element name="metadata">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" use="required" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute ref="xml:space" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="assembly">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:attribute name="alias" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="data">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+                <xsd:element name="comment" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="2" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" use="required" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="3" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="4" />
+              <xsd:attribute ref="xml:space" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="resheader">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" use="required" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+        </xsd:choice>
+      </xsd:complexType>
+    </xsd:element>
+  </xsd:schema>
+  <resheader name="resmimetype">
+    <value>text/microsoft-resx</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="version">
+    <value>2.0</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="reader">
+    <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="writer">
+    <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value>
+  </resheader>
+</root>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Hid.Linux.dll b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Hid.Linux.dll
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4c19edd21
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Hid.Linux.dll
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Hid.Net.dll b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Hid.Net.dll
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2a7112fc0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Hid.Net.dll
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Hid.Win32.dll b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Hid.Win32.dll
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3693c6ca0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Hid.Win32.dll
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Program.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Program.cs
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2588e60c1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Program.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+using System;
+using System.Collections.Generic;
+using System.Linq;
+using System.Windows.Forms;
+
+namespace Project1HostApp
+{
+    static class Program
+    {
+        /// <summary>
+        /// The main entry point for the application.
+        /// </summary>
+        [STAThread]
+        static void Main()
+        {
+            Application.EnableVisualStyles();
+            Application.SetCompatibleTextRenderingDefault(false);
+            Application.Run(new frmDataloggerSettings());
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a4d0ab1d5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+using System.Reflection;
+using System.Runtime.CompilerServices;
+using System.Runtime.InteropServices;
+
+// General Information about an assembly is controlled through the following 
+// set of attributes. Change these attribute values to modify the information
+// associated with an assembly.
+[assembly: AssemblyTitle("TempDataLoggerHostApp")]
+[assembly: AssemblyDescription("")]
+[assembly: AssemblyConfiguration("")]
+[assembly: AssemblyCompany("Dean Camera")]
+[assembly: AssemblyProduct("Temp Datalogger HostApp")]
+[assembly: AssemblyCopyright("Copyright © Dean Camera 2011")]
+[assembly: AssemblyTrademark("")]
+[assembly: AssemblyCulture("")]
+
+// Setting ComVisible to false makes the types in this assembly not visible 
+// to COM components.  If you need to access a type in this assembly from 
+// COM, set the ComVisible attribute to true on that type.
+[assembly: ComVisible(false)]
+
+// The following GUID is for the ID of the typelib if this project is exposed to COM
+[assembly: Guid("f41d67c7-13b2-4710-9e0f-f78e7f2bf2e9")]
+
+// Version information for an assembly consists of the following four values:
+//
+//      Major Version
+//      Minor Version 
+//      Build Number
+//      Revision
+//
+// You can specify all the values or you can default the Build and Revision Numbers 
+// by using the '*' as shown below:
+// [assembly: AssemblyVersion("1.0.*")]
+[assembly: AssemblyVersion("1.0.0.0")]
+[assembly: AssemblyFileVersion("1.0.0.0")]
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..63b1af40d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// <auto-generated>
+//     This code was generated by a tool.
+//     Runtime Version:4.0.30319.239
+//
+//     Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if
+//     the code is regenerated.
+// </auto-generated>
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+namespace TemperatureLoggerHostApp.Properties {
+    using System;
+    
+    
+    /// <summary>
+    ///   A strongly-typed resource class, for looking up localized strings, etc.
+    /// </summary>
+    // This class was auto-generated by the StronglyTypedResourceBuilder
+    // class via a tool like ResGen or Visual Studio.
+    // To add or remove a member, edit your .ResX file then rerun ResGen
+    // with the /str option, or rebuild your VS project.
+    [global::System.CodeDom.Compiler.GeneratedCodeAttribute("System.Resources.Tools.StronglyTypedResourceBuilder", "4.0.0.0")]
+    [global::System.Diagnostics.DebuggerNonUserCodeAttribute()]
+    [global::System.Runtime.CompilerServices.CompilerGeneratedAttribute()]
+    internal class Resources {
+        
+        private static global::System.Resources.ResourceManager resourceMan;
+        
+        private static global::System.Globalization.CultureInfo resourceCulture;
+        
+        [global::System.Diagnostics.CodeAnalysis.SuppressMessageAttribute("Microsoft.Performance", "CA1811:AvoidUncalledPrivateCode")]
+        internal Resources() {
+        }
+        
+        /// <summary>
+        ///   Returns the cached ResourceManager instance used by this class.
+        /// </summary>
+        [global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableAttribute(global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableState.Advanced)]
+        internal static global::System.Resources.ResourceManager ResourceManager {
+            get {
+                if (object.ReferenceEquals(resourceMan, null)) {
+                    global::System.Resources.ResourceManager temp = new global::System.Resources.ResourceManager("TemperatureLoggerHostApp.Properties.Resources", typeof(Resources).Assembly);
+                    resourceMan = temp;
+                }
+                return resourceMan;
+            }
+        }
+        
+        /// <summary>
+        ///   Overrides the current thread's CurrentUICulture property for all
+        ///   resource lookups using this strongly typed resource class.
+        /// </summary>
+        [global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableAttribute(global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableState.Advanced)]
+        internal static global::System.Globalization.CultureInfo Culture {
+            get {
+                return resourceCulture;
+            }
+            set {
+                resourceCulture = value;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Resources.resx b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Resources.resx
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..af7dbebba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Resources.resx
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<root>
+  <!-- 
+    Microsoft ResX Schema 
+    
+    Version 2.0
+    
+    The primary goals of this format is to allow a simple XML format 
+    that is mostly human readable. The generation and parsing of the 
+    various data types are done through the TypeConverter classes 
+    associated with the data types.
+    
+    Example:
+    
+    ... ado.net/XML headers & schema ...
+    <resheader name="resmimetype">text/microsoft-resx</resheader>
+    <resheader name="version">2.0</resheader>
+    <resheader name="reader">System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader>
+    <resheader name="writer">System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader>
+    <data name="Name1"><value>this is my long string</value><comment>this is a comment</comment></data>
+    <data name="Color1" type="System.Drawing.Color, System.Drawing">Blue</data>
+    <data name="Bitmap1" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64">
+        <value>[base64 mime encoded serialized .NET Framework object]</value>
+    </data>
+    <data name="Icon1" type="System.Drawing.Icon, System.Drawing" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64">
+        <value>[base64 mime encoded string representing a byte array form of the .NET Framework object]</value>
+        <comment>This is a comment</comment>
+    </data>
+                
+    There are any number of "resheader" rows that contain simple 
+    name/value pairs.
+    
+    Each data row contains a name, and value. The row also contains a 
+    type or mimetype. Type corresponds to a .NET class that support 
+    text/value conversion through the TypeConverter architecture. 
+    Classes that don't support this are serialized and stored with the 
+    mimetype set.
+    
+    The mimetype is used for serialized objects, and tells the 
+    ResXResourceReader how to depersist the object. This is currently not 
+    extensible. For a given mimetype the value must be set accordingly:
+    
+    Note - application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64 is the format 
+    that the ResXResourceWriter will generate, however the reader can 
+    read any of the formats listed below.
+    
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized with 
+            : System.Serialization.Formatters.Binary.BinaryFormatter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+    
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.soap.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized with 
+            : System.Runtime.Serialization.Formatters.Soap.SoapFormatter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized into a byte array 
+            : using a System.ComponentModel.TypeConverter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+    -->
+  <xsd:schema id="root" xmlns="" xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema" xmlns:msdata="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:xml-msdata">
+    <xsd:element name="root" msdata:IsDataSet="true">
+      <xsd:complexType>
+        <xsd:choice maxOccurs="unbounded">
+          <xsd:element name="metadata">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="assembly">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:attribute name="alias" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="data">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+                <xsd:element name="comment" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="2" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="3" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="4" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="resheader">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" use="required" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+        </xsd:choice>
+      </xsd:complexType>
+    </xsd:element>
+  </xsd:schema>
+  <resheader name="resmimetype">
+    <value>text/microsoft-resx</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="version">
+    <value>2.0</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="reader">
+    <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="writer">
+    <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value>
+  </resheader>
+</root>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..95fc3ad58
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// <auto-generated>
+//     This code was generated by a tool.
+//     Runtime Version:4.0.30319.239
+//
+//     Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if
+//     the code is regenerated.
+// </auto-generated>
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+namespace TemperatureLoggerHostApp.Properties {
+    
+    
+    [global::System.Runtime.CompilerServices.CompilerGeneratedAttribute()]
+    [global::System.CodeDom.Compiler.GeneratedCodeAttribute("Microsoft.VisualStudio.Editors.SettingsDesigner.SettingsSingleFileGenerator", "10.0.0.0")]
+    internal sealed partial class Settings : global::System.Configuration.ApplicationSettingsBase {
+        
+        private static Settings defaultInstance = ((Settings)(global::System.Configuration.ApplicationSettingsBase.Synchronized(new Settings())));
+        
+        public static Settings Default {
+            get {
+                return defaultInstance;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Settings.settings b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Settings.settings
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..39645652a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Settings.settings
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+<SettingsFile xmlns="http://schemas.microsoft.com/VisualStudio/2004/01/settings" CurrentProfile="(Default)">
+  <Profiles>
+    <Profile Name="(Default)" />
+  </Profiles>
+  <Settings />
+</SettingsFile>
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/README.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/README.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ab6b9a83a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/README.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+http://en.sourceforge.jp/projects/sfnet_libhidnet/
+
+This library has been tested on Windows Vista 32bit, Windows Vista 64bit,
+Windows XP 32bit and Debian (Lenny) AMD64 but should work on any version of
+Windows that can run the .NET framework 2.0 and any other operating system
+that has both hiddev and Mono.
+
+Any additions must be tested and work on Windows and Linux, on both 32 and
+64 bit. Windows 64 bit testing is particularly important as it is often
+neglected.
+
+
+Hid.Linux.dll was compiled under Linux with Mono (mcs) and uses no generics.
+
+Hid.Win32.dll and Hid.Net.dll were compiled under Windows with the .NET
+Framework v2.0.50727 but are also tested to compile with Mono (gmcs).
+
+
+A good starting point when using this library is Hid.DeviceFactory's Enumerate
+methods.
+
+LogitechMX5000.cs is a simple example of how the library can be used. Other
+examples on common devices are welcomed.
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/TempLoggerHostApp.csproj b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/TempLoggerHostApp.csproj
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8517d6f42
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/TempLoggerHostApp.csproj
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<Project ToolsVersion="4.0" DefaultTargets="Build" xmlns="http://schemas.microsoft.com/developer/msbuild/2003">
+  <PropertyGroup>
+    <Configuration Condition=" '$(Configuration)' == '' ">Debug</Configuration>
+    <Platform Condition=" '$(Platform)' == '' ">AnyCPU</Platform>
+    <ProductVersion>9.0.21022</ProductVersion>
+    <SchemaVersion>2.0</SchemaVersion>
+    <ProjectGuid>{A2D66069-8CF9-4104-828C-49A73D7DB5D1}</ProjectGuid>
+    <OutputType>WinExe</OutputType>
+    <AppDesignerFolder>Properties</AppDesignerFolder>
+    <RootNamespace>TemperatureLoggerHostApp</RootNamespace>
+    <AssemblyName>TemperatureLoggerHostApp</AssemblyName>
+    <TargetFrameworkVersion>v3.5</TargetFrameworkVersion>
+    <FileAlignment>512</FileAlignment>
+    <FileUpgradeFlags>
+    </FileUpgradeFlags>
+    <OldToolsVersion>3.5</OldToolsVersion>
+    <UpgradeBackupLocation />
+  </PropertyGroup>
+  <PropertyGroup Condition=" '$(Configuration)|$(Platform)' == 'Debug|AnyCPU' ">
+    <DebugSymbols>true</DebugSymbols>
+    <DebugType>full</DebugType>
+    <Optimize>false</Optimize>
+    <OutputPath>bin\Debug\</OutputPath>
+    <DefineConstants>DEBUG;TRACE</DefineConstants>
+    <ErrorReport>prompt</ErrorReport>
+    <WarningLevel>4</WarningLevel>
+  </PropertyGroup>
+  <PropertyGroup Condition=" '$(Configuration)|$(Platform)' == 'Release|AnyCPU' ">
+    <DebugType>pdbonly</DebugType>
+    <Optimize>true</Optimize>
+    <OutputPath>bin\Release\</OutputPath>
+    <DefineConstants>TRACE</DefineConstants>
+    <ErrorReport>prompt</ErrorReport>
+    <WarningLevel>4</WarningLevel>
+  </PropertyGroup>
+  <ItemGroup>
+    <Reference Include="Hid.Net, Version=1.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, processorArchitecture=MSIL">
+      <SpecificVersion>False</SpecificVersion>
+      <HintPath>.\Hid.Net.dll</HintPath>
+    </Reference>
+    <Reference Include="System" />
+    <Reference Include="System.Core">
+      <RequiredTargetFramework>3.5</RequiredTargetFramework>
+    </Reference>
+    <Reference Include="System.Xml.Linq">
+      <RequiredTargetFramework>3.5</RequiredTargetFramework>
+    </Reference>
+    <Reference Include="System.Data.DataSetExtensions">
+      <RequiredTargetFramework>3.5</RequiredTargetFramework>
+    </Reference>
+    <Reference Include="System.Data" />
+    <Reference Include="System.Deployment" />
+    <Reference Include="System.Drawing" />
+    <Reference Include="System.Windows.Forms" />
+    <Reference Include="System.Xml" />
+  </ItemGroup>
+  <ItemGroup>
+    <Compile Include="DataLoggerSettings.cs">
+      <SubType>Form</SubType>
+    </Compile>
+    <Compile Include="DataLoggerSettings.Designer.cs">
+      <DependentUpon>DataLoggerSettings.cs</DependentUpon>
+    </Compile>
+    <Compile Include="Program.cs" />
+    <Compile Include="Properties\AssemblyInfo.cs" />
+    <EmbeddedResource Include="DataLoggerSettings.resx">
+      <DependentUpon>DataLoggerSettings.cs</DependentUpon>
+      <SubType>Designer</SubType>
+    </EmbeddedResource>
+    <EmbeddedResource Include="Properties\Resources.resx">
+      <Generator>ResXFileCodeGenerator</Generator>
+      <LastGenOutput>Resources.Designer.cs</LastGenOutput>
+      <SubType>Designer</SubType>
+    </EmbeddedResource>
+    <Compile Include="Properties\Resources.Designer.cs">
+      <AutoGen>True</AutoGen>
+      <DependentUpon>Resources.resx</DependentUpon>
+      <DesignTime>True</DesignTime>
+    </Compile>
+    <None Include="Properties\Settings.settings">
+      <Generator>SettingsSingleFileGenerator</Generator>
+      <LastGenOutput>Settings.Designer.cs</LastGenOutput>
+    </None>
+    <Compile Include="Properties\Settings.Designer.cs">
+      <AutoGen>True</AutoGen>
+      <DependentUpon>Settings.settings</DependentUpon>
+      <DesignTimeSharedInput>True</DesignTimeSharedInput>
+    </Compile>
+  </ItemGroup>
+  <Import Project="$(MSBuildToolsPath)\Microsoft.CSharp.targets" />
+  <!-- To modify your build process, add your task inside one of the targets below and uncomment it. 
+       Other similar extension points exist, see Microsoft.Common.targets.
+  <Target Name="BeforeBuild">
+  </Target>
+  <Target Name="AfterBuild">
+  </Target>
+  -->
+</Project>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp_Python/temp_log_config.py b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp_Python/temp_log_config.py
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5a6bf2da1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp_Python/temp_log_config.py
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+"""
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+"""
+
+"""
+    Front-end configuration app for the TempDataLogger project. This script
+    configures the logger to the current system time and date, with a user
+    defined logging interval.
+
+    The logging interval should be specified in milliseconds and is rounded to
+    a multiple of 500ms.
+
+    Usage:
+        python temp_log_config.py <Log_Interval>
+
+    Example:
+        python temp_log_config.py 500
+
+    Requires the pywinusb library (https://pypi.python.org/pypi/pywinusb/).
+"""
+
+import sys
+from datetime import datetime
+import pywinusb.hid as hid
+
+# Generic HID device VID, PID and report payload length (length is increased
+# by one to account for the Report ID byte that must be pre-pended)
+device_vid = 0x03EB
+device_pid = 0x2063
+report_length = 1 + 7
+
+
+def get_hid_device_handle():
+    hid_device_filter = hid.HidDeviceFilter(vendor_id=device_vid,
+                                            product_id=device_pid)
+
+    valid_hid_devices = hid_device_filter.get_devices()
+
+    if len(valid_hid_devices) is 0:
+        return None
+    else:
+        return valid_hid_devices[0]
+
+
+def configure_temp_log_device(device, time_date, log_interval_500ms):
+    # Report data for the demo is the report ID (always zero)
+    report_data = [0]
+
+    # Followed by the time/date data
+    report_data.extend([time_date.hour, time_date.minute,
+                        time_date.second, time_date.day,
+                        time_date.month, time_date.year - 2000])
+
+    # Lastly the log interval in 500ms units of time
+    report_data.extend([log_interval_500ms])
+
+    # Zero-extend the array to the length the report should be
+    report_data.extend([0] * (report_length - len(report_data)))
+
+    # Send the generated report to the device
+    device.send_output_report(report_data)
+
+
+def main(time_date, log_interval_500ms):
+    hid_device = get_hid_device_handle()
+
+    if hid_device is None:
+        print("No valid HID device found.")
+        sys.exit(1)
+
+    try:
+        hid_device.open()
+
+        print("Connected to device 0x%04X/0x%04X - %s [%s]" %
+              (hid_device.vendor_id, hid_device.product_id,
+               hid_device.product_name, hid_device.vendor_name))
+
+        configure_temp_log_device(hid_device, time_date, log_interval_500ms)
+
+        print("Time/Date is now set to %s" % time_date)
+        print("Log interval is now set to every %0.1fs" % (log_interval_500ms * (500.0 / 1000.0)))
+
+    finally:
+        hid_device.close()
+
+
+if __name__ == '__main__':
+    time_date = datetime.now()
+    log_interval_500ms = (int(sys.argv[1]) / 500) if len(sys.argv) > 1 else 2
+
+    # Clamp the log interval to the allowable range
+    log_interval_500ms = max(log_interval_500ms, 0x01)
+    log_interval_500ms = min(log_interval_500ms, 0xFF)
+
+    main(time_date, log_interval_500ms)
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TemperatureDataLogger.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TemperatureDataLogger.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4d4e0b5e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TemperatureDataLogger.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Temperature Datalogger Project
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4) - <i>those with >16KB of FLASH memory only</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Classes:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Mass Storage Device \n
+ *        Human Interface Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclasses:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Bulk-Only Transport \n
+ *        Keyboard Subclass</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n
+ *        USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n
+ *        SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n
+ *        SCSI Block Commands Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Temperature Data Logger project. This project is a very basic USB data logger for the current temperature as reported by
+ *  the board's temperature sensor, writing the temperature to a file stored on the board's Dataflash in a FAT filesystem
+ *  each time a specified interval elapses. When inserted into a PC, the datalogger will appear as a standard USB Mass Storage
+ *  device with a single text file, which contains the logged data. Files are named according to the current date when the
+ *  logging commences.
+ *
+ *  A DS1307 or compatible RTC IC is designed to be attached to the AVR's TWI bus, for the management of timestamps on the
+ *  sampled data. This project will not function correctly if the RTC chip is omitted unless the DUMMY_RTC compile time token
+ *  is specified - see \ref Sec_Options.
+ *
+ *  Due to the host's need for exclusive access to the file system, the device will not log samples while connected to a host.
+ *  For the logger to store data, the Dataflash must first be formatted by the host so that it contains a valid FAT file system.
+ *
+ *  This project uses the FatFS library from ELM Chan (http://elm-chan.org/fsw/ff/00index_e.html) and the .NET HID device library
+ *  LibHIDNet (http://sourceforge.net/projects/libhidnet/).
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>DUMMY_RTC</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When a DS1307 RTC chip is not fitted, this token can be defined to make the demo use a dummy software RTC using the system
+ *        clock. This is less accurate and does not store the set time and date into non-volatile memory.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bf7ee2c3f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Temperature Datalogger" id="lufa.projects.temp_datalogger.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.projects.temp_datalogger"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.projects.temp_datalogger" caption="Temperature Datalogger">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Temperature Datalogger project.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+			<keyword value="Mass Storage Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="TemperatureDataLogger.txt"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="directory" value="TempLogHostApp"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="directory" value="TempLogHostApp_Python"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="TempDataLogger.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="TempDataLogger.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/DataflashManager.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/DataflashManager.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/RTC.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/RTC.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/SCSI.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/SCSI.h"/>

+

+		<build type="include-path" value="Lib/FATFs/"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/FATFs/ff.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/FATFs/ff.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/FATFs/diskio.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/FATFs/diskio.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/FATFs/integer.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.temperature"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.dataflash"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.adc"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.twi"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a9f335379
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2366 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "Temperature Datalogger Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/ \
+                         TempLogHostApp/ \
+                         TempLogHostApp_Python/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..eb662f66b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = TempDataLogger
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c Lib/DataflashManager.c Lib/RTC.c Lib/SCSI.c Lib/FATFs/diskio.c Lib/FATFs/ff.c \
+               $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL) $(LUFA_SRC_TWI) $(LUFA_SRC_TEMPERATURE)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4d5f58a4a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              0
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1000c4a34
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,245 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+	.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x204B,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Header =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.CDCSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_ACM =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM,
+
+			.Capabilities           = 0x06,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Union =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union,
+
+			.MasterInterfaceNumber  = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.SlaveInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_NotificationEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA USB-RS232 Adapter");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ce014c632
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 2)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+
+			// CDC Command Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t    CDC_Functional_Header;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t       CDC_Functional_ACM;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t     CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_NotificationEndpoint;
+
+			// CDC Data Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI = 0, /**< CDC CCI interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI = 1, /**< CDC DCI interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/LUFA USBtoSerial.inf b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/LUFA USBtoSerial.inf
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b00fab6a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/LUFA USBtoSerial.inf
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+;************************************************************
+; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+;************************************************************
+
+[DefaultInstall]
+CopyINF="LUFA USBtoSerial.inf"
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+DriverVer=7/1/2012,10.0.0.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTx86, NTamd64, NTia64
+
+[SourceDisksNames]
+
+[SourceDisksFiles]
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+[DriverInstall]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=FakeModemCopyFileSection
+AddReg=DriverInstall.AddReg
+
+[DriverInstall.Services]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, LowerFilter_Service_Inst
+
+[DriverInstall.AddReg]
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"msports.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B
+
+[DeviceList.NTx86]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B
+
+[DeviceList.NTia64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org"
+DESCRIPTION="LUFA USB to Serial"
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..343b51ba5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.c
@@ -0,0 +1,254 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the USBtoSerial project. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "USBtoSerial.h"
+
+/** Circular buffer to hold data from the host before it is sent to the device via the serial port. */
+static RingBuffer_t USBtoUSART_Buffer;
+
+/** Underlying data buffer for \ref USBtoUSART_Buffer, where the stored bytes are located. */
+static uint8_t      USBtoUSART_Buffer_Data[128];
+
+/** Circular buffer to hold data from the serial port before it is sent to the host. */
+static RingBuffer_t USARTtoUSB_Buffer;
+
+/** Underlying data buffer for \ref USARTtoUSB_Buffer, where the stored bytes are located. */
+static uint8_t      USARTtoUSB_Buffer_Data[128];
+
+/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber         = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+				.DataINEndpoint                 =
+					{
+						.Address                = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint                =
+					{
+						.Address                = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+				.NotificationEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address                = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	RingBuffer_InitBuffer(&USBtoUSART_Buffer, USBtoUSART_Buffer_Data, sizeof(USBtoUSART_Buffer_Data));
+	RingBuffer_InitBuffer(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer, USARTtoUSB_Buffer_Data, sizeof(USARTtoUSB_Buffer_Data));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		/* Only try to read in bytes from the CDC interface if the transmit buffer is not full */
+		if (!(RingBuffer_IsFull(&USBtoUSART_Buffer)))
+		{
+			int16_t ReceivedByte = CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+
+			/* Store received byte into the USART transmit buffer */
+			if (!(ReceivedByte < 0))
+			  RingBuffer_Insert(&USBtoUSART_Buffer, ReceivedByte);
+		}
+
+		uint16_t BufferCount = RingBuffer_GetCount(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer);
+		if (BufferCount)
+		{
+			Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface.Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);
+
+			/* Check if a packet is already enqueued to the host - if so, we shouldn't try to send more data
+			 * until it completes as there is a chance nothing is listening and a lengthy timeout could occur */
+			if (Endpoint_IsINReady())
+			{
+				/* Never send more than one bank size less one byte to the host at a time, so that we don't block
+				 * while a Zero Length Packet (ZLP) to terminate the transfer is sent if the host isn't listening */
+				uint8_t BytesToSend = MIN(BufferCount, (CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE - 1));
+
+				/* Read bytes from the USART receive buffer into the USB IN endpoint */
+				while (BytesToSend--)
+				{
+					/* Try to send the next byte of data to the host, abort if there is an error without dequeuing */
+					if (CDC_Device_SendByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface,
+											RingBuffer_Peek(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer)) != ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError)
+					{
+						break;
+					}
+
+					/* Dequeue the already sent byte from the buffer now we have confirmed that no transmission error occurred */
+					RingBuffer_Remove(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer);
+				}
+			}
+		}
+
+		/* Load the next byte from the USART transmit buffer into the USART if transmit buffer space is available */
+		if (Serial_IsSendReady() && !(RingBuffer_IsEmpty(&USBtoUSART_Buffer)))
+		  Serial_SendByte(RingBuffer_Remove(&USBtoUSART_Buffer));
+
+		CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	ConfigSuccess &= CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+}
+
+/** ISR to manage the reception of data from the serial port, placing received bytes into a circular buffer
+ *  for later transmission to the host.
+ */
+ISR(USART1_RX_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	uint8_t ReceivedByte = UDR1;
+
+	if ((USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Configured) && !(RingBuffer_IsFull(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer)))
+	  RingBuffer_Insert(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer, ReceivedByte);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the CDC Class driver Line Encoding Changed event.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the CDC class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ */
+void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t ConfigMask = 0;
+
+	switch (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.ParityType)
+	{
+		case CDC_PARITY_Odd:
+			ConfigMask = ((1 << UPM11) | (1 << UPM10));
+			break;
+		case CDC_PARITY_Even:
+			ConfigMask = (1 << UPM11);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	if (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.CharFormat == CDC_LINEENCODING_TwoStopBits)
+	  ConfigMask |= (1 << USBS1);
+
+	switch (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.DataBits)
+	{
+		case 6:
+			ConfigMask |= (1 << UCSZ10);
+			break;
+		case 7:
+			ConfigMask |= (1 << UCSZ11);
+			break;
+		case 8:
+			ConfigMask |= ((1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10));
+			break;
+	}
+
+	/* Keep the TX line held high (idle) while the USART is reconfigured */
+	PORTD |= (1 << 3);
+
+	/* Must turn off USART before reconfiguring it, otherwise incorrect operation may occur */
+	UCSR1B = 0;
+	UCSR1A = 0;
+	UCSR1C = 0;
+
+	/* Set the new baud rate before configuring the USART */
+	UBRR1  = SERIAL_2X_UBBRVAL(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS);
+
+	/* Reconfigure the USART in double speed mode for a wider baud rate range at the expense of accuracy */
+	UCSR1C = ConfigMask;
+	UCSR1A = (1 << U2X1);
+	UCSR1B = ((1 << RXCIE1) | (1 << TXEN1) | (1 << RXEN1));
+
+	/* Release the TX line after the USART has been reconfigured */
+	PORTD &= ~(1 << 3);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..afa3e43d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.h
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for USBtoSerial.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _USB_SERIAL_H_
+#define _USB_SERIAL_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/RingBuffer.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+		void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0620f9393
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage USB to Serial Converter Project
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  USB to Serial bridge project. This project allows a USB AVR to serve
+ *  as a USB to USART bridge between a USB host and a device lacking a
+ *  USB port. When programmed into a USB AVR, the AVR will enumerate as a
+ *  virtual COM port.
+ *
+ *  The AVR's hardware USART's settings will change to mirror as closely as
+ *  possible the serial settings set on the host. However, due to hardware
+ *  limitations, some options may not be supported (baud rates with unacceptable
+ *  error rates at the AVR's clock speed, data lengths other than 6, 7 or 8 bits,
+ *  1.5 stop bits, parity other than none, even or odd).
+ *
+ *  After running this project for the first time on a new computer,
+ *  you will need to supply the .INF file located in this project
+ *  project's directory as the device's driver when running under
+ *  Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers,
+ *  negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other
+ *  Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt
+ *  CDC-ACM drivers.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5afcafe7c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="USB to Serial Converter" id="lufa.projects.usb_to_serial.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.projects.usb_to_serial"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.projects.usb_to_serial" caption="USB to Serial Converter">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		USB to Serial USART converter project.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="CDC Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="USBtoSerial.txt"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="LUFA USBtoSerial.inf"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="USBtoSerial.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="USBtoSerial.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ringbuffer"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d5e415aa6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - USB to Serial Device Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..72daabd90
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = USBtoSerial
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..40ebe7ddc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
+ *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
+ *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
+ *  makefile or build system.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#define ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT
+	#define ENABLE_DHCP_SERVER
+	#define ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER
+	#define MAX_URI_LENGTH                50
+
+	#define DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS             (uint8_t[]){ 10,   0,   0,   2}
+	#define DEVICE_NETMASK                (uint8_t[]){255, 255, 255,   0}
+	#define DEVICE_GATEWAY                (uint8_t[]){ 10,   0,   0,   1}
+	#define SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS            (uint8_t[]){  1,   0,   1,   0,   1,   0}
+
+	#define UIP_CONF_UDP                  (defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT) || defined(ENABLE_DHCP_SERVER))
+	#define UIP_CONF_BROADCAST            1
+	#define UIP_CONF_TCP                  1
+	#define UIP_CONF_UDP_CONNS            1
+	#define UIP_CONF_MAX_CONNECTIONS      3
+	#define UIP_CONF_MAX_LISTENPORTS      5
+	#define UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE          1514
+	#define UIP_CONF_LL_802154            0
+	#define UIP_CONF_LL_80211             0
+	#define UIP_CONF_ROUTER               0
+	#define UIP_CONF_ICMP6                0
+	#define UIP_CONF_ICMP_DEST_UNREACH    1
+	#define UIP_URGDATA                   0
+	#define UIP_ARCH_CHKSUM               0
+	#define UIP_ARCH_ADD32                0
+	#define UIP_NEIGHBOR_CONF_ADDRTYPE    0
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fa407999e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              0
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7be6e4b21
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,295 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2069,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 3,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED,
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.CDC_IAD =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t), .Type = DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation},
+
+			.FirstInterfaceIndex    = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_VendorSpecificProtocol,
+
+			.IADStrIndex            = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_VendorSpecificProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Header =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.CDCSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_ACM =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM,
+
+			.Capabilities           = 0x00,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Union =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union,
+
+			.MasterInterfaceNumber  = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.SlaveInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_NotificationEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.RNDIS_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.RNDIS_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.MS_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = MS_CSCP_MassStorageClass,
+			.SubClass               = MS_CSCP_SCSITransparentSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = MS_CSCP_BulkOnlyTransportProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Webserver");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6b656e4b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR         (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE         64
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 5)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 1)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 2)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                64
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t  Config;
+
+			// RNDIS CDC Command Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t CDC_IAD;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t             CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t  CDC_Functional_Header;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t     CDC_Functional_ACM;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t   CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t              CDC_NotificationEndpoint;
+
+			// RNDIS CDC Data Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t             CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t              RNDIS_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t              RNDIS_DataInEndpoint;
+
+			// Mass Storage Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t             MS_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t              MS_DataInEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t              MS_DataOutEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI     = 0, /**< CDC CCI interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI     = 1, /**< CDC DCI interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage = 2, /**< Mass storage interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/LUFA Webserver RNDIS.inf b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/LUFA Webserver RNDIS.inf
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c77de8f6b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/LUFA Webserver RNDIS.inf
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+;     Windows LUFA RNDIS Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+
+[DefaultInstall]
+CopyINF="LUFA Webserver RNDIS.inf"
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Net
+ClassGuid={4d36e972-e325-11ce-bfc1-08002be10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+DriverVer=7/1/2012,10.0.0.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTx86, NTamd64, NTia64
+
+[ControlFlags]
+ExcludeFromSelect=*
+
+[DriverInstall]
+Characteristics=0x84 ; NCF_PHYSICAL + NCF_HAS_UI
+BusType=15
+include=netrndis.inf
+needs=Usb_Rndis.ndi
+AddReg=Rndis_AddReg_Vista
+
+[DriverInstall.Services]
+include=netrndis.inf
+needs=Usb_Rndis.ndi.Services
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2069
+
+[DeviceList.NTx86]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2069
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2069
+
+[DeviceList.NTia64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2069
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org"
+DESCRIPTION="LUFA USB RNDIS Demo"
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3b1d2d702
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.c
@@ -0,0 +1,208 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  DHCP Client Application. When connected to the uIP stack, this will retrieve IP configuration settings from the
+ *  DHCP server on the network.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DHCPCLIENTAPP_C
+#include "DHCPClientApp.h"
+
+#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+
+/** Initialization function for the DHCP client. */
+void DHCPClientApp_Init(void)
+{
+	/* Create a new UDP connection to the DHCP server port for the DHCP solicitation */
+	struct uip_udp_conn* Connection = uip_udp_new(&uip_broadcast_addr, HTONS(DHCP_SERVER_PORT));
+
+	/* If the connection was successfully created, bind it to the local DHCP client port */
+	if (Connection != NULL)
+	{
+		uip_udp_appstate_t* const AppState = &Connection->appstate;
+		uip_udp_bind(Connection, HTONS(DHCP_CLIENT_PORT));
+
+		/* Set the initial client state */
+		AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_SendDiscover;
+
+		/* Set timeout period to half a second for a DHCP server to respond */
+		timer_set(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout, CLOCK_SECOND / 2);
+	}
+}
+
+/** uIP stack application callback for the DHCP client. This function must be called each time the TCP/IP stack
+ *  needs a UDP packet to be processed.
+ */
+void DHCPClientApp_Callback(void)
+{
+	uip_udp_appstate_t* const AppState    = &uip_udp_conn->appstate;
+	DHCP_Header_t*      const AppData     = (DHCP_Header_t*)uip_appdata;
+	uint16_t                  AppDataSize = 0;
+
+	switch (AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState)
+	{
+		case DHCP_STATE_SendDiscover:
+			/* Clear all DHCP settings, reset client IP address */
+			memset(&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data, 0x00, sizeof(AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data));
+			uip_sethostaddr((uip_ipaddr_t*)&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.AllocatedIP);
+
+			/* Fill out the DHCP response header */
+			AppDataSize += DHCPClientApp_FillDHCPHeader(AppData, DHCP_DISCOVER, AppState);
+
+			/* Add the required DHCP options list to the packet */
+			uint8_t RequiredOptionList[] = {DHCP_OPTION_SUBNET_MASK, DHCP_OPTION_ROUTER, DHCP_OPTION_DNS_SERVER};
+			AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_REQ_LIST, sizeof(RequiredOptionList),
+			                                    RequiredOptionList);
+
+			/* Send the DHCP DISCOVER packet */
+			uip_udp_send(AppDataSize);
+
+			/* Reset the timeout timer, progress to next state */
+			timer_reset(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout);
+			AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_WaitForOffer;
+
+			break;
+		case DHCP_STATE_WaitForOffer:
+			if (!(uip_newdata()))
+			{
+				/* Check if the DHCP timeout period has expired while waiting for a response */
+				if (timer_expired(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout))
+				  AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_SendDiscover;
+
+				break;
+			}
+
+			uint8_t OfferResponse_MessageType;
+			if ((AppData->TransactionID == DHCP_TRANSACTION_ID) &&
+			    DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE, &OfferResponse_MessageType) &&
+			    (OfferResponse_MessageType == DHCP_OFFER))
+			{
+				/* Received a DHCP offer for an IP address, copy over values for later request */
+				memcpy(&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.AllocatedIP, &AppData->YourIP, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
+				DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_SUBNET_MASK, &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.Netmask);
+				DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_ROUTER,      &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.GatewayIP);
+				DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_SERVER_ID,   &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.ServerIP);
+
+				timer_reset(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout);
+				AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_SendRequest;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case DHCP_STATE_SendRequest:
+			/* Fill out the DHCP response header */
+			AppDataSize += DHCPClientApp_FillDHCPHeader(AppData, DHCP_REQUEST, AppState);
+
+			/* Add the DHCP REQUESTED IP ADDRESS option to the packet */
+			AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_REQ_IPADDR, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t),
+			                                    &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.AllocatedIP);
+
+			/* Add the DHCP SERVER IP ADDRESS option to the packet */
+			AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_SERVER_ID, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t),
+			                                    &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.ServerIP);
+
+			/* Send the DHCP REQUEST packet */
+			uip_udp_send(AppDataSize);
+
+			/* Reset the timeout timer, progress to next state */
+			timer_reset(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout);
+			AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_WaitForACK;
+
+			break;
+		case DHCP_STATE_WaitForACK:
+			if (!(uip_newdata()))
+			{
+				/* Check if the DHCP timeout period has expired while waiting for a response */
+				if (timer_expired(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout))
+				  AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_SendDiscover;
+
+				break;
+			}
+
+			uint8_t RequestResponse_MessageType;
+			if ((AppData->TransactionID == DHCP_TRANSACTION_ID) &&
+			    DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE, &RequestResponse_MessageType) &&
+			    (RequestResponse_MessageType == DHCP_ACK))
+			{
+				/* Set the new network parameters from the DHCP server */
+				uip_sethostaddr((uip_ipaddr_t*)&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.AllocatedIP);
+				uip_setnetmask((uip_ipaddr_t*)&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.Netmask);
+				uip_setdraddr((uip_ipaddr_t*)&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.GatewayIP);
+
+				AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_AddressLeased;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Fills the DHCP packet response with the appropriate BOOTP header for DHCP. This fills out all the required
+ *  fields, leaving only the additional DHCP options to be added to the packet before it is sent to the DHCP server.
+ *
+ *  \param[out] DHCPHeader       Location in the packet buffer where the BOOTP header should be written to
+ *  \param[in]  DHCPMessageType  DHCP Message type, such as DHCP_DISCOVER
+ *  \param[in]  AppState         Application state of the current UDP connection
+ *
+ *  \return Size in bytes of the created DHCP packet
+ */
+static uint16_t DHCPClientApp_FillDHCPHeader(DHCP_Header_t* const DHCPHeader,
+                                             const uint8_t DHCPMessageType,
+                                             uip_udp_appstate_t* const AppState)
+{
+	/* Erase existing packet data so that we start will all 0x00 DHCP header data */
+ 	memset(DHCPHeader, 0, sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
+
+	/* Fill out the DHCP packet header */
+	DHCPHeader->Operation             = DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST;
+	DHCPHeader->HardwareType          = DHCP_HTYPE_ETHERNET;
+	DHCPHeader->HardwareAddressLength = sizeof(MACAddress);
+	DHCPHeader->Hops                  = 0;
+	DHCPHeader->TransactionID         = DHCP_TRANSACTION_ID;
+	DHCPHeader->ElapsedSeconds        = 0;
+	DHCPHeader->Flags                 = HTONS(BOOTP_BROADCAST);
+	memcpy(&DHCPHeader->ClientIP,     &uip_hostaddr,        sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
+	memcpy(&DHCPHeader->YourIP,       &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.AllocatedIP, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
+	memcpy(&DHCPHeader->NextServerIP, &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.ServerIP,    sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
+	memcpy(&DHCPHeader->ClientHardwareAddress, &MACAddress, sizeof(struct uip_eth_addr));
+	DHCPHeader->Cookie                = DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE;
+
+	/* Add a DHCP message type and terminator options to the start of the DHCP options field */
+	DHCPHeader->Options[0]            = DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE;
+	DHCPHeader->Options[1]            = 1;
+	DHCPHeader->Options[2]            = DHCPMessageType;
+	DHCPHeader->Options[3]            = DHCP_OPTION_END;
+
+	/* Calculate the total number of bytes added to the outgoing packet */
+	return (sizeof(DHCP_Header_t) + 4);
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..298ff7354
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.h
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DHCPClientApp.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DHCPCLIENT_APP_H_
+#define _DHCPCLIENT_APP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <uip.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+		#include "../Webserver.h"
+		#include "DHCPCommon.h"
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** States for each DHCP connection to a DHCP client. */
+		enum DHCP_Client_States_t
+		{
+			DHCP_STATE_SendDiscover,  /**< Send DISCOVER packet to retrieve DHCP lease offers */
+			DHCP_STATE_WaitForOffer,  /**< Waiting for OFFER packet giving available DHCP leases */
+			DHCP_STATE_SendRequest,   /**< Send REQUEST packet to request a DHCP lease */
+			DHCP_STATE_WaitForACK,    /**< Wait for ACK packet to complete the DHCP lease */
+			DHCP_STATE_AddressLeased, /**< DHCP address has been leased from a DHCP server */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void DHCPClientApp_Init(void);
+		void DHCPClientApp_Callback(void);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_DHCPCLIENTAPP_C)
+			static uint16_t DHCPClientApp_FillDHCPHeader(DHCP_Header_t* const DHCPHeader,
+			                                             const uint8_t DHCPMessageType,
+			                                             uip_udp_appstate_t* const AppState);
+		#endif
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPCommon.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPCommon.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7dbcaf069
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPCommon.c
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Common DHCP routines to manage DHCP packet data.
+ */
+
+#include "DHCPCommon.h"
+
+#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT) || defined(ENABLE_DHCP_SERVER) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+
+/** Sets the given DHCP option in the DHCP packet's option list. This automatically moves the
+ *  end of options terminator past the new option in the options list.
+ *
+ *  \param[in,out] DHCPOptionList  Pointer to the start of the DHCP packet's options list
+ *  \param[in]     Option          DHCP option to add to the list
+ *  \param[in]     DataLen         Size in bytes of the option data to add
+ *  \param[in]     OptionData      Buffer where the option's data is to be sourced from
+ *
+ *  \return Number of bytes added to the DHCP packet
+ */
+uint8_t DHCPCommon_SetOption(uint8_t* DHCPOptionList,
+                             const uint8_t Option,
+                             const uint8_t DataLen,
+                             void* const OptionData)
+{
+	/* Skip through the DHCP options list until the terminator option is found */
+	while (*DHCPOptionList != DHCP_OPTION_END)
+	  DHCPOptionList += (DHCPOptionList[1] + 2);
+
+	/* Overwrite the existing terminator with the new option, add a new terminator at the end of the list */
+	DHCPOptionList[0] = Option;
+	DHCPOptionList[1] = DataLen;
+	memcpy(&DHCPOptionList[2], OptionData, DataLen);
+	DHCPOptionList[2 + DataLen] = DHCP_OPTION_END;
+
+	/* Calculate the total number of bytes added to the outgoing packet */
+	return (2 + DataLen);
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the given option's data (if present) from the DHCP packet's options list.
+ *
+ *  \param[in,out] DHCPOptionList  Pointer to the start of the DHCP packet's options list
+ *  \param[in]     Option          DHCP option to retrieve to the list
+ *  \param[out]    Destination     Buffer where the option's data is to be written to if found
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the option was found in the DHCP packet's options list, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool DHCPCommon_GetOption(const uint8_t* DHCPOptionList,
+                          const uint8_t Option,
+                          void* const Destination)
+{
+	/* Look through the incoming DHCP packet's options list for the requested option */
+	while (*DHCPOptionList != DHCP_OPTION_END)
+	{
+		/* Check if the current DHCP option in the packet is the one requested */
+		if (DHCPOptionList[0] == Option)
+		{
+			/* Copy request option's data to the destination buffer */
+			memcpy(Destination, &DHCPOptionList[2], DHCPOptionList[1]);
+
+			/* Indicate that the requested option data was successfully retrieved */
+			return true;
+		}
+
+		/* Skip to next DHCP option in the options list */
+		DHCPOptionList += (DHCPOptionList[1] + 2);
+	}
+
+	/* Requested option not found in the incoming packet's DHCP options list */
+	return false;
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPCommon.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPCommon.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1ded5420a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPCommon.h
@@ -0,0 +1,159 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for common DHCP defines.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DHCP_COMMON_H_
+#define _DHCP_COMMON_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <stdint.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <uip.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** UDP listen port for a BOOTP server. */
+		#define DHCP_SERVER_PORT          67
+
+		/** UDP listen port for a BOOTP client. */
+		#define DHCP_CLIENT_PORT          68
+
+		/** BOOTP message type for a BOOTP REQUEST message. */
+		#define DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST       0x01
+
+		/** BOOTP message type for a BOOTP REPLY message. */
+		#define DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY         0x02
+
+		/** BOOTP flag for a BOOTP broadcast message. */
+		#define BOOTP_BROADCAST           0x8000
+
+		/** Magic DHCP cookie for a BOOTP message to identify it as a DHCP message. */
+		#define DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE         0x63538263
+
+		/** Unique transaction ID used to identify DHCP responses to the client. */
+		#define DHCP_TRANSACTION_ID       0x13245466
+
+		/** DHCP message type for a DISCOVER message. */
+		#define DHCP_DISCOVER             1
+
+		/** DHCP message type for an OFFER message. */
+		#define DHCP_OFFER                2
+
+		/** DHCP message type for a REQUEST message. */
+		#define DHCP_REQUEST              3
+
+		/** DHCP message type for a DECLINE message. */
+		#define DHCP_DECLINE              4
+
+		/** DHCP message type for an ACK message. */
+		#define DHCP_ACK                  5
+
+		/** DHCP message type for a NAK message. */
+		#define DHCP_NAK                  6
+
+		/** DHCP message type for a RELEASE message. */
+		#define DHCP_RELEASE              7
+
+		/** DHCP medium type for standard Ethernet. */
+		#define DHCP_HTYPE_ETHERNET       1
+
+		/** DHCP message option for the network subnet mask. */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_SUBNET_MASK   1
+
+		/** DHCP message option for the network gateway IP. */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_ROUTER        3
+
+		/** DHCP message option for the network DNS server. */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_DNS_SERVER    6
+
+		/** DHCP message option for the requested client IP address. */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_REQ_IPADDR    50
+
+		/** DHCP message option for the IP address lease time. */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_LEASE_TIME    51
+
+		/** DHCP message option for the DHCP message type. */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE      53
+
+		/** DHCP message option for the DHCP server IP. */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_SERVER_ID     54
+
+		/** DHCP message option for the list of required options from the server. */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_REQ_LIST      55
+
+		/** DHCP message option for the options list terminator. */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_END           255
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a DHCP packet inside an Ethernet frame. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t      Operation; /**< DHCP operation, either DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST or DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY */
+			uint8_t      HardwareType; /**< Hardware carrier type constant */
+			uint8_t      HardwareAddressLength;  /**< Length in bytes of a hardware (MAC) address on the network */
+			uint8_t      Hops; /**< Number of hops required to reach the server, unused */
+
+			uint32_t     TransactionID; /**< Unique ID of the DHCP packet, for positive matching between sent and received packets */
+
+			uint16_t     ElapsedSeconds; /**< Elapsed seconds since the request was made */
+			uint16_t     Flags; /**< BOOTP packet flags */
+
+			uip_ipaddr_t ClientIP; /**< Client IP address, if already leased an IP */
+			uip_ipaddr_t YourIP; /**< Client IP address */
+			uip_ipaddr_t NextServerIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+			uip_ipaddr_t RelayAgentIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+
+			uint8_t      ClientHardwareAddress[16]; /**< Hardware (MAC) address of the client making a request to the DHCP server */
+			uint8_t      ServerHostnameString[64]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+			uint8_t      BootFileName[128]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+
+			uint32_t     Cookie; /**< Magic BOOTP protocol cookie to indicate a valid packet */
+
+			uint8_t      Options[]; /**< DHCP message options */
+		} DHCP_Header_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t  DHCPCommon_SetOption(uint8_t* DHCPOptionList,
+			                          const uint8_t Option,
+			                          const uint8_t DataLen,
+			                          void* const OptionData);
+		bool     DHCPCommon_GetOption(const uint8_t* DHCPOptionList,
+			                          const uint8_t Option,
+			                          void* const Destination);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9ed521e57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.c
@@ -0,0 +1,265 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  DHCP Server Application. When connected to the uIP stack, this will send IP configuration settings to a
+ *  DHCP client on the network.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DHCPSERVERAPP_C
+#include "DHCPServerApp.h"
+
+#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_SERVER) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+
+struct uip_conn* BroadcastConnection;
+
+uint8_t LeasedIPs[255 / 8];
+
+/** Initialization function for the DHCP server. */
+void DHCPServerApp_Init(void)
+{
+	/* Listen on port 67 for DHCP server connections from hosts */
+	uip_listen(HTONS(DHCP_SERVER_PORT));
+
+	/* Create a new UDP connection to the DHCP server port for the DHCP solicitation */
+	struct uip_udp_conn* BroadcastConnection = uip_udp_new(&uip_broadcast_addr, HTONS(DHCP_CLIENT_PORT));
+
+	/* If the connection was successfully created, bind it to the local DHCP client port */
+	if (BroadcastConnection != NULL)
+	  uip_udp_bind(BroadcastConnection, HTONS(DHCP_SERVER_PORT));
+
+	/* Set all IP addresses as unleased */
+	memset(LeasedIPs, 0x00, sizeof(LeasedIPs));
+}
+
+/** uIP stack application callback for the DHCP server. This function must be called each time the TCP/IP stack
+ *  needs a UDP packet to be processed.
+ */
+void DHCPServerApp_Callback(void)
+{
+	DHCP_Header_t* const AppData     = (DHCP_Header_t*)uip_appdata;
+	uint16_t             AppDataSize = 0;
+
+	/* Only process when new data arrives - don't retransmit lost packets */
+	if (uip_newdata())
+	{
+		/* Get the DHCP message type (if present), otherwise early-abort */
+		uint8_t DHCPMessageType;
+		if (!(DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE, &DHCPMessageType)))
+			return;
+
+		uip_ipaddr_t        Netmask, GatewayIPAddress, PreferredClientIP;
+		struct uip_eth_addr RemoteMACAddress;
+		uint32_t            TransactionID;
+
+		/* Get configured network mask, gateway IP and extract out DHCP transaction ID and remote IP */
+		uip_getnetmask(&Netmask);
+		uip_getdraddr(&GatewayIPAddress);
+		memcpy(&RemoteMACAddress, &AppData->ClientHardwareAddress, sizeof(struct uip_eth_addr));
+		TransactionID = AppData->TransactionID;
+
+		/* Try to extract out the client's preferred IP address if it is indicated in the packet */
+		if (!(DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_REQ_IPADDR, &PreferredClientIP)))
+		  memcpy(&PreferredClientIP, &uip_all_zeroes_addr, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
+
+		switch (DHCPMessageType)
+		{
+			case DHCP_DISCOVER:
+				/* If no preference was made or the preferred IP is already taken, find a new address */
+				if (DHCPServerApp_CheckIfIPLeased(&PreferredClientIP))
+				  DHCPServerApp_GetUnleasedIP(&PreferredClientIP);
+
+				/* Create a new DHCP OFFER packet with the offered IP address */
+				AppDataSize += DHCPServerApp_FillDHCPHeader(AppData, DHCP_OFFER, &RemoteMACAddress, &PreferredClientIP, TransactionID);
+
+				/* Add network mask and router information to the list of DHCP OFFER packet options */
+				AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_SUBNET_MASK,
+													sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t), &Netmask);
+				AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_ROUTER,
+					                                sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t), &GatewayIPAddress);
+
+				/* Send the DHCP OFFER packet */
+				uip_poll_conn(BroadcastConnection);
+				memcpy(&uip_udp_conn->ripaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
+				uip_udp_send(AppDataSize);
+
+				break;
+			case DHCP_REQUEST:
+				/* Check to see if the requested IP address has already been leased to a client */
+				if (!(DHCPServerApp_CheckIfIPLeased(&PreferredClientIP)))
+				{
+					/* Create a new DHCP ACK packet to accept the IP address lease */
+					AppDataSize += DHCPServerApp_FillDHCPHeader(AppData, DHCP_ACK, &RemoteMACAddress, &PreferredClientIP, TransactionID);
+
+					/* Add network mask and router information to the list of DHCP ACK packet options */
+					AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_SUBNET_MASK,
+														sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t), &Netmask);
+					AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_ROUTER,
+					                                    sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t), &GatewayIPAddress);
+
+					/* Mark the requested IP as leased to a client */
+					DHCPServerApp_LeaseIP(&PreferredClientIP);
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					/* Create a new DHCP NAK packet to reject the requested allocation */
+					AppDataSize += DHCPServerApp_FillDHCPHeader(AppData, DHCP_NAK, &RemoteMACAddress, &uip_all_zeroes_addr, TransactionID);
+				}
+
+				/* Send the DHCP ACK or NAK packet */
+				uip_poll_conn(BroadcastConnection);
+				memcpy(&uip_udp_conn->ripaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
+				uip_udp_send(AppDataSize);
+
+				break;
+			case DHCP_RELEASE:
+				/* Mark the IP address as released in the allocation table */
+				DHCPServerApp_UnleaseIP(&uip_udp_conn->ripaddr);
+				break;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+/** Fills the DHCP packet response with the appropriate BOOTP header for DHCP. This fills out all the required
+ *  fields, leaving only the additional DHCP options to be added to the packet before it is sent to the DHCP client.
+ *
+ *  \param[out] DHCPHeader             Location in the packet buffer where the BOOTP header should be written to
+ *  \param[in]  DHCPMessageType        DHCP Message type, such as DHCP_DISCOVER
+ *  \param[in]  ClientHardwareAddress  Client MAC address the created transaction should be directed to
+ *  \param[in]  PreferredClientIP      Preferred IP that should be given to the client if it is unallocated
+ *  \param[in]  TransactionID          Transaction ID the created transaction should be associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Size in bytes of the created DHCP packet
+ */
+static uint16_t DHCPServerApp_FillDHCPHeader(DHCP_Header_t* const DHCPHeader,
+                                             const uint8_t DHCPMessageType,
+                                             const struct uip_eth_addr* const ClientHardwareAddress,
+											 const uip_ipaddr_t* const PreferredClientIP,
+                                             const uint32_t TransactionID)
+{
+	/* Erase existing packet data so that we start will all 0x00 DHCP header data */
+ 	memset(DHCPHeader, 0, sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
+
+	DHCPHeader->Operation             = DHCPMessageType;
+	DHCPHeader->HardwareType          = DHCP_HTYPE_ETHERNET;
+	DHCPHeader->HardwareAddressLength = sizeof(MACAddress);
+	DHCPHeader->Hops                  = 0;
+	DHCPHeader->TransactionID         = TransactionID;
+	DHCPHeader->ElapsedSeconds        = 0;
+	DHCPHeader->Flags                 = 0;
+	memcpy(&DHCPHeader->NextServerIP, &uip_hostaddr, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
+	memcpy(&DHCPHeader->YourIP, PreferredClientIP, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
+	memcpy(&DHCPHeader->ClientHardwareAddress, ClientHardwareAddress, sizeof(struct uip_eth_addr));
+	DHCPHeader->Cookie                = DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE;
+
+	/* Add a DHCP message type and terminator options to the start of the DHCP options field */
+	DHCPHeader->Options[0]            = DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE;
+	DHCPHeader->Options[1]            = 1;
+	DHCPHeader->Options[2]            = DHCPMessageType;
+	DHCPHeader->Options[3]            = DHCP_OPTION_END;
+
+	/* Calculate the total number of bytes added to the outgoing packet */
+	return (sizeof(DHCP_Header_t) + 4);
+}
+
+/** Checks to see if the nominated IP address has already been allocated to a client.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] IPAddress  IP Address whose lease status should be checked
+ *
+ *  \pre The IP address must be within the same /24 subnet as the virtual webserver.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the IP has already been leased to a client, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool DHCPServerApp_CheckIfIPLeased(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress)
+{
+	uint8_t Byte = (IPAddress->u8[3] / 8);
+	uint8_t Mask = (1 << (IPAddress->u8[3] % 8));
+
+	/* Make sure that the requested IP address isn't already leased to the virtual server or another client */
+	if (IPAddress->u8[3] && !(IPAddress->u8[3] == uip_hostaddr.u8[3]) && !(LeasedIPs[Byte] & Mask))
+	  return false;
+	else
+	  return true;
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the next unleased IP in the IP address pool.
+ *
+ *  \param[out] NewIPAddress  Location where the generated IP Address should be stored
+ */
+static void DHCPServerApp_GetUnleasedIP(uip_ipaddr_t* const NewIPAddress)
+{
+	uip_ipaddr_copy(NewIPAddress, &uip_hostaddr);
+
+	/** Look through the current subnet, skipping the broadcast and zero IP addresses */
+	for (uint8_t IP = 1; IP < 254; IP++)
+	{
+		/* Update new IP address to lease with the current IP address to test */
+		NewIPAddress->u8[3] = IP;
+
+		/* If we've found an unleased IP, abort with the updated IP stored for the called */
+		if (!(DHCPServerApp_CheckIfIPLeased(NewIPAddress)))
+		  return;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Marks the given IP Address as leased in the address pool, so that it will not be
+ *  allocated to another client unless it is first released.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] IPAddress  IP Address to mark as leased
+ *
+ *  \pre The IP address must be within the same /24 subnet as the virtual webserver.
+ */
+static void DHCPServerApp_LeaseIP(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress)
+{
+	uint8_t Byte = (IPAddress->u8[3] / 8);
+	uint8_t Mask = (1 << (IPAddress->u8[3] % 8));
+
+	/* Mark the IP address as leased in the allocation table */
+	LeasedIPs[Byte] |= Mask;
+}
+
+/** Marks the given IP Address as not leased in the address pool, so that it can be
+ *  allocated to another client upon request.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] IPAddress  IP Address to mark as not leased
+ *
+ *  \pre The IP address must be within the same /24 subnet as the virtual webserver.
+ */
+static void DHCPServerApp_UnleaseIP(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress)
+{
+	uint8_t Byte = (IPAddress->u8[3] / 8);
+	uint8_t Mask = (1 << (IPAddress->u8[3] % 8));
+
+	/* Mark the IP address as unleased in the allocation table */
+	LeasedIPs[Byte] &= ~Mask;
+}
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c8195a64c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.h
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DHCPServerApp.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DHCPSERVER_APP_H_
+#define _DHCPSERVER_APP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <uip.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+		#include "../Webserver.h"
+		#include "DHCPCommon.h"
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void DHCPServerApp_Init(void);
+		void DHCPServerApp_Callback(void);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_DHCPSERVERAPP_C)
+		static uint16_t DHCPServerApp_FillDHCPHeader(DHCP_Header_t* const DHCPHeader,
+		                                             const uint8_t DHCPMessageType,
+		                                             const struct uip_eth_addr* const ClientHardwareAddress,
+		                                             const uip_ipaddr_t* const PreferredClientIP,
+		                                             const uint32_t TransactionID);
+		static bool DHCPServerApp_CheckIfIPLeased(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress);
+		static void DHCPServerApp_GetUnleasedIP(uip_ipaddr_t* const NewIPAddress);
+		static void DHCPServerApp_LeaseIP(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress);
+		static void DHCPServerApp_UnleaseIP(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress);
+		#endif
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d8dc54dad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.c
@@ -0,0 +1,534 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Functions to manage the physical Dataflash media, including reading and writing of
+ *  blocks of data. These functions are called by the SCSI layer when data must be stored
+ *  or retrieved to/from the physical storage media. If a different media is used (such
+ *  as a SD card or EEPROM), functions similar to these will need to be generated.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASHMANAGER_C
+#include "DataflashManager.h"
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), from
+ *  the pre-selected data OUT endpoint. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the endpoint and writes
+ *  them to the Dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                  const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                  uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+#endif
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+
+	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+	  return;
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is currently empty */
+			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+			{
+				/* Clear the current endpoint bank */
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+				/* Wait until the host has sent another packet */
+				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Once all the Dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
+				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+				/* If less than one Dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+				{
+					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				}
+#endif
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
+			}
+
+			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the Dataflash */
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+			  return;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+	/* If the endpoint is empty, clear it ready for the next packet from the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), into
+ *  the pre-selected data IN endpoint. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                 const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                 uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+
+	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+	  return;
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is currently full */
+			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+			{
+				/* Clear the endpoint bank to send its contents to the host */
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+				/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for more data */
+				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+			}
+
+			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the Dataflash */
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+			  return;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* If the endpoint is full, send its contents to the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), from
+ *  the given RAM buffer. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the buffer and writes them to the
+ *  Dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. This can be linked to FAT libraries to write files to the
+ *  Dataflash.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
+ *  \param[in] BufferPtr     Pointer to the data source RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                      uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+                                      const uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+#endif
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Once all the Dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
+				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+				/* If less than one Dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+				{
+					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				}
+#endif
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
+			}
+
+			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the Dataflash */
+			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+			  Dataflash_SendByte(*(BufferPtr++));
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), into
+ *  the preallocated RAM buffer. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the given buffer. This can be linked to FAT libraries to read
+ *  the files stored on the Dataflash.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
+ *  \param[out] BufferPtr    Pointer to the data destination RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                     uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+			}
+
+			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the Dataflash */
+			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+			  *(BufferPtr++) = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Disables the Dataflash memory write protection bits on the board Dataflash ICs, if enabled. */
+void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void)
+{
+	/* Select first Dataflash chip, send the read status register command */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+
+	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+	{
+		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+	}
+
+	/* Select second Dataflash chip (if present on selected board), send read status register command */
+	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+
+	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+	{
+		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+	}
+	#endif
+
+	/* Deselect current Dataflash chip */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Performs a simple test on the attached Dataflash IC(s) to ensure that they are working.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if all media chips are working, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ReturnByte;
+
+	/* Test first Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+	  return false;
+
+	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+	/* Test second Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+	  return false;
+	#endif
+
+	return true;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..da34b3926
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.h
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DataflashManager.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
+#define _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include "../Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE % 16)
+			#error Dataflash page size must be a multiple of 16 bytes.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Defines: */
+		/** Total number of bytes of the storage medium, comprised of one or more Dataflash ICs. */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES                ((uint32_t)DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)
+
+		/** Block size of the device. This is kept at 512 to remain compatible with the OS despite the underlying
+		 *  storage media (Dataflash) using a different native block size. Do not change this value.
+		 */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE           512
+
+		/** Total number of blocks of the virtual memory for reporting to the host as the device's total capacity. Do not
+		 *  change this value; change VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES instead to alter the media size.
+		 */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS               (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES / VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+
+		/** Indicates if the disk is write protected or not. */
+		#define DISK_READ_ONLY                      false
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+		                                  const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                  uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+		                                 const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                 uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                      uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+		                                      const uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                     uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+		                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void);
+		bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/00readme.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/00readme.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..80d8843d1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/00readme.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+FatFs Module Source Files R0.09a                       (C)ChaN, 2012
+
+
+FILES
+
+  ffconf.h   Configuration file for FatFs module.
+  ff.h       Common include file for FatFs and application module.
+  ff.c       FatFs module.
+  diskio.h   Common include file for FatFs and disk I/O module.
+  diskio.c   An example of glue function to attach existing disk I/O module to FatFs.
+  integer.h  Integer type definitions for FatFs.
+  option     Optional external functions.
+
+  Low level disk I/O module is not included in this archive because the FatFs
+  module is only a generic file system layer and not depend on any specific
+  storage device. You have to provide a low level disk I/O module that written
+  to control your storage device.
+
+
+
+AGREEMENTS
+
+ FatFs module is an open source software to implement FAT file system to
+ small embedded systems. This is a free software and is opened for education,
+ research and commercial developments under license policy of following trems.
+
+  Copyright (C) 2012, ChaN, all right reserved.
+
+ * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
+ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
+   personal, non-profit or commercial product UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
+ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
+
+
+
+REVISION HISTORY
+
+  Feb 26, 2006  R0.00  Prototype
+
+  Apr 29, 2006  R0.01  First release.
+
+  Jun 01, 2006  R0.02  Added FAT12.
+                       Removed unbuffered mode.
+                       Fixed a problem on small (<32M) patition.
+
+  Jun 10, 2006  R0.02a Added a configuration option _FS_MINIMUM.
+
+  Sep 22, 2006  R0.03  Added f_rename.
+                       Changed option _FS_MINIMUM to _FS_MINIMIZE.
+
+  Dec 11, 2006  R0.03a Improved cluster scan algolithm to write files fast.
+                       Fixed f_mkdir creates incorrect directory on FAT32.
+
+  Feb 04, 2007  R0.04  Supported multiple drive system. (FatFs)
+                       Changed some APIs for multiple drive system.
+                       Added f_mkfs. (FatFs)
+                       Added _USE_FAT32 option. (Tiny-FatFs)
+
+  Apr 01, 2007  R0.04a Supported multiple partitions on a plysical drive. (FatFs)
+                       Fixed an endian sensitive code in f_mkfs. (FatFs)
+                       Added a capability of extending the file size to f_lseek.
+                       Added minimization level 3.
+                       Fixed a problem that can collapse a sector when recreate an
+                       existing file in any sub-directory at non FAT32 cfg. (Tiny-FatFs)
+
+  May 05, 2007  R0.04b Added _USE_NTFLAG option.
+                       Added FSInfo support.
+                       Fixed some problems corresponds to FAT32. (Tiny-FatFs)
+                       Fixed DBCS name can result FR_INVALID_NAME.
+                       Fixed short seek (0 < ofs <= csize) collapses the file object.
+
+  Aug 25, 2007  R0.05  Changed arguments of f_read, f_write.
+                       Changed arguments of f_mkfs. (FatFs)
+                       Fixed f_mkfs on FAT32 creates incorrect FSInfo. (FatFs)
+                       Fixed f_mkdir on FAT32 creates incorrect directory. (FatFs)
+
+  Feb 03, 2008  R0.05a Added f_truncate().
+                       Added f_utime().
+                       Fixed off by one error at FAT sub-type determination.
+                       Fixed btr in f_read() can be mistruncated.
+                       Fixed cached sector is not flushed when create and close without write.
+
+  Apr 01, 2008  R0.06  Added f_forward(). (Tiny-FatFs)
+                       Added string functions: fputc(), fputs(), fprintf() and fgets().
+                       Improved performance of f_lseek() on move to the same or following cluster.
+
+  Apr 01, 2009, R0.07  Merged Tiny-FatFs as a buffer configuration option.
+                       Added long file name support.
+                       Added multiple code page support.
+                       Added re-entrancy for multitask operation.
+                       Added auto cluster size selection to f_mkfs().
+                       Added rewind option to f_readdir().
+                       Changed result code of critical errors.
+                       Renamed string functions to avoid name collision.
+
+  Apr 14, 2009, R0.07a Separated out OS dependent code on reentrant cfg.
+                       Added multiple sector size support.
+
+  Jun 21, 2009, R0.07c Fixed f_unlink() may return FR_OK on error.
+                       Fixed wrong cache control in f_lseek().
+                       Added relative path feature.
+                       Added f_chdir().
+                       Added f_chdrive().
+                       Added proper case conversion for extended characters.
+
+  Nov 03, 2009 R0.07e  Separated out configuration options from ff.h to ffconf.h.
+                       Added a configuration option, _LFN_UNICODE.
+                       Fixed f_unlink() fails to remove a sub-dir on _FS_RPATH.
+                       Fixed name matching error on the 13 char boundary.
+                       Changed f_readdir() to return the SFN with always upper case on non-LFN cfg.
+
+  May 15, 2010, R0.08  Added a memory configuration option. (_USE_LFN)
+                       Added file lock feature. (_FS_SHARE)
+                       Added fast seek feature. (_USE_FASTSEEK)
+                       Changed some types on the API, XCHAR->TCHAR.
+                       Changed fname member in the FILINFO structure on Unicode cfg.
+                       String functions support UTF-8 encoding files on Unicode cfg.
+
+  Aug 16,'10 R0.08a    Added f_getcwd(). (_FS_RPATH = 2)
+                       Added sector erase feature. (_USE_ERASE)
+                       Moved file lock semaphore table from fs object to the bss.
+                       Fixed a wrong directory entry is created on non-LFN cfg when the given name contains ';'.
+                       Fixed f_mkfs() creates wrong FAT32 volume.
+
+  Jan 15,'11 R0.08b    Fast seek feature is also applied to f_read() and f_write().
+                       f_lseek() reports required table size on creating CLMP.
+                       Extended format syntax of f_printf function.
+                       Ignores duplicated directory separators in given path names.
+
+  Sep 06,'11 R0.09     f_mkfs() supports multiple partition to finish the multiple partition feature.
+                       Added f_fdisk(). (_MULTI_PARTITION = 2)
+
+  Aug 27,'12 R0.09a    Fixed assertion failure due to OS/2 EA on FAT12/16.
+                       Changed API rejects null object pointer to avoid crash.
+                       Changed option name _FS_SHARE to _FS_LOCK.
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b119b1a40
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.c
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Low level disk I/O module skeleton for FatFs     (C)ChaN, 2007        */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* This is a stub disk I/O module that acts as front end of the existing */
+/* disk I/O modules and attach it to FatFs module with common interface. */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#include "diskio.h"
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Initialize a Drive                                                    */
+
+DSTATUS disk_initialize (
+	BYTE drv				/* Physical drive number (0..) */
+)
+{
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Return Disk Status                                                    */
+
+DSTATUS disk_status (
+	BYTE drv		/* Physical drive number (0..) */
+)
+{
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Read Sector(s)                                                        */
+
+DRESULT disk_read (
+	BYTE drv,		/* Physical drive number (0..) */
+	BYTE *buff,		/* Data buffer to store read data */
+	DWORD sector,	/* Sector address (LBA) */
+	BYTE count		/* Number of sectors to read (1..128) */
+)
+{
+	DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(sector, count, buff);
+	return RES_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Write Sector(s)                                                       */
+
+#if _READONLY == 0
+DRESULT disk_write (
+	BYTE drv,			/* Physical drive number (0..) */
+	const BYTE *buff,	/* Data to be written */
+	DWORD sector,		/* Sector address (LBA) */
+	BYTE count			/* Number of sectors to write (1..128) */
+)
+{
+	DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(sector, count, buff);
+	return RES_OK;
+}
+#endif /* _READONLY */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..65e3048a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.h
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+/  Low level disk interface module include file
+/-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#ifndef _DISKIO_DEFINED
+#define _DISKIO_DEFINED
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C" {
+#endif
+
+#include "integer.h"
+#include "ff.h"
+
+#include "../DataflashManager.h"
+
+
+/* Status of Disk Functions */
+typedef BYTE	DSTATUS;
+
+/* Results of Disk Functions */
+typedef enum {
+	RES_OK = 0,		/* 0: Successful */
+	RES_ERROR,		/* 1: R/W Error */
+	RES_WRPRT,		/* 2: Write Protected */
+	RES_NOTRDY,		/* 3: Not Ready */
+	RES_PARERR		/* 4: Invalid Parameter */
+} DRESULT;
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------*/
+/* Prototypes for disk control functions */
+
+DSTATUS disk_initialize (BYTE);
+DSTATUS disk_status (BYTE);
+DRESULT disk_read (BYTE, BYTE*, DWORD, BYTE);
+DRESULT disk_write (BYTE, const BYTE*, DWORD, BYTE);
+DRESULT disk_ioctl (BYTE, BYTE, void*);
+
+
+/* Disk Status Bits (DSTATUS) */
+
+#define STA_NOINIT		0x01	/* Drive not initialized */
+#define STA_NODISK		0x02	/* No medium in the drive */
+#define STA_PROTECT		0x04	/* Write protected */
+
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+}
+#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2f58adf83
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.c
@@ -0,0 +1,4139 @@
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/  FatFs - FAT file system module  R0.09a                 (C)ChaN, 2012
+/-----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ FatFs module is a generic FAT file system module for small embedded systems.
+/ This is a free software that opened for education, research and commercial
+/ developments under license policy of following terms.
+/
+/  Copyright (C) 2012, ChaN, all right reserved.
+/
+/ * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
+/ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
+/   personal, non-profit or commercial products UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
+/ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
+/
+/-----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ Feb 26,'06 R0.00  Prototype.
+/
+/ Apr 29,'06 R0.01  First stable version.
+/
+/ Jun 01,'06 R0.02  Added FAT12 support.
+/                   Removed unbuffered mode.
+/                   Fixed a problem on small (<32M) partition.
+/ Jun 10,'06 R0.02a Added a configuration option (_FS_MINIMUM).
+/
+/ Sep 22,'06 R0.03  Added f_rename().
+/                   Changed option _FS_MINIMUM to _FS_MINIMIZE.
+/ Dec 11,'06 R0.03a Improved cluster scan algorithm to write files fast.
+/                   Fixed f_mkdir() creates incorrect directory on FAT32.
+/
+/ Feb 04,'07 R0.04  Supported multiple drive system.
+/                   Changed some interfaces for multiple drive system.
+/                   Changed f_mountdrv() to f_mount().
+/                   Added f_mkfs().
+/ Apr 01,'07 R0.04a Supported multiple partitions on a physical drive.
+/                   Added a capability of extending file size to f_lseek().
+/                   Added minimization level 3.
+/                   Fixed an endian sensitive code in f_mkfs().
+/ May 05,'07 R0.04b Added a configuration option _USE_NTFLAG.
+/                   Added FSInfo support.
+/                   Fixed DBCS name can result FR_INVALID_NAME.
+/                   Fixed short seek (<= csize) collapses the file object.
+/
+/ Aug 25,'07 R0.05  Changed arguments of f_read(), f_write() and f_mkfs().
+/                   Fixed f_mkfs() on FAT32 creates incorrect FSInfo.
+/                   Fixed f_mkdir() on FAT32 creates incorrect directory.
+/ Feb 03,'08 R0.05a Added f_truncate() and f_utime().
+/                   Fixed off by one error at FAT sub-type determination.
+/                   Fixed btr in f_read() can be mistruncated.
+/                   Fixed cached sector is not flushed when create and close without write.
+/
+/ Apr 01,'08 R0.06  Added fputc(), fputs(), fprintf() and fgets().
+/                   Improved performance of f_lseek() on moving to the same or following cluster.
+/
+/ Apr 01,'09 R0.07  Merged Tiny-FatFs as a configuration option. (_FS_TINY)
+/                   Added long file name feature.
+/                   Added multiple code page feature.
+/                   Added re-entrancy for multitask operation.
+/                   Added auto cluster size selection to f_mkfs().
+/                   Added rewind option to f_readdir().
+/                   Changed result code of critical errors.
+/                   Renamed string functions to avoid name collision.
+/ Apr 14,'09 R0.07a Separated out OS dependent code on reentrant cfg.
+/                   Added multiple sector size feature.
+/ Jun 21,'09 R0.07c Fixed f_unlink() can return FR_OK on error.
+/                   Fixed wrong cache control in f_lseek().
+/                   Added relative path feature.
+/                   Added f_chdir() and f_chdrive().
+/                   Added proper case conversion to extended char.
+/ Nov 03,'09 R0.07e Separated out configuration options from ff.h to ffconf.h.
+/                   Fixed f_unlink() fails to remove a sub-dir on _FS_RPATH.
+/                   Fixed name matching error on the 13 char boundary.
+/                   Added a configuration option, _LFN_UNICODE.
+/                   Changed f_readdir() to return the SFN with always upper case on non-LFN cfg.
+/
+/ May 15,'10 R0.08  Added a memory configuration option. (_USE_LFN = 3)
+/                   Added file lock feature. (_FS_SHARE)
+/                   Added fast seek feature. (_USE_FASTSEEK)
+/                   Changed some types on the API, XCHAR->TCHAR.
+/                   Changed fname member in the FILINFO structure on Unicode cfg.
+/                   String functions support UTF-8 encoding files on Unicode cfg.
+/ Aug 16,'10 R0.08a Added f_getcwd(). (_FS_RPATH = 2)
+/                   Added sector erase feature. (_USE_ERASE)
+/                   Moved file lock semaphore table from fs object to the bss.
+/                   Fixed a wrong directory entry is created on non-LFN cfg when the given name contains ';'.
+/                   Fixed f_mkfs() creates wrong FAT32 volume.
+/ Jan 15,'11 R0.08b Fast seek feature is also applied to f_read() and f_write().
+/                   f_lseek() reports required table size on creating CLMP.
+/                   Extended format syntax of f_printf function.
+/                   Ignores duplicated directory separators in given path name.
+/
+/ Sep 06,'11 R0.09  f_mkfs() supports multiple partition to finish the multiple partition feature.
+/                   Added f_fdisk(). (_MULTI_PARTITION = 2)
+/ Aug 27,'12 R0.09a Fixed assertion failure due to OS/2 EA on FAT12/16 volume.
+/                   Changed f_open() and f_opendir reject null object pointer to avoid crash.
+/                   Changed option name _FS_SHARE to _FS_LOCK.
+/---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#include "ff.h"			/* FatFs configurations and declarations */
+#include "diskio.h"		/* Declarations of low level disk I/O functions */
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+   Module Private Definitions
+
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#if _FATFS != 4004	/* Revision ID */
+#error Wrong include file (ff.h).
+#endif
+
+
+/* Definitions on sector size */
+#if _MAX_SS != 512 && _MAX_SS != 1024 && _MAX_SS != 2048 && _MAX_SS != 4096
+#error Wrong sector size.
+#endif
+#if _MAX_SS != 512
+#define	SS(fs)	((fs)->ssize)	/* Variable sector size */
+#else
+#define	SS(fs)	512U			/* Fixed sector size */
+#endif
+
+
+/* Reentrancy related */
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+#if _USE_LFN == 1
+#error Static LFN work area must not be used in re-entrant configuration.
+#endif
+#define	ENTER_FF(fs)		{ if (!lock_fs(fs)) return FR_TIMEOUT; }
+#define	LEAVE_FF(fs, res)	{ unlock_fs(fs, res); return res; }
+#else
+#define	ENTER_FF(fs)
+#define LEAVE_FF(fs, res)	return res
+#endif
+
+#define	ABORT(fs, res)		{ fp->flag |= FA__ERROR; LEAVE_FF(fs, res); }
+
+
+/* File access control feature */
+#if _FS_LOCK
+#if _FS_READONLY
+#error _FS_LOCK must be 0 on read-only cfg.
+#endif
+typedef struct {
+	FATFS *fs;				/* File ID 1, volume (NULL:blank entry) */
+	DWORD clu;				/* File ID 2, directory */
+	WORD idx;				/* File ID 3, directory index */
+	WORD ctr;				/* File open counter, 0:none, 0x01..0xFF:read open count, 0x100:write mode */
+} FILESEM;
+#endif
+
+
+
+/* DBCS code ranges and SBCS extend char conversion table */
+
+#if _CODE_PAGE == 932	/* Japanese Shift-JIS */
+#define _DF1S	0x81	/* DBC 1st byte range 1 start */
+#define _DF1E	0x9F	/* DBC 1st byte range 1 end */
+#define _DF2S	0xE0	/* DBC 1st byte range 2 start */
+#define _DF2E	0xFC	/* DBC 1st byte range 2 end */
+#define _DS1S	0x40	/* DBC 2nd byte range 1 start */
+#define _DS1E	0x7E	/* DBC 2nd byte range 1 end */
+#define _DS2S	0x80	/* DBC 2nd byte range 2 start */
+#define _DS2E	0xFC	/* DBC 2nd byte range 2 end */
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 936	/* Simplified Chinese GBK */
+#define _DF1S	0x81
+#define _DF1E	0xFE
+#define _DS1S	0x40
+#define _DS1E	0x7E
+#define _DS2S	0x80
+#define _DS2E	0xFE
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 949	/* Korean */
+#define _DF1S	0x81
+#define _DF1E	0xFE
+#define _DS1S	0x41
+#define _DS1E	0x5A
+#define _DS2S	0x61
+#define _DS2E	0x7A
+#define _DS3S	0x81
+#define _DS3E	0xFE
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 950	/* Traditional Chinese Big5 */
+#define _DF1S	0x81
+#define _DF1E	0xFE
+#define _DS1S	0x40
+#define _DS1E	0x7E
+#define _DS2S	0xA1
+#define _DS2E	0xFE
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 437	/* U.S. (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0x41,0x8E,0x41,0x8F,0x80,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x49,0x49,0x49,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x4F,0x99,0x4F,0x55,0x55,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0x41,0x49,0x4F,0x55,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 720	/* Arabic (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x45,0x41,0x84,0x41,0x86,0x43,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x49,0x49,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x49,0x49,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 737	/* Greek (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87, \
+				0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0xAA,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0x97,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xE4,0xED,0xEE,0xE7,0xE8,0xF1,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 775	/* Baltic (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x91,0xA0,0x8E,0x95,0x8F,0x80,0xAD,0xED,0x8A,0x8A,0xA1,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xE0,0xA3,0xA3,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xBD,0xBE,0xC6,0xC7,0xA5,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE3,0xE8,0xE8,0xEA,0xEA,0xEE,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 850	/* Multilingual Latin 1 (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0xDE,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE7,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 852	/* Latin 2 (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xDE,0x8F,0x80,0x9D,0xD3,0x8A,0x8A,0xD7,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x91,0xE2,0x99,0x95,0x95,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9B,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA4,0xA4,0xA6,0xA6,0xA8,0xA8,0xAA,0x8D,0xAC,0xB8,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBD,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC6,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD2,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xB7,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE3,0xD5,0xE6,0xE6,0xE8,0xE9,0xE8,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xDD,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xEB,0xFC,0xFC,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 855	/* Cyrillic (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x81,0x81,0x83,0x83,0x85,0x85,0x87,0x87,0x89,0x89,0x8B,0x8B,0x8D,0x8D,0x8F,0x8F,0x91,0x91,0x93,0x93,0x95,0x95,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x99,0x9B,0x9B,0x9D,0x9D,0x9F,0x9F, \
+				0xA1,0xA1,0xA3,0xA3,0xA5,0xA5,0xA7,0xA7,0xA9,0xA9,0xAB,0xAB,0xAD,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB6,0xB6,0xB8,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBE,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD3,0xD3,0xD5,0xD5,0xD7,0xD7,0xDD,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xE0,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE2,0xE2,0xE4,0xE4,0xE6,0xE6,0xE8,0xE8,0xEA,0xEA,0xEC,0xEC,0xEE,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF2,0xF2,0xF4,0xF4,0xF6,0xF6,0xF8,0xF8,0xFA,0xFA,0xFC,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 857	/* Turkish (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0x98,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9E, \
+				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA6,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xDE,0x59,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 858	/* Multilingual Latin 1 + Euro (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0xDE,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE7,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 862	/* Hebrew (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0x41,0x49,0x4F,0x55,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 866	/* Russian (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x9d,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F,0xF0,0xF0,0xF2,0xF2,0xF4,0xF4,0xF6,0xF6,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 874	/* Thai (OEM, Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1250 /* Central Europe (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xA3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xA5,0xAA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBC,0xAF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1251 /* Cyrillic (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x82,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x80,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F, \
+				0xA0,0xA2,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB2,0xA5,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xA8,0xB9,0xAA,0xBB,0xA3,0xBD,0xBD,0xAF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1252 /* Latin 1 (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0xAd,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0xAE,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0x9F}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1253 /* Greek (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xA2,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA, \
+				0xE0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xF2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xFB,0xBC,0xFD,0xBF,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1254 /* Turkish (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0x9F}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1255 /* Hebrew (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1256 /* Arabic (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0x41,0xE1,0x41,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0x43,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x45,0xEC,0xED,0x49,0x49,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0x4F,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0x55,0xFA,0x55,0x55,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1257 /* Baltic (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xA8,0xB9,0xAA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xAF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1258 /* Vietnam (OEM, Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0xAC,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xEC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xF2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xFE,0x9F}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1	/* ASCII (for only non-LFN cfg) */
+#if _USE_LFN
+#error Cannot use LFN feature without valid code page.
+#endif
+#define _DF1S	0
+
+#else
+#error Unknown code page
+
+#endif
+
+
+/* Character code support macros */
+#define IsUpper(c)	(((c)>='A')&&((c)<='Z'))
+#define IsLower(c)	(((c)>='a')&&((c)<='z'))
+#define IsDigit(c)	(((c)>='0')&&((c)<='9'))
+
+#if _DF1S		/* Code page is DBCS */
+
+#ifdef _DF2S	/* Two 1st byte areas */
+#define IsDBCS1(c)	(((BYTE)(c) >= _DF1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DF2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF2E))
+#else			/* One 1st byte area */
+#define IsDBCS1(c)	((BYTE)(c) >= _DF1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF1E)
+#endif
+
+#ifdef _DS3S	/* Three 2nd byte areas */
+#define IsDBCS2(c)	(((BYTE)(c) >= _DS1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS2E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS3S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS3E))
+#else			/* Two 2nd byte areas */
+#define IsDBCS2(c)	(((BYTE)(c) >= _DS1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS2E))
+#endif
+
+#else			/* Code page is SBCS */
+
+#define IsDBCS1(c)	0
+#define IsDBCS2(c)	0
+
+#endif /* _DF1S */
+
+
+/* Name status flags */
+#define NS			11		/* Index of name status byte in fn[] */
+#define NS_LOSS		0x01	/* Out of 8.3 format */
+#define NS_LFN		0x02	/* Force to create LFN entry */
+#define NS_LAST		0x04	/* Last segment */
+#define NS_BODY		0x08	/* Lower case flag (body) */
+#define NS_EXT		0x10	/* Lower case flag (ext) */
+#define NS_DOT		0x20	/* Dot entry */
+
+
+/* FAT sub-type boundaries */
+/* Note that the FAT spec by Microsoft says 4085 but Windows works with 4087! */
+#define MIN_FAT16	4086	/* Minimum number of clusters for FAT16 */
+#define	MIN_FAT32	65526	/* Minimum number of clusters for FAT32 */
+
+
+/* FatFs refers the members in the FAT structures as byte array instead of
+/ structure member because the structure is not binary compatible between
+/ different platforms */
+
+#define BS_jmpBoot			0	/* Jump instruction (3) */
+#define BS_OEMName			3	/* OEM name (8) */
+#define BPB_BytsPerSec		11	/* Sector size [byte] (2) */
+#define BPB_SecPerClus		13	/* Cluster size [sector] (1) */
+#define BPB_RsvdSecCnt		14	/* Size of reserved area [sector] (2) */
+#define BPB_NumFATs			16	/* Number of FAT copies (1) */
+#define BPB_RootEntCnt		17	/* Number of root dir entries for FAT12/16 (2) */
+#define BPB_TotSec16		19	/* Volume size [sector] (2) */
+#define BPB_Media			21	/* Media descriptor (1) */
+#define BPB_FATSz16			22	/* FAT size [sector] (2) */
+#define BPB_SecPerTrk		24	/* Track size [sector] (2) */
+#define BPB_NumHeads		26	/* Number of heads (2) */
+#define BPB_HiddSec			28	/* Number of special hidden sectors (4) */
+#define BPB_TotSec32		32	/* Volume size [sector] (4) */
+#define BS_DrvNum			36	/* Physical drive number (2) */
+#define BS_BootSig			38	/* Extended boot signature (1) */
+#define BS_VolID			39	/* Volume serial number (4) */
+#define BS_VolLab			43	/* Volume label (8) */
+#define BS_FilSysType		54	/* File system type (1) */
+#define BPB_FATSz32			36	/* FAT size [sector] (4) */
+#define BPB_ExtFlags		40	/* Extended flags (2) */
+#define BPB_FSVer			42	/* File system version (2) */
+#define BPB_RootClus		44	/* Root dir first cluster (4) */
+#define BPB_FSInfo			48	/* Offset of FSInfo sector (2) */
+#define BPB_BkBootSec		50	/* Offset of backup boot sector (2) */
+#define BS_DrvNum32			64	/* Physical drive number (2) */
+#define BS_BootSig32		66	/* Extended boot signature (1) */
+#define BS_VolID32			67	/* Volume serial number (4) */
+#define BS_VolLab32			71	/* Volume label (8) */
+#define BS_FilSysType32		82	/* File system type (1) */
+#define	FSI_LeadSig			0	/* FSI: Leading signature (4) */
+#define	FSI_StrucSig		484	/* FSI: Structure signature (4) */
+#define	FSI_Free_Count		488	/* FSI: Number of free clusters (4) */
+#define	FSI_Nxt_Free		492	/* FSI: Last allocated cluster (4) */
+#define MBR_Table			446	/* MBR: Partition table offset (2) */
+#define	SZ_PTE				16	/* MBR: Size of a partition table entry */
+#define BS_55AA				510	/* Boot sector signature (2) */
+
+#define	DIR_Name			0	/* Short file name (11) */
+#define	DIR_Attr			11	/* Attribute (1) */
+#define	DIR_NTres			12	/* NT flag (1) */
+#define DIR_CrtTimeTenth	13	/* Created time sub-second (1) */
+#define	DIR_CrtTime			14	/* Created time (2) */
+#define	DIR_CrtDate			16	/* Created date (2) */
+#define DIR_LstAccDate		18	/* Last accessed date (2) */
+#define	DIR_FstClusHI		20	/* Higher 16-bit of first cluster (2) */
+#define	DIR_WrtTime			22	/* Modified time (2) */
+#define	DIR_WrtDate			24	/* Modified date (2) */
+#define	DIR_FstClusLO		26	/* Lower 16-bit of first cluster (2) */
+#define	DIR_FileSize		28	/* File size (4) */
+#define	LDIR_Ord			0	/* LFN entry order and LLE flag (1) */
+#define	LDIR_Attr			11	/* LFN attribute (1) */
+#define	LDIR_Type			12	/* LFN type (1) */
+#define	LDIR_Chksum			13	/* Sum of corresponding SFN entry */
+#define	LDIR_FstClusLO		26	/* Filled by zero (0) */
+#define	SZ_DIR				32		/* Size of a directory entry */
+#define	LLE					0x40	/* Last long entry flag in LDIR_Ord */
+#define	DDE					0xE5	/* Deleted directory entry mark in DIR_Name[0] */
+#define	NDDE				0x05	/* Replacement of the character collides with DDE */
+
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Module private work area                                   */
+/*------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Note that uninitialized variables with static duration are
+/  zeroed/nulled at start-up. If not, the compiler or start-up
+/  routine is out of ANSI-C standard.
+*/
+
+#if _VOLUMES
+static
+FATFS *FatFs[_VOLUMES];	/* Pointer to the file system objects (logical drives) */
+#else
+#error Number of volumes must not be 0.
+#endif
+
+static
+WORD Fsid;				/* File system mount ID */
+
+#if _FS_RPATH
+static
+BYTE CurrVol;			/* Current drive */
+#endif
+
+#if _FS_LOCK
+static
+FILESEM	Files[_FS_LOCK];	/* File lock semaphores */
+#endif
+
+#if _USE_LFN == 0			/* No LFN feature */
+#define	DEF_NAMEBUF			BYTE sfn[12]
+#define INIT_BUF(dobj)		(dobj).fn = sfn
+#define	FREE_BUF()
+
+#elif _USE_LFN == 1			/* LFN feature with static working buffer */
+static WCHAR LfnBuf[_MAX_LFN+1];
+#define	DEF_NAMEBUF			BYTE sfn[12]
+#define INIT_BUF(dobj)		{ (dobj).fn = sfn; (dobj).lfn = LfnBuf; }
+#define	FREE_BUF()
+
+#elif _USE_LFN == 2 		/* LFN feature with dynamic working buffer on the stack */
+#define	DEF_NAMEBUF			BYTE sfn[12]; WCHAR lbuf[_MAX_LFN+1]
+#define INIT_BUF(dobj)		{ (dobj).fn = sfn; (dobj).lfn = lbuf; }
+#define	FREE_BUF()
+
+#elif _USE_LFN == 3 		/* LFN feature with dynamic working buffer on the heap */
+#define	DEF_NAMEBUF			BYTE sfn[12]; WCHAR *lfn
+#define INIT_BUF(dobj)		{ lfn = ff_memalloc((_MAX_LFN + 1) * 2); \
+							  if (!lfn) LEAVE_FF((dobj).fs, FR_NOT_ENOUGH_CORE); \
+							  (dobj).lfn = lfn;	(dobj).fn = sfn; }
+#define	FREE_BUF()			ff_memfree(lfn)
+
+#else
+#error Wrong LFN configuration.
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+   Module Private Functions
+
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* String functions                                                      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/* Copy memory to memory */
+static
+void mem_cpy (void* dst, const void* src, UINT cnt) {
+	BYTE *d = (BYTE*)dst;
+	const BYTE *s = (const BYTE*)src;
+
+#if _WORD_ACCESS == 1
+	while (cnt >= sizeof (int)) {
+		*(int*)d = *(int*)s;
+		d += sizeof (int); s += sizeof (int);
+		cnt -= sizeof (int);
+	}
+#endif
+	while (cnt--)
+		*d++ = *s++;
+}
+
+/* Fill memory */
+static
+void mem_set (void* dst, int val, UINT cnt) {
+	BYTE *d = (BYTE*)dst;
+
+	while (cnt--)
+		*d++ = (BYTE)val;
+}
+
+/* Compare memory to memory */
+static
+int mem_cmp (const void* dst, const void* src, UINT cnt) {
+	const BYTE *d = (const BYTE *)dst, *s = (const BYTE *)src;
+	int r = 0;
+
+	while (cnt-- && (r = *d++ - *s++) == 0) ;
+	return r;
+}
+
+/* Check if chr is contained in the string */
+static
+int chk_chr (const char* str, int chr) {
+	while (*str && *str != chr) str++;
+	return *str;
+}
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Request/Release grant to access the volume                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+
+static
+int lock_fs (
+	FATFS *fs		/* File system object */
+)
+{
+	return ff_req_grant(fs->sobj);
+}
+
+
+static
+void unlock_fs (
+	FATFS *fs,		/* File system object */
+	FRESULT res		/* Result code to be returned */
+)
+{
+	if (fs &&
+		res != FR_NOT_ENABLED &&
+		res != FR_INVALID_DRIVE &&
+		res != FR_INVALID_OBJECT &&
+		res != FR_TIMEOUT) {
+		ff_rel_grant(fs->sobj);
+	}
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* File lock control functions                                           */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _FS_LOCK
+
+static
+FRESULT chk_lock (	/* Check if the file can be accessed */
+	DIR* dj,		/* Directory object pointing the file to be checked */
+	int acc			/* Desired access (0:Read, 1:Write, 2:Delete/Rename) */
+)
+{
+	UINT i, be;
+
+	/* Search file semaphore table */
+	for (i = be = 0; i < _FS_LOCK; i++) {
+		if (Files[i].fs) {	/* Existing entry */
+			if (Files[i].fs == dj->fs &&	 	/* Check if the file matched with an open file */
+				Files[i].clu == dj->sclust &&
+				Files[i].idx == dj->index) break;
+		} else {			/* Blank entry */
+			be++;
+		}
+	}
+	if (i == _FS_LOCK)	/* The file is not opened */
+		return (be || acc == 2) ? FR_OK : FR_TOO_MANY_OPEN_FILES;	/* Is there a blank entry for new file? */
+
+	/* The file has been opened. Reject any open against writing file and all write mode open */
+	return (acc || Files[i].ctr == 0x100) ? FR_LOCKED : FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+static
+int enq_lock (void)	/* Check if an entry is available for a new file */
+{
+	UINT i;
+
+	for (i = 0; i < _FS_LOCK && Files[i].fs; i++) ;
+	return (i == _FS_LOCK) ? 0 : 1;
+}
+
+
+static
+UINT inc_lock (	/* Increment file open counter and returns its index (0:int error) */
+	DIR* dj,	/* Directory object pointing the file to register or increment */
+	int acc		/* Desired access mode (0:Read, !0:Write) */
+)
+{
+	UINT i;
+
+
+	for (i = 0; i < _FS_LOCK; i++) {	/* Find the file */
+		if (Files[i].fs == dj->fs &&
+			Files[i].clu == dj->sclust &&
+			Files[i].idx == dj->index) break;
+	}
+
+	if (i == _FS_LOCK) {				/* Not opened. Register it as new. */
+		for (i = 0; i < _FS_LOCK && Files[i].fs; i++) ;
+		if (i == _FS_LOCK) return 0;	/* No space to register (int err) */
+		Files[i].fs = dj->fs;
+		Files[i].clu = dj->sclust;
+		Files[i].idx = dj->index;
+		Files[i].ctr = 0;
+	}
+
+	if (acc && Files[i].ctr) return 0;	/* Access violation (int err) */
+
+	Files[i].ctr = acc ? 0x100 : Files[i].ctr + 1;	/* Set semaphore value */
+
+	return i + 1;
+}
+
+
+static
+FRESULT dec_lock (	/* Decrement file open counter */
+	UINT i			/* Semaphore index */
+)
+{
+	WORD n;
+	FRESULT res;
+
+
+	if (--i < _FS_LOCK) {
+		n = Files[i].ctr;
+		if (n == 0x100) n = 0;
+		if (n) n--;
+		Files[i].ctr = n;
+		if (!n) Files[i].fs = 0;
+		res = FR_OK;
+	} else {
+		res = FR_INT_ERR;
+	}
+	return res;
+}
+
+
+static
+void clear_lock (	/* Clear lock entries of the volume */
+	FATFS *fs
+)
+{
+	UINT i;
+
+	for (i = 0; i < _FS_LOCK; i++) {
+		if (Files[i].fs == fs) Files[i].fs = 0;
+	}
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Change window offset                                                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT move_window (
+	FATFS *fs,		/* File system object */
+	DWORD sector	/* Sector number to make appearance in the fs->win[] */
+)					/* Move to zero only writes back dirty window */
+{
+	DWORD wsect;
+
+
+	wsect = fs->winsect;
+	if (wsect != sector) {	/* Changed current window */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+		if (fs->wflag) {	/* Write back dirty window if needed */
+			if (disk_write(fs->drv, fs->win, wsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+				return FR_DISK_ERR;
+			fs->wflag = 0;
+			if (wsect < (fs->fatbase + fs->fsize)) {	/* In FAT area */
+				BYTE nf;
+				for (nf = fs->n_fats; nf > 1; nf--) {	/* Reflect the change to all FAT copies */
+					wsect += fs->fsize;
+					disk_write(fs->drv, fs->win, wsect, 1);
+				}
+			}
+		}
+#endif
+		if (sector) {
+			if (disk_read(fs->drv, fs->win, sector, 1) != RES_OK)
+				return FR_DISK_ERR;
+			fs->winsect = sector;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Clean-up cached data                                                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+FRESULT sync (	/* FR_OK: successful, FR_DISK_ERR: failed */
+	FATFS *fs	/* File system object */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+
+
+	res = move_window(fs, 0);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		/* Update FSInfo sector if needed */
+		if (fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && fs->fsi_flag) {
+			fs->winsect = 0;
+			/* Create FSInfo structure */
+			mem_set(fs->win, 0, 512);
+			ST_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);
+			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_LeadSig, 0x41615252);
+			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_StrucSig, 0x61417272);
+			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Free_Count, fs->free_clust);
+			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Nxt_Free, fs->last_clust);
+			/* Write it into the FSInfo sector */
+			disk_write(fs->drv, fs->win, fs->fsi_sector, 1);
+			fs->fsi_flag = 0;
+		}
+		/* Make sure that no pending write process in the physical drive */
+		if (disk_ioctl(fs->drv, CTRL_SYNC, 0) != RES_OK)
+			res = FR_DISK_ERR;
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get sector# from cluster#                                             */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+DWORD clust2sect (	/* !=0: Sector number, 0: Failed - invalid cluster# */
+	FATFS *fs,		/* File system object */
+	DWORD clst		/* Cluster# to be converted */
+)
+{
+	clst -= 2;
+	if (clst >= (fs->n_fatent - 2)) return 0;		/* Invalid cluster# */
+	return clst * fs->csize + fs->database;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FAT access - Read value of a FAT entry                                */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+DWORD get_fat (	/* 0xFFFFFFFF:Disk error, 1:Internal error, Else:Cluster status */
+	FATFS *fs,	/* File system object */
+	DWORD clst	/* Cluster# to get the link information */
+)
+{
+	UINT wc, bc;
+	BYTE *p;
+
+
+	if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->n_fatent)	/* Check range */
+		return 1;
+
+	switch (fs->fs_type) {
+	case FS_FAT12 :
+		bc = (UINT)clst; bc += bc / 2;
+		if (move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (bc / SS(fs)))) break;
+		wc = fs->win[bc % SS(fs)]; bc++;
+		if (move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (bc / SS(fs)))) break;
+		wc |= fs->win[bc % SS(fs)] << 8;
+		return (clst & 1) ? (wc >> 4) : (wc & 0xFFF);
+
+	case FS_FAT16 :
+		if (move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (clst / (SS(fs) / 2)))) break;
+		p = &fs->win[clst * 2 % SS(fs)];
+		return LD_WORD(p);
+
+	case FS_FAT32 :
+		if (move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (clst / (SS(fs) / 4)))) break;
+		p = &fs->win[clst * 4 % SS(fs)];
+		return LD_DWORD(p) & 0x0FFFFFFF;
+	}
+
+	return 0xFFFFFFFF;	/* An error occurred at the disk I/O layer */
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FAT access - Change value of a FAT entry                              */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+
+FRESULT put_fat (
+	FATFS *fs,	/* File system object */
+	DWORD clst,	/* Cluster# to be changed in range of 2 to fs->n_fatent - 1 */
+	DWORD val	/* New value to mark the cluster */
+)
+{
+	UINT bc;
+	BYTE *p;
+	FRESULT res;
+
+
+	if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->n_fatent) {	/* Check range */
+		res = FR_INT_ERR;
+
+	} else {
+		switch (fs->fs_type) {
+		case FS_FAT12 :
+			bc = (UINT)clst; bc += bc / 2;
+			res = move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (bc / SS(fs)));
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			p = &fs->win[bc % SS(fs)];
+			*p = (clst & 1) ? ((*p & 0x0F) | ((BYTE)val << 4)) : (BYTE)val;
+			bc++;
+			fs->wflag = 1;
+			res = move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (bc / SS(fs)));
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			p = &fs->win[bc % SS(fs)];
+			*p = (clst & 1) ? (BYTE)(val >> 4) : ((*p & 0xF0) | ((BYTE)(val >> 8) & 0x0F));
+			break;
+
+		case FS_FAT16 :
+			res = move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (clst / (SS(fs) / 2)));
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			p = &fs->win[clst * 2 % SS(fs)];
+			ST_WORD(p, (WORD)val);
+			break;
+
+		case FS_FAT32 :
+			res = move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (clst / (SS(fs) / 4)));
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			p = &fs->win[clst * 4 % SS(fs)];
+			val |= LD_DWORD(p) & 0xF0000000;
+			ST_DWORD(p, val);
+			break;
+
+		default :
+			res = FR_INT_ERR;
+		}
+		fs->wflag = 1;
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FAT handling - Remove a cluster chain                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+FRESULT remove_chain (
+	FATFS *fs,			/* File system object */
+	DWORD clst			/* Cluster# to remove a chain from */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD nxt;
+#if _USE_ERASE
+	DWORD scl = clst, ecl = clst, rt[2];
+#endif
+
+	if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->n_fatent) {	/* Check range */
+		res = FR_INT_ERR;
+
+	} else {
+		res = FR_OK;
+		while (clst < fs->n_fatent) {			/* Not a last link? */
+			nxt = get_fat(fs, clst);			/* Get cluster status */
+			if (nxt == 0) break;				/* Empty cluster? */
+			if (nxt == 1) { res = FR_INT_ERR; break; }	/* Internal error? */
+			if (nxt == 0xFFFFFFFF) { res = FR_DISK_ERR; break; }	/* Disk error? */
+			res = put_fat(fs, clst, 0);			/* Mark the cluster "empty" */
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			if (fs->free_clust != 0xFFFFFFFF) {	/* Update FSInfo */
+				fs->free_clust++;
+				fs->fsi_flag = 1;
+			}
+#if _USE_ERASE
+			if (ecl + 1 == nxt) {	/* Is next cluster contiguous? */
+				ecl = nxt;
+			} else {				/* End of contiguous clusters */ 
+				rt[0] = clust2sect(fs, scl);					/* Start sector */
+				rt[1] = clust2sect(fs, ecl) + fs->csize - 1;	/* End sector */
+				disk_ioctl(fs->drv, CTRL_ERASE_SECTOR, rt);		/* Erase the block */
+				scl = ecl = nxt;
+			}
+#endif
+			clst = nxt;	/* Next cluster */
+		}
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FAT handling - Stretch or Create a cluster chain                      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+DWORD create_chain (	/* 0:No free cluster, 1:Internal error, 0xFFFFFFFF:Disk error, >=2:New cluster# */
+	FATFS *fs,			/* File system object */
+	DWORD clst			/* Cluster# to stretch. 0 means create a new chain. */
+)
+{
+	DWORD cs, ncl, scl;
+	FRESULT res;
+
+
+	if (clst == 0) {		/* Create a new chain */
+		scl = fs->last_clust;			/* Get suggested start point */
+		if (!scl || scl >= fs->n_fatent) scl = 1;
+	}
+	else {					/* Stretch the current chain */
+		cs = get_fat(fs, clst);			/* Check the cluster status */
+		if (cs < 2) return 1;			/* It is an invalid cluster */
+		if (cs < fs->n_fatent) return cs;	/* It is already followed by next cluster */
+		scl = clst;
+	}
+
+	ncl = scl;				/* Start cluster */
+	for (;;) {
+		ncl++;							/* Next cluster */
+		if (ncl >= fs->n_fatent) {		/* Wrap around */
+			ncl = 2;
+			if (ncl > scl) return 0;	/* No free cluster */
+		}
+		cs = get_fat(fs, ncl);			/* Get the cluster status */
+		if (cs == 0) break;				/* Found a free cluster */
+		if (cs == 0xFFFFFFFF || cs == 1)/* An error occurred */
+			return cs;
+		if (ncl == scl) return 0;		/* No free cluster */
+	}
+
+	res = put_fat(fs, ncl, 0x0FFFFFFF);	/* Mark the new cluster "last link" */
+	if (res == FR_OK && clst != 0) {
+		res = put_fat(fs, clst, ncl);	/* Link it to the previous one if needed */
+	}
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		fs->last_clust = ncl;			/* Update FSINFO */
+		if (fs->free_clust != 0xFFFFFFFF) {
+			fs->free_clust--;
+			fs->fsi_flag = 1;
+		}
+	} else {
+		ncl = (res == FR_DISK_ERR) ? 0xFFFFFFFF : 1;
+	}
+
+	return ncl;		/* Return new cluster number or error code */
+}
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FAT handling - Convert offset into cluster with link map table        */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#if _USE_FASTSEEK
+static
+DWORD clmt_clust (	/* <2:Error, >=2:Cluster number */
+	FIL* fp,		/* Pointer to the file object */
+	DWORD ofs		/* File offset to be converted to cluster# */
+)
+{
+	DWORD cl, ncl, *tbl;
+
+
+	tbl = fp->cltbl + 1;	/* Top of CLMT */
+	cl = ofs / SS(fp->fs) / fp->fs->csize;	/* Cluster order from top of the file */
+	for (;;) {
+		ncl = *tbl++;			/* Number of cluters in the fragment */
+		if (!ncl) return 0;		/* End of table? (error) */
+		if (cl < ncl) break;	/* In this fragment? */
+		cl -= ncl; tbl++;		/* Next fragment */
+	}
+	return cl + *tbl;	/* Return the cluster number */
+}
+#endif	/* _USE_FASTSEEK */
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Directory handling - Set directory index                              */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT dir_sdi (
+	DIR *dj,		/* Pointer to directory object */
+	WORD idx		/* Index of directory table */
+)
+{
+	DWORD clst;
+	WORD ic;
+
+
+	dj->index = idx;
+	clst = dj->sclust;
+	if (clst == 1 || clst >= dj->fs->n_fatent)	/* Check start cluster range */
+		return FR_INT_ERR;
+	if (!clst && dj->fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32)	/* Replace cluster# 0 with root cluster# if in FAT32 */
+		clst = dj->fs->dirbase;
+
+	if (clst == 0) {	/* Static table (root-dir in FAT12/16) */
+		dj->clust = clst;
+		if (idx >= dj->fs->n_rootdir)		/* Index is out of range */
+			return FR_INT_ERR;
+		dj->sect = dj->fs->dirbase + idx / (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR);	/* Sector# */
+	}
+	else {				/* Dynamic table (sub-dirs or root-dir in FAT32) */
+		ic = SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR * dj->fs->csize;	/* Entries per cluster */
+		while (idx >= ic) {	/* Follow cluster chain */
+			clst = get_fat(dj->fs, clst);				/* Get next cluster */
+			if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR;	/* Disk error */
+			if (clst < 2 || clst >= dj->fs->n_fatent)	/* Reached to end of table or int error */
+				return FR_INT_ERR;
+			idx -= ic;
+		}
+		dj->clust = clst;
+		dj->sect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst) + idx / (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR);	/* Sector# */
+	}
+
+	dj->dir = dj->fs->win + (idx % (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR)) * SZ_DIR;	/* Ptr to the entry in the sector */
+
+	return FR_OK;	/* Seek succeeded */
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Directory handling - Move directory table index next                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT dir_next (	/* FR_OK:Succeeded, FR_NO_FILE:End of table, FR_DENIED:EOT and could not stretch */
+	DIR *dj,		/* Pointer to directory object */
+	int stretch		/* 0: Do not stretch table, 1: Stretch table if needed */
+)
+{
+	DWORD clst;
+	WORD i;
+
+
+	stretch = stretch;		/* To suppress warning on read-only cfg. */
+	i = dj->index + 1;
+	if (!i || !dj->sect)	/* Report EOT when index has reached 65535 */
+		return FR_NO_FILE;
+
+	if (!(i % (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR))) {	/* Sector changed? */
+		dj->sect++;					/* Next sector */
+
+		if (dj->clust == 0) {	/* Static table */
+			if (i >= dj->fs->n_rootdir)	/* Report EOT when end of table */
+				return FR_NO_FILE;
+		}
+		else {					/* Dynamic table */
+			if (((i / (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR)) & (dj->fs->csize - 1)) == 0) {	/* Cluster changed? */
+				clst = get_fat(dj->fs, dj->clust);				/* Get next cluster */
+				if (clst <= 1) return FR_INT_ERR;
+				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+				if (clst >= dj->fs->n_fatent) {					/* When it reached end of dynamic table */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+					BYTE c;
+					if (!stretch) return FR_NO_FILE;			/* When do not stretch, report EOT */
+					clst = create_chain(dj->fs, dj->clust);		/* Stretch cluster chain */
+					if (clst == 0) return FR_DENIED;			/* No free cluster */
+					if (clst == 1) return FR_INT_ERR;
+					if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+					/* Clean-up stretched table */
+					if (move_window(dj->fs, 0)) return FR_DISK_ERR;	/* Flush active window */
+					mem_set(dj->fs->win, 0, SS(dj->fs));			/* Clear window buffer */
+					dj->fs->winsect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst);	/* Cluster start sector */
+					for (c = 0; c < dj->fs->csize; c++) {		/* Fill the new cluster with 0 */
+						dj->fs->wflag = 1;
+						if (move_window(dj->fs, 0)) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+						dj->fs->winsect++;
+					}
+					dj->fs->winsect -= c;						/* Rewind window address */
+#else
+					return FR_NO_FILE;			/* Report EOT */
+#endif
+				}
+				dj->clust = clst;				/* Initialize data for new cluster */
+				dj->sect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	dj->index = i;
+	dj->dir = dj->fs->win + (i % (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR)) * SZ_DIR;
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Directory handling - Load/Store start cluster number                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+DWORD ld_clust (
+	FATFS *fs,	/* Pointer to the fs object */
+	BYTE *dir	/* Pointer to the directory entry */
+)
+{
+	DWORD cl;
+
+	cl = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
+	if (fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32)
+		cl |= (DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16;
+
+	return cl;
+}
+
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+void st_clust (
+	BYTE *dir,	/* Pointer to the directory entry */
+	DWORD cl	/* Value to be set */
+)
+{
+	ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO, cl);
+	ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI, cl >> 16);
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* LFN handling - Test/Pick/Fit an LFN segment from/to directory entry   */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _USE_LFN
+static
+const BYTE LfnOfs[] = {1,3,5,7,9,14,16,18,20,22,24,28,30};	/* Offset of LFN chars in the directory entry */
+
+
+static
+int cmp_lfn (			/* 1:Matched, 0:Not matched */
+	WCHAR *lfnbuf,		/* Pointer to the LFN to be compared */
+	BYTE *dir			/* Pointer to the directory entry containing a part of LFN */
+)
+{
+	UINT i, s;
+	WCHAR wc, uc;
+
+
+	i = ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & ~LLE) - 1) * 13;	/* Get offset in the LFN buffer */
+	s = 0; wc = 1;
+	do {
+		uc = LD_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s]);	/* Pick an LFN character from the entry */
+		if (wc) {	/* Last char has not been processed */
+			wc = ff_wtoupper(uc);		/* Convert it to upper case */
+			if (i >= _MAX_LFN || wc != ff_wtoupper(lfnbuf[i++]))	/* Compare it */
+				return 0;				/* Not matched */
+		} else {
+			if (uc != 0xFFFF) return 0;	/* Check filler */
+		}
+	} while (++s < 13);				/* Repeat until all chars in the entry are checked */
+
+	if ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & LLE) && wc && lfnbuf[i])	/* Last segment matched but different length */
+		return 0;
+
+	return 1;						/* The part of LFN matched */
+}
+
+
+
+static
+int pick_lfn (			/* 1:Succeeded, 0:Buffer overflow */
+	WCHAR *lfnbuf,		/* Pointer to the Unicode-LFN buffer */
+	BYTE *dir			/* Pointer to the directory entry */
+)
+{
+	UINT i, s;
+	WCHAR wc, uc;
+
+
+	i = ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & 0x3F) - 1) * 13;	/* Offset in the LFN buffer */
+
+	s = 0; wc = 1;
+	do {
+		uc = LD_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s]);		/* Pick an LFN character from the entry */
+		if (wc) {	/* Last char has not been processed */
+			if (i >= _MAX_LFN) return 0;	/* Buffer overflow? */
+			lfnbuf[i++] = wc = uc;			/* Store it */
+		} else {
+			if (uc != 0xFFFF) return 0;		/* Check filler */
+		}
+	} while (++s < 13);						/* Read all character in the entry */
+
+	if (dir[LDIR_Ord] & LLE) {				/* Put terminator if it is the last LFN part */
+		if (i >= _MAX_LFN) return 0;		/* Buffer overflow? */
+		lfnbuf[i] = 0;
+	}
+
+	return 1;
+}
+
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+void fit_lfn (
+	const WCHAR *lfnbuf,	/* Pointer to the LFN buffer */
+	BYTE *dir,				/* Pointer to the directory entry */
+	BYTE ord,				/* LFN order (1-20) */
+	BYTE sum				/* SFN sum */
+)
+{
+	UINT i, s;
+	WCHAR wc;
+
+
+	dir[LDIR_Chksum] = sum;			/* Set check sum */
+	dir[LDIR_Attr] = AM_LFN;		/* Set attribute. LFN entry */
+	dir[LDIR_Type] = 0;
+	ST_WORD(dir+LDIR_FstClusLO, 0);
+
+	i = (ord - 1) * 13;				/* Get offset in the LFN buffer */
+	s = wc = 0;
+	do {
+		if (wc != 0xFFFF) wc = lfnbuf[i++];	/* Get an effective char */
+		ST_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s], wc);	/* Put it */
+		if (!wc) wc = 0xFFFF;		/* Padding chars following last char */
+	} while (++s < 13);
+	if (wc == 0xFFFF || !lfnbuf[i]) ord |= LLE;	/* Bottom LFN part is the start of LFN sequence */
+	dir[LDIR_Ord] = ord;			/* Set the LFN order */
+}
+
+#endif
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Create numbered name                                                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _USE_LFN
+void gen_numname (
+	BYTE *dst,			/* Pointer to generated SFN */
+	const BYTE *src,	/* Pointer to source SFN to be modified */
+	const WCHAR *lfn,	/* Pointer to LFN */
+	WORD seq			/* Sequence number */
+)
+{
+	BYTE ns[8], c;
+	UINT i, j;
+
+
+	mem_cpy(dst, src, 11);
+
+	if (seq > 5) {	/* On many collisions, generate a hash number instead of sequential number */
+		do seq = (seq >> 1) + (seq << 15) + (WORD)*lfn++; while (*lfn);
+	}
+
+	/* itoa (hexdecimal) */
+	i = 7;
+	do {
+		c = (seq % 16) + '0';
+		if (c > '9') c += 7;
+		ns[i--] = c;
+		seq /= 16;
+	} while (seq);
+	ns[i] = '~';
+
+	/* Append the number */
+	for (j = 0; j < i && dst[j] != ' '; j++) {
+		if (IsDBCS1(dst[j])) {
+			if (j == i - 1) break;
+			j++;
+		}
+	}
+	do {
+		dst[j++] = (i < 8) ? ns[i++] : ' ';
+	} while (j < 8);
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Calculate sum of an SFN                                               */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _USE_LFN
+static
+BYTE sum_sfn (
+	const BYTE *dir		/* Ptr to directory entry */
+)
+{
+	BYTE sum = 0;
+	UINT n = 11;
+
+	do sum = (sum >> 1) + (sum << 7) + *dir++; while (--n);
+	return sum;
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Directory handling - Find an object in the directory                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT dir_find (
+	DIR *dj			/* Pointer to the directory object linked to the file name */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	BYTE c, *dir;
+#if _USE_LFN
+	BYTE a, ord, sum;
+#endif
+
+	res = dir_sdi(dj, 0);			/* Rewind directory object */
+	if (res != FR_OK) return res;
+
+#if _USE_LFN
+	ord = sum = 0xFF;
+#endif
+	do {
+		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+		if (res != FR_OK) break;
+		dir = dj->dir;					/* Ptr to the directory entry of current index */
+		c = dir[DIR_Name];
+		if (c == 0) { res = FR_NO_FILE; break; }	/* Reached to end of table */
+#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
+		a = dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_MASK;
+		if (c == DDE || ((a & AM_VOL) && a != AM_LFN)) {	/* An entry without valid data */
+			ord = 0xFF;
+		} else {
+			if (a == AM_LFN) {			/* An LFN entry is found */
+				if (dj->lfn) {
+					if (c & LLE) {		/* Is it start of LFN sequence? */
+						sum = dir[LDIR_Chksum];
+						c &= ~LLE; ord = c;	/* LFN start order */
+						dj->lfn_idx = dj->index;
+					}
+					/* Check validity of the LFN entry and compare it with given name */
+					ord = (c == ord && sum == dir[LDIR_Chksum] && cmp_lfn(dj->lfn, dir)) ? ord - 1 : 0xFF;
+				}
+			} else {					/* An SFN entry is found */
+				if (!ord && sum == sum_sfn(dir)) break;	/* LFN matched? */
+				ord = 0xFF; dj->lfn_idx = 0xFFFF;	/* Reset LFN sequence */
+				if (!(dj->fn[NS] & NS_LOSS) && !mem_cmp(dir, dj->fn, 11)) break;	/* SFN matched? */
+			}
+		}
+#else		/* Non LFN configuration */
+		if (!(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_VOL) && !mem_cmp(dir, dj->fn, 11)) /* Is it a valid entry? */
+			break;
+#endif
+		res = dir_next(dj, 0);		/* Next entry */
+	} while (res == FR_OK);
+
+	return res;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Read an object from the directory                                     */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1
+static
+FRESULT dir_read (
+	DIR *dj			/* Pointer to the directory object that pointing the entry to be read */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	BYTE c, *dir;
+#if _USE_LFN
+	BYTE a, ord = 0xFF, sum = 0xFF;
+#endif
+
+	res = FR_NO_FILE;
+	while (dj->sect) {
+		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+		if (res != FR_OK) break;
+		dir = dj->dir;					/* Ptr to the directory entry of current index */
+		c = dir[DIR_Name];
+		if (c == 0) { res = FR_NO_FILE; break; }	/* Reached to end of table */
+#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
+		a = dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_MASK;
+		if (c == DDE || (!_FS_RPATH && c == '.') || ((a & AM_VOL) && a != AM_LFN)) {	/* An entry without valid data */
+			ord = 0xFF;
+		} else {
+			if (a == AM_LFN) {			/* An LFN entry is found */
+				if (c & LLE) {			/* Is it start of LFN sequence? */
+					sum = dir[LDIR_Chksum];
+					c &= ~LLE; ord = c;
+					dj->lfn_idx = dj->index;
+				}
+				/* Check LFN validity and capture it */
+				ord = (c == ord && sum == dir[LDIR_Chksum] && pick_lfn(dj->lfn, dir)) ? ord - 1 : 0xFF;
+			} else {					/* An SFN entry is found */
+				if (ord || sum != sum_sfn(dir))	/* Is there a valid LFN? */
+					dj->lfn_idx = 0xFFFF;		/* It has no LFN. */
+				break;
+			}
+		}
+#else		/* Non LFN configuration */
+		if (c != DDE && (_FS_RPATH || c != '.') && !(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_VOL))	/* Is it a valid entry? */
+			break;
+#endif
+		res = dir_next(dj, 0);				/* Next entry */
+		if (res != FR_OK) break;
+	}
+
+	if (res != FR_OK) dj->sect = 0;
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Register an object to the directory                                   */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+FRESULT dir_register (	/* FR_OK:Successful, FR_DENIED:No free entry or too many SFN collision, FR_DISK_ERR:Disk error */
+	DIR *dj				/* Target directory with object name to be created */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	BYTE c, *dir;
+#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
+	WORD n, ne, is;
+	BYTE sn[12], *fn, sum;
+	WCHAR *lfn;
+
+
+	fn = dj->fn; lfn = dj->lfn;
+	mem_cpy(sn, fn, 12);
+
+	if (_FS_RPATH && (sn[NS] & NS_DOT))		/* Cannot create dot entry */
+		return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+
+	if (sn[NS] & NS_LOSS) {			/* When LFN is out of 8.3 format, generate a numbered name */
+		fn[NS] = 0; dj->lfn = 0;			/* Find only SFN */
+		for (n = 1; n < 100; n++) {
+			gen_numname(fn, sn, lfn, n);	/* Generate a numbered name */
+			res = dir_find(dj);				/* Check if the name collides with existing SFN */
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+		}
+		if (n == 100) return FR_DENIED;		/* Abort if too many collisions */
+		if (res != FR_NO_FILE) return res;	/* Abort if the result is other than 'not collided' */
+		fn[NS] = sn[NS]; dj->lfn = lfn;
+	}
+
+	if (sn[NS] & NS_LFN) {			/* When LFN is to be created, reserve an SFN + LFN entries. */
+		for (ne = 0; lfn[ne]; ne++) ;
+		ne = (ne + 25) / 13;
+	} else {						/* Otherwise reserve only an SFN entry. */
+		ne = 1;
+	}
+
+	/* Reserve contiguous entries */
+	res = dir_sdi(dj, 0);
+	if (res != FR_OK) return res;
+	n = is = 0;
+	do {
+		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+		if (res != FR_OK) break;
+		c = *dj->dir;				/* Check the entry status */
+		if (c == DDE || c == 0) {	/* Is it a blank entry? */
+			if (n == 0) is = dj->index;	/* First index of the contiguous entry */
+			if (++n == ne) break;	/* A contiguous entry that required count is found */
+		} else {
+			n = 0;					/* Not a blank entry. Restart to search */
+		}
+		res = dir_next(dj, 1);		/* Next entry with table stretch */
+	} while (res == FR_OK);
+
+	if (res == FR_OK && ne > 1) {	/* Initialize LFN entry if needed */
+		res = dir_sdi(dj, is);
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			sum = sum_sfn(dj->fn);	/* Sum of the SFN tied to the LFN */
+			ne--;
+			do {					/* Store LFN entries in bottom first */
+				res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+				if (res != FR_OK) break;
+				fit_lfn(dj->lfn, dj->dir, (BYTE)ne, sum);
+				dj->fs->wflag = 1;
+				res = dir_next(dj, 0);	/* Next entry */
+			} while (res == FR_OK && --ne);
+		}
+	}
+
+#else	/* Non LFN configuration */
+	res = dir_sdi(dj, 0);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		do {	/* Find a blank entry for the SFN */
+			res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			c = *dj->dir;
+			if (c == DDE || c == 0) break;	/* Is it a blank entry? */
+			res = dir_next(dj, 1);			/* Next entry with table stretch */
+		} while (res == FR_OK);
+	}
+#endif
+
+	if (res == FR_OK) {		/* Initialize the SFN entry */
+		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			dir = dj->dir;
+			mem_set(dir, 0, SZ_DIR);	/* Clean the entry */
+			mem_cpy(dir, dj->fn, 11);	/* Put SFN */
+#if _USE_LFN
+			dir[DIR_NTres] = *(dj->fn+NS) & (NS_BODY | NS_EXT);	/* Put NT flag */
+#endif
+			dj->fs->wflag = 1;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Remove an object from the directory                                   */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY && !_FS_MINIMIZE
+static
+FRESULT dir_remove (	/* FR_OK: Successful, FR_DISK_ERR: A disk error */
+	DIR *dj				/* Directory object pointing the entry to be removed */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
+	WORD i;
+
+	i = dj->index;	/* SFN index */
+	res = dir_sdi(dj, (WORD)((dj->lfn_idx == 0xFFFF) ? i : dj->lfn_idx));	/* Goto the SFN or top of the LFN entries */
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		do {
+			res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			*dj->dir = DDE;			/* Mark the entry "deleted" */
+			dj->fs->wflag = 1;
+			if (dj->index >= i) break;	/* When reached SFN, all entries of the object has been deleted. */
+			res = dir_next(dj, 0);		/* Next entry */
+		} while (res == FR_OK);
+		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_INT_ERR;
+	}
+
+#else			/* Non LFN configuration */
+	res = dir_sdi(dj, dj->index);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			*dj->dir = DDE;			/* Mark the entry "deleted" */
+			dj->fs->wflag = 1;
+		}
+	}
+#endif
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Pick a segment and create the object name in directory form           */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT create_name (
+	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the directory object */
+	const TCHAR **path	/* Pointer to pointer to the segment in the path string */
+)
+{
+#ifdef _EXCVT
+	static const BYTE excvt[] = _EXCVT;	/* Upper conversion table for extended chars */
+#endif
+
+#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
+	BYTE b, cf;
+	WCHAR w, *lfn;
+	UINT i, ni, si, di;
+	const TCHAR *p;
+
+	/* Create LFN in Unicode */
+	for (p = *path; *p == '/' || *p == '\\'; p++) ;	/* Strip duplicated separator */
+	lfn = dj->lfn;
+	si = di = 0;
+	for (;;) {
+		w = p[si++];					/* Get a character */
+		if (w < ' ' || w == '/' || w == '\\') break;	/* Break on end of segment */
+		if (di >= _MAX_LFN)				/* Reject too long name */
+			return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+#if !_LFN_UNICODE
+		w &= 0xFF;
+		if (IsDBCS1(w)) {				/* Check if it is a DBC 1st byte (always false on SBCS cfg) */
+			b = (BYTE)p[si++];			/* Get 2nd byte */
+			if (!IsDBCS2(b))
+				return FR_INVALID_NAME;	/* Reject invalid sequence */
+			w = (w << 8) + b;			/* Create a DBC */
+		}
+		w = ff_convert(w, 1);			/* Convert ANSI/OEM to Unicode */
+		if (!w) return FR_INVALID_NAME;	/* Reject invalid code */
+#endif
+		if (w < 0x80 && chk_chr("\"*:<>\?|\x7F", w)) /* Reject illegal chars for LFN */
+			return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		lfn[di++] = w;					/* Store the Unicode char */
+	}
+	*path = &p[si];						/* Return pointer to the next segment */
+	cf = (w < ' ') ? NS_LAST : 0;		/* Set last segment flag if end of path */
+#if _FS_RPATH
+	if ((di == 1 && lfn[di-1] == '.') || /* Is this a dot entry? */
+		(di == 2 && lfn[di-1] == '.' && lfn[di-2] == '.')) {
+		lfn[di] = 0;
+		for (i = 0; i < 11; i++)
+			dj->fn[i] = (i < di) ? '.' : ' ';
+		dj->fn[i] = cf | NS_DOT;		/* This is a dot entry */
+		return FR_OK;
+	}
+#endif
+	while (di) {						/* Strip trailing spaces and dots */
+		w = lfn[di-1];
+		if (w != ' ' && w != '.') break;
+		di--;
+	}
+	if (!di) return FR_INVALID_NAME;	/* Reject nul string */
+
+	lfn[di] = 0;						/* LFN is created */
+
+	/* Create SFN in directory form */
+	mem_set(dj->fn, ' ', 11);
+	for (si = 0; lfn[si] == ' ' || lfn[si] == '.'; si++) ;	/* Strip leading spaces and dots */
+	if (si) cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN;
+	while (di && lfn[di - 1] != '.') di--;	/* Find extension (di<=si: no extension) */
+
+	b = i = 0; ni = 8;
+	for (;;) {
+		w = lfn[si++];					/* Get an LFN char */
+		if (!w) break;					/* Break on end of the LFN */
+		if (w == ' ' || (w == '.' && si != di)) {	/* Remove spaces and dots */
+			cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; continue;
+		}
+
+		if (i >= ni || si == di) {		/* Extension or end of SFN */
+			if (ni == 11) {				/* Long extension */
+				cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; break;
+			}
+			if (si != di) cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN;	/* Out of 8.3 format */
+			if (si > di) break;			/* No extension */
+			si = di; i = 8; ni = 11;	/* Enter extension section */
+			b <<= 2; continue;
+		}
+
+		if (w >= 0x80) {				/* Non ASCII char */
+#ifdef _EXCVT
+			w = ff_convert(w, 0);		/* Unicode -> OEM code */
+			if (w) w = excvt[w - 0x80];	/* Convert extended char to upper (SBCS) */
+#else
+			w = ff_convert(ff_wtoupper(w), 0);	/* Upper converted Unicode -> OEM code */
+#endif
+			cf |= NS_LFN;				/* Force create LFN entry */
+		}
+
+		if (_DF1S && w >= 0x100) {		/* Double byte char (always false on SBCS cfg) */
+			if (i >= ni - 1) {
+				cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; i = ni; continue;
+			}
+			dj->fn[i++] = (BYTE)(w >> 8);
+		} else {						/* Single byte char */
+			if (!w || chk_chr("+,;=[]", w)) {	/* Replace illegal chars for SFN */
+				w = '_'; cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN;/* Lossy conversion */
+			} else {
+				if (IsUpper(w)) {		/* ASCII large capital */
+					b |= 2;
+				} else {
+					if (IsLower(w)) {	/* ASCII small capital */
+						b |= 1; w -= 0x20;
+					}
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		dj->fn[i++] = (BYTE)w;
+	}
+
+	if (dj->fn[0] == DDE) dj->fn[0] = NDDE;	/* If the first char collides with deleted mark, replace it with 0x05 */
+
+	if (ni == 8) b <<= 2;
+	if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x0C || (b & 0x03) == 0x03)	/* Create LFN entry when there are composite capitals */
+		cf |= NS_LFN;
+	if (!(cf & NS_LFN)) {						/* When LFN is in 8.3 format without extended char, NT flags are created */
+		if ((b & 0x03) == 0x01) cf |= NS_EXT;	/* NT flag (Extension has only small capital) */
+		if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x04) cf |= NS_BODY;	/* NT flag (Filename has only small capital) */
+	}
+
+	dj->fn[NS] = cf;	/* SFN is created */
+
+	return FR_OK;
+
+
+#else	/* Non-LFN configuration */
+	BYTE b, c, d, *sfn;
+	UINT ni, si, i;
+	const char *p;
+
+	/* Create file name in directory form */
+	for (p = *path; *p == '/' || *p == '\\'; p++) ;	/* Strip duplicated separator */
+	sfn = dj->fn;
+	mem_set(sfn, ' ', 11);
+	si = i = b = 0; ni = 8;
+#if _FS_RPATH
+	if (p[si] == '.') { /* Is this a dot entry? */
+		for (;;) {
+			c = (BYTE)p[si++];
+			if (c != '.' || si >= 3) break;
+			sfn[i++] = c;
+		}
+		if (c != '/' && c != '\\' && c > ' ') return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		*path = &p[si];									/* Return pointer to the next segment */
+		sfn[NS] = (c <= ' ') ? NS_LAST | NS_DOT : NS_DOT;	/* Set last segment flag if end of path */
+		return FR_OK;
+	}
+#endif
+	for (;;) {
+		c = (BYTE)p[si++];
+		if (c <= ' ' || c == '/' || c == '\\') break;	/* Break on end of segment */
+		if (c == '.' || i >= ni) {
+			if (ni != 8 || c != '.') return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			i = 8; ni = 11;
+			b <<= 2; continue;
+		}
+		if (c >= 0x80) {				/* Extended char? */
+			b |= 3;						/* Eliminate NT flag */
+#ifdef _EXCVT
+			c = excvt[c - 0x80];		/* Upper conversion (SBCS) */
+#else
+#if !_DF1S	/* ASCII only cfg */
+			return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+#endif
+#endif
+		}
+		if (IsDBCS1(c)) {				/* Check if it is a DBC 1st byte (always false on SBCS cfg) */
+			d = (BYTE)p[si++];			/* Get 2nd byte */
+			if (!IsDBCS2(d) || i >= ni - 1)	/* Reject invalid DBC */
+				return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			sfn[i++] = c;
+			sfn[i++] = d;
+		} else {						/* Single byte code */
+			if (chk_chr("\"*+,:;<=>\?[]|\x7F", c))	/* Reject illegal chrs for SFN */
+				return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			if (IsUpper(c)) {			/* ASCII large capital? */
+				b |= 2;
+			} else {
+				if (IsLower(c)) {		/* ASCII small capital? */
+					b |= 1; c -= 0x20;
+				}
+			}
+			sfn[i++] = c;
+		}
+	}
+	*path = &p[si];						/* Return pointer to the next segment */
+	c = (c <= ' ') ? NS_LAST : 0;		/* Set last segment flag if end of path */
+
+	if (!i) return FR_INVALID_NAME;		/* Reject nul string */
+	if (sfn[0] == DDE) sfn[0] = NDDE;	/* When first char collides with DDE, replace it with 0x05 */
+
+	if (ni == 8) b <<= 2;
+	if ((b & 0x03) == 0x01) c |= NS_EXT;	/* NT flag (Name extension has only small capital) */
+	if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x04) c |= NS_BODY;	/* NT flag (Name body has only small capital) */
+
+	sfn[NS] = c;		/* Store NT flag, File name is created */
+
+	return FR_OK;
+#endif
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get file information from directory entry                             */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1
+static
+void get_fileinfo (		/* No return code */
+	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the directory object */
+	FILINFO *fno	 	/* Pointer to the file information to be filled */
+)
+{
+	UINT i;
+	BYTE nt, *dir;
+	TCHAR *p, c;
+
+
+	p = fno->fname;
+	if (dj->sect) {
+		dir = dj->dir;
+		nt = dir[DIR_NTres];		/* NT flag */
+		for (i = 0; i < 8; i++) {	/* Copy name body */
+			c = dir[i];
+			if (c == ' ') break;
+			if (c == NDDE) c = (TCHAR)DDE;
+			if (_USE_LFN && (nt & NS_BODY) && IsUpper(c)) c += 0x20;
+#if _LFN_UNICODE
+			if (IsDBCS1(c) && i < 7 && IsDBCS2(dir[i+1]))
+				c = (c << 8) | dir[++i];
+			c = ff_convert(c, 1);
+			if (!c) c = '?';
+#endif
+			*p++ = c;
+		}
+		if (dir[8] != ' ') {		/* Copy name extension */
+			*p++ = '.';
+			for (i = 8; i < 11; i++) {
+				c = dir[i];
+				if (c == ' ') break;
+				if (_USE_LFN && (nt & NS_EXT) && IsUpper(c)) c += 0x20;
+#if _LFN_UNICODE
+				if (IsDBCS1(c) && i < 10 && IsDBCS2(dir[i+1]))
+					c = (c << 8) | dir[++i];
+				c = ff_convert(c, 1);
+				if (!c) c = '?';
+#endif
+				*p++ = c;
+			}
+		}
+		fno->fattrib = dir[DIR_Attr];				/* Attribute */
+		fno->fsize = LD_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize);	/* Size */
+		fno->fdate = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtDate);		/* Date */
+		fno->ftime = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime);		/* Time */
+	}
+	*p = 0;		/* Terminate SFN str by a \0 */
+
+#if _USE_LFN
+	if (fno->lfname && fno->lfsize) {
+		TCHAR *tp = fno->lfname;
+		WCHAR w, *lfn;
+
+		i = 0;
+		if (dj->sect && dj->lfn_idx != 0xFFFF) {/* Get LFN if available */
+			lfn = dj->lfn;
+			while ((w = *lfn++) != 0) {			/* Get an LFN char */
+#if !_LFN_UNICODE
+				w = ff_convert(w, 0);			/* Unicode -> OEM conversion */
+				if (!w) { i = 0; break; }		/* Could not convert, no LFN */
+				if (_DF1S && w >= 0x100)		/* Put 1st byte if it is a DBC (always false on SBCS cfg) */
+					tp[i++] = (TCHAR)(w >> 8);
+#endif
+				if (i >= fno->lfsize - 1) { i = 0; break; }	/* Buffer overflow, no LFN */
+				tp[i++] = (TCHAR)w;
+			}
+		}
+		tp[i] = 0;	/* Terminate the LFN str by a \0 */
+	}
+#endif
+}
+#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1 */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Follow a file path                                                    */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT follow_path (	/* FR_OK(0): successful, !=0: error code */
+	DIR *dj,			/* Directory object to return last directory and found object */
+	const TCHAR *path	/* Full-path string to find a file or directory */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	BYTE *dir, ns;
+
+
+#if _FS_RPATH
+	if (*path == '/' || *path == '\\') { /* There is a heading separator */
+		path++;	dj->sclust = 0;		/* Strip it and start from the root dir */
+	} else {							/* No heading separator */
+		dj->sclust = dj->fs->cdir;	/* Start from the current dir */
+	}
+#else
+	if (*path == '/' || *path == '\\')	/* Strip heading separator if exist */
+		path++;
+	dj->sclust = 0;						/* Start from the root dir */
+#endif
+
+	if ((UINT)*path < ' ') {			/* Nul path means the start directory itself */
+		res = dir_sdi(dj, 0);
+		dj->dir = 0;
+	} else {							/* Follow path */
+		for (;;) {
+			res = create_name(dj, &path);	/* Get a segment */
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			res = dir_find(dj);				/* Find it */
+			ns = *(dj->fn+NS);
+			if (res != FR_OK) {				/* Failed to find the object */
+				if (res != FR_NO_FILE) break;	/* Abort if any hard error occurred */
+				/* Object not found */
+				if (_FS_RPATH && (ns & NS_DOT)) {	/* If dot entry is not exit */
+					dj->sclust = 0; dj->dir = 0;	/* It is the root dir */
+					res = FR_OK;
+					if (!(ns & NS_LAST)) continue;
+				} else {							/* Could not find the object */
+					if (!(ns & NS_LAST)) res = FR_NO_PATH;
+				}
+				break;
+			}
+			if (ns & NS_LAST) break;			/* Last segment match. Function completed. */
+			dir = dj->dir;						/* There is next segment. Follow the sub directory */
+			if (!(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)) {	/* Cannot follow because it is a file */
+				res = FR_NO_PATH; break;
+			}
+			dj->sclust = ld_clust(dj->fs, dir);
+		}
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Load a sector and check if it is an FAT Volume Boot Record            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+BYTE check_fs (	/* 0:FAT-VBR, 1:Any BR but not FAT, 2:Not a BR, 3:Disk error */
+	FATFS *fs,	/* File system object */
+	DWORD sect	/* Sector# (lba) to check if it is an FAT boot record or not */
+)
+{
+	if (disk_read(fs->drv, fs->win, sect, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Load boot record */
+		return 3;
+	if (LD_WORD(&fs->win[BS_55AA]) != 0xAA55)		/* Check record signature (always placed at offset 510 even if the sector size is >512) */
+		return 2;
+
+	if ((LD_DWORD(&fs->win[BS_FilSysType]) & 0xFFFFFF) == 0x544146)	/* Check "FAT" string */
+		return 0;
+	if ((LD_DWORD(&fs->win[BS_FilSysType32]) & 0xFFFFFF) == 0x544146)
+		return 0;
+
+	return 1;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Check if the file system object is valid or not                       */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT chk_mounted (	/* FR_OK(0): successful, !=0: any error occurred */
+	const TCHAR **path,	/* Pointer to pointer to the path name (drive number) */
+	FATFS **rfs,		/* Pointer to pointer to the found file system object */
+	BYTE wmode			/* !=0: Check write protection for write access */
+)
+{
+	BYTE fmt, b, pi, *tbl;
+	UINT vol;
+	DSTATUS stat;
+	DWORD bsect, fasize, tsect, sysect, nclst, szbfat;
+	WORD nrsv;
+	const TCHAR *p = *path;
+	FATFS *fs;
+
+
+	/* Get logical drive number from the path name */
+	vol = p[0] - '0';					/* Is there a drive number? */
+	if (vol <= 9 && p[1] == ':') {		/* Found a drive number, get and strip it */
+		p += 2; *path = p;				/* Return pointer to the path name */
+	} else {							/* No drive number is given */
+#if _FS_RPATH
+		vol = CurrVol;					/* Use current drive */
+#else
+		vol = 0;						/* Use drive 0 */
+#endif
+	}
+
+	/* Check if the file system object is valid or not */
+	*rfs = 0;
+	if (vol >= _VOLUMES) 				/* Is the drive number valid? */
+		return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
+	fs = FatFs[vol];					/* Get corresponding file system object */
+	if (!fs) return FR_NOT_ENABLED;		/* Is the file system object available? */
+
+	ENTER_FF(fs);						/* Lock file system */
+
+	*rfs = fs;							/* Return pointer to the corresponding file system object */
+	if (fs->fs_type) {					/* If the volume has been mounted */
+		stat = disk_status(fs->drv);
+		if (!(stat & STA_NOINIT)) {		/* and the physical drive is kept initialized (has not been changed), */
+			if (!_FS_READONLY && wmode && (stat & STA_PROTECT))	/* Check write protection if needed */
+				return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
+			return FR_OK;				/* The file system object is valid */
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* The file system object is not valid. */
+	/* Following code attempts to mount the volume. (analyze BPB and initialize the fs object) */
+
+	fs->fs_type = 0;					/* Clear the file system object */
+	fs->drv = LD2PD(vol);				/* Bind the logical drive and a physical drive */
+	stat = disk_initialize(fs->drv);	/* Initialize the physical drive */
+	if (stat & STA_NOINIT)				/* Check if the initialization succeeded */
+		return FR_NOT_READY;			/* Failed to initialize due to no medium or hard error */
+	if (!_FS_READONLY && wmode && (stat & STA_PROTECT))	/* Check disk write protection if needed */
+		return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
+#if _MAX_SS != 512						/* Get disk sector size (variable sector size cfg only) */
+	if (disk_ioctl(fs->drv, GET_SECTOR_SIZE, &fs->ssize) != RES_OK)
+		return FR_DISK_ERR;
+#endif
+	/* Search FAT partition on the drive. Supports only generic partitions, FDISK and SFD. */
+	fmt = check_fs(fs, bsect = 0);		/* Load sector 0 and check if it is an FAT-VBR (in SFD) */
+	if (LD2PT(vol) && !fmt) fmt = 1;	/* Force non-SFD if the volume is forced partition */
+	if (fmt == 1) {						/* Not an FAT-VBR, the physical drive can be partitioned */
+		/* Check the partition listed in the partition table */
+		pi = LD2PT(vol);
+		if (pi) pi--;
+		tbl = &fs->win[MBR_Table + pi * SZ_PTE];/* Partition table */
+		if (tbl[4]) {						/* Is the partition existing? */
+			bsect = LD_DWORD(&tbl[8]);		/* Partition offset in LBA */
+			fmt = check_fs(fs, bsect);		/* Check the partition */
+		}
+	}
+	if (fmt == 3) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+	if (fmt) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;		/* No FAT volume is found */
+
+	/* An FAT volume is found. Following code initializes the file system object */
+
+	if (LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_BytsPerSec) != SS(fs))		/* (BPB_BytsPerSec must be equal to the physical sector size) */
+		return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;
+
+	fasize = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_FATSz16);				/* Number of sectors per FAT */
+	if (!fasize) fasize = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_FATSz32);
+	fs->fsize = fasize;
+
+	fs->n_fats = b = fs->win[BPB_NumFATs];				/* Number of FAT copies */
+	if (b != 1 && b != 2) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;		/* (Must be 1 or 2) */
+	fasize *= b;										/* Number of sectors for FAT area */
+
+	fs->csize = b = fs->win[BPB_SecPerClus];			/* Number of sectors per cluster */
+	if (!b || (b & (b - 1))) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;	/* (Must be power of 2) */
+
+	fs->n_rootdir = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_RootEntCnt);	/* Number of root directory entries */
+	if (fs->n_rootdir % (SS(fs) / SZ_DIR)) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;	/* (BPB_RootEntCnt must be sector aligned) */
+
+	tsect = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_TotSec16);				/* Number of sectors on the volume */
+	if (!tsect) tsect = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_TotSec32);
+
+	nrsv = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_RsvdSecCnt);				/* Number of reserved sectors */
+	if (!nrsv) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;					/* (BPB_RsvdSecCnt must not be 0) */
+
+	/* Determine the FAT sub type */
+	sysect = nrsv + fasize + fs->n_rootdir / (SS(fs) / SZ_DIR);	/* RSV+FAT+DIR */
+	if (tsect < sysect) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;		/* (Invalid volume size) */
+	nclst = (tsect - sysect) / fs->csize;				/* Number of clusters */
+	if (!nclst) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;				/* (Invalid volume size) */
+	fmt = FS_FAT12;
+	if (nclst >= MIN_FAT16) fmt = FS_FAT16;
+	if (nclst >= MIN_FAT32) fmt = FS_FAT32;
+
+	/* Boundaries and Limits */
+	fs->n_fatent = nclst + 2;							/* Number of FAT entries */
+	fs->database = bsect + sysect;						/* Data start sector */
+	fs->fatbase = bsect + nrsv; 						/* FAT start sector */
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
+		if (fs->n_rootdir) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;		/* (BPB_RootEntCnt must be 0) */
+		fs->dirbase = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_RootClus);	/* Root directory start cluster */
+		szbfat = fs->n_fatent * 4;						/* (Required FAT size) */
+	} else {
+		if (!fs->n_rootdir)	return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;	/* (BPB_RootEntCnt must not be 0) */
+		fs->dirbase = fs->fatbase + fasize;				/* Root directory start sector */
+		szbfat = (fmt == FS_FAT16) ?					/* (Required FAT size) */
+			fs->n_fatent * 2 : fs->n_fatent * 3 / 2 + (fs->n_fatent & 1);
+	}
+	if (fs->fsize < (szbfat + (SS(fs) - 1)) / SS(fs))	/* (BPB_FATSz must not be less than required) */
+		return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+	/* Initialize cluster allocation information */
+	fs->free_clust = 0xFFFFFFFF;
+	fs->last_clust = 0;
+
+	/* Get fsinfo if available */
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
+	 	fs->fsi_flag = 0;
+		fs->fsi_sector = bsect + LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_FSInfo);
+		if (disk_read(fs->drv, fs->win, fs->fsi_sector, 1) == RES_OK &&
+			LD_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA) == 0xAA55 &&
+			LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_LeadSig) == 0x41615252 &&
+			LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_StrucSig) == 0x61417272) {
+				fs->last_clust = LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Nxt_Free);
+				fs->free_clust = LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Free_Count);
+		}
+	}
+#endif
+	fs->fs_type = fmt;		/* FAT sub-type */
+	fs->id = ++Fsid;		/* File system mount ID */
+	fs->winsect = 0;		/* Invalidate sector cache */
+	fs->wflag = 0;
+#if _FS_RPATH
+	fs->cdir = 0;			/* Current directory (root dir) */
+#endif
+#if _FS_LOCK				/* Clear file lock semaphores */
+	clear_lock(fs);
+#endif
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Check if the file/dir object is valid or not                          */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT validate (	/* FR_OK(0): The object is valid, !=0: Invalid */
+	void* obj		/* Pointer to the object FIL/DIR to check validity */
+)
+{
+	FIL *fil;
+
+
+	fil = (FIL*)obj;	/* Assuming offset of fs and id in the FIL/DIR is identical */
+	if (!fil->fs || !fil->fs->fs_type || fil->fs->id != fil->id)
+		return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
+
+	ENTER_FF(fil->fs);		/* Lock file system */
+
+	if (disk_status(fil->fs->drv) & STA_NOINIT)
+		return FR_NOT_READY;
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+   Public Functions
+
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Mount/Unmount a Logical Drive                                         */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_mount (
+	BYTE vol,		/* Logical drive number to be mounted/unmounted */
+	FATFS *fs		/* Pointer to new file system object (NULL for unmount)*/
+)
+{
+	FATFS *rfs;
+
+
+	if (vol >= _VOLUMES)		/* Check if the drive number is valid */
+		return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
+	rfs = FatFs[vol];			/* Get current fs object */
+
+	if (rfs) {
+#if _FS_LOCK
+		clear_lock(rfs);
+#endif
+#if _FS_REENTRANT				/* Discard sync object of the current volume */
+		if (!ff_del_syncobj(rfs->sobj)) return FR_INT_ERR;
+#endif
+		rfs->fs_type = 0;		/* Clear old fs object */
+	}
+
+	if (fs) {
+		fs->fs_type = 0;		/* Clear new fs object */
+#if _FS_REENTRANT				/* Create sync object for the new volume */
+		if (!ff_cre_syncobj(vol, &fs->sobj)) return FR_INT_ERR;
+#endif
+	}
+	FatFs[vol] = fs;			/* Register new fs object */
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Open or Create a File                                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_open (
+	FIL *fp,			/* Pointer to the blank file object */
+	const TCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file name */
+	BYTE mode			/* Access mode and file open mode flags */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	BYTE *dir;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	if (!fp) return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
+	fp->fs = 0;			/* Clear file object */
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+	mode &= FA_READ | FA_WRITE | FA_CREATE_ALWAYS | FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_CREATE_NEW;
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, (BYTE)(mode & ~FA_READ));
+#else
+	mode &= FA_READ;
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0);
+#endif
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);	/* Follow the file path */
+		dir = dj.dir;
+#if !_FS_READONLY	/* R/W configuration */
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			if (!dir)	/* Current dir itself */
+				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+#if _FS_LOCK
+			else
+				res = chk_lock(&dj, (mode & ~FA_READ) ? 1 : 0);
+#endif
+		}
+		/* Create or Open a file */
+		if (mode & (FA_CREATE_ALWAYS | FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_CREATE_NEW)) {
+			DWORD dw, cl;
+
+			if (res != FR_OK) {					/* No file, create new */
+				if (res == FR_NO_FILE)			/* There is no file to open, create a new entry */
+#if _FS_LOCK
+					res = enq_lock() ? dir_register(&dj) : FR_TOO_MANY_OPEN_FILES;
+#else
+					res = dir_register(&dj);
+#endif
+				mode |= FA_CREATE_ALWAYS;		/* File is created */
+				dir = dj.dir;					/* New entry */
+			}
+			else {								/* Any object is already existing */
+				if (dir[DIR_Attr] & (AM_RDO | AM_DIR)) {	/* Cannot overwrite it (R/O or DIR) */
+					res = FR_DENIED;
+				} else {
+					if (mode & FA_CREATE_NEW)	/* Cannot create as new file */
+						res = FR_EXIST;
+				}
+			}
+			if (res == FR_OK && (mode & FA_CREATE_ALWAYS)) {	/* Truncate it if overwrite mode */
+				dw = get_fattime();					/* Created time */
+				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_CrtTime, dw);
+				dir[DIR_Attr] = 0;					/* Reset attribute */
+				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize, 0);		/* size = 0 */
+				cl = ld_clust(dj.fs, dir);			/* Get start cluster */
+				st_clust(dir, 0);					/* cluster = 0 */
+				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+				if (cl) {							/* Remove the cluster chain if exist */
+					dw = dj.fs->winsect;
+					res = remove_chain(dj.fs, cl);
+					if (res == FR_OK) {
+						dj.fs->last_clust = cl - 1;	/* Reuse the cluster hole */
+						res = move_window(dj.fs, dw);
+					}
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		else {	/* Open an existing file */
+			if (res == FR_OK) {						/* Follow succeeded */
+				if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) {		/* It is a directory */
+					res = FR_NO_FILE;
+				} else {
+					if ((mode & FA_WRITE) && (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_RDO)) /* R/O violation */
+						res = FR_DENIED;
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			if (mode & FA_CREATE_ALWAYS)			/* Set file change flag if created or overwritten */
+				mode |= FA__WRITTEN;
+			fp->dir_sect = dj.fs->winsect;			/* Pointer to the directory entry */
+			fp->dir_ptr = dir;
+#if _FS_LOCK
+			fp->lockid = inc_lock(&dj, (mode & ~FA_READ) ? 1 : 0);
+			if (!fp->lockid) res = FR_INT_ERR;
+#endif
+		}
+
+#else				/* R/O configuration */
+		if (res == FR_OK) {					/* Follow succeeded */
+			dir = dj.dir;
+			if (!dir) {						/* Current dir itself */
+				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			} else {
+				if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)	/* It is a directory */
+					res = FR_NO_FILE;
+			}
+		}
+#endif
+		FREE_BUF();
+
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			fp->flag = mode;					/* File access mode */
+			fp->sclust = ld_clust(dj.fs, dir);	/* File start cluster */
+			fp->fsize = LD_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize);	/* File size */
+			fp->fptr = 0;						/* File pointer */
+			fp->dsect = 0;
+#if _USE_FASTSEEK
+			fp->cltbl = 0;						/* Normal seek mode */
+#endif
+			fp->fs = dj.fs; fp->id = dj.fs->id;	/* Validate file object */
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Read File                                                             */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_read (
+	FIL *fp, 		/* Pointer to the file object */
+	void *buff,		/* Pointer to data buffer */
+	UINT btr,		/* Number of bytes to read */
+	UINT *br		/* Pointer to number of bytes read */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD clst, sect, remain;
+	UINT rcnt, cc;
+	BYTE csect, *rbuff = buff;
+
+
+	*br = 0;	/* Clear read byte counter */
+
+	res = validate(fp);							/* Check validity */
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)					/* Aborted file? */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+	if (!(fp->flag & FA_READ)) 					/* Check access mode */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
+	remain = fp->fsize - fp->fptr;
+	if (btr > remain) btr = (UINT)remain;		/* Truncate btr by remaining bytes */
+
+	for ( ;  btr;								/* Repeat until all data read */
+		rbuff += rcnt, fp->fptr += rcnt, *br += rcnt, btr -= rcnt) {
+		if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) {		/* On the sector boundary? */
+			csect = (BYTE)(fp->fptr / SS(fp->fs) & (fp->fs->csize - 1));	/* Sector offset in the cluster */
+			if (!csect) {						/* On the cluster boundary? */
+				if (fp->fptr == 0) {			/* On the top of the file? */
+					clst = fp->sclust;			/* Follow from the origin */
+				} else {						/* Middle or end of the file */
+#if _USE_FASTSEEK
+					if (fp->cltbl)
+						clst = clmt_clust(fp, fp->fptr);	/* Get cluster# from the CLMT */
+					else
+#endif
+						clst = get_fat(fp->fs, fp->clust);	/* Follow cluster chain on the FAT */
+				}
+				if (clst < 2) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->clust = clst;				/* Update current cluster */
+			}
+			sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->clust);	/* Get current sector */
+			if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+			sect += csect;
+			cc = btr / SS(fp->fs);				/* When remaining bytes >= sector size, */
+			if (cc) {							/* Read maximum contiguous sectors directly */
+				if (csect + cc > fp->fs->csize)	/* Clip at cluster boundary */
+					cc = fp->fs->csize - csect;
+				if (disk_read(fp->fs->drv, rbuff, sect, (BYTE)cc) != RES_OK)
+					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+#if !_FS_READONLY && _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2			/* Replace one of the read sectors with cached data if it contains a dirty sector */
+#if _FS_TINY
+				if (fp->fs->wflag && fp->fs->winsect - sect < cc)
+					mem_cpy(rbuff + ((fp->fs->winsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), fp->fs->win, SS(fp->fs));
+#else
+				if ((fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) && fp->dsect - sect < cc)
+					mem_cpy(rbuff + ((fp->dsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), fp->buf, SS(fp->fs));
+#endif
+#endif
+				rcnt = SS(fp->fs) * cc;			/* Number of bytes transferred */
+				continue;
+			}
+#if !_FS_TINY
+			if (fp->dsect != sect) {			/* Load data sector if not in cache */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+				if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {		/* Write-back dirty sector cache */
+					if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+						ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+					fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+				}
+#endif
+				if (disk_read(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, sect, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Fill sector cache */
+					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+			}
+#endif
+			fp->dsect = sect;
+		}
+		rcnt = SS(fp->fs) - ((UINT)fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs));	/* Get partial sector data from sector buffer */
+		if (rcnt > btr) rcnt = btr;
+#if _FS_TINY
+		if (move_window(fp->fs, fp->dsect))		/* Move sector window */
+			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+		mem_cpy(rbuff, &fp->fs->win[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt);	/* Pick partial sector */
+#else
+		mem_cpy(rbuff, &fp->buf[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt);	/* Pick partial sector */
+#endif
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK);
+}
+
+
+
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Write File                                                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_write (
+	FIL *fp,			/* Pointer to the file object */
+	const void *buff,	/* Pointer to the data to be written */
+	UINT btw,			/* Number of bytes to write */
+	UINT *bw			/* Pointer to number of bytes written */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD clst, sect;
+	UINT wcnt, cc;
+	const BYTE *wbuff = buff;
+	BYTE csect;
+
+
+	*bw = 0;	/* Clear write byte counter */
+
+	res = validate(fp);						/* Check validity */
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)				/* Aborted file? */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+	if (!(fp->flag & FA_WRITE))				/* Check access mode */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
+	if ((DWORD)(fp->fsize + btw) < fp->fsize) btw = 0;	/* File size cannot reach 4GB */
+
+	for ( ;  btw;							/* Repeat until all data written */
+		wbuff += wcnt, fp->fptr += wcnt, *bw += wcnt, btw -= wcnt) {
+		if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) {	/* On the sector boundary? */
+			csect = (BYTE)(fp->fptr / SS(fp->fs) & (fp->fs->csize - 1));	/* Sector offset in the cluster */
+			if (!csect) {					/* On the cluster boundary? */
+				if (fp->fptr == 0) {		/* On the top of the file? */
+					clst = fp->sclust;		/* Follow from the origin */
+					if (clst == 0)			/* When no cluster is allocated, */
+						fp->sclust = clst = create_chain(fp->fs, 0);	/* Create a new cluster chain */
+				} else {					/* Middle or end of the file */
+#if _USE_FASTSEEK
+					if (fp->cltbl)
+						clst = clmt_clust(fp, fp->fptr);	/* Get cluster# from the CLMT */
+					else
+#endif
+						clst = create_chain(fp->fs, fp->clust);	/* Follow or stretch cluster chain on the FAT */
+				}
+				if (clst == 0) break;		/* Could not allocate a new cluster (disk full) */
+				if (clst == 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->clust = clst;			/* Update current cluster */
+			}
+#if _FS_TINY
+			if (fp->fs->winsect == fp->dsect && move_window(fp->fs, 0))	/* Write-back sector cache */
+				ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+#else
+			if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {		/* Write-back sector cache */
+				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+			}
+#endif
+			sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->clust);	/* Get current sector */
+			if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+			sect += csect;
+			cc = btw / SS(fp->fs);			/* When remaining bytes >= sector size, */
+			if (cc) {						/* Write maximum contiguous sectors directly */
+				if (csect + cc > fp->fs->csize)	/* Clip at cluster boundary */
+					cc = fp->fs->csize - csect;
+				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, wbuff, sect, (BYTE)cc) != RES_OK)
+					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+#if _FS_TINY
+				if (fp->fs->winsect - sect < cc) {	/* Refill sector cache if it gets invalidated by the direct write */
+					mem_cpy(fp->fs->win, wbuff + ((fp->fs->winsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), SS(fp->fs));
+					fp->fs->wflag = 0;
+				}
+#else
+				if (fp->dsect - sect < cc) { /* Refill sector cache if it gets invalidated by the direct write */
+					mem_cpy(fp->buf, wbuff + ((fp->dsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), SS(fp->fs));
+					fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+				}
+#endif
+				wcnt = SS(fp->fs) * cc;		/* Number of bytes transferred */
+				continue;
+			}
+#if _FS_TINY
+			if (fp->fptr >= fp->fsize) {	/* Avoid silly cache filling at growing edge */
+				if (move_window(fp->fs, 0)) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->fs->winsect = sect;
+			}
+#else
+			if (fp->dsect != sect) {		/* Fill sector cache with file data */
+				if (fp->fptr < fp->fsize &&
+					disk_read(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, sect, 1) != RES_OK)
+						ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+			}
+#endif
+			fp->dsect = sect;
+		}
+		wcnt = SS(fp->fs) - ((UINT)fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs));/* Put partial sector into file I/O buffer */
+		if (wcnt > btw) wcnt = btw;
+#if _FS_TINY
+		if (move_window(fp->fs, fp->dsect))	/* Move sector window */
+			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+		mem_cpy(&fp->fs->win[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], wbuff, wcnt);	/* Fit partial sector */
+		fp->fs->wflag = 1;
+#else
+		mem_cpy(&fp->buf[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], wbuff, wcnt);	/* Fit partial sector */
+		fp->flag |= FA__DIRTY;
+#endif
+	}
+
+	if (fp->fptr > fp->fsize) fp->fsize = fp->fptr;	/* Update file size if needed */
+	fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN;						/* Set file change flag */
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Synchronize the File Object                                           */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_sync (
+	FIL *fp		/* Pointer to the file object */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD tim;
+	BYTE *dir;
+
+
+	res = validate(fp);					/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		if (fp->flag & FA__WRITTEN) {	/* Has the file been written? */
+#if !_FS_TINY	/* Write-back dirty buffer */
+			if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {
+				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+					LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+			}
+#endif
+			/* Update the directory entry */
+			res = move_window(fp->fs, fp->dir_sect);
+			if (res == FR_OK) {
+				dir = fp->dir_ptr;
+				dir[DIR_Attr] |= AM_ARC;					/* Set archive bit */
+				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize, fp->fsize);		/* Update file size */
+				st_clust(dir, fp->sclust);					/* Update start cluster */
+				tim = get_fattime();						/* Update updated time */
+				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim);
+				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_LstAccDate, 0);
+				fp->flag &= ~FA__WRITTEN;
+				fp->fs->wflag = 1;
+				res = sync(fp->fs);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+}
+
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Close File                                                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_close (
+	FIL *fp		/* Pointer to the file object to be closed */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+
+
+#if _FS_READONLY
+	res = validate(fp);
+	{
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+		FATFS *fs = fp->fs;
+#endif
+		if (res == FR_OK) fp->fs = 0;	/* Discard file object */
+		LEAVE_FF(fs, res);
+	}
+#else
+	res = f_sync(fp);		/* Flush cached data */
+#if _FS_LOCK
+	if (res == FR_OK) {		/* Decrement open counter */
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+		FATFS *fs = fp->fs;;
+		res = validate(fp);
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			res = dec_lock(fp->lockid);	
+			unlock_fs(fs, FR_OK);
+		}
+#else
+		res = dec_lock(fp->lockid);
+#endif
+	}
+#endif
+	if (res == FR_OK) fp->fs = 0;	/* Discard file object */
+	return res;
+#endif
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Current Drive/Directory Handlings                                     */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#if _FS_RPATH >= 1
+
+FRESULT f_chdrive (
+	BYTE drv		/* Drive number */
+)
+{
+	if (drv >= _VOLUMES) return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
+
+	CurrVol = drv;
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+FRESULT f_chdir (
+	const TCHAR *path	/* Pointer to the directory path */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);		/* Follow the path */
+		FREE_BUF();
+		if (res == FR_OK) {					/* Follow completed */
+			if (!dj.dir) {
+				dj.fs->cdir = dj.sclust;	/* Start directory itself */
+			} else {
+				if (dj.dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)	/* Reached to the directory */
+					dj.fs->cdir = ld_clust(dj.fs, dj.dir);
+				else
+					res = FR_NO_PATH;		/* Reached but a file */
+			}
+		}
+		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_NO_PATH;
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+#if _FS_RPATH >= 2
+FRESULT f_getcwd (
+	TCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the directory path */
+	UINT sz_path	/* Size of path */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	UINT i, n;
+	DWORD ccl;
+	TCHAR *tp;
+	FILINFO fno;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	*path = 0;
+	res = chk_mounted((const TCHAR**)&path, &dj.fs, 0);	/* Get current volume */
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		i = sz_path;		/* Bottom of buffer (dir stack base) */
+		dj.sclust = dj.fs->cdir;			/* Start to follow upper dir from current dir */
+		while ((ccl = dj.sclust) != 0) {	/* Repeat while current dir is a sub-dir */
+			res = dir_sdi(&dj, 1);			/* Get parent dir */
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			res = dir_read(&dj);
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			dj.sclust = ld_clust(dj.fs, dj.dir);	/* Goto parent dir */
+			res = dir_sdi(&dj, 0);
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			do {							/* Find the entry links to the child dir */
+				res = dir_read(&dj);
+				if (res != FR_OK) break;
+				if (ccl == ld_clust(dj.fs, dj.dir)) break;	/* Found the entry */
+				res = dir_next(&dj, 0);	
+			} while (res == FR_OK);
+			if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_INT_ERR;/* It cannot be 'not found'. */
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+#if _USE_LFN
+			fno.lfname = path;
+			fno.lfsize = i;
+#endif
+			get_fileinfo(&dj, &fno);		/* Get the dir name and push it to the buffer */
+			tp = fno.fname;
+			if (_USE_LFN && *path) tp = path;
+			for (n = 0; tp[n]; n++) ;
+			if (i < n + 3) {
+				res = FR_NOT_ENOUGH_CORE; break;
+			}
+			while (n) path[--i] = tp[--n];
+			path[--i] = '/';
+		}
+		tp = path;
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			*tp++ = '0' + CurrVol;			/* Put drive number */
+			*tp++ = ':';
+			if (i == sz_path) {				/* Root-dir */
+				*tp++ = '/';
+			} else {						/* Sub-dir */
+				do		/* Add stacked path str */
+					*tp++ = path[i++];
+				while (i < sz_path);
+			}
+		}
+		*tp = 0;
+		FREE_BUF();
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+#endif /* _FS_RPATH >= 2 */
+#endif /* _FS_RPATH >= 1 */
+
+
+
+#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Seek File R/W Pointer                                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_lseek (
+	FIL *fp,		/* Pointer to the file object */
+	DWORD ofs		/* File pointer from top of file */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+
+
+	res = validate(fp);					/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)			/* Check abort flag */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+
+#if _USE_FASTSEEK
+	if (fp->cltbl) {	/* Fast seek */
+		DWORD cl, pcl, ncl, tcl, dsc, tlen, ulen, *tbl;
+
+		if (ofs == CREATE_LINKMAP) {	/* Create CLMT */
+			tbl = fp->cltbl;
+			tlen = *tbl++; ulen = 2;	/* Given table size and required table size */
+			cl = fp->sclust;			/* Top of the chain */
+			if (cl) {
+				do {
+					/* Get a fragment */
+					tcl = cl; ncl = 0; ulen += 2;	/* Top, length and used items */
+					do {
+						pcl = cl; ncl++;
+						cl = get_fat(fp->fs, cl);
+						if (cl <= 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+						if (cl == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+					} while (cl == pcl + 1);
+					if (ulen <= tlen) {		/* Store the length and top of the fragment */
+						*tbl++ = ncl; *tbl++ = tcl;
+					}
+				} while (cl < fp->fs->n_fatent);	/* Repeat until end of chain */
+			}
+			*fp->cltbl = ulen;	/* Number of items used */
+			if (ulen <= tlen)
+				*tbl = 0;		/* Terminate table */
+			else
+				res = FR_NOT_ENOUGH_CORE;	/* Given table size is smaller than required */
+
+		} else {						/* Fast seek */
+			if (ofs > fp->fsize)		/* Clip offset at the file size */
+				ofs = fp->fsize;
+			fp->fptr = ofs;				/* Set file pointer */
+			if (ofs) {
+				fp->clust = clmt_clust(fp, ofs - 1);
+				dsc = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->clust);
+				if (!dsc) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+				dsc += (ofs - 1) / SS(fp->fs) & (fp->fs->csize - 1);
+				if (fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs) && dsc != fp->dsect) {	/* Refill sector cache if needed */
+#if !_FS_TINY
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+					if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {		/* Write-back dirty sector cache */
+						if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+							ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+						fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+					}
+#endif
+					if (disk_read(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, dsc, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Load current sector */
+						ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+#endif
+					fp->dsect = dsc;
+				}
+			}
+		}
+	} else
+#endif
+
+	/* Normal Seek */
+	{
+		DWORD clst, bcs, nsect, ifptr;
+
+		if (ofs > fp->fsize					/* In read-only mode, clip offset with the file size */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+			 && !(fp->flag & FA_WRITE)
+#endif
+			) ofs = fp->fsize;
+
+		ifptr = fp->fptr;
+		fp->fptr = nsect = 0;
+		if (ofs) {
+			bcs = (DWORD)fp->fs->csize * SS(fp->fs);	/* Cluster size (byte) */
+			if (ifptr > 0 &&
+				(ofs - 1) / bcs >= (ifptr - 1) / bcs) {	/* When seek to same or following cluster, */
+				fp->fptr = (ifptr - 1) & ~(bcs - 1);	/* start from the current cluster */
+				ofs -= fp->fptr;
+				clst = fp->clust;
+			} else {									/* When seek to back cluster, */
+				clst = fp->sclust;						/* start from the first cluster */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+				if (clst == 0) {						/* If no cluster chain, create a new chain */
+					clst = create_chain(fp->fs, 0);
+					if (clst == 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+					if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+					fp->sclust = clst;
+				}
+#endif
+				fp->clust = clst;
+			}
+			if (clst != 0) {
+				while (ofs > bcs) {						/* Cluster following loop */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+					if (fp->flag & FA_WRITE) {			/* Check if in write mode or not */
+						clst = create_chain(fp->fs, clst);	/* Force stretch if in write mode */
+						if (clst == 0) {				/* When disk gets full, clip file size */
+							ofs = bcs; break;
+						}
+					} else
+#endif
+						clst = get_fat(fp->fs, clst);	/* Follow cluster chain if not in write mode */
+					if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+					if (clst <= 1 || clst >= fp->fs->n_fatent) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+					fp->clust = clst;
+					fp->fptr += bcs;
+					ofs -= bcs;
+				}
+				fp->fptr += ofs;
+				if (ofs % SS(fp->fs)) {
+					nsect = clust2sect(fp->fs, clst);	/* Current sector */
+					if (!nsect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+					nsect += ofs / SS(fp->fs);
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		if (fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs) && nsect != fp->dsect) {	/* Fill sector cache if needed */
+#if !_FS_TINY
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+			if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {			/* Write-back dirty sector cache */
+				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+			}
+#endif
+			if (disk_read(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, nsect, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Fill sector cache */
+				ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+#endif
+			fp->dsect = nsect;
+		}
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+		if (fp->fptr > fp->fsize) {			/* Set file change flag if the file size is extended */
+			fp->fsize = fp->fptr;
+			fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN;
+		}
+#endif
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Create a Directory Object                                             */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_opendir (
+	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to directory object to create */
+	const TCHAR *path	/* Pointer to the directory path */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	FATFS *fs;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	if (!dj) return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj->fs, 0);
+	fs = dj->fs;
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(*dj);
+		res = follow_path(dj, path);			/* Follow the path to the directory */
+		FREE_BUF();
+		if (res == FR_OK) {						/* Follow completed */
+			if (dj->dir) {						/* It is not the root dir */
+				if (dj->dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) {	/* The object is a directory */
+					dj->sclust = ld_clust(fs, dj->dir);
+				} else {						/* The object is not a directory */
+					res = FR_NO_PATH;
+				}
+			}
+			if (res == FR_OK) {
+				dj->id = fs->id;
+				res = dir_sdi(dj, 0);			/* Rewind dir */
+			}
+		}
+		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_NO_PATH;
+		if (res != FR_OK) dj->fs = 0;			/* Invalidate the dir object if function failed */
+	} else {
+		dj->fs = 0;
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Read Directory Entry in Sequence                                      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_readdir (
+	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the open directory object */
+	FILINFO *fno		/* Pointer to file information to return */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = validate(dj);						/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		if (!fno) {
+			res = dir_sdi(dj, 0);			/* Rewind the directory object */
+		} else {
+			INIT_BUF(*dj);
+			res = dir_read(dj);				/* Read an directory item */
+			if (res == FR_NO_FILE) {		/* Reached end of dir */
+				dj->sect = 0;
+				res = FR_OK;
+			}
+			if (res == FR_OK) {				/* A valid entry is found */
+				get_fileinfo(dj, fno);		/* Get the object information */
+				res = dir_next(dj, 0);		/* Increment index for next */
+				if (res == FR_NO_FILE) {
+					dj->sect = 0;
+					res = FR_OK;
+				}
+			}
+			FREE_BUF();
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj->fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+#if _FS_MINIMIZE == 0
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get File Status                                                       */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_stat (
+	const TCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file path */
+	FILINFO *fno		/* Pointer to file information to return */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);	/* Follow the file path */
+		if (res == FR_OK) {				/* Follow completed */
+			if (dj.dir)		/* Found an object */
+				get_fileinfo(&dj, fno);
+			else			/* It is root dir */
+				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		}
+		FREE_BUF();
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get Number of Free Clusters                                           */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_getfree (
+	const TCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the logical drive number (root dir) */
+	DWORD *nclst,		/* Pointer to the variable to return number of free clusters */
+	FATFS **fatfs		/* Pointer to pointer to corresponding file system object to return */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	FATFS *fs;
+	DWORD n, clst, sect, stat;
+	UINT i;
+	BYTE fat, *p;
+
+
+	/* Get drive number */
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, fatfs, 0);
+	fs = *fatfs;
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		/* If free_clust is valid, return it without full cluster scan */
+		if (fs->free_clust <= fs->n_fatent - 2) {
+			*nclst = fs->free_clust;
+		} else {
+			/* Get number of free clusters */
+			fat = fs->fs_type;
+			n = 0;
+			if (fat == FS_FAT12) {
+				clst = 2;
+				do {
+					stat = get_fat(fs, clst);
+					if (stat == 0xFFFFFFFF) { res = FR_DISK_ERR; break; }
+					if (stat == 1) { res = FR_INT_ERR; break; }
+					if (stat == 0) n++;
+				} while (++clst < fs->n_fatent);
+			} else {
+				clst = fs->n_fatent;
+				sect = fs->fatbase;
+				i = 0; p = 0;
+				do {
+					if (!i) {
+						res = move_window(fs, sect++);
+						if (res != FR_OK) break;
+						p = fs->win;
+						i = SS(fs);
+					}
+					if (fat == FS_FAT16) {
+						if (LD_WORD(p) == 0) n++;
+						p += 2; i -= 2;
+					} else {
+						if ((LD_DWORD(p) & 0x0FFFFFFF) == 0) n++;
+						p += 4; i -= 4;
+					}
+				} while (--clst);
+			}
+			fs->free_clust = n;
+			if (fat == FS_FAT32) fs->fsi_flag = 1;
+			*nclst = n;
+		}
+	}
+	LEAVE_FF(fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Truncate File                                                         */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_truncate (
+	FIL *fp		/* Pointer to the file object */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD ncl;
+
+
+	if (!fp) return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
+
+	res = validate(fp);						/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR) {			/* Check abort flag */
+			res = FR_INT_ERR;
+		} else {
+			if (!(fp->flag & FA_WRITE))		/* Check access mode */
+				res = FR_DENIED;
+		}
+	}
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		if (fp->fsize > fp->fptr) {
+			fp->fsize = fp->fptr;	/* Set file size to current R/W point */
+			fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN;
+			if (fp->fptr == 0) {	/* When set file size to zero, remove entire cluster chain */
+				res = remove_chain(fp->fs, fp->sclust);
+				fp->sclust = 0;
+			} else {				/* When truncate a part of the file, remove remaining clusters */
+				ncl = get_fat(fp->fs, fp->clust);
+				res = FR_OK;
+				if (ncl == 0xFFFFFFFF) res = FR_DISK_ERR;
+				if (ncl == 1) res = FR_INT_ERR;
+				if (res == FR_OK && ncl < fp->fs->n_fatent) {
+					res = put_fat(fp->fs, fp->clust, 0x0FFFFFFF);
+					if (res == FR_OK) res = remove_chain(fp->fs, ncl);
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		if (res != FR_OK) fp->flag |= FA__ERROR;
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Delete a File or Directory                                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_unlink (
+	const TCHAR *path		/* Pointer to the file or directory path */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj, sdj;
+	BYTE *dir;
+	DWORD dclst;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);		/* Follow the file path */
+		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
+			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;			/* Cannot remove dot entry */
+#if _FS_LOCK
+		if (res == FR_OK) res = chk_lock(&dj, 2);	/* Cannot remove open file */
+#endif
+		if (res == FR_OK) {					/* The object is accessible */
+			dir = dj.dir;
+			if (!dir) {
+				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;		/* Cannot remove the start directory */
+			} else {
+				if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_RDO)
+					res = FR_DENIED;		/* Cannot remove R/O object */
+			}
+			dclst = ld_clust(dj.fs, dir);
+			if (res == FR_OK && (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)) {	/* Is it a sub-dir? */
+				if (dclst < 2) {
+					res = FR_INT_ERR;
+				} else {
+					mem_cpy(&sdj, &dj, sizeof (DIR));	/* Check if the sub-dir is empty or not */
+					sdj.sclust = dclst;
+					res = dir_sdi(&sdj, 2);		/* Exclude dot entries */
+					if (res == FR_OK) {
+						res = dir_read(&sdj);
+						if (res == FR_OK		/* Not empty dir */
+#if _FS_RPATH
+						|| dclst == dj.fs->cdir	/* Current dir */
+#endif
+						) res = FR_DENIED;
+						if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_OK;	/* Empty */
+					}
+				}
+			}
+			if (res == FR_OK) {
+				res = dir_remove(&dj);		/* Remove the directory entry */
+				if (res == FR_OK) {
+					if (dclst)				/* Remove the cluster chain if exist */
+						res = remove_chain(dj.fs, dclst);
+					if (res == FR_OK) res = sync(dj.fs);
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		FREE_BUF();
+	}
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Create a Directory                                                    */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_mkdir (
+	const TCHAR *path		/* Pointer to the directory path */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	BYTE *dir, n;
+	DWORD dsc, dcl, pcl, tim = get_fattime();
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);			/* Follow the file path */
+		if (res == FR_OK) res = FR_EXIST;		/* Any object with same name is already existing */
+		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_NO_FILE && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
+			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) {				/* Can create a new directory */
+			dcl = create_chain(dj.fs, 0);		/* Allocate a cluster for the new directory table */
+			res = FR_OK;
+			if (dcl == 0) res = FR_DENIED;		/* No space to allocate a new cluster */
+			if (dcl == 1) res = FR_INT_ERR;
+			if (dcl == 0xFFFFFFFF) res = FR_DISK_ERR;
+			if (res == FR_OK)					/* Flush FAT */
+				res = move_window(dj.fs, 0);
+			if (res == FR_OK) {					/* Initialize the new directory table */
+				dsc = clust2sect(dj.fs, dcl);
+				dir = dj.fs->win;
+				mem_set(dir, 0, SS(dj.fs));
+				mem_set(dir+DIR_Name, ' ', 8+3);	/* Create "." entry */
+				dir[DIR_Name] = '.';
+				dir[DIR_Attr] = AM_DIR;
+				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim);
+				st_clust(dir, dcl);
+				mem_cpy(dir+SZ_DIR, dir, SZ_DIR); 	/* Create ".." entry */
+				dir[33] = '.'; pcl = dj.sclust;
+				if (dj.fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && pcl == dj.fs->dirbase)
+					pcl = 0;
+				st_clust(dir+SZ_DIR, pcl);
+				for (n = dj.fs->csize; n; n--) {	/* Write dot entries and clear following sectors */
+					dj.fs->winsect = dsc++;
+					dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+					res = move_window(dj.fs, 0);
+					if (res != FR_OK) break;
+					mem_set(dir, 0, SS(dj.fs));
+				}
+			}
+			if (res == FR_OK) res = dir_register(&dj);	/* Register the object to the directory */
+			if (res != FR_OK) {
+				remove_chain(dj.fs, dcl);			/* Could not register, remove cluster chain */
+			} else {
+				dir = dj.dir;
+				dir[DIR_Attr] = AM_DIR;				/* Attribute */
+				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim);		/* Created time */
+				st_clust(dir, dcl);					/* Table start cluster */
+				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+				res = sync(dj.fs);
+			}
+		}
+		FREE_BUF();
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Change Attribute                                                      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_chmod (
+	const TCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file path */
+	BYTE value,			/* Attribute bits */
+	BYTE mask			/* Attribute mask to change */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	BYTE *dir;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);		/* Follow the file path */
+		FREE_BUF();
+		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
+			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			dir = dj.dir;
+			if (!dir) {						/* Is it a root directory? */
+				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			} else {						/* File or sub directory */
+				mask &= AM_RDO|AM_HID|AM_SYS|AM_ARC;	/* Valid attribute mask */
+				dir[DIR_Attr] = (value & mask) | (dir[DIR_Attr] & (BYTE)~mask);	/* Apply attribute change */
+				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+				res = sync(dj.fs);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Change Timestamp                                                      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_utime (
+	const TCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file/directory name */
+	const FILINFO *fno	/* Pointer to the time stamp to be set */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	BYTE *dir;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);	/* Follow the file path */
+		FREE_BUF();
+		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
+			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			dir = dj.dir;
+			if (!dir) {					/* Root directory */
+				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			} else {					/* File or sub-directory */
+				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, fno->ftime);
+				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtDate, fno->fdate);
+				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+				res = sync(dj.fs);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Rename File/Directory                                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_rename (
+	const TCHAR *path_old,	/* Pointer to the old name */
+	const TCHAR *path_new	/* Pointer to the new name */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR djo, djn;
+	BYTE buf[21], *dir;
+	DWORD dw;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path_old, &djo.fs, 1);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		djn.fs = djo.fs;
+		INIT_BUF(djo);
+		res = follow_path(&djo, path_old);		/* Check old object */
+		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (djo.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
+			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+#if _FS_LOCK
+		if (res == FR_OK) res = chk_lock(&djo, 2);
+#endif
+		if (res == FR_OK) {						/* Old object is found */
+			if (!djo.dir) {						/* Is root dir? */
+				res = FR_NO_FILE;
+			} else {
+				mem_cpy(buf, djo.dir+DIR_Attr, 21);		/* Save the object information except for name */
+				mem_cpy(&djn, &djo, sizeof (DIR));		/* Check new object */
+				res = follow_path(&djn, path_new);
+				if (res == FR_OK) res = FR_EXIST;		/* The new object name is already existing */
+				if (res == FR_NO_FILE) { 				/* Is it a valid path and no name collision? */
+/* Start critical section that an interruption or error can cause cross-link */
+					res = dir_register(&djn);			/* Register the new entry */
+					if (res == FR_OK) {
+						dir = djn.dir;					/* Copy object information except for name */
+						mem_cpy(dir+13, buf+2, 19);
+						dir[DIR_Attr] = buf[0] | AM_ARC;
+						djo.fs->wflag = 1;
+						if (djo.sclust != djn.sclust && (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)) {		/* Update .. entry in the directory if needed */
+							dw = clust2sect(djo.fs, ld_clust(djo.fs, dir));
+							if (!dw) {
+								res = FR_INT_ERR;
+							} else {
+								res = move_window(djo.fs, dw);
+								dir = djo.fs->win+SZ_DIR;	/* .. entry */
+								if (res == FR_OK && dir[1] == '.') {
+									dw = (djo.fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && djn.sclust == djo.fs->dirbase) ? 0 : djn.sclust;
+									st_clust(dir, dw);
+									djo.fs->wflag = 1;
+								}
+							}
+						}
+						if (res == FR_OK) {
+							res = dir_remove(&djo);		/* Remove old entry */
+							if (res == FR_OK)
+								res = sync(djo.fs);
+						}
+					}
+/* End critical section */
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		FREE_BUF();
+	}
+	LEAVE_FF(djo.fs, res);
+}
+
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE == 0 */
+#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1 */
+#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2 */
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Forward data to the stream directly (available on only tiny cfg)      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _USE_FORWARD && _FS_TINY
+
+FRESULT f_forward (
+	FIL *fp, 						/* Pointer to the file object */
+	UINT (*func)(const BYTE*,UINT),	/* Pointer to the streaming function */
+	UINT btr,						/* Number of bytes to forward */
+	UINT *bf						/* Pointer to number of bytes forwarded */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD remain, clst, sect;
+	UINT rcnt;
+	BYTE csect;
+
+
+	*bf = 0;	/* Clear transfer byte counter */
+
+	if (!fp) return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
+
+	res = validate(fp);								/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)						/* Check error flag */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+	if (!(fp->flag & FA_READ))						/* Check access mode */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
+
+	remain = fp->fsize - fp->fptr;
+	if (btr > remain) btr = (UINT)remain;			/* Truncate btr by remaining bytes */
+
+	for ( ;  btr && (*func)(0, 0);					/* Repeat until all data transferred or stream becomes busy */
+		fp->fptr += rcnt, *bf += rcnt, btr -= rcnt) {
+		csect = (BYTE)(fp->fptr / SS(fp->fs) & (fp->fs->csize - 1));	/* Sector offset in the cluster */
+		if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) {			/* On the sector boundary? */
+			if (!csect) {							/* On the cluster boundary? */
+				clst = (fp->fptr == 0) ?			/* On the top of the file? */
+					fp->sclust : get_fat(fp->fs, fp->clust);
+				if (clst <= 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->clust = clst;					/* Update current cluster */
+			}
+		}
+		sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->clust);		/* Get current data sector */
+		if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+		sect += csect;
+		if (move_window(fp->fs, sect))				/* Move sector window */
+			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+		fp->dsect = sect;
+		rcnt = SS(fp->fs) - (WORD)(fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs));	/* Forward data from sector window */
+		if (rcnt > btr) rcnt = btr;
+		rcnt = (*func)(&fp->fs->win[(WORD)fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt);
+		if (!rcnt) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK);
+}
+#endif /* _USE_FORWARD */
+
+
+
+#if _USE_MKFS && !_FS_READONLY
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Create File System on the Drive                                       */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#define N_ROOTDIR	512		/* Number of root dir entries for FAT12/16 */
+#define N_FATS		1		/* Number of FAT copies (1 or 2) */
+
+
+FRESULT f_mkfs (
+	BYTE drv,		/* Logical drive number */
+	BYTE sfd,		/* Partitioning rule 0:FDISK, 1:SFD */
+	UINT au			/* Allocation unit size [bytes] */
+)
+{
+	static const WORD vst[] = { 1024,   512,  256,  128,   64,    32,   16,    8,    4,    2,   0};
+	static const WORD cst[] = {32768, 16384, 8192, 4096, 2048, 16384, 8192, 4096, 2048, 1024, 512};
+	BYTE fmt, md, sys, *tbl, pdrv, part;
+	DWORD n_clst, vs, n, wsect;
+	UINT i;
+	DWORD b_vol, b_fat, b_dir, b_data;	/* LBA */
+	DWORD n_vol, n_rsv, n_fat, n_dir;	/* Size */
+	FATFS *fs;
+	DSTATUS stat;
+
+
+	/* Check mounted drive and clear work area */
+	if (drv >= _VOLUMES) return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
+	if (sfd > 1) return FR_INVALID_PARAMETER;
+	if (au & (au - 1)) return FR_INVALID_PARAMETER;
+	fs = FatFs[drv];
+	if (!fs) return FR_NOT_ENABLED;
+	fs->fs_type = 0;
+	pdrv = LD2PD(drv);	/* Physical drive */
+	part = LD2PT(drv);	/* Partition (0:auto detect, 1-4:get from partition table)*/
+
+	/* Get disk statics */
+	stat = disk_initialize(pdrv);
+	if (stat & STA_NOINIT) return FR_NOT_READY;
+	if (stat & STA_PROTECT) return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
+#if _MAX_SS != 512					/* Get disk sector size */
+	if (disk_ioctl(pdrv, GET_SECTOR_SIZE, &SS(fs)) != RES_OK || SS(fs) > _MAX_SS)
+		return FR_DISK_ERR;
+#endif
+	if (_MULTI_PARTITION && part) {
+		/* Get partition information from partition table in the MBR */
+		if (disk_read(pdrv, fs->win, 0, 1) != RES_OK) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+		if (LD_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA) != 0xAA55) return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;
+		tbl = &fs->win[MBR_Table + (part - 1) * SZ_PTE];
+		if (!tbl[4]) return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;	/* No partition? */
+		b_vol = LD_DWORD(tbl+8);	/* Volume start sector */
+		n_vol = LD_DWORD(tbl+12);	/* Volume size */
+	} else {
+		/* Create a partition in this function */
+		if (disk_ioctl(pdrv, GET_SECTOR_COUNT, &n_vol) != RES_OK || n_vol < 128)
+			return FR_DISK_ERR;
+		b_vol = (sfd) ? 0 : 63;		/* Volume start sector */
+		n_vol -= b_vol;				/* Volume size */
+	}
+
+	if (!au) {				/* AU auto selection */
+		vs = n_vol / (2000 / (SS(fs) / 512));
+		for (i = 0; vs < vst[i]; i++) ;
+		au = cst[i];
+	}
+	au /= SS(fs);		/* Number of sectors per cluster */
+	if (au == 0) au = 1;
+	if (au > 128) au = 128;
+
+	/* Pre-compute number of clusters and FAT sub-type */
+	n_clst = n_vol / au;
+	fmt = FS_FAT12;
+	if (n_clst >= MIN_FAT16) fmt = FS_FAT16;
+	if (n_clst >= MIN_FAT32) fmt = FS_FAT32;
+
+	/* Determine offset and size of FAT structure */
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
+		n_fat = ((n_clst * 4) + 8 + SS(fs) - 1) / SS(fs);
+		n_rsv = 32;
+		n_dir = 0;
+	} else {
+		n_fat = (fmt == FS_FAT12) ? (n_clst * 3 + 1) / 2 + 3 : (n_clst * 2) + 4;
+		n_fat = (n_fat + SS(fs) - 1) / SS(fs);
+		n_rsv = 1;
+		n_dir = (DWORD)N_ROOTDIR * SZ_DIR / SS(fs);
+	}
+	b_fat = b_vol + n_rsv;				/* FAT area start sector */
+	b_dir = b_fat + n_fat * N_FATS;		/* Directory area start sector */
+	b_data = b_dir + n_dir;				/* Data area start sector */
+	if (n_vol < b_data + au - b_vol) return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;	/* Too small volume */
+
+	/* Align data start sector to erase block boundary (for flash memory media) */
+	if (disk_ioctl(pdrv, GET_BLOCK_SIZE, &n) != RES_OK || !n || n > 32768) n = 1;
+	n = (b_data + n - 1) & ~(n - 1);	/* Next nearest erase block from current data start */
+	n = (n - b_data) / N_FATS;
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {		/* FAT32: Move FAT offset */
+		n_rsv += n;
+		b_fat += n;
+	} else {					/* FAT12/16: Expand FAT size */
+		n_fat += n;
+	}
+
+	/* Determine number of clusters and final check of validity of the FAT sub-type */
+	n_clst = (n_vol - n_rsv - n_fat * N_FATS - n_dir) / au;
+	if (   (fmt == FS_FAT16 && n_clst < MIN_FAT16)
+		|| (fmt == FS_FAT32 && n_clst < MIN_FAT32))
+		return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;
+
+	switch (fmt) {	/* Determine system ID for partition table */
+	case FS_FAT12:	sys = 0x01; break;
+	case FS_FAT16:	sys = (n_vol < 0x10000) ? 0x04 : 0x06; break;
+	default: 		sys = 0x0C;
+	}
+
+	if (_MULTI_PARTITION && part) {
+		/* Update system ID in the partition table */
+		tbl = &fs->win[MBR_Table + (part - 1) * SZ_PTE];
+		tbl[4] = sys;
+		if (disk_write(pdrv, fs->win, 0, 1) != RES_OK) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+		md = 0xF8;
+	} else {
+		if (sfd) {	/* No partition table (SFD) */
+			md = 0xF0;
+		} else {	/* Create partition table (FDISK) */
+			mem_set(fs->win, 0, SS(fs));
+			tbl = fs->win+MBR_Table;	/* Create partition table for single partition in the drive */
+			tbl[1] = 1;						/* Partition start head */
+			tbl[2] = 1;						/* Partition start sector */
+			tbl[3] = 0;						/* Partition start cylinder */
+			tbl[4] = sys;					/* System type */
+			tbl[5] = 254;					/* Partition end head */
+			n = (b_vol + n_vol) / 63 / 255;
+			tbl[6] = (BYTE)((n >> 2) | 63);	/* Partition end sector */
+			tbl[7] = (BYTE)n;				/* End cylinder */
+			ST_DWORD(tbl+8, 63);			/* Partition start in LBA */
+			ST_DWORD(tbl+12, n_vol);		/* Partition size in LBA */
+			ST_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);	/* MBR signature */
+			if (disk_write(pdrv, fs->win, 0, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Write it to the MBR sector */
+				return FR_DISK_ERR;
+			md = 0xF8;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Create BPB in the VBR */
+	tbl = fs->win;							/* Clear sector */
+	mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs));
+	mem_cpy(tbl, "\xEB\xFE\x90" "MSDOS5.0", 11);/* Boot jump code, OEM name */
+	i = SS(fs);								/* Sector size */
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_BytsPerSec, i);
+	tbl[BPB_SecPerClus] = (BYTE)au;			/* Sectors per cluster */
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_RsvdSecCnt, n_rsv);		/* Reserved sectors */
+	tbl[BPB_NumFATs] = N_FATS;				/* Number of FATs */
+	i = (fmt == FS_FAT32) ? 0 : N_ROOTDIR;	/* Number of rootdir entries */
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_RootEntCnt, i);
+	if (n_vol < 0x10000) {					/* Number of total sectors */
+		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_TotSec16, n_vol);
+	} else {
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_TotSec32, n_vol);
+	}
+	tbl[BPB_Media] = md;					/* Media descriptor */
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_SecPerTrk, 63);			/* Number of sectors per track */
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_NumHeads, 255);			/* Number of heads */
+	ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_HiddSec, b_vol);		/* Hidden sectors */
+	n = get_fattime();						/* Use current time as VSN */
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+BS_VolID32, n);		/* VSN */
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_FATSz32, n_fat);	/* Number of sectors per FAT */
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_RootClus, 2);		/* Root directory start cluster (2) */
+		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_FSInfo, 1);			/* FSInfo record offset (VBR+1) */
+		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_BkBootSec, 6);		/* Backup boot record offset (VBR+6) */
+		tbl[BS_DrvNum32] = 0x80;			/* Drive number */
+		tbl[BS_BootSig32] = 0x29;			/* Extended boot signature */
+		mem_cpy(tbl+BS_VolLab32, "NO NAME    " "FAT32   ", 19);	/* Volume label, FAT signature */
+	} else {
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+BS_VolID, n);			/* VSN */
+		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_FATSz16, n_fat);	/* Number of sectors per FAT */
+		tbl[BS_DrvNum] = 0x80;				/* Drive number */
+		tbl[BS_BootSig] = 0x29;				/* Extended boot signature */
+		mem_cpy(tbl+BS_VolLab, "NO NAME    " "FAT     ", 19);	/* Volume label, FAT signature */
+	}
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);			/* Signature (Offset is fixed here regardless of sector size) */
+	if (disk_write(pdrv, tbl, b_vol, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Write it to the VBR sector */
+		return FR_DISK_ERR;
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32)							/* Write backup VBR if needed (VBR+6) */
+		disk_write(pdrv, tbl, b_vol + 6, 1);
+
+	/* Initialize FAT area */
+	wsect = b_fat;
+	for (i = 0; i < N_FATS; i++) {		/* Initialize each FAT copy */
+		mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs));			/* 1st sector of the FAT  */
+		n = md;								/* Media descriptor byte */
+		if (fmt != FS_FAT32) {
+			n |= (fmt == FS_FAT12) ? 0x00FFFF00 : 0xFFFFFF00;
+			ST_DWORD(tbl+0, n);				/* Reserve cluster #0-1 (FAT12/16) */
+		} else {
+			n |= 0xFFFFFF00;
+			ST_DWORD(tbl+0, n);				/* Reserve cluster #0-1 (FAT32) */
+			ST_DWORD(tbl+4, 0xFFFFFFFF);
+			ST_DWORD(tbl+8, 0x0FFFFFFF);	/* Reserve cluster #2 for root dir */
+		}
+		if (disk_write(pdrv, tbl, wsect++, 1) != RES_OK)
+			return FR_DISK_ERR;
+		mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs));			/* Fill following FAT entries with zero */
+		for (n = 1; n < n_fat; n++) {		/* This loop may take a time on FAT32 volume due to many single sector writes */
+			if (disk_write(pdrv, tbl, wsect++, 1) != RES_OK)
+				return FR_DISK_ERR;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Initialize root directory */
+	i = (fmt == FS_FAT32) ? au : n_dir;
+	do {
+		if (disk_write(pdrv, tbl, wsect++, 1) != RES_OK)
+			return FR_DISK_ERR;
+	} while (--i);
+
+#if _USE_ERASE	/* Erase data area if needed */
+	{
+		DWORD eb[2];
+
+		eb[0] = wsect; eb[1] = wsect + (n_clst - ((fmt == FS_FAT32) ? 1 : 0)) * au - 1;
+		disk_ioctl(pdrv, CTRL_ERASE_SECTOR, eb);
+	}
+#endif
+
+	/* Create FSInfo if needed */
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_LeadSig, 0x41615252);
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_StrucSig, 0x61417272);
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_Free_Count, n_clst - 1);	/* Number of free clusters */
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_Nxt_Free, 2);				/* Last allocated cluster# */
+		ST_WORD(tbl+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);
+		disk_write(pdrv, tbl, b_vol + 1, 1);	/* Write original (VBR+1) */
+		disk_write(pdrv, tbl, b_vol + 7, 1);	/* Write backup (VBR+7) */
+	}
+
+	return (disk_ioctl(pdrv, CTRL_SYNC, 0) == RES_OK) ? FR_OK : FR_DISK_ERR;
+}
+
+
+#if _MULTI_PARTITION == 2
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Divide Physical Drive                                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_fdisk (
+	BYTE pdrv,			/* Physical drive number */
+	const DWORD szt[],	/* Pointer to the size table for each partitions */
+	void* work			/* Pointer to the working buffer */
+)
+{
+	UINT i, n, sz_cyl, tot_cyl, b_cyl, e_cyl, p_cyl;
+	BYTE s_hd, e_hd, *p, *buf = (BYTE*)work;
+	DSTATUS stat;
+	DWORD sz_disk, sz_part, s_part;
+
+
+	stat = disk_initialize(pdrv);
+	if (stat & STA_NOINIT) return FR_NOT_READY;
+	if (stat & STA_PROTECT) return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
+	if (disk_ioctl(pdrv, GET_SECTOR_COUNT, &sz_disk)) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+
+	/* Determine CHS in the table regardless of the drive geometry */
+	for (n = 16; n < 256 && sz_disk / n / 63 > 1024; n *= 2) ;
+	if (n == 256) n--;
+	e_hd = n - 1;
+	sz_cyl = 63 * n;
+	tot_cyl = sz_disk / sz_cyl;
+
+	/* Create partition table */
+	mem_set(buf, 0, _MAX_SS);
+	p = buf + MBR_Table; b_cyl = 0;
+	for (i = 0; i < 4; i++, p += SZ_PTE) {
+		p_cyl = (szt[i] <= 100) ? (DWORD)tot_cyl * szt[i] / 100 : szt[i] / sz_cyl;
+		if (!p_cyl) continue;
+		s_part = (DWORD)sz_cyl * b_cyl;
+		sz_part = (DWORD)sz_cyl * p_cyl;
+		if (i == 0) {	/* Exclude first track of cylinder 0 */
+			s_hd = 1;
+			s_part += 63; sz_part -= 63;
+		} else {
+			s_hd = 0;
+		}
+		e_cyl = b_cyl + p_cyl - 1;
+		if (e_cyl >= tot_cyl) return FR_INVALID_PARAMETER;
+
+		/* Set partition table */
+		p[1] = s_hd;						/* Start head */
+		p[2] = (BYTE)((b_cyl >> 2) + 1);	/* Start sector */
+		p[3] = (BYTE)b_cyl;					/* Start cylinder */
+		p[4] = 0x06;						/* System type (temporary setting) */
+		p[5] = e_hd;						/* End head */
+		p[6] = (BYTE)((e_cyl >> 2) + 63);	/* End sector */
+		p[7] = (BYTE)e_cyl;					/* End cylinder */
+		ST_DWORD(p + 8, s_part);			/* Start sector in LBA */
+		ST_DWORD(p + 12, sz_part);			/* Partition size */
+
+		/* Next partition */
+		b_cyl += p_cyl;
+	}
+	ST_WORD(p, 0xAA55);
+
+	/* Write it to the MBR */
+	return (disk_write(pdrv, buf, 0, 1) || disk_ioctl(pdrv, CTRL_SYNC, 0)) ? FR_DISK_ERR : FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+#endif /* _MULTI_PARTITION == 2 */
+#endif /* _USE_MKFS && !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+#if _USE_STRFUNC
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get a string from the file                                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+TCHAR* f_gets (
+	TCHAR* buff,	/* Pointer to the string buffer to read */
+	int len,		/* Size of string buffer (characters) */
+	FIL* fil		/* Pointer to the file object */
+)
+{
+	int n = 0;
+	TCHAR c, *p = buff;
+	BYTE s[2];
+	UINT rc;
+
+
+	while (n < len - 1) {			/* Read bytes until buffer gets filled */
+		f_read(fil, s, 1, &rc);
+		if (rc != 1) break;			/* Break on EOF or error */
+		c = s[0];
+#if _LFN_UNICODE					/* Read a character in UTF-8 encoding */
+		if (c >= 0x80) {
+			if (c < 0xC0) continue;	/* Skip stray trailer */
+			if (c < 0xE0) {			/* Two-byte sequence */
+				f_read(fil, s, 1, &rc);
+				if (rc != 1) break;
+				c = ((c & 0x1F) << 6) | (s[0] & 0x3F);
+				if (c < 0x80) c = '?';
+			} else {
+				if (c < 0xF0) {		/* Three-byte sequence */
+					f_read(fil, s, 2, &rc);
+					if (rc != 2) break;
+					c = (c << 12) | ((s[0] & 0x3F) << 6) | (s[1] & 0x3F);
+					if (c < 0x800) c = '?';
+				} else {			/* Reject four-byte sequence */
+					c = '?';
+				}
+			}
+		}
+#endif
+#if _USE_STRFUNC >= 2
+		if (c == '\r') continue;	/* Strip '\r' */
+#endif
+		*p++ = c;
+		n++;
+		if (c == '\n') break;		/* Break on EOL */
+	}
+	*p = 0;
+	return n ? buff : 0;			/* When no data read (eof or error), return with error. */
+}
+
+
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+#include <stdarg.h>
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Put a character to the file                                           */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+int f_putc (
+	TCHAR c,	/* A character to be output */
+	FIL* fil	/* Pointer to the file object */
+)
+{
+	UINT bw, btw;
+	BYTE s[3];
+
+
+#if _USE_STRFUNC >= 2
+	if (c == '\n') f_putc ('\r', fil);	/* LF -> CRLF conversion */
+#endif
+
+#if _LFN_UNICODE	/* Write the character in UTF-8 encoding */
+	if (c < 0x80) {			/* 7-bit */
+		s[0] = (BYTE)c;
+		btw = 1;
+	} else {
+		if (c < 0x800) {	/* 11-bit */
+			s[0] = (BYTE)(0xC0 | (c >> 6));
+			s[1] = (BYTE)(0x80 | (c & 0x3F));
+			btw = 2;
+		} else {			/* 16-bit */
+			s[0] = (BYTE)(0xE0 | (c >> 12));
+			s[1] = (BYTE)(0x80 | ((c >> 6) & 0x3F));
+			s[2] = (BYTE)(0x80 | (c & 0x3F));
+			btw = 3;
+		}
+	}
+#else				/* Write the character without conversion */
+	s[0] = (BYTE)c;
+	btw = 1;
+#endif
+	f_write(fil, s, btw, &bw);		/* Write the char to the file */
+	return (bw == btw) ? 1 : EOF;	/* Return the result */
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Put a string to the file                                              */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+int f_puts (
+	const TCHAR* str,	/* Pointer to the string to be output */
+	FIL* fil			/* Pointer to the file object */
+)
+{
+	int n;
+
+
+	for (n = 0; *str; str++, n++) {
+		if (f_putc(*str, fil) == EOF) return EOF;
+	}
+	return n;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Put a formatted string to the file                                    */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+int f_printf (
+	FIL* fil,			/* Pointer to the file object */
+	const TCHAR* str,	/* Pointer to the format string */
+	...					/* Optional arguments... */
+)
+{
+	va_list arp;
+	BYTE f, r;
+	UINT i, j, w;
+	ULONG v;
+	TCHAR c, d, s[16], *p;
+	int res, chc, cc;
+
+
+	va_start(arp, str);
+
+	for (cc = res = 0; cc != EOF; res += cc) {
+		c = *str++;
+		if (c == 0) break;			/* End of string */
+		if (c != '%') {				/* Non escape character */
+			cc = f_putc(c, fil);
+			if (cc != EOF) cc = 1;
+			continue;
+		}
+		w = f = 0;
+		c = *str++;
+		if (c == '0') {				/* Flag: '0' padding */
+			f = 1; c = *str++;
+		} else {
+			if (c == '-') {			/* Flag: left justified */
+				f = 2; c = *str++;
+			}
+		}
+		while (IsDigit(c)) {		/* Precision */
+			w = w * 10 + c - '0';
+			c = *str++;
+		}
+		if (c == 'l' || c == 'L') {	/* Prefix: Size is long int */
+			f |= 4; c = *str++;
+		}
+		if (!c) break;
+		d = c;
+		if (IsLower(d)) d -= 0x20;
+		switch (d) {				/* Type is... */
+		case 'S' :					/* String */
+			p = va_arg(arp, TCHAR*);
+			for (j = 0; p[j]; j++) ;
+			chc = 0;
+			if (!(f & 2)) {
+				while (j++ < w) chc += (cc = f_putc(' ', fil));
+			}
+			chc += (cc = f_puts(p, fil));
+			while (j++ < w) chc += (cc = f_putc(' ', fil));
+			if (cc != EOF) cc = chc;
+			continue;
+		case 'C' :					/* Character */
+			cc = f_putc((TCHAR)va_arg(arp, int), fil); continue;
+		case 'B' :					/* Binary */
+			r = 2; break;
+		case 'O' :					/* Octal */
+			r = 8; break;
+		case 'D' :					/* Signed decimal */
+		case 'U' :					/* Unsigned decimal */
+			r = 10; break;
+		case 'X' :					/* Hexdecimal */
+			r = 16; break;
+		default:					/* Unknown type (pass-through) */
+			cc = f_putc(c, fil); continue;
+		}
+
+		/* Get an argument and put it in numeral */
+		v = (f & 4) ? (ULONG)va_arg(arp, long) : ((d == 'D') ? (ULONG)(long)va_arg(arp, int) : (ULONG)va_arg(arp, unsigned int));
+		if (d == 'D' && (v & 0x80000000)) {
+			v = 0 - v;
+			f |= 8;
+		}
+		i = 0;
+		do {
+			d = (TCHAR)(v % r); v /= r;
+			if (d > 9) d += (c == 'x') ? 0x27 : 0x07;
+			s[i++] = d + '0';
+		} while (v && i < sizeof s / sizeof s[0]);
+		if (f & 8) s[i++] = '-';
+		j = i; d = (f & 1) ? '0' : ' ';
+		res = 0;
+		while (!(f & 2) && j++ < w) res += (cc = f_putc(d, fil));
+		do res += (cc = f_putc(s[--i], fil)); while(i);
+		while (j++ < w) res += (cc = f_putc(' ', fil));
+		if (cc != EOF) cc = res;
+	}
+
+	va_end(arp);
+	return (cc == EOF) ? cc : res;
+}
+
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+#endif /* _USE_STRFUNC */
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..627cbaabe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.h
@@ -0,0 +1,337 @@
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/  FatFs - FAT file system module include file  R0.09a    (C)ChaN, 2012
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ FatFs module is a generic FAT file system module for small embedded systems.
+/ This is a free software that opened for education, research and commercial
+/ developments under license policy of following terms.
+/
+/  Copyright (C) 2012, ChaN, all right reserved.
+/
+/ * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
+/ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
+/   personal, non-profit or commercial product UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
+/ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
+/
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#ifndef _FATFS
+#define _FATFS	4004	/* Revision ID */
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C" {
+#endif
+
+#include "integer.h"	/* Basic integer types */
+#include "ffconf.h"		/* FatFs configuration options */
+
+#if _FATFS != _FFCONF
+#error Wrong configuration file (ffconf.h).
+#endif
+
+
+
+/* Definitions of volume management */
+
+#if _MULTI_PARTITION		/* Multiple partition configuration */
+typedef struct {
+	BYTE pd;	/* Physical drive number */
+	BYTE pt;	/* Partition: 0:Auto detect, 1-4:Forced partition) */
+} PARTITION;
+extern PARTITION VolToPart[];	/* Volume - Partition resolution table */
+#define LD2PD(vol) (VolToPart[vol].pd)	/* Get physical drive number */
+#define LD2PT(vol) (VolToPart[vol].pt)	/* Get partition index */
+
+#else							/* Single partition configuration */
+#define LD2PD(vol) (BYTE)(vol)	/* Each logical drive is bound to the same physical drive number */
+#define LD2PT(vol) 0			/* Always mounts the 1st partition or in SFD */
+
+#endif
+
+
+
+/* Type of path name strings on FatFs API */
+
+#if _LFN_UNICODE			/* Unicode string */
+#if !_USE_LFN
+#error _LFN_UNICODE must be 0 in non-LFN cfg.
+#endif
+#ifndef _INC_TCHAR
+typedef WCHAR TCHAR;
+#define _T(x) L ## x
+#define _TEXT(x) L ## x
+#endif
+
+#else						/* ANSI/OEM string */
+#ifndef _INC_TCHAR
+typedef char TCHAR;
+#define _T(x) x
+#define _TEXT(x) x
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
+
+
+/* File system object structure (FATFS) */
+
+typedef struct {
+	BYTE	fs_type;		/* FAT sub-type (0:Not mounted) */
+	BYTE	drv;			/* Physical drive number */
+	BYTE	csize;			/* Sectors per cluster (1,2,4...128) */
+	BYTE	n_fats;			/* Number of FAT copies (1,2) */
+	BYTE	wflag;			/* win[] dirty flag (1:must be written back) */
+	BYTE	fsi_flag;		/* fsinfo dirty flag (1:must be written back) */
+	WORD	id;				/* File system mount ID */
+	WORD	n_rootdir;		/* Number of root directory entries (FAT12/16) */
+#if _MAX_SS != 512
+	WORD	ssize;			/* Bytes per sector (512, 1024, 2048 or 4096) */
+#endif
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+	_SYNC_t	sobj;			/* Identifier of sync object */
+#endif
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+	DWORD	last_clust;		/* Last allocated cluster */
+	DWORD	free_clust;		/* Number of free clusters */
+	DWORD	fsi_sector;		/* fsinfo sector (FAT32) */
+#endif
+#if _FS_RPATH
+	DWORD	cdir;			/* Current directory start cluster (0:root) */
+#endif
+	DWORD	n_fatent;		/* Number of FAT entries (= number of clusters + 2) */
+	DWORD	fsize;			/* Sectors per FAT */
+	DWORD	fatbase;		/* FAT start sector */
+	DWORD	dirbase;		/* Root directory start sector (FAT32:Cluster#) */
+	DWORD	database;		/* Data start sector */
+	DWORD	winsect;		/* Current sector appearing in the win[] */
+	BYTE	win[_MAX_SS];	/* Disk access window for Directory, FAT (and Data on tiny cfg) */
+} FATFS;
+
+
+
+/* File object structure (FIL) */
+
+typedef struct {
+	FATFS*	fs;				/* Pointer to the related file system object */
+	WORD	id;				/* File system mount ID of the related file system object */
+	BYTE	flag;			/* File status flags */
+	BYTE	pad1;
+	DWORD	fptr;			/* File read/write pointer (0ed on file open) */
+	DWORD	fsize;			/* File size */
+	DWORD	sclust;			/* File data start cluster (0:no data cluster, always 0 when fsize is 0) */
+	DWORD	clust;			/* Current cluster of fpter */
+	DWORD	dsect;			/* Current data sector of fpter */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+	DWORD	dir_sect;		/* Sector containing the directory entry */
+	BYTE*	dir_ptr;		/* Pointer to the directory entry in the window */
+#endif
+#if _USE_FASTSEEK
+	DWORD*	cltbl;			/* Pointer to the cluster link map table (null on file open) */
+#endif
+#if _FS_LOCK
+	UINT	lockid;			/* File lock ID (index of file semaphore table Files[]) */
+#endif
+#if !_FS_TINY
+	BYTE	buf[_MAX_SS];	/* File data read/write buffer */
+#endif
+} FIL;
+
+
+
+/* Directory object structure (DIR) */
+
+typedef struct {
+	FATFS*	fs;				/* Pointer to the owner file system object */
+	WORD	id;				/* Owner file system mount ID */
+	WORD	index;			/* Current read/write index number */
+	DWORD	sclust;			/* Table start cluster (0:Root dir) */
+	DWORD	clust;			/* Current cluster */
+	DWORD	sect;			/* Current sector */
+	BYTE*	dir;			/* Pointer to the current SFN entry in the win[] */
+	BYTE*	fn;				/* Pointer to the SFN (in/out) {file[8],ext[3],status[1]} */
+#if _USE_LFN
+	WCHAR*	lfn;			/* Pointer to the LFN working buffer */
+	WORD	lfn_idx;		/* Last matched LFN index number (0xFFFF:No LFN) */
+#endif
+} DIR;
+
+
+
+/* File status structure (FILINFO) */
+
+typedef struct {
+	DWORD	fsize;			/* File size */
+	WORD	fdate;			/* Last modified date */
+	WORD	ftime;			/* Last modified time */
+	BYTE	fattrib;		/* Attribute */
+	TCHAR	fname[13];		/* Short file name (8.3 format) */
+#if _USE_LFN
+	TCHAR*	lfname;			/* Pointer to the LFN buffer */
+	UINT 	lfsize;			/* Size of LFN buffer in TCHAR */
+#endif
+} FILINFO;
+
+
+
+/* File function return code (FRESULT) */
+
+typedef enum {
+	FR_OK = 0,				/* (0) Succeeded */
+	FR_DISK_ERR,			/* (1) A hard error occurred in the low level disk I/O layer */
+	FR_INT_ERR,				/* (2) Assertion failed */
+	FR_NOT_READY,			/* (3) The physical drive cannot work */
+	FR_NO_FILE,				/* (4) Could not find the file */
+	FR_NO_PATH,				/* (5) Could not find the path */
+	FR_INVALID_NAME,		/* (6) The path name format is invalid */
+	FR_DENIED,				/* (7) Access denied due to prohibited access or directory full */
+	FR_EXIST,				/* (8) Access denied due to prohibited access */
+	FR_INVALID_OBJECT,		/* (9) The file/directory object is invalid */
+	FR_WRITE_PROTECTED,		/* (10) The physical drive is write protected */
+	FR_INVALID_DRIVE,		/* (11) The logical drive number is invalid */
+	FR_NOT_ENABLED,			/* (12) The volume has no work area */
+	FR_NO_FILESYSTEM,		/* (13) There is no valid FAT volume */
+	FR_MKFS_ABORTED,		/* (14) The f_mkfs() aborted due to any parameter error */
+	FR_TIMEOUT,				/* (15) Could not get a grant to access the volume within defined period */
+	FR_LOCKED,				/* (16) The operation is rejected according to the file sharing policy */
+	FR_NOT_ENOUGH_CORE,		/* (17) LFN working buffer could not be allocated */
+	FR_TOO_MANY_OPEN_FILES,	/* (18) Number of open files > _FS_SHARE */
+	FR_INVALID_PARAMETER	/* (19) Given parameter is invalid */
+} FRESULT;
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FatFs module application interface                           */
+
+FRESULT f_mount (BYTE, FATFS*);						/* Mount/Unmount a logical drive */
+FRESULT f_open (FIL*, const TCHAR*, BYTE);			/* Open or create a file */
+FRESULT f_read (FIL*, void*, UINT, UINT*);			/* Read data from a file */
+FRESULT f_lseek (FIL*, DWORD);						/* Move file pointer of a file object */
+FRESULT f_close (FIL*);								/* Close an open file object */
+FRESULT f_opendir (DIR*, const TCHAR*);				/* Open an existing directory */
+FRESULT f_readdir (DIR*, FILINFO*);					/* Read a directory item */
+FRESULT f_stat (const TCHAR*, FILINFO*);			/* Get file status */
+FRESULT f_write (FIL*, const void*, UINT, UINT*);	/* Write data to a file */
+FRESULT f_getfree (const TCHAR*, DWORD*, FATFS**);	/* Get number of free clusters on the drive */
+FRESULT f_truncate (FIL*);							/* Truncate file */
+FRESULT f_sync (FIL*);								/* Flush cached data of a writing file */
+FRESULT f_unlink (const TCHAR*);					/* Delete an existing file or directory */
+FRESULT	f_mkdir (const TCHAR*);						/* Create a new directory */
+FRESULT f_chmod (const TCHAR*, BYTE, BYTE);			/* Change attribute of the file/dir */
+FRESULT f_utime (const TCHAR*, const FILINFO*);		/* Change times-tamp of the file/dir */
+FRESULT f_rename (const TCHAR*, const TCHAR*);		/* Rename/Move a file or directory */
+FRESULT f_chdrive (BYTE);							/* Change current drive */
+FRESULT f_chdir (const TCHAR*);						/* Change current directory */
+FRESULT f_getcwd (TCHAR*, UINT);					/* Get current directory */
+FRESULT f_forward (FIL*, UINT(*)(const BYTE*,UINT), UINT, UINT*);	/* Forward data to the stream */
+FRESULT f_mkfs (BYTE, BYTE, UINT);					/* Create a file system on the drive */
+FRESULT	f_fdisk (BYTE, const DWORD[], void*);		/* Divide a physical drive into some partitions */
+int f_putc (TCHAR, FIL*);							/* Put a character to the file */
+int f_puts (const TCHAR*, FIL*);					/* Put a string to the file */
+int f_printf (FIL*, const TCHAR*, ...);				/* Put a formatted string to the file */
+TCHAR* f_gets (TCHAR*, int, FIL*);					/* Get a string from the file */
+
+#define f_eof(fp) (((fp)->fptr == (fp)->fsize) ? 1 : 0)
+#define f_error(fp) (((fp)->flag & FA__ERROR) ? 1 : 0)
+#define f_tell(fp) ((fp)->fptr)
+#define f_size(fp) ((fp)->fsize)
+
+#ifndef EOF
+#define EOF (-1)
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Additional user defined functions                            */
+
+/* RTC function */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+DWORD get_fattime (void);
+#endif
+
+/* Unicode support functions */
+#if _USE_LFN						/* Unicode - OEM code conversion */
+WCHAR ff_convert (WCHAR, UINT);		/* OEM-Unicode bidirectional conversion */
+WCHAR ff_wtoupper (WCHAR);			/* Unicode upper-case conversion */
+#if _USE_LFN == 3					/* Memory functions */
+void* ff_memalloc (UINT);			/* Allocate memory block */
+void ff_memfree (void*);			/* Free memory block */
+#endif
+#endif
+
+/* Sync functions */
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+int ff_cre_syncobj (BYTE, _SYNC_t*);/* Create a sync object */
+int ff_req_grant (_SYNC_t);			/* Lock sync object */
+void ff_rel_grant (_SYNC_t);		/* Unlock sync object */
+int ff_del_syncobj (_SYNC_t);		/* Delete a sync object */
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Flags and offset address                                     */
+
+
+/* File access control and file status flags (FIL.flag) */
+
+#define	FA_READ				0x01
+#define	FA_OPEN_EXISTING	0x00
+#define FA__ERROR			0x80
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+#define	FA_WRITE			0x02
+#define	FA_CREATE_NEW		0x04
+#define	FA_CREATE_ALWAYS	0x08
+#define	FA_OPEN_ALWAYS		0x10
+#define FA__WRITTEN			0x20
+#define FA__DIRTY			0x40
+#endif
+
+
+/* FAT sub type (FATFS.fs_type) */
+
+#define FS_FAT12	1
+#define FS_FAT16	2
+#define FS_FAT32	3
+
+
+/* File attribute bits for directory entry */
+
+#define	AM_RDO	0x01	/* Read only */
+#define	AM_HID	0x02	/* Hidden */
+#define	AM_SYS	0x04	/* System */
+#define	AM_VOL	0x08	/* Volume label */
+#define AM_LFN	0x0F	/* LFN entry */
+#define AM_DIR	0x10	/* Directory */
+#define AM_ARC	0x20	/* Archive */
+#define AM_MASK	0x3F	/* Mask of defined bits */
+
+
+/* Fast seek feature */
+#define CREATE_LINKMAP	0xFFFFFFFF
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------*/
+/* Multi-byte word access macros  */
+
+#if _WORD_ACCESS == 1	/* Enable word access to the FAT structure */
+#define	LD_WORD(ptr)		(WORD)(*(WORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr))
+#define	LD_DWORD(ptr)		(DWORD)(*(DWORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr))
+#define	ST_WORD(ptr,val)	*(WORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr)=(WORD)(val)
+#define	ST_DWORD(ptr,val)	*(DWORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr)=(DWORD)(val)
+#else					/* Use byte-by-byte access to the FAT structure */
+#define	LD_WORD(ptr)		(WORD)(((WORD)*((BYTE*)(ptr)+1)<<8)|(WORD)*(BYTE*)(ptr))
+#define	LD_DWORD(ptr)		(DWORD)(((DWORD)*((BYTE*)(ptr)+3)<<24)|((DWORD)*((BYTE*)(ptr)+2)<<16)|((WORD)*((BYTE*)(ptr)+1)<<8)|*(BYTE*)(ptr))
+#define	ST_WORD(ptr,val)	*(BYTE*)(ptr)=(BYTE)(val); *((BYTE*)(ptr)+1)=(BYTE)((WORD)(val)>>8)
+#define	ST_DWORD(ptr,val)	*(BYTE*)(ptr)=(BYTE)(val); *((BYTE*)(ptr)+1)=(BYTE)((WORD)(val)>>8); *((BYTE*)(ptr)+2)=(BYTE)((DWORD)(val)>>16); *((BYTE*)(ptr)+3)=(BYTE)((DWORD)(val)>>24)
+#endif
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+}
+#endif
+
+#endif /* _FATFS */
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..243a20fa2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h
@@ -0,0 +1,190 @@
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/  FatFs - FAT file system module configuration file  R0.09a (C)ChaN, 2012
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/
+/ CAUTION! Do not forget to make clean the project after any changes to
+/ the configuration options.
+/
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#ifndef _FFCONF
+#define _FFCONF 4004	/* Revision ID */
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ Function and Buffer Configurations
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#define	_FS_TINY	1		/* 0:Normal or 1:Tiny */
+/* When _FS_TINY is set to 1, FatFs uses the sector buffer in the file system
+/  object instead of the sector buffer in the individual file object for file
+/  data transfer. This reduces memory consumption 512 bytes each file object. */
+
+
+#define _FS_READONLY	1	/* 0:Read/Write or 1:Read only */
+/* Setting _FS_READONLY to 1 defines read only configuration. This removes
+/  writing functions, f_write, f_sync, f_unlink, f_mkdir, f_chmod, f_rename,
+/  f_truncate and useless f_getfree. */
+
+
+#define _FS_MINIMIZE	2	/* 0 to 3 */
+/* The _FS_MINIMIZE option defines minimization level to remove some functions.
+/
+/   0: Full function.
+/   1: f_stat, f_getfree, f_unlink, f_mkdir, f_chmod, f_truncate and f_rename
+/      are removed.
+/   2: f_opendir and f_readdir are removed in addition to 1.
+/   3: f_lseek is removed in addition to 2. */
+
+
+#define	_USE_STRFUNC	0	/* 0:Disable or 1-2:Enable */
+/* To enable string functions, set _USE_STRFUNC to 1 or 2. */
+
+
+#define	_USE_MKFS	0		/* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */
+/* To enable f_mkfs function, set _USE_MKFS to 1 and set _FS_READONLY to 0 */
+
+
+#define	_USE_FORWARD	0	/* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */
+/* To enable f_forward function, set _USE_FORWARD to 1 and set _FS_TINY to 1. */
+
+
+#define	_USE_FASTSEEK	0	/* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */
+/* To enable fast seek feature, set _USE_FASTSEEK to 1. */
+
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ Locale and Namespace Configurations
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#define _CODE_PAGE	932
+/* The _CODE_PAGE specifies the OEM code page to be used on the target system.
+/  Incorrect setting of the code page can cause a file open failure.
+/
+/   932  - Japanese Shift-JIS (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
+/   936  - Simplified Chinese GBK (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
+/   949  - Korean (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
+/   950  - Traditional Chinese Big5 (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
+/   1250 - Central Europe (Windows)
+/   1251 - Cyrillic (Windows)
+/   1252 - Latin 1 (Windows)
+/   1253 - Greek (Windows)
+/   1254 - Turkish (Windows)
+/   1255 - Hebrew (Windows)
+/   1256 - Arabic (Windows)
+/   1257 - Baltic (Windows)
+/   1258 - Vietnam (OEM, Windows)
+/   437  - U.S. (OEM)
+/   720  - Arabic (OEM)
+/   737  - Greek (OEM)
+/   775  - Baltic (OEM)
+/   850  - Multilingual Latin 1 (OEM)
+/   858  - Multilingual Latin 1 + Euro (OEM)
+/   852  - Latin 2 (OEM)
+/   855  - Cyrillic (OEM)
+/   866  - Russian (OEM)
+/   857  - Turkish (OEM)
+/   862  - Hebrew (OEM)
+/   874  - Thai (OEM, Windows)
+/	1    - ASCII only (Valid for non LFN cfg.)
+*/
+
+
+#define	_USE_LFN	0		/* 0 to 3 */
+#define	_MAX_LFN	255		/* Maximum LFN length to handle (12 to 255) */
+/* The _USE_LFN option switches the LFN support.
+/
+/   0: Disable LFN feature. _MAX_LFN and _LFN_UNICODE have no effect.
+/   1: Enable LFN with static working buffer on the BSS. Always NOT reentrant.
+/   2: Enable LFN with dynamic working buffer on the STACK.
+/   3: Enable LFN with dynamic working buffer on the HEAP.
+/
+/  The LFN working buffer occupies (_MAX_LFN + 1) * 2 bytes. To enable LFN,
+/  Unicode handling functions ff_convert() and ff_wtoupper() must be added
+/  to the project. When enable to use heap, memory control functions
+/  ff_memalloc() and ff_memfree() must be added to the project. */
+
+
+#define	_LFN_UNICODE	0	/* 0:ANSI/OEM or 1:Unicode */
+/* To switch the character code set on FatFs API to Unicode,
+/  enable LFN feature and set _LFN_UNICODE to 1. */
+
+
+#define _FS_RPATH		0	/* 0 to 2 */
+/* The _FS_RPATH option configures relative path feature.
+/
+/   0: Disable relative path feature and remove related functions.
+/   1: Enable relative path. f_chdrive() and f_chdir() are available.
+/   2: f_getcwd() is available in addition to 1.
+/
+/  Note that output of the f_readdir function is affected by this option. */
+
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ Physical Drive Configurations
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#define _VOLUMES	1
+/* Number of volumes (logical drives) to be used. */
+
+
+#define	_MAX_SS		512		/* 512, 1024, 2048 or 4096 */
+/* Maximum sector size to be handled.
+/  Always set 512 for memory card and hard disk but a larger value may be
+/  required for on-board flash memory, floppy disk and optical disk.
+/  When _MAX_SS is larger than 512, it configures FatFs to variable sector size
+/  and GET_SECTOR_SIZE command must be implemented to the disk_ioctl function. */
+
+
+#define	_MULTI_PARTITION	0	/* 0:Single partition, 1/2:Enable multiple partition */
+/* When set to 0, each volume is bound to the same physical drive number and
+/ it can mount only first primary partition. When it is set to 1, each volume
+/ is tied to the partitions listed in VolToPart[]. */
+
+
+#define	_USE_ERASE	0	/* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */
+/* To enable sector erase feature, set _USE_ERASE to 1. CTRL_ERASE_SECTOR command
+/  should be added to the disk_ioctl function. */
+
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ System Configurations
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#define _WORD_ACCESS	1	/* 0 or 1 */
+/* Set 0 first and it is always compatible with all platforms. The _WORD_ACCESS
+/  option defines which access method is used to the word data on the FAT volume.
+/
+/   0: Byte-by-byte access.
+/   1: Word access. Do not choose this unless following condition is met.
+/
+/  When the byte order on the memory is big-endian or address miss-aligned word
+/  access results incorrect behavior, the _WORD_ACCESS must be set to 0.
+/  If it is not the case, the value can also be set to 1 to improve the
+/  performance and code size. */
+
+
+/* A header file that defines sync object types on the O/S, such as
+/  windows.h, ucos_ii.h and semphr.h, must be included prior to ff.h. */
+
+#define _FS_REENTRANT	0		/* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */
+#define _FS_TIMEOUT		1000	/* Timeout period in unit of time ticks */
+#define	_SYNC_t			HANDLE	/* O/S dependent type of sync object. e.g. HANDLE, OS_EVENT*, ID and etc.. */
+
+/* The _FS_REENTRANT option switches the reentrancy (thread safe) of the FatFs module.
+/
+/   0: Disable reentrancy. _SYNC_t and _FS_TIMEOUT have no effect.
+/   1: Enable reentrancy. Also user provided synchronization handlers,
+/      ff_req_grant, ff_rel_grant, ff_del_syncobj and ff_cre_syncobj
+/      function must be added to the project. */
+
+
+#define	_FS_LOCK	0	/* 0:Disable or >=1:Enable */
+/* To enable file lock control feature, set _FS_LOCK to 1 or greater.
+   The value defines how many files can be opened simultaneously. */
+
+
+#endif /* _FFCONFIG */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/integer.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/integer.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5408fe6b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/integer.h
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+/*-------------------------------------------*/
+/* Integer type definitions for FatFs module */
+/*-------------------------------------------*/
+
+#ifndef _INTEGER
+#define _INTEGER
+
+#ifdef _WIN32	/* FatFs development platform */
+
+#include <windows.h>
+#include <tchar.h>
+
+#else			/* Embedded platform */
+
+/* These types must be 16-bit, 32-bit or larger integer */
+typedef int				INT;
+typedef unsigned int	UINT;
+
+/* These types must be 8-bit integer */
+typedef char			CHAR;
+typedef unsigned char	UCHAR;
+typedef unsigned char	BYTE;
+
+/* These types must be 16-bit integer */
+typedef short			SHORT;
+typedef unsigned short	USHORT;
+typedef unsigned short	WORD;
+typedef unsigned short	WCHAR;
+
+/* These types must be 32-bit integer */
+typedef long			LONG;
+typedef unsigned long	ULONG;
+typedef unsigned long	DWORD;
+
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b9cb3efa6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.c
@@ -0,0 +1,284 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Simple HTTP Webserver Application. When connected to the uIP stack,
+ *  this will serve out files to HTTP clients on port 80.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_HTTPSERVERAPP_C
+#include "HTTPServerApp.h"
+
+/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before the page contents. This indicates to the host that a page exists at the
+ *  given location, and gives extra connection information.
+ */
+const char PROGMEM HTTP200Header[] = "HTTP/1.1 200 OK\r\n"
+                                     "Server: LUFA " LUFA_VERSION_STRING "\r\n"
+                                     "Connection: close\r\n"
+                                     "MIME-version: 1.0\r\n"
+                                     "Content-Type: ";
+
+/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before a resource not found error. This indicates to the host that the given
+ *  URL is invalid, and gives extra error information.
+ */
+const char PROGMEM HTTP404Header[] = "HTTP/1.1 404 Not Found\r\n"
+                                     "Server: LUFA " LUFA_VERSION_STRING "\r\n"
+                                     "Connection: close\r\n"
+                                     "MIME-version: 1.0\r\n"
+                                     "Content-Type: text/plain\r\n\r\n"
+                                     "Error 404: File Not Found: /";
+
+/** Default filename to fetch when a directory is requested */
+const char PROGMEM DefaultDirFileName[] = "index.htm";
+
+/** Default MIME type sent if no other MIME type can be determined. */
+const char PROGMEM DefaultMIMEType[] = "text/plain";
+
+/** List of MIME types for each supported file extension. */
+const MIME_Type_t MIMETypes[] =
+	{
+		{.Extension = "htm", .MIMEType = "text/html"},
+		{.Extension = "jpg", .MIMEType = "image/jpeg"},
+		{.Extension = "gif", .MIMEType = "image/gif"},
+		{.Extension = "bmp", .MIMEType = "image/bmp"},
+		{.Extension = "png", .MIMEType = "image/png"},
+		{.Extension = "ico", .MIMEType = "image/x-icon"},
+		{.Extension = "exe", .MIMEType = "application/octet-stream"},
+		{.Extension = "gz",  .MIMEType = "application/x-gzip"},
+		{.Extension = "zip", .MIMEType = "application/zip"},
+		{.Extension = "pdf", .MIMEType = "application/pdf"},
+	};
+
+/** FATFs structure to hold the internal state of the FAT driver for the Dataflash contents. */
+FATFS DiskFATState;
+
+
+/** Initialization function for the simple HTTP webserver. */
+void HTTPServerApp_Init(void)
+{
+	/* Listen on port 80 for HTTP connections from hosts */
+	uip_listen(HTONS(HTTP_SERVER_PORT));
+
+	/* Mount the Dataflash disk via FatFS */
+	f_mount(0, &DiskFATState);
+}
+
+/** uIP stack application callback for the simple HTTP webserver. This function must be called each time the
+ *  TCP/IP stack needs a TCP packet to be processed.
+ */
+void HTTPServerApp_Callback(void)
+{
+	uip_tcp_appstate_t* const AppState = &uip_conn->appstate;
+
+	if (uip_aborted() || uip_timedout() || uip_closed())
+	{
+		/* Lock to the closed state so that no further processing will occur on the connection */
+		AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState  = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing;
+		AppState->HTTPServer.NextState     = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing;
+	}
+
+	if (uip_connected())
+	{
+		/* New connection - initialize connection state values */
+		AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState  = WEBSERVER_STATE_OpenRequestedFile;
+		AppState->HTTPServer.NextState     = WEBSERVER_STATE_OpenRequestedFile;
+		AppState->HTTPServer.FileOpen      = false;
+		AppState->HTTPServer.ACKedFilePos  = 0;
+		AppState->HTTPServer.SentChunkSize = 0;
+	}
+
+	if (uip_acked())
+	{
+		/* Add the amount of ACKed file data to the total sent file bytes counter */
+		AppState->HTTPServer.ACKedFilePos += AppState->HTTPServer.SentChunkSize;
+
+		/* Progress to the next state once the current state's data has been ACKed */
+		AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState = AppState->HTTPServer.NextState;
+	}
+
+	if (uip_rexmit())
+	{
+		/* Return file pointer to the last ACKed position */
+		f_lseek(&AppState->HTTPServer.FileHandle, AppState->HTTPServer.ACKedFilePos);
+	}
+
+	if (uip_rexmit() || uip_acked() || uip_newdata() || uip_connected() || uip_poll())
+	{
+		switch (AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState)
+		{
+			case WEBSERVER_STATE_OpenRequestedFile:
+				HTTPServerApp_OpenRequestedFile();
+				break;
+			case WEBSERVER_STATE_SendResponseHeader:
+				HTTPServerApp_SendResponseHeader();
+				break;
+			case WEBSERVER_STATE_SendData:
+				HTTPServerApp_SendData();
+				break;
+			case WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing:
+				/* Connection is being terminated for some reason - close file handle */
+				f_close(&AppState->HTTPServer.FileHandle);
+				AppState->HTTPServer.FileOpen = false;
+
+				/* If connection is not already closed, close it */
+				uip_close();
+
+				AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closed;
+				AppState->HTTPServer.NextState    = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closed;
+				break;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+/** HTTP Server State handler for the Request Process state. This state manages the processing of incoming HTTP
+ *  GET requests to the server from the receiving HTTP client.
+ */
+static void HTTPServerApp_OpenRequestedFile(void)
+{
+	uip_tcp_appstate_t* const AppState    = &uip_conn->appstate;
+	char*               const AppData     = (char*)uip_appdata;
+
+	/* No HTTP header received from the client, abort processing */
+	if (!(uip_newdata()))
+	  return;
+
+	char* RequestToken      = strtok(AppData, " ");
+	char* RequestedFileName = strtok(NULL, " ");
+
+	/* Must be a GET request, abort otherwise */
+	if (strcmp_P(RequestToken, PSTR("GET")) != 0)
+	{
+		uip_abort();
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Copy over the requested filename */
+	strlcpy(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName, &RequestedFileName[1], sizeof(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName));
+
+	/* Determine the length of the URI so that it can be checked to see if it is a directory */
+	uint8_t FileNameLen = strlen(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName);
+
+	/* If the URI is a directory, append the default filename */
+	if ((AppState->HTTPServer.FileName[FileNameLen - 1] == '/') || !(FileNameLen))
+	{
+		strlcpy_P(&AppState->HTTPServer.FileName[FileNameLen], DefaultDirFileName,
+		          (sizeof(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName) - FileNameLen));
+	}
+
+	/* Try to open the file from the Dataflash disk */
+	AppState->HTTPServer.FileOpen     = (f_open(&AppState->HTTPServer.FileHandle, AppState->HTTPServer.FileName,
+	                                            (FA_OPEN_EXISTING | FA_READ)) == FR_OK);
+
+	/* Lock to the SendResponseHeader state until connection terminated */
+	AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState = WEBSERVER_STATE_SendResponseHeader;
+	AppState->HTTPServer.NextState    = WEBSERVER_STATE_SendResponseHeader;
+}
+
+/** HTTP Server State handler for the HTTP Response Header Send state. This state manages the transmission of
+ *  the HTTP response header to the receiving HTTP client.
+ */
+static void HTTPServerApp_SendResponseHeader(void)
+{
+	uip_tcp_appstate_t* const AppState    = &uip_conn->appstate;
+	char*               const AppData     = (char*)uip_appdata;
+
+	char* Extension     = strpbrk(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName, ".");
+	bool  FoundMIMEType = false;
+
+	/* If the file isn't already open, it wasn't found - send back a 404 error response and abort */
+	if (!(AppState->HTTPServer.FileOpen))
+	{
+		/* Copy over the HTTP 404 response header and send it to the receiving client */
+		strcpy_P(AppData, HTTP404Header);
+		strcat(AppData, AppState->HTTPServer.FileName);
+		uip_send(AppData, strlen(AppData));
+
+		AppState->HTTPServer.NextState = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing;
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Copy over the HTTP 200 response header and send it to the receiving client */
+	strcpy_P(AppData, HTTP200Header);
+
+	/* Check to see if a MIME type for the requested file's extension was found */
+	if (Extension != NULL)
+	{
+		/* Look through the MIME type list, copy over the required MIME type if found */
+		for (uint8_t i = 0; i < (sizeof(MIMETypes) / sizeof(MIMETypes[0])); i++)
+		{
+			if (strcmp(&Extension[1], MIMETypes[i].Extension) == 0)
+			{
+				strcat(AppData, MIMETypes[i].MIMEType);
+				FoundMIMEType = true;
+				break;
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Check if a MIME type was found and copied to the output buffer */
+	if (!(FoundMIMEType))
+	{
+		/* MIME type not found - copy over the default MIME type */
+		strcat_P(AppData, DefaultMIMEType);
+	}
+
+	/* Add the end-of-line terminator and end-of-headers terminator after the MIME type */
+	strcat_P(AppData, PSTR("\r\n\r\n"));
+
+	/* Send the MIME header to the receiving client */
+	uip_send(AppData, strlen(AppData));
+
+	/* When the MIME header is ACKed, progress to the data send stage */
+	AppState->HTTPServer.NextState = WEBSERVER_STATE_SendData;
+}
+
+/** HTTP Server State handler for the Data Send state. This state manages the transmission of file chunks
+ *  to the receiving HTTP client.
+ */
+static void HTTPServerApp_SendData(void)
+{
+	uip_tcp_appstate_t* const AppState    = &uip_conn->appstate;
+	char*               const AppData     = (char*)uip_appdata;
+
+	/* Get the maximum segment size for the current packet */
+	uint16_t MaxChunkSize = uip_mss();
+
+	/* Read the next chunk of data from the open file */
+	f_read(&AppState->HTTPServer.FileHandle, AppData, MaxChunkSize, &AppState->HTTPServer.SentChunkSize);
+
+	/* Send the next file chunk to the receiving client */
+	uip_send(AppData, AppState->HTTPServer.SentChunkSize);
+
+	/* Check if we are at the last chunk of the file, if so next ACK should close the connection */
+	if (MaxChunkSize != AppState->HTTPServer.SentChunkSize)
+	  AppState->HTTPServer.NextState = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6e9ada00c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.h
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for HTTPServerApp.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _HTTPSERVER_APP_H_
+#define _HTTPSERVER_APP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <uip.h>
+		#include <ff.h>
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** States for each HTTP connection to the webserver. */
+		enum Webserver_States_t
+		{
+			WEBSERVER_STATE_OpenRequestedFile, /**< Currently opening requested file */
+			WEBSERVER_STATE_SendResponseHeader, /**< Currently sending HTTP response headers to the client */
+			WEBSERVER_STATE_SendData, /**< Currently sending HTTP page data to the client */
+			WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing, /**< Ready to close the connection to the client */
+			WEBSERVER_STATE_Closed, /**< Connection closed after all data sent */
+		};
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a MIME type handler. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			char* Extension; /**< File extension (no leading '.' character) */
+			char* MIMEType;  /**< Appropriate MIME type to send when the extension is encountered */
+		} MIME_Type_t;
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** TCP listen port for incoming HTTP traffic. */
+		#define HTTP_SERVER_PORT  80
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void HTTPServerApp_Init(void);
+		void HTTPServerApp_Callback(void);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_HTTPSERVERAPP_C)
+			static void HTTPServerApp_OpenRequestedFile(void);
+			static void HTTPServerApp_SendResponseHeader(void);
+			static void HTTPServerApp_SendData(void);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..315f2e3a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.c
@@ -0,0 +1,344 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage
+ *  devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information,
+ *  which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C
+#include "SCSI.h"
+
+/** Structure to hold the SCSI response data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's
+ *  features and capabilities.
+ */
+static const SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData =
+	{
+		.DeviceType          = DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK,
+		.PeripheralQualifier = 0,
+
+		.Removable           = true,
+
+		.Version             = 0,
+
+		.ResponseDataFormat  = 2,
+		.NormACA             = false,
+		.TrmTsk              = false,
+		.AERC                = false,
+
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x1F,
+
+		.SoftReset           = false,
+		.CmdQue              = false,
+		.Linked              = false,
+		.Sync                = false,
+		.WideBus16Bit        = false,
+		.WideBus32Bit        = false,
+		.RelAddr             = false,
+
+		.VendorID            = "LUFA",
+		.ProductID           = "Dataflash Disk",
+		.RevisionID          = {'0','.','0','0'},
+	};
+
+/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE
+ *  command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete.
+ */
+static SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData =
+	{
+		.ResponseCode        = 0x70,
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x0A,
+	};
+
+
+/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches
+ *  to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns
+ *  a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool CommandSuccess = false;
+
+	/* Run the appropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */
+	switch (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0])
+	{
+		case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Inquiry(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_WRITE);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_READ);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_START_STOP_UNIT:
+		case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY:
+		case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL:
+		case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10:
+			/* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */
+			CommandSuccess = true;
+			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+			break;
+		default:
+			/* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */
+			SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	/* Check if command was successfully processed */
+	if (CommandSuccess)
+	{
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return true;
+	}
+
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features
+ *  and capabilities to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint16_t AllocationLength  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3]);
+	uint16_t BytesTransferred  = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(InquiryData));
+
+	/* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */
+	if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) ||
+	     MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2])
+	{
+		/* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, NULL);
+
+	/* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */
+	Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL);
+
+	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command,
+ *  including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t  AllocationLength = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
+	uint8_t  BytesTransferred = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(SenseData));
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, NULL);
+	Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity
+ *  on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint32_t LastBlockAddressInLUN = (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS - 1);
+	uint32_t MediaBlockSize        = VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE;
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&LastBlockAddressInLUN, sizeof(LastBlockAddressInLUN), NULL);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&MediaBlockSize, sizeof(MediaBlockSize), NULL);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. This command performs a quick check of the Dataflash ICs on the
+ *  board, and indicates if they are present and functioning correctly. Only the Self-Test portion of the diagnostic command is
+ *  supported.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Check to see if the SELF TEST bit is not set */
+	if (!(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & (1 << 2)))
+	{
+		/* Only self-test supported - update SENSE key and fail the command */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Check to see if all attached Dataflash ICs are functional */
+	if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation()))
+	{
+		/* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address
+ *  and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level Dataflash routine to handle the actual
+ *  reading and writing of the data.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *  \param[in] IsDataRead  Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE)
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                      const bool IsDataRead)
+{
+	uint32_t BlockAddress;
+	uint16_t TotalBlocks;
+
+	/* Check if the disk is write protected or not */
+	if ((IsDataRead == DATA_WRITE) && DISK_READ_ONLY)
+	{
+		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
+	BlockAddress = SwapEndian_32(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]);
+
+	/* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
+	TotalBlocks  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7]);
+
+	/* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */
+	if (BlockAddress >= VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS)
+	{
+		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */
+	if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ)
+	  DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+	else
+	  DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+
+	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE);
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI MODE SENSE (6) command. This command returns various informational pages about
+ *  the SCSI device, as well as the device's Write Protect status.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Send an empty header response with the Write Protect flag status */
+	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(DISK_READ_ONLY ? 0x80 : 0x00);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 4;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..53274dd89
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.h
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for SCSI.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _SCSI_H_
+#define _SCSI_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "../Descriptors.h"
+		#include "DataflashManager.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This
+		 *  is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about
+		 *  the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Key    New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] Acode  New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] Aqual  New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to
+		 */
+		#define SCSI_SET_SENSE(Key, Acode, Aqual)  do { SenseData.SenseKey                 = (Key);   \
+		                                                SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode      = (Acode); \
+		                                                SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = (Aqual); } while (0)
+
+		/** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_READ           true
+
+		/** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_WRITE          false
+
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a Block Media device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK   0x00
+
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a CD-ROM device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_CDROM   0x05
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C)
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+			                                      const bool IsDataRead);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a05cd286f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.c
@@ -0,0 +1,163 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  TELNET Webserver Application. When connected to the uIP stack,
+ *  this will serve out raw TELNET to the client on port 23.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_TELNETSERVERAPP_C
+#include "TELNETServerApp.h"
+
+#if defined(ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+
+/** Welcome message to send to a TELNET client when a connection is first made. */
+const char PROGMEM WelcomeHeader[] = "********************************************\r\n"
+                                     "*       LUFA uIP Webserver (TELNET)        *\r\n"
+                                     "********************************************\r\n";
+
+/** Main TELNET menu, giving the user the list of available commands they may issue */
+const char PROGMEM TELNETMenu[] = "\r\n"
+                                  "  == Available Commands: ==\r\n"
+                                  "     c) List Active TCP Connections\r\n"
+                                  "  =========================\r\n"
+                                  "\r\n>";
+
+/** Header to print before the current connections are printed to the client */
+const char PROGMEM CurrentConnectionsHeader[] = "\r\n* Current TCP Connections: *\r\n";
+
+/** Initialization function for the simple TELNET webserver. */
+void TELNETServerApp_Init(void)
+{
+	/* Listen on port 23 for TELNET connections from hosts */
+	uip_listen(HTONS(TELNET_SERVER_PORT));
+}
+
+/** uIP stack application callback for the TELNET server. This function must be called each time the
+ *  TCP/IP stack needs a TCP packet to be processed.
+ */
+void TELNETServerApp_Callback(void)
+{
+	uip_tcp_appstate_t* const AppState   = &uip_conn->appstate;
+	char*               const AppData    = (char*)uip_appdata;
+
+	if (uip_connected())
+	{
+		/* New connection - initialize connection state values */
+		AppState->TELNETServer.CurrentState = TELNET_STATE_SendHeader;
+	}
+
+	if (uip_acked())
+	{
+		/* Progress to the next state once the current state's data has been ACKed */
+		AppState->TELNETServer.CurrentState = AppState->TELNETServer.NextState;
+	}
+
+	if (uip_rexmit() || uip_acked() || uip_newdata() || uip_connected() || uip_poll())
+	{
+		switch (AppState->TELNETServer.CurrentState)
+		{
+			case TELNET_STATE_SendHeader:
+				/* Copy over and send the TELNET welcome message upon first connection */
+				strcpy_P(AppData, WelcomeHeader);
+				uip_send(AppData, strlen(AppData));
+
+				AppState->TELNETServer.NextState = TELNET_STATE_SendMenu;
+				break;
+			case TELNET_STATE_SendMenu:
+				/* Copy over and send the TELNET menu to the client */
+				strcpy_P(AppData, TELNETMenu);
+				uip_send(AppData, strlen(AppData));
+
+				AppState->TELNETServer.NextState = TELNET_STATE_GetCommand;
+				break;
+			case TELNET_STATE_GetCommand:
+				if (!(uip_datalen()))
+				  break;
+
+				/* Save the issued command for later processing */
+				AppState->TELNETServer.IssuedCommand = AppData[0];
+
+				AppState->TELNETServer.CurrentState  = TELNET_STATE_SendResponse;
+				break;
+			case TELNET_STATE_SendResponse:
+				/* Determine which command was issued, perform command processing */
+				switch (AppState->TELNETServer.IssuedCommand)
+				{
+					case 'c':
+						TELNETServerApp_DisplayTCPConnections();
+						break;
+					default:
+						strcpy_P(AppData, PSTR("Invalid Command.\r\n"));
+						uip_send(AppData, strlen(AppData));
+						break;
+				}
+
+				AppState->TELNETServer.NextState = TELNET_STATE_SendMenu;
+				break;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+/** Sends a list of active TCP connections to the TELNET client. */
+static void TELNETServerApp_DisplayTCPConnections(void)
+{
+	char* const AppData    = (char*)uip_appdata;
+
+	strcpy_P(AppData, CurrentConnectionsHeader);
+
+	uint16_t ResponseLen     = strlen(AppData);
+	uint8_t  ActiveConnCount = 0;
+
+	/* Loop through the complete uIP TCP connections list, looking for active connections */
+	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UIP_CONNS; i++)
+	{
+		struct uip_conn* CurrConnection = &uip_conns[i];
+
+		/* If the connection is not closed, it is active and must be added to the out buffer */
+		if (CurrConnection->tcpstateflags != UIP_CLOSED)
+		{
+			/* Add the current connection's details to the out buffer */
+			ResponseLen += sprintf_P(&AppData[ResponseLen], PSTR("%u) %d.%d.%d.%d (Local Port %u <=> Remote Port %u)\r\n"),
+			                         ++ActiveConnCount,
+			                         CurrConnection->ripaddr.u8[0],
+			                         CurrConnection->ripaddr.u8[1],
+			                         CurrConnection->ripaddr.u8[2],
+			                         CurrConnection->ripaddr.u8[3],
+			                         HTONS(CurrConnection->lport), HTONS(CurrConnection->rport));
+		}
+	}
+
+	uip_send(AppData, ResponseLen);
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ac2a83654
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.h
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for TELNETServerApp.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _TELNETSERVER_APP_H_
+#define _TELNETSERVER_APP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <uip.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** TCP listen port for incoming TELNET traffic. */
+		#define TELNET_SERVER_PORT  23
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** States for each TELNET connection to the server. */
+		enum TELNET_States_t
+		{
+			TELNET_STATE_SendHeader, /**< Currently sending welcome header to the client */
+			TELNET_STATE_SendMenu, /**< Currently sending the command list menu to the client */
+			TELNET_STATE_GetCommand, /**< Currently waiting for a command from the client */
+			TELNET_STATE_SendResponse, /**< Processing the issued command and sending a response */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void TELNETServerApp_Init(void);
+		void TELNETServerApp_Callback(void);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_TELNETSERVERAPP_C)
+			static void TELNETServerApp_DisplayTCPConnections(void);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c9cbba7c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.c
@@ -0,0 +1,298 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  uIP Management functions. This file contains the functions and globals needed to maintain the uIP
+ *  stack once an RNDIS device has been attached to the system.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_UIPMANAGEMENT_C
+#include "uIPManagement.h"
+
+/** Connection timer, to retain the time elapsed since the last time the uIP connections were managed. */
+static struct timer ConnectionTimer;
+
+/** ARP timer, to retain the time elapsed since the ARP cache was last updated. */
+static struct timer ARPTimer;
+
+/** MAC address of the RNDIS device, when enumerated. */
+struct uip_eth_addr MACAddress;
+
+
+/** Configures the uIP stack ready for network traffic processing. */
+void uIPManagement_Init(void)
+{
+	/* uIP Timing Initialization */
+	clock_init();
+	timer_set(&ConnectionTimer, CLOCK_SECOND / 2);
+	timer_set(&ARPTimer, CLOCK_SECOND * 10);
+
+	/* uIP Stack Initialization */
+	uip_init();
+	uip_arp_init();
+
+	/* DHCP/Server IP Settings Initialization */
+	if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device)
+	{
+		MACAddress.addr[0] = SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS[0];
+		MACAddress.addr[1] = SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS[1];
+		MACAddress.addr[2] = SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS[2];
+		MACAddress.addr[3] = SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS[3];
+		MACAddress.addr[4] = SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS[4];
+		MACAddress.addr[5] = SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS[5];
+
+		#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_SERVER)
+		DHCPServerApp_Init();
+		#endif
+
+		uip_ipaddr_t IPAddress, Netmask, GatewayIPAddress;
+		uip_ipaddr(&IPAddress,        DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[0], DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[1], DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[2], DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[3]);
+		uip_ipaddr(&Netmask,          DEVICE_NETMASK[0],    DEVICE_NETMASK[1],    DEVICE_NETMASK[2],    DEVICE_NETMASK[3]);
+		uip_ipaddr(&GatewayIPAddress, DEVICE_GATEWAY[0],    DEVICE_GATEWAY[1],    DEVICE_GATEWAY[2],    DEVICE_GATEWAY[3]);
+		uip_sethostaddr(&IPAddress);
+		uip_setnetmask(&Netmask);
+		uip_setdraddr(&GatewayIPAddress);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT)
+		DHCPClientApp_Init();
+		#else
+		uip_ipaddr_t IPAddress, Netmask, GatewayIPAddress;
+		uip_ipaddr(&IPAddress,        DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[0], DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[1], DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[2], DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[3]);
+		uip_ipaddr(&Netmask,          DEVICE_NETMASK[0],    DEVICE_NETMASK[1],    DEVICE_NETMASK[2],    DEVICE_NETMASK[3]);
+		uip_ipaddr(&GatewayIPAddress, DEVICE_GATEWAY[0],    DEVICE_GATEWAY[1],    DEVICE_GATEWAY[2],    DEVICE_GATEWAY[3]);
+		uip_sethostaddr(&IPAddress);
+		uip_setnetmask(&Netmask);
+		uip_setdraddr(&GatewayIPAddress);
+		#endif
+	}
+
+	/* Virtual Webserver Ethernet Address Configuration */
+	uip_setethaddr(MACAddress);
+
+	/* HTTP Webserver Initialization */
+	HTTPServerApp_Init();
+
+	/* TELNET Server Initialization */
+	#if defined(ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER)
+	TELNETServerApp_Init();
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** uIP Management function. This function manages the uIP stack when called while an RNDIS device has been
+ *  attached to the system.
+ */
+void uIPManagement_ManageNetwork(void)
+{
+	if (((USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Host)   && (USB_HostState   == HOST_STATE_Configured)) ||
+	    ((USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device) && (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Configured)))
+	{
+		uIPManagement_ProcessIncomingPacket();
+		uIPManagement_ManageConnections();
+	}
+}
+
+/** uIP TCP/IP network stack callback function for the processing of a given TCP connection. This routine dispatches
+ *  to the appropriate TCP protocol application based on the connection's listen port number.
+ */
+void uIPManagement_TCPCallback(void)
+{
+	/* Call the correct TCP application based on the port number the connection is listening on */
+	switch (uip_conn->lport)
+	{
+		case HTONS(HTTP_SERVER_PORT):
+			HTTPServerApp_Callback();
+			break;
+		#if defined(ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER)
+		case HTONS(TELNET_SERVER_PORT):
+			TELNETServerApp_Callback();
+			break;
+		#endif
+	}
+}
+
+/** uIP TCP/IP network stack callback function for the processing of a given UDP connection. This routine dispatches
+ *  to the appropriate UDP protocol application based on the connection's listen port number.
+ */
+void uIPManagement_UDPCallback(void)
+{
+	/* Call the correct UDP application based on the port number the connection is listening on */
+	switch (uip_udp_conn->lport)
+	{
+		#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT)
+		case HTONS(DHCP_CLIENT_PORT):
+			DHCPClientApp_Callback();
+			break;
+		#endif
+		#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_SERVER)
+		case HTONS(DHCP_SERVER_PORT):
+			DHCPServerApp_Callback();
+			break;
+		#endif
+	}
+}
+
+/** Processes Incoming packets to the server from the connected RNDIS device, creating responses as needed. */
+static void uIPManagement_ProcessIncomingPacket(void)
+{
+	/* Determine which USB mode the system is currently initialized in */
+	if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device)
+	{
+		/* If no packet received, exit processing routine */
+		if (!(RNDIS_Device_IsPacketReceived(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device)))
+		  return;
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+		/* Read the Incoming packet straight into the UIP packet buffer */
+		RNDIS_Device_ReadPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device, uip_buf, &uip_len);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* If no packet received, exit processing routine */
+		if (!(RNDIS_Host_IsPacketReceived(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host)))
+		  return;
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+		/* Read the Incoming packet straight into the UIP packet buffer */
+		RNDIS_Host_ReadPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host, uip_buf, &uip_len);
+	}
+
+	/* If the packet contains an Ethernet frame, process it */
+	if (uip_len > 0)
+	{
+		switch (((struct uip_eth_hdr*)uip_buf)->type)
+		{
+			case HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_IP):
+				/* Filter packet by MAC destination */
+				uip_arp_ipin();
+
+				/* Process Incoming packet */
+				uip_input();
+
+				/* If a response was generated, send it */
+				if (uip_len > 0)
+				{
+					/* Add destination MAC to outgoing packet */
+					uip_arp_out();
+
+					uip_split_output();
+				}
+
+				break;
+			case HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_ARP):
+				/* Process ARP packet */
+				uip_arp_arpin();
+
+				/* If a response was generated, send it */
+				if (uip_len > 0)
+				  uip_split_output();
+
+				break;
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Manages the currently open network connections, including TCP and (if enabled) UDP. */
+static void uIPManagement_ManageConnections(void)
+{
+	/* Poll TCP connections for more data to send back to the host */
+	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UIP_CONNS; i++)
+	{
+		uip_poll_conn(&uip_conns[i]);
+
+		/* If a response was generated, send it */
+		if (uip_len > 0)
+		{
+			/* Add destination MAC to outgoing packet */
+			uip_arp_out();
+
+			/* Split and send the outgoing packet */
+			uip_split_output();
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Manage open connections for timeouts */
+	if (timer_expired(&ConnectionTimer))
+	{
+		timer_reset(&ConnectionTimer);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+		for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UIP_CONNS; i++)
+		{
+			/* Run periodic connection management for each TCP connection */
+			uip_periodic(i);
+
+			/* If a response was generated, send it */
+			if (uip_len > 0)
+			{
+				/* Add destination MAC to outgoing packet */
+				uip_arp_out();
+
+				/* Split and send the outgoing packet */
+				uip_split_output();
+			}
+		}
+
+		#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT)
+		for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UIP_UDP_CONNS; i++)
+		{
+			/* Run periodic connection management for each UDP connection */
+			uip_udp_periodic(i);
+
+			/* If a response was generated, send it */
+			if (uip_len > 0)
+			{
+				/* Add destination MAC to outgoing packet */
+				uip_arp_out();
+
+				/* Split and send the outgoing packet */
+				uip_split_output();
+			}
+		}
+		#endif
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	}
+
+	/* Manage ARP cache refreshing */
+	if (timer_expired(&ARPTimer))
+	{
+		timer_reset(&ARPTimer);
+		uip_arp_timer();
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9a6fa1759
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.h
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for uIPManagement.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _UIP_MANAGEMENT_H_
+#define _UIP_MANAGEMENT_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <uip.h>
+		#include <uip_arp.h>
+		#include <uip-split.h>
+		#include <timer.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include "DHCPClientApp.h"
+		#include "DHCPServerApp.h"
+		#include "HTTPServerApp.h"
+		#include "TELNETServerApp.h"
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern struct uip_eth_addr MACAddress;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void uIPManagement_Init(void);
+		void uIPManagement_ManageNetwork(void);
+		void uIPManagement_TCPCallback(void);
+		void uIPManagement_UDPCallback(void);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_UIPMANAGEMENT_C)
+			static void uIPManagement_ProcessIncomingPacket(void);
+			static void uIPManagement_ManageConnections(void);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e71f7209d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.c
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+
+#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+
+#include "clock.h"
+
+//Counted time
+volatile clock_time_t clock_datetime = 0;
+
+//Overflow interrupt
+ISR(TIMER1_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	clock_datetime += 1;
+}
+
+//Initialise the clock
+void clock_init()
+{
+	OCR1A  = (((F_CPU / 1024) / 100) - 1);
+	TCCR1B = ((1 << WGM12) | (1 << CS12) | (1 << CS10));
+	TIMSK1 = (1 << OCIE1A);
+}
+
+//Return time
+clock_time_t clock_time()
+{
+	clock_time_t time;
+
+	GlobalInterruptDisable();
+	time = clock_datetime;
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	return time;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bbfa4ac0e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.h
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+#ifndef __CLOCK_ARCH_H__
+#define __CLOCK_ARCH_H__
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include <util/atomic.h>
+
+typedef uint16_t clock_time_t;
+#define CLOCK_SECOND 100
+void clock_init(void);
+clock_time_t clock_time(void);
+
+#endif /* __CLOCK_ARCH_H__ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..eae06f43b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.c
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+/**
+ * \addtogroup timer
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * \file
+ * Timer library implementation.
+ * \author
+ * Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2004, Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
+ * All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors
+ *    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ *    without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack
+ *
+ * Author: Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
+ *
+ * $Id: timer.c,v 1.2 2006/06/12 08:00:30 adam Exp $
+ */
+
+#include "clock.h"
+#include "timer.h"
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * Set a timer.
+ *
+ * This function is used to set a timer for a time sometime in the
+ * future. The function timer_expired() will evaluate to true after
+ * the timer has expired.
+ *
+ * \param t A pointer to the timer
+ * \param interval The interval before the timer expires.
+ *
+ */
+void
+timer_set(struct timer *t, clock_time_t interval)
+{
+  t->interval = interval;
+  t->start = clock_time();
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * Reset the timer with the same interval.
+ *
+ * This function resets the timer with the same interval that was
+ * given to the timer_set() function. The start point of the interval
+ * is the exact time that the timer last expired. Therefore, this
+ * function will cause the timer to be stable over time, unlike the
+ * timer_restart() function.
+ *
+ * \param t A pointer to the timer.
+ *
+ * \sa timer_restart()
+ */
+void
+timer_reset(struct timer *t)
+{
+  t->start += t->interval;
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * Restart the timer from the current point in time
+ *
+ * This function restarts a timer with the same interval that was
+ * given to the timer_set() function. The timer will start at the
+ * current time.
+ *
+ * \note A periodic timer will drift if this function is used to reset
+ * it. For periodic timers, use the timer_reset() function instead.
+ *
+ * \param t A pointer to the timer.
+ *
+ * \sa timer_reset()
+ */
+void
+timer_restart(struct timer *t)
+{
+  t->start = clock_time();
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * Check if a timer has expired.
+ *
+ * This function tests if a timer has expired and returns true or
+ * false depending on its status.
+ *
+ * \param t A pointer to the timer
+ *
+ * \return Non-zero if the timer has expired, zero otherwise.
+ *
+ */
+int
+timer_expired(struct timer *t)
+{
+  return (clock_time_t)(clock_time() - t->start) >= (clock_time_t)t->interval;
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..04917e4c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.h
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+/**
+ * \defgroup timer Timer library
+ *
+ * The timer library provides functions for setting, resetting and
+ * restarting timers, and for checking if a timer has expired. An
+ * application must "manually" check if its timers have expired; this
+ * is not done automatically.
+ *
+ * A timer is declared as a \c struct \c timer and all access to the
+ * timer is made by a pointer to the declared timer.
+ *
+ * \note The timer library uses the \ref clock "Clock library" to
+ * measure time. Intervals should be specified in the format used by
+ * the clock library.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+
+/**
+ * \file
+ * Timer library header file.
+ * \author
+ * Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2004, Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
+ * All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors
+ *    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ *    without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack
+ *
+ * Author: Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
+ *
+ * $Id: timer.h,v 1.3 2006/06/11 21:46:39 adam Exp $
+ */
+#ifndef __TIMER_H__
+#define __TIMER_H__
+
+#include "clock.h"
+
+/**
+ * A timer.
+ *
+ * This structure is used for declaring a timer. The timer must be set
+ * with timer_set() before it can be used.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+struct timer {
+  clock_time_t start;
+  clock_time_t interval;
+};
+
+void timer_set(struct timer *t, clock_time_t interval);
+void timer_reset(struct timer *t);
+void timer_restart(struct timer *t);
+int timer_expired(struct timer *t);
+
+#endif /* __TIMER_H__ */
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5222a05b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.c
@@ -0,0 +1,151 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2004, Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
+ * All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors
+ *    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ *    without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * This file is part of the Contiki operating system.
+ *
+ * Author: Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
+ *
+ * $Id: uip-split.c,v 1.2 2008/10/14 13:39:12 julienabeille Exp $
+ */
+
+#include "uip-split.h"
+
+
+#define BUF ((struct uip_tcpip_hdr *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN])
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+void
+uip_split_output(void)
+{
+#if UIP_TCP
+  u16_t tcplen, len1, len2;
+
+  /* We only try to split maximum sized TCP segments. */
+  if(BUF->proto == UIP_PROTO_TCP  && uip_len == UIP_BUFSIZE) {
+
+    tcplen = uip_len - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN - UIP_LLH_LEN;
+    /* Split the segment in two. If the original packet length was
+       odd, we make the second packet one byte larger. */
+    len1 = len2 = tcplen / 2;
+    if(len1 + len2 < tcplen) {
+      ++len2;
+    }
+
+    /* Create the first packet. This is done by altering the length
+       field of the IP header and updating the checksums. */
+    uip_len = len1 + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN;
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+    /* For IPv6, the IP length field does not include the IPv6 IP header
+       length. */
+    BUF->len[0] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) >> 8);
+    BUF->len[1] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) & 0xff);
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+    BUF->len[0] = (uip_len - UIP_LLH_LEN) >> 8;
+    BUF->len[1] = (uip_len - UIP_LLH_LEN) & 0xff;
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+    /* Recalculate the TCP checksum. */
+    BUF->tcpchksum = 0;
+    BUF->tcpchksum = ~(uip_tcpchksum());
+
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+    /* Recalculate the IP checksum. */
+    BUF->ipchksum = 0;
+    BUF->ipchksum = ~(uip_ipchksum());
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+    /* Transmit the first packet. */
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+    tcpip_ipv6_output();
+#else
+	if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device)
+	  RNDIS_Device_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device, uip_buf, uip_len);
+	else
+	  RNDIS_Host_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host, uip_buf, uip_len);
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+    /* Now, create the second packet. To do this, it is not enough to
+       just alter the length field, but we must also update the TCP
+       sequence number and point the uip_appdata to a new place in
+       memory. This place is determined by the length of the first
+       packet (len1). */
+    uip_len = len2 + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN;
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+    /* For IPv6, the IP length field does not include the IPv6 IP header
+       length. */
+    BUF->len[0] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) >> 8);
+    BUF->len[1] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) & 0xff);
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+    BUF->len[0] = (uip_len  - UIP_LLH_LEN) >> 8;
+    BUF->len[1] = (uip_len - UIP_LLH_LEN) & 0xff;
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+    memcpy(uip_appdata, (u8_t *)uip_appdata + len1, len2);
+
+    uip_add32(BUF->seqno, len1);
+    BUF->seqno[0] = uip_acc32[0];
+    BUF->seqno[1] = uip_acc32[1];
+    BUF->seqno[2] = uip_acc32[2];
+    BUF->seqno[3] = uip_acc32[3];
+
+    /* Recalculate the TCP checksum. */
+    BUF->tcpchksum = 0;
+    BUF->tcpchksum = ~(uip_tcpchksum());
+
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+    /* Recalculate the IP checksum. */
+    BUF->ipchksum = 0;
+    BUF->ipchksum = ~(uip_ipchksum());
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+    /* Transmit the second packet. */
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+    tcpip_ipv6_output();
+#else
+	if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device)
+	  RNDIS_Device_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device, uip_buf, uip_len);
+	else
+	  RNDIS_Host_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host, uip_buf, uip_len);
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+    return;
+  }
+#endif /* UIP_TCP */
+
+  /*    uip_fw_output();*/
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+	tcpip_ipv6_output();
+#else
+	if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device)
+	  RNDIS_Device_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device, uip_buf, uip_len);
+	else
+	  RNDIS_Host_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host, uip_buf, uip_len);
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+}
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0c768ce40
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.h
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2004, Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
+ * All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors
+ *    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ *    without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * This file is part of the Contiki operating system.
+ *
+ * Author: Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
+ *
+ * $Id: uip-split.h,v 1.1 2006/06/17 22:41:19 adamdunkels Exp $
+ */
+/**
+ * \addtogroup uip
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipsplit uIP TCP throughput booster hack
+ * @{
+ *
+ * The basic uIP TCP implementation only allows each TCP connection to
+ * have a single TCP segment in flight at any given time. Because of
+ * the delayed ACK algorithm employed by most TCP receivers, uIP's
+ * limit on the amount of in-flight TCP segments seriously reduces the
+ * maximum achievable throughput for sending data from uIP.
+ *
+ * The uip-split module is a hack which tries to remedy this
+ * situation. By splitting maximum sized outgoing TCP segments into
+ * two, the delayed ACK algorithm is not invoked at TCP
+ * receivers. This improves the throughput when sending data from uIP
+ * by orders of magnitude.
+ *
+ * The uip-split module uses the uip-fw module (uIP IP packet
+ * forwarding) for sending packets. Therefore, the uip-fw module must
+ * be set up with the appropriate network interfaces for this module
+ * to work.
+ */
+
+
+/**
+ * \file
+ * Module for splitting outbound TCP segments in two to avoid the
+ * delayed ACK throughput degradation.
+ * \author
+ * Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
+ *
+ */
+
+#ifndef __UIP_SPLIT_H__
+#define __UIP_SPLIT_H__
+
+#include <string.h>
+#include <uip.h>
+
+#include "../../USBHostMode.h"
+
+#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+/**
+ * Handle outgoing packets.
+ *
+ * This function inspects an outgoing packet in the uip_buf buffer and
+ * sends it out using the uip_fw_output() function. If the packet is a
+ * full-sized TCP segment it will be split into two segments and
+ * transmitted separately. This function should be called instead of
+ * the actual device driver output function, or the uip_fw_output()
+ * function.
+ *
+ * The headers of the outgoing packet is assumed to be in the uip_buf
+ * buffer and the payload is assumed to be wherever uip_appdata
+ * points. The length of the outgoing packet is assumed to be in the
+ * uip_len variable.
+ *
+ */
+void uip_split_output(void);
+void uip_add32(u8_t *op32, u16_t op16);
+#endif /* __UIP_SPLIT_H__ */
+
+/** @} */
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fead75775
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1941 @@
+#define DEBUG_PRINTF(...) /*printf(__VA_ARGS__)*/
+
+/**
+ * \addtogroup uip
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * \file
+ * The uIP TCP/IP stack code.
+ * \author Adam Dunkels <adam@dunkels.com>
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Adam Dunkels.
+ * All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote
+ *    products derived from this software without specific prior
+ *    written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
+ * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
+ * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
+ * GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
+ * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
+ * WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
+ * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack.
+ *
+ * $Id: uip.c,v 1.15 2008/10/15 08:08:32 adamdunkels Exp $
+ *
+ */
+
+/*
+ * uIP is a small implementation of the IP, UDP and TCP protocols (as
+ * well as some basic ICMP stuff). The implementation couples the IP,
+ * UDP, TCP and the application layers very tightly. To keep the size
+ * of the compiled code down, this code frequently uses the goto
+ * statement. While it would be possible to break the uip_process()
+ * function into many smaller functions, this would increase the code
+ * size because of the overhead of parameter passing and the fact that
+ * the optimizer would not be as efficient.
+ *
+ * The principle is that we have a small buffer, called the uip_buf,
+ * in which the device driver puts an incoming packet. The TCP/IP
+ * stack parses the headers in the packet, and calls the
+ * application. If the remote host has sent data to the application,
+ * this data is present in the uip_buf and the application read the
+ * data from there. It is up to the application to put this data into
+ * a byte stream if needed. The application will not be fed with data
+ * that is out of sequence.
+ *
+ * If the application whishes to send data to the peer, it should put
+ * its data into the uip_buf. The uip_appdata pointer points to the
+ * first available byte. The TCP/IP stack will calculate the
+ * checksums, and fill in the necessary header fields and finally send
+ * the packet back to the peer.
+*/
+
+#include "uip.h"
+#include "uipopt.h"
+#include "uip_arp.h"
+
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6 /* If UIP_CONF_IPV6 is defined, we compile the
+		      uip6.c file instead of this one. Therefore
+		      this #ifndef removes the entire compilation
+		      output of the uip.c file */
+
+
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+#include "net/uip-neighbor.h"
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+#include <string.h>
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Variable definitions. */
+
+
+/* The IP address of this host. If it is defined to be fixed (by
+   setting UIP_FIXEDADDR to 1 in uipopt.h), the address is set
+   here. Otherwise, the address */
+#if UIP_FIXEDADDR > 0
+const uip_ipaddr_t uip_hostaddr =
+  { UIP_IPADDR0, UIP_IPADDR1, UIP_IPADDR2, UIP_IPADDR3 };
+const uip_ipaddr_t uip_draddr =
+  { UIP_DRIPADDR0, UIP_DRIPADDR1, UIP_DRIPADDR2, UIP_DRIPADDR3 };
+const uip_ipaddr_t uip_netmask =
+  { UIP_NETMASK0, UIP_NETMASK1, UIP_NETMASK2, UIP_NETMASK3 };
+#else
+uip_ipaddr_t uip_hostaddr, uip_draddr, uip_netmask;
+#endif /* UIP_FIXEDADDR */
+
+const uip_ipaddr_t uip_broadcast_addr =
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  { { 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff,
+      0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff } };
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  { { 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff } };
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+const uip_ipaddr_t uip_all_zeroes_addr = { { 0x0, /* rest is 0 */ } };
+
+#if UIP_FIXEDETHADDR
+const struct uip_eth_addr uip_ethaddr = {{UIP_ETHADDR0,
+					  UIP_ETHADDR1,
+					  UIP_ETHADDR2,
+					  UIP_ETHADDR3,
+					  UIP_ETHADDR4,
+					  UIP_ETHADDR5}};
+#else
+struct uip_eth_addr uip_ethaddr = {{0,0,0,0,0,0}};
+#endif
+
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_EXTERNAL_BUFFER
+u8_t uip_buf[UIP_BUFSIZE + 2];   /* The packet buffer that contains
+				    incoming packets. */
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_EXTERNAL_BUFFER */
+
+void *uip_appdata;               /* The uip_appdata pointer points to
+				    application data. */
+void *uip_sappdata;              /* The uip_appdata pointer points to
+				    the application data which is to
+				    be sent. */
+#if UIP_URGDATA > 0
+void *uip_urgdata;               /* The uip_urgdata pointer points to
+   				    urgent data (out-of-band data), if
+   				    present. */
+u16_t uip_urglen, uip_surglen;
+#endif /* UIP_URGDATA > 0 */
+
+u16_t uip_len, uip_slen;
+                             /* The uip_len is either 8 or 16 bits,
+				depending on the maximum packet
+				size. */
+
+u8_t uip_flags;     /* The uip_flags variable is used for
+				communication between the TCP/IP stack
+				and the application program. */
+struct uip_conn *uip_conn;   /* uip_conn always points to the current
+				connection. */
+
+struct uip_conn uip_conns[UIP_CONNS];
+                             /* The uip_conns array holds all TCP
+				connections. */
+u16_t uip_listenports[UIP_LISTENPORTS];
+                             /* The uip_listenports list all currently
+				listening ports. */
+#if UIP_UDP
+struct uip_udp_conn *uip_udp_conn;
+struct uip_udp_conn uip_udp_conns[UIP_UDP_CONNS];
+#endif /* UIP_UDP */
+
+static u16_t ipid;           /* Ths ipid variable is an increasing
+				number that is used for the IP ID
+				field. */
+
+void uip_setipid(u16_t id) { ipid = id; }
+
+static u8_t iss[4];          /* The iss variable is used for the TCP
+				initial sequence number. */
+
+#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN
+static u16_t lastport;       /* Keeps track of the last port used for
+				a new connection. */
+#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
+
+/* Temporary variables. */
+u8_t uip_acc32[4];
+static u8_t c, opt;
+static u16_t tmp16;
+
+/* Structures and definitions. */
+#define TCP_FIN 0x01
+#define TCP_SYN 0x02
+#define TCP_RST 0x04
+#define TCP_PSH 0x08
+#define TCP_ACK 0x10
+#define TCP_URG 0x20
+#define TCP_CTL 0x3f
+
+#define TCP_OPT_END     0   /* End of TCP options list */
+#define TCP_OPT_NOOP    1   /* "No-operation" TCP option */
+#define TCP_OPT_MSS     2   /* Maximum segment size TCP option */
+
+#define TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN 4   /* Length of TCP MSS option. */
+
+#define ICMP_ECHO_REPLY 0
+#define ICMP_ECHO       8
+
+#define ICMP_DEST_UNREACHABLE        3
+#define ICMP_PORT_UNREACHABLE        3
+
+#define ICMP6_ECHO_REPLY             129
+#define ICMP6_ECHO                   128
+#define ICMP6_NEIGHBOR_SOLICITATION  135
+#define ICMP6_NEIGHBOR_ADVERTISEMENT 136
+
+#define ICMP6_FLAG_S (1 << 6)
+
+#define ICMP6_OPTION_SOURCE_LINK_ADDRESS 1
+#define ICMP6_OPTION_TARGET_LINK_ADDRESS 2
+
+
+/* Macros. */
+#define BUF ((struct uip_tcpip_hdr *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN])
+#define FBUF ((struct uip_tcpip_hdr *)&uip_reassbuf[0])
+#define ICMPBUF ((struct uip_icmpip_hdr *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN])
+#define UDPBUF ((struct uip_udpip_hdr *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN])
+
+
+#if UIP_STATISTICS == 1
+struct uip_stats uip_stat;
+#define UIP_STAT(s) s
+#else
+#define UIP_STAT(s)
+#endif /* UIP_STATISTICS == 1 */
+
+#if UIP_LOGGING == 1
+#include <stdio.h>
+void uip_log(char *msg);
+#define UIP_LOG(m) uip_log(m)
+#else
+#define UIP_LOG(m)
+#endif /* UIP_LOGGING == 1 */
+
+#if ! UIP_ARCH_ADD32
+void
+uip_add32(u8_t *op32, u16_t op16)
+{
+  uip_acc32[3] = op32[3] + (op16 & 0xff);
+  uip_acc32[2] = op32[2] + (op16 >> 8);
+  uip_acc32[1] = op32[1];
+  uip_acc32[0] = op32[0];
+
+  if(uip_acc32[2] < (op16 >> 8)) {
+    ++uip_acc32[1];
+    if(uip_acc32[1] == 0) {
+      ++uip_acc32[0];
+    }
+  }
+
+
+  if(uip_acc32[3] < (op16 & 0xff)) {
+    ++uip_acc32[2];
+    if(uip_acc32[2] == 0) {
+      ++uip_acc32[1];
+      if(uip_acc32[1] == 0) {
+	++uip_acc32[0];
+      }
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+#endif /* UIP_ARCH_ADD32 */
+
+#if ! UIP_ARCH_CHKSUM
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+static u16_t
+chksum(u16_t sum, const u8_t *data, u16_t len)
+{
+  u16_t t;
+  const u8_t *dataptr;
+  const u8_t *last_byte;
+
+  dataptr = data;
+  last_byte = data + len - 1;
+
+  while(dataptr < last_byte) {	/* At least two more bytes */
+    t = (dataptr[0] << 8) + dataptr[1];
+    sum += t;
+    if(sum < t) {
+      sum++;		/* carry */
+    }
+    dataptr += 2;
+  }
+
+  if(dataptr == last_byte) {
+    t = (dataptr[0] << 8) + 0;
+    sum += t;
+    if(sum < t) {
+      sum++;		/* carry */
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* Return sum in host byte order. */
+  return sum;
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+u16_t
+uip_chksum(u16_t *data, u16_t len)
+{
+  return htons(chksum(0, (u8_t *)data, len));
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#ifndef UIP_ARCH_IPCHKSUM
+u16_t
+uip_ipchksum(void)
+{
+  u16_t sum;
+
+  sum = chksum(0, &uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN], UIP_IPH_LEN);
+  DEBUG_PRINTF("uip_ipchksum: sum 0x%04x\n", sum);
+  return (sum == 0) ? 0xffff : htons(sum);
+}
+#endif
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+static u16_t
+upper_layer_chksum(u8_t proto)
+{
+  u16_t upper_layer_len;
+  u16_t sum;
+
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  upper_layer_len = (((u16_t)(BUF->len[0]) << 8) + BUF->len[1]);
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  upper_layer_len = (((u16_t)(BUF->len[0]) << 8) + BUF->len[1]) - UIP_IPH_LEN;
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+  /* First sum pseudo-header. */
+
+  /* IP protocol and length fields. This addition cannot carry. */
+  sum = upper_layer_len + proto;
+  /* Sum IP source and destination addresses. */
+  sum = chksum(sum, (u8_t *)&BUF->srcipaddr, 2 * sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
+
+  /* Sum TCP header and data. */
+  sum = chksum(sum, &uip_buf[UIP_IPH_LEN + UIP_LLH_LEN],
+	       upper_layer_len);
+
+  return (sum == 0) ? 0xffff : htons(sum);
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+u16_t
+uip_icmp6chksum(void)
+{
+  return upper_layer_chksum(UIP_PROTO_ICMP6);
+
+}
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+u16_t
+uip_tcpchksum(void)
+{
+  return upper_layer_chksum(UIP_PROTO_TCP);
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS
+u16_t
+uip_udpchksum(void)
+{
+  return upper_layer_chksum(UIP_PROTO_UDP);
+}
+#endif /* UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS */
+#endif /* UIP_ARCH_CHKSUM */
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+void
+uip_init(void)
+{
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_LISTENPORTS; ++c) {
+    uip_listenports[c] = 0;
+  }
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_CONNS; ++c) {
+    uip_conns[c].tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
+  }
+#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN
+  lastport = 1024;
+#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
+
+#if UIP_UDP
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_UDP_CONNS; ++c) {
+    uip_udp_conns[c].lport = 0;
+  }
+#endif /* UIP_UDP */
+
+
+  /* IPv4 initialization. */
+#if UIP_FIXEDADDR == 0
+  /*  uip_hostaddr[0] = uip_hostaddr[1] = 0;*/
+#endif /* UIP_FIXEDADDR */
+
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN
+struct uip_conn *
+uip_connect(uip_ipaddr_t *ripaddr, u16_t rport)
+{
+  register struct uip_conn *conn, *cconn;
+
+  /* Find an unused local port. */
+ again:
+  ++lastport;
+
+  if(lastport >= 32000) {
+    lastport = 4096;
+  }
+
+  /* Check if this port is already in use, and if so try to find
+     another one. */
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_CONNS; ++c) {
+    conn = &uip_conns[c];
+    if(conn->tcpstateflags != UIP_CLOSED &&
+       conn->lport == htons(lastport)) {
+      goto again;
+    }
+  }
+
+  conn = 0;
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_CONNS; ++c) {
+    cconn = &uip_conns[c];
+    if(cconn->tcpstateflags == UIP_CLOSED) {
+      conn = cconn;
+      break;
+    }
+    if(cconn->tcpstateflags == UIP_TIME_WAIT) {
+      if(conn == 0 ||
+	 cconn->timer > conn->timer) {
+	conn = cconn;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  if(conn == 0) {
+    return 0;
+  }
+
+  conn->tcpstateflags = UIP_SYN_SENT;
+
+  conn->snd_nxt[0] = iss[0];
+  conn->snd_nxt[1] = iss[1];
+  conn->snd_nxt[2] = iss[2];
+  conn->snd_nxt[3] = iss[3];
+
+  conn->initialmss = conn->mss = UIP_TCP_MSS;
+
+  conn->len = 1;   /* TCP length of the SYN is one. */
+  conn->nrtx = 0;
+  conn->timer = 1; /* Send the SYN next time around. */
+  conn->rto = UIP_RTO;
+  conn->sa = 0;
+  conn->sv = 16;   /* Initial value of the RTT variance. */
+  conn->lport = htons(lastport);
+  conn->rport = rport;
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&conn->ripaddr, ripaddr);
+
+  return conn;
+}
+#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if UIP_UDP
+struct uip_udp_conn *
+uip_udp_new(const uip_ipaddr_t *ripaddr, u16_t rport)
+{
+  register struct uip_udp_conn *conn;
+
+  /* Find an unused local port. */
+ again:
+  ++lastport;
+
+  if(lastport >= 32000) {
+    lastport = 4096;
+  }
+
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_UDP_CONNS; ++c) {
+    if(uip_udp_conns[c].lport == htons(lastport)) {
+      goto again;
+    }
+  }
+
+
+  conn = 0;
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_UDP_CONNS; ++c) {
+    if(uip_udp_conns[c].lport == 0) {
+      conn = &uip_udp_conns[c];
+      break;
+    }
+  }
+
+  if(conn == 0) {
+    return 0;
+  }
+
+  conn->lport = HTONS(lastport);
+  conn->rport = rport;
+  if(ripaddr == NULL) {
+    memset(&conn->ripaddr, 0, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
+  } else {
+    uip_ipaddr_copy(&conn->ripaddr, ripaddr);
+  }
+  conn->ttl = UIP_TTL;
+
+  return conn;
+}
+#endif /* UIP_UDP */
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+void
+uip_unlisten(u16_t port)
+{
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_LISTENPORTS; ++c) {
+    if(uip_listenports[c] == port) {
+      uip_listenports[c] = 0;
+      return;
+    }
+  }
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+void
+uip_listen(u16_t port)
+{
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_LISTENPORTS; ++c) {
+    if(uip_listenports[c] == 0) {
+      uip_listenports[c] = port;
+      return;
+    }
+  }
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* XXX: IP fragment reassembly: not well-tested. */
+
+#if UIP_REASSEMBLY && !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+#define UIP_REASS_BUFSIZE (UIP_BUFSIZE - UIP_LLH_LEN)
+static u8_t uip_reassbuf[UIP_REASS_BUFSIZE];
+static u8_t uip_reassbitmap[UIP_REASS_BUFSIZE / (8 * 8)];
+static const u8_t bitmap_bits[8] = {0xff, 0x7f, 0x3f, 0x1f,
+				    0x0f, 0x07, 0x03, 0x01};
+static u16_t uip_reasslen;
+static u8_t uip_reassflags;
+#define UIP_REASS_FLAG_LASTFRAG 0x01
+static u8_t uip_reasstmr;
+
+#define IP_MF   0x20
+
+static u8_t
+uip_reass(void)
+{
+  u16_t offset, len;
+  u16_t i;
+
+  /* If ip_reasstmr is zero, no packet is present in the buffer, so we
+     write the IP header of the fragment into the reassembly
+     buffer. The timer is updated with the maximum age. */
+  if(uip_reasstmr == 0) {
+    memcpy(uip_reassbuf, &BUF->vhl, UIP_IPH_LEN);
+    uip_reasstmr = UIP_REASS_MAXAGE;
+    uip_reassflags = 0;
+    /* Clear the bitmap. */
+    memset(uip_reassbitmap, 0, sizeof(uip_reassbitmap));
+  }
+
+  /* Check if the incoming fragment matches the one currently present
+     in the reasembly buffer. If so, we proceed with copying the
+     fragment into the buffer. */
+  if(BUF->srcipaddr[0] == FBUF->srcipaddr[0] &&
+     BUF->srcipaddr[1] == FBUF->srcipaddr[1] &&
+     BUF->destipaddr[0] == FBUF->destipaddr[0] &&
+     BUF->destipaddr[1] == FBUF->destipaddr[1] &&
+     BUF->ipid[0] == FBUF->ipid[0] &&
+     BUF->ipid[1] == FBUF->ipid[1]) {
+
+    len = (BUF->len[0] << 8) + BUF->len[1] - (BUF->vhl & 0x0f) * 4;
+    offset = (((BUF->ipoffset[0] & 0x3f) << 8) + BUF->ipoffset[1]) * 8;
+
+    /* If the offset or the offset + fragment length overflows the
+       reassembly buffer, we discard the entire packet. */
+    if(offset > UIP_REASS_BUFSIZE ||
+       offset + len > UIP_REASS_BUFSIZE) {
+      uip_reasstmr = 0;
+      goto nullreturn;
+    }
+
+    /* Copy the fragment into the reassembly buffer, at the right
+       offset. */
+    memcpy(&uip_reassbuf[UIP_IPH_LEN + offset],
+	   (char *)BUF + (int)((BUF->vhl & 0x0f) * 4),
+	   len);
+
+    /* Update the bitmap. */
+    if(offset / (8 * 8) == (offset + len) / (8 * 8)) {
+      /* If the two endpoints are in the same byte, we only update
+	 that byte. */
+
+      uip_reassbitmap[offset / (8 * 8)] |=
+	     bitmap_bits[(offset / 8 ) & 7] &
+	     ~bitmap_bits[((offset + len) / 8 ) & 7];
+    } else {
+      /* If the two endpoints are in different bytes, we update the
+	 bytes in the endpoints and fill the stuff in-between with
+	 0xff. */
+      uip_reassbitmap[offset / (8 * 8)] |=
+	bitmap_bits[(offset / 8 ) & 7];
+      for(i = 1 + offset / (8 * 8); i < (offset + len) / (8 * 8); ++i) {
+	uip_reassbitmap[i] = 0xff;
+      }
+      uip_reassbitmap[(offset + len) / (8 * 8)] |=
+	~bitmap_bits[((offset + len) / 8 ) & 7];
+    }
+
+    /* If this fragment has the More Fragments flag set to zero, we
+       know that this is the last fragment, so we can calculate the
+       size of the entire packet. We also set the
+       IP_REASS_FLAG_LASTFRAG flag to indicate that we have received
+       the final fragment. */
+
+    if((BUF->ipoffset[0] & IP_MF) == 0) {
+      uip_reassflags |= UIP_REASS_FLAG_LASTFRAG;
+      uip_reasslen = offset + len;
+    }
+
+    /* Finally, we check if we have a full packet in the buffer. We do
+       this by checking if we have the last fragment and if all bits
+       in the bitmap are set. */
+    if(uip_reassflags & UIP_REASS_FLAG_LASTFRAG) {
+      /* Check all bytes up to and including all but the last byte in
+	 the bitmap. */
+      for(i = 0; i < uip_reasslen / (8 * 8) - 1; ++i) {
+	if(uip_reassbitmap[i] != 0xff) {
+	  goto nullreturn;
+	}
+      }
+      /* Check the last byte in the bitmap. It should contain just the
+	 right amount of bits. */
+      if(uip_reassbitmap[uip_reasslen / (8 * 8)] !=
+	 (u8_t)~bitmap_bits[uip_reasslen / 8 & 7]) {
+	goto nullreturn;
+      }
+
+      /* If we have come this far, we have a full packet in the
+	 buffer, so we allocate a pbuf and copy the packet into it. We
+	 also reset the timer. */
+      uip_reasstmr = 0;
+      memcpy(BUF, FBUF, uip_reasslen);
+
+      /* Pretend to be a "normal" (i.e., not fragmented) IP packet
+	 from now on. */
+      BUF->ipoffset[0] = BUF->ipoffset[1] = 0;
+      BUF->len[0] = uip_reasslen >> 8;
+      BUF->len[1] = uip_reasslen & 0xff;
+      BUF->ipchksum = 0;
+      BUF->ipchksum = ~(uip_ipchksum());
+
+      return uip_reasslen;
+    }
+  }
+
+ nullreturn:
+  return 0;
+}
+#endif /* UIP_REASSEMBLY */
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+static void
+uip_add_rcv_nxt(u16_t n)
+{
+  uip_add32(uip_conn->rcv_nxt, n);
+  uip_conn->rcv_nxt[0] = uip_acc32[0];
+  uip_conn->rcv_nxt[1] = uip_acc32[1];
+  uip_conn->rcv_nxt[2] = uip_acc32[2];
+  uip_conn->rcv_nxt[3] = uip_acc32[3];
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+void
+uip_process(u8_t flag)
+{
+  register struct uip_conn *uip_connr = uip_conn;
+
+#if UIP_UDP
+  if(flag == UIP_UDP_SEND_CONN) {
+    goto udp_send;
+  }
+#endif /* UIP_UDP */
+
+  uip_sappdata = uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_IPTCPH_LEN + UIP_LLH_LEN];
+
+  /* Check if we were invoked because of a poll request for a
+     particular connection. */
+  if(flag == UIP_POLL_REQUEST) {
+    if((uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_TS_MASK) == UIP_ESTABLISHED &&
+       !uip_outstanding(uip_connr)) {
+	uip_len = uip_slen = 0;
+	uip_flags = UIP_POLL;
+	UIP_APPCALL();
+	goto appsend;
+    }
+    goto drop;
+
+    /* Check if we were invoked because of the periodic timer firing. */
+  } else if(flag == UIP_TIMER) {
+#if UIP_REASSEMBLY
+    if(uip_reasstmr != 0) {
+      --uip_reasstmr;
+    }
+#endif /* UIP_REASSEMBLY */
+    /* Increase the initial sequence number. */
+    if(++iss[3] == 0) {
+      if(++iss[2] == 0) {
+	if(++iss[1] == 0) {
+	  ++iss[0];
+	}
+      }
+    }
+
+    /* Reset the length variables. */
+    uip_len = 0;
+    uip_slen = 0;
+
+    /* Check if the connection is in a state in which we simply wait
+       for the connection to time out. If so, we increase the
+       connection's timer and remove the connection if it times
+       out. */
+    if(uip_connr->tcpstateflags == UIP_TIME_WAIT ||
+       uip_connr->tcpstateflags == UIP_FIN_WAIT_2) {
+      ++(uip_connr->timer);
+      if(uip_connr->timer == UIP_TIME_WAIT_TIMEOUT) {
+	uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
+      }
+    } else if(uip_connr->tcpstateflags != UIP_CLOSED) {
+      /* If the connection has outstanding data, we increase the
+	 connection's timer and see if it has reached the RTO value
+	 in which case we retransmit. */
+      if(uip_outstanding(uip_connr)) {
+	if(uip_connr->timer-- == 0) {
+	  if(uip_connr->nrtx == UIP_MAXRTX ||
+	     ((uip_connr->tcpstateflags == UIP_SYN_SENT ||
+	       uip_connr->tcpstateflags == UIP_SYN_RCVD) &&
+	      uip_connr->nrtx == UIP_MAXSYNRTX)) {
+	    uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
+
+	    /* We call UIP_APPCALL() with uip_flags set to
+	       UIP_TIMEDOUT to inform the application that the
+	       connection has timed out. */
+	    uip_flags = UIP_TIMEDOUT;
+	    UIP_APPCALL();
+
+	    /* We also send a reset packet to the remote host. */
+	    BUF->flags = TCP_RST | TCP_ACK;
+	    goto tcp_send_nodata;
+	  }
+
+	  /* Exponential back-off. */
+	  uip_connr->timer = UIP_RTO << (uip_connr->nrtx > 4?
+					 4:
+					 uip_connr->nrtx);
+	  ++(uip_connr->nrtx);
+
+	  /* Ok, so we need to retransmit. We do this differently
+	     depending on which state we are in. In ESTABLISHED, we
+	     call upon the application so that it may prepare the
+	     data for the retransmit. In SYN_RCVD, we resend the
+	     SYNACK that we sent earlier and in LAST_ACK we have to
+	     retransmit our FINACK. */
+	  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.rexmit);
+	  switch(uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_TS_MASK) {
+	  case UIP_SYN_RCVD:
+	    /* In the SYN_RCVD state, we should retransmit our
+               SYNACK. */
+	    goto tcp_send_synack;
+
+#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN
+	  case UIP_SYN_SENT:
+	    /* In the SYN_SENT state, we retransmit out SYN. */
+	    BUF->flags = 0;
+	    goto tcp_send_syn;
+#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
+
+	  case UIP_ESTABLISHED:
+	    /* In the ESTABLISHED state, we call upon the application
+               to do the actual retransmit after which we jump into
+               the code for sending out the packet (the apprexmit
+               label). */
+	    uip_flags = UIP_REXMIT;
+	    UIP_APPCALL();
+	    goto apprexmit;
+
+	  case UIP_FIN_WAIT_1:
+	  case UIP_CLOSING:
+	  case UIP_LAST_ACK:
+	    /* In all these states we should retransmit a FINACK. */
+	    goto tcp_send_finack;
+
+	  }
+	}
+      } else if((uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_TS_MASK) == UIP_ESTABLISHED) {
+	/* If there was no need for a retransmission, we poll the
+           application for new data. */
+	uip_len = uip_slen = 0;
+	uip_flags = UIP_POLL;
+	UIP_APPCALL();
+	goto appsend;
+      }
+    }
+    goto drop;
+  }
+#if UIP_UDP
+  if(flag == UIP_UDP_TIMER) {
+    if(uip_udp_conn->lport != 0) {
+      uip_conn = NULL;
+      uip_sappdata = uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPUDPH_LEN];
+      uip_len = uip_slen = 0;
+      uip_flags = UIP_POLL;
+      UIP_UDP_APPCALL();
+      goto udp_send;
+    } else {
+      goto drop;
+    }
+  }
+#endif
+
+  /* This is where the input processing starts. */
+  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.recv);
+
+  /* Start of IP input header processing code. */
+
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  /* Check validity of the IP header. */
+  if((BUF->vtc & 0xf0) != 0x60)  { /* IP version and header length. */
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.vhlerr);
+    UIP_LOG("ipv6: invalid version.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  /* Check validity of the IP header. */
+  if(BUF->vhl != 0x45)  { /* IP version and header length. */
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.vhlerr);
+    UIP_LOG("ip: invalid version or header length.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+  /* Check the size of the packet. If the size reported to us in
+     uip_len is smaller the size reported in the IP header, we assume
+     that the packet has been corrupted in transit. If the size of
+     uip_len is larger than the size reported in the IP packet header,
+     the packet has been padded and we set uip_len to the correct
+     value.. */
+
+  if((BUF->len[0] << 8) + BUF->len[1] <= uip_len) {
+    uip_len = (BUF->len[0] << 8) + BUF->len[1];
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+    uip_len += 40; /* The length reported in the IPv6 header is the
+		      length of the payload that follows the
+		      header. However, uIP uses the uip_len variable
+		      for holding the size of the entire packet,
+		      including the IP header. For IPv4 this is not a
+		      problem as the length field in the IPv4 header
+		      contains the length of the entire packet. But
+		      for IPv6 we need to add the size of the IPv6
+		      header (40 bytes). */
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  } else {
+    UIP_LOG("ip: packet shorter than reported in IP header.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  /* Check the fragment flag. */
+  if((BUF->ipoffset[0] & 0x3f) != 0 ||
+     BUF->ipoffset[1] != 0) {
+#if UIP_REASSEMBLY
+    uip_len = uip_reass();
+    if(uip_len == 0) {
+      goto drop;
+    }
+#else /* UIP_REASSEMBLY */
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.fragerr);
+    UIP_LOG("ip: fragment dropped.");
+    goto drop;
+#endif /* UIP_REASSEMBLY */
+  }
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+  if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&uip_hostaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr)) {
+    /* If we are configured to use ping IP address configuration and
+       hasn't been assigned an IP address yet, we accept all ICMP
+       packets. */
+#if UIP_PINGADDRCONF && !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+    if(BUF->proto == UIP_PROTO_ICMP) {
+      UIP_LOG("ip: possible ping config packet received.");
+      goto icmp_input;
+    } else {
+      UIP_LOG("ip: packet dropped since no address assigned.");
+      goto drop;
+    }
+#endif /* UIP_PINGADDRCONF */
+
+  } else {
+    /* If IP broadcast support is configured, we check for a broadcast
+       UDP packet, which may be destined to us. */
+#if UIP_BROADCAST
+    DEBUG_PRINTF("UDP IP checksum 0x%04x\n", uip_ipchksum());
+    if(BUF->proto == UIP_PROTO_UDP &&
+       uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->destipaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr))
+	{
+		if (uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr))
+		  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr);
+
+		goto udp_input;
+    }
+#endif /* UIP_BROADCAST */
+
+    /* Check if the packet is destined for our IP address. */
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+    if(!uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->destipaddr, &uip_hostaddr)) {
+      UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
+      goto drop;
+    }
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+    /* For IPv6, packet reception is a little trickier as we need to
+       make sure that we listen to certain multicast addresses (all
+       hosts multicast address, and the solicited-node multicast
+       address) as well. However, we will cheat here and accept all
+       multicast packets that are sent to the ff02::/16 addresses. */
+    if(!uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->destipaddr, &uip_hostaddr) &&
+       BUF->destipaddr.u16[0] != HTONS(0xff02)) {
+      UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
+      goto drop;
+    }
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  }
+
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  if(uip_ipchksum() != 0xffff) { /* Compute and check the IP header
+				    checksum. */
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.chkerr);
+    UIP_LOG("ip: bad checksum.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+  if(BUF->proto == UIP_PROTO_TCP) { /* Check for TCP packet. If so,
+				       proceed with TCP input
+				       processing. */
+    goto tcp_input;
+  }
+
+#if UIP_UDP
+  if(BUF->proto == UIP_PROTO_UDP) {
+    goto udp_input;
+  }
+#endif /* UIP_UDP */
+
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  /* ICMPv4 processing code follows. */
+  if(BUF->proto != UIP_PROTO_ICMP) { /* We only allow ICMP packets from
+					here. */
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.protoerr);
+    UIP_LOG("ip: neither tcp nor icmp.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+
+#if UIP_PINGADDRCONF
+ icmp_input:
+#endif /* UIP_PINGADDRCONF */
+  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.recv);
+
+  /* ICMP echo (i.e., ping) processing. This is simple, we only change
+     the ICMP type from ECHO to ECHO_REPLY and adjust the ICMP
+     checksum before we return the packet. */
+  if(ICMPBUF->type != ICMP_ECHO) {
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.drop);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.typeerr);
+    UIP_LOG("icmp: not icmp echo.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+
+  /* If we are configured to use ping IP address assignment, we use
+     the destination IP address of this ping packet and assign it to
+     yourself. */
+#if UIP_PINGADDRCONF
+  if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&uip_hostaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr)) {
+    uip_hostaddr = BUF->destipaddr;
+  }
+#endif /* UIP_PINGADDRCONF */
+
+  ICMPBUF->type = ICMP_ECHO_REPLY;
+
+  if(ICMPBUF->icmpchksum >= HTONS(0xffff - (ICMP_ECHO << 8))) {
+    ICMPBUF->icmpchksum += HTONS(ICMP_ECHO << 8) + 1;
+  } else {
+    ICMPBUF->icmpchksum += HTONS(ICMP_ECHO << 8);
+  }
+
+  /* Swap IP addresses. */
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &BUF->srcipaddr);
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
+
+  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.sent);
+  BUF->ttl = UIP_TTL;
+  goto ip_send_nolen;
+
+  /* End of IPv4 input header processing code. */
+#else /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+  /* This is IPv6 ICMPv6 processing code. */
+  DEBUG_PRINTF("icmp6_input: length %d\n", uip_len);
+
+  if(BUF->proto != UIP_PROTO_ICMP6) { /* We only allow ICMPv6 packets from
+					 here. */
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.protoerr);
+    UIP_LOG("ip: neither tcp nor icmp6.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+
+  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.recv);
+
+  /* If we get a neighbor solicitation for our address we should send
+     a neighbor advertisement message back. */
+  if(ICMPBUF->type == ICMP6_NEIGHBOR_SOLICITATION) {
+    if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&ICMPBUF->icmp6data, &uip_hostaddr)) {
+
+      if(ICMPBUF->options[0] == ICMP6_OPTION_SOURCE_LINK_ADDRESS) {
+	/* Save the sender's address in our neighbor list. */
+	uip_neighbor_add(&ICMPBUF->srcipaddr, &(ICMPBUF->options[2]));
+      }
+
+      /* We should now send a neighbor advertisement back to where the
+	 neighbor solicitation came from. */
+      ICMPBUF->type = ICMP6_NEIGHBOR_ADVERTISEMENT;
+      ICMPBUF->flags = ICMP6_FLAG_S; /* Solicited flag. */
+
+      ICMPBUF->reserved1 = ICMPBUF->reserved2 = ICMPBUF->reserved3 = 0;
+
+      uip_ipaddr_copy(&ICMPBUF->destipaddr, &ICMPBUF->srcipaddr);
+      uip_ipaddr_copy(&ICMPBUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
+      ICMPBUF->options[0] = ICMP6_OPTION_TARGET_LINK_ADDRESS;
+      ICMPBUF->options[1] = 1;  /* Options length, 1 = 8 bytes. */
+      memcpy(&(ICMPBUF->options[2]), &uip_ethaddr, sizeof(uip_ethaddr));
+      ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = 0;
+      ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = ~uip_icmp6chksum();
+
+      goto send;
+
+    }
+    goto drop;
+  } else if(ICMPBUF->type == ICMP6_ECHO) {
+    /* ICMP echo (i.e., ping) processing. This is simple, we only
+       change the ICMP type from ECHO to ECHO_REPLY and update the
+       ICMP checksum before we return the packet. */
+
+    ICMPBUF->type = ICMP6_ECHO_REPLY;
+
+    uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &BUF->srcipaddr);
+    uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
+    ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = 0;
+    ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = ~uip_icmp6chksum();
+
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.sent);
+    goto send;
+  } else {
+    DEBUG_PRINTF("Unknown icmp6 message type %d\n", ICMPBUF->type);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.drop);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.typeerr);
+    UIP_LOG("icmp: unknown ICMP message.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+
+  /* End of IPv6 ICMP processing. */
+
+#endif /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+#if UIP_UDP
+  /* UDP input processing. */
+ udp_input:
+  /* UDP processing is really just a hack. We don't do anything to the
+     UDP/IP headers, but let the UDP application do all the hard
+     work. If the application sets uip_slen, it has a packet to
+     send. */
+#if UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS
+  uip_len = uip_len - UIP_IPUDPH_LEN;
+  uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPUDPH_LEN];
+  if(UDPBUF->udpchksum != 0 && uip_udpchksum() != 0xffff) {
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.udp.drop);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.udp.chkerr);
+    UIP_LOG("udp: bad checksum.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+#else /* UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS */
+  uip_len = uip_len - UIP_IPUDPH_LEN;
+#endif /* UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS */
+
+  /* Demultiplex this UDP packet between the UDP "connections". */
+  for(uip_udp_conn = &uip_udp_conns[0];
+      uip_udp_conn < &uip_udp_conns[UIP_UDP_CONNS];
+      ++uip_udp_conn) {
+    /* If the local UDP port is non-zero, the connection is considered
+       to be used. If so, the local port number is checked against the
+       destination port number in the received packet. If the two port
+       numbers match, the remote port number is checked if the
+       connection is bound to a remote port. Finally, if the
+       connection is bound to a remote IP address, the source IP
+       address of the packet is checked. */
+    if(uip_udp_conn->lport != 0 &&
+       UDPBUF->destport == uip_udp_conn->lport &&
+       (uip_udp_conn->rport == 0 ||
+        UDPBUF->srcport == uip_udp_conn->rport) &&
+       (uip_ipaddr_cmp(&uip_udp_conn->ripaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr) ||
+	uip_ipaddr_cmp(&uip_udp_conn->ripaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr) ||
+	uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_udp_conn->ripaddr))) {
+      goto udp_found;
+    }
+  }
+  UIP_LOG("udp: no matching connection found");
+#if UIP_CONF_ICMP_DEST_UNREACH && !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  /* Copy fields from packet header into payload of this ICMP packet. */
+  memcpy(&(ICMPBUF->payload[0]), ICMPBUF, UIP_IPH_LEN + 8);
+
+  /* Set the ICMP type and code. */
+  ICMPBUF->type = ICMP_DEST_UNREACHABLE;
+  ICMPBUF->icode = ICMP_PORT_UNREACHABLE;
+
+  /* Calculate the ICMP checksum. */
+  ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = 0;
+  ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = ~uip_chksum((u16_t *)&(ICMPBUF->type), 36);
+
+  /* Set the IP destination address to be the source address of the
+     original packet. */
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &BUF->srcipaddr);
+
+  /* Set our IP address as the source address. */
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
+
+  /* The size of the ICMP destination unreachable packet is 36 + the
+     size of the IP header (20) = 56. */
+  uip_len = 36 + UIP_IPH_LEN;
+  ICMPBUF->len[0] = 0;
+  ICMPBUF->len[1] = (u8_t)uip_len;
+  ICMPBUF->ttl = UIP_TTL;
+  ICMPBUF->proto = UIP_PROTO_ICMP;
+
+  goto ip_send_nolen;
+#else /* UIP_CONF_ICMP_DEST_UNREACH */
+  goto drop;
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_ICMP_DEST_UNREACH */
+
+ udp_found:
+  uip_conn = NULL;
+  uip_flags = UIP_NEWDATA;
+  uip_sappdata = uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPUDPH_LEN];
+  uip_slen = 0;
+  UIP_UDP_APPCALL();
+
+ udp_send:
+  if(uip_slen == 0) {
+    goto drop;
+  }
+  uip_len = uip_slen + UIP_IPUDPH_LEN;
+
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  /* For IPv6, the IP length field does not include the IPv6 IP header
+     length. */
+  BUF->len[0] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) >> 8);
+  BUF->len[1] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) & 0xff);
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  BUF->len[0] = (uip_len >> 8);
+  BUF->len[1] = (uip_len & 0xff);
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+  BUF->ttl = uip_udp_conn->ttl;
+  BUF->proto = UIP_PROTO_UDP;
+
+  UDPBUF->udplen = HTONS(uip_slen + UIP_UDPH_LEN);
+  UDPBUF->udpchksum = 0;
+
+  BUF->srcport  = uip_udp_conn->lport;
+  BUF->destport = uip_udp_conn->rport;
+
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &uip_udp_conn->ripaddr);
+
+  uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPTCPH_LEN];
+
+#if UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS
+  /* Calculate UDP checksum. */
+  UDPBUF->udpchksum = ~(uip_udpchksum());
+  if(UDPBUF->udpchksum == 0) {
+    UDPBUF->udpchksum = 0xffff;
+  }
+#endif /* UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS */
+
+  goto ip_send_nolen;
+#endif /* UIP_UDP */
+
+  /* TCP input processing. */
+ tcp_input:
+  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.recv);
+
+  /* Start of TCP input header processing code. */
+
+  if(uip_tcpchksum() != 0xffff) {   /* Compute and check the TCP
+				       checksum. */
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.drop);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.chkerr);
+    UIP_LOG("tcp: bad checksum.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+
+  /* Demultiplex this segment. */
+  /* First check any active connections. */
+  for(uip_connr = &uip_conns[0]; uip_connr <= &uip_conns[UIP_CONNS - 1];
+      ++uip_connr) {
+    if(uip_connr->tcpstateflags != UIP_CLOSED &&
+       BUF->destport == uip_connr->lport &&
+       BUF->srcport == uip_connr->rport &&
+       uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_connr->ripaddr)) {
+      goto found;
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* If we didn't find and active connection that expected the packet,
+     either this packet is an old duplicate, or this is a SYN packet
+     destined for a connection in LISTEN. If the SYN flag isn't set,
+     it is an old packet and we send a RST. */
+  if((BUF->flags & TCP_CTL) != TCP_SYN) {
+    goto reset;
+  }
+
+  tmp16 = BUF->destport;
+  /* Next, check listening connections. */
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_LISTENPORTS; ++c) {
+    if(tmp16 == uip_listenports[c]) {
+      goto found_listen;
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* No matching connection found, so we send a RST packet. */
+  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.synrst);
+
+ reset:
+  /* We do not send resets in response to resets. */
+  if(BUF->flags & TCP_RST) {
+    goto drop;
+  }
+
+  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.rst);
+
+  BUF->flags = TCP_RST | TCP_ACK;
+  uip_len = UIP_IPTCPH_LEN;
+  BUF->tcpoffset = 5 << 4;
+
+  /* Flip the seqno and ackno fields in the TCP header. */
+  c = BUF->seqno[3];
+  BUF->seqno[3] = BUF->ackno[3];
+  BUF->ackno[3] = c;
+
+  c = BUF->seqno[2];
+  BUF->seqno[2] = BUF->ackno[2];
+  BUF->ackno[2] = c;
+
+  c = BUF->seqno[1];
+  BUF->seqno[1] = BUF->ackno[1];
+  BUF->ackno[1] = c;
+
+  c = BUF->seqno[0];
+  BUF->seqno[0] = BUF->ackno[0];
+  BUF->ackno[0] = c;
+
+  /* We also have to increase the sequence number we are
+     acknowledging. If the least significant byte overflowed, we need
+     to propagate the carry to the other bytes as well. */
+  if(++BUF->ackno[3] == 0) {
+    if(++BUF->ackno[2] == 0) {
+      if(++BUF->ackno[1] == 0) {
+	++BUF->ackno[0];
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* Swap port numbers. */
+  tmp16 = BUF->srcport;
+  BUF->srcport = BUF->destport;
+  BUF->destport = tmp16;
+
+  /* Swap IP addresses. */
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &BUF->srcipaddr);
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
+
+  /* And send out the RST packet! */
+  goto tcp_send_noconn;
+
+  /* This label will be jumped to if we matched the incoming packet
+     with a connection in LISTEN. In that case, we should create a new
+     connection and send a SYNACK in return. */
+ found_listen:
+  /* First we check if there are any connections available. Unused
+     connections are kept in the same table as used connections, but
+     unused ones have the tcpstate set to CLOSED. Also, connections in
+     TIME_WAIT are kept track of and we'll use the oldest one if no
+     CLOSED connections are found. Thanks to Eddie C. Dost for a very
+     nice algorithm for the TIME_WAIT search. */
+  uip_connr = 0;
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_CONNS; ++c) {
+    if(uip_conns[c].tcpstateflags == UIP_CLOSED) {
+      uip_connr = &uip_conns[c];
+      break;
+    }
+    if(uip_conns[c].tcpstateflags == UIP_TIME_WAIT) {
+      if(uip_connr == 0 ||
+	 uip_conns[c].timer > uip_connr->timer) {
+	uip_connr = &uip_conns[c];
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  if(uip_connr == 0) {
+    /* All connections are used already, we drop packet and hope that
+       the remote end will retransmit the packet at a time when we
+       have more spare connections. */
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.syndrop);
+    UIP_LOG("tcp: found no unused connections.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+  uip_conn = uip_connr;
+
+  /* Fill in the necessary fields for the new connection. */
+  uip_connr->rto = uip_connr->timer = UIP_RTO;
+  uip_connr->sa = 0;
+  uip_connr->sv = 4;
+  uip_connr->nrtx = 0;
+  uip_connr->lport = BUF->destport;
+  uip_connr->rport = BUF->srcport;
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&uip_connr->ripaddr, &BUF->srcipaddr);
+  uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_SYN_RCVD;
+
+  uip_connr->snd_nxt[0] = iss[0];
+  uip_connr->snd_nxt[1] = iss[1];
+  uip_connr->snd_nxt[2] = iss[2];
+  uip_connr->snd_nxt[3] = iss[3];
+  uip_connr->len = 1;
+
+  /* rcv_nxt should be the seqno from the incoming packet + 1. */
+  uip_connr->rcv_nxt[3] = BUF->seqno[3];
+  uip_connr->rcv_nxt[2] = BUF->seqno[2];
+  uip_connr->rcv_nxt[1] = BUF->seqno[1];
+  uip_connr->rcv_nxt[0] = BUF->seqno[0];
+  uip_add_rcv_nxt(1);
+
+  /* Parse the TCP MSS option, if present. */
+  if((BUF->tcpoffset & 0xf0) > 0x50) {
+    for(c = 0; c < ((BUF->tcpoffset >> 4) - 5) << 2 ;) {
+      opt = uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + c];
+      if(opt == TCP_OPT_END) {
+	/* End of options. */
+	break;
+      } else if(opt == TCP_OPT_NOOP) {
+	++c;
+	/* NOP option. */
+      } else if(opt == TCP_OPT_MSS &&
+		uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c] == TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN) {
+	/* An MSS option with the right option length. */
+	tmp16 = ((u16_t)uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 2 + c] << 8) |
+	  (u16_t)uip_buf[UIP_IPTCPH_LEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 3 + c];
+	uip_connr->initialmss = uip_connr->mss =
+	  tmp16 > UIP_TCP_MSS? UIP_TCP_MSS: tmp16;
+
+	/* And we are done processing options. */
+	break;
+      } else {
+	/* All other options have a length field, so that we easily
+	   can skip past them. */
+	if(uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c] == 0) {
+	  /* If the length field is zero, the options are malformed
+	     and we don't process them further. */
+	  break;
+	}
+	c += uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c];
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* Our response will be a SYNACK. */
+#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN
+ tcp_send_synack:
+  BUF->flags = TCP_ACK;
+
+ tcp_send_syn:
+  BUF->flags |= TCP_SYN;
+#else /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
+ tcp_send_synack:
+  BUF->flags = TCP_SYN | TCP_ACK;
+#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
+
+  /* We send out the TCP Maximum Segment Size option with our
+     SYNACK. */
+  BUF->optdata[0] = TCP_OPT_MSS;
+  BUF->optdata[1] = TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN;
+  BUF->optdata[2] = (UIP_TCP_MSS) / 256;
+  BUF->optdata[3] = (UIP_TCP_MSS) & 255;
+  uip_len = UIP_IPTCPH_LEN + TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN;
+  BUF->tcpoffset = ((UIP_TCPH_LEN + TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN) / 4) << 4;
+  goto tcp_send;
+
+  /* This label will be jumped to if we found an active connection. */
+ found:
+  uip_conn = uip_connr;
+  uip_flags = 0;
+  /* We do a very naive form of TCP reset processing; we just accept
+     any RST and kill our connection. We should in fact check if the
+     sequence number of this reset is within our advertised window
+     before we accept the reset. */
+  if(BUF->flags & TCP_RST) {
+    uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
+    UIP_LOG("tcp: got reset, aborting connection.");
+    uip_flags = UIP_ABORT;
+    UIP_APPCALL();
+    goto drop;
+  }
+  /* Calculate the length of the data, if the application has sent
+     any data to us. */
+  c = (BUF->tcpoffset >> 4) << 2;
+  /* uip_len will contain the length of the actual TCP data. This is
+     calculated by subtracing the length of the TCP header (in
+     c) and the length of the IP header (20 bytes). */
+  uip_len = uip_len - c - UIP_IPH_LEN;
+
+  /* First, check if the sequence number of the incoming packet is
+     what we're expecting next. If not, we send out an ACK with the
+     correct numbers in. */
+  if(!(((uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_TS_MASK) == UIP_SYN_SENT) &&
+       ((BUF->flags & TCP_CTL) == (TCP_SYN | TCP_ACK)))) {
+    if((uip_len > 0 || ((BUF->flags & (TCP_SYN | TCP_FIN)) != 0)) &&
+       (BUF->seqno[0] != uip_connr->rcv_nxt[0] ||
+	BUF->seqno[1] != uip_connr->rcv_nxt[1] ||
+	BUF->seqno[2] != uip_connr->rcv_nxt[2] ||
+	BUF->seqno[3] != uip_connr->rcv_nxt[3])) {
+      goto tcp_send_ack;
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* Next, check if the incoming segment acknowledges any outstanding
+     data. If so, we update the sequence number, reset the length of
+     the outstanding data, calculate RTT estimations, and reset the
+     retransmission timer. */
+  if((BUF->flags & TCP_ACK) && uip_outstanding(uip_connr)) {
+    uip_add32(uip_connr->snd_nxt, uip_connr->len);
+
+    if(BUF->ackno[0] == uip_acc32[0] &&
+       BUF->ackno[1] == uip_acc32[1] &&
+       BUF->ackno[2] == uip_acc32[2] &&
+       BUF->ackno[3] == uip_acc32[3]) {
+      /* Update sequence number. */
+      uip_connr->snd_nxt[0] = uip_acc32[0];
+      uip_connr->snd_nxt[1] = uip_acc32[1];
+      uip_connr->snd_nxt[2] = uip_acc32[2];
+      uip_connr->snd_nxt[3] = uip_acc32[3];
+
+      /* Do RTT estimation, unless we have done retransmissions. */
+      if(uip_connr->nrtx == 0) {
+	signed char m;
+	m = uip_connr->rto - uip_connr->timer;
+	/* This is taken directly from VJs original code in his paper */
+	m = m - (uip_connr->sa >> 3);
+	uip_connr->sa += m;
+	if(m < 0) {
+	  m = -m;
+	}
+	m = m - (uip_connr->sv >> 2);
+	uip_connr->sv += m;
+	uip_connr->rto = (uip_connr->sa >> 3) + uip_connr->sv;
+
+      }
+      /* Set the acknowledged flag. */
+      uip_flags = UIP_ACKDATA;
+      /* Reset the retransmission timer. */
+      uip_connr->timer = uip_connr->rto;
+
+      /* Reset length of outstanding data. */
+      uip_connr->len = 0;
+    }
+
+  }
+
+  /* Do different things depending on in what state the connection is. */
+  switch(uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_TS_MASK) {
+    /* CLOSED and LISTEN are not handled here. CLOSE_WAIT is not
+	implemented, since we force the application to close when the
+	peer sends a FIN (hence the application goes directly from
+	ESTABLISHED to LAST_ACK). */
+  case UIP_SYN_RCVD:
+    /* In SYN_RCVD we have sent out a SYNACK in response to a SYN, and
+       we are waiting for an ACK that acknowledges the data we sent
+       out the last time. Therefore, we want to have the UIP_ACKDATA
+       flag set. If so, we enter the ESTABLISHED state. */
+    if(uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) {
+      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_ESTABLISHED;
+      uip_flags = UIP_CONNECTED;
+      uip_connr->len = 0;
+      if(uip_len > 0) {
+        uip_flags |= UIP_NEWDATA;
+        uip_add_rcv_nxt(uip_len);
+      }
+      uip_slen = 0;
+      UIP_APPCALL();
+      goto appsend;
+    }
+    goto drop;
+#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN
+  case UIP_SYN_SENT:
+    /* In SYN_SENT, we wait for a SYNACK that is sent in response to
+       our SYN. The rcv_nxt is set to sequence number in the SYNACK
+       plus one, and we send an ACK. We move into the ESTABLISHED
+       state. */
+    if((uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) &&
+       (BUF->flags & TCP_CTL) == (TCP_SYN | TCP_ACK)) {
+
+      /* Parse the TCP MSS option, if present. */
+      if((BUF->tcpoffset & 0xf0) > 0x50) {
+	for(c = 0; c < ((BUF->tcpoffset >> 4) - 5) << 2 ;) {
+	  opt = uip_buf[UIP_IPTCPH_LEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + c];
+	  if(opt == TCP_OPT_END) {
+	    /* End of options. */
+	    break;
+	  } else if(opt == TCP_OPT_NOOP) {
+	    ++c;
+	    /* NOP option. */
+	  } else if(opt == TCP_OPT_MSS &&
+		    uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c] == TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN) {
+	    /* An MSS option with the right option length. */
+	    tmp16 = (uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 2 + c] << 8) |
+	      uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 3 + c];
+	    uip_connr->initialmss =
+	      uip_connr->mss = tmp16 > UIP_TCP_MSS? UIP_TCP_MSS: tmp16;
+
+	    /* And we are done processing options. */
+	    break;
+	  } else {
+	    /* All other options have a length field, so that we easily
+	       can skip past them. */
+	    if(uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c] == 0) {
+	      /* If the length field is zero, the options are malformed
+		 and we don't process them further. */
+	      break;
+	    }
+	    c += uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c];
+	  }
+	}
+      }
+      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_ESTABLISHED;
+      uip_connr->rcv_nxt[0] = BUF->seqno[0];
+      uip_connr->rcv_nxt[1] = BUF->seqno[1];
+      uip_connr->rcv_nxt[2] = BUF->seqno[2];
+      uip_connr->rcv_nxt[3] = BUF->seqno[3];
+      uip_add_rcv_nxt(1);
+      uip_flags = UIP_CONNECTED | UIP_NEWDATA;
+      uip_connr->len = 0;
+      uip_len = 0;
+      uip_slen = 0;
+      UIP_APPCALL();
+      goto appsend;
+    }
+    /* Inform the application that the connection failed */
+    uip_flags = UIP_ABORT;
+    UIP_APPCALL();
+    /* The connection is closed after we send the RST */
+    uip_conn->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
+    goto reset;
+#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
+
+  case UIP_ESTABLISHED:
+    /* In the ESTABLISHED state, we call upon the application to feed
+    data into the uip_buf. If the UIP_ACKDATA flag is set, the
+    application should put new data into the buffer, otherwise we are
+    retransmitting an old segment, and the application should put that
+    data into the buffer.
+
+    If the incoming packet is a FIN, we should close the connection on
+    this side as well, and we send out a FIN and enter the LAST_ACK
+    state. We require that there is no outstanding data; otherwise the
+    sequence numbers will be screwed up. */
+
+    if(BUF->flags & TCP_FIN && !(uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_STOPPED)) {
+      if(uip_outstanding(uip_connr)) {
+	goto drop;
+      }
+      uip_add_rcv_nxt(1 + uip_len);
+      uip_flags |= UIP_CLOSE;
+      if(uip_len > 0) {
+	uip_flags |= UIP_NEWDATA;
+      }
+      UIP_APPCALL();
+      uip_connr->len = 1;
+      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_LAST_ACK;
+      uip_connr->nrtx = 0;
+    tcp_send_finack:
+      BUF->flags = TCP_FIN | TCP_ACK;
+      goto tcp_send_nodata;
+    }
+
+    /* Check the URG flag. If this is set, the segment carries urgent
+       data that we must pass to the application. */
+    if((BUF->flags & TCP_URG) != 0) {
+#if UIP_URGDATA > 0
+      uip_urglen = (BUF->urgp[0] << 8) | BUF->urgp[1];
+      if(uip_urglen > uip_len) {
+	/* There is more urgent data in the next segment to come. */
+	uip_urglen = uip_len;
+      }
+      uip_add_rcv_nxt(uip_urglen);
+      uip_len -= uip_urglen;
+      uip_urgdata = uip_appdata;
+      uip_appdata += uip_urglen;
+    } else {
+      uip_urglen = 0;
+#else /* UIP_URGDATA > 0 */
+      uip_appdata = ((char *)uip_appdata) + ((BUF->urgp[0] << 8) | BUF->urgp[1]);
+      uip_len -= (BUF->urgp[0] << 8) | BUF->urgp[1];
+#endif /* UIP_URGDATA > 0 */
+    }
+
+    /* If uip_len > 0 we have TCP data in the packet, and we flag this
+       by setting the UIP_NEWDATA flag and update the sequence number
+       we acknowledge. If the application has stopped the dataflow
+       using uip_stop(), we must not accept any data packets from the
+       remote host. */
+    if(uip_len > 0 && !(uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_STOPPED)) {
+      uip_flags |= UIP_NEWDATA;
+      uip_add_rcv_nxt(uip_len);
+    }
+
+    /* Check if the available buffer space advertised by the other end
+       is smaller than the initial MSS for this connection. If so, we
+       set the current MSS to the window size to ensure that the
+       application does not send more data than the other end can
+       handle.
+
+       If the remote host advertises a zero window, we set the MSS to
+       the initial MSS so that the application will send an entire MSS
+       of data. This data will not be acknowledged by the receiver,
+       and the application will retransmit it. This is called the
+       "persistent timer" and uses the retransmission mechanism.
+    */
+    tmp16 = ((u16_t)BUF->wnd[0] << 8) + (u16_t)BUF->wnd[1];
+    if(tmp16 > uip_connr->initialmss ||
+       tmp16 == 0) {
+      tmp16 = uip_connr->initialmss;
+    }
+    uip_connr->mss = tmp16;
+
+    /* If this packet constitutes an ACK for outstanding data (flagged
+       by the UIP_ACKDATA flag, we should call the application since it
+       might want to send more data. If the incoming packet had data
+       from the peer (as flagged by the UIP_NEWDATA flag), the
+       application must also be notified.
+
+       When the application is called, the global variable uip_len
+       contains the length of the incoming data. The application can
+       access the incoming data through the global pointer
+       uip_appdata, which usually points UIP_IPTCPH_LEN + UIP_LLH_LEN
+       bytes into the uip_buf array.
+
+       If the application wishes to send any data, this data should be
+       put into the uip_appdata and the length of the data should be
+       put into uip_len. If the application don't have any data to
+       send, uip_len must be set to 0. */
+    if(uip_flags & (UIP_NEWDATA | UIP_ACKDATA)) {
+      uip_slen = 0;
+      UIP_APPCALL();
+
+    appsend:
+
+      if(uip_flags & UIP_ABORT) {
+	uip_slen = 0;
+	uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
+	BUF->flags = TCP_RST | TCP_ACK;
+	goto tcp_send_nodata;
+      }
+
+      if(uip_flags & UIP_CLOSE) {
+	uip_slen = 0;
+	uip_connr->len = 1;
+	uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_FIN_WAIT_1;
+	uip_connr->nrtx = 0;
+	BUF->flags = TCP_FIN | TCP_ACK;
+	goto tcp_send_nodata;
+      }
+
+      /* If uip_slen > 0, the application has data to be sent. */
+      if(uip_slen > 0) {
+
+	/* If the connection has acknowledged data, the contents of
+	   the ->len variable should be discarded. */
+	if((uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) != 0) {
+	  uip_connr->len = 0;
+	}
+
+	/* If the ->len variable is non-zero the connection has
+	   already data in transit and cannot send anymore right
+	   now. */
+	if(uip_connr->len == 0) {
+
+	  /* The application cannot send more than what is allowed by
+	     the mss (the minumum of the MSS and the available
+	     window). */
+	  if(uip_slen > uip_connr->mss) {
+	    uip_slen = uip_connr->mss;
+	  }
+
+	  /* Remember how much data we send out now so that we know
+	     when everything has been acknowledged. */
+	  uip_connr->len = uip_slen;
+	} else {
+
+	  /* If the application already had unacknowledged data, we
+	     make sure that the application does not send (i.e.,
+	     retransmit) out more than it previously sent out. */
+	  uip_slen = uip_connr->len;
+	}
+      }
+      uip_connr->nrtx = 0;
+    apprexmit:
+      uip_appdata = uip_sappdata;
+
+      /* If the application has data to be sent, or if the incoming
+         packet had new data in it, we must send out a packet. */
+      if(uip_slen > 0 && uip_connr->len > 0) {
+	/* Add the length of the IP and TCP headers. */
+	uip_len = uip_connr->len + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN;
+	/* We always set the ACK flag in response packets. */
+	BUF->flags = TCP_ACK | TCP_PSH;
+	/* Send the packet. */
+	goto tcp_send_noopts;
+      }
+      /* If there is no data to send, just send out a pure ACK if
+	 there is newdata. */
+      if(uip_flags & UIP_NEWDATA) {
+	uip_len = UIP_TCPIP_HLEN;
+	BUF->flags = TCP_ACK;
+	goto tcp_send_noopts;
+      }
+    }
+    goto drop;
+  case UIP_LAST_ACK:
+    /* We can close this connection if the peer has acknowledged our
+       FIN. This is indicated by the UIP_ACKDATA flag. */
+    if(uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) {
+      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
+      uip_flags = UIP_CLOSE;
+      UIP_APPCALL();
+    }
+    break;
+
+  case UIP_FIN_WAIT_1:
+    /* The application has closed the connection, but the remote host
+       hasn't closed its end yet. Thus we do nothing but wait for a
+       FIN from the other side. */
+    if(uip_len > 0) {
+      uip_add_rcv_nxt(uip_len);
+    }
+    if(BUF->flags & TCP_FIN) {
+      if(uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) {
+	uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_TIME_WAIT;
+	uip_connr->timer = 0;
+	uip_connr->len = 0;
+      } else {
+	uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSING;
+      }
+      uip_add_rcv_nxt(1);
+      uip_flags = UIP_CLOSE;
+      UIP_APPCALL();
+      goto tcp_send_ack;
+    } else if(uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) {
+      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_FIN_WAIT_2;
+      uip_connr->len = 0;
+      goto drop;
+    }
+    if(uip_len > 0) {
+      goto tcp_send_ack;
+    }
+    goto drop;
+
+  case UIP_FIN_WAIT_2:
+    if(uip_len > 0) {
+      uip_add_rcv_nxt(uip_len);
+    }
+    if(BUF->flags & TCP_FIN) {
+      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_TIME_WAIT;
+      uip_connr->timer = 0;
+      uip_add_rcv_nxt(1);
+      uip_flags = UIP_CLOSE;
+      UIP_APPCALL();
+      goto tcp_send_ack;
+    }
+    if(uip_len > 0) {
+      goto tcp_send_ack;
+    }
+    goto drop;
+
+  case UIP_TIME_WAIT:
+    goto tcp_send_ack;
+
+  case UIP_CLOSING:
+    if(uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) {
+      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_TIME_WAIT;
+      uip_connr->timer = 0;
+    }
+  }
+  goto drop;
+
+  /* We jump here when we are ready to send the packet, and just want
+     to set the appropriate TCP sequence numbers in the TCP header. */
+ tcp_send_ack:
+  BUF->flags = TCP_ACK;
+
+ tcp_send_nodata:
+  uip_len = UIP_IPTCPH_LEN;
+
+ tcp_send_noopts:
+  BUF->tcpoffset = (UIP_TCPH_LEN / 4) << 4;
+
+  /* We're done with the input processing. We are now ready to send a
+     reply. Our job is to fill in all the fields of the TCP and IP
+     headers before calculating the checksum and finally send the
+     packet. */
+ tcp_send:
+  BUF->ackno[0] = uip_connr->rcv_nxt[0];
+  BUF->ackno[1] = uip_connr->rcv_nxt[1];
+  BUF->ackno[2] = uip_connr->rcv_nxt[2];
+  BUF->ackno[3] = uip_connr->rcv_nxt[3];
+
+  BUF->seqno[0] = uip_connr->snd_nxt[0];
+  BUF->seqno[1] = uip_connr->snd_nxt[1];
+  BUF->seqno[2] = uip_connr->snd_nxt[2];
+  BUF->seqno[3] = uip_connr->snd_nxt[3];
+
+  BUF->proto = UIP_PROTO_TCP;
+
+  BUF->srcport  = uip_connr->lport;
+  BUF->destport = uip_connr->rport;
+
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &uip_connr->ripaddr);
+
+  if(uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_STOPPED) {
+    /* If the connection has issued uip_stop(), we advertise a zero
+       window so that the remote host will stop sending data. */
+    BUF->wnd[0] = BUF->wnd[1] = 0;
+  } else {
+    BUF->wnd[0] = ((UIP_RECEIVE_WINDOW) >> 8);
+    BUF->wnd[1] = ((UIP_RECEIVE_WINDOW) & 0xff);
+  }
+
+ tcp_send_noconn:
+  BUF->ttl = UIP_TTL;
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  /* For IPv6, the IP length field does not include the IPv6 IP header
+     length. */
+  BUF->len[0] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) >> 8);
+  BUF->len[1] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) & 0xff);
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  BUF->len[0] = (uip_len >> 8);
+  BUF->len[1] = (uip_len & 0xff);
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+  BUF->urgp[0] = BUF->urgp[1] = 0;
+
+  /* Calculate TCP checksum. */
+  BUF->tcpchksum = 0;
+  BUF->tcpchksum = ~(uip_tcpchksum());
+
+ ip_send_nolen:
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  BUF->vtc = 0x60;
+  BUF->tcflow = 0x00;
+  BUF->flow = 0x00;
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  BUF->vhl = 0x45;
+  BUF->tos = 0;
+  BUF->ipoffset[0] = BUF->ipoffset[1] = 0;
+  ++ipid;
+  BUF->ipid[0] = ipid >> 8;
+  BUF->ipid[1] = ipid & 0xff;
+  /* Calculate IP checksum. */
+  BUF->ipchksum = 0;
+  BUF->ipchksum = ~(uip_ipchksum());
+  DEBUG_PRINTF("uip ip_send_nolen: checksum 0x%04x\n", uip_ipchksum());
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.sent);
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+ send:
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  DEBUG_PRINTF("Sending packet with length %d (%d)\n", uip_len,
+	       (BUF->len[0] << 8) | BUF->len[1]);
+
+  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.sent);
+  /* Return and let the caller do the actual transmission. */
+  uip_flags = 0;
+  return;
+
+ drop:
+  uip_len = 0;
+  uip_flags = 0;
+  return;
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+u16_t
+htons(u16_t val)
+{
+  return HTONS(val);
+}
+
+u32_t
+htonl(u32_t val)
+{
+  return HTONL(val);
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+void
+uip_send(const void *data, int len)
+{
+  int copylen;
+#define MIN(a,b) ((a) < (b)? (a): (b))
+  copylen = MIN(len, UIP_BUFSIZE - UIP_LLH_LEN - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN -
+		(int)((char *)uip_sappdata - (char *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN]));
+  if(copylen > 0) {
+    uip_slen = copylen;
+    if(data != uip_sappdata) {
+      memcpy(uip_sappdata, (data), uip_slen);
+    }
+  }
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @} */
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7b87a2c77
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.h
@@ -0,0 +1,2130 @@
+
+/**
+ * \addtogroup uip
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * \file
+ * Header file for the uIP TCP/IP stack.
+ * \author  Adam Dunkels <adam@dunkels.com>
+ * \author  Julien Abeille <jabeille@cisco.com> (IPv6 related code)
+ * \author  Mathilde Durvy <mdurvy@cisco.com> (IPv6 related code)
+ *
+ * The uIP TCP/IP stack header file contains definitions for a number
+ * of C macros that are used by uIP programs as well as internal uIP
+ * structures, TCP/IP header structures and function declarations.
+ *
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Adam Dunkels.
+ * All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote
+ *    products derived from this software without specific prior
+ *    written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
+ * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
+ * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
+ * GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
+ * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
+ * WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
+ * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack.
+ *
+ * $Id: uip.h,v 1.24 2009/04/06 13:18:50 nvt-se Exp $
+ *
+ */
+
+#ifndef __UIP_H__
+#define __UIP_H__
+
+#include "uipopt.h"
+
+/**
+ * Representation of an IP address.
+ *
+ */
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+typedef union uip_ip6addr_t {
+  u8_t  u8[16];			/* Initialiser, must come first!!! */
+  u16_t u16[8];
+} uip_ip6addr_t;
+
+typedef uip_ip6addr_t uip_ipaddr_t;
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+typedef union uip_ip4addr_t {
+  u8_t  u8[4];			/* Initialiser, must come first!!! */
+  u16_t u16[2];
+#if 0
+  u32_t u32;
+#endif
+} uip_ip4addr_t;
+typedef uip_ip4addr_t uip_ipaddr_t;
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** \brief 16 bit 802.15.4 address */
+struct uip_802154_shortaddr {
+  u8_t addr[2];
+};
+/** \brief 64 bit 802.15.4 address */
+struct uip_802154_longaddr {
+  u8_t addr[8];
+};
+
+/** \brief 802.11 address */
+struct uip_80211_addr {
+  u8_t addr[6];
+};
+
+/** \brief 802.3 address */
+struct uip_eth_addr {
+  u8_t addr[6];
+};
+
+#if UIP_CONF_LL_802154
+/** \brief 802.15.4 address */
+typedef struct uip_802154_longaddr uip_lladdr_t;
+#define UIP_802154_SHORTADDR_LEN 2
+#define UIP_802154_LONGADDR_LEN  8
+#define UIP_LLADDR_LEN UIP_802154_LONGADDR_LEN
+#else /*UIP_CONF_LL_802154*/
+#if UIP_CONF_LL_80211
+/** \brief 802.11 address */
+typedef struct uip_80211_addr uip_lladdr_t;
+#define UIP_LLADDR_LEN 6
+#else /*UIP_CONF_LL_80211*/
+/** \brief Ethernet address */
+typedef struct uip_eth_addr uip_lladdr_t;
+#define UIP_LLADDR_LEN 6
+#endif /*UIP_CONF_LL_80211*/
+#endif /*UIP_CONF_LL_802154*/
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* First, the functions that should be called from the
+ * system. Initialization, the periodic timer, and incoming packets are
+ * handled by the following three functions.
+ */
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipconffunc uIP configuration functions
+ * @{
+ *
+ * The uIP configuration functions are used for setting run-time
+ * parameters in uIP such as IP addresses.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Set the IP address of this host.
+ *
+ * The IP address is represented as a 4-byte array where the first
+ * octet of the IP address is put in the first member of the 4-byte
+ * array.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+
+ uip_ipaddr_t addr;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&addr, 192,168,1,2);
+ uip_sethostaddr(&addr);
+
+ \endcode
+ * \param addr A pointer to an IP address of type uip_ipaddr_t;
+ *
+ * \sa uip_ipaddr()
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_sethostaddr(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy(&uip_hostaddr, (addr))
+
+/**
+ * Get the IP address of this host.
+ *
+ * The IP address is represented as a 4-byte array where the first
+ * octet of the IP address is put in the first member of the 4-byte
+ * array.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t hostaddr;
+
+ uip_gethostaddr(&hostaddr);
+ \endcode
+ * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable that will be
+ * filled in with the currently configured IP address.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_gethostaddr(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy((addr), &uip_hostaddr)
+
+/**
+ * Set the default router's IP address.
+ *
+ * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable containing the IP
+ * address of the default router.
+ *
+ * \sa uip_ipaddr()
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_setdraddr(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy(&uip_draddr, (addr))
+
+/**
+ * Set the netmask.
+ *
+ * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable containing the IP
+ * address of the netmask.
+ *
+ * \sa uip_ipaddr()
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_setnetmask(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy(&uip_netmask, (addr))
+
+
+/**
+ * Get the default router's IP address.
+ *
+ * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable that will be
+ * filled in with the IP address of the default router.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_getdraddr(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy((addr), &uip_draddr)
+
+/**
+ * Get the netmask.
+ *
+ * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable that will be
+ * filled in with the value of the netmask.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_getnetmask(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy((addr), &uip_netmask)
+
+/** @} */
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipinit uIP initialization functions
+ * @{
+ *
+ * The uIP initialization functions are used for booting uIP.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * uIP initialization function.
+ *
+ * This function should be called at boot up to initialize the uIP
+ * TCP/IP stack.
+ */
+void uip_init(void);
+
+/**
+ * uIP initialization function.
+ *
+ * This function may be used at boot time to set the initial ip_id.
+ */
+void uip_setipid(u16_t id);
+
+/** @} */
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipdevfunc uIP device driver functions
+ * @{
+ *
+ * These functions are used by a network device driver for interacting
+ * with uIP.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Process an incoming packet.
+ *
+ * This function should be called when the device driver has received
+ * a packet from the network. The packet from the device driver must
+ * be present in the uip_buf buffer, and the length of the packet
+ * should be placed in the uip_len variable.
+ *
+ * When the function returns, there may be an outbound packet placed
+ * in the uip_buf packet buffer. If so, the uip_len variable is set to
+ * the length of the packet. If no packet is to be sent out, the
+ * uip_len variable is set to 0.
+ *
+ * The usual way of calling the function is presented by the source
+ * code below.
+ \code
+ uip_len = devicedriver_poll();
+ if(uip_len > 0) {
+ uip_input();
+ if(uip_len > 0) {
+ devicedriver_send();
+ }
+ }
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \note If you are writing a uIP device driver that needs ARP
+ * (Address Resolution Protocol), e.g., when running uIP over
+ * Ethernet, you will need to call the uIP ARP code before calling
+ * this function:
+ \code
+ #define BUF ((struct uip_eth_hdr *)&uip_buf[0])
+ uip_len = ethernet_devicedrver_poll();
+ if(uip_len > 0) {
+ if(BUF->type == HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_IP)) {
+ uip_arp_ipin();
+ uip_input();
+ if(uip_len > 0) {
+ uip_arp_out();
+ ethernet_devicedriver_send();
+ }
+ } else if(BUF->type == HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_ARP)) {
+ uip_arp_arpin();
+ if(uip_len > 0) {
+ ethernet_devicedriver_send();
+ }
+ }
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_input()        uip_process(UIP_DATA)
+
+
+/**
+ * Periodic processing for a connection identified by its number.
+ *
+ * This function does the necessary periodic processing (timers,
+ * polling) for a uIP TCP connection, and should be called when the
+ * periodic uIP timer goes off. It should be called for every
+ * connection, regardless of whether they are open of closed.
+ *
+ * When the function returns, it may have an outbound packet waiting
+ * for service in the uIP packet buffer, and if so the uip_len
+ * variable is set to a value larger than zero. The device driver
+ * should be called to send out the packet.
+ *
+ * The usual way of calling the function is through a for() loop like
+ * this:
+ \code
+ for(i = 0; i < UIP_CONNS; ++i) {
+ uip_periodic(i);
+ if(uip_len > 0) {
+ devicedriver_send();
+ }
+ }
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \note If you are writing a uIP device driver that needs ARP
+ * (Address Resolution Protocol), e.g., when running uIP over
+ * Ethernet, you will need to call the uip_arp_out() function before
+ * calling the device driver:
+ \code
+ for(i = 0; i < UIP_CONNS; ++i) {
+ uip_periodic(i);
+ if(uip_len > 0) {
+ uip_arp_out();
+ ethernet_devicedriver_send();
+ }
+ }
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \param conn The number of the connection which is to be periodically polled.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#if UIP_TCP
+#define uip_periodic(conn) do { uip_conn = &uip_conns[conn];    \
+    uip_process(UIP_TIMER); } while (0)
+
+/**
+ *
+ *
+ */
+#define uip_conn_active(conn) (uip_conns[conn].tcpstateflags != UIP_CLOSED)
+
+/**
+ * Perform periodic processing for a connection identified by a pointer
+ * to its structure.
+ *
+ * Same as uip_periodic() but takes a pointer to the actual uip_conn
+ * struct instead of an integer as its argument. This function can be
+ * used to force periodic processing of a specific connection.
+ *
+ * \param conn A pointer to the uip_conn struct for the connection to
+ * be processed.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_periodic_conn(conn) do { uip_conn = conn;   \
+    uip_process(UIP_TIMER); } while (0)
+
+/**
+ * Request that a particular connection should be polled.
+ *
+ * Similar to uip_periodic_conn() but does not perform any timer
+ * processing. The application is polled for new data.
+ *
+ * \param conn A pointer to the uip_conn struct for the connection to
+ * be processed.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_poll_conn(conn) do { uip_conn = conn;       \
+    uip_process(UIP_POLL_REQUEST); } while (0)
+
+#endif /* UIP_TCP */
+
+#if UIP_UDP
+/**
+ * Periodic processing for a UDP connection identified by its number.
+ *
+ * This function is essentially the same as uip_periodic(), but for
+ * UDP connections. It is called in a similar fashion as the
+ * uip_periodic() function:
+ \code
+ for(i = 0; i < UIP_UDP_CONNS; i++) {
+ uip_udp_periodic(i);
+ if(uip_len > 0) {
+ devicedriver_send();
+ }
+ }
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \note As for the uip_periodic() function, special care has to be
+ * taken when using uIP together with ARP and Ethernet:
+ \code
+ for(i = 0; i < UIP_UDP_CONNS; i++) {
+ uip_udp_periodic(i);
+ if(uip_len > 0) {
+ uip_arp_out();
+ ethernet_devicedriver_send();
+ }
+ }
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \param conn The number of the UDP connection to be processed.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_udp_periodic(conn) do { uip_udp_conn = &uip_udp_conns[conn]; \
+    uip_process(UIP_UDP_TIMER); } while(0)
+
+/**
+ * Periodic processing for a UDP connection identified by a pointer to
+ * its structure.
+ *
+ * Same as uip_udp_periodic() but takes a pointer to the actual
+ * uip_conn struct instead of an integer as its argument. This
+ * function can be used to force periodic processing of a specific
+ * connection.
+ *
+ * \param conn A pointer to the uip_udp_conn struct for the connection
+ * to be processed.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_udp_periodic_conn(conn) do { uip_udp_conn = conn;   \
+    uip_process(UIP_UDP_TIMER); } while(0)
+#endif /* UIP_UDP */
+
+/** \brief Abandon the reassembly of the current packet */
+void uip_reass_over(void);
+
+/**
+ * The uIP packet buffer.
+ *
+ * The uip_buf array is used to hold incoming and outgoing
+ * packets. The device driver should place incoming data into this
+ * buffer. When sending data, the device driver should read the link
+ * level headers and the TCP/IP headers from this buffer. The size of
+ * the link level headers is configured by the UIP_LLH_LEN define.
+ *
+ * \note The application data need not be placed in this buffer, so
+ * the device driver must read it from the place pointed to by the
+ * uip_appdata pointer as illustrated by the following example:
+ \code
+ void
+ devicedriver_send(void)
+ {
+ hwsend(&uip_buf[0], UIP_LLH_LEN);
+ if(uip_len <= UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN) {
+ hwsend(&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN], uip_len - UIP_LLH_LEN);
+ } else {
+ hwsend(&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN], UIP_TCPIP_HLEN);
+ hwsend(uip_appdata, uip_len - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN - UIP_LLH_LEN);
+ }
+ }
+ \endcode
+*/
+extern u8_t uip_buf[UIP_BUFSIZE+2];
+
+
+
+/** @} */
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Functions that are used by the uIP application program. Opening and
+ * closing connections, sending and receiving data, etc. is all
+ * handled by the functions below.
+ */
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipappfunc uIP application functions
+ * @{
+ *
+ * Functions used by an application running of top of uIP.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Start listening to the specified port.
+ *
+ * \note Since this function expects the port number in network byte
+ * order, a conversion using HTONS() or htons() is necessary.
+ *
+ \code
+ uip_listen(HTONS(80));
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \param port A 16-bit port number in network byte order.
+ */
+void uip_listen(u16_t port);
+
+/**
+ * Stop listening to the specified port.
+ *
+ * \note Since this function expects the port number in network byte
+ * order, a conversion using HTONS() or htons() is necessary.
+ *
+ \code
+ uip_unlisten(HTONS(80));
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \param port A 16-bit port number in network byte order.
+ */
+void uip_unlisten(u16_t port);
+
+/**
+ * Connect to a remote host using TCP.
+ *
+ * This function is used to start a new connection to the specified
+ * port on the specified host. It allocates a new connection identifier,
+ * sets the connection to the SYN_SENT state and sets the
+ * retransmission timer to 0. This will cause a TCP SYN segment to be
+ * sent out the next time this connection is periodically processed,
+ * which usually is done within 0.5 seconds after the call to
+ * uip_connect().
+ *
+ * \note This function is available only if support for active open
+ * has been configured by defining UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN to 1 in uipopt.h.
+ *
+ * \note Since this function requires the port number to be in network
+ * byte order, a conversion using HTONS() or htons() is necessary.
+ *
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 192,168,1,2);
+ uip_connect(&ipaddr, HTONS(80));
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \param ripaddr The IP address of the remote host.
+ *
+ * \param port A 16-bit port number in network byte order.
+ *
+ * \return A pointer to the uIP connection identifier for the new connection,
+ * or NULL if no connection could be allocated.
+ *
+ */
+struct uip_conn *uip_connect(uip_ipaddr_t *ripaddr, u16_t port);
+
+
+
+/**
+ * \internal
+ *
+ * Check if a connection has outstanding (i.e., unacknowledged) data.
+ *
+ * \param conn A pointer to the uip_conn structure for the connection.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_outstanding(conn) ((conn)->len)
+
+/**
+ * Send data on the current connection.
+ *
+ * This function is used to send out a single segment of TCP
+ * data. Only applications that have been invoked by uIP for event
+ * processing can send data.
+ *
+ * The amount of data that actually is sent out after a call to this
+ * function is determined by the maximum amount of data TCP allows. uIP
+ * will automatically crop the data so that only the appropriate
+ * amount of data is sent. The function uip_mss() can be used to query
+ * uIP for the amount of data that actually will be sent.
+ *
+ * \note This function does not guarantee that the sent data will
+ * arrive at the destination. If the data is lost in the network, the
+ * application will be invoked with the uip_rexmit() event being
+ * set. The application will then have to resend the data using this
+ * function.
+ *
+ * \param data A pointer to the data which is to be sent.
+ *
+ * \param len The maximum amount of data bytes to be sent.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+void uip_send(const void *data, int len);
+
+/**
+ * The length of any incoming data that is currently available (if available)
+ * in the uip_appdata buffer.
+ *
+ * The test function uip_data() must first be used to check if there
+ * is any data available at all.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+/*void uip_datalen(void);*/
+#define uip_datalen()       uip_len
+
+/**
+ * The length of any out-of-band data (urgent data) that has arrived
+ * on the connection.
+ *
+ * \note The configuration parameter UIP_URGDATA must be set for this
+ * function to be enabled.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_urgdatalen()    uip_urglen
+
+/**
+ * Close the current connection.
+ *
+ * This function will close the current connection in a nice way.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_close()         (uip_flags = UIP_CLOSE)
+
+/**
+ * Abort the current connection.
+ *
+ * This function will abort (reset) the current connection, and is
+ * usually used when an error has occurred that prevents using the
+ * uip_close() function.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_abort()         (uip_flags = UIP_ABORT)
+
+/**
+ * Tell the sending host to stop sending data.
+ *
+ * This function will close our receiver's window so that we stop
+ * receiving data for the current connection.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_stop()          (uip_conn->tcpstateflags |= UIP_STOPPED)
+
+/**
+ * Find out if the current connection has been previously stopped with
+ * uip_stop().
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_stopped(conn)   ((conn)->tcpstateflags & UIP_STOPPED)
+
+/**
+ * Restart the current connection, if is has previously been stopped
+ * with uip_stop().
+ *
+ * This function will open the receiver's window again so that we
+ * start receiving data for the current connection.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_restart()         do { uip_flags |= UIP_NEWDATA;    \
+    uip_conn->tcpstateflags &= ~UIP_STOPPED;                    \
+  } while(0)
+
+
+/* uIP tests that can be made to determine in what state the current
+   connection is, and what the application function should do. */
+
+/**
+ * Is the current connection a UDP connection?
+ *
+ * This function checks whether the current connection is a UDP connection.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ *
+ */
+#define uip_udpconnection() (uip_conn == NULL)
+
+/**
+ * Is new incoming data available?
+ *
+ * Will reduce to non-zero if there is new data for the application
+ * present at the uip_appdata pointer. The size of the data is
+ * available through the uip_len variable.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_newdata()   (uip_flags & UIP_NEWDATA)
+
+/**
+ * Has previously sent data been acknowledged?
+ *
+ * Will reduce to non-zero if the previously sent data has been
+ * acknowledged by the remote host. This means that the application
+ * can send new data.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_acked()   (uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA)
+
+/**
+ * Has the connection just been connected?
+ *
+ * Reduces to non-zero if the current connection has been connected to
+ * a remote host. This will happen both if the connection has been
+ * actively opened (with uip_connect()) or passively opened (with
+ * uip_listen()).
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_connected() (uip_flags & UIP_CONNECTED)
+
+/**
+ * Has the connection been closed by the other end?
+ *
+ * Is non-zero if the connection has been closed by the remote
+ * host. The application may then do the necessary clean-ups.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_closed()    (uip_flags & UIP_CLOSE)
+
+/**
+ * Has the connection been aborted by the other end?
+ *
+ * Non-zero if the current connection has been aborted (reset) by the
+ * remote host.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_aborted()    (uip_flags & UIP_ABORT)
+
+/**
+ * Has the connection timed out?
+ *
+ * Non-zero if the current connection has been aborted due to too many
+ * retransmissions.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_timedout()    (uip_flags & UIP_TIMEDOUT)
+
+/**
+ * Do we need to retransmit previously data?
+ *
+ * Reduces to non-zero if the previously sent data has been lost in
+ * the network, and the application should retransmit it. The
+ * application should send the exact same data as it did the last
+ * time, using the uip_send() function.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_rexmit()     (uip_flags & UIP_REXMIT)
+
+/**
+ * Is the connection being polled by uIP?
+ *
+ * Is non-zero if the reason the application is invoked is that the
+ * current connection has been idle for a while and should be
+ * polled.
+ *
+ * The polling event can be used for sending data without having to
+ * wait for the remote host to send data.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_poll()       (uip_flags & UIP_POLL)
+
+/**
+ * Get the initial maximum segment size (MSS) of the current
+ * connection.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_initialmss()             (uip_conn->initialmss)
+
+/**
+ * Get the current maximum segment size that can be sent on the current
+ * connection.
+ *
+ * The current maximum segment size that can be sent on the
+ * connection is computed from the receiver's window and the MSS of
+ * the connection (which also is available by calling
+ * uip_initialmss()).
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_mss()             (uip_conn->mss)
+
+/**
+ * Set up a new UDP connection.
+ *
+ * This function sets up a new UDP connection. The function will
+ * automatically allocate an unused local port for the new
+ * connection. However, another port can be chosen by using the
+ * uip_udp_bind() call, after the uip_udp_new() function has been
+ * called.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t addr;
+ struct uip_udp_conn *c;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&addr, 192,168,2,1);
+ c = uip_udp_new(&addr, HTONS(12345));
+ if(c != NULL) {
+ uip_udp_bind(c, HTONS(12344));
+ }
+ \endcode
+ * \param ripaddr The IP address of the remote host.
+ *
+ * \param rport The remote port number in network byte order.
+ *
+ * \return The uip_udp_conn structure for the new connection or NULL
+ * if no connection could be allocated.
+ */
+struct uip_udp_conn *uip_udp_new(const uip_ipaddr_t *ripaddr, u16_t rport);
+
+/**
+ * Removed a UDP connection.
+ *
+ * \param conn A pointer to the uip_udp_conn structure for the connection.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_udp_remove(conn) (conn)->lport = 0
+
+/**
+ * Bind a UDP connection to a local port.
+ *
+ * \param conn A pointer to the uip_udp_conn structure for the
+ * connection.
+ *
+ * \param port The local port number, in network byte order.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_udp_bind(conn, port) (conn)->lport = port
+
+/**
+ * Send a UDP datagram of length len on the current connection.
+ *
+ * This function can only be called in response to a UDP event (poll
+ * or newdata). The data must be present in the uip_buf buffer, at the
+ * place pointed to by the uip_appdata pointer.
+ *
+ * \param len The length of the data in the uip_buf buffer.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_udp_send(len) uip_send((char *)uip_appdata, len)
+
+/** @} */
+
+/* uIP convenience and converting functions. */
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipconvfunc uIP conversion functions
+ * @{
+ *
+ * These functions can be used for converting between different data
+ * formats used by uIP.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Convert an IP address to four bytes separated by commas.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
+ printf("ipaddr=%d.%d.%d.%d\n", uip_ipaddr_to_quad(&ipaddr));
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \param a A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t.
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_ipaddr_to_quad(a) (a)->u8[0],(a)->u8[1],(a)->u8[2],(a)->u8[3]
+
+/**
+ * Construct an IP address from four bytes.
+ *
+ * This function constructs an IP address of the type that uIP handles
+ * internally from four bytes. The function is handy for specifying IP
+ * addresses to use with e.g. the uip_connect() function.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
+ struct uip_conn *c;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 192,168,1,2);
+ c = uip_connect(&ipaddr, HTONS(80));
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable that will be
+ * filled in with the IP address.
+ *
+ * \param addr0 The first octet of the IP address.
+ * \param addr1 The second octet of the IP address.
+ * \param addr2 The third octet of the IP address.
+ * \param addr3 The forth octet of the IP address.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_ipaddr(addr, addr0,addr1,addr2,addr3) do {  \
+    (addr)->u8[0] = addr0;                              \
+    (addr)->u8[1] = addr1;                              \
+    (addr)->u8[2] = addr2;                              \
+    (addr)->u8[3] = addr3;                              \
+  } while(0)
+
+/**
+ * Construct an IPv6 address from eight 16-bit words.
+ *
+ * This function constructs an IPv6 address.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_ip6addr(addr, addr0,addr1,addr2,addr3,addr4,addr5,addr6,addr7) do { \
+    (addr)->u16[0] = HTONS(addr0);                                      \
+    (addr)->u16[1] = HTONS(addr1);                                      \
+    (addr)->u16[2] = HTONS(addr2);                                      \
+    (addr)->u16[3] = HTONS(addr3);                                      \
+    (addr)->u16[4] = HTONS(addr4);                                      \
+    (addr)->u16[5] = HTONS(addr5);                                      \
+    (addr)->u16[6] = HTONS(addr6);                                      \
+    (addr)->u16[7] = HTONS(addr7);                                      \
+  } while(0)
+
+/**
+ * Construct an IPv6 address from sixteen 8-bit words.
+ *
+ * This function constructs an IPv6 address.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_ip6addr_u8(addr, addr0,addr1,addr2,addr3,addr4,addr5,addr6,addr7,addr8,addr9,addr10,addr11,addr12,addr13,addr14,addr15) do { \
+    (addr)->u8[0] = addr0;                                       \
+    (addr)->u8[1] = addr1;                                       \
+    (addr)->u8[2] = addr2;                                       \
+    (addr)->u8[3] = addr3;                                       \
+    (addr)->u8[4] = addr4;                                       \
+    (addr)->u8[5] = addr5;                                       \
+    (addr)->u8[6] = addr6;                                       \
+    (addr)->u8[7] = addr7;                                       \
+    (addr)->u8[8] = addr8;                                       \
+    (addr)->u8[9] = addr9;                                       \
+    (addr)->u8[10] = addr10;                                     \
+    (addr)->u8[11] = addr11;                                     \
+    (addr)->u8[12] = addr12;                                     \
+    (addr)->u8[13] = addr13;                                     \
+    (addr)->u8[14] = addr14;                                     \
+    (addr)->u8[15] = addr15;                                     \
+  } while(0)
+
+
+/**
+ * Copy an IP address to another IP address.
+ *
+ * Copies an IP address from one place to another.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr1, ipaddr2;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr1, 192,16,1,2);
+ uip_ipaddr_copy(&ipaddr2, &ipaddr1);
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \param dest The destination for the copy.
+ * \param src The source from where to copy.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifndef uip_ipaddr_copy
+#define uip_ipaddr_copy(dest, src) (*(dest) = *(src))
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Compare two IP addresses
+ *
+ * Compares two IP addresses.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr1, ipaddr2;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr1, 192,16,1,2);
+ if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&ipaddr2, &ipaddr1)) {
+ printf("They are the same");
+ }
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \param addr1 The first IP address.
+ * \param addr2 The second IP address.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+#define uip_ipaddr_cmp(addr1, addr2) ((addr1)->u16[0] == (addr2)->u16[0] && \
+				      (addr1)->u16[1] == (addr2)->u16[1])
+#else /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+#define uip_ipaddr_cmp(addr1, addr2) (memcmp(addr1, addr2, sizeof(uip_ip6addr_t)) == 0)
+#endif /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+/**
+ * Compare two IP addresses with netmasks
+ *
+ * Compares two IP addresses with netmasks. The masks are used to mask
+ * out the bits that are to be compared.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr1, ipaddr2, mask;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&mask, 255,255,255,0);
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr1, 192,16,1,2);
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr2, 192,16,1,3);
+ if(uip_ipaddr_maskcmp(&ipaddr1, &ipaddr2, &mask)) {
+ printf("They are the same");
+ }
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \param addr1 The first IP address.
+ * \param addr2 The second IP address.
+ * \param mask The netmask.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+#define uip_ipaddr_maskcmp(addr1, addr2, mask)          \
+  (((((u16_t *)addr1)[0] & ((u16_t *)mask)[0]) ==       \
+    (((u16_t *)addr2)[0] & ((u16_t *)mask)[0])) &&      \
+   ((((u16_t *)addr1)[1] & ((u16_t *)mask)[1]) ==       \
+    (((u16_t *)addr2)[1] & ((u16_t *)mask)[1])))
+#else
+#define uip_ipaddr_prefixcmp(addr1, addr2, length) (memcmp(addr1, addr2, length>>3) == 0)
+#endif
+
+
+/**
+ * Check if an address is a broadcast address for a network.
+ *
+ * Checks if an address is the broadcast address for a network. The
+ * network is defined by an IP address that is on the network and the
+ * network's netmask.
+ *
+ * \param addr The IP address.
+ * \param netaddr The network's IP address.
+ * \param netmask The network's netmask.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+/*#define uip_ipaddr_isbroadcast(addr, netaddr, netmask)
+  ((uip_ipaddr_t *)(addr)).u16 & ((uip_ipaddr_t *)(addr)).u16*/
+
+
+
+/**
+ * Mask out the network part of an IP address.
+ *
+ * Masks out the network part of an IP address, given the address and
+ * the netmask.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr1, ipaddr2, netmask;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr1, 192,16,1,2);
+ uip_ipaddr(&netmask, 255,255,255,0);
+ uip_ipaddr_mask(&ipaddr2, &ipaddr1, &netmask);
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * In the example above, the variable "ipaddr2" will contain the IP
+ * address 192.168.1.0.
+ *
+ * \param dest Where the result is to be placed.
+ * \param src The IP address.
+ * \param mask The netmask.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_ipaddr_mask(dest, src, mask) do {                           \
+    ((u16_t *)dest)[0] = ((u16_t *)src)[0] & ((u16_t *)mask)[0];        \
+    ((u16_t *)dest)[1] = ((u16_t *)src)[1] & ((u16_t *)mask)[1];        \
+  } while(0)
+
+/**
+ * Pick the first octet of an IP address.
+ *
+ * Picks out the first octet of an IP address.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
+ u8_t octet;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 1,2,3,4);
+ octet = uip_ipaddr1(&ipaddr);
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * In the example above, the variable "octet" will contain the value 1.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_ipaddr1(addr) ((addr)->u8[0])
+
+/**
+ * Pick the second octet of an IP address.
+ *
+ * Picks out the second octet of an IP address.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
+ u8_t octet;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 1,2,3,4);
+ octet = uip_ipaddr2(&ipaddr);
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * In the example above, the variable "octet" will contain the value 2.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_ipaddr2(addr) ((addr)->u8[1])
+
+/**
+ * Pick the third octet of an IP address.
+ *
+ * Picks out the third octet of an IP address.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
+ u8_t octet;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 1,2,3,4);
+ octet = uip_ipaddr3(&ipaddr);
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * In the example above, the variable "octet" will contain the value 3.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_ipaddr3(addr) ((addr)->u8[2])
+
+/**
+ * Pick the fourth octet of an IP address.
+ *
+ * Picks out the fourth octet of an IP address.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
+ u8_t octet;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 1,2,3,4);
+ octet = uip_ipaddr4(&ipaddr);
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * In the example above, the variable "octet" will contain the value 4.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_ipaddr4(addr) ((addr)->u8[3])
+
+/**
+ * Convert 16-bit quantity from host byte order to network byte order.
+ *
+ * This macro is primarily used for converting constants from host
+ * byte order to network byte order. For converting variables to
+ * network byte order, use the htons() function instead.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifndef HTONS
+#   if UIP_BYTE_ORDER == UIP_BIG_ENDIAN
+#      define HTONS(n) (n)
+#      define HTONL(n) (n)
+#   else /* UIP_BYTE_ORDER == UIP_BIG_ENDIAN */
+#      define HTONS(n) (u16_t)((((u16_t) (n)) << 8) | (((u16_t) (n)) >> 8))
+#      define HTONL(n) (((u32_t)HTONS(n) << 16) | HTONS((u32_t)(n) >> 16))
+#   endif /* UIP_BYTE_ORDER == UIP_BIG_ENDIAN */
+#else
+#error "HTONS already defined!"
+#endif /* HTONS */
+
+/**
+ * Convert 16-bit quantity from host byte order to network byte order.
+ *
+ * This function is primarily used for converting variables from host
+ * byte order to network byte order. For converting constants to
+ * network byte order, use the HTONS() macro instead.
+ */
+#ifndef htons
+u16_t htons(u16_t val);
+#endif /* htons */
+#ifndef ntohs
+#define ntohs htons
+#endif
+
+#ifndef htonl
+u32_t htonl(u32_t val);
+#endif /* htonl */
+#ifndef ntohl
+#define ntohl htonl
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
+/**
+ * Pointer to the application data in the packet buffer.
+ *
+ * This pointer points to the application data when the application is
+ * called. If the application wishes to send data, the application may
+ * use this space to write the data into before calling uip_send().
+ */
+extern void *uip_appdata;
+
+#if UIP_URGDATA > 0
+/* u8_t *uip_urgdata:
+ *
+ * This pointer points to any urgent data that has been received. Only
+ * present if compiled with support for urgent data (UIP_URGDATA).
+ */
+extern void *uip_urgdata;
+#endif /* UIP_URGDATA > 0 */
+
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipdrivervars Variables used in uIP device drivers
+ * @{
+ *
+ * uIP has a few global variables that are used in device drivers for
+ * uIP.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * The length of the packet in the uip_buf buffer.
+ *
+ * The global variable uip_len holds the length of the packet in the
+ * uip_buf buffer.
+ *
+ * When the network device driver calls the uIP input function,
+ * uip_len should be set to the length of the packet in the uip_buf
+ * buffer.
+ *
+ * When sending packets, the device driver should use the contents of
+ * the uip_len variable to determine the length of the outgoing
+ * packet.
+ *
+ */
+extern u16_t uip_len;
+
+/**
+ * The length of the extension headers
+ */
+extern u8_t uip_ext_len;
+/** @} */
+
+#if UIP_URGDATA > 0
+extern u16_t uip_urglen, uip_surglen;
+#endif /* UIP_URGDATA > 0 */
+
+
+/**
+ * Representation of a uIP TCP connection.
+ *
+ * The uip_conn structure is used for identifying a connection. All
+ * but one field in the structure are to be considered read-only by an
+ * application. The only exception is the appstate field whose purpose
+ * is to let the application store application-specific state (e.g.,
+ * file pointers) for the connection. The type of this field is
+ * configured in the "uipopt.h" header file.
+ */
+struct uip_conn {
+  uip_ipaddr_t ripaddr;   /**< The IP address of the remote host. */
+
+  u16_t lport;        /**< The local TCP port, in network byte order. */
+  u16_t rport;        /**< The local remote TCP port, in network byte
+			 order. */
+
+  u8_t rcv_nxt[4];    /**< The sequence number that we expect to
+			 receive next. */
+  u8_t snd_nxt[4];    /**< The sequence number that was last sent by
+                         us. */
+  u16_t len;          /**< Length of the data that was previously sent. */
+  u16_t mss;          /**< Current maximum segment size for the
+			 connection. */
+  u16_t initialmss;   /**< Initial maximum segment size for the
+			 connection. */
+  u8_t sa;            /**< Retransmission time-out calculation state
+			 variable. */
+  u8_t sv;            /**< Retransmission time-out calculation state
+			 variable. */
+  u8_t rto;           /**< Retransmission time-out. */
+  u8_t tcpstateflags; /**< TCP state and flags. */
+  u8_t timer;         /**< The retransmission timer. */
+  u8_t nrtx;          /**< The number of retransmissions for the last
+			 segment sent. */
+
+  /** The application state. */
+  uip_tcp_appstate_t appstate;
+};
+
+
+/**
+ * Pointer to the current TCP connection.
+ *
+ * The uip_conn pointer can be used to access the current TCP
+ * connection.
+ */
+
+extern struct uip_conn *uip_conn;
+#if UIP_TCP
+/* The array containing all uIP connections. */
+extern struct uip_conn uip_conns[UIP_CONNS];
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * \addtogroup uiparch
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * 4-byte array used for the 32-bit sequence number calculations.
+ */
+extern u8_t uip_acc32[4];
+/** @} */
+
+/**
+ * Representation of a uIP UDP connection.
+ */
+struct uip_udp_conn {
+  uip_ipaddr_t ripaddr;   /**< The IP address of the remote peer. */
+  u16_t lport;        /**< The local port number in network byte order. */
+  u16_t rport;        /**< The remote port number in network byte order. */
+  u8_t  ttl;          /**< Default time-to-live. */
+
+  /** The application state. */
+  uip_udp_appstate_t appstate;
+};
+
+/**
+ * The current UDP connection.
+ */
+extern struct uip_udp_conn *uip_udp_conn;
+extern struct uip_udp_conn uip_udp_conns[UIP_UDP_CONNS];
+
+struct uip_router {
+  int (*activate)(void);
+  int (*deactivate)(void);
+  uip_ipaddr_t *(*lookup)(uip_ipaddr_t *destipaddr, uip_ipaddr_t *nexthop);
+};
+
+#if UIP_CONF_ROUTER
+extern const struct uip_router *uip_router;
+
+/**
+ * uIP routing driver registration function.
+ */
+void uip_router_register(const struct uip_router *router);
+#endif /*UIP_CONF_ROUTER*/
+
+#if UIP_CONF_ICMP6
+struct uip_icmp6_conn {
+  uip_icmp6_appstate_t appstate;
+};
+extern struct uip_icmp6_conn uip_icmp6_conns;
+#endif /*UIP_CONF_ICMP6*/
+
+/**
+ * The uIP TCP/IP statistics.
+ *
+ * This is the variable in which the uIP TCP/IP statistics are gathered.
+ */
+#if UIP_STATISTICS == 1
+extern struct uip_stats uip_stat;
+#define UIP_STAT(s) s
+#else
+#define UIP_STAT(s)
+#endif /* UIP_STATISTICS == 1 */
+
+/**
+ * The structure holding the TCP/IP statistics that are gathered if
+ * UIP_STATISTICS is set to 1.
+ *
+ */
+struct uip_stats {
+  struct {
+    uip_stats_t recv;     /**< Number of received packets at the IP
+			     layer. */
+    uip_stats_t sent;     /**< Number of sent packets at the IP
+			     layer. */
+    uip_stats_t forwarded;/**< Number of forwarded packets at the IP
+			     layer. */
+    uip_stats_t drop;     /**< Number of dropped packets at the IP
+			     layer. */
+    uip_stats_t vhlerr;   /**< Number of packets dropped due to wrong
+			     IP version or header length. */
+    uip_stats_t hblenerr; /**< Number of packets dropped due to wrong
+			     IP length, high byte. */
+    uip_stats_t lblenerr; /**< Number of packets dropped due to wrong
+			     IP length, low byte. */
+    uip_stats_t fragerr;  /**< Number of packets dropped since they
+			     were IP fragments. */
+    uip_stats_t chkerr;   /**< Number of packets dropped due to IP
+			     checksum errors. */
+    uip_stats_t protoerr; /**< Number of packets dropped since they
+			     were neither ICMP, UDP nor TCP. */
+  } ip;                   /**< IP statistics. */
+  struct {
+    uip_stats_t recv;     /**< Number of received ICMP packets. */
+    uip_stats_t sent;     /**< Number of sent ICMP packets. */
+    uip_stats_t drop;     /**< Number of dropped ICMP packets. */
+    uip_stats_t typeerr;  /**< Number of ICMP packets with a wrong
+			     type. */
+    uip_stats_t chkerr;   /**< Number of ICMP packets with a bad
+			     checksum. */
+  } icmp;                 /**< ICMP statistics. */
+#if UIP_TCP
+  struct {
+    uip_stats_t recv;     /**< Number of received TCP segments. */
+    uip_stats_t sent;     /**< Number of sent TCP segments. */
+    uip_stats_t drop;     /**< Number of dropped TCP segments. */
+    uip_stats_t chkerr;   /**< Number of TCP segments with a bad
+			     checksum. */
+    uip_stats_t ackerr;   /**< Number of TCP segments with a bad ACK
+			     number. */
+    uip_stats_t rst;      /**< Number of received TCP RST (reset) segments. */
+    uip_stats_t rexmit;   /**< Number of retransmitted TCP segments. */
+    uip_stats_t syndrop;  /**< Number of dropped SYNs due to too few
+			     connections was available. */
+    uip_stats_t synrst;   /**< Number of SYNs for closed ports,
+			     triggering a RST. */
+  } tcp;                  /**< TCP statistics. */
+#endif
+#if UIP_UDP
+  struct {
+    uip_stats_t drop;     /**< Number of dropped UDP segments. */
+    uip_stats_t recv;     /**< Number of received UDP segments. */
+    uip_stats_t sent;     /**< Number of sent UDP segments. */
+    uip_stats_t chkerr;   /**< Number of UDP segments with a bad
+			     checksum. */
+  } udp;                  /**< UDP statistics. */
+#endif /* UIP_UDP */
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  struct {
+    uip_stats_t drop;     /**< Number of dropped ND6 packets. */
+    uip_stats_t recv;     /**< Number of received ND6 packets */
+    uip_stats_t sent;     /**< Number of sent ND6 packets */
+  } nd6;
+#endif /*UIP_CONF_IPV6*/
+};
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* All the stuff below this point is internal to uIP and should not be
+ * used directly by an application or by a device driver.
+ */
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+
+/* u8_t uip_flags:
+ *
+ * When the application is called, uip_flags will contain the flags
+ * that are defined in this file. Please read below for more
+ * information.
+ */
+extern u8_t uip_flags;
+
+/* The following flags may be set in the global variable uip_flags
+   before calling the application callback. The UIP_ACKDATA,
+   UIP_NEWDATA, and UIP_CLOSE flags may both be set at the same time,
+   whereas the others are mutually exclusive. Note that these flags
+   should *NOT* be accessed directly, but only through the uIP
+   functions/macros. */
+
+#define UIP_ACKDATA   1     /* Signifies that the outstanding data was
+			       acked and the application should send
+			       out new data instead of retransmitting
+			       the last data. */
+#define UIP_NEWDATA   2     /* Flags the fact that the peer has sent
+			       us new data. */
+#define UIP_REXMIT    4     /* Tells the application to retransmit the
+			       data that was last sent. */
+#define UIP_POLL      8     /* Used for polling the application, to
+			       check if the application has data that
+			       it wants to send. */
+#define UIP_CLOSE     16    /* The remote host has closed the
+			       connection, thus the connection has
+			       gone away. Or the application signals
+			       that it wants to close the
+			       connection. */
+#define UIP_ABORT     32    /* The remote host has aborted the
+			       connection, thus the connection has
+			       gone away. Or the application signals
+			       that it wants to abort the
+			       connection. */
+#define UIP_CONNECTED 64    /* We have got a connection from a remote
+                               host and have set up a new connection
+                               for it, or an active connection has
+                               been successfully established. */
+
+#define UIP_TIMEDOUT  128   /* The connection has been aborted due to
+			       too many retransmissions. */
+
+
+/**
+ * \brief process the options within a hop by hop or destination option header
+ * \retval 0: nothing to send,
+ * \retval 1: drop pkt
+ * \retval 2: ICMP error message to send
+*/
+/*static u8_t
+uip_ext_hdr_options_process(); */
+
+/* uip_process(flag):
+ *
+ * The actual uIP function which does all the work.
+ */
+void uip_process(u8_t flag);
+
+  /* The following flags are passed as an argument to the uip_process()
+   function. They are used to distinguish between the two cases where
+   uip_process() is called. It can be called either because we have
+   incoming data that should be processed, or because the periodic
+   timer has fired. These values are never used directly, but only in
+   the macros defined in this file. */
+
+#define UIP_DATA          1     /* Tells uIP that there is incoming
+				   data in the uip_buf buffer. The
+				   length of the data is stored in the
+				   global variable uip_len. */
+#define UIP_TIMER         2     /* Tells uIP that the periodic timer
+				   has fired. */
+#define UIP_POLL_REQUEST  3     /* Tells uIP that a connection should
+				   be polled. */
+#define UIP_UDP_SEND_CONN 4     /* Tells uIP that a UDP datagram
+				   should be constructed in the
+				   uip_buf buffer. */
+#if UIP_UDP
+#define UIP_UDP_TIMER     5
+#endif /* UIP_UDP */
+
+/* The TCP states used in the uip_conn->tcpstateflags. */
+#define UIP_CLOSED      0
+#define UIP_SYN_RCVD    1
+#define UIP_SYN_SENT    2
+#define UIP_ESTABLISHED 3
+#define UIP_FIN_WAIT_1  4
+#define UIP_FIN_WAIT_2  5
+#define UIP_CLOSING     6
+#define UIP_TIME_WAIT   7
+#define UIP_LAST_ACK    8
+#define UIP_TS_MASK     15
+
+#define UIP_STOPPED      16
+
+/* The TCP and IP headers. */
+struct uip_tcpip_hdr {
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  /* IPv6 header. */
+  u8_t vtc,
+    tcflow;
+  u16_t flow;
+  u8_t len[2];
+  u8_t proto, ttl;
+  uip_ip6addr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  /* IPv4 header. */
+  u8_t vhl,
+    tos,
+    len[2],
+    ipid[2],
+    ipoffset[2],
+    ttl,
+    proto;
+  u16_t ipchksum;
+  uip_ipaddr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+  /* TCP header. */
+  u16_t srcport,
+    destport;
+  u8_t seqno[4],
+    ackno[4],
+    tcpoffset,
+    flags,
+    wnd[2];
+  u16_t tcpchksum;
+  u8_t urgp[2];
+  u8_t optdata[4];
+};
+
+/* The ICMP and IP headers. */
+struct uip_icmpip_hdr {
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  /* IPv6 header. */
+  u8_t vtc,
+    tcf;
+  u16_t flow;
+  u8_t len[2];
+  u8_t proto, ttl;
+  uip_ip6addr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  /* IPv4 header. */
+  u8_t vhl,
+    tos,
+    len[2],
+    ipid[2],
+    ipoffset[2],
+    ttl,
+    proto;
+  u16_t ipchksum;
+  uip_ipaddr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+  /* ICMP header. */
+  u8_t type, icode;
+  u16_t icmpchksum;
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  u16_t id, seqno;
+  u8_t payload[1];
+#endif /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+};
+
+
+/* The UDP and IP headers. */
+struct uip_udpip_hdr {
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  /* IPv6 header. */
+  u8_t vtc,
+    tcf;
+  u16_t flow;
+  u8_t len[2];
+  u8_t proto, ttl;
+  uip_ip6addr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  /* IP header. */
+  u8_t vhl,
+    tos,
+    len[2],
+    ipid[2],
+    ipoffset[2],
+    ttl,
+    proto;
+  u16_t ipchksum;
+  uip_ipaddr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+  /* UDP header. */
+  u16_t srcport,
+    destport;
+  u16_t udplen;
+  u16_t udpchksum;
+};
+
+/*
+ * In IPv6 the length of the L3 headers before the transport header is
+ * not fixed, due to the possibility to include extension option headers
+ * after the IP header. hence we split here L3 and L4 headers
+ */
+/* The IP header */
+struct uip_ip_hdr {
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  /* IPV6 header */
+  u8_t vtc;
+  u8_t tcflow;
+  u16_t flow;
+  u8_t len[2];
+  u8_t proto, ttl;
+  uip_ip6addr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  /* IPV4 header */
+  u8_t vhl,
+    tos,
+    len[2],
+    ipid[2],
+    ipoffset[2],
+    ttl,
+    proto;
+  u16_t ipchksum;
+  uip_ipaddr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+};
+
+
+/*
+ * IPv6 extension option headers: we are able to process
+ * the 4 extension headers defined in RFC2460 (IPv6):
+ * - Hop by hop option header, destination option header:
+ *   These two are not used by any core IPv6 protocol, hence
+ *   we just read them and go to the next. They convey options,
+ *   the options defined in RFC2460 are Pad1 and PadN, which do
+ *   some padding, and that we do not need to read (the length
+ *   field in the header is enough)
+ * - Routing header: this one is most notably used by MIPv6,
+ *   which we do not implement, hence we just read it and go
+ *   to the next
+ * - Fragmentation header: we read this header and are able to
+ *   reassemble packets
+ *
+ * We do not offer any means to send packets with extension headers
+ *
+ * We do not implement Authentication and ESP headers, which are
+ * used in IPSec and defined in RFC4302,4303,4305,4385
+ */
+/* common header part */
+struct uip_ext_hdr {
+  u8_t next;
+  u8_t len;
+};
+
+/* Hop by Hop option header */
+struct uip_hbho_hdr {
+  u8_t next;
+  u8_t len;
+};
+
+/* destination option header */
+struct uip_desto_hdr {
+  u8_t next;
+  u8_t len;
+};
+
+/* We do not define structures for PAD1 and PADN options */
+
+/*
+ * routing header
+ * the routing header as 4 common bytes, then routing header type
+ * specific data there are several types of routing header. Type 0 was
+ * deprecated as per RFC5095 most notable other type is 2, used in
+ * RFC3775 (MIPv6) here we do not implement MIPv6, so we just need to
+ * parse the 4 first bytes
+ */
+struct uip_routing_hdr {
+  u8_t next;
+  u8_t len;
+  u8_t routing_type;
+  u8_t seg_left;
+};
+
+/* fragmentation header */
+struct uip_frag_hdr {
+  u8_t next;
+  u8_t res;
+  u16_t offsetresmore;
+  u32_t id;
+};
+
+/*
+ * an option within the destination or hop by hop option headers
+ * it contains type an length, which is true for all options but PAD1
+ */
+struct uip_ext_hdr_opt {
+  u8_t type;
+  u8_t len;
+};
+
+/* PADN option */
+struct uip_ext_hdr_opt_padn {
+  u8_t opt_type;
+  u8_t opt_len;
+};
+
+/* TCP header */
+struct uip_tcp_hdr {
+  u16_t srcport;
+  u16_t destport;
+  u8_t seqno[4];
+  u8_t ackno[4];
+  u8_t tcpoffset;
+  u8_t flags;
+  u8_t  wnd[2];
+  u16_t tcpchksum;
+  u8_t urgp[2];
+  u8_t optdata[4];
+};
+
+/* The ICMP headers. */
+struct uip_icmp_hdr {
+  u8_t type, icode;
+  u16_t icmpchksum;
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  u16_t id, seqno;
+#endif /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+};
+
+
+/* The UDP headers. */
+struct uip_udp_hdr {
+  u16_t srcport;
+  u16_t destport;
+  u16_t udplen;
+  u16_t udpchksum;
+};
+
+
+/**
+ * The buffer size available for user data in the \ref uip_buf buffer.
+ *
+ * This macro holds the available size for user data in the \ref
+ * uip_buf buffer. The macro is intended to be used for checking
+ * bounds of available user data.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ snprintf(uip_appdata, UIP_APPDATA_SIZE, "%u\n", i);
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define UIP_APPDATA_SIZE (UIP_BUFSIZE - UIP_LLH_LEN - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN)
+#define UIP_APPDATA_PTR (void *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN]
+
+#define UIP_PROTO_ICMP  1
+#define UIP_PROTO_TCP   6
+#define UIP_PROTO_UDP   17
+#define UIP_PROTO_ICMP6 58
+
+
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+/** @{ */
+/** \brief  extension headers types */
+#define UIP_PROTO_HBHO        0
+#define UIP_PROTO_DESTO       60
+#define UIP_PROTO_ROUTING     43
+#define UIP_PROTO_FRAG        44
+#define UIP_PROTO_NONE        59
+/** @} */
+
+/** @{ */
+/** \brief  Destination and Hop By Hop extension headers option types */
+#define UIP_EXT_HDR_OPT_PAD1  0
+#define UIP_EXT_HDR_OPT_PADN  1
+/** @} */
+
+/** @{ */
+/**
+ * \brief Bitmaps for extension header processing
+ *
+ * When processing extension headers, we should record somehow which one we
+ * see, because you cannot have twice the same header, except for destination
+ * We store all this in one u8_t bitmap one bit for each header expected. The
+ * order in the bitmap is the order recommended in RFC2460
+ */
+#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_HBHO 0x01
+#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_DESTO1 0x02
+#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_ROUTING 0x04
+#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_FRAG 0x08
+#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_AH 0x10
+#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_ESP 0x20
+#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_DESTO2 0x40
+/** @} */
+
+
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+
+/* Header sizes. */
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+#define UIP_IPH_LEN    40
+#define UIP_FRAGH_LEN  8
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+#define UIP_IPH_LEN    20    /* Size of IP header */
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+#define UIP_UDPH_LEN    8    /* Size of UDP header */
+#define UIP_TCPH_LEN   20    /* Size of TCP header */
+#ifdef UIP_IPH_LEN
+#define UIP_ICMPH_LEN   4    /* Size of ICMP header */
+#endif
+#define UIP_IPUDPH_LEN (UIP_UDPH_LEN + UIP_IPH_LEN)    /* Size of IP +
+                        * UDP
+							   * header */
+#define UIP_IPTCPH_LEN (UIP_TCPH_LEN + UIP_IPH_LEN)    /* Size of IP +
+							   * TCP
+							   * header */
+#define UIP_TCPIP_HLEN UIP_IPTCPH_LEN
+#define UIP_IPICMPH_LEN (UIP_IPH_LEN + UIP_ICMPH_LEN) /* size of ICMP
+                                                         + IP header */
+#define UIP_LLIPH_LEN (UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPH_LEN)    /* size of L2
+                                                        + IP header */
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+/**
+ * The sums below are quite used in ND. When used for uip_buf, we
+ * include link layer length when used for uip_len, we do not, hence
+ * we need values with and without LLH_LEN we do not use capital
+ * letters as these values are variable
+ */
+#define uip_l2_l3_hdr_len (UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPH_LEN + uip_ext_len)
+#define uip_l2_l3_icmp_hdr_len (UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPH_LEN + uip_ext_len + UIP_ICMPH_LEN)
+#define uip_l3_hdr_len (UIP_IPH_LEN + uip_ext_len)
+#define uip_l3_icmp_hdr_len (UIP_IPH_LEN + uip_ext_len + UIP_ICMPH_LEN)
+#endif /*UIP_CONF_IPV6*/
+
+
+#if UIP_FIXEDADDR
+extern const uip_ipaddr_t uip_hostaddr, uip_netmask, uip_draddr;
+#else /* UIP_FIXEDADDR */
+extern uip_ipaddr_t uip_hostaddr, uip_netmask, uip_draddr;
+#endif /* UIP_FIXEDADDR */
+extern const uip_ipaddr_t uip_broadcast_addr;
+extern const uip_ipaddr_t uip_all_zeroes_addr;
+
+#if UIP_FIXEDETHADDR
+extern const uip_lladdr_t uip_lladdr;
+#else
+extern uip_lladdr_t uip_lladdr;
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_IPV6
+/**
+ * \brief Is IPv6 address a the unspecified address
+ * a is of type uip_ipaddr_t
+ */
+#define uip_is_addr_unspecified(a)               \
+  ((((a)->u16[0]) == 0) &&                       \
+   (((a)->u16[1]) == 0) &&                       \
+   (((a)->u16[2]) == 0) &&                       \
+   (((a)->u16[3]) == 0) &&                       \
+   (((a)->u16[4]) == 0) &&                       \
+   (((a)->u16[5]) == 0) &&                       \
+   (((a)->u16[6]) == 0) &&                       \
+   (((a)->u16[7]) == 0))
+
+/** \brief Is IPv6 address a the link local all-nodes multicast address */
+#define uip_is_addr_linklocal_allnodes_mcast(a)     \
+  ((((a)->u8[0]) == 0xff) &&                        \
+   (((a)->u8[1]) == 0x02) &&                        \
+   (((a)->u16[1]) == 0) &&                          \
+   (((a)->u16[2]) == 0) &&                          \
+   (((a)->u16[3]) == 0) &&                          \
+   (((a)->u16[4]) == 0) &&                          \
+   (((a)->u16[5]) == 0) &&                          \
+   (((a)->u16[6]) == 0) &&                          \
+   (((a)->u8[14]) == 0) &&                          \
+   (((a)->u8[15]) == 0x01))
+
+/** \brief set IP address a to unspecified */
+#define uip_create_unspecified(a) uip_ip6addr(a, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0)
+
+/** \brief set IP address a to the link local all-nodes multicast address */
+#define uip_create_linklocal_allnodes_mcast(a) uip_ip6addr(a, 0xff02, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0x0001)
+
+/** \brief set IP address a to the link local all-routers multicast address */
+#define uip_create_linklocal_allrouters_mcast(a) uip_ip6addr(a, 0xff02, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0x0002)
+
+/**
+ * \brief  is addr (a) a solicited node multicast address, see RFC3513
+ *  a is of type uip_ipaddr_t*
+ */
+#define uip_is_addr_solicited_node(a)           \
+  ((((a)->u8[0]) == 0xFF) &&                     \
+  (((a)->u8[1]) == 0x02) &&                     \
+  (((a)->u16[1]) == 0) &&                       \
+  (((a)->u16[2]) == 0) &&                       \
+  (((a)->u16[3]) == 0) &&                       \
+  (((a)->u16[4]) == 0) &&                       \
+  (((a)->u16[5]) == 1) &&                       \
+  (((a)->u8[12]) == 0xFF))
+
+/**
+ * \briefput in b the solicited node address corresponding to address a
+ * both a and b are of type uip_ipaddr_t*
+ * */
+#define uip_create_solicited_node(a, b)    \
+  (((b)->u8[0]) = 0xFF);                        \
+  (((b)->u8[1]) = 0x02);                        \
+  (((b)->u16[1]) = 0);                          \
+  (((b)->u16[2]) = 0);                          \
+  (((b)->u16[3]) = 0);                          \
+  (((b)->u16[4]) = 0);                          \
+  (((b)->u8[10]) = 0);                          \
+  (((b)->u8[11]) = 0x01);                       \
+  (((b)->u8[12]) = 0xFF);                       \
+  (((b)->u8[13]) = ((a)->u8[13]));              \
+  (((b)->u16[7]) = ((a)->u16[7]))
+
+/**
+ * \brief is addr (a) a link local unicast address, see RFC3513
+ *  i.e. is (a) on prefix FE80::/10
+ *  a is of type uip_ipaddr_t*
+ */
+#define uip_is_addr_link_local(a) \
+  ((((a)->u8[0]) == 0xFE) && \
+  (((a)->u8[1]) == 0x80))
+
+/**
+ * \brief was addr (a) forged based on the mac address m
+ * a type is uip_ipaddr_t
+ * m type is uiplladdr_t
+ */
+#if UIP_CONF_LL_802154
+#define uip_is_addr_mac_addr_based(a, m) \
+  ((((a)->u8[8])  == (((m)->addr[0]) ^ 0x02)) &&   \
+   (((a)->u8[9])  == (m)->addr[1]) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[10]) == (m)->addr[2]) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[11]) == (m)->addr[3]) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[12]) == (m)->addr[4]) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[13]) == (m)->addr[5]) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[14]) == (m)->addr[6]) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[15]) == (m)->addr[7]))
+#else
+
+#define uip_is_addr_mac_addr_based(a, m) \
+  ((((a)->u8[8])  == (((m)->addr[0]) | 0x02)) &&   \
+   (((a)->u8[9])  == (m)->addr[1]) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[10]) == (m)->addr[2]) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[11]) == 0xff) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[12]) == 0xfe) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[13]) == (m)->addr[3]) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[14]) == (m)->addr[4]) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[15]) == (m)->addr[5]))
+
+#endif /*UIP_CONF_LL_802154*/
+
+/**
+ * \brief is address a multicast address, see RFC 3513
+ * a is of type uip_ipaddr_t*
+ * */
+#define uip_is_addr_mcast(a)                    \
+  (((a)->u8[0]) == 0xFF)
+
+/**
+ * \brief is group-id of multicast address a
+ * the all nodes group-id
+ */
+#define uip_is_mcast_group_id_all_nodes(a) \
+  ((((a)->u16[1])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u16[2])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u16[3])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u16[4])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u16[5])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u16[6])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u8[14])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u8[15])  == 1))
+
+/**
+ * \brief is group-id of multicast address a
+ * the all routers group-id
+ */
+#define uip_is_mcast_group_id_all_routers(a) \
+  ((((a)->u16[1])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u16[2])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u16[3])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u16[4])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u16[5])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u16[6])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u8[14])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u8[15])  == 2))
+
+
+#endif /*UIP_CONF_IPV6*/
+
+/**
+ * Calculate the Internet checksum over a buffer.
+ *
+ * The Internet checksum is the one's complement of the one's
+ * complement sum of all 16-bit words in the buffer.
+ *
+ * See RFC1071.
+ *
+ * \param buf A pointer to the buffer over which the checksum is to be
+ * computed.
+ *
+ * \param len The length of the buffer over which the checksum is to
+ * be computed.
+ *
+ * \return The Internet checksum of the buffer.
+ */
+u16_t uip_chksum(u16_t *buf, u16_t len);
+
+/**
+ * Calculate the IP header checksum of the packet header in uip_buf.
+ *
+ * The IP header checksum is the Internet checksum of the 20 bytes of
+ * the IP header.
+ *
+ * \return The IP header checksum of the IP header in the uip_buf
+ * buffer.
+ */
+u16_t uip_ipchksum(void);
+
+/**
+ * Calculate the TCP checksum of the packet in uip_buf and uip_appdata.
+ *
+ * The TCP checksum is the Internet checksum of data contents of the
+ * TCP segment, and a pseudo-header as defined in RFC793.
+ *
+ * \return The TCP checksum of the TCP segment in uip_buf and pointed
+ * to by uip_appdata.
+ */
+u16_t uip_tcpchksum(void);
+
+/**
+ * Calculate the UDP checksum of the packet in uip_buf and uip_appdata.
+ *
+ * The UDP checksum is the Internet checksum of data contents of the
+ * UDP segment, and a pseudo-header as defined in RFC768.
+ *
+ * \return The UDP checksum of the UDP segment in uip_buf and pointed
+ * to by uip_appdata.
+ */
+u16_t uip_udpchksum(void);
+
+/**
+ * Calculate the ICMP checksum of the packet in uip_buf.
+ *
+ * \return The ICMP checksum of the ICMP packet in uip_buf
+ */
+u16_t uip_icmp6chksum(void);
+
+
+#endif /* __UIP_H__ */
+
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fcb783b14
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.c
@@ -0,0 +1,432 @@
+/**
+ * \addtogroup uip
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uiparp uIP Address Resolution Protocol
+ * @{
+ *
+ * The Address Resolution Protocol ARP is used for mapping between IP
+ * addresses and link level addresses such as the Ethernet MAC
+ * addresses. ARP uses broadcast queries to ask for the link level
+ * address of a known IP address and the host which is configured with
+ * the IP address for which the query was meant, will respond with its
+ * link level address.
+ *
+ * \note This ARP implementation only supports Ethernet.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * \file
+ * Implementation of the ARP Address Resolution Protocol.
+ * \author Adam Dunkels <adam@dunkels.com>
+ *
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Adam Dunkels.
+ * All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote
+ *    products derived from this software without specific prior
+ *    written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
+ * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
+ * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
+ * GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
+ * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
+ * WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
+ * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack.
+ *
+ * $Id: uip_arp.c,v 1.5 2008/02/07 01:35:00 adamdunkels Exp $
+ *
+ */
+
+
+#include "uip_arp.h"
+
+#include <string.h>
+
+struct arp_hdr {
+  struct uip_eth_hdr ethhdr;
+  u16_t hwtype;
+  u16_t protocol;
+  u8_t hwlen;
+  u8_t protolen;
+  u16_t opcode;
+  struct uip_eth_addr shwaddr;
+  uip_ipaddr_t sipaddr;
+  struct uip_eth_addr dhwaddr;
+  uip_ipaddr_t dipaddr;
+};
+
+struct ethip_hdr {
+  struct uip_eth_hdr ethhdr;
+  /* IP header. */
+  u8_t vhl,
+    tos,
+    len[2],
+    ipid[2],
+    ipoffset[2],
+    ttl,
+    proto;
+  u16_t ipchksum;
+  uip_ipaddr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
+};
+
+#define ARP_REQUEST 1
+#define ARP_REPLY   2
+
+#define ARP_HWTYPE_ETH 1
+
+struct arp_entry {
+  uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
+  struct uip_eth_addr ethaddr;
+  u8_t time;
+};
+
+static const struct uip_eth_addr broadcast_ethaddr =
+  {{0xff,0xff,0xff,0xff,0xff,0xff}};
+static const u16_t broadcast_ipaddr[2] = {0xffff,0xffff};
+
+static struct arp_entry arp_table[UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE];
+static uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
+static u8_t i, c;
+
+static u8_t arptime;
+static u8_t tmpage;
+
+#define BUF   ((struct arp_hdr *)&uip_buf[0])
+#define IPBUF ((struct ethip_hdr *)&uip_buf[0])
+
+#define DEBUG 0
+#if DEBUG
+#include <stdio.h>
+#define PRINTF(...) printf(__VA_ARGS__)
+#else
+#define PRINTF(...)
+#endif
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * Initialize the ARP module.
+ *
+ */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+void
+uip_arp_init(void)
+{
+  for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) {
+    memset(&arp_table[i].ipaddr, 0, 4);
+  }
+}
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * Periodic ARP processing function.
+ *
+ * This function performs periodic timer processing in the ARP module
+ * and should be called at regular intervals. The recommended interval
+ * is 10 seconds between the calls.
+ *
+ */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+void
+uip_arp_timer(void)
+{
+  struct arp_entry *tabptr = NULL;
+
+  ++arptime;
+  for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) {
+    tabptr = &arp_table[i];
+    if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&tabptr->ipaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr) &&
+       arptime - tabptr->time >= UIP_ARP_MAXAGE) {
+      memset(&tabptr->ipaddr, 0, 4);
+    }
+  }
+
+}
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+static void
+uip_arp_update(uip_ipaddr_t *ipaddr, struct uip_eth_addr *ethaddr)
+{
+  register struct arp_entry *tabptr = NULL;
+  /* Walk through the ARP mapping table and try to find an entry to
+     update. If none is found, the IP -> MAC address mapping is
+     inserted in the ARP table. */
+  for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) {
+
+    tabptr = &arp_table[i];
+    /* Only check those entries that are actually in use. */
+    if(!uip_ipaddr_cmp(&tabptr->ipaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr)) {
+
+      /* Check if the source IP address of the incoming packet matches
+         the IP address in this ARP table entry. */
+      if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(ipaddr, &tabptr->ipaddr)) {
+
+	/* An old entry found, update this and return. */
+	memcpy(tabptr->ethaddr.addr, ethaddr->addr, 6);
+	tabptr->time = arptime;
+
+	return;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* If we get here, no existing ARP table entry was found, so we
+     create one. */
+
+  /* First, we try to find an unused entry in the ARP table. */
+  for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) {
+    tabptr = &arp_table[i];
+    if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&tabptr->ipaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr)) {
+      break;
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* If no unused entry is found, we try to find the oldest entry and
+     throw it away. */
+  if(i == UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE) {
+    tmpage = 0;
+    c = 0;
+    for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) {
+      tabptr = &arp_table[i];
+      if(arptime - tabptr->time > tmpage) {
+	tmpage = arptime - tabptr->time;
+	c = i;
+      }
+    }
+    i = c;
+    tabptr = &arp_table[i];
+  }
+
+  /* Now, i is the ARP table entry which we will fill with the new
+     information. */
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&tabptr->ipaddr, ipaddr);
+  memcpy(tabptr->ethaddr.addr, ethaddr->addr, 6);
+  tabptr->time = arptime;
+}
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * ARP processing for incoming IP packets
+ *
+ * This function should be called by the device driver when an IP
+ * packet has been received. The function will check if the address is
+ * in the ARP cache, and if so the ARP cache entry will be
+ * refreshed. If no ARP cache entry was found, a new one is created.
+ *
+ * This function expects an IP packet with a prepended Ethernet header
+ * in the uip_buf[] buffer, and the length of the packet in the global
+ * variable uip_len.
+ */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if 0
+void
+uip_arp_ipin(void)
+{
+  uip_len -= sizeof(struct uip_eth_hdr);
+
+  /* Only insert/update an entry if the source IP address of the
+     incoming IP packet comes from a host on the local network. */
+  if((IPBUF->srcipaddr[0] & uip_netmask[0]) !=
+     (uip_hostaddr[0] & uip_netmask[0])) {
+    return;
+  }
+  if((IPBUF->srcipaddr[1] & uip_netmask[1]) !=
+     (uip_hostaddr[1] & uip_netmask[1])) {
+    return;
+  }
+  uip_arp_update(IPBUF->srcipaddr, &(IPBUF->ethhdr.src));
+
+  return;
+}
+#endif /* 0 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * ARP processing for incoming ARP packets.
+ *
+ * This function should be called by the device driver when an ARP
+ * packet has been received. The function will act differently
+ * depending on the ARP packet type: if it is a reply for a request
+ * that we previously sent out, the ARP cache will be filled in with
+ * the values from the ARP reply. If the incoming ARP packet is an ARP
+ * request for our IP address, an ARP reply packet is created and put
+ * into the uip_buf[] buffer.
+ *
+ * When the function returns, the value of the global variable uip_len
+ * indicates whether the device driver should send out a packet or
+ * not. If uip_len is zero, no packet should be sent. If uip_len is
+ * non-zero, it contains the length of the outbound packet that is
+ * present in the uip_buf[] buffer.
+ *
+ * This function expects an ARP packet with a prepended Ethernet
+ * header in the uip_buf[] buffer, and the length of the packet in the
+ * global variable uip_len.
+ */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+void
+uip_arp_arpin(void)
+{
+  if(uip_len < sizeof(struct arp_hdr)) {
+    uip_len = 0;
+    return;
+  }
+  uip_len = 0;
+
+  switch(BUF->opcode) {
+  case HTONS(ARP_REQUEST):
+    /* ARP request. If it asked for our address, we send out a
+       reply. */
+    /*    if(BUF->dipaddr[0] == uip_hostaddr[0] &&
+	  BUF->dipaddr[1] == uip_hostaddr[1]) {*/
+    PRINTF("uip_arp_arpin: request for %d.%d.%d.%d (we are %d.%d.%d.%d)\n",
+	   BUF->dipaddr.u8[0], BUF->dipaddr.u8[1],
+	   BUF->dipaddr.u8[2], BUF->dipaddr.u8[3],
+	   uip_hostaddr.u8[0], uip_hostaddr.u8[1],
+	   uip_hostaddr.u8[2], uip_hostaddr.u8[3]);
+    if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->dipaddr, &uip_hostaddr)) {
+      /* First, we register the one who made the request in our ARP
+	 table, since it is likely that we will do more communication
+	 with this host in the future. */
+      uip_arp_update(&BUF->sipaddr, &BUF->shwaddr);
+
+      BUF->opcode = HTONS(ARP_REPLY);
+
+      memcpy(BUF->dhwaddr.addr, BUF->shwaddr.addr, 6);
+      memcpy(BUF->shwaddr.addr, uip_ethaddr.addr, 6);
+      memcpy(BUF->ethhdr.src.addr, uip_ethaddr.addr, 6);
+      memcpy(BUF->ethhdr.dest.addr, BUF->dhwaddr.addr, 6);
+
+      uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->dipaddr, &BUF->sipaddr);
+      uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->sipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
+
+      BUF->ethhdr.type = HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_ARP);
+      uip_len = sizeof(struct arp_hdr);
+    }
+    break;
+  case HTONS(ARP_REPLY):
+    /* ARP reply. We insert or update the ARP table if it was meant
+       for us. */
+    if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->dipaddr, &uip_hostaddr)) {
+      uip_arp_update(&BUF->sipaddr, &BUF->shwaddr);
+    }
+    break;
+  }
+
+  return;
+}
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * Prepend Ethernet header to an outbound IP packet and see if we need
+ * to send out an ARP request.
+ *
+ * This function should be called before sending out an IP packet. The
+ * function checks the destination IP address of the IP packet to see
+ * what Ethernet MAC address that should be used as a destination MAC
+ * address on the Ethernet.
+ *
+ * If the destination IP address is in the local network (determined
+ * by logical ANDing of netmask and our IP address), the function
+ * checks the ARP cache to see if an entry for the destination IP
+ * address is found. If so, an Ethernet header is prepended and the
+ * function returns. If no ARP cache entry is found for the
+ * destination IP address, the packet in the uip_buf[] is replaced by
+ * an ARP request packet for the IP address. The IP packet is dropped
+ * and it is assumed that they higher level protocols (e.g., TCP)
+ * eventually will retransmit the dropped packet.
+ *
+ * If the destination IP address is not on the local network, the IP
+ * address of the default router is used instead.
+ *
+ * When the function returns, a packet is present in the uip_buf[]
+ * buffer, and the length of the packet is in the global variable
+ * uip_len.
+ */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+void
+uip_arp_out(void)
+{
+  struct arp_entry *tabptr = NULL;
+
+  /* Find the destination IP address in the ARP table and construct
+     the Ethernet header. If the destination IP address isn't on the
+     local network, we use the default router's IP address instead.
+
+     If not ARP table entry is found, we overwrite the original IP
+     packet with an ARP request for the IP address. */
+
+  /* First check if destination is a local broadcast. */
+  if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&IPBUF->destipaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr)) {
+    memcpy(IPBUF->ethhdr.dest.addr, broadcast_ethaddr.addr, 6);
+  } else {
+    /* Check if the destination address is on the local network. */
+    if(!uip_ipaddr_maskcmp(&IPBUF->destipaddr, &uip_hostaddr, &uip_netmask)) {
+      /* Destination address was not on the local network, so we need to
+	 use the default router's IP address instead of the destination
+	 address when determining the MAC address. */
+      uip_ipaddr_copy(&ipaddr, &uip_draddr);
+    } else {
+      /* Else, we use the destination IP address. */
+      uip_ipaddr_copy(&ipaddr, &IPBUF->destipaddr);
+    }
+
+    for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) {
+      tabptr = &arp_table[i];
+      if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&ipaddr, &tabptr->ipaddr)) {
+	break;
+      }
+    }
+
+    if(i == UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE) {
+      /* The destination address was not in our ARP table, so we
+	 overwrite the IP packet with an ARP request. */
+
+      memset(BUF->ethhdr.dest.addr, 0xff, 6);
+      memset(BUF->dhwaddr.addr, 0x00, 6);
+      memcpy(BUF->ethhdr.src.addr, uip_ethaddr.addr, 6);
+      memcpy(BUF->shwaddr.addr, uip_ethaddr.addr, 6);
+
+      uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->dipaddr, &ipaddr);
+      uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->sipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
+      BUF->opcode = HTONS(ARP_REQUEST); /* ARP request. */
+      BUF->hwtype = HTONS(ARP_HWTYPE_ETH);
+      BUF->protocol = HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_IP);
+      BUF->hwlen = 6;
+      BUF->protolen = 4;
+      BUF->ethhdr.type = HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_ARP);
+
+      uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN];
+
+      uip_len = sizeof(struct arp_hdr);
+      return;
+    }
+
+    /* Build an ethernet header. */
+    memcpy(IPBUF->ethhdr.dest.addr, tabptr->ethaddr.addr, 6);
+  }
+  memcpy(IPBUF->ethhdr.src.addr, uip_ethaddr.addr, 6);
+
+  IPBUF->ethhdr.type = HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_IP);
+
+  uip_len += sizeof(struct uip_eth_hdr);
+}
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @} */
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4e78ce7b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.h
@@ -0,0 +1,146 @@
+/**
+ * \addtogroup uip
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * \addtogroup uiparp
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * \file
+ * Macros and definitions for the ARP module.
+ * \author Adam Dunkels <adam@dunkels.com>
+ */
+
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Adam Dunkels.
+ * All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote
+ *    products derived from this software without specific prior
+ *    written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
+ * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
+ * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
+ * GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
+ * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
+ * WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
+ * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack.
+ *
+ * $Id: uip_arp.h,v 1.2 2006/08/26 23:58:45 oliverschmidt Exp $
+ *
+ */
+
+#ifndef __UIP_ARP_H__
+#define __UIP_ARP_H__
+
+#include "uip.h"
+
+
+extern struct uip_eth_addr uip_ethaddr;
+
+/**
+ * The Ethernet header.
+ */
+struct uip_eth_hdr {
+  struct uip_eth_addr dest;
+  struct uip_eth_addr src;
+  u16_t type;
+};
+
+#define UIP_ETHTYPE_ARP  0x0806
+#define UIP_ETHTYPE_IP   0x0800
+#define UIP_ETHTYPE_IPV6 0x86dd
+
+
+/* The uip_arp_init() function must be called before any of the other
+   ARP functions. */
+void uip_arp_init(void);
+
+/* The uip_arp_ipin() function should be called whenever an IP packet
+   arrives from the Ethernet. This function refreshes the ARP table or
+   inserts a new mapping if none exists. The function assumes that an
+   IP packet with an Ethernet header is present in the uip_buf buffer
+   and that the length of the packet is in the uip_len variable. */
+/*void uip_arp_ipin(void);*/
+#define uip_arp_ipin()
+
+/* The uip_arp_arpin() should be called when an ARP packet is received
+   by the Ethernet driver. This function also assumes that the
+   Ethernet frame is present in the uip_buf buffer. When the
+   uip_arp_arpin() function returns, the contents of the uip_buf
+   buffer should be sent out on the Ethernet if the uip_len variable
+   is > 0. */
+void uip_arp_arpin(void);
+
+/* The uip_arp_out() function should be called when an IP packet
+   should be sent out on the Ethernet. This function creates an
+   Ethernet header before the IP header in the uip_buf buffer. The
+   Ethernet header will have the correct Ethernet MAC destination
+   address filled in if an ARP table entry for the destination IP
+   address (or the IP address of the default router) is present. If no
+   such table entry is found, the IP packet is overwritten with an ARP
+   request and we rely on TCP to retransmit the packet that was
+   overwritten. In any case, the uip_len variable holds the length of
+   the Ethernet frame that should be transmitted. */
+void uip_arp_out(void);
+
+/* The uip_arp_timer() function should be called every ten seconds. It
+   is responsible for flushing old entries in the ARP table. */
+void uip_arp_timer(void);
+
+/** @} */
+
+/**
+ * \addtogroup uipconffunc
+ * @{
+ */
+
+
+/**
+ * Specifiy the Ethernet MAC address.
+ *
+ * The ARP code needs to know the MAC address of the Ethernet card in
+ * order to be able to respond to ARP queries and to generate working
+ * Ethernet headers.
+ *
+ * \note This macro only specifies the Ethernet MAC address to the ARP
+ * code. It cannot be used to change the MAC address of the Ethernet
+ * card.
+ *
+ * \param eaddr A pointer to a struct uip_eth_addr containing the
+ * Ethernet MAC address of the Ethernet card.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_setethaddr(eaddr) do {uip_ethaddr.addr[0] = eaddr.addr[0]; \
+                              uip_ethaddr.addr[1] = eaddr.addr[1];\
+                              uip_ethaddr.addr[2] = eaddr.addr[2];\
+                              uip_ethaddr.addr[3] = eaddr.addr[3];\
+                              uip_ethaddr.addr[4] = eaddr.addr[4];\
+                              uip_ethaddr.addr[5] = eaddr.addr[5];} while(0)
+
+/** @} */
+
+
+#endif /* __UIP_ARP_H__ */
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uipopt.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uipopt.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..520c03f25
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uipopt.h
@@ -0,0 +1,740 @@
+/**
+ * \addtogroup uip
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipopt Configuration options for uIP
+ * @{
+ *
+ * uIP is configured using the per-project configuration file
+ * "uipopt.h". This file contains all compile-time options for uIP and
+ * should be tweaked to match each specific project. The uIP
+ * distribution contains a documented example "uipopt.h" that can be
+ * copied and modified for each project.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * \file
+ * Configuration options for uIP.
+ * \author Adam Dunkels <adam@dunkels.com>
+ *
+ * This file is used for tweaking various configuration options for
+ * uIP. You should make a copy of this file into one of your project's
+ * directories instead of editing this example "uipopt.h" file that
+ * comes with the uIP distribution.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Adam Dunkels.
+ * All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote
+ *    products derived from this software without specific prior
+ *    written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
+ * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
+ * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
+ * GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
+ * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
+ * WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
+ * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack.
+ *
+ * $Id: uipopt.h,v 1.11 2009/04/10 00:37:48 adamdunkels Exp $
+ *
+ */
+
+#ifndef __UIPOPT_H__
+#define __UIPOPT_H__
+
+#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+#ifndef UIP_LITTLE_ENDIAN
+#define UIP_LITTLE_ENDIAN  3412
+#endif /* UIP_LITTLE_ENDIAN */
+#ifndef UIP_BIG_ENDIAN
+#define UIP_BIG_ENDIAN     1234
+#endif /* UIP_BIG_ENDIAN */
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipoptstaticconf Static configuration options
+ * @{
+ *
+ * These configuration options can be used for setting the IP address
+ * settings statically, but only if UIP_FIXEDADDR is set to 1. The
+ * configuration options for a specific node includes IP address,
+ * netmask and default router as well as the Ethernet address. The
+ * netmask, default router and Ethernet address are applicable only
+ * if uIP should be run over Ethernet.
+ *
+ * This options are meaningful only for the IPv4 code.
+ *
+ * All of these should be changed to suit your project.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Determines if uIP should use a fixed IP address or not.
+ *
+ * If uIP should use a fixed IP address, the settings are set in the
+ * uipopt.h file. If not, the macros uip_sethostaddr(),
+ * uip_setdraddr() and uip_setnetmask() should be used instead.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define UIP_FIXEDADDR    0
+
+/**
+ * Ping IP address assignment.
+ *
+ * uIP uses a "ping" packets for setting its own IP address if this
+ * option is set. If so, uIP will start with an empty IP address and
+ * the destination IP address of the first incoming "ping" (ICMP echo)
+ * packet will be used for setting the hosts IP address.
+ *
+ * \note This works only if UIP_FIXEDADDR is 0.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_PINGADDRCONF
+#define UIP_PINGADDRCONF UIP_CONF_PINGADDRCONF
+#else /* UIP_CONF_PINGADDRCONF */
+#define UIP_PINGADDRCONF 0
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_PINGADDRCONF */
+
+
+/**
+ * Specifies if the uIP ARP module should be compiled with a fixed
+ * Ethernet MAC address or not.
+ *
+ * If this configuration option is 0, the macro uip_setethaddr() can
+ * be used to specify the Ethernet address at run-time.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define UIP_FIXEDETHADDR 0
+
+/** @} */
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipoptip IP configuration options
+ * @{
+ *
+ */
+/**
+ * The IP TTL (time to live) of IP packets sent by uIP.
+ *
+ * This should normally not be changed.
+ */
+#define UIP_TTL         64
+
+/**
+ * The maximum time an IP fragment should wait in the reassembly
+ * buffer before it is dropped.
+ *
+ */
+#define UIP_REASS_MAXAGE 60 /*60s*/
+
+/**
+ * Turn on support for IP packet reassembly.
+ *
+ * uIP supports reassembly of fragmented IP packets. This features
+ * requires an additional amount of RAM to hold the reassembly buffer
+ * and the reassembly code size is approximately 700 bytes.  The
+ * reassembly buffer is of the same size as the uip_buf buffer
+ * (configured by UIP_BUFSIZE).
+ *
+ * \note IP packet reassembly is not heavily tested.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_REASSEMBLY
+#define UIP_REASSEMBLY UIP_CONF_REASSEMBLY
+#else /* UIP_CONF_REASSEMBLY */
+#define UIP_REASSEMBLY 0
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_REASSEMBLY */
+/** @} */
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipoptipv6 IPv6 configuration options
+ * @{
+ *
+ */
+
+/** The maximum transmission unit at the IP Layer*/
+#define UIP_LINK_MTU 1280
+
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_IPV6
+/** Do we use IPv6 or not (default: no) */
+#define UIP_CONF_IPV6                 0
+#endif
+
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_IPV6_QUEUE_PKT
+/** Do we do per %neighbor queuing during address resolution (default: no) */
+#define UIP_CONF_IPV6_QUEUE_PKT       0
+#endif
+
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_IPV6_CHECKS
+/** Do we do IPv6 consistency checks (highly recommended, default: yes) */
+#define UIP_CONF_IPV6_CHECKS          1
+#endif
+
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_IPV6_REASSEMBLY
+/** Do we do IPv6 fragmentation (default: no) */
+#define UIP_CONF_IPV6_REASSEMBLY      0
+#endif
+
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_NETIF_MAX_ADDRESSES
+/** Default number of IPv6 addresses associated to the node's interface */
+#define UIP_CONF_NETIF_MAX_ADDRESSES  3
+#endif
+
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_PREFIXES
+/** Default number of IPv6 prefixes associated to the node's interface */
+#define UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_PREFIXES     3
+#endif
+
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_NEIGHBORS
+/** Default number of neighbors that can be stored in the %neighbor cache */
+#define UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_NEIGHBORS    4
+#endif
+
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_DEFROUTERS
+/** Minimum number of default routers */
+#define UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_DEFROUTERS   2
+#endif
+/** @} */
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipoptudp UDP configuration options
+ * @{
+ *
+ * \note The UDP support in uIP is still not entirely complete; there
+ * is no support for sending or receiving broadcast or multicast
+ * packets, but it works well enough to support a number of vital
+ * applications such as DNS queries, though
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Toggles whether UDP support should be compiled in or not.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_UDP
+#define UIP_UDP UIP_CONF_UDP
+#else /* UIP_CONF_UDP */
+#define UIP_UDP           1
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_UDP */
+
+/**
+ * Toggles if UDP checksums should be used or not.
+ *
+ * \note Support for UDP checksums is currently not included in uIP,
+ * so this option has no function.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_UDP_CHECKSUMS
+#define UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS UIP_CONF_UDP_CHECKSUMS
+#else
+#define UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS 0
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * The maximum amount of concurrent UDP connections.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_UDP_CONNS
+#define UIP_UDP_CONNS UIP_CONF_UDP_CONNS
+#else /* UIP_CONF_UDP_CONNS */
+#define UIP_UDP_CONNS    10
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_UDP_CONNS */
+
+/**
+ * The name of the function that should be called when UDP datagrams arrive.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+
+
+/** @} */
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipopttcp TCP configuration options
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Toggles whether TCP support should be compiled in or not.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_TCP
+#define UIP_TCP UIP_CONF_TCP
+#else /* UIP_CONF_TCP */
+#define UIP_TCP           1
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_TCP */
+
+/**
+ * Determines if support for opening connections from uIP should be
+ * compiled in.
+ *
+ * If the applications that are running on top of uIP for this project
+ * do not need to open outgoing TCP connections, this configuration
+ * option can be turned off to reduce the code size of uIP.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_ACTIVE_OPEN
+#define UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN 1
+#else /* UIP_CONF_ACTIVE_OPEN */
+#define UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN UIP_CONF_ACTIVE_OPEN
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_ACTIVE_OPEN */
+
+/**
+ * The maximum number of simultaneously open TCP connections.
+ *
+ * Since the TCP connections are statically allocated, turning this
+ * configuration knob down results in less RAM used. Each TCP
+ * connection requires approximately 30 bytes of memory.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_MAX_CONNECTIONS
+#define UIP_CONNS       10
+#else /* UIP_CONF_MAX_CONNECTIONS */
+#define UIP_CONNS UIP_CONF_MAX_CONNECTIONS
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_MAX_CONNECTIONS */
+
+
+/**
+ * The maximum number of simultaneously listening TCP ports.
+ *
+ * Each listening TCP port requires 2 bytes of memory.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_MAX_LISTENPORTS
+#define UIP_LISTENPORTS 20
+#else /* UIP_CONF_MAX_LISTENPORTS */
+#define UIP_LISTENPORTS UIP_CONF_MAX_LISTENPORTS
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_MAX_LISTENPORTS */
+
+/**
+ * Determines if support for TCP urgent data notification should be
+ * compiled in.
+ *
+ * Urgent data (out-of-band data) is a rarely used TCP feature that
+ * very seldom would be required.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#if !defined(UIP_URGDATA)
+#define UIP_URGDATA      0
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * The initial retransmission timeout counted in timer pulses.
+ *
+ * This should not be changed.
+ */
+#if !defined(UIP_RTO)
+#define UIP_RTO         3
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * The maximum number of times a segment should be retransmitted
+ * before the connection should be aborted.
+ *
+ * This should not be changed.
+ */
+#if !defined(UIP_MAXRTX)
+#define UIP_MAXRTX      8
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * The maximum number of times a SYN segment should be retransmitted
+ * before a connection request should be deemed to have been
+ * unsuccessful.
+ *
+ * This should not need to be changed.
+ */
+#if !defined(UIP_MAXSYNRTX)
+#define UIP_MAXSYNRTX      5
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * The TCP maximum segment size.
+ *
+ * This is should not be to set to more than
+ * UIP_BUFSIZE - UIP_LLH_LEN - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN.
+ */
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_TCP_MSS
+#define UIP_TCP_MSS UIP_CONF_TCP_MSS
+#else
+#define UIP_TCP_MSS     (UIP_BUFSIZE - UIP_LLH_LEN - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN)
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * The size of the advertised receiver's window.
+ *
+ * Should be set low (i.e., to the size of the uip_buf buffer) if the
+ * application is slow to process incoming data, or high (32768 bytes)
+ * if the application processes data quickly.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_RECEIVE_WINDOW
+#define UIP_RECEIVE_WINDOW UIP_TCP_MSS
+#else
+#define UIP_RECEIVE_WINDOW UIP_CONF_RECEIVE_WINDOW
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * How long a connection should stay in the TIME_WAIT state.
+ *
+ * This configuration option has no real implication, and it should be
+ * left untouched.
+ */
+#define UIP_TIME_WAIT_TIMEOUT 120
+
+
+/** @} */
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipoptarp ARP configuration options
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * The size of the ARP table.
+ *
+ * This option should be set to a larger value if this uIP node will
+ * have many connections from the local network.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_ARPTAB_SIZE
+#define UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE UIP_CONF_ARPTAB_SIZE
+#else
+#define UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE 8
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * The maximum age of ARP table entries measured in 10ths of seconds.
+ *
+ * An UIP_ARP_MAXAGE of 120 corresponds to 20 minutes (BSD
+ * default).
+ */
+#define UIP_ARP_MAXAGE 120
+
+
+/** @} */
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipoptmac layer 2 options (for ipv6)
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#define UIP_DEFAULT_PREFIX_LEN 64
+
+/** @} */
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipoptsics 6lowpan options (for ipv6)
+ * @{
+ */
+/**
+ * Timeout for packet reassembly at the 6lowpan layer
+ * (should be < 60s)
+ */
+#ifdef SICSLOWPAN_CONF_MAXAGE
+#define SICSLOWPAN_REASS_MAXAGE SICSLOWPAN_CONF_MAXAGE
+#else
+#define SICSLOWPAN_REASS_MAXAGE 20
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Do we compress the IP header or not (default: no)
+ */
+#ifndef SICSLOWPAN_CONF_COMPRESSION
+#define SICSLOWPAN_CONF_COMPRESSION 0
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * If we use IPHC compression, how many address contexts do we support
+ */
+#ifndef SICSLOWPAN_CONF_MAX_ADDR_CONTEXTS
+#define SICSLOWPAN_CONF_MAX_ADDR_CONTEXTS 1
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Do we support 6lowpan fragmentation
+ */
+#ifndef SICSLOWPAN_CONF_FRAG
+#define SICSLOWPAN_CONF_FRAG  0
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipoptgeneral General configuration options
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * The size of the uIP packet buffer.
+ *
+ * The uIP packet buffer should not be smaller than 60 bytes, and does
+ * not need to be larger than 1514 bytes. Lower size results in lower
+ * TCP throughput, larger size results in higher TCP throughput.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE
+#define UIP_BUFSIZE UIP_LINK_MTU + UIP_LLH_LEN
+#else /* UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE */
+#define UIP_BUFSIZE UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE */
+
+
+/**
+ * Determines if statistics support should be compiled in.
+ *
+ * The statistics is useful for debugging and to show the user.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_STATISTICS
+#define UIP_STATISTICS  0
+#else /* UIP_CONF_STATISTICS */
+#define UIP_STATISTICS UIP_CONF_STATISTICS
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_STATISTICS */
+
+/**
+ * Determines if logging of certain events should be compiled in.
+ *
+ * This is useful mostly for debugging. The function uip_log()
+ * must be implemented to suit the architecture of the project, if
+ * logging is turned on.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_LOGGING
+#define UIP_LOGGING     0
+#else /* UIP_CONF_LOGGING */
+#define UIP_LOGGING     UIP_CONF_LOGGING
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_LOGGING */
+
+/**
+ * Broadcast support.
+ *
+ * This flag configures IP broadcast support. This is useful only
+ * together with UDP.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ *
+ */
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_BROADCAST
+#define UIP_BROADCAST 0
+#else /* UIP_CONF_BROADCAST */
+#define UIP_BROADCAST UIP_CONF_BROADCAST
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_BROADCAST */
+
+/**
+ * Print out a uIP log message.
+ *
+ * This function must be implemented by the module that uses uIP, and
+ * is called by uIP whenever a log message is generated.
+ */
+void uip_log(char *msg);
+
+/**
+ * The link level header length.
+ *
+ * This is the offset into the uip_buf where the IP header can be
+ * found. For Ethernet, this should be set to 14. For SLIP, this
+ * should be set to 0.
+ *
+ * \note we probably won't use this constant for other link layers than
+ * ethernet as they have variable header length (this is due to variable
+ * number and type of address fields and to optional security features)
+ * E.g.: 802.15.4 -> 2 + (1/2*4/8) + 0/5/6/10/14
+ *       802.11 -> 4 + (6*3/4) + 2
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_LLH_LEN
+#define UIP_LLH_LEN UIP_CONF_LLH_LEN
+#else /* UIP_LLH_LEN */
+#define UIP_LLH_LEN     14
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_LLH_LEN */
+
+/** @} */
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipoptcpu CPU architecture configuration
+ * @{
+ *
+ * The CPU architecture configuration is where the endianess of the
+ * CPU on which uIP is to be run is specified. Most CPUs today are
+ * little endian, and the most notable exception are the Motorolas
+ * which are big endian. The BYTE_ORDER macro should be changed to
+ * reflect the CPU architecture on which uIP is to be run.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * The byte order of the CPU architecture on which uIP is to be run.
+ *
+ * This option can be either UIP_BIG_ENDIAN (Motorola byte order) or
+ * UIP_LITTLE_ENDIAN (Intel byte order).
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_BYTE_ORDER
+#define UIP_BYTE_ORDER     UIP_CONF_BYTE_ORDER
+#else /* UIP_CONF_BYTE_ORDER */
+#define UIP_BYTE_ORDER     UIP_LITTLE_ENDIAN
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_BYTE_ORDER */
+
+/** @} */
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#include <ff.h>
+#include <stdbool.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+#include "timer.h"
+
+typedef uint8_t u8_t;
+typedef uint16_t u16_t;
+typedef uint32_t u32_t;
+typedef uint32_t uip_stats_t;
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipoptapp Application specific configurations
+ * @{
+ *
+ * An uIP application is implemented using a single application
+ * function that is called by uIP whenever a TCP/IP event occurs. The
+ * name of this function must be registered with uIP at compile time
+ * using the UIP_APPCALL definition.
+ *
+ * uIP applications can store the application state within the
+ * uip_conn structure by specifying the type of the application
+ * structure by typedef:ing the type uip_tcp_appstate_t and uip_udp_appstate_t.
+ *
+ * The file containing the definitions must be included in the
+ * uipopt.h file.
+ *
+ * The following example illustrates how this can look.
+ \code
+
+ void httpd_appcall(void);
+ #define UIP_APPCALL     httpd_appcall
+
+ struct httpd_state {
+ u8_t state;
+ u16_t count;
+ char *dataptr;
+ char *script;
+ };
+ typedef struct httpd_state uip_tcp_appstate_t
+ \endcode
+*/
+#define UIP_UDP_APPCALL uIPManagement_UDPCallback
+void UIP_UDP_APPCALL(void);
+
+/**
+ * \var #define UIP_APPCALL
+ *
+ * The name of the application function that uIP should call in
+ * response to TCP/IP events.
+ *
+ */
+#define UIP_APPCALL     uIPManagement_TCPCallback
+void UIP_APPCALL(void);
+
+/**
+ * \var typedef uip_tcp_appstate_t
+ *
+ * The type of the application state that is to be stored in the
+ * uip_conn structure. This usually is typedef:ed to a struct holding
+ * application state information.
+ */
+typedef union
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t  CurrentState;
+		uint8_t  NextState;
+
+		char     FileName[MAX_URI_LENGTH];
+		FIL      FileHandle;
+		bool     FileOpen;
+		uint32_t ACKedFilePos;
+		uint16_t SentChunkSize;
+	} HTTPServer;
+
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t  CurrentState;
+		uint8_t  NextState;
+
+		uint8_t  IssuedCommand;
+	} TELNETServer;
+} uip_tcp_appstate_t;
+
+/**
+ * \var typedef uip_udp_appstate_t
+ *
+ * The type of the application state that is to be stored in the
+ * uip_conn structure. This usually is typedef:ed to a struct holding
+ * application state information.
+ */
+typedef union
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t      CurrentState;
+		struct timer Timeout;
+
+		struct
+		{
+			uint8_t AllocatedIP[4];
+			uint8_t Netmask[4];
+			uint8_t GatewayIP[4];
+			uint8_t ServerIP[4];
+		} DHCPOffer_Data;
+	} DHCPClient;
+} uip_udp_appstate_t;
+/** @} */
+
+#endif /* __UIPOPT_H__ */
+/** @} */
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b2c6b3909
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.c
@@ -0,0 +1,162 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Mode management functions and variables. This file contains the LUFA code required to
+ *  manage the USB Mass Storage device mode.
+ */
+
+#include "USBDeviceMode.h"
+
+/** Message buffer for RNDIS messages processed by the RNDIS device class driver. */
+static uint8_t RNDIS_Message_Buffer[192];
+
+/** LUFA RNDIS Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all RNDIS Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber         = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+				.DataINEndpoint                 =
+					{
+						.Address                = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint                =
+					{
+						.Address                = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+				.NotificationEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address                = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+				.AdapterVendorDescription       = "LUFA RNDIS Adapter",
+				.AdapterMACAddress              = {{0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00}},
+				.MessageBuffer                  = RNDIS_Message_Buffer,
+				.MessageBufferLength            = sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Buffer),
+			},
+	};
+
+/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t Disk_MS_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber                = INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage,
+				.DataINEndpoint                 =
+					{
+						.Address                = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint                =
+					{
+						.Address                = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+				.TotalLUNs                 = 1,
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** USB device mode management task. This function manages the Mass Storage Device class driver when the device is
+ *  initialized in USB device mode.
+ */
+void USBDeviceMode_USBTask(void)
+{
+	if (USB_CurrentMode != USB_MODE_Device)
+	  return;
+
+	uIPManagement_ManageNetwork();
+
+	RNDIS_Device_USBTask(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device);
+	MS_Device_USBTask(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	uIPManagement_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	ConfigSuccess &= RNDIS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device);
+	ConfigSuccess &= MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	RNDIS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device);
+	MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Mass Storage class driver callback function the reception of SCSI commands from the host, which must be processed.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool CommandSuccess;
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+	CommandSuccess = SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(MSInterfaceInfo);
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	return CommandSuccess;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fe584e564
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.h
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for USBDeviceMode.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _USBDEVICEMODE_H_
+#define _USBDEVICEMODE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "Webserver.h"
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "Lib/uIPManagement.h"
+		#include "Lib/SCSI.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void USBDeviceMode_USBTask(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f4179e5ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.c
@@ -0,0 +1,172 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Host Mode management functions and variables. This file contains the LUFA code required to
+ *  manage the USB RNDIS host mode.
+ */
+
+#include "USBHostMode.h"
+
+/** LUFA RNDIS Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all RNDIS Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipe             =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTPipe            =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.NotificationPipe       =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 3),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.HostMaxPacketSize      = UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE,
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** USB host mode management task. This function manages the RNDIS Host class driver and uIP stack when the device is
+ *  initialized in USB host mode.
+ */
+void USBHostMode_USBTask(void)
+{
+	if (USB_CurrentMode != USB_MODE_Host)
+	  return;
+
+	uIPManagement_ManageNetwork();
+
+	RNDIS_Host_USBTask(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+	if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+	                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (RNDIS_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host,
+	                              ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (RNDIS_Host_InitializeDevice(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	uint32_t PacketFilter = (REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_DIRECTED | REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_BROADCAST);
+	if (RNDIS_Host_SetRNDISProperty(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host, OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER,
+	                                &PacketFilter, sizeof(PacketFilter)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (RNDIS_Host_QueryRNDISProperty(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host, OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS,
+	                                  &MACAddress, sizeof(MACAddress)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Initialize uIP stack */
+	uIPManagement_Init();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..be4eddbbb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.h
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for USBHostMode.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _USBHOSTMODE_H_
+#define _USBHOSTMODE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "Webserver.h"
+		#include "Lib/uIPManagement.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void USBHostMode_USBTask(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..caa372b94
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.c
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the Webserver project. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "Webserver.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Host)
+		  USBHostMode_USBTask();
+		else
+		  USBDeviceMode_USBTask();
+
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Dataflash_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init(USB_MODE_UID);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5879ff3ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.h
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Webserver.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _WEBSERVER_H_
+#define _WEBSERVER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+		#include "USBDeviceMode.h"
+		#include "USBHostMode.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY          LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING      (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY             LEDS_LED2
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR            (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY             (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..10aa71652
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage uIP Powered Webserver Project
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Dual Mode Host/Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC) \n
+ *        Mass Storage Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Remote NDIS (Microsoft Proprietary CDC Class Networking Standard) \n
+ *        Bulk-Only Transport</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Microsoft RNDIS Specification \n
+ *        USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n
+ *        USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n
+ *        SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n
+ *        SCSI Block Commands Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Simple HTTP webserver project. This project combines the LUFA library with the uIP TCP/IP full network stack and FatFS
+ *  library to create a RNDIS host capable of serving out HTTP web pages to multiple hosts simultaneously. This project
+ *  demonstrates how the libraries can be combined into a robust network enabled application, with the addition of a RNDIS
+ *  network device.
+ *
+ *  To use this project, plug the USB AVR into a computer, so that it enumerates as a standard Mass Storage and RNDIS composite
+ *  device. Load HTML files onto the disk, so that they can be served out to clients -- the default file to serve should be called
+ *  <i>index.htm</i>. Filenames must be in 8.3 format for them to be retrieved correctly by the webserver, and the total
+ *  requested file path must be equal to or less than the maximum URI length (\see \ref Sec_Options). Supply the included INF
+ *  file when requested on Windows machines to enable the RNDIS interface, and allow the files to be viewed on a standard web-browser
+ *  using the IP address 10.0.0.2.
+ *
+ *  When attached to a RNDIS class device, such as a USB (desktop) modem, the system will enumerate the device, set the
+ *  appropriate parameters needed for connectivity and begin listening for new HTTP connections on port 80 and TELNET
+ *  connections on port 23. The device IP, netmask and default gateway IP must be set to values appropriate for the RNDIS
+ *  device being used for this project to work if the DHCP client is disabled (see \ref Sec_Options) - otherwise, the device
+ *  will query the network's DHCP server for these parameters automatically.
+ *
+ *  When properly configured, the webserver can be accessed from any HTTP web browser by typing in the device's statically or
+ *  dynamically allocated IP address. The TELNET client can be accessed via any network socket app by connecting to the device
+ *  on port 23 on the device's statically or dynamically allocated IP address.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, this enables the TELNET server in addition to the HTTP webserver, which listens for incoming connections
+ *        and processes user commands.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, this enables the DHCP client for dynamic IP allocation of the network settings from a DHCP server.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>ENABLE_DHCP_SERVER</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, this enables the DHCP server for dynamic IP allocation of the network settings to a DHCP client.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>IP address that the webserver should use when connected to a RNDIS device (when ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT is not defined).</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>DEVICE_NETMASK</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Netmask that the webserver should use when connected to a RNDIS device (when ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT is not defined).</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>DEVICE_GATEWAY</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Default routing gateway that the webserver should use when connected to a RNDIS device (when ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT
+ *        is not defined).</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAX_URI_LENGTH</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Maximum length of a URI for the Webserver. This is the maximum file path, including subdirectories and separators.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>MAC address of the server used when sending Ethernet packets onto the bus.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ea6b4c66f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="RNDIS Webserver" id="lufa.projects.webserver.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.projects.webserver"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.projects.webserver" caption="RNDIS Webserver">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		RNDIS Webserver project, using the open source uIP network stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Dual Role"/>

+			<keyword value="RNDIS Class"/>

+			<keyword value="Mass Storage Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="Webserver.txt"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="LUFA Webserver RNDIS.inf"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="Webserver.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="USBDeviceMode.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="USBHostMode.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Webserver.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="USBDeviceMode.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="USBHostMode.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/DataflashManager.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/DataflashManager.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/DHCPClientApp.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/DHCPClientApp.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/DHCPCommon.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/DHCPCommon.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/DHCPServerApp.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/DHCPServerApp.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/HTTPServerApp.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/HTTPServerApp.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/SCSI.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/SCSI.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/TELNETServerApp.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/TELNETServerApp.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/uIPManagement.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/uIPManagement.h"/>

+

+		<build type="include-path" value="Lib/FATFs/"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/FATFs/ff.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/FATFs/ff.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/FATFs/diskio.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/FATFs/diskio.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/FATFs/integer.h"/>

+

+		<build type="include-path" value="Lib/uip/"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/uip/clock.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/uip/clock.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/uip/timer.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/uip/timer.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/uip/uip.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/uip/uip.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/uip/uip_arp.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/uip/uip_arp.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/uip/uip-split.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/uip/uip-split.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/uip/uipopt.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.dataflash"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.spi"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..419cf11fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2365 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - uIP Powered Webserver Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = */uip/* \
+                         */FATFs/*
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2a7bb37a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = Webserver
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c USBDeviceMode.c USBHostMode.c Lib/SCSI.c Lib/DataflashManager.c \
+               Lib/uIPManagement.c Lib/DHCPCommon.c Lib/DHCPClientApp.c Lib/DHCPServerApp.c Lib/HTTPServerApp.c \
+               Lib/TELNETServerApp.c Lib/uip/uip.c Lib/uip/uip_arp.c Lib/uip/timer.c Lib/uip/clock.c \
+               Lib/uip/uip-split.c Lib/FATFs/diskio.c Lib/FATFs/ff.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ -ILib/uip/ -ILib/FATFs/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7163fc9c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
+ *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
+ *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
+ *  makefile or build system.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#define AUX_LINE_PORT              PORTB
+	#define AUX_LINE_PIN               PINB
+	#define AUX_LINE_DDR               DDRB
+	#define AUX_LINE_MASK              (1 << 4)
+
+//	#define ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
+	#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
+
+	#define VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL        2
+	#define VTARGET_REF_VOLTS          3.3
+	#define VTARGET_SCALE_FACTOR       2
+//	#define VTARGET_USE_INTERNAL_REF
+//	#define NO_VTARGET_DETECT
+//	#define XCK_RESCUE_CLOCK_ENABLE
+//	#define INVERTED_ISP_MISO
+
+//	#define LIBUSB_DRIVER_COMPAT
+//	#define RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT
+//	#define FIRMWARE_VERSION_MINOR     0x11
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ec38aa647
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      16
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/LUFA XPLAIN Bridge.inf b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/LUFA XPLAIN Bridge.inf
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..45840e8bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/LUFA XPLAIN Bridge.inf
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+;************************************************************
+; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+;************************************************************
+
+[DefaultInstall]
+CopyINF="LUFA XPLAIN Bridge.inf"
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+DriverVer=7/1/2012,10.0.0.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTx86, NTamd64, NTia64
+
+[SourceDisksNames]
+
+[SourceDisksFiles]
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+[DriverInstall]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=FakeModemCopyFileSection
+AddReg=DriverInstall.AddReg
+
+[DriverInstall.Services]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, LowerFilter_Service_Inst
+
+[DriverInstall.AddReg]
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"msports.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B
+
+[DeviceList.NTx86]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B
+
+[DeviceList.NTia64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org"
+DESCRIPTION="LUFA XPLAIN Bridge"
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/SoftUART.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/SoftUART.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0290ca204
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/SoftUART.c
@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  David Prentice (david.prentice [at] farming [dot] uk)
+  Copyright 2010  Peter Danneger
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Software UART for both data transmission and reception. This
+ *  code continuously monitors the ring buffers set up by the main
+ *  project source file and reads/writes data as it becomes available.
+ */
+
+#include "SoftUART.h"
+
+/** Total number of bits remaining to be sent in the current frame */
+static uint8_t TX_BitsRemaining;
+
+/** Temporary data variable to hold the byte being transmitted as it is shifted out */
+static uint8_t TX_Data;
+
+/** Total number of bits remaining to be received in the current frame */
+static uint8_t RX_BitsRemaining;
+
+/** Temporary data variable to hold the byte being received as it is shifted in */
+static uint8_t RX_Data;
+
+
+/** Initializes the software UART, ready for data transmission and reception into the global ring buffers. */
+void SoftUART_Init(void)
+{
+	/* Set TX pin to output high, enable RX pull-up */
+	STXPORT |= (1 << STX);
+	STXDDR  |= (1 << STX);
+	SRXPORT |= (1 << SRX);
+
+	/* Enable INT0 for the detection of incoming start bits that signal the start of a byte */
+	EICRA  = (1 << ISC01);
+	EIMSK  = (1 << INT0);
+
+	/* Set the transmission and reception timer compare values for the default baud rate */
+	SoftUART_SetBaud(9600);
+
+	/* Setup reception timer compare ISR */
+	TIMSK1 = (1 << OCIE1A);
+
+	/* Setup transmission timer compare ISR and start the timer */
+	TIMSK3 = (1 << OCIE3A);
+	TCCR3B = ((1 << CS30) | (1 << WGM32));
+}
+
+/** ISR to detect the start of a bit being sent to the software UART. */
+ISR(INT0_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	/* Reset the number of reception bits remaining counter */
+	RX_BitsRemaining = 8;
+
+	/* Reset the bit reception timer to -(1/2) of the total bit time, so that the first data bit is
+	 * sampled mid way through the total bit time, making reception more robust.
+	 */
+	TCNT1 = -(OCR1A >> 1);
+
+	/* Check to see that the pin is still low (prevents glitches from starting a frame reception) */
+	if (!(SRXPIN & (1 << SRX)))
+	{
+		/* Disable start bit detection ISR while the next byte is received */
+		EIMSK = 0;
+
+		/* Start the reception timer */
+		TCCR1B = ((1 << CS10) | (1 << WGM12));
+	}
+}
+
+/** ISR to manage the reception of bits to the software UART. */
+ISR(TIMER1_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	/* Cache the current RX pin value for later checking */
+	uint8_t SRX_Cached = (SRXPIN & (1 << SRX));
+
+	/* Check if reception has finished */
+	if (RX_BitsRemaining)
+	{
+		/* Shift the current received bit mask to the next bit position */
+		RX_Data >>= 1;
+		RX_BitsRemaining--;
+
+		/* Store next bit into the received data variable */
+		if (SRX_Cached)
+		  RX_Data |= (1 << 7);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Disable the reception timer as all data has now been received, re-enable start bit detection ISR */
+		TCCR1B = 0;
+		EIFR   = (1 << INTF0);
+		EIMSK  = (1 << INT0);
+
+		/* Reception complete, store the received byte if stop bit valid */
+		if (SRX_Cached)
+		  RingBuffer_Insert(&UARTtoUSB_Buffer, RX_Data);
+	}
+}
+
+/** ISR to manage the transmission of bits via the software UART. */
+ISR(TIMER3_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	/* Check if transmission has finished */
+	if (TX_BitsRemaining)
+	{
+		/* Set the TX line to the value of the next bit in the byte to send */
+		if (TX_Data & (1 << 0))
+		  STXPORT &= ~(1 << STX);
+		else
+		  STXPORT |=  (1 << STX);
+
+		/* Shift the transmission byte to move the next bit into position and decrement the bits remaining counter */
+		TX_Data >>= 1;
+		TX_BitsRemaining--;
+	}
+	else if (!(RX_BitsRemaining) && !(RingBuffer_IsEmpty(&USBtoUART_Buffer)))
+	{
+		/* Start bit - TX line low */
+		STXPORT &= ~(1 << STX);
+
+		/* Transmission complete, get the next byte to send (if available) */
+		TX_Data          = ~RingBuffer_Remove(&USBtoUART_Buffer);
+		TX_BitsRemaining = 9;
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/SoftUART.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/SoftUART.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..59a2d9c29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/SoftUART.h
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  David Prentice (david.prentice [at] farming [dot] uk)
+  Copyright 2010  Peter Danneger
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for SoftUART.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _SOFT_UART_
+#define _SOFT_UART_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "../XPLAINBridge.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define SRX        PD0
+		#define SRXPIN     PIND
+		#define SRXPORT    PORTD
+
+		#define STX        PD1
+		#define STXPORT    PORTD
+		#define STXDDR     DDRD
+
+	/* Inline Functions: */
+		static inline void SoftUART_SetBaud(const uint32_t Baud)
+		{
+			uint16_t BitTime = ((F_CPU / Baud) - 1);
+
+			OCR1A = BitTime;
+			OCR3A = BitTime;
+		}
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SoftUART_Init(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/USARTDescriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/USARTDescriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..439a5f58e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/USARTDescriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,245 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "USARTDescriptors.h"
+
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM USART_DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+	.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x204B,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = USART_STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = USART_STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USART_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM USART_ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USART_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED,
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Header =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.CDCSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_ACM =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM,
+
+			.Capabilities           = 0x06,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Union =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union,
+
+			.MasterInterfaceNumber  = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.SlaveInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_NotificationEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM USART_LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM USART_ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM USART_ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA XPLAIN Bridge");
+
+/** Descriptor retrieval function for the USART Bridge descriptors. This function is in turn called by the GetDescriptor
+ *  callback function in the main source file, to retrieve the device's descriptors when in USART bridge mode.
+ */
+uint16_t USART_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                             const uint8_t wIndex,
+                             const void** const DescriptorAddress,
+                             uint8_t* const DescriptorMemorySpace)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	*DescriptorMemorySpace = MEMSPACE_FLASH;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &USART_DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &USART_ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USART_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case USART_STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &USART_LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&USART_LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case USART_STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &USART_ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&USART_ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case USART_STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &USART_ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&USART_ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/USARTDescriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/USARTDescriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c77931cf9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/USARTDescriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for USARTDescriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _USART_DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _USART_DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 2)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+
+			// CDC Control Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t    CDC_Functional_Header;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t       CDC_Functional_ACM;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t     CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_NotificationEndpoint;
+
+			// CDC Data Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
+		} USART_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum USART_InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI = 0, /**< CDC CCI interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI = 1, /**< CDC DCI interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum USART_StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			USART_STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			USART_STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			USART_STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t USART_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                             const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                             const void** const DescriptorAddress,
+		                             uint8_t* const DescriptorMemorySpace);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7c24c973e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.c
@@ -0,0 +1,294 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the XPLAINBridge project. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "XPLAINBridge.h"
+
+/** Current firmware mode, making the device behave as either a programmer or a USART bridge */
+bool CurrentFirmwareMode = MODE_USART_BRIDGE;
+
+/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber         = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+				.DataINEndpoint                 =
+					{
+						.Address                = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint                =
+					{
+						.Address                = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+				.NotificationEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address                = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Circular buffer to hold data from the host before it is sent to the device via the serial port. */
+RingBuffer_t   USBtoUART_Buffer;
+
+/** Underlying data buffer for \ref USBtoUART_Buffer, where the stored bytes are located. */
+static uint8_t USBtoUART_Buffer_Data[128];
+
+/** Circular buffer to hold data from the serial port before it is sent to the host. */
+RingBuffer_t   UARTtoUSB_Buffer;
+
+/** Underlying data buffer for \ref UARTtoUSB_Buffer, where the stored bytes are located. */
+static uint8_t UARTtoUSB_Buffer_Data[128];
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		if (CurrentFirmwareMode == MODE_USART_BRIDGE)
+		  UARTBridge_Task();
+		else
+		  AVRISP_Task();
+
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+void AVRISP_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Must be in the configured state for the AVRISP code to process data */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	V2Params_UpdateParamValues();
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPADDR);
+
+	/* Check to see if a V2 Protocol command has been received */
+	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_BUSY);
+
+		/* Pass off processing of the V2 Protocol command to the V2 Protocol handler */
+		V2Protocol_ProcessCommand();
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	}
+}
+
+void UARTBridge_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Must be in the configured state for the USART Bridge code to process data */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Only try to read in bytes from the CDC interface if the transmit buffer is not full */
+	if (!(RingBuffer_IsFull(&USBtoUART_Buffer)))
+	{
+		int16_t ReceivedByte = CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+
+		/* Read bytes from the USB OUT endpoint into the UART transmit buffer */
+		if (!(ReceivedByte < 0))
+		  RingBuffer_Insert(&USBtoUART_Buffer, ReceivedByte);
+	}
+
+	/* Check if the UART receive buffer flush timer has expired or buffer is nearly full */
+	uint16_t BufferCount = RingBuffer_GetCount(&UARTtoUSB_Buffer);
+	if ((TIFR0 & (1 << TOV0)) || (BufferCount > 200))
+	{
+		/* Clear flush timer expiry flag */
+		TIFR0 |= (1 << TOV0);
+
+		/* Read bytes from the USART receive buffer into the USB IN endpoint */
+		while (BufferCount--)
+		{
+			/* Try to send the next byte of data to the host, abort if there is an error without dequeuing */
+			if (CDC_Device_SendByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface,
+									RingBuffer_Peek(&UARTtoUSB_Buffer)) != ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError)
+			{
+				break;
+			}
+
+			/* Dequeue the already sent byte from the buffer now we have confirmed that no transmission error occurred */
+			RingBuffer_Remove(&UARTtoUSB_Buffer);
+		}
+	}
+
+	CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Disable JTAG debugging */
+	MCUCR |= (1 << JTD);
+	MCUCR |= (1 << JTD);
+
+	/* Enable pull-up on the JTAG TDI pin so we can use it to select the mode */
+	PORTF |= (1 << 7);
+	Delay_MS(10);
+
+	/* Select the firmware mode based on the JTD pin's value */
+	CurrentFirmwareMode = (PINF & (1 << 7)) ? MODE_USART_BRIDGE : MODE_PDI_PROGRAMMER;
+
+	/* Re-enable JTAG debugging */
+	MCUCR &= ~(1 << JTD);
+	MCUCR &= ~(1 << JTD);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	SoftUART_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	#if defined(RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT)
+	UpdateCurrentCompatibilityMode();
+	#endif
+
+	/* USB Stack Initialization */
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	/* Configure the device endpoints according to the selected mode */
+	if (CurrentFirmwareMode == MODE_USART_BRIDGE)
+	{
+		ConfigSuccess &= CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+
+		/* Configure the UART flush timer - run at Fcpu/1024 for maximum interval before overflow */
+		TCCR0B = ((1 << CS02) | (1 << CS00));
+
+		/* Initialize ring buffers used to hold serial data between USB and software UART interfaces */
+		RingBuffer_InitBuffer(&USBtoUART_Buffer, USBtoUART_Buffer_Data, sizeof(USBtoUART_Buffer_Data));
+		RingBuffer_InitBuffer(&UARTtoUSB_Buffer, UARTtoUSB_Buffer_Data, sizeof(UARTtoUSB_Buffer_Data));
+
+		/* Start the software USART */
+		SoftUART_Init();
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK, AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE, 1);
+
+		if ((AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK) != (AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPADDR & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK))
+		  ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK, AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE, 1);
+
+		/* Configure the V2 protocol packet handler */
+		V2Protocol_Init();
+	}
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	if (CurrentFirmwareMode == MODE_USART_BRIDGE)
+	  CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the CDC Class driver Line Encoding Changed event.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the CDC class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ */
+void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Change the software UART's baud rate to match the new baud rate */
+	SoftUART_SetBaud(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS);
+}
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  wValue                 Descriptor type and index to retrieve
+ *  \param[in]  wIndex                 Sub-index to retrieve (such as a localized string language)
+ *  \param[out] DescriptorAddress      Address of the retrieved descriptor
+ *  \param[out] DescriptorMemorySpace  Memory space that the descriptor is stored in
+ *
+ *  \return Length of the retrieved descriptor in bytes, or NO_DESCRIPTOR if the descriptor was not found
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress,
+		                            uint8_t* const DescriptorMemorySpace)
+{
+	/* Return the correct descriptors based on the selected mode */
+	if (CurrentFirmwareMode == MODE_USART_BRIDGE)
+	  return USART_GetDescriptor(wValue, wIndex, DescriptorAddress, DescriptorMemorySpace);
+	else
+	  return AVRISP_GetDescriptor(wValue, wIndex, DescriptorAddress, DescriptorMemorySpace);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..73da4d2ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.h
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for XPLAINBridge.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _XPLAIN_BRIDGE_H_
+#define _XPLAIN_BRIDGE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <util/delay.h>
+
+		#include "USARTDescriptors.h"
+
+		#include "AVRISPDescriptors.h"
+		#include "Lib/V2Protocol.h"
+		#include "Lib/SoftUART.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/RingBuffer.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY     LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        LEDS_NO_LEDS
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_BUSY             LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** Firmware mode define for the USART Bridge mode. */
+		#define MODE_USART_BRIDGE        false
+
+		/** Firmware mode define for the AVRISP Programmer mode. */
+		#define MODE_PDI_PROGRAMMER      true
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern bool         CurrentFirmwareMode;
+		extern RingBuffer_t UARTtoUSB_Buffer;
+		extern RingBuffer_t USBtoUART_Buffer;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void AVRISP_Task(void);
+		void UARTBridge_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+
+		void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo);
+
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress,
+		                                    uint8_t* const DescriptorMemorySpace)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(4);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..45557ef97
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage XPLAIN UART Bridge/PDI Programmer Project
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  \li AT90USB1287
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>1) Device</td>
+ *    <td>2) Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>1) Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *    <td>2) Vendor Specific Class</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>1) Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ *    <td>2) N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>1) USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *    <td>2) Atmel AVRISP MKII Protocol Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>1) Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *    <td>2) Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  This project serves a dual purpose. When loaded into the USB AVR on the XPLAIN board, it will act as either a USB to Serial
+ *  converter for the XPLAIN's hardware USART (at a speed of 9600 baud), or an AVRStudio compatible PDI programmer for the XMEGA.
+ *  This project replaces the firmware preloaded onto the XPLAIN's onboard AT90USB1287 microcontroller.
+ *
+ *  When power to the board is applied, the TDI pin (pin 9) of the USB AVR's JTAG port is read. If the pin is left high, the device
+ *  will enumerate as a regular COM port on the host, which can then be opened and data exchanged between the XMEGA and Host as if
+ *  the XMEGA was connected directly to the host's serial port. If the pin is pulled low by shorting it to GND (pin 10), the device
+ *  will enumerate as an AVRISP-MKII to the host, so that the XMEGA can be reprogrammed by AVRStudio or other compatible software
+ *  such as avrdude by connecting to the board as if it was an Atmel AVRISP-MKII programmer.
+ *
+ *  After running this project in serial bridge mode for the first time on a new computer, you will need to supply the .INF file
+ *  located in this project project's directory as the device's driver when running under Windows. This will enable Windows to use
+ *  its inbuilt CDC virtual serial drivers, negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other Operating Systems should
+ *  automatically use their own inbuilt CDC-ACM drivers.
+ *
+ *  In serial bridge mode, the UART baud rate can be altered through the host terminal software to select a new baud rate - the default
+ *  baud is 9600. Note that parity, data bits and stop bits are fixed at none, eight and one respectively can cannot be altered. Changes
+ *  to the connection's parity, data bits or stop bits are ignored by the firmware. As the serial link between the controllers on the
+ *  XPLAIN is software emulated by the USB AVR, not all baud rates will work correctly.
+ *
+ *  This project relies on files from the LUFA AVRISP-MKII project for compilation.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>LIBUSB_DRIVER_COMPAT</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Define to switch to a non-standard endpoint scheme, breaking compatibility with AVRStudio under Windows but making
+ *        the code compatible with software such as avrdude (all platforms) that use the libUSB driver.
+ *
+ *        \note This option is incompatible with \c RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile LUFA_OPTS</td>
+ *    <td>Define to make the /RESET line of the AVR toggle between Jungo and libUSB driver compatibility modes. Each time the AVR is
+ *        reset externally via the reset pin, the compatibility mode will be toggled. The compatibility mode is preserved between
+ *        power cycles and is not toggled via other forms of reset such as Watchdog or Brown Out.
+ *
+ *        When this option is enabled, all board LEDs will flash twice on startup for Jungo compatibility mode, and five times for
+ *        libUSB compatibility mode.
+ *
+ *        \note This option is incompatible with \c LIBUSB_DRIVER_COMPAT.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>FIRMWARE_VERSION_MINOR</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Define to set the minor firmware revision nunber reported to the host on request. By default this will use a firmware version compatible
+ *        with the latest Atmel IDE version, however if desired the reported minor value can be adjusted here.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7aa2107cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="XPLAIN Bridge" id="lufa.projects.xplain_bridge.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.projects.xplain_bridge"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.projects.xplain_bridge" caption="XPLAIN Bridge">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Bridge firmware for the original (green) XPLAIN board, for programming and USB virtual serial communications.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="CDC Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="XPLAINBridge.txt"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="LUFA XPLAIN Bridge.inf"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="XPLAINBridge.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="USARTDescriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="XPLAINBridge.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="USARTDescriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/SoftUART.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/SoftUART.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.projects.avrispmkii_clone.src"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ringbuffer"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f3498adb9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - XPLAIN Serial Bridge/PDI Programmer Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..68e0a7088
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+AVRISP_PATH  = ../AVRISP-MKII
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = XPLAIN
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = XPLAINBridge
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Lib/SoftUART.c USARTDescriptors.c $(AVRISP_PATH)/AVRISPDescriptors.c $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/V2Protocol.c \
+               $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.c $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.c $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.c \
+               $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.c $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.c $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.c \
+               $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ -I$(AVRISP_PATH)
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Since this project borrows files from the AVRISP-MKII project which may also have an
+# identical OBJDIR directory, we need to enforce the use of this project's object file
+# directory as the one where the build object files are to be stored by pre-pending the
+# absolute path of the current project to the OBJDIR variable.
+ifneq ($(OBJDIR),)
+  override OBJDIR:=$(shell pwd)/$(OBJDIR)
+endif
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6552c5940
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+
+# Makefile to build all the LUFA Projects. Call with "make all" to
+# rebuild all projects.
+
+# Projects are pre-cleaned before each one is built, to ensure any
+# custom LUFA library build options are reflected in the compiled
+# code.
+
+PROJECT_DIRECTORIES := $(shell ls -d */)
+
+# This makefile is potentially infinitely recursive if something really bad
+# happens when determining the set of project directories - hard-abort if
+# more than 10 levels deep to avoid angry emails.
+ifeq ($(MAKELEVEL), 10)
+   $(error EMERGENCY ABORT: INFINITE RECURSION DETECTED)
+endif
+
+# Need to special-case building without a per-project object directory
+ifeq ($(OBJDIR),)
+   # If no target specified, force "clean all" and disallow parallel build
+   ifeq ($(MAKECMDGOALS),)
+      MAKECMDGOALS := clean all
+      .NOTPARALLEL:
+   endif
+
+   # If one of the targets is to build, force "clean" beforehand and disallow parallel build
+   ifneq ($(findstring all, $(MAKECMDGOALS)),)
+      MAKECMDGOALS := clean $(MAKECMDGOALS)
+      .NOTPARALLEL:
+   endif
+endif
+
+%: $(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES)
+	@echo . > /dev/null
+
+$(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES):
+	@$(MAKE) -C $@ $(MAKECMDGOALS)
+
+.PHONY: $(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES)
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/README.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/README.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..80a5c81d8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/README.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+
+                   _   _ _ ___ _
+                  | | | | | __/ \
+                  | |_| U | _| o | - The Lightweight USB
+                  |___|___|_||_n_|    Framework for AVRs
+                =========================================
+                          Written by Dean Camera
+                  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+
+                         http://www.lufa-lib.org
+                =========================================
+
+               LUFA is donation supported. To support LUFA,
+             please donate at http://www.lufa-lib.org/donate
+
+               Released under a modified MIT license - see
+                  LUFA/License.txt for license details.
+
+                For Commercial Licensing information, see
+                     http://www.lufa-lib.org/license
+
+
+This package contains the complete LUFA library, demos, user-submitted
+projects and bootloaders for use with compatible microcontroller models.
+LUFA is a simple to use, lightweight framework which sits atop the hardware
+USB controller in specific AVR microcontroller models, and allows for the
+quick and easy creation of complex USB devices and hosts.
+
+To get started, you will need to install the "Doxygen" documentation
+generation tool. If you use Linux, this can be installed via the "doxygen"
+package in your chosen package management tool - under Ubuntu, this can be
+achieved by running the following command in the terminal:
+
+   sudo apt-get install doxygen
+
+Other package managers and distributions will have similar methods to
+install Doxygen. In Windows, you can download a prebuilt installer for
+Doxygen from its website, www.doxygen.org.
+
+Once installed, you can then use the Doxygen tool to generate the library
+documentation from the command line or terminal of your operating system. To
+do this, open your terminal or command line to the root directory of the
+LUFA package, and type the following command:
+
+   make doxygen
+
+Which will recursively generate documentation for all elements in the
+library - the core, plus all demos, projects and bootloaders. Generated
+documentation will then be available by opening the file "index.html" of the
+created Documentation/html/ subdirectories inside each project folder.
+
+The documentation for the library itself (but not the documentation for the
+individual demos, projects or bootloaders) is also available as a separate
+package from the project webpage for convenience if Doxygen cannot be
+installed.
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..880c0cf8d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+
+# Makefile to build the LUFA library, projects and demos.
+
+# Call with "make all" to rebuild everything, "make clean" to clean everything,
+# "make mostlyclean" to remove all intermediary files but preserve any binaries,
+# "make doxygen" to document everything with Doxygen (if installed). Call
+# "make help" for additional target build information within a specific project.
+
+all:
+
+%:
+	@echo Executing \"make $@\" on all LUFA library elements.
+	@echo
+	$(MAKE) -C LUFA $@
+	$(MAKE) -C Demos $@
+	$(MAKE) -C Projects $@
+	$(MAKE) -C Bootloaders $@
+	@echo
+	@echo LUFA \"make $@\" operation complete.
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0 b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0
deleted file mode 160000
-Subproject 7c2e6c1bcdcc22cfdbd82edd9d8fc4c4276ead4
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/.gitattributes b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6238b035a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+# Auto detect text files and perform LF normalization
+* text=auto
+* text eol=lf
+
+# Custom for Visual Studio
+*.cs     diff=csharp
+*.sln    merge=union
+*.csproj merge=union
+*.vbproj merge=union
+*.fsproj merge=union
+*.dbproj merge=union
+
+# Standard to msysgit
+*.doc	 diff=astextplain
+*.DOC	 diff=astextplain
+*.docx diff=astextplain
+*.DOCX diff=astextplain
+*.dot  diff=astextplain
+*.DOT  diff=astextplain
+*.pdf  diff=astextplain
+*.PDF	 diff=astextplain
+*.rtf	 diff=astextplain
+*.RTF	 diff=astextplain
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/.gitignore b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/.gitignore
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7e69f457b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/.gitignore
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+*.bak
+*.zip
+*.rar
+build/
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/.gitmodules b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/.gitmodules
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..32a0783a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/.gitmodules
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+[submodule "examples/testusbhostFAT/generic_storage"]
+	path = examples/testusbhostFAT/generic_storage
+	url = https://github.com/xxxajk/generic_storage
+[submodule "examples/testusbhostFAT/xmem2"]
+	path = examples/testusbhostFAT/xmem2
+	url = https://github.com/xxxajk/xmem2
+[submodule "examples/testusbhostFAT/Arduino_Makefile_master"]
+	path = examples/testusbhostFAT/Arduino_Makefile_master
+	url = https://github.com/xxxajk/Arduino_Makefile_master
+[submodule "examples/testusbhostFAT/RTClib"]
+	path = examples/testusbhostFAT/RTClib
+	url = https://github.com/xxxajk/RTClib
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/BTD.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/BTD.cpp
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..bcfba14b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/BTD.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,1364 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2012 Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics. All rights reserved.
+
+ This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+ General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+ Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+ this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+ on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+ the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+ Contact information
+ -------------------
+
+ Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics
+ Web      :  http://www.tkjelectronics.com
+ e-mail   :  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#include "BTD.h"
+// To enable serial debugging see "settings.h"
+//#define EXTRADEBUG // Uncomment to get even more debugging data
+
+const uint8_t BTD::BTD_CONTROL_PIPE = 0;
+const uint8_t BTD::BTD_EVENT_PIPE = 1;
+const uint8_t BTD::BTD_DATAIN_PIPE = 2;
+const uint8_t BTD::BTD_DATAOUT_PIPE = 3;
+
+BTD::BTD(USB *p) :
+connectToWii(false),
+pairWithWii(false),
+connectToHIDDevice(false),
+pairWithHIDDevice(false),
+pUsb(p), // Pointer to USB class instance - mandatory
+bAddress(0), // Device address - mandatory
+bNumEP(1), // If config descriptor needs to be parsed
+qNextPollTime(0), // Reset NextPollTime
+pollInterval(0),
+bPollEnable(false) // Don't start polling before dongle is connected
+{
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < BTD_NUM_SERVICES; i++)
+                btService[i] = NULL;
+
+        Initialize(); // Set all variables, endpoint structs etc. to default values
+
+        if(pUsb) // Register in USB subsystem
+                pUsb->RegisterDeviceClass(this); // Set devConfig[] entry
+}
+
+uint8_t BTD::ConfigureDevice(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed) {
+        const uint8_t constBufSize = sizeof (USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR);
+        uint8_t buf[constBufSize];
+        USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR * udd = reinterpret_cast<USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR*>(buf);
+        uint8_t rcode;
+        UsbDevice *p = NULL;
+        EpInfo *oldep_ptr = NULL;
+
+        Initialize(); // Set all variables, endpoint structs etc. to default values
+
+        AddressPool &addrPool = pUsb->GetAddressPool(); // Get memory address of USB device address pool
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nBTD ConfigureDevice"), 0x80);
+#endif
+
+        if(bAddress) { // Check if address has already been assigned to an instance
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nAddress in use"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                return USB_ERROR_CLASS_INSTANCE_ALREADY_IN_USE;
+        }
+
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(0); // Get pointer to pseudo device with address 0 assigned
+        if(!p) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nAddress not found"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+        }
+
+        if(!p->epinfo) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nepinfo is null"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                return USB_ERROR_EPINFO_IS_NULL;
+        }
+
+        oldep_ptr = p->epinfo; // Save old pointer to EP_RECORD of address 0
+        p->epinfo = epInfo; // Temporary assign new pointer to epInfo to p->epinfo in order to avoid toggle inconsistence
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+        rcode = pUsb->getDevDescr(0, 0, constBufSize, (uint8_t*)buf); // Get device descriptor - addr, ep, nbytes, data
+
+        p->epinfo = oldep_ptr; // Restore p->epinfo
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailGetDevDescr;
+
+        bAddress = addrPool.AllocAddress(parent, false, port); // Allocate new address according to device class
+
+        if(!bAddress) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nOut of address space"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                return USB_ERROR_OUT_OF_ADDRESS_SPACE_IN_POOL;
+        }
+
+        epInfo[0].maxPktSize = udd->bMaxPacketSize0; // Extract Max Packet Size from device descriptor
+        epInfo[1].epAddr = udd->bNumConfigurations; // Steal and abuse from epInfo structure to save memory
+
+        VID = udd->idVendor;
+        PID = udd->idProduct;
+
+        return USB_ERROR_CONFIG_REQUIRES_ADDITIONAL_RESET;
+
+FailGetDevDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailGetDevDescr(rcode);
+#endif
+        if(rcode != hrJERR)
+                rcode = USB_ERROR_FailGetDevDescr;
+        Release();
+        return rcode;
+};
+
+uint8_t BTD::Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed) {
+        uint8_t rcode;
+        uint8_t num_of_conf = epInfo[1].epAddr; // Number of configurations
+        epInfo[1].epAddr = 0;
+
+        AddressPool &addrPool = pUsb->GetAddressPool();
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nBTD Init"), 0x80);
+#endif
+        UsbDevice *p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(bAddress); // Get pointer to assigned address record
+
+        if(!p) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nAddress not found"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+        }
+
+        delay(300); // Assign new address to the device
+
+        rcode = pUsb->setAddr(0, 0, bAddress); // Assign new address to the device
+        if(rcode) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nsetAddr: "), 0x80);
+                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (rcode, 0x80);
+#endif
+                p->lowspeed = false;
+                goto Fail;
+        }
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nAddr: "), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (bAddress, 0x80);
+#endif
+
+        p->lowspeed = false;
+
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(bAddress); // Get pointer to assigned address record
+        if(!p) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nAddress not found"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+        }
+
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+
+        rcode = pUsb->setEpInfoEntry(bAddress, 1, epInfo); // Assign epInfo to epinfo pointer - only EP0 is known
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetDevTblEntry;
+
+        if(VID == PS3_VID && (PID == PS3_PID || PID == PS3NAVIGATION_PID || PID == PS3MOVE_PID)) {
+                delay(100);
+                rcode = pUsb->setConf(bAddress, epInfo[ BTD_CONTROL_PIPE ].epAddr, 1); // We only need the Control endpoint, so we don't have to initialize the other endpoints of device
+                if(rcode)
+                        goto FailSetConfDescr;
+
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                if(PID == PS3_PID || PID == PS3NAVIGATION_PID) {
+                        if(PID == PS3_PID)
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nDualshock 3 Controller Connected"), 0x80);
+                        else // It must be a navigation controller
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nNavigation Controller Connected"), 0x80);
+                } else // It must be a Motion controller
+                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nMotion Controller Connected"), 0x80);
+#endif
+
+                if(my_bdaddr[0] == 0x00 && my_bdaddr[1] == 0x00 && my_bdaddr[2] == 0x00 && my_bdaddr[3] == 0x00 && my_bdaddr[4] == 0x00 && my_bdaddr[5] == 0x00) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nPlease plug in the dongle before trying to pair with the PS3 Controller\r\nor set the Bluetooth address in the constructor of the PS3BT class"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                } else {
+                        if(PID == PS3_PID || PID == PS3NAVIGATION_PID)
+                                setBdaddr(my_bdaddr); // Set internal Bluetooth address
+                        else
+                                setMoveBdaddr(my_bdaddr); // Set internal Bluetooth address
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nBluetooth Address was set to: "), 0x80);
+                        for(int8_t i = 5; i > 0; i--) {
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (my_bdaddr[i], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(":"), 0x80);
+                        }
+                        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (my_bdaddr[0], 0x80);
+#endif
+                }
+
+                pUsb->setConf(bAddress, epInfo[ BTD_CONTROL_PIPE ].epAddr, 0); // Reset configuration value
+                pUsb->setAddr(bAddress, 0, 0); // Reset address
+                Release(); // Release device
+                return USB_DEV_CONFIG_ERROR_DEVICE_NOT_SUPPORTED; // Return
+        } else {
+                // Check if attached device is a Bluetooth dongle and fill endpoint data structure
+                // First interface in the configuration must have Bluetooth assigned Class/Subclass/Protocol
+                // And 3 endpoints - interrupt-IN, bulk-IN, bulk-OUT, not necessarily in this order
+                for(uint8_t i = 0; i < num_of_conf; i++) {
+                        if(VID == IOGEAR_GBU521_VID && PID == IOGEAR_GBU521_PID) {
+                                ConfigDescParser<USB_CLASS_VENDOR_SPECIFIC, WI_SUBCLASS_RF, WI_PROTOCOL_BT, CP_MASK_COMPARE_ALL> confDescrParser(this); // Needed for the IOGEAR GBU521
+                                rcode = pUsb->getConfDescr(bAddress, 0, i, &confDescrParser);
+                        } else {
+                                ConfigDescParser<USB_CLASS_WIRELESS_CTRL, WI_SUBCLASS_RF, WI_PROTOCOL_BT, CP_MASK_COMPARE_ALL> confDescrParser(this);
+                                rcode = pUsb->getConfDescr(bAddress, 0, i, &confDescrParser);
+                        }
+                        if(rcode) // Check error code
+                                goto FailGetConfDescr;
+                        if(bNumEP >= BTD_MAX_ENDPOINTS) // All endpoints extracted
+                                break;
+                }
+
+                if(bNumEP < BTD_MAX_ENDPOINTS)
+                        goto FailUnknownDevice;
+
+                // Assign epInfo to epinfo pointer - this time all 3 endpoins
+                rcode = pUsb->setEpInfoEntry(bAddress, bNumEP, epInfo);
+                if(rcode)
+                        goto FailSetDevTblEntry;
+
+                // Set Configuration Value
+                rcode = pUsb->setConf(bAddress, epInfo[ BTD_CONTROL_PIPE ].epAddr, bConfNum);
+                if(rcode)
+                        goto FailSetConfDescr;
+
+                hci_num_reset_loops = 100; // only loop 100 times before trying to send the hci reset command
+                hci_counter = 0;
+                hci_state = HCI_INIT_STATE;
+                watingForConnection = false;
+                bPollEnable = true;
+
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nBluetooth Dongle Initialized"), 0x80);
+#endif
+        }
+        return 0; // Successful configuration
+
+        /* Diagnostic messages */
+FailSetDevTblEntry:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailSetDevTblEntry();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailGetConfDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailGetConfDescr();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailSetConfDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailSetConfDescr();
+#endif
+        goto Fail;
+
+FailUnknownDevice:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailUnknownDevice(VID, PID);
+#endif
+        pUsb->setAddr(bAddress, 0, 0); // Reset address
+        rcode = USB_DEV_CONFIG_ERROR_DEVICE_NOT_SUPPORTED;
+Fail:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nBTD Init Failed, error code: "), 0x80);
+        NotifyFail(rcode);
+#endif
+        Release();
+        return rcode;
+}
+
+void BTD::Initialize() {
+        uint8_t i;
+        for(i = 0; i < BTD_MAX_ENDPOINTS; i++) {
+                epInfo[i].epAddr = 0;
+                epInfo[i].maxPktSize = (i) ? 0 : 8;
+                epInfo[i].epAttribs = 0;
+                epInfo[i].bmNakPower = (i) ? USB_NAK_NOWAIT : USB_NAK_MAX_POWER;
+        }
+        for(i = 0; i < BTD_NUM_SERVICES; i++) {
+                if(btService[i])
+                        btService[i]->Reset(); // Reset all Bluetooth services
+        }
+
+        connectToWii = false;
+        incomingWii = false;
+        connectToHIDDevice = false;
+        incomingHIDDevice = false;
+        incomingPS4 = false;
+        bAddress = 0; // Clear device address
+        bNumEP = 1; // Must have to be reset to 1
+        qNextPollTime = 0; // Reset next poll time
+        pollInterval = 0;
+        bPollEnable = false; // Don't start polling before dongle is connected
+}
+
+/* Extracts interrupt-IN, bulk-IN, bulk-OUT endpoint information from config descriptor */
+void BTD::EndpointXtract(uint8_t conf, uint8_t iface, uint8_t alt, uint8_t proto, const USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR *pep) {
+        //ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("Conf.Val"),conf);
+        //ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("Iface Num"),iface);
+        //ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("Alt.Set"),alt);
+
+        if(alt) // Wrong interface - by BT spec, no alt setting
+                return;
+
+        bConfNum = conf;
+        uint8_t index;
+
+        if((pep->bmAttributes & 0x03) == 3 && (pep->bEndpointAddress & 0x80) == 0x80) { // Interrupt In endpoint found
+                index = BTD_EVENT_PIPE;
+                epInfo[index].bmNakPower = USB_NAK_NOWAIT;
+        } else {
+                if((pep->bmAttributes & 0x02) == 2) // Bulk endpoint found
+                        index = ((pep->bEndpointAddress & 0x80) == 0x80) ? BTD_DATAIN_PIPE : BTD_DATAOUT_PIPE;
+                else
+                        return;
+        }
+
+        // Fill the rest of endpoint data structure
+        epInfo[index].epAddr = (pep->bEndpointAddress & 0x0F);
+        epInfo[index].maxPktSize = (uint8_t)pep->wMaxPacketSize;
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+        PrintEndpointDescriptor(pep);
+#endif
+        if(pollInterval < pep->bInterval) // Set the polling interval as the largest polling interval obtained from endpoints
+                pollInterval = pep->bInterval;
+        bNumEP++;
+}
+
+void BTD::PrintEndpointDescriptor(const USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR* ep_ptr) {
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nEndpoint descriptor:"), 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nLength:\t\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (ep_ptr->bLength, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nType:\t\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (ep_ptr->bDescriptorType, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nAddress:\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (ep_ptr->bEndpointAddress, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nAttributes:\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (ep_ptr->bmAttributes, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nMaxPktSize:\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint16_t > (ep_ptr->wMaxPacketSize, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nPoll Intrv:\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (ep_ptr->bInterval, 0x80);
+#endif
+}
+
+/* Performs a cleanup after failed Init() attempt */
+uint8_t BTD::Release() {
+        Initialize(); // Set all variables, endpoint structs etc. to default values
+        pUsb->GetAddressPool().FreeAddress(bAddress);
+        return 0;
+}
+
+uint8_t BTD::Poll() {
+        if(!bPollEnable)
+                return 0;
+        if((long)(millis() - qNextPollTime) >= 0L) { // Don't poll if shorter than polling interval
+                qNextPollTime = millis() + pollInterval; // Set new poll time
+                HCI_event_task(); // Poll the HCI event pipe
+                HCI_task(); // HCI state machine
+                ACL_event_task(); // Poll the ACL input pipe too
+        }
+        return 0;
+}
+
+void BTD::disconnect() {
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < BTD_NUM_SERVICES; i++)
+                if(btService[i])
+                        btService[i]->disconnect();
+};
+
+void BTD::HCI_event_task() {
+        uint16_t length = BULK_MAXPKTSIZE; // Request more than 16 bytes anyway, the inTransfer routine will take care of this
+        uint8_t rcode = pUsb->inTransfer(bAddress, epInfo[ BTD_EVENT_PIPE ].epAddr, &length, hcibuf); // Input on endpoint 1
+
+        if(!rcode || rcode == hrNAK) { // Check for errors
+                switch(hcibuf[0]) { // Switch on event type
+                        case EV_COMMAND_COMPLETE:
+                                if(!hcibuf[5]) { // Check if command succeeded
+                                        hci_set_flag(HCI_FLAG_CMD_COMPLETE); // Set command complete flag
+                                        if((hcibuf[3] == 0x01) && (hcibuf[4] == 0x10)) { // Parameters from read local version information
+                                                hci_version = hcibuf[6]; // Used to check if it supports 2.0+EDR - see http://www.bluetooth.org/Technical/AssignedNumbers/hci.htm
+                                                hci_set_flag(HCI_FLAG_READ_VERSION);
+                                        } else if((hcibuf[3] == 0x09) && (hcibuf[4] == 0x10)) { // Parameters from read local bluetooth address
+                                                for(uint8_t i = 0; i < 6; i++)
+                                                        my_bdaddr[i] = hcibuf[6 + i];
+                                                hci_set_flag(HCI_FLAG_READ_BDADDR);
+                                        }
+                                }
+                                break;
+
+                        case EV_COMMAND_STATUS:
+                                if(hcibuf[2]) { // Show status on serial if not OK
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nHCI Command Failed: "), 0x80);
+                                        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (hcibuf[2], 0x80);
+#endif
+                                }
+                                break;
+
+                        case EV_INQUIRY_COMPLETE:
+                                if(inquiry_counter >= 5 && (pairWithWii || pairWithHIDDevice)) {
+                                        inquiry_counter = 0;
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        if(pairWithWii)
+                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nCouldn't find Wiimote"), 0x80);
+                                        else
+                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nCouldn't find HID device"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        connectToWii = false;
+                                        pairWithWii = false;
+                                        connectToHIDDevice = false;
+                                        pairWithHIDDevice = false;
+                                        hci_state = HCI_SCANNING_STATE;
+                                }
+                                inquiry_counter++;
+                                break;
+
+                        case EV_INQUIRY_RESULT:
+                                if(hcibuf[2]) { // Check that there is more than zero responses
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nNumber of responses: "), 0x80);
+                                        Notify(hcibuf[2], 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < hcibuf[2]; i++) {
+                                                uint8_t offset = 8 * hcibuf[2] + 3 * i;
+
+                                                for(uint8_t j = 0; j < 3; j++)
+                                                        classOfDevice[j] = hcibuf[j + 4 + offset];
+
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nClass of device: "), 0x80);
+                                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (classOfDevice[2], 0x80);
+                                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (classOfDevice[1], 0x80);
+                                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (classOfDevice[0], 0x80);
+#endif
+
+                                                if(pairWithWii && classOfDevice[2] == 0x00 && (classOfDevice[1] & 0x05) && (classOfDevice[0] & 0x0C)) { // See http://wiibrew.org/wiki/Wiimote#SDP_information
+                                                        checkRemoteName = true; // Check remote name to distinguish between the different controllers
+
+                                                        for(uint8_t j = 0; j < 6; j++)
+                                                                disc_bdaddr[j] = hcibuf[j + 3 + 6 * i];
+
+                                                        hci_set_flag(HCI_FLAG_DEVICE_FOUND);
+                                                        break;
+                                                } else if(pairWithHIDDevice && (classOfDevice[1] & 0x05) && (classOfDevice[0] & 0xC8)) { // Check if it is a mouse, keyboard or a gamepad - see: http://bluetooth-pentest.narod.ru/software/bluetooth_class_of_device-service_generator.html
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                                        if(classOfDevice[0] & 0x80)
+                                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nMouse found"), 0x80);
+                                                        if(classOfDevice[0] & 0x40)
+                                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nKeyboard found"), 0x80);
+                                                        if(classOfDevice[0] & 0x08)
+                                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nGamepad found"), 0x80);
+#endif
+
+                                                        for(uint8_t j = 0; j < 6; j++)
+                                                                disc_bdaddr[j] = hcibuf[j + 3 + 6 * i];
+
+                                                        hci_set_flag(HCI_FLAG_DEVICE_FOUND);
+                                                        break;
+                                                }
+                                        }
+                                }
+                                break;
+
+                        case EV_CONNECT_COMPLETE:
+                                hci_set_flag(HCI_FLAG_CONNECT_EVENT);
+                                if(!hcibuf[2]) { // Check if connected OK
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nConnection established"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        hci_handle = hcibuf[3] | ((hcibuf[4] & 0x0F) << 8); // Store the handle for the ACL connection
+                                        hci_set_flag(HCI_FLAG_CONNECT_COMPLETE); // Set connection complete flag
+                                } else {
+                                        hci_state = HCI_CHECK_DEVICE_SERVICE;
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nConnection Failed: "), 0x80);
+                                        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (hcibuf[2], 0x80);
+#endif
+                                }
+                                break;
+
+                        case EV_DISCONNECT_COMPLETE:
+                                if(!hcibuf[2]) { // Check if disconnected OK
+                                        hci_set_flag(HCI_FLAG_DISCONNECT_COMPLETE); // Set disconnect command complete flag
+                                        hci_clear_flag(HCI_FLAG_CONNECT_COMPLETE); // Clear connection complete flag
+                                }
+                                break;
+
+                        case EV_REMOTE_NAME_COMPLETE:
+                                if(!hcibuf[2]) { // Check if reading is OK
+                                        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < min(sizeof (remote_name), sizeof (hcibuf) - 9); i++) {
+                                                remote_name[i] = hcibuf[9 + i];
+                                                if(remote_name[i] == '\0') // End of string
+                                                        break;
+                                        }
+                                        // TODO: Altid sæt '\0' i remote name!
+                                        hci_set_flag(HCI_FLAG_REMOTE_NAME_COMPLETE);
+                                }
+                                break;
+
+                        case EV_INCOMING_CONNECT:
+                                for(uint8_t i = 0; i < 6; i++)
+                                        disc_bdaddr[i] = hcibuf[i + 2];
+
+                                for(uint8_t i = 0; i < 3; i++)
+                                        classOfDevice[i] = hcibuf[i + 8];
+
+                                if((classOfDevice[1] & 0x05) && (classOfDevice[0] & 0xC8)) { // Check if it is a mouse, keyboard or a gamepad
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        if(classOfDevice[0] & 0x80)
+                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nMouse is connecting"), 0x80);
+                                        if(classOfDevice[0] & 0x40)
+                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nKeyboard is connecting"), 0x80);
+                                        if(classOfDevice[0] & 0x08)
+                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nGamepad is connecting"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        incomingHIDDevice = true;
+                                }
+
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nClass of device: "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (classOfDevice[2], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (classOfDevice[1], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (classOfDevice[0], 0x80);
+#endif
+                                hci_set_flag(HCI_FLAG_INCOMING_REQUEST);
+                                break;
+
+                        case EV_PIN_CODE_REQUEST:
+                                if(pairWithWii) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nPairing with Wiimote"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        hci_pin_code_request_reply();
+                                } else if(btdPin != NULL) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nBluetooth pin is set too: "), 0x80);
+                                        NotifyStr(btdPin, 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        hci_pin_code_request_reply();
+                                } else {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nNo pin was set"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        hci_pin_code_negative_request_reply();
+                                }
+                                break;
+
+                        case EV_LINK_KEY_REQUEST:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nReceived Key Request"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                hci_link_key_request_negative_reply();
+                                break;
+
+                        case EV_AUTHENTICATION_COMPLETE:
+                                if(pairWithWii && !connectToWii) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nPairing successful with Wiimote"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        connectToWii = true; // Used to indicate to the Wii service, that it should connect to this device
+                                } else if(pairWithHIDDevice && !connectToHIDDevice) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nPairing successful with HID device"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        connectToHIDDevice = true; // Used to indicate to the BTHID service, that it should connect to this device
+                                }
+                                break;
+                                /* We will just ignore the following events */
+                        case EV_NUM_COMPLETE_PKT:
+                        case EV_ROLE_CHANGED:
+                        case EV_PAGE_SCAN_REP_MODE:
+                        case EV_LOOPBACK_COMMAND:
+                        case EV_DATA_BUFFER_OVERFLOW:
+                        case EV_CHANGE_CONNECTION_LINK:
+                        case EV_MAX_SLOTS_CHANGE:
+                        case EV_QOS_SETUP_COMPLETE:
+                        case EV_LINK_KEY_NOTIFICATION:
+                        case EV_ENCRYPTION_CHANGE:
+                        case EV_READ_REMOTE_VERSION_INFORMATION_COMPLETE:
+                                break;
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+                        default:
+                                if(hcibuf[0] != 0x00) {
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nUnmanaged HCI Event: "), 0x80);
+                                        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (hcibuf[0], 0x80);
+                                }
+                                break;
+#endif
+                } // Switch
+        }
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+        else {
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nHCI event error: "), 0x80);
+                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (rcode, 0x80);
+        }
+#endif
+}
+
+/* Poll Bluetooth and print result */
+void BTD::HCI_task() {
+        switch(hci_state) {
+                case HCI_INIT_STATE:
+                        hci_counter++;
+                        if(hci_counter > hci_num_reset_loops) { // wait until we have looped x times to clear any old events
+                                hci_reset();
+                                hci_state = HCI_RESET_STATE;
+                                hci_counter = 0;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case HCI_RESET_STATE:
+                        hci_counter++;
+                        if(hci_check_flag(HCI_FLAG_CMD_COMPLETE)) {
+                                hci_counter = 0;
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nHCI Reset complete"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                hci_state = HCI_CLASS_STATE;
+                                hci_write_class_of_device();
+                        } else if(hci_counter > hci_num_reset_loops) {
+                                hci_num_reset_loops *= 10;
+                                if(hci_num_reset_loops > 2000)
+                                        hci_num_reset_loops = 2000;
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nNo response to HCI Reset"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                hci_state = HCI_INIT_STATE;
+                                hci_counter = 0;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case HCI_CLASS_STATE:
+                        if(hci_check_flag(HCI_FLAG_CMD_COMPLETE)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nWrite class of device"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                hci_state = HCI_BDADDR_STATE;
+                                hci_read_bdaddr();
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case HCI_BDADDR_STATE:
+                        if(hci_check_flag(HCI_FLAG_READ_BDADDR)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nLocal Bluetooth Address: "), 0x80);
+                                for(int8_t i = 5; i > 0; i--) {
+                                        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (my_bdaddr[i], 0x80);
+                                        Notify(PSTR(":"), 0x80);
+                                }
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (my_bdaddr[0], 0x80);
+#endif
+                                hci_read_local_version_information();
+                                hci_state = HCI_LOCAL_VERSION_STATE;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case HCI_LOCAL_VERSION_STATE: // The local version is used by the PS3BT class
+                        if(hci_check_flag(HCI_FLAG_READ_VERSION)) {
+                                if(btdName != NULL) {
+                                        hci_set_local_name(btdName);
+                                        hci_state = HCI_SET_NAME_STATE;
+                                } else
+                                        hci_state = HCI_CHECK_DEVICE_SERVICE;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case HCI_SET_NAME_STATE:
+                        if(hci_check_flag(HCI_FLAG_CMD_COMPLETE)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nThe name is set to: "), 0x80);
+                                NotifyStr(btdName, 0x80);
+#endif
+                                hci_state = HCI_CHECK_DEVICE_SERVICE;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case HCI_CHECK_DEVICE_SERVICE:
+                        if(pairWithHIDDevice || pairWithWii) { // Check if it should try to connect to a Wiimote
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                if(pairWithWii)
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nStarting inquiry\r\nPress 1 & 2 on the Wiimote\r\nOr press the SYNC button if you are using a Wii U Pro Controller or a Wii Balance Board"), 0x80);
+                                else
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nPlease enable discovery of your device"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                hci_inquiry();
+                                hci_state = HCI_INQUIRY_STATE;
+                        } else
+                                hci_state = HCI_SCANNING_STATE; // Don't try to connect to a Wiimote
+                        break;
+
+                case HCI_INQUIRY_STATE:
+                        if(hci_check_flag(HCI_FLAG_DEVICE_FOUND)) {
+                                hci_inquiry_cancel(); // Stop inquiry
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                if(pairWithWii)
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nWiimote found"), 0x80);
+                                else
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nHID device found"), 0x80);
+
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nNow just create the instance like so:"), 0x80);
+                                if(pairWithWii)
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nWII Wii(&Btd);"), 0x80);
+                                else
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nBTHID bthid(&Btd);"), 0x80);
+
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nAnd then press any button on the "), 0x80);
+                                if(pairWithWii)
+                                        Notify(PSTR("Wiimote"), 0x80);
+                                else
+                                        Notify(PSTR("device"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                if(checkRemoteName) {
+                                        hci_remote_name(); // We need to know the name to distinguish between the Wiimote, the new Wiimote with Motion Plus inside, a Wii U Pro Controller and a Wii Balance Board
+                                        hci_state = HCI_REMOTE_NAME_STATE;
+                                } else
+                                        hci_state = HCI_CONNECT_DEVICE_STATE;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case HCI_CONNECT_DEVICE_STATE:
+                        if(hci_check_flag(HCI_FLAG_CMD_COMPLETE)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                if(pairWithWii)
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nConnecting to Wiimote"), 0x80);
+                                else
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nConnecting to HID device"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                checkRemoteName = false;
+                                hci_connect();
+                                hci_state = HCI_CONNECTED_DEVICE_STATE;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case HCI_CONNECTED_DEVICE_STATE:
+                        if(hci_check_flag(HCI_FLAG_CONNECT_EVENT)) {
+                                if(hci_check_flag(HCI_FLAG_CONNECT_COMPLETE)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        if(pairWithWii)
+                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nConnected to Wiimote"), 0x80);
+                                        else
+                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nConnected to HID device"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        hci_authentication_request(); // This will start the pairing with the Wiimote
+                                        hci_state = HCI_SCANNING_STATE;
+                                } else {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nTrying to connect one more time..."), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        hci_connect(); // Try to connect one more time
+                                }
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case HCI_SCANNING_STATE:
+                        if(!connectToWii && !pairWithWii && !connectToHIDDevice && !pairWithHIDDevice) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nWait For Incoming Connection Request"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                hci_write_scan_enable();
+                                watingForConnection = true;
+                                hci_state = HCI_CONNECT_IN_STATE;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case HCI_CONNECT_IN_STATE:
+                        if(hci_check_flag(HCI_FLAG_INCOMING_REQUEST)) {
+                                watingForConnection = false;
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nIncoming Connection Request"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                hci_remote_name();
+                                hci_state = HCI_REMOTE_NAME_STATE;
+                        } else if(hci_check_flag(HCI_FLAG_DISCONNECT_COMPLETE))
+                                hci_state = HCI_DISCONNECT_STATE;
+                        break;
+
+                case HCI_REMOTE_NAME_STATE:
+                        if(hci_check_flag(HCI_FLAG_REMOTE_NAME_COMPLETE)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nRemote Name: "), 0x80);
+                                for(uint8_t i = 0; i < strlen(remote_name); i++)
+                                        Notifyc(remote_name[i], 0x80);
+#endif
+                                if(strncmp((const char*)remote_name, "Nintendo", 8) == 0) {
+                                        incomingWii = true;
+                                        motionPlusInside = false;
+                                        wiiUProController = false;
+                                        pairWiiUsingSync = false;
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nWiimote is connecting"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        if(strncmp((const char*)remote_name, "Nintendo RVL-CNT-01-TR", 22) == 0) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                                Notify(PSTR(" with Motion Plus Inside"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                                motionPlusInside = true;
+                                        } else if(strncmp((const char*)remote_name, "Nintendo RVL-CNT-01-UC", 22) == 0) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                                Notify(PSTR(" - Wii U Pro Controller"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                                wiiUProController = motionPlusInside = pairWiiUsingSync = true;
+                                        } else if(strncmp((const char*)remote_name, "Nintendo RVL-WBC-01", 19) == 0) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                                Notify(PSTR(" - Wii Balance Board"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                                pairWiiUsingSync = true;
+                                        }
+                                }
+                                if(classOfDevice[2] == 0 && classOfDevice[1] == 0x25 && classOfDevice[0] == 0x08 && strncmp((const char*)remote_name, "Wireless Controller", 19) == 0) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nPS4 controller is connecting"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        incomingPS4 = true;
+                                }
+                                if(pairWithWii && checkRemoteName)
+                                        hci_state = HCI_CONNECT_DEVICE_STATE;
+                                else {
+                                        hci_accept_connection();
+                                        hci_state = HCI_CONNECTED_STATE;
+                                }
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case HCI_CONNECTED_STATE:
+                        if(hci_check_flag(HCI_FLAG_CONNECT_COMPLETE)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nConnected to Device: "), 0x80);
+                                for(int8_t i = 5; i > 0; i--) {
+                                        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (disc_bdaddr[i], 0x80);
+                                        Notify(PSTR(":"), 0x80);
+                                }
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (disc_bdaddr[0], 0x80);
+#endif
+                                if(incomingPS4)
+                                        connectToHIDDevice = true; // We should always connect to the PS4 controller
+
+                                // Clear these flags for a new connection
+                                l2capConnectionClaimed = false;
+                                sdpConnectionClaimed = false;
+                                rfcommConnectionClaimed = false;
+
+                                hci_event_flag = 0;
+                                hci_state = HCI_DONE_STATE;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case HCI_DONE_STATE:
+                        hci_counter++;
+                        if(hci_counter > 1000) { // Wait until we have looped 1000 times to make sure that the L2CAP connection has been started
+                                hci_counter = 0;
+                                hci_state = HCI_SCANNING_STATE;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case HCI_DISCONNECT_STATE:
+                        if(hci_check_flag(HCI_FLAG_DISCONNECT_COMPLETE)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nHCI Disconnected from Device"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                hci_event_flag = 0; // Clear all flags
+
+                                // Reset all buffers
+                                memset(hcibuf, 0, BULK_MAXPKTSIZE);
+                                memset(l2capinbuf, 0, BULK_MAXPKTSIZE);
+
+                                connectToWii = incomingWii = pairWithWii = false;
+                                connectToHIDDevice = incomingHIDDevice = pairWithHIDDevice = checkRemoteName = false;
+                                incomingPS4 = false;
+
+                                hci_state = HCI_SCANNING_STATE;
+                        }
+                        break;
+                default:
+                        break;
+        }
+}
+
+void BTD::ACL_event_task() {
+        uint16_t length = BULK_MAXPKTSIZE;
+        uint8_t rcode = pUsb->inTransfer(bAddress, epInfo[ BTD_DATAIN_PIPE ].epAddr, &length, l2capinbuf); // Input on endpoint 2
+
+        if(!rcode) { // Check for errors
+                if(length > 0) { // Check if any data was read
+                        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < BTD_NUM_SERVICES; i++) {
+                                if(btService[i])
+                                        btService[i]->ACLData(l2capinbuf);
+                        }
+                }
+        }
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+        else if(rcode != hrNAK) {
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nACL data in error: "), 0x80);
+                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (rcode, 0x80);
+        }
+#endif
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < BTD_NUM_SERVICES; i++)
+                if(btService[i])
+                        btService[i]->Run();
+}
+
+/************************************************************/
+/*                    HCI Commands                        */
+
+/************************************************************/
+void BTD::HCI_Command(uint8_t* data, uint16_t nbytes) {
+        hci_clear_flag(HCI_FLAG_CMD_COMPLETE);
+        pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, epInfo[ BTD_CONTROL_PIPE ].epAddr, bmREQ_HCI_OUT, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, nbytes, nbytes, data, NULL);
+}
+
+void BTD::hci_reset() {
+        hci_event_flag = 0; // Clear all the flags
+        hcibuf[0] = 0x03; // HCI OCF = 3
+        hcibuf[1] = 0x03 << 2; // HCI OGF = 3
+        hcibuf[2] = 0x00;
+
+        HCI_Command(hcibuf, 3);
+}
+
+void BTD::hci_write_scan_enable() {
+        hci_clear_flag(HCI_FLAG_INCOMING_REQUEST);
+        hcibuf[0] = 0x1A; // HCI OCF = 1A
+        hcibuf[1] = 0x03 << 2; // HCI OGF = 3
+        hcibuf[2] = 0x01; // parameter length = 1
+        if(btdName != NULL)
+                hcibuf[3] = 0x03; // Inquiry Scan enabled. Page Scan enabled.
+        else
+                hcibuf[3] = 0x02; // Inquiry Scan disabled. Page Scan enabled.
+
+        HCI_Command(hcibuf, 4);
+}
+
+void BTD::hci_write_scan_disable() {
+        hcibuf[0] = 0x1A; // HCI OCF = 1A
+        hcibuf[1] = 0x03 << 2; // HCI OGF = 3
+        hcibuf[2] = 0x01; // parameter length = 1
+        hcibuf[3] = 0x00; // Inquiry Scan disabled. Page Scan disabled.
+
+        HCI_Command(hcibuf, 4);
+}
+
+void BTD::hci_read_bdaddr() {
+        hci_clear_flag(HCI_FLAG_READ_BDADDR);
+        hcibuf[0] = 0x09; // HCI OCF = 9
+        hcibuf[1] = 0x04 << 2; // HCI OGF = 4
+        hcibuf[2] = 0x00;
+
+        HCI_Command(hcibuf, 3);
+}
+
+void BTD::hci_read_local_version_information() {
+        hci_clear_flag(HCI_FLAG_READ_VERSION);
+        hcibuf[0] = 0x01; // HCI OCF = 1
+        hcibuf[1] = 0x04 << 2; // HCI OGF = 4
+        hcibuf[2] = 0x00;
+
+        HCI_Command(hcibuf, 3);
+}
+
+void BTD::hci_accept_connection() {
+        hci_clear_flag(HCI_FLAG_CONNECT_COMPLETE);
+        hcibuf[0] = 0x09; // HCI OCF = 9
+        hcibuf[1] = 0x01 << 2; // HCI OGF = 1
+        hcibuf[2] = 0x07; // parameter length 7
+        hcibuf[3] = disc_bdaddr[0]; // 6 octet bdaddr
+        hcibuf[4] = disc_bdaddr[1];
+        hcibuf[5] = disc_bdaddr[2];
+        hcibuf[6] = disc_bdaddr[3];
+        hcibuf[7] = disc_bdaddr[4];
+        hcibuf[8] = disc_bdaddr[5];
+        hcibuf[9] = 0x00; // Switch role to master
+
+        HCI_Command(hcibuf, 10);
+}
+
+void BTD::hci_remote_name() {
+        hci_clear_flag(HCI_FLAG_REMOTE_NAME_COMPLETE);
+        hcibuf[0] = 0x19; // HCI OCF = 19
+        hcibuf[1] = 0x01 << 2; // HCI OGF = 1
+        hcibuf[2] = 0x0A; // parameter length = 10
+        hcibuf[3] = disc_bdaddr[0]; // 6 octet bdaddr
+        hcibuf[4] = disc_bdaddr[1];
+        hcibuf[5] = disc_bdaddr[2];
+        hcibuf[6] = disc_bdaddr[3];
+        hcibuf[7] = disc_bdaddr[4];
+        hcibuf[8] = disc_bdaddr[5];
+        hcibuf[9] = 0x01; // Page Scan Repetition Mode
+        hcibuf[10] = 0x00; // Reserved
+        hcibuf[11] = 0x00; // Clock offset - low byte
+        hcibuf[12] = 0x00; // Clock offset - high byte
+
+        HCI_Command(hcibuf, 13);
+}
+
+void BTD::hci_set_local_name(const char* name) {
+        hcibuf[0] = 0x13; // HCI OCF = 13
+        hcibuf[1] = 0x03 << 2; // HCI OGF = 3
+        hcibuf[2] = strlen(name) + 1; // parameter length = the length of the string + end byte
+        uint8_t i;
+        for(i = 0; i < strlen(name); i++)
+                hcibuf[i + 3] = name[i];
+        hcibuf[i + 3] = 0x00; // End of string
+
+        HCI_Command(hcibuf, 4 + strlen(name));
+}
+
+void BTD::hci_inquiry() {
+        hci_clear_flag(HCI_FLAG_DEVICE_FOUND);
+        hcibuf[0] = 0x01;
+        hcibuf[1] = 0x01 << 2; // HCI OGF = 1
+        hcibuf[2] = 0x05; // Parameter Total Length = 5
+        hcibuf[3] = 0x33; // LAP: Genera/Unlimited Inquiry Access Code (GIAC = 0x9E8B33) - see https://www.bluetooth.org/Technical/AssignedNumbers/baseband.htm
+        hcibuf[4] = 0x8B;
+        hcibuf[5] = 0x9E;
+        hcibuf[6] = 0x30; // Inquiry time = 61.44 sec (maximum)
+        hcibuf[7] = 0x0A; // 10 number of responses
+
+        HCI_Command(hcibuf, 8);
+}
+
+void BTD::hci_inquiry_cancel() {
+        hcibuf[0] = 0x02;
+        hcibuf[1] = 0x01 << 2; // HCI OGF = 1
+        hcibuf[2] = 0x00; // Parameter Total Length = 0
+
+        HCI_Command(hcibuf, 3);
+}
+
+void BTD::hci_connect() {
+        hci_connect(disc_bdaddr); // Use last discovered device
+}
+
+void BTD::hci_connect(uint8_t *bdaddr) {
+        hci_clear_flag(HCI_FLAG_CONNECT_COMPLETE | HCI_FLAG_CONNECT_EVENT);
+        hcibuf[0] = 0x05;
+        hcibuf[1] = 0x01 << 2; // HCI OGF = 1
+        hcibuf[2] = 0x0D; // parameter Total Length = 13
+        hcibuf[3] = bdaddr[0]; // 6 octet bdaddr (LSB)
+        hcibuf[4] = bdaddr[1];
+        hcibuf[5] = bdaddr[2];
+        hcibuf[6] = bdaddr[3];
+        hcibuf[7] = bdaddr[4];
+        hcibuf[8] = bdaddr[5];
+        hcibuf[9] = 0x18; // DM1 or DH1 may be used
+        hcibuf[10] = 0xCC; // DM3, DH3, DM5, DH5 may be used
+        hcibuf[11] = 0x01; // Page repetition mode R1
+        hcibuf[12] = 0x00; // Reserved
+        hcibuf[13] = 0x00; // Clock offset
+        hcibuf[14] = 0x00; // Invalid clock offset
+        hcibuf[15] = 0x00; // Do not allow role switch
+
+        HCI_Command(hcibuf, 16);
+}
+
+void BTD::hci_pin_code_request_reply() {
+        hcibuf[0] = 0x0D; // HCI OCF = 0D
+        hcibuf[1] = 0x01 << 2; // HCI OGF = 1
+        hcibuf[2] = 0x17; // parameter length 23
+        hcibuf[3] = disc_bdaddr[0]; // 6 octet bdaddr
+        hcibuf[4] = disc_bdaddr[1];
+        hcibuf[5] = disc_bdaddr[2];
+        hcibuf[6] = disc_bdaddr[3];
+        hcibuf[7] = disc_bdaddr[4];
+        hcibuf[8] = disc_bdaddr[5];
+        if(pairWithWii) {
+                hcibuf[9] = 6; // Pin length is the length of the Bluetooth address
+                if(pairWiiUsingSync) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nParing with Wii controller via SYNC"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < 6; i++)
+                                hcibuf[10 + i] = my_bdaddr[i]; // The pin is the Bluetooth dongles Bluetooth address backwards
+                } else {
+                        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < 6; i++)
+                                hcibuf[10 + i] = disc_bdaddr[i]; // The pin is the Wiimote's Bluetooth address backwards
+                }
+                for(uint8_t i = 16; i < 26; i++)
+                        hcibuf[i] = 0x00; // The rest should be 0
+        } else {
+                hcibuf[9] = strlen(btdPin); // Length of pin
+                uint8_t i;
+                for(i = 0; i < strlen(btdPin); i++) // The maximum size of the pin is 16
+                        hcibuf[i + 10] = btdPin[i];
+                for(; i < 16; i++)
+                        hcibuf[i + 10] = 0x00; // The rest should be 0
+        }
+
+        HCI_Command(hcibuf, 26);
+}
+
+void BTD::hci_pin_code_negative_request_reply() {
+        hcibuf[0] = 0x0E; // HCI OCF = 0E
+        hcibuf[1] = 0x01 << 2; // HCI OGF = 1
+        hcibuf[2] = 0x06; // parameter length 6
+        hcibuf[3] = disc_bdaddr[0]; // 6 octet bdaddr
+        hcibuf[4] = disc_bdaddr[1];
+        hcibuf[5] = disc_bdaddr[2];
+        hcibuf[6] = disc_bdaddr[3];
+        hcibuf[7] = disc_bdaddr[4];
+        hcibuf[8] = disc_bdaddr[5];
+
+        HCI_Command(hcibuf, 9);
+}
+
+void BTD::hci_link_key_request_negative_reply() {
+        hcibuf[0] = 0x0C; // HCI OCF = 0C
+        hcibuf[1] = 0x01 << 2; // HCI OGF = 1
+        hcibuf[2] = 0x06; // parameter length 6
+        hcibuf[3] = disc_bdaddr[0]; // 6 octet bdaddr
+        hcibuf[4] = disc_bdaddr[1];
+        hcibuf[5] = disc_bdaddr[2];
+        hcibuf[6] = disc_bdaddr[3];
+        hcibuf[7] = disc_bdaddr[4];
+        hcibuf[8] = disc_bdaddr[5];
+
+        HCI_Command(hcibuf, 9);
+}
+
+void BTD::hci_authentication_request() {
+        hcibuf[0] = 0x11; // HCI OCF = 11
+        hcibuf[1] = 0x01 << 2; // HCI OGF = 1
+        hcibuf[2] = 0x02; // parameter length = 2
+        hcibuf[3] = (uint8_t)(hci_handle & 0xFF); //connection handle - low byte
+        hcibuf[4] = (uint8_t)((hci_handle >> 8) & 0x0F); //connection handle - high byte
+
+        HCI_Command(hcibuf, 5);
+}
+
+void BTD::hci_disconnect(uint16_t handle) { // This is called by the different services
+        hci_clear_flag(HCI_FLAG_DISCONNECT_COMPLETE);
+        hcibuf[0] = 0x06; // HCI OCF = 6
+        hcibuf[1] = 0x01 << 2; // HCI OGF = 1
+        hcibuf[2] = 0x03; // parameter length = 3
+        hcibuf[3] = (uint8_t)(handle & 0xFF); //connection handle - low byte
+        hcibuf[4] = (uint8_t)((handle >> 8) & 0x0F); //connection handle - high byte
+        hcibuf[5] = 0x13; // reason
+
+        HCI_Command(hcibuf, 6);
+}
+
+void BTD::hci_write_class_of_device() { // See http://bluetooth-pentest.narod.ru/software/bluetooth_class_of_device-service_generator.html
+        hcibuf[0] = 0x24; // HCI OCF = 24
+        hcibuf[1] = 0x03 << 2; // HCI OGF = 3
+        hcibuf[2] = 0x03; // parameter length = 3
+        hcibuf[3] = 0x04; // Robot
+        hcibuf[4] = 0x08; // Toy
+        hcibuf[5] = 0x00;
+
+        HCI_Command(hcibuf, 6);
+}
+/*******************************************************************
+ *                                                                 *
+ *                        HCI ACL Data Packet                      *
+ *                                                                 *
+ *   buf[0]          buf[1]          buf[2]          buf[3]
+ *   0       4       8    11 12      16              24            31 MSB
+ *  .-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-|-+-+-+-|-+-|-+-|-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-|-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-.
+ *  |      HCI Handle       |PB |BC |       Data Total Length       |   HCI ACL Data Packet
+ *  .-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-|-+-+-+-|-+-|-+-|-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-|-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-.
+ *
+ *   buf[4]          buf[5]          buf[6]          buf[7]
+ *   0               8               16                            31 MSB
+ *  .-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-|-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-|-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-|-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-.
+ *  |            Length             |          Channel ID           |   Basic L2CAP header
+ *  .-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-|-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-|-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-|-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-.
+ *
+ *   buf[8]          buf[9]          buf[10]         buf[11]
+ *   0               8               16                            31 MSB
+ *  .-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-|-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-|-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-|-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-.
+ *  |     Code      |  Identifier   |            Length             |   Control frame (C-frame)
+ *  .-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-|-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-|-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-|-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-.   (signaling packet format)
+ */
+/************************************************************/
+/*                    L2CAP Commands                        */
+
+/************************************************************/
+void BTD::L2CAP_Command(uint16_t handle, uint8_t* data, uint8_t nbytes, uint8_t channelLow, uint8_t channelHigh) {
+        uint8_t buf[8 + nbytes];
+        buf[0] = (uint8_t)(handle & 0xff); // HCI handle with PB,BC flag
+        buf[1] = (uint8_t)(((handle >> 8) & 0x0f) | 0x20);
+        buf[2] = (uint8_t)((4 + nbytes) & 0xff); // HCI ACL total data length
+        buf[3] = (uint8_t)((4 + nbytes) >> 8);
+        buf[4] = (uint8_t)(nbytes & 0xff); // L2CAP header: Length
+        buf[5] = (uint8_t)(nbytes >> 8);
+        buf[6] = channelLow;
+        buf[7] = channelHigh;
+
+        for(uint16_t i = 0; i < nbytes; i++) // L2CAP C-frame
+                buf[8 + i] = data[i];
+
+        uint8_t rcode = pUsb->outTransfer(bAddress, epInfo[ BTD_DATAOUT_PIPE ].epAddr, (8 + nbytes), buf);
+        if(rcode) {
+                delay(100); // This small delay prevents it from overflowing if it fails
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nError sending L2CAP message: 0x"), 0x80);
+                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (rcode, 0x80);
+                Notify(PSTR(" - Channel ID: "), 0x80);
+                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (channelHigh, 0x80);
+                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (channelLow, 0x80);
+#endif
+        }
+}
+
+void BTD::l2cap_connection_request(uint16_t handle, uint8_t rxid, uint8_t* scid, uint16_t psm) {
+        l2capoutbuf[0] = L2CAP_CMD_CONNECTION_REQUEST; // Code
+        l2capoutbuf[1] = rxid; // Identifier
+        l2capoutbuf[2] = 0x04; // Length
+        l2capoutbuf[3] = 0x00;
+        l2capoutbuf[4] = (uint8_t)(psm & 0xff); // PSM
+        l2capoutbuf[5] = (uint8_t)(psm >> 8);
+        l2capoutbuf[6] = scid[0]; // Source CID
+        l2capoutbuf[7] = scid[1];
+
+        L2CAP_Command(handle, l2capoutbuf, 8);
+}
+
+void BTD::l2cap_connection_response(uint16_t handle, uint8_t rxid, uint8_t* dcid, uint8_t* scid, uint8_t result) {
+        l2capoutbuf[0] = L2CAP_CMD_CONNECTION_RESPONSE; // Code
+        l2capoutbuf[1] = rxid; // Identifier
+        l2capoutbuf[2] = 0x08; // Length
+        l2capoutbuf[3] = 0x00;
+        l2capoutbuf[4] = dcid[0]; // Destination CID
+        l2capoutbuf[5] = dcid[1];
+        l2capoutbuf[6] = scid[0]; // Source CID
+        l2capoutbuf[7] = scid[1];
+        l2capoutbuf[8] = result; // Result: Pending or Success
+        l2capoutbuf[9] = 0x00;
+        l2capoutbuf[10] = 0x00; // No further information
+        l2capoutbuf[11] = 0x00;
+
+        L2CAP_Command(handle, l2capoutbuf, 12);
+}
+
+void BTD::l2cap_config_request(uint16_t handle, uint8_t rxid, uint8_t* dcid) {
+        l2capoutbuf[0] = L2CAP_CMD_CONFIG_REQUEST; // Code
+        l2capoutbuf[1] = rxid; // Identifier
+        l2capoutbuf[2] = 0x08; // Length
+        l2capoutbuf[3] = 0x00;
+        l2capoutbuf[4] = dcid[0]; // Destination CID
+        l2capoutbuf[5] = dcid[1];
+        l2capoutbuf[6] = 0x00; // Flags
+        l2capoutbuf[7] = 0x00;
+        l2capoutbuf[8] = 0x01; // Config Opt: type = MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) - Hint
+        l2capoutbuf[9] = 0x02; // Config Opt: length
+        l2capoutbuf[10] = 0xFF; // MTU
+        l2capoutbuf[11] = 0xFF;
+
+        L2CAP_Command(handle, l2capoutbuf, 12);
+}
+
+void BTD::l2cap_config_response(uint16_t handle, uint8_t rxid, uint8_t* scid) {
+        l2capoutbuf[0] = L2CAP_CMD_CONFIG_RESPONSE; // Code
+        l2capoutbuf[1] = rxid; // Identifier
+        l2capoutbuf[2] = 0x0A; // Length
+        l2capoutbuf[3] = 0x00;
+        l2capoutbuf[4] = scid[0]; // Source CID
+        l2capoutbuf[5] = scid[1];
+        l2capoutbuf[6] = 0x00; // Flag
+        l2capoutbuf[7] = 0x00;
+        l2capoutbuf[8] = 0x00; // Result
+        l2capoutbuf[9] = 0x00;
+        l2capoutbuf[10] = 0x01; // Config
+        l2capoutbuf[11] = 0x02;
+        l2capoutbuf[12] = 0xA0;
+        l2capoutbuf[13] = 0x02;
+
+        L2CAP_Command(handle, l2capoutbuf, 14);
+}
+
+void BTD::l2cap_disconnection_request(uint16_t handle, uint8_t rxid, uint8_t* dcid, uint8_t* scid) {
+        l2capoutbuf[0] = L2CAP_CMD_DISCONNECT_REQUEST; // Code
+        l2capoutbuf[1] = rxid; // Identifier
+        l2capoutbuf[2] = 0x04; // Length
+        l2capoutbuf[3] = 0x00;
+        l2capoutbuf[4] = dcid[0];
+        l2capoutbuf[5] = dcid[1];
+        l2capoutbuf[6] = scid[0];
+        l2capoutbuf[7] = scid[1];
+
+        L2CAP_Command(handle, l2capoutbuf, 8);
+}
+
+void BTD::l2cap_disconnection_response(uint16_t handle, uint8_t rxid, uint8_t* dcid, uint8_t* scid) {
+        l2capoutbuf[0] = L2CAP_CMD_DISCONNECT_RESPONSE; // Code
+        l2capoutbuf[1] = rxid; // Identifier
+        l2capoutbuf[2] = 0x04; // Length
+        l2capoutbuf[3] = 0x00;
+        l2capoutbuf[4] = dcid[0];
+        l2capoutbuf[5] = dcid[1];
+        l2capoutbuf[6] = scid[0];
+        l2capoutbuf[7] = scid[1];
+
+        L2CAP_Command(handle, l2capoutbuf, 8);
+}
+
+void BTD::l2cap_information_response(uint16_t handle, uint8_t rxid, uint8_t infoTypeLow, uint8_t infoTypeHigh) {
+        l2capoutbuf[0] = L2CAP_CMD_INFORMATION_RESPONSE; // Code
+        l2capoutbuf[1] = rxid; // Identifier
+        l2capoutbuf[2] = 0x08; // Length
+        l2capoutbuf[3] = 0x00;
+        l2capoutbuf[4] = infoTypeLow;
+        l2capoutbuf[5] = infoTypeHigh;
+        l2capoutbuf[6] = 0x00; // Result = success
+        l2capoutbuf[7] = 0x00; // Result = success
+        l2capoutbuf[8] = 0x00;
+        l2capoutbuf[9] = 0x00;
+        l2capoutbuf[10] = 0x00;
+        l2capoutbuf[11] = 0x00;
+
+        L2CAP_Command(handle, l2capoutbuf, 12);
+}
+
+/* PS3 Commands - only set Bluetooth address is implemented in this library */
+void BTD::setBdaddr(uint8_t* bdaddr) {
+        /* Set the internal Bluetooth address */
+        uint8_t buf[8];
+        buf[0] = 0x01;
+        buf[1] = 0x00;
+
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < 6; i++)
+                buf[i + 2] = bdaddr[5 - i]; // Copy into buffer, has to be written reversed, so it is MSB first
+
+        // bmRequest = Host to device (0x00) | Class (0x20) | Interface (0x01) = 0x21, bRequest = Set Report (0x09), Report ID (0xF5), Report Type (Feature 0x03), interface (0x00), datalength, datalength, data
+        pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, epInfo[BTD_CONTROL_PIPE].epAddr, bmREQ_HID_OUT, HID_REQUEST_SET_REPORT, 0xF5, 0x03, 0x00, 8, 8, buf, NULL);
+}
+
+void BTD::setMoveBdaddr(uint8_t* bdaddr) {
+        /* Set the internal Bluetooth address */
+        uint8_t buf[11];
+        buf[0] = 0x05;
+        buf[7] = 0x10;
+        buf[8] = 0x01;
+        buf[9] = 0x02;
+        buf[10] = 0x12;
+
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < 6; i++)
+                buf[i + 1] = bdaddr[i];
+
+        // bmRequest = Host to device (0x00) | Class (0x20) | Interface (0x01) = 0x21, bRequest = Set Report (0x09), Report ID (0x05), Report Type (Feature 0x03), interface (0x00), datalength, datalength, data
+        pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, epInfo[BTD_CONTROL_PIPE].epAddr, bmREQ_HID_OUT, HID_REQUEST_SET_REPORT, 0x05, 0x03, 0x00, 11, 11, buf, NULL);
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/BTD.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/BTD.h
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..6549c30c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/BTD.h
@@ -0,0 +1,620 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2012 Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics. All rights reserved.
+
+ This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+ General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+ Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+ this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+ on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+ the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+ Contact information
+ -------------------
+
+ Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics
+ Web      :  http://www.tkjelectronics.com
+ e-mail   :  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#ifndef _btd_h_
+#define _btd_h_
+
+#include "Usb.h"
+#include "hid.h"
+
+//PID and VID of the Sony PS3 devices
+#define PS3_VID                 0x054C  // Sony Corporation
+#define PS3_PID                 0x0268  // PS3 Controller DualShock 3
+#define PS3NAVIGATION_PID       0x042F  // Navigation controller
+#define PS3MOVE_PID             0x03D5  // Motion controller
+
+#define IOGEAR_GBU521_VID       0x0A5C // The IOGEAR GBU521 dongle does not presents itself correctly, so we have to check for it manually
+#define IOGEAR_GBU521_PID       0x21E8
+
+/* Bluetooth dongle data taken from descriptors */
+#define BULK_MAXPKTSIZE         64 // Max size for ACL data
+
+// Used in control endpoint header for HCI Commands
+#define bmREQ_HCI_OUT USB_SETUP_HOST_TO_DEVICE|USB_SETUP_TYPE_CLASS|USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_DEVICE
+
+/* Bluetooth HCI states for hci_task() */
+#define HCI_INIT_STATE                  0
+#define HCI_RESET_STATE                 1
+#define HCI_CLASS_STATE                 2
+#define HCI_BDADDR_STATE                3
+#define HCI_LOCAL_VERSION_STATE         4
+#define HCI_SET_NAME_STATE              5
+#define HCI_CHECK_DEVICE_SERVICE        6
+
+#define HCI_INQUIRY_STATE               7 // These three states are only used if it should pair and connect to a device
+#define HCI_CONNECT_DEVICE_STATE        8
+#define HCI_CONNECTED_DEVICE_STATE      9
+
+#define HCI_SCANNING_STATE              10
+#define HCI_CONNECT_IN_STATE            11
+#define HCI_REMOTE_NAME_STATE           12
+#define HCI_CONNECTED_STATE             13
+#define HCI_DISABLE_SCAN_STATE          14
+#define HCI_DONE_STATE                  15
+#define HCI_DISCONNECT_STATE            16
+
+/* HCI event flags*/
+#define HCI_FLAG_CMD_COMPLETE           (1UL << 0)
+#define HCI_FLAG_CONNECT_COMPLETE       (1UL << 1)
+#define HCI_FLAG_DISCONNECT_COMPLETE    (1UL << 2)
+#define HCI_FLAG_REMOTE_NAME_COMPLETE   (1UL << 3)
+#define HCI_FLAG_INCOMING_REQUEST       (1UL << 4)
+#define HCI_FLAG_READ_BDADDR            (1UL << 5)
+#define HCI_FLAG_READ_VERSION           (1UL << 6)
+#define HCI_FLAG_DEVICE_FOUND           (1UL << 7)
+#define HCI_FLAG_CONNECT_EVENT          (1UL << 8)
+
+/* Macros for HCI event flag tests */
+#define hci_check_flag(flag) (hci_event_flag & (flag))
+#define hci_set_flag(flag) (hci_event_flag |= (flag))
+#define hci_clear_flag(flag) (hci_event_flag &= ~(flag))
+
+/* HCI Events managed */
+#define EV_INQUIRY_COMPLETE                             0x01
+#define EV_INQUIRY_RESULT                               0x02
+#define EV_CONNECT_COMPLETE                             0x03
+#define EV_INCOMING_CONNECT                             0x04
+#define EV_DISCONNECT_COMPLETE                          0x05
+#define EV_AUTHENTICATION_COMPLETE                      0x06
+#define EV_REMOTE_NAME_COMPLETE                         0x07
+#define EV_ENCRYPTION_CHANGE                            0x08
+#define EV_CHANGE_CONNECTION_LINK                       0x09
+#define EV_ROLE_CHANGED                                 0x12
+#define EV_NUM_COMPLETE_PKT                             0x13
+#define EV_PIN_CODE_REQUEST                             0x16
+#define EV_LINK_KEY_REQUEST                             0x17
+#define EV_LINK_KEY_NOTIFICATION                        0x18
+#define EV_DATA_BUFFER_OVERFLOW                         0x1A
+#define EV_MAX_SLOTS_CHANGE                             0x1B
+#define EV_READ_REMOTE_VERSION_INFORMATION_COMPLETE     0x0C
+#define EV_QOS_SETUP_COMPLETE                           0x0D
+#define EV_COMMAND_COMPLETE                             0x0E
+#define EV_COMMAND_STATUS                               0x0F
+#define EV_LOOPBACK_COMMAND                             0x19
+#define EV_PAGE_SCAN_REP_MODE                           0x20
+
+/* Bluetooth states for the different Bluetooth drivers */
+#define L2CAP_WAIT                      0
+#define L2CAP_DONE                      1
+
+/* Used for HID Control channel */
+#define L2CAP_CONTROL_CONNECT_REQUEST   2
+#define L2CAP_CONTROL_CONFIG_REQUEST    3
+#define L2CAP_CONTROL_SUCCESS           4
+#define L2CAP_CONTROL_DISCONNECT        5
+
+/* Used for HID Interrupt channel */
+#define L2CAP_INTERRUPT_SETUP           6
+#define L2CAP_INTERRUPT_CONNECT_REQUEST 7
+#define L2CAP_INTERRUPT_CONFIG_REQUEST  8
+#define L2CAP_INTERRUPT_DISCONNECT      9
+
+/* Used for SDP channel */
+#define L2CAP_SDP_WAIT                  10
+#define L2CAP_SDP_SUCCESS               11
+
+/* Used for RFCOMM channel */
+#define L2CAP_RFCOMM_WAIT               12
+#define L2CAP_RFCOMM_SUCCESS            13
+
+#define L2CAP_DISCONNECT_RESPONSE       14 // Used for both SDP and RFCOMM channel
+
+/* Bluetooth states used by some drivers */
+#define TURN_ON_LED                     17
+#define PS3_ENABLE_SIXAXIS              18
+#define WII_CHECK_MOTION_PLUS_STATE     19
+#define WII_CHECK_EXTENSION_STATE       20
+#define WII_INIT_MOTION_PLUS_STATE      21
+
+/* L2CAP event flags for HID Control channel */
+#define L2CAP_FLAG_CONNECTION_CONTROL_REQUEST           (1UL << 0)
+#define L2CAP_FLAG_CONFIG_CONTROL_SUCCESS               (1UL << 1)
+#define L2CAP_FLAG_CONTROL_CONNECTED                    (1UL << 2)
+#define L2CAP_FLAG_DISCONNECT_CONTROL_RESPONSE          (1UL << 3)
+
+/* L2CAP event flags for HID Interrupt channel */
+#define L2CAP_FLAG_CONNECTION_INTERRUPT_REQUEST         (1UL << 4)
+#define L2CAP_FLAG_CONFIG_INTERRUPT_SUCCESS             (1UL << 5)
+#define L2CAP_FLAG_INTERRUPT_CONNECTED                  (1UL << 6)
+#define L2CAP_FLAG_DISCONNECT_INTERRUPT_RESPONSE        (1UL << 7)
+
+/* L2CAP event flags for SDP channel */
+#define L2CAP_FLAG_CONNECTION_SDP_REQUEST               (1UL << 8)
+#define L2CAP_FLAG_CONFIG_SDP_SUCCESS                   (1UL << 9)
+#define L2CAP_FLAG_DISCONNECT_SDP_REQUEST               (1UL << 10)
+
+/* L2CAP event flags for RFCOMM channel */
+#define L2CAP_FLAG_CONNECTION_RFCOMM_REQUEST            (1UL << 11)
+#define L2CAP_FLAG_CONFIG_RFCOMM_SUCCESS                (1UL << 12)
+#define L2CAP_FLAG_DISCONNECT_RFCOMM_REQUEST            (1UL << 13)
+
+#define L2CAP_FLAG_DISCONNECT_RESPONSE                  (1UL << 14)
+
+/* Macros for L2CAP event flag tests */
+#define l2cap_check_flag(flag) (l2cap_event_flag & (flag))
+#define l2cap_set_flag(flag) (l2cap_event_flag |= (flag))
+#define l2cap_clear_flag(flag) (l2cap_event_flag &= ~(flag))
+
+/* L2CAP signaling commands */
+#define L2CAP_CMD_COMMAND_REJECT        0x01
+#define L2CAP_CMD_CONNECTION_REQUEST    0x02
+#define L2CAP_CMD_CONNECTION_RESPONSE   0x03
+#define L2CAP_CMD_CONFIG_REQUEST        0x04
+#define L2CAP_CMD_CONFIG_RESPONSE       0x05
+#define L2CAP_CMD_DISCONNECT_REQUEST    0x06
+#define L2CAP_CMD_DISCONNECT_RESPONSE   0x07
+#define L2CAP_CMD_INFORMATION_REQUEST   0x0A
+#define L2CAP_CMD_INFORMATION_RESPONSE  0x0B
+
+// Used For Connection Response - Remember to Include High Byte
+#define PENDING     0x01
+#define SUCCESSFUL  0x00
+
+/* Bluetooth L2CAP PSM - see http://www.bluetooth.org/Technical/AssignedNumbers/logical_link.htm */
+#define SDP_PSM         0x01 // Service Discovery Protocol PSM Value
+#define RFCOMM_PSM      0x03 // RFCOMM PSM Value
+#define HID_CTRL_PSM    0x11 // HID_Control PSM Value
+#define HID_INTR_PSM    0x13 // HID_Interrupt PSM Value
+
+// Used to determine if it is a Bluetooth dongle
+#define WI_SUBCLASS_RF      0x01 // RF Controller
+#define WI_PROTOCOL_BT      0x01 // Bluetooth Programming Interface
+
+#define BTD_MAX_ENDPOINTS   4
+#define BTD_NUM_SERVICES    4 // Max number of Bluetooth services - if you need more than 4 simply increase this number
+
+#define PAIR    1
+
+class BluetoothService;
+
+/**
+ * The Bluetooth Dongle class will take care of all the USB communication
+ * and then pass the data to the BluetoothService classes.
+ */
+class BTD : public USBDeviceConfig, public UsbConfigXtracter {
+public:
+        /**
+         * Constructor for the BTD class.
+         * @param  p   Pointer to USB class instance.
+         */
+        BTD(USB *p);
+
+        /** @name USBDeviceConfig implementation */
+        /**
+         * Address assignment and basic initialization is done here.
+         * @param  parent   Hub number.
+         * @param  port     Port number on the hub.
+         * @param  lowspeed Speed of the device.
+         * @return          0 on success.
+         */
+        uint8_t ConfigureDevice(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed);
+        /**
+         * Initialize the Bluetooth dongle.
+         * @param  parent   Hub number.
+         * @param  port     Port number on the hub.
+         * @param  lowspeed Speed of the device.
+         * @return          0 on success.
+         */
+        uint8_t Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed);
+        /**
+         * Release the USB device.
+         * @return 0 on success.
+         */
+        uint8_t Release();
+        /**
+         * Poll the USB Input endpoints and run the state machines.
+         * @return 0 on success.
+         */
+        uint8_t Poll();
+
+        /**
+         * Get the device address.
+         * @return The device address.
+         */
+        virtual uint8_t GetAddress() {
+                return bAddress;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Used to check if the dongle has been initialized.
+         * @return True if it's ready.
+         */
+        virtual bool isReady() {
+                return bPollEnable;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Used by the USB core to check what this driver support.
+         * @param  klass The device's USB class.
+         * @return       Returns true if the device's USB class matches this driver.
+         */
+        virtual bool DEVCLASSOK(uint8_t klass) {
+                return (klass == USB_CLASS_WIRELESS_CTRL);
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Used by the USB core to check what this driver support.
+         * Used to set the Bluetooth address into the PS3 controllers.
+         * @param  vid The device's VID.
+         * @param  pid The device's PID.
+         * @return     Returns true if the device's VID and PID matches this driver.
+         */
+        virtual bool VIDPIDOK(uint16_t vid, uint16_t pid) {
+                if(vid == IOGEAR_GBU521_VID && pid == IOGEAR_GBU521_PID)
+                        return true;
+                if(my_bdaddr[0] != 0x00 || my_bdaddr[1] != 0x00 || my_bdaddr[2] != 0x00 || my_bdaddr[3] != 0x00 || my_bdaddr[4] != 0x00 || my_bdaddr[5] != 0x00) { // Check if Bluetooth address is set
+                        if(vid == PS3_VID && (pid == PS3_PID || pid == PS3NAVIGATION_PID || pid == PS3MOVE_PID))
+                                return true;
+                }
+                return false;
+        };
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /** @name UsbConfigXtracter implementation */
+        /**
+         * UsbConfigXtracter implementation, used to extract endpoint information.
+         * @param conf  Configuration value.
+         * @param iface Interface number.
+         * @param alt   Alternate setting.
+         * @param proto Interface Protocol.
+         * @param ep    Endpoint Descriptor.
+         */
+        void EndpointXtract(uint8_t conf, uint8_t iface, uint8_t alt, uint8_t proto, const USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR *ep);
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /** Disconnects both the L2CAP Channel and the HCI Connection for all Bluetooth services. */
+        void disconnect();
+
+        /**
+         * Register Bluetooth dongle members/services.
+         * @param  pService Pointer to BluetoothService class instance.
+         * @return          The service ID on success or -1 on fail.
+         */
+        int8_t registerBluetoothService(BluetoothService *pService) {
+                for(uint8_t i = 0; i < BTD_NUM_SERVICES; i++) {
+                        if(!btService[i]) {
+                                btService[i] = pService;
+                                return i; // Return ID
+                        }
+                }
+                return -1; // Error registering BluetoothService
+        };
+
+        /** @name HCI Commands */
+        /**
+         * Used to send a HCI Command.
+         * @param data   Data to send.
+         * @param nbytes Number of bytes to send.
+         */
+        void HCI_Command(uint8_t* data, uint16_t nbytes);
+        /** Reset the Bluetooth dongle. */
+        void hci_reset();
+        /** Read the Bluetooth address of the dongle. */
+        void hci_read_bdaddr();
+        /** Read the HCI Version of the Bluetooth dongle. */
+        void hci_read_local_version_information();
+        /**
+         * Set the local name of the Bluetooth dongle.
+         * @param name Desired name.
+         */
+        void hci_set_local_name(const char* name);
+        /** Enable visibility to other Bluetooth devices. */
+        void hci_write_scan_enable();
+        /** Disable visibility to other Bluetooth devices. */
+        void hci_write_scan_disable();
+        /** Read the remote devices name. */
+        void hci_remote_name();
+        /** Accept the connection with the Bluetooth device. */
+        void hci_accept_connection();
+        /**
+         * Disconnect the HCI connection.
+         * @param handle The HCI Handle for the connection.
+         */
+        void hci_disconnect(uint16_t handle);
+        /**
+         * Respond with the pin for the connection.
+         * The pin is automatically set for the Wii library,
+         * but can be customized for the SPP library.
+         */
+        void hci_pin_code_request_reply();
+        /** Respons when no pin was set. */
+        void hci_pin_code_negative_request_reply();
+        /**
+         * Command is used to reply to a Link Key Request event from the BR/EDR Controller
+         * if the Host does not have a stored Link Key for the connection.
+         */
+        void hci_link_key_request_negative_reply();
+        /** Used to try to authenticate with the remote device. */
+        void hci_authentication_request();
+        /** Start a HCI inquiry. */
+        void hci_inquiry();
+        /** Cancel a HCI inquiry. */
+        void hci_inquiry_cancel();
+        /** Connect to last device communicated with. */
+        void hci_connect();
+        /**
+         * Connect to device.
+         * @param bdaddr Bluetooth address of the device.
+         */
+        void hci_connect(uint8_t *bdaddr);
+        /** Used to a set the class of the device. */
+        void hci_write_class_of_device();
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /** @name L2CAP Commands */
+        /**
+         * Used to send L2CAP Commands.
+         * @param handle      HCI Handle.
+         * @param data        Data to send.
+         * @param nbytes      Number of bytes to send.
+         * @param channelLow,channelHigh  Low and high byte of channel to send to.
+         * If argument is omitted then the Standard L2CAP header: Channel ID (0x01) for ACL-U will be used.
+         */
+        void L2CAP_Command(uint16_t handle, uint8_t* data, uint8_t nbytes, uint8_t channelLow = 0x01, uint8_t channelHigh = 0x00);
+        /**
+         * L2CAP Connection Request.
+         * @param handle HCI handle.
+         * @param rxid   Identifier.
+         * @param scid   Source Channel Identifier.
+         * @param psm    Protocol/Service Multiplexer - see: https://www.bluetooth.org/Technical/AssignedNumbers/logical_link.htm.
+         */
+        void l2cap_connection_request(uint16_t handle, uint8_t rxid, uint8_t* scid, uint16_t psm);
+        /**
+         * L2CAP Connection Response.
+         * @param handle HCI handle.
+         * @param rxid   Identifier.
+         * @param dcid   Destination Channel Identifier.
+         * @param scid   Source Channel Identifier.
+         * @param result Result - First send ::PENDING and then ::SUCCESSFUL.
+         */
+        void l2cap_connection_response(uint16_t handle, uint8_t rxid, uint8_t* dcid, uint8_t* scid, uint8_t result);
+        /**
+         * L2CAP Config Request.
+         * @param handle HCI Handle.
+         * @param rxid   Identifier.
+         * @param dcid   Destination Channel Identifier.
+         */
+        void l2cap_config_request(uint16_t handle, uint8_t rxid, uint8_t* dcid);
+        /**
+         * L2CAP Config Response.
+         * @param handle HCI Handle.
+         * @param rxid   Identifier.
+         * @param scid   Source Channel Identifier.
+         */
+        void l2cap_config_response(uint16_t handle, uint8_t rxid, uint8_t* scid);
+        /**
+         * L2CAP Disconnection Request.
+         * @param handle HCI Handle.
+         * @param rxid   Identifier.
+         * @param dcid   Device Channel Identifier.
+         * @param scid   Source Channel Identifier.
+         */
+        void l2cap_disconnection_request(uint16_t handle, uint8_t rxid, uint8_t* dcid, uint8_t* scid);
+        /**
+         * L2CAP Disconnection Response.
+         * @param handle HCI Handle.
+         * @param rxid   Identifier.
+         * @param dcid   Device Channel Identifier.
+         * @param scid   Source Channel Identifier.
+         */
+        void l2cap_disconnection_response(uint16_t handle, uint8_t rxid, uint8_t* dcid, uint8_t* scid);
+        /**
+         * L2CAP Information Response.
+         * @param handle       HCI Handle.
+         * @param rxid         Identifier.
+         * @param infoTypeLow,infoTypeHigh  Infotype.
+         */
+        void l2cap_information_response(uint16_t handle, uint8_t rxid, uint8_t infoTypeLow, uint8_t infoTypeHigh);
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /** Use this to see if it is waiting for a incoming connection. */
+        bool watingForConnection;
+        /** This is used by the service to know when to store the device information. */
+        bool l2capConnectionClaimed;
+        /** This is used by the SPP library to claim the current SDP incoming request. */
+        bool sdpConnectionClaimed;
+        /** This is used by the SPP library to claim the current RFCOMM incoming request. */
+        bool rfcommConnectionClaimed;
+
+        /** The name you wish to make the dongle show up as. It is set automatically by the SPP library. */
+        const char* btdName;
+        /** The pin you wish to make the dongle use for authentication. It is set automatically by the SPP and BTHID library. */
+        const char* btdPin;
+
+        /** The bluetooth dongles Bluetooth address. */
+        uint8_t my_bdaddr[6];
+        /** HCI handle for the last connection. */
+        uint16_t hci_handle;
+        /** Last incoming devices Bluetooth address. */
+        uint8_t disc_bdaddr[6];
+        /** First 30 chars of last remote name. */
+        char remote_name[30];
+        /**
+         * The supported HCI Version read from the Bluetooth dongle.
+         * Used by the PS3BT library to check the HCI Version of the Bluetooth dongle,
+         * it should be at least 3 to work properly with the library.
+         */
+        uint8_t hci_version;
+
+        /** Call this function to pair with a Wiimote */
+        void pairWithWiimote() {
+                pairWithWii = true;
+                hci_state = HCI_CHECK_DEVICE_SERVICE;
+        };
+        /** Used to only send the ACL data to the Wiimote. */
+        bool connectToWii;
+        /** True if a Wiimote is connecting. */
+        bool incomingWii;
+        /** True when it should pair with a Wiimote. */
+        bool pairWithWii;
+        /** True if it's the new Wiimote with the Motion Plus Inside or a Wii U Pro Controller. */
+        bool motionPlusInside;
+        /** True if it's a Wii U Pro Controller. */
+        bool wiiUProController;
+
+        /** Call this function to pair with a Wiimote */
+        void pairWithHID() {
+                pairWithHIDDevice = true;
+                hci_state = HCI_CHECK_DEVICE_SERVICE;
+        };
+        /** Used to only send the ACL data to the Wiimote. */
+        bool connectToHIDDevice;
+        /** True if a Wiimote is connecting. */
+        bool incomingHIDDevice;
+        /** True when it should pair with a device like a mouse or keyboard. */
+        bool pairWithHIDDevice;
+
+        /**
+         * Read the poll interval taken from the endpoint descriptors.
+         * @return The poll interval in ms.
+         */
+        uint8_t readPollInterval() {
+                return pollInterval;
+        };
+
+protected:
+        /** Pointer to USB class instance. */
+        USB *pUsb;
+        /** Device address. */
+        uint8_t bAddress;
+        /** Endpoint info structure. */
+        EpInfo epInfo[BTD_MAX_ENDPOINTS];
+
+        /** Configuration number. */
+        uint8_t bConfNum;
+        /** Total number of endpoints in the configuration. */
+        uint8_t bNumEP;
+        /** Next poll time based on poll interval taken from the USB descriptor. */
+        uint32_t qNextPollTime;
+
+        /** Bluetooth dongle control endpoint. */
+        static const uint8_t BTD_CONTROL_PIPE;
+        /** HCI event endpoint index. */
+        static const uint8_t BTD_EVENT_PIPE;
+        /** ACL In endpoint index. */
+        static const uint8_t BTD_DATAIN_PIPE;
+        /** ACL Out endpoint index. */
+        static const uint8_t BTD_DATAOUT_PIPE;
+
+        /**
+         * Used to print the USB Endpoint Descriptor.
+         * @param ep_ptr Pointer to USB Endpoint Descriptor.
+         */
+        void PrintEndpointDescriptor(const USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR* ep_ptr);
+
+private:
+        void Initialize(); // Set all variables, endpoint structs etc. to default values
+        BluetoothService *btService[BTD_NUM_SERVICES];
+
+        uint16_t PID, VID; // PID and VID of device connected
+
+        uint8_t pollInterval;
+        bool bPollEnable;
+
+        bool pairWiiUsingSync; // True if paring was done using the Wii SYNC button.
+        bool checkRemoteName; // Used to check remote device's name before connecting.
+        bool incomingPS4; // True if a PS4 controller is connecting
+        uint8_t classOfDevice[3]; // Class of device of last device
+
+        /* Variables used by high level HCI task */
+        uint8_t hci_state; // Current state of Bluetooth HCI connection
+        uint16_t hci_counter; // Counter used for Bluetooth HCI reset loops
+        uint16_t hci_num_reset_loops; // This value indicate how many times it should read before trying to reset
+        uint16_t hci_event_flag; // HCI flags of received Bluetooth events
+        uint8_t inquiry_counter;
+
+        uint8_t hcibuf[BULK_MAXPKTSIZE]; // General purpose buffer for HCI data
+        uint8_t l2capinbuf[BULK_MAXPKTSIZE]; // General purpose buffer for L2CAP in data
+        uint8_t l2capoutbuf[14]; // General purpose buffer for L2CAP out data
+
+        /* State machines */
+        void HCI_event_task(); // Poll the HCI event pipe
+        void HCI_task(); // HCI state machine
+        void ACL_event_task(); // ACL input pipe
+
+        /* Used to set the Bluetooth Address internally to the PS3 Controllers */
+        void setBdaddr(uint8_t* BDADDR);
+        void setMoveBdaddr(uint8_t* BDADDR);
+};
+
+/** All Bluetooth services should inherit this class. */
+class BluetoothService {
+public:
+        BluetoothService(BTD *p) : pBtd(p) {
+                if(pBtd)
+                        pBtd->registerBluetoothService(this); // Register it as a Bluetooth service
+        };
+        /**
+         * Used to pass acldata to the Bluetooth service.
+         * @param ACLData Pointer to the incoming acldata.
+         */
+        virtual void ACLData(uint8_t* ACLData) = 0;
+        /** Used to run the different state machines in the Bluetooth service. */
+        virtual void Run() = 0;
+        /** Used to reset the Bluetooth service. */
+        virtual void Reset() = 0;
+        /** Used to disconnect both the L2CAP Channel and the HCI Connection for the Bluetooth service. */
+        virtual void disconnect() = 0;
+
+        /**
+         * Used to call your own function when the device is successfully initialized.
+         * @param funcOnInit Function to call.
+         */
+        void attachOnInit(void (*funcOnInit)(void)) {
+                pFuncOnInit = funcOnInit; // TODO: This really belong in a class of it's own as it is repeated several times
+        };
+
+protected:
+        /**
+         * Called when a device is successfully initialized.
+         * Use attachOnInit(void (*funcOnInit)(void)) to call your own function.
+         * This is useful for instance if you want to set the LEDs in a specific way.
+         */
+        virtual void onInit() = 0;
+
+        /** Used to check if the incoming L2CAP data matches the HCI Handle */
+        bool checkHciHandle(uint8_t *buf, uint16_t handle) {
+                return (buf[0] == (handle & 0xFF)) && (buf[1] == ((handle >> 8) | 0x20));
+        }
+
+        /** Pointer to function called in onInit(). */
+        void (*pFuncOnInit)(void);
+
+        /** Pointer to BTD instance. */
+        BTD *pBtd;
+
+        /** The HCI Handle for the connection. */
+        uint16_t hci_handle;
+
+        /** L2CAP flags of received Bluetooth events. */
+        uint32_t l2cap_event_flag;
+
+        /** Identifier for L2CAP commands. */
+        uint8_t identifier;
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/BTHID.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/BTHID.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bfa9202c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/BTHID.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,399 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2013 Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics. All rights reserved.
+
+ This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+ General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+ Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+ this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+ on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+ the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+ Contact information
+ -------------------
+
+ Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics
+ Web      :  http://www.tkjelectronics.com
+ e-mail   :  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#include "BTHID.h"
+// To enable serial debugging see "settings.h"
+//#define EXTRADEBUG // Uncomment to get even more debugging data
+//#define PRINTREPORT // Uncomment to print the report send by the HID device
+
+BTHID::BTHID(BTD *p, bool pair, const char *pin) :
+BluetoothService(p), // Pointer to USB class instance - mandatory
+protocolMode(HID_BOOT_PROTOCOL) {
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < NUM_PARSERS; i++)
+                pRptParser[i] = NULL;
+
+        pBtd->pairWithHIDDevice = pair;
+        pBtd->btdPin = pin;
+
+        /* Set device cid for the control and intterrupt channelse - LSB */
+        control_dcid[0] = 0x70; // 0x0070
+        control_dcid[1] = 0x00;
+        interrupt_dcid[0] = 0x71; // 0x0071
+        interrupt_dcid[1] = 0x00;
+
+        Reset();
+}
+
+void BTHID::Reset() {
+        connected = false;
+        activeConnection = false;
+        l2cap_event_flag = 0; // Reset flags
+        l2cap_state = L2CAP_WAIT;
+        ResetBTHID();
+}
+
+void BTHID::disconnect() { // Use this void to disconnect the device
+        // First the HID interrupt channel has to be disconnected, then the HID control channel and finally the HCI connection
+        pBtd->l2cap_disconnection_request(hci_handle, ++identifier, interrupt_scid, interrupt_dcid);
+        Reset();
+        l2cap_state = L2CAP_INTERRUPT_DISCONNECT;
+}
+
+void BTHID::ACLData(uint8_t* l2capinbuf) {
+        if(!pBtd->l2capConnectionClaimed && pBtd->incomingHIDDevice && !connected && !activeConnection) {
+                if(l2capinbuf[8] == L2CAP_CMD_CONNECTION_REQUEST) {
+                        if((l2capinbuf[12] | (l2capinbuf[13] << 8)) == HID_CTRL_PSM) {
+                                pBtd->incomingHIDDevice = false;
+                                pBtd->l2capConnectionClaimed = true; // Claim that the incoming connection belongs to this service
+                                activeConnection = true;
+                                hci_handle = pBtd->hci_handle; // Store the HCI Handle for the connection
+                                l2cap_state = L2CAP_WAIT;
+                        }
+                }
+        }
+
+        if(checkHciHandle(l2capinbuf, hci_handle)) { // acl_handle_ok
+                if((l2capinbuf[6] | (l2capinbuf[7] << 8)) == 0x0001U) { // l2cap_control - Channel ID for ACL-U
+                        if(l2capinbuf[8] == L2CAP_CMD_COMMAND_REJECT) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nL2CAP Command Rejected - Reason: "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[13], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[12], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[17], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[16], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[15], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[14], 0x80);
+#endif
+                        } else if(l2capinbuf[8] == L2CAP_CMD_CONNECTION_RESPONSE) {
+                                if(((l2capinbuf[16] | (l2capinbuf[17] << 8)) == 0x0000) && ((l2capinbuf[18] | (l2capinbuf[19] << 8)) == SUCCESSFUL)) { // Success
+                                        if(l2capinbuf[14] == control_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[15] == control_dcid[1]) {
+                                                //Notify(PSTR("\r\nHID Control Connection Complete"), 0x80);
+                                                identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                                control_scid[0] = l2capinbuf[12];
+                                                control_scid[1] = l2capinbuf[13];
+                                                l2cap_set_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONTROL_CONNECTED);
+                                        } else if(l2capinbuf[14] == interrupt_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[15] == interrupt_dcid[1]) {
+                                                //Notify(PSTR("\r\nHID Interrupt Connection Complete"), 0x80);
+                                                identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                                interrupt_scid[0] = l2capinbuf[12];
+                                                interrupt_scid[1] = l2capinbuf[13];
+                                                l2cap_set_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_INTERRUPT_CONNECTED);
+                                        }
+                                }
+                        } else if(l2capinbuf[8] == L2CAP_CMD_CONNECTION_REQUEST) {
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nL2CAP Connection Request - PSM: "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[13], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[12], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" SCID: "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[15], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[14], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" Identifier: "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[9], 0x80);
+#endif
+                                if((l2capinbuf[12] | (l2capinbuf[13] << 8)) == HID_CTRL_PSM) {
+                                        identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                        control_scid[0] = l2capinbuf[14];
+                                        control_scid[1] = l2capinbuf[15];
+                                        l2cap_set_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONNECTION_CONTROL_REQUEST);
+                                } else if((l2capinbuf[12] | (l2capinbuf[13] << 8)) == HID_INTR_PSM) {
+                                        identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                        interrupt_scid[0] = l2capinbuf[14];
+                                        interrupt_scid[1] = l2capinbuf[15];
+                                        l2cap_set_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONNECTION_INTERRUPT_REQUEST);
+                                }
+                        } else if(l2capinbuf[8] == L2CAP_CMD_CONFIG_RESPONSE) {
+                                if((l2capinbuf[16] | (l2capinbuf[17] << 8)) == 0x0000) { // Success
+                                        if(l2capinbuf[12] == control_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == control_dcid[1]) {
+                                                //Notify(PSTR("\r\nHID Control Configuration Complete"), 0x80);
+                                                identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                                l2cap_set_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONFIG_CONTROL_SUCCESS);
+                                        } else if(l2capinbuf[12] == interrupt_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == interrupt_dcid[1]) {
+                                                //Notify(PSTR("\r\nHID Interrupt Configuration Complete"), 0x80);
+                                                identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                                l2cap_set_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONFIG_INTERRUPT_SUCCESS);
+                                        }
+                                }
+                        } else if(l2capinbuf[8] == L2CAP_CMD_CONFIG_REQUEST) {
+                                if(l2capinbuf[12] == control_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == control_dcid[1]) {
+                                        //Notify(PSTR("\r\nHID Control Configuration Request"), 0x80);
+                                        pBtd->l2cap_config_response(hci_handle, l2capinbuf[9], control_scid);
+                                } else if(l2capinbuf[12] == interrupt_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == interrupt_dcid[1]) {
+                                        //Notify(PSTR("\r\nHID Interrupt Configuration Request"), 0x80);
+                                        pBtd->l2cap_config_response(hci_handle, l2capinbuf[9], interrupt_scid);
+                                }
+                        } else if(l2capinbuf[8] == L2CAP_CMD_DISCONNECT_REQUEST) {
+                                if(l2capinbuf[12] == control_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == control_dcid[1]) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nDisconnect Request: Control Channel"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                        pBtd->l2cap_disconnection_response(hci_handle, identifier, control_dcid, control_scid);
+                                        Reset();
+                                } else if(l2capinbuf[12] == interrupt_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == interrupt_dcid[1]) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nDisconnect Request: Interrupt Channel"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                        pBtd->l2cap_disconnection_response(hci_handle, identifier, interrupt_dcid, interrupt_scid);
+                                        Reset();
+                                }
+                        } else if(l2capinbuf[8] == L2CAP_CMD_DISCONNECT_RESPONSE) {
+                                if(l2capinbuf[12] == control_scid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == control_scid[1]) {
+                                        //Notify(PSTR("\r\nDisconnect Response: Control Channel"), 0x80);
+                                        identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                        l2cap_set_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_DISCONNECT_CONTROL_RESPONSE);
+                                } else if(l2capinbuf[12] == interrupt_scid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == interrupt_scid[1]) {
+                                        //Notify(PSTR("\r\nDisconnect Response: Interrupt Channel"), 0x80);
+                                        identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                        l2cap_set_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_DISCONNECT_INTERRUPT_RESPONSE);
+                                }
+                        }
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+                        else {
+                                identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nL2CAP Unknown Signaling Command: "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[8], 0x80);
+                        }
+#endif
+                } else if(l2capinbuf[6] == interrupt_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[7] == interrupt_dcid[1]) { // l2cap_interrupt
+#ifdef PRINTREPORT
+                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nL2CAP Interrupt: "), 0x80);
+                        for(uint16_t i = 0; i < ((uint16_t)l2capinbuf[5] << 8 | l2capinbuf[4]); i++) {
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[i + 8], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                        }
+#endif
+                        if(l2capinbuf[8] == 0xA1) { // HID_THDR_DATA_INPUT
+                                uint16_t length = ((uint16_t)l2capinbuf[5] << 8 | l2capinbuf[4]);
+                                ParseBTHIDData((uint8_t)(length - 1), &l2capinbuf[9]);
+
+                                switch(l2capinbuf[9]) {
+                                        case 0x01: // Keyboard or Joystick events
+                                                if(pRptParser[KEYBOARD_PARSER_ID])
+                                                        pRptParser[KEYBOARD_PARSER_ID]->Parse(reinterpret_cast<HID *>(this), 0, (uint8_t)(length - 2), &l2capinbuf[10]); // Use reinterpret_cast again to extract the instance
+                                                break;
+
+                                        case 0x02: // Mouse events
+                                                if(pRptParser[MOUSE_PARSER_ID])
+                                                        pRptParser[MOUSE_PARSER_ID]->Parse(reinterpret_cast<HID *>(this), 0, (uint8_t)(length - 2), &l2capinbuf[10]); // Use reinterpret_cast again to extract the instance
+                                                break;
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+                                        default:
+                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nUnknown Report type: "), 0x80);
+                                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[9], 0x80);
+                                                break;
+#endif
+                                }
+                        }
+                } else if(l2capinbuf[6] == control_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[7] == control_dcid[1]) { // l2cap_control
+#ifdef PRINTREPORT
+                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nL2CAP Control: "), 0x80);
+                        for(uint16_t i = 0; i < ((uint16_t)l2capinbuf[5] << 8 | l2capinbuf[4]); i++) {
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[i + 8], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                        }
+#endif
+                }
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+                else {
+                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nUnsupported L2CAP Data - Channel ID: "), 0x80);
+                        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[7], 0x80);
+                        Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[6], 0x80);
+
+                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nData: "), 0x80);
+                        Notify(PSTR("\r\n"), 0x80);
+                        for(uint16_t i = 0; i < ((uint16_t)l2capinbuf[5] << 8 | l2capinbuf[4]); i++) {
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[i + 8], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                        }
+                }
+#endif
+                L2CAP_task();
+        }
+}
+
+void BTHID::L2CAP_task() {
+        switch(l2cap_state) {
+                        /* These states are used if the HID device is the host */
+                case L2CAP_CONTROL_SUCCESS:
+                        if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONFIG_CONTROL_SUCCESS)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nHID Control Successfully Configured"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                setProtocol(); // Set protocol before establishing HID interrupt channel
+                                l2cap_state = L2CAP_INTERRUPT_SETUP;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case L2CAP_INTERRUPT_SETUP:
+                        if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONNECTION_INTERRUPT_REQUEST)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nHID Interrupt Incoming Connection Request"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                pBtd->l2cap_connection_response(hci_handle, identifier, interrupt_dcid, interrupt_scid, PENDING);
+                                delay(1);
+                                pBtd->l2cap_connection_response(hci_handle, identifier, interrupt_dcid, interrupt_scid, SUCCESSFUL);
+                                identifier++;
+                                delay(1);
+                                pBtd->l2cap_config_request(hci_handle, identifier, interrupt_scid);
+
+                                l2cap_state = L2CAP_INTERRUPT_CONFIG_REQUEST;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                        /* These states are used if the Arduino is the host */
+                case L2CAP_CONTROL_CONNECT_REQUEST:
+                        if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONTROL_CONNECTED)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nSend HID Control Config Request"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                identifier++;
+                                pBtd->l2cap_config_request(hci_handle, identifier, control_scid);
+                                l2cap_state = L2CAP_CONTROL_CONFIG_REQUEST;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case L2CAP_CONTROL_CONFIG_REQUEST:
+                        if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONFIG_CONTROL_SUCCESS)) {
+                                setProtocol(); // Set protocol before establishing HID interrupt channel
+                                delay(1); // Short delay between commands - just to be sure
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nSend HID Interrupt Connection Request"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                identifier++;
+                                pBtd->l2cap_connection_request(hci_handle, identifier, interrupt_dcid, HID_INTR_PSM);
+                                l2cap_state = L2CAP_INTERRUPT_CONNECT_REQUEST;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case L2CAP_INTERRUPT_CONNECT_REQUEST:
+                        if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_INTERRUPT_CONNECTED)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nSend HID Interrupt Config Request"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                identifier++;
+                                pBtd->l2cap_config_request(hci_handle, identifier, interrupt_scid);
+                                l2cap_state = L2CAP_INTERRUPT_CONFIG_REQUEST;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case L2CAP_INTERRUPT_CONFIG_REQUEST:
+                        if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONFIG_INTERRUPT_SUCCESS)) { // Now the HID channels is established
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nHID Channels Established"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                pBtd->connectToHIDDevice = false;
+                                pBtd->pairWithHIDDevice = false;
+                                connected = true;
+                                onInit();
+                                l2cap_state = L2CAP_DONE;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case L2CAP_DONE:
+                        break;
+
+                case L2CAP_INTERRUPT_DISCONNECT:
+                        if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_DISCONNECT_INTERRUPT_RESPONSE)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nDisconnected Interrupt Channel"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                identifier++;
+                                pBtd->l2cap_disconnection_request(hci_handle, identifier, control_scid, control_dcid);
+                                l2cap_state = L2CAP_CONTROL_DISCONNECT;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case L2CAP_CONTROL_DISCONNECT:
+                        if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_DISCONNECT_CONTROL_RESPONSE)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nDisconnected Control Channel"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                pBtd->hci_disconnect(hci_handle);
+                                hci_handle = -1; // Reset handle
+                                l2cap_event_flag = 0; // Reset flags
+                                l2cap_state = L2CAP_WAIT;
+                        }
+                        break;
+        }
+}
+
+void BTHID::Run() {
+        switch(l2cap_state) {
+                case L2CAP_WAIT:
+                        if(pBtd->connectToHIDDevice && !pBtd->l2capConnectionClaimed && !connected && !activeConnection) {
+                                pBtd->l2capConnectionClaimed = true;
+                                activeConnection = true;
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nSend HID Control Connection Request"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                hci_handle = pBtd->hci_handle; // Store the HCI Handle for the connection
+                                l2cap_event_flag = 0; // Reset flags
+                                identifier = 0;
+                                pBtd->l2cap_connection_request(hci_handle, identifier, control_dcid, HID_CTRL_PSM);
+                                l2cap_state = L2CAP_CONTROL_CONNECT_REQUEST;
+                        } else if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONNECTION_CONTROL_REQUEST)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nHID Control Incoming Connection Request"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                pBtd->l2cap_connection_response(hci_handle, identifier, control_dcid, control_scid, PENDING);
+                                delay(1);
+                                pBtd->l2cap_connection_response(hci_handle, identifier, control_dcid, control_scid, SUCCESSFUL);
+                                identifier++;
+                                delay(1);
+                                pBtd->l2cap_config_request(hci_handle, identifier, control_scid);
+                                l2cap_state = L2CAP_CONTROL_SUCCESS;
+                        }
+                        break;
+        }
+}
+
+/************************************************************/
+/*                    HID Commands                          */
+
+/************************************************************/
+void BTHID::setProtocol() {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nSet protocol mode: "), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (protocolMode, 0x80);
+#endif
+        if (protocolMode != HID_BOOT_PROTOCOL && protocolMode != HID_RPT_PROTOCOL) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nNot a valid protocol mode. Using Boot protocol instead."), 0x80);
+#endif
+                protocolMode = HID_BOOT_PROTOCOL; // Use Boot Protocol by default
+        }
+        uint8_t command = 0x70 | protocolMode; // Set Protocol, see Bluetooth HID specs page 33
+        pBtd->L2CAP_Command(hci_handle, &command, 1, control_scid[0], control_scid[1]);
+}
+
+void BTHID::setLeds(uint8_t data) {
+        uint8_t buf[3];
+        buf[0] = 0xA2; // HID BT DATA_request (0xA0) | Report Type (Output 0x02)
+        buf[1] = 0x01; // Report ID
+        buf[2] = data;
+        pBtd->L2CAP_Command(hci_handle, buf, 3, interrupt_scid[0], interrupt_scid[1]);
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/BTHID.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/BTHID.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1a7d8687c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/BTHID.h
@@ -0,0 +1,155 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2013 Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics. All rights reserved.
+
+ This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+ General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+ Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+ this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+ on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+ the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+ Contact information
+ -------------------
+
+ Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics
+ Web      :  http://www.tkjelectronics.com
+ e-mail   :  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#ifndef _bthid_h_
+#define _bthid_h_
+
+#include "BTD.h"
+#include "hidboot.h"
+
+#define KEYBOARD_PARSER_ID      0
+#define MOUSE_PARSER_ID         1
+#define NUM_PARSERS             2
+
+/** This BluetoothService class implements support for Bluetooth HID devices. */
+class BTHID : public BluetoothService {
+public:
+        /**
+         * Constructor for the BTHID class.
+         * @param  p   Pointer to the BTD class instance.
+         * @param  pair   Set this to true in order to pair with the device. If the argument is omitted then it will not pair with it. One can use ::PAIR to set it to true.
+         * @param  pin   Write the pin to BTD#btdPin. If argument is omitted, then "0000" will be used.
+         */
+        BTHID(BTD *p, bool pair = false, const char *pin = "0000");
+
+        /** @name BluetoothService implementation */
+        /** Used this to disconnect the devices. */
+        void disconnect();
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /**
+         * Get HIDReportParser.
+         * @param  id ID of parser.
+         * @return    Returns the corresponding HIDReportParser. Returns NULL if id is not valid.
+         */
+        HIDReportParser *GetReportParser(uint8_t id) {
+                if (id >= NUM_PARSERS)
+                        return NULL;
+                return pRptParser[id];
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Set HIDReportParser to be used.
+         * @param  id  Id of parser.
+         * @param  prs Pointer to HIDReportParser.
+         * @return     Returns true if the HIDReportParser is set. False otherwise.
+         */
+        bool SetReportParser(uint8_t id, HIDReportParser *prs) {
+                if (id >= NUM_PARSERS)
+                        return false;
+                pRptParser[id] = prs;
+                return true;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Set HID protocol mode.
+         * @param mode HID protocol to use. Either HID_BOOT_PROTOCOL or HID_RPT_PROTOCOL.
+         */
+        void setProtocolMode(uint8_t mode) {
+                protocolMode = mode;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Used to set the leds on a keyboard.
+         * @param data See KBDLEDS in hidboot.h
+         */
+        void setLeds(uint8_t data);
+
+        /** True if a device is connected */
+        bool connected;
+
+        /** Call this to start the paring sequence with a device */
+        void pair(void) {
+                if(pBtd)
+                        pBtd->pairWithHID();
+        };
+
+protected:
+        /** @name BluetoothService implementation */
+        /**
+         * Used to pass acldata to the services.
+         * @param ACLData Incoming acldata.
+         */
+        void ACLData(uint8_t* ACLData);
+        /** Used to run part of the state machine. */
+        void Run();
+        /** Use this to reset the service. */
+        void Reset();
+        /**
+         * Called when a device is successfully initialized.
+         * Use attachOnInit(void (*funcOnInit)(void)) to call your own function.
+         * This is useful for instance if you want to set the LEDs in a specific way.
+         */
+        void onInit() {
+                if(pFuncOnInit)
+                        pFuncOnInit(); // Call the user function
+                OnInitBTHID();
+        };
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /** @name Overridable functions */
+        /**
+         * Used to parse Bluetooth HID data to any class that inherits this class.
+         * @param len The length of the incoming data.
+         * @param buf Pointer to the data buffer.
+         */
+        virtual void ParseBTHIDData(uint8_t len, uint8_t *buf) {
+                return;
+        };
+        /** Called when a device is connected */
+        virtual void OnInitBTHID() {
+                return;
+        };
+        /** Used to reset any buffers in the class that inherits this */
+        virtual void ResetBTHID() {
+                return;
+        }
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /** L2CAP source CID for HID_Control */
+        uint8_t control_scid[2];
+
+        /** L2CAP source CID for HID_Interrupt */
+        uint8_t interrupt_scid[2];
+
+private:
+        HIDReportParser *pRptParser[NUM_PARSERS]; // Pointer to HIDReportParsers.
+
+        /** Set report protocol. */
+        void setProtocol();
+        uint8_t protocolMode;
+
+        void L2CAP_task(); // L2CAP state machine
+
+        bool activeConnection; // Used to indicate if it already has established a connection
+
+        /* Variables used for L2CAP communication */
+        uint8_t control_dcid[2]; // L2CAP device CID for HID_Control - Always 0x0070
+        uint8_t interrupt_dcid[2]; // L2CAP device CID for HID_Interrupt - Always 0x0071
+        uint8_t l2cap_state;
+};
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PS3BT.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PS3BT.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..235092e0a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PS3BT.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,634 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2012 Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics. All rights reserved.
+
+ This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+ General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+ Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+ this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+ on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+ the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+ Contact information
+ -------------------
+
+ Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics
+ Web      :  http://www.tkjelectronics.com
+ e-mail   :  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#include "PS3BT.h"
+// To enable serial debugging see "settings.h"
+//#define EXTRADEBUG // Uncomment to get even more debugging data
+//#define PRINTREPORT // Uncomment to print the report send by the PS3 Controllers
+
+PS3BT::PS3BT(BTD *p, uint8_t btadr5, uint8_t btadr4, uint8_t btadr3, uint8_t btadr2, uint8_t btadr1, uint8_t btadr0) :
+BluetoothService(p) // Pointer to USB class instance - mandatory
+{
+        pBtd->my_bdaddr[5] = btadr5; // Change to your dongle's Bluetooth address instead
+        pBtd->my_bdaddr[4] = btadr4;
+        pBtd->my_bdaddr[3] = btadr3;
+        pBtd->my_bdaddr[2] = btadr2;
+        pBtd->my_bdaddr[1] = btadr1;
+        pBtd->my_bdaddr[0] = btadr0;
+
+        HIDBuffer[0] = 0x52; // HID BT Set_report (0x50) | Report Type (Output 0x02)
+        HIDBuffer[1] = 0x01; // Report ID
+
+        // Needed for PS3 Move Controller commands to work via bluetooth
+        HIDMoveBuffer[0] = 0xA2; // HID BT DATA_request (0xA0) | Report Type (Output 0x02)
+        HIDMoveBuffer[1] = 0x02; // Report ID
+
+        /* Set device cid for the control and intterrupt channelse - LSB */
+        control_dcid[0] = 0x40; // 0x0040
+        control_dcid[1] = 0x00;
+        interrupt_dcid[0] = 0x41; // 0x0041
+        interrupt_dcid[1] = 0x00;
+
+        Reset();
+}
+
+bool PS3BT::getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b) {
+        return (ButtonState & pgm_read_dword(&PS3_BUTTONS[(uint8_t)b]));
+}
+
+bool PS3BT::getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b) {
+        uint32_t button = pgm_read_dword(&PS3_BUTTONS[(uint8_t)b]);
+        bool click = (ButtonClickState & button);
+        ButtonClickState &= ~button; // Clear "click" event
+        return click;
+}
+
+uint8_t PS3BT::getAnalogButton(ButtonEnum a) {
+        return (uint8_t)(l2capinbuf[pgm_read_byte(&PS3_ANALOG_BUTTONS[(uint8_t)a])]);
+}
+
+uint8_t PS3BT::getAnalogHat(AnalogHatEnum a) {
+        return (uint8_t)(l2capinbuf[(uint8_t)a + 15]);
+}
+
+int16_t PS3BT::getSensor(SensorEnum a) {
+        if(PS3Connected) {
+                if(a == aX || a == aY || a == aZ || a == gZ)
+                        return ((l2capinbuf[(uint16_t)a] << 8) | l2capinbuf[(uint16_t)a + 1]);
+                else
+                        return 0;
+        } else if(PS3MoveConnected) {
+                if(a == mXmove || a == mYmove) // These are all 12-bits long
+                        return (((l2capinbuf[(uint16_t)a] & 0x0F) << 8) | (l2capinbuf[(uint16_t)a + 1]));
+                else if(a == mZmove || a == tempMove) // The tempearature is also 12 bits long
+                        return ((l2capinbuf[(uint16_t)a] << 4) | ((l2capinbuf[(uint16_t)a + 1] & 0xF0) >> 4));
+                else // aXmove, aYmove, aZmove, gXmove, gYmove and gZmove
+                        return (l2capinbuf[(uint16_t)a] | (l2capinbuf[(uint16_t)a + 1] << 8));
+        } else
+                return 0;
+}
+
+double PS3BT::getAngle(AngleEnum a) {
+        double accXval, accYval, accZval;
+
+        if(PS3Connected) {
+                // Data for the Kionix KXPC4 used in the DualShock 3
+                const double zeroG = 511.5; // 1.65/3.3*1023 (1.65V)
+                accXval = -((double)getSensor(aX) - zeroG);
+                accYval = -((double)getSensor(aY) - zeroG);
+                accZval = -((double)getSensor(aZ) - zeroG);
+        } else if(PS3MoveConnected) {
+                // It's a Kionix KXSC4 inside the Motion controller
+                const uint16_t zeroG = 0x8000;
+                accXval = -(int16_t)(getSensor(aXmove) - zeroG);
+                accYval = (int16_t)(getSensor(aYmove) - zeroG);
+                accZval = (int16_t)(getSensor(aZmove) - zeroG);
+        } else
+                return 0;
+
+        // Convert to 360 degrees resolution
+        // atan2 outputs the value of -π to π (radians)
+        // We are then converting it to 0 to 2Ï€ and then to degrees
+        if(a == Pitch)
+                return (atan2(accYval, accZval) + PI) * RAD_TO_DEG;
+        else
+                return (atan2(accXval, accZval) + PI) * RAD_TO_DEG;
+}
+
+double PS3BT::get9DOFValues(SensorEnum a) { // Thanks to Manfred Piendl
+        if(!PS3MoveConnected)
+                return 0;
+        int16_t value = getSensor(a);
+        if(a == mXmove || a == mYmove || a == mZmove) {
+                if(value > 2047)
+                        value -= 0x1000;
+                return (double)value / 3.2; // unit: muT = 10^(-6) Tesla
+        } else if(a == aXmove || a == aYmove || a == aZmove) {
+                if(value < 0)
+                        value += 0x8000;
+                else
+                        value -= 0x8000;
+                return (double)value / 442.0; // unit: m/(s^2)
+        } else if(a == gXmove || a == gYmove || a == gZmove) {
+                if(value < 0)
+                        value += 0x8000;
+                else
+                        value -= 0x8000;
+                if(a == gXmove)
+                        return (double)value / 11.6; // unit: deg/s
+                else if(a == gYmove)
+                        return (double)value / 11.2; // unit: deg/s
+                else // gZmove
+                        return (double)value / 9.6; // unit: deg/s
+        } else
+                return 0;
+}
+
+String PS3BT::getTemperature() {
+        if(PS3MoveConnected) {
+                int16_t input = getSensor(tempMove);
+
+                String output = String(input / 100);
+                output += ".";
+                if(input % 100 < 10)
+                        output += "0";
+                output += String(input % 100);
+
+                return output;
+        } else
+                return "Error";
+}
+
+bool PS3BT::getStatus(StatusEnum c) {
+        return (l2capinbuf[(uint16_t)c >> 8] == ((uint8_t)c & 0xff));
+}
+
+void PS3BT::printStatusString() {
+        char statusOutput[100]; // Max string length plus null character
+        if(PS3Connected || PS3NavigationConnected) {
+                strcpy_P(statusOutput, PSTR("ConnectionStatus: "));
+
+                if(getStatus(Plugged)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Plugged"));
+                else if(getStatus(Unplugged)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Unplugged"));
+                else strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Error"));
+
+                strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR(" - PowerRating: "));
+
+                if(getStatus(Charging)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Charging"));
+                else if(getStatus(NotCharging)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Not Charging"));
+                else if(getStatus(Shutdown)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Shutdown"));
+                else if(getStatus(Dying)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Dying"));
+                else if(getStatus(Low)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Low"));
+                else if(getStatus(High)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("High"));
+                else if(getStatus(Full)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Full"));
+                else strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Error"));
+
+                strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR(" - WirelessStatus: "));
+
+                if(getStatus(CableRumble)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Cable - Rumble is on"));
+                else if(getStatus(Cable)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Cable - Rumble is off"));
+                else if(getStatus(BluetoothRumble)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Bluetooth - Rumble is on"));
+                else if(getStatus(Bluetooth)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Bluetooth - Rumble is off"));
+                else strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Error"));
+        } else if(PS3MoveConnected) {
+                strcpy_P(statusOutput, PSTR("PowerRating: "));
+
+                if(getStatus(MoveCharging)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Charging"));
+                else if(getStatus(MoveNotCharging)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Not Charging"));
+                else if(getStatus(MoveShutdown)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Shutdown"));
+                else if(getStatus(MoveDying)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Dying"));
+                else if(getStatus(MoveLow)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Low"));
+                else if(getStatus(MoveHigh)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("High"));
+                else if(getStatus(MoveFull)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Full"));
+                else strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Error"));
+        } else
+                strcpy_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Error"));
+
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.write(statusOutput);
+}
+
+void PS3BT::Reset() {
+        PS3Connected = false;
+        PS3MoveConnected = false;
+        PS3NavigationConnected = false;
+        activeConnection = false;
+        l2cap_event_flag = 0; // Reset flags
+        l2cap_state = L2CAP_WAIT;
+
+        // Needed for PS3 Dualshock Controller commands to work via Bluetooth
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < PS3_REPORT_BUFFER_SIZE; i++)
+                HIDBuffer[i + 2] = pgm_read_byte(&PS3_REPORT_BUFFER[i]); // First two bytes reserved for report type and ID
+}
+
+void PS3BT::disconnect() { // Use this void to disconnect any of the controllers
+        // First the HID interrupt channel has to be disconnected, then the HID control channel and finally the HCI connection
+        pBtd->l2cap_disconnection_request(hci_handle, ++identifier, interrupt_scid, interrupt_dcid);
+        Reset();
+        l2cap_state = L2CAP_INTERRUPT_DISCONNECT;
+}
+
+void PS3BT::ACLData(uint8_t* ACLData) {
+        if(!pBtd->l2capConnectionClaimed && !PS3Connected && !PS3MoveConnected && !PS3NavigationConnected && !activeConnection && !pBtd->connectToWii && !pBtd->incomingWii && !pBtd->pairWithWii) {
+                if(ACLData[8] == L2CAP_CMD_CONNECTION_REQUEST) {
+                        if((ACLData[12] | (ACLData[13] << 8)) == HID_CTRL_PSM) {
+                                pBtd->l2capConnectionClaimed = true; // Claim that the incoming connection belongs to this service
+                                activeConnection = true;
+                                hci_handle = pBtd->hci_handle; // Store the HCI Handle for the connection
+                                l2cap_state = L2CAP_WAIT;
+                                remote_name_first = pBtd->remote_name[0]; // Store the first letter in remote name for the connection
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                if(pBtd->hci_version < 3) { // Check the HCI Version of the Bluetooth dongle
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nYour dongle may not support reading the analog buttons, sensors and status\r\nYour HCI Version is: "), 0x80);
+                                        Notify(pBtd->hci_version, 0x80);
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nBut should be at least 3\r\nThis means that it doesn't support Bluetooth Version 2.0+EDR"), 0x80);
+                                }
+#endif
+                        }
+                }
+        }
+
+        if(checkHciHandle(ACLData, hci_handle)) { // acl_handle_ok
+                memcpy(l2capinbuf, ACLData, BULK_MAXPKTSIZE);
+                if((l2capinbuf[6] | (l2capinbuf[7] << 8)) == 0x0001U) { // l2cap_control - Channel ID for ACL-U
+                        if(l2capinbuf[8] == L2CAP_CMD_COMMAND_REJECT) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nL2CAP Command Rejected - Reason: "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[13], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[12], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" Data: "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[17], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[16], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[15], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[14], 0x80);
+#endif
+                        } else if(l2capinbuf[8] == L2CAP_CMD_CONNECTION_REQUEST) {
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nL2CAP Connection Request - PSM: "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[13], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[12], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" SCID: "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[15], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[14], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" Identifier: "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[9], 0x80);
+#endif
+                                if((l2capinbuf[12] | (l2capinbuf[13] << 8)) == HID_CTRL_PSM) {
+                                        identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                        control_scid[0] = l2capinbuf[14];
+                                        control_scid[1] = l2capinbuf[15];
+                                        l2cap_set_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONNECTION_CONTROL_REQUEST);
+                                } else if((l2capinbuf[12] | (l2capinbuf[13] << 8)) == HID_INTR_PSM) {
+                                        identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                        interrupt_scid[0] = l2capinbuf[14];
+                                        interrupt_scid[1] = l2capinbuf[15];
+                                        l2cap_set_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONNECTION_INTERRUPT_REQUEST);
+                                }
+                        } else if(l2capinbuf[8] == L2CAP_CMD_CONFIG_RESPONSE) {
+                                if((l2capinbuf[16] | (l2capinbuf[17] << 8)) == 0x0000) { // Success
+                                        if(l2capinbuf[12] == control_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == control_dcid[1]) {
+                                                //Notify(PSTR("\r\nHID Control Configuration Complete"), 0x80);
+                                                l2cap_set_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONFIG_CONTROL_SUCCESS);
+                                        } else if(l2capinbuf[12] == interrupt_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == interrupt_dcid[1]) {
+                                                //Notify(PSTR("\r\nHID Interrupt Configuration Complete"), 0x80);
+                                                l2cap_set_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONFIG_INTERRUPT_SUCCESS);
+                                        }
+                                }
+                        } else if(l2capinbuf[8] == L2CAP_CMD_CONFIG_REQUEST) {
+                                if(l2capinbuf[12] == control_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == control_dcid[1]) {
+                                        //Notify(PSTR("\r\nHID Control Configuration Request"), 0x80);
+                                        pBtd->l2cap_config_response(hci_handle, l2capinbuf[9], control_scid);
+                                } else if(l2capinbuf[12] == interrupt_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == interrupt_dcid[1]) {
+                                        //Notify(PSTR("\r\nHID Interrupt Configuration Request"), 0x80);
+                                        pBtd->l2cap_config_response(hci_handle, l2capinbuf[9], interrupt_scid);
+                                }
+                        } else if(l2capinbuf[8] == L2CAP_CMD_DISCONNECT_REQUEST) {
+                                if(l2capinbuf[12] == control_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == control_dcid[1]) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nDisconnect Request: Control Channel"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                        pBtd->l2cap_disconnection_response(hci_handle, identifier, control_dcid, control_scid);
+                                        Reset();
+                                } else if(l2capinbuf[12] == interrupt_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == interrupt_dcid[1]) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nDisconnect Request: Interrupt Channel"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                        pBtd->l2cap_disconnection_response(hci_handle, identifier, interrupt_dcid, interrupt_scid);
+                                        Reset();
+                                }
+                        } else if(l2capinbuf[8] == L2CAP_CMD_DISCONNECT_RESPONSE) {
+                                if(l2capinbuf[12] == control_scid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == control_scid[1]) {
+                                        //Notify(PSTR("\r\nDisconnect Response: Control Channel"), 0x80);
+                                        identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                        l2cap_set_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_DISCONNECT_CONTROL_RESPONSE);
+                                } else if(l2capinbuf[12] == interrupt_scid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == interrupt_scid[1]) {
+                                        //Notify(PSTR("\r\nDisconnect Response: Interrupt Channel"), 0x80);
+                                        identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                        l2cap_set_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_DISCONNECT_INTERRUPT_RESPONSE);
+                                }
+                        }
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+                        else {
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nL2CAP Unknown Signaling Command: "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[8], 0x80);
+                        }
+#endif
+                } else if(l2capinbuf[6] == interrupt_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[7] == interrupt_dcid[1]) { // l2cap_interrupt
+                        //Notify(PSTR("\r\nL2CAP Interrupt"), 0x80);
+                        if(PS3Connected || PS3MoveConnected || PS3NavigationConnected) {
+                                /* Read Report */
+                                if(l2capinbuf[8] == 0xA1) { // HID_THDR_DATA_INPUT
+                                        lastMessageTime = millis(); // Store the last message time
+
+                                        if(PS3Connected || PS3NavigationConnected)
+                                                ButtonState = (uint32_t)(l2capinbuf[11] | ((uint16_t)l2capinbuf[12] << 8) | ((uint32_t)l2capinbuf[13] << 16));
+                                        else if(PS3MoveConnected)
+                                                ButtonState = (uint32_t)(l2capinbuf[10] | ((uint16_t)l2capinbuf[11] << 8) | ((uint32_t)l2capinbuf[12] << 16));
+
+                                        //Notify(PSTR("\r\nButtonState", 0x80);
+                                        //PrintHex<uint32_t>(ButtonState, 0x80);
+
+                                        if(ButtonState != OldButtonState) {
+                                                ButtonClickState = ButtonState & ~OldButtonState; // Update click state variable
+                                                OldButtonState = ButtonState;
+                                        }
+
+#ifdef PRINTREPORT // Uncomment "#define PRINTREPORT" to print the report send by the PS3 Controllers
+                                        for(uint8_t i = 10; i < 58; i++) {
+                                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[i], 0x80);
+                                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                        }
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\n"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                }
+                        }
+                }
+                L2CAP_task();
+        }
+}
+
+void PS3BT::L2CAP_task() {
+        switch(l2cap_state) {
+                case L2CAP_WAIT:
+                        if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONNECTION_CONTROL_REQUEST)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nHID Control Incoming Connection Request"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                pBtd->l2cap_connection_response(hci_handle, identifier, control_dcid, control_scid, PENDING);
+                                delay(1);
+                                pBtd->l2cap_connection_response(hci_handle, identifier, control_dcid, control_scid, SUCCESSFUL);
+                                identifier++;
+                                delay(1);
+                                pBtd->l2cap_config_request(hci_handle, identifier, control_scid);
+                                l2cap_state = L2CAP_CONTROL_SUCCESS;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case L2CAP_CONTROL_SUCCESS:
+                        if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONFIG_CONTROL_SUCCESS)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nHID Control Successfully Configured"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                l2cap_state = L2CAP_INTERRUPT_SETUP;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case L2CAP_INTERRUPT_SETUP:
+                        if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONNECTION_INTERRUPT_REQUEST)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nHID Interrupt Incoming Connection Request"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                pBtd->l2cap_connection_response(hci_handle, identifier, interrupt_dcid, interrupt_scid, PENDING);
+                                delay(1);
+                                pBtd->l2cap_connection_response(hci_handle, identifier, interrupt_dcid, interrupt_scid, SUCCESSFUL);
+                                identifier++;
+                                delay(1);
+                                pBtd->l2cap_config_request(hci_handle, identifier, interrupt_scid);
+
+                                l2cap_state = L2CAP_INTERRUPT_CONFIG_REQUEST;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case L2CAP_INTERRUPT_CONFIG_REQUEST:
+                        if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONFIG_INTERRUPT_SUCCESS)) { // Now the HID channels is established
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nHID Interrupt Successfully Configured"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                if(remote_name_first == 'M') { // First letter in Motion Controller ('M')
+                                        memset(l2capinbuf, 0, BULK_MAXPKTSIZE); // Reset l2cap in buffer as it sometimes read it as a button has been pressed
+                                        l2cap_state = TURN_ON_LED;
+                                } else
+                                        l2cap_state = PS3_ENABLE_SIXAXIS;
+                                timer = millis();
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                        /* These states are handled in Run() */
+
+                case L2CAP_INTERRUPT_DISCONNECT:
+                        if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_DISCONNECT_INTERRUPT_RESPONSE)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nDisconnected Interrupt Channel"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                identifier++;
+                                pBtd->l2cap_disconnection_request(hci_handle, identifier, control_scid, control_dcid);
+                                l2cap_state = L2CAP_CONTROL_DISCONNECT;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case L2CAP_CONTROL_DISCONNECT:
+                        if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_DISCONNECT_CONTROL_RESPONSE)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nDisconnected Control Channel"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                pBtd->hci_disconnect(hci_handle);
+                                hci_handle = -1; // Reset handle
+                                l2cap_event_flag = 0; // Reset flags
+                                l2cap_state = L2CAP_WAIT;
+                        }
+                        break;
+        }
+}
+
+void PS3BT::Run() {
+        switch(l2cap_state) {
+                case PS3_ENABLE_SIXAXIS:
+                        if(millis() - timer > 1000) { // loop 1 second before sending the command
+                                memset(l2capinbuf, 0, BULK_MAXPKTSIZE); // Reset l2cap in buffer as it sometimes read it as a button has been pressed
+                                for(uint8_t i = 15; i < 19; i++)
+                                        l2capinbuf[i] = 0x7F; // Set the analog joystick values to center position
+                                enable_sixaxis();
+                                l2cap_state = TURN_ON_LED;
+                                timer = millis();
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case TURN_ON_LED:
+                        if(millis() - timer > 1000) { // loop 1 second before sending the command
+                                if(remote_name_first == 'P') { // First letter in PLAYSTATION(R)3 Controller ('P')
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nDualshock 3 Controller Enabled\r\n"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        PS3Connected = true;
+                                } else if(remote_name_first == 'N') { // First letter in Navigation Controller ('N')
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nNavigation Controller Enabled\r\n"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        PS3NavigationConnected = true;
+                                } else if(remote_name_first == 'M') { // First letter in Motion Controller ('M')
+                                        timer = millis();
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nMotion Controller Enabled\r\n"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        PS3MoveConnected = true;
+                                }
+                                ButtonState = 0; // Clear all values
+                                OldButtonState = 0;
+                                ButtonClickState = 0;
+
+                                onInit(); // Turn on the LED on the controller
+                                l2cap_state = L2CAP_DONE;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case L2CAP_DONE:
+                        if(PS3MoveConnected) { // The Bulb and rumble values, has to be send at approximately every 5th second for it to stay on
+                                if(millis() - timer > 4000) { // Send at least every 4th second
+                                        HIDMove_Command(HIDMoveBuffer, HID_BUFFERSIZE); // The Bulb and rumble values, has to be written again and again, for it to stay turned on
+                                        timer = millis();
+                                }
+                        }
+                        break;
+        }
+}
+
+/************************************************************/
+/*                    HID Commands                          */
+/************************************************************/
+
+// Playstation Sixaxis Dualshock and Navigation Controller commands
+
+void PS3BT::HID_Command(uint8_t* data, uint8_t nbytes) {
+        if(millis() - timerHID <= 150) // Check if is has been more than 150ms since last command
+                delay((uint32_t)(150 - (millis() - timerHID))); // There have to be a delay between commands
+        pBtd->L2CAP_Command(hci_handle, data, nbytes, control_scid[0], control_scid[1]); // Both the Navigation and Dualshock controller sends data via the control channel
+        timerHID = millis();
+}
+
+void PS3BT::setAllOff() {
+        HIDBuffer[3] = 0x00; // Rumble bytes
+        HIDBuffer[4] = 0x00;
+        HIDBuffer[5] = 0x00;
+        HIDBuffer[6] = 0x00;
+
+        HIDBuffer[11] = 0x00; // LED byte
+
+        HID_Command(HIDBuffer, HID_BUFFERSIZE);
+}
+
+void PS3BT::setRumbleOff() {
+        HIDBuffer[3] = 0x00;
+        HIDBuffer[4] = 0x00;
+        HIDBuffer[5] = 0x00;
+        HIDBuffer[6] = 0x00;
+
+        HID_Command(HIDBuffer, HID_BUFFERSIZE);
+}
+
+void PS3BT::setRumbleOn(RumbleEnum mode) {
+        uint8_t power[2] = {0xff, 0x00}; // Defaults to RumbleLow
+        if(mode == RumbleHigh) {
+                power[0] = 0x00;
+                power[1] = 0xff;
+        }
+        setRumbleOn(0xfe, power[0], 0xfe, power[1]);
+}
+
+void PS3BT::setRumbleOn(uint8_t rightDuration, uint8_t rightPower, uint8_t leftDuration, uint8_t leftPower) {
+        HIDBuffer[3] = rightDuration;
+        HIDBuffer[4] = rightPower;
+        HIDBuffer[5] = leftDuration;
+        HIDBuffer[6] = leftPower;
+        HID_Command(HIDBuffer, HID_BUFFERSIZE);
+}
+
+void PS3BT::setLedRaw(uint8_t value) {
+        HIDBuffer[11] = value << 1;
+        HID_Command(HIDBuffer, HID_BUFFERSIZE);
+}
+
+void PS3BT::setLedOff(LEDEnum a) {
+        HIDBuffer[11] &= ~((uint8_t)((pgm_read_byte(&PS3_LEDS[(uint8_t)a]) & 0x0f) << 1));
+        HID_Command(HIDBuffer, HID_BUFFERSIZE);
+}
+
+void PS3BT::setLedOn(LEDEnum a) {
+        if(a == OFF)
+                setLedRaw(0);
+        else {
+                HIDBuffer[11] |= (uint8_t)((pgm_read_byte(&PS3_LEDS[(uint8_t)a]) & 0x0f) << 1);
+                HID_Command(HIDBuffer, HID_BUFFERSIZE);
+        }
+}
+
+void PS3BT::setLedToggle(LEDEnum a) {
+        HIDBuffer[11] ^= (uint8_t)((pgm_read_byte(&PS3_LEDS[(uint8_t)a]) & 0x0f) << 1);
+        HID_Command(HIDBuffer, HID_BUFFERSIZE);
+}
+
+void PS3BT::enable_sixaxis() { // Command used to enable the Dualshock 3 and Navigation controller to send data via Bluetooth
+        uint8_t cmd_buf[6];
+        cmd_buf[0] = 0x53; // HID BT Set_report (0x50) | Report Type (Feature 0x03)
+        cmd_buf[1] = 0xF4; // Report ID
+        cmd_buf[2] = 0x42; // Special PS3 Controller enable commands
+        cmd_buf[3] = 0x03;
+        cmd_buf[4] = 0x00;
+        cmd_buf[5] = 0x00;
+
+        HID_Command(cmd_buf, 6);
+}
+
+// Playstation Move Controller commands
+
+void PS3BT::HIDMove_Command(uint8_t* data, uint8_t nbytes) {
+        if(millis() - timerHID <= 150)// Check if is has been less than 150ms since last command
+                delay((uint32_t)(150 - (millis() - timerHID))); // There have to be a delay between commands
+        pBtd->L2CAP_Command(hci_handle, data, nbytes, interrupt_scid[0], interrupt_scid[1]); // The Move controller sends it's data via the intterrupt channel
+        timerHID = millis();
+}
+
+void PS3BT::moveSetBulb(uint8_t r, uint8_t g, uint8_t b) { // Use this to set the Color using RGB values
+        // Set the Bulb's values into the write buffer
+        HIDMoveBuffer[3] = r;
+        HIDMoveBuffer[4] = g;
+        HIDMoveBuffer[5] = b;
+
+        HIDMove_Command(HIDMoveBuffer, HID_BUFFERSIZE);
+}
+
+void PS3BT::moveSetBulb(ColorsEnum color) { // Use this to set the Color using the predefined colors in enum
+        moveSetBulb((uint8_t)(color >> 16), (uint8_t)(color >> 8), (uint8_t)(color));
+}
+
+void PS3BT::moveSetRumble(uint8_t rumble) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        if(rumble < 64 && rumble != 0) // The rumble value has to at least 64, or approximately 25% (64/255*100)
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nThe rumble value has to at least 64, or approximately 25%"), 0x80);
+#endif
+        // Set the rumble value into the write buffer
+        HIDMoveBuffer[7] = rumble;
+
+        HIDMove_Command(HIDMoveBuffer, HID_BUFFERSIZE);
+}
+
+void PS3BT::onInit() {
+        if(pFuncOnInit)
+                pFuncOnInit(); // Call the user function
+        else {
+                if(PS3MoveConnected)
+                        moveSetBulb(Red);
+                else // Dualshock 3 or Navigation controller
+                        setLedOn(LED1);
+        }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PS3BT.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PS3BT.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c25ac5e59
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PS3BT.h
@@ -0,0 +1,240 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2012 Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics. All rights reserved.
+
+ This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+ General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+ Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+ this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+ on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+ the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+ Contact information
+ -------------------
+
+ Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics
+ Web      :  http://www.tkjelectronics.com
+ e-mail   :  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ps3bt_h_
+#define _ps3bt_h_
+
+#include "BTD.h"
+#include "PS3Enums.h"
+
+#define HID_BUFFERSIZE 50 // Size of the buffer for the Playstation Motion Controller
+
+/**
+ * This BluetoothService class implements support for all the official PS3 Controllers:
+ * Dualshock 3, Navigation or a Motion controller via Bluetooth.
+ *
+ * Information about the protocol can be found at the wiki: https://github.com/felis/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/wiki/PS3-Information.
+ */
+class PS3BT : public BluetoothService {
+public:
+        /**
+         * Constructor for the PS3BT class.
+         * @param  pBtd   Pointer to BTD class instance.
+         * @param  btadr5,btadr4,btadr3,btadr2,btadr1,btadr0
+         * Pass your dongles Bluetooth address into the constructor,
+         * This will set BTD#my_bdaddr, so you don't have to plug in the dongle before pairing with your controller.
+         */
+        PS3BT(BTD *pBtd, uint8_t btadr5 = 0, uint8_t btadr4 = 0, uint8_t btadr3 = 0, uint8_t btadr2 = 0, uint8_t btadr1 = 0, uint8_t btadr0 = 0);
+
+        /** @name BluetoothService implementation */
+        /** Used this to disconnect any of the controllers. */
+        void disconnect();
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /** @name PS3 Controller functions */
+        /**
+         * getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b) will return true as long as the button is held down.
+         *
+         * While getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b) will only return it once.
+         *
+         * So you instance if you need to increase a variable once you would use getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b),
+         * but if you need to drive a robot forward you would use getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b).
+         * @param  b          ::ButtonEnum to read.
+         * @return            getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b) will return a true as long as a button is held down, while getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b) will return true once for each button press.
+         */
+        bool getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b);
+        bool getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b);
+        /**@}*/
+        /** @name PS3 Controller functions */
+        /**
+         * Used to get the analog value from button presses.
+         * @param  a The ::ButtonEnum to read.
+         * The supported buttons are:
+         * ::UP, ::RIGHT, ::DOWN, ::LEFT, ::L1, ::L2, ::R1, ::R2,
+         * ::TRIANGLE, ::CIRCLE, ::CROSS, ::SQUARE, and ::T.
+         * @return   Analog value in the range of 0-255.
+         */
+        uint8_t getAnalogButton(ButtonEnum a);
+        /**
+         * Used to read the analog joystick.
+         * @param  a ::LeftHatX, ::LeftHatY, ::RightHatX, and ::RightHatY.
+         * @return   Return the analog value in the range of 0-255.
+         */
+        uint8_t getAnalogHat(AnalogHatEnum a);
+        /**
+         * Used to read the sensors inside the Dualshock 3 and Move controller.
+         * @param  a
+         * The Dualshock 3 has a 3-axis accelerometer and a 1-axis gyro inside.
+         * The Move controller has a 3-axis accelerometer, a 3-axis gyro, a 3-axis magnetometer
+         * and a temperature sensor inside.
+         * @return   Return the raw sensor value.
+         */
+        int16_t getSensor(SensorEnum a);
+        /**
+         * Use this to get ::Pitch and ::Roll calculated using the accelerometer.
+         * @param  a Either ::Pitch or ::Roll.
+         * @return   Return the angle in the range of 0-360.
+         */
+        double getAngle(AngleEnum a);
+        /**
+         * Read the sensors inside the Move controller.
+         * @param  a ::aXmove, ::aYmove, ::aZmove, ::gXmove, ::gYmove, ::gZmove, ::mXmove, ::mYmove, and ::mXmove.
+         * @return   The value in SI units.
+         */
+        double get9DOFValues(SensorEnum a);
+        /**
+         * Get the status from the controller.
+         * @param  c The ::StatusEnum you want to read.
+         * @return   True if correct and false if not.
+         */
+        bool getStatus(StatusEnum c);
+        /** Read all the available statuses from the controller and prints it as a nice formated string. */
+        void printStatusString();
+        /**
+         * Read the temperature from the Move controller.
+         * @return The temperature in degrees Celsius.
+         */
+        String getTemperature();
+
+        /** Used to set all LEDs and rumble off. */
+        void setAllOff();
+        /** Turn off rumble. */
+        void setRumbleOff();
+        /**
+         * Turn on rumble.
+         * @param mode Either ::RumbleHigh or ::RumbleLow.
+         */
+        void setRumbleOn(RumbleEnum mode);
+        /**
+         * Turn on rumble using custom duration and power.
+         * @param rightDuration The duration of the right/low rumble effect.
+         * @param rightPower The intensity of the right/low rumble effect.
+         * @param leftDuration The duration of the left/high rumble effect.
+         * @param leftPower The intensity of the left/high rumble effect.
+         */
+        void setRumbleOn(uint8_t rightDuration, uint8_t rightPower, uint8_t leftDuration, uint8_t leftPower);
+
+        /**
+         * Set LED value without using ::LEDEnum.
+         * @param value See: ::LEDEnum.
+         */
+        void setLedRaw(uint8_t value);
+
+        /** Turn all LEDs off. */
+        void setLedOff() {
+                setLedRaw(0);
+        };
+        /**
+         * Turn the specific LED off.
+         * @param a The ::LEDEnum to turn off.
+         */
+        void setLedOff(LEDEnum a);
+        /**
+         * Turn the specific LED on.
+         * @param a The ::LEDEnum to turn on.
+         */
+        void setLedOn(LEDEnum a);
+        /**
+         * Toggle the specific LED.
+         * @param a The ::LEDEnum to toggle.
+         */
+        void setLedToggle(LEDEnum a);
+
+        /**
+         * Use this to set the Color using RGB values.
+         * @param r,g,b RGB value.
+         */
+        void moveSetBulb(uint8_t r, uint8_t g, uint8_t b);
+        /**
+         * Use this to set the color using the predefined colors in ::ColorsEnum.
+         * @param color The desired color.
+         */
+        void moveSetBulb(ColorsEnum color);
+        /**
+         * Set the rumble value inside the Move controller.
+         * @param rumble The desired value in the range from 64-255.
+         */
+        void moveSetRumble(uint8_t rumble);
+
+        /** Used to get the millis() of the last message */
+        uint32_t getLastMessageTime() {
+                return lastMessageTime;
+        };
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /** Variable used to indicate if the normal Playstation controller is successfully connected. */
+        bool PS3Connected;
+        /** Variable used to indicate if the Move controller is successfully connected. */
+        bool PS3MoveConnected;
+        /** Variable used to indicate if the Navigation controller is successfully connected. */
+        bool PS3NavigationConnected;
+
+protected:
+        /** @name BluetoothService implementation */
+        /**
+         * Used to pass acldata to the services.
+         * @param ACLData Incoming acldata.
+         */
+        void ACLData(uint8_t* ACLData);
+        /** Used to run part of the state machine. */
+        void Run();
+        /** Use this to reset the service. */
+        void Reset();
+        /**
+         * Called when the controller is successfully initialized.
+         * Use attachOnInit(void (*funcOnInit)(void)) to call your own function.
+         * This is useful for instance if you want to set the LEDs in a specific way.
+         */
+        void onInit();
+        /**@}*/
+
+private:
+
+        void L2CAP_task(); // L2CAP state machine
+
+        /* Variables filled from HCI event management */
+        char remote_name_first; // First letter in remote name
+        bool activeConnection; // Used to indicate if it's already has established a connection
+
+        /* Variables used by high level L2CAP task */
+        uint8_t l2cap_state;
+
+        uint32_t lastMessageTime; // Variable used to store the millis value of the last message.
+
+        uint32_t ButtonState;
+        uint32_t OldButtonState;
+        uint32_t ButtonClickState;
+
+        uint32_t timer; // Timer used to limit time between messages and also used to continuously set PS3 Move controller Bulb and rumble values
+        uint32_t timerHID; // Timer used see if there has to be a delay before a new HID command
+
+        uint8_t l2capinbuf[BULK_MAXPKTSIZE]; // General purpose buffer for L2CAP in data
+        uint8_t HIDBuffer[HID_BUFFERSIZE]; // Used to store HID commands
+        uint8_t HIDMoveBuffer[HID_BUFFERSIZE]; // Used to store HID commands for the Move controller
+
+        /* L2CAP Channels */
+        uint8_t control_scid[2]; // L2CAP source CID for HID_Control
+        uint8_t control_dcid[2]; // 0x0040
+        uint8_t interrupt_scid[2]; // L2CAP source CID for HID_Interrupt
+        uint8_t interrupt_dcid[2]; // 0x0041
+
+        /* HID Commands */
+        void HID_Command(uint8_t* data, uint8_t nbytes);
+        void HIDMove_Command(uint8_t* data, uint8_t nbytes);
+        void enable_sixaxis(); // Command used to enable the Dualshock 3 and Navigation controller to send data via Bluetooth
+};
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PS3Enums.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PS3Enums.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..77801945f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PS3Enums.h
@@ -0,0 +1,141 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2012 Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics. All rights reserved.
+
+ This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+ General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+ Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+ this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+ on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+ the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+ Contact information
+ -------------------
+
+ Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics
+ Web      :  http://www.tkjelectronics.com
+ e-mail   :  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ps3enums_h
+#define _ps3enums_h
+
+#include "controllerEnums.h"
+
+/** Size of the output report buffer for the Dualshock and Navigation controllers */
+#define PS3_REPORT_BUFFER_SIZE  48
+
+/** Report buffer for all PS3 commands */
+const uint8_t PS3_REPORT_BUFFER[PS3_REPORT_BUFFER_SIZE] PROGMEM = {
+        0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00,
+        0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00,
+        0xff, 0x27, 0x10, 0x00, 0x32,
+        0xff, 0x27, 0x10, 0x00, 0x32,
+        0xff, 0x27, 0x10, 0x00, 0x32,
+        0xff, 0x27, 0x10, 0x00, 0x32,
+        0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00,
+        0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00,
+        0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00
+};
+
+/** Size of the output report buffer for the Move Controller */
+#define MOVE_REPORT_BUFFER_SIZE 7
+
+/** Used to set the LEDs on the controllers */
+const uint8_t PS3_LEDS[] PROGMEM = {
+        0x00, // OFF
+        0x01, // LED1
+        0x02, // LED2
+        0x04, // LED3
+        0x08, // LED4
+
+        0x09, // LED5
+        0x0A, // LED6
+        0x0C, // LED7
+        0x0D, // LED8
+        0x0E, // LED9
+        0x0F, // LED10
+};
+
+/**
+ * Buttons on the controllers.
+ * <B>Note:</B> that the location is shifted 9 when it's connected via USB.
+ */
+const uint32_t PS3_BUTTONS[] PROGMEM = {
+        0x10, // UP
+        0x20, // RIGHT
+        0x40, // DOWN
+        0x80, // LEFT
+
+        0x01, // SELECT
+        0x08, // START
+        0x02, // L3
+        0x04, // R3
+
+        0x0100, // L2
+        0x0200, // R2
+        0x0400, // L1
+        0x0800, // R1
+
+        0x1000, // TRIANGLE
+        0x2000, // CIRCLE
+        0x4000, // CROSS
+        0x8000, // SQUARE
+
+        0x010000, // PS
+        0x080000, // MOVE - covers 12 bits - we only need to read the top 8
+        0x100000, // T - covers 12 bits - we only need to read the top 8
+};
+
+/**
+ * Analog buttons on the controllers.
+ * <B>Note:</B> that the location is shifted 9 when it's connected via USB.
+ */
+const uint8_t PS3_ANALOG_BUTTONS[] PROGMEM = {
+        23, // UP_ANALOG
+        24, // RIGHT_ANALOG
+        25, // DOWN_ANALOG
+        26, // LEFT_ANALOG
+        0, 0, 0, 0, // Skip SELECT, L3, R3 and START
+
+        27, // L2_ANALOG
+        28, // R2_ANALOG
+        29, // L1_ANALOG
+        30, // R1_ANALOG
+        31, // TRIANGLE_ANALOG
+        32, // CIRCLE_ANALOG
+        33, // CROSS_ANALOG
+        34, // SQUARE_ANALOG
+        0, 0, // Skip PS and MOVE
+
+        // Playstation Move Controller
+        15, // T_ANALOG - Both at byte 14 (last reading) and byte 15 (current reading)
+};
+
+enum StatusEnum {
+        // Note that the location is shifted 9 when it's connected via USB
+        // Byte location | bit location
+        Plugged = (38 << 8) | 0x02,
+        Unplugged = (38 << 8) | 0x03,
+
+        Charging = (39 << 8) | 0xEE,
+        NotCharging = (39 << 8) | 0xF1,
+        Shutdown = (39 << 8) | 0x01,
+        Dying = (39 << 8) | 0x02,
+        Low = (39 << 8) | 0x03,
+        High = (39 << 8) | 0x04,
+        Full = (39 << 8) | 0x05,
+
+        MoveCharging = (21 << 8) | 0xEE,
+        MoveNotCharging = (21 << 8) | 0xF1,
+        MoveShutdown = (21 << 8) | 0x01,
+        MoveDying = (21 << 8) | 0x02,
+        MoveLow = (21 << 8) | 0x03,
+        MoveHigh = (21 << 8) | 0x04,
+        MoveFull = (21 << 8) | 0x05,
+
+        CableRumble = (40 << 8) | 0x10, // Operating by USB and rumble is turned on
+        Cable = (40 << 8) | 0x12, // Operating by USB and rumble is turned off
+        BluetoothRumble = (40 << 8) | 0x14, // Operating by Bluetooth and rumble is turned on
+        Bluetooth = (40 << 8) | 0x16, // Operating by Bluetooth and rumble is turned off
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PS3USB.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PS3USB.cpp
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..c32175389
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PS3USB.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,572 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2012 Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics. All rights reserved.
+
+ This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+ General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+ Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+ this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+ on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+ the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+ Contact information
+ -------------------
+
+ Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics
+ Web      :  http://www.tkjelectronics.com
+ e-mail   :  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#include "PS3USB.h"
+// To enable serial debugging see "settings.h"
+//#define EXTRADEBUG // Uncomment to get even more debugging data
+//#define PRINTREPORT // Uncomment to print the report send by the PS3 Controllers
+
+PS3USB::PS3USB(USB *p, uint8_t btadr5, uint8_t btadr4, uint8_t btadr3, uint8_t btadr2, uint8_t btadr1, uint8_t btadr0) :
+pUsb(p), // pointer to USB class instance - mandatory
+bAddress(0), // device address - mandatory
+bPollEnable(false) // don't start polling before dongle is connected
+{
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < PS3_MAX_ENDPOINTS; i++) {
+                epInfo[i].epAddr = 0;
+                epInfo[i].maxPktSize = (i) ? 0 : 8;
+                epInfo[i].epAttribs = 0;
+                epInfo[i].bmNakPower = (i) ? USB_NAK_NOWAIT : USB_NAK_MAX_POWER;
+        }
+
+        if(pUsb) // register in USB subsystem
+                pUsb->RegisterDeviceClass(this); //set devConfig[] entry
+
+        my_bdaddr[5] = btadr5; // Change to your dongle's Bluetooth address instead
+        my_bdaddr[4] = btadr4;
+        my_bdaddr[3] = btadr3;
+        my_bdaddr[2] = btadr2;
+        my_bdaddr[1] = btadr1;
+        my_bdaddr[0] = btadr0;
+}
+
+uint8_t PS3USB::Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed) {
+        uint8_t buf[sizeof (USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR)];
+        USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR * udd = reinterpret_cast<USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR*>(buf);
+        uint8_t rcode;
+        UsbDevice *p = NULL;
+        EpInfo *oldep_ptr = NULL;
+        uint16_t PID;
+        uint16_t VID;
+
+        // get memory address of USB device address pool
+        AddressPool &addrPool = pUsb->GetAddressPool();
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nPS3USB Init"), 0x80);
+#endif
+        // check if address has already been assigned to an instance
+        if(bAddress) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nAddress in use"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                return USB_ERROR_CLASS_INSTANCE_ALREADY_IN_USE;
+        }
+
+        // Get pointer to pseudo device with address 0 assigned
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(0);
+
+        if(!p) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nAddress not found"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+        }
+
+        if(!p->epinfo) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nepinfo is null"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                return USB_ERROR_EPINFO_IS_NULL;
+        }
+
+        // Save old pointer to EP_RECORD of address 0
+        oldep_ptr = p->epinfo;
+
+        // Temporary assign new pointer to epInfo to p->epinfo in order to avoid toggle inconsistence
+        p->epinfo = epInfo;
+
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+
+        // Get device descriptor
+        rcode = pUsb->getDevDescr(0, 0, sizeof (USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR), (uint8_t*)buf); // Get device descriptor - addr, ep, nbytes, data
+        // Restore p->epinfo
+        p->epinfo = oldep_ptr;
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailGetDevDescr;
+
+        VID = udd->idVendor;
+        PID = udd->idProduct;
+
+        if(VID != PS3_VID || (PID != PS3_PID && PID != PS3NAVIGATION_PID && PID != PS3MOVE_PID))
+                goto FailUnknownDevice;
+
+        // Allocate new address according to device class
+        bAddress = addrPool.AllocAddress(parent, false, port);
+
+        if(!bAddress)
+                return USB_ERROR_OUT_OF_ADDRESS_SPACE_IN_POOL;
+
+        // Extract Max Packet Size from device descriptor
+        epInfo[0].maxPktSize = udd->bMaxPacketSize0;
+
+        // Assign new address to the device
+        rcode = pUsb->setAddr(0, 0, bAddress);
+        if(rcode) {
+                p->lowspeed = false;
+                addrPool.FreeAddress(bAddress);
+                bAddress = 0;
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nsetAddr: "), 0x80);
+                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (rcode, 0x80);
+#endif
+                return rcode;
+        }
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nAddr: "), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (bAddress, 0x80);
+#endif
+        //delay(300); // Spec says you should wait at least 200ms
+
+        p->lowspeed = false;
+
+        //get pointer to assigned address record
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(bAddress);
+        if(!p)
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+
+        // Assign epInfo to epinfo pointer - only EP0 is known
+        rcode = pUsb->setEpInfoEntry(bAddress, 1, epInfo);
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetDevTblEntry;
+
+
+        /* The application will work in reduced host mode, so we can save program and data
+           memory space. After verifying the PID and VID we will use known values for the
+           configuration values for device, interface, endpoints and HID for the PS3 Controllers */
+
+        /* Initialize data structures for endpoints of device */
+        epInfo[ PS3_OUTPUT_PIPE ].epAddr = 0x02; // PS3 output endpoint
+        epInfo[ PS3_OUTPUT_PIPE ].epAttribs = USB_TRANSFER_TYPE_INTERRUPT;
+        epInfo[ PS3_OUTPUT_PIPE ].bmNakPower = USB_NAK_NOWAIT; // Only poll once for interrupt endpoints
+        epInfo[ PS3_OUTPUT_PIPE ].maxPktSize = EP_MAXPKTSIZE;
+        epInfo[ PS3_OUTPUT_PIPE ].bmSndToggle = 0;
+        epInfo[ PS3_OUTPUT_PIPE ].bmRcvToggle = 0;
+        epInfo[ PS3_INPUT_PIPE ].epAddr = 0x01; // PS3 report endpoint
+        epInfo[ PS3_INPUT_PIPE ].epAttribs = USB_TRANSFER_TYPE_INTERRUPT;
+        epInfo[ PS3_INPUT_PIPE ].bmNakPower = USB_NAK_NOWAIT; // Only poll once for interrupt endpoints
+        epInfo[ PS3_INPUT_PIPE ].maxPktSize = EP_MAXPKTSIZE;
+        epInfo[ PS3_INPUT_PIPE ].bmSndToggle = 0;
+        epInfo[ PS3_INPUT_PIPE ].bmRcvToggle = 0;
+
+        rcode = pUsb->setEpInfoEntry(bAddress, 3, epInfo);
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetDevTblEntry;
+
+        delay(200); //Give time for address change
+
+        rcode = pUsb->setConf(bAddress, epInfo[ PS3_CONTROL_PIPE ].epAddr, 1);
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetConfDescr;
+
+        if(PID == PS3_PID || PID == PS3NAVIGATION_PID) {
+                if(PID == PS3_PID) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nDualshock 3 Controller Connected"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                        PS3Connected = true;
+                } else { // must be a navigation controller
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nNavigation Controller Connected"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                        PS3NavigationConnected = true;
+                }
+                enable_sixaxis(); // The PS3 controller needs a special command before it starts sending data
+
+                // Needed for PS3 Dualshock and Navigation commands to work
+                for(uint8_t i = 0; i < PS3_REPORT_BUFFER_SIZE; i++)
+                        writeBuf[i] = pgm_read_byte(&PS3_REPORT_BUFFER[i]);
+
+                for(uint8_t i = 6; i < 10; i++)
+                        readBuf[i] = 0x7F; // Set the analog joystick values to center position
+        } else { // must be a Motion controller
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nMotion Controller Connected"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                PS3MoveConnected = true;
+                writeBuf[0] = 0x02; // Set report ID, this is needed for Move commands to work
+        }
+        if(my_bdaddr[0] != 0x00 || my_bdaddr[1] != 0x00 || my_bdaddr[2] != 0x00 || my_bdaddr[3] != 0x00 || my_bdaddr[4] != 0x00 || my_bdaddr[5] != 0x00) {
+                if(PS3MoveConnected)
+                        setMoveBdaddr(my_bdaddr); // Set internal Bluetooth address
+                else
+                        setBdaddr(my_bdaddr); // Set internal Bluetooth address
+
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nBluetooth Address was set to: "), 0x80);
+                for(int8_t i = 5; i > 0; i--) {
+                        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (my_bdaddr[i], 0x80);
+                        Notify(PSTR(":"), 0x80);
+                }
+                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (my_bdaddr[0], 0x80);
+#endif
+        }
+        onInit();
+
+        bPollEnable = true;
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\n"), 0x80);
+        timer = millis();
+        return 0; // Successful configuration
+
+        /* Diagnostic messages */
+FailGetDevDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailGetDevDescr();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailSetDevTblEntry:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailSetDevTblEntry();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailSetConfDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailSetConfDescr();
+#endif
+        goto Fail;
+
+FailUnknownDevice:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailUnknownDevice(VID, PID);
+#endif
+        rcode = USB_DEV_CONFIG_ERROR_DEVICE_NOT_SUPPORTED;
+
+Fail:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nPS3 Init Failed, error code: "), 0x80);
+        NotifyFail(rcode);
+#endif
+        Release();
+        return rcode;
+}
+
+/* Performs a cleanup after failed Init() attempt */
+uint8_t PS3USB::Release() {
+        PS3Connected = false;
+        PS3MoveConnected = false;
+        PS3NavigationConnected = false;
+        pUsb->GetAddressPool().FreeAddress(bAddress);
+        bAddress = 0;
+        bPollEnable = false;
+        return 0;
+}
+
+uint8_t PS3USB::Poll() {
+        if(!bPollEnable)
+                return 0;
+
+        if(PS3Connected || PS3NavigationConnected) {
+                uint16_t BUFFER_SIZE = EP_MAXPKTSIZE;
+                pUsb->inTransfer(bAddress, epInfo[ PS3_INPUT_PIPE ].epAddr, &BUFFER_SIZE, readBuf); // input on endpoint 1
+                if(millis() - timer > 100) { // Loop 100ms before processing data
+                        readReport();
+#ifdef PRINTREPORT
+                        printReport(); // Uncomment "#define PRINTREPORT" to print the report send by the PS3 Controllers
+#endif
+                }
+        } else if(PS3MoveConnected) { // One can only set the color of the bulb, set the rumble, set and get the bluetooth address and calibrate the magnetometer via USB
+                if(millis() - timer > 4000) { // Send at least every 4th second
+                        Move_Command(writeBuf, MOVE_REPORT_BUFFER_SIZE); // The Bulb and rumble values, has to be written again and again, for it to stay turned on
+                        timer = millis();
+                }
+        }
+        return 0;
+}
+
+void PS3USB::readReport() {
+        ButtonState = (uint32_t)(readBuf[2] | ((uint16_t)readBuf[3] << 8) | ((uint32_t)readBuf[4] << 16));
+
+        //Notify(PSTR("\r\nButtonState", 0x80);
+        //PrintHex<uint32_t>(ButtonState, 0x80);
+
+        if(ButtonState != OldButtonState) {
+                ButtonClickState = ButtonState & ~OldButtonState; // Update click state variable
+                OldButtonState = ButtonState;
+        }
+}
+
+void PS3USB::printReport() { // Uncomment "#define PRINTREPORT" to print the report send by the PS3 Controllers
+#ifdef PRINTREPORT
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < PS3_REPORT_BUFFER_SIZE; i++) {
+                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (readBuf[i], 0x80);
+                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+        }
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\n"), 0x80);
+#endif
+}
+
+bool PS3USB::getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b) {
+        return (ButtonState & pgm_read_dword(&PS3_BUTTONS[(uint8_t)b]));
+}
+
+bool PS3USB::getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b) {
+        uint32_t button = pgm_read_dword(&PS3_BUTTONS[(uint8_t)b]);
+        bool click = (ButtonClickState & button);
+        ButtonClickState &= ~button; // Clear "click" event
+        return click;
+}
+
+uint8_t PS3USB::getAnalogButton(ButtonEnum a) {
+        return (uint8_t)(readBuf[(pgm_read_byte(&PS3_ANALOG_BUTTONS[(uint8_t)a])) - 9]);
+}
+
+uint8_t PS3USB::getAnalogHat(AnalogHatEnum a) {
+        return (uint8_t)(readBuf[((uint8_t)a + 6)]);
+}
+
+uint16_t PS3USB::getSensor(SensorEnum a) {
+        return ((readBuf[((uint16_t)a) - 9] << 8) | readBuf[((uint16_t)a + 1) - 9]);
+}
+
+double PS3USB::getAngle(AngleEnum a) {
+        if(PS3Connected) {
+                double accXval;
+                double accYval;
+                double accZval;
+
+                // Data for the Kionix KXPC4 used in the DualShock 3
+                const double zeroG = 511.5; // 1.65/3.3*1023 (1,65V)
+                accXval = -((double)getSensor(aX) - zeroG);
+                accYval = -((double)getSensor(aY) - zeroG);
+                accZval = -((double)getSensor(aZ) - zeroG);
+
+                // Convert to 360 degrees resolution
+                // atan2 outputs the value of -π to π (radians)
+                // We are then converting it to 0 to 2Ï€ and then to degrees
+                if(a == Pitch)
+                        return (atan2(accYval, accZval) + PI) * RAD_TO_DEG;
+                else
+                        return (atan2(accXval, accZval) + PI) * RAD_TO_DEG;
+        } else
+                return 0;
+}
+
+bool PS3USB::getStatus(StatusEnum c) {
+        return (readBuf[((uint16_t)c >> 8) - 9] == ((uint8_t)c & 0xff));
+}
+
+void PS3USB::printStatusString() {
+        char statusOutput[100]; // Max string length plus null character
+        if(PS3Connected || PS3NavigationConnected) {
+                strcpy_P(statusOutput, PSTR("ConnectionStatus: "));
+
+                if(getStatus(Plugged)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Plugged"));
+                else if(getStatus(Unplugged)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Unplugged"));
+                else strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Error"));
+
+                strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR(" - PowerRating: "));
+
+                if(getStatus(Charging)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Charging"));
+                else if(getStatus(NotCharging)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Not Charging"));
+                else if(getStatus(Shutdown)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Shutdown"));
+                else if(getStatus(Dying)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Dying"));
+                else if(getStatus(Low)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Low"));
+                else if(getStatus(High)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("High"));
+                else if(getStatus(Full)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Full"));
+                else strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Error"));
+
+                strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR(" - WirelessStatus: "));
+
+                if(getStatus(CableRumble)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Cable - Rumble is on"));
+                else if(getStatus(Cable)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Cable - Rumble is off"));
+                else if(getStatus(BluetoothRumble)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Bluetooth - Rumble is on"));
+                else if(getStatus(Bluetooth)) strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Bluetooth - Rumble is off"));
+                else strcat_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Error"));
+        } else
+                strcpy_P(statusOutput, PSTR("Error"));
+
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.write(statusOutput);
+}
+
+/* Playstation Sixaxis Dualshock and Navigation Controller commands */
+void PS3USB::PS3_Command(uint8_t *data, uint16_t nbytes) {
+        // bmRequest = Host to device (0x00) | Class (0x20) | Interface (0x01) = 0x21, bRequest = Set Report (0x09), Report ID (0x01), Report Type (Output 0x02), interface (0x00), datalength, datalength, data)
+        pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, epInfo[PS3_CONTROL_PIPE].epAddr, bmREQ_HID_OUT, HID_REQUEST_SET_REPORT, 0x01, 0x02, 0x00, nbytes, nbytes, data, NULL);
+}
+
+void PS3USB::setAllOff() {
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < PS3_REPORT_BUFFER_SIZE; i++)
+                writeBuf[i] = pgm_read_byte(&PS3_REPORT_BUFFER[i]); // Reset buffer
+
+        PS3_Command(writeBuf, PS3_REPORT_BUFFER_SIZE);
+}
+
+void PS3USB::setRumbleOff() {
+        writeBuf[1] = 0x00;
+        writeBuf[2] = 0x00; // Low mode off
+        writeBuf[3] = 0x00;
+        writeBuf[4] = 0x00; // High mode off
+
+        PS3_Command(writeBuf, PS3_REPORT_BUFFER_SIZE);
+}
+
+void PS3USB::setRumbleOn(RumbleEnum mode) {
+        if((mode & 0x30) > 0x00) {
+                uint8_t power[2] = {0xff, 0x00}; // Defaults to RumbleLow
+                if(mode == RumbleHigh) {
+                        power[0] = 0x00;
+                        power[1] = 0xff;
+                }
+                setRumbleOn(0xfe, power[0], 0xfe, power[1]);
+        }
+}
+
+void PS3USB::setRumbleOn(uint8_t rightDuration, uint8_t rightPower, uint8_t leftDuration, uint8_t leftPower) {
+        writeBuf[1] = rightDuration;
+        writeBuf[2] = rightPower;
+        writeBuf[3] = leftDuration;
+        writeBuf[4] = leftPower;
+        PS3_Command(writeBuf, PS3_REPORT_BUFFER_SIZE);
+}
+
+void PS3USB::setLedRaw(uint8_t value) {
+        writeBuf[9] = value << 1;
+        PS3_Command(writeBuf, PS3_REPORT_BUFFER_SIZE);
+}
+
+void PS3USB::setLedOff(LEDEnum a) {
+        writeBuf[9] &= ~((uint8_t)((pgm_read_byte(&PS3_LEDS[(uint8_t)a]) & 0x0f) << 1));
+        PS3_Command(writeBuf, PS3_REPORT_BUFFER_SIZE);
+}
+
+void PS3USB::setLedOn(LEDEnum a) {
+        if(a == OFF)
+                setLedRaw(0);
+        else {
+                writeBuf[9] |= (uint8_t)((pgm_read_byte(&PS3_LEDS[(uint8_t)a]) & 0x0f) << 1);
+                PS3_Command(writeBuf, PS3_REPORT_BUFFER_SIZE);
+        }
+}
+
+void PS3USB::setLedToggle(LEDEnum a) {
+        writeBuf[9] ^= (uint8_t)((pgm_read_byte(&PS3_LEDS[(uint8_t)a]) & 0x0f) << 1);
+        PS3_Command(writeBuf, PS3_REPORT_BUFFER_SIZE);
+}
+
+void PS3USB::setBdaddr(uint8_t *bdaddr) {
+        /* Set the internal Bluetooth address */
+        uint8_t buf[8];
+        buf[0] = 0x01;
+        buf[1] = 0x00;
+
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < 6; i++)
+                buf[i + 2] = bdaddr[5 - i]; // Copy into buffer, has to be written reversed, so it is MSB first
+
+        // bmRequest = Host to device (0x00) | Class (0x20) | Interface (0x01) = 0x21, bRequest = Set Report (0x09), Report ID (0xF5), Report Type (Feature 0x03), interface (0x00), datalength, datalength, data
+        pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, epInfo[PS3_CONTROL_PIPE].epAddr, bmREQ_HID_OUT, HID_REQUEST_SET_REPORT, 0xF5, 0x03, 0x00, 8, 8, buf, NULL);
+}
+
+void PS3USB::getBdaddr(uint8_t *bdaddr) {
+        uint8_t buf[8];
+
+        // bmRequest = Device to host (0x80) | Class (0x20) | Interface (0x01) = 0xA1, bRequest = Get Report (0x01), Report ID (0xF5), Report Type (Feature 0x03), interface (0x00), datalength, datalength, data
+        pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, epInfo[PS3_CONTROL_PIPE].epAddr, bmREQ_HID_IN, HID_REQUEST_GET_REPORT, 0xF5, 0x03, 0x00, 8, 8, buf, NULL);
+
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < 6; i++)
+                bdaddr[5 - i] = buf[i + 2]; // Copy into buffer reversed, so it is LSB first
+}
+
+void PS3USB::enable_sixaxis() { // Command used to enable the Dualshock 3 and Navigation controller to send data via USB
+        uint8_t cmd_buf[4];
+        cmd_buf[0] = 0x42; // Special PS3 Controller enable commands
+        cmd_buf[1] = 0x0c;
+        cmd_buf[2] = 0x00;
+        cmd_buf[3] = 0x00;
+
+        // bmRequest = Host to device (0x00) | Class (0x20) | Interface (0x01) = 0x21, bRequest = Set Report (0x09), Report ID (0xF4), Report Type (Feature 0x03), interface (0x00), datalength, datalength, data)
+        pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, epInfo[PS3_CONTROL_PIPE].epAddr, bmREQ_HID_OUT, HID_REQUEST_SET_REPORT, 0xF4, 0x03, 0x00, 4, 4, cmd_buf, NULL);
+}
+
+/* Playstation Move Controller commands */
+void PS3USB::Move_Command(uint8_t *data, uint16_t nbytes) {
+        pUsb->outTransfer(bAddress, epInfo[ PS3_OUTPUT_PIPE ].epAddr, nbytes, data);
+}
+
+void PS3USB::moveSetBulb(uint8_t r, uint8_t g, uint8_t b) { // Use this to set the Color using RGB values
+        // Set the Bulb's values into the write buffer
+        writeBuf[2] = r;
+        writeBuf[3] = g;
+        writeBuf[4] = b;
+
+        Move_Command(writeBuf, MOVE_REPORT_BUFFER_SIZE);
+}
+
+void PS3USB::moveSetBulb(ColorsEnum color) { // Use this to set the Color using the predefined colors in "enums.h"
+        moveSetBulb((uint8_t)(color >> 16), (uint8_t)(color >> 8), (uint8_t)(color));
+}
+
+void PS3USB::moveSetRumble(uint8_t rumble) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        if(rumble < 64 && rumble != 0) // The rumble value has to at least 64, or approximately 25% (64/255*100)
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nThe rumble value has to at least 64, or approximately 25%"), 0x80);
+#endif
+        writeBuf[6] = rumble; // Set the rumble value into the write buffer
+
+        Move_Command(writeBuf, MOVE_REPORT_BUFFER_SIZE);
+}
+
+void PS3USB::setMoveBdaddr(uint8_t *bdaddr) {
+        /* Set the internal Bluetooth address */
+        uint8_t buf[11];
+        buf[0] = 0x05;
+        buf[7] = 0x10;
+        buf[8] = 0x01;
+        buf[9] = 0x02;
+        buf[10] = 0x12;
+
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < 6; i++)
+                buf[i + 1] = bdaddr[i];
+
+        // bmRequest = Host to device (0x00) | Class (0x20) | Interface (0x01) = 0x21, bRequest = Set Report (0x09), Report ID (0x05), Report Type (Feature 0x03), interface (0x00), datalength, datalength, data
+        pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, epInfo[PS3_CONTROL_PIPE].epAddr, bmREQ_HID_OUT, HID_REQUEST_SET_REPORT, 0x05, 0x03, 0x00, 11, 11, buf, NULL);
+}
+
+void PS3USB::getMoveBdaddr(uint8_t *bdaddr) {
+        uint8_t buf[16];
+
+        // bmRequest = Device to host (0x80) | Class (0x20) | Interface (0x01) = 0xA1, bRequest = Get Report (0x01), Report ID (0x04), Report Type (Feature 0x03), interface (0x00), datalength, datalength, data
+        pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, epInfo[PS3_CONTROL_PIPE].epAddr, bmREQ_HID_IN, HID_REQUEST_GET_REPORT, 0x04, 0x03, 0x00, 16, 16, buf, NULL);
+
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < 6; i++)
+                bdaddr[i] = buf[10 + i];
+}
+
+void PS3USB::getMoveCalibration(uint8_t *data) {
+        uint8_t buf[49];
+
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < 3; i++) {
+                // bmRequest = Device to host (0x80) | Class (0x20) | Interface (0x01) = 0xA1, bRequest = Get Report (0x01), Report ID (0x10), Report Type (Feature 0x03), interface (0x00), datalength, datalength, data
+                pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, epInfo[PS3_CONTROL_PIPE].epAddr, bmREQ_HID_IN, HID_REQUEST_GET_REPORT, 0x10, 0x03, 0x00, 49, 49, buf, NULL);
+
+                for(byte j = 0; j < 49; j++)
+                        data[49 * i + j] = buf[j];
+        }
+}
+
+void PS3USB::onInit() {
+        if(pFuncOnInit)
+                pFuncOnInit(); // Call the user function
+        else {
+                if(PS3MoveConnected)
+                        moveSetBulb(Red);
+                else // Dualshock 3 or Navigation controller
+                        setLedOn(LED1);
+        }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PS3USB.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PS3USB.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2eba9258c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PS3USB.h
@@ -0,0 +1,303 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2012 Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics. All rights reserved.
+
+ This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+ General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+ Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+ this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+ on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+ the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+ Contact information
+ -------------------
+
+ Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics
+ Web      :  http://www.tkjelectronics.com
+ e-mail   :  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ps3usb_h_
+#define _ps3usb_h_
+
+#include "Usb.h"
+#include "hid.h"
+#include "PS3Enums.h"
+
+/* PS3 data taken from descriptors */
+#define EP_MAXPKTSIZE           64 // max size for data via USB
+
+/* Names we give to the 3 ps3 pipes - this is only used for setting the bluetooth address into the ps3 controllers */
+#define PS3_CONTROL_PIPE        0
+#define PS3_OUTPUT_PIPE         1
+#define PS3_INPUT_PIPE          2
+
+//PID and VID of the different devices
+#define PS3_VID                 0x054C  // Sony Corporation
+#define PS3_PID                 0x0268  // PS3 Controller DualShock 3
+#define PS3NAVIGATION_PID       0x042F  // Navigation controller
+#define PS3MOVE_PID             0x03D5  // Motion controller
+
+#define PS3_MAX_ENDPOINTS       3
+
+/**
+ * This class implements support for all the official PS3 Controllers:
+ * Dualshock 3, Navigation or a Motion controller via USB.
+ *
+ * One can only set the color of the bulb, set the rumble, set and get the bluetooth address and calibrate the magnetometer via USB on the Move controller.
+ *
+ * Information about the protocol can be found at the wiki: https://github.com/felis/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/wiki/PS3-Information.
+ */
+class PS3USB : public USBDeviceConfig {
+public:
+        /**
+         * Constructor for the PS3USB class.
+         * @param  pUsb   Pointer to USB class instance.
+         * @param  btadr5,btadr4,btadr3,btadr2,btadr1,btadr0
+         * Pass your dongles Bluetooth address into the constructor,
+         * so you are able to pair the controller with a Bluetooth dongle.
+         */
+        PS3USB(USB *pUsb, uint8_t btadr5 = 0, uint8_t btadr4 = 0, uint8_t btadr3 = 0, uint8_t btadr2 = 0, uint8_t btadr1 = 0, uint8_t btadr0 = 0);
+
+        /** @name USBDeviceConfig implementation */
+        /**
+         * Initialize the PS3 Controller.
+         * @param  parent   Hub number.
+         * @param  port     Port number on the hub.
+         * @param  lowspeed Speed of the device.
+         * @return          0 on success.
+         */
+        uint8_t Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed);
+        /**
+         * Release the USB device.
+         * @return 0 on success.
+         */
+        uint8_t Release();
+        /**
+         * Poll the USB Input endpoins and run the state machines.
+         * @return 0 on success.
+         */
+        uint8_t Poll();
+
+        /**
+         * Get the device address.
+         * @return The device address.
+         */
+        virtual uint8_t GetAddress() {
+                return bAddress;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Used to check if the controller has been initialized.
+         * @return True if it's ready.
+         */
+        virtual bool isReady() {
+                return bPollEnable;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Used by the USB core to check what this driver support.
+         * @param  vid The device's VID.
+         * @param  pid The device's PID.
+         * @return     Returns true if the device's VID and PID matches this driver.
+         */
+        virtual bool VIDPIDOK(uint16_t vid, uint16_t pid) {
+                return (vid == PS3_VID && (pid == PS3_PID || pid == PS3NAVIGATION_PID || pid == PS3MOVE_PID));
+        };
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /**
+         * Used to set the Bluetooth address inside the Dualshock 3 and Navigation controller.
+         * Set using LSB first.
+         * @param bdaddr Your dongles Bluetooth address.
+         */
+        void setBdaddr(uint8_t *bdaddr);
+        /**
+         * Used to get the Bluetooth address inside the Dualshock 3 and Navigation controller.
+         * Will return LSB first.
+         * @param bdaddr Your dongles Bluetooth address.
+         */
+        void getBdaddr(uint8_t *bdaddr);
+
+        /**
+         * Used to set the Bluetooth address inside the Move controller.
+         * Set using LSB first.
+         * @param bdaddr Your dongles Bluetooth address.
+         */
+        void setMoveBdaddr(uint8_t *bdaddr);
+        /**
+         * Used to get the Bluetooth address inside the Move controller.
+         * Will return LSB first.
+         * @param bdaddr Your dongles Bluetooth address.
+         */
+        void getMoveBdaddr(uint8_t *bdaddr);
+        /**
+         * Used to get the calibration data inside the Move controller.
+         * @param data Buffer to store data in. Must be at least 147 bytes
+         */
+        void getMoveCalibration(uint8_t *data);
+
+        /** @name PS3 Controller functions */
+        /**
+         * getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b) will return true as long as the button is held down.
+         *
+         * While getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b) will only return it once.
+         *
+         * So you instance if you need to increase a variable once you would use getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b),
+         * but if you need to drive a robot forward you would use getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b).
+         * @param  b          ::ButtonEnum to read.
+         * @return            getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b) will return a true as long as a button is held down, while getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b) will return true once for each button press.
+         */
+        bool getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b);
+        bool getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b);
+        /**@}*/
+        /** @name PS3 Controller functions */
+        /**
+         * Used to get the analog value from button presses.
+         * @param  a The ::ButtonEnum to read.
+         * The supported buttons are:
+         * ::UP, ::RIGHT, ::DOWN, ::LEFT, ::L1, ::L2, ::R1, ::R2,
+         * ::TRIANGLE, ::CIRCLE, ::CROSS, ::SQUARE, and ::T.
+         * @return   Analog value in the range of 0-255.
+         */
+        uint8_t getAnalogButton(ButtonEnum a);
+        /**
+         * Used to read the analog joystick.
+         * @param  a ::LeftHatX, ::LeftHatY, ::RightHatX, and ::RightHatY.
+         * @return   Return the analog value in the range of 0-255.
+         */
+        uint8_t getAnalogHat(AnalogHatEnum a);
+        /**
+         * Used to read the sensors inside the Dualshock 3 controller.
+         * @param  a
+         * The Dualshock 3 has a 3-axis accelerometer and a 1-axis gyro inside.
+         * @return   Return the raw sensor value.
+         */
+        uint16_t getSensor(SensorEnum a);
+        /**
+         * Use this to get ::Pitch and ::Roll calculated using the accelerometer.
+         * @param  a Either ::Pitch or ::Roll.
+         * @return   Return the angle in the range of 0-360.
+         */
+        double getAngle(AngleEnum a);
+        /**
+         * Get the ::StatusEnum from the controller.
+         * @param  c The ::StatusEnum you want to read.
+         * @return   True if correct and false if not.
+         */
+        bool getStatus(StatusEnum c);
+        /** Read all the available statuses from the controller and prints it as a nice formated string. */
+        void printStatusString();
+
+        /** Used to set all LEDs and rumble off. */
+        void setAllOff();
+        /** Turn off rumble. */
+        void setRumbleOff();
+        /**
+         * Turn on rumble.
+         * @param mode Either ::RumbleHigh or ::RumbleLow.
+         */
+        void setRumbleOn(RumbleEnum mode);
+        /**
+         * Turn on rumble using custom duration and power.
+         * @param rightDuration The duration of the right/low rumble effect.
+         * @param rightPower The intensity of the right/low rumble effect.
+         * @param leftDuration The duration of the left/high rumble effect.
+         * @param leftPower The intensity of the left/high rumble effect.
+         */
+        void setRumbleOn(uint8_t rightDuration, uint8_t rightPower, uint8_t leftDuration, uint8_t leftPower);
+
+        /**
+         * Set LED value without using the ::LEDEnum.
+         * @param value See: ::LEDEnum.
+         */
+        void setLedRaw(uint8_t value);
+
+        /** Turn all LEDs off. */
+        void setLedOff() {
+                setLedRaw(0);
+        }
+        /**
+         * Turn the specific ::LEDEnum off.
+         * @param a The ::LEDEnum to turn off.
+         */
+        void setLedOff(LEDEnum a);
+        /**
+         * Turn the specific ::LEDEnum on.
+         * @param a The ::LEDEnum to turn on.
+         */
+        void setLedOn(LEDEnum a);
+        /**
+         * Toggle the specific ::LEDEnum.
+         * @param a The ::LEDEnum to toggle.
+         */
+        void setLedToggle(LEDEnum a);
+
+        /**
+         * Use this to set the Color using RGB values.
+         * @param r,g,b RGB value.
+         */
+        void moveSetBulb(uint8_t r, uint8_t g, uint8_t b);
+        /**
+         * Use this to set the color using the predefined colors in ::ColorsEnum.
+         * @param color The desired color.
+         */
+        void moveSetBulb(ColorsEnum color);
+        /**
+         * Set the rumble value inside the Move controller.
+         * @param rumble The desired value in the range from 64-255.
+         */
+        void moveSetRumble(uint8_t rumble);
+
+        /**
+         * Used to call your own function when the controller is successfully initialized.
+         * @param funcOnInit Function to call.
+         */
+        void attachOnInit(void (*funcOnInit)(void)) {
+                pFuncOnInit = funcOnInit;
+        };
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /** Variable used to indicate if the normal playstation controller is successfully connected. */
+        bool PS3Connected;
+        /** Variable used to indicate if the move controller is successfully connected. */
+        bool PS3MoveConnected;
+        /** Variable used to indicate if the navigation controller is successfully connected. */
+        bool PS3NavigationConnected;
+
+protected:
+        /** Pointer to USB class instance. */
+        USB *pUsb;
+        /** Device address. */
+        uint8_t bAddress;
+        /** Endpoint info structure. */
+        EpInfo epInfo[PS3_MAX_ENDPOINTS];
+
+private:
+        /**
+         * Called when the controller is successfully initialized.
+         * Use attachOnInit(void (*funcOnInit)(void)) to call your own function.
+         * This is useful for instance if you want to set the LEDs in a specific way.
+         */
+        void onInit();
+        void (*pFuncOnInit)(void); // Pointer to function called in onInit()
+
+        bool bPollEnable;
+
+        uint32_t timer; // used to continuously set PS3 Move controller Bulb and rumble values
+
+        uint32_t ButtonState;
+        uint32_t OldButtonState;
+        uint32_t ButtonClickState;
+
+        uint8_t my_bdaddr[6]; // Change to your dongles Bluetooth address in the constructor
+        uint8_t readBuf[EP_MAXPKTSIZE]; // General purpose buffer for input data
+        uint8_t writeBuf[EP_MAXPKTSIZE]; // General purpose buffer for output data
+
+        void readReport(); // read incoming data
+        void printReport(); // print incoming date - Uncomment for debugging
+
+        /* Private commands */
+        void PS3_Command(uint8_t *data, uint16_t nbytes);
+        void enable_sixaxis(); // Command used to enable the Dualshock 3 and Navigation controller to send data via USB
+        void Move_Command(uint8_t *data, uint16_t nbytes);
+};
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PS4BT.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PS4BT.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b7eb4b5a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PS4BT.h
@@ -0,0 +1,121 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2014 Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics. All rights reserved.
+
+ This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+ General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+ Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+ this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+ on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+ the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+ Contact information
+ -------------------
+
+ Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics
+ Web      :  http://www.tkjelectronics.com
+ e-mail   :  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ps4bt_h_
+#define _ps4bt_h_
+
+#include "BTHID.h"
+#include "PS4Parser.h"
+
+/**
+ * This class implements support for the PS4 controller via Bluetooth.
+ * It uses the BTHID class for all the Bluetooth communication.
+ */
+class PS4BT : public BTHID, public PS4Parser {
+public:
+        /**
+         * Constructor for the PS4BT class.
+         * @param  p     Pointer to the BTD class instance.
+         * @param  pair  Set this to true in order to pair with the device. If the argument is omitted then it will not pair with it. One can use ::PAIR to set it to true.
+         * @param  pin   Write the pin to BTD#btdPin. If argument is omitted, then "0000" will be used.
+         */
+        PS4BT(BTD *p, bool pair = false, const char *pin = "0000") :
+        BTHID(p, pair, pin) {
+                PS4Parser::Reset();
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Used to check if a PS4 controller is connected.
+         * @return Returns true if it is connected.
+         */
+        bool connected() {
+                return BTHID::connected;
+        };
+
+protected:
+        /** @name BTHID implementation */
+        /**
+         * Used to parse Bluetooth HID data.
+         * @param len The length of the incoming data.
+         * @param buf Pointer to the data buffer.
+         */
+        virtual void ParseBTHIDData(uint8_t len, uint8_t *buf) {
+                PS4Parser::Parse(len, buf);
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Called when a device is successfully initialized.
+         * Use attachOnInit(void (*funcOnInit)(void)) to call your own function.
+         * This is useful for instance if you want to set the LEDs in a specific way.
+         */
+        virtual void OnInitBTHID() {
+                PS4Parser::Reset();
+                enable_sixaxis(); // Make the controller send out the entire output report
+                if (pFuncOnInit)
+                        pFuncOnInit(); // Call the user function
+                else
+                        setLed(Blue);
+        };
+
+        /** Used to reset the different buffers to there default values */
+        virtual void ResetBTHID() {
+                PS4Parser::Reset();
+        };
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /** @name PS4Parser implementation */
+        virtual void sendOutputReport(PS4Output *output) { // Source: https://github.com/chrippa/ds4drv
+                uint8_t buf[79];
+                memset(buf, 0, sizeof(buf));
+
+                buf[0] = 0x52; // HID BT Set_report (0x50) | Report Type (Output 0x02)
+                buf[1] = 0x11; // Report ID
+                buf[2] = 0x80;
+                buf[4]= 0xFF;
+
+                buf[7] = output->smallRumble; // Small Rumble
+                buf[8] = output->bigRumble; // Big rumble
+
+                buf[9] = output->r; // Red
+                buf[10] = output->g; // Green
+                buf[11] = output->b; // Blue
+
+                buf[12] = output->flashOn; // Time to flash bright (255 = 2.5 seconds)
+                buf[13] = output->flashOff; // Time to flash dark (255 = 2.5 seconds)
+
+                output->reportChanged = false;
+
+                // The PS4 console actually set the four last bytes to a CRC32 checksum, but it seems like it is actually not needed
+
+                HID_Command(buf, sizeof(buf));
+        };
+        /**@}*/
+
+private:
+        void enable_sixaxis() { // Command used to make the PS4 controller send out the entire output report
+                uint8_t buf[2];
+                buf[0] = 0x43; // HID BT Get_report (0x40) | Report Type (Feature 0x03)
+                buf[1] = 0x02; // Report ID
+
+                HID_Command(buf, 2);
+        };
+
+        void HID_Command(uint8_t *data, uint8_t nbytes) {
+                pBtd->L2CAP_Command(hci_handle, data, nbytes, control_scid[0], control_scid[1]);
+        };
+};
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PS4Parser.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PS4Parser.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ca6adce40
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PS4Parser.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,116 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2014 Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics. All rights reserved.
+
+ This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+ General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+ Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+ this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+ on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+ the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+ Contact information
+ -------------------
+
+ Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics
+ Web      :  http://www.tkjelectronics.com
+ e-mail   :  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#include "PS4Parser.h"
+
+// To enable serial debugging see "settings.h"
+//#define PRINTREPORT // Uncomment to print the report send by the PS4 Controller
+
+bool PS4Parser::checkDpad(ButtonEnum b) {
+        switch (b) {
+                case UP:
+                        return ps4Data.btn.dpad == DPAD_LEFT_UP || ps4Data.btn.dpad == DPAD_UP || ps4Data.btn.dpad == DPAD_UP_RIGHT;
+                case RIGHT:
+                        return ps4Data.btn.dpad == DPAD_UP_RIGHT || ps4Data.btn.dpad == DPAD_RIGHT || ps4Data.btn.dpad == DPAD_RIGHT_DOWN;
+                case DOWN:
+                        return ps4Data.btn.dpad == DPAD_RIGHT_DOWN || ps4Data.btn.dpad == DPAD_DOWN || ps4Data.btn.dpad == DPAD_DOWN_LEFT;
+                case LEFT:
+                        return ps4Data.btn.dpad == DPAD_DOWN_LEFT || ps4Data.btn.dpad == DPAD_LEFT || ps4Data.btn.dpad == DPAD_LEFT_UP;
+                default:
+                        return false;
+        }
+}
+
+bool PS4Parser::getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b) {
+        if (b <= LEFT) // Dpad
+                return checkDpad(b);
+        else
+                return ps4Data.btn.val & (1UL << pgm_read_byte(&PS4_BUTTONS[(uint8_t)b]));
+}
+
+bool PS4Parser::getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b) {
+        uint32_t mask = 1UL << pgm_read_byte(&PS4_BUTTONS[(uint8_t)b]);
+        bool click = buttonClickState.val & mask;
+        buttonClickState.val &= ~mask; // Clear "click" event
+        return click;
+}
+
+uint8_t PS4Parser::getAnalogButton(ButtonEnum b) {
+        if (b == L2) // These are the only analog buttons on the controller
+                return ps4Data.trigger[0];
+        else if (b == R2)
+                return ps4Data.trigger[1];
+        return 0;
+}
+
+uint8_t PS4Parser::getAnalogHat(AnalogHatEnum a) {
+        return ps4Data.hatValue[(uint8_t)a];
+}
+
+void PS4Parser::Parse(uint8_t len, uint8_t *buf) {
+        if (len > 1 && buf)  {
+#ifdef PRINTREPORT
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\n"), 0x80);
+                for (uint8_t i = 0; i < len; i++) {
+                        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (buf[i], 0x80);
+                        Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                }
+#endif
+
+                if (buf[0] == 0x01) // Check report ID
+                        memcpy(&ps4Data, buf + 1, min((uint8_t)(len - 1), sizeof(ps4Data)));
+                else if (buf[0] == 0x11) { // This report is send via Bluetooth, it has an offset of 2 compared to the USB data
+                        if (len < 4) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nReport is too short: "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (len, 0x80);
+#endif
+                                return;
+                        }
+                        memcpy(&ps4Data, buf + 3, min((uint8_t)(len - 3), sizeof(ps4Data)));
+                } else {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nUnknown report id: "), 0x80);
+                        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (buf[0], 0x80);
+#endif
+                        return;
+                }
+
+                if (ps4Data.btn.val != oldButtonState.val) { // Check if anything has changed
+                        buttonClickState.val = ps4Data.btn.val & ~oldButtonState.val; // Update click state variable
+                        oldButtonState.val = ps4Data.btn.val;
+
+                        // The DPAD buttons does not set the different bits, but set a value corresponding to the buttons pressed, we will simply set the bits ourself
+                        uint8_t newDpad = 0;
+                        if (checkDpad(UP))
+                                newDpad |= 1 << UP;
+                        if (checkDpad(RIGHT))
+                                newDpad |= 1 << RIGHT;
+                        if (checkDpad(DOWN))
+                                newDpad |= 1 << DOWN;
+                        if (checkDpad(LEFT))
+                                newDpad |= 1 << LEFT;
+                        if (newDpad != oldDpad) {
+                                buttonClickState.dpad = newDpad & ~oldDpad; // Override values
+                                oldDpad = newDpad;
+                        }
+                }
+        }
+
+        if (ps4Output.reportChanged)
+                sendOutputReport(&ps4Output); // Send output report
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PS4Parser.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PS4Parser.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..51f080636
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PS4Parser.h
@@ -0,0 +1,407 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2014 Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics. All rights reserved.
+
+ This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+ General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+ Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+ this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+ on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+ the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+ Contact information
+ -------------------
+
+ Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics
+ Web      :  http://www.tkjelectronics.com
+ e-mail   :  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ps4parser_h_
+#define _ps4parser_h_
+
+#include "Usb.h"
+#include "controllerEnums.h"
+
+/** Buttons on the controller */
+const uint8_t PS4_BUTTONS[] PROGMEM = {
+        UP, // UP
+        RIGHT, // RIGHT
+        DOWN, // DOWN
+        LEFT, // LEFT
+
+        0x0C, // SHARE
+        0x0D, // OPTIONS
+        0x0E, // L3
+        0x0F, // R3
+
+        0x0A, // L2
+        0x0B, // R2
+        0x08, // L1
+        0x09, // R1
+
+        0x07, // TRIANGLE
+        0x06, // CIRCLE
+        0x05, // CROSS
+        0x04, // SQUARE
+
+        0x10, // PS
+        0x11, // TOUCHPAD
+};
+
+union PS4Buttons {
+        struct {
+                uint8_t dpad : 4;
+                uint8_t square : 1;
+                uint8_t cross : 1;
+                uint8_t circle : 1;
+                uint8_t triangle : 1;
+
+                uint8_t l1 : 1;
+                uint8_t r1 : 1;
+                uint8_t l2 : 1;
+                uint8_t r2 : 1;
+                uint8_t share : 1;
+                uint8_t options : 1;
+                uint8_t l3 : 1;
+                uint8_t r3 : 1;
+
+                uint8_t ps : 1;
+                uint8_t touchpad : 1;
+                uint8_t reportCounter : 6;
+        } __attribute__((packed));
+        uint32_t val : 24;
+} __attribute__((packed));
+
+struct touchpadXY {
+        uint8_t dummy; // I can not figure out what this data is for, it seems to change randomly, maybe a timestamp?
+        struct {
+                uint8_t counter : 7; // Increments every time a finger is touching the touchpad
+                uint8_t touching : 1; // The top bit is cleared if the finger is touching the touchpad
+                uint16_t x : 12;
+                uint16_t y : 12;
+        } __attribute__((packed)) finger[2]; // 0 = first finger, 1 = second finger
+} __attribute__((packed));
+
+struct PS4Status {
+        uint8_t battery : 4;
+        uint8_t usb : 1;
+        uint8_t audio : 1;
+        uint8_t mic : 1;
+        uint8_t unknown : 1; // Extension port?
+} __attribute__((packed));
+
+struct PS4Data {
+        /* Button and joystick values */
+        uint8_t hatValue[4];
+        PS4Buttons btn;
+        uint8_t trigger[2];
+
+        /* Gyro and accelerometer values */
+        uint8_t dummy[3]; // First two looks random, while the third one might be some kind of status - it increments once in a while
+        int16_t gyroY, gyroZ, gyroX;
+        int16_t accX, accZ, accY;
+
+        uint8_t dummy2[5];
+        PS4Status status;
+        uint8_t dummy3[3];
+
+        /* The rest is data for the touchpad */
+        touchpadXY xy[3]; // It looks like it sends out three coordinates each time, this might be because the microcontroller inside the PS4 controller is much faster than the Bluetooth connection.
+                          // The last data is read from the last position in the array while the oldest measurement is from the first position.
+                          // The first position will also keep it's value after the finger is released, while the other two will set them to zero.
+                          // Note that if you read fast enough from the device, then only the first one will contain any data.
+
+        // The last three bytes are always: 0x00, 0x80, 0x00
+} __attribute__((packed));
+
+struct PS4Output {
+        uint8_t bigRumble, smallRumble; // Rumble
+        uint8_t r, g, b; // RGB
+        uint8_t flashOn, flashOff; // Time to flash bright/dark (255 = 2.5 seconds)
+        bool reportChanged; // The data is send when data is received from the controller
+} __attribute__((packed));
+
+enum DPADEnum {
+        DPAD_UP = 0x0,
+        DPAD_UP_RIGHT = 0x1,
+        DPAD_RIGHT = 0x2,
+        DPAD_RIGHT_DOWN = 0x3,
+        DPAD_DOWN = 0x4,
+        DPAD_DOWN_LEFT = 0x5,
+        DPAD_LEFT = 0x6,
+        DPAD_LEFT_UP = 0x7,
+        DPAD_OFF = 0x8,
+};
+
+/** This class parses all the data sent by the PS4 controller */
+class PS4Parser {
+public:
+        /** Constructor for the PS4Parser class. */
+        PS4Parser() {
+                Reset();
+        };
+
+        /** @name PS4 Controller functions */
+        /**
+         * getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b) will return true as long as the button is held down.
+         *
+         * While getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b) will only return it once.
+         *
+         * So you instance if you need to increase a variable once you would use getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b),
+         * but if you need to drive a robot forward you would use getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b).
+         * @param  b          ::ButtonEnum to read.
+         * @return            getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b) will return a true as long as a button is held down, while getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b) will return true once for each button press.
+         */
+        bool getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b);
+        bool getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b);
+        /**@}*/
+        /** @name PS4 Controller functions */
+        /**
+         * Used to get the analog value from button presses.
+         * @param  b The ::ButtonEnum to read.
+         * The supported buttons are:
+         * ::UP, ::RIGHT, ::DOWN, ::LEFT, ::L1, ::L2, ::R1, ::R2,
+         * ::TRIANGLE, ::CIRCLE, ::CROSS, ::SQUARE, and ::T.
+         * @return   Analog value in the range of 0-255.
+         */
+        uint8_t getAnalogButton(ButtonEnum b);
+
+        /**
+         * Used to read the analog joystick.
+         * @param  a ::LeftHatX, ::LeftHatY, ::RightHatX, and ::RightHatY.
+         * @return   Return the analog value in the range of 0-255.
+         */
+        uint8_t getAnalogHat(AnalogHatEnum a);
+
+        /**
+         * Get the x-coordinate of the touchpad. Position 0 is in the top left.
+         * @param  finger 0 = first finger, 1 = second finger. If omitted, then 0 will be used.
+         * @param  xyId   The controller sends out three packets with the same structure.
+         *                The third one will contain the last measure, but if you read from the controller then there is only be data in the first one.
+         *                For that reason it will be set to 0 if the argument is omitted.
+         * @return        Returns the x-coordinate of the finger.
+         */
+        uint16_t getX(uint8_t finger = 0, uint8_t xyId = 0) {
+                return ps4Data.xy[xyId].finger[finger].x;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Get the y-coordinate of the touchpad. Position 0 is in the top left.
+         * @param  finger 0 = first finger, 1 = second finger. If omitted, then 0 will be used.
+         * @param  xyId   The controller sends out three packets with the same structure.
+         *                The third one will contain the last measure, but if you read from the controller then there is only be data in the first one.
+         *                For that reason it will be set to 0 if the argument is omitted.
+         * @return        Returns the y-coordinate of the finger.
+         */
+        uint16_t getY(uint8_t finger = 0, uint8_t xyId = 0) {
+                return ps4Data.xy[xyId].finger[finger].y;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Returns whenever the user is toucing the touchpad.
+         * @param  finger 0 = first finger, 1 = second finger. If omitted, then 0 will be used.
+         * @param  xyId   The controller sends out three packets with the same structure.
+         *                The third one will contain the last measure, but if you read from the controller then there is only be data in the first one.
+         *                For that reason it will be set to 0 if the argument is omitted.
+         * @return        Returns true if the specific finger is touching the touchpad.
+         */
+        bool isTouching(uint8_t finger = 0, uint8_t xyId = 0) {
+                return !(ps4Data.xy[xyId].finger[finger].touching); // The bit is cleared when a finger is touching the touchpad
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * This counter increments every time a finger touches the touchpad.
+         * @param  finger 0 = first finger, 1 = second finger. If omitted, then 0 will be used.
+         * @param  xyId   The controller sends out three packets with the same structure.
+         *                The third one will contain the last measure, but if you read from the controller then there is only be data in the first one.
+         *                For that reason it will be set to 0 if the argument is omitted.
+         * @return        Return the value of the counter, note that it is only a 7-bit value.
+         */
+        uint8_t getTouchCounter(uint8_t finger = 0, uint8_t xyId = 0) {
+                return ps4Data.xy[xyId].finger[finger].counter;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Get the angle of the controller calculated using the accelerometer.
+         * @param  a Either ::Pitch or ::Roll.
+         * @return   Return the angle in the range of 0-360.
+         */
+        double getAngle(AngleEnum a) {
+                if (a == Pitch)
+                        return (atan2(ps4Data.accY, ps4Data.accZ) + PI) * RAD_TO_DEG;
+                else
+                        return (atan2(ps4Data.accX, ps4Data.accZ) + PI) * RAD_TO_DEG;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Used to get the raw values from the 3-axis gyroscope and 3-axis accelerometer inside the PS4 controller.
+         * @param  s The sensor to read.
+         * @return   Returns the raw sensor reading.
+         */
+        int16_t getSensor(SensorEnum s) {
+                switch(s) {
+                        case gX:
+                                return ps4Data.gyroX;
+                        case gY:
+                                return ps4Data.gyroY;
+                        case gZ:
+                                return ps4Data.gyroZ;
+                        case aX:
+                                return ps4Data.accX;
+                        case aY:
+                                return ps4Data.accY;
+                        case aZ:
+                                return ps4Data.accZ;
+                        default:
+                                return 0;
+                }
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Return the battery level of the PS4 controller.
+         * @return The battery level in the range 0-15.
+         */
+        uint8_t getBatteryLevel() {
+                return ps4Data.status.battery;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Use this to check if an USB cable is connected to the PS4 controller.
+         * @return Returns true if an USB cable is connected.
+         */
+        bool getUsbStatus() {
+                return ps4Data.status.usb;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Use this to check if an audio jack cable is connected to the PS4 controller.
+         * @return Returns true if an audio jack cable is connected.
+         */
+        bool getAudioStatus() {
+                return ps4Data.status.audio;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Use this to check if a microphone is connected to the PS4 controller.
+         * @return Returns true if a microphone is connected.
+         */
+        bool getMicStatus() {
+                return ps4Data.status.mic;
+        };
+
+        /** Turn both rumble and the LEDs off. */
+        void setAllOff() {
+                setRumbleOff();
+                setLedOff();
+        };
+
+        /** Set rumble off. */
+        void setRumbleOff() {
+                setRumbleOn(0, 0);
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Turn on rumble.
+         * @param mode Either ::RumbleHigh or ::RumbleLow.
+         */
+        void setRumbleOn(RumbleEnum mode) {
+                if (mode == RumbleLow)
+                        setRumbleOn(0x00, 0xFF);
+                else
+                        setRumbleOn(0xFF, 0x00);
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Turn on rumble.
+         * @param bigRumble   Value for big motor.
+         * @param smallRumble Value for small motor.
+         */
+        void setRumbleOn(uint8_t bigRumble, uint8_t smallRumble) {
+                ps4Output.bigRumble = bigRumble;
+                ps4Output.smallRumble = smallRumble;
+                ps4Output.reportChanged = true;
+        };
+
+        /** Turn all LEDs off. */
+        void setLedOff() {
+                setLed(0, 0, 0);
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Use this to set the color using RGB values.
+         * @param r,g,b RGB value.
+         */
+        void setLed(uint8_t r, uint8_t g, uint8_t b) {
+                ps4Output.r = r;
+                ps4Output.g = g;
+                ps4Output.b = b;
+                ps4Output.reportChanged = true;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Use this to set the color using the predefined colors in ::ColorsEnum.
+         * @param color The desired color.
+         */
+        void setLed(ColorsEnum color) {
+                setLed((uint8_t)(color >> 16), (uint8_t)(color >> 8), (uint8_t)(color));
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Set the LEDs flash time.
+         * @param flashOn  Time to flash bright (255 = 2.5 seconds).
+         * @param flashOff Time to flash dark (255 = 2.5 seconds).
+         */
+        void setLedFlash(uint8_t flashOn, uint8_t flashOff) {
+                ps4Output.flashOn = flashOn;
+                ps4Output.flashOff = flashOff;
+                ps4Output.reportChanged = true;
+        };
+        /**@}*/
+
+protected:
+        /**
+         * Used to parse data sent from the PS4 controller.
+         * @param len Length of the data.
+         * @param buf Pointer to the data buffer.
+         */
+        void Parse(uint8_t len, uint8_t *buf);
+
+        /** Used to reset the different buffers to their default values */
+        void Reset() {
+                uint8_t i;
+                for (i = 0; i < sizeof(ps4Data.hatValue); i++)
+                        ps4Data.hatValue[i] = 127; // Center value
+                ps4Data.btn.val = 0;
+                oldButtonState.val = 0;
+                for (i = 0; i < sizeof(ps4Data.trigger); i++)
+                        ps4Data.trigger[i] = 0;
+                for (i = 0; i < sizeof(ps4Data.xy)/sizeof(ps4Data.xy[0]); i++) {
+                        for (uint8_t j = 0; j < sizeof(ps4Data.xy[0].finger)/sizeof(ps4Data.xy[0].finger[0]); j++)
+                                ps4Data.xy[i].finger[j].touching = 1; // The bit is cleared if the finger is touching the touchpad
+                }
+
+                ps4Data.btn.dpad = DPAD_OFF;
+                oldButtonState.dpad = DPAD_OFF;
+                buttonClickState.dpad = 0;
+                oldDpad = 0;
+
+                ps4Output.bigRumble = ps4Output.smallRumble = 0;
+                ps4Output.r = ps4Output.g = ps4Output.b = 0;
+                ps4Output.flashOn = ps4Output.flashOff = 0;
+                ps4Output.reportChanged = false;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Send the output to the PS4 controller. This is implemented in PS4BT.h and PS4USB.h.
+         * @param output Pointer to PS4Output buffer;
+         */
+        virtual void sendOutputReport(PS4Output *output) = 0;
+
+private:
+        bool checkDpad(ButtonEnum b); // Used to check PS4 DPAD buttons
+
+        PS4Data ps4Data;
+        PS4Buttons oldButtonState, buttonClickState;
+        PS4Output ps4Output;
+        uint8_t oldDpad;
+};
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PS4USB.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PS4USB.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b43079a6e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PS4USB.h
@@ -0,0 +1,130 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2014 Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics. All rights reserved.
+
+ This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+ General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+ Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+ this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+ on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+ the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+ Contact information
+ -------------------
+
+ Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics
+ Web      :  http://www.tkjelectronics.com
+ e-mail   :  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ps4usb_h_
+#define _ps4usb_h_
+
+#include "hiduniversal.h"
+#include "PS4Parser.h"
+
+#define PS4_VID 0x054C // Sony Corporation
+#define PS4_PID 0x05C4 // PS4 Controller
+
+/**
+ * This class implements support for the PS4 controller via USB.
+ * It uses the HIDUniversal class for all the USB communication.
+ */
+class PS4USB : public HIDUniversal, public PS4Parser {
+public:
+        /**
+         * Constructor for the PS4USB class.
+         * @param  p   Pointer to the USB class instance.
+         */
+        PS4USB(USB *p) :
+        HIDUniversal(p) {
+                PS4Parser::Reset();
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Used to check if a PS4 controller is connected.
+         * @return Returns true if it is connected.
+         */
+        bool connected() {
+                return HIDUniversal::isReady() && HIDUniversal::VID == PS4_VID && HIDUniversal::PID == PS4_PID;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Used to call your own function when the device is successfully initialized.
+         * @param funcOnInit Function to call.
+         */
+        void attachOnInit(void (*funcOnInit)(void)) {
+                pFuncOnInit = funcOnInit;
+        };
+
+protected:
+        /** @name HIDUniversal implementation */
+        /**
+         * Used to parse USB HID data.
+         * @param hid       Pointer to the HID class.
+         * @param is_rpt_id Only used for Hubs.
+         * @param len       The length of the incoming data.
+         * @param buf       Pointer to the data buffer.
+         */
+        virtual void ParseHIDData(HID *hid, bool is_rpt_id, uint8_t len, uint8_t *buf) {
+                if (HIDUniversal::VID == PS4_VID && HIDUniversal::PID == PS4_PID)
+                        PS4Parser::Parse(len, buf);
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Called when a device is successfully initialized.
+         * Use attachOnInit(void (*funcOnInit)(void)) to call your own function.
+         * This is useful for instance if you want to set the LEDs in a specific way.
+         */
+        virtual uint8_t OnInitSuccessful() {
+                if (HIDUniversal::VID == PS4_VID && HIDUniversal::PID == PS4_PID) {
+                        PS4Parser::Reset();
+                        if (pFuncOnInit)
+                                pFuncOnInit(); // Call the user function
+                        else
+                                setLed(Blue);
+                };
+                return 0;
+        };
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /** @name PS4Parser implementation */
+        virtual void sendOutputReport(PS4Output *output) { // Source: https://github.com/chrippa/ds4drv
+                uint8_t buf[32];
+                memset(buf, 0, sizeof(buf));
+
+                buf[0] = 0x05; // Report ID
+                buf[1]= 0xFF;
+
+                buf[4] = output->smallRumble; // Small Rumble
+                buf[5] = output->bigRumble; // Big rumble
+
+                buf[6] = output->r; // Red
+                buf[7] = output->g; // Green
+                buf[8] = output->b; // Blue
+
+                buf[9] = output->flashOn; // Time to flash bright (255 = 2.5 seconds)
+                buf[10] = output->flashOff; // Time to flash dark (255 = 2.5 seconds)
+
+                output->reportChanged = false;
+
+                // The PS4 console actually set the four last bytes to a CRC32 checksum, but it seems like it is actually not needed
+
+                pUsb->outTransfer(bAddress, epInfo[ hidInterfaces[0].epIndex[epInterruptOutIndex] ].epAddr, sizeof(buf), buf);
+        };
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /** @name USBDeviceConfig implementation */
+        /**
+         * Used by the USB core to check what this driver support.
+         * @param  vid The device's VID.
+         * @param  pid The device's PID.
+         * @return     Returns true if the device's VID and PID matches this driver.
+         */
+        virtual bool VIDPIDOK(uint16_t vid, uint16_t pid) {
+                return (vid == PS4_VID && pid == PS4_PID);
+        };
+        /**@}*/
+
+private:
+        void (*pFuncOnInit)(void); // Pointer to function called in onInit()
+};
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PSBuzz.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PSBuzz.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..498164d5a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PSBuzz.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2014 Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics. All rights reserved.
+
+ This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+ General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+ Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+ this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+ on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+ the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+ Contact information
+ -------------------
+
+ Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics
+ Web      :  http://www.tkjelectronics.com
+ e-mail   :  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#include "PSBuzz.h"
+
+// To enable serial debugging see "settings.h"
+//#define PRINTREPORT // Uncomment to print the report send by the PS Buzz Controllers
+
+void PSBuzz::ParseHIDData(HID *hid, bool is_rpt_id, uint8_t len, uint8_t *buf) {
+        if (HIDUniversal::VID == PSBUZZ_VID && HIDUniversal::PID == PSBUZZ_PID && len > 2 && buf) {
+#ifdef PRINTREPORT
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\n"), 0x80);
+                for (uint8_t i = 0; i < len; i++) {
+                        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (buf[i], 0x80);
+                        Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                }
+#endif
+                memcpy(&psbuzzButtons, buf + 2, min((uint8_t)(len - 2), sizeof(psbuzzButtons)));
+
+                if (psbuzzButtons.val != oldButtonState.val) { // Check if anything has changed
+                        buttonClickState.val = psbuzzButtons.val & ~oldButtonState.val; // Update click state variable
+                        oldButtonState.val = psbuzzButtons.val;
+                }
+        }
+};
+
+uint8_t PSBuzz::OnInitSuccessful() {
+        if (HIDUniversal::VID == PSBUZZ_VID && HIDUniversal::PID == PSBUZZ_PID) {
+                Reset();
+                if (pFuncOnInit)
+                        pFuncOnInit(); // Call the user function
+                else
+                        setLedOnAll(); // Turn the LED on, on all four controllers
+        };
+        return 0;
+};
+
+bool PSBuzz::getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b, uint8_t controller) {
+        return psbuzzButtons.val & (1UL << (b + 5 * controller)); // Each controller uses 5 bits, so the value is shifted 5 for each controller
+};
+
+bool PSBuzz::getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b, uint8_t controller) {
+        uint32_t mask = (1UL << (b + 5 * controller)); // Each controller uses 5 bits, so the value is shifted 5 for each controller
+        bool click = buttonClickState.val & mask;
+        buttonClickState.val &= ~mask; // Clear "click" event
+        return click;
+};
+
+// Source: http://www.developerfusion.com/article/84338/making-usb-c-friendly/ and https://github.com/torvalds/linux/blob/master/drivers/hid/hid-sony.c
+void PSBuzz::setLedRaw(bool value, uint8_t controller) {
+        ledState[controller] = value; // Save value for next time it is called
+
+        uint8_t buf[7];
+        buf[0] = 0x00;
+        buf[1] = ledState[0] ? 0xFF : 0x00;
+        buf[2] = ledState[1] ? 0xFF : 0x00;
+        buf[3] = ledState[2] ? 0xFF : 0x00;
+        buf[4] = ledState[3] ? 0xFF : 0x00;
+        buf[5] = 0x00;
+        buf[6] = 0x00;
+
+        PSBuzz_Command(buf, sizeof(buf));
+};
+
+void PSBuzz::PSBuzz_Command(uint8_t *data, uint16_t nbytes) {
+        // bmRequest = Host to device (0x00) | Class (0x20) | Interface (0x01) = 0x21, bRequest = Set Report (0x09), Report ID (0x00), Report Type (Output 0x02), interface (0x00), datalength, datalength, data)
+        pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, epInfo[0].epAddr, bmREQ_HID_OUT, HID_REQUEST_SET_REPORT, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00, nbytes, nbytes, data, NULL);
+};
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PSBuzz.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PSBuzz.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8880d9e50
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/PSBuzz.h
@@ -0,0 +1,185 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2014 Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics. All rights reserved.
+
+ This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+ General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+ Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+ this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+ on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+ the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+ Contact information
+ -------------------
+
+ Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics
+ Web      :  http://www.tkjelectronics.com
+ e-mail   :  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#ifndef _psbuzz_h_
+#define _psbuzz_h_
+
+#include "hiduniversal.h"
+#include "controllerEnums.h"
+
+#define PSBUZZ_VID 0x054C // Sony Corporation
+#define PSBUZZ_PID 0x1000 // PS Buzz Controller
+
+/** Struct used to easily read the different buttons on the controllers */
+union PSBUZZButtons {
+        struct {
+                uint8_t red : 1;
+                uint8_t yellow : 1;
+                uint8_t green : 1;
+                uint8_t orange : 1;
+                uint8_t blue : 1;
+        } __attribute__((packed)) btn[4];
+        uint32_t val : 20;
+} __attribute__((packed));
+
+/**
+ * This class implements support for the PS Buzz controllers via USB.
+ * It uses the HIDUniversal class for all the USB communication.
+ */
+class PSBuzz : public HIDUniversal {
+public:
+        /**
+         * Constructor for the PSBuzz class.
+         * @param  p   Pointer to the USB class instance.
+         */
+        PSBuzz(USB *p) :
+        HIDUniversal(p) {
+                Reset();
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Used to check if a PS Buzz controller is connected.
+         * @return Returns true if it is connected.
+         */
+        bool connected() {
+                return HIDUniversal::isReady() && HIDUniversal::VID == PSBUZZ_VID && HIDUniversal::PID == PSBUZZ_PID;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Used to call your own function when the device is successfully initialized.
+         * @param funcOnInit Function to call.
+         */
+        void attachOnInit(void (*funcOnInit)(void)) {
+                pFuncOnInit = funcOnInit;
+        };
+
+        /** @name PS Buzzer Controller functions */
+        /**
+         * getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b) will return true as long as the button is held down.
+         *
+         * While getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b) will only return it once.
+         *
+         * So you instance if you need to increase a variable once you would use getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b),
+         * but if you need to drive a robot forward you would use getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b).
+         * @param  b          ::ButtonEnum to read.
+         * @param  controller The controller to read from. Default to 0.
+         * @return            getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b) will return a true as long as a button is held down, while getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b) will return true once for each button press.
+         */
+        bool getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b, uint8_t controller = 0);
+        bool getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b, uint8_t controller = 0);
+        /**@}*/
+        /** @name PS Buzzer Controller functions */
+        /**
+         * Set LED value without using ::LEDEnum.
+         * @param value See: ::LEDEnum.
+         */
+        /**
+         * Set LED values directly.
+         * @param value      Used to set whenever the LED should be on or off
+         * @param controller The controller to control. Defaults to 0.
+         */
+        void setLedRaw(bool value, uint8_t controller = 0);
+
+        /** Turn all LEDs off. */
+        void setLedOffAll() {
+                for (uint8_t i = 1; i < 4; i++) // Skip first as it will be set in setLedRaw
+                        ledState[i] = false; // Just an easy way to set all four off at the same time
+                setLedRaw(false); // Turn the LED off, on all four controllers
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Turn the LED off on a specific controller.
+         * @param controller The controller to turn off. Defaults to 0.
+         */
+        void setLedOff(uint8_t controller = 0) {
+                setLedRaw(false, controller);
+        };
+
+
+        /** Turn all LEDs on. */
+        void setLedOnAll() {
+                for (uint8_t i = 1; i < 4; i++) // Skip first as it will be set in setLedRaw
+                        ledState[i] = true; // Just an easy way to set all four off at the same time
+                setLedRaw(true); // Turn the LED on, on all four controllers
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Turn the LED on on a specific controller.
+         * @param controller The controller to turn off. Defaults to 0.
+         */
+        void setLedOn(uint8_t controller = 0) {
+                setLedRaw(true, controller);
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Toggle the LED on a specific controller.
+         * @param controller The controller to turn off. Defaults to 0.
+         */
+        void setLedToggle(uint8_t controller = 0) {
+                setLedRaw(!ledState[controller], controller);
+        };
+        /**@}*/
+
+protected:
+        /** @name HIDUniversal implementation */
+        /**
+         * Used to parse USB HID data.
+         * @param hid       Pointer to the HID class.
+         * @param is_rpt_id Only used for Hubs.
+         * @param len       The length of the incoming data.
+         * @param buf       Pointer to the data buffer.
+         */
+        void ParseHIDData(HID *hid, bool is_rpt_id, uint8_t len, uint8_t *buf);
+
+        /**
+         * Called when a device is successfully initialized.
+         * Use attachOnInit(void (*funcOnInit)(void)) to call your own function.
+         * This is useful for instance if you want to set the LEDs in a specific way.
+         */
+        uint8_t OnInitSuccessful();
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /** Used to reset the different buffers to their default values */
+        void Reset() {
+                psbuzzButtons.val = 0;
+                oldButtonState.val = 0;
+                buttonClickState.val = 0;
+                for (uint8_t i = 0; i < sizeof(ledState); i++)
+                        ledState[i] = 0;
+        };
+
+        /** @name USBDeviceConfig implementation */
+        /**
+         * Used by the USB core to check what this driver support.
+         * @param  vid The device's VID.
+         * @param  pid The device's PID.
+         * @return     Returns true if the device's VID and PID matches this driver.
+         */
+        virtual bool VIDPIDOK(uint16_t vid, uint16_t pid) {
+                return (vid == PSBUZZ_VID && pid == PSBUZZ_PID);
+        };
+        /**@}*/
+
+private:
+        void (*pFuncOnInit)(void); // Pointer to function called in onInit()
+
+        void PSBuzz_Command(uint8_t *data, uint16_t nbytes);
+
+        PSBUZZButtons psbuzzButtons, oldButtonState, buttonClickState;
+        bool ledState[4];
+};
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/README.md b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..49cd83e0a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,351 @@
+# USB Host Library Rev.2.0
+
+The code is released under the GNU General Public License.
+__________
+
+# Summary
+This is Revision 2.0 of MAX3421E-based USB Host Shield Library for AVR's.
+
+Project main web site is: <http://www.circuitsathome.com>.
+
+Some information can also be found at: <http://blog.tkjelectronics.dk/>.
+
+The shield can be purchased at the main site: <http://www.circuitsathome.com/products-page/arduino-shields> or from [TKJ Electronics](http://tkjelectronics.com/): <http://shop.tkjelectronics.dk/product_info.php?products_id=43>.
+
+![USB Host Shield](http://shop.tkjelectronics.dk/images/USB_Host_Shield1.jpg)
+
+For more information about the hardware see the [Hardware Manual](http://www.circuitsathome.com/usb-host-shield-hardware-manual).
+
+# Developed By
+
+* __Oleg Mazurov, Circuits@Home__ - <mazurov@circuitsathome.com>
+* __Alexei Glushchenko, Circuits@Home__ - <alex-gl@mail.ru>
+    * Developers of the USB Core, HID, FTDI, ADK, ACM, and PL2303 libraries
+* __Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics__ - <kristianl@tkjelectronics.com>
+    * Developer of the [BTD](#bluetooth-libraries), [BTHID](#bthid-library), [SPP](#spp-library), [PS4](#ps4-library), [PS3](#ps3-library), [Wii](#wii-library), [Xbox](#xbox-library), and [PSBuzz](#ps-buzz-library) libraries
+* __Andrew Kroll__ - <xxxajk@gmail.com>
+    * Major contributor to mass storage code
+* __guruthree__
+    * [Xbox ONE](#xbox-one-library) controller support
+
+# Donate
+
+Help yourself by helping us support you! Many thousands of hours have been spent developing the USB Host Shield library. Since you find it useful, please consider donating via the button below. Donations will allow us to support you by ensuring hardware that you have can be acquired in order to add support for your microcontroller board.
+
+<a href="https://www.paypal.com/cgi-bin/webscr?cmd=_donations&amp;business=donate@circuitsathome.com&amp;lc=US&amp;item_name=Donate%20to%20the%20USB%20Host%20Library%20project&amp;no_note=0&amp;currency_code=USD&amp;bn=PP%2dDonationsBF%3abtn_donate_LG%2egif%3aNonHostedGuest"><img src="https://www.paypalobjects.com/en_US/i/btn/btn_donate_LG.gif" alt="PayPal - The safer, easier way to pay online!" /></a>
+
+# Table of Contents
+
+* [How to include the library](#how-to-include-the-library)
+    * [Arduino Library Manager](#arduino-library-manager)
+    * [Manual installation](#manual-installation)
+* [How to use the library](#how-to-use-the-library)
+    * [Documentation](#documentation)
+    * [Enable debugging](#enable-debugging)
+    * [Boards](#boards)
+    * [Bluetooth libraries](#bluetooth-libraries)
+    * [BTHID library](#bthid-library)
+    * [SPP library](#spp-library)
+    * [PS4 Library](#ps4-library)
+    * [PS3 Library](#ps3-library)
+    * [Xbox Libraries](#xbox-libraries)
+        * [Xbox library](#xbox-library)
+        * [Xbox 360 Library](#xbox-360-library)
+        * [Xbox ONE Library](#xbox-one-library)
+    * [Wii library](#wii-library)
+    * [PS Buzz Library](#ps-buzz-library)
+* [Interface modifications](#interface-modifications)
+* [FAQ](#faq)
+
+# How to include the library
+
+### Arduino Library Manager
+
+First install Arduino IDE version 1.6.2 or newer, then simply use the Arduino Library Manager to install the library.
+
+Please see the following page for instructions: <http://www.arduino.cc/en/Guide/Libraries#toc3>.
+
+### Manual installation
+
+First download the library by clicking on the following link: <https://github.com/felis/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/archive/master.zip>.
+
+Then uncompress the zip folder and rename the directory to "USB\_Host\_Shield\_20", as any special characters are not supported by the Arduino IDE.
+
+Now open up the Arduino IDE and open "File>Preferences". There you will see the location of your sketchbook. Open that directory and create a directory called "libraries" inside that directory.
+Now move the "USB\_Host\_Shield\_20" directory to the "libraries" directory.
+
+The final structure should look like this:
+
+* Arduino/
+    * libraries/
+        * USB\_Host\_Shield\_20/
+
+Now quit the Arduino IDE and reopen it.
+
+Now you should be able to go open all the examples codes by navigating to "File>Examples>USB\_Host\_Shield\_20" and then select the example you will like to open.
+
+For more information visit the following sites: <http://arduino.cc/en/Guide/Libraries> and <https://learn.adafruit.com/adafruit-all-about-arduino-libraries-install-use>.
+
+# How to use the library
+
+### Documentation
+
+Documentation for the library can be found at the following link: <http://felis.github.com/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/>.
+
+### Enable debugging
+
+By default serial debugging is disabled. To turn it on simply change ```ENABLE_UHS_DEBUGGING``` to 1 in [settings.h](settings.h) like so:
+
+```C++
+#define ENABLE_UHS_DEBUGGING 1
+```
+
+### Boards
+
+Currently the following boards are supported by the library:
+
+* All official Arduino AVR boards (Uno, Duemilanove, Mega, Mega 2560, Mega ADK, Leonardo etc.)
+* Arduino Due, Intel Galileo, Intel Galileo 2, and Intel Edison
+    * Note that the Intel Galileo uses pin 2 and 3 as INT and SS pin respectively by default, so some modifications to the shield are needed. See the "Interface modifications" section in the [hardware manual](https://www.circuitsathome.com/usb-host-shield-hardware-manual) for more information.
+* Teensy (Teensy++ 1.0, Teensy 2.0, Teensy++ 2.0, and Teensy 3.x)
+    * Note if you are using the Teensy 3.x you should download this SPI library as well: <https://github.com/xxxajk/spi4teensy3>. You should then add ```#include <spi4teensy3.h>``` to your .ino file.
+* Balanduino
+* Sanguino
+* Black Widdow
+* RedBearLab nRF51822
+* Digilent chipKIT
+    * Please see: <http://www.circuitsathome.com/mcu/usb/running-usb-host-code-on-digilent-chipkit-board>.
+
+The following boards need to be activated manually in [settings.h](settings.h):
+
+* Arduino Mega ADK
+    * If you are using Arduino 1.5.5 or newer there is no need to activate the Arduino Mega ADK manually
+* Black Widdow
+
+Simply set the corresponding value to 1 instead of 0.
+
+### [Bluetooth libraries](BTD.cpp)
+
+The [BTD library](BTD.cpp) is a general purpose library for an ordinary Bluetooth dongle.
+This library make it easy to add support for different Bluetooth services like a PS3 or a Wii controller or SPP which is a virtual serial port via Bluetooth.
+Some different examples can be found in the [example directory](examples/Bluetooth).
+
+The BTD library also makes it possible to use multiple services at once, the following example sketch is an example of this:
+[PS3SPP.ino](examples/Bluetooth/PS3SPP/PS3SPP.ino).
+
+### [BTHID library](BTHID.cpp)
+
+The [Bluetooth HID library](BTHID.cpp) allows you to connect HID devices via Bluetooth to the USB Host Shield.
+
+Currently HID mice and keyboards are supported.
+
+It uses the standard Boot protocol by default, but it is also able to use the Report protocol as well. You would simply have to call ```setProtocolMode()``` and then parse ```HID_RPT_PROTOCOL``` as an argument. You will then have to modify the parser for your device. See the example: [BTHID.ino](examples/Bluetooth/BTHID/BTHID.ino) for more information.
+
+The [PS4 library](#ps4-library) also uses this class to handle all Bluetooth communication.
+
+For information see the following blog post: <http://blog.tkjelectronics.dk/2013/12/bluetooth-hid-devices-now-supported-by-the-usb-host-library/>.
+
+### [SPP library](SPP.cpp)
+
+SPP stands for "Serial Port Profile" and is a Bluetooth protocol that implements a virtual comport which allows you to send data back and forth from your computer/phone to your Arduino via Bluetooth.
+It has been tested successfully on Windows, Mac OS X, Linux, and Android.
+
+Take a look at the [SPP.ino](examples/Bluetooth/SPP/SPP.ino) example for more information.
+
+More information can be found at these blog posts:
+
+* <http://www.circuitsathome.com/mcu/bluetooth-rfcommspp-service-support-for-usb-host-2-0-library-released>
+* <http://blog.tkjelectronics.dk/2012/07/rfcommspp-library-for-arduino/>
+
+To implement the SPP protocol I used a Bluetooth sniffing tool called [PacketLogger](http://www.tkjelectronics.com/uploads/PacketLogger.zip) developed by Apple.
+It enables me to see the Bluetooth communication between my Mac and any device.
+
+### PS4 Library
+
+The PS4BT library is split up into the [PS4BT](PS4BT.h) and the [PS4USB](PS4USB.h) library. These allow you to use the Sony PS4 controller via Bluetooth and USB.
+
+The [PS4BT.ino](examples/Bluetooth/PS4BT/PS4BT.ino) and [PS4USB.ino](examples/PS4USB/PS4USB.ino) examples shows how to easily read the buttons, joysticks, touchpad and IMU on the controller via Bluetooth and USB respectively. It is also possible to control the rumble and light on the controller and get the battery level.
+
+Before you can use the PS4 controller via Bluetooth you will need to pair with it.
+
+Simply create the PS4BT instance like so: ```PS4BT PS4(&Btd, PAIR);``` and then hold down the Share button and then hold down the PS without releasing the Share button. The PS4 controller will then start to blink rapidly indicating that it is in paring mode.
+
+It should then automatically pair the dongle with your controller. This only have to be done once.
+
+For information see the following blog post: <http://blog.tkjelectronics.dk/2014/01/ps4-controller-now-supported-by-the-usb-host-library/>.
+
+Also check out this excellent Wiki by Frank Zhao about the PS4 controller: <http://eleccelerator.com/wiki/index.php?title=DualShock_4> and this Linux driver: <https://github.com/chrippa/ds4drv>.
+
+### PS3 Library
+
+These libraries consist of the [PS3BT](PS3BT.cpp) and [PS3USB](PS3USB.cpp). These libraries allows you to use a Dualshock 3, Navigation or a Motion controller with the USB Host Shield both via Bluetooth and USB.
+
+In order to use your Playstation controller via Bluetooth you have to set the Bluetooth address of the dongle internally to your PS3 Controller. This can be achieved by first plugging in the Bluetooth dongle and wait a few seconds. Now plug in the controller via USB and wait until the LEDs start to flash. The library has now written the Bluetooth address of the dongle to the PS3 controller.
+
+Finally simply plug in the Bluetooth dongle again and press PS on the PS3 controller. After a few seconds it should be connected to the dongle and ready to use.
+
+__Note:__ You will have to plug in the Bluetooth dongle before connecting the controller, as the library needs to read the address of the dongle. Alternatively you could set it in code like so: [PS3BT.ino#L20](examples/Bluetooth/PS3BT/PS3BT.ino#L20).
+
+For more information about the PS3 protocol see the official wiki: <https://github.com/felis/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/wiki/PS3-Information>.
+
+Also take a look at the blog posts:
+
+* <http://blog.tkjelectronics.dk/2012/01/ps3-controller-bt-library-for-arduino/>
+* <http://www.circuitsathome.com/mcu/sony-ps3-controller-support-added-to-usb-host-library>
+* <http://www.circuitsathome.com/mcu/arduino/interfacing-ps3-controllers-via-usb>
+
+A special thanks go to the following people:
+
+1. _Richard Ibbotson_ who made this excellent guide: <http://www.circuitsathome.com/mcu/ps3-and-wiimote-game-controllers-on-the-arduino-host-shield-part>
+2. _Tomoyuki Tanaka_ for releasing his code for the Arduino USB Host shield connected to the wiimote: <http://www.circuitsathome.com/mcu/rc-car-controlled-by-wii-remote-on-arduino>
+
+Also a big thanks all the people behind these sites about the Motion controller:
+
+* <http://thp.io/2010/psmove/>
+* <http://www.copenhagengamecollective.org/unimove/>
+* <https://github.com/thp/psmoveapi>
+* <http://code.google.com/p/moveonpc/>
+
+### Xbox Libraries
+
+The library supports both the original Xbox controller via USB and the Xbox 360 controller both via USB and wirelessly.
+
+#### Xbox library
+
+The [XBOXOLD](XBOXOLD.cpp) class implements support for the original Xbox controller via USB.
+
+All the information are from the following sites:
+
+* <https://github.com/torvalds/linux/blob/master/Documentation/input/xpad.txt>
+* <https://github.com/torvalds/linux/blob/master/drivers/input/joystick/xpad.c>
+* <http://euc.jp/periphs/xbox-controller.ja.html>
+* <https://github.com/Grumbel/xboxdrv/blob/master/PROTOCOL#L15>
+
+#### Xbox 360 Library
+
+The library support one Xbox 360 via USB or up to four Xbox 360 controllers wirelessly by using a [Xbox 360 wireless receiver](http://blog.tkjelectronics.dk/wp-content/uploads/xbox360-wireless-receiver.jpg).
+
+To use it via USB use the [XBOXUSB](XBOXUSB.cpp) library or to use it wirelessly use the [XBOXRECV](XBOXRECV.cpp) library.
+
+__Note that a Wireless controller can NOT be used via USB!__
+
+Examples code can be found in the [examples directory](examples/Xbox).
+
+Also see the following blog posts:
+
+* <http://www.circuitsathome.com/mcu/xbox360-controller-support-added-to-usb-host-shield-2-0-library>
+* <http://blog.tkjelectronics.dk/2012/07/xbox-360-controller-support-added-to-the-usb-host-library/>
+* <http://blog.tkjelectronics.dk/2012/12/xbox-360-receiver-added-to-the-usb-host-library/>
+
+All the information regarding the Xbox 360 controller protocol are form these sites:
+
+* <http://tattiebogle.net/index.php/ProjectRoot/Xbox360Controller/UsbInfo>
+* <http://tattiebogle.net/index.php/ProjectRoot/Xbox360Controller/WirelessUsbInfo>
+* <https://github.com/Grumbel/xboxdrv/blob/master/PROTOCOL>
+
+#### Xbox ONE Library
+
+An Xbox ONE controller is supported via USB in the [XBOXONE](XBOXONE.cpp) class. It is heavily based on the 360 library above. In addition to cross referencing the above, information on the protocol was found at:
+
+* <https://github.com/quantus/xbox-one-controller-protocol>
+* <https://github.com/torvalds/linux/blob/master/drivers/input/joystick/xpad.c>
+* <https://github.com/kylelemons/xbox/blob/master/xbox.go>
+
+### [Wii library](Wii.cpp)
+
+The [Wii](Wii.cpp) library support the Wiimote, but also the Nunchuch and Motion Plus extensions via Bluetooth. The Wii U Pro Controller and Wii Balance Board are also supported via Bluetooth.
+
+First you have to pair with the controller, this is done automatically by the library if you create the instance like so:
+
+```C++
+WII Wii(&Btd, PAIR);
+```
+
+And then press 1 & 2 at once on the Wiimote or the SYNC buttons if you are using a Wii U Pro Controller or a Wii Balance Board.
+
+After that you can simply create the instance like so:
+
+```C++
+WII Wii(&Btd);
+```
+
+Then just press any button on the Wiimote and it will then connect to the dongle.
+
+Take a look at the example for more information: [Wii.ino](examples/Bluetooth/Wii/Wii.ino).
+
+Also take a look at the blog post:
+
+* <http://blog.tkjelectronics.dk/2012/08/wiimote-added-to-usb-host-library/>
+
+The Wii IR camera can also be used, but you will have to activate the code for it manually as it is quite large. Simply set ```ENABLE_WII_IR_CAMERA``` to 1 in [settings.h](settings.h).
+
+The [WiiIRCamera.ino](examples/Bluetooth/WiiIRCamera/WiiIRCamera.ino) example shows how it can be used.
+
+All the information about the Wii controllers are from these sites:
+
+* <http://wiibrew.org/wiki/Wiimote>
+* <http://wiibrew.org/wiki/Wiimote/Extension_Controllers>
+* <http://wiibrew.org/wiki/Wiimote/Extension_Controllers/Nunchuck>
+* <http://wiibrew.org/wiki/Wiimote/Extension_Controllers/Wii_Motion_Plus>
+* <http://wiibrew.org/wiki/Wii_Balance_Board>
+* The old library created by _Tomoyuki Tanaka_: <https://github.com/moyuchin/WiiRemote_on_Arduino> also helped a lot.
+
+### [PS Buzz Library](PSBuzz.cpp)
+
+This library implements support for the Playstation Buzz controllers via USB.
+
+It is essentially just a wrapper around the [HIDUniversal](hiduniversal.cpp) which takes care of the initializing and reading of the controllers. The [PSBuzz](PSBuzz.cpp) class simply inherits this and parses the data, so it is easy for users to read the buttons and turn the big red button on the controllers on and off.
+
+The example [PSBuzz.ino](examples/PSBuzz/PSBuzz.ino) shows how one can do this with just a few lines of code.
+
+More information about the controller can be found at the following sites:
+
+* http://www.developerfusion.com/article/84338/making-usb-c-friendly/
+* https://github.com/torvalds/linux/blob/master/drivers/hid/hid-sony.c
+
+# Interface modifications
+
+The shield is using SPI for communicating with the MAX3421E USB host controller. It uses the SCK, MISO and MOSI pins via the ICSP on your board.
+
+Note this means that it uses pin 13, 12, 11 on an Arduino Uno, so these pins can not be used for anything else than SPI communication!
+
+Furthermore it uses one pin as SS and one INT pin. These are by default located on pin 10 and 9 respectively. They can easily be reconfigured in case you need to use them for something else by cutting the jumper on the shield and then solder a wire from the pad to the new pin.
+
+After that you need modify the following entry in [UsbCore.h](UsbCore.h):
+
+```C++
+typedef MAX3421e<P10, P9> MAX3421E;
+```
+
+For instance if you have rerouted SS to pin 7 it should read:
+
+```C++
+typedef MAX3421e<P7, P9> MAX3421E;
+```
+
+See the "Interface modifications" section in the [hardware manual](https://www.circuitsathome.com/usb-host-shield-hardware-manual) for more information.
+
+# FAQ
+
+> When I plug my device into the USB connector nothing happens?
+
+* Try to connect a external power supply to the Arduino - this solves the problem in most cases.
+* You can also use a powered hub between the device and the USB Host Shield. You should then include the USB hub library: ```#include <usbhub.h>``` and create the instance like so: ```USBHub Hub1(&Usb);```.
+
+> When I connecting my PS3 controller I get a output like this:
+
+```
+Dualshock 3 Controller Enabled
+
+LeftHatX: 0 LeftHatY: 0 RightHatX: 0 RightHatY: 0
+LeftHatX: 0 LeftHatY: 0 RightHatX: 0 RightHatY: 0
+LeftHatX: 0 LeftHatY: 0 RightHatX: 0 RightHatY: 0
+LeftHatX: 0 LeftHatY: 0 RightHatX: 0 RightHatY: 0
+LeftHatX: 0 LeftHatY: 0 RightHatX: 0 RightHatY: 0
+```
+
+* This means that your dongle does not support 2.0+EDR, so you will need another dongle. Please see the following [list](https://github.com/felis/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/wiki/Bluetooth-dongles) for tested working dongles.
+
+> When compiling I am getting the following error: "fatal error: SPI.h: No such file or directory".
+
+* Please make sure to include the SPI library like so: ```#include <SPI.h>``` in your .ino file.
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/SPP.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/SPP.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0f4ee5e98
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/SPP.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,829 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2012 Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics. All rights reserved.
+
+ This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+ General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+ Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+ this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+ on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+ the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+ Contact information
+ -------------------
+
+ Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics
+ Web      :  http://www.tkjelectronics.com
+ e-mail   :  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#include "SPP.h"
+// To enable serial debugging see "settings.h"
+//#define EXTRADEBUG // Uncomment to get even more debugging data
+//#define PRINTREPORT // Uncomment to print the report sent to the Arduino
+
+/*
+ * CRC (reversed crc) lookup table as calculated by the table generator in ETSI TS 101 369 V6.3.0.
+ */
+const uint8_t rfcomm_crc_table[256] PROGMEM = {/* reversed, 8-bit, poly=0x07 */
+        0x00, 0x91, 0xE3, 0x72, 0x07, 0x96, 0xE4, 0x75, 0x0E, 0x9F, 0xED, 0x7C, 0x09, 0x98, 0xEA, 0x7B,
+        0x1C, 0x8D, 0xFF, 0x6E, 0x1B, 0x8A, 0xF8, 0x69, 0x12, 0x83, 0xF1, 0x60, 0x15, 0x84, 0xF6, 0x67,
+        0x38, 0xA9, 0xDB, 0x4A, 0x3F, 0xAE, 0xDC, 0x4D, 0x36, 0xA7, 0xD5, 0x44, 0x31, 0xA0, 0xD2, 0x43,
+        0x24, 0xB5, 0xC7, 0x56, 0x23, 0xB2, 0xC0, 0x51, 0x2A, 0xBB, 0xC9, 0x58, 0x2D, 0xBC, 0xCE, 0x5F,
+        0x70, 0xE1, 0x93, 0x02, 0x77, 0xE6, 0x94, 0x05, 0x7E, 0xEF, 0x9D, 0x0C, 0x79, 0xE8, 0x9A, 0x0B,
+        0x6C, 0xFD, 0x8F, 0x1E, 0x6B, 0xFA, 0x88, 0x19, 0x62, 0xF3, 0x81, 0x10, 0x65, 0xF4, 0x86, 0x17,
+        0x48, 0xD9, 0xAB, 0x3A, 0x4F, 0xDE, 0xAC, 0x3D, 0x46, 0xD7, 0xA5, 0x34, 0x41, 0xD0, 0xA2, 0x33,
+        0x54, 0xC5, 0xB7, 0x26, 0x53, 0xC2, 0xB0, 0x21, 0x5A, 0xCB, 0xB9, 0x28, 0x5D, 0xCC, 0xBE, 0x2F,
+        0xE0, 0x71, 0x03, 0x92, 0xE7, 0x76, 0x04, 0x95, 0xEE, 0x7F, 0x0D, 0x9C, 0xE9, 0x78, 0x0A, 0x9B,
+        0xFC, 0x6D, 0x1F, 0x8E, 0xFB, 0x6A, 0x18, 0x89, 0xF2, 0x63, 0x11, 0x80, 0xF5, 0x64, 0x16, 0x87,
+        0xD8, 0x49, 0x3B, 0xAA, 0xDF, 0x4E, 0x3C, 0xAD, 0xD6, 0x47, 0x35, 0xA4, 0xD1, 0x40, 0x32, 0xA3,
+        0xC4, 0x55, 0x27, 0xB6, 0xC3, 0x52, 0x20, 0xB1, 0xCA, 0x5B, 0x29, 0xB8, 0xCD, 0x5C, 0x2E, 0xBF,
+        0x90, 0x01, 0x73, 0xE2, 0x97, 0x06, 0x74, 0xE5, 0x9E, 0x0F, 0x7D, 0xEC, 0x99, 0x08, 0x7A, 0xEB,
+        0x8C, 0x1D, 0x6F, 0xFE, 0x8B, 0x1A, 0x68, 0xF9, 0x82, 0x13, 0x61, 0xF0, 0x85, 0x14, 0x66, 0xF7,
+        0xA8, 0x39, 0x4B, 0xDA, 0xAF, 0x3E, 0x4C, 0xDD, 0xA6, 0x37, 0x45, 0xD4, 0xA1, 0x30, 0x42, 0xD3,
+        0xB4, 0x25, 0x57, 0xC6, 0xB3, 0x22, 0x50, 0xC1, 0xBA, 0x2B, 0x59, 0xC8, 0xBD, 0x2C, 0x5E, 0xCF
+};
+
+SPP::SPP(BTD *p, const char* name, const char* pin) :
+BluetoothService(p) // Pointer to BTD class instance - mandatory
+{
+        pBtd->btdName = name;
+        pBtd->btdPin = pin;
+
+        /* Set device cid for the SDP and RFCOMM channelse */
+        sdp_dcid[0] = 0x50; // 0x0050
+        sdp_dcid[1] = 0x00;
+        rfcomm_dcid[0] = 0x51; // 0x0051
+        rfcomm_dcid[1] = 0x00;
+
+        Reset();
+}
+
+void SPP::Reset() {
+        connected = false;
+        RFCOMMConnected = false;
+        SDPConnected = false;
+        waitForLastCommand = false;
+        l2cap_sdp_state = L2CAP_SDP_WAIT;
+        l2cap_rfcomm_state = L2CAP_RFCOMM_WAIT;
+        l2cap_event_flag = 0;
+        sppIndex = 0;
+        creditSent = false;
+}
+
+void SPP::disconnect() {
+        connected = false;
+        // First the two L2CAP channels has to be disconnected and then the HCI connection
+        if(RFCOMMConnected)
+                pBtd->l2cap_disconnection_request(hci_handle, ++identifier, rfcomm_scid, rfcomm_dcid);
+        if(RFCOMMConnected && SDPConnected)
+                delay(1); // Add delay between commands
+        if(SDPConnected)
+                pBtd->l2cap_disconnection_request(hci_handle, ++identifier, sdp_scid, sdp_dcid);
+        l2cap_sdp_state = L2CAP_DISCONNECT_RESPONSE;
+}
+
+void SPP::ACLData(uint8_t* l2capinbuf) {
+        if(!connected) {
+                if(l2capinbuf[8] == L2CAP_CMD_CONNECTION_REQUEST) {
+                        if((l2capinbuf[12] | (l2capinbuf[13] << 8)) == SDP_PSM && !pBtd->sdpConnectionClaimed) {
+                                pBtd->sdpConnectionClaimed = true;
+                                hci_handle = pBtd->hci_handle; // Store the HCI Handle for the connection
+                                l2cap_sdp_state = L2CAP_SDP_WAIT; // Reset state
+                        } else if((l2capinbuf[12] | (l2capinbuf[13] << 8)) == RFCOMM_PSM && !pBtd->rfcommConnectionClaimed) {
+                                pBtd->rfcommConnectionClaimed = true;
+                                hci_handle = pBtd->hci_handle; // Store the HCI Handle for the connection
+                                l2cap_rfcomm_state = L2CAP_RFCOMM_WAIT; // Reset state
+                        }
+                }
+        }
+
+        if(checkHciHandle(l2capinbuf, hci_handle)) { // acl_handle_ok
+                if((l2capinbuf[6] | (l2capinbuf[7] << 8)) == 0x0001U) { // l2cap_control - Channel ID for ACL-U
+                        if(l2capinbuf[8] == L2CAP_CMD_COMMAND_REJECT) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nL2CAP Command Rejected - Reason: "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[13], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[12], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" Data: "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[17], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[16], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[15], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[14], 0x80);
+#endif
+                        } else if(l2capinbuf[8] == L2CAP_CMD_CONNECTION_REQUEST) {
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nL2CAP Connection Request - PSM: "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[13], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[12], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" SCID: "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[15], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[14], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" Identifier: "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[9], 0x80);
+#endif
+                                if((l2capinbuf[12] | (l2capinbuf[13] << 8)) == SDP_PSM) { // It doesn't matter if it receives another reqeust, since it waits for the channel to disconnect in the L2CAP_SDP_DONE state, and the l2cap_event_flag will be cleared if so
+                                        identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                        sdp_scid[0] = l2capinbuf[14];
+                                        sdp_scid[1] = l2capinbuf[15];
+                                        l2cap_set_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONNECTION_SDP_REQUEST);
+                                } else if((l2capinbuf[12] | (l2capinbuf[13] << 8)) == RFCOMM_PSM) { // ----- || -----
+                                        identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                        rfcomm_scid[0] = l2capinbuf[14];
+                                        rfcomm_scid[1] = l2capinbuf[15];
+                                        l2cap_set_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONNECTION_RFCOMM_REQUEST);
+                                }
+                        } else if(l2capinbuf[8] == L2CAP_CMD_CONFIG_RESPONSE) {
+                                if((l2capinbuf[16] | (l2capinbuf[17] << 8)) == 0x0000) { // Success
+                                        if(l2capinbuf[12] == sdp_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == sdp_dcid[1]) {
+                                                //Notify(PSTR("\r\nSDP Configuration Complete"), 0x80);
+                                                l2cap_set_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONFIG_SDP_SUCCESS);
+                                        } else if(l2capinbuf[12] == rfcomm_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == rfcomm_dcid[1]) {
+                                                //Notify(PSTR("\r\nRFCOMM Configuration Complete"), 0x80);
+                                                l2cap_set_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONFIG_RFCOMM_SUCCESS);
+                                        }
+                                }
+                        } else if(l2capinbuf[8] == L2CAP_CMD_CONFIG_REQUEST) {
+                                if(l2capinbuf[12] == sdp_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == sdp_dcid[1]) {
+                                        //Notify(PSTR("\r\nSDP Configuration Request"), 0x80);
+                                        pBtd->l2cap_config_response(hci_handle, l2capinbuf[9], sdp_scid);
+                                } else if(l2capinbuf[12] == rfcomm_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == rfcomm_dcid[1]) {
+                                        //Notify(PSTR("\r\nRFCOMM Configuration Request"), 0x80);
+                                        pBtd->l2cap_config_response(hci_handle, l2capinbuf[9], rfcomm_scid);
+                                }
+                        } else if(l2capinbuf[8] == L2CAP_CMD_DISCONNECT_REQUEST) {
+                                if(l2capinbuf[12] == sdp_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == sdp_dcid[1]) {
+                                        //Notify(PSTR("\r\nDisconnect Request: SDP Channel"), 0x80);
+                                        identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                        l2cap_set_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_DISCONNECT_SDP_REQUEST);
+                                } else if(l2capinbuf[12] == rfcomm_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == rfcomm_dcid[1]) {
+                                        //Notify(PSTR("\r\nDisconnect Request: RFCOMM Channel"), 0x80);
+                                        identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                        l2cap_set_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_DISCONNECT_RFCOMM_REQUEST);
+                                }
+                        } else if(l2capinbuf[8] == L2CAP_CMD_DISCONNECT_RESPONSE) {
+                                if(l2capinbuf[12] == sdp_scid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == sdp_scid[1]) {
+                                        //Notify(PSTR("\r\nDisconnect Response: SDP Channel"), 0x80);
+                                        identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                        l2cap_set_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_DISCONNECT_RESPONSE);
+                                } else if(l2capinbuf[12] == rfcomm_scid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == rfcomm_scid[1]) {
+                                        //Notify(PSTR("\r\nDisconnect Response: RFCOMM Channel"), 0x80);
+                                        identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                        l2cap_set_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_DISCONNECT_RESPONSE);
+                                }
+                        } else if(l2capinbuf[8] == L2CAP_CMD_INFORMATION_REQUEST) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nInformation request"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                pBtd->l2cap_information_response(hci_handle, identifier, l2capinbuf[12], l2capinbuf[13]);
+                        }
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+                        else {
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nL2CAP Unknown Signaling Command: "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[8], 0x80);
+                        }
+#endif
+                } else if(l2capinbuf[6] == sdp_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[7] == sdp_dcid[1]) { // SDP
+                        if(l2capinbuf[8] == SDP_SERVICE_SEARCH_ATTRIBUTE_REQUEST_PDU) {
+                                if(((l2capinbuf[16] << 8 | l2capinbuf[17]) == SERIALPORT_UUID) || ((l2capinbuf[16] << 8 | l2capinbuf[17]) == 0x0000 && (l2capinbuf[18] << 8 | l2capinbuf[19]) == SERIALPORT_UUID)) { // Check if it's sending the full UUID, see: https://www.bluetooth.org/Technical/AssignedNumbers/service_discovery.htm, we will just check the first four bytes
+                                        if(firstMessage) {
+                                                serialPortResponse1(l2capinbuf[9], l2capinbuf[10]);
+                                                firstMessage = false;
+                                        } else {
+                                                serialPortResponse2(l2capinbuf[9], l2capinbuf[10]); // Serialport continuation state
+                                                firstMessage = true;
+                                        }
+                                } else if(((l2capinbuf[16] << 8 | l2capinbuf[17]) == L2CAP_UUID) || ((l2capinbuf[16] << 8 | l2capinbuf[17]) == 0x0000 && (l2capinbuf[18] << 8 | l2capinbuf[19]) == L2CAP_UUID)) {
+                                        if(firstMessage) {
+                                                l2capResponse1(l2capinbuf[9], l2capinbuf[10]);
+                                                firstMessage = false;
+                                        } else {
+                                                l2capResponse2(l2capinbuf[9], l2capinbuf[10]); // L2CAP continuation state
+                                                firstMessage = true;
+                                        }
+                                } else
+                                        serviceNotSupported(l2capinbuf[9], l2capinbuf[10]); // The service is not supported
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nUUID: "), 0x80);
+                                uint16_t uuid;
+                                if((l2capinbuf[16] << 8 | l2capinbuf[17]) == 0x0000) // Check if it's sending the UUID as a 128-bit UUID
+                                        uuid = (l2capinbuf[18] << 8 | l2capinbuf[19]);
+                                else // Short UUID
+                                        uuid = (l2capinbuf[16] << 8 | l2capinbuf[17]);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint16_t > (uuid, 0x80);
+
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nLength: "), 0x80);
+                                uint16_t length = l2capinbuf[11] << 8 | l2capinbuf[12];
+                                D_PrintHex<uint16_t > (length, 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nData: "), 0x80);
+                                for(uint8_t i = 0; i < length; i++) {
+                                        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[13 + i], 0x80);
+                                        Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                }
+#endif
+                        }
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+                        else {
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nUnknown PDU: "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[8], 0x80);
+                        }
+#endif
+                } else if(l2capinbuf[6] == rfcomm_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[7] == rfcomm_dcid[1]) { // RFCOMM
+                        rfcommChannel = l2capinbuf[8] & 0xF8;
+                        rfcommDirection = l2capinbuf[8] & 0x04;
+                        rfcommCommandResponse = l2capinbuf[8] & 0x02;
+                        rfcommChannelType = l2capinbuf[9] & 0xEF;
+                        rfcommPfBit = l2capinbuf[9] & 0x10;
+
+                        if(rfcommChannel >> 3 != 0x00)
+                                rfcommChannelConnection = rfcommChannel;
+
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nRFCOMM Channel: "), 0x80);
+                        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (rfcommChannel >> 3, 0x80);
+                        Notify(PSTR(" Direction: "), 0x80);
+                        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (rfcommDirection >> 2, 0x80);
+                        Notify(PSTR(" CommandResponse: "), 0x80);
+                        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (rfcommCommandResponse >> 1, 0x80);
+                        Notify(PSTR(" ChannelType: "), 0x80);
+                        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (rfcommChannelType, 0x80);
+                        Notify(PSTR(" PF_BIT: "), 0x80);
+                        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (rfcommPfBit, 0x80);
+#endif
+                        if(rfcommChannelType == RFCOMM_DISC) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nReceived Disconnect RFCOMM Command on channel: "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (rfcommChannel >> 3, 0x80);
+#endif
+                                connected = false;
+                                sendRfcomm(rfcommChannel, rfcommDirection, rfcommCommandResponse, RFCOMM_UA, rfcommPfBit, rfcommbuf, 0x00); // UA Command
+                        }
+                        if(connected) {
+                                /* Read the incoming message */
+                                if(rfcommChannelType == RFCOMM_UIH && rfcommChannel == rfcommChannelConnection) {
+                                        uint8_t length = l2capinbuf[10] >> 1; // Get length
+                                        uint8_t offset = l2capinbuf[4] - length - 4; // Check if there is credit
+                                        if(checkFcs(&l2capinbuf[8], l2capinbuf[11 + length + offset])) {
+                                                uint8_t i = 0;
+                                                for(; i < length; i++) {
+                                                        if(rfcommAvailable + i >= sizeof (rfcommDataBuffer)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nWarning: Buffer is full!"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                                                break;
+                                                        }
+                                                        rfcommDataBuffer[rfcommAvailable + i] = l2capinbuf[11 + i + offset];
+                                                }
+                                                rfcommAvailable += i;
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nRFCOMM Data Available: "), 0x80);
+                                                Notify(rfcommAvailable, 0x80);
+                                                if(offset) {
+                                                        Notify(PSTR(" - Credit: 0x"), 0x80);
+                                                        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[11], 0x80);
+                                                }
+#endif
+                                        }
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        else
+                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nError in FCS checksum!"), 0x80);
+#endif
+#ifdef PRINTREPORT // Uncomment "#define PRINTREPORT" to print the report send to the Arduino via Bluetooth
+                                        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < length; i++)
+                                                Notifyc(l2capinbuf[i + 11 + offset], 0x80);
+#endif
+                                } else if(rfcommChannelType == RFCOMM_UIH && l2capinbuf[11] == BT_RFCOMM_RPN_CMD) { // UIH Remote Port Negotiation Command
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nReceived UIH Remote Port Negotiation Command"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        rfcommbuf[0] = BT_RFCOMM_RPN_RSP; // Command
+                                        rfcommbuf[1] = l2capinbuf[12]; // Length and shiftet like so: length << 1 | 1
+                                        rfcommbuf[2] = l2capinbuf[13]; // Channel: channel << 1 | 1
+                                        rfcommbuf[3] = l2capinbuf[14]; // Pre difined for Bluetooth, see 5.5.3 of TS 07.10 Adaption for RFCOMM
+                                        rfcommbuf[4] = l2capinbuf[15]; // Priority
+                                        rfcommbuf[5] = l2capinbuf[16]; // Timer
+                                        rfcommbuf[6] = l2capinbuf[17]; // Max Fram Size LSB
+                                        rfcommbuf[7] = l2capinbuf[18]; // Max Fram Size MSB
+                                        rfcommbuf[8] = l2capinbuf[19]; // MaxRatransm.
+                                        rfcommbuf[9] = l2capinbuf[20]; // Number of Frames
+                                        sendRfcomm(rfcommChannel, rfcommDirection, 0, RFCOMM_UIH, rfcommPfBit, rfcommbuf, 0x0A); // UIH Remote Port Negotiation Response
+                                } else if(rfcommChannelType == RFCOMM_UIH && l2capinbuf[11] == BT_RFCOMM_MSC_CMD) { // UIH Modem Status Command
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nSend UIH Modem Status Response"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        rfcommbuf[0] = BT_RFCOMM_MSC_RSP; // UIH Modem Status Response
+                                        rfcommbuf[1] = 2 << 1 | 1; // Length and shiftet like so: length << 1 | 1
+                                        rfcommbuf[2] = l2capinbuf[13]; // Channel: (1 << 0) | (1 << 1) | (0 << 2) | (channel << 3)
+                                        rfcommbuf[3] = l2capinbuf[14];
+                                        sendRfcomm(rfcommChannel, rfcommDirection, 0, RFCOMM_UIH, rfcommPfBit, rfcommbuf, 0x04);
+                                }
+                        } else {
+                                if(rfcommChannelType == RFCOMM_SABM) { // SABM Command - this is sent twice: once for channel 0 and then for the channel to establish
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nReceived SABM Command"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        sendRfcomm(rfcommChannel, rfcommDirection, rfcommCommandResponse, RFCOMM_UA, rfcommPfBit, rfcommbuf, 0x00); // UA Command
+                                } else if(rfcommChannelType == RFCOMM_UIH && l2capinbuf[11] == BT_RFCOMM_PN_CMD) { // UIH Parameter Negotiation Command
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nReceived UIH Parameter Negotiation Command"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        rfcommbuf[0] = BT_RFCOMM_PN_RSP; // UIH Parameter Negotiation Response
+                                        rfcommbuf[1] = l2capinbuf[12]; // Length and shiftet like so: length << 1 | 1
+                                        rfcommbuf[2] = l2capinbuf[13]; // Channel: channel << 1 | 1
+                                        rfcommbuf[3] = 0xE0; // Pre difined for Bluetooth, see 5.5.3 of TS 07.10 Adaption for RFCOMM
+                                        rfcommbuf[4] = 0x00; // Priority
+                                        rfcommbuf[5] = 0x00; // Timer
+                                        rfcommbuf[6] = BULK_MAXPKTSIZE - 14; // Max Fram Size LSB - set to the size of received data (50)
+                                        rfcommbuf[7] = 0x00; // Max Fram Size MSB
+                                        rfcommbuf[8] = 0x00; // MaxRatransm.
+                                        rfcommbuf[9] = 0x00; // Number of Frames
+                                        sendRfcomm(rfcommChannel, rfcommDirection, 0, RFCOMM_UIH, rfcommPfBit, rfcommbuf, 0x0A);
+                                } else if(rfcommChannelType == RFCOMM_UIH && l2capinbuf[11] == BT_RFCOMM_MSC_CMD) { // UIH Modem Status Command
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nSend UIH Modem Status Response"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        rfcommbuf[0] = BT_RFCOMM_MSC_RSP; // UIH Modem Status Response
+                                        rfcommbuf[1] = 2 << 1 | 1; // Length and shiftet like so: length << 1 | 1
+                                        rfcommbuf[2] = l2capinbuf[13]; // Channel: (1 << 0) | (1 << 1) | (0 << 2) | (channel << 3)
+                                        rfcommbuf[3] = l2capinbuf[14];
+                                        sendRfcomm(rfcommChannel, rfcommDirection, 0, RFCOMM_UIH, rfcommPfBit, rfcommbuf, 0x04);
+
+                                        delay(1);
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nSend UIH Modem Status Command"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        rfcommbuf[0] = BT_RFCOMM_MSC_CMD; // UIH Modem Status Command
+                                        rfcommbuf[1] = 2 << 1 | 1; // Length and shiftet like so: length << 1 | 1
+                                        rfcommbuf[2] = l2capinbuf[13]; // Channel: (1 << 0) | (1 << 1) | (0 << 2) | (channel << 3)
+                                        rfcommbuf[3] = 0x8D; // Can receive frames (YES), Ready to Communicate (YES), Ready to Receive (YES), Incomig Call (NO), Data is Value (YES)
+
+                                        sendRfcomm(rfcommChannel, rfcommDirection, 0, RFCOMM_UIH, rfcommPfBit, rfcommbuf, 0x04);
+                                } else if(rfcommChannelType == RFCOMM_UIH && l2capinbuf[11] == BT_RFCOMM_MSC_RSP) { // UIH Modem Status Response
+                                        if(!creditSent) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nSend UIH Command with credit"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                                sendRfcommCredit(rfcommChannelConnection, rfcommDirection, 0, RFCOMM_UIH, 0x10, sizeof (rfcommDataBuffer)); // Send credit
+                                                creditSent = true;
+                                                timer = millis();
+                                                waitForLastCommand = true;
+                                        }
+                                } else if(rfcommChannelType == RFCOMM_UIH && l2capinbuf[10] == 0x01) { // UIH Command with credit
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nReceived UIH Command with credit"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                } else if(rfcommChannelType == RFCOMM_UIH && l2capinbuf[11] == BT_RFCOMM_RPN_CMD) { // UIH Remote Port Negotiation Command
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nReceived UIH Remote Port Negotiation Command"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        rfcommbuf[0] = BT_RFCOMM_RPN_RSP; // Command
+                                        rfcommbuf[1] = l2capinbuf[12]; // Length and shiftet like so: length << 1 | 1
+                                        rfcommbuf[2] = l2capinbuf[13]; // Channel: channel << 1 | 1
+                                        rfcommbuf[3] = l2capinbuf[14]; // Pre difined for Bluetooth, see 5.5.3 of TS 07.10 Adaption for RFCOMM
+                                        rfcommbuf[4] = l2capinbuf[15]; // Priority
+                                        rfcommbuf[5] = l2capinbuf[16]; // Timer
+                                        rfcommbuf[6] = l2capinbuf[17]; // Max Fram Size LSB
+                                        rfcommbuf[7] = l2capinbuf[18]; // Max Fram Size MSB
+                                        rfcommbuf[8] = l2capinbuf[19]; // MaxRatransm.
+                                        rfcommbuf[9] = l2capinbuf[20]; // Number of Frames
+                                        sendRfcomm(rfcommChannel, rfcommDirection, 0, RFCOMM_UIH, rfcommPfBit, rfcommbuf, 0x0A); // UIH Remote Port Negotiation Response
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nRFCOMM Connection is now established\r\n"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        onInit();
+                                }
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+                                else if(rfcommChannelType != RFCOMM_DISC) {
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nUnsupported RFCOMM Data - ChannelType: "), 0x80);
+                                        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (rfcommChannelType, 0x80);
+                                        Notify(PSTR(" Command: "), 0x80);
+                                        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[11], 0x80);
+                                }
+#endif
+                        }
+                }
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+                else {
+                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nUnsupported L2CAP Data - Channel ID: "), 0x80);
+                        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[7], 0x80);
+                        Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[6], 0x80);
+                }
+#endif
+                SDP_task();
+                RFCOMM_task();
+        }
+}
+
+void SPP::Run() {
+        if(waitForLastCommand && (millis() - timer) > 100) { // We will only wait 100ms and see if the UIH Remote Port Negotiation Command is send, as some deviced don't send it
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nRFCOMM Connection is now established - Automatic\r\n"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                onInit();
+        }
+        send(); // Send all bytes currently in the buffer
+}
+
+void SPP::onInit() {
+        creditSent = false;
+        waitForLastCommand = false;
+        connected = true; // The RFCOMM channel is now established
+        sppIndex = 0;
+        if(pFuncOnInit)
+                pFuncOnInit(); // Call the user function
+};
+
+void SPP::SDP_task() {
+        switch(l2cap_sdp_state) {
+                case L2CAP_SDP_WAIT:
+                        if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONNECTION_SDP_REQUEST)) {
+                                l2cap_clear_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONNECTION_SDP_REQUEST); // Clear flag
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nSDP Incoming Connection Request"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                pBtd->l2cap_connection_response(hci_handle, identifier, sdp_dcid, sdp_scid, PENDING);
+                                delay(1);
+                                pBtd->l2cap_connection_response(hci_handle, identifier, sdp_dcid, sdp_scid, SUCCESSFUL);
+                                identifier++;
+                                delay(1);
+                                pBtd->l2cap_config_request(hci_handle, identifier, sdp_scid);
+                                l2cap_sdp_state = L2CAP_SDP_SUCCESS;
+                        } else if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_DISCONNECT_SDP_REQUEST)) {
+                                l2cap_clear_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_DISCONNECT_SDP_REQUEST); // Clear flag
+                                SDPConnected = false;
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nDisconnected SDP Channel"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                pBtd->l2cap_disconnection_response(hci_handle, identifier, sdp_dcid, sdp_scid);
+                        }
+                        break;
+                case L2CAP_SDP_SUCCESS:
+                        if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONFIG_SDP_SUCCESS)) {
+                                l2cap_clear_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONFIG_SDP_SUCCESS); // Clear flag
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nSDP Successfully Configured"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                firstMessage = true; // Reset bool
+                                SDPConnected = true;
+                                l2cap_sdp_state = L2CAP_SDP_WAIT;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case L2CAP_DISCONNECT_RESPONSE: // This is for both disconnection response from the RFCOMM and SDP channel if they were connected
+                        if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_DISCONNECT_RESPONSE)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nDisconnected L2CAP Connection"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                pBtd->hci_disconnect(hci_handle);
+                                hci_handle = -1; // Reset handle
+                                Reset();
+                        }
+                        break;
+        }
+}
+
+void SPP::RFCOMM_task() {
+        switch(l2cap_rfcomm_state) {
+                case L2CAP_RFCOMM_WAIT:
+                        if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONNECTION_RFCOMM_REQUEST)) {
+                                l2cap_clear_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONNECTION_RFCOMM_REQUEST); // Clear flag
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nRFCOMM Incoming Connection Request"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                pBtd->l2cap_connection_response(hci_handle, identifier, rfcomm_dcid, rfcomm_scid, PENDING);
+                                delay(1);
+                                pBtd->l2cap_connection_response(hci_handle, identifier, rfcomm_dcid, rfcomm_scid, SUCCESSFUL);
+                                identifier++;
+                                delay(1);
+                                pBtd->l2cap_config_request(hci_handle, identifier, rfcomm_scid);
+                                l2cap_rfcomm_state = L2CAP_RFCOMM_SUCCESS;
+                        } else if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_DISCONNECT_RFCOMM_REQUEST)) {
+                                l2cap_clear_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_DISCONNECT_RFCOMM_REQUEST); // Clear flag
+                                RFCOMMConnected = false;
+                                connected = false;
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nDisconnected RFCOMM Channel"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                pBtd->l2cap_disconnection_response(hci_handle, identifier, rfcomm_dcid, rfcomm_scid);
+                        }
+                        break;
+                case L2CAP_RFCOMM_SUCCESS:
+                        if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONFIG_RFCOMM_SUCCESS)) {
+                                l2cap_clear_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONFIG_RFCOMM_SUCCESS); // Clear flag
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nRFCOMM Successfully Configured"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                rfcommAvailable = 0; // Reset number of bytes available
+                                bytesRead = 0; // Reset number of bytes received
+                                RFCOMMConnected = true;
+                                l2cap_rfcomm_state = L2CAP_RFCOMM_WAIT;
+                        }
+                        break;
+        }
+}
+/************************************************************/
+/*                    SDP Commands                          */
+
+/************************************************************/
+void SPP::SDP_Command(uint8_t* data, uint8_t nbytes) { // See page 223 in the Bluetooth specs
+        pBtd->L2CAP_Command(hci_handle, data, nbytes, sdp_scid[0], sdp_scid[1]);
+}
+
+void SPP::serviceNotSupported(uint8_t transactionIDHigh, uint8_t transactionIDLow) { // See page 235 in the Bluetooth specs
+        l2capoutbuf[0] = SDP_SERVICE_SEARCH_ATTRIBUTE_RESPONSE_PDU;
+        l2capoutbuf[1] = transactionIDHigh;
+        l2capoutbuf[2] = transactionIDLow;
+        l2capoutbuf[3] = 0x00; // MSB Parameter Length
+        l2capoutbuf[4] = 0x05; // LSB Parameter Length = 5
+        l2capoutbuf[5] = 0x00; // MSB AttributeListsByteCount
+        l2capoutbuf[6] = 0x02; // LSB AttributeListsByteCount = 2
+
+        /* Attribute ID/Value Sequence: */
+        l2capoutbuf[7] = 0x35; // Data element sequence - length in next byte
+        l2capoutbuf[8] = 0x00; // Length = 0
+        l2capoutbuf[9] = 0x00; // No continuation state
+
+        SDP_Command(l2capoutbuf, 10);
+}
+
+void SPP::serialPortResponse1(uint8_t transactionIDHigh, uint8_t transactionIDLow) {
+        l2capoutbuf[0] = SDP_SERVICE_SEARCH_ATTRIBUTE_RESPONSE_PDU;
+        l2capoutbuf[1] = transactionIDHigh;
+        l2capoutbuf[2] = transactionIDLow;
+        l2capoutbuf[3] = 0x00; // MSB Parameter Length
+        l2capoutbuf[4] = 0x2B; // LSB Parameter Length = 43
+        l2capoutbuf[5] = 0x00; // MSB AttributeListsByteCount
+        l2capoutbuf[6] = 0x26; // LSB AttributeListsByteCount = 38
+
+        /* Attribute ID/Value Sequence: */
+        l2capoutbuf[7] = 0x36; // Data element sequence - length in next two bytes
+        l2capoutbuf[8] = 0x00; // MSB Length
+        l2capoutbuf[9] = 0x3C; // LSB Length = 60
+
+        l2capoutbuf[10] = 0x36; // Data element sequence - length in next two bytes
+        l2capoutbuf[11] = 0x00; // MSB Length
+        l2capoutbuf[12] = 0x39; // LSB Length = 57
+
+        l2capoutbuf[13] = 0x09; // Unsigned Integer - length 2 bytes
+        l2capoutbuf[14] = 0x00; // MSB ServiceRecordHandle
+        l2capoutbuf[15] = 0x00; // LSB ServiceRecordHandle
+        l2capoutbuf[16] = 0x0A; // Unsigned int - length 4 bytes
+        l2capoutbuf[17] = 0x00; // ServiceRecordHandle value - TODO: Is this related to HCI_Handle?
+        l2capoutbuf[18] = 0x01;
+        l2capoutbuf[19] = 0x00;
+        l2capoutbuf[20] = 0x06;
+
+        l2capoutbuf[21] = 0x09; // Unsigned Integer - length 2 bytes
+        l2capoutbuf[22] = 0x00; // MSB ServiceClassIDList
+        l2capoutbuf[23] = 0x01; // LSB ServiceClassIDList
+        l2capoutbuf[24] = 0x35; // Data element sequence - length in next byte
+        l2capoutbuf[25] = 0x03; // Length = 3
+        l2capoutbuf[26] = 0x19; // UUID (universally unique identifier) - length = 2 bytes
+        l2capoutbuf[27] = 0x11; // MSB SerialPort
+        l2capoutbuf[28] = 0x01; // LSB SerialPort
+
+        l2capoutbuf[29] = 0x09; // Unsigned Integer - length 2 bytes
+        l2capoutbuf[30] = 0x00; // MSB ProtocolDescriptorList
+        l2capoutbuf[31] = 0x04; // LSB ProtocolDescriptorList
+        l2capoutbuf[32] = 0x35; // Data element sequence - length in next byte
+        l2capoutbuf[33] = 0x0C; // Length = 12
+
+        l2capoutbuf[34] = 0x35; // Data element sequence - length in next byte
+        l2capoutbuf[35] = 0x03; // Length = 3
+        l2capoutbuf[36] = 0x19; // UUID (universally unique identifier) - length = 2 bytes
+        l2capoutbuf[37] = 0x01; // MSB L2CAP
+        l2capoutbuf[38] = 0x00; // LSB L2CAP
+
+        l2capoutbuf[39] = 0x35; // Data element sequence - length in next byte
+        l2capoutbuf[40] = 0x05; // Length = 5
+        l2capoutbuf[41] = 0x19; // UUID (universally unique identifier) - length = 2 bytes
+        l2capoutbuf[42] = 0x00; // MSB RFCOMM
+        l2capoutbuf[43] = 0x03; // LSB RFCOMM
+        l2capoutbuf[44] = 0x08; // Unsigned Integer - length 1 byte
+
+        l2capoutbuf[45] = 0x02; // ContinuationState - Two more bytes
+        l2capoutbuf[46] = 0x00; // MSB length
+        l2capoutbuf[47] = 0x19; // LSB length = 25 more bytes to come
+
+        SDP_Command(l2capoutbuf, 48);
+}
+
+void SPP::serialPortResponse2(uint8_t transactionIDHigh, uint8_t transactionIDLow) {
+        l2capoutbuf[0] = SDP_SERVICE_SEARCH_ATTRIBUTE_RESPONSE_PDU;
+        l2capoutbuf[1] = transactionIDHigh;
+        l2capoutbuf[2] = transactionIDLow;
+        l2capoutbuf[3] = 0x00; // MSB Parameter Length
+        l2capoutbuf[4] = 0x1C; // LSB Parameter Length = 28
+        l2capoutbuf[5] = 0x00; // MSB AttributeListsByteCount
+        l2capoutbuf[6] = 0x19; // LSB AttributeListsByteCount = 25
+
+        /* Attribute ID/Value Sequence: */
+        l2capoutbuf[7] = 0x01; // Channel 1 - TODO: Try different values, so multiple servers can be used at once
+
+        l2capoutbuf[8] = 0x09; // Unsigned Integer - length 2 bytes
+        l2capoutbuf[9] = 0x00; // MSB LanguageBaseAttributeIDList
+        l2capoutbuf[10] = 0x06; // LSB LanguageBaseAttributeIDList
+        l2capoutbuf[11] = 0x35; // Data element sequence - length in next byte
+        l2capoutbuf[12] = 0x09; // Length = 9
+
+        // Identifier representing the natural language = en = English - see: "ISO 639:1988"
+        l2capoutbuf[13] = 0x09; // Unsigned Integer - length 2 bytes
+        l2capoutbuf[14] = 0x65; // 'e'
+        l2capoutbuf[15] = 0x6E; // 'n'
+
+        // "The second element of each triplet contains an identifier that specifies a character encoding used for the language"
+        // Encoding is set to 106 (UTF-8) - see: http://www.iana.org/assignments/character-sets/character-sets.xhtml
+        l2capoutbuf[16] = 0x09; // Unsigned Integer - length 2 bytes
+        l2capoutbuf[17] = 0x00; // MSB of character encoding
+        l2capoutbuf[18] = 0x6A; // LSB of character encoding (106)
+
+        // Attribute ID that serves as the base attribute ID for the natural language in the service record
+        // "To facilitate the retrieval of human-readable universal attributes in a principal language, the base attribute ID value for the primary language supported by a service record shall be 0x0100"
+        l2capoutbuf[19] = 0x09; // Unsigned Integer - length 2 bytes
+        l2capoutbuf[20] = 0x01;
+        l2capoutbuf[21] = 0x00;
+
+        l2capoutbuf[22] = 0x09; // Unsigned Integer - length 2 bytes
+        l2capoutbuf[23] = 0x01; // MSB ServiceDescription
+        l2capoutbuf[24] = 0x00; // LSB ServiceDescription
+
+        l2capoutbuf[25] = 0x25; // Text string - length in next byte
+        l2capoutbuf[26] = 0x05; // Name length
+        l2capoutbuf[27] = 'T';
+        l2capoutbuf[28] = 'K';
+        l2capoutbuf[29] = 'J';
+        l2capoutbuf[30] = 'S';
+        l2capoutbuf[31] = 'P';
+        l2capoutbuf[32] = 0x00; // No continuation state
+
+        SDP_Command(l2capoutbuf, 33);
+}
+
+void SPP::l2capResponse1(uint8_t transactionIDHigh, uint8_t transactionIDLow) {
+        serialPortResponse1(transactionIDHigh, transactionIDLow); // These has to send all the supported functions, since it only supports virtual serialport it just sends the message again
+}
+
+void SPP::l2capResponse2(uint8_t transactionIDHigh, uint8_t transactionIDLow) {
+        serialPortResponse2(transactionIDHigh, transactionIDLow); // Same data as serialPortResponse2
+}
+/************************************************************/
+/*                    RFCOMM Commands                       */
+
+/************************************************************/
+void SPP::RFCOMM_Command(uint8_t* data, uint8_t nbytes) {
+        pBtd->L2CAP_Command(hci_handle, data, nbytes, rfcomm_scid[0], rfcomm_scid[1]);
+}
+
+void SPP::sendRfcomm(uint8_t channel, uint8_t direction, uint8_t CR, uint8_t channelType, uint8_t pfBit, uint8_t* data, uint8_t length) {
+        l2capoutbuf[0] = channel | direction | CR | extendAddress; // RFCOMM Address
+        l2capoutbuf[1] = channelType | pfBit; // RFCOMM Control
+        l2capoutbuf[2] = length << 1 | 0x01; // Length and format (always 0x01 bytes format)
+        uint8_t i = 0;
+        for(; i < length; i++)
+                l2capoutbuf[i + 3] = data[i];
+        l2capoutbuf[i + 3] = calcFcs(l2capoutbuf);
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+        Notify(PSTR(" - RFCOMM Data: "), 0x80);
+        for(i = 0; i < length + 4; i++) {
+                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capoutbuf[i], 0x80);
+                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+        }
+#endif
+        RFCOMM_Command(l2capoutbuf, length + 4);
+}
+
+void SPP::sendRfcommCredit(uint8_t channel, uint8_t direction, uint8_t CR, uint8_t channelType, uint8_t pfBit, uint8_t credit) {
+        l2capoutbuf[0] = channel | direction | CR | extendAddress; // RFCOMM Address
+        l2capoutbuf[1] = channelType | pfBit; // RFCOMM Control
+        l2capoutbuf[2] = 0x01; // Length = 0
+        l2capoutbuf[3] = credit; // Credit
+        l2capoutbuf[4] = calcFcs(l2capoutbuf);
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+        Notify(PSTR(" - RFCOMM Credit Data: "), 0x80);
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < 5; i++) {
+                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capoutbuf[i], 0x80);
+                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+        }
+#endif
+        RFCOMM_Command(l2capoutbuf, 5);
+}
+
+/* CRC on 2 bytes */
+uint8_t SPP::crc(uint8_t *data) {
+        return (pgm_read_byte(&rfcomm_crc_table[pgm_read_byte(&rfcomm_crc_table[0xFF ^ data[0]]) ^ data[1]]));
+}
+
+/* Calculate FCS */
+uint8_t SPP::calcFcs(uint8_t *data) {
+        uint8_t temp = crc(data);
+        if((data[1] & 0xEF) == RFCOMM_UIH)
+                return (0xFF - temp); // FCS on 2 bytes
+        else
+                return (0xFF - pgm_read_byte(&rfcomm_crc_table[temp ^ data[2]])); // FCS on 3 bytes
+}
+
+/* Check FCS */
+bool SPP::checkFcs(uint8_t *data, uint8_t fcs) {
+        uint8_t temp = crc(data);
+        if((data[1] & 0xEF) != RFCOMM_UIH)
+                temp = pgm_read_byte(&rfcomm_crc_table[temp ^ data[2]]); // FCS on 3 bytes
+        return (pgm_read_byte(&rfcomm_crc_table[temp ^ fcs]) == 0xCF);
+}
+
+/* Serial commands */
+#if defined(ARDUINO) && ARDUINO >=100
+
+size_t SPP::write(uint8_t data) {
+        return write(&data, 1);
+}
+#else
+
+void SPP::write(uint8_t data) {
+        write(&data, 1);
+}
+#endif
+
+#if defined(ARDUINO) && ARDUINO >=100
+
+size_t SPP::write(const uint8_t *data, size_t size) {
+#else
+
+void SPP::write(const uint8_t *data, size_t size) {
+#endif
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < size; i++) {
+                if(sppIndex >= sizeof (sppOutputBuffer) / sizeof (sppOutputBuffer[0]))
+                        send(); // Send the current data in the buffer
+                sppOutputBuffer[sppIndex++] = data[i]; // All the bytes are put into a buffer and then send using the send() function
+        }
+#if defined(ARDUINO) && ARDUINO >=100
+        return size;
+#endif
+}
+
+void SPP::send() {
+        if(!connected || !sppIndex)
+                return;
+        uint8_t length; // This is the length of the string we are sending
+        uint8_t offset = 0; // This is used to keep track of where we are in the string
+
+        l2capoutbuf[0] = rfcommChannelConnection | 0 | 0 | extendAddress; // RFCOMM Address
+        l2capoutbuf[1] = RFCOMM_UIH; // RFCOMM Control
+
+        while(sppIndex) { // We will run this while loop until this variable is 0
+                if(sppIndex > (sizeof (l2capoutbuf) - 4)) // Check if the string is larger than the outgoing buffer
+                        length = sizeof (l2capoutbuf) - 4;
+                else
+                        length = sppIndex;
+
+                l2capoutbuf[2] = length << 1 | 1; // Length
+                uint8_t i = 0;
+                for(; i < length; i++)
+                        l2capoutbuf[i + 3] = sppOutputBuffer[i + offset];
+                l2capoutbuf[i + 3] = calcFcs(l2capoutbuf); // Calculate checksum
+
+                RFCOMM_Command(l2capoutbuf, length + 4);
+
+                sppIndex -= length;
+                offset += length; // Increment the offset
+        }
+}
+
+int SPP::available(void) {
+        return rfcommAvailable;
+};
+
+void SPP::discard(void) {
+        rfcommAvailable = 0;
+}
+
+int SPP::peek(void) {
+        if(rfcommAvailable == 0) // Don't read if there is nothing in the buffer
+                return -1;
+        return rfcommDataBuffer[0];
+}
+
+int SPP::read(void) {
+        if(rfcommAvailable == 0) // Don't read if there is nothing in the buffer
+                return -1;
+        uint8_t output = rfcommDataBuffer[0];
+        for(uint8_t i = 1; i < rfcommAvailable; i++)
+                rfcommDataBuffer[i - 1] = rfcommDataBuffer[i]; // Shift the buffer one left
+        rfcommAvailable--;
+        bytesRead++;
+        if(bytesRead > (sizeof (rfcommDataBuffer) - 5)) { // We will send the command just before it runs out of credit
+                bytesRead = 0;
+                sendRfcommCredit(rfcommChannelConnection, rfcommDirection, 0, RFCOMM_UIH, 0x10, sizeof (rfcommDataBuffer)); // Send more credit
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nSent "), 0x80);
+                Notify((uint8_t)sizeof (rfcommDataBuffer), 0x80);
+                Notify(PSTR(" more credit"), 0x80);
+#endif
+        }
+        return output;
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/SPP.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/SPP.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..233ac611f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/SPP.h
@@ -0,0 +1,225 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2012 Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics. All rights reserved.
+
+ This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+ General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+ Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+ this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+ on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+ the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+ Contact information
+ -------------------
+
+ Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics
+ Web      :  http://www.tkjelectronics.com
+ e-mail   :  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#ifndef _spp_h_
+#define _spp_h_
+
+#include "BTD.h"
+
+/* Used for SDP */
+#define SDP_SERVICE_SEARCH_ATTRIBUTE_REQUEST_PDU    0x06 // See the RFCOMM specs
+#define SDP_SERVICE_SEARCH_ATTRIBUTE_RESPONSE_PDU   0x07 // See the RFCOMM specs
+#define SERIALPORT_UUID     0x1101 // See http://www.bluetooth.org/Technical/AssignedNumbers/service_discovery.htm
+#define L2CAP_UUID          0x0100
+
+/* Used for RFCOMM */
+#define RFCOMM_SABM     0x2F
+#define RFCOMM_UA       0x63
+#define RFCOMM_UIH      0xEF
+//#define RFCOMM_DM       0x0F
+#define RFCOMM_DISC     0x43
+
+#define extendAddress   0x01 // Always 1
+
+// Multiplexer message types
+#define BT_RFCOMM_PN_CMD     0x83
+#define BT_RFCOMM_PN_RSP     0x81
+#define BT_RFCOMM_MSC_CMD    0xE3
+#define BT_RFCOMM_MSC_RSP    0xE1
+#define BT_RFCOMM_RPN_CMD    0x93
+#define BT_RFCOMM_RPN_RSP    0x91
+/*
+#define BT_RFCOMM_TEST_CMD   0x23
+#define BT_RFCOMM_TEST_RSP   0x21
+#define BT_RFCOMM_FCON_CMD   0xA3
+#define BT_RFCOMM_FCON_RSP   0xA1
+#define BT_RFCOMM_FCOFF_CMD  0x63
+#define BT_RFCOMM_FCOFF_RSP  0x61
+#define BT_RFCOMM_RLS_CMD    0x53
+#define BT_RFCOMM_RLS_RSP    0x51
+#define BT_RFCOMM_NSC_RSP    0x11
+ */
+
+/**
+ * This BluetoothService class implements the Serial Port Protocol (SPP).
+ * It inherits the Arduino Stream class. This allows it to use all the standard Arduino print and stream functions.
+ */
+class SPP : public BluetoothService, public Stream {
+public:
+        /**
+         * Constructor for the SPP class.
+         * @param  p   Pointer to BTD class instance.
+         * @param  name   Set the name to BTD#btdName. If argument is omitted, then "Arduino" will be used.
+         * @param  pin   Write the pin to BTD#btdPin. If argument is omitted, then "0000" will be used.
+         */
+        SPP(BTD *p, const char *name = "Arduino", const char *pin = "0000");
+
+        /** @name BluetoothService implementation */
+        /** Used this to disconnect the virtual serial port. */
+        void disconnect();
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /**
+         * Used to provide Boolean tests for the class.
+         * @return Return true if SPP communication is connected.
+         */
+        operator bool() {
+                return connected;
+        }
+        /** Variable used to indicate if the connection is established. */
+        bool connected;
+
+        /** @name Serial port profile (SPP) Print functions */
+        /**
+         * Get number of bytes waiting to be read.
+         * @return Return the number of bytes ready to be read.
+         */
+        int available(void);
+
+        /** Send out all bytes in the buffer. */
+        void flush(void) {
+                send();
+        };
+        /**
+         * Used to read the next value in the buffer without advancing to the next one.
+         * @return Return the byte. Will return -1 if no bytes are available.
+         */
+        int peek(void);
+        /**
+         * Used to read the buffer.
+         * @return Return the byte. Will return -1 if no bytes are available.
+         */
+        int read(void);
+
+#if defined(ARDUINO) && ARDUINO >=100
+        /**
+         * Writes the byte to send to a buffer. The message is send when either send() or after Usb.Task() is called.
+         * @param  data The byte to write.
+         * @return      Return the number of bytes written.
+         */
+        size_t write(uint8_t data);
+        /**
+         * Writes the bytes to send to a buffer. The message is send when either send() or after Usb.Task() is called.
+         * @param  data The data array to send.
+         * @param  size Size of the data.
+         * @return      Return the number of bytes written.
+         */
+        size_t write(const uint8_t* data, size_t size);
+        /** Pull in write(const char *str) from Print */
+        using Print::write;
+#else
+        /**
+         * Writes the byte to send to a buffer. The message is send when either send() or after Usb.Task() is called.
+         * @param  data The byte to write.
+         */
+        void write(uint8_t data);
+        /**
+         * Writes the bytes to send to a buffer. The message is send when either send() or after Usb.Task() is called.
+         * @param data The data array to send.
+         * @param size Size of the data.
+         */
+        void write(const uint8_t* data, size_t size);
+#endif
+
+        /** Discard all the bytes in the buffer. */
+        void discard(void);
+        /**
+         * This will send all the bytes in the buffer.
+         * This is called whenever Usb.Task() is called,
+         * but can also be called via this function.
+         */
+        void send(void);
+        /**@}*/
+
+protected:
+        /** @name BluetoothService implementation */
+        /**
+         * Used to pass acldata to the services.
+         * @param ACLData Incoming acldata.
+         */
+        void ACLData(uint8_t* ACLData);
+        /** Used to establish the connection automatically. */
+        void Run();
+        /** Use this to reset the service. */
+        void Reset();
+        /**
+         * Called when a device is successfully initialized.
+         * Use attachOnInit(void (*funcOnInit)(void)) to call your own function.
+         * This is useful for instance if you want to set the LEDs in a specific way.
+         */
+        void onInit();
+        /**@}*/
+
+private:
+        /* Set true when a channel is created */
+        bool SDPConnected;
+        bool RFCOMMConnected;
+
+        /* Variables used by L2CAP state machines */
+        uint8_t l2cap_sdp_state;
+        uint8_t l2cap_rfcomm_state;
+
+        uint8_t l2capoutbuf[BULK_MAXPKTSIZE]; // General purpose buffer for l2cap out data
+        uint8_t rfcommbuf[10]; // Buffer for RFCOMM Commands
+
+        /* L2CAP Channels */
+        uint8_t sdp_scid[2]; // L2CAP source CID for SDP
+        uint8_t sdp_dcid[2]; // 0x0050
+        uint8_t rfcomm_scid[2]; // L2CAP source CID for RFCOMM
+        uint8_t rfcomm_dcid[2]; // 0x0051
+
+        /* RFCOMM Variables */
+        uint8_t rfcommChannel;
+        uint8_t rfcommChannelConnection; // This is the channel the SPP channel will be running at
+        uint8_t rfcommDirection;
+        uint8_t rfcommCommandResponse;
+        uint8_t rfcommChannelType;
+        uint8_t rfcommPfBit;
+
+        uint32_t timer;
+        bool waitForLastCommand;
+        bool creditSent;
+
+        uint8_t rfcommDataBuffer[100]; // Create a 100 sized buffer for incoming data
+        uint8_t sppOutputBuffer[100]; // Create a 100 sized buffer for outgoing SPP data
+        uint8_t sppIndex;
+        uint8_t rfcommAvailable;
+
+        bool firstMessage; // Used to see if it's the first SDP request received
+        uint8_t bytesRead; // Counter to see when it's time to send more credit
+
+        /* State machines */
+        void SDP_task(); // SDP state machine
+        void RFCOMM_task(); // RFCOMM state machine
+
+        /* SDP Commands */
+        void SDP_Command(uint8_t *data, uint8_t nbytes);
+        void serviceNotSupported(uint8_t transactionIDHigh, uint8_t transactionIDLow);
+        void serialPortResponse1(uint8_t transactionIDHigh, uint8_t transactionIDLow);
+        void serialPortResponse2(uint8_t transactionIDHigh, uint8_t transactionIDLow);
+        void l2capResponse1(uint8_t transactionIDHigh, uint8_t transactionIDLow);
+        void l2capResponse2(uint8_t transactionIDHigh, uint8_t transactionIDLow);
+
+        /* RFCOMM Commands */
+        void RFCOMM_Command(uint8_t *data, uint8_t nbytes);
+        void sendRfcomm(uint8_t channel, uint8_t direction, uint8_t CR, uint8_t channelType, uint8_t pfBit, uint8_t *data, uint8_t length);
+        void sendRfcommCredit(uint8_t channel, uint8_t direction, uint8_t CR, uint8_t channelType, uint8_t pfBit, uint8_t credit);
+        uint8_t calcFcs(uint8_t *data);
+        bool checkFcs(uint8_t *data, uint8_t fcs);
+        uint8_t crc(uint8_t *data);
+};
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/Usb.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/Usb.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..14272588a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/Usb.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,812 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+/* USB functions */
+
+#include "Usb.h"
+
+static uint8_t usb_error = 0;
+static uint8_t usb_task_state;
+
+/* constructor */
+USB::USB() : bmHubPre(0) {
+        usb_task_state = USB_DETACHED_SUBSTATE_INITIALIZE; //set up state machine
+        init();
+}
+
+/* Initialize data structures */
+void USB::init() {
+        //devConfigIndex = 0;
+        bmHubPre = 0;
+}
+
+uint8_t USB::getUsbTaskState(void) {
+        return ( usb_task_state);
+}
+
+void USB::setUsbTaskState(uint8_t state) {
+        usb_task_state = state;
+}
+
+EpInfo* USB::getEpInfoEntry(uint8_t addr, uint8_t ep) {
+        UsbDevice *p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(addr);
+
+        if(!p || !p->epinfo)
+                return NULL;
+
+        EpInfo *pep = p->epinfo;
+
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < p->epcount; i++) {
+                if((pep)->epAddr == ep)
+                        return pep;
+
+                pep++;
+        }
+        return NULL;
+}
+
+/* set device table entry */
+
+/* each device is different and has different number of endpoints. This function plugs endpoint record structure, defined in application, to devtable */
+uint8_t USB::setEpInfoEntry(uint8_t addr, uint8_t epcount, EpInfo* eprecord_ptr) {
+        if(!eprecord_ptr)
+                return USB_ERROR_INVALID_ARGUMENT;
+
+        UsbDevice *p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(addr);
+
+        if(!p)
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+
+        p->address.devAddress = addr;
+        p->epinfo = eprecord_ptr;
+        p->epcount = epcount;
+
+        return 0;
+}
+
+uint8_t USB::SetAddress(uint8_t addr, uint8_t ep, EpInfo **ppep, uint16_t *nak_limit) {
+        UsbDevice *p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(addr);
+
+        if(!p)
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+
+        if(!p->epinfo)
+                return USB_ERROR_EPINFO_IS_NULL;
+
+        *ppep = getEpInfoEntry(addr, ep);
+
+        if(!*ppep)
+                return USB_ERROR_EP_NOT_FOUND_IN_TBL;
+
+        *nak_limit = (0x0001UL << (((*ppep)->bmNakPower > USB_NAK_MAX_POWER) ? USB_NAK_MAX_POWER : (*ppep)->bmNakPower));
+        (*nak_limit)--;
+        /*
+          USBTRACE2("\r\nAddress: ", addr);
+          USBTRACE2(" EP: ", ep);
+          USBTRACE2(" NAK Power: ",(*ppep)->bmNakPower);
+          USBTRACE2(" NAK Limit: ", nak_limit);
+          USBTRACE("\r\n");
+         */
+        regWr(rPERADDR, addr); //set peripheral address
+
+        uint8_t mode = regRd(rMODE);
+
+        //Serial.print("\r\nMode: ");
+        //Serial.println( mode, HEX);
+        //Serial.print("\r\nLS: ");
+        //Serial.println(p->lowspeed, HEX);
+
+
+
+        // Set bmLOWSPEED and bmHUBPRE in case of low-speed device, reset them otherwise
+        regWr(rMODE, (p->lowspeed) ? mode | bmLOWSPEED | bmHubPre : mode & ~(bmHUBPRE | bmLOWSPEED));
+
+        return 0;
+}
+
+/* Control transfer. Sets address, endpoint, fills control packet with necessary data, dispatches control packet, and initiates bulk IN transfer,   */
+/* depending on request. Actual requests are defined as inlines                                                                                      */
+/* return codes:                */
+/* 00       =   success         */
+
+/* 01-0f    =   non-zero HRSLT  */
+uint8_t USB::ctrlReq(uint8_t addr, uint8_t ep, uint8_t bmReqType, uint8_t bRequest, uint8_t wValLo, uint8_t wValHi,
+        uint16_t wInd, uint16_t total, uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t* dataptr, USBReadParser *p) {
+        bool direction = false; //request direction, IN or OUT
+        uint8_t rcode;
+        SETUP_PKT setup_pkt;
+
+        EpInfo *pep = NULL;
+        uint16_t nak_limit = 0;
+
+        rcode = SetAddress(addr, ep, &pep, &nak_limit);
+
+        if(rcode)
+                return rcode;
+
+        direction = ((bmReqType & 0x80) > 0);
+
+        /* fill in setup packet */
+        setup_pkt.ReqType_u.bmRequestType = bmReqType;
+        setup_pkt.bRequest = bRequest;
+        setup_pkt.wVal_u.wValueLo = wValLo;
+        setup_pkt.wVal_u.wValueHi = wValHi;
+        setup_pkt.wIndex = wInd;
+        setup_pkt.wLength = total;
+
+        bytesWr(rSUDFIFO, 8, (uint8_t*) & setup_pkt); //transfer to setup packet FIFO
+
+        rcode = dispatchPkt(tokSETUP, ep, nak_limit); //dispatch packet
+
+        if(rcode) //return HRSLT if not zero
+                return ( rcode);
+
+        if(dataptr != NULL) //data stage, if present
+        {
+                if(direction) //IN transfer
+                {
+                        uint16_t left = total;
+
+                        pep->bmRcvToggle = 1; //bmRCVTOG1;
+
+                        while(left) {
+                                // Bytes read into buffer
+                                uint16_t read = nbytes;
+                                //uint16_t read = (left<nbytes) ? left : nbytes;
+
+                                rcode = InTransfer(pep, nak_limit, &read, dataptr);
+                                if(rcode == hrTOGERR) {
+                                        // yes, we flip it wrong here so that next time it is actually correct!
+                                        pep->bmRcvToggle = (regRd(rHRSL) & bmSNDTOGRD) ? 0 : 1;
+                                        continue;
+                                }
+
+                                if(rcode)
+                                        return rcode;
+
+                                // Invoke callback function if inTransfer completed successfully and callback function pointer is specified
+                                if(!rcode && p)
+                                        ((USBReadParser*)p)->Parse(read, dataptr, total - left);
+
+                                left -= read;
+
+                                if(read < nbytes)
+                                        break;
+                        }
+                } else //OUT transfer
+                {
+                        pep->bmSndToggle = 1; //bmSNDTOG1;
+                        rcode = OutTransfer(pep, nak_limit, nbytes, dataptr);
+                }
+                if(rcode) //return error
+                        return ( rcode);
+        }
+        // Status stage
+        return dispatchPkt((direction) ? tokOUTHS : tokINHS, ep, nak_limit); //GET if direction
+}
+
+/* IN transfer to arbitrary endpoint. Assumes PERADDR is set. Handles multiple packets if necessary. Transfers 'nbytes' bytes. */
+/* Keep sending INs and writes data to memory area pointed by 'data'                                                           */
+
+/* rcode 0 if no errors. rcode 01-0f is relayed from dispatchPkt(). Rcode f0 means RCVDAVIRQ error,
+            fe USB xfer timeout */
+uint8_t USB::inTransfer(uint8_t addr, uint8_t ep, uint16_t *nbytesptr, uint8_t* data) {
+        EpInfo *pep = NULL;
+        uint16_t nak_limit = 0;
+
+        uint8_t rcode = SetAddress(addr, ep, &pep, &nak_limit);
+
+        if(rcode) {
+                USBTRACE3("(USB::InTransfer) SetAddress Failed ", rcode, 0x81);
+                USBTRACE3("(USB::InTransfer) addr requested ", addr, 0x81);
+                USBTRACE3("(USB::InTransfer) ep requested ", ep, 0x81);
+                return rcode;
+        }
+        return InTransfer(pep, nak_limit, nbytesptr, data);
+}
+
+uint8_t USB::InTransfer(EpInfo *pep, uint16_t nak_limit, uint16_t *nbytesptr, uint8_t* data) {
+        uint8_t rcode = 0;
+        uint8_t pktsize;
+
+        uint16_t nbytes = *nbytesptr;
+        //printf("Requesting %i bytes ", nbytes);
+        uint8_t maxpktsize = pep->maxPktSize;
+
+        *nbytesptr = 0;
+        regWr(rHCTL, (pep->bmRcvToggle) ? bmRCVTOG1 : bmRCVTOG0); //set toggle value
+
+        // use a 'break' to exit this loop
+        while(1) {
+                rcode = dispatchPkt(tokIN, pep->epAddr, nak_limit); //IN packet to EP-'endpoint'. Function takes care of NAKS.
+                if(rcode == hrTOGERR) {
+                        // yes, we flip it wrong here so that next time it is actually correct!
+                        pep->bmRcvToggle = (regRd(rHRSL) & bmRCVTOGRD) ? 0 : 1;
+                        regWr(rHCTL, (pep->bmRcvToggle) ? bmRCVTOG1 : bmRCVTOG0); //set toggle value
+                        continue;
+                }
+                if(rcode) {
+                        //printf(">>>>>>>> Problem! dispatchPkt %2.2x\r\n", rcode);
+                        break; //should be 0, indicating ACK. Else return error code.
+                }
+                /* check for RCVDAVIRQ and generate error if not present */
+                /* the only case when absence of RCVDAVIRQ makes sense is when toggle error occurred. Need to add handling for that */
+                if((regRd(rHIRQ) & bmRCVDAVIRQ) == 0) {
+                        //printf(">>>>>>>> Problem! NO RCVDAVIRQ!\r\n");
+                        rcode = 0xf0; //receive error
+                        break;
+                }
+                pktsize = regRd(rRCVBC); //number of received bytes
+                //printf("Got %i bytes \r\n", pktsize);
+                // This would be OK, but...
+                //assert(pktsize <= nbytes);
+                if(pktsize > nbytes) {
+                        // This can happen. Use of assert on Arduino locks up the Arduino.
+                        // So I will trim the value, and hope for the best.
+                        //printf(">>>>>>>> Problem! Wanted %i bytes but got %i.\r\n", nbytes, pktsize);
+                        pktsize = nbytes;
+                }
+
+                int16_t mem_left = (int16_t)nbytes - *((int16_t*)nbytesptr);
+
+                if(mem_left < 0)
+                        mem_left = 0;
+
+                data = bytesRd(rRCVFIFO, ((pktsize > mem_left) ? mem_left : pktsize), data);
+
+                regWr(rHIRQ, bmRCVDAVIRQ); // Clear the IRQ & free the buffer
+                *nbytesptr += pktsize; // add this packet's byte count to total transfer length
+
+                /* The transfer is complete under two conditions:           */
+                /* 1. The device sent a short packet (L.T. maxPacketSize)   */
+                /* 2. 'nbytes' have been transferred.                       */
+                if((pktsize < maxpktsize) || (*nbytesptr >= nbytes)) // have we transferred 'nbytes' bytes?
+                {
+                        // Save toggle value
+                        pep->bmRcvToggle = ((regRd(rHRSL) & bmRCVTOGRD)) ? 1 : 0;
+                        //printf("\r\n");
+                        rcode = 0;
+                        break;
+                } // if
+        } //while( 1 )
+        return ( rcode);
+}
+
+/* OUT transfer to arbitrary endpoint. Handles multiple packets if necessary. Transfers 'nbytes' bytes. */
+/* Handles NAK bug per Maxim Application Note 4000 for single buffer transfer   */
+
+/* rcode 0 if no errors. rcode 01-0f is relayed from HRSL                       */
+uint8_t USB::outTransfer(uint8_t addr, uint8_t ep, uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t* data) {
+        EpInfo *pep = NULL;
+        uint16_t nak_limit = 0;
+
+        uint8_t rcode = SetAddress(addr, ep, &pep, &nak_limit);
+
+        if(rcode)
+                return rcode;
+
+        return OutTransfer(pep, nak_limit, nbytes, data);
+}
+
+uint8_t USB::OutTransfer(EpInfo *pep, uint16_t nak_limit, uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t *data) {
+        uint8_t rcode = hrSUCCESS, retry_count;
+        uint8_t *data_p = data; //local copy of the data pointer
+        uint16_t bytes_tosend, nak_count;
+        uint16_t bytes_left = nbytes;
+
+        uint8_t maxpktsize = pep->maxPktSize;
+
+        if(maxpktsize < 1 || maxpktsize > 64)
+                return USB_ERROR_INVALID_MAX_PKT_SIZE;
+
+        unsigned long timeout = millis() + USB_XFER_TIMEOUT;
+
+        regWr(rHCTL, (pep->bmSndToggle) ? bmSNDTOG1 : bmSNDTOG0); //set toggle value
+
+        while(bytes_left) {
+                retry_count = 0;
+                nak_count = 0;
+                bytes_tosend = (bytes_left >= maxpktsize) ? maxpktsize : bytes_left;
+                bytesWr(rSNDFIFO, bytes_tosend, data_p); //filling output FIFO
+                regWr(rSNDBC, bytes_tosend); //set number of bytes
+                regWr(rHXFR, (tokOUT | pep->epAddr)); //dispatch packet
+                while(!(regRd(rHIRQ) & bmHXFRDNIRQ)); //wait for the completion IRQ
+                regWr(rHIRQ, bmHXFRDNIRQ); //clear IRQ
+                rcode = (regRd(rHRSL) & 0x0f);
+
+                while(rcode && ((long)(millis() - timeout) < 0L)) {
+                        switch(rcode) {
+                                case hrNAK:
+                                        nak_count++;
+                                        if(nak_limit && (nak_count == nak_limit))
+                                                goto breakout;
+                                        //return ( rcode);
+                                        break;
+                                case hrTIMEOUT:
+                                        retry_count++;
+                                        if(retry_count == USB_RETRY_LIMIT)
+                                                goto breakout;
+                                        //return ( rcode);
+                                        break;
+                                case hrTOGERR:
+                                        // yes, we flip it wrong here so that next time it is actually correct!
+                                        pep->bmSndToggle = (regRd(rHRSL) & bmSNDTOGRD) ? 0 : 1;
+                                        regWr(rHCTL, (pep->bmSndToggle) ? bmSNDTOG1 : bmSNDTOG0); //set toggle value
+                                        break;
+                                default:
+                                        goto breakout;
+                        }//switch( rcode
+
+                        /* process NAK according to Host out NAK bug */
+                        regWr(rSNDBC, 0);
+                        regWr(rSNDFIFO, *data_p);
+                        regWr(rSNDBC, bytes_tosend);
+                        regWr(rHXFR, (tokOUT | pep->epAddr)); //dispatch packet
+                        while(!(regRd(rHIRQ) & bmHXFRDNIRQ)); //wait for the completion IRQ
+                        regWr(rHIRQ, bmHXFRDNIRQ); //clear IRQ
+                        rcode = (regRd(rHRSL) & 0x0f);
+                }//while( rcode && ....
+                bytes_left -= bytes_tosend;
+                data_p += bytes_tosend;
+        }//while( bytes_left...
+breakout:
+
+        pep->bmSndToggle = (regRd(rHRSL) & bmSNDTOGRD) ? 1 : 0; //bmSNDTOG1 : bmSNDTOG0;  //update toggle
+        return ( rcode); //should be 0 in all cases
+}
+/* dispatch USB packet. Assumes peripheral address is set and relevant buffer is loaded/empty       */
+/* If NAK, tries to re-send up to nak_limit times                                                   */
+/* If nak_limit == 0, do not count NAKs, exit after timeout                                         */
+/* If bus timeout, re-sends up to USB_RETRY_LIMIT times                                             */
+
+/* return codes 0x00-0x0f are HRSLT( 0x00 being success ), 0xff means timeout                       */
+uint8_t USB::dispatchPkt(uint8_t token, uint8_t ep, uint16_t nak_limit) {
+        unsigned long timeout = millis() + USB_XFER_TIMEOUT;
+        uint8_t tmpdata;
+        uint8_t rcode = hrSUCCESS;
+        uint8_t retry_count = 0;
+        uint16_t nak_count = 0;
+
+        while((long)(millis() - timeout) < 0L) {
+                regWr(rHXFR, (token | ep)); //launch the transfer
+                rcode = USB_ERROR_TRANSFER_TIMEOUT;
+
+                while((long)(millis() - timeout) < 0L) //wait for transfer completion
+                {
+                        tmpdata = regRd(rHIRQ);
+
+                        if(tmpdata & bmHXFRDNIRQ) {
+                                regWr(rHIRQ, bmHXFRDNIRQ); //clear the interrupt
+                                rcode = 0x00;
+                                break;
+                        }//if( tmpdata & bmHXFRDNIRQ
+
+                }//while ( millis() < timeout
+
+                //if (rcode != 0x00) //exit if timeout
+                //        return ( rcode);
+
+                rcode = (regRd(rHRSL) & 0x0f); //analyze transfer result
+
+                switch(rcode) {
+                        case hrNAK:
+                                nak_count++;
+                                if(nak_limit && (nak_count == nak_limit))
+                                        return (rcode);
+                                break;
+                        case hrTIMEOUT:
+                                retry_count++;
+                                if(retry_count == USB_RETRY_LIMIT)
+                                        return (rcode);
+                                break;
+                        default:
+                                return (rcode);
+                }//switch( rcode
+
+        }//while( timeout > millis()
+        return ( rcode);
+}
+
+/* USB main task. Performs enumeration/cleanup */
+void USB::Task(void) //USB state machine
+{
+        uint8_t rcode;
+        uint8_t tmpdata;
+        static unsigned long delay = 0;
+        //USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR buf;
+        bool lowspeed = false;
+
+        MAX3421E::Task();
+
+        tmpdata = getVbusState();
+
+        /* modify USB task state if Vbus changed */
+        switch(tmpdata) {
+                case SE1: //illegal state
+                        usb_task_state = USB_DETACHED_SUBSTATE_ILLEGAL;
+                        lowspeed = false;
+                        break;
+                case SE0: //disconnected
+                        if((usb_task_state & USB_STATE_MASK) != USB_STATE_DETACHED)
+                                usb_task_state = USB_DETACHED_SUBSTATE_INITIALIZE;
+                        lowspeed = false;
+                        break;
+                case LSHOST:
+
+                        lowspeed = true;
+                        //intentional fallthrough
+                case FSHOST: //attached
+                        if((usb_task_state & USB_STATE_MASK) == USB_STATE_DETACHED) {
+                                delay = millis() + USB_SETTLE_DELAY;
+                                usb_task_state = USB_ATTACHED_SUBSTATE_SETTLE;
+                        }
+                        break;
+        }// switch( tmpdata
+
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < USB_NUMDEVICES; i++)
+                if(devConfig[i])
+                        rcode = devConfig[i]->Poll();
+
+        switch(usb_task_state) {
+                case USB_DETACHED_SUBSTATE_INITIALIZE:
+                        init();
+
+                        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < USB_NUMDEVICES; i++)
+                                if(devConfig[i])
+                                        rcode = devConfig[i]->Release();
+
+                        usb_task_state = USB_DETACHED_SUBSTATE_WAIT_FOR_DEVICE;
+                        break;
+                case USB_DETACHED_SUBSTATE_WAIT_FOR_DEVICE: //just sit here
+                        break;
+                case USB_DETACHED_SUBSTATE_ILLEGAL: //just sit here
+                        break;
+                case USB_ATTACHED_SUBSTATE_SETTLE: //settle time for just attached device
+                        if((long)(millis() - delay) >= 0L)
+                                usb_task_state = USB_ATTACHED_SUBSTATE_RESET_DEVICE;
+                        else break; // don't fall through
+                case USB_ATTACHED_SUBSTATE_RESET_DEVICE:
+                        regWr(rHCTL, bmBUSRST); //issue bus reset
+                        usb_task_state = USB_ATTACHED_SUBSTATE_WAIT_RESET_COMPLETE;
+                        break;
+                case USB_ATTACHED_SUBSTATE_WAIT_RESET_COMPLETE:
+                        if((regRd(rHCTL) & bmBUSRST) == 0) {
+                                tmpdata = regRd(rMODE) | bmSOFKAENAB; //start SOF generation
+                                regWr(rMODE, tmpdata);
+                                usb_task_state = USB_ATTACHED_SUBSTATE_WAIT_SOF;
+                                //delay = millis() + 20; //20ms wait after reset per USB spec
+                        }
+                        break;
+                case USB_ATTACHED_SUBSTATE_WAIT_SOF: //todo: change check order
+                        if(regRd(rHIRQ) & bmFRAMEIRQ) {
+                                //when first SOF received _and_ 20ms has passed we can continue
+                                /*
+                                if (delay < millis()) //20ms passed
+                                        usb_task_state = USB_STATE_CONFIGURING;
+                                 */
+                                usb_task_state = USB_ATTACHED_SUBSTATE_WAIT_RESET;
+                                delay = millis() + 20;
+                        }
+                        break;
+                case USB_ATTACHED_SUBSTATE_WAIT_RESET:
+                        if((long)(millis() - delay) >= 0L) usb_task_state = USB_STATE_CONFIGURING;
+                        else break; // don't fall through
+                case USB_STATE_CONFIGURING:
+
+                        //Serial.print("\r\nConf.LS: ");
+                        //Serial.println(lowspeed, HEX);
+
+                        rcode = Configuring(0, 0, lowspeed);
+
+                        if(rcode) {
+                                if(rcode != USB_DEV_CONFIG_ERROR_DEVICE_INIT_INCOMPLETE) {
+                                        usb_error = rcode;
+                                        usb_task_state = USB_STATE_ERROR;
+                                }
+                        } else
+                                usb_task_state = USB_STATE_RUNNING;
+                        break;
+                case USB_STATE_RUNNING:
+                        break;
+                case USB_STATE_ERROR:
+                        //MAX3421E::Init();
+                        break;
+        } // switch( usb_task_state )
+}
+
+uint8_t USB::DefaultAddressing(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed) {
+        //uint8_t                buf[12];
+        uint8_t rcode;
+        UsbDevice *p0 = NULL, *p = NULL;
+
+        // Get pointer to pseudo device with address 0 assigned
+        p0 = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(0);
+
+        if(!p0)
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+
+        if(!p0->epinfo)
+                return USB_ERROR_EPINFO_IS_NULL;
+
+        p0->lowspeed = (lowspeed) ? true : false;
+
+        // Allocate new address according to device class
+        uint8_t bAddress = addrPool.AllocAddress(parent, false, port);
+
+        if(!bAddress)
+                return USB_ERROR_OUT_OF_ADDRESS_SPACE_IN_POOL;
+
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(bAddress);
+
+        if(!p)
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+
+        // Assign new address to the device
+        rcode = setAddr(0, 0, bAddress);
+
+        if(rcode) {
+                addrPool.FreeAddress(bAddress);
+                bAddress = 0;
+                return rcode;
+        }
+        return 0;
+};
+
+uint8_t USB::AttemptConfig(uint8_t driver, uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed) {
+        //printf("AttemptConfig: parent = %i, port = %i\r\n", parent, port);
+        uint8_t retries = 0;
+
+again:
+        uint8_t rcode = devConfig[driver]->ConfigureDevice(parent, port, lowspeed);
+        if(rcode == USB_ERROR_CONFIG_REQUIRES_ADDITIONAL_RESET) {
+                if(parent == 0) {
+                        // Send a bus reset on the root interface.
+                        regWr(rHCTL, bmBUSRST); //issue bus reset
+                        delay(102); // delay 102ms, compensate for clock inaccuracy.
+                } else {
+                        // reset parent port
+                        devConfig[parent]->ResetHubPort(port);
+                }
+        } else if(rcode == hrJERR && retries < 3) { // Some devices returns this when plugged in - trying to initialize the device again usually works
+                delay(100);
+                retries++;
+                goto again;
+        } else if(rcode)
+                return rcode;
+
+        rcode = devConfig[driver]->Init(parent, port, lowspeed);
+        if(rcode == hrJERR && retries < 3) { // Some devices returns this when plugged in - trying to initialize the device again usually works
+                delay(100);
+                retries++;
+                goto again;
+        }
+        if(rcode) {
+                // Issue a bus reset, because the device may be in a limbo state
+                if(parent == 0) {
+                        // Send a bus reset on the root interface.
+                        regWr(rHCTL, bmBUSRST); //issue bus reset
+                        delay(102); // delay 102ms, compensate for clock inaccuracy.
+                } else {
+                        // reset parent port
+                        devConfig[parent]->ResetHubPort(port);
+                }
+        }
+        return rcode;
+}
+
+/*
+ * This is broken. We need to enumerate differently.
+ * It causes major problems with several devices if detected in an unexpected order.
+ *
+ *
+ * Oleg - I wouldn't do anything before the newly connected device is considered sane.
+ * i.e.(delays are not indicated for brevity):
+ * 1. reset
+ * 2. GetDevDescr();
+ * 3a. If ACK, continue with allocating address, addressing, etc.
+ * 3b. Else reset again, count resets, stop at some number (5?).
+ * 4. When max.number of resets is reached, toggle power/fail
+ * If desired, this could be modified by performing two resets with GetDevDescr() in the middle - however, from my experience, if a device answers to GDD()
+ * it doesn't need to be reset again
+ * New steps proposal:
+ * 1: get address pool instance. exit on fail
+ * 2: pUsb->getDevDescr(0, 0, constBufSize, (uint8_t*)buf). exit on fail.
+ * 3: bus reset, 100ms delay
+ * 4: set address
+ * 5: pUsb->setEpInfoEntry(bAddress, 1, epInfo), exit on fail
+ * 6: while (configurations) {
+ *              for(each configuration) {
+ *                      for (each driver) {
+ *                              6a: Ask device if it likes configuration. Returns 0 on OK.
+ *                                      If successful, the driver configured device.
+ *                                      The driver now owns the endpoints, and takes over managing them.
+ *                                      The following will need codes:
+ *                                          Everything went well, instance consumed, exit with success.
+ *                                          Instance already in use, ignore it, try next driver.
+ *                                          Not a supported device, ignore it, try next driver.
+ *                                          Not a supported configuration for this device, ignore it, try next driver.
+ *                                          Could not configure device, fatal, exit with fail.
+ *                      }
+ *              }
+ *    }
+ * 7: for(each driver) {
+ *      7a: Ask device if it knows this VID/PID. Acts exactly like 6a, but using VID/PID
+ * 8: if we get here, no driver likes the device plugged in, so exit failure.
+ *
+ */
+uint8_t USB::Configuring(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed) {
+        //uint8_t bAddress = 0;
+        //printf("Configuring: parent = %i, port = %i\r\n", parent, port);
+        uint8_t devConfigIndex;
+        uint8_t rcode = 0;
+        uint8_t buf[sizeof (USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR)];
+        USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR *udd = reinterpret_cast<USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR *>(buf);
+        UsbDevice *p = NULL;
+        EpInfo *oldep_ptr = NULL;
+        EpInfo epInfo;
+
+        epInfo.epAddr = 0;
+        epInfo.maxPktSize = 8;
+        epInfo.epAttribs = 0;
+        epInfo.bmNakPower = USB_NAK_MAX_POWER;
+
+        //delay(2000);
+        AddressPool &addrPool = GetAddressPool();
+        // Get pointer to pseudo device with address 0 assigned
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(0);
+        if(!p) {
+                //printf("Configuring error: USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL\r\n");
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+        }
+
+        // Save old pointer to EP_RECORD of address 0
+        oldep_ptr = p->epinfo;
+
+        // Temporary assign new pointer to epInfo to p->epinfo in order to
+        // avoid toggle inconsistence
+
+        p->epinfo = &epInfo;
+
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+        // Get device descriptor
+        rcode = getDevDescr(0, 0, sizeof (USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR), (uint8_t*)buf);
+
+        // Restore p->epinfo
+        p->epinfo = oldep_ptr;
+
+        if(rcode) {
+                //printf("Configuring error: Can't get USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR\r\n");
+                return rcode;
+        }
+
+        // to-do?
+        // Allocate new address according to device class
+        //bAddress = addrPool.AllocAddress(parent, false, port);
+
+        uint16_t vid = udd->idVendor;
+        uint16_t pid = udd->idProduct;
+        uint8_t klass = udd->bDeviceClass;
+        uint8_t subklass = udd->bDeviceSubClass;
+        // Attempt to configure if VID/PID or device class matches with a driver
+        // Qualify with subclass too.
+        //
+        // VID/PID & class tests default to false for drivers not yet ported
+        // subclass defaults to true, so you don't have to define it if you don't have to.
+        //
+        for(devConfigIndex = 0; devConfigIndex < USB_NUMDEVICES; devConfigIndex++) {
+                if(!devConfig[devConfigIndex]) continue; // no driver
+                if(devConfig[devConfigIndex]->GetAddress()) continue; // consumed
+                if(devConfig[devConfigIndex]->DEVSUBCLASSOK(subklass) && (devConfig[devConfigIndex]->VIDPIDOK(vid, pid) || devConfig[devConfigIndex]->DEVCLASSOK(klass))) {
+                        rcode = AttemptConfig(devConfigIndex, parent, port, lowspeed);
+                        if(rcode != USB_DEV_CONFIG_ERROR_DEVICE_NOT_SUPPORTED)
+                                break;
+                }
+        }
+
+        if(devConfigIndex < USB_NUMDEVICES) {
+                return rcode;
+        }
+
+
+        // blindly attempt to configure
+        for(devConfigIndex = 0; devConfigIndex < USB_NUMDEVICES; devConfigIndex++) {
+                if(!devConfig[devConfigIndex]) continue;
+                if(devConfig[devConfigIndex]->GetAddress()) continue; // consumed
+                if(devConfig[devConfigIndex]->DEVSUBCLASSOK(subklass) && (devConfig[devConfigIndex]->VIDPIDOK(vid, pid) || devConfig[devConfigIndex]->DEVCLASSOK(klass))) continue; // If this is true it means it must have returned USB_DEV_CONFIG_ERROR_DEVICE_NOT_SUPPORTED above
+                rcode = AttemptConfig(devConfigIndex, parent, port, lowspeed);
+
+                //printf("ERROR ENUMERATING %2.2x\r\n", rcode);
+                if(!(rcode == USB_DEV_CONFIG_ERROR_DEVICE_NOT_SUPPORTED || rcode == USB_ERROR_CLASS_INSTANCE_ALREADY_IN_USE)) {
+                        // in case of an error dev_index should be reset to 0
+                        //                in order to start from the very beginning the
+                        //                next time the program gets here
+                        //if (rcode != USB_DEV_CONFIG_ERROR_DEVICE_INIT_INCOMPLETE)
+                        //        devConfigIndex = 0;
+                        return rcode;
+                }
+        }
+        // if we get here that means that the device class is not supported by any of registered classes
+        rcode = DefaultAddressing(parent, port, lowspeed);
+
+        return rcode;
+}
+
+uint8_t USB::ReleaseDevice(uint8_t addr) {
+        if(!addr)
+                return 0;
+
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < USB_NUMDEVICES; i++) {
+                if(!devConfig[i]) continue;
+                if(devConfig[i]->GetAddress() == addr)
+                        return devConfig[i]->Release();
+        }
+        return 0;
+}
+
+#if 1 //!defined(USB_METHODS_INLINE)
+//get device descriptor
+
+uint8_t USB::getDevDescr(uint8_t addr, uint8_t ep, uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t* dataptr) {
+        return ( ctrlReq(addr, ep, bmREQ_GET_DESCR, USB_REQUEST_GET_DESCRIPTOR, 0x00, USB_DESCRIPTOR_DEVICE, 0x0000, nbytes, nbytes, dataptr, NULL));
+}
+//get configuration descriptor
+
+uint8_t USB::getConfDescr(uint8_t addr, uint8_t ep, uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t conf, uint8_t* dataptr) {
+        return ( ctrlReq(addr, ep, bmREQ_GET_DESCR, USB_REQUEST_GET_DESCRIPTOR, conf, USB_DESCRIPTOR_CONFIGURATION, 0x0000, nbytes, nbytes, dataptr, NULL));
+}
+
+/* Requests Configuration Descriptor. Sends two Get Conf Descr requests. The first one gets the total length of all descriptors, then the second one requests this
+ total length. The length of the first request can be shorter ( 4 bytes ), however, there are devices which won't work unless this length is set to 9 */
+uint8_t USB::getConfDescr(uint8_t addr, uint8_t ep, uint8_t conf, USBReadParser *p) {
+        const uint8_t bufSize = 64;
+        uint8_t buf[bufSize];
+        USB_CONFIGURATION_DESCRIPTOR *ucd = reinterpret_cast<USB_CONFIGURATION_DESCRIPTOR *>(buf);
+
+        uint8_t ret = getConfDescr(addr, ep, 9, conf, buf);
+
+        if(ret)
+                return ret;
+
+        uint16_t total = ucd->wTotalLength;
+
+        //USBTRACE2("\r\ntotal conf.size:", total);
+
+        return ( ctrlReq(addr, ep, bmREQ_GET_DESCR, USB_REQUEST_GET_DESCRIPTOR, conf, USB_DESCRIPTOR_CONFIGURATION, 0x0000, total, bufSize, buf, p));
+}
+
+//get string descriptor
+
+uint8_t USB::getStrDescr(uint8_t addr, uint8_t ep, uint16_t ns, uint8_t index, uint16_t langid, uint8_t* dataptr) {
+        return ( ctrlReq(addr, ep, bmREQ_GET_DESCR, USB_REQUEST_GET_DESCRIPTOR, index, USB_DESCRIPTOR_STRING, langid, ns, ns, dataptr, NULL));
+}
+//set address
+
+uint8_t USB::setAddr(uint8_t oldaddr, uint8_t ep, uint8_t newaddr) {
+        uint8_t rcode = ctrlReq(oldaddr, ep, bmREQ_SET, USB_REQUEST_SET_ADDRESS, newaddr, 0x00, 0x0000, 0x0000, 0x0000, NULL, NULL);
+        //delay(2); //per USB 2.0 sect.9.2.6.3
+        delay(300); // Older spec says you should wait at least 200ms
+        return rcode;
+        //return ( ctrlReq(oldaddr, ep, bmREQ_SET, USB_REQUEST_SET_ADDRESS, newaddr, 0x00, 0x0000, 0x0000, 0x0000, NULL, NULL));
+}
+//set configuration
+
+uint8_t USB::setConf(uint8_t addr, uint8_t ep, uint8_t conf_value) {
+        return ( ctrlReq(addr, ep, bmREQ_SET, USB_REQUEST_SET_CONFIGURATION, conf_value, 0x00, 0x0000, 0x0000, 0x0000, NULL, NULL));
+}
+
+#endif // defined(USB_METHODS_INLINE)
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/Usb.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/Usb.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..47bd626cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/Usb.h
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+/* USB functions */
+#ifndef _usb_h_
+#define _usb_h_
+
+// WARNING: Do not change the order of includes, or stuff will break!
+#include <inttypes.h>
+#include <stddef.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+
+// None of these should ever be included by a driver, or a user's sketch.
+#include "settings.h"
+#include "printhex.h"
+#include "message.h"
+#include "hexdump.h"
+#include "sink_parser.h"
+#include "max3421e.h"
+#include "address.h"
+#include "avrpins.h"
+#include "usb_ch9.h"
+#include "usbhost.h"
+#include "UsbCore.h"
+#include "parsetools.h"
+#include "confdescparser.h"
+
+#endif //_usb_h_
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/UsbCore.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/UsbCore.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5c6c77101
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/UsbCore.h
@@ -0,0 +1,298 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+
+#if !defined(_usb_h_) || defined(USBCORE_H)
+#error "Never include UsbCore.h directly; include Usb.h instead"
+#else
+#define USBCORE_H
+
+// Not used anymore? If anyone uses this, please let us know so that this may be
+// moved to the proper place, settings.h.
+//#define USB_METHODS_INLINE
+
+/* shield pins. First parameter - SS pin, second parameter - INT pin */
+#ifdef BOARD_BLACK_WIDDOW
+typedef MAX3421e<P6, P3> MAX3421E; // Black Widow
+#elif defined(CORE_TEENSY) && (defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__))
+#if EXT_RAM
+typedef MAX3421e<P20, P7> MAX3421E; // Teensy++ 2.0 with XMEM2
+#else
+typedef MAX3421e<P9, P8> MAX3421E; // Teensy++ 1.0 and 2.0
+#endif
+#elif defined(BOARD_MEGA_ADK)
+typedef MAX3421e<P53, P54> MAX3421E; // Arduino Mega ADK
+#elif defined(ARDUINO_AVR_BALANDUINO)
+typedef MAX3421e<P20, P19> MAX3421E; // Balanduino
+#elif defined(__ARDUINO_X86__) && PLATFORM_ID == 0x06
+typedef MAX3421e<P3, P2> MAX3421E; // The Intel Galileo supports much faster read and write speed at pin 2 and 3
+#else
+typedef MAX3421e<P10, P9> MAX3421E; // Official Arduinos (UNO, Duemilanove, Mega, 2560, Leonardo, Due etc.), Intel Edison, Intel Galileo 2 or Teensy 2.0 and 3.0
+#endif
+
+/* Common setup data constant combinations  */
+#define bmREQ_GET_DESCR     USB_SETUP_DEVICE_TO_HOST|USB_SETUP_TYPE_STANDARD|USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_DEVICE     //get descriptor request type
+#define bmREQ_SET           USB_SETUP_HOST_TO_DEVICE|USB_SETUP_TYPE_STANDARD|USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_DEVICE     //set request type for all but 'set feature' and 'set interface'
+#define bmREQ_CL_GET_INTF   USB_SETUP_DEVICE_TO_HOST|USB_SETUP_TYPE_CLASS|USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_INTERFACE     //get interface request type
+
+// D7           data transfer direction (0 - host-to-device, 1 - device-to-host)
+// D6-5         Type (0- standard, 1 - class, 2 - vendor, 3 - reserved)
+// D4-0         Recipient (0 - device, 1 - interface, 2 - endpoint, 3 - other, 4..31 - reserved)
+
+// USB Device Classes
+#define USB_CLASS_USE_CLASS_INFO        0x00    // Use Class Info in the Interface Descriptors
+#define USB_CLASS_AUDIO                 0x01    // Audio
+#define USB_CLASS_COM_AND_CDC_CTRL      0x02    // Communications and CDC Control
+#define USB_CLASS_HID                   0x03    // HID
+#define USB_CLASS_PHYSICAL              0x05    // Physical
+#define USB_CLASS_IMAGE                 0x06    // Image
+#define USB_CLASS_PRINTER               0x07    // Printer
+#define USB_CLASS_MASS_STORAGE          0x08    // Mass Storage
+#define USB_CLASS_HUB                   0x09    // Hub
+#define USB_CLASS_CDC_DATA              0x0a    // CDC-Data
+#define USB_CLASS_SMART_CARD            0x0b    // Smart-Card
+#define USB_CLASS_CONTENT_SECURITY      0x0d    // Content Security
+#define USB_CLASS_VIDEO                 0x0e    // Video
+#define USB_CLASS_PERSONAL_HEALTH       0x0f    // Personal Healthcare
+#define USB_CLASS_DIAGNOSTIC_DEVICE     0xdc    // Diagnostic Device
+#define USB_CLASS_WIRELESS_CTRL         0xe0    // Wireless Controller
+#define USB_CLASS_MISC                  0xef    // Miscellaneous
+#define USB_CLASS_APP_SPECIFIC          0xfe    // Application Specific
+#define USB_CLASS_VENDOR_SPECIFIC       0xff    // Vendor Specific
+
+// Additional Error Codes
+#define USB_DEV_CONFIG_ERROR_DEVICE_NOT_SUPPORTED       0xD1
+#define USB_DEV_CONFIG_ERROR_DEVICE_INIT_INCOMPLETE     0xD2
+#define USB_ERROR_UNABLE_TO_REGISTER_DEVICE_CLASS       0xD3
+#define USB_ERROR_OUT_OF_ADDRESS_SPACE_IN_POOL          0xD4
+#define USB_ERROR_HUB_ADDRESS_OVERFLOW                  0xD5
+#define USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL             0xD6
+#define USB_ERROR_EPINFO_IS_NULL                        0xD7
+#define USB_ERROR_INVALID_ARGUMENT                      0xD8
+#define USB_ERROR_CLASS_INSTANCE_ALREADY_IN_USE         0xD9
+#define USB_ERROR_INVALID_MAX_PKT_SIZE                  0xDA
+#define USB_ERROR_EP_NOT_FOUND_IN_TBL                   0xDB
+#define USB_ERROR_CONFIG_REQUIRES_ADDITIONAL_RESET      0xE0
+#define USB_ERROR_FailGetDevDescr                       0xE1
+#define USB_ERROR_FailSetDevTblEntry                    0xE2
+#define USB_ERROR_FailGetConfDescr                      0xE3
+#define USB_ERROR_TRANSFER_TIMEOUT                      0xFF
+
+#define USB_XFER_TIMEOUT        5000    // (5000) USB transfer timeout in milliseconds, per section 9.2.6.1 of USB 2.0 spec
+//#define USB_NAK_LIMIT         32000   // NAK limit for a transfer. 0 means NAKs are not counted
+#define USB_RETRY_LIMIT         3       // 3 retry limit for a transfer
+#define USB_SETTLE_DELAY        200     // settle delay in milliseconds
+
+#define USB_NUMDEVICES          16      //number of USB devices
+//#define HUB_MAX_HUBS          7       // maximum number of hubs that can be attached to the host controller
+#define HUB_PORT_RESET_DELAY    20      // hub port reset delay 10 ms recomended, can be up to 20 ms
+
+/* USB state machine states */
+#define USB_STATE_MASK                                      0xf0
+
+#define USB_STATE_DETACHED                                  0x10
+#define USB_DETACHED_SUBSTATE_INITIALIZE                    0x11
+#define USB_DETACHED_SUBSTATE_WAIT_FOR_DEVICE               0x12
+#define USB_DETACHED_SUBSTATE_ILLEGAL                       0x13
+#define USB_ATTACHED_SUBSTATE_SETTLE                        0x20
+#define USB_ATTACHED_SUBSTATE_RESET_DEVICE                  0x30
+#define USB_ATTACHED_SUBSTATE_WAIT_RESET_COMPLETE           0x40
+#define USB_ATTACHED_SUBSTATE_WAIT_SOF                      0x50
+#define USB_ATTACHED_SUBSTATE_WAIT_RESET                    0x51
+#define USB_ATTACHED_SUBSTATE_GET_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE    0x60
+#define USB_STATE_ADDRESSING                                0x70
+#define USB_STATE_CONFIGURING                               0x80
+#define USB_STATE_RUNNING                                   0x90
+#define USB_STATE_ERROR                                     0xa0
+
+class USBDeviceConfig {
+public:
+
+        virtual uint8_t Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed) {
+                return 0;
+        }
+
+        virtual uint8_t ConfigureDevice(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed) {
+                return 0;
+        }
+
+        virtual uint8_t Release() {
+                return 0;
+        }
+
+        virtual uint8_t Poll() {
+                return 0;
+        }
+
+        virtual uint8_t GetAddress() {
+                return 0;
+        }
+
+        virtual void ResetHubPort(uint8_t port) {
+                return;
+        } // Note used for hubs only!
+
+        virtual bool VIDPIDOK(uint16_t vid, uint16_t pid) {
+                return false;
+        }
+
+        virtual bool DEVCLASSOK(uint8_t klass) {
+                return false;
+        }
+
+        virtual bool DEVSUBCLASSOK(uint8_t subklass) {
+                return true;
+        }
+
+};
+
+/* USB Setup Packet Structure   */
+typedef struct {
+
+        union { // offset   description
+                uint8_t bmRequestType; //   0      Bit-map of request type
+
+                struct {
+                        uint8_t recipient : 5; //          Recipient of the request
+                        uint8_t type : 2; //          Type of request
+                        uint8_t direction : 1; //          Direction of data X-fer
+                } __attribute__((packed));
+        } ReqType_u;
+        uint8_t bRequest; //   1      Request
+
+        union {
+                uint16_t wValue; //   2      Depends on bRequest
+
+                struct {
+                        uint8_t wValueLo;
+                        uint8_t wValueHi;
+                } __attribute__((packed));
+        } wVal_u;
+        uint16_t wIndex; //   4      Depends on bRequest
+        uint16_t wLength; //   6      Depends on bRequest
+} __attribute__((packed)) SETUP_PKT, *PSETUP_PKT;
+
+
+
+// Base class for incoming data parser
+
+class USBReadParser {
+public:
+        virtual void Parse(const uint16_t len, const uint8_t *pbuf, const uint16_t &offset) = 0;
+};
+
+class USB : public MAX3421E {
+        AddressPoolImpl<USB_NUMDEVICES> addrPool;
+        USBDeviceConfig* devConfig[USB_NUMDEVICES];
+        uint8_t bmHubPre;
+
+public:
+        USB(void);
+
+        void SetHubPreMask() {
+                bmHubPre |= bmHUBPRE;
+        };
+
+        void ResetHubPreMask() {
+                bmHubPre &= (~bmHUBPRE);
+        };
+
+        AddressPool& GetAddressPool() {
+                return (AddressPool&)addrPool;
+        };
+
+        uint8_t RegisterDeviceClass(USBDeviceConfig *pdev) {
+                for(uint8_t i = 0; i < USB_NUMDEVICES; i++) {
+                        if(!devConfig[i]) {
+                                devConfig[i] = pdev;
+                                return 0;
+                        }
+                }
+                return USB_ERROR_UNABLE_TO_REGISTER_DEVICE_CLASS;
+        };
+
+        void ForEachUsbDevice(UsbDeviceHandleFunc pfunc) {
+                addrPool.ForEachUsbDevice(pfunc);
+        };
+        uint8_t getUsbTaskState(void);
+        void setUsbTaskState(uint8_t state);
+
+        EpInfo* getEpInfoEntry(uint8_t addr, uint8_t ep);
+        uint8_t setEpInfoEntry(uint8_t addr, uint8_t epcount, EpInfo* eprecord_ptr);
+
+        /* Control requests */
+        uint8_t getDevDescr(uint8_t addr, uint8_t ep, uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t* dataptr);
+        uint8_t getConfDescr(uint8_t addr, uint8_t ep, uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t conf, uint8_t* dataptr);
+
+        uint8_t getConfDescr(uint8_t addr, uint8_t ep, uint8_t conf, USBReadParser *p);
+
+        uint8_t getStrDescr(uint8_t addr, uint8_t ep, uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t index, uint16_t langid, uint8_t* dataptr);
+        uint8_t setAddr(uint8_t oldaddr, uint8_t ep, uint8_t newaddr);
+        uint8_t setConf(uint8_t addr, uint8_t ep, uint8_t conf_value);
+        /**/
+        uint8_t ctrlData(uint8_t addr, uint8_t ep, uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t* dataptr, bool direction);
+        uint8_t ctrlStatus(uint8_t ep, bool direction, uint16_t nak_limit);
+        uint8_t inTransfer(uint8_t addr, uint8_t ep, uint16_t *nbytesptr, uint8_t* data);
+        uint8_t outTransfer(uint8_t addr, uint8_t ep, uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t* data);
+        uint8_t dispatchPkt(uint8_t token, uint8_t ep, uint16_t nak_limit);
+
+        void Task(void);
+
+        uint8_t DefaultAddressing(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed);
+        uint8_t Configuring(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed);
+        uint8_t ReleaseDevice(uint8_t addr);
+
+        uint8_t ctrlReq(uint8_t addr, uint8_t ep, uint8_t bmReqType, uint8_t bRequest, uint8_t wValLo, uint8_t wValHi,
+                uint16_t wInd, uint16_t total, uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t* dataptr, USBReadParser *p);
+
+private:
+        void init();
+        uint8_t SetAddress(uint8_t addr, uint8_t ep, EpInfo **ppep, uint16_t *nak_limit);
+        uint8_t OutTransfer(EpInfo *pep, uint16_t nak_limit, uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t *data);
+        uint8_t InTransfer(EpInfo *pep, uint16_t nak_limit, uint16_t *nbytesptr, uint8_t *data);
+        uint8_t AttemptConfig(uint8_t driver, uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed);
+};
+
+#if 0 //defined(USB_METHODS_INLINE)
+//get device descriptor
+
+inline uint8_t USB::getDevDescr(uint8_t addr, uint8_t ep, uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t* dataptr) {
+        return ( ctrlReq(addr, ep, bmREQ_GET_DESCR, USB_REQUEST_GET_DESCRIPTOR, 0x00, USB_DESCRIPTOR_DEVICE, 0x0000, nbytes, dataptr));
+}
+//get configuration descriptor
+
+inline uint8_t USB::getConfDescr(uint8_t addr, uint8_t ep, uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t conf, uint8_t* dataptr) {
+        return ( ctrlReq(addr, ep, bmREQ_GET_DESCR, USB_REQUEST_GET_DESCRIPTOR, conf, USB_DESCRIPTOR_CONFIGURATION, 0x0000, nbytes, dataptr));
+}
+//get string descriptor
+
+inline uint8_t USB::getStrDescr(uint8_t addr, uint8_t ep, uint16_t nuint8_ts, uint8_t index, uint16_t langid, uint8_t* dataptr) {
+        return ( ctrlReq(addr, ep, bmREQ_GET_DESCR, USB_REQUEST_GET_DESCRIPTOR, index, USB_DESCRIPTOR_STRING, langid, nuint8_ts, dataptr));
+}
+//set address
+
+inline uint8_t USB::setAddr(uint8_t oldaddr, uint8_t ep, uint8_t newaddr) {
+        return ( ctrlReq(oldaddr, ep, bmREQ_SET, USB_REQUEST_SET_ADDRESS, newaddr, 0x00, 0x0000, 0x0000, NULL));
+}
+//set configuration
+
+inline uint8_t USB::setConf(uint8_t addr, uint8_t ep, uint8_t conf_value) {
+        return ( ctrlReq(addr, ep, bmREQ_SET, USB_REQUEST_SET_CONFIGURATION, conf_value, 0x00, 0x0000, 0x0000, NULL));
+}
+
+#endif // defined(USB_METHODS_INLINE)
+
+#endif /* USBCORE_H */
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/Wii.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/Wii.cpp
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..4bbf4c91c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/Wii.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,1268 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2012 Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics. All rights reserved.
+
+ This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+ General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+ Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+ this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+ on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+ the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+ Contact information
+ -------------------
+
+ Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics
+ Web      :  http://www.tkjelectronics.com
+ e-mail   :  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+
+ IR camera support added by Allan Glover (adglover9.81@gmail.com) and Kristian Lauszus
+ */
+
+#include "Wii.h"
+// To enable serial debugging see "settings.h"
+//#define EXTRADEBUG // Uncomment to get even more debugging data
+//#define PRINTREPORT // Uncomment to print the report send by the Wii controllers
+
+const uint8_t WII_LEDS[] PROGMEM = {
+        0x00, // OFF
+        0x10, // LED1
+        0x20, // LED2
+        0x40, // LED3
+        0x80, // LED4
+
+        0x90, // LED5
+        0xA0, // LED6
+        0xC0, // LED7
+        0xD0, // LED8
+        0xE0, // LED9
+        0xF0, // LED10
+};
+
+const uint32_t WII_BUTTONS[] PROGMEM = {
+        0x00008, // UP
+        0x00002, // RIGHT
+        0x00004, // DOWN
+        0x00001, // LEFT
+
+        0, // Skip
+        0x00010, // PLUS
+        0x00100, // TWO
+        0x00200, // ONE
+
+        0x01000, // MINUS
+        0x08000, // HOME
+        0x10000, // Z
+        0x20000, // C
+
+        0x00400, // B
+        0x00800, // A
+};
+const uint32_t WII_PROCONTROLLER_BUTTONS[] PROGMEM = {
+        0x00100, // UP
+        0x00080, // RIGHT
+        0x00040, // DOWN
+        0x00200, // LEFT
+
+        0, // Skip
+        0x00004, // PLUS
+        0x20000, // L3
+        0x10000, // R3
+
+        0x00010, // MINUS
+        0x00008, // HOME
+        0, 0, // Skip
+
+        0x04000, // B
+        0x01000, // A
+        0x00800, // X
+        0x02000, // Y
+
+        0x00020, // L
+        0x00002, // R
+        0x08000, // ZL
+        0x00400, // ZR
+};
+
+WII::WII(BTD *p, bool pair) :
+BluetoothService(p) // Pointer to USB class instance - mandatory
+{
+        pBtd->pairWithWii = pair;
+
+        HIDBuffer[0] = 0xA2; // HID BT DATA_request (0xA0) | Report Type (Output 0x02)
+
+        /* Set device cid for the control and intterrupt channelse - LSB */
+        control_dcid[0] = 0x60; // 0x0060
+        control_dcid[1] = 0x00;
+        interrupt_dcid[0] = 0x61; // 0x0061
+        interrupt_dcid[1] = 0x00;
+
+        Reset();
+}
+
+void WII::Reset() {
+        wiimoteConnected = false;
+        nunchuckConnected = false;
+        motionPlusConnected = false;
+        activateNunchuck = false;
+        motionValuesReset = false;
+        activeConnection = false;
+        motionPlusInside = false;
+        pBtd->wiiUProController = false;
+        wiiUProControllerConnected = false;
+        wiiBalanceBoardConnected = false;
+        l2cap_event_flag = 0; // Reset flags
+        l2cap_state = L2CAP_WAIT;
+}
+
+void WII::disconnect() { // Use this void to disconnect any of the controllers
+        if(!motionPlusInside) { // The old Wiimote needs a delay after the first command or it will automatically reconnect
+                if(motionPlusConnected) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nDeactivating Motion Plus"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                        initExtension1(); // This will disable the Motion Plus extension
+                }
+                timer = millis() + 1000; // We have to wait for the message before the rest of the channels can be deactivated
+        } else
+                timer = millis(); // Don't wait
+        // First the HID interrupt channel has to be disconnected, then the HID control channel and finally the HCI connection
+        pBtd->l2cap_disconnection_request(hci_handle, ++identifier, interrupt_scid, interrupt_dcid);
+        Reset();
+        l2cap_state = L2CAP_INTERRUPT_DISCONNECT;
+}
+
+void WII::ACLData(uint8_t* l2capinbuf) {
+        if(!pBtd->l2capConnectionClaimed && pBtd->incomingWii && !wiimoteConnected && !activeConnection) {
+                if(l2capinbuf[8] == L2CAP_CMD_CONNECTION_REQUEST) {
+                        if((l2capinbuf[12] | (l2capinbuf[13] << 8)) == HID_CTRL_PSM) {
+                                motionPlusInside = pBtd->motionPlusInside;
+                                pBtd->incomingWii = false;
+                                pBtd->l2capConnectionClaimed = true; // Claim that the incoming connection belongs to this service
+                                activeConnection = true;
+                                hci_handle = pBtd->hci_handle; // Store the HCI Handle for the connection
+                                l2cap_state = L2CAP_WAIT;
+                        }
+                }
+        }
+
+        if(checkHciHandle(l2capinbuf, hci_handle)) { // acl_handle_ok
+                if((l2capinbuf[6] | (l2capinbuf[7] << 8)) == 0x0001U) { // l2cap_control - Channel ID for ACL-U
+                        if(l2capinbuf[8] == L2CAP_CMD_COMMAND_REJECT) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nL2CAP Command Rejected - Reason: "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[13], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[12], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[17], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[16], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[15], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[14], 0x80);
+#endif
+                        } else if(l2capinbuf[8] == L2CAP_CMD_CONNECTION_RESPONSE) {
+                                if(((l2capinbuf[16] | (l2capinbuf[17] << 8)) == 0x0000) && ((l2capinbuf[18] | (l2capinbuf[19] << 8)) == SUCCESSFUL)) { // Success
+                                        if(l2capinbuf[14] == control_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[15] == control_dcid[1]) {
+                                                //Notify(PSTR("\r\nHID Control Connection Complete"), 0x80);
+                                                identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                                control_scid[0] = l2capinbuf[12];
+                                                control_scid[1] = l2capinbuf[13];
+                                                l2cap_set_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONTROL_CONNECTED);
+                                        } else if(l2capinbuf[14] == interrupt_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[15] == interrupt_dcid[1]) {
+                                                //Notify(PSTR("\r\nHID Interrupt Connection Complete"), 0x80);
+                                                identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                                interrupt_scid[0] = l2capinbuf[12];
+                                                interrupt_scid[1] = l2capinbuf[13];
+                                                l2cap_set_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_INTERRUPT_CONNECTED);
+                                        }
+                                }
+                        } else if(l2capinbuf[8] == L2CAP_CMD_CONNECTION_REQUEST) {
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nL2CAP Connection Request - PSM: "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[13], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[12], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" SCID: "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[15], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[14], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" Identifier: "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[9], 0x80);
+#endif
+                                if((l2capinbuf[12] | (l2capinbuf[13] << 8)) == HID_CTRL_PSM) {
+                                        identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                        control_scid[0] = l2capinbuf[14];
+                                        control_scid[1] = l2capinbuf[15];
+                                        l2cap_set_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONNECTION_CONTROL_REQUEST);
+                                } else if((l2capinbuf[12] | (l2capinbuf[13] << 8)) == HID_INTR_PSM) {
+                                        identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                        interrupt_scid[0] = l2capinbuf[14];
+                                        interrupt_scid[1] = l2capinbuf[15];
+                                        l2cap_set_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONNECTION_INTERRUPT_REQUEST);
+                                }
+                        } else if(l2capinbuf[8] == L2CAP_CMD_CONFIG_RESPONSE) {
+                                if((l2capinbuf[16] | (l2capinbuf[17] << 8)) == 0x0000) { // Success
+                                        if(l2capinbuf[12] == control_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == control_dcid[1]) {
+                                                //Notify(PSTR("\r\nHID Control Configuration Complete"), 0x80);
+                                                identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                                l2cap_set_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONFIG_CONTROL_SUCCESS);
+                                        } else if(l2capinbuf[12] == interrupt_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == interrupt_dcid[1]) {
+                                                //Notify(PSTR("\r\nHID Interrupt Configuration Complete"), 0x80);
+                                                identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                                l2cap_set_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONFIG_INTERRUPT_SUCCESS);
+                                        }
+                                }
+                        } else if(l2capinbuf[8] == L2CAP_CMD_CONFIG_REQUEST) {
+                                if(l2capinbuf[12] == control_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == control_dcid[1]) {
+                                        //Notify(PSTR("\r\nHID Control Configuration Request"), 0x80);
+                                        pBtd->l2cap_config_response(hci_handle, l2capinbuf[9], control_scid);
+                                } else if(l2capinbuf[12] == interrupt_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == interrupt_dcid[1]) {
+                                        //Notify(PSTR("\r\nHID Interrupt Configuration Request"), 0x80);
+                                        pBtd->l2cap_config_response(hci_handle, l2capinbuf[9], interrupt_scid);
+                                }
+                        } else if(l2capinbuf[8] == L2CAP_CMD_DISCONNECT_REQUEST) {
+                                if(l2capinbuf[12] == control_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == control_dcid[1]) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nDisconnect Request: Control Channel"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                        pBtd->l2cap_disconnection_response(hci_handle, identifier, control_dcid, control_scid);
+                                        Reset();
+                                } else if(l2capinbuf[12] == interrupt_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == interrupt_dcid[1]) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nDisconnect Request: Interrupt Channel"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                        pBtd->l2cap_disconnection_response(hci_handle, identifier, interrupt_dcid, interrupt_scid);
+                                        Reset();
+                                }
+                        } else if(l2capinbuf[8] == L2CAP_CMD_DISCONNECT_RESPONSE) {
+                                if(l2capinbuf[12] == control_scid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == control_scid[1]) {
+                                        //Notify(PSTR("\r\nDisconnect Response: Control Channel"), 0x80);
+                                        identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                        l2cap_set_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_DISCONNECT_CONTROL_RESPONSE);
+                                } else if(l2capinbuf[12] == interrupt_scid[0] && l2capinbuf[13] == interrupt_scid[1]) {
+                                        //Notify(PSTR("\r\nDisconnect Response: Interrupt Channel"), 0x80);
+                                        identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                        l2cap_set_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_DISCONNECT_INTERRUPT_RESPONSE);
+                                }
+                        }
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+                        else {
+                                identifier = l2capinbuf[9];
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nL2CAP Unknown Signaling Command: "), 0x80);
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[8], 0x80);
+                        }
+#endif
+                } else if(l2capinbuf[6] == interrupt_dcid[0] && l2capinbuf[7] == interrupt_dcid[1]) { // l2cap_interrupt
+                        //Notify(PSTR("\r\nL2CAP Interrupt"), 0x80);
+                        if(l2capinbuf[8] == 0xA1) { // HID_THDR_DATA_INPUT
+                                if((l2capinbuf[9] >= 0x20 && l2capinbuf[9] <= 0x22) || (l2capinbuf[9] >= 0x30 && l2capinbuf[9] <= 0x37) || l2capinbuf[9] == 0x3e || l2capinbuf[9] == 0x3f) { // These reports include the buttons
+                                        if((l2capinbuf[9] >= 0x20 && l2capinbuf[9] <= 0x22) || l2capinbuf[9] == 0x31 || l2capinbuf[9] == 0x33) // These reports have no extensions bytes
+                                                ButtonState = (uint32_t)((l2capinbuf[10] & 0x1F) | ((uint16_t)(l2capinbuf[11] & 0x9F) << 8));
+                                        else if(wiiUProControllerConnected)
+                                                ButtonState = (uint32_t)(((~l2capinbuf[23]) & 0xFE) | ((uint16_t)(~l2capinbuf[24]) << 8) | ((uint32_t)((~l2capinbuf[25]) & 0x03) << 16));
+                                        else if(motionPlusConnected) {
+                                                if(l2capinbuf[20] & 0x02) // Only update the Wiimote buttons, since the extension bytes are from the Motion Plus
+                                                        ButtonState = (uint32_t)((l2capinbuf[10] & 0x1F) | ((uint16_t)(l2capinbuf[11] & 0x9F) << 8) | ((uint32_t)(ButtonState & 0xFFFF0000)));
+                                                else if(nunchuckConnected) // Update if it's a report from the Nunchuck
+                                                        ButtonState = (uint32_t)((l2capinbuf[10] & 0x1F) | ((uint16_t)(l2capinbuf[11] & 0x9F) << 8) | ((uint32_t)((~l2capinbuf[20]) & 0x0C) << 14));
+                                                //else if(classicControllerConnected) // Update if it's a report from the Classic Controller
+                                        } else if(nunchuckConnected) // The Nunchuck is directly connected
+                                                ButtonState = (uint32_t)((l2capinbuf[10] & 0x1F) | ((uint16_t)(l2capinbuf[11] & 0x9F) << 8) | ((uint32_t)((~l2capinbuf[20]) & 0x03) << 16));
+                                                //else if(classicControllerConnected) // The Classic Controller is directly connected
+                                        else if(!unknownExtensionConnected)
+                                                ButtonState = (uint32_t)((l2capinbuf[10] & 0x1F) | ((uint16_t)(l2capinbuf[11] & 0x9F) << 8));
+#ifdef PRINTREPORT
+                                        Notify(PSTR("ButtonState: "), 0x80);
+                                        D_PrintHex<uint32_t > (ButtonState, 0x80);
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\n"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        if(ButtonState != OldButtonState) {
+                                                ButtonClickState = ButtonState & ~OldButtonState; // Update click state variable
+                                                OldButtonState = ButtonState;
+                                        }
+                                }
+                                if(l2capinbuf[9] == 0x31 || l2capinbuf[9] == 0x33 || l2capinbuf[9] == 0x35 || l2capinbuf[9] == 0x37) { // Read the accelerometer
+                                        accXwiimote = ((l2capinbuf[12] << 2) | (l2capinbuf[10] & 0x60 >> 5)) - 500;
+                                        accYwiimote = ((l2capinbuf[13] << 2) | (l2capinbuf[11] & 0x20 >> 4)) - 500;
+                                        accZwiimote = ((l2capinbuf[14] << 2) | (l2capinbuf[11] & 0x40 >> 5)) - 500;
+                                }
+                                switch(l2capinbuf[9]) {
+                                        case 0x20: // Status Information - (a1) 20 BB BB LF 00 00 VV
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nStatus report was received"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                                wiiState = l2capinbuf[12]; // (0x01: Battery is nearly empty), (0x02:  An Extension Controller is connected), (0x04: Speaker enabled), (0x08: IR enabled), (0x10: LED1, 0x20: LED2, 0x40: LED3, 0x80: LED4)
+                                                batteryLevel = l2capinbuf[15]; // Update battery level
+
+                                                if(!checkBatteryLevel) { // If this is true it means that the user must have called getBatteryLevel()
+                                                        if(l2capinbuf[12] & 0x02) { // Check if a extension is connected
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                                                if(!unknownExtensionConnected)
+                                                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nExtension connected"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                                                unknownExtensionConnected = true;
+#ifdef WIICAMERA
+                                                                if(!isIRCameraEnabled()) // Don't activate the Motion Plus if we are trying to initialize the IR camera
+#endif
+                                                                        setReportMode(false, 0x35); // Also read the extension
+                                                        } else {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nExtension disconnected"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                                                if(motionPlusConnected) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                                                        Notify(PSTR(" - from Motion Plus"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                                                        wii_clear_flag(WII_FLAG_NUNCHUCK_CONNECTED);
+                                                                        if(!activateNunchuck) // If it's already trying to initialize the Nunchuck don't set it to false
+                                                                                nunchuckConnected = false;
+                                                                        //else if(classicControllerConnected)
+                                                                } else if(nunchuckConnected) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                                                        Notify(PSTR(" - Nunchuck"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                                                        nunchuckConnected = false; // It must be the Nunchuck controller then
+                                                                        wii_clear_flag(WII_FLAG_NUNCHUCK_CONNECTED);
+                                                                        onInit();
+                                                                        setReportMode(false, 0x31); // If there is no extension connected we will read the buttons and accelerometer
+                                                                } else
+                                                                        setReportMode(false, 0x31); // If there is no extension connected we will read the buttons and accelerometer
+                                                        }
+                                                }
+                                                else {
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+                                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nChecking battery level"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                                        checkBatteryLevel = false; // Check for extensions by default
+                                                }
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                                if(l2capinbuf[12] & 0x01)
+                                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nWARNING: Battery is nearly empty"), 0x80);
+#endif
+
+                                                break;
+                                        case 0x21: // Read Memory Data
+                                                if((l2capinbuf[12] & 0x0F) == 0) { // No error
+                                                        uint8_t reportLength = (l2capinbuf[12] >> 4) + 1; // // Bit 4-7 is the length - 1
+                                                        // See: http://wiibrew.org/wiki/Wiimote/Extension_Controllers
+                                                        if(l2capinbuf[16] == 0x00 && l2capinbuf[17] == 0xA4 && l2capinbuf[18] == 0x20 && l2capinbuf[19] == 0x00 && l2capinbuf[20] == 0x00) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nNunchuck connected"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                                                wii_set_flag(WII_FLAG_NUNCHUCK_CONNECTED);
+                                                        } else if(l2capinbuf[16] == 0x00 && (l2capinbuf[17] == 0xA6 || l2capinbuf[17] == 0xA4) && l2capinbuf[18] == 0x20 && l2capinbuf[19] == 0x00 && l2capinbuf[20] == 0x05) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nMotion Plus connected"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                                                wii_set_flag(WII_FLAG_MOTION_PLUS_CONNECTED);
+                                                        } else if(l2capinbuf[16] == 0x00 && l2capinbuf[17] == 0xA4 && l2capinbuf[18] == 0x20 && l2capinbuf[19] == 0x04 && l2capinbuf[20] == 0x05) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nMotion Plus activated in normal mode"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                                                motionPlusConnected = true;
+#ifdef WIICAMERA
+                                                                if(!isIRCameraEnabled()) // Don't activate the Motion Plus if we are trying to initialize the IR camera
+#endif
+                                                                        setReportMode(false, 0x35); // Also read the extension
+                                                        } else if(l2capinbuf[16] == 0x00 && l2capinbuf[17] == 0xA4 && l2capinbuf[18] == 0x20 && l2capinbuf[19] == 0x05 && l2capinbuf[20] == 0x05) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nMotion Plus activated in Nunchuck pass-through mode"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                                                activateNunchuck = false;
+                                                                motionPlusConnected = true;
+                                                                nunchuckConnected = true;
+#ifdef WIICAMERA
+                                                                if(!isIRCameraEnabled()) // Don't activate the Motion Plus if we are trying to initialize the IR camera
+#endif
+                                                                        setReportMode(false, 0x35); // Also read the extension
+                                                        } else if(l2capinbuf[16] == 0x00 && l2capinbuf[17] == 0xA6 && l2capinbuf[18] == 0x20 && (l2capinbuf[19] == 0x00 || l2capinbuf[19] == 0x04 || l2capinbuf[19] == 0x05 || l2capinbuf[19] == 0x07) && l2capinbuf[20] == 0x05) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nInactive Wii Motion Plus"), 0x80);
+                                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nPlease unplug the Motion Plus, disconnect the Wiimote and then replug the Motion Plus Extension"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                                                stateCounter = 300; // Skip the rest in "WII_CHECK_MOTION_PLUS_STATE"
+                                                        } else if(l2capinbuf[16] == 0x00 && l2capinbuf[17] == 0xA4 && l2capinbuf[18] == 0x20 && l2capinbuf[19] == 0x01 && l2capinbuf[20] == 0x20) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nWii U Pro Controller connected"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                                                wiiUProControllerConnected = true;
+                                                        } else if(l2capinbuf[16] == 0x00 && l2capinbuf[17] == 0xA4 && l2capinbuf[18] == 0x20 && l2capinbuf[19] == 0x04 && l2capinbuf[20] == 0x02) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nWii Balance Board connected"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                                                setReportMode(false, 0x32); // Read the Wii Balance Board extension
+                                                                wii_set_flag(WII_FLAG_CALIBRATE_BALANCE_BOARD);
+                                                        }
+                                                        // Wii Balance Board calibration reports (24 bits in total)
+                                                        else if(l2capinbuf[13] == 0x00 && l2capinbuf[14] == 0x24 && reportLength == 16) { // First 16-bit
+                                                                for(uint8_t i = 0; i < 2; i++) {
+                                                                        for(uint8_t j = 0; j < 4; j++)
+                                                                                wiiBalanceBoardCal[i][j] = l2capinbuf[16 + 8 * i + 2 * j] | l2capinbuf[15 + 8 * i + 2 * j] << 8;
+                                                                }
+                                                        } else if(l2capinbuf[13] == 0x00 && l2capinbuf[14] == 0x34 && reportLength == 8) { // Last 8-bit
+                                                                for(uint8_t j = 0; j < 4; j++)
+                                                                        wiiBalanceBoardCal[2][j] = l2capinbuf[16 + 2 * j] | l2capinbuf[15 + 2 * j] << 8;
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nWii Balance Board calibration values read successfully"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                                                wii_clear_flag(WII_FLAG_CALIBRATE_BALANCE_BOARD);
+                                                                wiiBalanceBoardConnected = true;
+                                                        }
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                                        else {
+                                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nUnknown Device: "), 0x80);
+                                                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[13], 0x80);
+                                                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[14], 0x80);
+                                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nData: "), 0x80);
+                                                                for(uint8_t i = 0; i < reportLength; i++) {
+                                                                        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[15 + i], 0x80);
+                                                                        Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                                                }
+                                                        }
+#endif
+                                                }
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+                                                else {
+                                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nReport Error: "), 0x80);
+                                                        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[13], 0x80);
+                                                        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[14], 0x80);
+                                                }
+#endif
+                                                break;
+                                        case 0x22: // Acknowledge output report, return function result
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                                if(l2capinbuf[13] != 0x00) { // Check if there is an error
+                                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nCommand failed: "), 0x80);
+                                                        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[12], 0x80);
+                                                }
+#endif
+                                                break;
+                                        case 0x30: // Core buttons - (a1) 30 BB BB
+                                                break;
+                                        case 0x31: // Core Buttons and Accelerometer - (a1) 31 BB BB AA AA AA
+                                                break;
+                                        case 0x32: // Core Buttons with 8 Extension bytes - (a1) 32 BB BB EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE
+                                                // See: http://wiibrew.org/wiki/Wii_Balance_Board#Data_Format
+                                                wiiBalanceBoardRaw[TopRight] = l2capinbuf[13] | l2capinbuf[12] << 8; // Top right
+                                                wiiBalanceBoardRaw[BotRight] = l2capinbuf[15] | l2capinbuf[14] << 8; // Bottom right
+                                                wiiBalanceBoardRaw[TopLeft] = l2capinbuf[17] | l2capinbuf[16] << 8; // Top left
+                                                wiiBalanceBoardRaw[BotLeft] = l2capinbuf[19] | l2capinbuf[18] << 8; // Bottom left
+                                                break;
+                                        case 0x33: // Core Buttons with Accelerometer and 12 IR bytes - (a1) 33 BB BB AA AA AA II II II II II II II II II II II II
+#ifdef WIICAMERA
+                                                // Read the IR data
+                                                IR_object_x1 = (l2capinbuf[15] | ((uint16_t)(l2capinbuf[17] & 0x30) << 4)); // x position
+                                                IR_object_y1 = (l2capinbuf[16] | ((uint16_t)(l2capinbuf[17] & 0xC0) << 2)); // y position
+                                                IR_object_s1 = (l2capinbuf[17] & 0x0F); // Size value, 0-15
+
+                                                IR_object_x2 = (l2capinbuf[18] | ((uint16_t)(l2capinbuf[20] & 0x30) << 4));
+                                                IR_object_y2 = (l2capinbuf[19] | ((uint16_t)(l2capinbuf[20] & 0xC0) << 2));
+                                                IR_object_s2 = (l2capinbuf[20] & 0x0F);
+
+                                                IR_object_x3 = (l2capinbuf[21] | ((uint16_t)(l2capinbuf[23] & 0x30) << 4));
+                                                IR_object_y3 = (l2capinbuf[22] | ((uint16_t)(l2capinbuf[23] & 0xC0) << 2));
+                                                IR_object_s3 = (l2capinbuf[23] & 0x0F);
+
+                                                IR_object_x4 = (l2capinbuf[24] | ((uint16_t)(l2capinbuf[26] & 0x30) << 4));
+                                                IR_object_y4 = (l2capinbuf[25] | ((uint16_t)(l2capinbuf[26] & 0xC0) << 2));
+                                                IR_object_s4 = (l2capinbuf[26] & 0x0F);
+#endif
+                                                break;
+                                        case 0x34: // Core Buttons with 19 Extension bytes - (a1) 34 BB BB EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE
+                                                break;
+                                                /* 0x3e and 0x3f both give unknown report types when report mode is 0x3e or 0x3f with mode number 0x05 */
+                                        case 0x3E: // Core Buttons with Accelerometer and 32 IR bytes
+                                                // (a1) 31 BB BB AA AA AA II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II
+                                                // corresponds to output report mode 0x3e
+
+                                                /**** for reading in full mode: DOES NOT WORK YET ****/
+                                                /* When it works it will also have intensity and bounding box data */
+                                                /*
+                                                IR_object_x1 = (l2capinbuf[13] | ((uint16_t)(l2capinbuf[15] & 0x30) << 4));
+                                                IR_object_y1 = (l2capinbuf[14] | ((uint16_t)(l2capinbuf[15] & 0xC0) << 2));
+                                                IR_object_s1 = (l2capinbuf[15] & 0x0F);
+                                                 */
+                                                break;
+                                        case 0x3F:
+                                                /*
+                                                IR_object_x1 = (l2capinbuf[13] | ((uint16_t)(l2capinbuf[15] & 0x30) << 4));
+                                                IR_object_y1 = (l2capinbuf[14] | ((uint16_t)(l2capinbuf[15] & 0xC0) << 2));
+                                                IR_object_s1 = (l2capinbuf[15] & 0x0F);
+                                                 */
+                                                break;
+                                        case 0x35: // Core Buttons and Accelerometer with 16 Extension Bytes
+                                                // (a1) 35 BB BB AA AA AA EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE
+#if 1 // Set this to 0 if you don't want to use an extension, this reduceds the size of the library a lot!
+                                                if(motionPlusConnected) {
+                                                        if(l2capinbuf[20] & 0x02) { // Check if it's a report from the Motion controller or the extension
+                                                                if(motionValuesReset) { // We will only use the values when the gyro value has been set
+                                                                        gyroYawRaw = ((l2capinbuf[15] | ((l2capinbuf[18] & 0xFC) << 6)) - gyroYawZero);
+                                                                        gyroRollRaw = ((l2capinbuf[16] | ((l2capinbuf[19] & 0xFC) << 6)) - gyroRollZero);
+                                                                        gyroPitchRaw = ((l2capinbuf[17] | ((l2capinbuf[20] & 0xFC) << 6)) - gyroPitchZero);
+
+                                                                        yawGyroSpeed = (double)gyroYawRaw / ((double)gyroYawZero / yawGyroScale);
+                                                                        rollGyroSpeed = -(double)gyroRollRaw / ((double)gyroRollZero / rollGyroScale); // We invert these values so they will fit the acc values
+                                                                        pitchGyroSpeed = (double)gyroPitchRaw / ((double)gyroPitchZero / pitchGyroScale);
+
+                                                                        /* The onboard gyro has two ranges for slow and fast mode */
+                                                                        if(!(l2capinbuf[18] & 0x02)) // Check if fast mode is used
+                                                                                yawGyroSpeed *= 4.545;
+                                                                        if(!(l2capinbuf[18] & 0x01)) // Check if fast mode is used
+                                                                                pitchGyroSpeed *= 4.545;
+                                                                        if(!(l2capinbuf[19] & 0x02)) // Check if fast mode is used
+                                                                                rollGyroSpeed *= 4.545;
+
+                                                                        compPitch = (0.93 * (compPitch + (pitchGyroSpeed * (double)(micros() - timer) / 1000000)))+(0.07 * getWiimotePitch()); // Use a complimentary filter to calculate the angle
+                                                                        compRoll = (0.93 * (compRoll + (rollGyroSpeed * (double)(micros() - timer) / 1000000)))+(0.07 * getWiimoteRoll());
+
+                                                                        gyroYaw += (yawGyroSpeed * ((double)(micros() - timer) / 1000000));
+                                                                        gyroRoll += (rollGyroSpeed * ((double)(micros() - timer) / 1000000));
+                                                                        gyroPitch += (pitchGyroSpeed * ((double)(micros() - timer) / 1000000));
+                                                                        timer = micros();
+                                                                        /*
+                                                                        // Uncomment these lines to tune the gyro scale variabels
+                                                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\ngyroYaw: "), 0x80);
+                                                                        Notify(gyroYaw, 0x80);
+                                                                        Notify(PSTR("\tgyroRoll: "), 0x80);
+                                                                        Notify(gyroRoll, 0x80);
+                                                                        Notify(PSTR("\tgyroPitch: "), 0x80);
+                                                                        Notify(gyroPitch, 0x80);
+                                                                         */
+                                                                        /*
+                                                                        Notify(PSTR("\twiimoteRoll: "), 0x80);
+                                                                        Notify(wiimoteRoll, 0x80);
+                                                                        Notify(PSTR("\twiimotePitch: "), 0x80);
+                                                                        Notify(wiimotePitch, 0x80);
+                                                                         */
+                                                                } else {
+                                                                        if((micros() - timer) > 1000000) { // Loop for 1 sec before resetting the values
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nThe gyro values has been reset"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                                                                gyroYawZero = (l2capinbuf[15] | ((l2capinbuf[18] & 0xFC) << 6));
+                                                                                gyroRollZero = (l2capinbuf[16] | ((l2capinbuf[19] & 0xFC) << 6));
+                                                                                gyroPitchZero = (l2capinbuf[17] | ((l2capinbuf[20] & 0xFC) << 6));
+
+                                                                                rollGyroScale = 500; // You might need to adjust these
+                                                                                pitchGyroScale = 400;
+                                                                                yawGyroScale = 415;
+
+                                                                                gyroYaw = 0;
+                                                                                gyroRoll = 0;
+                                                                                gyroPitch = 0;
+
+                                                                                motionValuesReset = true;
+                                                                                timer = micros();
+                                                                        }
+                                                                }
+                                                        } else {
+                                                                if(nunchuckConnected) {
+                                                                        hatValues[HatX] = l2capinbuf[15];
+                                                                        hatValues[HatY] = l2capinbuf[16];
+                                                                        accXnunchuck = ((l2capinbuf[17] << 2) | (l2capinbuf[20] & 0x10 >> 3)) - 416;
+                                                                        accYnunchuck = ((l2capinbuf[18] << 2) | (l2capinbuf[20] & 0x20 >> 4)) - 416;
+                                                                        accZnunchuck = (((l2capinbuf[19] & 0xFE) << 2) | (l2capinbuf[20] & 0xC0 >> 5)) - 416;
+                                                                }
+                                                                //else if(classicControllerConnected) { }
+                                                        }
+                                                        if(l2capinbuf[19] & 0x01) {
+                                                                if(!extensionConnected) {
+                                                                        extensionConnected = true;
+                                                                        unknownExtensionConnected = true;
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nExtension connected to Motion Plus"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                                                }
+                                                        } else {
+                                                                if(extensionConnected && !unknownExtensionConnected) {
+                                                                        extensionConnected = false;
+                                                                        unknownExtensionConnected = true;
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nExtension disconnected from Motion Plus"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                                                        nunchuckConnected = false; // There is no extension connected to the Motion Plus if this report is sent
+                                                                }
+                                                        }
+
+                                                } else if(nunchuckConnected) {
+                                                        hatValues[HatX] = l2capinbuf[15];
+                                                        hatValues[HatY] = l2capinbuf[16];
+                                                        accXnunchuck = ((l2capinbuf[17] << 2) | (l2capinbuf[20] & 0x0C >> 2)) - 416;
+                                                        accYnunchuck = ((l2capinbuf[18] << 2) | (l2capinbuf[20] & 0x30 >> 4)) - 416;
+                                                        accZnunchuck = ((l2capinbuf[19] << 2) | (l2capinbuf[20] & 0xC0 >> 6)) - 416;
+                                                } else if(wiiUProControllerConnected) {
+                                                        hatValues[LeftHatX] = (l2capinbuf[15] | l2capinbuf[16] << 8);
+                                                        hatValues[RightHatX] = (l2capinbuf[17] | l2capinbuf[18] << 8);
+                                                        hatValues[LeftHatY] = (l2capinbuf[19] | l2capinbuf[20] << 8);
+                                                        hatValues[RightHatY] = (l2capinbuf[21] | l2capinbuf[22] << 8);
+                                                }
+#endif
+                                                break;
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        default:
+                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nUnknown Report type: "), 0x80);
+                                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (l2capinbuf[9], 0x80);
+                                                break;
+#endif
+                                }
+                        }
+                }
+                L2CAP_task();
+        }
+}
+
+void WII::L2CAP_task() {
+        switch(l2cap_state) {
+                        /* These states are used if the Wiimote is the host */
+                case L2CAP_CONTROL_SUCCESS:
+                        if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONFIG_CONTROL_SUCCESS)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nHID Control Successfully Configured"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                l2cap_state = L2CAP_INTERRUPT_SETUP;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case L2CAP_INTERRUPT_SETUP:
+                        if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONNECTION_INTERRUPT_REQUEST)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nHID Interrupt Incoming Connection Request"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                pBtd->l2cap_connection_response(hci_handle, identifier, interrupt_dcid, interrupt_scid, PENDING);
+                                delay(1);
+                                pBtd->l2cap_connection_response(hci_handle, identifier, interrupt_dcid, interrupt_scid, SUCCESSFUL);
+                                identifier++;
+                                delay(1);
+                                pBtd->l2cap_config_request(hci_handle, identifier, interrupt_scid);
+
+                                l2cap_state = L2CAP_INTERRUPT_CONFIG_REQUEST;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                        /* These states are used if the Arduino is the host */
+                case L2CAP_CONTROL_CONNECT_REQUEST:
+                        if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONTROL_CONNECTED)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nSend HID Control Config Request"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                identifier++;
+                                pBtd->l2cap_config_request(hci_handle, identifier, control_scid);
+                                l2cap_state = L2CAP_CONTROL_CONFIG_REQUEST;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case L2CAP_CONTROL_CONFIG_REQUEST:
+                        if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONFIG_CONTROL_SUCCESS)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nSend HID Interrupt Connection Request"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                identifier++;
+                                pBtd->l2cap_connection_request(hci_handle, identifier, interrupt_dcid, HID_INTR_PSM);
+                                l2cap_state = L2CAP_INTERRUPT_CONNECT_REQUEST;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case L2CAP_INTERRUPT_CONNECT_REQUEST:
+                        if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_INTERRUPT_CONNECTED)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nSend HID Interrupt Config Request"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                identifier++;
+                                pBtd->l2cap_config_request(hci_handle, identifier, interrupt_scid);
+                                l2cap_state = L2CAP_INTERRUPT_CONFIG_REQUEST;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case L2CAP_INTERRUPT_CONFIG_REQUEST:
+                        if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONFIG_INTERRUPT_SUCCESS)) { // Now the HID channels is established
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nHID Channels Established"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                pBtd->connectToWii = false;
+                                pBtd->pairWithWii = false;
+                                stateCounter = 0;
+                                l2cap_state = WII_CHECK_MOTION_PLUS_STATE;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                        /* The next states are in run() */
+
+                case L2CAP_INTERRUPT_DISCONNECT:
+                        if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_DISCONNECT_INTERRUPT_RESPONSE) && ((long)(millis() - timer) >= 0L)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nDisconnected Interrupt Channel"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                identifier++;
+                                pBtd->l2cap_disconnection_request(hci_handle, identifier, control_scid, control_dcid);
+                                l2cap_state = L2CAP_CONTROL_DISCONNECT;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case L2CAP_CONTROL_DISCONNECT:
+                        if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_DISCONNECT_CONTROL_RESPONSE)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nDisconnected Control Channel"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                pBtd->hci_disconnect(hci_handle);
+                                hci_handle = -1; // Reset handle
+                                l2cap_event_flag = 0; // Reset flags
+                                l2cap_state = L2CAP_WAIT;
+                        }
+                        break;
+        }
+}
+
+void WII::Run() {
+        if(l2cap_state == L2CAP_INTERRUPT_DISCONNECT && ((long)(millis() - timer) >= 0L))
+                L2CAP_task(); // Call the rest of the disconnection routine after we have waited long enough
+
+        switch(l2cap_state) {
+                case L2CAP_WAIT:
+                        if(pBtd->connectToWii && !pBtd->l2capConnectionClaimed && !wiimoteConnected && !activeConnection) {
+                                pBtd->l2capConnectionClaimed = true;
+                                activeConnection = true;
+                                motionPlusInside = pBtd->motionPlusInside;
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nSend HID Control Connection Request"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                hci_handle = pBtd->hci_handle; // Store the HCI Handle for the connection
+                                l2cap_event_flag = 0; // Reset flags
+                                identifier = 0;
+                                pBtd->l2cap_connection_request(hci_handle, identifier, control_dcid, HID_CTRL_PSM);
+                                l2cap_state = L2CAP_CONTROL_CONNECT_REQUEST;
+                        } else if(l2cap_check_flag(L2CAP_FLAG_CONNECTION_CONTROL_REQUEST)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nHID Control Incoming Connection Request"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                pBtd->l2cap_connection_response(hci_handle, identifier, control_dcid, control_scid, PENDING);
+                                delay(1);
+                                pBtd->l2cap_connection_response(hci_handle, identifier, control_dcid, control_scid, SUCCESSFUL);
+                                identifier++;
+                                delay(1);
+                                pBtd->l2cap_config_request(hci_handle, identifier, control_scid);
+                                l2cap_state = L2CAP_CONTROL_SUCCESS;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case WII_CHECK_MOTION_PLUS_STATE:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                        if(stateCounter == 0) // Only print onnce
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nChecking if a Motion Plus is connected"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                        stateCounter++;
+                        if(stateCounter % 200 == 0)
+                                checkMotionPresent(); // Check if there is a motion plus connected
+                        if(wii_check_flag(WII_FLAG_MOTION_PLUS_CONNECTED)) {
+                                stateCounter = 0;
+                                l2cap_state = WII_INIT_MOTION_PLUS_STATE;
+                                timer = micros();
+
+                                if(unknownExtensionConnected) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nA extension is also connected"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        activateNunchuck = true; // For we will just set this to true as this the only extension supported so far
+                                }
+
+                        } else if(stateCounter == 601) { // We will try three times to check for the motion plus
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nNo Motion Plus was detected"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                stateCounter = 0;
+                                l2cap_state = WII_CHECK_EXTENSION_STATE;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case WII_CHECK_EXTENSION_STATE: // This is used to check if there is anything plugged in to the extension port
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                        if(stateCounter == 0) // Only print onnce
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nChecking if there is any extension connected"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                        stateCounter++; // We use this counter as there has to be a short delay between the commands
+                        if(stateCounter == 1)
+                                statusRequest(); // See if a new device has connected
+                        if(stateCounter == 100) {
+                                if(unknownExtensionConnected) // Check if there is a extension is connected to the port
+                                        initExtension1();
+                                else
+                                        stateCounter = 499;
+                        } else if(stateCounter == 200)
+                                initExtension2();
+                        else if(stateCounter == 300) {
+                                readExtensionType();
+                                unknownExtensionConnected = false;
+                        } else if(stateCounter == 400) {
+                                if(wii_check_flag(WII_FLAG_CALIBRATE_BALANCE_BOARD)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nReading Wii Balance Board calibration values"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                        readWiiBalanceBoardCalibration();
+                                } else
+                                        stateCounter = 499;
+                        } else if(stateCounter == 500) {
+                                stateCounter = 0;
+                                l2cap_state = TURN_ON_LED;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case WII_INIT_MOTION_PLUS_STATE:
+                        stateCounter++;
+                        if(stateCounter == 1)
+                                initMotionPlus();
+                        else if(stateCounter == 100)
+                                activateMotionPlus();
+                        else if(stateCounter == 200)
+                                readExtensionType(); // Check if it has been activated
+                        else if(stateCounter == 300) {
+                                stateCounter = 0;
+                                unknownExtensionConnected = false; // The motion plus will send a status report when it's activated, we will set this to false so it doesn't reinitialize the Motion Plus
+                                l2cap_state = TURN_ON_LED;
+                        }
+                        break;
+
+                case TURN_ON_LED:
+                        if(wii_check_flag(WII_FLAG_NUNCHUCK_CONNECTED))
+                                nunchuckConnected = true;
+                        wiimoteConnected = true;
+                        onInit();
+                        l2cap_state = L2CAP_DONE;
+                        break;
+
+                case L2CAP_DONE:
+                        if(unknownExtensionConnected) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                if(stateCounter == 0) // Only print once
+                                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nChecking extension port"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                stateCounter++; // We will use this counter as there has to be a short delay between the commands
+                                if(stateCounter == 50)
+                                        statusRequest();
+                                else if(stateCounter == 100)
+                                        initExtension1();
+                                else if(stateCounter == 150)
+                                        if((extensionConnected && motionPlusConnected) || (unknownExtensionConnected && !motionPlusConnected))
+                                                initExtension2();
+                                        else
+                                                stateCounter = 299; // There is no extension connected
+                                else if(stateCounter == 200)
+                                        readExtensionType();
+                                else if(stateCounter == 250) {
+                                        if(wii_check_flag(WII_FLAG_NUNCHUCK_CONNECTED)) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nNunchuck was reconnected"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                                activateNunchuck = true;
+                                                nunchuckConnected = true;
+                                        }
+                                        if(!motionPlusConnected)
+                                                stateCounter = 449;
+                                } else if(stateCounter == 300) {
+                                        if(motionPlusConnected) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                                Notify(PSTR("\r\nReactivating the Motion Plus"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                                                initMotionPlus();
+                                        } else
+                                                stateCounter = 449;
+                                } else if(stateCounter == 350)
+                                        activateMotionPlus();
+                                else if(stateCounter == 400)
+                                        readExtensionType(); // Check if it has been activated
+                                else if(stateCounter == 450) {
+                                        onInit();
+                                        stateCounter = 0;
+                                        unknownExtensionConnected = false;
+                                }
+                        } else
+                                stateCounter = 0;
+                        break;
+        }
+}
+
+/************************************************************/
+/*                    HID Commands                          */
+/************************************************************/
+
+void WII::HID_Command(uint8_t* data, uint8_t nbytes) {
+        if(motionPlusInside)
+                pBtd->L2CAP_Command(hci_handle, data, nbytes, interrupt_scid[0], interrupt_scid[1]); // It's the new Wiimote with the Motion Plus Inside or Wii U Pro controller
+        else
+                pBtd->L2CAP_Command(hci_handle, data, nbytes, control_scid[0], control_scid[1]);
+}
+
+void WII::setAllOff() {
+        HIDBuffer[1] = 0x11;
+        HIDBuffer[2] = 0x00;
+        HID_Command(HIDBuffer, 3);
+}
+
+void WII::setRumbleOff() {
+        HIDBuffer[1] = 0x11;
+        HIDBuffer[2] &= ~0x01; // Bit 0 control the rumble
+        HID_Command(HIDBuffer, 3);
+}
+
+void WII::setRumbleOn() {
+        HIDBuffer[1] = 0x11;
+        HIDBuffer[2] |= 0x01; // Bit 0 control the rumble
+        HID_Command(HIDBuffer, 3);
+}
+
+void WII::setRumbleToggle() {
+        HIDBuffer[1] = 0x11;
+        HIDBuffer[2] ^= 0x01; // Bit 0 control the rumble
+        HID_Command(HIDBuffer, 3);
+}
+
+void WII::setLedRaw(uint8_t value) {
+        HIDBuffer[1] = 0x11;
+        HIDBuffer[2] = value | (HIDBuffer[2] & 0x01); // Keep the rumble bit
+        HID_Command(HIDBuffer, 3);
+}
+
+void WII::setLedOff(LEDEnum a) {
+        HIDBuffer[1] = 0x11;
+        HIDBuffer[2] &= ~(pgm_read_byte(&WII_LEDS[(uint8_t)a]));
+        HID_Command(HIDBuffer, 3);
+}
+
+void WII::setLedOn(LEDEnum a) {
+        if(a == OFF)
+                setLedRaw(0);
+        else {
+                HIDBuffer[1] = 0x11;
+                HIDBuffer[2] |= pgm_read_byte(&WII_LEDS[(uint8_t)a]);
+                HID_Command(HIDBuffer, 3);
+        }
+}
+
+void WII::setLedToggle(LEDEnum a) {
+        HIDBuffer[1] = 0x11;
+        HIDBuffer[2] ^= pgm_read_byte(&WII_LEDS[(uint8_t)a]);
+        HID_Command(HIDBuffer, 3);
+}
+
+void WII::setLedStatus() {
+        HIDBuffer[1] = 0x11;
+        HIDBuffer[2] = (HIDBuffer[2] & 0x01); // Keep the rumble bit
+        if(wiimoteConnected)
+                HIDBuffer[2] |= 0x10; // If it's connected LED1 will light up
+        if(motionPlusConnected)
+                HIDBuffer[2] |= 0x20; // If it's connected LED2 will light up
+        if(nunchuckConnected)
+                HIDBuffer[2] |= 0x40; // If it's connected LED3 will light up
+
+        HID_Command(HIDBuffer, 3);
+}
+
+uint8_t WII::getBatteryLevel() {
+        checkBatteryLevel = true; // This is needed so the library knows that the status response is a response to this function
+        statusRequest(); // This will update the battery level
+        return batteryLevel;
+};
+
+void WII::setReportMode(bool continuous, uint8_t mode) {
+        uint8_t cmd_buf[4];
+        cmd_buf[0] = 0xA2; // HID BT DATA_request (0xA0) | Report Type (Output 0x02)
+        cmd_buf[1] = 0x12;
+        if(continuous)
+                cmd_buf[2] = 0x04 | (HIDBuffer[2] & 0x01); // Keep the rumble bit
+        else
+                cmd_buf[2] = 0x00 | (HIDBuffer[2] & 0x01); // Keep the rumble bit
+        cmd_buf[3] = mode;
+        HID_Command(cmd_buf, 4);
+}
+
+void WII::statusRequest() {
+        uint8_t cmd_buf[3];
+        cmd_buf[0] = 0xA2; // HID BT DATA_request (0xA0) | Report Type (Output 0x02)
+        cmd_buf[1] = 0x15;
+        cmd_buf[2] = (HIDBuffer[2] & 0x01); // Keep the rumble bit
+        HID_Command(cmd_buf, 3);
+}
+
+/************************************************************/
+/*                    Memmory Commands                      */
+/************************************************************/
+
+void WII::writeData(uint32_t offset, uint8_t size, uint8_t* data) {
+        uint8_t cmd_buf[23];
+        cmd_buf[0] = 0xA2; // HID BT DATA_request (0xA0) | Report Type (Output 0x02)
+        cmd_buf[1] = 0x16; // Write data
+        cmd_buf[2] = 0x04 | (HIDBuffer[2] & 0x01); // Write to memory, clear bit 2 to write to EEPROM
+        cmd_buf[3] = (uint8_t)((offset & 0xFF0000) >> 16);
+        cmd_buf[4] = (uint8_t)((offset & 0xFF00) >> 8);
+        cmd_buf[5] = (uint8_t)(offset & 0xFF);
+        cmd_buf[6] = size;
+        uint8_t i = 0;
+        for(; i < size; i++)
+                cmd_buf[7 + i] = data[i];
+        for(; i < 16; i++) // Set the rest to zero
+                cmd_buf[7 + i] = 0x00;
+        HID_Command(cmd_buf, 23);
+}
+
+void WII::initExtension1() {
+        uint8_t buf[1];
+        buf[0] = 0x55;
+        writeData(0xA400F0, 1, buf);
+}
+
+void WII::initExtension2() {
+        uint8_t buf[1];
+        buf[0] = 0x00;
+        writeData(0xA400FB, 1, buf);
+}
+
+void WII::initMotionPlus() {
+        uint8_t buf[1];
+        buf[0] = 0x55;
+        writeData(0xA600F0, 1, buf);
+}
+
+void WII::activateMotionPlus() {
+        uint8_t buf[1];
+        if(pBtd->wiiUProController) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nActivating Wii U Pro Controller"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                buf[0] = 0x00; // It seems like you can send anything but 0x04, 0x05, and 0x07
+        } else if(activateNunchuck) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nActivating Motion Plus in pass-through mode"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                buf[0] = 0x05; // Activate nunchuck pass-through mode
+        }//else if(classicControllerConnected && extensionConnected)
+                //buf[0] = 0x07;
+        else {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nActivating Motion Plus in normal mode"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                buf[0] = 0x04; // Don't use any extension
+        }
+        writeData(0xA600FE, 1, buf);
+}
+
+void WII::readData(uint32_t offset, uint16_t size, bool EEPROM) {
+        uint8_t cmd_buf[8];
+        cmd_buf[0] = 0xA2; // HID BT DATA_request (0xA0) | Report Type (Output 0x02)
+        cmd_buf[1] = 0x17; // Read data
+        if(EEPROM)
+                cmd_buf[2] = 0x00 | (HIDBuffer[2] & 0x01); // Read from EEPROM
+        else
+                cmd_buf[2] = 0x04 | (HIDBuffer[2] & 0x01); // Read from memory
+        cmd_buf[3] = (uint8_t)((offset & 0xFF0000) >> 16);
+        cmd_buf[4] = (uint8_t)((offset & 0xFF00) >> 8);
+        cmd_buf[5] = (uint8_t)(offset & 0xFF);
+        cmd_buf[6] = (uint8_t)((size & 0xFF00) >> 8);
+        cmd_buf[7] = (uint8_t)(size & 0xFF);
+
+        HID_Command(cmd_buf, 8);
+}
+
+void WII::readExtensionType() {
+        readData(0xA400FA, 6, false);
+}
+
+void WII::readCalData() {
+        readData(0x0016, 8, true);
+}
+
+void WII::checkMotionPresent() {
+        readData(0xA600FA, 6, false);
+}
+
+void WII::readWiiBalanceBoardCalibration() {
+        readData(0xA40024, 24, false);
+}
+
+/************************************************************/
+/*                    WII Commands                          */
+/************************************************************/
+
+bool WII::getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b) { // Return true when a button is pressed
+        if(wiiUProControllerConnected)
+                return (ButtonState & pgm_read_dword(&WII_PROCONTROLLER_BUTTONS[(uint8_t)b]));
+        else
+                return (ButtonState & pgm_read_dword(&WII_BUTTONS[(uint8_t)b]));
+}
+
+bool WII::getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b) { // Only return true when a button is clicked
+        uint32_t button;
+        if(wiiUProControllerConnected)
+                button = pgm_read_dword(&WII_PROCONTROLLER_BUTTONS[(uint8_t)b]);
+        else
+                button = pgm_read_dword(&WII_BUTTONS[(uint8_t)b]);
+        bool click = (ButtonClickState & button);
+        ButtonClickState &= ~button; // clear "click" event
+        return click;
+}
+
+uint8_t WII::getAnalogHat(HatEnum a) {
+        if(!nunchuckConnected)
+                return 127; // Return center position
+        else {
+                uint8_t output = hatValues[(uint8_t)a];
+                if(output == 0xFF || output == 0x00) // The joystick will only read 255 or 0 when the cable is unplugged or initializing, so we will just return the center position
+                        return 127;
+                else
+                        return output;
+        }
+}
+
+uint16_t WII::getAnalogHat(AnalogHatEnum a) {
+        if(!wiiUProControllerConnected)
+                return 2000;
+        else {
+                uint16_t output = hatValues[(uint8_t)a];
+                if(output == 0x00) // The joystick will only read 0 when it is first initializing, so we will just return the center position
+                        return 2000;
+                else
+                        return output;
+        }
+}
+
+void WII::onInit() {
+        if(pFuncOnInit)
+                pFuncOnInit(); // Call the user function
+        else
+                setLedStatus();
+}
+
+/************************************************************/
+/*                 Wii Balance Board Commands               */
+/************************************************************/
+
+float WII::getWeight(BalanceBoardEnum pos) {
+        // Use interpolating between two points - based on: https://github.com/skorokithakis/gr8w8upd8m8/blob/master/gr8w8upd8m8.py
+        // wiiBalanceBoardCal[pos][0] is calibration values for 0 kg
+        // wiiBalanceBoardCal[pos][1] is calibration values for 17 kg
+        // wiiBalanceBoardCal[pos][2] is calibration values for 34 kg
+        if(wiiBalanceBoardRaw[pos] < wiiBalanceBoardCal[0][pos])
+            return 0.0f; // Below 0 kg
+        else if(wiiBalanceBoardRaw[pos] < wiiBalanceBoardCal[1][pos]) // Between 0 and 17 kg
+            return 17.0f * (float)(wiiBalanceBoardRaw[pos] - wiiBalanceBoardCal[0][pos]) / (float)(wiiBalanceBoardCal[1][pos] - wiiBalanceBoardCal[0][pos]);
+        else // More than 17 kg
+            return 17.0f + 17.0f * (float)(wiiBalanceBoardRaw[pos] - wiiBalanceBoardCal[1][pos]) / (float)(wiiBalanceBoardCal[2][pos] - wiiBalanceBoardCal[1][pos]);
+};
+
+float WII::getTotalWeight() {
+        return getWeight(TopRight) + getWeight(BotRight) + getWeight(TopLeft) + getWeight(BotLeft);
+};
+
+/************************************************************/
+/*       The following functions are for the IR camera      */
+/************************************************************/
+
+#ifdef WIICAMERA
+
+void WII::IRinitialize() { // Turns on and initialises the IR camera
+
+        enableIRCamera1();
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nEnable IR Camera1 Complete"), 0x80);
+#endif
+        delay(80);
+
+        enableIRCamera2();
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nEnable IR Camera2 Complete"), 0x80);
+#endif
+        delay(80);
+
+        write0x08Value();
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nWrote hex number 0x08"), 0x80);
+#endif
+        delay(80);
+
+        writeSensitivityBlock1();
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nWrote Sensitivity Block 1"), 0x80);
+#endif
+        delay(80);
+
+        writeSensitivityBlock2();
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nWrote Sensitivity Block 2"), 0x80);
+#endif
+        delay(80);
+
+        uint8_t mode_num = 0x03;
+        setWiiModeNumber(mode_num); // Change input for whatever mode you want i.e. 0x01, 0x03, or 0x05
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nSet Wii Mode Number To 0x"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (mode_num, 0x80);
+#endif
+        delay(80);
+
+        write0x08Value();
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nWrote Hex Number 0x08"), 0x80);
+#endif
+        delay(80);
+
+        setReportMode(false, 0x33);
+        //setReportMode(false, 0x3f); // For full reporting mode, doesn't work yet
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nSet Report Mode to 0x33"), 0x80);
+#endif
+        delay(80);
+
+        statusRequest(); // Used to update wiiState - call isIRCameraEnabled() afterwards to check if it actually worked
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nIR Initialized"), 0x80);
+#endif
+}
+
+void WII::enableIRCamera1() {
+        uint8_t cmd_buf[3];
+        cmd_buf[0] = 0xA2; // HID BT DATA_request (0xA0) | Report Type (Output 0x02)
+        cmd_buf[1] = 0x13; // Output report 13
+        cmd_buf[2] = 0x04 | (HIDBuffer[2] & 0x01); // Keep the rumble bit and sets bit 2
+        HID_Command(cmd_buf, 3);
+}
+
+void WII::enableIRCamera2() {
+        uint8_t cmd_buf[3];
+        cmd_buf[0] = 0xA2; // HID BT DATA_request (0xA0) | Report Type (Output 0x02)
+        cmd_buf[1] = 0x1A; // Output report 1A
+        cmd_buf[2] = 0x04 | (HIDBuffer[2] & 0x01); // Keep the rumble bit and sets bit 2
+        HID_Command(cmd_buf, 3);
+}
+
+void WII::writeSensitivityBlock1() {
+        uint8_t buf[9];
+        buf[0] = 0x00;
+        buf[1] = 0x00;
+        buf[2] = 0x00;
+        buf[3] = 0x00;
+        buf[4] = 0x00;
+        buf[5] = 0x00;
+        buf[6] = 0x90;
+        buf[7] = 0x00;
+        buf[8] = 0x41;
+
+        writeData(0xB00000, 9, buf);
+}
+
+void WII::writeSensitivityBlock2() {
+        uint8_t buf[2];
+        buf[0] = 0x40;
+        buf[1] = 0x00;
+
+        writeData(0xB0001A, 2, buf);
+}
+
+void WII::write0x08Value() {
+        uint8_t cmd = 0x08;
+        writeData(0xb00030, 1, &cmd);
+}
+
+void WII::setWiiModeNumber(uint8_t mode_number) { // mode_number in hex i.e. 0x03 for extended mode
+        writeData(0xb00033, 1, &mode_number);
+}
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/Wii.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/Wii.h
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..960f2273d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/Wii.h
@@ -0,0 +1,518 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2012 Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics. All rights reserved.
+
+ This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+ General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+ Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+ this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+ on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+ the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+ Contact information
+ -------------------
+
+ Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics
+ Web      :  http://www.tkjelectronics.com
+ e-mail   :  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+
+ IR camera support added by Allan Glover (adglover9.81@gmail.com) and Kristian Lauszus
+ */
+
+#ifndef _wii_h_
+#define _wii_h_
+
+#include "BTD.h"
+#include "controllerEnums.h"
+
+/* Wii event flags */
+#define WII_FLAG_MOTION_PLUS_CONNECTED          (1 << 0)
+#define WII_FLAG_NUNCHUCK_CONNECTED             (1 << 1)
+#define WII_FLAG_CALIBRATE_BALANCE_BOARD        (1 << 2)
+
+#define wii_check_flag(flag)  (wii_event_flag & (flag))
+#define wii_set_flag(flag)  (wii_event_flag |= (flag))
+#define wii_clear_flag(flag)  (wii_event_flag &= ~(flag))
+
+/** Enum used to read the joystick on the Nunchuck. */
+enum HatEnum {
+        /** Read the x-axis on the Nunchuck joystick. */
+        HatX = 0,
+        /** Read the y-axis on the Nunchuck joystick. */
+        HatY = 1,
+};
+
+/** Enum used to read the weight on Wii Balance Board. */
+enum BalanceBoardEnum {
+        TopRight = 0,
+        BotRight = 1,
+        TopLeft = 2,
+        BotLeft = 3,
+};
+
+/**
+ * This BluetoothService class implements support for the Wiimote including the Nunchuck and Motion Plus extension.
+ *
+ * It also support the Wii U Pro Controller.
+ */
+class WII : public BluetoothService {
+public:
+        /**
+         * Constructor for the WII class.
+         * @param  p   Pointer to BTD class instance.
+         * @param  pair   Set this to true in order to pair with the Wiimote. If the argument is omitted then it won't pair with it.
+         * One can use ::PAIR to set it to true.
+         */
+        WII(BTD *p, bool pair = false);
+
+        /** @name BluetoothService implementation */
+        /** Used this to disconnect any of the controllers. */
+        void disconnect();
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /** @name Wii Controller functions */
+        /**
+         * getButtonPress(Button b) will return true as long as the button is held down.
+         *
+         * While getButtonClick(Button b) will only return it once.
+         *
+         * So you instance if you need to increase a variable once you would use getButtonClick(Button b),
+         * but if you need to drive a robot forward you would use getButtonPress(Button b).
+         * @param  b          ::ButtonEnum to read.
+         * @return            getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b) will return a true as long as a button is held down, while getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b) will return true once for each button press.
+         */
+        bool getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b);
+        bool getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b);
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /** @name Wii Controller functions */
+
+        /** Call this to start the paring sequence with a controller */
+        void pair(void) {
+                if(pBtd)
+                        pBtd->pairWithWiimote();
+        };
+        /**
+         * Used to read the joystick of the Nunchuck.
+         * @param  a Either ::HatX or ::HatY.
+         * @return   Return the analog value in the range from approximately 25-230.
+         */
+        uint8_t getAnalogHat(HatEnum a);
+        /**
+         * Used to read the joystick of the Wii U Pro Controller.
+         * @param  a Either ::LeftHatX, ::LeftHatY, ::RightHatX or ::RightHatY.
+         * @return   Return the analog value in the range from approximately 800-3200.
+         */
+        uint16_t getAnalogHat(AnalogHatEnum a);
+
+        /**
+         * Pitch calculated from the Wiimote. A complimentary filter is used if the Motion Plus is connected.
+         * @return Pitch in the range from 0-360.
+         */
+        double getPitch() {
+                if(motionPlusConnected)
+                        return compPitch;
+                return getWiimotePitch();
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Roll calculated from the Wiimote. A complimentary filter is used if the Motion Plus is connected.
+         * @return Roll in the range from 0-360.
+         */
+        double getRoll() {
+                if(motionPlusConnected)
+                        return compRoll;
+                return getWiimoteRoll();
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * This is the yaw calculated by the gyro.
+         *
+         * <B>NOTE:</B> This angle will drift a lot and is only available if the Motion Plus extension is connected.
+         * @return The angle calculated using the gyro.
+         */
+        double getYaw() {
+                return gyroYaw;
+        };
+
+        /** Used to set all LEDs and rumble off. */
+        void setAllOff();
+        /** Turn off rumble. */
+        void setRumbleOff();
+        /** Turn on rumble. */
+        void setRumbleOn();
+        /** Toggle rumble. */
+        void setRumbleToggle();
+
+        /**
+         * Set LED value without using the ::LEDEnum.
+         * @param value See: ::LEDEnum.
+         */
+        void setLedRaw(uint8_t value);
+
+        /** Turn all LEDs off. */
+        void setLedOff() {
+                setLedRaw(0);
+        };
+        /**
+         * Turn the specific ::LEDEnum off.
+         * @param a The ::LEDEnum to turn off.
+         */
+        void setLedOff(LEDEnum a);
+        /**
+         * Turn the specific ::LEDEnum on.
+         * @param a The ::LEDEnum to turn on.
+         */
+        void setLedOn(LEDEnum a);
+        /**
+         * Toggle the specific ::LEDEnum.
+         * @param a The ::LEDEnum to toggle.
+         */
+        void setLedToggle(LEDEnum a);
+        /**
+         * This will set the LEDs, so the user can see which connections are active.
+         *
+         * The first ::LEDEnum indicate that the Wiimote is connected,
+         * the second ::LEDEnum indicate indicate that a Motion Plus is also connected
+         * the third ::LEDEnum will indicate that a Nunchuck controller is also connected.
+         */
+        void setLedStatus();
+
+        /**
+         * Return the battery level of the Wiimote.
+         * @return The battery level in the range 0-255.
+         */
+        uint8_t getBatteryLevel();
+
+        /**
+         * Return the Wiimote state.
+         * @return See: http://wiibrew.org/wiki/Wiimote#0x20:_Status.
+         */
+        uint8_t getWiiState() {
+                return wiiState;
+        };
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /**@{*/
+        /** Variable used to indicate if a Wiimote is connected. */
+        bool wiimoteConnected;
+        /** Variable used to indicate if a Nunchuck controller is connected. */
+        bool nunchuckConnected;
+        /** Variable used to indicate if a Nunchuck controller is connected. */
+        bool motionPlusConnected;
+        /** Variable used to indicate if a Wii U Pro controller is connected. */
+        bool wiiUProControllerConnected;
+        /** Variable used to indicate if a Wii Balance Board is connected. */
+        bool wiiBalanceBoardConnected;
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /* IMU Data, might be usefull if you need to do something more advanced than just calculating the angle */
+
+        /**@{*/
+
+        /** Pitch and roll calculated from the accelerometer inside the Wiimote. */
+        double getWiimotePitch() {
+                return (atan2(accYwiimote, accZwiimote) + PI) * RAD_TO_DEG;
+        };
+
+        double getWiimoteRoll() {
+                return (atan2(accXwiimote, accZwiimote) + PI) * RAD_TO_DEG;
+        };
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /**@{*/
+
+        /** Pitch and roll calculated from the accelerometer inside the Nunchuck. */
+        double getNunchuckPitch() {
+                return (atan2(accYnunchuck, accZnunchuck) + PI) * RAD_TO_DEG;
+        };
+
+        double getNunchuckRoll() {
+                return (atan2(accXnunchuck, accZnunchuck) + PI) * RAD_TO_DEG;
+        };
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /**@{*/
+        /** Accelerometer values used to calculate pitch and roll. */
+        int16_t accXwiimote, accYwiimote, accZwiimote;
+        int16_t accXnunchuck, accYnunchuck, accZnunchuck;
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /* Variables for the gyro inside the Motion Plus */
+        /** This is the pitch calculated by the gyro - use this to tune WII#pitchGyroScale. */
+        double gyroPitch;
+        /** This is the roll calculated by the gyro - use this to tune WII#rollGyroScale. */
+        double gyroRoll;
+        /** This is the yaw calculated by the gyro - use this to tune WII#yawGyroScale. */
+        double gyroYaw;
+
+        /**@{*/
+        /** The speed in deg/s from the gyro. */
+        double pitchGyroSpeed;
+        double rollGyroSpeed;
+        double yawGyroSpeed;
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /**@{*/
+        /** You might need to fine-tune these values. */
+        uint16_t pitchGyroScale;
+        uint16_t rollGyroScale;
+        uint16_t yawGyroScale;
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /**@{*/
+        /** Raw value read directly from the Motion Plus. */
+        int16_t gyroYawRaw;
+        int16_t gyroRollRaw;
+        int16_t gyroPitchRaw;
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /**@{*/
+        /** These values are set when the controller is first initialized. */
+        int16_t gyroYawZero;
+        int16_t gyroRollZero;
+        int16_t gyroPitchZero;
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /** @name Wii Balance Board functions */
+
+        /**
+         * Used to get the weight at the specific position on the Wii Balance Board.
+         * @param ::BalanceBoardEnum to read from.
+         * @return Returns the weight in kg.
+         */
+        float getWeight(BalanceBoardEnum pos);
+
+        /**
+         * Used to get total weight on the Wii Balance Board.
+         * @returnReturns the weight in kg.
+         */
+        float getTotalWeight();
+
+        /**
+         * Used to get the raw reading at the specific position on the Wii Balance Board.
+         * @param ::BalanceBoardEnum to read from.
+         * @return Returns the raw reading.
+         */
+        uint16_t getWeightRaw(BalanceBoardEnum pos) {
+                return wiiBalanceBoardRaw[pos];
+        };
+        /**@}*/
+
+#ifdef WIICAMERA
+        /** @name Wiimote IR camera functions
+         * You will have to set ::ENABLE_WII_IR_CAMERA in settings.h to 1 in order use the IR camera.
+         */
+        /** Initialises the camera as per the steps from: http://wiibrew.org/wiki/Wiimote#IR_Camera */
+        void IRinitialize();
+
+        /**
+         * IR object 1 x-position read from the Wii IR camera.
+         * @return The x-position of the object in the range 0-1023.
+         */
+        uint16_t getIRx1() {
+                return IR_object_x1;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * IR object 1 y-position read from the Wii IR camera.
+         * @return The y-position of the object in the range 0-767.
+         */
+        uint16_t getIRy1() {
+                return IR_object_y1;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * IR object 1 size read from the Wii IR camera.
+         * @return The size of the object in the range 0-15.
+         */
+        uint8_t getIRs1() {
+                return IR_object_s1;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * IR object 2 x-position read from the Wii IR camera.
+         * @return The x-position of the object in the range 0-1023.
+         */
+        uint16_t getIRx2() {
+                return IR_object_x2;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * IR object 2 y-position read from the Wii IR camera.
+         * @return The y-position of the object in the range 0-767.
+         */
+        uint16_t getIRy2() {
+                return IR_object_y2;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * IR object 2 size read from the Wii IR camera.
+         * @return The size of the object in the range 0-15.
+         */
+        uint8_t getIRs2() {
+                return IR_object_s2;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * IR object 3 x-position read from the Wii IR camera.
+         * @return The x-position of the object in the range 0-1023.
+         */
+        uint16_t getIRx3() {
+                return IR_object_x3;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * IR object 3 y-position read from the Wii IR camera.
+         * @return The y-position of the object in the range 0-767.
+         */
+        uint16_t getIRy3() {
+                return IR_object_y3;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * IR object 3 size read from the Wii IR camera.
+         * @return The size of the object in the range 0-15.
+         */
+        uint8_t getIRs3() {
+                return IR_object_s3;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * IR object 4 x-position read from the Wii IR camera.
+         * @return The x-position of the object in the range 0-1023.
+         */
+        uint16_t getIRx4() {
+                return IR_object_x4;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * IR object 4 y-position read from the Wii IR camera.
+         * @return The y-position of the object in the range 0-767.
+         */
+        uint16_t getIRy4() {
+                return IR_object_y4;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * IR object 4 size read from the Wii IR camera.
+         * @return The size of the object in the range 0-15.
+         */
+        uint8_t getIRs4() {
+                return IR_object_s4;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Use this to check if the camera is enabled or not.
+         * If not call WII#IRinitialize to initialize the IR camera.
+         * @return     True if it's enabled, false if not.
+         */
+        bool isIRCameraEnabled() {
+                return (wiiState & 0x08);
+        };
+        /**@}*/
+#endif
+
+protected:
+        /** @name BluetoothService implementation */
+        /**
+         * Used to pass acldata to the services.
+         * @param ACLData Incoming acldata.
+         */
+        void ACLData(uint8_t* ACLData);
+        /** Used to run part of the state machine. */
+        void Run();
+        /** Use this to reset the service. */
+        void Reset();
+        /**
+         * Called when the controller is successfully initialized.
+         * Use attachOnInit(void (*funcOnInit)(void)) to call your own function.
+         * This is useful for instance if you want to set the LEDs in a specific way.
+         */
+        void onInit();
+        /**@}*/
+
+private:
+
+        void L2CAP_task(); // L2CAP state machine
+
+        /* Variables filled from HCI event management */
+        bool activeConnection; // Used to indicate if it's already has established a connection
+
+        /* Variables used by high level L2CAP task */
+        uint8_t l2cap_state;
+        uint8_t wii_event_flag; // Used for Wii flags
+
+        uint32_t ButtonState;
+        uint32_t OldButtonState;
+        uint32_t ButtonClickState;
+        uint16_t hatValues[4];
+
+        uint8_t HIDBuffer[3]; // Used to store HID commands
+
+        uint16_t stateCounter;
+        bool unknownExtensionConnected;
+        bool extensionConnected;
+        bool checkBatteryLevel; // Set to true when getBatteryLevel() is called otherwise if should be false
+        bool motionPlusInside; // True if it's a new Wiimote with the Motion Plus extension build into it
+
+        /* L2CAP Channels */
+        uint8_t control_scid[2]; // L2CAP source CID for HID_Control
+        uint8_t control_dcid[2]; // 0x0060
+        uint8_t interrupt_scid[2]; // L2CAP source CID for HID_Interrupt
+        uint8_t interrupt_dcid[2]; // 0x0061
+
+        /* HID Commands */
+        void HID_Command(uint8_t* data, uint8_t nbytes);
+        void setReportMode(bool continuous, uint8_t mode);
+
+        void writeData(uint32_t offset, uint8_t size, uint8_t* data);
+        void initExtension1();
+        void initExtension2();
+
+        void statusRequest(); // Used to update the Wiimote state and battery level
+
+        void readData(uint32_t offset, uint16_t size, bool EEPROM);
+        void readExtensionType();
+        void readCalData();
+        void readWiiBalanceBoardCalibration(); // Used by the library to read the Wii Balance Board calibration values
+
+        void checkMotionPresent(); // Used to see if a Motion Plus is connected to the Wiimote
+        void initMotionPlus();
+        void activateMotionPlus();
+
+        uint16_t wiiBalanceBoardRaw[4]; // Wii Balance Board raw values
+        uint16_t wiiBalanceBoardCal[3][4]; // Wii Balance Board calibration values
+
+        double compPitch; // Fusioned angle using a complimentary filter if the Motion Plus is connected
+        double compRoll; // Fusioned angle using a complimentary filter if the Motion Plus is connected
+
+        bool activateNunchuck;
+        bool motionValuesReset; // This bool is true when the gyro values has been reset
+        uint32_t timer;
+
+        uint8_t wiiState; // Stores the value in l2capinbuf[12] - (0x01: Battery is nearly empty), (0x02:  An Extension Controller is connected), (0x04: Speaker enabled), (0x08: IR enabled), (0x10: LED1, 0x20: LED2, 0x40: LED3, 0x80: LED4)
+        uint8_t batteryLevel;
+
+#ifdef WIICAMERA
+        /* Private function and variables for the readings from the IR Camera */
+        void enableIRCamera1(); // Sets bit 2 of output report 13
+        void enableIRCamera2(); // Sets bit 2 of output report 1A
+        void writeSensitivityBlock1();
+        void writeSensitivityBlock2();
+        void write0x08Value();
+        void setWiiModeNumber(uint8_t mode_number);
+
+        uint16_t IR_object_x1; // IR x position 10 bits
+        uint16_t IR_object_y1; // IR y position 10 bits
+        uint8_t IR_object_s1; // IR size value
+        uint16_t IR_object_x2;
+        uint16_t IR_object_y2;
+        uint8_t IR_object_s2;
+        uint16_t IR_object_x3; // IR x position 10 bits
+        uint16_t IR_object_y3; // IR y position 10 bits
+        uint8_t IR_object_s3; // IR size value
+        uint16_t IR_object_x4;
+        uint16_t IR_object_y4;
+        uint8_t IR_object_s4;
+#endif
+};
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/WiiCameraReadme.md b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/WiiCameraReadme.md
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8577d73fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/WiiCameraReadme.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+Please see <http://wiibrew.org/wiki/Wiimote#IR_Camera> for the complete capabilities of the Wii camera. The IR camera code was written based on the above website and with support from Kristian Lauszus.
+
+This library is large, if you run into memory problems when uploading to the Arduino, disable serial debugging.
+
+To enable the IR camera code, simply set ```ENABLE_WII_IR_CAMERA``` to 1 in [settings.h](settings.h).
+
+This library implements the following settings:
+
+* Report sensitivity mode: 00 00 00 00 00 00 90 00 41	 40 00	 Suggested by inio (high sensitivity)
+* Data Format: Extended mode (0x03).  Full mode is not working yet. The output reports 0x3e and 0x3f need tampering with
+	* In this mode the camera outputs x and y coordinates and a size dimension for the 4 brightest points.
+
+Again, read through <http://wiibrew.org/wiki/Wiimote#IR_Camera> to get an understanding of the camera and its settings.
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/XBOXOLD.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/XBOXOLD.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..78e6e9a5f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/XBOXOLD.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,337 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2013 Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics. All rights reserved.
+
+ This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+ General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+ Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+ this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+ on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+ the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+ Contact information
+ -------------------
+
+ Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics
+ Web      :  http://www.tkjelectronics.com
+ e-mail   :  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#include "XBOXOLD.h"
+// To enable serial debugging see "settings.h"
+//#define EXTRADEBUG // Uncomment to get even more debugging data
+//#define PRINTREPORT // Uncomment to print the report send by the Xbox controller
+
+/** Buttons on the controllers */
+const uint8_t XBOXOLD_BUTTONS[] PROGMEM = {
+        0x01, // UP
+        0x08, // RIGHT
+        0x02, // DOWN
+        0x04, // LEFT
+
+        0x20, // BACK
+        0x10, // START
+        0x40, // L3
+        0x80, // R3
+
+        // A, B, X, Y, BLACK, WHITE, L1, and R1 are analog buttons
+        4, // BLACK
+        5, // WHTIE
+        6, // L1
+        7, // R1
+
+        1, // B
+        0, // A
+        2, // X
+        3, // Y
+};
+
+XBOXOLD::XBOXOLD(USB *p) :
+pUsb(p), // pointer to USB class instance - mandatory
+bAddress(0), // device address - mandatory
+bPollEnable(false) { // don't start polling before dongle is connected
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < XBOX_MAX_ENDPOINTS; i++) {
+                epInfo[i].epAddr = 0;
+                epInfo[i].maxPktSize = (i) ? 0 : 8;
+                epInfo[i].epAttribs = 0;
+                epInfo[i].bmNakPower = (i) ? USB_NAK_NOWAIT : USB_NAK_MAX_POWER;
+        }
+
+        if(pUsb) // register in USB subsystem
+                pUsb->RegisterDeviceClass(this); //set devConfig[] entry
+}
+
+uint8_t XBOXOLD::Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed) {
+        uint8_t buf[sizeof (USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR)];
+        USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR * udd = reinterpret_cast<USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR*>(buf);
+        uint8_t rcode;
+        UsbDevice *p = NULL;
+        EpInfo *oldep_ptr = NULL;
+        uint16_t PID;
+        uint16_t VID;
+
+        // get memory address of USB device address pool
+        AddressPool &addrPool = pUsb->GetAddressPool();
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nXBOXUSB Init"), 0x80);
+#endif
+        // check if address has already been assigned to an instance
+        if(bAddress) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nAddress in use"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                return USB_ERROR_CLASS_INSTANCE_ALREADY_IN_USE;
+        }
+
+        // Get pointer to pseudo device with address 0 assigned
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(0);
+
+        if(!p) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nAddress not found"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+        }
+
+        if(!p->epinfo) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nepinfo is null"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                return USB_ERROR_EPINFO_IS_NULL;
+        }
+
+        // Save old pointer to EP_RECORD of address 0
+        oldep_ptr = p->epinfo;
+
+        // Temporary assign new pointer to epInfo to p->epinfo in order to avoid toggle inconsistence
+        p->epinfo = epInfo;
+
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+
+        // Get device descriptor
+        rcode = pUsb->getDevDescr(0, 0, sizeof (USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR), (uint8_t*)buf); // Get device descriptor - addr, ep, nbytes, data
+        // Restore p->epinfo
+        p->epinfo = oldep_ptr;
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailGetDevDescr;
+
+        VID = udd->idVendor;
+        PID = udd->idProduct;
+
+        if((VID != XBOX_VID && VID != MADCATZ_VID && VID != JOYTECH_VID) || (PID != XBOX_OLD_PID1 && PID != XBOX_OLD_PID2 && PID != XBOX_OLD_PID3 && PID != XBOX_OLD_PID4)) // Check if VID and PID match
+                goto FailUnknownDevice;
+
+        // Allocate new address according to device class
+        bAddress = addrPool.AllocAddress(parent, false, port);
+
+        if(!bAddress)
+                return USB_ERROR_OUT_OF_ADDRESS_SPACE_IN_POOL;
+
+        // Extract Max Packet Size from device descriptor
+        epInfo[0].maxPktSize = udd->bMaxPacketSize0;
+
+        // Assign new address to the device
+        rcode = pUsb->setAddr(0, 0, bAddress);
+        if(rcode) {
+                p->lowspeed = false;
+                addrPool.FreeAddress(bAddress);
+                bAddress = 0;
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nsetAddr: "), 0x80);
+                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (rcode, 0x80);
+#endif
+                return rcode;
+        }
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nAddr: "), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (bAddress, 0x80);
+#endif
+        //delay(300); // Spec says you should wait at least 200ms
+
+        p->lowspeed = false;
+
+        //get pointer to assigned address record
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(bAddress);
+        if(!p)
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+
+        // Assign epInfo to epinfo pointer - only EP0 is known
+        rcode = pUsb->setEpInfoEntry(bAddress, 1, epInfo);
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetDevTblEntry;
+
+        /* The application will work in reduced host mode, so we can save program and data
+           memory space. After verifying the VID we will use known values for the
+           configuration values for device, interface, endpoints and HID for the XBOX controllers */
+
+        /* Initialize data structures for endpoints of device */
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE ].epAddr = 0x01; // XBOX report endpoint
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE ].epAttribs = USB_TRANSFER_TYPE_INTERRUPT;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE ].bmNakPower = USB_NAK_NOWAIT; // Only poll once for interrupt endpoints
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE ].maxPktSize = EP_MAXPKTSIZE;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE ].bmSndToggle = 0;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE ].bmRcvToggle = 0;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE ].epAddr = 0x02; // XBOX output endpoint
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE ].epAttribs = USB_TRANSFER_TYPE_INTERRUPT;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE ].bmNakPower = USB_NAK_NOWAIT; // Only poll once for interrupt endpoints
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE ].maxPktSize = EP_MAXPKTSIZE;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE ].bmSndToggle = 0;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE ].bmRcvToggle = 0;
+
+        rcode = pUsb->setEpInfoEntry(bAddress, 3, epInfo);
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetDevTblEntry;
+
+        delay(200); // Give time for address change
+
+        rcode = pUsb->setConf(bAddress, epInfo[ XBOX_CONTROL_PIPE ].epAddr, 1);
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetConfDescr;
+
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nXbox Controller Connected\r\n"), 0x80);
+#endif
+        if(pFuncOnInit)
+                pFuncOnInit(); // Call the user function
+        XboxConnected = true;
+        bPollEnable = true;
+        return 0; // Successful configuration
+
+        /* Diagnostic messages */
+FailGetDevDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailGetDevDescr();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailSetDevTblEntry:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailSetDevTblEntry();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailSetConfDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailSetConfDescr();
+#endif
+        goto Fail;
+
+FailUnknownDevice:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailUnknownDevice(VID, PID);
+#endif
+        rcode = USB_DEV_CONFIG_ERROR_DEVICE_NOT_SUPPORTED;
+
+Fail:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nXbox Init Failed, error code: "), 0x80);
+        NotifyFail(rcode);
+#endif
+        Release();
+        return rcode;
+}
+
+/* Performs a cleanup after failed Init() attempt */
+uint8_t XBOXOLD::Release() {
+        XboxConnected = false;
+        pUsb->GetAddressPool().FreeAddress(bAddress);
+        bAddress = 0;
+        bPollEnable = false;
+        return 0;
+}
+
+uint8_t XBOXOLD::Poll() {
+        if(!bPollEnable)
+                return 0;
+        uint16_t BUFFER_SIZE = EP_MAXPKTSIZE;
+        pUsb->inTransfer(bAddress, epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE ].epAddr, &BUFFER_SIZE, readBuf); // input on endpoint 1
+        readReport();
+#ifdef PRINTREPORT
+        printReport(BUFFER_SIZE); // Uncomment "#define PRINTREPORT" to print the report send by the Xbox controller
+#endif
+        return 0;
+}
+
+void XBOXOLD::readReport() {
+        ButtonState = readBuf[2];
+
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < sizeof (buttonValues); i++)
+                buttonValues[i] = readBuf[i + 4]; // A, B, X, Y, BLACK, WHITE, L1, and R1
+
+        hatValue[LeftHatX] = (int16_t)(((uint16_t)readBuf[12] << 8) | readBuf[13]);
+        hatValue[LeftHatY] = (int16_t)(((uint16_t)readBuf[14] << 8) | readBuf[15]);
+        hatValue[RightHatX] = (int16_t)(((uint16_t)readBuf[16] << 8) | readBuf[17]);
+        hatValue[RightHatY] = (int16_t)(((uint16_t)readBuf[18] << 8) | readBuf[19]);
+
+        //Notify(PSTR("\r\nButtonState"), 0x80);
+        //PrintHex<uint8_t>(ButtonState, 0x80);
+
+        if(ButtonState != OldButtonState || memcmp(buttonValues, oldButtonValues, sizeof (buttonValues)) != 0) {
+                ButtonClickState = ButtonState & ~OldButtonState; // Update click state variable
+                OldButtonState = ButtonState;
+
+                for(uint8_t i = 0; i < sizeof (buttonValues); i++) {
+                        if(oldButtonValues[i] == 0 && buttonValues[i] != 0)
+                                buttonClicked[i] = true; // Update A, B, X, Y, BLACK, WHITE, L1, and R1 click state
+                        oldButtonValues[i] = buttonValues[i];
+                }
+        }
+}
+
+void XBOXOLD::printReport(uint16_t length) { //Uncomment "#define PRINTREPORT" to print the report send by the Xbox controller
+#ifdef PRINTREPORT
+        if(readBuf == NULL)
+                return;
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < length; i++) {
+                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (readBuf[i], 0x80);
+                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+        }
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\n"), 0x80);
+#endif
+}
+
+uint8_t XBOXOLD::getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b) {
+        uint8_t button = pgm_read_byte(&XBOXOLD_BUTTONS[(uint8_t)b]);
+        if(b == A || b == B || b == X || b == Y || b == BLACK || b == WHITE || b == L1 || b == R1) // A, B, X, Y, BLACK, WHITE, L1, and R1 are analog buttons
+                return buttonValues[button]; // Analog buttons
+        return (ButtonState & button); // Digital buttons
+}
+
+bool XBOXOLD::getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b) {
+        uint8_t button = pgm_read_byte(&XBOXOLD_BUTTONS[(uint8_t)b]);
+        if(b == A || b == B || b == X || b == Y || b == BLACK || b == WHITE || b == L1 || b == R1) { // A, B, X, Y, BLACK, WHITE, L1, and R1 are analog buttons
+                if(buttonClicked[button]) {
+                        buttonClicked[button] = false;
+                        return true;
+                }
+                return false;
+        }
+
+        bool click = (ButtonClickState & button);
+        ButtonClickState &= ~button; // clear "click" event
+        return click;
+}
+
+int16_t XBOXOLD::getAnalogHat(AnalogHatEnum a) {
+        return hatValue[a];
+}
+
+/* Xbox Controller commands */
+void XBOXOLD::XboxCommand(uint8_t* data, uint16_t nbytes) {
+        //bmRequest = Host to device (0x00) | Class (0x20) | Interface (0x01) = 0x21, bRequest = Set Report (0x09), Report ID (0x00), Report Type (Output 0x02), interface (0x00), datalength, datalength, data)
+        pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, epInfo[XBOX_CONTROL_PIPE].epAddr, bmREQ_HID_OUT, HID_REQUEST_SET_REPORT, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00, nbytes, nbytes, data, NULL);
+}
+
+void XBOXOLD::setRumbleOn(uint8_t lValue, uint8_t rValue) {
+        uint8_t writeBuf[6];
+
+        writeBuf[0] = 0x00;
+        writeBuf[1] = 0x06;
+        writeBuf[2] = 0x00;
+        writeBuf[3] = rValue; // small weight
+        writeBuf[4] = 0x00;
+        writeBuf[5] = lValue; // big weight
+
+        XboxCommand(writeBuf, 6);
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/XBOXOLD.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/XBOXOLD.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9a36b5cca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/XBOXOLD.h
@@ -0,0 +1,185 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2013 Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics. All rights reserved.
+
+ This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+ General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+ Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+ this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+ on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+ the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+ Contact information
+ -------------------
+
+ Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics
+ Web      :  http://www.tkjelectronics.com
+ e-mail   :  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#ifndef _xboxold_h_
+#define _xboxold_h_
+
+#include "Usb.h"
+#include "hid.h"
+#include "controllerEnums.h"
+
+/* Data Xbox taken from descriptors */
+#define EP_MAXPKTSIZE       32 // Max size for data via USB
+
+/* Names we give to the 3 Xbox pipes */
+#define XBOX_CONTROL_PIPE    0
+#define XBOX_INPUT_PIPE      1
+#define XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE     2
+
+// PID and VID of the different devices
+#define XBOX_VID                                0x045E // Microsoft Corporation
+#define MADCATZ_VID                             0x1BAD // For unofficial Mad Catz controllers
+#define JOYTECH_VID                             0x162E // For unofficial Joytech controllers
+
+#define XBOX_OLD_PID1                           0x0202 // Original Microsoft Xbox controller (US)
+#define XBOX_OLD_PID2                           0x0285 // Original Microsoft Xbox controller (Japan)
+#define XBOX_OLD_PID3                           0x0287 // Microsoft Microsoft Xbox Controller S
+#define XBOX_OLD_PID4                           0x0289 // Smaller Microsoft Xbox controller (US)
+
+#define XBOX_MAX_ENDPOINTS   3
+
+/** This class implements support for a the original Xbox controller via USB. */
+class XBOXOLD : public USBDeviceConfig {
+public:
+        /**
+         * Constructor for the XBOXOLD class.
+         * @param  pUsb   Pointer to USB class instance.
+         */
+        XBOXOLD(USB *pUsb);
+
+        /** @name USBDeviceConfig implementation */
+        /**
+         * Initialize the Xbox Controller.
+         * @param  parent   Hub number.
+         * @param  port     Port number on the hub.
+         * @param  lowspeed Speed of the device.
+         * @return          0 on success.
+         */
+        uint8_t Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed);
+        /**
+         * Release the USB device.
+         * @return 0 on success.
+         */
+        uint8_t Release();
+        /**
+         * Poll the USB Input endpoins and run the state machines.
+         * @return 0 on success.
+         */
+        uint8_t Poll();
+
+        /**
+         * Get the device address.
+         * @return The device address.
+         */
+        virtual uint8_t GetAddress() {
+                return bAddress;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Used to check if the controller has been initialized.
+         * @return True if it's ready.
+         */
+        virtual bool isReady() {
+                return bPollEnable;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Used by the USB core to check what this driver support.
+         * @param  vid The device's VID.
+         * @param  pid The device's PID.
+         * @return     Returns true if the device's VID and PID matches this driver.
+         */
+        virtual bool VIDPIDOK(uint16_t vid, uint16_t pid) {
+                return ((vid == XBOX_VID || vid == MADCATZ_VID || vid == JOYTECH_VID) && (pid == XBOX_OLD_PID1 || pid == XBOX_OLD_PID2 || pid == XBOX_OLD_PID3 || pid == XBOX_OLD_PID4));
+        };
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /** @name Xbox Controller functions */
+        /**
+         * getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b) will return true as long as the button is held down.
+         *
+         * While getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b) will only return it once.
+         *
+         * So you instance if you need to increase a variable once you would use getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b),
+         * but if you need to drive a robot forward you would use getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b).
+         * @param  b          ::ButtonEnum to read.
+         * @return            getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b) will return a bool, while getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b) will return a byte if reading ::L2 or ::R2.
+         */
+        uint8_t getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b);
+        bool getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b);
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /** @name Xbox Controller functions */
+        /**
+         * Return the analog value from the joysticks on the controller.
+         * @param  a          Either ::LeftHatX, ::LeftHatY, ::RightHatX or ::RightHatY.
+         * @return            Returns a signed 16-bit integer.
+         */
+        int16_t getAnalogHat(AnalogHatEnum a);
+
+        /** Turn rumble off the controller. */
+        void setRumbleOff() {
+                setRumbleOn(0, 0);
+        };
+        /**
+         * Turn rumble on.
+         * @param lValue     Left motor (big weight) inside the controller.
+         * @param rValue     Right motor (small weight) inside the controller.
+         */
+        void setRumbleOn(uint8_t lValue, uint8_t rValue);
+
+        /**
+         * Used to call your own function when the controller is successfully initialized.
+         * @param funcOnInit Function to call.
+         */
+        void attachOnInit(void (*funcOnInit)(void)) {
+                pFuncOnInit = funcOnInit;
+        };
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /** True if a Xbox controller is connected. */
+        bool XboxConnected;
+
+protected:
+        /** Pointer to USB class instance. */
+        USB *pUsb;
+        /** Device address. */
+        uint8_t bAddress;
+        /** Endpoint info structure. */
+        EpInfo epInfo[XBOX_MAX_ENDPOINTS];
+
+private:
+        /**
+         * Called when the controller is successfully initialized.
+         * Use attachOnInit(void (*funcOnInit)(void)) to call your own function.
+         * This is useful for instance if you want to set the LEDs in a specific way.
+         */
+        void (*pFuncOnInit)(void); // Pointer to function called in onInit()
+
+        bool bPollEnable;
+
+        /* Variables to store the digital buttons */
+        uint8_t ButtonState;
+        uint8_t OldButtonState;
+        uint8_t ButtonClickState;
+
+        /* Variables to store the analog buttons */
+        uint8_t buttonValues[8]; // A, B, X, Y, BLACK, WHITE, L1, and R1
+        uint8_t oldButtonValues[8];
+        bool buttonClicked[8];
+
+        int16_t hatValue[4]; // Joystick values
+
+        uint8_t readBuf[EP_MAXPKTSIZE]; // General purpose buffer for input data
+
+        void readReport(); // Read incoming data
+        void printReport(uint16_t length); // Print incoming date
+
+        /* Private commands */
+        void XboxCommand(uint8_t* data, uint16_t nbytes);
+};
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/XBOXONE.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/XBOXONE.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2159c0528
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/XBOXONE.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,374 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2012 Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics. All rights reserved.
+   Copyright (C) 2015 guruthree
+
+ This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+ General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+ Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+ this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+ on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+ the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+ Contact information
+ -------------------
+
+ Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics
+ Web      :  http://www.tkjelectronics.com
+ e-mail   :  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+
+ guruthree
+ Web      :  https://github.com/guruthree/
+ */
+
+#include "XBOXONE.h"
+// To enable serial debugging see "settings.h"
+//#define EXTRADEBUG // Uncomment to get even more debugging data
+//#define PRINTREPORT // Uncomment to print the report send by the Xbox ONE Controller
+
+XBOXONE::XBOXONE(USB *p) :
+pUsb(p), // pointer to USB class instance - mandatory
+bAddress(0), // device address - mandatory
+bPollEnable(false) { // don't start polling before dongle is connected
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < XBOX_MAX_ENDPOINTS; i++) {
+                epInfo[i].epAddr = 0;
+                epInfo[i].maxPktSize = (i) ? 0 : 8;
+                epInfo[i].epAttribs = 0;
+                epInfo[i].bmNakPower = (i) ? USB_NAK_NOWAIT : USB_NAK_MAX_POWER;
+        }
+
+        if(pUsb) // register in USB subsystem
+                pUsb->RegisterDeviceClass(this); //set devConfig[] entry
+}
+
+uint8_t XBOXONE::Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed) {
+        uint8_t buf[sizeof (USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR)];
+        USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR * udd = reinterpret_cast<USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR*>(buf);
+        uint8_t rcode;
+        UsbDevice *p = NULL;
+        EpInfo *oldep_ptr = NULL;
+        uint16_t PID;
+        uint16_t VID;
+
+        // get memory address of USB device address pool
+        AddressPool &addrPool = pUsb->GetAddressPool();
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nXBOXONE Init"), 0x80);
+#endif
+        // check if address has already been assigned to an instance
+        if(bAddress) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nAddress in use"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                return USB_ERROR_CLASS_INSTANCE_ALREADY_IN_USE;
+        }
+
+        // Get pointer to pseudo device with address 0 assigned
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(0);
+
+        if(!p) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nAddress not found"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+        }
+
+        if(!p->epinfo) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nepinfo is null"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                return USB_ERROR_EPINFO_IS_NULL;
+        }
+
+        // Save old pointer to EP_RECORD of address 0
+        oldep_ptr = p->epinfo;
+
+        // Temporary assign new pointer to epInfo to p->epinfo in order to avoid toggle inconsistence
+        p->epinfo = epInfo;
+
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+
+        // Get device descriptor
+        rcode = pUsb->getDevDescr(0, 0, sizeof (USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR), (uint8_t*)buf); // Get device descriptor - addr, ep, nbytes, data
+        // Restore p->epinfo
+        p->epinfo = oldep_ptr;
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailGetDevDescr;
+
+        VID = udd->idVendor;
+        PID = udd->idProduct;
+
+        if(!VIDPIDOK(VID, PID)) // Check VID
+                goto FailUnknownDevice;
+
+        // Allocate new address according to device class
+        bAddress = addrPool.AllocAddress(parent, false, port);
+
+        if(!bAddress)
+                return USB_ERROR_OUT_OF_ADDRESS_SPACE_IN_POOL;
+
+        // Extract Max Packet Size from device descriptor
+        epInfo[0].maxPktSize = udd->bMaxPacketSize0;
+
+        // Assign new address to the device
+        rcode = pUsb->setAddr(0, 0, bAddress);
+        if(rcode) {
+                p->lowspeed = false;
+                addrPool.FreeAddress(bAddress);
+                bAddress = 0;
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nsetAddr: "), 0x80);
+                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (rcode, 0x80);
+#endif
+                return rcode;
+        }
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nAddr: "), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (bAddress, 0x80);
+#endif
+        //delay(300); // Spec says you should wait at least 200ms
+
+        p->lowspeed = false;
+
+        //get pointer to assigned address record
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(bAddress);
+        if(!p)
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+
+        // Assign epInfo to epinfo pointer - only EP0 is known
+        rcode = pUsb->setEpInfoEntry(bAddress, 1, epInfo);
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetDevTblEntry;
+
+        /* The application will work in reduced host mode, so we can save program and data
+           memory space. After verifying the VID we will use known values for the
+           configuration values for device, interface, endpoints and HID for the XBOXONE Controllers */
+
+        /* Initialize data structures for endpoints of device */
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE ].epAddr = 0x01; // XBOX one output endpoint
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE ].epAttribs = USB_TRANSFER_TYPE_INTERRUPT;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE ].bmNakPower = USB_NAK_NOWAIT; // Only poll once for interrupt endpoints
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE ].maxPktSize = EP_MAXPKTSIZE;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE ].bmSndToggle = 0;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE ].bmRcvToggle = 0;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE ].epAddr = 0x01; // XBOX one input endpoint
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE ].epAttribs = USB_TRANSFER_TYPE_INTERRUPT;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE ].bmNakPower = USB_NAK_NOWAIT; // Only poll once for interrupt endpoints
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE ].maxPktSize = EP_MAXPKTSIZE;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE ].bmSndToggle = 0;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE ].bmRcvToggle = 0;
+
+        rcode = pUsb->setEpInfoEntry(bAddress, 3, epInfo);
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetDevTblEntry;
+
+        delay(200); // Give time for address change
+
+        rcode = pUsb->setConf(bAddress, epInfo[ XBOX_CONTROL_PIPE ].epAddr, 1);
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetConfDescr;
+
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nXbox One Controller Connected\r\n"), 0x80);
+#endif
+
+        delay(200); // let things settle
+
+        // initialize the controller for input
+        writeBuf[0] = 0x05;
+        writeBuf[1] = 0x20;
+        rcode = XboxCommand(writeBuf, 2);
+        if (rcode)
+                goto Fail;
+
+        onInit();
+        XboxOneConnected = true;
+        bPollEnable = true;
+        return 0; // Successful configuration
+
+        /* Diagnostic messages */
+FailGetDevDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailGetDevDescr();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailSetDevTblEntry:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailSetDevTblEntry();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailSetConfDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailSetConfDescr();
+#endif
+        goto Fail;
+
+FailUnknownDevice:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailUnknownDevice(VID, PID);
+#endif
+        rcode = USB_DEV_CONFIG_ERROR_DEVICE_NOT_SUPPORTED;
+
+Fail:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nXbox One Init Failed, error code: "), 0x80);
+        NotifyFail(rcode);
+#endif
+        Release();
+        return rcode;
+}
+
+/* Performs a cleanup after failed Init() attempt */
+uint8_t XBOXONE::Release() {
+        XboxOneConnected = false;
+        pUsb->GetAddressPool().FreeAddress(bAddress);
+        bAddress = 0;
+        bPollEnable = false;
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nXbox One Controller Disconnected\r\n"), 0x80);
+#endif
+        return 0;
+}
+
+uint8_t XBOXONE::Poll() {
+        if(!bPollEnable)
+                return 0;
+        uint16_t BUFFER_SIZE = EP_MAXPKTSIZE;
+        uint8_t rcode = pUsb->inTransfer(bAddress, epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE ].epAddr, &BUFFER_SIZE, readBuf);
+        if (!rcode) {
+                readReport();
+#ifdef PRINTREPORT
+                printReport(); // Uncomment "#define PRINTREPORT" to print the report send by the Xbox ONE Controller
+#endif
+        }
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                else if (rcode != 0x04) { // not a matter of no update to send
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nXbox One Poll Failed, error code: "), 0x80);
+                NotifyFail(rcode);
+                }
+#endif
+        return rcode;
+}
+
+void XBOXONE::readReport() {
+        if(readBuf == NULL)
+                return;
+        if(readBuf[0] == 0x07) {
+                // The XBOX button has a separate message
+                if(readBuf[4] == 1)
+                        ButtonState |= XBOX_BUTTONS[XBOX];
+                else
+                        ButtonState &= ~XBOX_BUTTONS[XBOX];
+        }
+        if(readBuf[0] != 0x20) { // Check if it's the correct report, otherwise return - the controller also sends different status reports
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nXbox Poll: "), 0x80);
+                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (readBuf[0], 0x80); // 0x03 is a heart beat report!
+#endif
+                return;
+        }
+
+        uint16_t xbox = ButtonState & XBOX_BUTTONS[XBOX]; // Since the XBOX button is separate, save it and add it back in
+        // xbox button from before, dpad, abxy, start/back, sync, stick click, shoulder buttons
+        ButtonState = xbox | (((uint16_t)readBuf[5] & 0xF) << 8) | (readBuf[4] & 0xF0)  | (((uint16_t)readBuf[4] & 0x0C) << 10) | ((readBuf[4] & 0x01) << 3) | (((uint16_t)readBuf[5] & 0xC0) << 8) | ((readBuf[5] & 0x30) >> 4);
+
+        triggerValue[0] = (uint16_t)(((uint16_t)readBuf[7] << 8) | readBuf[6]);
+        triggerValue[1] = (uint16_t)(((uint16_t)readBuf[9] << 8) | readBuf[8]);
+
+        hatValue[LeftHatX] = (int16_t)(((uint16_t)readBuf[11] << 8) | readBuf[10]);
+        hatValue[LeftHatY] = (int16_t)(((uint16_t)readBuf[13] << 8) | readBuf[12]);
+        hatValue[RightHatX] = (int16_t)(((uint16_t)readBuf[15] << 8) | readBuf[14]);
+        hatValue[RightHatY] = (int16_t)(((uint16_t)readBuf[17] << 8) | readBuf[16]);
+
+        //Notify(PSTR("\r\nButtonState"), 0x80);
+        //PrintHex<uint16_t>(ButtonState, 0x80);
+
+        if(ButtonState != OldButtonState) {
+                ButtonClickState = ButtonState & ~OldButtonState; // Update click state variable
+                OldButtonState = ButtonState;
+        }
+
+        // Handle click detection for triggers
+        if(triggerValue[0] != 0 && triggerValueOld[0] == 0)
+            L2Clicked = true;
+        triggerValueOld[0] = triggerValue[0];
+        if(triggerValue[1] != 0 && triggerValueOld[1] == 0)
+            R2Clicked = true;
+        triggerValueOld[1] = triggerValue[1];
+}
+
+void XBOXONE::printReport() { //Uncomment "#define PRINTREPORT" to print the report send by the Xbox ONE Controller
+#ifdef PRINTREPORT
+        if(readBuf == NULL)
+                return;
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < XBOX_REPORT_BUFFER_SIZE; i++) {
+                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (readBuf[i], 0x80);
+                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+        }
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\n"), 0x80);
+#endif
+}
+
+uint16_t XBOXONE::getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b) {
+        if(b == L2) // These are analog buttons
+                return triggerValue[0];
+        else if(b == R2)
+                return triggerValue[1];
+        return (bool)(ButtonState & ((uint16_t)pgm_read_word(&XBOX_BUTTONS[(uint8_t)b])));
+}
+
+bool XBOXONE::getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b) {
+        if(b == L2) {
+                if(L2Clicked) {
+                        L2Clicked = false;
+                        return true;
+                }
+                return false;
+        } else if(b == R2) {
+                if(R2Clicked) {
+                        R2Clicked = false;
+                        return true;
+                }
+                return false;
+        }
+        uint16_t button = pgm_read_word(&XBOX_BUTTONS[(uint8_t)b]);
+        bool click = (ButtonClickState & button);
+        ButtonClickState &= ~button; // clear "click" event
+        return click;
+}
+
+int16_t XBOXONE::getAnalogHat(AnalogHatEnum a) {
+        return hatValue[a];
+}
+
+/* Xbox Controller commands */
+uint8_t XBOXONE::XboxCommand(uint8_t* data, uint16_t nbytes) {
+        uint8_t rcode = pUsb->outTransfer(bAddress, epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE ].epAddr, nbytes, data);
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nXboxCommand, Return: "), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (rcode, 0x80);
+#endif
+        return rcode;
+}
+
+void XBOXONE::onInit() {
+        // a short buzz to show the controller is active
+        writeBuf[0] = 0x09;
+        writeBuf[1] = 0x08;
+        writeBuf[2] = 0x00;
+        writeBuf[3] = 0x09;
+        writeBuf[4] = 0x00;
+        writeBuf[5] = 0x0f;
+        writeBuf[6] = 0x04;
+        writeBuf[7] = 0x04;
+        writeBuf[8] = 0x20;
+        writeBuf[9] = 0x20;
+        writeBuf[10] = 0x80;
+        XboxCommand(writeBuf, 11);
+
+        if(pFuncOnInit)
+                pFuncOnInit(); // Call the user function
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/XBOXONE.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/XBOXONE.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..11710fcf1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/XBOXONE.h
@@ -0,0 +1,172 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2012 Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics. All rights reserved.
+   Copyright (C) 2015 guruthree
+
+ This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+ General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+ Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+ this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+ on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+ the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+ Contact information
+ -------------------
+
+ Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics
+ Web      :  http://www.tkjelectronics.com
+ e-mail   :  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+
+ guruthree
+ Web      :  https://github.com/guruthree/
+ */
+
+
+#ifndef _xboxone_h_
+#define _xboxone_h_
+
+#include "Usb.h"
+#include "xboxEnums.h"
+
+/* Data Xbox ONE taken from descriptors */
+#define EP_MAXPKTSIZE       32 // max size for data via USB
+
+/* Names we give to the 3 XboxONE pipes */
+#define XBOX_CONTROL_PIPE    0
+#define XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE     1
+#define XBOX_INPUT_PIPE      2
+
+// PID and VID of the different devices
+#define XBOX_VID                                0x045E // Microsoft Corporation
+#define XBOX_ONE_PID                            0x02D1 // Microsoft One Wired controller
+
+#define XBOX_REPORT_BUFFER_SIZE 14 // Size of the input report buffer
+
+#define XBOX_MAX_ENDPOINTS   3
+
+/** This class implements support for a Xbox ONE controller connected via USB. */
+class XBOXONE : public USBDeviceConfig {
+public:
+        /**
+         * Constructor for the XBOXONE class.
+         * @param  pUsb   Pointer to USB class instance.
+         */
+        XBOXONE(USB *pUsb);
+
+        /** @name USBDeviceConfig implementation */
+        /**
+         * Initialize the Xbox Controller.
+         * @param  parent   Hub number.
+         * @param  port     Port number on the hub.
+         * @param  lowspeed Speed of the device.
+         * @return          0 on success.
+         */
+        virtual uint8_t Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed);
+        /**
+         * Release the USB device.
+         * @return 0 on success.
+         */
+        virtual uint8_t Release();
+        /**
+         * Poll the USB Input endpoins and run the state machines.
+         * @return 0 on success.
+         */
+        virtual uint8_t Poll();
+
+        /**
+         * Get the device address.
+         * @return The device address.
+         */
+        virtual uint8_t GetAddress() {
+                return bAddress;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Used to check if the controller has been initialized.
+         * @return True if it's ready.
+         */
+        virtual bool isReady() {
+                return bPollEnable;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Used by the USB core to check what this driver support.
+         * @param  vid The device's VID.
+         * @param  pid The device's PID.
+         * @return     Returns true if the device's VID and PID matches this driver.
+         */
+        virtual bool VIDPIDOK(uint16_t vid, uint16_t pid) {
+                return (vid == XBOX_VID && pid == XBOX_ONE_PID);
+        };
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /** @name Xbox Controller functions */
+        /**
+         * getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b) will return true as long as the button is held down.
+         *
+         * While getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b) will only return it once.
+         *
+         * So you instance if you need to increase a variable once you would use getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b),
+         * but if you need to drive a robot forward you would use getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b).
+         * @param  b          ::ButtonEnum to read.
+         * @return            getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b) will return a bool, while getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b) will return a word if reading ::L2 or ::R2.
+         */
+        uint16_t getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b);
+        bool getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b);
+
+        /**
+         * Return the analog value from the joysticks on the controller.
+         * @param  a          Either ::LeftHatX, ::LeftHatY, ::RightHatX or ::RightHatY.
+         * @return            Returns a signed 16-bit integer.
+         */
+        int16_t getAnalogHat(AnalogHatEnum a);
+
+        /**
+         * Used to call your own function when the controller is successfully initialized.
+         * @param funcOnInit Function to call.
+         */
+        void attachOnInit(void (*funcOnInit)(void)) {
+                pFuncOnInit = funcOnInit;
+        };
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /** True if a Xbox ONE controller is connected. */
+        bool XboxOneConnected;
+
+protected:
+        /** Pointer to USB class instance. */
+        USB *pUsb;
+        /** Device address. */
+        uint8_t bAddress;
+        /** Endpoint info structure. */
+        EpInfo epInfo[XBOX_MAX_ENDPOINTS];
+
+private:
+        /**
+         * Called when the controller is successfully initialized.
+         * Use attachOnInit(void (*funcOnInit)(void)) to call your own function.
+         */
+        void onInit();
+        void (*pFuncOnInit)(void); // Pointer to function called in onInit()
+
+        bool bPollEnable;
+
+        /* Variables to store the buttons */
+        uint16_t ButtonState;
+        uint16_t OldButtonState;
+        uint16_t ButtonClickState;
+        int16_t hatValue[4];
+        uint16_t triggerValue[2];
+        uint16_t triggerValueOld[2];
+
+        bool L2Clicked; // These buttons are analog, so we use we use these bools to check if they where clicked or not
+        bool R2Clicked;
+
+        uint8_t readBuf[EP_MAXPKTSIZE]; // General purpose buffer for input data
+        uint8_t writeBuf[12]; // General purpose buffer for output data
+
+        void readReport(); // read incoming data
+        void printReport(); // print incoming date - Uncomment for debugging
+
+        /* Private commands */
+        uint8_t XboxCommand(uint8_t* data, uint16_t nbytes);
+};
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/XBOXRECV.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/XBOXRECV.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..41f1ff581
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/XBOXRECV.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,583 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2012 Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics. All rights reserved.
+
+ This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+ General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+ Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+ this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+ on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+ the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+ Contact information
+ -------------------
+
+ Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics
+ Web      :  http://www.tkjelectronics.com
+ e-mail   :  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+
+ getBatteryLevel and checkStatus functions made by timstamp.co.uk found using BusHound from Perisoft.net
+ */
+
+#include "XBOXRECV.h"
+// To enable serial debugging see "settings.h"
+//#define EXTRADEBUG // Uncomment to get even more debugging data
+//#define PRINTREPORT // Uncomment to print the report send by the Xbox 360 Controller
+
+XBOXRECV::XBOXRECV(USB *p) :
+pUsb(p), // pointer to USB class instance - mandatory
+bAddress(0), // device address - mandatory
+bPollEnable(false) { // don't start polling before dongle is connected
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < XBOX_MAX_ENDPOINTS; i++) {
+                epInfo[i].epAddr = 0;
+                epInfo[i].maxPktSize = (i) ? 0 : 8;
+                epInfo[i].epAttribs = 0;
+                epInfo[i].bmNakPower = (i) ? USB_NAK_NOWAIT : USB_NAK_MAX_POWER;
+        }
+
+        if(pUsb) // register in USB subsystem
+                pUsb->RegisterDeviceClass(this); //set devConfig[] entry
+}
+
+uint8_t XBOXRECV::ConfigureDevice(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed) {
+        const uint8_t constBufSize = sizeof (USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR);
+        uint8_t buf[constBufSize];
+        USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR * udd = reinterpret_cast<USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR*>(buf);
+        uint8_t rcode;
+        UsbDevice *p = NULL;
+        EpInfo *oldep_ptr = NULL;
+        uint16_t PID, VID;
+
+        AddressPool &addrPool = pUsb->GetAddressPool(); // Get memory address of USB device address pool
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nXBOXRECV Init"), 0x80);
+#endif
+
+        if(bAddress) { // Check if address has already been assigned to an instance
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nAddress in use"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                return USB_ERROR_CLASS_INSTANCE_ALREADY_IN_USE;
+        }
+
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(0); // Get pointer to pseudo device with address 0 assigned
+
+        if(!p) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nAddress not found"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+        }
+
+        if(!p->epinfo) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nepinfo is null"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                return USB_ERROR_EPINFO_IS_NULL;
+        }
+
+        oldep_ptr = p->epinfo; // Save old pointer to EP_RECORD of address 0
+        p->epinfo = epInfo; // Temporary assign new pointer to epInfo to p->epinfo in order to avoid toggle inconsistence
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+
+        rcode = pUsb->getDevDescr(0, 0, constBufSize, (uint8_t*)buf); // Get device descriptor - addr, ep, nbytes, data
+
+        p->epinfo = oldep_ptr; // Restore p->epinfo
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailGetDevDescr;
+
+        VID = udd->idVendor;
+        PID = udd->idProduct;
+
+        if((VID != XBOX_VID && VID != MADCATZ_VID && VID != JOYTECH_VID) || (PID != XBOX_WIRELESS_RECEIVER_PID && PID != XBOX_WIRELESS_RECEIVER_THIRD_PARTY_PID)) { // Check if it's a Xbox receiver using the Vendor ID and Product ID
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nYou'll need a wireless receiver for this libary to work"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                goto FailUnknownDevice;
+        }
+
+        bAddress = addrPool.AllocAddress(parent, false, port); // Allocate new address according to device class
+
+        if(!bAddress) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nOut of address space"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                return USB_ERROR_OUT_OF_ADDRESS_SPACE_IN_POOL;
+        }
+
+        epInfo[0].maxPktSize = udd->bMaxPacketSize0; // Extract Max Packet Size from device descriptor
+
+        delay(20); // Wait a little before resetting device
+
+        return USB_ERROR_CONFIG_REQUIRES_ADDITIONAL_RESET;
+
+        /* Diagnostic messages */
+FailGetDevDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailGetDevDescr(rcode);
+#endif
+        if(rcode != hrJERR)
+                rcode = USB_ERROR_FailGetDevDescr;
+        goto Fail;
+
+FailUnknownDevice:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailUnknownDevice(VID, PID);
+#endif
+        rcode = USB_DEV_CONFIG_ERROR_DEVICE_NOT_SUPPORTED;
+
+Fail:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nXbox 360 Init Failed, error code: "), 0x80);
+        NotifyFail(rcode);
+#endif
+        Release();
+        return rcode;
+};
+
+uint8_t XBOXRECV::Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed) {
+        uint8_t rcode;
+
+        AddressPool &addrPool = pUsb->GetAddressPool();
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nBTD Init"), 0x80);
+#endif
+        UsbDevice *p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(bAddress); // Get pointer to assigned address record
+
+        if(!p) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nAddress not found"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+        }
+
+        delay(300); // Assign new address to the device
+
+        rcode = pUsb->setAddr(0, 0, bAddress); // Assign new address to the device
+        if(rcode) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nsetAddr: "), 0x80);
+                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (rcode, 0x80);
+#endif
+                p->lowspeed = false;
+                goto Fail;
+        }
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nAddr: "), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (bAddress, 0x80);
+#endif
+
+        p->lowspeed = false;
+
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(bAddress); // Get pointer to assigned address record
+        if(!p) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nAddress not found"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+        }
+
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+
+        rcode = pUsb->setEpInfoEntry(bAddress, 1, epInfo); // Assign epInfo to epinfo pointer - only EP0 is known
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetDevTblEntry;
+
+        /* The application will work in reduced host mode, so we can save program and data
+           memory space. After verifying the VID we will use known values for the
+           configuration values for device, interface, endpoints and HID for the XBOX360 Wireless receiver */
+
+        /* Initialize data structures for endpoints of device */
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_1 ].epAddr = 0x01; // XBOX 360 report endpoint - poll interval 1ms
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_1 ].epAttribs = USB_TRANSFER_TYPE_INTERRUPT;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_1 ].bmNakPower = USB_NAK_NOWAIT; // Only poll once for interrupt endpoints
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_1 ].maxPktSize = EP_MAXPKTSIZE;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_1 ].bmSndToggle = 0;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_1 ].bmRcvToggle = 0;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_1 ].epAddr = 0x01; // XBOX 360 output endpoint - poll interval 8ms
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_1 ].epAttribs = USB_TRANSFER_TYPE_INTERRUPT;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_1 ].bmNakPower = USB_NAK_NOWAIT; // Only poll once for interrupt endpoints
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_1 ].maxPktSize = EP_MAXPKTSIZE;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_1 ].bmSndToggle = 0;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_1 ].bmRcvToggle = 0;
+
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_2 ].epAddr = 0x03; // XBOX 360 report endpoint - poll interval 1ms
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_2 ].epAttribs = USB_TRANSFER_TYPE_INTERRUPT;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_2 ].bmNakPower = USB_NAK_NOWAIT; // Only poll once for interrupt endpoints
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_2 ].maxPktSize = EP_MAXPKTSIZE;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_2 ].bmSndToggle = 0;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_2 ].bmRcvToggle = 0;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_2 ].epAddr = 0x03; // XBOX 360 output endpoint - poll interval 8ms
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_2 ].epAttribs = USB_TRANSFER_TYPE_INTERRUPT;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_2 ].bmNakPower = USB_NAK_NOWAIT; // Only poll once for interrupt endpoints
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_2 ].maxPktSize = EP_MAXPKTSIZE;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_2 ].bmSndToggle = 0;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_2 ].bmRcvToggle = 0;
+
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_3 ].epAddr = 0x05; // XBOX 360 report endpoint - poll interval 1ms
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_3 ].epAttribs = USB_TRANSFER_TYPE_INTERRUPT;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_3 ].bmNakPower = USB_NAK_NOWAIT; // Only poll once for interrupt endpoints
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_3 ].maxPktSize = EP_MAXPKTSIZE;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_3 ].bmSndToggle = 0;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_3 ].bmRcvToggle = 0;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_3 ].epAddr = 0x05; // XBOX 360 output endpoint - poll interval 8ms
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_3 ].epAttribs = USB_TRANSFER_TYPE_INTERRUPT;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_3 ].bmNakPower = USB_NAK_NOWAIT; // Only poll once for interrupt endpoints
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_3 ].maxPktSize = EP_MAXPKTSIZE;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_3 ].bmSndToggle = 0;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_3 ].bmRcvToggle = 0;
+
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_4 ].epAddr = 0x07; // XBOX 360 report endpoint - poll interval 1ms
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_4 ].epAttribs = USB_TRANSFER_TYPE_INTERRUPT;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_4 ].bmNakPower = USB_NAK_NOWAIT; // Only poll once for interrupt endpoints
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_4 ].maxPktSize = EP_MAXPKTSIZE;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_4 ].bmSndToggle = 0;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_4 ].bmRcvToggle = 0;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_4 ].epAddr = 0x07; // XBOX 360 output endpoint - poll interval 8ms
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_4 ].epAttribs = USB_TRANSFER_TYPE_INTERRUPT;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_4 ].bmNakPower = USB_NAK_NOWAIT; // Only poll once for interrupt endpoints
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_4 ].maxPktSize = EP_MAXPKTSIZE;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_4 ].bmSndToggle = 0;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_4 ].bmRcvToggle = 0;
+
+        rcode = pUsb->setEpInfoEntry(bAddress, 9, epInfo);
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetDevTblEntry;
+
+        delay(200); //Give time for address change
+
+        rcode = pUsb->setConf(bAddress, epInfo[ XBOX_CONTROL_PIPE ].epAddr, 1);
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetConfDescr;
+
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nXbox Wireless Receiver Connected\r\n"), 0x80);
+#endif
+        XboxReceiverConnected = true;
+        bPollEnable = true;
+        checkStatusTimer = 0; // Reset timer
+        return 0; // Successful configuration
+
+        /* Diagnostic messages */
+FailSetDevTblEntry:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailSetDevTblEntry();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailSetConfDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailSetConfDescr();
+#endif
+
+Fail:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nXbox 360 Init Failed, error code: "), 0x80);
+        NotifyFail(rcode);
+#endif
+        Release();
+        return rcode;
+}
+
+/* Performs a cleanup after failed Init() attempt */
+uint8_t XBOXRECV::Release() {
+        XboxReceiverConnected = false;
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < 4; i++)
+                Xbox360Connected[i] = 0x00;
+        pUsb->GetAddressPool().FreeAddress(bAddress);
+        bAddress = 0;
+        bPollEnable = false;
+        return 0;
+}
+
+uint8_t XBOXRECV::Poll() {
+        if(!bPollEnable)
+                return 0;
+        if(!checkStatusTimer || ((millis() - checkStatusTimer) > 3000)) { // Run checkStatus every 3 seconds
+                checkStatusTimer = millis();
+                checkStatus();
+        }
+
+        uint8_t inputPipe;
+        uint16_t bufferSize;
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < 4; i++) {
+                if(i == 0)
+                        inputPipe = XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_1;
+                else if(i == 1)
+                        inputPipe = XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_2;
+                else if(i == 2)
+                        inputPipe = XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_3;
+                else
+                        inputPipe = XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_4;
+
+                bufferSize = EP_MAXPKTSIZE; // This is the maximum number of bytes we want to receive
+                pUsb->inTransfer(bAddress, epInfo[ inputPipe ].epAddr, &bufferSize, readBuf);
+                if(bufferSize > 0) { // The number of received bytes
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+                        Notify(PSTR("Bytes Received: "), 0x80);
+                        D_PrintHex<uint16_t > (bufferSize, 0x80);
+                        Notify(PSTR("\r\n"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                        readReport(i);
+#ifdef PRINTREPORT
+                        printReport(i, bufferSize); // Uncomment "#define PRINTREPORT" to print the report send by the Xbox 360 Controller
+#endif
+                }
+        }
+        return 0;
+}
+
+void XBOXRECV::readReport(uint8_t controller) {
+        if(readBuf == NULL)
+                return;
+        // This report is send when a controller is connected and disconnected
+        if(readBuf[0] == 0x08 && readBuf[1] != Xbox360Connected[controller]) {
+                Xbox360Connected[controller] = readBuf[1];
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("Controller "), 0x80);
+                Notify(controller, 0x80);
+#endif
+                if(Xbox360Connected[controller]) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                        const char* str = 0;
+                        switch(readBuf[1]) {
+                                case 0x80: str = PSTR(" as controller\r\n");
+                                        break;
+                                case 0x40: str = PSTR(" as headset\r\n");
+                                        break;
+                                case 0xC0: str = PSTR(" as controller+headset\r\n");
+                                        break;
+                        }
+                        Notify(PSTR(": connected"), 0x80);
+                        Notify(str, 0x80);
+#endif
+                        onInit(controller);
+                }
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                else
+                        Notify(PSTR(": disconnected\r\n"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                return;
+        }
+        // Controller status report
+        if(readBuf[1] == 0x00 && readBuf[3] & 0x13 && readBuf[4] >= 0x22) {
+                controllerStatus[controller] = ((uint16_t)readBuf[3] << 8) | readBuf[4];
+                return;
+        }
+        if(readBuf[1] != 0x01) // Check if it's the correct report - the receiver also sends different status reports
+                return;
+
+        // A controller must be connected if it's sending data
+        if(!Xbox360Connected[controller])
+                Xbox360Connected[controller] |= 0x80;
+
+        ButtonState[controller] = (uint32_t)(readBuf[9] | ((uint16_t)readBuf[8] << 8) | ((uint32_t)readBuf[7] << 16) | ((uint32_t)readBuf[6] << 24));
+
+        hatValue[controller][LeftHatX] = (int16_t)(((uint16_t)readBuf[11] << 8) | readBuf[10]);
+        hatValue[controller][LeftHatY] = (int16_t)(((uint16_t)readBuf[13] << 8) | readBuf[12]);
+        hatValue[controller][RightHatX] = (int16_t)(((uint16_t)readBuf[15] << 8) | readBuf[14]);
+        hatValue[controller][RightHatY] = (int16_t)(((uint16_t)readBuf[17] << 8) | readBuf[16]);
+
+        //Notify(PSTR("\r\nButtonState: "), 0x80);
+        //PrintHex<uint32_t>(ButtonState[controller], 0x80);
+
+        if(ButtonState[controller] != OldButtonState[controller]) {
+                buttonStateChanged[controller] = true;
+                ButtonClickState[controller] = (ButtonState[controller] >> 16) & ((~OldButtonState[controller]) >> 16); // Update click state variable, but don't include the two trigger buttons L2 and R2
+                if(((uint8_t)OldButtonState[controller]) == 0 && ((uint8_t)ButtonState[controller]) != 0) // The L2 and R2 buttons are special as they are analog buttons
+                        R2Clicked[controller] = true;
+                if((uint8_t)(OldButtonState[controller] >> 8) == 0 && (uint8_t)(ButtonState[controller] >> 8) != 0)
+                        L2Clicked[controller] = true;
+                OldButtonState[controller] = ButtonState[controller];
+        }
+}
+
+void XBOXRECV::printReport(uint8_t controller, uint8_t nBytes) { //Uncomment "#define PRINTREPORT" to print the report send by the Xbox 360 Controller
+#ifdef PRINTREPORT
+        if(readBuf == NULL)
+                return;
+        Notify(PSTR("Controller "), 0x80);
+        Notify(controller, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR(": "), 0x80);
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < nBytes; i++) {
+                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (readBuf[i], 0x80);
+                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+        }
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\n"), 0x80);
+#endif
+}
+
+uint8_t XBOXRECV::getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b, uint8_t controller) {
+        if(b == L2) // These are analog buttons
+                return (uint8_t)(ButtonState[controller] >> 8);
+        else if(b == R2)
+                return (uint8_t)ButtonState[controller];
+        return (bool)(ButtonState[controller] & ((uint32_t)pgm_read_word(&XBOX_BUTTONS[(uint8_t)b]) << 16));
+}
+
+bool XBOXRECV::getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b, uint8_t controller) {
+        if(b == L2) {
+                if(L2Clicked[controller]) {
+                        L2Clicked[controller] = false;
+                        return true;
+                }
+                return false;
+        } else if(b == R2) {
+                if(R2Clicked[controller]) {
+                        R2Clicked[controller] = false;
+                        return true;
+                }
+                return false;
+        }
+        uint16_t button = pgm_read_word(&XBOX_BUTTONS[(uint8_t)b]);
+        bool click = (ButtonClickState[controller] & button);
+        ButtonClickState[controller] &= ~button; // clear "click" event
+        return click;
+}
+
+int16_t XBOXRECV::getAnalogHat(AnalogHatEnum a, uint8_t controller) {
+        return hatValue[controller][a];
+}
+
+bool XBOXRECV::buttonChanged(uint8_t controller) {
+        bool state = buttonStateChanged[controller];
+        buttonStateChanged[controller] = false;
+        return state;
+}
+
+/*
+ControllerStatus Breakdown
+ControllerStatus[controller] & 0x0001   // 0
+ControllerStatus[controller] & 0x0002   // normal batteries, no rechargeable battery pack
+ControllerStatus[controller] & 0x0004   // controller starting up / settling
+ControllerStatus[controller] & 0x0008   // headset adapter plugged in, but no headphones connected (mute?)
+ControllerStatus[controller] & 0x0010   // 0
+ControllerStatus[controller] & 0x0020   // 1
+ControllerStatus[controller] & 0x0040   // battery level (high bit)
+ControllerStatus[controller] & 0x0080   // battery level (low bit)
+ControllerStatus[controller] & 0x0100   // 1
+ControllerStatus[controller] & 0x0200   // 1
+ControllerStatus[controller] & 0x0400   // headset adapter plugged in
+ControllerStatus[controller] & 0x0800   // 0
+ControllerStatus[controller] & 0x1000   // 1
+ControllerStatus[controller] & 0x2000   // 0
+ControllerStatus[controller] & 0x4000   // 0
+ControllerStatus[controller] & 0x8000   // 0
+ */
+uint8_t XBOXRECV::getBatteryLevel(uint8_t controller) {
+        return ((controllerStatus[controller] & 0x00C0) >> 6);
+}
+
+void XBOXRECV::XboxCommand(uint8_t controller, uint8_t* data, uint16_t nbytes) {
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+        uint8_t rcode;
+#endif
+        uint8_t outputPipe;
+        switch(controller) {
+                case 0: outputPipe = XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_1;
+                        break;
+                case 1: outputPipe = XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_2;
+                        break;
+                case 2: outputPipe = XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_3;
+                        break;
+                case 3: outputPipe = XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_4;
+                        break;
+                default:
+                        return;
+        }
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+        rcode =
+#endif
+                pUsb->outTransfer(bAddress, epInfo[ outputPipe ].epAddr, nbytes, data);
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+        if(rcode)
+                Notify(PSTR("Error sending Xbox message\r\n"), 0x80);
+#endif
+}
+
+void XBOXRECV::disconnect(uint8_t controller) {
+        writeBuf[0] = 0x00;
+        writeBuf[1] = 0x00;
+        writeBuf[2] = 0x08;
+        writeBuf[3] = 0xC0;
+
+        XboxCommand(controller, writeBuf, 4);
+}
+
+void XBOXRECV::setLedRaw(uint8_t value, uint8_t controller) {
+        writeBuf[0] = 0x00;
+        writeBuf[1] = 0x00;
+        writeBuf[2] = 0x08;
+        writeBuf[3] = value | 0x40;
+
+        XboxCommand(controller, writeBuf, 4);
+}
+
+void XBOXRECV::setLedOn(LEDEnum led, uint8_t controller) {
+        if(led == OFF)
+                setLedRaw(0, controller);
+        else if(led != ALL) // All LEDs can't be on a the same time
+                setLedRaw(pgm_read_byte(&XBOX_LEDS[(uint8_t)led]) + 4, controller);
+}
+
+void XBOXRECV::setLedBlink(LEDEnum led, uint8_t controller) {
+        setLedRaw(pgm_read_byte(&XBOX_LEDS[(uint8_t)led]), controller);
+}
+
+void XBOXRECV::setLedMode(LEDModeEnum ledMode, uint8_t controller) { // This function is used to do some speciel LED stuff the controller supports
+        setLedRaw((uint8_t)ledMode, controller);
+}
+
+/* PC runs this at interval of approx 2 seconds
+Thanks to BusHound from Perisoft.net for the Windows USB Analysis output
+Found by timstamp.co.uk
+ */
+void XBOXRECV::checkStatus() {
+        if(!bPollEnable)
+                return;
+        // Get controller info
+        writeBuf[0] = 0x08;
+        writeBuf[1] = 0x00;
+        writeBuf[2] = 0x0f;
+        writeBuf[3] = 0xc0;
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < 4; i++) {
+                XboxCommand(i, writeBuf, 4);
+        }
+        // Get battery status
+        writeBuf[0] = 0x00;
+        writeBuf[1] = 0x00;
+        writeBuf[2] = 0x00;
+        writeBuf[3] = 0x40;
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < 4; i++) {
+                if(Xbox360Connected[i])
+                        XboxCommand(i, writeBuf, 4);
+        }
+}
+
+void XBOXRECV::setRumbleOn(uint8_t lValue, uint8_t rValue, uint8_t controller) {
+        writeBuf[0] = 0x00;
+        writeBuf[1] = 0x01;
+        writeBuf[2] = 0x0f;
+        writeBuf[3] = 0xc0;
+        writeBuf[4] = 0x00;
+        writeBuf[5] = lValue; // big weight
+        writeBuf[6] = rValue; // small weight
+
+        XboxCommand(controller, writeBuf, 7);
+}
+
+void XBOXRECV::onInit(uint8_t controller) {
+        if(pFuncOnInit)
+                pFuncOnInit(); // Call the user function
+        else {
+                LEDEnum led;
+                if(controller == 0)
+                        led = LED1;
+                else if(controller == 1)
+                        led = LED2;
+                else if(controller == 2)
+                        led = LED3;
+                else
+                        led = LED4;
+                setLedOn(led, controller);
+        }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/XBOXRECV.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/XBOXRECV.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4f9214653
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/XBOXRECV.h
@@ -0,0 +1,276 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2012 Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics. All rights reserved.
+
+ This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+ General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+ Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+ this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+ on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+ the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+ Contact information
+ -------------------
+
+ Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics
+ Web      :  http://www.tkjelectronics.com
+ e-mail   :  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+
+ getBatteryLevel and checkStatus functions made by timstamp.co.uk found using BusHound from Perisoft.net
+ */
+
+#ifndef _xboxrecv_h_
+#define _xboxrecv_h_
+
+#include "Usb.h"
+#include "xboxEnums.h"
+
+/* Data Xbox 360 taken from descriptors */
+#define EP_MAXPKTSIZE       32 // max size for data via USB
+
+/* Names we give to the 9 Xbox360 pipes */
+#define XBOX_CONTROL_PIPE   0
+#define XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_1   1
+#define XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_1  2
+#define XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_2   3
+#define XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_2  4
+#define XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_3   5
+#define XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_3  6
+#define XBOX_INPUT_PIPE_4   7
+#define XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE_4  8
+
+// PID and VID of the different devices
+#define XBOX_VID                                0x045E  // Microsoft Corporation
+#define MADCATZ_VID                             0x1BAD  // For unofficial Mad Catz receivers
+#define JOYTECH_VID                             0x162E  // For unofficial Joytech controllers
+
+#define XBOX_WIRELESS_RECEIVER_PID              0x0719  // Microsoft Wireless Gaming Receiver
+#define XBOX_WIRELESS_RECEIVER_THIRD_PARTY_PID  0x0291  // Third party Wireless Gaming Receiver
+
+#define XBOX_MAX_ENDPOINTS   9
+
+/**
+ * This class implements support for a Xbox Wireless receiver.
+ *
+ * Up to four controllers can connect to one receiver, if more is needed one can use a second receiver via the USBHub class.
+ */
+class XBOXRECV : public USBDeviceConfig {
+public:
+        /**
+         * Constructor for the XBOXRECV class.
+         * @param  pUsb   Pointer to USB class instance.
+         */
+        XBOXRECV(USB *pUsb);
+
+        /** @name USBDeviceConfig implementation */
+        /**
+         * Address assignment and basic initilization is done here.
+         * @param  parent   Hub number.
+         * @param  port     Port number on the hub.
+         * @param  lowspeed Speed of the device.
+         * @return          0 on success.
+         */
+        uint8_t ConfigureDevice(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed);
+        /**
+         * Initialize the Xbox wireless receiver.
+         * @param  parent   Hub number.
+         * @param  port     Port number on the hub.
+         * @param  lowspeed Speed of the device.
+         * @return          0 on success.
+         */
+        uint8_t Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed);
+        /**
+         * Release the USB device.
+         * @return 0 on success.
+         */
+        uint8_t Release();
+        /**
+         * Poll the USB Input endpoins and run the state machines.
+         * @return 0 on success.
+         */
+        uint8_t Poll();
+
+        /**
+         * Get the device address.
+         * @return The device address.
+         */
+        virtual uint8_t GetAddress() {
+                return bAddress;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Used to check if the controller has been initialized.
+         * @return True if it's ready.
+         */
+        virtual bool isReady() {
+                return bPollEnable;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Used by the USB core to check what this driver support.
+         * @param  vid The device's VID.
+         * @param  pid The device's PID.
+         * @return     Returns true if the device's VID and PID matches this driver.
+         */
+        virtual bool VIDPIDOK(uint16_t vid, uint16_t pid) {
+                return ((vid == XBOX_VID || vid == MADCATZ_VID || vid == JOYTECH_VID) && (pid == XBOX_WIRELESS_RECEIVER_PID || pid == XBOX_WIRELESS_RECEIVER_THIRD_PARTY_PID));
+        };
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /** @name Xbox Controller functions */
+        /**
+         * getButtonPress(uint8_t controller, ButtonEnum b) will return true as long as the button is held down.
+         *
+         * While getButtonClick(uint8_t controller, ButtonEnum b) will only return it once.
+         *
+         * So you instance if you need to increase a variable once you would use getButtonClick(uint8_t controller, ButtonEnum b),
+         * but if you need to drive a robot forward you would use getButtonPress(uint8_t controller, ButtonEnum b).
+         * @param  b          ::ButtonEnum to read.
+         * @param  controller The controller to read from. Default to 0.
+         * @return            getButtonClick(uint8_t controller, ButtonEnum b) will return a bool, while getButtonPress(uint8_t controller, ButtonEnum b) will return a byte if reading ::L2 or ::R2.
+         */
+        uint8_t getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b, uint8_t controller = 0);
+        bool getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b, uint8_t controller = 0);
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /** @name Xbox Controller functions */
+        /**
+         * Return the analog value from the joysticks on the controller.
+         * @param  a          Either ::LeftHatX, ::LeftHatY, ::RightHatX or ::RightHatY.
+         * @param  controller The controller to read from. Default to 0.
+         * @return            Returns a signed 16-bit integer.
+         */
+        int16_t getAnalogHat(AnalogHatEnum a, uint8_t controller = 0);
+
+        /**
+         * Used to disconnect any of the controllers.
+         * @param controller The controller to disconnect. Default to 0.
+         */
+        void disconnect(uint8_t controller = 0);
+
+        /**
+         * Turn rumble off and all the LEDs on the specific controller.
+         * @param  controller The controller to write to. Default to 0.
+         */
+        void setAllOff(uint8_t controller = 0) {
+                setRumbleOn(0, 0, controller);
+                setLedOff(controller);
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Turn rumble off the specific controller.
+         * @param  controller The controller to write to. Default to 0.
+         */
+        void setRumbleOff(uint8_t controller = 0) {
+                setRumbleOn(0, 0, controller);
+        };
+        /**
+         * Turn rumble on.
+         * @param lValue     Left motor (big weight) inside the controller.
+         * @param rValue     Right motor (small weight) inside the controller.
+         * @param controller The controller to write to. Default to 0.
+         */
+        void setRumbleOn(uint8_t lValue, uint8_t rValue, uint8_t controller = 0);
+        /**
+         * Set LED value. Without using the ::LEDEnum or ::LEDModeEnum.
+         * @param value      See:
+         * setLedOff(uint8_t controller), setLedOn(uint8_t controller, LED l),
+         * setLedBlink(uint8_t controller, LED l), and setLedMode(uint8_t controller, LEDMode lm).
+         * @param controller The controller to write to. Default to 0.
+         */
+        void setLedRaw(uint8_t value, uint8_t controller = 0);
+
+        /**
+         * Turn all LEDs off the specific controller.
+         * @param controller The controller to write to. Default to 0.
+         */
+        void setLedOff(uint8_t controller = 0) {
+                setLedRaw(0, controller);
+        };
+        /**
+         * Turn on a LED by using ::LEDEnum.
+         * @param l          ::OFF, ::LED1, ::LED2, ::LED3 and ::LED4 is supported by the Xbox controller.
+         * @param controller The controller to write to. Default to 0.
+         */
+        void setLedOn(LEDEnum l, uint8_t controller = 0);
+        /**
+         * Turn on a LED by using ::LEDEnum.
+         * @param l          ::ALL, ::LED1, ::LED2, ::LED3 and ::LED4 is supported by the Xbox controller.
+         * @param controller The controller to write to. Default to 0.
+         */
+        void setLedBlink(LEDEnum l, uint8_t controller = 0);
+        /**
+         * Used to set special LED modes supported by the Xbox controller.
+         * @param lm         See ::LEDModeEnum.
+         * @param controller The controller to write to. Default to 0.
+         */
+        void setLedMode(LEDModeEnum lm, uint8_t controller = 0);
+        /**
+         * Used to get the battery level from the controller.
+         * @param  controller The controller to read from. Default to 0.
+         * @return            Returns the battery level as an integer in the range of 0-3.
+         */
+        uint8_t getBatteryLevel(uint8_t controller = 0);
+        /**
+         * Used to check if a button has changed.
+         * @param  controller The controller to read from. Default to 0.
+         * @return            True if a button has changed.
+         */
+        bool buttonChanged(uint8_t controller = 0);
+
+        /**
+         * Used to call your own function when the controller is successfully initialized.
+         * @param funcOnInit Function to call.
+         */
+        void attachOnInit(void (*funcOnInit)(void)) {
+                pFuncOnInit = funcOnInit;
+        };
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /** True if a wireless receiver is connected. */
+        bool XboxReceiverConnected;
+        /** Variable used to indicate if the XBOX 360 controller is successfully connected. */
+        uint8_t Xbox360Connected[4];
+
+protected:
+        /** Pointer to USB class instance. */
+        USB *pUsb;
+        /** Device address. */
+        uint8_t bAddress;
+        /** Endpoint info structure. */
+        EpInfo epInfo[XBOX_MAX_ENDPOINTS];
+
+private:
+        /**
+         * Called when the controller is successfully initialized.
+         * Use attachOnInit(void (*funcOnInit)(void)) to call your own function.
+         * This is useful for instance if you want to set the LEDs in a specific way.
+         * @param controller The initialized controller.
+         */
+        void onInit(uint8_t controller);
+        void (*pFuncOnInit)(void); // Pointer to function called in onInit()
+
+        bool bPollEnable;
+
+        /* Variables to store the buttons */
+        uint32_t ButtonState[4];
+        uint32_t OldButtonState[4];
+        uint16_t ButtonClickState[4];
+        int16_t hatValue[4][4];
+        uint16_t controllerStatus[4];
+        bool buttonStateChanged[4]; // True if a button has changed
+
+        bool L2Clicked[4]; // These buttons are analog, so we use we use these bools to check if they where clicked or not
+        bool R2Clicked[4];
+
+        uint32_t checkStatusTimer; // Timing for checkStatus() signals
+
+        uint8_t readBuf[EP_MAXPKTSIZE]; // General purpose buffer for input data
+        uint8_t writeBuf[7]; // General purpose buffer for output data
+
+        void readReport(uint8_t controller); // read incoming data
+        void printReport(uint8_t controller, uint8_t nBytes); // print incoming date - Uncomment for debugging
+
+        /* Private commands */
+        void XboxCommand(uint8_t controller, uint8_t* data, uint16_t nbytes);
+        void checkStatus();
+};
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/XBOXUSB.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/XBOXUSB.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ddece21b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/XBOXUSB.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,361 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2012 Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics. All rights reserved.
+
+ This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+ General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+ Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+ this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+ on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+ the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+ Contact information
+ -------------------
+
+ Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics
+ Web      :  http://www.tkjelectronics.com
+ e-mail   :  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#include "XBOXUSB.h"
+// To enable serial debugging see "settings.h"
+//#define EXTRADEBUG // Uncomment to get even more debugging data
+//#define PRINTREPORT // Uncomment to print the report send by the Xbox 360 Controller
+
+XBOXUSB::XBOXUSB(USB *p) :
+pUsb(p), // pointer to USB class instance - mandatory
+bAddress(0), // device address - mandatory
+bPollEnable(false) { // don't start polling before dongle is connected
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < XBOX_MAX_ENDPOINTS; i++) {
+                epInfo[i].epAddr = 0;
+                epInfo[i].maxPktSize = (i) ? 0 : 8;
+                epInfo[i].epAttribs = 0;
+                epInfo[i].bmNakPower = (i) ? USB_NAK_NOWAIT : USB_NAK_MAX_POWER;
+        }
+
+        if(pUsb) // register in USB subsystem
+                pUsb->RegisterDeviceClass(this); //set devConfig[] entry
+}
+
+uint8_t XBOXUSB::Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed) {
+        uint8_t buf[sizeof (USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR)];
+        USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR * udd = reinterpret_cast<USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR*>(buf);
+        uint8_t rcode;
+        UsbDevice *p = NULL;
+        EpInfo *oldep_ptr = NULL;
+        uint16_t PID;
+        uint16_t VID;
+
+        // get memory address of USB device address pool
+        AddressPool &addrPool = pUsb->GetAddressPool();
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nXBOXUSB Init"), 0x80);
+#endif
+        // check if address has already been assigned to an instance
+        if(bAddress) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nAddress in use"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                return USB_ERROR_CLASS_INSTANCE_ALREADY_IN_USE;
+        }
+
+        // Get pointer to pseudo device with address 0 assigned
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(0);
+
+        if(!p) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nAddress not found"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+        }
+
+        if(!p->epinfo) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nepinfo is null"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                return USB_ERROR_EPINFO_IS_NULL;
+        }
+
+        // Save old pointer to EP_RECORD of address 0
+        oldep_ptr = p->epinfo;
+
+        // Temporary assign new pointer to epInfo to p->epinfo in order to avoid toggle inconsistence
+        p->epinfo = epInfo;
+
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+
+        // Get device descriptor
+        rcode = pUsb->getDevDescr(0, 0, sizeof (USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR), (uint8_t*)buf); // Get device descriptor - addr, ep, nbytes, data
+        // Restore p->epinfo
+        p->epinfo = oldep_ptr;
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailGetDevDescr;
+
+        VID = udd->idVendor;
+        PID = udd->idProduct;
+
+        if(VID != XBOX_VID && VID != MADCATZ_VID && VID != JOYTECH_VID && VID != GAMESTOP_VID) // Check VID
+                goto FailUnknownDevice;
+        if(PID == XBOX_WIRELESS_PID) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nYou have plugged in a wireless Xbox 360 controller - it doesn't support USB communication"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                goto FailUnknownDevice;
+        } else if(PID == XBOX_WIRELESS_RECEIVER_PID || PID == XBOX_WIRELESS_RECEIVER_THIRD_PARTY_PID) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nThis library only supports Xbox 360 controllers via USB"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                goto FailUnknownDevice;
+        } else if(PID != XBOX_WIRED_PID && PID != MADCATZ_WIRED_PID && PID != GAMESTOP_WIRED_PID && PID != AFTERGLOW_WIRED_PID && PID != JOYTECH_WIRED_PID) // Check PID
+                goto FailUnknownDevice;
+
+        // Allocate new address according to device class
+        bAddress = addrPool.AllocAddress(parent, false, port);
+
+        if(!bAddress)
+                return USB_ERROR_OUT_OF_ADDRESS_SPACE_IN_POOL;
+
+        // Extract Max Packet Size from device descriptor
+        epInfo[0].maxPktSize = udd->bMaxPacketSize0;
+
+        // Assign new address to the device
+        rcode = pUsb->setAddr(0, 0, bAddress);
+        if(rcode) {
+                p->lowspeed = false;
+                addrPool.FreeAddress(bAddress);
+                bAddress = 0;
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nsetAddr: "), 0x80);
+                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (rcode, 0x80);
+#endif
+                return rcode;
+        }
+#ifdef EXTRADEBUG
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nAddr: "), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (bAddress, 0x80);
+#endif
+        //delay(300); // Spec says you should wait at least 200ms
+
+        p->lowspeed = false;
+
+        //get pointer to assigned address record
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(bAddress);
+        if(!p)
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+
+        // Assign epInfo to epinfo pointer - only EP0 is known
+        rcode = pUsb->setEpInfoEntry(bAddress, 1, epInfo);
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetDevTblEntry;
+
+        /* The application will work in reduced host mode, so we can save program and data
+           memory space. After verifying the VID we will use known values for the
+           configuration values for device, interface, endpoints and HID for the XBOX360 Controllers */
+
+        /* Initialize data structures for endpoints of device */
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE ].epAddr = 0x01; // XBOX 360 report endpoint
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE ].epAttribs = USB_TRANSFER_TYPE_INTERRUPT;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE ].bmNakPower = USB_NAK_NOWAIT; // Only poll once for interrupt endpoints
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE ].maxPktSize = EP_MAXPKTSIZE;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE ].bmSndToggle = 0;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE ].bmRcvToggle = 0;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE ].epAddr = 0x02; // XBOX 360 output endpoint
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE ].epAttribs = USB_TRANSFER_TYPE_INTERRUPT;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE ].bmNakPower = USB_NAK_NOWAIT; // Only poll once for interrupt endpoints
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE ].maxPktSize = EP_MAXPKTSIZE;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE ].bmSndToggle = 0;
+        epInfo[ XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE ].bmRcvToggle = 0;
+
+        rcode = pUsb->setEpInfoEntry(bAddress, 3, epInfo);
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetDevTblEntry;
+
+        delay(200); // Give time for address change
+
+        rcode = pUsb->setConf(bAddress, epInfo[ XBOX_CONTROL_PIPE ].epAddr, 1);
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetConfDescr;
+
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nXbox 360 Controller Connected\r\n"), 0x80);
+#endif
+        onInit();
+        Xbox360Connected = true;
+        bPollEnable = true;
+        return 0; // Successful configuration
+
+        /* Diagnostic messages */
+FailGetDevDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailGetDevDescr();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailSetDevTblEntry:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailSetDevTblEntry();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailSetConfDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailSetConfDescr();
+#endif
+        goto Fail;
+
+FailUnknownDevice:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailUnknownDevice(VID, PID);
+#endif
+        rcode = USB_DEV_CONFIG_ERROR_DEVICE_NOT_SUPPORTED;
+
+Fail:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nXbox 360 Init Failed, error code: "), 0x80);
+        NotifyFail(rcode);
+#endif
+        Release();
+        return rcode;
+}
+
+/* Performs a cleanup after failed Init() attempt */
+uint8_t XBOXUSB::Release() {
+        Xbox360Connected = false;
+        pUsb->GetAddressPool().FreeAddress(bAddress);
+        bAddress = 0;
+        bPollEnable = false;
+        return 0;
+}
+
+uint8_t XBOXUSB::Poll() {
+        if(!bPollEnable)
+                return 0;
+        uint16_t BUFFER_SIZE = EP_MAXPKTSIZE;
+        pUsb->inTransfer(bAddress, epInfo[ XBOX_INPUT_PIPE ].epAddr, &BUFFER_SIZE, readBuf); // input on endpoint 1
+        readReport();
+#ifdef PRINTREPORT
+        printReport(); // Uncomment "#define PRINTREPORT" to print the report send by the Xbox 360 Controller
+#endif
+        return 0;
+}
+
+void XBOXUSB::readReport() {
+        if(readBuf == NULL)
+                return;
+        if(readBuf[0] != 0x00 || readBuf[1] != 0x14) { // Check if it's the correct report - the controller also sends different status reports
+                return;
+        }
+
+        ButtonState = (uint32_t)(readBuf[5] | ((uint16_t)readBuf[4] << 8) | ((uint32_t)readBuf[3] << 16) | ((uint32_t)readBuf[2] << 24));
+
+        hatValue[LeftHatX] = (int16_t)(((uint16_t)readBuf[7] << 8) | readBuf[6]);
+        hatValue[LeftHatY] = (int16_t)(((uint16_t)readBuf[9] << 8) | readBuf[8]);
+        hatValue[RightHatX] = (int16_t)(((uint16_t)readBuf[11] << 8) | readBuf[10]);
+        hatValue[RightHatY] = (int16_t)(((uint16_t)readBuf[13] << 8) | readBuf[12]);
+
+        //Notify(PSTR("\r\nButtonState"), 0x80);
+        //PrintHex<uint32_t>(ButtonState, 0x80);
+
+        if(ButtonState != OldButtonState) {
+                ButtonClickState = (ButtonState >> 16) & ((~OldButtonState) >> 16); // Update click state variable, but don't include the two trigger buttons L2 and R2
+                if(((uint8_t)OldButtonState) == 0 && ((uint8_t)ButtonState) != 0) // The L2 and R2 buttons are special as they are analog buttons
+                        R2Clicked = true;
+                if((uint8_t)(OldButtonState >> 8) == 0 && (uint8_t)(ButtonState >> 8) != 0)
+                        L2Clicked = true;
+                OldButtonState = ButtonState;
+        }
+}
+
+void XBOXUSB::printReport() { //Uncomment "#define PRINTREPORT" to print the report send by the Xbox 360 Controller
+#ifdef PRINTREPORT
+        if(readBuf == NULL)
+                return;
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < XBOX_REPORT_BUFFER_SIZE; i++) {
+                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (readBuf[i], 0x80);
+                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+        }
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\n"), 0x80);
+#endif
+}
+
+uint8_t XBOXUSB::getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b) {
+        if(b == L2) // These are analog buttons
+                return (uint8_t)(ButtonState >> 8);
+        else if(b == R2)
+                return (uint8_t)ButtonState;
+        return (bool)(ButtonState & ((uint32_t)pgm_read_word(&XBOX_BUTTONS[(uint8_t)b]) << 16));
+}
+
+bool XBOXUSB::getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b) {
+        if(b == L2) {
+                if(L2Clicked) {
+                        L2Clicked = false;
+                        return true;
+                }
+                return false;
+        } else if(b == R2) {
+                if(R2Clicked) {
+                        R2Clicked = false;
+                        return true;
+                }
+                return false;
+        }
+        uint16_t button = pgm_read_word(&XBOX_BUTTONS[(uint8_t)b]);
+        bool click = (ButtonClickState & button);
+        ButtonClickState &= ~button; // clear "click" event
+        return click;
+}
+
+int16_t XBOXUSB::getAnalogHat(AnalogHatEnum a) {
+        return hatValue[a];
+}
+
+/* Xbox Controller commands */
+void XBOXUSB::XboxCommand(uint8_t* data, uint16_t nbytes) {
+        //bmRequest = Host to device (0x00) | Class (0x20) | Interface (0x01) = 0x21, bRequest = Set Report (0x09), Report ID (0x00), Report Type (Output 0x02), interface (0x00), datalength, datalength, data)
+        pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, epInfo[XBOX_CONTROL_PIPE].epAddr, bmREQ_HID_OUT, HID_REQUEST_SET_REPORT, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00, nbytes, nbytes, data, NULL);
+}
+
+void XBOXUSB::setLedRaw(uint8_t value) {
+        writeBuf[0] = 0x01;
+        writeBuf[1] = 0x03;
+        writeBuf[2] = value;
+
+        XboxCommand(writeBuf, 3);
+}
+
+void XBOXUSB::setLedOn(LEDEnum led) {
+        if(led == OFF)
+                setLedRaw(0);
+        else if(led != ALL) // All LEDs can't be on a the same time
+                setLedRaw(pgm_read_byte(&XBOX_LEDS[(uint8_t)led]) + 4);
+}
+
+void XBOXUSB::setLedBlink(LEDEnum led) {
+        setLedRaw(pgm_read_byte(&XBOX_LEDS[(uint8_t)led]));
+}
+
+void XBOXUSB::setLedMode(LEDModeEnum ledMode) { // This function is used to do some special LED stuff the controller supports
+        setLedRaw((uint8_t)ledMode);
+}
+
+void XBOXUSB::setRumbleOn(uint8_t lValue, uint8_t rValue) {
+        writeBuf[0] = 0x00;
+        writeBuf[1] = 0x08;
+        writeBuf[2] = 0x00;
+        writeBuf[3] = lValue; // big weight
+        writeBuf[4] = rValue; // small weight
+        writeBuf[5] = 0x00;
+        writeBuf[6] = 0x00;
+        writeBuf[7] = 0x00;
+
+        XboxCommand(writeBuf, 8);
+}
+
+void XBOXUSB::onInit() {
+        if(pFuncOnInit)
+                pFuncOnInit(); // Call the user function
+        else
+                setLedOn(LED1);
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/XBOXUSB.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/XBOXUSB.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1ab37851a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/XBOXUSB.h
@@ -0,0 +1,225 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2012 Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics. All rights reserved.
+
+ This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+ General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+ Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+ this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+ on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+ the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+ Contact information
+ -------------------
+
+ Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics
+ Web      :  http://www.tkjelectronics.com
+ e-mail   :  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#ifndef _xboxusb_h_
+#define _xboxusb_h_
+
+#include "Usb.h"
+#include "hid.h"
+#include "xboxEnums.h"
+
+/* Data Xbox 360 taken from descriptors */
+#define EP_MAXPKTSIZE       32 // max size for data via USB
+
+/* Names we give to the 3 Xbox360 pipes */
+#define XBOX_CONTROL_PIPE    0
+#define XBOX_INPUT_PIPE      1
+#define XBOX_OUTPUT_PIPE     2
+
+// PID and VID of the different devices
+#define XBOX_VID                                0x045E // Microsoft Corporation
+#define MADCATZ_VID                             0x1BAD // For unofficial Mad Catz controllers
+#define JOYTECH_VID                             0x162E // For unofficial Joytech controllers
+#define GAMESTOP_VID                            0x0E6F // Gamestop controller
+
+#define XBOX_WIRED_PID                          0x028E // Microsoft 360 Wired controller
+#define XBOX_WIRELESS_PID                       0x028F // Wireless controller only support charging
+#define XBOX_WIRELESS_RECEIVER_PID              0x0719 // Microsoft Wireless Gaming Receiver
+#define XBOX_WIRELESS_RECEIVER_THIRD_PARTY_PID  0x0291 // Third party Wireless Gaming Receiver
+#define MADCATZ_WIRED_PID                       0xF016 // Mad Catz wired controller
+#define JOYTECH_WIRED_PID                       0xBEEF // For Joytech wired controller
+#define GAMESTOP_WIRED_PID                      0x0401 // Gamestop wired controller
+#define AFTERGLOW_WIRED_PID                     0x0213 // Afterglow wired controller - it uses the same VID as a Gamestop controller
+
+#define XBOX_REPORT_BUFFER_SIZE 14 // Size of the input report buffer
+
+#define XBOX_MAX_ENDPOINTS   3
+
+/** This class implements support for a Xbox wired controller via USB. */
+class XBOXUSB : public USBDeviceConfig {
+public:
+        /**
+         * Constructor for the XBOXUSB class.
+         * @param  pUsb   Pointer to USB class instance.
+         */
+        XBOXUSB(USB *pUsb);
+
+        /** @name USBDeviceConfig implementation */
+        /**
+         * Initialize the Xbox Controller.
+         * @param  parent   Hub number.
+         * @param  port     Port number on the hub.
+         * @param  lowspeed Speed of the device.
+         * @return          0 on success.
+         */
+        uint8_t Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed);
+        /**
+         * Release the USB device.
+         * @return 0 on success.
+         */
+        uint8_t Release();
+        /**
+         * Poll the USB Input endpoins and run the state machines.
+         * @return 0 on success.
+         */
+        uint8_t Poll();
+
+        /**
+         * Get the device address.
+         * @return The device address.
+         */
+        virtual uint8_t GetAddress() {
+                return bAddress;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Used to check if the controller has been initialized.
+         * @return True if it's ready.
+         */
+        virtual bool isReady() {
+                return bPollEnable;
+        };
+
+        /**
+         * Used by the USB core to check what this driver support.
+         * @param  vid The device's VID.
+         * @param  pid The device's PID.
+         * @return     Returns true if the device's VID and PID matches this driver.
+         */
+        virtual bool VIDPIDOK(uint16_t vid, uint16_t pid) {
+                return ((vid == XBOX_VID || vid == MADCATZ_VID || vid == JOYTECH_VID || vid == GAMESTOP_VID) && (pid == XBOX_WIRED_PID || pid == MADCATZ_WIRED_PID || pid == GAMESTOP_WIRED_PID || pid == AFTERGLOW_WIRED_PID || pid == JOYTECH_WIRED_PID));
+        };
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /** @name Xbox Controller functions */
+        /**
+         * getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b) will return true as long as the button is held down.
+         *
+         * While getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b) will only return it once.
+         *
+         * So you instance if you need to increase a variable once you would use getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b),
+         * but if you need to drive a robot forward you would use getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b).
+         * @param  b          ::ButtonEnum to read.
+         * @return            getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b) will return a bool, while getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b) will return a byte if reading ::L2 or ::R2.
+         */
+        uint8_t getButtonPress(ButtonEnum b);
+        bool getButtonClick(ButtonEnum b);
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /** @name Xbox Controller functions */
+        /**
+         * Return the analog value from the joysticks on the controller.
+         * @param  a          Either ::LeftHatX, ::LeftHatY, ::RightHatX or ::RightHatY.
+         * @return            Returns a signed 16-bit integer.
+         */
+        int16_t getAnalogHat(AnalogHatEnum a);
+
+        /** Turn rumble off and all the LEDs on the controller. */
+        void setAllOff() {
+                setRumbleOn(0, 0);
+                setLedRaw(0);
+        };
+
+        /** Turn rumble off the controller. */
+        void setRumbleOff() {
+                setRumbleOn(0, 0);
+        };
+        /**
+         * Turn rumble on.
+         * @param lValue     Left motor (big weight) inside the controller.
+         * @param rValue     Right motor (small weight) inside the controller.
+         */
+        void setRumbleOn(uint8_t lValue, uint8_t rValue);
+        /**
+         * Set LED value. Without using the ::LEDEnum or ::LEDModeEnum.
+         * @param value      See:
+         * setLedOff(), setLedOn(LEDEnum l),
+         * setLedBlink(LEDEnum l), and setLedMode(LEDModeEnum lm).
+         */
+        void setLedRaw(uint8_t value);
+
+        /** Turn all LEDs off the controller. */
+        void setLedOff() {
+                setLedRaw(0);
+        };
+        /**
+         * Turn on a LED by using ::LEDEnum.
+         * @param l          ::OFF, ::LED1, ::LED2, ::LED3 and ::LED4 is supported by the Xbox controller.
+         */
+        void setLedOn(LEDEnum l);
+        /**
+         * Turn on a LED by using ::LEDEnum.
+         * @param l          ::ALL, ::LED1, ::LED2, ::LED3 and ::LED4 is supported by the Xbox controller.
+         */
+        void setLedBlink(LEDEnum l);
+        /**
+         * Used to set special LED modes supported by the Xbox controller.
+         * @param lm         See ::LEDModeEnum.
+         */
+        void setLedMode(LEDModeEnum lm);
+
+        /**
+         * Used to call your own function when the controller is successfully initialized.
+         * @param funcOnInit Function to call.
+         */
+        void attachOnInit(void (*funcOnInit)(void)) {
+                pFuncOnInit = funcOnInit;
+        };
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /** True if a Xbox 360 controller is connected. */
+        bool Xbox360Connected;
+
+protected:
+        /** Pointer to USB class instance. */
+        USB *pUsb;
+        /** Device address. */
+        uint8_t bAddress;
+        /** Endpoint info structure. */
+        EpInfo epInfo[XBOX_MAX_ENDPOINTS];
+
+private:
+        /**
+         * Called when the controller is successfully initialized.
+         * Use attachOnInit(void (*funcOnInit)(void)) to call your own function.
+         * This is useful for instance if you want to set the LEDs in a specific way.
+         */
+        void onInit();
+        void (*pFuncOnInit)(void); // Pointer to function called in onInit()
+
+        bool bPollEnable;
+
+        /* Variables to store the buttons */
+        uint32_t ButtonState;
+        uint32_t OldButtonState;
+        uint16_t ButtonClickState;
+        int16_t hatValue[4];
+        uint16_t controllerStatus;
+
+        bool L2Clicked; // These buttons are analog, so we use we use these bools to check if they where clicked or not
+        bool R2Clicked;
+
+        uint8_t readBuf[EP_MAXPKTSIZE]; // General purpose buffer for input data
+        uint8_t writeBuf[8]; // General purpose buffer for output data
+
+        void readReport(); // read incoming data
+        void printReport(); // print incoming date - Uncomment for debugging
+
+        /* Private commands */
+        void XboxCommand(uint8_t* data, uint16_t nbytes);
+};
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/address.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/address.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c3e1b3141
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/address.h
@@ -0,0 +1,282 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+
+#if !defined(_usb_h_) || defined(__ADDRESS_H__)
+#error "Never include address.h directly; include Usb.h instead"
+#else
+#define __ADDRESS_H__
+
+
+
+/* NAK powers. To save space in endpoint data structure, amount of retries before giving up and returning 0x4 is stored in */
+/* bmNakPower as a power of 2. The actual nak_limit is then calculated as nak_limit = ( 2^bmNakPower - 1) */
+#define USB_NAK_MAX_POWER               15              //NAK binary order maximum value
+#define USB_NAK_DEFAULT                 14              //default 32K-1 NAKs before giving up
+#define USB_NAK_NOWAIT                  1               //Single NAK stops transfer
+#define USB_NAK_NONAK                   0               //Do not count NAKs, stop retrying after USB Timeout
+
+struct EpInfo {
+        uint8_t epAddr; // Endpoint address
+        uint8_t maxPktSize; // Maximum packet size
+
+        union {
+                uint8_t epAttribs;
+
+                struct {
+                        uint8_t bmSndToggle : 1; // Send toggle, when zero bmSNDTOG0, bmSNDTOG1 otherwise
+                        uint8_t bmRcvToggle : 1; // Send toggle, when zero bmRCVTOG0, bmRCVTOG1 otherwise
+                        uint8_t bmNakPower : 6; // Binary order for NAK_LIMIT value
+                } __attribute__((packed));
+        };
+} __attribute__((packed));
+
+//        7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0
+//  ---------------------------------
+//  |   | H | P | P | P | A | A | A |
+//  ---------------------------------
+//
+// H - if 1 the address is a hub address
+// P - parent hub address
+// A - device address / port number in case of hub
+//
+
+struct UsbDeviceAddress {
+
+        union {
+
+                struct {
+                        uint8_t bmAddress : 3; // device address/port number
+                        uint8_t bmParent : 3; // parent hub address
+                        uint8_t bmHub : 1; // hub flag
+                        uint8_t bmReserved : 1; // reserved, must be zero
+                } __attribute__((packed));
+                uint8_t devAddress;
+        };
+} __attribute__((packed));
+
+#define bmUSB_DEV_ADDR_ADDRESS          0x07
+#define bmUSB_DEV_ADDR_PARENT           0x38
+#define bmUSB_DEV_ADDR_HUB              0x40
+
+struct UsbDevice {
+        EpInfo *epinfo; // endpoint info pointer
+        UsbDeviceAddress address;
+        uint8_t epcount; // number of endpoints
+        bool lowspeed; // indicates if a device is the low speed one
+        //      uint8_t devclass; // device class
+} __attribute__((packed));
+
+class AddressPool {
+public:
+        virtual UsbDevice* GetUsbDevicePtr(uint8_t addr) = 0;
+        virtual uint8_t AllocAddress(uint8_t parent, bool is_hub = false, uint8_t port = 0) = 0;
+        virtual void FreeAddress(uint8_t addr) = 0;
+};
+
+typedef void (*UsbDeviceHandleFunc)(UsbDevice *pdev);
+
+#define ADDR_ERROR_INVALID_INDEX                0xFF
+#define ADDR_ERROR_INVALID_ADDRESS              0xFF
+
+template <const uint8_t MAX_DEVICES_ALLOWED>
+class AddressPoolImpl : public AddressPool {
+        EpInfo dev0ep; //Endpoint data structure used during enumeration for uninitialized device
+
+        uint8_t hubCounter; // hub counter is kept
+        // in order to avoid hub address duplication
+
+        UsbDevice thePool[MAX_DEVICES_ALLOWED];
+
+        // Initializes address pool entry
+
+        void InitEntry(uint8_t index) {
+                thePool[index].address.devAddress = 0;
+                thePool[index].epcount = 1;
+                thePool[index].lowspeed = 0;
+                thePool[index].epinfo = &dev0ep;
+        };
+
+        // Returns thePool index for a given address
+
+        uint8_t FindAddressIndex(uint8_t address = 0) {
+                for(uint8_t i = 1; i < MAX_DEVICES_ALLOWED; i++) {
+                        if(thePool[i].address.devAddress == address)
+                                return i;
+                }
+                return 0;
+        };
+
+        // Returns thePool child index for a given parent
+
+        uint8_t FindChildIndex(UsbDeviceAddress addr, uint8_t start = 1) {
+                for(uint8_t i = (start < 1 || start >= MAX_DEVICES_ALLOWED) ? 1 : start; i < MAX_DEVICES_ALLOWED; i++) {
+                        if(thePool[i].address.bmParent == addr.bmAddress)
+                                return i;
+                }
+                return 0;
+        };
+
+        // Frees address entry specified by index parameter
+
+        void FreeAddressByIndex(uint8_t index) {
+                // Zero field is reserved and should not be affected
+                if(index == 0)
+                        return;
+
+                UsbDeviceAddress uda = thePool[index].address;
+                // If a hub was switched off all port addresses should be freed
+                if(uda.bmHub == 1) {
+                        for(uint8_t i = 1; (i = FindChildIndex(uda, i));)
+                                FreeAddressByIndex(i);
+
+                        // If the hub had the last allocated address, hubCounter should be decremented
+                        if(hubCounter == uda.bmAddress)
+                                hubCounter--;
+                }
+                InitEntry(index);
+        }
+
+        // Initializes the whole address pool at once
+
+        void InitAllAddresses() {
+                for(uint8_t i = 1; i < MAX_DEVICES_ALLOWED; i++)
+                        InitEntry(i);
+
+                hubCounter = 0;
+        };
+
+public:
+
+        AddressPoolImpl() : hubCounter(0) {
+                // Zero address is reserved
+                InitEntry(0);
+
+                thePool[0].address.devAddress = 0;
+                thePool[0].epinfo = &dev0ep;
+                dev0ep.epAddr = 0;
+                dev0ep.maxPktSize = 8;
+                dev0ep.epAttribs = 0; //set DATA0/1 toggles to 0
+                dev0ep.bmNakPower = USB_NAK_MAX_POWER;
+
+                InitAllAddresses();
+        };
+
+        // Returns a pointer to a specified address entry
+
+        virtual UsbDevice* GetUsbDevicePtr(uint8_t addr) {
+                if(!addr)
+                        return thePool;
+
+                uint8_t index = FindAddressIndex(addr);
+
+                return (!index) ? NULL : thePool + index;
+        };
+
+        // Performs an operation specified by pfunc for each addressed device
+
+        void ForEachUsbDevice(UsbDeviceHandleFunc pfunc) {
+                if(!pfunc)
+                        return;
+
+                for(uint8_t i = 1; i < MAX_DEVICES_ALLOWED; i++)
+                        if(thePool[i].address.devAddress)
+                                pfunc(thePool + i);
+        };
+
+        // Allocates new address
+
+        virtual uint8_t AllocAddress(uint8_t parent, bool is_hub = false, uint8_t port = 0) {
+                /* if (parent != 0 && port == 0)
+                        USB_HOST_SERIAL.println("PRT:0"); */
+                UsbDeviceAddress _parent;
+                _parent.devAddress = parent;
+                if(_parent.bmReserved || port > 7)
+                        //if(parent > 127 || port > 7)
+                        return 0;
+
+                if(is_hub && hubCounter == 7)
+                        return 0;
+
+                // finds first empty address entry starting from one
+                uint8_t index = FindAddressIndex(0);
+
+                if(!index) // if empty entry is not found
+                        return 0;
+
+                if(_parent.devAddress == 0) {
+                        if(is_hub) {
+                                thePool[index].address.devAddress = 0x41;
+                                hubCounter++;
+                        } else
+                                thePool[index].address.devAddress = 1;
+
+                        return thePool[index].address.devAddress;
+                }
+
+                UsbDeviceAddress addr;
+                addr.devAddress = 0; // Ensure all bits are zero
+                addr.bmParent = _parent.bmAddress;
+                if(is_hub) {
+                        addr.bmHub = 1;
+                        addr.bmAddress = ++hubCounter;
+                } else {
+                        addr.bmHub = 0;
+                        addr.bmAddress = port;
+                }
+                thePool[index].address = addr;
+                /*
+                                USB_HOST_SERIAL.print("Addr:");
+                                USB_HOST_SERIAL.print(addr.bmHub, HEX);
+                                USB_HOST_SERIAL.print(".");
+                                USB_HOST_SERIAL.print(addr.bmParent, HEX);
+                                USB_HOST_SERIAL.print(".");
+                                USB_HOST_SERIAL.println(addr.bmAddress, HEX);
+                 */
+                return thePool[index].address.devAddress;
+        };
+
+        // Empties pool entry
+
+        virtual void FreeAddress(uint8_t addr) {
+                // if the root hub is disconnected all the addresses should be initialized
+                if(addr == 0x41) {
+                        InitAllAddresses();
+                        return;
+                }
+                uint8_t index = FindAddressIndex(addr);
+                FreeAddressByIndex(index);
+        };
+
+        // Returns number of hubs attached
+        // It can be rather helpfull to find out if there are hubs attached than getting the exact number of hubs.
+        //uint8_t GetNumHubs()
+        //{
+        //        return hubCounter;
+        //};
+        //uint8_t GetNumDevices()
+        //{
+        //        uint8_t counter = 0;
+
+        //        for (uint8_t i=1; i<MAX_DEVICES_ALLOWED; i++)
+        //                if (thePool[i].address != 0);
+        //                        counter ++;
+
+        //        return counter;
+        //};
+};
+
+#endif // __ADDRESS_H__
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/adk.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/adk.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9e4e0c8d8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/adk.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,371 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+
+/* Google ADK interface */
+
+#include "adk.h"
+
+const uint8_t ADK::epDataInIndex = 1;
+const uint8_t ADK::epDataOutIndex = 2;
+
+ADK::ADK(USB *p, const char* manufacturer,
+        const char* model,
+        const char* description,
+        const char* version,
+        const char* uri,
+        const char* serial) :
+
+/* ADK ID Strings */
+manufacturer(manufacturer),
+model(model),
+description(description),
+version(version),
+uri(uri),
+serial(serial),
+pUsb(p), //pointer to USB class instance - mandatory
+bAddress(0), //device address - mandatory
+bConfNum(0), //configuration number
+bNumEP(1), //if config descriptor needs to be parsed
+ready(false) {
+        // initialize endpoint data structures
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < ADK_MAX_ENDPOINTS; i++) {
+                epInfo[i].epAddr = 0;
+                epInfo[i].maxPktSize = (i) ? 0 : 8;
+                epInfo[i].epAttribs = 0;
+                epInfo[i].bmNakPower = (i) ? USB_NAK_NOWAIT : USB_NAK_MAX_POWER;
+        }//for(uint8_t i=0; i<ADK_MAX_ENDPOINTS; i++...
+
+        // register in USB subsystem
+        if(pUsb) {
+                pUsb->RegisterDeviceClass(this); //set devConfig[] entry
+        }
+}
+
+uint8_t ADK::ConfigureDevice(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed) {
+        return Init(parent, port, lowspeed); // Just call Init. Yes, really!
+}
+
+/* Connection initialization of an Android phone */
+uint8_t ADK::Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed) {
+        uint8_t buf[sizeof (USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR)];
+        USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR * udd = reinterpret_cast<USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR*>(buf);
+        uint8_t rcode;
+        uint8_t num_of_conf; // number of configurations
+        UsbDevice *p = NULL;
+        EpInfo *oldep_ptr = NULL;
+
+        // get memory address of USB device address pool
+        AddressPool &addrPool = pUsb->GetAddressPool();
+
+        USBTRACE("\r\nADK Init");
+
+        // check if address has already been assigned to an instance
+        if(bAddress) {
+                USBTRACE("\r\nAddress in use");
+                return USB_ERROR_CLASS_INSTANCE_ALREADY_IN_USE;
+        }
+
+        // Get pointer to pseudo device with address 0 assigned
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(0);
+
+        if(!p) {
+                USBTRACE("\r\nAddress not found");
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+        }
+
+        if(!p->epinfo) {
+                USBTRACE("epinfo is null\r\n");
+                return USB_ERROR_EPINFO_IS_NULL;
+        }
+
+        // Save old pointer to EP_RECORD of address 0
+        oldep_ptr = p->epinfo;
+
+        // Temporary assign new pointer to epInfo to p->epinfo in order to avoid toggle inconsistence
+        p->epinfo = epInfo;
+
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+
+        // Get device descriptor
+        rcode = pUsb->getDevDescr(0, 0, sizeof (USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR), (uint8_t*)buf);
+
+        // Restore p->epinfo
+        p->epinfo = oldep_ptr;
+
+        if(rcode) {
+                goto FailGetDevDescr;
+        }
+
+        // Allocate new address according to device class
+        bAddress = addrPool.AllocAddress(parent, false, port);
+
+        // Extract Max Packet Size from device descriptor
+        epInfo[0].maxPktSize = udd->bMaxPacketSize0;
+
+        // Assign new address to the device
+        rcode = pUsb->setAddr(0, 0, bAddress);
+        if(rcode) {
+                p->lowspeed = false;
+                addrPool.FreeAddress(bAddress);
+                bAddress = 0;
+                //USBTRACE2("setAddr:",rcode);
+                return rcode;
+        }//if (rcode...
+
+        //USBTRACE2("\r\nAddr:", bAddress);
+        // Spec says you should wait at least 200ms.
+        //delay(300);
+
+        p->lowspeed = false;
+
+        //get pointer to assigned address record
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(bAddress);
+        if(!p) {
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+        }
+
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+
+        // Assign epInfo to epinfo pointer - only EP0 is known
+        rcode = pUsb->setEpInfoEntry(bAddress, 1, epInfo);
+        if(rcode) {
+                goto FailSetDevTblEntry;
+        }
+
+        //check if ADK device is already in accessory mode; if yes, configure and exit
+        if(udd->idVendor == ADK_VID &&
+                (udd->idProduct == ADK_PID || udd->idProduct == ADB_PID)) {
+                USBTRACE("\r\nAcc.mode device detected");
+                /* go through configurations, find first bulk-IN, bulk-OUT EP, fill epInfo and quit */
+                num_of_conf = udd->bNumConfigurations;
+
+                //USBTRACE2("\r\nNC:",num_of_conf);
+                for(uint8_t i = 0; i < num_of_conf; i++) {
+                        ConfigDescParser < 0, 0, 0, 0 > confDescrParser(this);
+                        delay(1);
+                        rcode = pUsb->getConfDescr(bAddress, 0, i, &confDescrParser);
+#if defined(XOOM)
+                        //added by Jaylen Scott Vanorden
+                        if(rcode) {
+                                USBTRACE2("\r\nGot 1st bad code for config: ", rcode);
+                                // Try once more
+                                rcode = pUsb->getConfDescr(bAddress, 0, i, &confDescrParser);
+                        }
+#endif
+                        if(rcode) {
+                                goto FailGetConfDescr;
+                        }
+                        if(bNumEP > 2) {
+                                break;
+                        }
+                } // for (uint8_t i=0; i<num_of_conf; i++...
+
+                if(bNumEP == 3) {
+                        // Assign epInfo to epinfo pointer - this time all 3 endpoins
+                        rcode = pUsb->setEpInfoEntry(bAddress, 3, epInfo);
+                        if(rcode) {
+                                goto FailSetDevTblEntry;
+                        }
+                }
+
+                // Set Configuration Value
+                rcode = pUsb->setConf(bAddress, 0, bConfNum);
+                if(rcode) {
+                        goto FailSetConfDescr;
+                }
+                /* print endpoint structure */
+                /*
+                USBTRACE("\r\nEndpoint Structure:");
+                USBTRACE("\r\nEP0:");
+                USBTRACE2("\r\nAddr: ", epInfo[0].epAddr);
+                USBTRACE2("\r\nMax.pkt.size: ", epInfo[0].maxPktSize);
+                USBTRACE2("\r\nAttr: ", epInfo[0].epAttribs);
+                USBTRACE("\r\nEpout:");
+                USBTRACE2("\r\nAddr: ", epInfo[epDataOutIndex].epAddr);
+                USBTRACE2("\r\nMax.pkt.size: ", epInfo[epDataOutIndex].maxPktSize);
+                USBTRACE2("\r\nAttr: ", epInfo[epDataOutIndex].epAttribs);
+                USBTRACE("\r\nEpin:");
+                USBTRACE2("\r\nAddr: ", epInfo[epDataInIndex].epAddr);
+                USBTRACE2("\r\nMax.pkt.size: ", epInfo[epDataInIndex].maxPktSize);
+                USBTRACE2("\r\nAttr: ", epInfo[epDataInIndex].epAttribs);
+                 */
+
+                USBTRACE("\r\nConfiguration successful");
+                ready = true;
+                return 0; //successful configuration
+        }//if( buf->idVendor == ADK_VID...
+
+        //probe device - get accessory protocol revision
+        {
+                uint16_t adkproto = -1;
+                delay(1);
+                rcode = getProto((uint8_t*) & adkproto);
+#if defined(XOOM)
+                //added by Jaylen Scott Vanorden
+                if(rcode) {
+                        USBTRACE2("\r\nGot 1st bad code for proto: ", rcode);
+                        // Try once more
+                        rcode = getProto((uint8_t*) & adkproto);
+                }
+#endif
+                if(rcode) {
+                        goto FailGetProto; //init fails
+                }
+                USBTRACE2("\r\nADK protocol rev. ", adkproto);
+        }
+
+        delay(100);
+
+        //sending ID strings
+        sendStr(ACCESSORY_STRING_MANUFACTURER, manufacturer);
+        delay(10);
+        sendStr(ACCESSORY_STRING_MODEL, model);
+        delay(10);
+        sendStr(ACCESSORY_STRING_DESCRIPTION, description);
+        delay(10);
+        sendStr(ACCESSORY_STRING_VERSION, version);
+        delay(10);
+        sendStr(ACCESSORY_STRING_URI, uri);
+        delay(10);
+        sendStr(ACCESSORY_STRING_SERIAL, serial);
+
+        delay(100);
+
+        //switch to accessory mode
+        //the Android phone will reset
+        rcode = switchAcc();
+        if(rcode) {
+                goto FailSwAcc; //init fails
+        }
+        rcode = USB_ERROR_CONFIG_REQUIRES_ADDITIONAL_RESET;
+        delay(100); // Give Android a chance to do its reset. This is a guess, and possibly could be lower.
+        goto SwAttempt; //switch to accessory mode attempted
+
+        /* diagnostic messages */
+FailGetDevDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailGetDevDescr(rcode);
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailSetDevTblEntry:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailSetDevTblEntry(rcode);
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailGetConfDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailGetConfDescr(rcode);
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailSetConfDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailSetConfDescr(rcode);
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailGetProto:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        USBTRACE("\r\ngetProto:");
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailSwAcc:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        USBTRACE("\r\nswAcc:");
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+        //FailOnInit:
+        //        USBTRACE("OnInit:");
+        //        goto Fail;
+        //
+SwAttempt:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        USBTRACE("\r\nAccessory mode switch attempt");
+Fail:
+#endif
+        //USBTRACE2("\r\nADK Init Failed, error code: ", rcode);
+        //NotifyFail(rcode);
+        Release();
+        return rcode;
+}
+
+/* Extracts bulk-IN and bulk-OUT endpoint information from config descriptor */
+void ADK::EndpointXtract(uint8_t conf, uint8_t iface, uint8_t alt, uint8_t proto, const USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR *pep) {
+        //ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("Conf.Val"), conf);
+        //ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("Iface Num"), iface);
+        //ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("Alt.Set"), alt);
+
+        //added by Yuuichi Akagawa
+        if(bNumEP == 3) {
+                return;
+        }
+
+        bConfNum = conf;
+
+        if((pep->bmAttributes & 0x02) == 2) {
+                uint8_t index = ((pep->bEndpointAddress & 0x80) == 0x80) ? epDataInIndex : epDataOutIndex;
+                // Fill in the endpoint info structure
+                epInfo[index].epAddr = (pep->bEndpointAddress & 0x0F);
+                epInfo[index].maxPktSize = (uint8_t)pep->wMaxPacketSize;
+
+                bNumEP++;
+
+                //PrintEndpointDescriptor(pep);
+        }
+}
+
+/* Performs a cleanup after failed Init() attempt */
+uint8_t ADK::Release() {
+        pUsb->GetAddressPool().FreeAddress(bAddress);
+
+        bNumEP = 1; //must have to be reset to 1
+
+        bAddress = 0;
+        ready = false;
+        return 0;
+}
+
+uint8_t ADK::RcvData(uint16_t *bytes_rcvd, uint8_t *dataptr) {
+        //USBTRACE2("\r\nAddr: ", bAddress );
+        //USBTRACE2("\r\nEP: ",epInfo[epDataInIndex].epAddr);
+        return pUsb->inTransfer(bAddress, epInfo[epDataInIndex].epAddr, bytes_rcvd, dataptr);
+}
+
+uint8_t ADK::SndData(uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t *dataptr) {
+        return pUsb->outTransfer(bAddress, epInfo[epDataOutIndex].epAddr, nbytes, dataptr);
+}
+
+void ADK::PrintEndpointDescriptor(const USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR* ep_ptr) {
+        Notify(PSTR("Endpoint descriptor:"), 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nLength:\t\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (ep_ptr->bLength, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nType:\t\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (ep_ptr->bDescriptorType, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nAddress:\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (ep_ptr->bEndpointAddress, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nAttributes:\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (ep_ptr->bmAttributes, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nMaxPktSize:\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint16_t > (ep_ptr->wMaxPacketSize, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nPoll Intrv:\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (ep_ptr->bInterval, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\n"), 0x80);
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/adk.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/adk.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4a2920b88
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/adk.h
@@ -0,0 +1,140 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+
+/* Google ADK interface support header */
+
+#if !defined(_ADK_H_)
+#define _ADK_H_
+
+#include "Usb.h"
+
+#define ADK_VID   0x18D1
+#define ADK_PID   0x2D00
+#define ADB_PID   0x2D01
+
+#define XOOM  //enables repeating getProto() and getConf() attempts
+//necessary for slow devices such as Motorola XOOM
+//defined by default, can be commented out to save memory
+
+/* requests */
+
+#define ADK_GETPROTO      51  //check USB accessory protocol version
+#define ADK_SENDSTR       52  //send identifying string
+#define ADK_ACCSTART      53  //start device in accessory mode
+
+#define bmREQ_ADK_GET     USB_SETUP_DEVICE_TO_HOST|USB_SETUP_TYPE_VENDOR|USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_DEVICE
+#define bmREQ_ADK_SEND    USB_SETUP_HOST_TO_DEVICE|USB_SETUP_TYPE_VENDOR|USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_DEVICE
+
+#define ACCESSORY_STRING_MANUFACTURER   0
+#define ACCESSORY_STRING_MODEL          1
+#define ACCESSORY_STRING_DESCRIPTION    2
+#define ACCESSORY_STRING_VERSION        3
+#define ACCESSORY_STRING_URI            4
+#define ACCESSORY_STRING_SERIAL         5
+
+#define ADK_MAX_ENDPOINTS 3 //endpoint 0, bulk_IN, bulk_OUT
+
+class ADK;
+
+class ADK : public USBDeviceConfig, public UsbConfigXtracter {
+private:
+        /* ID strings */
+        const char* manufacturer;
+        const char* model;
+        const char* description;
+        const char* version;
+        const char* uri;
+        const char* serial;
+
+        /* ADK proprietary requests */
+        uint8_t getProto(uint8_t* adkproto);
+        uint8_t sendStr(uint8_t index, const char* str);
+        uint8_t switchAcc(void);
+
+protected:
+        static const uint8_t epDataInIndex; // DataIn endpoint index
+        static const uint8_t epDataOutIndex; // DataOUT endpoint index
+
+        /* mandatory members */
+        USB *pUsb;
+        uint8_t bAddress;
+        uint8_t bConfNum; // configuration number
+
+        uint8_t bNumEP; // total number of EP in the configuration
+        bool ready;
+
+        /* Endpoint data structure */
+        EpInfo epInfo[ADK_MAX_ENDPOINTS];
+
+        void PrintEndpointDescriptor(const USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR* ep_ptr);
+
+public:
+        ADK(USB *pUsb, const char* manufacturer,
+                const char* model,
+                const char* description,
+                const char* version,
+                const char* uri,
+                const char* serial);
+
+        // Methods for receiving and sending data
+        uint8_t RcvData(uint16_t *nbytesptr, uint8_t *dataptr);
+        uint8_t SndData(uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t *dataptr);
+
+
+        // USBDeviceConfig implementation
+        uint8_t ConfigureDevice(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed);
+        uint8_t Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed);
+        uint8_t Release();
+
+        virtual uint8_t Poll() {
+                return 0;
+        };
+
+        virtual uint8_t GetAddress() {
+                return bAddress;
+        };
+
+        virtual bool isReady() {
+                return ready;
+        };
+
+        virtual bool VIDPIDOK(uint16_t vid, uint16_t pid) {
+                return (vid == ADK_VID && (pid == ADK_PID || pid == ADB_PID));
+        };
+
+        //UsbConfigXtracter implementation
+        void EndpointXtract(uint8_t conf, uint8_t iface, uint8_t alt, uint8_t proto, const USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR *ep);
+}; //class ADK : public USBDeviceConfig ...
+
+/* get ADK protocol version */
+
+/* returns 2 bytes in *adkproto */
+inline uint8_t ADK::getProto(uint8_t* adkproto) {
+        return ( pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, bmREQ_ADK_GET, ADK_GETPROTO, 0, 0, 0, 2, 2, adkproto, NULL));
+}
+
+/* send ADK string */
+inline uint8_t ADK::sendStr(uint8_t index, const char* str) {
+        return ( pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, bmREQ_ADK_SEND, ADK_SENDSTR, 0, 0, index, strlen(str) + 1, strlen(str) + 1, (uint8_t*)str, NULL));
+}
+
+/* switch to accessory mode */
+inline uint8_t ADK::switchAcc(void) {
+        return ( pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, bmREQ_ADK_SEND, ADK_ACCSTART, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, NULL, NULL));
+}
+
+#endif // _ADK_H_
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/avrpins.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/avrpins.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4e60e3a22
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/avrpins.h
@@ -0,0 +1,1130 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+
+/* derived from Konstantin Chizhov's AVR port templates */
+
+#if !defined(_usb_h_) || defined(_avrpins_h_)
+#error "Never include avrpins.h directly; include Usb.h instead"
+#else
+#define _avrpins_h_
+
+#if defined(__AVR__)
+
+// pointers are 16 bits on AVR
+#define pgm_read_pointer(p) pgm_read_word(p)
+
+// Support for these boards needs to be manually activated in settings.h or in a makefile
+#if !defined(BOARD_MEGA_ADK) && defined(__AVR_ATmega2560__) && (USE_UHS_MEGA_ADK || defined(ARDUINO_AVR_ADK))
+#define BOARD_MEGA_ADK
+#elif !defined(BOARD_BLACK_WIDDOW) && USE_UHS_BLACK_WIDDOW
+#define BOARD_BLACK_WIDDOW
+#endif
+
+#ifdef PORTA
+#define USE_PORTA
+#endif
+#ifdef PORTB
+#define USE_PORTB
+#endif
+#ifdef PORTC
+#define USE_PORTC
+#endif
+#ifdef PORTD
+#define USE_PORTD
+#endif
+#ifdef PORTE
+#define USE_PORTE
+#endif
+#ifdef PORTF
+#define USE_PORTF
+#endif
+#ifdef PORTG
+#define USE_PORTG
+#endif
+#ifdef PORTH
+#define USE_PORTH
+#endif
+#ifdef PORTJ
+#define USE_PORTJ
+#endif
+#ifdef PORTK
+#define USE_PORTK
+#endif
+#ifdef PORTL
+#define USE_PORTL
+#endif
+#ifdef PORTQ
+#define USE_PORTQ
+#endif
+#ifdef PORTR
+#define USE_PORTR
+#endif
+
+#ifdef TCCR0A
+#define USE_TCCR0A
+#endif
+#ifdef TCCR1A
+#define USE_TCCR1A
+#endif
+#ifdef TCCR2A
+#define USE_TCCR2A
+#endif
+
+//Port definitions for AtTiny, AtMega families.
+
+#define MAKE_PORT(portName, ddrName, pinName, className, ID) \
+    class className{\
+    public:\
+      typedef uint8_t DataT;\
+    public:\
+      static void Write(DataT value){portName = value;}\
+      static void ClearAndSet(DataT clearMask, DataT value){portName = (portName & ~clearMask) | value;}\
+      static DataT Read(){return portName;}\
+      static void DirWrite(DataT value){ddrName = value;}\
+      static DataT DirRead(){return ddrName;}\
+      static void Set(DataT value){portName |= value;}\
+      static void Clear(DataT value){portName &= ~value;}\
+      static void Toggle(DataT value){portName ^= value;}\
+      static void DirSet(DataT value){ddrName |= value;}\
+      static void DirClear(DataT value){ddrName &= ~value;}\
+      static void DirToggle(DataT value){ddrName ^= value;}\
+      static DataT PinRead(){return pinName;}\
+      enum{Id = ID};\
+      enum{Width=sizeof(DataT)*8};\
+    };
+
+// TCCR registers to set/clear Arduino PWM
+#define MAKE_TCCR(TccrName, className) \
+    class className{\
+    public:\
+      typedef uint8_t DataT;\
+    public:\
+      static void Write(DataT value){TccrName = value;}\
+      static void ClearAndSet(DataT clearMask, DataT value){TccrName = (TccrName & ~clearMask) | value;}\
+      static DataT Read(){return TccrName;}\
+      static void Set(DataT value){TccrName |= value;}\
+      static void Clear(DataT value){TccrName &= ~value;}\
+      static void Toggle(DataT value){TccrName ^= value;}\
+      enum{Width=sizeof(DataT)*8};\
+    };
+
+#ifdef USE_PORTA
+
+MAKE_PORT(PORTA, DDRA, PINA, Porta, 'A')
+#endif
+#ifdef USE_PORTB
+MAKE_PORT(PORTB, DDRB, PINB, Portb, 'B')
+#endif
+#ifdef USE_PORTC
+MAKE_PORT(PORTC, DDRC, PINC, Portc, 'C')
+#endif
+#ifdef USE_PORTD
+MAKE_PORT(PORTD, DDRD, PIND, Portd, 'D')
+#endif
+#ifdef USE_PORTE
+MAKE_PORT(PORTE, DDRE, PINE, Porte, 'E')
+#endif
+#ifdef USE_PORTF
+MAKE_PORT(PORTF, DDRF, PINF, Portf, 'F')
+#endif
+#ifdef USE_PORTG
+MAKE_PORT(PORTG, DDRG, PING, Portg, 'G')
+#endif
+#ifdef USE_PORTH
+MAKE_PORT(PORTH, DDRH, PINH, Porth, 'H')
+#endif
+#ifdef USE_PORTJ
+MAKE_PORT(PORTJ, DDRJ, PINJ, Portj, 'J')
+#endif
+#ifdef USE_PORTK
+MAKE_PORT(PORTK, DDRK, PINK, Portk, 'K')
+#endif
+#ifdef USE_PORTL
+MAKE_PORT(PORTL, DDRL, PINL, Portl, 'L')
+#endif
+#ifdef USE_PORTQ
+MAKE_PORT(PORTQ, DDRQ, PINQ, Portq, 'Q')
+#endif
+#ifdef USE_PORTR
+MAKE_PORT(PORTR, DDRR, PINR, Portr, 'R')
+#endif
+
+#ifdef USE_TCCR0A
+MAKE_TCCR(TCCR0A, Tccr0a)
+#endif
+#ifdef USE_TCCR1A
+MAKE_TCCR(TCCR1A, Tccr1a)
+#endif
+#ifdef USE_TCCR2A
+MAKE_TCCR(TCCR2A, Tccr2a)
+#endif
+
+// this class represents one pin in a IO port.
+// It is fully static.
+template<typename PORT, uint8_t PIN>
+class TPin {
+        //    BOOST_STATIC_ASSERT(PIN < PORT::Width);
+public:
+        typedef PORT Port;
+
+        enum {
+                Number = PIN
+        };
+
+        static void Set() {
+                PORT::Set(1 << PIN);
+        }
+
+        static void Set(uint8_t val) {
+                if(val)
+                        Set();
+                else Clear();
+        }
+
+        static void SetDir(uint8_t val) {
+                if(val)
+                        SetDirWrite();
+                else SetDirRead();
+        }
+
+        static void Clear() {
+                PORT::Clear(1 << PIN);
+        }
+
+        static void Toggle() {
+                PORT::Toggle(1 << PIN);
+        }
+
+        static void SetDirRead() {
+                PORT::DirClear(1 << PIN);
+        }
+
+        static void SetDirWrite() {
+                PORT::DirSet(1 << PIN);
+        }
+
+        static uint8_t IsSet() {
+                return PORT::PinRead() & (uint8_t)(1 << PIN);
+        }
+
+        static void WaiteForSet() {
+                while(IsSet() == 0) {
+                }
+        }
+
+        static void WaiteForClear() {
+                while(IsSet()) {
+                }
+        }
+}; //class TPin...
+
+// this class represents one bit in TCCR port.
+// used to set/clear TCCRx bits
+// It is fully static.
+
+template<typename TCCR, uint8_t COM>
+class TCom {
+        //    BOOST_STATIC_ASSERT(PIN < PORT::Width);
+public:
+        typedef TCCR Tccr;
+
+        enum {
+                Com = COM
+        };
+
+        static void Set() {
+                TCCR::Set(1 << COM);
+        }
+
+        static void Clear() {
+                TCCR::Clear(1 << COM);
+        }
+
+        static void Toggle() {
+                TCCR::Toggle(1 << COM);
+        }
+}; //class TCom...
+
+//Short pin definitions
+#ifdef USE_PORTA
+typedef TPin<Porta, 0 > Pa0;
+typedef TPin<Porta, 1 > Pa1;
+typedef TPin<Porta, 2 > Pa2;
+typedef TPin<Porta, 3 > Pa3;
+typedef TPin<Porta, 4 > Pa4;
+typedef TPin<Porta, 5 > Pa5;
+typedef TPin<Porta, 6 > Pa6;
+typedef TPin<Porta, 7 > Pa7;
+#endif
+
+#ifdef USE_PORTB
+typedef TPin<Portb, 0 > Pb0;
+typedef TPin<Portb, 1 > Pb1;
+typedef TPin<Portb, 2 > Pb2;
+typedef TPin<Portb, 3 > Pb3;
+typedef TPin<Portb, 4 > Pb4;
+typedef TPin<Portb, 5 > Pb5;
+typedef TPin<Portb, 6 > Pb6;
+typedef TPin<Portb, 7 > Pb7;
+#endif
+
+#ifdef USE_PORTC
+typedef TPin<Portc, 0 > Pc0;
+typedef TPin<Portc, 1 > Pc1;
+typedef TPin<Portc, 2 > Pc2;
+typedef TPin<Portc, 3 > Pc3;
+typedef TPin<Portc, 4 > Pc4;
+typedef TPin<Portc, 5 > Pc5;
+typedef TPin<Portc, 6 > Pc6;
+typedef TPin<Portc, 7 > Pc7;
+#endif
+
+#ifdef USE_PORTD
+typedef TPin<Portd, 0 > Pd0;
+typedef TPin<Portd, 1 > Pd1;
+typedef TPin<Portd, 2 > Pd2;
+typedef TPin<Portd, 3 > Pd3;
+typedef TPin<Portd, 4 > Pd4;
+typedef TPin<Portd, 5 > Pd5;
+typedef TPin<Portd, 6 > Pd6;
+typedef TPin<Portd, 7 > Pd7;
+#endif
+
+#ifdef USE_PORTE
+typedef TPin<Porte, 0 > Pe0;
+typedef TPin<Porte, 1 > Pe1;
+typedef TPin<Porte, 2 > Pe2;
+typedef TPin<Porte, 3 > Pe3;
+typedef TPin<Porte, 4 > Pe4;
+typedef TPin<Porte, 5 > Pe5;
+typedef TPin<Porte, 6 > Pe6;
+typedef TPin<Porte, 7 > Pe7;
+#endif
+
+#ifdef USE_PORTF
+typedef TPin<Portf, 0 > Pf0;
+typedef TPin<Portf, 1 > Pf1;
+typedef TPin<Portf, 2 > Pf2;
+typedef TPin<Portf, 3 > Pf3;
+typedef TPin<Portf, 4 > Pf4;
+typedef TPin<Portf, 5 > Pf5;
+typedef TPin<Portf, 6 > Pf6;
+typedef TPin<Portf, 7 > Pf7;
+#endif
+
+#ifdef USE_PORTG
+typedef TPin<Portg, 0 > Pg0;
+typedef TPin<Portg, 1 > Pg1;
+typedef TPin<Portg, 2 > Pg2;
+typedef TPin<Portg, 3 > Pg3;
+typedef TPin<Portg, 4 > Pg4;
+typedef TPin<Portg, 5 > Pg5;
+typedef TPin<Portg, 6 > Pg6;
+typedef TPin<Portg, 7 > Pg7;
+#endif
+
+#ifdef USE_PORTH
+typedef TPin<Porth, 0 > Ph0;
+typedef TPin<Porth, 1 > Ph1;
+typedef TPin<Porth, 2 > Ph2;
+typedef TPin<Porth, 3 > Ph3;
+typedef TPin<Porth, 4 > Ph4;
+typedef TPin<Porth, 5 > Ph5;
+typedef TPin<Porth, 6 > Ph6;
+typedef TPin<Porth, 7 > Ph7;
+#endif
+
+#ifdef USE_PORTJ
+typedef TPin<Portj, 0 > Pj0;
+typedef TPin<Portj, 1 > Pj1;
+typedef TPin<Portj, 2 > Pj2;
+typedef TPin<Portj, 3 > Pj3;
+typedef TPin<Portj, 4 > Pj4;
+typedef TPin<Portj, 5 > Pj5;
+typedef TPin<Portj, 6 > Pj6;
+typedef TPin<Portj, 7 > Pj7;
+#endif
+
+#ifdef USE_PORTK
+typedef TPin<Portk, 0 > Pk0;
+typedef TPin<Portk, 1 > Pk1;
+typedef TPin<Portk, 2 > Pk2;
+typedef TPin<Portk, 3 > Pk3;
+typedef TPin<Portk, 4 > Pk4;
+typedef TPin<Portk, 5 > Pk5;
+typedef TPin<Portk, 6 > Pk6;
+typedef TPin<Portk, 7 > Pk7;
+#endif
+
+#ifdef USE_PORTL
+typedef TPin<Portl, 0 > Pl0;
+typedef TPin<Portl, 1 > Pl1;
+typedef TPin<Portl, 2 > Pl2;
+typedef TPin<Portl, 3 > Pl3;
+typedef TPin<Portl, 4 > Pl4;
+typedef TPin<Portl, 5 > Pl5;
+typedef TPin<Portl, 6 > Pl6;
+typedef TPin<Portl, 7 > Pl7;
+#endif
+
+#ifdef USE_PORTQ
+typedef TPin<Portq, 0 > Pq0;
+typedef TPin<Portq, 1 > Pq1;
+typedef TPin<Portq, 2 > Pq2;
+typedef TPin<Portq, 3 > Pq3;
+typedef TPin<Portq, 4 > Pq4;
+typedef TPin<Portq, 5 > Pq5;
+typedef TPin<Portq, 6 > Pq6;
+typedef TPin<Portq, 7 > Pq7;
+#endif
+
+#ifdef USE_PORTR
+typedef TPin<Portr, 0 > Pr0;
+typedef TPin<Portr, 1 > Pr1;
+typedef TPin<Portr, 2 > Pr2;
+typedef TPin<Portr, 3 > Pr3;
+typedef TPin<Portr, 4 > Pr4;
+typedef TPin<Portr, 5 > Pr5;
+typedef TPin<Portr, 6 > Pr6;
+typedef TPin<Portr, 7 > Pr7;
+#endif
+
+#ifdef USE_TCCR0A
+typedef TCom<Tccr0a, COM0A1> Tc0a; //P6
+typedef TCom<Tccr0a, COM0B1> Tc0b; //P5
+#endif
+
+#ifdef USE_TCCR1A
+typedef TCom<Tccr1a, COM1A1> Tc1a; //P9
+typedef TCom<Tccr1a, COM1B1> Tc1b; //P10
+#endif
+
+#ifdef USE_TCCR2A
+typedef TCom<Tccr2a, COM2A1> Tc2a; //P11
+typedef TCom<Tccr2a, COM2B1> Tc2b; //P3
+#endif
+
+template<typename Tp_pin, typename Tc_bit>
+class Tp_Tc {
+public:
+
+        static void SetDir(uint8_t val) {
+                if(val)
+                        SetDirWrite();
+                else SetDirRead();
+        }
+
+        static void SetDirRead() {
+                Tp_pin::SetDirRead(); //set pin direction
+                Tc_bit::Clear(); //disconnect pin from PWM
+        }
+
+        static void SetDirWrite() {
+                Tp_pin::SetDirWrite();
+                Tc_bit::Clear();
+        }
+};
+
+/* pin definitions for cases where it's necessary to clear compare output mode bits */
+
+//typedef Tp_Tc<Pd3, Tc2b> P3;  //Arduino pin 3
+//typedef Tp_Tc<Pd5, Tc0b> P5;  //Arduino pin 5
+//typedef Tp_Tc<Pd6, Tc0a> P6;  //Arduino pin 6
+//typedef Tp_Tc<Pb1, Tc1a> P9;  //Arduino pin 9
+//typedef Tp_Tc<Pb2, Tc1b> P10;  //Arduino pin 10
+//typedef Tp_Tc<Pb3, Tc2a> P11;  //Arduino pin 11
+
+/* Arduino pin definitions  */
+#if defined(__AVR_ATmega1280__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega2560__)
+// "Mega" Arduino pin numbers
+
+#define P0  Pe0
+#define P1  Pe1
+#define P2  Pe4
+#define P3  Pe5
+#define P4  Pg5
+#define P5  Pe3
+#define P6  Ph3
+#define P7  Ph4
+
+#define P8  Ph5
+#define P9  Ph6
+#define P10  Pb4
+#define P11  Pb5
+#define P12  Pb6
+#define P13  Pb7
+
+#define P14  Pj1
+#define P15  Pj0
+#define P16  Ph1
+#define P17  Ph0
+#define P18  Pd3
+#define P19  Pd2
+#define P20  Pd1
+#define P21  Pd0
+
+#define P22 Pa0
+#define P23 Pa1
+#define P24 Pa2
+#define P25 Pa3
+#define P26 Pa4
+#define P27 Pa5
+#define P28 Pa6
+#define P29 Pa7
+#define P30 Pc7
+#define P31 Pc6
+#define P32 Pc5
+#define P33 Pc4
+#define P34 Pc3
+#define P35 Pc2
+#define P36 Pc1
+#define P37 Pc0
+
+#define P38 Pd7
+#define P39 Pg2
+#define P40 Pg1
+#define P41 Pg0
+#define P42 Pl7
+#define P43 Pl6
+#define P44 Pl5
+#define P45 Pl4
+#define P46 Pl3
+#define P47 Pl2
+#define P48 Pl1
+#define P49 Pl0
+#define P50 Pb3
+#define P51 Pb2
+#define P52 Pb1
+#define P53 Pb0
+
+#ifdef BOARD_MEGA_ADK // These pins are not broken out on the Arduino ADK
+#define P54 Pe6 // INT on Arduino ADK
+#define P55 Pj2 // MAX_RESET on Arduino ADK
+#endif
+
+// "Mega" pin numbers
+
+#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega168__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega328P__)
+// "Classic" Arduino pin numbers
+
+#define P0  Pd0
+#define P1  Pd1
+#define P2  Pd2
+#define P3  Pd3
+#define P4  Pd4
+#define P5  Pd5
+#define P6  Pd6
+#define P7  Pd7
+
+#define P8  Pb0
+#define P9  Pb1
+#define P10  Pb2
+#define P11  Pb3
+#define P12  Pb4
+#define P13  Pb5
+
+#define P14  Pc0
+#define P15  Pc1
+#define P16  Pc2
+#define P17  Pc3
+#define P18  Pc4
+#define P19  Pc5
+
+// "Classic" Arduino pin numbers
+
+#elif defined(CORE_TEENSY) && defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__)
+// Teensy 2.0 pin numbers
+// http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/pinout.html
+#define P0  Pb0
+#define P1  Pb1
+#define P2  Pb2
+#define P3  Pb3
+#define P4  Pb7
+#define P5  Pd0
+#define P6  Pd1
+#define P7  Pd2
+#define P8  Pd3
+#define P9  Pc6
+#define P10 Pc7
+#define P11 Pd6
+#define P12 Pd7
+#define P13 Pb4
+#define P14 Pb5
+#define P15 Pb6
+#define P16 Pf7
+#define P17 Pf6
+#define P18 Pf5
+#define P19 Pf4
+#define P20 Pf1
+#define P21 Pf0
+#define P22 Pd4
+#define P23 Pd5
+#define P24 Pe6
+// Teensy 2.0
+
+#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__)
+// Arduino Leonardo pin numbers
+
+#define P0  Pd2 // D0 - PD2
+#define P1  Pd3 // D1 - PD3
+#define P2  Pd1 // D2 - PD1
+#define P3  Pd0 // D3 - PD0
+#define P4  Pd4 // D4 - PD4
+#define P5  Pc6 // D5 - PC6
+#define P6  Pd7 // D6 - PD7
+#define P7  Pe6 // D7 - PE6
+
+#define P8  Pb4 // D8 - PB4
+#define P9  Pb5 // D9 - PB5
+#define P10 Pb6 // D10 - PB6
+#define P11 Pb7 // D11 - PB7
+#define P12 Pd6 // D12 - PD6
+#define P13 Pc7 // D13 - PC7
+
+#define P14 Pb3 // D14 - MISO - PB3
+#define P15 Pb1 // D15 - SCK - PB1
+#define P16 Pb2 // D16 - MOSI - PB2
+#define P17 Pb0 // D17 - SS - PB0
+
+#define P18 Pf7 // D18 - A0 - PF7
+#define P19 Pf6 // D19 - A1 - PF6
+#define P20 Pf5 // D20 - A2 - PF5
+#define P21 Pf4 // D21 - A3 - PF4
+#define P22 Pf1 // D22 - A4 - PF1
+#define P23 Pf0 // D23 - A5 - PF0
+
+#define P24 Pd4 // D24 / D4 - A6 - PD4
+#define P25 Pd7 // D25 / D6 - A7 - PD7
+#define P26 Pb4 // D26 / D8 - A8 - PB4
+#define P27 Pb5 // D27 / D9 - A9 - PB5
+#define P28 Pb6 // D28 / D10 - A10 - PB6
+#define P29 Pd6 // D29 / D12 - A11 - PD6
+
+// Arduino Leonardo pin numbers
+
+#elif defined(CORE_TEENSY) && (defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__))
+// Teensy++ 1.0 and 2.0 pin numbers
+// http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/pinout.html
+#define P0  Pd0
+#define P1  Pd1
+#define P2  Pd2
+#define P3  Pd3
+#define P4  Pd4
+#define P5  Pd5
+#define P6  Pd6
+#define P7  Pd7
+#define P8  Pe0
+#define P9  Pe1
+#define P10 Pc0
+#define P11 Pc1
+#define P12 Pc2
+#define P13 Pc3
+#define P14 Pc4
+#define P15 Pc5
+#define P16 Pc6
+#define P17 Pc7
+#define P18 Pe6
+#define P19 Pe7
+#define P20 Pb0
+#define P21 Pb1
+#define P22 Pb2
+#define P23 Pb3
+#define P24 Pb4
+#define P25 Pb5
+#define P26 Pb6
+#define P27 Pb7
+#define P28 Pa0
+#define P29 Pa1
+#define P30 Pa2
+#define P31 Pa3
+#define P32 Pa4
+#define P33 Pa5
+#define P34 Pa6
+#define P35 Pa7
+#define P36 Pe4
+#define P37 Pe5
+#define P38 Pf0
+#define P39 Pf1
+#define P40 Pf2
+#define P41 Pf3
+#define P42 Pf4
+#define P43 Pf5
+#define P44 Pf6
+#define P45 Pf7
+// Teensy++ 1.0 and 2.0
+
+#elif defined(ARDUINO_AVR_BALANDUINO) && (defined(__AVR_ATmega644__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega1284P__))
+// Balanduino pin numbers
+// http://balanduino.net/
+#define P0  Pd0 /* 0  - PD0 */
+#define P1  Pd1 /* 1  - PD1 */
+
+#if BALANDUINO_REVISION < 13
+  #define P2  Pb2 /* 2  - PB2 */
+  #define P3  Pd6 /* 3  - PD6 */
+  #define P4  Pd7 /* 4  - PD7 */
+  #define P5  Pb3 /* 5  - PB3 */
+#else
+  #define P2  Pd2 /* 2  - PD2 */
+  #define P3  Pd3 /* 3  - PD3 */
+  #define P4  Pd6 /* 4  - PD6 */
+  #define P5  Pd7 /* 5  - PD7 */
+#endif
+
+#define P6  Pb4 /* 6  - PB4 */
+#define P7  Pa0 /* 7  - PA0 */
+#define P8  Pa1 /* 8  - PA1 */
+#define P9  Pa2 /* 9  - PA2 */
+#define P10 Pa3 /* 10 - PA3 */
+#define P11 Pa4 /* 11 - PA4 */
+#define P12 Pa5 /* 12 - PA5 */
+#define P13 Pc1 /* 13 - PC1 */
+#define P14 Pc0 /* 14 - PC0 */
+
+#if BALANDUINO_REVISION < 13
+  #define P15 Pd2 /* 15 - PD2 */
+  #define P16 Pd3 /* 16 - PD3 */
+#else
+  #define P15 Pb2 /* 15 - PB2 */
+  #define P16 Pb3 /* 16 - PB2 */
+#endif
+
+#define P17 Pd4 /* 17 - PD4 */
+#define P18 Pd5 /* 18 - PD5 */
+#define P19 Pc2 /* 19 - PC2 */
+#define P20 Pc3 /* 20 - PC3 */
+#define P21 Pc4 /* 21 - PC4 */
+#define P22 Pc5 /* 22 - PC5 */
+#define P23 Pc6 /* 23 - PC6 */
+#define P24 Pc7 /* 24 - PC7 */
+#define P25 Pb0 /* 25 - PB0 */
+#define P26 Pb1 /* 26 - PB1 */
+#define P27 Pb5 /* 27 - PB5 */
+#define P28 Pb6 /* 28 - PB6 */
+#define P29 Pb7 /* 29 - PB7 */
+#define P30 Pa6 /* 30 - PA6 */
+#define P31 Pa7 /* 31 - PA7 */
+// Balanduino
+
+#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega644__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega644P__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega1284__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega1284P__)
+// Sanguino pin numbers
+// Homepage: http://sanguino.cc/hardware
+// Hardware add-on: https://github.com/Lauszus/Sanguino
+#define P0  Pb0
+#define P1  Pb1
+#define P2  Pb2
+#define P3  Pb3
+#define P4  Pb4
+#define P5  Pb5
+#define P6  Pb6
+#define P7  Pb7
+#define P8  Pd0
+#define P9  Pd1
+#define P10 Pd2
+#define P11 Pd3
+#define P12 Pd4
+#define P13 Pd5
+#define P14 Pd6
+#define P15 Pd7
+#define P16 Pc0
+#define P17 Pc1
+#define P18 Pc2
+#define P19 Pc3
+#define P20 Pc4
+#define P21 Pc5
+#define P22 Pc6
+#define P23 Pc7
+#define P24 Pa0
+#define P25 Pa1
+#define P26 Pa2
+#define P27 Pa3
+#define P28 Pa4
+#define P29 Pa5
+#define P30 Pa6
+#define P31 Pa7
+// Sanguino
+
+#else
+#error "Please define board in avrpins.h"
+
+#endif // Arduino pin definitions
+
+#elif defined(__arm__)
+
+// pointers are 32 bits on ARM
+#define pgm_read_pointer(p) pgm_read_dword(p)
+
+#if defined(CORE_TEENSY) && (defined(__MK20DX128__) || defined(__MK20DX256__))
+
+#include "core_pins.h"
+#include "avr_emulation.h"
+
+#define GPIO_BITBAND_ADDR(reg, bit) (((uint32_t)&(reg) - 0x40000000) * 32 + (bit) * 4 + 0x42000000)
+#define GPIO_BITBAND_PTR(reg, bit) ((uint8_t *)GPIO_BITBAND_ADDR((reg), (bit)))
+
+#define MAKE_PIN(className, baseReg, pinNum, configReg) \
+class className { \
+public: \
+  static void Set() { \
+    *GPIO_BITBAND_PTR(baseReg, pinNum) = 1; \
+  } \
+  static void Clear() { \
+    *GPIO_BITBAND_PTR(baseReg, pinNum) = 0; \
+  } \
+  static void SetDirRead() { \
+    configReg = PORT_PCR_SRE | PORT_PCR_DSE | PORT_PCR_MUX(1); \
+    *(GPIO_BITBAND_PTR(baseReg, pinNum) + 640) = 0; \
+  } \
+  static void SetDirWrite() { \
+    configReg = PORT_PCR_SRE | PORT_PCR_DSE | PORT_PCR_MUX(1); \
+    *(GPIO_BITBAND_PTR(baseReg, pinNum) + 640) = 1; \
+  } \
+  static uint8_t IsSet() { \
+    return *(GPIO_BITBAND_PTR(baseReg, pinNum) + 512); \
+  } \
+};
+
+MAKE_PIN(P0, CORE_PIN0_PORTREG, CORE_PIN0_BIT, CORE_PIN0_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P1, CORE_PIN1_PORTREG, CORE_PIN1_BIT, CORE_PIN1_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P2, CORE_PIN2_PORTREG, CORE_PIN2_BIT, CORE_PIN2_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P3, CORE_PIN3_PORTREG, CORE_PIN3_BIT, CORE_PIN3_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P4, CORE_PIN4_PORTREG, CORE_PIN4_BIT, CORE_PIN4_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P5, CORE_PIN5_PORTREG, CORE_PIN5_BIT, CORE_PIN5_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P6, CORE_PIN6_PORTREG, CORE_PIN6_BIT, CORE_PIN6_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P7, CORE_PIN7_PORTREG, CORE_PIN7_BIT, CORE_PIN7_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P8, CORE_PIN8_PORTREG, CORE_PIN8_BIT, CORE_PIN8_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P9, CORE_PIN9_PORTREG, CORE_PIN9_BIT, CORE_PIN9_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P10, CORE_PIN10_PORTREG, CORE_PIN10_BIT, CORE_PIN10_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P11, CORE_PIN11_PORTREG, CORE_PIN11_BIT, CORE_PIN11_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P12, CORE_PIN12_PORTREG, CORE_PIN12_BIT, CORE_PIN12_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P13, CORE_PIN13_PORTREG, CORE_PIN13_BIT, CORE_PIN13_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P14, CORE_PIN14_PORTREG, CORE_PIN14_BIT, CORE_PIN14_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P15, CORE_PIN15_PORTREG, CORE_PIN15_BIT, CORE_PIN15_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P16, CORE_PIN16_PORTREG, CORE_PIN16_BIT, CORE_PIN16_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P17, CORE_PIN17_PORTREG, CORE_PIN17_BIT, CORE_PIN17_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P18, CORE_PIN18_PORTREG, CORE_PIN18_BIT, CORE_PIN18_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P19, CORE_PIN19_PORTREG, CORE_PIN19_BIT, CORE_PIN19_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P20, CORE_PIN20_PORTREG, CORE_PIN20_BIT, CORE_PIN20_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P21, CORE_PIN21_PORTREG, CORE_PIN21_BIT, CORE_PIN21_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P22, CORE_PIN22_PORTREG, CORE_PIN22_BIT, CORE_PIN22_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P23, CORE_PIN23_PORTREG, CORE_PIN23_BIT, CORE_PIN23_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P24, CORE_PIN24_PORTREG, CORE_PIN24_BIT, CORE_PIN24_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P25, CORE_PIN25_PORTREG, CORE_PIN25_BIT, CORE_PIN25_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P26, CORE_PIN26_PORTREG, CORE_PIN26_BIT, CORE_PIN26_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P27, CORE_PIN27_PORTREG, CORE_PIN27_BIT, CORE_PIN27_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P28, CORE_PIN28_PORTREG, CORE_PIN28_BIT, CORE_PIN28_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P29, CORE_PIN29_PORTREG, CORE_PIN29_BIT, CORE_PIN29_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P30, CORE_PIN30_PORTREG, CORE_PIN30_BIT, CORE_PIN30_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P31, CORE_PIN31_PORTREG, CORE_PIN31_BIT, CORE_PIN31_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P32, CORE_PIN32_PORTREG, CORE_PIN32_BIT, CORE_PIN32_CONFIG);
+MAKE_PIN(P33, CORE_PIN33_PORTREG, CORE_PIN33_BIT, CORE_PIN33_CONFIG);
+
+#undef MAKE_PIN
+
+#elif defined(ARDUINO_SAM_DUE) && defined(__SAM3X8E__)
+
+// SetDirRead:
+//   Disable interrupts
+//   Disable the pull up resistor
+//   Set to INPUT
+//   Enable PIO
+
+// SetDirWrite:
+//   Disable interrupts
+//   Disable the pull up resistor
+//   Set to OUTPUT
+//   Enable PIO
+
+#define MAKE_PIN(className, pio, pinMask) \
+class className { \
+public: \
+  static void Set() { \
+    pio->PIO_SODR = pinMask; \
+  } \
+  static void Clear() { \
+    pio->PIO_CODR = pinMask; \
+  } \
+  static void SetDirRead() { \
+    pio->PIO_IDR = pinMask ; \
+    pio->PIO_PUDR = pinMask; \
+    pio->PIO_ODR = pinMask; \
+    pio->PIO_PER = pinMask; \
+  } \
+  static void SetDirWrite() { \
+    pio->PIO_IDR = pinMask ; \
+    pio->PIO_PUDR = pinMask; \
+    pio->PIO_OER = pinMask; \
+    pio->PIO_PER = pinMask; \
+  } \
+  static uint8_t IsSet() { \
+    return pio->PIO_PDSR & pinMask; \
+  } \
+};
+
+// See: http://arduino.cc/en/Hacking/PinMappingSAM3X and variant.cpp
+
+MAKE_PIN(P0, PIOA, PIO_PA8);
+MAKE_PIN(P1, PIOA, PIO_PA9);
+MAKE_PIN(P2, PIOB, PIO_PB25);
+MAKE_PIN(P3, PIOC, PIO_PC28);
+MAKE_PIN(P4, PIOC, PIO_PC26);
+MAKE_PIN(P5, PIOC, PIO_PC25);
+MAKE_PIN(P6, PIOC, PIO_PC24);
+MAKE_PIN(P7, PIOC, PIO_PC23);
+MAKE_PIN(P8, PIOC, PIO_PC22);
+MAKE_PIN(P9, PIOC, PIO_PC21);
+MAKE_PIN(P10, PIOC, PIO_PC29);
+MAKE_PIN(P11, PIOD, PIO_PD7);
+MAKE_PIN(P12, PIOD, PIO_PD8);
+MAKE_PIN(P13, PIOB, PIO_PB27);
+MAKE_PIN(P14, PIOD, PIO_PD4);
+MAKE_PIN(P15, PIOD, PIO_PD5);
+MAKE_PIN(P16, PIOA, PIO_PA13);
+MAKE_PIN(P17, PIOA, PIO_PA12);
+MAKE_PIN(P18, PIOA, PIO_PA11);
+MAKE_PIN(P19, PIOA, PIO_PA10);
+MAKE_PIN(P20, PIOB, PIO_PB12);
+MAKE_PIN(P21, PIOB, PIO_PB13);
+MAKE_PIN(P22, PIOB, PIO_PB26);
+MAKE_PIN(P23, PIOA, PIO_PA14);
+MAKE_PIN(P24, PIOA, PIO_PA15);
+MAKE_PIN(P25, PIOD, PIO_PD0);
+MAKE_PIN(P26, PIOD, PIO_PD1);
+MAKE_PIN(P27, PIOD, PIO_PD2);
+MAKE_PIN(P28, PIOD, PIO_PD3);
+MAKE_PIN(P29, PIOD, PIO_PD6);
+MAKE_PIN(P30, PIOD, PIO_PD9);
+MAKE_PIN(P31, PIOA, PIO_PA7);
+MAKE_PIN(P32, PIOD, PIO_PD10);
+MAKE_PIN(P33, PIOC, PIO_PC1);
+MAKE_PIN(P34, PIOC, PIO_PC2);
+MAKE_PIN(P35, PIOC, PIO_PC3);
+MAKE_PIN(P36, PIOC, PIO_PC4);
+MAKE_PIN(P37, PIOC, PIO_PC5);
+MAKE_PIN(P38, PIOC, PIO_PC6);
+MAKE_PIN(P39, PIOC, PIO_PC7);
+MAKE_PIN(P40, PIOC, PIO_PC8);
+MAKE_PIN(P41, PIOC, PIO_PC9);
+MAKE_PIN(P42, PIOA, PIO_PA19);
+MAKE_PIN(P43, PIOA, PIO_PA20);
+MAKE_PIN(P44, PIOC, PIO_PC19);
+MAKE_PIN(P45, PIOC, PIO_PC18);
+MAKE_PIN(P46, PIOC, PIO_PC17);
+MAKE_PIN(P47, PIOC, PIO_PC16);
+MAKE_PIN(P48, PIOC, PIO_PC15);
+MAKE_PIN(P49, PIOC, PIO_PC14);
+MAKE_PIN(P50, PIOC, PIO_PC13);
+MAKE_PIN(P51, PIOC, PIO_PC12);
+MAKE_PIN(P52, PIOB, PIO_PB21);
+MAKE_PIN(P53, PIOB, PIO_PB14);
+MAKE_PIN(P54, PIOA, PIO_PA16);
+MAKE_PIN(P55, PIOA, PIO_PA24);
+MAKE_PIN(P56, PIOA, PIO_PA23);
+MAKE_PIN(P57, PIOA, PIO_PA22);
+MAKE_PIN(P58, PIOA, PIO_PA6);
+MAKE_PIN(P59, PIOA, PIO_PA4);
+MAKE_PIN(P60, PIOA, PIO_PA3);
+MAKE_PIN(P61, PIOA, PIO_PA2);
+MAKE_PIN(P62, PIOB, PIO_PB17);
+MAKE_PIN(P63, PIOB, PIO_PB18);
+MAKE_PIN(P64, PIOB, PIO_PB19);
+MAKE_PIN(P65, PIOB, PIO_PB20);
+MAKE_PIN(P66, PIOB, PIO_PB15);
+MAKE_PIN(P67, PIOB, PIO_PB16);
+MAKE_PIN(P68, PIOA, PIO_PA1);
+MAKE_PIN(P69, PIOA, PIO_PA0);
+MAKE_PIN(P70, PIOA, PIO_PA17);
+MAKE_PIN(P71, PIOA, PIO_PA18);
+MAKE_PIN(P72, PIOC, PIO_PC30);
+MAKE_PIN(P73, PIOA, PIO_PA21);
+MAKE_PIN(P74, PIOA, PIO_PA25); // MISO
+MAKE_PIN(P75, PIOA, PIO_PA26); // MOSI
+MAKE_PIN(P76, PIOA, PIO_PA27); // CLK
+MAKE_PIN(P77, PIOA, PIO_PA28);
+MAKE_PIN(P78, PIOB, PIO_PB23); // Unconnected
+
+#undef MAKE_PIN
+
+#elif defined(RBL_NRF51822)
+
+#define MAKE_PIN(className, pin) \
+class className { \
+public: \
+    static void Set() { \
+        nrf_gpio_pin_set(pin); \
+    } \
+    static void Clear() { \
+        nrf_gpio_pin_clear(pin); \
+    } \
+    static void SetDirRead() { \
+        nrf_gpio_cfg_input(pin, NRF_GPIO_PIN_NOPULL); \
+    } \
+    static void SetDirWrite() { \
+        nrf_gpio_cfg_output(pin); \
+    } \
+    static uint8_t IsSet() { \
+        return (uint8_t)nrf_gpio_pin_read(pin); \
+    } \
+};
+
+// See: pin_transform.c in RBL nRF51822 SDK
+MAKE_PIN(P0, Pin_nRF51822_to_Arduino(D0));
+MAKE_PIN(P1, Pin_nRF51822_to_Arduino(D1));
+MAKE_PIN(P2, Pin_nRF51822_to_Arduino(D2));
+MAKE_PIN(P3, Pin_nRF51822_to_Arduino(D3));
+MAKE_PIN(P4, Pin_nRF51822_to_Arduino(D4));
+MAKE_PIN(P5, Pin_nRF51822_to_Arduino(D5));
+MAKE_PIN(P6, Pin_nRF51822_to_Arduino(D6));
+MAKE_PIN(P7, Pin_nRF51822_to_Arduino(D7));
+MAKE_PIN(P8, Pin_nRF51822_to_Arduino(D8));
+MAKE_PIN(P9, Pin_nRF51822_to_Arduino(D9)); // INT
+MAKE_PIN(P10, Pin_nRF51822_to_Arduino(D10)); // SS
+MAKE_PIN(P11, Pin_nRF51822_to_Arduino(D11));
+MAKE_PIN(P12, Pin_nRF51822_to_Arduino(D12));
+MAKE_PIN(P13, Pin_nRF51822_to_Arduino(D13));
+MAKE_PIN(P14, Pin_nRF51822_to_Arduino(D14));
+MAKE_PIN(P15, Pin_nRF51822_to_Arduino(D15));
+MAKE_PIN(P17, Pin_nRF51822_to_Arduino(D17)); // MISO
+MAKE_PIN(P18, Pin_nRF51822_to_Arduino(D18)); // MOSI
+MAKE_PIN(P16, Pin_nRF51822_to_Arduino(D16)); // CLK
+MAKE_PIN(P19, Pin_nRF51822_to_Arduino(D19));
+MAKE_PIN(P20, Pin_nRF51822_to_Arduino(D20));
+MAKE_PIN(P21, Pin_nRF51822_to_Arduino(D21));
+MAKE_PIN(P22, Pin_nRF51822_to_Arduino(D22));
+MAKE_PIN(P23, Pin_nRF51822_to_Arduino(D23));
+MAKE_PIN(P24, Pin_nRF51822_to_Arduino(D24));
+
+#undef MAKE_PIN
+
+#else
+#error "Please define board in avrpins.h"
+
+#endif
+
+#elif defined(__ARDUINO_X86__) // Intel Galileo, Intel Galileo 2 and Intel Edison
+
+#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+// Pointers are 32 bits on x86
+#define pgm_read_pointer(p) pgm_read_dword(p)
+
+#if PLATFORM_ID == 0xE1 // Edison platform id
+#define pinToFastPin(pin) 1 // As far as I can tell all pins can be used as fast pins
+#endif
+
+// Pin 2 and 3 on the Intel Galileo supports a higher rate,
+// so it is recommended to use one of these as the SS pin.
+
+#define MAKE_PIN(className, pin) \
+class className { \
+public: \
+  static void Set() { \
+    fastDigitalWrite(pin, HIGH); \
+  } \
+  static void Clear() { \
+    fastDigitalWrite(pin, LOW); \
+  } \
+  static void SetDirRead() { \
+    if (pinToFastPin(pin)) \
+      pinMode(pin, INPUT_FAST); \
+    else \
+      pinMode(pin, INPUT); \
+  } \
+  static void SetDirWrite() { \
+    if (pinToFastPin(pin)) \
+      pinMode(pin, OUTPUT_FAST); \
+    else \
+      pinMode(pin, OUTPUT); \
+  } \
+  static uint8_t IsSet() { \
+    return fastDigitalRead(pin); \
+  } \
+};
+
+MAKE_PIN(P0, 0);
+MAKE_PIN(P1, 1);
+MAKE_PIN(P2, 2);
+MAKE_PIN(P3, 3);
+MAKE_PIN(P4, 4);
+MAKE_PIN(P5, 5);
+MAKE_PIN(P6, 6);
+MAKE_PIN(P7, 7);
+MAKE_PIN(P8, 8);
+MAKE_PIN(P9, 9);
+MAKE_PIN(P10, 10);
+MAKE_PIN(P11, 11);
+MAKE_PIN(P12, 12);
+MAKE_PIN(P13, 13);
+MAKE_PIN(P14, 14); // A0
+MAKE_PIN(P15, 15); // A1
+MAKE_PIN(P16, 16); // A2
+MAKE_PIN(P17, 17); // A3
+MAKE_PIN(P18, 18); // A4
+MAKE_PIN(P19, 19); // A5
+
+#undef MAKE_PIN
+
+#elif defined(__MIPSEL__)
+// MIPSEL (MIPS architecture using a little endian byte order)
+
+// MIPS size_t = 4
+#define pgm_read_pointer(p) pgm_read_dword(p)
+
+#define MAKE_PIN(className, pin) \
+class className { \
+public: \
+  static void Set() { \
+    digitalWrite(pin, HIGH);\
+  } \
+  static void Clear() { \
+    digitalWrite(pin, LOW); \
+  } \
+  static void SetDirRead() { \
+    pinMode(pin, INPUT); \
+  } \
+  static void SetDirWrite() { \
+    pinMode(pin, OUTPUT); \
+  } \
+  static uint8_t IsSet() { \
+    return digitalRead(pin); \
+  } \
+};
+
+// 0 .. 13 - Digital pins
+MAKE_PIN(P0, 0); // RX
+MAKE_PIN(P1, 1); // TX
+MAKE_PIN(P2, 2); //
+MAKE_PIN(P3, 3); //
+MAKE_PIN(P4, 4); //
+MAKE_PIN(P5, 5); //
+MAKE_PIN(P6, 6); //
+MAKE_PIN(P7, 7); //
+MAKE_PIN(P8, 8); //
+MAKE_PIN(P9, 9); //
+MAKE_PIN(P10, 10); //
+MAKE_PIN(P11, 11); //
+MAKE_PIN(P12, 12); //
+MAKE_PIN(P13, 13); //
+
+#undef MAKE_PIN
+
+#else
+#error "Please define board in avrpins.h"
+
+#endif
+
+#endif //_avrpins_h_
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/cdc_XR21B1411.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/cdc_XR21B1411.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..74df8c3bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/cdc_XR21B1411.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,211 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+#include "cdc_XR21B1411.h"
+
+XR21B1411::XR21B1411(USB *p, CDCAsyncOper *pasync) :
+ACM(p, pasync) {
+        // Is this needed??
+        _enhanced_status = enhanced_features(); // Set up features
+}
+
+uint8_t XR21B1411::Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed) {
+        const uint8_t constBufSize = sizeof (USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR);
+
+        uint8_t buf[constBufSize];
+        USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR * udd = reinterpret_cast<USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR*>(buf);
+
+        uint8_t rcode;
+        UsbDevice *p = NULL;
+        EpInfo *oldep_ptr = NULL;
+        uint8_t num_of_conf; // number of configurations
+
+        AddressPool &addrPool = pUsb->GetAddressPool();
+
+        USBTRACE("XR Init\r\n");
+
+        if(bAddress)
+                return USB_ERROR_CLASS_INSTANCE_ALREADY_IN_USE;
+
+        // Get pointer to pseudo device with address 0 assigned
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(0);
+
+        if(!p)
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+
+        if(!p->epinfo) {
+                USBTRACE("epinfo\r\n");
+                return USB_ERROR_EPINFO_IS_NULL;
+        }
+
+        // Save old pointer to EP_RECORD of address 0
+        oldep_ptr = p->epinfo;
+
+        // Temporary assign new pointer to epInfo to p->epinfo in order to avoid toggle inconsistence
+        p->epinfo = epInfo;
+
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+
+        // Get device descriptor
+        rcode = pUsb->getDevDescr(0, 0, constBufSize, (uint8_t*)buf);
+
+        // Restore p->epinfo
+        p->epinfo = oldep_ptr;
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailGetDevDescr;
+
+        // Allocate new address according to device class
+        bAddress = addrPool.AllocAddress(parent, false, port);
+
+        if(!bAddress)
+                return USB_ERROR_OUT_OF_ADDRESS_SPACE_IN_POOL;
+
+        // Extract Max Packet Size from the device descriptor
+        epInfo[0].maxPktSize = udd->bMaxPacketSize0;
+
+        // Assign new address to the device
+        rcode = pUsb->setAddr(0, 0, bAddress);
+
+        if(rcode) {
+                p->lowspeed = false;
+                addrPool.FreeAddress(bAddress);
+                bAddress = 0;
+                USBTRACE2("setAddr:", rcode);
+                return rcode;
+        }
+
+        USBTRACE2("Addr:", bAddress);
+
+        p->lowspeed = false;
+
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(bAddress);
+
+        if(!p)
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+
+        num_of_conf = udd->bNumConfigurations;
+
+        if((((udd->idVendor != 0x2890U) || (udd->idProduct != 0x0201U)) && ((udd->idVendor != 0x04e2U) || (udd->idProduct != 0x1411U))))
+                return USB_DEV_CONFIG_ERROR_DEVICE_NOT_SUPPORTED;
+
+        // Assign epInfo to epinfo pointer
+        rcode = pUsb->setEpInfoEntry(bAddress, 1, epInfo);
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetDevTblEntry;
+
+        USBTRACE2("NC:", num_of_conf);
+
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < num_of_conf; i++) {
+                ConfigDescParser< USB_CLASS_COM_AND_CDC_CTRL,
+                        CDC_SUBCLASS_ACM,
+                        CDC_PROTOCOL_ITU_T_V_250,
+                        CP_MASK_COMPARE_CLASS |
+                        CP_MASK_COMPARE_SUBCLASS |
+                        CP_MASK_COMPARE_PROTOCOL > CdcControlParser(this);
+
+                ConfigDescParser<USB_CLASS_CDC_DATA, 0, 0,
+                        CP_MASK_COMPARE_CLASS> CdcDataParser(this);
+
+                rcode = pUsb->getConfDescr(bAddress, 0, i, &CdcControlParser);
+
+                if(rcode)
+                        goto FailGetConfDescr;
+
+                rcode = pUsb->getConfDescr(bAddress, 0, i, &CdcDataParser);
+
+                if(rcode)
+                        goto FailGetConfDescr;
+
+                if(bNumEP > 1)
+                        break;
+        } // for
+
+        if(bNumEP < 4)
+                return USB_DEV_CONFIG_ERROR_DEVICE_NOT_SUPPORTED;
+
+        // Assign epInfo to epinfo pointer
+        rcode = pUsb->setEpInfoEntry(bAddress, bNumEP, epInfo);
+
+        USBTRACE2("Conf:", bConfNum);
+
+        // Set Configuration Value
+        rcode = pUsb->setConf(bAddress, 0, bConfNum);
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetConfDescr;
+
+        // Set up features status
+        _enhanced_status = enhanced_features();
+        half_duplex(false);
+        autoflowRTS(false);
+        autoflowDSR(false);
+        autoflowXON(false);
+        wide(false); // Always false, because this is only available in custom mode.
+
+        rcode = pAsync->OnInit(this);
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailOnInit;
+
+        USBTRACE("XR configured\r\n");
+
+        ready = true;
+
+        //bPollEnable = true;
+
+        //USBTRACE("Poll enabled\r\n");
+        return 0;
+
+FailGetDevDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailGetDevDescr();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailSetDevTblEntry:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailSetDevTblEntry();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailGetConfDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailGetConfDescr();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailSetConfDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailSetConfDescr();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailOnInit:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        USBTRACE("OnInit:");
+#endif
+
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+Fail:
+        NotifyFail(rcode);
+#endif
+        Release();
+        return rcode;
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/cdc_XR21B1411.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/cdc_XR21B1411.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c32627544
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/cdc_XR21B1411.h
@@ -0,0 +1,272 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2015 Andrew J. Kroll
+   and
+   Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+#if !defined(__CDC_XR21B1411_H__)
+#define __CDC_XR21B1411_H__
+
+#include "cdcacm.h"
+
+#define XR_REG_CUSTOM_DRIVER                    (0x020DU) // DRIVER SELECT
+#define XR_REG_CUSTOM_DRIVER_ACTIVE             (0x0001U) // 0: CDC 1: CUSTOM
+
+#define XR_REG_ACM_FLOW_CTL                     (0x0216U) // FLOW CONTROL REGISTER CDCACM MODE
+#define XR_REG_FLOW_CTL                         (0x0C06U) // FLOW CONTROL REGISTER CUSTOM MODE
+#define XR_REG_FLOW_CTL_HALF_DPLX               (0x0008U) // 0:FULL DUPLEX 1:HALF DUPLEX
+#define XR_REG_FLOW_CTL_MODE_MASK               (0x0007U) // MODE BITMASK
+#define XR_REG_FLOW_CTL_NONE                    (0x0000U) // NO FLOW CONTROL
+#define XR_REG_FLOW_CTL_HW                      (0x0001U) // HARDWARE FLOW CONTROL
+#define XR_REG_FLOW_CTL_SW                      (0x0002U) // SOFTWARE FLOW CONTROL
+#define XR_REG_FLOW_CTL_MMMRX                   (0x0003U) // MULTIDROP RX UPON ADDRESS MATCH
+#define XR_REG_FLOW_CTL_MMMRXTX                 (0x0004U) // MULTIDROP RX/TX UPON ADDRESS MATCH
+
+#define XR_REG_ACM_GPIO_MODE                    (0x0217U) // GPIO MODE REGISTER IN CDCACM MODE
+#define XR_REG_GPIO_MODE                        (0x0C0CU) // GPIO MODE REGISTER IN CUSTOM MODE
+#define XR_REG_GPIO_MODE_GPIO                   (0x0000U) // ALL GPIO PINS ACM PROGRAMMABLE
+#define XR_REG_GPIO_MODE_FC_RTSCTS              (0x0001U) // AUTO RTSCTS HW FC (GPIO 4/5)
+#define XR_REG_GPIO_MODE_FC_DTRDSR              (0x0002U) // AUTO DTRDSR HW FC (GPIO 2/3)
+#define XR_REG_GPIO_MODE_ATE                    (0x0003U) // AUTO TRANSCEIVER ENABLE DURING TX (GPIO 5)
+#define XR_REG_GPIO_MODE_ATE_ADDRESS            (0x0004U) // AUTO TRANSCEIVER ENABLE ON ADDRESS MATCH (GPIO 5)
+
+#define XR_REG_ACM_GPIO_DIR                     (0x0218U) // GPIO DIRECTION REGISTER CDCACM MODE, 0:IN 1:OUT
+#define XR_REG_GPIO_DIR                         (0x0C0DU) // GPIO DIRECTION REGISTER CUSTOM MODE, 0:IN 1:OUT
+
+#define XR_REG_ACM_GPIO_INT                     (0x0219U) // GPIO PIN CHANGE INTERRUPT ENABLE CDCACM MODE, 0: ENABLED 1: DISABLED
+#define XR_REG_GPIO_INT                         (0x0C11U) // GPIO PIN CHANGE INTERRUPT ENABLE CUSTOM MODE, 0: ENABLED 1: DISABLED
+#define XR_REG_GPIO_MASK                        (0x001FU) // GPIO REGISTERS BITMASK
+
+#define XR_REG_UART_ENABLE                      (0x0C00U) // UART I/O ENABLE REGISTER
+#define XR_REG_UART_ENABLE_RX                   (0x0002U) // 0:DISABLED 1:ENABLED
+#define XR_REG_UART_ENABLE_TX                   (0x0001U) // 0:DISABLED 1:ENABLED
+
+#define XR_REG_ERROR_STATUS                     (0x0C09U) // ERROR STATUS REGISTER
+#define XR_REG_ERROR_STATUS_MASK                (0x00F8U) // ERROR STATUS BITMASK
+#define XR_REG_ERROR_STATUS_ERROR               (0x0078U) // ERROR STATUS ERROR BITMASK
+#define XR_REG_ERROR_STATUS_BREAK               (0x0008U) // BREAK ERROR HAS BEEN DETECTED
+#define XR_REG_ERROR_STATUS_FRAME               (0x0010U) // FRAMING ERROR HAS BEEN DETECTED
+#define XR_REG_ERROR_STATUS_PARITY              (0x0020U) // PARITY ERROR HAS BEEN DETECTED
+#define XR_REG_ERROR_STATUS_OVERRUN             (0x0040U) // RX OVERRUN ERROR HAS BEEN DETECTED
+#define XR_REG_ERROR_STATUS_BREAK_STATUS        (0x0080U) // BREAK CONDITION IS CURRENTLY BEING DETECTED
+
+#define XR_REG_TX_BREAK                         (0x0C0AU) // TRANSMIT BREAK. 0X0001-0XFFE TIME IN MS, 0X0000 STOP, 0X0FFF BREAK ON
+
+#define XR_REG_XCVR_EN_DELAY                    (0x0C0BU) // TURN-ARROUND DELAY IN BIT-TIMES 0X0000-0X000F
+
+#define XR_REG_GPIO_SET                         (0x0C0EU) // 1:SET GPIO PIN
+
+#define XR_REG_GPIO_CLR                         (0x0C0FU) // 1:CLEAR GPIO PIN
+
+#define XR_REG_GPIO_STATUS                      (0x0C10U) // READ GPIO PINS
+
+#define XR_REG_CUSTOMISED_INT                   (0x0C12U) // 0:STANDARD 1:CUSTOM SEE DATA SHEET
+
+#define XR_REG_PIN_PULLUP_ENABLE                (0x0C14U) // 0:DISABLE 1:ENABLE, BITS 0-5:GPIO, 6:RX 7:TX
+
+#define XR_REG_PIN_PULLDOWN_ENABLE              (0x0C15U) // 0:DISABLE 1:ENABLE, BITS 0-5:GPIO, 6:RX 7:TX
+
+#define XR_REG_LOOPBACK                         (0x0C16U) // 0:DISABLE 1:ENABLE, SEE DATA SHEET
+
+#define XR_REG_RX_FIFO_LATENCY                  (0x0CC2U) // FIFO LATENCY REGISTER
+#define XR_REG_RX_FIFO_LATENCY_ENABLE           (0x0001U) //
+
+#define XR_REG_WIDE_MODE                        (0x0D02U)
+#define XR_REG_WIDE_MODE_ENABLE                 (0x0001U)
+
+#define XR_REG_XON_CHAR                         (0x0C07U)
+#define XR_REG_XOFF_CHAR                        (0x0C08U)
+
+#define XR_REG_TX_FIFO_RESET                    (0x0C80U) // 1: RESET, SELF-CLEARING
+#define XR_REG_TX_FIFO_COUNT                    (0x0C81U) // READ-ONLY
+#define XR_REG_RX_FIFO_RESET                    (0x0CC0U) // 1: RESET, SELF-CLEARING
+#define XR_REG_RX_FIFO_COUNT                    (0x0CC1U) // READ-ONLY
+
+#define XR_WRITE_REQUEST_TYPE                   (0x40U)
+
+#define XR_READ_REQUEST_TYPE                    (0xC0U)
+
+#define XR_MAX_ENDPOINTS                        4
+
+class XR21B1411 : public ACM {
+protected:
+
+public:
+        XR21B1411(USB *pusb, CDCAsyncOper *pasync);
+
+        /**
+         * Used by the USB core to check what this driver support.
+         * @param  vid The device's VID.
+         * @param  pid The device's PID.
+         * @return     Returns true if the device's VID and PID matches this driver.
+         */
+        virtual bool VIDPIDOK(uint16_t vid, uint16_t pid) {
+                return (((vid == 0x2890U) && (pid == 0x0201U)) || ((vid == 0x04e2U) && (pid == 0x1411U)));
+        };
+
+        uint8_t Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed);
+
+        virtual tty_features enhanced_features(void) {
+                tty_features rv;
+                rv.enhanced = true;
+                rv.autoflow_RTS = true;
+                rv.autoflow_DSR = true;
+                rv.autoflow_XON = true;
+                rv.half_duplex = true;
+                rv.wide = true;
+                return rv;
+        };
+
+        uint8_t read_register(uint16_t reg, uint16_t *val) {
+                return (pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, XR_READ_REQUEST_TYPE, 1, 0, 0, reg, 2, 2, (uint8_t *)val, NULL));
+        }
+
+        uint8_t write_register(uint16_t reg, uint16_t val) {
+                return (pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, XR_WRITE_REQUEST_TYPE, 0, BGRAB0(val), BGRAB1(val), reg, 0, 0, NULL, NULL));
+        }
+
+
+        ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+        // The following methods set the CDC-ACM defaults.
+        ////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+        virtual void autoflowRTS(bool s) {
+                uint16_t val;
+                uint8_t rval;
+                rval = read_register(XR_REG_ACM_FLOW_CTL, &val);
+                if(!rval) {
+                        if(s) {
+                                val &= XR_REG_FLOW_CTL_HALF_DPLX;
+                                val |= XR_REG_FLOW_CTL_HW;
+                        } else {
+                                val &= XR_REG_FLOW_CTL_HALF_DPLX;
+                        }
+                        rval = write_register(XR_REG_ACM_FLOW_CTL, val);
+                        if(!rval) {
+                                rval = write_register(XR_REG_ACM_GPIO_MODE, XR_REG_GPIO_MODE_GPIO);
+                                if(!rval) {
+                                        // ACM commands apply the new settings.
+                                        LINE_CODING LCT;
+                                        rval = GetLineCoding(&LCT);
+                                        if(!rval) {
+                                                rval = SetLineCoding(&LCT);
+                                                if(!rval) {
+                                                        _enhanced_status.autoflow_XON = false;
+                                                        _enhanced_status.autoflow_DSR = false;
+                                                        _enhanced_status.autoflow_RTS = s;
+                                                }
+                                        }
+                                }
+                        }
+                }
+        };
+
+        virtual void autoflowDSR(bool s) {
+                uint16_t val;
+                uint8_t rval;
+                rval = read_register(XR_REG_ACM_FLOW_CTL, &val);
+                if(!rval) {
+                        if(s) {
+                                val &= XR_REG_FLOW_CTL_HALF_DPLX;
+                                val |= XR_REG_FLOW_CTL_HW;
+                        } else {
+                                val &= XR_REG_FLOW_CTL_HALF_DPLX;
+                        }
+                        rval = write_register(XR_REG_ACM_FLOW_CTL, val);
+                        if(!rval) {
+                                if(s) {
+                                        rval = write_register(XR_REG_ACM_GPIO_MODE, XR_REG_GPIO_MODE_FC_DTRDSR);
+                                } else {
+                                        rval = write_register(XR_REG_ACM_GPIO_MODE, XR_REG_GPIO_MODE_GPIO);
+                                }
+                                if(!rval) {
+                                        // ACM commands apply the new settings.
+                                        LINE_CODING LCT;
+                                        rval = GetLineCoding(&LCT);
+                                        if(!rval) {
+                                                rval = SetLineCoding(&LCT);
+                                                if(!rval) {
+                                                        _enhanced_status.autoflow_XON = false;
+                                                        _enhanced_status.autoflow_RTS = false;
+                                                        _enhanced_status.autoflow_DSR = s;
+                                                }
+                                        }
+                                }
+                        }
+                }
+        };
+
+        virtual void autoflowXON(bool s) {
+                // NOTE: hardware defaults to the normal XON/XOFF
+                uint16_t val;
+                uint8_t rval;
+                rval = read_register(XR_REG_ACM_FLOW_CTL, &val);
+                if(!rval) {
+                        if(s) {
+                                val &= XR_REG_FLOW_CTL_HALF_DPLX;
+                                val |= XR_REG_FLOW_CTL_SW;
+                        } else {
+                                val &= XR_REG_FLOW_CTL_HALF_DPLX;
+                        }
+                        rval = write_register(XR_REG_ACM_FLOW_CTL, val);
+                        if(!rval) {
+                                rval = write_register(XR_REG_ACM_GPIO_MODE, XR_REG_GPIO_MODE_GPIO);
+                                if(!rval) {
+                                        // ACM commands apply the new settings.
+                                        LINE_CODING LCT;
+                                        rval = GetLineCoding(&LCT);
+                                        if(!rval) {
+                                                rval = SetLineCoding(&LCT);
+                                                if(!rval) {
+                                                        _enhanced_status.autoflow_RTS = false;
+                                                        _enhanced_status.autoflow_DSR = false;
+                                                        _enhanced_status.autoflow_XON = s;
+                                                }
+                                        }
+                                }
+                        }
+                }
+        };
+
+        virtual void half_duplex(bool s) {
+                uint16_t val;
+                uint8_t rval;
+                rval = read_register(XR_REG_ACM_FLOW_CTL, &val);
+                if(!rval) {
+                        if(s) {
+                                val |= XR_REG_FLOW_CTL_HALF_DPLX;
+                        } else {
+                                val &= XR_REG_FLOW_CTL_MODE_MASK;
+                        }
+                        rval = write_register(XR_REG_ACM_FLOW_CTL, val);
+                        if(!rval) {
+                                // ACM commands apply the new settings.
+                                LINE_CODING LCT;
+                                rval = GetLineCoding(&LCT);
+                                if(!rval) {
+                                        rval = SetLineCoding(&LCT);
+                                        if(!rval) {
+                                                _enhanced_status.half_duplex = s;
+                                        }
+                                }
+                        }
+                }
+        };
+
+
+
+};
+
+#endif // __CDCPROLIFIC_H__
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/cdcacm.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/cdcacm.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2cd2c9a82
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/cdcacm.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,331 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+#include "cdcacm.h"
+
+const uint8_t ACM::epDataInIndex = 1;
+const uint8_t ACM::epDataOutIndex = 2;
+const uint8_t ACM::epInterruptInIndex = 3;
+
+ACM::ACM(USB *p, CDCAsyncOper *pasync) :
+pUsb(p),
+pAsync(pasync),
+bAddress(0),
+bControlIface(0),
+bDataIface(0),
+bNumEP(1),
+qNextPollTime(0),
+bPollEnable(false),
+ready(false) {
+        _enhanced_status = enhanced_features(); // Set up features
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < ACM_MAX_ENDPOINTS; i++) {
+                epInfo[i].epAddr = 0;
+                epInfo[i].maxPktSize = (i) ? 0 : 8;
+                epInfo[i].epAttribs = 0;
+                epInfo[i].bmNakPower = (i == epDataInIndex) ? USB_NAK_NOWAIT : USB_NAK_MAX_POWER;
+
+        }
+        if(pUsb)
+                pUsb->RegisterDeviceClass(this);
+}
+
+uint8_t ACM::Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed) {
+
+        const uint8_t constBufSize = sizeof (USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR);
+
+        uint8_t buf[constBufSize];
+        USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR * udd = reinterpret_cast<USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR*>(buf);
+
+        uint8_t rcode;
+        UsbDevice *p = NULL;
+        EpInfo *oldep_ptr = NULL;
+        uint8_t num_of_conf; // number of configurations
+
+        AddressPool &addrPool = pUsb->GetAddressPool();
+
+        USBTRACE("ACM Init\r\n");
+
+        if(bAddress)
+                return USB_ERROR_CLASS_INSTANCE_ALREADY_IN_USE;
+
+        // Get pointer to pseudo device with address 0 assigned
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(0);
+
+        if(!p)
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+
+        if(!p->epinfo) {
+                USBTRACE("epinfo\r\n");
+                return USB_ERROR_EPINFO_IS_NULL;
+        }
+
+        // Save old pointer to EP_RECORD of address 0
+        oldep_ptr = p->epinfo;
+
+        // Temporary assign new pointer to epInfo to p->epinfo in order to avoid toggle inconsistence
+        p->epinfo = epInfo;
+
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+
+        // Get device descriptor
+        rcode = pUsb->getDevDescr(0, 0, constBufSize, (uint8_t*)buf);
+
+        // Restore p->epinfo
+        p->epinfo = oldep_ptr;
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailGetDevDescr;
+
+        // Allocate new address according to device class
+        bAddress = addrPool.AllocAddress(parent, false, port);
+
+        if(!bAddress)
+                return USB_ERROR_OUT_OF_ADDRESS_SPACE_IN_POOL;
+
+        // Extract Max Packet Size from the device descriptor
+        epInfo[0].maxPktSize = udd->bMaxPacketSize0;
+
+        // Assign new address to the device
+        rcode = pUsb->setAddr(0, 0, bAddress);
+
+        if(rcode) {
+                p->lowspeed = false;
+                addrPool.FreeAddress(bAddress);
+                bAddress = 0;
+                USBTRACE2("setAddr:", rcode);
+                return rcode;
+        }
+
+        USBTRACE2("Addr:", bAddress);
+
+        p->lowspeed = false;
+
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(bAddress);
+
+        if(!p)
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+
+        num_of_conf = udd->bNumConfigurations;
+
+        // Assign epInfo to epinfo pointer
+        rcode = pUsb->setEpInfoEntry(bAddress, 1, epInfo);
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetDevTblEntry;
+
+        USBTRACE2("NC:", num_of_conf);
+
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < num_of_conf; i++) {
+                ConfigDescParser< USB_CLASS_COM_AND_CDC_CTRL,
+                        CDC_SUBCLASS_ACM,
+                        CDC_PROTOCOL_ITU_T_V_250,
+                        CP_MASK_COMPARE_CLASS |
+                        CP_MASK_COMPARE_SUBCLASS |
+                        CP_MASK_COMPARE_PROTOCOL > CdcControlParser(this);
+
+                ConfigDescParser<USB_CLASS_CDC_DATA, 0, 0,
+                        CP_MASK_COMPARE_CLASS> CdcDataParser(this);
+
+                rcode = pUsb->getConfDescr(bAddress, 0, i, &CdcControlParser);
+
+                if(rcode)
+                        goto FailGetConfDescr;
+
+                rcode = pUsb->getConfDescr(bAddress, 0, i, &CdcDataParser);
+
+                if(rcode)
+                        goto FailGetConfDescr;
+
+                if(bNumEP > 1)
+                        break;
+        } // for
+
+        if(bNumEP < 4)
+                return USB_DEV_CONFIG_ERROR_DEVICE_NOT_SUPPORTED;
+
+        // Assign epInfo to epinfo pointer
+        rcode = pUsb->setEpInfoEntry(bAddress, bNumEP, epInfo);
+
+        USBTRACE2("Conf:", bConfNum);
+
+        // Set Configuration Value
+        rcode = pUsb->setConf(bAddress, 0, bConfNum);
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetConfDescr;
+
+        // Set up features status
+        _enhanced_status = enhanced_features();
+        half_duplex(false);
+        autoflowRTS(false);
+        autoflowDSR(false);
+        autoflowXON(false);
+        wide(false); // Always false, because this is only available in custom mode.
+        rcode = pAsync->OnInit(this);
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailOnInit;
+
+        USBTRACE("ACM configured\r\n");
+
+        ready = true;
+
+        //bPollEnable = true;
+
+        //USBTRACE("Poll enabled\r\n");
+        return 0;
+
+FailGetDevDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailGetDevDescr();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailSetDevTblEntry:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailSetDevTblEntry();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailGetConfDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailGetConfDescr();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailSetConfDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailSetConfDescr();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailOnInit:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        USBTRACE("OnInit:");
+#endif
+
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+Fail:
+        NotifyFail(rcode);
+#endif
+        Release();
+        return rcode;
+}
+
+void ACM::EndpointXtract(uint8_t conf, uint8_t iface, uint8_t alt, uint8_t proto, const USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR *pep) {
+        //ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("Conf.Val"), conf);
+        //ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("Iface Num"), iface);
+        //ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("Alt.Set"), alt);
+
+        bConfNum = conf;
+
+        uint8_t index;
+
+        if((pep->bmAttributes & 0x03) == 3 && (pep->bEndpointAddress & 0x80) == 0x80)
+                index = epInterruptInIndex;
+        else
+                if((pep->bmAttributes & 0x02) == 2)
+                index = ((pep->bEndpointAddress & 0x80) == 0x80) ? epDataInIndex : epDataOutIndex;
+        else
+                return;
+
+        // Fill in the endpoint info structure
+        epInfo[index].epAddr = (pep->bEndpointAddress & 0x0F);
+        epInfo[index].maxPktSize = (uint8_t)pep->wMaxPacketSize;
+        epInfo[index].epAttribs = 0;
+
+        bNumEP++;
+
+        PrintEndpointDescriptor(pep);
+}
+
+uint8_t ACM::Release() {
+        ready = false;
+        pUsb->GetAddressPool().FreeAddress(bAddress);
+
+        bControlIface = 0;
+        bDataIface = 0;
+        bNumEP = 1;
+
+        bAddress = 0;
+        qNextPollTime = 0;
+        bPollEnable = false;
+        return 0;
+}
+
+uint8_t ACM::Poll() {
+        uint8_t rcode = 0;
+
+        if(!bPollEnable)
+                return 0;
+
+        return rcode;
+}
+
+uint8_t ACM::RcvData(uint16_t *bytes_rcvd, uint8_t *dataptr) {
+        return pUsb->inTransfer(bAddress, epInfo[epDataInIndex].epAddr, bytes_rcvd, dataptr);
+}
+
+uint8_t ACM::SndData(uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t *dataptr) {
+        return pUsb->outTransfer(bAddress, epInfo[epDataOutIndex].epAddr, nbytes, dataptr);
+}
+
+uint8_t ACM::SetCommFeature(uint16_t fid, uint8_t nbytes, uint8_t *dataptr) {
+        return ( pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, bmREQ_CDCOUT, CDC_SET_COMM_FEATURE, (fid & 0xff), (fid >> 8), bControlIface, nbytes, nbytes, dataptr, NULL));
+}
+
+uint8_t ACM::GetCommFeature(uint16_t fid, uint8_t nbytes, uint8_t *dataptr) {
+        return ( pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, bmREQ_CDCIN, CDC_GET_COMM_FEATURE, (fid & 0xff), (fid >> 8), bControlIface, nbytes, nbytes, dataptr, NULL));
+}
+
+uint8_t ACM::ClearCommFeature(uint16_t fid) {
+        return ( pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, bmREQ_CDCOUT, CDC_CLEAR_COMM_FEATURE, (fid & 0xff), (fid >> 8), bControlIface, 0, 0, NULL, NULL));
+}
+
+uint8_t ACM::SetLineCoding(const LINE_CODING *dataptr) {
+        return ( pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, bmREQ_CDCOUT, CDC_SET_LINE_CODING, 0x00, 0x00, bControlIface, sizeof (LINE_CODING), sizeof (LINE_CODING), (uint8_t*)dataptr, NULL));
+}
+
+uint8_t ACM::GetLineCoding(LINE_CODING *dataptr) {
+        return ( pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, bmREQ_CDCIN, CDC_GET_LINE_CODING, 0x00, 0x00, bControlIface, sizeof (LINE_CODING), sizeof (LINE_CODING), (uint8_t*)dataptr, NULL));
+}
+
+uint8_t ACM::SetControlLineState(uint8_t state) {
+        return ( pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, bmREQ_CDCOUT, CDC_SET_CONTROL_LINE_STATE, state, 0, bControlIface, 0, 0, NULL, NULL));
+}
+
+uint8_t ACM::SendBreak(uint16_t duration) {
+        return ( pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, bmREQ_CDCOUT, CDC_SEND_BREAK, (duration & 0xff), (duration >> 8), bControlIface, 0, 0, NULL, NULL));
+}
+
+void ACM::PrintEndpointDescriptor(const USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR* ep_ptr) {
+        Notify(PSTR("Endpoint descriptor:"), 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nLength:\t\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (ep_ptr->bLength, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nType:\t\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (ep_ptr->bDescriptorType, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nAddress:\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (ep_ptr->bEndpointAddress, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nAttributes:\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (ep_ptr->bmAttributes, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nMaxPktSize:\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint16_t > (ep_ptr->wMaxPacketSize, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nPoll Intrv:\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (ep_ptr->bInterval, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\n"), 0x80);
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/cdcacm.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/cdcacm.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2a38524d8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/cdcacm.h
@@ -0,0 +1,252 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+#if !defined(__CDCACM_H__)
+#define __CDCACM_H__
+
+#include "Usb.h"
+
+#define bmREQ_CDCOUT                    USB_SETUP_HOST_TO_DEVICE|USB_SETUP_TYPE_CLASS|USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_INTERFACE
+#define bmREQ_CDCIN                     USB_SETUP_DEVICE_TO_HOST|USB_SETUP_TYPE_CLASS|USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_INTERFACE
+
+// CDC Subclass Constants
+#define CDC_SUBCLASS_DLCM               0x01    // Direct Line Control Model
+#define CDC_SUBCLASS_ACM                0x02    // Abstract Control Model
+#define CDC_SUBCLASS_TCM                0x03    // Telephone Control Model
+#define CDC_SUBCLASS_MCCM               0x04    // Multi Channel Control Model
+#define CDC_SUBCLASS_CAPI               0x05    // CAPI Control Model
+#define CDC_SUBCLASS_ETHERNET           0x06    // Ethernet Network Control Model
+#define CDC_SUBCLASS_ATM                0x07    // ATM Network Control Model
+#define CDC_SUBCLASS_WIRELESS_HANDSET   0x08    // Wireless Handset Control Model
+#define CDC_SUBCLASS_DEVICE_MANAGEMENT  0x09    // Device Management
+#define CDC_SUBCLASS_MOBILE_DIRECT_LINE 0x0A    // Mobile Direct Line Model
+#define CDC_SUBCLASS_OBEX               0x0B    // OBEX
+#define CDC_SUBCLASS_ETHERNET_EMU       0x0C    // Ethernet Emulation Model
+
+// Communication Interface Class Control Protocol Codes
+#define CDC_PROTOCOL_ITU_T_V_250        0x01    // AT Commands defined by ITU-T V.250
+#define CDC_PROTOCOL_PCCA_101           0x02    // AT Commands defined by PCCA-101
+#define CDC_PROTOCOL_PCCA_101_O         0x03    // AT Commands defined by PCCA-101 & Annex O
+#define CDC_PROTOCOL_GSM_7_07           0x04    // AT Commands defined by GSM 7.07
+#define CDC_PROTOCOL_3GPP_27_07         0x05    // AT Commands defined by 3GPP 27.007
+#define CDC_PROTOCOL_C_S0017_0          0x06    // AT Commands defined by TIA for CDMA
+#define CDC_PROTOCOL_USB_EEM            0x07    // Ethernet Emulation Model
+
+// CDC Commands defined by CDC 1.2
+#define CDC_SEND_ENCAPSULATED_COMMAND   0x00
+#define CDC_GET_ENCAPSULATED_RESPONSE   0x01
+
+// CDC Commands defined by PSTN 1.2
+#define CDC_SET_COMM_FEATURE            0x02
+#define CDC_GET_COMM_FEATURE            0x03
+#define CDC_CLEAR_COMM_FEATURE          0x04
+#define CDC_SET_AUX_LINE_STATE          0x10
+#define CDC_SET_HOOK_STATE              0x11
+#define CDC_PULSE_SETUP                 0x12
+#define CDC_SEND_PULSE                  0x13
+#define CDC_SET_PULSE_TIME              0x14
+#define CDC_RING_AUX_JACK               0x15
+#define CDC_SET_LINE_CODING             0x20
+#define CDC_GET_LINE_CODING             0x21
+#define CDC_SET_CONTROL_LINE_STATE      0x22
+#define CDC_SEND_BREAK                  0x23
+#define CDC_SET_RINGER_PARMS            0x30
+#define CDC_GET_RINGER_PARMS            0x31
+#define CDC_SET_OPERATION_PARMS         0x32
+#define CDC_GET_OPERATION_PARMS         0x33
+#define CDC_SET_LINE_PARMS              0x34
+#define CDC_GET_LINE_PARMS              0x35
+#define CDC_DIAL_DIGITS                 0x36
+
+//Class-Specific Notification Codes
+#define NETWORK_CONNECTION              0x00
+#define RESPONSE_AVAILABLE              0x01
+#define AUX_JACK_HOOK_STATE             0x08
+#define RING_DETECT                     0x09
+#define SERIAL_STATE                    0x20
+#define CALL_STATE_CHANGE               0x28
+#define LINE_STATE_CHANGE               0x29
+#define CONNECTION_SPEED_CHANGE         0x2a
+
+// CDC Functional Descriptor Structures
+
+typedef struct {
+        uint8_t bFunctionLength;
+        uint8_t bDescriptorType;
+        uint8_t bDescriptorSubtype;
+        uint8_t bmCapabilities;
+        uint8_t bDataInterface;
+} CALL_MGMNT_FUNC_DESCR;
+
+typedef struct {
+        uint8_t bFunctionLength;
+        uint8_t bDescriptorType;
+        uint8_t bDescriptorSubtype;
+        uint8_t bmCapabilities;
+} ACM_FUNC_DESCR, DLM_FUNC_DESCR, TEL_OPER_MODES_FUNC_DESCR,
+TEL_CALL_STATE_REP_CPBL_FUNC_DESCR;
+
+typedef struct {
+        uint8_t bFunctionLength;
+        uint8_t bDescriptorType;
+        uint8_t bDescriptorSubtype;
+        uint8_t bRingerVolSteps;
+        uint8_t bNumRingerPatterns;
+} TEL_RINGER_FUNC_DESCR;
+
+typedef struct {
+        uint32_t dwDTERate; // Data Terminal Rate in bits per second
+        uint8_t bCharFormat; // 0 - 1 stop bit, 1 - 1.5 stop bits, 2 - 2 stop bits
+        uint8_t bParityType; // 0 - None, 1 - Odd, 2 - Even, 3 - Mark, 4 - Space
+        uint8_t bDataBits; // Data bits (5, 6, 7, 8 or 16)
+} LINE_CODING;
+
+typedef struct {
+        uint8_t bmRequestType; // 0xa1 for class-specific notifications
+        uint8_t bNotification;
+        uint16_t wValue;
+        uint16_t wIndex;
+        uint16_t wLength;
+        uint16_t bmState; //UART state bitmap for SERIAL_STATE, other notifications variable length
+} CLASS_NOTIFICATION;
+
+class ACM;
+
+class CDCAsyncOper {
+public:
+
+        virtual uint8_t OnInit(ACM *pacm) {
+                return 0;
+        };
+        //virtual void OnDataRcvd(ACM *pacm, uint8_t nbytes, uint8_t *dataptr) = 0;
+        //virtual void OnDisconnected(ACM *pacm) = 0;
+};
+
+/**
+ * This structure is used to report the extended capabilities of the connected device.
+ * It is also used to report the current status.
+ * Regular CDC-ACM reports all as false.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+
+        union {
+                uint8_t tty;
+
+                struct {
+                        bool enhanced : 1; // Do we have the ability to set/clear any features?
+                        // Status and 8th bit in data stream.
+                        // Presence only indicates feature is available, but this isn't used for CDC-ACM.
+                        bool wide : 1;
+                        bool autoflow_RTS : 1; // Has autoflow on RTS/CTS
+                        bool autoflow_DSR : 1; // Has autoflow on DTR/DSR
+                        bool autoflow_XON : 1; // Has autoflow  XON/XOFF
+                        bool half_duplex : 1;  // Has half-duplex capability.
+                } __attribute__((packed));
+        };
+} tty_features;
+
+#define ACM_MAX_ENDPOINTS               4
+
+class ACM : public USBDeviceConfig, public UsbConfigXtracter {
+protected:
+        static const uint8_t epDataInIndex; // DataIn endpoint index
+        static const uint8_t epDataOutIndex; // DataOUT endpoint index
+        static const uint8_t epInterruptInIndex; // InterruptIN  endpoint index
+
+        USB *pUsb;
+        CDCAsyncOper *pAsync;
+        uint8_t bAddress;
+        uint8_t bConfNum; // configuration number
+        uint8_t bControlIface; // Control interface value
+        uint8_t bDataIface; // Data interface value
+        uint8_t bNumEP; // total number of EP in the configuration
+        uint32_t qNextPollTime; // next poll time
+        volatile bool bPollEnable; // poll enable flag
+        volatile bool ready; //device ready indicator
+        tty_features _enhanced_status; // current status
+
+        EpInfo epInfo[ACM_MAX_ENDPOINTS];
+
+        void PrintEndpointDescriptor(const USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR* ep_ptr);
+
+public:
+        ACM(USB *pusb, CDCAsyncOper *pasync);
+
+        uint8_t SetCommFeature(uint16_t fid, uint8_t nbytes, uint8_t *dataptr);
+        uint8_t GetCommFeature(uint16_t fid, uint8_t nbytes, uint8_t *dataptr);
+        uint8_t ClearCommFeature(uint16_t fid);
+        uint8_t SetLineCoding(const LINE_CODING *dataptr);
+        uint8_t GetLineCoding(LINE_CODING *dataptr);
+        uint8_t SetControlLineState(uint8_t state);
+        uint8_t SendBreak(uint16_t duration);
+        uint8_t GetNotif(uint16_t *bytes_rcvd, uint8_t *dataptr);
+
+        // Methods for receiving and sending data
+        uint8_t RcvData(uint16_t *nbytesptr, uint8_t *dataptr);
+        uint8_t SndData(uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t *dataptr);
+
+        // USBDeviceConfig implementation
+        uint8_t Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed);
+        uint8_t Release();
+        uint8_t Poll();
+
+        bool available(void) {
+                return false;
+        };
+
+        virtual uint8_t GetAddress() {
+                return bAddress;
+        };
+
+        virtual bool isReady() {
+                return ready;
+        };
+
+        virtual tty_features enhanced_status(void) {
+                return _enhanced_status;
+        };
+
+        virtual tty_features enhanced_features(void) {
+                tty_features rv;
+                rv.enhanced = false;
+                rv.autoflow_RTS = false;
+                rv.autoflow_DSR = false;
+                rv.autoflow_XON = false;
+                rv.half_duplex = false;
+                rv.wide = false;
+                return rv;
+        };
+
+        virtual void autoflowRTS(bool s) {
+        };
+
+        virtual void autoflowDSR(bool s) {
+        };
+
+        virtual void autoflowXON(bool s) {
+        };
+
+        virtual void half_duplex(bool s) {
+        };
+
+        virtual void wide(bool s) {
+        };
+
+        // UsbConfigXtracter implementation
+        void EndpointXtract(uint8_t conf, uint8_t iface, uint8_t alt, uint8_t proto, const USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR *ep);
+};
+
+#endif // __CDCACM_H__
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/cdcftdi.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/cdcftdi.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..80d21d16e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/cdcftdi.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,334 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+#include "cdcftdi.h"
+
+const uint8_t FTDI::epDataInIndex = 1;
+const uint8_t FTDI::epDataOutIndex = 2;
+const uint8_t FTDI::epInterruptInIndex = 3;
+
+FTDI::FTDI(USB *p, FTDIAsyncOper *pasync) :
+pAsync(pasync),
+pUsb(p),
+bAddress(0),
+bNumEP(1),
+wFTDIType(0) {
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < FTDI_MAX_ENDPOINTS; i++) {
+                epInfo[i].epAddr = 0;
+                epInfo[i].maxPktSize = (i) ? 0 : 8;
+                epInfo[i].epAttribs = 0;
+                epInfo[i].bmNakPower = (i==epDataInIndex) ? USB_NAK_NOWAIT: USB_NAK_MAX_POWER;
+        }
+        if(pUsb)
+                pUsb->RegisterDeviceClass(this);
+}
+
+uint8_t FTDI::Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed) {
+        const uint8_t constBufSize = sizeof (USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR);
+
+        uint8_t buf[constBufSize];
+        USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR * udd = reinterpret_cast<USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR*>(buf);
+        uint8_t rcode;
+        UsbDevice *p = NULL;
+        EpInfo *oldep_ptr = NULL;
+
+        uint8_t num_of_conf; // number of configurations
+
+        AddressPool &addrPool = pUsb->GetAddressPool();
+
+        USBTRACE("FTDI Init\r\n");
+
+        if(bAddress)
+                return USB_ERROR_CLASS_INSTANCE_ALREADY_IN_USE;
+
+        // Get pointer to pseudo device with address 0 assigned
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(0);
+
+        if(!p)
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+
+        if(!p->epinfo) {
+                USBTRACE("epinfo\r\n");
+                return USB_ERROR_EPINFO_IS_NULL;
+        }
+
+        // Save old pointer to EP_RECORD of address 0
+        oldep_ptr = p->epinfo;
+
+        // Temporary assign new pointer to epInfo to p->epinfo in order to avoid toggle inconsistence
+        p->epinfo = epInfo;
+
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+
+        // Get device descriptor
+        rcode = pUsb->getDevDescr(0, 0, sizeof (USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR), buf);
+
+        // Restore p->epinfo
+        p->epinfo = oldep_ptr;
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailGetDevDescr;
+        if(udd->idVendor != FTDI_VID || udd->idProduct != FTDI_PID)
+                return USB_DEV_CONFIG_ERROR_DEVICE_NOT_SUPPORTED;
+
+        // Save type of FTDI chip
+        wFTDIType = udd->bcdDevice;
+
+        // Allocate new address according to device class
+        bAddress = addrPool.AllocAddress(parent, false, port);
+
+        if(!bAddress)
+                return USB_ERROR_OUT_OF_ADDRESS_SPACE_IN_POOL;
+
+        // Extract Max Packet Size from the device descriptor
+        epInfo[0].maxPktSize = udd->bMaxPacketSize0;
+
+        // Assign new address to the device
+        rcode = pUsb->setAddr(0, 0, bAddress);
+
+        if(rcode) {
+                p->lowspeed = false;
+                addrPool.FreeAddress(bAddress);
+                bAddress = 0;
+                USBTRACE2("setAddr:", rcode);
+                return rcode;
+        }
+
+        USBTRACE2("Addr:", bAddress);
+
+        p->lowspeed = false;
+
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(bAddress);
+
+        if(!p)
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+
+        num_of_conf = udd->bNumConfigurations;
+
+        // Assign epInfo to epinfo pointer
+        rcode = pUsb->setEpInfoEntry(bAddress, 1, epInfo);
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetDevTblEntry;
+
+        USBTRACE2("NC:", num_of_conf);
+
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < num_of_conf; i++) {
+                HexDumper<USBReadParser, uint16_t, uint16_t> HexDump;
+                ConfigDescParser < 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, CP_MASK_COMPARE_ALL> confDescrParser(this);
+
+                rcode = pUsb->getConfDescr(bAddress, 0, i, &HexDump);
+
+                if(rcode)
+                        goto FailGetConfDescr;
+
+                rcode = pUsb->getConfDescr(bAddress, 0, i, &confDescrParser);
+
+                if(rcode)
+                        goto FailGetConfDescr;
+
+                if(bNumEP > 1)
+                        break;
+        } // for
+
+        if(bNumEP < 2)
+                return USB_DEV_CONFIG_ERROR_DEVICE_NOT_SUPPORTED;
+
+        USBTRACE2("NumEP:", bNumEP);
+
+        // Assign epInfo to epinfo pointer
+        rcode = pUsb->setEpInfoEntry(bAddress, bNumEP, epInfo);
+
+        USBTRACE2("Conf:", bConfNum);
+
+        // Set Configuration Value
+        rcode = pUsb->setConf(bAddress, 0, bConfNum);
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetConfDescr;
+
+        rcode = pAsync->OnInit(this);
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailOnInit;
+
+        USBTRACE("FTDI configured\r\n");
+
+        bPollEnable = true;
+        return 0;
+
+FailGetDevDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailGetDevDescr();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailSetDevTblEntry:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailSetDevTblEntry();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailGetConfDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailGetConfDescr();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailSetConfDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailSetConfDescr();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailOnInit:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        USBTRACE("OnInit:");
+
+Fail:
+        NotifyFail(rcode);
+#endif
+        Release();
+        return rcode;
+}
+
+void FTDI::EndpointXtract(uint8_t conf, uint8_t iface, uint8_t alt, uint8_t proto, const USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR *pep) {
+        ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("Conf.Val"), conf);
+        ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("Iface Num"), iface);
+        ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("Alt.Set"), alt);
+
+        bConfNum = conf;
+
+        uint8_t index;
+
+        if((pep->bmAttributes & 0x03) == 3 && (pep->bEndpointAddress & 0x80) == 0x80)
+                index = epInterruptInIndex;
+        else
+                if((pep->bmAttributes & 0x02) == 2)
+                index = ((pep->bEndpointAddress & 0x80) == 0x80) ? epDataInIndex : epDataOutIndex;
+        else
+                return;
+
+        // Fill in the endpoint info structure
+        epInfo[index].epAddr = (pep->bEndpointAddress & 0x0F);
+        epInfo[index].maxPktSize = (uint8_t)pep->wMaxPacketSize;
+        epInfo[index].epAttribs = 0;
+
+        bNumEP++;
+
+        PrintEndpointDescriptor(pep);
+}
+
+uint8_t FTDI::Release() {
+        pUsb->GetAddressPool().FreeAddress(bAddress);
+
+        bAddress = 0;
+        bNumEP = 1;
+        qNextPollTime = 0;
+        bPollEnable = false;
+        return pAsync->OnRelease(this);
+}
+
+uint8_t FTDI::Poll() {
+        uint8_t rcode = 0;
+
+        //if (!bPollEnable)
+        //      return 0;
+
+        //if (qNextPollTime <= millis())
+        //{
+        //      USB_HOST_SERIAL.println(bAddress, HEX);
+
+        //      qNextPollTime = millis() + 100;
+        //}
+        return rcode;
+}
+
+uint8_t FTDI::SetBaudRate(uint32_t baud) {
+        uint16_t baud_value, baud_index = 0;
+        uint32_t divisor3;
+
+        divisor3 = 48000000 / 2 / baud; // divisor shifted 3 bits to the left
+
+        if(wFTDIType == FT232AM) {
+                if((divisor3 & 0x7) == 7)
+                        divisor3++; // round x.7/8 up to x+1
+
+                baud_value = divisor3 >> 3;
+                divisor3 &= 0x7;
+
+                if(divisor3 == 1) baud_value |= 0xc000;
+                else // 0.125
+                        if(divisor3 >= 4) baud_value |= 0x4000;
+                else // 0.5
+                        if(divisor3 != 0) baud_value |= 0x8000; // 0.25
+                if(baud_value == 1) baud_value = 0; /* special case for maximum baud rate */
+        } else {
+                static const unsigned char divfrac [8] = {0, 3, 2, 0, 1, 1, 2, 3};
+                static const unsigned char divindex[8] = {0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 1};
+
+                baud_value = divisor3 >> 3;
+                baud_value |= divfrac [divisor3 & 0x7] << 14;
+                baud_index = divindex[divisor3 & 0x7];
+
+                /* Deal with special cases for highest baud rates. */
+                if(baud_value == 1) baud_value = 0;
+                else // 1.0
+                        if(baud_value == 0x4001) baud_value = 1; // 1.5
+        }
+        USBTRACE2("baud_value:", baud_value);
+        USBTRACE2("baud_index:", baud_index);
+        return pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, bmREQ_FTDI_OUT, FTDI_SIO_SET_BAUD_RATE, baud_value & 0xff, baud_value >> 8, baud_index, 0, 0, NULL, NULL);
+}
+
+uint8_t FTDI::SetModemControl(uint16_t signal) {
+        return pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, bmREQ_FTDI_OUT, FTDI_SIO_MODEM_CTRL, signal & 0xff, signal >> 8, 0, 0, 0, NULL, NULL);
+}
+
+uint8_t FTDI::SetFlowControl(uint8_t protocol, uint8_t xon, uint8_t xoff) {
+        return pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, bmREQ_FTDI_OUT, FTDI_SIO_SET_FLOW_CTRL, xon, xoff, protocol << 8, 0, 0, NULL, NULL);
+}
+
+uint8_t FTDI::SetData(uint16_t databm) {
+        return pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, bmREQ_FTDI_OUT, FTDI_SIO_SET_DATA, databm & 0xff, databm >> 8, 0, 0, 0, NULL, NULL);
+}
+
+uint8_t FTDI::RcvData(uint16_t *bytes_rcvd, uint8_t *dataptr) {
+        return pUsb->inTransfer(bAddress, epInfo[epDataInIndex].epAddr, bytes_rcvd, dataptr);
+}
+
+uint8_t FTDI::SndData(uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t *dataptr) {
+        return pUsb->outTransfer(bAddress, epInfo[epDataOutIndex].epAddr, nbytes, dataptr);
+}
+
+void FTDI::PrintEndpointDescriptor(const USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR* ep_ptr) {
+        Notify(PSTR("Endpoint descriptor:"), 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nLength:\t\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (ep_ptr->bLength, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nType:\t\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (ep_ptr->bDescriptorType, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nAddress:\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (ep_ptr->bEndpointAddress, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nAttributes:\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (ep_ptr->bmAttributes, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nMaxPktSize:\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint16_t > (ep_ptr->wMaxPacketSize, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nPoll Intrv:\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (ep_ptr->bInterval, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\n"), 0x80);
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/cdcftdi.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/cdcftdi.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b73125262
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/cdcftdi.h
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+#if !defined(__CDCFTDI_H__)
+#define __CDCFTDI_H__
+
+#include "Usb.h"
+
+#define bmREQ_FTDI_OUT  0x40
+#define bmREQ_FTDI_IN   0xc0
+
+//#define bmREQ_FTDI_OUT                USB_SETUP_HOST_TO_DEVICE|USB_SETUP_TYPE_CLASS|USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_INTERFACE
+//#define bmREQ_FTDI_IN         USB_SETUP_DEVICE_TO_HOST|USB_SETUP_TYPE_CLASS|USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_INTERFACE
+
+#define FTDI_VID                        0x0403  // FTDI VID
+#define FTDI_PID                        0x6001  // FTDI PID
+
+#define FT232AM                         0x0200
+#define FT232BM                         0x0400
+#define FT2232                          0x0500
+#define FT232R                          0x0600
+
+// Commands
+#define FTDI_SIO_RESET                  0 /* Reset the port */
+#define FTDI_SIO_MODEM_CTRL             1 /* Set the modem control register */
+#define FTDI_SIO_SET_FLOW_CTRL          2 /* Set flow control register */
+#define FTDI_SIO_SET_BAUD_RATE          3 /* Set baud rate */
+#define FTDI_SIO_SET_DATA               4 /* Set the data characteristics of the port */
+#define FTDI_SIO_GET_MODEM_STATUS       5 /* Retrieve current value of modem status register */
+#define FTDI_SIO_SET_EVENT_CHAR         6 /* Set the event character */
+#define FTDI_SIO_SET_ERROR_CHAR         7 /* Set the error character */
+
+#define FTDI_SIO_RESET_SIO              0
+#define FTDI_SIO_RESET_PURGE_RX         1
+#define FTDI_SIO_RESET_PURGE_TX         2
+
+#define FTDI_SIO_SET_DATA_PARITY_NONE   (0x0 << 8 )
+#define FTDI_SIO_SET_DATA_PARITY_ODD    (0x1 << 8 )
+#define FTDI_SIO_SET_DATA_PARITY_EVEN   (0x2 << 8 )
+#define FTDI_SIO_SET_DATA_PARITY_MARK   (0x3 << 8 )
+#define FTDI_SIO_SET_DATA_PARITY_SPACE  (0x4 << 8 )
+#define FTDI_SIO_SET_DATA_STOP_BITS_1   (0x0 << 11)
+#define FTDI_SIO_SET_DATA_STOP_BITS_15  (0x1 << 11)
+#define FTDI_SIO_SET_DATA_STOP_BITS_2   (0x2 << 11)
+#define FTDI_SIO_SET_BREAK              (0x1 << 14)
+
+#define FTDI_SIO_SET_DTR_MASK           0x1
+#define FTDI_SIO_SET_DTR_HIGH           ( 1 | ( FTDI_SIO_SET_DTR_MASK  << 8))
+#define FTDI_SIO_SET_DTR_LOW            ( 0 | ( FTDI_SIO_SET_DTR_MASK  << 8))
+#define FTDI_SIO_SET_RTS_MASK           0x2
+#define FTDI_SIO_SET_RTS_HIGH           ( 2 | ( FTDI_SIO_SET_RTS_MASK << 8 ))
+#define FTDI_SIO_SET_RTS_LOW            ( 0 | ( FTDI_SIO_SET_RTS_MASK << 8 ))
+
+#define FTDI_SIO_DISABLE_FLOW_CTRL      0x0
+#define FTDI_SIO_RTS_CTS_HS             (0x1 << 8)
+#define FTDI_SIO_DTR_DSR_HS             (0x2 << 8)
+#define FTDI_SIO_XON_XOFF_HS            (0x4 << 8)
+
+#define FTDI_SIO_CTS_MASK               0x10
+#define FTDI_SIO_DSR_MASK               0x20
+#define FTDI_SIO_RI_MASK                0x40
+#define FTDI_SIO_RLSD_MASK              0x80
+
+class FTDI;
+
+class FTDIAsyncOper {
+public:
+
+        virtual uint8_t OnInit(FTDI *pftdi) {
+                return 0;
+        };
+
+        virtual uint8_t OnRelease(FTDI *pftdi) {
+                return 0;
+        };
+};
+
+
+// Only single port chips are currently supported by the library,
+//              so only three endpoints are allocated.
+#define FTDI_MAX_ENDPOINTS              3
+
+class FTDI : public USBDeviceConfig, public UsbConfigXtracter {
+        static const uint8_t epDataInIndex; // DataIn endpoint index
+        static const uint8_t epDataOutIndex; // DataOUT endpoint index
+        static const uint8_t epInterruptInIndex; // InterruptIN  endpoint index
+
+        FTDIAsyncOper *pAsync;
+        USB *pUsb;
+        uint8_t bAddress;
+        uint8_t bConfNum; // configuration number
+        uint8_t bNumIface; // number of interfaces in the configuration
+        uint8_t bNumEP; // total number of EP in the configuration
+        uint32_t qNextPollTime; // next poll time
+        bool bPollEnable; // poll enable flag
+        uint16_t wFTDIType; // Type of FTDI chip
+
+        EpInfo epInfo[FTDI_MAX_ENDPOINTS];
+
+        void PrintEndpointDescriptor(const USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR* ep_ptr);
+
+public:
+        FTDI(USB *pusb, FTDIAsyncOper *pasync);
+
+        uint8_t SetBaudRate(uint32_t baud);
+        uint8_t SetModemControl(uint16_t control);
+        uint8_t SetFlowControl(uint8_t protocol, uint8_t xon = 0x11, uint8_t xoff = 0x13);
+        uint8_t SetData(uint16_t databm);
+
+        // Methods for recieving and sending data
+        uint8_t RcvData(uint16_t *bytes_rcvd, uint8_t *dataptr);
+        uint8_t SndData(uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t *dataptr);
+
+        // USBDeviceConfig implementation
+        uint8_t Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed);
+        uint8_t Release();
+        uint8_t Poll();
+
+        virtual uint8_t GetAddress() {
+                return bAddress;
+        };
+
+        // UsbConfigXtracter implementation
+        void EndpointXtract(uint8_t conf, uint8_t iface, uint8_t alt, uint8_t proto, const USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR *ep);
+
+        virtual bool VIDPIDOK(uint16_t vid, uint16_t pid) {
+                return (vid == FTDI_VID && pid == FTDI_PID);
+        }
+
+};
+
+#endif // __CDCFTDI_H__
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/cdcprolific.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/cdcprolific.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..eceb1df9f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/cdcprolific.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,247 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+#include "cdcprolific.h"
+
+PL2303::PL2303(USB *p, CDCAsyncOper *pasync) :
+ACM(p, pasync),
+wPLType(0) {
+}
+
+uint8_t PL2303::Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed) {
+        const uint8_t constBufSize = sizeof (USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR);
+
+        uint8_t buf[constBufSize];
+        USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR * udd = reinterpret_cast<USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR*>(buf);
+        uint8_t rcode;
+        UsbDevice *p = NULL;
+        EpInfo *oldep_ptr = NULL;
+        uint8_t num_of_conf; // number of configurations
+#ifdef PL2303_COMPAT
+        enum pl2303_type pltype = unknown;
+#endif
+
+        AddressPool &addrPool = pUsb->GetAddressPool();
+
+        USBTRACE("PL Init\r\n");
+
+        if(bAddress)
+                return USB_ERROR_CLASS_INSTANCE_ALREADY_IN_USE;
+
+        // Get pointer to pseudo device with address 0 assigned
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(0);
+
+        if(!p)
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+
+        if(!p->epinfo) {
+                USBTRACE("epinfo\r\n");
+                return USB_ERROR_EPINFO_IS_NULL;
+        }
+
+        // Save old pointer to EP_RECORD of address 0
+        oldep_ptr = p->epinfo;
+
+        // Temporary assign new pointer to epInfo to p->epinfo in order to avoid toggle inconsistence
+        p->epinfo = epInfo;
+
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+
+        // Get device descriptor
+        rcode = pUsb->getDevDescr(0, 0, sizeof (USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR), (uint8_t*)buf);
+
+        // Restore p->epinfo
+        p->epinfo = oldep_ptr;
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailGetDevDescr;
+
+        if(udd->idVendor != PL_VID && CHECK_PID(udd->idProduct))
+                return USB_DEV_CONFIG_ERROR_DEVICE_NOT_SUPPORTED;
+
+        /* determine chip variant */
+#ifdef PL2303_COMPAT
+        if(udd->bDeviceClass == 0x02 )
+                pltype = type_0;
+        else if(udd->bMaxPacketSize0 == 0x40 )
+                pltype = rev_HX;
+        else if(udd->bDeviceClass == 0x00)
+                pltype = type_1;
+        else if(udd->bDeviceClass == 0xff)
+                pltype = type_1;
+#endif
+
+        // Save type of PL chip
+        wPLType = udd->bcdDevice;
+
+        // Allocate new address according to device class
+        bAddress = addrPool.AllocAddress(parent, false, port);
+
+        if(!bAddress)
+                return USB_ERROR_OUT_OF_ADDRESS_SPACE_IN_POOL;
+
+        // Extract Max Packet Size from the device descriptor
+        epInfo[0].maxPktSize = udd->bMaxPacketSize0;
+
+        // Assign new address to the device
+        rcode = pUsb->setAddr(0, 0, bAddress);
+
+        if(rcode) {
+                p->lowspeed = false;
+                addrPool.FreeAddress(bAddress);
+                bAddress = 0;
+                USBTRACE2("setAddr:", rcode);
+                return rcode;
+        }
+
+        USBTRACE2("Addr:", bAddress);
+
+        p->lowspeed = false;
+
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(bAddress);
+
+        if(!p)
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+
+        num_of_conf = udd->bNumConfigurations;
+
+        // Assign epInfo to epinfo pointer
+        rcode = pUsb->setEpInfoEntry(bAddress, 1, epInfo);
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetDevTblEntry;
+
+        USBTRACE2("NC:", num_of_conf);
+
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < num_of_conf; i++) {
+                HexDumper<USBReadParser, uint16_t, uint16_t> HexDump;
+                ConfigDescParser < 0xFF, 0, 0, CP_MASK_COMPARE_CLASS> confDescrParser(this);
+
+                rcode = pUsb->getConfDescr(bAddress, 0, i, &HexDump);
+
+                if(rcode)
+                        goto FailGetConfDescr;
+
+                rcode = pUsb->getConfDescr(bAddress, 0, i, &confDescrParser);
+
+                if(rcode)
+                        goto FailGetConfDescr;
+
+                if(bNumEP > 1)
+                        break;
+        } // for
+
+        if(bNumEP < 2)
+                return USB_DEV_CONFIG_ERROR_DEVICE_NOT_SUPPORTED;
+
+        // Assign epInfo to epinfo pointer
+        rcode = pUsb->setEpInfoEntry(bAddress, bNumEP, epInfo);
+
+        USBTRACE2("Conf:", bConfNum);
+
+        // Set Configuration Value
+        rcode = pUsb->setConf(bAddress, 0, bConfNum);
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetConfDescr;
+
+#ifdef PL2303_COMPAT
+        /* Shamanic dance - sending Prolific init data as-is */
+        vendorRead( 0x84, 0x84, 0, buf );
+        vendorWrite( 0x04, 0x04, 0 );
+        vendorRead( 0x84, 0x84, 0, buf );
+        vendorRead( 0x83, 0x83, 0, buf );
+        vendorRead( 0x84, 0x84, 0, buf );
+        vendorWrite( 0x04, 0x04, 1 );
+        vendorRead( 0x84, 0x84, 0, buf);
+        vendorRead( 0x83, 0x83, 0, buf);
+        vendorWrite( 0, 0, 1 );
+        vendorWrite( 1, 0, 0 );
+        if( pltype == rev_HX ) {
+                vendorWrite( 2, 0, 0x44 );
+                vendorWrite( 0x06, 0x06, 0 ); // From W7 init
+        }
+        else {
+                vendorWrite( 2, 0, 0x24 );
+        }
+        /* Shamanic dance end */
+#endif
+        /* Calling post-init callback */
+        rcode = pAsync->OnInit(this);
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailOnInit;
+
+        USBTRACE("PL configured\r\n");
+
+        //bPollEnable = true;
+        ready = true;
+        return 0;
+
+FailGetDevDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailGetDevDescr();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailSetDevTblEntry:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailSetDevTblEntry();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailGetConfDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailGetConfDescr();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailSetConfDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailSetConfDescr();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailOnInit:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        USBTRACE("OnInit:");
+#endif
+
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+Fail:
+        NotifyFail(rcode);
+#endif
+        Release();
+        return rcode;
+}
+
+//uint8_t PL::Poll()
+//{
+//      uint8_t rcode = 0;
+//
+//      //if (!bPollEnable)
+//      //      return 0;
+//
+//      //if (qNextPollTime <= millis())
+//      //{
+//      //      USB_HOST_SERIAL.println(bAddress, HEX);
+//
+//      //      qNextPollTime = millis() + 100;
+//      //}
+//      return rcode;
+//}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/cdcprolific.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/cdcprolific.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..499146641
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/cdcprolific.h
@@ -0,0 +1,159 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+#if !defined(__CDCPROLIFIC_H__)
+#define __CDCPROLIFIC_H__
+
+#include "cdcacm.h"
+
+//#define PL2303_COMPAT // Uncomment it if you have compatibility problems
+
+#define PL_VID                                  0x067B
+#define CHECK_PID(pid)                          ( pid != 0x2303 && pid != 0x0609 )
+
+//#define PL_PID                                0x0609
+
+#define PROLIFIC_REV_H                          0x0202
+#define PROLIFIC_REV_X                          0x0300
+#define PROLIFIC_REV_HX_CHIP_D                  0x0400
+#define PROLIFIC_REV_1                          0x0001
+
+#define kXOnChar                                '\x11'
+#define kXOffChar                               '\x13'
+
+#define SPECIAL_SHIFT                           (5)
+#define SPECIAL_MASK                            ((1<<SPECIAL_SHIFT) - 1)
+#define STATE_ALL                               ( PD_RS232_S_MASK | PD_S_MASK )
+#define FLOW_RX_AUTO                            ( PD_RS232_A_RFR | PD_RS232_A_DTR | PD_RS232_A_RXO )
+#define FLOW_TX_AUTO                            ( PD_RS232_A_CTS | PD_RS232_A_DSR | PD_RS232_A_TXO | PD_RS232_A_DCD )
+#define CAN_BE_AUTO                             ( FLOW_RX_AUTO | FLOW_TX_AUTO )
+#define CAN_NOTIFY                              ( PD_RS232_N_MASK )
+#define EXTERNAL_MASK                           ( PD_S_MASK | (PD_RS232_S_MASK & ~PD_RS232_S_LOOP) )
+#define INTERNAL_DELAY                          ( PD_RS232_S_LOOP )
+#define DEFAULT_AUTO                            ( PD_RS232_A_DTR | PD_RS232_A_RFR | PD_RS232_A_CTS | PD_RS232_A_DSR )
+#define DEFAULT_NOTIFY                          0x00
+#define DEFAULT_STATE                           ( PD_S_TX_ENABLE | PD_S_RX_ENABLE | PD_RS232_A_TXO | PD_RS232_A_RXO )
+
+#define CONTINUE_SEND                           1
+#define PAUSE_SEND                              2
+
+#define kRxAutoFlow                             ((UInt32)( PD_RS232_A_RFR | PD_RS232_A_DTR | PD_RS232_A_RXO ))
+#define kTxAutoFlow                             ((UInt32)( PD_RS232_A_CTS | PD_RS232_A_DSR | PD_RS232_A_TXO | PD_RS232_A_DCD ))
+#define kControl_StateMask                      ((UInt32)( PD_RS232_S_CTS | PD_RS232_S_DSR | PD_RS232_S_CAR | PD_RS232_S_RI  ))
+#define kRxQueueState                           ((UInt32)( PD_S_RXQ_EMPTY | PD_S_RXQ_LOW_WATER | PD_S_RXQ_HIGH_WATER | PD_S_RXQ_FULL ))
+#define kTxQueueState                           ((UInt32)( PD_S_TXQ_EMPTY | PD_S_TXQ_LOW_WATER | PD_S_TXQ_HIGH_WATER | PD_S_TXQ_FULL ))
+
+#define kCONTROL_DTR                            0x01
+#define kCONTROL_RTS                            0x02
+
+#define kStateTransientMask                     0x74
+#define kBreakError                             0x04
+#define kFrameError                             0x10
+#define kParityError                            0x20
+#define kOverrunError                           0x40
+
+#define kCTS                                    0x80
+#define kDSR                                    0x02
+#define kRI                                     0x08
+#define kDCD                                    0x01
+#define kHandshakeInMask                        ((UInt32)( PD_RS232_S_CTS | PD_RS232_S_DSR | PD_RS232_S_CAR | PD_RS232_S_RI  ))
+
+#define VENDOR_WRITE_REQUEST_TYPE               0x40
+#define VENDOR_WRITE_REQUEST                    0x01
+
+#define VENDOR_READ_REQUEST_TYPE                0xc0
+#define VENDOR_READ_REQUEST                     0x01
+
+// Device Configuration Registers (DCR0, DCR1, DCR2)
+#define SET_DCR0                                0x00
+#define GET_DCR0                                0x80
+#define DCR0_INIT                               0x01
+#define DCR0_INIT_H                             0x41
+#define DCR0_INIT_X                             0x61
+
+#define SET_DCR1                                0x01
+#define GET_DCR1                                0x81
+#define DCR1_INIT_H                             0x80
+#define DCR1_INIT_X                             0x00
+
+#define SET_DCR2                                0x02
+#define GET_DCR2                                0x82
+#define DCR2_INIT_H                             0x24
+#define DCR2_INIT_X                             0x44
+
+// On-chip Data Buffers:
+#define RESET_DOWNSTREAM_DATA_PIPE              0x08
+#define RESET_UPSTREAM_DATA_PIPE                0x09
+
+
+#define PL_MAX_ENDPOINTS                        4
+
+enum tXO_State {
+        kXOnSent = -2,
+        kXOffSent = -1,
+        kXO_Idle = 0,
+        kXOffNeeded = 1,
+        kXOnNeeded = 2
+};
+
+enum pl2303_type {
+        unknown,
+        type_0, /* don't know the difference between type 0 and */
+        type_1, /* type 1, until someone from prolific tells us... */
+        rev_X,
+        rev_HX, /* HX version of the pl2303 chip */
+        rev_H
+};
+
+
+class PL2303 : public ACM {
+        uint16_t wPLType; // Type of chip
+
+public:
+        PL2303(USB *pusb, CDCAsyncOper *pasync);
+
+        // USBDeviceConfig implementation
+        uint8_t Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed);
+        //virtual uint8_t Release();
+        //virtual uint8_t Poll();
+        //virtual uint8_t GetAddress() { return bAddress; };
+
+        //// UsbConfigXtracter implementation
+        //virtual void EndpointXtract(uint8_t conf, uint8_t iface, uint8_t alt, uint8_t proto, const USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR *ep);
+
+#ifdef PL2303_COMPAT
+private:
+        /* Prolific proprietary requests */
+        uint8_t vendorRead( uint8_t val_lo, uint8_t val_hi, uint16_t index, uint8_t* buf );
+        uint8_t vendorWrite( uint8_t val_lo, uint8_t val_hi, uint8_t index );
+#endif
+};
+
+#ifdef PL2303_COMPAT
+/* vendor read request */
+inline uint8_t PL2303::vendorRead( uint8_t val_lo, uint8_t val_hi, uint16_t index, uint8_t* buf )
+{
+        return( pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, VENDOR_READ_REQUEST_TYPE, VENDOR_READ_REQUEST, val_lo, val_hi, index, 1, 1, buf, NULL ));
+}
+
+/* vendor write request */
+inline uint8_t PL2303::vendorWrite( uint8_t val_lo, uint8_t val_hi, uint8_t index )
+{
+        return( pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, VENDOR_WRITE_REQUEST_TYPE, VENDOR_WRITE_REQUEST, val_lo, val_hi, index, 0, 0, NULL, NULL ));
+}
+#endif
+
+#endif // __CDCPROLIFIC_H__
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/confdescparser.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/confdescparser.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a6806f2ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/confdescparser.h
@@ -0,0 +1,213 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+#if !defined(_usb_h_) || defined(__CONFDESCPARSER_H__)
+#error "Never include confdescparser.h directly; include Usb.h instead"
+#else
+
+#define __CONFDESCPARSER_H__
+
+class UsbConfigXtracter {
+public:
+        //virtual void ConfigXtract(const USB_CONFIGURATION_DESCRIPTOR *conf) = 0;
+        //virtual void InterfaceXtract(uint8_t conf, const USB_INTERFACE_DESCRIPTOR *iface) = 0;
+
+        virtual void EndpointXtract(uint8_t conf, uint8_t iface, uint8_t alt, uint8_t proto, const USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR *ep) {
+        };
+};
+
+#define CP_MASK_COMPARE_CLASS                   1
+#define CP_MASK_COMPARE_SUBCLASS                2
+#define CP_MASK_COMPARE_PROTOCOL                4
+#define CP_MASK_COMPARE_ALL                     7
+
+// Configuration Descriptor Parser Class Template
+
+template <const uint8_t CLASS_ID, const uint8_t SUBCLASS_ID, const uint8_t PROTOCOL_ID, const uint8_t MASK>
+class ConfigDescParser : public USBReadParser {
+        UsbConfigXtracter *theXtractor;
+        MultiValueBuffer theBuffer;
+        MultiByteValueParser valParser;
+        ByteSkipper theSkipper;
+        uint8_t varBuffer[16 /*sizeof(USB_CONFIGURATION_DESCRIPTOR)*/];
+
+        uint8_t stateParseDescr; // ParseDescriptor state
+
+        uint8_t dscrLen; // Descriptor length
+        uint8_t dscrType; // Descriptor type
+
+        bool isGoodInterface; // Apropriate interface flag
+        uint8_t confValue; // Configuration value
+        uint8_t protoValue; // Protocol value
+        uint8_t ifaceNumber; // Interface number
+        uint8_t ifaceAltSet; // Interface alternate settings
+
+        bool UseOr;
+        bool ParseDescriptor(uint8_t **pp, uint16_t *pcntdn);
+        void PrintHidDescriptor(const USB_HID_DESCRIPTOR *pDesc);
+
+public:
+
+        void SetOR(void) {
+                UseOr = true;
+        }
+        ConfigDescParser(UsbConfigXtracter *xtractor);
+        void Parse(const uint16_t len, const uint8_t *pbuf, const uint16_t &offset);
+};
+
+template <const uint8_t CLASS_ID, const uint8_t SUBCLASS_ID, const uint8_t PROTOCOL_ID, const uint8_t MASK>
+ConfigDescParser<CLASS_ID, SUBCLASS_ID, PROTOCOL_ID, MASK>::ConfigDescParser(UsbConfigXtracter *xtractor) :
+theXtractor(xtractor),
+stateParseDescr(0),
+dscrLen(0),
+dscrType(0),
+UseOr(false) {
+        theBuffer.pValue = varBuffer;
+        valParser.Initialize(&theBuffer);
+        theSkipper.Initialize(&theBuffer);
+};
+
+template <const uint8_t CLASS_ID, const uint8_t SUBCLASS_ID, const uint8_t PROTOCOL_ID, const uint8_t MASK>
+void ConfigDescParser<CLASS_ID, SUBCLASS_ID, PROTOCOL_ID, MASK>::Parse(const uint16_t len, const uint8_t *pbuf, const uint16_t &offset) {
+        uint16_t cntdn = (uint16_t)len;
+        uint8_t *p = (uint8_t*)pbuf;
+
+        while(cntdn)
+                if(!ParseDescriptor(&p, &cntdn))
+                        return;
+}
+
+/* Parser for the configuration descriptor. Takes values for class, subclass, protocol fields in interface descriptor and
+  compare masks for them. When the match is found, calls EndpointXtract passing buffer containing endpoint descriptor */
+template <const uint8_t CLASS_ID, const uint8_t SUBCLASS_ID, const uint8_t PROTOCOL_ID, const uint8_t MASK>
+bool ConfigDescParser<CLASS_ID, SUBCLASS_ID, PROTOCOL_ID, MASK>::ParseDescriptor(uint8_t **pp, uint16_t *pcntdn) {
+        USB_CONFIGURATION_DESCRIPTOR* ucd = reinterpret_cast<USB_CONFIGURATION_DESCRIPTOR*>(varBuffer);
+        USB_INTERFACE_DESCRIPTOR* uid = reinterpret_cast<USB_INTERFACE_DESCRIPTOR*>(varBuffer);
+        switch(stateParseDescr) {
+                case 0:
+                        theBuffer.valueSize = 2;
+                        valParser.Initialize(&theBuffer);
+                        stateParseDescr = 1;
+                case 1:
+                        if(!valParser.Parse(pp, pcntdn))
+                                return false;
+                        dscrLen = *((uint8_t*)theBuffer.pValue);
+                        dscrType = *((uint8_t*)theBuffer.pValue + 1);
+                        stateParseDescr = 2;
+                case 2:
+                        // This is a sort of hack. Assuming that two bytes are all ready in the buffer
+                        //      the pointer is positioned two bytes ahead in order for the rest of descriptor
+                        //      to be read right after the size and the type fields.
+                        // This should be used carefully. varBuffer should be used directly to handle data
+                        //      in the buffer.
+                        theBuffer.pValue = varBuffer + 2;
+                        stateParseDescr = 3;
+                case 3:
+                        switch(dscrType) {
+                                case USB_DESCRIPTOR_INTERFACE:
+                                        isGoodInterface = false;
+                                case USB_DESCRIPTOR_CONFIGURATION:
+                                        theBuffer.valueSize = sizeof (USB_CONFIGURATION_DESCRIPTOR) - 2;
+                                        break;
+                                case USB_DESCRIPTOR_ENDPOINT:
+                                        theBuffer.valueSize = sizeof (USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR) - 2;
+                                        break;
+                                case HID_DESCRIPTOR_HID:
+                                        theBuffer.valueSize = dscrLen - 2;
+                                        break;
+                        }
+                        valParser.Initialize(&theBuffer);
+                        stateParseDescr = 4;
+                case 4:
+                        switch(dscrType) {
+                                case USB_DESCRIPTOR_CONFIGURATION:
+                                        if(!valParser.Parse(pp, pcntdn))
+                                                return false;
+                                        confValue = ucd->bConfigurationValue;
+                                        break;
+                                case USB_DESCRIPTOR_INTERFACE:
+                                        if(!valParser.Parse(pp, pcntdn))
+                                                return false;
+                                        if((MASK & CP_MASK_COMPARE_CLASS) && uid->bInterfaceClass != CLASS_ID)
+                                                break;
+                                        if((MASK & CP_MASK_COMPARE_SUBCLASS) && uid->bInterfaceSubClass != SUBCLASS_ID)
+                                                break;
+                                        if(UseOr) {
+                                                if((!((MASK & CP_MASK_COMPARE_PROTOCOL) && uid->bInterfaceProtocol)))
+                                                        break;
+                                        } else {
+                                                if((MASK & CP_MASK_COMPARE_PROTOCOL) && uid->bInterfaceProtocol != PROTOCOL_ID)
+                                                        break;
+                                        }
+                                        isGoodInterface = true;
+                                        ifaceNumber = uid->bInterfaceNumber;
+                                        ifaceAltSet = uid->bAlternateSetting;
+                                        protoValue = uid->bInterfaceProtocol;
+                                        break;
+                                case USB_DESCRIPTOR_ENDPOINT:
+                                        if(!valParser.Parse(pp, pcntdn))
+                                                return false;
+                                        if(isGoodInterface)
+                                                if(theXtractor)
+                                                        theXtractor->EndpointXtract(confValue, ifaceNumber, ifaceAltSet, protoValue, (USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR*)varBuffer);
+                                        break;
+                                        //case HID_DESCRIPTOR_HID:
+                                        //      if (!valParser.Parse(pp, pcntdn))
+                                        //              return false;
+                                        //      PrintHidDescriptor((const USB_HID_DESCRIPTOR*)varBuffer);
+                                        //      break;
+                                default:
+                                        if(!theSkipper.Skip(pp, pcntdn, dscrLen - 2))
+                                                return false;
+                        }
+                        theBuffer.pValue = varBuffer;
+                        stateParseDescr = 0;
+        }
+        return true;
+}
+
+template <const uint8_t CLASS_ID, const uint8_t SUBCLASS_ID, const uint8_t PROTOCOL_ID, const uint8_t MASK>
+void ConfigDescParser<CLASS_ID, SUBCLASS_ID, PROTOCOL_ID, MASK>::PrintHidDescriptor(const USB_HID_DESCRIPTOR *pDesc) {
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\n\r\nHID Descriptor:\r\n"), 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("bDescLength:\t\t"), 0x80);
+        PrintHex<uint8_t > (pDesc->bLength, 0x80);
+
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nbDescriptorType:\t"), 0x80);
+        PrintHex<uint8_t > (pDesc->bDescriptorType, 0x80);
+
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nbcdHID:\t\t\t"), 0x80);
+        PrintHex<uint16_t > (pDesc->bcdHID, 0x80);
+
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nbCountryCode:\t\t"), 0x80);
+        PrintHex<uint8_t > (pDesc->bCountryCode, 0x80);
+
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nbNumDescriptors:\t"), 0x80);
+        PrintHex<uint8_t > (pDesc->bNumDescriptors, 0x80);
+
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < pDesc->bNumDescriptors; i++) {
+                HID_CLASS_DESCRIPTOR_LEN_AND_TYPE *pLT = (HID_CLASS_DESCRIPTOR_LEN_AND_TYPE*)&(pDesc->bDescrType);
+
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nbDescrType:\t\t"), 0x80);
+                PrintHex<uint8_t > (pLT[i].bDescrType, 0x80);
+
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\nwDescriptorLength:\t"), 0x80);
+                PrintHex<uint16_t > (pLT[i].wDescriptorLength, 0x80);
+        }
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\n"), 0x80);
+}
+
+
+#endif // __CONFDESCPARSER_H__
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/controllerEnums.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/controllerEnums.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0169c763c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/controllerEnums.h
@@ -0,0 +1,204 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2013 Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics. All rights reserved.
+
+ This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+ General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+ Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+ this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+ on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+ the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+ Contact information
+ -------------------
+
+ Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics
+ Web      :  http://www.tkjelectronics.com
+ e-mail   :  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#ifndef _controllerenums_h
+#define _controllerenums_h
+
+/**
+ * This header file is used to store different enums for the controllers,
+ * This is necessary so all the different libraries can be used at once.
+ */
+
+/** Enum used to turn on the LEDs on the different controllers. */
+enum LEDEnum {
+        OFF = 0,
+        LED1 = 1,
+        LED2 = 2,
+        LED3 = 3,
+        LED4 = 4,
+
+        LED5 = 5,
+        LED6 = 6,
+        LED7 = 7,
+        LED8 = 8,
+        LED9 = 9,
+        LED10 = 10,
+        /** Used to blink all LEDs on the Xbox controller */
+        ALL = 5,
+};
+
+/** Used to set the colors of the Move and PS4 controller. */
+enum ColorsEnum {
+        /** r = 255, g = 0, b = 0 */
+        Red = 0xFF0000,
+        /** r = 0, g = 255, b = 0 */
+        Green = 0xFF00,
+        /** r = 0, g = 0, b = 255 */
+        Blue = 0xFF,
+
+        /** r = 255, g = 235, b = 4 */
+        Yellow = 0xFFEB04,
+        /** r = 0, g = 255, b = 255 */
+        Lightblue = 0xFFFF,
+        /** r = 255, g = 0, b = 255 */
+        Purble = 0xFF00FF,
+
+        /** r = 255, g = 255, b = 255 */
+        White = 0xFFFFFF,
+        /** r = 0, g = 0, b = 0 */
+        Off = 0x00,
+};
+
+enum RumbleEnum {
+        RumbleHigh = 0x10,
+        RumbleLow = 0x20,
+};
+
+/** This enum is used to read all the different buttons on the different controllers */
+enum ButtonEnum {
+        /**@{*/
+        /** These buttons are available on all the the controllers */
+        UP = 0,
+        RIGHT = 1,
+        DOWN = 2,
+        LEFT = 3,
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /**@{*/
+        /** Wii buttons */
+        PLUS = 5,
+        TWO = 6,
+        ONE = 7,
+        MINUS = 8,
+        HOME = 9,
+        Z = 10,
+        C = 11,
+        B = 12,
+        A = 13,
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /**@{*/
+        /** These are only available on the Wii U Pro Controller */
+        L = 16,
+        R = 17,
+        ZL = 18,
+        ZR = 19,
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /**@{*/
+        /** PS3 controllers buttons */
+        SELECT = 4,
+        START = 5,
+        L3 = 6,
+        R3 = 7,
+
+        L2 = 8,
+        R2 = 9,
+        L1 = 10,
+        R1 = 11,
+        TRIANGLE = 12,
+        CIRCLE = 13,
+        CROSS = 14,
+        SQUARE = 15,
+
+        PS = 16,
+
+        MOVE = 17, // Covers 12 bits - we only need to read the top 8
+        T = 18, // Covers 12 bits - we only need to read the top 8
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /** PS4 controllers buttons - SHARE and OPTIONS are present instead of SELECT and START */
+        SHARE = 4,
+        OPTIONS = 5,
+        TOUCHPAD = 17,
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /**@{*/
+        /** Xbox buttons */
+        BACK = 4,
+        X = 14,
+        Y = 15,
+        XBOX = 16,
+        SYNC = 17,
+        BLACK = 8, // Available on the original Xbox controller
+        WHITE = 9, // Available on the original Xbox controller
+        /**@}*/
+
+        /** PS Buzz controllers */
+        RED = 0,
+        YELLOW = 1,
+        GREEN = 2,
+        ORANGE = 3,
+        BLUE = 4,
+        /**@}*/
+};
+
+/** Joysticks on the PS3 and Xbox controllers. */
+enum AnalogHatEnum {
+        /** Left joystick x-axis */
+        LeftHatX = 0,
+        /** Left joystick y-axis */
+        LeftHatY = 1,
+        /** Right joystick x-axis */
+        RightHatX = 2,
+        /** Right joystick y-axis */
+        RightHatY = 3,
+};
+
+/**
+ * Sensors inside the Sixaxis Dualshock 3, Move controller and PS4 controller.
+ * <B>Note:</B> that the location is shifted 9 when it's connected via USB on the PS3 controller.
+ */
+enum SensorEnum {
+        /** Accelerometer values */
+        aX = 50, aY = 52, aZ = 54,
+        /** Gyro z-axis */
+        gZ = 56,
+        gX, gY, // These are not available on the PS3 controller
+
+        /** Accelerometer x-axis */
+        aXmove = 28,
+        /** Accelerometer z-axis */
+        aZmove = 30,
+        /** Accelerometer y-axis */
+        aYmove = 32,
+
+        /** Gyro x-axis */
+        gXmove = 40,
+        /** Gyro z-axis */
+        gZmove = 42,
+        /** Gyro y-axis */
+        gYmove = 44,
+
+        /** Temperature sensor */
+        tempMove = 46,
+
+        /** Magnetometer x-axis */
+        mXmove = 47,
+        /** Magnetometer z-axis */
+        mZmove = 49,
+        /** Magnetometer y-axis */
+        mYmove = 50,
+};
+
+/** Used to get the angle calculated using the PS3 controller and PS4 controller. */
+enum AngleEnum {
+        Pitch = 0x01,
+        Roll = 0x02,
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/BTHID/BTHID.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/BTHID/BTHID.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..919a56468
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/BTHID/BTHID.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+/*
+ Example sketch for the HID Bluetooth library - developed by Kristian Lauszus
+ For more information visit my blog: http://blog.tkjelectronics.dk/ or
+ send me an e-mail:  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#include <BTHID.h>
+#include <usbhub.h>
+#include "KeyboardParser.h"
+#include "MouseParser.h"
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+USB Usb;
+//USBHub Hub1(&Usb); // Some dongles have a hub inside
+BTD Btd(&Usb); // You have to create the Bluetooth Dongle instance like so
+
+/* You can create the instance of the class in two ways */
+// This will start an inquiry and then pair with your device - you only have to do this once
+// If you are using a Bluetooth keyboard, then you should type in the password on the keypad and then press enter
+BTHID bthid(&Btd, PAIR, "0000");
+
+// After that you can simply create the instance like so and then press any button on the device
+//BTHID hid(&Btd);
+
+KbdRptParser keyboardPrs;
+MouseRptParser mousePrs;
+
+void setup() {
+  Serial.begin(115200);
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1) {
+    Serial.print(F("\r\nOSC did not start"));
+    while (1); // Halt
+  }
+
+  bthid.SetReportParser(KEYBOARD_PARSER_ID, (HIDReportParser*)&keyboardPrs);
+  bthid.SetReportParser(MOUSE_PARSER_ID, (HIDReportParser*)&mousePrs);
+
+  // If "Boot Protocol Mode" does not work, then try "Report Protocol Mode"
+  // If that does not work either, then uncomment PRINTREPORT in BTHID.cpp to see the raw report
+  bthid.setProtocolMode(HID_BOOT_PROTOCOL); // Boot Protocol Mode
+  //bthid.setProtocolMode(HID_RPT_PROTOCOL); // Report Protocol Mode
+
+  Serial.print(F("\r\nHID Bluetooth Library Started"));
+}
+void loop() {
+  Usb.Task();
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/BTHID/KeyboardParser.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/BTHID/KeyboardParser.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c5394331d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/BTHID/KeyboardParser.h
@@ -0,0 +1,105 @@
+#ifndef __kbdrptparser_h_
+#define __kbdrptparser_h_
+
+class KbdRptParser : public KeyboardReportParser {
+  protected:
+    virtual uint8_t HandleLockingKeys(HID *hid, uint8_t key);
+    virtual void OnControlKeysChanged(uint8_t before, uint8_t after);
+    virtual void OnKeyDown(uint8_t mod, uint8_t key);
+    virtual void OnKeyUp(uint8_t mod, uint8_t key);
+    virtual void OnKeyPressed(uint8_t key);
+
+  private:
+    void PrintKey(uint8_t mod, uint8_t key);
+};
+
+uint8_t KbdRptParser::HandleLockingKeys(HID *hid, uint8_t key) {
+  uint8_t old_keys = kbdLockingKeys.bLeds;
+
+  switch (key) {
+    case UHS_HID_BOOT_KEY_NUM_LOCK:
+      Serial.println(F("Num lock"));
+      kbdLockingKeys.kbdLeds.bmNumLock = ~kbdLockingKeys.kbdLeds.bmNumLock;
+      break;
+    case UHS_HID_BOOT_KEY_CAPS_LOCK:
+      Serial.println(F("Caps lock"));
+      kbdLockingKeys.kbdLeds.bmCapsLock = ~kbdLockingKeys.kbdLeds.bmCapsLock;
+      break;
+    case UHS_HID_BOOT_KEY_SCROLL_LOCK:
+      Serial.println(F("Scroll lock"));
+      kbdLockingKeys.kbdLeds.bmScrollLock = ~kbdLockingKeys.kbdLeds.bmScrollLock;
+      break;
+  }
+
+  if (old_keys != kbdLockingKeys.bLeds && hid) {
+    BTHID *pBTHID = reinterpret_cast<BTHID *> (hid); // A cast the other way around is done in BTHID.cpp
+    pBTHID->setLeds(kbdLockingKeys.bLeds); // Update the LEDs on the keyboard
+  }
+
+  return 0;
+};
+
+void KbdRptParser::PrintKey(uint8_t m, uint8_t key) {
+  MODIFIERKEYS mod;
+  *((uint8_t*)&mod) = m;
+  Serial.print((mod.bmLeftCtrl == 1) ? F("C") : F(" "));
+  Serial.print((mod.bmLeftShift == 1) ? F("S") : F(" "));
+  Serial.print((mod.bmLeftAlt == 1) ? F("A") : F(" "));
+  Serial.print((mod.bmLeftGUI == 1) ? F("G") : F(" "));
+
+  Serial.print(F(" >"));
+  PrintHex<uint8_t>(key, 0x80);
+  Serial.print(F("< "));
+
+  Serial.print((mod.bmRightCtrl == 1) ? F("C") : F(" "));
+  Serial.print((mod.bmRightShift == 1) ? F("S") : F(" "));
+  Serial.print((mod.bmRightAlt == 1) ? F("A") : F(" "));
+  Serial.println((mod.bmRightGUI == 1) ? F("G") : F(" "));
+};
+
+void KbdRptParser::OnKeyDown(uint8_t mod, uint8_t key) {
+  Serial.print(F("DN "));
+  PrintKey(mod, key);
+  uint8_t c = OemToAscii(mod, key);
+
+  if (c)
+    OnKeyPressed(c);
+};
+
+void KbdRptParser::OnControlKeysChanged(uint8_t before, uint8_t after) {
+  MODIFIERKEYS beforeMod;
+  *((uint8_t*)&beforeMod) = before;
+
+  MODIFIERKEYS afterMod;
+  *((uint8_t*)&afterMod) = after;
+
+  if (beforeMod.bmLeftCtrl != afterMod.bmLeftCtrl)
+    Serial.println(F("LeftCtrl changed"));
+  if (beforeMod.bmLeftShift != afterMod.bmLeftShift)
+    Serial.println(F("LeftShift changed"));
+  if (beforeMod.bmLeftAlt != afterMod.bmLeftAlt)
+    Serial.println(F("LeftAlt changed"));
+  if (beforeMod.bmLeftGUI != afterMod.bmLeftGUI)
+    Serial.println(F("LeftGUI changed"));
+
+  if (beforeMod.bmRightCtrl != afterMod.bmRightCtrl)
+    Serial.println(F("RightCtrl changed"));
+  if (beforeMod.bmRightShift != afterMod.bmRightShift)
+    Serial.println(F("RightShift changed"));
+  if (beforeMod.bmRightAlt != afterMod.bmRightAlt)
+    Serial.println(F("RightAlt changed"));
+  if (beforeMod.bmRightGUI != afterMod.bmRightGUI)
+    Serial.println(F("RightGUI changed"));
+};
+
+void KbdRptParser::OnKeyUp(uint8_t mod, uint8_t key) {
+  Serial.print(F("UP "));
+  PrintKey(mod, key);
+};
+
+void KbdRptParser::OnKeyPressed(uint8_t key) {
+  Serial.print(F("ASCII: "));
+  Serial.println((char)key);
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/BTHID/MouseParser.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/BTHID/MouseParser.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a9245ded9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/BTHID/MouseParser.h
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+#ifndef __mouserptparser_h__
+#define __mouserptparser_h__
+
+class MouseRptParser : public MouseReportParser {
+  protected:
+    virtual void OnMouseMove(MOUSEINFO *mi);
+    virtual void OnLeftButtonUp(MOUSEINFO *mi);
+    virtual void OnLeftButtonDown(MOUSEINFO *mi);
+    virtual void OnRightButtonUp(MOUSEINFO *mi);
+    virtual void OnRightButtonDown(MOUSEINFO *mi);
+    virtual void OnMiddleButtonUp(MOUSEINFO *mi);
+    virtual void OnMiddleButtonDown(MOUSEINFO *mi);
+};
+
+void MouseRptParser::OnMouseMove(MOUSEINFO *mi) {
+  Serial.print(F("dx="));
+  Serial.print(mi->dX, DEC);
+  Serial.print(F(" dy="));
+  Serial.println(mi->dY, DEC);
+};
+
+void MouseRptParser::OnLeftButtonUp(MOUSEINFO *mi) {
+  Serial.println(F("L Butt Up"));
+};
+
+void MouseRptParser::OnLeftButtonDown(MOUSEINFO *mi) {
+  Serial.println(F("L Butt Dn"));
+};
+
+void MouseRptParser::OnRightButtonUp(MOUSEINFO *mi) {
+  Serial.println(F("R Butt Up"));
+};
+
+void MouseRptParser::OnRightButtonDown(MOUSEINFO *mi) {
+  Serial.println(F("R Butt Dn"));
+};
+
+void MouseRptParser::OnMiddleButtonUp(MOUSEINFO *mi) {
+  Serial.println(F("M Butt Up"));
+};
+
+void MouseRptParser::OnMiddleButtonDown(MOUSEINFO *mi) {
+  Serial.println(F("M Butt Dn"));
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/PS3BT/PS3BT.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/PS3BT/PS3BT.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b89673440
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/PS3BT/PS3BT.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,188 @@
+/*
+ Example sketch for the PS3 Bluetooth library - developed by Kristian Lauszus
+ For more information visit my blog: http://blog.tkjelectronics.dk/ or
+ send me an e-mail:  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#include <PS3BT.h>
+#include <usbhub.h>
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+USB Usb;
+//USBHub Hub1(&Usb); // Some dongles have a hub inside
+
+BTD Btd(&Usb); // You have to create the Bluetooth Dongle instance like so
+/* You can create the instance of the class in two ways */
+PS3BT PS3(&Btd); // This will just create the instance
+//PS3BT PS3(&Btd, 0x00, 0x15, 0x83, 0x3D, 0x0A, 0x57); // This will also store the bluetooth address - this can be obtained from the dongle when running the sketch
+
+bool printTemperature;
+bool printAngle;
+
+void setup() {
+  Serial.begin(115200);
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1) {
+    Serial.print(F("\r\nOSC did not start"));
+    while (1); //halt
+  }
+  Serial.print(F("\r\nPS3 Bluetooth Library Started"));
+}
+void loop() {
+  Usb.Task();
+
+  if (PS3.PS3Connected || PS3.PS3NavigationConnected) {
+    if (PS3.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX) > 137 || PS3.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX) < 117 || PS3.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY) > 137 || PS3.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY) < 117 || PS3.getAnalogHat(RightHatX) > 137 || PS3.getAnalogHat(RightHatX) < 117 || PS3.getAnalogHat(RightHatY) > 137 || PS3.getAnalogHat(RightHatY) < 117) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nLeftHatX: "));
+      Serial.print(PS3.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX));
+      Serial.print(F("\tLeftHatY: "));
+      Serial.print(PS3.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY));
+      if (PS3.PS3Connected) { // The Navigation controller only have one joystick
+        Serial.print(F("\tRightHatX: "));
+        Serial.print(PS3.getAnalogHat(RightHatX));
+        Serial.print(F("\tRightHatY: "));
+        Serial.print(PS3.getAnalogHat(RightHatY));
+      }
+    }
+
+    // Analog button values can be read from almost all buttons
+    if (PS3.getAnalogButton(L2) || PS3.getAnalogButton(R2)) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nL2: "));
+      Serial.print(PS3.getAnalogButton(L2));
+      if (PS3.PS3Connected) {
+        Serial.print(F("\tR2: "));
+        Serial.print(PS3.getAnalogButton(R2));
+      }
+    }
+    if (PS3.getButtonClick(PS)) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nPS"));
+      PS3.disconnect();
+    }
+    else {
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(TRIANGLE))
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nTraingle"));
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(CIRCLE))
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nCircle"));
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(CROSS))
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nCross"));
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(SQUARE))
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nSquare"));
+
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(UP)) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nUp"));
+        if (PS3.PS3Connected) {
+          PS3.setLedOff();
+          PS3.setLedOn(LED4);
+        }
+      }
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(RIGHT)) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nRight"));
+        if (PS3.PS3Connected) {
+          PS3.setLedOff();
+          PS3.setLedOn(LED1);
+        }
+      }
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(DOWN)) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nDown"));
+        if (PS3.PS3Connected) {
+          PS3.setLedOff();
+          PS3.setLedOn(LED2);
+        }
+      }
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(LEFT)) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nLeft"));
+        if (PS3.PS3Connected) {
+          PS3.setLedOff();
+          PS3.setLedOn(LED3);
+        }
+      }
+
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(L1))
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nL1"));
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(L3))
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nL3"));
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(R1))
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nR1"));
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(R3))
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nR3"));
+
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(SELECT)) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nSelect - "));
+        PS3.printStatusString();
+      }
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(START)) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nStart"));
+        printAngle = !printAngle;
+      }
+    }
+#if 0 // Set this to 1 in order to see the angle of the controller
+    if (printAngle) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nPitch: "));
+      Serial.print(PS3.getAngle(Pitch));
+      Serial.print(F("\tRoll: "));
+      Serial.print(PS3.getAngle(Roll));
+    }
+#endif
+  }
+#if 0 // Set this to 1 in order to enable support for the Playstation Move controller
+  else if (PS3.PS3MoveConnected) {
+    if (PS3.getAnalogButton(T)) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nT: "));
+      Serial.print(PS3.getAnalogButton(T));
+    }
+    if (PS3.getButtonClick(PS)) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nPS"));
+      PS3.disconnect();
+    }
+    else {
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(SELECT)) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nSelect"));
+        printTemperature = !printTemperature;
+      }
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(START)) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nStart"));
+        printAngle = !printAngle;
+      }
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(TRIANGLE)) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nTriangle"));
+        PS3.moveSetBulb(Red);
+      }
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(CIRCLE)) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nCircle"));
+        PS3.moveSetBulb(Green);
+      }
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(SQUARE)) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nSquare"));
+        PS3.moveSetBulb(Blue);
+      }
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(CROSS)) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nCross"));
+        PS3.moveSetBulb(Yellow);
+      }
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(MOVE)) {
+        PS3.moveSetBulb(Off);
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nMove"));
+        Serial.print(F(" - "));
+        PS3.printStatusString();
+      }
+    }
+    if (printAngle) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nPitch: "));
+      Serial.print(PS3.getAngle(Pitch));
+      Serial.print(F("\tRoll: "));
+      Serial.print(PS3.getAngle(Roll));
+    }
+    else if (printTemperature) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nTemperature: "));
+      Serial.print(PS3.getTemperature());
+    }
+  }
+#endif
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/PS3Multi/PS3Multi.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/PS3Multi/PS3Multi.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5ebfd7819
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/PS3Multi/PS3Multi.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,149 @@
+/*
+ Example sketch for the PS3 Bluetooth library - developed by Kristian Lauszus
+ This example show how one can use multiple controllers with the library
+ For more information visit my blog: http://blog.tkjelectronics.dk/ or
+ send me an e-mail:  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#include <PS3BT.h>
+#include <usbhub.h>
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+USB Usb;
+//USBHub Hub1(&Usb); // Some dongles have a hub inside
+
+BTD Btd(&Usb); // You have to create the Bluetooth Dongle instance like so
+PS3BT *PS3[2]; // We will use this pointer to store the two instance, you can easily make it larger if you like, but it will use a lot of RAM!
+const uint8_t length = sizeof(PS3) / sizeof(PS3[0]); // Get the lenght of the array
+bool printAngle[length];
+bool oldControllerState[length];
+
+void setup() {
+  for (uint8_t i = 0; i < length; i++) {
+    PS3[i] = new PS3BT(&Btd); // Create the instances
+    PS3[i]->attachOnInit(onInit); // onInit() is called upon a new connection - you can call the function whatever you like
+  }
+
+  Serial.begin(115200);
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1) {
+    Serial.print(F("\r\nOSC did not start"));
+    while (1); //halt
+  }
+  Serial.print(F("\r\nPS3 Bluetooth Library Started"));
+}
+void loop() {
+  Usb.Task();
+
+  for (uint8_t i = 0; i < length; i++) {
+    if (PS3[i]->PS3Connected || PS3[i]->PS3NavigationConnected) {
+      if (PS3[i]->getAnalogHat(LeftHatX) > 137 || PS3[i]->getAnalogHat(LeftHatX) < 117 || PS3[i]->getAnalogHat(LeftHatY) > 137 || PS3[i]->getAnalogHat(LeftHatY) < 117 || PS3[i]->getAnalogHat(RightHatX) > 137 || PS3[i]->getAnalogHat(RightHatX) < 117 || PS3[i]->getAnalogHat(RightHatY) > 137 || PS3[i]->getAnalogHat(RightHatY) < 117) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nLeftHatX: "));
+        Serial.print(PS3[i]->getAnalogHat(LeftHatX));
+        Serial.print(F("\tLeftHatY: "));
+        Serial.print(PS3[i]->getAnalogHat(LeftHatY));
+        if (PS3[i]->PS3Connected) { // The Navigation controller only have one joystick
+          Serial.print(F("\tRightHatX: "));
+          Serial.print(PS3[i]->getAnalogHat(RightHatX));
+          Serial.print(F("\tRightHatY: "));
+          Serial.print(PS3[i]->getAnalogHat(RightHatY));
+        }
+      }
+      //Analog button values can be read from almost all buttons
+      if (PS3[i]->getAnalogButton(L2) || PS3[i]->getAnalogButton(R2)) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nL2: "));
+        Serial.print(PS3[i]->getAnalogButton(L2));
+        if (PS3[i]->PS3Connected) {
+          Serial.print(F("\tR2: "));
+          Serial.print(PS3[i]->getAnalogButton(R2));
+        }
+      }
+      if (PS3[i]->getButtonClick(PS)) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nPS"));
+        PS3[i]->disconnect();
+        oldControllerState[i] = false; // Reset value
+      }
+      else {
+        if (PS3[i]->getButtonClick(TRIANGLE))
+          Serial.print(F("\r\nTraingle"));
+        if (PS3[i]->getButtonClick(CIRCLE))
+          Serial.print(F("\r\nCircle"));
+        if (PS3[i]->getButtonClick(CROSS))
+          Serial.print(F("\r\nCross"));
+        if (PS3[i]->getButtonClick(SQUARE))
+          Serial.print(F("\r\nSquare"));
+
+        if (PS3[i]->getButtonClick(UP)) {
+          Serial.print(F("\r\nUp"));
+          if (PS3[i]->PS3Connected) {
+            PS3[i]->setLedOff();
+            PS3[i]->setLedOn(LED4);
+          }
+        }
+        if (PS3[i]->getButtonClick(RIGHT)) {
+          Serial.print(F("\r\nRight"));
+          if (PS3[i]->PS3Connected) {
+            PS3[i]->setLedOff();
+            PS3[i]->setLedOn(LED1);
+          }
+        }
+        if (PS3[i]->getButtonClick(DOWN)) {
+          Serial.print(F("\r\nDown"));
+          if (PS3[i]->PS3Connected) {
+            PS3[i]->setLedOff();
+            PS3[i]->setLedOn(LED2);
+          }
+        }
+        if (PS3[i]->getButtonClick(LEFT)) {
+          Serial.print(F("\r\nLeft"));
+          if (PS3[i]->PS3Connected) {
+            PS3[i]->setLedOff();
+            PS3[i]->setLedOn(LED3);
+          }
+        }
+
+        if (PS3[i]->getButtonClick(L1))
+          Serial.print(F("\r\nL1"));
+        if (PS3[i]->getButtonClick(L3))
+          Serial.print(F("\r\nL3"));
+        if (PS3[i]->getButtonClick(R1))
+          Serial.print(F("\r\nR1"));
+        if (PS3[i]->getButtonClick(R3))
+          Serial.print(F("\r\nR3"));
+
+        if (PS3[i]->getButtonClick(SELECT)) {
+          Serial.print(F("\r\nSelect - "));
+          PS3[i]->printStatusString();
+        }
+        if (PS3[i]->getButtonClick(START)) {
+          Serial.print(F("\r\nStart"));
+          printAngle[i] = !printAngle[i];
+        }
+      }
+      if (printAngle[i]) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nPitch: "));
+        Serial.print(PS3[i]->getAngle(Pitch));
+        Serial.print(F("\tRoll: "));
+        Serial.print(PS3[i]->getAngle(Roll));
+      }
+    }
+    /* I have removed the PS3 Move code as an Uno will run out of RAM if it's included */
+    //else if(PS3[i]->PS3MoveConnected) {
+  }
+}
+
+void onInit() {
+  for (uint8_t i = 0; i < length; i++) {
+    if ((PS3[i]->PS3Connected || PS3[i]->PS3NavigationConnected) && !oldControllerState[i]) {
+      oldControllerState[i] = true; // Used to check which is the new controller
+      PS3[i]->setLedOn((LEDEnum)(i + 1)); // Cast directly to LEDEnum - see: "controllerEnums.h"
+    }
+  }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/PS3SPP/PS3SPP.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/PS3SPP/PS3SPP.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8f234cbd8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/PS3SPP/PS3SPP.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,162 @@
+/*
+ Example sketch for the Bluetooth library - developed by Kristian Lauszus
+ For more information visit my blog: http://blog.tkjelectronics.dk/ or
+ send me an e-mail:  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+
+ This example show how one can combine all the difference Bluetooth services in one single code.
+ Note:
+ You will need a Arduino Mega 1280/2560 to run this sketch,
+ as a normal Arduino (Uno, Duemilanove etc.) doesn't have enough SRAM and FLASH
+ */
+
+#include <PS3BT.h>
+#include <SPP.h>
+#include <usbhub.h>
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+USB Usb;
+//USBHub Hub1(&Usb); // Some dongles have a hub inside
+
+BTD Btd(&Usb); // You have to create the Bluetooth Dongle instance like so
+
+/* You can create the instances of the bluetooth services in two ways */
+SPP SerialBT(&Btd); // This will set the name to the defaults: "Arduino" and the pin to "0000"
+//SPP SerialBTBT(&Btd,"Lauszus's Arduino","0000"); // You can also set the name and pin like so
+PS3BT PS3(&Btd); // This will just create the instance
+//PS3BT PS3(&Btd, 0x00, 0x15, 0x83, 0x3D, 0x0A, 0x57); // This will also store the bluetooth address - this can be obtained from the dongle when running the sketch
+
+bool firstMessage = true;
+String output = ""; // We will store the data in this string
+
+void setup() {
+  Serial.begin(115200); // This wil lprint the debugging from the libraries
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1) {
+    Serial.print(F("\r\nOSC did not start"));
+    while (1); //halt
+  }
+  Serial.print(F("\r\nBluetooth Library Started"));
+  output.reserve(200); // Reserve 200 bytes for the output string
+}
+void loop() {
+  Usb.Task(); // The SPP data is actually not send until this is called, one could call SerialBT.send() directly as well
+
+  if (SerialBT.connected) {
+    if (firstMessage) {
+      firstMessage = false;
+      SerialBT.println(F("Hello from Arduino")); // Send welcome message
+    }
+    if (Serial.available())
+      SerialBT.write(Serial.read());
+    if (SerialBT.available())
+      Serial.write(SerialBT.read());
+  }
+  else
+    firstMessage = true;
+
+  if (PS3.PS3Connected || PS3.PS3NavigationConnected) {
+    output = ""; // Reset output string
+    if (PS3.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX) > 137 || PS3.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX) < 117 || PS3.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY) > 137 || PS3.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY) < 117 || PS3.getAnalogHat(RightHatX) > 137 || PS3.getAnalogHat(RightHatX) < 117 || PS3.getAnalogHat(RightHatY) > 137 || PS3.getAnalogHat(RightHatY) < 117) {
+      output += "LeftHatX: ";
+      output += PS3.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX);
+      output += "\tLeftHatY: ";
+      output += PS3.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY);
+      if (PS3.PS3Connected) { // The Navigation controller only have one joystick
+        output += "\tRightHatX: ";
+        output += PS3.getAnalogHat(RightHatX);
+        output += "\tRightHatY: ";
+        output += PS3.getAnalogHat(RightHatY);
+      }
+    }
+    //Analog button values can be read from almost all buttons
+    if (PS3.getAnalogButton(L2) || PS3.getAnalogButton(R2)) {
+      if (output != "")
+        output += "\r\n";
+      output += "L2: ";
+      output += PS3.getAnalogButton(L2);
+      if (PS3.PS3Connected) {
+        output += "\tR2: ";
+        output += PS3.getAnalogButton(R2);
+      }
+    }
+    if (output != "") {
+      Serial.println(output);
+      if (SerialBT.connected)
+        SerialBT.println(output);
+      output = ""; // Reset output string
+    }
+    if (PS3.getButtonClick(PS)) {
+      output += " - PS";
+      PS3.disconnect();
+    }
+    else {
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(TRIANGLE))
+        output += " - Traingle";
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(CIRCLE))
+        output += " - Circle";
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(CROSS))
+        output += " - Cross";
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(SQUARE))
+        output += " - Square";
+
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(UP)) {
+        output += " - Up";
+        if (PS3.PS3Connected) {
+          PS3.setLedOff();
+          PS3.setLedOn(LED4);
+        }
+      }
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(RIGHT)) {
+        output += " - Right";
+        if (PS3.PS3Connected) {
+          PS3.setLedOff();
+          PS3.setLedOn(LED1);
+        }
+      }
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(DOWN)) {
+        output += " - Down";
+        if (PS3.PS3Connected) {
+          PS3.setLedOff();
+          PS3.setLedOn(LED2);
+        }
+      }
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(LEFT)) {
+        output += " - Left";
+        if (PS3.PS3Connected) {
+          PS3.setLedOff();
+          PS3.setLedOn(LED3);
+        }
+      }
+
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(L1))
+        output += " - L1";
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(L3))
+        output += " - L3";
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(R1))
+        output += " - R1";
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(R3))
+        output += " - R3";
+
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(SELECT)) {
+        output += " - Select";
+      }
+      if (PS3.getButtonClick(START))
+        output += " - Start";
+
+      if (output != "") {
+        String string = "PS3 Controller" + output;
+        Serial.println(string);
+        if (SerialBT.connected)
+          SerialBT.println(string);
+      }
+    }
+    delay(10);
+  }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/PS4BT/PS4BT.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/PS4BT/PS4BT.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c3ba696bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/PS4BT/PS4BT.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,146 @@
+/*
+ Example sketch for the PS4 Bluetooth library - developed by Kristian Lauszus
+ For more information visit my blog: http://blog.tkjelectronics.dk/ or
+ send me an e-mail:  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#include <PS4BT.h>
+#include <usbhub.h>
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+USB Usb;
+//USBHub Hub1(&Usb); // Some dongles have a hub inside
+BTD Btd(&Usb); // You have to create the Bluetooth Dongle instance like so
+
+/* You can create the instance of the PS4BT class in two ways */
+// This will start an inquiry and then pair with the PS4 controller - you only have to do this once
+// You will need to hold down the PS and Share button at the same time, the PS4 controller will then start to blink rapidly indicating that it is in paring mode
+PS4BT PS4(&Btd, PAIR);
+
+// After that you can simply create the instance like so and then press the PS button on the device
+//PS4BT PS4(&Btd);
+
+bool printAngle, printTouch;
+uint8_t oldL2Value, oldR2Value;
+
+void setup() {
+  Serial.begin(115200);
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1) {
+    Serial.print(F("\r\nOSC did not start"));
+    while (1); // Halt
+  }
+  Serial.print(F("\r\nPS4 Bluetooth Library Started"));
+}
+void loop() {
+  Usb.Task();
+
+  if (PS4.connected()) {
+    if (PS4.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX) > 137 || PS4.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX) < 117 || PS4.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY) > 137 || PS4.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY) < 117 || PS4.getAnalogHat(RightHatX) > 137 || PS4.getAnalogHat(RightHatX) < 117 || PS4.getAnalogHat(RightHatY) > 137 || PS4.getAnalogHat(RightHatY) < 117) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nLeftHatX: "));
+      Serial.print(PS4.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX));
+      Serial.print(F("\tLeftHatY: "));
+      Serial.print(PS4.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY));
+      Serial.print(F("\tRightHatX: "));
+      Serial.print(PS4.getAnalogHat(RightHatX));
+      Serial.print(F("\tRightHatY: "));
+      Serial.print(PS4.getAnalogHat(RightHatY));
+    }
+
+    if (PS4.getAnalogButton(L2) || PS4.getAnalogButton(R2)) { // These are the only analog buttons on the PS4 controller
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nL2: "));
+      Serial.print(PS4.getAnalogButton(L2));
+      Serial.print(F("\tR2: "));
+      Serial.print(PS4.getAnalogButton(R2));
+    }
+    if (PS4.getAnalogButton(L2) != oldL2Value || PS4.getAnalogButton(R2) != oldR2Value) // Only write value if it's different
+      PS4.setRumbleOn(PS4.getAnalogButton(L2), PS4.getAnalogButton(R2));
+    oldL2Value = PS4.getAnalogButton(L2);
+    oldR2Value = PS4.getAnalogButton(R2);
+
+    if (PS4.getButtonClick(PS)) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nPS"));
+      PS4.disconnect();
+    }
+    else {
+      if (PS4.getButtonClick(TRIANGLE)) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nTraingle"));
+        PS4.setRumbleOn(RumbleLow);
+      }
+      if (PS4.getButtonClick(CIRCLE)) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nCircle"));
+        PS4.setRumbleOn(RumbleHigh);
+      }
+      if (PS4.getButtonClick(CROSS)) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nCross"));
+        PS4.setLedFlash(10, 10); // Set it to blink rapidly
+      }
+      if (PS4.getButtonClick(SQUARE)) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nSquare"));
+        PS4.setLedFlash(0, 0); // Turn off blinking
+      }
+
+      if (PS4.getButtonClick(UP)) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nUp"));
+        PS4.setLed(Red);
+      } if (PS4.getButtonClick(RIGHT)) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nRight"));
+        PS4.setLed(Blue);
+      } if (PS4.getButtonClick(DOWN)) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nDown"));
+        PS4.setLed(Yellow);
+      } if (PS4.getButtonClick(LEFT)) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nLeft"));
+        PS4.setLed(Green);
+      }
+
+      if (PS4.getButtonClick(L1))
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nL1"));
+      if (PS4.getButtonClick(L3))
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nL3"));
+      if (PS4.getButtonClick(R1))
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nR1"));
+      if (PS4.getButtonClick(R3))
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nR3"));
+
+      if (PS4.getButtonClick(SHARE))
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nShare"));
+      if (PS4.getButtonClick(OPTIONS)) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nOptions"));
+        printAngle = !printAngle;
+      }
+      if (PS4.getButtonClick(TOUCHPAD)) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nTouchpad"));
+        printTouch = !printTouch;
+      }
+
+      if (printAngle) { // Print angle calculated using the accelerometer only
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nPitch: "));
+        Serial.print(PS4.getAngle(Pitch));
+        Serial.print(F("\tRoll: "));
+        Serial.print(PS4.getAngle(Roll));
+      }
+
+      if (printTouch) { // Print the x, y coordinates of the touchpad
+        if (PS4.isTouching(0) || PS4.isTouching(1)) // Print newline and carriage return if any of the fingers are touching the touchpad
+          Serial.print(F("\r\n"));
+        for (uint8_t i = 0; i < 2; i++) { // The touchpad track two fingers
+          if (PS4.isTouching(i)) { // Print the position of the finger if it is touching the touchpad
+            Serial.print(F("X")); Serial.print(i + 1); Serial.print(F(": "));
+            Serial.print(PS4.getX(i));
+            Serial.print(F("\tY")); Serial.print(i + 1); Serial.print(F(": "));
+            Serial.print(PS4.getY(i));
+            Serial.print(F("\t"));
+          }
+        }
+      }
+    }
+  }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/SPP/SPP.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/SPP/SPP.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8fb9c4eca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/SPP/SPP.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+/*
+ Example sketch for the RFCOMM/SPP Bluetooth library - developed by Kristian Lauszus
+ For more information visit my blog: http://blog.tkjelectronics.dk/ or
+ send me an e-mail:  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#include <SPP.h>
+#include <usbhub.h>
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+USB Usb;
+//USBHub Hub1(&Usb); // Some dongles have a hub inside
+
+BTD Btd(&Usb); // You have to create the Bluetooth Dongle instance like so
+/* You can create the instance of the class in two ways */
+SPP SerialBT(&Btd); // This will set the name to the defaults: "Arduino" and the pin to "0000"
+//SPP SerialBT(&Btd, "Lauszus's Arduino", "1234"); // You can also set the name and pin like so
+
+bool firstMessage = true;
+
+void setup() {
+  Serial.begin(115200);
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1) {
+    Serial.print(F("\r\nOSC did not start"));
+    while (1); //halt
+  }
+  Serial.print(F("\r\nSPP Bluetooth Library Started"));
+}
+void loop() {
+  Usb.Task(); // The SPP data is actually not send until this is called, one could call SerialBT.send() directly as well
+
+  if (SerialBT.connected) {
+    if (firstMessage) {
+      firstMessage = false;
+      SerialBT.println(F("Hello from Arduino")); // Send welcome message
+    }
+    if (Serial.available())
+      SerialBT.write(Serial.read());
+    if (SerialBT.available())
+      Serial.write(SerialBT.read());
+  }
+  else
+    firstMessage = true;
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/SPPMulti/SPPMulti.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/SPPMulti/SPPMulti.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..df521d8e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/SPPMulti/SPPMulti.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+/*
+ Example sketch for the RFCOMM/SPP Bluetooth library - developed by Kristian Lauszus
+ For more information visit my blog: http://blog.tkjelectronics.dk/ or
+ send me an e-mail:  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#include <SPP.h>
+#include <usbhub.h>
+
+// Satisfy IDE, which only needs to see the include statment in the ino.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+USB Usb;
+//USBHub Hub1(&Usb); // Some dongles have a hub inside
+
+BTD Btd(&Usb); // You have to create the Bluetooth Dongle instance like so
+
+const uint8_t length = 2; // Set the number of instances here
+SPP *SerialBT[length]; // We will use this pointer to store the instances, you can easily make it larger if you like, but it will use a lot of RAM!
+
+bool firstMessage[length] = { true }; // Set all to true
+
+void setup() {
+  for (uint8_t i = 0; i < length; i++)
+    SerialBT[i] = new SPP(&Btd); // This will set the name to the default: "Arduino" and the pin to "0000" for all connections
+
+  Serial.begin(115200);
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1) {
+    Serial.print(F("\r\nOSC did not start"));
+    while (1); // Halt
+  }
+  Serial.print(F("\r\nSPP Bluetooth Library Started"));
+}
+
+void loop() {
+  Usb.Task(); // The SPP data is actually not send until this is called, one could call SerialBT.send() directly as well
+
+  for (uint8_t i = 0; i < length; i++) {
+    if (SerialBT[i]->connected) {
+      if (firstMessage[i]) {
+        firstMessage[i] = false;
+        SerialBT[i]->println(F("Hello from Arduino")); // Send welcome message
+      }
+      if (SerialBT[i]->available())
+        Serial.write(SerialBT[i]->read());
+    }
+    else
+      firstMessage[i] = true;
+  }
+
+  // Set the connection you want to send to using the first character
+  // For instance "0Hello World" would send "Hello World" to connection 0
+  if (Serial.available()) {
+    delay(10); // Wait for the rest of the data to arrive
+    uint8_t id = Serial.read() - '0'; // Convert from ASCII
+    if (id < length && SerialBT[id]->connected) { // Make sure that the id is valid and make sure that a device is actually connected
+      while (Serial.available()) // Check if data is available
+        SerialBT[id]->write(Serial.read()); // Send the data
+    }
+  }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/Wii/Wii.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/Wii/Wii.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b19356816
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/Wii/Wii.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
+/*
+ Example sketch for the Wiimote Bluetooth library - developed by Kristian Lauszus
+ For more information visit my blog: http://blog.tkjelectronics.dk/ or
+ send me an e-mail:  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#include <Wii.h>
+#include <usbhub.h>
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+USB Usb;
+//USBHub Hub1(&Usb); // Some dongles have a hub inside
+
+BTD Btd(&Usb); // You have to create the Bluetooth Dongle instance like so
+/* You can create the instance of the class in two ways */
+WII Wii(&Btd, PAIR); // This will start an inquiry and then pair with your Wiimote - you only have to do this once
+//WII Wii(&Btd); // After that you can simply create the instance like so and then press any button on the Wiimote
+
+bool printAngle;
+
+void setup() {
+  Serial.begin(115200);
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1) {
+    Serial.print(F("\r\nOSC did not start"));
+    while (1); //halt
+  }
+  Serial.print(F("\r\nWiimote Bluetooth Library Started"));
+}
+void loop() {
+  Usb.Task();
+  if (Wii.wiimoteConnected) {
+    if (Wii.getButtonClick(HOME)) { // You can use getButtonPress to see if the button is held down
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nHOME"));
+      Wii.disconnect();
+    }
+    else {
+      if (Wii.getButtonClick(LEFT)) {
+        Wii.setLedOff();
+        Wii.setLedOn(LED1);
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nLeft"));
+      }
+      if (Wii.getButtonClick(RIGHT)) {
+        Wii.setLedOff();
+        Wii.setLedOn(LED3);
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nRight"));
+      }
+      if (Wii.getButtonClick(DOWN)) {
+        Wii.setLedOff();
+        Wii.setLedOn(LED4);
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nDown"));
+      }
+      if (Wii.getButtonClick(UP)) {
+        Wii.setLedOff();
+        Wii.setLedOn(LED2);
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nUp"));
+      }
+
+      if (Wii.getButtonClick(PLUS))
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nPlus"));
+      if (Wii.getButtonClick(MINUS))
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nMinus"));
+
+      if (Wii.getButtonClick(ONE))
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nOne"));
+      if (Wii.getButtonClick(TWO))
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nTwo"));
+
+      if (Wii.getButtonClick(A)) {
+        printAngle = !printAngle;
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nA"));
+      }
+      if (Wii.getButtonClick(B)) {
+        Wii.setRumbleToggle();
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nB"));
+      }
+    }
+#if 0 // Set this to 1 in order to see the angle of the controllers
+    if (printAngle) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nPitch: "));
+      Serial.print(Wii.getPitch());
+      Serial.print(F("\tRoll: "));
+      Serial.print(Wii.getRoll());
+      if (Wii.motionPlusConnected) {
+        Serial.print(F("\tYaw: "));
+        Serial.print(Wii.getYaw());
+      }
+      if (Wii.nunchuckConnected) {
+        Serial.print(F("\tNunchuck Pitch: "));
+        Serial.print(Wii.getNunchuckPitch());
+        Serial.print(F("\tNunchuck Roll: "));
+        Serial.print(Wii.getNunchuckRoll());
+      }
+    }
+#endif
+  }
+#if 0 // Set this to 1 if you are using a Nunchuck controller
+  if (Wii.nunchuckConnected) {
+    if (Wii.getButtonClick(Z))
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nZ"));
+    if (Wii.getButtonClick(C))
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nC"));
+    if (Wii.getAnalogHat(HatX) > 137 ||  Wii.getAnalogHat(HatX) < 117 || Wii.getAnalogHat(HatY) > 137 || Wii.getAnalogHat(HatY) < 117) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nHatX: "));
+      Serial.print(Wii.getAnalogHat(HatX));
+      Serial.print(F("\tHatY: "));
+      Serial.print(Wii.getAnalogHat(HatY));
+    }
+  }
+#endif
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/WiiBalanceBoard/WiiBalanceBoard.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/WiiBalanceBoard/WiiBalanceBoard.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..18c5b411e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/WiiBalanceBoard/WiiBalanceBoard.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+/*
+ Example sketch for the Wii Balance Board Bluetooth library - developed by Kristian Lauszus
+ For more information visit my blog: http://blog.tkjelectronics.dk/ or
+ send me an e-mail:  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#include <Wii.h>
+#include <usbhub.h>
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+USB Usb;
+//USBHub Hub1(&Usb); // Some dongles have a hub inside
+
+BTD Btd(&Usb); // You have to create the Bluetooth Dongle instance like so
+/* You can create the instance of the class in two ways */
+WII Wii(&Btd, PAIR); // This will start an inquiry and then pair with your Wii Balance Board - you only have to do this once
+//WII Wii(&Btd); // After that you can simply create the instance like so and then press the power button on the Wii Balance Board
+
+void setup() {
+  Serial.begin(115200);
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1) {
+    Serial.print(F("\r\nOSC did not start"));
+    while (1); //halt
+  }
+  Serial.print(F("\r\nWii Balance Board Bluetooth Library Started"));
+}
+void loop() {
+  Usb.Task();
+  if (Wii.wiiBalanceBoardConnected) {
+    Serial.print(F("\r\nWeight: "));
+    for (uint8_t i = 0; i < 4; i++) {
+      Serial.print(Wii.getWeight((BalanceBoardEnum)i));
+      Serial.print(F("\t"));
+    }
+    Serial.print(F("Total Weight: "));
+    Serial.print(Wii.getTotalWeight());
+    if (Wii.getButtonClick(A)) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nA"));
+      //Wii.setLedToggle(LED1); // The Wii Balance Board has one LED as well
+      Wii.disconnect();
+    }
+  }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/WiiIRCamera/WiiIRCamera.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/WiiIRCamera/WiiIRCamera.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..573b8bd48
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/WiiIRCamera/WiiIRCamera.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,133 @@
+/*
+Example sketch for the Wii libary showing the IR camera functionality. This example
+is for the Bluetooth Wii library developed for the USB shield from Circuits@Home
+
+Created by Allan Glover and Kristian Lauszus.
+Contact Kristian:  http://blog.tkjelectronics.dk/ or send an email at kristianl@tkjelectronics.com.
+Contact Allan at adglover9.81@gmail.com
+
+To test the Wiimote IR camera, you will need access to an IR source. Sunlight will work but is not ideal.
+The simpleist solution is to use the Wii sensor bar, i.e. emitter bar, supplied by the Wii system.
+Otherwise, wire up a IR LED yourself.
+*/
+
+#include <Wii.h>
+#include <usbhub.h>
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+#ifndef WIICAMERA // Used to check if WIICAMERA is defined
+#error "Please set ENABLE_WII_IR_CAMERA to 1 in settings.h"
+#endif
+
+USB Usb;
+//USBHub Hub1(&Usb); // Some dongles have a hub inside
+
+BTD Btd(&Usb); // You have to create the Bluetooth Dongle instance like so
+/* You can create the instance of the class in two ways */
+WII Wii(&Btd, PAIR); // This will start an inquiry and then pair with your Wiimote - you only have to do this once
+//WII Wii(&Btd); // After the Wiimote pairs once with the line of code above, you can simply create the instance like so and re upload and then press any button on the Wiimote
+
+bool printAngle;
+uint8_t printObjects;
+
+void setup() {
+  Serial.begin(115200);
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1) {
+    Serial.print(F("\r\nOSC did not start"));
+    while (1); //halt
+  }
+  Serial.print(F("\r\nWiimote Bluetooth Library Started"));
+}
+
+void loop() {
+  Usb.Task();
+  if (Wii.wiimoteConnected) {
+    if (Wii.getButtonClick(HOME)) { // You can use getButtonPress to see if the button is held down
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nHOME"));
+      Wii.disconnect();
+    }
+    else {
+      if (Wii.getButtonClick(ONE))
+        Wii.IRinitialize(); // Run the initialisation sequence
+      if (Wii.getButtonClick(MINUS) || Wii.getButtonClick(PLUS)) {
+        if (!Wii.isIRCameraEnabled())
+          Serial.print(F("\r\nEnable IR camera first"));
+        else {
+          if (Wii.getButtonPress(MINUS)) { // getButtonClick will only return true once
+            if (printObjects > 0)
+              printObjects--;
+          }
+          else {
+            if (printObjects < 4)
+              printObjects++;
+          }
+          Serial.print(F("\r\nTracking "));
+          Serial.print(printObjects);
+          Serial.print(F(" objects"));
+        }
+      }
+      if (Wii.getButtonClick(A)) {
+        printAngle = !printAngle;
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nA"));
+      }
+      if (Wii.getButtonClick(B)) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nBattery level: "));
+        Serial.print(Wii.getBatteryLevel()); // You can get the battery level as well
+      }
+    }
+    if (printObjects > 0) {
+      if (Wii.getIRx1() != 0x3FF || Wii.getIRy1() != 0x3FF || Wii.getIRs1() != 0) { // Only print if the IR camera is actually seeing something
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nx1: "));
+        Serial.print(Wii.getIRx1());
+        Serial.print(F("\ty1: "));
+        Serial.print(Wii.getIRy1());
+        Serial.print(F("\ts1:"));
+        Serial.print(Wii.getIRs1());
+      }
+      if (printObjects > 1) {
+        if (Wii.getIRx2() != 0x3FF || Wii.getIRy2() != 0x3FF || Wii.getIRs2() != 0) {
+          Serial.print(F("\r\nx2: "));
+          Serial.print(Wii.getIRx2());
+          Serial.print(F("\ty2: "));
+          Serial.print(Wii.getIRy2());
+          Serial.print(F("\ts2:"));
+          Serial.print(Wii.getIRs2());
+        }
+        if (printObjects > 2) {
+          if (Wii.getIRx3() != 0x3FF || Wii.getIRy3() != 0x3FF || Wii.getIRs3() != 0) {
+            Serial.print(F("\r\nx3: "));
+            Serial.print(Wii.getIRx3());
+            Serial.print(F("\ty3: "));
+            Serial.print(Wii.getIRy3());
+            Serial.print(F("\ts3:"));
+            Serial.print(Wii.getIRs3());
+          }
+          if (printObjects > 3) {
+            if (Wii.getIRx4() != 0x3FF || Wii.getIRy4() != 0x3FF || Wii.getIRs4() != 0) {
+              Serial.print(F("\r\nx4: "));
+              Serial.print(Wii.getIRx4());
+              Serial.print(F("\ty4: "));
+              Serial.print(Wii.getIRy4());
+              Serial.print(F("\ts4:"));
+              Serial.print(Wii.getIRs4());
+            }
+          }
+        }
+      }
+    }
+    if (printAngle) { // There is no extension bytes available, so the MotionPlus or Nunchuck can't be read
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nPitch: "));
+      Serial.print(Wii.getPitch());
+      Serial.print(F("\tRoll: "));
+      Serial.print(Wii.getRoll());
+    }
+  }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/WiiMulti/WiiMulti.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/WiiMulti/WiiMulti.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..07c6f13d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/WiiMulti/WiiMulti.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+/*
+ Example sketch for the Wiimote Bluetooth library - developed by Kristian Lauszus
+ This example show how one can use multiple controllers with the library
+ For more information visit my blog: http://blog.tkjelectronics.dk/ or
+ send me an e-mail:  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#include <Wii.h>
+#include <usbhub.h>
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+USB Usb;
+//USBHub Hub1(&Usb); // Some dongles have a hub inside
+
+BTD Btd(&Usb); // You have to create the Bluetooth Dongle instance like so
+WII *Wii[2]; // We will use this pointer to store the two instance, you can easily make it larger if you like, but it will use a lot of RAM!
+const uint8_t length = sizeof(Wii) / sizeof(Wii[0]); // Get the lenght of the array
+bool printAngle[length];
+bool oldControllerState[length];
+
+void setup() {
+  for (uint8_t i = 0; i < length; i++) {
+    Wii[i] = new WII(&Btd); // You will have to pair each controller with the dongle before you can define the instances like so, just add PAIR as the second argument
+    Wii[i]->attachOnInit(onInit); // onInit() is called upon a new connection - you can call the function whatever you like
+  }
+
+  Serial.begin(115200);
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1) {
+    Serial.print(F("\r\nOSC did not start"));
+    while (1); //halt
+  }
+  Serial.print(F("\r\nWiimote Bluetooth Library Started"));
+}
+void loop() {
+  Usb.Task();
+
+  for (uint8_t i = 0; i < length; i++) {
+    if (Wii[i]->wiimoteConnected) {
+      if (Wii[i]->getButtonClick(HOME)) { // You can use getButtonPress to see if the button is held down
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nHOME"));
+        Wii[i]->disconnect();
+        oldControllerState[i] = false; // Reset value
+      }
+      else {
+        if (Wii[i]->getButtonClick(LEFT)) {
+          Wii[i]->setLedOff();
+          Wii[i]->setLedOn(LED1);
+          Serial.print(F("\r\nLeft"));
+        }
+        if (Wii[i]->getButtonClick(RIGHT)) {
+          Wii[i]->setLedOff();
+          Wii[i]->setLedOn(LED3);
+          Serial.print(F("\r\nRight"));
+        }
+        if (Wii[i]->getButtonClick(DOWN)) {
+          Wii[i]->setLedOff();
+          Wii[i]->setLedOn(LED4);
+          Serial.print(F("\r\nDown"));
+        }
+        if (Wii[i]->getButtonClick(UP)) {
+          Wii[i]->setLedOff();
+          Wii[i]->setLedOn(LED2);
+          Serial.print(F("\r\nUp"));
+        }
+
+        if (Wii[i]->getButtonClick(PLUS))
+          Serial.print(F("\r\nPlus"));
+        if (Wii[i]->getButtonClick(MINUS))
+          Serial.print(F("\r\nMinus"));
+
+        if (Wii[i]->getButtonClick(ONE))
+          Serial.print(F("\r\nOne"));
+        if (Wii[i]->getButtonClick(TWO))
+          Serial.print(F("\r\nTwo"));
+
+        if (Wii[i]->getButtonClick(A)) {
+          printAngle[i] = !printAngle[i];
+          Serial.print(F("\r\nA"));
+        }
+        if (Wii[i]->getButtonClick(B)) {
+          Wii[i]->setRumbleToggle();
+          Serial.print(F("\r\nB"));
+        }
+      }
+      if (printAngle[i]) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nPitch: "));
+        Serial.print(Wii[i]->getPitch());
+        Serial.print(F("\tRoll: "));
+        Serial.print(Wii[i]->getRoll());
+        if (Wii[i]->motionPlusConnected) {
+          Serial.print(F("\tYaw: "));
+          Serial.print(Wii[i]->getYaw());
+        }
+        if (Wii[i]->nunchuckConnected) {
+          Serial.print(F("\tNunchuck Pitch: "));
+          Serial.print(Wii[i]->getNunchuckPitch());
+          Serial.print(F("\tNunchuck Roll: "));
+          Serial.print(Wii[i]->getNunchuckRoll());
+        }
+      }
+    }
+    if (Wii[i]->nunchuckConnected) {
+      if (Wii[i]->getButtonClick(Z))
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nZ"));
+      if (Wii[i]->getButtonClick(C))
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nC"));
+      if (Wii[i]->getAnalogHat(HatX) > 137 ||  Wii[i]->getAnalogHat(HatX) < 117 || Wii[i]->getAnalogHat(HatY) > 137 || Wii[i]->getAnalogHat(HatY) < 117) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nHatX: "));
+        Serial.print(Wii[i]->getAnalogHat(HatX));
+        Serial.print(F("\tHatY: "));
+        Serial.print(Wii[i]->getAnalogHat(HatY));
+      }
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+void onInit() {
+  for (uint8_t i = 0; i < length; i++) {
+    if (Wii[i]->wiimoteConnected && !oldControllerState[i]) {
+      oldControllerState[i] = true; // Used to check which is the new controller
+      Wii[i]->setLedOn((LEDEnum)(i + 1)); // Cast directly to LEDEnum - see: "controllerEnums.h"
+    }
+  }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/WiiUProController/WiiUProController.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/WiiUProController/WiiUProController.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ab35a2747
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Bluetooth/WiiUProController/WiiUProController.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+/*
+ Example sketch for the Wiimote Bluetooth library - developed by Kristian Lauszus
+ For more information visit my blog: http://blog.tkjelectronics.dk/ or
+ send me an e-mail:  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#include <Wii.h>
+#include <usbhub.h>
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+USB Usb;
+//USBHub Hub1(&Usb); // Some dongles have a hub inside
+
+BTD Btd(&Usb); // You have to create the Bluetooth Dongle instance like so
+/* You can create the instance of the class in two ways */
+WII Wii(&Btd, PAIR); // This will start an inquiry and then pair with your Wiimote - you only have to do this once
+//WII Wii(&Btd); // After that you can simply create the instance like so and then press any button on the Wiimote
+
+void setup() {
+  Serial.begin(115200);
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1) {
+    Serial.print(F("\r\nOSC did not start"));
+    while (1); //halt
+  }
+  Serial.print(F("\r\nWiimote Bluetooth Library Started"));
+}
+void loop() {
+  Usb.Task();
+  if (Wii.wiiUProControllerConnected) {
+    if (Wii.getButtonClick(HOME)) { // You can use getButtonPress to see if the button is held down
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nHome"));
+      Wii.disconnect();
+    }
+    else {
+      if (Wii.getButtonClick(LEFT)) {
+        Wii.setLedOff();
+        Wii.setLedOn(LED1);
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nLeft"));
+      }
+      if (Wii.getButtonClick(RIGHT)) {
+        Wii.setLedOff();
+        Wii.setLedOn(LED3);
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nRight"));
+      }
+      if (Wii.getButtonClick(DOWN)) {
+        Wii.setLedOff();
+        Wii.setLedOn(LED4);
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nDown"));
+      }
+      if (Wii.getButtonClick(UP)) {
+        Wii.setLedOff();
+        Wii.setLedOn(LED2);
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nUp"));
+      }
+
+      if (Wii.getButtonClick(PLUS))
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nPlus"));
+      if (Wii.getButtonClick(MINUS))
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nMinus"));
+
+      if (Wii.getButtonClick(A))
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nA"));
+      if (Wii.getButtonClick(B)) {
+        Wii.setRumbleToggle();
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nB"));
+      }
+      if (Wii.getButtonClick(X))
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nX"));
+      if (Wii.getButtonClick(Y))
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nY"));
+
+      if (Wii.getButtonClick(L))
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nL"));
+      if (Wii.getButtonClick(R))
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nR"));
+      if (Wii.getButtonClick(ZL))
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nZL"));
+      if (Wii.getButtonClick(ZR))
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nZR"));
+      if (Wii.getButtonClick(L3))
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nL3"));
+      if (Wii.getButtonClick(R3))
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nR3"));
+    }
+    if (Wii.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX) > 2200 || Wii.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX) < 1800 || Wii.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY) > 2200 || Wii.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY) < 1800 || Wii.getAnalogHat(RightHatX) > 2200 ||  Wii.getAnalogHat(RightHatX) < 1800 || Wii.getAnalogHat(RightHatY) > 2200 || Wii.getAnalogHat(RightHatY) < 1800) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nLeftHatX: "));
+      Serial.print(Wii.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX));
+      Serial.print(F("\tLeftHatY: "));
+      Serial.print(Wii.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY));
+      Serial.print(F("\tRightHatX: "));
+      Serial.print(Wii.getAnalogHat(RightHatX));
+      Serial.print(F("\tRightHatY: "));
+      Serial.print(Wii.getAnalogHat(RightHatY));
+    }
+  }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/USBHIDBootKbd/USBHIDBootKbd.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/USBHIDBootKbd/USBHIDBootKbd.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..48b33abfd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/USBHIDBootKbd/USBHIDBootKbd.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+#include <hidboot.h>
+#include <usbhub.h>
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+class KbdRptParser : public KeyboardReportParser
+{
+    void PrintKey(uint8_t mod, uint8_t key);
+
+  protected:
+    void OnControlKeysChanged(uint8_t before, uint8_t after);
+
+    void OnKeyDown	(uint8_t mod, uint8_t key);
+    void OnKeyUp	(uint8_t mod, uint8_t key);
+    void OnKeyPressed(uint8_t key);
+};
+
+void KbdRptParser::PrintKey(uint8_t m, uint8_t key)
+{
+  MODIFIERKEYS mod;
+  *((uint8_t*)&mod) = m;
+  Serial.print((mod.bmLeftCtrl   == 1) ? "C" : " ");
+  Serial.print((mod.bmLeftShift  == 1) ? "S" : " ");
+  Serial.print((mod.bmLeftAlt    == 1) ? "A" : " ");
+  Serial.print((mod.bmLeftGUI    == 1) ? "G" : " ");
+
+  Serial.print(" >");
+  PrintHex<uint8_t>(key, 0x80);
+  Serial.print("< ");
+
+  Serial.print((mod.bmRightCtrl   == 1) ? "C" : " ");
+  Serial.print((mod.bmRightShift  == 1) ? "S" : " ");
+  Serial.print((mod.bmRightAlt    == 1) ? "A" : " ");
+  Serial.println((mod.bmRightGUI    == 1) ? "G" : " ");
+};
+
+void KbdRptParser::OnKeyDown(uint8_t mod, uint8_t key)
+{
+  Serial.print("DN ");
+  PrintKey(mod, key);
+  uint8_t c = OemToAscii(mod, key);
+
+  if (c)
+    OnKeyPressed(c);
+}
+
+void KbdRptParser::OnControlKeysChanged(uint8_t before, uint8_t after) {
+
+  MODIFIERKEYS beforeMod;
+  *((uint8_t*)&beforeMod) = before;
+
+  MODIFIERKEYS afterMod;
+  *((uint8_t*)&afterMod) = after;
+
+  if (beforeMod.bmLeftCtrl != afterMod.bmLeftCtrl) {
+    Serial.println("LeftCtrl changed");
+  }
+  if (beforeMod.bmLeftShift != afterMod.bmLeftShift) {
+    Serial.println("LeftShift changed");
+  }
+  if (beforeMod.bmLeftAlt != afterMod.bmLeftAlt) {
+    Serial.println("LeftAlt changed");
+  }
+  if (beforeMod.bmLeftGUI != afterMod.bmLeftGUI) {
+    Serial.println("LeftGUI changed");
+  }
+
+  if (beforeMod.bmRightCtrl != afterMod.bmRightCtrl) {
+    Serial.println("RightCtrl changed");
+  }
+  if (beforeMod.bmRightShift != afterMod.bmRightShift) {
+    Serial.println("RightShift changed");
+  }
+  if (beforeMod.bmRightAlt != afterMod.bmRightAlt) {
+    Serial.println("RightAlt changed");
+  }
+  if (beforeMod.bmRightGUI != afterMod.bmRightGUI) {
+    Serial.println("RightGUI changed");
+  }
+
+}
+
+void KbdRptParser::OnKeyUp(uint8_t mod, uint8_t key)
+{
+  Serial.print("UP ");
+  PrintKey(mod, key);
+}
+
+void KbdRptParser::OnKeyPressed(uint8_t key)
+{
+  Serial.print("ASCII: ");
+  Serial.println((char)key);
+};
+
+USB     Usb;
+//USBHub     Hub(&Usb);
+HIDBoot<HID_PROTOCOL_KEYBOARD>    HidKeyboard(&Usb);
+
+uint32_t next_time;
+
+KbdRptParser Prs;
+
+void setup()
+{
+  Serial.begin( 115200 );
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  Serial.println("Start");
+
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1)
+    Serial.println("OSC did not start.");
+
+  delay( 200 );
+
+  next_time = millis() + 5000;
+
+  HidKeyboard.SetReportParser(0, (HIDReportParser*)&Prs);
+}
+
+void loop()
+{
+  Usb.Task();
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/USBHIDBootKbdAndMouse/USBHIDBootKbdAndMouse.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/USBHIDBootKbdAndMouse/USBHIDBootKbdAndMouse.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5fc8c96fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/USBHIDBootKbdAndMouse/USBHIDBootKbdAndMouse.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,178 @@
+#include <hidboot.h>
+#include <usbhub.h>
+
+// Satisfy IDE, which only needs to see the include statment in the ino.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+class MouseRptParser : public MouseReportParser
+{
+  protected:
+    void OnMouseMove(MOUSEINFO *mi);
+    void OnLeftButtonUp(MOUSEINFO *mi);
+    void OnLeftButtonDown(MOUSEINFO *mi);
+    void OnRightButtonUp(MOUSEINFO *mi);
+    void OnRightButtonDown(MOUSEINFO *mi);
+    void OnMiddleButtonUp(MOUSEINFO *mi);
+    void OnMiddleButtonDown(MOUSEINFO *mi);
+};
+void MouseRptParser::OnMouseMove(MOUSEINFO *mi)
+{
+  Serial.print("dx=");
+  Serial.print(mi->dX, DEC);
+  Serial.print(" dy=");
+  Serial.println(mi->dY, DEC);
+};
+void MouseRptParser::OnLeftButtonUp	(MOUSEINFO *mi)
+{
+  Serial.println("L Butt Up");
+};
+void MouseRptParser::OnLeftButtonDown	(MOUSEINFO *mi)
+{
+  Serial.println("L Butt Dn");
+};
+void MouseRptParser::OnRightButtonUp	(MOUSEINFO *mi)
+{
+  Serial.println("R Butt Up");
+};
+void MouseRptParser::OnRightButtonDown	(MOUSEINFO *mi)
+{
+  Serial.println("R Butt Dn");
+};
+void MouseRptParser::OnMiddleButtonUp	(MOUSEINFO *mi)
+{
+  Serial.println("M Butt Up");
+};
+void MouseRptParser::OnMiddleButtonDown	(MOUSEINFO *mi)
+{
+  Serial.println("M Butt Dn");
+};
+
+class KbdRptParser : public KeyboardReportParser
+{
+    void PrintKey(uint8_t mod, uint8_t key);
+
+  protected:
+    void OnControlKeysChanged(uint8_t before, uint8_t after);
+    void OnKeyDown	(uint8_t mod, uint8_t key);
+    void OnKeyUp	(uint8_t mod, uint8_t key);
+    void OnKeyPressed(uint8_t key);
+};
+
+void KbdRptParser::PrintKey(uint8_t m, uint8_t key)
+{
+  MODIFIERKEYS mod;
+  *((uint8_t*)&mod) = m;
+  Serial.print((mod.bmLeftCtrl   == 1) ? "C" : " ");
+  Serial.print((mod.bmLeftShift  == 1) ? "S" : " ");
+  Serial.print((mod.bmLeftAlt    == 1) ? "A" : " ");
+  Serial.print((mod.bmLeftGUI    == 1) ? "G" : " ");
+
+  Serial.print(" >");
+  PrintHex<uint8_t>(key, 0x80);
+  Serial.print("< ");
+
+  Serial.print((mod.bmRightCtrl   == 1) ? "C" : " ");
+  Serial.print((mod.bmRightShift  == 1) ? "S" : " ");
+  Serial.print((mod.bmRightAlt    == 1) ? "A" : " ");
+  Serial.println((mod.bmRightGUI    == 1) ? "G" : " ");
+};
+
+void KbdRptParser::OnKeyDown(uint8_t mod, uint8_t key)
+{
+  Serial.print("DN ");
+  PrintKey(mod, key);
+  uint8_t c = OemToAscii(mod, key);
+
+  if (c)
+    OnKeyPressed(c);
+}
+
+void KbdRptParser::OnControlKeysChanged(uint8_t before, uint8_t after) {
+
+  MODIFIERKEYS beforeMod;
+  *((uint8_t*)&beforeMod) = before;
+
+  MODIFIERKEYS afterMod;
+  *((uint8_t*)&afterMod) = after;
+
+  if (beforeMod.bmLeftCtrl != afterMod.bmLeftCtrl) {
+    Serial.println("LeftCtrl changed");
+  }
+  if (beforeMod.bmLeftShift != afterMod.bmLeftShift) {
+    Serial.println("LeftShift changed");
+  }
+  if (beforeMod.bmLeftAlt != afterMod.bmLeftAlt) {
+    Serial.println("LeftAlt changed");
+  }
+  if (beforeMod.bmLeftGUI != afterMod.bmLeftGUI) {
+    Serial.println("LeftGUI changed");
+  }
+
+  if (beforeMod.bmRightCtrl != afterMod.bmRightCtrl) {
+    Serial.println("RightCtrl changed");
+  }
+  if (beforeMod.bmRightShift != afterMod.bmRightShift) {
+    Serial.println("RightShift changed");
+  }
+  if (beforeMod.bmRightAlt != afterMod.bmRightAlt) {
+    Serial.println("RightAlt changed");
+  }
+  if (beforeMod.bmRightGUI != afterMod.bmRightGUI) {
+    Serial.println("RightGUI changed");
+  }
+
+}
+
+void KbdRptParser::OnKeyUp(uint8_t mod, uint8_t key)
+{
+  Serial.print("UP ");
+  PrintKey(mod, key);
+}
+
+void KbdRptParser::OnKeyPressed(uint8_t key)
+{
+  Serial.print("ASCII: ");
+  Serial.println((char)key);
+};
+
+USB     Usb;
+USBHub     Hub(&Usb);
+
+HIDBoot < HID_PROTOCOL_KEYBOARD | HID_PROTOCOL_MOUSE > HidComposite(&Usb);
+HIDBoot<HID_PROTOCOL_KEYBOARD>    HidKeyboard(&Usb);
+HIDBoot<HID_PROTOCOL_MOUSE>    HidMouse(&Usb);
+
+//uint32_t next_time;
+
+KbdRptParser KbdPrs;
+MouseRptParser MousePrs;
+
+void setup()
+{
+  Serial.begin( 115200 );
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  Serial.println("Start");
+
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1)
+    Serial.println("OSC did not start.");
+
+  delay( 200 );
+
+  //next_time = millis() + 5000;
+
+  HidComposite.SetReportParser(0, (HIDReportParser*)&KbdPrs);
+  HidComposite.SetReportParser(1, (HIDReportParser*)&MousePrs);
+  HidKeyboard.SetReportParser(0, (HIDReportParser*)&KbdPrs);
+  HidMouse.SetReportParser(0, (HIDReportParser*)&MousePrs);
+}
+
+void loop()
+{
+  Usb.Task();
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/USBHIDBootMouse/USBHIDBootMouse.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/USBHIDBootMouse/USBHIDBootMouse.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..53102512b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/USBHIDBootMouse/USBHIDBootMouse.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+#include <hidboot.h>
+#include <usbhub.h>
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+class MouseRptParser : public MouseReportParser
+{
+protected:
+	void OnMouseMove	(MOUSEINFO *mi);
+	void OnLeftButtonUp	(MOUSEINFO *mi);
+	void OnLeftButtonDown	(MOUSEINFO *mi);
+	void OnRightButtonUp	(MOUSEINFO *mi);
+	void OnRightButtonDown	(MOUSEINFO *mi);
+	void OnMiddleButtonUp	(MOUSEINFO *mi);
+	void OnMiddleButtonDown	(MOUSEINFO *mi);
+};
+void MouseRptParser::OnMouseMove(MOUSEINFO *mi)
+{
+    Serial.print("dx=");
+    Serial.print(mi->dX, DEC);
+    Serial.print(" dy=");
+    Serial.println(mi->dY, DEC);
+};
+void MouseRptParser::OnLeftButtonUp	(MOUSEINFO *mi)
+{
+    Serial.println("L Butt Up");
+};
+void MouseRptParser::OnLeftButtonDown	(MOUSEINFO *mi)
+{
+    Serial.println("L Butt Dn");
+};
+void MouseRptParser::OnRightButtonUp	(MOUSEINFO *mi)
+{
+    Serial.println("R Butt Up");
+};
+void MouseRptParser::OnRightButtonDown	(MOUSEINFO *mi)
+{
+    Serial.println("R Butt Dn");
+};
+void MouseRptParser::OnMiddleButtonUp	(MOUSEINFO *mi)
+{
+    Serial.println("M Butt Up");
+};
+void MouseRptParser::OnMiddleButtonDown	(MOUSEINFO *mi)
+{
+    Serial.println("M Butt Dn");
+};
+
+USB     Usb;
+USBHub     Hub(&Usb);
+HIDBoot<HID_PROTOCOL_MOUSE>    HidMouse(&Usb);
+
+uint32_t next_time;
+
+MouseRptParser                               Prs;
+
+void setup()
+{
+    Serial.begin( 115200 );
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+    while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+    Serial.println("Start");
+
+    if (Usb.Init() == -1)
+        Serial.println("OSC did not start.");
+
+    delay( 200 );
+
+    next_time = millis() + 5000;
+
+    HidMouse.SetReportParser(0,(HIDReportParser*)&Prs);
+}
+
+void loop()
+{
+  Usb.Task();
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/USBHIDJoystick/USBHIDJoystick.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/USBHIDJoystick/USBHIDJoystick.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..956441d67
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/USBHIDJoystick/USBHIDJoystick.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#include <hid.h>
+#include <hiduniversal.h>
+#include <usbhub.h>
+
+// Satisfy IDE, which only needs to see the include statment in the ino.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+#include "hidjoystickrptparser.h"
+
+USB Usb;
+USBHub Hub(&Usb);
+HIDUniversal Hid(&Usb);
+JoystickEvents JoyEvents;
+JoystickReportParser Joy(&JoyEvents);
+
+void setup() {
+        Serial.begin(115200);
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+        while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+        Serial.println("Start");
+
+        if (Usb.Init() == -1)
+                Serial.println("OSC did not start.");
+
+        delay(200);
+
+        if (!Hid.SetReportParser(0, &Joy))
+                ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("SetReportParser"), 1);
+}
+
+void loop() {
+        Usb.Task();
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/USBHIDJoystick/hidjoystickrptparser.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/USBHIDJoystick/hidjoystickrptparser.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..083b95cac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/USBHIDJoystick/hidjoystickrptparser.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+#include "hidjoystickrptparser.h"
+
+JoystickReportParser::JoystickReportParser(JoystickEvents *evt) :
+joyEvents(evt),
+oldHat(0xDE),
+oldButtons(0) {
+        for (uint8_t i = 0; i < RPT_GEMEPAD_LEN; i++)
+                oldPad[i] = 0xD;
+}
+
+void JoystickReportParser::Parse(HID *hid, bool is_rpt_id, uint8_t len, uint8_t *buf) {
+        bool match = true;
+
+        // Checking if there are changes in report since the method was last called
+        for (uint8_t i = 0; i < RPT_GEMEPAD_LEN; i++)
+                if (buf[i] != oldPad[i]) {
+                        match = false;
+                        break;
+                }
+
+        // Calling Game Pad event handler
+        if (!match && joyEvents) {
+                joyEvents->OnGamePadChanged((const GamePadEventData*)buf);
+
+                for (uint8_t i = 0; i < RPT_GEMEPAD_LEN; i++) oldPad[i] = buf[i];
+        }
+
+        uint8_t hat = (buf[5] & 0xF);
+
+        // Calling Hat Switch event handler
+        if (hat != oldHat && joyEvents) {
+                joyEvents->OnHatSwitch(hat);
+                oldHat = hat;
+        }
+
+        uint16_t buttons = (0x0000 | buf[6]);
+        buttons <<= 4;
+        buttons |= (buf[5] >> 4);
+        uint16_t changes = (buttons ^ oldButtons);
+
+        // Calling Button Event Handler for every button changed
+        if (changes) {
+                for (uint8_t i = 0; i < 0x0C; i++) {
+                        uint16_t mask = (0x0001 << i);
+
+                        if (((mask & changes) > 0) && joyEvents)
+                                if ((buttons & mask) > 0)
+                                        joyEvents->OnButtonDn(i + 1);
+                                else
+                                        joyEvents->OnButtonUp(i + 1);
+                }
+                oldButtons = buttons;
+        }
+}
+
+void JoystickEvents::OnGamePadChanged(const GamePadEventData *evt) {
+        Serial.print("X1: ");
+        PrintHex<uint8_t > (evt->X, 0x80);
+        Serial.print("\tY1: ");
+        PrintHex<uint8_t > (evt->Y, 0x80);
+        Serial.print("\tX2: ");
+        PrintHex<uint8_t > (evt->Z1, 0x80);
+        Serial.print("\tY2: ");
+        PrintHex<uint8_t > (evt->Z2, 0x80);
+        Serial.print("\tRz: ");
+        PrintHex<uint8_t > (evt->Rz, 0x80);
+        Serial.println("");
+}
+
+void JoystickEvents::OnHatSwitch(uint8_t hat) {
+        Serial.print("Hat Switch: ");
+        PrintHex<uint8_t > (hat, 0x80);
+        Serial.println("");
+}
+
+void JoystickEvents::OnButtonUp(uint8_t but_id) {
+        Serial.print("Up: ");
+        Serial.println(but_id, DEC);
+}
+
+void JoystickEvents::OnButtonDn(uint8_t but_id) {
+        Serial.print("Dn: ");
+        Serial.println(but_id, DEC);
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/USBHIDJoystick/hidjoystickrptparser.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/USBHIDJoystick/hidjoystickrptparser.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..733b8f8da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/USBHIDJoystick/hidjoystickrptparser.h
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+#if !defined(__HIDJOYSTICKRPTPARSER_H__)
+#define __HIDJOYSTICKRPTPARSER_H__
+
+#include <hid.h>
+
+struct GamePadEventData {
+        uint8_t X, Y, Z1, Z2, Rz;
+};
+
+class JoystickEvents {
+public:
+        virtual void OnGamePadChanged(const GamePadEventData *evt);
+        virtual void OnHatSwitch(uint8_t hat);
+        virtual void OnButtonUp(uint8_t but_id);
+        virtual void OnButtonDn(uint8_t but_id);
+};
+
+#define RPT_GEMEPAD_LEN		5
+
+class JoystickReportParser : public HIDReportParser {
+        JoystickEvents *joyEvents;
+
+        uint8_t oldPad[RPT_GEMEPAD_LEN];
+        uint8_t oldHat;
+        uint16_t oldButtons;
+
+public:
+        JoystickReportParser(JoystickEvents *evt);
+
+        virtual void Parse(HID *hid, bool is_rpt_id, uint8_t len, uint8_t *buf);
+};
+
+#endif // __HIDJOYSTICKRPTPARSER_H__
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/USBHID_desc/USBHID_desc.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/USBHID_desc/USBHID_desc.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..85cfc19a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/USBHID_desc/USBHID_desc.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+#include <hid.h>
+#include <hiduniversal.h>
+#include <hidescriptorparser.h>
+#include <usbhub.h>
+#include "pgmstrings.h"
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+class HIDUniversal2 : public HIDUniversal
+{
+public:
+    HIDUniversal2(USB *usb) : HIDUniversal(usb) {};
+
+protected:
+    uint8_t OnInitSuccessful();
+};
+
+uint8_t HIDUniversal2::OnInitSuccessful()
+{
+    uint8_t    rcode;
+
+    HexDumper<USBReadParser, uint16_t, uint16_t>    Hex;
+    ReportDescParser                                Rpt;
+
+    if ((rcode = GetReportDescr(0, &Hex)))
+        goto FailGetReportDescr1;
+
+    if ((rcode = GetReportDescr(0, &Rpt)))
+	goto FailGetReportDescr2;
+
+    return 0;
+
+FailGetReportDescr1:
+    USBTRACE("GetReportDescr1:");
+    goto Fail;
+
+FailGetReportDescr2:
+    USBTRACE("GetReportDescr2:");
+    goto Fail;
+
+Fail:
+    Serial.println(rcode, HEX);
+    Release();
+    return rcode;
+}
+
+USB Usb;
+//USBHub Hub(&Usb);
+HIDUniversal2 Hid(&Usb);
+UniversalReportParser Uni;
+
+void setup()
+{
+  Serial.begin( 115200 );
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  Serial.println("Start");
+
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1)
+      Serial.println("OSC did not start.");
+
+  delay( 200 );
+
+  if (!Hid.SetReportParser(0, &Uni))
+      ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("SetReportParser"), 1  );
+}
+
+void loop()
+{
+    Usb.Task();
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/USBHID_desc/pgmstrings.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/USBHID_desc/pgmstrings.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bdb0077ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/USBHID_desc/pgmstrings.h
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+#if !defined(__PGMSTRINGS_H__)
+#define __PGMSTRINGS_H__
+
+#define LOBYTE(x) ((char*)(&(x)))[0]
+#define HIBYTE(x) ((char*)(&(x)))[1]
+#define BUFSIZE 256    //buffer size
+ 
+
+/* Print strings in Program Memory */
+const char Gen_Error_str[] PROGMEM = "\r\nRequest error. Error code:\t"; 
+const char Dev_Header_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nDevice descriptor: ";
+const char Dev_Length_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nDescriptor Length:\t";
+const char Dev_Type_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nDescriptor type:\t";
+const char Dev_Version_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nUSB version:\t\t";
+const char Dev_Class_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nDevice class:\t\t";
+const char Dev_Subclass_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nDevice Subclass:\t";
+const char Dev_Protocol_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nDevice Protocol:\t";
+const char Dev_Pktsize_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nMax.packet size:\t";
+const char Dev_Vendor_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nVendor  ID:\t\t";
+const char Dev_Product_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nProduct ID:\t\t";
+const char Dev_Revision_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nRevision ID:\t\t";
+const char Dev_Mfg_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nMfg.string index:\t";
+const char Dev_Prod_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nProd.string index:\t";
+const char Dev_Serial_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nSerial number index:\t";
+const char Dev_Nconf_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nNumber of conf.:\t";
+const char Conf_Trunc_str[] PROGMEM ="Total length truncated to 256 bytes";
+const char Conf_Header_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nConfiguration descriptor:";
+const char Conf_Totlen_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nTotal length:\t\t";
+const char Conf_Nint_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nNum.intf:\t\t";
+const char Conf_Value_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nConf.value:\t\t";
+const char Conf_String_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nConf.string:\t\t";
+const char Conf_Attr_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nAttr.:\t\t\t";
+const char Conf_Pwr_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nMax.pwr:\t\t";
+const char Int_Header_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\n\r\nInterface descriptor:";
+const char Int_Number_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nIntf.number:\t\t";
+const char Int_Alt_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nAlt.:\t\t\t";
+const char Int_Endpoints_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nEndpoints:\t\t";
+const char Int_Class_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nIntf. Class:\t\t";
+const char Int_Subclass_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nIntf. Subclass:\t\t";
+const char Int_Protocol_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nIntf. Protocol:\t\t";
+const char Int_String_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nIntf.string:\t\t";
+const char End_Header_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\n\r\nEndpoint descriptor:";
+const char End_Address_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nEndpoint address:\t";
+const char End_Attr_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nAttr.:\t\t\t";
+const char End_Pktsize_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nMax.pkt size:\t\t";
+const char End_Interval_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nPolling interval:\t";
+const char Unk_Header_str[] PROGMEM = "\r\nUnknown descriptor:";
+const char Unk_Length_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nLength:\t\t";
+const char Unk_Type_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nType:\t\t";
+const char Unk_Contents_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nContents:\t";
+ 
+#endif // __PGMSTRINGS_H__
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/le3dp/le3dp.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/le3dp/le3dp.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..837d7f5a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/le3dp/le3dp.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+/* Simplified Logitech Extreme 3D Pro Joystick Report Parser */
+
+#include <hid.h>
+#include <hiduniversal.h>
+#include <usbhub.h>
+
+#include "le3dp_rptparser.h"
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+USB                                             Usb;
+USBHub                                          Hub(&Usb);
+HIDUniversal                                    Hid(&Usb);
+JoystickEvents                                  JoyEvents;
+JoystickReportParser                            Joy(&JoyEvents);
+
+void setup()
+{
+  Serial.begin( 115200 );
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  Serial.println("Start");
+
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1)
+      Serial.println("OSC did not start.");
+
+  delay( 200 );
+
+  if (!Hid.SetReportParser(0, &Joy))
+      ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("SetReportParser"), 1  );
+}
+
+void loop()
+{
+    Usb.Task();
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/le3dp/le3dp_rptparser.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/le3dp/le3dp_rptparser.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..baece13b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/le3dp/le3dp_rptparser.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+#include "le3dp_rptparser.h"
+
+JoystickReportParser::JoystickReportParser(JoystickEvents *evt) :
+	joyEvents(evt)
+{}
+
+void JoystickReportParser::Parse(HID *hid, bool is_rpt_id, uint8_t len, uint8_t *buf)
+{
+	bool match = true;
+
+	// Checking if there are changes in report since the method was last called
+	for (uint8_t i=0; i<RPT_GAMEPAD_LEN; i++) {
+		if( buf[i] != oldPad[i] ) {
+			match = false;
+			break;
+		}
+  }
+  	// Calling Game Pad event handler
+	if (!match && joyEvents) {
+		joyEvents->OnGamePadChanged((const GamePadEventData*)buf);
+
+		for (uint8_t i=0; i<RPT_GAMEPAD_LEN; i++) oldPad[i] = buf[i];
+	}
+}
+
+void JoystickEvents::OnGamePadChanged(const GamePadEventData *evt)
+{
+	Serial.print("X: ");
+	PrintHex<uint16_t>(evt->x, 0x80);
+	Serial.print(" Y: ");
+	PrintHex<uint16_t>(evt->y, 0x80);
+	Serial.print(" Hat Switch: ");
+	PrintHex<uint8_t>(evt->hat, 0x80);
+	Serial.print(" Twist: ");
+	PrintHex<uint8_t>(evt->twist, 0x80);
+	Serial.print(" Slider: ");
+	PrintHex<uint8_t>(evt->slider, 0x80);
+  Serial.print(" Buttons A: ");
+	PrintHex<uint8_t>(evt->buttons_a, 0x80);
+	Serial.print(" Buttons B: ");
+	PrintHex<uint8_t>(evt->buttons_b, 0x80);
+	Serial.println("");
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/le3dp/le3dp_rptparser.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/le3dp/le3dp_rptparser.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2400364e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/le3dp/le3dp_rptparser.h
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+#if !defined(__HIDJOYSTICKRPTPARSER_H__)
+#define __HIDJOYSTICKRPTPARSER_H__
+
+#include <hid.h>
+
+struct GamePadEventData
+{
+  union { //axes and hut switch
+    uint32_t axes;
+    struct {
+      uint32_t x : 10;
+      uint32_t y : 10;
+      uint32_t hat : 4;
+      uint32_t twist : 8;      
+    };
+  };
+  uint8_t buttons_a;
+  uint8_t slider;
+  uint8_t buttons_b;
+};
+
+class JoystickEvents
+{
+public:
+	virtual void OnGamePadChanged(const GamePadEventData *evt);
+};
+
+#define RPT_GAMEPAD_LEN	sizeof(GamePadEventData)/sizeof(uint8_t)
+
+class JoystickReportParser : public HIDReportParser
+{
+	JoystickEvents		*joyEvents;
+
+  uint8_t oldPad[RPT_GAMEPAD_LEN];
+
+public:
+	JoystickReportParser(JoystickEvents *evt);
+
+	virtual void Parse(HID *hid, bool is_rpt_id, uint8_t len, uint8_t *buf);
+};
+
+#endif // __HIDJOYSTICKRPTPARSER_H__
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/scale/scale.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/scale/scale.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f26ff964d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/scale/scale.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+/* Digital Scale Output. Written for Stamps.com Model 510  */
+/* 5lb Digital Scale; any HID scale with Usage page 0x8d should work */
+
+#include <hid.h>
+#include <hiduniversal.h>
+#include <usbhub.h>
+
+#include "scale_rptparser.h"
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+USB                                             Usb;
+USBHub                                          Hub(&Usb);
+HIDUniversal                                    Hid(&Usb);
+Max_LCD                                       LCD(&Usb);
+ScaleEvents                                  ScaleEvents(&LCD);
+ScaleReportParser                            Scale(&ScaleEvents);
+
+void setup()
+{
+  Serial.begin( 115200 );
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  Serial.println("Start");
+
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1)
+      Serial.println("OSC did not start.");
+
+    // set up the LCD's number of rows and columns:
+    LCD.begin(16, 2);
+    LCD.clear();
+    LCD.home();
+    LCD.setCursor(0,0);
+    LCD.write('R');
+
+  delay( 200 );
+
+  if (!Hid.SetReportParser(0, &Scale))
+      ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("SetReportParser"), 1  );
+}
+
+void loop()
+{
+    Usb.Task();
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/scale/scale_rptparser.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/scale/scale_rptparser.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..01ed980cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/scale/scale_rptparser.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,150 @@
+/* Parser for standard HID scale (usage page 0x8d) data input report (ID 3) */ 
+#include "scale_rptparser.h"
+
+const char* UNITS[13] = {
+    "units",        // unknown unit
+    "mg",           // milligram
+    "g",            // gram
+    "kg",           // kilogram
+    "cd",           // carat
+    "taels",        // lian
+    "gr",           // grain
+    "dwt",          // pennyweight
+    "tonnes",       // metric tons
+    "tons",         // avoir ton
+    "ozt",          // troy ounce
+    "oz",           // ounce
+    "lbs"           // pound
+};
+
+ScaleReportParser::ScaleReportParser(ScaleEvents *evt) :
+	scaleEvents(evt)
+{}
+
+void ScaleReportParser::Parse(HID *hid, bool is_rpt_id, uint8_t len, uint8_t *buf)
+{
+	bool match = true;
+
+	// Checking if there are changes in report since the method was last called
+	for (uint8_t i=0; i<RPT_SCALE_LEN; i++) {
+		if( buf[i] != oldScale[i] ) {
+			match = false;
+			break;
+		}
+  }
+  	// Calling Game Pad event handler
+	if (!match && scaleEvents) {
+		scaleEvents->OnScaleChanged((const ScaleEventData*)buf);
+
+		for (uint8_t i=0; i<RPT_SCALE_LEN; i++) oldScale[i] = buf[i];
+	}
+}
+
+ScaleEvents::ScaleEvents( Max_LCD* pLCD ) :
+	
+	pLcd( pLCD )
+
+{}
+
+void ScaleEvents::LcdPrint( const char* str )
+{
+	
+	while( *str ) {
+		
+		pLcd->write(	*str++ );
+		
+	}
+}
+
+void ScaleEvents::OnScaleChanged(const ScaleEventData *evt)
+{
+	
+	pLcd->clear();
+  pLcd->home();
+  pLcd->setCursor(0,0);
+	
+	if( evt->reportID != 3 ) {
+		
+		const char inv_report[]="Invalid report!";
+		
+		Serial.println(inv_report);
+		LcdPrint(inv_report);
+		
+		return;
+		
+	}//if( evt->reportID != 3...
+	
+	switch( evt->status ) {
+		
+		case REPORT_FAULT: 
+			Serial.println(F("Report fault"));
+			break;
+			
+		case ZEROED:
+			Serial.println(F("Scale zero set"));
+			break;
+			
+		case WEIGHING: {
+			
+			const char progress[] = "Weighing...";
+			Serial.println(progress);
+			LcdPrint(progress);
+			break;
+		}
+		
+		case WEIGHT_VALID: {
+			
+			char buf[10];
+      double weight = evt->weight * pow( 10, evt->exp );
+      
+      	
+                        
+      	Serial.print(F("Weight: "));
+				Serial.print( weight );
+				Serial.print(F(" "));
+				Serial.println( UNITS[ evt->unit ]);
+				
+				LcdPrint("Weight: ");
+				dtostrf( weight, 4, 2, buf );
+				LcdPrint( buf ); 
+				LcdPrint( UNITS[ evt->unit ]);
+			
+			break;
+			
+		}//case WEIGHT_VALID...
+			
+		case WEIGHT_NEGATIVE: {
+			
+			const char negweight[] = "Negative weight";
+			Serial.println(negweight);
+			LcdPrint(negweight);
+			break;
+		}
+			
+		case OVERWEIGHT: {
+		
+			const char overweight[] = "Max.weight reached";
+			Serial.println(overweight);
+			LcdPrint( overweight );
+			break;
+		}
+		
+		case CALIBRATE_ME:
+			
+			Serial.println(F("Scale calibration required"));
+			break;
+			
+		case ZERO_ME:
+			
+			Serial.println(F("Scale zeroing required"));
+			break;
+			
+		default:
+			
+			Serial.print(F("Undefined status code: "));
+			Serial.println( evt->status );
+			break;	
+			
+	}//switch( evt->status...
+
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/scale/scale_rptparser.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/scale/scale_rptparser.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..57fbb033b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/HID/scale/scale_rptparser.h
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+#if !defined(__SCALERPTPARSER_H__)
+#define __SCALERPTPARSER_H__
+
+#include <max_LCD.h>
+#include <hid.h>
+
+/* Scale status constants */
+#define REPORT_FAULT 0x01
+#define ZEROED 0x02
+#define WEIGHING 0x03
+#define WEIGHT_VALID 0x04
+#define WEIGHT_NEGATIVE 0x05
+#define OVERWEIGHT 0x06
+#define CALIBRATE_ME 0x07
+#define ZERO_ME 0x08
+
+/* input data report */
+struct ScaleEventData
+{
+  uint8_t reportID;	//must be 3
+  uint8_t status;
+  uint8_t unit;
+  int8_t exp;			//scale factor for the weight
+  uint16_t weight;	//
+};
+
+class ScaleEvents
+{
+
+	Max_LCD*	pLcd;
+
+	void LcdPrint( const char* str );
+
+public:
+
+	ScaleEvents( Max_LCD* pLCD );
+
+	virtual void OnScaleChanged(const ScaleEventData *evt);
+};
+
+#define RPT_SCALE_LEN	sizeof(ScaleEventData)/sizeof(uint8_t)
+
+class ScaleReportParser : public HIDReportParser
+{
+	ScaleEvents		*scaleEvents;
+
+  uint8_t oldScale[RPT_SCALE_LEN];
+
+public:
+	ScaleReportParser(ScaleEvents *evt);
+
+	virtual void Parse(HID *hid, bool is_rpt_id, uint8_t len, uint8_t *buf);
+};
+
+#endif // __SCALERPTPARSER_H__
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/PS3USB/PS3USB.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/PS3USB/PS3USB.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a53dcfbe6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/PS3USB/PS3USB.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,148 @@
+/*
+ Example sketch for the PS3 USB library - developed by Kristian Lauszus
+ For more information visit my blog: http://blog.tkjelectronics.dk/ or
+ send me an e-mail:  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#include <PS3USB.h>
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+USB Usb;
+/* You can create the instance of the class in two ways */
+PS3USB PS3(&Usb); // This will just create the instance
+//PS3USB PS3(&Usb,0x00,0x15,0x83,0x3D,0x0A,0x57); // This will also store the bluetooth address - this can be obtained from the dongle when running the sketch
+
+bool printAngle;
+uint8_t state = 0;
+
+void setup() {
+  Serial.begin(115200);
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1) {
+    Serial.print(F("\r\nOSC did not start"));
+    while (1); //halt
+  }
+  Serial.print(F("\r\nPS3 USB Library Started"));
+}
+void loop() {
+  Usb.Task();
+
+  if (PS3.PS3Connected || PS3.PS3NavigationConnected) {
+    if (PS3.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX) > 137 || PS3.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX) < 117 || PS3.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY) > 137 || PS3.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY) < 117 || PS3.getAnalogHat(RightHatX) > 137 || PS3.getAnalogHat(RightHatX) < 117 || PS3.getAnalogHat(RightHatY) > 137 || PS3.getAnalogHat(RightHatY) < 117) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nLeftHatX: "));
+      Serial.print(PS3.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX));
+      Serial.print(F("\tLeftHatY: "));
+      Serial.print(PS3.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY));
+      if (PS3.PS3Connected) { // The Navigation controller only have one joystick
+        Serial.print(F("\tRightHatX: "));
+        Serial.print(PS3.getAnalogHat(RightHatX));
+        Serial.print(F("\tRightHatY: "));
+        Serial.print(PS3.getAnalogHat(RightHatY));
+      }
+    }
+    // Analog button values can be read from almost all buttons
+    if (PS3.getAnalogButton(L2) || PS3.getAnalogButton(R2)) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nL2: "));
+      Serial.print(PS3.getAnalogButton(L2));
+      if (!PS3.PS3NavigationConnected) {
+        Serial.print(F("\tR2: "));
+        Serial.print(PS3.getAnalogButton(R2));
+      }
+    }
+    if (PS3.getButtonClick(PS))
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nPS"));
+
+    if (PS3.getButtonClick(TRIANGLE))
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nTraingle"));
+    if (PS3.getButtonClick(CIRCLE))
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nCircle"));
+    if (PS3.getButtonClick(CROSS))
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nCross"));
+    if (PS3.getButtonClick(SQUARE))
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nSquare"));
+
+    if (PS3.getButtonClick(UP)) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nUp"));
+      PS3.setLedOff();
+      PS3.setLedOn(LED4);
+    }
+    if (PS3.getButtonClick(RIGHT)) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nRight"));
+      PS3.setLedOff();
+      PS3.setLedOn(LED1);
+    }
+    if (PS3.getButtonClick(DOWN)) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nDown"));
+      PS3.setLedOff();
+      PS3.setLedOn(LED2);
+    }
+    if (PS3.getButtonClick(LEFT)) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nLeft"));
+      PS3.setLedOff();
+      PS3.setLedOn(LED3);
+    }
+
+    if (PS3.getButtonClick(L1))
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nL1"));
+    if (PS3.getButtonClick(L3))
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nL3"));
+    if (PS3.getButtonClick(R1))
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nR1"));
+    if (PS3.getButtonClick(R3))
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nR3"));
+
+    if (PS3.getButtonClick(SELECT)) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nSelect - "));
+      PS3.printStatusString();
+    }
+    if (PS3.getButtonClick(START)) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nStart"));
+      printAngle = !printAngle;
+    }
+    if (printAngle) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nPitch: "));
+      Serial.print(PS3.getAngle(Pitch));
+      Serial.print(F("\tRoll: "));
+      Serial.print(PS3.getAngle(Roll));
+    }
+  }
+  else if (PS3.PS3MoveConnected) { // One can only set the color of the bulb, set the rumble, set and get the bluetooth address and calibrate the magnetometer via USB
+    if (state == 0) {
+      PS3.moveSetRumble(0);
+      PS3.moveSetBulb(Off);
+    } else if (state == 1) {
+      PS3.moveSetRumble(75);
+      PS3.moveSetBulb(Red);
+    } else if (state == 2) {
+      PS3.moveSetRumble(125);
+      PS3.moveSetBulb(Green);
+    } else if (state == 3) {
+      PS3.moveSetRumble(150);
+      PS3.moveSetBulb(Blue);
+    } else if (state == 4) {
+      PS3.moveSetRumble(175);
+      PS3.moveSetBulb(Yellow);
+    } else if (state == 5) {
+      PS3.moveSetRumble(200);
+      PS3.moveSetBulb(Lightblue);
+    } else if (state == 6) {
+      PS3.moveSetRumble(225);
+      PS3.moveSetBulb(Purble);
+    } else if (state == 7) {
+      PS3.moveSetRumble(250);
+      PS3.moveSetBulb(White);
+    }
+
+    state++;
+    if (state > 7)
+      state = 0;
+    delay(1000);
+  }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/PS4USB/PS4USB.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/PS4USB/PS4USB.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d0d76790e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/PS4USB/PS4USB.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,133 @@
+/*
+ Example sketch for the PS4 USB library - developed by Kristian Lauszus
+ For more information visit my blog: http://blog.tkjelectronics.dk/ or
+ send me an e-mail:  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#include <PS4USB.h>
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+USB Usb;
+PS4USB PS4(&Usb);
+
+bool printAngle, printTouch;
+uint8_t oldL2Value, oldR2Value;
+
+void setup() {
+  Serial.begin(115200);
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1) {
+    Serial.print(F("\r\nOSC did not start"));
+    while (1); // Halt
+  }
+  Serial.print(F("\r\nPS4 USB Library Started"));
+}
+
+void loop() {
+  Usb.Task();
+
+  if (PS4.connected()) {
+    if (PS4.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX) > 137 || PS4.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX) < 117 || PS4.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY) > 137 || PS4.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY) < 117 || PS4.getAnalogHat(RightHatX) > 137 || PS4.getAnalogHat(RightHatX) < 117 || PS4.getAnalogHat(RightHatY) > 137 || PS4.getAnalogHat(RightHatY) < 117) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nLeftHatX: "));
+      Serial.print(PS4.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX));
+      Serial.print(F("\tLeftHatY: "));
+      Serial.print(PS4.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY));
+      Serial.print(F("\tRightHatX: "));
+      Serial.print(PS4.getAnalogHat(RightHatX));
+      Serial.print(F("\tRightHatY: "));
+      Serial.print(PS4.getAnalogHat(RightHatY));
+    }
+
+    if (PS4.getAnalogButton(L2) || PS4.getAnalogButton(R2)) { // These are the only analog buttons on the PS4 controller
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nL2: "));
+      Serial.print(PS4.getAnalogButton(L2));
+      Serial.print(F("\tR2: "));
+      Serial.print(PS4.getAnalogButton(R2));
+    }
+    if (PS4.getAnalogButton(L2) != oldL2Value || PS4.getAnalogButton(R2) != oldR2Value) // Only write value if it's different
+      PS4.setRumbleOn(PS4.getAnalogButton(L2), PS4.getAnalogButton(R2));
+    oldL2Value = PS4.getAnalogButton(L2);
+    oldR2Value = PS4.getAnalogButton(R2);
+
+    if (PS4.getButtonClick(PS))
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nPS"));
+    if (PS4.getButtonClick(TRIANGLE)) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nTraingle"));
+      PS4.setRumbleOn(RumbleLow);
+    }
+    if (PS4.getButtonClick(CIRCLE)) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nCircle"));
+      PS4.setRumbleOn(RumbleHigh);
+    }
+    if (PS4.getButtonClick(CROSS)) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nCross"));
+      PS4.setLedFlash(10, 10); // Set it to blink rapidly
+    }
+    if (PS4.getButtonClick(SQUARE)) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nSquare"));
+      PS4.setLedFlash(0, 0); // Turn off blinking
+    }
+
+    if (PS4.getButtonClick(UP)) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nUp"));
+      PS4.setLed(Red);
+    } if (PS4.getButtonClick(RIGHT)) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nRight"));
+      PS4.setLed(Blue);
+    } if (PS4.getButtonClick(DOWN)) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nDown"));
+      PS4.setLed(Yellow);
+    } if (PS4.getButtonClick(LEFT)) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nLeft"));
+      PS4.setLed(Green);
+    }
+
+    if (PS4.getButtonClick(L1))
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nL1"));
+    if (PS4.getButtonClick(L3))
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nL3"));
+    if (PS4.getButtonClick(R1))
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nR1"));
+    if (PS4.getButtonClick(R3))
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nR3"));
+
+    if (PS4.getButtonClick(SHARE))
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nShare"));
+    if (PS4.getButtonClick(OPTIONS)) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nOptions"));
+      printAngle = !printAngle;
+    }
+    if (PS4.getButtonClick(TOUCHPAD)) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nTouchpad"));
+      printTouch = !printTouch;
+    }
+
+    if (printAngle) { // Print angle calculated using the accelerometer only
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nPitch: "));
+      Serial.print(PS4.getAngle(Pitch));
+      Serial.print(F("\tRoll: "));
+      Serial.print(PS4.getAngle(Roll));
+    }
+
+    if (printTouch) { // Print the x, y coordinates of the touchpad
+      if (PS4.isTouching(0) || PS4.isTouching(1)) // Print newline and carriage return if any of the fingers are touching the touchpad
+        Serial.print(F("\r\n"));
+      for (uint8_t i = 0; i < 2; i++) { // The touchpad track two fingers
+        if (PS4.isTouching(i)) { // Print the position of the finger if it is touching the touchpad
+          Serial.print(F("X")); Serial.print(i + 1); Serial.print(F(": "));
+          Serial.print(PS4.getX(i));
+          Serial.print(F("\tY")); Serial.print(i + 1); Serial.print(F(": "));
+          Serial.print(PS4.getY(i));
+          Serial.print(F("\t"));
+        }
+      }
+    }
+  }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/PSBuzz/PSBuzz.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/PSBuzz/PSBuzz.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6ee462c1e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/PSBuzz/PSBuzz.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+/*
+ Example sketch for the Playstation Buzz library - developed by Kristian Lauszus
+ For more information visit my blog: http://blog.tkjelectronics.dk/ or
+ send me an e-mail:  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#include <PSBuzz.h>
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+USB Usb;
+PSBuzz Buzz(&Usb);
+
+void setup() {
+  Serial.begin(115200);
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1) {
+    Serial.print(F("\r\nOSC did not start"));
+    while (1); // Halt
+  }
+  Serial.println(F("\r\nPS Buzz Library Started"));
+}
+
+void loop() {
+  Usb.Task();
+
+  if (Buzz.connected()) {
+    for (uint8_t i = 0; i < 4; i++) {
+      if (Buzz.getButtonClick(RED, i)) {
+        Buzz.setLedToggle(i); // Toggle the LED
+        Serial.println(F("RED"));
+      }
+      if (Buzz.getButtonClick(YELLOW, i))
+        Serial.println(F("YELLOW"));
+      if (Buzz.getButtonClick(GREEN, i))
+        Serial.println(F("GREEN"));
+      if (Buzz.getButtonClick(ORANGE, i))
+        Serial.println(F("ORANGE"));
+      if (Buzz.getButtonClick(BLUE, i))
+        Serial.println(F("BLUE"));
+    }
+  }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/USB_desc/USB_desc.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/USB_desc/USB_desc.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..acfe57d37
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/USB_desc/USB_desc.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,349 @@
+#include <usbhub.h>
+
+#include "pgmstrings.h"
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+USB     Usb;
+//USBHub  Hub1(&Usb);
+//USBHub  Hub2(&Usb);
+//USBHub  Hub3(&Usb);
+//USBHub  Hub4(&Usb);
+//USBHub  Hub5(&Usb);
+//USBHub  Hub6(&Usb);
+//USBHub  Hub7(&Usb);
+
+uint32_t next_time;
+
+void PrintAllAddresses(UsbDevice *pdev)
+{
+  UsbDeviceAddress adr;
+  adr.devAddress = pdev->address.devAddress;
+  Serial.print("\r\nAddr:");
+  Serial.print(adr.devAddress, HEX);
+  Serial.print("(");
+  Serial.print(adr.bmHub, HEX);
+  Serial.print(".");
+  Serial.print(adr.bmParent, HEX);
+  Serial.print(".");
+  Serial.print(adr.bmAddress, HEX);
+  Serial.println(")");
+}
+
+void PrintAddress(uint8_t addr)
+{
+  UsbDeviceAddress adr;
+  adr.devAddress = addr;
+  Serial.print("\r\nADDR:\t");
+  Serial.println(adr.devAddress, HEX);
+  Serial.print("DEV:\t");
+  Serial.println(adr.bmAddress, HEX);
+  Serial.print("PRNT:\t");
+  Serial.println(adr.bmParent, HEX);
+  Serial.print("HUB:\t");
+  Serial.println(adr.bmHub, HEX);
+}
+
+void setup()
+{
+  Serial.begin( 115200 );
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  Serial.println("Start");
+
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1)
+    Serial.println("OSC did not start.");
+
+  delay( 200 );
+
+  next_time = millis() + 10000;
+}
+
+byte getdevdescr( byte addr, byte &num_conf );
+
+void PrintDescriptors(uint8_t addr)
+{
+  uint8_t rcode = 0;
+  byte num_conf = 0;
+
+  rcode = getdevdescr( (byte)addr, num_conf );
+  if ( rcode )
+  {
+    printProgStr(Gen_Error_str);
+    print_hex( rcode, 8 );
+  }
+  Serial.print("\r\n");
+
+  for (int i = 0; i < num_conf; i++)
+  {
+    rcode = getconfdescr( addr, i );                 // get configuration descriptor
+    if ( rcode )
+    {
+      printProgStr(Gen_Error_str);
+      print_hex(rcode, 8);
+    }
+    Serial.println("\r\n");
+  }
+}
+
+void PrintAllDescriptors(UsbDevice *pdev)
+{
+  Serial.println("\r\n");
+  print_hex(pdev->address.devAddress, 8);
+  Serial.println("\r\n--");
+  PrintDescriptors( pdev->address.devAddress );
+}
+
+void loop()
+{
+  Usb.Task();
+
+  if ( Usb.getUsbTaskState() == USB_STATE_RUNNING )
+  {
+    //if (millis() >= next_time)
+    {
+      Usb.ForEachUsbDevice(&PrintAllDescriptors);
+      Usb.ForEachUsbDevice(&PrintAllAddresses);
+
+      while ( 1 );                          //stop
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+byte getdevdescr( byte addr, byte &num_conf )
+{
+  USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR buf;
+  byte rcode;
+  rcode = Usb.getDevDescr( addr, 0, 0x12, ( uint8_t *)&buf );
+  if ( rcode ) {
+    return ( rcode );
+  }
+  printProgStr(Dev_Header_str);
+  printProgStr(Dev_Length_str);
+  print_hex( buf.bLength, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Dev_Type_str);
+  print_hex( buf.bDescriptorType, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Dev_Version_str);
+  print_hex( buf.bcdUSB, 16 );
+  printProgStr(Dev_Class_str);
+  print_hex( buf.bDeviceClass, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Dev_Subclass_str);
+  print_hex( buf.bDeviceSubClass, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Dev_Protocol_str);
+  print_hex( buf.bDeviceProtocol, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Dev_Pktsize_str);
+  print_hex( buf.bMaxPacketSize0, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Dev_Vendor_str);
+  print_hex( buf.idVendor, 16 );
+  printProgStr(Dev_Product_str);
+  print_hex( buf.idProduct, 16 );
+  printProgStr(Dev_Revision_str);
+  print_hex( buf.bcdDevice, 16 );
+  printProgStr(Dev_Mfg_str);
+  print_hex( buf.iManufacturer, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Dev_Prod_str);
+  print_hex( buf.iProduct, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Dev_Serial_str);
+  print_hex( buf.iSerialNumber, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Dev_Nconf_str);
+  print_hex( buf.bNumConfigurations, 8 );
+  num_conf = buf.bNumConfigurations;
+  return ( 0 );
+}
+
+void printhubdescr(uint8_t *descrptr, uint8_t addr)
+{
+  HubDescriptor  *pHub = (HubDescriptor*) descrptr;
+  uint8_t        len = *((uint8_t*)descrptr);
+
+  printProgStr(PSTR("\r\n\r\nHub Descriptor:\r\n"));
+  printProgStr(PSTR("bDescLength:\t\t"));
+  Serial.println(pHub->bDescLength, HEX);
+
+  printProgStr(PSTR("bDescriptorType:\t"));
+  Serial.println(pHub->bDescriptorType, HEX);
+
+  printProgStr(PSTR("bNbrPorts:\t\t"));
+  Serial.println(pHub->bNbrPorts, HEX);
+
+  printProgStr(PSTR("LogPwrSwitchMode:\t"));
+  Serial.println(pHub->LogPwrSwitchMode, BIN);
+
+  printProgStr(PSTR("CompoundDevice:\t\t"));
+  Serial.println(pHub->CompoundDevice, BIN);
+
+  printProgStr(PSTR("OverCurrentProtectMode:\t"));
+  Serial.println(pHub->OverCurrentProtectMode, BIN);
+
+  printProgStr(PSTR("TTThinkTime:\t\t"));
+  Serial.println(pHub->TTThinkTime, BIN);
+
+  printProgStr(PSTR("PortIndicatorsSupported:"));
+  Serial.println(pHub->PortIndicatorsSupported, BIN);
+
+  printProgStr(PSTR("Reserved:\t\t"));
+  Serial.println(pHub->Reserved, HEX);
+
+  printProgStr(PSTR("bPwrOn2PwrGood:\t\t"));
+  Serial.println(pHub->bPwrOn2PwrGood, HEX);
+
+  printProgStr(PSTR("bHubContrCurrent:\t"));
+  Serial.println(pHub->bHubContrCurrent, HEX);
+
+  for (uint8_t i = 7; i < len; i++)
+    print_hex(descrptr[i], 8);
+
+  //for (uint8_t i=1; i<=pHub->bNbrPorts; i++)
+  //    PrintHubPortStatus(&Usb, addr, i, 1);
+}
+
+byte getconfdescr( byte addr, byte conf )
+{
+  uint8_t buf[ BUFSIZE ];
+  uint8_t* buf_ptr = buf;
+  byte rcode;
+  byte descr_length;
+  byte descr_type;
+  unsigned int total_length;
+  rcode = Usb.getConfDescr( addr, 0, 4, conf, buf );  //get total length
+  LOBYTE( total_length ) = buf[ 2 ];
+  HIBYTE( total_length ) = buf[ 3 ];
+  if ( total_length > 256 ) {   //check if total length is larger than buffer
+    printProgStr(Conf_Trunc_str);
+    total_length = 256;
+  }
+  rcode = Usb.getConfDescr( addr, 0, total_length, conf, buf ); //get the whole descriptor
+  while ( buf_ptr < buf + total_length ) { //parsing descriptors
+    descr_length = *( buf_ptr );
+    descr_type = *( buf_ptr + 1 );
+    switch ( descr_type ) {
+      case ( USB_DESCRIPTOR_CONFIGURATION ):
+        printconfdescr( buf_ptr );
+        break;
+      case ( USB_DESCRIPTOR_INTERFACE ):
+        printintfdescr( buf_ptr );
+        break;
+      case ( USB_DESCRIPTOR_ENDPOINT ):
+        printepdescr( buf_ptr );
+        break;
+      case 0x29:
+        printhubdescr( buf_ptr, addr );
+        break;
+      default:
+        printunkdescr( buf_ptr );
+        break;
+    }//switch( descr_type
+    buf_ptr = ( buf_ptr + descr_length );    //advance buffer pointer
+  }//while( buf_ptr <=...
+  return ( rcode );
+}
+/* prints hex numbers with leading zeroes */
+// copyright, Peter H Anderson, Baltimore, MD, Nov, '07
+// source: http://www.phanderson.com/arduino/arduino_display.html
+void print_hex(int v, int num_places)
+{
+  int mask = 0, n, num_nibbles, digit;
+
+  for (n = 1; n <= num_places; n++) {
+    mask = (mask << 1) | 0x0001;
+  }
+  v = v & mask; // truncate v to specified number of places
+
+  num_nibbles = num_places / 4;
+  if ((num_places % 4) != 0) {
+    ++num_nibbles;
+  }
+  do {
+    digit = ((v >> (num_nibbles - 1) * 4)) & 0x0f;
+    Serial.print(digit, HEX);
+  }
+  while (--num_nibbles);
+}
+/* function to print configuration descriptor */
+void printconfdescr( uint8_t* descr_ptr )
+{
+  USB_CONFIGURATION_DESCRIPTOR* conf_ptr = ( USB_CONFIGURATION_DESCRIPTOR* )descr_ptr;
+  printProgStr(Conf_Header_str);
+  printProgStr(Conf_Totlen_str);
+  print_hex( conf_ptr->wTotalLength, 16 );
+  printProgStr(Conf_Nint_str);
+  print_hex( conf_ptr->bNumInterfaces, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Conf_Value_str);
+  print_hex( conf_ptr->bConfigurationValue, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Conf_String_str);
+  print_hex( conf_ptr->iConfiguration, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Conf_Attr_str);
+  print_hex( conf_ptr->bmAttributes, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Conf_Pwr_str);
+  print_hex( conf_ptr->bMaxPower, 8 );
+  return;
+}
+/* function to print interface descriptor */
+void printintfdescr( uint8_t* descr_ptr )
+{
+  USB_INTERFACE_DESCRIPTOR* intf_ptr = ( USB_INTERFACE_DESCRIPTOR* )descr_ptr;
+  printProgStr(Int_Header_str);
+  printProgStr(Int_Number_str);
+  print_hex( intf_ptr->bInterfaceNumber, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Int_Alt_str);
+  print_hex( intf_ptr->bAlternateSetting, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Int_Endpoints_str);
+  print_hex( intf_ptr->bNumEndpoints, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Int_Class_str);
+  print_hex( intf_ptr->bInterfaceClass, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Int_Subclass_str);
+  print_hex( intf_ptr->bInterfaceSubClass, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Int_Protocol_str);
+  print_hex( intf_ptr->bInterfaceProtocol, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Int_String_str);
+  print_hex( intf_ptr->iInterface, 8 );
+  return;
+}
+/* function to print endpoint descriptor */
+void printepdescr( uint8_t* descr_ptr )
+{
+  USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR* ep_ptr = ( USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR* )descr_ptr;
+  printProgStr(End_Header_str);
+  printProgStr(End_Address_str);
+  print_hex( ep_ptr->bEndpointAddress, 8 );
+  printProgStr(End_Attr_str);
+  print_hex( ep_ptr->bmAttributes, 8 );
+  printProgStr(End_Pktsize_str);
+  print_hex( ep_ptr->wMaxPacketSize, 16 );
+  printProgStr(End_Interval_str);
+  print_hex( ep_ptr->bInterval, 8 );
+
+  return;
+}
+/*function to print unknown descriptor */
+void printunkdescr( uint8_t* descr_ptr )
+{
+  byte length = *descr_ptr;
+  byte i;
+  printProgStr(Unk_Header_str);
+  printProgStr(Unk_Length_str);
+  print_hex( *descr_ptr, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Unk_Type_str);
+  print_hex( *(descr_ptr + 1 ), 8 );
+  printProgStr(Unk_Contents_str);
+  descr_ptr += 2;
+  for ( i = 0; i < length; i++ ) {
+    print_hex( *descr_ptr, 8 );
+    descr_ptr++;
+  }
+}
+
+
+/* Print a string from Program Memory directly to save RAM */
+void printProgStr(const char* str)
+{
+  char c;
+  if (!str) return;
+  while ((c = pgm_read_byte(str++)))
+    Serial.print(c);
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/USB_desc/pgmstrings.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/USB_desc/pgmstrings.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bdb0077ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/USB_desc/pgmstrings.h
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+#if !defined(__PGMSTRINGS_H__)
+#define __PGMSTRINGS_H__
+
+#define LOBYTE(x) ((char*)(&(x)))[0]
+#define HIBYTE(x) ((char*)(&(x)))[1]
+#define BUFSIZE 256    //buffer size
+ 
+
+/* Print strings in Program Memory */
+const char Gen_Error_str[] PROGMEM = "\r\nRequest error. Error code:\t"; 
+const char Dev_Header_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nDevice descriptor: ";
+const char Dev_Length_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nDescriptor Length:\t";
+const char Dev_Type_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nDescriptor type:\t";
+const char Dev_Version_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nUSB version:\t\t";
+const char Dev_Class_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nDevice class:\t\t";
+const char Dev_Subclass_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nDevice Subclass:\t";
+const char Dev_Protocol_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nDevice Protocol:\t";
+const char Dev_Pktsize_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nMax.packet size:\t";
+const char Dev_Vendor_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nVendor  ID:\t\t";
+const char Dev_Product_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nProduct ID:\t\t";
+const char Dev_Revision_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nRevision ID:\t\t";
+const char Dev_Mfg_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nMfg.string index:\t";
+const char Dev_Prod_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nProd.string index:\t";
+const char Dev_Serial_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nSerial number index:\t";
+const char Dev_Nconf_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nNumber of conf.:\t";
+const char Conf_Trunc_str[] PROGMEM ="Total length truncated to 256 bytes";
+const char Conf_Header_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nConfiguration descriptor:";
+const char Conf_Totlen_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nTotal length:\t\t";
+const char Conf_Nint_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nNum.intf:\t\t";
+const char Conf_Value_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nConf.value:\t\t";
+const char Conf_String_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nConf.string:\t\t";
+const char Conf_Attr_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nAttr.:\t\t\t";
+const char Conf_Pwr_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nMax.pwr:\t\t";
+const char Int_Header_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\n\r\nInterface descriptor:";
+const char Int_Number_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nIntf.number:\t\t";
+const char Int_Alt_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nAlt.:\t\t\t";
+const char Int_Endpoints_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nEndpoints:\t\t";
+const char Int_Class_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nIntf. Class:\t\t";
+const char Int_Subclass_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nIntf. Subclass:\t\t";
+const char Int_Protocol_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nIntf. Protocol:\t\t";
+const char Int_String_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nIntf.string:\t\t";
+const char End_Header_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\n\r\nEndpoint descriptor:";
+const char End_Address_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nEndpoint address:\t";
+const char End_Attr_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nAttr.:\t\t\t";
+const char End_Pktsize_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nMax.pkt size:\t\t";
+const char End_Interval_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nPolling interval:\t";
+const char Unk_Header_str[] PROGMEM = "\r\nUnknown descriptor:";
+const char Unk_Length_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nLength:\t\t";
+const char Unk_Type_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nType:\t\t";
+const char Unk_Contents_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nContents:\t";
+ 
+#endif // __PGMSTRINGS_H__
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Xbox/XBOXOLD/XBOXOLD.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Xbox/XBOXOLD/XBOXOLD.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..64a3ed612
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Xbox/XBOXOLD/XBOXOLD.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+/*
+ Example sketch for the original Xbox library - developed by Kristian Lauszus
+ For more information visit my blog: http://blog.tkjelectronics.dk/ or
+ send me an e-mail:  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#include <XBOXOLD.h>
+#include <usbhub.h>
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+USB Usb;
+USBHub  Hub1(&Usb); // The controller has a built in hub, so this instance is needed
+XBOXOLD Xbox(&Usb);
+
+void setup() {
+  Serial.begin(115200);
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1) {
+    Serial.print(F("\r\nOSC did not start"));
+    while (1); // halt
+  }
+  Serial.print(F("\r\nXBOX Library Started"));
+}
+void loop() {
+  Usb.Task();
+  if (Xbox.XboxConnected) {
+    if (Xbox.getButtonPress(BLACK) || Xbox.getButtonPress(WHITE)) {
+      Serial.print("BLACK: ");
+      Serial.print(Xbox.getButtonPress(BLACK));
+      Serial.print("\tWHITE: ");
+      Serial.println(Xbox.getButtonPress(WHITE));
+      Xbox.setRumbleOn(Xbox.getButtonPress(BLACK), Xbox.getButtonPress(WHITE));
+    } else
+      Xbox.setRumbleOn(0, 0);
+
+    if (Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX) < -7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY) < -7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatX) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatX) < -7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatY) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatY) < -7500) {
+      if (Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX) < -7500) {
+        Serial.print(F("LeftHatX: "));
+        Serial.print(Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX));
+        Serial.print("\t");
+      }
+      if (Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY) < -7500) {
+        Serial.print(F("LeftHatY: "));
+        Serial.print(Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY));
+        Serial.print("\t");
+      }
+      if (Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatX) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatX) < -7500) {
+        Serial.print(F("RightHatX: "));
+        Serial.print(Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatX));
+        Serial.print("\t");
+      }
+      if (Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatY) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatY) < -7500) {
+        Serial.print(F("RightHatY: "));
+        Serial.print(Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatY));
+      }
+      Serial.println();
+    }
+
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(UP))
+      Serial.println(F("Up"));
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(DOWN))
+      Serial.println(F("Down"));
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(LEFT))
+      Serial.println(F("Left"));
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(RIGHT))
+      Serial.println(F("Right"));
+
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(START))
+      Serial.println(F("Start"));
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(BACK))
+      Serial.println(F("Back"));
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(L3))
+      Serial.println(F("L3"));
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(R3))
+      Serial.println(F("R3"));
+
+    if (Xbox.getButtonPress(A)) {
+      Serial.print(F("A: "));
+      Serial.println(Xbox.getButtonPress(A));
+    }
+    if (Xbox.getButtonPress(B)) {
+      Serial.print(F("B: "));
+      Serial.println(Xbox.getButtonPress(B));
+    }
+    if (Xbox.getButtonPress(X)) {
+      Serial.print(F("X: "));
+      Serial.println(Xbox.getButtonPress(X));
+    }
+    if (Xbox.getButtonPress(Y)) {
+      Serial.print(F("Y: "));
+      Serial.println(Xbox.getButtonPress(Y));
+    }
+    if (Xbox.getButtonPress(L1)) {
+      Serial.print(F("L1: "));
+      Serial.println(Xbox.getButtonPress(L1));
+    }
+    if (Xbox.getButtonPress(R1)) {
+      Serial.print(F("R1: "));
+      Serial.println(Xbox.getButtonPress(R1));
+    }
+  }
+  delay(1);
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Xbox/XBOXONE/XBOXONE.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Xbox/XBOXONE/XBOXONE.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9526f53d1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Xbox/XBOXONE/XBOXONE.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+/*
+ Example sketch for the Xbox ONE USB library - by guruthree, based on work by
+ Kristian Lauszus.
+ */
+
+#include <XBOXONE.h>
+// Satisfy IDE, which only needs to see the include statment in the ino.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#endif
+
+USB Usb;
+XBOXONE Xbox(&Usb);
+
+void setup() {
+  Serial.begin(115200);
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1) {
+    Serial.print(F("\r\nOSC did not start"));
+    while (1); //halt
+  }
+  Serial.print(F("\r\nXBOX USB Library Started"));
+}
+void loop() {
+  Usb.Task();
+  if (Xbox.XboxOneConnected) {
+    if (Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX) < -7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY) < -7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatX) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatX) < -7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatY) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatY) < -7500) {
+      if (Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX) < -7500) {
+        Serial.print(F("LeftHatX: "));
+        Serial.print(Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX));
+        Serial.print("\t");
+      }
+      if (Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY) < -7500) {
+        Serial.print(F("LeftHatY: "));
+        Serial.print(Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY));
+        Serial.print("\t");
+      }
+      if (Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatX) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatX) < -7500) {
+        Serial.print(F("RightHatX: "));
+        Serial.print(Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatX));
+        Serial.print("\t");
+      }
+      if (Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatY) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatY) < -7500) {
+        Serial.print(F("RightHatY: "));
+        Serial.print(Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatY));
+      }
+      Serial.println();
+    }
+
+    if (Xbox.getButtonPress(L2) > 0 || Xbox.getButtonPress(R2) > 0) {
+      if (Xbox.getButtonPress(L2) > 0) {
+        Serial.print(F("L2: "));
+        Serial.print(Xbox.getButtonPress(L2));
+        Serial.print("\t");
+      }
+      if (Xbox.getButtonPress(R2) > 0) {
+        Serial.print(F("R2: "));
+        Serial.print(Xbox.getButtonPress(R2));
+        Serial.print("\t");
+      }
+      Serial.println();
+    }
+
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(UP))
+      Serial.println(F("Up"));
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(DOWN))
+      Serial.println(F("Down"));
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(LEFT))
+      Serial.println(F("Left"));
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(RIGHT))
+      Serial.println(F("Right"));
+
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(START))
+      Serial.println(F("Start"));
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(BACK))
+      Serial.println(F("Back"));
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(XBOX))
+      Serial.println(F("Xbox"));
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(SYNC))
+      Serial.println(F("Sync"));
+
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(L1))
+      Serial.println(F("L1"));
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(R1))
+      Serial.println(F("R1"));
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(L2))
+      Serial.println(F("L2"));
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(R2))
+      Serial.println(F("R2"));
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(L3))
+      Serial.println(F("L3"));
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(R3))
+      Serial.println(F("R3"));
+
+
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(A))
+      Serial.println(F("A"));
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(B))
+      Serial.println(F("B"));
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(X))
+      Serial.println(F("X"));
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(Y))
+      Serial.println(F("Y"));
+  }
+  delay(1);
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Xbox/XBOXRECV/XBOXRECV.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Xbox/XBOXRECV/XBOXRECV.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..491b287e4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Xbox/XBOXRECV/XBOXRECV.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,122 @@
+/*
+ Example sketch for the Xbox Wireless Reciver library - developed by Kristian Lauszus
+ It supports up to four controllers wirelessly
+ For more information see the blog post: http://blog.tkjelectronics.dk/2012/12/xbox-360-receiver-added-to-the-usb-host-library/ or
+ send me an e-mail:  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#include <XBOXRECV.h>
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+USB Usb;
+XBOXRECV Xbox(&Usb);
+
+void setup() {
+  Serial.begin(115200);
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1) {
+    Serial.print(F("\r\nOSC did not start"));
+    while (1); //halt
+  }
+  Serial.print(F("\r\nXbox Wireless Receiver Library Started"));
+}
+void loop() {
+  Usb.Task();
+  if (Xbox.XboxReceiverConnected) {
+    for (uint8_t i = 0; i < 4; i++) {
+      if (Xbox.Xbox360Connected[i]) {
+        if (Xbox.getButtonPress(L2, i) || Xbox.getButtonPress(R2, i)) {
+          Serial.print("L2: ");
+          Serial.print(Xbox.getButtonPress(L2, i));
+          Serial.print("\tR2: ");
+          Serial.println(Xbox.getButtonPress(R2, i));
+          Xbox.setRumbleOn(Xbox.getButtonPress(L2, i), Xbox.getButtonPress(R2, i), i);
+        }
+
+        if (Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX, i) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX, i) < -7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY, i) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY, i) < -7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatX, i) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatX, i) < -7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatY, i) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatY, i) < -7500) {
+          if (Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX, i) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX, i) < -7500) {
+            Serial.print(F("LeftHatX: "));
+            Serial.print(Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX, i));
+            Serial.print("\t");
+          }
+          if (Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY, i) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY, i) < -7500) {
+            Serial.print(F("LeftHatY: "));
+            Serial.print(Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY, i));
+            Serial.print("\t");
+          }
+          if (Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatX, i) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatX, i) < -7500) {
+            Serial.print(F("RightHatX: "));
+            Serial.print(Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatX, i));
+            Serial.print("\t");
+          }
+          if (Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatY, i) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatY, i) < -7500) {
+            Serial.print(F("RightHatY: "));
+            Serial.print(Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatY, i));
+          }
+          Serial.println();
+        }
+
+        if (Xbox.getButtonClick(UP, i)) {
+          Xbox.setLedOn(LED1, i);
+          Serial.println(F("Up"));
+        }
+        if (Xbox.getButtonClick(DOWN, i)) {
+          Xbox.setLedOn(LED4, i);
+          Serial.println(F("Down"));
+        }
+        if (Xbox.getButtonClick(LEFT, i)) {
+          Xbox.setLedOn(LED3, i);
+          Serial.println(F("Left"));
+        }
+        if (Xbox.getButtonClick(RIGHT, i)) {
+          Xbox.setLedOn(LED2, i);
+          Serial.println(F("Right"));
+        }
+
+        if (Xbox.getButtonClick(START, i)) {
+          Xbox.setLedMode(ALTERNATING, i);
+          Serial.println(F("Start"));
+        }
+        if (Xbox.getButtonClick(BACK, i)) {
+          Xbox.setLedBlink(ALL, i);
+          Serial.println(F("Back"));
+        }
+        if (Xbox.getButtonClick(L3, i))
+          Serial.println(F("L3"));
+        if (Xbox.getButtonClick(R3, i))
+          Serial.println(F("R3"));
+
+        if (Xbox.getButtonClick(L1, i))
+          Serial.println(F("L1"));
+        if (Xbox.getButtonClick(R1, i))
+          Serial.println(F("R1"));
+        if (Xbox.getButtonClick(XBOX, i)) {
+          Xbox.setLedMode(ROTATING, i);
+          Serial.print(F("Xbox (Battery: "));
+          Serial.print(Xbox.getBatteryLevel(i)); // The battery level in the range 0-3
+          Serial.println(F(")"));
+        }
+        if (Xbox.getButtonClick(SYNC, i)) {
+          Serial.println(F("Sync"));
+          Xbox.disconnect(i);
+        }
+
+        if (Xbox.getButtonClick(A, i))
+          Serial.println(F("A"));
+        if (Xbox.getButtonClick(B, i))
+          Serial.println(F("B"));
+        if (Xbox.getButtonClick(X, i))
+          Serial.println(F("X"));
+        if (Xbox.getButtonClick(Y, i))
+          Serial.println(F("Y"));
+      }
+    }
+  }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Xbox/XBOXUSB/XBOXUSB.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Xbox/XBOXUSB/XBOXUSB.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8a5691c6e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/Xbox/XBOXUSB/XBOXUSB.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,113 @@
+/*
+ Example sketch for the Xbox 360 USB library - developed by Kristian Lauszus
+ For more information visit my blog: http://blog.tkjelectronics.dk/ or
+ send me an e-mail:  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#include <XBOXUSB.h>
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+USB Usb;
+XBOXUSB Xbox(&Usb);
+
+void setup() {
+  Serial.begin(115200);
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1) {
+    Serial.print(F("\r\nOSC did not start"));
+    while (1); //halt
+  }
+  Serial.print(F("\r\nXBOX USB Library Started"));
+}
+void loop() {
+  Usb.Task();
+  if (Xbox.Xbox360Connected) {
+    if (Xbox.getButtonPress(L2) || Xbox.getButtonPress(R2)) {
+      Serial.print("L2: ");
+      Serial.print(Xbox.getButtonPress(L2));
+      Serial.print("\tR2: ");
+      Serial.println(Xbox.getButtonPress(R2));
+      Xbox.setRumbleOn(Xbox.getButtonPress(L2), Xbox.getButtonPress(R2));
+    } else
+      Xbox.setRumbleOn(0, 0);
+
+    if (Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX) < -7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY) < -7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatX) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatX) < -7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatY) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatY) < -7500) {
+      if (Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX) < -7500) {
+        Serial.print(F("LeftHatX: "));
+        Serial.print(Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatX));
+        Serial.print("\t");
+      }
+      if (Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY) < -7500) {
+        Serial.print(F("LeftHatY: "));
+        Serial.print(Xbox.getAnalogHat(LeftHatY));
+        Serial.print("\t");
+      }
+      if (Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatX) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatX) < -7500) {
+        Serial.print(F("RightHatX: "));
+        Serial.print(Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatX));
+        Serial.print("\t");
+      }
+      if (Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatY) > 7500 || Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatY) < -7500) {
+        Serial.print(F("RightHatY: "));
+        Serial.print(Xbox.getAnalogHat(RightHatY));
+      }
+      Serial.println();
+    }
+
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(UP)) {
+      Xbox.setLedOn(LED1);
+      Serial.println(F("Up"));
+    }
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(DOWN)) {
+      Xbox.setLedOn(LED4);
+      Serial.println(F("Down"));
+    }
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(LEFT)) {
+      Xbox.setLedOn(LED3);
+      Serial.println(F("Left"));
+    }
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(RIGHT)) {
+      Xbox.setLedOn(LED2);
+      Serial.println(F("Right"));
+    }
+
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(START)) {
+      Xbox.setLedMode(ALTERNATING);
+      Serial.println(F("Start"));
+    }
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(BACK)) {
+      Xbox.setLedBlink(ALL);
+      Serial.println(F("Back"));
+    }
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(L3))
+      Serial.println(F("L3"));
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(R3))
+      Serial.println(F("R3"));
+
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(L1))
+      Serial.println(F("L1"));
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(R1))
+      Serial.println(F("R1"));
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(XBOX)) {
+      Xbox.setLedMode(ROTATING);
+      Serial.println(F("Xbox"));
+    }
+
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(A))
+      Serial.println(F("A"));
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(B))
+      Serial.println(F("B"));
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(X))
+      Serial.println(F("X"));
+    if (Xbox.getButtonClick(Y))
+      Serial.println(F("Y"));
+  }
+  delay(1);
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/acm/acm_terminal/acm_terminal.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/acm/acm_terminal/acm_terminal.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f509cda89
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/acm/acm_terminal/acm_terminal.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+#include <cdcacm.h>
+#include <usbhub.h>
+
+#include "pgmstrings.h"
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+class ACMAsyncOper : public CDCAsyncOper
+{
+public:
+    uint8_t OnInit(ACM *pacm);
+};
+
+uint8_t ACMAsyncOper::OnInit(ACM *pacm)
+{
+    uint8_t rcode;
+    // Set DTR = 1 RTS=1
+    rcode = pacm->SetControlLineState(3);
+
+    if (rcode)
+    {
+        ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("SetControlLineState"), rcode);
+        return rcode;
+    }
+
+    LINE_CODING	lc;
+    lc.dwDTERate	= 115200;
+    lc.bCharFormat	= 0;
+    lc.bParityType	= 0;
+    lc.bDataBits	= 8;
+
+    rcode = pacm->SetLineCoding(&lc);
+
+    if (rcode)
+        ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("SetLineCoding"), rcode);
+
+    return rcode;
+}
+
+USB     Usb;
+//USBHub     Hub(&Usb);
+ACMAsyncOper  AsyncOper;
+ACM           Acm(&Usb, &AsyncOper);
+
+void setup()
+{
+  Serial.begin( 115200 );
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  Serial.println("Start");
+
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1)
+      Serial.println("OSCOKIRQ failed to assert");
+
+  delay( 200 );
+}
+
+void loop()
+{
+    Usb.Task();
+
+    if( Acm.isReady()) {
+       uint8_t rcode;
+
+       /* reading the keyboard */
+       if(Serial.available()) {
+         uint8_t data= Serial.read();
+         /* sending to the phone */
+         rcode = Acm.SndData(1, &data);
+         if (rcode)
+            ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("SndData"), rcode);
+       }//if(Serial.available()...
+
+       delay(50);
+
+        /* reading the phone */
+        /* buffer size must be greater or equal to max.packet size */
+        /* it it set to 64 (largest possible max.packet size) here, can be tuned down
+        for particular endpoint */
+        uint8_t  buf[64];
+        uint16_t rcvd = 64;
+        rcode = Acm.RcvData(&rcvd, buf);
+         if (rcode && rcode != hrNAK)
+            ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("Ret"), rcode);
+
+            if( rcvd ) { //more than zero bytes received
+              for(uint16_t i=0; i < rcvd; i++ ) {
+                Serial.print((char)buf[i]); //printing on the screen
+              }
+            }
+        delay(10);
+    }//if( Usb.getUsbTaskState() == USB_STATE_RUNNING..
+}
+
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/acm/acm_terminal/pgmstrings.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/acm/acm_terminal/pgmstrings.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bdb0077ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/acm/acm_terminal/pgmstrings.h
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+#if !defined(__PGMSTRINGS_H__)
+#define __PGMSTRINGS_H__
+
+#define LOBYTE(x) ((char*)(&(x)))[0]
+#define HIBYTE(x) ((char*)(&(x)))[1]
+#define BUFSIZE 256    //buffer size
+ 
+
+/* Print strings in Program Memory */
+const char Gen_Error_str[] PROGMEM = "\r\nRequest error. Error code:\t"; 
+const char Dev_Header_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nDevice descriptor: ";
+const char Dev_Length_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nDescriptor Length:\t";
+const char Dev_Type_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nDescriptor type:\t";
+const char Dev_Version_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nUSB version:\t\t";
+const char Dev_Class_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nDevice class:\t\t";
+const char Dev_Subclass_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nDevice Subclass:\t";
+const char Dev_Protocol_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nDevice Protocol:\t";
+const char Dev_Pktsize_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nMax.packet size:\t";
+const char Dev_Vendor_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nVendor  ID:\t\t";
+const char Dev_Product_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nProduct ID:\t\t";
+const char Dev_Revision_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nRevision ID:\t\t";
+const char Dev_Mfg_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nMfg.string index:\t";
+const char Dev_Prod_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nProd.string index:\t";
+const char Dev_Serial_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nSerial number index:\t";
+const char Dev_Nconf_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nNumber of conf.:\t";
+const char Conf_Trunc_str[] PROGMEM ="Total length truncated to 256 bytes";
+const char Conf_Header_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nConfiguration descriptor:";
+const char Conf_Totlen_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nTotal length:\t\t";
+const char Conf_Nint_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nNum.intf:\t\t";
+const char Conf_Value_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nConf.value:\t\t";
+const char Conf_String_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nConf.string:\t\t";
+const char Conf_Attr_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nAttr.:\t\t\t";
+const char Conf_Pwr_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nMax.pwr:\t\t";
+const char Int_Header_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\n\r\nInterface descriptor:";
+const char Int_Number_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nIntf.number:\t\t";
+const char Int_Alt_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nAlt.:\t\t\t";
+const char Int_Endpoints_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nEndpoints:\t\t";
+const char Int_Class_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nIntf. Class:\t\t";
+const char Int_Subclass_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nIntf. Subclass:\t\t";
+const char Int_Protocol_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nIntf. Protocol:\t\t";
+const char Int_String_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nIntf.string:\t\t";
+const char End_Header_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\n\r\nEndpoint descriptor:";
+const char End_Address_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nEndpoint address:\t";
+const char End_Attr_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nAttr.:\t\t\t";
+const char End_Pktsize_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nMax.pkt size:\t\t";
+const char End_Interval_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nPolling interval:\t";
+const char Unk_Header_str[] PROGMEM = "\r\nUnknown descriptor:";
+const char Unk_Length_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nLength:\t\t";
+const char Unk_Type_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nType:\t\t";
+const char Unk_Contents_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nContents:\t";
+ 
+#endif // __PGMSTRINGS_H__
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/adk/ArduinoBlinkLED/ArduinoBlinkLED.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/adk/ArduinoBlinkLED/ArduinoBlinkLED.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d59b9bb3d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/adk/ArduinoBlinkLED/ArduinoBlinkLED.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+// The source for the Android application can be found at the following link: https://github.com/Lauszus/ArduinoBlinkLED
+// The code for the Android application is heavily based on this guide: http://allaboutee.com/2011/12/31/arduino-adk-board-blink-an-led-with-your-phone-code-and-explanation/ by Miguel
+#include <adk.h>
+
+//
+// CAUTION! WARNING! ATTENTION! VORSICHT! ADVARSEL! ¡CUIDADO! В�ИМ��ИЕ!
+//
+// Pin 13 is occupied by the SCK pin on various Arduino boards,
+// including Uno, Duemilanove, etc., so use a different pin for those boards.
+//
+// CAUTION! WARNING! ATTENTION! VORSICHT! ADVARSEL! ¡CUIDADO! В�ИМ��ИЕ!
+//
+#if defined(LED_BUILTIN)
+#define LED LED_BUILTIN // Use built in LED
+#else
+#define LED 9 // Set to something here that makes sense for your board.
+#endif
+
+
+// Satisfy IDE, which only needs to see the include statment in the ino.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+USB Usb;
+ADK adk(&Usb, "TKJElectronics", // Manufacturer Name
+              "ArduinoBlinkLED", // Model Name
+              "Example sketch for the USB Host Shield", // Description (user-visible string)
+              "1.0", // Version
+              "http://www.tkjelectronics.dk/uploads/ArduinoBlinkLED.apk", // URL (web page to visit if no installed apps support the accessory)
+              "123456789"); // Serial Number (optional)
+
+uint32_t timer;
+bool connected;
+
+void setup() {
+  Serial.begin(115200);
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1) {
+    Serial.print("\r\nOSCOKIRQ failed to assert");
+    while (1); // halt
+  }
+  pinMode(LED, OUTPUT);
+  Serial.print("\r\nArduino Blink LED Started");
+}
+
+void loop() {
+  Usb.Task();
+
+  if (adk.isReady()) {
+    if (!connected) {
+      connected = true;
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nConnected to accessory"));
+    }
+
+    uint8_t msg[1];
+    uint16_t len = sizeof(msg);
+    uint8_t rcode = adk.RcvData(&len, msg);
+    if (rcode && rcode != hrNAK) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nData rcv: "));
+      Serial.print(rcode, HEX);
+    } else if (len > 0) {
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nData Packet: "));
+      Serial.print(msg[0]);
+      digitalWrite(LED, msg[0] ? HIGH : LOW);
+    }
+
+    if (millis() - timer >= 1000) { // Send data every 1s
+      timer = millis();
+      rcode = adk.SndData(sizeof(timer), (uint8_t*)&timer);
+      if (rcode && rcode != hrNAK) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nData send: "));
+        Serial.print(rcode, HEX);
+      } else if (rcode != hrNAK) {
+        Serial.print(F("\r\nTimer: "));
+        Serial.print(timer);
+      }
+    }
+  } else {
+    if (connected) {
+      connected = false;
+      Serial.print(F("\r\nDisconnected from accessory"));
+      digitalWrite(LED, LOW);
+    }
+  }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/adk/adk_barcode/adk_barcode.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/adk/adk_barcode/adk_barcode.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a308ff0f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/adk/adk_barcode/adk_barcode.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+/**/
+/* A sketch demonstrating data exchange between two USB devices - a HID barcode scanner and ADK-compatible Android phone */
+/**/
+#include <adk.h>
+#include <hidboot.h>
+#include <usbhub.h>
+
+// Satisfy IDE, which only needs to see the include statment in the ino.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+USB Usb;
+USBHub Hub1(&Usb);
+USBHub Hub2(&Usb);
+HIDBoot<HID_PROTOCOL_KEYBOARD> Keyboard(&Usb);
+
+ADK adk(&Usb,"Circuits@Home, ltd.",
+            "USB Host Shield",
+            "Arduino Terminal for Android",
+            "1.0",
+            "http://www.circuitsathome.com",
+            "0000000000000001");
+
+
+class KbdRptParser : public KeyboardReportParser
+{
+
+protected:
+	void OnKeyDown	(uint8_t mod, uint8_t key);
+	void OnKeyPressed(uint8_t key);
+};
+
+void KbdRptParser::OnKeyDown(uint8_t mod, uint8_t key)
+{
+    uint8_t c = OemToAscii(mod, key);
+
+    if (c)
+        OnKeyPressed(c);
+}
+
+/* what to do when symbol arrives */
+void KbdRptParser::OnKeyPressed(uint8_t key)
+{
+const char* new_line = "\n";
+uint8_t rcode;
+uint8_t keylcl;
+
+ if( adk.isReady() == false ) {
+   return;
+ }
+
+  keylcl = key;
+
+  if( keylcl == 0x13 ) {
+    rcode = adk.SndData( strlen( new_line ), (uint8_t *)new_line );
+  }
+  else {
+    rcode = adk.SndData( 1, &keylcl );
+  }
+
+  Serial.print((char) keylcl );
+  Serial.print(" : ");
+  Serial.println( keylcl, HEX );
+};
+
+KbdRptParser Prs;
+
+void setup()
+{
+  Serial.begin(115200);
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  Serial.println("\r\nADK demo start");
+
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1) {
+    Serial.println("OSCOKIRQ failed to assert");
+    while(1); //halt
+  }//if (Usb.Init() == -1...
+
+  Keyboard.SetReportParser(0, (HIDReportParser*)&Prs);
+
+  delay( 200 );
+}
+
+void loop()
+{
+  Usb.Task();
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/adk/demokit_20/demokit_20.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/adk/demokit_20/demokit_20.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f65adf57b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/adk/demokit_20/demokit_20.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+#include <adk.h>
+#include <usbhub.h>
+
+// Satisfy IDE, which only needs to see the include statment in the ino.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+USB Usb;
+USBHub hub0(&Usb);
+USBHub hub1(&Usb);
+ADK adk(&Usb,"Google, Inc.",
+            "DemoKit",
+            "DemoKit Arduino Board",
+            "1.0",
+            "http://www.android.com",
+            "0000000012345678");
+uint8_t  b, b1;
+
+
+#define  LED1_RED       3
+#define  BUTTON1        2
+
+void init_buttons()
+{
+	pinMode(BUTTON1, INPUT);
+
+	// enable the internal pullups
+	digitalWrite(BUTTON1, HIGH);
+}
+
+void init_leds()
+{
+	digitalWrite(LED1_RED, 0);
+
+	pinMode(LED1_RED, OUTPUT);
+}
+
+void setup()
+{
+	Serial.begin(115200);
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+	Serial.println("\r\nADK demo start");
+
+        if (Usb.Init() == -1) {
+          Serial.println("OSCOKIRQ failed to assert");
+        while(1); //halt
+        }//if (Usb.Init() == -1...
+
+
+	init_leds();
+	init_buttons();
+	b1 = digitalRead(BUTTON1);
+}
+
+void loop()
+{
+  uint8_t rcode;
+  uint8_t msg[3] = { 0x00 };
+   Usb.Task();
+
+   if( adk.isReady() == false ) {
+     analogWrite(LED1_RED, 255);
+     return;
+   }
+   uint16_t len = sizeof(msg);
+
+   rcode = adk.RcvData(&len, msg);
+   if( rcode ) {
+     USBTRACE2("Data rcv. :", rcode );
+   }
+   if(len > 0) {
+     USBTRACE("\r\nData Packet.");
+    // assumes only one command per packet
+    if (msg[0] == 0x2) {
+      switch( msg[1] ) {
+        case 0:
+          analogWrite(LED1_RED, 255 - msg[2]);
+          break;
+      }//switch( msg[1]...
+    }//if (msg[0] == 0x2...
+   }//if( len > 0...
+
+   msg[0] = 0x1;
+
+   b = digitalRead(BUTTON1);
+   if (b != b1) {
+     USBTRACE("\r\nButton state changed");
+     msg[1] = 0;
+     msg[2] = b ? 0 : 1;
+     rcode = adk.SndData( 3, msg );
+     if( rcode ) {
+       USBTRACE2("Button send: ", rcode );
+     }
+     b1 = b;
+    }//if (b != b1...
+
+
+      delay( 10 );
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/adk/term_test/term_test.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/adk/term_test/term_test.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..db681c3b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/adk/term_test/term_test.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+#include <adk.h>
+#include <usbhub.h>
+
+// Satisfy IDE, which only needs to see the include statment in the ino.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+USB Usb;
+//USBHub     Hub(&Usb);
+
+ADK adk(&Usb,"Circuits@Home, ltd.",
+            "USB Host Shield",
+            "Arduino Terminal for Android",
+            "1.0",
+            "http://www.circuitsathome.com",
+            "0000000000000001");
+
+void setup()
+{
+	Serial.begin(115200);
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+	Serial.println("\r\nADK demo start");
+
+        if (Usb.Init() == -1) {
+          Serial.println("OSCOKIRQ failed to assert");
+        while(1); //halt
+        }//if (Usb.Init() == -1...
+}
+
+void loop()
+{
+  uint8_t rcode;
+  uint8_t msg[64] = { 0x00 };
+  const char* recv = "Received: ";
+
+   Usb.Task();
+
+   if( adk.isReady() == false ) {
+     return;
+   }
+   uint16_t len = 64;
+
+   rcode = adk.RcvData(&len, msg);
+   if( rcode & ( rcode != hrNAK )) {
+     USBTRACE2("Data rcv. :", rcode );
+   }
+   if(len > 0) {
+     USBTRACE("\r\nData Packet.");
+
+    for( uint8_t i = 0; i < len; i++ ) {
+      Serial.print((char)msg[i]);
+    }
+    /* sending back what was received */
+    rcode = adk.SndData( strlen( recv ), (uint8_t *)recv );
+    rcode = adk.SndData( strlen(( char * )msg ), msg );
+
+   }//if( len > 0 )...
+
+   delay( 1000 );
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/adk/term_time/term_time.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/adk/term_time/term_time.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a3f1dbc8c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/adk/term_time/term_time.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+#include <adk.h>
+#include <usbhub.h>
+
+// Satisfy IDE, which only needs to see the include statment in the ino.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+USB Usb;
+
+ADK adk(&Usb,"Circuits@Home, ltd.",
+            "USB Host Shield",
+            "Arduino Terminal for Android",
+            "1.0",
+            "http://www.circuitsathome.com",
+            "0000000000000001");
+
+void setup()
+{
+	Serial.begin(115200);
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+	Serial.println("\r\nADK demo start");
+
+        if (Usb.Init() == -1) {
+          Serial.println("OSCOKIRQ failed to assert");
+        while(1); //halt
+        }//if (Usb.Init() == -1...
+}
+
+void loop()
+{
+  uint8_t buf[ 12 ] = { 0 }; //buffer to convert unsigned long to ASCII
+  const char* sec_ela = " seconds elapsed\r";
+  uint8_t rcode;
+
+   Usb.Task();
+   if( adk.isReady() == false ) {
+     return;
+   }
+
+    ultoa( millis()/1000, (char *)buf, 10 );
+
+    rcode = adk.SndData( strlen((char *)buf), buf );
+    rcode = adk.SndData( strlen( sec_ela), (uint8_t *)sec_ela );
+
+      delay( 1000 );
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/board_qc/board_qc.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/board_qc/board_qc.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..573c3ce08
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/board_qc/board_qc.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,259 @@
+/* USB Host Shield 2.0 board quality control routine */
+/* To see the output set your terminal speed to 115200 */
+/* for GPIO test to pass you need to connect GPIN0 to GPOUT7, GPIN1 to GPOUT6, etc. */
+/* otherwise press any key after getting GPIO error to complete the test */
+/**/
+#include <usbhub.h>
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <../../../../hardware/pic32/libraries/SPI/SPI.h> // Hack to use the SPI library
+#include <SPI.h> // Hack to use the SPI library
+#endif
+
+/* variables */
+uint8_t rcode;
+uint8_t usbstate;
+uint8_t laststate;
+//uint8_t buf[sizeof(USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR)];
+USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR buf;
+
+/* objects */
+USB Usb;
+//USBHub hub(&Usb);
+
+void setup() {
+        laststate = 0;
+        Serial.begin(115200);
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+        while(!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nCircuits At Home 2011"), 0x80);
+        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nUSB Host Shield Quality Control Routine"), 0x80);
+        /* SPI quick test - check revision register */
+        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nReading REVISION register... Die revision "), 0x80);
+        Usb.Init(); // Initializes SPI, we don't care about the return value here
+        {
+                uint8_t tmpbyte = Usb.regRd(rREVISION);
+                switch(tmpbyte) {
+                        case( 0x01): //rev.01
+                                E_Notify(PSTR("01"), 0x80);
+                                break;
+                        case( 0x12): //rev.02
+                                E_Notify(PSTR("02"), 0x80);
+                                break;
+                        case( 0x13): //rev.03
+                                E_Notify(PSTR("03"), 0x80);
+                                break;
+                        default:
+                                E_Notify(PSTR("invalid. Value returned: "), 0x80);
+                                print_hex(tmpbyte, 8);
+                                halt55();
+                                break;
+                }//switch( tmpbyte...
+        }//check revision register
+        /* SPI long test */
+        {
+                E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nSPI long test. Transfers 1MB of data. Each dot is 64K"), 0x80);
+                uint8_t sample_wr = 0;
+                uint8_t sample_rd = 0;
+                uint8_t gpinpol_copy = Usb.regRd(rGPINPOL);
+                for(uint8_t i = 0; i < 16; i++) {
+                        for(uint16_t j = 0; j < 65535; j++) {
+                                Usb.regWr(rGPINPOL, sample_wr);
+                                sample_rd = Usb.regRd(rGPINPOL);
+                                if(sample_rd != sample_wr) {
+                                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nTest failed.  "), 0x80);
+                                        E_Notify(PSTR("Value written: "), 0x80);
+                                        print_hex(sample_wr, 8);
+                                        E_Notify(PSTR(" read: "), 0x80);
+                                        print_hex(sample_rd, 8);
+                                        halt55();
+                                }//if( sample_rd != sample_wr..
+                                sample_wr++;
+                        }//for( uint16_t j...
+                        E_Notify(PSTR("."), 0x80);
+                }//for( uint8_t i...
+                Usb.regWr(rGPINPOL, gpinpol_copy);
+                E_Notify(PSTR(" SPI long test passed"), 0x80);
+        }//SPI long test
+        /* GPIO test */
+        /* in order to simplify board layout, GPIN pins on text fixture are connected to GPOUT */
+        /* in reverse order, i.e, GPIN0 is connected to GPOUT7, GPIN1 to GPOUT6, etc. */
+        {
+                uint8_t tmpbyte;
+                E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nGPIO test. Connect GPIN0 to GPOUT7, GPIN1 to GPOUT6, and so on"), 0x80);
+                for(uint8_t sample_gpio = 0; sample_gpio < 255; sample_gpio++) {
+                        Usb.gpioWr(sample_gpio);
+                        tmpbyte = Usb.gpioRd();
+                        /* bit reversing code copied vetbatim from http://graphics.stanford.edu/~seander/bithacks.html#BitReverseObvious */
+                        tmpbyte = ((tmpbyte * 0x0802LU & 0x22110LU) | (tmpbyte * 0x8020LU & 0x88440LU)) * 0x10101LU >> 16;
+                        if(sample_gpio != tmpbyte) {
+                                E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nTest failed. Value written: "), 0x80);
+                                print_hex(sample_gpio, 8);
+                                E_Notify(PSTR(" Value read: "), 0x80);
+                                print_hex(tmpbyte, 8);
+                                E_Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                press_any_key();
+                                break;
+                        }//if( sample_gpio != tmpbyte...
+                }//for( uint8_t sample_gpio...
+                E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nGPIO test passed."), 0x80);
+        }//GPIO test
+        /* PLL test. Stops/starts MAX3421E oscillator several times */
+        {
+                E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nPLL test. 100 chip resets will be performed"), 0x80);
+                /* check current state of the oscillator */
+                if(!(Usb.regRd(rUSBIRQ) & bmOSCOKIRQ)) { //wrong state - should be on
+                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nCurrent oscillator state unexpected."), 0x80);
+                        press_any_key();
+                }
+                /* Restart oscillator */
+                E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nResetting oscillator\r\n"), 0x80);
+                for(uint16_t i = 0; i < 100; i++) {
+                        E_Notify(PSTR("\rReset number "), 0x80);
+                        Serial.print(i, DEC);
+                        Usb.regWr(rUSBCTL, bmCHIPRES); //reset
+                        if(Usb.regRd(rUSBIRQ) & bmOSCOKIRQ) { //wrong state - should be off
+                                E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nCurrent oscillator state unexpected."), 0x80);
+                                halt55();
+                        }
+                        Usb.regWr(rUSBCTL, 0x00); //release from reset
+                        uint16_t j = 0;
+                        for(j = 1; j < 65535; j++) { //tracking off to on time
+                                if(Usb.regRd(rUSBIRQ) & bmOSCOKIRQ) {
+                                        E_Notify(PSTR(" Time to stabilize - "), 0x80);
+                                        Serial.print(j, DEC);
+                                        E_Notify(PSTR(" cycles\r\n"), 0x80);
+                                        break;
+                                }
+                        }//for( uint16_t j = 0; j < 65535; j++
+                        if(j == 0) {
+                                E_Notify(PSTR("PLL failed to stabilize"), 0x80);
+                                press_any_key();
+                        }
+                }//for( uint8_t i = 0; i < 255; i++
+
+        }//PLL test
+        /* initializing USB stack */
+        if(Usb.Init() == -1) {
+                E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nOSCOKIRQ failed to assert"), 0x80);
+                halt55();
+        }
+        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nChecking USB device communication.\r\n"), 0x80);
+}
+
+void loop() {
+        delay(200);
+        Usb.Task();
+        usbstate = Usb.getUsbTaskState();
+        if(usbstate != laststate) {
+                laststate = usbstate;
+                /**/
+                switch(usbstate) {
+                        case( USB_DETACHED_SUBSTATE_WAIT_FOR_DEVICE):
+                                E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nWaiting for device..."), 0x80);
+                                break;
+                        case( USB_ATTACHED_SUBSTATE_RESET_DEVICE):
+                                E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nDevice connected. Resetting..."), 0x80);
+                                break;
+                        case( USB_ATTACHED_SUBSTATE_WAIT_SOF):
+                                E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nReset complete. Waiting for the first SOF..."), 0x80);
+                                break;
+                        case( USB_ATTACHED_SUBSTATE_GET_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE):
+                                E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nSOF generation started. Enumerating device..."), 0x80);
+                                break;
+                        case( USB_STATE_ADDRESSING):
+                                E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nSetting device address..."), 0x80);
+                                break;
+                        case( USB_STATE_RUNNING):
+                                E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nGetting device descriptor"), 0x80);
+                                rcode = Usb.getDevDescr(1, 0, sizeof (USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR), (uint8_t*) & buf);
+
+                                if(rcode) {
+                                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nError reading device descriptor. Error code "), 0x80);
+                                        print_hex(rcode, 8);
+                                } else {
+                                        /**/
+                                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nDescriptor Length:\t"), 0x80);
+                                        print_hex(buf.bLength, 8);
+                                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nDescriptor type:\t"), 0x80);
+                                        print_hex(buf.bDescriptorType, 8);
+                                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nUSB version:\t\t"), 0x80);
+                                        print_hex(buf.bcdUSB, 16);
+                                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nDevice class:\t\t"), 0x80);
+                                        print_hex(buf.bDeviceClass, 8);
+                                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nDevice Subclass:\t"), 0x80);
+                                        print_hex(buf.bDeviceSubClass, 8);
+                                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nDevice Protocol:\t"), 0x80);
+                                        print_hex(buf.bDeviceProtocol, 8);
+                                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nMax.packet size:\t"), 0x80);
+                                        print_hex(buf.bMaxPacketSize0, 8);
+                                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nVendor  ID:\t\t"), 0x80);
+                                        print_hex(buf.idVendor, 16);
+                                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nProduct ID:\t\t"), 0x80);
+                                        print_hex(buf.idProduct, 16);
+                                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nRevision ID:\t\t"), 0x80);
+                                        print_hex(buf.bcdDevice, 16);
+                                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nMfg.string index:\t"), 0x80);
+                                        print_hex(buf.iManufacturer, 8);
+                                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nProd.string index:\t"), 0x80);
+                                        print_hex(buf.iProduct, 8);
+                                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nSerial number index:\t"), 0x80);
+                                        print_hex(buf.iSerialNumber, 8);
+                                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nNumber of conf.:\t"), 0x80);
+                                        print_hex(buf.bNumConfigurations, 8);
+                                        /**/
+                                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\n\nAll tests passed. Press RESET to restart test"), 0x80);
+                                        while(1);
+                                }
+                                break;
+                        case( USB_STATE_ERROR):
+                                E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nUSB state machine reached error state"), 0x80);
+                                break;
+
+                        default:
+                                break;
+                }//switch( usbstate...
+        }
+}//loop()...
+
+/* constantly transmits 0x55 via SPI to aid probing */
+void halt55() {
+
+        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nUnrecoverable error - test halted!!"), 0x80);
+        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\n0x55 pattern is transmitted via SPI"), 0x80);
+        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nPress RESET to restart test"), 0x80);
+
+        while(1) {
+                Usb.regWr(0x55, 0x55);
+        }
+}
+
+/* prints hex numbers with leading zeroes */
+void print_hex(int v, int num_places) {
+        int mask = 0, n, num_nibbles, digit;
+
+        for(n = 1; n <= num_places; n++) {
+                mask = (mask << 1) | 0x0001;
+        }
+        v = v & mask; // truncate v to specified number of places
+
+        num_nibbles = num_places / 4;
+        if((num_places % 4) != 0) {
+                ++num_nibbles;
+        }
+        do {
+                digit = ((v >> (num_nibbles - 1) * 4)) & 0x0f;
+                Serial.print(digit, HEX);
+        } while(--num_nibbles);
+}
+
+/* prints "Press any key" and returns when key is pressed */
+void press_any_key() {
+        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nPress any key to continue..."), 0x80);
+        while(Serial.available() <= 0); //wait for input
+        Serial.read(); //empty input buffer
+        return;
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/cdc_XR21B1411/XR_terminal/XR_terminal.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/cdc_XR21B1411/XR_terminal/XR_terminal.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0173a08b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/cdc_XR21B1411/XR_terminal/XR_terminal.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+#include <cdc_XR21B1411.h>
+
+// Satisfy IDE, which only needs to see the include statment in the ino.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+class ACMAsyncOper : public CDCAsyncOper
+{
+public:
+    uint8_t OnInit(ACM *pacm);
+};
+
+uint8_t ACMAsyncOper::OnInit(ACM *pacm)
+{
+    uint8_t rcode;
+    // Set DTR = 1 RTS=1
+    rcode = pacm->SetControlLineState(3);
+
+    if (rcode)
+    {
+        ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("SetControlLineState"), rcode);
+        return rcode;
+    }
+
+    LINE_CODING	lc;
+    lc.dwDTERate	= 115200;
+    lc.bCharFormat	= 0;
+    lc.bParityType	= 0;
+    lc.bDataBits	= 8;
+
+    rcode = pacm->SetLineCoding(&lc);
+
+    if (rcode)
+        ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("SetLineCoding"), rcode);
+
+    return rcode;
+}
+
+USB     Usb;
+ACMAsyncOper  AsyncOper;
+XR21B1411     Acm(&Usb, &AsyncOper);
+
+void setup() {
+        Serial.begin( 115200 );
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+        while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+        Serial.println("\r\n\r\nStart");
+
+        if (Usb.Init() == -1) Serial.println("OSCOKIRQ failed to assert");
+}
+
+void loop() {
+        Usb.Task();
+        if( Acm.isReady()) {
+                uint8_t rcode;
+                uint8_t  buf[1];
+                uint16_t rcvd = 1;
+
+                /* read keyboard */
+                if(Serial.available()) {
+                         uint8_t data = Serial.read();
+                         /* send */
+                         rcode = Acm.SndData(1, &data);
+                         if (rcode)
+                                 ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("SndData"), rcode);
+                 }
+                
+                /* read XR serial */
+                rcode = Acm.RcvData(&rcvd, buf);
+                if (rcode && rcode != hrNAK)
+                        ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("Ret"), rcode);
+
+                if( rcvd ) { //more than zero bytes received
+                        for(uint16_t i=0; i < rcvd; i++ ) {
+                                Serial.print((char)buf[i]);
+                        }
+                }
+        }
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/ftdi/USBFTDILoopback/USBFTDILoopback.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/ftdi/USBFTDILoopback/USBFTDILoopback.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5be7adc2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/ftdi/USBFTDILoopback/USBFTDILoopback.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+#include <cdcftdi.h>
+#include <usbhub.h>
+
+#include "pgmstrings.h"
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+class FTDIAsync : public FTDIAsyncOper
+{
+public:
+    uint8_t OnInit(FTDI *pftdi);
+};
+
+uint8_t FTDIAsync::OnInit(FTDI *pftdi)
+{
+    uint8_t rcode = 0;
+
+    rcode = pftdi->SetBaudRate(115200);
+
+    if (rcode)
+    {
+        ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("SetBaudRate"), rcode);
+        return rcode;
+    }
+    rcode = pftdi->SetFlowControl(FTDI_SIO_DISABLE_FLOW_CTRL);
+
+    if (rcode)
+        ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("SetFlowControl"), rcode);
+
+    return rcode;
+}
+
+USB              Usb;
+//USBHub         Hub(&Usb);
+FTDIAsync        FtdiAsync;
+FTDI             Ftdi(&Usb, &FtdiAsync);
+
+uint32_t next_time;
+
+void setup()
+{
+  Serial.begin( 115200 );
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  Serial.println("Start");
+
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1)
+      Serial.println("OSC did not start.");
+
+  delay( 200 );
+
+  next_time = millis() + 5000;
+}
+
+void loop()
+{
+    Usb.Task();
+
+    if( Usb.getUsbTaskState() == USB_STATE_RUNNING )
+    {
+        uint8_t  rcode;
+        char strbuf[] = "DEADBEEF";
+        //char strbuf[] = "The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog";
+        //char strbuf[] = "This string contains 61 character to demonstrate FTDI buffers"; //add one symbol to it to see some garbage
+        Serial.print(".");
+
+        rcode = Ftdi.SndData(strlen(strbuf), (uint8_t*)strbuf);
+
+	if (rcode)
+            ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("SndData"), rcode);
+
+        delay(50);
+
+        uint8_t  buf[64];
+
+        for (uint8_t i=0; i<64; i++)
+            buf[i] = 0;
+
+        uint16_t rcvd = 64;
+        rcode = Ftdi.RcvData(&rcvd, buf);
+
+        if (rcode && rcode != hrNAK)
+            ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("Ret"), rcode);
+
+        // The device reserves the first two bytes of data
+        //   to contain the current values of the modem and line status registers.
+        if (rcvd > 2)
+            Serial.print((char*)(buf+2));
+
+        delay(10);
+    }
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/ftdi/USBFTDILoopback/pgmstrings.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/ftdi/USBFTDILoopback/pgmstrings.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bdb0077ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/ftdi/USBFTDILoopback/pgmstrings.h
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+#if !defined(__PGMSTRINGS_H__)
+#define __PGMSTRINGS_H__
+
+#define LOBYTE(x) ((char*)(&(x)))[0]
+#define HIBYTE(x) ((char*)(&(x)))[1]
+#define BUFSIZE 256    //buffer size
+ 
+
+/* Print strings in Program Memory */
+const char Gen_Error_str[] PROGMEM = "\r\nRequest error. Error code:\t"; 
+const char Dev_Header_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nDevice descriptor: ";
+const char Dev_Length_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nDescriptor Length:\t";
+const char Dev_Type_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nDescriptor type:\t";
+const char Dev_Version_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nUSB version:\t\t";
+const char Dev_Class_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nDevice class:\t\t";
+const char Dev_Subclass_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nDevice Subclass:\t";
+const char Dev_Protocol_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nDevice Protocol:\t";
+const char Dev_Pktsize_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nMax.packet size:\t";
+const char Dev_Vendor_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nVendor  ID:\t\t";
+const char Dev_Product_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nProduct ID:\t\t";
+const char Dev_Revision_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nRevision ID:\t\t";
+const char Dev_Mfg_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nMfg.string index:\t";
+const char Dev_Prod_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nProd.string index:\t";
+const char Dev_Serial_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nSerial number index:\t";
+const char Dev_Nconf_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nNumber of conf.:\t";
+const char Conf_Trunc_str[] PROGMEM ="Total length truncated to 256 bytes";
+const char Conf_Header_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nConfiguration descriptor:";
+const char Conf_Totlen_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nTotal length:\t\t";
+const char Conf_Nint_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nNum.intf:\t\t";
+const char Conf_Value_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nConf.value:\t\t";
+const char Conf_String_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nConf.string:\t\t";
+const char Conf_Attr_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nAttr.:\t\t\t";
+const char Conf_Pwr_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nMax.pwr:\t\t";
+const char Int_Header_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\n\r\nInterface descriptor:";
+const char Int_Number_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nIntf.number:\t\t";
+const char Int_Alt_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nAlt.:\t\t\t";
+const char Int_Endpoints_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nEndpoints:\t\t";
+const char Int_Class_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nIntf. Class:\t\t";
+const char Int_Subclass_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nIntf. Subclass:\t\t";
+const char Int_Protocol_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nIntf. Protocol:\t\t";
+const char Int_String_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nIntf.string:\t\t";
+const char End_Header_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\n\r\nEndpoint descriptor:";
+const char End_Address_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nEndpoint address:\t";
+const char End_Attr_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nAttr.:\t\t\t";
+const char End_Pktsize_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nMax.pkt size:\t\t";
+const char End_Interval_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nPolling interval:\t";
+const char Unk_Header_str[] PROGMEM = "\r\nUnknown descriptor:";
+const char Unk_Length_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nLength:\t\t";
+const char Unk_Type_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nType:\t\t";
+const char Unk_Contents_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nContents:\t";
+ 
+#endif // __PGMSTRINGS_H__
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/hub_demo/hub_demo.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/hub_demo/hub_demo.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d8b2d4bb7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/hub_demo/hub_demo.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,345 @@
+#include <usbhub.h>
+#include "pgmstrings.h"
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+USB     Usb;
+USBHub  Hub1(&Usb);
+USBHub  Hub2(&Usb);
+USBHub  Hub3(&Usb);
+USBHub  Hub4(&Usb);
+
+uint32_t next_time;
+
+void PrintAllAddresses(UsbDevice *pdev)
+{
+  UsbDeviceAddress adr;
+  adr.devAddress = pdev->address.devAddress;
+  Serial.print("\r\nAddr:");
+  Serial.print(adr.devAddress, HEX);
+  Serial.print("(");
+  Serial.print(adr.bmHub, HEX);
+  Serial.print(".");
+  Serial.print(adr.bmParent, HEX);
+  Serial.print(".");
+  Serial.print(adr.bmAddress, HEX);
+  Serial.println(")");
+}
+
+void PrintAddress(uint8_t addr)
+{
+  UsbDeviceAddress adr;
+  adr.devAddress = addr;
+  Serial.print("\r\nADDR:\t");
+  Serial.println(adr.devAddress, HEX);
+  Serial.print("DEV:\t");
+  Serial.println(adr.bmAddress, HEX);
+  Serial.print("PRNT:\t");
+  Serial.println(adr.bmParent, HEX);
+  Serial.print("HUB:\t");
+  Serial.println(adr.bmHub, HEX);
+}
+
+void setup()
+{
+  Serial.begin( 115200 );
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  Serial.println("Start");
+
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1)
+    Serial.println("OSC did not start.");
+
+  delay( 200 );
+
+  next_time = millis() + 10000;
+}
+
+byte getdevdescr( byte addr, byte &num_conf );
+
+void PrintDescriptors(uint8_t addr)
+{
+  uint8_t rcode = 0;
+  byte num_conf = 0;
+
+  rcode = getdevdescr( (byte)addr, num_conf );
+  if ( rcode )
+  {
+    printProgStr(Gen_Error_str);
+    print_hex( rcode, 8 );
+  }
+  Serial.print("\r\n");
+
+  for (int i = 0; i < num_conf; i++)
+  {
+    rcode = getconfdescr( addr, i );                 // get configuration descriptor
+    if ( rcode )
+    {
+      printProgStr(Gen_Error_str);
+      print_hex(rcode, 8);
+    }
+    Serial.println("\r\n");
+  }
+}
+
+void PrintAllDescriptors(UsbDevice *pdev)
+{
+  Serial.println("\r\n");
+  print_hex(pdev->address.devAddress, 8);
+  Serial.println("\r\n--");
+  PrintDescriptors( pdev->address.devAddress );
+}
+
+void loop()
+{
+  Usb.Task();
+
+  if ( Usb.getUsbTaskState() == USB_STATE_RUNNING )
+  {
+    if ((millis() - next_time) >= 0L)
+    {
+      Usb.ForEachUsbDevice(&PrintAllDescriptors);
+      Usb.ForEachUsbDevice(&PrintAllAddresses);
+
+      while ( 1 );                          //stop
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+byte getdevdescr( byte addr, byte &num_conf )
+{
+  USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR buf;
+  byte rcode;
+  rcode = Usb.getDevDescr( addr, 0, 0x12, ( uint8_t *)&buf );
+  if ( rcode ) {
+    return ( rcode );
+  }
+  printProgStr(Dev_Header_str);
+  printProgStr(Dev_Length_str);
+  print_hex( buf.bLength, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Dev_Type_str);
+  print_hex( buf.bDescriptorType, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Dev_Version_str);
+  print_hex( buf.bcdUSB, 16 );
+  printProgStr(Dev_Class_str);
+  print_hex( buf.bDeviceClass, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Dev_Subclass_str);
+  print_hex( buf.bDeviceSubClass, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Dev_Protocol_str);
+  print_hex( buf.bDeviceProtocol, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Dev_Pktsize_str);
+  print_hex( buf.bMaxPacketSize0, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Dev_Vendor_str);
+  print_hex( buf.idVendor, 16 );
+  printProgStr(Dev_Product_str);
+  print_hex( buf.idProduct, 16 );
+  printProgStr(Dev_Revision_str);
+  print_hex( buf.bcdDevice, 16 );
+  printProgStr(Dev_Mfg_str);
+  print_hex( buf.iManufacturer, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Dev_Prod_str);
+  print_hex( buf.iProduct, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Dev_Serial_str);
+  print_hex( buf.iSerialNumber, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Dev_Nconf_str);
+  print_hex( buf.bNumConfigurations, 8 );
+  num_conf = buf.bNumConfigurations;
+  return ( 0 );
+}
+
+void printhubdescr(uint8_t *descrptr, uint8_t addr)
+{
+  HubDescriptor  *pHub = (HubDescriptor*) descrptr;
+  uint8_t        len = *((uint8_t*)descrptr);
+
+  printProgStr(PSTR("\r\n\r\nHub Descriptor:\r\n"));
+  printProgStr(PSTR("bDescLength:\t\t"));
+  Serial.println(pHub->bDescLength, HEX);
+
+  printProgStr(PSTR("bDescriptorType:\t"));
+  Serial.println(pHub->bDescriptorType, HEX);
+
+  printProgStr(PSTR("bNbrPorts:\t\t"));
+  Serial.println(pHub->bNbrPorts, HEX);
+
+  printProgStr(PSTR("LogPwrSwitchMode:\t"));
+  Serial.println(pHub->LogPwrSwitchMode, BIN);
+
+  printProgStr(PSTR("CompoundDevice:\t\t"));
+  Serial.println(pHub->CompoundDevice, BIN);
+
+  printProgStr(PSTR("OverCurrentProtectMode:\t"));
+  Serial.println(pHub->OverCurrentProtectMode, BIN);
+
+  printProgStr(PSTR("TTThinkTime:\t\t"));
+  Serial.println(pHub->TTThinkTime, BIN);
+
+  printProgStr(PSTR("PortIndicatorsSupported:"));
+  Serial.println(pHub->PortIndicatorsSupported, BIN);
+
+  printProgStr(PSTR("Reserved:\t\t"));
+  Serial.println(pHub->Reserved, HEX);
+
+  printProgStr(PSTR("bPwrOn2PwrGood:\t\t"));
+  Serial.println(pHub->bPwrOn2PwrGood, HEX);
+
+  printProgStr(PSTR("bHubContrCurrent:\t"));
+  Serial.println(pHub->bHubContrCurrent, HEX);
+
+  for (uint8_t i = 7; i < len; i++)
+    print_hex(descrptr[i], 8);
+
+  //for (uint8_t i=1; i<=pHub->bNbrPorts; i++)
+  //    PrintHubPortStatus(&Usb, addr, i, 1);
+}
+
+byte getconfdescr( byte addr, byte conf )
+{
+  uint8_t buf[ BUFSIZE ];
+  uint8_t* buf_ptr = buf;
+  byte rcode;
+  byte descr_length;
+  byte descr_type;
+  unsigned int total_length;
+  rcode = Usb.getConfDescr( addr, 0, 4, conf, buf );  //get total length
+  LOBYTE( total_length ) = buf[ 2 ];
+  HIBYTE( total_length ) = buf[ 3 ];
+  if ( total_length > 256 ) {   //check if total length is larger than buffer
+    printProgStr(Conf_Trunc_str);
+    total_length = 256;
+  }
+  rcode = Usb.getConfDescr( addr, 0, total_length, conf, buf ); //get the whole descriptor
+  while ( buf_ptr < buf + total_length ) { //parsing descriptors
+    descr_length = *( buf_ptr );
+    descr_type = *( buf_ptr + 1 );
+    switch ( descr_type ) {
+      case ( USB_DESCRIPTOR_CONFIGURATION ):
+        printconfdescr( buf_ptr );
+        break;
+      case ( USB_DESCRIPTOR_INTERFACE ):
+        printintfdescr( buf_ptr );
+        break;
+      case ( USB_DESCRIPTOR_ENDPOINT ):
+        printepdescr( buf_ptr );
+        break;
+      case 0x29:
+        printhubdescr( buf_ptr, addr );
+        break;
+      default:
+        printunkdescr( buf_ptr );
+        break;
+    }//switch( descr_type
+    buf_ptr = ( buf_ptr + descr_length );    //advance buffer pointer
+  }//while( buf_ptr <=...
+  return ( rcode );
+}
+/* prints hex numbers with leading zeroes */
+// copyright, Peter H Anderson, Baltimore, MD, Nov, '07
+// source: http://www.phanderson.com/arduino/arduino_display.html
+void print_hex(int v, int num_places)
+{
+  int mask = 0, n, num_nibbles, digit;
+
+  for (n = 1; n <= num_places; n++) {
+    mask = (mask << 1) | 0x0001;
+  }
+  v = v & mask; // truncate v to specified number of places
+
+  num_nibbles = num_places / 4;
+  if ((num_places % 4) != 0) {
+    ++num_nibbles;
+  }
+  do {
+    digit = ((v >> (num_nibbles - 1) * 4)) & 0x0f;
+    Serial.print(digit, HEX);
+  }
+  while (--num_nibbles);
+}
+/* function to print configuration descriptor */
+void printconfdescr( uint8_t* descr_ptr )
+{
+  USB_CONFIGURATION_DESCRIPTOR* conf_ptr = ( USB_CONFIGURATION_DESCRIPTOR* )descr_ptr;
+  printProgStr(Conf_Header_str);
+  printProgStr(Conf_Totlen_str);
+  print_hex( conf_ptr->wTotalLength, 16 );
+  printProgStr(Conf_Nint_str);
+  print_hex( conf_ptr->bNumInterfaces, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Conf_Value_str);
+  print_hex( conf_ptr->bConfigurationValue, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Conf_String_str);
+  print_hex( conf_ptr->iConfiguration, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Conf_Attr_str);
+  print_hex( conf_ptr->bmAttributes, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Conf_Pwr_str);
+  print_hex( conf_ptr->bMaxPower, 8 );
+  return;
+}
+/* function to print interface descriptor */
+void printintfdescr( uint8_t* descr_ptr )
+{
+  USB_INTERFACE_DESCRIPTOR* intf_ptr = ( USB_INTERFACE_DESCRIPTOR* )descr_ptr;
+  printProgStr(Int_Header_str);
+  printProgStr(Int_Number_str);
+  print_hex( intf_ptr->bInterfaceNumber, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Int_Alt_str);
+  print_hex( intf_ptr->bAlternateSetting, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Int_Endpoints_str);
+  print_hex( intf_ptr->bNumEndpoints, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Int_Class_str);
+  print_hex( intf_ptr->bInterfaceClass, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Int_Subclass_str);
+  print_hex( intf_ptr->bInterfaceSubClass, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Int_Protocol_str);
+  print_hex( intf_ptr->bInterfaceProtocol, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Int_String_str);
+  print_hex( intf_ptr->iInterface, 8 );
+  return;
+}
+/* function to print endpoint descriptor */
+void printepdescr( uint8_t* descr_ptr )
+{
+  USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR* ep_ptr = ( USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR* )descr_ptr;
+  printProgStr(End_Header_str);
+  printProgStr(End_Address_str);
+  print_hex( ep_ptr->bEndpointAddress, 8 );
+  printProgStr(End_Attr_str);
+  print_hex( ep_ptr->bmAttributes, 8 );
+  printProgStr(End_Pktsize_str);
+  print_hex( ep_ptr->wMaxPacketSize, 16 );
+  printProgStr(End_Interval_str);
+  print_hex( ep_ptr->bInterval, 8 );
+
+  return;
+}
+/*function to print unknown descriptor */
+void printunkdescr( uint8_t* descr_ptr )
+{
+  byte length = *descr_ptr;
+  byte i;
+  printProgStr(Unk_Header_str);
+  printProgStr(Unk_Length_str);
+  print_hex( *descr_ptr, 8 );
+  printProgStr(Unk_Type_str);
+  print_hex( *(descr_ptr + 1 ), 8 );
+  printProgStr(Unk_Contents_str);
+  descr_ptr += 2;
+  for ( i = 0; i < length; i++ ) {
+    print_hex( *descr_ptr, 8 );
+    descr_ptr++;
+  }
+}
+
+
+/* Print a string from Program Memory directly to save RAM */
+void printProgStr(const char* str)
+{
+  char c;
+  if (!str) return;
+  while ((c = pgm_read_byte(str++)))
+    Serial.print(c);
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/hub_demo/pgmstrings.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/hub_demo/pgmstrings.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bdb0077ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/hub_demo/pgmstrings.h
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+#if !defined(__PGMSTRINGS_H__)
+#define __PGMSTRINGS_H__
+
+#define LOBYTE(x) ((char*)(&(x)))[0]
+#define HIBYTE(x) ((char*)(&(x)))[1]
+#define BUFSIZE 256    //buffer size
+ 
+
+/* Print strings in Program Memory */
+const char Gen_Error_str[] PROGMEM = "\r\nRequest error. Error code:\t"; 
+const char Dev_Header_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nDevice descriptor: ";
+const char Dev_Length_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nDescriptor Length:\t";
+const char Dev_Type_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nDescriptor type:\t";
+const char Dev_Version_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nUSB version:\t\t";
+const char Dev_Class_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nDevice class:\t\t";
+const char Dev_Subclass_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nDevice Subclass:\t";
+const char Dev_Protocol_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nDevice Protocol:\t";
+const char Dev_Pktsize_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nMax.packet size:\t";
+const char Dev_Vendor_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nVendor  ID:\t\t";
+const char Dev_Product_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nProduct ID:\t\t";
+const char Dev_Revision_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nRevision ID:\t\t";
+const char Dev_Mfg_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nMfg.string index:\t";
+const char Dev_Prod_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nProd.string index:\t";
+const char Dev_Serial_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nSerial number index:\t";
+const char Dev_Nconf_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nNumber of conf.:\t";
+const char Conf_Trunc_str[] PROGMEM ="Total length truncated to 256 bytes";
+const char Conf_Header_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nConfiguration descriptor:";
+const char Conf_Totlen_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nTotal length:\t\t";
+const char Conf_Nint_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nNum.intf:\t\t";
+const char Conf_Value_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nConf.value:\t\t";
+const char Conf_String_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nConf.string:\t\t";
+const char Conf_Attr_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nAttr.:\t\t\t";
+const char Conf_Pwr_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nMax.pwr:\t\t";
+const char Int_Header_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\n\r\nInterface descriptor:";
+const char Int_Number_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nIntf.number:\t\t";
+const char Int_Alt_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nAlt.:\t\t\t";
+const char Int_Endpoints_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nEndpoints:\t\t";
+const char Int_Class_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nIntf. Class:\t\t";
+const char Int_Subclass_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nIntf. Subclass:\t\t";
+const char Int_Protocol_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nIntf. Protocol:\t\t";
+const char Int_String_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nIntf.string:\t\t";
+const char End_Header_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\n\r\nEndpoint descriptor:";
+const char End_Address_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nEndpoint address:\t";
+const char End_Attr_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nAttr.:\t\t\t";
+const char End_Pktsize_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nMax.pkt size:\t\t";
+const char End_Interval_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nPolling interval:\t";
+const char Unk_Header_str[] PROGMEM = "\r\nUnknown descriptor:";
+const char Unk_Length_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nLength:\t\t";
+const char Unk_Type_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nType:\t\t";
+const char Unk_Contents_str[] PROGMEM ="\r\nContents:\t";
+ 
+#endif // __PGMSTRINGS_H__
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/max_LCD/max_LCD.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/max_LCD/max_LCD.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6603ab90d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/max_LCD/max_LCD.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+// Just a copy of the HelloWorld example bundled with the LiquidCrystal library in the Arduino IDE
+
+// HD44780 compatible LCD display via MAX3421E GPOUT support header
+// pinout: D[4-7] -> GPOUT[4-7], RS-> GPOUT[2], E ->GPOUT[3]
+
+#include <max_LCD.h>
+
+// Satisfy IDE, which only needs to see the include statment in the ino.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+USB Usb;
+Max_LCD lcd(&Usb);
+
+void setup() {
+  // Set up the LCD's number of columns and rows:
+  lcd.begin(16, 2);
+  // Print a message to the LCD.
+  lcd.print("Hello, World!");
+}
+
+void loop() {
+  // Set the cursor to column 0, line 1 (note: line 1 is the second row, since counting begins with 0):
+  lcd.setCursor(0, 1);
+  // Print the number of seconds since reset:
+  lcd.print(millis() / 1000);
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/pl2303/pl2303_gprs_terminal/pl2303_gprs_terminal.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/pl2303/pl2303_gprs_terminal/pl2303_gprs_terminal.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7c4c9f6cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/pl2303/pl2303_gprs_terminal/pl2303_gprs_terminal.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+/* Arduino terminal for PL2303 USB to serial converter and DealeXtreme GPRS modem. */
+/* USB support */
+#include <usbhub.h>
+/* CDC support */
+#include <cdcacm.h>
+#include <cdcprolific.h>
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+class PLAsyncOper : public CDCAsyncOper
+{
+public:
+    uint8_t OnInit(ACM *pacm);
+};
+
+uint8_t PLAsyncOper::OnInit(ACM *pacm)
+{
+    uint8_t rcode;
+
+    // Set DTR = 1
+    rcode = pacm->SetControlLineState(1);
+
+    if (rcode)
+    {
+        ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("SetControlLineState"), rcode);
+        return rcode;
+    }
+
+    LINE_CODING	lc;
+    //lc.dwDTERate	= 9600;
+    lc.dwDTERate = 115200;
+    lc.bCharFormat	= 0;
+    lc.bParityType	= 0;
+    lc.bDataBits	= 8;
+
+    rcode = pacm->SetLineCoding(&lc);
+
+    if (rcode)
+        ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("SetLineCoding"), rcode);
+
+    return rcode;
+}
+USB     Usb;
+//USBHub     Hub(&Usb);
+PLAsyncOper  AsyncOper;
+PL2303       Pl(&Usb, &AsyncOper);
+
+void setup()
+{
+  Serial.begin( 115200 );
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  Serial.println("Start");
+
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1)
+      Serial.println("OSCOKIRQ failed to assert");
+
+  delay( 200 );
+}
+
+void loop()
+{
+    Usb.Task();
+
+    if( Usb.getUsbTaskState() == USB_STATE_RUNNING )
+    {
+       uint8_t rcode;
+
+       /* reading the keyboard */
+       if(Serial.available()) {
+         uint8_t data= Serial.read();
+
+         /* sending to the phone */
+         rcode = Pl.SndData(1, &data);
+         if (rcode)
+            ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("SndData"), rcode);
+       }//if(Serial.available()...
+
+        /* reading the converter */
+        /* buffer size must be greater or equal to max.packet size */
+        /* it it set to 64 (largest possible max.packet size) here, can be tuned down
+        for particular endpoint */
+        uint8_t  buf[64];
+        uint16_t rcvd = 64;
+        rcode = Pl.RcvData(&rcvd, buf);
+         if (rcode && rcode != hrNAK)
+           ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("Ret"), rcode);
+
+           if( rcvd ) { //more than zero bytes received
+             for(uint16_t i=0; i < rcvd; i++ ) {
+               Serial.print((char)buf[i]); //printing on the screen
+             }
+           }//if( rcvd ...
+    }//if( Usb.getUsbTaskState() == USB_STATE_RUNNING..
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/pl2303/pl2303_gps/pl2303_gps.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/pl2303/pl2303_gps/pl2303_gps.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e8c8a0223
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/pl2303/pl2303_gps/pl2303_gps.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+/* USB Host to PL2303-based USB GPS unit interface */
+/* Navibee GM720 receiver - Sirf Star III */
+/* USB support */
+#include <usbhub.h>
+/* CDC support */
+#include <cdcacm.h>
+#include <cdcprolific.h>
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+class PLAsyncOper : public CDCAsyncOper {
+public:
+        uint8_t OnInit(ACM *pacm);
+};
+
+uint8_t PLAsyncOper::OnInit(ACM *pacm) {
+        uint8_t rcode;
+
+        // Set DTR = 1
+        rcode = pacm->SetControlLineState(1);
+
+        if(rcode) {
+                ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("SetControlLineState"), rcode);
+                return rcode;
+        }
+
+        LINE_CODING lc;
+        lc.dwDTERate = 4800; //default serial speed of GPS unit
+        lc.bCharFormat = 0;
+        lc.bParityType = 0;
+        lc.bDataBits = 8;
+
+        rcode = pacm->SetLineCoding(&lc);
+
+        if(rcode)
+                ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("SetLineCoding"), rcode);
+
+        return rcode;
+}
+
+USB Usb;
+USBHub Hub(&Usb);
+PLAsyncOper AsyncOper;
+PL2303 Pl(&Usb, &AsyncOper);
+uint32_t read_delay;
+#define READ_DELAY 100
+
+void setup() {
+        Serial.begin(115200);
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+        while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+        Serial.println("Start");
+
+        if(Usb.Init() == -1)
+                Serial.println("OSCOKIRQ failed to assert");
+
+        delay(200);
+}
+
+void loop() {
+        uint8_t rcode;
+        uint8_t buf[64]; //serial buffer equals Max.packet size of bulk-IN endpoint
+        uint16_t rcvd = 64;
+
+        Usb.Task();
+
+        if(Pl.isReady()) {
+                /* reading the GPS */
+                if((long)(millis() - read_delay) >= 0L) {
+                        read_delay += READ_DELAY;
+                        rcode = Pl.RcvData(&rcvd, buf);
+                        if(rcode && rcode != hrNAK)
+                                ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("Ret"), rcode);
+                        if(rcvd) { //more than zero bytes received
+                                for(uint16_t i = 0; i < rcvd; i++) {
+                                        Serial.print((char)buf[i]); //printing on the screen
+                                }//for( uint16_t i=0; i < rcvd; i++...
+                        }//if( rcvd
+                }//if( read_delay > millis()...
+        }//if( Usb.getUsbTaskState() == USB_STATE_RUNNING..
+}
+
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/pl2303/pl2303_tinygps/pl2303_tinygps.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/pl2303/pl2303_tinygps/pl2303_tinygps.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d527eabe0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/pl2303/pl2303_tinygps/pl2303_tinygps.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,217 @@
+/* USB Host to PL2303-based USB GPS unit interface */
+/* Navibee GM720 receiver - Sirf Star III */
+/* Mikal Hart's TinyGPS library */
+/* test_with_gps_device library example modified for PL2302 access */
+
+/* USB support */
+#include <usbhub.h>
+
+/* CDC support */
+#include <cdcacm.h>
+#include <cdcprolific.h>
+
+#include <TinyGPS.h>
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+/* This sample code demonstrates the normal use of a TinyGPS object.
+    Modified to be used with USB Host Shield Library r2.0
+    and USB Host Shield 2.0
+*/
+
+class PLAsyncOper : public CDCAsyncOper
+{
+public:
+    uint8_t OnInit(ACM *pacm);
+};
+
+uint8_t PLAsyncOper::OnInit(ACM *pacm)
+{
+    uint8_t rcode;
+
+    // Set DTR = 1
+    rcode = pacm->SetControlLineState(1);
+
+    if (rcode) {
+        ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("SetControlLineState"), rcode);
+        return rcode;
+    }
+
+    LINE_CODING lc;
+    lc.dwDTERate  = 4800;   //default serial speed of GPS unit
+    lc.bCharFormat  = 0;
+    lc.bParityType  = 0;
+    lc.bDataBits  = 8;
+
+    rcode = pacm->SetLineCoding(&lc);
+
+    if (rcode) {
+        ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("SetLineCoding"), rcode);
+    }
+
+    return rcode;
+}
+
+USB     Usb;
+//USBHub     Hub(&Usb);
+PLAsyncOper  AsyncOper;
+PL2303       Pl(&Usb, &AsyncOper);
+TinyGPS gps;
+
+void gpsdump(TinyGPS &gps);
+bool feedgps();
+void printFloat(double f, int digits = 2);
+
+void setup()
+{
+
+  Serial.begin(115200);
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+
+  Serial.print("Testing TinyGPS library v. "); Serial.println(TinyGPS::library_version());
+  Serial.println("by Mikal Hart");
+  Serial.println();
+  Serial.print("Sizeof(gpsobject) = "); Serial.println(sizeof(TinyGPS));
+  Serial.println();
+  /* USB Initialization */
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1) {
+      Serial.println("OSCOKIRQ failed to assert");
+  }
+
+  delay( 200 );
+}
+
+void loop()
+{
+  Usb.Task();
+
+  if( Pl.isReady()) {
+
+    bool newdata = false;
+    unsigned long start = millis();
+
+    // Every 5 seconds we print an update
+    while (millis() - start < 5000) {
+      if( feedgps()) {
+        newdata = true;
+      }
+    }//while (millis()...
+
+    if (newdata) {
+      Serial.println("Acquired Data");
+      Serial.println("-------------");
+      gpsdump(gps);
+      Serial.println("-------------");
+      Serial.println();
+    }//if( newdata...
+  }//if( Usb.getUsbTaskState() == USB_STATE_RUNNING...
+}
+
+void printFloat(double number, int digits)
+{
+  // Handle negative numbers
+  if (number < 0.0)
+  {
+     Serial.print('-');
+     number = -number;
+  }
+
+  // Round correctly so that print(1.999, 2) prints as "2.00"
+  double rounding = 0.5;
+  for (uint8_t i=0; i<digits; ++i)
+    rounding /= 10.0;
+
+  number += rounding;
+
+  // Extract the integer part of the number and print it
+  unsigned long int_part = (unsigned long)number;
+  double remainder = number - (double)int_part;
+  Serial.print(int_part);
+
+  // Print the decimal point, but only if there are digits beyond
+  if (digits > 0)
+    Serial.print(".");
+
+  // Extract digits from the remainder one at a time
+  while (digits-- > 0)
+  {
+    remainder *= 10.0;
+    int toPrint = int(remainder);
+    Serial.print(toPrint);
+    remainder -= toPrint;
+  }
+}
+
+void gpsdump(TinyGPS &gps)
+{
+  long lat, lon;
+  float flat, flon;
+  unsigned long age, date, time, chars;
+  int year;
+  byte month, day, hour, minute, second, hundredths;
+  unsigned short sentences, failed;
+
+  gps.get_position(&lat, &lon, &age);
+  Serial.print("Lat/Long(10^-5 deg): "); Serial.print(lat); Serial.print(", "); Serial.print(lon);
+  Serial.print(" Fix age: "); Serial.print(age); Serial.println("ms.");
+
+  feedgps(); // If we don't feed the gps during this long routine, we may drop characters and get checksum errors
+
+  gps.f_get_position(&flat, &flon, &age);
+  Serial.print("Lat/Long(float): "); printFloat(flat, 5); Serial.print(", "); printFloat(flon, 5);
+  Serial.print(" Fix age: "); Serial.print(age); Serial.println("ms.");
+
+  feedgps();
+
+  gps.get_datetime(&date, &time, &age);
+  Serial.print("Date(ddmmyy): "); Serial.print(date); Serial.print(" Time(hhmmsscc): "); Serial.print(time);
+  Serial.print(" Fix age: "); Serial.print(age); Serial.println("ms.");
+
+  feedgps();
+
+  gps.crack_datetime(&year, &month, &day, &hour, &minute, &second, &hundredths, &age);
+  Serial.print("Date: "); Serial.print(static_cast<int>(month)); Serial.print("/"); Serial.print(static_cast<int>(day)); Serial.print("/"); Serial.print(year);
+  Serial.print("  Time: "); Serial.print(static_cast<int>(hour)); Serial.print(":"); Serial.print(static_cast<int>(minute)); Serial.print(":"); Serial.print(static_cast<int>(second)); Serial.print("."); Serial.print(static_cast<int>(hundredths));
+  Serial.print("  Fix age: ");  Serial.print(age); Serial.println("ms.");
+
+  feedgps();
+
+  Serial.print("Alt(cm): "); Serial.print(gps.altitude()); Serial.print(" Course(10^-2 deg): "); Serial.print(gps.course()); Serial.print(" Speed(10^-2 knots): "); Serial.println(gps.speed());
+  Serial.print("Alt(float): "); printFloat(gps.f_altitude()); Serial.print(" Course(float): "); printFloat(gps.f_course()); Serial.println();
+  Serial.print("Speed(knots): "); printFloat(gps.f_speed_knots()); Serial.print(" (mph): ");  printFloat(gps.f_speed_mph());
+  Serial.print(" (mps): "); printFloat(gps.f_speed_mps()); Serial.print(" (kmph): "); printFloat(gps.f_speed_kmph()); Serial.println();
+
+  feedgps();
+
+  gps.stats(&chars, &sentences, &failed);
+  Serial.print("Stats: characters: "); Serial.print(chars); Serial.print(" sentences: "); Serial.print(sentences); Serial.print(" failed checksum: "); Serial.println(failed);
+}
+
+bool feedgps()
+{
+  uint8_t rcode;
+  uint8_t  buf[64];    //serial buffer equals Max.packet size of bulk-IN endpoint
+  uint16_t rcvd = 64;
+    {
+        /* reading the GPS */
+        rcode = Pl.RcvData(&rcvd, buf);
+         if (rcode && rcode != hrNAK)
+            ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("Ret"), rcode);
+            rcode = false;
+            if( rcvd ) { //more than zero bytes received
+              for( uint16_t i=0; i < rcvd; i++ ) {
+                if( gps.encode((char)buf[i])) { //feed a character to gps object
+                  rcode = true;
+                }//if( gps.encode(buf[i]...
+              }//for( uint16_t i=0; i < rcvd; i++...
+            }//if( rcvd...
+    }
+  return( rcode );
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/pl2303/pl2303_xbee_terminal/pl2303_xbee_terminal.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/pl2303/pl2303_xbee_terminal/pl2303_xbee_terminal.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..67b7dab60
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/pl2303/pl2303_xbee_terminal/pl2303_xbee_terminal.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+/* Arduino terminal for PL2303 USB to serial converter and XBee radio. */
+/* Inserts linefeed after carriage return in data sent to and received from Xbee */
+/* USB support */
+#include <usbhub.h>
+/* CDC support */
+#include <cdcacm.h>
+#include <cdcprolific.h>
+
+// Satisfy the IDE, which needs to see the include statment in the ino too.
+#ifdef dobogusinclude
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+class PLAsyncOper : public CDCAsyncOper
+{
+public:
+    uint8_t OnInit(ACM *pacm);
+};
+
+uint8_t PLAsyncOper::OnInit(ACM *pacm)
+{
+    uint8_t rcode;
+
+    // Set DTR = 1
+    rcode = pacm->SetControlLineState(1);
+
+    if (rcode)
+    {
+        ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("SetControlLineState"), rcode);
+        return rcode;
+    }
+
+    LINE_CODING	lc;
+    lc.dwDTERate	= 115200;
+    lc.bCharFormat	= 0;
+    lc.bParityType	= 0;
+    lc.bDataBits	= 8;
+
+    rcode = pacm->SetLineCoding(&lc);
+
+    if (rcode)
+        ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("SetLineCoding"), rcode);
+
+    return rcode;
+}
+USB     Usb;
+//USBHub     Hub(&Usb);
+PLAsyncOper  AsyncOper;
+PL2303       Pl(&Usb, &AsyncOper);
+
+void setup()
+{
+  Serial.begin( 115200 );
+#if !defined(__MIPSEL__)
+  while (!Serial); // Wait for serial port to connect - used on Leonardo, Teensy and other boards with built-in USB CDC serial connection
+#endif
+  Serial.println("Start");
+
+  if (Usb.Init() == -1)
+      Serial.println("OSCOKIRQ failed to assert");
+
+  delay( 200 );
+}
+
+void loop()
+{
+    Usb.Task();
+
+    if( Usb.getUsbTaskState() == USB_STATE_RUNNING )
+    {
+       uint8_t rcode;
+
+       /* reading the keyboard */
+       if(Serial.available()) {
+         uint8_t data= Serial.read();
+
+         if ( data == '\r' ) {
+           Serial.print("\r\n");  //insert linefeed
+         }
+         else {
+           Serial.print( data );  //echo back to the screen
+         }
+
+         /* sending to the phone */
+         rcode = Pl.SndData(1, &data);
+         if (rcode)
+            ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("SndData"), rcode);
+       }//if(Serial.available()...
+
+       delay(50);
+
+        /* reading the converter */
+        /* buffer size must be greater or equal to max.packet size */
+        /* it it set to 64 (largest possible max.packet size) here, can be tuned down
+        for particular endpoint */
+        uint8_t  buf[64];
+        uint16_t rcvd = 64;
+        rcode = Pl.RcvData(&rcvd, buf);
+         if (rcode && rcode != hrNAK)
+            ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("Ret"), rcode);
+
+            if( rcvd ) { //more than zero bytes received
+              for(uint16_t i=0; i < rcvd; i++ ) {
+                if( buf[i] =='\r' ) {
+                  Serial.print("\r\n");  //insert linefeed
+                }
+                else {
+                  Serial.print((char)buf[i]); //printing on the screen
+                }
+              }
+            }
+        delay(10);
+    }//if( Usb.getUsbTaskState() == USB_STATE_RUNNING..
+}
+
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/testusbhostFAT/Arduino_Makefile_master b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/testusbhostFAT/Arduino_Makefile_master
new file mode 160000
+Subproject 94c560c854c7a1dfc35e9de9db05de1b202de6c
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/testusbhostFAT/Makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/testusbhostFAT/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8a12ddc04
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/testusbhostFAT/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+#
+# These are set for a mega 1280 + quadram plus my serial patch.
+# If you lack quadram, or want to disable LFN, just change _FS_TINY=1 _USE_LFN=0
+#
+# If your board is a mega 2560 comment out the following two lines
+BOARD = mega
+
+BOARD_SUB = mega.menu.cpu.atmega1280
+PROGRAMMER = arduino
+
+# ...and then uncomment out the following two lines
+#BOARD_SUB = mega.menu.cpu.atmega2560
+#PROGRAMMER = wiring
+
+#BOARD = teensypp2
+#BOARD = teensy3
+#BOARD = teensy31
+
+# set your Arduino tty port here
+PORT = /dev/ttyUSB0
+
+EXTRA_FLAGS = -D _USE_LFN=3
+
+# change to 0 if you have quadram to take advantage of caching FAT
+EXTRA_FLAGS += -D _FS_TINY=1
+
+
+EXTRA_FLAGS += -D _MAX_SS=512
+
+
+# Don't worry if you don't have external RAM, xmem2 detects this situation.
+# You *WILL* be wanting to get some kind of external ram on your mega in order to
+# do anything that is intense.
+EXTRA_FLAGS += -D EXT_RAM_STACK=1
+EXTRA_FLAGS += -D EXT_RAM_HEAP=1
+
+
+# These are no longer needed for the demo to work.
+# In the event you need more ram, uncomment these 3 lines.
+#EXTRA_FLAGS += -D DISABLE_SERIAL1
+#EXTRA_FLAGS += -D DISABLE_SERIAL2
+#EXTRA_FLAGS += -D DISABLE_SERIAL3
+
+#
+# Advanced debug on Serial3
+#
+
+# uncomment the next two to enable debug on Serial3
+EXTRA_FLAGS += -D USB_HOST_SERIAL=Serial3
+#EXTRA_FLAGS += -D DEBUG_USB_HOST
+
+# The following are the libraries used.
+LIB_DIRS += ../../
+LIB_DIRS += ../testusbhostFAT/xmem2
+LIB_DIRS += ../testusbhostFAT/generic_storage
+LIB_DIRS += ../testusbhostFAT/RTClib
+LIB_DIRS += $(ARD_HOME)/libraries/Wire
+LIB_DIRS += $(ARD_HOME)/libraries/Wire/utility
+LIB_DIRS += $(ARD_HOME)/hardware/arduino/$(BUILD_ARCH)/libraries/Wire
+LIB_DIRS += $(ARD_HOME)/hardware/arduino/$(BUILD_ARCH)/libraries/Wire/utility
+LIB_DIRS += $(ARD_HOME)/hardware/arduino/$(BUILD_ARCH)/libraries/SPI
+
+# And finally, the part that brings everything together for you.
+include Arduino_Makefile_master/_Makefile.master
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/testusbhostFAT/README.md b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/testusbhostFAT/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d8b4296b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/testusbhostFAT/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+This small sketch tests the USB host shield mass storage library.
+
+__Note:__ This will not run a Arduino Uno due to the limited ram available in the ATmega328p.
+
+The Arduino Mega (ATmega1280) and the Arduino Mega 2560 (ATmega2560) are confirmed to work with this test code.
+
+To compile this example you will need the following libraries as well:
+
+* [xmem2](https://github.com/xxxajk/xmem2)
+* [generic_storage FATfs](https://github.com/xxxajk/generic_storage)
+* [RTClib](https://github.com/xxxajk/RTClib)
+
+The following shield is recommended for larger projects: <http://ruggedcircuits.com/html/quadram.html>.
+
+You may use the bundled [Makefile](Makefile) to compile the code instead of the Arduino IDE if you have problems or want a smaller binary. The master makefile is bundled as a submodule, but can also be downloaded manually at the following link: <https://github.com/xxxajk/Arduino_Makefile_master>.
+
+To download the USB Host library and all the needed libraries for this test.
+
+Run the following command in a terminal application:
+
+```
+git clone --recursive https://github.com/felis/USB_Host_Shield_2.0
+```
+
+If you want to update all the submodules run:
+
+```
+git submodule foreach --recursive git pull origin master
+```
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/testusbhostFAT/RTClib b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/testusbhostFAT/RTClib
new file mode 160000
+Subproject c30fcdf1f112de581de7b145a97630539e5cff4
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/testusbhostFAT/generic_storage b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/testusbhostFAT/generic_storage
new file mode 160000
+Subproject 77762338286535dabb9c94b87060e33e487ff0f
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/testusbhostFAT/testusbhostFAT.ino b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/testusbhostFAT/testusbhostFAT.ino
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e8b9cd359
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/testusbhostFAT/testusbhostFAT.ino
@@ -0,0 +1,736 @@
+/*
+ * Mega + USB storage + optional DS1307 + optional expansion RAM + funky status LED,
+ * Includes interactive debug level setting, and supports hot-plug.
+ *
+ * IMPORTANT! PLEASE USE Arduino 1.0.5 or better!
+ * Older versions HAVE MAJOR BUGS AND WILL NOT WORK AT ALL!
+ * Use of gcc-avr and lib-c that is newer than the Arduino version is even better.
+ * If you experience random crashes, use make.
+ * The options that the IDE use can generate bad code and cause the AVR to crash.
+ *
+ * This sketch requires the following libraries:
+ * https://github.com/felis/USB_Host_Shield_2.0 Install as 'USB_Host_Shield_2_0'
+ * https://github.com/xxxajk/xmem2 Install as 'xmem', provides memory services.
+ * https://github.com/xxxajk/generic_storage provides access to FAT file system.
+ * https://github.com/xxxajk/RTClib provides access to DS1307, or fake clock.
+ *
+ * Optional, to use the Makefile (Recommended! See above!):
+ * https://github.com/xxxajk/Arduino_Makefile_master
+ *
+ */
+
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Please Note:                                            //
+// This section is for info with the Arduino IDE ONLY.     //
+// Unfortunately due to short sightedness of the Arduino   //
+// code team, that you must set the following in the       //
+// respective libraries.                                   //
+// Changing them here will have _NO_ effect!               //
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+// Uncomment to enable debugging
+//#define DEBUG_USB_HOST
+// This is where stderr/USB debugging goes to
+//#define USB_HOST_SERIAL Serial3
+
+// If you have external memory, setting this to 0 enables FAT table caches.
+// The 0 setting is recommended only if you have external memory.
+//#define _FS_TINY 1
+
+//#define _USE_LFN 3
+//#define _MAX_SS 512
+
+
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// End of Arduino IDE specific information                 //
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+// You can set this to 0 if you are not using a USB hub.
+// It will save a little bit of flash and RAM.
+// Set to 1 if you want to use a hub.
+#define WANT_HUB_TEST 1
+
+// this is for XMEM2
+#define EXT_RAM_STACK 1
+#define EXT_RAM_HEAP 1
+#define LOAD_XMEM
+
+#if defined(CORE_TEENSY) && !defined(_AVR_)
+#include <xmem.h>
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#endif
+
+#if defined(__AVR__)
+#include <xmem.h>
+#include <SPI.h>
+#elif defined(ARDUINO_ARCH_SAM)
+#include <SPI.h>
+#endif
+
+#if WANT_HUB_TEST
+#include <usbhub.h>
+#endif
+#include <Wire.h>
+#define LOAD_RTCLIB
+#include <RTClib.h>
+#include <masstorage.h>
+#include <Storage.h>
+#include <PCpartition/PCPartition.h>
+#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+#include <FAT/FAT.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#if defined(__AVR__)
+static FILE tty_stdio;
+static FILE tty_stderr;
+volatile uint32_t LEDnext_time; // fade timeout
+volatile uint32_t HEAPnext_time; // when to print out next heap report
+volatile int brightness = 0; // how bright the LED is
+volatile int fadeAmount = 80; // how many points to fade the LED by
+#endif
+
+USB Usb;
+
+volatile uint8_t current_state = 1;
+volatile uint8_t last_state = 0;
+volatile bool fatready = false;
+volatile bool partsready = false;
+volatile bool notified = false;
+volatile bool runtest = false;
+volatile bool usbon = false;
+volatile uint32_t usbon_time;
+volatile bool change = false;
+volatile bool reportlvl = false;
+int cpart = 0;
+PCPartition *PT;
+
+#if WANT_HUB_TEST
+#define MAX_HUBS 1
+USBHub *Hubs[MAX_HUBS];
+#endif
+
+static PFAT *Fats[_VOLUMES];
+static part_t parts[_VOLUMES];
+static storage_t sto[_VOLUMES];
+
+/*make sure this is a power of two. */
+#define mbxs 128
+static uint8_t My_Buff_x[mbxs]; /* File read buffer */
+
+#if defined(__AVR__)
+
+#define prescale1       ((1 << WGM12) | (1 << CS10))
+#define prescale8       ((1 << WGM12) | (1 << CS11))
+#define prescale64      ((1 << WGM12) | (1 << CS10) | (1 << CS11))
+#define prescale256     ((1 << WGM12) | (1 << CS12))
+#define prescale1024    ((1 << WGM12) | (1 << CS12) | (1 << CS10))
+
+extern "C" {
+         extern unsigned int freeHeap();
+}
+static int tty_stderr_putc(char c, FILE *t) {
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.write(c);
+        return 0;
+}
+
+static int __attribute__((unused)) tty_stderr_flush(FILE *t) {
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.flush();
+        return 0;
+}
+
+static int tty_std_putc(char c, FILE *t) {
+        Serial.write(c);
+        return 0;
+}
+
+static int tty_std_getc(FILE *t) {
+        while(!Serial.available());
+        return Serial.read();
+}
+
+static int __attribute__((unused)) tty_std_flush(FILE *t) {
+        Serial.flush();
+        return 0;
+}
+
+#else
+// Supposedly the DUE has stdio already pointing to serial...
+#if !defined(ARDUINO_ARCH_SAM)
+// But newlib needs this...
+extern "C" {
+        int _write(int fd, const char *ptr, int len) {
+                int j;
+                for(j = 0; j < len; j++) {
+                        if(fd == 1)
+                                Serial.write(*ptr++);
+                        else if(fd == 2)
+                                USB_HOST_SERIAL.write(*ptr++);
+                }
+                return len;
+        }
+
+        int _read(int fd, char *ptr, int len) {
+                if(len > 0 && fd == 0) {
+                        while(!Serial.available());
+                        *ptr = Serial.read();
+                        return 1;
+                }
+                return 0;
+        }
+
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+
+        int _fstat(int fd, struct stat *st) {
+                memset(st, 0, sizeof (*st));
+                st->st_mode = S_IFCHR;
+                st->st_blksize = 1024;
+                return 0;
+        }
+
+        int _isatty(int fd) {
+                return (fd < 3) ? 1 : 0;
+        }
+}
+#endif // !defined(ARDUINO_ARCH_SAM)
+#endif
+
+void setup() {
+        bool serr = false;
+        for(int i = 0; i < _VOLUMES; i++) {
+                Fats[i] = NULL;
+                sto[i].private_data = new pvt_t;
+                ((pvt_t *)sto[i].private_data)->B = 255; // impossible
+        }
+        // Set this to higher values to enable more debug information
+        // minimum 0x00, maximum 0xff
+        UsbDEBUGlvl = 0x81;
+
+#if !defined(CORE_TEENSY) && defined(__AVR__)
+        // make LED pin as an output:
+        pinMode(LED_BUILTIN, OUTPUT);
+        pinMode(2, OUTPUT);
+        // Ensure TX is off
+        _SFR_BYTE(UCSR0B) &= ~_BV(TXEN0);
+        // Initialize 'debug' serial port
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.begin(115200);
+        // Do not start primary Serial port if already started.
+        if(bit_is_clear(UCSR0B, TXEN0)) {
+                Serial.begin(115200);
+                serr = true;
+        }
+
+
+        // Blink LED
+        delay(500);
+        analogWrite(LED_BUILTIN, 255);
+        delay(500);
+        analogWrite(LED_BUILTIN, 0);
+        delay(500);
+#else
+        while(!Serial);
+        Serial.begin(115200); // On the Teensy 3.x we get a delay at least!
+#endif
+#if defined(__AVR__)
+        // Set up stdio/stderr
+        tty_stdio.put = tty_std_putc;
+        tty_stdio.get = tty_std_getc;
+        tty_stdio.flags = _FDEV_SETUP_RW;
+        tty_stdio.udata = 0;
+
+        tty_stderr.put = tty_stderr_putc;
+        tty_stderr.get = NULL;
+        tty_stderr.flags = _FDEV_SETUP_WRITE;
+        tty_stderr.udata = 0;
+
+        stdout = &tty_stdio;
+        stdin = &tty_stdio;
+        stderr = &tty_stderr;
+#endif
+        printf_P(PSTR("\r\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nStart\r\n"));
+        printf_P(PSTR("Current UsbDEBUGlvl %02x\r\n"), UsbDEBUGlvl);
+        printf_P(PSTR("'+' and '-' increase/decrease by 0x01\r\n"));
+        printf_P(PSTR("'.' and ',' increase/decrease by 0x10\r\n"));
+        printf_P(PSTR("'t' will run a 10MB write/read test and print out the time it took.\r\n"));
+        printf_P(PSTR("'e' will toggle vbus off for a few moments.\r\n\r\n"));
+        printf_P(PSTR("Long filename support: "
+#if _USE_LFN
+                "Enabled"
+#else
+                "Disabled"
+#endif
+                "\r\n"));
+        if(serr) {
+                fprintf_P(stderr, PSTR("\r\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nStart\r\n"));
+                fprintf_P(stderr, PSTR("Current UsbDEBUGlvl %02x\r\n"), UsbDEBUGlvl);
+                fprintf_P(stderr, PSTR("Long filename support: "
+#if _USE_LFN
+                        "Enabled"
+#else
+                        "Disabled"
+#endif
+                        "\r\n"));
+        }
+
+#if !defined(CORE_TEENSY) && defined(__AVR__)
+        analogWrite(LED_BUILTIN, 255);
+        delay(500);
+        analogWrite(LED_BUILTIN, 0);
+        delay(500);
+        analogWrite(LED_BUILTIN, 255);
+        delay(500);
+        analogWrite(LED_BUILTIN, 0);
+        delay(500);
+        analogWrite(LED_BUILTIN, 255);
+        delay(500);
+        analogWrite(LED_BUILTIN, 0);
+        delay(500);
+
+        LEDnext_time = millis() + 1;
+#if EXT_RAM
+        printf_P(PSTR("Total EXT RAM banks %i\r\n"), xmem::getTotalBanks());
+#endif
+        printf_P(PSTR("Available heap: %u Bytes\r\n"), freeHeap());
+        printf_P(PSTR("SP %x\r\n"), (uint8_t *)(SP));
+#endif
+
+        // Even though I'm not going to actually be deleting,
+        // I want to be able to have slightly more control.
+        // Besides, it is easier to initialize stuff...
+#if WANT_HUB_TEST
+        for(int i = 0; i < MAX_HUBS; i++) {
+                Hubs[i] = new USBHub(&Usb);
+#if defined(__AVR__)
+                printf_P(PSTR("Available heap: %u Bytes\r\n"), freeHeap());
+#endif
+        }
+#endif
+        // Initialize generic storage. This must be done before USB starts.
+        Init_Generic_Storage();
+
+        while(Usb.Init(1000) == -1) {
+                printf_P(PSTR("No USB HOST Shield?\r\n"));
+                Notify(PSTR("OSC did not start."), 0x40);
+        }
+
+#if !defined(CORE_TEENSY) && defined(__AVR__)
+        cli();
+        TCCR3A = 0;
+        TCCR3B = 0;
+        // (0.01/(1/((16 *(10^6)) / 8))) - 1 = 19999
+        OCR3A = 19999;
+        TCCR3B |= prescale8;
+        TIMSK3 |= (1 << OCIE1A);
+        sei();
+
+        HEAPnext_time = millis() + 10000;
+#endif
+#if defined(__AVR__)
+        HEAPnext_time = millis() + 10000;
+#endif
+}
+
+void serialEvent() {
+        // Adjust UsbDEBUGlvl level on-the-fly.
+        // + to increase, - to decrease, * to display current level.
+        // . to increase by 16, , to decrease by 16
+        // e to flick VBUS
+        // * to report debug level
+        if(Serial.available()) {
+                int inByte = Serial.read();
+                switch(inByte) {
+                        case '+':
+                                if(UsbDEBUGlvl < 0xff) UsbDEBUGlvl++;
+                                reportlvl = true;
+                                break;
+                        case '-':
+                                if(UsbDEBUGlvl > 0x00) UsbDEBUGlvl--;
+                                reportlvl = true;
+                                break;
+                        case '.':
+                                if(UsbDEBUGlvl < 0xf0) UsbDEBUGlvl += 16;
+                                reportlvl = true;
+                                break;
+                        case ',':
+                                if(UsbDEBUGlvl > 0x0f) UsbDEBUGlvl -= 16;
+                                reportlvl = true;
+                                break;
+                        case '*':
+                                reportlvl = true;
+                                break;
+                        case 't':
+                                runtest = true;
+                                break;
+                        case 'e':
+                                change = true;
+                                usbon = false;
+                                break;
+                }
+        }
+}
+
+#if !defined(CORE_TEENSY) && defined(__AVR__)
+// ALL teensy versions LACK PWM ON LED
+
+ISR(TIMER3_COMPA_vect) {
+        if((long)(millis() - LEDnext_time) >= 0L) {
+                LEDnext_time = millis() + 30;
+
+                // set the brightness of LED
+                analogWrite(LED_BUILTIN, brightness);
+
+                // change the brightness for next time through the loop:
+                brightness = brightness + fadeAmount;
+
+                // reverse the direction of the fading at the ends of the fade:
+                if(brightness <= 0) {
+                        brightness = 0;
+                        fadeAmount = -fadeAmount;
+                }
+                if(brightness >= 255) {
+                        brightness = 255;
+                        fadeAmount = -fadeAmount;
+                }
+        }
+}
+#endif
+
+bool isfat(uint8_t t) {
+        return (t == 0x01 || t == 0x04 || t == 0x06 || t == 0x0b || t == 0x0c || t == 0x0e || t == 0x1);
+}
+
+void die(FRESULT rc) {
+        printf_P(PSTR("Failed with rc=%u.\r\n"), rc);
+        //for (;;);
+}
+
+void loop() {
+        FIL My_File_Object_x; /* File object */
+
+#if defined(__AVR__)
+        // Print a heap status report about every 10 seconds.
+        if((long)(millis() - HEAPnext_time) >= 0L) {
+                if(UsbDEBUGlvl > 0x50) {
+                        printf_P(PSTR("Available heap: %u Bytes\r\n"), freeHeap());
+                }
+                HEAPnext_time = millis() + 10000;
+        }
+        TCCR3B = 0;
+#endif
+#if defined(CORE_TEENSY)
+        // Teensy suffers here, oh well...
+        serialEvent();
+#endif
+        // Horrid! This sort of thing really belongs in an ISR, not here!
+        // We also will be needing to test each hub port, we don't do this yet!
+        if(!change && !usbon && (long)(millis() - usbon_time) >= 0L) {
+                change = true;
+                usbon = true;
+        }
+
+        if(change) {
+                change = false;
+                if(usbon) {
+                        Usb.vbusPower(vbus_on);
+                        printf_P(PSTR("VBUS on\r\n"));
+                } else {
+                        Usb.vbusPower(vbus_off);
+                        usbon_time = millis() + 2000;
+                }
+        }
+        Usb.Task();
+        current_state = Usb.getUsbTaskState();
+        if(current_state != last_state) {
+                if(UsbDEBUGlvl > 0x50)
+                        printf_P(PSTR("USB state = %x\r\n"), current_state);
+#if !defined(CORE_TEENSY) && defined(__AVR__)
+                if(current_state == USB_STATE_RUNNING) {
+                        fadeAmount = 30;
+                }
+#endif
+                if(current_state == USB_DETACHED_SUBSTATE_WAIT_FOR_DEVICE) {
+#if !defined(CORE_TEENSY) && defined(__AVR__)
+                        fadeAmount = 80;
+#endif
+                        partsready = false;
+                        for(int i = 0; i < cpart; i++) {
+                                if(Fats[i] != NULL)
+                                        delete Fats[i];
+                                Fats[i] = NULL;
+                        }
+                        fatready = false;
+                        notified = false;
+                        cpart = 0;
+                }
+                last_state = current_state;
+        }
+
+        // only do any of this if usb is on
+        if(usbon) {
+                if(partsready && !fatready) {
+                        if(cpart > 0) fatready = true;
+                }
+                // This is horrible, and needs to be moved elsewhere!
+                for(int B = 0; B < MAX_USB_MS_DRIVERS; B++) {
+                        if((!partsready) && (UHS_USB_BulkOnly[B]->GetAddress())) {
+
+                                // Build a list.
+                                int ML = UHS_USB_BulkOnly[B]->GetbMaxLUN();
+                                //printf("MAXLUN = %i\r\n", ML);
+                                ML++;
+                                for(int i = 0; i < ML; i++) {
+                                        if(UHS_USB_BulkOnly[B]->LUNIsGood(i)) {
+                                                partsready = true;
+                                                ((pvt_t *)(sto[i].private_data))->lun = i;
+                                                ((pvt_t *)(sto[i].private_data))->B = B;
+                                                sto[i].Reads = *UHS_USB_BulkOnly_Read;
+                                                sto[i].Writes = *UHS_USB_BulkOnly_Write;
+                                                sto[i].Status = *UHS_USB_BulkOnly_Status;
+                                                sto[i].Initialize = *UHS_USB_BulkOnly_Initialize;
+                                                sto[i].Commit = *UHS_USB_BulkOnly_Commit;
+                                                sto[i].TotalSectors = UHS_USB_BulkOnly[B]->GetCapacity(i);
+                                                sto[i].SectorSize = UHS_USB_BulkOnly[B]->GetSectorSize(i);
+                                                printf_P(PSTR("LUN:\t\t%u\r\n"), i);
+                                                printf_P(PSTR("Total Sectors:\t%08lx\t%lu\r\n"), sto[i].TotalSectors, sto[i].TotalSectors);
+                                                printf_P(PSTR("Sector Size:\t%04x\t\t%u\r\n"), sto[i].SectorSize, sto[i].SectorSize);
+                                                // get the partition data...
+                                                PT = new PCPartition;
+
+                                                if(!PT->Init(&sto[i])) {
+                                                        part_t *apart;
+                                                        for(int j = 0; j < 4; j++) {
+                                                                apart = PT->GetPart(j);
+                                                                if(apart != NULL && apart->type != 0x00) {
+                                                                        memcpy(&(parts[cpart]), apart, sizeof (part_t));
+                                                                        printf_P(PSTR("Partition %u type %#02x\r\n"), j, parts[cpart].type);
+                                                                        // for now
+                                                                        if(isfat(parts[cpart].type)) {
+                                                                                Fats[cpart] = new PFAT(&sto[i], cpart, parts[cpart].firstSector);
+                                                                                //int r = Fats[cpart]->Good();
+                                                                                if(Fats[cpart]->MountStatus()) {
+                                                                                        delete Fats[cpart];
+                                                                                        Fats[cpart] = NULL;
+                                                                                } else cpart++;
+                                                                        }
+                                                                }
+                                                        }
+                                                } else {
+                                                        // try superblock
+                                                        Fats[cpart] = new PFAT(&sto[i], cpart, 0);
+                                                        //int r = Fats[cpart]->Good();
+                                                        if(Fats[cpart]->MountStatus()) {
+                                                                //printf_P(PSTR("Superblock error %x\r\n"), r);
+                                                                delete Fats[cpart];
+                                                                Fats[cpart] = NULL;
+                                                        } else cpart++;
+
+                                                }
+                                                delete PT;
+                                        } else {
+                                                sto[i].Writes = NULL;
+                                                sto[i].Reads = NULL;
+                                                sto[i].Initialize = NULL;
+                                                sto[i].TotalSectors = 0UL;
+                                                sto[i].SectorSize = 0;
+                                        }
+                                }
+
+                        }
+                }
+
+                if(fatready) {
+                        if(Fats[0] != NULL) {
+                                struct Pvt * p;
+                                p = ((struct Pvt *)(Fats[0]->storage->private_data));
+                                if(!UHS_USB_BulkOnly[p->B]->LUNIsGood(p->lun)) {
+                                        // media change
+#if !defined(CORE_TEENSY) && defined(__AVR__)
+                                        fadeAmount = 80;
+#endif
+                                        partsready = false;
+                                        for(int i = 0; i < cpart; i++) {
+                                                if(Fats[i] != NULL)
+                                                        delete Fats[i];
+                                                Fats[cpart] = NULL;
+                                        }
+                                        fatready = false;
+                                        notified = false;
+                                        cpart = 0;
+                                }
+
+                        }
+                }
+                if(fatready) {
+                        FRESULT rc; /* Result code */
+                        UINT bw, br, i;
+                        if(!notified) {
+#if !defined(CORE_TEENSY) && defined(__AVR__)
+                                fadeAmount = 5;
+#endif
+                                notified = true;
+                                FATFS *fs = NULL;
+                                for(int zz = 0; zz < _VOLUMES; zz++) {
+                                        if(Fats[zz]->volmap == 0) fs = Fats[zz]->ffs;
+                                }
+                                printf_P(PSTR("\r\nOpen an existing file (message.txt).\r\n"));
+                                rc = f_open(&My_File_Object_x, "0:/MESSAGE.TXT", FA_READ);
+                                if(rc) printf_P(PSTR("Error %i, message.txt not found.\r\n"), rc);
+                                else {
+                                        printf_P(PSTR("\r\nType the file content.\r\n"));
+                                        for(;;) {
+                                                rc = f_read(&My_File_Object_x, My_Buff_x, mbxs, &br); /* Read a chunk of file */
+                                                if(rc || !br) break; /* Error or end of file */
+                                                for(i = 0; i < br; i++) {
+                                                        /* Type the data */
+                                                        if(My_Buff_x[i] == '\n')
+                                                                Serial.write('\r');
+                                                        if(My_Buff_x[i] != '\r')
+                                                                Serial.write(My_Buff_x[i]);
+                                                        Serial.flush();
+                                                }
+                                        }
+                                        if(rc) {
+                                                f_close(&My_File_Object_x);
+                                                goto out;
+                                        }
+
+                                        printf_P(PSTR("\r\nClose the file.\r\n"));
+                                        rc = f_close(&My_File_Object_x);
+                                        if(rc) goto out;
+                                }
+                                printf_P(PSTR("\r\nCreate a new file (hello.txt).\r\n"));
+                                rc = f_open(&My_File_Object_x, "0:/Hello.TxT", FA_WRITE | FA_CREATE_ALWAYS);
+                                if(rc) {
+                                        die(rc);
+                                        goto outdir;
+                                }
+                                printf_P(PSTR("\r\nWrite a text data. (Hello world!)\r\n"));
+                                rc = f_write(&My_File_Object_x, "Hello world!\r\n", 14, &bw);
+                                if(rc) {
+                                        goto out;
+                                }
+                                printf_P(PSTR("%u bytes written.\r\n"), bw);
+
+                                printf_P(PSTR("\r\nClose the file.\r\n"));
+                                rc = f_close(&My_File_Object_x);
+                                if(rc) {
+                                        die(rc);
+                                        goto out;
+                                }
+outdir:{
+#if _USE_LFN
+                                        char lfn[_MAX_LFN + 1];
+                                        FILINFO My_File_Info_Object_x; /* File information object */
+                                        My_File_Info_Object_x.lfname = lfn;
+#endif
+                                        DIR My_Dir_Object_x; /* Directory object */
+                                        printf_P(PSTR("\r\nOpen root directory.\r\n"));
+                                        rc = f_opendir(&My_Dir_Object_x, "0:/");
+                                        if(rc) {
+                                                die(rc);
+                                                goto out;
+                                        }
+
+                                        printf_P(PSTR("\r\nDirectory listing...\r\n"));
+#if defined(__AVR__)
+                                        printf_P(PSTR("Available heap: %u Bytes\r\n"), freeHeap());
+#endif
+                                        for(;;) {
+#if _USE_LFN
+                                                My_File_Info_Object_x.lfsize = _MAX_LFN;
+#endif
+
+                                                rc = f_readdir(&My_Dir_Object_x, &My_File_Info_Object_x); /* Read a directory item */
+                                                if(rc || !My_File_Info_Object_x.fname[0]) break; /* Error or end of dir */
+
+                                                if(My_File_Info_Object_x.fattrib & AM_DIR) {
+                                                        Serial.write('d');
+                                                } else {
+                                                        Serial.write('-');
+                                                }
+                                                Serial.write('r');
+
+                                                if(My_File_Info_Object_x.fattrib & AM_RDO) {
+                                                        Serial.write('-');
+                                                } else {
+                                                        Serial.write('w');
+                                                }
+                                                if(My_File_Info_Object_x.fattrib & AM_HID) {
+                                                        Serial.write('h');
+                                                } else {
+                                                        Serial.write('-');
+                                                }
+
+                                                if(My_File_Info_Object_x.fattrib & AM_SYS) {
+                                                        Serial.write('s');
+                                                } else {
+                                                        Serial.write('-');
+                                                }
+
+                                                if(My_File_Info_Object_x.fattrib & AM_ARC) {
+                                                        Serial.write('a');
+                                                } else {
+                                                        Serial.write('-');
+                                                }
+
+#if _USE_LFN
+                                                if(*My_File_Info_Object_x.lfname)
+                                                        printf_P(PSTR(" %8lu  %s (%s)\r\n"), My_File_Info_Object_x.fsize, My_File_Info_Object_x.fname, My_File_Info_Object_x.lfname);
+                                                else
+#endif
+                                                        printf_P(PSTR(" %8lu  %s\r\n"), My_File_Info_Object_x.fsize, &(My_File_Info_Object_x.fname[0]));
+                                        }
+                                }
+out:
+                                if(rc) die(rc);
+
+                                DISK_IOCTL(fs->drv, CTRL_COMMIT, 0);
+                                printf_P(PSTR("\r\nTest completed.\r\n"));
+
+                        }
+
+                        if(runtest) {
+                                ULONG ii, wt, rt, start, end;
+                                FATFS *fs = NULL;
+                                for(int zz = 0; zz < _VOLUMES; zz++) {
+                                        if(Fats[zz]->volmap == 0) fs = Fats[zz]->ffs;
+                                }
+                                runtest = false;
+                                f_unlink("0:/10MB.bin");
+                                printf_P(PSTR("\r\nCreate a new 10MB test file (10MB.bin).\r\n"));
+                                rc = f_open(&My_File_Object_x, "0:/10MB.bin", FA_WRITE | FA_CREATE_ALWAYS);
+                                if(rc) goto failed;
+                                for(bw = 0; bw < mbxs; bw++) My_Buff_x[bw] = bw & 0xff;
+                                fflush(stdout);
+                                start = millis();
+                                while(start == millis());
+                                for(ii = 10485760LU / mbxs; ii > 0LU; ii--) {
+                                        rc = f_write(&My_File_Object_x, My_Buff_x, mbxs, &bw);
+                                        if(rc || !bw) goto failed;
+                                }
+                                rc = f_close(&My_File_Object_x);
+                                if(rc) goto failed;
+                                end = millis();
+                                wt = (end - start) - 1;
+                                printf_P(PSTR("Time to write 10485760 bytes: %lu ms (%lu sec) \r\n"), wt, (500 + wt) / 1000UL);
+                                rc = f_open(&My_File_Object_x, "0:/10MB.bin", FA_READ);
+                                fflush(stdout);
+                                start = millis();
+                                while(start == millis());
+                                if(rc) goto failed;
+                                for(;;) {
+                                        rc = f_read(&My_File_Object_x, My_Buff_x, mbxs, &bw); /* Read a chunk of file */
+                                        if(rc || !bw) break; /* Error or end of file */
+                                }
+                                end = millis();
+                                if(rc) goto failed;
+                                rc = f_close(&My_File_Object_x);
+                                if(rc) goto failed;
+                                rt = (end - start) - 1;
+                                printf_P(PSTR("Time to read 10485760 bytes: %lu ms (%lu sec)\r\nDelete test file\r\n"), rt, (500 + rt) / 1000UL);
+failed:
+                                if(rc) die(rc);
+                                DISK_IOCTL(fs->drv, CTRL_COMMIT, 0);
+                                printf_P(PSTR("10MB timing test finished.\r\n"));
+                        }
+                }
+        }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/testusbhostFAT/xmem2 b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/examples/testusbhostFAT/xmem2
new file mode 160000
+Subproject 77b033420485f7d3d35430c0e8d4d844aa89483
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/gpl2.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/gpl2.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5b6e7c66c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/gpl2.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,340 @@
+		    GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+		       Version 2, June 1991
+
+ Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+                       59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA  02111-1307  USA
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+			    Preamble
+
+  The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it.  By contrast, the GNU General Public
+License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
+software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.  This
+General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
+Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
+using it.  (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
+the GNU Library General Public License instead.)  You can apply it to
+your programs, too.
+
+  When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price.  Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
+if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
+in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+  To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
+distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
+
+  For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
+you have.  You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
+source code.  And you must show them these terms so they know their
+rights.
+
+  We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
+(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
+distribute and/or modify the software.
+
+  Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+software.  If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
+that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
+authors' reputations.
+
+  Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents.  We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
+program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
+program proprietary.  To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
+patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
+
+  The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+
+		    GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+   TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+  0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains
+a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
+under the terms of this General Public License.  The "Program", below,
+refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
+means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
+that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
+either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
+language.  (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
+the term "modification".)  Each licensee is addressed as "you".
+
+Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope.  The act of
+running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
+is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
+Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
+Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
+
+  1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
+source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
+conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
+copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
+notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
+and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
+along with the Program.
+
+You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
+you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
+
+  2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+    a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
+    stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+    b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
+    whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
+    part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
+    parties under the terms of this License.
+
+    c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
+    when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
+    interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
+    announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
+    notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
+    a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
+    these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
+    License.  (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
+    does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
+    the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole.  If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works.  But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Program.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
+with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+  3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
+under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
+Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
+
+    a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
+    source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
+    1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+    b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
+    years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
+    cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
+    machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
+    distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
+    customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+    c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
+    to distribute corresponding source code.  (This alternative is
+    allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
+    received the program in object code or executable form with such
+    an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
+
+The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it.  For an executable work, complete source
+code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
+associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
+control compilation and installation of the executable.  However, as a
+special exception, the source code distributed need not include
+anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
+form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
+operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
+itself accompanies the executable.
+
+If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
+access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
+access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
+distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+  4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
+except as expressly provided under this License.  Any attempt
+otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
+void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
+However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
+this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
+parties remain in full compliance.
+
+  5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it.  However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Program or its derivative works.  These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License.  Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Program or works based on it.
+
+  6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
+these terms and conditions.  You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+this License.
+
+  7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License.  If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Program at all.  For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
+any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
+apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
+circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
+implemented by public license practices.  Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+  8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
+may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
+those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
+countries not thus excluded.  In such case, this License incorporates
+the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
+
+  9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
+of the General Public License from time to time.  Such new versions will
+be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
+address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number.  If the Program
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
+later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
+either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
+Software Foundation.  If the Program does not specify a version number of
+this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
+Foundation.
+
+  10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
+to ask for permission.  For software which is copyrighted by the Free
+Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
+make exceptions for this.  Our decision will be guided by the two goals
+of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
+of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
+
+			    NO WARRANTY
+
+  11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
+FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.  EXCEPT WHEN
+OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
+PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
+OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  THE ENTIRE RISK AS
+TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU.  SHOULD THE
+PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
+REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+  12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
+REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
+INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
+OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
+TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
+YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
+PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+		     END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+	    How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+  If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
+free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
+
+  To do so, attach the following notices to the program.  It is safest
+to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
+the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+    <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
+    Copyright (C) <year>  <name of author>
+
+    This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+    it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+    the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+    (at your option) any later version.
+
+    This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+    but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+    GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+    You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+    along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+    Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA  02111-1307  USA
+
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
+when it starts in an interactive mode:
+
+    Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author
+    Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
+    This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
+    under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
+
+The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate
+parts of the General Public License.  Of course, the commands you use may
+be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be
+mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if
+necessary.  Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+  Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
+  `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
+
+  <signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
+  Ty Coon, President of Vice
+
+This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
+proprietary programs.  If your program is a subroutine library, you may
+consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
+library.  If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General
+Public License instead of this License.
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hexdump.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hexdump.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ffa7248b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hexdump.h
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+#if !defined(_usb_h_) || defined(__HEXDUMP_H__)
+#error "Never include hexdump.h directly; include Usb.h instead"
+#else
+#define __HEXDUMP_H__
+
+extern int UsbDEBUGlvl;
+
+template <class BASE_CLASS, class LEN_TYPE, class OFFSET_TYPE>
+class HexDumper : public BASE_CLASS {
+        uint8_t byteCount;
+        OFFSET_TYPE byteTotal;
+
+public:
+
+        HexDumper() : byteCount(0), byteTotal(0) {
+        };
+
+        void Initialize() {
+                byteCount = 0;
+                byteTotal = 0;
+        };
+
+        void Parse(const LEN_TYPE len, const uint8_t *pbuf, const OFFSET_TYPE &offset);
+};
+
+template <class BASE_CLASS, class LEN_TYPE, class OFFSET_TYPE>
+void HexDumper<BASE_CLASS, LEN_TYPE, OFFSET_TYPE>::Parse(const LEN_TYPE len, const uint8_t *pbuf, const OFFSET_TYPE &offset) {
+        if(UsbDEBUGlvl >= 0x80) { // Fully bypass this block of code if we do not debug.
+                for(LEN_TYPE j = 0; j < len; j++, byteCount++, byteTotal++) {
+                        if(!byteCount) {
+                                PrintHex<OFFSET_TYPE > (byteTotal, 0x80);
+                                E_Notify(PSTR(": "), 0x80);
+                        }
+                        PrintHex<uint8_t > (pbuf[j], 0x80);
+                        E_Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+
+                        if(byteCount == 15) {
+                                E_Notify(PSTR("\r\n"), 0x80);
+                                byteCount = 0xFF;
+                        }
+                }
+        }
+}
+
+#endif // __HEXDUMP_H__
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hid.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hid.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e4c7721a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hid.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+
+#include "hid.h"
+
+//get HID report descriptor
+
+/* WRONG! Endpoint is _ALWAYS_ ZERO for HID! We want the _INTERFACE_ value here!
+uint8_t HID::GetReportDescr(uint8_t ep, USBReadParser *parser) {
+        const uint8_t constBufLen = 64;
+        uint8_t buf[constBufLen];
+
+        uint8_t rcode = pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, ep, bmREQ_HID_REPORT, USB_REQUEST_GET_DESCRIPTOR, 0x00,
+                HID_DESCRIPTOR_REPORT, 0x0000, 128, constBufLen, buf, (USBReadParser*)parser);
+
+        //return ((rcode != hrSTALL) ? rcode : 0);
+        return rcode;
+}
+ */
+uint8_t HID::GetReportDescr(uint16_t wIndex, USBReadParser *parser) {
+        const uint8_t constBufLen = 64;
+        uint8_t buf[constBufLen];
+
+        uint8_t rcode = pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0x00, bmREQ_HID_REPORT, USB_REQUEST_GET_DESCRIPTOR, 0x00,
+                HID_DESCRIPTOR_REPORT, wIndex, 128, constBufLen, buf, (USBReadParser*)parser);
+
+        //return ((rcode != hrSTALL) ? rcode : 0);
+        return rcode;
+}
+
+//uint8_t HID::getHidDescr( uint8_t ep, uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t* dataptr )
+//{
+//    return( pUsb->ctrlReq( bAddress, ep, bmREQ_GET_DESCR, USB_REQUEST_GET_DESCRIPTOR, 0x00, HID_DESCRIPTOR_HID, 0x0000, nbytes, dataptr ));
+//}
+
+uint8_t HID::SetReport(uint8_t ep, uint8_t iface, uint8_t report_type, uint8_t report_id, uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t* dataptr) {
+        return ( pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, ep, bmREQ_HID_OUT, HID_REQUEST_SET_REPORT, report_id, report_type, iface, nbytes, nbytes, dataptr, NULL));
+}
+
+uint8_t HID::GetReport(uint8_t ep, uint8_t iface, uint8_t report_type, uint8_t report_id, uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t* dataptr) {
+        return ( pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, ep, bmREQ_HID_IN, HID_REQUEST_GET_REPORT, report_id, report_type, iface, nbytes, nbytes, dataptr, NULL));
+}
+
+uint8_t HID::GetIdle(uint8_t iface, uint8_t reportID, uint8_t* dataptr) {
+        return ( pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, bmREQ_HID_IN, HID_REQUEST_GET_IDLE, reportID, 0, iface, 0x0001, 0x0001, dataptr, NULL));
+}
+
+uint8_t HID::SetIdle(uint8_t iface, uint8_t reportID, uint8_t duration) {
+        return ( pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, bmREQ_HID_OUT, HID_REQUEST_SET_IDLE, reportID, duration, iface, 0x0000, 0x0000, NULL, NULL));
+}
+
+uint8_t HID::SetProtocol(uint8_t iface, uint8_t protocol) {
+        return ( pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, bmREQ_HID_OUT, HID_REQUEST_SET_PROTOCOL, protocol, 0x00, iface, 0x0000, 0x0000, NULL, NULL));
+}
+
+uint8_t HID::GetProtocol(uint8_t iface, uint8_t* dataptr) {
+        return ( pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, bmREQ_HID_IN, HID_REQUEST_GET_PROTOCOL, 0x00, 0x00, iface, 0x0001, 0x0001, dataptr, NULL));
+}
+
+void HID::PrintEndpointDescriptor(const USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR* ep_ptr) {
+        Notify(PSTR("Endpoint descriptor:"), 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nLength:\t\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (ep_ptr->bLength, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nType:\t\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (ep_ptr->bDescriptorType, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nAddress:\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (ep_ptr->bEndpointAddress, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nAttributes:\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (ep_ptr->bmAttributes, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nMaxPktSize:\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint16_t > (ep_ptr->wMaxPacketSize, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nPoll Intrv:\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (ep_ptr->bInterval, 0x80);
+}
+
+void HID::PrintHidDescriptor(const USB_HID_DESCRIPTOR *pDesc) {
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\n\r\nHID Descriptor:\r\n"), 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("bDescLength:\t\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (pDesc->bLength, 0x80);
+
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nbDescriptorType:\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (pDesc->bDescriptorType, 0x80);
+
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nbcdHID:\t\t\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint16_t > (pDesc->bcdHID, 0x80);
+
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nbCountryCode:\t\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (pDesc->bCountryCode, 0x80);
+
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nbNumDescriptors:\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (pDesc->bNumDescriptors, 0x80);
+
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nbDescrType:\t\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (pDesc->bDescrType, 0x80);
+
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nwDescriptorLength:\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint16_t > (pDesc->wDescriptorLength, 0x80);
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hid.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hid.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..72942ebc9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hid.h
@@ -0,0 +1,188 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+#if !defined(__HID_H__)
+#define __HID_H__
+
+#include "Usb.h"
+#include "hidusagestr.h"
+
+#define MAX_REPORT_PARSERS                      2
+#define HID_MAX_HID_CLASS_DESCRIPTORS           5
+
+#define DATA_SIZE_MASK                          0x03
+#define TYPE_MASK                               0x0C
+#define TAG_MASK                                0xF0
+
+#define DATA_SIZE_0                             0x00
+#define DATA_SIZE_1                             0x01
+#define DATA_SIZE_2                             0x02
+#define DATA_SIZE_4                             0x03
+
+#define TYPE_MAIN                               0x00
+#define TYPE_GLOBAL                             0x04
+#define TYPE_LOCAL                              0x08
+
+#define TAG_MAIN_INPUT                          0x80
+#define TAG_MAIN_OUTPUT                         0x90
+#define TAG_MAIN_COLLECTION                     0xA0
+#define TAG_MAIN_FEATURE                        0xB0
+#define TAG_MAIN_ENDCOLLECTION                  0xC0
+
+#define TAG_GLOBAL_USAGEPAGE                    0x00
+#define TAG_GLOBAL_LOGICALMIN                   0x10
+#define TAG_GLOBAL_LOGICALMAX                   0x20
+#define TAG_GLOBAL_PHYSMIN                      0x30
+#define TAG_GLOBAL_PHYSMAX                      0x40
+#define TAG_GLOBAL_UNITEXP                      0x50
+#define TAG_GLOBAL_UNIT                         0x60
+#define TAG_GLOBAL_REPORTSIZE                   0x70
+#define TAG_GLOBAL_REPORTID                     0x80
+#define TAG_GLOBAL_REPORTCOUNT                  0x90
+#define TAG_GLOBAL_PUSH                         0xA0
+#define TAG_GLOBAL_POP                          0xB0
+
+#define TAG_LOCAL_USAGE                         0x00
+#define TAG_LOCAL_USAGEMIN                      0x10
+#define TAG_LOCAL_USAGEMAX                      0x20
+
+/* HID requests */
+#define bmREQ_HID_OUT                           USB_SETUP_HOST_TO_DEVICE|USB_SETUP_TYPE_CLASS|USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_INTERFACE
+#define bmREQ_HID_IN                            USB_SETUP_DEVICE_TO_HOST|USB_SETUP_TYPE_CLASS|USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_INTERFACE
+#define bmREQ_HID_REPORT                        USB_SETUP_DEVICE_TO_HOST|USB_SETUP_TYPE_STANDARD|USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_INTERFACE
+
+/* HID constants. Not part of chapter 9 */
+/* Class-Specific Requests */
+#define HID_REQUEST_GET_REPORT                  0x01
+#define HID_REQUEST_GET_IDLE                    0x02
+#define HID_REQUEST_GET_PROTOCOL                0x03
+#define HID_REQUEST_SET_REPORT                  0x09
+#define HID_REQUEST_SET_IDLE                    0x0A
+#define HID_REQUEST_SET_PROTOCOL                0x0B
+
+/* Class Descriptor Types */
+#define HID_DESCRIPTOR_HID                      0x21
+#define HID_DESCRIPTOR_REPORT                   0x22
+#define HID_DESRIPTOR_PHY                       0x23
+
+/* Protocol Selection */
+#define HID_BOOT_PROTOCOL                       0x00
+#define HID_RPT_PROTOCOL                        0x01
+
+/* HID Interface Class Code */
+#define HID_INTF                                0x03
+
+/* HID Interface Class SubClass Codes */
+#define HID_BOOT_INTF_SUBCLASS                  0x01
+
+/* HID Interface Class Protocol Codes */
+#define HID_PROTOCOL_NONE                       0x00
+#define HID_PROTOCOL_KEYBOARD                   0x01
+#define HID_PROTOCOL_MOUSE                      0x02
+
+#define HID_ITEM_TYPE_MAIN                      0
+#define HID_ITEM_TYPE_GLOBAL                    1
+#define HID_ITEM_TYPE_LOCAL                     2
+#define HID_ITEM_TYPE_RESERVED                  3
+
+#define HID_LONG_ITEM_PREFIX                    0xfe    // Long item prefix value
+
+#define bmHID_MAIN_ITEM_TAG                     0xfc    // Main item tag mask
+
+#define bmHID_MAIN_ITEM_INPUT                   0x80    // Main item Input tag value
+#define bmHID_MAIN_ITEM_OUTPUT                  0x90    // Main item Output tag value
+#define bmHID_MAIN_ITEM_FEATURE                 0xb0    // Main item Feature tag value
+#define bmHID_MAIN_ITEM_COLLECTION              0xa0    // Main item Collection tag value
+#define bmHID_MAIN_ITEM_END_COLLECTION          0xce    // Main item End Collection tag value
+
+#define HID_MAIN_ITEM_COLLECTION_PHYSICAL       0
+#define HID_MAIN_ITEM_COLLECTION_APPLICATION    1
+#define HID_MAIN_ITEM_COLLECTION_LOGICAL        2
+#define HID_MAIN_ITEM_COLLECTION_REPORT         3
+#define HID_MAIN_ITEM_COLLECTION_NAMED_ARRAY    4
+#define HID_MAIN_ITEM_COLLECTION_USAGE_SWITCH   5
+#define HID_MAIN_ITEM_COLLECTION_USAGE_MODIFIER 6
+
+struct HidItemPrefix {
+        uint8_t bSize : 2;
+        uint8_t bType : 2;
+        uint8_t bTag : 4;
+};
+
+struct MainItemIOFeature {
+        uint8_t bmIsConstantOrData : 1;
+        uint8_t bmIsArrayOrVariable : 1;
+        uint8_t bmIsRelativeOrAbsolute : 1;
+        uint8_t bmIsWrapOrNoWrap : 1;
+        uint8_t bmIsNonLonearOrLinear : 1;
+        uint8_t bmIsNoPreferedOrPrefered : 1;
+        uint8_t bmIsNullOrNoNull : 1;
+        uint8_t bmIsVolatileOrNonVolatile : 1;
+};
+
+class HID;
+
+class HIDReportParser {
+public:
+        virtual void Parse(HID *hid, bool is_rpt_id, uint8_t len, uint8_t *buf) = 0;
+};
+
+class HID : public USBDeviceConfig, public UsbConfigXtracter {
+protected:
+        USB *pUsb; // USB class instance pointer
+        uint8_t bAddress; // address
+
+protected:
+        static const uint8_t epInterruptInIndex = 1; // InterruptIN  endpoint index
+        static const uint8_t epInterruptOutIndex = 2; // InterruptOUT endpoint index
+
+        static const uint8_t maxHidInterfaces = 3;
+        static const uint8_t maxEpPerInterface = 2;
+        static const uint8_t totalEndpoints = (maxHidInterfaces * maxEpPerInterface + 1);
+
+        void PrintEndpointDescriptor(const USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR* ep_ptr);
+        void PrintHidDescriptor(const USB_HID_DESCRIPTOR *pDesc);
+
+        virtual HIDReportParser* GetReportParser(uint8_t id) {
+                return NULL;
+        };
+
+public:
+
+        HID(USB *pusb) : pUsb(pusb) {
+        };
+
+        const USB* GetUsb() {
+                return pUsb;
+        };
+
+        virtual bool SetReportParser(uint8_t id, HIDReportParser *prs) {
+                return false;
+        };
+
+        uint8_t SetProtocol(uint8_t iface, uint8_t protocol);
+        uint8_t GetProtocol(uint8_t iface, uint8_t* dataptr);
+        uint8_t GetIdle(uint8_t iface, uint8_t reportID, uint8_t* dataptr);
+        uint8_t SetIdle(uint8_t iface, uint8_t reportID, uint8_t duration);
+
+        uint8_t GetReportDescr(uint16_t wIndex, USBReadParser *parser = NULL);
+
+        uint8_t GetHidDescr(uint8_t ep, uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t* dataptr);
+        uint8_t GetReport(uint8_t ep, uint8_t iface, uint8_t report_type, uint8_t report_id, uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t* dataptr);
+        uint8_t SetReport(uint8_t ep, uint8_t iface, uint8_t report_type, uint8_t report_id, uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t* dataptr);
+};
+
+#endif // __HID_H__
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hidboot.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hidboot.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..280b2f978
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hidboot.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,201 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+#include "hidboot.h"
+
+void MouseReportParser::Parse(HID *hid, bool is_rpt_id, uint8_t len, uint8_t *buf) {
+        MOUSEINFO *pmi = (MOUSEINFO*)buf;
+        // Future:
+        // bool event;
+
+#if 0
+        if (prevState.mouseInfo.bmLeftButton == 0 && pmi->bmLeftButton == 1)
+                OnLeftButtonDown(pmi);
+
+        if (prevState.mouseInfo.bmLeftButton == 1 && pmi->bmLeftButton == 0)
+                OnLeftButtonUp(pmi);
+
+        if (prevState.mouseInfo.bmRightButton == 0 && pmi->bmRightButton == 1)
+                OnRightButtonDown(pmi);
+
+        if (prevState.mouseInfo.bmRightButton == 1 && pmi->bmRightButton == 0)
+                OnRightButtonUp(pmi);
+
+        if (prevState.mouseInfo.bmMiddleButton == 0 && pmi->bmMiddleButton == 1)
+                OnMiddleButtonDown(pmi);
+
+        if (prevState.mouseInfo.bmMiddleButton == 1 && pmi->bmMiddleButton == 0)
+                OnMiddleButtonUp(pmi);
+
+        if (prevState.mouseInfo.dX != pmi->dX || prevState.mouseInfo.dY != pmi->dY)
+                OnMouseMove(pmi);
+
+        if (len > sizeof (MOUSEINFO))
+                for (uint8_t i = 0; i<sizeof (MOUSEINFO); i++)
+                        prevState.bInfo[i] = buf[i];
+#else
+        //
+        // Optimization idea:
+        //
+        // 1: Don't pass the structure on every event. Buttons would not need it.
+        // 2: Only pass x/y values in the movement routine.
+        //
+        // These two changes (with the ones I have made) will save extra flash.
+        // The only "bad" thing is that it could break old code.
+        //
+        // Future thoughts:
+        //
+        // The extra space gained can be used for a generic mouse event that can be called
+        // when there are _ANY_ changes. This one you _MAY_ want to pass everything, however the
+        // sketch could already have noted these facts to support drag/drop scroll wheel stuff, etc.
+        //
+
+        // Why do we need to pass the structure for buttons?
+        // The function call not enough of a hint for what is happening?
+        if(prevState.mouseInfo.bmLeftButton != pmi->bmLeftButton ) {
+                if(pmi->bmLeftButton) {
+                        OnLeftButtonDown(pmi);
+                } else {
+                        OnLeftButtonUp(pmi);
+                }
+                // Future:
+                // event = true;
+        }
+
+        if(prevState.mouseInfo.bmRightButton != pmi->bmRightButton) {
+                if(pmi->bmRightButton) {
+                        OnRightButtonDown(pmi);
+                } else {
+                        OnRightButtonUp(pmi);
+                }
+                // Future:
+                // event = true;
+        }
+
+        if(prevState.mouseInfo.bmMiddleButton != pmi->bmMiddleButton) {
+                if(pmi->bmMiddleButton) {
+                        OnMiddleButtonDown(pmi);
+                } else {
+                        OnMiddleButtonUp(pmi);
+                }
+                // Future:
+                // event = true;
+        }
+
+        //
+        // Scroll wheel(s), are not part of the spec, but we could support it.
+        // Logitech wireless keyboard and mouse combo reports scroll wheel in byte 4
+        // We wouldn't even need to save this information.
+        //if(len > 3) {
+        //}
+        //
+
+        // Mice only report motion when they actually move!
+        // Why not just pass the x/y values to simplify things??
+        if(pmi->dX || pmi->dY) {
+                OnMouseMove(pmi);
+                // Future:
+                // event = true;
+        }
+
+        //
+        // Future:
+        // Provide a callback that operates on the gathered events from above.
+        //
+        // if(event) OnMouse();
+        //
+
+        // Only the first byte matters (buttons). We do NOT need to save position info.
+        prevState.bInfo[0] = buf[0];
+#endif
+
+};
+
+void KeyboardReportParser::Parse(HID *hid, bool is_rpt_id, uint8_t len, uint8_t *buf) {
+        // On error - return
+        if (buf[2] == 1)
+                return;
+
+        //KBDINFO       *pki = (KBDINFO*)buf;
+
+        // provide event for changed control key state
+        if (prevState.bInfo[0x00] != buf[0x00]) {
+                OnControlKeysChanged(prevState.bInfo[0x00], buf[0x00]);
+        }
+
+        for (uint8_t i = 2; i < 8; i++) {
+                bool down = false;
+                bool up = false;
+
+                for (uint8_t j = 2; j < 8; j++) {
+                        if (buf[i] == prevState.bInfo[j] && buf[i] != 1)
+                                down = true;
+                        if (buf[j] == prevState.bInfo[i] && prevState.bInfo[i] != 1)
+                                up = true;
+                }
+                if (!down) {
+                        HandleLockingKeys(hid, buf[i]);
+                        OnKeyDown(*buf, buf[i]);
+                }
+                if (!up)
+                        OnKeyUp(prevState.bInfo[0], prevState.bInfo[i]);
+        }
+        for (uint8_t i = 0; i < 8; i++)
+                prevState.bInfo[i] = buf[i];
+};
+
+const uint8_t KeyboardReportParser::numKeys[10] PROGMEM = {'!', '@', '#', '$', '%', '^', '&', '*', '(', ')'};
+const uint8_t KeyboardReportParser::symKeysUp[12] PROGMEM = {'_', '+', '{', '}', '|', '~', ':', '"', '~', '<', '>', '?'};
+const uint8_t KeyboardReportParser::symKeysLo[12] PROGMEM = {'-', '=', '[', ']', '\\', ' ', ';', '\'', '`', ',', '.', '/'};
+const uint8_t KeyboardReportParser::padKeys[5] PROGMEM = {'/', '*', '-', '+', 0x13};
+
+uint8_t KeyboardReportParser::OemToAscii(uint8_t mod, uint8_t key) {
+        uint8_t shift = (mod & 0x22);
+
+        // [a-z]
+        if (VALUE_WITHIN(key, 0x04, 0x1d)) {
+                // Upper case letters
+                if ((kbdLockingKeys.kbdLeds.bmCapsLock == 0 && shift) ||
+                        (kbdLockingKeys.kbdLeds.bmCapsLock == 1 && shift == 0))
+                        return (key - 4 + 'A');
+
+                        // Lower case letters
+                else
+                        return (key - 4 + 'a');
+        }// Numbers
+        else if (VALUE_WITHIN(key, 0x1e, 0x27)) {
+                if (shift)
+                        return ((uint8_t)pgm_read_byte(&getNumKeys()[key - 0x1e]));
+                else
+                        return ((key == UHS_HID_BOOT_KEY_ZERO) ? '0' : key - 0x1e + '1');
+        }// Keypad Numbers
+        else if(VALUE_WITHIN(key, 0x59, 0x61)) {
+                if(kbdLockingKeys.kbdLeds.bmNumLock == 1)
+                        return (key - 0x59 + '1');
+        } else if(VALUE_WITHIN(key, 0x2d, 0x38))
+                return ((shift) ? (uint8_t)pgm_read_byte(&getSymKeysUp()[key - 0x2d]) : (uint8_t)pgm_read_byte(&getSymKeysLo()[key - 0x2d]));
+        else if(VALUE_WITHIN(key, 0x54, 0x58))
+                return (uint8_t)pgm_read_byte(&getPadKeys()[key - 0x54]);
+        else {
+                switch(key) {
+                        case UHS_HID_BOOT_KEY_SPACE: return (0x20);
+                        case UHS_HID_BOOT_KEY_ENTER: return (0x13);
+                        case UHS_HID_BOOT_KEY_ZERO2: return ((kbdLockingKeys.kbdLeds.bmNumLock == 1) ? '0': 0);
+                        case UHS_HID_BOOT_KEY_PERIOD: return ((kbdLockingKeys.kbdLeds.bmNumLock == 1) ? '.': 0);
+                }
+        }
+        return ( 0);
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hidboot.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hidboot.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fb63ec5e5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hidboot.h
@@ -0,0 +1,618 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+#if !defined(__HIDBOOT_H__)
+#define __HIDBOOT_H__
+
+#include "hid.h"
+
+#define UHS_HID_BOOT_KEY_ZERO           0x27
+#define UHS_HID_BOOT_KEY_ENTER          0x28
+#define UHS_HID_BOOT_KEY_SPACE          0x2c
+#define UHS_HID_BOOT_KEY_CAPS_LOCK      0x39
+#define UHS_HID_BOOT_KEY_SCROLL_LOCK    0x47
+#define UHS_HID_BOOT_KEY_NUM_LOCK       0x53
+#define UHS_HID_BOOT_KEY_ZERO2          0x62
+#define UHS_HID_BOOT_KEY_PERIOD         0x63
+
+// Don't worry, GCC will optimize the result to a final value.
+#define bitsEndpoints(p) ((((p) & HID_PROTOCOL_KEYBOARD)? 2 : 0) | (((p) & HID_PROTOCOL_MOUSE)? 1 : 0))
+#define totalEndpoints(p) ((bitsEndpoints(p) == 3) ? 3 : 2)
+#define epMUL(p) ((((p) & HID_PROTOCOL_KEYBOARD)? 1 : 0) + (((p) & HID_PROTOCOL_MOUSE)? 1 : 0))
+
+// Already defined in hid.h
+// #define HID_MAX_HID_CLASS_DESCRIPTORS 5
+
+struct MOUSEINFO {
+
+        struct {
+                uint8_t bmLeftButton : 1;
+                uint8_t bmRightButton : 1;
+                uint8_t bmMiddleButton : 1;
+                uint8_t bmDummy : 5;
+        };
+        int8_t dX;
+        int8_t dY;
+};
+
+class MouseReportParser : public HIDReportParser {
+
+        union {
+                MOUSEINFO mouseInfo;
+                uint8_t bInfo[sizeof (MOUSEINFO)];
+        } prevState;
+
+public:
+        void Parse(HID *hid, bool is_rpt_id, uint8_t len, uint8_t *buf);
+
+protected:
+
+        virtual void OnMouseMove(MOUSEINFO *mi) {
+        };
+
+        virtual void OnLeftButtonUp(MOUSEINFO *mi) {
+        };
+
+        virtual void OnLeftButtonDown(MOUSEINFO *mi) {
+        };
+
+        virtual void OnRightButtonUp(MOUSEINFO *mi) {
+        };
+
+        virtual void OnRightButtonDown(MOUSEINFO *mi) {
+        };
+
+        virtual void OnMiddleButtonUp(MOUSEINFO *mi) {
+        };
+
+        virtual void OnMiddleButtonDown(MOUSEINFO *mi) {
+        };
+};
+
+struct MODIFIERKEYS {
+        uint8_t bmLeftCtrl : 1;
+        uint8_t bmLeftShift : 1;
+        uint8_t bmLeftAlt : 1;
+        uint8_t bmLeftGUI : 1;
+        uint8_t bmRightCtrl : 1;
+        uint8_t bmRightShift : 1;
+        uint8_t bmRightAlt : 1;
+        uint8_t bmRightGUI : 1;
+};
+
+struct KBDINFO {
+
+        struct {
+                uint8_t bmLeftCtrl : 1;
+                uint8_t bmLeftShift : 1;
+                uint8_t bmLeftAlt : 1;
+                uint8_t bmLeftGUI : 1;
+                uint8_t bmRightCtrl : 1;
+                uint8_t bmRightShift : 1;
+                uint8_t bmRightAlt : 1;
+                uint8_t bmRightGUI : 1;
+        };
+        uint8_t bReserved;
+        uint8_t Keys[6];
+};
+
+struct KBDLEDS {
+        uint8_t bmNumLock : 1;
+        uint8_t bmCapsLock : 1;
+        uint8_t bmScrollLock : 1;
+        uint8_t bmCompose : 1;
+        uint8_t bmKana : 1;
+        uint8_t bmReserved : 3;
+};
+
+class KeyboardReportParser : public HIDReportParser {
+        static const uint8_t numKeys[10];
+        static const uint8_t symKeysUp[12];
+        static const uint8_t symKeysLo[12];
+        static const uint8_t padKeys[5];
+
+protected:
+
+        union {
+                KBDINFO kbdInfo;
+                uint8_t bInfo[sizeof (KBDINFO)];
+        } prevState;
+
+        union {
+                KBDLEDS kbdLeds;
+                uint8_t bLeds;
+        } kbdLockingKeys;
+
+        uint8_t OemToAscii(uint8_t mod, uint8_t key);
+
+public:
+
+        KeyboardReportParser() {
+                kbdLockingKeys.bLeds = 0;
+        };
+
+        void Parse(HID *hid, bool is_rpt_id, uint8_t len, uint8_t *buf);
+
+protected:
+
+        virtual uint8_t HandleLockingKeys(HID* hid, uint8_t key) {
+                uint8_t old_keys = kbdLockingKeys.bLeds;
+
+                switch(key) {
+                        case UHS_HID_BOOT_KEY_NUM_LOCK:
+                                kbdLockingKeys.kbdLeds.bmNumLock = ~kbdLockingKeys.kbdLeds.bmNumLock;
+                                break;
+                        case UHS_HID_BOOT_KEY_CAPS_LOCK:
+                                kbdLockingKeys.kbdLeds.bmCapsLock = ~kbdLockingKeys.kbdLeds.bmCapsLock;
+                                break;
+                        case UHS_HID_BOOT_KEY_SCROLL_LOCK:
+                                kbdLockingKeys.kbdLeds.bmScrollLock = ~kbdLockingKeys.kbdLeds.bmScrollLock;
+                                break;
+                }
+
+                if(old_keys != kbdLockingKeys.bLeds && hid)
+                        return (hid->SetReport(0, 0/*hid->GetIface()*/, 2, 0, 1, &kbdLockingKeys.bLeds));
+
+                return 0;
+        };
+
+        virtual void OnControlKeysChanged(uint8_t before, uint8_t after) {
+        };
+
+        virtual void OnKeyDown(uint8_t mod, uint8_t key) {
+        };
+
+        virtual void OnKeyUp(uint8_t mod, uint8_t key) {
+        };
+
+        virtual const uint8_t *getNumKeys() {
+                return numKeys;
+        };
+
+        virtual const uint8_t *getSymKeysUp() {
+                return symKeysUp;
+        };
+
+        virtual const uint8_t *getSymKeysLo() {
+                return symKeysLo;
+        };
+
+        virtual const uint8_t *getPadKeys() {
+                return padKeys;
+        };
+};
+
+template <const uint8_t BOOT_PROTOCOL>
+class HIDBoot : public HID //public USBDeviceConfig, public UsbConfigXtracter
+{
+        EpInfo epInfo[totalEndpoints(BOOT_PROTOCOL)];
+        HIDReportParser *pRptParser[epMUL(BOOT_PROTOCOL)];
+
+        uint8_t bConfNum; // configuration number
+        uint8_t bIfaceNum; // Interface Number
+        uint8_t bNumIface; // number of interfaces in the configuration
+        uint8_t bNumEP; // total number of EP in the configuration
+        uint32_t qNextPollTime; // next poll time
+        bool bPollEnable; // poll enable flag
+        uint8_t bInterval; // largest interval
+
+        void Initialize();
+
+        virtual HIDReportParser* GetReportParser(uint8_t id) {
+                return pRptParser[id];
+        };
+
+public:
+        HIDBoot(USB *p);
+
+        virtual bool SetReportParser(uint8_t id, HIDReportParser *prs) {
+                pRptParser[id] = prs;
+                return true;
+        };
+
+        // USBDeviceConfig implementation
+        uint8_t Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed);
+        uint8_t Release();
+        uint8_t Poll();
+
+        virtual uint8_t GetAddress() {
+                return bAddress;
+        };
+
+        virtual bool isReady() {
+                return bPollEnable;
+        };
+
+        // UsbConfigXtracter implementation
+        // Method should be defined here if virtual.
+        virtual void EndpointXtract(uint8_t conf, uint8_t iface, uint8_t alt, uint8_t proto, const USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR *ep);
+
+        virtual bool DEVCLASSOK(uint8_t klass) {
+                return (klass == USB_CLASS_HID);
+        }
+
+        virtual bool DEVSUBCLASSOK(uint8_t subklass) {
+                return (subklass == BOOT_PROTOCOL);
+        }
+};
+
+template <const uint8_t BOOT_PROTOCOL>
+HIDBoot<BOOT_PROTOCOL>::HIDBoot(USB *p) :
+HID(p),
+qNextPollTime(0),
+bPollEnable(false) {
+        Initialize();
+
+        for(int i = 0; i < epMUL(BOOT_PROTOCOL); i++) {
+                pRptParser[i] = NULL;
+        }
+        if(pUsb)
+                pUsb->RegisterDeviceClass(this);
+}
+
+template <const uint8_t BOOT_PROTOCOL>
+void HIDBoot<BOOT_PROTOCOL>::Initialize() {
+        for(int i = 0; i < totalEndpoints(BOOT_PROTOCOL); i++) {
+                epInfo[i].epAddr = 0;
+                epInfo[i].maxPktSize = (i) ? 0 : 8;
+                epInfo[i].epAttribs = 0;
+                epInfo[i].bmNakPower = (i) ? USB_NAK_NOWAIT : USB_NAK_MAX_POWER;
+        }
+        bNumEP = 1;
+        bNumIface = 0;
+        bConfNum = 0;
+}
+
+template <const uint8_t BOOT_PROTOCOL>
+uint8_t HIDBoot<BOOT_PROTOCOL>::Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed) {
+        const uint8_t constBufSize = sizeof (USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR);
+
+        uint8_t buf[constBufSize];
+        uint8_t rcode;
+        UsbDevice *p = NULL;
+        EpInfo *oldep_ptr = NULL;
+        uint8_t len = 0;
+        //uint16_t cd_len = 0;
+
+        uint8_t num_of_conf; // number of configurations
+        //uint8_t num_of_intf; // number of interfaces
+
+        AddressPool &addrPool = pUsb->GetAddressPool();
+
+        USBTRACE("BM Init\r\n");
+        //USBTRACE2("totalEndpoints:", (uint8_t) (totalEndpoints(BOOT_PROTOCOL)));
+        //USBTRACE2("epMUL:", epMUL(BOOT_PROTOCOL));
+
+        if(bAddress)
+                return USB_ERROR_CLASS_INSTANCE_ALREADY_IN_USE;
+
+        bInterval = 0;
+        // Get pointer to pseudo device with address 0 assigned
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(0);
+
+        if(!p)
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+
+        if(!p->epinfo) {
+                USBTRACE("epinfo\r\n");
+                return USB_ERROR_EPINFO_IS_NULL;
+        }
+
+        // Save old pointer to EP_RECORD of address 0
+        oldep_ptr = p->epinfo;
+
+        // Temporary assign new pointer to epInfo to p->epinfo in order to avoid toggle inconsistence
+        p->epinfo = epInfo;
+
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+
+        // Get device descriptor
+        rcode = pUsb->getDevDescr(0, 0, 8, (uint8_t*)buf);
+
+        if(!rcode)
+                len = (buf[0] > constBufSize) ? constBufSize : buf[0];
+
+        if(rcode) {
+                // Restore p->epinfo
+                p->epinfo = oldep_ptr;
+
+                goto FailGetDevDescr;
+        }
+
+        // Restore p->epinfo
+        p->epinfo = oldep_ptr;
+
+        // Allocate new address according to device class
+        bAddress = addrPool.AllocAddress(parent, false, port);
+
+        if(!bAddress)
+                return USB_ERROR_OUT_OF_ADDRESS_SPACE_IN_POOL;
+
+        // Extract Max Packet Size from the device descriptor
+        epInfo[0].maxPktSize = (uint8_t)((USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR*)buf)->bMaxPacketSize0;
+
+        // Assign new address to the device
+        rcode = pUsb->setAddr(0, 0, bAddress);
+
+        if(rcode) {
+                p->lowspeed = false;
+                addrPool.FreeAddress(bAddress);
+                bAddress = 0;
+                USBTRACE2("setAddr:", rcode);
+                return rcode;
+        }
+        //delay(2); //per USB 2.0 sect.9.2.6.3
+
+        USBTRACE2("Addr:", bAddress);
+
+        p->lowspeed = false;
+
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(bAddress);
+
+        if(!p)
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+
+        if(len)
+                rcode = pUsb->getDevDescr(bAddress, 0, len, (uint8_t*)buf);
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailGetDevDescr;
+
+        num_of_conf = ((USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR*)buf)->bNumConfigurations;
+
+        USBTRACE2("NC:", num_of_conf);
+
+        // GCC will optimize unused stuff away.
+        if((BOOT_PROTOCOL & (HID_PROTOCOL_KEYBOARD | HID_PROTOCOL_MOUSE)) == (HID_PROTOCOL_KEYBOARD | HID_PROTOCOL_MOUSE)) {
+                USBTRACE("HID_PROTOCOL_KEYBOARD AND MOUSE\r\n");
+                ConfigDescParser<
+                        USB_CLASS_HID,
+                        HID_BOOT_INTF_SUBCLASS,
+                        HID_PROTOCOL_KEYBOARD | HID_PROTOCOL_MOUSE,
+                        CP_MASK_COMPARE_ALL > confDescrParser(this);
+                confDescrParser.SetOR(); // Use the OR variant.
+                for(uint8_t i = 0; i < num_of_conf; i++) {
+                        pUsb->getConfDescr(bAddress, 0, i, &confDescrParser);
+                        if(bNumEP == (uint8_t)(totalEndpoints(BOOT_PROTOCOL)))
+                                break;
+                }
+        } else {
+                // GCC will optimize unused stuff away.
+                if(BOOT_PROTOCOL & HID_PROTOCOL_KEYBOARD) {
+                        USBTRACE("HID_PROTOCOL_KEYBOARD\r\n");
+                        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < num_of_conf; i++) {
+                                ConfigDescParser<
+                                        USB_CLASS_HID,
+                                        HID_BOOT_INTF_SUBCLASS,
+                                        HID_PROTOCOL_KEYBOARD,
+                                        CP_MASK_COMPARE_ALL> confDescrParserA(this);
+
+                                pUsb->getConfDescr(bAddress, 0, i, &confDescrParserA);
+                                if(bNumEP == (uint8_t)(totalEndpoints(BOOT_PROTOCOL)))
+                                        break;
+                        }
+                }
+
+                // GCC will optimize unused stuff away.
+                if(BOOT_PROTOCOL & HID_PROTOCOL_MOUSE) {
+                        USBTRACE("HID_PROTOCOL_MOUSE\r\n");
+                        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < num_of_conf; i++) {
+                                ConfigDescParser<
+                                        USB_CLASS_HID,
+                                        HID_BOOT_INTF_SUBCLASS,
+                                        HID_PROTOCOL_MOUSE,
+                                        CP_MASK_COMPARE_ALL> confDescrParserB(this);
+
+                                pUsb->getConfDescr(bAddress, 0, i, &confDescrParserB);
+                                if(bNumEP == ((uint8_t)(totalEndpoints(BOOT_PROTOCOL))))
+                                        break;
+
+                        }
+                }
+        }
+        USBTRACE2("bNumEP:", bNumEP);
+
+        if(bNumEP != (uint8_t)(totalEndpoints(BOOT_PROTOCOL))) {
+                rcode = USB_DEV_CONFIG_ERROR_DEVICE_NOT_SUPPORTED;
+                goto Fail;
+        }
+
+        // Assign epInfo to epinfo pointer
+        rcode = pUsb->setEpInfoEntry(bAddress, bNumEP, epInfo);
+        //USBTRACE2("setEpInfoEntry returned ", rcode);
+        USBTRACE2("Cnf:", bConfNum);
+
+        delay(1000);
+
+        // Set Configuration Value
+        rcode = pUsb->setConf(bAddress, 0, bConfNum);
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetConfDescr;
+
+        delay(1000);
+
+        USBTRACE2("bIfaceNum:", bIfaceNum);
+        USBTRACE2("bNumIface:", bNumIface);
+
+        // Yes, mouse wants SetProtocol and SetIdle too!
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < epMUL(BOOT_PROTOCOL); i++) {
+                USBTRACE2("\r\nInterface:", i);
+                rcode = SetProtocol(i, HID_BOOT_PROTOCOL);
+                if(rcode) goto FailSetProtocol;
+                USBTRACE2("PROTOCOL SET HID_BOOT rcode:", rcode);
+                rcode = SetIdle(i, 0, 0);
+                USBTRACE2("SET_IDLE rcode:", rcode);
+                // if(rcode) goto FailSetIdle; This can fail.
+                // Get the RPIPE and just throw it away.
+                SinkParser<USBReadParser, uint16_t, uint16_t> sink;
+                rcode = GetReportDescr(i, &sink);
+                USBTRACE2("RPIPE rcode:", rcode);
+        }
+
+        // Get RPIPE and throw it away.
+
+        if(BOOT_PROTOCOL & HID_PROTOCOL_KEYBOARD) {
+                // Wake keyboard interface by twinkling up to 5 LEDs that are in the spec.
+                // kana, compose, scroll, caps, num
+                rcode = 0x20; // Reuse rcode.
+                while(rcode) {
+                        rcode >>= 1;
+                        // Ignore any error returned, we don't care if LED is not supported
+                        SetReport(0, 0, 2, 0, 1, &rcode); // Eventually becomes zero (All off)
+                        delay(25);
+                }
+        }
+        USBTRACE("BM configured\r\n");
+
+        bPollEnable = true;
+        return 0;
+
+FailGetDevDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailGetDevDescr();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+        //FailSetDevTblEntry:
+        //#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        //        NotifyFailSetDevTblEntry();
+        //        goto Fail;
+        //#endif
+
+        //FailGetConfDescr:
+        //#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        //        NotifyFailGetConfDescr();
+        //        goto Fail;
+        //#endif
+
+FailSetConfDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailSetConfDescr();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailSetProtocol:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        USBTRACE("SetProto:");
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+        //FailSetIdle:
+        //#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        //        USBTRACE("SetIdle:");
+        //#endif
+
+Fail:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFail(rcode);
+#endif
+        Release();
+
+        return rcode;
+}
+
+template <const uint8_t BOOT_PROTOCOL>
+void HIDBoot<BOOT_PROTOCOL>::EndpointXtract(uint8_t conf, uint8_t iface, uint8_t alt, uint8_t proto, const USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR *pep) {
+
+        // If the first configuration satisfies, the others are not considered.
+        //if(bNumEP > 1 && conf != bConfNum)
+        if(bNumEP == totalEndpoints(BOOT_PROTOCOL))
+                return;
+
+        bConfNum = conf;
+        bIfaceNum = iface;
+
+        if((pep->bmAttributes & 0x03) == 3 && (pep->bEndpointAddress & 0x80) == 0x80) {
+                if(pep->bInterval > bInterval) bInterval = pep->bInterval;
+
+                // Fill in the endpoint info structure
+                epInfo[bNumEP].epAddr = (pep->bEndpointAddress & 0x0F);
+                epInfo[bNumEP].maxPktSize = (uint8_t)pep->wMaxPacketSize;
+                epInfo[bNumEP].epAttribs = 0;
+                epInfo[bNumEP].bmNakPower = USB_NAK_NOWAIT;
+                bNumEP++;
+
+        }
+}
+
+template <const uint8_t BOOT_PROTOCOL>
+uint8_t HIDBoot<BOOT_PROTOCOL>::Release() {
+        pUsb->GetAddressPool().FreeAddress(bAddress);
+
+        bConfNum = 0;
+        bIfaceNum = 0;
+        bNumEP = 1;
+        bAddress = 0;
+        qNextPollTime = 0;
+        bPollEnable = false;
+
+        return 0;
+}
+
+template <const uint8_t BOOT_PROTOCOL>
+uint8_t HIDBoot<BOOT_PROTOCOL>::Poll() {
+        uint8_t rcode = 0;
+
+        if(bPollEnable && ((long)(millis() - qNextPollTime) >= 0L)) {
+
+                // To-do: optimize manually, using the for loop only if needed.
+                for(int i = 0; i < epMUL(BOOT_PROTOCOL); i++) {
+                        const uint16_t const_buff_len = 16;
+                        uint8_t buf[const_buff_len];
+
+                        USBTRACE3("(hidboot.h) i=", i, 0x81);
+                        USBTRACE3("(hidboot.h) epInfo[epInterruptInIndex + i].epAddr=", epInfo[epInterruptInIndex + i].epAddr, 0x81);
+                        USBTRACE3("(hidboot.h) epInfo[epInterruptInIndex + i].maxPktSize=", epInfo[epInterruptInIndex + i].maxPktSize, 0x81);
+                        uint16_t read = (uint16_t)epInfo[epInterruptInIndex + i].maxPktSize;
+
+                        rcode = pUsb->inTransfer(bAddress, epInfo[epInterruptInIndex + i].epAddr, &read, buf);
+                        // SOME buggy dongles report extra keys (like sleep) using a 2 byte packet on the wrong endpoint.
+                        // Since keyboard and mice must report at least 3 bytes, we ignore the extra data.
+                        if(!rcode && read > 2) {
+                                if(pRptParser[i])
+                                        pRptParser[i]->Parse((HID*)this, 0, (uint8_t)read, buf);
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+                                // We really don't care about errors and anomalies unless we are debugging.
+                        } else {
+                                if(rcode != hrNAK) {
+                                        USBTRACE3("(hidboot.h) Poll:", rcode, 0x81);
+                                }
+                                if(!rcode && read) {
+                                        USBTRACE3("(hidboot.h) Strange read count: ", read, 0x80);
+                                        USBTRACE3("(hidboot.h) Interface:", i, 0x80);
+                                }
+                        }
+
+                        if(!rcode && read && (UsbDEBUGlvl > 0x7f)) {
+                                for(uint8_t i = 0; i < read; i++) {
+                                        PrintHex<uint8_t > (buf[i], 0x80);
+                                        USBTRACE1(" ", 0x80);
+                                }
+                                if(read)
+                                        USBTRACE1("\r\n", 0x80);
+#endif
+                        }
+
+                }
+                qNextPollTime = millis() + bInterval;
+        }
+        return rcode;
+}
+
+#endif // __HIDBOOTMOUSE_H__
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hidescriptorparser.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hidescriptorparser.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e4491b4e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hidescriptorparser.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,1588 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+
+#include "hidescriptorparser.h"
+
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::usagePageTitles0[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsagePageGenericDesktopControls,
+        pstrUsagePageSimulationControls,
+        pstrUsagePageVRControls,
+        pstrUsagePageSportControls,
+        pstrUsagePageGameControls,
+        pstrUsagePageGenericDeviceControls,
+        pstrUsagePageKeyboardKeypad,
+        pstrUsagePageLEDs,
+        pstrUsagePageButton,
+        pstrUsagePageOrdinal,
+        pstrUsagePageTelephone,
+        pstrUsagePageConsumer,
+        pstrUsagePageDigitizer,
+        pstrUsagePagePID,
+        pstrUsagePageUnicode
+};
+
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::usagePageTitles1[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsagePageBarCodeScanner,
+        pstrUsagePageScale,
+        pstrUsagePageMSRDevices,
+        pstrUsagePagePointOfSale,
+        pstrUsagePageCameraControl,
+        pstrUsagePageArcade
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::genDesktopTitles0[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsagePointer,
+        pstrUsageMouse,
+        pstrUsageJoystick,
+        pstrUsageGamePad,
+        pstrUsageKeyboard,
+        pstrUsageKeypad,
+        pstrUsageMultiAxisController,
+        pstrUsageTabletPCSystemControls
+
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::genDesktopTitles1[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageX,
+        pstrUsageY,
+        pstrUsageZ,
+        pstrUsageRx,
+        pstrUsageRy,
+        pstrUsageRz,
+        pstrUsageSlider,
+        pstrUsageDial,
+        pstrUsageWheel,
+        pstrUsageHatSwitch,
+        pstrUsageCountedBuffer,
+        pstrUsageByteCount,
+        pstrUsageMotionWakeup,
+        pstrUsageStart,
+        pstrUsageSelect,
+        pstrUsagePageReserved,
+        pstrUsageVx,
+        pstrUsageVy,
+        pstrUsageVz,
+        pstrUsageVbrx,
+        pstrUsageVbry,
+        pstrUsageVbrz,
+        pstrUsageVno,
+        pstrUsageFeatureNotification,
+        pstrUsageResolutionMultiplier
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::genDesktopTitles2[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageSystemControl,
+        pstrUsageSystemPowerDown,
+        pstrUsageSystemSleep,
+        pstrUsageSystemWakeup,
+        pstrUsageSystemContextMenu,
+        pstrUsageSystemMainMenu,
+        pstrUsageSystemAppMenu,
+        pstrUsageSystemMenuHelp,
+        pstrUsageSystemMenuExit,
+        pstrUsageSystemMenuSelect,
+        pstrUsageSystemMenuRight,
+        pstrUsageSystemMenuLeft,
+        pstrUsageSystemMenuUp,
+        pstrUsageSystemMenuDown,
+        pstrUsageSystemColdRestart,
+        pstrUsageSystemWarmRestart,
+        pstrUsageDPadUp,
+        pstrUsageDPadDown,
+        pstrUsageDPadRight,
+        pstrUsageDPadLeft
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::genDesktopTitles3[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageSystemDock,
+        pstrUsageSystemUndock,
+        pstrUsageSystemSetup,
+        pstrUsageSystemBreak,
+        pstrUsageSystemDebuggerBreak,
+        pstrUsageApplicationBreak,
+        pstrUsageApplicationDebuggerBreak,
+        pstrUsageSystemSpeakerMute,
+        pstrUsageSystemHibernate
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::genDesktopTitles4[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageSystemDisplayInvert,
+        pstrUsageSystemDisplayInternal,
+        pstrUsageSystemDisplayExternal,
+        pstrUsageSystemDisplayBoth,
+        pstrUsageSystemDisplayDual,
+        pstrUsageSystemDisplayToggleIntExt,
+        pstrUsageSystemDisplaySwapPriSec,
+        pstrUsageSystemDisplayLCDAutoscale
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::simuTitles0[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageFlightSimulationDevice,
+        pstrUsageAutomobileSimulationDevice,
+        pstrUsageTankSimulationDevice,
+        pstrUsageSpaceshipSimulationDevice,
+        pstrUsageSubmarineSimulationDevice,
+        pstrUsageSailingSimulationDevice,
+        pstrUsageMotocicleSimulationDevice,
+        pstrUsageSportsSimulationDevice,
+        pstrUsageAirplaneSimulationDevice,
+        pstrUsageHelicopterSimulationDevice,
+        pstrUsageMagicCarpetSimulationDevice,
+        pstrUsageBicycleSimulationDevice
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::simuTitles1[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageFlightControlStick,
+        pstrUsageFlightStick,
+        pstrUsageCyclicControl,
+        pstrUsageCyclicTrim,
+        pstrUsageFlightYoke,
+        pstrUsageTrackControl
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::simuTitles2[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageAileron,
+        pstrUsageAileronTrim,
+        pstrUsageAntiTorqueControl,
+        pstrUsageAutopilotEnable,
+        pstrUsageChaffRelease,
+        pstrUsageCollectiveControl,
+        pstrUsageDiveBrake,
+        pstrUsageElectronicCountermeasures,
+        pstrUsageElevator,
+        pstrUsageElevatorTrim,
+        pstrUsageRudder,
+        pstrUsageThrottle,
+        pstrUsageFlightCommunications,
+        pstrUsageFlareRelease,
+        pstrUsageLandingGear,
+        pstrUsageToeBrake,
+        pstrUsageTrigger,
+        pstrUsageWeaponsArm,
+        pstrUsageWeaponsSelect,
+        pstrUsageWingFlaps,
+        pstrUsageAccelerator,
+        pstrUsageBrake,
+        pstrUsageClutch,
+        pstrUsageShifter,
+        pstrUsageSteering,
+        pstrUsageTurretDirection,
+        pstrUsageBarrelElevation,
+        pstrUsageDivePlane,
+        pstrUsageBallast,
+        pstrUsageBicycleCrank,
+        pstrUsageHandleBars,
+        pstrUsageFrontBrake,
+        pstrUsageRearBrake
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::vrTitles0[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageBelt,
+        pstrUsageBodySuit,
+        pstrUsageFlexor,
+        pstrUsageGlove,
+        pstrUsageHeadTracker,
+        pstrUsageHeadMountedDisplay,
+        pstrUsageHandTracker,
+        pstrUsageOculometer,
+        pstrUsageVest,
+        pstrUsageAnimatronicDevice
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::vrTitles1[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageStereoEnable,
+        pstrUsageDisplayEnable
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::sportsCtrlTitles0[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageBaseballBat,
+        pstrUsageGolfClub,
+        pstrUsageRowingMachine,
+        pstrUsageTreadmill
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::sportsCtrlTitles1[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageOar,
+        pstrUsageSlope,
+        pstrUsageRate,
+        pstrUsageStickSpeed,
+        pstrUsageStickFaceAngle,
+        pstrUsageStickHeelToe,
+        pstrUsageStickFollowThough,
+        pstrUsageStickTempo,
+        pstrUsageStickType,
+        pstrUsageStickHeight
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::sportsCtrlTitles2[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsagePutter,
+        pstrUsage1Iron,
+        pstrUsage2Iron,
+        pstrUsage3Iron,
+        pstrUsage4Iron,
+        pstrUsage5Iron,
+        pstrUsage6Iron,
+        pstrUsage7Iron,
+        pstrUsage8Iron,
+        pstrUsage9Iron,
+        pstrUsage10Iron,
+        pstrUsage11Iron,
+        pstrUsageSandWedge,
+        pstrUsageLoftWedge,
+        pstrUsagePowerWedge,
+        pstrUsage1Wood,
+        pstrUsage3Wood,
+        pstrUsage5Wood,
+        pstrUsage7Wood,
+        pstrUsage9Wood
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::gameTitles0[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsage3DGameController,
+        pstrUsagePinballDevice,
+        pstrUsageGunDevice
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::gameTitles1[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsagePointOfView,
+        pstrUsageTurnRightLeft,
+        pstrUsagePitchForwardBackward,
+        pstrUsageRollRightLeft,
+        pstrUsageMoveRightLeft,
+        pstrUsageMoveForwardBackward,
+        pstrUsageMoveUpDown,
+        pstrUsageLeanRightLeft,
+        pstrUsageLeanForwardBackward,
+        pstrUsageHeightOfPOV,
+        pstrUsageFlipper,
+        pstrUsageSecondaryFlipper,
+        pstrUsageBump,
+        pstrUsageNewGame,
+        pstrUsageShootBall,
+        pstrUsagePlayer,
+        pstrUsageGunBolt,
+        pstrUsageGunClip,
+        pstrUsageGunSelector,
+        pstrUsageGunSingleShot,
+        pstrUsageGunBurst,
+        pstrUsageGunAutomatic,
+        pstrUsageGunSafety,
+        pstrUsageGamepadFireJump,
+        pstrUsageGamepadTrigger
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::genDevCtrlTitles[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageBatteryStrength,
+        pstrUsageWirelessChannel,
+        pstrUsageWirelessID,
+        pstrUsageDiscoverWirelessControl,
+        pstrUsageSecurityCodeCharEntered,
+        pstrUsageSecurityCodeCharErased,
+        pstrUsageSecurityCodeCleared
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::ledTitles[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageNumLock,
+        pstrUsageCapsLock,
+        pstrUsageScrollLock,
+        pstrUsageCompose,
+        pstrUsageKana,
+        pstrUsagePower,
+        pstrUsageShift,
+        pstrUsageDoNotDisturb,
+        pstrUsageMute,
+        pstrUsageToneEnable,
+        pstrUsageHighCutFilter,
+        pstrUsageLowCutFilter,
+        pstrUsageEqualizerEnable,
+        pstrUsageSoundFieldOn,
+        pstrUsageSurroundOn,
+        pstrUsageRepeat,
+        pstrUsageStereo,
+        pstrUsageSamplingRateDetect,
+        pstrUsageSpinning,
+        pstrUsageCAV,
+        pstrUsageCLV,
+        pstrUsageRecordingFormatDetect,
+        pstrUsageOffHook,
+        pstrUsageRing,
+        pstrUsageMessageWaiting,
+        pstrUsageDataMode,
+        pstrUsageBatteryOperation,
+        pstrUsageBatteryOK,
+        pstrUsageBatteryLow,
+        pstrUsageSpeaker,
+        pstrUsageHeadSet,
+        pstrUsageHold,
+        pstrUsageMicrophone,
+        pstrUsageCoverage,
+        pstrUsageNightMode,
+        pstrUsageSendCalls,
+        pstrUsageCallPickup,
+        pstrUsageConference,
+        pstrUsageStandBy,
+        pstrUsageCameraOn,
+        pstrUsageCameraOff,
+        pstrUsageOnLine,
+        pstrUsageOffLine,
+        pstrUsageBusy,
+        pstrUsageReady,
+        pstrUsagePaperOut,
+        pstrUsagePaperJam,
+        pstrUsageRemote,
+        pstrUsageForward,
+        pstrUsageReverse,
+        pstrUsageStop,
+        pstrUsageRewind,
+        pstrUsageFastForward,
+        pstrUsagePlay,
+        pstrUsagePause,
+        pstrUsageRecord,
+        pstrUsageError,
+        pstrUsageSelectedIndicator,
+        pstrUsageInUseIndicator,
+        pstrUsageMultiModeIndicator,
+        pstrUsageIndicatorOn,
+        pstrUsageIndicatorFlash,
+        pstrUsageIndicatorSlowBlink,
+        pstrUsageIndicatorFastBlink,
+        pstrUsageIndicatorOff,
+        pstrUsageFlashOnTime,
+        pstrUsageSlowBlinkOnTime,
+        pstrUsageSlowBlinkOffTime,
+        pstrUsageFastBlinkOnTime,
+        pstrUsageFastBlinkOffTime,
+        pstrUsageIndicatorColor,
+        pstrUsageIndicatorRed,
+        pstrUsageIndicatorGreen,
+        pstrUsageIndicatorAmber,
+        pstrUsageGenericIndicator,
+        pstrUsageSystemSuspend,
+        pstrUsageExternalPowerConnected
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::telTitles0 [] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsagePhone,
+        pstrUsageAnsweringMachine,
+        pstrUsageMessageControls,
+        pstrUsageHandset,
+        pstrUsageHeadset,
+        pstrUsageTelephonyKeyPad,
+        pstrUsageProgrammableButton
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::telTitles1 [] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageHookSwitch,
+        pstrUsageFlash,
+        pstrUsageFeature,
+        pstrUsageHold,
+        pstrUsageRedial,
+        pstrUsageTransfer,
+        pstrUsageDrop,
+        pstrUsagePark,
+        pstrUsageForwardCalls,
+        pstrUsageAlternateFunction,
+        pstrUsageLine,
+        pstrUsageSpeakerPhone,
+        pstrUsageConference,
+        pstrUsageRingEnable,
+        pstrUsageRingSelect,
+        pstrUsagePhoneMute,
+        pstrUsageCallerID,
+        pstrUsageSend
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::telTitles2 [] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageSpeedDial,
+        pstrUsageStoreNumber,
+        pstrUsageRecallNumber,
+        pstrUsagePhoneDirectory
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::telTitles3 [] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageVoiceMail,
+        pstrUsageScreenCalls,
+        pstrUsageDoNotDisturb,
+        pstrUsageMessage,
+        pstrUsageAnswerOnOff
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::telTitles4 [] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageInsideDialTone,
+        pstrUsageOutsideDialTone,
+        pstrUsageInsideRingTone,
+        pstrUsageOutsideRingTone,
+        pstrUsagePriorityRingTone,
+        pstrUsageInsideRingback,
+        pstrUsagePriorityRingback,
+        pstrUsageLineBusyTone,
+        pstrUsageReorderTone,
+        pstrUsageCallWaitingTone,
+        pstrUsageConfirmationTone1,
+        pstrUsageConfirmationTone2,
+        pstrUsageTonesOff,
+        pstrUsageOutsideRingback,
+        pstrUsageRinger
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::telTitles5 [] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsagePhoneKey0,
+        pstrUsagePhoneKey1,
+        pstrUsagePhoneKey2,
+        pstrUsagePhoneKey3,
+        pstrUsagePhoneKey4,
+        pstrUsagePhoneKey5,
+        pstrUsagePhoneKey6,
+        pstrUsagePhoneKey7,
+        pstrUsagePhoneKey8,
+        pstrUsagePhoneKey9,
+        pstrUsagePhoneKeyStar,
+        pstrUsagePhoneKeyPound,
+        pstrUsagePhoneKeyA,
+        pstrUsagePhoneKeyB,
+        pstrUsagePhoneKeyC,
+        pstrUsagePhoneKeyD
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::consTitles0[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageConsumerControl,
+        pstrUsageNumericKeyPad,
+        pstrUsageProgrammableButton,
+        pstrUsageMicrophone,
+        pstrUsageHeadphone,
+        pstrUsageGraphicEqualizer
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::consTitles1[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsagePlus10,
+        pstrUsagePlus100,
+        pstrUsageAMPM
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::consTitles2[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsagePower,
+        pstrUsageReset,
+        pstrUsageSleep,
+        pstrUsageSleepAfter,
+        pstrUsageSleepMode,
+        pstrUsageIllumination,
+        pstrUsageFunctionButtons
+
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::consTitles3[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageMenu,
+        pstrUsageMenuPick,
+        pstrUsageMenuUp,
+        pstrUsageMenuDown,
+        pstrUsageMenuLeft,
+        pstrUsageMenuRight,
+        pstrUsageMenuEscape,
+        pstrUsageMenuValueIncrease,
+        pstrUsageMenuValueDecrease
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::consTitles4[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageDataOnScreen,
+        pstrUsageClosedCaption,
+        pstrUsageClosedCaptionSelect,
+        pstrUsageVCRTV,
+        pstrUsageBroadcastMode,
+        pstrUsageSnapshot,
+        pstrUsageStill
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::consTitles5[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageSelection,
+        pstrUsageAssignSelection,
+        pstrUsageModeStep,
+        pstrUsageRecallLast,
+        pstrUsageEnterChannel,
+        pstrUsageOrderMovie,
+        pstrUsageChannel,
+        pstrUsageMediaSelection,
+        pstrUsageMediaSelectComputer,
+        pstrUsageMediaSelectTV,
+        pstrUsageMediaSelectWWW,
+        pstrUsageMediaSelectDVD,
+        pstrUsageMediaSelectTelephone,
+        pstrUsageMediaSelectProgramGuide,
+        pstrUsageMediaSelectVideoPhone,
+        pstrUsageMediaSelectGames,
+        pstrUsageMediaSelectMessages,
+        pstrUsageMediaSelectCD,
+        pstrUsageMediaSelectVCR,
+        pstrUsageMediaSelectTuner,
+        pstrUsageQuit,
+        pstrUsageHelp,
+        pstrUsageMediaSelectTape,
+        pstrUsageMediaSelectCable,
+        pstrUsageMediaSelectSatellite,
+        pstrUsageMediaSelectSecurity,
+        pstrUsageMediaSelectHome,
+        pstrUsageMediaSelectCall,
+        pstrUsageChannelIncrement,
+        pstrUsageChannelDecrement,
+        pstrUsageMediaSelectSAP,
+        pstrUsagePageReserved,
+        pstrUsageVCRPlus,
+        pstrUsageOnce,
+        pstrUsageDaily,
+        pstrUsageWeekly,
+        pstrUsageMonthly
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::consTitles6[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsagePlay,
+        pstrUsagePause,
+        pstrUsageRecord,
+        pstrUsageFastForward,
+        pstrUsageRewind,
+        pstrUsageScanNextTrack,
+        pstrUsageScanPreviousTrack,
+        pstrUsageStop,
+        pstrUsageEject,
+        pstrUsageRandomPlay,
+        pstrUsageSelectDisk,
+        pstrUsageEnterDisk,
+        pstrUsageRepeat,
+        pstrUsageTracking,
+        pstrUsageTrackNormal,
+        pstrUsageSlowTracking,
+        pstrUsageFrameForward,
+        pstrUsageFrameBackwards,
+        pstrUsageMark,
+        pstrUsageClearMark,
+        pstrUsageRepeatFromMark,
+        pstrUsageReturnToMark,
+        pstrUsageSearchMarkForward,
+        pstrUsageSearchMarkBackwards,
+        pstrUsageCounterReset,
+        pstrUsageShowCounter,
+        pstrUsageTrackingIncrement,
+        pstrUsageTrackingDecrement,
+        pstrUsageStopEject,
+        pstrUsagePlayPause,
+        pstrUsagePlaySkip
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::consTitles7[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageVolume,
+        pstrUsageBalance,
+        pstrUsageMute,
+        pstrUsageBass,
+        pstrUsageTreble,
+        pstrUsageBassBoost,
+        pstrUsageSurroundMode,
+        pstrUsageLoudness,
+        pstrUsageMPX,
+        pstrUsageVolumeIncrement,
+        pstrUsageVolumeDecrement
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::consTitles8[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageSpeedSelect,
+        pstrUsagePlaybackSpeed,
+        pstrUsageStandardPlay,
+        pstrUsageLongPlay,
+        pstrUsageExtendedPlay,
+        pstrUsageSlow
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::consTitles9[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageFanEnable,
+        pstrUsageFanSpeed,
+        pstrUsageLightEnable,
+        pstrUsageLightIlluminationLevel,
+        pstrUsageClimateControlEnable,
+        pstrUsageRoomTemperature,
+        pstrUsageSecurityEnable,
+        pstrUsageFireAlarm,
+        pstrUsagePoliceAlarm,
+        pstrUsageProximity,
+        pstrUsageMotion,
+        pstrUsageDuresAlarm,
+        pstrUsageHoldupAlarm,
+        pstrUsageMedicalAlarm
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::consTitlesA[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageBalanceRight,
+        pstrUsageBalanceLeft,
+        pstrUsageBassIncrement,
+        pstrUsageBassDecrement,
+        pstrUsageTrebleIncrement,
+        pstrUsageTrebleDecrement
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::consTitlesB[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageSpeakerSystem,
+        pstrUsageChannelLeft,
+        pstrUsageChannelRight,
+        pstrUsageChannelCenter,
+        pstrUsageChannelFront,
+        pstrUsageChannelCenterFront,
+        pstrUsageChannelSide,
+        pstrUsageChannelSurround,
+        pstrUsageChannelLowFreqEnhancement,
+        pstrUsageChannelTop,
+        pstrUsageChannelUnknown
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::consTitlesC[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageSubChannel,
+        pstrUsageSubChannelIncrement,
+        pstrUsageSubChannelDecrement,
+        pstrUsageAlternateAudioIncrement,
+        pstrUsageAlternateAudioDecrement
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::consTitlesD[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageApplicationLaunchButtons,
+        pstrUsageALLaunchButtonConfigTool,
+        pstrUsageALProgrammableButton,
+        pstrUsageALConsumerControlConfig,
+        pstrUsageALWordProcessor,
+        pstrUsageALTextEditor,
+        pstrUsageALSpreadsheet,
+        pstrUsageALGraphicsEditor,
+        pstrUsageALPresentationApp,
+        pstrUsageALDatabaseApp,
+        pstrUsageALEmailReader,
+        pstrUsageALNewsreader,
+        pstrUsageALVoicemail,
+        pstrUsageALContactsAddressBook,
+        pstrUsageALCalendarSchedule,
+        pstrUsageALTaskProjectManager,
+        pstrUsageALLogJournalTimecard,
+        pstrUsageALCheckbookFinance,
+        pstrUsageALCalculator,
+        pstrUsageALAVCapturePlayback,
+        pstrUsageALLocalMachineBrowser,
+        pstrUsageALLANWANBrow,
+        pstrUsageALInternetBrowser,
+        pstrUsageALRemoteNetISPConnect,
+        pstrUsageALNetworkConference,
+        pstrUsageALNetworkChat,
+        pstrUsageALTelephonyDialer,
+        pstrUsageALLogon,
+        pstrUsageALLogoff,
+        pstrUsageALLogonLogoff,
+        pstrUsageALTermLockScrSav,
+        pstrUsageALControlPannel,
+        pstrUsageALCommandLineProcessorRun,
+        pstrUsageALProcessTaskManager,
+        pstrUsageALSelectTaskApplication,
+        pstrUsageALNextTaskApplication,
+        pstrUsageALPreviousTaskApplication,
+        pstrUsageALPreemptiveHaltTaskApp,
+        pstrUsageALIntegratedHelpCenter,
+        pstrUsageALDocuments,
+        pstrUsageALThesaurus,
+        pstrUsageALDictionary,
+        pstrUsageALDesktop,
+        pstrUsageALSpellCheck,
+        pstrUsageALGrammarCheck,
+        pstrUsageALWirelessStatus,
+        pstrUsageALKeyboardLayout,
+        pstrUsageALVirusProtection,
+        pstrUsageALEncryption,
+        pstrUsageALScreenSaver,
+        pstrUsageALAlarms,
+        pstrUsageALClock,
+        pstrUsageALFileBrowser,
+        pstrUsageALPowerStatus,
+        pstrUsageALImageBrowser,
+        pstrUsageALAudioBrowser,
+        pstrUsageALMovieBrowser,
+        pstrUsageALDigitalRightsManager,
+        pstrUsageALDigitalWallet,
+        pstrUsagePageReserved,
+        pstrUsageALInstantMessaging,
+        pstrUsageALOEMFeaturesBrowser,
+        pstrUsageALOEMHelp,
+        pstrUsageALOnlineCommunity,
+        pstrUsageALEntertainmentContentBrow,
+        pstrUsageALOnlineShoppingBrowser,
+        pstrUsageALSmartCardInfoHelp,
+        pstrUsageALMarketMonitorFinBrowser,
+        pstrUsageALCustomCorpNewsBrowser,
+        pstrUsageALOnlineActivityBrowser,
+        pstrUsageALResearchSearchBrowser,
+        pstrUsageALAudioPlayer
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::consTitlesE[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageGenericGUIAppControls,
+        pstrUsageACNew,
+        pstrUsageACOpen,
+        pstrUsageACClose,
+        pstrUsageACExit,
+        pstrUsageACMaximize,
+        pstrUsageACMinimize,
+        pstrUsageACSave,
+        pstrUsageACPrint,
+        pstrUsageACProperties,
+        pstrUsageACUndo,
+        pstrUsageACCopy,
+        pstrUsageACCut,
+        pstrUsageACPaste,
+        pstrUsageACSelectAll,
+        pstrUsageACFind,
+        pstrUsageACFindAndReplace,
+        pstrUsageACSearch,
+        pstrUsageACGoto,
+        pstrUsageACHome,
+        pstrUsageACBack,
+        pstrUsageACForward,
+        pstrUsageACStop,
+        pstrUsageACRefresh,
+        pstrUsageACPreviousLink,
+        pstrUsageACNextLink,
+        pstrUsageACBookmarks,
+        pstrUsageACHistory,
+        pstrUsageACSubscriptions,
+        pstrUsageACZoomIn,
+        pstrUsageACZoomOut,
+        pstrUsageACZoom,
+        pstrUsageACFullScreenView,
+        pstrUsageACNormalView,
+        pstrUsageACViewToggle,
+        pstrUsageACScrollUp,
+        pstrUsageACScrollDown,
+        pstrUsageACScroll,
+        pstrUsageACPanLeft,
+        pstrUsageACPanRight,
+        pstrUsageACPan,
+        pstrUsageACNewWindow,
+        pstrUsageACTileHoriz,
+        pstrUsageACTileVert,
+        pstrUsageACFormat,
+        pstrUsageACEdit,
+        pstrUsageACBold,
+        pstrUsageACItalics,
+        pstrUsageACUnderline,
+        pstrUsageACStrikethrough,
+        pstrUsageACSubscript,
+        pstrUsageACSuperscript,
+        pstrUsageACAllCaps,
+        pstrUsageACRotate,
+        pstrUsageACResize,
+        pstrUsageACFlipHorizontal,
+        pstrUsageACFlipVertical,
+        pstrUsageACMirrorHorizontal,
+        pstrUsageACMirrorVertical,
+        pstrUsageACFontSelect,
+        pstrUsageACFontColor,
+        pstrUsageACFontSize,
+        pstrUsageACJustifyLeft,
+        pstrUsageACJustifyCenterH,
+        pstrUsageACJustifyRight,
+        pstrUsageACJustifyBlockH,
+        pstrUsageACJustifyTop,
+        pstrUsageACJustifyCenterV,
+        pstrUsageACJustifyBottom,
+        pstrUsageACJustifyBlockV,
+        pstrUsageACIndentDecrease,
+        pstrUsageACIndentIncrease,
+        pstrUsageACNumberedList,
+        pstrUsageACRestartNumbering,
+        pstrUsageACBulletedList,
+        pstrUsageACPromote,
+        pstrUsageACDemote,
+        pstrUsageACYes,
+        pstrUsageACNo,
+        pstrUsageACCancel,
+        pstrUsageACCatalog,
+        pstrUsageACBuyChkout,
+        pstrUsageACAddToCart,
+        pstrUsageACExpand,
+        pstrUsageACExpandAll,
+        pstrUsageACCollapse,
+        pstrUsageACCollapseAll,
+        pstrUsageACPrintPreview,
+        pstrUsageACPasteSpecial,
+        pstrUsageACInsertMode,
+        pstrUsageACDelete,
+        pstrUsageACLock,
+        pstrUsageACUnlock,
+        pstrUsageACProtect,
+        pstrUsageACUnprotect,
+        pstrUsageACAttachComment,
+        pstrUsageACDeleteComment,
+        pstrUsageACViewComment,
+        pstrUsageACSelectWord,
+        pstrUsageACSelectSentence,
+        pstrUsageACSelectParagraph,
+        pstrUsageACSelectColumn,
+        pstrUsageACSelectRow,
+        pstrUsageACSelectTable,
+        pstrUsageACSelectObject,
+        pstrUsageACRedoRepeat,
+        pstrUsageACSort,
+        pstrUsageACSortAscending,
+        pstrUsageACSortDescending,
+        pstrUsageACFilter,
+        pstrUsageACSetClock,
+        pstrUsageACViewClock,
+        pstrUsageACSelectTimeZone,
+        pstrUsageACEditTimeZone,
+        pstrUsageACSetAlarm,
+        pstrUsageACClearAlarm,
+        pstrUsageACSnoozeAlarm,
+        pstrUsageACResetAlarm,
+        pstrUsageACSyncronize,
+        pstrUsageACSendReceive,
+        pstrUsageACSendTo,
+        pstrUsageACReply,
+        pstrUsageACReplyAll,
+        pstrUsageACForwardMessage,
+        pstrUsageACSend,
+        pstrUsageACAttachFile,
+        pstrUsageACUpload,
+        pstrUsageACDownload,
+        pstrUsageACSetBorders,
+        pstrUsageACInsertRow,
+        pstrUsageACInsertColumn,
+        pstrUsageACInsertFile,
+        pstrUsageACInsertPicture,
+        pstrUsageACInsertObject,
+        pstrUsageACInsertSymbol,
+        pstrUsageACSaveAndClose,
+        pstrUsageACRename,
+        pstrUsageACMerge,
+        pstrUsageACSplit,
+        pstrUsageACDistributeHorizontaly,
+        pstrUsageACDistributeVerticaly
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::digitTitles0[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageDigitizer,
+        pstrUsagePen,
+        pstrUsageLightPen,
+        pstrUsageTouchScreen,
+        pstrUsageTouchPad,
+        pstrUsageWhiteBoard,
+        pstrUsageCoordinateMeasuringMachine,
+        pstrUsage3DDigitizer,
+        pstrUsageStereoPlotter,
+        pstrUsageArticulatedArm,
+        pstrUsageArmature,
+        pstrUsageMultiplePointDigitizer,
+        pstrUsageFreeSpaceWand
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::digitTitles1[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageStylus,
+        pstrUsagePuck,
+        pstrUsageFinger
+
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::digitTitles2[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageTipPressure,
+        pstrUsageBarrelPressure,
+        pstrUsageInRange,
+        pstrUsageTouch,
+        pstrUsageUntouch,
+        pstrUsageTap,
+        pstrUsageQuality,
+        pstrUsageDataValid,
+        pstrUsageTransducerIndex,
+        pstrUsageTabletFunctionKeys,
+        pstrUsageProgramChangeKeys,
+        pstrUsageBatteryStrength,
+        pstrUsageInvert,
+        pstrUsageXTilt,
+        pstrUsageYTilt,
+        pstrUsageAzimuth,
+        pstrUsageAltitude,
+        pstrUsageTwist,
+        pstrUsageTipSwitch,
+        pstrUsageSecondaryTipSwitch,
+        pstrUsageBarrelSwitch,
+        pstrUsageEraser,
+        pstrUsageTabletPick
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::aplphanumTitles0[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageAlphanumericDisplay,
+        pstrUsageBitmappedDisplay
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::aplphanumTitles1[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageDisplayAttributesReport,
+        pstrUsageASCIICharacterSet,
+        pstrUsageDataReadBack,
+        pstrUsageFontReadBack,
+        pstrUsageDisplayControlReport,
+        pstrUsageClearDisplay,
+        pstrUsageDisplayEnable,
+        pstrUsageScreenSaverDelay,
+        pstrUsageScreenSaverEnable,
+        pstrUsageVerticalScroll,
+        pstrUsageHorizontalScroll,
+        pstrUsageCharacterReport,
+        pstrUsageDisplayData,
+        pstrUsageDisplayStatus,
+        pstrUsageStatusNotReady,
+        pstrUsageStatusReady,
+        pstrUsageErrorNotALoadableCharacter,
+        pstrUsageErrorFotDataCanNotBeRead,
+        pstrUsageCursorPositionReport,
+        pstrUsageRow,
+        pstrUsageColumn,
+        pstrUsageRows,
+        pstrUsageColumns,
+        pstrUsageCursorPixelPosition,
+        pstrUsageCursorMode,
+        pstrUsageCursorEnable,
+        pstrUsageCursorBlink,
+        pstrUsageFontReport,
+        pstrUsageFontData,
+        pstrUsageCharacterWidth,
+        pstrUsageCharacterHeight,
+        pstrUsageCharacterSpacingHorizontal,
+        pstrUsageCharacterSpacingVertical,
+        pstrUsageUnicodeCharset,
+        pstrUsageFont7Segment,
+        pstrUsage7SegmentDirectMap,
+        pstrUsageFont14Segment,
+        pstrUsage14SegmentDirectMap,
+        pstrUsageDisplayBrightness,
+        pstrUsageDisplayContrast,
+        pstrUsageCharacterAttribute,
+        pstrUsageAttributeReadback,
+        pstrUsageAttributeData,
+        pstrUsageCharAttributeEnhance,
+        pstrUsageCharAttributeUnderline,
+        pstrUsageCharAttributeBlink
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::aplphanumTitles2[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageBitmapSizeX,
+        pstrUsageBitmapSizeY,
+        pstrUsagePageReserved,
+        pstrUsageBitDepthFormat,
+        pstrUsageDisplayOrientation,
+        pstrUsagePaletteReport,
+        pstrUsagePaletteDataSize,
+        pstrUsagePaletteDataOffset,
+        pstrUsagePaletteData,
+        pstrUsageBlitReport,
+        pstrUsageBlitRectangleX1,
+        pstrUsageBlitRectangleY1,
+        pstrUsageBlitRectangleX2,
+        pstrUsageBlitRectangleY2,
+        pstrUsageBlitData,
+        pstrUsageSoftButton,
+        pstrUsageSoftButtonID,
+        pstrUsageSoftButtonSide,
+        pstrUsageSoftButtonOffset1,
+        pstrUsageSoftButtonOffset2,
+        pstrUsageSoftButtonReport
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::medInstrTitles0[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageVCRAcquisition,
+        pstrUsageFreezeThaw,
+        pstrUsageClipStore,
+        pstrUsageUpdate,
+        pstrUsageNext,
+        pstrUsageSave,
+        pstrUsagePrint,
+        pstrUsageMicrophoneEnable
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::medInstrTitles1[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageCine,
+        pstrUsageTransmitPower,
+        pstrUsageVolume,
+        pstrUsageFocus,
+        pstrUsageDepth
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::medInstrTitles2[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageSoftStepPrimary,
+        pstrUsageSoftStepSecondary
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::medInstrTitles3[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageZoomSelect,
+        pstrUsageZoomAdjust,
+        pstrUsageSpectralDopplerModeSelect,
+        pstrUsageSpectralDopplerModeAdjust,
+        pstrUsageColorDopplerModeSelect,
+        pstrUsageColorDopplerModeAdjust,
+        pstrUsageMotionModeSelect,
+        pstrUsageMotionModeAdjust,
+        pstrUsage2DModeSelect,
+        pstrUsage2DModeAdjust
+};
+const char * const ReportDescParserBase::medInstrTitles4[] PROGMEM = {
+        pstrUsageSoftControlSelect,
+        pstrUsageSoftControlAdjust
+};
+
+void ReportDescParserBase::Parse(const uint16_t len, const uint8_t *pbuf, const uint16_t &offset) {
+        uint16_t cntdn = (uint16_t)len;
+        uint8_t *p = (uint8_t*)pbuf;
+
+
+        totalSize = 0;
+
+        while(cntdn) {
+                //USB_HOST_SERIAL.println("");
+                //PrintHex<uint16_t>(offset + len - cntdn);
+                //USB_HOST_SERIAL.print(":");
+
+                ParseItem(&p, &cntdn);
+
+                //if (ParseItem(&p, &cntdn))
+                //        return;
+        }
+        //USBTRACE2("Total:", totalSize);
+}
+
+void ReportDescParserBase::PrintValue(uint8_t *p, uint8_t len) {
+        E_Notify(PSTR("("), 0x80);
+        for(; len; p++, len--)
+                PrintHex<uint8_t > (*p, 0x80);
+        E_Notify(PSTR(")"), 0x80);
+}
+
+void ReportDescParserBase::PrintByteValue(uint8_t data) {
+        E_Notify(PSTR("("), 0x80);
+        PrintHex<uint8_t > (data, 0x80);
+        E_Notify(PSTR(")"), 0x80);
+}
+
+void ReportDescParserBase::PrintItemTitle(uint8_t prefix) {
+        switch(prefix & (TYPE_MASK | TAG_MASK)) {
+                case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_PUSH):
+                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nPush"), 0x80);
+                        break;
+                case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_POP):
+                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nPop"), 0x80);
+                        break;
+                case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_USAGEPAGE):
+                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nUsage Page"), 0x80);
+                        break;
+                case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_LOGICALMIN):
+                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nLogical Min"), 0x80);
+                        break;
+                case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_LOGICALMAX):
+                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nLogical Max"), 0x80);
+                        break;
+                case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_PHYSMIN):
+                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nPhysical Min"), 0x80);
+                        break;
+                case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_PHYSMAX):
+                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nPhysical Max"), 0x80);
+                        break;
+                case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_UNITEXP):
+                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nUnit Exp"), 0x80);
+                        break;
+                case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_UNIT):
+                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nUnit"), 0x80);
+                        break;
+                case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_REPORTSIZE):
+                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nReport Size"), 0x80);
+                        break;
+                case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_REPORTCOUNT):
+                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nReport Count"), 0x80);
+                        break;
+                case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_REPORTID):
+                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nReport Id"), 0x80);
+                        break;
+                case (TYPE_LOCAL | TAG_LOCAL_USAGE):
+                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nUsage"), 0x80);
+                        break;
+                case (TYPE_LOCAL | TAG_LOCAL_USAGEMIN):
+                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nUsage Min"), 0x80);
+                        break;
+                case (TYPE_LOCAL | TAG_LOCAL_USAGEMAX):
+                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nUsage Max"), 0x80);
+                        break;
+                case (TYPE_MAIN | TAG_MAIN_COLLECTION):
+                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nCollection"), 0x80);
+                        break;
+                case (TYPE_MAIN | TAG_MAIN_ENDCOLLECTION):
+                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nEnd Collection"), 0x80);
+                        break;
+                case (TYPE_MAIN | TAG_MAIN_INPUT):
+                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nInput"), 0x80);
+                        break;
+                case (TYPE_MAIN | TAG_MAIN_OUTPUT):
+                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nOutput"), 0x80);
+                        break;
+                case (TYPE_MAIN | TAG_MAIN_FEATURE):
+                        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\nFeature"), 0x80);
+                        break;
+        } // switch (**pp & (TYPE_MASK | TAG_MASK))
+}
+
+uint8_t ReportDescParserBase::ParseItem(uint8_t **pp, uint16_t *pcntdn) {
+        //uint8_t ret = enErrorSuccess;
+        //reinterpret_cast<>(varBuffer);
+        switch(itemParseState) {
+                case 0:
+                        if(**pp == HID_LONG_ITEM_PREFIX)
+                                USBTRACE("\r\nLONG\r\n");
+                        else {
+                                uint8_t size = ((**pp) & DATA_SIZE_MASK);
+
+                                itemPrefix = (**pp);
+                                itemSize = 1 + ((size == DATA_SIZE_4) ? 4 : size);
+
+                                PrintItemTitle(itemPrefix);
+                        }
+                        (*pp)++;
+                        (*pcntdn)--;
+                        itemSize--;
+                        itemParseState = 1;
+
+                        if(!itemSize)
+                                break;
+
+                        if(!pcntdn)
+                                return enErrorIncomplete;
+                case 1:
+                        //USBTRACE2("\r\niSz:",itemSize);
+
+                        theBuffer.valueSize = itemSize;
+                        valParser.Initialize(&theBuffer);
+                        itemParseState = 2;
+                case 2:
+                        if(!valParser.Parse(pp, pcntdn))
+                                return enErrorIncomplete;
+                        itemParseState = 3;
+                case 3:
+                {
+                        uint8_t data = *((uint8_t*)varBuffer);
+
+                        switch(itemPrefix & (TYPE_MASK | TAG_MASK)) {
+                                case (TYPE_LOCAL | TAG_LOCAL_USAGE):
+                                        if(pfUsage) {
+                                                if(theBuffer.valueSize > 1) {
+                                                        uint16_t* ui16 = reinterpret_cast<uint16_t *>(varBuffer);
+                                                        pfUsage(*ui16);
+                                                } else
+                                                        pfUsage(data);
+                                        }
+                                        break;
+                                case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_REPORTSIZE):
+                                        rptSize = data;
+                                        PrintByteValue(data);
+                                        break;
+                                case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_REPORTCOUNT):
+                                        rptCount = data;
+                                        PrintByteValue(data);
+                                        break;
+                                case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_LOGICALMIN):
+                                case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_LOGICALMAX):
+                                case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_PHYSMIN):
+                                case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_PHYSMAX):
+                                case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_REPORTID):
+                                case (TYPE_LOCAL | TAG_LOCAL_USAGEMIN):
+                                case (TYPE_LOCAL | TAG_LOCAL_USAGEMAX):
+                                case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_UNITEXP):
+                                case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_UNIT):
+                                        PrintValue(varBuffer, theBuffer.valueSize);
+                                        break;
+                                case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_PUSH):
+                                case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_POP):
+                                        break;
+                                case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_USAGEPAGE):
+                                        SetUsagePage(data);
+                                        PrintUsagePage(data);
+                                        PrintByteValue(data);
+                                        break;
+                                case (TYPE_MAIN | TAG_MAIN_COLLECTION):
+                                case (TYPE_MAIN | TAG_MAIN_ENDCOLLECTION):
+                                        switch(data) {
+                                                case 0x00:
+                                                        E_Notify(PSTR(" Physical"), 0x80);
+                                                        break;
+                                                case 0x01:
+                                                        E_Notify(PSTR(" Application"), 0x80);
+                                                        break;
+                                                case 0x02:
+                                                        E_Notify(PSTR(" Logical"), 0x80);
+                                                        break;
+                                                case 0x03:
+                                                        E_Notify(PSTR(" Report"), 0x80);
+                                                        break;
+                                                case 0x04:
+                                                        E_Notify(PSTR(" Named Array"), 0x80);
+                                                        break;
+                                                case 0x05:
+                                                        E_Notify(PSTR(" Usage Switch"), 0x80);
+                                                        break;
+                                                case 0x06:
+                                                        E_Notify(PSTR(" Usage Modifier"), 0x80);
+                                                        break;
+                                                default:
+                                                        E_Notify(PSTR(" Vendor Defined("), 0x80);
+                                                        PrintHex<uint8_t > (data, 0x80);
+                                                        E_Notify(PSTR(")"), 0x80);
+                                        }
+                                        break;
+                                case (TYPE_MAIN | TAG_MAIN_INPUT):
+                                case (TYPE_MAIN | TAG_MAIN_OUTPUT):
+                                case (TYPE_MAIN | TAG_MAIN_FEATURE):
+                                        totalSize += (uint16_t)rptSize * (uint16_t)rptCount;
+                                        rptSize = 0;
+                                        rptCount = 0;
+                                        E_Notify(PSTR("("), 0x80);
+                                        PrintBin<uint8_t > (data, 0x80);
+                                        E_Notify(PSTR(")"), 0x80);
+                                        break;
+                        } // switch (**pp & (TYPE_MASK | TAG_MASK))
+                }
+        } // switch (itemParseState)
+        itemParseState = 0;
+        return enErrorSuccess;
+}
+
+ReportDescParserBase::UsagePageFunc ReportDescParserBase::usagePageFunctions[] /*PROGMEM*/ = {
+        &ReportDescParserBase::PrintGenericDesktopPageUsage,
+        &ReportDescParserBase::PrintSimulationControlsPageUsage,
+        &ReportDescParserBase::PrintVRControlsPageUsage,
+        &ReportDescParserBase::PrintSportsControlsPageUsage,
+        &ReportDescParserBase::PrintGameControlsPageUsage,
+        &ReportDescParserBase::PrintGenericDeviceControlsPageUsage,
+        NULL, // Keyboard/Keypad
+        &ReportDescParserBase::PrintLEDPageUsage,
+        &ReportDescParserBase::PrintButtonPageUsage,
+        &ReportDescParserBase::PrintOrdinalPageUsage,
+        &ReportDescParserBase::PrintTelephonyPageUsage,
+        &ReportDescParserBase::PrintConsumerPageUsage,
+        &ReportDescParserBase::PrintDigitizerPageUsage,
+        NULL, // Reserved
+        NULL, // PID
+        NULL // Unicode
+};
+
+void ReportDescParserBase::SetUsagePage(uint16_t page) {
+        pfUsage = NULL;
+
+        if(VALUE_BETWEEN(page, 0x00, 0x11)) {
+                pfUsage = (usagePageFunctions[page - 1]);
+
+        } else {
+                switch(page) {
+                        case 0x14:
+                                pfUsage = &ReportDescParserBase::PrintAlphanumDisplayPageUsage;
+                                break;
+                        case 0x40:
+                                pfUsage = &ReportDescParserBase::PrintMedicalInstrumentPageUsage;
+                                break;
+                }
+        }
+}
+
+void ReportDescParserBase::PrintUsagePage(uint16_t page) {
+        const char * const * w;
+        E_Notify(pstrSpace, 0x80);
+
+        output_if_between(page, 0x00, 0x11, w, E_Notify, usagePageTitles0, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(page, 0x8b, 0x92, w, E_Notify, usagePageTitles1, 0x80)
+        else if(VALUE_BETWEEN(page, 0x7f, 0x84))
+                E_Notify(pstrUsagePageMonitor, 0x80);
+        else if(VALUE_BETWEEN(page, 0x83, 0x8c))
+                E_Notify(pstrUsagePagePower, 0x80);
+        else if(page > 0xfeff /* && page <= 0xffff */)
+                E_Notify(pstrUsagePageVendorDefined, 0x80);
+        else
+                switch(page) {
+                        case 0x14:
+                                E_Notify(pstrUsagePageAlphaNumericDisplay, 0x80);
+                                break;
+                        case 0x40:
+                                E_Notify(pstrUsagePageMedicalInstruments, 0x80);
+                                break;
+                        default:
+                                E_Notify(pstrUsagePageUndefined, 0x80);
+                }
+}
+
+void ReportDescParserBase::PrintButtonPageUsage(uint16_t usage) {
+        E_Notify(pstrSpace, 0x80);
+        E_Notify(PSTR("Btn"), 0x80);
+        PrintHex<uint16_t > (usage, 0x80);
+        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\n"), 0x80);
+        //USB_HOST_SERIAL.print(usage, HEX);
+}
+
+void ReportDescParserBase::PrintOrdinalPageUsage(uint16_t usage) {
+        E_Notify(pstrSpace, 0x80);
+        E_Notify(PSTR("Inst"), 0x80);
+        // Sorry, HEX for now...
+        PrintHex<uint16_t > (usage, 0x80);
+        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\n"), 0x80);
+        //USB_HOST_SERIAL.print(usage, DEC);
+}
+
+void ReportDescParserBase::PrintGenericDesktopPageUsage(uint16_t usage) {
+        const char * const * w;
+        E_Notify(pstrSpace, 0x80);
+
+        output_if_between(usage, 0x00, 0x0a, w, E_Notify, genDesktopTitles0, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x2f, 0x49, w, E_Notify, genDesktopTitles1, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x7f, 0x94, w, E_Notify, genDesktopTitles2, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x9f, 0xa9, w, E_Notify, genDesktopTitles3, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0xaf, 0xb8, w, E_Notify, genDesktopTitles4, 0x80)
+        else E_Notify(pstrUsagePageUndefined, 0x80);
+}
+
+void ReportDescParserBase::PrintSimulationControlsPageUsage(uint16_t usage) {
+        const char * const * w;
+        E_Notify(pstrSpace, 0x80);
+
+        output_if_between(usage, 0x00, 0x0d, w, E_Notify, simuTitles0, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x1f, 0x26, w, E_Notify, simuTitles1, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0xaf, 0xd1, w, E_Notify, simuTitles2, 0x80)
+        else E_Notify(pstrUsagePageUndefined, 0x80);
+}
+
+void ReportDescParserBase::PrintVRControlsPageUsage(uint16_t usage) {
+        const char * const * w;
+        E_Notify(pstrSpace, 0x80);
+
+        output_if_between(usage, 0x00, 0x0b, w, E_Notify, vrTitles0, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x1f, 0x22, w, E_Notify, vrTitles1, 0x80)
+        else E_Notify(pstrUsagePageUndefined, 0x80);
+}
+
+void ReportDescParserBase::PrintSportsControlsPageUsage(uint16_t usage) {
+        const char * const * w;
+        E_Notify(pstrSpace, 0x80);
+
+        output_if_between(usage, 0x00, 0x05, w, E_Notify, sportsCtrlTitles0, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x2f, 0x3a, w, E_Notify, sportsCtrlTitles1, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x4f, 0x64, w, E_Notify, sportsCtrlTitles2, 0x80)
+        else E_Notify(pstrUsagePageUndefined, 0x80);
+}
+
+void ReportDescParserBase::PrintGameControlsPageUsage(uint16_t usage) {
+        const char * const * w;
+        E_Notify(pstrSpace, 0x80);
+
+        output_if_between(usage, 0x00, 0x04, w, E_Notify, gameTitles0, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x1f, 0x3a, w, E_Notify, gameTitles1, 0x80)
+        else E_Notify(pstrUsagePageUndefined, 0x80);
+}
+
+void ReportDescParserBase::PrintGenericDeviceControlsPageUsage(uint16_t usage) {
+        const char * const * w;
+        E_Notify(pstrSpace, 0x80);
+
+        output_if_between(usage, 0x1f, 0x27, w, E_Notify, genDevCtrlTitles, 0x80)
+        else E_Notify(pstrUsagePageUndefined, 0x80);
+}
+
+void ReportDescParserBase::PrintLEDPageUsage(uint16_t usage) {
+        const char * const * w;
+        E_Notify(pstrSpace, 0x80);
+
+        output_if_between(usage, 0x00, 0x4e, w, E_Notify, ledTitles, 0x80)
+        else E_Notify(pstrUsagePageUndefined, 0x80);
+}
+
+void ReportDescParserBase::PrintTelephonyPageUsage(uint16_t usage) {
+        const char * const * w;
+        E_Notify(pstrSpace, 0x80);
+
+        output_if_between(usage, 0x00, 0x08, w, E_Notify, telTitles0, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x1f, 0x32, w, E_Notify, telTitles1, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x4f, 0x54, w, E_Notify, telTitles2, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x6f, 0x75, w, E_Notify, telTitles3, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x8f, 0x9f, w, E_Notify, telTitles4, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0xaf, 0xc0, w, E_Notify, telTitles5, 0x80)
+        else E_Notify(pstrUsagePageUndefined, 0x80);
+}
+
+void ReportDescParserBase::PrintConsumerPageUsage(uint16_t usage) {
+        const char * const * w;
+        E_Notify(pstrSpace, 0x80);
+
+        output_if_between(usage, 0x00, 0x07, w, E_Notify, consTitles0, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x1f, 0x23, w, E_Notify, consTitles1, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x2f, 0x37, w, E_Notify, consTitles2, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x3f, 0x49, w, E_Notify, consTitles3, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x5f, 0x67, w, E_Notify, consTitles4, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x7f, 0xa5, w, E_Notify, consTitles5, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0xaf, 0xcf, w, E_Notify, consTitles6, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0xdf, 0xeb, w, E_Notify, consTitles7, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0xef, 0xf6, w, E_Notify, consTitles8, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0xff, 0x10e, w, E_Notify, consTitles9, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x14f, 0x156, w, E_Notify, consTitlesA, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x15f, 0x16b, w, E_Notify, consTitlesB, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x16f, 0x175, w, E_Notify, consTitlesC, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x17f, 0x1c8, w, E_Notify, consTitlesD, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x1ff, 0x29d, w, E_Notify, consTitlesE, 0x80)
+        else E_Notify(pstrUsagePageUndefined, 0x80);
+}
+
+void ReportDescParserBase::PrintDigitizerPageUsage(uint16_t usage) {
+        const char * const * w;
+        E_Notify(pstrSpace, 0x80);
+
+        output_if_between(usage, 0x00, 0x0e, w, E_Notify, digitTitles0, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x1f, 0x23, w, E_Notify, digitTitles1, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x2f, 0x47, w, E_Notify, digitTitles2, 0x80)
+        else E_Notify(pstrUsagePageUndefined, 0x80);
+}
+
+void ReportDescParserBase::PrintAlphanumDisplayPageUsage(uint16_t usage) {
+        const char * const * w;
+        E_Notify(pstrSpace, 0x80);
+
+        output_if_between(usage, 0x00, 0x03, w, E_Notify, aplphanumTitles0, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x1f, 0x4e, w, E_Notify, aplphanumTitles1, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x7f, 0x96, w, E_Notify, digitTitles2, 0x80)
+        else E_Notify(pstrUsagePageUndefined, 0x80);
+}
+
+void ReportDescParserBase::PrintMedicalInstrumentPageUsage(uint16_t usage) {
+        const char * const * w;
+        E_Notify(pstrSpace, 0x80);
+
+        if(usage == 1) E_Notify(pstrUsageMedicalUltrasound, 0x80);
+        else if(usage == 0x70)
+                E_Notify(pstrUsageDepthGainCompensation, 0x80);
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x1f, 0x28, w, E_Notify, medInstrTitles0, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x3f, 0x45, w, E_Notify, medInstrTitles1, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x5f, 0x62, w, E_Notify, medInstrTitles2, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x7f, 0x8a, w, E_Notify, medInstrTitles3, 0x80)
+        else output_if_between(usage, 0x9f, 0xa2, w, E_Notify, medInstrTitles4, 0x80)
+        else E_Notify(pstrUsagePageUndefined, 0x80);
+}
+
+uint8_t ReportDescParser2::ParseItem(uint8_t **pp, uint16_t *pcntdn) {
+        //uint8_t ret = enErrorSuccess;
+
+        switch(itemParseState) {
+                case 0:
+                        if(**pp == HID_LONG_ITEM_PREFIX)
+                                USBTRACE("\r\nLONG\r\n");
+                        else {
+                                uint8_t size = ((**pp) & DATA_SIZE_MASK);
+                                itemPrefix = (**pp);
+                                itemSize = 1 + ((size == DATA_SIZE_4) ? 4 : size);
+                        }
+                        (*pp)++;
+                        (*pcntdn)--;
+                        itemSize--;
+                        itemParseState = 1;
+
+                        if(!itemSize)
+                                break;
+
+                        if(!pcntdn)
+                                return enErrorIncomplete;
+                case 1:
+                        theBuffer.valueSize = itemSize;
+                        valParser.Initialize(&theBuffer);
+                        itemParseState = 2;
+                case 2:
+                        if(!valParser.Parse(pp, pcntdn))
+                                return enErrorIncomplete;
+                        itemParseState = 3;
+                case 3:
+                {
+                        uint8_t data = *((uint8_t*)varBuffer);
+
+                        switch(itemPrefix & (TYPE_MASK | TAG_MASK)) {
+                                case (TYPE_LOCAL | TAG_LOCAL_USAGE):
+                                        if(pfUsage) {
+                                                if(theBuffer.valueSize > 1) {
+                                                        uint16_t* ui16 = reinterpret_cast<uint16_t *>(varBuffer);
+                                                        pfUsage(*ui16);
+                                                } else
+                                                        pfUsage(data);
+                                        }
+                                        break;
+                                case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_REPORTSIZE):
+                                        rptSize = data;
+                                        break;
+                                case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_REPORTCOUNT):
+                                        rptCount = data;
+                                        break;
+                                case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_REPORTID):
+                                        rptId = data;
+                                        break;
+                                case (TYPE_LOCAL | TAG_LOCAL_USAGEMIN):
+                                        useMin = data;
+                                        break;
+                                case (TYPE_LOCAL | TAG_LOCAL_USAGEMAX):
+                                        useMax = data;
+                                        break;
+                                case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_USAGEPAGE):
+                                        SetUsagePage(data);
+                                        break;
+                                case (TYPE_MAIN | TAG_MAIN_OUTPUT):
+                                case (TYPE_MAIN | TAG_MAIN_FEATURE):
+                                        rptSize = 0;
+                                        rptCount = 0;
+                                        useMin = 0;
+                                        useMax = 0;
+                                        break;
+                                case (TYPE_MAIN | TAG_MAIN_INPUT):
+                                        OnInputItem(data);
+
+                                        totalSize += (uint16_t)rptSize * (uint16_t)rptCount;
+
+                                        rptSize = 0;
+                                        rptCount = 0;
+                                        useMin = 0;
+                                        useMax = 0;
+                                        break;
+                        } // switch (**pp & (TYPE_MASK | TAG_MASK))
+                }
+        } // switch (itemParseState)
+        itemParseState = 0;
+        return enErrorSuccess;
+}
+
+void ReportDescParser2::OnInputItem(uint8_t itm) {
+        uint8_t byte_offset = (totalSize >> 3); // calculate offset to the next unhandled byte i = (int)(totalCount / 8);
+        uint32_t tmp = (byte_offset << 3);
+        uint8_t bit_offset = totalSize - tmp; // number of bits in the current byte already handled
+        uint8_t *p = pBuf + byte_offset; // current byte pointer
+
+        if(bit_offset)
+                *p >>= bit_offset;
+
+        uint8_t usage = useMin;
+
+        bool print_usemin_usemax = ((useMin < useMax) && ((itm & 3) == 2) && pfUsage) ? true : false;
+
+        uint8_t bits_of_byte = 8;
+
+        // for each field in field array defined by rptCount
+        for(uint8_t field = 0; field < rptCount; field++, usage++) {
+
+                union {
+                        uint8_t bResult[4];
+                        uint16_t wResult[2];
+                        uint32_t dwResult;
+                } result;
+
+                result.dwResult = 0;
+                uint8_t mask = 0;
+
+                if(print_usemin_usemax)
+                        pfUsage(usage);
+
+                // bits_left            - number of bits in the field(array of fields, depending on Report Count) left to process
+                // bits_of_byte         - number of bits in current byte left to process
+                // bits_to_copy         - number of bits to copy to result buffer
+
+                // for each bit in a field
+                for(uint8_t bits_left = rptSize, bits_to_copy = 0; bits_left;
+                        bits_left -= bits_to_copy) {
+                        bits_to_copy = (bits_left > bits_of_byte) ? bits_of_byte : bits_left;
+
+                        result.dwResult <<= bits_to_copy; // Result buffer is shifted by the number of bits to be copied into it
+
+                        uint8_t val = *p;
+
+                        val >>= (8 - bits_of_byte); // Shift by the number of bits already processed
+
+                        mask = 0;
+
+                        for(uint8_t j = bits_to_copy; j; j--) {
+                                mask <<= 1;
+                                mask |= 1;
+                        }
+
+                        result.bResult[0] = (result.bResult[0] | (val & mask));
+
+                        bits_of_byte -= bits_to_copy;
+
+                        if(bits_of_byte < 1) {
+                                bits_of_byte = 8;
+                                p++;
+                        }
+                }
+                PrintByteValue(result.dwResult);
+        }
+        E_Notify(PSTR("\r\n"), 0x80);
+}
+
+void UniversalReportParser::Parse(HID *hid, bool is_rpt_id, uint8_t len, uint8_t *buf) {
+        ReportDescParser2 prs(len, buf);
+
+        uint8_t ret = hid->GetReportDescr(0, &prs);
+
+        if(ret)
+                ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("GetReportDescr-2"), ret);
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hidescriptorparser.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hidescriptorparser.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f3b496ffa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hidescriptorparser.h
@@ -0,0 +1,176 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+#if !defined(__HIDDESCRIPTORPARSER_H__)
+#define __HIDDESCRIPTORPARSER_H__
+
+#include "hid.h"
+
+class ReportDescParserBase : public USBReadParser {
+public:
+        typedef void (*UsagePageFunc)(uint16_t usage);
+
+        static void PrintGenericDesktopPageUsage(uint16_t usage);
+        static void PrintSimulationControlsPageUsage(uint16_t usage);
+        static void PrintVRControlsPageUsage(uint16_t usage);
+        static void PrintSportsControlsPageUsage(uint16_t usage);
+        static void PrintGameControlsPageUsage(uint16_t usage);
+        static void PrintGenericDeviceControlsPageUsage(uint16_t usage);
+        static void PrintLEDPageUsage(uint16_t usage);
+        static void PrintButtonPageUsage(uint16_t usage);
+        static void PrintOrdinalPageUsage(uint16_t usage);
+        static void PrintTelephonyPageUsage(uint16_t usage);
+        static void PrintConsumerPageUsage(uint16_t usage);
+        static void PrintDigitizerPageUsage(uint16_t usage);
+        static void PrintAlphanumDisplayPageUsage(uint16_t usage);
+        static void PrintMedicalInstrumentPageUsage(uint16_t usage);
+
+        static void PrintValue(uint8_t *p, uint8_t len);
+        static void PrintByteValue(uint8_t data);
+
+        static void PrintItemTitle(uint8_t prefix);
+
+        static const char * const usagePageTitles0[];
+        static const char * const usagePageTitles1[];
+        static const char * const genDesktopTitles0[];
+        static const char * const genDesktopTitles1[];
+        static const char * const genDesktopTitles2[];
+        static const char * const genDesktopTitles3[];
+        static const char * const genDesktopTitles4[];
+        static const char * const simuTitles0[];
+        static const char * const simuTitles1[];
+        static const char * const simuTitles2[];
+        static const char * const vrTitles0[];
+        static const char * const vrTitles1[];
+        static const char * const sportsCtrlTitles0[];
+        static const char * const sportsCtrlTitles1[];
+        static const char * const sportsCtrlTitles2[];
+        static const char * const gameTitles0[];
+        static const char * const gameTitles1[];
+        static const char * const genDevCtrlTitles[];
+        static const char * const ledTitles[];
+        static const char * const telTitles0[];
+        static const char * const telTitles1[];
+        static const char * const telTitles2[];
+        static const char * const telTitles3[];
+        static const char * const telTitles4[];
+        static const char * const telTitles5[];
+        static const char * const consTitles0[];
+        static const char * const consTitles1[];
+        static const char * const consTitles2[];
+        static const char * const consTitles3[];
+        static const char * const consTitles4[];
+        static const char * const consTitles5[];
+        static const char * const consTitles6[];
+        static const char * const consTitles7[];
+        static const char * const consTitles8[];
+        static const char * const consTitles9[];
+        static const char * const consTitlesA[];
+        static const char * const consTitlesB[];
+        static const char * const consTitlesC[];
+        static const char * const consTitlesD[];
+        static const char * const consTitlesE[];
+        static const char * const digitTitles0[];
+        static const char * const digitTitles1[];
+        static const char * const digitTitles2[];
+        static const char * const aplphanumTitles0[];
+        static const char * const aplphanumTitles1[];
+        static const char * const aplphanumTitles2[];
+        static const char * const medInstrTitles0[];
+        static const char * const medInstrTitles1[];
+        static const char * const medInstrTitles2[];
+        static const char * const medInstrTitles3[];
+        static const char * const medInstrTitles4[];
+
+protected:
+        static UsagePageFunc usagePageFunctions[];
+
+        MultiValueBuffer theBuffer;
+        MultiByteValueParser valParser;
+        ByteSkipper theSkipper;
+        uint8_t varBuffer[sizeof (USB_CONFIGURATION_DESCRIPTOR)];
+
+        uint8_t itemParseState; // Item parser state variable
+        uint8_t itemSize; // Item size
+        uint8_t itemPrefix; // Item prefix (first byte)
+        uint8_t rptSize; // Report Size
+        uint8_t rptCount; // Report Count
+
+        uint16_t totalSize; // Report size in bits
+
+        // Method should be defined here if virtual.
+        virtual uint8_t ParseItem(uint8_t **pp, uint16_t *pcntdn);
+
+        UsagePageFunc pfUsage;
+
+        static void PrintUsagePage(uint16_t page);
+        void SetUsagePage(uint16_t page);
+
+public:
+
+        ReportDescParserBase() :
+        itemParseState(0),
+        itemSize(0),
+        itemPrefix(0),
+        rptSize(0),
+        rptCount(0),
+        pfUsage(NULL) {
+                theBuffer.pValue = varBuffer;
+                valParser.Initialize(&theBuffer);
+                theSkipper.Initialize(&theBuffer);
+        };
+
+        void Parse(const uint16_t len, const uint8_t *pbuf, const uint16_t &offset);
+
+        enum {
+                enErrorSuccess = 0
+                , enErrorIncomplete // value or record is partialy read in buffer
+                , enErrorBufferTooSmall
+        };
+};
+
+class ReportDescParser : public ReportDescParserBase {
+};
+
+class ReportDescParser2 : public ReportDescParserBase {
+        uint8_t rptId; // Report ID
+        uint8_t useMin; // Usage Minimum
+        uint8_t useMax; // Usage Maximum
+        uint8_t fieldCount; // Number of field being currently processed
+
+        void OnInputItem(uint8_t itm); // Method which is called every time Input item is found
+
+        uint8_t *pBuf; // Report buffer pointer
+        uint8_t bLen; // Report length
+
+protected:
+        // Method should be defined here if virtual.
+        virtual uint8_t ParseItem(uint8_t **pp, uint16_t *pcntdn);
+
+public:
+
+        ReportDescParser2(uint16_t len, uint8_t *pbuf) :
+        ReportDescParserBase(), rptId(0), useMin(0), useMax(0), fieldCount(0), pBuf(pbuf), bLen(len) {
+        };
+};
+
+class UniversalReportParser : public HIDReportParser {
+public:
+        // Method should be defined here if virtual.
+        virtual void Parse(HID *hid, bool is_rpt_id, uint8_t len, uint8_t *buf);
+};
+
+#endif // __HIDDESCRIPTORPARSER_H__
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hiduniversal.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hiduniversal.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..395aa69e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hiduniversal.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,425 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+
+#include "hiduniversal.h"
+
+HIDUniversal::HIDUniversal(USB *p) :
+HID(p),
+qNextPollTime(0),
+pollInterval(0),
+bPollEnable(false),
+bHasReportId(false) {
+        Initialize();
+
+        if(pUsb)
+                pUsb->RegisterDeviceClass(this);
+}
+
+uint16_t HIDUniversal::GetHidClassDescrLen(uint8_t type, uint8_t num) {
+        for(uint8_t i = 0, n = 0; i < HID_MAX_HID_CLASS_DESCRIPTORS; i++) {
+                if(descrInfo[i].bDescrType == type) {
+                        if(n == num)
+                                return descrInfo[i].wDescriptorLength;
+                        n++;
+                }
+        }
+        return 0;
+}
+
+void HIDUniversal::Initialize() {
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < MAX_REPORT_PARSERS; i++) {
+                rptParsers[i].rptId = 0;
+                rptParsers[i].rptParser = NULL;
+        }
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < HID_MAX_HID_CLASS_DESCRIPTORS; i++) {
+                descrInfo[i].bDescrType = 0;
+                descrInfo[i].wDescriptorLength = 0;
+        }
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < maxHidInterfaces; i++) {
+                hidInterfaces[i].bmInterface = 0;
+                hidInterfaces[i].bmProtocol = 0;
+
+                for(uint8_t j = 0; j < maxEpPerInterface; j++)
+                        hidInterfaces[i].epIndex[j] = 0;
+        }
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < totalEndpoints; i++) {
+                epInfo[i].epAddr = 0;
+                epInfo[i].maxPktSize = (i) ? 0 : 8;
+                epInfo[i].epAttribs = 0;
+                epInfo[i].bmNakPower = (i) ? USB_NAK_NOWAIT : USB_NAK_MAX_POWER;
+        }
+        bNumEP = 1;
+        bNumIface = 0;
+        bConfNum = 0;
+        pollInterval = 0;
+
+        ZeroMemory(constBuffLen, prevBuf);
+}
+
+bool HIDUniversal::SetReportParser(uint8_t id, HIDReportParser *prs) {
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < MAX_REPORT_PARSERS; i++) {
+                if(rptParsers[i].rptId == 0 && rptParsers[i].rptParser == NULL) {
+                        rptParsers[i].rptId = id;
+                        rptParsers[i].rptParser = prs;
+                        return true;
+                }
+        }
+        return false;
+}
+
+HIDReportParser* HIDUniversal::GetReportParser(uint8_t id) {
+        if(!bHasReportId)
+                return ((rptParsers[0].rptParser) ? rptParsers[0].rptParser : NULL);
+
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < MAX_REPORT_PARSERS; i++) {
+                if(rptParsers[i].rptId == id)
+                        return rptParsers[i].rptParser;
+        }
+        return NULL;
+}
+
+uint8_t HIDUniversal::Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed) {
+        const uint8_t constBufSize = sizeof (USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR);
+
+        uint8_t buf[constBufSize];
+        USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR * udd = reinterpret_cast<USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR*>(buf);
+        uint8_t rcode;
+        UsbDevice *p = NULL;
+        EpInfo *oldep_ptr = NULL;
+        uint8_t len = 0;
+
+        uint8_t num_of_conf; // number of configurations
+        //uint8_t num_of_intf; // number of interfaces
+
+        AddressPool &addrPool = pUsb->GetAddressPool();
+
+        USBTRACE("HU Init\r\n");
+
+        if(bAddress)
+                return USB_ERROR_CLASS_INSTANCE_ALREADY_IN_USE;
+
+        // Get pointer to pseudo device with address 0 assigned
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(0);
+
+        if(!p)
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+
+        if(!p->epinfo) {
+                USBTRACE("epinfo\r\n");
+                return USB_ERROR_EPINFO_IS_NULL;
+        }
+
+        // Save old pointer to EP_RECORD of address 0
+        oldep_ptr = p->epinfo;
+
+        // Temporary assign new pointer to epInfo to p->epinfo in order to avoid toggle inconsistence
+        p->epinfo = epInfo;
+
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+
+        // Get device descriptor
+        rcode = pUsb->getDevDescr(0, 0, 8, (uint8_t*)buf);
+
+        if(!rcode)
+                len = (buf[0] > constBufSize) ? constBufSize : buf[0];
+
+        if(rcode) {
+                // Restore p->epinfo
+                p->epinfo = oldep_ptr;
+
+                goto FailGetDevDescr;
+        }
+
+        // Restore p->epinfo
+        p->epinfo = oldep_ptr;
+
+        // Allocate new address according to device class
+        bAddress = addrPool.AllocAddress(parent, false, port);
+
+        if(!bAddress)
+                return USB_ERROR_OUT_OF_ADDRESS_SPACE_IN_POOL;
+
+        // Extract Max Packet Size from the device descriptor
+        epInfo[0].maxPktSize = udd->bMaxPacketSize0;
+
+        // Assign new address to the device
+        rcode = pUsb->setAddr(0, 0, bAddress);
+
+        if(rcode) {
+                p->lowspeed = false;
+                addrPool.FreeAddress(bAddress);
+                bAddress = 0;
+                USBTRACE2("setAddr:", rcode);
+                return rcode;
+        }
+
+        //delay(2); //per USB 2.0 sect.9.2.6.3
+
+        USBTRACE2("Addr:", bAddress);
+
+        p->lowspeed = false;
+
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(bAddress);
+
+        if(!p)
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+
+        if(len)
+                rcode = pUsb->getDevDescr(bAddress, 0, len, (uint8_t*)buf);
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailGetDevDescr;
+
+        VID = udd->idVendor; // Can be used by classes that inherits this class to check the VID and PID of the connected device
+        PID = udd->idProduct;
+
+        num_of_conf = udd->bNumConfigurations;
+
+        // Assign epInfo to epinfo pointer
+        rcode = pUsb->setEpInfoEntry(bAddress, 1, epInfo);
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetDevTblEntry;
+
+        USBTRACE2("NC:", num_of_conf);
+
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < num_of_conf; i++) {
+                //HexDumper<USBReadParser, uint16_t, uint16_t> HexDump;
+                ConfigDescParser<USB_CLASS_HID, 0, 0,
+                        CP_MASK_COMPARE_CLASS> confDescrParser(this);
+
+                //rcode = pUsb->getConfDescr(bAddress, 0, i, &HexDump);
+                rcode = pUsb->getConfDescr(bAddress, 0, i, &confDescrParser);
+
+                if(rcode)
+                        goto FailGetConfDescr;
+
+                if(bNumEP > 1)
+                        break;
+        } // for
+
+        if(bNumEP < 2)
+                return USB_DEV_CONFIG_ERROR_DEVICE_NOT_SUPPORTED;
+
+        // Assign epInfo to epinfo pointer
+        rcode = pUsb->setEpInfoEntry(bAddress, bNumEP, epInfo);
+
+        USBTRACE2("Cnf:", bConfNum);
+
+        // Set Configuration Value
+        rcode = pUsb->setConf(bAddress, 0, bConfNum);
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetConfDescr;
+
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < bNumIface; i++) {
+                if(hidInterfaces[i].epIndex[epInterruptInIndex] == 0)
+                        continue;
+
+                rcode = SetIdle(hidInterfaces[i].bmInterface, 0, 0);
+
+                if(rcode && rcode != hrSTALL)
+                        goto FailSetIdle;
+        }
+
+        USBTRACE("HU configured\r\n");
+
+        OnInitSuccessful();
+
+        bPollEnable = true;
+        return 0;
+
+FailGetDevDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailGetDevDescr();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailSetDevTblEntry:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailSetDevTblEntry();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailGetConfDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailGetConfDescr();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailSetConfDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailSetConfDescr();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+
+FailSetIdle:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        USBTRACE("SetIdle:");
+#endif
+
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+Fail:
+        NotifyFail(rcode);
+#endif
+        Release();
+        return rcode;
+}
+
+HIDUniversal::HIDInterface* HIDUniversal::FindInterface(uint8_t iface, uint8_t alt, uint8_t proto) {
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < bNumIface && i < maxHidInterfaces; i++)
+                if(hidInterfaces[i].bmInterface == iface && hidInterfaces[i].bmAltSet == alt
+                        && hidInterfaces[i].bmProtocol == proto)
+                        return hidInterfaces + i;
+        return NULL;
+}
+
+void HIDUniversal::EndpointXtract(uint8_t conf, uint8_t iface, uint8_t alt, uint8_t proto, const USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR *pep) {
+        // If the first configuration satisfies, the others are not concidered.
+        if(bNumEP > 1 && conf != bConfNum)
+                return;
+
+        //ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("\r\nConf.Val"), conf);
+        //ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("Iface Num"), iface);
+        //ErrorMessage<uint8_t>(PSTR("Alt.Set"), alt);
+
+        bConfNum = conf;
+
+        uint8_t index = 0;
+        HIDInterface *piface = FindInterface(iface, alt, proto);
+
+        // Fill in interface structure in case of new interface
+        if(!piface) {
+                piface = hidInterfaces + bNumIface;
+                piface->bmInterface = iface;
+                piface->bmAltSet = alt;
+                piface->bmProtocol = proto;
+                bNumIface++;
+        }
+
+        if((pep->bmAttributes & 0x03) == 3 && (pep->bEndpointAddress & 0x80) == 0x80)
+                index = epInterruptInIndex;
+        else
+                index = epInterruptOutIndex;
+
+        if(index) {
+                // Fill in the endpoint info structure
+                epInfo[bNumEP].epAddr = (pep->bEndpointAddress & 0x0F);
+                epInfo[bNumEP].maxPktSize = (uint8_t)pep->wMaxPacketSize;
+                epInfo[bNumEP].epAttribs = 0;
+                epInfo[bNumEP].bmNakPower = USB_NAK_NOWAIT;
+
+                // Fill in the endpoint index list
+                piface->epIndex[index] = bNumEP; //(pep->bEndpointAddress & 0x0F);
+
+                if(pollInterval < pep->bInterval) // Set the polling interval as the largest polling interval obtained from endpoints
+                        pollInterval = pep->bInterval;
+
+                bNumEP++;
+        }
+        //PrintEndpointDescriptor(pep);
+}
+
+uint8_t HIDUniversal::Release() {
+        pUsb->GetAddressPool().FreeAddress(bAddress);
+
+        bNumEP = 1;
+        bAddress = 0;
+        qNextPollTime = 0;
+        bPollEnable = false;
+        return 0;
+}
+
+bool HIDUniversal::BuffersIdentical(uint8_t len, uint8_t *buf1, uint8_t *buf2) {
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < len; i++)
+                if(buf1[i] != buf2[i])
+                        return false;
+        return true;
+}
+
+void HIDUniversal::ZeroMemory(uint8_t len, uint8_t *buf) {
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < len; i++)
+                buf[i] = 0;
+}
+
+void HIDUniversal::SaveBuffer(uint8_t len, uint8_t *src, uint8_t *dest) {
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < len; i++)
+                dest[i] = src[i];
+}
+
+uint8_t HIDUniversal::Poll() {
+        uint8_t rcode = 0;
+
+        if(!bPollEnable)
+                return 0;
+
+        if((long)(millis() - qNextPollTime) >= 0L) {
+                qNextPollTime = millis() + pollInterval;
+
+                uint8_t buf[constBuffLen];
+
+                for(uint8_t i = 0; i < bNumIface; i++) {
+                        uint8_t index = hidInterfaces[i].epIndex[epInterruptInIndex];
+                        uint16_t read = (uint16_t)epInfo[index].maxPktSize;
+
+                        ZeroMemory(constBuffLen, buf);
+
+                        uint8_t rcode = pUsb->inTransfer(bAddress, epInfo[index].epAddr, &read, buf);
+
+                        if(rcode) {
+                                if(rcode != hrNAK)
+                                        USBTRACE3("(hiduniversal.h) Poll:", rcode, 0x81);
+                                return rcode;
+                        }
+
+                        if(read > constBuffLen)
+                                read = constBuffLen;
+
+                        bool identical = BuffersIdentical(read, buf, prevBuf);
+
+                        SaveBuffer(read, buf, prevBuf);
+
+                        if(identical)
+                                return 0;
+#if 0
+                        Notify(PSTR("\r\nBuf: "), 0x80);
+
+                        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < read; i++) {
+                                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (buf[i], 0x80);
+                                Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                        }
+
+                        Notify(PSTR("\r\n"), 0x80);
+#endif
+                        ParseHIDData(this, bHasReportId, (uint8_t)read, buf);
+
+                        HIDReportParser *prs = GetReportParser(((bHasReportId) ? *buf : 0));
+
+                        if(prs)
+                                prs->Parse(this, bHasReportId, (uint8_t)read, buf);
+                }
+        }
+        return rcode;
+}
+
+// Send a report to interrupt out endpoint. This is NOT SetReport() request!
+uint8_t HIDUniversal::SndRpt(uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t *dataptr) {
+        return pUsb->outTransfer(bAddress, epInfo[epInterruptOutIndex].epAddr, nbytes, dataptr);
+}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hiduniversal.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hiduniversal.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d7af38406
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hiduniversal.h
@@ -0,0 +1,108 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+
+#if !defined(__HIDUNIVERSAL_H__)
+#define __HIDUNIVERSAL_H__
+
+#include "hid.h"
+//#include "hidescriptorparser.h"
+
+class HIDUniversal : public HID {
+
+        struct ReportParser {
+                uint8_t rptId;
+                HIDReportParser *rptParser;
+        } rptParsers[MAX_REPORT_PARSERS];
+
+        // HID class specific descriptor type and length info obtained from HID descriptor
+        HID_CLASS_DESCRIPTOR_LEN_AND_TYPE descrInfo[HID_MAX_HID_CLASS_DESCRIPTORS];
+
+        // Returns HID class specific descriptor length by its type and order number
+        uint16_t GetHidClassDescrLen(uint8_t type, uint8_t num);
+
+        struct HIDInterface {
+                struct {
+                        uint8_t bmInterface : 3;
+                        uint8_t bmAltSet : 3;
+                        uint8_t bmProtocol : 2;
+                };
+                uint8_t epIndex[maxEpPerInterface];
+        };
+
+        uint8_t bConfNum; // configuration number
+        uint8_t bNumIface; // number of interfaces in the configuration
+        uint8_t bNumEP; // total number of EP in the configuration
+        uint32_t qNextPollTime; // next poll time
+        uint8_t pollInterval;
+        bool bPollEnable; // poll enable flag
+
+        static const uint16_t constBuffLen = 64; // event buffer length
+        uint8_t prevBuf[constBuffLen]; // previous event buffer
+
+        void Initialize();
+        HIDInterface* FindInterface(uint8_t iface, uint8_t alt, uint8_t proto);
+
+        void ZeroMemory(uint8_t len, uint8_t *buf);
+        bool BuffersIdentical(uint8_t len, uint8_t *buf1, uint8_t *buf2);
+        void SaveBuffer(uint8_t len, uint8_t *src, uint8_t *dest);
+
+protected:
+        EpInfo epInfo[totalEndpoints];
+        HIDInterface hidInterfaces[maxHidInterfaces];
+
+        bool bHasReportId;
+
+        uint16_t PID, VID; // PID and VID of connected device
+
+        // HID implementation
+        HIDReportParser* GetReportParser(uint8_t id);
+
+        virtual uint8_t OnInitSuccessful() {
+                return 0;
+        };
+
+        virtual void ParseHIDData(HID *hid, bool is_rpt_id, uint8_t len, uint8_t *buf) {
+                return;
+        };
+
+public:
+        HIDUniversal(USB *p);
+
+        // HID implementation
+        bool SetReportParser(uint8_t id, HIDReportParser *prs);
+
+        // USBDeviceConfig implementation
+        uint8_t Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed);
+        uint8_t Release();
+        uint8_t Poll();
+
+        virtual uint8_t GetAddress() {
+                return bAddress;
+        };
+
+        virtual bool isReady() {
+                return bPollEnable;
+        };
+
+        // UsbConfigXtracter implementation
+        void EndpointXtract(uint8_t conf, uint8_t iface, uint8_t alt, uint8_t proto, const USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR *ep);
+
+        // Send report - do not mix with SetReport()!
+        uint8_t SndRpt(uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t *dataptr);
+};
+
+#endif // __HIDUNIVERSAL_H__
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hidusagestr.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hidusagestr.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5ef48f925
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hidusagestr.h
@@ -0,0 +1,977 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+#if !defined( __HIDUSAGESTR_H__)
+#define  __HIDUSAGESTR_H__
+
+#include "Usb.h"
+
+const char pstrSpace [] PROGMEM = " ";
+const char pstrCRLF [] PROGMEM = "\r\n";
+const char pstrSingleTab [] PROGMEM = "\t";
+const char pstrDoubleTab [] PROGMEM = "\t\t";
+const char pstrTripleTab [] PROGMEM = "\t\t\t";
+
+// Usage Page String Titles
+const char pstrUsagePageUndefined [] PROGMEM = "Undef";
+const char pstrUsagePageGenericDesktopControls [] PROGMEM = "Gen Desktop Ctrls";
+const char pstrUsagePageSimulationControls [] PROGMEM = "Simu Ctrls";
+const char pstrUsagePageVRControls [] PROGMEM = "VR Ctrls";
+const char pstrUsagePageSportControls [] PROGMEM = "Sport Ctrls";
+const char pstrUsagePageGameControls [] PROGMEM = "Game Ctrls";
+const char pstrUsagePageGenericDeviceControls [] PROGMEM = "Gen Dev Ctrls";
+const char pstrUsagePageKeyboardKeypad [] PROGMEM = "Kbrd/Keypad";
+const char pstrUsagePageLEDs [] PROGMEM = "LEDs";
+const char pstrUsagePageButton [] PROGMEM = "Button";
+const char pstrUsagePageOrdinal [] PROGMEM = "Ordinal";
+const char pstrUsagePageTelephone [] PROGMEM = "Tel";
+const char pstrUsagePageConsumer [] PROGMEM = "Consumer";
+const char pstrUsagePageDigitizer [] PROGMEM = "Digitizer";
+const char pstrUsagePagePID [] PROGMEM = "PID";
+const char pstrUsagePageUnicode [] PROGMEM = "Unicode";
+const char pstrUsagePageAlphaNumericDisplay [] PROGMEM = "Alpha Num Disp";
+const char pstrUsagePageMedicalInstruments [] PROGMEM = "Medical Instr";
+const char pstrUsagePageMonitor [] PROGMEM = "Monitor";
+const char pstrUsagePagePower [] PROGMEM = "Power";
+const char pstrUsagePageBarCodeScanner [] PROGMEM = "Bar Code Scan";
+const char pstrUsagePageScale [] PROGMEM = "Scale";
+const char pstrUsagePageMSRDevices [] PROGMEM = "Magn Stripe Read Dev";
+const char pstrUsagePagePointOfSale [] PROGMEM = "POS";
+const char pstrUsagePageCameraControl [] PROGMEM = "Cam Ctrl";
+const char pstrUsagePageArcade [] PROGMEM = "Arcade";
+const char pstrUsagePageReserved [] PROGMEM = "Reserved";
+const char pstrUsagePageVendorDefined [] PROGMEM = "Vendor Def";
+
+// Generic Desktop Controls Page
+const char pstrUsagePointer [] PROGMEM = "Pointer";
+const char pstrUsageMouse [] PROGMEM = "Mouse";
+const char pstrUsageJoystick [] PROGMEM = "Joystick";
+const char pstrUsageGamePad [] PROGMEM = "Game Pad";
+const char pstrUsageKeyboard [] PROGMEM = "Kbrd";
+const char pstrUsageKeypad [] PROGMEM = "Keypad";
+const char pstrUsageMultiAxisController [] PROGMEM = "Multi-axis Ctrl";
+const char pstrUsageTabletPCSystemControls [] PROGMEM = "Tablet PC Sys Ctrls";
+const char pstrUsageX [] PROGMEM = "X";
+const char pstrUsageY [] PROGMEM = "Y";
+const char pstrUsageZ [] PROGMEM = "Z";
+const char pstrUsageRx [] PROGMEM = "Rx";
+const char pstrUsageRy [] PROGMEM = "Ry";
+const char pstrUsageRz [] PROGMEM = "Rz";
+const char pstrUsageSlider [] PROGMEM = "Slider";
+const char pstrUsageDial [] PROGMEM = "Dial";
+const char pstrUsageWheel [] PROGMEM = "Wheel";
+const char pstrUsageHatSwitch [] PROGMEM = "Hat Switch";
+const char pstrUsageCountedBuffer [] PROGMEM = "Counted Buf";
+const char pstrUsageByteCount [] PROGMEM = "Byte Count";
+const char pstrUsageMotionWakeup [] PROGMEM = "Motion Wakeup";
+const char pstrUsageStart [] PROGMEM = "Start";
+const char pstrUsageSelect [] PROGMEM = "Sel";
+const char pstrUsageVx [] PROGMEM = "Vx";
+const char pstrUsageVy [] PROGMEM = "Vy";
+const char pstrUsageVz [] PROGMEM = "Vz";
+const char pstrUsageVbrx [] PROGMEM = "Vbrx";
+const char pstrUsageVbry [] PROGMEM = "Vbry";
+const char pstrUsageVbrz [] PROGMEM = "Vbrz";
+const char pstrUsageVno [] PROGMEM = "Vno";
+const char pstrUsageFeatureNotification [] PROGMEM = "Feature Notif";
+const char pstrUsageResolutionMultiplier [] PROGMEM = "Res Mult";
+const char pstrUsageSystemControl [] PROGMEM = "Sys Ctrl";
+const char pstrUsageSystemPowerDown [] PROGMEM = "Sys Pwr Down";
+const char pstrUsageSystemSleep [] PROGMEM = "Sys Sleep";
+const char pstrUsageSystemWakeup [] PROGMEM = "Sys Wakeup";
+const char pstrUsageSystemContextMenu [] PROGMEM = "Sys Context Menu";
+const char pstrUsageSystemMainMenu [] PROGMEM = "Sys Main Menu";
+const char pstrUsageSystemAppMenu [] PROGMEM = "Sys App Menu";
+const char pstrUsageSystemMenuHelp [] PROGMEM = "Sys Menu Help";
+const char pstrUsageSystemMenuExit [] PROGMEM = "Sys Menu Exit";
+const char pstrUsageSystemMenuSelect [] PROGMEM = "Sys Menu Select";
+const char pstrUsageSystemMenuRight [] PROGMEM = "Sys Menu Right";
+const char pstrUsageSystemMenuLeft [] PROGMEM = "Sys Menu Left";
+const char pstrUsageSystemMenuUp [] PROGMEM = "Sys Menu Up";
+const char pstrUsageSystemMenuDown [] PROGMEM = "Sys Menu Down";
+const char pstrUsageSystemColdRestart [] PROGMEM = "Sys Cold Restart";
+const char pstrUsageSystemWarmRestart [] PROGMEM = "Sys Warm Restart";
+const char pstrUsageDPadUp [] PROGMEM = "D-pad Up";
+const char pstrUsageDPadDown [] PROGMEM = "D-pad Down";
+const char pstrUsageDPadRight [] PROGMEM = "D-pad Right";
+const char pstrUsageDPadLeft [] PROGMEM = "D-pad Left";
+const char pstrUsageSystemDock [] PROGMEM = "Sys Dock";
+const char pstrUsageSystemUndock [] PROGMEM = "Sys Undock";
+const char pstrUsageSystemSetup [] PROGMEM = "Sys Setup";
+const char pstrUsageSystemBreak [] PROGMEM = "Sys Break";
+const char pstrUsageSystemDebuggerBreak [] PROGMEM = "Sys Dbg Brk";
+const char pstrUsageApplicationBreak [] PROGMEM = "App Break";
+const char pstrUsageApplicationDebuggerBreak [] PROGMEM = "App Dbg Brk";
+const char pstrUsageSystemSpeakerMute [] PROGMEM = "Sys Spk Mute";
+const char pstrUsageSystemHibernate [] PROGMEM = "Sys Hiber";
+const char pstrUsageSystemDisplayInvert [] PROGMEM = "Sys Disp Inv";
+const char pstrUsageSystemDisplayInternal [] PROGMEM = "Sys Disp Int";
+const char pstrUsageSystemDisplayExternal [] PROGMEM = "Sys Disp Ext";
+const char pstrUsageSystemDisplayBoth [] PROGMEM = "Sys Disp Both";
+const char pstrUsageSystemDisplayDual [] PROGMEM = "Sys Disp Dual";
+const char pstrUsageSystemDisplayToggleIntExt [] PROGMEM = "Sys Disp Tgl Int/Ext";
+const char pstrUsageSystemDisplaySwapPriSec [] PROGMEM = "Sys Disp Swap Pri/Sec";
+const char pstrUsageSystemDisplayLCDAutoscale [] PROGMEM = "Sys Disp LCD Autoscale";
+
+// Simulation Controls Page
+const char pstrUsageFlightSimulationDevice [] PROGMEM = "Flight Simu Dev";
+const char pstrUsageAutomobileSimulationDevice [] PROGMEM = "Auto Simu Dev";
+const char pstrUsageTankSimulationDevice [] PROGMEM = "Tank Simu Dev";
+const char pstrUsageSpaceshipSimulationDevice [] PROGMEM = "Space Simu Dev";
+const char pstrUsageSubmarineSimulationDevice [] PROGMEM = "Subm Simu Dev";
+const char pstrUsageSailingSimulationDevice [] PROGMEM = "Sail Simu Dev";
+const char pstrUsageMotocicleSimulationDevice [] PROGMEM = "Moto Simu Dev";
+const char pstrUsageSportsSimulationDevice [] PROGMEM = "Sport Simu Dev";
+const char pstrUsageAirplaneSimulationDevice [] PROGMEM = "Airp Simu Dev";
+const char pstrUsageHelicopterSimulationDevice [] PROGMEM = "Heli Simu Dev";
+const char pstrUsageMagicCarpetSimulationDevice [] PROGMEM = "Magic Carpet Simu Dev";
+const char pstrUsageBicycleSimulationDevice [] PROGMEM = "Bike Simu Dev";
+const char pstrUsageFlightControlStick [] PROGMEM = "Flight Ctrl Stick";
+const char pstrUsageFlightStick [] PROGMEM = "Flight Stick";
+const char pstrUsageCyclicControl [] PROGMEM = "Cyclic Ctrl";
+const char pstrUsageCyclicTrim [] PROGMEM = "Cyclic Trim";
+const char pstrUsageFlightYoke [] PROGMEM = "Flight Yoke";
+const char pstrUsageTrackControl [] PROGMEM = "Track Ctrl";
+const char pstrUsageAileron [] PROGMEM = "Aileron";
+const char pstrUsageAileronTrim [] PROGMEM = "Aileron Trim";
+const char pstrUsageAntiTorqueControl [] PROGMEM = "Anti-Torque Ctrl";
+const char pstrUsageAutopilotEnable [] PROGMEM = "Autopilot Enable";
+const char pstrUsageChaffRelease [] PROGMEM = "Chaff Release";
+const char pstrUsageCollectiveControl [] PROGMEM = "Collective Ctrl";
+const char pstrUsageDiveBrake [] PROGMEM = "Dive Brake";
+const char pstrUsageElectronicCountermeasures [] PROGMEM = "El Countermeasures";
+const char pstrUsageElevator [] PROGMEM = "Elevator";
+const char pstrUsageElevatorTrim [] PROGMEM = "Elevator Trim";
+const char pstrUsageRudder [] PROGMEM = "Rudder";
+const char pstrUsageThrottle [] PROGMEM = "Throttle";
+const char pstrUsageFlightCommunications [] PROGMEM = "Flight Comm";
+const char pstrUsageFlareRelease [] PROGMEM = "Flare Release";
+const char pstrUsageLandingGear [] PROGMEM = "Landing Gear";
+const char pstrUsageToeBrake [] PROGMEM = "Toe Brake";
+const char pstrUsageTrigger [] PROGMEM = "Trigger";
+const char pstrUsageWeaponsArm [] PROGMEM = "Weapons Arm";
+const char pstrUsageWeaponsSelect [] PROGMEM = "Weapons Sel";
+const char pstrUsageWingFlaps [] PROGMEM = "Wing Flaps";
+const char pstrUsageAccelerator [] PROGMEM = "Accel";
+const char pstrUsageBrake [] PROGMEM = "Brake";
+const char pstrUsageClutch [] PROGMEM = "Clutch";
+const char pstrUsageShifter [] PROGMEM = "Shifter";
+const char pstrUsageSteering [] PROGMEM = "Steering";
+const char pstrUsageTurretDirection [] PROGMEM = "Turret Dir";
+const char pstrUsageBarrelElevation [] PROGMEM = "Barrel Ele";
+const char pstrUsageDivePlane [] PROGMEM = "Dive Plane";
+const char pstrUsageBallast [] PROGMEM = "Ballast";
+const char pstrUsageBicycleCrank [] PROGMEM = "Bicycle Crank";
+const char pstrUsageHandleBars [] PROGMEM = "Handle Bars";
+const char pstrUsageFrontBrake [] PROGMEM = "Front Brake";
+const char pstrUsageRearBrake [] PROGMEM = "Rear Brake";
+
+// VR Controls Page
+const char pstrUsageBelt [] PROGMEM = "Belt";
+const char pstrUsageBodySuit [] PROGMEM = "Body Suit";
+const char pstrUsageFlexor [] PROGMEM = "Flexor";
+const char pstrUsageGlove [] PROGMEM = "Glove";
+const char pstrUsageHeadTracker [] PROGMEM = "Head Track";
+const char pstrUsageHeadMountedDisplay [] PROGMEM = "Head Disp";
+const char pstrUsageHandTracker [] PROGMEM = "Hand Track";
+const char pstrUsageOculometer [] PROGMEM = "Oculometer";
+const char pstrUsageVest [] PROGMEM = "Vest";
+const char pstrUsageAnimatronicDevice [] PROGMEM = "Animat Dev";
+const char pstrUsageStereoEnable [] PROGMEM = "Stereo Enbl";
+const char pstrUsageDisplayEnable [] PROGMEM = "Display Enbl";
+
+// Sport Controls Page
+const char pstrUsageBaseballBat [] PROGMEM = "Baseball Bat";
+const char pstrUsageGolfClub [] PROGMEM = "Golf Club";
+const char pstrUsageRowingMachine [] PROGMEM = "Rowing Mach";
+const char pstrUsageTreadmill [] PROGMEM = "Treadmill";
+const char pstrUsageOar [] PROGMEM = "Oar";
+const char pstrUsageSlope [] PROGMEM = "Slope";
+const char pstrUsageRate [] PROGMEM = "Rate";
+const char pstrUsageStickSpeed [] PROGMEM = "Stick Speed";
+const char pstrUsageStickFaceAngle [] PROGMEM = "Stick Face Ang";
+const char pstrUsageStickHeelToe [] PROGMEM = "Stick Heel/Toe";
+const char pstrUsageStickFollowThough [] PROGMEM = "Stick Flw Thru";
+const char pstrUsageStickTempo [] PROGMEM = "Stick Tempo";
+const char pstrUsageStickType [] PROGMEM = "Stick Type";
+const char pstrUsageStickHeight [] PROGMEM = "Stick Hght";
+const char pstrUsagePutter [] PROGMEM = "Putter";
+const char pstrUsage1Iron [] PROGMEM = "1 Iron";
+const char pstrUsage2Iron [] PROGMEM = "2 Iron";
+const char pstrUsage3Iron [] PROGMEM = "3 Iron";
+const char pstrUsage4Iron [] PROGMEM = "4 Iron";
+const char pstrUsage5Iron [] PROGMEM = "5 Iron";
+const char pstrUsage6Iron [] PROGMEM = "6 Iron";
+const char pstrUsage7Iron [] PROGMEM = "7 Iron";
+const char pstrUsage8Iron [] PROGMEM = "8 Iron";
+const char pstrUsage9Iron [] PROGMEM = "9 Iron";
+const char pstrUsage10Iron [] PROGMEM = "10 Iron";
+const char pstrUsage11Iron [] PROGMEM = "11 Iron";
+const char pstrUsageSandWedge [] PROGMEM = "Sand Wedge";
+const char pstrUsageLoftWedge [] PROGMEM = "Loft Wedge";
+const char pstrUsagePowerWedge [] PROGMEM = "Pwr Wedge";
+const char pstrUsage1Wood [] PROGMEM = "1 Wood";
+const char pstrUsage3Wood [] PROGMEM = "3 Wood";
+const char pstrUsage5Wood [] PROGMEM = "5 Wood";
+const char pstrUsage7Wood [] PROGMEM = "7 Wood";
+const char pstrUsage9Wood [] PROGMEM = "9 Wood";
+
+// Game Controls Page
+const char pstrUsage3DGameController [] PROGMEM = "3D Game Ctrl";
+const char pstrUsagePinballDevice [] PROGMEM = "Pinball Dev";
+const char pstrUsageGunDevice [] PROGMEM = "Gun Dev";
+const char pstrUsagePointOfView [] PROGMEM = "POV";
+const char pstrUsageTurnRightLeft [] PROGMEM = "Turn Right Left";
+const char pstrUsagePitchForwardBackward [] PROGMEM = "Pitch Fwd/Back";
+const char pstrUsageRollRightLeft [] PROGMEM = "Roll Right/Left";
+const char pstrUsageMoveRightLeft [] PROGMEM = "Move Right/Left";
+const char pstrUsageMoveForwardBackward [] PROGMEM = "Move Fwd/Back";
+const char pstrUsageMoveUpDown [] PROGMEM = "Move Up/Down";
+const char pstrUsageLeanRightLeft [] PROGMEM = "Lean Right/Left";
+const char pstrUsageLeanForwardBackward [] PROGMEM = "Lean Fwd/Back";
+const char pstrUsageHeightOfPOV [] PROGMEM = "Height of POV";
+const char pstrUsageFlipper [] PROGMEM = "Flipper";
+const char pstrUsageSecondaryFlipper [] PROGMEM = "Second Flipper";
+const char pstrUsageBump [] PROGMEM = "Bump";
+const char pstrUsageNewGame [] PROGMEM = "New Game";
+const char pstrUsageShootBall [] PROGMEM = "Shoot Ball";
+const char pstrUsagePlayer [] PROGMEM = "Player";
+const char pstrUsageGunBolt [] PROGMEM = "Gun Bolt";
+const char pstrUsageGunClip [] PROGMEM = "Gun Clip";
+const char pstrUsageGunSelector [] PROGMEM = "Gun Sel";
+const char pstrUsageGunSingleShot [] PROGMEM = "Gun Sngl Shot";
+const char pstrUsageGunBurst [] PROGMEM = "Gun Burst";
+const char pstrUsageGunAutomatic [] PROGMEM = "Gun Auto";
+const char pstrUsageGunSafety [] PROGMEM = "Gun Safety";
+const char pstrUsageGamepadFireJump [] PROGMEM = "Gamepad Fire/Jump";
+const char pstrUsageGamepadTrigger [] PROGMEM = "Gamepad Trig";
+
+// Generic Device Controls Page
+const char pstrUsageBatteryStrength [] PROGMEM = "Bat Strength";
+const char pstrUsageWirelessChannel [] PROGMEM = "Wireless Ch";
+const char pstrUsageWirelessID [] PROGMEM = "Wireless ID";
+const char pstrUsageDiscoverWirelessControl [] PROGMEM = "Discover Wireless Ctrl";
+const char pstrUsageSecurityCodeCharEntered [] PROGMEM = "Sec Code Char Entrd";
+const char pstrUsageSecurityCodeCharErased [] PROGMEM = "Sec Code Char Erased";
+const char pstrUsageSecurityCodeCleared [] PROGMEM = "Sec Code Cleared";
+
+// LED Page
+const char pstrUsageNumLock [] PROGMEM = "Num Lock";
+const char pstrUsageCapsLock [] PROGMEM = "Caps Lock";
+const char pstrUsageScrollLock [] PROGMEM = "Scroll Lock";
+const char pstrUsageCompose [] PROGMEM = "Compose";
+const char pstrUsageKana [] PROGMEM = "Kana";
+const char pstrUsagePower [] PROGMEM = "Pwr";
+const char pstrUsageShift [] PROGMEM = "Shift";
+const char pstrUsageDoNotDisturb [] PROGMEM = "DND";
+const char pstrUsageMute [] PROGMEM = "Mute";
+const char pstrUsageToneEnable [] PROGMEM = "Tone Enbl";
+const char pstrUsageHighCutFilter [] PROGMEM = "High Cut Fltr";
+const char pstrUsageLowCutFilter [] PROGMEM = "Low Cut Fltr";
+const char pstrUsageEqualizerEnable [] PROGMEM = "Eq Enbl";
+const char pstrUsageSoundFieldOn [] PROGMEM = "Sound Field On";
+const char pstrUsageSurroundOn [] PROGMEM = "Surround On";
+const char pstrUsageRepeat [] PROGMEM = "Repeat";
+const char pstrUsageStereo [] PROGMEM = "Stereo";
+const char pstrUsageSamplingRateDetect [] PROGMEM = "Smpl Rate Detect";
+const char pstrUsageSpinning [] PROGMEM = "Spinning";
+const char pstrUsageCAV [] PROGMEM = "CAV";
+const char pstrUsageCLV [] PROGMEM = "CLV";
+const char pstrUsageRecordingFormatDetect [] PROGMEM = "Rec Format Detect";
+const char pstrUsageOffHook [] PROGMEM = "Off Hook";
+const char pstrUsageRing [] PROGMEM = "Ring";
+const char pstrUsageMessageWaiting [] PROGMEM = "Msg Wait";
+const char pstrUsageDataMode [] PROGMEM = "Data Mode";
+const char pstrUsageBatteryOperation [] PROGMEM = "Bat Op";
+const char pstrUsageBatteryOK [] PROGMEM = "Bat OK";
+const char pstrUsageBatteryLow [] PROGMEM = "Bat Low";
+const char pstrUsageSpeaker [] PROGMEM = "Speaker";
+const char pstrUsageHeadSet [] PROGMEM = "Head Set";
+const char pstrUsageHold [] PROGMEM = "Hold";
+const char pstrUsageMicrophone [] PROGMEM = "Mic";
+const char pstrUsageCoverage [] PROGMEM = "Coverage";
+const char pstrUsageNightMode [] PROGMEM = "Night Mode";
+const char pstrUsageSendCalls [] PROGMEM = "Send Calls";
+const char pstrUsageCallPickup [] PROGMEM = "Call Pickup";
+const char pstrUsageConference [] PROGMEM = "Conf";
+const char pstrUsageStandBy [] PROGMEM = "Stand-by";
+const char pstrUsageCameraOn [] PROGMEM = "Cam On";
+const char pstrUsageCameraOff [] PROGMEM = "Cam Off";
+const char pstrUsageOnLine [] PROGMEM = "On-Line";
+const char pstrUsageOffLine [] PROGMEM = "Off-Line";
+const char pstrUsageBusy [] PROGMEM = "Busy";
+const char pstrUsageReady [] PROGMEM = "Ready";
+const char pstrUsagePaperOut [] PROGMEM = "Paper Out";
+const char pstrUsagePaperJam [] PROGMEM = "Paper Jam";
+const char pstrUsageRemote [] PROGMEM = "Remote";
+const char pstrUsageForward [] PROGMEM = "Fwd";
+const char pstrUsageReverse [] PROGMEM = "Rev";
+const char pstrUsageStop [] PROGMEM = "Stop";
+const char pstrUsageRewind [] PROGMEM = "Rewind";
+const char pstrUsageFastForward [] PROGMEM = "Fast Fwd";
+const char pstrUsagePlay [] PROGMEM = "Play";
+const char pstrUsagePause [] PROGMEM = "Pause";
+const char pstrUsageRecord [] PROGMEM = "Rec";
+const char pstrUsageError [] PROGMEM = "Error";
+const char pstrUsageSelectedIndicator [] PROGMEM = "Usage Sel Ind";
+const char pstrUsageInUseIndicator [] PROGMEM = "Usage In Use Ind";
+const char pstrUsageMultiModeIndicator [] PROGMEM = "Usage Multi Mode Ind";
+const char pstrUsageIndicatorOn [] PROGMEM = "Ind On";
+const char pstrUsageIndicatorFlash [] PROGMEM = "Ind Flash";
+const char pstrUsageIndicatorSlowBlink [] PROGMEM = "Ind Slow Blk";
+const char pstrUsageIndicatorFastBlink [] PROGMEM = "Ind Fast Blk";
+const char pstrUsageIndicatorOff [] PROGMEM = "Ind Off";
+const char pstrUsageFlashOnTime [] PROGMEM = "Flash On Time";
+const char pstrUsageSlowBlinkOnTime [] PROGMEM = "Slow Blk On Time";
+const char pstrUsageSlowBlinkOffTime [] PROGMEM = "Slow Blk Off Time";
+const char pstrUsageFastBlinkOnTime [] PROGMEM = "Fast Blk On Time";
+const char pstrUsageFastBlinkOffTime [] PROGMEM = "Fast Blk Off Time";
+const char pstrUsageIndicatorColor [] PROGMEM = "Usage Ind Color";
+const char pstrUsageIndicatorRed [] PROGMEM = "Ind Red";
+const char pstrUsageIndicatorGreen [] PROGMEM = "Ind Green";
+const char pstrUsageIndicatorAmber [] PROGMEM = "Ind Amber";
+const char pstrUsageGenericIndicator [] PROGMEM = "Gen Ind";
+const char pstrUsageSystemSuspend [] PROGMEM = "Sys Suspend";
+const char pstrUsageExternalPowerConnected [] PROGMEM = "Ext Pwr Conn";
+
+// Telephony Usage Page
+const char pstrUsagePhone [] PROGMEM = "Phone";
+const char pstrUsageAnsweringMachine [] PROGMEM = "Answ Mach";
+const char pstrUsageMessageControls [] PROGMEM = "Msg Ctrls";
+const char pstrUsageHandset [] PROGMEM = "Handset";
+const char pstrUsageHeadset [] PROGMEM = "Headset";
+const char pstrUsageTelephonyKeyPad [] PROGMEM = "Tel Key Pad";
+const char pstrUsageProgrammableButton [] PROGMEM = "Prog Button";
+const char pstrUsageHookSwitch [] PROGMEM = "Hook Sw";
+const char pstrUsageFlash [] PROGMEM = "Flash";
+const char pstrUsageFeature [] PROGMEM = "Feature";
+//const char pstrUsageHold [] PROGMEM = "Hold";
+const char pstrUsageRedial [] PROGMEM = "Redial";
+const char pstrUsageTransfer [] PROGMEM = "Transfer";
+const char pstrUsageDrop [] PROGMEM = "Drop";
+const char pstrUsagePark [] PROGMEM = "Park";
+const char pstrUsageForwardCalls [] PROGMEM = "Fwd Calls";
+const char pstrUsageAlternateFunction [] PROGMEM = "Alt Func";
+const char pstrUsageLine [] PROGMEM = "Line";
+const char pstrUsageSpeakerPhone [] PROGMEM = "Spk Phone";
+//const char pstrUsageConference [] PROGMEM = "Conference";
+const char pstrUsageRingEnable [] PROGMEM = "Ring Enbl";
+const char pstrUsageRingSelect [] PROGMEM = "Ring Sel";
+const char pstrUsagePhoneMute [] PROGMEM = "Phone Mute";
+const char pstrUsageCallerID [] PROGMEM = "Caller ID";
+const char pstrUsageSend [] PROGMEM = "Send";
+const char pstrUsageSpeedDial [] PROGMEM = "Speed Dial";
+const char pstrUsageStoreNumber [] PROGMEM = "Store Num";
+const char pstrUsageRecallNumber [] PROGMEM = "Recall Num";
+const char pstrUsagePhoneDirectory [] PROGMEM = "Phone Dir";
+const char pstrUsageVoiceMail [] PROGMEM = "Voice Mail";
+const char pstrUsageScreenCalls [] PROGMEM = "Screen Calls";
+//const char pstrUsageDoNotDisturb [] PROGMEM = "Do Not Disturb";
+const char pstrUsageMessage [] PROGMEM = "Msg";
+const char pstrUsageAnswerOnOff [] PROGMEM = "Answer On/Off";
+const char pstrUsageInsideDialTone [] PROGMEM = "Inside Dial Tone";
+const char pstrUsageOutsideDialTone [] PROGMEM = "Outside Dial Tone";
+const char pstrUsageInsideRingTone [] PROGMEM = "Inside Ring Tone";
+const char pstrUsageOutsideRingTone [] PROGMEM = "Outside Ring Tone";
+const char pstrUsagePriorityRingTone [] PROGMEM = "Prior Ring Tone";
+const char pstrUsageInsideRingback [] PROGMEM = "Inside Ringback";
+const char pstrUsagePriorityRingback [] PROGMEM = "Priority Ringback";
+const char pstrUsageLineBusyTone [] PROGMEM = "Ln Busy Tone";
+const char pstrUsageReorderTone [] PROGMEM = "Reorder Tone";
+const char pstrUsageCallWaitingTone [] PROGMEM = "Call Wait Tone";
+const char pstrUsageConfirmationTone1 [] PROGMEM = "Cnfrm Tone1";
+const char pstrUsageConfirmationTone2 [] PROGMEM = "Cnfrm Tone2";
+const char pstrUsageTonesOff [] PROGMEM = "Tones Off";
+const char pstrUsageOutsideRingback [] PROGMEM = "Outside Ringback";
+const char pstrUsageRinger [] PROGMEM = "Ringer";
+const char pstrUsagePhoneKey0 [] PROGMEM = "0";
+const char pstrUsagePhoneKey1 [] PROGMEM = "1";
+const char pstrUsagePhoneKey2 [] PROGMEM = "2";
+const char pstrUsagePhoneKey3 [] PROGMEM = "3";
+const char pstrUsagePhoneKey4 [] PROGMEM = "4";
+const char pstrUsagePhoneKey5 [] PROGMEM = "5";
+const char pstrUsagePhoneKey6 [] PROGMEM = "6";
+const char pstrUsagePhoneKey7 [] PROGMEM = "7";
+const char pstrUsagePhoneKey8 [] PROGMEM = "8";
+const char pstrUsagePhoneKey9 [] PROGMEM = "9";
+const char pstrUsagePhoneKeyStar [] PROGMEM = "*";
+const char pstrUsagePhoneKeyPound [] PROGMEM = "#";
+const char pstrUsagePhoneKeyA [] PROGMEM = "A";
+const char pstrUsagePhoneKeyB [] PROGMEM = "B";
+const char pstrUsagePhoneKeyC [] PROGMEM = "C";
+const char pstrUsagePhoneKeyD [] PROGMEM = "D";
+
+// Consumer Usage Page
+const char pstrUsageConsumerControl [] PROGMEM = "Consumer Ctrl";
+const char pstrUsageNumericKeyPad [] PROGMEM = "Num Key Pad";
+//const char pstrUsageProgrammableButton [] PROGMEM = "Prog Btn";
+//const char pstrUsageMicrophone [] PROGMEM = "Mic";
+const char pstrUsageHeadphone [] PROGMEM = "Headphone";
+const char pstrUsageGraphicEqualizer [] PROGMEM = "Graph Eq";
+const char pstrUsagePlus10 [] PROGMEM = "+10";
+const char pstrUsagePlus100 [] PROGMEM = "+100";
+const char pstrUsageAMPM [] PROGMEM = "AM/PM";
+//const char pstrUsagePower [] PROGMEM = "Pwr";
+const char pstrUsageReset [] PROGMEM = "Reset";
+const char pstrUsageSleep [] PROGMEM = "Sleep";
+const char pstrUsageSleepAfter [] PROGMEM = "Sleep After";
+const char pstrUsageSleepMode [] PROGMEM = "Sleep Mode";
+const char pstrUsageIllumination [] PROGMEM = "Illumin";
+const char pstrUsageFunctionButtons [] PROGMEM = "Func Btns";
+const char pstrUsageMenu [] PROGMEM = "Menu";
+const char pstrUsageMenuPick [] PROGMEM = "Menu Pick";
+const char pstrUsageMenuUp [] PROGMEM = "Menu Up";
+const char pstrUsageMenuDown [] PROGMEM = "Menu Down";
+const char pstrUsageMenuLeft [] PROGMEM = "Menu Left";
+const char pstrUsageMenuRight [] PROGMEM = "Menu Right";
+const char pstrUsageMenuEscape [] PROGMEM = "Menu Esc";
+const char pstrUsageMenuValueIncrease [] PROGMEM = "Menu Val Inc";
+const char pstrUsageMenuValueDecrease [] PROGMEM = "Menu Val Dec";
+const char pstrUsageDataOnScreen [] PROGMEM = "Data On Scr";
+const char pstrUsageClosedCaption [] PROGMEM = "Closed Cptn";
+const char pstrUsageClosedCaptionSelect [] PROGMEM = "Closed Cptn Sel";
+const char pstrUsageVCRTV [] PROGMEM = "VCR/TV";
+const char pstrUsageBroadcastMode [] PROGMEM = "Brdcast Mode";
+const char pstrUsageSnapshot [] PROGMEM = "Snapshot";
+const char pstrUsageStill [] PROGMEM = "Still";
+const char pstrUsageSelection [] PROGMEM = "Sel";
+const char pstrUsageAssignSelection [] PROGMEM = "Assign Sel";
+const char pstrUsageModeStep [] PROGMEM = "Mode Step";
+const char pstrUsageRecallLast [] PROGMEM = "Recall Last";
+const char pstrUsageEnterChannel [] PROGMEM = "Entr Channel";
+const char pstrUsageOrderMovie [] PROGMEM = "Ord Movie";
+const char pstrUsageChannel [] PROGMEM = "Channel";
+const char pstrUsageMediaSelection [] PROGMEM = "Med Sel";
+const char pstrUsageMediaSelectComputer [] PROGMEM = "Med Sel Comp";
+const char pstrUsageMediaSelectTV [] PROGMEM = "Med Sel TV";
+const char pstrUsageMediaSelectWWW [] PROGMEM = "Med Sel WWW";
+const char pstrUsageMediaSelectDVD [] PROGMEM = "Med Sel DVD";
+const char pstrUsageMediaSelectTelephone [] PROGMEM = "Med Sel Tel";
+const char pstrUsageMediaSelectProgramGuide [] PROGMEM = "Med Sel PG";
+const char pstrUsageMediaSelectVideoPhone [] PROGMEM = "Med Sel Vid";
+const char pstrUsageMediaSelectGames [] PROGMEM = "Med Sel Games";
+const char pstrUsageMediaSelectMessages [] PROGMEM = "Med Sel Msg";
+const char pstrUsageMediaSelectCD [] PROGMEM = "Med Sel CD";
+const char pstrUsageMediaSelectVCR [] PROGMEM = "Med Sel VCR";
+const char pstrUsageMediaSelectTuner [] PROGMEM = "Med Sel Tuner";
+const char pstrUsageQuit [] PROGMEM = "Quit";
+const char pstrUsageHelp [] PROGMEM = "Help";
+const char pstrUsageMediaSelectTape [] PROGMEM = "Med Sel Tape";
+const char pstrUsageMediaSelectCable [] PROGMEM = "Med Sel Cbl";
+const char pstrUsageMediaSelectSatellite [] PROGMEM = "Med Sel Sat";
+const char pstrUsageMediaSelectSecurity [] PROGMEM = "Med Sel Secur";
+const char pstrUsageMediaSelectHome [] PROGMEM = "Med Sel Home";
+const char pstrUsageMediaSelectCall [] PROGMEM = "Med Sel Call";
+const char pstrUsageChannelIncrement [] PROGMEM = "Ch Inc";
+const char pstrUsageChannelDecrement [] PROGMEM = "Ch Dec";
+const char pstrUsageMediaSelectSAP [] PROGMEM = "Med Sel SAP";
+const char pstrUsageVCRPlus [] PROGMEM = "VCR+";
+const char pstrUsageOnce [] PROGMEM = "Once";
+const char pstrUsageDaily [] PROGMEM = "Daily";
+const char pstrUsageWeekly [] PROGMEM = "Weekly";
+const char pstrUsageMonthly [] PROGMEM = "Monthly";
+//const char pstrUsagePlay [] PROGMEM = "Play";
+//const char pstrUsagePause [] PROGMEM = "Pause";
+//const char pstrUsageRecord [] PROGMEM = "Rec";
+//const char pstrUsageFastForward [] PROGMEM = "FF";
+//const char pstrUsageRewind [] PROGMEM = "Rewind";
+const char pstrUsageScanNextTrack [] PROGMEM = "Next Track";
+const char pstrUsageScanPreviousTrack [] PROGMEM = "Prev Track";
+//const char pstrUsageStop [] PROGMEM = "Stop";
+const char pstrUsageEject [] PROGMEM = "Eject";
+const char pstrUsageRandomPlay [] PROGMEM = "Random";
+const char pstrUsageSelectDisk [] PROGMEM = "Sel Disk";
+const char pstrUsageEnterDisk [] PROGMEM = "Ent Disk";
+//const char pstrUsageRepeat [] PROGMEM = "Repeat";
+const char pstrUsageTracking [] PROGMEM = "Tracking";
+const char pstrUsageTrackNormal [] PROGMEM = "Trk Norm";
+const char pstrUsageSlowTracking [] PROGMEM = "Slow Trk";
+const char pstrUsageFrameForward [] PROGMEM = "Frm Fwd";
+const char pstrUsageFrameBackwards [] PROGMEM = "Frm Back";
+const char pstrUsageMark [] PROGMEM = "Mark";
+const char pstrUsageClearMark [] PROGMEM = "Clr Mark";
+const char pstrUsageRepeatFromMark [] PROGMEM = "Rpt Mark";
+const char pstrUsageReturnToMark [] PROGMEM = "Ret to Mark";
+const char pstrUsageSearchMarkForward [] PROGMEM = "Search Mark Fwd";
+const char pstrUsageSearchMarkBackwards [] PROGMEM = "Search Mark Back";
+const char pstrUsageCounterReset [] PROGMEM = "Counter Reset";
+const char pstrUsageShowCounter [] PROGMEM = "Show Counter";
+const char pstrUsageTrackingIncrement [] PROGMEM = "Track Inc";
+const char pstrUsageTrackingDecrement [] PROGMEM = "Track Dec";
+const char pstrUsageStopEject [] PROGMEM = "Stop/Eject";
+const char pstrUsagePlayPause [] PROGMEM = "Play/Pause";
+const char pstrUsagePlaySkip [] PROGMEM = "Play/Skip";
+const char pstrUsageVolume [] PROGMEM = "Vol";
+const char pstrUsageBalance [] PROGMEM = "Balance";
+//const char pstrUsageMute [] PROGMEM = "Mute";
+const char pstrUsageBass [] PROGMEM = "Bass";
+const char pstrUsageTreble [] PROGMEM = "Treble";
+const char pstrUsageBassBoost [] PROGMEM = "Bass Boost";
+const char pstrUsageSurroundMode [] PROGMEM = "Surround";
+const char pstrUsageLoudness [] PROGMEM = "Loud";
+const char pstrUsageMPX [] PROGMEM = "MPX";
+const char pstrUsageVolumeIncrement [] PROGMEM = "Vol Inc";
+const char pstrUsageVolumeDecrement [] PROGMEM = "Vol Dec";
+const char pstrUsageSpeedSelect [] PROGMEM = "Speed";
+const char pstrUsagePlaybackSpeed [] PROGMEM = "Play Speed";
+const char pstrUsageStandardPlay [] PROGMEM = "Std Play";
+const char pstrUsageLongPlay [] PROGMEM = "Long Play";
+const char pstrUsageExtendedPlay [] PROGMEM = "Ext Play";
+const char pstrUsageSlow [] PROGMEM = "Slow";
+const char pstrUsageFanEnable [] PROGMEM = "Fan Enbl";
+const char pstrUsageFanSpeed [] PROGMEM = "Fan Speed";
+const char pstrUsageLightEnable [] PROGMEM = "Light Enbl";
+const char pstrUsageLightIlluminationLevel [] PROGMEM = "Light Illum Lev";
+const char pstrUsageClimateControlEnable [] PROGMEM = "Climate Enbl";
+const char pstrUsageRoomTemperature [] PROGMEM = "Room Temp";
+const char pstrUsageSecurityEnable [] PROGMEM = "Secur Enbl";
+const char pstrUsageFireAlarm [] PROGMEM = "Fire Alm";
+const char pstrUsagePoliceAlarm [] PROGMEM = "Police Alm";
+const char pstrUsageProximity [] PROGMEM = "Prox";
+const char pstrUsageMotion [] PROGMEM = "Motion";
+const char pstrUsageDuresAlarm [] PROGMEM = "Dures Alm";
+const char pstrUsageHoldupAlarm [] PROGMEM = "Holdup Alm";
+const char pstrUsageMedicalAlarm [] PROGMEM = "Med Alm";
+const char pstrUsageBalanceRight [] PROGMEM = "Balance Right";
+const char pstrUsageBalanceLeft [] PROGMEM = "Balance Left";
+const char pstrUsageBassIncrement [] PROGMEM = "Bass Inc";
+const char pstrUsageBassDecrement [] PROGMEM = "Bass Dec";
+const char pstrUsageTrebleIncrement [] PROGMEM = "Treble Inc";
+const char pstrUsageTrebleDecrement [] PROGMEM = "Treble Dec";
+const char pstrUsageSpeakerSystem [] PROGMEM = "Spk Sys";
+const char pstrUsageChannelLeft [] PROGMEM = "Ch Left";
+const char pstrUsageChannelRight [] PROGMEM = "Ch Right";
+const char pstrUsageChannelCenter [] PROGMEM = "Ch Center";
+const char pstrUsageChannelFront [] PROGMEM = "Ch Front";
+const char pstrUsageChannelCenterFront [] PROGMEM = "Ch Cntr Front";
+const char pstrUsageChannelSide [] PROGMEM = "Ch Side";
+const char pstrUsageChannelSurround [] PROGMEM = "Ch Surround";
+const char pstrUsageChannelLowFreqEnhancement [] PROGMEM = "Ch Low Freq Enh";
+const char pstrUsageChannelTop [] PROGMEM = "Ch Top";
+const char pstrUsageChannelUnknown [] PROGMEM = "Ch Unk";
+const char pstrUsageSubChannel [] PROGMEM = "Sub-ch";
+const char pstrUsageSubChannelIncrement [] PROGMEM = "Sub-ch Inc";
+const char pstrUsageSubChannelDecrement [] PROGMEM = "Sub-ch Dec";
+const char pstrUsageAlternateAudioIncrement [] PROGMEM = "Alt Aud Inc";
+const char pstrUsageAlternateAudioDecrement [] PROGMEM = "Alt Aud Dec";
+const char pstrUsageApplicationLaunchButtons [] PROGMEM = "App Launch Btns";
+const char pstrUsageALLaunchButtonConfigTool [] PROGMEM = "AL Launch Conf Tl";
+const char pstrUsageALProgrammableButton [] PROGMEM = "AL Pgm Btn";
+const char pstrUsageALConsumerControlConfig [] PROGMEM = "AL Cons Ctrl Cfg";
+const char pstrUsageALWordProcessor [] PROGMEM = "AL Word Proc";
+const char pstrUsageALTextEditor [] PROGMEM = "AL Txt Edtr";
+const char pstrUsageALSpreadsheet [] PROGMEM = "AL Sprdsheet";
+const char pstrUsageALGraphicsEditor [] PROGMEM = "AL Graph Edtr";
+const char pstrUsageALPresentationApp [] PROGMEM = "AL Present App";
+const char pstrUsageALDatabaseApp [] PROGMEM = "AL DB App";
+const char pstrUsageALEmailReader [] PROGMEM = "AL E-mail Rdr";
+const char pstrUsageALNewsreader [] PROGMEM = "AL Newsrdr";
+const char pstrUsageALVoicemail [] PROGMEM = "AL Voicemail";
+const char pstrUsageALContactsAddressBook [] PROGMEM = "AL Addr Book";
+const char pstrUsageALCalendarSchedule [] PROGMEM = "AL Clndr/Schdlr";
+const char pstrUsageALTaskProjectManager [] PROGMEM = "AL Task/Prj Mgr";
+const char pstrUsageALLogJournalTimecard [] PROGMEM = "AL Log/Jrnl/Tmcrd";
+const char pstrUsageALCheckbookFinance [] PROGMEM = "AL Chckbook/Fin";
+const char pstrUsageALCalculator [] PROGMEM = "AL Calc";
+const char pstrUsageALAVCapturePlayback [] PROGMEM = "AL A/V Capt/Play";
+const char pstrUsageALLocalMachineBrowser [] PROGMEM = "AL Loc Mach Brow";
+const char pstrUsageALLANWANBrow [] PROGMEM = "AL LAN/WAN Brow";
+const char pstrUsageALInternetBrowser [] PROGMEM = "AL I-net Brow";
+const char pstrUsageALRemoteNetISPConnect [] PROGMEM = "AL Rem Net Con";
+const char pstrUsageALNetworkConference [] PROGMEM = "AL Net Conf";
+const char pstrUsageALNetworkChat [] PROGMEM = "AL Net Chat";
+const char pstrUsageALTelephonyDialer [] PROGMEM = "AL Tel/Dial";
+const char pstrUsageALLogon [] PROGMEM = "AL Logon";
+const char pstrUsageALLogoff [] PROGMEM = "AL Logoff";
+const char pstrUsageALLogonLogoff [] PROGMEM = "AL Logon/Logoff";
+const char pstrUsageALTermLockScrSav [] PROGMEM = "AL Term Lock/Scr Sav";
+const char pstrUsageALControlPannel [] PROGMEM = "AL Ctrl Pan";
+const char pstrUsageALCommandLineProcessorRun [] PROGMEM = "AL Cmd/Run";
+const char pstrUsageALProcessTaskManager [] PROGMEM = "AL Task Mgr";
+const char pstrUsageALSelectTaskApplication [] PROGMEM = "AL Sel App";
+const char pstrUsageALNextTaskApplication [] PROGMEM = "AL Next App";
+const char pstrUsageALPreviousTaskApplication [] PROGMEM = "AL Prev App";
+const char pstrUsageALPreemptiveHaltTaskApp [] PROGMEM = "AL Prmpt Halt App";
+const char pstrUsageALIntegratedHelpCenter [] PROGMEM = "AL Hlp Cntr";
+const char pstrUsageALDocuments [] PROGMEM = "AL Docs";
+const char pstrUsageALThesaurus [] PROGMEM = "AL Thsrs";
+const char pstrUsageALDictionary [] PROGMEM = "AL Dict";
+const char pstrUsageALDesktop [] PROGMEM = "AL Desktop";
+const char pstrUsageALSpellCheck [] PROGMEM = "AL Spell Chk";
+const char pstrUsageALGrammarCheck [] PROGMEM = "AL Gram Chk";
+const char pstrUsageALWirelessStatus [] PROGMEM = "AL Wireless Sts";
+const char pstrUsageALKeyboardLayout [] PROGMEM = "AL Kbd Layout";
+const char pstrUsageALVirusProtection [] PROGMEM = "AL Vir Protect";
+const char pstrUsageALEncryption [] PROGMEM = "AL Encrypt";
+const char pstrUsageALScreenSaver [] PROGMEM = "AL Scr Sav";
+const char pstrUsageALAlarms [] PROGMEM = "AL Alarms";
+const char pstrUsageALClock [] PROGMEM = "AL Clock";
+const char pstrUsageALFileBrowser [] PROGMEM = "AL File Brow";
+const char pstrUsageALPowerStatus [] PROGMEM = "AL Pwr Sts";
+const char pstrUsageALImageBrowser [] PROGMEM = "AL Img Brow";
+const char pstrUsageALAudioBrowser [] PROGMEM = "AL Aud Brow";
+const char pstrUsageALMovieBrowser [] PROGMEM = "AL Mov Brow";
+const char pstrUsageALDigitalRightsManager [] PROGMEM = "AL Dig Rights Mgr";
+const char pstrUsageALDigitalWallet [] PROGMEM = "AL Dig Wallet";
+const char pstrUsageALInstantMessaging [] PROGMEM = "AL Inst Msg";
+const char pstrUsageALOEMFeaturesBrowser [] PROGMEM = "AL OEM Tips Brow";
+const char pstrUsageALOEMHelp [] PROGMEM = "AL OEM Hlp";
+const char pstrUsageALOnlineCommunity [] PROGMEM = "AL Online Com";
+const char pstrUsageALEntertainmentContentBrow [] PROGMEM = "AL Ent Cont Brow";
+const char pstrUsageALOnlineShoppingBrowser [] PROGMEM = "AL Online Shop Brow";
+const char pstrUsageALSmartCardInfoHelp [] PROGMEM = "AL SmartCard Inf";
+const char pstrUsageALMarketMonitorFinBrowser [] PROGMEM = "AL Market Brow";
+const char pstrUsageALCustomCorpNewsBrowser [] PROGMEM = "AL Cust Corp News Brow";
+const char pstrUsageALOnlineActivityBrowser [] PROGMEM = "AL Online Act Brow";
+const char pstrUsageALResearchSearchBrowser [] PROGMEM = "AL Search Brow";
+const char pstrUsageALAudioPlayer [] PROGMEM = "AL Aud Player";
+const char pstrUsageGenericGUIAppControls [] PROGMEM = "Gen GUI App Ctrl";
+const char pstrUsageACNew [] PROGMEM = "AC New";
+const char pstrUsageACOpen [] PROGMEM = "AC Open";
+const char pstrUsageACClose [] PROGMEM = "AC Close";
+const char pstrUsageACExit [] PROGMEM = "AC Exit";
+const char pstrUsageACMaximize [] PROGMEM = "AC Max";
+const char pstrUsageACMinimize [] PROGMEM = "AC Min";
+const char pstrUsageACSave [] PROGMEM = "AC Save";
+const char pstrUsageACPrint [] PROGMEM = "AC Print";
+const char pstrUsageACProperties [] PROGMEM = "AC Prop";
+const char pstrUsageACUndo [] PROGMEM = "AC Undo";
+const char pstrUsageACCopy [] PROGMEM = "AC Copy";
+const char pstrUsageACCut [] PROGMEM = "AC Cut";
+const char pstrUsageACPaste [] PROGMEM = "AC Paste";
+const char pstrUsageACSelectAll [] PROGMEM = "AC Sel All";
+const char pstrUsageACFind [] PROGMEM = "AC Find";
+const char pstrUsageACFindAndReplace [] PROGMEM = "AC Find/Replace";
+const char pstrUsageACSearch [] PROGMEM = "AC Search";
+const char pstrUsageACGoto [] PROGMEM = "AC Goto";
+const char pstrUsageACHome [] PROGMEM = "AC Home";
+const char pstrUsageACBack [] PROGMEM = "AC Back";
+const char pstrUsageACForward [] PROGMEM = "AC Fwd";
+const char pstrUsageACStop [] PROGMEM = "AC Stop";
+const char pstrUsageACRefresh [] PROGMEM = "AC Refresh";
+const char pstrUsageACPreviousLink [] PROGMEM = "AC Prev Link";
+const char pstrUsageACNextLink [] PROGMEM = "AC Next Link";
+const char pstrUsageACBookmarks [] PROGMEM = "AC Bkmarks";
+const char pstrUsageACHistory [] PROGMEM = "AC Hist";
+const char pstrUsageACSubscriptions [] PROGMEM = "AC Subscr";
+const char pstrUsageACZoomIn [] PROGMEM = "AC Zoom In";
+const char pstrUsageACZoomOut [] PROGMEM = "AC Zoom Out";
+const char pstrUsageACZoom [] PROGMEM = "AC Zoom";
+const char pstrUsageACFullScreenView [] PROGMEM = "AC Full Scr";
+const char pstrUsageACNormalView [] PROGMEM = "AC Norm View";
+const char pstrUsageACViewToggle [] PROGMEM = "AC View Tgl";
+const char pstrUsageACScrollUp [] PROGMEM = "AC Scroll Up";
+const char pstrUsageACScrollDown [] PROGMEM = "AC Scroll Down";
+const char pstrUsageACScroll [] PROGMEM = "AC Scroll";
+const char pstrUsageACPanLeft [] PROGMEM = "AC Pan Left";
+const char pstrUsageACPanRight [] PROGMEM = "AC Pan Right";
+const char pstrUsageACPan [] PROGMEM = "AC Pan";
+const char pstrUsageACNewWindow [] PROGMEM = "AC New Wnd";
+const char pstrUsageACTileHoriz [] PROGMEM = "AC Tile Horiz";
+const char pstrUsageACTileVert [] PROGMEM = "AC Tile Vert";
+const char pstrUsageACFormat [] PROGMEM = "AC Frmt";
+const char pstrUsageACEdit [] PROGMEM = "AC Edit";
+const char pstrUsageACBold [] PROGMEM = "AC Bold";
+const char pstrUsageACItalics [] PROGMEM = "AC Ital";
+const char pstrUsageACUnderline [] PROGMEM = "AC Under";
+const char pstrUsageACStrikethrough [] PROGMEM = "AC Strike";
+const char pstrUsageACSubscript [] PROGMEM = "AC Sub";
+const char pstrUsageACSuperscript [] PROGMEM = "AC Super";
+const char pstrUsageACAllCaps [] PROGMEM = "AC All Caps";
+const char pstrUsageACRotate [] PROGMEM = "AC Rotate";
+const char pstrUsageACResize [] PROGMEM = "AC Resize";
+const char pstrUsageACFlipHorizontal [] PROGMEM = "AC Flp H";
+const char pstrUsageACFlipVertical [] PROGMEM = "AC Flp V";
+const char pstrUsageACMirrorHorizontal [] PROGMEM = "AC Mir H";
+const char pstrUsageACMirrorVertical [] PROGMEM = "AC Mir V";
+const char pstrUsageACFontSelect [] PROGMEM = "AC Fnt Sel";
+const char pstrUsageACFontColor [] PROGMEM = "AC Fnt Clr";
+const char pstrUsageACFontSize [] PROGMEM = "AC Fnt Size";
+const char pstrUsageACJustifyLeft [] PROGMEM = "AC Just Left";
+const char pstrUsageACJustifyCenterH [] PROGMEM = "AC Just Cent H";
+const char pstrUsageACJustifyRight [] PROGMEM = "AC Just Right";
+const char pstrUsageACJustifyBlockH [] PROGMEM = "AC Just Block H";
+const char pstrUsageACJustifyTop [] PROGMEM = "AC Just Top";
+const char pstrUsageACJustifyCenterV [] PROGMEM = "AC Just Cent V";
+const char pstrUsageACJustifyBottom [] PROGMEM = "AC Just Bot";
+const char pstrUsageACJustifyBlockV [] PROGMEM = "AC Just Block V";
+const char pstrUsageACIndentDecrease [] PROGMEM = "AC Indent Dec";
+const char pstrUsageACIndentIncrease [] PROGMEM = "AC Indent Inc";
+const char pstrUsageACNumberedList [] PROGMEM = "AC Num List";
+const char pstrUsageACRestartNumbering [] PROGMEM = "AC Res Num";
+const char pstrUsageACBulletedList [] PROGMEM = "AC Blt List";
+const char pstrUsageACPromote [] PROGMEM = "AC Promote";
+const char pstrUsageACDemote [] PROGMEM = "AC Demote";
+const char pstrUsageACYes [] PROGMEM = "AC Yes";
+const char pstrUsageACNo [] PROGMEM = "AC No";
+const char pstrUsageACCancel [] PROGMEM = "AC Cancel";
+const char pstrUsageACCatalog [] PROGMEM = "AC Ctlg";
+const char pstrUsageACBuyChkout [] PROGMEM = "AC Buy";
+const char pstrUsageACAddToCart [] PROGMEM = "AC Add2Cart";
+const char pstrUsageACExpand [] PROGMEM = "AC Xpnd";
+const char pstrUsageACExpandAll [] PROGMEM = "AC Xpand All";
+const char pstrUsageACCollapse [] PROGMEM = "AC Collapse";
+const char pstrUsageACCollapseAll [] PROGMEM = "AC Collapse All";
+const char pstrUsageACPrintPreview [] PROGMEM = "AC Prn Prevw";
+const char pstrUsageACPasteSpecial [] PROGMEM = "AC Paste Spec";
+const char pstrUsageACInsertMode [] PROGMEM = "AC Ins Mode";
+const char pstrUsageACDelete [] PROGMEM = "AC Del";
+const char pstrUsageACLock [] PROGMEM = "AC Lock";
+const char pstrUsageACUnlock [] PROGMEM = "AC Unlock";
+const char pstrUsageACProtect [] PROGMEM = "AC Prot";
+const char pstrUsageACUnprotect [] PROGMEM = "AC Unprot";
+const char pstrUsageACAttachComment [] PROGMEM = "AC Attach Cmnt";
+const char pstrUsageACDeleteComment [] PROGMEM = "AC Del Cmnt";
+const char pstrUsageACViewComment [] PROGMEM = "AC View Cmnt";
+const char pstrUsageACSelectWord [] PROGMEM = "AC Sel Word";
+const char pstrUsageACSelectSentence [] PROGMEM = "AC Sel Sntc";
+const char pstrUsageACSelectParagraph [] PROGMEM = "AC Sel Para";
+const char pstrUsageACSelectColumn [] PROGMEM = "AC Sel Col";
+const char pstrUsageACSelectRow [] PROGMEM = "AC Sel Row";
+const char pstrUsageACSelectTable [] PROGMEM = "AC Sel Tbl";
+const char pstrUsageACSelectObject [] PROGMEM = "AC Sel Obj";
+const char pstrUsageACRedoRepeat [] PROGMEM = "AC Redo";
+const char pstrUsageACSort [] PROGMEM = "AC Sort";
+const char pstrUsageACSortAscending [] PROGMEM = "AC Sort Asc";
+const char pstrUsageACSortDescending [] PROGMEM = "AC Sort Desc";
+const char pstrUsageACFilter [] PROGMEM = "AC Filt";
+const char pstrUsageACSetClock [] PROGMEM = "AC Set Clk";
+const char pstrUsageACViewClock [] PROGMEM = "AC View Clk";
+const char pstrUsageACSelectTimeZone [] PROGMEM = "AC Sel Time Z";
+const char pstrUsageACEditTimeZone [] PROGMEM = "AC Edt Time Z";
+const char pstrUsageACSetAlarm [] PROGMEM = "AC Set Alm";
+const char pstrUsageACClearAlarm [] PROGMEM = "AC Clr Alm";
+const char pstrUsageACSnoozeAlarm [] PROGMEM = "AC Snz Alm";
+const char pstrUsageACResetAlarm [] PROGMEM = "AC Rst Alm";
+const char pstrUsageACSyncronize [] PROGMEM = "AC Sync";
+const char pstrUsageACSendReceive [] PROGMEM = "AC Snd/Rcv";
+const char pstrUsageACSendTo [] PROGMEM = "AC Snd To";
+const char pstrUsageACReply [] PROGMEM = "AC Reply";
+const char pstrUsageACReplyAll [] PROGMEM = "AC Reply All";
+const char pstrUsageACForwardMessage [] PROGMEM = "AC Fwd Msg";
+const char pstrUsageACSend [] PROGMEM = "AC Snd";
+const char pstrUsageACAttachFile [] PROGMEM = "AC Att File";
+const char pstrUsageACUpload [] PROGMEM = "AC Upld";
+const char pstrUsageACDownload [] PROGMEM = "AC Dnld";
+const char pstrUsageACSetBorders [] PROGMEM = "AC Set Brd";
+const char pstrUsageACInsertRow [] PROGMEM = "AC Ins Row";
+const char pstrUsageACInsertColumn [] PROGMEM = "AC Ins Col";
+const char pstrUsageACInsertFile [] PROGMEM = "AC Ins File";
+const char pstrUsageACInsertPicture [] PROGMEM = "AC Ins Pic";
+const char pstrUsageACInsertObject [] PROGMEM = "AC Ins Obj";
+const char pstrUsageACInsertSymbol [] PROGMEM = "AC Ins Sym";
+const char pstrUsageACSaveAndClose [] PROGMEM = "AC Sav&Cls";
+const char pstrUsageACRename [] PROGMEM = "AC Rename";
+const char pstrUsageACMerge [] PROGMEM = "AC Merge";
+const char pstrUsageACSplit [] PROGMEM = "AC Split";
+const char pstrUsageACDistributeHorizontaly [] PROGMEM = "AC Dist Hor";
+const char pstrUsageACDistributeVerticaly [] PROGMEM = "AC Dist Ver";
+
+// Digitaizers
+const char pstrUsageDigitizer [] PROGMEM = "Digitizer";
+const char pstrUsagePen [] PROGMEM = "Pen";
+const char pstrUsageLightPen [] PROGMEM = "Light Pen";
+const char pstrUsageTouchScreen [] PROGMEM = "Touch Scr";
+const char pstrUsageTouchPad [] PROGMEM = "Touch Pad";
+const char pstrUsageWhiteBoard [] PROGMEM = "White Brd";
+const char pstrUsageCoordinateMeasuringMachine [] PROGMEM = "Coord Meas Mach";
+const char pstrUsage3DDigitizer [] PROGMEM = "3D Dgtz";
+const char pstrUsageStereoPlotter [] PROGMEM = "Stereo Plot";
+const char pstrUsageArticulatedArm [] PROGMEM = "Art Arm";
+const char pstrUsageArmature [] PROGMEM = "Armature";
+const char pstrUsageMultiplePointDigitizer [] PROGMEM = "Multi Point Dgtz";
+const char pstrUsageFreeSpaceWand [] PROGMEM = "Free Space Wand";
+const char pstrUsageStylus [] PROGMEM = "Stylus";
+const char pstrUsagePuck [] PROGMEM = "Puck";
+const char pstrUsageFinger [] PROGMEM = "Finger";
+const char pstrUsageTipPressure [] PROGMEM = "Tip Press";
+const char pstrUsageBarrelPressure [] PROGMEM = "Brl Press";
+const char pstrUsageInRange [] PROGMEM = "In Range";
+const char pstrUsageTouch [] PROGMEM = "Touch";
+const char pstrUsageUntouch [] PROGMEM = "Untouch";
+const char pstrUsageTap [] PROGMEM = "Tap";
+const char pstrUsageQuality [] PROGMEM = "Qlty";
+const char pstrUsageDataValid [] PROGMEM = "Data Valid";
+const char pstrUsageTransducerIndex [] PROGMEM = "Transducer Ind";
+const char pstrUsageTabletFunctionKeys [] PROGMEM = "Tabl Func Keys";
+const char pstrUsageProgramChangeKeys [] PROGMEM = "Pgm Chng Keys";
+//const char pstrUsageBatteryStrength [] PROGMEM = "Bat Strength";
+const char pstrUsageInvert [] PROGMEM = "Invert";
+const char pstrUsageXTilt [] PROGMEM = "X Tilt";
+const char pstrUsageYTilt [] PROGMEM = "Y Tilt";
+const char pstrUsageAzimuth [] PROGMEM = "Azimuth";
+const char pstrUsageAltitude [] PROGMEM = "Altitude";
+const char pstrUsageTwist [] PROGMEM = "Twist";
+const char pstrUsageTipSwitch [] PROGMEM = "Tip Sw";
+const char pstrUsageSecondaryTipSwitch [] PROGMEM = "Scnd Tip Sw";
+const char pstrUsageBarrelSwitch [] PROGMEM = "Brl Sw";
+const char pstrUsageEraser [] PROGMEM = "Eraser";
+const char pstrUsageTabletPick [] PROGMEM = "Tbl Pick";
+
+// Alphanumeric Display Page
+const char pstrUsageAlphanumericDisplay [] PROGMEM = "Alphanum Disp";
+const char pstrUsageBitmappedDisplay [] PROGMEM = "Bmp Disp";
+const char pstrUsageDisplayAttributesReport [] PROGMEM = "Disp Attr Rpt";
+const char pstrUsageASCIICharacterSet [] PROGMEM = "ASCII chset";
+const char pstrUsageDataReadBack [] PROGMEM = "Data Rd Back";
+const char pstrUsageFontReadBack [] PROGMEM = "Fnt Rd Back";
+const char pstrUsageDisplayControlReport [] PROGMEM = "Disp Ctrl Rpt";
+const char pstrUsageClearDisplay [] PROGMEM = "Clr Disp";
+//const char pstrUsageDisplayEnable [] PROGMEM = "Disp Enbl";
+const char pstrUsageScreenSaverDelay [] PROGMEM = "Scr Sav Delay";
+const char pstrUsageScreenSaverEnable [] PROGMEM = "Scr Sav Enbl";
+const char pstrUsageVerticalScroll [] PROGMEM = "V Scroll";
+const char pstrUsageHorizontalScroll [] PROGMEM = "H Scroll";
+const char pstrUsageCharacterReport [] PROGMEM = "Char Rpt";
+const char pstrUsageDisplayData [] PROGMEM = "Disp Data";
+const char pstrUsageDisplayStatus [] PROGMEM = "Disp Stat";
+const char pstrUsageStatusNotReady [] PROGMEM = "Stat !Ready";
+const char pstrUsageStatusReady [] PROGMEM = "Stat Ready";
+const char pstrUsageErrorNotALoadableCharacter [] PROGMEM = "Err Not Ld Char";
+const char pstrUsageErrorFotDataCanNotBeRead [] PROGMEM = "Fnt Data Rd Err";
+const char pstrUsageCursorPositionReport [] PROGMEM = "Cur Pos Rpt";
+const char pstrUsageRow [] PROGMEM = "Row";
+const char pstrUsageColumn [] PROGMEM = "Col";
+const char pstrUsageRows [] PROGMEM = "Rows";
+const char pstrUsageColumns [] PROGMEM = "Cols";
+const char pstrUsageCursorPixelPosition [] PROGMEM = "Cur Pix Pos";
+const char pstrUsageCursorMode [] PROGMEM = "Cur Mode";
+const char pstrUsageCursorEnable [] PROGMEM = "Cur Enbl";
+const char pstrUsageCursorBlink [] PROGMEM = "Cur Blnk";
+const char pstrUsageFontReport [] PROGMEM = "Fnt Rpt";
+const char pstrUsageFontData [] PROGMEM = "Fnt Data";
+const char pstrUsageCharacterWidth [] PROGMEM = "Char Wdth";
+const char pstrUsageCharacterHeight [] PROGMEM = "Char Hght";
+const char pstrUsageCharacterSpacingHorizontal [] PROGMEM = "Char Space H";
+const char pstrUsageCharacterSpacingVertical [] PROGMEM = "Char Space V";
+const char pstrUsageUnicodeCharset [] PROGMEM = "Unicode Char";
+const char pstrUsageFont7Segment [] PROGMEM = "Fnt 7-seg";
+const char pstrUsage7SegmentDirectMap [] PROGMEM = "7-seg map";
+const char pstrUsageFont14Segment [] PROGMEM = "Fnt 14-seg";
+const char pstrUsage14SegmentDirectMap [] PROGMEM = "14-seg map";
+const char pstrUsageDisplayBrightness [] PROGMEM = "Disp Bright";
+const char pstrUsageDisplayContrast [] PROGMEM = "Disp Cntrst";
+const char pstrUsageCharacterAttribute [] PROGMEM = "Char Attr";
+const char pstrUsageAttributeReadback [] PROGMEM = "Attr Readbk";
+const char pstrUsageAttributeData [] PROGMEM = "Attr Data";
+const char pstrUsageCharAttributeEnhance [] PROGMEM = "Char Attr Enh";
+const char pstrUsageCharAttributeUnderline [] PROGMEM = "Char Attr Undl";
+const char pstrUsageCharAttributeBlink [] PROGMEM = "Char Attr Blnk";
+const char pstrUsageBitmapSizeX [] PROGMEM = "Bmp Size X";
+const char pstrUsageBitmapSizeY [] PROGMEM = "Bmp Size Y";
+const char pstrUsageBitDepthFormat [] PROGMEM = "Bit Dpth Fmt";
+const char pstrUsageDisplayOrientation [] PROGMEM = "Disp Ornt";
+const char pstrUsagePaletteReport [] PROGMEM = "Pal Rpt";
+const char pstrUsagePaletteDataSize [] PROGMEM = "Pal Data Size";
+const char pstrUsagePaletteDataOffset [] PROGMEM = "Pal Data Off";
+const char pstrUsagePaletteData [] PROGMEM = "Pal Data";
+const char pstrUsageBlitReport [] PROGMEM = "Blit Rpt";
+const char pstrUsageBlitRectangleX1 [] PROGMEM = "Blit Rect X1";
+const char pstrUsageBlitRectangleY1 [] PROGMEM = "Blit Rect Y1";
+const char pstrUsageBlitRectangleX2 [] PROGMEM = "Blit Rect X2";
+const char pstrUsageBlitRectangleY2 [] PROGMEM = "Blit Rect Y2";
+const char pstrUsageBlitData [] PROGMEM = "Blit Data";
+const char pstrUsageSoftButton [] PROGMEM = "Soft Btn";
+const char pstrUsageSoftButtonID [] PROGMEM = "Soft Btn ID";
+const char pstrUsageSoftButtonSide [] PROGMEM = "Soft Btn Side";
+const char pstrUsageSoftButtonOffset1 [] PROGMEM = "Soft Btn Off1";
+const char pstrUsageSoftButtonOffset2 [] PROGMEM = "Soft Btn Off2";
+const char pstrUsageSoftButtonReport [] PROGMEM = "Soft Btn Rpt";
+
+// Medical Instrument Page
+const char pstrUsageMedicalUltrasound [] PROGMEM = "Med Ultrasnd";
+const char pstrUsageVCRAcquisition [] PROGMEM = "VCR/Acq";
+const char pstrUsageFreezeThaw [] PROGMEM = "Freeze";
+const char pstrUsageClipStore [] PROGMEM = "Clip Store";
+const char pstrUsageUpdate [] PROGMEM = "Update";
+const char pstrUsageNext [] PROGMEM = "Next";
+const char pstrUsageSave [] PROGMEM = "Save";
+const char pstrUsagePrint [] PROGMEM = "Print";
+const char pstrUsageMicrophoneEnable [] PROGMEM = "Mic Enbl";
+const char pstrUsageCine [] PROGMEM = "Cine";
+const char pstrUsageTransmitPower [] PROGMEM = "Trans Pwr";
+//const char pstrUsageVolume [] PROGMEM = "Vol";
+const char pstrUsageFocus [] PROGMEM = "Focus";
+const char pstrUsageDepth [] PROGMEM = "Depth";
+const char pstrUsageSoftStepPrimary [] PROGMEM = "Soft Stp-Pri";
+const char pstrUsageSoftStepSecondary [] PROGMEM = "Soft Stp-Sec";
+const char pstrUsageDepthGainCompensation [] PROGMEM = "Dpth Gain Comp";
+const char pstrUsageZoomSelect [] PROGMEM = "Zoom Sel";
+const char pstrUsageZoomAdjust [] PROGMEM = "Zoom Adj";
+const char pstrUsageSpectralDopplerModeSelect [] PROGMEM = "Spec Dop Mode Sel";
+const char pstrUsageSpectralDopplerModeAdjust [] PROGMEM = "Spec Dop Mode Adj";
+const char pstrUsageColorDopplerModeSelect [] PROGMEM = "Color Dop Mode Sel";
+const char pstrUsageColorDopplerModeAdjust [] PROGMEM = "Color Dop Mode Adj";
+const char pstrUsageMotionModeSelect [] PROGMEM = "Motion Mode Sel";
+const char pstrUsageMotionModeAdjust [] PROGMEM = "Motion Mode Adj";
+const char pstrUsage2DModeSelect [] PROGMEM = "2D Mode Sel";
+const char pstrUsage2DModeAdjust [] PROGMEM = "2D Mode Adj";
+const char pstrUsageSoftControlSelect [] PROGMEM = "Soft Ctrl Sel";
+const char pstrUsageSoftControlAdjust [] PROGMEM = "Soft Ctrl Adj";
+
+//extern const char *usagePageTitles0[15];
+//const char *usagePageTitles1[];
+//const char *genDesktopTitles0[];
+//const char *genDesktopTitles1[];
+//const char *genDesktopTitles2[];
+//const char *genDesktopTitles3[];
+//const char *genDesktopTitles4[];
+//const char *simuTitles0[];
+//const char *simuTitles1[];
+//const char *simuTitles2[];
+//const char *vrTitles0[];
+//const char *vrTitles1[];
+//const char *sportsCtrlTitles0[];
+//const char *sportsCtrlTitles1[];
+//const char *sportsCtrlTitles2[];
+//const char *gameTitles0[];
+//const char *gameTitles1[];
+//const char *genDevCtrlTitles[];
+//const char *ledTitles[];
+//const char *telTitles0[];
+//const char *telTitles1[];
+//const char *telTitles2[];
+//const char *telTitles3[];
+//const char *telTitles4[];
+//const char *telTitles5[];
+//const char *consTitles0[];
+//const char *consTitles1[];
+//const char *consTitles2[];
+//const char *consTitles3[];
+//const char *consTitles4[];
+//const char *consTitles5[];
+//const char *consTitles6[];
+//const char *consTitles7[];
+//const char *consTitles8[];
+//const char *consTitles9[];
+//const char *consTitlesA[];
+//const char *consTitlesB[];
+//const char *consTitlesC[];
+//const char *consTitlesD[];
+//const char *consTitlesE[];
+//const char *digitTitles0[];
+//const char *digitTitles1[];
+//const char *digitTitles2[];
+//const char *aplphanumTitles0[];
+//const char *aplphanumTitles1[];
+//const char *aplphanumTitles2[];
+//const char *medInstrTitles0[];
+//const char *medInstrTitles1[];
+//const char *medInstrTitles2[];
+//const char *medInstrTitles3[];
+//const char *medInstrTitles4[];
+
+#endif //__HIDUSAGESTR_H__
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hidusagetitlearrays.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hidusagetitlearrays.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ee233002c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/hidusagetitlearrays.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,1048 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+#if !defined(__HIDUSAGETITLEARRAYS_H__)
+#define __HIDUSAGETITLEARRAYS_H__
+
+#include "hidusagestr.h"
+
+// This is here why?
+
+//const char *usagePageTitles0[]	PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsagePageGenericDesktopControls	,
+//	pstrUsagePageSimulationControls		,
+//	pstrUsagePageVRControls				,
+//	pstrUsagePageSportControls			,
+//	pstrUsagePageGameControls			,
+//	pstrUsagePageGenericDeviceControls	,
+//	pstrUsagePageKeyboardKeypad			,
+//	pstrUsagePageLEDs					,
+//	pstrUsagePageButton					,
+//	pstrUsagePageOrdinal				,
+//	pstrUsagePageTelephone				,
+//	pstrUsagePageConsumer				,
+//	pstrUsagePageDigitizer				,
+//	pstrUsagePagePID					,
+//	pstrUsagePageUnicode
+//};
+//
+//const char *usagePageTitles1[]	PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsagePageBarCodeScanner			,
+//	pstrUsagePageScale					,
+//	pstrUsagePageMSRDevices				,
+//	pstrUsagePagePointOfSale			,
+//	pstrUsagePageCameraControl			,
+//	pstrUsagePageArcade
+//};
+//const char *genDesktopTitles0[] PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsagePointer					,
+//	pstrUsageMouse						,
+//	pstrUsageJoystick					,
+//	pstrUsageGamePad					,
+//	pstrUsageKeyboard					,
+//	pstrUsageKeypad						,
+//	pstrUsageMultiAxisController		,
+//	pstrUsageTabletPCSystemControls
+//
+//};
+//const char *genDesktopTitles1[] PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsageX							,
+//	pstrUsageY							,
+//	pstrUsageZ							,
+//	pstrUsageRx							,
+//	pstrUsageRy							,
+//	pstrUsageRz							,
+//	pstrUsageSlider						,
+//	pstrUsageDial						,
+//	pstrUsageWheel						,
+//	pstrUsageHatSwitch					,
+//	pstrUsageCountedBuffer				,
+//	pstrUsageByteCount					,
+//	pstrUsageMotionWakeup				,
+//	pstrUsageStart						,
+//	pstrUsageSelect						,
+//	pstrUsagePageReserved				,
+//	pstrUsageVx							,
+//	pstrUsageVy							,
+//	pstrUsageVz							,
+//	pstrUsageVbrx						,
+//	pstrUsageVbry						,
+//	pstrUsageVbrz						,
+//	pstrUsageVno						,
+//	pstrUsageFeatureNotification		,
+//	pstrUsageResolutionMultiplier
+//};
+//const char *genDesktopTitles2[] PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsageSystemControl		,
+//	pstrUsageSystemPowerDown	,
+//	pstrUsageSystemSleep		,
+//	pstrUsageSystemWakeup		,
+//	pstrUsageSystemContextMenu	,
+//	pstrUsageSystemMainMenu		,
+//	pstrUsageSystemAppMenu		,
+//	pstrUsageSystemMenuHelp		,
+//	pstrUsageSystemMenuExit		,
+//	pstrUsageSystemMenuSelect	,
+//	pstrUsageSystemMenuRight	,
+//	pstrUsageSystemMenuLeft		,
+//	pstrUsageSystemMenuUp		,
+//	pstrUsageSystemMenuDown		,
+//	pstrUsageSystemColdRestart	,
+//	pstrUsageSystemWarmRestart	,
+//	pstrUsageDPadUp				,
+//	pstrUsageDPadDown			,
+//	pstrUsageDPadRight			,
+//	pstrUsageDPadLeft
+//};
+//const char *genDesktopTitles3[] PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsageSystemDock				,
+//	pstrUsageSystemUndock			,
+//	pstrUsageSystemSetup			,
+//	pstrUsageSystemBreak			,
+//	pstrUsageSystemDebuggerBreak	,
+//	pstrUsageApplicationBreak		,
+//	pstrUsageApplicationDebuggerBreak,
+//	pstrUsageSystemSpeakerMute		,
+//	pstrUsageSystemHibernate
+//};
+//const char *genDesktopTitles4[] PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsageSystemDisplayInvert		,
+//	pstrUsageSystemDisplayInternal		,
+//	pstrUsageSystemDisplayExternal		,
+//	pstrUsageSystemDisplayBoth			,
+//	pstrUsageSystemDisplayDual			,
+//	pstrUsageSystemDisplayToggleIntExt	,
+//	pstrUsageSystemDisplaySwapPriSec	,
+//	pstrUsageSystemDisplayLCDAutoscale
+//};
+//const char *simuTitles0[] PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsageFlightSimulationDevice		,
+//	pstrUsageAutomobileSimulationDevice	,
+//	pstrUsageTankSimulationDevice		,
+//	pstrUsageSpaceshipSimulationDevice	,
+//	pstrUsageSubmarineSimulationDevice	,
+//	pstrUsageSailingSimulationDevice	,
+//	pstrUsageMotocicleSimulationDevice	,
+//	pstrUsageSportsSimulationDevice		,
+//	pstrUsageAirplaneSimulationDevice	,
+//	pstrUsageHelicopterSimulationDevice	,
+//	pstrUsageMagicCarpetSimulationDevice,
+//	pstrUsageBicycleSimulationDevice
+//};
+//const char *simuTitles1[] PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsageFlightControlStick			,
+//	pstrUsageFlightStick				,
+//	pstrUsageCyclicControl				,
+//	pstrUsageCyclicTrim					,
+//	pstrUsageFlightYoke					,
+//	pstrUsageTrackControl
+//};
+//const char *simuTitles2[] PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsageAileron					,
+//	pstrUsageAileronTrim				,
+//	pstrUsageAntiTorqueControl			,
+//	pstrUsageAutopilotEnable			,
+//	pstrUsageChaffRelease				,
+//	pstrUsageCollectiveControl			,
+//	pstrUsageDiveBrake					,
+//	pstrUsageElectronicCountermeasures	,
+//	pstrUsageElevator					,
+//	pstrUsageElevatorTrim				,
+//	pstrUsageRudder						,
+//	pstrUsageThrottle					,
+//	pstrUsageFlightCommunications		,
+//	pstrUsageFlareRelease				,
+//	pstrUsageLandingGear				,
+//	pstrUsageToeBrake					,
+//	pstrUsageTrigger					,
+//	pstrUsageWeaponsArm					,
+//	pstrUsageWeaponsSelect				,
+//	pstrUsageWingFlaps					,
+//	pstrUsageAccelerator				,
+//	pstrUsageBrake						,
+//	pstrUsageClutch						,
+//	pstrUsageShifter					,
+//	pstrUsageSteering					,
+//	pstrUsageTurretDirection			,
+//	pstrUsageBarrelElevation			,
+//	pstrUsageDivePlane					,
+//	pstrUsageBallast					,
+//	pstrUsageBicycleCrank				,
+//	pstrUsageHandleBars					,
+//	pstrUsageFrontBrake					,
+//	pstrUsageRearBrake
+//};
+//const char *vrTitles0[]	PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsageBelt				,
+//	pstrUsageBodySuit			,
+//	pstrUsageFlexor				,
+//	pstrUsageGlove				,
+//	pstrUsageHeadTracker		,
+//	pstrUsageHeadMountedDisplay	,
+//	pstrUsageHandTracker		,
+//	pstrUsageOculometer			,
+//	pstrUsageVest				,
+//	pstrUsageAnimatronicDevice
+//};
+//const char *vrTitles1[]	PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsageStereoEnable	,
+//	pstrUsageDisplayEnable
+//};
+//const char *sportsCtrlTitles0[]	PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsageBaseballBat				,
+//	pstrUsageGolfClub					,
+//	pstrUsageRowingMachine				,
+//	pstrUsageTreadmill
+//};
+//const char *sportsCtrlTitles1[]	PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsageOar						,
+//	pstrUsageSlope						,
+//	pstrUsageRate						,
+//	pstrUsageStickSpeed					,
+//	pstrUsageStickFaceAngle				,
+//	pstrUsageStickHeelToe				,
+//	pstrUsageStickFollowThough			,
+//	pstrUsageStickTempo					,
+//	pstrUsageStickType					,
+//	pstrUsageStickHeight
+//};
+//const char *sportsCtrlTitles2[]	PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsagePutter						,
+//	pstrUsage1Iron						,
+//	pstrUsage2Iron						,
+//	pstrUsage3Iron						,
+//	pstrUsage4Iron						,
+//	pstrUsage5Iron						,
+//	pstrUsage6Iron						,
+//	pstrUsage7Iron						,
+//	pstrUsage8Iron						,
+//	pstrUsage9Iron						,
+//	pstrUsage10Iron						,
+//	pstrUsage11Iron						,
+//	pstrUsageSandWedge					,
+//	pstrUsageLoftWedge					,
+//	pstrUsagePowerWedge					,
+//	pstrUsage1Wood						,
+//	pstrUsage3Wood						,
+//	pstrUsage5Wood						,
+//	pstrUsage7Wood						,
+//	pstrUsage9Wood
+//};
+//const char *gameTitles0[] PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsage3DGameController		,
+//	pstrUsagePinballDevice			,
+//	pstrUsageGunDevice
+//};
+//const char *gameTitles1[] PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsagePointOfView			,
+//	pstrUsageTurnRightLeft			,
+//	pstrUsagePitchForwardBackward	,
+//	pstrUsageRollRightLeft			,
+//	pstrUsageMoveRightLeft			,
+//	pstrUsageMoveForwardBackward	,
+//	pstrUsageMoveUpDown				,
+//	pstrUsageLeanRightLeft			,
+//	pstrUsageLeanForwardBackward	,
+//	pstrUsageHeightOfPOV			,
+//	pstrUsageFlipper				,
+//	pstrUsageSecondaryFlipper		,
+//	pstrUsageBump					,
+//	pstrUsageNewGame				,
+//	pstrUsageShootBall				,
+//	pstrUsagePlayer					,
+//	pstrUsageGunBolt				,
+//	pstrUsageGunClip				,
+//	pstrUsageGunSelector			,
+//	pstrUsageGunSingleShot			,
+//	pstrUsageGunBurst				,
+//	pstrUsageGunAutomatic			,
+//	pstrUsageGunSafety				,
+//	pstrUsageGamepadFireJump		,
+//	pstrUsageGamepadTrigger
+//};
+//const char *genDevCtrlTitles[] PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsageBatteryStrength,
+//	pstrUsageWirelessChannel,
+//	pstrUsageWirelessID,
+//	pstrUsageDiscoverWirelessControl,
+//	pstrUsageSecurityCodeCharEntered,
+//	pstrUsageSecurityCodeCharErased,
+//	pstrUsageSecurityCodeCleared
+//};
+//const char *ledTitles[] PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsageNumLock						,
+//	pstrUsageCapsLock					,
+//	pstrUsageScrollLock					,
+//	pstrUsageCompose					,
+//	pstrUsageKana						,
+//	pstrUsagePower						,
+//	pstrUsageShift						,
+//	pstrUsageDoNotDisturb				,
+//	pstrUsageMute						,
+//	pstrUsageToneEnable					,
+//	pstrUsageHighCutFilter				,
+//	pstrUsageLowCutFilter				,
+//	pstrUsageEqualizerEnable			,
+//	pstrUsageSoundFieldOn				,
+//	pstrUsageSurroundOn					,
+//	pstrUsageRepeat						,
+//	pstrUsageStereo						,
+//	pstrUsageSamplingRateDetect			,
+//	pstrUsageSpinning					,
+//	pstrUsageCAV						,
+//	pstrUsageCLV						,
+//	pstrUsageRecordingFormatDetect		,
+//	pstrUsageOffHook					,
+//	pstrUsageRing						,
+//	pstrUsageMessageWaiting				,
+//	pstrUsageDataMode					,
+//	pstrUsageBatteryOperation			,
+//	pstrUsageBatteryOK					,
+//	pstrUsageBatteryLow					,
+//	pstrUsageSpeaker					,
+//	pstrUsageHeadSet					,
+//	pstrUsageHold						,
+//	pstrUsageMicrophone					,
+//	pstrUsageCoverage					,
+//	pstrUsageNightMode					,
+//	pstrUsageSendCalls					,
+//	pstrUsageCallPickup					,
+//	pstrUsageConference					,
+//	pstrUsageStandBy					,
+//	pstrUsageCameraOn					,
+//	pstrUsageCameraOff					,
+//	pstrUsageOnLine						,
+//	pstrUsageOffLine					,
+//	pstrUsageBusy						,
+//	pstrUsageReady						,
+//	pstrUsagePaperOut					,
+//	pstrUsagePaperJam					,
+//	pstrUsageRemote						,
+//	pstrUsageForward					,
+//	pstrUsageReverse					,
+//	pstrUsageStop						,
+//	pstrUsageRewind						,
+//	pstrUsageFastForward				,
+//	pstrUsagePlay						,
+//	pstrUsagePause						,
+//	pstrUsageRecord						,
+//	pstrUsageError						,
+//	pstrUsageSelectedIndicator			,
+//	pstrUsageInUseIndicator				,
+//	pstrUsageMultiModeIndicator			,
+//	pstrUsageIndicatorOn				,
+//	pstrUsageIndicatorFlash				,
+//	pstrUsageIndicatorSlowBlink			,
+//	pstrUsageIndicatorFastBlink			,
+//	pstrUsageIndicatorOff				,
+//	pstrUsageFlashOnTime				,
+//	pstrUsageSlowBlinkOnTime			,
+//	pstrUsageSlowBlinkOffTime			,
+//	pstrUsageFastBlinkOnTime			,
+//	pstrUsageFastBlinkOffTime			,
+//	pstrUsageIndicatorColor				,
+//	pstrUsageIndicatorRed				,
+//	pstrUsageIndicatorGreen				,
+//	pstrUsageIndicatorAmber				,
+//	pstrUsageGenericIndicator			,
+//	pstrUsageSystemSuspend				,
+//	pstrUsageExternalPowerConnected
+//};
+//const char *telTitles0			[] PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsagePhone				,
+//	pstrUsageAnsweringMachine	,
+//	pstrUsageMessageControls	,
+//	pstrUsageHandset			,
+//	pstrUsageHeadset			,
+//	pstrUsageTelephonyKeyPad	,
+//	pstrUsageProgrammableButton
+//};
+//const char *telTitles1			[] PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsageHookSwitch					,
+//	pstrUsageFlash						,
+//	pstrUsageFeature					,
+//	pstrUsageHold						,
+//	pstrUsageRedial						,
+//	pstrUsageTransfer					,
+//	pstrUsageDrop						,
+//	pstrUsagePark						,
+//	pstrUsageForwardCalls				,
+//	pstrUsageAlternateFunction			,
+//	pstrUsageLine						,
+//	pstrUsageSpeakerPhone				,
+//	pstrUsageConference				,
+//	pstrUsageRingEnable				,
+//	pstrUsageRingSelect				,
+//	pstrUsagePhoneMute				,
+//	pstrUsageCallerID				,
+//	pstrUsageSend
+//};
+//const char *telTitles2			[] PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsageSpeedDial		,
+//	pstrUsageStoreNumber	,
+//	pstrUsageRecallNumber	,
+//	pstrUsagePhoneDirectory
+//};
+//const char *telTitles3			[] PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsageVoiceMail		,
+//	pstrUsageScreenCalls	,
+//	pstrUsageDoNotDisturb	,
+//	pstrUsageMessage		,
+//	pstrUsageAnswerOnOff
+//};
+//const char *telTitles4			[] PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsageInsideDialTone			,
+//	pstrUsageOutsideDialTone		,
+//	pstrUsageInsideRingTone			,
+//	pstrUsageOutsideRingTone		,
+//	pstrUsagePriorityRingTone		,
+//	pstrUsageInsideRingback			,
+//	pstrUsagePriorityRingback		,
+//	pstrUsageLineBusyTone			,
+//	pstrUsageReorderTone			,
+//	pstrUsageCallWaitingTone		,
+//	pstrUsageConfirmationTone1		,
+//	pstrUsageConfirmationTone2		,
+//	pstrUsageTonesOff				,
+//	pstrUsageOutsideRingback		,
+//	pstrUsageRinger
+//};
+//const char *telTitles5			[] PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsagePhoneKey0		,
+//	pstrUsagePhoneKey1		,
+//	pstrUsagePhoneKey2		,
+//	pstrUsagePhoneKey3		,
+//	pstrUsagePhoneKey4		,
+//	pstrUsagePhoneKey5		,
+//	pstrUsagePhoneKey6		,
+//	pstrUsagePhoneKey7		,
+//	pstrUsagePhoneKey8		,
+//	pstrUsagePhoneKey9		,
+//	pstrUsagePhoneKeyStar	,
+//	pstrUsagePhoneKeyPound	,
+//	pstrUsagePhoneKeyA		,
+//	pstrUsagePhoneKeyB		,
+//	pstrUsagePhoneKeyC		,
+//	pstrUsagePhoneKeyD
+//};
+//const char *consTitles0[]	PROGMEM	=
+//{
+//	pstrUsageConsumerControl,
+//	pstrUsageNumericKeyPad,
+//	pstrUsageProgrammableButton,
+//	pstrUsageMicrophone,
+//	pstrUsageHeadphone,
+//	pstrUsageGraphicEqualizer
+//};
+//const char *consTitles1[]	PROGMEM	=
+//{
+//	pstrUsagePlus10	,
+//	pstrUsagePlus100,
+//	pstrUsageAMPM
+//};
+//const char *consTitles2[]	PROGMEM	=
+//{
+//	pstrUsagePower			,
+//	pstrUsageReset			,
+//	pstrUsageSleep			,
+//	pstrUsageSleepAfter		,
+//	pstrUsageSleepMode		,
+//	pstrUsageIllumination	,
+//	pstrUsageFunctionButtons
+//
+//};
+//const char *consTitles3[]	PROGMEM	=
+//{
+//	pstrUsageMenu			,
+//	pstrUsageMenuPick		,
+//	pstrUsageMenuUp			,
+//	pstrUsageMenuDown		,
+//	pstrUsageMenuLeft		,
+//	pstrUsageMenuRight		,
+//	pstrUsageMenuEscape		,
+//	pstrUsageMenuValueIncrease,
+//	pstrUsageMenuValueDecrease
+//};
+//const char *consTitles4[]	PROGMEM	=
+//{
+//	pstrUsageDataOnScreen		,
+//	pstrUsageClosedCaption		,
+//	pstrUsageClosedCaptionSelect,
+//	pstrUsageVCRTV				,
+//	pstrUsageBroadcastMode		,
+//	pstrUsageSnapshot			,
+//	pstrUsageStill
+//};
+//const char *consTitles5[]	PROGMEM	=
+//{
+//	pstrUsageSelection					,
+//	pstrUsageAssignSelection			,
+//	pstrUsageModeStep					,
+//	pstrUsageRecallLast					,
+//	pstrUsageEnterChannel				,
+//	pstrUsageOrderMovie					,
+//	pstrUsageChannel					,
+//	pstrUsageMediaSelection				,
+//	pstrUsageMediaSelectComputer		,
+//	pstrUsageMediaSelectTV				,
+//	pstrUsageMediaSelectWWW				,
+//	pstrUsageMediaSelectDVD				,
+//	pstrUsageMediaSelectTelephone		,
+//	pstrUsageMediaSelectProgramGuide	,
+//	pstrUsageMediaSelectVideoPhone		,
+//	pstrUsageMediaSelectGames			,
+//	pstrUsageMediaSelectMessages		,
+//	pstrUsageMediaSelectCD				,
+//	pstrUsageMediaSelectVCR				,
+//	pstrUsageMediaSelectTuner			,
+//	pstrUsageQuit						,
+//	pstrUsageHelp						,
+//	pstrUsageMediaSelectTape			,
+//	pstrUsageMediaSelectCable			,
+//	pstrUsageMediaSelectSatellite		,
+//	pstrUsageMediaSelectSecurity		,
+//	pstrUsageMediaSelectHome			,
+//	pstrUsageMediaSelectCall			,
+//	pstrUsageChannelIncrement			,
+//	pstrUsageChannelDecrement			,
+//	pstrUsageMediaSelectSAP				,
+//	pstrUsagePageReserved				,
+//	pstrUsageVCRPlus					,
+//	pstrUsageOnce						,
+//	pstrUsageDaily						,
+//	pstrUsageWeekly						,
+//	pstrUsageMonthly
+//};
+//const char *consTitles6[]	PROGMEM	=
+//{
+//	pstrUsagePlay					,
+//	pstrUsagePause					,
+//	pstrUsageRecord					,
+//	pstrUsageFastForward			,
+//	pstrUsageRewind					,
+//	pstrUsageScanNextTrack			,
+//	pstrUsageScanPreviousTrack		,
+//	pstrUsageStop					,
+//	pstrUsageEject					,
+//	pstrUsageRandomPlay				,
+//	pstrUsageSelectDisk				,
+//	pstrUsageEnterDisk				,
+//	pstrUsageRepeat					,
+//	pstrUsageTracking					,
+//	pstrUsageTrackNormal				,
+//	pstrUsageSlowTracking				,
+//	pstrUsageFrameForward				,
+//	pstrUsageFrameBackwards				,
+//	pstrUsageMark						,
+//	pstrUsageClearMark					,
+//	pstrUsageRepeatFromMark				,
+//	pstrUsageReturnToMark				,
+//	pstrUsageSearchMarkForward			,
+//	pstrUsageSearchMarkBackwards		,
+//	pstrUsageCounterReset				,
+//	pstrUsageShowCounter				,
+//	pstrUsageTrackingIncrement			,
+//	pstrUsageTrackingDecrement			,
+//	pstrUsageStopEject					,
+//	pstrUsagePlayPause					,
+//	pstrUsagePlaySkip
+//};
+//const char *consTitles7[]	PROGMEM	=
+//{
+//	pstrUsageVolume						,
+//	pstrUsageBalance					,
+//	pstrUsageMute						,
+//	pstrUsageBass						,
+//	pstrUsageTreble						,
+//	pstrUsageBassBoost					,
+//	pstrUsageSurroundMode				,
+//	pstrUsageLoudness					,
+//	pstrUsageMPX						,
+//	pstrUsageVolumeIncrement			,
+//	pstrUsageVolumeDecrement
+//};
+//const char *consTitles8[]	PROGMEM	=
+//{
+//	pstrUsageSpeedSelect				,
+//	pstrUsagePlaybackSpeed				,
+//	pstrUsageStandardPlay				,
+//	pstrUsageLongPlay					,
+//	pstrUsageExtendedPlay				,
+//	pstrUsageSlow
+//};
+//const char *consTitles9[]	PROGMEM	=
+//{
+//	pstrUsageFanEnable					,
+//	pstrUsageFanSpeed					,
+//	pstrUsageLightEnable				,
+//	pstrUsageLightIlluminationLevel		,
+//	pstrUsageClimateControlEnable		,
+//	pstrUsageRoomTemperature			,
+//	pstrUsageSecurityEnable				,
+//	pstrUsageFireAlarm					,
+//	pstrUsagePoliceAlarm				,
+//	pstrUsageProximity					,
+//	pstrUsageMotion						,
+//	pstrUsageDuresAlarm					,
+//	pstrUsageHoldupAlarm					,
+//	pstrUsageMedicalAlarm
+//};
+//const char *consTitlesA[]	PROGMEM	=
+//{
+//	pstrUsageBalanceRight				,
+//	pstrUsageBalanceLeft				,
+//	pstrUsageBassIncrement				,
+//	pstrUsageBassDecrement				,
+//	pstrUsageTrebleIncrement			,
+//	pstrUsageTrebleDecrement
+//};
+//const char *consTitlesB[]	PROGMEM	=
+//{
+//	pstrUsageSpeakerSystem				,
+//	pstrUsageChannelLeft				,
+//	pstrUsageChannelRight				,
+//	pstrUsageChannelCenter				,
+//	pstrUsageChannelFront				,
+//	pstrUsageChannelCenterFront			,
+//	pstrUsageChannelSide				,
+//	pstrUsageChannelSurround			,
+//	pstrUsageChannelLowFreqEnhancement	,
+//	pstrUsageChannelTop					,
+//	pstrUsageChannelUnknown
+//};
+//const char *consTitlesC[]	PROGMEM	=
+//{
+//	pstrUsageSubChannel					,
+//	pstrUsageSubChannelIncrement		,
+//	pstrUsageSubChannelDecrement		,
+//	pstrUsageAlternateAudioIncrement	,
+//	pstrUsageAlternateAudioDecrement
+//};
+//const char *consTitlesD[]	PROGMEM	=
+//{
+//	pstrUsageApplicationLaunchButtons	,
+//	pstrUsageALLaunchButtonConfigTool	,
+//	pstrUsageALProgrammableButton		,
+//	pstrUsageALConsumerControlConfig	,
+//	pstrUsageALWordProcessor			,
+//	pstrUsageALTextEditor				,
+//	pstrUsageALSpreadsheet				,
+//	pstrUsageALGraphicsEditor			,
+//	pstrUsageALPresentationApp			,
+//	pstrUsageALDatabaseApp				,
+//	pstrUsageALEmailReader				,
+//	pstrUsageALNewsreader				,
+//	pstrUsageALVoicemail				,
+//	pstrUsageALContactsAddressBook		,
+//	pstrUsageALCalendarSchedule			,
+//	pstrUsageALTaskProjectManager		,
+//	pstrUsageALLogJournalTimecard		,
+//	pstrUsageALCheckbookFinance			,
+//	pstrUsageALCalculator				,
+//	pstrUsageALAVCapturePlayback		,
+//	pstrUsageALLocalMachineBrowser		,
+//	pstrUsageALLANWANBrow				,
+//	pstrUsageALInternetBrowser			,
+//	pstrUsageALRemoteNetISPConnect		,
+//	pstrUsageALNetworkConference		,
+//	pstrUsageALNetworkChat				,
+//	pstrUsageALTelephonyDialer			,
+//	pstrUsageALLogon					,
+//	pstrUsageALLogoff					,
+//	pstrUsageALLogonLogoff				,
+//	pstrUsageALTermLockScrSav			,
+//	pstrUsageALControlPannel			,
+//	pstrUsageALCommandLineProcessorRun	,
+//	pstrUsageALProcessTaskManager		,
+//	pstrUsageALSelectTaskApplication	,
+//	pstrUsageALNextTaskApplication		,
+//	pstrUsageALPreviousTaskApplication	,
+//	pstrUsageALPreemptiveHaltTaskApp	,
+//	pstrUsageALIntegratedHelpCenter		,
+//	pstrUsageALDocuments				,
+//	pstrUsageALThesaurus				,
+//	pstrUsageALDictionary				,
+//	pstrUsageALDesktop					,
+//	pstrUsageALSpellCheck				,
+//	pstrUsageALGrammarCheck				,
+//	pstrUsageALWirelessStatus			,
+//	pstrUsageALKeyboardLayout			,
+//	pstrUsageALVirusProtection			,
+//	pstrUsageALEncryption				,
+//	pstrUsageALScreenSaver				,
+//	pstrUsageALAlarms					,
+//	pstrUsageALClock					,
+//	pstrUsageALFileBrowser				,
+//	pstrUsageALPowerStatus				,
+//	pstrUsageALImageBrowser				,
+//	pstrUsageALAudioBrowser				,
+//	pstrUsageALMovieBrowser				,
+//	pstrUsageALDigitalRightsManager		,
+//	pstrUsageALDigitalWallet			,
+//	pstrUsagePageReserved				,
+//	pstrUsageALInstantMessaging			,
+//	pstrUsageALOEMFeaturesBrowser		,
+//	pstrUsageALOEMHelp					,
+//	pstrUsageALOnlineCommunity			,
+//	pstrUsageALEntertainmentContentBrow	,
+//	pstrUsageALOnlineShoppingBrowser	,
+//	pstrUsageALSmartCardInfoHelp		,
+//	pstrUsageALMarketMonitorFinBrowser	,
+//	pstrUsageALCustomCorpNewsBrowser		,
+//	pstrUsageALOnlineActivityBrowser		,
+//	pstrUsageALResearchSearchBrowser		,
+//	pstrUsageALAudioPlayer
+//};
+//const char *consTitlesE[]	PROGMEM	=
+//{
+//	pstrUsageGenericGUIAppControls		,
+//	pstrUsageACNew						,
+//	pstrUsageACOpen						,
+//	pstrUsageACClose					,
+//	pstrUsageACExit						,
+//	pstrUsageACMaximize					,
+//	pstrUsageACMinimize					,
+//	pstrUsageACSave						,
+//	pstrUsageACPrint					,
+//	pstrUsageACProperties				,
+//	pstrUsageACUndo						,
+//	pstrUsageACCopy						,
+//	pstrUsageACCut						,
+//	pstrUsageACPaste					,
+//	pstrUsageACSelectAll				,
+//	pstrUsageACFind						,
+//	pstrUsageACFindAndReplace			,
+//	pstrUsageACSearch					,
+//	pstrUsageACGoto						,
+//	pstrUsageACHome						,
+//	pstrUsageACBack						,
+//	pstrUsageACForward					,
+//	pstrUsageACStop						,
+//	pstrUsageACRefresh					,
+//	pstrUsageACPreviousLink				,
+//	pstrUsageACNextLink					,
+//	pstrUsageACBookmarks				,
+//	pstrUsageACHistory					,
+//	pstrUsageACSubscriptions			,
+//	pstrUsageACZoomIn					,
+//	pstrUsageACZoomOut					,
+//	pstrUsageACZoom						,
+//	pstrUsageACFullScreenView			,
+//	pstrUsageACNormalView				,
+//	pstrUsageACViewToggle				,
+//	pstrUsageACScrollUp					,
+//	pstrUsageACScrollDown				,
+//	pstrUsageACScroll					,
+//	pstrUsageACPanLeft					,
+//	pstrUsageACPanRight					,
+//	pstrUsageACPan						,
+//	pstrUsageACNewWindow				,
+//	pstrUsageACTileHoriz				,
+//	pstrUsageACTileVert					,
+//	pstrUsageACFormat					,
+//	pstrUsageACEdit						,
+//	pstrUsageACBold						,
+//	pstrUsageACItalics					,
+//	pstrUsageACUnderline				,
+//	pstrUsageACStrikethrough			,
+//	pstrUsageACSubscript				,
+//	pstrUsageACSuperscript				,
+//	pstrUsageACAllCaps					,
+//	pstrUsageACRotate					,
+//	pstrUsageACResize					,
+//	pstrUsageACFlipHorizontal			,
+//	pstrUsageACFlipVertical				,
+//	pstrUsageACMirrorHorizontal			,
+//	pstrUsageACMirrorVertical			,
+//	pstrUsageACFontSelect				,
+//	pstrUsageACFontColor				,
+//	pstrUsageACFontSize					,
+//	pstrUsageACJustifyLeft				,
+//	pstrUsageACJustifyCenterH			,
+//	pstrUsageACJustifyRight				,
+//	pstrUsageACJustifyBlockH			,
+//	pstrUsageACJustifyTop				,
+//	pstrUsageACJustifyCenterV			,
+//	pstrUsageACJustifyBottom			,
+//	pstrUsageACJustifyBlockV			,
+//	pstrUsageACIndentDecrease			,
+//	pstrUsageACIndentIncrease			,
+//	pstrUsageACNumberedList				,
+//	pstrUsageACRestartNumbering			,
+//	pstrUsageACBulletedList				,
+//	pstrUsageACPromote					,
+//	pstrUsageACDemote					,
+//	pstrUsageACYes						,
+//	pstrUsageACNo						,
+//	pstrUsageACCancel					,
+//	pstrUsageACCatalog					,
+//	pstrUsageACBuyChkout				,
+//	pstrUsageACAddToCart				,
+//	pstrUsageACExpand					,
+//	pstrUsageACExpandAll				,
+//	pstrUsageACCollapse					,
+//	pstrUsageACCollapseAll				,
+//	pstrUsageACPrintPreview				,
+//	pstrUsageACPasteSpecial				,
+//	pstrUsageACInsertMode				,
+//	pstrUsageACDelete					,
+//	pstrUsageACLock						,
+//	pstrUsageACUnlock					,
+//	pstrUsageACProtect					,
+//	pstrUsageACUnprotect				,
+//	pstrUsageACAttachComment			,
+//	pstrUsageACDeleteComment			,
+//	pstrUsageACViewComment				,
+//	pstrUsageACSelectWord				,
+//	pstrUsageACSelectSentence			,
+//	pstrUsageACSelectParagraph			,
+//	pstrUsageACSelectColumn				,
+//	pstrUsageACSelectRow				,
+//	pstrUsageACSelectTable				,
+//	pstrUsageACSelectObject				,
+//	pstrUsageACRedoRepeat				,
+//	pstrUsageACSort						,
+//	pstrUsageACSortAscending			,
+//	pstrUsageACSortDescending			,
+//	pstrUsageACFilter					,
+//	pstrUsageACSetClock					,
+//	pstrUsageACViewClock				,
+//	pstrUsageACSelectTimeZone			,
+//	pstrUsageACEditTimeZone				,
+//	pstrUsageACSetAlarm					,
+//	pstrUsageACClearAlarm				,
+//	pstrUsageACSnoozeAlarm				,
+//	pstrUsageACResetAlarm				,
+//	pstrUsageACSyncronize				,
+//	pstrUsageACSendReceive				,
+//	pstrUsageACSendTo					,
+//	pstrUsageACReply					,
+//	pstrUsageACReplyAll					,
+//	pstrUsageACForwardMessage			,
+//	pstrUsageACSend						,
+//	pstrUsageACAttachFile				,
+//	pstrUsageACUpload					,
+//	pstrUsageACDownload					,
+//	pstrUsageACSetBorders				,
+//	pstrUsageACInsertRow				,
+//	pstrUsageACInsertColumn				,
+//	pstrUsageACInsertFile				,
+//	pstrUsageACInsertPicture			,
+//	pstrUsageACInsertObject				,
+//	pstrUsageACInsertSymbol				,
+//	pstrUsageACSaveAndClose				,
+//	pstrUsageACRename					,
+//	pstrUsageACMerge					,
+//	pstrUsageACSplit					,
+//	pstrUsageACDistributeHorizontaly	,
+//	pstrUsageACDistributeVerticaly
+//};
+//const char *digitTitles0[] PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsageDigitizer					,
+//	pstrUsagePen						,
+//	pstrUsageLightPen					,
+//	pstrUsageTouchScreen				,
+//	pstrUsageTouchPad					,
+//	pstrUsageWhiteBoard					,
+//	pstrUsageCoordinateMeasuringMachine	,
+//	pstrUsage3DDigitizer				,
+//	pstrUsageStereoPlotter				,
+//	pstrUsageArticulatedArm				,
+//	pstrUsageArmature					,
+//	pstrUsageMultiplePointDigitizer		,
+//	pstrUsageFreeSpaceWand
+//};
+//const char *digitTitles1[] PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsageStylus						,
+//	pstrUsagePuck						,
+//	pstrUsageFinger
+//
+//};
+//const char *digitTitles2[] PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsageTipPressure			,
+//	pstrUsageBarrelPressure			,
+//	pstrUsageInRange				,
+//	pstrUsageTouch					,
+//	pstrUsageUntouch				,
+//	pstrUsageTap					,
+//	pstrUsageQuality				,
+//	pstrUsageDataValid				,
+//	pstrUsageTransducerIndex		,
+//	pstrUsageTabletFunctionKeys		,
+//	pstrUsageProgramChangeKeys		,
+//	pstrUsageBatteryStrength		,
+//	pstrUsageInvert					,
+//	pstrUsageXTilt					,
+//	pstrUsageYTilt					,
+//	pstrUsageAzimuth				,
+//	pstrUsageAltitude				,
+//	pstrUsageTwist					,
+//	pstrUsageTipSwitch				,
+//	pstrUsageSecondaryTipSwitch		,
+//	pstrUsageBarrelSwitch			,
+//	pstrUsageEraser					,
+//	pstrUsageTabletPick
+//};
+//const char *aplphanumTitles0[]	PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsageAlphanumericDisplay,
+//	pstrUsageBitmappedDisplay
+//};
+//const char *aplphanumTitles1[]	PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsageDisplayAttributesReport	,
+//	pstrUsageASCIICharacterSet			,
+//	pstrUsageDataReadBack				,
+//	pstrUsageFontReadBack				,
+//	pstrUsageDisplayControlReport		,
+//	pstrUsageClearDisplay				,
+//	pstrUsageDisplayEnable				,
+//	pstrUsageScreenSaverDelay			,
+//	pstrUsageScreenSaverEnable			,
+//	pstrUsageVerticalScroll				,
+//	pstrUsageHorizontalScroll			,
+//	pstrUsageCharacterReport			,
+//	pstrUsageDisplayData				,
+//	pstrUsageDisplayStatus				,
+//	pstrUsageStatusNotReady				,
+//	pstrUsageStatusReady				,
+//	pstrUsageErrorNotALoadableCharacter	,
+//	pstrUsageErrorFotDataCanNotBeRead	,
+//	pstrUsageCursorPositionReport		,
+//	pstrUsageRow						,
+//	pstrUsageColumn						,
+//	pstrUsageRows						,
+//	pstrUsageColumns					,
+//	pstrUsageCursorPixelPosition		,
+//	pstrUsageCursorMode					,
+//	pstrUsageCursorEnable				,
+//	pstrUsageCursorBlink				,
+//	pstrUsageFontReport					,
+//	pstrUsageFontData					,
+//	pstrUsageCharacterWidth				,
+//	pstrUsageCharacterHeight			,
+//	pstrUsageCharacterSpacingHorizontal	,
+//	pstrUsageCharacterSpacingVertical	,
+//	pstrUsageUnicodeCharset				,
+//	pstrUsageFont7Segment				,
+//	pstrUsage7SegmentDirectMap			,
+//	pstrUsageFont14Segment				,
+//	pstrUsage14SegmentDirectMap			,
+//	pstrUsageDisplayBrightness			,
+//	pstrUsageDisplayContrast			,
+//	pstrUsageCharacterAttribute			,
+//	pstrUsageAttributeReadback			,
+//	pstrUsageAttributeData				,
+//	pstrUsageCharAttributeEnhance		,
+//	pstrUsageCharAttributeUnderline		,
+//	pstrUsageCharAttributeBlink
+//};
+//const char *aplphanumTitles2[]	PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsageBitmapSizeX				,
+//	pstrUsageBitmapSizeY				,
+//	pstrUsagePageReserved				,
+//	pstrUsageBitDepthFormat				,
+//	pstrUsageDisplayOrientation			,
+//	pstrUsagePaletteReport				,
+//	pstrUsagePaletteDataSize			,
+//	pstrUsagePaletteDataOffset			,
+//	pstrUsagePaletteData				,
+//	pstrUsageBlitReport					,
+//	pstrUsageBlitRectangleX1			,
+//	pstrUsageBlitRectangleY1			,
+//	pstrUsageBlitRectangleX2			,
+//	pstrUsageBlitRectangleY2			,
+//	pstrUsageBlitData					,
+//	pstrUsageSoftButton					,
+//	pstrUsageSoftButtonID				,
+//	pstrUsageSoftButtonSide				,
+//	pstrUsageSoftButtonOffset1			,
+//	pstrUsageSoftButtonOffset2			,
+//	pstrUsageSoftButtonReport
+//};
+//const char *medInstrTitles0[] PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsageVCRAcquisition				,
+//	pstrUsageFreezeThaw					,
+//	pstrUsageClipStore					,
+//	pstrUsageUpdate						,
+//	pstrUsageNext						,
+//	pstrUsageSave						,
+//	pstrUsagePrint						,
+//	pstrUsageMicrophoneEnable
+//};
+//const char *medInstrTitles1[] PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsageCine						,
+//	pstrUsageTransmitPower				,
+//	pstrUsageVolume						,
+//	pstrUsageFocus						,
+//	pstrUsageDepth
+//};
+//const char *medInstrTitles2[] PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsageSoftStepPrimary		,
+//	pstrUsageSoftStepSecondary
+//};
+//const char *medInstrTitles3[] PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsageZoomSelect					,
+//	pstrUsageZoomAdjust					,
+//	pstrUsageSpectralDopplerModeSelect	,
+//	pstrUsageSpectralDopplerModeAdjust	,
+//	pstrUsageColorDopplerModeSelect		,
+//	pstrUsageColorDopplerModeAdjust		,
+//	pstrUsageMotionModeSelect			,
+//	pstrUsageMotionModeAdjust			,
+//	pstrUsage2DModeSelect				,
+//	pstrUsage2DModeAdjust
+//};
+//const char *medInstrTitles4[] PROGMEM =
+//{
+//	pstrUsageSoftControlSelect			,
+//	pstrUsageSoftControlAdjust
+//};
+
+#endif // __HIDUSAGETITLEARRAYS_H__
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/keywords.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/keywords.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f4e19cd13
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/keywords.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,371 @@
+####################################################
+# Syntax Coloring Map For USB Library
+####################################################
+
+####################################################
+# Datatypes (KEYWORD1)
+####################################################
+
+USB	KEYWORD1
+USBHub	KEYWORD1
+
+####################################################
+# Syntax Coloring Map For BTD (Bluetooth) Library
+####################################################
+
+####################################################
+# Datatypes (KEYWORD1)
+####################################################
+
+BTD	KEYWORD1
+
+####################################################
+# Methods and Functions (KEYWORD2)
+####################################################
+Task	KEYWORD2
+
+####################################################
+# Syntax Coloring Map For PS3/PS4 Bluetooth/USB Library
+####################################################
+
+####################################################
+# Datatypes (KEYWORD1)
+####################################################
+
+PS3BT	KEYWORD1
+PS3USB	KEYWORD1
+PS4BT	KEYWORD1
+PS4USB	KEYWORD1
+
+####################################################
+# Methods and Functions (KEYWORD2)
+####################################################
+setBdaddr	KEYWORD2
+getBdaddr	KEYWORD2
+setMoveBdaddr	KEYWORD2
+getMoveBdaddr	KEYWORD2
+getMoveCalibration	KEYWORD2
+
+getButtonPress	KEYWORD2
+getButtonClick	KEYWORD2
+getAnalogButton	KEYWORD2
+getAnalogHat	KEYWORD2
+getSensor	KEYWORD2
+getAngle	KEYWORD2
+get9DOFValues	KEYWORD2
+getStatus	KEYWORD2
+printStatusString	KEYWORD2
+getTemperature	KEYWORD2
+disconnect	KEYWORD2
+
+setAllOff	KEYWORD2
+setRumbleOff	KEYWORD2
+setRumbleOn	KEYWORD2
+setLedOff	KEYWORD2
+setLedOn	KEYWORD2
+setLedToggle	KEYWORD2
+setLedFlash	KEYWORD2
+moveSetBulb	KEYWORD2
+moveSetRumble	KEYWORD2
+
+attachOnInit	KEYWORD2
+
+PS3Connected	KEYWORD2
+PS3MoveConnected	KEYWORD2
+PS3NavigationConnected	KEYWORD2
+
+isReady	KEYWORD2
+watingForConnection	KEYWORD2
+
+isTouching	KEYWORD2
+getX	KEYWORD2
+getY	KEYWORD2
+getTouchCounter	KEYWORD2
+
+getUsbStatus    KEYWORD2
+getAudioStatus  KEYWORD2
+getMicStatus    KEYWORD2
+
+####################################################
+# Constants and enums (LITERAL1)
+####################################################
+OFF	LITERAL1
+LED1	LITERAL1
+LED2	LITERAL1
+LED3	LITERAL1
+LED4	LITERAL1
+LED5	LITERAL1
+LED6	LITERAL1
+LED7	LITERAL1
+LED8	LITERAL1
+LED9	LITERAL1
+LED10	LITERAL1
+
+Red	LITERAL1
+Green	LITERAL1
+Blue	LITERAL1
+Yellow	LITERAL1
+Lightblue	LITERAL1
+Purble	LITERAL1
+White	LITERAL1
+Off	LITERAL1
+
+SELECT	LITERAL1
+L3	LITERAL1
+R3	LITERAL1
+START	LITERAL1
+UP	LITERAL1
+RIGHT	LITERAL1
+DOWN	LITERAL1
+LEFT	LITERAL1
+L2	LITERAL1
+R2	LITERAL1
+L1	LITERAL1
+R1	LITERAL1
+TRIANGLE	LITERAL1
+CIRCLE	LITERAL1
+CROSS	LITERAL1
+SQUARE	LITERAL1
+PS	LITERAL1
+MOVE	LITERAL1
+T	LITERAL1
+
+SHARE	LITERAL1
+OPTIONS	LITERAL1
+TOUCHPAD	LITERAL1
+
+LeftHatX	LITERAL1
+LeftHatY	LITERAL1
+RightHatX	LITERAL1
+RightHatY	LITERAL1
+
+aX	LITERAL1
+aY	LITERAL1
+aZ	LITERAL1
+gX	LITERAL1
+gY	LITERAL1
+gZ	LITERAL1
+aXmove	LITERAL1
+aYmove	LITERAL1
+aZmove	LITERAL1
+gXmove	LITERAL1
+gYmove	LITERAL1
+gZmove	LITERAL1
+tempMove	LITERAL1
+mXmove	LITERAL1
+mZmove	LITERAL1
+mYmove	LITERAL1
+
+Pitch	LITERAL1
+Roll	LITERAL1
+
+Plugged	LITERAL1
+Unplugged	LITERAL1
+Charging	LITERAL1
+NotCharging	LITERAL1
+Shutdown	LITERAL1
+Dying	LITERAL1
+Low	LITERAL1
+High	LITERAL1
+Full	LITERAL1
+MoveCharging	LITERAL1
+MoveNotCharging	LITERAL1
+MoveShutdown	LITERAL1
+MoveDying	LITERAL1
+MoveLow	LITERAL1
+MoveHigh	LITERAL1
+MoveFull	LITERAL1
+CableRumble	LITERAL1
+Cable	LITERAL1
+BluetoothRumble	LITERAL1
+Bluetooth	LITERAL1
+
+RumbleHigh	LITERAL1
+RumbleLow	LITERAL1
+
+####################################################
+# Syntax Coloring Map For Xbox 360 Libraries
+####################################################
+
+####################################################
+# Datatypes (KEYWORD1)
+####################################################
+
+XBOXUSB	KEYWORD1
+XBOXONE	KEYWORD1
+XBOXOLD	KEYWORD1
+XBOXRECV	KEYWORD1
+
+####################################################
+# Methods and Functions (KEYWORD2)
+####################################################
+
+setLedRaw	KEYWORD2
+setLedBlink	KEYWORD2
+setLedMode	KEYWORD2
+getBatteryLevel	KEYWORD2
+buttonChanged	KEYWORD2
+
+XboxReceiverConnected	KEYWORD2
+Xbox360Connected	KEYWORD2
+XboxOneConnected	KEYWORD2
+
+####################################################
+# Constants and enums (LITERAL1)
+####################################################
+
+ALL	LITERAL1
+
+ROTATING	LITERAL1
+FASTBLINK	LITERAL1
+SLOWBLINK	LITERAL1
+ALTERNATING	LITERAL1
+
+BACK	LITERAL1
+
+XBOX	LITERAL1
+SYNC	LITERAL1
+
+BLACK	LITERAL1
+WHITE	LITERAL1
+
+A	LITERAL1
+B	LITERAL1
+X	LITERAL1
+Y	LITERAL1
+
+####################################################
+# Syntax Coloring Map For RFCOMM/SPP Library
+####################################################
+
+####################################################
+# Datatypes (KEYWORD1)
+####################################################
+
+SPP	KEYWORD1
+
+####################################################
+# Methods and Functions (KEYWORD2)
+####################################################
+
+connected	KEYWORD2
+discard	KEYWORD2
+
+####################################################
+# Syntax Coloring Map For Wiimote Library
+####################################################
+
+####################################################
+# Datatypes (KEYWORD1)
+####################################################
+
+WII	KEYWORD1
+
+####################################################
+# Methods and Functions (KEYWORD2)
+####################################################
+
+wiimoteConnected	KEYWORD2
+nunchuckConnected	KEYWORD2
+motionPlusConnected	KEYWORD2
+wiiUProControllerConnected	KEYWORD2
+wiiBalanceBoardConnected	KEYWORD2
+setRumbleToggle	KEYWORD2
+getPitch	KEYWORD2
+getRoll	KEYWORD2
+getYaw	KEYWORD2
+getWiimotePitch	KEYWORD2
+getWiimoteRoll	KEYWORD2
+getNunchuckPitch	KEYWORD2
+getNunchuckRoll	KEYWORD2
+PAIR	KEYWORD2
+statusRequest	KEYWORD2
+getBatteryLevel	KEYWORD2
+getWiiState	KEYWORD2
+getWeight	KEYWORD2
+getTotalWeight	KEYWORD2
+getWeightRaw	KEYWORD2
+
+####################################################
+# Constants and enums (LITERAL1)
+####################################################
+
+PLUS	LITERAL1
+MINUS	LITERAL1
+ONE	LITERAL1
+TWO	LITERAL1
+HOME	LITERAL1
+Z	LITERAL1
+C	LITERAL1
+L	LITERAL1
+R	LITERAL1
+ZL	LITERAL1
+ZR	LITERAL1
+HatX	LITERAL1
+HatY	LITERAL1
+TopRight	LITERAL1
+BotRight	LITERAL1
+TopLeft	LITERAL1
+BotLeft	LITERAL1
+
+####################################################
+# Methods and Functions for the IR Camera
+####################################################
+
+IRinitialize	KEYWORD2
+isIRCameraEnabled	KEYWORD2
+getIRx1	KEYWORD2
+getIRy1	KEYWORD2
+getIRs1	KEYWORD2
+getIRx2	KEYWORD2
+getIRy2	KEYWORD2
+getIRs2	KEYWORD2
+getIRx3	KEYWORD2
+getIRy3	KEYWORD2
+getIRs3	KEYWORD2
+getIRx4	KEYWORD2
+getIRy4	KEYWORD2
+getIRs4	KEYWORD2
+
+####################################################
+# Syntax Coloring Map For BTHID Library
+####################################################
+
+####################################################
+# Datatypes (KEYWORD1)
+####################################################
+
+BTHID	KEYWORD1
+
+####################################################
+# Methods and Functions (KEYWORD2)
+####################################################
+SetReportParser	KEYWORD2
+setProtocolMode	KEYWORD2
+
+####################################################
+# Syntax Coloring Map For PS Buzz Library
+####################################################
+
+####################################################
+# Datatypes (KEYWORD1)
+####################################################
+
+PSBuzz	KEYWORD1
+
+####################################################
+# Methods and Functions (KEYWORD2)
+####################################################
+
+setLedOnAll	KEYWORD2
+setLedOffAll	KEYWORD2
+
+####################################################
+# Constants and enums (LITERAL1)
+####################################################
+
+RED	LITERAL1
+YELLOW	LITERAL1
+GREEN	LITERAL1
+ORANGE	LITERAL1
+BLUE	LITERAL1
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/library.json b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/library.json
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1d649b1e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/library.json
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+{
+  "name": "USB-Host-Shield-20",
+  "keywords": "usb, host, ftdi, adk, acm, pl2303, hid, bluetooth, spp, ps3, ps4, buzz, xbox, wii, mass storage",
+  "description": "Revision 2.0 of MAX3421E-based USB Host Shield Library",
+  "authors":
+  [
+    {
+      "name": "Oleg Mazurov",
+      "email": "mazurov@circuitsathome.com",
+      "url": "http://www.circuitsathome.com",
+      "maintainer": true
+    },
+    {
+      "name": "Alexei Glushchenko",
+      "email": "alex-gl@mail.ru"
+    },
+    {
+      "name": "Kristian Lauszus",
+      "email": "kristianl@tkjelectronics.com",
+      "url": "http://tkjelectronics.com",
+      "maintainer": true
+    },
+    {
+      "name": "Andrew Kroll",
+      "email": "xxxajk@gmail.com",
+      "maintainer": true
+    }
+  ],
+  "repository":
+  {
+    "type": "git",
+    "url": "https://github.com/felis/USB_Host_Shield_2.0.git"
+  },
+  "examples":
+  [
+  	"examples/*/*.ino",
+  	"examples/*/*/*.ino"
+  ],
+  "frameworks": "arduino",
+  "platforms":
+  [
+    "atmelavr",
+    "teensy",
+    "atmelsam",
+    "nordicnrf51"
+  ]
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/library.properties b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/library.properties
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7881b05e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/library.properties
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+name=USB Host Shield Library 2.0
+version=1.1.0
+author=Oleg Mazurov (Circuits@Home) <mazurov@circuitsathome.com>, Kristian Lauszus (TKJ Electronics) <kristianl@tkjelectronics.com>, Andrew Kroll <xxxajk@gmail.com>, Alexei Glushchenko (Circuits@Home) <alex-gl@mail.ru>
+maintainer=Oleg Mazurov (Circuits@Home) <mazurov@circuitsathome.com>, Kristian Lauszus (TKJ Electronics) <kristianl@tkjelectronics.com>, Andrew Kroll <xxxajk@gmail.com>
+sentence=Revision 2.0 of MAX3421E-based USB Host Shield Library.
+paragraph=Supports HID devices, FTDI, ADK, ACM, PL2303, Bluetooth HID devices, SPP communication and mass storage devices. Furthermore it supports PS3, PS4, PS Buzz, Wii and Xbox controllers.
+category=Other
+url=https://github.com/felis/USB_Host_Shield_2.0
+architectures=*
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/macros.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/macros.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e14a711fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/macros.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+
+#if !defined(_usb_h_) || defined(MACROS_H)
+#error "Never include macros.h directly; include Usb.h instead"
+#else
+#define MACROS_H
+
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// HANDY MACROS
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#define VALUE_BETWEEN(v,l,h) (((v)>(l)) && ((v)<(h)))
+#define VALUE_WITHIN(v,l,h) (((v)>=(l)) && ((v)<=(h)))
+#define output_pgm_message(wa,fp,mp,el) wa = &mp, fp((char *)pgm_read_pointer(wa), el)
+#define output_if_between(v,l,h,wa,fp,mp,el) if(VALUE_BETWEEN(v,l,h)) output_pgm_message(wa,fp,mp[v-(l+1)],el);
+
+#define SWAP(a, b) (((a) ^= (b)), ((b) ^= (a)), ((a) ^= (b)))
+#ifndef __BYTE_GRABBING_DEFINED__
+#define __BYTE_GRABBING_DEFINED__ 1
+#ifdef BROKEN_OPTIMIZER_LITTLE_ENDIAN
+// Note: Use this if your compiler generates horrible assembler!
+#define BGRAB0(__usi__)  (((uint8_t *)&(__usi__))[0])
+#define BGRAB1(__usi__)  (((uint8_t *)&(__usi__))[1])
+#define BGRAB2(__usi__)  (((uint8_t *)&(__usi__))[2])
+#define BGRAB3(__usi__)  (((uint8_t *)&(__usi__))[3])
+#define BGRAB4(__usi__)  (((uint8_t *)&(__usi__))[4])
+#define BGRAB5(__usi__)  (((uint8_t *)&(__usi__))[5])
+#define BGRAB6(__usi__)  (((uint8_t *)&(__usi__))[6])
+#define BGRAB7(__usi__)  (((uint8_t *)&(__usi__))[7])
+#else
+// Note: The cast alone to uint8_t is actually enough.
+// GCC throws out the "& 0xff", and the size is no different.
+// Some compilers need it.
+#define BGRAB0(__usi__)  ((uint8_t)((__usi__) & 0xff ))
+#define BGRAB1(__usi__)  ((uint8_t)(((__usi__) >> 8) & 0xff))
+#define BGRAB2(__usi__)  ((uint8_t)(((__usi__) >> 16) & 0xff))
+#define BGRAB3(__usi__)  ((uint8_t)(((__usi__) >> 24) & 0xff))
+#define BGRAB4(__usi__)  ((uint8_t)(((__usi__) >> 32) & 0xff))
+#define BGRAB5(__usi__)  ((uint8_t)(((__usi__) >> 40) & 0xff))
+#define BGRAB6(__usi__)  ((uint8_t)(((__usi__) >> 48) & 0xff))
+#define BGRAB7(__usi__)  ((uint8_t)(((__usi__) >> 56) & 0xff))
+#endif
+#define BOVER1(__usi__)  ((uint16_t)(__usi__) << 8)
+#define BOVER2(__usi__)  ((uint32_t)(__usi__) << 16)
+#define BOVER3(__usi__)  ((uint32_t)(__usi__) << 24)
+#define BOVER4(__usi__)  ((uint64_t)(__usi__) << 32)
+#define BOVER5(__usi__)  ((uint64_t)(__usi__) << 40)
+#define BOVER6(__usi__)  ((uint64_t)(__usi__) << 48)
+#define BOVER7(__usi__)  ((uint64_t)(__usi__) << 56)
+
+// These are the smallest and fastest ways I have found so far in pure C/C++.
+#define BMAKE16(__usc1__,__usc0__) ((uint16_t)((uint16_t)(__usc0__) | (uint16_t)BOVER1(__usc1__)))
+#define BMAKE32(__usc3__,__usc2__,__usc1__,__usc0__) ((uint32_t)((uint32_t)(__usc0__) | (uint32_t)BOVER1(__usc1__) | (uint32_t)BOVER2(__usc2__) | (uint32_t)BOVER3(__usc3__)))
+#define BMAKE64(__usc7__,__usc6__,__usc5__,__usc4__,__usc3__,__usc2__,__usc1__,__usc0__) ((uint64_t)((uint64_t)__usc0__ | (uint64_t)BOVER1(__usc1__) | (uint64_t)BOVER2(__usc2__) | (uint64_t)BOVER3(__usc3__) | (uint64_t)BOVER4(__usc4__) | (uint64_t)BOVER5(__usc5__) | (uint64_t)BOVER6(__usc6__) | (uint64_t)BOVER1(__usc7__)))
+#endif
+
+/*
+ * Debug macros: Strings are stored in progmem (flash) instead of RAM.
+ */
+#define USBTRACE(s) (Notify(PSTR(s), 0x80))
+#define USBTRACE1(s,l) (Notify(PSTR(s), l))
+#define USBTRACE2(s,r) (Notify(PSTR(s), 0x80), D_PrintHex((r), 0x80), Notify(PSTR("\r\n"), 0x80))
+#define USBTRACE3(s,r,l) (Notify(PSTR(s), l), D_PrintHex((r), l), Notify(PSTR("\r\n"), l))
+
+
+#endif /* MACROS_H */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/masstorage.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/masstorage.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9299f71a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/masstorage.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,1266 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+
+#include "masstorage.h"
+
+const uint8_t BulkOnly::epDataInIndex = 1;
+const uint8_t BulkOnly::epDataOutIndex = 2;
+const uint8_t BulkOnly::epInterruptInIndex = 3;
+
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+// Interface code
+
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+/**
+ * Get the capacity of the media
+ *
+ * @param lun Logical Unit Number
+ * @return media capacity
+ */
+uint32_t BulkOnly::GetCapacity(uint8_t lun) {
+        if(LUNOk[lun])
+                return CurrentCapacity[lun];
+        return 0LU;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Get the sector (block) size used on the media
+ *
+ * @param lun Logical Unit Number
+ * @return media sector size
+ */
+uint16_t BulkOnly::GetSectorSize(uint8_t lun) {
+        if(LUNOk[lun])
+                return CurrentSectorSize[lun];
+        return 0U;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Test if LUN is ready for use
+ *
+ * @param lun Logical Unit Number
+ * @return true if LUN is ready for use
+ */
+bool BulkOnly::LUNIsGood(uint8_t lun) {
+        return LUNOk[lun];
+}
+
+/**
+ * Test if LUN is write protected
+ *
+ * @param lun Logical Unit Number
+ * @return cached status of write protect switch
+ */
+bool BulkOnly::WriteProtected(uint8_t lun) {
+        return WriteOk[lun];
+}
+
+/**
+ * Wrap and execute a SCSI CDB with length of 6
+ *
+ * @param cdb CDB to execute
+ * @param buf_size Size of expected transaction
+ * @param buf Buffer
+ * @param dir MASS_CMD_DIR_IN | MASS_CMD_DIR_OUT
+ * @return
+ */
+uint8_t BulkOnly::SCSITransaction6(CDB6_t *cdb, uint16_t buf_size, void *buf, uint8_t dir) {
+        // promote buf_size to 32bits.
+        CommandBlockWrapper cbw = CommandBlockWrapper(++dCBWTag, (uint32_t)buf_size, cdb, dir);
+        //SetCurLUN(cdb->LUN);
+        return (HandleSCSIError(Transaction(&cbw, buf_size, buf)));
+}
+
+/**
+ * Wrap and execute a SCSI CDB with length of 10
+ *
+ * @param cdb CDB to execute
+ * @param buf_size Size of expected transaction
+ * @param buf Buffer
+ * @param dir MASS_CMD_DIR_IN | MASS_CMD_DIR_OUT
+ * @return
+ */
+uint8_t BulkOnly::SCSITransaction10(CDB10_t *cdb, uint16_t buf_size, void *buf, uint8_t dir) {
+        // promote buf_size to 32bits.
+        CommandBlockWrapper cbw = CommandBlockWrapper(++dCBWTag, (uint32_t)buf_size, cdb, dir);
+        //SetCurLUN(cdb->LUN);
+        return (HandleSCSIError(Transaction(&cbw, buf_size, buf)));
+}
+
+/**
+ * Lock or Unlock the tray or door on device.
+ * Caution: Some devices with buggy firmware will lock up.
+ *
+ * @param lun Logical Unit Number
+ * @param lock 1 to lock, 0 to unlock
+ * @return
+ */
+uint8_t BulkOnly::LockMedia(uint8_t lun, uint8_t lock) {
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nLockMedia\r\n"), 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("---------\r\n"), 0x80);
+
+        CDB6_t cdb = CDB6_t(SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_REMOVAL, lun, (uint8_t)0, lock);
+        return SCSITransaction6(&cdb, (uint16_t)0, NULL, (uint8_t)MASS_CMD_DIR_IN);
+}
+
+/**
+ * Media control, for spindle motor and media tray or door.
+ * This includes CDROM, TAPE and anything with a media loader.
+ *
+ * @param lun Logical Unit Number
+ * @param ctl 0x00 Stop Motor, 0x01 Start Motor, 0x02 Eject Media, 0x03 Load Media
+ * @return 0 on success
+ */
+uint8_t BulkOnly::MediaCTL(uint8_t lun, uint8_t ctl) {
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nMediaCTL\r\n"), 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("-----------------\r\n"), 0x80);
+
+        uint8_t rcode = MASS_ERR_UNIT_NOT_READY;
+        if(bAddress) {
+                CDB6_t cdb = CDB6_t(SCSI_CMD_START_STOP_UNIT, lun, ctl & 0x03, 0);
+                rcode = SCSITransaction6(&cdb, (uint16_t)0, NULL, (uint8_t)MASS_CMD_DIR_OUT);
+        } else {
+                SetCurLUN(lun);
+        }
+        return rcode;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Read data from media
+ *
+ * @param lun Logical Unit Number
+ * @param addr LBA address on media to read
+ * @param bsize size of a block (we should probably use the cached size)
+ * @param blocks how many blocks to read
+ * @param buf memory that is able to hold the requested data
+ * @return 0 on success
+ */
+uint8_t BulkOnly::Read(uint8_t lun, uint32_t addr, uint16_t bsize, uint8_t blocks, uint8_t *buf) {
+        if(!LUNOk[lun]) return MASS_ERR_NO_MEDIA;
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nRead LUN:\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (lun, 0x90);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nLBA:\t\t"), 0x90);
+        D_PrintHex<uint32_t > (addr, 0x90);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nblocks:\t\t"), 0x90);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (blocks, 0x90);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nblock size:\t"), 0x90);
+        D_PrintHex<uint16_t > (bsize, 0x90);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\n---------\r\n"), 0x80);
+        CDB10_t cdb = CDB10_t(SCSI_CMD_READ_10, lun, blocks, addr);
+
+again:
+        uint8_t er = SCSITransaction10(&cdb, ((uint16_t)bsize * blocks), buf, (uint8_t)MASS_CMD_DIR_IN);
+
+        if(er == MASS_ERR_STALL) {
+                MediaCTL(lun, 1);
+                delay(150);
+                if(!TestUnitReady(lun)) goto again;
+        }
+        return er;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Write data to media
+ *
+ * @param lun Logical Unit Number
+ * @param addr LBA address on media to write
+ * @param bsize size of a block (we should probably use the cached size)
+ * @param blocks how many blocks to write
+ * @param buf memory that contains the data to write
+ * @return 0 on success
+ */
+uint8_t BulkOnly::Write(uint8_t lun, uint32_t addr, uint16_t bsize, uint8_t blocks, const uint8_t * buf) {
+        if(!LUNOk[lun]) return MASS_ERR_NO_MEDIA;
+        if(!WriteOk[lun]) return MASS_ERR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nWrite LUN:\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (lun, 0x90);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nLBA:\t\t"), 0x90);
+        D_PrintHex<uint32_t > (addr, 0x90);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nblocks:\t\t"), 0x90);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (blocks, 0x90);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nblock size:\t"), 0x90);
+        D_PrintHex<uint16_t > (bsize, 0x90);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\n---------\r\n"), 0x80);
+        CDB10_t cdb = CDB10_t(SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10, lun, blocks, addr);
+
+again:
+        uint8_t er = SCSITransaction10(&cdb, ((uint16_t)bsize * blocks), (void*)buf, (uint8_t)MASS_CMD_DIR_OUT);
+
+        if(er == MASS_ERR_WRITE_STALL) {
+                MediaCTL(lun, 1);
+                delay(150);
+                if(!TestUnitReady(lun)) goto again;
+        }
+        return er;
+}
+
+// End of user functions, the remaining code below is driver internals.
+// Only developer serviceable parts below!
+
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+// Main driver code
+
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+BulkOnly::BulkOnly(USB *p) :
+pUsb(p),
+bAddress(0),
+bIface(0),
+bNumEP(1),
+qNextPollTime(0),
+bPollEnable(false),
+//dCBWTag(0),
+bLastUsbError(0) {
+        ClearAllEP();
+        dCBWTag = 0;
+        if(pUsb)
+                pUsb->RegisterDeviceClass(this);
+}
+
+/**
+ * USB_ERROR_CONFIG_REQUIRES_ADDITIONAL_RESET == success
+ * We need to standardize either the rcode, or change the API to return values
+ * so a signal that additional actions are required can be produced.
+ * Some of these codes do exist already.
+ *
+ * TECHNICAL: We could do most of this code elsewhere, with the exception of checking the class instance.
+ * Doing so would save some program memory when using multiple drivers.
+ *
+ * @param parent USB address of parent
+ * @param port address of port on parent
+ * @param lowspeed true if device is low speed
+ * @return
+ */
+uint8_t BulkOnly::ConfigureDevice(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed) {
+
+        const uint8_t constBufSize = sizeof (USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR);
+
+        uint8_t buf[constBufSize];
+        USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR * udd = reinterpret_cast<USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR*>(buf);
+        uint8_t rcode;
+        UsbDevice *p = NULL;
+        EpInfo *oldep_ptr = NULL;
+        USBTRACE("MS ConfigureDevice\r\n");
+        ClearAllEP();
+        AddressPool &addrPool = pUsb->GetAddressPool();
+
+
+        if(bAddress)
+                return USB_ERROR_CLASS_INSTANCE_ALREADY_IN_USE;
+
+        // <TECHNICAL>
+        // Get pointer to pseudo device with address 0 assigned
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(0);
+        if(!p) {
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+        }
+
+        if(!p->epinfo) {
+                USBTRACE("epinfo\r\n");
+                return USB_ERROR_EPINFO_IS_NULL;
+        }
+
+        // Save old pointer to EP_RECORD of address 0
+        oldep_ptr = p->epinfo;
+
+        // Temporary assign new pointer to epInfo to p->epinfo in order to avoid toggle inconsistence
+        p->epinfo = epInfo;
+
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+        // Get device descriptor
+        rcode = pUsb->getDevDescr(0, 0, constBufSize, (uint8_t*)buf);
+
+        // Restore p->epinfo
+        p->epinfo = oldep_ptr;
+
+        if(rcode) {
+                goto FailGetDevDescr;
+        }
+        // Allocate new address according to device class
+        bAddress = addrPool.AllocAddress(parent, false, port);
+
+        if(!bAddress)
+                return USB_ERROR_OUT_OF_ADDRESS_SPACE_IN_POOL;
+
+        // Extract Max Packet Size from the device descriptor
+        epInfo[0].maxPktSize = udd->bMaxPacketSize0;
+        // Steal and abuse from epInfo structure to save on memory.
+        epInfo[1].epAddr = udd->bNumConfigurations;
+        // </TECHNICAL>
+        return USB_ERROR_CONFIG_REQUIRES_ADDITIONAL_RESET;
+
+FailGetDevDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailGetDevDescr(rcode);
+#endif
+        rcode = USB_ERROR_FailGetDevDescr;
+
+        Release();
+        return rcode;
+};
+
+/**
+ *
+ * @param parent (not used)
+ * @param port (not used)
+ * @param lowspeed true if device is low speed
+ * @return 0 for success
+ */
+uint8_t BulkOnly::Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed) {
+        uint8_t rcode;
+        uint8_t num_of_conf = epInfo[1].epAddr; // number of configurations
+        epInfo[1].epAddr = 0;
+        USBTRACE("MS Init\r\n");
+
+        AddressPool &addrPool = pUsb->GetAddressPool();
+        UsbDevice *p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(bAddress);
+
+        if(!p)
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+
+        // Assign new address to the device
+        delay(2000);
+        rcode = pUsb->setAddr(0, 0, bAddress);
+
+        if(rcode) {
+                p->lowspeed = false;
+                addrPool.FreeAddress(bAddress);
+                bAddress = 0;
+                USBTRACE2("setAddr:", rcode);
+                return rcode;
+        }
+
+        USBTRACE2("Addr:", bAddress);
+
+        p->lowspeed = false;
+
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(bAddress);
+
+        if(!p)
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+
+        // Assign epInfo to epinfo pointer
+        rcode = pUsb->setEpInfoEntry(bAddress, 1, epInfo);
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetDevTblEntry;
+
+        USBTRACE2("NC:", num_of_conf);
+
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < num_of_conf; i++) {
+                ConfigDescParser< USB_CLASS_MASS_STORAGE,
+                        MASS_SUBCLASS_SCSI,
+                        MASS_PROTO_BBB,
+                        CP_MASK_COMPARE_CLASS |
+                        CP_MASK_COMPARE_SUBCLASS |
+                        CP_MASK_COMPARE_PROTOCOL > BulkOnlyParser(this);
+
+                rcode = pUsb->getConfDescr(bAddress, 0, i, &BulkOnlyParser);
+
+                if(rcode)
+                        goto FailGetConfDescr;
+
+                if(bNumEP > 1)
+                        break;
+        }
+
+        if(bNumEP < 3)
+                return USB_DEV_CONFIG_ERROR_DEVICE_NOT_SUPPORTED;
+
+        // Assign epInfo to epinfo pointer
+        pUsb->setEpInfoEntry(bAddress, bNumEP, epInfo);
+
+        USBTRACE2("Conf:", bConfNum);
+
+        // Set Configuration Value
+        rcode = pUsb->setConf(bAddress, 0, bConfNum);
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetConfDescr;
+
+        //Linux does a 1sec delay after this.
+        delay(1000);
+
+        rcode = GetMaxLUN(&bMaxLUN);
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailGetMaxLUN;
+
+        if(bMaxLUN >= MASS_MAX_SUPPORTED_LUN) bMaxLUN = MASS_MAX_SUPPORTED_LUN - 1;
+        ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("MaxLUN"), bMaxLUN);
+
+        delay(1000); // Delay a bit for slow firmware.
+
+        for(uint8_t lun = 0; lun <= bMaxLUN; lun++) {
+                InquiryResponse response;
+                rcode = Inquiry(lun, sizeof (InquiryResponse), (uint8_t*) & response);
+                if(rcode) {
+                        ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("Inquiry"), rcode);
+                } else {
+#if 0
+                        printf("LUN %i `", lun);
+                        uint8_t *buf = response.VendorID;
+                        for(int i = 0; i < 28; i++) printf("%c", buf[i]);
+                        printf("'\r\nQualifier %1.1X ", response.PeripheralQualifier);
+                        printf("Device type %2.2X ", response.DeviceType);
+                        printf("RMB %1.1X ", response.Removable);
+                        printf("SSCS %1.1X ", response.SCCS);
+                        uint8_t sv = response.Version;
+                        printf("SCSI version %2.2X\r\nDevice conforms to ", sv);
+                        switch(sv) {
+                                case 0:
+                                        printf("No specific");
+                                        break;
+                                case 1:
+                                        printf("ANSI X3.131-1986 (ANSI 1)");
+                                        break;
+                                case 2:
+                                        printf("ANSI X3.131-1994 (ANSI 2)");
+                                        break;
+                                case 3:
+                                        printf("ANSI INCITS 301-1997 (SPC)");
+                                        break;
+                                case 4:
+                                        printf("ANSI INCITS 351-2001 (SPC-2)");
+                                        break;
+                                case 5:
+                                        printf("ANSI INCITS 408-2005 (SPC-4)");
+                                        break;
+                                case 6:
+                                        printf("T10/1731-D (SPC-4)");
+                                        break;
+                                default:
+                                        printf("unknown");
+                        }
+                        printf(" standards.\r\n");
+#endif
+                        uint8_t tries = 0xf0;
+                        while((rcode = TestUnitReady(lun))) {
+                                if(rcode == 0x08) break; // break on no media, this is OK to do.
+                                // try to lock media and spin up
+                                if(tries < 14) {
+                                        LockMedia(lun, 1);
+                                        MediaCTL(lun, 1); // I actually have a USB stick that needs this!
+                                } else delay(2 * (tries + 1));
+                                tries++;
+                                if(!tries) break;
+                        }
+                        if(!rcode) {
+                                delay(1000);
+                                LUNOk[lun] = CheckLUN(lun);
+                                if(!LUNOk[lun]) LUNOk[lun] = CheckLUN(lun);
+                        }
+                }
+        }
+
+
+        CheckMedia();
+
+        rcode = OnInit();
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailOnInit;
+
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        USBTRACE("MS configured\r\n\r\n");
+#endif
+
+        bPollEnable = true;
+
+        //USBTRACE("Poll enabled\r\n");
+        return 0;
+
+FailSetConfDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailSetConfDescr();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailOnInit:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        USBTRACE("OnInit:");
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailGetMaxLUN:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        USBTRACE("GetMaxLUN:");
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+        //#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        //FailInvalidSectorSize:
+        //        USBTRACE("Sector Size is NOT VALID: ");
+        //        goto Fail;
+        //#endif
+
+FailSetDevTblEntry:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailSetDevTblEntry();
+        goto Fail;
+#endif
+
+FailGetConfDescr:
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        NotifyFailGetConfDescr();
+#endif
+
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+Fail:
+        NotifyFail(rcode);
+#endif
+        Release();
+        return rcode;
+}
+
+/**
+ * For driver use only.
+ *
+ * @param conf
+ * @param iface
+ * @param alt
+ * @param proto
+ * @param pep
+ */
+void BulkOnly::EndpointXtract(uint8_t conf, uint8_t iface, uint8_t alt, uint8_t proto, const USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR * pep) {
+        ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("Conf.Val"), conf);
+        ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("Iface Num"), iface);
+        ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("Alt.Set"), alt);
+
+        bConfNum = conf;
+
+        uint8_t index;
+
+#if 1
+        if((pep->bmAttributes & 0x02) == 2) {
+                index = ((pep->bEndpointAddress & 0x80) == 0x80) ? epDataInIndex : epDataOutIndex;
+                // Fill in the endpoint info structure
+                epInfo[index].epAddr = (pep->bEndpointAddress & 0x0F);
+                epInfo[index].maxPktSize = (uint8_t)pep->wMaxPacketSize;
+                epInfo[index].epAttribs = 0;
+
+                bNumEP++;
+
+                PrintEndpointDescriptor(pep);
+
+        }
+#else
+        if((pep->bmAttributes & 0x03) == 3 && (pep->bEndpointAddress & 0x80) == 0x80)
+                index = epInterruptInIndex;
+        else
+                if((pep->bmAttributes & 0x02) == 2)
+                index = ((pep->bEndpointAddress & 0x80) == 0x80) ? epDataInIndex : epDataOutIndex;
+        else
+                return;
+
+        // Fill in the endpoint info structure
+        epInfo[index].epAddr = (pep->bEndpointAddress & 0x0F);
+        epInfo[index].maxPktSize = (uint8_t)pep->wMaxPacketSize;
+        epInfo[index].epAttribs = 0;
+
+        bNumEP++;
+
+        PrintEndpointDescriptor(pep);
+#endif
+}
+
+/**
+ * For driver use only.
+ *
+ * @return
+ */
+uint8_t BulkOnly::Release() {
+        ClearAllEP();
+        pUsb->GetAddressPool().FreeAddress(bAddress);
+        return 0;
+}
+
+/**
+ * For driver use only.
+ *
+ * @param lun Logical Unit Number
+ * @return true if LUN is ready for use.
+ */
+bool BulkOnly::CheckLUN(uint8_t lun) {
+        uint8_t rcode;
+        Capacity capacity;
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < 8; i++) capacity.data[i] = 0;
+
+        rcode = ReadCapacity10(lun, (uint8_t*)capacity.data);
+        if(rcode) {
+                //printf(">>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>ReadCapacity returned %i\r\n", rcode);
+                return false;
+        }
+        ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR(">>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>CAPACITY OK ON LUN"), lun);
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < 8 /*sizeof (Capacity)*/; i++)
+                D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (capacity.data[i], 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\n\r\n"), 0x80);
+        // Only 512/1024/2048/4096 are valid values!
+        uint32_t c = BMAKE32(capacity.data[4], capacity.data[5], capacity.data[6], capacity.data[7]);
+        if(c != 0x0200LU && c != 0x0400LU && c != 0x0800LU && c != 0x1000LU) {
+                return false;
+        }
+        // Store capacity information.
+        CurrentSectorSize[lun] = (uint16_t)(c); // & 0xFFFF);
+
+        CurrentCapacity[lun] = BMAKE32(capacity.data[0], capacity.data[1], capacity.data[2], capacity.data[3]) + 1;
+        if(CurrentCapacity[lun] == /*0xffffffffLU */ 0x01LU || CurrentCapacity[lun] == 0x00LU) {
+                // Buggy firmware will report 0xffffffff or 0 for no media
+                if(CurrentCapacity[lun])
+                        ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR(">>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>BUGGY FIRMWARE. CAPACITY FAIL ON LUN"), lun);
+                return false;
+        }
+        delay(20);
+        Page3F(lun);
+        if(!TestUnitReady(lun)) return true;
+        return false;
+}
+
+/**
+ * For driver use only.
+ *
+ * Scan for media change on all LUNs
+ */
+void BulkOnly::CheckMedia() {
+        for(uint8_t lun = 0; lun <= bMaxLUN; lun++) {
+                if(TestUnitReady(lun)) {
+                        LUNOk[lun] = false;
+                        continue;
+                }
+                if(!LUNOk[lun])
+                        LUNOk[lun] = CheckLUN(lun);
+        }
+#if 0
+        printf("}}}}}}}}}}}}}}}}STATUS ");
+        for(uint8_t lun = 0; lun <= bMaxLUN; lun++) {
+                if(LUNOk[lun])
+                        printf("#");
+                else printf(".");
+        }
+        printf("\r\n");
+#endif
+        qNextPollTime = millis() + 2000;
+}
+
+/**
+ * For driver use only.
+ *
+ * @return
+ */
+uint8_t BulkOnly::Poll() {
+        //uint8_t rcode = 0;
+
+        if(!bPollEnable)
+                return 0;
+
+        if((long)(millis() - qNextPollTime) >= 0L) {
+                CheckMedia();
+        }
+        //rcode = 0;
+
+        return 0;
+}
+
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+
+// SCSI code
+
+
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+/**
+ * For driver use only.
+ *
+ * @param plun
+ * @return
+ */
+uint8_t BulkOnly::GetMaxLUN(uint8_t *plun) {
+        uint8_t ret = pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, bmREQ_MASSIN, MASS_REQ_GET_MAX_LUN, 0, 0, bIface, 1, 1, plun, NULL);
+
+        if(ret == hrSTALL)
+                *plun = 0;
+
+        return 0;
+}
+
+/**
+ * For driver use only. Used during Driver Init
+ *
+ * @param lun Logical Unit Number
+ * @param bsize
+ * @param buf
+ * @return
+ */
+uint8_t BulkOnly::Inquiry(uint8_t lun, uint16_t bsize, uint8_t *buf) {
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nInquiry\r\n"), 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("---------\r\n"), 0x80);
+
+        CDB6_t cdb = CDB6_t(SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY, lun, 0LU, (uint8_t)bsize, 0);
+        uint8_t rc = SCSITransaction6(&cdb, bsize, buf, (uint8_t)MASS_CMD_DIR_IN);
+
+        return rc;
+}
+
+/**
+ * For driver use only.
+ *
+ * @param lun Logical Unit Number
+ * @return
+ */
+uint8_t BulkOnly::TestUnitReady(uint8_t lun) {
+        //SetCurLUN(lun);
+        if(!bAddress)
+                return MASS_ERR_UNIT_NOT_READY;
+
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nTestUnitReady\r\n"), 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("-----------------\r\n"), 0x80);
+
+        CDB6_t cdb = CDB6_t(SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY, lun, (uint8_t)0, 0);
+        return SCSITransaction6(&cdb, 0, NULL, (uint8_t)MASS_CMD_DIR_IN);
+
+}
+
+/**
+ * For driver use only.
+ *
+ * @param lun Logical Unit Number
+ * @param pc
+ * @param page
+ * @param subpage
+ * @param len
+ * @param pbuf
+ * @return
+ */
+uint8_t BulkOnly::ModeSense6(uint8_t lun, uint8_t pc, uint8_t page, uint8_t subpage, uint8_t len, uint8_t * pbuf) {
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\rModeSense\r\n"), 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("------------\r\n"), 0x80);
+
+        CDB6_t cdb = CDB6_t(SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY, lun, (uint32_t)((((pc << 6) | page) << 8) | subpage), len, 0);
+        return SCSITransaction6(&cdb, len, pbuf, (uint8_t)MASS_CMD_DIR_IN);
+}
+
+/**
+ * For driver use only.
+ *
+ * @param lun Logical Unit Number
+ * @param bsize
+ * @param buf
+ * @return
+ */
+uint8_t BulkOnly::ReadCapacity10(uint8_t lun, uint8_t *buf) {
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nReadCapacity\r\n"), 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("---------------\r\n"), 0x80);
+
+        CDB10_t cdb = CDB10_t(SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10, lun);
+        return SCSITransaction10(&cdb, 8, buf, (uint8_t)MASS_CMD_DIR_IN);
+}
+
+/**
+ * For driver use only.
+ *
+ * Page 3F contains write protect status.
+ *
+ * @param lun Logical Unit Number to test.
+ * @return Write protect switch status.
+ */
+uint8_t BulkOnly::Page3F(uint8_t lun) {
+        uint8_t buf[192];
+        for(int i = 0; i < 192; i++) {
+                buf[i] = 0x00;
+        }
+        WriteOk[lun] = true;
+        uint8_t rc = ModeSense6(lun, 0, 0x3f, 0, 192, buf);
+        if(!rc) {
+                WriteOk[lun] = ((buf[2] & 0x80) == 0);
+                Notify(PSTR("Mode Sense: "), 0x80);
+                for(int i = 0; i < 4; i++) {
+                        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (buf[i], 0x80);
+                        Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                }
+                Notify(PSTR("\r\n"), 0x80);
+        }
+        return rc;
+}
+
+/**
+ * For driver use only.
+ *
+ * @param lun Logical Unit Number
+ * @param size
+ * @param buf
+ * @return
+ */
+uint8_t BulkOnly::RequestSense(uint8_t lun, uint16_t size, uint8_t *buf) {
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nRequestSense\r\n"), 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("----------------\r\n"), 0x80);
+
+        CDB6_t cdb = CDB6_t(SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE, lun, 0LU, (uint8_t)size, 0);
+        CommandBlockWrapper cbw = CommandBlockWrapper(++dCBWTag, (uint32_t)size, &cdb, (uint8_t)MASS_CMD_DIR_IN);
+        //SetCurLUN(lun);
+        return Transaction(&cbw, size, buf);
+}
+
+
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+
+// USB code
+
+
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+/**
+ * For driver use only.
+ *
+ * @param index
+ * @return
+ */
+uint8_t BulkOnly::ClearEpHalt(uint8_t index) {
+        if(index == 0)
+                return 0;
+
+        uint8_t ret = 0;
+
+        while((ret = (pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, USB_SETUP_HOST_TO_DEVICE | USB_SETUP_TYPE_STANDARD | USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_ENDPOINT, USB_REQUEST_CLEAR_FEATURE, USB_FEATURE_ENDPOINT_HALT, 0, ((index == epDataInIndex) ? (0x80 | epInfo[index].epAddr) : epInfo[index].epAddr), 0, 0, NULL, NULL)) == 0x01))
+                delay(6);
+
+        if(ret) {
+                ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("ClearEpHalt"), ret);
+                ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("EP"), ((index == epDataInIndex) ? (0x80 | epInfo[index].epAddr) : epInfo[index].epAddr));
+                return ret;
+        }
+        epInfo[index].bmSndToggle = 0;
+        epInfo[index].bmRcvToggle = 0;
+        // epAttribs = 0;
+        return 0;
+}
+
+/**
+ * For driver use only.
+ *
+ */
+void BulkOnly::Reset() {
+        while(pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, bmREQ_MASSOUT, MASS_REQ_BOMSR, 0, 0, bIface, 0, 0, NULL, NULL) == 0x01) delay(6);
+}
+
+/**
+ * For driver use only.
+ *
+ * @return 0 if successful
+ */
+uint8_t BulkOnly::ResetRecovery() {
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nResetRecovery\r\n"), 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("-----------------\r\n"), 0x80);
+
+        delay(6);
+        Reset();
+        delay(6);
+        ClearEpHalt(epDataInIndex);
+        delay(6);
+        bLastUsbError = ClearEpHalt(epDataOutIndex);
+        delay(6);
+        return bLastUsbError;
+}
+
+/**
+ * For driver use only.
+ *
+ * Clear all EP data and clear all LUN status
+ */
+void BulkOnly::ClearAllEP() {
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < MASS_MAX_ENDPOINTS; i++) {
+                epInfo[i].epAddr = 0;
+                epInfo[i].maxPktSize = (i) ? 0 : 8;
+                epInfo[i].epAttribs = 0;
+
+                epInfo[i].bmNakPower = USB_NAK_DEFAULT;
+        }
+
+        for(uint8_t i = 0; i < MASS_MAX_SUPPORTED_LUN; i++) {
+                LUNOk[i] = false;
+                WriteOk[i] = false;
+                CurrentCapacity[i] = 0lu;
+                CurrentSectorSize[i] = 0;
+        }
+
+        bIface = 0;
+        bNumEP = 1;
+        bAddress = 0;
+        qNextPollTime = 0;
+        bPollEnable = false;
+        bLastUsbError = 0;
+        bMaxLUN = 0;
+        bTheLUN = 0;
+}
+
+/**
+ * For driver use only.
+ *
+ * @param pcsw
+ * @param pcbw
+ * @return
+ */
+bool BulkOnly::IsValidCSW(CommandStatusWrapper *pcsw, CommandBlockWrapperBase *pcbw) {
+        if(pcsw->dCSWSignature != MASS_CSW_SIGNATURE) {
+                Notify(PSTR("CSW:Sig error\r\n"), 0x80);
+                return false;
+        }
+        if(pcsw->dCSWTag != pcbw->dCBWTag) {
+                Notify(PSTR("CSW:Wrong tag\r\n"), 0x80);
+                return false;
+        }
+        return true;
+}
+
+/**
+ * For driver use only.
+ *
+ * @param error
+ * @param index
+ * @return
+ */
+uint8_t BulkOnly::HandleUsbError(uint8_t error, uint8_t index) {
+        uint8_t count = 3;
+
+        bLastUsbError = error;
+        //if (error)
+        //ClearEpHalt(index);
+        while(error && count) {
+                if(error != hrSUCCESS) {
+                        ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("USB Error"), error);
+                        ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("Index"), index);
+                }
+                switch(error) {
+                                // case hrWRONGPID:
+                        case hrSUCCESS:
+                                return MASS_ERR_SUCCESS;
+                        case hrBUSY:
+                                // SIE is busy, just hang out and try again.
+                                return MASS_ERR_UNIT_BUSY;
+                        case hrTIMEOUT:
+                        case hrJERR: return MASS_ERR_DEVICE_DISCONNECTED;
+                        case hrSTALL:
+                                if(index == 0)
+                                        return MASS_ERR_STALL;
+                                ClearEpHalt(index);
+                                if(index != epDataInIndex)
+                                        return MASS_ERR_WRITE_STALL;
+                                return MASS_ERR_STALL;
+
+                        case hrNAK:
+                                if(index == 0)
+                                        return MASS_ERR_UNIT_BUSY;
+                                return MASS_ERR_UNIT_BUSY;
+
+                        case hrTOGERR:
+                                // Handle a very super rare corner case, where toggles become de-synched.
+                                // I have only ran into one device that has this firmware bug, and this is
+                                // the only clean way to get back into sync with the buggy device firmware.
+                                //   --AJK
+                                if(bAddress && bConfNum) {
+                                        error = pUsb->setConf(bAddress, 0, bConfNum);
+
+                                        if(error)
+                                                break;
+                                }
+                                return MASS_ERR_SUCCESS;
+                        default:
+                                ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("\r\nUSB"), error);
+                                return MASS_ERR_GENERAL_USB_ERROR;
+                }
+                count--;
+        } // while
+
+        return ((error && !count) ? MASS_ERR_GENERAL_USB_ERROR : MASS_ERR_SUCCESS);
+}
+
+#if MS_WANT_PARSER
+
+uint8_t BulkOnly::Transaction(CommandBlockWrapper *pcbw, uint16_t buf_size, void *buf) {
+        return Transaction(CommandBlockWrapper *pcbw, uint16_t buf_size, void *buf, 0);
+}
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * For driver use only.
+ *
+ * @param pcbw
+ * @param buf_size
+ * @param buf
+ * @param flags
+ * @return
+ */
+uint8_t BulkOnly::Transaction(CommandBlockWrapper *pcbw, uint16_t buf_size, void *buf
+#if MS_WANT_PARSER
+        , uint8_t flags
+#endif
+        ) {
+
+#if MS_WANT_PARSER
+        uint16_t bytes = (pcbw->dCBWDataTransferLength > buf_size) ? buf_size : pcbw->dCBWDataTransferLength;
+        printf("Transfersize %i\r\n", bytes);
+        delay(1000);
+
+        bool callback = (flags & MASS_TRANS_FLG_CALLBACK) == MASS_TRANS_FLG_CALLBACK;
+#else
+        uint16_t bytes = buf_size;
+#endif
+        bool write = (pcbw->bmCBWFlags & MASS_CMD_DIR_IN) != MASS_CMD_DIR_IN;
+        uint8_t ret = 0;
+        uint8_t usberr;
+        CommandStatusWrapper csw; // up here, we allocate ahead to save cpu cycles.
+        SetCurLUN(pcbw->bmCBWLUN);
+        ErrorMessage<uint32_t > (PSTR("CBW.dCBWTag"), pcbw->dCBWTag);
+
+        while((usberr = pUsb->outTransfer(bAddress, epInfo[epDataOutIndex].epAddr, sizeof (CommandBlockWrapper), (uint8_t*)pcbw)) == hrBUSY) delay(1);
+
+        ret = HandleUsbError(usberr, epDataOutIndex);
+        //ret = HandleUsbError(pUsb->outTransfer(bAddress, epInfo[epDataOutIndex].epAddr, sizeof (CommandBlockWrapper), (uint8_t*)pcbw), epDataOutIndex);
+        if(ret) {
+                ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("============================ CBW"), ret);
+        } else {
+                if(bytes) {
+                        if(!write) {
+#if MS_WANT_PARSER
+                                if(callback) {
+                                        uint8_t rbuf[bytes];
+                                        while((usberr = pUsb->inTransfer(bAddress, epInfo[epDataInIndex].epAddr, &bytes, rbuf)) == hrBUSY) delay(1);
+                                        if(usberr == hrSUCCESS) ((USBReadParser*)buf)->Parse(bytes, rbuf, 0);
+                                } else {
+#endif
+                                        while((usberr = pUsb->inTransfer(bAddress, epInfo[epDataInIndex].epAddr, &bytes, (uint8_t*)buf)) == hrBUSY) delay(1);
+#if MS_WANT_PARSER
+
+                                }
+#endif
+                                ret = HandleUsbError(usberr, epDataInIndex);
+                        } else {
+                                while((usberr = pUsb->outTransfer(bAddress, epInfo[epDataOutIndex].epAddr, bytes, (uint8_t*)buf)) == hrBUSY) delay(1);
+                                ret = HandleUsbError(usberr, epDataOutIndex);
+                        }
+                        if(ret) {
+                                ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("============================ DAT"), ret);
+                        }
+                }
+        }
+
+        {
+                bytes = sizeof (CommandStatusWrapper);
+                int tries = 2;
+                while(tries--) {
+                        while((usberr = pUsb->inTransfer(bAddress, epInfo[epDataInIndex].epAddr, &bytes, (uint8_t*) & csw)) == hrBUSY) delay(1);
+                        if(!usberr) break;
+                        ClearEpHalt(epDataInIndex);
+                        if(tries) ResetRecovery();
+                }
+                if(!ret) {
+                        Notify(PSTR("CBW:\t\tOK\r\n"), 0x80);
+                        Notify(PSTR("Data Stage:\tOK\r\n"), 0x80);
+                } else {
+                        // Throw away csw, IT IS NOT OF ANY USE.
+                        ResetRecovery();
+                        return ret;
+                }
+                ret = HandleUsbError(usberr, epDataInIndex);
+                if(ret) {
+                        ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("============================ CSW"), ret);
+                }
+                if(usberr == hrSUCCESS) {
+                        if(IsValidCSW(&csw, pcbw)) {
+                                //ErrorMessage<uint32_t > (PSTR("CSW.dCBWTag"), csw.dCSWTag);
+                                //ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("bCSWStatus"), csw.bCSWStatus);
+                                //ErrorMessage<uint32_t > (PSTR("dCSWDataResidue"), csw.dCSWDataResidue);
+                                Notify(PSTR("CSW:\t\tOK\r\n\r\n"), 0x80);
+                                return csw.bCSWStatus;
+                        } else {
+                                // NOTE! Sometimes this is caused by the reported residue being wrong.
+                                // Get a different device. It isn't compliant, and should have never passed Q&A.
+                                // I own one... 05e3:0701 Genesys Logic, Inc. USB 2.0 IDE Adapter.
+                                // Other devices that exhibit this behavior exist in the wild too.
+                                // Be sure to check quirks in the Linux source code before reporting a bug. --xxxajk
+                                Notify(PSTR("Invalid CSW\r\n"), 0x80);
+                                ResetRecovery();
+                                //return MASS_ERR_SUCCESS;
+                                return MASS_ERR_INVALID_CSW;
+                        }
+                }
+        }
+        return ret;
+}
+
+/**
+ * For driver use only.
+ *
+ * @param lun Logical Unit Number
+ * @return
+ */
+uint8_t BulkOnly::SetCurLUN(uint8_t lun) {
+        if(lun > bMaxLUN)
+                return MASS_ERR_INVALID_LUN;
+        bTheLUN = lun;
+        return MASS_ERR_SUCCESS;
+};
+
+/**
+ * For driver use only.
+ *
+ * @param status
+ * @return
+ */
+uint8_t BulkOnly::HandleSCSIError(uint8_t status) {
+        uint8_t ret = 0;
+
+        switch(status) {
+                case 0: return MASS_ERR_SUCCESS;
+
+                case 2:
+                        ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("Phase Error"), status);
+                        ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("LUN"), bTheLUN);
+                        ResetRecovery();
+                        return MASS_ERR_GENERAL_SCSI_ERROR;
+
+                case 1:
+                        ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("SCSI Error"), status);
+                        ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("LUN"), bTheLUN);
+                        RequestSenseResponce rsp;
+
+                        ret = RequestSense(bTheLUN, sizeof (RequestSenseResponce), (uint8_t*) & rsp);
+
+                        if(ret) {
+                                return MASS_ERR_GENERAL_SCSI_ERROR;
+                        }
+                        ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("Response Code"), rsp.bResponseCode);
+                        if(rsp.bResponseCode & 0x80) {
+                                Notify(PSTR("Information field: "), 0x80);
+                                for(int i = 0; i < 4; i++) {
+                                        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (rsp.CmdSpecificInformation[i], 0x80);
+                                        Notify(PSTR(" "), 0x80);
+                                }
+                                Notify(PSTR("\r\n"), 0x80);
+                        }
+                        ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("Sense Key"), rsp.bmSenseKey);
+                        ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("Add Sense Code"), rsp.bAdditionalSenseCode);
+                        ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("Add Sense Qual"), rsp.bAdditionalSenseQualifier);
+                        // warning, this is not testing ASQ, only SK and ASC.
+                        switch(rsp.bmSenseKey) {
+                                case SCSI_S_UNIT_ATTENTION:
+                                        switch(rsp.bAdditionalSenseCode) {
+                                                case SCSI_ASC_MEDIA_CHANGED:
+                                                        return MASS_ERR_MEDIA_CHANGED;
+                                                default:
+                                                        return MASS_ERR_UNIT_NOT_READY;
+                                        }
+                                case SCSI_S_NOT_READY:
+                                        switch(rsp.bAdditionalSenseCode) {
+                                                case SCSI_ASC_MEDIUM_NOT_PRESENT:
+                                                        return MASS_ERR_NO_MEDIA;
+                                                default:
+                                                        return MASS_ERR_UNIT_NOT_READY;
+                                        }
+                                case SCSI_S_ILLEGAL_REQUEST:
+                                        switch(rsp.bAdditionalSenseCode) {
+                                                case SCSI_ASC_LBA_OUT_OF_RANGE:
+                                                        return MASS_ERR_BAD_LBA;
+                                                default:
+                                                        return MASS_ERR_CMD_NOT_SUPPORTED;
+                                        }
+                                default:
+                                        return MASS_ERR_GENERAL_SCSI_ERROR;
+                        }
+
+                        // case 4: return MASS_ERR_UNIT_BUSY; // Busy means retry later.
+                        //    case 0x05/0x14: we stalled out
+                        //    case 0x15/0x16: we naked out.
+                default:
+                        ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("Gen SCSI Err"), status);
+                        ErrorMessage<uint8_t > (PSTR("LUN"), bTheLUN);
+                        return status;
+        } // switch
+}
+
+
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+
+// Debugging code
+
+
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+/**
+ *
+ * @param ep_ptr
+ */
+void BulkOnly::PrintEndpointDescriptor(const USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR * ep_ptr) {
+        Notify(PSTR("Endpoint descriptor:"), 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nLength:\t\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (ep_ptr->bLength, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nType:\t\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (ep_ptr->bDescriptorType, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nAddress:\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (ep_ptr->bEndpointAddress, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nAttributes:\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (ep_ptr->bmAttributes, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nMaxPktSize:\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint16_t > (ep_ptr->wMaxPacketSize, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nPoll Intrv:\t"), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (ep_ptr->bInterval, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\n"), 0x80);
+}
+
+
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+
+// misc/to kill/to-do
+
+
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+/* We won't be needing this... */
+uint8_t BulkOnly::Read(uint8_t lun, uint32_t addr, uint16_t bsize, uint8_t blocks, USBReadParser * prs) {
+#if MS_WANT_PARSER
+        if(!LUNOk[lun]) return MASS_ERR_NO_MEDIA;
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nRead (With parser)\r\n"), 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("---------\r\n"), 0x80);
+
+        CommandBlockWrapper cbw = CommandBlockWrapper();
+
+        cbw.dCBWSignature = MASS_CBW_SIGNATURE;
+        cbw.dCBWTag = ++dCBWTag;
+        cbw.dCBWDataTransferLength = ((uint32_t)bsize * blocks);
+        cbw.bmCBWFlags = MASS_CMD_DIR_IN,
+                cbw.bmCBWLUN = lun;
+        cbw.bmCBWCBLength = 10;
+
+        cbw.CBWCB[0] = SCSI_CMD_READ_10;
+        cbw.CBWCB[8] = blocks;
+        cbw.CBWCB[2] = ((addr >> 24) & 0xff);
+        cbw.CBWCB[3] = ((addr >> 16) & 0xff);
+        cbw.CBWCB[4] = ((addr >> 8) & 0xff);
+        cbw.CBWCB[5] = (addr & 0xff);
+
+        return HandleSCSIError(Transaction(&cbw, bsize, prs, 1));
+#else
+        return MASS_ERR_NOT_IMPLEMENTED;
+#endif
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/masstorage.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/masstorage.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d39fd66f3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/masstorage.h
@@ -0,0 +1,571 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+
+#if !defined(__MASSTORAGE_H__)
+#define __MASSTORAGE_H__
+
+// Cruft removal, makes driver smaller, faster.
+#ifndef MS_WANT_PARSER
+#define MS_WANT_PARSER 0
+#endif
+
+#include "Usb.h"
+
+#define bmREQ_MASSOUT       USB_SETUP_HOST_TO_DEVICE|USB_SETUP_TYPE_CLASS|USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_INTERFACE
+#define bmREQ_MASSIN        USB_SETUP_DEVICE_TO_HOST|USB_SETUP_TYPE_CLASS|USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_INTERFACE
+
+// Mass Storage Subclass Constants
+#define MASS_SUBCLASS_SCSI_NOT_REPORTED 0x00    // De facto use
+#define MASS_SUBCLASS_RBC               0x01
+#define MASS_SUBCLASS_ATAPI             0x02    // MMC-5 (ATAPI)
+#define MASS_SUBCLASS_OBSOLETE1         0x03    // Was QIC-157
+#define MASS_SUBCLASS_UFI               0x04    // Specifies how to interface Floppy Disk Drives to USB
+#define MASS_SUBCLASS_OBSOLETE2         0x05    // Was SFF-8070i
+#define MASS_SUBCLASS_SCSI              0x06    // SCSI Transparent Command Set
+#define MASS_SUBCLASS_LSDFS             0x07    // Specifies how host has to negotiate access before trying SCSI
+#define MASS_SUBCLASS_IEEE1667          0x08
+
+// Mass Storage Class Protocols
+#define MASS_PROTO_CBI                  0x00    // CBI (with command completion interrupt)
+#define MASS_PROTO_CBI_NO_INT           0x01    // CBI (without command completion interrupt)
+#define MASS_PROTO_OBSOLETE             0x02
+#define MASS_PROTO_BBB                  0x50    // Bulk Only Transport
+#define MASS_PROTO_UAS                  0x62
+
+// Request Codes
+#define MASS_REQ_ADSC                   0x00
+#define MASS_REQ_GET                    0xFC
+#define MASS_REQ_PUT                    0xFD
+#define MASS_REQ_GET_MAX_LUN            0xFE
+#define MASS_REQ_BOMSR                  0xFF    // Bulk-Only Mass Storage Reset
+
+#define MASS_CBW_SIGNATURE              0x43425355
+#define MASS_CSW_SIGNATURE              0x53425355
+
+#define MASS_CMD_DIR_OUT                0 // (0 << 7)
+#define MASS_CMD_DIR_IN                 0x80 //(1 << 7)
+
+/*
+ * Reference documents from T10 (http://www.t10.org)
+ * SCSI Primary Commands - 3 (SPC-3)
+ * SCSI Block Commands - 2 (SBC-2)
+ * Multi-Media Commands - 5 (MMC-5)
+ */
+
+/* Group 1 commands (CDB's here are should all be 6-bytes) */
+#define SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY        0x00
+#define SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE          0x03
+#define SCSI_CMD_FORMAT_UNIT            0x04
+#define SCSI_CMD_READ_6                 0x08
+#define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_6                0x0A
+#define SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY                0x12
+#define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SELECT_6          0x15
+#define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6           0x1A
+#define SCSI_CMD_START_STOP_UNIT        0x1B
+#define SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_REMOVAL        0x1E
+/* Group 2 Commands (CDB's here are 10-bytes) */
+#define SCSI_CMD_READ_FORMAT_CAPACITIES 0x23
+#define SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10       0x25
+#define SCSI_CMD_READ_10                0x28
+#define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10               0x2A
+#define SCSI_CMD_SEEK_10                0x2B
+#define SCSI_CMD_ERASE_10               0x2C
+#define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_AND_VERIFY_10    0x2E
+#define SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10              0x2F
+#define SCSI_CMD_SYNCHRONIZE_CACHE      0x35
+#define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_BUFFER           0x3B
+#define SCSI_CMD_READ_BUFFER            0x3C
+#define SCSI_CMD_READ_SUBCHANNEL        0x42
+#define SCSI_CMD_READ_TOC               0x43
+#define SCSI_CMD_READ_HEADER            0x44
+#define SCSI_CMD_PLAY_AUDIO_10          0x45
+#define SCSI_CMD_GET_CONFIGURATION      0x46
+#define SCSI_CMD_PLAY_AUDIO_MSF         0x47
+#define SCSI_CMD_PLAY_AUDIO_TI          0x48
+#define SCSI_CMD_PLAY_TRACK_REL_10      0x49
+#define SCSI_CMD_GET_EVENT_STATUS       0x4A
+#define SCSI_CMD_PAUSE_RESUME           0x4B
+#define SCSI_CMD_READ_DISC_INFORMATION  0x51
+#define SCSI_CMD_READ_TRACK_INFORMATION 0x52
+#define SCSI_CMD_RESERVE_TRACK          0x53
+#define SCSI_CMD_SEND_OPC_INFORMATION   0x54
+#define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SELECT_10         0x55
+#define SCSI_CMD_REPAIR_TRACK           0x58
+#define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_10          0x5A
+#define SCSI_CMD_CLOSE_TRACK_SESSION    0x5B
+#define SCSI_CMD_READ_BUFFER_CAPACITY   0x5C
+#define SCSI_CMD_SEND_CUE_SHEET         0x5D
+/* Group 5 Commands (CDB's here are 12-bytes) */
+#define SCSI_CMD_REPORT_LUNS            0xA0
+#define SCSI_CMD_BLANK                  0xA1
+#define SCSI_CMD_SECURITY_PROTOCOL_IN   0xA2
+#define SCSI_CMD_SEND_KEY               0xA3
+#define SCSI_CMD_REPORT_KEY             0xA4
+#define SCSI_CMD_PLAY_AUDIO_12          0xA5
+#define SCSI_CMD_LOAD_UNLOAD            0xA6
+#define SCSI_CMD_SET_READ_AHEAD         0xA7
+#define SCSI_CMD_READ_12                0xA8
+#define SCSI_CMD_PLAY_TRACK_REL_12      0xA9
+#define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_12               0xAA
+#define SCSI_CMD_READ_MEDIA_SERIAL_12   0xAB
+#define SCSI_CMD_GET_PERFORMANCE        0xAC
+#define SCSI_CMD_READ_DVD_STRUCTURE     0xAD
+#define SCSI_CMD_SECURITY_PROTOCOL_OUT  0xB5
+#define SCSI_CMD_SET_STREAMING          0xB6
+#define SCSI_CMD_READ_MSF               0xB9
+#define SCSI_CMD_SET_SPEED              0xBB
+#define SCSI_CMD_MECHANISM_STATUS       0xBD
+#define SCSI_CMD_READ_CD                0xBE
+#define SCSI_CMD_SEND_DISC_STRUCTURE    0xBF
+/* Vendor-unique Commands, included for completeness */
+#define SCSI_CMD_CD_PLAYBACK_STATUS     0xC4 /* SONY unique */
+#define SCSI_CMD_PLAYBACK_CONTROL       0xC9 /* SONY unique */
+#define SCSI_CMD_READ_CDDA              0xD8 /* Vendor unique */
+#define SCSI_CMD_READ_CDXA              0xDB /* Vendor unique */
+#define SCSI_CMD_READ_ALL_SUBCODES      0xDF /* Vendor unique */
+
+/* SCSI error codes */
+#define SCSI_S_NOT_READY                0x02
+#define SCSI_S_MEDIUM_ERROR             0x03
+#define SCSI_S_ILLEGAL_REQUEST          0x05
+#define SCSI_S_UNIT_ATTENTION           0x06
+#define SCSI_ASC_LBA_OUT_OF_RANGE       0x21
+#define SCSI_ASC_MEDIA_CHANGED          0x28
+#define SCSI_ASC_MEDIUM_NOT_PRESENT     0x3A
+
+/* USB error codes */
+#define MASS_ERR_SUCCESS                0x00
+#define MASS_ERR_PHASE_ERROR            0x02
+#define MASS_ERR_UNIT_NOT_READY         0x03
+#define MASS_ERR_UNIT_BUSY              0x04
+#define MASS_ERR_STALL                  0x05
+#define MASS_ERR_CMD_NOT_SUPPORTED      0x06
+#define MASS_ERR_INVALID_CSW            0x07
+#define MASS_ERR_NO_MEDIA               0x08
+#define MASS_ERR_BAD_LBA                0x09
+#define MASS_ERR_MEDIA_CHANGED          0x0A
+#define MASS_ERR_DEVICE_DISCONNECTED    0x11
+#define MASS_ERR_UNABLE_TO_RECOVER      0x12    // Reset recovery error
+#define MASS_ERR_INVALID_LUN            0x13
+#define MASS_ERR_WRITE_STALL            0x14
+#define MASS_ERR_READ_NAKS              0x15
+#define MASS_ERR_WRITE_NAKS             0x16
+#define MASS_ERR_WRITE_PROTECTED        0x17
+#define MASS_ERR_NOT_IMPLEMENTED        0xFD
+#define MASS_ERR_GENERAL_SCSI_ERROR     0xFE
+#define MASS_ERR_GENERAL_USB_ERROR      0xFF
+#define MASS_ERR_USER                   0xA0    // For subclasses to define their own error codes
+
+#define MASS_TRANS_FLG_CALLBACK         0x01    // Callback is involved
+#define MASS_TRANS_FLG_NO_STALL_CHECK   0x02    // STALL condition is not checked
+#define MASS_TRANS_FLG_NO_PHASE_CHECK   0x04    // PHASE_ERROR is not checked
+
+#define MASS_MAX_ENDPOINTS              3
+
+struct Capacity {
+        uint8_t data[8];
+        //uint32_t dwBlockAddress;
+        //uint32_t dwBlockLength;
+} __attribute__((packed));
+
+struct BASICCDB {
+        uint8_t Opcode;
+
+        unsigned unused : 5;
+        unsigned LUN : 3;
+
+        uint8_t info[12];
+} __attribute__((packed));
+
+typedef BASICCDB BASICCDB_t;
+
+struct CDB6 {
+        uint8_t Opcode;
+
+        unsigned LBAMSB : 5;
+        unsigned LUN : 3;
+
+        uint8_t LBAHB;
+        uint8_t LBALB;
+        uint8_t AllocationLength;
+        uint8_t Control;
+
+public:
+
+        CDB6(uint8_t _Opcode, uint8_t _LUN, uint32_t LBA, uint8_t _AllocationLength, uint8_t _Control) :
+        Opcode(_Opcode), LBAMSB(BGRAB2(LBA) & 0x1f), LUN(_LUN), LBAHB(BGRAB1(LBA)), LBALB(BGRAB0(LBA)),
+        AllocationLength(_AllocationLength), Control(_Control) {
+        }
+
+        CDB6(uint8_t _Opcode, uint8_t _LUN, uint8_t _AllocationLength, uint8_t _Control) :
+        Opcode(_Opcode), LBAMSB(0), LUN(_LUN), LBAHB(0), LBALB(0),
+        AllocationLength(_AllocationLength), Control(_Control) {
+        }
+} __attribute__((packed));
+
+typedef CDB6 CDB6_t;
+
+struct CDB10 {
+        uint8_t Opcode;
+
+        unsigned Service_Action : 5;
+        unsigned LUN : 3;
+
+        uint8_t LBA_L_M_MB;
+        uint8_t LBA_L_M_LB;
+        uint8_t LBA_L_L_MB;
+        uint8_t LBA_L_L_LB;
+
+        uint8_t Misc2;
+
+        uint8_t ALC_MB;
+        uint8_t ALC_LB;
+
+        uint8_t Control;
+public:
+
+        CDB10(uint8_t _Opcode, uint8_t _LUN) :
+        Opcode(_Opcode), Service_Action(0), LUN(_LUN),
+        LBA_L_M_MB(0), LBA_L_M_LB(0), LBA_L_L_MB(0), LBA_L_L_LB(0),
+        Misc2(0), ALC_MB(0), ALC_LB(0), Control(0) {
+        }
+
+        CDB10(uint8_t _Opcode, uint8_t _LUN, uint16_t xflen, uint32_t _LBA) :
+        Opcode(_Opcode), Service_Action(0), LUN(_LUN),
+        LBA_L_M_MB(BGRAB3(_LBA)), LBA_L_M_LB(BGRAB2(_LBA)), LBA_L_L_MB(BGRAB1(_LBA)), LBA_L_L_LB(BGRAB0(_LBA)),
+        Misc2(0), ALC_MB(BGRAB1(xflen)), ALC_LB(BGRAB0(xflen)), Control(0) {
+        }
+} __attribute__((packed));
+
+typedef CDB10 CDB10_t;
+
+struct CDB12 {
+        uint8_t Opcode;
+
+        unsigned Service_Action : 5;
+        unsigned Misc : 3;
+
+        uint8_t LBA_L_M_LB;
+        uint8_t LBA_L_L_MB;
+        uint8_t LBA_L_L_LB;
+
+        uint8_t ALC_M_LB;
+        uint8_t ALC_L_MB;
+        uint8_t ALC_L_LB;
+        uint8_t Control;
+} __attribute__((packed));
+
+typedef CDB12 CDB12_t;
+
+struct CDB_LBA32_16 {
+        uint8_t Opcode;
+
+        unsigned Service_Action : 5;
+        unsigned Misc : 3;
+
+        uint8_t LBA_L_M_MB;
+        uint8_t LBA_L_M_LB;
+        uint8_t LBA_L_L_MB;
+        uint8_t LBA_L_L_LB;
+
+        uint8_t A_M_M_MB;
+        uint8_t A_M_M_LB;
+        uint8_t A_M_L_MB;
+        uint8_t A_M_L_LB;
+
+        uint8_t ALC_M_MB;
+        uint8_t ALC_M_LB;
+        uint8_t ALC_L_MB;
+        uint8_t ALC_L_LB;
+
+        uint8_t Misc2;
+        uint8_t Control;
+} __attribute__((packed));
+
+struct CDB_LBA64_16 {
+        uint8_t Opcode;
+        uint8_t Misc;
+
+        uint8_t LBA_M_M_MB;
+        uint8_t LBA_M_M_LB;
+        uint8_t LBA_M_L_MB;
+        uint8_t LBA_M_L_LB;
+
+        uint8_t LBA_L_M_MB;
+        uint8_t LBA_L_M_LB;
+        uint8_t LBA_L_L_MB;
+        uint8_t LBA_L_L_LB;
+
+        uint8_t ALC_M_MB;
+        uint8_t ALC_M_LB;
+        uint8_t ALC_L_MB;
+        uint8_t ALC_L_LB;
+
+        uint8_t Misc2;
+        uint8_t Control;
+} __attribute__((packed));
+
+struct InquiryResponse {
+        uint8_t DeviceType : 5;
+        uint8_t PeripheralQualifier : 3;
+
+        unsigned Reserved : 7;
+        unsigned Removable : 1;
+
+        uint8_t Version;
+
+        unsigned ResponseDataFormat : 4;
+        unsigned HISUP : 1;
+        unsigned NormACA : 1;
+        unsigned TrmTsk : 1;
+        unsigned AERC : 1;
+
+        uint8_t AdditionalLength;
+        //uint8_t Reserved3[2];
+
+        unsigned PROTECT : 1;
+        unsigned Res : 2;
+        unsigned ThreePC : 1;
+        unsigned TPGS : 2;
+        unsigned ACC : 1;
+        unsigned SCCS : 1;
+
+        unsigned ADDR16 : 1;
+        unsigned R1 : 1;
+        unsigned R2 : 1;
+        unsigned MCHNGR : 1;
+        unsigned MULTIP : 1;
+        unsigned VS : 1;
+        unsigned ENCSERV : 1;
+        unsigned BQUE : 1;
+
+        unsigned SoftReset : 1;
+        unsigned CmdQue : 1;
+        unsigned Reserved4 : 1;
+        unsigned Linked : 1;
+        unsigned Sync : 1;
+        unsigned WideBus16Bit : 1;
+        unsigned WideBus32Bit : 1;
+        unsigned RelAddr : 1;
+
+        uint8_t VendorID[8];
+        uint8_t ProductID[16];
+        uint8_t RevisionID[4];
+} __attribute__((packed));
+
+struct CommandBlockWrapperBase {
+        uint32_t dCBWSignature;
+        uint32_t dCBWTag;
+        uint32_t dCBWDataTransferLength;
+        uint8_t bmCBWFlags;
+public:
+
+        CommandBlockWrapperBase() {
+        }
+
+        CommandBlockWrapperBase(uint32_t tag, uint32_t xflen, uint8_t flgs) :
+        dCBWSignature(MASS_CBW_SIGNATURE), dCBWTag(tag), dCBWDataTransferLength(xflen), bmCBWFlags(flgs) {
+        }
+} __attribute__((packed));
+
+struct CommandBlockWrapper : public CommandBlockWrapperBase {
+
+        struct {
+                uint8_t bmCBWLUN : 4;
+                uint8_t bmReserved1 : 4;
+        };
+
+        struct {
+                uint8_t bmCBWCBLength : 4;
+                uint8_t bmReserved2 : 4;
+        };
+
+        uint8_t CBWCB[16];
+
+public:
+        // All zeroed.
+
+        CommandBlockWrapper() :
+        CommandBlockWrapperBase(0, 0, 0), bmReserved1(0), bmReserved2(0) {
+                for(int i = 0; i < 16; i++) CBWCB[i] = 0;
+        }
+
+        // Generic Wrap, CDB zeroed.
+
+        CommandBlockWrapper(uint32_t tag, uint32_t xflen, uint8_t flgs, uint8_t lu, uint8_t cmdlen, uint8_t cmd) :
+        CommandBlockWrapperBase(tag, xflen, flgs),
+        bmCBWLUN(lu), bmReserved1(0), bmCBWCBLength(cmdlen), bmReserved2(0) {
+                for(int i = 0; i < 16; i++) CBWCB[i] = 0;
+                // Type punning can cause optimization problems and bugs.
+                // Using reinterpret_cast to a dreinterpretifferent object is the proper way to do this.
+                //(((BASICCDB_t *) CBWCB)->LUN) = cmd;
+                BASICCDB_t *x = reinterpret_cast<BASICCDB_t *>(CBWCB);
+                x->LUN = cmd;
+        }
+
+        // Wrap for CDB of 6
+
+        CommandBlockWrapper(uint32_t tag, uint32_t xflen, CDB6_t *cdb, uint8_t dir) :
+        CommandBlockWrapperBase(tag, xflen, dir),
+        bmCBWLUN(cdb->LUN), bmReserved1(0), bmCBWCBLength(6), bmReserved2(0) {
+                memcpy(&CBWCB, cdb, 6);
+        }
+        // Wrap for CDB of 10
+
+        CommandBlockWrapper(uint32_t tag, uint32_t xflen, CDB10_t *cdb, uint8_t dir) :
+        CommandBlockWrapperBase(tag, xflen, dir),
+        bmCBWLUN(cdb->LUN), bmReserved1(0), bmCBWCBLength(10), bmReserved2(0) {
+                memcpy(&CBWCB, cdb, 10);
+        }
+} __attribute__((packed));
+
+struct CommandStatusWrapper {
+        uint32_t dCSWSignature;
+        uint32_t dCSWTag;
+        uint32_t dCSWDataResidue;
+        uint8_t bCSWStatus;
+} __attribute__((packed));
+
+struct RequestSenseResponce {
+        uint8_t bResponseCode;
+        uint8_t bSegmentNumber;
+
+        uint8_t bmSenseKey : 4;
+        uint8_t bmReserved : 1;
+        uint8_t bmILI : 1;
+        uint8_t bmEOM : 1;
+        uint8_t bmFileMark : 1;
+
+        uint8_t Information[4];
+        uint8_t bAdditionalLength;
+        uint8_t CmdSpecificInformation[4];
+        uint8_t bAdditionalSenseCode;
+        uint8_t bAdditionalSenseQualifier;
+        uint8_t bFieldReplaceableUnitCode;
+        uint8_t SenseKeySpecific[3];
+} __attribute__((packed));
+
+class BulkOnly : public USBDeviceConfig, public UsbConfigXtracter {
+protected:
+        static const uint8_t epDataInIndex; // DataIn endpoint index
+        static const uint8_t epDataOutIndex; // DataOUT endpoint index
+        static const uint8_t epInterruptInIndex; // InterruptIN  endpoint index
+
+        USB *pUsb;
+        uint8_t bAddress;
+        uint8_t bConfNum; // configuration number
+        uint8_t bIface; // interface value
+        uint8_t bNumEP; // total number of EP in the configuration
+        uint32_t qNextPollTime; // next poll time
+        bool bPollEnable; // poll enable flag
+
+        EpInfo epInfo[MASS_MAX_ENDPOINTS];
+
+        uint32_t dCBWTag; // Tag
+        //uint32_t dCBWDataTransferLength; // Data Transfer Length
+        uint8_t bLastUsbError; // Last USB error
+        uint8_t bMaxLUN; // Max LUN
+        uint8_t bTheLUN; // Active LUN
+        uint32_t CurrentCapacity[MASS_MAX_SUPPORTED_LUN]; // Total sectors
+        uint16_t CurrentSectorSize[MASS_MAX_SUPPORTED_LUN]; // Sector size, clipped to 16 bits
+        bool LUNOk[MASS_MAX_SUPPORTED_LUN]; // use this to check for media changes.
+        bool WriteOk[MASS_MAX_SUPPORTED_LUN];
+        void PrintEndpointDescriptor(const USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR* ep_ptr);
+
+
+        // Additional Initialization Method for Subclasses
+
+        virtual uint8_t OnInit() {
+                return 0;
+        };
+public:
+        BulkOnly(USB *p);
+
+        uint8_t GetLastUsbError() {
+                return bLastUsbError;
+        };
+
+        uint8_t GetbMaxLUN() {
+                return bMaxLUN; // Max LUN
+        }
+
+        uint8_t GetbTheLUN() {
+                return bTheLUN; // Active LUN
+        }
+
+        bool WriteProtected(uint8_t lun);
+        uint8_t MediaCTL(uint8_t lun, uint8_t ctl);
+        uint8_t Read(uint8_t lun, uint32_t addr, uint16_t bsize, uint8_t blocks, uint8_t *buf);
+        uint8_t Read(uint8_t lun, uint32_t addr, uint16_t bsize, uint8_t blocks, USBReadParser *prs);
+        uint8_t Write(uint8_t lun, uint32_t addr, uint16_t bsize, uint8_t blocks, const uint8_t *buf);
+        uint8_t LockMedia(uint8_t lun, uint8_t lock);
+
+        bool LUNIsGood(uint8_t lun);
+        uint32_t GetCapacity(uint8_t lun);
+        uint16_t GetSectorSize(uint8_t lun);
+
+        // USBDeviceConfig implementation
+        uint8_t Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed);
+        uint8_t ConfigureDevice(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed);
+
+        uint8_t Release();
+        uint8_t Poll();
+
+        virtual uint8_t GetAddress() {
+                return bAddress;
+        };
+
+        // UsbConfigXtracter implementation
+        void EndpointXtract(uint8_t conf, uint8_t iface, uint8_t alt, uint8_t proto, const USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR *ep);
+
+        virtual bool DEVCLASSOK(uint8_t klass) {
+                return (klass == USB_CLASS_MASS_STORAGE);
+        }
+
+        uint8_t SCSITransaction6(CDB6_t *cdb, uint16_t buf_size, void *buf, uint8_t dir);
+        uint8_t SCSITransaction10(CDB10_t *cdb, uint16_t buf_size, void *buf, uint8_t dir);
+
+private:
+        uint8_t Inquiry(uint8_t lun, uint16_t size, uint8_t *buf);
+        uint8_t TestUnitReady(uint8_t lun);
+        uint8_t RequestSense(uint8_t lun, uint16_t size, uint8_t *buf);
+        uint8_t ModeSense6(uint8_t lun, uint8_t pc, uint8_t page, uint8_t subpage, uint8_t len, uint8_t *buf);
+        uint8_t GetMaxLUN(uint8_t *max_lun);
+        uint8_t SetCurLUN(uint8_t lun);
+        void Reset();
+        uint8_t ResetRecovery();
+        uint8_t ReadCapacity10(uint8_t lun, uint8_t *buf);
+        void ClearAllEP();
+        void CheckMedia();
+        bool CheckLUN(uint8_t lun);
+        uint8_t Page3F(uint8_t lun);
+        bool IsValidCBW(uint8_t size, uint8_t *pcbw);
+        bool IsMeaningfulCBW(uint8_t size, uint8_t *pcbw);
+
+        bool IsValidCSW(CommandStatusWrapper *pcsw, CommandBlockWrapperBase *pcbw);
+
+        uint8_t ClearEpHalt(uint8_t index);
+#if MS_WANT_PARSER
+        uint8_t Transaction(CommandBlockWrapper *cbw, uint16_t bsize, void *buf, uint8_t flags);
+#endif
+        uint8_t Transaction(CommandBlockWrapper *cbw, uint16_t bsize, void *buf);
+        uint8_t HandleUsbError(uint8_t error, uint8_t index);
+        uint8_t HandleSCSIError(uint8_t status);
+
+};
+
+#endif // __MASSTORAGE_H__
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/max3421e.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/max3421e.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4e45a35e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/max3421e.h
@@ -0,0 +1,228 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+#if !defined(_usb_h_) || defined(_max3421e_h_)
+#error "Never include max3421e.h directly; include Usb.h instead"
+#else
+
+#define _max3421e_h_
+
+/* MAX3421E register/bit names and bitmasks */
+
+/* Arduino pin definitions */
+/* pin numbers to port numbers */
+
+#define SE0     0
+#define SE1     1
+#define FSHOST  2
+#define LSHOST  3
+
+/* MAX3421E command byte format: rrrrr0wa where 'r' is register number  */
+//
+// MAX3421E Registers in HOST mode.
+//
+#define rRCVFIFO    0x08    //1<<3
+#define rSNDFIFO    0x10    //2<<3
+#define rSUDFIFO    0x20    //4<<3
+#define rRCVBC      0x30    //6<<3
+#define rSNDBC      0x38    //7<<3
+
+#define rUSBIRQ     0x68    //13<<3
+/* USBIRQ Bits  */
+#define bmVBUSIRQ   0x40    //b6
+#define bmNOVBUSIRQ 0x20    //b5
+#define bmOSCOKIRQ  0x01    //b0
+
+#define rUSBIEN     0x70    //14<<3
+/* USBIEN Bits  */
+#define bmVBUSIE    0x40    //b6
+#define bmNOVBUSIE  0x20    //b5
+#define bmOSCOKIE   0x01    //b0
+
+#define rUSBCTL     0x78    //15<<3
+/* USBCTL Bits  */
+#define bmCHIPRES   0x20    //b5
+#define bmPWRDOWN   0x10    //b4
+
+#define rCPUCTL     0x80    //16<<3
+/* CPUCTL Bits  */
+#define bmPUSLEWID1 0x80    //b7
+#define bmPULSEWID0 0x40    //b6
+#define bmIE        0x01    //b0
+
+#define rPINCTL     0x88    //17<<3
+/* PINCTL Bits  */
+#define bmFDUPSPI   0x10    //b4
+#define bmINTLEVEL  0x08    //b3
+#define bmPOSINT    0x04    //b2
+#define bmGPXB      0x02    //b1
+#define bmGPXA      0x01    //b0
+// GPX pin selections
+#define GPX_OPERATE 0x00
+#define GPX_VBDET   0x01
+#define GPX_BUSACT  0x02
+#define GPX_SOF     0x03
+
+#define rREVISION   0x90    //18<<3
+
+#define rIOPINS1    0xa0    //20<<3
+
+/* IOPINS1 Bits */
+#define bmGPOUT0    0x01
+#define bmGPOUT1    0x02
+#define bmGPOUT2    0x04
+#define bmGPOUT3    0x08
+#define bmGPIN0     0x10
+#define bmGPIN1     0x20
+#define bmGPIN2     0x40
+#define bmGPIN3     0x80
+
+#define rIOPINS2    0xa8    //21<<3
+/* IOPINS2 Bits */
+#define bmGPOUT4    0x01
+#define bmGPOUT5    0x02
+#define bmGPOUT6    0x04
+#define bmGPOUT7    0x08
+#define bmGPIN4     0x10
+#define bmGPIN5     0x20
+#define bmGPIN6     0x40
+#define bmGPIN7     0x80
+
+#define rGPINIRQ    0xb0    //22<<3
+/* GPINIRQ Bits */
+#define bmGPINIRQ0 0x01
+#define bmGPINIRQ1 0x02
+#define bmGPINIRQ2 0x04
+#define bmGPINIRQ3 0x08
+#define bmGPINIRQ4 0x10
+#define bmGPINIRQ5 0x20
+#define bmGPINIRQ6 0x40
+#define bmGPINIRQ7 0x80
+
+#define rGPINIEN    0xb8    //23<<3
+/* GPINIEN Bits */
+#define bmGPINIEN0 0x01
+#define bmGPINIEN1 0x02
+#define bmGPINIEN2 0x04
+#define bmGPINIEN3 0x08
+#define bmGPINIEN4 0x10
+#define bmGPINIEN5 0x20
+#define bmGPINIEN6 0x40
+#define bmGPINIEN7 0x80
+
+#define rGPINPOL    0xc0    //24<<3
+/* GPINPOL Bits */
+#define bmGPINPOL0 0x01
+#define bmGPINPOL1 0x02
+#define bmGPINPOL2 0x04
+#define bmGPINPOL3 0x08
+#define bmGPINPOL4 0x10
+#define bmGPINPOL5 0x20
+#define bmGPINPOL6 0x40
+#define bmGPINPOL7 0x80
+
+#define rHIRQ       0xc8    //25<<3
+/* HIRQ Bits */
+#define bmBUSEVENTIRQ   0x01   // indicates BUS Reset Done or BUS Resume
+#define bmRWUIRQ        0x02
+#define bmRCVDAVIRQ     0x04
+#define bmSNDBAVIRQ     0x08
+#define bmSUSDNIRQ      0x10
+#define bmCONDETIRQ     0x20
+#define bmFRAMEIRQ      0x40
+#define bmHXFRDNIRQ     0x80
+
+#define rHIEN           0xd0    //26<<3
+
+/* HIEN Bits */
+#define bmBUSEVENTIE    0x01
+#define bmRWUIE         0x02
+#define bmRCVDAVIE      0x04
+#define bmSNDBAVIE      0x08
+#define bmSUSDNIE       0x10
+#define bmCONDETIE      0x20
+#define bmFRAMEIE       0x40
+#define bmHXFRDNIE      0x80
+
+#define rMODE           0xd8    //27<<3
+
+/* MODE Bits */
+#define bmHOST          0x01
+#define bmLOWSPEED      0x02
+#define bmHUBPRE        0x04
+#define bmSOFKAENAB     0x08
+#define bmSEPIRQ        0x10
+#define bmDELAYISO      0x20
+#define bmDMPULLDN      0x40
+#define bmDPPULLDN      0x80
+
+#define rPERADDR    0xe0    //28<<3
+
+#define rHCTL       0xe8    //29<<3
+/* HCTL Bits */
+#define bmBUSRST        0x01
+#define bmFRMRST        0x02
+#define bmSAMPLEBUS     0x04
+#define bmSIGRSM        0x08
+#define bmRCVTOG0       0x10
+#define bmRCVTOG1       0x20
+#define bmSNDTOG0       0x40
+#define bmSNDTOG1       0x80
+
+#define rHXFR       0xf0    //30<<3
+/* Host transfer token values for writing the HXFR register (R30)   */
+/* OR this bit field with the endpoint number in bits 3:0               */
+#define tokSETUP  0x10  // HS=0, ISO=0, OUTNIN=0, SETUP=1
+#define tokIN     0x00  // HS=0, ISO=0, OUTNIN=0, SETUP=0
+#define tokOUT    0x20  // HS=0, ISO=0, OUTNIN=1, SETUP=0
+#define tokINHS   0x80  // HS=1, ISO=0, OUTNIN=0, SETUP=0
+#define tokOUTHS  0xA0  // HS=1, ISO=0, OUTNIN=1, SETUP=0
+#define tokISOIN  0x40  // HS=0, ISO=1, OUTNIN=0, SETUP=0
+#define tokISOOUT 0x60  // HS=0, ISO=1, OUTNIN=1, SETUP=0
+
+#define rHRSL       0xf8    //31<<3
+
+/* HRSL Bits */
+#define bmRCVTOGRD  0x10
+#define bmSNDTOGRD  0x20
+#define bmKSTATUS   0x40
+#define bmJSTATUS   0x80
+#define bmSE0       0x00    //SE0 - disconnect state
+#define bmSE1       0xc0    //SE1 - illegal state
+
+/* Host error result codes, the 4 LSB's in the HRSL register */
+#define hrSUCCESS   0x00
+#define hrBUSY      0x01
+#define hrBADREQ    0x02
+#define hrUNDEF     0x03
+#define hrNAK       0x04
+#define hrSTALL     0x05
+#define hrTOGERR    0x06
+#define hrWRONGPID  0x07
+#define hrBADBC     0x08
+#define hrPIDERR    0x09
+#define hrPKTERR    0x0A
+#define hrCRCERR    0x0B
+#define hrKERR      0x0C
+#define hrJERR      0x0D
+#define hrTIMEOUT   0x0E
+#define hrBABBLE    0x0F
+
+#define MODE_FS_HOST    (bmDPPULLDN|bmDMPULLDN|bmHOST|bmSOFKAENAB)
+#define MODE_LS_HOST    (bmDPPULLDN|bmDMPULLDN|bmHOST|bmLOWSPEED|bmSOFKAENAB)
+
+
+#endif //_max3421e_h_
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/max_LCD.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/max_LCD.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f0c64666f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/max_LCD.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,255 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+#include "max_LCD.h"
+#include <string.h>
+
+// pin definition and set/clear
+
+#define RS  0x04    // RS pin
+#define E   0x08    // E pin
+
+#define SET_RS  lcdPins |= RS
+#define CLR_RS  lcdPins &= ~RS
+#define SET_E   lcdPins |= E
+#define CLR_E   lcdPins &= ~E
+
+#define SENDlcdPins()   pUsb->gpioWr( lcdPins )
+
+#define LCD_sendcmd(a)  {   CLR_RS;             \
+                            sendbyte(a);    \
+                        }
+
+#define LCD_sendchar(a) {   SET_RS;             \
+                            sendbyte(a);    \
+                        }
+
+static byte lcdPins; //copy of LCD pins
+
+Max_LCD::Max_LCD(USB *pusb) : pUsb(pusb) {
+        lcdPins = 0;
+}
+
+void Max_LCD::init() {
+        _displayfunction = LCD_4BITMODE | LCD_1LINE | LCD_5x8DOTS;
+
+        //   MAX3421E::gpioWr(0x55);
+
+        begin(16, 1);
+}
+
+void Max_LCD::begin(uint8_t cols, uint8_t lines, uint8_t dotsize) {
+        if(lines > 1) {
+                _displayfunction |= LCD_2LINE;
+        }
+        _numlines = lines;
+        _currline = 0;
+
+        // for some 1 line displays you can select a 10 pixel high font
+        if((dotsize != 0) && (lines == 1)) {
+                _displayfunction |= LCD_5x10DOTS;
+        }
+
+        // SEE PAGE 45/46 FOR INITIALIZATION SPECIFICATION!
+        // according to datasheet, we need at least 40ms after power rises above 2.7V
+        // before sending commands. Arduino can turn on way befer 4.5V so we'll wait 50
+        delayMicroseconds(50000);
+        lcdPins = 0x30;
+        SET_E;
+        SENDlcdPins();
+        CLR_E;
+        SENDlcdPins();
+        delayMicroseconds(10000); // wait min 4.1ms
+        //second try
+        SET_E;
+        SENDlcdPins();
+        CLR_E;
+        SENDlcdPins();
+        delayMicroseconds(10000); // wait min 4.1ms
+        // third go!
+        SET_E;
+        SENDlcdPins();
+        CLR_E;
+        SENDlcdPins();
+        delayMicroseconds(10000);
+        // finally, set to 4-bit interface
+        lcdPins = 0x20;
+        //SET_RS;
+        SET_E;
+        SENDlcdPins();
+        //CLR_RS;
+        CLR_E;
+        SENDlcdPins();
+        delayMicroseconds(10000);
+        // finally, set # lines, font size, etc.
+        command(LCD_FUNCTIONSET | _displayfunction);
+
+        // turn the display on with no cursor or blinking default
+        _displaycontrol = LCD_DISPLAYON | LCD_CURSOROFF | LCD_BLINKOFF;
+        display();
+
+        // clear it off
+        clear();
+
+        // Initialize to default text direction (for romance languages)
+        _displaymode = LCD_ENTRYLEFT | LCD_ENTRYSHIFTDECREMENT;
+        // set the entry mode
+        command(LCD_ENTRYMODESET | _displaymode);
+}
+
+/********** high level commands, for the user! */
+void Max_LCD::clear() {
+        command(LCD_CLEARDISPLAY); // clear display, set cursor position to zero
+        delayMicroseconds(2000); // this command takes a long time!
+}
+
+void Max_LCD::home() {
+        command(LCD_RETURNHOME); // set cursor position to zero
+        delayMicroseconds(2000); // this command takes a long time!
+}
+
+void Max_LCD::setCursor(uint8_t col, uint8_t row) {
+        int row_offsets[] = {0x00, 0x40, 0x14, 0x54};
+        if(row > _numlines) {
+                row = _numlines - 1; // we count rows starting w/0
+        }
+
+        command(LCD_SETDDRAMADDR | (col + row_offsets[row]));
+}
+
+// Turn the display on/off (quickly)
+
+void Max_LCD::noDisplay() {
+        _displaycontrol &= ~LCD_DISPLAYON;
+        command(LCD_DISPLAYCONTROL | _displaycontrol);
+}
+
+void Max_LCD::display() {
+        _displaycontrol |= LCD_DISPLAYON;
+        command(LCD_DISPLAYCONTROL | _displaycontrol);
+}
+
+// Turns the underline cursor on/off
+
+void Max_LCD::noCursor() {
+        _displaycontrol &= ~LCD_CURSORON;
+        command(LCD_DISPLAYCONTROL | _displaycontrol);
+}
+
+void Max_LCD::cursor() {
+        _displaycontrol |= LCD_CURSORON;
+        command(LCD_DISPLAYCONTROL | _displaycontrol);
+}
+
+
+// Turn on and off the blinking cursor
+
+void Max_LCD::noBlink() {
+        _displaycontrol &= ~LCD_BLINKON;
+        command(LCD_DISPLAYCONTROL | _displaycontrol);
+}
+
+void Max_LCD::blink() {
+        _displaycontrol |= LCD_BLINKON;
+        command(LCD_DISPLAYCONTROL | _displaycontrol);
+}
+
+// These commands scroll the display without changing the RAM
+
+void Max_LCD::scrollDisplayLeft(void) {
+        command(LCD_CURSORSHIFT | LCD_DISPLAYMOVE | LCD_MOVELEFT);
+}
+
+void Max_LCD::scrollDisplayRight(void) {
+        command(LCD_CURSORSHIFT | LCD_DISPLAYMOVE | LCD_MOVERIGHT);
+}
+
+// This is for text that flows Left to Right
+
+void Max_LCD::leftToRight(void) {
+        _displaymode |= LCD_ENTRYLEFT;
+        command(LCD_ENTRYMODESET | _displaymode);
+}
+
+// This is for text that flows Right to Left
+
+void Max_LCD::rightToLeft(void) {
+        _displaymode &= ~LCD_ENTRYLEFT;
+        command(LCD_ENTRYMODESET | _displaymode);
+}
+
+// This will 'right justify' text from the cursor
+
+void Max_LCD::autoscroll(void) {
+        _displaymode |= LCD_ENTRYSHIFTINCREMENT;
+        command(LCD_ENTRYMODESET | _displaymode);
+}
+
+// This will 'left justify' text from the cursor
+
+void Max_LCD::noAutoscroll(void) {
+        _displaymode &= ~LCD_ENTRYSHIFTINCREMENT;
+        command(LCD_ENTRYMODESET | _displaymode);
+}
+
+// Allows us to fill the first 8 CGRAM locations
+// with custom characters
+
+void Max_LCD::createChar(uint8_t location, uint8_t charmap[]) {
+        location &= 0x7; // we only have 8 locations 0-7
+        command(LCD_SETCGRAMADDR | (location << 3));
+        for(int i = 0; i < 8; i++) {
+                write(charmap[i]);
+        }
+}
+
+/*********** mid level commands, for sending data/cmds */
+
+inline void Max_LCD::command(uint8_t value) {
+        LCD_sendcmd(value);
+        delayMicroseconds(100);
+}
+
+#if defined(ARDUINO) && ARDUINO >=100
+
+inline size_t Max_LCD::write(uint8_t value) {
+        LCD_sendchar(value);
+        return 1; // Assume success
+}
+#else
+
+inline void Max_LCD::write(uint8_t value) {
+        LCD_sendchar(value);
+}
+#endif
+
+void Max_LCD::sendbyte(uint8_t val) {
+        lcdPins &= 0x0f; //prepare place for the upper nibble
+        lcdPins |= (val & 0xf0); //copy upper nibble to LCD variable
+        SET_E; //send
+        SENDlcdPins();
+        delayMicroseconds(2);
+        CLR_E;
+        delayMicroseconds(2);
+        SENDlcdPins();
+        lcdPins &= 0x0f; //prepare place for the lower nibble
+        lcdPins |= (val << 4) & 0xf0; //copy lower nibble to LCD variable
+        SET_E; //send
+        SENDlcdPins();
+        CLR_E;
+        SENDlcdPins();
+        delayMicroseconds(100);
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/max_LCD.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/max_LCD.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..950c9c5aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/max_LCD.h
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+//HD44780 compatible LCD display via MAX3421E GPOUT support header
+//pinout: D[4-7] -> GPOUT[4-7], RS-> GPOUT[2], E ->GPOUT[3]
+//
+
+#ifndef _Max_LCD_h_
+#define _Max_LCD_h_
+
+#include "Usb.h"
+#include "Print.h"
+
+// commands
+#define LCD_CLEARDISPLAY        0x01
+#define LCD_RETURNHOME          0x02
+#define LCD_ENTRYMODESET        0x04
+#define LCD_DISPLAYCONTROL      0x08
+#define LCD_CURSORSHIFT         0x10
+#define LCD_FUNCTIONSET         0x20
+#define LCD_SETCGRAMADDR        0x40
+#define LCD_SETDDRAMADDR        0x80
+
+// flags for display entry mode
+#define LCD_ENTRYRIGHT          0x00
+#define LCD_ENTRYLEFT           0x02
+#define LCD_ENTRYSHIFTINCREMENT 0x01
+#define LCD_ENTRYSHIFTDECREMENT 0x00
+
+// flags for display on/off control
+#define LCD_DISPLAYON           0x04
+#define LCD_DISPLAYOFF          0x00
+#define LCD_CURSORON            0x02
+#define LCD_CURSOROFF           0x00
+#define LCD_BLINKON             0x01
+#define LCD_BLINKOFF            0x00
+
+// flags for display/cursor shift
+#define LCD_DISPLAYMOVE         0x08
+#define LCD_CURSORMOVE          0x00
+#define LCD_MOVERIGHT           0x04
+#define LCD_MOVELEFT            0x00
+
+// flags for function set
+#define LCD_8BITMODE            0x10
+#define LCD_4BITMODE            0x00
+#define LCD_2LINE               0x08
+#define LCD_1LINE               0x00
+#define LCD_5x10DOTS            0x04
+#define LCD_5x8DOTS             0x00
+
+class Max_LCD : public Print {
+        USB *pUsb;
+
+public:
+        Max_LCD(USB *pusb);
+        void init();
+        void begin(uint8_t cols, uint8_t rows, uint8_t charsize = LCD_5x8DOTS);
+        void clear();
+        void home();
+        void noDisplay();
+        void display();
+        void noBlink();
+        void blink();
+        void noCursor();
+        void cursor();
+        void scrollDisplayLeft();
+        void scrollDisplayRight();
+        void leftToRight();
+        void rightToLeft();
+        void autoscroll();
+        void noAutoscroll();
+        void createChar(uint8_t, uint8_t[]);
+        void setCursor(uint8_t, uint8_t);
+        void command(uint8_t);
+
+#if defined(ARDUINO) && ARDUINO >=100
+        size_t write(uint8_t);
+        using Print::write;
+#else
+        void write(uint8_t);
+#endif
+
+private:
+        void sendbyte(uint8_t val);
+        uint8_t _displayfunction; //tokill
+        uint8_t _displaycontrol;
+        uint8_t _displaymode;
+        uint8_t _initialized;
+        uint8_t _numlines, _currline;
+};
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/message.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/message.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bdcdd1833
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/message.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,116 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+
+#include "Usb.h"
+// 0x80 is the default (i.e. trace) to turn off set this global to something lower.
+// this allows for 126 other debugging levels.
+// TO-DO: Allow assignment to a different serial port by software
+int UsbDEBUGlvl = 0x80;
+
+void E_Notifyc(char c, int lvl) {
+        if(UsbDEBUGlvl < lvl) return;
+#if defined(ARDUINO) && ARDUINO >=100
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.print(c);
+#else
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.print(c, BYTE);
+#endif
+        //USB_HOST_SERIAL.flush();
+}
+
+void E_Notify(char const * msg, int lvl) {
+        if(UsbDEBUGlvl < lvl) return;
+        if(!msg) return;
+        char c;
+
+        while((c = pgm_read_byte(msg++))) E_Notifyc(c, lvl);
+}
+
+void E_NotifyStr(char const * msg, int lvl) {
+        if(UsbDEBUGlvl < lvl) return;
+        if(!msg) return;
+        char c;
+
+        while((c = *msg++)) E_Notifyc(c, lvl);
+}
+
+void E_Notify(uint8_t b, int lvl) {
+        if(UsbDEBUGlvl < lvl) return;
+#if defined(ARDUINO) && ARDUINO >=100
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.print(b);
+#else
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.print(b, DEC);
+#endif
+        //USB_HOST_SERIAL.flush();
+}
+
+void E_Notify(double d, int lvl) {
+        if(UsbDEBUGlvl < lvl) return;
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.print(d);
+        //USB_HOST_SERIAL.flush();
+}
+
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+
+void NotifyFailGetDevDescr(void) {
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\ngetDevDescr "), 0x80);
+}
+
+void NotifyFailSetDevTblEntry(void) {
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nsetDevTblEn "), 0x80);
+}
+
+void NotifyFailGetConfDescr(void) {
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\ngetConf "), 0x80);
+}
+
+void NotifyFailSetConfDescr(void) {
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nsetConf "), 0x80);
+}
+
+void NotifyFailGetDevDescr(uint8_t reason) {
+        NotifyFailGetDevDescr();
+        NotifyFail(reason);
+}
+
+void NotifyFailSetDevTblEntry(uint8_t reason) {
+        NotifyFailSetDevTblEntry();
+        NotifyFail(reason);
+
+}
+
+void NotifyFailGetConfDescr(uint8_t reason) {
+        NotifyFailGetConfDescr();
+        NotifyFail(reason);
+}
+
+void NotifyFailSetConfDescr(uint8_t reason) {
+        NotifyFailSetConfDescr();
+        NotifyFail(reason);
+}
+
+void NotifyFailUnknownDevice(uint16_t VID, uint16_t PID) {
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\nUnknown Device Connected - VID: "), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint16_t > (VID, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR(" PID: "), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<uint16_t > (PID, 0x80);
+}
+
+void NotifyFail(uint8_t rcode) {
+        D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (rcode, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\n"), 0x80);
+}
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/message.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/message.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c26628e7f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/message.h
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+#if !defined(_usb_h_) || defined(__MESSAGE_H__)
+#error "Never include message.h directly; include Usb.h instead"
+#else
+#define __MESSAGE_H__
+
+extern int UsbDEBUGlvl;
+
+void E_Notify(char const * msg, int lvl);
+void E_Notify(uint8_t b, int lvl);
+void E_NotifyStr(char const * msg, int lvl);
+void E_Notifyc(char c, int lvl);
+
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+#define Notify E_Notify
+#define NotifyStr E_NotifyStr
+#define Notifyc E_Notifyc
+void NotifyFailGetDevDescr(uint8_t reason);
+void NotifyFailSetDevTblEntry(uint8_t reason);
+void NotifyFailGetConfDescr(uint8_t reason);
+void NotifyFailSetConfDescr(uint8_t reason);
+void NotifyFailGetDevDescr(void);
+void NotifyFailSetDevTblEntry(void);
+void NotifyFailGetConfDescr(void);
+void NotifyFailSetConfDescr(void);
+void NotifyFailUnknownDevice(uint16_t VID, uint16_t PID);
+void NotifyFail(uint8_t rcode);
+#else
+#define Notify(...) ((void)0)
+#define NotifyStr(...) ((void)0)
+#define Notifyc(...) ((void)0)
+#define NotifyFailGetDevDescr(...) ((void)0)
+#define NotifyFailSetDevTblEntry(...) ((void)0)
+#define NotifyFailGetConfDescr(...) ((void)0)
+#define NotifyFailGetDevDescr(...) ((void)0)
+#define NotifyFailSetDevTblEntry(...) ((void)0)
+#define NotifyFailGetConfDescr(...) ((void)0)
+#define NotifyFailSetConfDescr(...) ((void)0)
+#define NotifyFailUnknownDevice(...) ((void)0)
+#define NotifyFail(...) ((void)0)
+#endif
+
+template <class ERROR_TYPE>
+void ErrorMessage(uint8_t level, char const * msg, ERROR_TYPE rcode = 0) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        Notify(msg, level);
+        Notify(PSTR(": "), level);
+        D_PrintHex<ERROR_TYPE > (rcode, level);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\n"), level);
+#endif
+}
+
+template <class ERROR_TYPE>
+void ErrorMessage(char const * msg, ERROR_TYPE rcode = 0) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        Notify(msg, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR(": "), 0x80);
+        D_PrintHex<ERROR_TYPE > (rcode, 0x80);
+        Notify(PSTR("\r\n"), 0x80);
+#endif
+}
+
+#endif // __MESSAGE_H__
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/parsetools.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/parsetools.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..74a861059
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/parsetools.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+#include "Usb.h"
+
+bool MultiByteValueParser::Parse(uint8_t **pp, uint16_t *pcntdn) {
+        if(!pBuf) {
+                Notify(PSTR("Buffer pointer is NULL!\r\n"), 0x80);
+                return false;
+        }
+        for(; countDown && (*pcntdn); countDown--, (*pcntdn)--, (*pp)++)
+                pBuf[valueSize - countDown] = (**pp);
+
+        if(countDown)
+                return false;
+
+        countDown = valueSize;
+        return true;
+}
+
+bool PTPListParser::Parse(uint8_t **pp, uint16_t *pcntdn, PTP_ARRAY_EL_FUNC pf, const void *me) {
+        switch(nStage) {
+                case 0:
+                        pBuf->valueSize = lenSize;
+                        theParser.Initialize(pBuf);
+                        nStage = 1;
+
+                case 1:
+                        if(!theParser.Parse(pp, pcntdn))
+                                return false;
+
+                        arLen = 0;
+                        arLen = (pBuf->valueSize >= 4) ? *((uint32_t*)pBuf->pValue) : (uint32_t)(*((uint16_t*)pBuf->pValue));
+                        arLenCntdn = arLen;
+                        nStage = 2;
+
+                case 2:
+                        pBuf->valueSize = valSize;
+                        theParser.Initialize(pBuf);
+                        nStage = 3;
+
+                case 3:
+                        for(; arLenCntdn; arLenCntdn--) {
+                                if(!theParser.Parse(pp, pcntdn))
+                                        return false;
+
+                                if(pf)
+                                        pf(pBuf, (arLen - arLenCntdn), me);
+                        }
+
+                        nStage = 0;
+        }
+        return true;
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/parsetools.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/parsetools.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..66e9531c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/parsetools.h
@@ -0,0 +1,140 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+
+#if !defined(_usb_h_) || defined(__PARSETOOLS_H__)
+#error "Never include parsetools.h directly; include Usb.h instead"
+#else
+#define __PARSETOOLS_H__
+
+struct MultiValueBuffer {
+        uint8_t valueSize;
+        void *pValue;
+} __attribute__((packed));
+
+class MultiByteValueParser {
+        uint8_t * pBuf;
+        uint8_t countDown;
+        uint8_t valueSize;
+
+public:
+
+        MultiByteValueParser() : pBuf(NULL), countDown(0), valueSize(0) {
+        };
+
+        const uint8_t* GetBuffer() {
+                return pBuf;
+        };
+
+        void Initialize(MultiValueBuffer * const pbuf) {
+                pBuf = (uint8_t*)pbuf->pValue;
+                countDown = valueSize = pbuf->valueSize;
+        };
+
+        bool Parse(uint8_t **pp, uint16_t *pcntdn);
+};
+
+class ByteSkipper {
+        uint8_t *pBuf;
+        uint8_t nStage;
+        uint16_t countDown;
+
+public:
+
+        ByteSkipper() : pBuf(NULL), nStage(0), countDown(0) {
+        };
+
+        void Initialize(MultiValueBuffer *pbuf) {
+                pBuf = (uint8_t*)pbuf->pValue;
+                countDown = 0;
+        };
+
+        bool Skip(uint8_t **pp, uint16_t *pcntdn, uint16_t bytes_to_skip) {
+                switch(nStage) {
+                        case 0:
+                                countDown = bytes_to_skip;
+                                nStage++;
+                        case 1:
+                                for(; countDown && (*pcntdn); countDown--, (*pp)++, (*pcntdn)--);
+
+                                if(!countDown)
+                                        nStage = 0;
+                };
+                return (!countDown);
+        };
+};
+
+// Pointer to a callback function triggered for each element of PTP array when used with PTPArrayParser
+typedef void (*PTP_ARRAY_EL_FUNC)(const MultiValueBuffer * const p, uint32_t count, const void *me);
+
+class PTPListParser {
+public:
+
+        enum ParseMode {
+                modeArray, modeRange/*, modeEnum*/
+        };
+
+private:
+        uint8_t nStage;
+        uint8_t enStage;
+
+        uint32_t arLen;
+        uint32_t arLenCntdn;
+
+        uint8_t lenSize; // size of the array length field in bytes
+        uint8_t valSize; // size of the array element in bytes
+
+        MultiValueBuffer *pBuf;
+
+        // The only parser for both size and array element parsing
+        MultiByteValueParser theParser;
+
+        uint8_t /*ParseMode*/ prsMode;
+
+public:
+
+        PTPListParser() :
+        nStage(0),
+        enStage(0),
+        arLen(0),
+        arLenCntdn(0),
+        lenSize(0),
+        valSize(0),
+        pBuf(NULL),
+        prsMode(modeArray) {
+        };
+
+        void Initialize(const uint8_t len_size, const uint8_t val_size, MultiValueBuffer * const p, const uint8_t mode = modeArray) {
+                pBuf = p;
+                lenSize = len_size;
+                valSize = val_size;
+                prsMode = mode;
+
+                if(prsMode == modeRange) {
+                        arLenCntdn = arLen = 3;
+                        nStage = 2;
+                } else {
+                        arLenCntdn = arLen = 0;
+                        nStage = 0;
+                }
+                enStage = 0;
+                theParser.Initialize(p);
+        };
+
+        bool Parse(uint8_t **pp, uint16_t *pcntdn, PTP_ARRAY_EL_FUNC pf, const void *me = NULL);
+};
+
+#endif // __PARSETOOLS_H__
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/printhex.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/printhex.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..369d7e1f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/printhex.h
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+
+#if !defined(_usb_h_) || defined(__PRINTHEX_H__)
+#error "Never include printhex.h directly; include Usb.h instead"
+#else
+#define __PRINTHEX_H__
+
+void E_Notifyc(char c, int lvl);
+
+template <class T>
+void PrintHex(T val, int lvl) {
+        int num_nibbles = sizeof (T) * 2;
+
+        do {
+                char v = 48 + (((val >> (num_nibbles - 1) * 4)) & 0x0f);
+                if(v > 57) v += 7;
+                E_Notifyc(v, lvl);
+        } while(--num_nibbles);
+}
+
+template <class T>
+void PrintBin(T val, int lvl) {
+        for(T mask = (((T)1) << ((sizeof (T) << 3) - 1)); mask; mask >>= 1)
+                if(val & mask)
+                        E_Notifyc('1', lvl);
+                else
+                        E_Notifyc('0', lvl);
+}
+
+template <class T>
+void SerialPrintHex(T val) {
+        int num_nibbles = sizeof (T) * 2;
+
+        do {
+                char v = 48 + (((val >> (num_nibbles - 1) * 4)) & 0x0f);
+                if(v > 57) v += 7;
+                USB_HOST_SERIAL.print(v);
+        } while(--num_nibbles);
+}
+
+template <class T>
+void PrintHex2(Print *prn, T val) {
+        T mask = (((T)1) << (((sizeof (T) << 1) - 1) << 2));
+
+        while(mask > 1) {
+                if(val < mask)
+                        prn->print("0");
+
+                mask >>= 4;
+        }
+        prn->print((T)val, HEX);
+}
+
+template <class T> void D_PrintHex(T val, int lvl) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        PrintHex<T > (val, lvl);
+#endif
+}
+
+template <class T>
+void D_PrintBin(T val, int lvl) {
+#ifdef DEBUG_USB_HOST
+        PrintBin<T > (val, lvl);
+#endif
+}
+
+
+
+#endif // __PRINTHEX_H__
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/settings.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/settings.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5c060354b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/settings.h
@@ -0,0 +1,139 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+
+#ifndef USB_HOST_SHIELD_SETTINGS_H
+#define USB_HOST_SHIELD_SETTINGS_H
+#include "macros.h"
+
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// DEBUGGING
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+/* Set this to 1 to activate serial debugging */
+#define ENABLE_UHS_DEBUGGING 0
+
+/* This can be used to select which serial port to use for debugging if
+ * multiple serial ports are available.
+ * For example Serial3.
+ */
+#ifndef USB_HOST_SERIAL
+#define USB_HOST_SERIAL Serial
+#endif
+
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Manual board activation
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+/* Set this to 1 if you are using an Arduino Mega ADK board with MAX3421e built-in */
+#define USE_UHS_MEGA_ADK 0 // If you are using Arduino 1.5.5 or newer there is no need to do this manually
+
+/* Set this to 1 if you are using a Black Widdow */
+#define USE_UHS_BLACK_WIDDOW 0
+
+/* Set this to a one to use the xmem2 lock. This is needed for multitasking and threading */
+#define USE_XMEM_SPI_LOCK 0
+
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Wii IR camera
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+/* Set this to 1 to activate code for the Wii IR camera */
+#define ENABLE_WII_IR_CAMERA 0
+
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// MASS STORAGE
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<< IMPORTANT >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>
+// Set this to 1 to support single LUN devices, and save RAM. -- I.E. thumb drives.
+// Each LUN needs ~13 bytes to be able to track the state of each unit.
+#ifndef MASS_MAX_SUPPORTED_LUN
+#define MASS_MAX_SUPPORTED_LUN 8
+#endif
+
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Set to 1 to use the faster spi4teensy3 driver.
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+#ifndef USE_SPI4TEENSY3
+#define USE_SPI4TEENSY3 1
+#endif
+
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// AUTOMATIC Settings
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+// No user serviceable parts below this line.
+// DO NOT change anything below here unless you are a developer!
+
+#include "version_helper.h"
+
+#if defined(__GNUC__) && defined(__AVR__)
+#ifndef GCC_VERSION
+#define GCC_VERSION (__GNUC__ * 10000 + __GNUC_MINOR__ * 100 + __GNUC_PATCHLEVEL__)
+#endif
+#if GCC_VERSION < 40602 // Test for GCC < 4.6.2
+#ifdef PROGMEM
+#undef PROGMEM
+#define PROGMEM __attribute__((section(".progmem.data"))) // Workaround for http://gcc.gnu.org/bugzilla/show_bug.cgi?id=34734#c4
+#ifdef PSTR
+#undef PSTR
+#define PSTR(s) (__extension__({static const char __c[] PROGMEM = (s); &__c[0];})) // Copied from pgmspace.h in avr-libc source
+#endif
+#endif
+#endif
+#endif
+
+#if !defined(DEBUG_USB_HOST) && ENABLE_UHS_DEBUGGING
+#define DEBUG_USB_HOST
+#endif
+
+#if !defined(WIICAMERA) && ENABLE_WII_IR_CAMERA
+#define WIICAMERA
+#endif
+
+// To use some other locking (e.g. freertos),
+// define XMEM_ACQUIRE_SPI and XMEM_RELEASE_SPI to point to your lock and unlock.
+// NOTE: NO argument is passed. You have to do this within your routine for
+// whatever you are using to lock and unlock.
+#if !defined(XMEM_ACQUIRE_SPI)
+#if USE_XMEM_SPI_LOCK || defined(USE_MULTIPLE_APP_API)
+#include <xmem.h>
+#else
+#define XMEM_ACQUIRE_SPI() (void(0))
+#define XMEM_RELEASE_SPI() (void(0))
+#endif
+#endif
+
+#if !defined(EXT_RAM) && defined(EXT_RAM_STACK) || defined(EXT_RAM_HEAP)
+#include <xmem.h>
+#else
+#define EXT_RAM 0
+#endif
+
+#if defined(CORE_TEENSY) && (defined(__MK20DX128__) || defined(__MK20DX256__))
+#define USING_SPI4TEENSY3 USE_SPI4TEENSY3
+#else
+#define USING_SPI4TEENSY3 0
+#endif
+
+#if ((defined(ARDUINO_SAM_DUE) && defined(__SAM3X8E__)) || defined(RBL_NRF51822) || defined(__ARDUINO_X86__) || ARDUINO >= 10600) && !USING_SPI4TEENSY3
+#include <SPI.h> // Use the Arduino SPI library for the Arduino Due, RedBearLab nRF51822, Intel Galileo 1 & 2, Intel Edison or if the SPI library with transaction is available
+#endif
+#if defined(__PIC32MX__) || defined(__PIC32MZ__)
+#include <../../../../hardware/pic32/libraries/SPI/SPI.h> // Hack to use the SPI library
+#endif
+
+#endif /* SETTINGS_H */
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/sink_parser.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/sink_parser.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a23637d2b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/sink_parser.h
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+#if !defined(_usb_h_) || defined(__SINK_PARSER_H__)
+#error "Never include hexdump.h directly; include Usb.h instead"
+#else
+#define __SINK_PARSER_H__
+
+extern int UsbDEBUGlvl;
+
+// This parser does absolutely nothing with the data, just swallows it.
+
+template <class BASE_CLASS, class LEN_TYPE, class OFFSET_TYPE>
+class SinkParser : public BASE_CLASS {
+public:
+
+        SinkParser() {
+        };
+
+        void Initialize() {
+        };
+
+        void Parse(const LEN_TYPE len, const uint8_t *pbuf, const OFFSET_TYPE &offset) {
+        };
+};
+
+
+#endif // __HEXDUMP_H__
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/usb_ch9.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/usb_ch9.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..18f2d3e2e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/usb_ch9.h
@@ -0,0 +1,166 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+
+#if !defined(_usb_h_) || defined(_ch9_h_)
+#error "Never include usb_ch9.h directly; include Usb.h instead"
+#else
+
+/* USB chapter 9 structures */
+#define _ch9_h_
+
+/* Misc.USB constants */
+#define DEV_DESCR_LEN   18      //device descriptor length
+#define CONF_DESCR_LEN  9       //configuration descriptor length
+#define INTR_DESCR_LEN  9       //interface descriptor length
+#define EP_DESCR_LEN    7       //endpoint descriptor length
+
+/* Standard Device Requests */
+
+#define USB_REQUEST_GET_STATUS                  0       // Standard Device Request - GET STATUS
+#define USB_REQUEST_CLEAR_FEATURE               1       // Standard Device Request - CLEAR FEATURE
+#define USB_REQUEST_SET_FEATURE                 3       // Standard Device Request - SET FEATURE
+#define USB_REQUEST_SET_ADDRESS                 5       // Standard Device Request - SET ADDRESS
+#define USB_REQUEST_GET_DESCRIPTOR              6       // Standard Device Request - GET DESCRIPTOR
+#define USB_REQUEST_SET_DESCRIPTOR              7       // Standard Device Request - SET DESCRIPTOR
+#define USB_REQUEST_GET_CONFIGURATION           8       // Standard Device Request - GET CONFIGURATION
+#define USB_REQUEST_SET_CONFIGURATION           9       // Standard Device Request - SET CONFIGURATION
+#define USB_REQUEST_GET_INTERFACE               10      // Standard Device Request - GET INTERFACE
+#define USB_REQUEST_SET_INTERFACE               11      // Standard Device Request - SET INTERFACE
+#define USB_REQUEST_SYNCH_FRAME                 12      // Standard Device Request - SYNCH FRAME
+
+#define USB_FEATURE_ENDPOINT_HALT               0       // CLEAR/SET FEATURE - Endpoint Halt
+#define USB_FEATURE_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP        1       // CLEAR/SET FEATURE - Device remote wake-up
+#define USB_FEATURE_TEST_MODE                   2       // CLEAR/SET FEATURE - Test mode
+
+/* Setup Data Constants */
+
+#define USB_SETUP_HOST_TO_DEVICE                0x00    // Device Request bmRequestType transfer direction - host to device transfer
+#define USB_SETUP_DEVICE_TO_HOST                0x80    // Device Request bmRequestType transfer direction - device to host transfer
+#define USB_SETUP_TYPE_STANDARD                 0x00    // Device Request bmRequestType type - standard
+#define USB_SETUP_TYPE_CLASS                    0x20    // Device Request bmRequestType type - class
+#define USB_SETUP_TYPE_VENDOR                   0x40    // Device Request bmRequestType type - vendor
+#define USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_DEVICE              0x00    // Device Request bmRequestType recipient - device
+#define USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_INTERFACE           0x01    // Device Request bmRequestType recipient - interface
+#define USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_ENDPOINT            0x02    // Device Request bmRequestType recipient - endpoint
+#define USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_OTHER               0x03    // Device Request bmRequestType recipient - other
+
+/* USB descriptors  */
+
+#define USB_DESCRIPTOR_DEVICE                   0x01    // bDescriptorType for a Device Descriptor.
+#define USB_DESCRIPTOR_CONFIGURATION            0x02    // bDescriptorType for a Configuration Descriptor.
+#define USB_DESCRIPTOR_STRING                   0x03    // bDescriptorType for a String Descriptor.
+#define USB_DESCRIPTOR_INTERFACE                0x04    // bDescriptorType for an Interface Descriptor.
+#define USB_DESCRIPTOR_ENDPOINT                 0x05    // bDescriptorType for an Endpoint Descriptor.
+#define USB_DESCRIPTOR_DEVICE_QUALIFIER         0x06    // bDescriptorType for a Device Qualifier.
+#define USB_DESCRIPTOR_OTHER_SPEED              0x07    // bDescriptorType for a Other Speed Configuration.
+#define USB_DESCRIPTOR_INTERFACE_POWER          0x08    // bDescriptorType for Interface Power.
+#define USB_DESCRIPTOR_OTG                      0x09    // bDescriptorType for an OTG Descriptor.
+
+#define HID_DESCRIPTOR_HID                      0x21
+
+
+
+/* OTG SET FEATURE Constants    */
+#define OTG_FEATURE_B_HNP_ENABLE                3       // SET FEATURE OTG - Enable B device to perform HNP
+#define OTG_FEATURE_A_HNP_SUPPORT               4       // SET FEATURE OTG - A device supports HNP
+#define OTG_FEATURE_A_ALT_HNP_SUPPORT           5       // SET FEATURE OTG - Another port on the A device supports HNP
+
+/* USB Endpoint Transfer Types  */
+#define USB_TRANSFER_TYPE_CONTROL               0x00    // Endpoint is a control endpoint.
+#define USB_TRANSFER_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS           0x01    // Endpoint is an isochronous endpoint.
+#define USB_TRANSFER_TYPE_BULK                  0x02    // Endpoint is a bulk endpoint.
+#define USB_TRANSFER_TYPE_INTERRUPT             0x03    // Endpoint is an interrupt endpoint.
+#define bmUSB_TRANSFER_TYPE                     0x03    // bit mask to separate transfer type from ISO attributes
+
+
+/* Standard Feature Selectors for CLEAR_FEATURE Requests    */
+#define USB_FEATURE_ENDPOINT_STALL              0       // Endpoint recipient
+#define USB_FEATURE_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP        1       // Device recipient
+#define USB_FEATURE_TEST_MODE                   2       // Device recipient
+
+/* descriptor data structures */
+
+/* Device descriptor structure */
+typedef struct {
+        uint8_t bLength; // Length of this descriptor.
+        uint8_t bDescriptorType; // DEVICE descriptor type (USB_DESCRIPTOR_DEVICE).
+        uint16_t bcdUSB; // USB Spec Release Number (BCD).
+        uint8_t bDeviceClass; // Class code (assigned by the USB-IF). 0xFF-Vendor specific.
+        uint8_t bDeviceSubClass; // Subclass code (assigned by the USB-IF).
+        uint8_t bDeviceProtocol; // Protocol code (assigned by the USB-IF). 0xFF-Vendor specific.
+        uint8_t bMaxPacketSize0; // Maximum packet size for endpoint 0.
+        uint16_t idVendor; // Vendor ID (assigned by the USB-IF).
+        uint16_t idProduct; // Product ID (assigned by the manufacturer).
+        uint16_t bcdDevice; // Device release number (BCD).
+        uint8_t iManufacturer; // Index of String Descriptor describing the manufacturer.
+        uint8_t iProduct; // Index of String Descriptor describing the product.
+        uint8_t iSerialNumber; // Index of String Descriptor with the device's serial number.
+        uint8_t bNumConfigurations; // Number of possible configurations.
+} __attribute__((packed)) USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+/* Configuration descriptor structure */
+typedef struct {
+        uint8_t bLength; // Length of this descriptor.
+        uint8_t bDescriptorType; // CONFIGURATION descriptor type (USB_DESCRIPTOR_CONFIGURATION).
+        uint16_t wTotalLength; // Total length of all descriptors for this configuration.
+        uint8_t bNumInterfaces; // Number of interfaces in this configuration.
+        uint8_t bConfigurationValue; // Value of this configuration (1 based).
+        uint8_t iConfiguration; // Index of String Descriptor describing the configuration.
+        uint8_t bmAttributes; // Configuration characteristics.
+        uint8_t bMaxPower; // Maximum power consumed by this configuration.
+} __attribute__((packed)) USB_CONFIGURATION_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+/* Interface descriptor structure */
+typedef struct {
+        uint8_t bLength; // Length of this descriptor.
+        uint8_t bDescriptorType; // INTERFACE descriptor type (USB_DESCRIPTOR_INTERFACE).
+        uint8_t bInterfaceNumber; // Number of this interface (0 based).
+        uint8_t bAlternateSetting; // Value of this alternate interface setting.
+        uint8_t bNumEndpoints; // Number of endpoints in this interface.
+        uint8_t bInterfaceClass; // Class code (assigned by the USB-IF).  0xFF-Vendor specific.
+        uint8_t bInterfaceSubClass; // Subclass code (assigned by the USB-IF).
+        uint8_t bInterfaceProtocol; // Protocol code (assigned by the USB-IF).  0xFF-Vendor specific.
+        uint8_t iInterface; // Index of String Descriptor describing the interface.
+} __attribute__((packed)) USB_INTERFACE_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+/* Endpoint descriptor structure */
+typedef struct {
+        uint8_t bLength; // Length of this descriptor.
+        uint8_t bDescriptorType; // ENDPOINT descriptor type (USB_DESCRIPTOR_ENDPOINT).
+        uint8_t bEndpointAddress; // Endpoint address. Bit 7 indicates direction (0=OUT, 1=IN).
+        uint8_t bmAttributes; // Endpoint transfer type.
+        uint16_t wMaxPacketSize; // Maximum packet size.
+        uint8_t bInterval; // Polling interval in frames.
+} __attribute__((packed)) USB_ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+/* HID descriptor */
+typedef struct {
+        uint8_t bLength;
+        uint8_t bDescriptorType;
+        uint16_t bcdHID; // HID class specification release
+        uint8_t bCountryCode;
+        uint8_t bNumDescriptors; // Number of additional class specific descriptors
+        uint8_t bDescrType; // Type of class descriptor
+        uint16_t wDescriptorLength; // Total size of the Report descriptor
+} __attribute__((packed)) USB_HID_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+typedef struct {
+        uint8_t bDescrType; // Type of class descriptor
+        uint16_t wDescriptorLength; // Total size of the Report descriptor
+} __attribute__((packed)) HID_CLASS_DESCRIPTOR_LEN_AND_TYPE;
+
+#endif // _ch9_h_
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/usbhost.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/usbhost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..eba480e60
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/usbhost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,529 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+/* MAX3421E-based USB Host Library header file */
+
+
+#if !defined(_usb_h_) || defined(_USBHOST_H_)
+#error "Never include usbhost.h directly; include Usb.h instead"
+#else
+#define _USBHOST_H_
+
+#if USING_SPI4TEENSY3
+#include <spi4teensy3.h>
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#endif
+
+/* SPI initialization */
+template< typename SPI_CLK, typename SPI_MOSI, typename SPI_MISO, typename SPI_SS > class SPi {
+public:
+#if USING_SPI4TEENSY3
+        static void init() {
+                // spi4teensy3 inits everything for us, except /SS
+                // CLK, MOSI and MISO are hard coded for now.
+                // spi4teensy3::init(0,0,0); // full speed, cpol 0, cpha 0
+                spi4teensy3::init(); // full speed, cpol 0, cpha 0
+                SPI_SS::SetDirWrite();
+                SPI_SS::Set();
+        }
+#elif SPI_HAS_TRANSACTION
+        static void init() {
+                SPI.begin(); // The SPI library with transaction will take care of setting up the pins - settings is set in beginTransaction()
+        }
+#elif !defined(SPDR)
+        static void init() {
+                SPI_SS::SetDirWrite();
+                SPI_SS::Set();
+                SPI.begin();
+#if defined(__MIPSEL__)
+                SPI.setClockDivider(1);
+#elif defined(__ARDUINO_X86__)
+                #ifdef SPI_CLOCK_1M // Hack used to check if setClockSpeed is available
+                    SPI.setClockSpeed(12000000); // The MAX3421E can handle up to 26MHz, but in practice this was the maximum that I could reliably use
+                #else
+                    SPI.setClockDivider(SPI_CLOCK_DIV2); // This will set the SPI frequency to 8MHz - it could be higher, but it is not supported in the old API
+                #endif
+#else
+                SPI.setClockDivider(4); // Set speed to 84MHz/4=21MHz - the MAX3421E can handle up to 26MHz
+#endif
+        }
+#elif defined(RBL_NRF51822)
+        static void init() {
+                SPI_SS::SetDirWrite();
+                SPI_SS::Set();
+                SPI.begin();
+                // SPI.setFrequency(SPI_FREQUENCY_8M);
+        }
+#else
+        static void init() {
+                //uint8_t tmp;
+                SPI_CLK::SetDirWrite();
+                SPI_MOSI::SetDirWrite();
+                SPI_MISO::SetDirRead();
+                SPI_SS::SetDirWrite();
+                /* mode 00 (CPOL=0, CPHA=0) master, fclk/2. Mode 11 (CPOL=11, CPHA=11) is also supported by MAX3421E */
+                SPCR = 0x50;
+                SPSR = 0x01; // 0x01
+                /**/
+                //tmp = SPSR;
+                //tmp = SPDR;
+        }
+#endif
+};
+
+/* SPI pin definitions. see avrpins.h   */
+#if defined(__AVR_ATmega1280__) || (__AVR_ATmega2560__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__)
+typedef SPi< Pb1, Pb2, Pb3, Pb0 > spi;
+#elif  defined(__AVR_ATmega168__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega328P__)
+typedef SPi< Pb5, Pb3, Pb4, Pb2 > spi;
+#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega644__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega644P__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega1284__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega1284P__)
+typedef SPi< Pb7, Pb5, Pb6, Pb4 > spi;
+#elif (defined(CORE_TEENSY) && (defined(__MK20DX128__) || defined(__MK20DX256__))) || defined(__ARDUINO_X86__) || defined(__MIPSEL__)
+typedef SPi< P13, P11, P12, P10 > spi;
+#elif defined(ARDUINO_SAM_DUE) && defined(__SAM3X8E__)
+typedef SPi< P76, P75, P74, P10 > spi;
+#elif defined(RBL_NRF51822)
+typedef SPi< P16, P18, P17, P10 > spi;
+#else
+#error "No SPI entry in usbhost.h"
+#endif
+
+typedef enum {
+        vbus_on = 0,
+        vbus_off = GPX_VBDET
+} VBUS_t;
+
+template< typename SPI_SS, typename INTR > class MAX3421e /* : public spi */ {
+        static uint8_t vbusState;
+
+public:
+        MAX3421e();
+        void regWr(uint8_t reg, uint8_t data);
+        uint8_t* bytesWr(uint8_t reg, uint8_t nbytes, uint8_t* data_p);
+        void gpioWr(uint8_t data);
+        uint8_t regRd(uint8_t reg);
+        uint8_t* bytesRd(uint8_t reg, uint8_t nbytes, uint8_t* data_p);
+        uint8_t gpioRd();
+        uint16_t reset();
+        int8_t Init();
+        int8_t Init(int mseconds);
+
+        void vbusPower(VBUS_t state) {
+                regWr(rPINCTL, (bmFDUPSPI | bmINTLEVEL | state));
+        }
+
+        uint8_t getVbusState(void) {
+                return vbusState;
+        };
+        void busprobe();
+        uint8_t GpxHandler();
+        uint8_t IntHandler();
+        uint8_t Task();
+};
+
+template< typename SPI_SS, typename INTR >
+        uint8_t MAX3421e< SPI_SS, INTR >::vbusState = 0;
+
+/* constructor */
+template< typename SPI_SS, typename INTR >
+MAX3421e< SPI_SS, INTR >::MAX3421e() {
+        // Leaving ADK hardware setup in here, for now. This really belongs with the other parts.
+#ifdef BOARD_MEGA_ADK
+        // For Mega ADK, which has a Max3421e on-board, set MAX_RESET to output mode, and then set it to HIGH
+        P55::SetDirWrite();
+        P55::Set();
+#endif
+};
+
+/* write single byte into MAX3421 register */
+template< typename SPI_SS, typename INTR >
+void MAX3421e< SPI_SS, INTR >::regWr(uint8_t reg, uint8_t data) {
+        XMEM_ACQUIRE_SPI();
+#if SPI_HAS_TRANSACTION
+        SPI.beginTransaction(SPISettings(26000000, MSBFIRST, SPI_MODE0)); // The MAX3421E can handle up to 26MHz, use MSB First and SPI mode 0
+#endif
+        SPI_SS::Clear();
+
+#if USING_SPI4TEENSY3
+        uint8_t c[2];
+        c[0] = reg | 0x02;
+        c[1] = data;
+        spi4teensy3::send(c, 2);
+#elif SPI_HAS_TRANSACTION
+        uint8_t c[2];
+        c[0] = reg | 0x02;
+        c[1] = data;
+        SPI.transfer(c, 2);
+#elif !defined(SPDR)
+        SPI.transfer(reg | 0x02);
+        SPI.transfer(data);
+#else
+        SPDR = (reg | 0x02);
+        while(!(SPSR & (1 << SPIF)));
+        SPDR = data;
+        while(!(SPSR & (1 << SPIF)));
+#endif
+
+        SPI_SS::Set();
+#if SPI_HAS_TRANSACTION
+        SPI.endTransaction();
+#endif
+        XMEM_RELEASE_SPI();
+        return;
+};
+/* multiple-byte write                            */
+
+/* returns a pointer to memory position after last written */
+template< typename SPI_SS, typename INTR >
+uint8_t* MAX3421e< SPI_SS, INTR >::bytesWr(uint8_t reg, uint8_t nbytes, uint8_t* data_p) {
+        XMEM_ACQUIRE_SPI();
+#if SPI_HAS_TRANSACTION
+        SPI.beginTransaction(SPISettings(26000000, MSBFIRST, SPI_MODE0)); // The MAX3421E can handle up to 26MHz, use MSB First and SPI mode 0
+#endif
+        SPI_SS::Clear();
+
+#if USING_SPI4TEENSY3
+        spi4teensy3::send(reg | 0x02);
+        spi4teensy3::send(data_p, nbytes);
+        data_p += nbytes;
+#elif SPI_HAS_TRANSACTION
+        SPI.transfer(reg | 0x02);
+        SPI.transfer(data_p, nbytes);
+        data_p += nbytes;
+#elif defined(__ARDUINO_X86__)
+        SPI.transfer(reg | 0x02);
+        SPI.transferBuffer(data_p, NULL, nbytes);
+        data_p += nbytes;
+#elif !defined(SPDR)
+        SPI.transfer(reg | 0x02);
+        while(nbytes) {
+                SPI.transfer(*data_p);
+                nbytes--;
+                data_p++; // advance data pointer
+        }
+#else
+        SPDR = (reg | 0x02); //set WR bit and send register number
+        while(nbytes) {
+                while(!(SPSR & (1 << SPIF))); //check if previous byte was sent
+                SPDR = (*data_p); // send next data byte
+                nbytes--;
+                data_p++; // advance data pointer
+        }
+        while(!(SPSR & (1 << SPIF)));
+#endif
+
+        SPI_SS::Set();
+#if SPI_HAS_TRANSACTION
+        SPI.endTransaction();
+#endif
+        XMEM_RELEASE_SPI();
+        return ( data_p);
+}
+/* GPIO write                                           */
+/*GPIO byte is split between 2 registers, so two writes are needed to write one byte */
+
+/* GPOUT bits are in the low nibble. 0-3 in IOPINS1, 4-7 in IOPINS2 */
+template< typename SPI_SS, typename INTR >
+void MAX3421e< SPI_SS, INTR >::gpioWr(uint8_t data) {
+        regWr(rIOPINS1, data);
+        data >>= 4;
+        regWr(rIOPINS2, data);
+        return;
+}
+
+/* single host register read    */
+template< typename SPI_SS, typename INTR >
+uint8_t MAX3421e< SPI_SS, INTR >::regRd(uint8_t reg) {
+        XMEM_ACQUIRE_SPI();
+#if SPI_HAS_TRANSACTION
+        SPI.beginTransaction(SPISettings(26000000, MSBFIRST, SPI_MODE0)); // The MAX3421E can handle up to 26MHz, use MSB First and SPI mode 0
+#endif
+        SPI_SS::Clear();
+
+#if USING_SPI4TEENSY3
+        spi4teensy3::send(reg);
+        uint8_t rv = spi4teensy3::receive();
+        SPI_SS::Set();
+#elif !defined(SPDR) || SPI_HAS_TRANSACTION
+        SPI.transfer(reg);
+        uint8_t rv = SPI.transfer(0); // Send empty byte
+        SPI_SS::Set();
+#else
+        SPDR = reg;
+        while(!(SPSR & (1 << SPIF)));
+        SPDR = 0; // Send empty byte
+        while(!(SPSR & (1 << SPIF)));
+        SPI_SS::Set();
+        uint8_t rv = SPDR;
+#endif
+
+#if SPI_HAS_TRANSACTION
+        SPI.endTransaction();
+#endif
+        XMEM_RELEASE_SPI();
+        return (rv);
+}
+/* multiple-byte register read  */
+
+/* returns a pointer to a memory position after last read   */
+template< typename SPI_SS, typename INTR >
+uint8_t* MAX3421e< SPI_SS, INTR >::bytesRd(uint8_t reg, uint8_t nbytes, uint8_t* data_p) {
+        XMEM_ACQUIRE_SPI();
+#if SPI_HAS_TRANSACTION
+        SPI.beginTransaction(SPISettings(26000000, MSBFIRST, SPI_MODE0)); // The MAX3421E can handle up to 26MHz, use MSB First and SPI mode 0
+#endif
+        SPI_SS::Clear();
+
+#if USING_SPI4TEENSY3
+        spi4teensy3::send(reg);
+        spi4teensy3::receive(data_p, nbytes);
+        data_p += nbytes;
+#elif SPI_HAS_TRANSACTION
+        SPI.transfer(reg);
+        memset(data_p, 0, nbytes); // Make sure we send out empty bytes
+        SPI.transfer(data_p, nbytes);
+        data_p += nbytes;
+#elif defined(__ARDUINO_X86__)
+        SPI.transfer(reg);
+        SPI.transferBuffer(NULL, data_p, nbytes);
+        data_p += nbytes;
+#elif !defined(SPDR)
+        SPI.transfer(reg);
+        while(nbytes) {
+            *data_p++ = SPI.transfer(0);
+            nbytes--;
+        }
+#else
+        SPDR = reg;
+        while(!(SPSR & (1 << SPIF))); //wait
+        while(nbytes) {
+                SPDR = 0; // Send empty byte
+                nbytes--;
+                while(!(SPSR & (1 << SPIF)));
+#if 0
+                {
+                        *data_p = SPDR;
+                        printf("%2.2x ", *data_p);
+                }
+                data_p++;
+        }
+        printf("\r\n");
+#else
+                *data_p++ = SPDR;
+        }
+#endif
+#endif
+
+        SPI_SS::Set();
+#if SPI_HAS_TRANSACTION
+        SPI.endTransaction();
+#endif
+        XMEM_RELEASE_SPI();
+        return ( data_p);
+}
+/* GPIO read. See gpioWr for explanation */
+
+/* GPIN pins are in high nibbles of IOPINS1, IOPINS2    */
+template< typename SPI_SS, typename INTR >
+uint8_t MAX3421e< SPI_SS, INTR >::gpioRd() {
+        uint8_t gpin = 0;
+        gpin = regRd(rIOPINS2); //pins 4-7
+        gpin &= 0xf0; //clean lower nibble
+        gpin |= (regRd(rIOPINS1) >> 4); //shift low bits and OR with upper from previous operation.
+        return ( gpin);
+}
+
+/* reset MAX3421E. Returns number of cycles it took for PLL to stabilize after reset
+  or zero if PLL haven't stabilized in 65535 cycles */
+template< typename SPI_SS, typename INTR >
+uint16_t MAX3421e< SPI_SS, INTR >::reset() {
+        uint16_t i = 0;
+        regWr(rUSBCTL, bmCHIPRES);
+        regWr(rUSBCTL, 0x00);
+        while(++i) {
+                if((regRd(rUSBIRQ) & bmOSCOKIRQ)) {
+                        break;
+                }
+        }
+        return ( i);
+}
+
+/* initialize MAX3421E. Set Host mode, pullups, and stuff. Returns 0 if success, -1 if not */
+template< typename SPI_SS, typename INTR >
+int8_t MAX3421e< SPI_SS, INTR >::Init() {
+        XMEM_ACQUIRE_SPI();
+        // Moved here.
+        // you really should not init hardware in the constructor when it involves locks.
+        // Also avoids the vbus flicker issue confusing some devices.
+        /* pin and peripheral setup */
+        SPI_SS::SetDirWrite();
+        SPI_SS::Set();
+        spi::init();
+        INTR::SetDirRead();
+        XMEM_RELEASE_SPI();
+        /* MAX3421E - full-duplex SPI, level interrupt */
+        // GPX pin on. Moved here, otherwise we flicker the vbus.
+        regWr(rPINCTL, (bmFDUPSPI | bmINTLEVEL));
+
+        if(reset() == 0) { //OSCOKIRQ hasn't asserted in time
+                return ( -1);
+        }
+
+        regWr(rMODE, bmDPPULLDN | bmDMPULLDN | bmHOST); // set pull-downs, Host
+
+        regWr(rHIEN, bmCONDETIE | bmFRAMEIE); //connection detection
+
+        /* check if device is connected */
+        regWr(rHCTL, bmSAMPLEBUS); // sample USB bus
+        while(!(regRd(rHCTL) & bmSAMPLEBUS)); //wait for sample operation to finish
+
+        busprobe(); //check if anything is connected
+
+        regWr(rHIRQ, bmCONDETIRQ); //clear connection detect interrupt
+        regWr(rCPUCTL, 0x01); //enable interrupt pin
+
+        return ( 0);
+}
+
+/* initialize MAX3421E. Set Host mode, pullups, and stuff. Returns 0 if success, -1 if not */
+template< typename SPI_SS, typename INTR >
+int8_t MAX3421e< SPI_SS, INTR >::Init(int mseconds) {
+        XMEM_ACQUIRE_SPI();
+        // Moved here.
+        // you really should not init hardware in the constructor when it involves locks.
+        // Also avoids the vbus flicker issue confusing some devices.
+        /* pin and peripheral setup */
+        SPI_SS::SetDirWrite();
+        SPI_SS::Set();
+        spi::init();
+        INTR::SetDirRead();
+        XMEM_RELEASE_SPI();
+        /* MAX3421E - full-duplex SPI, level interrupt, vbus off */
+        regWr(rPINCTL, (bmFDUPSPI | bmINTLEVEL | GPX_VBDET));
+
+        if(reset() == 0) { //OSCOKIRQ hasn't asserted in time
+                return ( -1);
+        }
+
+        // Delay a minimum of 1 second to ensure any capacitors are drained.
+        // 1 second is required to make sure we do not smoke a Microdrive!
+        if(mseconds < 1000) mseconds = 1000;
+        delay(mseconds);
+
+        regWr(rMODE, bmDPPULLDN | bmDMPULLDN | bmHOST); // set pull-downs, Host
+
+        regWr(rHIEN, bmCONDETIE | bmFRAMEIE); //connection detection
+
+        /* check if device is connected */
+        regWr(rHCTL, bmSAMPLEBUS); // sample USB bus
+        while(!(regRd(rHCTL) & bmSAMPLEBUS)); //wait for sample operation to finish
+
+        busprobe(); //check if anything is connected
+
+        regWr(rHIRQ, bmCONDETIRQ); //clear connection detect interrupt
+        regWr(rCPUCTL, 0x01); //enable interrupt pin
+
+        // GPX pin on. This is done here so that busprobe will fail if we have a switch connected.
+        regWr(rPINCTL, (bmFDUPSPI | bmINTLEVEL));
+
+        return ( 0);
+}
+
+/* probe bus to determine device presence and speed and switch host to this speed */
+template< typename SPI_SS, typename INTR >
+void MAX3421e< SPI_SS, INTR >::busprobe() {
+        uint8_t bus_sample;
+        bus_sample = regRd(rHRSL); //Get J,K status
+        bus_sample &= (bmJSTATUS | bmKSTATUS); //zero the rest of the byte
+        switch(bus_sample) { //start full-speed or low-speed host
+                case( bmJSTATUS):
+                        if((regRd(rMODE) & bmLOWSPEED) == 0) {
+                                regWr(rMODE, MODE_FS_HOST); //start full-speed host
+                                vbusState = FSHOST;
+                        } else {
+                                regWr(rMODE, MODE_LS_HOST); //start low-speed host
+                                vbusState = LSHOST;
+                        }
+                        break;
+                case( bmKSTATUS):
+                        if((regRd(rMODE) & bmLOWSPEED) == 0) {
+                                regWr(rMODE, MODE_LS_HOST); //start low-speed host
+                                vbusState = LSHOST;
+                        } else {
+                                regWr(rMODE, MODE_FS_HOST); //start full-speed host
+                                vbusState = FSHOST;
+                        }
+                        break;
+                case( bmSE1): //illegal state
+                        vbusState = SE1;
+                        break;
+                case( bmSE0): //disconnected state
+                        regWr(rMODE, bmDPPULLDN | bmDMPULLDN | bmHOST | bmSEPIRQ);
+                        vbusState = SE0;
+                        break;
+        }//end switch( bus_sample )
+}
+
+/* MAX3421 state change task and interrupt handler */
+template< typename SPI_SS, typename INTR >
+uint8_t MAX3421e< SPI_SS, INTR >::Task(void) {
+        uint8_t rcode = 0;
+        uint8_t pinvalue;
+        //USB_HOST_SERIAL.print("Vbus state: ");
+        //USB_HOST_SERIAL.println( vbusState, HEX );
+        pinvalue = INTR::IsSet(); //Read();
+        //pinvalue = digitalRead( MAX_INT );
+        if(pinvalue == 0) {
+                rcode = IntHandler();
+        }
+        //    pinvalue = digitalRead( MAX_GPX );
+        //    if( pinvalue == LOW ) {
+        //        GpxHandler();
+        //    }
+        //    usbSM();                                //USB state machine
+        return ( rcode);
+}
+
+template< typename SPI_SS, typename INTR >
+uint8_t MAX3421e< SPI_SS, INTR >::IntHandler() {
+        uint8_t HIRQ;
+        uint8_t HIRQ_sendback = 0x00;
+        HIRQ = regRd(rHIRQ); //determine interrupt source
+        //if( HIRQ & bmFRAMEIRQ ) {               //->1ms SOF interrupt handler
+        //    HIRQ_sendback |= bmFRAMEIRQ;
+        //}//end FRAMEIRQ handling
+        if(HIRQ & bmCONDETIRQ) {
+                busprobe();
+                HIRQ_sendback |= bmCONDETIRQ;
+        }
+        /* End HIRQ interrupts handling, clear serviced IRQs    */
+        regWr(rHIRQ, HIRQ_sendback);
+        return ( HIRQ_sendback);
+}
+//template< typename SPI_SS, typename INTR >
+//uint8_t MAX3421e< SPI_SS, INTR >::GpxHandler()
+//{
+//    uint8_t GPINIRQ = regRd( rGPINIRQ );          //read GPIN IRQ register
+////    if( GPINIRQ & bmGPINIRQ7 ) {            //vbus overload
+////        vbusPwr( OFF );                     //attempt powercycle
+////        delay( 1000 );
+////        vbusPwr( ON );
+////        regWr( rGPINIRQ, bmGPINIRQ7 );
+////    }
+//    return( GPINIRQ );
+//}
+
+#endif // _USBHOST_H_
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/usbhub.cpp b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/usbhub.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7fed48e78
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/usbhub.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,425 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+#include "usbhub.h"
+
+bool USBHub::bResetInitiated = false;
+
+USBHub::USBHub(USB *p) :
+pUsb(p),
+bAddress(0),
+bNbrPorts(0),
+//bInitState(0),
+qNextPollTime(0),
+bPollEnable(false) {
+        epInfo[0].epAddr = 0;
+        epInfo[0].maxPktSize = 8;
+        epInfo[0].epAttribs = 0;
+        epInfo[0].bmNakPower = USB_NAK_MAX_POWER;
+
+        epInfo[1].epAddr = 1;
+        epInfo[1].maxPktSize = 8; //kludge
+        epInfo[1].epAttribs = 0;
+        epInfo[1].bmNakPower = USB_NAK_NOWAIT;
+
+        if(pUsb)
+                pUsb->RegisterDeviceClass(this);
+}
+
+uint8_t USBHub::Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed) {
+        uint8_t buf[32];
+        USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR * udd = reinterpret_cast<USB_DEVICE_DESCRIPTOR*>(buf);
+        HubDescriptor* hd = reinterpret_cast<HubDescriptor*>(buf);
+        USB_CONFIGURATION_DESCRIPTOR * ucd = reinterpret_cast<USB_CONFIGURATION_DESCRIPTOR*>(buf);
+        uint8_t rcode;
+        UsbDevice *p = NULL;
+        EpInfo *oldep_ptr = NULL;
+        uint8_t len = 0;
+        uint16_t cd_len = 0;
+
+        //USBTRACE("\r\nHub Init Start ");
+        //D_PrintHex<uint8_t > (bInitState, 0x80);
+
+        AddressPool &addrPool = pUsb->GetAddressPool();
+
+        //switch (bInitState) {
+        //        case 0:
+        if(bAddress)
+                return USB_ERROR_CLASS_INSTANCE_ALREADY_IN_USE;
+
+        // Get pointer to pseudo device with address 0 assigned
+        p = addrPool.GetUsbDevicePtr(0);
+
+        if(!p)
+                return USB_ERROR_ADDRESS_NOT_FOUND_IN_POOL;
+
+        if(!p->epinfo)
+                return USB_ERROR_EPINFO_IS_NULL;
+
+        // Save old pointer to EP_RECORD of address 0
+        oldep_ptr = p->epinfo;
+
+        // Temporary assign new pointer to epInfo to p->epinfo in order to avoid toggle inconsistence
+        p->epinfo = epInfo;
+
+        p->lowspeed = lowspeed;
+
+        // Get device descriptor
+        rcode = pUsb->getDevDescr(0, 0, 8, (uint8_t*)buf);
+
+        p->lowspeed = false;
+
+        if(!rcode)
+                len = (buf[0] > 32) ? 32 : buf[0];
+
+        if(rcode) {
+                // Restore p->epinfo
+                p->epinfo = oldep_ptr;
+                return rcode;
+        }
+
+        // Extract device class from device descriptor
+        // If device class is not a hub return
+        if(udd->bDeviceClass != 0x09)
+                return USB_DEV_CONFIG_ERROR_DEVICE_NOT_SUPPORTED;
+
+        // Allocate new address according to device class
+        bAddress = addrPool.AllocAddress(parent, (udd->bDeviceClass == 0x09) ? true : false, port);
+
+        if(!bAddress)
+                return USB_ERROR_OUT_OF_ADDRESS_SPACE_IN_POOL;
+
+        // Extract Max Packet Size from the device descriptor
+        epInfo[0].maxPktSize = udd->bMaxPacketSize0;
+
+        // Assign new address to the device
+        rcode = pUsb->setAddr(0, 0, bAddress);
+
+        if(rcode) {
+                // Restore p->epinfo
+                p->epinfo = oldep_ptr;
+                addrPool.FreeAddress(bAddress);
+                bAddress = 0;
+                return rcode;
+        }
+
+        //USBTRACE2("\r\nHub address: ", bAddress );
+
+        // Restore p->epinfo
+        p->epinfo = oldep_ptr;
+
+        if(len)
+                rcode = pUsb->getDevDescr(bAddress, 0, len, (uint8_t*)buf);
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailGetDevDescr;
+
+        // Assign epInfo to epinfo pointer
+        rcode = pUsb->setEpInfoEntry(bAddress, 2, epInfo);
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetDevTblEntry;
+
+        //                bInitState = 1;
+
+        //        case 1:
+        // Get hub descriptor
+        rcode = GetHubDescriptor(0, 8, buf);
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailGetHubDescr;
+
+        // Save number of ports for future use
+        bNbrPorts = hd->bNbrPorts;
+
+        //                bInitState = 2;
+
+        //        case 2:
+        // Read configuration Descriptor in Order To Obtain Proper Configuration Value
+        rcode = pUsb->getConfDescr(bAddress, 0, 8, 0, buf);
+
+        if(!rcode) {
+                cd_len = ucd->wTotalLength;
+                rcode = pUsb->getConfDescr(bAddress, 0, cd_len, 0, buf);
+        }
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailGetConfDescr;
+
+        // The following code is of no practical use in real life applications.
+        // It only intended for the usb protocol sniffer to properly parse hub-class requests.
+        {
+                uint8_t buf2[24];
+
+                rcode = pUsb->getConfDescr(bAddress, 0, buf[0], 0, buf2);
+
+                if(rcode)
+                        goto FailGetConfDescr;
+        }
+
+        // Set Configuration Value
+        rcode = pUsb->setConf(bAddress, 0, buf[5]);
+
+        if(rcode)
+                goto FailSetConfDescr;
+
+        //                bInitState = 3;
+
+        //        case 3:
+        // Power on all ports
+        for(uint8_t j = 1; j <= bNbrPorts; j++)
+                SetPortFeature(HUB_FEATURE_PORT_POWER, j, 0); //HubPortPowerOn(j);
+
+        pUsb->SetHubPreMask();
+        bPollEnable = true;
+        //                bInitState = 0;
+        //}
+        //bInitState = 0;
+        //USBTRACE("...OK\r\n");
+        return 0;
+
+        // Oleg, No debugging?? -- xxxajk
+FailGetDevDescr:
+        goto Fail;
+
+FailSetDevTblEntry:
+        goto Fail;
+
+FailGetHubDescr:
+        goto Fail;
+
+FailGetConfDescr:
+        goto Fail;
+
+FailSetConfDescr:
+        goto Fail;
+
+Fail:
+        USBTRACE("...FAIL\r\n");
+        return rcode;
+}
+
+uint8_t USBHub::Release() {
+        pUsb->GetAddressPool().FreeAddress(bAddress);
+
+        if(bAddress == 0x41)
+                pUsb->SetHubPreMask();
+
+        bAddress = 0;
+        bNbrPorts = 0;
+        qNextPollTime = 0;
+        bPollEnable = false;
+        return 0;
+}
+
+uint8_t USBHub::Poll() {
+        uint8_t rcode = 0;
+
+        if(!bPollEnable)
+                return 0;
+
+        if(((long)(millis() - qNextPollTime) >= 0L)) {
+                rcode = CheckHubStatus();
+                qNextPollTime = millis() + 100;
+        }
+        return rcode;
+}
+
+uint8_t USBHub::CheckHubStatus() {
+        uint8_t rcode;
+        uint8_t buf[8];
+        uint16_t read = 1;
+
+        rcode = pUsb->inTransfer(bAddress, 1, &read, buf);
+
+        if(rcode)
+                return rcode;
+
+        //if (buf[0] & 0x01) // Hub Status Change
+        //{
+        //        pUsb->PrintHubStatus(addr);
+        //        rcode = GetHubStatus(1, 0, 1, 4, buf);
+        //        if (rcode)
+        //        {
+        //                USB_HOST_SERIAL.print("GetHubStatus Error");
+        //                USB_HOST_SERIAL.println(rcode, HEX);
+        //                return rcode;
+        //        }
+        //}
+        for(uint8_t port = 1, mask = 0x02; port < 8; mask <<= 1, port++) {
+                if(buf[0] & mask) {
+                        HubEvent evt;
+                        evt.bmEvent = 0;
+
+                        rcode = GetPortStatus(port, 4, evt.evtBuff);
+
+                        if(rcode)
+                                continue;
+
+                        rcode = PortStatusChange(port, evt);
+
+                        if(rcode == HUB_ERROR_PORT_HAS_BEEN_RESET)
+                                return 0;
+
+                        if(rcode)
+                                return rcode;
+                }
+        } // for
+
+        for(uint8_t port = 1; port <= bNbrPorts; port++) {
+                HubEvent evt;
+                evt.bmEvent = 0;
+
+                rcode = GetPortStatus(port, 4, evt.evtBuff);
+
+                if(rcode)
+                        continue;
+
+                if((evt.bmStatus & bmHUB_PORT_STATE_CHECK_DISABLED) != bmHUB_PORT_STATE_DISABLED)
+                        continue;
+
+                // Emulate connection event for the port
+                evt.bmChange |= bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_C_PORT_CONNECTION;
+
+                rcode = PortStatusChange(port, evt);
+
+                if(rcode == HUB_ERROR_PORT_HAS_BEEN_RESET)
+                        return 0;
+
+                if(rcode)
+                        return rcode;
+        } // for
+        return 0;
+}
+
+void USBHub::ResetHubPort(uint8_t port) {
+        HubEvent evt;
+        evt.bmEvent = 0;
+        uint8_t rcode;
+
+        ClearPortFeature(HUB_FEATURE_C_PORT_ENABLE, port, 0);
+        ClearPortFeature(HUB_FEATURE_C_PORT_CONNECTION, port, 0);
+        SetPortFeature(HUB_FEATURE_PORT_RESET, port, 0);
+
+
+        for(int i = 0; i < 3; i++) {
+                rcode = GetPortStatus(port, 4, evt.evtBuff);
+                if(rcode) break; // Some kind of error, bail.
+                if(evt.bmEvent == bmHUB_PORT_EVENT_RESET_COMPLETE || evt.bmEvent == bmHUB_PORT_EVENT_LS_RESET_COMPLETE) {
+                        break;
+                }
+                delay(100); // simulate polling.
+        }
+        ClearPortFeature(HUB_FEATURE_C_PORT_RESET, port, 0);
+        ClearPortFeature(HUB_FEATURE_C_PORT_CONNECTION, port, 0);
+        delay(20);
+}
+
+uint8_t USBHub::PortStatusChange(uint8_t port, HubEvent &evt) {
+        switch(evt.bmEvent) {
+                        // Device connected event
+                case bmHUB_PORT_EVENT_CONNECT:
+                case bmHUB_PORT_EVENT_LS_CONNECT:
+                        if(bResetInitiated)
+                                return 0;
+
+                        ClearPortFeature(HUB_FEATURE_C_PORT_ENABLE, port, 0);
+                        ClearPortFeature(HUB_FEATURE_C_PORT_CONNECTION, port, 0);
+                        SetPortFeature(HUB_FEATURE_PORT_RESET, port, 0);
+                        bResetInitiated = true;
+                        return HUB_ERROR_PORT_HAS_BEEN_RESET;
+
+                        // Device disconnected event
+                case bmHUB_PORT_EVENT_DISCONNECT:
+                        ClearPortFeature(HUB_FEATURE_C_PORT_ENABLE, port, 0);
+                        ClearPortFeature(HUB_FEATURE_C_PORT_CONNECTION, port, 0);
+                        bResetInitiated = false;
+
+                        UsbDeviceAddress a;
+                        a.devAddress = 0;
+                        a.bmHub = 0;
+                        a.bmParent = bAddress;
+                        a.bmAddress = port;
+                        pUsb->ReleaseDevice(a.devAddress);
+                        return 0;
+
+                        // Reset complete event
+                case bmHUB_PORT_EVENT_RESET_COMPLETE:
+                case bmHUB_PORT_EVENT_LS_RESET_COMPLETE:
+                        ClearPortFeature(HUB_FEATURE_C_PORT_RESET, port, 0);
+                        ClearPortFeature(HUB_FEATURE_C_PORT_CONNECTION, port, 0);
+
+                        delay(20);
+
+                        a.devAddress = bAddress;
+
+                        pUsb->Configuring(a.bmAddress, port, (evt.bmStatus & bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_LOW_SPEED));
+                        bResetInitiated = false;
+                        break;
+
+        } // switch (evt.bmEvent)
+        return 0;
+}
+
+void PrintHubPortStatus(USBHub *hubptr, uint8_t addr, uint8_t port, bool print_changes) {
+        uint8_t rcode = 0;
+        HubEvent evt;
+
+        rcode = hubptr->GetPortStatus(port, 4, evt.evtBuff);
+
+        if(rcode) {
+                USB_HOST_SERIAL.println("ERROR!");
+                return;
+        }
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.print("\r\nPort ");
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.println(port, DEC);
+
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.println("Status");
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.print("CONNECTION:\t");
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.println((evt.bmStatus & bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_CONNECTION) > 0, DEC);
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.print("ENABLE:\t\t");
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.println((evt.bmStatus & bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_ENABLE) > 0, DEC);
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.print("SUSPEND:\t");
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.println((evt.bmStatus & bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_SUSPEND) > 0, DEC);
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.print("OVER_CURRENT:\t");
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.println((evt.bmStatus & bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_OVER_CURRENT) > 0, DEC);
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.print("RESET:\t\t");
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.println((evt.bmStatus & bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_RESET) > 0, DEC);
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.print("POWER:\t\t");
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.println((evt.bmStatus & bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_POWER) > 0, DEC);
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.print("LOW_SPEED:\t");
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.println((evt.bmStatus & bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_LOW_SPEED) > 0, DEC);
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.print("HIGH_SPEED:\t");
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.println((evt.bmStatus & bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_HIGH_SPEED) > 0, DEC);
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.print("TEST:\t\t");
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.println((evt.bmStatus & bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_TEST) > 0, DEC);
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.print("INDICATOR:\t");
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.println((evt.bmStatus & bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_INDICATOR) > 0, DEC);
+
+        if(!print_changes)
+                return;
+
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.println("\r\nChange");
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.print("CONNECTION:\t");
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.println((evt.bmChange & bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_C_PORT_CONNECTION) > 0, DEC);
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.print("ENABLE:\t\t");
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.println((evt.bmChange & bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_C_PORT_ENABLE) > 0, DEC);
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.print("SUSPEND:\t");
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.println((evt.bmChange & bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_C_PORT_SUSPEND) > 0, DEC);
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.print("OVER_CURRENT:\t");
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.println((evt.bmChange & bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_C_PORT_OVER_CURRENT) > 0, DEC);
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.print("RESET:\t\t");
+        USB_HOST_SERIAL.println((evt.bmChange & bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_C_PORT_RESET) > 0, DEC);
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/usbhub.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/usbhub.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1ac949445
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/usbhub.h
@@ -0,0 +1,252 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+#if !defined(__USBHUB_H__)
+#define __USBHUB_H__
+
+#include "Usb.h"
+
+#define USB_DESCRIPTOR_HUB                      0x09 // Hub descriptor type
+
+// Hub Requests
+#define bmREQ_CLEAR_HUB_FEATURE                 USB_SETUP_HOST_TO_DEVICE|USB_SETUP_TYPE_CLASS|USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_DEVICE
+#define bmREQ_CLEAR_PORT_FEATURE                USB_SETUP_HOST_TO_DEVICE|USB_SETUP_TYPE_CLASS|USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_OTHER
+#define bmREQ_CLEAR_TT_BUFFER                   USB_SETUP_HOST_TO_DEVICE|USB_SETUP_TYPE_CLASS|USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_OTHER
+#define bmREQ_GET_HUB_DESCRIPTOR                USB_SETUP_DEVICE_TO_HOST|USB_SETUP_TYPE_CLASS|USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_DEVICE
+#define bmREQ_GET_HUB_STATUS                    USB_SETUP_DEVICE_TO_HOST|USB_SETUP_TYPE_CLASS|USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_DEVICE
+#define bmREQ_GET_PORT_STATUS                   USB_SETUP_DEVICE_TO_HOST|USB_SETUP_TYPE_CLASS|USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_OTHER
+#define bmREQ_RESET_TT                          USB_SETUP_HOST_TO_DEVICE|USB_SETUP_TYPE_CLASS|USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_OTHER
+#define bmREQ_SET_HUB_DESCRIPTOR                USB_SETUP_HOST_TO_DEVICE|USB_SETUP_TYPE_CLASS|USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_DEVICE
+#define bmREQ_SET_HUB_FEATURE                   USB_SETUP_HOST_TO_DEVICE|USB_SETUP_TYPE_CLASS|USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_DEVICE
+#define bmREQ_SET_PORT_FEATURE                  USB_SETUP_HOST_TO_DEVICE|USB_SETUP_TYPE_CLASS|USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_OTHER
+#define bmREQ_GET_TT_STATE                      USB_SETUP_DEVICE_TO_HOST|USB_SETUP_TYPE_CLASS|USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_OTHER
+#define bmREQ_STOP_TT                           USB_SETUP_HOST_TO_DEVICE|USB_SETUP_TYPE_CLASS|USB_SETUP_RECIPIENT_OTHER
+
+// Hub Class Requests
+#define HUB_REQUEST_CLEAR_TT_BUFFER             8
+#define HUB_REQUEST_RESET_TT                    9
+#define HUB_REQUEST_GET_TT_STATE                10
+#define HUB_REQUEST_STOP_TT                     11
+
+// Hub Features
+#define HUB_FEATURE_C_HUB_LOCAL_POWER           0
+#define HUB_FEATURE_C_HUB_OVER_CURRENT          1
+#define HUB_FEATURE_PORT_CONNECTION             0
+#define HUB_FEATURE_PORT_ENABLE                 1
+#define HUB_FEATURE_PORT_SUSPEND                2
+#define HUB_FEATURE_PORT_OVER_CURRENT           3
+#define HUB_FEATURE_PORT_RESET                  4
+#define HUB_FEATURE_PORT_POWER                  8
+#define HUB_FEATURE_PORT_LOW_SPEED              9
+#define HUB_FEATURE_C_PORT_CONNECTION           16
+#define HUB_FEATURE_C_PORT_ENABLE               17
+#define HUB_FEATURE_C_PORT_SUSPEND              18
+#define HUB_FEATURE_C_PORT_OVER_CURRENT         19
+#define HUB_FEATURE_C_PORT_RESET                20
+#define HUB_FEATURE_PORT_TEST                   21
+#define HUB_FEATURE_PORT_INDICATOR              22
+
+// Hub Port Test Modes
+#define HUB_PORT_TEST_MODE_J                    1
+#define HUB_PORT_TEST_MODE_K                    2
+#define HUB_PORT_TEST_MODE_SE0_NAK              3
+#define HUB_PORT_TEST_MODE_PACKET               4
+#define HUB_PORT_TEST_MODE_FORCE_ENABLE         5
+
+// Hub Port Indicator Color
+#define HUB_PORT_INDICATOR_AUTO                 0
+#define HUB_PORT_INDICATOR_AMBER                1
+#define HUB_PORT_INDICATOR_GREEN                2
+#define HUB_PORT_INDICATOR_OFF                  3
+
+// Hub Port Status Bitmasks
+#define bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_CONNECTION       0x0001
+#define bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_ENABLE           0x0002
+#define bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_SUSPEND          0x0004
+#define bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_OVER_CURRENT     0x0008
+#define bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_RESET            0x0010
+#define bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_POWER            0x0100
+#define bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_LOW_SPEED        0x0200
+#define bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_HIGH_SPEED       0x0400
+#define bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_TEST             0x0800
+#define bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_INDICATOR        0x1000
+
+// Hub Port Status Change Bitmasks (used one byte instead of two)
+#define bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_C_PORT_CONNECTION     0x0001
+#define bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_C_PORT_ENABLE         0x0002
+#define bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_C_PORT_SUSPEND        0x0004
+#define bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_C_PORT_OVER_CURRENT   0x0008
+#define bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_C_PORT_RESET          0x0010
+
+// Hub Status Bitmasks (used one byte instead of two)
+#define bmHUB_STATUS_LOCAL_POWER_SOURCE         0x01
+#define bmHUB_STATUS_OVER_CURRENT               0x12
+
+// Hub Status Change Bitmasks (used one byte instead of two)
+#define bmHUB_STATUS_C_LOCAL_POWER_SOURCE       0x01
+#define bmHUB_STATUS_C_OVER_CURRENT             0x12
+
+
+// Hub Port Configuring Substates
+#define USB_STATE_HUB_PORT_CONFIGURING          0xb0
+#define USB_STATE_HUB_PORT_POWERED_OFF          0xb1
+#define USB_STATE_HUB_PORT_WAIT_FOR_POWER_GOOD  0xb2
+#define USB_STATE_HUB_PORT_DISCONNECTED         0xb3
+#define USB_STATE_HUB_PORT_DISABLED             0xb4
+#define USB_STATE_HUB_PORT_RESETTING            0xb5
+#define USB_STATE_HUB_PORT_ENABLED              0xb6
+
+// Additional Error Codes
+#define HUB_ERROR_PORT_HAS_BEEN_RESET           0xb1
+
+// The bit mask to check for all necessary state bits
+#define bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_ALL_MAIN              ((0UL | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_C_PORT_CONNECTION | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_C_PORT_ENABLE | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_C_PORT_SUSPEND | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_C_PORT_RESET) << 16) | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_POWER | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_ENABLE | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_CONNECTION | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_SUSPEND)
+
+// Bit mask to check for DISABLED state in HubEvent::bmStatus field
+#define bmHUB_PORT_STATE_CHECK_DISABLED         (0x0000 | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_POWER | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_ENABLE | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_CONNECTION | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_SUSPEND)
+
+// Hub Port States
+#define bmHUB_PORT_STATE_DISABLED               (0x0000 | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_POWER | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_CONNECTION)
+
+// Hub Port Events
+#define bmHUB_PORT_EVENT_CONNECT                (((0UL | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_C_PORT_CONNECTION) << 16) | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_POWER | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_CONNECTION)
+#define bmHUB_PORT_EVENT_DISCONNECT             (((0UL | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_C_PORT_CONNECTION) << 16) | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_POWER)
+#define bmHUB_PORT_EVENT_RESET_COMPLETE         (((0UL | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_C_PORT_RESET) << 16) | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_POWER | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_ENABLE | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_CONNECTION)
+
+#define bmHUB_PORT_EVENT_LS_CONNECT             (((0UL | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_C_PORT_CONNECTION) << 16) | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_POWER | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_CONNECTION | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_LOW_SPEED)
+#define bmHUB_PORT_EVENT_LS_RESET_COMPLETE      (((0UL | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_C_PORT_RESET) << 16) | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_POWER | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_ENABLE | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_CONNECTION | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_LOW_SPEED)
+#define bmHUB_PORT_EVENT_LS_PORT_ENABLED        (((0UL | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_C_PORT_CONNECTION | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_C_PORT_ENABLE) << 16) | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_POWER | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_ENABLE | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_CONNECTION | bmHUB_PORT_STATUS_PORT_LOW_SPEED)
+
+struct HubDescriptor {
+        uint8_t bDescLength; // descriptor length
+        uint8_t bDescriptorType; // descriptor type
+        uint8_t bNbrPorts; // number of ports a hub equiped with
+
+        struct {
+                uint16_t LogPwrSwitchMode : 2;
+                uint16_t CompoundDevice : 1;
+                uint16_t OverCurrentProtectMode : 2;
+                uint16_t TTThinkTime : 2;
+                uint16_t PortIndicatorsSupported : 1;
+                uint16_t Reserved : 8;
+        } __attribute__((packed));
+
+        uint8_t bPwrOn2PwrGood;
+        uint8_t bHubContrCurrent;
+} __attribute__((packed));
+
+struct HubEvent {
+
+        union {
+
+                struct {
+                        uint16_t bmStatus; // port status bits
+                        uint16_t bmChange; // port status change bits
+                } __attribute__((packed));
+                uint32_t bmEvent;
+                uint8_t evtBuff[4];
+        };
+} __attribute__((packed));
+
+class USBHub : USBDeviceConfig {
+        static bool bResetInitiated; // True when reset is triggered
+
+        USB *pUsb; // USB class instance pointer
+
+        EpInfo epInfo[2]; // interrupt endpoint info structure
+
+        uint8_t bAddress; // address
+        uint8_t bNbrPorts; // number of ports
+        //        uint8_t bInitState; // initialization state variable
+        uint32_t qNextPollTime; // next poll time
+        bool bPollEnable; // poll enable flag
+
+        uint8_t CheckHubStatus();
+        uint8_t PortStatusChange(uint8_t port, HubEvent &evt);
+
+public:
+        USBHub(USB *p);
+
+        uint8_t ClearHubFeature(uint8_t fid);
+        uint8_t ClearPortFeature(uint8_t fid, uint8_t port, uint8_t sel = 0);
+        uint8_t GetHubDescriptor(uint8_t index, uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t *dataptr);
+        uint8_t GetHubStatus(uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t* dataptr);
+        uint8_t GetPortStatus(uint8_t port, uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t* dataptr);
+        uint8_t SetHubDescriptor(uint8_t port, uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t* dataptr);
+        uint8_t SetHubFeature(uint8_t fid);
+        uint8_t SetPortFeature(uint8_t fid, uint8_t port, uint8_t sel = 0);
+
+        void PrintHubStatus();
+
+        uint8_t Init(uint8_t parent, uint8_t port, bool lowspeed);
+        uint8_t Release();
+        uint8_t Poll();
+        void ResetHubPort(uint8_t port);
+
+        virtual uint8_t GetAddress() {
+                return bAddress;
+        };
+
+        virtual bool DEVCLASSOK(uint8_t klass) {
+                return (klass == 0x09);
+        }
+
+};
+
+// Clear Hub Feature
+
+inline uint8_t USBHub::ClearHubFeature(uint8_t fid) {
+        return ( pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, bmREQ_CLEAR_HUB_FEATURE, USB_REQUEST_CLEAR_FEATURE, fid, 0, 0, 0, 0, NULL, NULL));
+}
+// Clear Port Feature
+
+inline uint8_t USBHub::ClearPortFeature(uint8_t fid, uint8_t port, uint8_t sel) {
+        return ( pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, bmREQ_CLEAR_PORT_FEATURE, USB_REQUEST_CLEAR_FEATURE, fid, 0, ((0x0000 | port) | (sel << 8)), 0, 0, NULL, NULL));
+}
+// Get Hub Descriptor
+
+inline uint8_t USBHub::GetHubDescriptor(uint8_t index, uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t *dataptr) {
+        return ( pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, bmREQ_GET_HUB_DESCRIPTOR, USB_REQUEST_GET_DESCRIPTOR, index, 0x29, 0, nbytes, nbytes, dataptr, NULL));
+}
+// Get Hub Status
+
+inline uint8_t USBHub::GetHubStatus(uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t* dataptr) {
+        return ( pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, bmREQ_GET_HUB_STATUS, USB_REQUEST_GET_STATUS, 0, 0, 0x0000, nbytes, nbytes, dataptr, NULL));
+}
+// Get Port Status
+
+inline uint8_t USBHub::GetPortStatus(uint8_t port, uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t* dataptr) {
+        return ( pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, bmREQ_GET_PORT_STATUS, USB_REQUEST_GET_STATUS, 0, 0, port, nbytes, nbytes, dataptr, NULL));
+}
+// Set Hub Descriptor
+
+inline uint8_t USBHub::SetHubDescriptor(uint8_t port, uint16_t nbytes, uint8_t* dataptr) {
+        return ( pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, bmREQ_SET_HUB_DESCRIPTOR, USB_REQUEST_SET_DESCRIPTOR, 0, 0, port, nbytes, nbytes, dataptr, NULL));
+}
+// Set Hub Feature
+
+inline uint8_t USBHub::SetHubFeature(uint8_t fid) {
+        return ( pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, bmREQ_SET_HUB_FEATURE, USB_REQUEST_SET_FEATURE, fid, 0, 0, 0, 0, NULL, NULL));
+}
+// Set Port Feature
+
+inline uint8_t USBHub::SetPortFeature(uint8_t fid, uint8_t port, uint8_t sel) {
+        return ( pUsb->ctrlReq(bAddress, 0, bmREQ_SET_PORT_FEATURE, USB_REQUEST_SET_FEATURE, fid, 0, (((0x0000 | sel) << 8) | port), 0, 0, NULL, NULL));
+}
+
+void PrintHubPortStatus(USB *usbptr, uint8_t addr, uint8_t port, bool print_changes = false);
+
+#endif // __USBHUB_H__
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/version_helper.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/version_helper.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0cb3b4adc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/version_helper.h
@@ -0,0 +1,194 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2011 Circuits At Home, LTD. All rights reserved.
+
+This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+Contact information
+-------------------
+
+Circuits At Home, LTD
+Web      :  http://www.circuitsathome.com
+e-mail   :  support@circuitsathome.com
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Universal Arduino(tm) "IDE" fixups.
+ * Includes fixes for versions as low as 0023, used by Digilent.
+ */
+
+#if defined(ARDUINO) && ARDUINO >=100
+#include <Arduino.h>
+#else
+#include <WProgram.h>
+#include <pins_arduino.h>
+#ifdef __AVR__
+#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+#include <avr/io.h>
+#else
+#endif
+#endif
+
+#ifndef __PGMSPACE_H_
+#define __PGMSPACE_H_ 1
+
+#include <inttypes.h>
+
+#ifndef PROGMEM
+#define PROGMEM
+#endif
+#ifndef PGM_P
+#define PGM_P  const char *
+#endif
+#ifndef PSTR
+#define PSTR(str) (str)
+#endif
+#ifndef F
+#define F(str) (str)
+#endif
+#ifndef _SFR_BYTE
+#define _SFR_BYTE(n) (n)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef memchr_P
+#define memchr_P(str, c, len) memchr((str), (c), (len))
+#endif
+#ifndef memcmp_P
+#define memcmp_P(a, b, n) memcmp((a), (b), (n))
+#endif
+#ifndef memcpy_P
+#define memcpy_P(dest, src, num) memcpy((dest), (src), (num))
+#endif
+#ifndef memmem_P
+#define memmem_P(a, alen, b, blen) memmem((a), (alen), (b), (blen))
+#endif
+#ifndef memrchr_P
+#define memrchr_P(str, val, len) memrchr((str), (val), (len))
+#endif
+#ifndef strcat_P
+#define strcat_P(dest, src) strcat((dest), (src))
+#endif
+#ifndef strchr_P
+#define strchr_P(str, c) strchr((str), (c))
+#endif
+#ifndef strchrnul_P
+#define strchrnul_P(str, c) strchrnul((str), (c))
+#endif
+#ifndef strcmp_P
+#define strcmp_P(a, b) strcmp((a), (b))
+#endif
+#ifndef strcpy_P
+#define strcpy_P(dest, src) strcpy((dest), (src))
+#endif
+#ifndef strcasecmp_P
+#define strcasecmp_P(a, b) strcasecmp((a), (b))
+#endif
+#ifndef strcasestr_P
+#define strcasestr_P(a, b) strcasestr((a), (b))
+#endif
+#ifndef strlcat_P
+#define strlcat_P(dest, src, len) strlcat((dest), (src), (len))
+#endif
+#ifndef strlcpy_P
+#define strlcpy_P(dest, src, len) strlcpy((dest), (src), (len))
+#endif
+#ifndef strlen_P
+#define strlen_P(s) strlen((const char *)(s))
+#endif
+#ifndef strnlen_P
+#define strnlen_P(str, len) strnlen((str), (len))
+#endif
+#ifndef strncmp_P
+#define strncmp_P(a, b, n) strncmp((a), (b), (n))
+#endif
+#ifndef strncasecmp_P
+#define strncasecmp_P(a, b, n) strncasecmp((a), (b), (n))
+#endif
+#ifndef strncat_P
+#define strncat_P(a, b, n) strncat((a), (b), (n))
+#endif
+#ifndef strncpy_P
+#define strncpy_P(a, b, n) strncmp((a), (b), (n))
+#endif
+#ifndef strpbrk_P
+#define strpbrk_P(str, chrs) strpbrk((str), (chrs))
+#endif
+#ifndef strrchr_P
+#define strrchr_P(str, c) strrchr((str), (c))
+#endif
+#ifndef strsep_P
+#define strsep_P(strp, delim) strsep((strp), (delim))
+#endif
+#ifndef strspn_P
+#define strspn_P(str, chrs) strspn((str), (chrs))
+#endif
+#ifndef strstr_P
+#define strstr_P(a, b) strstr((a), (b))
+#endif
+#ifndef sprintf_P
+#define sprintf_P(s, ...) sprintf((s), __VA_ARGS__)
+#endif
+#ifndef vfprintf_P
+#define vfprintf_P(s, ...) vfprintf((s), __VA_ARGS__)
+#endif
+#ifndef printf_P
+#define printf_P(...) printf(__VA_ARGS__)
+#endif
+#ifndef snprintf_P
+#define snprintf_P(s, n, ...) ((s), (n), __VA_ARGS__)
+#endif
+#ifndef vsprintf_P
+#define vsprintf_P(s, ...) ((s),__VA_ARGS__)
+#endif
+#ifndef vsnprintf_P
+#define vsnprintf_P(s, n, ...) ((s), (n),__VA_ARGS__)
+#endif
+#ifndef fprintf_P
+#define fprintf_P(s, ...) ((s), __VA_ARGS__)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef pgm_read_byte
+#define pgm_read_byte(addr) (*(const unsigned char *)(addr))
+#endif
+#ifndef pgm_read_word
+#define pgm_read_word(addr) (*(const unsigned short *)(addr))
+#endif
+#ifndef pgm_read_dword
+#define pgm_read_dword(addr) (*(const unsigned long *)(addr))
+#endif
+#ifndef pgm_read_float
+#define pgm_read_float(addr) (*(const float *)(addr))
+#endif
+
+#ifndef pgm_read_byte_near
+#define pgm_read_byte_near(addr) pgm_read_byte(addr)
+#endif
+#ifndef pgm_read_word_near
+#define pgm_read_word_near(addr) pgm_read_word(addr)
+#endif
+#ifndef pgm_read_dword_near
+#define pgm_read_dword_near(addr) pgm_read_dword(addr)
+#endif
+#ifndef pgm_read_float_near
+#define pgm_read_float_near(addr) pgm_read_float(addr)
+#endif
+#ifndef pgm_read_byte_far
+#define pgm_read_byte_far(addr) pgm_read_byte(addr)
+#endif
+#ifndef pgm_read_word_far
+#define pgm_read_word_far(addr) pgm_read_word(addr)
+#endif
+#ifndef pgm_read_dword_far
+#define pgm_read_dword_far(addr) pgm_read_dword(addr)
+#endif
+#ifndef pgm_read_float_far
+#define pgm_read_float_far(addr) pgm_read_float(addr)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef pgm_read_pointer
+#define pgm_read_pointer
+#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/xboxEnums.h b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/xboxEnums.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..84b137bb6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/usb_hid/USB_Host_Shield_2.0/xboxEnums.h
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 2012 Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics. All rights reserved.
+
+ This software may be distributed and modified under the terms of the GNU
+ General Public License version 2 (GPL2) as published by the Free Software
+ Foundation and appearing in the file GPL2.TXT included in the packaging of
+ this file. Please note that GPL2 Section 2[b] requires that all works based
+ on this software must also be made publicly available under the terms of
+ the GPL2 ("Copyleft").
+
+ Contact information
+ -------------------
+
+ Kristian Lauszus, TKJ Electronics
+ Web      :  http://www.tkjelectronics.com
+ e-mail   :  kristianl@tkjelectronics.com
+ */
+
+#ifndef _xboxenums_h
+#define _xboxenums_h
+
+#include "controllerEnums.h"
+
+/** Enum used to set special LED modes supported by the Xbox controller. */
+enum LEDModeEnum {
+        ROTATING = 0x0A,
+        FASTBLINK = 0x0B,
+        SLOWBLINK = 0x0C,
+        ALTERNATING = 0x0D,
+};
+
+/** Used to set the LEDs on the controllers */
+const uint8_t XBOX_LEDS[] PROGMEM = {
+        0x00, // OFF
+        0x02, // LED1
+        0x03, // LED2
+        0x04, // LED3
+        0x05, // LED4
+        0x01, // ALL - Used to blink all LEDs
+};
+/** Buttons on the controllers */
+const uint16_t XBOX_BUTTONS[] PROGMEM = {
+        0x0100, // UP
+        0x0800, // RIGHT
+        0x0200, // DOWN
+        0x0400, // LEFT
+
+        0x2000, // BACK
+        0x1000, // START
+        0x4000, // L3
+        0x8000, // R3
+
+        0, 0, // Skip L2 and R2 as these are analog buttons
+        0x0001, // L1
+        0x0002, // R1
+
+        0x0020, // B
+        0x0010, // A
+        0x0040, // X
+        0x0080, // Y
+
+        0x0004, // XBOX
+        0x0008, // SYNC
+};
+
+#endif